initial commit of ebook 10803HEADmain

6 files changed, 61777 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/10803-8.txt b/old/10803-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..26bfc65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/10803-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20663 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Vol. II, by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Vol. II
+       Arranged in Systematic Order: Forming a Complete History of the
+       Origin and Progress of Navigation, Discovery, and Commerce,
+       by Sea and Land, from the Earliest Ages to the Present Time
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: January 23, 2004 [EBook #10803]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Allen Siddle and PG Distributed Proofreaders.
+This file was produced from images generously made available by the
+Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions
+
+
+
+
+
+[Transcriber's Note: The spelling inconsistencies of the original have
+been retained in this etext.]
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,
+
+ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:
+
+FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF NAVIGATION,
+DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE, BY SEA AND LAND, FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE
+PRESENT TIME.
+
+
+BY
+
+ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.
+
+VOL. II.
+
+
+WILLIAM BLACKWOOD, EDINBURGH:
+
+AND T. CADELL, LONDON.
+
+MDCCCXXIV.
+
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS OF VOL. II.
+
+
+PART. I.--(Continued.)
+
+CHAP.
+XX. Account of various early Pilgrimages from England to the Holy Land,
+    between the years 1097, and 1107.
+
+XXI. Discovery of Madeira
+
+XXII. Account of the Discovery and Conquest of the Canary Islands
+
+
+
+PART II.
+
+General Voyages and Travels, chiefly of Discovery; from the era of Don
+Henry Prince of Portugal, in 1412, to that of George III. in 1760.
+
+BOOK I. History of the Discoveries of the Portuguese along the Coast of
+    Africa, and of their Discovery of and Conquests in India, from 1412 to
+    1505[A]
+
+[A] This title was omitted to be inserted in its proper
+    place, and may be supplied in writing on the blank page opposite to
+    page 23 of this volume.
+
+
+CHAP.
+I. Summary of the Discoveries of the World, from their first original, to
+    the year 1555, by Antonio Galvano
+
+II. Journey of Ambrose Contarini, Ambassador from the Republic of Venice,
+    to Uzun-Hassan King of Persia, in the years 1473, 4, 5, and 6; written
+    by himself
+
+III. Voyages of Discovery by the Portuguese along the Western Coast of
+    Africa, during the life, and under the direction of Don Henry
+
+IV. Original Journals of the Voyages of Cada Mosto, and Pedro de Cintra,
+    to the Coast of Africa; the former in the years 1455 and 1406, and the
+    latter soon afterwards
+
+V. Continuation of the Portuguese Discoveries along the Coast of Africa,
+    from the death of Don Henry in 1463, to the Discovery of the Cape of
+    Good Hope in 1486
+
+VI. History of the Discovery and Conquest of India by the Portuguese,
+    between the years 1497 and 1505, from the original Portuguese of
+    Hernan Lopez de Castaneda
+
+VII. Letters from Lisbon in the beginning of the Sixteenth Century,
+    respecting the then recent Discovery of the Route by Sea to India, and
+    the Indian trade
+
+
+_Note_. In p. 292 of this volume, 1, 2 and 18, the date of 1525
+ought to have been 1505.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+
+
+
+PART I.
+
+(CONTINUED.)
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. XX.
+
+_Account of Various early Pilgrimages from England to the Holy Land;
+between the years 1097 and 1107_[1].
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+The subsequent account of several English pilgrimages to the Holy Land.
+
+
+[1] Hakluyt, I. p. 44. et sequ.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_The Voyage of Gutuere, or Godwera, an English Lady, towards the Holy
+Land, about 1097._
+
+While the Christian army, under Godfrey of Buillon, was marching through
+Asia Minor from Iconium, in Lycaonia, by Heraclea, to Marasia, or
+Maresch[1], Gutuere, or Godwera, the wife of Baldwin, the brother of the
+Duke of Lorain, who had long laboured under heavy sickness, became so
+extremely ill, that the army encamped on her account near Marash, for
+three days, when she expired. This lady is said to have been of noble
+English parentage, and was honourably interred at Antioch in Syria[2].
+
+
+[1] Now Konieh, Erekli, and Marash; the two former in Karamania,
+the latter in Syria or Room.--E.
+
+[2] For this story, Hakluyt quotes Hist Bel. Sacr. lib. iii. c.
+xvii. and Chron. Hierosol. lib. iii c. xxvii.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_The Voyage of Edgar Aethling to Jerusalem, in 1102_[1].
+
+Edgar, commonly called Aethling, was son of Edward, the son of Edmond
+Ironside, who was the brother of Edward the Confessor, to whom
+consequently Edgar was nephew; Edgar travelled to Jerusalem in 1102, in
+company with Robert, the son of Godwin, most valiant knight. Being
+present in Rama, when King Baldwin was there besieged by the Turks, and
+not being able to endure the hardships of the siege, he was delivered
+from that danger, and escaped through the midst of the hostile camp,
+chiefly through the aid of Robert; who, going before him, made a lane
+with his sword, slaying numbers of the Turks in his heroic progress.
+Towards the close of this chivalric enterprize, and becoming more fierce
+and eager as he advanced, Robert unfortunately dropt his sword; and while
+stooping to recover his weapon, he was oppressed by the multitude, who
+threw themselves upon him, and made him prisoner. From thence, as some
+say, Robert was carried to Babylon in Egypt, or Cairo; and refusing to
+renounce his faith in CHRIST, he was tied to a stake in the market-place,
+and transpierced with arrows. Edgar, having thus lost his valiant knight,
+returned towards Europe, and was much honoured with many gifts by the
+emperors both of Greece and Germany, both of whom would gladly have
+retained him at their courts, on account of his high lineage; but he
+despised all things, from regard to his native England, into which he
+returned: And, having been subjected to many changes of fortune, as we
+have elsewhere related, he _now_ spends his extreme old age in private
+obscurity.
+
+
+[1] Hakluyt. I. 44. W. Malmsb. III. 58.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Some Circumstances respecting the Siege of Joppa, about the year_
+1102[1].
+
+In the second year of Baldwin, king of Jerusalem, Joppa was besieged by
+the Turks of Cairo; and Baldwin embarked from the town of Assur, in a
+vessel called a _buss_, commanded by one Goderic an English freebooter,
+intending to proceed to the relief of the besieged. Fixing the royal
+banner aloft on a spear, that it might be seen of the Christians, they
+sailed boldly towards Joppa, with but a small company of armed men. The
+king knew that the Christians in Joppa were almost hopeless of his life
+and safety, and he feared they might shamefully abandon the defence of
+the place, or be constrained to surrender, unless revived by his presence.
+On perceiving the approach of the royal banner of King Baldwin, the naval
+forces of the Turks, to the number of twenty gallies and thirteen ships,
+usually called _Cazh_, endeavoured to surround and capture the single
+vessel in which he was embarked. But, by the aid of GOD, the billows of
+the sea raged against them, while the kings ship glided easily and
+swiftly through the waves, eluding the enemy, and arrived in safety into
+the haven of Joppa, to the great joy of the Christians, who had mourned
+him as if dead.
+
+While the Saracens continued the siege of Joppa, 200 sail of Christian
+vessels arrived there, with pilgrims who wished to perform their
+devotions at Jerusalem. Of these, the chief leaders were Bernard Witrazh
+of Galatia, Hardin of England, Otho of Roges, Haderwerck, one of the
+principal nobles of Westphalia, and others. This power, by the blessing
+of God, arrived to succour the distressed Christians then besieged in
+Joppa, on the 3d of July 1102, in the second year of Baldwin king of
+Jerusalem. When the numerous army of the Saracens saw that the Christians,
+thus reinforced, boldly faced them without the walls, they removed their
+tents, during the night, above a mile from the town, that they might
+consider whether to retreat to Ascalon, or to continue to harass the
+citizens of Joppa with frequent assaults. But they confided in their
+numbers, and continued to annoy the Christians by severe and repeated
+attacks.
+
+Having allowed three days rest and refreshment to this powerful
+reinforcement, Baldwin issued out from Joppa early in the morning of the
+sixth of July, to the martial sound of trumpets and cornets, with a
+strong force, both of foot and horse, marching directly toward the
+Saracens, with loud shouts, and attacked their army with great spirit.
+The land attack was assisted by the Christian navy, which approached the
+shore, making a horrible noise, and distracting the attention of the
+Saracens, who feared to be attacked in flank and rear. After a sharp
+encounter, the Saracens fled towards Ascalon, many being slain in the
+battle and pursuit, and others drowned, by leaping into the sea to avoid
+being slain. In this battle 3000 of the Saracens perished, with a very
+small loss on the side of the Christians; and the city of Joppa was
+delivered from its enemies.
+
+
+[1] Hakluyt, I.45. Chron. Hierosol. IX. ix. xi. xii.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Of the Transactions of certain English, Danish, and Flemish Pilgrims in
+the Holy Land, in 1107_[1].
+
+In the seventh year of King Baldwin, a large fleet from England,
+containing above 7000 men, many of whom were soldiers, arrived at the
+harbour of Joppa, along with whom came other warriors from Denmark,
+Flanders, and Antwerp. Having received permission and safe conduct from
+King Baldwin, together with a strong band of armed men as a safeguard,
+they arrived in safety at Jerusalem and all the other places of devotion,
+free from all assaults and ambushes of the Gentiles; and having paid
+their vows unto the Lord in the church of the Holy Sepulchre, they
+returned with great joy, and without molestation, to Joppa[2]. Finding
+King Baldwin in that place, they made offer to assist him in any military
+enterprize; for which offer he gave them great commendations, saying,
+That he could not give an immediate answer, without consulting the
+patriarch and barons, of his kingdom.
+
+He therefore called together the Lord Patriarch, Hugh of Tabaria, Gunfrid
+the governor of the Tower of David, and the other principal officers of
+the kingdom of Jerusalem, to consult together in the city of Rames, how
+best to employ this proferred assistance of so considerable a body of
+volunteers.
+
+In that assembly, it was agreed upon to lay siege to the city of Sagitta,
+otherwise called Sidon; upon which, having directed every one of the
+nobles to go home, that they might provide armour and all other
+necessaries for the siege, he sent messengers to the English, requiring
+them not to remove their fleet and army from Joppa, but to wait there for
+his farther commands; informing them, that he and his nobles had resolved,
+with their aid, to lay siege to the city of Sidon, but it would require
+some time to provide the necessary engines and warlike instruments, for
+assaulting the walls of that place. The pilgrims answered, that they
+would attend his orders at Joppa, promising to be obedient to him in all
+things, even unto death. The king went soon afterwards, with the
+patriarch and all his attendants to the city of Acre; where, during forty
+days, he was busily employed in the construction of engines, and many
+different kinds of warlike instruments, and of every thing necessary for
+the intended siege.
+
+When this intended expedition came to the knowledge of the inhabitants of
+Sidon, and they understood that a powerful army of pilgrims lay in
+readiness at Joppa, to assist the king of Jerusalem, they were afraid of
+being subdued and destroyed by the Christians, as Caesaria, Assur, Acre,
+Cayphas, and Tabaria had already been; and they sent secret emissaries to
+the king, offering a large sum of money in gold byzants, and a
+considerable yearly tribute, on condition that he would spare their lives
+and refrain from the intended siege. After a lengthened negotiation,
+during which the inhabitants of Sidon rose considerably in their offers,
+the king, being in great straits for means to discharge the pay of his
+soldiers, hearkened willingly to the offers of the Sidonians; yet, afraid
+of reproach from the Christians, he dared not openly to consent to their
+proposals.
+
+In the meantime, Hugh of Tabaria, who was a principal warrior among the
+Christians of Palestine, and indefatigable in assaulting the pagans on
+all occasions, having gathered together 200 horse and 400 infantry,
+suddenly invaded the country of a great Saracen lord, named Suet, on the
+frontiers of the territory of Damascus, where he took a rich booty of
+gold and silver and many cattle, which would have proved of great
+importance in assisting the army at the siege of Sidon. On his return
+with this prey by the city of Belinas, otherwise called Caesaria Philippi,
+the Turks of Damascus, with the Saracen inhabitants of the country,
+gathered together in great numbers, and pursued the troops of Hugh, that
+they might recover the booty. Coming up with them in the mountains, over
+which the infantry belonging to Hugh of Tabaria were driving their prey,
+the Turks prevailed over the Christians, and the plunder was recovered.
+On receiving this intelligence, Hugh, who happened to be at some distance,
+hastened with his cavalry to succour his footmen, and to recover the
+spoil: But happening to fall in with the Turks in a strait and craggy
+place, and rushing heedlessly among the enemy, unprovided with his armour,
+he was shot in the back by an arrow, which pierced his liver, and he died
+on the spot. His soldiers brought back the dead body of Hugh to the city
+of Nazareth near Mount Thabor, where he was honourably interred. Gerard,
+the brother of Hugh, lay at this time sick of a dangerous illness, and
+died within eight days afterwards.
+
+Taking advantage of the death of these two famous princes, King Baldwin
+agreed to receive the money which had been offered to him by the city of
+Sidon, yet kept his intentions of making peace private, and sent to Joppa,
+desiring the chiefs of the English, Danes, and Flemings, to come with
+their fleet and army to Acre, as if he had meant to prosecute the siege.
+When they arrived, he represented to their chiefs the great loss he had
+sustained by the death of two of his chief warriors, on which account, he
+was constrained to defer the siege to a more convenient opportunity, and
+must now dismiss his army. On this the strangers saluted the king very
+respectfully, and, embarking in their ships, returned to their own
+countries.
+
+
+[1] Hakluyt, I. 47. Chron. Hierosol. lib. x.
+
+[2] Though not mentioned in the text, it seems presumable that these
+pilgrims deemed it necessary for them to proceed unarmed in execution of
+their devotions, under an escort.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_The Expedition of William Longespee, or Long-sword, Earl of Salisbury,
+in the year 1248, under the Banners of St Louis, King of France, against
+the Saracens_[1].
+
+When Louis, King of France, went against the Saracens in 1248, William
+Earl of Salisbury, with the Bishop of Worcester, and other great men of
+the realm of England, accompanied him in the holy warfare[2]. About the
+beginning of October 1249, the French king assaulted and took the city of
+Damietta, which was esteemed the principal strong-hold of the Saracens in
+Egypt; and having provided the place with a sufficient garrison, under
+the Duke of Burgundy, he removed his camp, to penetrate farther eastwards.
+In this army William Earl of Salisbury served, with a chosen band of
+Englishmen under his especial command; but the French entertained a great
+dislike to him and his people, whom they flouted upon all occasions,
+calling them English _tails_[3], and other opprobrious names, insomuch,
+that the King of France had much ado to keep peace between them. This
+quarrel originated from the following circumstance: Not far from
+Alexandria there was a strong castle belonging to the Saracens[4], in
+which they had placed some of their principal ladies, and much treasure;
+which fortress the earl and his English followers had the good fortune to
+take, more by dexterous policy than by open force of arms, through which
+capture he and his people were much enriched; and when the French came to
+the knowledge of this exploit, which had not been previously communicated
+to them, they were much enraged against the English, and could never
+speak well of them afterwards.
+
+Not long after this, the earl got secret intelligence of a rich caravan
+of merchants belonging to the Saracens, who were travelling to a certain
+fair which was to be held near Alexandria, with a multitude of camels,
+asses, and mules, and many carts, all richly laden with silks, precious
+jewels, spices, gold, silver, and other commodities, besides provisions
+and other matters of which the soldiers were then in great want. Without
+giving notice of this to the rest of the Christian army, the earl
+gathered all the English troops, and fell by night upon the caravan,
+killing many of the people, and making himself master of the whole carts
+and baggage cattle with their drivers, which he brought with him to the
+Christian camp, losing only one soldier in the skirmish, and eight of his
+servants, some of whom were only wounded and brought home to be cured.
+When this was known in the camp, the Frenchmen, who had loitered in their
+tents while the earl and his people were engaged in the expedition, came
+forth and forcibly took to themselves the whole of this spoil, finding
+great fault with the earl and the English for leaving the camp without
+orders from the general, contrary to the discipline of war; though the
+earl insisted that he had done nothing but what he would readily justify,
+and that his intentions were to have divided the spoil among the whole
+army. But this being of no avail, and very much displeased at being
+deprived in so cowardly a manner of what he had so adventurously gained,
+he made his complaint to the king; and being successfully opposed there
+by the pride of the Count of Artois, the kings brother, who thwarted his
+claims with disdainful spite, he declared that he would serve no longer
+in their army, and bidding farewell to the king, he and his people broke
+up from the army and marched for Achon[5]. Upon their departure, the
+Count d'Artois said that the French army was well rid of these tailed
+English; which words, spoken in despite, were ill taken by many good men,
+even of their own army. But not long after, when the governor of Cairo,
+who was offended with the Soldan, offered to deliver that place to the
+French king, and even gave him instructions now he might best conduct
+himself to accomplish that enterprize, the king sent a message in all
+haste to the Earl of Salisbury, requesting him to return to the army,
+under promise of redressing all his grievances; on which he came back and
+rejoined the French army.
+
+The king of France now marched towards Cairo, and came to the great river
+Nile, on the other side of which the Soldan had encamped with his army,
+on purpose to dispute the passage. At this time, there was a Saracen in
+the service of the Count of Artois, who had been lately converted to the
+Christian faith, and who offered to point out a shallow ford in the river,
+by which the army might easily cross over. Upon receiving this
+intelligence, Artois and the master of the Knights Templars, with about a
+third of the army, crossed to the other side, and were followed by
+Salisbury and the English. These being all joined, made an assault upon a
+part of the Saracen army which remained in the camp, and overthrew them,
+the Soldan being then at some distance with the greater part of his army.
+
+After this easy victory, Artois was so puffed up with pride and elated by
+success, that he believed nothing could withstand him, and would needs
+advance without waiting for the coming up of the main body of the army
+under the king of France, vainly believing that he was able with the
+power he had to conquer the whole force of the Saracens. The master of
+the Templars, and other experienced officers, endeavoured to dissuade him
+from this rash conduct; advising him rather to return to the main army,
+satisfied with the signal advantage he had already achieved; that thereby
+the whole army of the Christians might act in concert, and be the better
+able to guard against the danger of any ambushes or other stratagems of
+war, that might have been devised for their destruction. They represented
+to him that the horses of this vanguard were already tired, and the
+troops without food; and besides, that their numbers were utterly unable
+to withstand the vastly superior multitude of the enemy; who besides,
+having now obviously to fight for their last stake, the capital of their
+dominions, might be expected to exert their utmost efforts. To this
+salutary counsel, the proud earl arrogantly answered with opprobrious
+taunts; reviling the whole Templars as dastardly cowards and betrayers of
+their country, and even alleged that the Holy Land of the Cross might
+easily be won to Christendom, if it were not for the rebellious spirit of
+the Templars and Hospitallers, and their followers: which, indeed, was a
+common belief among many. To these contumelious remarks, the master of
+the Templars angrily desired him, in his own name and that of his
+followers, to display his ensign when and where he dared, and he should
+find them as ready to follow as he to lead. The Earl of Salisbury now
+remonstrated with Artois, advising him to listen to these experienced
+persons, who were much better acquainted with the country and people than
+he could be; and endeavoured to convince him that their advice was
+discreet and worthy to be followed. He then addressed his discourse to
+the master of the Templars, prudently endeavouring to sooth his anger
+against the arrogance of the Count of Artois. But Artois cut him short,
+exclaiming in anger with many oaths, "Away with these cowardly Englishmen
+with tails; the army would be much better rid of these tailed people;"
+and many other scandalous and disdainful expressions. To this the English
+earl replied, "Well, Earl Robert, wherever you dare set your foot, my
+steps shall go as far as yours; and I believe we shall go this day where
+you shall not dare to come near the tails of our horses."
+
+And it so happened as Earl William said: For Earl Robert of Artois
+persisted to march forward against the Soldan, vainly hoping to win all
+the glory to himself, before the coming up of the main body of the host.
+His first enterprize was ordering an attack on a small castle, or
+fortified village, called Mansor; whence a number of the villagers ran
+out, on seeing the approach of the Christians, making a great outcry,
+which came to the ears of the Soldan, who was much nearer with his army
+than had been supposed. In the mean time, the Christians made an assault
+on Mansor with too little precaution, and were repulsed with considerable
+loss, many of them being slain by large stones, thrown upon them as they
+entered the place; by which the army not only lost a considerable number
+of men, but was much dispirited by this unexpected repulse.
+
+Immediately on the back of this discomfiture, the Soldan came in sight
+with his whole army; and seeing the Christians in this divided state,
+brother separated from brother, joyfully seized the opportunity he had
+long wished for, and inclosing them on all sides, that none might escape,
+attacked them with great fury. In this situation, the Earl of Artois sore
+repented of his headstrong rashness, when it was too late; and, seeing
+Earl William Longespee fighting bravely against the chief brunt of the
+enemy, he called out to him in a cowardly manner to flee, as God fought
+against them. But William bravely answered, "God forbid that my father's
+son should flee from the face of a Saracen." Earl Robert turned out of
+the fight, and fled away, thinking to escape from death or captivity by
+the swiftness of his horse; and taking the river Thafnis[6], sank through
+the weight of his armour, and was drowned. On the flight of Earl Robert,
+the French troops lost heart, and began to give ground: But William
+Longespee, bearing up manfully against the whole force of the enemy,
+stood firm as long as he was able, slaying and wounding many of the
+Saracens. At length, his horse being killed, and his legs maimed, he fell
+to the ground; yet he continued to mangle their legs and feet, till at
+last he was slain with many wounds, being finally stoned to death by the
+Saracens. After his death, the Saracens set upon the remainder of the
+army, which they had surrounded on every side, and destroyed them all, so
+that scarce a single man remained alive. Of the whole, only two templars,
+one hospitaller, and one common soldier escaped, to bring the melancholy
+tidings to the king of France. Thus by the imprudent and foolish rashness
+of Earl Robert, the French troops were utterly discomfited, and the
+valiant English knight overpowered and slain, to the grief of all the
+Christians, and the glory of the Saracens; and, as it afterwards fell out,
+to the entire ruin of the whole French army.
+
+
+[1] Hakluyt, I. 70.
+
+[2] Hakluyt dates this expedition in the 32d year of the reign of Henry
+    III. of England. He mentions, in a former passage, I. p. 59. that the
+    same Earl of Salisbury, accompanied Richard Earl of Cornwall, in the
+    23d year of the same kings reign into Syria against the Saracens, with
+    many other English of note, where they performed good service against
+    the unbelievers, but gives no relation of particulars.--E.
+
+[3] The meaning of this term of reproach does not appear; unless,
+    from some after circumstances, it may have proceeded from their horses
+    having long tails, while those of the French were dockt.--E.
+
+[4] Probably Aboukir.--E.
+
+[5] St John d'Acre.--E.
+
+[6] This is probably meant for that branch of the Nile which
+    they had previously crossed on their way to Mansor.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. XXI.
+
+_Discovery of Madeira_[1].
+
+Although the Era of modern discovery certainly commenced under the
+auspicious direction of Don Henry of Portugal, who first conceived and
+executed the sublime idea of extending the knowledge and commerce of the
+globe, by a judicious series of maritime, expeditions expressly for the
+purpose of discovery; yet as Madeira is said to have been visited, and
+the Canaries were actually discovered and settled before that era, it
+appears necessary to give a previous account of these discoveries, before
+proceeding to the second part of this work.
+
+Several authors have left accounts of the real or pretended original
+discovery of this island of Madeira, all of whom concur in asserting that
+it was first discovered by an Englishman. Juan de Barros, the Livy of
+Portugal, mentions it briefly in the first decade of his Asia. The
+history of this discovery was written in Latin, by Doctor Manoel Clemente,
+and dedicated to Pope Clement V. Manoel Tome composed a Latin poem on the
+subject, which he intitled _Insulana_. Antonio Galvano mentions it in a
+treatise of discoveries, made chiefly by the Spaniards and Portuguese
+previously to the year 1550[2]. Manoel de Faria y Sousa, the illustrious
+commentator of Camoens, cites Galvano in illustration of the fifth stanza
+in the fifth book of the immortal Lusiad, and likewise gives an account
+of this discovery in his Portuguese Asia. But the earliest and most
+complete relation of this discovery was composed by Francisco Alcaforado,
+who was esquire to Don Henry the _infant_ or prince of Portugal, the
+first great promoter of maritime discoveries, and to whom he presented
+his work. No person was more capable of giving an exact account of that
+singular event than Alcaforado, as he was one of those who assisted in
+making the second discovery. His work was first published in Portuguese
+by Don Francisco Manoel, and was afterwards published in French at Paris
+in 1671[3]. From this French edition the following account is extracted,
+because the original Portuguese has not come to our knowledge, neither
+can we say when that was printed; but as the anonymous French translator
+remarked, that "Don Francisco _keeps_ the original MS. with great care,"
+it may be concluded, that the Portuguese impression did not long precede
+the French translation. The French translator acknowledges that he has
+altered the style, which was extremely florid and poetical, and has
+expunged several useless and tedious digressions, etymologies,
+reflections, and comparisons; but declares that he has strictly presented,
+the truth and substance of the history, so as not to vary from it in the
+least, or to omit the smallest material circumstance.
+
+It is remarkable that there is no mention whatever in any of the English
+histories of Machin, Macham, or Marcham, the supposed author of this
+discovery; so that Hakluyt was beholden to Antonio Galvano for the
+imperfect account he gives of that transaction[4]. By the following
+abstract the complete history becomes our own, and we shall be no longer
+strangers to an event which has for several ages, rendered an Englishman
+famous in foreign countries, while wholly unknown in his own. It must not,
+however, be omitted to observe, that some objections may be stated
+against the authenticity of this history, on account of certain
+circumstances which do not quadrate with the time assigned for Machin's
+voyage by the author. From these it is obvious, either that the relation
+given by Alcaforado is not genuine, or that it has been interpolated. How
+far this objection may be admitted, without prejudice to the authority of
+the whole story, must be left to the judgment of our readers; we shall
+only add, that so far as relates to Macham it agrees with the tradition
+of the inhabitants of Madeira.
+
+According to Alcaforada, Juan Gonsalvo Zarco, a gentleman of the
+household of Don Henry, being sent out by that prince upon an expedition
+of discovery to the coast of Africa, made prize, in the year 1420, of a
+Spanish vessel filled with redeemed captives, on their way from Morocco
+to Spain. In this vessel there was one John de Morales, an experienced
+and able pilot, whom he detained as an acceptable present to his master
+Don Henry, and set all the rest at liberty. Morales on being made
+acquainted with the cause of his detention, entered freely into the
+service of the prince, and gave an account to Gonsalvo of the adventures
+of Machin, and the situation and land-marks of the new discovered island,
+all of which he had learnt from certain English captives in the jails of
+Morocco, who had accompanied Macham, or Machin, in his expedition.
+
+The year of this extraordinary adventure is not mentioned by Galvano, who
+only says, that in 1344, Pedro IV. reigning in Arragon, the chronicles of
+his age reported, that about this time the island of Madeira was
+discovered by one Macham, an Englishman. It must be confessed that an
+objection arises against this history which is not easily removed. We are
+told that, immediately after the death of Macham, his companions sailed
+over to Morocco, and that Morales was in prison when they arrived.
+Supposing the discovery by Macham to have been made about 1344, as
+related by Galvano, from the Castilian chronicles, Morales must have been
+no less than seventy-six years a prisoner when redeemed, and when he was
+detained by Gonsalvo in 1420. Herbert places the adventure of Macham in
+1328, which would increase the captivity of Morales to ninety-two years.
+Alcaforado places the event in the reign of Edward III. of England, which
+began in 1327 and ended in 1378; Even supposing it to have happened in
+the last year of Edward, Morales must have remained forty-two years in
+captivity; which is not only highly improbable, but is even contrary to
+the sense of the historian, who supposes but a small space to have
+elapsed between the two events; besides, the records quoted by Galvano
+are said expressly to assert that Macham went himself into Africa, whence
+he was sent to the king of Castile. This last circumstance may have been
+invented by the Spaniards, to give them a better title to the island of
+Madeira: But the former objection remains in full force, and can only be
+obviated by supposing that either Morales advanced a falsehood in
+asserting, that he had the account of this discovery from the English
+themselves, instead of learning it from the other slaves, among whom the
+tradition might have been current for many years after the event; or
+Alcaforado may have mistaken the report of Morales in this particular.
+The following is the substance of the narrative, as given by Alcaforado.
+
+In the glorious reign of Edward III. Robert a Machin, of Macham, a
+gentleman of the second degree of nobility, whose genius was only
+equalled by his gallantry and courage, beheld and loved the beautiful
+Anna d'Arfet[5]. Their attachment was mutual, but the pleasing indulgence
+of ardent hope gratified and betrayed the secret of their passion. The
+pride of the illustrious family of d'Arfet was insensible to the
+happiness of their daughter, and they preferred the indulgence of their
+own ambition to the voice of love. The feudal tyranny of the age was
+friendly to their cruelty, and a royal warrant seemed to justify the
+vanity of her parent. The consolation of an ingenious mind supported
+Machin under confinement, and enabled him to seek after redress without
+yielding to despondency. On his releasement from prison, he learned that
+the beloved cause of his persecution had been forced to marry a nobleman,
+whose name he could not discover, but who had carried her to his castle
+near Bristol. The friends of Machin made his misfortune their own, and
+one of them had the address to get introduced into the service of the
+afflicted Anna under the character of a groom. The prospect of the ocean
+during their rides, suggested or matured the plan of escape and the hope
+of a secure asylum counteracted the imagined dangers of a passage to the
+coast of France. Under pretence of deriving benefit from the sea air, the
+victim of parental ambition was enabled to elude suspicion, and embarked
+without delay, in a vessel procured for the purpose, along with her lover.
+
+In the successful completion of this anxious design, Machin was alike
+insensible to the unfavourable season of the year, and to the portentous
+signs of an approaching storm, which in a calmer moment he would have
+duly observed. The gradual rising of a gale of wind, rendered the
+astonished fugitives sensible of their rashness; and, as the tempest
+continued to augment, the thick darkness of night completed the horrors
+of their situation. In their confusion, the intended port was missed, or
+could not be attained, and their vessel drove at the mercy of the winds
+and waves. In the morning they found themselves in the midst of an
+unknown ocean, without skill to determine their situation, and destitute
+of knowledge or experience to direct their course towards any known land.
+At length, after twelve anxious mornings had dawned without sight of land,
+with the earliest streaks of day an object dimly appeared to their eager
+watchfulness in the distant horizon, and when the grey haze, which had
+alternately filled them with hope and despondency was dissipated by the
+rising sun, the certainty of having discovered land was welcomed by a
+general burst of joy. A great luxuriancy of trees of unknown species,
+was soon observed to overspread the land, whence unknown birds of
+beautiful plumage came off in flocks to the vessel, and gave the
+appearance of a pleasing dream to their unexpected deliverance.
+
+[Illustration: Chart of North Western Africa]
+
+The boat was hoisted out to examine the new found island, and returned
+with a favourable account. Machin and his friends accompanied their
+trembling charge on shore, leaving the mariners to secure the vessel at
+an anchor. The wilderness and rich scenery of the adjacent country
+possessed great charms to these thankful guests, just escaped from
+apparently inevitable destruction. An opening in the extensive woods,
+which was encircled with laurels and other flowering shrubs, presented a
+delightful retreat to the tempest-worn voyagers; a venerable tree, of
+ancient growth, offered its welcome shade on an adjoining eminence, and
+the first moments of liberty were employed in forming a romantic
+residence, with the abundant materials which nature supplied all around.
+The novelty of every object they beheld, induced curiosity to explore
+their new discovery, and they spent three days in wandering about the
+woods, when the survey was interrupted by an alarming hurricane, which
+came on during the night, and rendered them extremely anxious for the
+safety of their companions, who had been left in charge of the vessel.
+The ensuing morning destroyed all prospect of being ever enabled to get
+away from the island; the vessel had broke from her moorings by the
+violence of the storm, and was wrecked on the coast of Morocco, where all
+on board were immediately seized as slaves.
+
+The afflicted Machin found this last calamity too severe for his
+terrified and afflicted companion to endure. Her susceptible mind and
+tender frame, overcome by the severity of the scenes she had gone through,
+and oppressed by consciousness of having deviated from her duty, sunk
+under her afflictive situation. From the moment it was reported that the
+vessel had disappeared, she became dumb with sorrow, and expired after a
+few days of silent despair. This heavy stroke was too much for the
+inconsolable lover to support; though watched over with the utmost
+solicitude by his afflicted friends, all attempts to administer
+consolation were entirely fruitless, and he expired on the fifth day
+after the death of his beloved mistress. With his parting breath, he
+earnestly enjoined his surviving companions, to deposit his body in the
+same grave, under the venerable tree, which they had so recently made for
+the victim of his temerity; and where the altar which had been raised to
+celebrate their deliverance, would now mark their untimely tomb.
+
+Having performed this painful duty, the surviving companions of these
+unfortunate lovers fixed a large wooden cross over the grave, on which
+they carved the inscription which Machin had composed to record their
+melancholy adventures; and added a request, that if any Christians should
+hereafter visit the spot, they might erect a church in the same place,
+and dedicate it to Christ. Having thus accomplished the dictates of
+friendship and humanity, the survivors fitted out the boat, which had
+remained ashore from their first landing, and put to sea with the
+intention of returning if possible to England; but either from want of
+skill, or owing to the currents and unfavourable winds, they likewise
+were driven on the coast of Morocco, and rejoined their former shipmates
+in slavery among the Moors.
+
+This story is reported in a somewhat different manner by Galvano already
+mentioned. According to him, one Macham, an Englishman, fled from his
+country, about the year 1344, with a woman of whom he was enamoured,
+meaning to retire into Spain; but the vessel in which the lovers were
+embarked, was driven by a storm to the island of Madeira, then
+altogether unknown and uninhabited. The port in which Macham took
+shelter is still called Machico. His mistress being sea-sick, Macham
+landed with her and some of the people, and the ship putting to sea,
+deserted them. Oppressed with sickness and grief at seeing herself in
+this hopeless state of exile, the lady died; and Macham, who was
+extremely fond of her, constructed a chapel or hermitage dedicated to
+Jesus the Saviour, in which he deposited her remains, and engraved both
+their names, and the cause of their arrival, on a rude monument which he
+erected to her memory. He afterwards constructed a boat or canoe, which
+he hollowed out from the trunk of a large tree, in which he, and those of
+his companions who had been left on shore along with him, passed over to
+the opposite coast of Africa, without the aid of oars, sails, or rudder.
+He was made prisoner by the Moors, who presented him to their king, by
+whom he was sent to the king of Castile.
+
+Madeira, in the Portuguese language, or Madera in Spanish, signifies
+_wood_; and this island derived its name from the immense quantity of
+thick and tall trees with which it was covered when first discovered. One
+of the two capitanias, or provinces, into which this island is divided,
+is named Machico, as is likewise the principal town of that district,
+supposed to have originated from the traditionary story of the misfortunes
+of Macham; the other capitania, with its principal town, the capital of
+the island, is named Funchal, from _Funcho_, the Portuguese term for
+Fennel, which abounds on the adjoining rocks.
+
+
+[1] Astley, I. 11. and 586. Clarke, Progress of Maritime Discovery, I. 167.
+    Although in our opinion a mere romance, we have inserted this story,
+    because already admitted into other general collections.--E.
+
+[2] This work was printed in 1560, and was translated by Hakluyt: There is
+    an abstract of it in Purchas his Pilgrims, II. 1671, and it will be
+    found at the commencement of the second part of this Collection.--E.
+
+[3] In small duodecimo and large print, under the title of Relation
+    Historique de la Decouverte de l'Isle de Madere: containing 185 pages,
+    besides twelve pages of preface.--Clarke.
+
+[4] Clarke, Progress of Maritime Discovery, I. 167.
+
+[5] In a note, Mr Clarke says the name of this lady has been supposed by
+    some writers to have been Dorset, corrupted by a foreign orthography
+    into D'Orset, and thence into D'Arfet. It may have been D' Arcy.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. XXI.
+
+_Account of the Discovery and Conquest of the Canary Islands_[1].
+
+The island of Nivaria, and others mentioned by Pliny, as known to Juba
+king of Mauritania, were most probably Teneriffe and the other Canary
+Islands; for Pliny notices that the summit of Nivaria was generally
+covered with snow, which is frequently the case with the peak of
+Teneriffe, and from this circumstance the name of Nivaria is obviously
+derived. They appear likewise to have been known in the middle ages to
+the Arabs of Morocco; as the Nubian geographer mentions two islands,
+under the names of Mastahan and Lacos, as among the six fortunate islands
+described by Ptolemy; these probably were Lancerota and Fuertaventura,
+the latter of which may be seen in clear weather from the nearest coast
+of Africa. All knowledge, however, of these islands had ceased in Europe,
+till some time between the years 1326 and 1334, when a French ship
+happened to be driven among them by a storm. Upon this discovery, Don
+Luis de la Cerda, count of Claramonte, whose father, Don Alonzo, had been
+deprived of his right to the inheritance of the crown of Castile,
+procured a grant of these islands, with the title of king, from Pope
+Clement VI., on condition of causing the gospel to be preached to the
+natives[2]. Don Luis equipped a fleet from some of the ports of the
+Spanish kingdom of Arragon, in order to take possession of his new
+kingdom, but the design failed, and he died soon after.
+
+In 1385, some Biscayners and inhabitants of Seville joined in the
+equipment of five ships at Cadiz, in order to make descents for the sake
+of plunder upon the Canary islands, and the adjacent coast of Africa.
+After coasting along the African shore, they sailed westwards, and fell
+in with the island now called Lancerota, where they landed; and after a
+skirmish with the natives, plundered the town, front which they carried
+off a large booty of goat-skins, tallow, and sheep, and 170 of the
+inhabitants, whom they sold into slavery. Among these were Guanareme,
+king of the island, and his wife Tingua-faya. A similar expedition in
+quest of plunder and captives was made to Lancerota from Seville in 1393.
+
+In the year 1400, John de Betancour, a gentleman of Normandy, and Gadifer
+de Sala, a person of considerable fortune, fitted out three small vessels
+from Rochelle in France, containing 200 persons, exclusive of the
+mariners, and made a descent upon Lancerota, where they erected a fort at
+a harbour, to which they gave the name of Rubicon. Leaving there a small
+garrison, they passed over to the island of Fuertaventura; but being
+opposed by the natives, they prudently retired without fighting.
+Betancour afterwards applied to Don Henry III. king of Arragon, for
+assistance to enable him to make a conquest of these islands; who made
+him a grant of them in due form, with the title of king, and supplied him
+with money to defray the expence of an armament to accomplish their
+subjugation. He easily effected the conquest of Lancerota, and divided
+its lands among the French and Spanish adventurers who had assisted him
+in the expedition.
+
+After the death of John de Betancour, his nephew, Mason de Betancour,
+sold the Canary Islands to Don Henry de Guzman, Count of Niebla; who
+afterwards conveyed them to Guillen Paraza, and from whom they fell by
+inheritance to Diego de Herrera, who died in 1485. In 1487, the
+sovereignty was resumed by the crown of Castile, with the title of a
+kingdom[3].
+
+
+[1] Glas. Disc. and Conqu. passim.
+
+[2] The Author of the History of the Canaries, omits the date of this
+    grant. Clement VI. was Pope from 1343 to 1352, between which years the
+    papal grant must have been made.--E.
+
+[3] A more extended account or these islands will be found in Part III. of
+    this work.--E.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+
+PART II.
+
+
+GENERAL VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, CHIEFLY OF DISCOVERY FROM THE ERA OF DON
+HENRY, PRINCE OF PORTUGAL, IN 1412, TO THAT OF GEORGE III. IN 1760.
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. I.
+
+_Summary Deduction of the Discoveries of the World, from their first
+Original, to the year 1555, by Antonio Galvano_[1].
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+This treatise was written in the Portuguese language, by Antonio Galvano,
+who had been governor of Ternate, the chief of the Molucca Islands, and
+was first translated into English by the celebrated Richard Hakluyt, who
+dedicated it to Sir Robert Cecil, Principal Secretary of State to Queen
+Elizabeth. It was afterwards inserted in Osbornes, or the Oxford
+Collection of Voyages and Travels, and forms an appendix to the first
+volume of Clarke's Progress of Maritime Discovery; and from these sources
+the present edition has been carefully prepared. Of Richard Hakluyt, the
+original translator, the following notice is worthy of being preserved.
+"The _great_ Richard Hakluyt was descended from an ancient family at
+Yetton in Herefordshire, and was educated at Westminster School, from
+whence he was elected a student of Christ Church, in the University of
+Oxford, where he took the degrees of Bachelor and Master of Arts.
+Entering into holy orders, he was first made a prebendary of Bristol, and
+afterwards of Westminster, and rector of Witheringset in Suffolk. Besides
+this translation, he illustrated the eight decades of Peter Martyr
+Angelericus _de Novo Orbe_ with curious notes. He also translated from
+the Portuguese, _Virginia_, richly valued by the description of Florida,
+her next neighbour; and wrote notes of certain commodities, in good
+request in the East Indies, Molucca, and China; but what has most
+deservedly perpetuated his name, is his great pains, and judgment, in
+collecting _English Voyages, Navigations, Trafficks, and Discoveries_[2]."
+
+Both from the nature of this treatise on the origin and progress of
+maritime discovery, and from respect to the memory of Hakluyt, the father
+of our English collections of voyages and travels, it has been selected
+for insertion in this place, as an appropriate introduction to the
+_Second Part_ of our arrangement; because its author may be considered as
+almost an original authority for the early discoveries of the Portuguese
+and Spaniards. Although it may be considered in some measure as not
+precisely conformable with our plan, yet one portion of this summary is
+directly in point; and, the whole being curious, and in no respect
+tedious, it is here given entire; changing the antiquated English of
+Hakluyt into modern language. Although said in its title to extend to the
+year 1555, the chronological series of Galvano properly ends in 1545; and
+the only subsequent incident, is a very slight notice of the voyage of
+Sir Hugh Willoughby and Richard Chancellor, towards the White Sea, in
+1553. In the original translation, and in the Oxford collection, this
+treatise is preceded by a dedication from Hakluyt to _Sir Robert Cecil_;
+and another dedication from the Portuguese editor, Francis de Sousa
+Tavares, to Don John, Duke of Aveira; both of which are here omitted, as
+having no directly useful tendency, except so much of the latter as
+refers to the history of Galvano. Besides the present discourse, Galvano
+composed a history of the Molucca Islands, of which he had been governor,
+which work has unfortunately been lost, or at least is unknown in this
+country. He is likewise said to have published at Lisbon in 1555, an
+account of the different routes by which the merchandize of India had
+been conveyed into Europe at different periods.
+
+Antonio Galvano, the author of the following Summary of the Discoveries
+of the World, was a Portuguese gentleman, who was several years governor
+of the Molucca Islands, and performed signal service to his country in
+that honourable station, by dissipating a formidable league, which had
+been entered into by the native princes of these islands, for the
+expulsion of the Portuguese; and, though possessing very inadequate
+resources for the protection of so important a commercial establishment,
+he confirmed and extended the dominion and influence of Portugal in these
+islands. When first appointed to the command in the Moluccas, Galvano
+carried with him a private fortune of 10,000 crusadoes, all of which he
+expended in the public service. Though he added a clear revenue to the
+crown of 500,000 crusadoes, in consequence of his successful, vigilant,
+and pure administration, he was so zealous in patronizing the propagation
+of the Christian religion among the islands belonging to his government,
+that, on his return to Lisbon in 1540, he was reduced to such extreme
+poverty, as to be under the necessity of taking refuge in the _hospital_,
+where he died in 1557.
+
+Francis de Sousa Tavares, the original Portuguese editor of this treatise,
+in a dedication of the work to Don John Duke of Aveira, gives the
+following account of the work, and of its author:
+
+"Antonio Galvano, when on his death-bed, left me this book, along with
+his other papers, by his testament; and, as I am certain he designed that
+it should be presented to your highness, I have thought proper to fulfil
+his intentions in that respect. It was fitting that this treatise should
+be written by a native of Portugal, as it treats of the various ways in
+which the spiceries and other commodities of India were formerly brought
+to our part of the world, and gives an account of all the navigations and
+discoveries of the ancients and moderns, in both of which things the
+Portuguese have laboured above all other nations. In this treatise, and
+in nine or ten other books, concerning India and the Moluccas, this true
+Portuguese described the unfortunate and sorrowful times, before our day,
+in which he had been engaged. When he was appointed to the command of the
+islands and fortresses of the Moluccas, all the kings and chiefs of these
+islands had agreed to make war against our nation, and to drive them out
+of the country. Yet he fought against them all in Tidore, though he had
+only 130 Portuguese soldiers, against their whole united power, and gave
+them a signal overthrow, in which their king, and one Ternate, the
+principal author of the war, were both slain; besides which, he conquered
+their fortresses, and compelled them all to submit to the obedience and
+service of our sovereign. In this war, two great and wonderful events
+took place: the _first_, that all the chiefs and kings of these islands
+united against us, who used ever to be at variance among themselves; and
+_secondly_, that Galvano, with only the ordinary garrison, should obtain
+the victory against so great a combination. It has happened to other
+governors of the Moluccas, with an extraordinary number of European
+troops, and assisted by all the other native lords, to go to war with one
+king only, and to come back with loss; whereas he, with a small and
+inadequate force, successfully waged war against a confederacy of all the
+lords of these islands.
+
+"Three brilliant exploits have been performed in India, beyond all others.
+The capture of Muar by Emanuel Falcon; the winning of Bitam by Peter
+Mascarenas; and this victory obtained by Galvano. Besides this great
+exploit, his father and four brothers were all slain in the kings service;
+and he, being the last of his lineage, carried with him about 10,000
+crusadoes into the Moluccas, all of which he expended in propagating our
+holy faith, and in preserving these valuable islands, using all his power
+and influence to bring all the cloves into the kings coffers, by which he
+added 500,000 crusadoes yearly to the royal revenue. Had he gathered
+cloves on his own account, as other governors of the Moluccas have done,
+he might have come home very rich; but returning poor, and, in the
+simplicity of his nature, expecting to be rewarded for his honest
+services, he was entirely neglected, and had to take refuge in an
+hospital, where he remained seventeen years, till his death, when he was
+2000 crusadoes in debt; partly for demands upon him from India, and
+partly borrowed from his friends to maintain him in the hospital. After
+his death, the cardinal desired me to give his other writings to Damien
+de Goes, promising to content me for them, which otherwise I should not
+have done; yet hitherto I have not received any thing with which to
+execute his will. Yet, for all this, as in the prosperity of his
+victories he made no boast, so, in his adversity, he always preserved an
+unabated spirit. Your grace, therefore, may perceive, that this treatise,
+and his other works, were written under great afflictions; yet was he not
+willing to use the remedy of Zelim, the son of the great Turk Mahomet,
+who took Constantinople, and died in Rome, who used to make himself drunk,
+that he might forget the high estate from which he had fallen. Neither
+would he follow the councils of many of his friends, in withdrawing from
+the kingdom; saying, he had rather resemble Timocles the Athenian, than
+the Roman Coriolanus. For all which, this treatise ought to receive
+favour from your grace, allowing for any oversights of the author, if
+there be any such, as I am unfit to detect or correct then. God prosper
+your grace with long life, and increase of honour."
+
+
+[1] Oxford Collection, II. 353. Clarke, Progr. of Marit. Disc. I. App 1.
+
+[2] Oxford Collection, I. viii.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Epitome of the Ancient and Modern Discoveries of the World, chiefly by
+means of Navigation, from the Flood to the close of the Fifteenth
+Century._
+
+When I first desired to compose an account of the ancient and modern
+discoveries by sea and land, with their true dates and situations, these
+two principal circumstances seemed involved in such difficulty and
+confusion, that I had almost desisted from the attempt. Even in regard to
+the date of the flood, the Hebrews reckon that event to have happened
+1656 years after the creation: while the seventy interpreters make it
+2242; and St Augustine extends the time to 2262 years[1]. In regard to
+geographical situations, likewise, there are many differences; for there
+never sailed ten or an hundred pilots in one fleet, but they made their
+reckonings in almost as many different longitudes. But considering that
+all these difficulties might be surmounted, by just comparison, and the
+exercise of judgment, I at length resolved to persist in my undertaking.
+
+Some allege that the world was fully known in ancient times; for, as it
+was peopled and inhabited, it must have been navigable and frequented;
+and because the ancient people were of longer lives, and had all one law
+and one language, they could not fail to be acquainted with the whole
+world. Others again believe, that though the world might be once
+universally known by mankind, yet, by the wickedness of man, and the want
+of justice among nations, that knowledge has been lost. But as all the
+most important discoveries have been made by sea, and that chiefly in our
+own times, it were desirable to learn who were the first discoverers
+since the flood. Some allege the Greeks, others the Phenicians, while
+others say the Egyptians. The inhabitants of India, on the contrary,
+pretend that they were the first navigators; particularly the Tabencos,
+whom we now call Chinese; and allege in proof of this, that they were
+lords of all the Indies, even to Cape Bona Speranca, and the island of St
+Lawrence[2], which is inhabited by them; as likewise all the coasts of
+the Indian seas, also the Javas, Timores, Celebes, Macassar, the Moluccas,
+Borneo, Mindanao, Luçones, Lequeos, the Japans, and many other islands;
+also the countries of Cochin-China, Laos, Bramas[3], Pegu, Arracones[4],
+till you come quite to Bengala. Besides all these, New Spain, Peru,
+Brazil, the Antilles, and all the adjoining lands, are possessed by the
+same race, as appears by the fashions and manners both of the men and
+women, who have small eyes, flat noses, with other proportions resembling
+the Chinese. And to this day, many of these islands and countries are
+called by such names, as Bato-China, Bocho-China, and the like,
+indicating the countries of, or belonging to China.
+
+It farther appears, that the ark of Noah rested upon the north part of
+the mountains of Armenia, in 40 degrees of latitude or upwards; and that
+Scythia, being a high land, and the first that appeared out of the
+universal deluge, was first peopled. And as the province or country of
+the Tabencos, or Chinese, is one of the chiefest of all Tartary, its
+inhabitants may be considered as the most ancient nation, and the oldest
+navigators. Their seas are calm; and, as lying between the tropics, their
+days and nights are nearly equal, and their seasons differ little in
+temperature; and as no outrageous winds swell their seas into storms,
+navigation among them is safe and easy. Their small barks called
+catamorans have only a large bough of a tree set up in the middle,
+serving as mast and sail; the master steers only with an oar, and the
+passengers sit on poles fastened to the bark.
+
+It is said that the people of China were anciently lords of almost all
+Scythia, and were in use to sail along that coast, which reaches from
+east to west, in seventy degrees of north latitude. Cornelius Nepos says,
+that, in the time when Metellus, the colleague of Afranius, was proconsul
+of Gaul, the king of the Suevi sent to him certain Indians, who came to
+his country in a ship by the north and the flats of Germany[5]. These
+people probably came from China; as in that country, in the latitudes of
+20, 30, and 40 degrees, they have strong and well-fastened ships, which
+can bear the seas and encounter the severity of the northern climate.
+Cambaia also has ships, and its inhabitants are said to have long used
+the seas; but it is not likely they should have gone to Gaul; for they
+only trade to Cairo, and are indeed a people of little trade and less
+clothing.
+
+Those who escaped from the flood kept the hills, not daring for a long
+time to descend into the plains and low countries; and Nimrod, an hundred
+and thirty years afterwards, built the tower of Babel, intending it as a
+refuge in case of any future deluge[6]. Upon the whole, it seems probable
+that the inhabitants of China and the east were the first sailors; though
+others think the inhabitants of the west, particularly of Syria, were the
+first to use the sea[7]. This contest about the antiquity of navigation,
+I leave to the Scythians and Egyptians, who each challenge the honour to
+themselves. But leaving all contested points in this matter, I now apply
+to my proposed deduction, resting only upon what has been recorded in
+authentic histories. Ancient history says that Tubal, in the hundred and
+forty-third year after the flood, came by sea into Spain[8]; whence it
+appears that in these early times navigation was usual from Ethiopia to
+our parts of western Europe. It is also said, that Semiramis invaded the
+country on the river Indus, whence the Indians derive their name, and
+gave battle to king Stabrobates, in which he lost a thousand ships[9]; by
+which it clearly appears there were then many ships in those parts; and
+that the seas were much frequented.
+
+In the six hundred and fiftieth year after the flood, there was a king in
+Spain named Hesperus[10]; and Gonsalvo Fernandez de Oviedo, the
+chronicler of antiquities[11], affirms that he made discoveries by sea as
+far as Cape Verde and the Isle of St Thomas, of which he was prince, and
+that in his time the islands of the West Indies were discovered, and
+called the Hesperides, after his name. He alleges many reasons in proof
+of this assertion, and even says particularly, that these early
+navigators sailed in forty days from Cape Verde to these islands. Others
+say, that the islands of St Thomas and de Principe are the Hesperides,
+and not the Antilles; which is the more probable, as these ancient
+navigators only sailed along the coast, not daring to pass through the
+main ocean, having no compass, nor any means of taking altitudes for
+their guidance. It is not to be denied that many countries, islands,
+capes, isthmuses, and points, the names of which are found in histories,
+are now unknown; because, in course of ages, the force of the waters has
+wasted and consumed them, and has separated countries from each other
+formerly joined, both in Europe, Asia, Africa, New Spain, Peru, and other
+places.
+
+In his dialogue called Timaeus, Plato says there was anciently a great
+country and large islands in the Atlantic, named Atlantides, greater than
+Europe and Africa, and that the kings of these parts were lords of a
+great part of Spain; but that, by the force of great tempests, the sea
+had overflowed the country, leaving nothing but banks of mud and gravel,
+so that no ships could pass that way for long after. It is also recorded
+by Pliny[12], that close by the island of Cadiz, there was a well
+inhabited island called Aphrodisias, towards the Straits of Gibraltar,
+abounding in gardens and orchards; but we have now no knowledge of this
+island, except from the bare mention of it in ancient authors. The Isle
+of Cadiz is said to have been anciently so large as to join the continent
+of Spain. The Açores are held to have been a continuation of the
+mountains of Estrella, which join the sea coast beside the town of Cintra;
+and the Sierra Verde, or Green-mountains, which reach the coast, near the
+city of _Sasin_ in the land of _Cucu_, or the island of Moudim in which
+Algarbe is situated, are supposed to have reached to Porto Santo and
+Madeira. For it is considered as an indubitable fact, that all islands
+derive their roots from the firm land or continent, however distant, as
+otherwise they could not stand firm. Other authors say, that from Spain
+to Ceuta in Barbary, people sometimes travelled on foot on dry land; that
+the islands of Corsica and Sardinia were once joined; that Sicily was
+united with Italy, and the Negropont with Greece[13]. We read also of the
+hulls of ships, iron anchors, and other remnants of shipping, having been
+found on the mountains of Susa, far inland, where there is now no
+appearance of the sea having ever been. Many writers affirm, that in
+India and Malabar, which now abounds in people, the sea once reached the
+foot of the mountains; and that Cape Comorin and the island of Ceylon
+were once united; also that Sumatra once joined with Malacca, by the
+shoals of Caypasia; and not far from thence there is a small island which,
+only a few years ago, was joined to the opposite coast. Ptolemy advances
+the point of Malacca three or four degrees to the south of the line;
+whereas its most southerly point, now called Jentana, is in one degree of
+north latitude, by which people pass daily the straits of Cincapura to
+the coasts of Siam and China; and the island of Aynan is said to have
+formerly joined the land of China; the southern extremity of which
+Ptolomey placed far to the south of the line, though it now only reaches
+to twentieth degree of north latitude.
+
+It may even have been that Malacca and China, as Ptolemy sets forth,
+extended beyond the line to the south; as Malacca might join with the
+land called Jentana, and the islands of Bintam, Banca, and Salistres, and
+the land might be all slime and ouze; likewise China might be united with
+the Luçones, Borneo, Lequeuo, Mindanao, and others. Some are of opinion,
+that Sumatra joined with Java, across what is now the Straits of Sunda;
+and that Java also joined with the islands of Bali, Anjave, Cambava,
+Solor, Hogalcao, Maulva, Vintara, Rosalaguin, and others in that range,
+all of which are so near as to appear continuous, when seen from a small
+distance; and they still are so near together, that in passing through
+the channels which divide them, the boughs of the trees on each side may
+be touched by the hands. It is not long since several of the islands of
+Banda in the east were drowned by the sea overflowing them; and in China,
+about 180 miles of firm land are said to have become a lake. All these
+things are to be considered as coming within the limits of probability,
+especially when we take into account what has been related of similar
+events by Ptolemy and others, but which I here omit to return to my
+subject.
+
+About 800 years after the deluge, the city of Troy was built by the
+Dardanians; and even before that time, spices, drugs, and many other
+kinds of merchandize, which were then more abundant than now, were
+brought from India to Europe, by the Red Sea. Hence, if credit can be
+given to these accounts, we may conclude, that the sea of old was much
+frequented, those of the east bringing their commodities to the haven of
+Arsinoe in the Arabian Gulf, now called Suez[14], in lat. 30° N. and at
+the northern extremity of the Arabian Gulf; from whence the goods were
+carried by caravans, upon camels, asses, and mules, to Cassou, a city on
+the coast of the Levant sea, in lat. 32° N. Allowing seventeen leagues
+and a half to every degree of latitude, these two cities are said to have
+been 35 leagues, or 105[15] miles distant from each other. On account of
+the heat, these caravans, or great companies of carriers, travelled only
+in the night, directing themselves by the stars, and by land-marks fixed
+in the ground for that purpose. But finding this journey attended with
+many inconveniencies, the course was twice altered in search of a more
+commodious route[16]. About nine hundred years after the flood, and
+previous to the destruction of Troy, Egypt was ruled by a king named
+Sesostris, who caused a canal to be cut from the Red Sea to that arm of
+the Nile which flows past the city of Heroum, that ships might pass and
+repass between India and Europe, to avoid the expence and trouble of
+carrying merchandize by land across the isthmus of Suez; and Sesostris
+had large caraks or ships built for this purpose[17]. This enterprize,
+however, did not completely succeed; for, if it had, Africa would have
+been converted into an island, as there are even now only twenty leagues
+or sixty miles of land between the Red Sea and the Mediterranean.
+
+About this time the Grecians gathered a fleet and army, called the
+Argonautic expedition, under the command of Jason and Alceus[18]. Some
+say they sailed from Crete, and others from Greece; but they passed
+through the Propontis and the _sleeve_ of St George into the Euxine,
+where some of the vessels perished, and Jason returned back to Greece.
+Alceus reported that he was driven by a tempest to the Palus Maeotis,
+where he was deserted by all his company; and those who escaped had to
+travel by land to the German ocean, where they procured shipping; and
+sailing past the coasts of Saxony, Friesland, Holland, Flanders, France,
+Spain, and Italy, returned to the Peloponnesus and Greece, after
+discovering a great portion of the coast of Europe.
+
+Strabo, on the authority of Aristonicus the grammarian, says, that king
+Menelaus, after the destruction of Troy, sailed from the Grecian sea to
+the Atlantic, coasted along Africa and Guinea, doubled the Cape Bona
+Sperança, and arrived in India[19]; concerning which voyage many other
+particulars might be collected from the writings of the ancients. This
+Mediterranean Sea was sometimes called the Adriatic, the Aegean, and the
+Herculean Sea; and had other names, according to the lands, coasts, and
+islands, which it skirted, till, running through the Straits of Hercules,
+between Spain and Africa, it communicated with the great Atlantic Ocean.
+Thirteen hundred years after the flood, Solomon caused a navy to be
+constructed at Ezion-geber on the Red Sea, which sailed to Tharsis and
+Ophir, which some believe to have been islands in the East Indies. This
+fleet was three years on its voyage, and on its return brought gold,
+silver, cypress-wood, and other commodities[20]. The islands to which the
+navy of Solomon traded were probably those we now call the Luçones, the
+Lequeos, and China; for we know of few other places whence some of the
+things mentioned as forming their cargoes can be had, or where navigation
+has been so long practised.
+
+Necho, one of the kings of Egypt, was desirous to have joined the Red Sea
+with the Mediterranean, and is said in history to have commanded some
+Phenicians to sail from the Red Sea by the Straits of Mecca, and to
+endeavour to return to Egypt by the Mediterranean[21]. This they
+accomplished, and sailed along the coast of Melinda, Quiloa, and Sofala,
+till they reached the Cape of Good Hope, which they doubled; and,
+continuing their course to the north, they sailed along the coast of
+Guinea all the way to the Mediterranean, and returned to Egypt after two
+years absence, being the first who had circumnavigated Africa.
+
+In the year 590 before the Incarnation, a fleet belonging to Carthaginian
+merchants sailed from Cadiz through the ocean, to the west, in search of
+land[22]. They proceeded so far that they came to the islands now called
+the Antilles, and to New Spain[23]. This is given on the authority of
+Gonzalo Fernandez de Oviedo, in his General History, who says that these
+countries were then discovered; and that Christopher Columbus, by his
+voyages in after times, only acquired more exact knowledge of them, and
+hath left us a more precise notice of their situation, and of the way to
+them. But all those historians who formerly wrote concerning the Antilles,
+as of doubtful and uncertain existence, now plainly allow them to be the
+same with New Spain and the West Indies. In the year 520 before Christ,
+Cambyses, king of Persia, conquered Egypt, and was succeeded by Darius,
+the son of Hystaspes. This latter prince determined upon completing the
+projects of Sesostris and Necho, by digging a canal between the Red Sea
+and the Nile: But, being assured that the Red Sea was higher than the
+Nile, and that its salt water would overflow and ruin the whole land of
+Egypt, he abandoned his purpose, lest that fine province should be
+destroyed by famine and the want of fresh water[24]; for the fresh water
+of the Nile overflows the whole country, and the inhabitants have no
+other water to drink.
+
+It may not be too great a digression from the subject, to say a few words
+concerning Egypt. The natives allege that they have in their country
+certain animals, of which one half of their bodies seem earth, and the
+other like rats, one species of which keeps continually in the water,
+while another species lives on the land. In my opinion, it is these
+animals which break the serpents eggs, of which there are many in the
+Nile, but which serpents are also called crocodiles. It is said, that in
+ancient times these animals were inchanted, so that they could not do
+harm to any one: But since they have been freed from the power of
+inchantment, by the arts and learning of the Egyptians decaying, they
+have done much hurt, by killing people, wild beasts, and cattle, more
+especially those which live in the water and come often on land. Those
+that live continually on the land become strongly venomous[25]. The
+people beyond the city of Cairo used to catch these animals, and even to
+eat them, setting up their heads on the walls of the city. Concerning
+these crocodiles, it is related[26] that they often lie along the shores
+of the river with their mouths wide open; on which occasion, certain
+white birds, little larger than our thrushes, fly into the mouths of the
+crocodiles, and pick out the filth from between his teeth, to the great
+delight of the crocodile; which, however, would surely close his mouth
+and devour the bird, had not nature provided the bird with a sharp sting,
+growing from the top of his head, which pricks the roof of the crocodiles
+mouth, and forces him to gape, so that the bird flies away unhurt. In
+this manner, by means of a succession of these birds, the crocodiles get
+their teeth cleansed. In this same river, there are many beasts
+resembling horses; and upon the land, there are certain birds like our
+cranes, which continually make war upon the serpents, which come thither
+out of Arabia: Which birds, and likewise the rats, which eat the eggs of
+the crocodiles, are held in great reverence and estimation, by the
+Egyptians.
+
+But now, to return to my subject of discoveries. In the year 485 before
+Christ, Xerxes, king of Persia, sent his nephew Sataspis to discover
+India; who sailed from the Mediterranean through the Straits of Hercules,
+and passed the promontory of Africa, which we now call the Cape of Good
+Hope; but, wearying of the length of the voyage, he returned back again,
+as Bartholomew Diaz did in our days[27]. In 443 A. C. Hamilco and Hanno,
+two Carthaginian commanders who governed that part of Spain now called
+Andalusia, sailed from thence with two squadrons. Hamilco, sailing
+towards the north, discovered the coasts of Spain, France, England,
+Flanders, and Germany; and some allege that he sailed to Gothland, and
+even to Thule or Iceland, standing under the Arctic circle, in 64 degrees
+north, and continued his voyage during two years, till he came to that
+northern island, where the day in June continues for twenty-two hours,
+and the nights in December are of a similar length; on account of which
+it is there wonderfully cold. His brother, Hanno, took his course to the
+south, along the coast of Africa and Guinea, and discovered the Fortunate
+Islands, now the Canaries, and the Orcades, Hesperides, and Gorgades, now
+called the Cape de Verde islands. Proceeding onwards, Hanno doubled the
+Cape of Good Hope, and went along the eastern coast of Africa to another
+cape, called Aromaticum, now called Gardafu, and thence to the coast of
+Arabia, and was five years employed in this voyage before his return to
+Spain[28]. Others allege, that Hanno proceeded no farther than Sierra
+Leona, which he colonized, and afterwards discovered as far as the
+equinoctial line; but it would rather appear, from the length of time he
+employed, that he must have accomplished the more extended navigation.
+
+It is reported that the inhabitants of the country at the Cape of Good
+Hope are great witches, and by inchantment bring certain serpents so much
+under command, that they preserve their churches, churchyards, gardens,
+orchards, barns, and cattle, both from wild beasts and thieves. When
+these serpents see any person doing or intending to do harm, they wind
+themselves in such a manner around them as to make them prisoners, and
+then command their young ones to give notice to their masters, that they
+may come and secure the thieves. But if the thieves be numerous, or the
+wild beasts of too much strength, so that the serpents dare not encounter
+them, they go to their masters house, and if it happen to be in the
+night, they give many strokes with their tails, so as to awaken their
+masters, that they may provide for their defence[29].
+
+A certain Italian, named Aloisius Cadamosta, relates, that when he was
+upon the discovery of Guinea, and resided in the house of Bisboral, the
+grandson of king Budomel, he heard one night, when in bed, a great noise
+and many blows given about the house, upon which Bisboral arose and went
+out; and, upon his return, Cadamosta demanded of him where he had been,
+and he answered that he had been with his cobras or snakes, which called
+him[30]. In the Indies there are many snakes, and some of them very full
+of poison; yet the Indians carry them about their necks, and put them in
+their bosoms, and under their arms, without fear or injury; and at
+certain sounds, the snakes will dance, and do many other strange things
+at command.
+
+I was informed by a certain Portuguese, who had been beyond the Cape of
+Good Hope, towards Sofala, Quiloa, and Melinda, that there were certain
+birds in that country, which would come to the negroes on a call, and as
+the negroes moved on through the woods, the birds would do the same from
+tree to tree, till at length they would alight on a tree whence they
+would not remove: And, on examining that tree, the negroes were sure to
+find wax and honey, but knew not whether it grew there naturally or
+not[31]. In the same country, they find much wax and honey in ant-holes,
+made by the ants, but somewhat bitter. In the seas of that coast, there
+are certain fish, known to the fishermen, which commonly swim upright in
+the water, having the faces and breasts of women[32].
+
+In the year 355 before Christ, the Spaniards are said to have gone by sea
+to the flats of India, Arabia, and the adjoining coasts, to which they
+carried various merchandizes in great ships; and sailing to the north-
+west they came to certain flats which are covered by the tide, and left
+bare by the ebb, where they caught many _tunnies_ of great size; which
+fishing turned out to their great profit, as they were very abundant and
+much esteemed[33].
+
+Alexander, who flourished 324 years before Christ, travelled from Europe
+into Asia and Africa, passed through Armenia, Assyria, Persia, and
+Bactria; whence he descended by the mountains of Imaus and the vallies of
+Parapomissus, into India, and prepared a navy on the river Indus, with
+which he passed into the ocean. He there turned by the lands of Gedrosia,
+Caramania, and Persia, to the great city of Babylon, leaving the command
+of his fleet to Onesicratus and Nearchus, who sailed through the straits
+of the Persian Sea and up the river Euphrates, discovering the whole
+coast between the Indus and that river.
+
+After the death of Alexander, Ptolemy became king of Egypt, who by some
+was reputed to have been the bastard son of Philip, the father of
+Alexander: He, imitating the before named kings, Sesostris and Darius,
+caused dig a canal from the branch of the Nile which passed by Pelusium,
+now by the city of Damieta[34]. This canal of Ptolemy was an hundred feet
+broad and thirty feet deep, and extended ten or twelve leagues in length,
+till it came to the _bitter wells_. He meant to have continued it to the
+Red Sea; but desisted on the idea that the Red Sea was three cubits
+higher than the land of Egypt, and would have overflowed all the country,
+to its entire ruin.
+
+Ptolemy Philadelphus, in the year 277 before Christ, changed the
+direction of the Indian traffic. The goods from Europe, by his orders,
+were carried up the Nile from Alexandria to the city of Coptus, and
+conveyed across the desert from thence to the sea-port of Myos-Hormos on
+the Red-sea[35]. To avoid the excessive heat, the caravans travelled only
+in the night, directing their course by the stars; and water being very
+scarce in the desert, they had to carry a sufficient quantity with them
+for the journey. Afterwards, to avoid this trouble, deep wells were dug
+at certain intervals; and in other places large cisterns or reservoirs
+were constructed for the reception of rain water. Still later, in
+consideration of the dangers attending the port of Myos-Hormos, on
+account of flats and islands, Philadelphus sent an army into Troglodytica,
+where he constructed a haven called Berenice, in which the ships engaged
+in the Indian commerce took shelter, as a place of greater security. From
+thence the goods were transported to the city of Coptus, and afterwards
+to Alexandria, which became rich and famous, through its trade with India,
+beyond any other city in the world; insomuch that it is asserted that the
+customs of Alexandria yielded every year to Ptolemy Auletes, the father
+of Cleopatra, seven millions and a half of gold, though the traffic had
+then scarcely subsisted in that direction for twenty years[36]. After the
+reduction of Egypt and Alexandria under the power of the Romans, the
+customs are said to have advanced to double that amount; and the trade
+was so great, that 120 ships used to be sent yearly from Myos-Hormos to
+India. The ships set sail every year from Myos-Hormos about the middle of
+July, and returned back within the year[37]. The merchandize they carried
+amounted to the value of one million two hundred thousand crowns; and the
+returns were an hundred for one; and through this prodigious increase of
+wealth, the matrons and noble ladies of those days in Alexandria, were
+exceedingly profuse in decorating themselves with purple, pearls, and
+precious stones, and in the use of musk, amber, and other rich perfumes
+of various kinds; of all which the historians and other writers of that
+age treat at great length[38].
+
+Pliny[39], on the authority of Cornelius Nepos, says that one Eudoxus,
+flying from Ptolemy Lathyrus, passed by sea through the gulf of Arabia,
+and sailing along the eastern coast of Africa, doubled the cape of Bona
+Sperança arrived by the Atlantic at Cadiz; and it would appear that this
+navigation was as often used in those days as it now is. Caius Caesar,
+the son of Augustus, going into Arabia, found in the Red Sea certain
+pieces of the ships which had gone thither from Spain.
+
+Long after these days it was usual to pass to India by land. This was
+done by the kings of the Sogdians, the princes of Bactria, and other
+famous captains and many merchants, who travelled thither and into
+Scythia by land. Marcus Paulus Venetus writes largely of these countries;
+and though his book at first was reckoned fabulous, yet what he and
+others have reported is now found true, by the experience of travellers,
+and merchants who have since been to the same parts.
+
+It is reported that the Romans sent an army by sea to India, against the
+great khan of Cathaia, 200 years before the Incarnation; which, passing
+through the Straits of Gibraltar, and running to the north-west, found
+ten islands opposite to Cape Finisterre; producing large quantities of
+tin, which perhaps may have been those afterwards called the Cassiterides.
+Being come to 50 degrees of latitude, they found a strait passing to the
+west, through which they arrived in India, and gave battle to the king of
+Cathaia, after which they returned to Rome. Whether this story may appear
+possible or not, true or false, I can only say that I give it as I found
+it written in the histories of these times.
+
+In the year 100 after the incarnation of Christ, the emperor Trajan
+fitted out a fleet on the rivers Tigris and Euphrates, whence he sailed
+to the islands of Zyzara; and passing the straits of Persia, entered
+into the ocean, by which he sailed along the coast to India, till he came
+to the place where Alexander had been. He there took some ships which
+came from Bengal, and learned the state of the country from the mariners.
+But being in years, and weary of the sea, and because he found it
+difficult to procure necessaries for his army, he returned back to
+Assyria[40].
+
+After the Romans had subdued most part of the world, many notable
+discoveries were made. But then came the Goths, Moors, and other
+barbarous nations, who destroyed all A.D. 412, the Goths took the city
+of Rome. Thereafter the Vandals went out of Spain, and conquered Africa.
+In 450, Attila destroyed many cities in Italy, at which time Venice began;
+and in this age the Franks and Vandals entered into France. In 474, the
+empire of Rome was lost, and fell from the Romans to the Goths. In 560,
+the Lombards came into Italy. About this time the sect of the Arians
+prevailed greatly, and Merlin the English prophet flourished. In 611,
+the Mahometan sect sprung up, and the Moresco government, which invaded
+both Africa and Spain. By this it may appear that all the world was in a
+state of war, and all places so very tumultuous, that traffic and
+merchandize ceased, no nation daring to trade with another by sea or
+land; nothing remaining stedfast, neither in kingdoms, signories,
+religions, laws, arts, sciences, or navigation. Even the records and
+writings of these things were burnt and destroyed by the barbarous power
+of the Goths, who proposed to themselves to begin a new world, and to
+root out the memory and knowledge of all other nations.
+
+Those who succeeded in the government of Europe, perceiving the great
+losses of the Christian world by want of traffic and the stoppage of
+navigation, began to devise a way of passing into India, quite different
+from the route of the Nile and the Red Sea, and much longer and more
+costly[41]. The goods of India were brought up the river Indus as far as
+it was navigable. They were then carried by land in caravans through the
+country of Parapomissus into the province of Bactria, and shipped on the
+river Oxus, which falls into the Caspian, and thence across that sea to
+the haven of Citracan, or Astracan, on the river Rha, or Volga. Thence up
+that river, and to the city of Novogrod, in the province of Resan, which
+now belongs to the great duke of Muscovy, in lat. 54° N. The goods were
+carried thence overland to the province of Sarmatia and the river Tanais
+or Don, which is the division between Europe and Asia. Being there loaded
+in barks, they were carried down the stream of that river into the Paulus
+Maeotis to the city of Caffa, anciently called Theodosia, which then
+belonged to the Genoese, who came thither by sea in _galliasses_, or
+great ships, and distributed Indian commodities through Europe.
+
+In the reign of Commodita, emperor of Armenia, a better course was
+provided for this traffic: The goods being transported by land from the
+Caspian, through the country of Hiberia, now Georgia, and thence by the
+Phasis into the Euxine, and to the city of Trebisond, they were thence
+shipped for the various parts of Europe[42]. It is recorded that
+Demetrius Nicanor determined, or actually began, to open a canal of
+above 120 miles in length between the Caspian and Euxine, for the greater
+convenience of the Indian trade. But he was slain by Ptolemy Ceraunos,
+and this famous enterprize fell to nothing[43].
+
+All other ways being lost, by reason of the wars of the Turks, the
+spiceries of the Indian Islands, particularly of Java, Sumatra, and the
+city of Malacca, were carried up the river Ganges, in Bengal, to the city
+of Agra; thence they were carried by land to another city near the Indus,
+named Boghar, where they were discharged, because the city of Cabor, or
+Laor, the principal city of the Mogores, stands too far within the land.
+From thence they were carried to the great city of Samarcand in Bactria,
+in which the merchants of India, Persia, and Turkey met together with
+their several commodities, as cloth of gold, velvets, camblets, scarlet
+and woollen cloths, which were carried to Cathay and the great kingdom of
+China; whence they brought back gold, silver, precious stones, pearls,
+silk, musk, rhubarb, and many other things of great value.
+
+In after times these merchandizes, drugs, and spiceries, were carried in
+ships from India to the Straits of Ormus, and the rivers Euphrates and
+Tigris, and were unladen at the city of Basora; from whence they were
+carried overland to Aleppo, Damascus, and Barutti; and there the Venetian
+galliasses, which transported pilgrims to the Holy Land, came and
+received the goods.
+
+In the year 1153, in the time of the emperor Frederick Barbarossa, it is
+said there came to the city of Lubeck, in Germany, a canoe like a long
+barge, with certain Indians, who were supposed to have come from the
+coast of Baccalaos[44], which is in the same latitude with Lubeck. The
+Germans greatly wondered to see such a boat and strange people, not
+knowing whence they came, nor being able to understand their language,
+especially as there was then no knowledge of their country. Although the
+boat was small in comparison with the seas it had to cross, it is yet
+possible that it might have been conveyed by the winds and waves; for in
+our days the _almadias_ of the negroes, which are very small boats,
+venture to navigate from Quiloa, Mosambique, and Sofala, around the
+Cape of Good Hope, even to the island of St Helena, a very small spot in
+the ocean, at a great distance from land.
+
+In the year 1300 after Christ, the great soldan of Cairo restored the
+trade of spiceries, drugs, and merchandize from India, by the Red Sea; at
+which time they unloaded the goods at the port of Judea[45], and carried
+them to Mecca; whence they were distributed by the Mahometan pilgrims[46],
+so that each prince endeavoured to increase the honour and profit of
+his own country. The soldans translated this trade to their own city of
+Cairo; whence the goods were carried to the countries of Egypt, Lybia,
+Africa, Tunis, Tremessen, Fez, Morocco, and Suz; and some of them were
+carried beyond the mountains of Atlas, to the city of Tombuto, and the
+kingdom of the Jalophos; till afterwards the Portuguese brought the
+Indian trade round the Cape of Good Hope to Lisbon, as we propose to shew
+more at large in a convenient place.
+
+A.D. 1344, Peter IV. reigned in Arragon, and the chronicles of his reign
+report that Don Lewis de Cerda, grandson of Don John de Corda, requested
+his aid to go and conquer the Canary Islands, which had been gifted to
+him by Pope Clement VI. a Frenchman. About this time, too, the island of
+Madeira is said to have been discovered by an Englishman named Macham;
+who, sailing from England into Spain with a lady whom he loved, was
+driven out of his course by a tempest, and arrived in a harbour of that
+island, now called Machico, after his name. The lady being oppressed
+with seasickness, Macham landed with her on the island, accompanied by
+some of his people; but in the mean time the ship weighed anchor and
+stood to sea, leaving them behind. On this the lady died of grief, and
+Macham, who was passionately fond of her, erected a chapel or hermitage
+on the island, which he named the chapel of Jesus, and there deposited
+her remains, engraving both their names and the cause of their coming to
+this place on a monumental stone. After this, he and his companions made
+a boat or canoe out of a large tree, and putting to sea without sails or
+oars, got over to the coast of Africa. The Moors among whom he arrived,
+considering their passage as miraculous, sent him to their king, who
+transmitted both him and his company to the king of Castile.
+
+In 1395, while Henry III. reigned in Castile, in consequence of
+information given by Macham respecting this island, many persons of
+France and Castile were induced to attempt its discovery, and that of the
+Grand Canary. Those who went on this expedition were principally from
+Andalusia, Biscay, and Guipuscoa, who carried thither many men and
+horses; but I know not whether this was done at their own charge, or that
+of the king. But however that might be, these people seem to have been
+the first discoverers of the Canaries; where they took 150 of the
+islanders prisoners. There is some difference among authors respecting
+the time of this discovery, as some affirm that it did not take place
+till the year 1405.
+
+
+[1] August. de Civit. Dic. I. 15. c. 20.
+
+[2] The Cape of Good Hope, and the island of Madagascar--E.
+
+[3] Birmahs
+
+[4] Arracan
+
+[5] Pompon. Mela, I. 3. Plin. I. 2. c. 67.
+
+[6] Joseph: Ant. Jud. I. 1. c. 5.
+
+[7] Justin, I. 1.
+
+[8] Berosus.
+
+[9] Diod. Sic. I. 2. c. 5.
+
+[10] Berosus.
+
+[11] Gons. Fern. I. 2. c. 3. Plin. I. 6. c. 31.
+
+[12] Plin. I. 4. c. 22.
+
+[13] Eratosth. ap. Strab. I. 1. p. 26.
+
+[14] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.
+
+[15] The miles here used are three to the league; but the league of the
+    text is nearly equal to four English miles, and the assumed distance
+    of these two ports 140 of our miles--E.
+
+[16] Strab. I. 17. p. 560.
+
+[17] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.
+
+[18] Diod. Sic. I. 4. c. 4.
+
+[19] Strab. I. 1. p. 26.
+
+[20] Kings, I. 9. Chron. II. 8.
+
+[21] Herodot. I. 4.
+
+[22] Arist. de Mirand.
+
+[23] Gonz. Fern. Ovied. I. 2. c. 3.
+
+[24] Plin. I. 9. c. 58. de Maribus Nili.
+
+[25] Joan. Leo Afric. I. 9. de Nilo.--Our author has got into a strange
+    dilemma, by confounding crocodiles and serpents under one denomination.
+    --E.
+
+[26] Plin. and Leo, ub. cit.
+
+[27] Plin. I. 2. c. 67.
+
+[28] Plin. I. 6. c. 31. This subject will be discussed in the _Fifth_ Part
+    of our work; being much too extensive to admit of elucidation in a
+    note.--E.
+
+[29] Hasty readers will have the justice to give the honour of this story
+    to Galvano.--E.
+
+[30] This story will be found hereafter very differently related by Cada
+    Mosto himself, but with a sufficient spice of the marvellous.--E.
+
+[31] The Honey-guide, or Cuculus Indicator, will be noticed more
+    particularly in the Travels through the Colony of the Cape.--E.
+
+[32] The Philosophers of the _nineteenth_ century have _fortunately_
+    rediscovered the _Mermaid_ in the north of Scotland! Hitherto,
+    wonderful things used to be confined to barbarous regions and ignorant
+    ages.--E.
+
+[33] Arist. de Mirand. Strabo, I. 2. p. 68.
+
+[34] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.
+
+[35] Strabo, I. 17. p. 560, 561.
+
+[36] Strab. I. 17. p. 549.
+
+[37] Plin. I. 6. c. 23.
+
+[38] Id. I. 12. c. 18.
+
+[39] Id. I. 2. c. 67.
+
+[40] Ziphilin. in vit. Traj.
+
+[41] Ramusio, V. f. 372. p. 2
+
+[42] Strabo, I. 11.
+
+[43] Plin. I. 6. c. 11.
+
+[44] Newfoundland?
+
+[45] Jidda.
+
+[46] Leo Afric. Ramus. v. 1. f. 373.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Summary of Portuguese Discoveries, from the Commencement of the
+Fifteenth Century, to the Discovery of America by Columbus_[1].
+
+According to the chronicles of Portugal, John I. went from Lisbon in 1415,
+attended by his sons Don Duarte, or Edward, Don Peter, and Don Henry, and
+other lords and nobles of his realm, into Africa, where he took the great
+city of Ceuta, which was one of the principal causes of extending the
+dominions of Portugal. After their return, Don Henry, the king's
+_third_[2] son, being then in Algarve, and desirous to enlarge the
+kingdom by the discovery of unknown regions, gave directions for
+discovering the coast of Mauritania; for in those days none of the
+Portuguese had ever gone beyond Cape Non, in lat. 29°. N.[3]. For the
+better accomplishment of this purpose, Don Henry prepared a fleet, and
+commanded the officers whom he employed to proceed in making discoveries
+to the south of that cape, which they did; but when they came to another
+cape, named Bajador, none of them dared for a long time to go beyond it,
+at which cowardice the prince was much displeased.
+
+In 1417, in the reign of John II. of Castile, and while his mother the
+lady Catharine was regent of the kingdom, Ruben de Bracamonte, the
+admiral of France, craved a grant of the Canary Islands, and the title of
+king, for his kinsman John de Betancourt; which being conceded, he
+departed from Seville with an armament to attempt the conquest. The
+principal motive of this enterprize was to make a perfect discovery of
+Madeira, of which Macham had before given so much information; yet he
+went to the Canaries, where he carried a friar named Mendo as bishop, who
+had received that dignity from Pope Martin V. He reduced Lançerota,
+Fuerteventura, Gomera, and Ferro; whence he sent into Spain many slaves,
+and considerable quantities of honey, wax, camphire, hides, orchill, figs,
+dragons-blood, and other merchandize, of which he made good profit. This
+armament is said to have likewise discovered Porto Santo. The island
+first occupied by Betancourt was Lançerota, where he built a castle of
+stone for the better defence of the new settlers.
+
+In the year 1418, John Gonzales Zarco, and Tristram Vaz Teixera,
+gentlemen of the household to Don Henry, perceiving the great desire of
+their master to discover new countries, requested and obtained a bark to
+proceed to the coast of Africa; where they were overtaken by a violent
+tempest, and driven into a haven of the island now called Porto Santo,
+where they remained two years. In 1420, they discovered the island of
+Madeira, where they found the chapel, tomb, and stone on which Macham had
+engraved his name. Others write, that a Castilian had informed Don Henry
+of having made the discovery of Porto Santo; and that he sent
+Bartholomew Perestrello, John Gonzales Zarco, and Tristram Vaz Teixera,
+purposely in search of that island, according to the signs and directions
+indicated by the Castilian; and that these persons afterwards discovered
+Madeira in 1420, where they found the memorial and monument left by
+Macham the Englishman.
+
+Betancourt, who begun the conquest of the Canaries, was slain in a war
+with the natives, leaving one Menante his heir; who afterwards sold the
+islands to one Peter Barba of Seville. But others say, that John de
+Betancourt went to France to procure reinforcements, to enable him to
+complete his conquests, and left the command of Lançerota with his
+nephew; who, hearing nothing of his uncle, and being unable to continue
+the contest with the natives, sold the Canaries to Don Henry, for an
+estate in the island of Madeira.
+
+It is related that, in 1424, Don Henry sent a squadron with some land
+forces, under Don Ferdinando de Castro, on purpose to make a conquest of
+these islands; but, being repulsed by the bravery of the natives, de
+Castro prudently desisted from the enterprize and returned home; and
+that Don Henry afterwards resigned his claim to these islands in favour
+of the crown of Castile. The Castilian writers, however, assert that both
+Don Henry and the king of Portugal refused to give up these islands,
+until the dispute was ended by the judgment of Pope Eugenius IV. who
+awarded them to the king of Castile. These islands, anciently called the
+Insulae Fortunatae, or Fortunate Islands, are seven in number, in lat.
+28° N. where the longest day is thirteen hours, and the longest night the
+same. They are 200 leagues distant from the coast of Spain, and 18
+leagues from the coast of Africa. The people were idolaters, and eat raw
+flesh for want of fire. They had no iron, but raised or tilled the ground
+with the horns of oxen and goats, for want of better implements of
+husbandry. Every island spoke a separate language, and many pagan customs
+prevailed among the natives; but now the Christian religion is planted
+among them. The commodities of these islands are wheat, barley, sugar,
+wine, and Canary-birds, which are much esteemed for the sweetness and
+variety of their song. In the island of Ferro they have no water but what
+proceeds in the night from a tree, encompassed by a cloud, whence water
+issues, and serves the whole inhabitants and cattle of the island[4].
+
+In the year 1428, Don Pedro, the king's _eldest_[5] son, who was a great
+traveller, went into England, France, and Germany, and thence into the
+Holy Land and other places, and came home by Italy, through Rome and
+Venice. He is said to have brought a map of the world home with him, in
+which all parts of the earth were described, by which the enterprizes of
+Don Henry for discovery were much assisted. In this map the Straits of
+Magellan are called the _Dragons-tail_, and the Cape of Good Hope the
+_Front of Africa_, and so of the rest[6]. I was informed by Francis de
+Sosa Tavares, that in the year 1528, Don Fernando, the king's eldest son,
+shewed him a map which had been made 120 years before, and was found in
+the study of Alcobaza, which exhibited all the navigation of the East
+Indies, with the cape of Bona Sperança, as in our latter maps; by which
+it appears that there was as much discovered, or more, in ancient times
+as now[7].
+
+Though attended with much trouble and expence, Don Henry was unwearied in
+prosecuting his plan of discoveries. At length Gilianes, one of his
+servants, passed Cape Bojador, a place terrible to all former navigators,
+and brought word that it was by no means so dangerous as had been
+represented, he having landed on its farther side, where he set up a
+wooden cross in memorial of his discovery.
+
+In the year 1433 died John king of Portugal, and was succeeded by his
+eldest son Duarte or Edward. In 1434, Don Henry sent Alphonso Gonzales
+Balduja and Gillianes, who penetrated from Cape Bajador to another cape,
+where they found the country to be inhabited, and went forward to another
+point of land, whence they returned to Portugal. In 1438 king Duarte died,
+and his son Alphonso being young, the kingdom was governed during his
+minority by his uncle Don Pedro. In 1441, Don Henry sent out two ships
+under Tristan and Antonio Gonzales, who took a prize on the coast, and
+sailed to Cape Blanco, or the White Cape in lat. 20° N.[8]. From thence
+they brought home some Moors, from whom Don Henry learned the state of
+the country. Don Henry sent an account of these discoveries to Pope
+Martin, by one Fernan Lopez de Savado; and the Pope granted indulgences
+and everlasting pardon of sins to all who should die in attempting the
+discovery of the land of the infidels. In the year 1443, Don Henry
+commanded Antonio Gonzales to carry back the Moors to their own country,
+where they were ransomed for black Moors with curled hair, or negroes,
+and some gold; owing to which that place is now called Rio de Oro, or the
+Golden River, that thereby the desire of discovery might be the more
+increased. He sent soon afterward one named Nunnez Tristan, who
+discovered the islands of Arguin, who brought more slaves from thence to
+Portugal in 1444. One Lancarote, a groom of Don Henrys chamber, and
+three others, armed certain ships, with which they sailed along the coast
+to the islands of Garze, where they took 200 slaves, which were the first
+that were brought from thence to Portugal.
+
+In 1445, Gonsalvo de Syntra, an esquire belonging to Don Henry, went
+captain of a bark into these parts; and landing on the coast, was taken
+by the natives, with six or seven of his people The place where he was
+cut off got the name of Angra de Gonsalvo de Syntra from him; and this
+was the first loss sustained by the Portuguese in their discoveries. In
+1446, three caravels were sent out under Antonio Gonsales, Diego Aloizio,
+and Gomes Perez; who were ordered to refrain from going to Rio de Oro, to
+carry themselves peaceably to the natives, to traffic with them peaceably,
+and to endeavour to convert as many infidels as possible to Christianity;
+but in this they had no success. In the same year, Dennis Fernandes of
+Lisbon, an esquire to the king, entered upon these discoveries, more to
+acquire fame than for profit. In the course of his voyage he discovered
+the river _Sanaga_ or Senegal, between 15 and 16 degrees of latitude[9];
+and proceeding onwards, discovered Cape Verde, in 14 degrees[10], upon
+which he erected a wooden cross, and then returned, much elated at the
+success of his voyage. In 1447 Nunnez Tristan passed beyond Cape Verde to
+Rio Grande, and went beyond that river to another in twelve degrees[11].
+He was here taken and slain, with eighteen other Portuguese, and the ship
+was brought home in safety by four or five of the crew who escaped the
+hands of the negroes.
+
+In this year 1447, a Portuguese ship, in coming through the Straits of
+Gibraltar, was forced a great way to the westwards by a violent tempest,
+and came to an island having seven cities, the inhabitants of which spoke
+the Portuguese language, and they inquired of our mariners if the Moors
+still infested Spain, whence their ancestors had fled to avoid the
+distresses which occurred subsequent to the death of Don Roderigo, king
+of Spain. The boatswain of this ship brought home some of the sand from
+this island, and sold it to a goldsmith in Lisbon, who procured from it a
+good quantity of gold. Don Pedro, who then governed the realm, being made
+acquainted with this circumstance, caused the whole to be recorded in the
+house of justice[12]. Some think that this island belonged to what is now
+called the Antilles or New Spain; but though their reasons for this
+opinion are good, I omit them here, as not connected with my present
+purpose.
+
+In the year 1449, King Alphonso granted license to his uncle, Don Henry,
+to colonize the Açores, which had been formerly discovered. In the year
+1458, this king went into Africa, where he took the town of Alcaçer; and
+in the year 1461, he commanded Signior Mendez to build the castle of
+Arguin, in the island of that name, on the coast of Africa. In the year
+1462, three Genoese gentlemen, of whom Antonio de Noli was the chief, the
+others being his brother and nephew, got permission from Don Henry to
+take possession of the Cape de Verde islands, which some believe to be
+those called Gorgades, Hesperides, and Dorcades, by the ancients. But
+they named them Mayo, Saint Jago, and Saint Philip, because discovered on
+the days of those saints. Some call them the islands of Antonio. In the
+year following, 1463, that excellent prince, Don Henry, died; having
+discovered, by his exertions, the whole coast of Africa, from Cape Non to
+the mountain of Sierra Liona, which is on this side of the line, in lat.
+8° 30' N. where no man had been before.
+
+In 1469, the king of Portugal let out the trade of Guinea, afterwards
+called the Minas, to Fernan Gomez, for five years, at the yearly rent of
+200,000 rees[13]; and under the express condition that he was every year
+to discover 100 leagues farther along the coast of Africa to the south.
+In 1470, this king went into Africa, accompanied by his son Prince John,
+where he took the town of Arzila; and the inhabitants of Tangier having
+fled from fear, he took possession of it also. In the year 1471, John de
+St Aren and John de Scovar, under the orders of Fernan Gomez, continued
+the discovery of the coast of Guinea as far as St George del Mina, in lat.
+5° N. and 2° W. long.; the coast from Cape Verde to Cape Palmas trending
+S.E. after which it goes to the east, with even a small northerly
+inclination for about twelve degrees of longitude. In 1472, one Fernando
+da Poo discovered the island now called after his name, beyond Cape
+Formosa, in lat. 3° 40' N. and about the same time the islands del
+Principe and St Thomas were discovered, the latter of which is situated
+under the equinoctial line. The firm land also was explored at the same
+time, all the way from the kingdom of Benin to Cape St Catherina, in lat.
+1° 40' S. This last discovery was made by Sequetra, a person in the king's
+immediate service. Many suppose that then were these countries and
+islands discovered which had never been before known since the flood.
+
+In the year 1480, the valiant King Don Alphonzo died, and was succeeded
+by his son Don John II. who, in 1481, gave orders to Diego d'Azambuxa to
+construct the castle of St George del Mina, on the African coast. In 1484,
+Diego Caon, a knight belonging to the court, discovered the coast as far
+as the river Congo, on the south side of the line, in seven or eight
+degrees of latitude[14], where he erected a stone pillar, with the royal
+arms and titles of Portugal, with the date of his discovery. He proceeded
+southwards from thence along the coast, all the way to a river near the
+tropic of Capricorn, setting up similar stone pillars in convenient
+places. He afterwards returned to Congo, the king of which country sent
+ambassadors by his ship into Portugal. In the next year, or the year
+following, John Alonzo d'Aveiro brought home from Benin pepper with a
+tail[15], being the first of the kind ever seen in Portugal.
+
+In 1487, King John sent Pedro de Covillan and Alphonzo de Payva, both of
+whom could speak Arabic, to discover India by land. They left Lisbon in
+the month of May, and took shipping in the same year at Naples for the
+island of Rhodes, and lodged there in the hotel of the Knights of St John
+of Jerusalem, belonging to Portugal. From thence they went to Alexandria
+and Cairo, and then along with a caravan of Moors to the haven of Toro.
+There they embarked on the Red Sea, and proceeded to Aden, where they
+separated; de Payva going into Ethiopia, while Covillan proceeded to
+India. Covillan went to the cities of Cananor and Calicut, and thence to
+Goa, where he took shipping for Sofala, on the eastern coast of Africa.
+He thence sailed to Mosambique, and the cities of Quiloa, Mombaza, and
+Melinda, returning back to Aden, where he and Payva had formerly
+separated. Thence he proceeded to Cairo, where he hoped to have rejoined
+his companion; but he here learnt by letter from the king his master,
+that de Payva was dead, and he was farther enjoined by the king to travel
+into the country of Abyssinia[16] He returned therefore, from Cairo to
+Toro, and thence to Aden; and hearing of the fame of Ormuz, he proceeded
+along the coast of Arabia by Cape Razalgate to Ormuz. Returning from the
+Gulf of Persia to the Red Sea, he passed over to the realm of the
+Abyssinians, which is commonly called the kingdom of Presbyter John, or
+Ethiopia, where he was detained till 1520, when the ambassador, Don
+Roderigo de Lima, arrived in that country. This Pedro de Covillan was the
+first of the Portuguese who had ever visited the Indies and the adjacent
+seas and islands.
+
+In the year 1490, the king sent Gonzalo de Sosa to Congo with three ships,
+carrying back with him the ambassador of the king of Congo, who had been
+brought over to Portugal in 1484, by Diego Caon. During his residence in
+Portugal, this ambassador and others of his company had been instructed
+in the Christian religion, and baptized. Gonzalo de Sosa died during the
+outward-bound voyage; and Ruy de Sosa, his nephew, was chosen to the
+command of the expedition in his stead. Arriving in Congo, the king of
+that country received them with much joy, and soon yielded himself and
+the greater part of his subjects to be baptized; to the infinite
+satisfaction of the Portuguese, who by these means converted so many
+infidels from paganism to Christianity.
+
+
+[1] The only quotations used in this Section in the original translation
+    by Hakluyt, are from the Asia of John de Barros, Decade 1. which it
+    has not been deemed necessary to refer to here more particularly.--E.
+
+[2] It is singular that a Portuguese should not be more correct. Henry was
+    the _fifth_ son.--Clarke.
+
+[3] More accurately 28° 40'.--E.
+
+[4] Opportunities will occur hereafter, in particular voyages, to discuss
+    the circumstances of this wonderful tree.
+
+[5] Galvano is again mistaken. Edward or Duarte was the _eldest_ son;
+    Pedro the _third_.--Clarke.
+
+[6] Dr Vincent, in his Periplus, considers this as a copy of the map of
+    Marco Polo, which was exhibited in the church of St Michael de Murano,
+    at Venice.--Clarke.
+
+[7] Even if this were fact, it proves nothing, as the Cape of Good Hope
+    must have been inserted merely by the fancy of the draughtsman.--
+    Clarke.--It may be added, that in 1528, it was no difficult matter to
+    wrong date a forged map, on purpose to detract from the merit of the
+    actual discoverers.--E.
+
+[8] More correctly in lat. 20° 54' N. There is another Cape Blanco in
+    Morocco in lat. 33° 10' N. and this more southerly cape on the great
+    desert is named Branca in our best charts.--E.
+
+[9] The mouth of the Senegal is in lat. 15° 45' N.--E.
+
+[10] More correctly, 14° 45' N.--E.
+
+[11] It is difficult to ascertain these two rivers: The Rio Grande here
+    meant is properly named Gambia. The river in 12° N. may be the
+    Casamansa, the Santa Anna, or the St Dominico: which last is exactly
+    in 12° N. the two others a little farther north, and nearer the Gambia.
+    --E.
+
+[12] This is one of the many palpable and clumsy fables which were
+    advanced to defraud Columbus of the honour of having discovered the
+    new world, and is even more ridiculous, if possible, than the voyages
+    of Zeno, adverted to in our _First_ Part.--E.
+
+[13] Equal to L.138: 17: 9-1/4 d. English money.--Halk.
+
+[14] Only 6° 45' S.--E.
+
+[15] Mr Clarke explains this as _long pepper_; but besides that this by no
+    means answers the descriptive name in the text, long pepper certainly
+    is the production of the East Indies. The article here indicated was
+    probably one of the many species, or varieties of the Capsicum; called
+    Guinea pepper, Cayenne pepper, Bird pepper, and various other names.
+    --E.
+
+[16] In the original this is called the country of Prester or Presbyter
+    John. We have formerly, in the _First_ Part of this work, had occasion
+    to notice the strange idea of a Christian prince and priest, who was
+    supposed to have ruled among the pagan nations of eastern Tartary.
+    Driven from this false notion, by a more thorough knowledge of Asia,
+    the European nations fondly transferred the title of Prester John to
+    the half Christian prince or Negus of the semi-barbarous Abyssinians.
+    --E.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Summary of Discoveries made by the Spaniards and Portuguese, from the Era
+of Columbus, in 1492, to the year 1555_.
+
+In the year 1492, when Don Ferdinand king of Castile[1] was engaged in
+the siege of Granada, he sent _one_ Christopher Columbus, a Genoese, with
+three ships, for the discovery of Nova Spagna. This Columbus had first
+offered his service lot a western discovery to John king of Portugal, who
+refused to employ him. Being sufficiently furnished for his enterprize,
+Columbus set out from the town of Palos on the third of August 1492,
+having with him, as captains and pilots, Martin Alionzo Pinzon, Francis
+Martinez Pinzori, Vincent Yannes Pinzon, and Bartholomew Columbus his
+brother[2] with an hundred and twenty other persons in the three ships.
+Some persons affirm, that this was the first voyage which was ever
+conducted by the observation of latitudes[3]. They took the Canaries in
+their way, whence shaping their course for Cipango, or towards Japan,
+they were much amazed to find the sea all full of weeds, and with great
+fear arrived at the Antilles on the tenth day of October; the first
+island they descried, called Guanahany by the natives, they named San
+Salvador. This island is in 25° N. latitude. After that they found many
+islands, which they called the Princes. The savages of those parts call
+these islands by the name of Lucaios, having indeed several names for
+them, and they stand on the north side of the line, almost under the
+tropic of Cancer. The island of St James, or Jamaica, lies between the
+16th and 17th degrees of northern latitude[4]. Thence they went to the
+island which the natives call Cuba, named Ferdinando by the Spaniards,
+after the king, which is in 22 degrees; from whence they were conducted
+by the Indians to another island called Hayti, named Isabella by the
+Spaniards, in honour of the queen of Castile, and afterwards Hispaniola,
+or Little Spain.
+
+In that island the admirals ship was wrecked, and Columbus caused a fort
+to be constructed of her timbers and planks, in which he left Roderigo de
+Arana with a garrison of thirty-eight men, to learn the language and
+customs of the country. Columbus then returned to Spain, carrying with
+him samples of gold and pearls, and other productions of the country,
+with ten Indians, six of whom died on the voyage; the rest were brought
+to Spain and baptized. On their way home, Columbus touched at the Açores;
+and on the fourth of March 1493, entered the port of Lisbon. This
+discovery gave much discontent to the king of Portugal. Immediately on
+his arrival, Columbus went into Castile, where he informed the king of
+his discoveries and of the dissatisfaction of the king of Portugal. On
+this he and his queen Isabella sent word of the recent discovery to Pope
+Alexander VI, at which information he and all the Italians were much
+astonished, as they marvelled that there should be any land besides what
+had been known to the Romans. Alexander made a grant of all these
+countries to the crowns of Castile and Leon, under condition that they
+should labour to extirpate idolatry, and establish the holy faith of
+Christ among the natives.
+
+On the report of this discovery, so universal a desire of travelling
+arose among the Spaniards, that they were ready as it were to leap into
+the sea, that they might swim if possible to the newly discovered islands.
+After receiving the authority of the Pope, King Ferdinando sent Columbus
+a second time to the newly-discovered country, of which he made him
+admiral, giving him many other honours, and a particular coat of arms,
+having this motto,
+
+  For Castile and for Leon
+  A new world discovered Colon[A].
+
+[A] Gomara, I. 1. c. 15.
+
+Columbus set out on his second voyage to the Antilles on the 25th October
+1493, taking his course from Cadiz, with seventeen ships and fifteen
+hundred men, accompanied by his brothers Bartholomew and Diego Columbus,
+with many other knights, gentlemen of the law, and priests; having
+chalices, crosses, and other rich religious ornaments, and with great
+power and dignity from the Pope. The tenth day after commencing their
+voyage, they reached the Canaries; and from thence, in twenty-five or
+thirty days, they sailed to the Antilles, the first island they saw being
+in 14° N. due west from Cape de Verd in Africa. They called this island
+Deseada[5], or the _desired island_, which is said to be 800 leagues from
+the Canaries. They afterwards discovered many more islands, which they
+called the Virgins, but which are named the Caribbee islands by the
+natives, from a nation of that name, who are bold warriors, and excellent
+marksmen with bows and arrows. They poison their arrows with the juice of
+a certain herb, and whoever is wounded with these is sure to die, biting
+himself like a mad dog. From thence they went to the principal island in
+these parts, named Boriquen by the natives, and St John by the Spaniards;
+and thence to Hispaniola, or Isabella, where they found all the men dead
+whom they had left on returning from the former voyage. Columbus left
+most of his people here to establish a colony, under the command of his
+brothers; and went with two ships to continue his discovery of Cuba and
+Jamaica. All these islands are between 16 and 20 degrees of northern
+latitude[6]. While the admiral was sailing in quest of discoveries, his
+brethren and those who were left in Hispaniola, were much incommoded by
+an insurrection among the savages; and Columbus went back to Spain, to
+give an account of his proceedings to the king and queen.
+
+In January 1494, a congress of ambassadors from Spain and Portugal was
+held at Tordesillas, for the settlement of all disputes between the two
+countries respecting the new discoveries. The plenipotentiaries from
+Spain were Don Henry Henriques, Don John de Cardenas, and the Doctor
+Maldonado; those from Portugal, Ruy de Sosa, his son Don John, and the
+doctor Ayres de Almada. After some conference, these plenipotentiaries
+divided the world between the two crowns, by a meridian line drawn from
+north to south, 300 leagues to the west of the islands of Cape Verd, all
+to the east of this line being appropriated to Portugal, and all to the
+west to Spain; leaving, however, the liberty of navigation equally to
+both[7]. In 1495, John II. King of Portugal, died, and was succeeded by
+his cousin Emanuel.
+
+In the year 1496, a Venetian named John Cabota, or Gabota, went to
+England; and having acquired a knowledge of the new discoveries, and
+perceiving by the globe that the islands of the Antilles were almost in
+the same latitude with his own country, and lay much nearer to England
+than Spain and Portugal, he acquainted Henry VII. with this circumstance,
+and offered his services to make discoveries for the crown of England.
+Henry was much pleased with the proposal, and furnished him with two
+ships and three hundred men, with which he set sail in the spring of that
+year, and sailed west till he came in sight of land, in lat. 45°N. Whence
+he sailed northwards till he came into the latitude of 60 degrees, where
+the day is 18 hours long, and the night is very clear and bright. He
+there found the air very cold, with great islands of ice, and found no
+bottom with a line of 100 fathoms. From thence, finding the land turn
+eastwards, he coasted along it, discovering all the bay and river named
+Deseado[8], to see if it passed on to the other side of the land. Cabot
+afterwards sailed down the coast to the lat. of 38°N. though some people
+allege that he reached Cape Florida, in 25°N.
+
+In the year 1497, Columbus was again sent out on discovery, with six
+ships furnished by the crown of Spain, and two others fitted out at his
+own expence. Sending his brother before, he sailed from Cadiz, taking his
+son Don Diego along with him. It was then reported, that he meant to take
+the island of Madeira, because he distrusted the Frenchmen, and therefore
+sent three ships thither; others say, that his object was for the
+Canaries. However this may be, he went with four ships to the Cape de
+Verd islands, whence he ran along a parallel, finding great rains and
+calms, and the first land he came to in the Antilles was an island in
+nine degrees of north latitude, called Trinidada,[9] which lies close to
+the main land. Here he entered the Gulf of Paria, and came out by the
+Bocca de Dragone, or Dragons-mouth. Holding his course westwards along
+the coast of Paria, he came to the islands called Los Testigos, or the
+Witnesses, beyond which is the island of Cubagua, where there is a great
+fishing for pearl-muscles, and where also there is a well of rock oil.
+Beyond that he came to the Frailes islands, named Roques, Aruba, and
+Curaçoa, and other small islands, along the coast of the main land, and
+to the point of land named Cabo de Vela, having discovered 200 leagues of
+coast. He thence crossed over the Caribbean Sea, directly north for
+Hispaniola, passing by the island Beata.
+
+In this same year[10] 1497, on the 20th day of June[11], King Emanuel
+sent a squadron of three ships for India, commanded by one Vasques de
+Gama, having under his command his brother Paulus de Gama and Nicolas
+Coello, as captains of the other two ships, the whole having a complement
+of 120 men. They were accompanied by a fourth ship laden with provisions.
+In fourteen days they reached the island of St Jago, one of the Cape
+Verds, whence they went along the coast beyond the Cape of Good Hope,
+erecting pillars of stone in proper places, as marks of discovery and
+possession, and came to Mosambique in lat. 15° S. After staying only a
+short time there, de Gama went to Mombaza and Melinda, the king of which
+last place gave him pilots, who conducted him to India, in which passage
+he discovered Los Baxos do Padua, or the Flats of Padua. In the month of
+May 1498, de Gama came to anchor before the city of Calicut, _and
+Panama_[12], where they remained till the first day of September, when
+they sailed towards the north, discovering all the coast till they came to
+the island of Angediva, on the western side of India, in 15° N. where they
+came to an anchor in the beginning of October. They remained here till
+February 1499, when they departed on their voyage homewards; coming first
+to Melinda, and so by Mosambique and along the coast to the Cape of Good
+Hope, and by the islands of Cape de Verd, and lastly to the city of Lisbon,
+in September of that year, having been absent on their voyage for twenty-
+six months.
+
+On the 13th of November 1499, Vincent Yannez Pinzon, who had sailed with
+Columbus in his first voyage of discovery, and his nephew Aries Pinzon,
+departed from the port of Palos with four well appointed ships, fitted
+out at their own cost, having a license from the king of Spain to
+prosecute discoveries in the new world, but with express orders not to
+touch anywhere that had been visited by Columbus. Going first to the
+islands of Cape de Verd, they passed the line and stood over towards the
+new world, which they fell in with at Cape St Augustine, in lat. 8° 30' S.
+where they carved on the barks of trees the date of their arrival, and
+the names of the king and queen of Spain. They had several skirmishes
+with the inhabitants of Brazil, but got no advantage. Following the coast
+westwards[13], they entered the river named Maria Tambal, by which time
+they had made above thirty prisoners. The chief places where they touched
+were Cape St Augustine, Cape St Luke, Tierra de los Humos; the rivers of
+Marannon and of the Amazons, and the Rio Dolce, or Sweet river[14], and
+other places along the coast. At last, being come to 10° N. they lost two
+of their ships with their crews, and returned home, after having employed
+ten months and fifteen days in their voyage.
+
+In March 1500, Pedro Alvarez Cabral sailed from Lisbon with thirteen
+ships for India, being ordered not to go near the coast of Africa, that
+he might shorten the voyage. Losing sight of one of his ships, he
+deviated from his course in hopes to rejoin it, and sailed till he
+unexpectedly fell in with the coast of Brazil, where he sent a bark in,
+search of a safe harbour, which they found in 17° S. and called it Puerto
+Seguro. From thence they made sail for the Cape of Good Hope and Melinda,
+whence they crossed over to the river of Cochin, which was not before
+known. Here they loaded with pepper; and on their return Sancho de Thovar
+discovered the city of Sofala, on the eastern coast of Africa.
+
+It is reported, that in the year 1500, one Gaspar Cortereal got a general
+license from King Emanuel to make discoveries in the new world. He fitted
+out two stout ships at his own cost, from the island of Tercera, and
+sailed to that part of the new world which is in 50° N. which has been
+since known by his name, and came home in safety to Lisbon. In a second
+voyage, his own immediate vessel was lost, and the other came home. Upon
+this, his brother Michael Cortereal went to seek him with three ships,
+fitted out at his own charges; and finding many creeks and rivers on the
+coast, the ships divided for the more effectual search, agreeing that
+they should all meet again at an appointed time and place. The other two
+ships did so; but after waiting a reasonable rime for Michael Cortereal,
+it was concluded that he was also lost, on which the other two ships
+returned to Lisbon, and no news was ever afterwards heard of the two
+brothers; but the country where they were lost is still called the land
+of Cortereal[15].
+
+In March 1501, John de Nova sailed from Lisbon with four ships for India.
+In his outward-bound voyage he discovered an island in the Atlantic, in
+lat. 8° S. to which he gave the name of Ascension[16]. On his return from
+India, he fell in with another island in the Atlantic in 17° S. called St
+Helena, which, though very small, is yet of great importance from its
+situation. In the month of May of the same year 1501, three ships were
+sent from Lisbon by King Emanuel, to make a discovery of the coast of
+Brazil, which had been accidentally fallen in with, by Cabral: Passing by
+the Canaries, they stopped for refreshments at the town of Bezequiche in
+the Cape Verds; and passing southwards from thence beyond the line, they
+fell in with Brazil in five degrees of south latitude, at Cape St Roquo,
+and sailed along the coast southwards, till they reckoned themselves to
+have reached 32° S. Finding the weather cold and tempestuous, they turned
+back in the month of April 1502, and got to Lisbon In September of that
+year, having been out fifteen months on their voyage.
+
+In the same year 1502, Alfonso Hojeda went to discover the Terra Firma,
+and followed its coast till he came to the province of Uraba I7. In 1503,
+Roderigo Bastidas of Seville went with two caravels at his own cost, to
+the Antilles, where he first came to the Isla Verde, or the Green island,
+close by Guadaloupe; whence he sailed westwards to Santa Martha and Cape
+do la Vela, and to the Rio Grande or Great river. He afterwards
+discovered the haven of Zamba, the Coradas, Carthagena, the islands of S.
+Bernard de Baru, the Islas de Arenas, Isla Fuerta, and the Point of
+Caribana, at the end of the Gulf of Uraba, where he had sight of the
+Farrallones, close by the river of Darien. From Cape de la Vela to this
+last place, which is in lat. 9° 40' N. is 200 leagues. From thence he
+stood over to Jamaica for refreshments. In Hispaniola he had to lay his
+ships on the ground to repair their bottoms, because a certain species of
+worms had eaten many holes in the planks. In this voyage Bastidas
+procured _four hundred marks_[18] of gold; though the people were very
+warlike, and used poisoned arrows.
+
+In the same year 1502, Columbus entered upon his fourth voyage of
+discovery, with four ships, taking with him his son Don Ferdinando. The
+particular object of this voyage, by command of King Ferdinand, was to look
+out for the strait which was supposed to penetrate across the continent
+of the new world, and by which a route to India by the west was expected
+to be discovered. He sailed by Hispaniola and Jamaica to the river Azua,
+Cape Higueras, the Gamares islands, and to Cape Honduras, which signifies
+the Cape of the Depths. From thence he sailed eastwards to Cape Garcias a
+Dios, and discovered the province and river of Veragua, the Rio Grande,
+and others, which the Indians call Hienra. Thence to the river of
+Crocodiles, now called Rio de Chagres, which rises near the South Sea,
+within four leagues of Panama, and runs into the Caribbean Sea. He went
+next to the Isle of Bastimentos, or of Provisions, and after that to
+Porto Bello; thence to Nombre de Dios and Rio Francisco, and the harbour
+of Retreat. Then to the Gulf of Cabesa Cattiva, the islands of Caperosa
+and Cape Marmora; having discovered two hundred leagues along the coast.
+He thence returned to the island of Cuba, and from that to Jamaica, where
+he laid his ships aground, on account of their bottoms being much eaten
+by the worms.
+
+On the tenth of February 1S02, Don Vasques de Gama, now admiral, sailed
+from Lisbon for India, with nineteen or twenty caravels. On the last day
+of February he reached Cape de Verd, whence he went to Mosambique, and
+was the first who crossed over from thence to India. In this passage he
+discovered the islands of Amirante, in four degrees of south latitude.
+Having taken in a cargo of pepper and drugs, de Gama returned to Lisbon,
+leaving Vincent Sodre to keep the coast of India, with four stout ships.
+These were the first of the Portuguese who navigated the coast of Arabia
+Felix, which is so barren, that the inhabitants are forced to support
+their camels and other cattle on dried fish. The sea on that coast is so
+abundant in fish, that the cats are in use to take them. One Antonio de
+Saldania is reported to have discovered Socotora, formerly named Coradis,
+and the Cape of Guardafu in 1503.
+
+In 1504, Roderigo de Bastidas, formerly mentioned, with the aid of John
+de Ledesma, and others of Seville, fitted out two ships, and taking John
+de Cosa as his pilot, went on discovery to the Terra Firma of America,
+where Carthagena now stands. He is said to have here met with Lewis de la
+Guerra, and they in conjunction landed in the island of Codego, where
+they made prisoners of 600 savages. Going a little farther along the
+coast, they entered the Gulf of Uraba, where they found sand mingled with
+gold, being the first of that kind which was brought to Spain. From
+thence they sailed for St Domingo, loaded with slaves, but almost
+famished for want of victuals, as the natives refused to traffic with
+them for any. In the end of this year Isabella, queen of Castile, died.
+While she lived, no subject of Arragon, Catalonia, Valencia, or any other
+of the provinces, depending on her husband King Ferdinand, was allowed to
+sail to any of the newly-discovered countries; but only her own subjects
+of Castile and Biscay, by whom all these lands were discovered; excepting
+only such of her husbands subjects as might be in a servile capacity to
+her own, or a few that could procure special licenses.
+
+In 1505, on the twenty-fifth of March, Francisco de Almeida, the viceroy
+of India, sailed from Lisbon with a fleet of twenty-two sail. On his way
+to India, he stopped at Quiloa, where he built a fort, appointing Peter
+Fereira to command it. From beyond Melinda he passed over to the island
+of Anguediva, of which he appointed Emanuel Passavia to be captain. He
+built a fort also at Cananor, of which he gave the command to Laurence de
+Brito; and one at Cochin, which was given in charge to Alphonso de
+Noronha. This year likewise, Peter de Anahay built a fort at Sofala, of
+which he was made captain. In the latter end of this year the viceroy
+commanded his son Laurenço to go to the islands of Maldivia. Beating up
+against contrary winds, he arrived at these islands which in ancient
+times were called Traganæ[19], but Ytterubenero by the Moors, and by us
+Ceilan. Here he went on shore, and entered into treaty with the people,
+and returned to Cochin. In the middle of this island there is a high rock,
+having the print of a mans foot, said to have been that of Adam when he
+ascended to heaven, which the Indians hold in great reverence.
+
+In 1506, after the death of Isabella, King Philip and Queen Joan came to
+take possession of the crown of Castile, and. King Ferdinand retired into
+his own dominions of Arragon. In that same year Philip died, and
+Ferdinand resumed the government, giving license to all Spaniards to go
+to the new discovered countries; but not allowing the Portuguese to go
+there. In this year, likewise, Christopher Columbus died, in the month of
+May, and was succeeded in his dignities by his son Don Diego.
+
+In March 1506, Tristan de Acunha and Alphonso de Albuquerque went to
+India with fourteen ships, and refreshed by the way at Bezequiche, in the
+Cape de Verd islands. Before reaching the Cape of Good Hope they
+discovered certain islands, in 37° S. which are now called the islands of
+Tristan de Acunha. During this voyage, the fleet was dispersed by a
+tempest, and Alvaro Teliz ran so far that he came to Sumatra, whence he
+returned to Cape Guardafu, having discovered many islands, seas, and
+countries, not known before that time to the Portuguese. At the same time,
+Emanuel Telez de Meneses was driven on the outside of the great island of
+St Lawrence, or Madagascar, and having surveyed its coasts, came to
+Mosambique, where he met with Tristan de Acunha, who was the first
+captain that wintered there. Meneses, having reported that there was
+plenty of ginger, cloves, and silver in Madagascar, was sent back there,
+and traversed a considerable part of the island; but not finding any
+thing of value, returned to Mosambique, whence he went to Melinda, and
+Brava, and thence to Socotora, where he built a fort, of which he
+appointed one Antonio de Noronha to be captain. In 1507, Tristan de
+Acunha returned to Europe, and Alphonso de Albuquerque remained in India
+with five or six ships, to keep the command of the sea. In the course of
+that year or the next, Albuquerque stood over to discover the coast of
+Arabia, which he explored, and doubled the Cape of Rosalgate, which is
+under the tropic of Cancer.
+
+In 1509, Diego Lopez de Sequiera went from Lisbon for India with four
+ships; and stopping at the island of Madagascar was almost a year on his
+voyage. Arriving at Cochin in the month of May, the viceroy gave him
+another ship, in which he went to Malacca in September passing between
+the islands of Nicubar and many others. He went also to Sumatra; to the
+cities of Pedir and Pacem; and all along that coast to the island of
+Puloreira, and the fiats of Capacia; thence he stood over to the city of
+Malacca, in lat. 2° N. where the people took and slew some of his men.
+After this he returned to Cochin, having discovered five hundred leagues
+in this voyage. The island of Sumatra is the first land in which we knew
+of mens flesh being eaten, by certain people in the mountains called
+Bacas, who gild their teeth. In their opinion the flesh of the blacks is
+sweeter than that of the whites. The flesh of the oxen, kine, and hens in
+that country is as black as ink. A people is said to dwell in that
+country, called _Daraqui-Dara_, having tails like sheep[20]. There are
+likewise springs of rock oil or bitumen. In the kingdom of Pedir,
+likewise, there is said to be a river of oil; which is not to be wondered
+at, as we are assured there is also a well of oil in Bactria. It is
+further said that there is a tree in that country, the juice of which is
+a strong poison if it touch a mans blood; but if drank, it is a sovereign
+antidote against poison. They have here also certain gold coins, called
+drachms, brought, as they say, into their country by the Romans[21],
+which seems to have some resemblance to truth, because beyond that
+country there are no gold coins.
+
+In 1508, Alphonso de Hojeda went with the license of King Ferdinand, but
+at his own charges, to conquer the province of Darien, in the Terra Firma
+of the new world. Landing in the country of Uraba, he called it Castilia
+del Oro, or Golden Castile, because of the gold found in the sand along
+its coast. He went first from the city of San Domingo, in Hispaniola,
+with four ships and three hundred soldiers, leaving behind him the
+bachelor Anciso, who afterwards compiled a book of these discoveries. He
+was followed by a fourth ship with provisions and ammunition, and a
+reinforcement of 150 Spaniards. Hojeda landed at Carthagena, where the
+natives took, slew, and devoured seventy of his men, by which his force
+was much weakened. Some time after but in the same year, Diego de Niquesa
+fitted out seven ships in the port of Beata, intending to go to Veragua
+with 800 men; but coming to Carthegana, where he found Hojeda much
+weakened by his losses, they joined their forces, and avenged themselves
+of the natives. In this voyage Niquesa discovered the coast called Nombre
+de Dios, and went into the sound of Darien, on the river Pito, which he
+named Puerto de Misas. Coming to Veragua, Hojeda went on shore with his
+soldiers, and built there the town of Caribana, as a defence against the
+Caribbees; being the first town built by the Spaniards on the continent
+of the new world. He also built another at Nombre de Dios, and called it
+Nuestra Seniora de la Antigua. A town was built at Uraba, in which
+Francis Pisarro was left with the command, who was there much annoyed by
+the natives. They likewise built other towns, the names of which I omit.
+In this enterprize the Spaniards did not meet with the success they
+expected.
+
+In 1509, Don Diego Columbus, the second admiral of New Spain, went to the
+island of Hispaniola with his wife and household; and she, being a noble
+woman, carried with her many ladies of good families, who were there
+married; by which means the Spaniards began to multiply in their new
+colony, and Hispaniola became famous and much frequented. Columbus
+likewise reduced Cuba into order, and took measures for its colonization,
+where he placed one Diego Velasques as his lieutenant, who had
+accompanied his father in his second voyage of discovery.
+
+In April 1511, Alphonso de Albuquerque went to Malacca from Cochin; and
+finding certain Chinese about to return from Malacca into their own
+country, he sent a Portuguese along with them, named Duarte Fernandes,
+with letters for the king of the Mantias, now called Siam. They passed
+through the Straits of Cincapura, and sailed northwards along the coast
+of Patane to the city of Cuy, and thence to Odia, the chief city of the
+kingdom, in 14° N.[22]. The king of this country received Duarte with
+great honour, as he was the first Portuguese who had been in these parts,
+and sent back ambassadors along with him to Albuquerque. They travelled
+overland to the westwards, till they came to Tanacerim, on the Bay of
+Bengal, in 12° N. where they embarked in two ships and sailed to Malacca.
+The inhabitants of Siam, through which they travelled, eat of all kinds
+of beasts, and even of what we repute to be vermin. The people of this
+country are reputed the most virtuous and honest of any in those parts of
+the world, and pride themselves much on their poverty and chastity; yet
+have a strange practice of carrying round bells within their foreskins,
+which is not permitted to the king and priests. They do not rear any
+poultry or pigeons about their houses. The kingdom is 250 leagues in
+length and 80 in breadth[23].
+
+Elephants are so numerous in this country, that on going to war, the king
+is said to carry 30,000 into the field, besides others which are left in
+the several garrisons. This king has great pride in the possession of a
+white elephant, having red eyes, which glare like a flame of fire. In
+this country there is a certain species of small vermin, which attaches
+itself to the trunks of the elephants, to suck their blood, by which many
+elephants die. The skull of this insect[24] is so hard as to be
+impenetrable to a musket shot. They have on their livers the figures of
+men and women, which the natives call Toketa, resembling a mandrake; and
+it is affirmed, that whoever has one of these about him cannot be killed
+by an iron weapon. They have also wild kine in this country, in the heads
+of which certain stones are found, which have the virtue to bring good
+fortune to merchants.
+
+After the return of Duarte Fernandes from Siam, Albuquerque sent a knight
+named Ruy Nunnez de Acunha, as ambassador to the king of the Sequies, the
+country we now call Pegu. He went in a junk of the country, passing Cape
+Rachado, and thence to the city of Pera, on the river Salano, on which
+river are many other villages, where Duarte had been before; and he
+afterwards went by Tanaçerim to the city of Martavan, in 15° N. and the
+city of Pegu in 17° N. This was the first Portuguese who travelled in
+that kingdom, and who brought back a good account of the country and
+people.
+
+In the end of 1511, Albuquerque sent three ships to the islands of Banda
+and Molucca, under command of Antonio de Breu and Francis Serrano, with
+an hundred and twenty men. Passing through the Straits of Saban, and
+along the island of Sumatra, and other islands on their left, named the
+Salites, they came to the islands of Palimbang and Lu-Suparam, whence
+they sailed by the noble island of Java, and eastwards between it and the
+island of Madura. In this last island the men are strong and warlike, and
+care little for their lives, even their women going out to war. These
+people are almost continually engaged in war and mutual slaughter, like
+the Mocos, and seem to place their only delight in bloodshed. Beyond Java
+they came to another island called Bali, and afterwards to Avajave,
+Sambaba, Solor, Galao, Malva, Vitara, Rosalanguin, and Arus; whence are
+brought beautiful birds, in much estimation on account of their
+feathers[25]. Beyond these islands they came to numbers of others, lying
+in 7 or 8 degrees of south latitude, all so close together as to appear
+like one entire mainland, and stretching near 500 leagues in length. The
+ancient cosmographers describe all these islands by one general name, the
+_Javos_; but more recent knowledge has found that they have all separate
+names. Beyond these, and more to the north, there are other islands, which
+are inhabited by a whiter people, clothed in shirts, doublets, and
+trowsers, something like the Portuguese dress, and who also have silver
+money. Their magistrates carry red staves in their hands, as badges of
+command, and seem to have some affinity in this respect with the people of
+China. There are other islands in these parts, or which the inhabitants
+are red; and it is reported they are the same people with the Chinese.
+
+De Breu went northwards to the small island of Gumnape or Ternate, from
+the highest part of which flakes or streams like fire fell continually
+into the sea. He went thence to the islands of Burro and Amboyna, and
+came to anchor in the haven of Guliguli, where, in a village near a river,
+they found dead men hanging up in the houses, as the people are cannibals.
+Here they burnt the ship of Serrano, as she was old and rotten; and going
+to a place on the other side of the island, in 8° S. they loaded cloves,
+nutmegs, and mace, in a junk or barque, which Serrano bought. It is said,
+that in an island not far from Banda, there are immense quantities of
+snakes, especially in a cave in the centre of the island. The same is
+said of Formentera, in the Mediterranean, anciently Ophiusa, between
+Majorca and Minorca. On their return from Banda towards Malacca, in 1512,
+Francis Serrano perished with his junk on the flats called Baxos de
+Luçapinho, nine or ten of the Portuguese crew escaping to the island of
+Mindanao, who were sent for by the kings of the Moluccas. These were the
+first of the Portuguese who came to the Islands of Cloves, which are in
+lat. 1° N. and they remained there seven or eight years. Some Portuguese
+and princes of the Moors once endeavoured to go near that part of the
+isle of Ternate which throws out fire, but could not accomplish it. But
+Antonio Galvano accomplished this enterprise, and found a spring so cold
+that he could not bear his hand in the water, nor suffer any of it in his
+mouth, though almost directly under the line.
+
+In these Molucca islands, there are certain men who have spurs on their
+ancles like cocks; and I was told by the king of Tidore, that in the
+islands of Batochina, there are people with tails, who have a lactiferous
+nipple on the scrotum. There are small hens also in these parts, many of
+which are black in the flesh, and lay their eggs, larger than those of
+ducks, in holes above nine feet under ground. They have likewise hogs
+with horns, and excellent talking parrots, which they call _Noris_. There
+is also a river so very hot that it takes off the skin of any living
+creature that bathes in its waters, and yet contains living fish. Their
+crabs are very sweet to eat, yet their claws are so strong that they will
+break the iron of a pickax; and there are small hairy crabs in the sea
+which are rank poison, as whoever eats of them immediately dies. In these
+seas are certain oysters, called _Bras_, having shells of so great size,
+that they might serve as fonts for baptizing children. In these seas
+there are certain living stones, which grow and increase like plants, of
+which excellent lime may be made by burning in the usual manner, when
+taken fresh from the sea; but, if allowed to remain long in the air, it
+loses all its strength, and will not afterwards burn into line. There is
+a tree which bears flowers only at sunset, which fell off immediately
+when blown. There is likewise a certain fruit, whereof if a woman who has
+conceived shall eat, the child by and by moves. There is, farther, a
+certain herb which followeth the sun, and removes after it, which is a
+strange and marvellous thing.
+
+In 1512, while on the voyage from Malacca to Goa, the ship in which
+Albuquerque embarked was lost. Simon de Andrada and a few Portuguese were
+driven among the Maldivia islands, where they remained till they learnt
+the fate of the viceroy. These islands are low, small, and very numerous,
+and are full of palm trees, or _Cocoas_, which are good against all kinds
+of poison.
+
+In this year 1512, John de Solis, a native of Lisbon, and chief pilot to
+King Ferdinand, went from Spain by license to discover the coast of
+Brazil. Following the course of the Pinsons, he went to Cape St Augustine,
+and thence sailed along the whole coast to the harbour of De Lagoa; and
+in lat. 35° S. he discovered a river called Parana-guaçu, or the Great
+River, and from signs of silver he gave it the name of Rio de la Plata,
+or the River of Silver. It is even said that he went farther at this time;
+and returning into Spain, gave an account of his discovery to King
+Ferdinand, from whom he demanded and obtained leave to colonize the
+country, and received the appointment of governor. On this he provided
+three ships, and returned to that country in 1515, but was slain by the
+natives. The family of de Solis produced several great discoveries in
+these parts[26].
+
+In the same year 1512, John Ponce de Leon, who had been governor of the
+island of St John in the Antilles, armed two ships, with which he went in
+search of the island of Boyuca, where it was reported there was a spring
+which made old men young again; but after searching for six months he
+could not find it. In 25° N. he discovered a point of the continent upon
+Easter-day, which he called the country of Florida; and because he
+expected the land would yield gold and silver, he begged it from King
+Ferdinand, but died in the discovery of the country, as many had done
+before.
+
+In the year 1513, Vasco Nunnes de Valboa, or Balboa, hearing of the
+_South Seas_, determined to go thither; and being a man of courage,
+though strongly dissuaded by several of his company, he marched on the
+enterprize with 290 men. Leaving Darien on the first of September, and
+taking some Indians along with him as guides, he marched directly across
+the isthmus, sometimes without opposition, and having at other times to
+fight his way. In a certain place called Careca, he found some negroes
+with curled hair, who were captives among the Indians. At length, on the
+25th of the same month of September, being the festival of St Michael, he
+came in sight of the South Sea: He there embarked in a canoe, much
+against the will of _Chiapes_, the cacique of that part of the coast, who
+endeavoured to persuade him that the navigation was very dangerous; but
+he persisted in his design, that he might be the first who had navigated
+this new discovered sea, and came back in safety. He returned thence to
+Darien, bringing with him a good store of gold, silver, and pearls, which
+he had taken during the march; and for this good service, he was much
+honoured and favoured by King Ferdinand.
+
+In February 1513, Alphonsus de Albuquerque went from Goa towards the
+Straits of Mecca with twenty ships, and arriving at the city of Aden,
+battered it with his cannon, and passing the Straits entered the Red Sea,
+and wintered at the island of Camaran. This was the _first_ Portuguese
+captain who gave an account of the Red Sea and the Persian Gulf, which
+are of great importance in regard to trade.
+
+In May 1514, Pedro Arias de Avila was sent out from St Lucar, as governor
+of Castilia del Oro, or the Golden Castile, for so the Spaniards named
+the countries of Darien, Carthagena, and Uraba. He carried with him
+fifteen hundred men and seven ships; and Vasco Nunnes de Balboa, who
+discovered the South Seas, was sent out at the same time as admiral of
+the coasts of that newly discovered sea. In the beginning of the year
+1515, de Avila sent Gaspar Morales with 150 men to the Gulf of St Michael,
+to discover the islands of Tararequi[27], Chiapes, and Tumaccus. A
+cacique, the friend of Balboa, gave him many canoes, or boats made of one
+tree, with which they passed to the Isle of Pearls, where they were at
+first resisted; but Chiapes and Tumaccus pacified the cacique of that
+island, who submitted himself, and received baptism, taking the name of
+the governor, Pedro Arias, and presented Morales with a basket of pearls
+weighing 110 pounds, some of which were as large as hazel nuts, weighing
+20, 25, 26, and even 31 carats, each of four grains; and one of these
+pearls was sold for 1200 ducats. In March 1515, de Avila sent Gonsalva de
+Badajos, with 80 soldiers, to discover new lands, who went to Nombre de
+Dios, where he was joined by Lewis de Mercado with a reinforcement of 50
+men. They resolved to proceed to the south, as the richest country; and
+taking some Indians as guides, they found some slaves along the coast
+marked with the irons used by the Portuguese. They marched a considerable
+way through the country with much difficulty, but made a considerable
+booty in gold, and took forty serviceable slaves. But a caçique, named
+Pariza, attacked them and slew or took most of the party. After this the
+governor sent out his son, John Arias de Avila, to be revenged and to
+explore the country. This party went westwards to Cape de Guerra, in
+little more than 6° N. and thence to Punta de Borica, and to Cape Blanco,
+in 8° 30' N. having, as they affirm, discovered 250 leagues; and besides
+this they founded the city of Panama.
+
+In the month of May 1515, Alphonsus de Albuquerque, the Portuguese
+viceroy of India, sent Fernando Gomes de Limos from Ormus, as ambassador
+to the Xec or Shah Ismael, king of Persia; and it is said they travelled
+300 leagues through a country as pleasant as France. This Xec, or Shah
+Ismael, went much a-hunting, and was fond of trout fishing, which are
+abundant in the rivers of his kingdom. The women of Persia are the most
+beautiful in the world; insomuch that Alexander the Great used to call
+them the _golden-eyed women_. In this year died the viceroy Alphonsus de
+Albuquerque, who was succeeded by Lopez Suares.
+
+In 1516, Fernando Perez de Andrada was commanded by the king of Portugal
+to pass to the great kingdom of China and likewise to Bengala, with a
+dispatch to John Coelo, who was the first Portuguese who drank of the
+waters of the Ganges. In April 1517, Andrada took in a loading of pepper
+at Cochin, as the principal merchandize for sale in China, for which
+country he sailed with eight ships, four Portuguese and four Malayans. On
+his arrival in China, finding he could not be allowed to land without an
+embassy, he dispatched Thomas Perez, with instructions for that purpose,
+from the city of Canton, where they came to anchor. The embassy travelled
+400 leagues by land to the city of Pekin, where the king resided; for
+China is the largest kingdom in the world. From Sailana in the south,
+which is in 20° N. it reaches to the latitude almost of 50° N. which must
+be 500 leagues in length, and it is said to be 300 leagues in breadth[28].
+Fernando Perez was fourteen months in the isle of Veniaga, endeavouring
+to acquire as much knowledge as he could of the country; and although one
+Raphael Perestrello had formerly been there, in a junk belonging to some
+merchants of Malacca, yet Perez certainly deserves the merit of this
+discovery; as well because he acted by the command of the king his master,
+as in discovering so much by land by means of Thomas Perez, and by sea
+through George Mascarenhas, who sailed to the city of Foquiam, in 24° N.
+
+In the year 1517, in which Charles, afterwards emperor, came into Spain,
+Francis Fernandes de Cordova, Christopher Morantes, and Lopez Ochoa,
+armed three ships from Cuba, at their own expence, having also with them
+a barque belonging to the governor Diego Velasques, with which they came
+to land in Jucutan, in 20° N. at a place which they called Punta de las
+Duennas, which was the first place in which temples and houses of stone
+and lime had been seen in the new world. The people here, who were better
+clothed than in any other place, had crosses which they worshipped, and
+set upon the tombs of their dead, whence it appeared as if they had
+formerly been in the faith of Christ; and some suppose that this had been
+the situation of the _seven cities_. In this expedition they were upon
+the north coast of Jucutan, being the first discovery of New Spain, or
+Mexico; and they returned thence to Cuba with some samples of gold, and
+some prisoners.
+
+In the year 1518[29], Lopez Suares commanded Don John de Silveira to go
+and make peace with the Maldive islands, which he did accordingly. From
+thence Silveira went to the city of Chatigam, or Chittigong, on one of
+the mouths of the Ganges, under the tropic of Cancer; for it is to be
+noted, that this river, and the Indus, which lies 100 leagues beyond Diu,
+and the river of Canton in China, all fall into the sea under one
+parallel of latitude. Although, before this period, Fernando Perez had
+been commanded to sail to Bengal, yet Silveira must be looked upon as the
+actual discoverer of that country; for he went as captain-general, and
+remained there long, making himself acquainted with the manners of the
+people, and the commodities of the country.
+
+In the same year 1518[30], Diego Velasquez, governor of the island of
+Cuba, dispatched his nephew, John de Grisalva, on the first of May, with
+four ships and two hundred soldiers, to discover Jucutan. On the 3d of
+May, he fell in with the island of Cozumel, in 19° north latitude, which
+he named Santa Cruz, because discovered on the 3d of May, being the
+anniversary of the holy cross. Grisalva coasted along the land, on the
+west side of the bay of Honduras, and came to an island, which he named
+Ascension, because discovered on Ascension day. They went unto the end of
+that island, in 16° of latitude, whence they came back, finding no
+passage[31], and proceeded to a river in lat. 17° N. which they called
+the river of Grisalva. They were boldly opposed by the people on this
+coast; yet they brought thence some gold, silver, and feathers, and
+returned to Cuba. In the same year, Francis Garay fitted out three ships
+from Jamaica at his own expence, and went to Cape Florida, in lat. 25° N.
+which seemed a most pleasant island; and thinking it better to people
+islands than the firm land, because more easily conquered and kept under
+subjection, he went on land; but the inhabitants of Florida killed a
+great many of his people, and he was forced to re-embark and go away.
+Sailing from thence he came to the river of Panuco, 500 leagues from Cape
+Florida, sailing all the way along the coast, and endeavouring to land in
+various places, but the natives repulsed him in every place. Many of his
+people were killed and eaten by the savages in Chila, the natives hanging
+up their skins in the temples of their gods, as a memorial of their own
+valour. Yet Garay visited this place next year, as he had seen some
+indications of gold and silver, and even applied to the emperor to be
+appointed governor of the coast he had discovered. In February 1519[32],
+Fernando Cortez sailed from Cuba for the country now called New Spain,
+with eleven ships and 550 Spaniards. He landed first in the island of
+Cozumel, where he immediately destroyed all the idols, and planted
+crosses and images of the Virgin on all the altars. From thence he went
+to the Cabo de las Duennas, on the peninsula of Yucatan, and thence to
+the river of Tabasco, where he attacked a city called Potoncion. This
+place was surrounded with wood; the houses were built of stone and lime,
+and roofed with tiles, and the people resisted the assailants manfully;
+but St James appeared on horseback to the assistance of the Spaniards,
+and they took the place. This, as the first town subdued by them on the
+continent, they named Vittoria. From thence they went to a place named St
+Juan de Vilhua, said to be 60 or 70 leagues from Mexico, where one
+Tendilli was governor for King Muteçuma. Though the Spaniards and he
+could not understand each other, yet Tendilli gave them good
+entertainment. Cortes had twenty women along with his expedition, one of
+whom, named Marine, was born in the country of the Indians, and was the
+first native of New Spain who received baptism. She and Anguilar served
+as interpreters between Cortes and the natives. Tendilli sent immediate
+intelligence to Muteçuma, that there had arrived in his country a bearded
+people, for so they called the Castilians. On the reception of this news,
+Muteçuma was greatly troubled, for his gods, or devils rather, had
+revealed that a people of the description of these Spaniards was to
+overthrow his law and dominion, and to become lords of the country;
+wherefore Muteçuma sent gifts to the value of twenty thousand ducats to
+Cortes, but refused any interview.
+
+As the ships could not ride in safety at St Juan de Vilhua, Cortes sent
+Francis de Montejo, and the pilot Antonio Alaminos, in two brigantines,
+to look out for a safe anchorage. They went to Panuco, in lat. 23° N.
+whence they came back to Culvacan as a safer harbour. But Cortes went by
+land westwards to a city named Zempoallan, where he was well received.
+From thence he went to Chiavitztlan, with the lord of which town, and of
+all the surrounding country, he entered into a league against Muteçuma.
+On the arrival of his ships at the appointed haven, he went there and
+built a town, which he named _Villa rica de la Vera Cruz_. From thence he
+sent a vessel to Spain with presents, and a letter to the Emperor Charles
+V. giving an account of his proceedings, and of his determination to
+visit Muteçuma, and soliciting a commission as governor of the
+country[33].
+
+Before proceeding on his march to Mexico, Cortes destroyed all his ships,
+lest his men might mutiny, as they seemed disposed; and leaving 150
+Spaniards in Vera Cruz, with as many Indians to serve them, he began his
+march. Going first to Zempoallan, he learnt that Francis Garay was on the
+coast with four ships, and he contrived to inveigle nine of his men, from
+whom he understood that Garay, who had been in Florida, was now at the
+river Panuco, where he had got some gold, and meant to remain and build a
+town, now called Almeria. Cortes destroyed the idols of Zempoallan, and
+overthrew the tombs of their kings, whom the people worshipped as gods,
+and exhorted them to worship the true God. He set out from Zempoallan for
+Mexico on the 16th of August 1519, and after three days march came to the
+city of Zalapan, and thence to another named Sicuchimatl; at both of
+which places he was well received, and was offered to be conducted to
+Mexico, such being the orders of Muteçuma. Going from thence he ascended
+a hill three leagues high, on which vines were seen growing; and in
+another place he saw above a thousand load of wood ready cut. Beyond this
+he passed a plain country, which he named Nombre de Dios. At the foot of
+this mountain, he rested his troops at a place called Teuhixuacan; whence,
+through a desert country, he came to another mountain, which was covered
+with snow and excessively cold, and where the troops rested in a town
+named Zacotlan. Marching thus from town to town, he arrived at a
+territory called Tlaxcallan, which was at war with Muteçuma; and as the
+people were valiant, they fought against Cortes; but at length they
+agreed, and formed a league with him against the Mexicans.
+
+Thus, from country to country, he came at length within sight of Mexico;
+and Muteçuma, being afraid, received him kindly, giving him and all his
+people lodgings in the capital, and all things necessary. After a time,
+fearing to be slain, Cortes made Muteçuma prisoner, and brought him to
+his own quarters, keeping him under a secure guard. Cortes inquired at
+Muteçuma the extent of his dominions, where the mines of gold and silver
+were, and the number of kings who dwelt in the land. And joining eight
+intelligent Spaniards with an equal number of Indians, he sent them, in
+four companies, to travel into four separate countries, Zucolla,
+Malinaltepec, Tenich, and Tututepec. The messengers to Zucolla had 80
+leagues to travel, and those who went to Malinaltepec 70; both of which
+provinces were under subjection to Muteçuma: they found both of these
+countries fertile and well peopled, and they brought back samples of gold,
+which the natives found in the rivers. The country of Tenich was at war
+with Muteçuma, and would not admit the Mexicans into their country; but
+they sent ambassadors to Cortes with presents, offering him their amity,
+at which Muteçuma was much displeased. Those who went to Tututepec, near
+the South Sea, brought back samples of gold, and praised the pleasantness
+of the country; reporting that there were many good harbours on the coast,
+and they presented to Cortes a beautiful cloth of cotton, on which the
+coast, with all its harbours and creeks, was distinctly represented. But
+at this time, by the coming of Pamphilus de Narvaez, the whole kingdom of
+Mexico was thrown into confusion.
+
+On the 10th August 1519, Fernando de Magellanes went from Seville with
+five ships, on a voyage for the islands of, Malacca[34]. Going along the
+coast of Brazil, he came to the Rio Plata, which had been previously
+discovered by the Spaniards. Thence prosecuting his voyage of discovery,
+he came to Port St Julians, in lat. 49° S. where he lost one of his ships.
+With the remaining four he came to the straits named after himself, in
+52° 80' S. and wintered in that place, where he and his people endured
+much distress from snow and ice, and extreme cold. They found the people
+of the country of extraordinary stature and great strength, insomuch that
+they took men by the legs, and rent them asunder as easily as one of us
+could tear a hen in two. These people, named _Pataganes_, but called
+_Morcas_ by the Brazilians, live on fruits and by the produce of the
+chase. In the beginning of September of the following year, 1520, the
+weather became somewhat temperate, and leaving Port St Julian, Magellanes
+went to the straits which now bear his name; whence one of the ships
+returned to Spain, of which Stephen de Porto, a Portuguese, was captain
+and pilot. The other three passed through into a vast sea called the
+_Pacific_; where they found no inhabited land till they arrived in lat.
+13° N. when they came to certain islands named _Los Jardines_. They
+sailed thence to the archipelago of St Lazarus, where, in an island named
+_Matan_, Magellanes was slain and his ship burnt. The remaining two ships
+went to Borneo, and thence to the Moluccas, leaving many others
+discovered, which I do not mention, because I have not seen any exact
+account of this voyage[35].
+
+About this time Pope Leo X. sent Paulus Centurio on an embassy to the
+great duke of Muscovy, requiring him to send an army along the coast of
+Tartary into India; and the duke was almost persuaded to have made the
+attempt, if certain inconveniencies had not hindered[36].
+
+In February 1520, Diego Lopez de Sequeira, governor of India, sailed by
+the strait of Mecca[37], carrying with him the ambassador of Prester John
+and Roderigo de Lima, who was sent ambassador to that prince. They came
+to the island of Maçua or Massoua, on the African shore of the Red Sea,
+in lat. 17° N. where the ambassadors and their Portuguese attendants were
+set on shore. Peter de Covillan had been sent there formerly by John II.
+of Portugal; but the best account of that country was furnished by
+Francis Alvarez.
+
+In this year 1520, the licentiate Lucas Vasques de Aillon, and others of
+St Domingo, sent two ships to procure slaves at the Lucayos or Bahama
+islands; but finding none there, they passed on along the continent,
+beyond Florida, to certain countries called Chicora and Gualdape, and to
+the river Jordan and Cape St Helena, in lat. 32° N.[38]. The Spaniards
+landed here, and were hospitably received by the natives, who furnished
+them with every thing they needed: but, having inveigled many of the
+unsuspecting natives on board their ships, they carried them away for
+slaves. In their way back to St Domingo, one of these vessels was lost,
+and the other was in great danger. On learning the news of this discovery,
+the licentiate Aillon made application to the emperor for the government
+of that country, where he expected to find much wealth, and received the
+appointment.
+
+About this time, learning the success of Cortes in Mexico, and that he
+had applied to the emperor for the commission of governor, Diego
+Velasques, governor of Cuba, who considered that it ought to belong to
+him, fitted out an armament of eighteen ships, under the command of
+Pamphilus de Narvaez, already mentioned, with a thousand men and eighty
+horses, whom he sent to Mexico in order to supersede Cortes. Landing in
+the neighbourhood of Vera Cruz, he sent an order to the garrison to
+receive him as governor; but they made his messenger prisoner, and sent
+him to Cortes, then at Mexico. On this Cortes wrote to Narvaez, desiring
+him not to raise any disturbance in the country, and offering to submit
+to his authority if he held a commission from the emperor. But Narvaez
+corrupted the people of the country; upon which Cortes went from Mexico,
+and took Narvaez prisoner in the town of Zempoallan, putting out one of
+his eyes. After this the soldiers of Narvaez submitted to Cortes; who
+detached two hundred soldiers to the river of Garay or Panuco, and a
+similar detachment under John Vasquez de Leon to Cosualco. He sent
+likewise a messenger to Mexico with an account of his victory; but the
+natives, having risen in rebellion, killed his messenger.
+
+Cortes now set forwards on his return to Mexico, with one thousand foot
+soldiers and two thousand horsemen, and found Peter de Alvarado and the
+garrison he had left in Mexico in charge of Muteçuma, in safety. But the
+Mexicans continued their insurrection, and on one occasion Muteçuma was
+killed by a stone thrown by one of his own subjects. They then elected
+another king, and the Spaniards were forced to evacuate the city with
+great difficulty and danger. Driven out of Mexico, and having only 504
+footmen and 40 horse remaining, Cortes retired with much difficulty to
+Tlaxcallan, where he was well received. He here mustered a force of 900
+Spanish infantry and 80 cavalry, and gathered 200,000 Indians among the
+friends and allies whom he had secured, enemies of the Mexicans, and
+marched back to Mexico, which he took in August 1521[39].
+
+In October 1521, Cortes sent 200 foot and 35 horse, with a number of his
+Indian allies, under the command of Gonsalo de Sandoval, against
+Tochtepec and Coazacoalco, which had rebelled, and which Sandoval reduced
+to obedience. To retain this country under subjection, he built a town
+called _Medelin_, 120 leagues from Mexico, and another named _Santo
+Spirito_, on a river four leagues from the sea[40]. In this year 1521,
+died Emanuel, king of Portugal, and was succeeded by his son, John III.
+
+In this same year, one of Magellan's ships sailed from Malacca with a
+loading of cloves. They victualled at the island of Burro, and went from
+thence to Timor, in lat. 11° S.[41]. Beyond this island, about 100
+leagues, they came to other islands, all inhabited, one of which was
+called _Eude_. Passing on the outside of Sumatra, they found no land till
+they arrived at the Cape of Good Hope, where they took in wood and water;
+and sailing thence by the islands of Cabo Verde, they arrived at Seville,
+where they were received with great honour, both on account of their
+valuable cargo of cloves, and because they had circumnavigated the whole
+world[42].
+
+In January 1522, Gil Gonzales fitted out four ships from Tararequi, on
+the South Sea, intending to discover the coast of Nicaragua, and
+especially to search for a strait or passage, which was said to
+communicate between the South and North Seas. Sailing along the coast, he
+came to a harbour which he named St Vincent, where he landed with 100
+Spaniards, some of whom had horses, and penetrated 200 leagues inland,
+whence he brought back to the value of 200 pesoes in gold. On his return
+to the harbour of St Vincent, he found his pilot, Andrew Nigno, who had
+been to Tecoantepec, in lat. 16° N. and had sailed 300 leagues. From
+thence Gonzales returned to Panama, and so overland to Hispaniola[43].
+
+In April 1522, the Trinity, commanded by Gonzala Gomez de Espinosa,
+another of the ships of Magellan, sailed from Tidore for New Spain. And,
+as the wind was scanty, they steered towards the N. E. in lat. 16° N.
+where they found two islands, which they named the Islands of St John. In
+lat. 20° N. they came to another island, which they called _la Griega_,
+where some of the simple natives came on board, whom they kept to shew in
+New Spain. Continuing their course to the N. E. for four months, they
+came into lat. 42° N. where they saw numbers of seals, and tunnies; and
+the climate appeared to them so cold and inhospitable, that partly on
+that account, and partly owing to contrary winds, they returned towards
+Tidore, having been the first Spaniards who had been in so high a
+northern latitude in these seas. On their return to Tidore, they found
+one Antonio de Britto employed in building a fortress, who took their
+goods from them, and sent forty-eight of them prisoners to Malacca[44].
+
+In the same year 1522, Cortes was desirous to possess some harbours on
+the South Sea, on purpose to open a trade with Malacca, Banda, Java, and
+the other spice islands. For this purpose he sent four Spaniards with
+Indian guides to Tecoantepec, Quahatemallan, and other harbours, where
+they were well received, and whence they brought back some of the natives
+to Mexico. These people were much caressed by Cortes; who afterwards sent
+ten pilots to examine the coast, but they could find no good harbour,
+after a survey of seventy leagues. A cacique, named; Cuchadaquir, used
+them hospitably, and sent two hundred of his people to Cortes with
+presents of gold and silver; and the people of Tecoantepec did the same.
+Not long afterwards, this friendly cacique sent to Cortes, requesting aid
+against his neighbours, who warred against him. Cortes accordingly, in
+the year 1523, sent Peter de Alvarado to his assistance, with 200 foot
+and 40 horse, who built a town called St Jago, in which he left a
+garrison. The caciques of Tecoantepec and Quahutemallan inquired at
+Alvarado concerning certain _sea monsters_ that had been on their coast
+the year before; meaning the ships of Gil Gonzales de Avila, at which
+they had been much amazed; and they wondered still more on being informed
+that Cortes had many such, and much larger than those they had seen. They
+displayed a painting of a mighty carak, having six masts, with sails and
+shrouds, and having armed horsemen on board[45]. In May 1523, Antonio de
+Britto, the Portuguese governor of the Molucca isles, sent Simon de Bru
+to discover the passage from thence by the island of Borneo to Malacca.
+They came in sight of the islands of Manada and Panguensara, and thence
+through the strait of Treminao and Taquy to the islands of St Michael, in
+7° S. and then to the island of Borneo, where they came in sight of
+_Pedra Branca_, or the _white stone_; whence, passing through the strait
+of Cincapura, they came to the city of Malacca[46].
+
+In the same year 1523, Cortes went with 300 Spanish foot, 150 horse, and
+20,000 Mexicans, to make a complete discovery and conquest of Panuco, and
+to punish the inhabitants for having killed and devoured the soldiers of
+Francis Garay. The natives resisted him, but were overthrown; and to keep
+the country under subjection, he built a town on the river, near Chila,
+which he named Santo Stephano del Puerta, in which he left a garrison of
+100 foot and 30 horse, under the command of Peter de Valleia. In this
+expedition he lost many of his people, both Spaniards and Mexicans, and
+several horses[47].
+
+In this same year 1523, Francis de Garay, having a commission from the
+emperor as governor of all the coast he had discovered from Florida to
+Panuco, fitted out nine ships and two brigantines, with 850 soldiers and
+150 horses, on purpose to take possession of his government. Some men
+joined him from Jamaica, where he had furnished his squadron with warlike
+ammunition; and sailing thence to the harbour of Xagua, in the island of
+Cuba, he there learnt that Cortes had taken possession of the coast of
+Panuco. That he ought not meet with the fate of Narvaez, he sent the
+doctor Zuazo to Mexico, to endeavour to enter into treaty with Cortes.
+Garay arrived in the Rio de las Palmas on St Jameses day, and sent
+Gonçalo de Ocampo up the river to explore the country, who reported, on
+his return, that the country was bad and desert. Yet Garay landed with
+400 foot soldiers and some horse, and commanded John de Grijalva, to
+explore the coast, while he marched by land to Panuco, in which march he
+crossed a river to which he gave the name of Rio Montalto. In this march
+he came to a large town, in which he found much poultry, to the great
+refreshment of his troops. Here, likewise, he took some of the
+inhabitants of Chila, whom he employed as messengers to different places.
+After a long and difficult march, he arrived at Panuco, but found no
+provisions; the country having been exhausted in the war with Cortes, and
+by being plundered by the soldiers. From this place he sent Gonçalo de
+Ocampo to St Stephano, or Istevan del Puerto, to inquire if the garrison
+would submit to his authority. They sent him a favourable answer; but, by
+means of an ambush, they made forty of his cavalry prisoners, alleging
+that they had come unwarrantably to usurp the government which belonged
+to another. Besides this misfortune, Garay lost four of his ships, by
+which he was greatly disheartened. While Cortes was preparing an
+expedition to Panuco, to resist Garay, Francis de las Casas and Roderigo
+de la Paz, brought letters-patent to Mexico, by which the emperor gave
+him the government of New Spain, including Panuco. On this he desisted
+from going personally on the expedition, but sent Pedro de Alvarado with
+a respectable force, both of infantry and cavalry, to defend his
+government against aggression, and dispatched Diego de Ocampo to
+communicate the letters-patent to Garay; who thought it better for him to
+yield himself to Cortes, and went accordingly to Mexico[48].
+
+In the same year, 1523, Gil Gonçales de Avila, discovered and peopled a
+town called _San Gil da Buena-vista_, in lat. 14° N. almost in the bottom
+of the bay of Ascension or Honduras[49]. Likewise, on the 6th December of
+this year, Peter de Alvarado was sent by Cortes from Mexico with 300 foot,
+170 horse, four field-pieces, and some Mexican nobles, to discover and
+conquer Quahutemallan, Utlatlan, Chiassa, Xochnuxco, and other towns
+towards the South Sea. After a most fatiguing march of 400 leagues,
+passing by Tecoantepec to Xochnuxco, he discovered and conquered the
+whole of that country, where he built a city called St Jago de
+Quahutemallan, now Guatimala, of which and of the country he subdued, he
+is said to have got the government. In this expedition they passed some
+rivers, the water of which was so hot that they could scarce endure to
+wade them. They found likewise certain hills which produced alum, and one
+out of which a liquor like oil distilled; likewise sulphur in great
+abundance, from which the Spaniards made excellent gunpowder[50]. On the
+8th December of the same year, Cortes sent Diego de Godoy, with a hundred
+foot, thirty horse, two field-pieces, and many friendly Indians, to
+Spiritu Santo; where, joining the captain of that town, they went to
+Chamolla, the capital of a province of the same name, which they reduced
+under subjection[51].
+
+In February 1524, Cortes sent Roderigo Rangel, with 150 Spaniards, and
+many Tlaxcallans and Mexicans, against the Zapotecas and Nixtecas, and
+other provinces not yet well discovered. They were at first resisted, but
+soon defeated the natives, and reduced the country to subjection. In the
+same year, Roderigo de Bastidas was sent to discover and reduce the
+country of Santa Martha; but refusing to allow the soldiers to plunder a
+certain town, he was assassinated in his bed by Peter Villaforte,
+formerly his fast friend, who joined in the conspiracy against him. Pedro
+de Lugo and his son Don Alfonso were afterward governors of that place,
+where they conducted themselves as covetous tyrants, and became much
+disliked[52]. In the same year, the licentiate Lucas Vasques de Aillon
+obtained the government of Chicora from the emperor, on which he fitted
+out some vessels from St Domingo, and proceeded to explore and colonize
+that country; but he was lost with all his people. I know not how it
+should have happened, except by the righteous judgment of God, that so
+little should now remain of all the gold and precious stones which were
+got in the Antilles by the Spaniards; but much the greater part has been
+dissipated to little purpose, and nothing great or valuable has ensued
+from the discovery[53].
+
+In this same year, 1524, Cortes sent a fleet under the command of
+Christopher de Olid, to Cuba, to transport provisions and ammunition to
+Mexico, which had been purchased there by Alonso de Contreras; and Olid
+had orders to discover and colonize the country about Cape Higueras, and
+the Coast of Honduras, and likewise to send Diego Hartado de Mendoça by
+sea, in search of a strait towards Darien, which was reported to pass
+that way into the South Sea, which object of research had been commanded
+by the emperor to be attended to. He sent also two ships from Panuco, to
+explore the coast from thence to Florida; and he commanded other vessels
+to examine the coast of the South Sea, between Zacatullan and Panama. On
+the arrival of Olid at Cuba, he entered into a league with Diego
+Velasquez against Cortes: and, instead of prosecuting the orders he had
+received, he set sail for Puerto de Cavallos, in lat. 10° N. 54, near
+which he built a town, which he named _Triumpho de la Cruz_. He made Gil
+Gonzales de Avila prisoner, and killed his nephew, and all the Spaniards
+who were with him, except one child; thus acting in direct opposition to
+Cortes, who had expended, in fitting out the present expedition, the sum
+of 80,000 castellans of gold, entirely to gratify Olid[55]. On learning
+this treachery, Cortes went by land from Mexico in the month of October
+1524, to take revenge on Olid, carrying with him a force of 300 Spaniards,
+part foot, and part horse, and accompanied by Quahutimoc, king of Mexico,
+and many of the chief Mexican nobles. On coming to the town of Spiritu
+Santo, he procured ten guides from the caciques of Tavasco and Xicalanco,
+who likewise gave him a map painted on cotton cloth, delineating the
+situation of the whole country, from Xicalanco to Naco and Nito, and even
+as far as Nicaragua, with their mountains, hills, fields, meadows, rivers,
+cities, and towns; and Cortes ordered three ships from the harbour of
+Medellin to follow him along the coast[56]. When he had reached the city
+of Izancanac, Cortes learned that King Quahutimoc and his Mexicans had
+conspired to betray or destroy him and his Spaniards; wherefore he hanged
+the king and two of his principal nobles. Cortes then proceeded to
+Mazatlan; and from thence to Piaca, which stands in the middle of a lake,
+and is the chief city of a province of the same name, and hereabout he
+began to learn tidings of the Spaniards under Olid, of whom he was in
+search. From thence he proceeded to Zuzullin, and came at length to Nito;
+from whence he went to a bay on the coast, called St Andre, where,
+finding a good haven, he built a town called Natividad de nuestra Sennora.
+He went thence to Truxillo, on the coast of Honduras, where he was well
+received by the Spanish settlers. While here, a ship brought intelligence
+of an insurrection having broke out in Mexico during his absence; on
+which, he ordered Gonsalo de Sandoval to march with his company by land,
+from Naco to Mexico, by the ordinary and safest road of Quahutemallan, or
+Guatimala, towards the South Sea; and, leaving his cousin Férdinando de
+Saavedra to command in Truxillo, he went himself by sea along the coast
+of Yucutan to Chalchicocca, now called St Juan de Ullhua, and thence to
+Medellin and Mexico, where he was well received. Cortes was absent
+eighteen months on this expedition, during which he travelled 500
+leagues[57], and suffered many hardships.
+
+In the year 1525; Francis Pizarro, and Diego de Almagro, went from Panama
+to discover Peru, on the south of the fine, which they called _Nueva
+Castillia_. Pedro Asias, governor of Panama, refused to take any concern
+in this expedition, on account of certain evil news which had been
+brought to him by Francis Vezerra. Pizarro went first in a ship with 124
+soldiers, and was followed by Almagro with seventy men in another ship.
+Almagro came to Rio de San Juan, in lat. 3° N., where he got 3000 pezoes
+of gold; and not finding Pizarro, of whom he was in search, he lost heart,
+and returned to Panama. Pizarro went first to the island of Gorgona, and
+thence to the isle of Gallo, from whence he proceeded to the river called
+_Rio del Peru_, in lat. 2° N. from which the rich and famous country of
+Peru derives its name. He sailed thence to the river of St Francis, and
+Cape _Passaos_, where he passed the equinoctial line, and came to _Puerto
+Vejo_, in lat. 1° S. and sailed on to the rivers of Chinapanpa, Tumbez,
+and Payta, in four or five degrees of southern latitude, where he
+received intelligence concerning King Atabalipa, and of the vast riches
+of his palace. On receiving this intelligence, Pizarro returned to Panama,
+from whence he went to Spain, where he solicited and obtained the
+government of the rich country he had discovered; having spent above
+three years in the discovery, with much labour and great danger[58].
+
+In the same year, 1525, seven ships were fitted out from Spain, under the
+command of Garcia de Loaisa, for a voyage to the Molucca Islands. Sailing
+from Corunna, and passing by the Canaries, they came to the coast of
+Brasil, where they discovered an island in lat. 2° S. which they named St
+Matthew; and, finding orange trees, hogs, and European poultry, they
+concluded it to be inhabited; but, by inscriptions oil the bark of trees,
+they learnt that the Portuguese had bean there seventeen years before. A
+small pinnace of this squadron, commanded by Juan de Resaga, passed the
+straits of Magellan, and ran along the whole coast of Peru and New Spain,
+carrying the intelligence to Cortes of the expedition of Loaisa to the
+Moluccas: But the admiral ship only of this squadron, commanded by Martin
+Mingues de Carchova, arrived at its destination, where the Moors of the
+Moluccas received the Spaniards hospitably; Loaisa and all the other
+captains died by the way.
+
+In the same year Stephen Gomez sailed from Corunna, to endeavour to
+discover a strait in the northern parts, by which ships might sail from
+Europe to the Moluccas. This person had been refused employment in the
+fleet commanded by Loaisa; but the Count Ferdinando de Andrada, with the
+Doctor Beltram, and a merchant named Christopher de Sarro; fitted out a
+galleon for him at their joint expence. He went first to the island of
+Cuba, whence he sailed to Cape Florida, sailing only by day, as he was
+ignorant of the coast. He passed Cape Angra, and the river Enseada, and
+so went over to the other side; and it is reported that he came to Cape
+Razo[59] in lat. 46° N. whence he returned to Corunna with a cargo of
+_slaves_. But news spread through Spain that he was come home laden with
+_cloves_, which occasioned much joy at the court of Spain, till the
+mistake was discovered. Gomez was ten months engaged in this voyage. In
+this same year, Don George de Menesses, governor of Molucca, and Don
+Henriques, sent a vessel on discovery towards the north, commanded by
+Diego de Rocha, having Gomez de Sequiera as pilot. In lat. 9° or 10° N.
+they discovered several islands in a group, which were called the islands
+of Sequiera; whence they returned to the island of Bato-China. In 1526,
+Sebastian Gabota, chief pilot to the emperor, a native of Bristol in
+England, whose father was a Venetian, sailed from Seville with four ships,
+intending to have gone to the Moluccas by a western course. Gabota came
+to Pernambuco in Brasil, where he waited three months for a favourable
+wind to get round Cape St Augustine. In the Bay of _Patos_, or of ducks,
+the admirals ship was lost; and despairing of being able to accomplish
+the voyage to the Moluccas, he built a pinnace for the purpose of
+exploring the Rio Plata. Gabota accordingly ran sixty leagues, or 120
+miles up that river; when coming to a bar, he left the large ships there,
+and went with the boats of the squadron 120 leagues, or 480 miles farther
+up the river Parana, which the inhabitants considered to be the principal
+river. He here constructed a fort, and remained in that place above a
+year; From thence he rowed still farther up the Parana, till he came to
+the mouth of another river called _Paragioa_, or Paraguay; and,
+perceiving that the country produced gold and silver, he kept on his
+course, sending one of the boats in advance, which was taken by the
+natives. On this, Gabota thought it more prudent to return to his fort,
+after having penetrated 200 leagues or 800 miles up this river. He took
+on board the people he had left at the fort, and returning to the ships
+at the bar, sailed back to Seville in 1530. He reported that the Rio
+Plata was navigable for a great way, and that it rises from a lake named
+_Bombo_[60] in the kingdom of Peru, whence, flowing through the valleys
+of Xauxa, it receives the rivers Parso, Bulcasban, Cay, Parima, Hiacax,
+and several others, by which its waters are greatly increased. It is also
+said that the river of San Francesco comes from the same lake, which
+likewise is very great; because rivers that flow from lakes are larger
+than those which proceed from springs.
+
+In the year 1527, Panfilo de Narvaez sailed from St Lucar de Barameda
+with five ships, having 600 soldiers, 100 horses, and great abundance of
+provisions, ammunition, and all other necessaries, to take possession of
+Florida, as far as the river Palmas, of which he was appointed governor.
+Not being able to land at the place he wished, he went on shore with 300
+of his soldiers, some horses, and a supply of provisions, nearer Cape
+Florida, ordering the ships to proceed to the river Palmas, in which
+voyage they were nearly all lost Those who escaped shipwreck, suffered
+extreme hardships from hunger and thirst on a dry barren island, called
+Xamo by the natives, and which the Spaniards named _Malhada_. In this
+island they were attacked by the natives, and many, both of the Spaniards
+and natives, were slain.
+
+Narvaez, and his people, saw some gold among the Indians of Florida, who
+said they had it from _Apalachen_. He therefore went to that town in
+search of gold, where they found abundance of bay trees, and others of
+many different kinds, and plenty of beasts and birds, but neither gold
+nor silver. From Apalachen, he went to a town called Aute, and from:
+thence to Xamo, a poor and barren country. In this place, the natives
+requested the Spaniards to cure their sick, of whom they had great
+numbers; and the Spaniards being in extreme poverty and distress, prayed
+for the sick, and used such endeavours as were in their power, towards
+their relief: And it pleased God that many, both of the sick, and those
+who were ill from wounds, recovered; nay, even one that was supposed to
+be dead, was, by them, restored to life. Owing to this, the Spaniards
+were greatly esteemed, and even reputed as gods, so that the people
+offered them no injury, and even gave them such things as they had. By
+these means, they passed through many countries, and many strange nations,
+differing from each other in language, customs, and dress, and came at
+length among a people that lived continually among their flocks and herds,
+like the Arabs. Many of the tribes through which they travelled were so
+poor as to feed on snakes, lizards, spiders, ants, and all kinds of
+vermin, yet were well contented with their hard fore, and were much given
+to singing and dancing. This people are reported to purchase all their
+wives from their enemies, and to kill all their own daughters, lest by
+marrying into hostile tribes their enemies should increase in numbers. In
+some places, the women continued to suckle their children till they were
+ten or twelve years old; and there were certain men, being hermaphrodites,
+who married each other. In this manner, the Spaniards penetrated above
+800 leagues, or 3200 miles through the country, till at length, not above
+seven or eight of the whole armament reached the city of St Michael of
+Calvacan, in lat. 23°. N. or higher, on the coast of the South Sea[61].
+
+Learning, as has been formerly mentioned, that Garcia de Louisa had
+passed through the Straits of Magellan, on a voyage to the _Islands of
+Cloves_, Cortes fitted out three ships from Civitlanejo, now St
+Christophers, in lat. 20°. N. on the western coast of New Spain, intending
+to send there in search of Loaisa, and that they might discover the way
+to the Moluccas, and open up the spice trade with New Spain. Leaving
+Civatlanejo, on All Saints day, 1527, under the command of Alvaro de
+Saavedra Ceron, the cousin of Cortes, they fell in with the islands
+formerly discovered by Magellan, which he had named _the Pleasures_;
+whence they sailed to the islands which had been discovered by Gomez de
+Sequeira, and called by his name, but not knowing of this previous
+discovery, he named them _Islas de los Reyes_, or the Isles of the Kings,
+because discovered on Twelfth day. During this part of the voyage, two
+ships of the squadron separated from Saavedra, and were never more heard
+of. Sailing on from island to island, he arrived at the Island of Candiga,
+where he ransomed two Spaniards for seventy ducats, who had belonged to
+the crew of Loaisa, who was shipwrecked in that neighbourhood. Saavedra
+reached the Moluccas in March 1528, and anchored at the Island of Gilolo,
+where he found the sea calm, the winds moderate, and no tempests; and he
+estimated the distance from thence to New Spain at 2050 leagues, or 8200
+miles. At this period, Fernando de la Torre was governor of the Molucca
+islands, and lived in the city of Tidore, having been chosen instead of
+Martin Yniguez de Carquiçano, who was recently dead. Torre waged a fierce
+war with Don George de Meneses, captain of the Portuguese; and in a fight
+of the fourth of May, Saavedra took a Portuguese galliot, and slew
+Fernando de Baldaya the captain. In June, Saavedra set sail on his return
+towards New Spain, taking with him Simon de Brito, Patalin, and other
+Portuguese prisoners; but, after several months sail, he was forced back
+to Tidore by contrary winds, where Patalin was beheaded and quartered,
+and the rest of the Portuguese prisoners hanged. In this year, 1528,
+Cortes sent 200 infantry, and sixty cavalry, with a large force of
+Mexicans, to explore and subdue the country of the Chihimecas, which was
+reported to be rich in gold. He then took shipping for Spain, where he
+landed with great pomp, bringing with him 250,000 marks in gold and
+silver. On his arrival at Toledo, where the emperor then resided; he was
+very graciously received. The emperor created him marquis _della Valle_,
+and married him to the lady Jane de Zuniga, daughter to the Conde de
+Aguilar; after which he returned to resume the government of New Spain.
+
+Saavedra, of whom we have lately made mention, returned from the Moluccas
+towards New Spain, in May 1529: and, during, the voyage, came in sight of
+land, in lat. 2°S. He ran along the coast to the S.S.E. from that time to
+the end of August, upwards of 500 leagues, finding a clean coast, free
+from shoals and rocks, with good anchoring ground, inhabited by a black
+people, with curled hair. The people of the Moluccas named the inhabitants
+of this coast _Papuas_ because they are black with frizzled hair and both
+Portuguese and Spaniards have adopted the same name. Having reached to
+four or five degrees south of the line, he returned northwards; and near
+the equinoctial he discovered an island, which he called _de los Pintados_,
+or of the painted people, as the inhabitants were of a white complexion,
+but marked with a hot iron[62]; and, from various circumstances, he
+concluded that they were originally from China. A kind of boat put off
+from the shore, containing a number of these islanders, making many
+threatening signs and gestures, as if ordering the Spaniards to go away
+from their land, and even proceeded to throw stones from slings at the
+ship, but, as the stones did no harm, Saavedra would not allow his people
+to fire upon them. A little beyond this island, in 10° or 12° of north
+latitude, they discovered a group, consisting of many small low islands,
+covered with grass, and full of palm trees, to which they gave the name of
+_Los Jardines_, or the gardens[63]. Saavedra came to anchor in the midst
+of these islands, where he remained several days, and concluded that the
+people had come originally from China, but had, by long residence,
+degenerated into lawless savages, using no labour or industry. They wear a
+species of white cloth, made of grass, and are quite ignorant of fire,
+which put them in great terror. Instead of bread they eat cocoas, which
+they pull unripe, burying them for some days in the sand, and then laying
+them in the sun, which causes them to open. They eat fish also, which they
+catch from a kind of boat called _parao_, or _proa_, which they construct
+with tools made of shells, from pine wood that is drifted at certain times
+to their islands, from some unknown regions. The wind and weather becoming
+more favourable for his return to New Spain, Saavedra resumed his voyage
+thither, intending to have gone to Panama, to unload the cloves and other
+merchandize he had brought from the Moluccas. His purpose was to have
+carried this merchandize in carts from Panama, about four leagues, or
+sixteen miles overland, to the river Chagre, which is said to be navigable,
+and which discharges itself into the North Sea not far from Nombre de Dios,
+where the goods could be reshipped for Spain; by which means all kind of
+goods might be brought from India in a shorter time, and with less danger,
+than by sailing round the Cape of Good Hope, as the voyage from the
+Moluccas to Panama is almost a perfectly straight course between the line
+and the tropics. But, in the present voyage, they were never able to
+procure a favourable wind, and were therefore forced back to the Moluccas,
+where they arrived in great affliction, as Saavedra died by the way[64].
+Had Saavedra lived, he intended to have opened a navigable communication
+from sea to sea, through the land of Castilia del Oro and New Spain, which
+might have been done in one or other of the following places:--1. From the
+gulph of St Michael to Uraba, which is 25 leagues, or 100 miles. 2. From
+Panama to Nombre de Dios, which is 17 leagues, or 68 miles, much the
+greater part consisting of the river Chagre, navigable for small craft. 3.
+Through the river Xaquator, now St Juan, in the province of Nicaragua,
+which springs out of a lake that reaches to within three or four leagues
+of the South Sea, and falls into the North Sea, being navigable by large
+boats and lighters. 4. The other place is from Tecoantepec, through a
+river, to Verdadera Cruz, in the bay of Honduras[65].
+
+In the year 1529, Damiano de Goes, a Portuguese, travelled over all Spain,
+and went from Flanders into England and Scotland, being at the courts of
+the kings of these countries; after that he returned into Flanders, and
+travelled through Zealand, Holland, Brabant, Luxemburgh, Switzerland, and
+through the cities of Cologne, Spires, Strasburg, Basil, and other parts
+of Germany, and so back to Flanders. He went thence into France, through
+Piccardy, Normandy, Champagne, Burgundy, the dukedom of Bourbon, Gascony,
+Languedoc, Dauphiny, and Savoy; passing into Italy by Milan, Ferrara, and
+Lombardy, to Venice. Turning back, he passed through the territory of
+Genoa, the dukedom of Florence, and all Tuscany, to Rome and Naples.
+Thence back, through Italy, to Ulm, in Germany, and through Swabia,
+Bavaria, Austria, Bohemia, Moravia, and Hungary, to the confines of Greece.
+Thence through Poland, Prussia, and Livonia, to the great dukedom of
+Moscovy; and thence back into Germany, and through the dominions of the
+Landgrave, and the dukedom of Saxony, into Denmark, Gothland, and Norway,
+penetrating to lat. 70°.N. In the course of these travels, which occupied
+him during 22 years, he saw, spoke to, and was conversant with, all the
+kings, princes, nobles, and chief cities of all Christendom; for which
+reason, I thought the great extent of his travels was worthy of
+remembrance.
+
+In 1529 or 1530, Melchior de Sosa Tavarez went from Ormus to Bassora, and
+the islands of Gissara, with some ships of war, and sailed up to where the
+Euphrates and Tigris unite together, being the first of the Portuguese who
+had sailed so far on the fresh water in these parts. Not long after this,
+a Portuguese, named Ferdinando Coutinho, being at Ormus, determined to
+return overland from thence to Portugal. For this purpose he went to
+Arabia, and up the river Euphrates, for the space of a month, and saw many
+countries and kingdoms that had not been before visited by the Portuguese.
+He was made prisoner at Damascus; whence he crossed the province of Syria
+to the city of Aleppo. He had been at the holy sepulchre in Jerusalem, in
+the city of Cairo, and at Constantinople, where the Great Turk resides.
+After seeing that Court, he passed over to Venice; and, from thence,
+through Italy, France, and Spain, to Portugal, he came back to Lisbon.
+This person, and Damiano de Goes, were the most adventurous of the
+Portuguese, who, in our time, had seen and discovered the greatest extent
+of foreign realms for their own satisfaction.
+
+About the year 1530, Francis Pizarro, who has been already mentioned as
+having gone to Spain to obtain the government of Peru, returned to Panama,
+having procured all things as he wished, carrying with him four brothers,
+Ferdinand, John, Gonsalvo, and Francis Martines de Alcantara[66]. They
+were not well received by Diego de Almagro and his friends, because
+Pizarro had not sufficiently represented his merits in the discovery of
+Peru to the emperor, in which he had lost an eye, but took the whole merit
+to himself. In the end, however, they agreed; and Almagro supplied Pizarro
+with seven hundred pezoes of gold, providing him likewise with provisions
+and ammunition, and other necessaries towards his intended expedition
+against Peru. Soon after this arrangement with Almagro, Pizarro, and his
+four brothers before-mentioned, set out with such soldiers and horses as
+they could procure on their expedition. Being unable, from contrary winds,
+to reach Tumbez, where he proposed to have landed, he was under the
+necessity of disembarking at the river of Peru; whence he marched along
+the coast with great difficulty, on account of many rivers and marshes, in
+which some of his men were drowned in crossing. Coming to the town of
+Coache, they found much gold and emeralds in that place; some of which
+they broke, to see if they were perfect. From thence Pizarro sent twenty
+thousand pezoes of gold to Almagro at Panama, to enable him to send
+supplies of men, horses, ammunition, and provisions, and went from Coache
+to the haven named _Porte Viejo_, where he was joined by Sebastian
+Benalcazar, with all the supplies he had sent for. In the year 1531, after
+the arrival of these reinforcements, Pizarro passed over from Porto Viejo
+to the rich island of Puna, in the bay of Guayaquil, where he was
+outwardly well received by the governor, who yet conspired to kill him and
+his men; but Pizarro prevented him, and took many of the Indians, whom he
+bound with chains of gold and silver. Such was the jealousy of the
+governor of Puna, that he caused those who had the charge of his wives to
+have their noses and privities cut off. In this place, Pizarro found above
+six hundred prisoners belonging to king Atabalipa, who was then at war
+with his eldest brother Guascar. Pizarro set these prisoners at liberty,
+on promise of procuring him a friendly reception in Peru; but they forgot
+their engagements afterwards, and excited the people to war against the
+Spaniards. From Puna, Pizarro sent three Spaniards to Tumbez, in Peru, to
+treat of amity; but the Peruvians seized them, and put them to death. On
+hearing of this cruel action, Pizarro crossed over to the main, and made a
+sudden attack, during the night, on the city of Tumbez, killing great
+numbers of the inhabitants. The remainder submitted and made peace,
+presenting him large gifts of gold and silver, and other riches. Pizarro
+then built a town on the river Cira, which he named St Michael of
+Tangarara, which was the first habitation of the Christians in these parts;
+and he appointed Sebastian de Benalcazar to the command. After this, he
+made search for a secure haven on the coast, and found one every way to
+his wish at Payta.
+
+In the same year, 1531, Diego de Ordas went, with 600 soldiers and 35
+horses, to settle the country on the Maranon, or river of the Amazons; but,
+dying on the voyage, this expedition proved fruitless. Afterwards, in the
+year 1534, Hierom Artal was sent thither with 130 soldiers, yet he came
+not to the river, but formed settlements at _St Michael de Neveri_, and
+other places in Paria. Aries d'Acugna, a Portuguese gentleman, went
+likewise to the Maranon, with ten ships, 900 men, and 130 horses, where he
+spent much, and did little to purpose; but the greatest loser in this
+expedition was John de Barros. This great river Maranon is in lat. 3°
+S.[67], its mouth being 15 leagues, or 60 miles across, with many inhabited
+islands, on which there are many trees producing incense, much larger than
+those of Arabia. It produces gold and precious stones, and an emerald was
+found there as large as the palm of the hand. The people of that country
+make a kind of drink of a species of oats that are as large as quinces.
+
+Nunnez de Gusman was sent from Mexico, in 1531, with 500 soldiers, half of
+whom were cavalry, and 6000 Indians to carry his baggage and provisions,
+to discover and subdue the countries to the northwest of the kingdom of
+Mexico. In this expedition he reduced the countries of Xalisco,
+Ceintiliquipac, Ciametlan, Tovalla, Cnixo, Ciamolla, Culhuacan, and other
+places. On this expedition he marched through Mechuacan, where he acquired
+much gold, and 10,000 marks of silver. To the country of Xalisco he gave
+the name of New Galicia, because it was rugged and mountainous, and the
+people robust and hardy. He built many towns in the conquered countries;
+particularly Compostella, Guadalajara, after the place of his own birth in
+Spain, Santo Espirito de la Conception, and St Michael, which last is in
+lat. 24° N. In 1532, Cortes sent Diego Hurtado de Mendoça in two ships
+from Acapulco, which is 70 leagues from Mexico, on purpose to explore the
+coast of the South Sea, as he had been ordered to do by the emperor.
+Mendoça sailed from Acapulco to the harbour of Xalisco, or Xalis, on the
+river Barania, in lat. 22° N. where he wished to take in wood and water.
+But he was resisted there, by the orders of Nunnes de Gusman, and obliged
+to proceed on his voyage. Some of his men mutinied, and he put them all on
+board one of his ships, that they might return to New Spain. Being in want
+of water, these people put in at the bay of Vanderas, not far south from
+Xalis, where they were all slain by the Indians. In this voyage of
+discovery, Hurtado sailed 200 leagues along the coast, but did nothing
+worthy of being recorded.
+
+In 1533, Pizarro went from Tumbez to Caxamalca, where he took king
+Atabalipa prisoner, who engaged to pay a vast sum in gold and silver for
+his ransom. On purpose to procure this, Pedro de Varco and Ferdinando do
+Sotto were sent to the city of Cusco, in lat. 17° S.[68], a journey of 200
+leagues, all upon causeways of stone, with bridges wherever necessary, and
+having lodging-places at proper distances for the conveniency of the
+_Yngas_, by which name the kings of Peru are distinguished. The armies of
+the Peruvians are very numerous, as they often bring more than 100,000 men
+into the field; and they lodge on these causeways, as already mentioned,
+where they always have abundance of provisions and other necessaries, as
+is said to be the custom in China. Ferdinando Pizarro went with some
+horsemen to Paciacama, 100 leagues from Caxamalca, to discover the country;
+and, on his return, he learnt that Guascar, the brother of Atabalipa, had
+been put to death by his command; and that Ruminaguy, the general of the
+army of Atabalipa, had risen in arms, in the city of Quito, against the
+Spaniards. After the reception of this intelligence, Atabalipa was
+strangled by the orders of Pizarro[69]. After the death of the two kings
+of the Peruvians, Pizarro continually extended his authority over the
+dominions of Peru, and built many cities, towns, and forts, in convenient
+situations, to hold the country under subjection. He detached Sebastian de
+Benalcazar, whom he had before made governor of St Michael de Tangarara,
+with 200 infantry and 80 horse, to Quito, against Ruminaguy. Benalcazar
+proceeded successfully in reducing the country to subjection from one city
+to another, eastwards, for 120 leagues, not far from the equinoctial line;
+where Peter Alvarado found certain mountains so cold, and loaded with such
+quantities of snow, that 70 of his men were frozen to death. Having
+reduced the city of Quito, he established himself and his people in that
+place, calling it the city of St Francis; and it seemed very strange to
+the Spaniards to find, in that country, abundance of cattle, wheat, barley,
+and other plants, similar to those of Spain. After sending Benalcazar to
+reduce the city of Quito, Pizarro himself undertook to reduce the royal
+residence of Cusco, in about 13° 20' S. in which expedition he was opposed
+by Quisquiz, a Peruvian general, whom he easily defeated; and he soon
+afterwards took possession of Cusco, the exceedingly rich and wealthy
+capital of the Peruvian monarchy. About this time Mango, a brother of
+Atabalipa, joined Pizarro, who made him Ynga, or king of the country, in
+name only, while he assumed the whole authority and revenues of the
+kingdom to himself[70].
+
+In the same year, 1534; Jaques Cartier, a native of Britanny, went with
+three ships to the land of Corterealis[71], and the gulf of St Lawrence,
+otherwise called _Golfo Quadrato_, or the square gulf, which he fell in
+with in lat. 48° 30' N. He proceeded northwards to the latitude of 51°, in
+the hope of being able to penetrate in that direction to China, by a north-
+west passage, to bring drugs and other merchandize from thence to France.
+Next year Cartier made a second voyage to the same regions, and found the
+country pervaded by many large rivers, and abounding in provisions. He
+sailed 300 leagues up one of these rivers, in a south-west direction, and
+named the country New France, now Canada; but finding the water to become
+fresh, he was satisfied there could be no passage that way to the South
+Sea; and having wintered in the country, he returned next year to France.
+
+About the end of the year 1535, or beginning of 1536, Don Anthony de
+Mendoça came from Spain to the city of Mexico, as Viceroy of New Spain,
+being appointed to supersede Cortes, the discoverer and conqueror of that
+rich and extensive territory. At this time Cortes was absent from the seat
+of government, having gone to Tecoantepec, on purpose to fit out two ships
+on a voyage of discovery. These he sent out under the command of Fernando
+de Grijalva and Diego Bezerra de Mendoça, the former having a Portuguese
+pilot, named Acosta, and the pilot to the latter being Fortunio Ximenez, a
+Biscayan. On the first night after leaving Tecoantepec, the two ships
+separated. Ximenez raised a mutiny against his captain, in which Bezerra
+was slain, and many of the crew wounded. Some time afterwards, Ximenez
+went on shore in the bay of Santa Cruz, for wood and water, where he, and
+more than 20 of his people, were slain by the Indians. Two of the mariners,
+who were in the boat, escaped to Xalisco, and told Nunnes de Gusman, who
+commanded at that place, that they had seen indications of pearls during
+the voyage. Gusman went accordingly with, a ship in search of pearls, and
+explored above 150 leagues of the coast[72].
+
+It is said that Grijalva sailed 300 leagues from Tecoantepec, without
+seeing any land, except one small island in 20° N. to which he gave the
+name St Thomas, as having been discovered on the day of that saint[73].
+
+In the year 1535, Pizarro built the city which he named _Ciudad de los
+Reys_, or of the kings, on the river of Lima, in lat. 20° S; to which he
+removed the inhabitants of Xauxa, as a more convenient situation for the
+residence; of the government, and in a better country[74]. He built also
+the city of St Jago in Porto Viejo, and many other towns, both along the
+coast and in the inland country; and he procured from Spain horses, asses,
+mules, cattle, hogs, goats, and sheep, to stock his territories, and many
+kinds of trees and plants, such as rosemary, oranges, lemons, citrons,
+vines, and other fruits, wheat, barley, and other grains, with radishes,
+and many other kinds of vegetables, which were disseminated all over the
+country[75]. in the same year, Diego de Almagro went from the city of
+Cusco to the provinces of Arequipa and Chili, in lat. 30° S. The march was
+of great length, and he discovered a great extent of country; but he
+suffered great extremities of cold, hunger, and fatigue, in consequence of
+the ruggedness of the mountains, and the ice and snow, insomuch that many
+of his men and horses were frozen to death. About this time Ferdinando
+Pizarro came from Spain to the city of Lima, bringing with him the patent
+of Marquis of Atanillos, for his brother, Francis Pizarro, and a
+commission for Diego de Almagro, by which he was appointed governor of all
+the land he had hitherto discovered, and 100 leagues beyond, under the
+name of the _New kingdom of Toledo_. Ferdinando Pizarro went to the city
+of Cusco, of which he was made governor, and John de Rada went into Chili
+to Almagro, carrying with him the orders of the emperor. On receiving the
+letters patent of the emperor, Almagro marched directly for Cusco, which
+he considered to be included in his government, by which a civil war was
+kindled between him and Pizarro. On this march he and his people were
+severely oppressed by famine, and were even forced to feed upon their
+horses which had died four months and a half before, when on their march
+southwards into Chili[76].
+
+In this same year, 1535, Nunnez d'Acunha, who was governor of India for
+the crown of Portugal, while building a fortress, in the city of Diu, sent
+a fleet, under the command of Vasquez Perez del San Paio, to the river
+Indus, which is under the tropic of Cancer, 90 or 100 leagues to the north-
+west from Diu. He also sent an army against Badu, the king of Cambaia, or
+Guzerat, of which a renegado named Cosesofar was captain[77]. The fleet
+came to the bar of the great river Indus in December, where the same
+phenomena were observed as were formerly experienced by Alexander,
+according to the relation of Quintus Curtius[78].
+
+In the same year, Simon de Alcazava sailed from Seville, with two ships
+and 240 men. Some say he was destined for New Spain, others for the
+Moluccas, and others again that he meant to have proceeded for China,
+where he had formerly been, along with Ferdinando Perez de Andrada.
+However this may have been, he went first to the Canaries, and from thence
+to the straits of Magellan, without touching at Brazil, or any other part
+of the coast of South America, and entered into these straits in the month
+of December, having contrary winds, and very cold weather. Under these
+difficulties, the soldiers entreated him to turn back, which he refused,
+and went into a haven on the south side of the straits, in lat. 53° S.
+where he ordered Roderigo de Isla to land, with 60 of the people, to
+explore the country; but the people mutinied against Alcazava, and slew
+him; and, having appointed such captains and officers as they thought
+proper, they returned back. In their voyage homewards, one of the ships
+was lost on the coast of Brazil, and such of the Spaniards as escaped
+drowning, were killed and eaten by the savages. The other ship went to St
+Jago, in the island of Hispaniola, and thence returned to Seville, in
+Spain[79]. In the same year, Don Pedro de Mendoça went from Cadiz for the
+river Plata, with twelve ships and 2000 men, being the largest armament,
+both of ships and men, that had ever been sent from Spain to the new world.
+Mendoça died on his return to Spain, but most part of his men remained in
+the country on the Rio Plata, where they built a large city, containing
+now 2000 houses, in which great numbers of Indians dwell along with the
+Spaniards. From this place they discovered and conquered the country to a
+great extent, even to the mines of Potosi and the town of La Plata[80],
+which is at the distance of 500 miles from Buenos Ayres.
+
+Cortes having learnt, in the year 1536, that his ship, of which Fortunio
+Ximenez was pilot, had been seized by Nunnez de Guzman, sent three ships
+to Xalisco, while he marched thither by land with a respectable force; and,
+on his arrival there, he found his ship all spoiled and rifled. When his
+small squadron was come round to Xalisco, he went himself on board, and
+left Andrew de Tapia to command his land force. Setting sail from thence,
+he came, on the first of May, to a point of land, which he named Cape St
+Philip, and, to an island close by this cape, he gave the name of St Jago.
+Three days afterwards, he came to the bay where the pilot Ximenez was
+killed, which he named Bahia de Santa Cruz, where he went on land, and
+sent out Andrew de Tapia to explore the country. Cortes again set sail,
+and came to the river now called _Rio de San Pedro y San Paulo_, where the
+ships were separated by a tempest. One was driven to the bay of Santa Cruz,
+another to the river of Guajaval, and the third was stranded on the coast
+near Xalisco, whence the crew went overland to Mexico. After waiting a
+long while for his other two ships, Cortes made sail, and entered into the
+gulf of California, otherwise called _Mar Vermejo_, or the Vermilion Sea,
+and by some, the sea of Cortes. Having penetrated 50 leagues within that
+gulf, he espied a ship riding at an anchor, and, on his approach towards
+her, had nearly been lost, if he had not received assistance from that
+other ship. Having repaired his own ship, he departed from thence with
+both ships; and, having procured provisions at a very dear rate, at St
+Michael de Culiacan, he went to the harbour of Santa Cruz, where he
+received information that Don Antonio de Mendoça had arrived from Spain as
+Viceroy of Mexico. He therefore left Francis de Ulloa with the command of
+his ships, ordering him to proceed on discoveries; and going to Acapulco,
+he received a messenger from Don Antonio de Mendoça, the new viceroy,
+certifying his arrival, and the assumption of his authority. Mendoça
+likewise sent him the copy of a letter from Francis Pizarro, stating that
+Mango, the Inca of Peru, had risen in arms, and assailed the city of Cusco
+with 100,000 fighting men, having slain his brother, John Pizarro, and
+above 400 Spaniards, with 200 horses; and that he himself, and the Spanish
+dominions in Peru, were in imminent danger, unless speedily and
+effectually assisted.
+
+Cortes, not yet resolved on submitting to the authority of Mendoça, fitted
+out two ships, under the command of Ferdinando de Grijalva and one
+Alvarado, on purpose to discover the route to the Moluccas by the way of
+the equinoctial line, because the islands of Cloves are under that
+parallel. They went first to St Michael de Tangarara, in Peru, where they
+landed succours for Pizarro, and thence, all along the line, to the
+Moluccas, as they were ordered; and they are said to have sailed above
+1000 leagues without sight of land on either side the whole way. At length,
+in lat. 2° N. they discovered an island named _Asea_, which was believed
+to be one of the islands of Cloves. Five hundred leagues farther, more or
+less, they came to another, which they named _Isla de los Pescadores_, or
+island of Fishers. Going still in the same course, they saw another island,
+called _Hayme_, on the south side of the line, and another named _Apia_,
+after which they came in sight of _Seri_. Turning one degree to the north,
+they came to anchor at an island named _Coroa_, whence they came to
+another under the line named _Memousum_, and thence to _Busu_, still
+holding on the same course[81].
+
+The people of all these islands are black, with frizzled hair, whom the
+people of the Moluccas call Papuas. Most of them are witches, and eat
+human flesh; and are so much given to wickedness, that the devils walk
+among them as companions. Yet when these wicked spirits find any of the
+Papuas alone, they kill him with cruel blows, or smother him; for which
+reason they always go out in companies of two or three together. There is
+in this country a bird as large as a crane, which has no wings wherewith
+to fly, but runs on the ground with the swiftness of a deer, and, of the
+small feathers of this bird, the natives make hair for their idols. They
+have likewise a particular herb, the leaf of which, after being washed in
+warm water, if laid on any member, and licked with the tongue, will even
+draw out the whole blood of a mans body; and, by means of this leaf, the
+natives let blood of themselves, when afflicted by sickness.
+
+From these islands they came to others named the _Guellas_, in lat. 1° N.
+_east and west_[82], from the island of Ternate, in which the Portuguese
+have a fortress. These islands are 124 leagues from the island of _Moro_,
+and between forty and fifty leagues from Ternate. From thence they went to
+the island of _Moro_[83], and the islands of Cloves, going about from one
+island to another; but the natives would not permit them to land, desiring
+them to go to the fortress, where captain _Antonio Galvano_, the author of
+this work, would receive them in a friendly manner, who was, as they
+stiled him, _factor_ of the country, and they could not be allowed to land
+without his license. This circumstance is worthy of being noticed, that
+the natives were so well affected to the Portuguese as to venture their
+lives, with their wives, children, and goods, in their service.
+
+In the year 1537, John de Vadillo, the governor of Carthagena, went with a
+powerful armament from the port called _St Sebastian de Buena Vista_, in
+the gulf of Uraba, to the Rio Verde, whence he went by land, without
+previously knowing any part of the way, and without carriages, to the very
+extremity of Peru and the town of La Plata, a distance of 1200 leagues, a
+most memorable journey. The whole country, from the Rio Verde to the
+mountains of Abibe, is full of rugged hills, thick forests, and many
+rivers, through which they had to pierce their way with infinite toil. The
+mountains of Abibe are said to be twenty leagues broad, and can only be
+passed over in the months of January, February, March, and April, as from
+incessant heavy rains at all other times of the year, the rivers are so
+swelled as to be quite impassable. In these mountains there are many herds
+of swine, many dantes, lions, tigers, bears, ounces, large wild-cats,
+monkeys, vast snakes, and other vermin. There are also abundance of
+partridges, quails, turtle-doves, pigeons, and other birds of many
+different kinds. The rivers also were so full of fish that they killed
+them with staves; and they affirmed, if they had been provided with rods
+and nets, that a very large company of men might be subsisted, without
+ever being in distress for want of food. In this expedition they noted the
+diversities of people, languages, dress, and other circumstances, during
+the whole way, through many countries, kingdoms, and, provinces, and the
+great difficulties and dangers they encountered till their arrival at the
+_Villa de la Plata_, and the adjoining sea. This was the most extensive
+discovery which has been ever heard of by land, and in so short a time;
+insomuch that, if it had not been performed in our own days, it could
+hardly have been credited[84].
+
+In 1538, certain friars of the order of St Francis went from Mexico to
+preach to the natives in the northern part of New Spain, and to convert
+them to the Catholic faith. One Mark de Nizza penetrated farther than any
+of the rest.--Passing through Culvacan, or Culiacan, he came into the
+province of Sibola, or Cinaloa, where he pretended to have found seven
+cities, and that the farther he went the richer was the country in gold,
+silver, and precious stones, with many sheep bearing wool of great
+fineness. On the fame of this wealth, the viceroy Don Antonio de Mendoça,
+and Cortes, determined to send a force to take possession of the country;
+but, as they could not agree on this subject, Cortes and his wife went
+over to Spain in 1540, where he died seven years afterwards[85].
+
+In 1538, I, Antonio Galvano, being governor of the Molucca islands, sent a
+ship, commanded by Francis de Castro, towards the north, with orders to
+convert as many as he could to the Christian Faith. Castro himself
+baptized many; as the lords of Celebes, Maccassar, Amboina, Moro, Moratax,
+and of several other places. On his arrival at the island of Mindanao, six
+kings received the water of baptism from de Castro, with their wives,
+children, and subjects; and I gave orders that most of these should
+receive the name of John, in honour of king John III. who then reigned in
+Portugal.
+
+The Portuguese and Spaniards who have been in these islands, affirm that
+there are in them a certain species of hogs, which, besides the ordinary
+teeth in their jaws, have two others growing out of their snouts, and
+other two behind their ears, of a large span and a-half in length[86].
+There is likewise said to be a certain tree, that part of which that grows
+towards the east is a sure antidote against all kinds of poison, while the
+western half of the same tree is itself a deadly poison. The fruit of this
+tree is like large pease; of which is made the strongest poison on earth.
+There is another tree of a very singular nature, for if any one eat of its
+fruit, he becomes twelve hours mad; and, on regaining his senses, cannot
+remember any thing that happened during his madness. There are likewise
+certain land-crabs, which have the same effect of producing temporary
+madness when eaten. The islanders also pretend that there is a certain
+stone in these islands of so wonderful a property, that whoever happens to
+sit upon it is sure to be afflicted with rupture. It is farther worthy of
+remark, that the inhabitants of these islands gild their teeth.
+
+In the year 1539, three ships which had been ordered by Cortes to discover
+the coast northwards from Culiacan, and which sailed from Acapulco, under
+the command of Francis Ulloa, having touched at _St Jago de Buena
+Sperança_, entered into the gulf of California, which Cortes discovered,
+and sailed up that gulf till they came almost to the farther end of it, in
+lat. 32° N. at a place which they named _Ancon de San Andres_, because
+they came there on the day of that Saint. They returned southward along
+the other, or western coast of the gulf of California; and, having doubled
+the point of that peninsula, called _Cabo de San Lucas_, within certain
+islands, they sailed northwards, along the external coast of California,
+till they again reached to the same latitude of 32° N. whence they
+returned into New Spain; forced to this measure by contrary winds and want
+of provisions, after having been absent a whole year on this voyage. In
+these discoveries, Cortes expended 200,000 ducats, according to his own
+account[87]. Cortes and his captains explored the coast of New Spain, from
+the lat. of 12° N. to 32° or 700 leagues; all of which was rather warm
+than cold, although snow is found on some of the mountains for the greater
+part of every year. From Cabo del Enganno to Cabo de Liampa in China, the
+distance is 1000 or 1200 leagues.
+
+In New Spain there are many trees, flowers, and fruits of various kinds,
+that are useful to man. The principal tree is named _Metl_, which does not
+grow either very tall or very thick. The natives plant and dress this tree
+as we do our vines; and they allege that it has forty different kinds of
+leaves, resembling woven cloth, which serve for many useful purposes. When
+tender, these leaves are made into conserves. From it they make a kind of
+paper, and a substance like flax; and it is also manufactured into mantles,
+mats, shoes, girdles, and cordage. This tree produces such strong and
+sharp prickles, that they are used instead of needles for sewing. The
+roots are used as fuel; and their ashes make excellent ley for the
+manufacture of soap. The natives open up the earth from the roots of this
+tree, and, by scraping or wounding them, they extract a juice which is a
+rich syrup. By boiling this juice, it is converted into honey; and, when
+purified, it becomes sugar; and may likewise be made into wine and vinegar.
+The fruit of this tree is called _Coco_. The rind roasted, crushed, and
+applied to sores or wounds, has a most healing quality. The juice of the
+roots and tops, mixed with incense, is a sovereign antidote against the
+bite of a viper and other poisons. From all these useful properties, this
+is the most profitable tree that is known in these parts[88].
+
+There are certain birds in New Spain called Vicmalim, having a long small
+bill, which live on dew and the juice of roses and other flowers; their
+feathers are very small, and of beautiful colours, and are much esteemed
+to work up into ornaments with gold. These birds die, or sleep rather,
+every year in the month of October, sitting on a small bough in some warm
+and close place; and they revive again in the month of April, when the
+flowers appear. There are snakes likewise in this country, which sound as
+if they had bells attached to them, when they creep along. There are other
+snakes also, which are said to engender by the mouth, as vipers are
+reported to do with us. There are likewise certain hogs, which have a
+navel on the ridge of the back; which the hunters cut out the moment they
+are killed, as otherwise the carcase would corrupt and stink, so as to be
+uneatable. Besides which, there are certain fishes which are named
+_Snorters_, because they make a snorting noise like hogs[89].
+
+In the year 1538, a civil war broke out in Peru, between Pizarro and
+Almagro; in the course of which, Almagro was taken prisoner and beheaded.
+After which, in the year 1539, Pizarro sent Peter to Baldivia into Chili;
+where he was at first well received, but the people afterwards rose
+against him, and sought to put him to death by treason. Notwithstanding
+the long and severe war he had to wage against the natives of Chili,
+Baldivia explored the country to a great extent, discovering the whole
+coast as far as lat. 40° S. and even further. While Baldivia was occupied
+in these discoveries, he received intelligence of a king called
+_Lucengolma_, who commonly brought 200,000 men into the field, when
+engaged in war against another neighbouring king. Lucengolma was likewise
+said to have a temple in an island, in which there were 2000 priests. It
+was farther reported, that beyond the dominions of this king, there lay a
+country inhabited by a nation of Amazons, whose queen was named
+_Guanomilla_, which signifies _the golden heaven_. But, hitherto, these
+things rest merely on report, and have not been ascertained for truth, by
+actual discovery. About this time Gomez de Alvarado reduced the province
+of _Guanaco_ to obedience; and Francis de Chavez subdued the _Conchincos_,
+who often vexed the town of Truxillo and its adjoining country, by various
+inroads. Peter de Vergara reduced the _Bracamores_, a people to the north
+of Quito; John Perez de Veragara subdued the _Ciaciapoians_; Alfonsos de
+Mercadiglio subdued the people of _Mulubamba_; Ferdinando and Gonsalvo
+Pizarro reduced _Collao_, a country rich in gold; the lower part of which
+was subdued by Peter de Candia; Peranzures went also on an expedition into
+the same country. In this manner the Spaniards dispersed themselves over
+the whole country, and conquered an extent of more than 700 leagues; yet
+not without much labour, and considerable loss of men[90].
+
+The countries of Brazil and Peru stand east and west from each other,
+their coasts being almost 800 leagues distant at the nearest points, which
+are the Cape of St Augustine and the harbour of Truxillo, nearly in the
+same parallel of latitude. The greatest extent of Peru, measuring from the
+river of Peru in the north, to the Straits of Magellan in the south, is
+950 leagues. Through the whole of this country certain mountains, called
+the Andes, extend from north to south, which divide Brazil on the east,
+from Peru, or the empire of the Incas on the west. In the same manner, the
+mountains of Taurus and Imaus divide Asia into two parts; which mountains
+begin on the Mediterranean, in 36 or 37 degrees of north latitude, over
+against the islands of Rhodes and Cyprus, and extend eastwards to the sea
+of China. Thus, likewise, the mountains of Atlas in Africa divide the
+_tawny_ moors from the _black_ moors, or negroes who have frizzled hair.
+These mountains begin at Mount _Moies_, near the desert of Barca, and
+extend under the tropic of Cancer to the Atlantic; The mountains of the
+Andes are high and rugged, and barren in some places, without trees or
+even grass; and it almost always either rains or snows on their highest
+ranges, accompanied with sudden and violent tempests of wind. There is so
+great a scarcity of wood in these parts, that the inhabitants use turf or
+peats for fuel, as is done in Flanders. In these mountains and countries,
+the soil is in some places black, in others white, or red, blue, green,
+yellow, and violet; and, with some of these earths, the natives dye
+various colours, without using any other mixture. From the bottoms of
+these mountains, but principally on the east side, there flow many rivers,
+both small and great. Among these are the rivers Amazons, St Francis, and
+La Plata, and many others, which pervade the country of Brasil[91], which
+are much larger than those of Peru, or of Castilia del Oro. The country of
+Peru, between the Andes and the western sea or Pacific, is from 15 to 20
+leagues in breadth, all of a hot sandy soil, yet fertile, as being well
+watered, and produces many excellent trees and fruits. It produces many
+turnips, rapes, and other such herbs and roots; likewise abundance of
+flags, rushes, herbs, and flowers, of so loose and tender a texture, that
+the leaves drop off on the slightest touch. Among these herbs and fresh
+flowers, the natives often dwell without beds or houses, even like cattle
+in the fields, and some of them have tails[92]. These people are gross,
+and wear long hair, but have no beards; and they speak divers languages.
+One of the plants of this region called _aipo_, resembles rue, and bears a
+yellow flower, which cures all kinds of rotten sores; yet, if applied to
+sound flesh, will eat it to the bone.
+
+They say that these mountains abound in tigers, lions, bears, wolves, wild-
+cats, foxes, dantes, ounces, hogs, and deer; and with many birds, both
+ravenous and others, most of them being black; while under the north, both
+birds and beasts are mostly white. There are also great numbers of large
+and terrible snakes, which are said to have destroyed a whole army of one
+of the Incas, that was marching this way: Yet, according to report, an old
+woman did so enchant them, that they became quite harmless and gentle,
+insomuch that they would allow people to sit upon them. It is reported
+that, from Tumbez to Chili, there are no peacocks, hens, cocks, nor any
+eagles, hawks, kites, or other ravenous birds; but there are many ducks,
+geese, herns, pigeons, partridges, quails, and many other kinds of birds.
+There is likewise a certain fowl like a duck, which has no wings, but is
+covered all over with fine thin feathers. A certain species of bitterns
+are said to make war upon the sea-wolf or seal; for when this bird finds
+them on land, it tries to pick out their eyes, that they may not see their
+way back to the water, and then kills them; and the fight between the
+bitterns and the seals is said to be a pleasant sight.
+
+Those who live on the tops of the Andes, between the cold and the heat,
+are mostly blind of one eye, and some are totally blind; so that hardly
+can two men be found but one of them at least is half blind.
+Notwithstanding the great heat of the sand in Peru, it yields good crops
+of Maize and Potatoes, and an herb called _cocoa_, which the natives carry
+continually in their mouths, as those in the East Indies do _Betle_, and
+which they say satisfies both hunger and thirst. It is affirmed that, from
+Tumbez southwards, for the space of 500 leagues, there is neither rain,
+thunder nor lightning, with only some light showers. In Peru, there are
+certain animals, called _xacos_[93] by the natives, and sheep by the
+Spaniards, because they are covered with wool; but their shape resembles
+that of deer, and they have saddle backs like a camel, and are capable of
+carrying burdens of about a hundred weight each. The Spaniards ride upon
+them; and, when weary, they turn their heads backward, and void a
+wonderfully stinking liquor from their mouths. From the rivers La Plata
+and Lima, or Rimac, inclusively to the southwards, there are no crocodiles,
+lizards, snakes, or other venomous reptiles; but the rivers produce great
+store of excellent fish. On the coast of St Michael on the South Sea,
+there are many rocks of salt, covered with eggs. At the point of St Helena,
+there are springs from which a liquor flows, that serves instead of pitch
+and tar. It is said that there is a fountain in Chili which converts wood
+into stone. In the haven of Truxillo, there is a lake of fresh water, the
+bottom of which is good hard salt; and in the Andes, beyond Xauxa, there
+is a fresh water river which flows over a bottom of white salt. It is also
+affirmed that there formerly dwelt giants in Peru, of whom statues were
+found at Porto Vejo; and that their jaw bones were found in the haven of
+Truxillo, having teeth three or four fingers long.
+
+In the year 1540, the viceroy, Don Antonio de Mendoça, sent Ferdinando
+Alorchon with two ships, to explore the bottom of the gulph of California,
+and divers other countries. In the same year, Gonsalvo Pizarro went from
+Quito to discover the _Cinnamon_ country, of which there ran a great fame
+in Peru. Taking with him a force of 200 Spaniards, partly horse and part
+foot, with 300 Indians to carry the baggage, he marched to _Guixos_, the
+most distant place or frontier of the empire of the Incas; in which place
+there happened a great earthquake, accompanied with much rain and dreadful
+lightning, by which seventy houses were swallowed up. From that place they
+passed over a chain of cold and snowy mountains, where they found many
+Indians frozen to death, and they wondered much at finding so much snow
+immediately under the equinoctial line. From thence they proceeded to a
+province called _Cumaco_, where they were detained two months on account
+of constant rain; and beyond this, they came to the cinnamon trees, which
+are of great size, with leaves resembling those of the bay tree. The
+leaves, branches, roots, and every part of this tree, tasted like cinnamon,
+but this taste and flavour was particularly strong in the root; yet that
+was still stronger in certain knobs, like _alcornoques_, or acorns, which
+were good merchandize. This appears to have been of the same nature with
+wild cinnamon, of which there is great abundance in the East Indies,
+particularly in the island of _Jaoa_, or Java. From this cinnamon country,
+they proceeded onwards to the province and city of Coca, where they halted
+for fifty days; after which they travelled for sixty leagues along a river,
+without being able to find any bridge or ford at which they could pass
+over. In one place they found this river to form a cataract of 200 fathoms
+in perpendicular fall, making such a noise as was almost sufficient to
+deafen any person who stood near. Not far beyond this fall, the river was
+found to glide in a smooth channel, worn out of the rock; and at this
+place they constructed a bridge by which they passed to the other side,
+and entered into a country called Guema, which was so poor, that they
+could only get fruit and herbs to subsist upon. Travelling onwards from
+that place, they came to a district where the people had some degree of
+civilization, and wore cotton clothing of their own manufacture, and used
+canoes. They here built a brigantine, in which, and in some canoes,
+procured or taken from the natives, they embarked their sick, with their
+treasure, provisions, and spare apparel, under the charge of Francis de
+Orellana; while Gonsalvo Pizarro marched by land with the rest of the
+people along the river, going every night into the boats. In this manner
+they proceeded for about 200 leagues; when one night, on coming to the
+river side, in hopes of joining the boats as usual, Pizarro could not see
+or hear of them. He and his people were reduced, by this unfortunate
+incident, to a state of almost utter despair: In a strange, poor, and
+barren country, without provisions, clothing, or any other convenience,
+and at a vast distance from their friends, with a prodigious extent of
+difficult and dangerous road interposed between them and Quito, they were
+reduced to the necessity of eating their horses, and even their dogs. Yet
+holding a good heart, they proceeded onwards in their journey for eighteen
+months, penetrating, as is said, almost 500 leagues, without ever seeing
+the sun or any thing else to comfort them. At length, of the 200 men who
+had set out from Quito, only ten returned thither; and these so weak,
+ragged, and disfigured, that they could not be recognized. Orellana went 5
+or 600 leagues down the river, passing through various countries and
+nations on both sides, among whom he affirmed that some were Amazons[94].
+From the mouth of that river, Orellana went home to Spain, and excused
+himself for having deserted Pizarro, and those who marched by land, by
+alleging, that he had been forced down the river by the strength of the
+current, which he was utterly unable to stem. By some, this river is named
+after Orellana, who first navigated its waters; and others call it the
+river of the Amazons, on account of a female nation of warriors, who are
+said to inhabit its banks[95].
+
+In the year 1541, Don Stephen de Gama, the Portuguese governor of India,
+went with a squadron into the Red Sea, by the strait of Mecca, or of
+Babelmandel, and came to anchor off the island of Maçua, or Massoua; from
+whence he sailed along the coast of Abyssinia, or Ethiopia, to the island
+of Suachem, in lat. 20° N. and to the harbour of Cossier, in 27°. From
+thence, he crossed over to the Arabian shore, and the city of Toro, and
+sailed from that place to Suez, at the farther end of the Red Sea, and
+returned from thence to India, having extended the Portuguese knowledge of
+that sea farther than had ever been done before. On the way between
+Cossier and Toro, Gama is said to have found an island of brimstone, which
+had been dispeopled by Mahomet, wherein many crabs are bred, which
+increase nature, on which account, they are much sought after by the
+unchaste.
+
+It is true that Lopez Suarez, when governor of India, had navigated the
+Red Sea, as far as Judda, the haven of Mecca, in lat. 23° N. 150 leagues
+from the straits of Babelmandel; but Gama penetrated to the very northern
+extremity of the gulph[96]. In the same year, Diego de Almagro killed the
+Marquis Francis Pizarro, and his brother Francis Martinez de Alcantara, in
+the city of Lima, or _de los Reyes_, and usurped the government of Peru.
+
+In the same year, 1541, Don Antony de Mendça, viceroy of Mexico, sent an
+army of Spaniards and Indians from Mexico, under the command of Francis
+Vasquez de Coronado, by way of Culiacan, into the province of Sibola, or
+Cinaloa, which is in lat. 30° N.[97]. Coronado endeavoured to treat on
+friendly terms with the natives, and requested to be furnished with
+provisions; but received for answer, that they were not accustomed to give
+any thing to those who came unto their country in a warlike manner. Upon
+this, the Spaniards assaulted and took the town, to which they gave the
+name of New Granada, because the general was a native of Granada in Old
+Spain. The soldiers found themselves much deceived by the reports of the
+friars who had been in those parts, as already mentioned under the year
+1538, who said that the country was rich in gold, silver, and precious
+stones. Not being willing, therefore, to return empty-handed to Mexico,
+they went to the town of _Acuco_, where they heard of _Axa_ and _Quivira_,
+the king of which was reported to worship a golden cross, and the picture
+of the Queen of Heaven, or the blessed Virgin. In this journey, the
+Spaniards endured many hardships, but the Indians fled every where before
+them, and one morning, they found thirty of their horses had died during
+the night. From _Cicuic_ they went to _Quivira_, a distance of 200 leagues
+in their estimation, the whole way being in a level country; and they
+marked their route by means of small hillocks of cow dung, that they might
+be the better able to find their way back. At one time they had a storm of
+hail, the hailstones being as large as oranges. At length they reached
+Quivira, where they found the King _Tatarax_, whose only riches consisted
+in a copper ornament, which he wore suspended from his neck. They saw
+neither cross, nor image of the virgin, nor any indication whatever of the
+Christian religion. This country, according to their report, was very
+thinly inhabited, more especially in its champaign or level parts, in
+which the whole people wandered about with their cattle, of which they
+have great abundance, living much in the same manner with the Arabs in
+Barbary, removing from place to place according to the seasons, in search
+of pastures for their cattle. The cattle belonging to these Indians are
+almost as large as horses, having large horns, and bear fleeces of wool
+like sheep, on which account the Spaniards gave them that name. They have
+abundance of another kind of oxen or cattle, very monstrous in their form
+having hunches on their backs like camels, with long beards, and long
+manes like horses. The Indians live by eating these oxen, and by drinking
+their blood, and clothe themselves in their skins. Most of their food is
+raw, or at least slightly roasted, as they have no pots in which to boil
+their food. They cut their meat with certain knives made of flint. Their
+fruits are damsons, hazel-nuts, melons, grapes, pines, and mulberries.
+They have dogs of such vast strength, that one of them will hold a bull,
+be he never so wild. When the Indians remove from place to place, these
+dogs carry their wives, children, and household stuff on their backs; and
+are so strong as to carry fifty pounds at once[98]. I omit many other
+circumstances of this expedition, because the plan I have prescribed
+requires brevity[99].
+
+In the year 1542, when Diego de Frietas was in the port of Dodra, in the
+kingdom of Siam, three Portuguese of his crew deserted, and went in a junk
+towards China. The names of these men were, Antonio de Mota, Francis
+Zeimoro, and Antonio Pexoto; who directed their course for the city of
+Liampa, in lat. 30° N. or upwards[100]. Having encountered a great storm,
+they were driven to a distance from land distance from land, and came in
+sight of an island far to the east, in lat. 32° N. which they called Japan,
+and which seems to be the isle of Zipangri, mentioned by Marco Polo the
+Venetian, which in exceedingly rich in gold and silver, and other valuable
+commodities.
+
+In the same year, 1542, Don Antonio de Mendoça, the viceroy of New Spain,
+sent certain sea captains and pilots to explore the Coast of Cape del
+Engannon, where a fleet, sent by Cortes, had been before. They sailed as
+far as the latitude 40° N. when they came in sight of a range of mountains
+covered in snow, which they name _Sierras Nevadas_, or the snowy mountains
+in lat. 40°N. They here met with certain merchant ships, which carried on
+their stems the images of a kind of birds called _Aleutarsi_, and had
+their yards gilded, and their bows laid over with silver. These seemed to
+belong to the islands of Japan or to China, as the people said that their
+country was within thirty days sail[101]. In the same year, the viceroy
+Mendoça sent a fleet of six ships, with 400 Spanish soldiers, and as many
+Mexicans, under the command of his brother-in-law, Rui Lopez de Villa
+Lobos, a person in high estimation, to the Mindanao islands. They sailed
+on the eve of All Saints, from the harbour of Natividad, in lat. 20°N. and
+shaping their course towards the west, they came in sight of the island of
+St Thomas, which had been before discovered by Hernando de Girijalva; and
+beyond that, in 17°N, they got sight of another island, which they named
+_La Nebulata_ or the Cloudy Island; and from thence, they came to another
+island, which they named _Roca Partalia_, or the cloven rock. On the 3rd.
+of December, they discovered certain shoals, having only six or seven
+fathoms water. On the fifteenth of the same month, they had sight of the
+islands which were discovered by Diego de Roca, Gomez de Sequieira, and
+Alvaro de Saavedra, called _Los Reyes_ or islands of the kings, because
+discovered on Twelfth day. And beyond these, they found a cluster of
+islands, in 10° of latitude, and came to an anchor in the midst of them,
+where they took in wood and water. In January 1548 leaving these islands,
+they came in sight of certain other islands, from which the natives came
+off to them, in a kind of boats, bearing crosses in their hands, and they
+saluted the mariners in the Spanish language, saying, _Buenos dias
+Matelotes_, or, good day companions. The Spaniards were much surprised at
+being thus accosted in their own language, and seeing such indications of
+Christianity, at no great a distance from Spain, not knowing that many of
+the natives in these parts had been baptised by Francis de Castro, at the
+command of me, Antonio Galvano, an formerly mentioned. From these unlooked-
+for circumstances, some of the Spaniards named these islands _Islas de los
+Cruzos_, or the Islands of Crosses and others called them _Islas de los
+Matelotes_, or the Islands of Companions[101]. On the first of February,
+Ruy Lopez came in sight of the noble island of Mindanao, in 9º N.[102].
+But he could neither double that inland, owing to contrary winds, nor
+would the natives permit him to come to anchor on their coast, because the
+five or six christened kings and their people had promised obedience to me
+Antonio Galvano, and were unwilling to incur my displeasure. On this
+account, and constrained by contrary winds, Lopez sailed along the coast
+in quest of a place of safety; and, in four or five degrees of latitude,
+he found a small island called Sarangam by the natives, which he took
+possession of by force, and named it Antonio after the viceroy of Mexico.
+Ruy Lopez, and his people remained here a whole year, during which many
+things occurred worth notice; but as these are treated of in other
+histories, I refrain from mentioning them, confining myself entirely to
+discoveries.
+
+In the month of August of the same year, 1548, Ruy Lopez, sent Bartholomew
+de la Torre in a small ship to New Spain, to acquaint the viceroy of his
+proceedings. Torre went first to the islands named _Siria, Gaonala,
+Bisaia_, and many others, in 11° and 12° N. lat. where Magellan and de
+Castro had both been formerly, and where the latter baptized many of the
+natives; and the Spaniards called these the _Phillipinas_, in honour of
+the prince of Spain[104]. In these islands Torre procured provisions, and
+wood and water, whence he sailed for several days with a fair wind, edging
+towards the north-east, till he came right under the tropic of Cancer. On
+the 25th of September, they came in sight of certain islands, which they
+named _Malabrigos_, or the evil roads; beyond which they discovered _Las
+dos Hermanas_, or the Two Sisters; and beyond these again, four islands
+which they called _las Volcanes_. On the second of October they came in
+sight of _Farfana_, beyond which there is a high pointed rock, which
+throws up fire in five places. Sailing in this manner, for some time, in
+16° of north latitude, they were obliged by continual contrary winds, to
+bear up again for the Philippine islands, and in their way back, had sight
+of six or seven additional islands, but did not anchor at any of them.
+They found also an archipelago, or numerous cluster of islands, in 15 or
+16 degrees of north latitude, well inhabited by a white people, with
+beautiful well-proportioned women, and much better clothed than in any
+other of the islands of these parts; and they had many golden ornaments,
+which was a sure sign that there was some of that metal in their country.
+These people likewise had barks or vessels of forty-three cubits long, by
+two fathoms and a half in breadth, constructed of planks five inches broad,
+and which were rowed with oars. The people told the Spaniards that they
+were in use to sail in these vessels to China, which was not above five or
+six days sail from thence, and offered to supply them with pilots, if they
+were inclined to go thither. Several of these barks, handsomely decked,
+came off to the Spanish ship, in which the master, and other principal
+people, sat on a high platform, while the rowers sat underneath, who were
+_blackamoors_ or negroes with frizzled hair. Being asked whence they had
+these negroes, they answered that they were brought from certain islands
+near Sebut, where there were abundance to be had. The Spaniards wondered
+much at finding negroes in this place, being above 300 leagues from the
+nearest land of the negroes. It is therefore probable that these people
+were not originally natives of this part of the world; but that they have
+been scattered somehow in various places over the circuit of the earth, as
+they are found in the islands of Nicobar and Andaman, in the bay of Bengal.
+From thence, for the space of 500 leagues, we do not know of any other
+black people: Yet Vasco Nunnez de Valboa pretends to have discovered them,
+when he went to explore the coast of the South Sea, in a country which he
+named _Quareca_; but there never were any found in New Spain, Castilia del
+Oro, or in Peru.
+
+In the year 1544, Don Gutierre de Vargas, bishop of Placenza, the cousin
+of Mendoça, sent a fleet from Seville to the straits of Magellan,
+instigated by the advice of the viceroy. Some said that this fleet was
+destined for the Moluccas, others for China, and others again, that it was
+meant only to explore the coast from the straits along Chili to Peru.
+However this may have been, the fleet was unable, from contrary winds, to
+get through the straits, except one small bark which got into the South
+Sea, and sailed along the whole coast, till it came to _Chirimai_ and
+_Arequipa_, which is above 500 leagues, which were now explored; all the
+rest of the coast having been formerly discovered by Diego de Almagro,
+Francis Pizarro, and their people, at various times[105].
+
+In January of the year 1545, Ruy Lopez de Villa Lobos, formerly mentioned,
+came with his Spaniards to the isle of _Moro_[106], and the city of
+_Camato_, where he was well received by the kings of Gilolo and Tidore,
+and the people of the country; for I, Antonio Galvano, had then left the
+Moluccas; and they put the governor Don George de Castro to much trouble,
+and great expence. In the same year, 1545, Ruy Lopez de Villa Lobos, sent
+another ship from Tidore for New Spain, under the command of Ignatius
+Ortez de Rotha, and having Jaspar Rico as pilot, with orders to attempt
+the passage by the south side of the line. Ortez sailed to the coast of
+Papua, which he explored; and, as he knew not that Saavedra had been there
+formerly, he challenged the credit and honour of the discovery. Finding
+the natives of a black colour, with frizzled hair, he named the country on
+that account New Guinea. Thus, the memory of Saavedra was then almost lost,
+as every thing is apt to fall into oblivion, unless put upon record, and
+illustrated by writing.
+
+In June of this year, 1545, one Pedro Fidalgo, a Portuguese, sailed in a
+junk from the city of Borneo; but being driven to the north by contrary
+winds, he fell in with a large island, the south extremity of which lay in
+nine or ten degrees of north latitude, while it stretched to lat. 22° N.
+at its other end, which is called the island of Luçones, from the name of
+the nation by which it is inhabited. Perhaps it may have some other name,
+of which, as yet, we have not been informed. This island runs from the
+north for a great way directly south, and then takes a turn towards the
+south-east. It is said that Fidalgo sailed for 250 leagues along the coast
+of this island, which is in the midway-between Mindanao and China, and he
+reported that the land was fruitful, and well clothed with trees and
+verdure; and that the inhabitants will give two pezoes of gold for one of
+silver, although so near China, in which the relative value of these
+metals is so well understood.
+
+In the year 1553, certain ships were sent out from England, which sailed
+to the northward, along the coast of Norway and Finmark, and from thence
+east, in seventy or eighty degrees of north latitude, till they came to
+Muscovy, to which country one of the ships penetrated; but I have not been
+able to learn what became of the rest. From the land of Muscovy, a ship
+may sail eastwards to Tartary, at the farthest extremity of which China is
+situated. It is reported that there is a wall above 200 leagues in length,
+between Tartary and China, in about lat. 50° N.
+
+From all the preceding discoveries, it may be concluded, that, as the
+whole earth is 360 degrees, and the ancient writers allow 17-1/2 leagues
+for every degree, the entire circuit of the earth would thus be 6300
+leagues; but as, in my opinion, each degree is exactly seventeen leagues,
+the circuit will then be only 6120 leagues. However this may be, the whole
+circuit of the globe has been discovered and sailed over, from east to
+west, even almost as it is encompassed and visited by the sun in its
+diurnal course. It is quite otherwise, however, in respect to the northern,
+and southern parts of the earth. For, towards the north pole, there has
+only been discovered hitherto to the latitude of 77° or 78°, which make an
+extent of 1347 leagues; and between the equinoctial and the south pole,
+there has only been discovered to the latitude of 52° or 53° south, or to
+the Straits of Magellan; which amounts to no more than 960 leagues. Now,
+adding these two together, their sum is just 2257 leagues: And, deducting
+this sum from 6300 leagues, there still remains to be discovered, in the
+north and south, 4043 leagues.
+
+
+[1] Ferdinand was hereditary king of Arragon; but, by marrying Isabella,
+    queen of Castile, had united the several monarchies of Spain, under
+    one government. Ferdinand had no share whatever in the honour of
+    sending out Columbus, the sole charge being defrayed by his consort,
+    Isabella, hereditary queen of Castile and Leon; and who had even to
+    borrow money for the purpose. The contemptuous notice of _one_
+    Christopher Columbus, must be pardoned to the patriotic rivalry of a
+    Portuguese.--E.
+
+[2] Galvano is here inaccurate: It will be seen in the sequel, that
+    Bartholomew Columbus did not accompany his brother in this voyage,
+    being then in England.--E.
+
+[3] It is certainly possible, that Columbus may have used that mode in his
+    course to the Canaries: But as his run across the Atlantic was nearly
+    on a parallel, he must have kept that part of his voyage by what is
+    called dead reckoning, or by the log.--E.
+
+[4] The middle of Guanahana is in lat. 24° 30' N. The centre of Jamaica in
+    18° 10' N. The latitudes of Galvano are generally inaccurate; and he
+    never pretends to assign any longitudes whatever. The series, likewise,
+    in which he arranges the discoveries of Columbus is very inaccurate.
+    --E.
+
+[5] Cape de Verd is in 14° 30' N. Deseada in 16° 30' N. a difference of
+    two degrees of latitude. Dominica, in 15° 30' is the first land said
+    to have been discovered by Columbus in his _second_ voyage, in the
+    authentic original narrative by his son, which will be found in the
+    sequel.--E.
+
+[6] Counting from Dominica to the north side of Cuba, between 15° 30' and
+    23° 15'.--E.
+
+[7] The negociators of the two crowns, as here related, seem to have been
+    ignorant that this loose division of the globe gave the whole
+    reciprocally to each of the parties.--E.
+
+[8] The apparent object seems to have been in search of a passage to the
+    East Indies by way of the north-west, a chimera long and anxiously
+    sought after. It is needless to make any observations on these
+    indistinct notices, as the voyage of Cabot will be afterwards given at
+    full length.--E.
+
+[9] The centre of Trinidada is in 10° 30'N. its S.W. point in 10° 12', and
+    the N.E. cape in 10º 45' N.--E.
+
+[10] De Barros, Dec. I. 1. 4. c. 2. and to the end of ch. 11.--Hakl.
+
+[11] Osorius says this voyage commenced on the 9th of July.--Clarke.
+
+[12] This Panama seems a blunder of some ignorant copyist, for Panarame.
+    --E.
+
+[13] The coast here is nearly N. and S. and their course must have been to
+    the north.--E.
+
+[14] The Marannon and Amazons are the same river. Perhaps by the Rio Dolce
+    the Orinoco may be meant; but in these slight notices of discovery it
+    is impossible at times to ascertain the real positions, through the
+    alteration of names.--E.
+
+[15] From the latitude indicated by Galvano, the land of Cortereal may
+    have been somewhere on the eastern side of Newfoundland.--E.
+
+[16] Barros, Dec. 1. I. 5. c. 10.
+
+[17] Gomara, I. 2.
+
+[18] About 8200 ounces, worth about L. 16,000 sterling; equal in modern
+    efficacy, perhaps, to L. 100,000.--E.
+
+[19] Probably an error for Taprobana; the same by which Ceylon was known
+    to the ancients.--E.
+
+[20] The Cakerlaka of other writers, which can only be large monkeys or
+    baboons, called men with tails, through ignorance or imposture.--E.
+
+[21] Rumi still continues the eastern name of the Turkish empire, as the
+    successor of the Roman emperors, in Assyria and Egypt. Hence these
+    Roman gold coins may have come in the way of trade from Assyria or
+    Egypt, or may possibly have been Venetian sequins.--E.
+
+[22] The author must here mean Cochin China by the coast of Patane.--E.
+
+
+[23] About 1000 by 320 English miles.--E.
+
+[24] This story of the skull of a small insect is quite unintelligible,
+    and must have been misunderstood entirely by Hakluyt, the translator:
+    It is the Elephant, probably, that is here meant.--E.
+
+[25] Probably the bird of Paradise.--Clarke.
+
+[26] P. Martyr, Dec. 3. c. 10.
+
+[27] The island of Tararequi is in lat. 5° N.
+
+[28] These leagues are elsewhere explained as 17-1/2 to the degree, or
+    about 4 English miles: Hence the estimate of Galvano is 2000 miles
+    long by 1200 miles broad; certainly a very extensive dominion. China
+    Proper may be said to extend in length from lat. 27° to 41° N. and in
+    breadth from long. 97° to 121° E. not very inferior to the above
+    estimate; but including the immeasurable bounds of its dependencies,
+    Chinese Tartary, Thibet, and almost the whole of central Asia, it
+    prodigiously exceeds the magnitude here assigned by Galvano.--E.
+
+[29] Castagnada, I. 4. c. 36. 37. Osorius, I. 11. f. 315. p. 2.
+
+[30] Pet. Mart. IV. iv. Gomar. II. xiv. and xvii.
+
+[31] The text is obscure, and seems to indicate that they were unable to
+    pass between the island of Ascension and the main of Yucatan. The
+    latitudes are extremely erroneous: Cozumel is in lat. 20° N. The
+    island of Ambergris, perhaps the Ascension of the text, is in 18° 30'.
+    From errors in latitude and alterations of nomenclature, it is often
+    impossible to follow distinctly the routes of these early voyagers.--E.
+
+[32] Pet. Mart. IV. vi. Gomar. II. xviii, &c.
+
+[33] Gomar. II. xxi, xxii, xxiii, xxiv.
+
+[34] This certainly ought to be called the Molucca islands; but Galvano
+    uniformly applies the same name, Malacca, both to the spice islands
+    and the city of Malacca on the Continent.--E.
+
+[35] Gomar. IV. iii. Pet. Mart. V. vii.
+
+[36] Ramusio, I. 874.
+
+[37] This seems to mean the Straits of Babelmandel. Having lost sight of
+    Prester John in Tartary, the Portuguese were delighted with the
+    discovery of a Christian king in Africa, the Negus of Abyssinia; and
+    transferred to him that popular fable.--E.
+
+[38] These countries, with the river and cape mentioned in the text, are
+    now unknown, these arbitrary names having merged in the nomenclature
+    of more recent settlers. If the latitude be nearly accurate, it may
+    have been on the confines of Georgia and South Carolina.--E.
+
+[39] Gomar. II. l.
+
+[40] Id. II. lx.
+
+[41] Malacca of the text ought certainly to be Molucca: Bouro is in lat.
+    3° 20' S. Timor between 8° 30' and 10° 20' S.--E.
+
+[42] Gomar. IV. viii.
+
+[43] Id. VI. iv. li.
+
+[44] Gomar. IV. viii, and xii. Castagn. VI. xli.
+
+[45] Gomar. VI. xii.
+
+[46] Castagn. VI. xlii.
+
+[47] Gomar. II. lxi. The text, in Hakluyt's translation, has the absurd
+    number of 76,000 Castilians lost in this war; 76 is a more probable
+    number, and is considerable out of his small force: yet, the text may
+    mean 76,000 _Castellans_ of gold, as the sum expended on the
+    expedition; and which Hakluyt, or his printer, changed to that number
+    of _Castilians_.--E.
+
+[48] Gomar. Conqu. de Mex. f. 226.
+
+[49] Id. 242. This bay reaches no farther to the S. than 148 10' N.--E.
+
+[50] Id. f. 229. 230.
+
+[51] Id. f. 233.
+
+[52] Gomar. Conqu. f. 234. and Hist. Gen. III. xxi.
+
+[53] Id: Hist. Gen. II. vii.
+
+[54] In this latitude, on the shore of Costa Rica, there is a town now
+    called Porto Cartago; but whether that indicated in the text it is
+    difficult to say, as Galvano is not always perfectly accurate in his
+    latitudes.--E.
+
+[55] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. lxv. and Conqu. f. 243.
+
+[56] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. lxvi, and Conqu. f. 256-261.
+
+[57] The Spanish leagues are 17-1/2 to the degree of latitude, hence this
+    march exceeded 2000 English miles.--E. Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. lxvi. Id.
+    Conqu. 246-273.
+
+[58] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. i. and ii.
+
+[59] The ambiguity of the language is here utterly inexplicable.--E.
+
+[60] Meaning probably the lake of Titicaca in Peru. It is hardly necessary
+    to say that this slight survey of the Plata must be erroneous,
+    especially in its reports. The Rio San Francisco, alludes to one of
+    the sources of the Great Maranon, or river of the Amazons.--E.
+
+[61] Ramusio, III. 310. Ramusio gives a long and minute account of this
+    unfortunate expedition, entitled, Relation made by Alvaro Nunez, of
+    what befel the armament sent to the _Indies_ (America) under Pamphilo
+    Narvaez in the year 1527, to the end of 1536; when he returned to
+    Seville with _three_ only of his companions.--Clarke.
+
+[62] The inhabitants of this island were most probably _tatooted_, of
+    which custom a particular description will be given hereafter, in the
+    particular voyages of discovery in the South Sea.--E.
+
+[63] The longitudes being altogether neglected in these relations by
+    Galyano, it is impossible to form any conjecture as to the islands
+    indicated in text. They may possibly have belonged to the Carolines of
+    modern maps, which extend between long. 135° and 180° E. and about the
+    latitudes of the text.--E.
+
+[64] The account which Galvano gives of this voyage is very vague and
+    inconclusive. We shall find afterwards that the Spaniards found out
+    the means of counteracting the perpetual eastern trade winds of the
+    Pacific within the tropics, by shaping a more northerly course from
+    the Philippine islands, where they established the staple of their
+    Indian commerce, between Acapulco and Manilla.--E.
+
+
+[65] Galvano certainly mistakes here in assigning Tecoantepec, which is at
+    least 340 miles from the nearest part of the bay of Honduras. If a
+    navigation were practicable from Tecoantepec, it would more probably
+    be towards Tabasco, at the bottom of the bay of Campechy. Perhaps he
+    ought to have said from Guatimala to the gulf of Dolse, at the bottom
+    of the bay of Honduras. This splendid navigation between the Atlantic
+    and Pacific, within the tropics, like that between the Mediterranean
+    and Red Sea, still remains an unsolved problem. It will be resumed
+    hereafter, among the voyages and travels to Spanish America.--E.
+
+[66] These seem all to have been brothers to Pizarro, and named from the
+    town of Alcantara in Spain.--E.
+
+[67] The mouth of the Maranon is exactly under the line.--E.
+
+[68] The latitude of Cusco is only 13° 30' S.--E.
+
+[69] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. vi. vii. viii. ix
+
+[70] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. xvi. xviii. xix.
+
+[71] So named from the two brothers, Caspar and Michael Cortereal, who are
+    said to have been lost on this coast of North America in 1500, as
+    formerly mentioned by Galvano.--E.
+
+[72] Xalis, or Xalisco, the residence of Gusman is in lat. 21°45'N. The
+    mouth of the river St Francis, on the north-eastern shore of the gulf
+    of California, is in lat. 26° 40' N. so that the discovery on the
+    present occasion seems to have comprised about 350 miles to the north
+    of Xalis.--E.
+
+[73] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. Lxxiv. xcviii.
+
+[74] Xauxa or Jauja, stands on the high table land of Peru; Lima, or de
+    los Reys, near the coast of the South Sea, in the maritime valley, or
+    low country, and on the river Rimac, called Lima in the text.--E.
+
+[75] Gomar. Hist. Gen. IV. xxiii. and V. xxii.
+
+[76] Gomar. H. G. V. xxiv. and xxv. Almagro appears, both on his march to
+    Chili and back to Cusco, to have gone by the high mountainous track
+    of the Andes, and the carcases of his dead horses must have been
+    preserved from corruption amid the ever during ice and snow of that
+    elevated region.--E.
+
+[77] The text seems ambiguous, and it appears difficult to say whether
+    Galvano means, that Cosesofar, or Coje Sofar, was captain under
+    D'Acunha, or general of the Guzerat army, belonging to Badu.--E.
+
+[78] This probably refers to the _Bore_, or great and sudden influx of
+    the sea, after a great recession.--E.
+
+[79] Gomar. H. G. IV. xiii.
+
+[80] Probably a mistake for La Paz, the principal town of the north-
+    western district, or mining province, belonging to the Viceroyalty of
+    La Plata.--E.
+
+[81] The only island mentioned in this voyage, which can be traced by the
+    names in our modern maps, is the Piscadores, about lat. 11° N. long.
+    167° E.--E.
+
+[82] This strange expression is quite inexplicable, and must have been
+    misunderstood by Hakluyt.--E.
+
+[83] Probably Morty, of our present maps.--E.
+
+[84] Chron. del Peru, c. ix, xx.
+
+[85] Ramus. III. 356.
+
+[86] This obviously refers to an inaccurate description of the Babyroussa.
+    --E.
+
+[87] Gomar. H. G. II. lxiv. Ramus. III. 329.
+
+[88] Gomar. H. G. VI. xvii.
+
+[89] In this paragraph we have very vague indications of humming birds,
+    rattlesnakes, and of the animal now called Pecari.--E.
+
+[90] Gomar. H. G. V. xxxv. and Chron. del Peru, c. 103.
+
+[91] The word Brazil in the text obviously includes the whole flat country
+    to the east of the Andes, Guiana, Brazil, Paraguay, Buenos Ayres, and
+    Patagonia.--E.
+
+[92] This idea, ever since the time of Lord Monboddo, has been renewed,
+    and occupies the attention of the explorers of Africa; links may exist,
+    in creation, with which we are yet unacquainted.--Clarke.
+
+    The fancy of tailed men has probably arisen from inattentive observers,
+    seeing people clothed in the skins of beasts, with the tails hanging
+    down. The natives of New South Wales wear tails in imitation of the
+    Kangaroo: Yet, having been closely observed, are not described as
+    tailed men--E.
+
+[93] This word ought to have been _Pacos_. Of these animals, with the
+    Llamas and Vicugnas, different species of the camel genus, a more
+    extended account will occur, when we come to the particular travels in
+    Peru.--E.
+
+[94] It will be seen afterwards, in the account of the West India Islands,
+    and the Continent of Guiana, that there are many warlike tribes of
+    Caribs, or Caraibs, constantly engaged in predatory warfare; whose
+    women, when their husbands are absent in search of prisoners for
+    _food_, take arms for the protection of themselves and children;
+    whence they have been reported as nations of female warriors, or
+    Amazons.--E.
+
+[95] Gomar. H.G.V. xxxvi.
+
+[96] The true latitudes of the places mentioned in the text are, Suakim,
+    19º 30', Massoua, 15º 20', Cossier, 26° 16', Judda, 21º 20', Suez, 30°.
+    --E.
+
+[97] The latitude of 30° N. would lead to the idea of Sonora being the
+    district, or province, indicated in the text by Sibola; Cinaloa is
+    only in 26° N. yet, from the context, appears to be the country
+    intended by Galvano--E.
+
+[98] The idea that a dog, even able to bear a load of fifty pounds, should
+    carry a woman, is truly absurd. If there be any truth in the story,
+    the dogs must have performed the services in the text by drawing
+    sledges; yet nothing of the kind has hitherto been found in North
+    America, though common in North-east Asia.--E.
+
+[99] Gomar. H.G. VI. xviii. and xix.
+
+[100] In other writers Liampa and Siampa, or Tsiompa, are synonimous; but
+    that place is in lat. 12° N. The latitude of the text would lead us to
+    the eastern coast of China, between Ningpo and Nankin.--E.
+
+[101] Gomez, H. G. VI. xviii. This story, which Galvano has reported from
+    Genoa, seems altogether unworthy of credit.--E.
+
+[102] The Matelots are laid down in our modern maps, in lat. 9° N. Long
+    137° E. not far E.N.E. of the Pelew, or Pillelew islands.--E.
+
+[103] This great inland of Mindanao, to the south of the Philippines,
+    reaches from 9° 30' N. to 5° 30', and from long. 122° to 126° 20' E.
+    being about 300 miles long, by 270 miles broad.--E.
+
+[104] The Philippines, exclusive of Mindanao and Palawa, extend from Lat.
+    9° to 18º 40' both N. and are in E. long. 122º but their present
+    geographical names, Luzon, Samar, Leyte, Zebu, Negros, Pany, Mindora,
+    and several other smaller isles, have no resemblance whatever with
+    those of the text.--E.
+
+[105] Gomar. H.G. IV. xiv.
+
+[106] Probably Morty, the most north-easterly of the Moluccas.--E.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+THE JOURNEY OF AMBROSE CONTARINI, AMBASSADOR FROM THE REPUBLIC OF VENICE
+TO UZUN-HASSAN, KING OF PERSIA, IN THE YEARS 1473, 4, 5, AND. 6, WRITTEN
+BY HIMSELF.
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+This relation of a journey into Persia, between the years 1473 and 1477,
+is from a collection of voyages and travels, principally in Asia, made in
+the _twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth_, and _fifteenth centuries_, which
+was published at the Hague, in the French language, in 1735. That
+collection usually goes under the name of _Bergeron_, whose name appears
+on the title somewhat equivocally as the author; but who is mentioned in
+the advertisement as a writer belonging to the middle of the preceding
+century; and the only part of the work that can, be attributed to him, is
+a _Treatise of Navigation, and of the Modern Voyages of Discovery and
+Conquest, especially those made by the French, &c._ which serves as an
+introduction to this compilement. The editor of this collection gives no
+account of himself, or of the sources from whence he has derived his
+different articles; and only says, that the journal of Contarini was
+translated into French, that it might be published along with the other
+contents of his volume. From the _Bibliotheque Universelle des Voyages_,
+by G. Boucher de la Richarderie, a new work of great research, published
+at Paris in 1808, we learn that the journal of Contarini was published in
+Italian at Venice, in a duodecimo volume, in 1543. So far as is known to
+us, it now appears for the first time in an English translation. This
+article might have been more aptly placed towards the close of _first_
+part of the present collection, but escaped notice in proper time and it
+appears of too much importance, both in itself, and as an early document,
+to be omitted from punctilious attention to rigid systematic arrangement.
+
+PREFACE OF THE AUTHOR.
+
+"The illustrious republic of Venice, having done me the honour to appoint
+me ambassador to Uzun-Hassan, king of Persia, I accepted the employment
+with much pleasure, both that I might do acceptable service to my own
+country and for the general good of Christendom. I neither considered the
+difficulties nor the dangers of the journey, but placed my trust solely
+on the assistance of God; preferring the interests of my country, and of
+the Christian world, to my own ease and safety. On purpose to render my
+discoveries useful to the public, I have carefully and briefly recorded
+every circumstance deserving of attention, that occurred during my long
+and laborious journey; as relative to the provinces, cities, and places
+through which I travelled, and the manners and customs of the different
+nations among whom I sojourned. In short, I have omitted nothing
+deserving of notice, that occurred during my three years journey, having
+left Venice on the first day of Lent, in the year 1473, and having
+returned to my beloved country on the 24th of February in the year
+1476[1]."
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_The Ambassador, after passing through Germany, Poland, Russia, and the
+Tartarian Deserts, or Upper European Sarmatia, arrives at Caffa or
+Theodosia._
+
+I left Venice on the 23d of February, in the year 1473, accompanied by the
+venerable priest Stephen Testa, who acted as my chaplain and secretary,
+and by Demetrius de Seze, my interpreter, together with two servants,
+Maffei de Bergamo, and John Ungaretti, all of us disguised in ordinary
+German dresses, our money being concealed in the clothes of Stephen Testa.
+We went by water in the first place to the church of _St Michael in
+Murano_, where we heard mass, and received the benediction of the prior;
+after which, we mounted our horses, which were there in waiting, and
+reached Treviso[2] the same day. I anxiously wished to have procured some
+person to accompany us on the journey who knew the road, but could not
+meet with any, nor could I even procure a guide for hire. Leaving Treviso
+on the 24th, we arrived that day at Cogiensi, now called Cornegliano[3];
+and knowing the dangers and difficulties we must experience during our
+long journey, we here confessed, and partook of the holy sacrament of the
+eucharist, after which we resumed our journey. We fortunately overtook a
+German, named Sebastian, who said he knew me and the object of my journey,
+and offered to keep us company to Nuremburgh. I gladly accepted of this
+person as a companion of our journey, inwardly thanking God for affording
+us a guide. We continued our journey to the frontiers of Germany, passing
+through several cities and castles, belonging to different princes and
+bishops, vassals of the empire, among which the city of Augsburg seemed
+one of the most beautiful. Not far from that place our German companion,
+Sebastian, left us, taking the road for Francfort. We parted from him with
+many embraces, giving him thanks for his numerous attentions, and mutually
+wishing each other a good journey.
+
+Having procured a new guide, we arrived at Nuremburg on the 10th of March.
+This is a fine city, having a river running through the middle of it, and
+is defended by an excellent citadel. While here, I inquired of my landlord
+if there were any travellers going our way. He informed me that there were
+two ambassadors from the king of Poland then in the city, who, he was
+certain, would be happy to receive a visit from me. I therefore sent my
+chaplain, Stephen Testa, to inform these gentlemen of my being in
+Nuremburg, and of the purpose of my journey, and of my desire to pay them
+a visit. They received my message with much civility, and I accordingly
+went to wait upon them. These gentlemen were counsellors of state to his
+Polish Majesty, one of whom was an archbishop, and the other a knight,
+named Paul. After mutual compliments, I informed them that I proposed
+paying my respects to their sovereign, and was furnished with a passport.
+Notwithstanding the sorry equipage in which I travelled, they received me
+with much honour. I remained four days in Nuremburg, during which I formed
+a friendly intimacy with the Polish ambassadors, and then resumed my
+journey in their company, being likewise accompanied by an ambassador
+belonging to the king of Bohemia, eldest son of the king of Poland.
+
+Departing from Nuremburg on the 14th of March, now nearly sixty horsemen
+in company, we crossed through Germany, always lodging in good cities or
+castles, some of which were extremely beautiful, both in respect to their
+situation and the excellence of their fortifications; but I omit
+describing them, as they are well known to travellers. The journey across
+Germany took us twelve days, during which we passed through the greater
+part of the dominions of the Maregrave of Brandenburg, and arrived at the
+imperial city of Francfort, a tolerably good and well fortified city on
+the Oder. We rested here till the 29th of March. As this city is near the
+confines of Poland, we had an escort of cavalry belonging to the Maregrave
+of Brandenburg, which accompanied us to the frontiers. These soldiers were
+well mounted and armed, and marched in good order. On the last day of
+March we arrived at Miedzyrzyez[4], which is a small city, but strong and
+pleasant, and is the first place on the frontiers of Poland. From that
+place till we reached _Stragone_, or Poznan, which took us three days
+journey, we saw no place worth notice. Poznan is particularly remarkable
+on account of a great fair, which is resorted to by many merchants.
+Leaving Poznan on the 3d of April, we arrived on the 9th at Lenczycz[5],
+where Casimir, king of Poland, then resided. In this journey we found
+neither cities nor considerable castles, and had much reason to remember
+Germany with regret, both on account of bad lodgings and every other
+circumstance. When my arrival was announced to the king, he sent two of
+his gentlemen to wait upon me, who assigned me a tolerably commodious
+lodging. Next day being Easter, when no business of any kind is transacted,
+I rested after the fatigues of the journey. On the following morning the
+king sent me a robe of black damask, according to the custom of the
+country, that I might go to court, which I did, accompanied by several
+persons of distinction, and had the honour to pay my respects to the king,
+according to the ceremonies of that court; after which I presented the
+letters of our illustrious republic to his majesty, and explained to him
+the nature of my commission. The king was pleased to invite me to dinner,
+which was served much in the same manner as with us, the dishes being in
+great abundance, and well dressed. As soon as dinner was over, I asked
+permission to retire, which was accordingly granted. Two days afterwards I
+was again sent for to court, when the king gave orderly answers to all the
+proposals which I had made in the name of our republic, and with so much
+benevolent attention towards me, that I learned by experience that he
+justly deserved the character of the best king who had reigned in Poland
+for a great many years. He was pleased to appoint me two guides, one of
+whom was to accompany me through Poland, and the other through lower
+Russia, to Kiow[6], or Magrano, which is the key of the kingdom. I humbly
+thanked his majesty in the name of the republic, and took my leave.
+
+I left Lenczycz on the 14th of April, on my journey through Poland, which
+is a flat country, ornamented with many forests; but the great want of
+convenient lodgings is a sure proof that it is not very fertile, nor much
+abounding in the necessaries of life. On the 19th I arrived at Lublin, a
+tolerable city, defended by a citadel. The three sons of the king resided
+there at this time for their education. The eldest of these princes was
+about fourteen years of age, and the two others considerably younger.
+Learning that they wished to see me, providing that their father had not
+forbidden, I waited upon them, and was received with much politeness, the
+eldest conversing with me in the most obliging manner, and I observed that
+they behaved with much respect to their preceptor. I took my leave of them,
+returning thanks for their civilities, and they parted from me with as
+much courtesy as I had experienced in my reception. Leaving Lublin, and
+continuing our journey through Poland, we arrived on the 20th of April in
+lower Russia, which is subject to the king of Poland. In this part of our
+journey we travelled five whole days through thick woods, and, except
+meeting with a very few castles, we lodged for the most part in country
+houses. On the 25th, we came to a town named _Jusch_, which is defended by
+a wooden castle. We rested here for some time, yet not without danger, as
+the inhabitants were quite mad with drunkenness, on account of celebrating
+certain marriages. This country produces no wine, but the natives prepare
+a liquor from honey, which is stronger and more intoxicating even than
+wine. Leaving this place, we came to another village named _Aitomir_, in
+which likewise there is a wooden castle. During the whole of our journey
+of the 29th, we travelled through forests, in constant danger of robbers
+who infested all the roads, and we knew not where to pass the night, or to
+procure any refreshments, insomuch that we had to sleep in the woods,
+keeping strict watch lest we might be surprised by the banditti. On the
+30th of April we reached _Belligraoch_, which signifies the _white_ fort,
+where we were lodged in the royal palace, and passed the night with much
+inconvenience.
+
+On the first of May we reached the city of _Kiow_[7], or Magraman. The
+governor of this city, which stands beyond the frontiers of Polish Russia,
+was a Polander and Catholic, named _Pamartin_. Immediately on learning my
+arrival from the guides sent along with me by the king, he appointed me a
+lodging, which was sufficiently small, considering the size of the city.
+He here visited me, and sent me a sufficient supply of provisions. This
+city serves as a barrier or frontier garrison against the Tartars, and is
+celebrated for a great fair, to which the merchants bring rich furs, and
+other goods from Upper Russia. From hence the merchants travel in a large
+caravan to Caffa or Theodosia in the Crimea; but are often surprised and
+very ill treated by the Tartars during their journey. The country about
+Kiow abounds in grain and cattle. The inhabitants of this place occupy the
+whole day in their affairs till three o'clock, employing all the rest,
+till night, in drinking and quarrels, the natural consequence of
+drunkenness. On the day of my arrival, governor Pamartin sent some of his
+gentlemen to invite me to dinner, which I accepted with as much politeness
+as I could express. He received me very honourably, offering me every
+service in his power, in the most obliging manner; saying, that he was
+ordered by the king of Poland to treat me in every thing as well as
+possible; on which I thanked him for his polite attentions, and
+endeavoured to recommend myself to his friendship. From him I was informed
+that he was in daily expectation of the arrival of an ambassador from
+Lithuania, going with presents to the prince of the Tartars, who was to
+have an escort of 200 Tartar horse; and, if I were inclined to take
+advantage of this opportunity, by which means I should travel in much
+greater safety, I had better wait the arrival of this ambassador. I
+accepted of this offer most willingly; and we then sat down to a
+magnificent entertainment; at which the bishop of Kiow, who was brother to
+the governor, and many other persons of consequence were present. We
+wanted nothing which could contribute to make the dinner pleasant. Good
+company, good cheer, and music during the repast. The only circumstance I
+did not like was, that it lasted too long; as I had more need for sleep
+and rest, after my fatiguing journey, than of all the good cheer that
+could be offered. In consequence, as soon as dinner was ended, I took my
+leave, and retired to my lodgings in the city; the governor living in the
+castle, which is only of wood. The city of Kiow stands on the river named
+anciently Boristhenes, and Danambre by the natives, which we Italians call
+Lerissa, and which falls into the Euxine.
+
+On the 10th of May[8], the ambassador of Lithuania arrived; and, as he was
+to set out next day after mass, I went to pay him my compliments,
+accompanied by M. Pamartin; who directed him, on the part of the king of
+Poland, to take care of me, and to conduct me in perfect safety to
+Theodosia. To this the ambassador answered, that he had every respect for
+the orders of his majesty, the sovereign arbiter of his life and death,
+and would carefully obey his orders. I thanked M. Pamartin for all his
+kindnesses, as he had frequently visited me, and had supplied me with
+every thing I needed for subsistence during my stay; and, as some token of
+my gratitude, I made him a present of a tolerably good German horse, which
+had carried me hitherto. We here parted with the rest of our horses, which
+were quite unfit for our farther use, and procured horses of the country
+for the remainder of our journey; and, on parting with the guides who had
+accompanied us to Kiow by orders of the king, I rewarded them for their
+attention and good conduct.
+
+I left Kiow on the 11th of May, along with the Lithuanian ambassador; and
+as I was unable to travel on horseback, on account of pains in my feet, I
+travelled in a carriage, which had served me for that purpose ever since I
+left the king of Poland at Lenczycz. The first place we came to was
+_Cerca_, belonging to the king of Poland, where we waited till the 15th,
+for the Tartar horse who came to escort us on our journey. After their
+arrival we set out on our journey through the great desert of Tartary, and
+came to the Boristhenes, which separates Tartary from Russia, and which is
+some miles broad[9]. As it was necessary to pass the river, our Tartars
+cut down some trees, the stems of which they fastened together into a raft,
+which was covered over by the branches, and upon which the whole of our
+baggage was placed. They fastened their horses by the tails to this raft,
+by which means it was dragged across the river, they themselves swimming
+along-side of their horses, and holding by their manes. We had likewise to
+swim our horses across, in which we succeeded, by the blessing of God, but
+in much fear and danger at this, to us, unusual mode of navigation. When
+we got over, we had to remain a whole day on the other side to collect and
+replace our baggage.
+
+While among the Tartars, their officers eyed me with much attention and
+suspicion; and, during our new journey through the desert beyond the river,
+the Lithuanian ambassador informed me, by means of the interpreter, that
+the Tartar officers had come to a resolution to carry me to their prince,
+as they could not allow a person of my appearance to go on to Theodosia
+without his permission. I was much alarmed by this intelligence, believing
+that I should incur considerable risk of having the purposes of my journey
+frustrated by this measure, and, therefore, earnestly recommended to the
+ambassador to keep in mind the orders he had received on the part of the
+king of Poland respecting me, and the promises he had made to Pamartin;
+and I promised to make a present of a sword to the interpreter if he
+succeeded to extricate me from my embarrassment. The interpreter reported
+my fears and wishes to the ambassador, who succeeded, after drinking with
+the Tartars, in persuading them that I was of Genoa; and, by means of a
+present of fifteen ducats, he obtained permission for me to go direct for
+Theodosia. Our journey through the desert continued till the 9th of June,
+during which we suffered many hardships, having, at one time, been a whole
+day and night without water. At length it became necessary for us to part
+company, the Lithuanian ambassador and his escort taking the direct road
+to Bachiserai[10], at which place the prince of the Tartars resided. On
+this occasion, a Tartar was appointed to be our guide to Theodosia, and we
+parted from the escort, not without considerable apprehensions of some
+sudden attack from the Tartars, yet much satisfied at getting rid of that
+crew, for they smelt so abominably, from feeding on horse flesh, that it
+was quite intolerable to come near them.
+
+Our whole company passed the ensuing night in carts covered with skins, in
+which we were soon surrounded by a great number of persons, inquiring who
+we were. On being informed by our Tartar guide that I was of Genoa, they
+supplied us with milk, and left us. Resuming our journey next morning
+early, we arrived that day, which was the 16th of June, at the suburbs of
+Theodosia, otherwise called Kaffa. Filled with gratitude for our
+preservation through so many dangers, we went privately into a church to
+give thanks to God for our safe arrival; and from thence I sent my
+interpreter to inform the Venetian consul of my arrival. He immediately
+sent his brother to wait upon me, advising me to remain where I was till
+night, when he carried me privately to a house belonging to him in the
+same suburb, where I was exceedingly well received. I here found Paulus
+Omnibamus, who had left Venice three months before me, under the orders of
+our illustrious republic.
+
+
+[1] In the latter part of this journey, the date of his return to Venice
+    is the 10th of April.--E.
+
+[2] Called Tarvisin, in the original.--E.
+
+[3] Called Conigiano, in the edition of Bergeron.--E.
+
+[4] This small city stands on a small river which runs into the Werta, at
+    the western extremity of what was Poland, about sixty-seven miles from
+    Poznan. It is called Messaricie in the original.--E.
+
+[5] Lausicie in the original.--E.
+
+[6] Named Chio in the original. The second name, Magrano, is afterwards
+    called Magraman by Contarini, or his French translator.--E.
+
+[7] Named Chio in the original, but which must necessarily be Kiow, or
+    Kieu, now belonging to Russia. The three formerly mentioned stages
+    Jusch, Aitomir, and Belligraoch, must either be villages of too little
+    importance to find a place in geographical maps, or their names are so
+    corrupted as to be unintelligible. The direct road from Lublin to Kiow,
+    passes through the palatinates of Russia, Wolhynia, and Kiow,
+    provinces of ci-devant Poland, now annexed to the Russian empire.--E.
+
+[8] The original says April, but attention to the context distinctly
+    points out this necessary correction.--E.
+
+[9] From this circumstance it evidently appears that the journey from Kiow
+    had hitherto been on the right or west of the Dnieper or Boristhenes,
+    through the country of the Nogais Tartars, now forming the western
+    portion of the Russian province of Catharinoslau; and we may suppose
+    the wide part of that river they had now to cross to have been
+    somewhere about Cherson.--E.
+
+[10] Named Arcercheriher in the French translation of Contarini; but which
+    must necessarily be some corruption of Baschiserai, the residence of
+    the khan of the Crim Tartars.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Contarini, leaving Kaffa, crosses the Euxine to the city of Phasis,
+whence he pursues his journey through Mingrelia, Georgia, and part of
+Armenia, into Persia_.
+
+It is impossible for me to give any exact description of the city of Kaffa,
+or Theodosia, or of its government, as the danger of incurring suspicion
+obliged me to remain continually at home; on which account I can only
+mention such particulars as I learned from others. It is situated on the
+Euxine, and is celebrated for a great fair, which is much frequented, on
+which account the city is very populous, and is said to be very rich and
+powerful. I hired a vessel belonging to Anthony Valdat, which lay in the
+Palus Meotis, to carry me to the city of _Phasis_. When I was ready to
+embark, I met with two Armenians, one of whom had been on an embassy to
+Rome, from Uzun Hassan, and was persuaded by them to prefer disembarking
+at _Tina_, about an hundred miles from Trebisond, instead of Phasis,
+alleging that from Tina it was only four hours journey to a castle named
+_Arrius_, which depended upon the king of Persia, and promising to conduct
+us to that place in safety. Although I was by no means satisfied with this
+advice, I allowed myself to be guided by the consul and his brother, who
+agreed in opinion with the Armenians. I accordingly left Kaffa on the 4th
+of June[1], accompanied by the consul, who went with me to the river,
+where our vessel was in waiting. I had formerly agreed with the master for
+our passage to Phasis at seventy ducats, but on occasion of the change in
+our destination, I was now obliged to pay an hundred. Being aware that I
+should not be able to meet with any person to serve us at the place we
+were going to, I used the precaution to hire nine men from Kaffa, to
+assist the mariners of our vessel, and to procure provisions for us in our
+journey through Georgia and Mingrelia.
+
+We embarked on the 15th of June, and made sail across the Euxine, direct
+for Tina, but had hardly got twenty miles on our voyage, when a contrary
+wind sprung up from the east. Observing the mariners consulting together
+in an extraordinary manner, I became curious to know the purpose of their
+discourse. Accordingly, one Bernard, the brother-in-law of our captain,
+said to me that he understood we proposed going to Tina, but advised me by
+no means to do so; as a certain _Subassa_ roamed about that neighbourhood
+with a band of cavalry, who would certainly make us slaves if we fell into
+his hands. On this advice I changed my purpose, and the wind becoming more
+favourable, we made sail for Liasi and Phasis, and arrived at _Varsi_ on
+the 29th of June, where I disembarked my horses and baggage, and sent them
+from thence by land to Phasis, which is sixty miles from that place.
+_Varsi_ is a castle, with a small village in Mingrelia, belonging to a
+lord named _Gorbola_, to whom likewise _Caltichea_[2], a place of small
+importance on the coast of the Euxine, is subject. The inhabitants of this
+country are very miserable, and the only productions are hemp, wax, and
+silk.
+
+On the 1st of July we arrived near Phasis, followed by a vessel filled
+with Mingrelians, who seemed all to be fools or drunk. Quitting the vessel,
+we went up the river in a boat, passing an island in the mouth of the
+river, where Oetes, the father of Medea the enchantress, is said to have
+reigned. On this island we spent the night, and were sadly infested by
+midges. Next day we went up the river in the boat, passing the city of
+Asso, which stands on its banks in the midst of a forest. I here found one
+Nicholas Capella, of Modena, who commanded in these parts, and a
+Circassian woman named Martha, who had been the slave of a person of Genoa,
+but was now married. This Martha received me with much kindness, and with
+her I staid two days. Phasis is a city of Mingrelia, subject to prince
+Bendian, whose dominions extend only about three days journey in length.
+The country is very mountainous, and full of forests. The inhabitants are
+so fierce and savage, that they might be accounted wild beasts. Their
+principal drink is beer; they have some corn and wine, but in very small
+quantities; boiled millet being their ordinary food, which is a very poor
+kind of nourishment. They sometimes procure wine and salted fish from
+Trebisond, and import salt from Kaffa, without which they could not exist.
+Their only productions consist in a small quantity of hemp and wax. If
+they were industrious, they might procure abundance of fish, which are
+very numerous in their river. They are Christians, according to the Greek
+ritual, to which they have added many gross superstitions.
+
+I left Phasis on the 4th of July, accompanied by Nicholas Capella, and
+crossed the river _Mare_ on a float. That day and the next, we travelled
+through a considerable portion of Mingrelia, always among woods and
+mountains. Towards the evening of the 5th, we came to the habitation of
+prince Bendian, whom we found, with all his court, reclining on a plain,
+under the shade of some trees. I sent Nicholas Capella to inform him of my
+quality, and to ask permission to pay him my respects, which was
+accordingly granted. I saluted him, therefore, with great respect, as he
+sat on the ground with his wife and children, and he made me sit down
+beside him. After explaining the purpose of my journey, I requested he
+would have the goodness to appoint me a guide. He expressed his
+satisfaction at my arrival in his dominions, and granted my request. He
+afterwards sent me some bread, a piece of beef, and the head of a sow, but
+so under done, that it required the extreme necessity in which we then
+were to induce us to eat of his provisions; but when we cannot get what we
+like, we must put up with what can be had. We had to wait a whole day for
+the promised guide. The plain in which we found prince Bendian, is
+surrounded by very fine trees, resembling box, but much more lofty. The
+prince seemed about fifty years of age, and had a tolerably handsome
+countenance, but his manners were perfectly ridiculous.
+
+On the 7th of July we continued our journey, always among woods and
+mountains, and next day passed the river which divides Mingrelia from
+Georgia, having to pass the night in the open air, and, what was worse, we
+had nothing to eat. On the 9th, we arrived at a small city named
+_Cotachis_[3], which is defended by a stone fort, and where we saw a
+temple that seemed very ancient. We had here to pass a bridge over a large
+river, before reaching the plain in which the huts of Plangion, king of
+Georgia, are situated. The fort and city of Cotachis belong to Plangion. I
+waited upon the commander of this place who invited me to dinner. He was
+seated on the ground, on which I, and those of my suite who accompanied me,
+and some friends of the governor, all sat down. Before us was laid a
+greasy skin, on which they served us with bread, radishes, some flesh, and
+other execrable articles with which I was not acquainted. They continually
+offered me wine in large goblets, to fill me drunk, according to their
+abominable customs, as they are as foolish and beastly as the Mingrelians.
+Finding that I would not join them in deep drinking, they held me in great
+contempt, insomuch that I found it extremely difficult to get leave to
+retire and to continue my journey. But at length they brought me a guide
+to conduct me to the king of Georgia.
+
+I left Cotachis on the 12th of July; and, after travelling the whole day
+through woods and mountains, we rested for the night in a meadow at the
+foot of a mountain, near a castle named _Scandes_[4], in which king
+_Pangrates_[5] resides. My guide here left me on purpose to inform the
+king of my arrival; promising to return immediately with another guide to
+serve me during the rest of the journey. We had accordingly to pass the
+whole night in the wood, starving of hunger, and full of anxiety. The
+guide came back early in the morning, accompanied by two of the kings
+secretaries, who informed me that the king was gone to Cotachis, and had
+ordered them to make an inventory of all our baggage, and of every thing
+we had about us; after which we should be provided with a passport, to
+travel free from payment of any duties through the whole country. They
+proceeded accordingly in their examination and inventory with the most
+rigorous exactness, even noting down the very shirts we then wore. After
+this they ordered me to mount my horse, and to go along with them to the
+king, leaving all my people behind. I used my best endeavours to be
+excused from this; but, instead of listening to me, they loaded me with
+insolence; and the only favour I could obtain, and that with the utmost
+difficulty, was permission to take my interpreter along with me. We
+accordingly resumed our journey, without meat or drink, and arrived much
+fatigued at Cotachis towards night; where my interpreter and me were left
+all night to our repose under a tree, where, indeed, they sent us some
+bread and fish.
+
+The remainder of my people were taken to a miserable village, where they
+were left in charge of the priest; and our mutual anxiety may be easily
+guessed.
+
+Next morning I was carried before the king, whom I found sitting on the
+ground in a hut, surrounded by several of his nobles. After paying my
+respects, he asked me a great number of questions, and among the rest, how
+many kings there were in the world? It came into my fancy to answer that
+there were twelve. On which he signified that I was right, and that he was
+one of the number; and that he was much surprised that I should come into
+his dominions without bringing him a letter from my sovereign. To this I
+answered, that when I left my own country, I did not expect to travel
+through his dominions, otherwise my sovereign would assuredly have given
+me letters in charge for his majesty; and with this answer he seemed
+satisfied. He asked many other extraordinary questions, from which I
+conjectured that my guide had maliciously represented me as carrying many
+valuable things; and it is probable, if this had been the case, that I had
+never been allowed to escape out of their hands. The royal secretaries
+endeavoured to persuade me that I ought to make the king a present of any
+article that might strike his fancy among my small baggage; but I got off
+without making any present, except compliments, and requesting him to
+appoint some one to conduct me through his dominions. This he was pleased
+to promise, as likewise to give me a free passport, without paying any
+duties, as I carried no merchandize. Accordingly, I took my leave of the
+king on the 14th of July, returning to the tree I formerly mentioned as my
+lodging, where the secretary brought me the promised passport and a guide.
+I then returned to my people at the village where they were kept in my
+absence, and was received with much joy, as the priest had represented the
+king as the cruellest tyrant in the world. My people could not contain
+themselves for excess of joy at my safe return, and even the miserable
+priest was so touched at the scene, that he provided us with something to
+eat, and we slept there that night as well as we could.
+
+Next day, being the 15th of July, we provided ourselves with some bread
+and wine, to comfort ourselves on the way, and resumed our journey through
+thick forests and terrible mountains, which continued for two days. In the
+evening of the 16th, we stopt near a spring, where we remained during the
+night in the open air, being obliged to light a fire on account of the
+coldness of the weather, though in the middle of summer. On the 17th of
+the same month we arrived at _Goride_[6], which belongs to the king of
+Georgia. This city is built on a plain, watered by a large river, and is
+defended by a citadel which is built upon a rock. Our guide notified our
+arrival to the commandant, who ordered us a house for our lodgings,
+apparently for the purpose of extorting a present; for shortly afterwards
+he informed me that he had letters from the king, by which he was ordered
+to receive twenty-six ducats from me for himself, and that I should pay
+six to my guide. I endeavoured to evade this demand, by saying that the
+king had received me favourably, to whom I had already given seventy
+ducats, and could not give any thing more, and urged my free passport. But
+he would listen to nothing I could urge, and I was forced to comply with
+his extortion. He even detained me till the 19th of the month, and even
+then I had extreme difficulty to get leave to depart. The inhabitants of
+the city, who deserve rather to be ranked among beasts, looked at us with
+as much astonishment as if they had never seen any other men than
+ourselves. They told us that, on the top of a high mountain in a
+neighbouring forest, there was a great church, in which was an image of
+the Virgin, which worked many miracles, and that the church was served by
+forty monks, whom they named _Calojeriens_[7]. But our anxiety to get out
+of this abominable country, prevented us from paying our devotions at that
+famous church. Georgia, indeed, is a somewhat better country than
+Mingrelia, but the manners of the people and their way of living is
+equally brutal; and such were the distresses and difficulties I
+encountered in travelling through both, that it would be tedious to relate
+them. On the 20th of July we left the abominable city of Goride, where we
+had suffered so many vexations, and continued, our journey through forests
+and over mountains, occasionally falling in with villages where we
+purchased provisions. We had always to pass the nights on the ground near
+some spring or rivulet, during most part of our journey through Mingrelia
+and Georgia.
+
+
+[1] We have already seen that it was the 16th of that month when Contarini
+    arrived at Kaffa. Much confusion has occurred in the dates of this
+    journey, which we have no means of correcting, and must, therefore, be
+    contented with them as they are--E.
+
+[2] The names of places in this journal are so corrupted as to be often
+    quite unintelligible. Varsi may possibly be Vardon, in the district to
+    the northwest of Mingrelia, named Abkhas; and Caltichea may perhaps be
+    Sulhuali, a sea port about 30 miles to the east. Phasis probably
+    refers to some town on the river of that name, perhaps Subastei.--E.
+
+[3] Probably Cutais in Imeritia, on the river Riene.--E.
+
+[4] Perhaps Sarassan, about forty miles S. E. from Cutais.--E.
+
+[5] Apparently the same prince named Plangion a little before.--E.
+
+[6] Gori in Georgia, on the river Kur. The journey hitherto must have been
+    through Mingrelia, then apparently subject to the prince or king of
+    Georgia.--E.
+
+[7] Probably Caloyers.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Arrival of Contarini at Tauris or Ecbatana, the royal city of Uzun-
+Hassan, and continuation of his journey through Persia to Ispahan, where
+the king then resided._
+
+On the 22d of July we began to ascend a mountain of prodigious height,
+insomuch, that when night came on we had scarcely reached the top, where
+we had to pass the night without water. Resuming our journey in the
+morning, we descended the other side of the mountain, and entered the
+province of Armenia, which is under the dominion of Uzun-Hassan[1]. In
+the evening we were conducted to a fort named Reo, which stands in the
+plain, between a deep river and a high mountain, and which is garrisoned
+by Turks in the service of Uzun-Hassan, but the neighbouring village is
+inhabited by Armenians. We rested in this place till the 25th of July,
+waiting the arrival of a guide to direct us in the remainder of the
+journey, and being well treated by the inhabitants, we rewarded them to
+their satisfaction. The Armenian who had joined us at Kaffa, under
+pretence of being an ambassador from Uzun-Hassan to the Pope, was
+recognized by the inhabitants of this village as an impostor and a
+notorious robber, and many were astonished how we had escaped from his
+machinations: I got rid of him therefore immediately, and made him
+restore me a horse which I had lent him for the journey; after which I
+procured a priest of an honest character to conduct me to Tauris. Leaving
+Reo with my new guide on the 26th of July, we ascended a mountain, and
+came on the other side to a plain surrounded by hills, where we found a
+village inhabited by Turks, near which we had to pass the night in the
+open air, though the inhabitants treated us with decent civility. Next
+morning we departed before day, having to pass another mountain, on the
+side of which was a village inhabited by Turks, among whom we should have
+run extreme hazard of our lives if they had seen us; but by using much
+diligence we avoided this danger, and got down into an extensive plain,
+full of fine pastures, and travelled with great expedition that we might
+pass the night at a respectable distance from the lawless inhabitants of
+the hills. On the 29th we passed the mountain of Noah, or _Ararat_, which
+is so lofty that it is covered with snow the whole year. We were told
+that many who had attempted to reach the top of this mountain had never
+been more heard of, while others, on making the same attempt, said, on
+their return, that it was quite inaccessible.
+
+From this place forwards we travelled through extensive plains intermixed
+with hills, and arrived on the 30th of July at a castle named _Chiagri_,
+inhabited by Armenians. Finding abundance of bread, wine, and poultry in
+this place, we rested here for a day, and then set out with a new guide
+for Ecbatana or Tauris. Leaving Chiagri towards evening of the 1st August,
+we came next day to an Armenian village at the foot of a mountain, where
+we had to cross a river in boats, and were informed that Uzun-Hassan had
+formerly gained a great victory near this place over the Tartars, having
+hemmed them into a corner, where their army wasted away with famine and
+disease. The ruler of these Tartars, named Sultan _Buzech_[2], was made
+prisoner, and was afterwards put to death. We here saw, on our left hand,
+eleven Armenian villages, near each other, who were Catholic Christians,
+their bishop being under submission to the Roman pontiff. The country is
+extremely agreeable, and is the most fertile of all the provinces of
+Persia. We arrived on the 3d of August at a large village called Marerich,
+near which we passed the night, and had to ride all the next day through
+a plain country exposed to great heat, which was greatly aggravated, as
+we could not procure a single drop of water for ourselves or our horses.
+On the way we met several Turkmans, whose custom it is to encamp here and
+there about the country, wherever they can find pasture for their cattle,
+and to change their residence as the pastures become exhausted. These
+people are abominable robbers, and look upon rapine as their highest
+glory; and as we had great reason to be afraid of them, I gave orders to
+all my people to tell whoever we met, that I was journeying to wait upon
+their sovereign, which was the only expedient for saving us from their
+violence.
+
+We arrived on the 4th of August at the city of Ecbatana or _Tauris_[3],
+which stands in a plain, and is surrounded by an earthen rampart in bad
+repair. There are high mountains in its neighbourhood, which are said to
+be the Taurus of the ancients. I here lodged with a very good man, who
+gave us two sleeping chambers, a convenience we had been long unused to.
+He was quite astonished how we should have been able to escape the
+dangers of our journey, as all the roads were blocked up; and on asking
+him the reason, he told us that Ogurlu Mohammed[4], the eldest son of
+Uzun-Hassan, had rebelled against his father, and had taken possession of
+_Sylas_[5] or Persepolis, of which he had appointed his younger brother
+_Khalil_[6] as governor. Uzun-Hassan had assembled an army to reduce
+Persepolis and his sons to obedience; but a certain satrap named
+_Zagarli_ who commanded in the neighbouring mountains, favoured the cause
+of Ogurlu, and had ravaged the whole country, to the very gates of Tauris,
+with a body of 3000 horse, owing to which, all the roads were obstructed
+and unsafe. He farther informed us, that the governor of Tauris had one
+day issued forth to endeavour to put a stop to the marauders, but had
+been defeated by Zagarli, with the loss of most of his troops, and had
+even great difficulty in escaping back to the city. I inquired why the
+inhabitants of Tauris did not take arms in their own defence, in a time
+of so much danger; but he answered, although they were obedient to the
+governor, they were quite unused to war. On learning the state of affairs
+in this place, I resolved to leave it as soon as possible, that I might
+get to the king; but I could neither procure a guide, nor prevail on the
+governor to shew me any favour. By the advice of my landlord I kept
+myself very much concealed, and employed my interpreter and Augustin of
+Pavia, whom I had brought with me from Kaffa because he understood a
+little Persian, to purchase our provisions, in which employment they were
+exposed to much ill treatment, and were often in hazard of their lives.
+
+Some days afterwards, one of the sons of Uzun-Hassan, named Masu-beg[7],
+came to Tauris with 1000 horse, to defend the city from the incursions of
+Zagarli. I waited on this prince, having great difficulty to obtain an
+audience, telling him that I was sent as ambassador to his father, and had
+need of guides, whom I prayed him to provide me; but it was quite
+ineffectual, as he hardly deigned to answer me, and took no kind of
+interest in me or my affairs, so that I was obliged to return disappointed
+to my lodgings. Masu-beg endeavoured to raise money from the inhabitants
+of Tauris for the purpose of levying soldiers, but they resisted his
+demands, and all the shops of the city were shut up. In this emergency,
+being unable to procure provisions, I was obliged to quit my lodgings,
+with all my people, taking refuge in an Armenian church, where they gave
+us a small place in which to keep our horses; and I ordered all my people
+to keep constantly within doors, to avoid meeting with injury. My
+apprehensions on this occasion may easily be conceived; but God, who had
+already protected us in so many dangers, was mercifully pleased to deliver
+us from that which now hung over us. On the 7th of September, _Bertonius
+Liompardus_[8], whom I had before seen at Kaffa, and who had been sent by
+our illustrious republic, arrived at Tauris. He was accompanied by his
+nephew, named _Brancalione_, and having come by way of Trebisond was a
+month later than me in reaching Tauris. I now dispatched Augustin de Pavia,
+of whom I have before made mention, with letters to the republic of Venice,
+in which I gave an account to the senate of all that had happened to us
+hitherto. I sent this man by way of Alapia, where he at length arrived in
+good health, after having escaped many dangers.
+
+Although I remained in Tauris till the 22d of September, I was not able
+to acquire any exact knowledge of the city, having been forced to conceal
+myself the whole time. It is a large city, but its territory in some
+places is uncultivated, and I believe nowhere very populous; it abounds,
+however, in all the necessaries of life, but these are dear. Much silk is
+produced in this neighbourhood, which is exported by way of Alapia. A
+considerable quantity of cloth is manufactured in the place, which
+likewise abounds in various merchandize, but I did not hear of any pearls
+or precious stones. Fortunately for us a Cadilaskir, one of the
+counsellors of Uzun-Hassan, arrived about this time at Tauris, who
+returned from an embassy into Turkey, where he had unsuccessfully
+endeavoured to negociate a peace between his master and the Turkish
+government. Immediately on learning the arrival of this person, I used
+every effort to procure an interview, in which I succeeded, and by means
+of a present, I prevailed on him to admit me and my retinue into his
+suite. He received me with much civility, and granted all I asked,
+assuring me that, with the blessing of God, he would conduct me in safety
+to the king. Among his slaves there were two Illyrian renegadoes, who
+formed a strict intimacy with my people, to whom they promised to give
+every assistance in their power, and to give us due notice of the
+departure of their master, which they faithfully performed, and for which
+I rewarded them.
+
+On the 22d of September we departed from Tauris with the Persian
+counsellor, accompanied likewise by a great many merchants and others,
+who took the advantage of travelling under his protection, from fear of
+being plundered by the rebels. This country in which we now travelled was
+quite level, with very few hills, so dry that we saw no trees except
+along the sides of rivers, and having only a few small villages, in which
+we purchased what was necessary for our journey, and always rested before
+mid-day in the open air, being unable to travel during the height of the
+sun, on account of the great heat. Travelling in this manner, we arrived
+at _Sultanie_ on the 27th of September. This city appeared to be very
+handsome, surrounded by walls, and defended by a good citadel. We saw
+here three most curious brazen gates, which had been made at Damascus,
+the finest things I ever beheld, which must have cost a great deal of
+money. The city of Sultanie stands in a plain at the foot of a range of
+mountains, some of which are exceedingly steep and precipitous, and the
+inhabitants of which are forced to remove into lower situations during
+winter, on account of the severity of the cold. We remained there for
+three days, and resumed our journey on the 30th of September, travelling
+sometimes in plains, and sometimes among hills, but always taking up our
+quarters for the night in the open air.
+
+On the 6th of October we arrived at _Sena_[9], a city without walls,
+situated in a plain on the banks of a river, and surrounded by trees, in
+which city we passed the night in tolerably bad quarters. We departed
+from thence on the 8th, and stopping, according to our usual custom, in
+the fields, I was seized with a violent intermittent fever, insomuch that
+I could hardly get on horseback next day, and that with infinite distress.
+We arrived early next day at Kom, where I was forced to stop, all my
+attendants being seized in a similar manner with myself, except our
+priest Stephen Testa, who took care of us all. Our fever was so malignant
+that we were all delirious during the height of the access or hot fit. I
+was afterwards informed that the royal counsellor sent to visit me,
+begging my excuse that he could not wait for me, because it was necessary
+for him to repair without delay to the king; but that he had left one of
+his attendants with me as a guide, and that I need not now be under any
+apprehension, as there were none in that part of the country to do me
+harm. I remained here a long time sick. The city of Sena or Sava is not
+large, and has mud walls, being situated in a champaign country, which is
+well peopled, and abounds in every thing necessary to life.
+
+On the 24th of October, being much recovered, we resumed our journey,
+though I was still so weak as to find much difficulty in sitting on
+horseback. Next day we arrived, at the city of Cashan[10], which very
+much resembles Kom, except that it is somewhat handsomer. On the
+following day, we came to _Nethas_, or Nathan. This city stands likewise
+in a flat country, which produces much wine. I remained here one day,
+both to recruit my strength, and because I felt some return of my fever.
+On the 28th of October, I prepared as well as I was able to finish my
+journey, which was all on plain ground, and arrived at Ispahan, where
+Uzun-Hassan then resided, on the 3d of November, having employed twenty-
+four days in our journey from Tauris to this place. I immediately sought
+out the dwelling of Josaphat Barbaro[11], the ambassador of Venice, and
+went to him. He received, me with much joy, and many embraces were
+mutually given and received, and we rejoiced together on my safe arrival.
+But as I had much need of rest, I very soon went to bed. When the king
+heard of my arrival, he sent some of his slaves to congratulate me, who
+presented me with some refreshments sent by his majesty.
+
+Early in the morning of the 4th November, some of the kings slaves came
+to require that Josaphat Barbaro and I should come to court. On being
+introduced to an audience, we found the king attended by eight of his
+principal officers. Having made my obeisance after the manner of the
+country, I presented the letters of the republic, and explained the
+subject of my mission[12]. When I had finished speaking, he answered me
+in every point, and in few words; and, among other things, he excused his
+conduct in having been obliged to retire to this part of his kingdom.
+After this we were ordered to be seated, and his courtiers gave us an
+entertainment according to the Persian fashion, which consisted of many
+dishes tolerably well dressed. After the repast, we took leave of the
+king, and retired to our quarters. Two days afterwards, we were again
+sent for to court, when most of the royal apartments were shewn me. The
+king then resided in a very pleasant country palace, situated on the
+banks of a river. In one of the rooms, there was a painting of Ogurlu-
+Mohammed, the kings eldest son, leading the sultan _Busech_, or Abu Saïd,
+tied with a rope; and in another picture the decapitation of _Busech_ was
+represented. We were again invited to an entertainment, at which many
+different kinds of confections were served up. We remained at Ispahan
+till the 25th of November, during which period we were frequently invited
+to court. The city of Ispahan, like the rest of the Persian cities, is
+surrounded by earthen-ramparts. It stands in a plain, and is abundantly
+supplied with all the necessaries of life. Having rebelled against the
+king, it was besieged and suffered much injury; for, being obstinately
+defended, it was subjected to the resentment of the conqueror and the
+fury of the soldiers.
+
+Persia is a very flat and arid country, in many parts of which there are
+salt lakes. In such parts as can be supplied with water, grain and other
+fruits of the earth are produced in abundance, and there are plenty of
+beasts of all kinds, as it is everywhere intersected and surrounded by
+fertile mountains, but every thing is very dear. The Venetian quart of
+wine is sold for three or four ducats; but bread is not so dear in
+proportion. A camels load of wood costs a ducat. Flesh is dearer than
+with us, and seven hens cost a ducat; but other articles of provisions
+are cheaper. The Persians are a civil and humane people; and though
+Mahometans, they do not hate the Christians. The women are very modestly
+dressed, and ride on horseback with even more grace than the men; and,
+judging from the good appearance of the men, the women are probably
+handsome.
+
+
+[1] Uzun-Hassan in the Turkish language signifies Hassan the long, which
+    prince was likewise named Hassan-beg, or Lord Hassan, and Ozun-Azembeg,
+    or the long lord Azem or Hassan. By different European writers his
+    name has been corrupted into Unsun Cassan, Uxun-Cassan, and Usum-
+    Chasan. He was a Turkman emir of the Ak-koyunla dynasty, or white
+    sheep tribe, whose ancestor, the governor of a province under the
+    descendants of Timor, had rendered himself independent in the north
+    and west of Persia.--E.
+
+[2] This prince, whose real name was probably Abu Said, was the emir of
+    the Kara-koyunla dynasty, or black sheep tribe of the Turkmans, who
+    had risen to independence after the death of Timor, and who had long
+    contended with the prince of the white sheep tribe for ascendancy.
+    These two tribes derived their distinctive appellations of the black
+    and white weathers, from some peculiarity in their ensigns or dress,
+    equivalent to the distinguishing uniforms and banners of our European
+    armies.--E.
+
+[3] Called Tebriz in modern times.--E.
+
+[4] In the original this name is corrupted to Gurlumamech; but we learn
+    from the Modern Universal History, that his real name was that
+    expressed in the text of our translation.--E.
+
+[5] The ruins supposed to be those of Persepolis are situated near Istakar,
+    about forty miles north from the modern city of Shiraz, in the
+    province of Fars or Persia proper; but the names in the original are
+    often so corrupted as to defy even conjecture. Sylas is probably meant
+    for Shiras.--E.
+
+[6] Named Chali in the original; but it is to be noted that the _ch_ of
+    the Italian is pronounced as _k_ in English.--E.
+
+[7] It is difficult to determine whether Contarini here means Maksud-beg
+    or Masih-beg, as Uzun-Hassan had two sons of these names; Maksad was
+    the elder, and may have been the person named in the text Masu. Bec or
+    Beg signifies Lord or Prince.--E.
+
+[8] The person mentioned before by Contarini as a messenger from Venice,
+    and whom he met with at Kaffa, was named on that occasion Paulus
+    Omnibamus, totally dissimilar from the name in this part of the text.
+    --E.
+
+[9] Assuredly the Sava of modern maps, a city of Irac-agemi, which stands
+    upon one of these extraordinary rivers, so numerous in Persia, which
+    lose themselves in the sands, after a short but useful run.--E.
+
+[10] About sixty miles S. S. E. from Kom. I am disposed to think that
+    Contarini has slumpt his journey on the present occasion; as it is
+    hardly to be believed a person in the weak state he describes himself
+    could have travelled with so much rapidity. Besides, so far as we can
+    learn from his journal, he travelled always with the same set of
+    horses. Indeed the sequel immediately justifies this suspicion, as
+    the subsequent dates are more distant than the travelling days of the
+    text would warrant.--E.
+
+[11] See Travels of Josaphat Barbaro to Asof in 1436, in our Collection,
+    Vol I. p. 501, in the introduction to which article, it will be seen
+    that he had been sent on an embassy from Venice to Uzun-Hassan in 1572,
+    two years before Contarini; and appears to have remained in the east
+    for fourteen years in that capacity, after the departure of Contarini
+    on his return to Venice.--E.
+
+[12] This nowhere distinctly appears; but we may easily understand
+    incidentally, and from the history of the period, that the Venetian
+    republic endeavoured to stir up enemies to the Turkish empire in the
+    east, being unable to resist its power, now exerted against them in
+    the Morea and the Greek islands; and we may even surmise that Uzun-
+    Hassan was subsidized by the Venetians to make war upon the Turks.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Contarini accompanies Uzun-Hassan from Ispahan to Tauris, where he finds
+Ambassadors from the Duke of Burgundy and the Prince of Muscovy, and gets
+leave to return to Venice._
+
+The king left Ispahan with all his court on the 25th of November for
+Tauris, and we travelled along with him, passing through most of the
+places which we had seen in going to Ispahan. In this journey we always
+slept in tents in the fields, and the camp was well supplied with
+provisions, as many merchants had received orders to provide grain,
+victuals of all kinds, and all sorts of necessaries. On the 14th of
+November we arrived at Kom, where we remained two days under tents,
+exposed to extremely cold weather, and experienced much difficulty to
+procure a small house in which to shelter ourselves. We continued at this
+place till the 21st of March 1474, during which interval we went
+frequently to court, to pay our respects to the king, on which occasions
+we were generally invited to dinner. The Persian court is very magnificent,
+being attended by many high officers of state, and every day 400 persons
+dine along with the king. These are all seated on the ground, and are
+served in copper basons with boiled rice, or some other mess made of flesh
+and grain boiled together; but the king is served in great magnificence at
+a separate table, with a great variety of dishes of different kinds of
+meat. During his meals, the king is often served with wine, and then the
+musicians sing and play upon flutes such songs and tunes as the king
+pleases to order. The king is of a good size, with a thin visage and
+agreeable countenance, having somewhat of the Tartar appearance, and
+seemed to be about seventy years old. His manners were very affable, and
+he conversed familiarly with every one around him; but I noticed that his
+hands trembled when he raised the cup to his lips. It is not needful that
+I should enumerate all the audiences which I had on the subject of my
+mission, of which I shall make occasional mention hereafter.
+
+On the 21st of March the king and all the court left Kom, on their
+journey towards Tauris, the baggage being carried by camels and mules.
+Each day we hardly exceeded ten or twelve, or at the most twenty Italian
+miles, and always stopt at each encampment till the forage in the
+neighbourhood was consumed. The Persian mode of travelling is thus: The
+women always arrive first at the new camp, where they set up the tents
+and cook provisions for their husbands. They are well clothed and ride
+upon good horses, which they manage with much dexterity. The Persian
+nation is very magnificent, and exceedingly fond of pomp, and shew, and
+it is very agreeable to see their march at some distance. They are very
+careful of their camels, of which they have great numbers, even the
+poorest seldom travelling with less than seven of these animals; by this
+means, the prodigious train which attends the court appears to consist of
+many more persons than it actually contains. When the king entered
+Ecbatana, his suite consisted of about 2000 persons, but many left the
+camp on the march, as it suited their fancy or convenience, and the king
+never had above 500 horse along with him. The royal tents were
+exceedingly beautiful and magnificent, and his bed was ornamented with
+scarlet hangings. The merchants who attended the camp sold every thing at
+a high price. All of our party were accommodated with tents, as we
+belonged to the suite of the king, who often honoured us with an
+invitation to supper, and at other times frequently sent us refreshments.
+We were always treated with much civility, and never received any
+injuries or affronts.
+
+On the 31st of May the king encamped about fifteen miles from Tauris,
+when a certain monk of the Boulonnois named Louis, who called himself
+patriarch of Antioch, and envoy from the Duke of Burgundy, arrived at the
+camp, attended by five horsemen. The king asked if we knew him, and we
+accordingly told what we knew without dissimulation. Next day the king
+gave him an audience, at which we were present by command. This patriarch
+presented to the king three robes of gold tissue, three others of scarlet
+silk, and some of fine cloth, and opened his commission, making many
+great offers of service from his prince, and many fine promises in very
+magnificent terms, which do not appear proper for me to repeat, and which
+the king did not seem to care much about. We were all invited to dinner,
+during which the king started many questions, to which he gave very
+pertinent answers himself. After dinner we returned to our tents.
+
+On the 2d of June we arrived at Tauris, in which place lodgings were
+appointed for us. Six days afterwards, Uzun-Hassan sent for the patriarch
+and us to court; and although he had three or four times informed me
+already that I must prepare to return into Italy, leaving my colleague
+Barbaro at his court, I could not reconcile myself to the journey, and
+had done every thing in my power to put off my departure. When we went to
+court, the king addressed himself first to the patriarch, whom he ordered
+to return to his prince, and to say from him, that he, the king, would
+very shortly declare war against the Turks, having already taken the
+field with that view, and that he never failed in performing his promises.
+He then turned to me, saying, "Return to your country, and tell your
+masters that I shall very soon make war upon the Ottomans, and desire
+them to do their duty as I shall do mine. I know no one better fitted to
+carry this message than you, who have accompanied me from Ispahan, and
+have seen my preparations; so that you are able to inform the Christian
+princes of all that you have seen, and of my good intentions." I offered
+several reasons for excusing myself from obeying these commands, which
+gave me much vexation; but the king looked at me with a severe expression
+of countenance, saying, "It is my pleasure for you to go, and I command
+you. I shall give you letters for your masters, which will inform them of
+my sentiments and the reasons of your return." In this state of
+embarrassment, I was advised by the patriarch and M. Josaphat to comply
+with a good grace; on which I replied to the king as follows: "My
+departure, Sir, gives me much distress; but since you judge it proper, I
+make no more objections, and am ready to obey your orders. Wherever I may
+go, I shall speak of your great power and goodness, and the honours I
+have received from your majesty, and shall exhort all the princes of
+Christendom to join their forces with you against the common enemy." My
+speech pleased the king, and he answered me kindly according to his
+wonted manner. After retiring from this andienqe, the king sent some
+Persian robes to the patriarch and me, made of fine stuff and very
+beautifully ornamented, and presented each of us with a horse and some
+money to assist us during our journey.
+
+We remained two days at Tauris after the kings departure, and set out on
+the 10th of June to rejoin the court, which was then encamped in a
+pleasant spot among excellent pastures and plenty of fine wells; about
+twenty-five miles from Tauris. We remained there till the pastures were
+eaten bare, and then marched about fifteen miles farther. On the 27th of
+June the king gave us our final audience, at which he gave us presents
+for our respective sovereigns; that is to say, to the patriarch for the
+Duke of Burgundy; to myself for the republic; and to one Marcus Ruffus,
+who had come with an embassy from the prince of Muscovy. The presents
+consisted in certain pieces of workmanship made in the European fashion,
+two swords, and certain ornaments for the head, which are usually
+fastened to bonnets. There were two Persian ambassadors in the audience-
+chamber, one of whom was destined on a mission into Russia. At length the
+king turning towards the patriarch and me, addressed us nearly as follows:
+"You will return with all speed to your masters, and will tell them and
+all the other Christian princes from me, that I have used all diligence
+in taking the field to make war on the Turks, as it had been concerted
+between them and me. The emperor of the Turks is at present in
+Constantinople, and will make no enterprize of importance this year. As
+for myself, I propose sending one part of my army to reduce my rebellious
+son, and another against the Turkish generals, while I shall remain here
+at hand, to act against the enemy as occasion may require." He gave
+orders, both to us and to his own ambassadors, to report this to all the
+princes of Christendom. I did not receive these orders with more
+satisfaction than I had done the former; but I had no means of escape and
+must necessarily obey. Wherefore, having taken our leaves, we prepared
+for our departure, and were unexpectedly commanded to remain till next
+day. In the mean time, he conveyed a great part of his infantry during
+the night to the other side of a mountain. Next morning early, the
+_Ruiscasson_, or conductor of ambassadors, carried us to the top of the
+hill, as meaning to confer with us on some important subject, and on the
+appearance of the Persian infantry under march, he pointed them out to us
+as if he had been surprised at seeing so many additional troops coming to
+the royal camp. The better to favour this deception, some of his slaves
+exclaimed as astonished, that there were a great many soldiers, and that
+at least 10,000 were coming to reinforce the army. But we easily saw
+through the contrivance, and were certain that these pretended new troops
+were merely the ordinary royal escort, which had only changed their
+position to impose upon us. After this little comedy, the _Ruiscasson_
+gave us the royal letters for our masters, and we returned to our tents.
+From the information of M. Josaphat and others, the military force of
+this king cannot exceed 20,000 cavalry, some of whom have wooden bucklers
+about eighteen inches long. Others have a kind of cuirasses made of very
+thin plates of steel, which they wear over their ordinary habits. Their
+usual arms are bows and arrows, and cimeters, while some have small
+leathern targets covered with silk, and others carry helmets and
+cuirasses. Their horses are beautiful and vigorous, and very numerous. In
+regard to the manners of the Persians, and the state of the kingdom, I
+shall mention what I know of these subjects as occasion may offer during
+the recital of my travels; but I do not think it proper to weary my
+readers with any lengthened detail.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Journey of Contarini from Persia, through Georgia and Mingrelia, to the
+city Phasis._
+
+Being entirely ready to depart on the 1st of July, we took leave of M.
+Josaphat Barbaro in his tent, when we mutually shed tears in sincere
+grief at our separation. Having recommended myself to the protection of
+God, I mounted on horseback, and began my journey, accompanied by the
+patriarch of Antioch, Marcus Ruffus the Muscovite, and the two Persian
+ambassadors, intending to return by way of Phasis, which is under the
+dominion of Uzun-Hassan. To this route we were advised by certain birds
+of bad augury, who were omens of the terrible dangers we had to encounter
+in the sequel. Coming to the villages of the catholic Armenians, formerly
+mentioned, we were well received by their bishops, and attended the mass
+regularly during three days that we had to remain here, laying in a stock
+of provisions for the journey. From thence we came to the frontiers of
+Georgia, travelling through plains interspersed with hills, and arrived
+on the 12th of July at _Typsi_[1], which is subject to the king of the
+Georgians. This city stands upon a hill, at the foot of which runs the
+river _Tigre_, and it is defended by a good castle on the summit of an
+eminence. It was formerly a celebrated place, but is at present almost
+utterly ruined, though beginning to revive, and contains many good
+catholics. In this place we took up our lodgings with a person named
+Arminius, of the catholic faith. In travelling through Georgia, we found
+a few villages composed of huts, and some castles among the mountains,
+but these were rare and distant.
+
+On the 19th of July, being near the frontiers of Mingrelia, we chanced to
+meet with Pangratius, king of Georgia, in the midst of a forest
+surrounded by mountains, and went to pay our respects to him, when he
+invited us to dinner. We had to sit on the ground, having a skin spread
+before us instead of a table-cloth, and were served with roasted meat and
+fowls, very ill dressed; but, by way of making amends, they frequently
+presented us with large goblets of wine, as they seem to place all
+dignity and merit in deep drinking. For this reason it is their custom,
+at the conclusion of their meals, to challenge one another to drink, and
+he who empties the greatest number of goblets, is held in highest esteem.
+As the Turks drink no wine, their presence was some restraint that day on
+their usual bacchanalian contests, and as we neither could nor would
+compete with them, we were held in great contempt. The king was about
+forty years old, and of large make, with a strong resemblance to the
+Tartar countenance. We parted from the king of Georgia next day, and on
+the 22d of July, on the confines of Mingrelia, we fell in with a Georgian
+commander at the head of some troops, both cavalry and infantry who was
+posted in this place to prevent injury from the disorders that had broke
+out in Mingrelia, in consequence of the death of Bendian, prince of that
+country. These people stopped, and frightened us with, many cruel menaces;
+but at length, after being robbed of two quivers full of arrows, and
+having to gratify them with some money, we escaped from them, and made
+the best of our way to a distance. Leaving the public road, we struck off
+into a thick wood, where we passed the night in prodigious apprehension.
+
+On the following day, while approaching the city of _Cotati_[2], we met
+some peasants in a narrow pass, who prevented us for some time from going
+forwards, and even threatened to put us to death. After much altercation,
+and many threats, they seized three horses belonging to the Turks[3],
+which were with great difficulty redeemed for twenty ducats. On the
+evening we reached Cutais, which is a royal fortress. While passing a
+bridge over a river, early in the morning of the 24th of July, we were
+again attacked by robbers, who came upon us suddenly, and, after many
+threats, forced us to pay the full value of our horses, before they would
+allow us to continue our journey. After passing this bridge, we entered
+Mingrelia, where we followed our wonted custom of sleeping under the
+canopy of heaven, though we had many worse inconveniencies and dangers to
+encounter: for, on the 25th of July, having passed over a river by means
+of rafts, we were conducted to the dwelling of a certain lady, named
+_Maresca_, sister of the deceased prince Badian, who received us at first
+with much civility, and treated us with bread and wine, after which we
+were conducted into a field belonging to her, which was close shut on all
+sides. On the morrow, when we were about to depart, we offered her a
+present of twenty ducats, as a return for her hospitality, which at first
+she pretended to refuse; but we soon discovered her treachery, as she
+insisted on our paying two ducats as a ransom for each of our horses. We
+expressed our astonishment at this rapacity, and endeavoured to represent
+our inability to comply with such exorbitant demands, but all to no
+purpose, and we were forced to comply, being afraid that she might even
+have plundered us of every thing.
+
+Leaving this rapacious dame, we arrived at _Phasis_ on the 27th of July,
+some on horseback and others in boats, where we again lodged with
+_Martha_ the Circassian lady, whom I formerly mentioned. After having run
+many risks in our journey, we here learnt a piece of most afflictive news,
+that the Turks had taken possession of Kaffa or Theodosia in the Crimea,
+by which we were deprived of our last resource, and shut out apparently
+from every hope of continuing our voyage homewards. Our distress on
+receiving this intelligence may easily be conceived, and, in fact, we
+were so much cast down, as not to know what measures to pursue, or to
+which hand to turn us. Louis, the patriarch of Antioch, resolved upon
+going through Tartary and Russia, with which route he was acquainted. It
+was to no purpose that I urged the promises we had mutually come under at
+the beginning of our journey, never to separate on any account. To this
+he answered, that the unforeseen circumstances which had occurred, were a
+sufficient warrant to every one to consult his own individual safety. I
+insisted and beseeched him not to treat me with such unfeeling cruelty,
+but all in vain, for he prepared to set off along with the Turkish
+ambassador, who had been sent by Uzun-Hassan as his particular companion.
+In this extremity I went to Marcus Ruffus, and the Turkish ambassador who
+was joined with him by the king of Persia, to whom I mentioned my
+intention of returning back to Uzun-Hassan. They pretended to approve my
+plan, and even to join me, and we embraced as entering, into promise of
+keeping together; but they secretly came to a determination of taking
+their journey through the province of _Gorgore_, which is subject to
+_Calcicanus_, and to the city of _Vati_,[4] which is on the frontiers of
+the Turks, and pays tribute to the Grand Signior.
+
+The patriarch set out on the 6th of August, and the next day Marcus
+Ruffus followed him, accompanied by several Russians, partly on horseback,
+and partly by means of boats. Their intentions were to travel from Vati,
+by Shamaki, anciently Cyropolis, and thence into Tartary. Thus left alone
+in a strange land, I leave any reasonable person to think what were the
+embarrassments with which I was surrounded. I was unacquainted with a
+single individual, having no company but that of my domestics, and had
+very little money remaining. In short, I was reduced almost to despair,
+of ever being able to get out of the country. In this state of distress I
+fell into a violent fever, and could get no other nourishment but bread
+and water, and a pullet occasionally with much difficulty; and my fever
+increased to such a degree that I became delirious. All my domestics were
+attacked soon after with the same fever, the priest Stephen only excepted,
+who had to take care of us all. My only bed was a wretched mattress,
+which had been lent me by a person named John Volcan; and my life was
+despaired of by every one, till the 9th of September, when, by the cares
+of Stephen and of Martha, my good hostess, or rather through the mercy of
+God, the fever abated, and I soon recovered my former health, to the
+astonishment of every one. My domestics likewise recovered, and we began
+again to consult on the best means of escaping out of our present
+situation. Some proposed to take the road of Syria, but I deemed this too
+dangerous; and we at length came to the determination, of going by
+Shamaki, into Tartary, and thence by Russia, Poland, and Germany. I got
+accordingly on horseback on the 10th of September, but had hardly rode
+two miles when I was forced to dismount and rest myself on the ground. I
+was, therefore, obliged to return to my lodging in Phasis, where we
+remained till the 17th, when, being all of us restored to health and
+strength, we again resumed our journey, after having implored the
+protection and assistance of God. I now took a certain Greek into my
+service, who could speak the Mingrelian language, who occasioned me a
+thousand troubles, which it were tedious to recount.
+
+
+[1] This in all probability is a corruption of Tiflis, or Teffliz, the
+    capital of Georgia Georgia, which is situated on the river Kur or
+    Cyrus, erroneously named _Tigre_ in the text. The proper name of this
+    country is Gurgi-stan, or the country of the Gurgi which has been
+    corrupted by the Europeans into Georgia.--E.
+
+[2] Cutais in Imeritia, named Cotachis on a former occasion in the text.
+    --E.
+
+[3] These Turks must have been the Persian ambassadors of Uzun-Hassan;--E.
+
+[4] This proposed route seems to have been through the province of _Guria_
+    to Batum; and, from the sequel, to have returned to Georgia and
+    Shirvan, passing through Derbent and the Caspian gates, or Daghisten,
+    into western Tartary. But the names in the text are too corrupt for
+    any certainty. Calcicanus, in the text, is probably a corruption of
+    Kalo Johannes, who was then prince, or emperor, of Trebisond.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Leaving Phasis, Contarini travels through Mingrelia and Georgia, into
+Media, and, passing the Caspian, arrives in Tartary._
+
+Leaving Phasis, as before mentioned, on the 17th of September; and taking
+the road of Mingrelia, we came to _Cotati_, or Cutais, on the 21st of
+that month, extremely worn out through the consequences of our late
+illness, and the fatigues of the journey; and as the Greek whom I had
+hired never ceased to give me vexation, I here parted with him as
+handsomely as I could. We remained two days at Cutais, among people who
+knew us not, and whose language we were quite ignorant of. Leaving that
+place, and tracing back our former steps, we passed over several
+mountains in much fear, and arrived at Tiflis on the 30th of September,
+where we took shelter in the chapel of a certain Armenian catholic, who
+had more the appearance of a dead person than of a living man, but who
+rendered us every possible service. This man had a son who lived with him,
+and who, unfortunately for us, was seized with the plague, which had
+raged in that part of the country this year. From him one of my servants,
+named Maffeo of Bergamo, caught the distemper, who still kept about me
+during two days, though ill, as he was my own particular domestic. At
+length, growing worse, he had to take to his bed, when the distemper
+shewed itself; and as he lay in the same room with me, and the house
+could not afford me another, I was forced to take refuge in a hovel where
+some cows were kept at night; and as the Armenian refused to allow Maffeo
+to remain in his house, I was constrained to take him into the same place
+with myself, where Stephen took care of him, till God pleased to take him
+out of the world. After the death of Maffeo, I experienced great
+difficulty to procure another stable for myself, that I might get away
+from the morbid air of that in which my poor servant died. In this
+extremity we were utterly abandoned, except by one old man, who
+understood a little of our language, and who served us with much
+affection.
+
+We remained at this place till the 21st October, and on the evening
+before our intended departure, the Persian ambassador, who had
+accompanied the patriarch, came to Tiflis. He complained grievously of
+having been plundered, through the fault of the patriarch, with whom he
+had travelled to _Lavógasia_, where he had left him, and was now on his
+road to complain to Uzun-Hassan. We agreed to travel in company from
+Tiflis, a city belonging to Pancratis[1]. From thence in two days we
+entered the territories of Uzun-Hassan, as we took the road towards
+Shamaki, or Cyropolis, which is situated in a fertile and pleasant
+country. On the 26th of October we separated, as the Persian went to Uzun-
+Hassan at Tauris, and I took the road for the dominions of _Sivanse_, in
+which Shamaki stands; but by means of the Persian ambassador I procurred
+a _molah_, or Mahometan priest, to guide me on the road to Shamaki. This
+country is greatly more beautiful and more fertile than the dominions of
+Uzun-Hassan, and is ruled over by _Sivanse_, king of Media[2]. Of this
+country Shamaki is the capital, at which place I arrived on the 1st
+November 1474. This city is not so large as Tauris, but, as far as I
+could judge, surpasses that place in the goodness and abundance of every
+thing, especially in excellent cattle. It produces great quantities of
+excellent silk, of which they manufacture various kinds of very slight
+stuffs. While here, I had the good fortune to be rejoined by Marcus
+Ruffus, the Muscovite ambassador, who had parted from me at Phasis, as
+formerly related. Immediately on learning that I was in the city, he came
+to visit me, and we embraced with cordiality. I now earnestly entreated
+him to receive me and my domestics into his society for the remainder of
+the journey, to which he very readily agreed.
+
+We left Shamaki on the 6th of November, for the city of Derbent, which is
+called, in the language of the country, the Caucassian Gates, or the Iron
+Gates. This city is under the dominion of _Sivanse_, and stands on the
+frontiers of Tartary. On our journey we travelled sometimes over plains
+and sometimes on mountains, and were tolerably well treated by the
+Turkish inhabitants, with whom we lodged by the way. About mid-way
+between these two cities we came to a large village, where we found great
+abundance of excellent fruits, particularly admirable apples. We arrived
+on the 12th of November at Derbent, and were advised to pass the winter
+in that place; as it was necessary, in our way to Russia, to cross the
+desert of Tartary, which is much easier in the spring of the year, and
+likewise because it was proper for us to cross over the Caspian to the
+Tartar city of Citracan. The city of Derbent is situated on the shore of
+the Caspian, which the Mardians call the sea of Bachaan or Bacou. This
+city is said to have been built by Alexander the Great, and is called the
+_Iron Gate_, because it entirely closes up the only passage from Tartary
+into Media and Persia, by means of a deep valley reaching from Circassia.
+Derbent is fortified with a thick well built wall, reaching from the
+castle at the foot of the mountain all the way to the sea; but not above
+a sixth part of the space within the walls is inhabited, all that end
+nearest the sea being in ruins, among which are several tombs. The
+country about this city produces abundance of all kinds of fruits, among
+which are plenty of grapes, from which the inhabitants make wine.
+
+The Caspian, or Sea of Hircania, which has no communication whatever with
+the ocean, is about the same size with the Euxine or Black Sea, and is
+very deep. They catch in this sea great quantities of sturgeons, and sea-
+wolves as they are called; and there are prodigious quantities of sea-
+dogs, or seals, having the head, feet, and tail like ordinary dogs. The
+only other remarkable fish is of a round form, about a yard and a half in
+diameter, with no perceptible head or other member, from which the
+natives extract a great quantity of oil, which they use in their lamps,
+and with which they anoint their camels. The inhabitants of this country,
+who are all Mahometans, are neither cruel nor barbarous, and used us
+exceedingly well; having once asked us who we were, and being answered
+that we were Christians, they troubled us with no farther inquiries. My
+dress at this time consisted of coarse and much worn cloth, lined with
+lambs skin, above which I wore a leathern robe, and my hat was of skin;
+in which dress I frequently went to the market to purchase flesh and
+other provisions, which I carried home myself. On one of these occasions
+a person eyed me attentively, and, turning to some of his comrades, said,
+this man was not born to the employment of carrying meat. Marcus Ruffus,
+who happened to be along with me, explained what the man had said; and I
+was astonished at being recognized in so shabby a dress, which I thought
+must have proved a sufficient concealment: but, in truth, as I have said
+before, they are a very good kind of people.
+
+During my residence in Derbent, I was anxious to learn some certain
+intelligence respecting the state of affairs at the court of Uzun-Hassan,
+for which purpose I sent Demetrius de Seze, my interpreter, with letters
+to Josaphat Barbaro at Tauris, which is twenty days journey from Derbent.
+He returned at the end of fifty days, bringing answers from Barbaro,
+informing me that the king still remained at Tauris, but that he was
+utterly ignorant of his affairs.
+
+Spring being arrived, we began to think of pursuing our journey, and
+Marcus procured a boat for transporting us to _Curere_[3]. The boats
+which are used in this country are drawn up on the shore all winter, as
+the sea is then too rough for their use. They are sharp at both ends, and
+wide in the middle, their planks being fastened with tree-nails, and
+their bottoms payed over with pitch; and as the natives use no compasses,
+or other maritime instruments, they always creep along the coast. These
+boats, which are very crazy and dangerous, are moved forwards by means of
+oars; and the people are very ignorant of navigation, though they believe
+themselves the best mariners in the world.
+
+On the 5th of April 1475, we embarked, and departed from Derbent, being
+thirty-five persons in all, including the master of the boat and the crew.
+The rest of the passengers were merchants, carrying rice, silk, and
+silken goods to _Citrarchan_[4], where they proposed to sell their
+commodities to the Russians and Tartars, or to barter them for other
+articles. Having coasted along during three days, with a favourable wind,
+always keeping about fifteen miles from the shore, the wind became
+contrary on the third evening, and increased during the night to so
+violent a tempest that we expected to have been lost. Although we had all
+reason to believe our bark would be dashed to pieces on the shore, we
+made every effort to gain the land, and fortunately our vessel ran into a
+kind of ditch or dock between sand banks, very near the beach, where she
+stuck fast, impelled by the united force of the winds and waves, and of
+our oars. Between us and the shore there was a pool, through which we had
+to wade, carrying our baggage on our shoulders; and we were almost
+perished with cold, owing to the wind, and our being drenched with water;
+yet we unanimously agreed to refrain from making a fire, lest that
+circumstance might attract the notice of the Tartars, whom we feared to
+meet with. At day light we noticed traces of horses having been on the
+spot, and the recent fragments of a ruined skiff, from which we were led
+to conclude, that some persons must have been here; but some other
+circumstances gave us reason to believe that the Tartars were not near
+the shore.
+
+We remained undisturbed at this place till the 14th of April, when the
+wind and weather becoming favourable, we got our bark from the creek, and
+again resumed our voyage, and advanced near thirty miles the same day.
+Towards evening the wind became again contrary, but we avoided the
+dangers of an impending storm, by taking refuge amidst some reeds, among
+which our mariners hauled the boat, so as to be out of danger from the
+waves, and we made our way to the land through the reeds, in doing which
+we were much fatigued and thoroughly drenched in water. We rested here
+all that night and the day following, which was Easter day, having
+nothing on which to commemorate that festival, except some butter, and a
+few eggs which we fortunately gathered on the sandy beach. The mariners
+and passengers were often inquisitive to know who I was; and, pursuant to
+the advice of Marcus Ruffus, I passed myself among them as the physician
+and servant of _Despima_, the consort of the grand duke of Moscovy, to
+whom I was going. A short time after this, one of our mariners happened
+to be afflicted by a large boil, and came to consult me in my assumed
+character; and as I had the good fortune to discover some oil in our bark,
+I made a poultice for him with bread and flour, by which he was soon
+cured. From this circumstance they actually believed me to be a physician,
+and were very anxious that I should remain among them; but Marcus drew me
+out of this difficulty, by saying that I had no medicinal preparations
+with me, but would soon return from Russia with a proper assortment.
+
+
+[1] This name is probably corrupted for Bagration, or Bagrathion, which
+    was once the family name of the sovereigns of Georgia, and, if I
+    mistake not, there is, or was lately, a prince of that family and name
+    in the service of Russia.--E.
+
+[2] The kingdom of Media in the text, is obviously meant to indicate the
+    province of Shirvan, on the west of the Caspian.--E.
+
+[3] Perhaps Saray, on the eastern branch of the Wolga.--E.
+
+[4] Probably Astracan is here meant.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Arrival of Contarini at Citracan, and journey from thence, through
+several dangers among the Tartars, to Muscovy along with some merchants_.
+
+On the 15th of April we put again to sea with a favourable wind, and
+coasting along a series of reedy islands, we arrived on the 26th of that
+month at the mouth of the Wolga, a large river which flows from Russia
+into the Caspian. From the mouth of this river it is computed to be
+seventy-six miles to the city of Citracan[1], which we reached on the
+30th. Near this city there are excellent _salines_[2], from which all the
+neighbouring provinces are supplied with salt. The Tartars who commanded
+in the city would not permit us to enter that evening, so that we had to
+pass the night in a hut without the walls. In the morning three broad-
+faced Tartars came and ordered us to go along with them to their prince.
+They treated Marcus with respect, saying that he was a friend of their
+sovereign; but alleged that I was his slave, as they consider all the
+Franks or Christians as their enemies. These news were most cruelly
+mortifying for me, and afflicted me severely; but I was obliged to submit
+in spite of me, and Marcus advised me to allow him to speak for me.
+Forced in this manner to return disconsolate to my hut, I was long
+exposed to every indignity and danger, to my great mortification and
+distress. The Tartars insisted that I was possessed of pearls, and even
+plundered me of some merchandize I had purchased in Derbent, intending to
+have bartered it in this place for a good horse to carry me during the
+rest of my journey. They informed me afterwards, by means of Marcus, that
+they intended to sell us all to certain people whom they waited for, and
+who were to go into Muscovy with other merchants. After many
+mortifications and distresses, it was resolved to hold a grand
+consultation concerning us at a large village named _Alermi_, about two
+miles from the city, where their lord resided. At this time I was not
+possessed of a single farthing, and was obliged to borrow money from the
+Russian and Tartar merchants, at a high interest, to supply our urgent
+necessities, for which Marcus became my bondsman.
+
+One day, while Marcus was absent, the khan or prince of the Tartars[3],
+broke open the door of our hut, and endeavoured to compel me by threats
+to deliver up the pearls which he believed I was possessed of, and I had
+infinite difficulty to escape out of his hands, and to persuade him not
+to put me to death. The Tartars used often to come to our hut in the
+night, when drunk with mead, demanding with loud outcries to deliver up
+the Franks to them, and the bravest among us were terrified at the
+dangerous situation in which we were among these savages. In this
+horrible situation we remained from the 1st of May to the 10th of August.
+The city of Citracan belongs to three brothers, who are sons to the
+brother of the Tartar emperor, and the inhabitants often make plundering
+inroads into the plains of _Cinassia_[4], and along the borders of the
+Don. During the height of summer they travel with their flocks in search
+of pasturage, to the northern parts of Russia, and hardly spend above a
+month every year in Citracan. That city, which stands on the banks of the
+Wolga, is by no means large, its houses being built of earth: It is
+surrounded by a slight wall, and does not appear to have had any better
+buildings for a long time past. It is said to have had a very
+considerable fair formerly, and that the perfumes and spiceries which
+used to be brought to Venice, came first to this place from the east,
+whence they were carried to the Tanais or Don, which is only eight days
+journey from the Wolga. The prince of Citracan, whose name is _Casinach_,
+sends every year an ambassador to the grand duke of Muscovy, on purpose
+to extort a present; and on this occasion, several Tartar merchants
+accompany the ambassador, carrying silk, silken vestments, and other
+articles of trade, which they barter for saddles, furs, and other things
+which are in request among their countrymen.
+
+The only way of travelling into Russia from this place, is through
+extensive deserts, on which account travellers have to go in large bands
+or caravans for mutual security, and to carry provisions for the journey.
+The Tartars care little for the latter precaution, as they have always
+plenty of spare horses, and kill one when needed, as they live entirely
+on flesh and milk, without caring for any other food. They use no bread,
+and only a few of their merchants who have been in Russia know any thing
+of this article. Previous to the commencement of our journey[5], we
+provided provisions for the journey as well as we could. In this view we
+procured some rice with much difficulty, which, boiled in milk, and then
+dried in the sun, makes, when afterwards boiled in water, an excellent
+and nourishing food. We had likewise some onions, a small quantity of
+biscuit, and some other trifles, and I bought, during the journey, the
+salted tail of a sheep[6]. The usual road from Citracan to Russia lay
+between two branches of the Wolga, but the roads were then exceedingly
+dangerous, as the Tartar emperor was then at war with his nephew, who
+pretended a right to the throne, as his father had once been emperor. On
+this account it was proposed to pass over to the other side of the river,
+and to travel towards the straits between the Don and the Wolga, which
+are about five days journey from Citracan, after which it was presumed we
+should be out of danger. Our baggage was accordingly carried across the
+river on rafts, and Marcus desired me to keep always along with him and
+the Tartar ambassador, named _Auchioli_. I and my interpreter accordingly
+set out about mid-day along with the ambassador, to go to the place where
+the boats waited for us, which was about twelve miles from the city, our
+other companions having already gone there. On our arrival about sunset,
+while I prepared to go into one of the boats on purpose to cross the
+river, Marcus seemed suddenly struck with an extraordinary panic, and
+commanded the interpreter and me to take to flight instantly to avoid
+inevitable danger. We mounted therefore immediately, having likewise a
+Russian woman along with us and a Tartar guide of a most horrible aspect,
+and set out at full speed. In this manner we followed our guide the whole
+of that night and part of the next day, without being ever allowed to
+stop. I frequently asked our guide, by means of my interpreter, what was
+the reason of all this, and where he proposed to carry me? At length he
+explained the cause of Marcus having made us set off, with such
+precipitation; as the khan had sent an order to examine all the boats,
+and he was apprehensive they would have detained me as a slave if I had
+been found.
+
+About mid-day of the 13th of August 1475, we arrived at the banks of the
+river, and our Tartar guide endeavoured to find a boat in which to carry
+us into an island in which the flocks of Auchioli were kept; but not
+finding one, he cut down some branches, which he tied together so as to
+form a raft. On this he placed the saddles of our horses, and tying this
+raft to his horses tail, he mounted the horse, on which he swam across
+the river to the island, which lay a bow-shot from the shore. He then
+came back with the raft, on which he carried over the Russian woman;
+after which he came back for me, and I stripped myself naked before
+trusting myself to the crazy raft, that I might be in readiness to save
+myself by swimming, in case of any misfortune. He afterwards returned for
+our horses; and my interpreter swam across. The passage of the river
+being thus happily effected, the Tartar carried us to a wretched hovel,
+covered by a miserable woollen cloth, where he gave us some sour milk,
+which we found very refreshing, as we had been long without food, and
+were much fatigued. Immediately on our arrival in the island being known,
+several Tartars left their flocks to come and see us, seeming infinitely
+surprized and much gratified by the sight, as we were probably the first
+Christians who had ever been on the island. Being exceedingly fatigued
+and distressed in mind, I did not care to speak with them, yet our Tartar
+guide treated me with much kindness, and made me as good cheer as he was
+able. Next day, being the eve of the festival of the Virgin, he killed a
+fat lamb to entertain me, part of which he roasted, and part was boiled;
+and though contrary to the rules of our religion to eat meat on that day,
+I made a hearty meal, notwithstanding that every thing was disgustingly
+dirty. We had likewise sour milk to drink, and the Tartars drank mares
+milk, of which they are very fond; but I would not drink this, though I
+could easily perceive my dislike did not please the Tartars.
+
+I remained here two days; and at last, on the 26th of August, Marcus and
+the rest made their appearance on the other side of the river, and sent a
+boat for me in which were two of his servants, a Russian and a Tartar.
+Stephen Testa and John Ungaret, my two attendants, were very much
+rejoiced at seeing me again, as they believed me entirely lost, and we
+rested two days at this place before entering upon the desert. Marcus had
+been so attentive as to provide a horse for me, of which I stood in great
+need. In this caravan, which was under the command of the Tartar
+ambassador, there were about three hundred persons, Russians and Tartars,
+who carried with them above two hundred[7] horses, partly intended to
+serve as food by the way, and partly for sale in Russia. We arrived in
+good order at night on the banks of the river, and we rested every day at
+noon during the fifteen days of our journey, as we were now considered to
+be out of danger from any attack by the Tartars. I do not recollect the
+name of the emperor of the Tartars who inhabit this part of the country
+between the Wolga and the Tanais. This nation has no fixed place of abode,
+but shift their encampments from place to place, wherever they can find
+pasture and water for their cattle, on which they have their whole
+dependence, as they subsist entirely on flesh and milk. They have cows,
+heifers, and sheep of admirable beauty, the flesh of which is excellent,
+as they feed on fine pastures; but these people prefer mares milk to
+every other delicacy. Though I have not been in the country of these
+Tartars, I have been informed that it is flat and agreeable, having
+neither hill nor mountain; but the inhabitants addict themselves
+excessively to robbery and plunder, as their sole occupation, and
+continually infest the borders of Russia and Circassia by predatory
+incursions. Their horses are very wild and unmanageable, and are never
+shod. We were told that there is another tribe of Tartars beyond the
+Wolga, named wild Tartars, who allow their hair to grow extremely long.
+In the middle of winter they often make inroads to the very skirts of the
+city of Citracan, whence they carry off cattle, but do no other damage.
+These people, like all the Tartars, shift their encampments in search of
+pasturage and water.
+
+After travelling for fifteen days along the eastern bank of the Wolga, we
+came to a small forest, where the Tartars and Russians of the caravan cut
+down trees to construct rafts for crossing the river. While they were at
+this work, we discovered a small bark which was by no means in good
+repair, by means of which our company proposed to convey our baggage
+across. Marcus crossed over with a part of our baggage, leaving me in
+charge of the rest, and sent back the boat when he was landed. In my trip
+with the remainder of our baggage, the boat began to leak when we were
+about half way over, the breadth of the river at this place being about
+two miles. Stephen and two Russians accompanied me in the boat, leaving
+Demetrius, my interpreter, and John Ungar in charge of the horses. We had
+much ado to bale out the water, but by the blessing of God, we got over
+in safety. After our baggage was landed, the Russians put off, to go back
+for the rest of our people and the horses; but the boat fell to pieces.
+This necessarily delayed our other servants and the horses from getting
+over till next day, during which interval they were badly off, as all our
+provisions were on our side. It was fortunate that I now examined the
+state of our provisions, which I found diminished much beyond expectation,
+so that we were under the necessity of abridging our allowance for the
+remainder of the journey, that we might not run short altogether. Our
+principal food consisted of millet, with garlic and onions, and some sour
+milk; and we found some wild apples at this place, which we roasted. In
+the course of two days, the whole baggage of the caravan was transported
+to the western side of the river by means of seven rafts, drawn by horses,
+and directed by the Tartars, the horses swimming and having the rafts
+tied to their tails. The sight of this was very amusing, but seemed very
+dangerous to those who were employed. After resting some time, we quitted
+the banks of the river, and resumed our journey. This river Wolga is
+certainly the largest and deepest river in the world, being, as well as I
+could judge, two miles broad, and has very high banks.
+
+
+[1] Called Citrarchan in the former section, but certainly what we now
+    call Astracan, then the capital of a Tartar principality, which now
+    forms one of the provinces of the vast Russian empire.--E.
+
+[2] These are large shallow ponds, in which sea water is exposed to
+    evaporation, to procure salt.--E.
+
+[3] In the original this person is called the cham of the _Camercheriens_.
+    The Tartar government of Astracan belonged to one of the Mongal tribes
+    of Kipschak; but the word used in the original may have been a local
+    term, not now explicable.--E.
+
+[4] Perhaps the kingdom or province of Cazan, higher up the Wolga.--E.
+
+[5] Contarini has forgot to give us any account in what manner he procured
+    leave to quit Astracan. Perhaps, by means of Marcus, he was permitted
+    to pass for one of his attendants.--E.
+
+[6] It may be necessary to remark, that the tails of a peculiar species of
+    sheep, O. Platyurus, or the broad-tailed sheep, common among the
+    Tartars, and other parts of the world, are said sometimes to weigh
+    twenty-five pounds.--E.
+
+[7] Probably an error for 2000.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Contarini, after crossing European Sarmatia, arrives at Moscow, the
+capital of White Russia, and is presented to the Grand Duke._
+
+After recommending ourselves to the protection of God, we continued our
+journey, through immense and terrible deserts, sometimes towards the
+north, and sometimes westerly[1], always resting at noon, and taking up
+our quarters for the night on the bare ground, without any protection
+against the weather. To prevent us from being surprized in the night by
+the wandering Tartars, outguards were placed every night in three
+directions around our resting-place. During the greater part of this long
+and dreary journey, we were very ill off for water both for ourselves and
+our cattle, and we never saw any wild animals. One day we saw about forty
+horses, which we were told had escaped from a caravan of merchants the
+year before. We fell in one day with a small horde of Tartars, having
+twenty waggons, but I was not able to learn where they were going. As our
+provisions decreased rapidly, we were forced to use the remainder very
+sparingly, and were consequently reduced to a very short allowance.
+
+On the 22d of September 1475, we entered Russia, and discovered a few
+huts in the middle of a wood. On the inhabitants learning that Marcus,
+their countryman, was in our caravan, they came to see him that he might
+protect them from the Tartars, and brought him a present of honey and wax,
+a part of which he gave to us. This was a most providential supply, as we
+were so much reduced by fatigue and spare diet, that we were hardly able
+to sit on horseback. The first city we came to in this country was
+_Rezan_[2], the prince of which place had married a sister of the Grand
+Duke of Russia. The castle and all the houses of this city are built of
+wood. We here procured bread and meat, and mead in abundance, to our
+great comfort and satisfaction. The next city we came to was _Kolomna_,
+passing a very large bridge over the _Monstrus_[3] which flows into the
+Wolga. At this place, Marcus quitted the caravan, which travelled too
+slowly in his opinion, and pushed on for Moscow, where we arrived on the
+26th of September, after a journey of forty-seven days through the desert,
+from the 10th of August, on which day we left Citracan. In a great part
+of this journey we found no wood, and were forced to cook our victuals
+with fires made of dried cow dung. We returned thanks to God on our
+arrival, for our preservation through so many and great dangers. On our
+arrival, Marcus procured a dwelling for us, consisting of a small stove-
+room and some chambers, with stabling for our horses. Though small and
+mean, I felt as if lodged in a palace, when I compared my present state
+of tranquil security with the dangers and inconveniences I had been so
+long subjected to.
+
+Marcus made me a visit two days afterwards, and supplied me with some
+necessaries, exhorting me, as on the part of his sovereign, to keep a
+good heart. I returned his visit next day; and being very desirous to
+return home to Venice, I requested him to introduce me to the grand duke,
+which he promised to do as soon as possible, and I soon afterwards was
+desired to go to court. Immediately on my getting there, I was conducted
+to an audience; on which I made my obeisance in due form to the grand
+duke, to whom I returned thanks for all the attentions I had received
+from his ambassador, Marcus, in the course of my journey, by whose
+assistance and advice I had escaped a thousand dangers; assuring his
+highness that I attributed these marks of kindness as done to the
+republic of Venice, whose ambassador I was, and that the republic would
+unquestionably evince a due sense of the obligations, to which I owed my
+life and safety. The grand duke interrupted my harangue, by complaining
+with much emotion of the conduct of _John Baptista_ of Treviso, and said
+a great deal on this subject, which is not proper for me to report. After
+a conversation of some length, in which I spoke to his highness about my
+departure, he closed my audience, postponing his answers to my requests
+to a future opportunity. The grand duke was very shortly to quit Moscow,
+on purpose to visit several parts of his dominions, and particularly the
+Tartar frontier, where one of his officers was stationed, with the
+command of 500 horse[4], to repress the incursions of robbers on that
+side: I therefore endeavoured to procure an answer about my departure,
+and solicited a second audience for that purpose. On this occasion I was
+very politely received by the grand duke, accompanied by three of his
+principal barons. At first they expatiated at some length on the subject
+of John Baptista, formerly mentioned; but at length I received liberty to
+remain or to depart as I thought proper. They dismissed me with this
+vague answer, and the grand duke set out from Moscow soon afterwards. I
+owed a great deal of money to Marcus, which he had expended for me and my
+people, as he had defrayed the whole expences of our journey, and had
+supplied me with many things of which I stood in need. I requested
+permission from him to go away, giving him the most solemn assurance that
+I would transmit full payment to him immediately after my arrival at
+Venice. But he declared this was not in his power, as he was under the
+necessity of repaying the Tartarian and Russian merchants, who had
+advanced all these things for us, and to whom he had become security for
+payment. Finding every application to the duke and Marcus on this subject
+ineffectual, as I could not procure the necessary funds for my journey
+from either, I was under the necessity of sending Stephen Testa to Venice,
+to solicit a remittance from our illustrious senate, by which I might be
+enabled to pay my debts. Stephen left Moscow on the 7th of October,
+accompanied by one _Nicolas Leopolitain_[5], who knew the country.
+
+I became acquainted at Moscow with one Triphon, a goldsmith, a native of
+Ascravia or Cathara, who was employed in making several articles of
+silver plate for the grand duke. I likewise formed acquaintance with a
+very ingenious architect of Bologna, named Aristotle, who was building a
+new church in the market-place. As the house in which I lodged was small
+and disagreeable, I went to live with this person by the advice of Marcus:
+But I was soon after obliged to change my quarters by order from court,
+to a house near the castle, in which I remained for the rest of my stay
+at Moscow. This city, which is the capital of the Russian dominions, and
+the residence of the grand duke, or sovereign, is built on a small
+elevation, on the banks of the Mosqua, over which there are several
+bridges; the castle and all the houses of the city being built of wood,
+which is procured from several thick forests near the place. The soil of
+this country is fertile, and produces abundance of corn of all kinds,
+which sell here much cheaper than with us; The country abounds in cattle
+and swine, and with incredible numbers of poultry, ducks, geese, and
+hares; but they have no venison, either because there are no deer, or
+because the natives are ignorant of the art of taking them. But they have
+no vines, and their only fruits are cucumbers, wild apples, and nuts. The
+country is extremely cold, and the inhabitants are under the necessity of
+living for nine months of the year in stoves. They provide during winter
+for their living in summer[6]. When the whole country is enveloped in
+frost and snow, they use sledges drawn by horses, which are very
+convenient and useful for travelling; and are even used in summer on
+account of the miry bad roads, which are exceedingly difficult and
+unpleasant. The river ordinarily freezes over about the end of October,
+when the merchants erect booths on the ice, in which they expose their
+wares of all kinds for sale, as in a fair or market; and they here sell
+great numbers of cattle and swine, and great quantities of corn, timber,
+and all other necessaries of life; every thing being procurable in great
+abundance all the winter. About the end of November, they kill all the
+cattle, sheep, and other animals that are required for winter provision,
+and expose them for sale on the river in a frozen state; and the rigour
+of the season preserves these provisions for two or three months, without
+any risk of spoiling. Fish, poultry, and all other articles of food, are
+kept in the same manner. The horses run with great ease and swiftness on
+the ice yet they sometimes fell and break their necks. Both men and women
+of this country have very good faces, but their manners are exceedingly
+bad.
+
+The Russian church is ruled over by a patriarch, whose election or
+appointment is dependent on the grand duke, and who does not acknowledge
+subjection to the Roman pontiff; and they hold all sectaries in
+abhorrence, as people doomed to perdition. The natives are much addicted
+to drunkenness, and he who excels in drinking is much esteemed among them.
+They have no wine, as I have said before, instead of which they drink
+mead, made of honey and water, which is very pleasant when sufficiently
+kept. It is not allowed to every one to make this liquor, for which
+purpose a license or permission must be had from the grand duke; for if
+every person had liberty to make mead, they would drink perpetually like
+so many beasts, and would kill one another. From morning till noon, they
+are employed in the market-place, occupied in their various businesses
+and employments, after which they adjourn to the taverns, in which they
+spend all the rest of the day. Every winter, great numbers of merchants
+come to Moscow from Germany and Poland, who purchase furs of all kinds,
+which are indeed exceedingly beautiful. Among these furs, are the skins
+of foxes, wolves, martins, sables, ermines, and many others, from Scythia
+and the alpine regions, many days journey to the north of Moscow. Many of
+these are likewise carried for sale to Novogorod[7], a city towards the
+frontiers of Germany, eight days journey west from Moscow. The government
+of that city is democratic, and only pays a stipulated yearly tribute to
+the grand duke.
+
+The country subject to the grand duke of Russia is of vast extent, and an
+infinite number of people are subject to his dominions, but they are by
+no means warlike. This empire extends from the north towards the west, to
+that part of Germany which is under the dominion of the king of Poland[8];
+and some reckon among his subjects a wandering nation of idolaters, who
+acknowledge no sovereign, not even submitting to the authority of the
+grand duke, but when it suits their own convenience. These wandering
+tribes are said to worship during the day whatever first presents itself
+to their view, on going out in the morning; many other ridiculous things
+are reported of them, which I do not repeat, as I have not seen them, and
+can hardly give credit to the reports. The grand duke[9] appeared to be
+about thirty-five years of age, was handsomely made, and had very
+dignified manners, and an air quite royal. His mother was still alive,
+and he had two brothers. By a former wife he had two sons, who did not
+agree with Despina, the reigning grand duchess, and were not therefore on
+very friendly terms with their father. Despina, his second wife, had
+brought him two daughters, and was said to be again with child.
+
+The grand duke returned to Moscow from his journey to the frontiers about
+the end of December; and, as I could not reconcile myself to the manners
+and mode of life of the Russians, I became exceedingly impatient to leave
+the country, and could not persuade myself to stay for the return of
+Stephen from Venice with money. For this reason, I made interest with one
+of the lords of the court, to prevail on the grand duke to supply me with
+money, and to give me leave to depart. A few days afterwards, the grand
+duke sent for me to court and invited me to dinner, when he agreed, from
+respect to the republic, to lend me as much money as was necessary to
+clear all my debts to the Tartarian and Russian merchants, and to enable
+me to return to Venice. The dinner was quite magnificent, consisting of
+every delicacy, and of abundance of exquisitely dressed dishes. When the
+repast was finished, I retired according to custom. Some days afterwards,
+I was again invited to court, and the grand duke gave orders his
+treasurer to give me all the money necessary for paying my debts, besides
+which, he presented me with 1000 ducats, and a magnificent dress of
+Scythian squirrels skins, to wear in his presence when I came to court.
+Before returning to my quarters, he ordered me to be presented to the
+grand duchess, who received me very graciously, and desired me to offer
+her respectful salutations to our illustrious republic, which I promised
+to do.
+
+
+[1] This journey appears to have been through the country on the west of
+    the Wolga, which they probably passed about Czariein, through the
+    provinces of Saratov, Woronez, and Penza, avoiding the Ilafla, to
+    Rezan or Riazan.--E.
+
+[2] Rezan or Riazan, in the province of that name, on the Oka. In a
+    considerable, part of the track of this journey, there are now towns
+    and villages; but the whole of this south-eastern frontier of European
+    Russia, appears to have been then entirely waste, and pervaded by the
+    wandering Tartars. We are quite in the dark respecting the particulars
+    of the route from Astracan to Rezan. It was certainty on the east of
+    the Wolga at the first, to avoid the Tartars which occupied the
+    country between the Caspian and Euxine. The passage of that vast
+    river may have been at Czariein, at its great elbow, in lat. 48° 30'N.
+    or about Saratov in 51° 20'N. neither of which towns seem to have then
+    existed. From thence they would probably proceed, to avoid the larger
+    rivers, between where Penza and Tchenbar now stand, and by the scite
+    of Morbansk, towards Riazan.--E.
+
+[3] In the original this large bridge is said to have been at Kolomna,
+    which is on the river Mosqua, of very inferior magnitude; and flows
+    into the Oka, which most probably is the Monstrus of the text.--E.
+
+[4] In the original, the commander of this body of cavalry is said to have
+    been a Tartarian general--E.
+
+[5] The word Leopolitain, may possibly be a corruption for Neopolitan, or
+    a native of Naples. Perhaps it may refer to Leopol, in that part of
+    Poland now belonging to Austria, and called Galicia.--E.
+
+[6] Such is the expression in the original, which ought perhaps to be
+    reversed. Yet Contarini possibly meant to say, that the inhabitants of
+    Moscow laid up a sufficient stock of money from the profits of their
+    long winter labours, for their subsistence during summer; when, by the
+    absence of the court, they had little employment.--E.
+
+[7] There are two cities named Novogrod or Novgorod in Russia, nearly at
+    equal distances from Moscow, one to the northwest, and the other to
+    the southwest; the latter of which, named Novgorod Sieverskov, is
+    probably meant in the text, and which ought rather to have been
+    described as towards the frontiers of Poland. The other Novgorod did
+    not then belong to the Russian sovereignty.--E.
+
+[8] The geographical ideas of Contarini are very vague and superficial.
+    This is perhaps the only instance wherein Poland; a portion of
+    European Sarmatia, is considered as belonging geographically to
+    Germany.--E.
+
+
+[9] The reigning sovereign of Russia at the period was John III. who began
+    to reign in 1463, and was succeeded in 1505 by Basil IV.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Contarini leaves Moscow, and having passed through Lithuania, Poland,
+and Germany, arrives at Venice._
+
+On the day before that which I had fixed for my departure, I was invited
+to dine at court. Before dinner, I was taken into one of the halls of the
+palace, where I found the grand duke, accompanied by Marcus and a
+secretary. His highness addressed me very graciously, and desired me to
+report all the marks of esteem and friendship he had shewn me, from
+respect to our illustrious republic, and offered me every thing I could
+desire, and which lay in his power to grant. While speaking, I drew back
+from respect; but as I retired he always advanced. I answered every thing
+to his satisfaction, and humbly offered my most grateful thanks for all
+his benevolence to me. He treated me with the utmost politeness and
+familiarity, and even condescended to shew me some robes of gold tissue,
+magnificently lined with Scythian sables; after which we went to dinner.
+The repast was extraordinarily magnificent, at which several of the
+barons and great officers of state assisted. When we rose from table, the
+grand duke called me to him, and gave me my audience of leave in the most
+gracious terms, speaking so loud as to be heard by all the company, and
+expressing his high esteem for the illustrious republic of Venice. After
+this, by his order, a silver cup was brought to me filled with mead, of
+which he made me a present, as a mark of high regard with which he
+honours ambassadors, and other persons to whom he shews favour. This
+present was to me a matter of very serious consideration, as the
+etiquette required me to empty its contents, and the cup was very large.
+When I had drained about a quarter of the liquor, knowing the sobriety of
+the Italians, and perceiving that I was much difficulted, the grand duke
+had the goodness to order the remainder to be emptied, and the goblet
+given to me. Having thanked the grand duke in as respectful terms as I
+was able, I took my leave and retired, accompanied by several barons and
+other persons of rank.
+
+Every thing was now in readiness for my departure, but Marcus would by no
+means hear of my leaving Moscow, without taking a dinner with him, and
+accordingly gave me a magnificent entertainment. Louis, the patriarch of
+Antioch, of whom I have before made mention, came about this time to
+Moscow, and was detained there by order of the grand duke; but I made
+interest through Marcus for his release, which I obtained, and he was to
+have travelled along with me. But as he delayed too long, I set off
+without him. At length, on the 21st January 1476, we set out from Moscow
+in sledges, made like small huts, each drawn by a horse, and guided by a
+driver. In these sledges we carried our baggage and provisions along with
+us, and in them, journeys of great length may be made in a wonderfully
+short time. By order of the grand duke, I had a guide appointed to
+conduct me on the right road, and this was continued from place to place
+all, through his dominions. We slept the first night in a small village,
+where we found our lodgings exceedingly cold, but that was the smallest
+of our inconveniencies, and on this account I hastened our journey as much
+as possible. On the 27th of January, we arrived at _Vieseme_, and a few
+days afterwards at Smolensk on the frontiers of Lithuania, in the
+dominions of Casimir king of Poland. From Smolensk, till we arrived at
+_Trach_[1], a city of Lithuania, we travelled continually in a plain
+interspersed with some hills, the whole country being covered with wood,
+and our only lodgings were in miserable hovels; dining always about noon
+wherever we could meet with a fire, which had been left burning by
+travellers who had passed before us. We had generally to break the ice to
+procure water for our horses; we lighted fires to warm ourselves; and our
+sledges served us instead of beds, as without them we must have slept on
+the ground. We went with such expedition, over the frozen snow, that we
+were assured we had travelled 300 miles in three days and two nights.
+
+Casimir king of Poland, who then resided at _Troki_, immediately on
+learning my arrival, sent two of his gentlemen to compliment me in his
+name, and to congratulate me on my safe return. They likewise invited me
+to dine with his majesty on the following day, which was the 15th of
+February, and presented me on the part of the king with a robe of purple
+damask, lined with Scythian furs, in which I dressed myself to go to
+court. On this occasion, I went in a coach and six, accompanied by four
+noblemen and several other persons. The king himself did me the honour to
+receive me, and conducted me into a magnificent apartment, where he
+introduced me to two of his sons in presence of many nobles, knights, and
+gentlemen of the court. A chair was placed for me in the middle of the
+room; and when I offered to kneel on one knee while addressing the king,
+his majesty had the goodness to insist that I should sit down in his
+presence, which I did after some hesitation. I then gave a recital of all
+that had occurred in my travels, with some account of the dominions of
+Uzun-Hassan, and of the number of his forces, and of the empire and
+manners of the Tartars. The king and his courtiers listened to me with
+much attention during my whole speech, which lasted more than half an
+hour. I then thanked his majesty for the present he had made me, and for
+all his kindnesses to me, attributing his attentions to the esteem he
+entertained for our illustrious republic. His majesty was pleased, by
+means of an interpreter, to express great satisfaction at my safe arrival,
+as he hardly expected I should ever have been able to return; and that he
+was much pleased with the information I had given him respecting Uzun-
+Hassan and the Tartars, which he believed to be more authentic than any
+he had received before. After some other discourse, I was conducted to
+the hall where the dinner was served; soon after which his majesty came
+into the hall with his two sons, preceded by several trumpets. The king
+sat down at the head of the table, having his two sons on his right hand;
+the primate of the kingdom sat next on his majestys left, and I was
+placed next the bishop. The remainder of the table was occupied by about
+forty of the nobles. Each service was ushered in with the sound of
+trumpets, and all the meats were served on large silver dishes.
+
+After dinner, which lasted two hours, I rose to depart, and asked the
+king if he had any farther orders to honour me with; when he was pleased
+to say very graciously, that he charged me to assure the senate that his
+most anxious desire was to cultivate perpetual friendship and good-will
+with our illustrious republic, and he was pleased to make his sons
+express the same friendly wishes. Having respectfully taken leave of the
+king, I was conducted back to my lodgings by several of the courtiers.
+
+Being supplied with a guide, I departed from Troki on the 16th of
+February, and in nine days, passing through the city of _Ionici_, I
+arrived at Warsaw on the 1st of March. The country of Poland appeared
+very pleasant, and abundant in every, thing except fruit. During our
+journey we saw many villages and castles, and were well received
+everywhere, but we found no considerable city. After remaining four days
+in Warsaw, where I purchased horses for the rest of our journey, we set
+out from that place on the 5th of March, and came that day to a town call
+_Messarig_, where we began to travel with less assurance of safety, as
+this place is on the frontiers towards Germany. On the 9th I arrived at
+Frankfort on the Oder, from which place we found more commodious lodgings
+in traversing Germany, than we had been accustomed to for a long time.
+While passing the city of _Gia_[2], on the 15th of March, I had the good
+fortune to meet with Stephen Testa, whom I had sent from Moscow to Venice
+for money. I was quite delighted at this meeting, as from him I received
+good accounts from home. We now entered the city of _Gia_, where we
+rested two days. On the 22d we reached Nurenburgh, where we remained four
+days; from whence we went by Augsburgh, and several other fine cities of
+Germany, and arrived at Trent on the 4th of April, where we celebrated
+the festival of Easter. Being extremely anxious to revisit my beloved
+country, I set out from thence after three days stay, and reached _Scala_,
+in the dominions of our republic. In discharge of a vow that I had
+entered into, I went to visit the church of the blessed Virgin on Mount
+Arthon, and presented the offerings which I had promised at her holy
+shrine. I had already sent notice to my brother Augustine, that he might
+expect me in Venice towards evening of the 10th of April; but my extreme
+desire of getting back to my country, made me get home considerably
+earlier. Embarking at break of day, I arrived at three in the afternoon
+at _Lucafusina_; and, before going to my own house, I went, in the
+discharge of another vow, to the church of our _Lady of Grace_, and met
+my brother on my way in the Jews street. We embraced with great affection,
+and went together to the church. After finishing my devotions, I went to
+the palace, as the _Pregadi_ were then assembled, it being on a Thursday.
+I was admitted into the council, to which I gave an account of the
+success of my embassy; after which, as our serene Doge was indisposed, I
+paid my respects to him in his apartment, and gave him a short history of
+my travels, and particularly concerning those things on which I had been
+commissioned. From thence I went to my own house, where I gave thanks to
+God for his infinite mercy, in having permitted me to return in health
+and safety, after so many dangers. To conclude: Although I might have
+composed this narrative of my travels in a more eloquent style, I have
+preferred truth in few words, to falsehood dressed up in ornamented
+language. I have been very brief in relation to Germany, as that country
+is in our neighbourhood, and is therefore well known to many, on which
+account it would have been both superfluous and tiresome to have given a
+minute description of what every one knows.
+
+
+[1] This almost certainty a corruption of Troki--E.
+
+[2] Though this place must assuredly be a town in Germany, between
+    Frankfort on the Oder and Nurenburgh, its name is so disguised as to
+    be quite unintelligible.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Recapitulation of some circumstances respecting Persia._
+
+The empire of Uzun-Hassan is very extensive, and is bounded by Turkey and
+Caramania, belonging to the Sultan, and which latter country extends to
+Aleppo. Uzun-Hassan took the kingdom of Persia from _Causa_[1], whom he
+put to death. The city of Ecbatana, or Tauris, is the usual residence of
+Uzun-Hassan; Persepolis, or _Shiras_[2], which is twenty-four days
+journey from thence, being the last city of his empire, bordering on the
+Zagathais, who are the sons of Buzech, sultan of the Tartars, and with
+whom he is continually at war. On the other side is the country of Media,
+which is under subjection to _Sivansa_, who pays a kind of yearly tribute
+to Uzun-Hassan. It is said that he has likewise some provinces on the
+other side of the Euphrates, in the neighbourhood of the Turks[3]. The
+whole country, all the way to Ispahan, six days journey from Persepolis,
+is exceedingly arid, having very few trees and little water, yet it is
+fertile in grain and other provisions. The king seemed to me about
+seventy years of age, of large stature, with a pleasant countenance, and
+very lean. His eldest son, named Ogurlu Mohamed, was much spoken of when
+I was in Persia, as he had rebelled against his father. He had other
+three sons; Khalil Mirza, the elder of these was about thirty-five years
+old, and had the government of Shiras. Jacub beg, another son of Uzun-
+Hassan, was about fifteen, and I have forgotten the name of a third
+son.[4] By one of his wives he had a son named _Masubech_, or Maksud beg,
+whom he kept in prison, because he was detected in corresponding with his
+rebellious brother _Ogurlu_, and whom he afterwards put to death.
+According to the best accounts which I received from different persons,
+the forces of Uzun-Hassan may amount to about 50,000 cavalry, a
+considerable part of whom are not of much value. It has been reported by
+some who were present, that at one time he led an army of 40,000 Persians
+to battle against the Turks, for the purpose of restoring _Pirameth_ to
+the sovereignty of Karamania, whence he had been expelled by the
+infidels.[5]
+
+
+[1] Uzun-Hassan, as formerly mentioned, was prince of the Turkmans of the
+    white sheep tribe, and acquired the dominion of western Persia, by the
+    defeat of Hassan-ali prince of the black sheep Turkmans, who is
+    probably the person named Causa in the text.--E.
+
+[2] This is a mistake, Persepolis is supposed to have been at, or near
+    Istakar, above twenty miles N.N.E. from Shiras.--E.
+
+[3] Diarbekir, with the cities of Arzunjan, Mardin, Roha, or Orfa, and
+    Siwas, are said to have been committed by Timour to the government of
+    Kara Ilug Ozman, the great grandfather of Uzun-Hassan, who may have
+    retained the original possessions of his tribe after the acquisition
+    of western Persia.--Mod. Univ. Hist. VI. 111.
+
+[4] According to the authors of the Modern Universal History. B. VIII. ch.
+    i. sect. 3. Uzun-Hassan had seven sons: Ogurlu Mohammed, Khahil Mirza,
+    Maksud beg, Jakub beg, Masih beg, Yusuf beg, and Zegnel. Contarini
+    strangely corrupts almost every name that occurs. Uzun-Hassan, he
+    makes Unsuncassan; Ogurlu Mohammed, Gurlu mamech; Kalil mirza, Sultan
+    chali; Yakub beg, Lacubei; Maksud beg, or Masih beg, Masubech; and
+    omits three of the seven.--E.
+
+[5] Uzun-Hassan is said to have been defeated in battle by the Turks, in
+    1471, near Arzenjan.--Mod. Univ. Hist. VI. 113.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+VOYAGES OF DISCOVERY BY THE PORTUGUESE ALONG THE WESTERN COAST OF AFRICA,
+DURING THE LIFE, AND UNDER THE DIRECTION OF DON HENRY.[1]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+The knowledge possessed by the ancients respecting India, will be the
+subject of discussion in a future portion of this work. We have now to
+contemplate the tedious, yet finally successful efforts of the Portuguese
+nation, in its age of energetic heroism, to discover a maritime passage
+to that long famed commercial region, some general knowledge of which had
+been preserved ever since the days of the Persian, Macedonian, and Roman
+empires. Of all the great events which have occurred in the modern ages,
+previous to our own times, the voyages and discoveries which were made by
+the Europeans, in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries of the Christian
+era, are justly entitled to preference, whether we appreciate the vast
+improvements which they made in navigation, and, consequently, in
+commerce,--the astonishing abundance of wealth which they brought into
+Europe,--the surprising feats of bravery which were performed in their
+various expeditions and conquests,--the extensive, populous, and valuable
+territories which were subdued or colonized,--or the extended knowledge,
+which was suddenly acquired of the greater part of the earth, till then
+either altogether unknown, or very partially and erroneously described.
+By these discoveries, we allude to those of the southern and western
+hemispheres, a new heaven and a new earth were opened up to the
+astonishment of mankind, who may be said to have been then furnished with
+wings to fly from one end of the earth to the other, so as to bring the
+most distant, and hitherto utterly unknown nations, acquainted with each
+other. In the ordinary course of human affairs, it has been observed that
+similar events frequently occur; but the transactions of these times
+which we now propose to narrate, were as singular in their kind as they
+were great, surprising, and unexpected; neither can any such ever happen
+again, unless Providence were to create new and accessible worlds for
+discovery and conquest, or to replunge the whole of mankind for a long
+period into the grossest ignorance.
+
+The merit and glory of these wonderful achievements are unquestionably
+due to the Portuguese nation, and the first and principal share to the
+sublime genius of their illustrious prince, the infant DON HENRY, _Duke
+of Viseo and Grand Master of the order of Christ_, whose enlarged mind
+first planned the fitting out of maritime expeditions for discovery, and
+by the imitation of whose example all subsequent discoveries have been
+accomplished. Every thing of the kind before his time was isolated or
+accidental, and every subsequent attempt has been pursued on scientific
+or known principles, which he invented and established. Although America
+was discovered by Columbus, in the service of Spain, some years before
+the Portuguese were able to accomplish their long sought route to India;
+and although the discovery of America was performed infinitely quicker
+than that of southern Africa and the route to India, Columbus having
+accomplished his design at the very first attempt, and even without any
+previous knowledge of the countries he went in search of; while the
+endeavours of the Portuguese occupied a great number of years in almost
+fruitless attempts, and extremely tedious progression; yet Don Henry
+first set on foot the navigation of the ocean through unknown seas, and
+inspired, other nations with the idea of making discoveries of distant
+and unexplored regions; and ultimately great as were the discoveries of
+Columbus, they may be said to have been accidentally made in the
+erroneous attempt to go by a nearer route to the regions of which Don
+Henry and his successors had long been in search.
+
+These attempts of the Portuguese had been continued for nearly fourscore
+years before any of their neighbours seem to have entertained the most
+distant idea of engaging in foreign discoveries, even viewing their
+endeavours as downright knight-errantry, proceeding from a distempered
+imagination, as well in the first promoter as in those who continued to
+prosecute his scheme. In a word, the relation of these discoveries forms
+one of the most curious portions of modern history, as comprizing a great
+number of the most extraordinary transactions that ever happened in any
+period of the world. For this reason they are well worthy of being
+particularly narrated, that the curious may be made acquainted with every
+successive step in such important enterprizes, and by what almost
+insensible degrees such vast undertakings were ultimately accomplished.
+And as the intercourse of Europeans has operated a great change in the
+countries to which they penetrated, and upon their original inhabitants,
+so that both now appear in a very different light from what they did
+before these expeditions and discoveries; therefore, every circumstance
+belonging to these transactions deserves the most serious notice.
+
+John 1. of Portugal, married Philippa, the eldest daughter of John of
+Gaunt, Duke of Lancaster, son to Edward III. of England, by whom he had
+several sons, of whom Don Henry was the _fifth_. After serving with great
+bravery under his father at the capture of Ceuta, he was raised to the
+dukedom of Viseo, and was sent back with a large reinforcement to
+preserve the conquest to which his courage had largely contributed.
+During his continuance in command at Ceuta, he acquired much information,
+by occasional converse with some Moors, relative to the seas and coasts
+of Western Africa, which raised and encouraged the project of maritime
+discoveries; and these became afterwards the favourite and almost
+exclusive pursuit of his active and enlarged mind. From the Moors he
+obtained intelligence respecting the Nomadic tribes who border upon and
+pervade the great desert, and of the nations of the Jaloofs, whose
+territories are conterminous with the desert on the north, and Guinea to
+the south. By one ingenious author[2], he has been supposed instigated to
+his first attempts at maritime discovery, by the desire of finding a way
+by sea to those countries from whence the Moors brought ivory and gold
+dust across the desert. It unfortunately happens that we have no record
+of the particular voyages themselves, and are therefore reduced to the
+necessity of giving the relation of this great discovery historically
+from the best remaining sources of information. The writings of Cada
+Morto, which will be found in the sequel, form a pleasing exception to
+this desideratum in the history and progress of early navigation and
+discovery.
+
+
+[1] Astley. I. 9. Clarke, I. 140. Purchas, I. 6. Harris, I. 662.
+
+[2] Wealth of Nations, II. 347.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Commencement of Portuguese Discoveries, from Cape Non to Cape Bojador_
+
+Three years before the reduction of Ceuta, the Duke of Visco had sent a
+vessel in 1412 to explore the western coast of Africa, being the first
+voyage of discovery undertaken by the Portuguese, or by any other nation
+in modern times. The commander was instructed to endeavour to follow the
+western coast of Africa, to the southward of Cape Chaunar, called by the
+Portuguese mariners Cape Nao, Non, or Nam, which, extending itself from
+the foot of Mount Atlas, had hitherto been the _non plus ultra_ or
+impassable limit of European navigation, and had accordingly received its
+ordinary name from a negative term in the Portuguese language, as
+implying that there was no navigation beyond; and respecting which a
+proverbial saying was then current, of the following import:
+
+
+  Whoe'er would pass the Cape of Non
+  Shall turn again; or else be gone.
+
+
+The success of this earliest voyage, fitted out for the purpose of
+discovery, is not recorded; but Don Henry continued to send some vessels
+every year to the same coast, with the same instructions of endeavouring
+to explore the coast beyond Cape Non. Not daring to trust themselves
+beyond sight of land, the mariners crept timorously along the coast, and
+at length reached Cape Bojador, only sixty leagues, or 180 miles beyond
+Cape Non. This cape, which stretches boldly out into the ocean, from
+which circumstance it derives its name[1], filled the Portuguese mariners
+with terror and amazement; owing to the shoals by which it is environed
+for the space of six leagues, being perpetually beaten by a lofty and
+tremendous surge, which precluded them, from all possibility of
+proceeding beyond it in their ordinary manner of creeping along the coast;
+and they dared not to stretch out into the open sea in quest of smoother
+water, lest, losing sight of land altogether, they might wander in the
+trackless ocean, and be unable to find their way home. It is not
+impossible that they might contemplate the imaginary terrors of the
+torrid zone, as handed down from some of the ancients, with all its
+burning soil and scorching vapours; and they might consider the
+difficulties of Cape Bojador as a providential bar or omen, to warn and
+oppose them against proceeding to their inevitable destruction. They
+accordingly measured back their wary steps along the African coast, and
+returned to Portugal, where they gave an account of their proceedings to
+Don Henry, in which, of course, the dangers of the newly discovered cape
+would not be diminished in their narrative[2].
+
+Returning from Ceuta, where his presence was no longer necessary, and
+where he had matured his judgment by intercourse with, various learned
+men whom his bounty had attracted into Africa, and having enlarged his
+views by the perusal of every work which tended to illustrate the
+discoveries which he projected, Don Henry fixed his residence at the
+romantic town of Sagres, in the neighbourhood of Cape St Vincent, where
+he devoted his leisure to the study of mathematics, astronomy,
+cosmography, and the theory of navigation, and even established a school
+or academy for instructing his countrymen in these sciences, the parents
+of commerce, and the sure foundations of national prosperity. To assist
+him in the prosecution of these his favourite studies, he invited, from
+Majorca, a person named Diego, or James, who was singularly skilful in
+the management of the instruments then employed for making astronomical
+observations at sea, and in the construction of nautical charts. Some
+traces of nautical discoveries along the western coast of Africa still
+remained in ancient authors; particularly of the reported voyages of
+Menelaus, Hanno, Eudoxus, and others. From an attentive consideration of
+these, Don Henry and his scientific coadjutor were encouraged to hope for
+the accomplishment of important discoveries in that direction; and they
+were certainly incited in these views by the rooted enmity which had so
+long rankled among the Christian inhabitants of Spain and Portugal
+against the Moors, who had formerly expelled their ancestors from the
+greatest part of the peninsula, and with whom they had waged an incessant
+war of several centuries in recovering the country from their grasp.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Discovery of the Madeira Islands._
+
+After some time usefully employed in acquiring and diffusing a competent
+knowledge of cosmopographical, nautical, and astronomical science, Don
+Henry resolved to devote a considerable portion of the revenue which he
+enjoyed as Grand Master of the Order of Christ, in continuing and
+extending those projects of nautical discovery which had long occupied
+his attention. Accordingly, about the year 1418, a new expedition of
+discovery was fitted out for the express purpose of attempting to
+surmount the perils of Cape Bojador. In this expedition Juan Gonzales
+Zarco and Tristan Vaz Texeira, two naval officers of the household of Don
+Henry, volunteered their services; and, embarking in a vessel called a
+_barcha_[3], steered for the tremendous cape. The Portuguese were
+hitherto ignorant of the prevailing winds upon the coast of Africa, and
+the causes by which their influence is varied or increased. Near the land,
+and between the latitudes of 28° and 10° north, a fresh gale almost
+always blows from the N.E. Long sand-banks, which extend a great way out
+to sea, and which are extremely difficult to be distinguished in the
+mornings and evenings, and the prevailing currents, were powerful
+obstacles to the enterprise of these navigators. About six leagues off
+Cape Bojador, a most violent current continually dashes upon the breakers,
+which presented a most formidable obstacle to the brave but inexperienced
+mariners. Though their voyage was short, they encountered many dangers;
+and, before they could reach the cape, they were encountered by a heavy
+gale from the east, by which the billows of the Atlantic became too heavy
+to be resisted by their small vessel, and they were driven out to sea. On
+losing sight of their accustomed head lands, and being forced into the
+boundless ocean for the first time, the ships company gave themselves up
+to despair; but, on the abatement of the tempest, they found themselves
+unexpectedly within view of an island, situated about 100 leagues west
+from the coast of Africa. With extreme joy they beheld the coast of this
+island extending about twenty miles in length, to which they gave the
+name of Puerto Santo, because first discovered upon the feast of All
+Saints. This is the smaller of the Madeiras, being only about two miles
+broad; and, as the only roadstead is upon the south-west side, the
+Portuguese probably anchored upon that side to be under the lee shelter
+of the island from the remnants of the tempest from which they had
+happily escaped.
+
+The island of _Puerto Santo_, or of the Holy Haven, is almost directly
+west from Cape Cantin; whence it would appear that these Portuguese
+navigators could hardly have passed much beyond Cape de Geer, when driven
+off the coast by this fortunate easterly tempest. Had they even advanced
+as far as Cape Non, they would almost certainly have been driven among
+the Canaries. It is perfectly obvious that they never even approached
+Cape Bojador in this voyage; unless we could suppose, after having been
+driven directly west from that cape, that they shaped a northern course,
+after the subsidence of the tempest, and fell in with Puerto Santo while
+on their return to Portugal.
+
+Greatly pleased with the soil and climate of this island, and with the
+gentle manners of the natives, whom they described as in an intermediate
+state of civilization, and entirely destitute of any appearance of savage
+ferocity, Zarco and Vaz immediately returned to Portugal, where they made
+a report of the incidents of their voyage; and to confirm their opinion
+of the value of their discovery, they requested permission from Don Henry
+to return for the purpose of establishing a settlement in Puerto Santo.
+By this discovery an advanced and favourable station was secured towards
+the south, whence any discoveries along the coast of Africa might be
+prosecuted with greater ease and safety, and from whence the dangers of
+the hitherto formidable cape Bojador might be avoided, by keeping a
+southerly or S. W. course from Puerto Santo. From these considerations
+Don Henry granted their request; and, yielding to the adventurous spirit
+which this accidental discovery had excited, he permitted several persons
+to join in a new projected voyage, among whom was Bartholomew Perestrello,
+a nobleman of his household.
+
+Three vessels were soon fitted out[4], which were placed under the
+respective commands of Zarco, Vaz, and Perestrello. These commanders had
+orders to colonize and cultivate the newly discovered island, and were
+furnished with a considerable assortment of useful seeds and plants for
+that purpose. They happened likewise to take with them a female rabbit
+great with young, which littered during the voyage; and which being let
+loose with her progeny, multiplied so rapidly, that, in two years, they
+became so numerous as to occasion serious injury to the early attempts at
+cultivation, and to baffle every hope of rendering Puerto Santo a place
+of refreshment for the Portuguese navigators; insomuch that a resolution
+was formed to abandon the newly established settlement. After having
+landed the different animals and seeds which had been sent out by Don
+Henry, and seeing them properly distributed, Perestrello returned into
+Portugal to make a report to the prince, and Zarco and Vaz remained to
+superintend the infant colony.
+
+Soon after the departure of Perestrello, the attention of Zarco and Vaz
+was strongly excited by observing certain clouds or vapours at a great
+distance in the ocean, which continually presented the same aspect, and
+preserved exactly the same bearing from Puerto Santo, and at length
+occasioned a conjecture, that the appearance might proceed from land in
+that quarter. Gonsalvo and Vaz accordingly put to sea and sailed towards
+the suspected land, and soon discovered that the appearances which had
+attracted their notice actually proceeded from a considerable island
+entirely overgrown with wood, to which, on that account, they gave the
+name of Madeira[5]. After bestowing considerable attention upon the soil
+and other circumstances of this island, which was utterly destitute of
+inhabitants, Gonzalvo and Vaz returned to Portugal with the welcome
+intelligence, and gave so favourable a report of the extent, fertility,
+and salubrity of Madeira, that Don Henry determined to colonize and
+cultivate it. Accordingly, with the consent of the king of Portugal, the
+island of Madeira was bestowed in hereditary property upon Zarco and Vaz;
+one division named _Funchal_ being given to Zarco, and the other moiety,
+named _Machico_, to Vaz.
+
+In the year 1420 Zarco began the plantation of Madeira, and being much
+impeded in his progress by the immense quantity of thick and tall trees,
+with which it was then everywhere encumbered, he set the wood on fire to
+facilitate the clearing of the surface for cultivation. The wood is
+reported to have continued burning for seven years[6], and so great was
+the devastation as to occasion great inconvenience to the colony for many
+years afterwards, from the want of timber. Don Henry appears to have been
+a prince of most uncommonly enlarged and liberal views; not only capable
+of devising the means of making maritime discoveries, which had never
+been thought of before his time, but of estimating their value when made,
+and of applying them to purposes the most useful and important for his
+country. Reflecting upon the reported fertility of the soil, and the
+excellence of the climate of Madeira, and comparing both with the
+judicious foresight of a philosopher, politician, and naturalist, in
+reference to the most valuable productions of similar climates and soils,
+he wisely conceived, and successfully executed the idea of introducing
+the cultivation of sugar and wines into this new colony; For these
+purposes, Portugal would readily supply him with vines; and with people
+conversant in their management: But he had to procure sugar canes, and
+persons experienced in their cultivation, and in the process of
+manufacturing sugar from their juice, from the island of Sicily, into
+which that article of culture had been introduced by the Arabs.
+
+So great was the success of this new subject of industry in Madeira, that
+the fifth part of the produce of one district only, little more than nine
+miles in circumference, which proportion the prince reserved as the
+patrimony of his military order, amounted, in some years, to 60,000
+arobas of twenty-five pounds each; giving the entire acknowledged produce
+of one district only, of the island at 7,500,000 pounds, or 2350 tons.
+This, at the modern price of eightpence a-pound, amounts to the enormous
+sum of L. 250,000 value of merchantable produce, from a district which
+could not contain above 5760 English acres; or above the value of L. 43
+of average yearly value from every acre of that district. This
+astonishingly valuable produce was in the infancy of the sugar trade,
+when that bland and wholesome condiment was still an article of luxury,
+and not as now almost an indispensable necessary, even in the lowest
+cottages of modern Europe. The sugars of Madeira were long famous; but
+after the establishment of the sugar plantations in Brazil, and the
+destructive ravages of a worm which infested the sugar canes of Madeira,
+that article, of cultivation had to be abandoned, and the principal
+attention of the islanders was transferred to the grape, which still
+continues to supply Europe, America, and the East Indies with the justly
+celebrated Madeira wine.
+
+At the same time with the grant of Madeira to Zarco and Vaz, Perestrello
+received a donation of the island of Puerto Santo, on condition of
+colonizing it and bringing it into culture. But so great was the
+multitude of rabbits, all said to have been produced from one doe
+transmitted in a pregnant state from Portugal, that cultivation was
+attended with peculiar difficulties occasioned by their ravages; insomuch,
+that in one islet only, 3000 are reported to have been killed at one time.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Prosecution of Discovery in Africa, to Cape Branco_.
+
+Partly diverted from the original object of prosecuting discoveries along
+the African coast, by the attentions requisite for forming this first
+establishment of modern colonization, but chiefly owing to the extreme
+difficulties of the navigation in the infancy of that art, fifteen years
+were passed from the first discovery of Cape Bojador before that
+formidable obstacle could be surmounted. In all ages of the world,
+ignorant and indolent men have represented new and unusual enterprises in
+scientific pursuits as rash or improper deviations from the established
+experience and vaunted wisdom of antiquity; and those who promoted them
+have been held out as dangerous, or even impious innovators. It so fared
+with Don Henry, who far outstripped the science, or ignorance rather, of
+his day. At home, the discontented spirits, ignorant of his enlarged
+views, perhaps envious of the reputation his very limited discoveries
+had already attained, represented that the tempestuous seas, strong
+currents, and whirlpools, which they fancied must prevail on the other
+side of Cape Bajadore, would necessarily destroy every vessel which
+should attempt to penetrate beyond that absolute limit of human
+navigation; they alleged that all the country to the south of that cape
+was utterly unfit for the habitation of mankind, sterile, burnt up, and
+destitute of soil and water, like the sandy deserts of Lybia; and they
+pretended to object on principles of patriotism, that the natives of
+Portugal were improvidently wasted on idle discoveries, which, if at all
+advisable, would have been undertaken by their former, wise sovereigns;
+who, contented with the known world, did not, vainly seek for conquests
+in the torrid zone, which was altogether unfit for the habitation of
+mankind. They insinuated, that the expences which had been lavished upon
+those fruitless and dangerous maritime expeditions, might lave been much
+more profitably employed for the improvement of some of the more barren
+parts of Portugal. Even the probable profits and advantages derivable
+from the new colonies of Madeira and Puerto Santo, as they were only
+eventual and contingent, did not satisfy the minds of those discontented
+detractors from the merits and enlightened views of the prince. But Don
+Henry despised those vain endeavours to misrepresent and counteract the
+important enterprise in which he was engaged, and undismayed by the
+natural difficulties which had hitherto retarded the progress of his
+mariners, continued his laudable endeavours to extend his discoveries
+along the coast of Africa. The people, likewise, whom he employed in his
+service, frequently made predatory invasions on the coast, taking every
+Moorish vessel which they were able to master, and made many slaves, by
+the sale of which, the charges attending those maritime expeditions were
+partly defrayed.
+
+About the year 1433, one Gilianez, a native of Lagos, whom the prince had
+entrusted with the command of a vessel, returned from an unsuccessful
+attempt to conquer the invincible obstacles which obstructed the passage
+round Cape Bojador. He had been driven by stress of weather into one of
+the Canary islands, and had imprudently seized some of the inoffending
+natives, whom he brought captives to Sagres. Don Henry was much offended
+by this conduct of Gilianez, whom he received with much coldness and
+reserve; insomuch that Gilianez, on purpose to retrieve the princes
+favour, and to make ample amends for the fault he had committed, made a
+vow, that if entrusted with a new expedition, he would perish rather than
+return unsuccessful in the enterprize which the prince had so much at
+heart. The date of the second expedition of Gilianez, in which he
+surmounted the terrors and difficulties of Cape Bajador, is variously
+referred by different authors to the years 1433 and 1434[7]. However this
+may have been, he succeeded in this herculean labour, as it was then
+esteemed, and returned with great exultation to Sagres, where he was
+again received into the favour and confidence of Don Henry. Contrary to
+the assertions, or suppositions rather, of the discontented opposers of
+the patriotic and enlightened efforts of Don Henry, Gilianez reported
+that the sea beyond Cape Bojador was perfectly susceptible of navigation,
+and that the soil and climate were both excellent.
+
+In the following year Gilianez again sailed for the coast of Africa,
+accompanied by Alphonzo Gonzales Baldaya[8], cupbearer to the prince. The
+weather continued favourable during the voyage, and they were able to
+penetrate ninety miles to the south of Cape Bojador. On landing to take a
+view of the country, and in search of inhabitants, they found the former
+to consist for the most part of an extended desert plain, and they were
+much disappointed in not being able to meet with any of the inhabitants,
+though they saw evident traces of them in the sand. To the bay in which
+they landed they gave the name of Angra dos Ruyvos, or Bay of Gurnets,
+from the great abundance of fish resembling gurnets which were taken by
+the seamen.
+
+Gilianez and Baldaya were again ordered in the year 1435 to prosecute
+their discoveries, with instructions to prolong their voyage, if possible,
+till they should meet with inhabitants. Having proceeded about forty
+miles to the southward of the Angra dos Ruyvos, without being able to see
+a single inhabitant, they adopted an expedient which had been suggested
+by Don Henry, and for which they were provided with the means. Two horses
+were landed, and two youths named Hector Homen and Diego Lopez d'Almaida,
+who had been educated in the household of Don Henry, and were scarcely
+sixteen years of age, were directed to penetrate into the interior of the
+country, that they might endeavour to ascertain whether it were inhabited.
+They were directed to keep close together, and on no account to leave
+their horses, and if possible to bring back some of the Moors; and lest
+they should rashly expose themselves to unnecessary danger, they were
+only allowed each a sword and spear, without any defensive armour. After
+wandering almost a whole day in the barren sandy desert, they at length
+descried nineteen Africans, armed with assagays or javelins, whom they
+ventured to attack, though contrary to their orders. The natives
+retreated into a cave where they were safe from the farther assaults of
+the rash Portuguese youths; and as one of them had received a wound in
+the foot, they thought it prudent to return to the shore, which they were
+unable to reach before the next morning. Gilianez and Baldaya then
+dispatched a stronger force to the cave in which the Africans had taken
+shelter, where nothing was found but some weapons which had been left by
+the fugitives. Owing to this event, the place where the two cavaliers
+were landed was named Angra dos Cavallos, or the Bay of Horses; which is
+in latitude 24° N.
+
+The navigators proceeded along a rugged coast to the south of the Bay of
+Horses, upon which the sea breaks with a terrible noise, and which, on
+account of being entirely composed of a hilly shore, faced with rocks and
+small rocky islands, is called _Otegado_, or the Rocky Place. At about
+twelve leagues distance from the bay of Cavallos they entered the mouth
+of a river, where they killed a number of sea wolves or seals, the skins
+of which they took on board in defect of any other productions of the
+country; these seals were found on an island at the mouth of this river,
+on which the mariners are said to have seen at least 5000 asleep on the
+shore. The voyage was continued to Punta de Gale, forming the western
+head-land of the Rio de Ouro, immediately under the tropic, where a
+fishing net was found constructed of twine, made from the inner bark of
+some tree of the palm tribe, but no natives were met with; and as
+provisions began to grow scarce, the adventurous mariners were
+constrained to return into Portugal, after ranging for some time up and
+down the rocky coast of Otegado, without making any important discovery.
+
+About this period, or perhaps considerably earlier, Don Henry obtained a
+bull from Pope Martin V. by which the sovereign pontiff made a perpetual
+donation to the crown of Portugal, of all lands and islands which had
+been or might be discovered between Cape Bojador and the East Indies,
+inclusively, and granted a plenary indulgence for the souls of all who
+might perish in the prosecution of the enterprize, and in achieving the
+conquest of these extensive regions from the infidel and pagan enemies of
+Christ and the church. In this measure, the philosophical genius and
+enlarged political views of Don Henry are plainly evinced; and,
+undismayed by the obstacles which had so long opposed his grand project
+of discoveries, and the length of time which had been employed in making
+so very small progress, he shewed himself to have looked steadily
+forwards to the full accomplishment of his hopes of discovering the route
+by sea from Europe to India, around the still unknown shores of Southern
+Africa. The date of this papal grant does not certainly appear. De Barros
+and Lafitau are of opinion that it must have been posterior to 1440;
+Purchas places it in 1441; and de Guyon in 1444. But Martin V. died in
+1431; and these writers seem to have confounded the original grant from
+that pontiff, with subsequent confirmations by his successors Eugenius IV.
+Nicholas V. and Sextus IV[9].
+
+The gradual progress of these discoveries were interrupted for a time by
+an unsuccessful attempt of Edward I. or _Duarte_, king of Portugal, to
+gain possession of Tangier in the kingdom of Fez. But the history of this
+war, in which the Portuguese arms suffered much misfortune and dishonour,
+are quite irrelevant to the present subject. The plague likewise, which
+raged at Lisbon in 1438, contributed to the suspension of the patriotic
+enterprizes of Don Henry. At length, in 1440, Don Henry resumed his
+project of maritime discovery, and dispatched two caravels from Sagres,
+which were forced back by unfavourable weather, apparently without even
+reaching the coast of Africa.
+
+In 1441, a young officer named Antonio Gonzales made a voyage in a small
+vessel, with a crew of twenty-one men, to the island where so great a
+number of sea wolves had been seen in the former voyage of Alphonzo
+Gonzales Baldaya in 1435. In this voyage Alphonzo Gotterez, a gentleman
+of the bed-chamber to Don Henry, acted as secretary, and the two
+adventurers were instructed to endeavour to obtain an account of the
+country and its inhabitants, and to procure a cargo of the skins of the
+seals or sea wolves, that the voyage might not be entirely destitute of
+some commercial advantages. After accomplishing this part of his
+instructions, Gonzales determined to use his utmost efforts for procuring
+some of the inhabitants of the country to carry back with him to Sagres.
+For this purpose, he landed at the beginning of the night with nine
+associates, and having advanced about ten miles into the interior,
+discovered a native following a camel. The sudden appearance of the
+Portuguese rendered the astonished Moor perfectly motionless, and before
+he could recover from his surprize he was seized by Gotterez. On their
+return to the shore with their prisoner, they traced some recent
+footsteps on the sand, which led them in view of about forty natives, who
+withdrew to an adjoining hill, but the Portuguese secured a female Moor
+who had strayed from the party. With these two prisoners they returned to
+their vessel, not choosing to run any unnecessary risk, or to make any
+needless attack upon the natives, which was contrary to the express
+orders of Don Henry.
+
+When preparing next morning to set sail on their return to Portugal,
+another Portuguese ship arrived, which was commanded by Nuno Tristan, a
+gentleman of the princes household. Encouraged by this reinforcement, a
+second expedition into the interior was immediately resolved upon, in
+which Nuno Tristan, Diego de Vigliadores, and Gonzales de Cintra, joined
+with Alphonzo Gonzales and Alphonzo Gotterez. Advancing again under night,
+they soon perceived a party of the natives whom they immediately attacked,
+shouting out Portugal! Portugal! San Jago! San Jago! The Moors were at
+first stupified with fear and surprise; but recovering from their panic,
+a struggle ensued, in which three of the Moors were slain, and ten made
+prisoners, the Portuguese being indebted for their safety to their
+defensive armour. After endeavouring, in vain, to establish an
+intercourse with the Moors for the redemption of the prisoners, Alphonzo
+Gonzales returned to Sagres with a cargo of skins and the Moorish
+prisoners, and was honourably rewarded by his discerning master. The
+place of this exploit was named Puerto del Cavallero, or the Knights
+Harbour, on occasion of Gonzales being there knighted by Nuno Tristan.
+
+After careening his vessel, Nuno Tristan proceeded along the coast
+according to his orders, and reached a cape in lat. 20° 50' N. to which
+he gave the name of Cabo Branco, or the White Cape, on account of the
+whiteness of its cliffs. He there landed and found some fishing nets on
+the shore; but after repeated incursions into the country, being unable
+to meet with any of the natives, he made a survey of the coast, and
+returned to Portugal with an account of his proceedings.
+
+Three of the prisoners carried to Portugal by Gonzales were Moors of some
+rank and considerable opulence; who each promised to pay ransoms for
+their safe return to their native country, and to give, besides, six or
+seven slaves each to the captors. Don Henry, as grand master of the order
+of Christ, was eager for the acquisition of so many converts from the
+religion of Mahomet, and was in hopes that the favourable report which
+the Moors might make on their return to Africa, would induce the natives
+to enter into trade with his navigators; and that, among the slaves which
+were to be given in exchange, some certain knowledge might be acquired of
+the burning regions of Africa, about which such strange reports were then
+prevalent. Antonio Gonzales was therefore dispatched on another voyage in
+1442, accompanied by a German gentleman named Balthazar, who had
+distinguished himself in the late unfortunate attempt on Tangier, and who
+was anxious to carry home some account of the newly discovered countries.
+After being forced to return to port, to repair the damages they had
+sustained in a dreadful tempest, they again sailed, and reached the coast
+where the Moors had been made prisoners. The principal Moor was landed,
+and was received with great deference and respect by his countrymen; but
+he forgot all his promises on regaining his liberty, and never returned
+to pay the ransom he had bargained for. It would appear, however, that he
+had informed the natives of the return of the other two chiefs; as at the
+end of nine days, above an hundred natives appeared on the coast, and
+entered into treaty for the ransom of their two countrymen who remained
+captives, and for whom ten negroes, natives of different parts of Africa,
+were given in exchange. During these transactions, the sight of a
+considerable quantity of gold dust in the possession of the Moors,
+excited the most lively emotions in the Portuguese, as being the first
+intimation of that valuable commodity being procurable on the coast of
+their new discoveries. From this circumstance, Gonzales gave the name of
+_Rio del Ouro_, or Gold River, to the deep arm of the sea in which he now
+lay, which penetrates about six leagues N. N. E. from the tropic of
+Cancer.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Continuation of Discovery to Cape de Verd_.
+
+On the return from this voyage, the sight of gold placed the fame and
+advantage of the enterprizes and discoveries of Don Henry beyond the
+reach of prejudice and detraction, and the former murmurings and
+discontents against his proceedings were changed into admiration and
+applause. In 1443 Nuno Tristan was again sent out, with orders to
+prosecute, the discovery of a coast which now seemed so likely to prove
+advantageous to the commerce of Portugal. He now doubled Cape Blanco, or
+Branco, which he had discovered in his former voyage, and, about ten
+leagues farther to the south-east, fell in with an island, or rather
+cluster of seven islands, called _Adeget_ by the natives, but which have
+since, with the bay in which they lie, received the name of Arguim, or
+Arguin. The small canoes which were used by the natives of this coast
+were at first mistaken for some strange kind of birds, as the people sit
+upon them astride, using their feet instead of paddles, to urge them
+along. To one of the islands in this bay Tristan gave the name of _De
+las_ Garças, on account of the seasonable supply which he there received.
+From this place Nuno Tristan returned into Portugal, with some of the
+natives of the country.
+
+Don Henry, in 1444, made an exchange with Massiot de Betancour, lord of
+the Canary Islands, for the islands of Lancerota, Fuertaventura, and
+Ferro, giving him some possessions in the island of Madeira in their
+stead; and immediately fitted out a powerful squadron, commanded by the
+grand master of his household, Fernand de Castro, to take possession of
+this new acquisition, and to subdue the remaining islands, Canaria, Palma,
+Gratioso, Inferno, Alegrazze, Santa-Chiara, Rocca, and Lobos. But, as the
+king of Castile afterwards laid claim to the Canaries, Don Henry resigned
+his conquests, finding the value of these islands by no means answerable
+to his expectation.
+
+So greatly had the fame of the new discoveries extended in consequence of
+the small quantity of gold which had been procured by Gonzales at the Rio
+del Ouro, that several of the inhabitants of Lagos petitioned Don Henry,
+in 1444, to be erected into a trading company, engaging to carry on the
+discoveries along the coast of Africa at their own expence. The prince
+granted their request, and a company was accordingly formed, the
+prototype of those celebrated East India companies which have since
+carried on trade to such vast amount. Among the partners were, Juan Diaz,
+the ancestor of him who afterwards discovered and passed the Cape of Good
+Hope, Gilianez, who had so boldly overcome the obstacles of Cape Bajador,
+Lançerot, a gentleman of the household of Don Henry, Estevan Alfonso, and
+Rodrigo Alvarez. A squadron of six caravels was fitted out under the
+command of Lançerot, which sailed from Lagos in the year 1444, and
+reached the isle of Garças, in the bay of Arguin, where they captivated
+an hundred and fifty Africans, and returned to Lagos, after very slightly
+extending their knowledge of the coast of Africa to the desart island of
+Tider, in 19° 30' N.
+
+In 1445, the subsequent voyage of Gonzales da Cintra, likewise a
+gentleman in the household of Don Henry, in some measure expiated the
+wanton outrage which had been committed in that of Lançerot. The merit of
+Gonzales had raised him to the rank of a gentleman in the household of
+Don Henry, and his character was held in much estimation; but his
+confidence was obtained and betrayed by a moor of the Assanhaji tribe[10],
+whom he had taken on board to serve as an interpreter with the natives on
+the coast of Africa. Misled by this crafty African, who held out great
+hopes of acquiring plunder, Gonzales steered for the island of Arguin,
+and put into a creek or bay on the coast, in lat. 22° 48' N. about
+fourteen leagues to the south of Rio del Ouro, and forty-five to the
+north of Cape Branco. The Moor got leave to go on shore, under pretence
+of visiting some relations, but escaped in the night with another of his
+countrymen. Gonzales was much mortified at allowing himself to be
+circumvented by the cunning of his interpreter, and rashly embarked in a
+boat with only twelve men, with the intention of pursuing the fugitive.
+Pressing onwards with too much eagerness, he neglected to attend to the
+tide, which happened then to be on the ebb. His boat stuck fast, and when
+the morning broke, he was surrounded by two hundred Moors. Unable to
+extricate himself, or to contend against such mighty odds, Gonzales and
+seven of his men were slain; the other five made their escape by swimming
+to the ship, which immediately set sail for Lagos. The clumsy
+denomination of _Angra de Gonzales da Cintra_, to this bay, still
+commemorates the death of this commander.
+
+In the subsequent year, 1446, Don Henry sent out a small squadron of
+three caravels, under the command of Antonio Gonzales, assisted by Diego
+Alfonso, and by Gomez Perez, the kings pilot. They were directed to
+proceed for the Rio del Ouro, and were strictly enjoined to cultivate the
+friendship of the natives by every possible means, to establish peace
+with them and to use their utmost endeavours to convert them to the
+Christian religion; among other instructions, they were urged to pass
+unnoticed the insults or neglect of honour which they might experience
+from the negroes. The Portuguese endeavoured, but ineffectually, to
+conciliate the natives, and to remove the angry prejudices which they
+entertained. They returned to Lagos with no other fruit from their voyage
+except one negro whom they had received in ransom, and an aged Moor who
+requested permission to accompany them to Portugal. One of their own
+companions, Juan Fernandez, from an ardent desire to procure information
+for the prince, got leave to remain among the Assanhaji Arabs.
+
+Next year, 1447, Antonio Mendez was ordered to return in search of Juan
+Fernandez, from whose inquisitive disposition much information was
+expected. In this expedition he was accompanied by two other caravels,
+commanded by Garcia Mendez and Diego Alfonso, but they were separated by
+a storm in the early part of the voyage. Alfonso was the first who
+reached the coast at Cape Branco, where he landed, and set up a wooden
+cross as a signal to his consorts, and then proceeded to the islands of
+Arguin, which afforded shelter from the tremenduous surf which breaks
+continually on the coast of Africa. While waiting at Arguin for the other
+ships, Alfonso paid many visits to the continent, where he made prisoners
+of twenty-five of the natives. When the other two ships of the squadron
+had joined, they went to the Rio del Ouro in search of their countryman,
+Juan Fernandez, who had been several days anxiously looking out for a
+vessel to carry him off.
+
+After experiencing many hardships, Fernandez had succeeded in gaining the
+friendship of a considerable person among the Moors, and was accompanied
+to the shore by that mans slaves in a body. The natives exerted
+themselves to procure the release of some of their countrymen who were
+prisoners with the Portuguese, to whom they gave nine negroes and a
+quantity of gold dust by way of ransom. To the place where this
+transaction took place, the navigators gave the name of _Cabo do Resgati_,
+or Cape Ransom; where likewise Fernam Tavares, an aged nobleman, received
+the honour of knighthood, a distinction he had long been entitled to, but
+which he would only receive upon the newly discovered coast. During the
+homeward voyage, Gonzales touched at a village near Cape Branco, where he
+increased his captives to ninety.
+
+Juan Fernandez described the natives of the coast as wandering shepherds,
+of the same race with the Moor who had been brought over to Portugal by
+Antonio Gonzales in the former voyage. After he had been conveyed to a
+considerable distance inland, he was stripped of all his clothes, and
+even deprived of all the provisions he had taken on shore. A tattered
+coarse rug, called an _alhaik_, was given him instead of the clothes he
+had been deprived of. His food was principally a small farinaceous seed,
+varied sometimes by the roots which he could find in the desert, or the
+tender sprouts of wild plants. The inhabitants, among whom he lived as a
+slave, unless when better supplied by means of the chase, fed on dried
+lizards, and on a species of locust or grasshopper. Water was bad, or
+scarce, and their chief drink was milk. They only killed some of their
+cattle on certain great festivals; and, like the Tartars, they roamed
+from place to place in quest of a precarious sustenance for their flocks
+and herds. The whole country presented only extensive wastes of barren
+sand, or an uncultivated heath, where a few Indian figs here and there
+variegated the dreary and extensive inhospitable plain. A short time
+before he rejoined his countrymen, Fernandez acquired the protection and
+kindness of Huade Meimon, a Moor of distinction, who permitted him to
+watch for the arrival of the ships, and even assigned him a guard for his
+protection.
+
+In the interval between these two voyages of Gonzales, Denis Fernandez, a
+gentleman of Lisbon, who had belonged to the household of the late king,
+fitted out a vessel for discovery under the patronage of Don Henry, with
+a determination to endeavour to penetrate farther to the southwards than
+any preceding navigator. He accordingly passed to the southwards of the
+Senegal river, which divides the Azanhaji moors from the Jaloffs, or most
+northern negroes, and fell in with some almadias or canoes, one of which
+he captured, with four natives. Proceeding still farther on, without
+stopping to satisfy his curiosity in visiting the coast, he at length
+reached the most westerly promontory of Africa, to which he gave the name
+of Cabo Verde, or the Green Cape, from the number of palm trees with
+which it was covered. Alarmed by the breakers with which the shore was
+everywhere guarded, Denis did not venture to proceed any farther,
+especially as the season was already far advanced, but returned with his
+captives to Portugal, where he met with a flattering reception from Don
+Henry, both on account of his discovery of the Cape de Verd, and for the
+natives he had procured from the newly discovered coast, without having
+been traded for with the Moors.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Progress of Discovery from Cape de Verd to the Gambia_.
+
+Soon after the return of Denis from the Cape de Verd, Gonzales Pachecos,
+a wealthy officer belonging to the household of Don Henry, fitted out a
+ship at his own expence, of which he gave the command to Dinisianez da
+Gram, one of the princes equerries, who was accompanied by Alvaro Gil, an
+essayer of the mint, and Mafaldo de Setubal. After touching at Cape
+Branco, they steered along the coast for the isle of Arguin, making
+descents in several places, where they made a considerable number of
+captives from the Moors. At the isle _De las Garças_ they found another
+caravel, commanded by Lourenço Dias, which formed part of a considerable
+squadron that had been lately fitted out from Lagos. Two days afterwards,
+the admiral of that squadron, Lançarot, and nine other caravels arrived.
+Gram informed Lançarot of his success in making fifty prisoners, whom he
+had dearly purchased by the loss of seven of his men, who had been
+murdered by the Moors. Lançarot immediately sailed for Arguin, bent on
+revenge, and sacrificed the lives of eight, and the liberty of four of
+the natives, to the memory of Gonzales da Cintra and the mariners of Gram.
+On this occasion two of the Portuguese officers were knighted on the
+newly discovered coast, which seems then to have been a fashionable
+ambition among them, no doubt arising from the prevailing zeal for
+maritime discovery. From Arguin Lançarot passed over to the isle of Tider,
+whence the inhabitants made their escape to the adjacent continent; but
+the Portuguese soon followed, and the astonished Moors fled on all sides,
+after a sharp skirmish, in which a good many of them were slain, and
+sixty taken prisoners.
+
+The fleet now separated, a part returning home by way of the Canaries,
+while Lançarot, with several other caravels, advanced along the coast of
+Africa southwards, till he got beyond what the Moors called the Çahara,
+or Sahara, of the Assenaji. This Moorish nation is mentioned by Abulfeda
+as the ruling tribe in Audagost, or Agadez, and as inhabiting the
+southern part of Morocco. They are therefore to be considered as the
+peculiar people of the great desert and its environs, at its western
+extremity on the Atlantic. The latter part of their name, _aji_, or
+rather aspirated _haji_, signifies a pilgrim, and is now the appropriate
+title of one who has made the great pilgrimage of Mecca. In the present
+case, the name of Assenaji probably signifies the _Wanderers of the
+Desert_. The Sanhaga, or Assenaji tribe, is now placed at no great
+distance from the African coast, between the rivers Nun and Senegal; and
+this latter river has probably received its Portuguese name of Sanaga
+from that tribe. Ptolemy likewise probably named Cape Verd _Arsinarium_,
+from the same people, from which it may be inferred that they anciently
+occupied both sides of the Senegal river, which is named _Dardalus_ by
+that ancient geographer.
+
+Twenty leagues beyond the southern boundary of the great desert, Lançarot
+came to the mouth of a large river, which had been formerly seen by Denis
+Fernandez, and named by him _Rio Portugues_, or the Portuguese river;
+which was called _Ouedech_ by the natives, and afterwards got the name of
+Canaga, Zanaga, Sanhaga, Sanaga, or Senega, now the Senegal. Lançarot
+passed in safety over the bar of this river, and endeavoured to explore
+its course upwards, but the weather became unfavourable, and forced him
+again to sea, when he proceeded with part of his squadron to Cape Verd,
+near which place he took in a supply of water and goats flesh. The fleet
+was again dispersed by a second storm, and only three vessels remained
+under the command of Lançarot. With these he made a descent on the island
+of Tider, where he captured fifty-nine Moors; and with these, and some
+natives he had made prisoners on the banks of the Senegal, he returned
+into Portugal.
+
+In the year 1447, Nuna Tristan made another voyage to the coast of Africa;
+and, advancing beyond _Cabo dos Mastos_, or the Cape of Masts, so named
+from some dead palms resembling masts, seen there by Lançarot, who made
+this discovery in the former voyage, Nuna Tristan proceeded southwards
+along the coast of Africa, 180 miles beyond Cape Verd, where he reached
+the mouth of a river which he called Rio Grande, or the Large River,
+since called Gamber, Gambra, or Gambia. Tristan came to anchor at the
+mouth of this river, and went in his boat with twenty-two armed men on
+purpose to explore its course. Having reached to a considerable distance
+from his ship, he was environed by thirteen almadias or canoes, manned by
+eighty negroes, who advanced with dreadful yells, and poured in continual
+vollies of poisoned arrows, by which he, and almost every man in his boat
+were wounded before they could regain the ship. Nuno Tristan and all the
+wounded men died speedily of the effects of these poisoned weapons,
+himself only living long enough to recount the nature of the terrible
+disaster to the small remainder of the crew who had been left in charge
+of the caravel; which was brought home by only four survivors, after
+wandering for two months in the Atlantic, scarcely knowing which way to
+steer their course.
+
+There appears some difficulty and contradiction in regard to the river
+discovered by Nuna Tristan, from the vague name of Rio Grande. Instead of
+the Gambia, in lat. 13° 30' N. some of the Portuguese historians are
+inclined to believe that this fatal event took place at another river, in
+lat. 10° 15' N. at least 500 nautical miles beyond the Gambia, to the S.S.
+E. which was afterwards called Rio de Nuno. This is scarcely probable,
+as no notice whatever is taken of the great archipelago of shoals and
+islands which extend from Cabo Rosso to beyond the mouth of that river
+which is still called Rio Grande. Yet it must be acknowledged that our
+remaining information respecting these early Portuguese voyages of
+discovery, is unfortunately vague and unsatisfactory.
+
+In the same year, 1447, Alvaro Fernando proceeded to the coast of Africa,
+and is said to have advanced forty leagues beyond Tristan, having arrived
+at the mouth of a river called Tabite[11], 100 miles to the south of Rio
+Nuno. Notwithstanding the appearance of a determined opposition on the
+part of the natives, who had manned five almadias, Alvaro resolved to
+explore its course in his boat, and proceeded up the river for that
+purpose, with the utmost circumspection. One of the almadias stood out
+from the rest, and attacked his boat with great bravery, discharging a
+number of poisoned arrows, by which Alvaro and several of his men were
+wounded, which forced him to desist and return to his ship. Being,
+however, provided with _theriac_ and other antidotes against the poison,
+Alvaro and all his men recovered from their wounds. He resolved, after
+leaving the river Tabite, to proceed along the coast, which he did to a
+sandy point; and, apprehending no danger in so open a situation, was
+preparing to land, when he was suddenly assailed by a flight of poisoned
+arrows, from 120 negroes who started up from a concealment. Alvaro,
+therefore, desisted from any farther attempt to explore the coast, and
+returned to Lagos to give an account of his proceedings.
+
+In the same year, ten caravels sailed from Lagos for Madeira, the
+Canaries, and the coast of Africa, but returned without making any
+progress in discovering the coast. Under this year likewise, 1447, the
+Antilles, or Caribbee islands, are pretended to have been discovered by a
+Portuguese ship driven, thither by a storm. But the fact rests only on
+the authority, of Galvano, a Portuguese historian, and is not at all
+credible. Indeed the story is an absolute fable; as the inhabitants are
+said to have spoken the Portuguese language, and to have had _seven
+cities_ in their island. In the same year, Gomez Perez went with two
+caravels to Rio del Ouro, whence he carried eighty Moors to Lagos as
+prisoners.
+
+About this period the progress of discovery was arrested by political
+disputes in Portugal, which ended in a civil war between Don Pedro, Duke
+of Coimbra, and King Alphonso V. his nephew and son-in-law, in the course
+of which Don Pedro was slain. Don Henry appears to have taken no share in
+these disputes, except by endeavouring to mediate between his nephew and
+brother; and, after the unhappy catastrophe of Don Pedro, Don Henry
+returned to Sagres, where he resumed the superintendence of his maritime
+discoveries.
+
+
+[1] Explained by the celebrated Dr Johnson, as "so named from its
+    progression into the ocean, and the circuit by which it must be
+    doubled." Introduct. to the World Displayed.--Clarke.
+
+
+[2] Cape Bojador is imagined to have been the _Canarea_ of Ptolemy.--
+    Clarke I. 15
+
+[3] The _barcha_ is a sort of brig with topsails, having all its yards on
+    one long pole without sliding masts, as still used by tartans and
+    settees. The _barcha longa_ is a kind of small galley, with one mast
+    and oars.--Clarke, I. p. 153.
+
+[4] Clarke says in the same year 1418. But this could not well be, as the
+    Discovery of Puerto Santo was made so late as the 1st of November of
+    that year. The truth is, that only very general accounts of these
+    early voyages remain in the Portuguese historians.--E.
+
+[5] Such is the simple and probable account of the discovery of Madeira in
+    Purchas. Clarke has chosen to embellish it with a variety of very
+    extraordinary circumstances, which being utterly unworthy of credit,
+    we do not think necessary to be inserted in this place. See Progress
+    of Maritime Discovery, I. 157.--E.
+
+[6] In the Introduction to the World Displayed, Dr Johnson remarks on this
+    story, that "green wood is not very apt to burn; and the heavy rains
+    which fall in these countries must surely have extinguished the
+    conflagration were it ever so violent." Yet in 1800 Radnor forest
+    presented a conflagration of nearly twenty miles circumference, which
+    continued to spread for a considerable time, in spite of every effort
+    to arrest its progress.--E.
+
+[7] De Barros; Lafitan; Vincent, in the Periplus of the Erythrean sea;
+    Meikle, in his translation of the Lusiad. Harris, in his Collection,
+    Vol. I. p. 663, postpones this discovery to the year 1439.--Clarke.
+
+[8] In Purchas this person is named Antonio Gonsalvo; but the authority of
+    Clarke, I. 188, is here preferred.--E.
+
+[9] Progr. of Nav. Disc. I. 184.
+
+[10] This tribe of Assenhaji, or Azanaghi, are the Zenhaga of our maps,
+    and the Sanhagae of Edrisi and Abulfeda. They are at present
+    represented as inhabiting at no great distance from the coast of
+    Africa, between the rivers Nun and Senegal.--Cl.
+
+[11] No such name occurs in the best modern charts, neither is there a
+    river of any consequence on the coast which answers to the distance.
+    The first large river to the south of the Nuno is the Mitomba, or
+    river of Sierra Liona, distant about 130 maritime miles.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Discovery and Settlement of the Açores_[1].
+
+These nine islands, called the Açores, Terceras, or Western islands, are
+situated in the Atlantic, 900 miles west from Portugal, at an almost
+equal distance from Europe, Africa, and America. The Flemings pretend
+that they were discovered by a navigator of their nation, John Vanderberg,
+who sailed from Lisbon in 1445 or 1449. Santa Maria, one of these islands,
+250 leagues west from Cape St Vincent, was first seen on the 15th August
+1432, by Cabral, who sailed under the orders of Don Henry. San Miguel was
+taken possession of by the same navigator on the 8th May 1444; and Ponta
+Delgada its capital, received its charter from Emanuel in 1449. Tercera
+was given to Jacome de Brujes in 1450, by Don Henry, in which year St
+George was discovered. Pico and Gracioso were discovered about the same
+time. Perhaps Fayal may actually have been first explored, as many of the
+inhabitants are of Flemish descent, under the command and protection of
+the Portuguese. Flores and Corvo, which lie seventy leagues west from
+Tercera, are not reckoned among the Açores by some writers. In this
+latter island, the Portuguese pretend that there was discovered an
+equestrian statue made from one block of stone. The head of the man was
+bare, his left hand rested on the mane of his horse, and his right
+pointed towards the _west_, as if indicating the situation of another
+continent. In addition to all this, an inscription appeared to have been
+traced on a rock beneath the statue, but in a language which the
+Portuguese did not understand.
+
+In the slow progress of discovery, the perils endured by the officers and
+men employed by Don Henry, from the Moors and Negroes, frequently
+occasioned murmurs against his plans of discovery; but the several
+clusters of islands, the Madeiras, Cape Verd, and Açores, formed a
+succession of maritime and commercial colonies, and nurseries for seamen,
+which took off from the general obloquy attending the tedious and
+hitherto unsuccessful attempts to penetrate farther into the southern
+hemisphere, and afforded a perpetual supply of navigators, and a stimulus
+to enterprize. The original prejudices against the possibility of
+navigating or existing in the torrid zone still subsisted, and although
+the navigators of Don Henry had gradually penetrated to within ten
+degrees of the equator, yet the last successive discovery was always held
+forth by the supporters of ignorant prejudice, as that which had been
+placed by nature as an insurmountable barrier to farther progress in the
+Atlantic. In this situation, the settlement of the Açores was of
+considerable importance. In 1457, Don Henry procured the grant of many
+valuable privileges to this favourite colony, the principal of which was
+the exemption of the inhabitants from any duties on their commerce to the
+ports of Portugal and even of Spain.
+
+In 1461, a fort was erected in the isle of Arguin on the African coast of
+the Moors, to protect the trade carried on there for gold and negro
+slaves. Next year, 1462, Antonio de Noli, a Genoese, sent by the republic
+to Portugal, entered into the service of Don Henry, and in a voyage to
+the coast of Africa, discovered the islands which are known by the name
+of the Cape de Verd Islands, though they lie 100 leagues to the westward
+of that Cape. In the same year Pedro de Cintra, and Suera de Costa,
+penetrated a little farther along the coast of Africa, and discovered the
+river or Bay of Sierra Liona or Mitomba, in lat. 8° 30' N. This
+constituted the last of the Portuguese discoveries, carried on under the
+direct influence and authority of Don Henry, the founder and father of
+modern maritime discovery, as he died next year, 1463, at Sagres, in the
+sixty-seventh year of his age; and, for a time, the maritime enterprise
+of the Portuguese nation was palsied by his death.
+
+Thus, during a long period of fifty-two years, this patriotic prince
+devoted almost his whole attention, and the ample revenues which he
+enjoyed as Duke of Viseo end grand master of the military order of Christ,
+in extending the maritime knowledge, and consequently the commercial
+prosperity of his country. The incidents of the last seven years of the
+life of this distinguished prince, are involved in uncertainty, and we
+know very little with regard to the progress of his maritime discoveries
+from 1456, the date of the second of the voyages of Cada Mosto, of which
+we propose to give a separate account, till the year of his death, 1463.
+From the year 1412, when he began his operations, at which time he could
+scarcely exceed fifteen years of age, the navigators who had been formed
+under his auspices and direction, and often instructed by himself in the
+theory of navigation and cosmography, gradually explored the western
+coast of Africa, from Cape Nam or Non, in lat. 28° 15', certainly to Rio
+Grande, in lat. 11° N. or rather to Rio de Nuno, not quite a degree
+farther south; but it is highly probable that the southern limit of
+discovery in his time extended to Cabo Verga, in lat. 10° N. the northern
+boundary of the country usually called the Sierra Liona, or the Ridge of
+Lions, perhaps to the gulf of Mitomba, or bay of Sierra Liona, in lat. 8°
+30' N. an extent of 29° 15' of latitude, or 1185 nautical miles; a mere
+nothing certainly when compared with modern navigation, but a wonderful
+effort in the infancy of the science, when even coasting voyages of any
+extent along well known shores, and in frequented seas, were looked upon
+as considerable efforts. No brilliant discovery, indeed, rewarded the
+perseverance of Don Henry, and the courage of his servants; but an
+indestructible foundation of useful knowledge was laid, for overthrowing
+the ignorant prejudices of the age, and by which, not long afterwards,
+his plans were perfected by completing the circumnavigation of Africa,
+and by the discovery of the _New_ World. Dr Vincent, the learned editor
+and commentator of the Periplus of the Erythrean Sea, is disposed to
+limit the discoveries of Don Henry to Cape Verd[2], but Ramusio believed
+that the Island of St Thomas was settled in his time; and the ingenious
+translator of the Lusiad of Camoens is of opinion that some of his
+commanders passed beyond the equator[3]. According to Mickle, it was the
+custom of his navigators to leave his motto, _Talent de bien faire_,
+wherever they came; and in 1525 Loaya, a Spanish captain, found that
+device carved on the bark of a tree in the island of St Matthew, or
+Anabon, in the _second_ degree of southern latitude. But this proof is
+quite inconclusive, as the navigators long reared in the school of this
+great prince might naturally enough continue his impress upon the
+countries they visited, even after his lamented death.
+
+About seven years before the decease of Don Henry, two voyages were made
+to the African coast by Alvise da Cada Mosto, a Venetian navigator, under
+the auspices of the Duke of Viseo; but which we have chosen to separate
+from the historical deduction of the Portuguese discoveries, principally
+because they contain the oldest nautical journal extant, except those
+already given in our First Part from the pen of the great Alfred, and are
+therefore peculiarly valuable in a work of this nature. Their
+considerable length, likewise, and because they were not particularly
+conducive to the grand object of extending the maritime discoveries, have
+induced us to detach them from the foregoing narrative, that we might
+carry it down unbroken to the death of the great Don Henry. These voyages,
+likewise, give us an early picture of the state of population,
+civilization, and manners of the Africans, not to be met with elsewhere.
+
+To this we subjoin an abstract of the narrative of a voyage made by Pedro
+de Cintra, a Portuguese captain, to the coast of Africa, drawn up for
+Cada Mosto, at Lagos, by a young Portuguese who had been his secretary,
+and who had accompanied Cintra in his voyage. The exact date of this
+voyage is nowhere given; but as the death of Don Henry is mentioned in
+the narrative, it probably took place in that year, 1463.
+
+
+[1] So called from the number of hawks which were seen on these islands
+    when first discovered, _Açor_ signifying a hawk in the Portuguese
+    language; hence Açores or Açoras, pronounced Azores, signifies the
+    Islands of Hawks.--Clarke.
+
+[2] Peripl. of the Erythr. Sea, 193.
+
+[3] Hist. of the Disc. of India, prefixed to the translation of the Lusiad,
+    I. 158.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+
+ORIGINAL JOURNALS OF THE VOYAGES OF CADA MOSTO, AND PIEDRO DE CINTRA TO
+THE COAST OF AFRICA; THE FORMER IN THE YEARS 1455 AND 1456, AND THE
+LATTER SOON AFTERWARDS[1].
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+Alvise Da Cada Mosto, a Venetian, in the service of Don Henry of Portugal,
+informs us in his preface, that he was the first navigator from the
+_noble city of Venice_, who had sailed on the ocean beyond the Straits of
+Gibraltar, to the southern parts of Negroland, and Lower Ethiopia. These
+voyages at Cada Mosto are the oldest extant in the form of a regular
+journal, and were originally composed in Italian, and first printed at
+Venice in 1507. This first edition is now exceedingly scarce, but there
+is a copy in the kings library, and another in the valuable collection
+made by Mr Dalrymple. These voyages were afterward published by Ramusio
+in 1613, and by Grynæus in Latin. The latter was misled in regard to the
+date; which he has inadvertently placed in 1504, after the death of
+Prince Henry, and even subsequent to the discovery of the Cape of Good
+Hope by Bernal Diaz. Even Ramusio, in his introduction to the voyages of
+Cada Mosto, has made a mistake in saying that they were undertaken by the
+orders of John king of Portugal, who died in 1433.
+
+Ramusio imagined that the discoveries of Cada Mosto might tend to great
+importance, as he considered the rivers Senegal and Rio Grande to be
+branches of the Niger, by which means the Europeans might open a trade
+with the rich kingdoms of Tombuto and Melli on that river, and thus bring
+gold from the countries of the Negroes, by an easier, safer, and more
+expeditious manner, than as conveyed by the Moors of Barbary by land,
+over the vast and dangerous deserts that intervene between the country on
+the Niger and Senegal rivers, and Barbary. As, by the account of Leo,
+salt is the most valuable commodity throughout the countries of the
+Negroes, Ramusio proposed that the ships should take in cargoes of salt
+at the island of _Sal_, one of the Cape de Verds, and thence supply the
+countries on the Niger, which was reported to be navigable for 500 miles
+into the interior; and that they should bring back gold and slaves in
+return; the latter to be brought to market at St Jago, another of the
+Cape de Verd islands, where they would be immediately bought up for the
+West Indies. All this fine speculation, however, rested on mistaken
+foundations; as the Niger is altogether an inland river, running to the
+east, and has no communication with the Senegal and Gambia, which run
+west into the Atlantic. Yet time, and the civilization of the natives on
+the Senegal and Gambia, may hereafter realize this scheme of a valuable
+traffic into the interior of Africa; but it is fervently to be hoped,
+that the trade in slaves may never be revived.
+
+In his preface, after an apology for his performance, and making a
+declaration of his strict adherence to truth in all the particulars he
+relates, Cada Mosto gives some account of the infant Don Henriquez, or
+Henry, of Portugal, the great author and promoter of maritime discoveries.
+He praises him, as a prince of a great soul and sublime genius, and of
+great skill in astronomy; and adds, that he applied himself entirely to
+the service of Christ, by making war against the Moors. While on death-
+bed, in 1432, Don John, king of Portugal, exhorted his son Don Henry to
+pursue his laudable and holy purpose, of _persecuting_ the enemies of the
+Christian faith, which he promised to perform; and, accordingly, with the
+assistance of his brother Don Duarte, or Edward, who succeeded to the
+throne of Portugal, he made war in Fez with success for many years.
+Afterwards, the more effectually to harass the Moors, he used to send his
+caravels, or ships of war, annually, to scour the coasts of Azafi, or Al
+Saffi, and Messa, on the coast of Africa, without the Mediteranean, by
+which he did them much damage. But, having in view to make discoveries
+along that western coast, he ordered them every year to advance farther
+towards the south. They accordingly proceeded till they came to a great
+cape, which put a stop to their progress southwards for several years,
+being afraid to go beyond it; whence it took the name it still retains of
+Cape Non[2]; meaning, that such as went beyond should never return. Don
+Henry, however, was of a different opinion, and adding three other
+caravels to those which had been at the cape, sent them again next year
+to make the attempt. They accordingly penetrated about 100 miles beyond
+that cape, where they found only a sandy coast with no habitations, and
+returned back to Portugal.
+
+Encouraged by this commencement of successful progress, Don Henry sent
+the same fleet back next year, with orders to extend their discoveries
+150 miles farther to the south, and even more if they found it proper;
+and promised to enrich all who should embark in this navigation. They
+went again; and, although they obeyed the instructions of the prince,
+they could not improve the discoveries. Yet, firmly persuaded by the
+strength of his own judgment, that people and habitations would certainly
+be found at length, Don Henry continued to send out his caravels from
+time to time, and they came at length to certain coasts frequented by the
+Arabs of the desert, and to the habitations of the Azanaghi, a tawny race.
+Thus the countries of the negroes were discovered; and different nations
+afterwards, which will be mentioned in the following relation.
+
+Thus far the preface of Cada Mosto, as given in the collection of Astley,
+from the edition of Ramusio, with which we must be satisfied in this work,
+as that in the royal library is inaccessible for our use. The present
+version has been carefully formed, by a comparison of Astley, with the
+original in Ramusio, and with the summary by the Reverend James Stanier
+Clarke, in his curious work on the progress of maritime discoveries,
+which only gives a selection of what he considered to be its most
+material parts. In this edition, the narrative style of Cada Mosto, in
+his own person, is restored as much as possible. It may be noticed, that
+Alvise is the Portuguese form of the name Louis, or Lewis.
+
+In addition to the two voyages of Cada Mosto himself, there is a third
+voyage included in the present chapter, performed by Piedro de Cintra to
+the same coast, the narrative of which was communicated to Cada Mosto by
+one who had accompanied Cintra, and had been clerk to Cada Mosto in the
+two former voyages.
+
+
+[1] Astley, Col. of Voy. and Trav. I. 573. Clarke, Prog. of Marit. Disc.
+    I. 235.
+
+[2] According to De Faria, as already mentioned in Chap. II. Sect. I Cape
+    Non was doubled, and Cape Bojador discovered in 1415, many years
+    before the death of King John. The present recapitulation by Cada
+    Mosto has been left in his own words, without insisting on the
+    exactness of his chronology.--Astley.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Voyage of Cada Mosto from Venice to Cape St Vincent: He enters into the
+service of Don Henry, and sets out for the New Discoveries: Relation of
+the Voyage to Madeira and the Canaries; with some Account of these
+islands, and their Inhabitants_.
+
+I, Alvise Da Cada Mosto, after visiting many parts of our Mediterranean
+Sea, being in our city of Venice in the year 1454, at which time I was
+about twenty-two years of age, determined to return into Flanders, a
+country which I had formerly visited as a merchant; for my constant
+attention was, in the first place to acquire wealth, and secondly to
+procure fame. On the 8th of August in that year 1454, I embarked in one
+of the gallies belonging to the republic, commanded by Marco Zen, a
+Venetian cavalier. Contrary winds detained us for some days off Cape St
+Vincent; during which, I learnt that Don Henry, the infant of Portugal,
+resided in the adjoining village of Reposera, or Sagres, to which he had
+retired in order to pursue his studies without interruption from the
+tumult of the world. Hearing of our arrival, the prince sent on board of
+our galley Antonio Gonzales his secretary, accompanied by Patricio de
+Conti[1], a Venetian, who was consul for the republic in Portugal, as
+appeared by his commission, and who also received a salary or pension
+from Don Henry. These gentlemen brought on board, and exhibited to us
+samples of Madeira sugar, dragons blood, and other commodities of the
+countries and islands belonging to the prince, which had been discovered
+under his patronage. They asked us many questions, and informed us that
+the prince had caused some lately discovered and uninhabited islands to
+be settled and cultivated, as a proof of which, they had shewn us the
+before-mentioned valuable productions; adding, that all this was next to
+nothing, in comparison of the great things which Don Henry had performed;
+as he had discovered seas which had never been navigated before, and the
+countries of divers strange, and hitherto unknown nations, where many
+wonderful things were found. They told us farther, that the Portuguese
+who had been in these remote parts, had reaped great advantages by
+trading with the inhabitants; having gained as high as 700 or even 1000
+per cent, on the capitals employed. We were all much astonished at these
+things; and I Cada Mosto in particular, being inflamed with the desire of
+visiting these newly discovered regions, inquired if the prince permitted
+any person who might be so inclined to embark for these places? To this
+they answered in the affirmative; and they likewise stated to me the
+conditions on which any one would be allowed to make the adventure. These
+were, either to be at the whole expence of fitting out and freighting a
+vessel; or at the expence of the freight only, the prince providing a
+vessel. In the former case, the adventurer had to allow on his return one
+quarter of his cargo, as duty to the prince, the rest remaining his own
+entire propriety; in the latter case, the homeward cargo was to be
+equally divided between the prince and the adventurer. In case of no
+returns, the prince was at the entire expence of the voyage; but that it
+was hardly possible to make the voyage without great profit. They added,
+that the prince would be much pleased to have any Venetian in his service,
+and would shew him great favour, being of opinion that spices and other
+rich merchandise might be found in these parts, and knowing that the
+Venetians understood these commodities better than any other nation.
+
+Influenced by all this, I accompanied the secretary and consul on shore,
+and waited on the prince, who confirmed all those things which they had
+said, and encouraged me to embark in the voyage to his new countries, by
+promises of honour and profit. Being young, and of a constitution to
+endure fatigue, and desirous to visit those parts of the world which had
+never been even known to any Venetian, and likewise in hopes to advance
+my fortune, I accepted of the invitation. Having, therefore, procured
+information respecting the commodities which it was proper to carry with
+me on such a voyage, I returned to the gallies, where I disposed of all
+the goods I had shipped for the low countries, and carried to land such
+things as were necessary for my intended expedition; and leaving the
+gallies to pursue their voyage to Flanders, I landed in Portugal. The
+prince evinced much satisfaction at my resolution, and entertained me
+handsomely at Sagres for a considerable time. At length he ordered me to
+fit out a new caravel, of about ninety tons burden, of which Vincent Diaz,
+a native of Lagos, about sixteen miles from Sagres, was commander. The
+caravel being in readiness, and furnished with every thing necessary for
+the voyage, we set sail on the 22d of March 1455, having a favourable
+wind at north-east, and by north[2], and steered our course for the
+island of Madeira. On the 25th of that month we came to the island of
+_Puerto Santo_, which is about 600 miles southward from Cape St Vincent,
+whence we took our departure.
+
+Puerto Santo was discovered by the Portuguese on All Saints day, about
+the year 1418[3], and Don Henry first sent inhabitants to settle there
+under Bartholomew Perestrello, whom he appointed governor. It is about
+fifteen miles in circuit[4]. It bears good bread corn, and a sufficiency
+of oats for its own use; and abounds with cattle and wild hogs, and
+innumerable rabbits[5]. Among other trees, it produces the drago or
+dragon tree, the sap or juice of which is drawn out only at certain
+seasons of the year, when it issues from cuts or clefts, made with an axe
+near the bottom of the tree in the preceding year. These clefts are found
+full of a kind of gum; which, decocted and depurated, is the dragons-
+blood of the apothecaries[6]. The tree bears a yellow fruit, round like
+like a cherry, and well tasted. This island produces the best honey and
+wax in the world, but not in any quantity. It has no harbour, but a good
+road in which vessels may moor in safety, being well sheltered on all
+sides, except the quarters between the south and east, all of which winds
+make it unsafe to ride here at anchor. There is plenty of excellent fish
+on its shores; such as dentili, gilded fish, and others.
+
+From Puerto Santo, which was discovered twenty-seven years before, we
+sailed on the 28th of March, and came the same day to _Monchrico_ or
+Machico, one of the ports of the island of Madeira, forty miles distant
+from Puerto Santo. In fair weather these islands may be seen from each
+other. This latter island was only inhabited within the last twenty-four
+years, when the prince appointed two of his gentlemen to be its governors.
+Tristan Vaz having the government of that half of the island in which the
+port of Monchrico is situated; and the other district of the island, in
+which Fonzal, Fonchial, or Funchal stands, is under the government of
+John Gonzales Zarcho. The island of Madeira is inhabited in four several
+places: Monchrico, Santa Cruz, Fonzal, and Camera-di-Lupi, which are its
+principal places, though there are other minor establishments; and is
+able to muster about 800 men able to bear arms, of whom an hundred are
+horse. There are about eight rivers, which pervade the island in
+different places; by means of which they have many saw-mills, from which
+Portugal and other places are supplied with boards of many different
+sorts. Of these boards, two sorts are in particular estimation, and turn
+most to account. The one is cedar, which has a strong odoriferous smell,
+and resembles the cypress tree; of this they make fine, large, and long
+boards or deals, which they employ for building houses, and for various
+other purposes. The other, called nasso[7], is of a red-rose colour, and
+extremely beautiful; of which they make excellent and very beautiful bows
+and cross-bows, which are sent into the west. In order to clear the land,
+the first settlers set fire to the woods, and the fire spread with such
+fury, that several persons, with their families, and Gonzales Zarcho
+among the rest, were forced to take shelter in the sea to save themselves
+from the flames, where they stood up to their necks for two days and two
+nights without sustenance. Though this island is mountainous, its soil is
+rich and fertile, and it produces yearly 30,000 Venetian _staras_[8] of
+bread corn. At first, the newly cultivated land yielded seventy for one,
+but has since been reduced to thirty or forty, for want of good husbandry.
+Owing to the excellence of its soil and climate, and the abundance of
+springs and rivers, Prince Henry procured sugar canes from Sicily, which
+he sent to this island, where they have yielded abundant produce;
+insomuch, that 400 cantaros of sugar, each containing 112 pounds large
+weight of Venice, have been made at one boiling, and the quantity was
+likely to increase[9]. They have likewise good wines, considering how
+shortly this culture has been introduced; and in such abundance, that
+large quantities are exported. Among other kinds of vines, Don Henry sent
+thither _Malvasia_ plants, procured from the island of Candia, which have
+succeeded well. The soil has turned out so favourable for the vine, that
+in general there are more grapes than leaves, and the bundles are very
+large, even from two to four spans long. They have likewise the black
+_Pergola_ grape, without stones, in great perfection; and so well is the
+climate adapted to this culture, that they begin their vintage about
+Easter, or at least by the octave after.
+
+We sailed from Madeira, following a southerly course, and arrived at the
+Canary islands, which are at the distance of about 320 miles from Madeira.
+There are seven of these islands in all, four of which have been settled
+by the Christians, Lançerotta, Fuerteventura, Gomera, and Ferro; over
+which Herrera[10], a Spanish gentleman, is lord. Large quantities of an
+herb called _Oricello_ or Orchel[11], are annually sent from these
+islands to Cadiz and Seville, which is used in dying, and is sent from
+these places to all parts of Europe. Great quantities of excellent goat
+skins are exported from these islands, which likewise produce abundance
+of tallow, and good cheese. The original inhabitants of the four islands
+that are subject to the Christians, are _Canarians_[12], who speak
+various languages or dialects, not well understood between the different
+tribes. These people have only open villages, without any fortifications;
+except on the mountains, which are exceedingly high, and there they have
+a kind of rude walls or redoubts, to flee to in case of need. The passes
+of these mountains are so difficult of access, that a few resolute men
+might defend them against an army. The other three islands of this group,
+Grand Canaria, Teneriffe, and Palma, which are larger and better peopled
+than the other four, are still unsubdued and possessed by the aboriginal
+idolaters. Grand Canaria has between eight and nine thousand souls, and
+Teneriffe, which is the largest of all these islands, is said to contain
+fourteen or fifteen thousand, and is divided into nine separate lordships.
+Palma, however, has very few inhabitants, yet it appears to be a very
+beautiful island. Every lordship seems to have its own mode of religious
+worship; as in Teneriffe, there were no less than nine different kinds of
+idolatry; some worshipping the sun, others the moon, and so forth. They
+practise polygamy, and the lords have the jus primae noctis, which is
+considered as conferring great honour. On the accession of any new lord,
+it is customary for some persons to offer themselves to die as a
+sacrifice to his honour. On this occasion, the lord holds a great
+festival on his accession day; when all who are willing to give this
+cruel proof of their attachment, are attended to the summit of a high
+cliff in a certain valley, where, after some peculiar ceremonies, and
+certain words muttered over them, the victims precipitate themselves from
+the cliff, and are dashed to pieces. In reward of this sanguinary homage,
+the lords consider themselves bound to heap extraordinary honours and
+rewards on the parents of the victims.
+
+Teneriffe, which is the largest of these islands, and the best inhabited,
+is one of highest islands in the world, and is seen in clear weather from
+a great distance; insomuch, that I was informed by some mariners, that it
+had been descried at the distance of between sixty and seventy Spanish
+leagues, which make about 250 Italian miles. In the middle of the island,
+there is a prodigiously high peaked mountain, shaped like a diamond,
+which is always burning. I received this account from some Christians,
+who had been prisoners in the island, who affirmed that it was fifteen
+Portuguese leagues, or sixty Italian miles, from the bottom of the
+mountain to the top of the peak.
+
+They have nine lords on this island, who are called dukes, and who do not
+succeed by inheritance or descent, but by force; on which account they
+have perpetual civil wars among themselves, in which they commit great
+slaughter. Their only weapons are stones, maces or clubs, and darts or
+lances, some of which are pointed with horn, and others have their points
+hardened in the fire. They all go naked, except a few who wear goat skins
+before and behind. They anoint their skins with goats tallow, mixed up
+with the juice of certain herbs, which thickens the skin, and defends
+them against the cold, of which they complain much, although their
+country is so far to the south. They have neither walled, nor thatched
+houses, but dwell in grottos and caverns of the mountains. They feed on
+barley, flesh, and goats milk, of which they have abundance, and some
+fruits, particularly figs. As the country is very hot, they reap their
+corn in April and May.
+
+We learnt all these things from the Christians of the four settled
+islands, who sometimes go over by night to the three other islands, and
+make prisoners of the natives, whom they send into Spain to be sold as
+slaves. Sometimes the Spaniards are themselves made prisoners on these
+expeditions, on which occasions the natives do not put them to death, but
+employ them to kill and flea their goats, and to cure the flesh, which
+they look upon as a vile employment, and therefore condemn their
+Christian prisoners to that labour in contempt. The native Canarians are
+very active and nimble, and are exceedingly agile in running and leaping,
+being accustomed to traverse the cliffs of their rugged mountains. They
+skip barefooted from rock to rock like goats, and sometimes take leaps of
+most surprising extent and danger, which are scarcely to be believed.
+They throw stones with great strength and wonderful exactness, so as to
+hit whatever they aim at with almost perfect certainty, and almost with
+the force of a bullet from a musket; insomuch that a few stones thrown by
+them will break a buckler to pieces. I once saw a native Canarian, who
+had become a Christian, who offered to give three persons twelve oranges
+a-piece, and taking twelve to himself, engaged, at eight or ten paces
+distance, to strike his antagonists with every one of his oranges, and at
+the same time to parry all theirs, so that they should hit no part of him
+but his hands. But no one would take up the wager, as they all knew he
+could perform even better than he mentioned. I was on land in Gomera and
+Ferro, and touched also at the island of Palma, but did not land there.
+
+
+[1] In Grynaeus, this person is called a patrician or nobleman of Venice,
+    and his surname is omitted.--Astley.
+
+[2] _Con Veuto da greco et tramantana in poppe_; literally, having a Greek,
+    and _beyond the mountain_ wind in the poop. The points of the compass,
+    in Italian maps, are thus named, N. _Tramontana_. N. E. _Greco_. E.
+    _Levante_ S. E. _Sirocco_. S. _Mezzoni_. S. W. _Libeccio_. W.
+    _Ponente_. N. W. _Maestro_.--Clarke.
+
+[3] This date ought to have been 1413.--Astl.
+
+[4] Barbot says eight leagues; other authors say more, and some less. It
+    is about twelve leagues to the north-east of Madeira.--Astl.
+
+[5] When Sir Amias Preston took this island in 1595, it abounded in corn,
+    wine, and oil, and had good store of sheep, asses, goats, and kine.
+    There was also plenty of fowl, fish, and fruits.--Astl.
+
+[6] From this account it seems to be an inspissated juice.--Astley. This
+    tree has probably received its name from the bark being like the
+    scales of a serpent. About the full of the moon it exudes a vermilion
+    coloured gum. That which grows on the islands and coasts of Africa is
+    more astringent than what comes from Goa. It is found on high rocky
+    land. Bartholomew Stibbs met with it on the banks of the Gambia river,
+    and describes it under the name of _Par de Sangoe_, or blood-wood tree.
+    The gum is a red, inodorous, and insipid resin, soluble in alcohol and
+    oils; and when dissolved by the former, is used for staining marble.
+    --Clarke.
+
+[7] The woods of Madeira are cedar, vigniatico, laurus Indicus, which has
+    a considerable resemblance to mahogany, barbuzano, chesnut, and the
+    beautiful mirmulano, and paobranco.--Clark.
+
+[8] This measure is said to weigh about thirty-three English pounds, so
+    that the quantity mentioned in the text amounts to 1850 quarters
+    English measure.--Astl.
+
+[9] I suppose he means at one crop. The quantity in the text, reduced to
+    avoirdupois weight, amounts to twenty-eight hogsheads, at sixteen
+    hundred weight each.--Astl.
+
+[10] In Clarke, this person is named Ferrero; perhaps the right name of
+    this person was Fernando Pereira, who subdued Gomera and Ferro.--E.
+
+[11] A species of moss, or lichen rather, that grows on the rocks, and is
+    used by dyers.--Clarke.
+
+[12] Other authors call the natives of the Canaries _Guanchos_.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage by Cape Branco, the Coast of Barbary, and the
+Fortia of Arguin; with some account of the Arabs, the Azanaghi, and the
+Country of Tegazza._
+
+Leaving the Canaries, we pursued our course towards Ethiopia, and arrived
+in a few days at Cape Branco, which is about 870 miles from these islands.
+In this passage, steering south, we kept at a great distance from the
+African shore on our left, as the Canaries are, far-advanced into the sea
+towards the west. We stood almost directly south for two-thirds of the
+way between the islands and the Cape, after which we changed our course
+somewhat more towards the east, or left-hand, that we might fall in with
+the land, lest we should have overpassed the Cape without seeing it
+because no land appears afterwards so far to the west for a considerable
+space. The coast of Africa, to the southwards of Cape Bronco, falls in
+considerably to the eastwards, forming a great bay or gulf, called the
+_Forna of Arguin_, from a small island of that name. This gulf extends
+about fifty miles into the land, and has three other islands, one of
+which is named _Branco_ by the Portuguese, or the White Island, on
+account of its white sands; the second is called _Garze_, or the Isle of
+Herons, where they found so many eggs of certain seabirds as to load two
+boats; the third is called _Curoi_, or Cori. These islands are all small,
+sandy, and uninhabited. In that of Arguin there is plenty of fresh water,
+but there is none in any of the others. It is proper to observe, that on
+keeping to the southwards, from the Straits of Gibraltar, the coast of
+exterior Barbary is inhabited no farther than Cape Cantin[1], from whence
+to Cape Branco is the sandy country or desert, called _Saara_ or
+_Saharra_ by the natives, which is divided from Barbary or Morocco on the
+north by the mountains of Atlas, and borders on the south with the
+country of the Negroes, and would require a journey of fifty days to
+cross,--in some places more, in others less. This desert reaches to the
+ocean, and is all a white dry sand, quite low and level, so that no part
+of it seems higher than any other. Cape _Branco_, or the White Cape, so
+named by the Portuguese from its white colour, without trees or verdure,
+is a noble promontory of a triangular shape, having three separate points
+about a mile from each other.
+
+Innumerable quantities of large and excellent fish of various kinds are
+caught on this coast, similar in taste to those we have at Venice, but
+quite different in shape and appearance. The gulf of Arguin is shallow
+all over, and is full of shoals both of rocks and sand; and, as the
+currents are here very strong, there is no sailing except by day, and
+even then with the lead constantly heaving. Two ships have been already
+lost on these shoals. Cape _Branco_ lies S.W. of Cape Cantin, or rather S.
+and by W. Behind Cape Branco there is a place called Hoden, six days
+journey inland on camels, which is not walled, but is much frequented by
+the Arabs and caravans, which trade between Tombucto,[2] and other places
+belonging to the Negroes, and the western parts of Barbary. The
+provisions at Hoden are dates and barley, which they have in plenty, and
+the inhabitants drink the milk of camels and other animals, as they have
+no wine. They have some cows and goats, the former being greatly smaller
+than those of Italy; but the number of these is not great, as the country
+is very dry. The inhabitants are all Mahometans, and great enemies to the
+Christians, and have no settled habitations, but wander continually over
+the deserts. They frequent the country of the Negroes, and visit that
+side of Barbary which is next the Mediterranean. On these expeditions
+they travel in numerous caravans, with great trains of camels, carrying
+brass, silver, and other articles, to Tombucto and the country of the
+Negroes, whence they bring back gold and _melhegette_, or cardamom
+seeds[3]. These people are all of a tawny colour, and both sexes wear a
+single white garment with a red border, without any linen next their skins.
+The men wear turbans, in the Moorish fashion, and go always barefooted. In
+the desert there are many lions, leopards, and ostriches, the eggs of
+which I have often eaten, and found them very good.
+
+Don Henry has farmed out the trade of the island of Arguin, under the
+following regulations. No person must enter this gulf to trade with the
+Arabs, except those who are licensed according to the ordinance, and have
+habitations and factors on the island, and have been accustomed to
+transact business with the Arabs on that coast. The articles of
+merchandize chiefly provided for this trade are, woollen cloth and linen,
+silver trinkets, _aldtizeli_ or frocks, and cloaks, and other things, and
+above all, wheat; and the Arabs give in return negro slaves and gold. A
+castle has been built on the isle of Arguin, by order of the prince, to
+protect this trade, on account of which caravels or ships arrive there
+every year from Portugal.
+
+The Arabs of this coast have many Barbary horses, which they carry to the
+country of the Negroes, which they barter with the great men for slaves,
+receiving from ten to eighteen men for each horse, according to their
+goodness. They also carry thither silken staffs of Granada and Tunis,
+with silver, and many other things, in return for which they receive
+great numbers of slaves and some gold. These slaves are brought first to
+Hoden in the desert, and thence by the mountains of Barka into Barbary,
+whence they are transported across the Mediterranean into Sicily. Part of
+them are sold in Tunis, and in other places along the coast of Barbary;
+and the rest are brought to Arguin, where they are sold to the licensed
+Portuguese traders, who purchase between seven and eight hundred every
+year, and send them for sale into Portugal. Before the establishment of
+this trade at Arguin, the Portuguese used to send every year four or more
+caravels to the bay of Arguin, the crews of which, landing well armed in
+the night, were in use to surprise some of the fishing villages, and
+carry off the inhabitants into slavery. They even penetrated sometimes a
+considerable way into the interior, and carried off the Arabs of both
+sexes, whom they sold as slaves in Portugal.
+
+Leaving Arguin we sailed along the coast to the river Senegal[4], which
+is very large, and divides the people called Azanaghi, or Azanhaji, from
+the first kingdom of the Negroes. The Azanhaji are of a tawny colour, or
+rather of a deep brown complexion, and inhabit some parts of the coast
+beyond Cape Branco, ranging through the deserts, and their district
+reaches to the confines of the Arabs of Hoden. They live on dates, barley,
+and the milk of camels; but as they border likewise on the country of the
+Negroes, they carry on trade with these people, from whom they procure
+millet and pulse, particularly beans. Owing to the scarcity of provisions
+in the desert, the Azanhaji are but spare eaters, and are able to endure
+hunger with wonderful patience, as a poringer of barley-meal made into
+hasty-pudding will serve them a whole day. The Portuguese used to carry
+away many of these people for slaves, as they were preferred to the
+negroes; but for some time past this has been prohibited by Don Henry,
+and peace and trade has been established with them, as he is in hopes
+they may be easily brought over to the catholic faith by intercourse with
+the Christians, more especially as they are not hitherto thoroughly
+established in the superstitions of Mahomet, of which they know nothing
+but by hearsay. These Azenhaji have an odd custom of wearing a
+handkerchief round their heads, a part of which is brought down so as to
+cover their eyes, and even their nose and mouth; for they reckon the
+mouth an unclean part, because it is constantly belching and has a bad
+smell, and ought therefore to be kept out of sight; even comparing it to
+the posteriors, and thinking that both ought alike to be concealed. On
+this account they never let their mouths be seen except when eating, as I
+have often had occasion to observe. They have no lords among them, but
+the rich men are respected somewhat more than the rest. They are of
+ordinary stature, and very lean, wearing their black hair frizzled over
+their shoulders like the Germans, and grease it daily with fish oil,
+which gives them a nasty smell; yet they consider this as modish. They
+are extremely poor, egregious liars, the greatest thieves in the world,
+and very treacherous. They have never heard of any Christians except the
+Portuguese, with whom they had war for thirteen or fourteen years, in
+which many of them were carried off as slaves, as has been already
+mentioned. Many of these people informed me, that, when they first saw
+ships under sail, which had never been beheld by any of their ancestors,
+they took them for large birds with white wings, that had come from
+foreign parts; and when the sails were furled, they conjectured, from
+their length, and swimming on the water, that they must be great fish.
+Others again believed that they were spirits, who wandered about by night;
+because they were seen at anchor in the evening at one place, and would
+be seen next morning 100 miles off, either proceeding along the coast to
+the southwards, or put back, according as the wind changed, or the
+caravels might happen to steer. They could not conceive how human beings
+could travel more in one night than they were able to perform themselves
+in three days; by which they were confirmed in the notion of the ships
+being spirits. All this was certified to me by many of the Azanhaji who
+were slaves in Portugal, as well as by the Portuguese mariners who had
+frequented the coast in their caravels.
+
+About six days journey by land from Hoden, there is a place called
+Teggazza[5], which in our language signifies a chest or bag of gold. In
+this place large quantities of salt are dug up every year, and carried by
+caravans on camels to _Tombucto_ and thence to the empire of _Melli_,
+which belongs to the Negroes. Oh arriving there, they dispose of their
+salt in the course of eight days, at the rate of between two and three
+hundred _mitigals_, or ducats, for each load, according to the quantity,
+and then return with their gold.
+
+
+[1] This is erroneous, as there are several towns on the coast of Morocco
+    beyond this Cape, as Saffia, Mogadore, Santa Cruz, and others.
+    Cape Cantin is in lat. 32°30'N. and the river _Sus_ in 30°25', which
+    is 140 miles to the south. There are no towns on the coast beyond that
+    river; but the northern limit of the _Sahara_, or great desert, is in
+    lat. 27°40', 186 miles to the south of the river _Sus_, and is surely
+    inhabited by wandering Arabs. Even the great desert, which extends 750
+    miles from north to south, almost to the river Senegal, is thinly
+    interspersed by several wandering tribes of the _Azanhaji_.--E.
+
+[2] Called Tombuto in the original, and Ataubat in Grynaeus.--Astl. Hoden
+    stands in an _ouasis_, or watered island, in the sea of sand, or great
+    desert, about lat. 19°20'N. and W. long. 11°40'.--E.
+
+[3] Under the general name of _Azanhaji_, which probably signifies the
+    pilgrims or wanderers of the desert, the Nomadic Arabs or Moors are
+    distinguished into various tribes; as Beni-amir, Beni-sabi, Hilil
+    Arabs, Ludajas, and Hagi; sometimes called Monselmines, Mongearts,
+    Wadelims, Labdessebas, and Trasarts; all named in their order from
+    north to south, as occupying the desert towards the Atlantic.--E.
+
+[4] In the text this river is named Senega, and its name probably
+    signifies the river of the Azanhaji. It Is called in Ramusio _Oro
+    Tiber_.--F.
+
+[5] The name of this place is explained as signifying a chest or bag of
+    gold. There is a place marked in the Saharra, or great sandy desert;
+    under the name of _Tisheet_, where there are salt mines, in lat. 17°
+    40' N. and long. 6° 40' W. which may possibly be Teggazza. The
+    distance of Tisheet from Hoden in our maps is about 375 miles E. S. E.
+    But there are other salt mines in the desert still farther to the east.
+    --E.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Of the Empire of Melli, and some curious particulars of the Salt Trade:
+Of the Trade in Gold: Of the, Azanhaji; and concerning swarms of Locusts_.
+
+The empire of Melli, of which some mention has been made in the preceding
+Section, is situated in an extremely hot climate, and affords very bad
+nourishment for beasts; insomuch, that out of an hundred camels which go
+from the desert into that country, scarcely twenty-five return; several
+even of the Arabs and Azanhaji, belonging to the caravans, sicken and die
+likewise every year. There are no quadrupeds kept by the natives of the
+country, as indeed none can live there for any time. It is reckoned to be
+forty days journey on horseback from Tegazza to Tombuctu, and thirty from
+thence to Melli[1]. Having inquired what use the merchants of Melli made
+of this salt, the traders of the desert informed me, that a part of it
+was consumed in that country, which lying near the line, where the days
+and nights are of equal length, certain seasons of the year are so
+excessively hot that the blood of the inhabitants would putrify, if it
+were not for the salt, and they would all die. They have no art or
+mystery in its use; but every one dissolves a small piece every day in a
+porringer of water, and drinks it off, which in their opinion preserves
+their health.
+
+The remainder of the salt is carried a long way in pieces on mens heads,
+every piece being as large as a man can well bear. As brought from
+Teggazza, the salt is in large pieces as taken out of the mine, each
+camel being loaded with two pieces, and the negroes break these down into
+smaller pieces, for the convenience of carrying them on their heads, and
+muster a large number of footmen for this yearly traffic. These porters
+have each a long forked stick in their hands; and, when tired, they rest
+their loads on these sticks. They proceed in this manner till they arrive
+on the banks of a certain water, but whether fresh or salt my informer
+could not say, yet I am of opinion that it must be a river, because, if
+it were the sea, the inhabitants could not be in want of salt in so hot a
+climate. The negroes are hired to carry it in this manner for want of
+camels or other beasts of burden, as already mentioned; and, from what
+has been said, it may easily be concluded that the number, both of the
+carriers and consumers must be very great. When arrived at the water side,
+the proprietors of the salt place their shares in heaps in a row, at
+small distances, setting each a particular mark on his own heap; and when
+this is done, the whole company retires half a days journey from the
+place. Then the other negroes, who are the purchasers of the salt, who
+seem to be the inhabitants of certain islands, but who will on no account
+be seen or spoken to, come in boats to the place where the heaps of salt
+are placed, and after laying a sum in gold on each heap as its price,
+retire in their turns. After they are gone, the owners of the salt return,
+and if the quantity of gold on their heaps is satisfactory to them, they
+take it away and leave the salt; if not, they leave both and withdraw
+again. In this manner they carry on their traffick, without seeing or
+speaking to each other, and this custom is very ancient among them, as
+has been affirmed to me for truth by several merchants of the desert,
+both Arabs and Azanhaji, and other creditable persons[2].
+
+On inquiring how it came to pass that the emperor of Melli, whom they
+represented as a powerful sovereign, did not find means, by friendship or
+force, to discover who these people were who would not suffer themselves
+to be seen or talked to, I was informed that this emperor, not many years
+ago, resolved to procure some of these invisible people, and held a
+council on the occasion, in which the following plan was devised and
+carried into execution. Before the salt caravan returned the half days
+journey from their salt heaps, some of the emperors people made certain
+pits by the water side, and near the place where the salt was left, and
+when the negroes came to deposit their gold on the salt, those who were
+concealed in the pits attacked them suddenly and took four of them
+prisoners, all the rest making their escape. Three of those who were thus
+taken were immediately set free by the captors, who judged that one would
+be quite sufficient to satisfy the curiosity of their emperor, and that
+the negroes would be the less offended. But after all, the design proved
+abortive; for though spoken to in various languages, the prisoner would
+neither speak or take any victuals, and died at the end of four days. On
+this account, the Melli negroes concluded that these other negroes were
+dumb; but others were of opinion, that being endowed with the human form,
+they must necessarily have the power of speech; but, that finding himself
+treated in this manner, so contrary to ancient custom, he refused to
+speak from indignation. This untoward result was much regretted by the
+negroes of Melli, because it prevented them from gratifying the curiosity
+of their emperor; who, on being informed of this persons death, was much
+dissatisfied, yet asked what manner of men the prisoners were. He was
+accordingly informed that they were of a deep black colour, well shaped,
+and a span taller than the natives of Melli. That their under lip was
+thicker than a mans fist, of a very red colour, and hung down on their
+breasts, with something like blood dropping from it; but that their upper
+lips were small, like those of other men. That the form of the under lip
+exposed their gums and teeth, which were larger than their own, having
+great teeth in each corner of their mouth, with large black eyes, and
+altogether a terrible appearance, as the gums dropped blood continually,
+as well as the great hanging under lip.
+
+This cross accident prevented all the succeeding emperors of Melli from
+making any farther attempt of the kind; because, from that time, these
+negroes forbore, for three years, from coming to buy salt as usual. It is
+believed that their lips began to putrify, through the excessive heat of
+the climate; and being no longer able to endure a distemper, of which
+some must have died for want of the effectual remedy which they had
+experienced from the use of salt, they returned of their own accord to
+traffic for that commodity in the old way. All this has established an
+opinion that they cannot live without salt; the negroes of Melli judging
+of the case of others by their own. As for the emperor of Melli, he cares
+not whether these blacks will speak, and be seen or not, so that that he
+has the profit of their gold[3]. This is all I could learn on this
+subject, which I think may be credited, as so many persons have vouched
+for its truth, of which I, who have both seen and heard of many wonderful
+things in this world, am perfectly satisfied.
+
+The gold brought to Melli is divided into three parts. One part is sent
+by the caravan which goes annually from Melli to _Kokhia_[4], which lies
+on the road to Syria and Cairo. The other two parts go first to Tombuctu,
+whence one of them goes by _Toet_[5] to Tunis and other ports of the
+Barbary coast, and the other portion is carried to Hoden, and from thence
+to _Oran_ and _One_[6], towns in Barbary, which are within the Straits of
+Gibraltar, and to Fez, Morocco, Arzila, Azafi, and Messa, towns on the
+African coast of the Atlantic, where the Italians and other Christians
+procure it from the Moors, in return for various commodities. Gold is the
+best and principal commodity which comes through the country of the
+Azanhaji, and a part of it is brought every year from Hoden to Arguin,
+where it is bartered with the Portuguese[7].
+
+No money is coined in the land of the _Tawny Moors_, or Azenhaji; nor is
+any money used by them, or in any of the neighbouring countries; but all
+their trade is carried on by bartering one commodity against another. In
+some of their inland towns, the Arabs and Azanbaji use small white
+porcelain shells, or cowries; which are brought from the Levant to Venice,
+and sent from thence into Africa. These are used for small purchases. The
+gold is sold by a weight named _mitigal_, which is nearly equal in value
+to a ducat. The inhabitants of the desert have neither religion nor
+sovereign; but those who are richest, and have the greatest number of
+retainers and dependents, are considered as chiefs or lords. The women
+are tawny, and wear cotton garments, which are manufactured in the
+country of the Negroes; but some of them wear a kind of cloaks, or upper
+garments, called Alkhezeli, and they have no smocks. She who has the
+largest and longest breasts, is reputed the greatest beauty; on which
+account, when they have attained to the age of seventeen or eighteen, and
+their breasts are somewhat grown, they tie a cord very tight around the
+middle of each breast, which presses very hard and breaks them, so that
+they hang down; and by pulling at these cords frequently, they grow
+longer and longer, till at length in some women they reach as low as the
+navel. The men of the desert ride on horseback after the fashion of the
+Moors; and the desert being everywhere very hot, and having very little
+water, and extremely barren, they can keep very few horses, and those
+they have are short lived. It only rains in the months of August,
+September and October. I was informed that vast swarms of locusts appear
+in this country some years, in such infinite numbers as to darken the air,
+and even to hide the sun from view, covering the horizon as far as the
+eye can reach, which is from twelve to sixteen miles in compass; and,
+wherever they settle they strip the ground entirely bare. These locusts
+are like grasshoppers, as long as ones finger, and of a red and yellow
+colour. They come every third or fourth year, and if they were to pay
+their visits every year, there would be no living in the country. While I
+was on the coast, I saw them in prodigious and incredible numbers.
+
+
+[1] The distance between Tisheet and Tombuctu, according to our best maps,
+    is about 560 miles E. and by S. In the same proportion, supposing
+    Tisheet to be Teggazza, the distance between Tombuctu and Melli ought
+    to be about 420 miles. Of Melli we have no traces in our modern maps,
+    but it may possibly be referred to _Malel_, the apparent capital of
+    Lamlem; see Pinkert. Geogr. II. 917, as laid down from the Arabian
+    geographers, nearly 1200 miles E.S.E. from Tombuctu.--E.
+
+[2] This story is probably a fiction, proceeding upon a trade of barter
+    between parties who did not understand the languages of each other.
+    The succeeding part of the story seems a mere fable, without the
+    smallest foundation whatever.--E.
+
+[3] Few persons, perhaps, will be disposed to think the credit of the
+    Africans, however positive, or the belief of the author, however
+    strong, sufficient evidence of the truth of this story. Yet it
+    certainly is a common report of the country, and not the invention of
+    Cada Mosto. Jobson, who was at the Gambra or Gambia in 1620, repeats
+    the whole substance of this story; and Movette relates the
+    circumstances of the blacks trafficking for salt without being seen,
+    which he had from the Moors of Morocco. He leaves out, however, the
+    story of the frightful lips. Every fiction has its day; and that part
+    is now out of date.--Astl.
+
+[4] Melli being itself unknown, we can hardly look to discover the
+    situation of Kokhia or Cochia; but it may possibly be Kuku, a town and
+    district to the N.E. of Bornou, which lies in the direction of the
+    text; or it may be Dar Kulla, greatly more to the S.W. but still in
+    the same track.--E.
+
+[5] In Grynaeus this place is called Ato. As in the direction of the
+    caravan from Tombuto towards Tunis, it may possibly be Taudeny, an
+    ouasis or island of the great desert, in lat. 21° 30' N.--E.
+
+[6] Called Hona in Grynaeus. What part of Barbary this name may refer to
+    does not appear. But the passage ought perhaps to run thus, "_to Oran
+    by the Mountain of Wan_," as there is a range mountains of that name
+    to the S. E. of Oran, which joins the chain of Atlas, or the Ammer
+    Mountains.--E.
+
+[7] This is the earliest account of the places from whence gold is brought,
+    and of the course of its trade through Africa, and thence into Europe;
+    and is even more particular and exact than any that has been given by
+    later authors.--Astl.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Of the River Senegal and the Jalofs, with some Account of the Manners,
+Customs, Government, Religion, and Dress of that Nation_.
+
+Leaving Cape Branco, and the Gulf of Arguin, we continued our course
+along the coast to the river Senegal, which divides the desert and the
+tawny Azanhaji from the fruitful lands of the Negroes. Five years before
+I went on this voyage, this river was discovered by three caravels
+belonging to Don Henry, which entered it, and their commanders settled
+peace and trade with the Moors; since which time ships have been sent to
+this place every year to trade with the natives[1]. The river Senegal is
+of considerable size, being a mile wide at the mouth, and of sufficient
+depth. A little farther on it has another entrance, and between the two,
+there is an island which forms a cape, running into the sea, having sand-
+banks at each mouth that extend a mile from the shore[2]. All ships that
+frequent the Senegal ought carefully to observe the course of the tides,
+the flux and reflux of which extend for seventy miles up the river, as I
+was informed by certain Portuguese, who had been a great way up this
+river with their caravels. From Cape Branco, which is 280 miles distant,
+the whole coast is sandy till within twenty miles of the river. This is
+called the coast of _Anterota_, and belongs entirely to the Azanhaji or
+Tawny Moors. I was quite astonished to find so prodigious a difference in
+so narrow a space, as appeared at the Senegal: For, on the south side of
+the river, the inhabitants are all exceedingly black, tall, corpulent and
+well proportioned, and the country all clothed in fine verdure, and full
+of fruit trees; whereas, on the north side of the river, the men are
+tawny, meagre, and of small stature, and the country all dry and barren.
+This river, in the opinion of the learned, is a branch of the _Gihon_,
+which flows from the Terrestrial Paradise, and was named the Niger by the
+ancients, which flows through the whole of Ethiopia, and which, on
+approaching the ocean to the west, divides into many other branches. The
+_Nile_, which is another branch of the Gihon, falls into the
+Mediterranean, after flowing through Egypt[3].
+
+The first kingdom of the Negroes is on the banks of the Senegal, and its
+inhabitants are called _Gilofi_ or Jalofs. All the country is low, not
+only from the north to that river, but also beyond it, as far south as
+Cape Verd, which is the highest land on all this coast, and is 400 miles
+from Cape Branco. This kingdom of the Jalofs, on the Senegal, is bounded
+on the east by the country called _Tukhusor_; on the south by the kingdom
+of _Gambra_ or Gambia; on the west by the Atlantic Ocean; and on the
+north by the river Senegal and the Azanhaji[4]. The king who reigned in
+Senegal in my time was named Zukholin, and was twenty-two years old. This
+kingdom is not hereditary; but for the most part, three or four of the
+principal lords, of whom there are many in the country, choose a king, in
+the event of a vacancy, but always fix their choice on a person of noble
+lineage, who reigns only as long as he gives satisfaction to these great
+lords. They often dethrone their kings by force; who, on the other hand,
+often render; themselves so powerful as to stand on their defence. This
+renders the government unsettled, and is productive of civil wars;
+similar to Egypt, where the Soldan of Cairo is always in fear of being
+killed or banished.
+
+The people are savages, and extremely poor, having no walled towns, and
+their villages are entirely composed of thatched cottages. They use
+neither lime nor stone in building, not knowing how to make the one, or
+to form the other. The kingdom of the Jalofs is small, and, as I was
+informed, extends only 300 miles along the coast, and about the same
+distance inland. The king has no settled revenue; but the lords of the
+country court his favour, by making him yearly presents of horses, which
+being scarce, are in high estimation, together with horse furniture, cows,
+and goats, pulse, millet, and other things. He likewise increases his
+wealth by means of robbery, and by reducing his own subjects, and those
+of neighbouring provinces to slavery, employing a part of these slaves to
+cultivate the lands which are assigned to him, and selling the rest to
+the Arabs and Azanhaji traders, who bring horses and other things for
+sale; as likewise to the Christians, since they have established a trade
+in these parts.
+
+Every man may keep as many wives as he pleases. The king has always
+upwards of thirty, and distinguishes them according to their descent, and
+the rank of the lords whose daughters they are. He keeps them in certain
+villages of his own, eight or ten in one place, each having a separate
+house to dwell in, with a certain number of young women to attend her,
+and slaves to cultivate the land which is assigned for her maintenance,
+which they sow and reap, and to tend her cows and goats. When the king
+comes to any of these villages, he brings no provisions along with him,
+as his women are obliged to support him and his retinue whenever he
+visits them. Every, morning at sunrise, each of his wives in the village
+where he happens to reside, prepares three or four dishes of various
+viands, such as flesh, fish, or other dainties, cooked in their fashion;
+which are carried by the slaves to the kings pantry; so that in less than
+an hour, thirty or forty dishes are provided, and when the king has a
+mind to eat, he finds every thing ready at his command. When he has eaten
+of such things as he likes best, the remainder is given to his retinue;
+but as this, diet is never very plentiful, they are but poorly fed. He
+travels about in this manner, from place to place, visiting his several
+wives, by which means he has a very numerous issue and whenever one of
+his wives happens to fall with child, he visits her no more. The lords or
+chiefs of the country live in a similar manner.
+
+These negroes profess me Mahometan religion, but are not even so well
+instructed in it as the tawny Moors, more especially the common people.
+The lords have always about them some Arabs or Azanhaji for this purpose,
+who inculcate on their minds that it would be disgraceful for men of
+their quality to live in ignorance of the laws of God, like the common
+people who have no religion. They have become Mahometans merely by means
+of their intercourse with the Azanhaji and Arabs; for since they became
+acquainted with the Christians, they are by no means so fond of the
+Mahometan faith. The generality of the negroes go quite naked, except a
+piece of goat skin before; but the lords who are able to procure such,
+wear cotton shirts, which are spun and manufactured by their women. Their
+webs are only a span in width, as they have not sufficient art to
+construct and use wider looms; so that they are obliged to sew five, six,
+or more of these webs together, when it is required to make any large
+piece of work. The shirts reach half way down the thighs, and have wide
+sleeves which; cover only half of their arms. They wear also cotton
+drawers, reaching to the small of their legs; and these drawers are made
+preposterously wide, being often thirty-five or forty palms in
+circumference; so that, when tied on, they are full of plaits, and though
+like A sack before the hinder part trails on the ground like the train of
+a large petticoat. Thus, though making a most ridiculous appearance, they
+think nothing comes up to their dress for elegance, and they often ask
+the Europeans if they ever saw a finer dress. Their women, both married
+and unmarried, go naked from the waist upwards, and wear a piece of
+cotton which covers them from the waist to the middle of the legs. Both
+sexes go barefooted, and have no coverings to their heads; and weave and
+tie their hair, though short, into neat tresses. The men often employ
+themselves in womens work, such as spinning, washing clothes, and such
+like employments.
+
+This country is extremely hot, the month of January being not so cold as
+it is with us in Italy in the month of April; and the farther we went to
+the south, the weather became so much the hotter. Both men and women wash
+themselves four or five times a-day, and are very cleanly in their
+persons; but are by no means so in regard of eating, in which they
+observe no rule. Although very ignorant, and extremely awkward in any
+thing, to which they have not been accustomed, they are as expert as any
+European can be in their own business, and in all things with which they
+are acquainted. They are full of words, and extremely talkative, and are
+for the most part liars and cheats. Yet they are exceedingly hospitable,
+and charitably disposed, as they will most readily give a dinner, or a
+supper, or a nights lodging, to any stranger who comes to their houses,
+without expecting any remuneration or reward. The chiefs of these negroes
+are often at war against each other, or against the neighbouring tribes
+or nations; but they have no cavalry, for want of horses. In war, their
+only defensive armour is a large target, made of the skin of an animal
+called _Danta_, which is very difficultly pierced; and their principal
+weapons are _azagays_ or light darts, which they throw with great
+dexterity. These darts are pointed with iron, the length of a span, and
+barbed in different directions, so that they make dangerous wounds, and
+tear the flesh extremely when pulled out. They have also a Moorish weapon,
+much-bent like a Turkish sword or cimeter, and made of iron, without any
+steel, which they procure from the negroes on the river Gambia, as they
+either have no iron in their own country, or want knowledge or industry
+in working it. Having but few weapons, or rather no missiles, their wars
+are very bloody, as they soon come to close quarters, and their strokes
+seldom fall in vain; and, being extremely fierce and courageous, they
+will rather allow themselves to be slain as save themselves by flight;
+neither are they disheartened by seeing their companions slain. They have
+no ships, nor had they ever seen any before the Portuguese came upon
+their coast; but those who dwell upon the river Senegal, and some who are
+settled on the sea coast, have _zoppolies_ or canoes, called _almadias_
+by the Portuguese, which are hollowed out of a single piece of wood, the
+largest of which will carry three or four men. They use these almadias
+for catching fish, and for transporting themselves up or down the river.
+The negroes of this country are the most expert swimmers in the world, as
+I can vouch from frequent experience of their dexterity.
+
+
+[1] Cada Mosto is incorrect in the chronology of this discovery, and even
+    de Barros is not quite decided as to the first discovery of the
+    Senegal. He says that Denis Fernandez _passed_ it in 1446, and that
+    Lancerot _discovered_ it in 1447; the latter of which is eight years
+    before the visit of Cada Mosto.--Clarke.
+
+[2] The northern mouth of the Senegal is in lat. 16° 40'. The southern in
+    15° 45', both N. so that the distance between them, or the length of
+    the island mentioned in the text, is about sixty-two miles.--E.
+
+[3] This fancy of all the great rivers in Africa being branches from one
+    principal stream, is now known to be entirely erroneous.--Astl.
+
+[4] Although the first kingdom, or kingdoms of the Negroes lies on the
+    Senegal, Senega, or Sanaghas, and others along the Gambia, yet there
+    were not properly any kingdoms of these names. On the north, indeed,
+    of the Sanagha, lay the country of the Sanhaga, Azanaghi, or Azanhaji,
+    from whence the river seems to have taken its name; but was divided
+    among various tribes of people, and not under any one sovereign.
+    Geographers, however, have since continued to propagate this first
+    error.--Astl.
+
+    The Jalofs and Foulahs inhabit the country between the Senegal and
+    Gambia, on which latter river the Feloops reside. What is meant by
+    _Tukhusor_ in the text does not appear, unless it may obscurely
+    indicate Karta.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage to the country of a King named Budomel, with
+some account of his Territory, and the Manners of his People_.
+
+Having passed the river Senegal, we sailed about 800 miles farther south
+along the coast, which was all low land without mountains, till we came
+to the territory or kingdom of Budomel[1]. As some Portuguese, who had
+dealt with Budomel, represented him as a very just person, who paid for
+any goods he might receive, and might therefore be confided in, I stopped
+at his country, that I might endeavour to dispose of some Spanish horses
+I had on board, which are in great request among the Negroes; besides
+which, I had some cloth, Moorish wrought silks, and other commodities for
+sale. We came, therefore to anchor, at a place on the coast, called Palma
+di Budomel, which is only an open roadstead, and not a port. I immediately
+dispatched my negro interpreter on shore to inform this lord of my arrival,
+and of the goods I had on board for sale. Not long afterwards Budomel came
+himself to the beach, attended by about fifteen horsemen and an hundred
+and fifty foot, and sent a message desiring me to land, with professions
+of a friendly disposition, and promising to render me every attention and
+service in his power. I went accordingly on shore immediately, and was
+received with great civility. After some discourse, I delivered to him
+seven horses, with their furniture; and every other article for which he
+expressed an inclination, all of which had cost me 300 ducats, trusting to
+his honour for payment, which was to be in slaves, and which he promised
+to deliver at his own residence, which was twenty-five miles distant from
+the shore, whither he invited me to accompany him. To this invitation I
+readily agreed, induced as much by a desire of seeing the country, as on
+account of receiving payment. Before setting out however, Budomel made me
+a present of a beautiful negress, about twelve years of age, who, he said,
+was meant to serve me in the cabin; and I received the gift, and sent her
+on board the caravel.
+
+I was furnished by Budomel with horses and every thing necessary for the
+journey; and when we arrived within four miles of his residence, he gave
+me in charge to his nephew Bisboror, who was lord of a small town or
+village at which we stopped. Bisboror took me to his own house, where I
+was treated with much civility and attention, during twenty-eight days
+which I tarried in that place. This was in November 1455. In that time I
+went often to visit Budomel, accompanied by his nephew, and had many
+opportunities to observe the produce of the country, and the manners of
+the inhabitants, more especially as, on account of the tempestuous
+weather, I was under the necessity of travelling back by land to the
+river Senegal. For, finding it impossible to get on board at the coast by
+reason of the surf, I had to order the ship to return to that river, and
+went there by land to re-embark. On this occasion, being very desirous to
+transmit instructions to those on board the ship to meet me at the river
+Senegal, I inquired among the negroes if any one would undertake to carry
+a letter from the shore. Several of them readily offered their services,
+though the ship lay three miles from the shore, and, owing to a strong
+wind, the sea broke on the shore with a tremendous surf, insomuch that I
+thought it impossible for any one to succeed in the attempt. Besides the
+surf, there were several sand banks near the shore, and other banks about
+half way to the ship, between which there ran a strong current, sometimes
+one way and sometimes the other, along shore, so that it was extremely
+difficult for any one to swim through without infinite danger of being
+carried away by the stream; and the sea broke with such violence on the
+banks, that it seemed quite impossible to surmount such complicated
+obstacles. Yet two of the negroes offered to go, and only demanded two
+_mavulgies_ of tin for each of them, one mavulgi being worth no more than
+a _grosso_[2], at which price they engaged to carry my letter in safety
+to the ship. I cannot express the difficulties which they encountered in
+passing the sand bank. They were sometimes out of sight for a considerable
+space, so that I often thought they were both drowned. At last, one of
+them, finding himself unable to resist the violence with which the waves
+broke over him, turned back; but the other, being stronger, got over the
+bank after struggling a whole hour, and, having carried the letter to the
+caravel, returned with an answer. This seemed to me very wonderful, and
+made me conclude that the negroes of this coast must be the most expert
+swimmers in the world.
+
+It has been already observed, that those who are called lords in this
+country have neither castles nor cities, the king even having nothing but
+villages with thatched houses. Budomel is lord of one part of this kingdom,
+yet his place of residence was not a palace, nor even a walled house.
+These great men are not lords on account of their riches or treasure, as
+they possess neither, nor have they any coin in use among them; but they
+are considered as such out of courtesy, and on account of the great
+retinues by which they are always attended, being more feared and
+respected by their subjects than any of the lords in Italy. Budomel has
+several villages appointed for his own habitation and that of his wives,
+as he never fixes in one place. The village in which I resided with
+Bisboror was one of his habitations, containing between forty and fifty
+thatched cottages, built near one another, and surrounded with ditches and
+strong pallisades, having only one or two passages left for entering; and
+every house had a court-yard, inclosed by a hedge. According to report,
+Budomel had nine wives in this place, and more or less in several other
+villages. Each of these wives had five or six young negresses to attend
+upon her, with all of whom he might sleep when he pleased, without giving
+offence to the wives, for such is the custom of the country. Both sexes
+are extremely amorous; and Budomel strongly importuned me for philacteries,
+in which he had been informed the Europeans were very expert, and offered
+any reward within his power for my compliance. They are very jealous, and
+suffer no man to enter the houses which are inhabited by the women, not
+even their own sons.
+
+Budomel is always attended by a retinue of at least 200 negroes, who are
+changed from time to time some going away and others coming back in their
+room; besides which, many people repair to wait upon him from the adjacent
+places which are under his government. Before arriving at his particular
+apartment there are seven large courts, one within the other, having a
+tree in the middle of each, where those wait who come to him on business.
+His family is distributed in these courts, according to their several
+ranks; the most considerable having their station in the court nearest his
+dwelling, and the meanest in the outermost court of all. Few people are
+allowed to approach his own particular apartment, except the Christians
+and Azanhaji, who have free admission and more liberty is allowed to them
+than to the negroes. This lord affects great state and gravity in his
+deportment, and does not allow himself, to be seen except an hour every
+morning, and for a short while in the evening; at which times he appears
+near the door of an apartment in the first court, into which only persons
+of note are permitted to enter. On these occasions of giving audience,
+every person who come to speak to him, however high may be his rank, is in
+the first place obliged to strip himself stark naked, except the small
+cloth in front formerly mentioned; and, immediately on entering the court,
+he falls down on his knees, bows down his head to the ground, and scatters
+dust with both hands on his own head and shoulders; neither is even the
+nearest relations of the lords exempted from this humiliating expression
+of their duty and obedience. The person, who receives an audience
+continues in this humble posture a great while, strewing himself with sand
+and crawling on his knees, till he approaches the great man; and when
+within two paces of his lord, he stops and begins to relate his case,
+still continuing on his knees, with his head down, and throwing sand an
+his head in token of great humility. All the time the lord scarcely
+appears to notice him and continues to discourse with other persons; and
+when the vassal has related his story, the lord gives him an answer in two
+words, with an arrogant aspect. Such is their affected pride and grandeur,
+and such the submission which is shewn him, which, in my opinion, proceeds
+from fear, as their lords, for every little fault they commit, take away
+their wives and children, and cause them to be sold as slaves.
+
+Budomel treated me with the utmost attention and civility, and used to
+carry me in the evenings into a sort of mosque, where the Arab and
+Azanhaji priests, whom he had always about his person, used to say prayers.
+His manner on these occasions was as follows. Being entered into the
+mosque, which was in one of the courts belonging to his residence, and
+where he was attended by some of the principal negroes, he first stood
+some little time with his eyes lifted up as if it were to heaven, then,
+advancing two steps, he spoke a few words in a low tone; after which, he
+stretched himself on the ground, which he kissed; the Azanhaji and the
+rest of his attendants doing the same. Then rising up, he repeated the
+same series of actions repeatedly, for ten or twelve times, which occupied
+about half an hour. When all was over, he asked my opinion of their manner
+of worship, and desired one to give an account of the nature of our
+religion. On this I told him, in the presence of all his doctors, that the
+religion of Mahomet was false, and the Romish the only true faith. This
+made the Arabs and Azanhaji extremely angry; but Budomel laughed on the
+occasion, and said, that he considered the religion of the Christians to
+be good, as God alone could have gifted them with so much riches and
+understanding. He added, however, that in his opinion the Mahometan law
+must be good also; and he believed, that the Negroes were more sure of
+salvation than the Christians, because God was just, who had given a
+paradise to the Christians in this world, and would certainly give one to
+the Negroes in the next, as they possessed scarcely any good in this world
+in comparison. In all his discourse he shewed a good understanding, and
+took great pleasure in hearing the customs of the Christians described. I
+firmly believe he might easily have been converted to Christianity, had it
+not been from fear of losing his power, as I was often told by his nephew,
+with whom I lodged, and he took great delight in hearing me discourse of
+our religion. The table of Budomel, like all other lords and people of
+condition in this country, is supplied by his wives, in the same manner as
+has been already mentioned in regard to Zukholin, the king of Senegal;
+each wife sending him a certain number of dishes every day. He and the
+other lords eat on the ground, without any regularity or company, except
+the Arabs and Azanhaji, who are their teachers and priests, and one or two
+of their principal negro attendants. The inferior people eat in messes of
+ten or twelve each, having a basket full of victuals set in the midst,
+into which all put their hands at the same time. They eat but little at
+one meal, but repeat these four or five times a day.
+
+
+[1] The text seems corrupted in giving so large a distance between the
+    Senegal river and this country of king Budomel, as 800 miles to the
+    south, or rather S. S. E. would carry us to what is called the _grain_,
+    or windward coast of Guinea, in lat. 6° N. and, from the sequel, Cada
+    Mosto does not appear to have passed Cape Verd till after quitting the
+    country of Budomel. According to Brue, as quoted by Clarke, the king
+    of Kayor or Kayhor was styled Damel. Kayor or Cayor appears on our
+    maps above an hundred miles up the Senegal, and on its north side,
+    which therefore can have no reference to the place in the text. I am
+    disposed to believe, that the distance in the text ought only to have
+    been 80 miles, and that the territory of Budomel was in the country of
+    the Jalofs, between the Senegal and Cape Verd, at the mouth of a small
+    river, on which our charts place two towns, Masaye and Enibaul, in lat.
+    15° 20' N.--E.
+
+[2] The grosso, or Venetian groat, is worth about three farthings.--Astl.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Account of the Country of Budomel continued_.
+
+On account of the great heats in the kingdom of Senegal, and all the
+other countries of the Negroes on the coast, no wheat, rye, barley, or
+spelt, can grow, neither are vines cultivated, as we knew experimentally
+from a trial made with seeds from our ship: For wheat, and these other
+articles of culture, require a temperate climate and frequent showers,
+both of which are wanting here, where they have no rains during nine
+months of the year, from October to June both included. But they have
+large and small millet, beans, and the largest and finest kidney beans in
+the world, as large as hazle nuts, longer than those of the Venetian
+territory, and beautifully speckled with various colours as if painted.
+Their beans are large, flat, and of a lively red colour, and they have
+likewise white beans. They sow in July, at the beginning of the rains,
+and reap in September, when they cease; thus they prepare the soil, sow
+the seed, and get in the harvest, all in three months; but they are bad
+husbandmen, and so exceedingly averse to labour, that they sow no more
+than is barely sufficient to last them throughout the year, and never lay
+up any store for sale. In cultivating the ground, four or five of them go
+into a field with spades, with which they turn up the soil about four
+inches deep; yet such is the fertility of the soil, that it makes ample
+returns for this slight culture, without any farther trouble.
+
+The liquors of the Negroes are water, milk, and palm wine, which they
+call mighol, or migwol, which is taken from a tree of the palm tribe,
+very numerous in this country, somewhat like the date tree, but not the
+same, and which furnishes this liquor the whole year round. The trees are
+tapped in two or three places near the root, and from these wounds a
+brown juice runs out, as thin as skimmed milk, into calabasses that are
+placed to receive the liquor, which drops but slowly, as one tree will
+only fill two calabasses from morning till night. This migwol, or palm-
+wine, is an exceedingly pleasant drink, which intoxicates like wine
+unless mixed with water. Immediately after it is drawn from the tree it
+is as sweet as any wine whatever; but the luscious taste goes off more
+and more as it is kept, and at length it becomes sour. It drinks better
+than at first after three or four days, as it depurates by keeping, and
+is not so sweet. I have often drank of it, indeed every day that I
+remained in the country, and liked it better than the wines of Italy.
+This liquor is not so abundant as that every one may have it at
+discretion; yet all may have some, especially the chiefs, as the trees
+are not planted in gardens, like vines and fruit trees in Europe, but are
+found wild in the forests, and are consequently accessible to all.
+
+In this country there are several sorts of fruit which resemble those of
+Europe, though not exactly the same, and which are very good, though they
+grow wild; and, were they to be cultivated as ours are, would prove much
+better than such as are produced in the northern climates, the quality of
+the soil and air in this part of Africa being more nutritive. The whole
+country is plain and fertile, abounding in good pasture, and is covered
+by an infinite number of large and beautiful trees, that are not known in
+Europe. It contains several lakes of fresh water, none of them large, but
+very deep, and full of excellent fish, which differ much from those that
+are caught in Italy, and many water serpents, which the natives call
+_Kalkatrici_. They use a kind of oil with their victuals, which tastes
+like oil of olives, has a pleasant flavour of violets, and tinges the
+food even better than saffron, but I could not learn what it was produced
+from[1]. There is likewise a plant which produces large quantities of
+small kidney-beans.
+
+In this country there are many kinds of animals, but serpents are
+particularly numerous, both large and small, some of which are venomous.
+The large ones are more than two paces long[2], but have neither legs nor
+wings, as has been reported by some persons, but some of them are so very
+thick as to have swallowed a goat at one morsel. These serpents retire in
+troops, as the natives report, to certain parts of the country where
+white ants are found in prodigious swarms, and which, by a kind of
+instinct, are said to build houses for these serpents, of earth which
+they carry in their months for that purpose, resembling ovens, and often
+to the number of 150 in one place[3]. The Negroes are great enchanters,
+and use charms upon almost all occasions, particularly in regard to
+serpents, over which they have great power. A Genoese, worthy of credit,
+who was in this country the year before my arrival, and who likewise
+lodged with Bisboror, the nephew of Budomel, told me he once heard a load
+noise of whistling about the house in the middle of the night. Being
+awakened by the noise, he saw Bisboror get out of bed and order two
+negroes to bring his camel. Being asked where he meant to go at that time
+of night, he said he had business which must be executed, but would soon
+return. On coming back after some time, and the Genoese expressing
+curiosity to learn the object in which he had been engaged, Bisboror
+asked if he had heard the hissing noise about the house during the night,
+and said that it had been made by the serpents, which would have killed a
+great many of his cattle, if he had not sent them back to their quarters
+by the employment of certain enchantments. The Genoese was astonished at
+this story, but Bisboror said he had no need to wonder at this small
+matter, as Budomed could do a great deal more extraordinary things with
+the serpents than he could. In particular, when he had a mind to envenom
+his weapons, he used to draw a large circle, into which, by means of his
+enchantments, he brought all the serpents of the neighbourhood, from
+which he selected those he thought most poisonous, and allowed all the
+others to go away. With the blood of these serpents, mixed up with the
+seeds of a certain tree, he infected his weapons with so deadly a poison,
+that, if they drew but the least drop of blood, the person or animal
+wounded by them was sure to die in a quarter of an hour. Bisboror farther
+offered to shew him an example of the efficacy of this art, but the
+Genoese declined witnessing the experiment. This story of the serpents is
+the more probable, that I have heard of persons in Italy who could charm
+them in a similar manner; but I am apt to believe that the Negroes are
+the most expert sorcerers in the world.
+
+The only tame animals in the kingdom of Senegal are oxen, cows, and goats;
+having no sheep, which love a temperate or cold air, and could not live
+in this hot climate. Nature, however, has provided mankind with
+necessaries fitted for their various occasions; having furnished the
+Europeans with wool, as they have need of warm clothing, while the
+Negroes, who live in such intense heat, have been supplied with cotton by
+the Almighty. Owing to the heat, in my opinion, the cattle of this
+country are much smaller than those of Italy. It is a great rarity to see
+a red cow in this country, as they are all black or white, or mottled
+with black and white spots. Beasts of prey, such as lions, leopards, and
+wolves, are numerous, and there are plenty of hares. Wild elephants go
+about in troops, like the wild swine in Italy, but can never be tamed, as
+they are in other parts of the world. As the elephant is a well-known
+animal, I shall only observe in general, that those of Africa are of a
+very large size, as may be easily conceived by the size of their teeth,
+which are imported into Europe. Of these large teeth, or tusks rather,
+each elephant has two in the lower jaw, the points of which turn down,
+whereas those of the wild boar are turned up. Before my voyage to Africa
+I had been told that the elephant could not bend its knee, and slept
+standing; but this is an egregious falsehood for the bending of their
+knees can be plainly perceived when they walk, and they, certainly lie
+down and rise again like other animals. They never shed their large teeth
+before death; neither do they do any harm to man unless provoked. In that
+case the elephant makes his attack with his trunk, which is a kind of
+nose, protruded to a great length. He can contract and extend this
+proboscis at pleasure, and is able to toss a man with it as far as a
+sling can throw a stone. It is in vain to think of escape by running, let
+the person be ever so swift, in case the elephant pursues in earnest, as
+his strides are of prodigious length. They are more dangerous when they
+have young ones in their company than at any other time; of which the
+females have only, three or four at a birth. They feed on the leaves and
+fruit of trees, pulling down the large boughs with their trunks, and
+bringing them to their mouths. This trunk is composed of a very thick
+cartilage, and is pliable in every direction.
+
+There are many kinds of birds in this country, and parrots are
+particularly numerous, which are much hated by the negroes, because they
+do much damage to their crops of pulse and millet. There are said to be
+several kinds of parrots, but I never saw more than two. One of these is
+like the kind which is brought into Italy from Alexandria in Egypt, but
+rather smaller. The other kind is much larger, having a brown head, neck,
+bill, and legs, with a yellow and green body. I procured a considerable
+number of both sorts, particularly of the smaller kind, many of which
+died; but I brought 150 back to Portugal, where I sold them for half a
+ducat each. These birds are very industrious in constructing their nests,
+which they build with bulrushes and the small leaves of the palm, and
+other trees, in a very curious and ingenious manner. Choosing the
+slenderest branch of a tree, the parrot fastens a bulrush of about two
+spans long to its outer extremity, at the depending end of which rush it
+weaves its nest in a most beautiful manner, suspended like a ball, and
+having only one passage for entering. By this means they contrive to
+preserve their young from being devoured by the serpents, as the small
+twigs from which the nests are suspended are unable to bear the weight of
+the serpents. There are likewise abundance of those birds called Pharaoh's
+hens[4] in Europe, which come to us out of the Levant. They have
+likewise other birds, both large and small, which are quite different
+from any that are known in Italy.
+
+As I was long on shore, I went several times to see their markets or
+fairs, which were held every Monday and Friday in a meadow, not far from
+where I resided. The men and women, from four or five miles around, came
+to this place with their various commodities, and those who lived at a
+greater distance, went to other markets nearer their habitations. The
+great poverty of the natives appeared manifest in the goods they brought
+to these fairs; consisting of small quantities of cotton cloth, and
+cotton yarn, pulse, oil, millet, wooden tubs, palm matts, and every thing
+else useful to life, according to their manners, likewise arms, and some
+small quantities of gold. Having no money or coin of any kind, all their
+trade was carried on by way of barter, or exchange of one thing for
+another, sometimes two or three things for one, according to their
+different values. All these blacks used to gaze on me, as if I had been a
+prodigy, having never seen a white man before. Some took hold of my hands,
+which they rubbed with spittle, to see if the whiteness was natural or
+artificial, and expressed their wonder to find that my skin was not
+painted. They were as much astonished at my dress, being clothed in the
+Spanish fashion, with a black damask waistcoat, and a cloak over it: They
+seemed much surprised at the waistcoat, and greatly admired the woollen
+cloth, which they had never seen any of before. My chief purpose in going
+to these fairs, was to see what quantity of gold was brought thither.
+
+Horses are very scarce, and of great value in the country of the Negroes,
+being brought all the way from that part of Barbary which lies nearest to
+Europe, by the Arabs and Azanhaji. Owing to the great heat, horses do not
+live long here; for they grow so fat that they cannot stale, and so burst.
+They are fed with bean leaves, which are gathered after the beans are
+brought from the fields; and, being dried like hay, are cut small, and
+given to the horses instead of oats. They give millet also, which
+contributes greatly to make them fat. A horse and his furniture sells for
+from nine to fourteen negroes, according to his goodness and beauty; and
+when a negro lord buys a horse, he sends for his horse sorcerers, who
+cause a fire to be kindled of the stalks of certain herbs, and hold the
+horses head by the bridle over the smoke, while they repeat over some few
+words by way of incantation. They afterwards have him anointed all over
+with fine oil, and having kept him eighteen or twenty days, without
+allowing any one to see him, they affix some Moorish charms to his neck,
+which have the appearance of small square billets of writing, folded up
+and covered with red leather; and affirm, that, they will go into battle
+with greater safety by means of these scrolls or annulets.
+
+The women of this country are very pleasant and merry, especially the
+young ones, and delight in singing and dancing, taking this diversion
+only at night by moonlight; and their manner of dancing is very different
+from that of the Italians. Many things in our ships seemed wonderful to
+the Negroes, particularly our cross-bows; but much more our artillery.
+When some of them were on board my ship, I caused one of the guns to be
+fired off, which threw them into a dreadful panic; and their terror was
+much increased on being told that one cannon-shot could kill an hundred
+men. On which account, they alleged that it must be something belonging
+to the devil. They were likewise greatly astonished at a bag-pipe, which,
+one of our sailors played upon to divert them; and, on examining the
+several parts and ornaments of the instrument, they conceived that it was
+a living animal, which sung in different voices. Observing their
+simplicity, I told them it was a musical instrument, and put it into
+their hand unblown to examine. They then perceived that it was a work of
+art, but believed that it was something supernatural, and could only have
+been devised by a superior being, it sounded so sweetly, and in so many
+different tones, having never heard any thing which could be compared to
+it in their estimation. The ship, also, and its various contrivances, as
+its anchors, masts, sails, and shrouds, afforded them great subjects for
+admiration and wonder. They looked upon the port-holes in the stern as
+real eyes, by which the vessel was able to find her way in the sea; and
+observed, that travellers on land found difficulty to find the road from
+one place to another, while we were able to travel along the trackless
+ocean; and that the whites must therefore be the greatest of sorcerers,
+not inferior to the devil himself. They shewed great admiration on seeing
+a lighted candle in a candlestick, having themselves no other artificial
+light but that proceeding from a fire. They have honey-combs, but when
+they find these, they suck out the honey, and throw away the empty comb
+as useless. At one time, I bought some honey-combs from a negro, and
+shewed him how to extract the honey; after which, on asking him if he
+knew what remained, he said it was good for nothing: But he was greatly
+astonished on seeing it made into candles, and lighted in his presence;
+saying, that the Europeans knew every thing. Their only musical
+instruments are two, one of which they have from the Moors, which is like
+a large drum[5]; the other is somewhat like a fiddle, having only two
+strings, which they play on with their fingers, but gives no sounds that
+can be called harmonious.
+
+
+[1] This is almost certainly palm oil, the origin of which will appear in
+    another division of this work.--E.
+
+[2] The text must be here erroneous, as two paces, or ten feet, will
+    scarcely suffice in describing the boa constrictor, sometimes near
+    thirty feet long.--E.
+
+[3] An account of the termites, or white ants of Africa, will appear
+    hereafter. The circumstance of serpents taking up their abode in the
+    large anthills, must be entirely accidental.--E.
+
+[4] Probably the Pintado, or Guinea fowl.--E.
+
+[5] This in Ramusio is called Tabacche, and Sambuka in Grynaeus.--Astl.
+
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage from Senegal, by Cape Verd, the river
+Barbasini, and to the river Gambia; and, returns to Portugal._
+
+Having seen a considerable part of the dominions of Budomel, and received
+the slaves which, were bargained for, in exchange for my horses and other
+merchandize, I resolved to proceed on my voyage, round Cape Verd, and to
+prosecute discoveries along this dangerous coast, and in particular, to
+go in search of the kingdom of Gambia or Gambia, which Don Henry had
+pointed out, on the information of a person who was well acquainted with
+the country of the Negroes, as not far from Senegal, and from whence, it
+was reported, that considerable quantities of gold might be procured.
+Longing to go in quest of this gold, I took my leave of Budomel, and
+repaired to the river Senegal, where I went on board the caravel and got
+under weigh, as soon as possible. Soon after leaving the river Senegal,
+as we were standing onward with a press of sail towards Cape. Verd, we
+descried, one morning two ships in the offing. On joining company, we
+found that one of these belonged to Antonio, an experienced Genoese
+navigator, and the other to some gentlemen in the service of Don Henry,
+and that they had sailed in company, with the intention of passing Cape
+Verd, to explore the coast beyond it, in search of new discoveries. Our
+intentions being similar, I offered to join company, and we accordingly
+proceeded together along the coast to the southward, in sight of land.
+
+We came in sight of that cape next day, being about thirty Italian miles
+from our last anchorage[1]. Cape Verd was so named by the Portuguese, who
+discovered it about a year before[2], because it is covered with trees
+which continue green all the year. This is a high and beautiful cape,
+which runs a considerable way into the sea, and has two hills or small
+mountains at its outer extremity. There are several villages of the
+Senegal negroes, or Jalofs, upon and about this promontory, which are
+composed of thatched cabins close by the shore, and in sight of those who
+sail past. There are also some sand banks, which extend about half a mile
+into the sea[3].
+
+Having doubled the cape, we came to three small uninhabited islands, full
+of green trees[4]; and being in want of water, we anchored at that which
+seemed the largest and most fruitful, in hopes of meeting with a spring,
+but could find none to answer our purpose. We met, however, with the
+nests and eggs of several kinds of birds, such as we had never seen
+before. This was in the month of July 1456, and we continued here all day,
+fishing with lines and large hooks, catching a prodigious number of fish,
+among which were _dentali_, and gilded fish[5], some of which weighed
+from twelve to fifteen pounds each. On the next day we proceeded in our
+course, keeping always in sight of land, and found a kind of gulf formed
+by the coast on the south side of the cape[6]. This coast is all low, and
+full of fine large trees, which are continually green, as the new leaves
+grow before the old ones fall off, and they never wither like those in
+Europe; and the trees grow so near the shore, that they seem to drink as
+it were the water of the sea. The coast is most beautiful, insomuch that
+I never saw any thing comparable to it, though I had sailed much both in
+the Levant and the western parts of Europe. It is well watered every
+where by small rivers, but these are useless for trade, as they do not
+admit ships of any size. Beyond this little gulf, the coast is inhabited
+by two negro nations, called Barbasini and Serreri, which are not subject
+to the king of Senegal, neither have they any king or lord of their own;
+but one person is more honoured than another, according to his condition
+or quality. They are great idolaters, without laws, and living in almost
+a state of nature, and extremely cruel, and refuse to become subjected to
+any lord. That their wives and children may not be taken from them and
+sold as slaves, as is the custom among all the negro nations which are
+under subjection to kings or lords, they use bows and poisoned arrows,
+the wounds from which are incurable, if even the smallest blood is drawn,
+and the wounded person or animal soon dies. Their colour is jet black,
+and their persons are well made. The country is full of woods, lakes,
+and streams, from which they derive great security, as they can only be
+invaded through narrow defiles, by which means they set the neighbouring
+lords at defiance. In former times, the kings of Senegal often attempted
+to reduce these two nations under obedience, but were always worsted,
+owing to the natural strength of the country, and their arrows. Running
+along the coast to the south with a fair wind, we discovered the mouth of
+a river about a bow-shot wide, but not deep, to which we gave the name
+of the _Barbasini_ river, and have marked it on the chart which I made of
+the coast, as sixty miles from Cape Verd[7]. In sailing along the coast,
+we only made sail at sun rise, having a man continually on the top, and
+two others on the prow or head, to look out for breakers, and always came
+to anchor at sun set, about four or five miles from the land, in ten or
+twelve fathoms water.
+
+Proceeding on our voyage in this cautious manner, we came to the mouth of
+a river which appeared to be as large as the Senegal[8]; and struck by
+the fineness of its appearance, and its rich woods which came down to the
+very shores, we cast anchor, and determined to send one of our negro
+interpreters on shore, to endeavour to establish a friendly intercourse
+with the natives. Every ship which sails from Portugal for the coast of
+Africa is supplied with some of these negro interpreters, who consist of
+slaves that had been sold by the lords of Senegal to the first Portuguese
+who touched on the coast, and who have learnt the Portuguese language and
+become Christians. These are hired from their masters in Portugal, who
+receive, for their hire, a prime slave from the cargo on returning from
+the voyage; and when any of these interpreters have thus earned four
+slaves for their master, they become free. Having cast lots to determine
+which of the three ships should send an interpreter on shore, it fell on
+the ship commanded by the Genoese gentleman; on which he sent an armed
+boat, ordering the men not to touch the shore, but to push off as soon as
+they had landed the interpreter; who was charged to inform himself
+respecting the condition and government of the country, and to inquire
+whether it produced gold or any other commodity worth coming for. No
+sooner was the interpreter landed, and the boat shoved off to some
+distance as ordered, than several natives came out of the wood, who had
+been in ambush, with bows, arrows, and other weapons, from the time they
+saw our ships approach the coast, as if they had been in hopes that some
+of our people might land upon the coast. After a short parley with our
+interpreter, they furiously assaulted him with their _gomies_, or short
+Moorish swords, and slew him; our people in the boat being unable to give
+him any assistance. This intelligence was brought to the ships, where it
+excited much surprise; and, concluding that these people must be
+extremely barbarous, who could treat one of their own race with so much
+barbarity, and would consequently use us cruelly if in their power, we
+immediately weighed anchor, and stood on our voyage farther to the south,
+which improved in the beauty and verdure of the trees as we advanced,
+always sailing within sight of the coast, which is everywhere low land
+covered with trees.
+
+We came at length to the mouth of a very large river, which is not less
+than six or eight miles wide at the entrance, and narrows a little way
+within to three or four miles, and finding that it could be safely
+entered, we determined to cast anchor for the night; and to endeavour to
+learn next day if this were the river and kingdom of Gambra, or Gambia,
+of which we were in search[9]. We judged, however, from its noble river,
+that we had now attained the so anxiously desired country of Gambia, and
+flattered ourselves in the hope of finding a country of vast riches,
+where we might make our fortunes at once, by returning laden with gold,
+and other rich commodities. Next day, having but little wind, we sent on
+the small caravel before, well manned, with directions, as their ship was
+small and drew little water, that they were to proceed as far as possible
+up the river, observing whether there were any bar or sand banks at its
+mouth, and to take the soundings with great care; and if the river were
+found navigable, they were to return and make signals to that effect.
+Finding four fathoms water at the entrance, the caravel brought to, and
+made the concerted signal; on which it was thought proper, as that
+caravel was small, to send another boat well armed along with her up the
+river, and they were strictly enjoined, in case the natives were hostile,
+to enter into no conflict with them, but to return immediately to the
+other ships, as the object of our voyage was to cultivate friendship and
+trade with the country, which could only be accomplished by policy, not
+by force. The boats accordingly proceeded up the river for two miles,
+leaving the small caravel at anchor, and found the banks everywhere
+beautiful, with sixteen fathoms water. But as the river above this made
+several returns or reaches, they did not think it prudent to venture any
+higher.
+
+When on their way back, they saw three _almadias_ or canoes near the
+mouth of a small river which runs into the large one. These almadias
+resemble the skiffs used in Italy which are called _zoppoli_, and are
+hollowed out of one large piece of wood. Although our boats were strongly
+armed, yet, in obedience to their orders, and for fear of being attacked
+with poisoned arrows, which the Negroes of Senegal had told us were used
+by all the natives of Gambia, they took to their oars, and made all
+possible haste back to the ship. By the time they got on board, the
+almadias, which followed them close, were within arrow flight. There were
+about twenty-five or thirty negroes in these three almadias, who stopped
+for some time gazing at the caravel, which was quite a new sight to them;
+but would neither speak nor come nearer, notwithstanding every endeavour
+by signs, to induce them to approach, and at length they returned to the
+shore. About three next morning, the other three caravels that had
+remained at anchor without the river, sailed with the rising tide and a
+light breeze, into the river, to rejoin the small caravel, and to proceed
+up the river, hoping to meet with a more civilized people than had been
+seen in the almadias. In this way we sailed up the river, one after the
+other, the small caravel leading; and when we had got about four miles up,
+we perceived ourselves to be followed by a number of _almadias_, without
+knowing whence they came. On this, we tacked about, and bore down towards
+the almadias, having first fortified ourselves in the best manner we
+could, to defend us against their poisoned arrows, and made every thing
+ready for battle, in case of need, though by no means well provided with
+arms. Our order of sailing was now reversed, and my ship was foremost in
+going down the river. We soon came to the almadias, which separated into
+two divisions, having my ship between them, when I had an opportunity to
+count their numbers, as they gave over rowing, raised their oars, and
+gazed in wonder at our ship: There were in all fifteen almadias of
+considerable length, having from 130 to 150 negroes, all well made, of a
+good size, and very black. They wore white cotton shirts, having white
+caps, like those worn by the Germans, on their heads; but with a wing on
+each side, and a feather in the middle, which I supposed to be a
+distinguishing mark of their being soldiers. There stood a negro on the
+prow of each almadia, having a round target, apparently of leather, on
+his arm; and for some time they neither attacked us, nor we them. When
+they saw the other caravels bearing down upon them, they dropped their
+oars, and taking up their bows, sent a flight of arrows on board. Seeing
+this attack, our ships discharged four pieces of cannon, at them, and
+they were so stupified by the report, that they threw down their bows,
+and stared about in amazement, at the effect which the stones from the
+cannon made on the water around them. They continued in this astonishment
+for some time; but seeing that the cannon ceased to fire, they plucked up
+courage, and renewed the fight, advancing within a stones throw of the
+ship. On this our sailors began to use their cross-bows; and the first
+shot, which was made by the natural son of the Genoese gentleman, hit a
+negro on the breast, who instantly fell down dead. Those in the almadia
+where he fell, took up the dart and gazed at it with wonder; yet they
+continued the attack with great vigour, and were courageously opposed by
+our caravels, insomuch that many of the Negroes were soon killed, without
+the loss of one man on our side. The Negroes now changed their mode of
+attack, and made a furious united attack on the stern of our smallest
+caravel, which was both ill manned, and insufficiently armed. On
+observing this, I brought up my ship to her assistance, and the other
+large caravel doing the same, we placed the small one between us, and we
+all vigorously plied our cannon and cross-bows against the almadias,
+which were at last forced to retire. We now linked all the three caravels
+together, and dropped one anchor, which was sufficient for us all, as it
+was calm weather, and the current by no means strong.
+
+We next endeavoured to enter into some conversation with the Negroes, and
+often hailed them by means of our interpreters. At length one of the
+almadias drew near, and on being asked the reason of their hostility to
+strangers, who came among them only to trade in a friendly manner, as
+they had already done with the Negroes of the kingdom of Senegal, and
+were desirous of being on the same friendly terms with them, if they
+thought proper, and were come from a far distant country, with presents
+for their king or lord, from the king of Portugal, who was desirous of
+peace and friendship with them. Our interpreters also entreated the
+Negroes to inform us what country we were in, who was their king, and
+what was the name of the river; and desired them to come freely on board,
+and take what goods they pleased; adding, that they might make a return
+in any commodities they thought proper, and in any quantities they
+pleased, or might have our goods for nothing. To all this they made
+answer, "That they had some intelligence of the Christians already, and
+of their dealings with the Negroes of Senegal, who must be very wicked
+people for entering into friendship with them; as they were well assured
+the Christians were meneaters, who bought the Negroes only to devour them,
+and, for this reason, they were resolved to have no correspondence with
+them, except to destroy them, and then to send their effects to their
+lord, who dwelt three days journey up the country." They added, that the
+name of their country was Gambra, but I have forgotten the name they gave
+the river[10]. At this time a brisk breeze sprung up, and, as we now
+thoroughly knew the hostile dispositions of the Negroes, we bore down
+upon their almadias; but they fled to the shore, and we dropt down to the
+mouth of the river.
+
+While we remained off the mouth of this river, we only once saw the north
+star in clear weather, and it was then so low as hardly to appear above
+the height of a lance above the sea[11]. We likewise observed, in about
+the same elevation, due south by the compass, a constellation of six
+large bright stars, in the figure of a cross, in this form:
+
+
+                               *
+                             * * * *
+                               *
+
+
+We conjectured this to be the _southern chariot_, but could not expect to
+observe the principal star, as we had not yet lost sight of the north
+pole. In this place, on the _first_ of July, we found the night to be
+eleven hours and a half long, and the day twelve hours and a half. The
+climate is always hot, and I was told, that even the rain in the inland
+parts falls warm, in consequence of the great heat of the air. It is true,
+that there is some difference of the heat at different seasons, and when
+the heat is a little diminished, the natives call it winter. The rains
+begin in July, and continue till the end of October, and fall every day
+about noon; at which time certain clouds arise in the N.E. by E. or E.N.E.
+which are accompanied by prodigious thunder and lightning, and vast
+torrents of rain. In this season, which is in the beginning of July, the
+Negroes sow their grain, in the same manner with the people in Senegal.
+Their provisions consist of millet, pulse, flesh and milk. There is not
+so much dawn at break of day in this southern latitude as with us in
+Italy; for, within half an hour after the darkness of the night begins to
+dispel, the sun appears, and during all that dawn the atmosphere is
+turbid, as if filled with smoke, and the moment the sun appears this mist
+is dissipated. I could only account for this phenomenon, by attributing
+it to the low and flat surface of this country, which is destitute of
+mountains, and my companions were of a similar opinion.
+
+On holding a consultation among the commanders of the three caravels, we
+came to a resolution of proceeding about an hundred miles up the river,
+in hopes of meeting with a less ferocious, and better disposed people in
+the interior, than those we had encountered at the mouth of this river:
+But the sailors were impatient to return home, without incurring any
+farther dangers, and unanimously and loudly refused their consent to our
+determination, declaring that they had already done enough for the
+present voyage. Upon this being made known to us, and being well aware
+that seamen are of headstrong and obstinate dispositions, we conceded to
+their clamours, and steered next day for Cape Verd, on our return to
+Portugal[12].
+
+
+[1] Cape Verd is about 100 miles from the southern mouth of the river
+    Senegal; so that the voyagers probably anchored every night within
+    sight of the scarcely known coast.--E.
+
+[2] This is erroneous, as it was discovered in 1446 by Denis Fernandez,
+    nine years before.--Clarke.
+
+[3] It is necessary to be cautious with respect to these early voyages,
+    which, having gone through various transcriptions and translations,
+    are liable to numerous errors. In our best charts, this sand bank,
+    intermixed with sunk rocks, extends two miles out to sea.--E.
+
+[4] Called the Birds islands, or the Magdalens.--Clarke.
+
+[5] In Ramusio these fish are called Orate vecchis, and in Grynaeus
+    Ostreas veteres.--Astl.
+
+[6] This appears to indicate the gulf between Cape Emanuel, near the isle
+    of Goree, and the Red Cape.--E.
+
+[7] The river named Barbasini is above eighty-five miles S.S.E. from Cape
+    Verd, measuring to its northern entrance, and forms a small island or
+    delta at its mouth, having another entrance about eighteen miles
+    farther south. There is a small island named _Fetti_, off its northern
+    entrance, of which no notice is taken by Cada Mosto. The natives on
+    this part of the coast, to the north of the Gambia, are now called
+    Barras.--E.
+
+[8] From the sequel, I am apt to conclude that this second river is the
+    Barbasini of our charts; and that the river named Barbasini in the
+    text of Cada Mosto, is that named _Joall_ in modern charts.--E.
+
+[9] Cada Mosto betrays strange ignorance of the previous discoveries of
+    the Portuguese, considering that he had resided some time with Don
+    Henry at Sagres. This fine river was discovered in 1447, nine years
+    before, by Nuno Tristan, who ascended it some way, and was slain there
+    by the poisoned arrows of the Negroes. Perhaps even Don Henry was
+    misled by the name of Rio Grande which it then received, and confused
+    the Venetian in his search for the Gambia.--Clarke.
+
+[10] From this it would appear, that Gambra or Gambia is the name of the
+    country, not of the river. Johnson says that the natives always call
+    it _Gee_, which merely signifies the river.--Astl.
+
+[11] The centre of the mouth of the Gambia is in lat. 13° 30' N.--E.
+
+[12] It may be noticed, that during the whole of his narrative, Cada
+    Mosto constantly speaks of Spain, and the Spanish language, as if
+    forgetting that the ships and crews were Portuguese.--Clarke.
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_The Second Voyage of Cada Mosto, in 1456, to the coast of Africa, in
+which the Cape de Verd Islands were Discovered_[1].
+
+As I could say little or nothing about the condition of the country of
+Gambia, on my return to Portugal, on account of being obliged to leave it
+so suddenly; partly owing to the intractable and fierce disposition of
+the natives, and partly through the perversity of our sailors, who
+refused to proceed in exploring the river; the Genoese gentleman, Antonio,
+who had been with me in the former voyage, and I, resolved next season to
+fit out two caravels, in order to return to the river Gambia, and Don
+Henry, who was much pleased with our intentions, determined to send one
+of his caravels along with us. Every thing being made ready for our
+voyage, we sailed from Lagos, near Cape St Vincent, with a favourable
+wind, in the beginning of May, and steered for the Canaries, which we
+made in a few days; but, as the wind continued favourable, we did not
+touch there, and continued our course, to the southward; and, as we were
+favoured by a current setting to the S. W. we sailed on at a great rate.
+At last we came in sight of Cape Branco, keeping well out at sea, and on
+the following night we were assailed by a great storm from the S. W.
+which occasioned us to steer W. by N. for two days and three nights, in
+order to weather the tempest, rather than turn back. On the third day, to
+our great joy and surprise, we descried land, being much astonished to
+discover land in a quarter where no person could have expected it[2]. Two
+men were immediately sent aloft, who cried out that two large islands
+were in sight. This news was communicated through the ships, to our great
+satisfaction, as we were sensible these islands were unknown in Portugal.
+Judging it probable that these islands might be inhabited, and eager to
+try our fortune, we steered towards one of them, which we soon came up
+with, and sailed round a part of it, till we found safe anchorage. The
+weather being now much calmed, we sent our boat on shore, well manned and
+armed. The men landed, and having examined some part of the island,
+brought back word that they could meet with no signs of inhabitants
+whatever.
+
+Next morning, to clear up all doubts, I sent ten men to land on the
+island, well armed with guns and cross-bows, whom I ordered to go to the
+top of some mountains within sight, and to look from thence, not only for
+people, but for more islands. These men executed my commands, but found
+no appearance of any inhabitants. They found, however, an incredible
+number of pigeons, which were so tame, being strangers to man, that they
+readily allowed themselves to be caught, and our people brought great
+numbers of them to the caravels. But, what was of much more importance,
+they brought intelligence of having discovered three other islands; one
+of which being to leeward, towards the north, could not be seen from the
+ships, while the other two lay to the south, all within sight of each
+other. These men likewise noticed something resembling islands towards
+the west, but at so great a distance that they could not be clearly
+distinguished, neither did I think proper to sail in that direction, lest
+I should lose time in visiting uninhabited islands, like this at which we
+had touched. The fame of my discovery of these four islands, brought
+other navigators afterwards to explore this group; who round them to be
+ten in number, both large and small included, and altogether uninhabited,
+except by pigeons and other birds, and having a fine fishery[3].
+
+Leaving the first island, we came in sight of the other two, and searched
+for an anchoring place near one of them, which was full of trees.
+Discovering the mouth of a river, and being in want of water, we came to
+anchor, and sent our boats on shore to supply our wants. Some of our
+people went a little way up the river, where they found some small lakes
+containing remarkably fine white salt, of which they brought large
+quantities to the ships, laying in what store was thought necessary, as
+we did likewise of water. We found here great numbers of tortoises, or
+turtle, the shells of which were larger than a target. The sailors cooked
+these into different dishes, as they had done before in the gulf of
+Arguin, where these animals are found in plenty, but not so large as here.
+Out of curiosity I eat some of the flesh of these tortoises, which seemed
+very good, having a good smell and taste, and was not inferior to veal.
+We salted a great number of them, which proved a valuable addition to our
+stock of provisions during the voyage. We caught likewise a prodigious
+quantity of fish, both off the mouth of the river and in the stream; and,
+though we knew not the kinds, they were large and well-flavoured. The
+mouth of this river is a good arrow-shot across, and it is deep enough to
+admit a vessel of 150 tons. We remained two days in this place for
+refreshments, taking in a good stock of tortoises and fish, and large
+quantities of pigeons, which we killed without number. To the first
+island at which we anchored we gave the name of _Bona Vista_, as being
+the first we got sight of; and to this other, which seemed the largest of
+the four, the name of St Jago, having cast anchor there on the day of St
+Philip and St James. Every thing being in readiness for pursuing our
+voyage, we took our departure from these islands, and shaped our course
+for Cape Verd. We arrived at _Spedegar_, and keeping within sight of land,
+we came to a place named the _Two Palms_, which is between Cape Verd and
+the river Senegal. Being perfectly acquainted with the coast, we doubled
+the Cape next day, and came once more to the river Gambia, into which we
+immediately entered; and, finding no opposition from the Negroes or their
+almadias, we sailed up the river, always by day, and continually sounding.
+Such of the almadias as we saw on the river kept at a distance, close to
+the banks of the river, and never ventured to approach. About ten miles
+up the river we cast anchor on a Sunday morning, at an island where one
+of our sailors was buried who had died of a fever; and as his name
+happened to be Andrew, we called it the island of St Andrew[4].
+
+Leaving this island we proceeded up the river, followed by some of the
+Negroes in their almadias, yet always keeping at a considerable distance.
+Our interpreters often hailed them, and shewed them various trinkets,
+which were offered for their acceptance, and endeavoured to entice them to
+come near, by telling them that we were good-natured civilized people,
+from whom they had nothing to fear. Wrought upon by these representations,
+the Negroes at length approached, and came up with my caravel; and at last
+one of them, who understood the language of our interpreter, came on board.
+He was greatly surprized at every thing he saw in and about the caravel,
+especially with the sails and rigging, having no other idea of moving a
+vessel on the water but by means of oars. He was no less amazed at our
+colour and dress, as his nation mostly go stark naked, or with a single
+white cotton shirt as their sole dress. We were exceedingly kind and
+attentive to this Negro, and made him many presents of trinkets, and other
+things of small value, with which he was much delighted. I asked him many
+questions respecting the country, through our interpreter, and at length
+learnt that we were in the country of Gambia, of which Forosangoli was
+chief lord; and, by what we could learn from him, the residence of
+Forosangoli was at the distance of nine or ten days journey, in a
+direction between the south and the southwest. He said that Forosangoli
+was tributary to the king of Melli, who is the great emperor of the
+Negroes; that there were many inferior lords, who dwelt near the river on
+both sides, and, if we pleased, he would conduct us to the residence of
+one of these lords, named Battimansa, and would endeavour to negociate a
+treaty of peace and friendship between him and us. Being much pleased with
+this offer, we carried this Negro along with us, and treated him with much
+attention; and, sailing up the river, we came to the place where
+Battimansa resided, which, in my opinion, was above forty miles from the
+mouth of the river. In going up the river, into which several lesser
+rivers fall, we sailed to the eastwards, and at the place where we came to
+anchor, we found it much narrower than at the mouth, being not above a
+mile in breadth, by our estimation[5]. On coming to this place, we sent
+one of our interpreters and the native Negro to Battimansa, with a present
+of a handsome garment, called an _alzimba_, made of Moorish silk, in the
+form of a shirt; and they were desired to inform him of the reason of our
+coming into his country, signifying, "That the Christian king of Portugal
+had sent us thither, to enter into a treaty of friendship and peace with
+him, and that if he had any call for our commodities, our king would
+supply him with them every year."
+
+As soon as our messengers had discharged their commission, Battimansa sent
+some of his Negroes to the caravel, with whom we entered into friendship,
+and bartered several things for Negro slaves and some gold; but gold was
+by no means to be had in any thing like the plenty we expected, from the
+account given of this country by the natives of Senegal, who, being
+themselves extremely poor, consider that to be a large quantity which we
+think very trifling. The Negroes value their gold as a very precious thing,
+even at a higher rate than the Portuguese, yet we got it in barter very
+reasonably for things of very small value. We continued here eleven days,
+during which the caravels were continually resorted to by great numbers of
+Negroes from both sides of the river, who came to see the novelties, and
+to sell their goods, among which there were a few gold rings. Part of
+their commodities consisted of cotton cloth and cotton yarn; some of the
+pieces being all white, some striped blue and white, and others again with
+red, blue, and white stripes, all very well wrought and coloured. They
+likewise brought civet for sale, the skins of civet-cats, monkies, large
+and small baboons of various sorts; and these last being very plenty they
+sold them cheap, or for something not exceeding ten _marquets_ in value,
+for each; and the ounce of civet for what was not worth more than forty or
+fifty marquets; not that they sold their commodities by weight, but I
+judged the quantity to be about an ounce. Other Negroes brought various
+sorts of fruit for sale, among which were many small wild dates, which
+they seemed to think much of, but which our people thought not good, as
+the taste was different from those of Europe: As for me, I would not
+venture to eat any of them, lest they might have given me the flux, or
+some other distemper. Our ships were every day crowded with people of
+different aspects and languages[6], and the natives were continually going
+up and down the river from one place to another, both men and women, in
+their almadias. They have no sails, and propel their almadias entirely
+with oars, which they use on both sides, all the rowers standing up. One
+man stands at the stern, who rows sometimes on one side, sometimes on the
+other, to keep the almadia steady in her course. They have no pins or row-
+locks to steady their oars, but hold them fast with both hands; their oar
+being a pole, like a half lance, seven feet and a half long, with a round
+board like a trencher fastened to one end, and with these they row with
+great safety and swiftness, in the mouths of their rivers, which are very
+numerous; but they seldom go out to sea, or to any distance from their own
+coasts, lest they should be taken by their neighbours and sold for slaves.
+
+
+[1] There is some difficulty respecting the date of this second voyage. In
+    the former, Cada Mosto sailed from Portugal in March 1455. In the
+    course of his proceedings, the month of November is mentioned, and
+    some subsequent transactions are said to have happened in July, which,
+    on this arrangement, must necessarily have been of the year 1456. If,
+    therefore, the dates of the former voyage be accurate, the second
+    ought to have been dated in 1457.--E.
+
+[2] This part of the narrative is involved in difficulty, and most be
+    erroneous. A storm from the S. W. off Cape Branco, almost in lat. 21°
+    N. and a N. W. course, could not possibly lead to the discovery of the
+    Cape Verd islands, almost six degrees farther south, and at least six
+    degrees farther west. This difficulty may be solved, by supposing the
+    storm from the N.E. and that the ships drove to the S.W. from off Cape
+    Branco.--E.
+
+[3] This passage alludes to the voyage of Antonio de Noli in 1462. And it
+    may be remarked, that de Faria, who mentions the discovery of these
+    islands by Noli, takes no notice of the actual discovery by Cada Mosto.
+    --Astl.
+
+[4] The editor of Astleys Collection considers this as having been St
+    Jameses island, which is about twenty miles up the Gambia: But there
+    is a small island near the northern bank, now called Charles I. which
+    exactly corresponds with the distance in the text.--E.
+
+[5] According to our best maps or charts of the Gambia, this river is
+    never less than four miles broad, and generally above five, till we
+    get near 100 miles up the river, to the reach which encircles the
+    Devils Point, where it still is two miles wide. It is possible that
+    the original journal of Cada Mosto may have had leagues of three
+    marine miles each, in which case the residence of Battimansa may have
+    been at or near the Devils Point, above 100 miles up the river.--E.
+
+[6] Though this country will be amply described in other voyages in our
+    Collection, it may be proper to remark, that both sides of the river
+    Gambia are inhabited by a mixed population of three nations, the
+    Feloops, Foleys, and Mandingoes, each of whom have their own separate
+    villages interspersed. This population is divided into many states,
+    lordships, or little kingdoms; as Joalli, Barrah, Kolar, Badibu,
+    Barsalli, &c. on or near the northern bank; Kumbo, Fonia, Kaen, Jagra,
+    Yamini, &c. on the southern.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Some Account of the Manners and Customs on the Gambia, and of the
+Elephant and Hippopotamus._
+
+It now remains for me to relate what I observed and was informed of
+concerning this country, during my short stay. The religion of the Negroes
+of Gambia consists of various kinds of idolatry; they place great reliance
+on sorcery and other diabolical things, yet all believe in God. There are
+many Mahometans among them, who trade to many countries, yet are not
+settled in houses, because the natives are ignorant[1]. They live very
+much in the same manner with the natives of Senegal, and have the same
+kinds of provisions; but they cultivate more sorts of rice. They eat dogs
+flesh, which I never heard of being used anywhere else. They are clothed
+in cotton garments, and have great abundance of cotton in their country,
+which may be the reason of the Gambians not going naked, as those of
+Senegal do, where cotton is very scarce. The women dress in the same
+manner; and, when they are very young, take great delight in delineating
+figures on their necks, breasts, and arms, with the point of a hot needle,
+which are never obliterated, and which resemble the flowers and ornaments
+which are wrought on silk handkerchiefs. The country is excessively hot,
+and the heat increases as we go to the south; besides which, we found it
+much hotter up the river than at sea, owing to the immense number of trees
+with which the country everywhere abounds. Some of these trees are of very
+great dimensions. Near a spring where our sailors were in use to fill our
+water casks, not far from the banks of the river, there grew an
+exceedingly large tree, but its height was by no means proportional to its
+thickness; for, though it measured seventeen cubits in girth near the
+ground, its height, by estimation, was only twenty paces. This tree was
+hollow, but the branches were very large, avid extended to a great
+distance, forming a thick and ample shade. But there were many other trees
+much larger than this, by which the richness and fertility of the soil may
+be easily conceived; and the country is intersected by numerous streams.
+
+There are many elephants in this country, but the natives are ignorant of
+the art of taming these animals, as is practised in other countries. One
+day, while we lay at anchor in the middle of the river, we observed three
+elephants come out from the wood and walk by the river side, on which we
+sent our boat with some of the people towards them, but they immediately
+returned into the wood. These were all I ever saw alive; but, sometime
+afterwards, Guumi-mensa[2], one of the Negro lords, shewed me a dead young
+elephant, which he had killed after a chase of two days. The Negroes hunt
+on foot in the woods, using only arrows and assagays, or javelins, which
+are all poisoned. When they hunt the elephant they conceal themselves
+behind trees, and even sometimes mount to their tops, leaping from one
+tree to another in pursuit of the elephant, which, being a large unweildy
+animal, is often wounded in many places before it can turn round, or place
+itself in a posture of defence; but, in an open field, no person dare
+attack one, nor could even the swiftest escape from their pursuit, as I
+have been informed by many of the Negroes. The teeth of this dead elephant,
+which was shewn me by Guumi-Mensa, one of which still remained in the jaw,
+did not exceed three spans long, which distinctly shews that it was quite
+young in comparison of those whose teeth are from ten to twelve spans in
+length; yet, small as it was for an elephant, we computed that the weight
+of its carcass was equal to five or six oxen. Guumi-Mensa made me a
+present of what part of this elephant I liked best, and gave the remainder
+to his huntsmen to feast on. Understanding that elephants flesh was eaten
+by the Negroes, I had some both roasted and boiled, of which I tasted,
+that I might be able to say that I had fed upon the flesh of an animal
+which had never been eaten by any of my countrymen; but I found it hard,
+and of an unpleasant relish. I brought one of the legs and a part of the
+trunk on board our caravel, together with some of the hair from its body,
+which was a span and a half long, of a black colour, and very thick. On my
+return to Portugal, I presented this hair to Don Henry, together with a
+part of the flesh salted up for that express purpose, which he received
+with much satisfaction, as it was the first of the kind that had been
+brought from the countries that were discovered under his auspices. The
+foot of the elephant is round, like that of a horse, but without hoofs;
+instead of which it is covered by a very thick, hard, black skin, and
+defended by five nails on the fore part, which are round and of the size
+of a _grossone_[3]. Though young, the foot of this elephant measured a
+span and a half in diameter. From the same Negro lord I received the foot
+of a full-grown elephant, the sole of which was three spans and an inch in
+diameter; which, together with a tooth of twelve spans long, I presented
+to Don Henry on my return, who sent it afterwards as a great curiosity to
+the Dutchess of Burgundy.
+
+In the river Gambia, and in other rivers on this coast, besides the
+_Calcatrici_[4] and other animals, there is one called the _river horse_,
+or hippopotamus, of the same nature almost with the sea cow, and which
+lives both on land and in the water. This animal is as large in the body
+as a cow, with very short legs and cloven feet, having a large head like
+that of a horse, and two huge teeth like the tusks of a wild boar, some of
+which I have seen upwards of two spans long. This animal, when it gets out
+of the river, walks on the land like any other fourfooted beast; and, so
+far as I know, was never before discovered by any Christian traveller,
+except perhaps in the Nile. We saw likewise a number of bats, or rather
+owls, upwards of three spans long; and many other birds, quite different
+from those of our country, both in appearance and taste, yet very good to
+eat.
+
+
+[1] The meaning of this expression is obscure. Perhaps it implies that
+    their Mahometan teachers had no mosques, because the Negroes were
+    ignorant of the means and method of construction. The knowledge of God
+    among the northern Negroes was assuredly due exclusively to the
+    Mahometan missionaries.--E.
+
+[2] Called Gnumi-Mensa in Grynaeus. According to Jobson, Mensa, or Mansa,
+    signifies a king in the Mandingo language.--Astl.
+
+[3] A Venetian silver coin, not exceeding a silver penny.--Astl.
+
+[4] This animal is nowhere explained. Perhaps the crocodile or
+    alligator.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage from the Gambia to the river Kasa-Mansa, Cape
+Roxo, the rivers of St Ann and St Domingo, and the Rio Grande._
+
+Having continued eleven days in the river Gambia, and many of our people
+becoming affected by acute fevers, we dropt down the river on the evening
+of the eleventh day, departing from the country of Batti-Mansa[1], and
+got out of the river in a few days, so stocked with commodities as to
+encourage us to proceed farther; and indeed, having been so far
+successful, and having a plentiful supply of provisions, and every thing
+necessary for prosecuting the voyage, we considered as incumbent on us to
+attempt some farther discoveries towards the south. We accordingly
+steered southwards with a favourable wind; but finding the land to run a
+considerable way to the S.S.W. from the mouth of the Gambia, to a certain
+point which we took for a cape[2], we stood out to the west to gain the
+open sea, the whole coast to the south of the Gambia being low, and
+covered with trees to the waters edge. On gaining an offing, we found
+that the beforementioned point was no actual cape or promontory, as the
+shore appeared perfectly straight on the other side; yet we kept at some
+distance out to sea, as we observed breakers for several miles out to
+sea[3]. On this account we had to proceed with great caution, keeping
+always two men at the head of the ship, and one in the main-top, to look
+out for shoals and breakers; and as a farther precaution, we sailed only
+during the day, and came to anchor every night. In this cautious progress,
+our caravels sailed always one before the other, having fixed the order of
+sailing by lot, and changed the leader every day, in order to avoid all
+disputes.
+
+At the end of two days sail in this manner, always in sight of land, we
+discovered on the third day the mouth of a river about half a mile wide[4],
+and towards evening we observed a little gulf or inlet, which we
+supposed might be the entrance of another river; but as it grew late, we
+came to anchor for the night. Next morning we sailed into this gulf, and
+found that it was the mouth of a large river, not a great deal less in my
+opinion than the Gambia, and both its banks were full of very beautiful
+tall trees. We cast anchor within the mouth of this river, and agreed to
+send two armed boats on shore with our interpreters to get intelligence
+respecting the country, according to our usual practice. This was done
+accordingly, and our interpreters, brought back word that the river was
+called Kasamansa, from a Negro lord of that name who resided at a place
+about thirty miles up the river; but who was absent from his residence,
+on a warlike expedition against the lord of a neighbouring territory.
+
+On receiving this intelligence, we sailed from this river next day,
+without attempting any traffic with the natives. This river of Kasamansa
+is twenty-five leagues, or 100 miles to the south of the Gambia[5].
+Standing on about twenty-five miles farther, we came to a cape which is a
+little more elevated than the rest of the coast, and as its front had a
+red colour, we named it Cape _Roxo_, or _Rosso_. Proceeding forwards, we
+came to the mouth of a pretty large river about a crossbow-shot wide,
+which we did not enter, but to which we gave the name of the river of St
+Ann. Farther on still, we came to the mouth of another river, not less
+than the former, which we named St Dominic, or St Domingo[7]; distant
+from Cape Rosso, by our estimation, between fifty-five and sixty miles.
+In another days sailing, we came to a very large river, which at first
+appeared to be a gulf, and was judged to be about twenty miles in breadth;
+but we could observe the beautiful trees on the south side, and it took
+us a considerable time to sail across to that side. On getting over to
+that side, we observed several islands in the sea, and as we wished to
+procure some intelligence concerning the country, we came to an anchor.
+Next morning two almadias came off to us from the land, one of which was
+as long as a caravel, and carried about thirty hands; the other was
+smaller, and was manned by sixteen Negroes. They came towards us with
+great eagerness; and, not knowing what might be their design, we took
+to our arms and waited their approach. As they drew near, they fixed a
+white cloth to the end of an oar, which they held up as a signal of peace,
+and we answered them in a similar manner. The Negroes then came alongside
+of our ships, the largest of the almadias coming up to the caravel in
+which I was. They gazed at every thing they saw, examining the form of
+the ship, the masts, yards, sails, and rigging with much attention, and
+they seemed astonished at seeing the white colour of our people. Our
+interpreters spoke to them, in order to learn the name of the country,
+but could not understand a word of their language, which was a great
+mortification to us, as we were obliged to leave the place without
+getting any intelligence; but we purchased a few gold rings from one of
+the Negroes, agreeing about the price by signs.
+
+Finding ourselves in a country where our interpreters were of no use, and
+considering therefore that it would be to no purpose for us to proceed
+any farther, we determined to return. We stayed two days in the mouth of
+this large river, which we therefore named Rio Grande[8], and where we
+found the north pole very low[9]. In this place we found great
+irregularity in the tides; for, whereas at Venice, and all other places
+in Europe, the flux and reflux are each of six hours continuance, the
+tide here only flows four hours, and ebbs eight, and the violence of the
+flowing tide is quite incredible, insomuch that we had great difficulty
+to stem it with three anchors a-head. Nay, such was its impetuosity, that
+we were sometimes obliged to hoist our sails, and even then it exceeded
+the force of the wind.
+
+Taking our departure from the mouth of this vast river, on our way back
+to Portugal, we directed our course to two large islands and some small
+ones, which lay about thirty miles distance from the continent, which we
+found quite low, yet full of large and beautiful green trees, and
+inhabited by Negroes[10]. Encountering here the same difficulty of
+intercourse, for want of knowing their language, we made no stop, but
+took our departure for Portugal, where we arrived in safety.
+
+
+[1] At this place Grynaeus calls him Batrinense; though he had named him
+    rightly Bati-mansa before.--Astl.
+
+[2] This is now called Cape St Mary.--E.
+
+[3] This seems to allude to what is now called Bald Cape, about twenty
+    miles south from Cape St Mary, and stretching somewhat farther west;
+    from which there extends breakers or sunken rocks a considerable
+    distance from the land.--E.
+
+[4] Between the mouth of the Gambia and that of the Casamansa, there are
+    three inlets, which appear to be smaller mouths of the latter river.
+    The most northern of these is named St Peter, the most southerly
+    Oyster river; the intermediate one has no name.--E.
+
+[5] The actual distance is barely a degree of latitude, or less than
+    seventy English miles. Cada Mosto probably estimated by the log, the
+    more circuitous track by sea.--E.
+
+[6] Cada Mosto does not mention the remarkable change which takes place
+    here in the direction of the coast. From the Gambia to Cape Rosso, the
+    coast runs direct south; after which its direction is E.S.E. to the
+    mouth of the river St Ann.--E.
+
+[7] Called in modern charts, Rio S. Dominica.--E.
+
+[8] According to de Faria, Rio Grande was discovered by Nunez Tristan in
+    1447, nine years before it was visited by Cada Mosto.--Astl.
+
+[9] Cada Mosto is exceedingly superficial in his account of the Rio Grande;
+    and it even seems dubious if he ever saw or entered this river, as he
+    appears to have mistaken the navigable channel between the main and
+    the shoals of the Rio Grande for the river itself; which channel
+    extends above 150 English miles, from the island of Bulam in the E.S.E.
+    to the open sea in the W.N.W. This channel agrees with his description,
+    in being twenty miles wide, whereas the real Rio Grande is greatly
+    smaller than the Gambia.--E.
+
+[10] These may be the island of Waring and the Marsh islands, at the
+    north-western entry of the channel of the Rio Grande, forming part of
+    the Bissagos islands.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+_The Voyage of Piedro de Cintra to Sierra Leona, and the Windward coast of
+Guinea; written by Alvise da Cada Mosto._
+
+The two voyages to the coast of Africa in which Cada Mosto was engaged,
+and which have, been narrated in the foregoing Sections of this Chapter,
+were followed by others; and, after the death of Don Henry, two armed
+caravels were sent out upon discovery by orders from the king of Portugal,
+under the command of Piedro de Cintra, one of the gentlemen of his
+household, with injunctions to proceed farther along the coast of the
+Negroes than had hitherto been effected, and to prosecute new discoveries.
+In this expedition, Piedro de Cintra was accompanied by a young
+Portuguese who had formerly been clerk to Cada Mosto in his two voyages;
+and who, on the return of the expedition to Lagos, came to the house of
+his former employer, who then continued to reside at Lagos, and gave him
+an account of the discoveries which had been made in this new voyage, and
+the names of all the places which had been touched at by Piedro de Cintra,
+beginning from the Rio Grande, the extreme point of the former voyage[1].
+
+De Cintra first went to the two large inhabited islands at the mouth of
+the Rio Grande which I had discovered in my second voyage, where he
+landed, and ordered his interpreters to make the usual inquiries at the
+inhabitants; but they could not make themselves understood, nor could
+they understand the language of the natives. Going therefore into the
+interior, they found the habitations of the Negroes to consist of poor
+thatched cabins, in some of which they found wooden idols, which were
+worshipped by the Negroes. Being unable to procure any information in
+this place, Cintra proceeded, in his voyage along the coast, and came to
+the mouth of a large river between three and four miles wide, which he
+called Besegue, from a lord of that name who dwelt near its mouth, and
+which he reckoned to be about forty miles from the mouth of the Rio
+Grande[2]. Proceeding about 140 miles from the river Besegue, along a
+very hilly coast; clothed with high trees, and having a very beautiful
+appearance, they came to a cape to which they gave the name of Verga[3].
+Continuing along the coast, they fell in with another cape, which, in the
+opinion of all the seamen, was the highest they had ever seen, having a
+sharp conical height in the middle like a diamond, yet entirely covered
+with beautiful green trees. After the name of the fortress of Sagres,
+which was built by the deceased Don Henry on Cape St Vincent, the
+Portuguese named this point Cape Sagres of Guinea. According to the
+account of the Sailors, the inhabitants of this coast are idolaters,
+worshipping wooden images in the shape of men, before which they make
+offerings of victuals as often as they eat or drink. These people are
+more of a tawny colour than black, having marks on their faces and bodies
+made with hot irons. They go almost entirely naked, except that they wear
+pieces of the bark of trees before them. They have no arms, as there is
+no iron in their country. They live on rice, millet, beans, and kidney
+beans, larger than ours; and have also beef and goats flesh, but not in
+any great abundance. Near to Cape Sagres there are several very small
+uninhabited islands.
+
+The inhabitants of this river have large almadias, carrying from thirty
+to forty men, who row standing, without having their oars fixed to any
+thing, as formerly noticed. They have their ears pierced with many holes,
+in which they wear a variety of gold rings. Both men and women have also
+a hole through the cartilage of the nose, in which they wear a gold ring,
+just like that of iron in the noses of our buffalos, which they take out
+when eating. The ladies belonging to the kings and great men, by way of
+extraordinary grandeur, have gold rings on other parts of their body,
+which decorum prevents us from particularizing.
+
+Passing Cape Sagres, they sailed about forty miles farther along the coast,
+and came to the Rio de San Vincents, which is about four miles wide; and
+about five miles farther they found another, which they called Rio Verde,
+larger at the mouth than the former[5]. Both of these rivers were so named
+by the sailors in the caravels. About twenty-four miles beyond the Rio
+Verde, they came to another cape which they called _Cape Liedo_,
+signifying the _cheerful_, because of the beautifully verdant country in
+its neighbourhood[6]. From Cape Liedo there extends a large mountain for
+about fifty miles along the coast, all of which is very high, and covered
+with tall verdant trees. At the end of this mountain, and about eight
+miles from the shore, there are three small islands, the largest of which
+does not exceed ten or twelve miles in circumference. To these the sailors
+gave the name of _Saluezze_[7]; and they named the mountain _Sierra Leona_,
+or the Lion Mountain, on account of the continual roaring of thunder on
+its summit, which is always enveloped in clouds.
+
+Proceeding beyond Sierra Leona, the coast was quite low, and the shore
+full of sand banks running out into the sea. About thirty miles from the
+southern extremity of the mountain, they found a river near three miles
+wide at the entrance, and because the water had a red colour, they called
+it Rio Roxo[8]. And farther on they found a cape, likewise of a red colour,
+which they named Cape Roxo[9]. And they gave the same name of Roxo to a
+small uninhabited island, about ten miles off at sea, where the north
+polar star seemed only the height of a man above the horizon. Beyond Cape
+Roxo, the sea forms a gulf, about the middle of which there enters a river,
+which the seamen called St Mary del Nievos, or of the snow, as having been
+discovered on the day of that Saint. On the other side of the river there
+is a cape, with an island close beside it[10]. This gulf is full of sand
+banks, running ten or twelve miles along the coast, on which the sea
+breaks with considerable violence, and has a strong current both in the
+ebb and flow of the tide; and the little island just mentioned is named
+_Scauni_, on account of these sand banks. Twenty-four miles distant from
+this river is a large cape called St Ann, having been discovered on the
+day of that saint; and the whole coast between is low, with very shallow
+water. Twenty-four miles beyond this cape is the river of _Palms_, so
+named from the abundance of these trees which were seen there. The mouth
+of this river, though of sufficient width, is so full of shoals; and sand
+banks as to render its entrance very dangerous. About seventy miles
+farther on, there is another small river called _Rio de Fumi_, or Smoke
+River; so named, because at the time of its discovery, they saw nothing
+but smoke along this coast, made by the Negroes[11]. Beyond this river,
+about twenty-four miles, there is a cape which runs a great way out into
+the sea, on which stands a high mountain, on which account it was called
+_Cabo del Monte_, or Cape Mount About sixty miles still farther on, to the
+S. E. there is another and smaller cape, on which is a small mountain or
+hill, which was named Cape _Cortese_, or _Misurado_. The first night after
+their arrival at this place, the voyagers saw many fires among the trees,
+made by the Negroes on seeing the ships, as they had never seen such
+objects before.
+
+About sixteen miles beyond Cape Misurado, there is a large forest of trees
+close to the shore, to which they gave the name of St Mary's Grove. The
+caravels came to anchor beyond this wood, and several almadias came off
+from the shore towards them. There were two or three naked negroes in each,
+having sharp pointed sticks in their hands, which our seamen supposed to
+be darts; some of them had small knives, and they had only two targets and
+three bows among them all. These Negroes, had their ears and noses pierced,
+from which hung some strange ornaments resembling human teeth. The
+interpreters spoke to them, but could not understand their language. Three
+of these Negroes ventured on board one of the caravels, one of whom was
+detained by the Portuguese, and the other two allowed to go away; for
+Cintra had been ordered by the king, in case of discovering any country
+where the interpreters did not understand the language, that he was to
+bring away one of the natives either by force or fair means, that he might
+be able to give an account of his country, either by some of the Negroes
+in Portugal happening to understand his language, or after he had acquired
+the Portuguese.
+
+Piedro de Cintra, having determined to proceed no farther, returned back
+to Portugal from Cape Misarado, to which he had traced the coast of Africa
+from the Rio Grande. Upon his return, this negro who had been detained off
+Cape Misurado, was examined by several Negroes, and at length was
+understood by a Negress who belonged to an inhabitant of Lisbon; not
+indeed by his own proper language, but by means of another which was known
+to them both. Whatever intelligence may have been procured on this
+occasion, was not made public, except that there were unicorns in his
+country. After this Negro had been kept for some months in Lisbon, and had
+been shewn many of the curiosities of Portugal, the king ordered him to be
+supplied with clothes, and sent him back in a caravel to his own country.
+But from that coast no other ship had arrived before my departure, which
+was on the first of February 1463[12].
+
+
+[1] For this exordium or introduction, we are indebted to the editor of
+    Astley's Collection of Voyages and Travels, said to have been a Mr
+    John Green. The infant Don Henry of Portugal died in 1463; so that
+    there must have been an interval of six or seven years between the
+    second voyage of Cada Mosto and this of Piedro de Cintra: Though de
+    Faria seems to put this voyage as having been executed before the
+    death of that excellent prince, yet Cada Mosto, who then actually
+    resided at Lagos, could not be mistaken is this important particular.--
+    Astl.
+
+[2] In a note to the second voyage of Cada Mosto, it has been already
+    noticed that he seems to have given the name of Rio Grande to the
+    channel between the Bissagos islands, or shoals of the Rio Grande and
+    the Main. This river Besegue, may possibly be the strait or channel
+    which divides the island named particularly Bissagos, or more properly
+    Bissao, from that of Bassis or Bussi. Yet, this river Besegue may even
+    have been that now called Rio Grande, in which, about twenty-four
+    leagues above its mouth, there is an island called Bissaghe.--E.
+
+[3] It is strange that the Rio de Nuno, close by this cape, the estuary
+    of which is not less than seven or eight miles wide, should be here
+    omitted; but the present voyage is very superficially narrated
+    throughout.--E.
+
+[4] The text is here obviously defective, as no river is mentioned before;
+    but the allusion must be to the river Pongo, Pongue, or Pougue, at the
+    mouth of which Cape Sagres is situated; indeed that cape seems to be
+    formed by one of the islands off the mouth of the river.--E.
+
+[5] There are a number of small rivers on the coast, between Cape Sagres
+    and Cape Tagrin, such as Tofali, Dania, Buria, Berrea, Tanna, Pogone,
+    Cagrance, dos Casas; but our modern charts have none named as in the
+    text on this part of the coast.--E.
+
+[6] This is now called Cape Tagrin, and forms the northern point at the
+    entrance of the Sierra Leone river, otherwise called the Mitomba or
+    Tagrin river. The southern point is named Cape Sierra Leone; and in
+    some maps is likewise named Liedo very improperly. It is necessary to
+    distinguish carefully between the _Cape_ of Sierra Leone, and the
+    mountainous ridge of the same name, which appears to extend a
+    considerable way along the coast to the S. E. near fifty miles, to the
+    river Kates, or Sa. Ma. della Neue. But, from the baldness of the
+    narrative, there is great difficulty in tracing out this voyage.--E.
+
+[7] These are now called Bananas islands, in lat. 8° N.--E.
+
+[8] Perhaps the Camaranca.--E.
+
+[9] Probably that now called Tassa Point, or Cabo de S. Anna.--E.
+
+[10] This account seems again to refer to the river Camaranca and Tassa
+    Point; otherwise called Cape St Ann; yet this cape is brought in
+    immediately afterwards. Indeed this voyage is inextricably confused,
+    probably incorrect or corrupt.--E.
+
+[11] The large island of Sherbro, with Sherbro Strand and Shoals, a very
+    prominent feature of this part of the African coast, is here entirely
+    overlooked; unless we suppose de Cintra to have gone on the outside of
+    that island, considering the sound as a river, and naming the N. W.
+    point of Sherbro island Cape St Ann.--E.
+
+[12] We have already seen that Don Henry died in this year, which must,
+    therefore, be here an error of the press, either in the original
+    publication by Cada Mosto, or in some of the after editions.--E.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+CONTINUATION OF THE PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES ALONG THE COAST OF AFRICA,
+FROM THE DEATH OF DON HENRY IN 1463, TO THE DISCOVERY OF THE CAPE OF GOOD
+HOPE IN 1486[1].
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Progress of Discovery from Cape Verga to Cape St Catherine; from the
+Death of Don Henry to that of King Alphonzo V_.
+
+After the decease of Don Henry, the illustrious father of maritime
+discovery, the progress of the Portuguese along the coast of Africa
+received a considerable check, as the military ardour of Alphonzo the
+Fifth was principally directed to the support of his pretensions to the
+throne of Castile, the circumstances of which are unconnected with the
+plan of this work. King Alphonzo was not however entirely inattentive to
+the trade for gold and slaves, which his illustrious uncle Don Henry had
+commenced with that part of Africa which is now called Guinea. The origin
+of this name of Guinea, or _Ghinney_, is unknown. It is not in use among
+the natives, and seems to have been imposed by the Portuguese from the
+appellation of _Ghenchoa_, given to a country on the south side of the
+Senegal, us first mentioned by Leo and afterwards by Marmol. Ever since
+the year 1453, as already mentioned, considerable importations of gold
+had been made to Portugal from the coast of Africa; but little or no
+progress had been made in extending the discoveries farther south, for
+some time previous to the decease of Don Henry. In 1470, King Alphonzo
+sailed with a considerable army, in a fleet of above 300 ships, and
+carried the strong fort of _Arzila_ on the Atlantic coast of Africa, a
+little way to the south of the Straits of Gibraltar. But of his military
+exploits in Africa, from which he acquired the appellation of _Africanus_,
+and assumed the additional title of _Lord of the coasts on both seas_,
+our present purpose does not call for any recital. In 1479, the disputes
+between the crowns of Portugal and Castile were compromised by a treaty
+entered into by Alphonzo V. king of Portugal, and Ferdinand king of
+Castile; by which the trade of Guinea, and the navigation of its coast,
+with the proposed conquest of _Fez_, were guaranteed to Portugal, and the
+Canary islands were annexed to the crown of Castile.
+
+From the want of any accurate history of the progress of the Portuguese
+discoveries, it is utterly impossible to determine the dates or
+circumstances of many of the progressive discoveries along the western
+coast of Africa, and of its islands. In 1469, Alphonzo farmed the Guinea
+trade for five years to Fernando Gomez, for the yearly rent of 500 ducats,
+or about 138 pounds; taking, him bound at the same time, to extend the
+discoveries for 500 leagues to the southwards during the period of his
+exclusive privilege. In 1471, according to Marmol, Juan de Santareu and
+Pedro de Escobar, discovered the _Oro de la Mina_, or the _Gold coast_;
+and advancing still farther, under the guidance of two experienced pilots,
+Martin Fernandez and Alvaro Esteves, they discovered _Cabo Catalina_, or
+Cape St Catherine, in lat. 1° 40' S. This promontory, which is thirty-one
+leagues to the south of Cabo de Lope Gonzales, derived its name from the
+day of the saint on which it was first seen, and forms the northern
+boundary of the great kingdom of Congo. The discovery of this cape is
+assigned by some writers to Sequiera, a knight belonging to the royal
+household.
+
+The celebrated Portuguese historian, Emanuel de Faria, in his _Asia
+Portuguesa_, has recorded all the Portuguese voyages, from their first
+attempts under Don Henry, to their developement of China and Japan, and
+has even left an account of all the ships that sailed from Lisbon for
+Africa and Asia, down to the year 1600; but was unable to ascertain the
+dates of many important events. Neither he nor De Barros have been able
+to remove the uncertainty respecting the first discovery of the island of
+St Thomas on the coast of Africa, the south end of which touches the
+equinoctial. During the remainder of the reign of Alphonzo, the line of
+coast, from Cape Verga in lat. 10° N. to Cape St Catherine in 1° 40' S.
+was much frequented by the Portuguese. Of this coast an ample account has
+been given by Dapper and Barbot, chiefly following a tract published by
+Gotard Artus of Dantzick, which is to be found in De Bry's Collection,
+and that of David von Nyendael and others. This was the work of a Dutch
+navigator, which was first translated in to German, and thence by Artus
+into Latin. But our peculiar department is confined to actual voyages and
+travels, and the progress of discovery; and it would both much exceed our
+proper limits, and would be an entire deviation from our plan of
+arrangement, to admit lengthened geographical and topographical
+disquisitions; which, so far as they are at all admissible, must be
+reserved for the more particular voyages and travels, after those of
+general discovery have been discussed.
+
+There are four principal islands in the Gulf of Guinea, or Bight of
+Biafra, as it is usually called by English navigators, Ferdinand Poo,
+Princes isle, St Thomas, and Annobon, the discovery of which have been
+related as follows by Barbot, and his account seems the most probable[2].
+Fernando Lopez discovered the first of these in 1471, in lat. 3° 40' N.
+giving it the name of _Ilha formosa_, or the Beautiful Island, which was
+afterwards changed to that of _Fernando Poo_, which it still retains. In
+an account of the kingdom of Congo, in Churchill's Collection, viii. 527,
+more properly named the Oxford Collection, or that of Osborne, v. 2. This
+island, and a river on the coast of the continent of Africa, directly
+east, now called Cameroon River, are said to have taken their names of
+Fernando Poo from their first discoverer. Some writers assign the
+discovery of these four islands, and that of St Matthew, to Fernando
+Gomez, who formed the Guinea trade. Perhaps they were discovered under
+his auspices, by the navigators whom he employed. This island is composed
+of very high land, easily seen at a great distance, and the Portuguese
+had formerly sugar plantations upon it. The _Ilha do Principe_, or
+Princes Island, in lat. 1° 30' N. was either discovered by Fernando Lopez,
+or by Santaren and Escobar, about the same period, and probably received
+its name in honour of the illustrious prince, Don Henry. This island is
+described as consisting of high table mountains, pyramidal at their bases,
+and visible at the distance of twenty leagues; being about nine leagues
+long by five leagues broad. It is said to abound in oranges, lemons,
+bananas, cocoa-nuts, sugar-canes, rice, many species of sallad herbs, and
+to be susceptible of producing the European grains. The mandioca, or root
+of the cassada plant, is generally used for bread, of which the juice
+while raw is said to be a virulent poison; while its meal, or rasped root,
+after the malignant juice is carefully pressed out, is used for bread.
+The inhabitants also, have sheep, hogs, goats, and an immense number of
+poultry; but these have probably been introduced by the Portuguese.
+
+The _Ilha de San Thome_, or island of St Thomas, which is said to have
+received its name from the saint to whom the chapel of the great
+monastery of _Thomar_ is dedicated, and to which all the African
+discoveries are subjected in spirituals, has its southern extremity
+almost directly under the equinoctial, and is a very high land of an oval
+shape, about fifteen leagues in breadth, by twelve leagues long.
+
+The most southerly of these islands, in lat. 1° 30' S. now called Annobon,
+was originally named Ilha d'Anno Bueno, or Island of the Happy Year,
+having been discovered by Pedro d'Escovar, on the first day of the year
+1472. At a distance, this island has the appearance of a single high
+mountain, and is almost always topt with mist. It extends about five
+leagues from north to south, or rather from N. N. W. to S. S. E. and is
+about four leagues broad, being environed by several rocks and shoals. It
+has several fertile vallies, which produce maize, rice, millet, potatoes,
+yams, bananas, pine-apples, citrons, oranges, lemons, figs, and tamarinds,
+and a sort of small nuts called by the French _noix de medicine_, or
+physic nuts[3]. It also furnishes oxen, hogs, and sheep, with abundance
+of fish and poultry; and its cotton is accounted excellent.
+
+Including the voyages of Cada Mosto and Pedro de Cintra, which have been
+already detailed, as possibly within the period which elapsed between the
+death of Don Henry in 1463, and King Alphonzo, which latter event took
+place on the 28th August 1481, and the detached fragments of discovery
+related in the present Section, we have been only able to trace a faint
+outline of the uncertain progress of Portuguese discovery during that
+period of eighteen years, extending, as already mentioned, to Cape St
+Catherine and the island of Annobon. A considerable advance, therefore,
+had been made since the lamented death of the illustrious Don Henry;
+which comprehended the whole coast of Guinea, with its two gulfs, usually
+named the _Bights_ of Benin and Biafra, with the adjacent islands, and
+extending to the northern frontier of the kingdom of Congo[4]. If the
+following assertion of de Barros could be relied on, we might conclude
+that some nameless Portuguese navigators had crossed the line even before
+the death of Don Henry; but the high probability is, that the naval
+pupils of that illustrious prince continued to use his impress upon their
+discoveries, long after his decease, and that the limits of discovery in
+his time was confined to Cape Vergas. Some Castilians, sailing under the
+command of Garcia de Loaysa, a knight of Malta, landed in 1525 on the
+island of St Matthew, in two degrees of southern latitude[5]. They here
+observed that it had been formerly visited by the Portuguese, as they
+found an inscription on the bark of a tree, implying that they had been
+there eighty-seven years before[6]. It also bore the usual motto of
+that prince, _talent de bien faire_.
+
+In the paucity of authentic information respecting these discoveries, it
+seems proper to insert the following abstract of the journal of a
+Portuguese pilot to the island of St Thomas, as inserted by Ramusio,
+previous to the voyage of Vasco de Gama, but of uncertain date; although,
+in the opinion of the ingenious author of the Progress of Maritime
+Discover, this voyage seems to have been performed between the years 1520
+and 1540. In this, state of uncertainty, it is therefore made a section
+by itself, detached in some measure from the regular series of the
+Portuguese discoveries.
+
+
+[1] Astley, I. 15. Clarke, I. 290. Purchas, I. Harris, I. 664.
+
+[2] Clarke, I. 295.
+
+[3] These may possibly be the nuts of the Ricinus Palma Christi, from
+    which the castor oil is extracted.--E.
+
+[4] Strictly speaking the northern limits of Loango, one of the divisions
+    of the extensive kingdom of Congo, is at the Sette river, ten leagues
+    S.S. E. from Cape St Catherine.--E.
+
+[5] There is no island of that name in this position; so that the island
+    of St Matthew of de Barros must refer to Annobon.--E.
+
+[6] These dates would throw back the discovery of this island, and the
+    passage of the line by the mariners of Don Henry, to the year 1438, at
+    a time when they had not reached the latitude of 25° N. which is quite
+    absurd.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+Voyage of a Portuguese Pilot from Lisbon to the Island of St Thomas[1].
+
+Before I left Venice, I was requested by letter from Signior Hieronimo
+Fracastro of Verona, that, on my arrival at Conde, I would send, him an
+account of my voyage to San Thome, to which island our ships often sail
+for cargoes of sugar. The passage of the equinoctial line, under which
+that island, is situated, appeared to that gentleman so extraordinary a
+circumstance as to merit the attention of men of science; and you
+likewise made me a similar request. I began, therefore, immediately after
+my return, to draw up an account of my voyage, from those notes which we
+pilots usual keep of all occurrences, and I compared it in my progress
+with the journals of some friends who had formerly made the same voyage.
+When I afterwards attentively perused my manuscript, it did not appear to
+me worthy of being communicated to a gentleman of such scientific
+character as Signor Hieronimo, whose talents I had duly appreciated, by
+the perusal of his publications, which I received from you before my
+departure from Venice. I therefore laid my manuscript aside, not wishing
+that any one might peruse it; but as you have again urged the performance
+of my promise, I now anxiously obey a request, which, as coming from you,
+I must always consider a command. Apprehensive, likewise, of appearing
+forgetful of your polite attentions, I prefer the danger of exposing my
+ignorance, to the possibility of being charged with ingratitude or want
+of attention. Being a sailor, and unused to composition, I pretend to
+little more than copying the remarks of those who have sailed from our
+continent to _Ethiopia_, without attempting to reduce my narrative into
+lucid order, or to embellish it with fine writing. You will therefore
+have the goodness to destroy this account, after its perusal, that the
+errors I have committed, by compliance with your commands, may not draw
+upon me the imputation of presumption.
+
+The Portuguese ships which sail to the island of St Thomas from Lisbon,
+for cargoes of sugar, usually put to sea in February, though some vessels
+make this voyage at every period of the year. Their course is S.S.W.
+until they reach the Canary Islands; after which they steer for the
+island of Palmas, which is opposite to Cape Bojador on the coast of
+Africa, and is about ninety leagues from the kingdom of Castile. This
+island has plenty of provisions, and abounds in wine and sugar. The north-
+west wind prevails most, and a great sea rages continually on its coast,
+particularly in the month of December[2].
+
+If the ships which are bound for the island of St Thomas find it
+necessary to obtain a quantity of salt after having taken on board a
+sufficient supply at the island of _Sal_, they steer for the coast of
+Africa at the Rio del Oro; and, if they have calm weather and a smooth
+sea; they catch as many fish in four hours, with hooks and lines, as may
+suffice for all their wants during the remainder of the voyage. But, if
+the weather is unfavourable for fishing at the Rio del Oro, they proceed
+along the coast to Cape Branco; and thence along the coast to the island
+of Arguin. The principal sorts of fish on this coast are _pagros_, called
+_albani_ by the Venetians; likewise _corvi_ and _oneros_, which latter
+are only a larger and darker-coloured species of _pagros_. As soon as
+taken, the fish are opened and salted, and serve as an excellent supply
+of provisions to navigators. All the coast of Africa, from Cape Bojador,
+otherwise called _Cabo della Volta_, as far as Cape Branco and even to
+Arguin, is low and sandy. At Arguin, which is inhabited by Moors and
+Negroes, and which is situated on the confines between these two nations,
+there is a capacious harbour, and a castle belonging to our king of
+Portugal, in which some Portuguese always reside with the royal agent.
+
+On leaving the island of Sal, our ships steer next for St Jago, another
+of the Cape Verd islands. This island is situated in _fifteen degrees on
+the equinoctial and thirty leagues towards the south_[3].It is seventeen
+leagues long, and has a city on the coast, with a good harbour called
+_Ribiera Grande_, or the Great River, now St Jago. From two high
+mountains, one on each side, a large river of fresh water flows into the
+harbour; and, from its source, full two leagues above the city, its banks
+are lined on each side with gardens, having fine groves of oranges,
+cedars, pomegranates, several sorts of figs, and the cocoa-nut palm,
+which has been long planted on this island. It produces all kinds of
+vegetables in great abundance and perfection; but they do not afford good
+seeds, so that it is necessary to procure these every year from Europe.
+The city is on the south coast of the island, and is well built of stone,
+being inhabited by about 500 families of distinction, Portuguese and
+Castilians. Its government is entrusted to a corregidor or governor,
+appointed by the king of Portugal; and two judges are chosen annually,
+one for the determination of naval and maritime causes, and the other for
+regulating the police. This island is very mountainous, and is very
+barren in many parts, which are entirely destitute of wood; but its
+vallies are fertile and well cultivated. In June, when the sun enters
+Cancer, the rains are so incessant that the Portuguese call that month
+_La Luna de las Aquas_, or the Water Month. Their seed-time begins in
+August, when they sow maize, called _miglio zaburo_. This is a white bean,
+which is ready to be gathered in forty days, and is the chief food of
+these islanders, and of all the inhabitants of the coast of Africa[4].
+They also sow much rice and cotton; the latter of which comes to great
+perfection, and is manufactured into striped cloths, which are exported
+to the country of the Negroes, and bartered for black slaves.
+
+To give a distinct view of the commercial transactions with the Negroes,
+it is proper to inform you, that the western coast of Africa is divided
+into several countries and provinces, as Guinea, _Melegote_[5], the
+kingdom of Benin, and the kingdom of Manicongo. Over all this extent of
+coast, there are many Negro kings or chiefs, whose subjects are
+Mahometans and idolaters, and who are continually at war with each other.
+These kings are much respected by their subjects, almost to adoration, as
+they are believed to have originally descended from heaven. When the king
+of Benin dies, his subjects assemble in an extensive plain, in the centre
+of which a vast pit or sepulchre is dug, into which the body is lowered,
+and all the friends and servants of the deceased are sacrificed and
+thrown into the same grave, thus voluntarily throwing away their own
+lives in honour of the dead. On this coast there grows a species of
+_melegete_, extremely pungent like pepper, and resembling the Italian
+grain called _sorgo_. It produces likewise a species of pepper of great
+strength, not inferior to any of that which the Portuguese bring from
+Calicut, under the name of _Pimienta del rabo_, or _Pepe dalla coda_, and
+which African pepper resembles _cubbebs_, but so powerful that an ounce
+will go farther than a pound of the common sort; but its exportation is
+prohibited, lest it should injure the sale of that which is brought from
+Calicut[6]. There is also established on this coast a manufacture of an
+excellent kind of soap from palm-oil and ashes, which is carried on for
+the king's account. All the trade of this coast, to the kingdom of
+_Manicongo_ exclusively, is farmed out every four or five years to the
+highest bidder. Great Negro caravans bring gold and slaves to the
+stations on the coast. The slaves are either prisoners taken in war, or
+children whom their parents have parted with in the hope of their being
+carried to a more fertile country. For above ninety years after the first
+discovery of this coast, the Portuguese merchants were accustomed to
+enter the large rivers by which the country is everywhere intersected,
+trading independently with the numerous tribes inhabiting their banks;
+but now the whole of this commerce is in the hands of stationary licensed
+factors, to whom it is farmed.
+
+On quitting St Jago we steer southerly for the Rio Grande, which is on
+the north of Ethiopia, beyond which we come to the high mountain of
+Sierra Liona, the summit of which is continually enveloped in mist, out
+of which thunder and lightning almost perpetually flashes, and is heard
+at sea from the distance of forty or fifty miles. Though the sun is quite
+vertical in passing over this mountain, and extremely hot, yet the thick
+fog is never dissipated. In our voyage we never lose sight of land, yet
+keep always at a considerable distance, carefully observing the
+declination of the sun, and keeping a southerly course till we arrive in
+_four degrees on the equinoctial_[7], when we suddenly change our course
+to the south-east, keeping the Ethiopian coast always on our left hand in
+our way to the island of St Thomas. On this coast, between the tropic and
+the equinoctial, we never meet with any hard gales, as storms are very
+rarely found within the tropics. On nearing the land, the soundings in
+many parts of the coast do not exceed fifty _braccia_, but farther out
+the depth rapidly increases, and the sea usually runs high at a distance
+from the land. When we arrived at Rio del Oro, as mentioned before, we
+observed four stars in the form of a cross, of an extraordinary size and
+splendour, elevated thirty degrees above the antarctic pole, and forming
+the constellation called _il Crusero_. While under the tropic of Cancer,
+we saw this constellation very low; and, on directing our _balestra_[8]
+to the lowermost of these stars, we found it to be directly south, and
+concluded that it must be in the centre of the antarctic polar circle. We
+observed the same constellation very high when we were at the island of
+St Thomas; and remarked that the moon, after rain, produces a rainbow
+similar to that occasioned by the sun during the day, except that the
+colours were dim and ill-defined. On leaving the straits of Gibraltar, I
+did not observe any sensible change on the ebb and flow of the sea; but
+when we approached Rio Grande, which is eleven degrees to the north of
+the equinoctial, we observed a considerable tide at the mouth of that
+river, and the rise in some places was much the same as on the coast of
+Portugal, whereas at the isle of St Thomas it was nearly the same as at
+Venice.
+
+The island of St Thomas was discovered above eighty[9] years ago, by some
+captains in the royal navy of Portugal, and was altogether unknown to the
+ancients. Its horizon or parallel passes at an equal distance between the
+arctic and antarctic poles, and its days and nights are always equal. The
+arctic polar star is there invisible, but the _guardiani_ are seen in
+some measure to revolve, and the constellation which is known by the name
+of _il crusero_, is seen in the heavens at a high altitude. To the
+eastwards[10] of St Thomas, and at the distance of 120 miles, the small
+island called _Il Principe_ is situated. This latter island is inhabited
+and cultivated, the produce of its sugar canes belonging to the revenue
+of the kings eldest son, from which circumstance the island derives its
+name. To the S. S. W. or S. and by W. and in the latitude of almost 2° S.
+is the uninhabited island of Annobon, on which numbers of crocodiles and
+venomous serpents are found. Its rocky shores abound in fish, and are
+much resorted to by the inhabitants of St Thomas on that account. When
+first discovered, the island of St Thomas was an entire forest,
+containing a variety of trees, which, though barren, were extremely
+verdant. These trees were all remarkably tall and straight, their
+branches all drawn close to the stems, and not spreading out as with us.
+After clearing away a great part of the forest, the inhabitants built a
+principal town called _Pouoasan_, which has an excellent harbour. The
+principal dependence of the settlers in this island is upon their sugars,
+which they exchange yearly with the merchants who trade thither, for
+flour in barrels, wines, oil, cheese, leather, swords, glass beads,
+drinking-cups, pater-nosters, and _buzios_, which are a small kind of
+shells, called by the Italians _white porcelain_, and which pass in
+Ethiopia as money. The Europeans who reside on this island depend much
+for provisions on the ships, as they cannot subsist on the fare used by
+the Negroes. The slaves employed in their sugar plantations are procured
+from Guinea, Benin, and Congo; and some rich planters have from 150 to
+300 Negroes. These work five days in every week for their masters, and
+are allowed the Saturdays to themselves, when they cultivate various
+articles of provision, as the _miglio zaburo_, a species of bean formerly
+mentioned, a root called _igname_, and many species of culinary
+vegetables, the seeds of which must be imported from Europe, as they do
+not come to perfection in this climate.
+
+[Illustration: Chart of North Western Africa]
+
+The soil of St Thomas consists of a red and yellow marl, or clay, of
+great fertility, which is kept soft and mellow by the heavy dews which
+fall nightly, contributing greatly to vegetation, and preventing it from
+being dried up by the great heats; and so great is the luxuriant
+fertility of the soil, that trees immediately spring up on any spots left
+uncultivated, and will grow as high in a few days as would require as
+many months with us. These sprouts are cut down and burnt by the slaves,
+and their ashes are used as manure for the sugarcanes. If planted in
+January, the canes are ready to be cut in June, and those which are
+planted in February become ripe in July; and in this manner they keep up
+a succession throughout the whole year. In March and September, when the
+sun is vertical, the great rains set in, accompanied with cloudy and
+thick weather, which is of great service to the sugar plantations. This
+island produces yearly above 150,000 arobas of sugar, each containing
+thirty-one of our pounds, of which the king receives the tenth part,
+which usually produces from 12,000 to 14,000 arobas, though many of the
+planters do not pay this tythe fully. There are about sixty _ingenios_
+driven by water, for bruising the canes and pressing out the juice, which
+is boiled in vast chaldrons, after which it is poured into pans in the
+shape of sugar-loaves, holding from fifteen to twenty pounds each, in
+which it is purified by means of ashes. In some parts of the island,
+where they have not streams of water, the canes are crushed by machines
+worked by the Negroes, and in others by horses. The bruised canes are
+given to the hogs, which hardly get any other food, yet fatten
+wonderfully, and their flesh is so delicate and wholesome as to be
+preferred to that of poultry. Many sugar refiners have been brought here
+from Madeira, on purpose to endeavour to manufacture the sugars of St
+Thomas more white and harder than its usual produce, but in vain. This is
+alleged to proceed from the extreme richness of the soil injuring the
+quality of the sugar; just as with us, wines produced in soils of too
+great fertility are apt to have a peculiar flavour. Another cause of this
+is supposed to proceed from the climate of the island being too hot and
+too moist, except in the month of June, July, and August, at which season
+a fresh dry wind blows from Ethiopia to this island; and they then make
+their best sugars.
+
+The planters are obliged, to ship off their sugars as soon as they can
+procure shipping, because they would become liquid if attempted to be
+kept for a length of time. At present, not above two-thirds of the island
+are appropriated to the cultivation of sugar; but any person who comes to
+this island for the purpose of settling, whether from Spain or Portugal,
+or any other country, may procure from the royal intendant as much land
+as he is able to cultivate, and at a moderate price. The esculent root
+which is known in the Spanish islands by the name of _batata_, is here
+named ingame by the Negroes, and is their principal food, either boiled
+or roasted under the ashes. There are different kinds of this root
+produced on the island, but that which is known by the name of _igname
+cicorero_ is preferred by the merchant vessels, all of which purchase
+considerable quantities as a sea-stock for their homeward voyage, and the
+Negroes cultivate them largely for the express purpose of supplying the
+ships[11]. This island is distinguished by a high mountain in the middle,
+thickly covered by tall, straight, and verdant trees, and its summit is
+continually enveloped in clouds, whence water is diffused in numerous
+streams all over the island. A large shallow stream flows through the
+city of Pouoasan, supplying it with abundance of excellent water, which
+the inhabitants reckon of a medicinal quality, and allege that St Thomas
+would not be habitable if it were not for this river and its other
+numerous springs and rivulets. The native trees are chiefly barren, and
+though some olives, peaches, and almonds, were planted by the early
+settlers, which soon grew with great luxuriance, they never bore any
+fruit, and this has been the case with all stone fruits that have been
+tried. But the cocoa-nut palm, brought hither from Ethiopia, has thriven
+satisfactorily. Repeated attempts have been made to cultivate wheat, but
+always unsuccessfully, though tried at different seasons of the year; as
+the ear would never fill, but always ran up to straw and chaff only.
+
+In March and September, the sky is always overcast with clouds and mists,
+and continual rains prevail, which season is considered by the
+inhabitants as their winter. In May, June, July, and August, which they
+call _Mesi di Vento_, or windy months, the prevalent winds are from the
+south, southeast, and southwest; but the island is sheltered by the
+continent from the north, northeast, and northwest winds; The summer
+months are December, January, and February, when the heat is excessive,
+and the atmosphere being continually loaded with vapour, occasions the
+air to feel like the steam of boiling water. The shores of this island
+abound in many kinds of fish, and, during the months of June and July,
+the inhabitants catch a kind which they name _le chieppe_, which are
+singularly delicate. In the seas between this island and the coast of
+Africa, there are prodigious multitudes of whales, both of the large and
+small kinds.--Should you, Sir, be unsatisfied with my ill-written and
+confused information, I beg of you to consider that I am merely a seaman,
+unpracticed in literary composition.
+
+
+[1] Ramusio. Clarke I. 298. This voyage was communicated by the relator
+    to Count Raimond della Torre, a nobleman of Verona.--Clarke.
+
+[2] A description of the islands of Cape Verd, and an account of the
+    supply of salt usually taken on board by the Portuguese ships at the
+    island of Sal, for the purpose of laying in a sea store of salt fish,
+    is here omitted.--Clarke.
+
+[3] This geographical expression is utterly unintelligible, but may be a
+    strange mode of denoting its latitude, which is 15° N. but I know not
+    what to make of the thirty leagues towards the south, unless the
+    author meant that it was thirty leagues in extent from north to south,
+    and seventeen leagues from east to west.--E.
+
+[4] The description in the text is not applicable to maize, and must refer
+    to some species of bean, or kidney-bean.--E.
+
+[5] Called likewise Maleguette, and named also the Grain-Coast and the
+    Pepper-Coast. Manicongo is obviously the kingdom of Congo.--E.
+
+[6] Some of this is smuggled and sold in England.--Clarke.
+
+    This Guinea pepper is probably that now known under the name of
+    Jamaica pepper; but the extremely pungent kind must be some of the
+    numerous species of capsicums, usually called Cayenne pepper.--E.
+
+[7] This strange expression seems to imply 4° of north latitude.--E.
+
+[8] Called likewise Balestriglia, being the Venetian name for the cross-
+    staff, or fore-staff, an astronomical instrument which has been
+    superseded by the quadrant and sextant.--E
+
+[9] In an after part of this narrative, the pilot informs us, that his
+    first voyage to the island of San Thome was in 1520, and that he made
+    five voyages to that place. If, therefore, the date of his present
+    voyage were fixed to 1530, it would carry us back to 1450, or even
+    earlier, for the date of this discovery, near thirteen years before
+    the death of Don Henry.--Clarke.
+
+    In Mr Clarkes note on this passage, he erroneously calculates on the
+    above data that the discovery might have been in 1460, which is only
+    seventy years back from 1530. But the result of the data in the text
+    shews, that either the pilot was mistaken as to the real date of the
+    discovery, or that his narrative has been corrupted, so that no
+    reliance can be placed on his dates.--E.
+
+[10] The direction of _Il Principe_, or Princes Island, from St Thomas,
+    is N. N. E. and the distance does not exceed seventy miles.--Clarke.
+
+[11] These _batatas_ are probably a different species from our potatoes,
+    and may be what are called sweet potatoes in the West Indies; perhaps
+    the _igname cicorero_ is the West Indian _yam_. Four species of
+    _igname_ or _batata_, are mentioned in Barbot as originally from Benin,
+    Anwerre, Mani-Congo, and Saffrance. The first of these is remarkably
+    sweet, and the second keeps well. A variety of esculent roots might
+    prove of high utility to navigators, and are too much neglected. Among
+    these, the parsnip and Jerusalem artichoke deserve notice, as being
+    very nutritive, and proof against all weathers.--Clarke.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Continuation of Portuguese Discoveries, from Cape St Catherine to the
+kingdom of Congo_.
+
+We are still obliged to continue the account of the Portuguese
+discoveries historically, from the want of any regular journals of their
+early voyages along the African coast. In the original efforts of the
+illustrious Don Henry, although the progress was extremely slow, we have
+much to admire in the character of that prince, who possessed genius to
+stretch beyond the trammels of custom and authority, boldly thinking for
+himself, pointing out the way of extending the knowledge of our globe by
+maritime discoveries, and persevering nobly in his renewed efforts, in
+spite of the timid ignorance of his unexperienced pilots and mariners.
+But it is not easy to explain the continuance of that slow progress,
+which was even retarded during the years which elapsed between the demise
+of that prince of mariners in 1463, and that of Alphonso in 1481; when
+the increased experience of the Portuguese, in their frequent voyages to
+the new discovered Atlantic islands and African coast, ought to have
+inspired them with fresh vigour and extended views of discovery and
+commerce. The military character of Alphonso may, however, explain this
+in a great degree, as all his energies were directed towards the
+extension of dominion in the Moorish kingdom of Fez; and the business of
+discovery was devolved as a burdensome and unprofitable task on the
+farmers of the trade to the coast of Africa, which appears to have become
+extensive and lucrative, after the discovery of Guinea and its islands,
+and the establishment of the sugar colonies in these islands. We learn,
+likewise, from the preceding voyage of the Portuguese pilot to the island
+of St Thomas, that the mariners still confined themselves almost entirely
+to creeping along the coast, from cape to cape, and from island to island,
+not daring to trust themselves to the trackless ocean, under the now sure
+guidance of the heavenly luminaries; but which they then did not
+sufficiently understand, nor did they possess sufficient instruments for
+directing their course in the ocean. It would appear that they had then
+no other method of computing the longitude but by means of the log, or
+dead reckoning, which is liable to perpetual uncertainty from currents
+and lee-way, and which a storm, even of short continuance, must have
+thrown into total confusion. Their instruments and methods for
+determining even the latitudes, appear to have then been imperfect and
+little understood. In the sequel of this deduction, we shall find the
+first Portuguese squadron which sailed for India, conducted across the
+Indian ocean by a Moorish pilot.
+
+On the accession of John II. to the throne of Portugal in 1481, the
+discoveries along the coast of Africa were resumed with a new spirit.
+While infante or hereditary prince, his principal revenue was derived
+from the profits of the Guinea trade, and of the importation of gold from
+the haven of Mina; and among the first measures of his reign, he turned
+his attention to the improvement and extension of that valuable branch of
+commerce. For this purpose, he gave orders to make all necessary
+preparations for building a fortress and church at the port of Mina. All
+the requisite materials, even to stones and tiles, were accordingly
+shipped from Lisbon in a squadron of ten caravels and two transports,
+with 500 soldiers and 200 labourers or workmen of various kinds. This
+expedition was placed under the command of Don Diego d'Azumbuja, an
+experienced officer, under whom were the following naval captains,
+Gonçalez da Fonseca, Ruy d'Oliveira, Juan Rodrigues Gante, Juan Alfonso,
+Diego Rodrigues Inglez, Bartholomew Diaz, Pedro d'Evora, and Gomez Aires.
+This last was a gentleman belonging to the household of Pedro king of
+Arragon, all the others being noblemen of the household of King John.
+Pedro de Cintra and Fernam d'Alfonso commanded the transports, and a
+small vessel attended the squadron as an advice-boat. This squadron
+sailed on the 11th December 1481, and reached their destination on the
+19th January 1482, at an African village named _Aldea_, where they found
+Juan Bernardo, who had previously sailed for the coast in quest of gold.
+
+Bernardo was immediately sent by Azumbuja, to inform Camarança, the Negro
+chief of the district, with the arrival of the Portuguese armament, and
+to desire a conference, with directions to endeavour to impress that
+chief with a high sense of the rank and character of the Portuguese
+officers, and of the irresistible power of the armament now upon his
+coast. Early next morning, Azambuja landed with all his followers, who
+were secretly armed, in case of meeting with any hostilities from the
+natives; and moved forwards in great form to a large tree, not far from
+the Negro village of Aldea, on a spot which had been chosen as a
+convenient situation for the intended fortress. A flag, bearing the royal
+arms of Portugal, was immediately displayed upon the tree, and an altar
+was placed under the shade of its boughs, at which the whole company
+united in assisting at the first mass that was celebrated in Guinea,
+offering up their solemn prayers to God for the speedy conversion of the
+idolatrous natives, and for the perpetual continuance and prosperity of
+the church which was to be erected on this spot. The day on which this
+impressive ceremony was performed being dedicated to St Sebastian, that
+name was given to the valley on which the tree stood, under which they
+were now assembled.
+
+Soon after the completion of this religious ceremony, Camarança
+approached with a numerous train. Azambuja, sumptuously dressed, and
+ornamented by a rich golden collar, prepared to receive the Negro chief,
+seated on an elevated chair, having all his retinue arranged before him,
+so as to form an avenue. The Negroes were armed with spears, shields,
+bows, and arrows, and wore a kind of helmets made of skins, thickly
+studded with fish teeth, giving them a very martial appearance. The
+subordinate chiefs were distinguished by chains of gold hanging from
+their necks, and had various golden ornaments on their heads, and even on
+their beards. After the exchange of presents, and other tokens of mutual
+respect and confidence, Azambuja made a speech to Camarança, through the
+mediation of an interpreter, in which he explained the purpose of his
+embassy and expedition, and used every argument he could think of, to
+conciliate the friendship of the Negro chief, to make him fully sensible
+of the power of the king of Portugal, and to reconcile him to the
+intended permanent establishment upon the toast. Camarança listened to
+the harangue, and the explanation of it by the interpreter, in respectful
+silence, keeping his eyes steadily fixed on the countenance of Azambuja.
+After which, casting his eyes for some time on the ground, as if
+profoundly meditating on what he had heard, he is said to have made the
+following guarded and judicious answer:
+
+"I am fully sensible of the high honour done me on this occasion by your
+sovereign. I have always endeavoured to deserve his friendship, by
+dealing strictly with his subjects, and by constantly exerting myself to
+procure immediate ladings for their ships. Hitherto the Portuguese, who
+have visited my country, were meanly dressed, and easily satisfied with
+the commodities we had to give them; and so far from desiring to remain
+in the country, were always anxious to complete their cargoes, and to
+return whence they came. This day I observe a wonderful difference. A
+great number of persons, richly dressed, are eager for permission to
+build themselves houses, and to remain among us. But assuredly, persons
+of such rank, under the guidance of a commander who claims his descent
+from the God who created the day and the night, would never be able to
+endure the hardships of our climate, and could not procure in this
+country those luxuries they have been accustomed to in their own. Those
+passions which are common to all men, will certainly produce disputes
+between us; and it were much better that we should continue on the same
+footing as hitherto, allowing your ships to come and go as they have
+always done before; in which case, the desire of seeing each other
+occasionally, and of mutual intercourse in trade, will preserve peace
+between you and us. The sea and the land, which are always neighbours,
+are continually at variance, contending for the mastery; the sea always
+violently endeavouring to subdue the land, which, with equal obstinacy,
+defends itself against the encroachments of the sea."
+
+The prudential jealousy and distrust displayed on this occasion by
+Camarança, astonished and perplexed the Portuguese commander; and it
+required the exercise of much address on his part, to prevail upon the
+Negro chief to allow the fulfilment of his orders, and to prevent the
+necessity of having recourse to violent measures. When the workmen were
+making preparations next day to lay the foundations of the intended
+fortress on the coast, they observed a large rock, which lay very
+commodious for serving them as a quarry, and accordingly proceeded to
+work it for that purpose. This happened unfortunately to be venerated by
+the Negroes as one of their Gods, and they immediately flew to arms in
+opposition against the sacrilegious violation of the sanctified rock, and
+many of the workmen were wounded, before the natives could be pacified by
+numerous presents. At length, after the constant labour of twenty days,
+the fort began to assume a formidable appearance, and received the name
+of _Fortaleza de San Jorge da Mina_, or Fort St George at Mina. In a
+church constructed within its walls, a solemn mass was appointed to be
+celebrated annually, in honour of Don Henry, Duke of Viseo, of
+illustrious memory. Azambuja continued governor of this place during two
+years and seven months, and was honoured, on his return to Portugal, with
+particular marks of royal favour. In 1486, King John bestowed on this new
+establishment all the privileges end immunities of a city.
+
+Impressed with the great advantages that might be derived to his kingdom,
+through the prosecution of the maritime discoveries in Africa, and more
+especially by opening a passage by sea to India, of which his hopes were
+now sanguine, the king of Portugal, who had now added to his titles that
+of _Lord of Guinea_, made application to the pope, as universal father
+and lord of Christendom, for a perpetual grant of all the countries which
+the Portuguese had already discovered, or should hereafter discover,
+towards the east, with a strict prohibition against the interference of
+any European State in that immense field of discovery, commerce, and
+colonization. The pope conceded this enormous grant, probably without the
+most distant idea of its extent and importance: not only prohibiting all
+Christian powers from intruding within those prodigious, yet indefinite
+bounds, which he had bestowed upon the crown of Portugal, but declaring,
+that all discoveries that were or might be made in contravention, should
+belong to Portugal. Hitherto, the Portuguese navigators, in the course of
+their discoveries along the shores of Western Africa, had been in use to
+erect _wooden_ crosses, as indications of their respective discoveries.
+But the king now ordered that they should erect _stone crosses_, about
+six feet high, inscribed with, the arms of Portugal, the name of the
+reigning sovereign, that of the navigator, and the date of the discovery.
+
+In the year 1484, Diego Cam or Cano proceeded beyond Cape St Catherine,
+in lat. 1° 40' S. the last discovery of the reign of King Alphonso, and
+reached the mouth of a considerable river, in lat. 5° 10' S. called
+_Zayre_ by the natives, now called Congo river, or the Rio Padron. Diego
+proceeded some distance up this river, till he met with some of the
+natives, but was unable to procure any satisfactory intelligence from
+them, as they were not understood by the Negro interpreters on board his
+ship. By means of signs, however, he understood that the country was
+under the dominion of a king who resided at a considerable distance from
+the coast, in a town or city called Banza, since named San Salvador by
+the Portuguese; on which he sent a party of his crew, conducted by the
+natives, carrying a considerable present far the king, and meaning to
+wait their return. Unavoidable circumstances, however, having protracted
+the return of his people far beyond the appointed time, Diego resolved to
+return into Portugal with an account of his discovery; and, having gained
+the confidence of the natives, he prevailed on four of them to embark
+with him, that they might be instructed in the Portuguese language, to
+serve as interpreters for future intercourse with this newly discovered
+region, and made the natives understand by means of signs, that, after
+the expiration of fifteen moons, these persons should be returned in
+safety.
+
+These Africans were men of some consequence in their own country, and
+were of such quick apprehensions, that they acquired a sufficient
+knowledge of the Portuguese language during the voyage back to Lisbon, as
+to be able to give a competent account of their own country, and of the
+kingdoms or regions beyond it, to the southwards. The king of Portugal
+was much gratified by this discovery, and treated the Africans brought
+over by Diego with much munificence. Next year, Diego Cam returned to the
+river of Congo, where he landed the four natives, who carried many
+presents from King John to their own sovereign, and were directed to
+express his anxious desire that he and his subjects would embrace the
+Christian faith.
+
+Having landed the Negroes, and received back his own men whom he had left
+on his former voyage, Diego proceeded to discover the coast to the
+southwards of the Congo river; leaving a respectful message for the king
+of Congo, that he must postpone the honour of paying his respects to him
+till his return from the south. The farther progress of Diego is very
+indefinitely related by the Portuguese historians; who say, that after a
+run of twenty leagues, he erected two stone crosses, as memorials of his
+progress, one at a cape called St Augustine, in lat. 13° S. but the other
+on Cape Padron, in 22° S. This last latitude would extend the discovery
+of Diego between the latitude of the Congo river and this high latitude,
+to 280 Portuguese leagues, instead of twenty. Besides, Cape Padron forms
+the southern point at the mouth of the river of Congo, and is only in lat.
+6° 15' S. The high probability is, that the first cross erected by Diego
+Cam in this voyage, was at Cape Palmerinho, in lat. 9° 15' S. and the
+other may have been at Rocca Boa, in lat. 13° 20' S. Clarke[1] is
+disposed to extend the second cross to Cabo Negro, in lat. 16° S. Either
+influenced by his provisions running short, or desirous of forming a
+friendly, connection with the king of Congo, Diego measured back his way
+to the Congo river, where he was received in a most satisfactory manner
+by the sovereign of that country. The reports of his subjects who had
+been in Portugal, and the liberal presents which they had brought to him
+from King John, had made a deep impression on the mind of this African
+monarch. He made many inquiries respecting the Christian religion, and
+being highly gratified by its sublime and consolatory doctrines, perhaps
+influenced by the reports his subjects had brought him of its magnificent
+ceremonies, he appointed one of his principal noblemen, named _Caçuta_ or
+_Zazut_, to accompany Diego Cam, as his ambassador to King John;
+anxiously requesting the king of Portugal to allow this nobleman and his
+attendants to be baptized, and that he would be pleased to send some
+ministers of his holy religion to convert him and his subjects from their
+idolatrous errors. Diego Cam arrived safely in Portugal with Caçuta; who
+was soon afterwards baptized by the name of _John Silva_, the king and
+queen of Portugal doing him the honour of attending on him as sponsors at
+the holy font; and the splendid ceremonial was closed by the baptism of
+his sable attendants.
+
+Some time previous to this event, Alphonso de Aviero carried an
+ambassador from the king of Benin to the king of Portugal, requesting
+that some missionaries might be sent for the conversion of his subjects;
+and, although the artful conduct of that African prince threw many
+difficulties in the way of this mission, many of the Negroes of that
+country were converted. From the ambassador of Benin, the king of
+Portugal received information of a powerful monarch, named _Organe_,
+whose territories lay at the distance of 250 leagues beyond the kingdom
+of Benin, and who possessed a supremacy over all the adjacent states.
+Assuming Cape Lopo Gonçalves, in lat. 1° S. as the southern boundary of
+the kingdom of Benin, 250 Portuguese leagues would bring us to the
+kingdom of Benguela, or that of Jaa Caconda, about lat. 14° or 15° S. Yet
+some persons have strangely supposed that this king _Organe_ or _Ogané_
+was a corruption of _Jan_ or _Janhoi_, the title given by the Christians
+of the east to the king of Abyssinia. "But it is very difficult to
+account for this knowledge of Abyssinia in the kingdom of Benin, not only
+on account of the distance, but likewise because several of the most
+savage nations in the world, the _Galla_ and _Shangalla_, occupy the
+intervening space. The court of Abyssinia did indeed then reside in
+_Shoa_, the south-east extremity of the kingdom; and, by its power and
+influence, might have pushed its dominion through these barbarians to the
+neighbourhood of Benin on the western ocean. But all this I must confess
+to be a mere conjecture of mine, of which, in the country itself, I never
+found the smallest confirmation[2]." To these observations of the
+celebrated Abyssinian traveller, it may be added, that the distance from
+Benin to Shoa exceeds six hundred Portuguese leagues.
+
+While the king of Portugal continued to encourage his navigators to
+proceed to the southwards in discovering the African coast, he became
+anxious lest some unexpected rival might interpose to deprive him of the
+expected fruits of these discoveries, which had occupied the unremitting
+attentions of his predecessors and himself for so many years. Learning
+that John Tintam and William Fabian, Englishmen, were preparing, at the
+instigation of the Duke of Medina Sidonia, in 1481, to proceed on a
+voyage to Guinea, he sent Ruy de Sousa as his ambassador, to Edward IV.
+of England, to explain the title which he held from the pope as lord of
+that country, and to induce him to forbid his subjects from navigating to
+the coast of Africa, in which negotiation he was completely successful.
+He likewise used every exertion to conceal the progress of his own
+navigators on the western coast of Africa, and to magnify the dangers of
+the voyage; representing that the coast was quite inhospitable,
+surrounded by most tremendous rocks, and inhabited by savage cannibals,
+and that no vessels could possibly live in those tempestuous seas, in
+which every quarter of the moon produced a furious storm, except those of
+a peculiar construction, which had been invented by the Portuguese ship-
+builders.
+
+A Portuguese pilot, who had often made the voyage to Guinea, had the
+temerity to assert, that any kind of ship could make this redoubted
+voyage, as safely as the royal caravels, and was sent for to court by the
+king, who gave him a public reprimand for his ignorance and presumption.
+Some months afterwards, the same pilot appeared again at court, and told
+the king, "That being of an obstinate disposition, he had attempted the
+voyage to Guinea in a different kind of vessel from those usually
+employed, and found it to be impossible." The king could not repress a
+smile at this solemn nonsense; yet honoured the politic pilot with a
+private audience, and gave him money to encourage him to propagate the
+deception. About this period, likewise, hearing that three Portuguese
+seamen, who were conversant in the navigation of the coast of Africa, had
+set out for Spain, intending to offer their services in that country,
+John immediately ordered them to be pursued as traitors. Two of them were
+killed, and the third was brought a prisoner to Evora, where he was broke
+on the wheel. Hearing that the Portuguese seamen murmured at the severity
+of this punishment, the king exclaimed, "Let every man abide by his own
+element, I love not travelling seamen."
+
+Encouraged by the successful progress of Diego Cam in 1484 and 1485, King
+John became sanguine in his hopes of completing the discovery of a
+maritime route to India, around the continent of Africa, and determined
+upon using every exertion for this purpose. His first views were to
+endeavour to procure some information respecting India, by means of a
+journey overland; and with this object, _Antonio de Lisboa_, a Franciscan
+friar, together with a nameless lay companion, were dispatched to make
+the attempt of penetrating into India, through Palestine and Egypt. But,
+being ignorant of the Arabic language, these men were unable to penetrate
+beyond Jerusalem, whence they returned into Portugal. Though disappointed
+in this attempt, by the ignorance or want of enterprise of his agents,
+his resolution was not to be repressed by difficulties, and he resolved
+upon employing fresh exertions both by sea and land, for the
+accomplishment of his enterprise. He accordingly fitted out a small
+squadron under Bartholomew Diaz, a knight of the royal household, to
+attempt the passage by sea.
+
+
+[1] Prog, of Mar. Disc. I. 329. note r.
+
+[2] Bruce's Abyssinia, II. 105.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Discovery of the Cape of Good Hope, by Bartholomew Diaz, in 1486_[1].
+
+For this important enterprise, Bartholomew Diaz was only supplied with
+two small caravels of fifty ton each, accompanied by a still smaller
+vessel, or tender, to carry provisions. Of these vessels, one was
+commanded by Bartholomew Diaz, as commodore, the second caravel by _Juan
+Infante_, another cavalier or gentleman of the court, and Pedro Diaz,
+brother to the commander in chief of the expedition, had charge of the
+tender. The preparations being completed, Bartholomew sailed in the end
+of August 1486, steering directly to the southwards.
+
+We have no relation of the particulars of this voyage, and only know that
+the first spot on which Diaz placed a stone pillar, in token of discovery
+and possession, was at _Sierra Parda_, in about 24°40'S. which is said to
+have been 120 leagues farther to the south than any preceding navigator.
+According to the Portuguese historians, Diaz sailed boldly from this
+place to the southwards, in the open sea, and never saw the land again
+until he was forty leagues to the east of the Cape of Good Hope, which he
+had passed without being in sight of land. The learned geographer, Major
+Rennel, informs us, that Sir Home Popham and Captain Thompson, while
+exploring the western coast of Africa in 1786, found a marble cross, on
+which the arms of Portugal were engraved, in latitude 26°37'S. near a bay
+named Angra Pequena: But, as the Portuguese long continued to frequent
+these coasts exclusively, and considered them all as belonging to their
+dominions under the papal grant, this latter cross, on which the
+inscription was not legible, may have been erected at a considerably
+subsequent period. At all events, the track of Diaz was far beyond the
+usual adventure of any former navigator, as he must have run a course of
+from seven to ten degrees of latitude, and at least between two or three
+degrees of longitude, in utterly unknown seas, without sight of land. The
+first land seen by Diaz is said to have been forty leagues to the
+eastward of the cape, where he came in sight of a bay on the coast, which
+he called _Angra de los Vaqueros_, or bay of herdsmen, from observing a
+number of cows grazing on the land. The distance of forty Portuguese
+leagues, would lead us to what is now called Struys bay, immediately east
+of Cabo das Agullias, which latter is in lat. 34° 50' S. and long. 20° 16'
+E. from Greenwich. From this place Diaz continued his voyage eastwards,
+to a small island or rock in the bay, which is now called Zwartkops or
+Algoa, in long. 27° E. on which rocky islet he placed a stone cross or
+pillar, as a memorial of his progress, and named it, on that account,
+Santa Cruz, or _El Pennol de la Cruz_. In his progress to this place from
+the Angra de los Vaqueros, he had set some Negroes on shore in different
+places, who had been brought from Portugal for this purpose, and who were
+well clothed, that they might be respected by the natives. These Negroes
+were likewise provided with small assortments of toys for bartering with
+the natives, and were especially charged to make inquiry as to the
+situation and distance of the dominions of Prester John. Of the fate of
+these Negroes we are nowhere informed, but may be well assured they would
+receive no intelligence respecting the subject of their inquiry, from the
+ignorant Hottentots and Caffres of Southern Africa.
+
+It would appear that Diaz was still unconscious that he had reached and
+overpassed the extreme southern point of Africa, although now nearly nine
+degrees to the east of the Cape of Good Hope, and at least one degree
+back towards the north of his most southern range; but he may have
+supposed himself in a deep bite or bay of the coast, similar to the well-
+known gulf of Guinea. Under this impression, that he had not accomplished
+the grand object of his enterprize, he was anxious to continue his voyage
+still farther towards the east: But, as the provisions on board his two
+caravels were nearly exhausted, and the victualling tender under the
+command of his brother was missing, the crews of the caravels became
+exceedingly urgent to return, lest they might perish with famine. With
+some difficulty he prevailed on the people to continue their course about
+twenty-five leagues farther on, as he felt exceedingly mortified at the
+idea of returning to his sovereign without accomplishing the discovery on
+which he was sent. They accordingly reached the mouth of a river, which
+was discovered by Juan Infante, and was called from him, _Rio del
+Infante_, now known by the name of Great-Fish River, in about lat. 33°27'
+N. long. 28°20'E. The coast still trended towards the eastwards, with a
+slight inclination towards the north; so that, in an eastern course of
+about thirteen degrees, they had neared the north about six degrees,
+though still unsatisfied of having absolutely cleared the southern point
+of Africa.
+
+From this river, the extreme boundary of the present voyage, Diaz
+commenced his return homewards, and discovered, with great joy and
+astonishment, on their passage back, the long sought for and tremendous
+promontory, which had been the grand object of the hopes and wishes of
+Portuguese navigation during _seventy-four_ years, ever since the year
+1412, when the illustrious Don Henry first began to direct and incite his
+countrymen to the prosecution of discoveries along the western shores of
+Africa. Either from the distance which the caravels had been from the land,
+when they first altered their course to the eastwards, or from the cape
+having been concealed in thick fogs, it had escaped notice in the
+preceding part of the voyage. At this place Diaz erected a stone cross in
+memory of his discovery; and, owing to heavy tempests, which he
+experienced off the high table land of the Cape, he named it _Cabo dos
+Tormentos_, or Cape of storms; but the satisfaction which King John
+derived from this memorable discovery, on the return of Diaz to Portugal
+in 1487, and the hope which it imparted of having opened a sure passage by
+sea from Europe through the Atlantic into the Indian ocean, by which his
+subjects would now reap the abundant harvest of all their long and arduous
+labours, induced that sovereign to change this inauspicious appellation
+for one of a more happy omen, and he accordingly ordered that it should in
+future be called, _Cabo de boa Esperança_, or Cape of Good Hope, which it
+has ever since retained.
+
+Soon after the discovery of the _Cape_, by which shorter name it is now
+generally preeminently distinguished, Diaz fell in with the victualler,
+from which he had separated nine months before. Of nine persons who had
+composed the crew of that vessel, six had been murdered by the natives of
+the west coast of Africa, and Fernand Colazzo, one of the three survivors,
+died of joy on again beholding his countrymen. Of the circumstances of the
+voyage home we have no account; but it is not to be doubted that Diaz and
+his companions would be honourably received by their sovereign, after a
+voyage of such unprecedented length and unusual success.
+
+
+[1] Clarke, I. 342.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Journey overland to India and Abyssinia, by Covilham and de Payva_[1].
+
+Soon after the departure of Diaz, King John dispatched Pedro de Covilham
+and Alphonso de Payva, both well versed in the Arabic language, with
+orders to travel by land into the east, for the discovery of the country
+of _Presbyter_, or _Prester John_, and to trace the steps of the lucrative
+commerce then carried on with India by the Venetians for spices and drugs;
+part of their instructions being to endeavour to ascertain the
+practicability of navigating round the south extremity of Africa to the
+famed marts of Indian commerce, and to make every possible inquiry into
+the circumstances of that important navigation. Some writers have placed
+this journey as prior in point of time to the voyage of Diaz, and have
+even imagined that the navigator was directed or instructed by the report
+which Covilham transmitted respecting India. Of the relation of this
+voyage by Alvarez, which Purchas published in an abbreviated form, from a
+translation out of the Italian in the collection of Ramusio, found among
+the papers of Hakluyt, Purchas gives the following character: "I esteem it
+true in those things which he saith he saw: In some others which he had by
+relation of enlarging travellers, or boasting Abassines, he may perhaps
+sometimes rather _mendacia dicere_, than _mentiri_." To _tell_ lies rather
+than _make_ them.
+
+Covilham, or Covillan, was born in a town of that name in Portugal, and
+went, when a boy, into Castile, where he entered the service of Don
+Alphonso, duke of Seville. On a war breaking out between Portugal and
+Castile, he returned into his native country, where he got into the
+household of King Alphonso, who made him a man-at-arms. After the death of
+that king, he was one of the guard of King John, who employed him on a
+mission into Spain, on account of his knowledge in the language. He was
+afterwards employed in Barbary, where he remained some time, and acquired
+the Arabic language, and was employed to negotiate a peace with the king
+of Tremesen. He was a second time sent into Barbary on a mission to King
+_Amoli-bela-gegi_, to procure restitution of the bones of the infant Don
+Fernando, in which he was successful.
+
+After his return, he was joined in commission, as before-mentioned, with
+Alphonso de Payva, and these adventurous travellers left Lisbon in May
+1487. Covilham was furnished with a very curious map for these times, by
+the Prince Emanuel, afterwards king of Portugal, which had been copied and
+composed, with great care and secrecy, by the licentiate Calzadilla,
+afterwards bishop of Viseo, assisted by Doctor Rodrigo, and a Jewish
+physician named Moses; which map asserted the practicability of passing by
+sea to India round the southern extremity of Africa, on some obscure
+information which had been collected by those who constructed it.
+
+With a supply of 500 crowns in money, and a letter of credit, or bills of
+exchange, Covilham and De Payva went first to Naples, where their bills of
+exchange were paid by the son of _Cosmo de Medici_. From Naples they went
+by sea to the island of Rhodes, and thence to Alexandria in Egypt, whence
+they travelled as merchants to Grande Cairo, and proceeded with the
+caravan to _Tor_[2] on the Red Sea, near the foot of Mount Sinai. They
+here received some information respecting the trade which then subsisted
+between Egypt and Calicut, and sailed from that place to Aden, a trading
+city of Yemen, on the outside of the Straits of Babelmandeb. The
+travellers here separated; Covilham embarking in one vessel for India,
+while De Payva took his passage in another vessel bound for Suakem on the
+Abyssinian coast of the Red Sea, having engaged to rejoin each other at
+Cairo, after having carried the directions of their sovereign into effect.
+
+The Moorish ship from Aden in which Covilham had embarked, landed him at
+Cananor on the coast of Malabar, whence, after some stay, he went to
+Calicut and Goa, being the first of the Portuguese nation who had
+navigated the Indian ocean; having seen pepper and ginger, and heard of
+cloves and cinnamon. From India he went by sea to Sofala on the eastern
+coast of Africa, where he is said to have examined the gold mines, and
+where he procured some information respecting the great island of
+Madagascar, called by the Moors the _Island of the Moon_. With the
+various and valuable information he had now acquired, relative to the
+productions of India and their marts, and of the eastern coast of Africa,
+he now determined to return to Egypt, that he might be able to
+communicate his intelligence to Portugal. At Cairo he was met by
+messengers from King John, informing him that Payva had been murdered,
+and directing him to go to Ormuz and the coast of Persia, in order to
+increase his stock of commercial knowledge. The two messengers from the
+king of Portugal whom Covilham met with at Cairo, were both Jewish rabbis,
+named Abraham of Beja and Joseph of Lamego. The latter returned into
+Portugal with letters from Covilham, giving an account of his
+observations, and assuring his master that the ships which sailed to the
+coast of Guinea, might be certain of finding a termination of the African
+Continent, by persisting in a southerly course; and advising, when they
+should arrive in the _eastern ocean_, to inquire for Sofala and the
+Island of the Moon.
+
+Covilham and Rabbi Abraham went from Cairo, probably by sea, to Ormuz and
+the coast of Persia, whence they returned in company to Aden. From that
+place, Abraham returned by the way of Cairo to Portugal with the
+additional information which had been collected in their voyage to the
+Gulf of Persia; though some authors allege that Joseph was the companion
+of this voyage, and that he returned from Bassora by way of the desert to
+Aleppo, and thence to Portugal.
+
+From Aden, Covilham crossed the straits of Babelmandeb to the south-
+eastern coast of Abyssinia, where he found Alexander the king, or negus,
+at the head of an army, levying tribute or contributions from his
+rebellious subjects of the southern provinces of his dominions. Alexander
+received Covilham with kindness, but more from motives of curiosity than
+for any expectations of advantage that might result from any connection
+or communication with the kingdom of Portugal. Covilham accompanied the
+king to Shoa, where the seat of the Abyssinian government was then
+established; and from a cruel policy, which subsists still in Abyssinia,
+by which strangers are hardly ever permitted to quit the country,
+Covilham never returned into Europe. Though thus doomed to perpetual
+exile in a strange and barbarous land, Covilham was well used. He married,
+and obtained ample possessions, enjoying the favour of several successive
+kings of Abyssinia, and was preferred to some considerable offices in the
+government. Frequent epistolary intercourse took place between him and
+the king of Portugal, who spared no expence to keep open the interesting
+correspondence. In his dispatches, Covilham described the several ports
+which he had visited in India; explained the policy and disposition of
+the several princes; and pointed out the situation and riches of the gold
+mines of Sofala; exhorting the king to persist, unremittingly and
+vigorously, in prosecuting the discovery of the passage to India around
+the southern extremity of Africa, which he asserted to be attended with
+little danger, and affirmed that the cape was well known in India. He is
+said to have accompanied his letters and descriptions with a chart, in
+which the cape and all the cities on the coast of Africa were exactly
+represented, which he had received in India from a Moor. Covilham was
+afterwards seen by, and intimately acquainted with Francesco Alvarez, his
+historian, who was sent on an embassy into Abyssinia by Emmanuel king of
+Portugal. Alvarez, who appears to have been a priest, calls Covilham his
+spiritual son, and says that he had been thirty-three years in great
+credit with _Prette Janni_, so he calls the king of Abyssinia, and all
+the court, during all which time he had never confessed his sins, except
+to GOD in secret, because the priests of that country were not in use to
+keep secret what had been committed to them in confession. This would
+protract the residence of Covilham in Abyssinia, at least to the year
+1521, or 1522; but how long he may have lived there afterwards does not
+appear.
+
+
+[1] Clarke, i. 384. Purchas, II. 1091.
+
+[2] El Tor is on the Arabian coast of the Red Sea, near the mouth of the
+    Bahr Assuez, or Gulf of Suez, in lat. 28° 10' N. long. 33° 36' E.--E.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+HISTORY OF THE DISCOVERY AND CONQUEST OF INDIA BY THE PORTUGUESE, BETWEEN
+THE YEARS 1497 AND 1525: FROM THE ORIGINAL PORTUGUESE OF HERMAN LOPES DE
+CASTANEDA.
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+Although, in strict conformity to chronological arrangement, the
+discovery of America by COLUMBUS in 1492, ought to precede our account of
+the discovery of the maritime route from Europe to India by the
+Portuguese, which did not take place until the year 1498; it yet appears
+more regular to follow out the series of Portuguese navigation and
+discovery to its full completion, than to break down that original and
+vast enterprise into fragments. We might indeed have stopt with the first
+voyage of De Gama, which effected the discovery of India: But as the
+contents of this Chapter consists of what may be considered an authentic
+original record, and carries on the operations of the Portuguese in India
+to the year 1525, it seemed preferable to retain this curious original
+history entire. It is obvious that Castaneda must have used the original
+journals of De Gama, and other early Portuguese commanders, or of some
+persons engaged in the voyages and transactions; as he often forgets the
+historical language, and uses the familiar diction of a person actually
+engaged, as will appear in many passages of this Chapter.
+
+The title of this original document, now first offered to the public in
+modern English, is "_The first Booke of the Historie of the Discoverie
+and Conquest of the East Indias by the Portingals, in the time of King
+Don John, the second of that name. By Hernan Lopes de Castaneda;
+translated into English by Nicholas Lichefield, and dedicated to Sir
+Fraunces Drake. Imprinted at London by Thomas East, 1582_."
+
+Though the transactions here recorded are limited in the title to the
+reign of John II. they occupied the reigns of his immediate successor
+Emmanuel, or Manuel, and of John III. Castanedas history was printed in
+black letter at Coimbra, in eight volumes folio, in the years 1552, 1553,
+and 1554, and is now exceedingly scarce. In 1553, a translation of the
+first book was made into French by Nicolas de Grouchy, and published at
+Paris in quarto. An Italian translation was published at Venice in two
+volumes quarto, by Alfonso Uloa, in 1578[1]. That into English by
+Lichefield, employed on the present occasion, is in small quarto and
+black-letter. The voyage of De Gama is related by De Barros in his work,
+entitled Da Asia, and has been described by Osorius, Ramusio, Maffei, and
+de Faria. Purchas gives a brief account of it, I. ii. 26. The beautiful
+poem of the Lusiad by Camoens, the Portuguese Homer, is dedicated to the
+celebration of this important transaction, and is well known through an
+elegant translation into English by Mickle. In the present chapter, the
+curious and rare work of Castaneda, so far as his first book extends, is
+given entire; and the only freedom employed in this version, besides
+changing the English of 229 years ago into the modern and more
+intelligible language, has Been to prune a quaint verbosity, mistaken by
+Lichefield for rhetorical eloquence. The dedication of the early
+translator to the celebrated Sir Francis Drake, is preserved in its
+original dress, as a sufficient specimen of the language of England at
+the close of the sixteenth century.
+
+
+DEDICATION.
+
+    _To the right Worshipfull
+    Sir Fraunces Drake, Knight,
+    N, L, G, wisheth all prosperitie._
+
+    They haue an auncient custome in Persia (the which is also observed
+    throughout all Asia) that none will enterprise to visit the king,
+    noble man, or perticularly any other person of countenance, but he
+    carieth with him some thing to present him with all worthy of thanks,
+    the which is not onely done in token of great humilitie & obedience,
+    but also of a zealous loue & friendly affection to their superiours &
+    welwillers. So I (right worshipfull following this Persian president)
+    hauing taking vpon me this simple translation out of the Portingale
+    tongue, into our English language, am bold to present & dedicate the
+    same vnto you as a signification of my entire good will. The history
+    conteineth the discouerie and conquest of the East Indias, made by
+    sundry worthy captaines of the Portengales, in the time of King Don
+    Manuel, & of the King Don John, the second of that name, with the
+    description, not onely of the country, but also of every harbour
+    apperteining to every place whervnto they came, & of the great
+    resistance they found in the same, by reson wherof there was sundry
+    great battles many times fought, and likewise of the commodities &
+    riches that euery of these places doth yeeld. And for that I know your
+    worship, with great peril and daunger haue past these monstrous and
+    bottomlesse sees, am therfore the more encouraged to desire & pray
+    your worships patronage & defence therof, requesting you with all to
+    pardon those imperfections, which I acknowledge to be very many, & so
+    much the more, by reason of my long & many years continuance in
+    foreine countries. Howbeit, I hope to have truly observed the literal
+    sence & full effect of the history, as the author setteth it forth,
+    which if it may please you to peruse & accept in good part, I shall be
+    greatly emboldened to proceede & publish also the second & third booke,
+    which I am assured will neither be vnpleasant nor vnprofitable to the
+    readers. Thus alwaies wishing your good worship such prosperous
+    continuance and like fortunate successe as GOD hath hitherto sent you
+    in your dangerous trauaile & affayres, and as maye euery waye content
+    your owne heartes desire, doe euen so take my leaue. From London the
+    fifth of March. 1582.
+
+    Your worships alwayes to commaund,
+    _Nicholas Lichefild._
+
+
+[1] Bibl. des Voyages, V. 2.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+DEDICATION BY CASTANEDA.
+
+    _To
+    The most high and mighty Prince,
+    John III.
+
+    King of Portugal and Algarve,
+    &c._
+
+    It hath seemed to me, most high and mighty prince, our dread king and
+    sovereign, so important and weighty a matter to undertake a history of
+    the great and valiant actions which our Portuguese have performed in
+    the discovery and conquest of India, that I often thought to
+    relinquish the attempt. But as these noble deeds were principally
+    undertaken and performed for the glory of Almighty God, the conversion
+    of the barbarous nations to the Christian faith, and the great honour
+    of your highness; and as, by the power and mercy of the Omnipotent,
+    such fortunate success has been granted to these famous enterprises, I
+    have been encouraged to proceed. I therefore trust entirely to the aid
+    and comfort of the divine goodness in publishing this work, giving the
+    glory thereof to God alone, and its earthly praise to your excellent
+    highness, and the king Don Manuel your father, of famous and happy
+    memory.
+
+    Although these glorious deeds are well known and spread abroad over
+    the world, they yet cannot be sufficiently made manifest unless set
+    forth in writing, by means of which their memory may endure for ever,
+    and remain always as if present to the readers; as history hath
+    perpetuated the actions of the Greeks and Romans which are of such
+    high antiquity. Of other transactions, nothing inferior to theirs,
+    perhaps even far greater, which have been performed by other nations,
+    there is little or no memory, because these do not remain recorded by
+    history: Such are those of the Assyrians, Medes and Persians; of the
+    Africans against the Romans; of the Suevi against Julius Caesar; of
+    the Spaniards in recovering their country from the Moors; and
+    principally of these invincible and pious kings of Portugal, your
+    glorious ancestors, Don Alonso Henriques, Don Sancho his son, and Don
+    Alonso, who acquired the kingdoms of Portugal and Algarve by great and
+    wonderful deeds of arms. Of all which, there hardly remaineth any
+    memory, for want of having been duly recorded by writing. So likewise
+    of those actions which have been performed in India, only as it were
+    of yesterday, the exact memory of them is confined to four persons;
+    and if they were to die, all remembrance of these transactions must
+    have ended to their great dishonour. Considering these things, I
+    resolved to record these noble deeds which the subjects of your
+    highness have performed in the discovery and conquest of India, which
+    have never been surpassed in valour, or even equalled, in any age or
+    country. Leaving all mention of the conquests of Cyrus and other
+    barbarians, and even taking into the account the deeds of Alexander,
+    so famous over all the world, which are as nothing compared to what
+    has been performed since India became frequented by the Portuguese, no
+    more than a dead lion can be likened to one alive. The conquests of
+    Alexander were all by land, and achieved by himself in person, against
+    nations who were little trained or accustomed to feats of arms. But
+    the Portuguese conquest of India was performed by the captains of your
+    highness, after a voyage by sea of a year and eight months, going
+    almost around the globe, from the utmost limits of the west through
+    the vast and bottomless ocean, seeing only the heaven and the water; a
+    thing never before attempted by man, and hardly even imagined. After
+    surmounting hunger and thirst, and daily exposure to furious storms,
+    and a thousand dangers in the voyage; they had to encounter great and
+    cruel battles on their arrival in India; not against men armed only
+    with bows and spears, as in the time of Alexander, but with people of
+    stout and tried courage and experienced in war, having ordinance and
+    fire-workers more numerous even than the Portuguese, besides many
+    other excellent weapons. The power of these men, against whom the
+    subjects of your highness had to contend, was infinitely greater than
+    that of King Porus, against whom Alexander had to encounter; yet the
+    Portuguese, though few in number, uniformly had the victory, and never
+    retired from the war as was done by Alexander.
+
+    Leaving the actions of the Greeks, and considering what was performed
+    by the Romans with their innumerable armies and vast fleets, which
+    seemed to cover the face of the sea, and by means of which they
+    thought to have conquered the whole earth. Yet they never adventured
+    beyond the Red Sea; neither was the greatest of their famous victories
+    comparable to those battles which have been fought by our men in India;
+    in which, most invincible prince, the great prosperity of your father
+    and you is well known. As, without moving from your palace,
+    discoveries and conquests have been achieved by your captains, more
+    extensive than ever were discovered or conquered by any prince in
+    person. There never was any conquest, either by the Barbarians, Greeks,
+    or Romans, of any thing like equal difficulty with this of India;
+    neither any kings or captains of any of these nations equal in valour
+    and conduct to those of your father and yourself, as will manifestly
+    appear from the whole tenor of the following history.
+
+    The great actions which the subjects of your highness have worthily
+    accomplished, must be deemed to have been permitted and appointed by
+    the providence of God; that so those barbarians, with their vain idols,
+    and the false sectaries of Mahomet, might be brought into the catholic
+    faith, as at this time great numbers have been added to the Christian
+    religion. For, since these great exploits, your highness, as a most
+    godly and Christian prince, hath taken especial care, and hath given
+    command that the Christian doctrine of the _brotherhood of the company
+    of Jesus_ should be taught in India, which you ordered to be brought
+    from Rome, and have always supported at your expence. Thus likewise,
+    you have erected, and founded the noble and sumptuous university of
+    Coimbra, to augment the honour and reputation of your kingdom; where,
+    besides many divines and colleges of poor begging friars to expound
+    the evangelical law, there are temporal men also to instruct those of
+    your subjects that defend and enlarge the commonwealth by deeds of
+    arms, and those who adorn the same by means of learning.
+
+    All these heroic virtues of your highness being well known to me, have
+    encouraged me to publish this work and others, which have some taste
+    of learning, that they may remain a perpetual memorial of the noble
+    deeds of so many gentlemen and knights of Portugal, your subjects. In
+    this I have been much forwarded by having been in India, where I
+    sojourned with my father, who was sent into that country by your
+    highness as a judge. I spent all my youth in the pursuit of learning,
+    and in the study of ancient historians. Being in India, I set myself
+    with all diligence to learn and understand all that had been done in
+    regard to the discovery and conquest of that country by the Portuguese,
+    with the intention of making the same known and common to all men. By
+    my inquiries, and through the information derived from sundry
+    gentlemen and captains, both such as were actually present in the
+    various transactions, and employed in their execution, as by others
+    who were engaged in counselling and preparing the means of their being
+    performed, I have derived much authentic information; as, likewise, by
+    the perusal of many letters and memorials, which were written by men
+    of credit and reputation, all of which I have examined as evidences of
+    the authenticity of my work, both while in India and since my return
+    into Portugal. As the matters I meant to write of were many, so it
+    became necessary for me to acquire information from many sources; and
+    as those whom I examined were upon oath, it is lawful for me to bring
+    them forward as sure evidence. In these researches some of these men
+    had to be sought after in almost every part of Portugal; and being
+    separated in sundry places, my inquiries have occasioned great travel
+    of my person, and much expence; to which I have devoted the greater
+    part of my life, and have constituted the preparation for this work my
+    sole recreation. Since my residence in the university of Coimbra, in
+    the service of your highness, I have joined together all these
+    informations; which, together with the duties of my office, have
+    caused much toil both of body and mind. Having now accomplished the
+    composition of this book and others, I most humbly offer the same to
+    your highness; and, after many and most fortunate years of governing,
+    I pray God to take you from the transitory seignory of this earth, and
+    to receive you into the perpetual joys of Heaven.
+
+    _Hernan Lopes de Castaneda._
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Previous steps taken by the King of Portugal, John II. preparatory to
+the Discovery of India._
+
+Don John, the second of that name, and thirteenth king of Portugal,
+considering that all spices, drugs, precious stones, and other riches
+which came from Venice, were brought out of the east, and being a prince
+of great penetration, and high emprize, he was greatly desirous to
+enlarge his kingdom, and to propagate the knowledge of the Christian
+faith to distant regions. He resolved, therefore, to discover the way by
+sea to the country whence such prodigious riches were brought, that his
+subjects might thereby be enriched, and that his kingdom might acquire
+those commodities which had hitherto been brought by way of Venice. He
+was much encouraged to this enterprise, by learning that there were
+Christians in India, governed by a powerful monarch called Presbyter John,
+who was reported to be a Christian prince, and to whom he thought proper
+to send ambassadors, that an intercourse of friendship might be
+established between them and their subjects. He consulted, therefore,
+with the cosmographers of the time, whom he directed to proceed according
+to the example already given in sailing along the coast of Guinea, which
+had been formerly discovered by command of the prince his uncle, Master
+of the order of Christ. Accordingly, Bartholomew Diaz, one of the
+officers of the royal storehouse at Lisbon, was sent upon this expedition,
+who discovered that great and monstrous cape, now called of Good Hope,
+which was unknown to our ancestors. Finding it both terrible and
+dangerous, he yet passed 140 leagues beyond, to a river which he named
+_Rio del Infante_, whence he returned into Portugal. In this voyage, Diaz
+gave those names which they still retain, to the ports, harbours, and
+rivers where he took in fresh water, and erected certain marks, with
+crosses, and the royal arms of Portugal, the last of which was placed on
+a rock named _El pennol de la Cruz_, fifteen leagues on this side of the
+before mentioned river. Diaz returned from this voyage without having
+procured any intelligence concerning India, as all the inhabitants of the
+coast which he visited and discovered were ignorant black savages.
+
+On the return of Diaz, king John resolved to attempt the discovery of
+India by land; for which purpose he had formerly sent friar Antonio de
+Lisboa by land, in company with a lay person; but as they were ignorant
+of the Arabic language, they could not travel into those parts, and went
+no farther than Jerusalem, whence they returned into Portugal, without
+having acquired any knowledge of the object of their journey. Yet the
+king continued to prosecute this discovery of India by land, for which he
+employed two of his own servants, Pedro de Covillian and Alonso de Payva,
+both versant in the Arabic language, who were instructed to search out
+the dominions of Presbyter John, and the country whence the spices and
+drugs were brought to Venice, and to inquire whether there were any
+navigation from the southern extremity of Africa to India. To these men
+he gave a chart, which was extracted from a map of the world, by
+Calsadilla, bishop of Viseo, an eminent astronomer. He gave them likewise
+a general letter of credit and safe conduct, requiring them to be
+assisted and protected, and supplied with money, in whatever kingdoms or
+countries they might travel; ordering them to receive 400 crowns from the
+chest of the orchard of Almeryn, for their charges. Of this sum, they
+took what they deemed necessary to bear their expences till their arrival
+at Valentia in Arragon, placing the rest in the bank of Bartholomew of
+Florence, to be repaid at Valentia.
+
+Receiving their audience of leave from King John, in presence of Don
+Manuel, duke of Viseo, afterwards king, they departed from Santaxen on
+the 7th May 1487, and came to Naples on St Johns day of that year; whence
+they were forwarded by the sons of Cosmo de Medici, and went to Rhodes,
+and thence to Alexandria. From this place they travelled as merchants to
+Cairo, whence they went in company with certain Moors of Fez and Tremesen
+to Toro, a harbour on the Arabian coast of the Red Sea. They here learned
+many things respecting the Indies, and of the trade from the Red Sea to
+Calicut; and, going from Toro to a place on the coast of Ethiopia, they
+went to the port of Aden. The travellers here separated, Alonso de Payva
+passing over to the emperor of Ethiopia, erroneously called Presbyter
+John: For he, of whom Marco Polo speaks, under that title, as governing
+all the Indies, and whose country joins with the great khan of Kathay,
+was vanquished and slain in a battle by that sovereign; at which time his
+kingdom was put an end to, and no one of that race or title has since
+reigned. Yet Alonso de Payva actually believed that the emperor of
+Ethiopia was Presbyter John, having learnt that he was a Christian king
+over a Christian nation, as shall be more particularly declared hereafter.
+At their separation they agreed to meet again at Cairo, when each had
+executed his part of the royal orders.
+
+Pedro de Covillian sailed from Aden for the Indies, in a ship belonging
+to the Moors of Cananor, and went to Calicut and the island of Goa, where
+he acquired complete information respecting the spices of India, the
+commodities which come from other places, and the towns of the Indies;
+the names of all which he inserted, but ill written, in his chart. From
+India he went to Sofala, where he procured information respecting the
+great island of St Lawrence, called the Island of the Moon by the Moors.
+Observing that the natives of Sofala were black, like those of Guinea, he
+concluded, that all the coast between was under subjection to the Negroes,
+and consequently that navigation was practicable from Guinea to Sofala,
+and thence to the Indies. Returning from Sofala, he went to Ormus, and
+thence to Cairo, where he learnt that Alonso de Payva was dead, and meant
+to have returned to Portugal. He chanced to meet at Cairo two Spanish
+jews, Rabbi Abraham, a native of Viseo, and Joseph, born in Lamego; who,
+after the departure of Covillian and Payva from Portugal, had told the
+king that they had been in Cairo, where they had received much
+information concerning Ormus, and of its trade with the Indies. From
+these Jews Covillian received letters from the king, directed to him and
+Payva, ordering them to return along with the Jews, if they had seen all
+that he had given them in charge. If they had not executed all his
+original instructions, they were now directed to send by the Jews an
+exact account of all the knowledge they had acquired, and to use their
+utmost efforts to visit Presbyter John, and to give all the information
+in their power respecting Ormus, to Rabbi Abraham, who had sworn by his
+law not to return to Portugal without visiting that place.
+
+On receiving these letters, Covillian changed his intention of returning
+into Portugal, and dispatched Joseph there with letters to the king,
+giving an account of all that he had seen and learnt in India and Sofala,
+and transmitted the chart on which he had inserted all the places he had
+visited. In these letters he informed the king that the emperor of
+Ethiopia was assuredly the same with Presbyter John; but my opinion is
+that this is an error, as this sovereign has no such name in his own
+dominions, as I shall more clearly shew hereafter. On the departure of
+Joseph, Covillian and Rabbi Abraham went to Ormus, and thence back to the
+Red Sea; whence Covillian sent Abraham into Portugal, with letters to the
+king, containing all the information acquired in this part of the
+expedition, and intimating his determination to go into the dominions of
+Presbyter John. This he accordingly did, and came to the presence of the
+then emperor of Ethiopia, named Alexander, to whom he delivered the
+letters with which he had been entrusted by the king of Portugal for that
+monarch. Alexander received him courteously, and seemed much pleased with
+the letters of the king of Portugal, as being from so very distant a
+Christian prince, yet did not seem to attach much credit or importance to
+them. But he gave all honour, and many gifts to Covillian.
+
+When Covillian was ready to depart from Ethiopia, and awaited leave for
+that purpose, which he had solicited, Alexander died, and was succeeded
+by a new emperor named _Nahu_, who could never be prevailed on to allow
+of his departure; neither could he procure leave for that purpose from
+the next emperor, David, the son of Nahu, so that Covillian had to remain
+in Ethiopia, and never returned into Portugal. From that time King John
+never heard more of him, and therefore concluded that he was dead;
+nothing having ever been received from him respecting his travels, except
+what was contained in the letters carried by the Jews, as before
+mentioned.
+
+There came afterwards to Lisbon, a friar from this country of Presbyter
+John, who was received courteously by the king, and on whose reports of
+great things concerning that country, the king determined to proceed in
+making a discovery of the way to the Indies by sea. He accordingly gave
+orders to John de Bragança, his surveyor of the forests, to cut down
+timber for building two small ships for that voyage. But King John died,
+and was succeeded by King Manuel, of glorious memory, who had been chosen
+by Divine Providence to accomplish the discovery of these countries, by
+which the Christian faith hath been greatly extended, the royal house of
+Portugal much honoured, and the subjects wonderfully enriched.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Narrative of the first Voyage of Vasco de Gama to India and back, in the
+years 1497, 1498, and 1499_.
+
+On the death of King John, he was succeeded by Don Manuel, a prince of a
+great mind, bent upon high enterprise, and prone to undertake and execute
+things beyond the ordinary reach of human knowledge, even more than was
+Alexander the Great. Being exceedingly desirous to prosecute the
+discovery of the Indies, which had been begun by his predecessor, and
+proceeding upon the information left him by King John, relative to that
+navigation, he commanded Fernan Lorenzo, treasurer of the house of Mina,
+to cause construct two ships for this voyage, from the timber which had
+been provided by King John. These were named the Angel Gabriel and the
+San Raphael, the former being of the burden of 120 tons, the latter 100.
+In addition to these, a caravel of 50 tons, called the Berrio, and a ship
+of 200 tons were purchased. In the year 1497, the king appointed Vasco de
+la Gama, as chief captain for the voyage, an experienced navigator, who
+had done great service, and a man of great valour, well fitted for
+executing the great enterprize intended by the king. Paulo de la Gama,
+brother to the captain-general, and Nicholas Coello, both men of valour
+and enterprise, were appointed the other captains of the squadron.
+Bartholomew Diaz was likewise commanded to accompany the squadron of
+discovery in a caravel to the Mirna: And as the three ships of war
+appointed for the voyage could not contain a sufficient supply of
+provisions for their crews, the ship of 200 tons, which had been
+purchased from Ayres Correa, was ordered to accompany de Gama to a place
+called St Blaze, at which the squadron was to take in water, where the
+victuals with which she was loaded were to be distributed to the other
+ships, after which she was ordered to be burnt.
+
+Having received their orders, Vasco de la Gama and the other captains
+took their leave of the king at _Monte mayor_, and departed for Lisbon,
+where he embarked his company of 148 persons, at Belem, on Saturday the
+8th of July 1497. At this embarkation all the religious belonging to the
+church of our Lady at Belem, went in procession in their cowls, bare-
+headed, and carrying wax candles, praying for the success of the
+expedition; accompanied by almost the whole people of Lisbon, weeping and
+deploring the fate of those who now embarked, as devoted to certain death
+in the attempt of so dangerous a voyage. Thus commended to God and good
+fortune, the officers and crews embarked and immediately set sail. Vasco
+de la Gama, the captain-general, took the command in the Angel Gabriel,
+of which Pedro de Alenquer was pilot, who had been in the same capacity
+with Diaz when he passed the Cape of Good Hope, and discovered the _Rio
+del Infante_. Paulo de Gama went captain of the San Raphael, Nicholas
+Coello of the caravel Berrio, and Gonsalo Gomes[1], a servant of Vasco de
+la Gama, commanded the large victualling ship. The captain-general gave
+out instructions, that in case of separation, they should keep their
+course for Cape Verd, which was appointed as their rendezvous.
+
+Proceeding on the voyage, they came in sight of the Canaries in eight
+days, whence steering for Rio de Oro, they were separated by a tempest,
+during an exceedingly dark night, on which they all shaped their course
+for Cabo Verde. Paulo de la Gama, Nicholas Coello, Bartholomew Diaz, and
+Gonsalo Gomes rejoined, and sailed together for eight days, when they
+came in sight of the captain-general on Wednesday evening, and saluted
+him with many guns, and the sound of trumpets, all heartily rejoicing for
+their safe meeting and good fortune in this their first essay of danger.
+Next day, being the 20th of July[2], the fleet reached the islands of St
+Jago, and came to anchor in the bay of Santa Maria, where it remained
+seven days, taking in fresh water, and repairing the yards and other
+parts of their rigging which had been damaged in the late storm. On
+Tuesday the 3d of August[3], the captain-general went on his voyage,
+after taking leave of Diaz, who now returned to Portugal. Proceeding for
+the Cape of Good Hope with all his squadron, de la Gama _entered the gulf
+into the sea_[4], and sailed all August, September, and October,
+suffering many great tempests of violent wind and rain, so that they
+often expected instant death. At length, on Saturday the 4th November,
+they got sight of land at nine in the forenoon, at which they were
+greatly rejoiced; and being all together, the captains saluted the
+general, all dressed in their best array, and having their ships all
+decorated with flags. Not knowing the coasts they sailed along until the
+Tuesday following, when they had a perfect view of a low shore, in which
+was a great bay, that appeared convenient for the ships to take in water,
+into which they all entered and came to anchor. This place was afterwards
+named _Angra de Santa Elena_, or St Helen's bay[5]. The people of the
+country, as our men afterwards found, were small, black, ill-favoured
+savages, clothed in the skins of beasts, somewhat like French cloaks,
+having curious wrought wooden cases for their privities; and in speaking
+they seemed always, sighing. These natives were armed with oak staves,
+hardened in the fire, pointed with the horns of beasts, somewhat burnt or
+hardened with fire, which served them for swords. They lived on the roots
+of herbs, and on sea wolves and whales, which are very numerous in this
+country, likewise on sea crows and gulls. They also eat of certain beasts,
+which they call Gazelas, and other beasts and birds which the land
+produces; and they have dogs which bark like those of Portugal. The
+general, after the squadron was brought to anchor, sent Coello in a boat
+along the shore, in search of water, which he found four leagues from the
+anchoring ground, at a place which he named St. Jago,[6] whence all the
+ships provided themselves with fresh water.
+
+Next day, the general with the other captains, escorted by some of the
+people, went on shore to view the natives, and to endeavour to learn what
+distance the Cape of Good Hope was from thence; for the chief pilot, who
+had been on the voyage with Diaz, had departed thence on returning, in
+the morning, into the open sea, with a fair wind, and had passed it
+during the night, and had not come near the shore when outward bound;
+wherefore he did not certainly know its situation, nor was he acquainted
+with its appearance, but conjectured it might be thirty leagues from
+where they then were at the utmost. When the general was on shore, he
+overtook one of the natives, who was going to gather honey at the foot of
+a bush, where it is deposited by the bees without any hive. With this
+person, he returned to the ship, thinking to have got an interpreter, but
+no one on board the squadron could understand his language. The general
+commanded this man to have meat and drink, and set him on shore next day
+well dressed, that he might return satisfied to his countrymen.
+Accordingly, the day following, this man came down to the shore abreast
+of the ships, with about fifteen more natives, and the general went
+ashore, carrying with him spices, gold, and pearls, to try if these
+people had any knowledge of these things. But from the little estimation
+with which these articles were viewed, it was concluded that the natives
+had no knowledge of them. The general distributed among the natives some
+small bells, tin rings, counters, and such toys, which they received
+joyfully; and from that time till next Saturday morning, great numbers of
+the natives resorted to the fleet, whence they went back to their towns.
+One Fernan Veloso craved leave of the general to accompany the natives to
+their habitations, that he might see their manner of living. On going
+along with them, the natives took a sea wolf which they roasted at the
+foot of a hill for their supper, after which they made Veloso return to
+the fleet, and it appeared to him that the natives had armed themselves,
+meaning to attack our people. On his return, Veloso saw that he was
+secretly followed, wherefore he hastened to the shore and hailed the
+ships. On this, the general who was then at supper, looked out towards
+the land, where he saw numbers of the savages following Veloso. He
+therefore gave orders for all the ships to be in readiness against an
+attack, and went himself on shore with several others unarmed, not
+dreading any harm. On seeing our boats coming towards the shore, the
+savages began to run away with much clamour; but when our people landed,
+they returned and set upon them furiously, throwing their darts, and
+using other weapons, which constrained our people to take to their boats
+in all haste, taking Veloso along with them; yet in this scuffle the
+general and three others were wounded. The Negroes returned to their
+towns; and during four days after, while our ships remained in the bay,
+they never saw any more of the natives, so that they had no opportunity
+to revenge the injury they had done.
+
+"Some commerce took place between the Portuguese and the Hottentot
+natives around St Elena Bay, by means of signs and gestures; when the
+fleet received plenty of excellent fresh provisions, in exchange for
+clothes, hawks bells, glass beads, and other toys; but this friendly
+intercourse was interrupted through the imprudence of a Portuguese young
+man named Veloso. Delighted with the novelty of the scene, and anxious to
+see the manners of the natives more intimately, he obtained permission to
+accompany them to their huts, where a sea calf was dressed in the
+Hottentot fashion, to his great astonishment. Disgusted at their
+loathsome cookery, he rose abruptly, and was impatient to depart, and was
+accompanied by the natives on his way back to the ships with the utmost
+good humour. Veloso, however, became apprehensive of personal danger, and
+horridly vociferated for assistance on his approach to the shore. Coellos
+boat immediately put off to bring him on board, and the natives fled to
+the woods. These needless apprehensions on both sides were increased by
+mutual ignorance of each others language, and led to hostilities. While
+De Gama was taking the altitude of the sun with an astrolabe, some
+Hottentots sprung from an ambush, and threw their spears, headed with
+horn, very dexterously among the Portuguese, by which the general and
+several others were wounded. On this occasion, the Portuguese deemed it
+prudent to retreat to their ships[7]."
+
+Having taken in fresh water and provisions in St Elena Bay, the squadron
+left that place on the forenoon of Thursday the 16th November, with the
+wind at S.S.W. and steered for the Cape of Good Hope, and on the evening
+of the following Saturday came in sight of that cape. But on account of
+the wind being contrary, he had to stand out to sea all day, and turned
+towards the land as night set in. In that manner he continued plying to
+windward until the following Wednesday, which was the 20th of November[8],
+when he doubled the cape with a fair wind, sounding the trumpets of all
+the ships, and making every demonstration of joy, but placing the chief
+confidence in God, that his providence would guide and protect them in
+accomplishing the enterprise in which they were engaged.
+
+"In this part of the voyage the greatest proofs of courage and resolution
+were evinced by De Gama. While endeavouring to double this formidable and
+almost unknown cape, owing to contrary winds and stormy weather, the
+waves rose mountain high. At one time his ships were heaved up to the
+clouds, and seemed the next moment precipitated into the bottomless abyss
+of the ocean. The wind was piercingly cold, and so boisterous that the
+commands of the pilot could seldom be heard amid the din of the warring
+elements; while the dismal and almost constant darkness increased the
+danger of their situation. Sometimes the gale drove them irresistibly to
+the southwards, while at other times they had to lay to, or to tack to
+windward, difficultly preserving the course they had already made. During
+any gloomy intervals of cessation from the tempest, the sailors,
+exhausted by fatigue, and abandoned to despair, surrounded De Gama,
+entreating him not to devote himself and them to inevitable destruction,
+as the gale could no longer be weathered, and they must all be buried in
+the waves if he persisted in the present course. The firmness of the
+general was not to be shaken by the pusillanimity and remonstrances of
+the crew, on which a formidable conspiracy was entered into against him,
+of which he received timely information from his brother Paulo. With his
+assistance, and that of a few who remained stedfast to their duty, the
+leading conspirators, and even all the pilots, were put in irons; whilst
+De Gama, and his small remnant of faithful followers remained day and
+night at the helm, undismayed at the dangers and difficulties that
+surrounded them. At length, on Wednesday the 20th November, all the
+squadron safely doubled the tremendous promontory[9]."
+
+Continuing the voyage along the coast beyond the cape, they saw great
+numbers of large and small cattle as they passed, all well grown and fat;
+but could perceive no towns, as the villages inhabited by the natives are
+all farther inland, the houses being of earth covered with straw. The
+natives were all somewhat black, clothed like those they had seen at St
+Elena Bay, speaking the same language, and using similar darts, together
+with some other kinds of arms, both for defence and assault. The country
+is very pleasant, being diversified with wood and water; and adjoining to
+the cape on the east side, they found a great harbour now called False
+Bay, almost six leagues wide at the mouth, and running about as much into
+the land. Having thus doubled the cape, the squadron came, on the Sunday
+after, being St Katherine's day, 25th November, to the watering-place of
+St Blaze[10], which is sixty leagues beyond the cape, and is a very large
+bay, exceeding safe in all winds except the north[11].
+
+The natives here resembled those already seen in dress and arms. The
+country produces many large elephants, and numerous oxen, of vast size
+and extremely fat, some of which have no horns. On some of the fattest of
+these the natives were seen riding, on pannels stuffed with rye straw, as
+is used in Spain, and having a frame of wood like a saddle. Such of them
+as they choose to sell they mark by means of a piece of wood, like the
+shaft of one of their arrows, put through the nose. In this harbour,
+about three cross-bow shots from the shore, there is a rock much
+frequented by sea wolves, as large as great bears, very wild and fierce,
+with long, great teeth. These animals are very dangerous, and will attack
+men, and their skins are so hard as not to be pierced with spears, unless
+pushed with much force and valour. These animals resemble lions, and
+their young bleat like kids. One day that our men went to this rock for
+amusement, they saw at least three thousand of these animals, old and
+young. On this rock also, there are great numbers of birds as large as
+ducks which do not fly, having no feathers in their wings, and which bray
+like so many asses[12].
+
+Having thus arrived at the Bay of St Blaze, and lying there at anchor,
+the general caused all the provisions to be taken out of the store-ship
+and divided among the others, and then burned the store-ship, as the king
+had ordered. In this business and other needful employments, for their
+safety in the remainder of the voyage, they were occupied in that bay for
+ten days. On the Friday after their arrival, about ninety of the natives
+made their appearance, some on the shore, and others on the hills, on
+which the general and the captains went to the shore, having their boats
+crews well armed, and even taking ordinance with them, to avoid the same
+accident which had happened at St Elena bay. When near the shore, the
+general threw some bells on the land, which the Negroes pickt up, and
+some of them came so near as to take the bells out of his hands. He much
+wondered at this familiarity, as Diaz had informed him when he was in
+those parts, the natives all ran away and would never approach near
+enough to be seen and conversed with. Finding them thus gentle, contrary
+to his expectation, he went on land with his men, and bartered red night-
+caps with the Negroes, for ivory bracelets which they wore on their arms.
+Next Saturday, the natives came to the shore to the number of more than
+two hundred, including their children, and brought with them twelve oxen,
+and four sheep. When our people went on shore, some of the natives began
+to play on four flutes, in four several tones, making good music; on
+which the general caused the trumpets to be sounded, and the natives
+danced with our people. Thus the day passed in mirth and feasting, and in
+purchasing their oxen and sheep. On Sunday a still greater number of the
+natives came down to the shore, having several women among them, and
+bringing a number of oxen for sale. After the sale of one of the oxen,
+some of our people noticed some young Negroes hidden among certain bushes,
+who had with them the weapons of the older people, from which it was
+conjectured that some treason was intended. Upon this, the general caused
+our people to remove to a place of greater security, and were followed by
+the Negroes to the landing place. The Negroes now gathered together, as
+if they meant to fight the Portuguese; on which the general, being
+unwilling to harm them, embarked in the boats with all his people, and
+then commanded two pieces of brass ordnance to be fired off, on which
+they were much amazed and scampered off in confusion, leaving their
+weapons behind. After this, the general ordered a cross or pillar, having
+the arms of Portugal to be set upon the shore, but the Negroes pulled it
+down immediately, even before our people retired.
+
+After remaining ten days here, as before mentioned, the fleet set sail
+for the Rio del Infante, on Friday the 8th December, being the Conception
+of our Lady, and during this part of the voyage, there arose a great
+storm with _forewind_ on the eve of St Lucy, 12th December, that all the
+ships run under close reefed courses. During this storm, they parted
+company with Nicholas Coello, but rejoined the next night after. On the
+16th December, when the gale abated, they discovered land near certain
+small rocks, sixty leagues from the harbour of St Blaze, and five leagues
+from the Pennon de la Cruz, where Diaz set up his last stone pillar[13],
+and fifteen leagues short of the Rio del Infante[14]. This country was
+very pleasant, and abounded in cattle, becoming more sightly and with
+higher trees the further our fleet sailed towards the east, as could be
+easily seen from the ships as they sailed along near the shore. On
+Saturday they passed close within sight of the rock _de la Cruz_, and
+being loath to pass the _Rio del Infante_, they stood out to sea till
+vespers, when the wind came round to the east, right contrary. On this,
+the general stood off, and on plying to windward, till Tuesday the 20th
+December, at sunset, when the wind changed to the west, which was
+favourable. Next day at ten o'clock, they came to the before-mentioned
+rock, being sixty leagues a-stern of the place they wished to have
+attained[15].
+
+This rock is the cause of the great currents on this coast, which were so
+powerful, that the fleet had much ado with a brisk favourable wind to
+stem the current between that place and Rio Infante in three or four days;
+but at length they joyfully passed these currents without damage, as Diaz
+had done formerly, and the general, encouraged by his good fortune, gave
+thanks to God, saying, he verily believed it was the good pleasure of God
+that they should attain to the discovery of the Indies.
+
+Thus continuing the voyage till Christmas day, they had discovered
+seventy leagues to the eastwards, and had arrived in the latitude in
+which India was said to be in his instructions. The fleet continued to
+sail for so long a time without going to land, as to be in want of water,
+insomuch that they had to dress their provisions in sea water, and were
+forced to reduce the allowance of drink to one pint of water per man each
+day. But on Friday the 11th January 1498, drawing near the land, the
+boats were sent out to view the coast, where they saw many Negroes, both
+men and women, all of whom were of great stature, and followed our boats
+along the coast. As these people appeared quiet and civil, the general
+called Martin Alonzo, who could speak many of the Negro languages, and
+desired him and another to leap on shore, which they immediately did.
+Alonzo and his companion were well received by the natives, especially by
+their chief, to whom the general sent a jacket, a pair of breeches, and a
+cap, all of a red colour, and a copper bracelet, of which he was very
+proud, and returned thanks to the general, saying, "that he might have
+any thing he wished for or needed that his country produced." All which,
+as Martin Alonzo understood their language[16], he reported to the
+general, who was much pleased that by this means an intercourse could be
+opened with the natives. Alonzo and another of our people were
+accordingly permitted by the general to go for one night along with the
+natives to their town, where the chief dressed himself out in his new
+garments, and was beheld with much admiration by his people in his finery,
+clapping their hands for joy. This salutation was repeated three or four
+times on their way to the town, and when there, the chief made the
+circuit of the whole village, that all the people might see and admire
+his new and strange attire. When this ceremonial was ended, the chief
+retired to his own house, where he commanded Alonzo and his companion to
+be well lodged and entertained, and gave them for supper a hen exactly
+the same as one of ours, and a kind of pap, or porridge, made of a yellow
+grain called _Mylyo_[17], of which likewise they made bread. Many of the
+Negroes repaired that night to their lodging to have a near view of the
+strangers; and next day, the chief sent them back to the ships,
+accompanied by some Negroes, laden with hens for the general, who
+returned thanks for the same by means of Alonzo his interpreter. During
+five days that our ships remained off this coast, no kind of harm was
+done or offered by the inhabitants, who seemed quiet and gentle, and to
+have many _noble men_, for which reason, he called this place _Terra da
+boa gente_, or the land of Good People[18]. The town in which Martin
+Alonzo was had its houses constructed of straw, yet well furnished within.
+The women were more numerous than the men, as in a company of forty women,
+there were only twenty men. These people were armed with long bows and
+arrows, and had darts headed with iron, having many copper bracelets, on
+their arms and legs, with copper ornaments in their hair. They have also
+iron daggers, with pewter handles and ivory sheaths; so that it is
+manifest they have plenty of copper and tin. They have likewise abundance
+of salt, which they make from sea water, which they carry in gourds to
+certain caves where the salt is made. They were so fond of linen, that
+they gave a great quantity of copper in exchange for an old shirt, and
+were so quiet and civil, that they brought water to our boats from a
+river about two cross-bow shots from the landing, which our people named
+Rio do Cobre, or Copper River.
+
+"Osorius places the arrival of the Portuguese on this part of the coast a
+day earlier than Castaneda, and gives the following additional
+information. On the 10th January 1498, they discovered some small islands,
+about 230 miles from their last watering-place, having a very beautiful
+appearance, and consisting of verdant meadows, intermixed with groves of
+lofty trees, where they could see the inhabitants walking on the shore in
+great numbers. Here De Gama landed, and sent one of his men, who was well
+versant in the Negro languages to visit the king, and who was received
+with much civility, receiving presents of the produce of the country on
+his dismissal. Before leaving Lisbon, De Gama received ten malefactors on
+board who had been condemned to die, but were pardoned on condition of
+going on this voyage, for the purpose of being left wherever De Gama
+pleased, that they might examine the country, and be enabled to give him
+an account of the inhabitants on his return. On setting sail from this
+place, De Gama left two of these exiles on shore, to inform themselves of
+the character and manners of the natives[19].
+
+From this place our fleet departed on the 15th January, and proceeding on
+their voyage, came to another country of very low land, having very thick
+tall trees; and proceeding onwards, they found a river which was very
+open at the mouth, near which he came to anchor on Thursday the 24th of
+January, as the general deemed it proper to examine this country, and to
+try if any intelligence could be here procured concerning India. That
+same evening, he and his brother Nicholas Coello[20] entered the river;
+and, at day-break next morning, the land was observed to be extremely low
+and covered with water, having many trees of great height, thickly loaded
+with various kinds of fruits, the country appearing very pleasant. They
+saw likewise certain boats with some of the natives coming towards the
+ship, at which the general was well pleased, as he conceived from their
+having some degree of maritime knowledge in these parts, that he could
+not now be very far from India, or at least should soon hear news of that
+country. The natives were Negroes of good stature, all naked, except each
+a small apron of cloth made of cotton. On reaching the ships, they came
+on board without hesitation, and behaved themselves as if they had been
+long acquainted with our people. They were well received, and were
+presented with bells and other toys, but did not understand any of the
+languages spoken by Martin Alonzo, or any of the other interpreters on
+board, so that the only intercourse was by signs. They departed after
+good entertainment, and afterwards they and many others returned to the
+ships in their boats, bringing with them such provisions as their country
+afforded. The natives seemed much satisfied with their reception; and
+besides those who came to the ships by water, many others came by
+land[21], among whom were several women who were tolerably handsome,
+especially the young maidens; but all were as naked as the men. They have
+three holes in their lips, in which they wear small pieces of tin by way
+of ornament. The natives took several of our men along with them to make
+merry at one of their towns, whence they brought water to our ships.
+
+After the general had been three days in this river, two of the nobles,
+or head men of the natives, came on board to visit him, who were naked
+like the rest, except that their aprons were much larger, and one of them
+had a handkerchief on his head, embroidered with silk, while the other
+wore a nightcap of green satin[22]. Observing their cleanliness, or
+civility, the general treated these people courteously, and gave them
+victuals, apparel, and other things, of which they seemed to make but
+small account; and by certain signs, shewn by a young man, it was
+understood that his country was at a considerable distance, where he had
+seen ships as large as ours. This intelligence gave great hopes to our
+people that the Indies were not far off, which was much confirmed by the
+chiefs who had been on board, sending off for sale certain cloths made of
+cotton, on which there were marks of ochre. In respect of all these
+encouraging tokens, the general named this river _Ho rio dos bos Sinaes_,
+or River of Good Signs; and called the place San Rafael, after the name
+of his own Ship[23].
+
+From the signs of the before-mentioned young men, that the country of the
+head men who had been on board was far off, where they had seen large
+ships, the general concluded that the Indies were still at a great
+distance; and therefore determined, in consultation with the other
+captains, to lay the ships aground, to give their bottoms a thorough
+repair, which was done accordingly. In this operation they employed
+thirty-two days, during which, our people were much afflicted with a
+grievous sickness, thought to proceed from the air of the country. Their
+hands and feet became swelled, and their gums became so sore and putrid
+that they could not eat, and the smell of their breath was quite
+intolerable[24]. With this pestilent infection our people were much
+discouraged, and many of them died, the survivors being in great trouble
+and perplexity. But De Gama took much care, and used much diligence for
+their recovery, and to comfort their affliction; continually visiting the
+sick, and giving them such wholesome and medicinal things as he had
+provided for his own use; through all which many recovered who would have
+died, and the rest were thereby greatly comforted, and encouraged.
+
+Having repaired the ships, and provided them with all necessaries that
+could be procured at the river of Good Signs, the fleet departed from
+thence on Saturday the 24th of February.
+
+"At this period, two accidents occurred which had nearly frustrated all
+the hopes of this expedition. De Gama being along side of the ship
+commanded by his brother, with whom he wished to speak, had hold of the
+chains, when the boat was carried from under him by the force of the
+current, but by immediate assistance, he and his boats crew were
+providentially saved. Soon afterwards, when the fleet was passing the bar
+of the river, the ship of De Gama grounded on a sand bank, and her loss
+was for some time considered as inevitable; but she floated again with
+the return of the tide, and to their inexpressible joy received no
+damage[25]."
+
+As there was little or no wind, the fleet stood out to sea to avoid the
+shore, and about vespers on Sunday, they descried three small islands out
+to sea, about four leagues distant from each other. Two of these were
+replenished with trees, but the third was quite bare. Seeing no cause to
+delay the voyage in examining these islands, De Gama held on for six days,
+coming always to anchor at night. On the evening of Thursday, the first
+of March, they came in sight of four islands, two of which were near the
+land, and the other two farther out to sea; and the fleet steered through
+the channel next morning, the ship commanded by Coello, as being the
+smallest, going first. But endeavouring to enter a certain harbour,
+between the mainland and one of these islands, Coello missed the channel
+and ran aground, on which the other ships put about and went back. They
+soon perceived seven or eight boats under sail coming from the island
+which was a good league distant from Coello, at which sight they were
+much rejoiced, and Coello and his people received them with much
+demonstration of friendship and satisfaction, Coello went along with
+these people to the general, and presented them, saying, that here was a
+quite different kind of people from any they had seen hitherto. Then the
+general commanded _to let them go a seaboard with their boats_[26], as he
+proposed to go with them to their island to anchor with his ships, that
+he might see what kind of a country it was, and if he could learn any
+certain intelligence concerning India. But the boats continued to follow
+our ships, making signals, and calling to our people to wait for them;
+wherefore the ships came to anchor, and the boats came to our fleet. The
+people on board were of good stature and somewhat black, clothed in
+dresses of cotton, striped with sundry colours; some girdled to their
+knees, while others carried their apparel on their shoulders like cloaks.
+Their heads were covered with kerchiefs, somewhat wrought with silk and
+gold thread, and they were armed with swords and daggers like Moors. In
+their boats, also, they had certain musical instruments named _sagbuts_.
+They came immediately on board with as much confidence as if they were
+long acquainted, and entered into familiar conversation in the language
+of Algarve, and would not be known as Moors[27].
+
+The general ordered these people to be well entertained, and they eat and
+drank willingly of whatever was set before them; after which, by means of
+Fernan Alvarez, who could speak their language, he learned that the
+island to which they belonged was called Monsambicke, or Mozambique, on
+which was a town full of merchants, who traded with the Moors of India,
+who bring them silver, linen cloth, pepper, ginger, silver rings, many
+pearls, and rubies; and that, from a country behind, they procure gold.
+They offered likewise to conduct our people into the harbour, where they
+would learn the truth of these things more fully. On consulting with the
+other captains, the general determined upon going into this harbour, to
+examine more accurately into these reports, and to procure pilots to
+carry them on their voyage, as they had no one in the fleet who knew the
+way. Nicholas Coello was therefore ordered to make the first essay, and
+to take the soundings of the bar, his ship being the smallest. But in
+entering, he touched on the point of the island where he broke his helm,
+and was in great danger of being lost; but by good providence he got off
+with no farther injury. He now found the bar was quite safe, and got into
+the harbour, where he anchored two cross-bow shots from the town, which
+is in fifteen degrees towards the south[28]. The harbour is very good,
+the town is plentifully supplied with such provisions as the country
+produces, the houses being constructed of straw, and the inhabitants
+Moors, who trade to Sofala in large vessels that have neither decks nor
+nails, their planks being sewed together with _cayro_ or twine, made from
+the fibres of the cocoa nut rind, and their sails of mats made of the
+leaves of a species of palm. Some of these vessels use compasses of Genoa,
+and regulate their voyages by means of quadrants and sea charts. With
+these Moors the Moors of India trade, as likewise do those from the Red
+Sea, because of the gold which is to be had here. On seeing our people,
+the Moors of Mozambique thought the Portuguese had been Turks, whom they
+knew of from the Moors who dwell on the Red Sea; and those who were first
+at our ships carried intelligence to the xeque, or sheik, which is the
+title of the governor of this island for the king of Quiloa, in whose
+territories it is situated.
+
+"Though we shall afterwards have occasion to investigate this eastern
+coast of Africa more fully, in editing particular voyages to its shores,
+some notices seem here to be proper[29]. Owing to his keeping at a
+distance from, the shore for security, the present voyage gives little
+knowledge of the eastern coast of Africa, and it is even difficult to
+assign the many stations at which De Gama touched between the Cape of
+Good Hope and Mozambique. We have already noticed the river of Good Signs,
+as being probably the northern mouth of the Delta of the Zambeze, now
+called _Quilimane_, from a fort of that name on its banks. The mouth of
+this branch runs into the sea in lat. 18° 25' S. In his passage from the
+_Terra de Natal_, or Christmas Land, so named from having been discovered
+on Christmas day, and named, in this account of De Gamas voyage, _the
+Land of Good People_, De Gama missed Cape Corientes, forming the S.W.
+point of the channel of Mozambique, or _Inner Passage_, as it is now
+called, and overshot Sofala, the southern extremity of Covilhams
+discoveries, at which he was probably directed to touch, as Covilhams
+chart might have been of some use to direct his farther progress to Aden,
+and thence to Calicut or Cananor, on the Malabar coast.
+
+"The eastern coast of Africa is hitherto very little known to geography,
+its trade being entirely confined to the Portuguese, who have
+settlements at Sofala, the river Zambeze, Mozambique, Quiloa, and Melinda,
+and conceal all the circumstances respecting their foreign possessions
+with infinite jealousy. It is said to have once been in contemplation by
+the British government, to employ Sir Home Popham to make a survey of
+this coast, but this design was never executed. Commodore Blanket
+remained on this station for a considerable time, and much information
+may be expected from his journal, some drawings of the coast having been
+already made for charts, which are preparing, under the orders of the
+Admiralty. About the year 1782, a great mass of geographical information
+was collected on the continent of Europe and lodged in the British Museum,
+from which information may probably be derived respecting this coast,
+when that collection shall have been arranged and submitted to the
+public. According to D'Apres, all the eastern coast of Africa, for a
+great way south of the equinoctial, is lined by a range of islands,
+whence shoals extend to the distance of a league. These islets form an
+outer shore, with a winding channel within, and are in some places a
+league from the coast of the continent, though very apt to be mistaken
+for the real coast. Within this range the boats or almadias of the
+country ply backwards and forwards in great safety, in the intervening
+channel.
+
+"Ptolemy places the _Prasum promontorium_, or Green Cape, the extreme
+southern boundary of ancient knowledge of the east coast of Africa, in
+lat. 15" 30' S. and the Portuguese universally assume Mozambique as
+Prasum, by which classical name it is distinguished in the Lusiad of
+Camoens, in reference to the voyage of De Gama, and the near coincidence
+of situation gives great probability to this supposition. [Greek:
+prason] signifies a leek, and is also used to denote a sea-weed of a
+similar green colour, and the name may either have been derived from the
+verdure of the point, or from the sea-weeds found in its neighbourhood.
+At all events, Prasum cannot be farther south than Cape Corientes, or
+farther north than Quiloa or the Zanguebar islands. The harbour of
+Mozambique has seldom less than eight or ten fathom water, which is so
+clear, that every bank, rock, or shallow can be easily seen.
+
+"The Moors, so often mentioned, are supposed by Bruce to have been
+merchants expelled from Spain by Ferdinand and Isabella, who first fixed
+their residence on the western coast of Africa, and extending themselves
+eastwards, formed settlements in Arabia and Egypt, till the oppressions
+of Selim and Soliman, the Turkish emperors, interrupted their commerce,
+and obliged them to disperse along the coast of Abyssinia and eastern
+Africa. Besides the impossibility, chronologically, for the assigned
+causes having produced the supposed effect, there is no necessity for
+having recourse to this improbable hypothesis. From being best acquainted
+with their Moorish conquerors, the Spaniards and Portuguese have always
+been accustomed to name all the Arabians Moors, wherever they found them,
+and even gave at first the name of _black_ Moors to the Negroes, whence
+our old English term _Black-a-moors_. It is well known that the Arabs,
+especially after their conversion to Mahometanism, were great colonizers
+or conquerors; even the now half-christian kingdom of Abyssinia was an
+early colony and conquest of the pagan Arabs, and its inhabitants are
+consequently _white_ Moors in the most extended Portuguese sense. The
+Arab, or Moorish kingdoms along the African coast of the Indian ocean,
+are branches from the same original stem, and the early Mahometan
+missionaries were both zealous and successful in propagating Islaemism
+among the most distant pagan colonies of their countrymen. As all zealous
+Mussulmen are enjoined the pilgrimage of Mecca, and commerce mixes
+largely with religion in the holy journey, by which the faithful from
+every distant region often meet at Mecca, and induce each other to extend
+their commercial adventures to new regions, it may possibly have been,
+that some Moors originally from Spain, may even have reached Mozambique
+before the time of De Gama; but it is ridiculous to suppose that all the
+Moors on the African coast had been Spaniards. The overthrow of the great
+Moorish kingdom of Granada only took place five or six years before the
+present voyage.
+
+"The island of Mozambique, which does not exceed a league in
+circumference, is described as low and swampy, and was inhabited by Moors
+who had come from Quiloa and Sofala. It was afterwards much resorted to
+by the Portuguese as a winter station, and became the key of their Indian
+trade. The African coast stretches out on both sides of the island into
+two points, that on the north-east called Pannoni, off which a shoal with
+three islets extends, some way into the sea. The southern point is called
+Mangale[30]."
+
+When the Moorish governor of Mozambique[31] was informed of the arrival
+of the Portuguese, and that Coello was come to anchor in the harbour, he
+fully supposed that they were Turks or Moors from some distant place, and
+immediately came to visit him, apparelled in fine silk, with many
+attendants. Coello received him very courteously; but as neither he nor
+any in his ship could speak their language, the governor soon retired.
+Coello gave him, however, a red cap, on which he seemed to set little
+value, and presented him likewise with some black beads, which he carried
+away in his hand, both being given and received in token of friendship.
+On leaving the ship, he required Coello, by signs, to let him have the
+boat to carry him on shore, which Coello readily agreed to, and sent some
+of his men to the land along with him. These the governor carried to his
+house, and feasted them on dates and other things, and sent back with
+them a pot of preserved dates to Coello, with which he regaled the
+general and his brother when they had entered the harbour. On the arrival
+of the other two ships, the governor again sent off some of his people to
+visit them, still taking them for Turks, presenting many pleasant and
+delicate viands, and asking permission to visit them in person. The
+general, in return, sent the governor a present, consisting of red hats,
+short gowns, coral, brass basons, hawks bells and many other things,
+which he slighted as of no value, and asked why the general had not sent
+him scarlet, which he chiefly desired.
+
+Soon afterwards the governor came off to visit the general; who, being
+apprized of his coming, ordered all the ships to be dressed out in their
+flags. He likewise made all the sick and infirm men to be kept out of
+sight, and brought a good many of the most alert men from the other ships,
+whom he ordered to be secretly armed, in case of any violence or
+treachery on the part of the Moors. The governor came on board,
+accompanied with many men, all well apparelled in silk, having many ivory
+trumpets and other musical instruments, on which they played almost
+without ceasing. The governor was a lean man, of good stature, dressed in
+a linen shirt down to his heels, over which he wore a long gown of Mecca
+velvet, having a cap of silk of many colours, trimmed with gold, on his
+head, at his girdle he wore a sword and dagger, and had silk shoes. The
+general received him on entering the ship, and led him to an awning,
+trimmed up in the best manner they were able. The general then begged him
+not to be offended that no scarlet had been sent, having brought none
+with him, and that his ships only contained such merchandize as were fit
+to be bartered for victuals for the people; and that his only object at
+present was to discover the way to the Indies, for which purpose he had
+been sent by a great and mighty king, his master. All this was conveyed
+through the interpretation of Fernan Martin[32]. The general then ordered
+an entertainment of the best meats and wines which the ship afforded, to
+be set before the governor and his principal attendants, of all which
+they partook willingly, even drinking wine with good will. The governor
+asked whether they came from Turkey, as he had heard say that the Turks
+were a fair people like them, and desired to see our country bows, and
+the books of our law. To this the general answered, that he and his men
+were not from Turkey, but from a kingdom in their neighbourhood; that he
+would most willingly shew his bows and other weapons, but had not the
+books of our law, as they were not needed at sea. Then some cross-bows
+were brought, which were bent, and shot off in presence of the governor,
+also some of our harness or defensive armour, with all of which he was
+much pleased, and greatly astonished.
+
+During this conference, the general learnt that the port of Calicut in
+India was 900 leagues distant from Mozambique; and, as there were many
+shoals in the course, that it was very necessary to have a pilot from
+this place. He learned also that there were many cities along the coast.
+He likewise understood, that the kingdom of Prester John was far from
+this place, in the inland country[33]. Considering the expediency of
+having a pilot, the general requested to have two from the governor, who
+agreed to the demand, on condition that they should be well used. The
+reason of wishing to have two was, lest one might die during the voyage,
+and our people were much pleased with this promise. The governor came a
+second time to visit the general, and brought with him both the pilots
+whom he had promised; to each of whom were given thirty crowns and a coat,
+each crown being worth five shillings, under this condition, that
+whenever one of them should go on shore, the other should remain on board,
+that one might always stay by the ship while in harbour.
+
+Notwithstanding these friendly meetings, speeches, and assurances, it
+soon appeared, after the departure of the governor, that the Moors had
+learned, during their intercourse with our people, that they were
+Christians, on which the former friendship and good will of the Moors
+towards them was changed to wrath and fury, and they henceforwards used
+every endeavour to kill our men, and to take possession of the ships. The
+governor, therefore, and his people, used every effort for this
+mischievous purpose, and had certainly succeeded, if the Almighty had not
+moved the heart of one of the Moorish pilots who had been received into
+the Portuguese fleet, to reveal the same to the general; who, fearing
+lest the infidels might suddenly execute their purpose, as being numerous
+in comparison to his small company, determined to remain no longer in the
+harbour. Wherefore, on Saturday the 10th March 1498, being seven days
+after his arrival, he quitted the harbour of Mozambique, and cast anchor
+close to an island, at the distance of a league from that place;
+intending, on Sunday, to hear mass on shore, that they might confess and
+receive the sacrament, which had not been done since leaving Lisbon.
+
+After the ships were come to anchor in this place of safety from being
+burnt by the Moors, which the general greatly dreaded, he determined to
+go back to Mozambique in his boat, to demand the other pilot who had been
+promised, but who still remained on shore. Leaving his brother with the
+fleet, in readiness to come to his aid if needful, the general went
+towards Mozambique with his boat, accompanied by Nicholas Coello, and the
+Moorish pilot. On their way they saw six _zambucos_ or boats, filled with
+Moors, coming towards them, armed with long bows and arrows, and also
+with shields and spears. The Moors called to our people to come along
+with them to the town; and the Moorish pilot, who explained their signals,
+advised the general to do so, as the governor would not otherwise deliver
+the other pilot, who still remained on shore. The general was much
+displeased at this advice, believing the pilot only wished him to
+approach the shore, that he might be able to run away, and therefore
+ordered him to be secured as a prisoner. He likewise gave orders to fire
+at the Moorish boats from his ordnance. When Paulo de la Gama heard the
+shot, believing the general to be in more danger than he actually was, he
+immediately came with the ship Berrio under sail to his aid. On seeing
+this, the Moors fled away in such haste that the general could not
+overtake them, and therefore returned with his brother to where the other
+ships were at anchor.
+
+Next day, being Sunday, the general and all his men went on shore, where
+they heard mass, and received the sacrament very devoutly, having
+confessed the evening before. After this they re-embarked and set sail
+the same day. Having no hope of procuring the other pilot, the general
+ordered to release him whom he had confined, and carried him on the
+voyage. But he, willing to be revenged for the indignity he had
+experienced, determined on carrying the Portuguese fleet to the island of
+Quiloa, which was all peopled with Moors; and, as it seemed, intended to
+inform the king of that place that our ships belonged to the Christians,
+that he might destroy them and kill the crews. For this purpose, he
+craftily persuaded the general not to be in trouble for want of the other
+pilot, as he would carry him to a great island, on hundred leagues from
+thence, which was inhabited half by Moors, and half by Christians, who
+were always in war with each other, and where he might easily find pilots
+to conduct him to Calicut. Though the general was much pleased with this
+information, he yet did not give implicit credit to the Moor, but
+promised him high rewards if he carried him in safety to that country,
+and so went forward on the voyage with a scant wind.
+
+On the Tuesday the fleet was still in sight of the land from which they
+took their departure, and remained becalmed all that day and the next. On
+Wednesday night, a gentle breeze sprung up from the eastward, on which
+the fleet stood off to seaward, but on Thursday morning, on again making
+the land, they were four leagues to leeward of Mozambique, whence plying
+to windward, they came back that evening to the island where they had
+heard mass on the Sunday before, where they cast anchor and remained
+eight days waiting for a fair wind. While here at anchor, a white Moor,
+who was a _molah_ or minister among the Moors of Mozambique, came on
+board the generals ship, representing that the governor was much grieved
+at the breach of peace and friendship between them, which he would now
+gladly renew. To this the general made answer, that he would make no
+peace with the governor unless he sent him the other pilot whom he had
+hired and paid. With this answer the _molah_ departed, and never came
+back. After this, while still waiting for a fair wind, there came another
+Moor on board, accompanied with his son, a boy, and asked the general to
+give him a passage to the city of Melinda, which he said was on his way
+to Calicut. He said that he was a native of the country near Mecca,
+whence he had piloted a ship to Mozambique, and would gladly go with him,
+that he might return to his own country; and farther, he counselled the
+general not to remain in expectation of any answer from the _zeque_, who
+he was sure would make no peace with him, on account of his hatred to the
+Christians. The general was rejoiced at the coming of this Moor,
+expecting to acquire information from him concerning the straits of the
+Red Sea, and of the towns on the coast between Mozambique and Melinda, by
+which he had to sail, and therefore gave orders to receive this Moor and
+his son on board.
+
+As the ships were rather short of water, the general and the other
+captains determined upon entering the harbour of Mozambique, to take in
+what they needed; but ordered strict watch to be kept, lest the Moors
+should set the ships on fire. They entered therefore again into the
+harbour on Thursday; and when night came, they went in their boats in
+search of water, which the Moorish pilot assured them was to be found on
+the firm land, and offered to guide them to the place. Leaving Paulo de
+la Gama in charge of the ships, and taking Nicholas Coello and the pilot
+along with him in the boats, the general went on shore about midnight to
+the place where the pilot said that water was to be had. But it could not
+be found; whether that the pilot misled them in hope of escaping, or
+finding he could not escape, did so out of malice. Having spent the whole
+night fruitlessly in search of water, and day beginning to dawn, the
+general returned to the ships for more force, lest the Moors might set
+upon him and his small company at a disadvantage. Having furnished his
+boats with a larger force of armed men, he returned to the shore, still
+accompanied by Coello and the Moorish pilot, who, seeing no means of
+escaping, now pointed out the watering-place close by the shore. At this
+place they observed about twenty Moors armed with darts, who shewed as if
+they meant to prevent them from taking water. The general therefore gave
+orders to fire three guns, to force them from the shore, that our men
+might be able to land unopposed. Amazed and frightened by the noise and
+the effect of the shot, the Moors ran away and hid themselves in the
+bushes; and our people landed quietly, and took in fresh water, returning
+to the ships a little before sunset. On arriving, the general found his
+brother much disquieted, because a Negro, belonging to John Cambrayes,
+the pilot of Paulo de la Gama, had run away to the Moors, though himself
+a Christian.[34]
+
+Upon Saturday the 24th of March, being the eve of the annunciation of our
+Lady, a Moor appeared early in the morning on the shore, abreast of the
+ships, calling out in a loud and shrill voice, "that if our men wanted
+any more water they might now come for it, when they would find such as
+were ready to force their return." Irritated at this bravado, and
+remembering the injury done him in withholding the promised pilot, and
+the loss of the Negro, the general resolved to batter the town with his
+ordnance in revenge, and the other captains readily agreed to the measure.
+Wherefore they armed all their boats, and came up before the town, where
+the Moors had constructed a barricade of boards for their defence on the
+shore, so thick that our men could not see the Moors behind. Upon the
+shore, between that defence and the sea, an hundred Moors were drawn up,
+armed with targets, darts, bows, arrows, and slings, who began to sling
+stones at the boats as soon as they came within reach. They were
+immediately answered with shot from our ordnance, on which they retired
+from the shore behind their barricade, which was soon beaten down, when
+they ran into the town, leaving two of their men slain. The general and
+his men now returned to the ships to dinner, and the Moors were seen
+running from that town to another; and so much were they afraid of the
+Portuguese, that they abandoned the island, going by water to another
+place on the opposite side. After dinner, our people went with their
+captains on shore, to endeavour to take some of the Moors, with the hope
+of procuring restitution of the Negro belonging to Cambrayes, who had run
+away from the ships, and they were likewise desirous of recovering two
+Indians, who were said by the Moorish pilot to be detained as captives in
+Mozambique.
+
+On this occasion, Paulo de la Gama seized four Moors who were in a boat;
+but a great many Moors in other boats escaped, by hastening on shore and
+leaving their boats behind, in which our men found much cotton cloth, and
+several books of their Mahometan law, which the general ordered to be
+preserved. The general and the other captains ranged in their boats along
+side of the town, but did not venture on shore, not having sufficient
+force, nor could they get any speech of the Moors. Next day they went on
+shore at the watering-place, where they took what was needed without any
+opposition from the Moors. Being now hopeless of recovering the Negro, or
+of procuring the Indian captives, it was determined to depart; but the
+general resolved to be revenged on the town and people for their enmity.
+For which reason, he went against it next day with ordnance, and
+destroyed it in such sort that the Moors had to abandon it, and flee into
+another island within the country.[35] This being done, the fleet weighed
+anchor on Tuesday the 27th of March, and departed from Mozambique, whence
+they proceeded to two little rocks, which they called St George, and
+where they came to anchor in waiting for a wind, which was now contrary.
+Soon afterwards the wind came fair and they departed, but the wind was so
+light, and the currents so strong, that they were forced in a retrograde
+course.
+
+The general was much pleased to find that one of the Moors taken by his
+brother at Mozambique was a pilot, and was acquainted with the navigation
+to Calicut. Proceeding on their voyage, they came, on Sunday the first of
+April, to certain islands very near the coast, to the first of which they
+gave the name of _Ilha da Açoutado_, because the Moorish pilot of
+Mozambique was here severely whipt by order of the general, for having
+falsely said that these islands were part of the continent, and likewise
+for not shewing the way to the watering-place at Mozambique, as before
+related. Being cruelly whipt, the Moor confessed that he had brought them
+to this place expressly that they might perish on the rocks and shoals of
+these islands, which were so numerous and so close together, that they
+could hardly be distinguished from each other. On this the general stood
+out to sea, and on Friday the 4th of April,[36] standing to the north-
+west, he came in sight, before noon, of a great land, with two islands
+near the coast, around which were many shoals. On nearing the shore, the
+Moorish pilots recognized it, and said that the Christian island of
+Quiloa was three leagues astern; on which the general was much grieved,
+believing certainly that the natives of Quiloa had been Christians, as
+represented by the pilots, and that they had purposely taken a wrong
+course that the ships might not come there. The pilots, to conceal their
+treachery, alleged that the winds and currents had carried the ships
+farther than they reckoned. But in truth, they were more disappointed in
+this than even the general, as they had reckoned upon being here revenged
+upon the Portuguese, by having them all slain. In this God preserved our
+people from the intended danger most miraculously, for if they had gone
+to Quiloa they had all surely perished; as the general was so fully
+persuaded of the natives being Christians, as reported by the pilot, that
+he would doubtless have landed immediately on his arrival, and have
+thereby run headlong to a place where he and all his people would have
+been slain. Both parties being thus sorry for having missed Quiloa, the
+general because he hoped to have found Christians, and the Moorish pilots
+because of their intended treachery, it was determined to put back with
+the intention of seeking for it; but still the wind and currents opposed
+their purpose, and they tried a whole day in vain. This doubtless
+proceeded from the providence of God, and his merciful goodness to our
+men, who were thus preserved by miracle from the malicious and devilish
+intentions of the two Moorish pilots of Mozambique.
+
+The fleet being thus baffled and tossed to and fro, it was determined to
+bear away for the island of Mombaza, in which the pilots said there were
+two towns, peopled both by Moors and Christians. But they gave out this
+as before to deceive our people, and to lead them to destruction; for
+that island was solely inhabited by Moors, as is the whole of that coast.
+Understanding that Mombaza was seventy miles distant, they bore away for
+that place, and towards evening, they came in sight of a great island
+towards the north, in which the Moorish pilots pretended there were two
+towns, one of Christians and the other of Moors; making this false
+assertion to make our people believe that there were many Christians on
+this coast. While pursuing their voyage towards Mombaza for some days,
+the ship San Raphael chanced one morning, two hours before day, to get
+aground on certain shoals, two leagues from the shore of the continent.
+Paulo de Gama immediately made signals to apprize the other ships of his
+situation and their danger; on which they had the good fortune to avoid
+the shoals and got safely to anchor. The boats from the other ships were
+immediately sent off to assist Paulo de Gama in the St Raphael; and, on
+seeing that the tide was then low, the general was much rejoiced, as he
+well knew she would float again with the tide of flood; whereas, before,
+he was much afraid she might be totally lost. He therefore gave orders to
+carry all their anchors out to deep water, to prevent her from getting
+farther on the shoal. By the time this was done day broke, and soon after
+at low water the St Raphael was quite dry on a sand bank, having taken no
+harm in striking. While waiting for the tide of flood, our people named
+these sands _Os baixos de Sam Rafael_, or the Shoals of St Raphael, and
+named certain islands and hills of the continent, then in sight, the
+islands and hills of St Raphael.
+
+While the ship remained thus dry, and the people walking about on the
+sand, they saw two boats full of Moors, who came to our ships, bringing
+many sweet oranges, much better than those of Portugal. These men told
+the general not to fear any damage to the ship which was aground, as she
+would float uninjured with the next flood; and the general was so much
+pleased with this good heartening, that he gave them several presents,
+which they accepted with many thanks; and understanding that our fleet
+intended to put in at Mombaza, they requested to be carried thither. The
+general granted their request, and permitted them to remain on board, the
+others returning from our ships to their own country.[37] When it was
+full sea, the St Raphael floated and got off the shoal, and the fleet
+proceeded on its voyage.
+
+Following the coast to the north-eastwards, the fleet came to anchor
+outside of the bar of the harbour of Mombaza, about sunset of Saturday
+the 7th of April. Mombaza is on an island very near the shore of the
+continent, and has plenty of provisions, such as millet, rice, and cattle,
+both large and small, all well grown and fat, especially the sheep, which
+are uniformly without tails; and it abounds in poultry. It is likewise
+very pleasant, having many orchards, abounding in pomegranates, Indian
+figs, oranges, both sweet and sour, lemons, and citrons, with plenty of
+pot-herbs, and it has an abundant supply of excellent water. On this
+island there is a city having the same name, Momabza, standing in lat.
+4°S. which is handsomely built on a rocky hill washed by the sea. The
+entrance of the haven has a mark or beacon, and on the very bar there is
+a little low fort, almost level with the water.[38]
+
+Most of the houses of this place are built of stone and lime, having the
+ceilings finely constructed of plaster, and the streets are very handsome.
+This city is subject to a king of its own, the inhabitants being Moors,
+some of whom are white and others brown[39]. The trade of this city is
+extensive, and its inhabitants are well dressed, especially the women,
+who are clothed in silk, and decorated with gold and precious stones. The
+harbour is good and much frequented by shipping, and it receives from the
+African continent, in its neighbourhood, great quantities of honey, wax,
+and ivory.
+
+The general did not enter the harbour that night because it grew late,
+but commanded to hoist the flags in compliment, which the people did with
+much mirth and joy, in hope that they had come to an island in which
+there were many Christians, and that next day they might hear mass on
+shore. They had likewise great hope that the sick, who were almost the
+whole crews, might here recover their health; though, indeed, they were
+much reduced in number, many having died during the voyage. Soon after
+our ships came to anchor, although night approached, a large boat,
+containing about a hundred men, all armed with swords and targets, was
+seen coming towards the fleet. On reaching the generals ship, they would
+have all come on board with their weapons, but the general only permitted
+four of their principals to come aboard, and even they unarmed; causing
+them to be told in their own language, that they must excuse his
+precaution, being a stranger, and not knowing therefore whom he might
+trust. To those whom he permitted to come on board he gave courteous
+entertainment, presenting them with such conserves as he had, of which
+they readily partook; and he requested of them not to take ill that he
+had thus refused entrance to so many armed men. They said that they had
+merely come to see him, as a new and rare thing in their country, and
+that their being armed was merely because such was the custom of the
+country, whether in peace or war. They also said, that the king of
+Mombaza expected his arrival, and would have sent to visit him, if it had
+not been so late, but certainly would do so next day. Their king, they
+added, was rejoiced at his arrival, and would not only be glad to see him,
+but would load his ships with spices. They also said that there were many
+Christians on the island, who lived by themselves; at which the general
+was much pleased, believing their story, which agreed with what the two
+pilots had said. Yet he entertained some jealous doubts, for all their
+fair speeches, and wisely suspected the Moors had come to see if they
+could lay a train to take our ships. In this he was perfectly right, as
+it afterwards appeared that this was their sole intent. The king of
+Mombaza had received perfect intelligence that we were Christians, and of
+all that we had done at Mozambique, and plotted to be revenged, by taking
+our ships and killing our men.
+
+Next day, being Palm Sunday, still prosecuting his wicked purpose, the
+king sent some white Moors with a message to the general, declaring his
+great joy at our arrival, inviting him into the harbour, and engaging to
+supply him with all things he might be in need of; and, in token of amity,
+sent him a ring, a sheep, and many sweet oranges, citrons, and sugar
+canes. These white Moors were likewise instructed to pretend that they
+were Christians, and that there were many Christians in the island. All
+this was so well counterfeited, that our people actually believed them to
+be Christians, on which account the general received them with much
+courtesy, and made them some presents, sending a message to the king that
+he would certainly come farther into the harbour next day. He also sent a
+present to the king of a fine branch of coral. And, for the greater
+security, he sent along with these white Moors, two of our banished men,
+who had been embarked expressly for such hazardous undertakings, or for
+being left on shore where it might be deemed expedient, to become
+acquainted with the circumstances of various places, and to be taken on
+board again. These men, and the Moors who had been on board, were met in
+landing by a number of people, curious to see and examine them, who
+accompanied them all the way to the kings palace, where they had to pass
+through three several doors, each guarded by an armed porter, before they
+came to the place where the king was. They found the king in no very
+great state, yet he received them well, and commanded the Moors who had
+brought them on shore to show them the city. In going through the streets,
+our men saw many prisoners in irons; but, not knowing the language, they
+could not ask who or what these were, yet believed they might be
+Christians, us our general was informed by the Moorish pilots, and the
+kings two messengers, that there were Christians on the island, and that
+the Christians and the Moors had wars together. Our men were likewise
+carried to the house in which the merchants of India dwelt, who were said
+to be Christians. These people, learning that our men were Christians,
+shewed much joy at receiving them, embracing and banqueting them, and
+shewed them a piece of paper on which the figure of the Holy Ghost was
+painted, which they worshipped on their knees, with great shew of
+devotion, as if they had been what they pretended. The Moors then
+informed our men by signs, that there were many other Christians at
+another place, too far for carrying them there; but that they should be
+conducted to see them when our ships came into the harbour. All this was
+done craftily to entice our people into the harbour, where they were
+determined to destroy them all.
+
+After our two men had seen the city, they were conducted back to the king,
+who ordered them to be shewn ginger, pepper, cloves, and wheat, giving
+them samples of them all to be carried to the general, with assurance
+that he had great store of all these commodities, and would give him his
+loading if he desired it. They were likewise told, that he had great
+plenty of gold, silver, amber, wax, ivory, and other riches, which he
+would sell at lower prices than they could be bought in any other place.
+This message was brought off on Monday to the general; who, hearing the
+kings offer to furnish him with a loading of these commodities, was much
+rejoiced, and was much pleased with the information brought by the two
+convicts, and their good report of the people, city, and country, and
+more especially on account of the _two_ Christians whom they had seen in
+the house of the Indian merchants. After a consultation with the other
+captains, it was determined to enter the port next day, and to accept the
+spices offered by the king of Mambaza, after which, to continue the
+voyage to Calicut; and, if they could not procure similar articles there,
+to return contented with what might be got in this place. In the meantime,
+several of the Moors visited our ships, conducting themselves with much
+gentleness and humility, and evincing an appearance of friendship and
+kindness to our people, as if they had been long and familiarly
+acquainted.
+
+When the tide of flood was sufficiently advanced on the following morning,
+the general gave orders to weigh anchor, intending to carry the ships
+into the harbour. But the Almighty Disposer of events, not willing that
+he and his company should fall into the snare which the Moors had laid
+for their destruction, interposed to avert the danger, and to work their
+safety. For, when the generals ship had weighed anchor, and was about to
+enter the port, she touched on a shoal by the stern; upon which, he
+immediately let fall his anchor again, which was likewise done by the
+other captains. Seeing this, the Moors who were on board concluded that
+he would not enter the harbour that day, and instantly took to their boat,
+which was alongside, and made for the city: At the same time, the pilot
+of Mozambique leapt from the stern of the admirals ship into the water,
+and was taken into the boat by the Moors. The admiral called out to them
+to bring him back, but all in vain; on which he began to suspect that the
+Moors and their king had evil intentions towards him and his people, and
+was thankful for the accident which had detained him from the harbour,
+and preserved him from the purposed treachery. After explaining his
+apprehensions to the other captains, he commanded, in the evening of this
+day, that two of the Moors who had been made prisoners at Mozambique
+should be put to the torture, to endeavour to ascertain whether any
+treachery was intended, and to force them to disclose the same. This was
+done by dropping melted bacon upon their flesh; and they immediately
+confessed that treason was intended, and that the pilots had escaped by
+swimming from the ship, as fearing the same had been discovered. On this
+confession, the general resolved on no account to enter the harbour; yet
+determined to put another Moor to the torture, to learn if he were in
+confederacy with the rest. But this Moor, on seeing preparations made for
+the purpose, although his hands were bound, leapt into the sea; which was
+likewise done by another Moor before day-light.
+
+Having thus discovered the secret mischiefs which had been prepared
+against him, the general gave thanks to God, by whose good providence he
+and his people had been delivered from imminent hazard of death among the
+infidels; whereupon he and his company joined in the _Salve regina_ with
+great devotion. After this, lest the Moors might attempt any thing
+against their safety during the night, he ordered a strong and vigilant
+armed watch to be kept. It is worthy of notice, that all the sick among
+our people, who were indeed many, began presently to get well from their
+first coming to Mombaza; so that in this time of their great necessity
+and danger, they found themselves sound and strong, beyond all human hope,
+and far above the ordinary course of nature; for which reason it can only
+be attributed to the marvellous and supernatural power of God,
+miraculously done at this peculiar instant time of need, for the
+preservation of these poor and distressed persons, whose only hope of
+safety was in him. After the night watch was set, those of the Berrio
+felt the cable by which they lay at anchor swagging, as if shaken by a
+great tunny, of which there were many in this place, very large and
+excellent food: But, on giving more attention to the circumstance, they
+perceived that this was occasioned by their enemies the Moors, some of
+whom were swimming about the cable, and were cutting it with knives or
+falchions, that the ship might drift on shore and fall a prey to them. On
+seeing this, our men scared them away by crying out, and gave notice to
+the other ships to be on their guard against similar attempts. Some
+people from the San Raphael went immediately to the assistance of the
+Berrio, and found some of the Moors about the chains and tacklings of the
+foremast, who cast themselves into the sea, and swam, along with those
+who had attempted to cut the cable, to certain boats that were in waiting
+at a short distance, in which, as our people afterwards learnt, there
+were a great number of the Moors, who now rowed away to the city in all
+haste.
+
+Our fleet still remained off the harbour of Mombaza, all the Wednesday
+and Thursday following; during both of which nights the Moors came off in
+boats, which always lay close by the shore, whence some of them swam to
+the ships, endeavouring to cut our cables: But our men kept such strict
+watch, that they were unable to succeed. Our people, however, were always
+in much fear and perplexity, lest the Moors might burn our ships; and it
+was wonderful they did not make the attempt by means of the ships they
+had in the harbour, which, in all human probability, they had succeeded
+in, killing and destroying us all. It was conjectured that they were
+deterred from making this attempt, from fear of the ordnance in our ships;
+but whatever might appear to us as the cause of their not using open
+force, it was assuredly the good pleasure and favour of God, that put
+their hearts in fear against making an open attack, by which we were
+preserved from the execution of their cruel purposes towards us.
+
+The reason of the general remaining during the two days off Mombaza was,
+that he might endeavour to procure two pilots from thence to carry him to
+Calicut, without which assistance the voyage would have been very
+difficult, as our pilots had no knowledge of that country. But finding
+none were to be had, he took his departure from that place on Friday
+morning, though with a very light wind. On leaving the anchorage, he was
+forced to leave one of his anchors behind, as the crew was so completely
+exhausted by hauling up the rest, that they were unable to weigh this one.
+It was afterwards found by the Moors, and carried into their city, where
+it was deposited near the kings palace. When Don Francisco de Almeida,
+first viceroy of the Indies, took this place from the Moors, this anchor
+was there found, as I shall afterwards relate in the second book of this
+work.
+
+Departing thus from Mombaza, the fleet continued its voyage along the
+coast to the north-east, and having very light wind, was obliged to come
+to anchor in the evening near the shore, about eight leagues from Mombaza.
+Towards the dawn of next day, two sambuccos, or little pinnaces, were
+seen about three leagues to the leeward of the fleet, and out at sea; on
+which, in hope of procuring some pilots who could carry him to Calicut,
+the general ordered the anchors to be weighed, and he and the other
+captains gave chase to the sambuccos the whole of that day. Towards
+vespers, the general came up with and captured one of these pinnaces, but
+the other escaped to the land. In the captured pinnace there were
+seventeen Moors, among whom was an old man who seemed master over the
+rest, and had his young wife along with him. In this boat there was great
+store of silver and gold, and some victuals. On the same evening the
+fleet came to anchor off Melinda, which is eighteen leagues from Mombaza,
+and is in lat. 3° S. This place has no good harbour, being only an almost
+open roadstead, having a kind of natural pier or reef of rocks on which
+the sea beats with much violence, owing to which the ships have to ride
+at a considerable distance from the shore. The city stands in a broad
+open plain, along the shore, surrounded with many palms, and other sorts
+of trees, which are green the whole year. It has also many gardens and
+orchards, abounding with all kinds of herbs and fruits, and many
+fountains of good water. Their oranges are particularly excellent, very
+large and sweet. They have also abundance of millet and rice, plenty both
+of cattle and sheep, and great store of fine poultry, which are very
+cheap. Melinda is a large city, with fair streets, and many good houses
+of stone and lime, containing several storeys, with windows, and having
+terraced roofs made of lime and earth. The native inhabitants are black,
+of well proportioned bodies, having curled hair; but many strangers
+resort thither and dwell in the city, who are Moors from Arabia, who
+conduct themselves in a commendable manner, especially the gentlemen or
+better sort. These, from the girdle upwards, go naked; but below the
+girdle they are dressed in silk, or fine stuffs of cotton, though some
+wear short cotton cloaks, after the old fashion. On their heads they wear
+certain cloths embroidered with silk and gold. They wear also rich
+daggers, ornamented with silken tassels of many colours, and very
+handsome swords. They are all left-handed, and go constantly armed with
+bows and arrows, taking great delight in archery, at which they are very
+expert. They account themselves good horsemen; yet there is a common
+saying on this coast, _the horsemen of Mombaza, and the women of
+Melinda_, as in Mombaza they are excellent horsemen, and the women of
+Melinda are very handsome, and dress richly.
+
+In this city also there are many Gentiles from the kingdom of Cambaya in
+India, who are great merchants and trade to this place for gold, which is
+found in this country, as likewise ambergris, ivory, pitch, and wax; all
+of which commodities the inhabitants of Melinda exchange with the
+merchants of Cambaya for copper, quicksilver, and cotton cloth, to the
+profit and advantage of both parties. The king of this city is a Moor,
+who is served with far more state than any of the kings on this coast to
+the southwards. Being arrived over against this city, the general and all
+the people of the fleet were much rejoiced at seeing a city resembling
+those of Portugal, and gave thanks to God for their safe arrival. Being
+desirous of procuring pilots to navigate the fleet to Calicut, the
+general commanded to come to anchor, meaning to use his endeavours for
+this purpose. For, hitherto, he could not learn from the Moors he had
+lately captured, whether any of them were pilots; and though he had
+threatened them with the torture, they always persisted in declaring that
+none of them had any skill in pilotage.
+
+Next day, being Easter eve, the old Moor who had been made prisoner in
+the pinnace, told the general that there were four ships belonging to
+Christians of the Indies at Melinda, and engaged, if the general would
+allow him and the other Moors to go on shore, he would provide him, as
+his ransom, Christian pilots, and would farther supply him with every
+thing he might need. Well pleased with the speeches of the old Moor, the
+general removed his ships to within half a league of the city, whence
+hitherto no one came off to our fleet, as they feared our men might make
+them prisoners; for they had received intelligence that we were
+Christians, and believed our ships were men of war. On the Monday morning,
+therefore, the general commanded the old Moor to be landed on a ledge, or
+rock, opposite the city, and left there, expecting they would send from
+the city to fetch him off; which they did accordingly as soon as our boat
+departed. The Moor was carried directly to the king, to whom he said, as
+instructed by the general, what he chiefly desired to have. He farther
+said, that the general desired to have amity with the king, of whom he
+had heard a good report, hoping by his aid, and with the will of God, he
+might be enabled to discover the route to India. The king received this
+message favourably, and sent back the Moor in a boat to the general,
+accompanied by one of his own servants and a priest, saying, that he
+would most willingly conclude a treaty of amity with him, and should
+supply him with what pilots he needed. These messengers likewise
+presented the general from the king, with three sheep, and a great many
+oranges, and sugar canes, which he thankfully accepted; desiring the
+messengers to acquaint their master, that he gladly agreed to the
+profered amity, and was ready to confirm the same between them, and
+promised to enter their harbour next day. He farther desired them to
+inform the king, that he was the subject of a great and powerful
+sovereign in the west, who had sent him to discover the way to Calicut,
+with orders to enter into peace and amity with all kings and princes on
+whose territories he might happen to touch by the way. That it was now
+_two years_[40] since he left his own country, and that the king his
+master was a prince of such puissance and worth as he was convinced the
+king of Melinda would be glad to have for a friend. He then dismissed the
+messengers, sending as a present to their king a hat of the fashion of
+the time, two branches of coral, three brass basons, two scarfs, and some
+small bells.
+
+On the second day after Easter, the general removed his ships nearer the
+city. The king knowing this, and believing that the king of Portugal must
+be a high-spirited prince, and the general a worthy subject, who had
+hazarded himself in so long and dangerous a voyage, became desirous of
+seeing such men; wherefore, he sent a more honourable message to the
+general, saying, that he proposed next day to visit him in person,
+intending that their meeting should be on the water; and sent him a
+present of six sheep, with a considerable quantity of cloves, ginger,
+pepper, and nutmegs. Upon this message, the general removed his fleet
+still nearer the city, and came to anchor close to the four ships of the
+Indies, of which the old Moor had made mention as belonging to Christians.
+When the owners of these ships learnt that we were Christians, they came
+immediately to visit our general, who happened then to be in the ship of
+Paulo de la Gama. These men were of a brown colour, but of good stature
+and well proportioned, dressed in long white cotton gowns, having large
+beards, and the hair of their heads long like women, and plaited up under
+their turbans or head-dresses. The general received them with much
+kindness and attention, asking, by means of an interpreter, who
+understood the language of Algarve, or Arabic, whether they were
+Christians. These men had some knowledge of that language, though it was
+not their own tongue, but had learnt it in the course of their trade and
+conversation with the Moors of Melinda, of whom they advised the general
+to beware, lest their inward intentions might be far different from their
+outward shew. Willing to make trial if these men were really Christians,
+the general caused a picture to be shewn them, on which our Lady was
+painted weeping, surrounded by some of the apostles, but without
+informing them what this was meant to represent. Immediately on this
+being set before them, they fell down and worshipped the picture, praying
+for some time. The general then asked if they were of Calicut; on which
+they answered they were of Grangalor[41], still farther off, and could
+give him no information respecting Calicut. From this time, so long as
+our fleet remained at Melinda, these people came every day on board the
+ship of Paulo de la Gama, to pay their devotions before this picture,
+offering to the images which it represented gifts of pepper and other
+things. These Indian Christians, according to their own account, eat no
+beef.
+
+On the last day of the week after Easter, and in the afternoon, the king
+of Melinda came off in a great boat to our fleet. He was dressed in a
+cassock of crimson damask lined with green satin, and wore, a rich cloth
+or turban on his head. He sat in a chair, of the ancient fashion, very
+well made and wrought with wire, having a silk cushion; and on another
+chair beside him, there lay a hat of crimson satin. An old man stood by
+him as his page, who carried a very rich sword with a silver scabbard. In
+the boat there were many sacbuts, and two ivory flutes eight spans long,
+on which they played by a little hole in the middle, agreeing and
+according well with the music of the sacbuts. The king was likewise
+attended by about twenty Moorish gentlemen, all richly dressed. When the
+king had nearly attained our ships, the general went to meet him in his
+boat, gaily decorated with flags and streamers, himself dressed in his
+best apparel, and attended by twelve of the principal officers of the
+squadron, leaving his brother in charge of the ships. On the boats
+meeting, the two parties made every demonstration of friendship and
+respect; and the Moorish king immediately offered to come on board the
+generals boat, that he might see him the better. The general accordingly
+received him with all respect, and the king shewed as much honour and
+courtesy to the general as if he had been likewise a king. The Moorish
+king, after examining the dress and appearance of the general and his men
+with the utmost attention, asked the general the name of his king, which
+he commanded to be immediately written down. He particularly inquired
+respecting the power of the king of Portugal, and the general gave the
+most satisfactory answers to all his questions; particularly detailing
+the reasons of his being sent to discover Calicut, that Portugal might be
+thence supplied with spices, which were not to be had in his own country.
+The king, after giving him some information on these points, and
+respecting the straits of the Red Sea, promised to furnish the general
+with a pilot to carry him to Calicut, and then earnestly solicited him to
+accompany him to the city, where he might solace and refresh himself in
+the palace, after the fatigues and dangers of so long a voyage; and
+promised, if the general would do so, that he the king would visit him on
+board. To this the general prudently answered that he was not authorised
+by his instructions to go on shore, and that he could not answer for
+deviating from the orders of his sovereign. On this the king observed,
+that if he were to visit the ships, he could not well answer for his
+conduct to the inhabitants of his city; yet, he was grieved that the
+admiral refused to go into the city, which should be at his will and
+pleasure, and that of the king his master, to whom he should either write
+or send an ambassador, if the general would call in at Melinda on his
+return from Calicut. The general gave the king thanks for his politeness,
+and promised to return that way; and, while this conversation was going
+on, he sent for the Moors who had been taken in the pinnace, whom he
+presented to the king, saying, he would most gladly perform any other
+service that lay in his power to the king. The king was greatly pleased
+with this gift, which he valued as much as if the admiral had given him
+another city equal to Melinda.
+
+Having ended their conversation, and confirmed their mutual friendship,
+the king rowed through among our ships, examining them with much pleasure
+and admiration, and was saluted in passing by many discharges of the
+ordnance, at which he and his attendants seemed much delighted. On this
+occasion, the general attended upon him in his own boat out of respect,
+and the king observed, that he never was so much pleased with any men as
+with the Portuguese, and would most gladly have some of them to help him
+in his wars. To this the general answered, that if his highness were to
+have experience of what they were able to perform, he would like the
+Portuguese still better; and that they should certainly give him aid, if
+it should please the king of Portugal to send any of his war ships to
+Calicut, which he did not doubt would be the case, if it were Gods will
+to permit the discovery of that place. After the king had satisfied his
+curiosity, he requested of the general, since he would not go himself
+into the city, to permit two of his men to go and see the palace,
+offering to leave his own son, and one of his chief priests, which they
+named Caçis[42], in pledge for their safe return. To this request the
+general consented, and sent two of our men along with the king: He, at
+his departure, requested that the general would next day, in his boat,
+come close to the shore, when he should be gratified with a sight of the
+native horsemen going through their evolutions. After this they separated.
+
+Next day, being Thursday, the general and Nicholas Coello went in their
+boats well armed along the shore, according to the invitation of the king,
+keeping at a small distance from each other for mutual defence in case of
+need, where they saw many men skirmishing on the shore. As our boats
+approached the royal palace, certain of the kings attendants brought him
+in a chair down some stone stairs which led to the water; and, being then
+very near the generals boat, the king entered into friendly conversation
+with him, and once more entreated him to land and go to the palace;
+saying, that his father, who was lame, was exceedingly desirous to see
+him, and even offered, that, while the general remained on shore, he and
+his children would go on board the ships as hostages for his security.
+But our general, still dreading that some bitter treachery might lurk
+beneath this honied speech, continued to excuse himself from landing, as
+he had not permission from his own prince to do so, and must obey him, in
+all things. After this, taking his leave of the king, he rowed past the
+ships of the Indian merchants, which he saluted in passing with his
+ordnance; and when they saw us pass, they held up their hands, exclaiming
+Christe! Christe!
+
+That night, having obtained leave from the king, our men made them a
+great feast, with much diversion, also of squibs, firing of guns, and
+loud cries. The fleet remained at anchor for two days without any message
+from the shore, on which account the general was much distressed, fearing
+the king had taken offence at his refusal to go on shore, and might break
+the peace and amity between them, and not send him any pilot. But on
+Sunday the 21st of April, a person who was in high credit with the king,
+came off to visit the general, who was much disappointed when this person
+brought no pilot, and again began to entertain suspicions of the kings
+intentions. When the king learnt this, and that the general remained
+merely for the purpose of having a pilot, he sent him one who was a
+Gentile, called _Gosarate_[43] in their language, and whose name was
+_Canaca_, sending an apology at the same time for not having sent this
+person sooner. Thus the king and the general remained friends, and the
+peace continued which had been agreed between them.
+
+"De Barros and Faria give this pilot the name of _Malemo Cana_, and say
+that he belonged to one of the Indian ships of Cambaya, then at Melinda.
+De Barros adds, that he shewed De Gama a very small chart of the coast of
+India, laid down with meridians and parallels, but without rhumbs of the
+winds. This pilot shewed no surprise on seeing the large wooden and metal
+astrolabes belonging to the Portuguese, as the pilots of the Red Sea had
+long used brass triangular instruments and quadrants for astronomical
+observations, and that he and others who sailed from Cambaya, and the
+ports of India, navigated by the north and south stars, and the
+constellations of the eastern and western hemispheres; and, though they
+did not use these instruments in navigation, they employed one made of
+three pieces of board, similar to the _balhestillia_, or cross-staff of
+the Portuguese.
+
+"In a collection of papers published in 1790, called _Documentos
+Arabicos_, from the royal archives of Lisbon, chiefly consisting of
+letters between the kings of Portugal and the tributary princes of the
+east in the sixteenth century, the _zeque, sheik_, or king of Melinda,
+with whom De Gama afterwards made a treaty of alliance, and whose
+ambassador he carried into Portugal, was named Wagerage[44]."
+
+Having thus procured a pilot, and provided all things necessary for the
+voyage, De Gama departed from Melinda for Calicut, on Friday the 26th of
+April 1498[45], and immediately made sail directly across the gulf which
+separates Africa from India, which is 750 leagues[46]. This golf runs a
+long way up into the land northwards; but our course for Calicut lay to
+the east[47]. In following this voyage, our men saw the north star next
+Sunday, which they had not seen of a long while; and they saw the stars
+about the south pole at the same time. They gave thanks to God, that,
+whereas it had been represented to them, that in this season, which was
+the winter of the Indies, there were always great storms in this gulf,
+they now experienced fair weather. On Friday the 18th of May, twenty-
+three days after leaving Melinda, during all which time they had seen no
+land, they came in sight of India, at eight leagues distance, the land
+seeming very high. Canaca, the pilot, tried the lead and found forty-five
+fathoms, upon which he altered his course to the south-east, having
+fallen in with the land too far to the north. Upon the Saturday, he again
+drew near the land, but did not certainly know it, as the view was
+obscured by rain, which, always falls in India at this season, being
+their winter. On Sunday the 20th of May, the pilot got view of certain
+high hills which are directly behind the city of Calicut, and came so
+near the land that he was quite sure of the place; on which he came up
+with great joy to the general, demanding his _albrycias_, or reward, as
+this was the place at which he and his company were so desirous to arrive.
+The general was greatly rejoiced at this news, and immediately satisfied
+the pilot, after which, he summoned all the company to prayers, saying
+the _salve_, and giving hearty thanks to God, who had safely conducted
+them to the long wished-for place of his destination. When prayer was
+over, there was great festivity and joy in the ships, which came that
+same evening to anchor two leagues from Calicut. Immediately upon
+anchoring, some of the natives came off to the ships in four boats,
+called _almadias_, inquiring whence our ships came, as they had never
+before seen any resembling their construction upon that coast. These
+natives were of a brown colour, and entirely naked, excepting very small
+aprons. Some of them immediately came on board the general, and the
+Guzerat pilot informed him these were poor fishermen; yet the general
+received them courteously, and ordered his people to purchase the fish
+which they had brought for sale. On conversing with them, he understood
+that the town whence they came, which was in sight, was not Calicut,
+which lay farther off, and to which they offered to conduct our fleet.
+Whereupon the general requested them to do this; and, departing from this
+first anchorage, the fleet was conducted by these fishermen to Calicut.
+
+Calicut is a city on the coast of Malabar, a province of the second India,
+which begins at the mount of Delhi, and ends at Cape Comory, being sixty-
+one leagues in length, and fifteen leagues broad[48]. The whole of this
+country is very low, and apt to be covered with water, having many
+islands in its rivers, which flow into the Indian Sea. This country of
+Malabar is divided from the kingdom of Narsinga by a very high hill. The
+Indians report that this land of Malabar was covered by the sea of old,
+which then reached to the foot of the hills, and thence to a hill, where
+now the islands of the Maldives are found, which were then firm land; and
+that in after times it destroyed that latter country, and laid bare the
+country of Malabar, in which are many pleasant and rich cities, dependent
+upon trade, which they carry on principally with Calicut, which exceeds
+all cities of our days in riches and in vice. Its foundation and rise was
+as follows: In ancient times, this country of Malabar was entirely ruled
+by one king, who dwelt in the city of _Coulan_. In the reign of the last
+king of this race, named _Saranaperimal_[49], who died 600 years ago, the
+Moors of Mecca discovered India, and came to the province of Malabar,
+then inhabited by idolaters, and governed by an idolatrous king. From the
+time of the coming of these Moors, they began to reckon their years as we
+do, from the birth of our Saviour[50]. After the coming of the Moors into
+Malabar, they insinuated themselves so much into the confidence of the
+before-mentioned king, that he became a convert to their law, renouncing
+the religion of his country, and embracing Mahometism with such zeal,
+that he resolved to go and end his days in the temple of Mecca. Having
+thus resolved, out of love to the Mahometan sect, to abandon his kingdom,
+he called his kindred together, and divided all his territories among
+them, reserving only twelve leagues of country near the place where he
+intended to embark, not then inhabited, which he bestowed upon one of his
+cousins who acted as his page. To this kinsman he gave his sword and
+turban, as ensigns of dignity; commanding all the other nobles, among
+whom he had distributed the rest of his territories, to obey this person
+as their emperor, the kings of Coulan and Cananor only excepted; whom
+also, and all the others, he debarred from coining money, which was only
+to be done by the king of Calicut. Having thus given away his whole
+dignities and possessions, and set every thing in order, he embarked from
+the place where Calicut now stands; and because this king embarked from
+that place on his pilgrimage to Mecca, the Moors have ever since held
+Calicut in so high devotion, that they and all their posterity would
+never take their lading from any other port. From that time forwards,
+they discontinued trade with the port of Coulan, which they had used
+formerly, and that port therefore fell to ruin; especially after the
+building of Calicut, and the settlement of many Moors in that place[51].
+
+As the Moors are merchants of most extensive dealings, they have rendered
+Calicut, as the centre of their trade, the richest mart of all the Indies;
+in which is to be found all the spices, drugs, nutmegs, and other things
+that can be desired, all kinds of precious stones, pearls and seed-pearls,
+musk, sanders, aguila, fine dishes of earthen ware, lacker[52], gilded
+coffers, and all the fine things of China, gold, amber, wax, ivory, fine
+and coarse cotton goods, both white and dyed of many colours, much raw
+and twisted silk, stuffs of silk and gold, cloth of gold, cloth of tissue,
+grain, scarlets, silk carpets, copper, quicksilver, vermilion, alum,
+coral, rose-water, and all kinds of conserves. Thus, every kind of
+merchandize from all parts of the world is to be found in this place;
+which, moreover, is very quiet, being situated along the coast, which is
+almost open and very dangerous. Calicut is surrounded by many gardens and
+orchards, producing all the herbs and fruits of this country in great
+abundance, having also many palms and other sorts of trees, and abounds
+in excellent water. This part of India produces but little rice, which is
+a principal article of food in these parts, as wheat is with us; but it
+procures abundance of that and all other kinds of provisions from other
+countries. The city is large, but the dwellings consist only of straw
+huts; their idol temples, and chapels, and the kings palace excepted,
+which are: built of stone and lime and covered with tiles; for, by their
+laws, no others are permitted to build their houses of any other material
+than straw. At this time, Calicut was inhabited by idolaters of many
+sects, and by many Moorish merchants, some of whom were so rich as to be
+owners of fifty ships. These ships are made without nails, their planks
+being sewed together with ropes of _cayro_, made of the fibres of the
+cocoa-nut husk, pitched all over, and are flat-bottomed, without keels.
+Every winter there are at least six hundred ships in this harbour, and
+the shore is such, that their ships can be easily drawn up for repairs.
+
+"The subjects of the following digression are so intimately connected
+with the first establishment of the Portuguese in India, as to justify
+its introduction in this place, which will greatly elucidate the
+narrative of Castaneda; and its length did not admit of being inserted in
+the form of notes. It is chiefly due to the ingenious and Reverend James
+Stanier Clarke, in his Origin and Progress of Maritime Discovery,
+extracted by him from various sources."
+
+"The name of this country, Malabar, is said to be derived from _ulyam_,
+which signifies, in the original language of that part of India,
+_skirting the bottom of the hills_, corrupted into Maleyam or Maleam,
+whence probably came Mulievar, and Mala-bar. In a MS. account of Malabar,
+it is said that little more than 2300 years ago, the sea came up to the
+foot of the _Sukien_ mountains, or the western _gauts_. The emerging of
+the country from the waters is fabulously related to have been occasioned
+by the piety or penitence of Puresram Rama, who prayed to _Varauna_, the
+God of the ocean, to give him a track of land to bestow on the Bramins.
+Varauna accordingly commanded the sea to withdraw from the _Gowkern_, a
+hill near Mangalore, all the way to Cape Comorin; which new land long
+remained marshy and scarcely habitable, and the original settlers were
+forced to abandon it on account of the numerous serpents by which it was
+infested: But they afterwards returned, being instructed to propitiate
+the serpents by worshipping them."
+
+"At first this country was divided into four _Tookrees_ or provinces,
+these into _Naadhs_ or districts, and these again into _Khunds_ or small
+precincts. The Bramins established a kind of republican or aristocratical
+government, under a few principal chiefs; but jealousies and disturbances
+taking place, they procured a _Permaul_ or chief governor from the prince
+of Chaldesh, a sovereignty in the southern Carnatic: Yet it is more
+likely that this sovereign took advantage of the divisions among the
+chiefs of Malabar, to reduce them under his authority. These permauls or
+viceroys were for a long while changed every twelve years; till at length
+one of them, named Sheo-Ram, Cheruma Perumal, or Shermanoo Permaloo, the
+Sarana-perimal of Castaneda, became so popular that he set his master
+_Kishen Rao_, the rajah of Chaldesh, at defiance, and established his own
+authority in Malabar. An army was sent into Malabar to reduce the country
+again to obedience, but it was defeated, and from this event, which is
+said to have happened 1000 years ago, all the rajahs, chief _nayres_, and
+other lords of Malabar, date the sovereignty and independence of their
+ancestors in that country."
+
+"After some time, Shermanoo-Permaloo, either became weary of his
+situation, or from attachment to the Mahometan religion, resolved to make
+a division of Malabar among his dependents, from whom the present
+chieftains are descended. Such is the current story among the inhabitants
+of Malabar; yet it is more probable that his dependent chieftains,
+disgusted with his conversion to the religion of Mahomet, revolted from
+his authority, and contrived this story of his voluntary surrender and
+division of his dominions, to justify their own assumptions. After this
+division of his kingdom, it is said that an _erary_, or person of the
+cast of cow-herds, originally from the banks of the Cavery, near Errode
+in the Carnatic, who had been a chief instrument of the success of
+Shermanoo-Permaloo in the war against rajah Kishen Rao, made application
+to Shermanoo for some support. Having very little left to give away,
+Shermanoo made him a grant of his own place of abode at Calicut, and gave
+him his sword; ankle-rings, and other insignia of command, and presented
+him with water and flowers, the ancient symbols of a transfer of property.
+It is said that this cowherd rajah was ordained principal sovereign over
+the other petty princes among whom Malabar was divided, with the title of
+Zamorin, and was authorized by Shermanoo to extend his dominion over all
+the other chieftains by force of arms. His descendants have ever since
+endeavoured, on all occasions, to enforce this pretended grant, which
+they pretend to hold by the tenure of possessing the sword of Shermanoo
+Permaloo, and which they carefully preserve as a precious relic."
+
+"From the period of the abdication of Shermanoo, to that of the arrival
+of the Portuguese at Calicut, the Mahomedan religion had made
+considerable progress in Malabar; and the Arabian merchants received
+every encouragement from the Samoories or Zamorins, as they made Calicut
+the staple of their Indian trade, and brought large sums of money yearly
+to that place, for the purchase of spiceries and other commodities. As
+the rajahs of Cochin and other petty sovereignties on the coast, were
+exceedingly jealous of the superior riches and power of the zamorins, and
+of the monopoly of trade enjoyed by Calicut, they gave every
+encouragement to the Portuguese to frequent their ports; from whence
+arose a series of warfare by sea and land, which has finally reduced them
+all under subjection to the Europeans."
+
+"According to an Arabian author, _Zeirreddien Mukhdom_, who is supposed
+to have been sent to assist the zamorins and the Mahomedans in India, in
+their wars with the Portuguese, Malabar is then said to have been divided
+among a multiplicity of independent princes or rajahs, whom he calls
+_Hakims_, some of whom commanded over one or two hundred men, and others
+one, ten, fifteen, or even as high as thirty, thousand, or upwards.
+The three greatest powers at that time were, the _Colastrian_[53] rajah
+to the north, the zamorin of Calicut in the centre, and a rajah in the
+south, who ruled from Coulan, Kalum, or Coulim, to Cape Comorin,
+comprehending the country now belonging to the rajah of Travancore."
+
+"We now return from this digression, to follow the narrative of the
+Portuguese Discovery and Conquest of India, as related by Castaneda."
+
+So great was the trade and population of Calicut and the surrounding
+country, and the revenues of its sovereign through these circumstances,
+that he was able to raise a force of thirty thousand men in a single day,
+and could even bring an hundred thousand men into the field, completely
+equipt for war, in three days. This prince, in the language of the
+country, was styled the Zamorin, or Samoryn, which signifies Emperor; as
+he was supreme over the other two kings of Malabar, the king of Coulan
+and the king of Cananor. There were indeed other princes in this country,
+who were called kings, but were not so. This zamorin or king of Calicut
+was a bramin, as his predecessors had been, the bramins being priests
+among the Malabars. It is an ancient rule and custom among these people,
+that all their kings must die in a pagoda[54], or temple of their idols;
+and that there must always be a king resident in the principal pagoda, to
+serve those idols: Wherefore, when the king that serves in the temple
+comes to die, he who then reigns must leave his government of temporal
+affairs to take his place in the temple; upon which another is elected to
+take his place, and to succeed in ruling the kingdom. If the king who is
+in possession of the temporal authority should refuse to retire to the
+pagoda, on the death of the king who officiated in spirituals, he is
+constrained to do so, however unwilling.
+
+The kings and nobles of Malabar are of a brown complexion, and go naked
+from the waist upwards, all the under parts of their bodies being clothed
+in silk or cotton Vestments; yet they sometimes wear short gowns on their
+upper parts, called _basus_, of rich silk, or cloth of gold, or of
+scarlet, splendidly ornamented with precious stones, of all which the
+zamorin hath great store. They shave their beards, leaving only the hair
+on their upper lips, and do not shave the head like the Turks. In general,
+the natives of this country, even of the higher ranks, use little state
+in their households, and are very sparing in their diet; but the zamorin
+is served with considerable splendour. These kings or nobles never marry;
+but every one has a mistress of the Nayre cast, which, among the Malabars,
+are considered as the gentry; even the zamorin has only a mistress, who
+has a house of her own near the palace, and a liberal allowance for the
+charges of her household and maintenance at her own disposal. Upon any
+dislike or difference, he may always leave her for another. The children
+are only considered as the offspring of the mother, and have no right or
+title to inherit the kingdom, or any thing else belonging to the father;
+and when grown up, are only held in that rank or estimation which belongs
+to the blood or parentage of their mother. Brothers succeed to brothers;
+and in lack of these, the sons of their sisters, who do not marry, and
+have no certainty respecting the fathers of their children; as they are
+very free and dissolute in their manners, choosing paramours as they
+please.
+
+These sisters of the zamorin, and other kings of Malabar, have handsome
+allowances to live upon; and when any of them reaches the age of ten,
+their kindred send for a young man of the Nayre cast, out of the kingdom,
+and give him great presents to induce him to initiate the young virgin;
+after which he hangs a jewel round her neck, which she wears all the rest
+of her life, as a token that she is now at liberty to dispose of herself
+to any one she pleases as long as she lives.
+
+When these kings are at war with each other, they often go personally
+into the field, and even join personally in fight upon occasion. When one
+of them dies, the body is carried out into the fields, and burned on a
+pile of sanders, and of another sweet smelling wood called _aguila_, all
+his brothers and kindred, and all the nobles of the country being present
+at the ceremony; which is uniformly postponed to the third day after
+death, that all may have time to gather from a distance, and may have an
+opportunity of being assured whether his death was natural, or caused by
+violence: Since, if he died by the hand of any one, all are bound to
+prosecute revenge. After the body is burnt, and the ashes buried, the
+whole company shaves every part of their bodies, even to the youngest
+child of these idolaters. This is their token of mourning; and during the
+ensuing thirteen days, they all refrain from chewing betel, any one
+infringing this law being punished by cutting his lips. During this
+period of thirteen days, he who is to succeed to the throne must abstain
+from all exercise of government, that any one who pleases may have an
+opportunity of urging any valid objection why he should not acquire the
+vacant government. After, this the successor is sworn before all the
+nobles of the country, to preserve and enforce all the laws and customs
+of their ancestors, to pay the debts of his predecessor, and to use his
+utmost endeavours to recover any portion of the kingdom that may have
+been lost. While taking this oath, having his sword in his left hand, he
+holds in his right hand a burning candle, on which is a gold ring, which
+he touches with his fingers. After this they throw some grains of rice
+over him, using many other ceremonies, and numerous prayers, and then
+worship the sun three times. When all these ceremonies are gone through,
+all the _Caymayles_, or lords of noble birth, taking hold of the candle,
+take an oath to be true and faithful subjects to the new king.
+
+After the end of the thirteen days mourning, they all begin to chew betel,
+and to eat flesh and fish as formerly, the new king alone excepted. He is
+bound to mourn for his predecessor during a whole year, chewing no betel,
+eating no flesh or fish, neither shaving his beard nor cutting; his nails
+during all that time. He must eat only once a-day, washing himself all
+over before this single meal, and devoting certain hours of every day to
+prayer. After the expiry of the year, he uses a certain ceremony for the
+soul of the king his predecessor, much like our solemn dirge; at which
+100,000 persons are often assembled, among whom he distributes large alms.
+When this ceremony is ended, the prince is confirmed as inheritor of the
+kingdom, and all the people depart.
+
+The zamorin of Calicut, and the other kings of Malabar, have each one
+especial officer, to whom the administration of justice is confided, and
+whose authority in all matters of government is as ample as that of the
+king himself. The soldiers employed by these kings are called _Nayres_,
+who are all gentlemen, and who follow no other office or employ but that
+of fighting when needed. They are all idolaters, armed with bows, arrows,
+spears, daggers of a hooked form, and targets, and they march in a very
+regular and warlike manner; but they go entirely naked and barefooted,
+wearing only a piece of painted cotton cloth, which reaches from the
+girdle to the knees, and a cloth or kerchief on their heads. All these
+men live continually at the charge of the king and nobles of the country,
+from whom they have small stipends for their maintenance; and they esteem
+themselves so highly on account of their gentility of blood, that they
+will not touch an husbandman, nor allow any such to enter into their
+dwellings. When any husbandman goes through the streets they must
+continually call out aloud _hoo hoo_; for if commanded by a nayre to make
+way, they may be slain if they refuse. The king cannot raise any one to
+the rank of a _nayre_, who are all such by descent. These _nayres_ serve
+very faithfully under those who give them their wages, not sparing by day
+or night to use their best endeavours to serve their chiefs, nor making
+any account of want of food or sleep, or of fatigue, when their service
+is required or may be effectual. Their expences are so small, that on
+half-a-crown, which is their only monthly pay, they can sufficiently
+maintain themselves and a boy, whom each has as a servant.
+
+By the laws of this country, these nayres cannot marry, so that no one
+has any certain or acknowledged son or father; all their children being
+born of mistresses, with each of whom three or four nayres cohabit by
+agreement among themselves. Each one of this confraternity dwells a day
+in his turn with the joint mistress, counting from noon of one day to the
+same time of the next, after which he departs, and another comes for the
+like time. They thus spend their lives without the care or trouble of
+wives and children, yet maintain their mistresses well according to their
+rank. Any one may forsake his mistress at his pleasure; and in like
+manner, the mistress may refuse admittance to any one o£ her lovers when
+she pleases. These mistresses are all gentlewomen of the Nayre cast; and
+the nayres, besides being prohibited from marrying, must not attach
+themselves to any woman of a different rank. Considering that there are
+always several men attached to one woman, the nayres never look upon any
+of these children born of their mistresses as belonging to them, however
+strong a resemblance may subsist, and all inheritances among the nayres
+go to their brothers, or the sons of their sisters, born of the same
+mothers, all relationship being counted only by female consanguinity and
+descent. This strange law prohibiting marriage, was established, that
+they might have neither wives or children on whom to fix their love and
+attachment; and that being free from all family cares, they might the
+more willingly devote themselves entirely to warlike service. And the
+more to animate these gentlemen in the service of the wars, and to
+encourage them to continue in the order of nayres, they are privileged
+from all imprisonments, and from the punishment of death on all ordinary
+occasions, except for the following crimes; killing another nayre, or a
+cow which is an object of worship, sleeping or eating with an ordinary
+woman, or speaking evil of the king. When the king has received authentic
+information of any of these offences having been committed, he issues a
+written mandate to one of the nayres, commanding him to take two or three
+other nayres in his company, and to slay the nayre who has committed this
+offence against the laws. In obedience to this warrant, they attack him
+with their swords and put him to death where-ever they happen to find him,
+and then affix the royal order upon his body, that all may know the
+reason of his death.
+
+It is not permitted to any nayre to assume arms, or to enter into any
+combat, till he has been armed as a knight. When a nayre becomes seven
+years old, he is set to learn the use of all kinds of weapons, their
+masters first pulling and twisting their joints to make them supple, and
+then teaching them to fence and handle their arms adroitly. Their
+principal weapons are swords and targets; and these teachers, who are
+graduates in the use of the weapons, are called _Panycaes_, who are much
+esteemed among the nayres, and all their former scholars, however
+advanced in life or however high their dignity, are bound at all times to
+give them due honour and reverence when they meet; likewise, every
+_nayre_ is obliged to take lessons from these professors for two months
+yearly, all their lives: By this means they are very skilful in the use
+of their weapons, in which they take great pride. When a nayre desires to
+be armed as a knight, he presents himself before the king, accompanied by
+all his kindred and friends, and makes an offering of sixty gold fannoms
+[55]. On which he is asked by the king if he is willing to observe and
+follow the laws and customs of the nayres, to which he answers in the
+affirmative. Then the king commands him to be girt with a sword, and
+laying his right hand on his head, utters certain words as if praying in
+so low a voice that he is not heard. The king then embraces the young
+nayre, saying aloud in their language, "Take good care to defend the
+Bramins and their kine." On this the nayre falls down and does reverence
+to the king; and from that time he is considered as a knight, or member
+of the fraternity of nayres. When any of the nayres enters into the
+peculiar service of the king or of any individual noble, he binds himself
+to die with and for him, and they keep their oaths. For, if their master
+should happen to be slain in any war or otherwise, they will fight till
+they are all slain; and if they cannot accomplish their purpose at the
+time, or happen to be absent at the slaughter of their master, they go
+afterwards in search of the person who has done the deed, and never leave
+off till they are themselves slain.
+
+The Malabars are much given to soothsaying, and have lucky and unlucky
+days. They worship the sun moon and stars, the fire, cows, and the first
+thing they meet on going out of a morning, believing every manner of
+vanity. The devil is often in them, but they say it is one of their gods
+or _pagods_, as they call him. But whosoever or whatsoever it may be, it
+constrains them to utter terrible words, which are believed by the king.
+When the devil enters into a nayre, he goes with a naked sword before the
+king, shaking and trembling and giving himself many wounds, saying, "I am
+such or such a god, and am come to tell thee such and such a thing,"
+crying out, and behaving himself like a madman or one possessed. If the
+king makes any doubt of what he says, he continues to roar still louder
+and to slash himself more severely, till the king gives credit to his
+assertions. There are other tribes or lineages of people among the
+Malabars, of various sects and divers customs, of whom it were too
+tedious to speak in this place, who are all under obedience to the
+several kings and nobles. The Moors alone are exempted from this
+obedience, on account of the large customs they pay for their merchandize,
+owing to which they are held in high estimation at Calicut.
+
+Having come to anchor on the outside of the bar or reef of Calicut, the
+general sent one of the Portuguese convicts on shore, in one of the
+almadias which had conducted the ships to this port; instructing him to
+see what kind of a place it was, and to make trial of what kind of a
+reception might be looked for, seeing we were Christians, and as the
+general believed that the people were likewise Christians. When this man
+landed, he was immediately surrounded by great numbers of the natives,
+staring at him as a stranger. These people asked of the fishermen what
+man this was whom they had brought on shore? to which they answered, that
+they supposed him to be a Moor, and that he belonged to the three ships
+which were riding without the bar. But the people of Calicut wondered
+much to see a person who was clothed so very differently from the Moors
+who came from the Red Sea. Some of these people who had knowledge of
+Arabic spoke to this man, but he could not understand or answer them, at
+which they were much astonished. Yet, believing him to be a Moor, they
+conducted him to a house where two Moors dwelt who came originally from
+Tunis and had established themselves in Calicut. On his appearance, one
+of these Moors whose name was Bontaybo[56], who could speak Spanish,
+immediately recognized him for a Portuguese, having often seen people of
+our nation at Tunis in the reign of King John, in a ship named La Reyna
+which often traded to that port. As soon as Bontaybo saw the Portuguese,
+he exclaimed in Spanish, _Devil take you, what brought you here_? He
+farther inquired which way he had travelled so as to arrive at Calicut?
+To this the banished man answered, telling how many ships our general had
+brought with him; at which Bontaybo was much amazed, wondering how they
+could possibly come by sea from Portugal to India. He then asked what
+they sought at so great a distance from home? And was answered that they
+came in search of Christians and spices. Bontaybo then asked why the
+kings of France and Spain and the Doge of Venice had not sent their ships
+likewise? Because, said our man, the king of Portugal would not allow
+them. To this Bontaybo said, he was much in the right. After some farther
+conversation in this way, Bontaybo gave him good entertainment,
+commanding certain cakes of wheat flour and honey, called _apes_ by the
+Malabars, to be set before him; and then said that he would accompany him
+to the ships to wait upon the general.
+
+Bontaybo accordingly came on board our general, whom he immediately
+addressed in Spanish, saying, "Good luck! good luck! many rubies, many
+emeralds. Thou art bound to give God thanks for having brought thee where
+there is abundance of all sorts of spices, precious stones, and all the
+other riches of the world." On hearing this, the general and all the
+people were greatly astonished, not expecting to meet any one so far from
+home who understood their language; and even shed tears of joy for this
+happy circumstance, and their safe arrival. They all then joined in
+humble and hearty thanks to the Almighty, by whose favour and assistance
+alone this great happiness and good fortune had been accorded to them.
+The general embraced Bontaybo, whom he made to sit beside him, and
+questioned him if he were a Christian, and how he came to Calicut.
+Bontaybo told him frankly that he was a Moor from Tunis in Barbary, and
+had come to Calicut by way of Cairo and the Red Sea, and explained how he
+came to know the Portuguese, as has been already mentioned. He farther
+declared, that he had always been well disposed towards the Portuguese
+nation, having always found them worthy of confidence and friendship in
+all their dealings; and, having been a friend to them in times past, he
+would not discontinue his good will, and was ready and willing to do
+every thing in his power to serve them, and to assist them in the objects
+for which they had now come to Calicut. The general gave him many thanks
+for his good will, and promised to reward him liberally for the friendly
+aid he might give to him and his expedition, expressing his extreme
+satisfaction at being so fortunate as to meet such a person in this place,
+believing that God had sent him here to promote the great objects of this
+voyage, for which he passed through so many and long continued dangers,
+being quite sensible that he must have reaped little profit from all his
+labours without such friendly assistance.
+
+The general then requested information from Bontaybo, as to the character
+of the king or zamorin of Calicut, and whether, in his opinion, he would
+willingly receive him as ambassador from the king of Portugal. Bontaybo
+represented the zamorin as a prince of good and honourable dispositions,
+who, he was convinced, would gladly receive the general as ambassador
+from a foreign king; more especially, if the objects of his voyage were
+to establish a trade with Calicut, and if the general had brought with
+him any merchandize proper for that purpose; since the advantages which
+the zamorin derived from the customs upon trade formed the chief source
+of his revenue. He farther informed the general, that the zamorin resided
+at this time at Panane, a village on the coast about five leagues from
+Calicut; and advised that the general should send a message there to
+notify his arrival, and the reasons of his coming. The general was well
+pleased with this advice and presented certain gifts to Bontaybo, along
+with whom he sent two of his men to Calicut, requesting Bontaybo to
+direct them on their way to Panane, which he did accordingly. When these
+messengers came into the presence of the zamorin, one of them, named
+_Fernan Martyn_, declared to him, by means of an interpreter, "That he
+waited upon his highness on the part of his general, who had arrived in
+the port of Calicut with three ships, having been sent there by the king
+of Portugal with letters to his highness, which the general begged
+permission to present to him." On hearing this message, and before giving
+any answer, the zamorin commanded each of the two messengers to be
+presented with a piece cotton cloth and two pieces of silk, such as he
+used in his own apparel; after which he inquired of Fernan Martyn what
+king it was who had sent him these letters, and how far his dominions
+were from thence. Fernan fully answered these inquiries, adding, that he
+was a Christian prince, and that those whom he had sent in the ships now
+at Calicut were Christians; and related what great and numerous dangers
+they had passed through during their voyage. The zamorin was much amazed
+at the incidents of the voyage which Fernan related at some length, and
+expressed his satisfaction that so powerful a prince of the Christians
+should think of sending an ambassador to him from so great a distance. He
+then desired Fernan to inform the general, that he heartily welcomed him
+and his people into his dominions, advising him to bring his ships to
+anchor near a village called _Pandarane_ some way below where the ships
+then lay, as a far better harbour than Calicut which is an open and very
+dangerous road for shipping. The zamorin desired likewise that the
+general might come by land from that place to Calicut, where he would be
+ready to receive him. After this, the zamorin sent a pilot to navigate
+the ships to the harbour of Pandarane; but, on coming to the bar of that
+port, the general did not think it advisable to enter so far within the
+harbour as the pilot proposed, fearing lest he might expose himself to
+danger by reposing too great confidence in these people, and placing
+himself too much within their power. In this he acted with much prudent
+foresight, by which he wisely avoided the injuries which were afterwards
+attempted against him at this place.
+
+On his arrival at Pandarane, the general received a message from the
+kutwal[57] of Calicut, intimating that he and other nobles awaited him on
+shore by order of the zamorin, to conduct him to the city, and that he
+had permission to land whenever he pleased[58]. But as the day drew near
+a close, the general returned an answer excusing himself from landing
+that night. He immediately called a council of the other captains and
+principal officers of the fleet, to take their advice on the present
+emergency, to whom he intimated his intention of going to visit the king
+of Calicut on purpose to settle a treaty of trade and amity. Paulo de
+Gama, his brother, strongly objected to his venturing on shore; alleging
+that although the natives of the place were Christians, as they still
+believed them, yet there were many Moors among them who were much to be
+feared as his mortal enemies; since these people at Mozambique and
+Mombaza, where they had only passed by their ports, endeavoured to
+destroy them all, they were much more to be feared at Calicut where we
+had come on purpose to enter into competition with them in trade, by
+which their profits would be diminished. It was therefore the more
+probable that they would use every effort to destroy the general, on whom
+our whole hope of safety and success depended; and, however much the
+zamorin might regret the commission of such a deed, he could not restore
+him to life: besides which, the Moors were inhabitants of the place,
+where they had much interest, whereas the general was an utter stranger.
+Likewise, it was quite impossible for them to be assured that the king of
+Calicut might not have leagued with the Moors for his death or captivity;
+either of which would ruin their voyage and prove the destruction of them
+all, and all the toils and dangers they had passed through would prove in
+vain. To prevent all this danger, he strongly urged that the general
+should on no account go on shore, but should depute one of the captains,
+or some other person in the fleet in his stead; alleging that commanders
+in chief ought never to subject themselves to personal danger, unless in
+cases of the most urgent necessity.
+
+All the officers were of the same opinion. But the general answered, that
+even if he were perfectly assured that his landing were to occasion his
+instant death, he would not refrain from going to visit the king of
+Calicut, to endeavour to settle amity and trade, and that he might
+procure some spices and other commodities from the place, by means of
+which their discovery of Calicut might be proved on their return into
+Portugal: As otherwise, if we returned without any of the productions of
+the Indies, their discovery would be discredited, and their honour and
+veracity called in question. "Think not therefore," said he, "but I will
+rather die, than leave it in hazard that the long time we have already
+spent, and may yet employ, shall be lost, and others sent to ascertain
+the truth of our discoveries, while envious persons may have it in their
+power to discredit our services. Neither do I run into such hazard of
+death, nor expose you to such dangers as you suppose; seeing that I am
+going to a city inhabited by Christians, and to a king who wishes the
+concourse of many merchants in his dominions, as the more of these that
+frequent his port so much the greater must be his revenue from the
+customs upon trade. It is not my intention to stay long on shore, so as
+to give opportunity to the Moors to complot against me; as I propose only
+to talk with the king and to return in three days, by which time you may
+have every thing in readiness for our departure. If I should have the good
+fortune, by the will of God, to establish trade and amity with the king of
+Calicut, I would not exchange the honour and credit of that transaction
+for any treasure that could be given me; neither can the king of Calicut
+settle this affair so well with any other person, as he will honour me the
+more for being the captain-general of this fleet and the ambassador of our
+king. Should any other go in my stead, the king might look upon himself as
+slighted and insulted, under an idea that I do not esteem him worthy to be
+visited by myself, or that I do not trust him on his word and assurance.
+Besides, it is not possible for me to give sufficiently ample instructions
+to any one I might send, to enable him to do what may be necessary under
+every circumstance that may arise, as I myself might do. Even if it should
+chance that they kill me, it were better this should happen in the
+discharge of my duty, than that I should preserve my life by neglecting to
+perform it. You, my friends, remain at sea in good ships: And if you hear
+of any mischance befalling me, my desire is that you shall immediately
+depart and carry home news of our discovery. As for our present subject,
+there need be no farther argument; as I am determined, with the blessing
+of God, to proceed to visit the king at Calicut."
+
+When this determination was made known the captains made no farther
+objections, and chose out twelve persons to accompany him, among whom
+were Diego Diaz his secretary, Fernan Martinez the interpreter, John de
+Sala who was afterwards treasurer of the Indies, and nine others; and
+Paulo de Gama, his brother, was appointed to act as captain-general
+during his absence. The general, before going on shore, gave pointed
+orders that no person should on any account be permitted to come on board
+the ships; but that all who were desirous of any intercourse with them
+should remain in their boats or almadias. He likewise directed that
+Nicholas Coello should come every day with his boat well armed as near
+the shore as he could with safety, on purpose to keep up an intercourse
+between the ships and himself. All these things being settled, the
+general went on shore with his twelve attendants, all in their best
+attire; their boat furnished with much ordnance, dressed out with flags
+and streamers, and sounding trumpets all the way from the ships to the
+shore. On landing, the general was received with every demonstration of
+respect by the kutwal, attended by 200 nayres, and a great concourse of
+natives, both of the country and from the city of Calicut. After
+compliments were passed, the general was placed in an _andor_ or litter,
+which the king of Calicut had sent for his use. In this country it is not
+customary to travel on horseback, but in these andors. This vehicle is
+like a horse-litter, except that they are very plain with low sides, and
+are carried by four men on their shoulders, who run post in this manner,
+carrying the king or any noble person when on a journey, and going at a
+great rate. The person in the andor may either sit or lie as he pleases;
+and certain servants carry umbrellas, which they call _bueys_, to shelter
+the person in the andor from the sun and rain. There are other andors
+which have a curved cane over them like a bow, and are so light that they
+can be carried by two men.
+
+The general being mounted in one andor and the kutwal in another, they
+set out for a town called Capocate[59], all the rest being on foot; but
+the kutwal appointed certain people of the country to carry the baggage
+of our men, which was restored to them at Capocate, where the party
+stopped for refreshment, the general and his people being in one house
+and the kutwal in another. Our people were here provided with boiled fish,
+with rice and butter, and some of the country fruits which are very good,
+though quite different from ours. One of these fruits is called _lacas_,
+and another Mango, and they have figs likewise. The water was excellent,
+and as good as any in Portugal. After resting and refreshing themselves
+at Capocate, the general and his suite were embarked in a vessel called
+an _ensangada_, consisting of two almadias lashed side by side. The
+kutwal and his train embarked in many other boats; and the whole went up
+a river which discharges itself into the sea at this place. The numbers
+of people that came to the river side to view our men as they passed was
+quite countless, by which it appears that the country was well inhabited.
+After going about a league up this river, our people came to a place
+where many large ships were drawn up on the shore. The whole party here
+disembarked and proceeded by land, the general and kutwal in andors as
+before, being surrounded by thousands who were curious to see the
+strangers, even many women pressing into the crowd with their children
+slung at their backs.
+
+From this place the kutwal carried the general to one of their pagodas or
+idol temples, into which they entered, and which the kutwal said was a
+church of great holiness. This the general believed to be the case,
+fancying it to be a church of the Christians; which he the more readily
+believed, as he saw seven little bells hung over the principal door. In
+front of this entry, there stood a pillar made of wire as tall as the
+mast of a ship, on the top of which was a weathercock likewise made of
+wire. This church was as large as a moderate convent, all built of
+freestone, and covered, or vaulted over with brick, having a fine outward
+appearance as if its inside were of splendid workmanship. Our general was
+much pleased with this church, as he actually believed himself in a
+Christian country, and gladly entered along with the kutwal. They were
+received by the priests, who were naked from the waist upwards, having a
+kind of petticoats of cotton hanging down from the girdle to their knees,
+and pieces of calico covering their arm-pits, their heads legs and feet
+bare. They were distinguished by wearing certain threads over their right
+shoulders, which crossed over their breasts under their left arms, much
+in the way in which our priests used formerly to wear their stoles when
+they said mass. These men are called kafrs[60], and are idolaters,
+serving as priests in the pagodas of Malabar; and on the general going
+into the pagoda, they took holy water with a _sprinkle_ from a font, and
+threw it over the kutwal and him and their attendants. After this, they
+gave them powdered sandalwood to throw upon their heads, as used to be
+done amongst us with ashes; and they were directed to do the same on
+their arms. But our people, as being clothed, omitted this latter part of
+the ceremony, complying with the other.
+
+In this pagoda they saw many images painted on the walls, some of which
+had monstrous teeth projecting an inch from their mouths, and some had
+four arms; all of them so ugly that they seemed like devils, which raised
+doubts among our people whether they were actually in a Christian church.
+In the middle of the pagoda stood a chapel, having a roof or dome of
+freestone like a tower, in one part of which was a door of wire, to which
+there led a flight of stone steps. On the inside of this tower an image
+was observed in a recess of the wall, which our men could not see
+distinctly, as the place was somewhat dark, and they were not permitted
+to go near, as none were allowed to approach except the priests. But from
+certain words and signs, our people understood this to be an image of the
+Virgin; on which the general and his attendants went upon their knees to
+say their prayers[61]. John de Sala, however, being very doubtful that
+this was not a Christian church, owing to the monstrous images on the
+walls, said, as he fell on his knees, "_If this be the devil, I worship
+God_," on which the general looked at him with a smile. The kutwal and
+his people, as they approached the chapel, prostrated themselves three
+times on their faces with their hands extended before them, after which
+they arose and said their prayers standing.
+
+From this place they went forwards to the city of Calicut, and were taken
+at their arrival into another pagoda similar to the former. After this,
+on entering the city, the crowd was so great that they could hardly make
+their way through the streets. The general was astonished to see such
+multitudes, and praised GOD for having brought him in safety to this city,
+humbly beseeching his divine mercy so to guide him on his way that he
+might accomplish the objects of his expedition, and return safely into
+Portugal. At length the pressure of the crowd became so great that the
+bearers were unable to get forwards, and the whole company were forced to
+take shelter in a house. They were here joined by the kutwals brother, a
+nobleman who was sent by the king to accompany the general to the palace,
+and had many nayres along with him. The procession again set out,
+preceded by many trumpets and sacbuts sounding all the way; and one of
+the nayres carried a _caliver_, which he fired off at intervals. After
+they were joined by the kutwals brother, the mob gave way for the
+procession to pass, and shewed as much reverence as if the king himself
+had been present. There went in the procession at least 3000 armed men,
+and the multitudes of spectators, in the streets, at the doors and
+windows, and on the roofs, were quite innumerable. The general was well
+pleased at his honourable reception, and said pleasantly to those of his
+company, "_They little think in Portugal how honourably we are received
+here_."
+
+The procession arrived at the palace an hour before sunset. Though only
+constructed of earth, the palace was very extensive and seemed a handsome
+structure, having great numbers of trees interspersed among the different
+buildings, with pleasant gardens full of fine flowers and odoriferous
+plants, and many fountains; as the zamorin never goes out of the palace
+while resident in Calicut. On arriving at the palace, several caymals and
+other noblemen came out to receive the general, who led him to a large
+square immediately in front of the gates, whence they passed through four
+several courts, at the gate of each of which there were ten porters who
+were obliged to lay about them with sticks among the people to clear the
+way. On coming to the gate of the house in which the king resided, they
+were met by the chief bramin, or high priest of the royal household, a
+little old man, who embraced the general, and conducted him and his
+people into the palace. At this time the people pressed forwards with
+much eagerness to get a sight of the king, which they very seldom do as
+he goes very rarely out of the palace; and the multitude was so great
+that some of them were stifled in the throng, which would likewise have
+been the case with two of our men, if they had not gone on before, with
+the assistance of the porters, who severely hurt many of the mob, and
+forced them to make way. On passing the last gate, the general and his
+attendants entered along with the noblemen into a great hall, surrounded
+with seats of timber raised in rows above one another like our theatres,
+the floor being covered by a carpet of green velvet, and the walls hung
+with silk of various colours. The king was of a brown complexion, large
+stature, and well advanced in years. He lay on a sofa covered with a
+cloth of white silk and gold, and a rich canopy over his head. On his
+head he had a cap or mitre adorned with precious stones and pearls, and
+had jewels of the same kind in his ears. He wore a jacket of fine cotton
+cloth, having buttons of large pearls and the button-holes wrought with
+gold thread. About his middle he had a piece of a white calico, which
+came only down to his knees; and both his fingers and toes were adorned
+with many gold rings set with fine stones; his arms and legs were covered
+with many golden bracelets. Close to his sofa there stood a gold shallow
+bason on a gold stand, in which was _betel_, which the king chewed with
+salt and _areka_. This last is a kind of fruit about the size of a nut,
+and is chewed all over India to sweeten the breath, and is supposed to
+carry off phlegm from the stomach and to prevent thirst. The king had
+likewise a gold bason on a golden stand, into which he spat out the betel
+when chewed; and a gold fountain with water for washing his mouth. The
+king was served with betel by an old man who stood close to the sofa; all
+the others who were in the presence held their left hands to their mouths,
+that their breaths might not reach the king; and it is thought unseemly
+for any one to spit or sneeze in the presence.
+
+When the general entered the hall in which the king sat, he stooped or
+bowed down three times according to the custom of the country, lifting up
+his hands as one that praised God. The king immediately made signs for
+the general to draw near, and commanded him to be seated on one of the
+seats; and the rest of the Portuguese came forwards, making similar
+reverences, and were likewise commanded to sit down opposite the king.
+Water was then presented to all the company to wash their hands, which
+was very refreshing, for, though it was then winter, they were very hot.
+They were then presented with figs and jakas, and the king was much
+pleased to see them eat, laughing at them and conversing with the old man
+who served him with betel. Our people being thirsty, called for water,
+which was brought to them in a golden ewer, and they were directed to
+pour the water into their mouths as it is reckoned injurious to touch the
+cup with their lips. They accordingly did as they were directed; but some
+poured the water into their throats and fell a coughing, while others
+poured it beside upon their faces and clothes, which much amused the king.
+After this, the king desired the general by an interpreter, to speak to
+those who were present as to the purpose of his coming to Calicut. But
+the general was not satisfied with this, and signified that he was
+ambassador from the king of Portugal, a powerful prince, and that
+Christian princes were not used to receive the embassies of other
+sovereigns by means of a third person, but by themselves in person in the
+presence only of a few of their principal persons: and this being the
+usage of his country, he chose to deliver his message only to the king
+himself. The king agreed to this, and commanded the general and Fernan
+Martinez who acted as interpreter, to be conducted into another chamber,
+which was adorned with as much magnificence as the first.
+
+As soon as the king entered this chamber, he took his seat on a sofa,
+attended only by his interpreter, the chief bramin, the old man who served
+him with betel, and the comptroller of his household. The king then
+asked the general, from what part of the world he was come, and what were
+his desires. He answered, that he was ambassador from the king of Portugal,
+the most powerful of the Christian sovereigns in the west, both in extent
+of dominions, numbers of people, and riches. That he and his predecessors,
+hearing that there were Christian kings and princes in the Indies, of
+which the zamorin of Calicut was the chief, were exceedingly desirous of
+sending some of their captains to discover the way, that they might enter
+into friendship with the king of this country as brothers; and for this
+reason he had been sent to his highness: Not that the king his master had
+any need of his riches, having abundance already and more than was needed
+both of gold and silver and other valuable things. That all the former
+captains who had been sent at great charges upon this discovery, after
+having employed a year or more in vain and having consumed all their
+victuals, had returned again into Portugal. But that the present king Don
+Manuel, being anxious to bring this great enterprize to a successful
+conclusion, had entrusted him with command of three ships well supplied
+with provisions, commanding him not to return to Portugal without
+discovering the way to the Christian king of Calicut, and would certainly
+order his head to be cut off if he returned without fulfilling his orders.
+The said king his master had given him two letters to deliver to his
+highness, which he would present next day as it was now somewhat late;
+when he would convince his highness that the king of Portugal was his
+friend and brother, and should request of highness, in confirmation of
+friendship, to send an ambassador to the king of Portugal, as was the
+custom among Christian princes. The zamorin expressed his satisfaction
+with this embassy, and told the general that he made him welcome to his
+capital; and, since the king of Portugal desired to be his friend and
+brother, he would be the like to him, and should send an ambassador to him
+as desired. The zamorin then made inquiry into many circumstances
+respecting Portugal; how far distant it was from Calicut, how long the
+general had been upon the voyage, and other things: And as it grew late,
+the king allowed him to retire, first asking him whether he would reside
+with the Moors or the Malabars; but as the general chose rather to have a
+house to himself, the king gave orders to a Moor who was his factor, to
+accompany him, and to provide him with every thing necessary for his
+accommodation.
+
+Leaving the palace late, it being now towards ten o'clock, the kutwal and
+the rest who had accompanied him there, escorted him back to where he was
+to lodge; and as they were on their way, all on foot, there fell such rain
+that the streets ran in torrents, insomuch that the factor gave orders to
+some of the people to carry our general on their backs. The general was
+displeased at this and at the delay, and asked angrily at the factor if he
+meant to carry him all night through the streets. The factor made answer
+that he could not do otherwise, as the city was large and much scattered.
+He then conducted him into his own house to rest for some time, and
+procured a horse for him to ride; but, as the horse had no saddle, the
+general preferred going on foot. At length he was brought to a very good
+lodging, to which his people had previously brought all his baggage.
+
+Next day, being Tuesday, the general was greatly rejoiced to see so
+promising a commencement of his business, and resolved upon sending a
+present to the zamorin; upon which he sent for the kutwal and the kings
+factor, to whom he shewed the present which he proposed sending. This
+consisted of four _capotas_ or cloaks of scarlet cloth, six hats, four
+branches of coral, twelve _almasares_, a box containing seven brass
+vessels, a chest of sugar, two barrels of oil, and a cask of honey. The
+kutwal and factor laughed in derision at this present, saying, that this
+was no fit present for their king, the poorest merchant presenting one
+more valuable. They desired him rather to send gold, as the king would
+accept, of nothing else. The general was offended at this, saying, if he
+had been a merchant he would have brought gold; but, being an ambassador,
+he had brought none. That what he now offered were his own goods, and not
+belonging to the king his master; who, being uncertain if he should ever
+reach Calicut, had given him nothing to offer as a present to the zamorin.
+But, at his next coming, knowing now certainly the route, the king his
+master would send gold and silver and otter rich articles. To this they
+answered, that these things might be, but it was the custom of this
+country for every stranger who had speech of the king to make him a
+present in proportion to the greatness of his rank. The general replied it
+was very proper their customs should be observed, and therefore he desired
+to send this present, which he could not make more valuable, for the
+reasons already assigned; and if they would not suffer it to be carried to
+the king, he should send it back to his ships. They answered he might do
+so, for they would not consent to have such a present sent to the king.
+The general, much displeased, said he would go speak with the king himself,
+and would then return to the ships, meaning to have informed the king of
+all that had passed in regard to the intended present. This they said was
+very proper; but, as they would be detained long at court in attending him,
+they were obliged in the mean time to go upon other business, and would
+return to escort him to court, as the king would be angry if he went
+without them, he being an entire stranger; and besides, he could not go in
+safety unaccompanied, because of the great numbers of Moors who resided in
+that city. Giving credit to their words, the general consented to this
+arrangement, and said he would wait for their return, which he expected
+would be without delay: But they did not return all that day, as they had
+been gained over by the Moors to thwart the purposes of the general.
+
+The Moors in Calicut had received information of the transactions of the
+Portuguese at Quiloa, and of the taking of the _sambuco_ off Melinda; and
+knowing that we were Christians, were very jealous of our arrival at
+Calicut. Bontaybo had told the Moors that our purpose was not merely to
+discover Calicut from curiosity, but that spices were in great estimation
+in Portugal, which abounded in gold and silver, and to which all kinds of
+merchandize was at present transported that went from Calicut by way of
+the Red Sea; and finally, that the settlement of a direct trade by the
+Portuguese with Calicut would tend greatly to the profit of the zamorin.
+All this the Moors very well understood: But, considering that we were
+Christians, they believed, if we should establish trade with Calicut,
+that their own commodities would fall in price, and most of their profits
+be destroyed. Wherefore they consulted together how to induce the zamorin
+to take the general prisoner, to seize our ships, and to kill all our men;
+that they might not return into Portugal with any intelligence concerning
+Calicut. Upon this they associated themselves with some of those who were
+in greatest credit with the zamorin, to whom they procured access, and
+represented to him, That he ought not to be deceived by the Christians,
+for the general was no ambassador as he pretended, but a pirate who went
+about to rob and plunder whereever he came. They asserted having received
+undoubted intelligence of this from their factors in Africa; where after
+entering into a friendly correspondence with the _xeque_, who even
+visited the general in his ship, gave him many presents, and provided him
+with a pilot to bring him to Calicut, he had battered the town with his
+ordnance, and killed several of his subjects. That he had afterwards
+taken some _sambucos_ laden with merchandize, treating the xeque and his
+subjects like enemies. In like manner they misrepresented the conduct of
+the general at Mombaza and Melinda, turning every thing that had occurred
+to his dishonour. They reasoned from these misrepresentations, that he
+could not be an ambassador sent to maintain peace and amity, as he would
+not, in that case, have been guilty of these base hostilities, and would
+assuredly have brought the king a present worthy of the sovereign he
+pretended to come from.
+
+The king was much amazed at this discourse, and told the Moors that he
+would consider and determine what was proper for him to do. The Moors
+also told the kutwal of all that they had said to the king, with whom he
+was in great credit, and requested of him to persuade the king not to
+listen to this embassage. The kutwal then went to the king, who told him
+all that the Moors had said, and the kutwal advised him to do as the
+Moors had requested. On this the king changed his good intentions towards
+the general, yet endeavoured to conceal his purposes. The Moors then
+waited on the general under pretence of friendship, offering to instruct
+him how best to conduct himself, saying that it was customary for all
+persons who came from other places to Calicut on business with the king
+to bring him a present. On this the general shewed them the present he
+had proposed making, which the kutwal and the factor had made so light of;
+and, with whom they agreed, saying it was by no means a fit present, and
+would rather seem a mockery, and give offence. Even Bontaybo agreed in
+this opinion; and asked the general why he had not brought better things,
+as he knew that Portugal abounded in all manner of rich commodities. But
+the general excused himself as formerly, by saying that it was quite
+uncertain whether he might ever have come to Calicut.
+
+The general remained the whole of this day in his lodgings, much
+displeased that the kutwal and factor had not returned according to
+promise, and was at one time resolved to have gone to court without them;
+yet thought it better to wait till next day. In the afternoon of the
+Wednesday, the kutwal and factor made their appearance, when he mentioned
+his dissatisfaction at their long absence; but they talked of other
+things, and gave him no answer on that subject. At length they
+accompanied him to the palace; but the king, having greatly changed his
+mind towards him, made him wait three hours for admission, and then
+ordered that only two of his people should be admitted into the presence
+along with himself. Though the general considered this separation of his
+people as not looking well, he went into the presence attended by Fernan
+Martinez and Diego Diaz, his interpreter and secretary. The king did not
+receive him so well as formerly, and said with a severe countenance that
+he had expected him all the preceding day. Not willing to give him the
+true cause of his absence, lest it might lead to a conversation
+respecting the present, the general said he had tarried at home to
+recover from the fatigue of his long voyage. On this the king observed,
+that he pretended to have been sent on an embassy of friendship from a
+rich and powerful king, and that he did not well understand what kind of
+friendship was intended, since he had sent him no present. To this the
+general answered, That it was not to be wondered that the king his master
+had sent no present to his highness, considering the extreme uncertainty
+of his being able to come to this place by a way never before attempted,
+and unknown till now. But, now that the way was discovered, and God
+spared him to return to Portugal, his master would assuredly send him
+princely gifts, worthy of them both: And if his highness would have the
+goodness to give credit to the letters which he had brought from the king
+his master, he would there learn the intentions of the king of Portugal
+in sending him to Calicut. Instead of desiring to see the letters, the
+king asked him whether he was sent in search of stones or of men; and if
+sent to discover men, how came it that the king his master had sent no
+present? And since it was manifest that he had brought him nothing, he
+demanded of him to send him the golden image of the Virgin, which he
+understood was in his ship.
+
+The general, much concerned to find the king so much changed towards him,
+on account of not bringing him a present and amazed at this strange
+demand, said that the image of the Virgin Mary of which his highness had
+been told, was only of wood gilt, and not of gold; and besides, as this
+holy image had protected him during his long perils on the sea, and had
+brought him so far in safety, he was unwilling to part with it. The
+zamorin made no reply to this, but immediately demanded that he should
+produce the letters from the king of Portugal. One of these was written
+in the Portuguese language, and the other in Arabic; and the general
+explained that this had been done, because the king his master did not
+know which of these might be understood in the dominions of his highness:
+And, since he now knew that Portuguese was not understood in India,
+whereas Arabic was, he requested that some Christian of the Indies who
+understood Arabic might be employed to interpret the letter, because the
+Moors were known to be enemies to the Christians, and he was afraid lest
+they might purposely give it a wrong interpretation. The king gave orders
+to this purpose, but no Indian could be found who was able to read the
+letters, or at least who would acknowledge that he could read them.
+Seeing that it was now necessary that it should be read by the Moors, the
+general requested that Bontaybo should be one of those appointed for the
+purpose, placing more reliance on him than the others, as he was an
+acquaintance. The king accordingly commanded the letter to be read by him
+and other three Moors; who, having first read it over to themselves,
+interpreted it aloud to the king, to the following effect: "As soon as it
+became known to the king of Portugal, that the king of Calicut was one of
+the mightiest kings of all the Indies and a Christian, he was anxious to
+establish a treaty of amity and commerce with him, that he might procure
+spices, which were in great abundance in his country, and to procure
+which the merchants of many parts of the world trade thither: And, if his
+highness would give a licence to send for spices, he would send many
+things from his kingdom which were not to be had in the dominions of his
+highness; or if these things were not satisfactory, of which the general
+could shew him some samples, he was willing to send money, both gold and
+silver, to purchase the spices. And finally referring his highness to the
+general for farther information."
+
+On hearing this letter interpreted, and being desirous that his revenues
+might increase by the resort of many merchants to his dominions, the
+zamorin evinced his satisfaction at what he had heard; and assuming a
+more friendly deportment towards the general, asked him what were the
+articles of merchandize that could be had from Portugal. De Gama named
+many different kinds; particularly mentioning such as he had samples of
+along with him, and likewise their money, and requested permission to go
+on board his ships that he might bring these things to his highness,
+offering to leave four or five of his men in his lodgings during his
+absence. Giving now more credit to the general than to what had been said
+by the Moors to his prejudice, the king told De Gama he might go on board
+when he pleased, taking all his men with him, as there was no call for
+any of them remaining on shore. He likewise said the general might freely
+bring his goods on shore, and sell them to the best advantage. The
+general was greatly satisfied with this permission, of which he had no
+hopes at the first, on seeing the unfriendly reception he had met with at
+the commencement of his audience. He went back, therefore, to his lodging,
+accompanied by the kutwal; and the day being near a close, he deferred
+returning on board that night.
+
+De Faria gives a somewhat different account of what passed at this second
+audience[62]. "It was wonderful that the zamorin, not knowing how to be
+properly assured of the truth, should rely on the faith of him who was
+accused by his ministers. For, as if he had really known in what
+detestation the Portuguese hold a lie, although to their own advantage,
+he sent for De Gama, and told him plainly that he had been informed his
+embassy was all a counterfeit, and that he was some banished man or a
+fugitive: Yet at the same time offered, even if it were so, to give him a
+kind reception, and to make him handsome appointments in his service; and
+promised to rely entirely on his word for information respecting the
+truth of the whole story. De Gama heard the king to an end with a firm
+countenance, and declared himself highly sensible of the confidence
+reposed in him. He then proceeded to answer all that had been alleged
+against him, which he completely overturned by irrefragable argument in a
+long and eloquent speech, preserving the utmost gravity and composure
+throughout the whole. The zamorin eyed him steadfastly the whole time,
+hoping to be enabled to judge of the truth or falsehood of his assertion
+by his countenance; and concluded, from the unconcernedness of his looks,
+the eloquence of his words, and the firm gravity of his whole demeanour,
+that no deceit could lurk under such appearances of sincerity, that the
+Moors had accused him maliciously, and had imposed on his ministers. He
+therefore frankly allowed De Gama permission to return to his ships, and
+to land his merchandize, if he had any: Saying, that while that was doing,
+he would prepare a satisfactory answer to the letter of the king of
+Portugal."
+
+On the next day, being the last of May, the kutwal sent a horse to the
+general to carry him to Pandarane; but having no furniture, he requested
+to be supplied with an _andor_, which was sent accordingly, when De Gama
+immediately set out for Pandarane, all his people accompanying him on
+foot. The kutwal remained at Calicut, but a considerable number of nayres
+escorted the general on his way. When the Moors learnt that the general
+was gone to the ships, they went together to the kutwal, making large
+offers of money to him, if he would pursue the general, and detain him a
+prisoner under some feigned pretence; when they would take some
+opportunity of having him slain, in such way that the blame should not
+attach to the kutwal. And when he objected that the zamorin might punish
+him for detaining the general contrary to his orders, they engaged so to
+deal with the zamorin as to obtain his pardon for that offence. Induced
+by a large bribe, and encouraged by this promise, the kutwal followed De
+Gama in such haste that he soon passed our men, who lagged behind on
+account of the great heat. On overtaking De Gama, he asked by signs why
+he was in such haste, and where he was running to? The general answered
+in the same manner, that he was running to avoid the heat. On coming to
+Pandarane, as his men were not come up, the general declined going into
+the town till they should arrive, and went into a house to get shelter
+from the rain. The people did not get to the town till near sunset,
+having lost their way; on which the general said if it had not been for
+their absence he would have been by this time on board. The general
+immediately desired the kutwal to order him to be furnished with an
+almadia or pinnace, to carry him and his people on board; but the kutwal
+said it was now late, and the ships so far away that he might miss them
+in the dark, for which reason he had better stay till next day. The
+general then said, if he were not immediately furnished with an almadia,
+he would return to the king and complain that he was detained contrary to
+his license, and even mentioned as if he meant to return immediately to
+Calicut. To dissemble the more, the kutwal said he might have thirty
+instead of one, if he needed them, and pretended to send out to procure
+almadias, while at the same time he commanded the owners to hide
+themselves that they might not be found.
+
+In the mean time, while messengers were dispatched on pretence to seek
+almadias, the general, having a strong suspicion that evil was intended
+towards him, walked leisurely along the water side, and sent off Gonzales
+Perez and two other mariners, to go on before and endeavour to find
+Nicholas Coello with his boats, and to caution him to keep out of the way,
+lest the kutwal might send off to seize his boats and men. While Perez
+and the others were absent on this errand, it drew far into the night;
+and not choosing to go off till he learnt what success Perez had met with,
+he at length agreed to stay all night. Having placed De Gama in the house
+of a Moor for the night, the kutwal pretended that he would go in search
+of the three mariners who were absent; but he did not return till next
+morning. The general then required to have an almadia to carry him and
+his people on board. Before answering, the kutwal spoke some words to his
+nayres in their own language, and then desired the general to give orders
+to have the ships brought near the shore oh which he should have leave to
+depart. On this the general became still more afraid that some treachery
+was intended; yet answered boldly, that he would give no such order while
+he remained on shore, as that would make his brother believe he was a
+prisoner and had issued this order under restraint, on which he would
+immediately depart for Portugal without him. The kutwal then threatened
+stoutly that he should never be allowed to go off, unless he complied
+with this demand. The general, in return, declared he should immediately
+return to Calicut if not allowed to go on board, and make a complaint of
+his conduct to the king. The kutwal even dared him to do this, yet took
+care it should not be in his power, as he had ordered the doors to be
+kept shut and guarded by armed nayres, to prevent any of the Portuguese
+from going out. Yet it was the will of God that the kutwal dared not to
+kill the general or any of his men, although the Moors had bribed him
+with a great sum of money, and notwithstanding his great credit with the
+zamorin. His anxiety to have the ships brought near the shore was, that
+the Moors might be able to board them and kill all their people; and,
+seeing it in this light, the general was equally determined to prevent
+their nearer approach. Finding he could not prevail on the general to
+command the ships to be brought near the shore, and having no pretence to
+justify either keeping him prisoner or offering him any wrong, the kutwal
+next endeavoured to persuade him to order the sails and rudders on shore;
+at which the general only laughed, saying the king had given full
+permission to go on board without any such conditions, and assured him
+the king should be fully informed of all his unjust proceedings.
+
+The general and his people now pretended to be in want of necessaries
+from the ships, and requested leave to send some of his people on board,
+while he should remain on shore; but this the kutwal refused, and our
+people began to be seriously alarmed. At this time Gonzalo Perez returned,
+supposing the general at liberty and that he waited for him and his
+companions. Perez informed De Gama that he had seen Coello, who waited
+for him with the boats near the shore. The admiral was exceedingly
+anxious that the kutwal should not know of this circumstance, lest he
+might send out a number of armed almadias to capture them; and therefore
+urged Perez to return secretly to give Coello warning to return to the
+ships and keep constantly on the alert for fear of an attack. When Coello
+got this intelligence, he immediately set off, and the kutwal caused him
+to be pursued by several almadias full of armed men, but he made his
+escape. The kutwal made another attempt to induce the general to order
+his brother to bring the ships near the shore, but in vain; for the
+general told him, his brother, even if he were to write such an order,
+would not obey, or, were he disposed to do so, the other officers in the
+ship would prevent him. The kutwal observed that he could not give credit
+to this, as he was sure any thing he commanded would be obeyed. But no
+arguments could prevail on the general to this measure, which he was
+satisfied was meant for facilitating the destruction of the fleet to
+gratify the Moors.
+
+The whole of this day was spent in this manner, and in the night our
+people were confined in a large paved yard surrounded with walls, and
+under even a stronger guard than attended them during the day; and even
+the general began to fear as well as the men, that they would be
+separated from one another. Yet he trusted, when the zamorin should come
+to know the usage they had received, he would give orders for their
+release. That night, the kutwal came to sup with the general and sent a
+supply of fowls and rice. Finding that he could not prevail over the
+constancy of De Gama, he determined at last to set him at liberty. Next
+day, therefore, being Saturday the second of June, he desired the general,
+since he had promised to the king to bring his merchandize on shore, that
+he ought to do so; as it was the usage of all merchants who came to
+Calicut to land their goods and crews, and not to return to their ships
+till all was sold; and he promised, when this was done, to give him free
+liberty to depart. Although the general gave very little credit to his
+fair words, he yet said, if the kutwal would provide almadias for the
+purpose, he would order his goods on shore; but was certain his brother
+would not allow the boats to leave the ships while he was detained on
+shore. The kutwal was now content to get the goods into his power, as he
+understood from the general they were of great value, and allowed the
+general to send off a message to his brother. He therefore sent off a
+letter by two of his men, in which he gave his brother an account of his
+situation, confined to his lodging but otherwise well used, and desiring
+him to send some of the merchandize on shore to satisfy the kutwal; but,
+directing him, in case he was much longer detained, to believe that he
+was kept prisoner by order of the zamorin; whose only object was to get
+the Portuguese ships into his power, not having time to arm his own ships
+for that purpose. For this reason, if not set at liberty immediately
+after the goods were landed, he required his brother to return without
+delay to Portugal, and inform the king of all that had happened; that the
+trade of so fine a country might not be lost to his country. And farther,
+to inform the king in what state he remained, trusting that his royal
+master would send such an armament as would enforce his restoration to
+liberty.
+
+On receiving this letter, and a circumstantial relation from the
+messenger of all that had happened on shore, Paulo de Gama immediately
+sent the goods; but said in answer to the general, that he could not
+answer to his honour to return to Portugal without him, and he trusted
+God would enable the small force he had still in the fleet, with the aid
+of his ordnance, to compel the kutwal to liberate him. On the merchandize
+being landed, the general delivered it over into the custody of Diego
+Diaz as factor, with Alvora de Braga as his clerk, whom he left in a
+house provided for them by the kutwal; after which he went on board the
+ships. He then refused to send any more goods on shore, till those
+already there were sold and paid for, and determined not to run himself
+again into danger by venturing on shore after what had already past. At
+this the Moors were grievously vexed, as they thought it more easy for
+them to have destroyed him on land than on board the ships. On purpose to
+entice him to land once more, the Moors made a mock of his goods,
+pretending they were good for nothing, and did all in their power to
+prevent them from selling. Thinking that the zamorin knew nothing of all
+these transactions, he sent him an account of the whole five days
+afterwards, by his factor, of all that had happened, and of the injurious
+conduct of the Moors respecting the sale of the goods. The king seemed
+much offended by these proceedings, sending the general word that he
+would punish all those who had used him ill, yet the kutwal remained
+unpunished. The king likewise sent seven or eight merchants of Guzerate,
+who were idolaters, to buy the goods, accompanied by an honest nayre, to
+remain with Diaz at the factory to defend him against the Moors. Yet all
+this was only done colourably, that the Moors might not appear to suborn
+the merchants; for these men bought nothing, and even beat down the price
+of the commodities, to the great satisfaction of the Moors; who now
+boasted that no person would buy our goods any more than they. Yet none
+of the Moors durst venture to our factory, after they heard a nayre was
+stationed there by the kings order. If they did not love us before, they
+hated us ten times worse now, and when any of our men landed, they used
+to spit on the ground in contempt, calling out Portugal! Portugal! But by
+the especial order of the general, our people took no other notice than
+merely laughing at their insolence.
+
+As none of the merchants would buy our goods, the general supposed that
+this was occasioned by their being lodged at Pandarane, where none of the
+merchants of Calicut resided; and requested leave, by a messenger, from
+the zamorin, to have the goods removed to the city. This permission was
+immediately granted, and the king issued orders to the kutwal to see them
+removed, and even to pay the persons who carried them, that nothing
+belonging to the king of Portugal might be subject to any charges in his
+country. The general would not trust himself any more on shore, although
+Bontaybo, who frequently came off to visit him, advised him to wait on
+the king, lest the great credit of the Moors might again prevail over his
+mind. But considering this man as a Moor, the general never put much
+trust in him, nor informed him of his intentions; yet always received him
+kindly, and gave him money and other gifts, that he might bring him
+intelligence of what was passing on shore.
+
+After the Portuguese merchandize was removed to Calicut, the general
+permitted one man daily from each of the ships to go on shore, to see the
+city and to purchase any thing they had a mind for; always taking
+especial care that one party returned on board before another landed. Our
+people were courteously received and entertained by the natives, and were
+even lodged in their houses occasionally. They bartered several things on
+shore, such as bracelets of brass and copper, pewter, and other European
+articles, for the productions of the country, as freely and quietly as if
+they had been in Lisbon. Fishermen, and others of the idolaters came off
+to the ships, selling fish, cocoa-nuts, and poultry, for biscuit or money;
+while others came off with their children, merely to have a sight of our
+ships. On all these occasions, the general commanded them to be well
+treated and to have food given them, to conciliate the people and to
+secure the friendship of the zamorin. This continued till the tenth of
+August, during which time the ships had always some of the natives on
+board.
+
+Seeing the quietness of the people, and their familiarity with his men,
+who never met with any injury from the Moors or nayres, the general
+believed the zamorin was willing to preserve friendship and peace with
+the subjects of Portugal, and determined upon establishing a factory in
+Calicut for the sale of his commodities, although very little of what was
+landed had as yet been sold. By this means, he hoped to lay a sure
+foundation for the establishment of trade, against the next expedition
+which the king his master might send, if GOD pleased to send him home
+with the intelligence of the discovery. Accordingly, with the advice and
+concurrence of the captains and other principal officers of the fleet, he
+sent a present by Diego Diaz to the zamorin, consisting of scarfs of
+different colours, silks, corals, and various other articles. Diaz was
+desired to say to the king, that the general begged his highness to
+excuse his presumption in sending such a present in token of his entire
+devotion to his service, having nothing worthy of the acceptance of so
+great a prince. That the time now drew near when it would be necessary to
+depart on his return to Portugal; and therefore, if his highness meant to
+send an ambassador to the king of Portugal, he had better give orders
+that he might soon be ready to embark. Presuming upon what his highness
+had already agreed to, and on the kindness hitherto shewn to him and his
+people by his highness, he requested permission to leave a factor and
+clerk in Calicut along with his merchandize, as a memorial of peace and
+amity between his highness and the king of Portugal, as a testimony of
+the truth of the embassy with which he had been entrusted, and in pledge
+of farther embassy from the king his master as soon as the discovery was
+made known. He likewise prayed his highness to send on board as a full
+confirmation of his having actually made the voyage to India, a _bahar_
+of cinnamon, another of cloves, and a third of some other spices, which
+should be paid for by the factor out of the first sales of the goods in
+his possession. It was four days after Diaz received this order before he
+could get access to the zamorin, though he went every day to the palace
+for this purpose. At length he was admitted to audience; and on seeing
+Diaz with his present, the king asked him what he wanted in so stern a
+manner that he was afraid of being killed. After delivering the message
+from the general and wishing to deliver the present, the king refused to
+see it, and commanded that it should be delivered to his factor. The
+answer he gave to the message was, that since the general wished to
+depart he might do so, but must first pay him 600 _serasynes_[63],
+according to the custom of the country.
+
+Diaz, on his return to the factory with the present intended for the king,
+was accompanied by many of the nayres, which he thought was from respect:
+but immediately on entering the house, the nayres remained at the door,
+forbidding him or any other person to go out. After this, a proclamation
+was made through the city, forbidding any boat or almadia to go on board
+our fleet on pain of death. Yet Bontaybo went off secretly, and gave
+warning to the general not to venture on shore or to permit any of the
+people to land; as he had learned from the Moors, that any who might do
+so would surely lose their lives. Bontaybo said farther, that all the
+fair words of the king proceeded from dissimulation, that he might entice
+the general and his people on shore to kill them all; all which evil
+intentions were occasioned by the Moors, who made the king believe that
+the Portuguese were thieves and pirates, who had come to Calicut to steal
+such merchandize as should be brought there; and who had come to spy out
+the land, that they might return with a great armament to invade his
+dominions. All this was confirmed by two Malabar idolaters, and the
+general was in great uncertainty how best to proceed on the present
+emergency. That same night, after dark, a Negro slave belonging to Diaz
+came off, with the information that Diaz and Braga were made prisoners,
+and with an account of the answer which the king had given to his message,
+what he had ordered to be done with the present, and of the proclamations
+which were made through the city. Diego Diaz, being anxious to have these
+things communicated to the general, had bribed a fisherman to carry this
+man on board, as he could not well be recognized in the night owing to
+his colour. The general, though much offended at these injurious
+proceedings, was unwilling to depart till he might see the end of these
+things, and therefore waited to see whether anyone might come off to the
+ships. Next day, being Wednesday the 15th of August, only one almadia
+came off, in which there were four boys, who brought fine precious stones
+for sale. Although the general believed they were spies, he received them
+kindly, and gave no hints of having heard that Diaz was made a prisoner;
+expecting that others of more importance might come on board through whom
+he might procure the enlargement of Diaz and Braga. By these boys he
+wrote to Diaz, but couched in such a manner that it might not be
+understood if it fell into any other hands. The letter was delivered
+according to its direction, and the boys told the king of their reception
+on board, by which he believed that the general knew not of the
+imprisonment of his people. On this he sent off other persons to the
+ships, who were strictly enjoined not to disclose the treatment which the
+factor had experienced. This was done out of policy to deceive the
+general and to detain our ships, till the king might be able to send his
+own fleet to set upon him, or till the ships might arrive from Mecca to
+take him prisoner.
+
+Some of the Malabars continued to come off daily, all of whom the general
+commanded to be well entertained, as he saw none of sufficient importance
+to be detained. But, on the Sunday, six principal Malabars came on board,
+attended by fifteen men in another pinnace. Believing that the king would
+liberate Diaz and Braga in return for these men, he made them all
+prisoners; and sent a letter in the Malabar language, by two of the
+native boatmen, to the kings factors, demanding his factor and clerk in
+return for those men he had detained on board. On perusal of this letter,
+the kings factor communicated the same to the king, who commanded him to
+take the Portuguese to his own house, that he might not appear to have
+had any hand in their detention; and then to restore them to the general
+in return for the Malabars, whose wives had made a great clamour about
+the detention of their husbands.
+
+Seeing that his people were not sent on board, the general weighed anchor
+on Wednesday the 23d of August and set sail, meaning to try if this shew
+of going away would have the effect of recovering Diaz and Braga, in
+return for these Malabars whom he had detained. The wind being contrary,
+he came to anchor in an open road, four leagues from Calicut, where the
+ships remained till the Saturday. As there was no appearance of getting
+back his people, De Gama again set sail; but for want of wind had to come
+again to anchor, almost out of the sight of land. An almadia now came to
+the ships with certain Malabars, who said that Diaz and the others were
+in the kings palace, and would be assuredly sent on board next day. Not
+seeing the detained Malabars, these people believed they had been all put
+to death. This affected delay proceeded entirely from craft, that they
+might gain time to fit out the Calicut fleet, and for the arrival of the
+ships from Mecca, when their combined force might environ and destroy the
+Portuguese. The general ordered these messengers to go back to Calicut,
+and not to return without his men or letters from them, as otherwise he
+should sink them; and that if a satisfactory answer was not sent him
+without delay, he would cut off the heads of all the Malabars whom he had
+detained. The Malabars returned to Calicut with this message; and a wind
+springing up, the general made sail, and came to anchor off Calicut about
+sunset.
+
+Next day, seven almadias came off to the fleet, in one of which were
+Diego Diaz and Alvora Braga, the others being filled with many of the
+natives. These people, however, were afraid to come on board, and put
+Diaz and Braga into the boat which was astern of the generals ship, and
+then put off to a little distance, waiting for the generals answer. Diego
+told the general, that when the king learnt of his having sailed, he sent
+for him to the palace, assuming a pleasant countenance as pretending to
+be ignorant of his imprisonment, and asked him why the general had kept
+his subjects as prisoners on board. On being told the reason, he said the
+general was in the right. He then asked if his own factor, who was
+present, had extorted any presents; for he well knew that one of his
+predecessors had been put to death not long before, for taking bribes
+from merchant strangers. After this, the king desired Diaz to request the
+general to send him the stone pillar having the cross and the arms of
+Portugal, which he had promised to set up; and to know whether he would
+leave Diaz as factor in Calicut. Diaz likewise presented a letter for the
+king of Portugal, which was written on a palm leaf by Diaz, and signed by
+the zamorin, to the following effect:
+
+"Vasco de la Gama, a gentleman of thy house, came to my country, of whose
+arrival I was very glad. In my country there is abundance of cinnamon,
+cloves, pepper, and precious stones. The commodities I wish to procure
+from your country are, silver, gold, coral, and scarlet."
+
+Convinced of the duplicity of the zamorin, De Gama made no answer to the
+message; but sent back all the nayres whom he had detained, desired them
+to tell the king he should return the others who were in custody, on
+receiving back his merchandize. He sent however the stone pillar which
+had been required. On the next day Bontaybo came on board, saying that
+the kutwal, by order of the zamorin, had seized all his property,
+alleging that he was a Christian who had come overland to Calicut as a
+spy from the king of Portugal. Bontaybo said, he was sure this bad
+treatment had proceeded from the suggestion of the Moors; and, as they
+had seized his goods, he was sure they meant personal violence, on which
+account he had made his escape. The general gave him a kind reception,
+offering to carry him to Portugal, promising that he should recover
+double the value of his goods, besides, that he might expect to be well
+rewarded by the king of Portugal. To this arrangement Bontaybo gladly
+consented, and had a good cabin assigned him by order of the general.
+About ten o'clock the same day, three almadias full of men came off to
+the ships, having some scarfs laid on their benches, as being part of our
+goods; and these were followed by four other almadias, one after the
+other. The Malabars pretended that they had brought off all the goods,
+which they offered to put into his boat, and required him in return to
+deliver up the rest of the prisoners. But convinced this was a mere
+deception, the general desired them to go away, as he would have none of
+their merchandize, and was resolved to carry the Malabars to Portugal as
+witnesses of his discovery. He added, if God spared his life, he should
+convince them whether the Christians were thieves, as the Moors had made
+the king of Calicut believe, who had therefore treated him with so much
+injustice. He now commanded several cannon to be fired, on which they
+were afraid and made off.
+
+It was certain, if the kings ships had been afloat that they would have
+been sent to attack our ships; but they were all hauled upon shore on
+account of the winter season. Wherefore we may attribute it to Providence
+that our ships happened to arrive here at this season, that thereby they
+might escape and carry home news of having discovered the Indies, to the
+great advancement of the Catholic faith.
+
+Although greatly rejoiced at having made the discovery of the route to
+Calicut and the Indies, he was much distressed at the behaviour of the
+zamorin, believing that the next expedition that might be sent out would
+be subject to great danger; but as he was unable to do any thing more at
+this time, he consoled himself with the knowledge he had thus acquired of
+the safe navigation, and that he had procured specimens of the spices,
+drugs, precious stones, and other commodities which were to be procured
+at this place. Having now nothing to detain him here, he departed from
+Calicut, carrying with him the Malabars whom he had made prisoners; as he
+hoped by their means a good agreement might be entered into with the
+zamorin on sending out the next fleet from Portugal. On the Thursday
+after his departure, being becalmed about a league from Calicut, about
+sixty _tonys_, or boats of the country, came off to the fleet filled with
+soldiers expecting to have taken all our ships. But the general kept them
+off by frequent discharges of his artillery, though they followed him an
+hour and a half. At length there fell a heavy shower of rain attended
+with some wind, by which the fleet was enabled to make sail, and the
+enemies returned to the land. He now proposed to direct his course for
+Melinda; but made little way along the coast, by reason of calms. At this
+time, having in mind the good of the next ships which might come to
+Calicut, he thought fit to send a soothing letter to the zamorin, which
+was written in Arabic by Bontaybo; in which he apologized for having
+carried off the Malabars, as evidences of his having been at Calicut. He
+said he was sorry that he had left no factor, lest the Moors might put
+him to death; and that he had been deterred by the some cause from having
+frequently landed himself. That, notwithstanding all that had happened,
+the king his master would be glad to have the friendship of the zamorin,
+and would assuredly send him abundance of all those commodities he might
+need; and that the trade of the Portuguese to his city would henceforth
+redound to his great profit. This letter was entrusted to one of the
+Malabars, who was set on shore and ordered to deliver it to the zamorin.
+
+Continuing his course along the coast, the fleet came on the ensuing
+Thursday among certain rocky islands, from one of which that was
+inhabited there came off several almadias, having fish and other victuals
+for sale. The general treated these people kindly, giving them shirts and
+other articles to their great contentment; and, with their approbation,
+set up a cross on the island, which was named _El padron de Sancta Maria_.
+As soon as night approached, and the wind began to blow from the shore,
+the fleet made sail, always keeping near the land. On the Thursday after,
+being the 19th of September, they came in sight of a pleasant high land,
+off which lay six little islands, where he came to anchor. Going here on
+shore in search of fresh water, a young man was met with, who was or
+pretended to be a Christian. This person carried our men to a river,
+where they found a spring of excellent water issuing out of the rock; and
+for his services they gave him a red nightcap. Next morning four natives
+came off in a small boat, with many gourds and cucumbers for sale. These
+people said that their country produced cinnamon, and two of our people
+were sent onshore to see whether this were true, who brought with them
+two green boughs which were said to be cinnamon, of which they had seen a
+large grove, but it turned out only to be the wild kind. At their return,
+these men were accompanied by more than twenty natives, who brought hens,
+gourds, and cows milk for sale, and who said, if the general would send
+some of his men on shore, he might have abundance of dried cinnamon, hogs,
+and poultry: But he dreaded treachery, and would not allow any of his
+people to go on shore. Next forenoon, when some of our men went to a part
+of the shore at some distance from the ships to cut wood, they suddenly
+came in sight of two boats lying close to the land, and returned with
+intelligence of what they had seen; but the general would not send to
+inquire what these might be until after dinner. In the mean time, one of
+the men in the top gave notice that he saw eight large ships out at sea,
+which were then becalmed. The general gave immediate orders to have every
+thing in readiness in case of an attack, and as the wind served both
+fleets, they soon came within two leagues of each other. The enemies
+perceiving our fleet approaching, fled towards the shore; but one of
+their rudders breaking, the men belonging to that ship escaped in their
+boats, and Coello immediately took possession, expecting to find it laden
+with rich commodities. Nothing was found however, except cocoa-nuts and a
+kind of sugar called _melasus_, which is prepared from palms or date
+trees. He also found on board many bows and arrows, swords, spears, and
+targets. The other seven ships were run aground, so that our ships could
+not get near them, as drawing too much water; but our people followed in
+their boats, and drove them out of their vessels by firing upon them with
+their ordnance. Next day, while our fleet was at anchor, seven men came
+off from the land in an almadia, who reported that these eight ships had
+been sent by the zamorin from Calicut to capture our fleet, as they had
+been informed by some of the fugitives[64].
+
+From this place the general removed to the island of _Ansandina_, at a
+short distance, where he was told he might procure good water. This
+island is very small, and only a league from the continent. It contains
+several woods, and two cisterns, or conduits, built of freestone, one of
+which is six feet deep, supplied with excellent water from certain
+springs; and the sea around has great quantities of fish. Before the
+Moors traded with India, this island was well inhabited by the native
+idolaters, having many goodly buildings, and especially some fine pagodas.
+But when the Moors resorted to this coast from the Red Sea, they used to
+take in their wood and water at this place, and abused the inhabitants so
+intolerably that they abandoned the place, and pulled down most of their
+pagodas and all their other buildings. These Gentiles were natives of
+that part of the continent which belongs to the king of _Narsingas_, and
+used often to repair thither to perform their devotions to three black
+stones which were in a chapel of one of the pagodas, which still remains.
+This island is called _Ansandina_[65] in the Malabar language, which
+signifies the Five Islands, and is so named because there are other four
+islands round about.
+
+Coming to anchor here, the general sent Coello on shore with an armed
+escort, to examine the country, and to see if there were any convenient
+place for new-graving their ships bottoms, as they had been long at sea
+and had a long run before them. Every thing being found convenient, and
+the measure approved of by all the captains, it was determined to lay
+their ships successively aground for this purpose. The ship called the
+Berrio was first laid on shore; and while occupied in repairing and
+cleaning her bottom, many of the natives came off from the continent to
+sell victuals to our people. While this was going forwards two small
+brigandines were seen rowing towards our ships, ornamented with flags and
+streamers on their masts, beating drums and sounding trumpets, and filled
+with men who plied their oars. At the same time, five similar vessels were
+seen creeping along shore, as if lying by to help the others if needful.
+The Malabars who supplied our people with provisions, warned the general
+to beware of these vessels, which belonged to pirates who roamed about in
+these seas, robbing all they met under pretence of peace[66]. The general
+believed he might have taken these two vessels, if he had allowed them to
+come close up with his ships, but did not choose to run any risk;
+wherefore, as soon as they came within gun-shot, he ordered all the cannon
+belonging to the two ships which remained afloat to be fired at them; on
+which, calling out in a loud voice, _Tambarane! Tambarane!_ which is their
+name for God, they fled away. Nicholas Coello, who was in his boat,
+followed after them, firing off his ordnance; but the general, fearful of
+any mischance, called him back by signal.
+
+Next day, when the general and all his men were on shore at work upon the
+Berrio, twelve natives, who appeared to be men of some consequence, came
+to the island in two small _paraos_, and presented a bundle of sugar
+canes. These people asked permission to go on board the ships, as they
+had never seen any such before; but the general was much offended with
+this, fearing they might be spies. While engaged in conversation with
+these men, other two _paraos_ made their appearance, having as many men.
+But those who came first, seeing the general displeased, advised these
+new comers not to land. When the Berrio was repaired, the generals ship
+was brought aground to receive the same attentions.
+
+While the general and the other captains were on shore, busied in the
+repairs of the San Michael, there came one day a man in a little _parao_,
+seemingly about forty years old, and not of that country, as he was
+dressed in a _sabaco_, or gown of fine cotton reaching to his heels, his
+head covered with a kerchief or towel, which partly covered his face, and
+wearing a faulchion or crooked cymeter at his girdle. Immediately on
+landing, he went up and embraced the general, as if he had seen or known
+him before, and treated the other captains with the same politeness. He
+told them he was a Christian, born in Italy, and had been brought when a
+child into the Indies. That he now dwelt with a Moorish lord named
+_Sabayo_, who ruled a certain island called Goa, about twelve leagues from
+thence, and who had 40,000 horsemen on that island. That, as his dwelling
+was now among the Moors, he conformed externally to their worship, though
+in his heart a Christian. That learning certain men had come in ships to
+Calicut, such as had never been seen before in the Indies, and that no one
+understood their language, he immediately understood that they must be
+_Frangnes_,[67] for so the Christians are named in the Indies. That he was
+desirous of seeing them, and had asked leave of _Sabayo_ to come and visit
+them; which, if he had not obtained, he would have died of vexation. That
+Sabayo had not only granted him leave for this purpose; but desired, if he
+found the strangers to be from his country, to offer them any thing they
+might stand in need of which his country produced; particularly spices and
+provisions. And besides, if they would come and live with him, Sabayo
+would entertain them honourably, and give them sufficient to live on. The
+general asked many questions concerning the country of Sabayo and other
+things, to which he made answer. After which he requested to have a cheese
+from the general, to send on shore to a companion, as a token of having
+been well received. The general suspected some mystery in this man, yet
+ordered a cheese and two new loaves to be given him, which he sent away to
+his companion. He continued talking with great volubility, and sometimes
+so unguardedly as to raise suspicions of his being a spy. On this Paulo de
+la Gama, who particularly suspected him, inquired of some of the natives
+if they knew who this man was; they immediately told him he was a pirate,
+who had boarded many other ships while laid aground. On receiving this
+information, the general ordered him to be carried on board his ship, then
+aground, and to be whipped well till he should confess whether all that he
+had said was true or false; also, what was his purpose in coming thither,
+and whether he were actually a Moor or a Christian. He still insisted that
+he was a Christian, and that all he said was true, declaring the
+information given by the natives to be entirely groundless. The general
+now ordered a more cruel torment to be inflicted to extort confession,
+causing him to be hoisted up and down by the members: when at length he
+declared he would tell the truth. He then acknowledged himself a spy, sent
+to discover how many men the general had, and what were their weapons, as
+he was much hated on all that coast for being a Christian; and that many
+_atalayas_ or foists were placed in all the bays and creeks of the coast
+to assail him, but dared not till they were joined by forty large armed
+vessels that were getting ready to fall upon him. But he said he knew not
+certainly when these vessels might be ready. The general now ordered him
+to be confined under hatches, intending to carry him into Portugal, as a
+fit person to give the king his master intelligence respecting the Indies,
+and ordered him to get refreshing victuals, and that his cure should be
+looked well after.
+
+On receiving this information of the designs of his enemies, the general
+would stay no longer than was necessary for completing the repairs of his
+own ship, which was got ready in ten days. About this time, the general
+was offered 1000 _fanons_ for the ship which had been taken by Coello; but
+he refused to sell any thing to his enemies, and ordered her to be burnt.
+When the generals ship was ready, and the fleet had taken in a supply of
+water, they departed from the island of _Ansandina_, or Anchediva, on the
+5th of October 1498, steering directly out to sea on their course for
+Melinda. After sailing about 200 leagues from that island, the Moor[68]
+whom they had taken prisoner, seeing no prospect of escape, now made a
+full and true confession. He acknowledged that he lived with Sabayo, the
+lord of Goa, to whom word was brought that the general was wandering about
+in those seas, like one who knew not where he was, upon which orders were
+given to fit out a powerful fleet to make him prisoner. In the mean time,
+learning that the general was at the isle of Anchediva, Sabayo commanded
+him to go thither to visit him, to get intelligence of his strength and
+intentions, and to endeavour to entice him to Goa; where it was Sabayos
+intentions to make him and all his people prisoners, and to employ them in
+his wars against the neighbouring princes, as they were reported to be
+valiant men. After this confession, the general gave this man better
+treatment, allowing him both clothes and money. Some time afterwards he
+became a Christian, by the name of Gaspar de la Gama, taking his name of
+Gaspar from one of the three kings of the Magi[69], and his surname from
+the general, who stood god-father at his baptism.
+
+The general pursued his course for Melinda, where he proposed to take on
+board an ambassador from the xeque of that place. In the early part of
+this voyage he endured severe storms and contrary winds, which were
+succeeded by calms, during which the heat of the sun was quite
+insufferable, and the voyage much delayed, insomuch, that water began to
+grow scarce, and the people had to be put on short allowance. Owing to
+these circumstances, the people were afflicted with the same disease in
+their gums, from which they had formerly suffered such great distress in
+the river of Good Signs[70], on the outward voyage. Their arms and legs
+also swelled, and many tumours broke out over their bodies, proceeding
+from a pestilent stinking humour, which threw them into a flux, of which
+thirty persons died. From the continuance of calms and contrary winds,
+and the mortality among the people, the whole company became amazed, and
+believed they should never be able to get out from their present
+distressing situation; insomuch, that they solicited the general to
+return to Calicut, or some other part of India, and submit to what God
+might appoint, rather than to die on the sea of these terrible diseases,
+for which there was no remedy, especially as both provisions and water
+began to fail. De Gama reasoned with them to little purpose, as they had
+been now four months at sea, and there hardly remained, sixteen persons
+in each ship able to do duty, some of whom even were afflicted with the
+diseases of which the others had died. It is even said that Paulo de la
+Gama and Nicholas Coello had agreed to return to India, if any wind
+should spring up that would have served for the voyage.
+
+At length a favourable wind sprung up unexpectedly, and in sixteen days
+they came in sight of land on Wednesday the 2d of February 1499, at which
+the mariners were much rejoiced, and soon forgot all their past troubles
+and dangers. As they came near the land towards evening, the general gave
+orders to keep their heads out to sea during the night, to avoid rocks or
+shoals. As there were no person on board who knew where they were, a Moor
+alleged they had steered direct for Mozambique; saying there were certain
+islands 300 leagues from the shore, and directly over against that place,
+where the natives were continually subject to the disease which had been
+so fatal to our men. When morning came, they stood towards the land, when
+they came before a large and goodly city, surrounded with walls, having
+fair and lofty houses, and a large palace on a height in the middle of
+the city, seeming to be a magnificent building. This city is called
+Magadoxo, and stands on one side of the Gulf of India on the coast of
+Ethiopia[71], an hundred and thirteen leagues from Melinda, the situation
+of which I shall explain hereafter. Knowing this to be a city of the
+Moors, he would not stop at this place, but commanded many shots of
+ordnance to be fired as he sailed past. Not being sure how far it was to
+Melinda, and fearing to overshoot that port, he lay too every night; and
+on Saturday the 5th of February, lying over against a village of the
+Moors, named Pate[72], 103 leagues from Magadoxo, there came off eight
+_terradas_, or boats of that country, filled with soldiers, and making
+direct for our fleet, from whence we shot off so many pieces of ordnance,
+that they soon fled back to the shore, and our people could not follow
+for want of wind. Next Monday, being the 7th of February, the fleet
+arrived at Melinda. The king immediately sent off his congratulations to
+the general on his arrival, with a present of fresh provisions. De Gama
+sent Fernan Martinez on shore to return the compliments of the king, to
+whom he sent a present. On account of the great number of sick on board,
+the fleet stopped here for ten days, during which time he caused a land-
+mark to be erected on shore, with leave of the king, as a token of
+friendship. Having provided provisions and water for the ships at this
+place, he departed on the morning of Wednesday the 17th of February,
+taking with him an ambassador from the king of Melinda, to negotiate a
+treaty of perpetual peace and friendship with the king of Portugal.
+
+Considering that there were not sufficient men remaining for navigating
+all the ships, the general and the other captains agreed to burn one of
+them, and the San Rafael was chosen to be sacrificed, because she was all
+open, and had not been brought aground at Anchediva when the other two
+were repaired. Accordingly, after taking out all her stores and
+merchandize, which employed them during five days, she was burnt at
+certain shoals, called the Shoals of St Raphael[73]. During these five
+days, the fleet procured a considerable quantity of hens from a village
+on the coast called _Tangata_. Leaving this place, the two remaining
+ships came on the 20th February to the island of Zenziber, which is in
+six degrees of S. latitude, at ten leagues distance from the continent.
+This is a considerable island, having other two in its neighbourhood, one
+called _Pemba_, and the other _Moyfa_. These islands are very fertile,
+having abundance of provisions, and great quantities of oranges. The
+inhabitants are Moors, who are by no means warlike and have few weapons,
+but are well clothed in silk, and cotton vestments, which they purchase
+at Mombaza from the merchants of Cambaya. The women are ornamented with
+jewels of gold and silver, the former being procured at Sofala, and the
+latter from the island of St Lawrence, or Madagascar. Each of these three
+islands has a separate king, who, with all their subjects, are of the
+Mahometan religion.
+
+When the king of the island of Zenziber was informed of the arrival of
+our ships, he sent immediately to compliment the general, accompanied
+with great presents of the fruits and other productions of the country,
+and requested his friendship, to which the general gladly agreed and sent
+suitable answers. After remaining here eight days for refreshments, the
+general departed on the 1st of March, and came to anchor beside the isle
+of St George in the bay of Mozambique. Next day he caused a mark to be
+erected on this island, where he went on shore and heard mass; and
+departed thence without any intercourse with the inhabitants of
+Mozambique. On the 3d of March, he came to the island of St Blas, where
+the ships remained for some time to take in water, and to provide a stock
+of sea wolves, and _solitarios_, which were salted to serve as provision
+for the remainder of the voyage, and for which they were most thankful to
+God. Departing from thence, they were driven back by a westerly wind
+right contrary; but Providence sent them a fair wind, by means of which
+they doubled the Cape of Good Hope with infinite pleasure on the 20th of
+March, all the remainder of the crews being now strong and in good health,
+with the cheering prospect of speedily returning to Lisbon. They now had
+a fair wind, which lasted them twenty days, and sped them on towards St
+Jago. The fair wind now failed them and delayed their voyage. Trying the
+lead on Thursday the 25th of April, they found twenty-five fathom; and
+the least water they had all that day was twenty fathom, on which account
+the pilots concluded they were on the shoals of the Rio Grande.
+
+Of the rest of this voyage, till the arrival of the general at the island
+of St Jago, I have found no account; except that, when, approaching that
+place, Nicholas Coello parted company one night with the general, and
+made direct for Portugal, that he might carry the first intelligence to
+the king of the discovery of India; and arrived at _Cascais_ on the 10th
+of July 1499[74]. He went immediately to the king, whom he informed of
+all that had befallen the general in his discovery of the Indies, and of
+the commodities which had been brought from thence; of which discovery,
+and of the prospect which it held out of a direct trade with India by sea,
+the king was as glad as when he had been proclaimed king of Portugal.
+
+After the separation of Coello, De Gama pursued his voyage for the island
+of St Jago, both because his brother Paulo was sick with consumptive
+complaints, and because his ship was in very bad condition; all her seams
+being open. At that island, he freighted a caravel, in hope of being able
+to get his brother home to Portugal, and left John de Sala in charge of
+his own ship, to have her repaired and new rigged before proceeding for
+Lisbon. The general and his brother left St Jago in the hired caravel for
+Lisbon; but the disease of Paulo de Gama increased so rapidly, that he
+was forced to put in at the island of Tercera, where Paulo de Gama
+departed this life like a good Christian and a worthy gentleman. When he
+had buried his brother, Vasco de Gama set sail for Portugal, and arrived
+at Belem in September 1499; having been two years and two months absent
+on this voyage. Of 108 men whom he had taken with him, only fifty[75]
+came home alive; which was a large proportion, considering the great and
+numerous dangers they had gone through.
+
+When the general had returned thanks to God for his preservation and
+success, he sent notice of his arrival to the king, who sent Diego de
+Sylva y Menesis, Lord of Portugalete, and many other gentlemen, to
+conduct him honourably to court, which they did through a prodigious
+concourse of people, eager to see the man who had made so wonderful a
+voyage, and whom they had long thought dead. Being come into the presence,
+the king honoured him as one who, by the discovery of the Indies had done
+so much for the glory of God, for the honour and profit of the king of
+Portugal, and for the perpetual fame of the Portuguese name in the world.
+The king made him afterwards a knight, and gave him and his heirs
+permission to bear the royal arms of Portugal, as also to set at the foot
+of the escutcheon two does, which are called gamas in the Portuguese
+language. He also gave him a perpetual pension or rent-charge of 300,000
+rees[76] yearly, out of the tythe fish in the village of _Sinis_, in
+which he was born, and a promise of being made lord of that village; and
+till these grants were executed in form, he allowed him 1000 crowns a-year;
+which, after the royal grants were made, reverted to the house of the
+_Contratation_ of the Indies. It was also granted, that when the trade
+with India should be established, he might bring home spices to the value
+of 200 ducats yearly, without paying any duty. He also gave him other
+possessions and rents, and a note of remembrance or promise to make him a
+lord[77]. Nicholas Coello was promoted to be a gentleman of the royal
+household, and received possessions and rents to bear his charges[78].
+The king himself, in consequence of these discoveries, assumed the new
+title, of _Lord of the conquest and navigation of Ethiopia, Arabia, Persia,
+and the Indies_.
+
+
+[1] By Mr Clarke this person is named Gonçalo Nunez.
+
+[2] Mr Clarke alleges, that Lichefield, our original translator, has
+    fallen into an error in this date, which ought to have been the 28th
+    July.--E.
+
+[3] If Saturday were the 5th July, on which the fleet sailed from Lisbon,
+    the 3d of August must have been on Thursday. But it does not seem
+    necessary to insist upon such minute critical accuracy; which, besides,
+    is unattainable.--E.
+
+[4] This strange expression probably means, that Gama stretched directly
+    across the gulf of Guinea, not creeping as usual along the coast, and
+    endeavoured to make a direct course for the Cape of Good Hope.--E.
+
+[5] Our old English translator, Lichefield, strangely mistakes in calling
+    this place the _island_ of Sancta Haelena; which is assuredly St Elena
+    bay, in lat. 32° 40' S. It has since been sometimes named St Martin's
+    bay, but the proper and general name is the bay of St Elena, the S. W.
+    point of entry being called St Martin's Point.--E.
+
+[6] Perhaps the Berg river, at the bottom of St Elena bay.--E.
+
+[7] This paragraph is added to relation of Castenada from the works of
+    Faria and Osorius.--Clarke.
+
+[8] If the Thursday on which they came in sight of the Cape were the 16th,
+    the Wednesday following must have been the 22nd of the month.--E.
+
+[9] This paragraph is an addition to the text of Castaneda from Osorius--
+    Clarke, I. 342
+
+[10] From the circumstances in the text, this watering-place of St Blaze
+    is probably what is now called St Katherines or St Sebastians Bay; yet
+    that place hardly exceeds forty-seven Portuguese leagues east from the
+    cape. The sixty leagues of the text would carry us almost a degree
+    farther east, to what is now called Kaffercroyts river. Clarke removes
+    this place still farther to Flesh Bay, otherwise called Angra de St
+    Braz, or Aguada de St Braz by De Barros. This latter place is seventy
+    Portuguese leagues, or above eighty marine leagues east from the cape.
+    --E.
+
+[11] This account seems erroneous, whether St Katherines or Flesh Bay be
+    the one in question, as both ought to be safe in north winds, and the
+    winds between the S and E points give both a lee shore.--E.
+
+[12] Probably a species of Penguins: Lichefield calls them _stares_, as
+    large as ducks; Osorius says the natives called them _satiliario_, and
+    that they were as big as geese.--E.
+
+[13] Probably Rock Point, forming the western boundary of Algoa or
+    Zwartkops bay, in long. 27° E. bring the rocky extreme promontory of
+    the Krakakamma ridge.--E.
+
+[14] It is infinitely difficult to guess the course of these early voyages,
+    without latitudes or longitudes, and only estimated distances by dead
+    reckoning in uncertain leagues; but the Rio del Infante of this voyage
+    and that of Diaz, is probably that now called Great-fish river, in the
+    Zuureveld of Graaff Reynet, in long. 28° 20' E• which, however, is
+    twenty-six Portuguese leagues, or thirty geographical leagues from
+    Rocky Point, instead of the fifteen leagues of the text.--E.
+
+[15] The sixty leagues in the text are inexplicable on any rational
+    supposition, as they seem to have again made the Rocks de la Cruz, or
+    rather Rocky Point, said just before to be only fifteen leagues from
+    Infante river, to which they were then bound.--E.
+
+[16] The Portuguese ships appear to have been now on the coast of Natal,
+    or the land of the Caffres, certainly a more civilized people than the
+    Hottentots of the cape. But the circumstance of Alonzo understanding
+    their language is quite inexplicable: as he could hardly have been
+    lower on the western coast than Minz, or perhaps Congo. Yet, as a belt
+    of Caffres are said to cross the continent of Africa, to the north of
+    the Hottentots, it is barely possible that some Caffre slaves may have
+    reached the western coast.--E.
+
+[17] This grain was probably what is now well known under the name of
+    millet.--E.
+
+[18] According to Barros, _Aguada da boa Paz_.--Clarke.
+
+[19] Gibb's Orosius, I. 50.
+
+[20] The text here ought probably to be thus amended, "He and his brother,
+    _with_ Nicholas Coelle," &c.--E.
+
+[21] These probably swam off to the ships.--E.
+
+[22] De Faria alleges that the people of this river were not so black as
+    the other Africans, and wore habits of different kinds of stuffs, both
+    cotton and silk, of various colours, and that they understood Arabic;
+    and adds, that they informed De Gama there were white people to the
+    eastwards, who sailed in ships like those of the Portuguese. Osorius
+    likewise says, that one of the natives spoke Arabic very imperfectly,
+    and that De Gama left two of his convicts at this place, which he
+    called San Rafael.--Clarke.
+
+[23] There is no circumstance in the text from which the situation of this
+    river can even be conjectured. Clarke, p.440, alleges that it was
+    Soffala; and yet, in a note in his preceding page, says, "That De Gama
+    seems to have passed Cape Corientes during the night, and to have kept
+    so far from land, on account of a strong current setting on shore, as
+    not to have noticed Sofala." In the notes on the Lusiad, this river of
+    Good Signs is ascertained to have been one of the mouths of the
+    Zambeze, or Cuama River, which divides Mocaranga from the coast of
+    Mozambique; the different mouths of which run into the sea between the
+    latitudes of 19° and 18° S.--E.
+
+[24] They were evidently afflicted with the scurvy; and accordingly De
+    Barros refers the disease to its proper cause, "Having been for so
+    long a time confined to the use of salt fish and corrupted biscuit.--
+    Clarke."
+
+[25] Addition to the narrative of Castaneda, from De Barros.--Clarke.
+
+[26] This obscure expression seems to mean that De Gama wished them to
+    precede the ships, and point out the way into the harbour.--E.
+
+[27] This expression has probably been misunderstood by the original
+    translator. It appears that these Moors of Mozambique spoke Arabic,
+    here called the language of Algarve, and finding themselves understood
+    and answered by the strangers, mistook the Portuguese for Moors.--E.
+
+[28] Mozambique is in lat. 15° 35' S. and in 41° of E. Long--E.
+
+[29] The observations here inserted, and marked with inverted commas, are
+    made by the Editor of the present collection. They are much too long
+    for insertion in the form of a note, and appeared of too much
+    importance to be omitted; being chiefly from Clarke, I. 447.--E.
+
+[30] For the materials of this addition to the text of Castaneda, we are
+    chiefly indebted to the Progress of Maritime Discovery, p. 447, 458.
+    --E.
+
+[31] His name, as given by Osorius, was _Zacocia_, and De Barros adds,
+    that he wore richly embroidered clothes, and had his sword ornamented
+    with diamonds.--Clarke.
+
+[32] This is probably the same person named Fernan Alvares on a former
+    occasion.--E.
+
+[33] It is added by De Barros, that three _Abexijs_, or Abyssinians, from
+    the territory of _Preste Joano_, came on board the fleet, along with
+    the Moors who brought provisions; and, seeing the image of the angel
+    Gabriel painted on the ship of that name, and being accustomed to such
+    representations of angels in their own country, they made their
+    adorations to this holy picture.--Clarke.
+
+[34] Mr Clarke, Progr. of Marit. Disc. I. 464, strangely misrepresents
+    this story; saying, "that _the pilot_ of Paulo de la Gama had deserted
+    to the Moors, though a Christian."--E.
+
+[35] According to De Burros, after the inhabitants abandoned the town,
+    the zeque sent De Gama a pilot to navigate Coello's ship, from whom De
+    Gama learnt that Calicut was a months voyage from Mozambique.--Clarke,
+    I. 464.
+
+[36] If Sunday, as above, were the first of April, the Friday following
+    must have been the 6th.--E.
+
+[37] The text is here obscure; but it would appear that only some of the
+    men belonging to these two boats remained on board, and the rest
+    returned to the coast. Not that the Moorish pilots from Mozambique
+    were here dismissed, as the text of Lichefild's translation seems to
+    insinuate.--E.
+
+[38] Motta, in the Portuguese East Indian Pilot, places this town in lat.
+    3º 50'S. He says the entrance is much incommoded with shoals, and so
+    narrow in some places as not to exceed the length of a ship. This city
+    is said to have once stood on a peninsula, converted into an island by
+    cutting a canal across the isthmus.--Clarke, I. 469.
+
+[39] This may be understood that part of the inhabitants were unmixed
+    Arabs, comparatively whites; while others were of a mixed race between
+    these and the original natives, perhaps likewise partly East Indian
+    Mahometans, of a similar origin.--E.
+
+[40] This is surely an oversight in Castaneda or his translator, for
+   _one_ year.--E.
+
+[41] It is difficult to ascertain what place in India is here meant.
+    Cranganore comes nearer in sound, but is rather nearer Melinda than
+    Calicut; Mangalore is rather more distant. The former a degree to the
+    south of Calicut, the latter not quite two to the north; all three on
+    the Malabar coast. On a former occasion, Castaneda says these
+    merchants were of Cambaya or Guzerat, above eleven degrees north of
+    Calicut.--E.
+
+[42] This seems to be the same office with that named Kadhi, or Khazi, by
+    the Turks and Persians, which is rather the title of a judge than of a
+    priest, which is named Moulah.--E.
+
+[43] It is probable that this passage should be thus understood, "The
+    king sent him a pilot, who was an idolater from Guzerate, &c."--E.
+
+[44] The addition to, or observations on the text, inserted in this place
+    within inverted commas, are from Clarke, I. 486, 487.--E.
+
+[45] In Lichefild's translation this date is made the 22d; but the Friday
+    after Sunday the 21st, must have been the 26th of the month.--E.
+
+[46] The difference of longitude between Melinda and Calicut is thirty-
+    four degrees, which at 17-1/2 leagues to the degree, gives only 575
+    Portuguese leagues, or 680 geographical leagues of twenty to the
+    degree. Thus miserably erroneous are the estimated distances in old
+    navigators, who could only compute by the dead reckoning, or the log.
+    --E.
+
+[47] The course from Melinda to Calicut is about E. N. E. the former being
+    about three degrees to the S. and the latter almost eleven degrees to
+    the N. of the line.--E.
+
+[48] This vague account of the extent of Malabar is erroneous or corrupt,
+    as sixty-one Portuguese leagues would barely reach from Cape Comorin
+    to Calicut. The extreme length of the western maritime vale of India,
+    from Cambay to Cape Comorin, exceeds 250 Portuguese leagues.--E.
+
+[49] The proper name of this prince who is said to have thus divided the
+    kingdom of Malabar, was Shermanoo-Permaloo.--Clarke, I. 395.
+
+[50] This must be erroneous, as the Mahometans reckon from the year of the
+    Hegira, or flight of Mahomet from Mecca, which commences in 622 of the
+    Christian era.--E.
+
+[51] This story seems an Arabian tale, perhaps partly founded upon some
+    real revolution in the government of Malabar. But it would much exceed
+    the bounds of a note to enter upon disquisitions relative to Indian
+    history.--E.
+
+[52] Laker is a kind of gum that proceedeth of the ant. This marginal note,
+    in Lichefild's translation of Castaneda, indicates the animal origin
+    of lac, which has been elucidated of late by Dr Roxburgh.--E.
+
+[53] From the sequel in the narrative of Castaneda, this Colastrian rajah
+    seems to have been the sovereign of Cananor.--E.
+
+[54] This word pagoda, applied by the Portuguese, to denote an Indian,
+    temple, is said to be derived from a Malabar or Indian word,
+    _Pagabadi_, signifying any idol.--Astley, I. 51.
+
+[55] This is described by Castaneda as a coin equal in value to three
+    crowns.
+
+[56] By De Faria, this man is named Monzayde.--Astl. I. 30.
+
+[57] The title of kutwal is of Arabic origin, and properly signifies the
+    governor of a fort or castle, but the office may be different in
+    different places. In some instances, the kutwal seems to have been the
+    deputy-governor, sheriff, or judge of a town.--Astl. I. 30.
+
+[58] Such are the expressions used by Lichefild; but I suspect the sense
+    here ought to have been, That the kutwal required De Gama to land
+    immediately, that he might go to Calicut, on purpose to be presented
+    to the zamorin.--E.
+
+[59] In Astley, I. 81. this place is named Kapokats.--E.
+
+[60] Kafr is an Arabic word, signifying an infidel or unbeliever; and is
+    applied by the Mahometans to all who do not believe the doctrines of
+    Mahomet, and especially to all who worship images, including the Roman
+    Catholics. The priests mentioned in the text were obviously bramins.
+    The origin of the term here used by mistake, was obviously from the
+    interpretation of Bontaybo, the friendly Moor; and explains the
+    mistake of De Gama in believing the Malabars to have been Christians.
+    Bontaybo applied the same significant term of kafr to the image
+    worshippers of all denominations, without discriminating one species
+    of idolater from another.--E.
+
+[61] On this part of the text, the author, or the original translator,
+    makes the following singular marginal reflection:--"The general
+    deceived, committeth idolatry with the Devil."--E.
+
+[62] Astley, I. 24. a.
+
+[63] Called in Astley _sharafins_.--Astl. I. 36.
+
+[64] De Faria says that this fleet belonged to a pirate named Timoja, of
+    whom frequent mention will be made hereafter; and that the eight ships
+    were so linked together, and covered over with boughs of trees, that
+    they resembled a floating island.--Astl. I. 38. a.
+
+[65] More probably Anche-diva, or Ange-diva.--Astl. I. 38. b.
+
+[66] These vessels seem more probably to have been the squadron of Timoja.
+    --Astl. I. 38. c.
+
+[67] Frangnes, Franghis, or Feringays, a common name all over the East
+    for Europeans; assuredly derived from the Francs or French, long known
+    as the great enemy of the Mahometans, by their exploits in the
+    crusades.--E.
+
+[68] De Faria says this person was a Jew, and that he made the sign of
+    the cross from the shore to be taken on board.--Astl. I. 39. b.
+
+[69] Or rather one of the three kings of Collen.--Astl. I. 39.
+
+[70] Since called Cuama.--Astl. I. 39. c.
+
+[71] Magadoxo is in lat. 2° 20' N. and about 45° 40' E. long.--E.
+
+[72] Pate stands on the coast of Zanguebar, on the Rio Grande, one of the
+    mouths of the river Zebee, in lat. 1° 50' S. and about 41° 20' E. long.
+    --E.
+
+[73] De Faria says this ship was lost on the shoals called after her name
+    but the men were saved.--Astl. I. 40. a.
+
+[74] De Faria alleges that Coello was separated by a storm near Cape Verd,
+    and arrived at Lisbon, thinking De Gama had got home before him.--Astl.
+    I. 40. b.
+
+[75] De Faria says fifty-five, and that they were all rewarded by the
+    king.--Astl. I. 40. c.
+
+[76] The translator values this pension at 200l. a-year, perhaps equal in
+    present value to 2000l.--E.
+
+[77] This does not appear to have been actually done until his return
+    from India the second time, as will be mentioned hereafter.--E.
+
+[78] According to Astley, but without quoting any particular authority,
+    De Gama had a grant from the king of the title of Don for himself and
+    his descendants, and a pension of 3000 ducats: Coello was raised to
+    the rank of Fidalgo, or gentleman, and had an appointment of 100
+    ducats yearly.--Astl. I. 40.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage of Pedro Alvarez Cabral to India in 1500; being the second made
+by the Portuguese to India, and in the course of which Brasil was
+Discovered._
+
+The certainty of a navigable communication with India, and the vast
+riches that were to be had in that country, being now ascertained, the
+king resolved to prosecute the discovery, on purpose to spread the gospel
+among the idolaters, and to augment his own revenues and the riches and
+prosperity of his subjects. For these purposes, he determined to attempt
+the settlement of a factory in Calicut by gentle means; hopeful that they
+might be persuaded to a friendly intercourse, and might afterwards listen
+to the word of God.
+
+He therefore commanded that a fleet of ten ships and two caravels should
+be got ready against next year, to be well laden with all the commodities
+which De gama had reported to have current sale in Calicut. There went
+others also to Sofala and Quiloa, where also he commanded factories to be
+established, both on account of the gold which was to be found there, and
+that the ships might have a place to touch and refresh at in their way to
+and from India. Over the fleet intended for Calicut, he appointed Pedro
+Alvarez Cabral, a gentleman of an honourable house, to be captain-general,
+Sancho de Toar being captain of his ship. The names of the other captains,
+so far as have come to my knowledge, were Nicholas Coello, Don Luis
+Continho, Simon de Myseranda, Simon Leyton, Bartholomew Diaz, who
+discovered the Cape of Good Hope, and his brother Diego Diaz, who had
+been purser to Vasco do Gama in the former voyage. Of the caravels, Pedro
+de Tayde[1] and Vasco de Silviera, were captains. Arias Correa was
+appointed supercargo of the whole fleet, and was ordered to remain as
+factor in Calicut, having Gonsalo Gil Barboso and Pedro Vas Caninon as
+his clerks. Two ships were to remain with the merchandize at Sofala,
+where Loriso Hurtado was to be factor. In the whole of this fleet there
+embarked 1500 men[2].
+
+The general was instructed, besides settling the factories, that if the
+zamorin would not quietly consent or give sufficient lading to the ships,
+he should make cruel war upon him for his injurious conduct to Vasco de
+Gama. If the zamorin consented to the establishment of a factory and
+trade, the general was secretly to request him not to allow any of the
+Moors of Mecca to remain or to trade in Calicut, or any other harbour in
+his dominions, and to promise that the Portuguese should hereafter supply
+all such commodities as used to be brought by the Moors, of better
+quality and cheaper than theirs. That he should touch at Melinda, to land
+the ambassador who had been brought from thence by De Gama, together with
+a present for the king of that place. Along with this fleet, the king
+sent five friars of the order of St Francis, of whom Fra Henrique was
+vicar, who was afterwards bishop _Siebta_, and who was to remain in the
+factory to preach the Catholic faith to the Malabars[3].
+
+The fleet being in full readiness, the king went in procession, on Sunday
+the 7th of March 1500, to hear mass at the monastery of Belem,
+accompanied by the captain-general, whom he took along with himself
+behind the curtain in the royal seat, to do him the more honour. After
+mass, Don Diego Ortis, bishop of Viseu, preached a sermon, in which he
+gave high praise to Cabral for undertaking the command of this expedition,
+as serving not only the king his temporal master, but the eternal GOD his
+spiritual Lord, drawing many comparisons in his favour from the Grecian
+and Roman histories. Mass being ended, a banner of the royal arms of
+Portugal was delivered to the bishop, who solemnly blessed it, and
+returned it to the king, who delivered it to Cabral, that it might be
+displayed at his main-top. The bishop then, gave a bonnet to the general,
+which had been blessed by the pope, and placed a rich jewel with his own
+hands on his head, and gave him his blessing. When these ceremonies were
+ended, the king accompanied the captain-general to the water side, where
+he and the other captains of the fleet took leave of the king, kissing
+his hands, the king giving them Gods blessing and his own; after which
+all went on board, and the whole fleet saluted the king by discharging
+all the ordnance of all the ships: But the wind being foul, the fleet
+could not depart that day, and the king returned to Lisbon.
+
+Next day, being the 9th of May 1500, having a fair wind, the fleet
+weighed by signal from the general, and set sail at eight in the
+morning[4]. "_The whole fleete having wayed, did then begin to cut and
+spread their sayles with great pleasure and crie, saieng altogether_, Buen
+viage, _that is to say, a luckie and prosperous voyage. After all this,
+they beganne all to be joyfull, every man to use his severall office: The
+gunners in the midst of the ship, hailing the maine sheets with the
+capsteine: The mariners and ship boys, some in the forecastell haling
+bollings, braces, and martnets: Others belying the sheets both great and
+small, and also serving in trimming the sayles, and others the nettings
+and foretop sayles: Other some vering the trusses, and also beleying
+brases and toppe sayle sheets, and coyling every sort of ropes. It was
+wonderful to see such a number of diversities of offices in so small a
+roome, as is the bredth and length of a ship_."
+
+Going on their voyage with a quarter wind, they came in sight of the
+Canaries on the 14th of March, and passed St Jago on the 22d. On the 24th
+of the same month, the caravel commanded by Vasco de Tayde parted company,
+and was never seen afterwards[5]. After waiting two days for the missing
+ship, the fleet proceeded on its voyage, and on the 24th of April, came
+in sight of land. This was cause of much joy, as it was supposed to be a
+country which had not been discovered by De Gama, because it lay to the
+west[6] of their course. Cabral immediately sent off the master of his
+ship in a small boat to examine the country, who reported that it
+appeared pleasant and fertile, with extensive woods and many inhabitants.
+The fleet was brought to anchor, and the master sent again on shore to
+examine more narrowly into the state of the country and its inhabitants.
+His account was that the natives were well proportioned, and of a swarthy
+colour, armed with bows and arrows, and all naked. A storm arising at
+night, the fleet weighed anchor and stood along; the coast, till they
+found a good harbour, in which they all came to anchor, naming it _Puerto
+Seguro_, or the Safe Port, as it was quite secure in all weathers. Our
+men took two of the natives in an almadia or canoe, who were brought to
+the admiral, but no one could understand their language. They had
+therefore apparel given them, and were set on shore much pleased. This
+encouraged the rest of the natives to mix with our people in a friendly
+manner; but finding nothing to detain him here, the general determined to
+take in a supply of water, not knowing when he might have another
+opportunity. Next day, being in Easter week, a solemn mass was said on
+shore under a pavilion, and a sermon was preached by Fra Henrique. During
+service, many of the natives gathered around, who seemed very merry,
+playing and leaping about, and sounding cornets, horns, and other
+instruments. After mass, the natives followed the general to his boat,
+singing and making merry. In the afternoon our men were allowed to go on
+shore, where they bartered cloth and paper with the natives for parrots
+and other beautiful birds, which are very numerous in that country, and
+with whose feathers the natives make very shewy hats and caps. Some of
+our men went into the country to see the towns or dwellings of the
+natives, and reported that the land was very fertile, and full of woods
+and waters, with plenty of fruits of various kinds, and much cotton.
+
+As this was the country now so well known by the name of Brasil, I shall
+not say any more about it in this place, except that the fleet remained
+here for eight days; during which a great fish was thrown ashore by the
+sea, greater than any _tonel_, and as broad as two. It was of a round
+form, having eyes like those of a hog, and ears like an elephant, but no
+teeth; having two vents under its belly, and a tail three quarters of a
+yard broad, and as much in length. The skin was like that of a hog, and a
+finger in thickness. The general ordered a high stone cross to be erected
+at this place, and named his new discovery _La tierra de Santa Cruz_, or
+the Land of the Holy Cross. From hence he sent home a caravel, with
+letters to the king, giving an account of his voyage hitherto, and that
+he had left two exiles[7] in this place, to examine the country; and
+particularly to ascertain if it were a continent, as appeared from the
+length of coast he had passed. He sent likewise one of the natives, to
+shew what kind of people inhabited the land. Considering the great length
+of the voyage he had to perform, Cabral did not deem it proper to spend
+any more time in examining this new country, but departed from Puerto
+Seguro[8] on the 2d of May, steering his course for the Cape of Good Hope,
+which was estimated to be 1200 leagues distant, and having a great and
+fearful gulf to cross, rendered dangerous by the great winds which
+prevail in these seas during most part of the year.
+
+On the 12th of May a great comet appeared in the heavens, coming from the
+east, and was visible during ten days and nights, always increasing in
+splendour. On Saturday the 23d of May, there arose a great storm from the
+north-east, attended with a high sea and heavy rain, which forced the
+whole fleet to take in their sails. On its abatement they again spread
+their foresails; and falling calm towards night, the ships astern spread
+out all their sprit-sails to overtake the rest. On Sunday the 24th the
+wind again increased, and all the sails were furled. Between ten and
+eleven o'clock of that day a water-spout was seen in the north-west, and
+the wind lulled. This deceived the pilots as a sign of good weather,
+wherefore they still carried sail: But it was succeeded by a furious
+tempest, which came on so suddenly that they had not time to furl their
+sails, and four ships were sunk with all their men, one of which was
+commanded by Bartholomew Diaz, the discoverer of the Cape of Good Hope.
+The other _seven_[9] were half filled with water, and had been all lost
+if a part of their sails had not given way to the tempest. Soon
+afterwards the storm veered to the south-west, but still continued so
+violent that they had to drive all that day and the next under bare poles,
+and the fleet much separated. On the third day the wind became more
+moderate, coming round to the east and north-east, attended by a heavy
+swell, and the waves run higher than had ever been seen before, yet the
+fleet joined again to their great joy. This wind and high sea continued
+for twenty days, during all which time the ships had to lie to, and were
+so tossed that no one thought it possible to escape being swallowed up.
+During day, the sea was black as pitch, and at night it appeared like
+fire. The general, with Simon de Myranda and Pedro de Tayde, bore up to
+windward during this long continued gale; while all the rest submitted to
+the wind and went at Gods mercy.
+
+When the storm abated, the general found that, with only two other ships
+in company, he had doubled the Cape of Good Hope without having seen it.
+On the 16th of July they fell close in with the coast of Africa, in lat.
+27°S. but the pilots did not know the coast, and the general would not
+allow any one to go on shore. They could see great numbers of people on
+the land, yet none came down to the shore to view the ships. Having no
+hope of procuring provisions from the natives, the seamen caught great
+plenty of fish at this place; after which the general pursued his course
+close along shore, where he constantly saw many people, and great numbers
+of cattle feeding along the banks of a river which fell into the sea in
+that neighbourhood.[10] Proceeding in this manner, the general came to
+Sofala, with which the pilots were unacquainted, near which lay two
+islands,[11] close by one of which two vessels lay at anchor. These
+immediately made for the shore on seeing the Portuguese ships, and being
+pursued were taken without resistance. The principal person belonging to
+these vessels was a near relation[12] of the king of Melinda, and was
+going from Sofala to Melinda with gold. The people were so much afraid on
+seeing our ships, that they threw a great part of the gold into the sea,
+and most of them escaped on shore. The general was much concerned at his
+loss, especially that it should have fallen on the subject and relation
+of a prince who was in friendship with the king his master; and after
+shewing him every civility, restored the two vessels with all the
+remaining gold. The Moor asked Cabral if he had any witches on board, who
+could conjure up his gold from the bottom of the sea? Cabral answered,
+that the Christians believe in the true God, and do not practice or give
+credit to witchcraft.
+
+Learning from this Moor that he had overshot Sofala, and not being
+inclined to turn back, the general continued his voyage to Mozambique;
+where he arrived on the 20th of July and took in a supply of water, and
+procured a pilot to carry him to the island of Quiloa, towards which he
+directed his course. In this part of the voyage he saw several fertile
+islands, belonging to the king of Quiloa, who is a powerful prince; his
+dominions extending from Cape Corientes almost to Mombaza, along nearly
+400 leagues of coast, including the two islands near Sofala, that city
+itself and several others to Mozambique, many more all the way to Mombaza,
+with a great number of islands; from all which he derives large
+revenues.[13] Yet he has few soldiers, and lives in no great state. His
+constant residence is in an island named Quiloa, near the continent of
+Ethiopia, an hundred leagues from Mozambique. This island is full of
+gardens and orchards, with plenty of various kinds of fruits, and
+excellent water, and the country produces abundance of _miso_[14] and
+other grain, and breeds great numbers of small cattle; and the sea affords
+great plenty of excellent fish. The city of Quiloa is in lat. 9°25'S. and
+long. 40°20'E. handsomely built of stone and lime, and pleasantly situated
+between fine gardens and the sea, having abundance of provisions from its
+own island and from other places on the continent. The king and the
+inhabitants of the city are Moors of a fair colour using the Arabic
+language, but the original natives of the country are Negroes. The Moors
+of Quiloa are richly dressed, especially the women, who wear many golden
+ornaments. They are great merchants, enjoying the principal trade in gold
+at Sofala, whence it is distributed over Arabia Felix, and other countries;
+and many merchants resort thither from other places. Hence there are
+always many ships in this port, which are all hauled upon the beach when
+not in use. These ships[15] have no nails, but are sewed together by rope
+made of _cairo_, and have their bottoms payed with wild frankincense, as
+the country produces no pitch. The winter here begins in April and ends in
+May.
+
+On arriving at Quiloa, and receiving a safe-conduct for that purpose, the
+general sent Alonso Hurtado, attended by seven of the principal officers,
+to wait upon the king, signifying that Cabral had come here with the
+fleet of the king of Portugal to settle a trade in the city, and had
+great store of merchandize fit for that purpose; and to say that he was
+desirous to confer with his highness on this subject, but had been
+forbidden by the king his master to go on shore. The king agreed to give
+Cabral an audience afloat; and, on the following day Cabral waited for
+the king in his boat, which was covered over with flags, and attended by
+all the other captains in their boats; as now Sancho de Toar and other
+two ships had joined company again. The king came in an almadia,
+accompanied by many principal Moors in other boats, all decked with flags,
+and with many trumpets, cornets, and sackbuts, making a great noise. On
+the arrival of the king, the whole Portuguese ordnance was fired off, by
+which the king and his train were much alarmed, not having been
+accustomed to such a salute. After mutual civilities, the letter from the
+king of Portugal was read, proposing the settlement of trade between the
+two nations, to which the king of Quiloa assented, and agreed that Alonso
+Hurtado should wait upon him next day with an account of the kinds of
+merchandize the Portuguese had to dispose of, for which he promised to
+give gold in exchange. But when Hurtado went next day on shore, the king
+made many excuses for not performing his promise, pretending to have no
+need of the commodities, and believing that the general came to conquer
+his country. The true reason was because he was a Moor and we were
+Christians, and he was unwilling to have any trade or intercourse with us.
+After this the general remained three or four days, to see if the king
+would change his mind; but he continued inflexible, and strengthened
+himself with armed men, as jealous of being attacked.
+
+Finding that nothing could be done here, the general went on his voyage,
+and arrived at Melinda on the 2d of August. At this port he found three
+ships at anchor belonging to Moorish merchants of Cambaya; but, though
+laden with great riches, he would not meddle with them, out of respect
+for the king of Melinda. On coming to anchor the general saluted the king
+with all his ordnance; on which the king sent a complimentary message of
+welcome, with a present of many sheep, hens, and ducks, and great
+quantities of fruits. The general sent a message in return, intimating
+that he had come here by orders of the king of Portugal, to know if his
+highness had any service which the fleet could perform for him, and to
+deliver a letter and a rich present from the king of Portugal, which he
+would send whenever his highness pleased to give his commands. The king
+was much pleased with this message, and detained the messenger all night,
+most part of which he spent in making inquiries respecting the kingdom of
+Portugal. As soon as it was day, the king sent two principal Moors to
+wait upon the general, declaring his joy at his arrival, and desiring, if
+he had need of any thing in the country, to command all there as his own.
+The general then sent Aries Correa, the factor-general of the fleet, on
+shore to deliver the letter and presents, accompanied by most of the
+principal officers, and having all the trumpeters of the fleet sounding
+before him. The present consisted of the rich caparison of a riding-horse,
+of the most splendid and shewy fashion. The king sent the nobles of his
+court to receive Correa in great state, and several women who had censers
+or perfuming pans which filled the air with a delightful odour. The king
+received Correa in his palace, which was very near the water side,
+sitting in his chair of state, and accompanied by many noblemen and
+gentlemen. The letter, which was written hi Portuguese on one side and
+Arabic on the other, being read, and the present laid before the king, he
+and his nobles all in one voice gave thanks to God and Mahomet for
+granting them the friendship of so great a prince. During the three days
+which the fleet continued here, Correa remained on shore at the kings
+particular request, in which he constantly employed himself in inquiries
+concerning the customs of the king of Portugal and the conduct of his
+government.
+
+The king of Melinda was very anxious to have Cabral to come on shore to
+the palace, but he excused himself as having been ordered by his master
+not to land at any port, with which the king was satisfied, yet desired
+to have an interview on the water. On this occasion, though the palace
+was very near the sea, he went on horseback to the shore, having his
+horse decorated with the rich caparisons sent him by the king of Portugal,
+which were obliged to be put on by one of our men as none of the natives
+knew their use. On coming to the shore, certain principal natives waited
+at the foot of the stair, having a live sheep, which they opened alive,
+taking out the bowels, and the king rode over the carcase of the sheep.
+_This is a kind of ceremony that the witches there do use_.[16] After
+this he went to the water side, with all his train on foot, saying in a
+loud voice certain words of incantation. The interview with the general
+took place on the water in great ceremony, and the king gave him a pilot
+to carry the fleet to Calicut. Cabral left two banished men at Melinda to
+inform themselves of all the circumstances of the country to the best of
+their abilities. One of these, called _Machado_, when he had learned the
+Arabic language, went afterwards by land to the straits of the Red Sea,
+and from thence by Cambaya to _Balagarte_, and settled with the _sabayo_
+or lord of Goa, passing always for a Moor. This man was afterwards very
+serviceable to Albuquerque, as will be seen hereafter.
+
+Leaving Melinda on the 7th of August, he came to Ansandina or Anche-diva,
+on the 20th of that month, where he waited some days for the fleet of
+Mecca, which he meant to have attacked. While there, the whole of the
+crews confessed and received the sacrament. No ships appearing, the fleet
+left Anchediva and sailed for Calicut, coming to anchor within a league
+of that place on the 13th of September. Several almadias came off
+immediately to sell victuals: And some of the principal nayres, with a
+Guzurat merchant, brought a message from the zamorin,[17] declaring his
+satisfaction at the arrival of the general at his city, in which every
+thing he might need was at his command. The general made a polite answer
+to the king, with thanks for his civility, and gave orders to bring the
+fleet nearer to the city, in doing which all the ordnance was fired as a
+salute, to the great astonishment of the natives, the idolaters among
+them saying that it was impossible to resist us. Next day one Gaspar[18]
+was sent on shore to the zamorin, desiring to have a safe-conduct for a
+deputation from the general to wait on his highness; and along with
+Gaspar the four Malabars who had been carried away from Calicut by Don
+Vasco de la Gama were sent on shore. These men were all finely dressed in
+Portuguese habits, and the whole inhabitants of the city came out to see
+them, rejoiced to find they had been well treated. Though the zamorin was
+well pleased with the safe return of his subjects, he refused allowing
+them to come into his presence as they were only fishermen, or of a low
+cast; but he sent for Gaspar, whom he received with civility, and whom he
+assured that our people might come on shore in perfect safety. On
+receiving this intelligence, Cabral sent Alonso Hurtado to the zamorin,
+intimating that the Portuguese fleet had come on purpose to settle trade
+and friendship, and that the general wished for an audience in which to
+arrange these matters with his highness. But had orders from the king his
+master not to go on shore without sufficient pledges for his security;
+among whom he demanded the kutwal of Calicut and Araxamenoca one of the
+chiefs of the nayres.[19] On this occasion Hurtado was accompanied by a
+person who could speak the language, to act as his interpreter.
+
+The zamorin was unwilling to send the hostages required, alleging that
+they were old and sickly, and offered to send others who were better able
+to endure the hardships of living on board. Yet he afterwards, at the
+instigation of the Moors, was against sending any hostages; as they made
+him believe that the general shewed little confidence in his promise,
+which was derogatory to his honour and dignity. This negociation lasted
+three days, as Hurtado insisted on this as a necessary preliminary. At
+length, desirous of having trade settled with us, owing to the advantages
+which would accrue to his revenue, the zamorin agreed to give the
+hostages required. On which, leaving the command of the fleet in his
+absence to Sancho de Toar, Cabral directed that the hostages should be
+well treated, but on no account to deliver them to any one even although
+demanded in his name. On the 28th of December, Cabral went on shore
+magnificently dressed and attended by thirty of his principal officers
+and others, the kings servants, in as much state as if he had been king
+of Portugal; carrying with him rich furniture for his apartments, with a
+cupboard of plate containing many rich pieces of gilt silver. He was met
+by many principal nayres, sent by the zamorin to wait upon him, and
+attended by a numerous train, among whom were many persons sounding
+trumpets sackbuts and other musical instruments. The zamorin waited for
+him in a gallery close by the shore, which had been erected on purpose;
+and while the general went towards the shore, accompanied by all the
+boats of the fleet, dressed out with flags and streamers, the hostages
+were carried on board his ship, where they were loath to enter till they
+should see the general on shore, lest he might return and detain them;
+but were at last reassured of their safety by Aries Correa. On landing,
+Cabral was received in great state by several _caymals, pinakals_, and
+other principal nayres; by whose directions he was placed in an _andor_
+or chair, in which he was carried to the _serame_ or hall of audience,
+where the king waited his arrival.
+
+The serame or gallery, was all hung round with rich carpets, called
+_alcatifas_; and at the farther end the zamorin sat in an alcove or
+recess resembling a small chapel, with a canopy of unshorn crimson velvet
+over his head, and having twenty silk cushions under him and about him.
+The zamorin was almost naked, having only a piece of white cotton round
+his waist, wrought with gold. On his head he wore a cap of cloth of gold
+resembling a helmet. In his ears he had rich jewels of diamonds,
+sapphires, and pearls, two of the latter being as large as walnuts. His
+arms, from the elbows to the wrists, were covered with golden bracelets,
+set with numberless precious stones of great value; and his legs, from
+the knees to the ankles, were similarly adorned. His fingers and toes had
+numerous rings, and on one of his great toes he wore a ruby of great size
+and wonderful brilliancy. One of his diamonds was bigger than a large
+bean. All these were greatly surpassed by his girdle of gold and jewels,
+which was altogether inestimable, and was so brilliant that it dazzled
+the eyes of the beholders. Beside the zamorin was a rich throne or state
+chair, all of gold and jewels; and his _andor_, in which he had been
+carried from the palace was of similar richness, and stood near him. He
+was attended by twenty trumpeters, seventeen of whom had silver trumpets,
+and three of them gold, all the mouth-pieces being finely wrought and set
+with jewels. Although in full day, the hall was lighted by many silver
+lamps, in the fashion of the Moors. Close by the king there stood a
+spitting basin of gold, and several silver perfuming-pans, which produced
+an excellent odour. Six paces from the king, he was attended on by his
+two brothers, who were the nearest heirs to the kingdom; and a little
+farther off were many noblemen, all standing.
+
+On entering the hall, and seeing the splendid state of the zamorin,
+Cabral would have kissed his hand, as is the custom of Europe; but was
+informed that this was not customary among them, and therefore sat down
+in a chair near the king, which was appointed for him as an especial
+honour. He then delivered his letter of credit from the king of Portugal,
+written in Arabic, and then said, that the king his master, willing to
+cultivate trade and friendship with the zamorin and his subjects, had
+given him orders to require permission to establish a factory or house of
+trade in Calicut, which should always be supplied with every kind of
+merchandize that was in demand; and requested the zamorin to supply a
+sufficient loading of spices for the ships under his command, which he
+was ready to pay for, either by means of the commodities he had on board,
+or in ready money. The zamorin seemed or affected to be pleased with the
+embassy, and said that the king of Portugal was welcome to every thing in
+his city of which he was in need. At this time the present from the king
+of Portugal to the zamorin was brought forwards; which, among other
+things, contained, a richly wrought basin and ewer of silver gilt; a gilt
+silver flaggon and cover of similar workmanship; two silver maces; four
+cushions, two of which were cloth of gold, and the other two of unshorn
+crimson velvet; a state canopy of cloth of gold, bound and fringed with
+gold; a carpet of rich crimson velvet; two very rich arras hangings, one
+ornamented with human figures, and the other with representations of
+trees and flowers. The zamorin was much satisfied with this present, and
+said the general might either retire to his lodgings for rest and
+refreshment, or might return to his ships as he thought best; but, as the
+hostages were men of high cast and could not endure the sea, who could
+neither eat or drink while on board consistent with their customs, it
+became necessary that they should come on shore. Wherefore, if the
+general would return to his ship and send these men on shore, and
+inclined to come back next day to conclude all matters relative to the
+trade of Calicut, the same hostages should be again sent on board. As the
+general placed confidence in these assurances of the zamorin, he went on
+board, leaving Hurtado and other seven of his people in charge of his
+valuables that were left on shore. When at the water side and ready to
+embark, a servant of one of the hostages, who was dispatched by the
+comptroller of the zamorins household, went before in an almadia or small
+pinnace, and gave notice to the hostages that the general was coming on
+board. On which they leapt into the sea, meaning to escape to land in the
+almadia with the servant: But Aries Correa went immediately with some of
+the Portuguese mariners in a boat, and retook two of the hostages, with
+three or four of the Malabars belonging to the almadia: The rest of the
+hostages, among whom was the kutwal, got to the city.
+
+When Cabral came on board and learnt what had happened, he ordered the
+two remaining hostages to be secured below deck, and sent a complaint to
+the zamorin against the conduct of the hostages, laying all the blame on
+the comptroller. He desired the messenger to inform the zamorin of the
+situation of the two remaining hostages, and to say that they should be
+liberated whenever the Portuguese and the goods on shore were sent back
+to the ships. Next day the zamorin came to the shore accompanied by 12,
+000 men, and sent off the Portuguese people and their commodities to the
+ships in thirty almadias, with orders to bring back the hostages. But
+none of the Malabars in the almadias dared to approach the ships, being
+afraid of the Portuguese, and returned therefore to the land without
+delivering our people and commodities. Next day, the general sent some of
+his own boats to land the pledges, but at some distance from the almadias;
+on which occasion Araxamenoca, one of the hostages, leapt into the sea
+with an intention to escape, but was retaken; and while our people were
+busied in securing him, the other hostage made his escape. The general
+was astonished at the want of truth and honour in these people, and gave
+orders to keep Araxamenoca in strict custody; but finding at the end of
+three days that the zamorin did not send for him, and that during all
+this period he refused all sustenance, Cabral took compassion on him and
+sent him to the zamorin, requesting that two of our men who remained on
+shore might be sent on board, which was complied with.
+
+After waiting three days without any message from the zamorin, the
+general sent one Francisco Correa to inquire if he inclined to confirm
+the agreement between them, in which case he would send Aries Correa on
+shore to treat with his highness, for whose safety he required hostages.
+The zamorin answered that he was perfectly willing to have the trade
+established, and that the general might send Aries Correa or any other
+person on shore for that purpose, and transmitted two grandsons of a rich
+merchant of Guzerate as hostages. Aries Correa went accordingly on shore,
+and was accommodated by the orders of the zamorin with a convenient house
+for himself and his goods, which belonged to the Guzerate merchant, who
+was likewise commanded to assist Correa in regard to the prices of his
+merchandize and all other things relating to the trade and customs of the
+place. But this man being a friend to the Moors of Mecca, thwarted him in
+all things instead of giving him assistance. The Moors were determined
+enemies to our people, both for being Christians, and lest their credit
+and advantageous traffic in Calicut might suffer by the establishment of
+our trade in that port. Wherefore, by means of their confederacy with the
+Guzerate merchant, they took our goods at any price they pleased, and
+intimidated the Malabars from trading with us. The Moors concluded that
+the establishment of our factory would lower the price of such
+commodities as they had to sell, and would inhance the value of the
+spiceries, drugs, and jewels which they took in exchange. On this account
+they thwarted Correa in all his transactions, offering higher prices than
+ordinary for every article, by which he was constrained to buy every
+thing at a very dear rate. If at any time he wished an audience of the
+zamorin, the Moors always contrived to be present, that some of them
+might speak against him. In this conduct they were assisted by
+_Samicide_[20], a Moor, who was admiral of Calicut; who likewise hindered
+any of our people of the factory from going on board the fleet, and
+detained any of our boats that approached the shore, pretending to do this
+by command of the zamorin.
+
+On learning this sinister conduct of the Moorish admiral of Calicut, and
+suspecting some intended treachery, the general gave orders to the fleet
+to weigh their anchors, and to remove out of the harbour, lest they might
+be attacked by the zamorins fleet, and that he might take counsel with
+the other captains for the safety of the expedition. On learning this,
+the zamorin inquired the reason from Correa, who urged the injurious
+behaviour of the Moors, and told him all that they had done. The zamorin
+immediately gave orders that the Moors should discontinue their villanous
+conduct towards us, and even removed the Guzerate merchant from our
+factory, appointing one _Cosebequin_[21] in his place, who, though a Moor,
+was a very honest man and behaved to us in a friendly manner. This man
+was of great credit in Calicut, being the head of all the native Moors of
+that country, who are always at variance with the Moors of Cairo and of
+the Red Sea, of whom the admiral Samicide was the chief. The Zamorin gave
+farther orders, that our factory should be removed to a house close to
+the shore which belonged to Cosebequin, that our merchants might have
+greater freedom to buy and sell, without any interruption from the Moors.
+For the greater security, a deed of gift was made of this house by the
+zamorin to the king of Portugal and his successors for ever, a copy of
+which, signed and sealed by the zamorin, was enclosed in a casket of gold
+that it might be conveyed to Portugal; and permission was given to
+display a flag of the royal arms of Portugal from the top of the
+factory[22]. On receiving intelligence of these favourable measures, Cabral
+brought back the fleet into the harbour of Calicut, and sent his
+compliments of thanks to the zamorin for his gracious and favourable
+dispositions. After this, our factory had tolerably good fortune in
+conducting its trade by the assistance of Cosebequin: and the natives,
+finding our factory favoured by the zamorin, behaved so very civilly to
+our people that they could go about wherever they pleased, with as much
+freedom and safety as in Lisbon.
+
+During the subsistence of this friendly intercourse, a large Moorish ship
+was descried from Calicut on its voyage from Cochin for Cambaya; and the
+zamorin requested our general to make prize of the ship, alleging that it
+contained a peculiarly fine elephant which he wished to possess, and
+which had been refused to him although he had offered more than its value.
+The general answered that he would do this willingly to gratify his
+highness; but, as he was informed the ship was large and well manned,
+both with mariners and soldiers, it could not be expected to surrender
+without resistance, in which some men might be slain on both sides, and
+it was therefore necessary he should have the sanction of his highness to
+kill these people in case of resistance, which was accordingly granted.
+Upon which the general sent Pedro de Tayde in his caravel, accompanied by
+a valiant young gentleman named Duarte, or Edward Pacheco, and by sixty
+fighting men, with orders to take this ship. Along with them the zamorin
+sent certain Moors, that they might witness the manner of fighting used
+by the Portuguese. The caravel gave chase to the Moorish ship till night,
+and then lost sight of her; but in sailing along shore by moon-light,
+they saw her riding at anchor, ready for defence, judging her to be about
+600 tons burthen, and to contain 300 fighting men. Pacheco, according to
+his orders, did not think proper to lay the Moorish ship on board, but
+commanded his ship to be brought to, intending to sink the Moorish ship
+by means of his ordnance, in case of necessity. The Moors made light of
+our small force, which they greeted with loud cries and the sound of
+musical instruments, after which they played their ordnance against our
+caravel. They were bravely answered by our men, and one of our balls
+struck them between wind and water, so that the Moorish ship took in much
+water; and many of their men being killed and wounded by our shot, they
+bore away for the bay of Cananor, which was very near, and came there to
+anchor beside other four Moorish ships. Pacheco followed them and
+continued to batter them with his guns, and had assuredly taken them had
+not certain _paroas_ belonging to the Moors come from the port of Cananor
+to their assistance. The night growing very dark, Pacheco quitted the bay
+lest his caravel might be set on fire by the Moors, and came to anchor
+close to an island at a short distance, having had nine of his men
+wounded by arrows during the engagement.
+
+Next morning Pacheco again attacked the Moorish ship, which at last
+yielded, to the great displeasure of the natives of Cananor, who had
+flocked to the seaside intending to have succoured the Moors; but, on
+Pacheco sending a few shots among them, they all dispersed. Pacheco came
+next day to Calicut with his prize, where the zamorin came down to the
+water side to see the Moorish ship, giving great praise to our people for
+their prowess, being much astonished that so great a ship should be taken
+by one so much inferior in size and number of men. The general commanded
+this ship to be delivered to the zamorin, together with the seven
+elephants that were on board, which were worth in Calicut 30,000 crowns.
+He also sent a message to the zamorin, saying that he need not be
+astonished at this action as he would perform much greater actions to
+serve his highness. The zamorin returned thanks for what had been done,
+and desired the brave men who had performed this gallant action to be
+sent him, that he might do them honour and reward them as they deserved;
+and he bestowed large presents upon Pacheco in particular. Some affirm
+that the performance of this gallant feat by so small a number of our men
+against such great odds, raised fear and jealousy of the Portuguese in
+the mind of the zamorin, and made him anxious to get them away from his
+country; for which cause he gave his consent to the treachery which was
+used against them, as I mean to shew in the sequel[23].
+
+The Moors of Calicut were more terrified than ever at the Portuguese in
+consequence of the capture of this ship, and were much offended by the
+favour bestowed by the zamorin upon our men for their gallantry on this
+occasion. They believed that all this was done, out of, revenge against
+themselves, for the injuries they had done us, and was intended to induce
+them to retire from Calicut; especially as our people brought there as
+great store of merchandize as they did, and bought as many spices. Taking
+all this into consideration, they procured an audience of the zamorin, to
+whom one of their number made the following oration in the name of all
+the Moors.
+
+_"Emparather[24]_ of all the Malabars, as great as the mightiest
+sovereign of the Indies, and most powerful among the princes of the earth.
+We are astonished that you should debase yourself by receiving into your
+country these enemies of your law and strangers to the customs of your
+kingdom, who seem pirates rather than merchants. We should not wonder at
+your so doing were your city in want of the commodities they bring, or
+could not otherwise dispose of the spiceries they purchase: But we, whom
+you have long known and whose fidelity you are well assured of by
+experience, have always done both to the great increase of your revenue.
+You appear to forget all this, by receiving those whom you do not know
+into your favour, and employing them to revenge your injuries, as if your
+own numerous and faithful subjects were incompetent for the purpose. In
+this you dishonour yourself, and embolden these strangers to hold your
+power in contempt, and to act as we know they will hereafter, by robbing
+and plundering all merchant ships that frequent your port, to the ruin of
+your country, and who will at length take possession of your city. This
+is the true intent of their coming into these seas, and not to trade for
+spices as they pretend. Their country is almost 5000 leagues from hence,
+and the voyage out and home is attended by many dangers through unknown
+and stormy seas, besides the great cost of their large ships with so many
+men and guns; Hence at whatever prices they may dispose of their spices
+in Portugal, it is obvious such a trade must be carried on with great
+loss; which is a manifest proof that they are pirates, and not merchants,
+who come here to rob, and to take your city. The house you have given
+them for a factory, they will convert into a fort, from whence they will
+make war on you when you least expect it. All this we say more from the
+good will we owe you, than for any profit; for, if you do not listen to
+our advice, there are other cities in Malabar to which we will remove,
+and to which the spices will be conveyed for us."
+
+To this harangue the zamorin gave a favourable answer, saying that he
+would give attention to all they had said, of which indeed he already had
+some suspicions. That he had employed the Portuguese to seize the ship to
+try their courage, and had allowed them to load their ships, that the
+money they had brought to purchase goods might remain in the country; and
+finally, that he would not forsake them in favour of the strangers. The
+Moors were by no means satisfied with all this, because the zamorin did
+not order us to depart from Calicut, and did not stop our trade, which
+was their chief purpose. Though disappointed in these views, they
+continued to intermiddle in our affairs, particularly by buying up the
+spices and sending them elsewhere, in hope of irritating our people, and
+bringing on a quarrel, that they might have a pretext to attack us. This
+they were much inclined to bring about, as, being greatly more numerous
+than our men, they hoped the zamorin would take part with them against us.
+They likewise used all possible means to draw over the common people of
+Calicut to their side, and to excite them to enmity, against us, by
+making them believe that our people had injured them.
+
+Through those devices, our factor was unable to procure more spices than
+sufficed to load two ships in the course of three months, from which the
+general was convinced that the friendly assurances of the zamorin was
+little to be depended on; and if he had not been afraid of not being able
+to procure a sufficient supply elsewhere, he would have gone to another
+port: But, having already consumed a long time and been at heavy charges,
+he determined to remain at Calicut, and sent a message to the zamorin,
+complaining of the delays, which ill accorded with the promises of his
+highness, that the whole fleet should be loaded in twenty days, whereas
+three months were now elapsed and the loading of two ships only was
+procured. He urged the zamorins promise that the Portuguese ships were to
+be first loaded; whereas he had assured information that the Moors had
+bought up great quantities of spices at lower prices, and sent them to
+other places, and begged the zamorin to consider that it was now time for
+the ships to begin their voyage to Portugal, and that he anxiously wished
+for dispatch. On receiving this message, the zamorin pretended to be much
+surprised that our ships were still unprovided with a loading, and could
+not believe that the Moors had secretly bought up and removed the spices,
+contrary to his orders; and even gave permission to the general to take
+those ships belonging to the Moors which were laden with spices, paying
+the same prices for the spices which had been given by the Moors. This
+intelligence gave much satisfaction to the Moors, as a favourable
+opportunity for drawing on hostilities with the Portuguese; and,
+accordingly, one of the principal Moorish merchants began immediately to
+load his ship: openly with all kinds of drugs and spices, and suborned
+several Moors and Indians, who pretended to be the friends of our factor,
+to insinuate that he would never be able to find a sufficient loading for
+our fleet, if he did not seize that ship. Correa listened to this
+insidious advice, which he communicated to the general, urging him to
+take that Moorish ship, as he had license from the zamorin to that effect.
+The general was exceedingly unwilling to proceed to this extremity,
+afraid of the influence of the Moors with the zamorin, and of producing
+hostilities with the natives. But Correa remonstrated against delay,
+protesting that the general should be responsible for all losses that
+might accrue to the king of Portugal through his neglect. Over-persuaded
+by this urgency of the factor, the general sent all the boats of the
+squadron on the 17th of December to take possession of the Moorish ship.
+
+When this intelligence was received on shore, the Moors thought this a
+favourable opportunity of destroying our people, and immediately raised a
+great outcry against the Portuguese, incensing the people of the city to
+join with them in complaining to the zamorin; to whom they went in a
+tumultuous manner, representing that we had bought and shipped a much
+larger quantity of drugs and spices than the value of all our merchandize,
+and not contented with this, were for taking all like thieves and pirates;
+they blamed the zamorin for permitting us to trade in the city, and
+requested his license to revenge themselves upon us for the loss of their
+vessel. The faithless and inconstant king save them the license they
+required; on which they immediately armed themselves, and ran furiously
+to our factory, which was surrounded by a wall eight or ten feet high,
+and contained at that time seventy Portuguese, among whom was Fra
+Henriques and his friars. Of our people in the factory, only eight were
+armed with crossbows, all the rest being only armed with swords, with
+nothing to defend them but their cloaks. On hearing the tumult, our
+people went to the gate of the factory, and seeing only a few assailants,
+they thought to defend themselves with their swords against a mischievous
+rabble, but the numbers of the Moors soon increased, and galled our
+people so severely with their spears and arrows, that they were forced to
+shut the gates, after killing seven of the enemy, hoping to be able to
+defend themselves by means of the wall. In this conflict four of our men
+were slain, and several wounded, and all the remainder mounted the wall
+to defend it by means of the crossbows, judging that the assailants were
+at least four thousand men, among whom were several nayres.
+
+Cores now found himself unable to defend the factory against so great a
+force, and therefore hoisted a flag as signal to the fleet. The general
+was at this time sick in bed, having been just blooded, and was not
+therefore able to go in person to relieve the people in the factory; but
+immediately sent all the boats of the fleet, well manned, under the
+command of Sancho de Toar. But he was afraid to venture on land with so
+small a force against so great a multitude, or even to approach too near
+the shore, lest the enemies might assail him in their almadias and tonis.
+He lay off, therefore, at a considerable distance, where he remained a
+spectator of the valiant defence made by our people at the factory,
+whence they killed great numbers of the assailants. But their enemies
+always increased in numbers, and they at length brought up certain
+engines to beat down part of the wall, in which they at length succeeded.
+On this, our men issued out by a door which led towards the sea side, in
+hopes of being able to fight their way to the boats, in which attempt
+Corea was slain, and fifty more of our men were either killed or made
+prisoners, twenty only escaping who swam to the boats, most of whom were
+much wounded. Among these were Fra Henriques, and Antonio, the son of
+Aries Corea, then only eleven years old; who hath since done many noble
+feats of arms in the Indies and other places, as I shall afterwards
+declare in the _Fourth_ Book of this history.
+
+The general was much concerned at this event, not only for the loss of
+his men, but on seeing how little confidence could be reposed on the
+promises of the zamorin after all the presents he had received, and the
+services which had been performed for him. He had now spent three months
+at Calicut, during which he had only loaded two of his ships, and knew
+not how to procure loading for the rest; especially as he could not
+expect a favourable reception at Cochin on account of having captured the
+ship with the elephant as before related. Considering the treason which
+had been practised on our men, the general determined upon taking a
+signal revenge, if the zamorin did not make an ample excuse for what had
+taken place, and make a full reparation by immediately providing the rest
+of the ships with lading. The zamorin, however, had no such intentions,
+being much pleased with what the Moors had done, and even ordered all the
+goods in our factory to be seized, to the value of 4000 ducats. He
+likewise ordered all of our people who had been taken on shore to be made
+captives, four of whom died of their wounds. Seeing that no message or
+excuse was sent by the zamorin all that day, the general held a council
+with his officers as to the proper steps to be taken on the present
+emergency; when it was determined to take immediate and ample revenge,
+without giving time to the zamorin to arm his fleet. On this, orders were
+issued to take possession of ten large ships which lay in the road or
+harbour of Calicut, which was done after some resistance, many of their
+crews being killed or drowned, and others made prisoners who were
+reserved to serve as mariners on board our fleet. Some spices and other
+merchandize were taken in these ships, and three elephants, which were
+killed and salted as provisions for the voyage; and it appeared that 600
+Moors were slain in defending these ships. After every thing of value was
+taken from the Moorish ships, they were all burnt in sight of the city.
+Many of the Moors embarked in their almadias to attempt succouring their
+ships, but our men soon put them to flight by means of their ordnance.
+
+The zamorin and the whole city of Calicut were much mortified to see so
+many ships destroyed, and them unable to help, but their astonishment and
+terror were much increased by the events of the ensuing day. During the
+night, the general ordered all the ships of the fleet to be towed as near
+as possible to the shore by means of the boats, and spread out at some
+distance from each other, that they might be able to reach the city with
+their ordnance; which, as soon as day broke, was directed to play upon
+the city in every direction, doing vast damage among the houses. The
+natives brought down to the shore such small pieces of ordnance as they
+possessed, which they fired off against us, but without being able to do
+us any injury; whereas not a shot of ours missed taking effect, either
+among the multitude of our enemies which flocked to the shore, or on the
+buildings of the city, both the houses of the inhabitants and the temples
+of their deities receiving incredible damage. So great was the
+consternation, that the zamorin fled from his palace, and one of his
+chief nayres was killed by a ball close beside him. Part even of the
+palace was destroyed by the cannonade. Towards afternoon two ships were
+seen approaching the harbour, which immediately changed their course on
+seeing how our fleet was employed; on which the general ceased firing
+against Calicut, and made all sail after these two ships to Pandarane,
+where they took shelter among other seven ships lying at anchor close to
+the shore and filled with Moors. Finding that our fleet could not get
+near enough to attack them, owing to shallow water, and considering that
+it was now late in the season for his voyage back to Lisbon, the general
+resolved to be contented with the revenge he had already taken upon
+Calicut, and made sail for Cochin, where he was informed there was more
+pepper to be had than even at Calicut, and where he hoped to enter into a
+treaty with the rajah of that place.'
+
+On his way towards Cochin, Cabral took two ships belonging to the Moors,
+which he set on fire, after taking out of them some rice which they had
+on board. On the 20th of December the fleet arrived at Cochin, which is
+nineteen leagues to the south of Calicut, and is in nine degrees towards
+the north[25]. Cochin is in the province of Malabar, on a river close to
+the sea, and is almost an island, so that it is very strong and difficult
+of access, having a large and safe harbour. The land in its neighbourhood
+is low and intersected by branches of the river into many islands. The
+city itself is built much after the same manner with Calicut, and is
+inhabited by idolaters, with a good many Moorish strangers, who come
+hither to trade from many countries, two of whom were so rich as to have
+each fifty ships employed. This country does not abound in provisions,
+but produces large store of pepper, even Calicut being mostly supplied
+from hence: But as Calicut is greatly more resorted to by merchants, it
+is therefore much richer than Cochin. The king is an idolater, of the
+same manners and customs with him of Calicut; but his country being small
+he is very poor, and has not even the right to coin money, being in many
+respects subordinate to the zamorin; who, on his accession to the throne
+always goes to Cochin, and takes possession of that kingdom, either
+retaining it in his own hands, or restoring the rajah as he may think
+proper. The rajah of Cochin, consequently, is bound to assist the zamorin
+in all his wars, and must always be of the same religion with his
+paramount.
+
+Having come to anchor in the harbour of Cochin, the general sent one
+Michael Jogue[26] on shore with a message to the rajah, as he feared to
+send Caspar on shore, lest he might run away. This person, though an
+idolater and a stranger, had come aboard our fleet with the intention of
+becoming a Christian, and of going into Portugal, and our general had him
+baptised by the name of Michael. He was ordered to give the rajah of
+Cochin an account of all that had happened at Calicut, and that Cabral
+had brought great store of merchandize to barter for the commodities of
+Cochin; or if the rajah were not satisfied with these, he was willing to
+give ready money for what he wanted; requesting to be furnished with
+loading for four of his ships in either way, as most agreeable to the
+rajah. To this message the rajah[27] made answer, that he was exceedingly
+glad of the arrival of the Portuguese, of whose power and valour he had
+already heard, for which he esteemed them highly, and that they were
+welcome to purchase what spices his country afforded, either in barter
+for their goods, or for money, as they thought proper. He added, that the
+general might freely send any agents he pleased on shore to make
+purchases and sales, and sent two principal nayres as hostages for their
+safety; conditioning only, that they might be changed daily for others,
+because any of that cast who chanced to eat even once on shipboard could
+never appear again in the rajahs presence. Cabral was well pleased with
+this promising beginning, and immediately appointed Gonzalo Gil Barbosa
+as factor, who had been assistant to Aries Correa, giving him Laurenço
+Morena as clerk, and Madera de Alcusia as interpreter, with four of the
+banished men as servants.
+
+On receiving notice of the landing of Barbosa, the rajah sent the
+register[28] of the city to meet him, accompanied by many of the nayres,
+or principal men of the court, who brought him to visit the rajah, who
+was much inferior in dress and appearance of state to the zamorin, even
+the hall of audience having only bare walls, seated around like a theatre,
+in which the rajah sat with very few attendants. Barbosa presented to the
+rajah, in name of our general, a basin of silver filled with saffron, a
+large silver ewer filled with rose water, and some branches of coral,
+which the rajah received with much satisfaction, desiring his thanks to
+be returned to the general; and after some conversation with the factor,
+and interpreter, he gave orders for them to be properly lodged in the
+city. The general gave especial orders that no more than the seven
+persons already mentioned should remain on shore, thinking it imprudent
+to risk a greater number, in case of experiencing a similar misfortune
+with what had lately happened at Calicut. But there was here no cause for
+distrust, as the rajah of Cochin was a person of truth and honour, as
+appeared by his good usage of our men, the quick dispatch that was used
+in loading our ships with spices, and the orders he gave to his people to
+afford every assistance, which they did with much alacrity and zeal: so
+that it seemed ordained of God, that the trade should be transferred from
+Calicut to Cochin, for the advancement of the Catholic faith in the
+Indies, and the enrichment of the crown of Portugal[29].
+
+After the ships were laden, two Indians came to wait upon the general,
+who said that they were brothers, and Christians, born in Cranganore near
+Cochin, who were desirous of going to Portugal, and thence to visit the
+Pope at Rome, and the holy sepulchre at Jerusalem[30]. Being asked by the
+general what kind of a city Cranganore was, whether it was entirely
+inhabited by Christians, and whether these Christians followed the order
+of the Greek or Roman church, one of them gave the following answers.
+
+Cranganore is a large city in the province of Malabar on the mainland,
+standing near the mouth of a river, by which likewise it is encompassed,
+inhabited both by idolaters and Christians, and by some Jews who are held
+in small esteem. It is much frequented by strangers, among whom are
+merchants from Syria, Egypt, Persia, and Arabia, who come thither to
+purchase pepper, a great deal of which commodity is gathered in its
+territories. It has a king of its own, to whom all the Christian
+inhabitants pay a certain tribute, and have a quarter of their own in the
+city, where they have a church resembling ours, in which there were
+crosses, but no images of the saints, and no bells, being summoned to
+prayers by the priests as in the Greek church. These Christians hail
+their popes, with twelve cardinals, two patriarchs, and many bishops and
+archbishops, all of whom reside in Armenia, to which country their
+bishops always went for consecration. He had been there himself along
+with a bishop, where he was ordained a priest. That this rule was
+observed by all the clergy of the Indies and of Cathay, who have to go to
+the pope or Catholicos of Armenia for consecration. Of their two
+patriarchs, one resides in the Indies, and the other in Cathay[31], their
+bishops residing in different cities as it may seem convenient. Their
+tonsure is made in form of a cross.
+
+The cause of their having a pope is said to have been on the following
+account: 'When St Peter was residing at Antioch, there happened a great
+schism, occasioned by Simon Magus, on which Peter was called to Rome to
+assist the Christians in overthrowing that heresy; and, that he might not
+leave the eastern church without a shepherd, he appointed a vicar to
+govern at Antioch, who should become pope after the death of Peter, and
+should always assist the pope of Armenia. But, after the Moors entered
+into Syria and Asia Minor, as Armenia remained always in the Christian
+faith, they came to be governed by twelve cardinals. Marco Polo, in
+writing concerning Armenia, mentions this pope or Catholicos, and says
+there are two sects of Christians, the Nestorians and Jacobites, their
+pope being named Jacobus, whom this Joseph named their Catholicos. The
+priests of Cranganore are not shaven in the same manner with ours, but
+shave the whole head, leaving a few hairs on the crown and they have both
+deacons and subdeacons. In consecrating the elements, they use leavened
+bread and wine made of raisins, having no other in the country. Their
+children are not baptized till they are eleven days old, unless they
+happen to be sickly. They confess as we do, and bury their dead after a
+similar manner. They do not use the holy oil to the dying, but only bless
+them; and when any one dies, they gather a large company and feast for
+eight days, after which the obsequies are celebrated. If any person dies
+without making a testament, their lands and goods go to the nearest heir;
+but the widow is entitled to her dower if she remain a year unmarried. On
+going into church they use holy water. They hold the writings of the four
+Evangelists in great veneration. They fast during Lent and Advent with
+much solemnity, and on Easter Eve they neither eat nor drink the whole
+day. They have regularly sermons on the night of Holy Friday, and they
+observe the day of the Resurrection with great devotion. Likewise the two
+following days, and the ensuing Sunday, are particularly kept holy,
+because on that day St Thomas thrust his hand into the side of our
+Saviour. Ascension Day, Trinity Sunday, the Assumption and Nativity of
+the Blessed Virgin, Candlemas Day, Christmas Day, all the days of the
+apostles, and all the Sundays throughout the year, are kept with much
+devotion. They sanctify in a particular manner the first day of July
+every year in honour of St Thomas, but they could give no reason why this
+was done. They have also native friars and nuns, who live with much
+regularity. Their priests also live chastely, as those who do otherwise
+are debarred from executing their functions. They allow of no divorce
+between married people, who must live together till death. They receive
+the sacrament regularly three times in every year. They have among them
+certain learned men, or great doctors, who keep schools, in which they
+teach the Scriptures, and likewise some excellent interpretations which
+were left in old times by their ancient doctors. Their dress is similar
+to that of the Moors. Their day consists of forty hours; and, having no
+clocks, they judge of the time of the day by the sun, and in the night by
+the motion of the stars[32]. The general was very glad to receive this
+Joseph and his brother, and gave orders to provide them with a good cabin
+in his ship.
+
+While Cabral remained at Cochin, he received messages from the kings of
+Cananor and Coulan, both considerable princes in the province of Malabar,
+requesting him to come to their ports, where he should be supplied
+cheaper than at Cochin, and giving him many offers of friendship. He made
+answer, with his hearty thanks, that he could not now visit their ports,
+having already begun to take in his loadings bet that he should certainly
+visit them on his return to India. Immediately after the Portuguese ships
+were laden, a fleet of twenty-five great ships, and other small vessels
+was descried in the offing; and notice was sent by the rajah of Cochin to
+our general, that this fleet contained fifteen thousand fighting men, and
+had been fitted out on purpose to make him and all his people prisoners.
+At the same time the rajah offered to send men to his assistance, if he
+stood in need; but the general answered he had no need of any such aid at
+the present, as he trusted, with God's blessing, to convince his enemies
+they were ill advised in seeking now to attack him, having already given
+them a trial of his strength; alluding to what he had already done to
+them at Calicut. The enemy continued to hover off at sea, but did not
+venture to come nearer than a league, though they seemed in fighting
+order. Seeing this shyness, the general weighed anchor, and went out with
+all his fleet against them, having on board the two nayres who were
+hostages for the factory on shore, but his intentions were to have
+returned with them to Cochin. Soon after leaving the harbour, a great
+storm arose with a foul wind, so that he was forced to come to anchor
+without attaining to the enemy. Next morning, being the 10th January 1501,
+the wind came fair, and being desirous to attack the fleet of Calicut,
+the general made sail towards them; but missing the ship commanded by
+Sancho de Toar, who had parted from the fleet in the night, and that
+being the largest and best manned ship of the fleet, he deemed it prudent
+to avoid fighting with so large a force, especially as many of his men
+were sick. The wind, likewise, was now quite fair for beginning his
+voyage home, and was quite contrary for going back to Cochin to land the
+hostages. He determined, therefore, to commence his voyage, and stood out
+to sea; the enemy following him during the whole of that day, but
+returned towards Calicut when night drew on. Cabral now turned his
+attention to the forlorn nayres, who had been five days on board without
+eating, and by dint of much and kind entreaty, he at length prevailed on
+them to take food.
+
+On the 15th of January, the fleet came in sight of Cananore, which lies
+on the coast of Malabar, thirty-one leagues north of Cochin. This is a
+large city with a fine bay, the houses being built of earth, and covered
+with flat stones or slates, and it contains many Moors who trade thither
+for many kinds of goods. The neighbourhood produces hardly any more
+pepper than is necessary for its own consumpt; but has plenty of ginger,
+cardamoms, tamarinds, mirabolans, cassia-fistula[33], and other drugs. In
+several pools of water near this city there are many very large
+alligators[34], similar to the crocodiles of the Nile, which devour men
+when they come in their way. They have very large heads with two rows of
+teeth, and their breath smells like musk, their bodies being covered all
+over with hard scales like shells. In the bushes near this city there are
+many large and very venomous serpents, which destroy men by means of
+their breath. There are bats likewise as large as kites, which have heads
+like a fox and similar teeth, and the natives often eat these animals.
+The city of Cananore abounds in fish, flesh, and fruits, but has to
+import rice from other places. The king or rajah is a bramin, being one
+of the three kings of Malabar, but is not so rich and powerful as the
+zamorin, or even as the rajah of Coulan. The general came to anchor at
+this port, both because he had been invited by the rajah, and because he
+wished to take on board some cinnamon, of which commodity he had not as
+yet any on board. He accordingly purchased 400 quintals, and might have
+had more if he would, but refused it; on which the people of the place
+concluded that he had no more money. On this coming to the knowledge of
+the rajah, he sent him word that he would trust him with any quantity he
+had a mind for of that or any other commodity, till his return from
+Portugal, or the arrival of any other in his stead. The rajah was induced
+to make this offer, from his knowledge of the just dealings of the
+Portuguese, and their faithful performance of their promises. The general
+sent his hearty thanks to the rajah for his liberality, promising to
+inform the king his master of his good will, and assuring his highness
+that he might depend on his constant friendship.
+
+Cabral now took on board an ambassador from the rajah of Cananore for the
+king of Portugal, who was sent to conclude a treaty of amity between them.
+Departing from Cananore, and standing across the gulf, he took a great
+ship richly laden on the last of January: But on learning that it
+belonged to the king of Cambaya, he permitted it to proceed on its voyage
+uninjured; sending word to that sovereign, that the Portuguese did not
+come to the Indies to make war on any one, excepting indeed with the
+zamorin of Calicut, who had scandalously broken the peace which had been
+made between them. He therefore only took a pilot out of this ship, to
+conduct him through the gulf between India and Africa. While continuing
+their voyage, and approaching the African shore, a great storm arose on
+the 12th of February, by which in the night the ship of Sancho de Toar
+was driven on shore, and taking fire was entirely burnt, the men only
+being saved. As the tempest still continued, they were unable to stop at
+Melinda, or any other place till they came to Mozambique, where they cast
+anchor, in order to take in water and to refit their ships, the seams of
+which were all open. From this place, the general dispatched Sancho de
+Toar to discover Sofala, with orders to make the best of his way from
+that place to Portugal, with an account of its productions.
+
+The ships being refitted, Cabral resumed the voyage to the Cape of Good
+Hope, near which they again experienced a violent storm, in which one of
+the ships was separated from the fleet, after firing signals of distress,
+and was never seen again during the voyage. At length, after many great
+storms and dangers, which it were tedious to recount, Cabral doubled the
+Cape on Whitsunday the 22d of May; whence continuing his voyage with a
+fair wind, he came to anchor at Cape Verd, where he found Diego Diaz, who
+had separated from the fleet on the outward bound voyage. Diaz had been
+driven into the Red Sea, where he wintered and lost his boat, and as most
+of his men died from sickness, his pilot could not venture to carry him
+to India. He endeavoured therefore to find his way back to Portugal; but
+after leaving the Red Sea, his men were so consumed with hunger, thirst,
+and sickness, that only seven of his crew remained. After remaining some
+time at Cape Verd waiting in vain for the missing ships, Cabral proceeded
+on his voyage, and arrived safe at Lisbon on the last day of July, in the
+year 1501. Soon after his arrival, the ship which had separated in a
+storm off the Cape of Good Hope, came in; and shortly after that, Sancho
+de Toar arrived from Sofala. He described Sofala as a small island
+close on the continent of Africa, inhabited by a black people called
+Caffres; and reported that much gold is brought to this place from
+certain mines on the adjacent continent; on which account Sofala is much
+frequented by Moors from India, who barter merchandize of small value for
+gold. He brought along with him to Lisbon a Moor whom he had received as
+an hostage or pledge for the safety of one of his own men, whom he had
+left there to acquire a knowledge of the country and its language; and
+from this Moor they got ample information respecting the people and trade
+of those parts of Africa, which I shall afterwards communicate. Including
+this last ship, there returned six to Portugal out of the twelve which
+had sailed on the voyage for India, the other six having been lost.
+
+
+[1] It will appear in the sequel that there was another captain named
+    Vasco de Tayde.--E.
+
+[2] Astley says only 1200,--Astl. I. 40.
+
+[3] According to Astley, there were eight Franciscan friars besides the
+    vicar, eight chaplains, and a chaplin-major; and that their orders
+    were to begin with preaching, and in case that failed, to enforce the
+    gospel by the sword. In other words, to establish the accursed
+    tribunal of the inquisition in India, to the eternal disgrace of
+    Portugal, and of the pretended followers of the ever-blessed Prince of
+    Peace.--E.
+
+[4] The remainder of this paragraph is given in the precise words and
+    orthography of the original translator, Nicholas Lichfild, as a
+    curious specimen of the nautical language of Britain in 1582.--E.
+
+[5] According to De Faria, this vessel parted in a storm near Cape Verd,
+    and returned to Portugal.--Astl. I. 41. a.
+
+[6] By some unaccountable mistake, the translation of Castaneda by
+    Lichefild says to the _east_.--E.
+
+[7] It appears that Cabral had twenty malefactors on board for such
+    purposes, who had received pardon on condition of submitting to be
+    landed on occasions of danger.--E.
+
+[8] Puerto Seguro is in lat. 16°S. and about long. 39° 40'W. This country
+    of Brasil derived its name from the dye-wood so called.--E.
+
+[9] Originally, according to Castaneda, there were only ten ships and two
+    caravels: Both the caravels have been already accounted for as having
+    left the fleet; and after the loss of four ships, six only ought to
+    have remained. Astley makes the whole fleet originally to have
+    consisted of thirteen vessels, which will allow of seven now remaining.
+    --E.
+
+[10] This part of the voyage is very indistinctly described. From the lat.
+    of 27°S. where Cabral is said to have fallen in with the eastern coast
+    of Africa, to Sofala, in lat. 19°S. the coast stretches out nearly
+    five degrees to the east, to Capes Corientes and St Sebastian, with
+    many rivers, the great bays of Delogoa and Asnea, and the islands of
+    Bocica or Bozarnio, all of which must have been seen by Cabral during
+    the slow navigation close along shore, but all of which are omitted in
+    the text.--E.
+
+[11] Named Inhazato. Sofala is in lat. 13°S. and almost 36°E. from
+    Greenwich.--E.
+
+[12] According to De Faria, this person was uncle to the king of Melinda,
+    and was named Sheikh Foteyma.--Astl. I. 41. b.
+
+[13] In modern maps this extensive line of coast is divided into the
+    following separate territories, Inhambane, Sabia, Sofala, Mocaranga,
+    Mozambico, and Querimba; which will be illustrated in future portions
+    of this work.--E.
+
+[14] This word _miso_ is probably an error of the press for mylyo, by
+    which the African grain named millet is distinguished in other parts
+    of Castaneda. The _small cattle_ of the text are probably meant for
+    sheep, as they are frequently thus contradistinguished in other parts
+    of the original from _great cattle_, not here mentioned.--E.
+
+[15] These vessels were probably precisely similar to the Arab _dows_ of
+    the Red Sea and Persian Gulf, which will be afterwards more
+    particularly described.--E.
+
+[16] Thus the translation of Castaneda by Lichefild. It was more probably
+    a superstitious ceremony to guard against witches.--E.
+
+[17] In an account of this voyage by a Portuguese pilot, inserted in the
+    collection of Ramusio, the name of the reigning zamorin is said to
+    have been Gnaffer. Ramus. I. 125.
+
+[18] Probably the person who was carried prisoner from Anchediva by De
+    Gama, in the former voyage.--E.
+
+[19] According to De Faria, the hostages demanded on this occasion were
+    six principal men of the Bramin cast, whose names were brought from
+    Portugal by Cabral, by the advice of Bontaybo or Moncayde, the Moor
+    who went off with De Gama.--Astl. I. 43. b.
+
+[20] Named by De Faria, Coje Cimireci.--Astl. I. 44, a.
+
+[21] Called Coje Bequi by De Faria; or rather Khojah Beki, or Beghi: But
+    most of the foreign names are so corruptly given that it is difficult
+    to rectify them.--Astl. I. 44. b.
+
+[22] According to De Faria, this house was granted not without great
+    difficulty, and was taken possession of by Correa with sixty men.--
+    Astl. I. 45.
+
+[23] According to De Faria, this event was occasioned by the Moorish
+    admiral of Calicut, without the knowledge of the zamorin, who
+    instigated Cabral to the attempt in hope of injuring the Portuguese,
+    and sent information to the Moors to be on their guard. He adds that
+    Cabral, having discovered the fraud, restored the ship and cargo to
+    the owners, whom he satisfied for their damages, in order to gain the
+    favour of the rajah of Cochin.--Astl. I. 45.
+
+[24] Perhaps meant by Lichefild instead of emperor; or it may be some
+    native term of dignity.--E.
+
+[25] The latitude of Cochin is almost 10º N. while Calient is about 11º
+    10'.--E
+
+[26] This Michael Jougue or Joghi, is said to have been a bramin, or
+    Malabar priest; one of these devotees who wander about the country,
+    girt with chains and daubed with filth. Those wanderers, if
+    idolaters, are named Jogues; and Calandars if Mahometans.--Astl. I. 47.
+    a.
+
+[27] The rajah who then reigned at Cochin is named Triumpara, or
+    Trimumpara, by De Faria, De Barros, and other early writers.--Astl. I.
+    47. b.
+
+[28] In other parts of Castaneda, this officer is called the kutwal--E.
+
+[29] According to De Barros, the rajah of Cochin was offended by the
+    conduct of the zamorin, on several accounts, and among the rest for
+    monopolising the trade on the Malabar coast.--Astl. I. 43. a. We may
+    easily conceive that one strong ground of favour to the Portuguese at
+    Cochin, was in hopes by their means to throw off the yoke of the
+    zamorin.--E.
+
+[30] One of these Christians died during the voyage, but the other, named
+    Joseph, arrived in Portugal. This is the _Josephus Indus_, or Joseph
+    the Indian, under whose name there is a short voyage in Grynæus: which
+    properly speaking is only an account of Cranganore and its inhabitants,
+    particularly the Christians and their ceremonies, with some account of
+    Calient, Kambaya, Guzerat, Ormuz, and Narsinga, very short and
+    unsatisfactory.--Astl. I. 48. b.
+
+[31] Called Caitaio in the original, but obviously Cathay, or Northern
+    China, in which we have formerly seen that there were Nestorian
+    Christians.--E.
+
+[32] In Lichefilds translation, the account of the day of these Indian
+    Christians runs thus, which we do not pretend to understand: "They
+    have their day, which they do call _Intercalor_, which is of _forty_
+    hours."
+
+    This account of the Christians found in India by the Portuguese, is
+    exceedingly imperfect and unsatisfactory; but it would lead to a most
+    inconvenient length to attempt supplying the deficiency. Those of our
+    readers who are disposed to study this interesting subject, will find
+    it discussed at some length in Mosheim, and there is a good abstract
+    relative to these Oriental sects given by Gibbon, in the Decline and
+    Fall of the Roman Empire.--E.
+
+[33] Named Canyfistola in Lichefilds translation.
+
+[34] Lagartos in the original.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+Note.--In the Novus Orbus of Simon Grynaeus, p. 202-211, there is an
+article entitled, _Short Account of India, by Joseph, an Indian Christian,
+who accompanied Cabral[A] to Lisbon in 1501_. We were inclined to have
+inserted this account at this part of our collection as an ancient and
+original document: But, on an attentive perusal, it is so jejune,
+contused, and uninstructive as not to merit attention. It evidently
+appears to have been penned by some person in Cabral's ship during the
+voyage home, from repeated conferences with Joseph: But, as the writer of
+this article informs us himself, many particulars were unknown to Joseph,
+because he had little intercourse with the idolaters, or because the
+reporter could not understand the answers which Joseph made to his
+inquiries.--E.
+
+[A] In Grynaeus, Pedro Alvarez de Cabral, is named Peter Aliares.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Voyage of John de Nueva, being the third made by the Portuguese to India_.
+
+
+Is the same year 1501, supposing all differences to have been settled
+amicably at Calicut by Cabral, and that a regular trade was established
+both there and at Sofala and Quiloa, the king of Portugal dispatched
+three ships and a caravel from Lisbon, under the command of John de Neuva,
+a native of Galicia in Spain, who was accounted a valiant gentleman;
+having under his orders, Francisco de Navoys, Diego Barboso, and Hernando
+de la Pyna, as captains of three of the ships. Two ships of this fleet
+were destined to carry merchandize to Sofala[1], and the other two to
+Calicut, and all the four contained only eighty men[2]. The instructions
+given to Nueva were, that he was to touch at the island of St Blas, where
+he was to wait ten days if any of his ships had separated. He was then to
+proceed for Sofala, where, if a factory were settled he was to deliver
+the goods destined for that place before going to India. If a factory
+were not already settled there, he was to do every thing in his power for
+that purpose, leaving Alvaro de Braga there as factor, with the
+merchandize embarked in the caravel for that market. From Sofala, he was
+to proceed to Quiloa; and thence directly to Calicut. He was farther
+directed, in case of meeting with Cabral, to obey him as general, and
+desire him to settle a factory at Sofala, if his own attempt should fail.
+
+Nueva left Lisbon on this voyage in March, four months before the return
+of Cabral, and arrived in safety at the isle of St Blas; where he found a
+letter in an old shoe suspended from the branch of a tree, written by
+Pedro de Tayde[3], informing him that the fleet of Cabral had passed this
+island on its way back to Portugal, and giving an account of what had
+happened at Calicut, of the good treatment the fleet had received at
+Cochin, where some of our men remained, and of the friendly disposition
+of the king of Cananor[4]. On consulting with the other captains, it was
+judged improper to leave the caravel at Sofala, in these circumstances,
+as their whole force did not exceed eighty men; wherefore they proceeded
+directly for Quiloa, where they found one of the exiles who had been left
+there by Cabral, from whom they received a particular account of all that
+had happened at Calicut, and of the loss of several of his ships, all of
+which he had learnt from some Moors. From Quiloa Nueva sailed on to
+Melinda, where the king confirmed the intelligence he had received from
+the exile at Quiloa[5]. Thus fully instructed in the state of matters,
+Nueva deemed it prudent to keep all the ships of his small squadron, and
+sailed across from Melinda to Anchediva, where he came to anchor in
+November, intending to take in a supply of water at that place. While
+here, seven large ships belonging to Cambaya, which were bound for the
+Red Sea, appeared off the anchoring ground, and seemed at first disposed
+to attack our ships; but being afraid of the Portuguese ordnance, they
+continued their voyage. From Anchediva Nueva proceeded for Cananor, where
+he had an audience of the rajah, from whom he received particular notice
+of all that had happened in Calicut to Cabral, and of the offer which the
+rajah had made to load all his ships at Cananor. The rajah assured him of
+his earnest desire of doing every thing in his power to serve the king of
+Portugal, and pressed him to take in his loading at that port; but Nueva
+declined this offer for the present, until he had consulted with the
+factor at Cochin, for which port he took his departure from Cananor. On
+his way between Cananor and Cochin, Nueva took a ship belonging to some
+of the Moorish merchants at Calicut, after a vigorous resistance, and set
+it on fire.
+
+On his arrival at Cochin, the factor who had been left there by Cabral
+came on board with the rest of his company, and acquainted him that the
+rajah was greatly offended with Cabral for leaving the port without
+seeing him, and for carrying away the hostages; yet had always kindly
+entertained and the other members, of the factory, lodging them every
+night in the palace for security, and always sending a guard of nayres
+along with any of them who had occasion to go out during the day, on
+purpose to defend them from the Moors who sought their destruction, and
+who had one night set fire to the house in which they lodged before their
+removal to the palace. He also informed Nueva that the Moors had
+persuaded the native merchants to depreciate the price of the Portuguese
+merchandize, and not to take these in exchange for pepper, so that unless
+he had brought money for his purchases he would have little chance of
+procuring a loading. On this intelligence, and considering that he had
+not brought money, Nueva immediately returned from Cochin to Cananor,
+expecting to procure his loading at that port, in consequence of the
+friendly dispositions of the rajah towards the king of Portugal[6]. On
+his return to Cananor, he found that money was as necessary there for his
+purchases as at Cochin: But, when the rajah, was informed of his
+difficulties from want of money, he became his security to the native
+merchants for 1000 quintals or hundred weights of pepper, 450 quintals of
+cinnamon, and fifty quintals of ginger, besides some bales of linen
+cloth[7]. By this generous conduct of the rajah, Nueva procured a loading
+for his ships, and left his European merchandize for sale at Cananor under
+the management of a factor and two clerks.
+
+On the 15th December, while waiting for a fair wind to begin his homeward
+voyage, the rajah sent notice to Nueva that eighty _paraws_ were seen to
+the northward, which were past mount _Dely_, and that these vessels were
+from Calicut, sent expressly to attack the Portuguese ships; and the
+rajah advised him to land his men and ordnance for greater security: But
+the general was not of this mind, and sent word to the rajah that he
+hoped, with the assistance of God, to be able to defend himself. Next day,
+being the 16th of December, before dawn, about an hundred ships and
+paraws full of Moors came into the bay, sent on purpose by the zamorin,
+who was in hopes to have taken all our ships and men. As soon as Nueva
+perceived this numerous armament, he hoisted anchor and removed his
+squadron to the middle of the bay, where he ordered all his ships to pour
+in their shot against the enemy without intermission. Doubtless, but for
+this, the enemy would have boarded his ships, and they were so numerous
+it would have been impossible for him to have escaped; but as the Moors
+had no ordnance, they could do our people no harm from a distance, and
+many of their ships and paraws were sunk, with the loss of a vast number
+of men, while they did not dare to approach for the purpose of boarding,
+and not a single person was killed or hurt on our side. The enemy towards
+evening hung out a flag for a parley; but as Nueva feared this might be
+intended as a lure, he continued firing, lest they might suppose he
+stopped from weariness or fear. But the Moors were really desirous of
+peace, owing to the prodigious loss they had sustained, and their
+inability to escape from the bay for want of a fair wind. At length, most
+of his ordnance being burst or rendered unserviceable by the
+long-continued firing, and seeing that the Moors still kept up their flag
+of truce, Nueva ceased firing and answered them by another flag[8].
+Immediately on this, a Moor came to Neuva in a small boat, to demand a
+cessation of hostilities till next day. This was granted, on condition
+that they should quit the bay and put out to sea, which they did
+accordingly. Although the wind was very unfavourable, Nueva stood out to
+sea likewise, which the enemy could hardly do, as their ships and paraws
+can only make sail with a fair wind. Notwithstanding all that had happened,
+Nueva was constrained to come to anchor close to the fleet of the enemy,
+and gave orders to keep strict watch during the night. At one time they
+were heard rowing towards our fleet, and it was supposed they intended
+setting our ships on fire; on which Neuva ordered to veer out more cable,
+to get farther off. Perceiving that the boats of the enemy continued to
+follow, he commanded a gun to be fired at them, on which they made off;
+and the wind coming off shore and somewhat fair, they made sail for
+Calicut.
+
+Nueva, after returning thanks to God for deliverance from his enemies,
+took his leave of the rajah of Cananor, and departed for Portugal, where
+he arrived in safety with all his ships[9].
+
+After the departure of Nueva from Cananor, one of his men named Gonsalo
+Pixoto, who had been made prisoner and carried to Calicut, came to
+Cananor with a message from the zamorin to Nueva, making excuses for all
+that had been done there to Cabral, and for the attempt against his own
+fleet at Cananor, and offering, if he would come to Calicut, to give him
+a full loading of spices, and sufficient hostages both for his safety and
+the performance of his promise.
+
+
+[1] It afterwards appears that one vessel only was destined for this
+    particular trade: Perhaps the second was meant for Quiloa.--E.
+
+[2] According to Astley, I. 49. the crews of these four vessels consisted
+    in all of 400 men.--E.
+
+[3] Called de Atayde by Astley.--E.
+
+[4] According to Astley, I. 49. Nueva discovered in this outward voyage
+    the Island of Conception, in lat. 8° S. But this circumstance does not
+    occur in Castaneda.--E.
+
+[5] Before arriving at Melinda, Nueva gave chase to two large ships
+    belonging to the Moors, one of which he took and burnt, but the other
+    escaped.--Astl. I. 49.
+
+[6] According to De Faria, Nueva took in a part of his loading; at Cochin,
+    with a view perhaps to preserve the credit of the Portuguese nation at
+    that place.--Astl. I. 50. a.
+
+[7] In the original this linen cloth is said to have been made of
+    _algadon_, a word left untranslated by Lichefild, probably _al-cotton_,
+    or some such Arabic word for cotton: The linen cloth, therefore, was
+    some kind of calico or muslin.--E.
+
+[8] According to De Faria, five great ships and nine paraws were sunk in
+    this action. De Barros says ten merchant ships and nine paraws.--Astl.
+    I. 50. c.
+
+[9] On this part of the voyage, Astley remarks, on the authority of De
+    Faria, that Nueva touched at the island of St Helena, which he found
+    destitute of inhabitants; though it was found peopled by De Gama in
+    his first voyage, only four years before. What is called the island of
+    St Helena in De Gamas first voyage, is obviously one of the head-lands
+    of St Elens bay on the western coast of Africa. The island of St
+    Helena is at a vast distance from the land, in the middle of the
+    Atlantic ocean.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_The Second Voyage of De Gama to India in 1502; being the Fourth made by
+the Portuguese to the East Indies_.
+
+As the king of Portugal felt it incumbent upon him to revenge the
+injurious and treacherous conduct of the zamorin, he gave orders to
+prepare a powerful fleet for that purpose; the command of which was at
+first confided to Pedro Alvares de Cabral, but, for certain just
+considerations was taken from him and bestowed on Don Vasco de la Gama.
+Every thing being ready, De Gama sailed from Lisbon on the 3d of March
+1502, having the command of thirteen great ships and two caravels[1]. The
+captains of this fleet were, Pedro Alonso de Aguilar, Philip de Castro,
+Don Lewis Cotinho, Franco De Conya, Pedro de Tayde, Vasco Carvallo,
+Vincente Sodre, Blas Sodre, the two Sodres being cousins-german to the
+captain-general, Gil Hernand, cousin to Laurenço de la Mina, Juan Lopes
+Perestrello, Rodrigo de Castaneda, and Rodrigo de Abreo; and of the two
+caravels Pedro Raphael and Diego Perez were commanders. In this powerful
+squadron they carried out the materials of a third caravel, which was
+directed to be put together at Mozambique, and of which Hernand Rodrigues
+Badarsas was appointed to be commander. Besides this first fleet of
+seventeen sail, a smaller squadron of five ships remained in preparation
+at Lisbon, which sailed on the 5th of May under the command of Stephen de
+la Gama[2].
+
+When De Gama had doubled the Cape of Good Hope, and was arrived at _the
+farther end of the currents_[3], he went himself with four of the
+smallest vessels to Sofala, sending on the remainder of the fleet to wait
+his arrival at Mozambique. This visit to Sofala was in consequence of
+orders from the king, to examine the situation of the city and to
+endeavour to find a proper situation for a fort, that the Portuguese
+might monopolize the trade in gold at that place. He remained there
+twenty-five days, during which he settled a treaty of amity with the king,
+and had leave to establish a factory; after which mutual presents were
+interchanged, and De Gama departed for Mozambique. In going out of the
+river from Sofala, one of the ships was lost, but all the men were saved.
+At Mozambique he made friendship with the king, who had proved so
+unfriendly in the first voyage, and even obtained leave to settle a
+factor with several assistants, who were left on purpose to provide
+victuals for such ships as might touch here on the voyage to or from
+India. Here likewise the caravel destined for that purpose was set up and
+provided with ordnance and a sufficient crew, and was left for the
+protection of the factory. On leaving Mozambique, De Gama sailed for
+Quiloa, having orders to reduce the king of that place to become
+tributary, as a punishment for his unfriendly conduct towards Cabral. On
+his arrival in that port, Ibrahim the king came on board to visit the
+admiral, afraid of being called to account for the injuries he had done
+to Cabral. De Gama, knowing that he was not to be trusted, threatened to
+make him a prisoner under the hatches, if he did not immediately agree to
+pay tribute to the king of Portugal[4]. The king from fear engaged to pay
+2000 miticals of gold yearly, and gave one Mehemed Aleones, a principal
+man among the Moors whom he hated, as an hostage for the payment. The
+reason of his dislike to Mehemed was this: Ibrahim was himself an usurper,
+having seized the government in prejudice to the right heir, and was
+afraid that Mehemed intended to dethrone him. When the king found himself
+at liberty, in consequence of this arrangement, he refused to send the
+promised tribute, in hope that De Gama might put the hostage to death, by
+which means he might get rid of his enemy: But the Moor, on finding the
+tribute did not come, was fain to pay the same himself, by which means he
+procured his own liberty. While at Quiloa, the fleet was joined by the
+squadron of five ships under Stephen de Gama.
+
+Leaving Quiloa, De Gama proceeded with the whole fleet for Melinda, where
+he took in water and visited the king[5]. Going from thence for India,
+and being arrived off Mount Dely, to the north of Cananor, he met a ship
+belonging to the Moors of Mecca, and bound for Calicut, which was taken
+by our men after a stout resistance[6]. When the ship surrendered, De
+Gama went on board and commanded the owners and all the principal Moors
+to come before him, whom he ordered to produce all their goods on pain of
+being thrown overboard. They answered that they had nothing to produce,
+as all their goods were in Calicut; on which De Gama ordered one of them
+to be bound hand and foot and thrown into the sea. The rest were
+intimidated by this procedure, and immediately delivered up every thing
+belonging to them, which was very valuable; all of which was committed to
+the charge of Diego Hernando Correa, the factor appointed for conducting
+the trade at Cochin, by whose directions they were transported into one
+of the Portuguese ships. De Gama ordered all the children belonging to
+the Moors to be taken on board one of his own ships, and vowed to make
+them all friars in the church of our Lady at Belem, which he afterwards
+did[7]. All the ordinary merchandize belonging to the Moors was divided
+among his own men; and when all the goods were removed, he ordered
+Stephen de la Gama to confine the Moors under the hatches, and to set the
+ship on fire, to revenge the death of the Portuguese who were slain in
+the factory at Calicut. Soon after this was done, the Moors broke open
+the hatches, and quenched the fire; on which the admiral ordered Stephen
+de Gama to lay them, aboard. The Moors rendered desperate by this inhuman
+treatment, defended themselves to the utmost, and even threw firebrands
+into our ship to set it on fire. Night coming on, Stephen had to desist,
+but was ordered to watch the Moorish ship carefully that it might not
+escape during the dark, and the Moors all night long were heard calling
+on Mahomet to deliver them out of the hands of the Christians. When day
+appeared, the admiral again ordered Stephen de la Gama to set the ship on
+fire, which he did accordingly, after forcing the Moors to retreat into
+the poop. Some of the Moors leapt into the sea with hatchets in their
+hands, and endeavoured to swim to our boats; but all of these were slain
+in the water by our people, and those that remained in the ship were all
+drowned, as the vessel sunk. Of 300 Moors, of whom thirty were women, not
+one escaped alive; and some of our men were hurt.
+
+De Gama came soon afterwards to Cananor, where he sent on shore the
+ambassadors, and gave them a message for the king, informing him of his
+arrival, and craving an audience. Upon this the rajah ordered a platform
+of timber to be constructed, which projected a considerable way into the
+water, covered over with carpets and other rich cloths, and having a
+wooden house or pavilion at the end next the land, which was likewise
+covered like the bridge, and was meant for the place of meeting between
+the rajah and the admiral. The rajah came first to the pavilion, attended
+by 10,000 nayres, and with many trumpets and other instruments playing
+before him; and a number of the principal nayres were arranged on the
+bridge or platform, to receive the admiral in an honourable manner. The
+admiral came in his boat, attended by all: the boats of the fleet decked
+out with flags and streamers, carrying certain ordnance in their prows,
+and having many drums and trumpets making a very martial appearance. The
+admiral disembarked at the outer end of the platform, under: a general
+salute from the ordnance of the boats, and was accompanied by all his
+captains and a number of men well armed. There were carried before him
+two great basins of silver gilt, filled with branches of coral and other
+fine things that are esteemed valuable in India. The admiral was received
+at the head of the platform by the nayres placed there on purpose, and
+was conducted to the rajah, who waited; for him at the door of the
+pavilion, and welcomed him with an embrace. They then walked together
+into the pavilion, in which two chairs were placed out of compliment to
+the admiral, on one of which the rajah sat down, though contrary to his
+usual custom, and desired the admiral to be seated on the other. At this
+interview a treaty of friendship and commerce was settled, and a factory
+allowed to be established at Cananor. In consequence of this, the admiral
+gave orders for some of the ships to load here, while others were to do
+the same at Cochin[8].
+
+Having settled all things to his mind at Cananor and Cochin, the admiral
+proceeded with his fleet to the harbour of Calicut, where he took several
+paraws in which were about fifty Malabars who could not escape; but he
+forbore making any farther hostilities against the city, till he might
+see whether or not the zamorin would send him any message. Soon
+afterwards there came a boat with a flag to the admirals ship, a which
+was a person in the habit of a Franciscan friar, who was taken at first
+sight for one of those who had accompanied Ayres Correa, and who they
+supposed had remained a prisoner. On entering the ship, he saluted them,
+saying _Deo gratias_; but was immediately recognized as a Moor. He
+excused himself for coming in that disguise, to secure permission of
+getting on board, and said that he brought a message from the zamorin to
+the admiral, about settling a trade in Calicut. To this the admiral made
+answer, that he would by no means treat on this subject, unless the
+zamorin would previously satisfy him for all the goods which had been
+seized in the factory, when he consented to the death of Correa and the
+rest who were there slain. On this subject three days were spent
+ineffectually in messages between the zamorin and the admiral, as the
+Moors used every influence to prevent any friendly agreement. At length,
+perceiving that all these messages were only meant to gain time, the
+admiral sent notice to the zamorin that he would wait no longer than noon
+for his final answer, and if that were not perfectly satisfactory and in
+compliance with his just demands, he might be assured he would wage cruel
+war against him with fire and sword, and would begin with those of his
+subjects who were now prisoners in his hands. And, that the zamorin
+might not think these were only words of course, he called for an
+hour-glass, which he set down in presence of the Moorish messenger, saying
+that as soon as the sand had run out a certain number of times, he would
+infallibly put in execution all that he had threatened. All this, however,
+could not induce the zamorin to perform his promise; for he was of an
+inconstant and wavering disposition, and influenced by the counsels of
+the Moors. The outward shew he had made of peace was only feigned, or
+occasioned by the fear he had of seeing so great a fleet in his port,
+from which he dreaded to sustain great injury; but the Moors had now
+persuaded him into a contrary opinion, and had prevailed on him to break
+his word.
+
+When the time appointed by the admiral was expired, he ordered a gun to
+be fired, as a signal to the captains of his ships to hang up the poor
+Malabar prisoners, who had been distributed through the fleet. After they
+were dead, he ordered their hands and feet to be cut off and sent on
+shore in a paraw, accompanied by two boats well armed, and placed a
+letter in the paraw for the zamorin, written in Arabic, in which he
+signified that he proposed to reward him in this manner for his deceitful
+conduct and repeated breach of faith; and, in regard to the goods
+belonging to the king of Portugal which he detained, he would recover
+them an hundred fold[9]. After this, the admiral ordered three of his
+ships to be warped during the night as near as possible to the shore; and
+that these should fire next day incessantly on the city with all their
+cannon, by which vast injury was done, and the royal palace was entirely
+demolished, besides several other houses belonging to the principal
+inhabitants of the place. The admiral afterwards departed for Cochin,
+leaving Vincente Sodre with six well armed ships to command the coast,
+who was to remain in India when the rest of the fleet returned to
+Portugal, and was likewise directed to go upon a voyage of discovery to
+the straits of Mecca, and the coast of Cambaya[10].
+
+From Calicut the admiral sailed for Cochin; and immediately on his
+anchoring in that port, the rajah[11] sent on board certain hostages to
+remain as his sureties; and when the admiral landed, the rajah went in
+person to meet him. At this interview, the rajah delivered up to the
+admiral Stephen Gyl and others who had remained in his country, and the
+admiral presented a letter from the king of Portugal to the rajah,
+returning thanks for the kindness he had shewn to Cabral, and declaring
+his satisfaction at the settlement of a factory for trade at Cochin. The
+admiral also delivered a present from the king of Portugal to the rajah,
+consisting of a rich golden crown set with jewels, a gold enamelled
+collar, two richly wrought silver fountains, two pieces of figured arras,
+a splendid tent or pavilion, a piece of crimson satin, and another of
+sendal[12]; all of which the rajah accepted with much satisfaction. Yet,
+not knowing the use of some of these things, the admiral endeavoured to
+explain them; and particularly, ordered the pavilion to be set up to shew
+its use, under which a new treaty of amity was settled. The rajah
+appointed a house for the use of the Portuguese factory, and a schedule
+of prices were agreed upon, at which the various spices, drugs, and other
+productions of the country were to be delivered to the Portuguese factors,
+all of which were set down in writing in form of a contract. The rajah
+likewise delivered present for the king of Portugal, consisting of two
+gold bracelets set with precious stones, a sash or turban used by the
+Moors of cloth of silver two yards and a half long, two great pieces of
+fine Bengal cotton cloth, and a stone as large as a walnut taken from the
+head of an animal called _bulgoldolf_, which is exceedingly rare, and is
+said to be an antidote against all kipds of poison[13]. A convenient
+house being appointed for a factory, was immediately taken possession of
+by Diego Hernandez as factor, Lorenzo Moreno, and Alvaro Vas as clerks,
+and several other assistants.
+
+While the ships were taking in their cargoes at Cochin, a message was
+brought to the admiral from the zamorin, engaging, if he would return to
+Calicut, to make a complete restitution of every thing that had been
+taken from the Portuguese, and that a treaty of friendship and commerce
+would be immediately arranged between them. After considering this
+message, the admiral ordered the messenger to prison, meaning to take
+revenge on him in case the zamorin should prove deceitful in this
+instance as he had already been in many others[14]. After this precaution,
+he went to Calicut, more for the purpose of endeavouring to recover the
+merchandize, than from any expectation of procuring the friendship of the
+zamorin. For this reason he took only his own ship[15], leaving Stephen
+de Gama in the command at Cochin in his absence. The captains of the
+fleet were much averse to this rashness; yet could not persuade him to
+take a larger force, as he said he would be sufficiently protected by the
+squadron of Vincente Sodre, which was cruizing on the coast, whom he
+could join on any emergency. On his arrival at Calicut, the zamorin
+immediately sent notice that he would satisfy him next day for all the
+goods which had been taken from Cabral, and would afterwards renew the
+trade and settle the factory on a proper footing. But as soon as he
+understood that the admiral had come with so small a force, he commanded
+thirty-four paraws to be got in readiness with all expedition, for the
+purpose of taking his ship. And so unexpectedly did these assail him,
+that the admiral was forced to cut one of his cables and make out to
+seaward, which he was fortunately enabled to do, as the wind came off
+from the land. Yet the paraws pursued him so closely, that he must
+infallibly have been taken, if it had not been for the squadron of Sodre
+making its appearance, on sight of which the paraws gave over the chase
+and retired to Calicut.
+
+On his return to Cochin, die admiral immediately ordered the messenger of
+the zamorin to be hanged[16]. The failure of this treacherous attempt
+against De Gama gave much concern to the zamorin; who now resolved to try
+if he could induce the rajah of Cochin to refuse a loading to the
+Portuguese, and to send away their factory from his port. With this view
+he transmitted a letter to that prince, in the following terms:
+
+"I am informed that you favour the Christians, whom you have admitted
+into your city and supplied with goods and provisions. It is possible you
+may not see the danger of this procedure, and may not know how
+displeasing it is to me. I request of you to remember the friendship
+which has hitherto subsisted between us, and that you now incur my
+displeasure for so small a matter in supporting these Christian robbers,
+who are in use to plunder the countries belonging to other nations. My
+desire is, therefore, that for the future you may neither receive them
+into your city, nor give them spices; by which you will both do me a
+great pleasure, and will bind me to requite your friendship in whatever
+way you may desire. I do not more earnestly urge these things at the
+present, being convinced you will comply without further entreaty, as I
+would do for you in any matter of importance."
+
+The rajah of Cochin answered in the following terms: That he knew not how
+to expel the Christians from his city, whom he had received as friends,
+and to whom he had passed his word for trade and amity. He denied that
+his friendly reception of the Christians could be construed as any
+offence to the zamorin, as it was the custom in the ports of Malabar to
+favour all merchants who resorted thither for trade; and declared his
+resolution to maintain his engagements inviolate to the Portuguese, who
+had brought great sums of gold and silver, and large quantities of
+merchandize into his dominions in the course of their trade. The zamorin
+was much offended by this answer of the rajah of Cochin; to whom he wrote
+a second time, advising him earnestly to abandon the Portuguese if he had
+any respect for his own welfare. The rajah of Cochin was not to be moved,
+either by the persuasions or threatening of the zamorin, and sent a reply
+to his second letter, in which he declared he should never be induced to
+commit a base or treacherous action by fear of the consequences, and was
+resolved to persist in maintaining his treaty of trade and amity with the
+Portuguese. Finding that he could not prevail on the rajah of Cochin to
+concur with him, he commanded twenty-nine large ships to be fitted out in
+order to assail the Portuguese fleet when on its return homewards,
+expecting that he should be able to destroy them with more ease when
+fully laden.
+
+The rajah of Cochin gave no intimation to the admiral of the letters and
+messages which had been interchanged between him and the zamorin, until
+he went to take leave; at which time, he declared he would hazard the
+loss of his dominions to serve the king of Portugal. The admiral, after
+many expressions of gratitude for his friendly disposition and honourable
+regard for his engagements, assured him that the king his master would
+never forget the numerous demonstrations he had given of friendship, and
+would give him such assistance as should not only enable him to defend
+his own dominions, but to reduce other countries under his authority. He
+desired him not to be in fear of the zamorin, against whom there should
+henceforwards be carried on so fierce war, that he would have enough of
+employment in defending himself, instead of being able to attack others.
+In this the general alluded to the aid which the rajah might expect from
+the ships that were to remain in India under the command of Vincent Sodre.
+All this conversation took place in presence of many of the principal
+nayres, of which circumstance the rajah was much pleased, as he knew
+these people were in friendship with the Moors, and had opposed the grant
+of a factory to us at Cochin[17].
+
+Having completed the loading of ten ships, the admiral sailed from Cochin
+on his homeward-bound voyage; and when about three leagues from Pandarane,
+he descried the Moorish fleet of twenty-nine large ships coming towards
+him. After consulting with the captains of his fleet, and the wind being
+favourable for the purpose, he immediately bore down to engage them. The
+ships commanded by Vincente Sodre, Pedro Raphael, and Diego Perez, being
+prime sailers, closed up first with the enemy, and immediately attacked
+two of the largest ships of the Moors. Sodre fought with one of these
+alone, and Raphael and Perez assailed the other. Almost on the first
+onset, great numbers of the enemies were so dismayed that they leapt into
+the sea to escape by swimming. On the coming up of De Gama with the rest
+of the fleet, all the enemies ships made off as fast as they could
+towards the shore, except those two which were beset at the first, and
+were unable to escape, which were accordingly taken possession of. De
+Gama, considering that all his ships were richly laden, would not pursue
+the flying enemy, being afraid he might lose some of his ships on the
+shoals; but our men went in their boats and slew about 300 of the Moors
+who had endeavoured to save themselves by swimming from the two captured
+ships. These vessels were accordingly discharged of their cargoes; which
+consisted of great quantities of rich merchandize, among which were six
+great jars of fine earthen ware, called porcelain, which is very rare and
+costly and much admired in Portugal; four large vessels of silver, and
+many silver perfuming pans; also many spitting basons of silver gilt: But
+what exceeded all the rest, was a golden idol of thirty pounds weight,
+with a monstrous face. The eyes of this image were two very fine emeralds.
+The vestments were of beaten gold, richly wrought and set with precious
+stones; and on the breast was a large carbuncle or ruby, as large as the
+coin called a crusado, which shone like fire.
+
+The goods being taken out, the two ships were set on fire, and the
+admiral made sail for Cananor, where the rajah gave him a house for a
+factory, in which Gonzalo Gill Barbosa was settled as factor, having
+Sebastian Alvarez and Diego Godino as clerks, Duarte Barbosa as
+interpreter, and sundry others as assistants, in all to the number of
+twenty. The rajah undertook to protect these men and all that might be
+left in the factory, and bound himself to supply lading in spices to all
+the ships of the king of Portugal at certain fixed prices[18]. In return
+for these favourable conditions, the admiral engaged on behalf of the
+king of Portugal to defend the rajah in all wars that might arise from
+this agreement; conditioning for peace and friendship between the rajahs
+of Cochin and Cananor, and that the latter should give no aid to any one
+who might make war upon the former, under the pain of forfeiting the
+friendship of the Portuguese. After this, the admiral gave orders to
+Vincente Sodre to protect the coast with his squadron till the month of
+February; and if any war should break out or seem probable between the
+zamorin and Trimumpara, he was to winter in Cochin for the protection of
+that city; otherwise he was to sail for the straits of the Red Sea, to
+make prize of all the ships belonging to Mecca that traded to the Indies.
+
+All these matters being properly arranged, De Gama departed from Cananor
+for Portugal on the 20th December 1502[19]; with thirteen ships richly
+laden, three of which had taken in their cargoes at Cananor, and the
+other ten at Cochin. The whole fleet arrived in safety at Mozambique,
+where the ship commanded by Stephen de Gama having sprung a great leak,
+was unladen and laid on shore to be repaired. Seven days after their
+departure from Mozambique, the ship commanded by Lewis Cotinho sprung a
+great leak, and they were forced to endeavour to return to Mozambique to
+repair her; but, the wind being contrary, they had to do this in a creek
+on the coast. Continuing their voyage, they were assailed by a sudden
+tempest off Cape Corientes, in which the ship commanded by Stephen de
+Gama had her sails all split by the storm, owing to which she was
+separated from the fleet, and no more seen till six days after the
+arrival of the admiral at Lisbon, when she came in with her mast broken.
+The storm having abated, during which the fleet took shelter under the
+lee of Cape Corientes, the admiral prosecuted his voyage to Lisbon, and
+arrived safe at Cascais on the 1st September 1503. All the noblemen of
+the court went to Cascais to receive him honourably, and to accompany him
+to the presence of the king. On his way to court, he was preceded by a
+page carrying a silver bason, in which was the tribute from the king of
+Quiloa. The king received him with great honour, as he justly merited for
+his services in discovering the Indies, and in settling factories at
+Cochin and Cananor, to the great profit of the kingdom; besides the great
+fame and honour which redounded to the king, as the first sovereign who
+had sent to discover the Indies, of which he might make a conquest if he
+were so inclined. In reward for these brilliant services, the king made
+him admiral of the Indies, and likewise gave him the title of Lord of
+Videgueyra, which was his own.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Note.--As De Gama did not return again to India till the year 1524, which
+is beyond the period contained in that part of Castaneda which has been
+translated by Lichefild, we shall have no occasion to notice him again in
+this part of our work. For this reason, it has been thought proper to
+give the following short supplementary account of his farther services in
+India.
+
+"In 1524, Don Vasco De Gama, now Count of Videgueyra, was appointed
+viceroy of India by John III. king of Portugal, and sailed from Lisbon
+with fourteen ships, carrying 3000 fighting men. Three were lost during
+the voyage, with all the men belonging to two of them. While in the Gulf
+of Cambaya, in a dead calm, the ships were tossed about in so violent a
+manner that all onboard believed themselves in imminent danger of
+perishing, and began to consider how they might escape. One man leapt
+over-board, thinking to escape by swimming, but was drowned; and such as
+lay sick of fevers were cured by the fright. The viceroy, who perceived
+that the commotion was occasioned by the effects of an earthquake, called
+aloud to his people, _courage my friends, for the sea trembles from fear
+of you who are on it_. To make some amends for the misfortunes of the
+voyage, Don George de Meneses, one of the captains, took a large ship
+belonging to Mecca, worth 60,000 crowns, a large sum in those days. After
+his arrival at Goa, the viceroy visited some forts, and issued the
+necessary orders for regulating the affairs of his government; but he had
+not time to put any of his great designs into execution, as he died on
+Christmas eve, having only held the government of Portuguese India for
+three months. De Gama is said to have been of middle stature, with a
+ruddy complexion, but somewhat gross. His character was bold, patient
+under fatigue, well fitted for great undertakings, speedy in executing
+justice, and terrible in anger. In fine, he was admirably fitted for all
+that was entrusted to his conduct, as a discoverer, a naval and military
+commander, and as viceroy. He is painted with a black cap, cloak, and
+breeches, edged with velvet, all slashed, through which appears the
+crimson lining. His doublet is of crimson satin, over which his armour is
+seen inlaid with gold. He was the sixth successive governor of India, and
+the second who had the rank of viceroy."--Astl I. 54. b.
+
+
+[1] According to Astley, much difference of opinion took place in the
+    council of Portugal, whether to continue the trade to India for which
+    it was requisite to employ force, or to desist entirely from the
+    attempt; but the profits expected from the trade, and the expectation
+    of propagating the Romish religion and enlarging the royal titles,
+    outweighed all considerations of danger; and it was resolved to
+    persist in the enterprize.--Astl. I. 50.
+
+[2] The distribution, of this force is somewhat differently related by
+    Astley. Ten ships only are said to have been placed under the
+    immediate command of Vasco de Gama; five ships under Vincente Sodre,
+    who had orders to scour the coast of Cochin and Cananor, and to watch
+    the mouth of the Red Sea, on purpose to prevent the Moors, or Turks
+    and Arabs, from trading to India; the third, as in the text, was under
+    Stephen de Gama, but with no particular destination mentioned; and the
+    whole were under the supreme command of Vasco de Gama, as captain-
+    general.--Astl. I. 50.
+
+[3] Such is the expression in the translation by Lichefild; but which I
+    suspect ought to have been, "and had passed Cape Corientes."--E.
+
+    In Astley, the following incident is mentioned: When off Cape Verd,
+    Vasco de Gama met a caravel bound from La Mina, on the western coast
+    of Africa, carrying much gold to Lisbon. He shewed some of this to the
+    ambassadors whom Cabral had brought from Cananor, and who were now on
+    their return to India. They expressed much surprize at this
+    circumstance; as they had been told by the Venetian ambassador at
+    Lisbon, that the Portuguese could not send their ships to sea without
+    assistance from Venice. This insinuation proceeded from envy, as the
+    Venetians were afraid of losing the lucrative trade with India which
+    they had long enjoyed through Egypt. --Astl. I. 51.
+
+[4] According to De Faria, De Gama began by cannonading the city of
+    Quiloa; but on the king consenting to become tributary, all was
+    changed to peace and joy--Astl. I. 51. a.
+
+[5] According to Astley, De Gama was forced beyond Melinda, and took in
+    water at a bay eight leagues farther on; and going thence towards
+    India, he spread out his fleet that no ship might escape him; in
+    consequence of which he took several, but was most severe on those
+    belonging to Calicut. --Astl. I. 51.
+
+[6] In Astley this ship is said to have belonged to the soldan of Egypt,
+    and was very richly laden, besides being full of Moors of quality, who
+    were going on pilgrimage to Mecca.--Astl. I. 51.
+
+[7] DeFaria says there were twenty of these children, whom De Gama caused
+    to be made Christian friars, to make amends for one Portuguese who
+    turned Mahometan.--Astl. I. 51. c.
+
+[8] Castaneda, or rather his translator Lichefild, gets somewhat confused
+    here, as if this factory were settled at Cochin, though the whole
+    previous scene is described as at Cananor.--E.
+
+[9] De Faria says the bodies of these unfortunate Malabars were thrown
+    into the sea, to be carried on shore by the tide.--Astl. I. 52. a.
+
+[10] By the straits of Mecca are here meant the straits of Bab-el-mandeb,
+    or the entrance from the Indian Ocean into the Red Sea; and by the
+    coast of Cambaya, what is now called Guzerat.--E.
+
+[11] The rajah or king of Cochin has already been named Triumpara, or
+    Trimumpara, on the authority of De Barros, De Faria, and other ancient
+    authors; yet De Faria, in other instances, calls him Uniramacoul--Astl.
+    I. 52. b.
+
+[12] It is difficult to say what may have been meant by this last article.
+    In old French writings _Rouge comme Sendal_ means very high red, or
+    scarlet; from which circumstance, this may have been a piece of
+    scarlet satin or velvet.--E.
+
+[13] Of the animal called bulgoldolf in the text we have no knowledge,
+    nor of this stone of wonderful virtue; but it may possibly refer to
+    the long famed bezoar, anciently much prized, but now deservedly
+    neglected.--E.
+
+[14] According to De Faria, this messenger was a bramin, who left his son
+    and nephew at Cochin as hostages, and accompanied De Gama to Calicut,
+    where he carried various messages between the zamorin and the admiral.
+    --Astl. I. 53. b.
+
+[15] De Faria says he was accompanied by a caravel.--Astl. 1.53. b.
+
+[16] The son and nephew of the messenger, according to De Faria.--Astl. I.
+    53. c.
+
+[17] In addition to the narrative of Castaneda, De Barros, Maffi, and De
+    Faria relate, that ambassadors came to De Gama while at Cochin from
+    the Christian inhabitants in Cranganore and that neighbourhood, who
+    they said amounted to 30,000. They represented, that they knew he was
+    an officer of the most Catholic king in Europe, to whom they submitted
+    themselves; in testimony of which, they delivered into his hands the
+    rod of justice, of a red colour, tipped with silver at both ends, and
+    about the length of a sceptre, having three bells at the top. They
+    complained of being much oppressed by the idolaters; and were
+    dismissed by De Gama with promises of a powerful and speedy
+    assistance.--Astl. I. 53. d.
+
+[18] De Faria alleges that the persons who were appointed to settle
+    matters relative to trade at this port, differed much upon the price
+    of spices: on which occasion many threatening messages were sent to
+    the rajah, who at length through fear complied with all the demands of
+    the Portuguese. He says that the rajahs of Cochin and Cananor were as
+    refractory and adverse at first as the zamorin; and that when De Gama
+    arrived at Cochin, the three princes combined to make him winter there
+    by fraud, and joined their fleets to destroy him. That on the failure
+    of this combination, a durable peace was made with Trimumpara; and the
+    rajah of Cananor, fearing the Portuguese might not return to his port,
+    sent word to De Gama that he was ready to comply with all his demands,
+    --Astl. I. 54, a.
+
+[19] In Castaneda this date is made 1503; but from an attentive
+    consideration of other dates and circumstances in that author, this
+    must have been a typographical error.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Transactions of the Portuguese in India, from the departure of De Gama
+in December 1502, to the arrival of Alonzo de Albuquerque in 1503._
+
+As soon as the zamorin was assured of the departure of De Gama for Europe,
+he determined on putting his threats in execution against the rajah of
+Cochin, for which purpose he gathered an army at the village of Panani,
+not far from Cochin[1]. This was soon known to the inhabitants of Cochin,
+who were exceedingly afraid of the great power of the zamorin, and were
+much dissatisfied with their sovereign for incurring the displeasure of
+that prince out of respect to the Christians, whom they inveighed against
+with much bitterness on all occasions, and openly insulted wherever they
+were seen. Some that were in high credit with the rajah said openly, that
+as the zamorin was much more powerful than their state, our men ought to
+be delivered up to him, as the war was entirely on our account, for whom
+the kingdom ought not to be put in hazard. But the rajah, much offended
+at these people, declared that he was resolved to defend the Portuguese
+against the zamorin, trusting that God would favour him in so just a
+cause. Yet many of his subjects were much inclined to have seized the
+Portuguese belonging to the factory, but durst not, as the rajah gave
+them a place of considerable strength to dwell in, and appointed a guard
+for their security.
+
+At this time Vincente Sodre arrived with his squadron in the bay of
+Cochin, after having done much damage on the coast of Calicut, both by
+land and sea. The Portuguese head factor sent Laurenzo Moreno to inform
+Sodre of the preparations which were making by the zamorin for the attack
+of Cochin, and requiring him in the name of the king of Portugal to land
+with his men for its defence. But Sodre answered, that his orders were to
+defend the sea and not the land; for which reason, if the zamorin had
+prepared to attack Cochin by sea, he would certainly have defended it;
+but as the war was to be carried on by land, he could not interfere, and
+the rajah must defend himself. The factor sent a second message,
+entreating him, in the name of God and on his allegiance to the king of
+Portugal, not to abandon the factory in this state of danger, as the
+power of the rajah was inadequate to defend Cochin against the zamorin;
+and as the sole object of the war was for the destruction of the factory
+and the ruin of the Portuguese trade, it certainly was his duty, as
+captain-general for the king of Portugal in these seas, both to defend
+the factory and to give every assistance in his power to the rajah. But
+Sodre was immoveable, pretending that he had been ordered to discover the
+Red Sea, where he expected to make many rich prizes, and set sail from
+Cochin for Cape Guardafui, preferring the hope of riches to his duty in
+defending the factory of Cochin.
+
+The zamorin collected his army, as already mentioned, at the village of
+Panani, where, besides his own subjects and allies, several of the
+principal subjects of the rajah of Cochin joined his standard, deserting
+their own sovereign, and carrying along with them all the power they were
+able to muster: Among these were the caimalls or governors of Chirapipil
+and Cambalane, and of the large island which is opposite to the city of
+Cochin. At this place, the zamorin made a long speech to his assembled
+chiefs, in which he endeavoured to justify his enmity to the Portuguese,
+whom he represented as thieves, robbers, and pirates, and as having first
+commenced hostilities against him without cause. He contrasted the quiet
+and friendly conduct of the Moors, who had traded for 600 years with
+Malabar, having never done injury to any in all that time, and had
+greatly enriched the country, and had raised his city of Calicut to be
+the greatest emporium in all the Indies: Whereas the Portuguese had taken
+and destroyed his ships, made his ambassadors prisoners, insisted on
+having their ships laden before those belonging to the Moors, had taken a
+ship of the Moors, burnt ten of his ships in his own harbour, had
+destroyed his city and forced him to escape for safety from his palace;
+taking law and vengeance for pretended grievances into their own hands,
+instead of applying regularly to him for redress. And, since the rajah of
+Cochin was fully informed of all these things, yet persisted in favouring
+the Portuguese in despite of all remonstrances, he had resolved to make
+war upon him, to deprive him of his dominions, and to drive these
+Christian intruders out of India.
+
+This address gave much satisfaction to all the assembled chiefs, and most
+especially to the lord of Repelim, who entertained a rooted enmity
+against the rajah of Cochin, who had dispossessed him of an island called
+Arrnuul. The only person who opposed the zamorin on this occasion was
+Nambeadarin[2], who was brother and next heir to the zamorin. He strongly
+urged the impolicy of driving the Christians from Malabar, to which
+merchants resorted from all places of the world, seeing that the
+Portuguese had made richer presents to the zamorin, than he had ever
+received before, and had brought much gold and silver into the country
+for the purchase of commodities, which was not usually done by such as
+came to make war. He represented the attempt of the hostages to escape
+who had been given for the safety of the Portuguese chief, and whom the
+zamorin was pleased to call ambassadors, as the first cause of jealousy
+and distrust; yet they were afterwards reconciled, and took the large
+Moorish ship at the desire of the zamorin, to whom they presented the
+great elephant. He said their conduct in trade and otherwise while in
+Calicut was quite satisfactory to all except the Moors, who were envious
+against them for interfering in their trade, and accused them falsely of
+taking pepper against the will of the owners, which in fact they had done
+themselves to prevent the Christians from loading their ships; nay that
+this was so evident that even the zamorin had licensed the Portuguese to
+take the pepper from the Moorish vessels. After which the Moors had risen
+against them, slaying their men and seizing all their goods. Yet, after
+all these outrages, they had given the zamorin a whole day in which to
+offer reparation, and had not sought revenge of their injuries
+treacherously like the Moors. That he saw no cause of going to war
+against the rajah of Cochin for receiving the Portuguese into his city
+like any other merchants who might frequent his harbour, as had likewise
+been done by the rajahs of Cananor and Koulan, who would not have done so
+if they had been robbers and pirates. And if the zamorin meant to drive
+the Portuguese from the Indies, besides making war on Cochin, it would be
+necessary for him to do the same against Canauor and all the other
+princes on the coast.
+
+The zamorin was a good deal staggered by the discourse of Nambendarin,
+who had much credit and authority with him; insomuch, that it is thought
+he would have desisted from prosecuting the war, if it had not been for
+the Moors and the caymals, who represented that it would be a great
+disgrace to his character to recede after the assemblage of so great an
+army, and that it was to be expected the rajah of Cochin might now agree
+from fear to do what the zamorin had desired him. The zamorin then
+desired his sorcerers to point out a fortunate day for marching forward
+with his army, which they did accordingly, and promised him an assured
+victory. With this assurance, on which he placed great reliance, the
+zamorin departed from Panani, and took possession of Repelim, which is
+four leagues from Cochin.
+
+The rajah of Cochin had regular intelligence of all that passed in the
+camp of the zamorin by means of spies, and was in great trouble
+respecting the event, not having sufficient force for his defence, as
+many on whom he most relied had gone over to the enemy. Even those who
+remained served against their inclination, more especially the
+inhabitants of Cochin, who abhorred our people, and said openly that it
+were proper the rajah should either deliver them up to the zamorin or
+send them away from Cochin, to avoid the impending war. Many of the
+inhabitants of Cochin deserted the place for fear of the consequences.
+The members of the Portuguese factory were much alarmed by all these
+circumstances, and requested permission from the rajah to withdraw to
+Cananor, where they might remain in safety till the arrival of the next
+fleet from Portugal; hoping by this means to remove the cause of war, and
+to satisfy the subjects of the rajah. Trimumpara was displeased at this
+request, as not reposing sufficient confidence in his word, and declared
+he would rather forfeit his kingdom, and even his life, than deliver them
+up to the zamorin or any other who sought to injure them; and that,
+although he might lose Cochin in the war, there still were places of
+sufficient strength in which to keep them safe till reinforcements should
+arrive from Portugal. That although the zamorin had a great army, yet
+victory did not always follow numbers, as a few valiant men were often
+victorious over great odds, especially having justice on their side. He
+therefore desired the factory to remain, and to pray God to give him the
+victory. The Portuguese now offered to give him such aid as their small
+number would allow; but he declined allowing them to expose themselves to
+any danger on the present occasion, as his credit depended upon the
+preservation of their lives, that they might witness, for his faithful
+adherence to the treaty of amity which he had formed with their nation.
+Upon this he placed them under the safeguard of certain naires in whom he
+had confidence. After this, the rajah called all his nobles into his
+presence, together with the chief naires, who were the cause of all the
+murmurs against the Portuguese, and addressed the assemblage to the
+following effect:
+
+"I am much concerned to find that truth and loyalty should be wanting
+among men of your quality. I do not wonder at the present misconduct of
+the lower orders, who are often constrained by their poverty and
+wretchedness to commit all manner of wickedness. But that naires, who
+have always been noted for fidelity, should desire me to forfeit the
+promise which I have made, to the captain-general in behalf of the
+Portuguese, to defend them to the utmost of my power against all violence
+as my own subjects, astonishes and distresses me beyond measure. Under
+these assurances of protection, which were given with your consent, these
+men were left in my city; and yet, because you see the zamorin coming
+against me with more men than I have, you would have me to break my
+promise. Were I so unjust, you of all men ought to abhor me. If you dwelt
+with any sovereign on the assurance of his word, how would you conceive
+of him, if he were to treat you as you would now have me to act by these
+Christians? Is it because you are afraid of the great power of the
+zamorin? Be assured it were better for us all to die in the discharge of
+our duty, and the preservation of our promise, than to live dishonoured.
+To me no evil can be greater than to break my word, nor can there be a
+greater dishonour to yourselves than to be the subjects of a false and
+treacherous king. These Christians have brought much profit to me and my
+country, and the zamorin might have kept them in his own city, if he had
+permitted their factory to settle there in peace. Were it his intention
+to drive the Christians out of India, and to make war on all who receive
+them into their dominions, he ought to have begun this war with the rajah
+of Cananor: But his cause of war is the envy he has conceived at seeing
+me benefited by the trade which he has lost through his own misconduct,
+and because he believes in his pride that I am unable to withstand. But I
+trust in God and the justness of my cause, that with your assistance, I
+shall obtain the victory, and shall be able to protect the Christians,
+and preserve my honour inviolate." This speech had great effect upon the
+assembled naires, who were astonished at the constancy and resolution of
+the rajah. They all therefore craved pardon for the fears they had
+entertained, and promised to live and die in his service. The rajah
+immediately called the factor and the rest of the Portuguese into his
+presence, to whom he gave an account of all that had taken place between
+him and the naires; and named before them the prince _Naramuhin_[3], his
+brother and next heir, as general of the army which was destined to act
+against the forces of the zamorin, commanding every one to obey him in
+every respect as if he were himself present. Naramuhin accordingly
+marched with 5500 naires, and entrenched himself at the ford which forms
+the only entry by land into the island of Cochin, and which is only knee-
+deep at low water.
+
+When the zamorin received notice of the army of Cochin having taken post
+at this ford, he was somewhat afraid, more especially as he knew
+Naramuhin was considered to be the bravest and most fortunate warrior in
+Malabar. He therefore made a fresh attempt to induce the rajah of Cochin
+to accede to his demands, of delivering up the Portuguese and their goods,
+otherwise threatening to conquer his dominions, and to put all the
+inhabitants to the sword. Although the rajah of Cochin was quite sensible
+of the inferiority of his military force, and was convinced what the
+zamorin threatened might readily happen, he yet determined to remain firm
+to his engagements, and sent the following answer:
+
+"If you had required with civility what you have proudly commanded me, I
+should not have esteemed your valour lessened by your courtesy: For with
+men of wisdom and power there is no need for insolent vaunts. I have not
+as yet so sinned against God, that I should humble myself to vain
+boasting, or think that he should grant you the victory over me and those
+brave men who fight on my side. In spite of all your pride, I trust even
+with the small number I have to defend me in my just quarrel, that I
+shall be enabled to overcome you and all my enemies. However much you may
+have practised deceit and injustice, it has ever been my rule to avoid
+shame and dishonour, and I will never consent to deliver up the
+Christians or their goods, which I have engaged to defend."
+
+The zamorin was much offended by this answer from the rajah of Cochin,
+and vowed to destroy his whole country in revenge: Leaving, therefore,
+the isle of Repelim on the last day of March, he entered on the
+territories of Cochin, yet refrained from doing any injury, as he now
+occupied those parts which belonged to the chieftains who had joined him
+against their own sovereign. On the 2d of March, the army of the zamorin
+made an attempt to force a passage by the ford which was defended by
+prince Naramuhin; yet, in spite of all his prodigious superiority of
+numbers, he was forced to retire with considerable loss. Disappointed in
+this first essay, the zamorin encamped close by the ford, and sent the
+lord of Repelim next day with a still stronger force than had been
+employed in the first assault, to attempt forcing the passage. He even
+joined several armed paraws in this attack; but Naramuhin made a resolute
+defence, in which he was bravely seconded by Laurenzo Moreno and several
+other Portuguese, and effectually resisted every effort of the zamorins
+troops, who were obliged to retreat with much loss. Several such assaults
+were made on the ford, in all of which the zamorin lost many men, and was
+constantly repulsed, insomuch that he became fearful of a sinister end to
+his unjust enterprise, and even repented of having begun the war. He sent,
+however, a fresh message to the rajah, requiring him to deliver up the
+Christians as a preliminary of peace. But the rajah replied, that as he
+had refused to do so unjust an action when he had some reason to dread
+the superior power of the zamorin, it was absurd to expect any such thing
+now, when the advantage in the war was evidently of his side. He then
+advised the zamorin to beware of continuing the war, as he would not now
+satisfy himself with defence, but even hoped to give him a signal
+overthrow. And this certainly had been the case, if the subjects of the
+rajah had not shamefully deserted him in this war and given assistance to
+the enemy. The zamorin almost despaired of success, and would have given
+over the enterprize, if he had not been advised by some of his chiefs to
+assail several other towns belonging to the dominions of Cochin, so as to
+distract the attention of Naramuhin, and to weaken his force by obliging
+him to send detachments for their defence. But that brave prince provided
+against every emergency, and made so judicious a disposition of his
+forces, that he repulsed every effort of the enemy, and slew many of
+their men.
+
+Foiled in every attempt with severe loss, by the bravery and excellent
+dispositions of Prince Naramuhin, the zamorin corrupted the paymaster of
+the troops of Cochin, who changed the usual order of payment which had
+been daily made in the camp, and obliged the soldiers to come up to
+Cochin for that purpose. Naramuhin was obliged to submit to this
+arrangement, by giving leave to the naires to go for their wages, yet
+charged them punctually to return to the camp before day. But the
+treacherous paymaster kept them waiting till after day-light, by which
+means the prince was left with very few troops to defend the ford. Taking
+advantage of this concerted stratagem, the zamorin made an assault upon
+the ford with his whole force by sea and land, and constrained Naramuhin
+to retire with his small band into a grove of palm trees, where he was
+surrounded by the whole army of Calicut, yet fought the whole day against
+such terrible odds with the utmost resolution, several times throwing his
+enemies into disorder, of whom many were slain. But at length,
+overpowered by numbers, he and two of his cousins who fought along with
+him were slain, together with most of his faithful followers.
+
+When this melancholy event was announced to the rajah of Cochin, he
+fainted from extreme grief, and was for some time thought to have
+actually expired. At this time, the naires were much exasperated against
+our men, to whom they attributed the overthrow and death of prince
+Naramuhin, and the desperate situation of their country, and seemed much
+inclined to have put the Portuguese to death, or to have delivered them
+up to the zamorin. On the recovery of the rajah, and learning the designs
+of his people against our men, he called the Portuguese into his presence;
+he gave them assurance that even this reverse of his affairs should not
+alter his resolution of protecting them, both against the zamorin and his
+own subjects. He then addressed his assembled naires, urging them not to
+stain his honour and their own by injuring the Portuguese, whom he and
+they had sworn to protect. He exhorted them to persevere honourably and
+bravely in defending their country and preserving their honour inviolate
+to the Christians, and comforted them with the assurance that the
+Portuguese fleet would soon arrive with sufficient reinforcements to
+drive out the zamorin and to restore him to his dominions. In the
+meantime, he proposed that they should retire with what force remained,
+into the isle of Vaipi, which was of difficult access; and where they
+could defend themselves till the arrival of the Portuguese fleet, more
+especially as the winter was at hand, which would stop the progress of
+the war for some time. The naires were astonished at the resolution of
+their sovereign, and promised faithfully to obey his commands in all
+things.
+
+The zamorin made a new attempt to shake the resolution of the rajah in
+his present adversity, by offering peace on condition of delivering up
+the Portuguese and their goods; which the rajah rejected with disdain as
+he had done all his former overtures. On this the zamorin gave orders to
+destroy the whole country with fire and sword, on which intelligence most
+of the inhabitants of Cochin withdrew to other places. There were at this
+time in Cochin two Milanese lapidaries belonging to the factory, named
+John Maria and Pedro Antonio, who had been brought to India by Vasco de
+Gama. These men deserted to the zamorin, to whom they conveyed
+intelligence of the consternation which reigned among the inhabitants of
+Cochin, and of the small number of men that remained with the rajah.
+These men also made offer to the zamorin to make ordnance for him
+resembling those of the Portuguese, which they afterwards did as will
+appear in the sequel of this history, and for which service they were
+highly rewarded. The zamorin now moved forwards with his army to take
+possession of Cochin, and was resisted for some time by the rajah, who
+was himself slightly wounded. But finding it impossible any farther to
+resist against such prodigious odds, he withdrew to the strong island of
+Vaipi, carrying all our men along with him and every thing belonging to
+our factory. The zamorin, on taking possession of the deserted city of
+Cochin, ordered it to be set on fire. He then sent a part of his army
+against the isle of Vaipi, which was valiantly defended by the rajah and
+his men and in which defence the members of our factory contributed to
+the best of their ability. But the winter coming on, and bad weather
+setting in, the zamorin was obliged to desist for the present season, and
+withdrew his army to Cranganor with a determination to renew the war in
+the ensuing spring, leaving a strong detachment in the island of Cochin,
+which he ordered to throw up entrenchments for their defence.
+
+After his shameful desertion of Cochin, Vincente Sodre went with his
+fleet towards the kingdom of Cambaya; meaning to capture the rich ships
+of the Moors which trade to India from the Red Sea. He there took five
+ships, in which in ready money only was found to the value of 200,000
+_perdaos_. Most of the Moors were slain in the battle, and the ships
+burnt. From Cambaya he sailed for Cape Guardafu; and as his ships were
+foul, he proposed to lay them aground to be careened at the islands of
+_Curia Muria_[4]. Sodre arrived there with his squadron on the 20th April
+1503; and though these islands were well inhabited by Moors, he resolved
+to venture on land, considering that these islanders were by no means
+warlike, and stood in fear of our men. The islanders accordingly behaved
+in a peaceable manner, and sold our people such provisions as they had to
+spare. Sodre laid one of his caravels aground for repair, on which he was
+informed by the Moors that their coast was subject to violent storms in
+the month of May, during which no ships were able to keep the sea, but
+were unavoidably driven on shore and wrecked. Wherefore they advised him
+strenuously to remove to the other side of the island, which would then
+be a sure defence against the storm, after which had blown over he might
+return to their part of the coast. Sodre made light of their advice,
+conceiving they meant him some harm; and told them that the ships of the
+Moors having only wooden anchors, might be easily driven ashore, whereas
+his anchors were of iron and would hold fast. Pedro Raphael, Hernan
+Rodriguez Badarsas, and Diego Perez were convinced of the council of the
+Moors being good, and therefore quitted these islands on the last day of
+April; but Sodre would not listen to their advice and remained with his
+brother at Curia Muria. According to the prediction of the Moors, a
+violent storm came on early in May, by which the two remaining ships were
+driven from their anchors and dashed to pieces. Vincente Sodre and his
+brother, with many others lost their lives, and nothing whatever was
+saved out of these two ships. The loss of these two brothers was
+considered as a punishment of Providence, for basely abandoning the rajah
+of Cochin and the factory in their imminent danger.
+
+Those who were saved returned towards Cochin to succour our people, and
+chose Pedro de Tayde[5] as their general. In their passage from Curia
+Muria towards Cochin, they encountered several severe storms, and were
+often in great danger of perishing. Being unable to reach Cochin on
+account of the winds, they were forced to take refuge in the island of
+Anchediva. A few days after their arrival, a ship came there from
+Portugal, commanded by Antonio del Campo, who had left Lisbon alone some
+time after Vasco de Gama, and had been much delayed on his voyage in
+consequence of the death of his pilot. He had encountered severe weather
+on the coast, and was forced after much trouble and danger to take refuge
+in Anchediva. The united squadron wintered in this island, where they
+suffered severe hardships from scarcity of provisions.
+
+
+[1] This army is said to have amounted to 50,000 men. Panani is six
+    leagues from Cochin.--Astl. I. 54.
+
+[2] This person is named Naubea Daring by Astley, and is said to have
+    been nephew to the zamorin.--Astl. I. 56.
+
+[3] In Astley this prince is called the nephew of the rajah of Cochin.--
+    Astl. I. 55.
+
+[4] These are a cluster of islands, otherwise called Chartan and Martan,
+    on the coast of Yemen, between the latitudes of 17° and 18° north.--E.
+
+[5] Of the four officers mentioned in the text, three are enumerated at
+    the commencement of the former voyage of De Gama as commanders of
+    separate vessels. The fourth, Badarsas, is not in that list of
+    captains, and may have been appointed captain of Vincente Sodres flag-
+    ship.--E.
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Voyage of Alonso and Francisco de Albuquerque to India in 1503; being
+the fifth of the Portuguese Expeditions to the East Indies._
+
+Is the year 1503, supposing that the admiral Don Vasco de Gama had quietly
+settled factories in Cochin and Cananor, the king of Portugal did not
+consider it necessary to send any great fleet to India. He therefore
+determined to send only six ships in two separate squadrons, under
+separate generals. Alonso de Albuquerque, who was afterwards governor-
+general or viceroy of India, commanded one of these squadrons, having
+under him as captains, Duarte Pacheco and Hernan Martinez Mascarennas, who
+is said to have died during the voyage. The other squadron, likewise of
+three ships, was under the command of Francisco de Albuquerque, cousin to
+Alonso, having as captains Nicholas Coello and Pedro Vas de la Vega, the
+former of whom sailed under De Gama in the first discovery of India. This
+latter squadron sailed from Lisbon fifteen days after the other, yet
+arrived first in India. Both squadrons encountered severe storms during
+the voyage, in which the ship commanded by De la Vega was lost. Francisco
+de Albuquerque, and Nicholas Coello, arrived at Anchediva in the month of
+August, where they found De Tayde and the other captains who had wintered
+there, as related in the former section. They here received notice of the
+war between the zamorin and the rajah of Cochin, and of the sinister
+events which had occurred at that place; for which reason Francisco stood
+over with the whole fleet, now consisting of six sail, to Cananor, where
+he expected to receive more exact intelligence of the state of affairs in
+Cochin. They were here received with great joy by the Portuguese factory;
+and even the rajah of Cananor came on board the generals ship in person,
+and gave him a distinct recital of what had happened at Cochin, and of the
+present situation of Triumpara.
+
+Alonso de Albuquerque lost no time in going to Cochin, where he arrived on
+the night of Saturday the 2d of September 1503. Immediately on his
+approach, the troops of Calicut who guarded the entrenchments thrown up by
+the zamorin, abandoned their posts in the island of Cochin and fled to
+Cranganor, according to orders to that effect from the zamorin, who had
+received notice of the arrival of our fleet at Cananor. On Sunday morning
+Francisco came to anchor close to Cochin, when he was joyfully received by
+the inhabitants, playing on various instruments of music, and was soon
+afterwards visited by the Portuguese factor, who brought him a message
+from the rajah. On the Monday morning, leaving his ships in good order,
+Francisco took several boats well armed, and went to the island of Vaipi
+to visit the rajah, ordering two caravels to follow for security, in case
+of any of the Calicut paraws making their appearance. The rajah received
+our general with infinite satisfaction, greeting them with the exclamation,
+Portugal! Portugal! as soon as our boats were within hail; which was
+answered by our people shouting out, Cochin! Cochin! and down with the
+zamorin! On landing, the rajah embraced Francisco de Albuquerque with
+tears in his eyes, saying he only desired to live till restored to his
+dominions, that his subjects might be satisfied of his just conduct in
+suffering so much for the service of the king of Portugal. In the name of
+that sovereign, Francisco gave hearty thanks to Triumpara for his fidelity,
+and promised him ample revenge on his enemies. And as his finances were
+much reduced, he made him a present of 10,000 crowns from the chest
+belonging to the expedition, to serve his present necessities, until he
+might be again able to draw the rents of his own dominions. This gift was
+exceedingly acceptable to the rajah, whose affairs were then at a very low
+ebb; and gave much satisfaction to the natives, who were by it greatly
+reconciled to the protection which their rajah had given to our men.
+
+The rajah was immediately brought back in triumph to Cochin, amid the
+joyful acclamations of his subjects, who henceforwards treated our men
+with esteem and respect. The news of the rajahs return to Cochin, and of
+the money which had been given him by our general, was speedily
+communicated to the zamorin; who, in expectation of the renewal of the war,
+sent orders to his caymals or governors on the frontiers towards Cochin to
+make every preparation for defence. On the very day on which the rajah
+returned to Cochin, Francisco de Albuquerque resolved to commence
+hostilities by an attack on the island directly over against Cochin, where
+he found the inhabitants quite unprepared and off their guard, as they had
+no idea of being so soon attacked: In this unprepared state, a great
+number of the Calicut troops were slain, and several of the towns on the
+island destroyed, after which the Portuguese returned to their ships
+without loss. Next day Francisco made a fresh assault on the same island
+with six hundred men, and was opposed by the caymal or governor for the
+zamorin, with a force of two thousand nayres, part of whom were spearmen,
+but the greater number armed with bows and arrows, and some with swords
+and targets. After some resistance, but in which none of them were hurt,
+our people made good their landing, and galled the Indians so sore with
+their cross-bows, that they soon fled. The Portuguese pursued quite across
+the island, and forced their enemies to continue their flight across the
+water, leaving many of their men behind both killed and wounded. Having
+now no enemy to oppose them in the island, the Portuguese laid it entirely
+waste, and burnt all the towns and villages it contained.
+
+Adjoining to this island there lay another, named _Charanaipin_[1], which
+belonged to a caymal who was subject to the rajah of Cochin, but had
+revolted to the zamorin at the commencement of the war. From some spies
+employed by the rajah of Cochin, it was understood that this caymal had a
+force of three thousand nayres, seven hundred of whom were archers, and
+forty were, armed with matchlocks[2]; besides which all their towns were
+well fortified with trenches. He had likewise several paraws provided with
+ordnance, with which he was supplied by the zamorin, and these were
+stationed in one of the harbours of the island, to defend it against the
+Portuguese. Notwithstanding all these preparations, of which he was well
+informed, Francisco Albuquerque went against this island the day after he
+had reduced the former, and commenced his attack against the harbour in
+which the paraws were stationed. The enemy were soon driven by our
+ordnance from their boats, yet many of them continued in the water up to
+their girdles to resist the landing of our troops, annoying them as much
+as possible with stones, spears, and arrows. They were at length driven
+from the water by our ordnance, but rallied again on the shore, and
+bravely resisted our people in landing for a long time. They were at
+length driven to take shelter in a grove of palm trees, in which they
+defended themselves for a short space, and were at the last driven to seek
+for safety in a disorderly flight, in which they were pursued by our men.
+In the pursuit, Pedro de Lares, who was constable to Francisco de
+Albuquerque, being separated from the rest, was attacked by three nayres
+all at once. One of these let fly an arrow which hit Pedro on his breast-
+plate but without hurting him; on which Pedro levelled his piece and shot
+him dead. The second nayre he likewise slew by another shot. The third
+nayre wounded him in the leg with a weapon called a _gomya_, and then
+endeavoured to run away, but Pedro killed him, with his sword. On the
+enemy being put to flight, Francisco divided his forces into three bodies,
+two of them Portuguese, and the third composed of nayres in the service of
+the rajah of Cochin, and marched all over the island plundering and
+burning the towns and villages without resistance.
+
+While thus employed, a considerable number of paraws arrived with
+reinforcements from Calicut, from which a powerful body of nayres landed
+in that part of the island where Duarte Pacheco happened to be posted with
+a very inferior force, and had assuredly destroyed him and his men, but
+that Francisco de Albuquerque came very opportunely to his aid. Finding
+greater resistance than he expected, and fearing lest the caymal might
+attack him in the rear, while engaged in front with the nayres of Calicut,
+Francisco detached a part of his troops under Nicholas Coello, assisted by
+Antonio del Campo and Pedro de Tayde, to assault the residence of the
+caymal, who was slain bravely fighting in its defence. At this place one
+of our men was slain and eighteen wounded. In the mean time, Francisco de
+Albuquerque and Duarte Pacheco defeated the reinforcements from Calicut,
+and forced them to take refuge on board their paraws, leaving many of
+their men slain and wounded on the shore. After this signal victory, by
+which the greater part of the three thousand nayres belonging to the
+caymal and many of those from Calicut were slain, Francisco de Albuquerque
+conferred the honour of knighthood on several of his officers who had
+signalized themselves on the occasion. He then wasted the whole island
+with fire and sword.
+
+Francisco determined in the next place, to attack the country of the lord
+of Repelim, for which purpose he departed with his troops by water from
+Cochin, and reached a town in that territory, four leagues from Cochin,
+about eight o'clock next morning. Near two thousand nayres, five hundred
+of whom were armed with bows and arrows, were stationed, on the beach of
+the isle of Repelim to repel this attack; but were soon forced by our
+ordnance to retire into a grove of palms, on which Francisco landed with
+his troops, the van being led by Nicholas Coello. The enemy resisted for
+some time under the shelter of the trees, and wounded some of our people;
+but were at length forced to take to flight, after losing a good many of
+their men, who were shot by our cross-bows and _calivers_[3]. Our troops
+followed the nayres, who took refuge in the towns of the island, in which
+much greater slaughter was made of the enemy than in the field, as they
+were crowded together and more exposed to our shot. On taking possession
+of the town, Francisco gave it up to be plundered by the nayres of Cochin,
+who assisted him on this expedition, that they might not consider the
+conduct of the Portuguese on this occasion proceeded from any inclination
+for plundering the country, but from a desire to revenge the injuries
+which had been done to their own rajah.
+
+On his return from this victory, Francisco was joyfully received by the
+rajah of Cochin, who desired him to desist from any farther operations
+against the enemy, as he considered himself sufficiently revenged. But
+Francisco requested his permission to continue the war, as he was still
+unsatisfied till he had taken effectual vengeance on the zamorin, and
+accounted it no trouble to fight in the service of the rajah. He seized,
+however, the present opportunity of the high favour in which he stood with
+the rajah, to solicit permission for constructing a fort at Cochin, for
+the protection of the Portuguese factory during the absence of the ships.
+This request was immediately complied with; the rajah even offered to be
+at the sole charge, and Francisco lost no time in proceeding to construct
+the intended fort. As there were neither stones, lime, nor sand to be
+procured, it was necessary to build the castle of timber; which the rajah
+ordered to be immediately provided for the purpose, and brought to the
+spot appointed, which was close to the river side, as best adapted for
+resisting the assault of the Calicut fleet in any future attempt against
+Cochin. The rajah sent likewise a great number of his subjects to carry on
+the work; saying that our people had already had enough to do in the
+operations of the war: But Francisco commanded our people to work in
+constructing the fortifications, the foundations of which were laid on the
+26th September 1503. The inhabitants of Cochin were astonished at the
+diligence with which our people laboured at this work, saying there were
+no such men in the world, as they were equally good at all things.
+
+On the 30th September, four days after the commencement of the fort,
+Alonso de Albuquerque arrived with his ships at Cochin, having been
+delayed on his voyage by severe storms and contrary winds, yet brought all
+his men with him in excellent health. Francisco was much pleased at his
+arrival; and a portion of the fort being allotted to those newly arrived,
+it was soon finished. Though built of timber, this castle was as strong
+and handsome, as if it had been constructed of stone and lime. It was of a
+square form, each face being eighteen yards, with bulwarks or bastions at
+each corner mounted with ordnance. The walls were made of two rows of palm
+trees and other strong timber, firmly set in the ground, and bound
+together with iron hoops and large nails, the space between the two rows
+of timber being rammed full of earth and sand, and the whole surrounded by
+a ditch always full of water[4]. The day after this fort was finished,
+which was named Manuel in honour of the king of Portugal, the captain-
+general with all his people made a solemn procession, in which the vicar
+of the fort bore the crucifix under a canopy carried by the captains of
+the fleet, preceded by trumpets and other instruments of music. The fort
+was solemnly blessed, and consecrated by the celebration of mass; after
+which friar Gaston preached a sermon, in which he exhorted his hearers to
+be thankful to God, who had permitted the inhabitants of the small western
+kingdom of Portugal to construct a fortress in this distant region, among
+so many enemies of the Catholic faith. He expressed a hope that this might
+be the forerunner of many other establishments of a similar nature, to the
+advancement of the true religion among the heathen, and the glory of
+Portugal. He likewise desired his hearers to keep always in mind the high
+obligations they owed to the rajah for the good service he had rendered to
+the king of Portugal on this occasion. A faithful report was carried to
+the rajah of this part of the discourse, who was much gratified, and gave
+thanks for the same to the two generals.
+
+After completing the fort, the Portuguese renewed the war, and made an
+attack on two towns belonging to the lord of Repelim on the coast, about
+five leagues from Cochin, having learned from spies that they were but
+slightly garrisoned. On this expedition the generals took a body of seven
+hundred men, and departing from Cochin about two hours before day, they
+arrived at their destination about nine o'clock next morning. These towns
+had a population of six thousand people, besides children, and were only
+defended by three hundred nayres, all bowmen. Alonso de Albuquerque with
+part of the forces landed at the nearest town, and Francisco with the
+remainder of the forces at the other, which was only about a cannon-shot
+distant from the former. In the first town the enemy was completely
+surprised and run away, and the place was set on fire without resistance.
+On seeing the people run away, our men pursued and slew many of the
+fugitives, and when wearied of the pursuit they plundered and destroyed
+the country. In the mean time the alarm was spread over the neighbourhood,
+and about 6000 nayres assembled, who made an attack upon our men as they
+were embarking, so that they were in great danger: In particular, Duarte
+Pacheco, not being able to find his boat in the place where he had left it,
+was closely pursued; and though he and his company defended themselves
+valiantly, and killed many of the enemy, eight of his men were wounded
+with arrows. So superior was the number of the enemy on this occasion,
+that Pacheco and his men had assuredly been all slain, if the rest of the
+troops had not again landed to his rescue; on which the enemy lost heart
+and run away, leaving the field of battle strewed over with their slain.
+After the defeat of the nayres, our men set fire to fifteen paraws, which
+were drawn up on the beach, and carried away seven which were afloat.
+
+The lord of Repelim was much grieved at the destruction of his towns; and
+being afraid of our people making an attack on another about a league
+farther up the river, he sent a strong detachment of his nayres for its
+security. The generals, however, resolved to follow up their victory, and
+to do all the evil in their power to the territories of this lord. For
+this purpose, after allowing their men some time for rest, they departed
+about midnight, while it was still so dark that they could not see each
+other in the boats, expecting to come upon their enemies by surprise by
+dawn of next morning. The boats in which Alonso de Albuquerque and his
+party were embarked got considerably a-head of the rest, and arrived at
+the town which it was intended to attack a good while before day. Weary of
+waiting for the rest, he landed his men, and gave orders to set the town
+on fire. At first they were successful in this rash enterprise, as the
+ordinary inhabitants were a cowardly unarmed people. But the garrison of
+above two thousand nayres, having assembled on the alarm, attacked Alonso
+and his men with great fury and forced them to retreat to their boats,
+after killing one man and wounding several others of the party, which only
+consisted originally of forty men. Alonso and his soldiers would not have
+been able to make good their retreat, if the sailors who remained in
+charge of the boats had not fired off a falcon[5], or small piece of
+ordnance, on which the nayres gave over the pursuit. By this time day
+broke, and Francisco de Albuquerque approached with the rest of the boats;
+and seeing the perilous situation of Alonso, he commanded the ordnance in
+the boats to be played off against the enemy, on which they fled from the
+shore. At this time Pacheco, who was somewhat astern of the rest, observed
+a great number of armed nayres marching along a narrow passage to
+reinforce the others at the town; and brought his boat so near the pass,
+that he completely stopt their passage that way. The whole of our men were
+now landed, and soon constrained the enemy to take flight with
+considerable loss; after which they set the town on fire, but did not
+think it prudent to pursue the runaways, as they were not acquainted with
+the country.
+
+After this exploit, Duarte Pacheco and Pedro de Tayde went with their
+divisions to destroy another town at some distance, in their way towards
+which they fought and defeated eighteen paraws belonging to the zamorin,
+and then set the town on fire. From thence they stood over to the island
+of _Cambalan_, the caymal of which was an enemy of the Cochin rajah, where
+they destroyed a large town. From that place, Pacheco went with five armed
+paraws of Cochin to burn another town, where he met with considerable
+resistance, and slew a great number of the enemy, seven of his own people
+being wounded. After setting the town on fire, he retired towards Cochin,
+and was forced to fight with thirteen armed paraws of Calicut, which he
+defeated with the assistance of Pedro de Tayde and Antonio del Campo, who
+fortunately joined him in this emergency. On their defeat, the Calient
+paraws retired into a creek, where one of them ran aground and was taken
+by Pacheco; but our men being worn out with hard rowing, were unable to
+pursue the rest, and returned to Cochin. On receiving an account of these
+transactions, the rajah was much satisfied with the revenge which had been
+taken of his enemies, and requested of our generals to discontinue the war,
+to which, however, they were by no means inclined.
+
+On account of the war, no pepper was brought from the country to sell at
+the factory in Cochin, neither dared the merchants to go out in search of
+that commodity, insomuch that the factory had only been able to procure
+300 _bahars_[6], and the factor requested the generals to go in quest of
+some which was to be procured at a place about nine leagues from Cochin.
+For this purpose the two generals and all their captains set out from
+Cochin under night, that their intentions might not be discovered by the
+enemy. On the way Pacheco destroyed a whole island, in which he fought
+against six thousand of the enemy with his own company only, and the two
+generals put thirty-four paraws to flight. After this Pacheco and del
+Campo destroyed a town on the continent, where they defeated two thousand
+nayres, many of whom were slain, without any loss on their side. After
+this, the generals sent on the _tony_[7] for the pepper, which carried
+such merchandize as was meant to be given in exchange; and for its
+protection Pacheco and three other captains accompanied it with two
+hundred men, and five hundred Cochin paraws[8]. In passing a narrow strait
+or river, our people were assailed from the banks by a vast number of the
+natives armed with bows and arrows, but were defended by their targets,
+which were fixed on the gunwales of their boats. Leaving one of his
+captains with fifty Portuguese t protect the tony, Pacheco with the other
+two captains and the troops belonging to the rajah, made towards the shore,
+firing off his falcons against the enemy, whom he forced to quit the
+shore with much loss; after which he landed with his troops, most of whom
+were armed with hand-guns. The enemy, who were full two thousand strong,
+resisted for a quarter of an hour, but at length took to flight after
+having many slain. Pacheco pursued them to a village, where the fugitives
+rallied and were joined by many nayres, insomuch that they now amounted to
+six thousand men, and our people were in great jeopardy, as the enemy
+endeavoured to surround them, and to intercept their return to the boats.
+But our men defended themselves manfully, and fought their way back to the
+shore, where the natives divided on each hand, being afraid of the shot of
+the falcons, which slew great numbers of them, and our men re-embarked
+without having a single man killed or wounded.
+
+The zamorin was much displeased at the successes of our people against his
+confederates, and by the loss of many of his paraws in these several
+actions, and was even afraid lest the Portuguese might eventually
+dispossess him of his dominions. He used every exertion therefore to
+prevent us from procuring pepper, being in hopes, if our ships were
+constrained to return to Portugal without loading, that they would come no
+more back to India. He used his influence therefore even with the
+merchants of Cochin to refuse supplying pepper to our ships, which they
+did so effectually, under pretence of the war, that, in spite of the
+influence of the rajah, and notwithstanding high offers of reward from
+Francisco de Albuquerque, the factory had only been able to procure 1200
+quintals or 4000 bahars[9] of pepper; and even that was got with hard
+fighting, some hurt to our own men, and infinite loss of lives to the
+enemy. Unable to procure any more pepper in Cochin, Alonso de Albuquerque
+went to Coulan in search of that commodity, accompanied by Pedro de Tayde
+and Antonio del Campo, knowing that the government of that state was
+desirous of having one of our factories established in their city, and had
+solicited both Pedro Alvares Cabral and the lord admiral De Gama to that
+effect; and Alonso was determined to go to war with the people of Coulan
+unless they gave him loading for his ships.
+
+Coulan is twelve leagues from Cochin, and twenty-four from Cape Comorin.
+Before the building of Calicut, Coulan was the principal city of Malabar,
+and the port of greatest trade on that coast. Its buildings, more
+especially the temples and shrines of their idols, are larger and more
+splendid than those of Cochin. The haven is excellent, the country is well
+stored with provisions, and the condition of the people resembles in all
+things what has been formerly said of the inhabitants of Calicut. The
+inhabitants are idolatrous Malabars, having among them many rich Moorish
+merchants, more especially since the war broke out between us and the
+zamorin, as many of these merchants had left Calicut to reside at Coulan.
+They trade with Coromandel, Ceylon, the Maldive islands, Bengal, Pegu,
+Camatia, and Malava. The rajah or king of this state rules over an
+extensive kingdom, in which there are many rich cities and several good
+harbours; by which means he has a large revenue, and is able to maintain a
+great military force, but the men are mostly of a low stature: He
+entertains in his palace a guard of three hundred women, armed with bows
+and arrows, who are very expert archers, and they bind up their breasts
+very tight with bandages of silk and linen, that they may not stand in the
+way of using their bows. This rajah usually resides in a city named Calle,
+and is generally at war with the king of Narsinga[10].
+
+In the city of Coulan, which is governed by certain officers or aldermen,
+there is a church which was built by the apostle St Thomas, who came here
+to preach the Catholic faith, and made many converts both among the
+idolaters and others, who have handed down the Christian belief from
+generation to generation, so that there are at least twelve thousand
+families of Christians scattered abroad in the country, in which they have
+churches in many places. The king who then ruled in Coulan, being much
+displeased at the numbers of his subjects who were converted to
+Christianity, banished St Thomas from his dominions, who then went to a
+city called Malapur or Meliapour, on the coast of the dominions of
+Narsinga, and was followed by the Christians of Coulan, and even by many
+of the idolaters. He is said to have retired into a solitude in the
+mountains, where he died, and whence his body was removed for interment in
+a vault of the church he had built at Coulan. This church is now deserted
+and entirely overgrown with trees and bushes, and is kept by a poor
+Moorish zealot, who subsists on alms which he receives from Christian
+pilgrims, and even some of the idolaters give alms at this tomb.
+
+On the arrival of Alonso de Albuquerque at the harbour of Coulan, the
+governors of the city came on board to visit him, and settled a treaty
+with him, in which it was stipulated that we were to have a factory in the
+city, and that they should provide a loading with all possible dispatch
+for the three ship he had along with him. While one of his ships was
+taking in a lading in the harbour, the other two always kept out at sea
+watching all ships that passed, and obliging every one they could descry
+to come and give an account of themselves to Albuquerque as captain-
+general under the king of Portugal. He offered no injury to any of these,
+unless to such as belonged to the Moors of the Red Sea, all of which that
+fell in his way were first plundered and then burnt, in revenge for the
+injuries they had done to the Portuguese. When the house for the factory
+was finished, and the ships laden, Alonso left there Antonio de Sola as
+factor, with two clerks, Rodrigo Aranso and Lopo Rabelo, an interpreter
+named Medera, and two friars to serve as chaplains, together with other
+assistants, being twenty in all; after which he returned to Cochin.
+
+About this time Francisco de Albuquerque received a message from
+_Cosebequin_, a friendly Moor of Calicut who has been formerly mentioned,
+giving him notice that the zamorin was determined to make another attack
+on Cochin so soon as the Portuguese fleet had departed for Europe, and to
+fortify it in such a manner as should prevent them from having any farther
+intercourse with that country. With this view the zamorin had entered into
+treaties with all the rajahs and leading nayres or nobles of Malabar, and
+it was even rumoured that those of Cananor and Coulan had secretly entered
+into terms with him against the Portuguese and the rajah of Cochin[11]. He
+said farther that the Moorish merchants had promised large assistance for
+carrying on the war, as they were exceedingly desirous to exclude the
+Christians from trading to India. About the same time a letter came from
+Rodrigo Reynel to the same effect, saying that the zamorin was levying
+troops, and had caused a great number of cannon to be prepared for the war:
+Reynel likewise said that the Moors of Cochin were decidedly in the
+interest of the zamorin, and were therefore to be looked to with much
+jealousy. The rajah likewise informed Albuquerque, that from certain
+bramins who had come from Calicut he was informed of the intentions and
+preparations of the zamorin for reducing Cochin; and as he had little
+reliance on his own subjects, he requested some Portuguese troops might be
+left for his defence. Francisco gave the rajah assurance of protection,
+and even that the Portuguese would add to his dominions at a future period,
+in reward for his fidelity and friendship to their nation, and as a
+compensation for the injuries he had suffered in their cause.
+
+The rajah was much pleased with this assurance; and as Francisco found he
+could have no more pepper at Cochin, he determined upon returning to
+Portugal, when he had appointed a fit person to remain as captain-general
+in India. He found this matter difficult, as none of his captains were
+willing to remain with the small force which he was able to leave behind.
+At length Duarte Pacheco willingly accepted the charge, and the rajah was
+much pleased with his appointment, having already sufficient proof of his
+valour. Pacheco was accordingly left at Cochin with his own ship and two
+caravels commanded by Pedro Raphael and Diego Perez, and a pinnace, with
+ninety men in health besides others who were sick.[12] As much ordnance
+and ammunition was likewise given him as could possibly be spared from the
+homeward bound ships. All these things being settled, Francisco de
+Albuquerque sailed for Cananor, where he proposed to endeavour to procure
+the liberty of Rodrigo Reynel and the others who were at Calicut. But the
+zamorin sent him word that there was no necessity to take this person away,
+who was desirous of remaining in India; and if the captain-general would
+remain he should have the pepper which was promised.[13] At this time
+Alonso de Albuquerque returned from Coulan, and joined Francisco at
+Cananor; and a letter was brought from Rodrigo Reynel, giving information
+that the zamorin was certainly resolved to attempt the conquest of Cochin,
+as soon as the Portuguese ships should leave the coast; and that his only
+intention in making an offer of pepper was with a view to prevent them
+from burning the ships which were then in the harbour of Calicut.
+
+All matters being arranged, the Portuguese fleet sailed from Cananor on
+the 31st of January 1504. Alonso de Albuquerque and Antonio del Campo came
+to Lisbon on the 23d of August, and presented to the king 400 weight of
+seed pearls, which are called _Alhofer or Ragges_, 144 pound weight of
+great pearls, and eight of the oysters from which the pearls are procured.
+[14] He gave likewise to the king a diamond as big as a large bean, and
+many other jewels; and two Persian horses of wonderful swiftness.
+Francisco de Albuquerque and Nicholas Coello, who left Cananor some time
+after Alonso, were cast away on the voyage and never more heard of. Pedro
+de Tayde was driven to Quiloa, where his ship was lost on the bar and most
+of his men drowned. From Quiloa he went to Mozambique in a _zambucco_,
+where he afterwards died; but left a letter in which he gave a particular
+account of the state of affairs in India, which he ordered to be,
+delivered to the first captain who might put in there from Portugal[15].
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Antonio de Saldanna, the last of the three commanders who were sent to
+cruise in the north of the Red Sea, having lost Diego Fernandez Peteira,
+came to anchor at a place called St Thomas, on the east side of the Cape
+of Good Hope, which was made famous by the name of _Aquada del Saldanna_,
+or Saldannas watering-place, on account of his having lost several of his
+men there in endeavouring to land. At this time Ruy Lorenzo was parted
+from him in a storm which drove him to Mozambique, whence he held on his
+course for Quiloa, where he took some small prizes. Being ambitious to
+distinguish himself, he went to the island of Zanzibar, twenty leagues
+short of Mombasa, where he took twenty small vessels. After this he
+appeared before the town of Mombasa, the king of which place sent out a
+number of armed almadias or paraws to take his ship: But Lorenzo armed his
+long boat with a crew of thirty men, which took four of the almadias and
+killed a great many of the Moors. The king sent an army of 4000 men to the
+shore under the command of his son, who was killed with some others at the
+first volley; on which one of the Moors ran out from the ranks with a flag
+of the Portuguese arms, craving a parley. Peace was soon concluded, by
+which the king agreed to pay 100 _meticals_ of gold yearly as a tribute to
+the king of Portugal[16].
+
+From Mombasa, Lorenzo sailed for Melinda, the king of which place was much
+oppressed by him of Mombasa, on account of his connection with the
+Portuguese. On his way he took two ships and three small vessels called
+_zambuccos_, in which were twelve magistrates of Brava, who submitted
+their city to the king of Portugal, and engaged to give 500 meticals of
+yearly tribute. On his arrival at Melinda, he found that a battle had been
+fought between the kings of Melinda and Mombasa, in which neither could
+claim the victory. Antonio de Saldanna likewise arrived at Melinda about
+this time, and by his mediation peace was restored between these princes.
+Saldanna and Lorenzo went thence to the mouth of the Red Sea, where they
+defeated some Moors at the islands of _Kanakani_[17] beyond Cape Guardafu.
+On the upper coast of Arabia, they burnt one ship belonging to the Moors
+which was laden with frankincense, and they drove another on shore which
+carried a number of pilgrims for Mecca.
+
+
+[1] This seems to be the island named Chirapipil on a former occasion.--E.
+
+[2] Thus I understand the expression in Lichefilds translation of
+    Castaneda, "Forty were armed with, shot."--E.
+
+[3] Caliver is the old name of the matchlock or carabine, the precursor
+    of the modern firelock or musket.--E.
+
+[4] A very ordinary precaution in India, to guard the passage of the wet
+    ditch in fortified places, both against desertion and surprise, is by
+    keeping numbers of crocodiles in the water.--E.
+
+[5] A falcon or faulcon is described as a small cannon of two pound shot.
+    The following enumeration of the ancient English ordnance, from Sir
+    William Monsons Naval Tracts, in the reigns of Elizabeth and James the
+    First, is given in Churchills Collection, Vol. III. p. 803. I suspect
+    the weight of the basilisk, marked 400 pounds in this list, may be a
+    typographical error for 4000.--E.
+
+    Names.             Bore.    Weight.   Shot.    Powder.     Random
+                      inches.    libs.    libs.     libs.       paces.
+    Cannon-royal       8-1/2    8000       66        30          1930
+    Cannon             8        6000       60        27          2000
+    Cannon-serpentine  7        5500       53-1/2    25          2000
+    Bastard cannon     7        4500       41        20          1800
+    Demi-cannon        6-3/4    4000       30-1/2    18          1700
+    Cannon-petro       6        3000       24-1/2    14          1600
+    Culverin           5-1/2    4500       17-1/2    12          2500
+    Basilisk           5         400*      15        10          3000
+    Demi-culverin      4        3400        9-1/2     8          2500
+    Bastard culverin   4        3000        5         5-3/4      1700
+    Sacar              3-1/2    1400        5-1/2     5-1/2      1700
+    Minion             3-1/2    1000        4         4          1500
+    Faulcon            2-1/2     660        2         3-1/2      1500
+    Falconet           2         500        1-1/2     3          1500
+    Serpentine         1-1/2     400          3/4     1-1/2      1400
+    Rabanet            1         300          1/2       1/3      1000
+
+[6] Two weights of that name are described as used in India for the sale
+    of pepper and other commodities, the small and the large bahar; the
+    former consisting of three, and the latter of four and a half peculs.
+    The pecul is said to weigh 5 1/2 pounds avoirdupois: Consequently the
+    smaller bahar is equal to 16 1/2, and the larger to 24 3/4 English
+    pounds. A little farther on in the present work of Castaneda, 4000
+    bahars are said to equal 1200 quintals; which would make the bahar of
+    Cochin equal to thirty Portuguese pounds.--E.
+
+[7] This is a species of bark of some burthen, then used on the Malabar
+    coast.--E.
+
+[8] Such is the expression of Lichefild; which I suspect ought to have
+    been 500 nayres of Cochin in paraws.--E.
+
+[9] The quantity in the text is probably exaggerated considerably, as
+    only a few pages before, the factory at Cochin is said to have only
+    been able to procure 300 quintals.--E.
+
+[10] In Astleys Collection, I. p. 55. Coulan or Koulan is said to have
+    been governed at this time by a _queen_ or rana. By Narsinga Bisnagar
+    is to be understood, which was one of the sovereignties into which the
+    Decan or southern peninsula of India was then divided--E.
+
+[11] The western coast of India below the Gauts, is divided into three
+    portions, the Concan in the north, after this the coast of Canara, and
+    in the south, the country of Malabar, reaching from Mount Deli to Cape
+    Comorin. At the present period, Malabar was divided into seven
+    kingdoms or provinces: Cananor, Calicut, Cranganor, Cochin, Porka,
+    Coulan, and Travancore; which last was subject to the kingdom of
+    Narsinga or Bisnagar. Cananor, Calicut, and Coulan only were
+    considered as independent rajahs, the others being less or more
+    subjected to the authority of these three.--E.
+
+
+[12] According to Astley, his whole force consisted of 110 men. Vol. I. p.
+    65.
+
+[13] This story of Reynel and the pepper promised by the zamorin, is so
+    confusedly told in Lichefild's translation of Castaneda, as to be
+    altogether unintelligible.--E.
+
+[14] In Astley the weight of the large pearls is reduced to 40 pounds.
+    Even with that correction, the immense quantity of pearls in the text
+    is quite incredible. There must be some error in the denomination, but
+    which we are unable to correct.--E.
+
+[15] The remainder of this section is taken from Astley, I. 56, being
+    there appended to the abridgement of the voyage of the Albuquerques.
+    It is an isolated incident, having no apparent connection with the
+    history in the text, yet seemed proper to be preserved in this place.
+    --E.
+
+[16] Mombasa belonged to the Portuguese for near 200 years. In 1698 it
+    was very easily taken by the Muskat Arabs, who put twenty Portuguese
+    to the sword.--Astl. I. 56. a.
+
+[17] No islands of that name are to be found on our maps. The islands of
+    Socotora, Abdul Kuria, and los dos Hermanas, are to the
+    eastwards of Cape Guardafu: Chartan Martan, or the islands of Kuria
+    Muria, are a considerable distance N.N.E. on the outer or oceanic
+    coast of Yemen.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Transactions of the Portuguese in India under Duarte Pacheco, from the
+departure of Alonso and Francisco de Albuquerque in January 1504, till
+the arrival of Lope Suarez de Menesis with succours in September of that
+year._
+
+After the departure of the Albuquerques from Cananor, Duarte Pacheco, who
+was left with the command in India, remained there for some time to take
+in provisions, having along with him the caravel commanded by Pedro
+Raphael, while the other ship of his small squadron, under the command of
+Diego Perez, was repairing at Cochin. Pacheco anchored with his own ship
+off the harbour of Cananor, and dispatched Raphael along the coast to
+oblige all ships which passed that way to come to Cananor in
+acknowledgment of Pacheco as captain-general in the Indies. Several were
+brought in by Raphael, and were constrained to give a full account from
+whence they came, whither bound, and what they were laden with. In case
+of their containing any pepper, more especially if bound for Calicut, he
+used to take that commodity from them; and carried his command with so
+high a hand, that he became the terror of these seas. One night while
+thus at anchor, a fleet of twenty-five ships came suddenly to the
+anchoring-ground where he lay, which he suspected to have been sent from
+Calicut on purpose to attack him. Considering himself in imminent danger,
+he immediately slipped his cables, not having time to weigh anchor, and
+made sail to gain the windward of this fleet, upon which he directly
+commenced firing. They were mostly small ships laden with rice, and made
+off with all the haste in their power, though some of them ran aground.
+One of the vessels of this fleet was a large ship belonging to the Moors
+of Cananor, having nearly 400 men on board, who resisted for some time,
+shooting off their arrows, and even endeavoured to take our ship. When
+day was near at hand, and after having nine men slain in the action, the
+Moorish captain at length submitted, and told Pacheco that he belonged to
+Cananor.
+
+After some time spent in this manner, Pacheco made sail for Cochin, and
+in the passage fell in with several ships belonging to the Moors, taking
+some, and burning or sinking others. On landing at the fort of Cochin, he
+learnt from the factor that the reports of the zamorin making
+preparations for the renewal of the war, were perfectly true, and even
+that the Moorish inhabitants of Cochin were adverse to the rajah for
+having taken part with the Portuguese against the zamorin. Being informed
+likewise that the Cochin rajah was in great fear of this new war, he went
+next day to visit him, carrying all his boats well manned, and fenced
+with raised sides of boards to defend his men from the missile weapons of
+the enemy. They were likewise furnished with ordnance, and all decorated
+with flags and streamers in a gallant manner, hoping thereby to inspire
+confidence in Trimumpara, who was much dejected at the small force which
+had been left for his defence. In a conference between them, the rajah
+said to Pacheco, that the Moors asserted he was left in the Indies for
+the sole purpose of removing the merchandize belonging to the Portuguese
+in the factory at Cochin to Cananor and Coulan, and not to defend him
+against the power of the zamorin; which he was even disposed to think
+were true, in consideration of the smallness of the fleet under his
+command. Pacheco felt indignant at the suspicion which the rajah
+entertained, and endeavoured to convince him that he had been imposed
+upon by the Moors out of enmity to the Portuguese, assuring him that he
+would faithfully exert himself in his defence. He pointed out to him the
+strength of the natural defences of Cochin, which were all narrow, and
+defensible therefore by a few valiant men against any number of
+assailants. The rajah was greatly relieved by these assurances, and
+Pacheco went to visit the different places by which the island of Cochin
+might be assailed, all of which he diligently fortified, more especially
+the ford, which he strengthened with a row of stakes, both to prevent the
+enemy from wading across, and to hinder any of their vessels from passing.
+
+In the mean time he was informed by letter from Rodrigo Reynel, that a
+principal Moor in Cochin, in concert with several others, were contriving
+to quit that city; and had been twice secretly at Calicut to confer with
+the zamorin on this subject. Pacheco was a good deal concerned at this
+intelligence, and proposed to the rajah to have this Moor executed for
+his treasonable intercourse with the zamorin. But Trimumpara would by no
+means consent to this measure; saying that it would occasion a mutiny
+among the Moors, by whom the city was furnished with provisions in
+exchange for goods, and be thought it were better to dissemble with them
+all. Pacheco then said that he would have a conference with the Moors,
+meaning to use policy with them, since the rajah did not approve of
+violent measures; and to this the rajah consented, giving orders to his
+naires to obey the orders of Pacheco. In pursuance of this plan, Pacheco
+went to the dwelling of this chief Moor, named _Belinamacar_, close by
+the river, taking with him a guard of his own men well armed, and
+requested that person to send for some other leading men among the Moors,
+whom he named, saying that he wished to consult with them on a subject of
+great importance to them all. When they were all assembled, he made them
+a speech to the following effect.
+
+"I sent for you, honest merchants, that I might inform you for what
+purpose I remain in the Indies. It is reported by some, that I mean only
+to remove the factory and the goods belonging to the Portuguese to Coulan
+and Cananor: But my sole purpose is to defend Cochin against the zamorin,
+and even if necessary I will die in your defence. I am resolved to meet
+him in Cambalan, by which way it is said he means to invade you; and, if
+he has the boldness to meet me, I hope to make him prisoner and to carry
+him with me into Portugal. I am informed that you intend to go away from
+Cochin, and to induce the rest of the inhabitants among whom you are the
+chiefs, to do the same; but I am astonished men of your wisdom should
+leave the country in which you were born, and where you have dwelt so
+many years, from fear of vain reports. Such conduct were even disgraceful
+for women, and is therefore much more so for you who are men of wisdom
+and experience. If you should be disposed to remove from hence when you
+shall actually be in danger, I should hardly blame you: But to do so
+before that danger is apparent, and even before a single battle has been
+fought, must proceed either from cowardice or treachery. You all well
+know, that only a very short while ago, a very small number of our
+Portuguese defeated thousands of those same enemies who now threaten to
+invade us. You may allege that we were then more in number than now,
+which was assuredly the case. But we then fought in the open field, where
+numbers were necessary; and we now propose only to fight in narrow passes,
+in which a small number will suffice as well as a multitude. You already
+know that I can fight, as it is I who have done the greatest injury to
+the enemy in the late war, which the rajah can well vouch. As for me I
+shall never yield, and I have more to lose, being overcome, than any of
+you. Put your trust therefore in me and my troops, and remain where you
+are till you see the event of our defence. Your sovereign remains in his
+port, and wherefore should you go away? I and the Portuguese who are with
+me, remain in this far distant country to defend your king, and you who
+are his natural born subjects: Should you then desert him and your
+country, you would disgrace yourselves and dishonour me, by refusing to
+repose confidence in my promise to defend you against the zamorin and all
+his power, were it even greater than it is. Wherefore, I strictly enjoin
+that none of you shall remove from Cochin, and I swear by all that is
+holy in our faith, that whoever is detected in the attempt shall be
+instantly hanged. It is my determined purpose to remain here, and to have
+the port strictly watched day and night that none of you may escape. Let
+every one of you, therefore, look well to his conduct, and be assured, if
+you do as I require, you shall have me for your friend; but if otherwise,
+I shall be your mortal enemy, and shall use you worse even than the
+zamorin."
+
+The Moors endeavoured to clear themselves from what had been alleged
+against them, but Pacheco would not listen to their excuses, and departed
+from them in anger, and immediately brought his ship and one of the
+caravels with two boats, which he anchored directly opposite the city of
+Cochin, with strict charges to let no one leave the city by water. He
+likewise appointed a number of paraws to guard all the creeks and rivers
+around the city; and ordered every boat that could transport men or goods
+to be brought every night under the guns of his ships, and returned to
+their owners in the morning. In consequence of all these precautions, the
+people of Cochin were so much afraid of him, that not one of the Moors or
+Malabars dared to leave the city without his permission, and
+henceforwards continued quiet. Notwithstanding all these cares, Pacheco
+used to make nightly invasions into the island of Repelim, where he burnt
+the towns, slew the inhabitants, and carried away much cattle and many
+paraws; on which account the Moors of Cochin, astonished that he could
+endure so much fatigue, gave out that he was the devil.
+
+Mean time the zamorin collected his forces in the island of Repelim,
+where he was joined by the lords of Tanor, Bespur, Kotugan, Korin, and
+many other Malabar chiefs, making altogether an army of 50,000 men. Four
+thousand of these were appointed to serve by water, in 280 vessels,
+called _paraws_, _katurs_, and _tonys_; with 382 pieces of cannon
+intended to batter the Portuguese fort at Cochin; and the rest of the
+troops were appointed to force a passage across the ford of the river,
+under the command of Naubea Daring, nephew and heir to the zamorin, and
+Elankol, the lord of Repelim[1].
+
+Intelligence of all this was conveyed to Cochin, and that the zamorin
+proposed to invade that city by the straits of Cambalan. Rodrigo Reynel,
+who sent this intelligence by letter, lay then very sick and died soon
+after, on which the zamorin caused all his goods to be seized. On the
+approach of the zamorin, the Moors of Cochin would very willingly have
+induced the inhabitants to run away, but durst not venture to do so from
+the fear they were in of Pacheco. He, on the contrary, that all might
+know how little he esteemed the zamorin and all his power, made a descent
+one night on one of the towns of Repelim, to which he set fire. But on
+the coming up of a great number of armed naires, he was forced to retreat
+in great danger to his boats, having five of his men wounded, after
+killing and wounding a great number of the enemy. On their return to
+Cochin, the targets of our men were all stuck full of arrows, so great
+was the multitude of the enemies who had assailed them. The rajah came to
+visit Pacheco at the castle on his return from this enterprize, and
+expressed his satisfaction at his success, which he considered as a
+mighty affair, especially as the zamorin and so great an army was in the
+island. Pacheco made light of the zamorin and all his force, saying that
+he anxiously wished he would come and give battle, as he was not at all
+afraid of the consequences, trusting to the superior valour of his own
+men.
+
+As the people of Cochin remained quiet, Pacheco now prepared for
+defending the pass of Cambalan. Leaving therefore a sufficient force to
+guard the castle, and twenty-five men in the caravel under the command of
+Diego Pereira to protect the city and watch the conduct of the Moors,
+taking with himself seventy-three men in one of the caravels and several
+armed boats, he departed for Cambalan on Friday the 16th of April 1504[2].
+On passing the city, Pacheco landed to speak with the rajah, whom he
+found in evident anxiety; but making as if he did not observe his
+heaviness, Pacheco addressed him with a cheerful countenance, saying that
+he was just setting out to defend him against the zamorin, of whom he had
+no fear of giving a good account. After some conference, the rajah
+ordered 500 of his naires, out of 3000 who were in his service, to join
+Pacheco, under the command of _Gandagora_ and _Frangera_ the overseers of
+his household, and the caymal of _Palurta_, whom he directed to obey
+Pacheco in all things as if he were himself present. On taking leave of
+Pacheco, while he exhorted him to use his utmost efforts for defending
+Cochin against the zamorin, he desired him to be careful of his own
+safety, on which so much depended.
+
+Pacheco arrived at the passage of Cambalan two hours before day, and
+seeing no appearance of the zamorins approach, he made an attack on a
+town on the coast of the island about the dawn, which was defended by 300
+naires, all archers, and a small number armed with calivers, or
+match-locks, all of whom were embarked in certain paraws, and endeavoured
+to defend the entrance of the harbour. They were soon constrained by the
+cannon of the Portuguese to push for the shore and quit their paraws, but
+resisted all attempts of the Portuguese to land for near an hour, when
+they were completely defeated after losing a great many of their number,
+killed or wounded, and our men set the town on fire. Having taken a
+considerable number of cattle at this place, which he carried off with him,
+Pacheco returned to defend the pass of Cambalan. At this time the zamorin
+sent a message to Pacheco, offering him a handsome present, and proposing
+a treaty for a peace between them: but Pacheco refused accepting the
+present, and declared he would never make peace with him while he
+continued at enmity with the rajah of Cochin. Next day, the zamorin sent a
+second message, proudly challenging him for daring to obstruct his passage
+into the island of Cochin, and offering him battle, declaring his
+resolution to make him a prisoner, if he were not slain in the battle. To
+this Pacheco made answer, that he hoped to do the same thing with the
+zamorin, in honour of the day which was a solemn festival among the
+Christians, and that the zamorin was much deceived by his sorcerers when
+they promised him the victory on such a day. Then one of the naires who
+accompanied the messenger, said smiling as if in contempt, that he had few
+men to perform so great an exploit; whereas the forces of the zamorin
+covered both the land and the water, and could not possibly be overcome by
+such a handful. Pacheco ordered this man to be well bastinadoed for his
+insolence, and bid him desire the zamorin to revenge his quarrel if he
+could.
+
+That same evening, the rajah of Cochin sent a farther reinforcement to
+Pacheco of 500 naires, of whom he made no account, neither of these who
+were with him before, believing they would all run away; his sole
+reliance, under God, was on his own men, who feasted themselves that
+night, that the zamorin might learn how much they despised all his
+threats, and how eager they were for battle. Early next morning, Pacheco
+made a short speech to his men, exhorting them, to behave valiantly for
+the glory of the Christian name and the honour of their country, and
+promising them an assured victory with the assistance of God; by which
+their fame would be so established among the natives that they would be
+feared and respected ever after. He likewise set before them the rewards
+they might assuredly expect from their own sovereign, if they behaved
+gallantly on the present occasion. His men immediately answered him that
+they hoped in the ensuing battle to evince how well they remembered his
+exhortations. They all then knelt down and sung the _salve regina_, and
+afterwards an _Ave Maria_, with a loud voice. Just at this time, Laurenço
+Moreno joined Pacheco with four of his men armed with calivers, who were
+all anxious to be present in the battle, and of whose arrival the general
+was extremely glad, as he knew them to be valiant soldiers.
+
+In the course of the night, by the advice of the Italian lapidaries who
+had deserted to the enemy, the zamorin caused a sconce or battery to be
+erected directly over against the place where Pacheco was stationed, on
+which five pieces of ordnance were placed, from which great service was
+expected in the ensuing battle, owing to the narrowness of the pass. On
+the morning of Palm Sunday, the zamorin marched forwards with 47,000 men,
+partly naires and part Moors, and accompanied by all the rajahs and
+caymals who had joined him in this war. Of these, the rajah of _Tanor_
+had 4000 naires; the rajahs of _Bybur_ and _Curran_, whose countries lay
+near the mountains of Narsinga, had 12,000 naires; the rajah of
+_Cotogataco_, which is between Cochin and Cananor close beside the
+mountains, had 18,000 naires; the rajah of _Curia_, which is between
+Paniani and Cranganor, had 3000 naires. Naubea Daring, the prince of
+Calicut, and his brother Namboa, who were particularly attached to that
+part of the army composed of the zamorins immediate subjects, had a large
+body of men whose numbers I do not particularize. Their warlike
+instruments were many and of divers sorts, and made a noise as if heaven
+and earth were coming together.
+
+Before day, the van of this prodigious army arrived at the sconce of the
+Italians, and began immediately to play off their ordnance against the
+caravel, which was so near that it was an absolute miracle that not a
+single shot did any harm. But our cannon were better served, and every
+shot did execution among the enemy: and so well did they ply their guns,
+that before sunrise above thirty discharges were made from our caravel.
+At day-break, the whole of the enemies fleet, consisting of 169 barks,
+came out of the rivers of the island of Repelim to attack our small force.
+Sixty-six of these were paraws, having their sides defended with bags of
+cotton by advice of the Italians, to ward off our shot; and each of these
+had twenty-five men and two pieces of ordnance, five of the men in each
+paraw being armed with calivers or matchlocks. Twenty of the foysts or
+large barks were chained together, as a floating battery to assault the
+caravel; besides which, there were fifty-three _catures_ and thirty large
+barks, each of which carried sixteen men and one piece of ordnance,
+besides other weapons. Besides all these armed vessels, there were a
+great many more filled with soldiers, so that the whole river seemed
+entirely covered over. Of this numerous fleet, which contained near 10,
+000 men, Naubea Daring was admiral or commander in chief, and the lord of
+Repelim vice-admiral. All these advanced against the Portuguese, setting
+up terrible shouts, which was answered alternately by sounding all their
+military instruments of music. The whole of these people were almost
+naked, having targets of various colours, and made a very gallant
+appearance. On the approach of this prodigious fleet, our caravel and
+boats were hardly discernible, so completely did the enemy cover the face
+of the water. Terrified by so prodigious a multitude, the naires of
+Cochin all ran away, only Grandagora and Frangora remaining, who were on
+board the caravel, or they would have done like the rest. Indeed their
+presence was of no importance, except to serve as witnesses of the valour
+of our men.
+
+Our people plied their ordnance and small arms so incessantly that the
+air was quite darkened with smoke, and as the boats of the enemy were
+very numerous and without order, they hindered each other, and our fire
+did prodigious execution among them, several of their paraws being torn
+to pieces and great numbers of their men killed and wounded, without any
+hurt on our side. The twenty-five paraws[3] which were chained together
+were now brought forwards, and gave much annoyance to our men, who were
+now likewise much fatigued, as the battle had continued a long time. The
+captain-general gave orders to fire off a _saker_,[4] which had not been,
+hitherto used during the battle. By the time this had been twice fired,
+it did such terrible execution among the thick of the enemy as to sink
+four of their paraws, and all the others made the best of their way out
+of the battle, eighteen of the paraws being sunk in all, and vast numbers
+of the enemy slain and wounded. On the defeat of this squadron, which was
+commanded by Prince Naubea Daring, Elankol, the lord of Repelim, who was
+vice-admiral, came forward with a fresh squadron, and gave a proud onset,
+commanding his paraws to lay the caravel on board; but the Malabars had
+not resolution to put this order into execution, and held off at some
+distance. The zamorin also approached with the land army, doing his
+utmost to force the passage of the ford; but all their efforts were in
+vain, although this second battle was more fiercely urged than the first.
+Though the battle continued from daybreak to almost sunset, the enemy
+were able to make no impression, and were known to have lost 350 men
+slain outright, besides others, which were above 1000.[5] Some of our men
+were wounded, but none slain; for the balls of the enemy, though of cast
+iron, had no more effect than as many stones thrown by hand. Yet our
+barricades of defence were all torn to pieces, and one of our boats was
+very much damaged, which was entirely repaired during the night.
+
+The rajahs and other chiefs who were allied with the zamorin, lost all
+hope of ever being able to get the victory over the Portuguese, and were
+sorry for having joined in the war so greatly to their own dishonour.
+Being afraid the captain-general might burn and destroy their towns and
+houses, which were all situated on the banks of rivers, they were anxious
+to leave the army of the zamorin, and to give over making war on the
+Portuguese. Some among them withdrew privately from the camp of the
+zamorin to the island of Vaipi with all their men, and reconciled
+themselves with the rajah of Cochin: These were _Maraguta, Muta_ Caymal,
+his brother and cousins. The zamorin was exceedingly mortified by the
+discomfiture of his people, and severely reprimanded his chiefs for their
+pusillanimous conduct, in allowing themselves to be defeated by such a
+handful of men. The two Italian deserters, while they acknowledged the
+valour of the Portuguese in the late action, represented that it would be
+impossible for them to continue to bear up long against such vast odds
+without reinforcements, and recommended the frequent reiteration of
+assaults, under which they must necessarily be at last overthrown. All
+those rajahs and chiefs who were for continuing the war, joined in
+opinion with the Italians. The zamorin made a speech, in which he
+recapitulated the defeats they had sustained and the defection of some of
+his allies, who had entered into treaty with the rajah of Cochin. He
+stated how short a period of the summer now remained for continuing the
+operations of the war, which must soon be laid aside during the storms
+and rain of the winter season, when it was impossible to keep the field;
+and that, on the conclusion of winter, a new fleet would come from
+Portugal with powerful reinforcements to the enemy, who would then be
+able to carry the war as formerly into his dominions, to their utter loss
+and destruction. He concluded by giving his opinion that it was necessary
+for him to make peace with the Christians. Naubea Daring, the prince of
+Calicut, made a long speech, in which he defended the Portuguese against
+the imputation thrown upon them by the Moors of their being thieves and
+pirates. He recapitulated all their conduct since their first arrival in
+India, showing that they had always conducted themselves with good faith,
+whereas they had been forced into war against Calicut by treachery and
+oppression. He concluded by strongly recommending to negotiate peace with
+the Christians, as otherwise the city and trade of Calicut would be
+utterly destroyed, to the irreparable injury of the zamorins revenue,
+which was of more importance to him than the friendship of the Moors,
+whose only object was their own profit. The zamorin was greatly moved by
+this discourse, and recommended to the other chiefs that they should
+concur with the prince, in procuring the establishment of peace. This
+opinion was by no means relished by Elankol, the lord of Repelim, who had
+confederated with the Moors to urge a continuance of the war, and
+endeavoured to impress upon the zamorin that his reputation would be
+destroyed by proposing peace at this time, which would be imputed to him
+as an act of cowardice. The principal Moors, likewise, who were present
+in the council used all their art and influence to induce the zamorin to
+persevere; and it was at length determined to continue the war.
+
+One _Cogeal_, a Moor of Repelim who had been a great traveller, and had
+seen many warlike devices, proposed a new invention for attacking the
+caravels at the ford, which was considered to be perfectly irresistible.
+Cogeal directed a floating castle to be built of timber on two boats or
+lighters, which were firmly secured by two beams at their heads and
+sterns. Over this the castle or square tower was strongly built of beams
+joined together by bars of iron and large nails, carried up to the height
+of a lance or spear, and so large that it was able to contain forty men
+with several pieces of ordnance. It was proposed that this castle should
+be brought Up to grapple with the caravels, by which the Portuguese might
+be attacked on equal terms. On seeing this machine, the zamorin liberally
+rewarded Cogeal for his ingenuity, and gave orders to have other seven
+constructed of the same kind. By means of his spies, Pacheco got notice
+of the construction of these floating castles, and likewise that the
+enemy were preparing certain fireworks to set the caravels on fire[6]. To
+keep off the fireships and floating castles, he constructed a species of
+rafts, made of masts or spars eight fathoms long, and bound together with
+iron bolts and hoops. Several of these, which were likewise eight fathoms
+broad, were moored with anchors and cables, at the distance of a stones
+throw from the caravels. Likewise, to prevent the caravels from being
+overlooked by the floating castles, one Peter Raphael built certain
+turrets on the decks of the caravels of spars set upright, in each of
+which seven or eight men had room to handle their arms. At this time the
+rajah of Cochin visited Pacheco, whom he earnestly exhorted to provide
+well for defence against the zamorin; as he was well assured his own
+subjects would desert him, if Pacheco were defeated. Pacheco upbraided
+Trimumpara for his tears, desiring him to call in mind the victories
+which the Portuguese had already gained over the enemy; and requested of
+him to return to his capital showing himself confident among his people,
+and to rest assured that he and the Portuguese would keep the pass
+against every force the zamorin might bring against it.
+
+In expectation of an immediate attack, Lorenco Moreno returned to the
+caravels with as many of his people as could be spared from the factory.
+Pacheco made all his people take rest early in the night, that they might
+be able for the expected fatigues of the ensuing day, on which he had
+intelligence that the grand attack was to be made. About midnight, his
+small force was summoned under arms; when, after confession and
+absolution, he made a speech to his men, exhorting them to behave
+themselves manfully in the approaching conflict. They all answered, that
+they were resolved to conquer or die. About two in the morning, some of
+the most advanced vessels belonging to the Calicut fleet began to fire
+off their ordnance, as they approached towards the pass. The zamorin was
+himself along with the land army, which exceeded 30,000 men, accompanied
+with many field pieces. Elankol, the lord of Repelim, who commanded the
+vanguard, advanced to the point of _Arraul_, which in some measure
+commanded the ford, at which place he began to throw up some ramparts or
+defences of earth. Pacheco landed secretly at the point with a detachment
+of his troops, on purpose to prevent the enemy from throwing up
+entrenchments, and a sharp skirmish ensued, in which many of the enemy
+were slain. On the appearance of day, Pacheco retired to his boats,
+though with no small difficulty, owing to the vast numbers of the enemy
+who thronged around; yet got off with all his people unhurt, having
+effectually hindered the proposed intrenchments.
+
+The land army of the enemy now brought their ordnance to the point, where
+they began a furious cannonade upon; the caravels, yet without doing us
+any harm, as our people were all effectually secured by means of high
+wooden defences on the gunwales of their vessels; whereas every shot of
+ours made prodigious havoc among the enemy, who were quite unsheltered.
+The zamorin sent orders to his fleet to come on with all expedition, to
+deliver him and his men from this imminent danger. The Calicut fleet now
+approached in most formidable order, having several fire rafts in front,
+intended for setting our caravels on fire. After them came 110 paraws,
+full of men, and every one of them having ordnance, many of these being
+fastened together by means of chains. After these came 100 _catures_ and
+eighty _tonys_, each of which had a piece of ordnance and thirty men. In
+the rear of all came the eight castles, which kept close by the point of
+_Arraul_, as the _ebb was not yet altogether entered_.[7] The enemy came
+on with loud shouts and the sound of many instruments, as if to an
+assured victory, and immediately began a furious cannonade. Their fire
+rafts advanced burning in a most alarming manner, but were stopped by the
+_canizos_, or rafts of defence, formerly mentioned. By these likewise,
+the paraws and other vessels of the enemy were prevented from closing
+with our caravels and boats, which they seem to have intended. In this
+part of the battle many of the paraws and other vessels of the enemy were
+torn to pieces and sunk, and a great number of their men were killed and
+wounded. On the turn of the tide, the floating castles put off from the
+point, and were towed by boats towards the caravels. In the largest of
+these castles there were forty men, in others thirty-five, and the
+smallest had thirty, all armed with bows or matchlocks, besides ordnance;
+and they seemed quite an irresistible force in comparison of ours, which
+consisted only of two caravels and two armed boats.
+
+When the largest castle came up to our floating defence, it immediately
+commenced a tremendous fire of all its ordnance upon our caravels; and at
+this time Pacheco ordered a _saker_ to be shot off, which seemed to do
+very little harm even at a second discharge. The remainder of the castles
+now came into their stations, and the battle raged with the utmost fury.
+What with incessant flights of arrows, and the smoke of so many guns, our
+people could seldom see the vessels of the enemy. In this extremity, the
+saker was discharged a third time against the largest castle, which had
+been somewhat shaken by the two former discharges. By this shot its iron
+work was broken, some of its beams were forced from their places, and
+several of the men on board were slain. By two other discharges of the
+saker this castle was all torn in pieces, and was forced to retire out of
+the battle. Still however the rest of the castles, and the numerous fleet
+of small craft kept up the fight. Towards evening all the castles were
+much injured, many of the paraws were sunk and torn in pieces, and great
+numbers of the enemy slain; so that at length they were constrained to
+retire. On our side not one man was even wounded: One only ball went
+through the caravel in which Pacheco commanded, and passed among many of
+his men without doing any hurt. On the enemy retiring, Pacheco gave chase
+in the two boats and some paraws; and the caravels kept up a constant
+fire upon point _Arraul_, whence they forced the zamorin and the land
+army to retire, after having 330 of his men slain. After this great
+victory, the inhabitants of Cochin became quite reassured, and were no
+longer in dread of the power of the zamorin. Trimumpara came to visit
+Pacheco, whom he embraced, and congratulated on his great prowess: Many
+of the principal naires of Cochin went to compliment him; and even
+numbers of the Moorish merchants brought him rich presents, hoping to
+secure his favour.
+
+The zamorin was greatly disheartened by the overthrow of all his mighty
+preparations, and losing all hope of victory wished seriously to end the
+war. In a council of his allies and great men, they represented the great
+losses they had already endured in the war with the Portuguese, and
+proposed to treat with them for peace. His brother Naubea Daring, who had
+always been averse to the war, seemed to believe that Pacheco would
+refuse any treaty, and advised rather to defer making an offer of peace
+till the arrival of the next captain-general from Portugal. This prince
+was likewise of opinion that the Calicut army should still keep the field
+till the coming on of the rainy season made it advisable to retire; as it
+would look like flight to retreat at this time. Yet he recommended that
+no more attacks should be made on the pass, in which attempts they had
+already met with so much loss. Elankol, the lord of Repelim, urged the
+continuance of the war, and to make reiterated assaults on the Christians,
+which must be at last successful; by which means all the Portuguese that
+were in Cochin, Cananor, and Coulan would be destroyed. He advised
+likewise, to send false intelligence to these places, saying that they
+had taken our caravels and slain all our men; on which news the people of
+Cananor and Coulan would put the people in our factories to death. This
+was accordingly done; but as the inhabitants of these places had already
+received notice of the real state of affairs, they gave no credit to this
+false story. Yet, owing to the malice of the Moors who dwelt in these
+places, our men were in great danger and durst not come out of their
+factories, and one of our men was slain in Coulan.
+
+By the persuasion of Elankol and the Moors, the zamorin reluctantly
+consented to try the event of another battle: And, the castles being
+repaired, a fresh assault was made both by land and water, with many more
+men and vessels than before. This battle continued longer than the other,
+and the enemy was overthrown with far greater loss than they had ever
+received before. In consequence of this new victory, the inhabitants of
+Cochin became quite confident in their security from the power of their
+enemies; and the rajah, who had hitherto been in much dread of the event,
+became quite elated. He now came to visit Pacheco in a chair of state,
+with far more splendour than he had ever assumed since the commencement
+of the war. When this was told in the enemies camp, the chiefs urged the
+zamorin to a fresh attack, lest the rajah of Cochin might hold him in
+contempt. He desired them to cease their evil counsels, from which he had
+already sustained great loss, and which would still lead him into greater
+danger; but to leave him to consider what was best to be done for revenge
+against his enemies.
+
+The zamorin gave orders to some of his naires in whom he reposed great
+confidence, that they should go to Cochin on some false pretence, and
+endeavour to assassinate the general of the Portuguese and such of his
+men as they could meet with. But the naires are an inconsiderate people
+unable to keep any of their affairs secret, so that this shameful device
+became immediately known to Pacheco, who appointed two companies of the
+Cochin naires to keep strict watch for these _spies_; one company at the
+ford, and the other along the river, waiting by turns day and night. By
+this means these _spies_ were detected and made prisoners. The chief
+_spy_ was a naire of Cochin, of the family or stock of the _Lecros_ who
+had certain other naires attending upon him, who were strangers. On being
+brought before him, he ordered them to be all cruelly whipt and then to
+be hanged. The Cochin naires remonstrated against this punishment,
+because they were naires whose customs did not allow of this mode of
+execution; but he would not listen to their arguments, saying that their
+treachery richly merited to be so punished. The Portuguese officers
+represented to him the great troubles which the _rajah_ of Cochin had
+endured for giving protection to their nation, and how much this action
+might displease him, when he was informed of naires having been put to
+death in his dominions without his authority. Besides, that this might
+give occasion to some of those about the rajah, who were known to be
+already unfriendly to the Portuguese, to insinuate that the captain-
+general had usurped the authority from the rajah, and might in that way
+wean his affections from them. Pacheco was convinced by these arguments
+that he had acted wrong, and immediately sent to countermand the
+execution. Two of them were already _half-dead_; but _those who were
+still living_, he sent to the rajah, informing him that they had deserved
+death, but that from respect to him he had spared their lives. The rajah
+was singularly gratified by this mark of respect, and the more so because
+there happened to be then present several of his principal nobles and
+some chiefs from other places, besides sundry of the chief of the Moors
+of Cochin, who had endeavoured to impress on his mind that the Portuguese
+were willing to assume the command in his dominions[8]. Henceforwards
+Pacheco had such good intelligence, that all the subtle devices of the
+zamorin were counteracted.
+
+The month of June was now ended and the rainy season, or winter, began to
+come on, from which Pacheco naturally concluded that the zomorin would
+soon break up his encampment, on which occasion he was fully resolved to
+give them an assault, having sufficient experience of the pusillanimity
+of the enemy. But the zamorin, being afraid that Pacheco might attack him
+at his departure, gave out that he intended to make another assault on
+the ford with a greater fleet than ever, and even directed the floating
+castles to be repaired. He even gave out that he meant to assail the
+passage of _Palurte_ and the ford both at once; that Pacheco might occupy
+himself in preparing to defend both places, and he might have the better
+opportunity to steal away unperceived. Accordingly, on the evening of
+Saturday, which was the eve of St John[9], the whole army of the enemy
+appeared as usual, and Pacheco fully expected to have been attacked that
+night. Next morning, however, he learnt from two bramins that the zamorin
+had withdrawn with all his army into the island of Repelim. Pacheco was
+much disappointed at this news, yet he made a descent that very day into
+Repelim, where he fought with many of the enemy, killing and wounding a
+great number of them, and then returned to the ford, where he remained
+several days, because the rajah was still afraid lest the zamorin might
+return and get across the ford into the island of Cochin.
+
+The zamorin was so crest-fallen by the great and repeated losses he had
+sustained in this war from a mere handful of men, that he resolved to
+retire into religions seclusion, that he might conciliate the favour of
+his gods, and dismissed his allies and chiefs to act as they thought best.
+His princes and nobles endeavoured to dissuade him from this resolution,
+but he continued firm to his purpose, and went into the _torcul_ or
+religious state of seclusion, accompanied by some of his chief bramins or
+chaplains. Soon afterwards, his mother sent him word that great changes
+had taken place in Calicut since his seclusion. That many of the
+merchants had already deserted the place, and others were preparing to
+follow. That the city was becoming ill provided with victuals, as those
+who used to import them were afraid of the Christians. Yet she advised
+him never to return to Calicut, unless he could do so with honour; and
+that he should therefore continue in seclusion for a time, and afterwards
+endeavour to recover his credit and reputation by victory, or lose all in
+the attempt. On this message which greatly increased his discontent, the
+zamorin sent for his brother, to whom he confided the government of his
+dominions till such time as he should have completed his religious
+austerities in seclusion.
+
+On this strange resolution of the zamorin, the rajahs and nobles who had
+joined him in the war departed to their own countries, most of which lay
+on the coast. And being under great apprehensions that Pacheco might
+reduce their dominions, they endeavoured to enter into treaties with him
+for peace and concord; for which purpose they sent messages to Trimumpara,
+requesting that he would act as mediator between them and Pacheco. The
+rajah of Cochin was a prince of a mild and forgiving disposition; and
+forgetting all the past injuries they had done him in these wars, he
+undertook the office of mediation, and sent them safe conducts to come to
+Cochin to make their peace. On their arrival, he accompanied them to wait
+upon Pacheco, and even became their advocate with him to accept of their
+proferred friendship, which he readily consented to at the desire of the
+rajah. Some of these princes were unable to come personally, but sent
+their ambassadors to solicit peace, which was accorded to all who asked
+it. Several even of the great Moorish merchants of Calicut, that they
+might quietly enjoy their trade, forsook that place and came to dwell in
+Cochin, having previously secured the consent of Pacheco. Others of them
+went to Cananor and Coulan, by which means the great trade which used to
+be carried on at Calicut suddenly fell off.
+
+Owing to the great resort of Moors to Cochin, in whom Pacheco could not
+repose much confidence, and because, by the orders of Naubea Daring, the
+paraws of Calicut frequently made excursions into the rivers, the captain-
+general continued for a long while to defend the passage of the ford,
+where he often fought with and did much injury to his enemies. He made
+frequent incursions, likewise, into the island of Repelim, whence he
+carried off cattle and other provisions, and often fought with his
+enemies, always defeating them with much slaughter[10]. At length Elankol,
+the lord of that island, wishing to put an end to the miseries of his
+country, waited on Pacheco and entered into a treaty of friendship with
+him, making him a present of a great quantity of pepper, which was
+abundant in his country[11].
+
+
+[1] This paragraph, enumerating the forces of the zamorin, is added to
+    the text of Castaneda from Astley, Vol. I. p. 56.
+
+[2] The particular distribution of the force under Pacheco at this time
+    is thus enumerated in Astleys Collection: In the fort thirty-nine men;
+    in the ship left to defend Cochin twenty-five; in the caravel which
+    accompanied him in the expedition to Cambalan twenty-six; into one
+    boat twenty-three; and in the boat along with himself twenty-two;
+    making his whole effective force 135 men; seventy-one only of which
+    went along with him to defend the pass.--Astl. I. 56.
+
+[3] A very short space before these are only stated as twenty; but the
+    numbers and names in the text seem much corrupted.--E.
+
+[4] In a former note we have given a list of the names and circumstances
+    of the English ordnance near this period. In that list the saker is
+    described as a light cannon of only 5-1/2 pound ball, now looked upon
+    as one of very small importance; we may therefore conclude that the
+    other cannon used on the present occasion could hardly exceed
+    _falcouns_, or two-pounders.--E.
+
+[5] Such is the unintelligible expression in Lichefilds translation. In
+    the account of this war compiled by the editor of Astleys Collection
+    from the Portuguese historians, the enemy are said to have lost in the
+    former part of this battle, twenty paraws sunk, 180 persons of note,
+    and above 1000 common men; while in the second attack, nineteen paraws
+    were sunk, sixty-two fled, and 360 men were slain. In this account, a
+    third naval engagement is mentioned, in which sixty-two paraws were
+    sunk, and sixty fled; after which 15,000 men were defeated by land,
+    and four towns were burnt by Pacheco.--Astl. I. 56.
+
+[6] Castaneda tells a long ridiculous story at this place, of a ceremonial
+    defiance of the zamorin, not worth inserting. In Astley, I. 56. we are
+    told that the Moors of Cochin were detected about this time
+    communicating intelligence to the enemy, and that Trimumpara allowed
+    Pacheco to punish them. On which he put five of their chief men into
+    strict confinement, giving out that they were hanged; which gave much
+    offence to the rajah and his people.--E.
+
+[7] Such are the words of Lichefild; which, perhaps may have been intended
+    to imply that there was not yet sufficient depth of water to allow of
+    their approach to the caravels; or it may mean that they waited for
+    the tide of ebb, to carry them towards the Portuguese caravels, being
+    too cumbrous for management by means of oars.--E.
+
+[8] This seems the same story which has been already mentioned in a former
+    note, from Astleys Collection; but which is there related as having
+    taken place with _Moors_.--E.
+
+[9] The nativity of St John the Baptist is the 24th June; the eve
+    therefore is the 23d, yet Castaneda has already said that June was
+    ended.--E.
+
+[10] About this time, in consequence of a message from the Portuguese
+    factor at Coulan, stating that the Moors obstructed the market for
+    pepper, Pacheco went to that place, where he made five Moorish ships
+    submit, and settled the pepper market on fair terms, yet without doing
+    them any harm.--Astl. I. 57.
+
+[11] According to Astley, the zamorin lost 18,000 men in this war in five
+    months, and desired peace, which was granted by the rajah of Cochin.--
+    Astl. I. 57. Yet this could hardly be the case, as the first operation
+    of the new commander-in-chief in India was to cannonade Calicut.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_The Voyage of Lope Suarez de Menesis to India, in 1504; being the sixth
+of the Portuguese Expeditions to the East Indies._
+
+Learning the necessity of sending powerful succours to protect the
+Portuguese trade from the hostilities of the zamorin, the king of
+Portugal fitted out a fleet of twelve[1] large ships in 1504, of which
+the command was given to Lope Suarez de Menesis, who had been captain of
+the _Mina_ on the coast of Guinea in the reign of John II. The captains
+of these ships were, Pedro de Mendoza, Lionel Cotinho, Tristan de la
+Silva, Lope Mendez de Vasconcelles, Lope de Abreu, Philip de Castro,
+Alonso Lopez de Castro, Alonzo Lopez de la Cocta, Pero Alonzo de Aguilar,
+Vasco de la Silvero, Vasco Carvallo, and Pedro Dynez de Sutunell: All of
+whom were gentlemen by birth or service. Having embarked many valiant
+soldiers, the whole fleet left Lisbon on the 22d of April and arrived on
+the 2d of May near Cape Verd. Having observed during this part of the
+voyage, that several of the ships were very irregularly navigated, not
+keeping in their proper course, by which they had run foul of each other;
+some pushing before, while others lagged behind, and others stood athwart
+the order of the fleet; Suarez convened an assemblage of all the captains,
+masters, and pilots of the fleet, to whom he communicated the following
+written instructions: 1. As soon as it is night, every ship shall keep in
+regular order a-stern of the admiral; and no vessel to carry any light
+except in the binnacle and in the cabin. 2. The masters and pilots to
+keep regular watch, taking special care not to run foul of each other. 3.
+All to answer the signals of the admiral. 4. As soon as day appears,
+every ship shall come to salute the admiral, and all are carefully to
+avoid getting before him during the night. The penalty for breach of any
+of these articles was a fine of ten crowns, besides which the offender
+was to be put under arrest without being entitled to wages, and so to
+remain to the end of the voyage. As some of the masters and pilots had
+been very negligent, allowing some of the ships to fall aboard of others,
+he removed these to other ships. By this attention to discipline, the
+fleet was kept afterwards in good sailing order.
+
+In the month of June, at which time they reckoned themselves off the Cape
+of Good Hope, the fleet was surprised by a heavy storm, and had to drive
+for two days and nights under bare poles in imminent danger of being cast
+away, the weather during all this time being wonderfully dark, so that
+the ships were in great hazard of running aboard of each other. To guard
+against this danger, the admiral caused guns to be fired at intervals
+from all the ships, to give notice of their situations, and the better to
+keep company. On the subsidence of the storm, the ship commanded by Lope
+Mendez was missing, and the admiral caused the fleet to lie to for some
+days in hopes of her reappearance. While in this situation, two of the
+ships ran foul of each other, by which a large hole was broken in the bow
+of one of the ships, through which she took in so much water as to be in
+great danger of sulking. The admiral immediately bore up to her
+assistance, and encouraged the crew to stop the leak, and even sent his
+boats on board to give every aid. By great exertions they got the leak
+effectually stopped, by nailing hides over the hole, and covering the
+whole with pitch. On St Jameses day, 25th July, the fleet arrived at
+Mozambique, where they were well received by the governor, who supplied
+them abundantly with fresh provisions, and sent off the letter which
+Pedro de Tayde had written respecting the state of affairs in India a
+short time before his death, as formerly mentioned. The admiral expedited
+the refitting of the ships which had been so much injured, as quickly as
+possible, and departed from Mozambique on the 1st of August. The king of
+Melinda sent off one of his principal Moors to visit the admiral, to whom
+likewise he sent sixteen of our men who had deserted from Pedro de Tayde.
+
+Having stopt only two days at Melinda for refreshment, the fleet sailed
+across for India, and came to Anchediva, where they found two Portuguese
+ships commanded by Antonio de Saldanna and Ruy Lorenzo, who were much
+afraid of our fleet, suspecting it to have belonged to the Rumes[2].
+Saldanna informed Suarez, that he had been sent out the year before from
+Portugal along with Lorenzo, as vice-admiral, with orders to explore the
+Red Sea and adjacent countries. That they were separated in a storm off
+the Cape of Good Hope. That Lorenzo proceeding alone in the voyage, had
+taken a ship belonging to the Moors near Sofala, out of which he had
+taken a large quantity of gold, and had left the hull at Melinda. That
+Saldanna prosecuted his voyage to Cape Guardafui, where he had taken many
+rich prizes, without having entered the Red Sea; after which he had
+sailed to India, and the winter coming on, had taken shelter in Anchediva,
+where he was afterwards joined by Lorenzo. At this place, Lope Mendez de
+Vasconcelles, who had been separated in the storm off the Cape of Good
+Hope, rejoined the fleet. The admiral used every expedition to get the
+fleet ready to proceed for Cananor, where he arrived on the 1st of
+September, and was informed by the factor of the events in the war with
+Calicut; and how he and his companions in the factory had been often in
+great hazard of their lives.
+
+The day after his arrival, the admiral went on shore in great state to
+visit the rajah of Cananor, attended by all the captains of the fleet in
+their boats, decorated with flags and streamers, and armed with ordnance,
+all the boats crews being dressed in their best apparel. The admirals
+barge had a rich awning, and was dressed out with carpets, on which stood
+a chair of state covered with unshorn crimson velvet and two cushions of
+the same for his feet. His doublet and hose were of satin of divers
+colours, wrought diamond fashion; his shoes of black velvet, studded with
+gold; his cap covered over with gold buttons. Over all he wore a loose
+robe or gown of black velvet, in the French fashion, trimmed all round
+with gold lace. From his neck hung a triple chain of gold enamelled, from
+which depended a golden whistle. His rapier and dagger, which were borne
+by a page, had handles of pure gold. Two lackeys preceded him in
+splendid attire and six trumpeters with silk flags. He was also
+accompanied by a band of wind instruments, in a small boat In another
+boat were the presents which he carried for the rajah from the king of
+Portugal. There were, six beds of fine Holland, with their pillows of the
+same, all wrought with gold embroidery. Two coverlets or carpets of
+unshorn crimson velvet, quilted all over, having three guards of cloth of
+gold, that in the middle a span in width, and the others two fingers
+broad. The bedstead was gilded all over, having curtains of crimson satin,
+fringed with cold thread. On putting off from his ship, all the fleet
+saluted him with their cannon; then the trumpets and drums sounded for a
+long time; after which the organs never ceased to play till the boats
+reached the shore, where vast numbers of Moors and Gentiles waited to
+receive the admiral.
+
+On his landing, the admiral Was conducted into a _sarame_ or house
+appointed for his reception and audience of the rajah, in which he
+ordered the bed and all its rich furniture to be set up, close to which
+was placed a chair for the admiral to sit upon. Soon afterwards, the
+rajah was brought to the house, carried in a rich chair of state,
+preceded by three armed elephants, three thousand nayres, armed with
+swords, spears, and targets, and two thousand armed with bows and arrows.
+The admiral, apprized of the rajah's approach by the fleet saluting him
+with all their guns, went to the door to receive him, where they embraced.
+Then going together into the apartment, the admiral presented him with
+the bed already described, on which the rajah immediately lay down, and
+the admiral sat down beside him in the place appointed. They here
+conferred together for two hours, when they were interrupted by the
+barking of a greyhound belonging to the admiral, which wanted to attack
+one of the elephants.
+
+Soon afterwards a Moor from Calicut waited upon the admiral, having along
+with him a Portuguese boy, who brought a letter from some of our men who
+were captives at Calicut ever since the time of Cabral being there. This
+boy informed the admiral, that the zamorin was so humbled by the defeats
+he had sustained from Pacheco, that he had gone into religious seclusion.
+That many of the Moorish merchants had gone from Calicut to other places,
+as they could carry on no trade there owing to the war, and that even
+provisions had become extremely scarce. That the zamorin and the prince
+of Calicut, and the magistrates of that place, were exceedingly desirous
+of peace with the Portuguese, for which reason they had sent him to the
+admiral, and had allowed the Portuguese prisoners there to write him to
+that effect, which they had done accordingly, but chiefly in hopes that
+he would free them from captivity. After reading the letter, the admiral
+would have sent a written answer, meaning to have sent it by the Moor.
+But the boy told him, they had no permission to carry any letter, and
+that he must return along with the Moor, as the people of Calicut had
+threatened to put all their Portuguese prisoners to death in case he did
+not return. On this account, the admiral gave the boy a verbal message
+for the prisoners; saying that he would very soon come to Calicut, where
+he would anchor as near as possible to the shore; and as the captives
+were allowed to go about the city without irons, they might find an
+opportunity to come off to the fleet either in boats or by swimming.
+
+Suarez went accordingly with the fleet to Calicut, where he came to
+anchor on Saturday the 7th September; and presently afterwards the boy
+who had been to visit him at Cananor came on board, accompanied by a
+servant of Cosebequin, who brought the admiral a present from the rulers
+of Cochin, and a message requiring a safe conduct for Cosebequin, that he
+might come on board to treat for peace. The admiral refused to accept of
+any present until such time as peace were restored; but sent word that
+Cosebequin might repair on board without fear, as a servant of the king
+of Portugal; he sent a private message at the same time to the Portuguese
+prisoners, advising them to use their best endeavours to escape. On
+receiving this message, Cosebequin was sent on board by the governors of
+Calicut, to treat of peace, carrying with him two of the Portuguese
+captives. They requested he would wait three or four days, by which time
+they believed the zamorin would come out from his seclusion, and that
+they were convinced he would agree to all that should be required. The
+admiral answered, that unless they would deliver up the two Italian
+deserters he would agree to no terms; but he sent no message for the
+liberation of our captives, as he thought they might easily escape. As
+soon as the Italians learnt that the admiral had demanded them, they
+suspected the captives would run away of which circumstance they gave
+notice to the governors, requiring them to secure the Portuguese captives,
+as they were men of consideration, and that a peace might be procured in
+exchange for them almost on any terms the zamorin pleased to prescribe.
+On this advice, the governors took care to prevent the captives from
+escaping, and became less urgent in their desire of peace. Owing to this,
+they remained in captivity till Don Francisco de Almeida became viceroy
+of India, though some made their escape in the interim, and others of
+them fell victims to the diseases of the climate.
+
+After waiting some days, and finding no friendly steps taken by the
+governors of Calicut towards a peace; and being likewise without hope of
+recovering the captives, Suarez resolved to take revenge by cannonading
+the city of Calicut, which he did for a whole day and a night, during
+which time he did prodigious damage, destroying the palace of the zamorin,
+several of their pagodas or idol temples, and many of the houses, and
+slew a great number of the inhabitants. For this service, he brought
+seven of his smallest ships as near the shore as possible, and advanced
+all the boats of the fleet, likewise carrying ordnance, close almost to
+the beach. After this he departed for Cochin, where he arrived on
+Saturday the 13th of September. He landed next day near the Portuguese
+castle, in as great state as he had done before at Cananor, and was
+received with many marks of satisfaction by Trimumpara. After embracing,
+they went hand in hand into the hall, in which a chair of state was
+placed for the admiral. As the rajah sat on the cushions on the floor,
+according to the custom of the country, and was therefore much lower than
+the admiral, he commanded his chair to be removed somewhat farther from
+the rajah, by which he greatly offended the native chiefs who were
+present at the interview. He now delivered to Trimumpara a letter from
+the king of Portugal, in which great compliments and many thanks were
+given, for the favour and protection the rajah had vouchsafed to the
+Portuguese. To this the rajah answered, that he had been amply repaid, by
+the good service which Duarte Pacheco had rendered him in the war with
+the zamorin. Next day, the admiral sent a large sum of money to
+Trimumpara, as a present from the king of Portugal, who knew that his
+finances had been greatly injured ill consequence of the war with Calicut.
+
+Soon after, Suarez sent Pedro de Mendoza and Vasco Carvallo with their
+ships to guard the coast of Calicut, with orders to capture all ships
+belonging to the Moors that were laden with spices. He likewise
+dispatched De la Cocta, Aguilar, Cotinho, and Abreu, to go to Coulan to
+take in their loading, being informed that spices were to be had there in
+abundance. He likewise sent Tristan de la Silva with four armed boats up
+the rivers towards Cranganor, against some armed paraws of Calicut which
+were stationed in that quarter. In this expedition, Silva had a skirmish
+with these paraws and some nayres on the shores of the rivers; but
+falling in with a Moorish ship laden with pepper, he captured her and
+brought her to Cochin, where he and the other captains loaded their ships,
+as spices were now procured in great abundance.
+
+Duarte Pacheco happened to be off Coulan when he learnt the arrival of
+Suarez; and knowing that his own command was ended so soon as the new
+captain-general should arrive at Cochin, determined to attempt some
+exploits while he remained master of his own conduct. With this view, he
+put to sea on the 22d of October, and soon after got sight of a ship at a
+great distance, to which he gave chase all that day and part of the night.
+The chase was driven into Coulan, when Pacheco learnt that she _belonged
+to the confederates[3]_, and was bound from Coromandel. He immediately
+afterwards descried three ships of Calicut, to which he gave chase,
+keeping as near the coast a possible to take the advantage of a land
+breeze. In the morning he put off to sea in chase of the vessel, which he
+was unable to get up with till towards evening close to the land; after a
+brave defence, as the ship had many men, she at length yielded; and not
+chusing to encumber himself with so many prisoners, he landed a part of
+her company, and made the rest prisoners in irons in his own ship.
+Learning that this was one of the three ships belonging to Calicut of
+which he was in search, he put two of his men on board the prize, with
+orders to keep him company. Being arrived directly abreast of Cape
+Comorin, he met with a sudden whirlwind, by which he was nearly cast away,
+and when this subsided, he came to anchor within a league of the shore,
+where he remained all night. While at anchor thirty of his Moorish
+prisoners made their escape, twelve of whom were retaken by means of his
+boat. Pacheco remained for some time off the Cape in expectation of the
+other ships of the Moors coming round from Coromandel, but none making
+their appearance, he went to Coulan with the ship he had captured, which
+he delivered to the factor at that city with all its rich merchandize. He
+then went to Cochin, where he put himself under the command of Suarez.
+
+The zamorin had now resumed the government, having withdrawn from the
+_torcul_ or religious seclusion. He had dispatched one of his generals
+with a fleet of eighty paraws and fifty ships[4] to defend the passages
+of the rivers, and to obstruct the trade of Cochin with the interior; and
+had likewise set on foot a considerable land army under the prince Naubea
+Daring. It was the intention of the zamorin to stand on the defensive
+only while the Portuguese fleet remained in India, and to renew the war
+against Cochin after their departure. But the admiral Suarez, by the
+advice of all his captains, resolved to make an attack on Cranganor, a
+town belonging to the zamorin, about four leagues from Cochin, whence the
+enemy had often done much injury to the dominions of Trimumpara during
+the late war. For this purpose, Suarez took fifteen armed boats with
+raised defences on their gunwales, and twenty-five paraws belonging to
+Cochin, all armed with cannon, and accompanied by a caravel, the whole
+manned with about 1000 Portuguese soldiers, and an equal number of nayres
+from Cochin. The armament arrived before day at _Palypuerto_, where it
+had to wait for daylight, not daring to attempt the passage of certain
+shoals, as the boats were heavily laden. On arriving at Cranganor, the
+fleet of Calicut was found drawn up ready to repel the Portuguese attack.
+The Calicut commander was posted in the front, in two new ships chained
+together, which were full of ordnance and well manned; chiefly by archers.
+In the rear of these ships, and on both flanks, the paraws of Calicut
+were arranged, all full of armed men.
+
+On the arrival of the Portuguese flotilla, the battle immediately
+commenced by the discharge of ordnance on both sides. Five Portuguese
+captains who led the van, pushed on to attack the Calicut admiral in his
+two chained ships, which they carried by boarding after a brave
+resistance, in which that officer and two of his sons with many others of
+the Malabars were slain. After the capture of these ships, the paraws
+made little resistance, and soon took to flight. Suarez immediately
+disembarked his troops, which soon put Naubea Daring to flight, who
+commanded the land army of Calicut. The Moors and Malabars in their
+flight, plundered the houses of Cranganor, which was immediately
+afterwards set on fire by the Portuguese. Certain Christian inhabitants
+of the place came to Suarez and prayed him not to burn their city,
+representing that it contained several churches dedicated to the Virgin
+and the Apostles, besides many Christian houses which were interspersed
+among these belonging to the Moors and Gentiles. For their sakes, Suarez
+ordered the conflagration to be stopped; yet many of the houses were
+destroyed before that could be effected, as they were all of wood. After
+the fire was quenched, our men plundered the houses belonging to the
+Moors, many of whom had formerly dwelt in Cochin. The two ships, and
+several paraws which had been taken in the before mentioned engagement,
+were set on fire, and other three ships that were found drawn on shore.
+
+At this time Suarez was joined by the prince of Cochin, who informed him
+that Naubea Daring remained with his army at no great distance, and
+intended to return to Cranganor after his departure. A considerable force
+was therefore sent against Naubea Daring; but immediately on seeing their
+approach, the troops of Calicut fled. On the return of the Portuguese
+flotilla towards Cochin, Suarez was disposed to have destroyed another
+town which lay near their passage; but the prince of Cochin represented
+that half of it belonged to him, and prevailed on the admiral to spare it,
+as he could not destroy one part without the other. Suarez, therefore,
+returned to Cochin, where he knighted some of his officers for their
+bravery during the last engagement. A few days after his return, there
+came an ambassador from the rajah of _Tanor_, whose dominions are next
+adjoining to those of Cochin. This ambassador represented, that his
+master had hitherto adhered to the zamorin, and had assisted him in all
+his wars against Pacheco. But that the zamorin, since he had come out
+from his religious seclusion, had redoubled his arrogant ideas of his
+irresistible power, and in reward of the services of the rajah of Tanor,
+now threatened him with war and conquest. He farther represented, that on
+the late occasion, when the general of the Calicut forces was in full
+march for the relief of Cranganor, the rajah of Tanor had placed 4000 of
+his nayres in ambush in a defile in their line of march, who had defeated
+the troops of Calicut, and hod slain 2000 of them. On this account the
+rajah of Tanor was in great fear of the zamorin, and humbly requested
+assistance from the admiral, promising in return to become subject to the
+king of Portugal.
+
+For this purpose, the admiral sent Pedro Raphael in a caravel to Tanor,
+with 100 soldiers, most of whom were crossbow men. It chanced that on the
+very day of his arrival at Tanor, the zamorin arrived before that city
+with his army and gave battle to the rajah; but, chiefly owing to the
+valour of Raphael and his company, the army of the zamorin was defeated
+with great slaughter. In reward for this well-timed succour, the rajah of
+Tanor became subject to the king of Portugal. In consequence of this
+defeat, the zamorin was much humbled, and lost more credit with the Moors
+than by all the victories which Pacheco had obtained; as these had been
+obtained by strangers, while the present victory had been gained by a
+native prince. In consequence of these reverses, seeing no likelihood of
+ever being able to recover their trade, all the Moors who dwelt in
+Calicut and Cranganor determined upon removing to their own country with
+their remaining wealth. For this purpose, they fitted up seventeen large
+ships at _Pandarane_, which they armed on purpose to defend themselves
+against any attack from our men, and loaded them with all expedition for
+Mecca. Besides these, they loaded a great number of paraws and tonys with
+such goods as the ships were unable to contain.
+
+The season now approached for the return of the fleet to Portugal, and
+Suarez appointed Manuel Telez de Vasconcelles[5] as captain-general of
+the Indies, with whom he left a ship and two caravels, of which last
+Pedro Raphael and Diego Perez were captains. The admiral presented these
+officers to the rajah of Cochin, who would much rather have procured
+Duarte Pacheco to remain, having great confidence in his valour and
+attachment to his service, but dared not to request this of the admiral,
+as he was of a haughty disposition. In a conference between Pacheco
+and the rajah, the latter entreated him to remain in India if possible,
+as he did not think himself quite secure from the enmity of the zamorin;
+and even urged him to remember that he had promised not to leave him till
+he had made him king of Calicut. Pacheco answered, that he left him in a
+good situation, his country being restored to quiet, and the zamorin so
+much humbled that he was no longer to be dreaded; as a proof of which the
+Moors were about to depart from Calicut, seeing their trade entirely
+ruined. And that he hoped to return from Portugal, and to serve him
+longer and to greater purpose than he had done hitherto. The rajah was
+somewhat satisfied with this answer, and craved pardon of Pacheco that he
+had not rewarded his services as they deserved, because he was extremely
+poor; yet requested he would take as much pepper as he pleased. Pacheco
+refused to accept of any thing; saying, he hoped to find the rajah rich
+and prosperous on his return to Cochin, and then he would accept a reward.
+The rajah gave Pacheco a letter for the king of Portugal, in which he set
+forth all his gallant actions during the war, strongly recommending him
+to his majesties favour.
+
+The admiral Suarez departed from Cochin on the 27th December[6], taking
+with him the whole of his fleet, even those captains who were to remain
+in India. His intention was to have come to anchor in the harbour of
+Paniani, on purpose to visit the rajah of Tanor; but from foul weather,
+and bad pilots, the fleet could not make that port, and was driven to
+Calicut and Pandarane. Being off these ports and with a scanty wind, the
+admiral detached Raphael and Perez with their caravels, to examine if
+there were any ships of the Moors at anchor. While on this service, ten
+paraws came off to attack them, and an engagement ensued. On the rest of
+the fleet hearing the sound of the ordnance, they bore up as close to the
+wind as possible, and came to anchor[7]. In a council of war, it was
+resolved to attack the seventeen ships of the Moors, which lay all
+aground; and as the ships were unable to get near them, because they lay
+within the bar, the attack was determined to be made by the boats of the
+fleet, with orders to set the Moorish ships on fire. This being resolved
+upon, the admiral and all the captains of the fleet embarked in the boats,
+taking with them all the soldiers belonging to the expedition.
+
+The Moorish ships were all drawn on the beach in a close line, having
+their sterns to the shore, and were well armed with ordnance, and had
+many soldiers on board armed with bows and arrows, a considerable number
+of them being men of a fair complexion[8]. Besides all these, the Moors
+had two pieces of ordnance on a small bulwark or redoubt which flanked
+the passage of the bar. Our boats, seeing all these formidable
+preparations, returned towards the fleet[9], whence they towed several
+caravels within the bar to assist the boats in the attack. After a severe
+conflict, in which the Portuguese had twenty-five men killed, and 127
+wounded, the whole seventeen ships of the Moors were boarded and taken,
+with the loss of 2000 men. But as the Moorish ships were all aground, the
+victors were under the necessity to burn them, with all the rich
+merchandize they contained. Owing to this severe loss, the Moors deserted
+the city of Calicut, which by the cessation of trade became much
+distressed for provisions, insomuch that most of its inhabitants withdrew
+to other places. The zamorin was so much humbled by this succession of
+disastrous events, that he remained quiet for a long time afterwards[10].
+
+The particular incidents of this engagement are so confusedly related in
+Lichefilds translation of Castaneda as to baffle every attempt to reduce
+them into intelligible order. Among these, the two following are more
+distinctly told. Tristan de la Silva endeavoured to board a ship which
+appeared to be the admiral, of which the captain and a numerous crew were
+Turks. A little before De Silva got up to this ship, the crew had fired
+off a piece of ordnance which lay on the upper deck, and which by its
+recoil broke a large hole in the side of the ship. The Turks were so
+intent on defending themselves against the Portuguese boats, that they
+neglected to barricade this hole, of which the people in De Silvas boat
+took advantage to get on board; Alonzo Lopez the master, and Alvaro Lopez
+one of the kings servants, now town-clerk of Santarem, being the first
+who entered by the hole. A desperate conflict ensued on deck, in which
+many of the Turks were slain, others hid themselves below the hatches,
+and others leapt into the water, most of whom were drowned, as they were
+covered with shirts of mail.
+
+The caravel commanded by Pedro Raphael, one of these brought within the
+bar to co-operate with the boats, was struck by a ball from the battery
+on shore, which killed three men and dangerously wounded other ten. In
+the confusion occasioned by this accident, another shot killed the master
+at the helm, and the caravel drove with the tide of flood right under the
+bows of a large Moorish ship full of men which had not yet been attacked
+by the boats. In this situation, a great number of the enemy boarded the
+caravel, _and used our men very ill_. The caravel afterwards drifted on
+certain rocks, where she remained till the end of the battle. The
+situation of the caravel was now perceived by the admiral, who ordered
+effectual succour to be sent to Raphael. The succours boarded the caravel,
+which was quite full of Moors, whom they drove out with great slaughter;
+but all of our men belonging to that caravel were sore hurt.
+
+On the next day, being the first of January 1505, the admiral went with
+the fleet to Cananor, to take in the rest of his lading. He was here
+informed by the factor of the humbled situation of the Moors, from whom,
+in his opinion, the Portuguese had no longer any thing to fear in India.
+Being ready to depart for Europe, the admiral made an oration to Manual
+Telez, and those who were to remain with him in India, giving them
+instructions for their conduct after his departure; and as the enemy was
+so greatly humbled, he considered that such a fleet as had formerly been
+left by Albuquerque was quite sufficient, in which he left an hundred
+soldiers. Indeed the zamorin, as has been already said, was sick of the
+war, and remained quiet after the departure of the admiral.
+
+Departing from Cananor, Suarez arrived off Melinda on the 1st of February;
+where, without landing himself, he sent Antonio de Saldanna to bring away
+the rich prizes he had formerly made at Cape Guardafui. From Melinda, the
+fleet went to Quiloa, on purpose to enforce the payment of the tribute
+from the king of that place. Departing from thence on the 10th of
+February, he arrived safe at Lisbon on the 22d of June 1505[11], without
+any incident worth relating[12]; carrying with him two ships more than
+had accompanied him to India, all laden with rich commodities, and was
+received by the King Don Manuel with great honour.
+
+When the king learnt the great service which Pacheco had performed in
+India, he expressed his high approbation of his conduct in a public
+procession. The king went, in all the splendour usually shewn on _Corpus
+Christi_ day, from the high church to that of St Domingo, accompanied by
+Duarte Pacheco. After solemn service, a sermon was preached by Don Diego
+Ortis, bishop of Viseo; who, by the kings command, gave a rehearsal of
+all that had been performed by Pacheco in the war against the zamorin. On
+the same day, a solemn festival was held in all the churches of Portugal
+and Algarve. The king sent letters on the occasion to the pope and all
+the princes of Christendom, announcing all these notable acts and
+victories which had been performed in the Indies.[13]
+
+
+[1] These are said to have been the largest ships hitherto built in
+    Portugal, and to have carried 1200 men; perhaps soldiers, besides
+    their ordinary crews.--Astl. I. 57.
+
+[2] The Turkish empire, as succeeding that of the Romans or Greeks of
+    Constantinople, is still called _Rumi_ in the east. It will be
+    afterwards seen, that these _Rumes_, Romans, or Turks, made some
+    powerful efforts to drive the Portuguese from India, as greatly
+    injurious to the Indian trade with Europe through the Red Sea and
+    Egypt.--E.
+
+[3] This expression is quite inexplicable, unless we may pick out very
+    darkly that it belonged to the Calicut confederacy against the
+    Portuguese. Yet Castaneda, or his imperfect translator Lichefild, does
+    not inform us whether this vessel was made a prize. Lichefild seems
+    almost always to have had a very imperfect knowledge of the language
+    of the author, often to have mistaken his meaning or expressed it with
+    great obscurity, and sometimes writes even a kind of jargon, by
+    endeavouring to translate verbally without being able to catch an idea
+    from the original.--E.
+
+[4] According to Astley, from De Fariz only _five_ ships; and indeed in
+    the sequel, Castaneda only mentions _two_ ships as employed, on the
+    present occasion and three others that were drawn up on shore.--E.
+
+[5] At the commencement of this section, Castaneda names this person Lope
+    Mendez de Vasconcelles; in Astley, I. 58, he is called Manuel Tellez
+    Barreto.--E.
+
+[6] In Lichefilds translation of Castaneda, this date is made the 27th
+    September, which is an obvious mistake.--E.
+
+[7] By some strange blunder, Lichefild says they came to _Cananor_; but
+    from all the circumstances in the contexts, it is obvious that the
+    fleet came to anchor on the outside of the bar at Pandarane.--E.
+
+[8] Arabs probably, whites in the estimation of the Portuguese as
+    compared with the native blacks of Malabar.--E.
+
+[9] This part of the story is very confusedly translated by Lichefild.
+    According to his relation, in one sense, the admiral alone returned in
+    his boat for the caravels; while, by another part of his expressions,
+    the whole boats returned for the admiral and the caravels.--E.
+
+[10] According to Astley, a peace was concluded between the Portuguese
+    and the zamorin immediately after the victory obtained by the rajah of
+    Tanore; but this does not agree with the circumstances just related
+    respecting the destruction of the Moorish fleet in the harbour of
+    Pandarane, which would hardly have been done during a time of peace--E.
+
+[11] By some strange typographical mistake, Lichefild makes this date
+    1525, both in the text and in a marginal note, thus adding no less
+    than twenty years to the true chronology. In Astleys Collection, the
+    conclusion of this voyage is dated 22d July 1506; but we have chosen
+    to retain the regular series of dates as given by Castaneda. Owing to
+    the mistake in Lichefilds translation not being detected till a part
+    of this chapter was printed off, it has been repeated in our
+    introduction to this article, which our readers are requested to
+    correct.--E.
+
+[12] In Astley, the ship commanded by Pedro Mendoza, is said to have been
+    stranded during the homeward voyage, fourteen leagues from the
+    _Aguada_, or watering-place of St Blas, and never more heard of.--Astl.
+    I. 58.
+
+[13] Astley concludes the account of the honours conferred on Pacheco in
+    the following words: "But soon after imprisoned, and allowed him to
+    die miserably. A terrible example of the uncertainty of royal favour,
+    and the little regard that is had to true merit!"--Astl. I. 58.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+LETTERS FROM LISBON IN THE BEGINNING OF THE SIXTEENTH CENTURY, RESPECTING
+THE THEN RECENT DISCOVERY OF THE ROUTE BY SEA TO INDIA.[1]
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+The following letters bear to have been written by some Italian public
+agents and merchants, to their employers and friends, and contain a
+curious record of the first impressions made on the public mind by the
+wonderful discoveries which navigation was then opening up to the
+European world. They are selected from the _Novus Orbis_, a work which
+was published by _Simon Grynæus_ early in the sixteenth century.
+According to M. de la Richarderie,[2] this collection was formed by Hans
+Heteirs, canon of Strasburg, and was printed under the care of Simon
+Grynæus, by Isaac Hervag, in folio, at Basil in 1532. We learn likewise
+that it passed rapidly through several editions, having been reprinted at
+Basil in 1535, 1537, and 1555; and at Paris in 1582. The edition used on
+the present occasion is printed at Basil in 1555 by Jo. Hervag. Its
+principal contents, besides those translated for the present chapter, are
+the voyages of Cada Mosto, already given; the discovery of America by
+Christopher Columbus, which will form the first article in our subsequent
+volume; the voyages of Vincent Alonzo Pinzon, and of Americus Vespucius,
+which will be attended to hereafter; and the travels of Marco Polo, which
+have been already given at full length from a better source.
+
+The language of the _Novus Orbis_ is perhaps the most barbarous Latin
+ever composed for the press, and its punctuation is so enormously
+incorrect that it would have been easier understood without any points
+whatever.
+
+As already mentioned, the edition here used is dated in the year 1555,
+little more than fifty years after the discoveries they commemorate; and
+the letters themselves are dated in 1501, 1502, and 1503, immediately
+after the return of the earliest of the Portuguese voyages from India.
+Indeed the first letter seems to have been written only a day or two
+after the arrival of the first ship belonging to Cabrals fleet.
+
+This work is accompanied by a very curious map of the world, on one
+planisphere, much elongated to the east and west, which may be considered
+as a complete picture of the knowledge then acquired of the cosmography
+of our globe. The first meridian is placed at the island of Ferro, and
+the degrees of longitude are counted from thence eastwards all round the
+world, so that Ferro is in long. 0° and 360° E. In every part of the
+world, the outlines are grossly incorrect, and it would serve no purpose
+to give an extended critical view of this map; yet a few notices
+respecting it may gratify curiosity.
+
+Europe is singularly incorrect, especially in the north and east. America,
+called likewise _Terra Nova_, has an approximated delineation of its
+southern division, stretching far to the south, as if the cosmographer
+had received some tolerable notices of Brazil, Cape Horn, and the coasts
+of Peru and Chili. But instead of the continent of North America, the
+island of Cuba is delineated in a north and south direction, reaching
+between the latitudes of 10° and 50° north; leaving a small strait or
+passage between its southern extremity and the Isthmus of Darien into the
+South Sea. About twelve degrees west from Cuba the island of Zipangri is
+placed; and at least twenty degrees east from Cathay or China. At sixteen
+degrees east from the northern end of Cuba, a large island is placed in
+the _Oceanus Magnus_ or Atlantic, called _Terra Cortesia_; which the
+cosmographer seems to have intended to represent the kingdom of Mexico,
+recently discovered by Cortez; though placed almost in lat. 50° N.
+Perhaps this may be an error for _Corterealis_, an early navigator, who
+is said to have made discoveries on the eastern coast of North America.
+
+In Africa there is an approximation towards its true shape; yet the
+_Caput Viride_, or Cape Verd, is placed to the north of the river Senegal,
+instead of between that river and the Gambia; and the sources of the Nile
+are brought down to lat. 15° S. at least twenty-two degrees too far to
+the southwards.
+
+Asia, with India and China, are too much distorted for criticism. Calicut
+is placed in the peninsula of Cambaya or Guzerate. The _Aurea
+Chersonesus_ and _Regnum Malacha_, or Malacca, are separated by a great
+gulf, while the latter is placed so low as 30° S. latitude. This much may
+suffice for an account of the incorrect yet curious specimen of
+cosmographical knowledge which had been acquired by the learned in Europe
+about 300 years ago.
+
+To these four letters we have added a short account of several curious
+circumstances relative to the trade of the Europeans with India at the
+commencement of the sixteenth century, or three hundred years ago; which,
+though not very accurately expressed, contains some curious information.
+
+
+[1] Novus Orbis Grynæi, p. 94-102.
+
+[2] Bibl. Univ. des Voy. I. 55, and V. 486.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Letter from the Venetian Envoy in Portugal to the Republic_[1].
+
+Most serene prince, &c. Believing that your highness has been already
+informed by the most excellent legate, of all the memorable things which
+have occurred in this place, and particularly respecting the fleet so
+lately dispatched for India by the king of Portugal, which, by the
+blessing of God, has now returned with the loss of seven ships; as it
+originally consisted of fourteen sail, seven of which only have come home,
+the other seven having been wrecked in the voyage. Their voyage was along
+the coasts of Mauritania and Getulia to Cape Verd, anciently called
+_Experias_; off which the islands called the _Hesperides_ are situated.
+From thence they explored lower _Ethiopia_ towards the east, beyond which
+the ancients never penetrated. They sailed along this _eastern_ coast of
+Ethiopia to a line corresponding with the meridian of Sicily, about five
+or six degrees _within_ the equinoctial, the gold mines belonging to the
+king of Portugal being about the middle of that coast.[2] Beyond that
+coast of the gold mines, and nine degrees to the south of the _winter
+tropic_,[3] they came to a great promontory called the Cape of Good Hope,
+which is almost 5000 miles distant from our country. From thence they
+came to the cape anciently called _Prasum_, which was considered by
+Ptolemy as the extremity of the southern regions, all beyond being
+unknown to the ancients. After that they reached the country of the
+_Troglodites_, now called _Zaphala_, or Sofala, which our ancestors
+affirm to have abounded in gold, infinitely more than any other part of
+the earth. Stretching from Sofala across the _Barbaric Gulf_,[4] they
+came into the Indian Ocean, and at length to the city of Calicut. Such
+was their voyage, which carefully calculated, as following the coasts of
+the ocean, extends to the prodigious length of 15,000 miles; but which,
+if the lands and mountains would allow in a direct line, were greatly
+shorter.
+
+Before passing the Cape of Good Hope, in consequence of being forced out
+of their course by a S.W. wind, they discovered a new country to which
+they gave the name of the _Land of Parrots_, because they found, there an
+incredible number of these birds, of many beautiful colours, some of them
+a cubit and a half in length and more. We have seen two of these birds,
+and can vouch for the truth of the description. On exploring this
+extensive coast, the navigators believed that it must necessarily belong
+to a continent, as they sailed along it for the space of 2000 miles
+without having seen either extremity. Its coasts are inhabited by people
+of a tolerably handsome appearance, who go quite naked.[5]
+
+In this voyage they lost four ships. Two others were sent to the gold
+mines, which are not yet returned; and seven only reached Calicut, where
+they were honourably received, and had a house allotted them by the
+prince, and there they brought their ships to anchor. Soon afterwards
+there assembled many boats of the Moors and other neighbouring people,
+and some frigates belonging to the great sultan, all the people belonging
+to which conspired together against the Christians, being exceedingly
+adverse to the coming of the Christians into these parts, lest they
+should diminish their profits. They insisted therefore to have their
+ships first loaded, to the great dissatisfaction of the Christians, who
+immediately complained to the king of the insolence of the Moors, but
+soon discovered that he favoured them. The king of Calicut was a person
+of very doubtful faith, and made the following answer: That it did not
+seem equitable for the Moors to be permitted to finish their traffic
+before the Christians; and gave orders accordingly, that the Christians
+might carry on their trade. The Moors trangressed this decree, and took
+away the goods of the Christians at pleasure; upon which disputes arose
+between the Christians and the Moors, in which the whole inhabitants of
+the city took part with the Moors. Whereupon a great slaughter was made
+of the Christians, above forty of them being slain; among whom was their
+principal factor, when endeavouring to escape by swimming. In revenge for
+this cruelty, the Christians made severe reprisals; as they burnt ten
+ships belonging to the prefect of Syria, that is the sultan; and
+destroyed a considerable portion of the city by means of their
+_catapults_ and _bombards_[6], many houses being burnt to the ground, as
+they are covered with thatch like cottages, and exceedingly combustible.
+
+After this, the fleet left Calicut, and went to another kingdom named
+Cochin, about forty miles distant, being conducted thither by a Jew who
+assumed the Christian faith. The king of Cochin hated the king of Calicut
+exceedingly, and on that account received the Christians with much
+kindness. Spices are in greater abundance at Cochin than at Calicut, and
+the Christians carried off such riches from Cochin as I dare scarcely
+venture to report; for they allege to have purchased a _cantarus_ of
+cinnamon, which is a considerable measure, for one gold ducat. The king
+of Cochin gave two hostages to the Portuguese, in assurance of their
+safety, and sent even ambassadors to the king of Portugal. In the mean
+time, the king of Calicut fitted out an immense fleet against the
+Christians, in revenge for having burnt the ships in his harbour. This
+fleet exceeded 150 ships, and carried 15,000 men, yet on account of a
+north wind which they were unable to contend with, they dared not to
+attack the Portuguese ships, and withdrew from Cochin. As their great
+numbers were considerably formidable, the Portuguese ships went to a
+certain island in which the body of St Thomas is interred, the lord of
+which received them kindly, and gave them some relics of that holy person
+in token of friendship: He even offered them greater quantities of spices
+than they had ever seen before, without money, trusting that they would
+pay for them on their return from Europe: But, being already laden, the
+Portuguese declined this friendly offer.
+
+The Portuguese fleet employed fourteen months in this voyage, and
+returned to Lisbon in spring; but they say that it may be made much
+sooner, now that the course is well known, and may even be accomplished
+in ten months. All the ships that reached Calicut returned, except one
+which was lost on certain rocks, but the crew saved, which ship was of
+six hundred tons burden. As yet only one caravel has come into port, but
+the rest are said to be not far off. This lately arrived ship came into
+port on St Johns day, 6th May, at which time I happened to be with the
+king, who addressed me in these words. "_Hah!_ congratulate me, good sir,
+as my fleet is already in the river, loaded with all kinds of spices." I
+received the news joyfully, as became me, and made my compliments of
+congratulation to the king. The tidings were welcomed with exceeding joy
+and all kind of festivity, with the sound of trumpets, cymbals, and
+flutes, and the continual firing of cannon. On the day following there
+was a solemn thanksgiving, at which all the people assisted. When I again
+waited on the king, he desired me to apprize your serenity of his good
+fortune, saying that you may send your ships hither in safety to purchase
+his spices; adding, that he should take such measures as to prevent the
+prefect of Syria, that is the sultan[7]; from procuring spices in India.
+He founds this hope assuredly on the success which his fleet had lately
+in contending with the numerous vessels of the Moors, and has no doubt of
+being able to reduce India under his own authority. The ship already
+arrived is commanded by a Tuscan named Bartholomew, a native of Florence.
+Her cargo consists of 300 _cantari_ or quintals of pepper, 120 cantari of
+cinnamon, 60 cantari of lac, and 15 cantari of castor and other perfumes
+of that kind[8]. They have no cloves or ginger, having been prevented by
+the Moors, as these could only be procured at Calicut; neither have they
+any of the lesser spices. They had purchased many pearls of different
+sorts, which were all lost in the disturbances at Calicut, in which many
+of their men and much riches were destroyed.
+
+I must not omit to mention, that there have lately arrived messengers
+from _Ubenus_[9] king of Ethiopia to the king of Portugal, bringing gifts
+of ivory and many other things. These are soon to return in two ships,
+which are to go to India after stopping at the new gold mines. While this
+ship which has first arrived was on its voyage home, it met two ships
+steering their course from the _new gold mines_[10] for India. These;
+thinking themselves lost, or that they would be plundered by the
+Christians, offered to pay them a ransom of 15,000 ducats for leave to
+continue their voyage: But the Christians, though tempted by so much gold,
+gave these people many gifts and permitted them to continue their course,
+that they might hereafter be allowed a free trade with their country.
+
+
+[1] This letter is dated on the 20th of June 1501, and obviously refers to
+    the voyage of Cabral, who had returned from India not long before. The
+    writer is described as a native of Crete, and envoy from the lords of
+    Venice to the king of Portugal.--E.
+
+[2] The strange geographical language here used is inexplicable, probably
+    because the ideas of the writer were confused. He seems to mean the
+    _Mina_ in Guinea, which is _five or six_ degrees _within_ the equator,
+    or to the north; but is at least 18º west from the meridian of Sicily.
+    --E.
+
+[3] Meaning the tropic of Capricorn, on which the sun is during our
+    winter solstice--E.
+
+[4] The recession of the coast inwards from Cape Delgado to Melinda,
+    which may be called the Bay of Zanzibar.--E.
+
+[5] In the map of Grynaeus already mentioned, this _Terra Psittacorum_ or
+    Land of Parrots, is placed on the _south-west_ coast of Africa,
+    between the Cape of Good Hope and Congo. Yet there can be no doubt
+    that the recent discovery of Brazil on the _eastern_ coast of South
+    America is here alluded to: Consequently, instead of the _lebeccio
+    vento_, or S.W. wind of the text, it would naturally have required a S.
+    E. wind to force the Portuguese fleet so far to the westward of its
+    intended course.--E.
+
+[6] The author assuredly uses these words to denominate two kinds of
+    ordnance or cannon then used in the Portuguese ships of war.--E.
+
+[7] By the sultan or prefect of Syria, twice so designed in this dispatch,
+    is evidently meant the Mameluk sultan of Egypt; but who was soon
+    afterwards defeated and slain by the Turkish emperor. The ineffectual
+    exertions of the Mameluks and Turks, instigated by Venice, to obstruct
+    the Portuguese trade in India, will be afterwards mentioned.--E.
+
+[8] It is difficult to say what is meant by a _cantarus_ in the text;
+    perhaps a quintal or 100 pounds. The castor of the text, and other
+    perfumes, may mean musk, civet, and ambergris.--E.
+
+[9] Perhaps the king of Congo, or some other prince of the west coast of
+    Africa is here alluded to; or perhaps the xeque or prince of the Moors
+    at Sofala.--E.
+
+[10] By the new gold mines Sofala seems indicated, as contradistinguished
+    from the _old_ gold mines of Guinea. The story of the two ships on
+    their voyage to India from Sofala, obviously alludes to the Guzerate
+    vessels, more particularly mentioned already in the voyage of Cabral
+    --E.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Letter from certain Merchants and Bankers of Spain,[1] to their
+correspondents in the cities of Florence and Venice, respecting a treaty
+of peace and league between the kings of Portugal and Calicut._
+
+We have been informed by those who were on board of the fleet which
+sailed from Lisbon to India in May 1502, and returned on the 15th
+December 1503, that the king of Calicut has concluded a peace with our
+sovereign on the following conditions. As a compensation for the
+slaughter of our men, he is to pay 4000 _bahars_ of pepper, equal to 12,
+000 quintals. That the Moors shall not be allowed to trade there from any
+place whatever, excepting only those who are natives of Calicut; and that
+these even shall not be permitted to trade with Mecca. That our king, if
+so inclined, may build a fort at Calicut, and shall be supplied with a
+sufficient quantity of stones, lime, and timber for that purpose by the
+zamorin, paying for these on delivery. That the king of Calicut shall aid
+and favour the Portuguese in all things, and that it shall be competent
+for our king to appoint one of his own subjects to administer justice
+among the Portuguese resident in that city, even with the power of life
+and death, and without appeal to the zamorin. That when any of our people
+shall revolt from or be disobedient to our commercial agent, they shall
+immediately be delivered up to be judged by the aforesaid Portuguese
+consul. If any captive Moors are detained, they shall all be delivered up
+to our agent. That the two Milanese lapidaries, who had gone from Rome to
+India, and who there acted as military engineers and shipbuilders in the
+European fashion, to the disgrace of the Christian profession, and the
+vast injury of the Christians, should be delivered up in chains to the
+admiral of our fleet. That the kings or rajahs of Cochin and Cananore
+shall be included in this treaty as co-allies, mutually sharing all
+danger and advantages with the other contracting parties: So that if any
+one shall take arms against any of the parties to this treaty, he shall
+be declared an enemy to all the parties hereby confederated. If any of
+the parties to this league shall act contrary to its stipulations, the
+power of all the rest shall act against him, as a perfidious person, a
+traitor, and an enemy to good faith; all the contracting parties using
+their utmost to preserve the present peace and alliance inviolate. While
+the Portuguese fleet might remain in the harbour of Calicut, all other
+ships whatever were to be refused access, at least until after ours were
+laden: But when there were sufficient goods for all who wanted them, then
+all ships Were to be at liberty to load; provided always that the
+accustomed prices should not be augmented, and expressly that the profit
+to the venders should never exceed 8 per cent which was usual in that
+port.
+
+These are the conditions of peace and alliance which have been stipulated,
+to the great honour and renown of our sovereign, as must be evident to
+every one; as henceforwards he may not only be accounted sovereign of
+India, but has imposed laws on Turkey and the prefect of Syria[2], since
+by this treaty all access to the city of Calicut is debarred to their
+traders. We do not even doubt that, in four years from hence, through the
+vigorous measures of our king, our sailors may safely navigate to
+Constantinople and Alexandria, the present most celebrated marts of
+eastern commerce, and shall take signal vengeance on the Moors by whom
+they have been infamously and frequently abused. For this purpose a fleet
+of twelve sail was fitted out this year, which found the rajah of Cochin
+expelled from his dominions, having fled for refuge from the hostilities
+of the king of Calicut to a strong place in a certain island. The only
+reason he could assign for the hostilities of the zamorin was, that,
+faithful to his engagements, he refused to deliver our people to the king
+of Calicut, and chose rather to live in exile than to betray his trust.
+In this extremity, our fleet brought opportune aid to the friendly rajah,
+and having landed troops for his assistance, they marched boldly against
+the perfidious zamorin, routed his forces with great slaughter, and
+triumphantly restored the rajah of Cochin to his dominions.
+
+This kingdom is not far distant from the straits of the Red Sea, where
+they have erected a very strong fortress[3], and are building another in
+the mouth of the bay of Cochin, provided with all kinds of warlike
+artillery, by which to repel the enemy, and to provide a safe station,
+for our fleet; nor shall we recede from thence, however adverse the
+natives may be to our remaining; and when the same shall be done in the
+bay of Calicut, it will not then be difficult to defend these stations
+and the adjoining coasts against all aggressors. Our ships which remained
+in these seas last year made no small booty, as they took one morning
+five ships bound from the kingdom of Cambaya for Mecca, the shrine of
+Mahomet, in which they found 1000 _cantari_ or quintals of clean cloves,
+besides a large quantity of the same spice not freed from the husk as is
+usual with us. These ships had likewise castor and other perfumes of that
+kind[4], sanders wood, amber, purified lac, and excessively fine linen,
+and a large sum in gold and silver coin; insomuch that the value of this
+prize exceeded 200,000 ducats.
+
+Having thus informed you of the wealth of that country, which abounds in
+almost every thing, we now proceed to relate that two of our ships above
+mentioned have been cast away in a storm near the mouth of the Red Sea,
+their commander Vincentius and above six hundred men having perished, but
+the other two were saved[5]. Another vessel, which escaped that dreadful
+tempest, was soon afterwards dashed to pieces against a rock; so that the
+sea was covered with dead bodies and with rich merchandize of all kinds:
+Thus, as the proverb says, wealth ill acquired is ill lost. Of all these
+ships one small caravel only rode out the storm, and brought intelligence
+of the destruction of the others.
+
+We have now to inform you, that our king has given permission to all who
+choose to proceed to India and to carry on trade, providing that he is
+paid a quarter part[6] of all returns, and that they purchase from him
+for the purpose such ships as he thinks proper, and the price of these
+ships must be paid before setting out on the voyage; because, considering
+the loss of ships which he has already sustained, he is desirous that
+others should now bear the risk: It will therefore require large funds to
+embark in this trade, so that we hardly believe the king will find any to
+engage on these conditions; but of this we shall inform you from time to
+time as it may occur. It must not, however, be concealed that the
+circumstances of this trade are by no means established on certain
+principles, which can only be determined by future events.
+
+A Portuguese of the former fleet touched at a certain port in the kingdom
+of Sofala, and visited a gold mine of which he relates wonderful things.
+He assured us that a ship of the Christians had been there, and speaks of
+incredible quantities of gold to be found there. On this account, our
+king is resolved to erect a strong fort at that place, to keep the
+barbarians under subjection, and to keep away the Indians and the
+inhabitants of Cambaya, lest they should make themselves masters of the
+mine. He will therefore immediately seize upon this mine for his own use,
+which we certainly believe to have been the mine whence Solomon derived
+such vast riches, and where the queen of Sheba dwelt, who went to visit
+Solomon, as related in holy writ. These things are of such importance
+that they ought not to be concealed from you; and our king is to be
+deemed happy and fortunate; because he hath made the discovery of such
+vast riches.
+
+It is believed by many that they will soon obtain permission from the
+king to go to India, paying him at the rate of 25 per cent. and taking
+his ships as before mentioned. It appears to be his wish that the
+merchants should send out their own factors or supercargoes with the care
+of their goods, but without any authority, as he wishes to rule in all
+things, and that every thing may be directed by his officers, even the
+expences of the merchants. The trade in spiceries is to remain
+exclusively in the viceroy, and is not to be permitted to the merchants;
+for which reason it is not believed that this Indian trade will be very
+profitable: But we shall give you due information of all these things as
+they occur. We have formerly written you that Cairo failed in its
+commercial prosperity from the very same cause; and if this great eastern
+trade shall be appropriated by the king, it will certainly occasion a
+Babylonian confusion in the state, and very deservedly: For at Cairo the
+Moors were in use to maltreat the Christians exceedingly, and they are
+now perhaps suffering for that error, as they will not any longer be
+allowed to carry away any kind of spices, or jewels of all kinds, or
+pearls and other valuable commodities; as by means of the Portuguese
+forts, they will in future be debarred from trading to Calicut and Sofala;
+for all which you will be thankful to God.
+
+Concerning the gold mine of Sofala, which we mentioned before, and of
+which such wonderful things are told, it is said our king will be the
+sole proprietor in two years, which must prove of vast importance; as
+from that place, which is now possessed by the idolaters, all India and
+Persia used to procure the whole of their gold; although the mouth of the
+bay is under the dominion of a king of the Chaldeans[7], at which place
+the trade is carried on with the idolaters by the Moors, who bring yearly
+their ships from Cambaya laden with low-priced articles, which they
+barter for gold. These goods are coarse cotton cloths, silks of various
+fashions and many colours, but chiefly of the Turkish fabric. The king of
+Quiloa, an island about sixty leagues from Sofala, it is said, will have
+to quit that place from fear of the idolaters. At Quiloa all ships going
+to Sofala have to stop and pay tribute, before going to the mine of
+Sofala. When they get to Sofala, they have to remain there six or eight
+months before completing their affairs; carrying from thence gold, ivory,
+and wax, all of the best kind. After this they have again to touch at
+Quiloa, and to pay a tax for their gold. Thence they go to Cambaya or
+Mecca. In our ships there are twelve or fifteen agents of the king of
+Quiloa, who pays a tribute yearly to our king of 1500 _metigals_, each of
+which metigals is worth 150 ducats, or in all 225,000 ducats. That king
+depends so entirely on the king of Portugal, that our king may dethrone
+him whenever be pleases to send there a force of 1000 men, which would
+oblige the king of Quiloa to run away; and it is believed this will be
+done shortly, the thing being so easy, and by this means an yearly
+revenue of 500,000 ducats would be secured.
+
+If you have properly considered what those ships may bring which are
+daily expected, you will find that they will at least import about 222
+quintals of all kinds of spice: And we shall ship for you of all these,
+using our endeavours that you may never be in want of them. Even after
+the before mentioned treaty with the king of Calicut, no small risk still
+remains to those who navigate to the Indies, on account of a certain
+archipelago, containing about 14,000 islands[8], and owing to the
+narrowness of a certain strait which is scarcely navigable. We shall
+persist notwithstanding, as by custom and experience these dangers will
+become of no consequence. At length we expect to have the glory of having
+discovered almost the whole of the world, and those parts of it
+especially to which the ancients never penetrated. It only remains for us
+to go to the island of Taprobana, or Ceylon, which according to Pliny is
+exceedingly rich in gold, gems, and ivory. Thus by our anxious endeavours,
+we shall lay open the whole of India to our trade. By letters from thence,
+it appears that our merchandize is not much valued in these parts, and
+that _crusadoes_ ought to be sent out, if we wish to have our affairs
+speedily conducted, as other goods remain long in hand: For the Indians
+purposely procrastinate, that they may beat down the value of our
+commodities. The Indians give a high price for brass and alum; but this
+last must be white not red, and in large pieces, as they despise the
+small. They do not care for coral, unless large and finely wrought, which
+otherwise bears no value. Lead is valued, if in large bars. Quicksilver
+and amber are in no request. Wrought brass bears a low price, as it is
+always manufactured over again in their own fashion, so that the cost of
+manufacturing in Europe would be thrown away. All other goods besides
+these mentioned are in no demand, and will therefore bring small profit.
+
+
+[1] This letter has no date, but must have been very early in the
+    sixteenth century, probably in 1504, from the circumstance to which it
+    alludes at its commencement. Although said to be from _Spain_, there
+    is every reason to suppose it was written from Lisbon, as we find
+    Portugal frequently considered as _in_ Spain, which it actually is in
+    the most extensive geographical sense.--E.
+
+[2] This, as formerly observed, alludes to the Mameluk sultan of Egypt,
+    through whose dominions the trade between India and Europe was
+    entirely carried on before this era. This treaty of peace and alliance
+    between Portugal and Calicut, may possibly have been proposed at this
+    period, but certainly was not then agreed to; as there were long wars
+    with the zamorin before his power was reduced under the influence and
+    dominion of the Portuguese.--E.
+
+[3] This is rather an anachronism, as at this period the Portuguese had
+    no fortress on the Red Sea.
+
+[4] The _Castor_ of the text was probably musk, and its _amber_ ambergris.
+    --E.
+
+[5] This alludes to the misfortune of Vincente Sodre and his squadron,
+    already more distinctly related in the preceding chapter.--E.
+
+[6] The expression of the original, _ex centenario lucro quadrugenarium_,
+    is not easily understood: It is here translated a quarter part of the
+    return cargo, conformably with the regulations of Don Henry for the
+    trade of Guinea, as already stated in Vol. I. p. 204, from which the
+    present were probably copied.--E.
+
+[7] It is difficult to guess what bay, and who may be the king of the
+    Chaldeans here alluded to. Perhaps the town of Sofala, the emporium of
+    the gold trade of Eastern Africa, which was ruled by an Arabian prince
+    or sheik. By the idolaters in the text, are apparently meant the
+    Negroes of the interior, where the gold came from by way of Sofala.--E.
+
+[8] This alludes to the Maldives and Lakedives.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Letter from Peter Pasquali, orator of the Venetian republic at the court
+of the king of Portugal, to his brothers dwelling in Lisbon_[1].
+
+Beloved brothers! I formerly wrote you by Peter Verzo the carrier,
+informing you of all the news of this place; and now write again by
+Bartholomew Marquesi, the uncle of Dominic Benedicto of Florence, that
+you may be informed of our affairs, and may be assured of our desire to
+write whenever an opportunity offers. Know, therefore, that the vessel
+which was sent out last year towards the north by the king of Portugal
+under the command of Caspar Corterato, has now returned. He reports
+having discovered a continent about 2000 miles from hence, in a direction
+between the north-west and the west, hitherto utterly unknown. He is
+likewise said to have sailed almost 800 miles along its coast, without
+finding any end; on which account it is considered to be a continent, and
+not an island: and its coast appears to join with another land, formerly
+discovered almost under the very north[2]. But the vessel was unable to
+proceed so far, on account of the sea being frozen, and from excessive
+falls of snow. It is concluded, from the number of rivers which descend
+from the snowy mountains, that this land must be a continent, as no
+island could possibly supply so many rivers. The land is said to be well
+cultivated. The houses of the inhabitants are constructed of wood,
+covered with hides or the skins of fish. The vessel now arrived has
+brought over seven of the natives of both sexes, and the other ship,
+which is hourly expected, is said to have fifty. In stature, colour,
+appearance, and dress, these people are very like the _Cingani_. They are
+clothed in the skins of fish and otters, and other hairy skins like those
+of wolves; wearing the fur side inwards in winter, as we do, and outwards
+in summer; but these are not fashioned or sewed together, being used in
+their natural forms. These are principally worn on their arms and
+shoulders, and their loins are girded with many cords made of sinews.
+They appear a savage people, yet not impudent, and are well made in all
+their limbs. Their faces are punctured with many marks, like the Indians,
+having six or eight punctured lines, more or less according to their
+fancies, in which they seem to take great delight. They have a language,
+which is not understood by any one, although interpreters of almost every
+tongue have been tried. Their country is destitute of iron, yet they have
+swords edged with sharp stones; and their arrows are pointed by the same
+means, and are sharper even than ours. Our people brought from thence
+part of a broken sword with gilded ornaments, which seemed of Italian
+manufacture.
+
+A certain boy is said to have been seen in that country, having two
+silver balls banging from his ears, which certainly appeared to be
+engraved after our manner. On the whole, it may be concluded that this
+country is a continent, not an island, and that is a new discovery; for
+if any ships had ever been here before, we should assuredly have heard
+something respecting it. The coast abounds in fish, particularly salmon,
+herrings, and many others of that kind. There are forests, which abound
+in all kinds of trees; so that _they build_[3] ships, with masts, yards,
+benches, and all things conformable. On this account the king of Portugal
+has resolved to convert this discovery to profit, both on account of the
+abundance of wood which is fit for many purposes, and because the natives,
+being accustomed to labour, may become very useful, and indeed I have
+never seen better slaves. I have deemed it consistent with our friendship
+to acquaint you with these things; and when the other vessel arrives,
+which is daily expected, I shall communicate other particulars.
+
+The fleet has sailed for Calicut, and the king has ordered that it shall
+seize the fleet of Mecca, that the soldan of Syria may neither have
+access there in future nor may export any more spices. The king of
+Portugal is satisfied that every thing shall go according to his wishes
+in this respect, and the court and all the nation are of the same opinion.
+Should this purpose succeed, it is incredible how abundant this kingdom
+must soon become in all kinds of riches and merchandize; and from hence
+the ships of Venice in particular will have to bring their accustomed
+articles of trade. To us truly, who formerly sustained this branch of
+commerce entirely by our own resources, this decree will be injurious,
+unless he shew us favour.
+
+
+[1] This letter is dated 9th October 1501. It is probable that Pasquali
+    would hardly write this _from_ the court of Portugal to his brothers
+    in _Lisbon_; it being more likely that they resided in Venice.--E.
+
+[2] The discovery here referred to, seems to have been the coast of
+    Labradore; and the other country under the north may possibly be
+    Greenland. This voyage was probably in quest of a north-west passage
+    to India.--E.
+
+[3] In this passage we surely ought to read _ships may be built_.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Letter from Francis Sagitta of Cremona, from Lisbon, directed to the
+Venetian orator Peter Pasquali, residing at the Court of Castile_[1].
+
+Most excellent orator! In two former letters, I have promised to omit no
+opportunity of informing your excellency what kind of merchandize might
+be brought in four vessels which were expected daily from India. They are
+now arrived, and I shall truly state all the merchandize which they have
+brought, which is as follows: One thousand quintals of pepper; 450
+quintals of cinnamon; about fifty quintals of ginger; fifty quintals of
+lac: and as much cotton as may be bought for 400 ducats. The reason
+assigned for having brought so small a quantity of spice is, that they
+agreed among themselves, after sailing from hence, that two of the ships
+should steer for the gold mine, and the other two for Calicut. On this
+account, each took only such goods as it was thought would be valued in
+the ports to which they were bound. But when these ships came to Calicut
+they were not allowed to trade, and were obliged to go to other places.
+On going to Cananore, they there learnt what had been done by Peter
+Aliaris, the factor at Cochin for the king. The king or rajah of Cananore
+received our people honourably, and offered to supply our commanders
+gratuitously with all kinds of spices; but, thanking him gratefully for
+this kindness, he declined the offer, saying that he must go in the first
+place to the kings factor at Cochin, and would then return and accept his
+spices on credit. Setting out therefore for Cochin, he transacted
+business with the royal agent, Peter Aliaris; but as the ships did not
+bring money for their purchases, and as the goods they brought were in
+small request, and they could not therefore succeed in making purchases,
+the commander resolved to return to Cananore, where the rajah had
+expressed so much good will for the Portuguese, and where he bartered his
+merchandize for spices at a good profit. He here left three persons, with
+the ships factor and a clerk, because the rajah had advanced money on
+credit for the spices, that they might not appear to have cheated the
+rajah. Yet after all, the ships had to come away only half loaded,
+because they had not taken out money for their purchases, and their goods
+were in no request. The conclusion from this is evident, that the Indians
+have no demand for our goods, and that money alone is especially desired
+by them, and of which they are in great need.
+
+It has been reported since, that these kings of the Indies gave as much
+merchandize to our admiral without price as would load four ships, out of
+fear of the Christians; especially the king of Calicut, who has been told
+by his soothsayers to beware of the ensuing year, as the stars threaten
+him with a great slaughter of his men by the Christians, and that his
+kingdom even would be deserted, owing to dread of that people. We have
+this intelligence from three men who escaped from the battle at
+_Araschorea_ with the barbarians. The same thing is reported by a native
+of Bergamo, who had dwelt twenty-five years at Calicut, which is likewise
+confirmed by a native of Valentia, who had sojourned there six years. In
+the meantime the king of Calicut fitted out a large fleet to attack our
+ships at Cananore; but they immediately sought for safety by setting sail.
+On this account the king of Portugal has ordered eight or ten ships of
+burthen to be fitted out by next January, of which seven are already
+built. Two ships have been sent out this summer, one of which is of 700
+tons burthen, and the other of 500. There is a third in the port of
+Lisbon of 450 tons; two others at Madeira, one of 350, and the other of
+230 tons; another is fitting out at Setubal carrying above 160 tons.
+Besides these six, a caravel is to be added which lately came from the
+island of Chio, all of which are entirely at the royal charges; and two
+are to be fitted out by the king for certain merchants, one of 450 tons
+and the other of 350. It is agreed between these merchants and the king,
+that the king shall be at the sole expence of the voyage and payment of
+the sailors, as in his service. That the merchants shall carry out as
+much money as may suffice for all their purchases; and on the return of
+the ships half of the goods shall belong to the king, and the merchants
+shall be at liberty to sell the other half for their own behoof. It
+appears evident to us that this mode of conducting business will be
+greatly more to the benefit of the merchants than going entirely at their
+own risk, as has been done hitherto; so that the king will probably find
+abundance of people willing to trade to India on these conditions. We
+have accordingly a share in these two ships; but of the event, God alone
+can judge.
+
+
+[1] This letter is dated 16th September 1502; and by it P. Pascquali
+    appears to have gone from Portugal into Spain:--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Of the Weights and Money of Calicut, and of the places whence they
+procure their Spices_[1].
+
+Having already treated concerning the articles of commerce of all kinds
+in the Indies, it is proper to give some account of the prices and
+weights of these. In the city of Calicut a _bahar_ of nutmegs is sold for
+450 _favi_. A bahar consists of four quintals, of 100 pounds each, and
+twenty _favis_ are equal to a ducat. A bahar of cinnamon costs 390 favi.
+A _faracula_, or the twentieth part of a bahar of dried ginger, is six
+favi. A faracula of candied ginger is twenty-eight favi. A bahar of
+tamarinds thirty favi. A bahar of the best pepper 400 favi. A bahar of
+_zerombeci_ forty favi. A bahar of myrabolans 560 favi. A bahar of
+zedoary thirty favi. A bahar of red sanders eighty favi. A bahar of lac
+260 favi. A bahar of _sanasius_ 160. A bahar of mastic 430 favi. A
+_faracula_ of camphor 160. A bahar of pepper 360. A faracula of
+frankincense five favi. A faracula of benzoin six favi. A faracula of
+aloes wood 400 favi. A faracula of cassia eleven favi. A faracula of
+rhubarb 400 favi. A bahar of cloves 600 fevi. A faracula of opium 400
+favi. A bahar of white sanders 700 favi. A mitrical of ambergris, or six
+ounces and a quarter. A bahar contains twenty faraculas. A faracula
+fourteen aratollae and a third; as twenty-three Venetian aratollae are
+equal to twenty-two Portuguese pounds. A golden ducat is equal to twenty
+favi.
+
+As to those things which are carried from Europe for sale at Calicut, a
+faracula of brass sells for forty-five favi. A faracula of white coral
+for 1000. A faracula of silver for twenty favi. A faracula of spurious
+coral for 300. A faracula of alum twenty. An almenum of saffron sells for
+eighty favi: the almenum exceeds the Portuguese pound two aratollae and a
+half, and is therefore equal to about three Venetian pounds.
+
+It appears proper to mention the regions from whence the various spices
+are brought to Calicut. Pepper is brought from a certain tower near the
+coast, about fifty leagues beyond Calicut. Cinnamon comes from a country
+called _Zolon_, Ceylon, 260 leagues beyond Calicut, and from no other
+place. Cloves come from the district of _Meluza_, which is twelve
+Portuguese leagues from Calicut, and is in the country of Cananore.
+Nutmegs and mastic come from _Meluza_, which is 740 leagues from
+Calicut[2]. Castor, which is musk, comes from a certain region called Pegu,
+500 leagues from Calicut. Fine pearls come from the coast of _Armuzi_[3],
+700 leagues from Calicut. Spikenard and myrabolans from the province of
+_Columbaia_[4], 600 leagues from Calicut. Cassia _in twigs_[5] is procured
+in the territory of Calicut. Frankincense is brought from _Saboea_[6], 800
+leagues distant. Aloes-wood, rhubarb, camphor, and calinga, is sent from
+the country of Chiva[7], 4000 leagues from Calicut. Myrrh from the
+province of _Fastica_[8], 700 leagues distant. Calicut produces
+_zeromba_[9]; and Cananore sends cardamoms, being only twelve leagues
+distant. Long pepper is found in _Same_[10]. Benzoin from _Zan_, 700 miles
+from Calicut. Zedoary is produced in the territory of Calicut. Lac comes
+from the city of _Samoterra[11], 500 leagues distant. Brasil wood from the
+region of _Tannazar_, 500 leagues. Opium from the coast of _Adde_, 700
+leagues.
+
+
+[1] This Section is taken from the _Novus Orbus_ of Grynaeus, p 63. in
+    which it forms part of the navigations from Lisbon to Calicut,
+    attributed to the pen of Aloysius Cadamosto. The information it
+    contains respecting the principal commodities then brought from India
+    to Europe, and their prices, is curious: Yet there is some reason to
+    suspect that the author, or editor rather, has sometimes interchanged
+    the bahar and the faracula, or its twentieth part, in the weights of
+    the commodities. Several of the names of things and places are
+    unintelligible, probably from corrupt transcription.--E.
+
+[2] Meluza may possibly be the city of Malacca, then a great emporium of
+    Indian trade; but it is impossible to reconcile or explain Meluza in
+    Cananore twelve leagues from Calicut, and Meluza 740 leagues from
+    thence.--E.
+
+[3] This may possibly refer to the island of Ramisseram in the straits of
+    Manaar, between Ceylon and the Coromandel coast, near which the famous
+    pearl fishery is still carried on.--E.
+
+[4] Evidently Cambaya or Guzerat.--E.
+
+[5] Probably Cassia lignea, or in rolled up bark like twigs, to
+    distinguish it from the drug called Cassia fistula.--E.
+
+[6] Perhaps the coast of Habesh on the Red Sea.--E.
+
+[7] Probably a typographical error for China.--E.
+
+[8] Alluding to some part of the coast of Arabia.--E.
+
+[9] Perhaps Zedoary, repeated afterwards under its right name.--E.
+
+[10] Same and Zan probably are meant to indicate some of the Indian
+    islands. Same may be Sumatra. Zan may be some port in Zangibar, on the
+    eastern coast of Africa.--E.
+
+[11] Samoterra probably alludes to some port in the Bay of Bengal.
+    Tannazar, almost certainly Tanaserim in Siam. Adde, probably is Adel
+    or Aden in Arabia.--E.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Vol. II, by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 10803-8.txt or 10803-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/8/0/10803/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Allen Siddle and PG Distributed Proofreaders.
+This file was produced from images generously made available by the
+Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL
+
+
diff --git a/old/10803-8.zip b/old/10803-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac97e5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/10803-8.zip
diff --git a/old/10803-h.zip b/old/10803-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41d091f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/10803-h.zip
diff --git a/old/10803-h/10803-h.htm b/old/10803-h/10803-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a624f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/10803-h/10803-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,20451 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Voyages and Travels Volume II</title>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content=
+"text/html; charset=us-ascii">
+<style type="text/css">
+<!--
+body {background: #ffffcc; margin:10%; text-align:justify}
+h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {color:green; text-align:center}
+blockquote {font-size: .9em}
+p.poem {text-align:center}
+p.external {font-weight: bold}
+-->
+</style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume II, by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Vol. II
+       Arranged in Systematic Order: Forming a Complete History of the
+       Origin and Progress of Navigation, Discovery, and Commerce,
+       by Sea and Land, from the Earliest Ages to the Present Time
+
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: January 23, 2004 [EBook #10803]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOL. II ***
+
+Produced by Robert Connal and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team
+from images generously made available by the Canadian Institute for
+Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+[Transcriber's Note: The spelling inconsistencies of the original have
+been retained in this etext.]
+
+</pre>
+<p><a name="home" id="home"></a></p>
+<h2>A</h2>
+<h2>GENERAL</h2>
+<h2>HISTORY AND COLLECTION</h2>
+<h2>OF</h2>
+<h1>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,</h1>
+<h2>ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:</h2>
+<h2>FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS</h2>
+<h2>OF NAVIGATION, DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE,</h2>
+<h2>BY SEA AND LAND,</h2>
+<h2>FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE PRESENT TIME.</h2>
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2>BY</h2>
+<h2>ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. &amp; F.A.S. EDIN.</h2>
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2>ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.</h2>
+<h2>VOL. II.</h2>
+<h3>WILLIAM BLACKWOOD, EDINBURGH:</h3>
+<h3>AND T. CADELL, LONDON.</h3>
+<h3>MDCCCXXIV.</h3>
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p><a name="contents" id="contents"></a></p>
+<h2>CONTENTS OF VOLUME II.</h2>
+<p><a href="#part1"><b>PART I.--(Continued.)</b></a></p>
+<p>Voyages and Travels of Discovery, from the Era of Alfred, King of
+England, in the Ninth Century, to the Era of Don Henry, Prince of
+Portugal, at the commencement of the Fifteenth Century.</p>
+<p><a href="#chapter1-20"><b> <i>CHAPTER XX.</i> </b></a></p>
+<p>Account of various early Pilgrimages from England to the Holy
+Land, between the years 1097, and 1107.</p>
+<p><a href="#chapter1-21"><b> <i>CHAPTER XXI.</i> </b></a></p>
+<p>Discovery of Madeira</p>
+<p><a href="#chapter1-22"><b> <i>CHAPTER XXII.</i> </b></a></p>
+<p>Account of the Discovery and Conquest of the Canary Islands</p>
+<p><a href="#part2"><b>PART II.</b></a></p>
+<p>General Voyages and Travels, chiefly of Discovery; from the era of
+Don Henry Prince of Portugal, in 1412, to that of George III. in
+1760.</p>
+<p><a href="#book2-1"><b>BOOK I.</b></a></p>
+<p>History of the Discoveries of the Portuguese along the Coast of
+Africa, and of their Discovery of and Conquests in India, from 1412
+to 1505[A]</p>
+<blockquote>[A] This title was omitted to be inserted in its proper
+place, and may be supplied in writing on the blank page opposite to
+page 23 of this volume.</blockquote>
+<p><a href="#chapter2-1"><b> <i>CHAPTER I.</i> </b></a></p>
+<p>Summary of the Discoveries of the World, from their first
+original, to the year 1555, by Antonio Galvano</p>
+<p><a href="#chapter2-2"><b> <i>CHAPTER II.</i> </b></a></p>
+<p>Journey of Ambrose Contarini, Ambassador from the Republic of
+Venice, to Uzun-Hassan King of Persia, in the years 1473, 4, 5, and
+6; written by himself</p>
+<p><a href="#chapter2-3"><b> <i>CHAPTER III.</i> </b></a></p>
+<p>Voyages of Discovery by the Portuguese along the Western Coast of
+Africa, during the life, and under the direction of Don Henry</p>
+<p><a href="#chapter2-4"><b> <i>CHAPTER IV.</i> </b></a></p>
+<p>Original Journals of the Voyages of Cada Mosto, and Pedro de
+Cintra, to the Coast of Africa; the former in the years 1455 and
+1406, and the latter soon afterwards</p>
+<p><a href="#chapter2-5"><b> <i>CHAPTER V.</i> </b></a></p>
+<p>Continuation of the Portuguese Discoveries along the Coast of
+Africa, from the death of Don Henry in 1463, to the Discovery of the
+Cape of Good Hope in 1486</p>
+<p><a href="#chapter2-6"><b> <i>CHAPTER VI.</i> </b></a></p>
+<p>History of the Discovery and Conquest of India by the Portuguese,
+between the years 1497 and 1505, from the original Portuguese of
+Hernan Lopez de Castaneda</p>
+<p><a href="#chapter2-7"><b> <i>CHAPTER VII.</i> </b></a></p>
+<p>Letters from Lisbon in the beginning of the Sixteenth Century,
+respecting the then recent Discovery of the Route by Sea to India,
+and the Indian trade</p>
+<p> <i>Note</i> . In p. 292 of this volume, 1, 2 and 18, the date of
+1525 ought to have been 1505.</p>
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<p><a name="part1" id="part1"></a></p>
+<h1>PART I. (CONTINUED.)</h1>
+<h2>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS OF DISCOVERY, FROM THE ERA OF ALFRED, KING OF
+ENGLAND, IN THE NINTH CENTURY; TO THE ERA OF DON HENRY, PRINCE OF
+PORTUGAL, AT THE COMMENCEMENT OF THE FIFTEENTH CENTURY.</h2>
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<h2><a name="chapter1-20" id="chapter1-20">CHAPTER XX.</a></h2>
+<p align="center"><b> <i>Account of Various early Pilgrimages from
+England to the Holy Land; between the years 1097 and
+1107</i> </b>[1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Hakluyt, I. p. 44. et sequ.</blockquote>
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+<p>The subsequent account of several English pilgrimages to the Holy
+Land.</p>
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+<p> <i>The Voyage of Gutuere, or Godwera, an English Lady, towards the
+Holy Land, about 1097.</i> </p>
+<p>While the Christian army, under Godfrey of Buillon, was marching
+through Asia Minor from Iconium, in Lycaonia, by Heraclea, to
+Marasia, or Maresch[1], Gutuere, or Godwera, the wife of Baldwin, the
+brother of the Duke of Lorain, who had long laboured under heavy
+sickness, became so extremely ill, that the army encamped on her
+account near Marash, for three days, when she expired. This lady is
+said to have been of noble English parentage, and was honourably
+interred at Antioch in Syria[2].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Now Konieh, Erekli, and Marash; the two former in
+Karamania, the latter in Syria or Room.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] For this story, Hakluyt quotes Hist Bel. Sacr. lib.
+iii. c. xvii. and Chron. Hierosol. lib. iii c. xxvii.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+<p> <i>The Voyage of Edgar Aethling to Jerusalem, in 1102</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Hakluyt. I. 44. W. Malmsb. III. 58.</blockquote>
+<p>Edgar, commonly called Aethling, was son of Edward, the son of
+Edmond Ironside, who was the brother of Edward the Confessor, to whom
+consequently Edgar was nephew; Edgar travelled to Jerusalem in 1102,
+in company with Robert, the son of Godwin, most valiant knight. Being
+present in Rama, when King Baldwin was there besieged by the Turks,
+and not being able to endure the hardships of the siege, he was
+delivered from that danger, and escaped through the midst of the
+hostile camp, chiefly through the aid of Robert; who, going before
+him, made a lane with his sword, slaying numbers of the Turks in his
+heroic progress. Towards the close of this chivalric enterprize, and
+becoming more fierce and eager as he advanced, Robert unfortunately
+dropt his sword; and while stooping to recover his weapon, he was
+oppressed by the multitude, who threw themselves upon him, and made
+him prisoner. From thence, as some say, Robert was carried to Babylon
+in Egypt, or Cairo; and refusing to renounce his faith in CHRIST, he
+was tied to a stake in the market-place, and transpierced with
+arrows. Edgar, having thus lost his valiant knight, returned towards
+Europe, and was much honoured with many gifts by the emperors both of
+Greece and Germany, both of whom would gladly have retained him at
+their courts, on account of his high lineage; but he despised all
+things, from regard to his native England, into which he returned:
+And, having been subjected to many changes of fortune, as we have
+elsewhere related, he <i>now</i>  spends his extreme old age in private
+obscurity.</p>
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+<p> <i>Some Circumstances respecting the Siege of Joppa, about the
+year 1102</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Hakluyt, I.45. Chron. Hierosol. IX. ix. xi.
+xii.</blockquote>
+<p>In the second year of Baldwin, king of Jerusalem, Joppa was
+besieged by the Turks of Cairo; and Baldwin embarked from the town of
+Assur, in a vessel called a <i>buss</i> , commanded by one Goderic an
+English freebooter, intending to proceed to the relief of the
+besieged. Fixing the royal banner aloft on a spear, that it might be
+seen of the Christians, they sailed boldly towards Joppa, with but a
+small company of armed men. The king knew that the Christians in
+Joppa were almost hopeless of his life and safety, and he feared they
+might shamefully abandon the defence of the place, or be constrained
+to surrender, unless revived by his presence. On perceiving the
+approach of the royal banner of King Baldwin, the naval forces of the
+Turks, to the number of twenty gallies and thirteen ships, usually
+called <i>Cazh</i> , endeavoured to surround and capture the single
+vessel in which he was embarked. But, by the aid of GOD, the billows
+of the sea raged against them, while the kings ship glided easily and
+swiftly through the waves, eluding the enemy, and arrived in safety
+into the haven of Joppa, to the great joy of the Christians, who had
+mourned him as if dead.</p>
+<p>While the Saracens continued the siege of Joppa, 200 sail of
+Christian vessels arrived there, with pilgrims who wished to perform
+their devotions at Jerusalem. Of these, the chief leaders were
+Bernard Witrazh of Galatia, Hardin of England, Otho of Roges,
+Haderwerck, one of the principal nobles of Westphalia, and others.
+This power, by the blessing of God, arrived to succour the distressed
+Christians then besieged in Joppa, on the 3d of July 1102, in the
+second year of Baldwin king of Jerusalem. When the numerous army of
+the Saracens saw that the Christians, thus reinforced, boldly faced
+them without the walls, they removed their tents, during the night,
+above a mile from the town, that they might consider whether to
+retreat to Ascalon, or to continue to harass the citizens of Joppa
+with frequent assaults. But they confided in their numbers, and
+continued to annoy the Christians by severe and repeated attacks.</p>
+<p>Having allowed three days rest and refreshment to this powerful
+reinforcement, Baldwin issued out from Joppa early in the morning of
+the sixth of July, to the martial sound of trumpets and cornets, with
+a strong force, both of foot and horse, marching directly toward the
+Saracens, with loud shouts, and attacked their army with great
+spirit. The land attack was assisted by the Christian navy, which
+approached the shore, making a horrible noise, and distracting the
+attention of the Saracens, who feared to be attacked in flank and
+rear. After a sharp encounter, the Saracens fled towards Ascalon,
+many being slain in the battle and pursuit, and others drowned, by
+leaping into the sea to avoid being slain. In this battle 3000 of the
+Saracens perished, with a very small loss on the side of the
+Christians; and the city of Joppa was delivered from its enemies.</p>
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+<p> <i>Of the Transactions of certain English, Danish, and Flemish
+Pilgrims in the Holy Land, in 1107</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Hakluyt, I. 47. Chron. Hierosol. lib. x.</blockquote>
+<p>In the seventh year of King Baldwin, a large fleet from England,
+containing above 7000 men, many of whom were soldiers, arrived at the
+harbour of Joppa, along with whom came other warriors from Denmark,
+Flanders, and Antwerp. Having received permission and safe conduct
+from King Baldwin, together with a strong band of armed men as a
+safeguard, they arrived in safety at Jerusalem and all the other
+places of devotion, free from all assaults and ambushes of the
+Gentiles; and having paid their vows unto the Lord in the church of
+the Holy Sepulchre, they returned with great joy, and without
+molestation, to Joppa[2]. Finding King Baldwin in that place, they
+made offer to assist him in any military enterprize; for which offer
+he gave them great commendations, saying, That he could not give an
+immediate answer, without consulting the patriarch and barons, of his
+kingdom.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Though not mentioned in the text, it seems presumable
+that these pilgrims deemed it necessary for them to proceed unarmed
+in execution of their devotions, under an escort.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>He therefore called together the Lord Patriarch, Hugh of Tabaria,
+Gunfrid the governor of the Tower of David, and the other principal
+officers of the kingdom of Jerusalem, to consult together in the city
+of Rames, how best to employ this proferred assistance of so
+considerable a body of volunteers.</p>
+<p>In that assembly, it was agreed upon to lay siege to the city of
+Sagitta, otherwise called Sidon; upon which, having directed every
+one of the nobles to go home, that they might provide armour and all
+other necessaries for the siege, he sent messengers to the English,
+requiring them not to remove their fleet and army from Joppa, but to
+wait there for his farther commands; informing them, that he and his
+nobles had resolved, with their aid, to lay siege to the city of
+Sidon, but it would require some time to provide the necessary
+engines and warlike instruments, for assaulting the walls of that
+place. The pilgrims answered, that they would attend his orders at
+Joppa, promising to be obedient to him in all things, even unto
+death. The king went soon afterwards, with the patriarch and all his
+attendants to the city of Acre; where, during forty days, he was
+busily employed in the construction of engines, and many different
+kinds of warlike instruments, and of every thing necessary for the
+intended siege.</p>
+<p>When this intended expedition came to the knowledge of the
+inhabitants of Sidon, and they understood that a powerful army of
+pilgrims lay in readiness at Joppa, to assist the king of Jerusalem,
+they were afraid of being subdued and destroyed by the Christians, as
+Caesaria, Assur, Acre, Cayphas, and Tabaria had already been; and
+they sent secret emissaries to the king, offering a large sum of
+money in gold byzants, and a considerable yearly tribute, on
+condition that he would spare their lives and refrain from the
+intended siege. After a lengthened negotiation, during which the
+inhabitants of Sidon rose considerably in their offers, the king,
+being in great straits for means to discharge the pay of his
+soldiers, hearkened willingly to the offers of the Sidonians; yet,
+afraid of reproach from the Christians, he dared not openly to
+consent to their proposals.</p>
+<p>In the meantime, Hugh of Tabaria, who was a principal warrior
+among the Christians of Palestine, and indefatigable in assaulting
+the pagans on all occasions, having gathered together 200 horse and
+400 infantry, suddenly invaded the country of a great Saracen lord,
+named Suet, on the frontiers of the territory of Damascus, where he
+took a rich booty of gold and silver and many cattle, which would
+have proved of great importance in assisting the army at the siege of
+Sidon. On his return with this prey by the city of Belinas, otherwise
+called Caesaria Philippi, the Turks of Damascus, with the Saracen
+inhabitants of the country, gathered together in great numbers, and
+pursued the troops of Hugh, that they might recover the booty. Coming
+up with them in the mountains, over which the infantry belonging to
+Hugh of Tabaria were driving their prey, the Turks prevailed over the
+Christians, and the plunder was recovered. On receiving this
+intelligence, Hugh, who happened to be at some distance, hastened
+with his cavalry to succour his footmen, and to recover the spoil:
+But happening to fall in with the Turks in a strait and craggy place,
+and rushing heedlessly among the enemy, unprovided with his armour,
+he was shot in the back by an arrow, which pierced his liver, and he
+died on the spot. His soldiers brought back the dead body of Hugh to
+the city of Nazareth near Mount Thabor, where he was honourably
+interred. Gerard, the brother of Hugh, lay at this time sick of a
+dangerous illness, and died within eight days afterwards.</p>
+<p>Taking advantage of the death of these two famous princes, King
+Baldwin agreed to receive the money which had been offered to him by
+the city of Sidon, yet kept his intentions of making peace private,
+and sent to Joppa, desiring the chiefs of the English, Danes, and
+Flemings, to come with their fleet and army to Acre, as if he had
+meant to prosecute the siege. When they arrived, he represented to
+their chiefs the great loss he had sustained by the death of two of
+his chief warriors, on which account, he was constrained to defer the
+siege to a more convenient opportunity, and must now dismiss his
+army. On this the strangers saluted the king very respectfully, and,
+embarking in their ships, returned to their own countries.</p>
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+<p> <i>The Expedition of William Longespee, or Long-sword, Earl of
+Salisbury, in the year 1248, under the Banners of St Louis, King of
+France, against the Saracens</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Hakluyt, I. 70.</blockquote>
+<p>When Louis, King of France, went against the Saracens in 1248,
+William Earl of Salisbury, with the Bishop of Worcester, and other
+great men of the realm of England, accompanied him in the holy
+warfare[2]. About the beginning of October 1249, the French king
+assaulted and took the city of Damietta, which was esteemed the
+principal strong-hold of the Saracens in Egypt; and having provided
+the place with a sufficient garrison, under the Duke of Burgundy, he
+removed his camp, to penetrate farther eastwards. In this army
+William Earl of Salisbury served, with a chosen band of Englishmen
+under his especial command; but the French entertained a great
+dislike to him and his people, whom they flouted upon all occasions,
+calling them English <i>tails</i> [3], and other opprobrious names,
+insomuch, that the King of France had much ado to keep peace between
+them. This quarrel originated from the following circumstance: Not
+far from Alexandria there was a strong castle belonging to the
+Saracens[4], in which they had placed some of their principal ladies,
+and much treasure; which fortress the earl and his English followers
+had the good fortune to take, more by dexterous policy than by open
+force of arms, through which capture he and his people were much
+enriched; and when the French came to the knowledge of this exploit,
+which had not been previously communicated to them, they were much
+enraged against the English, and could never speak well of them
+afterwards.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Hakluyt dates this expedition in the 32d year of the
+reign of Henry III. of England. He mentions, in a former passage, I.
+p. 59. that the same Earl of Salisbury, accompanied Richard Earl of
+Cornwall, in the 23d year of the same kings reign into Syria against
+the Saracens, with many other English of note, where they performed
+good service against the unbelievers, but gives no relation of
+particulars.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] The meaning of this term of reproach does not appear;
+unless, from some after circumstances, it may have proceeded from
+their horses having long tails, while those of the French were
+dockt.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] Probably Aboukir.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Not long after this, the earl got secret intelligence of a rich
+caravan of merchants belonging to the Saracens, who were travelling
+to a certain fair which was to be held near Alexandria, with a
+multitude of camels, asses, and mules, and many carts, all richly
+laden with silks, precious jewels, spices, gold, silver, and other
+commodities, besides provisions and other matters of which the
+soldiers were then in great want. Without giving notice of this to
+the rest of the Christian army, the earl gathered all the English
+troops, and fell by night upon the caravan, killing many of the
+people, and making himself master of the whole carts and baggage
+cattle with their drivers, which he brought with him to the Christian
+camp, losing only one soldier in the skirmish, and eight of his
+servants, some of whom were only wounded and brought home to be
+cured. When this was known in the camp, the Frenchmen, who had
+loitered in their tents while the earl and his people were engaged in
+the expedition, came forth and forcibly took to themselves the whole
+of this spoil, finding great fault with the earl and the English for
+leaving the camp without orders from the general, contrary to the
+discipline of war; though the earl insisted that he had done nothing
+but what he would readily justify, and that his intentions were to
+have divided the spoil among the whole army. But this being of no
+avail, and very much displeased at being deprived in so cowardly a
+manner of what he had so adventurously gained, he made his complaint
+to the king; and being successfully opposed there by the pride of the
+Count of Artois, the kings brother, who thwarted his claims with
+disdainful spite, he declared that he would serve no longer in their
+army, and bidding farewell to the king, he and his people broke up
+from the army and marched for Achon[5]. Upon their departure, the
+Count d'Artois said that the French army was well rid of these tailed
+English; which words, spoken in despite, were ill taken by many good
+men, even of their own army. But not long after, when the governor of
+Cairo, who was offended with the Soldan, offered to deliver that
+place to the French king, and even gave him instructions now he might
+best conduct himself to accomplish that enterprize, the king sent a
+message in all haste to the Earl of Salisbury, requesting him to
+return to the army, under promise of redressing all his grievances;
+on which he came back and rejoined the French army.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] St John d'Acre.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The king of France now marched towards Cairo, and came to the
+great river Nile, on the other side of which the Soldan had encamped
+with his army, on purpose to dispute the passage. At this time, there
+was a Saracen in the service of the Count of Artois, who had been
+lately converted to the Christian faith, and who offered to point out
+a shallow ford in the river, by which the army might easily cross
+over. Upon receiving this intelligence, Artois and the master of the
+Knights Templars, with about a third of the army, crossed to the
+other side, and were followed by Salisbury and the English. These
+being all joined, made an assault upon a part of the Saracen army
+which remained in the camp, and overthrew them, the Soldan being then
+at some distance with the greater part of his army.</p>
+<p>After this easy victory, Artois was so puffed up with pride and
+elated by success, that he believed nothing could withstand him, and
+would needs advance without waiting for the coming up of the main
+body of the army under the king of France, vainly believing that he
+was able with the power he had to conquer the whole force of the
+Saracens. The master of the Templars, and other experienced officers,
+endeavoured to dissuade him from this rash conduct; advising him
+rather to return to the main army, satisfied with the signal
+advantage he had already achieved; that thereby the whole army of the
+Christians might act in concert, and be the better able to guard
+against the danger of any ambushes or other stratagems of war, that
+might have been devised for their destruction. They represented to
+him that the horses of this vanguard were already tired, and the
+troops without food; and besides, that their numbers were utterly
+unable to withstand the vastly superior multitude of the enemy; who
+besides, having now obviously to fight for their last stake, the
+capital of their dominions, might be expected to exert their utmost
+efforts. To this salutary counsel, the proud earl arrogantly answered
+with opprobrious taunts; reviling the whole Templars as dastardly
+cowards and betrayers of their country, and even alleged that the
+Holy Land of the Cross might easily be won to Christendom, if it were
+not for the rebellious spirit of the Templars and Hospitallers, and
+their followers: which, indeed, was a common belief among many. To
+these contumelious remarks, the master of the Templars angrily
+desired him, in his own name and that of his followers, to display
+his ensign when and where he dared, and he should find them as ready
+to follow as he to lead. The Earl of Salisbury now remonstrated with
+Artois, advising him to listen to these experienced persons, who were
+much better acquainted with the country and people than he could be;
+and endeavoured to convince him that their advice was discreet and
+worthy to be followed. He then addressed his discourse to the master
+of the Templars, prudently endeavouring to sooth his anger against
+the arrogance of the Count of Artois. But Artois cut him short,
+exclaiming in anger with many oaths, "Away with these cowardly
+Englishmen with tails; the army would be much better rid of these
+tailed people;" and many other scandalous and disdainful expressions.
+To this the English earl replied, "Well, Earl Robert, wherever you
+dare set your foot, my steps shall go as far as yours; and I believe
+we shall go this day where you shall not dare to come near the tails
+of our horses."</p>
+<p>And it so happened as Earl William said: For Earl Robert of Artois
+persisted to march forward against the Soldan, vainly hoping to win
+all the glory to himself, before the coming up of the main body of
+the host. His first enterprize was ordering an attack on a small
+castle, or fortified village, called Mansor; whence a number of the
+villagers ran out, on seeing the approach of the Christians, making a
+great outcry, which came to the ears of the Soldan, who was much
+nearer with his army than had been supposed. In the mean time, the
+Christians made an assault on Mansor with too little precaution, and
+were repulsed with considerable loss, many of them being slain by
+large stones, thrown upon them as they entered the place; by which
+the army not only lost a considerable number of men, but was much
+dispirited by this unexpected repulse.</p>
+<p>Immediately on the back of this discomfiture, the Soldan came in
+sight with his whole army; and seeing the Christians in this divided
+state, brother separated from brother, joyfully seized the
+opportunity he had long wished for, and inclosing them on all sides,
+that none might escape, attacked them with great fury. In this
+situation, the Earl of Artois sore repented of his headstrong
+rashness, when it was too late; and, seeing Earl William Longespee
+fighting bravely against the chief brunt of the enemy, he called out
+to him in a cowardly manner to flee, as God fought against them. But
+William bravely answered, "God forbid that my father's son should
+flee from the face of a Saracen." Earl Robert turned out of the
+fight, and fled away, thinking to escape from death or captivity by
+the swiftness of his horse; and taking the river Thafnis[6], sank
+through the weight of his armour, and was drowned. On the flight of
+Earl Robert, the French troops lost heart, and began to give ground:
+But William Longespee, bearing up manfully against the whole force of
+the enemy, stood firm as long as he was able, slaying and wounding
+many of the Saracens. At length, his horse being killed, and his legs
+maimed, he fell to the ground; yet he continued to mangle their legs
+and feet, till at last he was slain with many wounds, being finally
+stoned to death by the Saracens. After his death, the Saracens set
+upon the remainder of the army, which they had surrounded on every
+side, and destroyed them all, so that scarce a single man remained
+alive. Of the whole, only two templars, one hospitaller, and one
+common soldier escaped, to bring the melancholy tidings to the king
+of France. Thus by the imprudent and foolish rashness of Earl Robert,
+the French troops were utterly discomfited, and the valiant English
+knight overpowered and slain, to the grief of all the Christians, and
+the glory of the Saracens; and, as it afterwards fell out, to the
+entire ruin of the whole French army.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] This is probably meant for that branch of the Nile
+which they had previously crossed on their way to
+Mansor.--E.</blockquote>
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<h2><a name="chapter1-21" id="chapter1-21">CHAPTER XXI.</a></h2>
+<p align="center"><b> <i>Discovery of Madeira</i> </b>[1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Astley, I. 11. and 586. Clarke, Progress of Maritime
+Discovery, I. 167. Although in our opinion a mere romance, we have
+inserted this story, because already admitted into other general
+collections.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Although the Era of modern discovery certainly commenced under the
+auspicious direction of Don Henry of Portugal, who first conceived
+and executed the sublime idea of extending the knowledge and commerce
+of the globe, by a judicious series of maritime, expeditions
+expressly for the purpose of discovery; yet as Madeira is said to
+have been visited, and the Canaries were actually discovered and
+settled before that era, it appears necessary to give a previous
+account of these discoveries, before proceeding to the second part of
+this work.</p>
+<p>Several authors have left accounts of the real or pretended
+original discovery of this island of Madeira, all of whom concur in
+asserting that it was first discovered by an Englishman. Juan de
+Barros, the Livy of Portugal, mentions it briefly in the first decade
+of his Asia. The history of this discovery was written in Latin, by
+Doctor Manoel Clemente, and dedicated to Pope Clement V. Manoel Tome
+composed a Latin poem on the subject, which he
+intitled <i>Insulana</i> . Antonio Galvano mentions it in a treatise of
+discoveries, made chiefly by the Spaniards and Portuguese previously
+to the year 1550[2]. Manoel de Faria y Sousa, the illustrious
+commentator of Camoens, cites Galvano in illustration of the fifth
+stanza in the fifth book of the immortal Lusiad, and likewise gives
+an account of this discovery in his Portuguese Asia. But the earliest
+and most complete relation of this discovery was composed by
+Francisco Alcaforado, who was esquire to Don Henry the <i>infant</i> 
+or prince of Portugal, the first great promoter of maritime
+discoveries, and to whom he presented his work. No person was more
+capable of giving an exact account of that singular event than
+Alcaforado, as he was one of those who assisted in making the second
+discovery. His work was first published in Portuguese by Don
+Francisco Manoel, and was afterwards published in French at Paris in
+1671[3]. From this French edition the following account is extracted,
+because the original Portuguese has not come to our knowledge,
+neither can we say when that was printed; but as the anonymous French
+translator remarked, that "Don Francisco <i>keeps</i>  the original MS.
+with great care," it may be concluded, that the Portuguese impression
+did not long precede the French translation. The French translator
+acknowledges that he has altered the style, which was extremely
+florid and poetical, and has expunged several useless and tedious
+digressions, etymologies, reflections, and comparisons; but declares
+that he has strictly presented, the truth and substance of the
+history, so as not to vary from it in the least, or to omit the
+smallest material circumstance.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] This work was printed in 1560, and was translated by
+Hakluyt: There is an abstract of it in Purchas his Pilgrims, II.
+1671, and it will be found at the commencement of the second part of
+this Collection.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] In small duodecimo and large print, under the title
+of Relation Historique de la Decouverte de l'Isle de Madere:
+containing 185 pages, besides twelve pages of
+preface.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>It is remarkable that there is no mention whatever in any of the
+English histories of Machin, Macham, or Marcham, the supposed author
+of this discovery; so that Hakluyt was beholden to Antonio Galvano
+for the imperfect account he gives of that transaction[4]. By the
+following abstract the complete history becomes our own, and we shall
+be no longer strangers to an event which has for several ages,
+rendered an Englishman famous in foreign countries, while wholly
+unknown in his own. It must not, however, be omitted to observe, that
+some objections may be stated against the authenticity of this
+history, on account of certain circumstances which do not quadrate
+with the time assigned for Machin's voyage by the author. From these
+it is obvious, either that the relation given by Alcaforado is not
+genuine, or that it has been interpolated. How far this objection may
+be admitted, without prejudice to the authority of the whole story,
+must be left to the judgment of our readers; we shall only add, that
+so far as relates to Macham it agrees with the tradition of the
+inhabitants of Madeira.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Clarke, Progress of Maritime Discovery, I.
+167.</blockquote>
+<p>According to Alcaforada, Juan Gonsalvo Zarco, a gentleman of the
+household of Don Henry, being sent out by that prince upon an
+expedition of discovery to the coast of Africa, made prize, in the
+year 1420, of a Spanish vessel filled with redeemed captives, on
+their way from Morocco to Spain. In this vessel there was one John de
+Morales, an experienced and able pilot, whom he detained as an
+acceptable present to his master Don Henry, and set all the rest at
+liberty. Morales on being made acquainted with the cause of his
+detention, entered freely into the service of the prince, and gave an
+account to Gonsalvo of the adventures of Machin, and the situation
+and land-marks of the new discovered island, all of which he had
+learnt from certain English captives in the jails of Morocco, who had
+accompanied Macham, or Machin, in his expedition.</p>
+<p>The year of this extraordinary adventure is not mentioned by
+Galvano, who only says, that in 1344, Pedro IV. reigning in Arragon,
+the chronicles of his age reported, that about this time the island
+of Madeira was discovered by one Macham, an Englishman. It must be
+confessed that an objection arises against this history which is not
+easily removed. We are told that, immediately after the death of
+Macham, his companions sailed over to Morocco, and that Morales was
+in prison when they arrived. Supposing the discovery by Macham to
+have been made about 1344, as related by Galvano, from the Castilian
+chronicles, Morales must have been no less than seventy-six years a
+prisoner when redeemed, and when he was detained by Gonsalvo in 1420.
+Herbert places the adventure of Macham in 1328, which would increase
+the captivity of Morales to ninety-two years. Alcaforado places the
+event in the reign of Edward III. of England, which began in 1327 and
+ended in 1378; Even supposing it to have happened in the last year of
+Edward, Morales must have remained forty-two years in captivity;
+which is not only highly improbable, but is even contrary to the
+sense of the historian, who supposes but a small space to have
+elapsed between the two events; besides, the records quoted by
+Galvano are said expressly to assert that Macham went himself into
+Africa, whence he was sent to the king of Castile. This last
+circumstance may have been invented by the Spaniards, to give them a
+better title to the island of Madeira: But the former objection
+remains in full force, and can only be obviated by supposing that
+either Morales advanced a falsehood in asserting, that he had the
+account of this discovery from the English themselves, instead of
+learning it from the other slaves, among whom the tradition might
+have been current for many years after the event; or Alcaforado may
+have mistaken the report of Morales in this particular. The following
+is the substance of the narrative, as given by Alcaforado.</p>
+<p>In the glorious reign of Edward III. Robert a Machin, of Macham, a
+gentleman of the second degree of nobility, whose genius was only
+equalled by his gallantry and courage, beheld and loved the beautiful
+Anna d'Arfet[5]. Their attachment was mutual, but the pleasing
+indulgence of ardent hope gratified and betrayed the secret of their
+passion. The pride of the illustrious family of d'Arfet was
+insensible to the happiness of their daughter, and they preferred the
+indulgence of their own ambition to the voice of love. The feudal
+tyranny of the age was friendly to their cruelty, and a royal warrant
+seemed to justify the vanity of her parent. The consolation of an
+ingenious mind supported Machin under confinement, and enabled him to
+seek after redress without yielding to despondency. On his
+releasement from prison, he learned that the beloved cause of his
+persecution had been forced to marry a nobleman, whose name he could
+not discover, but who had carried her to his castle near Bristol. The
+friends of Machin made his misfortune their own, and one of them had
+the address to get introduced into the service of the afflicted Anna
+under the character of a groom. The prospect of the ocean during
+their rides, suggested or matured the plan of escape and the hope of
+a secure asylum counteracted the imagined dangers of a passage to the
+coast of France. Under pretence of deriving benefit from the sea air,
+the victim of parental ambition was enabled to elude suspicion, and
+embarked without delay, in a vessel procured for the purpose, along
+with her lover.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] In a note, Mr Clarke says the name of this lady has
+been supposed by some writers to have been Dorset, corrupted by a
+foreign orthography into D'Orset, and thence into D'Arfet. It may
+have been D' Arcy.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the successful completion of this anxious design, Machin was
+alike insensible to the unfavourable season of the year, and to the
+portentous signs of an approaching storm, which in a calmer moment he
+would have duly observed. The gradual rising of a gale of wind,
+rendered the astonished fugitives sensible of their rashness; and, as
+the tempest continued to augment, the thick darkness of night
+completed the horrors of their situation. In their confusion, the
+intended port was missed, or could not be attained, and their vessel
+drove at the mercy of the winds and waves. In the morning they found
+themselves in the midst of an unknown ocean, without skill to
+determine their situation, and destitute of knowledge or experience
+to direct their course towards any known land. At length, after
+twelve anxious mornings had dawned without sight of land, with the
+earliest streaks of day an object dimly appeared to their eager
+watchfulness in the distant horizon, and when the grey haze, which
+had alternately filled them with hope and despondency was dissipated
+by the rising sun, the certainty of having discovered land was
+welcomed by a general burst of joy. A great luxuriancy of trees of
+unknown species, was soon observed to overspread the land, whence
+unknown birds of beautiful plumage came off in flocks to the vessel,
+and gave the appearance of a pleasing dream to their unexpected
+deliverance.</p>
+<blockquote>[Illustration: Chart of North Western
+Africa]</blockquote>
+<p>The boat was hoisted out to examine the new found island, and
+returned with a favourable account. Machin and his friends
+accompanied their trembling charge on shore, leaving the mariners to
+secure the vessel at an anchor. The wilderness and rich scenery of
+the adjacent country possessed great charms to these thankful guests,
+just escaped from apparently inevitable destruction. An opening in
+the extensive woods, which was encircled with laurels and other
+flowering shrubs, presented a delightful retreat to the tempest-worn
+voyagers; a venerable tree, of ancient growth, offered its welcome
+shade on an adjoining eminence, and the first moments of liberty were
+employed in forming a romantic residence, with the abundant materials
+which nature supplied all around. The novelty of every object they
+beheld, induced curiosity to explore their new discovery, and they
+spent three days in wandering about the woods, when the survey was
+interrupted by an alarming hurricane, which came on during the night,
+and rendered them extremely anxious for the safety of their
+companions, who had been left in charge of the vessel. The ensuing
+morning destroyed all prospect of being ever enabled to get away from
+the island; the vessel had broke from her moorings by the violence of
+the storm, and was wrecked on the coast of Morocco, where all on
+board were immediately seized as slaves.</p>
+<p>The afflicted Machin found this last calamity too severe for his
+terrified and afflicted companion to endure. Her susceptible mind and
+tender frame, overcome by the severity of the scenes she had gone
+through, and oppressed by consciousness of having deviated from her
+duty, sunk under her afflictive situation. From the moment it was
+reported that the vessel had disappeared, she became dumb with
+sorrow, and expired after a few days of silent despair. This heavy
+stroke was too much for the inconsolable lover to support; though
+watched over with the utmost solicitude by his afflicted friends, all
+attempts to administer consolation were entirely fruitless, and he
+expired on the fifth day after the death of his beloved mistress.
+With his parting breath, he earnestly enjoined his surviving
+companions, to deposit his body in the same grave, under the
+venerable tree, which they had so recently made for the victim of his
+temerity; and where the altar which had been raised to celebrate
+their deliverance, would now mark their untimely tomb.</p>
+<p>Having performed this painful duty, the surviving companions of
+these unfortunate lovers fixed a large wooden cross over the grave,
+on which they carved the inscription which Machin had composed to
+record their melancholy adventures; and added a request, that if any
+Christians should hereafter visit the spot, they might erect a church
+in the same place, and dedicate it to Christ. Having thus
+accomplished the dictates of friendship and humanity, the survivors
+fitted out the boat, which had remained ashore from their first
+landing, and put to sea with the intention of returning if possible
+to England; but either from want of skill, or owing to the currents
+and unfavourable winds, they likewise were driven on the coast of
+Morocco, and rejoined their former shipmates in slavery among the
+Moors.</p>
+<p>This story is reported in a somewhat different manner by Galvano
+already mentioned. According to him, one Macham, an Englishman, fled
+from his country, about the year 1344, with a woman of whom he was
+enamoured, meaning to retire into Spain; but the vessel in which the
+lovers were embarked, was driven by a storm to the island of Madeira,
+then altogether unknown and uninhabited. The port in which Macham
+took shelter is still called Machico. His mistress being sea-sick,
+Macham landed with her and some of the people, and the ship putting
+to sea, deserted them. Oppressed with sickness and grief at seeing
+herself in this hopeless state of exile, the lady died; and Macham,
+who was extremely fond of her, constructed a chapel or hermitage
+dedicated to Jesus the Saviour, in which he deposited her remains,
+and engraved both their names, and the cause of their arrival, on a
+rude monument which he erected to her memory. He afterwards
+constructed a boat or canoe, which he hollowed out from the trunk of
+a large tree, in which he, and those of his companions who had been
+left on shore along with him, passed over to the opposite coast of
+Africa, without the aid of oars, sails, or rudder. He was made
+prisoner by the Moors, who presented him to their king, by whom he
+was sent to the king of Castile.</p>
+<p>Madeira, in the Portuguese language, or Madera in Spanish,
+signifies  <i>wood</i> ; and this island derived its name from the
+immense quantity of thick and tall trees with which it was covered
+when first discovered. One of the two capitanias, or provinces, into
+which this island is divided, is named Machico, as is likewise the
+principal town of that district, supposed to have originated from the
+traditionary story of the misfortunes of Macham; the other capitania,
+with its principal town, the capital of the island, is named Funchal,
+from <i>Funcho</i> , the Portuguese term for Fennel, which abounds on
+the adjoining rocks.</p>
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<h2><a name="chapter1-22" id="chapter1-22">CHAPTER XXII.</a></h2>
+<p align="center"><b> <i>Account of the Discovery and Conquest of the
+Canary Islands</i> </b>[1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Glas. Disc. and Conqu. passim.</blockquote>
+<p>The island of Nivaria, and others mentioned by Pliny, as known to
+Juba king of Mauritania, were most probably Teneriffe and the other
+Canary Islands; for Pliny notices that the summit of Nivaria was
+generally covered with snow, which is frequently the case with the
+peak of Teneriffe, and from this circumstance the name of Nivaria is
+obviously derived. They appear likewise to have been known in the
+middle ages to the Arabs of Morocco; as the Nubian geographer
+mentions two islands, under the names of Mastahan and Lacos, as among
+the six fortunate islands described by Ptolemy; these probably were
+Lancerota and Fuertaventura, the latter of which may be seen in clear
+weather from the nearest coast of Africa. All knowledge, however, of
+these islands had ceased in Europe, till some time between the years
+1326 and 1334, when a French ship happened to be driven among them by
+a storm. Upon this discovery, Don Luis de la Cerda, count of
+Claramonte, whose father, Don Alonzo, had been deprived of his right
+to the inheritance of the crown of Castile, procured a grant of these
+islands, with the title of king, from Pope Clement VI., on condition
+of causing the gospel to be preached to the natives[2]. Don Luis
+equipped a fleet from some of the ports of the Spanish kingdom of
+Arragon, in order to take possession of his new kingdom, but the
+design failed, and he died soon after.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] The Author of the History of the Canaries, omits the
+date of this grant. Clement VI. was Pope from 1343 to 1352, between
+which years the papal grant must have been made.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In 1385, some Biscayners and inhabitants of Seville joined in the
+equipment of five ships at Cadiz, in order to make descents for the
+sake of plunder upon the Canary islands, and the adjacent coast of
+Africa. After coasting along the African shore, they sailed
+westwards, and fell in with the island now called Lancerota, where
+they landed; and after a skirmish with the natives, plundered the
+town, front which they carried off a large booty of goat-skins,
+tallow, and sheep, and 170 of the inhabitants, whom they sold into
+slavery. Among these were Guanareme, king of the island, and his wife
+Tingua-faya. A similar expedition in quest of plunder and captives
+was made to Lancerota from Seville in 1393.</p>
+<p>In the year 1400, John de Betancour, a gentleman of Normandy, and
+Gadifer de Sala, a person of considerable fortune, fitted out three
+small vessels from Rochelle in France, containing 200 persons,
+exclusive of the mariners, and made a descent upon Lancerota, where
+they erected a fort at a harbour, to which they gave the name of
+Rubicon. Leaving there a small garrison, they passed over to the
+island of Fuertaventura; but being opposed by the natives, they
+prudently retired without fighting. Betancour afterwards applied to
+Don Henry III. king of Arragon, for assistance to enable him to make
+a conquest of these islands; who made him a grant of them in due
+form, with the title of king, and supplied him with money to defray
+the expence of an armament to accomplish their subjugation. He easily
+effected the conquest of Lancerota, and divided its lands among the
+French and Spanish adventurers who had assisted him in the
+expedition.</p>
+<p>After the death of John de Betancour, his nephew, Mason de
+Betancour, sold the Canary Islands to Don Henry de Guzman, Count of
+Niebla; who afterwards conveyed them to Guillen Paraza, and from whom
+they fell by inheritance to Diego de Herrera, who died in 1485. In
+1487, the sovereignty was resumed by the crown of Castile, with the
+title of a kingdom[3].</p>
+<blockquote>[3] A more extended account or these islands will be
+found in Part III. of this work.--E.</blockquote>
+<h2><a name="part2" id="part2">PART II.</a></h2>
+<h2>GENERAL VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, CHIEFLY OF DISCOVERY FROM THE ERA OF
+DON HENRY, PRINCE OF PORTUGAL, IN 1412, TO THAT OF GEORGE III. IN
+1760.</h2>
+<h2><a name="book2-1" id="book2-1">BOOK I.</a></h2>
+
+<p><b>HISTORY OF THE DISCOVERIES OF THE PORTUGUESE ALONG THE COAST OF AFRICA, AND OF THEIR DISCOVERY OF AND CONQUESTS IN INDIA, FROM 1412 TO 1505</b>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter2-1" id="chapter2-1">CHAPTER I.</a></h2>
+<p><b> <i>Summary Deduction of the Discoveries of the World, from
+their first Original, to the year 1555, by Antonio
+Galvano</i> </b>[1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Oxford Collection, II. 353. Clarke, Progr. of Marit.
+Disc. I. App 1.</blockquote>
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+<p>This treatise was written in the Portuguese language, by Antonio
+Galvano, who had been governor of Ternate, the chief of the Molucca
+Islands, and was first translated into English by the celebrated
+Richard Hakluyt, who dedicated it to Sir Robert Cecil, Principal
+Secretary of State to Queen Elizabeth. It was afterwards inserted in
+Osbornes, or the Oxford Collection of Voyages and Travels, and forms
+an appendix to the first volume of Clarke's Progress of Maritime
+Discovery; and from these sources the present edition has been
+carefully prepared. Of Richard Hakluyt, the original translator, the
+following notice is worthy of being preserved. "The <i>great</i> 
+Richard Hakluyt was descended from an ancient family at Yetton in
+Herefordshire, and was educated at Westminster School, from whence he
+was elected a student of Christ Church, in the University of Oxford,
+where he took the degrees of Bachelor and Master of Arts. Entering
+into holy orders, he was first made a prebendary of Bristol, and
+afterwards of Westminster, and rector of Witheringset in Suffolk.
+Besides this translation, he illustrated the eight decades of Peter
+Martyr Angelericus <i>de Novo Orbe</i>  with curious notes. He also
+translated from the Portuguese, <i>Virginia</i> , richly valued by the
+description of Florida, her next neighbour; and wrote notes of
+certain commodities, in good request in the East Indies, Molucca, and
+China; but what has most deservedly perpetuated his name, is his
+great pains, and judgment, in collecting <i>English Voyages,
+Navigations, Trafficks, and Discoveries</i> [2]."</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Oxford Collection, I. viii.</blockquote>
+<p>Both from the nature of this treatise on the origin and progress
+of maritime discovery, and from respect to the memory of Hakluyt, the
+father of our English collections of voyages and travels, it has been
+selected for insertion in this place, as an appropriate introduction
+to the  <i>Second Part</i>  of our arrangement; because its author may
+be considered as almost an original authority for the early
+discoveries of the Portuguese and Spaniards. Although it may be
+considered in some measure as not precisely conformable with our
+plan, yet one portion of this summary is directly in point; and, the
+whole being curious, and in no respect tedious, it is here given
+entire; changing the antiquated English of Hakluyt into modern
+language. Although said in its title to extend to the year 1555, the
+chronological series of Galvano properly ends in 1545; and the only
+subsequent incident, is a very slight notice of the voyage of Sir
+Hugh Willoughby and Richard Chancellor, towards the White Sea, in
+1553. In the original translation, and in the Oxford collection, this
+treatise is preceded by a dedication from Hakluyt to <i>Sir Robert
+Cecil</i> ; and another dedication from the Portuguese editor, Francis
+de Sousa Tavares, to Don John, Duke of Aveira; both of which are here
+omitted, as having no directly useful tendency, except so much of the
+latter as refers to the history of Galvano. Besides the present
+discourse, Galvano composed a history of the Molucca Islands, of
+which he had been governor, which work has unfortunately been lost,
+or at least is unknown in this country. He is likewise said to have
+published at Lisbon in 1555, an account of the different routes by
+which the merchandize of India had been conveyed into Europe at
+different periods.</p>
+<p>Antonio Galvano, the author of the following Summary of the
+Discoveries of the World, was a Portuguese gentleman, who was several
+years governor of the Molucca Islands, and performed signal service
+to his country in that honourable station, by dissipating a
+formidable league, which had been entered into by the native princes
+of these islands, for the expulsion of the Portuguese; and, though
+possessing very inadequate resources for the protection of so
+important a commercial establishment, he confirmed and extended the
+dominion and influence of Portugal in these islands. When first
+appointed to the command in the Moluccas, Galvano carried with him a
+private fortune of 10,000 crusadoes, all of which he expended in the
+public service. Though he added a clear revenue to the crown of
+500,000 crusadoes, in consequence of his successful, vigilant, and
+pure administration, he was so zealous in patronizing the propagation
+of the Christian religion among the islands belonging to his
+government, that, on his return to Lisbon in 1540, he was reduced to
+such extreme poverty, as to be under the necessity of taking refuge
+in the <i>hospital</i> , where he died in 1557.</p>
+<p>Francis de Sousa Tavares, the original Portuguese editor of this
+treatise, in a dedication of the work to Don John Duke of Aveira,
+gives the following account of the work, and of its author:</p>
+<p>"Antonio Galvano, when on his death-bed, left me this book, along
+with his other papers, by his testament; and, as I am certain he
+designed that it should be presented to your highness, I have thought
+proper to fulfil his intentions in that respect. It was fitting that
+this treatise should be written by a native of Portugal, as it treats
+of the various ways in which the spiceries and other commodities of
+India were formerly brought to our part of the world, and gives an
+account of all the navigations and discoveries of the ancients and
+moderns, in both of which things the Portuguese have laboured above
+all other nations. In this treatise, and in nine or ten other books,
+concerning India and the Moluccas, this true Portuguese described the
+unfortunate and sorrowful times, before our day, in which he had been
+engaged. When he was appointed to the command of the islands and
+fortresses of the Moluccas, all the kings and chiefs of these islands
+had agreed to make war against our nation, and to drive them out of
+the country. Yet he fought against them all in Tidore, though he had
+only 130 Portuguese soldiers, against their whole united power, and
+gave them a signal overthrow, in which their king, and one Ternate,
+the principal author of the war, were both slain; besides which, he
+conquered their fortresses, and compelled them all to submit to the
+obedience and service of our sovereign. In this war, two great and
+wonderful events took place: the <i>first</i> , that all the chiefs and
+kings of these islands united against us, who used ever to be at
+variance among themselves; and  <i>secondly</i> , that Galvano, with
+only the ordinary garrison, should obtain the victory against so
+great a combination. It has happened to other governors of the
+Moluccas, with an extraordinary number of European troops, and
+assisted by all the other native lords, to go to war with one king
+only, and to come back with loss; whereas he, with a small and
+inadequate force, successfully waged war against a confederacy of all
+the lords of these islands.</p>
+<p>"Three brilliant exploits have been performed in India, beyond all
+others. The capture of Muar by Emanuel Falcon; the winning of Bitam
+by Peter Mascarenas; and this victory obtained by Galvano. Besides
+this great exploit, his father and four brothers were all slain in
+the kings service; and he, being the last of his lineage, carried
+with him about 10,000 crusadoes into the Moluccas, all of which he
+expended in propagating our holy faith, and in preserving these
+valuable islands, using all his power and influence to bring all the
+cloves into the kings coffers, by which he added 500,000 crusadoes
+yearly to the royal revenue. Had he gathered cloves on his own
+account, as other governors of the Moluccas have done, he might have
+come home very rich; but returning poor, and, in the simplicity of
+his nature, expecting to be rewarded for his honest services, he was
+entirely neglected, and had to take refuge in an hospital, where he
+remained seventeen years, till his death, when he was 2000 crusadoes
+in debt; partly for demands upon him from India, and partly borrowed
+from his friends to maintain him in the hospital. After his death,
+the cardinal desired me to give his other writings to Damien de Goes,
+promising to content me for them, which otherwise I should not have
+done; yet hitherto I have not received any thing with which to
+execute his will. Yet, for all this, as in the prosperity of his
+victories he made no boast, so, in his adversity, he always preserved
+an unabated spirit. Your grace, therefore, may perceive, that this
+treatise, and his other works, were written under great afflictions;
+yet was he not willing to use the remedy of Zelim, the son of the
+great Turk Mahomet, who took Constantinople, and died in Rome, who
+used to make himself drunk, that he might forget the high estate from
+which he had fallen. Neither would he follow the councils of many of
+his friends, in withdrawing from the kingdom; saying, he had rather
+resemble Timocles the Athenian, than the Roman Coriolanus. For all
+which, this treatise ought to receive favour from your grace,
+allowing for any oversights of the author, if there be any such, as I
+am unfit to detect or correct then. God prosper your grace with long
+life, and increase of honour."</p>
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+<p> <i>Epitome of the Ancient and Modern Discoveries of the World,
+chiefly by means of Navigation, from the Flood to the close of the
+Fifteenth Century.</i> </p>
+<p>When I first desired to compose an account of the ancient and
+modern discoveries by sea and land, with their true dates and
+situations, these two principal circumstances seemed involved in such
+difficulty and confusion, that I had almost desisted from the
+attempt. Even in regard to the date of the flood, the Hebrews reckon
+that event to have happened 1656 years after the creation: while the
+seventy interpreters make it 2242; and St Augustine extends the time
+to 2262 years[1]. In regard to geographical situations, likewise,
+there are many differences; for there never sailed ten or an hundred
+pilots in one fleet, but they made their reckonings in almost as many
+different longitudes. But considering that all these difficulties
+might be surmounted, by just comparison, and the exercise of
+judgment, I at length resolved to persist in my undertaking.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] August. de Civit. Dic. I. 15. c. 20.</blockquote>
+<p>Some allege that the world was fully known in ancient times; for,
+as it was peopled and inhabited, it must have been navigable and
+frequented; and because the ancient people were of longer lives, and
+had all one law and one language, they could not fail to be
+acquainted with the whole world. Others again believe, that though
+the world might be once universally known by mankind, yet, by the
+wickedness of man, and the want of justice among nations, that
+knowledge has been lost. But as all the most important discoveries
+have been made by sea, and that chiefly in our own times, it were
+desirable to learn who were the first discoverers since the flood.
+Some allege the Greeks, others the Phenicians, while others say the
+Egyptians. The inhabitants of India, on the contrary, pretend that
+they were the first navigators; particularly the Tabencos, whom we
+now call Chinese; and allege in proof of this, that they were lords
+of all the Indies, even to Cape Bona Speranca, and the island of St
+Lawrence[2], which is inhabited by them; as likewise all the coasts
+of the Indian seas, also the Javas, Timores, Celebes, Macassar, the
+Moluccas, Borneo, Mindanao, Lu&ccedil;ones, Lequeos, the Japans, and
+many other islands; also the countries of Cochin-China, Laos,
+Bramas[3], Pegu, Arracones[4], till you come quite to Bengala.
+Besides all these, New Spain, Peru, Brazil, the Antilles, and all the
+adjoining lands, are possessed by the same race, as appears by the
+fashions and manners both of the men and women, who have small eyes,
+flat noses, with other proportions resembling the Chinese. And to
+this day, many of these islands and countries are called by such
+names, as Bato-China, Bocho-China, and the like, indicating the
+countries of, or belonging to China.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] The Cape of Good Hope, and the island of
+Madagascar--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] Birmahs</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] Arracan</blockquote>
+<p>It farther appears, that the ark of Noah rested upon the north
+part of the mountains of Armenia, in 40 degrees of latitude or
+upwards; and that Scythia, being a high land, and the first that
+appeared out of the universal deluge, was first peopled. And as the
+province or country of the Tabencos, or Chinese, is one of the
+chiefest of all Tartary, its inhabitants may be considered as the
+most ancient nation, and the oldest navigators. Their seas are calm;
+and, as lying between the tropics, their days and nights are nearly
+equal, and their seasons differ little in temperature; and as no
+outrageous winds swell their seas into storms, navigation among them
+is safe and easy. Their small barks called catamorans have only a
+large bough of a tree set up in the middle, serving as mast and sail;
+the master steers only with an oar, and the passengers sit on poles
+fastened to the bark.</p>
+<p>It is said that the people of China were anciently lords of almost
+all Scythia, and were in use to sail along that coast, which reaches
+from east to west, in seventy degrees of north latitude. Cornelius
+Nepos says, that, in the time when Metellus, the colleague of
+Afranius, was proconsul of Gaul, the king of the Suevi sent to him
+certain Indians, who came to his country in a ship by the north and
+the flats of Germany[5]. These people probably came from China; as in
+that country, in the latitudes of 20, 30, and 40 degrees, they have
+strong and well-fastened ships, which can bear the seas and encounter
+the severity of the northern climate. Cambaia also has ships, and its
+inhabitants are said to have long used the seas; but it is not likely
+they should have gone to Gaul; for they only trade to Cairo, and are
+indeed a people of little trade and less clothing.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] Pompon. Mela, I. 3. Plin. I. 2. c. 67.</blockquote>
+<p>Those who escaped from the flood kept the hills, not daring for a
+long time to descend into the plains and low countries; and Nimrod,
+an hundred and thirty years afterwards, built the tower of Babel,
+intending it as a refuge in case of any future deluge[6]. Upon the
+whole, it seems probable that the inhabitants of China and the east
+were the first sailors; though others think the inhabitants of the
+west, particularly of Syria, were the first to use the sea[7]. This
+contest about the antiquity of navigation, I leave to the Scythians
+and Egyptians, who each challenge the honour to themselves. But
+leaving all contested points in this matter, I now apply to my
+proposed deduction, resting only upon what has been recorded in
+authentic histories. Ancient history says that Tubal, in the hundred
+and forty-third year after the flood, came by sea into Spain[8];
+whence it appears that in these early times navigation was usual from
+Ethiopia to our parts of western Europe. It is also said, that
+Semiramis invaded the country on the river Indus, whence the Indians
+derive their name, and gave battle to king Stabrobates, in which he
+lost a thousand ships[9]; by which it clearly appears there were then
+many ships in those parts; and that the seas were much
+frequented.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] Joseph: Ant. Jud. I. 1. c. 5.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] Justin, I. 1.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[8] Berosus.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[9] Diod. Sic. I. 2. c. 5.</blockquote>
+<p>In the six hundred and fiftieth year after the flood, there was a
+king in Spain named Hesperus[10]; and Gonsalvo Fernandez de Oviedo,
+the chronicler of antiquities[11], affirms that he made discoveries
+by sea as far as Cape Verde and the Isle of St Thomas, of which he
+was prince, and that in his time the islands of the West Indies were
+discovered, and called the Hesperides, after his name. He alleges
+many reasons in proof of this assertion, and even says particularly,
+that these early navigators sailed in forty days from Cape Verde to
+these islands. Others say, that the islands of St Thomas and de
+Principe are the Hesperides, and not the Antilles; which is the more
+probable, as these ancient navigators only sailed along the coast,
+not daring to pass through the main ocean, having no compass, nor any
+means of taking altitudes for their guidance. It is not to be denied
+that many countries, islands, capes, isthmuses, and points, the names
+of which are found in histories, are now unknown; because, in course
+of ages, the force of the waters has wasted and consumed them, and
+has separated countries from each other formerly joined, both in
+Europe, Asia, Africa, New Spain, Peru, and other places.</p>
+<blockquote>[10] Berosus.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[11] Gons. Fern. I. 2. c. 3. Plin. I. 6. c.
+31.</blockquote>
+<p>In his dialogue called Timaeus, Plato says there was anciently a
+great country and large islands in the Atlantic, named Atlantides,
+greater than Europe and Africa, and that the kings of these parts
+were lords of a great part of Spain; but that, by the force of great
+tempests, the sea had overflowed the country, leaving nothing but
+banks of mud and gravel, so that no ships could pass that way for
+long after. It is also recorded by Pliny[12], that close by the
+island of Cadiz, there was a well inhabited island called
+Aphrodisias, towards the Straits of Gibraltar, abounding in gardens
+and orchards; but we have now no knowledge of this island, except
+from the bare mention of it in ancient authors. The Isle of Cadiz is
+said to have been anciently so large as to join the continent of
+Spain. The A&ccedil;ores are held to have been a continuation of the
+mountains of Estrella, which join the sea coast beside the town of
+Cintra; and the Sierra Verde, or Green-mountains, which reach the
+coast, near the city of <i>Sasin</i>  in the land of <i>Cucu</i> , or the
+island of Moudim in which Algarbe is situated, are supposed to have
+reached to Porto Santo and Madeira. For it is considered as an
+indubitable fact, that all islands derive their roots from the firm
+land or continent, however distant, as otherwise they could not stand
+firm. Other authors say, that from Spain to Ceuta in Barbary, people
+sometimes travelled on foot on dry land; that the islands of Corsica
+and Sardinia were once joined; that Sicily was united with Italy, and
+the Negropont with Greece[13]. We read also of the hulls of ships,
+iron anchors, and other remnants of shipping, having been found on
+the mountains of Susa, far inland, where there is now no appearance
+of the sea having ever been. Many writers affirm, that in India and
+Malabar, which now abounds in people, the sea once reached the foot
+of the mountains; and that Cape Comorin and the island of Ceylon were
+once united; also that Sumatra once joined with Malacca, by the
+shoals of Caypasia; and not far from thence there is a small island
+which, only a few years ago, was joined to the opposite coast.
+Ptolemy advances the point of Malacca three or four degrees to the
+south of the line; whereas its most southerly point, now called
+Jentana, is in one degree of north latitude, by which people pass
+daily the straits of Cincapura to the coasts of Siam and China; and
+the island of Aynan is said to have formerly joined the land of
+China; the southern extremity of which Ptolomey placed far to the
+south of the line, though it now only reaches to twentieth degree of
+north latitude.</p>
+<blockquote>[12] Plin. I. 4. c. 22.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[13] Eratosth. ap. Strab. I. 1. p. 26.</blockquote>
+<p>It may even have been that Malacca and China, as Ptolemy sets
+forth, extended beyond the line to the south; as Malacca might join
+with the land called Jentana, and the islands of Bintam, Banca, and
+Salistres, and the land might be all slime and ouze; likewise China
+might be united with the Lu&ccedil;ones, Borneo, Lequeuo, Mindanao,
+and others. Some are of opinion, that Sumatra joined with Java,
+across what is now the Straits of Sunda; and that Java also joined
+with the islands of Bali, Anjave, Cambava, Solor, Hogalcao, Maulva,
+Vintara, Rosalaguin, and others in that range, all of which are so
+near as to appear continuous, when seen from a small distance; and
+they still are so near together, that in passing through the channels
+which divide them, the boughs of the trees on each side may be
+touched by the hands. It is not long since several of the islands of
+Banda in the east were drowned by the sea overflowing them; and in
+China, about 180 miles of firm land are said to have become a lake.
+All these things are to be considered as coming within the limits of
+probability, especially when we take into account what has been
+related of similar events by Ptolemy and others, but which I here
+omit to return to my subject.</p>
+<p>About 800 years after the deluge, the city of Troy was built by
+the Dardanians; and even before that time, spices, drugs, and many
+other kinds of merchandize, which were then more abundant than now,
+were brought from India to Europe, by the Red Sea. Hence, if credit
+can be given to these accounts, we may conclude, that the sea of old
+was much frequented, those of the east bringing their commodities to
+the haven of Arsinoe in the Arabian Gulf, now called Suez[14], in
+lat. 30&deg; N. and at the northern extremity of the Arabian Gulf;
+from whence the goods were carried by caravans, upon camels, asses,
+and mules, to Cassou, a city on the coast of the Levant sea, in lat.
+32&deg; N. Allowing seventeen leagues and a half to every degree of
+latitude, these two cities are said to have been 35 leagues, or
+105[15] miles distant from each other. On account of the heat, these
+caravans, or great companies of carriers, travelled only in the
+night, directing themselves by the stars, and by land-marks fixed in
+the ground for that purpose. But finding this journey attended with
+many inconveniencies, the course was twice altered in search of a
+more commodious route[16]. About nine hundred years after the flood,
+and previous to the destruction of Troy, Egypt was ruled by a king
+named Sesostris, who caused a canal to be cut from the Red Sea to
+that arm of the Nile which flows past the city of Heroum, that ships
+might pass and repass between India and Europe, to avoid the expence
+and trouble of carrying merchandize by land across the isthmus of
+Suez; and Sesostris had large caraks or ships built for this
+purpose[17]. This enterprize, however, did not completely succeed;
+for, if it had, Africa would have been converted into an island, as
+there are even now only twenty leagues or sixty miles of land between
+the Red Sea and the Mediterranean.</p>
+<blockquote>[14] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[15] The miles here used are three to the league; but the
+league of the text is nearly equal to four English miles, and the
+assumed distance of these two ports 140 of our miles--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[16] Strab. I. 17. p. 560.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[17] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.</blockquote>
+<p>About this time the Grecians gathered a fleet and army, called the
+Argonautic expedition, under the command of Jason and Alceus[18].
+Some say they sailed from Crete, and others from Greece; but they
+passed through the Propontis and the <i>sleeve</i>  of St George into
+the Euxine, where some of the vessels perished, and Jason returned
+back to Greece. Alceus reported that he was driven by a tempest to
+the Palus Maeotis, where he was deserted by all his company; and
+those who escaped had to travel by land to the German ocean, where
+they procured shipping; and sailing past the coasts of Saxony,
+Friesland, Holland, Flanders, France, Spain, and Italy, returned to
+the Peloponnesus and Greece, after discovering a great portion of the
+coast of Europe.</p>
+<blockquote>[18] Diod. Sic. I. 4. c. 4.</blockquote>
+<p>Strabo, on the authority of Aristonicus the grammarian, says, that
+king Menelaus, after the destruction of Troy, sailed from the Grecian
+sea to the Atlantic, coasted along Africa and Guinea, doubled the
+Cape Bona Speran&ccedil;a, and arrived in India[19]; concerning which
+voyage many other particulars might be collected from the writings of
+the ancients. This Mediterranean Sea was sometimes called the
+Adriatic, the Aegean, and the Herculean Sea; and had other names,
+according to the lands, coasts, and islands, which it skirted, till,
+running through the Straits of Hercules, between Spain and Africa, it
+communicated with the great Atlantic Ocean. Thirteen hundred years
+after the flood, Solomon caused a navy to be constructed at
+Ezion-geber on the Red Sea, which sailed to Tharsis and Ophir, which
+some believe to have been islands in the East Indies. This fleet was
+three years on its voyage, and on its return brought gold, silver,
+cypress-wood, and other commodities[20]. The islands to which the
+navy of Solomon traded were probably those we now call the
+Lu&ccedil;ones, the Lequeos, and China; for we know of few other
+places whence some of the things mentioned as forming their cargoes
+can be had, or where navigation has been so long practised.</p>
+<blockquote>[19] Strab. I. 1. p. 26.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[20] Kings, I. 9. Chron. II. 8.</blockquote>
+<p>Necho, one of the kings of Egypt, was desirous to have joined the
+Red Sea with the Mediterranean, and is said in history to have
+commanded some Phenicians to sail from the Red Sea by the Straits of
+Mecca, and to endeavour to return to Egypt by the Mediterranean[21].
+This they accomplished, and sailed along the coast of Melinda,
+Quiloa, and Sofala, till they reached the Cape of Good Hope, which
+they doubled; and, continuing their course to the north, they sailed
+along the coast of Guinea all the way to the Mediterranean, and
+returned to Egypt after two years absence, being the first who had
+circumnavigated Africa.</p>
+<blockquote>[21] Herodot. I. 4.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 590 before the Incarnation, a fleet belonging to
+Carthaginian merchants sailed from Cadiz through the ocean, to the
+west, in search of land[22]. They proceeded so far that they came to
+the islands now called the Antilles, and to New Spain[23]. This is
+given on the authority of Gonzalo Fernandez de Oviedo, in his General
+History, who says that these countries were then discovered; and that
+Christopher Columbus, by his voyages in after times, only acquired
+more exact knowledge of them, and hath left us a more precise notice
+of their situation, and of the way to them. But all those historians
+who formerly wrote concerning the Antilles, as of doubtful and
+uncertain existence, now plainly allow them to be the same with New
+Spain and the West Indies. In the year 520 before Christ, Cambyses,
+king of Persia, conquered Egypt, and was succeeded by Darius, the son
+of Hystaspes. This latter prince determined upon completing the
+projects of Sesostris and Necho, by digging a canal between the Red
+Sea and the Nile: But, being assured that the Red Sea was higher than
+the Nile, and that its salt water would overflow and ruin the whole
+land of Egypt, he abandoned his purpose, lest that fine province
+should be destroyed by famine and the want of fresh water[24]; for
+the fresh water of the Nile overflows the whole country, and the
+inhabitants have no other water to drink.</p>
+<blockquote>[22] Arist. de Mirand.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[23] Gonz. Fern. Ovied. I. 2. c. 3.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[24] Plin. I. 9. c. 58. de Maribus Nili.</blockquote>
+<p>It may not be too great a digression from the subject, to say a
+few words concerning Egypt. The natives allege that they have in
+their country certain animals, of which one half of their bodies seem
+earth, and the other like rats, one species of which keeps
+continually in the water, while another species lives on the land. In
+my opinion, it is these animals which break the serpents eggs, of
+which there are many in the Nile, but which serpents are also called
+crocodiles. It is said, that in ancient times these animals were
+inchanted, so that they could not do harm to any one: But since they
+have been freed from the power of inchantment, by the arts and
+learning of the Egyptians decaying, they have done much hurt, by
+killing people, wild beasts, and cattle, more especially those which
+live in the water and come often on land. Those that live continually
+on the land become strongly venomous[25]. The people beyond the city
+of Cairo used to catch these animals, and even to eat them, setting
+up their heads on the walls of the city. Concerning these crocodiles,
+it is related[26] that they often lie along the shores of the river
+with their mouths wide open; on which occasion, certain white birds,
+little larger than our thrushes, fly into the mouths of the
+crocodiles, and pick out the filth from between his teeth, to the
+great delight of the crocodile; which, however, would surely close
+his mouth and devour the bird, had not nature provided the bird with
+a sharp sting, growing from the top of his head, which pricks the
+roof of the crocodiles mouth, and forces him to gape, so that the
+bird flies away unhurt. In this manner, by means of a succession of
+these birds, the crocodiles get their teeth cleansed. In this same
+river, there are many beasts resembling horses; and upon the land,
+there are certain birds like our cranes, which continually make war
+upon the serpents, which come thither out of Arabia: Which birds, and
+likewise the rats, which eat the eggs of the crocodiles, are held in
+great reverence and estimation, by the Egyptians.</p>
+<blockquote>[25] Joan. Leo Afric. I. 9. de Nilo.--Our author has got
+into a strange dilemma, by confounding crocodiles and serpents under
+one denomination. --E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[26] Plin. and Leo, ub. cit.</blockquote>
+<p>But now, to return to my subject of discoveries. In the year 485
+before Christ, Xerxes, king of Persia, sent his nephew Sataspis to
+discover India; who sailed from the Mediterranean through the Straits
+of Hercules, and passed the promontory of Africa, which we now call
+the Cape of Good Hope; but, wearying of the length of the voyage, he
+returned back again, as Bartholomew Diaz did in our days[27]. In 443
+A. C. Hamilco and Hanno, two Carthaginian commanders who governed
+that part of Spain now called Andalusia, sailed from thence with two
+squadrons. Hamilco, sailing towards the north, discovered the coasts
+of Spain, France, England, Flanders, and Germany; and some allege
+that he sailed to Gothland, and even to Thule or Iceland, standing
+under the Arctic circle, in 64 degrees north, and continued his
+voyage during two years, till he came to that northern island, where
+the day in June continues for twenty-two hours, and the nights in
+December are of a similar length; on account of which it is there
+wonderfully cold. His brother, Hanno, took his course to the south,
+along the coast of Africa and Guinea, and discovered the Fortunate
+Islands, now the Canaries, and the Orcades, Hesperides, and Gorgades,
+now called the Cape de Verde islands. Proceeding onwards, Hanno
+doubled the Cape of Good Hope, and went along the eastern coast of
+Africa to another cape, called Aromaticum, now called Gardafu, and
+thence to the coast of Arabia, and was five years employed in this
+voyage before his return to Spain[28]. Others allege, that Hanno
+proceeded no farther than Sierra Leona, which he colonized, and
+afterwards discovered as far as the equinoctial line; but it would
+rather appear, from the length of time he employed, that he must have
+accomplished the more extended navigation.</p>
+<blockquote>[27] Plin. I. 2. c. 67.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[28] Plin. I. 6. c. 31. This subject will be discussed in
+the <i>Fifth</i>  Part of our work; being much too extensive to admit
+of elucidation in a note.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>It is reported that the inhabitants of the country at the Cape of
+Good Hope are great witches, and by inchantment bring certain
+serpents so much under command, that they preserve their churches,
+churchyards, gardens, orchards, barns, and cattle, both from wild
+beasts and thieves. When these serpents see any person doing or
+intending to do harm, they wind themselves in such a manner around
+them as to make them prisoners, and then command their young ones to
+give notice to their masters, that they may come and secure the
+thieves. But if the thieves be numerous, or the wild beasts of too
+much strength, so that the serpents dare not encounter them, they go
+to their masters house, and if it happen to be in the night, they
+give many strokes with their tails, so as to awaken their masters,
+that they may provide for their defence[29].</p>
+<blockquote>[29] Hasty readers will have the justice to give the
+honour of this story to Galvano.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>A certain Italian, named Aloisius Cadamosta, relates, that when he
+was upon the discovery of Guinea, and resided in the house of
+Bisboral, the grandson of king Budomel, he heard one night, when in
+bed, a great noise and many blows given about the house, upon which
+Bisboral arose and went out; and, upon his return, Cadamosta demanded
+of him where he had been, and he answered that he had been with his
+cobras or snakes, which called him[30]. In the Indies there are many
+snakes, and some of them very full of poison; yet the Indians carry
+them about their necks, and put them in their bosoms, and under their
+arms, without fear or injury; and at certain sounds, the snakes will
+dance, and do many other strange things at command.</p>
+<blockquote>[30] This story will be found hereafter very differently
+related by Cada Mosto himself, but with a sufficient spice of the
+marvellous.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>I was informed by a certain Portuguese, who had been beyond the
+Cape of Good Hope, towards Sofala, Quiloa, and Melinda, that there
+were certain birds in that country, which would come to the negroes
+on a call, and as the negroes moved on through the woods, the birds
+would do the same from tree to tree, till at length they would alight
+on a tree whence they would not remove: And, on examining that tree,
+the negroes were sure to find wax and honey, but knew not whether it
+grew there naturally or not[31]. In the same country, they find much
+wax and honey in ant-holes, made by the ants, but somewhat bitter. In
+the seas of that coast, there are certain fish, known to the
+fishermen, which commonly swim upright in the water, having the faces
+and breasts of women[32].</p>
+<blockquote>[31] The Honey-guide, or Cuculus Indicator, will be
+noticed more particularly in the Travels through the Colony of the
+Cape.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[32] The Philosophers of the <i>nineteenth</i>  century
+have <i>fortunately</i>  rediscovered the <i>Mermaid</i>  in the north of
+Scotland! Hitherto, wonderful things used to be confined to barbarous
+regions and ignorant ages.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 355 before Christ, the Spaniards are said to have gone
+by sea to the flats of India, Arabia, and the adjoining coasts, to
+which they carried various merchandizes in great ships; and sailing
+to the north- west they came to certain flats which are covered by
+the tide, and left bare by the ebb, where they caught
+many <i>tunnies</i>  of great size; which fishing turned out to their
+great profit, as they were very abundant and much esteemed[33].</p>
+<blockquote>[33] Arist. de Mirand. Strabo, I. 2. p. 68.</blockquote>
+<p>Alexander, who flourished 324 years before Christ, travelled from
+Europe into Asia and Africa, passed through Armenia, Assyria, Persia,
+and Bactria; whence he descended by the mountains of Imaus and the
+vallies of Parapomissus, into India, and prepared a navy on the river
+Indus, with which he passed into the ocean. He there turned by the
+lands of Gedrosia, Caramania, and Persia, to the great city of
+Babylon, leaving the command of his fleet to Onesicratus and
+Nearchus, who sailed through the straits of the Persian Sea and up
+the river Euphrates, discovering the whole coast between the Indus
+and that river.</p>
+<p>After the death of Alexander, Ptolemy became king of Egypt, who by
+some was reputed to have been the bastard son of Philip, the father
+of Alexander: He, imitating the before named kings, Sesostris and
+Darius, caused dig a canal from the branch of the Nile which passed
+by Pelusium, now by the city of Damieta[34]. This canal of Ptolemy
+was an hundred feet broad and thirty feet deep, and extended ten or
+twelve leagues in length, till it came to the <i>bitter wells</i> . He
+meant to have continued it to the Red Sea; but desisted on the idea
+that the Red Sea was three cubits higher than the land of Egypt, and
+would have overflowed all the country, to its entire ruin.</p>
+<blockquote>[34] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.</blockquote>
+<p>Ptolemy Philadelphus, in the year 277 before Christ, changed the
+direction of the Indian traffic. The goods from Europe, by his
+orders, were carried up the Nile from Alexandria to the city of
+Coptus, and conveyed across the desert from thence to the sea-port of
+Myos-Hormos on the Red-sea[35]. To avoid the excessive heat, the
+caravans travelled only in the night, directing their course by the
+stars; and water being very scarce in the desert, they had to carry a
+sufficient quantity with them for the journey. Afterwards, to avoid
+this trouble, deep wells were dug at certain intervals; and in other
+places large cisterns or reservoirs were constructed for the
+reception of rain water. Still later, in consideration of the dangers
+attending the port of Myos-Hormos, on account of flats and islands,
+Philadelphus sent an army into Troglodytica, where he constructed a
+haven called Berenice, in which the ships engaged in the Indian
+commerce took shelter, as a place of greater security. From thence
+the goods were transported to the city of Coptus, and afterwards to
+Alexandria, which became rich and famous, through its trade with
+India, beyond any other city in the world; insomuch that it is
+asserted that the customs of Alexandria yielded every year to Ptolemy
+Auletes, the father of Cleopatra, seven millions and a half of gold,
+though the traffic had then scarcely subsisted in that direction for
+twenty years[36]. After the reduction of Egypt and Alexandria under
+the power of the Romans, the customs are said to have advanced to
+double that amount; and the trade was so great, that 120 ships used
+to be sent yearly from Myos-Hormos to India. The ships set sail every
+year from Myos-Hormos about the middle of July, and returned back
+within the year[37]. The merchandize they carried amounted to the
+value of one million two hundred thousand crowns; and the returns
+were an hundred for one; and through this prodigious increase of
+wealth, the matrons and noble ladies of those days in Alexandria,
+were exceedingly profuse in decorating themselves with purple,
+pearls, and precious stones, and in the use of musk, amber, and other
+rich perfumes of various kinds; of all which the historians and other
+writers of that age treat at great length[38].</p>
+<blockquote>[35] Strabo, I. 17. p. 560, 561.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[36] Strab. I. 17. p. 549.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[37] Plin. I. 6. c. 23.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[38] Id. I. 12. c. 18.</blockquote>
+<p>Pliny[39], on the authority of Cornelius Nepos, says that one
+Eudoxus, flying from Ptolemy Lathyrus, passed by sea through the gulf
+of Arabia, and sailing along the eastern coast of Africa, doubled the
+cape of Bona Speran&ccedil;a arrived by the Atlantic at Cadiz; and it
+would appear that this navigation was as often used in those days as
+it now is. Caius Caesar, the son of Augustus, going into Arabia,
+found in the Red Sea certain pieces of the ships which had gone
+thither from Spain.</p>
+<blockquote>[39] Id. I. 2. c. 67.</blockquote>
+<p>Long after these days it was usual to pass to India by land. This
+was done by the kings of the Sogdians, the princes of Bactria, and
+other famous captains and many merchants, who travelled thither and
+into Scythia by land. Marcus Paulus Venetus writes largely of these
+countries; and though his book at first was reckoned fabulous, yet
+what he and others have reported is now found true, by the experience
+of travellers, and merchants who have since been to the same
+parts.</p>
+<p>It is reported that the Romans sent an army by sea to India,
+against the great khan of Cathaia, 200 years before the Incarnation;
+which, passing through the Straits of Gibraltar, and running to the
+north-west, found ten islands opposite to Cape Finisterre; producing
+large quantities of tin, which perhaps may have been those afterwards
+called the Cassiterides. Being come to 50 degrees of latitude, they
+found a strait passing to the west, through which they arrived in
+India, and gave battle to the king of Cathaia, after which they
+returned to Rome. Whether this story may appear possible or not, true
+or false, I can only say that I give it as I found it written in the
+histories of these times.</p>
+<p>In the year 100 after the incarnation of Christ, the emperor
+Trajan fitted out a fleet on the rivers Tigris and Euphrates, whence
+he sailed to the islands of Zyzara; and passing the straits of
+Persia, entered into the ocean, by which he sailed along the coast to
+India, till he came to the place where Alexander had been. He there
+took some ships which came from Bengal, and learned the state of the
+country from the mariners. But being in years, and weary of the sea,
+and because he found it difficult to procure necessaries for his
+army, he returned back to Assyria[40].</p>
+<blockquote>[40] Ziphilin. in vit. Traj.</blockquote>
+<p>After the Romans had subdued most part of the world, many notable
+discoveries were made. But then came the Goths, Moors, and other
+barbarous nations, who destroyed all A.D. 412, the Goths took the
+city of Rome. Thereafter the Vandals went out of Spain, and conquered
+Africa. In 450, Attila destroyed many cities in Italy, at which time
+Venice began; and in this age the Franks and Vandals entered into
+France. In 474, the empire of Rome was lost, and fell from the Romans
+to the Goths. In 560, the Lombards came into Italy. About this time
+the sect of the Arians prevailed greatly, and Merlin the English
+prophet flourished. In 611, the Mahometan sect sprung up, and the
+Moresco government, which invaded both Africa and Spain. By this it
+may appear that all the world was in a state of war, and all places
+so very tumultuous, that traffic and merchandize ceased, no nation
+daring to trade with another by sea or land; nothing remaining
+stedfast, neither in kingdoms, signories, religions, laws, arts,
+sciences, or navigation. Even the records and writings of these
+things were burnt and destroyed by the barbarous power of the Goths,
+who proposed to themselves to begin a new world, and to root out the
+memory and knowledge of all other nations.</p>
+<p>Those who succeeded in the government of Europe, perceiving the
+great losses of the Christian world by want of traffic and the
+stoppage of navigation, began to devise a way of passing into India,
+quite different from the route of the Nile and the Red Sea, and much
+longer and more costly[41]. The goods of India were brought up the
+river Indus as far as it was navigable. They were then carried by
+land in caravans through the country of Parapomissus into the
+province of Bactria, and shipped on the river Oxus, which falls into
+the Caspian, and thence across that sea to the haven of Citracan, or
+Astracan, on the river Rha, or Volga. Thence up that river, and to
+the city of Novogrod, in the province of Resan, which now belongs to
+the great duke of Muscovy, in lat. 54&deg; N. The goods were carried
+thence overland to the province of Sarmatia and the river Tanais or
+Don, which is the division between Europe and Asia. Being there
+loaded in barks, they were carried down the stream of that river into
+the Paulus Maeotis to the city of Caffa, anciently called Theodosia,
+which then belonged to the Genoese, who came thither by sea
+in <i>galliasses</i> , or great ships, and distributed Indian
+commodities through Europe.</p>
+<blockquote>[41] Ramusio, V. f. 372. p. 2</blockquote>
+<p>In the reign of Commodita, emperor of Armenia, a better course was
+provided for this traffic: The goods being transported by land from
+the Caspian, through the country of Hiberia, now Georgia, and thence
+by the Phasis into the Euxine, and to the city of Trebisond, they
+were thence shipped for the various parts of Europe[42]. It is
+recorded that Demetrius Nicanor determined, or actually began, to
+open a canal of above 120 miles in length between the Caspian and
+Euxine, for the greater convenience of the Indian trade. But he was
+slain by Ptolemy Ceraunos, and this famous enterprize fell to
+nothing[43].</p>
+<blockquote>[42] Strabo, I. 11.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[43] Plin. I. 6. c. 11.</blockquote>
+<p>All other ways being lost, by reason of the wars of the Turks, the
+spiceries of the Indian Islands, particularly of Java, Sumatra, and
+the city of Malacca, were carried up the river Ganges, in Bengal, to
+the city of Agra; thence they were carried by land to another city
+near the Indus, named Boghar, where they were discharged, because the
+city of Cabor, or Laor, the principal city of the Mogores, stands too
+far within the land. From thence they were carried to the great city
+of Samarcand in Bactria, in which the merchants of India, Persia, and
+Turkey met together with their several commodities, as cloth of gold,
+velvets, camblets, scarlet and woollen cloths, which were carried to
+Cathay and the great kingdom of China; whence they brought back gold,
+silver, precious stones, pearls, silk, musk, rhubarb, and many other
+things of great value.</p>
+<p>In after times these merchandizes, drugs, and spiceries, were
+carried in ships from India to the Straits of Ormus, and the rivers
+Euphrates and Tigris, and were unladen at the city of Basora; from
+whence they were carried overland to Aleppo, Damascus, and Barutti;
+and there the Venetian galliasses, which transported pilgrims to the
+Holy Land, came and received the goods.</p>
+<p>In the year 1153, in the time of the emperor Frederick Barbarossa,
+it is said there came to the city of Lubeck, in Germany, a canoe like
+a long barge, with certain Indians, who were supposed to have come
+from the coast of Baccalaos[44], which is in the same latitude with
+Lubeck. The Germans greatly wondered to see such a boat and strange
+people, not knowing whence they came, nor being able to understand
+their language, especially as there was then no knowledge of their
+country. Although the boat was small in comparison with the seas it
+had to cross, it is yet possible that it might have been conveyed by
+the winds and waves; for in our days the <i>almadias</i>  of the
+negroes, which are very small boats, venture to navigate from Quiloa,
+Mosambique, and Sofala, around the Cape of Good Hope, even to the
+island of St Helena, a very small spot in the ocean, at a great
+distance from land.</p>
+<blockquote>[44] Newfoundland?</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1300 after Christ, the great soldan of Cairo restored
+the trade of spiceries, drugs, and merchandize from India, by the Red
+Sea; at which time they unloaded the goods at the port of Judea[45],
+and carried them to Mecca; whence they were distributed by the
+Mahometan pilgrims[46], so that each prince endeavoured to increase
+the honour and profit of his own country. The soldans translated this
+trade to their own city of Cairo; whence the goods were carried to
+the countries of Egypt, Lybia, Africa, Tunis, Tremessen, Fez,
+Morocco, and Suz; and some of them were carried beyond the mountains
+of Atlas, to the city of Tombuto, and the kingdom of the Jalophos;
+till afterwards the Portuguese brought the Indian trade round the
+Cape of Good Hope to Lisbon, as we propose to shew more at large in a
+convenient place.</p>
+<blockquote>[45] Jidda.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[46] Leo Afric. Ramus. v. 1. f. 373.</blockquote>
+<p>A.D. 1344, Peter IV. reigned in Arragon, and the chronicles of his
+reign report that Don Lewis de Cerda, grandson of Don John de Corda,
+requested his aid to go and conquer the Canary Islands, which had
+been gifted to him by Pope Clement VI. a Frenchman. About this time,
+too, the island of Madeira is said to have been discovered by an
+Englishman named Macham; who, sailing from England into Spain with a
+lady whom he loved, was driven out of his course by a tempest, and
+arrived in a harbour of that island, now called Machico, after his
+name. The lady being oppressed with seasickness, Macham landed with
+her on the island, accompanied by some of his people; but in the mean
+time the ship weighed anchor and stood to sea, leaving them behind.
+On this the lady died of grief, and Macham, who was passionately fond
+of her, erected a chapel or hermitage on the island, which he named
+the chapel of Jesus, and there deposited her remains, engraving both
+their names and the cause of their coming to this place on a
+monumental stone. After this, he and his companions made a boat or
+canoe out of a large tree, and putting to sea without sails or oars,
+got over to the coast of Africa. The Moors among whom he arrived,
+considering their passage as miraculous, sent him to their king, who
+transmitted both him and his company to the king of Castile.</p>
+<p>In 1395, while Henry III. reigned in Castile, in consequence of
+information given by Macham respecting this island, many persons of
+France and Castile were induced to attempt its discovery, and that of
+the Grand Canary. Those who went on this expedition were principally
+from Andalusia, Biscay, and Guipuscoa, who carried thither many men
+and horses; but I know not whether this was done at their own charge,
+or that of the king. But however that might be, these people seem to
+have been the first discoverers of the Canaries; where they took 150
+of the islanders prisoners. There is some difference among authors
+respecting the time of this discovery, as some affirm that it did not
+take place till the year 1405.</p>
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+<p> <i>Summary of Portuguese Discoveries, from the Commencement of the
+Fifteenth Century, to the Discovery of America by
+Columbus</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] The only quotations used in this Section in the
+original translation by Hakluyt, are from the Asia of John de Barros,
+Decade 1. which it has not been deemed necessary to refer to here
+more particularly.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>According to the chronicles of Portugal, John I. went from Lisbon
+in 1415, attended by his sons Don Duarte, or Edward, Don Peter, and
+Don Henry, and other lords and nobles of his realm, into Africa,
+where he took the great city of Ceuta, which was one of the principal
+causes of extending the dominions of Portugal. After their return,
+Don Henry, the king's  <i>third</i> [2] son, being then in Algarve, and
+desirous to enlarge the kingdom by the discovery of unknown regions,
+gave directions for discovering the coast of Mauritania; for in those
+days none of the Portuguese had ever gone beyond Cape Non, in lat.
+29&deg;. N.[3]. For the better accomplishment of this purpose, Don
+Henry prepared a fleet, and commanded the officers whom he employed
+to proceed in making discoveries to the south of that cape, which
+they did; but when they came to another cape, named Bajador, none of
+them dared for a long time to go beyond it, at which cowardice the
+prince was much displeased.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] It is singular that a Portuguese should not be more
+correct. Henry was the <i>fifth</i>  son.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] More accurately 28&deg; 40'.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In 1417, in the reign of John II. of Castile, and while his mother
+the lady Catharine was regent of the kingdom, Ruben de Bracamonte,
+the admiral of France, craved a grant of the Canary Islands, and the
+title of king, for his kinsman John de Betancourt; which being
+conceded, he departed from Seville with an armament to attempt the
+conquest. The principal motive of this enterprize was to make a
+perfect discovery of Madeira, of which Macham had before given so
+much information; yet he went to the Canaries, where he carried a
+friar named Mendo as bishop, who had received that dignity from Pope
+Martin V. He reduced Lan&ccedil;erota, Fuerteventura, Gomera, and
+Ferro; whence he sent into Spain many slaves, and considerable
+quantities of honey, wax, camphire, hides, orchill, figs,
+dragons-blood, and other merchandize, of which he made good profit.
+This armament is said to have likewise discovered Porto Santo. The
+island first occupied by Betancourt was Lan&ccedil;erota, where he
+built a castle of stone for the better defence of the new
+settlers.</p>
+<p>In the year 1418, John Gonzales Zarco, and Tristram Vaz Teixera,
+gentlemen of the household to Don Henry, perceiving the great desire
+of their master to discover new countries, requested and obtained a
+bark to proceed to the coast of Africa; where they were overtaken by
+a violent tempest, and driven into a haven of the island now called
+Porto Santo, where they remained two years. In 1420, they discovered
+the island of Madeira, where they found the chapel, tomb, and stone
+on which Macham had engraved his name. Others write, that a Castilian
+had informed Don Henry of having made the discovery of Porto Santo;
+and that he sent Bartholomew Perestrello, John Gonzales Zarco, and
+Tristram Vaz Teixera, purposely in search of that island, according
+to the signs and directions indicated by the Castilian; and that
+these persons afterwards discovered Madeira in 1420, where they found
+the memorial and monument left by Macham the Englishman.</p>
+<p>Betancourt, who begun the conquest of the Canaries, was slain in a
+war with the natives, leaving one Menante his heir; who afterwards
+sold the islands to one Peter Barba of Seville. But others say, that
+John de Betancourt went to France to procure reinforcements, to
+enable him to complete his conquests, and left the command of
+Lan&ccedil;erota with his nephew; who, hearing nothing of his uncle,
+and being unable to continue the contest with the natives, sold the
+Canaries to Don Henry, for an estate in the island of Madeira.</p>
+<p>It is related that, in 1424, Don Henry sent a squadron with some
+land forces, under Don Ferdinando de Castro, on purpose to make a
+conquest of these islands; but, being repulsed by the bravery of the
+natives, de Castro prudently desisted from the enterprize and
+returned home; and that Don Henry afterwards resigned his claim to
+these islands in favour of the crown of Castile. The Castilian
+writers, however, assert that both Don Henry and the king of Portugal
+refused to give up these islands, until the dispute was ended by the
+judgment of Pope Eugenius IV. who awarded them to the king of
+Castile. These islands, anciently called the Insulae Fortunatae, or
+Fortunate Islands, are seven in number, in lat. 28&deg; N. where the
+longest day is thirteen hours, and the longest night the same. They
+are 200 leagues distant from the coast of Spain, and 18 leagues from
+the coast of Africa. The people were idolaters, and eat raw flesh for
+want of fire. They had no iron, but raised or tilled the ground with
+the horns of oxen and goats, for want of better implements of
+husbandry. Every island spoke a separate language, and many pagan
+customs prevailed among the natives; but now the Christian religion
+is planted among them. The commodities of these islands are wheat,
+barley, sugar, wine, and Canary-birds, which are much esteemed for
+the sweetness and variety of their song. In the island of Ferro they
+have no water but what proceeds in the night from a tree, encompassed
+by a cloud, whence water issues, and serves the whole inhabitants and
+cattle of the island[4].</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Opportunities will occur hereafter, in particular
+voyages, to discuss the circumstances of this wonderful
+tree.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1428, Don Pedro, the king's <i>eldest</i> [5] son, who
+was a great traveller, went into England, France, and Germany, and
+thence into the Holy Land and other places, and came home by Italy,
+through Rome and Venice. He is said to have brought a map of the
+world home with him, in which all parts of the earth were described,
+by which the enterprizes of Don Henry for discovery were much
+assisted. In this map the Straits of Magellan are called
+the <i>Dragons-tail</i> , and the Cape of Good Hope the  <i>Front of
+Africa</i> , and so of the rest[6]. I was informed by Francis de Sosa
+Tavares, that in the year 1528, Don Fernando, the king's eldest son,
+shewed him a map which had been made 120 years before, and was found
+in the study of Alcobaza, which exhibited all the navigation of the
+East Indies, with the cape of Bona Speran&ccedil;a, as in our latter
+maps; by which it appears that there was as much discovered, or more,
+in ancient times as now[7].</p>
+<blockquote>[5] Galvano is again mistaken. Edward or Duarte was
+the <i>eldest</i>  son; Pedro the <i>third</i> .--Clark.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] Dr Vincent, in his Periplus, considers this as a copy
+of the map of Marco Polo, which was exhibited in the church of St
+Michael de Murano, at Venice.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] Even if this were fact, it proves nothing, as the
+Cape of Good Hope must have been inserted merely by the fancy of the
+draughtsman.-- Clarke.--It may be added, that in 1528, it was no
+difficult matter to wrong date a forged map, on purpose to detract
+from the merit of the actual discoverers.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Though attended with much trouble and expence, Don Henry was
+unwearied in prosecuting his plan of discoveries. At length Gilianes,
+one of his servants, passed Cape Bojador, a place terrible to all
+former navigators, and brought word that it was by no means so
+dangerous as had been represented, he having landed on its farther
+side, where he set up a wooden cross in memorial of his
+discovery.</p>
+<p>In the year 1433 died John king of Portugal, and was succeeded by
+his eldest son Duarte or Edward. In 1434, Don Henry sent Alphonso
+Gonzales Balduja and Gillianes, who penetrated from Cape Bajador to
+another cape, where they found the country to be inhabited, and went
+forward to another point of land, whence they returned to Portugal.
+In 1438 king Duarte died, and his son Alphonso being young, the
+kingdom was governed during his minority by his uncle Don Pedro. In
+1441, Don Henry sent out two ships under Tristan and Antonio
+Gonzales, who took a prize on the coast, and sailed to Cape Blanco,
+or the White Cape in lat. 20&deg; N.[8]. From thence they brought
+home some Moors, from whom Don Henry learned the state of the
+country. Don Henry sent an account of these discoveries to Pope
+Martin, by one Fernan Lopez de Savado; and the Pope granted
+indulgences and everlasting pardon of sins to all who should die in
+attempting the discovery of the land of the infidels. In the year
+1443, Don Henry commanded Antonio Gonzales to carry back the Moors to
+their own country, where they were ransomed for black Moors with
+curled hair, or negroes, and some gold; owing to which that place is
+now called Rio de Oro, or the Golden River, that thereby the desire
+of discovery might be the more increased. He sent soon afterward one
+named Nunnez Tristan, who discovered the islands of Arguin, who
+brought more slaves from thence to Portugal in 1444. One Lancarote, a
+groom of Don Henrys chamber, and three others, armed certain ships,
+with which they sailed along the coast to the islands of Garze, where
+they took 200 slaves, which were the first that were brought from
+thence to Portugal.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] More correctly in lat. 20&deg; 54' N. There is
+another Cape Blanco in Morocco in lat. 33&deg; 10' N. and this more
+southerly cape on the great desert is named Branca in our best
+charts.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In 1445, Gonsalvo de Syntra, an esquire belonging to Don Henry,
+went captain of a bark into these parts; and landing on the coast,
+was taken by the natives, with six or seven of his people The place
+where he was cut off got the name of Angra de Gonsalvo de Syntra from
+him; and this was the first loss sustained by the Portuguese in their
+discoveries. In 1446, three caravels were sent out under Antonio
+Gonsales, Diego Aloizio, and Gomes Perez; who were ordered to refrain
+from going to Rio de Oro, to carry themselves peaceably to the
+natives, to traffic with them peaceably, and to endeavour to convert
+as many infidels as possible to Christianity; but in this they had no
+success. In the same year, Dennis Fernandes of Lisbon, an esquire to
+the king, entered upon these discoveries, more to acquire fame than
+for profit. In the course of his voyage he discovered the
+river <i>Sanaga</i>  or Senegal, between 15 and 16 degrees of
+latitude[9]; and proceeding onwards, discovered Cape Verde, in 14
+degrees[10], upon which he erected a wooden cross, and then returned,
+much elated at the success of his voyage. In 1447 Nunnez Tristan
+passed beyond Cape Verde to Rio Grande, and went beyond that river to
+another in twelve degrees[11]. He was here taken and slain, with
+eighteen other Portuguese, and the ship was brought home in safety by
+four or five of the crew who escaped the hands of the negroes.</p>
+<blockquote>[9] The mouth of the Senegal is in lat. 15&deg; 45'
+N.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[10] More correctly, 14&deg; 45' N.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[11] It is difficult to ascertain these two rivers: The
+Rio Grande here meant is properly named Gambia. The river in 12&deg;
+N. may be the Casamansa, the Santa Anna, or the St Dominico: which
+last is exactly in 12&deg; N. the two others a little farther north,
+and nearer the Gambia. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>In this year 1447, a Portuguese ship, in coming through the
+Straits of Gibraltar, was forced a great way to the westwards by a
+violent tempest, and came to an island having seven cities, the
+inhabitants of which spoke the Portuguese language, and they inquired
+of our mariners if the Moors still infested Spain, whence their
+ancestors had fled to avoid the distresses which occurred subsequent
+to the death of Don Roderigo, king of Spain. The boatswain of this
+ship brought home some of the sand from this island, and sold it to a
+goldsmith in Lisbon, who procured from it a good quantity of gold.
+Don Pedro, who then governed the realm, being made acquainted with
+this circumstance, caused the whole to be recorded in the house of
+justice[12]. Some think that this island belonged to what is now
+called the Antilles or New Spain; but though their reasons for this
+opinion are good, I omit them here, as not connected with my present
+purpose.</p>
+<blockquote>[12] This is one of the many palpable and clumsy fables
+which were advanced to defraud Columbus of the honour of having
+discovered the new world, and is even more ridiculous, if possible,
+than the voyages of Zeno, adverted to in our <i>First</i> 
+Part.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1449, King Alphonso granted license to his uncle, Don
+Henry, to colonize the A&ccedil;ores, which had been formerly
+discovered. In the year 1458, this king went into Africa, where he
+took the town of Alca&ccedil;er; and in the year 1461, he commanded
+Signior Mendez to build the castle of Arguin, in the island of that
+name, on the coast of Africa. In the year 1462, three Genoese
+gentlemen, of whom Antonio de Noli was the chief, the others being
+his brother and nephew, got permission from Don Henry to take
+possession of the Cape de Verde islands, which some believe to be
+those called Gorgades, Hesperides, and Dorcades, by the ancients. But
+they named them Mayo, Saint Jago, and Saint Philip, because
+discovered on the days of those saints. Some call them the islands of
+Antonio. In the year following, 1463, that excellent prince, Don
+Henry, died; having discovered, by his exertions, the whole coast of
+Africa, from Cape Non to the mountain of Sierra Liona, which is on
+this side of the line, in lat. 8&deg; 30' N. where no man had been
+before.</p>
+<p>In 1469, the king of Portugal let out the trade of Guinea,
+afterwards called the Minas, to Fernan Gomez, for five years, at the
+yearly rent of 200,000 rees[13]; and under the express condition that
+he was every year to discover 100 leagues farther along the coast of
+Africa to the south. In 1470, this king went into Africa, accompanied
+by his son Prince John, where he took the town of Arzila; and the
+inhabitants of Tangier having fled from fear, he took possession of
+it also. In the year 1471, John de St Aren and John de Scovar, under
+the orders of Fernan Gomez, continued the discovery of the coast of
+Guinea as far as St George del Mina, in lat. 5&deg; N. and 2&deg; W.
+long.; the coast from Cape Verde to Cape Palmas trending S.E. after
+which it goes to the east, with even a small northerly inclination
+for about twelve degrees of longitude. In 1472, one Fernando da Poo
+discovered the island now called after his name, beyond Cape Formosa,
+in lat. 3&deg; 40' N. and about the same time the islands del
+Principe and St Thomas were discovered, the latter of which is
+situated under the equinoctial line. The firm land also was explored
+at the same time, all the way from the kingdom of Benin to Cape St
+Catherina, in lat. 1&deg; 40' S. This last discovery was made by
+Sequetra, a person in the king's immediate service. Many suppose that
+then were these countries and islands discovered which had never been
+before known since the flood.</p>
+<blockquote>[13] Equal to L.138: 17: 9-1/4 d. English
+money.--Halk.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1480, the valiant King Don Alphonzo died, and was
+succeeded by his son Don John II. who, in 1481, gave orders to Diego
+d'Azambuxa to construct the castle of St George del Mina, on the
+African coast. In 1484, Diego Caon, a knight belonging to the court,
+discovered the coast as far as the river Congo, on the south side of
+the line, in seven or eight degrees of latitude[14], where he erected
+a stone pillar, with the royal arms and titles of Portugal, with the
+date of his discovery. He proceeded southwards from thence along the
+coast, all the way to a river near the tropic of Capricorn, setting
+up similar stone pillars in convenient places. He afterwards returned
+to Congo, the king of which country sent ambassadors by his ship into
+Portugal. In the next year, or the year following, John Alonzo
+d'Aveiro brought home from Benin pepper with a tail[15], being the
+first of the kind ever seen in Portugal.</p>
+<blockquote>[14] Only 6&deg; 45' S.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[15] Mr Clarke explains this as <i>long pepper</i> ; but
+besides that this by no means answers the descriptive name in the
+text, long pepper certainly is the production of the East Indies. The
+article here indicated was probably one of the many species, or
+varieties of the Capsicum; called Guinea pepper, Cayenne pepper, Bird
+pepper, and various other names. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>In 1487, King John sent Pedro de Covillan and Alphonzo de Payva,
+both of whom could speak Arabic, to discover India by land. They left
+Lisbon in the month of May, and took shipping in the same year at
+Naples for the island of Rhodes, and lodged there in the hotel of the
+Knights of St John of Jerusalem, belonging to Portugal. From thence
+they went to Alexandria and Cairo, and then along with a caravan of
+Moors to the haven of Toro. There they embarked on the Red Sea, and
+proceeded to Aden, where they separated; de Payva going into
+Ethiopia, while Covillan proceeded to India. Covillan went to the
+cities of Cananor and Calicut, and thence to Goa, where he took
+shipping for Sofala, on the eastern coast of Africa. He thence sailed
+to Mosambique, and the cities of Quiloa, Mombaza, and Melinda,
+returning back to Aden, where he and Payva had formerly separated.
+Thence he proceeded to Cairo, where he hoped to have rejoined his
+companion; but he here learnt by letter from the king his master,
+that de Payva was dead, and he was farther enjoined by the king to
+travel into the country of Abyssinia[16] He returned therefore, from
+Cairo to Toro, and thence to Aden; and hearing of the fame of Ormuz,
+he proceeded along the coast of Arabia by Cape Razalgate to Ormuz.
+Returning from the Gulf of Persia to the Red Sea, he passed over to
+the realm of the Abyssinians, which is commonly called the kingdom of
+Presbyter John, or Ethiopia, where he was detained till 1520, when
+the ambassador, Don Roderigo de Lima, arrived in that country. This
+Pedro de Covillan was the first of the Portuguese who had ever
+visited the Indies and the adjacent seas and islands.</p>
+<blockquote>[16] In the original this is called the country of
+Prester or Presbyter John. We have formerly, in the <i>First</i>  Part
+of this work, had occasion to notice the strange idea of a Christian
+prince and priest, who was supposed to have ruled among the pagan
+nations of eastern Tartary. Driven from this false notion, by a more
+thorough knowledge of Asia, the European nations fondly transferred
+the title of Prester John to the half Christian prince or Negus of
+the semi-barbarous Abyssinians. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1490, the king sent Gonzalo de Sosa to Congo with
+three ships, carrying back with him the ambassador of the king of
+Congo, who had been brought over to Portugal in 1484, by Diego Caon.
+During his residence in Portugal, this ambassador and others of his
+company had been instructed in the Christian religion, and baptized.
+Gonzalo de Sosa died during the outward-bound voyage; and Ruy de
+Sosa, his nephew, was chosen to the command of the expedition in his
+stead. Arriving in Congo, the king of that country received them with
+much joy, and soon yielded himself and the greater part of his
+subjects to be baptized; to the infinite satisfaction of the
+Portuguese, who by these means converted so many infidels from
+paganism to Christianity.</p>
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+<p> <i>Summary of Discoveries made by the Spaniards and Portuguese,
+from the Era of Columbus, in 1492, to the year 1555</i> .</p>
+<p>In the year 1492, when Don Ferdinand king of Castile[1] was
+engaged in the siege of Granada, he sent <i>one</i>  Christopher
+Columbus, a Genoese, with three ships, for the discovery of Nova
+Spagna. This Columbus had first offered his service lot a western
+discovery to John king of Portugal, who refused to employ him. Being
+sufficiently furnished for his enterprize, Columbus set out from the
+town of Palos on the third of August 1492, having with him, as
+captains and pilots, Martin Alionzo Pinzon, Francis Martinez Pinzori,
+Vincent Yannes Pinzon, and Bartholomew Columbus his brother[2] with
+an hundred and twenty other persons in the three ships. Some persons
+affirm, that this was the first voyage which was ever conducted by
+the observation of latitudes[3]. They took the Canaries in their way,
+whence shaping their course for Cipango, or towards Japan, they were
+much amazed to find the sea all full of weeds, and with great fear
+arrived at the Antilles on the tenth day of October; the first island
+they descried, called Guanahany by the natives, they named San
+Salvador. This island is in 25&deg; N. latitude. After that they
+found many islands, which they called the Princes. The savages of
+those parts call these islands by the name of Lucaios, having indeed
+several names for them, and they stand on the north side of the line,
+almost under the tropic of Cancer. The island of St James, or
+Jamaica, lies between the 16th and 17th degrees of northern
+latitude[4]. Thence they went to the island which the natives call
+Cuba, named Ferdinando by the Spaniards, after the king, which is in
+22 degrees; from whence they were conducted by the Indians to another
+island called Hayti, named Isabella by the Spaniards, in honour of
+the queen of Castile, and afterwards Hispaniola, or Little Spain.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Ferdinand was hereditary king of Arragon; but, by
+marrying Isabella, queen of Castile, had united the several
+monarchies of Spain, under one government. Ferdinand had no share
+whatever in the honour of sending out Columbus, the sole charge being
+defrayed by his consort, Isabella, hereditary queen of Castile and
+Leon; and who had even to borrow money for the purpose. The
+contemptuous notice of <i>one</i>  Christopher Columbus, must be
+pardoned to the patriotic rivalry of a Portuguese.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] Galvano is here inaccurate: It will be seen in the
+sequel, that Bartholomew Columbus did not accompany his brother in
+this voyage, being then in England.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] It is certainly possible, that Columbus may have used
+that mode in his course to the Canaries: But as his run across the
+Atlantic was nearly on a parallel, he must have kept that part of his
+voyage by what is called dead reckoning, or by the
+log.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] The middle of Guanahana is in lat. 24&deg; 30' N. The
+centre of Jamaica in 18&deg; 10' N. The latitudes of Galvano are
+generally inaccurate; and he never pretends to assign any longitudes
+whatever. The series, likewise, in which he arranges the discoveries
+of Columbus is very inaccurate. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>In that island the admirals ship was wrecked, and Columbus caused
+a fort to be constructed of her timbers and planks, in which he left
+Roderigo de Arana with a garrison of thirty-eight men, to learn the
+language and customs of the country. Columbus then returned to Spain,
+carrying with him samples of gold and pearls, and other productions
+of the country, with ten Indians, six of whom died on the voyage; the
+rest were brought to Spain and baptized. On their way home, Columbus
+touched at the A&ccedil;ores; and on the fourth of March 1493,
+entered the port of Lisbon. This discovery gave much discontent to
+the king of Portugal. Immediately on his arrival, Columbus went into
+Castile, where he informed the king of his discoveries and of the
+dissatisfaction of the king of Portugal. On this he and his queen
+Isabella sent word of the recent discovery to Pope Alexander VI, at
+which information he and all the Italians were much astonished, as
+they marvelled that there should be any land besides what had been
+known to the Romans. Alexander made a grant of all these countries to
+the crowns of Castile and Leon, under condition that they should
+labour to extirpate idolatry, and establish the holy faith of Christ
+among the natives.</p>
+<p>On the report of this discovery, so universal a desire of
+travelling arose among the Spaniards, that they were ready as it were
+to leap into the sea, that they might swim if possible to the newly
+discovered islands. After receiving the authority of the Pope, King
+Ferdinando sent Columbus a second time to the newly-discovered
+country, of which he made him admiral, giving him many other honours,
+and a particular coat of arms, having this motto,</p>
+<p>For Castile and for Leon<br>
+A new world discovered Colon[A].</p>
+<blockquote>[A] Gomara, I. 1. c. 15.</blockquote>
+<p>Columbus set out on his second voyage to the Antilles on the 25th
+October 1493, taking his course from Cadiz, with seventeen ships and
+fifteen hundred men, accompanied by his brothers Bartholomew and
+Diego Columbus, with many other knights, gentlemen of the law, and
+priests; having chalices, crosses, and other rich religious
+ornaments, and with great power and dignity from the Pope. The tenth
+day after commencing their voyage, they reached the Canaries; and
+from thence, in twenty-five or thirty days, they sailed to the
+Antilles, the first island they saw being in 14&deg; N. due west from
+Cape de Verd in Africa. They called this island Deseada[5], or
+the <i>desired island</i> , which is said to be 800 leagues from the
+Canaries. They afterwards discovered many more islands, which they
+called the Virgins, but which are named the Caribbee islands by the
+natives, from a nation of that name, who are bold warriors, and
+excellent marksmen with bows and arrows. They poison their arrows
+with the juice of a certain herb, and whoever is wounded with these
+is sure to die, biting himself like a mad dog. From thence they went
+to the principal island in these parts, named Boriquen by the
+natives, and St John by the Spaniards; and thence to Hispaniola, or
+Isabella, where they found all the men dead whom they had left on
+returning from the former voyage. Columbus left most of his people
+here to establish a colony, under the command of his brothers; and
+went with two ships to continue his discovery of Cuba and Jamaica.
+All these islands are between 16 and 20 degrees of northern
+latitude[6]. While the admiral was sailing in quest of discoveries,
+his brethren and those who were left in Hispaniola, were much
+incommoded by an insurrection among the savages; and Columbus went
+back to Spain, to give an account of his proceedings to the king and
+queen.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] Cape de Verd is in 14&deg; 30' N. Deseada in 16&deg;
+30' N. a difference of two degrees of latitude. Dominica, in 15&deg;
+30' is the first land said to have been discovered by Columbus in
+his <i>second</i>  voyage, in the authentic original narrative by his
+son, which will be found in the sequel.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] Counting from Dominica to the north side of Cuba,
+between 15&deg; 30' and 23&deg; 15'.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In January 1494, a congress of ambassadors from Spain and Portugal
+was held at Tordesillas, for the settlement of all disputes between
+the two countries respecting the new discoveries. The
+plenipotentiaries from Spain were Don Henry Henriques, Don John de
+Cardenas, and the Doctor Maldonado; those from Portugal, Ruy de Sosa,
+his son Don John, and the doctor Ayres de Almada. After some
+conference, these plenipotentiaries divided the world between the two
+crowns, by a meridian line drawn from north to south, 300 leagues to
+the west of the islands of Cape Verd, all to the east of this line
+being appropriated to Portugal, and all to the west to Spain;
+leaving, however, the liberty of navigation equally to both[7]. In
+1495, John II. King of Portugal, died, and was succeeded by his
+cousin Emanuel.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] The negociators of the two crowns, as here related,
+seem to have been ignorant that this loose division of the globe gave
+the whole reciprocally to each of the parties.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1496, a Venetian named John Cabota, or Gabota, went to
+England; and having acquired a knowledge of the new discoveries, and
+perceiving by the globe that the islands of the Antilles were almost
+in the same latitude with his own country, and lay much nearer to
+England than Spain and Portugal, he acquainted Henry VII. with this
+circumstance, and offered his services to make discoveries for the
+crown of England. Henry was much pleased with the proposal, and
+furnished him with two ships and three hundred men, with which he set
+sail in the spring of that year, and sailed west till he came in
+sight of land, in lat. 45&deg;N. Whence he sailed northwards till he
+came into the latitude of 60 degrees, where the day is 18 hours long,
+and the night is very clear and bright. He there found the air very
+cold, with great islands of ice, and found no bottom with a line of
+100 fathoms. From thence, finding the land turn eastwards, he coasted
+along it, discovering all the bay and river named Deseado[8], to see
+if it passed on to the other side of the land. Cabot afterwards
+sailed down the coast to the lat. of 38&deg;N. though some people
+allege that he reached Cape Florida, in 25&deg;N.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] The apparent object seems to have been in search of a
+passage to the East Indies by way of the north-west, a chimera long
+and anxiously sought after. It is needless to make any observations
+on these indistinct notices, as the voyage of Cabot will be
+afterwards given at full length.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1497, Columbus was again sent out on discovery, with
+six ships furnished by the crown of Spain, and two others fitted out
+at his own expence. Sending his brother before, he sailed from Cadiz,
+taking his son Don Diego along with him. It was then reported, that
+he meant to take the island of Madeira, because he distrusted the
+Frenchmen, and therefore sent three ships thither; others say, that
+his object was for the Canaries. However this may be, he went with
+four ships to the Cape de Verd islands, whence he ran along a
+parallel, finding great rains and calms, and the first land he came
+to in the Antilles was an island in nine degrees of north latitude,
+called Trinidada,[9] which lies close to the main land. Here he
+entered the Gulf of Paria, and came out by the Bocca de Dragone, or
+Dragons-mouth. Holding his course westwards along the coast of Paria,
+he came to the islands called Los Testigos, or the Witnesses, beyond
+which is the island of Cubagua, where there is a great fishing for
+pearl-muscles, and where also there is a well of rock oil. Beyond
+that he came to the Frailes islands, named Roques, Aruba, and
+Cura&ccedil;oa, and other small islands, along the coast of the main
+land, and to the point of land named Cabo de Vela, having discovered
+200 leagues of coast. He thence crossed over the Caribbean Sea,
+directly north for Hispaniola, passing by the island Beata.</p>
+<blockquote>[9] The centre of Trinidada is in 10&deg; 30'N. its S.W.
+point in 10&deg; 12', and the N.E. cape in 10&ordm; 45'
+N.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In this same year[10] 1497, on the 20th day of June[11], King
+Emanuel sent a squadron of three ships for India, commanded by one
+Vasques de Gama, having under his command his brother Paulus de Gama
+and Nicolas Coello, as captains of the other two ships, the whole
+having a complement of 120 men. They were accompanied by a fourth
+ship laden with provisions. In fourteen days they reached the island
+of St Jago, one of the Cape Verds, whence they went along the coast
+beyond the Cape of Good Hope, erecting pillars of stone in proper
+places, as marks of discovery and possession, and came to Mosambique
+in lat. 15&deg; S. After staying only a short time there, de Gama
+went to Mombaza and Melinda, the king of which last place gave him
+pilots, who conducted him to India, in which passage he discovered
+Los Baxos do Padua, or the Flats of Padua. In the month of May 1498,
+de Gama came to anchor before the city of Calicut, <i>and
+Panama</i> [12], where they remained till the first day of September,
+when they sailed towards the north, discovering all the coast till
+they came to the island of Angediva, on the western side of India, in
+15&deg; N. where they came to an anchor in the beginning of October.
+They remained here till February 1499, when they departed on their
+voyage homewards; coming first to Melinda, and so by Mosambique and
+along the coast to the Cape of Good Hope, and by the islands of Cape
+de Verd, and lastly to the city of Lisbon, in September of that year,
+having been absent on their voyage for twenty- six months.</p>
+<blockquote>[10] De Barros, Dec. I. 1. 4. c. 2. and to the end of ch.
+11.--Hakl.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[11] Osorius says this voyage commenced on the 9th of
+July.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[12] This Panama seems a blunder of some ignorant
+copyist, for Panarame. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the 13th of November 1499, Vincent Yannez Pinzon, who had
+sailed with Columbus in his first voyage of discovery, and his nephew
+Aries Pinzon, departed from the port of Palos with four well
+appointed ships, fitted out at their own cost, having a license from
+the king of Spain to prosecute discoveries in the new world, but with
+express orders not to touch anywhere that had been visited by
+Columbus. Going first to the islands of Cape de Verd, they passed the
+line and stood over towards the new world, which they fell in with at
+Cape St Augustine, in lat. 8&deg; 30' S. where they carved on the
+barks of trees the date of their arrival, and the names of the king
+and queen of Spain. They had several skirmishes with the inhabitants
+of Brazil, but got no advantage. Following the coast westwards[13],
+they entered the river named Maria Tambal, by which time they had
+made above thirty prisoners. The chief places where they touched were
+Cape St Augustine, Cape St Luke, Tierra de los Humos; the rivers of
+Marannon and of the Amazons, and the Rio Dolce, or Sweet river[14],
+and other places along the coast. At last, being come to 10&deg; N.
+they lost two of their ships with their crews, and returned home,
+after having employed ten months and fifteen days in their
+voyage.</p>
+<blockquote>[13] The coast here is nearly N. and S. and their course
+must have been to the north.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[14] The Marannon and Amazons are the same river. Perhaps
+by the Rio Dolce the Orinoco may be meant; but in these slight
+notices of discovery it is impossible at times to ascertain the real
+positions, through the alteration of names.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In March 1500, Pedro Alvarez Cabral sailed from Lisbon with
+thirteen ships for India, being ordered not to go near the coast of
+Africa, that he might shorten the voyage. Losing sight of one of his
+ships, he deviated from his course in hopes to rejoin it, and sailed
+till he unexpectedly fell in with the coast of Brazil, where he sent
+a bark in, search of a safe harbour, which they found in 17&deg; S.
+and called it Puerto Seguro. From thence they made sail for the Cape
+of Good Hope and Melinda, whence they crossed over to the river of
+Cochin, which was not before known. Here they loaded with pepper; and
+on their return Sancho de Thovar discovered the city of Sofala, on
+the eastern coast of Africa.</p>
+<p>It is reported, that in the year 1500, one Gaspar Cortereal got a
+general license from King Emanuel to make discoveries in the new
+world. He fitted out two stout ships at his own cost, from the island
+of Tercera, and sailed to that part of the new world which is in
+50&deg; N. which has been since known by his name, and came home in
+safety to Lisbon. In a second voyage, his own immediate vessel was
+lost, and the other came home. Upon this, his brother Michael
+Cortereal went to seek him with three ships, fitted out at his own
+charges; and finding many creeks and rivers on the coast, the ships
+divided for the more effectual search, agreeing that they should all
+meet again at an appointed time and place. The other two ships did
+so; but after waiting a reasonable rime for Michael Cortereal, it was
+concluded that he was also lost, on which the other two ships
+returned to Lisbon, and no news was ever afterwards heard of the two
+brothers; but the country where they were lost is still called the
+land of Cortereal[15].</p>
+<blockquote>[15] From the latitude indicated by Galvano, the land of
+Cortereal may have been somewhere on the eastern side of
+Newfoundland.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In March 1501, John de Nova sailed from Lisbon with four ships for
+India. In his outward-bound voyage he discovered an island in the
+Atlantic, in lat. 8&deg; S. to which he gave the name of
+Ascension[16]. On his return from India, he fell in with another
+island in the Atlantic in 17&deg; S. called St Helena, which, though
+very small, is yet of great importance from its situation. In the
+month of May of the same year 1501, three ships were sent from Lisbon
+by King Emanuel, to make a discovery of the coast of Brazil, which
+had been accidentally fallen in with, by Cabral: Passing by the
+Canaries, they stopped for refreshments at the town of Bezequiche in
+the Cape Verds; and passing southwards from thence beyond the line,
+they fell in with Brazil in five degrees of south latitude, at Cape
+St Roquo, and sailed along the coast southwards, till they reckoned
+themselves to have reached 32&deg; S. Finding the weather cold and
+tempestuous, they turned back in the month of April 1502, and got to
+Lisbon In September of that year, having been out fifteen months on
+their voyage.</p>
+<blockquote>[16] Barros, Dec. 1. I. 5. c. 10.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year 1502, Alfonso Hojeda went to discover the Terra
+Firma, and followed its coast till he came to the province of Uraba
+I7. In 1503, Roderigo Bastidas of Seville went with two caravels at
+his own cost, to the Antilles, where he first came to the Isla Verde,
+or the Green island, close by Guadaloupe; whence he sailed westwards
+to Santa Martha and Cape do la Vela, and to the Rio Grande or Great
+river. He afterwards discovered the haven of Zamba, the Coradas,
+Carthagena, the islands of S. Bernard de Baru, the Islas de Arenas,
+Isla Fuerta, and the Point of Caribana, at the end of the Gulf of
+Uraba, where he had sight of the Farrallones, close by the river of
+Darien. From Cape de la Vela to this last place, which is in lat.
+9&deg; 40' N. is 200 leagues. From thence he stood over to Jamaica
+for refreshments. In Hispaniola he had to lay his ships on the ground
+to repair their bottoms, because a certain species of worms had eaten
+many holes in the planks. In this voyage Bastidas procured <i>four
+hundred marks</i> [18] of gold; though the people were very warlike,
+and used poisoned arrows.</p>
+<blockquote>[17] Gomara, I. 2.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[18] About 8200 ounces, worth about L. 16,000 sterling;
+equal in modern efficacy, perhaps, to L. 100,000.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year 1502, Columbus entered upon his fourth voyage of
+discovery, with four ships, taking with him his son Don Ferdinando.
+The particular object of this voyage, by command of King Ferdinand,
+was to look out for the strait which was supposed to penetrate across
+the continent of the new world, and by which a route to India by the
+west was expected to be discovered. He sailed by Hispaniola and
+Jamaica to the river Azua, Cape Higueras, the Gamares islands, and to
+Cape Honduras, which signifies the Cape of the Depths. From thence he
+sailed eastwards to Cape Garcias a Dios, and discovered the province
+and river of Veragua, the Rio Grande, and others, which the Indians
+call Hienra. Thence to the river of Crocodiles, now called Rio de
+Chagres, which rises near the South Sea, within four leagues of
+Panama, and runs into the Caribbean Sea. He went next to the Isle of
+Bastimentos, or of Provisions, and after that to Porto Bello; thence
+to Nombre de Dios and Rio Francisco, and the harbour of Retreat. Then
+to the Gulf of Cabesa Cattiva, the islands of Caperosa and Cape
+Marmora; having discovered two hundred leagues along the coast. He
+thence returned to the island of Cuba, and from that to Jamaica,
+where he laid his ships aground, on account of their bottoms being
+much eaten by the worms.</p>
+<p>On the tenth of February 1S02, Don Vasques de Gama, now admiral,
+sailed from Lisbon for India, with nineteen or twenty caravels. On
+the last day of February he reached Cape de Verd, whence he went to
+Mosambique, and was the first who crossed over from thence to India.
+In this passage he discovered the islands of Amirante, in four
+degrees of south latitude. Having taken in a cargo of pepper and
+drugs, de Gama returned to Lisbon, leaving Vincent Sodre to keep the
+coast of India, with four stout ships. These were the first of the
+Portuguese who navigated the coast of Arabia Felix, which is so
+barren, that the inhabitants are forced to support their camels and
+other cattle on dried fish. The sea on that coast is so abundant in
+fish, that the cats are in use to take them. One Antonio de Saldania
+is reported to have discovered Socotora, formerly named Coradis, and
+the Cape of Guardafu in 1503.</p>
+<p>In 1504, Roderigo de Bastidas, formerly mentioned, with the aid of
+John de Ledesma, and others of Seville, fitted out two ships, and
+taking John de Cosa as his pilot, went on discovery to the Terra
+Firma of America, where Carthagena now stands. He is said to have
+here met with Lewis de la Guerra, and they in conjunction landed in
+the island of Codego, where they made prisoners of 600 savages. Going
+a little farther along the coast, they entered the Gulf of Uraba,
+where they found sand mingled with gold, being the first of that kind
+which was brought to Spain. From thence they sailed for St Domingo,
+loaded with slaves, but almost famished for want of victuals, as the
+natives refused to traffic with them for any. In the end of this year
+Isabella, queen of Castile, died. While she lived, no subject of
+Arragon, Catalonia, Valencia, or any other of the provinces,
+depending on her husband King Ferdinand, was allowed to sail to any
+of the newly-discovered countries; but only her own subjects of
+Castile and Biscay, by whom all these lands were discovered;
+excepting only such of her husbands subjects as might be in a servile
+capacity to her own, or a few that could procure special
+licenses.</p>
+<p>In 1505, on the twenty-fifth of March, Francisco de Almeida, the
+viceroy of India, sailed from Lisbon with a fleet of twenty-two sail.
+On his way to India, he stopped at Quiloa, where he built a fort,
+appointing Peter Fereira to command it. From beyond Melinda he passed
+over to the island of Anguediva, of which he appointed Emanuel
+Passavia to be captain. He built a fort also at Cananor, of which he
+gave the command to Laurence de Brito; and one at Cochin, which was
+given in charge to Alphonso de Noronha. This year likewise, Peter de
+Anahay built a fort at Sofala, of which he was made captain. In the
+latter end of this year the viceroy commanded his son Lauren&ccedil;o
+to go to the islands of Maldivia. Beating up against contrary winds,
+he arrived at these islands which in ancient times were called
+Tragan&aelig;[19], but Ytterubenero by the Moors, and by us Ceilan.
+Here he went on shore, and entered into treaty with the people, and
+returned to Cochin. In the middle of this island there is a high
+rock, having the print of a mans foot, said to have been that of Adam
+when he ascended to heaven, which the Indians hold in great
+reverence.</p>
+<blockquote>[19] Probably an error for Taprobana; the same by which
+Ceylon was known to the ancients.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In 1506, after the death of Isabella, King Philip and Queen Joan
+came to take possession of the crown of Castile, and. King Ferdinand
+retired into his own dominions of Arragon. In that same year Philip
+died, and Ferdinand resumed the government, giving license to all
+Spaniards to go to the new discovered countries; but not allowing the
+Portuguese to go there. In this year, likewise, Christopher Columbus
+died, in the month of May, and was succeeded in his dignities by his
+son Don Diego.</p>
+<p>In March 1506, Tristan de Acunha and Alphonso de Albuquerque went
+to India with fourteen ships, and refreshed by the way at Bezequiche,
+in the Cape de Verd islands. Before reaching the Cape of Good Hope
+they discovered certain islands, in 37&deg; S. which are now called
+the islands of Tristan de Acunha. During this voyage, the fleet was
+dispersed by a tempest, and Alvaro Teliz ran so far that he came to
+Sumatra, whence he returned to Cape Guardafu, having discovered many
+islands, seas, and countries, not known before that time to the
+Portuguese. At the same time, Emanuel Telez de Meneses was driven on
+the outside of the great island of St Lawrence, or Madagascar, and
+having surveyed its coasts, came to Mosambique, where he met with
+Tristan de Acunha, who was the first captain that wintered there.
+Meneses, having reported that there was plenty of ginger, cloves, and
+silver in Madagascar, was sent back there, and traversed a
+considerable part of the island; but not finding any thing of value,
+returned to Mosambique, whence he went to Melinda, and Brava, and
+thence to Socotora, where he built a fort, of which he appointed one
+Antonio de Noronha to be captain. In 1507, Tristan de Acunha returned
+to Europe, and Alphonso de Albuquerque remained in India with five or
+six ships, to keep the command of the sea. In the course of that year
+or the next, Albuquerque stood over to discover the coast of Arabia,
+which he explored, and doubled the Cape of Rosalgate, which is under
+the tropic of Cancer.</p>
+<p>In 1509, Diego Lopez de Sequiera went from Lisbon for India with
+four ships; and stopping at the island of Madagascar was almost a
+year on his voyage. Arriving at Cochin in the month of May, the
+viceroy gave him another ship, in which he went to Malacca in
+September passing between the islands of Nicubar and many others. He
+went also to Sumatra; to the cities of Pedir and Pacem; and all along
+that coast to the island of Puloreira, and the fiats of Capacia;
+thence he stood over to the city of Malacca, in lat. 2&deg; N. where
+the people took and slew some of his men. After this he returned to
+Cochin, having discovered five hundred leagues in this voyage. The
+island of Sumatra is the first land in which we knew of mens flesh
+being eaten, by certain people in the mountains called Bacas, who
+gild their teeth. In their opinion the flesh of the blacks is sweeter
+than that of the whites. The flesh of the oxen, kine, and hens in
+that country is as black as ink. A people is said to dwell in that
+country, called <i>Daraqui-Dara</i> , having tails like sheep[20].
+There are likewise springs of rock oil or bitumen. In the kingdom of
+Pedir, likewise, there is said to be a river of oil; which is not to
+be wondered at, as we are assured there is also a well of oil in
+Bactria. It is further said that there is a tree in that country, the
+juice of which is a strong poison if it touch a mans blood; but if
+drank, it is a sovereign antidote against poison. They have here also
+certain gold coins, called drachms, brought, as they say, into their
+country by the Romans[21], which seems to have some resemblance to
+truth, because beyond that country there are no gold coins.</p>
+<blockquote>[20] The Cakerlaka of other writers, which can only be
+large monkeys or baboons, called men with tails, through ignorance or
+imposture.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[21] Rumi still continues the eastern name of the Turkish
+empire, as the successor of the Roman emperors, in Assyria and Egypt.
+Hence these Roman gold coins may have come in the way of trade from
+Assyria or Egypt, or may possibly have been Venetian
+sequins.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In 1508, Alphonso de Hojeda went with the license of King
+Ferdinand, but at his own charges, to conquer the province of Darien,
+in the Terra Firma of the new world. Landing in the country of Uraba,
+he called it Castilia del Oro, or Golden Castile, because of the gold
+found in the sand along its coast. He went first from the city of San
+Domingo, in Hispaniola, with four ships and three hundred soldiers,
+leaving behind him the bachelor Anciso, who afterwards compiled a
+book of these discoveries. He was followed by a fourth ship with
+provisions and ammunition, and a reinforcement of 150 Spaniards.
+Hojeda landed at Carthagena, where the natives took, slew, and
+devoured seventy of his men, by which his force was much weakened.
+Some time after but in the same year, Diego de Niquesa fitted out
+seven ships in the port of Beata, intending to go to Veragua with 800
+men; but coming to Carthegana, where he found Hojeda much weakened by
+his losses, they joined their forces, and avenged themselves of the
+natives. In this voyage Niquesa discovered the coast called Nombre de
+Dios, and went into the sound of Darien, on the river Pito, which he
+named Puerto de Misas. Coming to Veragua, Hojeda went on shore with
+his soldiers, and built there the town of Caribana, as a defence
+against the Caribbees; being the first town built by the Spaniards on
+the continent of the new world. He also built another at Nombre de
+Dios, and called it Nuestra Seniora de la Antigua. A town was built
+at Uraba, in which Francis Pisarro was left with the command, who was
+there much annoyed by the natives. They likewise built other towns,
+the names of which I omit. In this enterprize the Spaniards did not
+meet with the success they expected.</p>
+<p>In 1509, Don Diego Columbus, the second admiral of New Spain, went
+to the island of Hispaniola with his wife and household; and she,
+being a noble woman, carried with her many ladies of good families,
+who were there married; by which means the Spaniards began to
+multiply in their new colony, and Hispaniola became famous and much
+frequented. Columbus likewise reduced Cuba into order, and took
+measures for its colonization, where he placed one Diego Velasques as
+his lieutenant, who had accompanied his father in his second voyage
+of discovery.</p>
+<p>In April 1511, Alphonso de Albuquerque went to Malacca from
+Cochin; and finding certain Chinese about to return from Malacca into
+their own country, he sent a Portuguese along with them, named Duarte
+Fernandes, with letters for the king of the Mantias, now called Siam.
+They passed through the Straits of Cincapura, and sailed northwards
+along the coast of Patane to the city of Cuy, and thence to Odia, the
+chief city of the kingdom, in 14&deg; N.[22]. The king of this
+country received Duarte with great honour, as he was the first
+Portuguese who had been in these parts, and sent back ambassadors
+along with him to Albuquerque. They travelled overland to the
+westwards, till they came to Tanacerim, on the Bay of Bengal, in
+12&deg; N. where they embarked in two ships and sailed to Malacca.
+The inhabitants of Siam, through which they travelled, eat of all
+kinds of beasts, and even of what we repute to be vermin. The people
+of this country are reputed the most virtuous and honest of any in
+those parts of the world, and pride themselves much on their poverty
+and chastity; yet have a strange practice of carrying round bells
+within their foreskins, which is not permitted to the king and
+priests. They do not rear any poultry or pigeons about their houses.
+The kingdom is 250 leagues in length and 80 in breadth[23].</p>
+<blockquote>[22] The author must here mean Cochin China by the coast
+of Patane.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[23] About 1000 by 320 English miles.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Elephants are so numerous in this country, that on going to war,
+the king is said to carry 30,000 into the field, besides others which
+are left in the several garrisons. This king has great pride in the
+possession of a white elephant, having red eyes, which glare like a
+flame of fire. In this country there is a certain species of small
+vermin, which attaches itself to the trunks of the elephants, to suck
+their blood, by which many elephants die. The skull of this
+insect[24] is so hard as to be impenetrable to a musket shot. They
+have on their livers the figures of men and women, which the natives
+call Toketa, resembling a mandrake; and it is affirmed, that whoever
+has one of these about him cannot be killed by an iron weapon. They
+have also wild kine in this country, in the heads of which certain
+stones are found, which have the virtue to bring good fortune to
+merchants.</p>
+<blockquote>[24] This story of the skull of a small insect is quite
+unintelligible, and must have been misunderstood entirely by Hakluyt,
+the translator: It is the Elephant, probably, that is here
+meant.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>After the return of Duarte Fernandes from Siam, Albuquerque sent a
+knight named Ruy Nunnez de Acunha, as ambassador to the king of the
+Sequies, the country we now call Pegu. He went in a junk of the
+country, passing Cape Rachado, and thence to the city of Pera, on the
+river Salano, on which river are many other villages, where Duarte
+had been before; and he afterwards went by Tana&ccedil;erim to the
+city of Martavan, in 15&deg; N. and the city of Pegu in 17&deg; N.
+This was the first Portuguese who travelled in that kingdom, and who
+brought back a good account of the country and people.</p>
+<p>In the end of 1511, Albuquerque sent three ships to the islands of
+Banda and Molucca, under command of Antonio de Breu and Francis
+Serrano, with an hundred and twenty men. Passing through the Straits
+of Saban, and along the island of Sumatra, and other islands on their
+left, named the Salites, they came to the islands of Palimbang and
+Lu-Suparam, whence they sailed by the noble island of Java, and
+eastwards between it and the island of Madura. In this last island
+the men are strong and warlike, and care little for their lives, even
+their women going out to war. These people are almost continually
+engaged in war and mutual slaughter, like the Mocos, and seem to
+place their only delight in bloodshed. Beyond Java they came to
+another island called Bali, and afterwards to Avajave, Sambaba,
+Solor, Galao, Malva, Vitara, Rosalanguin, and Arus; whence are
+brought beautiful birds, in much estimation on account of their
+feathers[25]. Beyond these islands they came to numbers of others,
+lying in 7 or 8 degrees of south latitude, all so close together as
+to appear like one entire mainland, and stretching near 500 leagues
+in length. The ancient cosmographers describe all these islands by
+one general name, the  <i>Javos</i> ; but more recent knowledge has
+found that they have all separate names. Beyond these, and more to
+the north, there are other islands, which are inhabited by a whiter
+people, clothed in shirts, doublets, and trowsers, something like the
+Portuguese dress, and who also have silver money. Their magistrates
+carry red staves in their hands, as badges of command, and seem to
+have some affinity in this respect with the people of China. There
+are other islands in these parts, or which the inhabitants are red;
+and it is reported they are the same people with the Chinese.</p>
+<blockquote>[25] Probably the bird of Paradise.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>De Breu went northwards to the small island of Gumnape or Ternate,
+from the highest part of which flakes or streams like fire fell
+continually into the sea. He went thence to the islands of Burro and
+Amboyna, and came to anchor in the haven of Guliguli, where, in a
+village near a river, they found dead men hanging up in the houses,
+as the people are cannibals. Here they burnt the ship of Serrano, as
+she was old and rotten; and going to a place on the other side of the
+island, in 8&deg; S. they loaded cloves, nutmegs, and mace, in a junk
+or barque, which Serrano bought. It is said, that in an island not
+far from Banda, there are immense quantities of snakes, especially in
+a cave in the centre of the island. The same is said of Formentera,
+in the Mediterranean, anciently Ophiusa, between Majorca and Minorca.
+On their return from Banda towards Malacca, in 1512, Francis Serrano
+perished with his junk on the flats called Baxos de Lu&ccedil;apinho,
+nine or ten of the Portuguese crew escaping to the island of
+Mindanao, who were sent for by the kings of the Moluccas. These were
+the first of the Portuguese who came to the Islands of Cloves, which
+are in lat. 1&deg; N. and they remained there seven or eight years.
+Some Portuguese and princes of the Moors once endeavoured to go near
+that part of the isle of Ternate which throws out fire, but could not
+accomplish it. But Antonio Galvano accomplished this enterprise, and
+found a spring so cold that he could not bear his hand in the water,
+nor suffer any of it in his mouth, though almost directly under the
+line.</p>
+<p>In these Molucca islands, there are certain men who have spurs on
+their ancles like cocks; and I was told by the king of Tidore, that
+in the islands of Batochina, there are people with tails, who have a
+lactiferous nipple on the scrotum. There are small hens also in these
+parts, many of which are black in the flesh, and lay their eggs,
+larger than those of ducks, in holes above nine feet under ground.
+They have likewise hogs with horns, and excellent talking parrots,
+which they call <i>Noris</i> . There is also a river so very hot that
+it takes off the skin of any living creature that bathes in its
+waters, and yet contains living fish. Their crabs are very sweet to
+eat, yet their claws are so strong that they will break the iron of a
+pickax; and there are small hairy crabs in the sea which are rank
+poison, as whoever eats of them immediately dies. In these seas are
+certain oysters, called <i>Bras</i> , having shells of so great size,
+that they might serve as fonts for baptizing children. In these seas
+there are certain living stones, which grow and increase like plants,
+of which excellent lime may be made by burning in the usual manner,
+when taken fresh from the sea; but, if allowed to remain long in the
+air, it loses all its strength, and will not afterwards burn into
+line. There is a tree which bears flowers only at sunset, which fell
+off immediately when blown. There is likewise a certain fruit,
+whereof if a woman who has conceived shall eat, the child by and by
+moves. There is, farther, a certain herb which followeth the sun, and
+removes after it, which is a strange and marvellous thing.</p>
+<p>In 1512, while on the voyage from Malacca to Goa, the ship in
+which Albuquerque embarked was lost. Simon de Andrada and a few
+Portuguese were driven among the Maldivia islands, where they
+remained till they learnt the fate of the viceroy. These islands are
+low, small, and very numerous, and are full of palm trees,
+or <i>Cocoas</i> , which are good against all kinds of poison.</p>
+<p>In this year 1512, John de Solis, a native of Lisbon, and chief
+pilot to King Ferdinand, went from Spain by license to discover the
+coast of Brazil. Following the course of the Pinsons, he went to Cape
+St Augustine, and thence sailed along the whole coast to the harbour
+of De Lagoa; and in lat. 35&deg; S. he discovered a river called
+Parana-gua&ccedil;u, or the Great River, and from signs of silver he
+gave it the name of Rio de la Plata, or the River of Silver. It is
+even said that he went farther at this time; and returning into
+Spain, gave an account of his discovery to King Ferdinand, from whom
+he demanded and obtained leave to colonize the country, and received
+the appointment of governor. On this he provided three ships, and
+returned to that country in 1515, but was slain by the natives. The
+family of de Solis produced several great discoveries in these
+parts[26].</p>
+<blockquote>[26] P. Martyr, Dec. 3. c. 10.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year 1512, John Ponce de Leon, who had been governor
+of the island of St John in the Antilles, armed two ships, with which
+he went in search of the island of Boyuca, where it was reported
+there was a spring which made old men young again; but after
+searching for six months he could not find it. In 25&deg; N. he
+discovered a point of the continent upon Easter-day, which he called
+the country of Florida; and because he expected the land would yield
+gold and silver, he begged it from King Ferdinand, but died in the
+discovery of the country, as many had done before.</p>
+<p>In the year 1513, Vasco Nunnes de Valboa, or Balboa, hearing of
+the  <i>South Seas</i> , determined to go thither; and being a man of
+courage, though strongly dissuaded by several of his company, he
+marched on the enterprize with 290 men. Leaving Darien on the first
+of September, and taking some Indians along with him as guides, he
+marched directly across the isthmus, sometimes without opposition,
+and having at other times to fight his way. In a certain place called
+Careca, he found some negroes with curled hair, who were captives
+among the Indians. At length, on the 25th of the same month of
+September, being the festival of St Michael, he came in sight of the
+South Sea: He there embarked in a canoe, much against the will
+of <i>Chiapes</i> , the cacique of that part of the coast, who
+endeavoured to persuade him that the navigation was very dangerous;
+but he persisted in his design, that he might be the first who had
+navigated this new discovered sea, and came back in safety. He
+returned thence to Darien, bringing with him a good store of gold,
+silver, and pearls, which he had taken during the march; and for this
+good service, he was much honoured and favoured by King
+Ferdinand.</p>
+<p>In February 1513, Alphonsus de Albuquerque went from Goa towards
+the Straits of Mecca with twenty ships, and arriving at the city of
+Aden, battered it with his cannon, and passing the Straits entered
+the Red Sea, and wintered at the island of Camaran. This was
+the <i>first</i>  Portuguese captain who gave an account of the Red Sea
+and the Persian Gulf, which are of great importance in regard to
+trade.</p>
+<p>In May 1514, Pedro Arias de Avila was sent out from St Lucar, as
+governor of Castilia del Oro, or the Golden Castile, for so the
+Spaniards named the countries of Darien, Carthagena, and Uraba. He
+carried with him fifteen hundred men and seven ships; and Vasco
+Nunnes de Balboa, who discovered the South Seas, was sent out at the
+same time as admiral of the coasts of that newly discovered sea. In
+the beginning of the year 1515, de Avila sent Gaspar Morales with 150
+men to the Gulf of St Michael, to discover the islands of
+Tararequi[27], Chiapes, and Tumaccus. A cacique, the friend of
+Balboa, gave him many canoes, or boats made of one tree, with which
+they passed to the Isle of Pearls, where they were at first resisted;
+but Chiapes and Tumaccus pacified the cacique of that island, who
+submitted himself, and received baptism, taking the name of the
+governor, Pedro Arias, and presented Morales with a basket of pearls
+weighing 110 pounds, some of which were as large as hazel nuts,
+weighing 20, 25, 26, and even 31 carats, each of four grains; and one
+of these pearls was sold for 1200 ducats. In March 1515, de Avila
+sent Gonsalva de Badajos, with 80 soldiers, to discover new lands,
+who went to Nombre de Dios, where he was joined by Lewis de Mercado
+with a reinforcement of 50 men. They resolved to proceed to the
+south, as the richest country; and taking some Indians as guides,
+they found some slaves along the coast marked with the irons used by
+the Portuguese. They marched a considerable way through the country
+with much difficulty, but made a considerable booty in gold, and took
+forty serviceable slaves. But a ca&ccedil;ique, named Pariza,
+attacked them and slew or took most of the party. After this the
+governor sent out his son, John Arias de Avila, to be revenged and to
+explore the country. This party went westwards to Cape de Guerra, in
+little more than 6&deg; N. and thence to Punta de Borica, and to Cape
+Blanco, in 8&deg; 30' N. having, as they affirm, discovered 250
+leagues; and besides this they founded the city of Panama.</p>
+<blockquote>[27] The island of Tararequi is in lat. 5&deg;
+N.</blockquote>
+<p>In the month of May 1515, Alphonsus de Albuquerque, the Portuguese
+viceroy of India, sent Fernando Gomes de Limos from Ormus, as
+ambassador to the Xec or Shah Ismael, king of Persia; and it is said
+they travelled 300 leagues through a country as pleasant as France.
+This Xec, or Shah Ismael, went much a-hunting, and was fond of trout
+fishing, which are abundant in the rivers of his kingdom. The women
+of Persia are the most beautiful in the world; insomuch that
+Alexander the Great used to call them the <i>golden-eyed women</i> . In
+this year died the viceroy Alphonsus de Albuquerque, who was
+succeeded by Lopez Suares.</p>
+<p>In 1516, Fernando Perez de Andrada was commanded by the king of
+Portugal to pass to the great kingdom of China and likewise to
+Bengala, with a dispatch to John Coelo, who was the first Portuguese
+who drank of the waters of the Ganges. In April 1517, Andrada took in
+a loading of pepper at Cochin, as the principal merchandize for sale
+in China, for which country he sailed with eight ships, four
+Portuguese and four Malayans. On his arrival in China, finding he
+could not be allowed to land without an embassy, he dispatched Thomas
+Perez, with instructions for that purpose, from the city of Canton,
+where they came to anchor. The embassy travelled 400 leagues by land
+to the city of Pekin, where the king resided; for China is the
+largest kingdom in the world. From Sailana in the south, which is in
+20&deg; N. it reaches to the latitude almost of 50&deg; N. which must
+be 500 leagues in length, and it is said to be 300 leagues in
+breadth[28]. Fernando Perez was fourteen months in the isle of
+Veniaga, endeavouring to acquire as much knowledge as he could of the
+country; and although one Raphael Perestrello had formerly been
+there, in a junk belonging to some merchants of Malacca, yet Perez
+certainly deserves the merit of this discovery; as well because he
+acted by the command of the king his master, as in discovering so
+much by land by means of Thomas Perez, and by sea through George
+Mascarenhas, who sailed to the city of Foquiam, in 24&deg; N.</p>
+<blockquote>[28] These leagues are elsewhere explained as 17-1/2 to
+the degree, or about 4 English miles: Hence the estimate of Galvano
+is 2000 miles long by 1200 miles broad; certainly a very extensive
+dominion. China Proper may be said to extend in length from lat.
+27&deg; to 41&deg; N. and in breadth from long. 97&deg; to 121&deg;
+E. not very inferior to the above estimate; but including the
+immeasurable bounds of its dependencies, Chinese Tartary, Thibet, and
+almost the whole of central Asia, it prodigiously exceeds the
+magnitude here assigned by Galvano.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1517, in which Charles, afterwards emperor, came into
+Spain, Francis Fernandes de Cordova, Christopher Morantes, and Lopez
+Ochoa, armed three ships from Cuba, at their own expence, having also
+with them a barque belonging to the governor Diego Velasques, with
+which they came to land in Jucutan, in 20&deg; N. at a place which
+they called Punta de las Duennas, which was the first place in which
+temples and houses of stone and lime had been seen in the new world.
+The people here, who were better clothed than in any other place, had
+crosses which they worshipped, and set upon the tombs of their dead,
+whence it appeared as if they had formerly been in the faith of
+Christ; and some suppose that this had been the situation of
+the <i>seven cities</i> . In this expedition they were upon the north
+coast of Jucutan, being the first discovery of New Spain, or Mexico;
+and they returned thence to Cuba with some samples of gold, and some
+prisoners.</p>
+<p>In the year 1518[29], Lopez Suares commanded Don John de Silveira
+to go and make peace with the Maldive islands, which he did
+accordingly. From thence Silveira went to the city of Chatigam, or
+Chittigong, on one of the mouths of the Ganges, under the tropic of
+Cancer; for it is to be noted, that this river, and the Indus, which
+lies 100 leagues beyond Diu, and the river of Canton in China, all
+fall into the sea under one parallel of latitude. Although, before
+this period, Fernando Perez had been commanded to sail to Bengal, yet
+Silveira must be looked upon as the actual discoverer of that
+country; for he went as captain-general, and remained there long,
+making himself acquainted with the manners of the people, and the
+commodities of the country.</p>
+<blockquote>[29] Castagnada, I. 4. c. 36. 37. Osorius, I. 11. f. 315.
+p. 2.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year 1518[30], Diego Velasquez, governor of the island
+of Cuba, dispatched his nephew, John de Grisalva, on the first of
+May, with four ships and two hundred soldiers, to discover Jucutan.
+On the 3d of May, he fell in with the island of Cozumel, in 19&deg;
+north latitude, which he named Santa Cruz, because discovered on the
+3d of May, being the anniversary of the holy cross. Grisalva coasted
+along the land, on the west side of the bay of Honduras, and came to
+an island, which he named Ascension, because discovered on Ascension
+day. They went unto the end of that island, in 16&deg; of latitude,
+whence they came back, finding no passage[31], and proceeded to a
+river in lat. 17&deg; N. which they called the river of Grisalva.
+They were boldly opposed by the people on this coast; yet they
+brought thence some gold, silver, and feathers, and returned to Cuba.
+In the same year, Francis Garay fitted out three ships from Jamaica
+at his own expence, and went to Cape Florida, in lat. 25&deg; N.
+which seemed a most pleasant island; and thinking it better to people
+islands than the firm land, because more easily conquered and kept
+under subjection, he went on land; but the inhabitants of Florida
+killed a great many of his people, and he was forced to re-embark and
+go away. Sailing from thence he came to the river of Panuco, 500
+leagues from Cape Florida, sailing all the way along the coast, and
+endeavouring to land in various places, but the natives repulsed him
+in every place. Many of his people were killed and eaten by the
+savages in Chila, the natives hanging up their skins in the temples
+of their gods, as a memorial of their own valour. Yet Garay visited
+this place next year, as he had seen some indications of gold and
+silver, and even applied to the emperor to be appointed governor of
+the coast he had discovered. In February 1519[32], Fernando Cortez
+sailed from Cuba for the country now called New Spain, with eleven
+ships and 550 Spaniards. He landed first in the island of Cozumel,
+where he immediately destroyed all the idols, and planted crosses and
+images of the Virgin on all the altars. From thence he went to the
+Cabo de las Duennas, on the peninsula of Yucatan, and thence to the
+river of Tabasco, where he attacked a city called Potoncion. This
+place was surrounded with wood; the houses were built of stone and
+lime, and roofed with tiles, and the people resisted the assailants
+manfully; but St James appeared on horseback to the assistance of the
+Spaniards, and they took the place. This, as the first town subdued
+by them on the continent, they named Vittoria. From thence they went
+to a place named St Juan de Vilhua, said to be 60 or 70 leagues from
+Mexico, where one Tendilli was governor for King Mute&ccedil;uma.
+Though the Spaniards and he could not understand each other, yet
+Tendilli gave them good entertainment. Cortes had twenty women along
+with his expedition, one of whom, named Marine, was born in the
+country of the Indians, and was the first native of New Spain who
+received baptism. She and Anguilar served as interpreters between
+Cortes and the natives. Tendilli sent immediate intelligence to
+Mute&ccedil;uma, that there had arrived in his country a bearded
+people, for so they called the Castilians. On the reception of this
+news, Mute&ccedil;uma was greatly troubled, for his gods, or devils
+rather, had revealed that a people of the description of these
+Spaniards was to overthrow his law and dominion, and to become lords
+of the country; wherefore Mute&ccedil;uma sent gifts to the value of
+twenty thousand ducats to Cortes, but refused any interview.</p>
+<blockquote>[30] Pet. Mart. IV. iv. Gomar. II. xiv. and
+xvii.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[31] The text is obscure, and seems to indicate that they
+were unable to pass between the island of Ascension and the main of
+Yucatan. The latitudes are extremely erroneous: Cozumel is in lat.
+20&deg; N. The island of Ambergris, perhaps the Ascension of the
+text, is in 18&deg; 30'. From errors in latitude and alterations of
+nomenclature, it is often impossible to follow distinctly the routes
+of these early voyagers.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[32] Pet. Mart. IV. vi. Gomar. II. xviii,
+&amp;c.</blockquote>
+<p>As the ships could not ride in safety at St Juan de Vilhua, Cortes
+sent Francis de Montejo, and the pilot Antonio Alaminos, in two
+brigantines, to look out for a safe anchorage. They went to Panuco,
+in lat. 23&deg; N. whence they came back to Culvacan as a safer
+harbour. But Cortes went by land westwards to a city named
+Zempoallan, where he was well received. From thence he went to
+Chiavitztlan, with the lord of which town, and of all the surrounding
+country, he entered into a league against Mute&ccedil;uma. On the
+arrival of his ships at the appointed haven, he went there and built
+a town, which he named <i>Villa rica de la Vera Cruz</i> . From thence
+he sent a vessel to Spain with presents, and a letter to the Emperor
+Charles V. giving an account of his proceedings, and of his
+determination to visit Mute&ccedil;uma, and soliciting a commission
+as governor of the country[33].</p>
+<blockquote>[33] Gomar. II. xxi, xxii, xxiii, xxiv.</blockquote>
+<p>Before proceeding on his march to Mexico, Cortes destroyed all his
+ships, lest his men might mutiny, as they seemed disposed; and
+leaving 150 Spaniards in Vera Cruz, with as many Indians to serve
+them, he began his march. Going first to Zempoallan, he learnt that
+Francis Garay was on the coast with four ships, and he contrived to
+inveigle nine of his men, from whom he understood that Garay, who had
+been in Florida, was now at the river Panuco, where he had got some
+gold, and meant to remain and build a town, now called Almeria.
+Cortes destroyed the idols of Zempoallan, and overthrew the tombs of
+their kings, whom the people worshipped as gods, and exhorted them to
+worship the true God. He set out from Zempoallan for Mexico on the
+16th of August 1519, and after three days march came to the city of
+Zalapan, and thence to another named Sicuchimatl; at both of which
+places he was well received, and was offered to be conducted to
+Mexico, such being the orders of Mute&ccedil;uma. Going from thence
+he ascended a hill three leagues high, on which vines were seen
+growing; and in another place he saw above a thousand load of wood
+ready cut. Beyond this he passed a plain country, which he named
+Nombre de Dios. At the foot of this mountain, he rested his troops at
+a place called Teuhixuacan; whence, through a desert country, he came
+to another mountain, which was covered with snow and excessively
+cold, and where the troops rested in a town named Zacotlan. Marching
+thus from town to town, he arrived at a territory called Tlaxcallan,
+which was at war with Mute&ccedil;uma; and as the people were
+valiant, they fought against Cortes; but at length they agreed, and
+formed a league with him against the Mexicans.</p>
+<p>Thus, from country to country, he came at length within sight of
+Mexico; and Mute&ccedil;uma, being afraid, received him kindly,
+giving him and all his people lodgings in the capital, and all things
+necessary. After a time, fearing to be slain, Cortes made
+Mute&ccedil;uma prisoner, and brought him to his own quarters,
+keeping him under a secure guard. Cortes inquired at Mute&ccedil;uma
+the extent of his dominions, where the mines of gold and silver were,
+and the number of kings who dwelt in the land. And joining eight
+intelligent Spaniards with an equal number of Indians, he sent them,
+in four companies, to travel into four separate countries, Zucolla,
+Malinaltepec, Tenich, and Tututepec. The messengers to Zucolla had 80
+leagues to travel, and those who went to Malinaltepec 70; both of
+which provinces were under subjection to Mute&ccedil;uma: they found
+both of these countries fertile and well peopled, and they brought
+back samples of gold, which the natives found in the rivers. The
+country of Tenich was at war with Mute&ccedil;uma, and would not
+admit the Mexicans into their country; but they sent ambassadors to
+Cortes with presents, offering him their amity, at which
+Mute&ccedil;uma was much displeased. Those who went to Tututepec,
+near the South Sea, brought back samples of gold, and praised the
+pleasantness of the country; reporting that there were many good
+harbours on the coast, and they presented to Cortes a beautiful cloth
+of cotton, on which the coast, with all its harbours and creeks, was
+distinctly represented. But at this time, by the coming of Pamphilus
+de Narvaez, the whole kingdom of Mexico was thrown into
+confusion.</p>
+<p>On the 10th August 1519, Fernando de Magellanes went from Seville
+with five ships, on a voyage for the islands of, Malacca[34]. Going
+along the coast of Brazil, he came to the Rio Plata, which had been
+previously discovered by the Spaniards. Thence prosecuting his voyage
+of discovery, he came to Port St Julians, in lat. 49&deg; S. where he
+lost one of his ships. With the remaining four he came to the straits
+named after himself, in 52&deg; 80' S. and wintered in that place,
+where he and his people endured much distress from snow and ice, and
+extreme cold. They found the people of the country of extraordinary
+stature and great strength, insomuch that they took men by the legs,
+and rent them asunder as easily as one of us could tear a hen in two.
+These people, named <i>Pataganes</i> , but called  <i>Morcas</i>  by the
+Brazilians, live on fruits and by the produce of the chase. In the
+beginning of September of the following year, 1520, the weather
+became somewhat temperate, and leaving Port St Julian, Magellanes
+went to the straits which now bear his name; whence one of the ships
+returned to Spain, of which Stephen de Porto, a Portuguese, was
+captain and pilot. The other three passed through into a vast sea
+called the  <i>Pacific</i> ; where they found no inhabited land till
+they arrived in lat. 13&deg; N. when they came to certain islands
+named <i>Los Jardines</i> . They sailed thence to the archipelago of St
+Lazarus, where, in an island named  <i>Matan</i> , Magellanes was slain
+and his ship burnt. The remaining two ships went to Borneo, and
+thence to the Moluccas, leaving many others discovered, which I do
+not mention, because I have not seen any exact account of this
+voyage[35].</p>
+<blockquote>[34] This certainly ought to be called the Molucca
+islands; but Galvano uniformly applies the same name, Malacca, both
+to the spice islands and the city of Malacca on the
+Continent.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[35] Gomar. IV. iii. Pet. Mart. V. vii.</blockquote>
+<p>About this time Pope Leo X. sent Paulus Centurio on an embassy to
+the great duke of Muscovy, requiring him to send an army along the
+coast of Tartary into India; and the duke was almost persuaded to
+have made the attempt, if certain inconveniencies had not
+hindered[36].</p>
+<blockquote>[36] Ramusio, I. 874.</blockquote>
+<p>In February 1520, Diego Lopez de Sequeira, governor of India,
+sailed by the strait of Mecca[37], carrying with him the ambassador
+of Prester John and Roderigo de Lima, who was sent ambassador to that
+prince. They came to the island of Ma&ccedil;ua or Massoua, on the
+African shore of the Red Sea, in lat. 17&deg; N. where the
+ambassadors and their Portuguese attendants were set on shore. Peter
+de Covillan had been sent there formerly by John II. of Portugal; but
+the best account of that country was furnished by Francis
+Alvarez.</p>
+<blockquote>[37] This seems to mean the Straits of Babelmandel.
+Having lost sight of Prester John in Tartary, the Portuguese were
+delighted with the discovery of a Christian king in Africa, the Negus
+of Abyssinia; and transferred to him that popular
+fable.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In this year 1520, the licentiate Lucas Vasques de Aillon, and
+others of St Domingo, sent two ships to procure slaves at the Lucayos
+or Bahama islands; but finding none there, they passed on along the
+continent, beyond Florida, to certain countries called Chicora and
+Gualdape, and to the river Jordan and Cape St Helena, in lat. 32&deg;
+N.[38]. The Spaniards landed here, and were hospitably received by
+the natives, who furnished them with every thing they needed: but,
+having inveigled many of the unsuspecting natives on board their
+ships, they carried them away for slaves. In their way back to St
+Domingo, one of these vessels was lost, and the other was in great
+danger. On learning the news of this discovery, the licentiate Aillon
+made application to the emperor for the government of that country,
+where he expected to find much wealth, and received the
+appointment.</p>
+<blockquote>[38] These countries, with the river and cape mentioned
+in the text, are now unknown, these arbitrary names having merged in
+the nomenclature of more recent settlers. If the latitude be nearly
+accurate, it may have been on the confines of Georgia and South
+Carolina.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>About this time, learning the success of Cortes in Mexico, and
+that he had applied to the emperor for the commission of governor,
+Diego Velasques, governor of Cuba, who considered that it ought to
+belong to him, fitted out an armament of eighteen ships, under the
+command of Pamphilus de Narvaez, already mentioned, with a thousand
+men and eighty horses, whom he sent to Mexico in order to supersede
+Cortes. Landing in the neighbourhood of Vera Cruz, he sent an order
+to the garrison to receive him as governor; but they made his
+messenger prisoner, and sent him to Cortes, then at Mexico. On this
+Cortes wrote to Narvaez, desiring him not to raise any disturbance in
+the country, and offering to submit to his authority if he held a
+commission from the emperor. But Narvaez corrupted the people of the
+country; upon which Cortes went from Mexico, and took Narvaez
+prisoner in the town of Zempoallan, putting out one of his eyes.
+After this the soldiers of Narvaez submitted to Cortes; who detached
+two hundred soldiers to the river of Garay or Panuco, and a similar
+detachment under John Vasquez de Leon to Cosualco. He sent likewise a
+messenger to Mexico with an account of his victory; but the natives,
+having risen in rebellion, killed his messenger.</p>
+<p>Cortes now set forwards on his return to Mexico, with one thousand
+foot soldiers and two thousand horsemen, and found Peter de Alvarado
+and the garrison he had left in Mexico in charge of Mute&ccedil;uma,
+in safety. But the Mexicans continued their insurrection, and on one
+occasion Mute&ccedil;uma was killed by a stone thrown by one of his
+own subjects. They then elected another king, and the Spaniards were
+forced to evacuate the city with great difficulty and danger. Driven
+out of Mexico, and having only 504 footmen and 40 horse remaining,
+Cortes retired with much difficulty to Tlaxcallan, where he was well
+received. He here mustered a force of 900 Spanish infantry and 80
+cavalry, and gathered 200,000 Indians among the friends and allies
+whom he had secured, enemies of the Mexicans, and marched back to
+Mexico, which he took in August 1521[39].</p>
+<blockquote>[39] Gomar. II. l.</blockquote>
+<p>In October 1521, Cortes sent 200 foot and 35 horse, with a number
+of his Indian allies, under the command of Gonsalo de Sandoval,
+against Tochtepec and Coazacoalco, which had rebelled, and which
+Sandoval reduced to obedience. To retain this country under
+subjection, he built a town called <i>Medelin</i> , 120 leagues from
+Mexico, and another named <i>Santo Spirito</i> , on a river four
+leagues from the sea[40]. In this year 1521, died Emanuel, king of
+Portugal, and was succeeded by his son, John III.</p>
+<blockquote>[40] Id. II. lx.</blockquote>
+<p>In this same year, one of Magellan's ships sailed from Malacca
+with a loading of cloves. They victualled at the island of Burro, and
+went from thence to Timor, in lat. 11&deg; S.[41]. Beyond this
+island, about 100 leagues, they came to other islands, all inhabited,
+one of which was called <i>Eude</i> . Passing on the outside of
+Sumatra, they found no land till they arrived at the Cape of Good
+Hope, where they took in wood and water; and sailing thence by the
+islands of Cabo Verde, they arrived at Seville, where they were
+received with great honour, both on account of their valuable cargo
+of cloves, and because they had circumnavigated the whole
+world[42].</p>
+<blockquote>[41] Malacca of the text ought certainly to be Molucca:
+Bouro is in lat. 3&deg; 20' S. Timor between 8&deg; 30' and 10&deg;
+20' S.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[42] Gomar. IV. viii.</blockquote>
+<p>In January 1522, Gil Gonzales fitted out four ships from
+Tararequi, on the South Sea, intending to discover the coast of
+Nicaragua, and especially to search for a strait or passage, which
+was said to communicate between the South and North Seas. Sailing
+along the coast, he came to a harbour which he named St Vincent,
+where he landed with 100 Spaniards, some of whom had horses, and
+penetrated 200 leagues inland, whence he brought back to the value of
+200 pesoes in gold. On his return to the harbour of St Vincent, he
+found his pilot, Andrew Nigno, who had been to Tecoantepec, in lat.
+16&deg; N. and had sailed 300 leagues. From thence Gonzales returned
+to Panama, and so overland to Hispaniola[43].</p>
+<blockquote>[43] Id. VI. iv. li.</blockquote>
+<p>In April 1522, the Trinity, commanded by Gonzala Gomez de
+Espinosa, another of the ships of Magellan, sailed from Tidore for
+New Spain. And, as the wind was scanty, they steered towards the N.
+E. in lat. 16&deg; N. where they found two islands, which they named
+the Islands of St John. In lat. 20&deg; N. they came to another
+island, which they called <i>la Griega</i> , where some of the simple
+natives came on board, whom they kept to shew in New Spain.
+Continuing their course to the N. E. for four months, they came into
+lat. 42&deg; N. where they saw numbers of seals, and tunnies; and the
+climate appeared to them so cold and inhospitable, that partly on
+that account, and partly owing to contrary winds, they returned
+towards Tidore, having been the first Spaniards who had been in so
+high a northern latitude in these seas. On their return to Tidore,
+they found one Antonio de Britto employed in building a fortress, who
+took their goods from them, and sent forty-eight of them prisoners to
+Malacca[44].</p>
+<blockquote>[44] Gomar. IV. viii, and xii. Castagn. VI.
+xli.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year 1522, Cortes was desirous to possess some
+harbours on the South Sea, on purpose to open a trade with Malacca,
+Banda, Java, and the other spice islands. For this purpose he sent
+four Spaniards with Indian guides to Tecoantepec, Quahatemallan, and
+other harbours, where they were well received, and whence they
+brought back some of the natives to Mexico. These people were much
+caressed by Cortes; who afterwards sent ten pilots to examine the
+coast, but they could find no good harbour, after a survey of seventy
+leagues. A cacique, named; Cuchadaquir, used them hospitably, and
+sent two hundred of his people to Cortes with presents of gold and
+silver; and the people of Tecoantepec did the same. Not long
+afterwards, this friendly cacique sent to Cortes, requesting aid
+against his neighbours, who warred against him. Cortes accordingly,
+in the year 1523, sent Peter de Alvarado to his assistance, with 200
+foot and 40 horse, who built a town called St Jago, in which he left
+a garrison. The caciques of Tecoantepec and Quahutemallan inquired at
+Alvarado concerning certain <i>sea monsters</i>  that had been on their
+coast the year before; meaning the ships of Gil Gonzales de Avila, at
+which they had been much amazed; and they wondered still more on
+being informed that Cortes had many such, and much larger than those
+they had seen. They displayed a painting of a mighty carak, having
+six masts, with sails and shrouds, and having armed horsemen on
+board[45]. In May 1523, Antonio de Britto, the Portuguese governor of
+the Molucca isles, sent Simon de Bru to discover the passage from
+thence by the island of Borneo to Malacca. They came in sight of the
+islands of Manada and Panguensara, and thence through the strait of
+Treminao and Taquy to the islands of St Michael, in 7&deg; S. and
+then to the island of Borneo, where they came in sight of  <i>Pedra
+Branca</i> , or the <i>white stone</i> ; whence, passing through the
+strait of Cincapura, they came to the city of Malacca[46].</p>
+<blockquote>[45] Gomar. VI. xii.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[46] Castagn. VI. xlii.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year 1523, Cortes went with 300 Spanish foot, 150
+horse, and 20,000 Mexicans, to make a complete discovery and conquest
+of Panuco, and to punish the inhabitants for having killed and
+devoured the soldiers of Francis Garay. The natives resisted him, but
+were overthrown; and to keep the country under subjection, he built a
+town on the river, near Chila, which he named Santo Stephano del
+Puerta, in which he left a garrison of 100 foot and 30 horse, under
+the command of Peter de Valleia. In this expedition he lost many of
+his people, both Spaniards and Mexicans, and several horses[47].</p>
+<blockquote>[47] Gomar. II. lxi. The text, in Hakluyt's translation,
+has the absurd number of 76,000 Castilians lost in this war; 76 is a
+more probable number, and is considerable out of his small force:
+yet, the text may mean 76,000 <i>Castellans</i>  of gold, as the sum
+expended on the expedition; and which Hakluyt, or his printer,
+changed to that number of <i>Castilians</i> .--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In this same year 1523, Francis de Garay, having a commission from
+the emperor as governor of all the coast he had discovered from
+Florida to Panuco, fitted out nine ships and two brigantines, with
+850 soldiers and 150 horses, on purpose to take possession of his
+government. Some men joined him from Jamaica, where he had furnished
+his squadron with warlike ammunition; and sailing thence to the
+harbour of Xagua, in the island of Cuba, he there learnt that Cortes
+had taken possession of the coast of Panuco. That he ought not meet
+with the fate of Narvaez, he sent the doctor Zuazo to Mexico, to
+endeavour to enter into treaty with Cortes. Garay arrived in the Rio
+de las Palmas on St Jameses day, and sent Gon&ccedil;alo de Ocampo up
+the river to explore the country, who reported, on his return, that
+the country was bad and desert. Yet Garay landed with 400 foot
+soldiers and some horse, and commanded John de Grijalva, to explore
+the coast, while he marched by land to Panuco, in which march he
+crossed a river to which he gave the name of Rio Montalto. In this
+march he came to a large town, in which he found much poultry, to the
+great refreshment of his troops. Here, likewise, he took some of the
+inhabitants of Chila, whom he employed as messengers to different
+places. After a long and difficult march, he arrived at Panuco, but
+found no provisions; the country having been exhausted in the war
+with Cortes, and by being plundered by the soldiers. From this place
+he sent Gon&ccedil;alo de Ocampo to St Stephano, or Istevan del
+Puerto, to inquire if the garrison would submit to his authority.
+They sent him a favourable answer; but, by means of an ambush, they
+made forty of his cavalry prisoners, alleging that they had come
+unwarrantably to usurp the government which belonged to another.
+Besides this misfortune, Garay lost four of his ships, by which he
+was greatly disheartened. While Cortes was preparing an expedition to
+Panuco, to resist Garay, Francis de las Casas and Roderigo de la Paz,
+brought letters-patent to Mexico, by which the emperor gave him the
+government of New Spain, including Panuco. On this he desisted from
+going personally on the expedition, but sent Pedro de Alvarado with a
+respectable force, both of infantry and cavalry, to defend his
+government against aggression, and dispatched Diego de Ocampo to
+communicate the letters-patent to Garay; who thought it better for
+him to yield himself to Cortes, and went accordingly to
+Mexico[48].</p>
+<blockquote>[48] Gomar. Conqu. de Mex. f. 226.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year, 1523, Gil Gon&ccedil;ales de Avila, discovered
+and peopled a town called <i>San Gil da Buena-vista</i> , in lat.
+14&deg; N. almost in the bottom of the bay of Ascension or
+Honduras[49]. Likewise, on the 6th December of this year, Peter de
+Alvarado was sent by Cortes from Mexico with 300 foot, 170 horse,
+four field-pieces, and some Mexican nobles, to discover and conquer
+Quahutemallan, Utlatlan, Chiassa, Xochnuxco, and other towns towards
+the South Sea. After a most fatiguing march of 400 leagues, passing
+by Tecoantepec to Xochnuxco, he discovered and conquered the whole of
+that country, where he built a city called St Jago de Quahutemallan,
+now Guatimala, of which and of the country he subdued, he is said to
+have got the government. In this expedition they passed some rivers,
+the water of which was so hot that they could scarce endure to wade
+them. They found likewise certain hills which produced alum, and one
+out of which a liquor like oil distilled; likewise sulphur in great
+abundance, from which the Spaniards made excellent gunpowder[50]. On
+the 8th December of the same year, Cortes sent Diego de Godoy, with a
+hundred foot, thirty horse, two field-pieces, and many friendly
+Indians, to Spiritu Santo; where, joining the captain of that town,
+they went to Chamolla, the capital of a province of the same name,
+which they reduced under subjection[51].</p>
+<blockquote>[49] Id. 242. This bay reaches no farther to the S. than
+148 10' N.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[50] Id. f. 229. 230.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[51] Id. f. 233.</blockquote>
+<p>In February 1524, Cortes sent Roderigo Rangel, with 150 Spaniards,
+and many Tlaxcallans and Mexicans, against the Zapotecas and
+Nixtecas, and other provinces not yet well discovered. They were at
+first resisted, but soon defeated the natives, and reduced the
+country to subjection. In the same year, Roderigo de Bastidas was
+sent to discover and reduce the country of Santa Martha; but refusing
+to allow the soldiers to plunder a certain town, he was assassinated
+in his bed by Peter Villaforte, formerly his fast friend, who joined
+in the conspiracy against him. Pedro de Lugo and his son Don Alfonso
+were afterward governors of that place, where they conducted
+themselves as covetous tyrants, and became much disliked[52]. In the
+same year, the licentiate Lucas Vasques de Aillon obtained the
+government of Chicora from the emperor, on which he fitted out some
+vessels from St Domingo, and proceeded to explore and colonize that
+country; but he was lost with all his people. I know not how it
+should have happened, except by the righteous judgment of God, that
+so little should now remain of all the gold and precious stones which
+were got in the Antilles by the Spaniards; but much the greater part
+has been dissipated to little purpose, and nothing great or valuable
+has ensued from the discovery[53].</p>
+<blockquote>[52] Gomar. Conqu. f. 234. and Hist. Gen. III.
+xxi.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[53] Id: Hist. Gen. II. vii.</blockquote>
+<p>In this same year, 1524, Cortes sent a fleet under the command of
+Christopher de Olid, to Cuba, to transport provisions and ammunition
+to Mexico, which had been purchased there by Alonso de Contreras; and
+Olid had orders to discover and colonize the country about Cape
+Higueras, and the Coast of Honduras, and likewise to send Diego
+Hartado de Mendo&ccedil;a by sea, in search of a strait towards
+Darien, which was reported to pass that way into the South Sea, which
+object of research had been commanded by the emperor to be attended
+to. He sent also two ships from Panuco, to explore the coast from
+thence to Florida; and he commanded other vessels to examine the
+coast of the South Sea, between Zacatullan and Panama. On the arrival
+of Olid at Cuba, he entered into a league with Diego Velasquez
+against Cortes: and, instead of prosecuting the orders he had
+received, he set sail for Puerto de Cavallos, in lat. 10&deg; N. 54,
+near which he built a town, which he named <i>Triumpho de la Cruz</i> .
+He made Gil Gonzales de Avila prisoner, and killed his nephew, and
+all the Spaniards who were with him, except one child; thus acting in
+direct opposition to Cortes, who had expended, in fitting out the
+present expedition, the sum of 80,000 castellans of gold, entirely to
+gratify Olid[55]. On learning this treachery, Cortes went by land
+from Mexico in the month of October 1524, to take revenge on Olid,
+carrying with him a force of 300 Spaniards, part foot, and part
+horse, and accompanied by Quahutimoc, king of Mexico, and many of the
+chief Mexican nobles. On coming to the town of Spiritu Santo, he
+procured ten guides from the caciques of Tavasco and Xicalanco, who
+likewise gave him a map painted on cotton cloth, delineating the
+situation of the whole country, from Xicalanco to Naco and Nito, and
+even as far as Nicaragua, with their mountains, hills, fields,
+meadows, rivers, cities, and towns; and Cortes ordered three ships
+from the harbour of Medellin to follow him along the coast[56]. When
+he had reached the city of Izancanac, Cortes learned that King
+Quahutimoc and his Mexicans had conspired to betray or destroy him
+and his Spaniards; wherefore he hanged the king and two of his
+principal nobles. Cortes then proceeded to Mazatlan; and from thence
+to Piaca, which stands in the middle of a lake, and is the chief city
+of a province of the same name, and hereabout he began to learn
+tidings of the Spaniards under Olid, of whom he was in search. From
+thence he proceeded to Zuzullin, and came at length to Nito; from
+whence he went to a bay on the coast, called St Andre, where, finding
+a good haven, he built a town called Natividad de nuestra Sennora. He
+went thence to Truxillo, on the coast of Honduras, where he was well
+received by the Spanish settlers. While here, a ship brought
+intelligence of an insurrection having broke out in Mexico during his
+absence; on which, he ordered Gonsalo de Sandoval to march with his
+company by land, from Naco to Mexico, by the ordinary and safest road
+of Quahutemallan, or Guatimala, towards the South Sea; and, leaving
+his cousin F&eacute;rdinando de Saavedra to command in Truxillo, he
+went himself by sea along the coast of Yucutan to Chalchicocca, now
+called St Juan de Ullhua, and thence to Medellin and Mexico, where he
+was well received. Cortes was absent eighteen months on this
+expedition, during which he travelled 500 leagues[57], and suffered
+many hardships.</p>
+<blockquote>[54] In this latitude, on the shore of Costa Rica, there
+is a town now called Porto Cartago; but whether that indicated in the
+text it is difficult to say, as Galvano is not always perfectly
+accurate in his latitudes.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[55] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. lxv. and Conqu. f.
+243.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[56] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. lxvi, and Conqu. f.
+256-261.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[57] The Spanish leagues are 17-1/2 to the degree of
+latitude, hence this march exceeded 2000 English miles.--E. Gomar.
+Hist. Gen. II. lxvi. Id. Conqu. 246-273.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1525; Francis Pizarro, and Diego de Almagro, went from
+Panama to discover Peru, on the south of the fine, which they
+called <i>Nueva Castillia</i> . Pedro Asias, governor of Panama,
+refused to take any concern in this expedition, on account of certain
+evil news which had been brought to him by Francis Vezerra. Pizarro
+went first in a ship with 124 soldiers, and was followed by Almagro
+with seventy men in another ship. Almagro came to Rio de San Juan, in
+lat. 3&deg; N., where he got 3000 pezoes of gold; and not finding
+Pizarro, of whom he was in search, he lost heart, and returned to
+Panama. Pizarro went first to the island of Gorgona, and thence to
+the isle of Gallo, from whence he proceeded to the river called
+ <i>Rio del Peru</i> , in lat. 2&deg; N. from which the rich and famous
+country of Peru derives its name. He sailed thence to the river of St
+Francis, and Cape <i>Passaos</i> , where he passed the equinoctial
+line, and came to <i>Puerto Vejo</i> , in lat. 1&deg; S. and sailed on
+to the rivers of Chinapanpa, Tumbez, and Payta, in four or five
+degrees of southern latitude, where he received intelligence
+concerning King Atabalipa, and of the vast riches of his palace. On
+receiving this intelligence, Pizarro returned to Panama, from whence
+he went to Spain, where he solicited and obtained the government of
+the rich country he had discovered; having spent above three years in
+the discovery, with much labour and great danger[58].</p>
+<blockquote>[58] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. i. and ii.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year, 1525, seven ships were fitted out from Spain,
+under the command of Garcia de Loaisa, for a voyage to the Molucca
+Islands. Sailing from Corunna, and passing by the Canaries, they came
+to the coast of Brasil, where they discovered an island in lat.
+2&deg; S. which they named St Matthew; and, finding orange trees,
+hogs, and European poultry, they concluded it to be inhabited; but,
+by inscriptions oil the bark of trees, they learnt that the
+Portuguese had bean there seventeen years before. A small pinnace of
+this squadron, commanded by Juan de Resaga, passed the straits of
+Magellan, and ran along the whole coast of Peru and New Spain,
+carrying the intelligence to Cortes of the expedition of Loaisa to
+the Moluccas: But the admiral ship only of this squadron, commanded
+by Martin Mingues de Carchova, arrived at its destination, where the
+Moors of the Moluccas received the Spaniards hospitably; Loaisa and
+all the other captains died by the way.</p>
+<p>In the same year Stephen Gomez sailed from Corunna, to endeavour
+to discover a strait in the northern parts, by which ships might sail
+from Europe to the Moluccas. This person had been refused employment
+in the fleet commanded by Loaisa; but the Count Ferdinando de
+Andrada, with the Doctor Beltram, and a merchant named Christopher de
+Sarro; fitted out a galleon for him at their joint expence. He went
+first to the island of Cuba, whence he sailed to Cape Florida,
+sailing only by day, as he was ignorant of the coast. He passed Cape
+Angra, and the river Enseada, and so went over to the other side; and
+it is reported that he came to Cape Razo[59] in lat. 46&deg; N.
+whence he returned to Corunna with a cargo of  <i>slaves</i> . But news
+spread through Spain that he was come home laden with  <i>cloves</i> ,
+which occasioned much joy at the court of Spain, till the mistake was
+discovered. Gomez was ten months engaged in this voyage. In this same
+year, Don George de Menesses, governor of Molucca, and Don Henriques,
+sent a vessel on discovery towards the north, commanded by Diego de
+Rocha, having Gomez de Sequiera as pilot. In lat. 9&deg; or 10&deg;
+N. they discovered several islands in a group, which were called the
+islands of Sequiera; whence they returned to the island of
+Bato-China. In 1526, Sebastian Gabota, chief pilot to the emperor, a
+native of Bristol in England, whose father was a Venetian, sailed
+from Seville with four ships, intending to have gone to the Moluccas
+by a western course. Gabota came to Pernambuco in Brasil, where he
+waited three months for a favourable wind to get round Cape St
+Augustine. In the Bay of <i>Patos</i> , or of ducks, the admirals ship
+was lost; and despairing of being able to accomplish the voyage to
+the Moluccas, he built a pinnace for the purpose of exploring the Rio
+Plata. Gabota accordingly ran sixty leagues, or 120 miles up that
+river; when coming to a bar, he left the large ships there, and went
+with the boats of the squadron 120 leagues, or 480 miles farther up
+the river Parana, which the inhabitants considered to be the
+principal river. He here constructed a fort, and remained in that
+place above a year; From thence he rowed still farther up the Parana,
+till he came to the mouth of another river called <i>Paragioa</i> , or
+Paraguay; and, perceiving that the country produced gold and silver,
+he kept on his course, sending one of the boats in advance, which was
+taken by the natives. On this, Gabota thought it more prudent to
+return to his fort, after having penetrated 200 leagues or 800 miles
+up this river. He took on board the people he had left at the fort,
+and returning to the ships at the bar, sailed back to Seville in
+1530. He reported that the Rio Plata was navigable for a great way,
+and that it rises from a lake named  <i>Bombo</i> [60] in the kingdom
+of Peru, whence, flowing through the valleys of Xauxa, it receives
+the rivers Parso, Bulcasban, Cay, Parima, Hiacax, and several others,
+by which its waters are greatly increased. It is also said that the
+river of San Francesco comes from the same lake, which likewise is
+very great; because rivers that flow from lakes are larger than those
+which proceed from springs.</p>
+<blockquote>[59] The ambiguity of the language is here utterly
+inexplicable.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[60] Meaning probably the lake of Titicaca in Peru. It is
+hardly necessary to say that this slight survey of the Plata must be
+erroneous, especially in its reports. The Rio San Francisco, alludes
+to one of the sources of the Great Maranon, or river of the
+Amazons.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1527, Panfilo de Narvaez sailed from St Lucar de
+Barameda with five ships, having 600 soldiers, 100 horses, and great
+abundance of provisions, ammunition, and all other necessaries, to
+take possession of Florida, as far as the river Palmas, of which he
+was appointed governor. Not being able to land at the place he
+wished, he went on shore with 300 of his soldiers, some horses, and a
+supply of provisions, nearer Cape Florida, ordering the ships to
+proceed to the river Palmas, in which voyage they were nearly all
+lost Those who escaped shipwreck, suffered extreme hardships from
+hunger and thirst on a dry barren island, called Xamo by the natives,
+and which the Spaniards named <i>Malhada</i> . In this island they were
+attacked by the natives, and many, both of the Spaniards and natives,
+were slain.</p>
+<p>Narvaez, and his people, saw some gold among the Indians of
+Florida, who said they had it from <i>Apalachen</i> . He therefore went
+to that town in search of gold, where they found abundance of bay
+trees, and others of many different kinds, and plenty of beasts and
+birds, but neither gold nor silver. From Apalachen, he went to a town
+called Aute, and from: thence to Xamo, a poor and barren country. In
+this place, the natives requested the Spaniards to cure their sick,
+of whom they had great numbers; and the Spaniards being in extreme
+poverty and distress, prayed for the sick, and used such endeavours
+as were in their power, towards their relief: And it pleased God that
+many, both of the sick, and those who were ill from wounds,
+recovered; nay, even one that was supposed to be dead, was, by them,
+restored to life. Owing to this, the Spaniards were greatly esteemed,
+and even reputed as gods, so that the people offered them no injury,
+and even gave them such things as they had. By these means, they
+passed through many countries, and many strange nations, differing
+from each other in language, customs, and dress, and came at length
+among a people that lived continually among their flocks and herds,
+like the Arabs. Many of the tribes through which they travelled were
+so poor as to feed on snakes, lizards, spiders, ants, and all kinds
+of vermin, yet were well contented with their hard fore, and were
+much given to singing and dancing. This people are reported to
+purchase all their wives from their enemies, and to kill all their
+own daughters, lest by marrying into hostile tribes their enemies
+should increase in numbers. In some places, the women continued to
+suckle their children till they were ten or twelve years old; and
+there were certain men, being hermaphrodites, who married each other.
+In this manner, the Spaniards penetrated above 800 leagues, or 3200
+miles through the country, till at length, not above seven or eight
+of the whole armament reached the city of St Michael of Calvacan, in
+lat. 23&deg;. N. or higher, on the coast of the South Sea[61].</p>
+<blockquote>[61] Ramusio, III. 310. Ramusio gives a long and minute
+account of this unfortunate expedition, entitled, Relation made by
+Alvaro Nunez, of what befel the armament sent to the <i>Indies</i> 
+(America) under Pamphilo Narvaez in the year 1527, to the end of
+1536; when he returned to Seville with <i>three</i>  only of his
+companions.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>Learning, as has been formerly mentioned, that Garcia de Louisa
+had passed through the Straits of Magellan, on a voyage to
+the <i>Islands of Cloves</i> , Cortes fitted out three ships from
+Civitlanejo, now St Christophers, in lat. 20&deg;. N. on the western
+coast of New Spain, intending to send there in search of Loaisa, and
+that they might discover the way to the Moluccas, and open up the
+spice trade with New Spain. Leaving Civatlanejo, on All Saints day,
+1527, under the command of Alvaro de Saavedra Ceron, the cousin of
+Cortes, they fell in with the islands formerly discovered by
+Magellan, which he had named <i>the Pleasures</i> ; whence they sailed
+to the islands which had been discovered by Gomez de Sequeira, and
+called by his name, but not knowing of this previous discovery, he
+named them <i>Islas de los Reyes</i> , or the Isles of the Kings,
+because discovered on Twelfth day. During this part of the voyage,
+two ships of the squadron separated from Saavedra, and were never
+more heard of. Sailing on from island to island, he arrived at the
+Island of Candiga, where he ransomed two Spaniards for seventy
+ducats, who had belonged to the crew of Loaisa, who was shipwrecked
+in that neighbourhood. Saavedra reached the Moluccas in March 1528,
+and anchored at the Island of Gilolo, where he found the sea calm,
+the winds moderate, and no tempests; and he estimated the distance
+from thence to New Spain at 2050 leagues, or 8200 miles. At this
+period, Fernando de la Torre was governor of the Molucca islands, and
+lived in the city of Tidore, having been chosen instead of Martin
+Yniguez de Carqui&ccedil;ano, who was recently dead. Torre waged a
+fierce war with Don George de Meneses, captain of the Portuguese; and
+in a fight of the fourth of May, Saavedra took a Portuguese galliot,
+and slew Fernando de Baldaya the captain. In June, Saavedra set sail
+on his return towards New Spain, taking with him Simon de Brito,
+Patalin, and other Portuguese prisoners; but, after several months
+sail, he was forced back to Tidore by contrary winds, where Patalin
+was beheaded and quartered, and the rest of the Portuguese prisoners
+hanged. In this year, 1528, Cortes sent 200 infantry, and sixty
+cavalry, with a large force of Mexicans, to explore and subdue the
+country of the Chihimecas, which was reported to be rich in gold. He
+then took shipping for Spain, where he landed with great pomp,
+bringing with him 250,000 marks in gold and silver. On his arrival at
+Toledo, where the emperor then resided; he was very graciously
+received. The emperor created him marquis <i>della Valle</i> , and
+married him to the lady Jane de Zuniga, daughter to the Conde de
+Aguilar; after which he returned to resume the government of New
+Spain.</p>
+<p>Saavedra, of whom we have lately made mention, returned from the
+Moluccas towards New Spain, in May 1529: and, during, the voyage,
+came in sight of land, in lat. 2&deg;S. He ran along the coast to the
+S.S.E. from that time to the end of August, upwards of 500 leagues,
+finding a clean coast, free from shoals and rocks, with good
+anchoring ground, inhabited by a black people, with curled hair. The
+people of the Moluccas named the inhabitants of this
+coast <i>Papuas</i>  because they are black with frizzled hair and both
+Portuguese and Spaniards have adopted the same name. Having reached
+to four or five degrees south of the line, he returned northwards;
+and near the equinoctial he discovered an island, which he
+called <i>de los Pintados</i> , or of the painted people, as the
+inhabitants were of a white complexion, but marked with a hot
+iron[62]; and, from various circumstances, he concluded that they
+were originally from China. A kind of boat put off from the shore,
+containing a number of these islanders, making many threatening signs
+and gestures, as if ordering the Spaniards to go away from their
+land, and even proceeded to throw stones from slings at the ship,
+but, as the stones did no harm, Saavedra would not allow his people
+to fire upon them. A little beyond this island, in 10&deg; or 12&deg;
+of north latitude, they discovered a group, consisting of many small
+low islands, covered with grass, and full of palm trees, to which
+they gave the name of  <i>Los Jardines</i> , or the gardens[63].
+Saavedra came to anchor in the midst of these islands, where he
+remained several days, and concluded that the people had come
+originally from China, but had, by long residence, degenerated into
+lawless savages, using no labour or industry. They wear a species of
+white cloth, made of grass, and are quite ignorant of fire, which put
+them in great terror. Instead of bread they eat cocoas, which they
+pull unripe, burying them for some days in the sand, and then laying
+them in the sun, which causes them to open. They eat fish also, which
+they catch from a kind of boat called <i>parao</i> , or <i>proa</i> ,
+which they construct with tools made of shells, from pine wood that
+is drifted at certain times to their islands, from some unknown
+regions. The wind and weather becoming more favourable for his return
+to New Spain, Saavedra resumed his voyage thither, intending to have
+gone to Panama, to unload the cloves and other merchandize he had
+brought from the Moluccas. His purpose was to have carried this
+merchandize in carts from Panama, about four leagues, or sixteen
+miles overland, to the river Chagre, which is said to be navigable,
+and which discharges itself into the North Sea not far from Nombre de
+Dios, where the goods could be reshipped for Spain; by which means
+all kind of goods might be brought from India in a shorter time, and
+with less danger, than by sailing round the Cape of Good Hope, as the
+voyage from the Moluccas to Panama is almost a perfectly straight
+course between the line and the tropics. But, in the present voyage,
+they were never able to procure a favourable wind, and were therefore
+forced back to the Moluccas, where they arrived in great affliction,
+as Saavedra died by the way[64]. Had Saavedra lived, he intended to
+have opened a navigable communication from sea to sea, through the
+land of Castilia del Oro and New Spain, which might have been done in
+one or other of the following places:--1. From the gulph of St
+Michael to Uraba, which is 25 leagues, or 100 miles. 2. From Panama
+to Nombre de Dios, which is 17 leagues, or 68 miles, much the greater
+part consisting of the river Chagre, navigable for small craft. 3.
+Through the river Xaquator, now St Juan, in the province of
+Nicaragua, which springs out of a lake that reaches to within three
+or four leagues of the South Sea, and falls into the North Sea, being
+navigable by large boats and lighters. 4. The other place is from
+Tecoantepec, through a river, to Verdadera Cruz, in the bay of
+Honduras[65].</p>
+<blockquote>[62] The inhabitants of this island were most
+probably <i>tatooted</i> , of which custom a particular description
+will be given hereafter, in the particular voyages of discovery in
+the South Sea.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[63] The longitudes being altogether neglected in these
+relations by Galyano, it is impossible to form any conjecture as to
+the islands indicated in text. They may possibly have belonged to the
+Carolines of modern maps, which extend between long. 135&deg; and
+180&deg; E. and about the latitudes of the text.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[64] The account which Galvano gives of this voyage is
+very vague and inconclusive. We shall find afterwards that the
+Spaniards found out the means of counteracting the perpetual eastern
+trade winds of the Pacific within the tropics, by shaping a more
+northerly course from the Philippine islands, where they established
+the staple of their Indian commerce, between Acapulco and
+Manilla.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[65] Galvano certainly mistakes here in assigning
+Tecoantepec, which is at least 340 miles from the nearest part of the
+bay of Honduras. If a navigation were practicable from Tecoantepec,
+it would more probably be towards Tabasco, at the bottom of the bay
+of Campechy. Perhaps he ought to have said from Guatimala to the gulf
+of Dolse, at the bottom of the bay of Honduras. This splendid
+navigation between the Atlantic and Pacific, within the tropics, like
+that between the Mediterranean and Red Sea, still remains an unsolved
+problem. It will be resumed hereafter, among the voyages and travels
+to Spanish America.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1529, Damiano de Goes, a Portuguese, travelled over
+all Spain, and went from Flanders into England and Scotland, being at
+the courts of the kings of these countries; after that he returned
+into Flanders, and travelled through Zealand, Holland, Brabant,
+Luxemburgh, Switzerland, and through the cities of Cologne, Spires,
+Strasburg, Basil, and other parts of Germany, and so back to
+Flanders. He went thence into France, through Piccardy, Normandy,
+Champagne, Burgundy, the dukedom of Bourbon, Gascony, Languedoc,
+Dauphiny, and Savoy; passing into Italy by Milan, Ferrara, and
+Lombardy, to Venice. Turning back, he passed through the territory of
+Genoa, the dukedom of Florence, and all Tuscany, to Rome and Naples.
+Thence back, through Italy, to Ulm, in Germany, and through Swabia,
+Bavaria, Austria, Bohemia, Moravia, and Hungary, to the confines of
+Greece. Thence through Poland, Prussia, and Livonia, to the great
+dukedom of Moscovy; and thence back into Germany, and through the
+dominions of the Landgrave, and the dukedom of Saxony, into Denmark,
+Gothland, and Norway, penetrating to lat. 70&deg;.N. In the course of
+these travels, which occupied him during 22 years, he saw, spoke to,
+and was conversant with, all the kings, princes, nobles, and chief
+cities of all Christendom; for which reason, I thought the great
+extent of his travels was worthy of remembrance.</p>
+<p>In 1529 or 1530, Melchior de Sosa Tavarez went from Ormus to
+Bassora, and the islands of Gissara, with some ships of war, and
+sailed up to where the Euphrates and Tigris unite together, being the
+first of the Portuguese who had sailed so far on the fresh water in
+these parts. Not long after this, a Portuguese, named Ferdinando
+Coutinho, being at Ormus, determined to return overland from thence
+to Portugal. For this purpose he went to Arabia, and up the river
+Euphrates, for the space of a month, and saw many countries and
+kingdoms that had not been before visited by the Portuguese. He was
+made prisoner at Damascus; whence he crossed the province of Syria to
+the city of Aleppo. He had been at the holy sepulchre in Jerusalem,
+in the city of Cairo, and at Constantinople, where the Great Turk
+resides. After seeing that Court, he passed over to Venice; and, from
+thence, through Italy, France, and Spain, to Portugal, he came back
+to Lisbon. This person, and Damiano de Goes, were the most
+adventurous of the Portuguese, who, in our time, had seen and
+discovered the greatest extent of foreign realms for their own
+satisfaction.</p>
+<p>About the year 1530, Francis Pizarro, who has been already
+mentioned as having gone to Spain to obtain the government of Peru,
+returned to Panama, having procured all things as he wished, carrying
+with him four brothers, Ferdinand, John, Gonsalvo, and Francis
+Martines de Alcantara[66]. They were not well received by Diego de
+Almagro and his friends, because Pizarro had not sufficiently
+represented his merits in the discovery of Peru to the emperor, in
+which he had lost an eye, but took the whole merit to himself. In the
+end, however, they agreed; and Almagro supplied Pizarro with seven
+hundred pezoes of gold, providing him likewise with provisions and
+ammunition, and other necessaries towards his intended expedition
+against Peru. Soon after this arrangement with Almagro, Pizarro, and
+his four brothers before-mentioned, set out with such soldiers and
+horses as they could procure on their expedition. Being unable, from
+contrary winds, to reach Tumbez, where he proposed to have landed, he
+was under the necessity of disembarking at the river of Peru; whence
+he marched along the coast with great difficulty, on account of many
+rivers and marshes, in which some of his men were drowned in
+crossing. Coming to the town of Coache, they found much gold and
+emeralds in that place; some of which they broke, to see if they were
+perfect. From thence Pizarro sent twenty thousand pezoes of gold to
+Almagro at Panama, to enable him to send supplies of men, horses,
+ammunition, and provisions, and went from Coache to the haven
+named <i>Porte Viejo</i> , where he was joined by Sebastian Benalcazar,
+with all the supplies he had sent for. In the year 1531, after the
+arrival of these reinforcements, Pizarro passed over from Porto Viejo
+to the rich island of Puna, in the bay of Guayaquil, where he was
+outwardly well received by the governor, who yet conspired to kill
+him and his men; but Pizarro prevented him, and took many of the
+Indians, whom he bound with chains of gold and silver. Such was the
+jealousy of the governor of Puna, that he caused those who had the
+charge of his wives to have their noses and privities cut off. In
+this place, Pizarro found above six hundred prisoners belonging to
+king Atabalipa, who was then at war with his eldest brother Guascar.
+Pizarro set these prisoners at liberty, on promise of procuring him a
+friendly reception in Peru; but they forgot their engagements
+afterwards, and excited the people to war against the Spaniards. From
+Puna, Pizarro sent three Spaniards to Tumbez, in Peru, to treat of
+amity; but the Peruvians seized them, and put them to death. On
+hearing of this cruel action, Pizarro crossed over to the main, and
+made a sudden attack, during the night, on the city of Tumbez,
+killing great numbers of the inhabitants. The remainder submitted and
+made peace, presenting him large gifts of gold and silver, and other
+riches. Pizarro then built a town on the river Cira, which he named
+St Michael of Tangarara, which was the first habitation of the
+Christians in these parts; and he appointed Sebastian de Benalcazar
+to the command. After this, he made search for a secure haven on the
+coast, and found one every way to his wish at Payta.</p>
+<blockquote>[66] These seem all to have been brothers to Pizarro, and
+named from the town of Alcantara in Spain.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year, 1531, Diego de Ordas went, with 600 soldiers and
+35 horses, to settle the country on the Maranon, or river of the
+Amazons; but, dying on the voyage, this expedition proved fruitless.
+Afterwards, in the year 1534, Hierom Artal was sent thither with 130
+soldiers, yet he came not to the river, but formed settlements
+at <i>St Michael de Neveri</i> , and other places in Paria. Aries
+d'Acugna, a Portuguese gentleman, went likewise to the Maranon, with
+ten ships, 900 men, and 130 horses, where he spent much, and did
+little to purpose; but the greatest loser in this expedition was John
+de Barros. This great river Maranon is in lat. 3&deg; S.[67], its
+mouth being 15 leagues, or 60 miles across, with many inhabited
+islands, on which there are many trees producing incense, much larger
+than those of Arabia. It produces gold and precious stones, and an
+emerald was found there as large as the palm of the hand. The people
+of that country make a kind of drink of a species of oats that are as
+large as quinces.</p>
+<blockquote>[67] The mouth of the Maranon is exactly under the
+line.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Nunnez de Gusman was sent from Mexico, in 1531, with 500 soldiers,
+half of whom were cavalry, and 6000 Indians to carry his baggage and
+provisions, to discover and subdue the countries to the northwest of
+the kingdom of Mexico. In this expedition he reduced the countries of
+Xalisco, Ceintiliquipac, Ciametlan, Tovalla, Cnixo, Ciamolla,
+Culhuacan, and other places. On this expedition he marched through
+Mechuacan, where he acquired much gold, and 10,000 marks of silver.
+To the country of Xalisco he gave the name of New Galicia, because it
+was rugged and mountainous, and the people robust and hardy. He built
+many towns in the conquered countries; particularly Compostella,
+Guadalajara, after the place of his own birth in Spain, Santo
+Espirito de la Conception, and St Michael, which last is in lat.
+24&deg; N. In 1532, Cortes sent Diego Hurtado de Mendo&ccedil;a in
+two ships from Acapulco, which is 70 leagues from Mexico, on purpose
+to explore the coast of the South Sea, as he had been ordered to do
+by the emperor. Mendo&ccedil;a sailed from Acapulco to the harbour of
+Xalisco, or Xalis, on the river Barania, in lat. 22&deg; N. where he
+wished to take in wood and water. But he was resisted there, by the
+orders of Nunnes de Gusman, and obliged to proceed on his voyage.
+Some of his men mutinied, and he put them all on board one of his
+ships, that they might return to New Spain. Being in want of water,
+these people put in at the bay of Vanderas, not far south from Xalis,
+where they were all slain by the Indians. In this voyage of
+discovery, Hurtado sailed 200 leagues along the coast, but did
+nothing worthy of being recorded.</p>
+<p>In 1533, Pizarro went from Tumbez to Caxamalca, where he took king
+Atabalipa prisoner, who engaged to pay a vast sum in gold and silver
+for his ransom. On purpose to procure this, Pedro de Varco and
+Ferdinando do Sotto were sent to the city of Cusco, in lat. 17&deg;
+S.[68], a journey of 200 leagues, all upon causeways of stone, with
+bridges wherever necessary, and having lodging-places at proper
+distances for the conveniency of the  <i>Yngas</i> , by which name the
+kings of Peru are distinguished. The armies of the Peruvians are very
+numerous, as they often bring more than 100,000 men into the field;
+and they lodge on these causeways, as already mentioned, where they
+always have abundance of provisions and other necessaries, as is said
+to be the custom in China. Ferdinando Pizarro went with some horsemen
+to Paciacama, 100 leagues from Caxamalca, to discover the country;
+and, on his return, he learnt that Guascar, the brother of Atabalipa,
+had been put to death by his command; and that Ruminaguy, the general
+of the army of Atabalipa, had risen in arms, in the city of Quito,
+against the Spaniards. After the reception of this intelligence,
+Atabalipa was strangled by the orders of Pizarro[69]. After the death
+of the two kings of the Peruvians, Pizarro continually extended his
+authority over the dominions of Peru, and built many cities, towns,
+and forts, in convenient situations, to hold the country under
+subjection. He detached Sebastian de Benalcazar, whom he had before
+made governor of St Michael de Tangarara, with 200 infantry and 80
+horse, to Quito, against Ruminaguy. Benalcazar proceeded successfully
+in reducing the country to subjection from one city to another,
+eastwards, for 120 leagues, not far from the equinoctial line; where
+Peter Alvarado found certain mountains so cold, and loaded with such
+quantities of snow, that 70 of his men were frozen to death. Having
+reduced the city of Quito, he established himself and his people in
+that place, calling it the city of St Francis; and it seemed very
+strange to the Spaniards to find, in that country, abundance of
+cattle, wheat, barley, and other plants, similar to those of Spain.
+After sending Benalcazar to reduce the city of Quito, Pizarro himself
+undertook to reduce the royal residence of Cusco, in about 13&deg;
+20' S. in which expedition he was opposed by Quisquiz, a Peruvian
+general, whom he easily defeated; and he soon afterwards took
+possession of Cusco, the exceedingly rich and wealthy capital of the
+Peruvian monarchy. About this time Mango, a brother of Atabalipa,
+joined Pizarro, who made him Ynga, or king of the country, in name
+only, while he assumed the whole authority and revenues of the
+kingdom to himself[70].</p>
+<blockquote>[68] The latitude of Cusco is only 13&deg; 30'
+S.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[69] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. vi. vii. viii. ix</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[70] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. xvi. xviii. xix.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year, 1534; Jaques Cartier, a native of Britanny, went
+with three ships to the land of Corterealis[71], and the gulf of St
+Lawrence, otherwise called <i>Golfo Quadrato</i> , or the square gulf,
+which he fell in with in lat. 48&deg; 30' N. He proceeded northwards
+to the latitude of 51&deg;, in the hope of being able to penetrate in
+that direction to China, by a north- west passage, to bring drugs and
+other merchandize from thence to France. Next year Cartier made a
+second voyage to the same regions, and found the country pervaded by
+many large rivers, and abounding in provisions. He sailed 300 leagues
+up one of these rivers, in a south-west direction, and named the
+country New France, now Canada; but finding the water to become
+fresh, he was satisfied there could be no passage that way to the
+South Sea; and having wintered in the country, he returned next year
+to France.</p>
+<blockquote>[71] So named from the two brothers, Caspar and Michael
+Cortereal, who are said to have been lost on this coast of North
+America in 1500, as formerly mentioned by Galvano.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>About the end of the year 1535, or beginning of 1536, Don Anthony
+de Mendo&ccedil;a came from Spain to the city of Mexico, as Viceroy
+of New Spain, being appointed to supersede Cortes, the discoverer and
+conqueror of that rich and extensive territory. At this time Cortes
+was absent from the seat of government, having gone to Tecoantepec,
+on purpose to fit out two ships on a voyage of discovery. These he
+sent out under the command of Fernando de Grijalva and Diego Bezerra
+de Mendo&ccedil;a, the former having a Portuguese pilot, named
+Acosta, and the pilot to the latter being Fortunio Ximenez, a
+Biscayan. On the first night after leaving Tecoantepec, the two ships
+separated. Ximenez raised a mutiny against his captain, in which
+Bezerra was slain, and many of the crew wounded. Some time
+afterwards, Ximenez went on shore in the bay of Santa Cruz, for wood
+and water, where he, and more than 20 of his people, were slain by
+the Indians. Two of the mariners, who were in the boat, escaped to
+Xalisco, and told Nunnes de Gusman, who commanded at that place, that
+they had seen indications of pearls during the voyage. Gusman went
+accordingly with, a ship in search of pearls, and explored above 150
+leagues of the coast[72].</p>
+<blockquote>[72] Xalis, or Xalisco, the residence of Gusman is in
+lat. 21&deg;45'N. The mouth of the river St Francis, on the
+north-eastern shore of the gulf of California, is in lat. 26&deg; 40'
+N. so that the discovery on the present occasion seems to have
+comprised about 350 miles to the north of Xalis.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>It is said that Grijalva sailed 300 leagues from Tecoantepec,
+without seeing any land, except one small island in 20&deg; N. to
+which he gave the name St Thomas, as having been discovered on the
+day of that saint[73].</p>
+<blockquote>[73] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. Lxxiv. xcviii.</blockquote>
+.
+<p>In the year 1535, Pizarro built the city which he named <i>Ciudad
+de los Reys</i> , or of the kings, on the river of Lima, in lat.
+20&deg; S; to which he removed the inhabitants of Xauxa, as a more
+convenient situation for the residence; of the government, and in a
+better country[74]. He built also the city of St Jago in Porto Viejo,
+and many other towns, both along the coast and in the inland country;
+and he procured from Spain horses, asses, mules, cattle, hogs, goats,
+and sheep, to stock his territories, and many kinds of trees and
+plants, such as rosemary, oranges, lemons, citrons, vines, and other
+fruits, wheat, barley, and other grains, with radishes, and many
+other kinds of vegetables, which were disseminated all over the
+country[75]. in the same year, Diego de Almagro went from the city of
+Cusco to the provinces of Arequipa and Chili, in lat. 30&deg; S. The
+march was of great length, and he discovered a great extent of
+country; but he suffered great extremities of cold, hunger, and
+fatigue, in consequence of the ruggedness of the mountains, and the
+ice and snow, insomuch that many of his men and horses were frozen to
+death. About this time Ferdinando Pizarro came from Spain to the city
+of Lima, bringing with him the patent of Marquis of Atanillos, for
+his brother, Francis Pizarro, and a commission for Diego de Almagro,
+by which he was appointed governor of all the land he had hitherto
+discovered, and 100 leagues beyond, under the name of the <i>New
+kingdom of Toledo</i> . Ferdinando Pizarro went to the city of Cusco,
+of which he was made governor, and John de Rada went into Chili to
+Almagro, carrying with him the orders of the emperor. On receiving
+the letters patent of the emperor, Almagro marched directly for
+Cusco, which he considered to be included in his government, by which
+a civil war was kindled between him and Pizarro. On this march he and
+his people were severely oppressed by famine, and were even forced to
+feed upon their horses which had died four months and a half before,
+when on their march southwards into Chili[76].</p>
+<blockquote>[74] Xauxa or Jauja, stands on the high table land of
+Peru; Lima, or de los Reys, near the coast of the South Sea, in the
+maritime valley, or low country, and on the river Rimac, called Lima
+in the text.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[75] Gomar. Hist. Gen. IV. xxiii. and V.
+xxii.</blockquote>
+.
+<blockquote>[76] Gomar. H. G. V. xxiv. and xxv. Almagro appears, both
+on his march to Chili and back to Cusco, to have gone by the high
+mountainous track of the Andes, and the carcases of his dead horses
+must have been preserved from corruption amid the ever during ice and
+snow of that elevated region.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In this same year, 1535, Nunnez d'Acunha, who was governor of
+India for the crown of Portugal, while building a fortress, in the
+city of Diu, sent a fleet, under the command of Vasquez Perez del San
+Paio, to the river Indus, which is under the tropic of Cancer, 90 or
+100 leagues to the north- west from Diu. He also sent an army against
+Badu, the king of Cambaia, or Guzerat, of which a renegado named
+Cosesofar was captain[77]. The fleet came to the bar of the great
+river Indus in December, where the same phenomena were observed as
+were formerly experienced by Alexander, according to the relation of
+Quintus Curtius[78].</p>
+<blockquote>[77] The text seems ambiguous, and it appears difficult
+to say whether Galvano means, that Cosesofar, or Coje Sofar, was
+captain under D'Acunha, or general of the Guzerat army, belonging to
+Badu.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[78] This probably refers to the <i>Bore</i> , or great and
+sudden influx of the sea, after a great recession.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year, Simon de Alcazava sailed from Seville, with two
+ships and 240 men. Some say he was destined for New Spain, others for
+the Moluccas, and others again that he meant to have proceeded for
+China, where he had formerly been, along with Ferdinando Perez de
+Andrada. However this may have been, he went first to the Canaries,
+and from thence to the straits of Magellan, without touching at
+Brazil, or any other part of the coast of South America, and entered
+into these straits in the month of December, having contrary winds,
+and very cold weather. Under these difficulties, the soldiers
+entreated him to turn back, which he refused, and went into a haven
+on the south side of the straits, in lat. 53&deg; S. where he ordered
+Roderigo de Isla to land, with 60 of the people, to explore the
+country; but the people mutinied against Alcazava, and slew him; and,
+having appointed such captains and officers as they thought proper,
+they returned back. In their voyage homewards, one of the ships was
+lost on the coast of Brazil, and such of the Spaniards as escaped
+drowning, were killed and eaten by the savages. The other ship went
+to St Jago, in the island of Hispaniola, and thence returned to
+Seville, in Spain[79]. In the same year, Don Pedro de Mendo&ccedil;a
+went from Cadiz for the river Plata, with twelve ships and 2000 men,
+being the largest armament, both of ships and men, that had ever been
+sent from Spain to the new world. Mendo&ccedil;a died on his return
+to Spain, but most part of his men remained in the country on the Rio
+Plata, where they built a large city, containing now 2000 houses, in
+which great numbers of Indians dwell along with the Spaniards. From
+this place they discovered and conquered the country to a great
+extent, even to the mines of Potosi and the town of La Plata[80],
+which is at the distance of 500 miles from Buenos Ayres.</p>
+<blockquote>[79] Gomar. H. G. IV. xiii.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[80] Probably a mistake for La Paz, the principal town of
+the north- western district, or mining province, belonging to the
+Viceroyalty of La Plata.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Cortes having learnt, in the year 1536, that his ship, of which
+Fortunio Ximenez was pilot, had been seized by Nunnez de Guzman, sent
+three ships to Xalisco, while he marched thither by land with a
+respectable force; and, on his arrival there, he found his ship all
+spoiled and rifled. When his small squadron was come round to
+Xalisco, he went himself on board, and left Andrew de Tapia to
+command his land force. Setting sail from thence, he came, on the
+first of May, to a point of land, which he named Cape St Philip, and,
+to an island close by this cape, he gave the name of St Jago. Three
+days afterwards, he came to the bay where the pilot Ximenez was
+killed, which he named Bahia de Santa Cruz, where he went on land,
+and sent out Andrew de Tapia to explore the country. Cortes again set
+sail, and came to the river now called <i>Rio de San Pedro y San
+Paulo</i> , where the ships were separated by a tempest. One was
+driven to the bay of Santa Cruz, another to the river of Guajaval,
+and the third was stranded on the coast near Xalisco, whence the crew
+went overland to Mexico. After waiting a long while for his other two
+ships, Cortes made sail, and entered into the gulf of California,
+otherwise called <i>Mar Vermejo</i> , or the Vermilion Sea, and by
+some, the sea of Cortes. Having penetrated 50 leagues within that
+gulf, he espied a ship riding at an anchor, and, on his approach
+towards her, had nearly been lost, if he had not received assistance
+from that other ship. Having repaired his own ship, he departed from
+thence with both ships; and, having procured provisions at a very
+dear rate, at St Michael de Culiacan, he went to the harbour of Santa
+Cruz, where he received information that Don Antonio de
+Mendo&ccedil;a had arrived from Spain as Viceroy of Mexico. He
+therefore left Francis de Ulloa with the command of his ships,
+ordering him to proceed on discoveries; and going to Acapulco, he
+received a messenger from Don Antonio de Mendo&ccedil;a, the new
+viceroy, certifying his arrival, and the assumption of his authority.
+Mendo&ccedil;a likewise sent him the copy of a letter from Francis
+Pizarro, stating that Mango, the Inca of Peru, had risen in arms, and
+assailed the city of Cusco with 100,000 fighting men, having slain
+his brother, John Pizarro, and above 400 Spaniards, with 200 horses;
+and that he himself, and the Spanish dominions in Peru, were in
+imminent danger, unless speedily and effectually assisted.</p>
+<p>Cortes, not yet resolved on submitting to the authority of
+Mendo&ccedil;a, fitted out two ships, under the command of Ferdinando
+de Grijalva and one Alvarado, on purpose to discover the route to the
+Moluccas by the way of the equinoctial line, because the islands of
+Cloves are under that parallel. They went first to St Michael de
+Tangarara, in Peru, where they landed succours for Pizarro, and
+thence, all along the line, to the Moluccas, as they were ordered;
+and they are said to have sailed above 1000 leagues without sight of
+land on either side the whole way. At length, in lat. 2&deg; N. they
+discovered an island named <i>Asea</i> , which was believed to be one
+of the islands of Cloves. Five hundred leagues farther, more or less,
+they came to another, which they named <i>Isla de los Pescadores</i> ,
+or island of Fishers. Going still in the same course, they saw
+another island, called <i>Hayme</i> , on the south side of the line,
+and another named <i>Apia</i> , after which they came in sight
+of <i>Seri</i> . Turning one degree to the north, they came to anchor
+at an island named <i>Coroa</i> , whence they came to another under the
+line named <i>Memousum</i> , and thence to <i>Busu</i> , still holding on
+the same course[81].</p>
+<blockquote>[81] The only island mentioned in this voyage, which can
+be traced by the names in our modern maps, is the Piscadores, about
+lat. 11&deg; N. long. 167&deg; E.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The people of all these islands are black, with frizzled hair,
+whom the people of the Moluccas call Papuas. Most of them are
+witches, and eat human flesh; and are so much given to wickedness,
+that the devils walk among them as companions. Yet when these wicked
+spirits find any of the Papuas alone, they kill him with cruel blows,
+or smother him; for which reason they always go out in companies of
+two or three together. There is in this country a bird as large as a
+crane, which has no wings wherewith to fly, but runs on the ground
+with the swiftness of a deer, and, of the small feathers of this
+bird, the natives make hair for their idols. They have likewise a
+particular herb, the leaf of which, after being washed in warm water,
+if laid on any member, and licked with the tongue, will even draw out
+the whole blood of a mans body; and, by means of this leaf, the
+natives let blood of themselves, when afflicted by sickness.</p>
+<p>From these islands they came to others named the <i>Guellas</i> , in
+lat. 1&deg; N.  <i>east and west</i> [82], from the island of Ternate,
+in which the Portuguese have a fortress. These islands are 124
+leagues from the island of <i>Moro</i> , and between forty and fifty
+leagues from Ternate. From thence they went to the island
+of <i>Moro</i> [83], and the islands of Cloves, going about from one
+island to another; but the natives would not permit them to land,
+desiring them to go to the fortress, where captain <i>Antonio
+Galvano</i> , the author of this work, would receive them in a
+friendly manner, who was, as they stiled him, <i>factor</i>  of the
+country, and they could not be allowed to land without his license.
+This circumstance is worthy of being noticed, that the natives were
+so well affected to the Portuguese as to venture their lives, with
+their wives, children, and goods, in their service.</p>
+<blockquote>[82] This strange expression is quite inexplicable, and
+must have been misunderstood by Hakluyt.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[83] Probably Morty, of our present
+maps.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1537, John de Vadillo, the governor of Carthagena,
+went with a powerful armament from the port called <i>St Sebastian de
+Buena Vista</i> , in the gulf of Uraba, to the Rio Verde, whence he
+went by land, without previously knowing any part of the way, and
+without carriages, to the very extremity of Peru and the town of La
+Plata, a distance of 1200 leagues, a most memorable journey. The
+whole country, from the Rio Verde to the mountains of Abibe, is full
+of rugged hills, thick forests, and many rivers, through which they
+had to pierce their way with infinite toil. The mountains of Abibe
+are said to be twenty leagues broad, and can only be passed over in
+the months of January, February, March, and April, as from incessant
+heavy rains at all other times of the year, the rivers are so swelled
+as to be quite impassable. In these mountains there are many herds of
+swine, many dantes, lions, tigers, bears, ounces, large wild-cats,
+monkeys, vast snakes, and other vermin. There are also abundance of
+partridges, quails, turtle-doves, pigeons, and other birds of many
+different kinds. The rivers also were so full of fish that they
+killed them with staves; and they affirmed, if they had been provided
+with rods and nets, that a very large company of men might be
+subsisted, without ever being in distress for want of food. In this
+expedition they noted the diversities of people, languages, dress,
+and other circumstances, during the whole way, through many
+countries, kingdoms, and, provinces, and the great difficulties and
+dangers they encountered till their arrival at the  <i>Villa de la
+Plata</i> , and the adjoining sea. This was the most extensive
+discovery which has been ever heard of by land, and in so short a
+time; insomuch that, if it had not been performed in our own days, it
+could hardly have been credited[84].</p>
+<blockquote>[84] Chron. del Peru, c. ix, xx.</blockquote>
+<p>In 1538, certain friars of the order of St Francis went from
+Mexico to preach to the natives in the northern part of New Spain,
+and to convert them to the Catholic faith. One Mark de Nizza
+penetrated farther than any of the rest.--Passing through Culvacan,
+or Culiacan, he came into the province of Sibola, or Cinaloa, where
+he pretended to have found seven cities, and that the farther he went
+the richer was the country in gold, silver, and precious stones, with
+many sheep bearing wool of great fineness. On the fame of this
+wealth, the viceroy Don Antonio de Mendo&ccedil;a, and Cortes,
+determined to send a force to take possession of the country; but, as
+they could not agree on this subject, Cortes and his wife went over
+to Spain in 1540, where he died seven years afterwards[85].</p>
+<blockquote>[85] Ramus. III. 356.</blockquote>
+<p>In 1538, I, Antonio Galvano, being governor of the Molucca
+islands, sent a ship, commanded by Francis de Castro, towards the
+north, with orders to convert as many as he could to the Christian
+Faith. Castro himself baptized many; as the lords of Celebes,
+Maccassar, Amboina, Moro, Moratax, and of several other places. On
+his arrival at the island of Mindanao, six kings received the water
+of baptism from de Castro, with their wives, children, and subjects;
+and I gave orders that most of these should receive the name of John,
+in honour of king John III. who then reigned in Portugal.</p>
+<p>The Portuguese and Spaniards who have been in these islands,
+affirm that there are in them a certain species of hogs, which,
+besides the ordinary teeth in their jaws, have two others growing out
+of their snouts, and other two behind their ears, of a large span and
+a-half in length[86]. There is likewise said to be a certain tree,
+that part of which that grows towards the east is a sure antidote
+against all kinds of poison, while the western half of the same tree
+is itself a deadly poison. The fruit of this tree is like large
+pease; of which is made the strongest poison on earth. There is
+another tree of a very singular nature, for if any one eat of its
+fruit, he becomes twelve hours mad; and, on regaining his senses,
+cannot remember any thing that happened during his madness. There are
+likewise certain land-crabs, which have the same effect of producing
+temporary madness when eaten. The islanders also pretend that there
+is a certain stone in these islands of so wonderful a property, that
+whoever happens to sit upon it is sure to be afflicted with rupture.
+It is farther worthy of remark, that the inhabitants of these islands
+gild their teeth.</p>
+<blockquote>[86] This obviously refers to an inaccurate description
+of the Babyroussa. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1539, three ships which had been ordered by Cortes to
+discover the coast northwards from Culiacan, and which sailed from
+Acapulco, under the command of Francis Ulloa, having touched at <i>St
+Jago de Buena Speran&ccedil;a</i> , entered into the gulf of
+California, which Cortes discovered, and sailed up that gulf till
+they came almost to the farther end of it, in lat. 32&deg; N. at a
+place which they named <i>Ancon de San Andres</i> , because they came
+there on the day of that Saint. They returned southward along the
+other, or western coast of the gulf of California; and, having
+doubled the point of that peninsula, called <i>Cabo de San Lucas</i> ,
+within certain islands, they sailed northwards, along the external
+coast of California, till they again reached to the same latitude of
+32&deg; N. whence they returned into New Spain; forced to this
+measure by contrary winds and want of provisions, after having been
+absent a whole year on this voyage. In these discoveries, Cortes
+expended 200,000 ducats, according to his own account[87]. Cortes and
+his captains explored the coast of New Spain, from the lat. of
+12&deg; N. to 32&deg; or 700 leagues; all of which was rather warm
+than cold, although snow is found on some of the mountains for the
+greater part of every year. From Cabo del Enganno to Cabo de Liampa
+in China, the distance is 1000 or 1200 leagues.</p>
+<blockquote>[87] Gomar. H. G. II. lxiv. Ramus. III. 329.</blockquote>
+<p>In New Spain there are many trees, flowers, and fruits of various
+kinds, that are useful to man. The principal tree is
+named <i>Metl</i> , which does not grow either very tall or very thick.
+The natives plant and dress this tree as we do our vines; and they
+allege that it has forty different kinds of leaves, resembling woven
+cloth, which serve for many useful purposes. When tender, these
+leaves are made into conserves. From it they make a kind of paper,
+and a substance like flax; and it is also manufactured into mantles,
+mats, shoes, girdles, and cordage. This tree produces such strong and
+sharp prickles, that they are used instead of needles for sewing. The
+roots are used as fuel; and their ashes make excellent ley for the
+manufacture of soap. The natives open up the earth from the roots of
+this tree, and, by scraping or wounding them, they extract a juice
+which is a rich syrup. By boiling this juice, it is converted into
+honey; and, when purified, it becomes sugar; and may likewise be made
+into wine and vinegar. The fruit of this tree is called <i>Coco</i> .
+The rind roasted, crushed, and applied to sores or wounds, has a most
+healing quality. The juice of the roots and tops, mixed with incense,
+is a sovereign antidote against the bite of a viper and other
+poisons. From all these useful properties, this is the most
+profitable tree that is known in these parts[88].</p>
+<blockquote>[88] Gomar. H. G. VI. xvii.</blockquote>
+<p>There are certain birds in New Spain called Vicmalim, having a
+long small bill, which live on dew and the juice of roses and other
+flowers; their feathers are very small, and of beautiful colours, and
+are much esteemed to work up into ornaments with gold. These birds
+die, or sleep rather, every year in the month of October, sitting on
+a small bough in some warm and close place; and they revive again in
+the month of April, when the flowers appear. There are snakes
+likewise in this country, which sound as if they had bells attached
+to them, when they creep along. There are other snakes also, which
+are said to engender by the mouth, as vipers are reported to do with
+us. There are likewise certain hogs, which have a navel on the ridge
+of the back; which the hunters cut out the moment they are killed, as
+otherwise the carcase would corrupt and stink, so as to be uneatable.
+Besides which, there are certain fishes which are named
+ <i>Snorters</i> , because they make a snorting noise like
+hogs[89].</p>
+<blockquote>[89] In this paragraph we have very vague indications of
+humming birds, rattlesnakes, and of the animal now called
+Pecari.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1538, a civil war broke out in Peru, between Pizarro
+and Almagro; in the course of which, Almagro was taken prisoner and
+beheaded. After which, in the year 1539, Pizarro sent Peter to
+Baldivia into Chili; where he was at first well received, but the
+people afterwards rose against him, and sought to put him to death by
+treason. Notwithstanding the long and severe war he had to wage
+against the natives of Chili, Baldivia explored the country to a
+great extent, discovering the whole coast as far as lat. 40&deg; S.
+and even further. While Baldivia was occupied in these discoveries,
+he received intelligence of a king called  <i>Lucengolma</i> , who
+commonly brought 200,000 men into the field, when engaged in war
+against another neighbouring king. Lucengolma was likewise said to
+have a temple in an island, in which there were 2000 priests. It was
+farther reported, that beyond the dominions of this king, there lay a
+country inhabited by a nation of Amazons, whose queen was named
+ <i>Guanomilla</i> , which signifies <i>the golden heaven</i> . But,
+hitherto, these things rest merely on report, and have not been
+ascertained for truth, by actual discovery. About this time Gomez de
+Alvarado reduced the province of <i>Guanaco</i>  to obedience; and
+Francis de Chavez subdued the <i>Conchincos</i> , who often vexed the
+town of Truxillo and its adjoining country, by various inroads. Peter
+de Vergara reduced the <i>Bracamores</i> , a people to the north of
+Quito; John Perez de Veragara subdued the <i>Ciaciapoians</i> ;
+Alfonsos de Mercadiglio subdued the people of <i>Mulubamba</i> ;
+Ferdinando and Gonsalvo Pizarro reduced <i>Collao</i> , a country rich
+in gold; the lower part of which was subdued by Peter de Candia;
+Peranzures went also on an expedition into the same country. In this
+manner the Spaniards dispersed themselves over the whole country, and
+conquered an extent of more than 700 leagues; yet not without much
+labour, and considerable loss of men[90].</p>
+<blockquote>[90] Gomar. H. G. V. xxxv. and Chron. del Peru, c.
+103.</blockquote>
+<p>The countries of Brazil and Peru stand east and west from each
+other, their coasts being almost 800 leagues distant at the nearest
+points, which are the Cape of St Augustine and the harbour of
+Truxillo, nearly in the same parallel of latitude. The greatest
+extent of Peru, measuring from the river of Peru in the north, to the
+Straits of Magellan in the south, is 950 leagues. Through the whole
+of this country certain mountains, called the Andes, extend from
+north to south, which divide Brazil on the east, from Peru, or the
+empire of the Incas on the west. In the same manner, the mountains of
+Taurus and Imaus divide Asia into two parts; which mountains begin on
+the Mediterranean, in 36 or 37 degrees of north latitude, over
+against the islands of Rhodes and Cyprus, and extend eastwards to the
+sea of China. Thus, likewise, the mountains of Atlas in Africa divide
+the  <i>tawny</i>  moors from the <i>black</i>  moors, or negroes who
+have frizzled hair. These mountains begin at Mount <i>Moies</i> , near
+the desert of Barca, and extend under the tropic of Cancer to the
+Atlantic; The mountains of the Andes are high and rugged, and barren
+in some places, without trees or even grass; and it almost always
+either rains or snows on their highest ranges, accompanied with
+sudden and violent tempests of wind. There is so great a scarcity of
+wood in these parts, that the inhabitants use turf or peats for fuel,
+as is done in Flanders. In these mountains and countries, the soil is
+in some places black, in others white, or red, blue, green, yellow,
+and violet; and, with some of these earths, the natives dye various
+colours, without using any other mixture. From the bottoms of these
+mountains, but principally on the east side, there flow many rivers,
+both small and great. Among these are the rivers Amazons, St Francis,
+and La Plata, and many others, which pervade the country of
+Brasil[91], which are much larger than those of Peru, or of Castilia
+del Oro. The country of Peru, between the Andes and the western sea
+or Pacific, is from 15 to 20 leagues in breadth, all of a hot sandy
+soil, yet fertile, as being well watered, and produces many excellent
+trees and fruits. It produces many turnips, rapes, and other such
+herbs and roots; likewise abundance of flags, rushes, herbs, and
+flowers, of so loose and tender a texture, that the leaves drop off
+on the slightest touch. Among these herbs and fresh flowers, the
+natives often dwell without beds or houses, even like cattle in the
+fields, and some of them have tails[92]. These people are gross, and
+wear long hair, but have no beards; and they speak divers languages.
+One of the plants of this region called <i>aipo</i> , resembles rue,
+and bears a yellow flower, which cures all kinds of rotten sores;
+yet, if applied to sound flesh, will eat it to the bone.</p>
+<blockquote>[91] The word Brazil in the text obviously includes the
+whole flat country to the east of the Andes, Guiana, Brazil,
+Paraguay, Buenos Ayres, and Patagonia.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[92] This idea, ever since the time of Lord Monboddo, has
+been renewed, and occupies the attention of the explorers of Africa;
+links may exist, in creation, with which we are yet
+unacquainted.--Clark.<br>
+The fancy of tailed men has probably arisen from inattentive
+observers, seeing people clothed in the skins of beasts, with the
+tails hanging down. The natives of New South Wales wear tails in
+imitation of the Kangaroo: Yet, having been closely observed, are not
+described as tailed men--E.</blockquote>
+<p>They say that these mountains abound in tigers, lions, bears,
+wolves, wild- cats, foxes, dantes, ounces, hogs, and deer; and with
+many birds, both ravenous and others, most of them being black; while
+under the north, both birds and beasts are mostly white. There are
+also great numbers of large and terrible snakes, which are said to
+have destroyed a whole army of one of the Incas, that was marching
+this way: Yet, according to report, an old woman did so enchant them,
+that they became quite harmless and gentle, insomuch that they would
+allow people to sit upon them. It is reported that, from Tumbez to
+Chili, there are no peacocks, hens, cocks, nor any eagles, hawks,
+kites, or other ravenous birds; but there are many ducks, geese,
+herns, pigeons, partridges, quails, and many other kinds of birds.
+There is likewise a certain fowl like a duck, which has no wings, but
+is covered all over with fine thin feathers. A certain species of
+bitterns are said to make war upon the sea-wolf or seal; for when
+this bird finds them on land, it tries to pick out their eyes, that
+they may not see their way back to the water, and then kills them;
+and the fight between the bitterns and the seals is said to be a
+pleasant sight.</p>
+<p>Those who live on the tops of the Andes, between the cold and the
+heat, are mostly blind of one eye, and some are totally blind; so
+that hardly can two men be found but one of them at least is half
+blind. Notwithstanding the great heat of the sand in Peru, it yields
+good crops of Maize and Potatoes, and an herb called <i>cocoa</i> ,
+which the natives carry continually in their mouths, as those in the
+East Indies do <i>Betle</i> , and which they say satisfies both hunger
+and thirst. It is affirmed that, from Tumbez southwards, for the
+space of 500 leagues, there is neither rain, thunder nor lightning,
+with only some light showers. In Peru, there are certain animals,
+called <i>xacos</i> [93] by the natives, and sheep by the Spaniards,
+because they are covered with wool; but their shape resembles that of
+deer, and they have saddle backs like a camel, and are capable of
+carrying burdens of about a hundred weight each. The Spaniards ride
+upon them; and, when weary, they turn their heads backward, and void
+a wonderfully stinking liquor from their mouths. From the rivers La
+Plata and Lima, or Rimac, inclusively to the southwards, there are no
+crocodiles, lizards, snakes, or other venomous reptiles; but the
+rivers produce great store of excellent fish. On the coast of St
+Michael on the South Sea, there are many rocks of salt, covered with
+eggs. At the point of St Helena, there are springs from which a
+liquor flows, that serves instead of pitch and tar. It is said that
+there is a fountain in Chili which converts wood into stone. In the
+haven of Truxillo, there is a lake of fresh water, the bottom of
+which is good hard salt; and in the Andes, beyond Xauxa, there is a
+fresh water river which flows over a bottom of white salt. It is also
+affirmed that there formerly dwelt giants in Peru, of whom statues
+were found at Porto Vejo; and that their jaw bones were found in the
+haven of Truxillo, having teeth three or four fingers long.</p>
+<blockquote>[93] This word ought to have been <i>Pacos</i> . Of these
+animals, with the Llamas and Vicugnas, different species of the camel
+genus, a more extended account will occur, when we come to the
+particular travels in Peru.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1540, the viceroy, Don Antonio de Mendo&ccedil;a, sent
+Ferdinando Alorchon with two ships, to explore the bottom of the
+gulph of California, and divers other countries. In the same year,
+Gonsalvo Pizarro went from Quito to discover the <i>Cinnamon</i> 
+country, of which there ran a great fame in Peru. Taking with him a
+force of 200 Spaniards, partly horse and part foot, with 300 Indians
+to carry the baggage, he marched to <i>Guixos</i> , the most distant
+place or frontier of the empire of the Incas; in which place there
+happened a great earthquake, accompanied with much rain and dreadful
+lightning, by which seventy houses were swallowed up. From that place
+they passed over a chain of cold and snowy mountains, where they
+found many Indians frozen to death, and they wondered much at finding
+so much snow immediately under the equinoctial line. From thence they
+proceeded to a province called <i>Cumaco</i> , where they were detained
+two months on account of constant rain; and beyond this, they came to
+the cinnamon trees, which are of great size, with leaves resembling
+those of the bay tree. The leaves, branches, roots, and every part of
+this tree, tasted like cinnamon, but this taste and flavour was
+particularly strong in the root; yet that was still stronger in
+certain knobs, like <i>alcornoques</i> , or acorns, which were good
+merchandize. This appears to have been of the same nature with wild
+cinnamon, of which there is great abundance in the East Indies,
+particularly in the island of <i>Jaoa</i> , or Java. From this cinnamon
+country, they proceeded onwards to the province and city of Coca,
+where they halted for fifty days; after which they travelled for
+sixty leagues along a river, without being able to find any bridge or
+ford at which they could pass over. In one place they found this
+river to form a cataract of 200 fathoms in perpendicular fall, making
+such a noise as was almost sufficient to deafen any person who stood
+near. Not far beyond this fall, the river was found to glide in a
+smooth channel, worn out of the rock; and at this place they
+constructed a bridge by which they passed to the other side, and
+entered into a country called Guema, which was so poor, that they
+could only get fruit and herbs to subsist upon. Travelling onwards
+from that place, they came to a district where the people had some
+degree of civilization, and wore cotton clothing of their own
+manufacture, and used canoes. They here built a brigantine, in which,
+and in some canoes, procured or taken from the natives, they embarked
+their sick, with their treasure, provisions, and spare apparel, under
+the charge of Francis de Orellana; while Gonsalvo Pizarro marched by
+land with the rest of the people along the river, going every night
+into the boats. In this manner they proceeded for about 200 leagues;
+when one night, on coming to the river side, in hopes of joining the
+boats as usual, Pizarro could not see or hear of them. He and his
+people were reduced, by this unfortunate incident, to a state of
+almost utter despair: In a strange, poor, and barren country, without
+provisions, clothing, or any other convenience, and at a vast
+distance from their friends, with a prodigious extent of difficult
+and dangerous road interposed between them and Quito, they were
+reduced to the necessity of eating their horses, and even their dogs.
+Yet holding a good heart, they proceeded onwards in their journey for
+eighteen months, penetrating, as is said, almost 500 leagues, without
+ever seeing the sun or any thing else to comfort them. At length, of
+the 200 men who had set out from Quito, only ten returned thither;
+and these so weak, ragged, and disfigured, that they could not be
+recognized. Orellana went 5 or 600 leagues down the river, passing
+through various countries and nations on both sides, among whom he
+affirmed that some were Amazons[94]. From the mouth of that river,
+Orellana went home to Spain, and excused himself for having deserted
+Pizarro, and those who marched by land, by alleging, that he had been
+forced down the river by the strength of the current, which he was
+utterly unable to stem. By some, this river is named after Orellana,
+who first navigated its waters; and others call it the river of the
+Amazons, on account of a female nation of warriors, who are said to
+inhabit its banks[95].</p>
+<blockquote>[94] It will be seen afterwards, in the account of the
+West India Islands, and the Continent of Guiana, that there are many
+warlike tribes of Caribs, or Caraibs, constantly engaged in predatory
+warfare; whose women, when their husbands are absent in search of
+prisoners for  <i>food</i> , take arms for the protection of themselves
+and children; whence they have been reported as nations of female
+warriors, or Amazons.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[95] Gomar. H.G.V. xxxvi.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1541, Don Stephen de Gama, the Portuguese governor of
+India, went with a squadron into the Red Sea, by the strait of Mecca,
+or of Babelmandel, and came to anchor off the island of Ma&ccedil;ua,
+or Massoua; from whence he sailed along the coast of Abyssinia, or
+Ethiopia, to the island of Suachem, in lat. 20&deg; N. and to the
+harbour of Cossier, in 27&deg;. From thence, he crossed over to the
+Arabian shore, and the city of Toro, and sailed from that place to
+Suez, at the farther end of the Red Sea, and returned from thence to
+India, having extended the Portuguese knowledge of that sea farther
+than had ever been done before. On the way between Cossier and Toro,
+Gama is said to have found an island of brimstone, which had been
+dispeopled by Mahomet, wherein many crabs are bred, which increase
+nature, on which account, they are much sought after by the
+unchaste.</p>
+<p>It is true that Lopez Suarez, when governor of India, had
+navigated the Red Sea, as far as Judda, the haven of Mecca, in lat.
+23&deg; N. 150 leagues from the straits of Babelmandel; but Gama
+penetrated to the very northern extremity of the gulph[96]. In the
+same year, Diego de Almagro killed the Marquis Francis Pizarro, and
+his brother Francis Martinez de Alcantara, in the city of Lima,
+or <i>de los Reyes</i> , and usurped the government of Peru.</p>
+<blockquote>[96] The true latitudes of the places mentioned in the
+text are, Suakim, 19&ordm; 30', Massoua, 15&ordm; 20', Cossier,
+26&deg; 16', Judda, 21&ordm; 20', Suez, 30&deg;. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year, 1541, Don Antony de Mend&ccedil;a, viceroy of
+Mexico, sent an army of Spaniards and Indians from Mexico, under the
+command of Francis Vasquez de Coronado, by way of Culiacan, into the
+province of Sibola, or Cinaloa, which is in lat. 30&deg; N.[97].
+Coronado endeavoured to treat on friendly terms with the natives, and
+requested to be furnished with provisions; but received for answer,
+that they were not accustomed to give any thing to those who came
+unto their country in a warlike manner. Upon this, the Spaniards
+assaulted and took the town, to which they gave the name of New
+Granada, because the general was a native of Granada in Old Spain.
+The soldiers found themselves much deceived by the reports of the
+friars who had been in those parts, as already mentioned under the
+year 1538, who said that the country was rich in gold, silver, and
+precious stones. Not being willing, therefore, to return empty-handed
+to Mexico, they went to the town of <i>Acuco</i> , where they heard
+of <i>Axa</i>  and <i>Quivira</i> , the king of which was reported to
+worship a golden cross, and the picture of the Queen of Heaven, or
+the blessed Virgin. In this journey, the Spaniards endured many
+hardships, but the Indians fled every where before them, and one
+morning, they found thirty of their horses had died during the night.
+From <i>Cicuic</i>  they went to <i>Quivira</i> , a distance of 200
+leagues in their estimation, the whole way being in a level country;
+and they marked their route by means of small hillocks of cow dung,
+that they might be the better able to find their way back. At one
+time they had a storm of hail, the hailstones being as large as
+oranges. At length they reached Quivira, where they found the
+King <i>Tatarax</i> , whose only riches consisted in a copper ornament,
+which he wore suspended from his neck. They saw neither cross, nor
+image of the virgin, nor any indication whatever of the Christian
+religion. This country, according to their report, was very thinly
+inhabited, more especially in its champaign or level parts, in which
+the whole people wandered about with their cattle, of which they have
+great abundance, living much in the same manner with the Arabs in
+Barbary, removing from place to place according to the seasons, in
+search of pastures for their cattle. The cattle belonging to these
+Indians are almost as large as horses, having large horns, and bear
+fleeces of wool like sheep, on which account the Spaniards gave them
+that name. They have abundance of another kind of oxen or cattle,
+very monstrous in their form having hunches on their backs like
+camels, with long beards, and long manes like horses. The Indians
+live by eating these oxen, and by drinking their blood, and clothe
+themselves in their skins. Most of their food is raw, or at least
+slightly roasted, as they have no pots in which to boil their food.
+They cut their meat with certain knives made of flint. Their fruits
+are damsons, hazel-nuts, melons, grapes, pines, and mulberries. They
+have dogs of such vast strength, that one of them will hold a bull,
+be he never so wild. When the Indians remove from place to place,
+these dogs carry their wives, children, and household stuff on their
+backs; and are so strong as to carry fifty pounds at once[98]. I omit
+many other circumstances of this expedition, because the plan I have
+prescribed requires brevity[99].</p>
+<blockquote>[97] The latitude of 30&deg; N. would lead to the idea of
+Sonora being the district, or province, indicated in the text by
+Sibola; Cinaloa is only in 26&deg; N. yet, from the context, appears
+to be the country intended by Galvano--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[98] The idea that a dog, even able to bear a load of
+fifty pounds, should carry a woman, is truly absurd. If there be any
+truth in the story, the dogs must have performed the services in the
+text by drawing sledges; yet nothing of the kind has hitherto been
+found in North America, though common in North-east
+Asia.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[99] Gomar. H.G. VI. xviii. and xix.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1542, when Diego de Frietas was in the port of Dodra,
+in the kingdom of Siam, three Portuguese of his crew deserted, and
+went in a junk towards China. The names of these men were, Antonio de
+Mota, Francis Zeimoro, and Antonio Pexoto; who directed their course
+for the city of Liampa, in lat. 30&deg; N. or upwards[100]. Having
+encountered a great storm, they were driven to a distance from land
+distance from land, and came in sight of an island far to the east,
+in lat. 32&deg; N. which they called Japan, and which seems to be the
+isle of Zipangri, mentioned by Marco Polo the Venetian, which in
+exceedingly rich in gold and silver, and other valuable
+commodities.</p>
+<blockquote>[100] In other writers Liampa and Siampa, or Tsiompa, are
+synonimous; but that place is in lat. 12&deg; N. The latitude of the
+text would lead us to the eastern coast of China, between Ningpo and
+Nankin.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year, 1542, Don Antonio de Mendo&ccedil;a, the viceroy
+of New Spain, sent certain sea captains and pilots to explore the
+Coast of Cape del Engannon, where a fleet, sent by Cortes, had been
+before. They sailed as far as the latitude 40&deg; N. when they came
+in sight of a range of mountains covered in snow, which they
+name <i>Sierras Nevadas</i> , or the snowy mountains in lat. 40&deg;N.
+They here met with certain merchant ships, which carried on their
+stems the images of a kind of birds called <i>Aleutarsi</i> , and had
+their yards gilded, and their bows laid over with silver. These
+seemed to belong to the islands of Japan or to China, as the people
+said that their country was within thirty days sail[101]. In the same
+year, the viceroy Mendo&ccedil;a sent a fleet of six ships, with 400
+Spanish soldiers, and as many Mexicans, under the command of his
+brother-in-law, Rui Lopez de Villa Lobos, a person in high
+estimation, to the Mindanao islands. They sailed on the eve of All
+Saints, from the harbour of Natividad, in lat. 20&deg;N. and shaping
+their course towards the west, they came in sight of the island of St
+Thomas, which had been before discovered by Hernando de Girijalva;
+and beyond that, in 17&deg;N, they got sight of another island, which
+they named  <i>La Nebulata</i>  or the Cloudy Island; and from thence,
+they came to another island, which they named <i>Roca Partalia</i> , or
+the cloven rock. On the 3rd. of December, they discovered certain
+shoals, having only six or seven fathoms water. On the fifteenth of
+the same month, they had sight of the islands which were discovered
+by Diego de Roca, Gomez de Sequieira, and Alvaro de Saavedra,
+called <i>Los Reyes</i>  or islands of the kings, because discovered on
+Twelfth day. And beyond these, they found a cluster of islands, in
+10&deg; of latitude, and came to an anchor in the midst of them,
+where they took in wood and water. In January 1548 leaving these
+islands, they came in sight of certain other islands, from which the
+natives came off to them, in a kind of boats, bearing crosses in
+their hands, and they saluted the mariners in the Spanish language,
+saying, <i>Buenos dias Matelotes</i> , or, good day companions. The
+Spaniards were much surprised at being thus accosted in their own
+language, and seeing such indications of Christianity, at no great a
+distance from Spain, not knowing that many of the natives in these
+parts had been baptised by Francis de Castro, at the command of me,
+Antonio Galvano, an formerly mentioned. From these unlooked- for
+circumstances, some of the Spaniards named these islands <i>Islas de
+los Cruzos</i> , or the Islands of Crosses and others called
+them <i>Islas de los Matelotes</i> , or the Islands of Companions[101].
+On the first of February, Ruy Lopez came in sight of the noble island
+of Mindanao, in 9&ordm; N.[102]. But he could neither double that
+inland, owing to contrary winds, nor would the natives permit him to
+come to anchor on their coast, because the five or six christened
+kings and their people had promised obedience to me Antonio Galvano,
+and were unwilling to incur my displeasure. On this account, and
+constrained by contrary winds, Lopez sailed along the coast in quest
+of a place of safety; and, in four or five degrees of latitude, he
+found a small island called Sarangam by the natives, which he took
+possession of by force, and named it Antonio after the viceroy of
+Mexico. Ruy Lopez, and his people remained here a whole year, during
+which many things occurred worth notice; but as these are treated of
+in other histories, I refrain from mentioning them, confining myself
+entirely to discoveries.</p>
+<blockquote>[101] Gomez, H. G. VI. xviii. This story, which Galvano
+has reported from Genoa, seems altogether unworthy of
+credit.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[102] The Matelots are laid down in our modern maps, in
+lat. 9&deg; N. Long 137&deg; E. not far E.N.E. of the Pelew, or
+Pillelew islands.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the month of August of the same year, 1548, Ruy Lopez, sent
+Bartholomew de la Torre in a small ship to New Spain, to acquaint the
+viceroy of his proceedings. Torre went first to the islands
+named <i>Siria, Gaonala, Bisaia</i> , and many others, in 11&deg; and
+12&deg; N. lat. where Magellan and de Castro had both been formerly,
+and where the latter baptized many of the natives; and the Spaniards
+called these the <i>Phillipinas</i> , in honour of the prince of
+Spain[104]. In these islands Torre procured provisions, and wood and
+water, whence he sailed for several days with a fair wind, edging
+towards the north-east, till he came right under the tropic of
+Cancer. On the 25th of September, they came in sight of certain
+islands, which they named <i>Malabrigos</i> , or the evil roads; beyond
+which they discovered <i>Las dos Hermanas</i> , or the Two Sisters; and
+beyond these again, four islands which they called <i>las
+Volcanes</i> . On the second of October they came in sight
+of <i>Farfana</i> , beyond which there is a high pointed rock, which
+throws up fire in five places. Sailing in this manner, for some time,
+in 16&deg; of north latitude, they were obliged by continual contrary
+winds, to bear up again for the Philippine islands, and in their way
+back, had sight of six or seven additional islands, but did not
+anchor at any of them. They found also an archipelago, or numerous
+cluster of islands, in 15 or 16 degrees of north latitude, well
+inhabited by a white people, with beautiful well-proportioned women,
+and much better clothed than in any other of the islands of these
+parts; and they had many golden ornaments, which was a sure sign that
+there was some of that metal in their country. These people likewise
+had barks or vessels of forty-three cubits long, by two fathoms and a
+half in breadth, constructed of planks five inches broad, and which
+were rowed with oars. The people told the Spaniards that they were in
+use to sail in these vessels to China, which was not above five or
+six days sail from thence, and offered to supply them with pilots, if
+they were inclined to go thither. Several of these barks, handsomely
+decked, came off to the Spanish ship, in which the master, and other
+principal people, sat on a high platform, while the rowers sat
+underneath, who were  <i>blackamoors</i>  or negroes with frizzled
+hair. Being asked whence they had these negroes, they answered that
+they were brought from certain islands near Sebut, where there were
+abundance to be had. The Spaniards wondered much at finding negroes
+in this place, being above 300 leagues from the nearest land of the
+negroes. It is therefore probable that these people were not
+originally natives of this part of the world; but that they have been
+scattered somehow in various places over the circuit of the earth, as
+they are found in the islands of Nicobar and Andaman, in the bay of
+Bengal. From thence, for the space of 500 leagues, we do not know of
+any other black people: Yet Vasco Nunnez de Valboa pretends to have
+discovered them, when he went to explore the coast of the South Sea,
+in a country which he named <i>Quareca</i> ; but there never were any
+found in New Spain, Castilia del Oro, or in Peru.</p>
+<blockquote>[103] This great inland of Mindanao, to the south of the
+Philippines, reaches from 9&deg; 30' N. to 5&deg; 30', and from long.
+122&deg; to 126&deg; 20' E. being about 300 miles long, by 270 miles
+broad.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[104] The Philippines, exclusive of Mindanao and Palawa,
+extend from Lat. 9&deg; to 18&ordm; 40' both N. and are in E. long.
+122&ordm; but their present geographical names, Luzon, Samar, Leyte,
+Zebu, Negros, Pany, Mindora, and several other smaller isles, have no
+resemblance whatever with those of the text.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1544, Don Gutierre de Vargas, bishop of Placenza, the
+cousin of Mendo&ccedil;a, sent a fleet from Seville to the straits of
+Magellan, instigated by the advice of the viceroy. Some said that
+this fleet was destined for the Moluccas, others for China, and
+others again, that it was meant only to explore the coast from the
+straits along Chili to Peru. However this may have been, the fleet
+was unable, from contrary winds, to get through the straits, except
+one small bark which got into the South Sea, and sailed along the
+whole coast, till it came to <i>Chirimai</i>  and  <i>Arequipa</i> ,
+which is above 500 leagues, which were now explored; all the rest of
+the coast having been formerly discovered by Diego de Almagro,
+Francis Pizarro, and their people, at various times[105].</p>
+<blockquote>[105] Gomar. H.G. IV. xiv.</blockquote>
+<p>In January of the year 1545, Ruy Lopez de Villa Lobos, formerly
+mentioned, came with his Spaniards to the isle of <i>Moro</i> [106],
+and the city of  <i>Camato</i> , where he was well received by the
+kings of Gilolo and Tidore, and the people of the country; for I,
+Antonio Galvano, had then left the Moluccas; and they put the
+governor Don George de Castro to much trouble, and great expence. In
+the same year, 1545, Ruy Lopez de Villa Lobos, sent another ship from
+Tidore for New Spain, under the command of Ignatius Ortez de Rotha,
+and having Jaspar Rico as pilot, with orders to attempt the passage
+by the south side of the line. Ortez sailed to the coast of Papua,
+which he explored; and, as he knew not that Saavedra had been there
+formerly, he challenged the credit and honour of the discovery.
+Finding the natives of a black colour, with frizzled hair, he named
+the country on that account New Guinea. Thus, the memory of Saavedra
+was then almost lost, as every thing is apt to fall into oblivion,
+unless put upon record, and illustrated by writing.</p>
+<blockquote>[106] Probably Morty, the most north-easterly of the
+Moluccas.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In June of this year, 1545, one Pedro Fidalgo, a Portuguese,
+sailed in a junk from the city of Borneo; but being driven to the
+north by contrary winds, he fell in with a large island, the south
+extremity of which lay in nine or ten degrees of north latitude,
+while it stretched to lat. 22&deg; N. at its other end, which is
+called the island of Lu&ccedil;ones, from the name of the nation by
+which it is inhabited. Perhaps it may have some other name, of which,
+as yet, we have not been informed. This island runs from the north
+for a great way directly south, and then takes a turn towards the
+south-east. It is said that Fidalgo sailed for 250 leagues along the
+coast of this island, which is in the midway-between Mindanao and
+China, and he reported that the land was fruitful, and well clothed
+with trees and verdure; and that the inhabitants will give two pezoes
+of gold for one of silver, although so near China, in which the
+relative value of these metals is so well understood.</p>
+<p>In the year 1553, certain ships were sent out from England, which
+sailed to the northward, along the coast of Norway and Finmark, and
+from thence east, in seventy or eighty degrees of north latitude,
+till they came to Muscovy, to which country one of the ships
+penetrated; but I have not been able to learn what became of the
+rest. From the land of Muscovy, a ship may sail eastwards to Tartary,
+at the farthest extremity of which China is situated. It is reported
+that there is a wall above 200 leagues in length, between Tartary and
+China, in about lat. 50&deg; N.</p>
+<p>From all the preceding discoveries, it may be concluded, that, as
+the whole earth is 360 degrees, and the ancient writers allow 17-1/2
+leagues for every degree, the entire circuit of the earth would thus
+be 6300 leagues; but as, in my opinion, each degree is exactly
+seventeen leagues, the circuit will then be only 6120 leagues.
+However this may be, the whole circuit of the globe has been
+discovered and sailed over, from east to west, even almost as it is
+encompassed and visited by the sun in its diurnal course. It is quite
+otherwise, however, in respect to the northern, and southern parts of
+the earth. For, towards the north pole, there has only been
+discovered hitherto to the latitude of 77&deg; or 78&deg;, which make
+an extent of 1347 leagues; and between the equinoctial and the south
+pole, there has only been discovered to the latitude of 52&deg; or
+53&deg; south, or to the Straits of Magellan; which amounts to no
+more than 960 leagues. Now, adding these two together, their sum is
+just 2257 leagues: And, deducting this sum from 6300 leagues, there
+still remains to be discovered, in the north and south, 4043
+leagues.</p>
+<h2><a name="chapter2-2" id="chapter2-2">CHAPTER II.</a></h2>
+<p><b> <i>The journey of Ambrose Contarini, ambassador from the
+republic of Venice to Uzun-hassan, king of Persia, in the years 1473,
+4, 5, and. 6, written by himself.</i> </b></p>
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+<p>This relation of a journey into Persia, between the years 1473 and
+1477, is from a collection of voyages and travels, principally in
+Asia, made in the <i>twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth</i> ,
+and <i>fifteenth centuries</i> , which was published at the Hague, in
+the French language, in 1735. That collection usually goes under the
+name of <i>Bergeron</i> , whose name appears on the title somewhat
+equivocally as the author; but who is mentioned in the advertisement
+as a writer belonging to the middle of the preceding century; and the
+only part of the work that can, be attributed to him, is a <i>Treatise
+of Navigation, and of the Modern Voyages of Discovery and Conquest,
+especially those made by the French, &amp;c.</i>  which serves as an
+introduction to this compilement. The editor of this collection gives
+no account of himself, or of the sources from whence he has derived
+his different articles; and only says, that the journal of Contarini
+was translated into French, that it might be published along with the
+other contents of his volume. From the <i>Bibliotheque Universelle des
+Voyages</i> , by G. Boucher de la Richarderie, a new work of great
+research, published at Paris in 1808, we learn that the journal of
+Contarini was published in Italian at Venice, in a duodecimo volume,
+in 1543. So far as is known to us, it now appears for the first time
+in an English translation. This article might have been more aptly
+placed towards the close of <i>first</i>  part of the present
+collection, but escaped notice in proper time and it appears of too
+much importance, both in itself, and as an early document, to be
+omitted from punctilious attention to rigid systematic
+arrangement.</p>
+<p>PREFACE OF THE AUTHOR.</p>
+<p>"The illustrious republic of Venice, having done me the honour to
+appoint me ambassador to Uzun-Hassan, king of Persia, I accepted the
+employment with much pleasure, both that I might do acceptable
+service to my own country and for the general good of Christendom. I
+neither considered the difficulties nor the dangers of the journey,
+but placed my trust solely on the assistance of God; preferring the
+interests of my country, and of the Christian world, to my own ease
+and safety. On purpose to render my discoveries useful to the public,
+I have carefully and briefly recorded every circumstance deserving of
+attention, that occurred during my long and laborious journey; as
+relative to the provinces, cities, and places through which I
+travelled, and the manners and customs of the different nations among
+whom I sojourned. In short, I have omitted nothing deserving of
+notice, that occurred during my three years journey, having left
+Venice on the first day of Lent, in the year 1473, and having
+returned to my beloved country on the 24th of February in the year
+1476[1]."</p>
+<blockquote>[1] In the latter part of this journey, the date of his
+return to Venice is the 10th of April.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+<p> <i>The Ambassador, after passing through Germany, Poland, Russia,
+and the Tartarian Deserts, or Upper European Sarmatia, arrives at
+Caffa or Theodosia.</i> </p>
+<p>I left Venice on the 23d of February, in the year 1473,
+accompanied by the venerable priest Stephen Testa, who acted as my
+chaplain and secretary, and by Demetrius de Seze, my interpreter,
+together with two servants, Maffei de Bergamo, and John Ungaretti,
+all of us disguised in ordinary German dresses, our money being
+concealed in the clothes of Stephen Testa. We went by water in the
+first place to the church of <i>St Michael in Murano</i> , where we
+heard mass, and received the benediction of the prior; after which,
+we mounted our horses, which were there in waiting, and reached
+Treviso[2] the same day. I anxiously wished to have procured some
+person to accompany us on the journey who knew the road, but could
+not meet with any, nor could I even procure a guide for hire. Leaving
+Treviso on the 24th, we arrived that day at Cogiensi, now called
+Cornegliano[3]; and knowing the dangers and difficulties we must
+experience during our long journey, we here confessed, and partook of
+the holy sacrament of the eucharist, after which we resumed our
+journey. We fortunately overtook a German, named Sebastian, who said
+he knew me and the object of my journey, and offered to keep us
+company to Nuremburgh. I gladly accepted of this person as a
+companion of our journey, inwardly thanking God for affording us a
+guide. We continued our journey to the frontiers of Germany, passing
+through several cities and castles, belonging to different princes
+and bishops, vassals of the empire, among which the city of Augsburg
+seemed one of the most beautiful. Not far from that place our German
+companion, Sebastian, left us, taking the road for Francfort. We
+parted from him with many embraces, giving him thanks for his
+numerous attentions, and mutually wishing each other a good
+journey.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Called Tarvisin, in the original.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] Called Conigiano, in the edition of
+Bergeron.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Having procured a new guide, we arrived at Nuremburg on the 10th
+of March. This is a fine city, having a river running through the
+middle of it, and is defended by an excellent citadel. While here, I
+inquired of my landlord if there were any travellers going our way.
+He informed me that there were two ambassadors from the king of
+Poland then in the city, who, he was certain, would be happy to
+receive a visit from me. I therefore sent my chaplain, Stephen Testa,
+to inform these gentlemen of my being in Nuremburg, and of the
+purpose of my journey, and of my desire to pay them a visit. They
+received my message with much civility, and I accordingly went to
+wait upon them. These gentlemen were counsellors of state to his
+Polish Majesty, one of whom was an archbishop, and the other a
+knight, named Paul. After mutual compliments, I informed them that I
+proposed paying my respects to their sovereign, and was furnished
+with a passport. Notwithstanding the sorry equipage in which I
+travelled, they received me with much honour. I remained four days in
+Nuremburg, during which I formed a friendly intimacy with the Polish
+ambassadors, and then resumed my journey in their company, being
+likewise accompanied by an ambassador belonging to the king of
+Bohemia, eldest son of the king of Poland.</p>
+<p>Departing from Nuremburg on the 14th of March, now nearly sixty
+horsemen in company, we crossed through Germany, always lodging in
+good cities or castles, some of which were extremely beautiful, both
+in respect to their situation and the excellence of their
+fortifications; but I omit describing them, as they are well known to
+travellers. The journey across Germany took us twelve days, during
+which we passed through the greater part of the dominions of the
+Maregrave of Brandenburg, and arrived at the imperial city of
+Francfort, a tolerably good and well fortified city on the Oder. We
+rested here till the 29th of March. As this city is near the confines
+of Poland, we had an escort of cavalry belonging to the Maregrave of
+Brandenburg, which accompanied us to the frontiers. These soldiers
+were well mounted and armed, and marched in good order. On the last
+day of March we arrived at Miedzyrzyez[4], which is a small city, but
+strong and pleasant, and is the first place on the frontiers of
+Poland. From that place till we reached <i>Stragone</i> , or Poznan,
+which took us three days journey, we saw no place worth notice.
+Poznan is particularly remarkable on account of a great fair, which
+is resorted to by many merchants. Leaving Poznan on the 3d of April,
+we arrived on the 9th at Lenczycz[5], where Casimir, king of Poland,
+then resided. In this journey we found neither cities nor
+considerable castles, and had much reason to remember Germany with
+regret, both on account of bad lodgings and every other circumstance.
+When my arrival was announced to the king, he sent two of his
+gentlemen to wait upon me, who assigned me a tolerably commodious
+lodging. Next day being Easter, when no business of any kind is
+transacted, I rested after the fatigues of the journey. On the
+following morning the king sent me a robe of black damask, according
+to the custom of the country, that I might go to court, which I did,
+accompanied by several persons of distinction, and had the honour to
+pay my respects to the king, according to the ceremonies of that
+court; after which I presented the letters of our illustrious
+republic to his majesty, and explained to him the nature of my
+commission. The king was pleased to invite me to dinner, which was
+served much in the same manner as with us, the dishes being in great
+abundance, and well dressed. As soon as dinner was over, I asked
+permission to retire, which was accordingly granted. Two days
+afterwards I was again sent for to court, when the king gave orderly
+answers to all the proposals which I had made in the name of our
+republic, and with so much benevolent attention towards me, that I
+learned by experience that he justly deserved the character of the
+best king who had reigned in Poland for a great many years. He was
+pleased to appoint me two guides, one of whom was to accompany me
+through Poland, and the other through lower Russia, to Kiow[6], or
+Magrano, which is the key of the kingdom. I humbly thanked his
+majesty in the name of the republic, and took my leave.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] This small city stands on a small river which runs
+into the Werta, at the western extremity of what was Poland, about
+sixty-seven miles from Poznan. It is called Messaricie in the
+original.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] Lausicie in the original.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] Named Chio in the original. The second name, Magrano,
+is afterwards called Magraman by Contarini, or his French
+translator.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>I left Lenczycz on the 14th of April, on my journey through
+Poland, which is a flat country, ornamented with many forests; but
+the great want of convenient lodgings is a sure proof that it is not
+very fertile, nor much abounding in the necessaries of life. On the
+19th I arrived at Lublin, a tolerable city, defended by a citadel.
+The three sons of the king resided there at this time for their
+education. The eldest of these princes was about fourteen years of
+age, and the two others considerably younger. Learning that they
+wished to see me, providing that their father had not forbidden, I
+waited upon them, and was received with much politeness, the eldest
+conversing with me in the most obliging manner, and I observed that
+they behaved with much respect to their preceptor. I took my leave of
+them, returning thanks for their civilities, and they parted from me
+with as much courtesy as I had experienced in my reception. Leaving
+Lublin, and continuing our journey through Poland, we arrived on the
+20th of April in lower Russia, which is subject to the king of
+Poland. In this part of our journey we travelled five whole days
+through thick woods, and, except meeting with a very few castles, we
+lodged for the most part in country houses. On the 25th, we came to a
+town named <i>Jusch</i> , which is defended by a wooden castle. We
+rested here for some time, yet not without danger, as the inhabitants
+were quite mad with drunkenness, on account of celebrating certain
+marriages. This country produces no wine, but the natives prepare a
+liquor from honey, which is stronger and more intoxicating even than
+wine. Leaving this place, we came to another village
+named <i>Aitomir</i> , in which likewise there is a wooden castle.
+During the whole of our journey of the 29th, we travelled through
+forests, in constant danger of robbers who infested all the roads,
+and we knew not where to pass the night, or to procure any
+refreshments, insomuch that we had to sleep in the woods, keeping
+strict watch lest we might be surprised by the banditti. On the 30th
+of April we reached <i>Belligraoch</i> , which signifies
+the <i>white</i>  fort, where we were lodged in the royal palace, and
+passed the night with much inconvenience.</p>
+<p>On the first of May we reached the city of <i>Kiow</i> [7], or
+Magraman. The governor of this city, which stands beyond the
+frontiers of Polish Russia, was a Polander and Catholic,
+named <i>Pamartin</i> . Immediately on learning my arrival from the
+guides sent along with me by the king, he appointed me a lodging,
+which was sufficiently small, considering the size of the city. He
+here visited me, and sent me a sufficient supply of provisions. This
+city serves as a barrier or frontier garrison against the Tartars,
+and is celebrated for a great fair, to which the merchants bring rich
+furs, and other goods from Upper Russia. From hence the merchants
+travel in a large caravan to Caffa or Theodosia in the Crimea; but
+are often surprised and very ill treated by the Tartars during their
+journey. The country about Kiow abounds in grain and cattle. The
+inhabitants of this place occupy the whole day in their affairs till
+three o'clock, employing all the rest, till night, in drinking and
+quarrels, the natural consequence of drunkenness. On the day of my
+arrival, governor Pamartin sent some of his gentlemen to invite me to
+dinner, which I accepted with as much politeness as I could express.
+He received me very honourably, offering me every service in his
+power, in the most obliging manner; saying, that he was ordered by
+the king of Poland to treat me in every thing as well as possible; on
+which I thanked him for his polite attentions, and endeavoured to
+recommend myself to his friendship. From him I was informed that he
+was in daily expectation of the arrival of an ambassador from
+Lithuania, going with presents to the prince of the Tartars, who was
+to have an escort of 200 Tartar horse; and, if I were inclined to
+take advantage of this opportunity, by which means I should travel in
+much greater safety, I had better wait the arrival of this
+ambassador. I accepted of this offer most willingly; and we then sat
+down to a magnificent entertainment; at which the bishop of Kiow, who
+was brother to the governor, and many other persons of consequence
+were present. We wanted nothing which could contribute to make the
+dinner pleasant. Good company, good cheer, and music during the
+repast. The only circumstance I did not like was, that it lasted too
+long; as I had more need for sleep and rest, after my fatiguing
+journey, than of all the good cheer that could be offered. In
+consequence, as soon as dinner was ended, I took my leave, and
+retired to my lodgings in the city; the governor living in the
+castle, which is only of wood. The city of Kiow stands on the river
+named anciently Boristhenes, and Danambre by the natives, which we
+Italians call Lerissa, and which falls into the Euxine.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] Named Chio in the original, but which must
+necessarily be Kiow, or Kieu, now belonging to Russia. The three
+formerly mentioned stages Jusch, Aitomir, and Belligraoch, must
+either be villages of too little importance to find a place in
+geographical maps, or their names are so corrupted as to be
+unintelligible. The direct road from Lublin to Kiow, passes through
+the palatinates of Russia, Wolhynia, and Kiow, provinces of ci-devant
+Poland, now annexed to the Russian empire.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the 10th of May[8], the ambassador of Lithuania arrived; and,
+as he was to set out next day after mass, I went to pay him my
+compliments, accompanied by M. Pamartin; who directed him, on the
+part of the king of Poland, to take care of me, and to conduct me in
+perfect safety to Theodosia. To this the ambassador answered, that he
+had every respect for the orders of his majesty, the sovereign
+arbiter of his life and death, and would carefully obey his orders. I
+thanked M. Pamartin for all his kindnesses, as he had frequently
+visited me, and had supplied me with every thing I needed for
+subsistence during my stay; and, as some token of my gratitude, I
+made him a present of a tolerably good German horse, which had
+carried me hitherto. We here parted with the rest of our horses,
+which were quite unfit for our farther use, and procured horses of
+the country for the remainder of our journey; and, on parting with
+the guides who had accompanied us to Kiow by orders of the king, I
+rewarded them for their attention and good conduct.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] The original says April, but attention to the context
+distinctly points out this necessary correction.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>I left Kiow on the 11th of May, along with the Lithuanian
+ambassador; and as I was unable to travel on horseback, on account of
+pains in my feet, I travelled in a carriage, which had served me for
+that purpose ever since I left the king of Poland at Lenczycz. The
+first place we came to was  <i>Cerca</i> , belonging to the king of
+Poland, where we waited till the 15th, for the Tartar horse who came
+to escort us on our journey. After their arrival we set out on our
+journey through the great desert of Tartary, and came to the
+Boristhenes, which separates Tartary from Russia, and which is some
+miles broad[9]. As it was necessary to pass the river, our Tartars
+cut down some trees, the stems of which they fastened together into a
+raft, which was covered over by the branches, and upon which the
+whole of our baggage was placed. They fastened their horses by the
+tails to this raft, by which means it was dragged across the river,
+they themselves swimming along-side of their horses, and holding by
+their manes. We had likewise to swim our horses across, in which we
+succeeded, by the blessing of God, but in much fear and danger at
+this, to us, unusual mode of navigation. When we got over, we had to
+remain a whole day on the other side to collect and replace our
+baggage.</p>
+<blockquote>[9] From this circumstance it evidently appears that the
+journey from Kiow had hitherto been on the right or west of the
+Dnieper or Boristhenes, through the country of the Nogais Tartars,
+now forming the western portion of the Russian province of
+Catharinoslau; and we may suppose the wide part of that river they
+had now to cross to have been somewhere about
+Cherson.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>While among the Tartars, their officers eyed me with much
+attention and suspicion; and, during our new journey through the
+desert beyond the river, the Lithuanian ambassador informed me, by
+means of the interpreter, that the Tartar officers had come to a
+resolution to carry me to their prince, as they could not allow a
+person of my appearance to go on to Theodosia without his permission.
+I was much alarmed by this intelligence, believing that I should
+incur considerable risk of having the purposes of my journey
+frustrated by this measure, and, therefore, earnestly recommended to
+the ambassador to keep in mind the orders he had received on the part
+of the king of Poland respecting me, and the promises he had made to
+Pamartin; and I promised to make a present of a sword to the
+interpreter if he succeeded to extricate me from my embarrassment.
+The interpreter reported my fears and wishes to the ambassador, who
+succeeded, after drinking with the Tartars, in persuading them that I
+was of Genoa; and, by means of a present of fifteen ducats, he
+obtained permission for me to go direct for Theodosia. Our journey
+through the desert continued till the 9th of June, during which we
+suffered many hardships, having, at one time, been a whole day and
+night without water. At length it became necessary for us to part
+company, the Lithuanian ambassador and his escort taking the direct
+road to Bachiserai[10], at which place the prince of the Tartars
+resided. On this occasion, a Tartar was appointed to be our guide to
+Theodosia, and we parted from the escort, not without considerable
+apprehensions of some sudden attack from the Tartars, yet much
+satisfied at getting rid of that crew, for they smelt so abominably,
+from feeding on horse flesh, that it was quite intolerable to come
+near them.</p>
+<blockquote>[10] Named Arcercheriher in the French translation of
+Contarini; but which must necessarily be some corruption of
+Baschiserai, the residence of the khan of the Crim
+Tartars.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Our whole company passed the ensuing night in carts covered with
+skins, in which we were soon surrounded by a great number of persons,
+inquiring who we were. On being informed by our Tartar guide that I
+was of Genoa, they supplied us with milk, and left us. Resuming our
+journey next morning early, we arrived that day, which was the 16th
+of June, at the suburbs of Theodosia, otherwise called Kaffa. Filled
+with gratitude for our preservation through so many dangers, we went
+privately into a church to give thanks to God for our safe arrival;
+and from thence I sent my interpreter to inform the Venetian consul
+of my arrival. He immediately sent his brother to wait upon me,
+advising me to remain where I was till night, when he carried me
+privately to a house belonging to him in the same suburb, where I was
+exceedingly well received. I here found Paulus Omnibamus, who had
+left Venice three months before me, under the orders of our
+illustrious republic.</p>
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+<p> <i>Contarini, leaving Kaffa, crosses the Euxine to the city of
+Phasis, whence he pursues his journey through Mingrelia, Georgia, and
+part of Armenia, into Persia</i> .</p>
+<p>It is impossible for me to give any exact description of the city
+of Kaffa, or Theodosia, or of its government, as the danger of
+incurring suspicion obliged me to remain continually at home; on
+which account I can only mention such particulars as I learned from
+others. It is situated on the Euxine, and is celebrated for a great
+fair, which is much frequented, on which account the city is very
+populous, and is said to be very rich and powerful. I hired a vessel
+belonging to Anthony Valdat, which lay in the Palus Meotis, to carry
+me to the city of <i>Phasis</i> . When I was ready to embark, I met
+with two Armenians, one of whom had been on an embassy to Rome, from
+Uzun Hassan, and was persuaded by them to prefer disembarking
+at <i>Tina</i> , about an hundred miles from Trebisond, instead of
+Phasis, alleging that from Tina it was only four hours journey to a
+castle named  <i>Arrius</i> , which depended upon the king of Persia,
+and promising to conduct us to that place in safety. Although I was
+by no means satisfied with this advice, I allowed myself to be guided
+by the consul and his brother, who agreed in opinion with the
+Armenians. I accordingly left Kaffa on the 4th of June[1],
+accompanied by the consul, who went with me to the river, where our
+vessel was in waiting. I had formerly agreed with the master for our
+passage to Phasis at seventy ducats, but on occasion of the change in
+our destination, I was now obliged to pay an hundred. Being aware
+that I should not be able to meet with any person to serve us at the
+place we were going to, I used the precaution to hire nine men from
+Kaffa, to assist the mariners of our vessel, and to procure
+provisions for us in our journey through Georgia and Mingrelia.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] We have already seen that it was the 16th of that
+month when Contarini arrived at Kaffa. Much confusion has occurred in
+the dates of this journey, which we have no means of correcting, and
+must, therefore, be contented with them as they are--E.</blockquote>
+<p>We embarked on the 15th of June, and made sail across the Euxine,
+direct for Tina, but had hardly got twenty miles on our voyage, when
+a contrary wind sprung up from the east. Observing the mariners
+consulting together in an extraordinary manner, I became curious to
+know the purpose of their discourse. Accordingly, one Bernard, the
+brother-in-law of our captain, said to me that he understood we
+proposed going to Tina, but advised me by no means to do so; as a
+certain <i>Subassa</i>  roamed about that neighbourhood with a band of
+cavalry, who would certainly make us slaves if we fell into his
+hands. On this advice I changed my purpose, and the wind becoming
+more favourable, we made sail for Liasi and Phasis, and arrived
+at <i>Varsi</i>  on the 29th of June, where I disembarked my horses and
+baggage, and sent them from thence by land to Phasis, which is sixty
+miles from that place.  <i>Varsi</i>  is a castle, with a small village
+in Mingrelia, belonging to a lord named <i>Gorbola</i> , to whom
+likewise <i>Caltichea</i> [2], a place of small importance on the coast
+of the Euxine, is subject. The inhabitants of this country are very
+miserable, and the only productions are hemp, wax, and silk.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] The names of places in this journal are so corrupted
+as to be often quite unintelligible. Varsi may possibly be Vardon, in
+the district to the northwest of Mingrelia, named Abkhas; and
+Caltichea may perhaps be Sulhuali, a sea port about 30 miles to the
+east. Phasis probably refers to some town on the river of that name,
+perhaps Subastei.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the 1st of July we arrived near Phasis, followed by a vessel
+filled with Mingrelians, who seemed all to be fools or drunk.
+Quitting the vessel, we went up the river in a boat, passing an
+island in the mouth of the river, where Oetes, the father of Medea
+the enchantress, is said to have reigned. On this island we spent the
+night, and were sadly infested by midges. Next day we went up the
+river in the boat, passing the city of Asso, which stands on its
+banks in the midst of a forest. I here found one Nicholas Capella, of
+Modena, who commanded in these parts, and a Circassian woman named
+Martha, who had been the slave of a person of Genoa, but was now
+married. This Martha received me with much kindness, and with her I
+staid two days. Phasis is a city of Mingrelia, subject to prince
+Bendian, whose dominions extend only about three days journey in
+length. The country is very mountainous, and full of forests. The
+inhabitants are so fierce and savage, that they might be accounted
+wild beasts. Their principal drink is beer; they have some corn and
+wine, but in very small quantities; boiled millet being their
+ordinary food, which is a very poor kind of nourishment. They
+sometimes procure wine and salted fish from Trebisond, and import
+salt from Kaffa, without which they could not exist. Their only
+productions consist in a small quantity of hemp and wax. If they were
+industrious, they might procure abundance of fish, which are very
+numerous in their river. They are Christians, according to the Greek
+ritual, to which they have added many gross superstitions.</p>
+<p>I left Phasis on the 4th of July, accompanied by Nicholas Capella,
+and crossed the river <i>Mare</i>  on a float. That day and the next,
+we travelled through a considerable portion of Mingrelia, always
+among woods and mountains. Towards the evening of the 5th, we came to
+the habitation of prince Bendian, whom we found, with all his court,
+reclining on a plain, under the shade of some trees. I sent Nicholas
+Capella to inform him of my quality, and to ask permission to pay him
+my respects, which was accordingly granted. I saluted him, therefore,
+with great respect, as he sat on the ground with his wife and
+children, and he made me sit down beside him. After explaining the
+purpose of my journey, I requested he would have the goodness to
+appoint me a guide. He expressed his satisfaction at my arrival in
+his dominions, and granted my request. He afterwards sent me some
+bread, a piece of beef, and the head of a sow, but so under done,
+that it required the extreme necessity in which we then were to
+induce us to eat of his provisions; but when we cannot get what we
+like, we must put up with what can be had. We had to wait a whole day
+for the promised guide. The plain in which we found prince Bendian,
+is surrounded by very fine trees, resembling box, but much more
+lofty. The prince seemed about fifty years of age, and had a
+tolerably handsome countenance, but his manners were perfectly
+ridiculous.</p>
+<p>On the 7th of July we continued our journey, always among woods
+and mountains, and next day passed the river which divides Mingrelia
+from Georgia, having to pass the night in the open air, and, what was
+worse, we had nothing to eat. On the 9th, we arrived at a small city
+named  <i>Cotachis</i> [3], which is defended by a stone fort, and
+where we saw a temple that seemed very ancient. We had here to pass a
+bridge over a large river, before reaching the plain in which the
+huts of Plangion, king of Georgia, are situated. The fort and city of
+Cotachis belong to Plangion. I waited upon the commander of this
+place who invited me to dinner. He was seated on the ground, on which
+I, and those of my suite who accompanied me, and some friends of the
+governor, all sat down. Before us was laid a greasy skin, on which
+they served us with bread, radishes, some flesh, and other execrable
+articles with which I was not acquainted. They continually offered me
+wine in large goblets, to fill me drunk, according to their
+abominable customs, as they are as foolish and beastly as the
+Mingrelians. Finding that I would not join them in deep drinking,
+they held me in great contempt, insomuch that I found it extremely
+difficult to get leave to retire and to continue my journey. But at
+length they brought me a guide to conduct me to the king of
+Georgia.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] Probably Cutais in Imeritia, on the river
+Riene.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>I left Cotachis on the 12th of July; and, after travelling the
+whole day through woods and mountains, we rested for the night in a
+meadow at the foot of a mountain, near a castle
+named <i>Scandes</i> [4], in which king  <i>Pangrates</i> [5] resides. My
+guide here left me on purpose to inform the king of my arrival;
+promising to return immediately with another guide to serve me during
+the rest of the journey. We had accordingly to pass the whole night
+in the wood, starving of hunger, and full of anxiety. The guide came
+back early in the morning, accompanied by two of the kings
+secretaries, who informed me that the king was gone to Cotachis, and
+had ordered them to make an inventory of all our baggage, and of
+every thing we had about us; after which we should be provided with a
+passport, to travel free from payment of any duties through the whole
+country. They proceeded accordingly in their examination and
+inventory with the most rigorous exactness, even noting down the very
+shirts we then wore. After this they ordered me to mount my horse,
+and to go along with them to the king, leaving all my people behind.
+I used my best endeavours to be excused from this; but, instead of
+listening to me, they loaded me with insolence; and the only favour I
+could obtain, and that with the utmost difficulty, was permission to
+take my interpreter along with me. We accordingly resumed our
+journey, without meat or drink, and arrived much fatigued at Cotachis
+towards night; where my interpreter and me were left all night to our
+repose under a tree, where, indeed, they sent us some bread and
+fish.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Perhaps Sarassan, about forty miles S. E. from
+Cutais.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] Apparently the same prince named Plangion a little
+before.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The remainder of my people were taken to a miserable village,
+where they were left in charge of the priest; and our mutual anxiety
+may be easily guessed.</p>
+<p>Next morning I was carried before the king, whom I found sitting
+on the ground in a hut, surrounded by several of his nobles. After
+paying my respects, he asked me a great number of questions, and
+among the rest, how many kings there were in the world? It came into
+my fancy to answer that there were twelve. On which he signified that
+I was right, and that he was one of the number; and that he was much
+surprised that I should come into his dominions without bringing him
+a letter from my sovereign. To this I answered, that when I left my
+own country, I did not expect to travel through his dominions,
+otherwise my sovereign would assuredly have given me letters in
+charge for his majesty; and with this answer he seemed satisfied. He
+asked many other extraordinary questions, from which I conjectured
+that my guide had maliciously represented me as carrying many
+valuable things; and it is probable, if this had been the case, that
+I had never been allowed to escape out of their hands. The royal
+secretaries endeavoured to persuade me that I ought to make the king
+a present of any article that might strike his fancy among my small
+baggage; but I got off without making any present, except
+compliments, and requesting him to appoint some one to conduct me
+through his dominions. This he was pleased to promise, as likewise to
+give me a free passport, without paying any duties, as I carried no
+merchandize. Accordingly, I took my leave of the king on the 14th of
+July, returning to the tree I formerly mentioned as my lodging, where
+the secretary brought me the promised passport and a guide. I then
+returned to my people at the village where they were kept in my
+absence, and was received with much joy, as the priest had
+represented the king as the cruellest tyrant in the world. My people
+could not contain themselves for excess of joy at my safe return, and
+even the miserable priest was so touched at the scene, that he
+provided us with something to eat, and we slept there that night as
+well as we could.</p>
+<p>Next day, being the 15th of July, we provided ourselves with some
+bread and wine, to comfort ourselves on the way, and resumed our
+journey through thick forests and terrible mountains, which continued
+for two days. In the evening of the 16th, we stopt near a spring,
+where we remained during the night in the open air, being obliged to
+light a fire on account of the coldness of the weather, though in the
+middle of summer. On the 17th of the same month we arrived
+at <i>Goride</i> [6], which belongs to the king of Georgia. This city
+is built on a plain, watered by a large river, and is defended by a
+citadel which is built upon a rock. Our guide notified our arrival to
+the commandant, who ordered us a house for our lodgings, apparently
+for the purpose of extorting a present; for shortly afterwards he
+informed me that he had letters from the king, by which he was
+ordered to receive twenty-six ducats from me for himself, and that I
+should pay six to my guide. I endeavoured to evade this demand, by
+saying that the king had received me favourably, to whom I had
+already given seventy ducats, and could not give any thing more, and
+urged my free passport. But he would listen to nothing I could urge,
+and I was forced to comply with his extortion. He even detained me
+till the 19th of the month, and even then I had extreme difficulty to
+get leave to depart. The inhabitants of the city, who deserve rather
+to be ranked among beasts, looked at us with as much astonishment as
+if they had never seen any other men than ourselves. They told us
+that, on the top of a high mountain in a neighbouring forest, there
+was a great church, in which was an image of the Virgin, which worked
+many miracles, and that the church was served by forty monks, whom
+they named <i>Calojeriens</i> [7]. But our anxiety to get out of this
+abominable country, prevented us from paying our devotions at that
+famous church. Georgia, indeed, is a somewhat better country than
+Mingrelia, but the manners of the people and their way of living is
+equally brutal; and such were the distresses and difficulties I
+encountered in travelling through both, that it would be tedious to
+relate them. On the 20th of July we left the abominable city of
+Goride, where we had suffered so many vexations, and continued, our
+journey through forests and over mountains, occasionally falling in
+with villages where we purchased provisions. We had always to pass
+the nights on the ground near some spring or rivulet, during most
+part of our journey through Mingrelia and Georgia.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] Gori in Georgia, on the river Kur. The journey
+hitherto must have been through Mingrelia, then apparently subject to
+the prince or king of Georgia.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] Probably Caloyers.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+<p> <i>Arrival of Contarini at Tauris or Ecbatana, the royal city of
+Uzun- Hassan, and continuation of his journey through Persia to
+Ispahan, where the king then resided.</i> </p>
+<p>On the 22d of July we began to ascend a mountain of prodigious
+height, insomuch, that when night came on we had scarcely reached the
+top, where we had to pass the night without water. Resuming our
+journey in the morning, we descended the other side of the mountain,
+and entered the province of Armenia, which is under the dominion of
+Uzun-Hassan[1]. In the evening we were conducted to a fort named Reo,
+which stands in the plain, between a deep river and a high mountain,
+and which is garrisoned by Turks in the service of Uzun-Hassan, but
+the neighbouring village is inhabited by Armenians. We rested in this
+place till the 25th of July, waiting the arrival of a guide to direct
+us in the remainder of the journey, and being well treated by the
+inhabitants, we rewarded them to their satisfaction. The Armenian who
+had joined us at Kaffa, under pretence of being an ambassador from
+Uzun-Hassan to the Pope, was recognized by the inhabitants of this
+village as an impostor and a notorious robber, and many were
+astonished how we had escaped from his machinations: I got rid of him
+therefore immediately, and made him restore me a horse which I had
+lent him for the journey; after which I procured a priest of an
+honest character to conduct me to Tauris. Leaving Reo with my new
+guide on the 26th of July, we ascended a mountain, and came on the
+other side to a plain surrounded by hills, where we found a village
+inhabited by Turks, near which we had to pass the night in the open
+air, though the inhabitants treated us with decent civility. Next
+morning we departed before day, having to pass another mountain, on
+the side of which was a village inhabited by Turks, among whom we
+should have run extreme hazard of our lives if they had seen us; but
+by using much diligence we avoided this danger, and got down into an
+extensive plain, full of fine pastures, and travelled with great
+expedition that we might pass the night at a respectable distance
+from the lawless inhabitants of the hills. On the 29th we passed the
+mountain of Noah, or <i>Ararat</i> , which is so lofty that it is
+covered with snow the whole year. We were told that many who had
+attempted to reach the top of this mountain had never been more heard
+of, while others, on making the same attempt, said, on their return,
+that it was quite inaccessible.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Uzun-Hassan in the Turkish language signifies Hassan
+the long, which prince was likewise named Hassan-beg, or Lord Hassan,
+and Ozun-Azembeg, or the long lord Azem or Hassan. By different
+European writers his name has been corrupted into Unsun Cassan,
+Uxun-Cassan, and Usum- Chasan. He was a Turkman emir of the
+Ak-koyunla dynasty, or white sheep tribe, whose ancestor, the
+governor of a province under the descendants of Timor, had rendered
+himself independent in the north and west of Persia.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>From this place forwards we travelled through extensive plains
+intermixed with hills, and arrived on the 30th of July at a castle
+named <i>Chiagri</i> , inhabited by Armenians. Finding abundance of
+bread, wine, and poultry in this place, we rested here for a day, and
+then set out with a new guide for Ecbatana or Tauris. Leaving Chiagri
+towards evening of the 1st August, we came next day to an Armenian
+village at the foot of a mountain, where we had to cross a river in
+boats, and were informed that Uzun-Hassan had formerly gained a great
+victory near this place over the Tartars, having hemmed them into a
+corner, where their army wasted away with famine and disease. The
+ruler of these Tartars, named Sultan <i>Buzech</i> [2], was made
+prisoner, and was afterwards put to death. We here saw, on our left
+hand, eleven Armenian villages, near each other, who were Catholic
+Christians, their bishop being under submission to the Roman pontiff.
+The country is extremely agreeable, and is the most fertile of all
+the provinces of Persia. We arrived on the 3d of August at a large
+village called Marerich, near which we passed the night, and had to
+ride all the next day through a plain country exposed to great heat,
+which was greatly aggravated, as we could not procure a single drop
+of water for ourselves or our horses. On the way we met several
+Turkmans, whose custom it is to encamp here and there about the
+country, wherever they can find pasture for their cattle, and to
+change their residence as the pastures become exhausted. These people
+are abominable robbers, and look upon rapine as their highest glory;
+and as we had great reason to be afraid of them, I gave orders to all
+my people to tell whoever we met, that I was journeying to wait upon
+their sovereign, which was the only expedient for saving us from
+their violence.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] This prince, whose real name was probably Abu Said,
+was the emir of the Kara-koyunla dynasty, or black sheep tribe of the
+Turkmans, who had risen to independence after the death of Timor, and
+who had long contended with the prince of the white sheep tribe for
+ascendancy. These two tribes derived their distinctive appellations
+of the black and white weathers, from some peculiarity in their
+ensigns or dress, equivalent to the distinguishing uniforms and
+banners of our European armies.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>We arrived on the 4th of August at the city of Ecbatana
+or <i>Tauris</i> [3], which stands in a plain, and is surrounded by an
+earthen rampart in bad repair. There are high mountains in its
+neighbourhood, which are said to be the Taurus of the ancients. I
+here lodged with a very good man, who gave us two sleeping chambers,
+a convenience we had been long unused to. He was quite astonished how
+we should have been able to escape the dangers of our journey, as all
+the roads were blocked up; and on asking him the reason, he told us
+that Ogurlu Mohammed[4], the eldest son of Uzun-Hassan, had rebelled
+against his father, and had taken possession of  <i>Sylas</i> [5] or
+Persepolis, of which he had appointed his younger brother
+ <i>Khalil</i> [6] as governor. Uzun-Hassan had assembled an army to
+reduce Persepolis and his sons to obedience; but a certain satrap
+named  <i>Zagarli</i>  who commanded in the neighbouring mountains,
+favoured the cause of Ogurlu, and had ravaged the whole country, to
+the very gates of Tauris, with a body of 3000 horse, owing to which,
+all the roads were obstructed and unsafe. He farther informed us,
+that the governor of Tauris had one day issued forth to endeavour to
+put a stop to the marauders, but had been defeated by Zagarli, with
+the loss of most of his troops, and had even great difficulty in
+escaping back to the city. I inquired why the inhabitants of Tauris
+did not take arms in their own defence, in a time of so much danger;
+but he answered, although they were obedient to the governor, they
+were quite unused to war. On learning the state of affairs in this
+place, I resolved to leave it as soon as possible, that I might get
+to the king; but I could neither procure a guide, nor prevail on the
+governor to shew me any favour. By the advice of my landlord I kept
+myself very much concealed, and employed my interpreter and Augustin
+of Pavia, whom I had brought with me from Kaffa because he understood
+a little Persian, to purchase our provisions, in which employment
+they were exposed to much ill treatment, and were often in hazard of
+their lives.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] Called Tebriz in modern times.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] In the original this name is corrupted to
+Gurlumamech; but we learn from the Modern Universal History, that his
+real name was that expressed in the text of our
+translation.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] The ruins supposed to be those of Persepolis are
+situated near Istakar, about forty miles north from the modern city
+of Shiraz, in the province of Fars or Persia proper; but the names in
+the original are often so corrupted as to defy even conjecture. Sylas
+is probably meant for Shiras.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] Named Chali in the original; but it is to be noted
+that the <i>ch</i>  of the Italian is pronounced as <i>k</i>  in
+English.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Some days afterwards, one of the sons of Uzun-Hassan, named
+Masu-beg[7], came to Tauris with 1000 horse, to defend the city from
+the incursions of Zagarli. I waited on this prince, having great
+difficulty to obtain an audience, telling him that I was sent as
+ambassador to his father, and had need of guides, whom I prayed him
+to provide me; but it was quite ineffectual, as he hardly deigned to
+answer me, and took no kind of interest in me or my affairs, so that
+I was obliged to return disappointed to my lodgings. Masu-beg
+endeavoured to raise money from the inhabitants of Tauris for the
+purpose of levying soldiers, but they resisted his demands, and all
+the shops of the city were shut up. In this emergency, being unable
+to procure provisions, I was obliged to quit my lodgings, with all my
+people, taking refuge in an Armenian church, where they gave us a
+small place in which to keep our horses; and I ordered all my people
+to keep constantly within doors, to avoid meeting with injury. My
+apprehensions on this occasion may easily be conceived; but God, who
+had already protected us in so many dangers, was mercifully pleased
+to deliver us from that which now hung over us. On the 7th of
+September, <i>Bertonius Liompardus</i> [8], whom I had before seen at
+Kaffa, and who had been sent by our illustrious republic, arrived at
+Tauris. He was accompanied by his nephew, named <i>Brancalione</i> ,
+and having come by way of Trebisond was a month later than me in
+reaching Tauris. I now dispatched Augustin de Pavia, of whom I have
+before made mention, with letters to the republic of Venice, in which
+I gave an account to the senate of all that had happened to us
+hitherto. I sent this man by way of Alapia, where he at length
+arrived in good health, after having escaped many dangers.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] It is difficult to determine whether Contarini here
+means Maksud-beg or Masih-beg, as Uzun-Hassan had two sons of these
+names; Maksad was the elder, and may have been the person named in
+the text Masu. Bec or Beg signifies Lord or Prince.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[8] The person mentioned before by Contarini as a
+messenger from Venice, and whom he met with at Kaffa, was named on
+that occasion Paulus Omnibamus, totally dissimilar from the name in
+this part of the text. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>Although I remained in Tauris till the 22d of September, I was not
+able to acquire any exact knowledge of the city, having been forced
+to conceal myself the whole time. It is a large city, but its
+territory in some places is uncultivated, and I believe nowhere very
+populous; it abounds, however, in all the necessaries of life, but
+these are dear. Much silk is produced in this neighbourhood, which is
+exported by way of Alapia. A considerable quantity of cloth is
+manufactured in the place, which likewise abounds in various
+merchandize, but I did not hear of any pearls or precious stones.
+Fortunately for us a Cadilaskir, one of the counsellors of
+Uzun-Hassan, arrived about this time at Tauris, who returned from an
+embassy into Turkey, where he had unsuccessfully endeavoured to
+negociate a peace between his master and the Turkish government.
+Immediately on learning the arrival of this person, I used every
+effort to procure an interview, in which I succeeded, and by means of
+a present, I prevailed on him to admit me and my retinue into his
+suite. He received me with much civility, and granted all I asked,
+assuring me that, with the blessing of God, he would conduct me in
+safety to the king. Among his slaves there were two Illyrian
+renegadoes, who formed a strict intimacy with my people, to whom they
+promised to give every assistance in their power, and to give us due
+notice of the departure of their master, which they faithfully
+performed, and for which I rewarded them.</p>
+<p>On the 22d of September we departed from Tauris with the Persian
+counsellor, accompanied likewise by a great many merchants and
+others, who took the advantage of travelling under his protection,
+from fear of being plundered by the rebels. This country in which we
+now travelled was quite level, with very few hills, so dry that we
+saw no trees except along the sides of rivers, and having only a few
+small villages, in which we purchased what was necessary for our
+journey, and always rested before mid-day in the open air, being
+unable to travel during the height of the sun, on account of the
+great heat. Travelling in this manner, we arrived at <i>Sultanie</i> 
+on the 27th of September. This city appeared to be very handsome,
+surrounded by walls, and defended by a good citadel. We saw here
+three most curious brazen gates, which had been made at Damascus, the
+finest things I ever beheld, which must have cost a great deal of
+money. The city of Sultanie stands in a plain at the foot of a range
+of mountains, some of which are exceedingly steep and precipitous,
+and the inhabitants of which are forced to remove into lower
+situations during winter, on account of the severity of the cold. We
+remained there for three days, and resumed our journey on the 30th of
+September, travelling sometimes in plains, and sometimes among hills,
+but always taking up our quarters for the night in the open air.</p>
+<p>On the 6th of October we arrived at <i>Sena</i> [9], a city without
+walls, situated in a plain on the banks of a river, and surrounded by
+trees, in which city we passed the night in tolerably bad quarters.
+We departed from thence on the 8th, and stopping, according to our
+usual custom, in the fields, I was seized with a violent intermittent
+fever, insomuch that I could hardly get on horseback next day, and
+that with infinite distress. We arrived early next day at Kom, where
+I was forced to stop, all my attendants being seized in a similar
+manner with myself, except our priest Stephen Testa, who took care of
+us all. Our fever was so malignant that we were all delirious during
+the height of the access or hot fit. I was afterwards informed that
+the royal counsellor sent to visit me, begging my excuse that he
+could not wait for me, because it was necessary for him to repair
+without delay to the king; but that he had left one of his attendants
+with me as a guide, and that I need not now be under any
+apprehension, as there were none in that part of the country to do me
+harm. I remained here a long time sick. The city of Sena or Sava is
+not large, and has mud walls, being situated in a champaign country,
+which is well peopled, and abounds in every thing necessary to
+life.</p>
+<blockquote>[9] Assuredly the Sava of modern maps, a city of
+Irac-agemi, which stands upon one of these extraordinary rivers, so
+numerous in Persia, which lose themselves in the sands, after a short
+but useful run.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the 24th of October, being much recovered, we resumed our
+journey, though I was still so weak as to find much difficulty in
+sitting on horseback. Next day we arrived, at the city of Cashan[10],
+which very much resembles Kom, except that it is somewhat handsomer.
+On the following day, we came to <i>Nethas</i> , or Nathan. This city
+stands likewise in a flat country, which produces much wine. I
+remained here one day, both to recruit my strength, and because I
+felt some return of my fever. On the 28th of October, I prepared as
+well as I was able to finish my journey, which was all on plain
+ground, and arrived at Ispahan, where Uzun-Hassan then resided, on
+the 3d of November, having employed twenty- four days in our journey
+from Tauris to this place. I immediately sought out the dwelling of
+Josaphat Barbaro[11], the ambassador of Venice, and went to him. He
+received, me with much joy, and many embraces were mutually given and
+received, and we rejoiced together on my safe arrival. But as I had
+much need of rest, I very soon went to bed. When the king heard of my
+arrival, he sent some of his slaves to congratulate me, who presented
+me with some refreshments sent by his majesty.</p>
+<blockquote>[10] About sixty miles S. S. E. from Kom. I am disposed
+to think that Contarini has slumpt his journey on the present
+occasion; as it is hardly to be believed a person in the weak state
+he describes himself could have travelled with so much rapidity.
+Besides, so far as we can learn from his journal, he travelled always
+with the same set of horses. Indeed the sequel immediately justifies
+this suspicion, as the subsequent dates are more distant than the
+travelling days of the text would warrant.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[11] See Travels of Josaphat Barbaro to Asof in 1436, in
+our Collection, Vol I. p. 501, in the introduction to which article,
+it will be seen that he had been sent on an embassy from Venice to
+Uzun-Hassan in 1572, two years before Contarini; and appears to have
+remained in the east for fourteen years in that capacity, after the
+departure of Contarini on his return to Venice.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Early in the morning of the 4th November, some of the kings slaves
+came to require that Josaphat Barbaro and I should come to court. On
+being introduced to an audience, we found the king attended by eight
+of his principal officers. Having made my obeisance after the manner
+of the country, I presented the letters of the republic, and
+explained the subject of my mission[12]. When I had finished
+speaking, he answered me in every point, and in few words; and, among
+other things, he excused his conduct in having been obliged to retire
+to this part of his kingdom. After this we were ordered to be seated,
+and his courtiers gave us an entertainment according to the Persian
+fashion, which consisted of many dishes tolerably well dressed. After
+the repast, we took leave of the king, and retired to our quarters.
+Two days afterwards, we were again sent for to court, when most of
+the royal apartments were shewn me. The king then resided in a very
+pleasant country palace, situated on the banks of a river. In one of
+the rooms, there was a painting of Ogurlu- Mohammed, the kings eldest
+son, leading the sultan <i>Busech</i> , or Abu Sa&iuml;d, tied with a
+rope; and in another picture the decapitation of <i>Busech</i>  was
+represented. We were again invited to an entertainment, at which many
+different kinds of confections were served up. We remained at Ispahan
+till the 25th of November, during which period we were frequently
+invited to court. The city of Ispahan, like the rest of the Persian
+cities, is surrounded by earthen-ramparts. It stands in a plain, and
+is abundantly supplied with all the necessaries of life. Having
+rebelled against the king, it was besieged and suffered much injury;
+for, being obstinately defended, it was subjected to the resentment
+of the conqueror and the fury of the soldiers.</p>
+<blockquote>[12] This nowhere distinctly appears; but we may easily
+understand incidentally, and from the history of the period, that the
+Venetian republic endeavoured to stir up enemies to the Turkish
+empire in the east, being unable to resist its power, now exerted
+against them in the Morea and the Greek islands; and we may even
+surmise that Uzun- Hassan was subsidized by the Venetians to make war
+upon the Turks.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Persia is a very flat and arid country, in many parts of which
+there are salt lakes. In such parts as can be supplied with water,
+grain and other fruits of the earth are produced in abundance, and
+there are plenty of beasts of all kinds, as it is everywhere
+intersected and surrounded by fertile mountains, but every thing is
+very dear. The Venetian quart of wine is sold for three or four
+ducats; but bread is not so dear in proportion. A camels load of wood
+costs a ducat. Flesh is dearer than with us, and seven hens cost a
+ducat; but other articles of provisions are cheaper. The Persians are
+a civil and humane people; and though Mahometans, they do not hate
+the Christians. The women are very modestly dressed, and ride on
+horseback with even more grace than the men; and, judging from the
+good appearance of the men, the women are probably handsome.</p>
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+<p> <i>Contarini accompanies Uzun-Hassan from Ispahan to Tauris, where
+he finds Ambassadors from the Duke of Burgundy and the Prince of
+Muscovy, and gets leave to return to Venice.</i> </p>
+<p>The king left Ispahan with all his court on the 25th of November
+for Tauris, and we travelled along with him, passing through most of
+the places which we had seen in going to Ispahan. In this journey we
+always slept in tents in the fields, and the camp was well supplied
+with provisions, as many merchants had received orders to provide
+grain, victuals of all kinds, and all sorts of necessaries. On the
+14th of November we arrived at Kom, where we remained two days under
+tents, exposed to extremely cold weather, and experienced much
+difficulty to procure a small house in which to shelter ourselves. We
+continued at this place till the 21st of March 1474, during which
+interval we went frequently to court, to pay our respects to the
+king, on which occasions we were generally invited to dinner. The
+Persian court is very magnificent, being attended by many high
+officers of state, and every day 400 persons dine along with the
+king. These are all seated on the ground, and are served in copper
+basons with boiled rice, or some other mess made of flesh and grain
+boiled together; but the king is served in great magnificence at a
+separate table, with a great variety of dishes of different kinds of
+meat. During his meals, the king is often served with wine, and then
+the musicians sing and play upon flutes such songs and tunes as the
+king pleases to order. The king is of a good size, with a thin visage
+and agreeable countenance, having somewhat of the Tartar appearance,
+and seemed to be about seventy years old. His manners were very
+affable, and he conversed familiarly with every one around him; but I
+noticed that his hands trembled when he raised the cup to his lips.
+It is not needful that I should enumerate all the audiences which I
+had on the subject of my mission, of which I shall make occasional
+mention hereafter.</p>
+<p>On the 21st of March the king and all the court left Kom, on their
+journey towards Tauris, the baggage being carried by camels and
+mules. Each day we hardly exceeded ten or twelve, or at the most
+twenty Italian miles, and always stopt at each encampment till the
+forage in the neighbourhood was consumed. The Persian mode of
+travelling is thus: The women always arrive first at the new camp,
+where they set up the tents and cook provisions for their husbands.
+They are well clothed and ride upon good horses, which they manage
+with much dexterity. The Persian nation is very magnificent, and
+exceedingly fond of pomp, and shew, and it is very agreeable to see
+their march at some distance. They are very careful of their camels,
+of which they have great numbers, even the poorest seldom travelling
+with less than seven of these animals; by this means, the prodigious
+train which attends the court appears to consist of many more persons
+than it actually contains. When the king entered Ecbatana, his suite
+consisted of about 2000 persons, but many left the camp on the march,
+as it suited their fancy or convenience, and the king never had above
+500 horse along with him. The royal tents were exceedingly beautiful
+and magnificent, and his bed was ornamented with scarlet hangings.
+The merchants who attended the camp sold every thing at a high price.
+All of our party were accommodated with tents, as we belonged to the
+suite of the king, who often honoured us with an invitation to
+supper, and at other times frequently sent us refreshments. We were
+always treated with much civility, and never received any injuries or
+affronts.</p>
+<p>On the 31st of May the king encamped about fifteen miles from
+Tauris, when a certain monk of the Boulonnois named Louis, who called
+himself patriarch of Antioch, and envoy from the Duke of Burgundy,
+arrived at the camp, attended by five horsemen. The king asked if we
+knew him, and we accordingly told what we knew without dissimulation.
+Next day the king gave him an audience, at which we were present by
+command. This patriarch presented to the king three robes of gold
+tissue, three others of scarlet silk, and some of fine cloth, and
+opened his commission, making many great offers of service from his
+prince, and many fine promises in very magnificent terms, which do
+not appear proper for me to repeat, and which the king did not seem
+to care much about. We were all invited to dinner, during which the
+king started many questions, to which he gave very pertinent answers
+himself. After dinner we returned to our tents.</p>
+<p>On the 2d of June we arrived at Tauris, in which place lodgings
+were appointed for us. Six days afterwards, Uzun-Hassan sent for the
+patriarch and us to court; and although he had three or four times
+informed me already that I must prepare to return into Italy, leaving
+my colleague Barbaro at his court, I could not reconcile myself to
+the journey, and had done every thing in my power to put off my
+departure. When we went to court, the king addressed himself first to
+the patriarch, whom he ordered to return to his prince, and to say
+from him, that he, the king, would very shortly declare war against
+the Turks, having already taken the field with that view, and that he
+never failed in performing his promises. He then turned to me,
+saying, "Return to your country, and tell your masters that I shall
+very soon make war upon the Ottomans, and desire them to do their
+duty as I shall do mine. I know no one better fitted to carry this
+message than you, who have accompanied me from Ispahan, and have seen
+my preparations; so that you are able to inform the Christian princes
+of all that you have seen, and of my good intentions." I offered
+several reasons for excusing myself from obeying these commands,
+which gave me much vexation; but the king looked at me with a severe
+expression of countenance, saying, "It is my pleasure for you to go,
+and I command you. I shall give you letters for your masters, which
+will inform them of my sentiments and the reasons of your return." In
+this state of embarrassment, I was advised by the patriarch and M.
+Josaphat to comply with a good grace; on which I replied to the king
+as follows: "My departure, Sir, gives me much distress; but since you
+judge it proper, I make no more objections, and am ready to obey your
+orders. Wherever I may go, I shall speak of your great power and
+goodness, and the honours I have received from your majesty, and
+shall exhort all the princes of Christendom to join their forces with
+you against the common enemy." My speech pleased the king, and he
+answered me kindly according to his wonted manner. After retiring
+from this andienqe, the king sent some Persian robes to the patriarch
+and me, made of fine stuff and very beautifully ornamented, and
+presented each of us with a horse and some money to assist us during
+our journey.</p>
+<p>We remained two days at Tauris after the kings departure, and set
+out on the 10th of June to rejoin the court, which was then encamped
+in a pleasant spot among excellent pastures and plenty of fine wells;
+about twenty-five miles from Tauris. We remained there till the
+pastures were eaten bare, and then marched about fifteen miles
+farther. On the 27th of June the king gave us our final audience, at
+which he gave us presents for our respective sovereigns; that is to
+say, to the patriarch for the Duke of Burgundy; to myself for the
+republic; and to one Marcus Ruffus, who had come with an embassy from
+the prince of Muscovy. The presents consisted in certain pieces of
+workmanship made in the European fashion, two swords, and certain
+ornaments for the head, which are usually fastened to bonnets. There
+were two Persian ambassadors in the audience- chamber, one of whom
+was destined on a mission into Russia. At length the king turning
+towards the patriarch and me, addressed us nearly as follows: "You
+will return with all speed to your masters, and will tell them and
+all the other Christian princes from me, that I have used all
+diligence in taking the field to make war on the Turks, as it had
+been concerted between them and me. The emperor of the Turks is at
+present in Constantinople, and will make no enterprize of importance
+this year. As for myself, I propose sending one part of my army to
+reduce my rebellious son, and another against the Turkish generals,
+while I shall remain here at hand, to act against the enemy as
+occasion may require." He gave orders, both to us and to his own
+ambassadors, to report this to all the princes of Christendom. I did
+not receive these orders with more satisfaction than I had done the
+former; but I had no means of escape and must necessarily obey.
+Wherefore, having taken our leaves, we prepared for our departure,
+and were unexpectedly commanded to remain till next day. In the mean
+time, he conveyed a great part of his infantry during the night to
+the other side of a mountain. Next morning early, the
+ <i>Ruiscasson</i> , or conductor of ambassadors, carried us to the top
+of the hill, as meaning to confer with us on some important subject,
+and on the appearance of the Persian infantry under march, he pointed
+them out to us as if he had been surprised at seeing so many
+additional troops coming to the royal camp. The better to favour this
+deception, some of his slaves exclaimed as astonished, that there
+were a great many soldiers, and that at least 10,000 were coming to
+reinforce the army. But we easily saw through the contrivance, and
+were certain that these pretended new troops were merely the ordinary
+royal escort, which had only changed their position to impose upon
+us. After this little comedy, the <i>Ruiscasson</i>  gave us the royal
+letters for our masters, and we returned to our tents. From the
+information of M. Josaphat and others, the military force of this
+king cannot exceed 20,000 cavalry, some of whom have wooden bucklers
+about eighteen inches long. Others have a kind of cuirasses made of
+very thin plates of steel, which they wear over their ordinary
+habits. Their usual arms are bows and arrows, and cimeters, while
+some have small leathern targets covered with silk, and others carry
+helmets and cuirasses. Their horses are beautiful and vigorous, and
+very numerous. In regard to the manners of the Persians, and the
+state of the kingdom, I shall mention what I know of these subjects
+as occasion may offer during the recital of my travels; but I do not
+think it proper to weary my readers with any lengthened detail.</p>
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+<p> <i>Journey of Contarini from Persia, through Georgia and
+Mingrelia, to the city Phasis.</i> </p>
+<p>Being entirely ready to depart on the 1st of July, we took leave
+of M. Josaphat Barbaro in his tent, when we mutually shed tears in
+sincere grief at our separation. Having recommended myself to the
+protection of God, I mounted on horseback, and began my journey,
+accompanied by the patriarch of Antioch, Marcus Ruffus the Muscovite,
+and the two Persian ambassadors, intending to return by way of
+Phasis, which is under the dominion of Uzun-Hassan. To this route we
+were advised by certain birds of bad augury, who were omens of the
+terrible dangers we had to encounter in the sequel. Coming to the
+villages of the catholic Armenians, formerly mentioned, we were well
+received by their bishops, and attended the mass regularly during
+three days that we had to remain here, laying in a stock of
+provisions for the journey. From thence we came to the frontiers of
+Georgia, travelling through plains interspersed with hills, and
+arrived on the 12th of July at <i>Typsi</i> [1], which is subject to
+the king of the Georgians. This city stands upon a hill, at the foot
+of which runs the river <i>Tigre</i> , and it is defended by a good
+castle on the summit of an eminence. It was formerly a celebrated
+place, but is at present almost utterly ruined, though beginning to
+revive, and contains many good catholics. In this place we took up
+our lodgings with a person named Arminius, of the catholic faith. In
+travelling through Georgia, we found a few villages composed of huts,
+and some castles among the mountains, but these were rare and
+distant.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This in all probability is a corruption of Tiflis, or
+Teffliz, the capital of Georgia Georgia, which is situated on the
+river Kur or Cyrus, erroneously named <i>Tigre</i>  in the text. The
+proper name of this country is Gurgi-stan, or the country of the
+Gurgi which has been corrupted by the Europeans into
+Georgia.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the 19th of July, being near the frontiers of Mingrelia, we
+chanced to meet with Pangratius, king of Georgia, in the midst of a
+forest surrounded by mountains, and went to pay our respects to him,
+when he invited us to dinner. We had to sit on the ground, having a
+skin spread before us instead of a table-cloth, and were served with
+roasted meat and fowls, very ill dressed; but, by way of making
+amends, they frequently presented us with large goblets of wine, as
+they seem to place all dignity and merit in deep drinking. For this
+reason it is their custom, at the conclusion of their meals, to
+challenge one another to drink, and he who empties the greatest
+number of goblets, is held in highest esteem. As the Turks drink no
+wine, their presence was some restraint that day on their usual
+bacchanalian contests, and as we neither could nor would compete with
+them, we were held in great contempt. The king was about forty years
+old, and of large make, with a strong resemblance to the Tartar
+countenance. We parted from the king of Georgia next day, and on the
+22d of July, on the confines of Mingrelia, we fell in with a Georgian
+commander at the head of some troops, both cavalry and infantry who
+was posted in this place to prevent injury from the disorders that
+had broke out in Mingrelia, in consequence of the death of Bendian,
+prince of that country. These people stopped, and frightened us with,
+many cruel menaces; but at length, after being robbed of two quivers
+full of arrows, and having to gratify them with some money, we
+escaped from them, and made the best of our way to a distance.
+Leaving the public road, we struck off into a thick wood, where we
+passed the night in prodigious apprehension.</p>
+<p>On the following day, while approaching the city
+of <i>Cotati</i> [2], we met some peasants in a narrow pass, who
+prevented us for some time from going forwards, and even threatened
+to put us to death. After much altercation, and many threats, they
+seized three horses belonging to the Turks[3], which were with great
+difficulty redeemed for twenty ducats. On the evening we reached
+Cutais, which is a royal fortress. While passing a bridge over a
+river, early in the morning of the 24th of July, we were again
+attacked by robbers, who came upon us suddenly, and, after many
+threats, forced us to pay the full value of our horses, before they
+would allow us to continue our journey. After passing this bridge, we
+entered Mingrelia, where we followed our wonted custom of sleeping
+under the canopy of heaven, though we had many worse inconveniencies
+and dangers to encounter: for, on the 25th of July, having passed
+over a river by means of rafts, we were conducted to the dwelling of
+a certain lady, named  <i>Maresca</i> , sister of the deceased prince
+Badian, who received us at first with much civility, and treated us
+with bread and wine, after which we were conducted into a field
+belonging to her, which was close shut on all sides. On the morrow,
+when we were about to depart, we offered her a present of twenty
+ducats, as a return for her hospitality, which at first she pretended
+to refuse; but we soon discovered her treachery, as she insisted on
+our paying two ducats as a ransom for each of our horses. We
+expressed our astonishment at this rapacity, and endeavoured to
+represent our inability to comply with such exorbitant demands, but
+all to no purpose, and we were forced to comply, being afraid that
+she might even have plundered us of every thing.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Cutais in Imeritia, named Cotachis on a former
+occasion in the text. --E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] These Turks must have been the Persian ambassadors of
+Uzun-Hassan;--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Leaving this rapacious dame, we arrived at <i>Phasis</i>  on the
+27th of July, some on horseback and others in boats, where we again
+lodged with  <i>Martha</i>  the Circassian lady, whom I formerly
+mentioned. After having run many risks in our journey, we here learnt
+a piece of most afflictive news, that the Turks had taken possession
+of Kaffa or Theodosia in the Crimea, by which we were deprived of our
+last resource, and shut out apparently from every hope of continuing
+our voyage homewards. Our distress on receiving this intelligence may
+easily be conceived, and, in fact, we were so much cast down, as not
+to know what measures to pursue, or to which hand to turn us. Louis,
+the patriarch of Antioch, resolved upon going through Tartary and
+Russia, with which route he was acquainted. It was to no purpose that
+I urged the promises we had mutually come under at the beginning of
+our journey, never to separate on any account. To this he answered,
+that the unforeseen circumstances which had occurred, were a
+sufficient warrant to every one to consult his own individual safety.
+I insisted and beseeched him not to treat me with such unfeeling
+cruelty, but all in vain, for he prepared to set off along with the
+Turkish ambassador, who had been sent by Uzun-Hassan as his
+particular companion. In this extremity I went to Marcus Ruffus, and
+the Turkish ambassador who was joined with him by the king of Persia,
+to whom I mentioned my intention of returning back to Uzun-Hassan.
+They pretended to approve my plan, and even to join me, and we
+embraced as entering, into promise of keeping together; but they
+secretly came to a determination of taking their journey through the
+province of <i>Gorgore</i> , which is subject to  <i>Calcicanus</i> , and
+to the city of <i>Vati</i> ,[4] which is on the frontiers of the Turks,
+and pays tribute to the Grand Signior.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] This proposed route seems to have been through the
+province of <i>Guria</i>  to Batum; and, from the sequel, to have
+returned to Georgia and Shirvan, passing through Derbent and the
+Caspian gates, or Daghisten, into western Tartary. But the names in
+the text are too corrupt for any certainty. Calcicanus, in the text,
+is probably a corruption of Kalo Johannes, who was then prince, or
+emperor, of Trebisond.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The patriarch set out on the 6th of August, and the next day
+Marcus Ruffus followed him, accompanied by several Russians, partly
+on horseback, and partly by means of boats. Their intentions were to
+travel from Vati, by Shamaki, anciently Cyropolis, and thence into
+Tartary. Thus left alone in a strange land, I leave any reasonable
+person to think what were the embarrassments with which I was
+surrounded. I was unacquainted with a single individual, having no
+company but that of my domestics, and had very little money
+remaining. In short, I was reduced almost to despair, of ever being
+able to get out of the country. In this state of distress I fell into
+a violent fever, and could get no other nourishment but bread and
+water, and a pullet occasionally with much difficulty; and my fever
+increased to such a degree that I became delirious. All my domestics
+were attacked soon after with the same fever, the priest Stephen only
+excepted, who had to take care of us all. My only bed was a wretched
+mattress, which had been lent me by a person named John Volcan; and
+my life was despaired of by every one, till the 9th of September,
+when, by the cares of Stephen and of Martha, my good hostess, or
+rather through the mercy of God, the fever abated, and I soon
+recovered my former health, to the astonishment of every one. My
+domestics likewise recovered, and we began again to consult on the
+best means of escaping out of our present situation. Some proposed to
+take the road of Syria, but I deemed this too dangerous; and we at
+length came to the determination, of going by Shamaki, into Tartary,
+and thence by Russia, Poland, and Germany. I got accordingly on
+horseback on the 10th of September, but had hardly rode two miles
+when I was forced to dismount and rest myself on the ground. I was,
+therefore, obliged to return to my lodging in Phasis, where we
+remained till the 17th, when, being all of us restored to health and
+strength, we again resumed our journey, after having implored the
+protection and assistance of God. I now took a certain Greek into my
+service, who could speak the Mingrelian language, who occasioned me a
+thousand troubles, which it were tedious to recount.</p>
+<p>SECTION VI.</p>
+<p> <i>Leaving Phasis, Contarini travels through Mingrelia and
+Georgia, into Media, and, passing the Caspian, arrives in
+Tartary.</i> </p>
+<p>Leaving Phasis, as before mentioned, on the 17th of September; and
+taking the road of Mingrelia, we came to <i>Cotati</i> , or Cutais, on
+the 21st of that month, extremely worn out through the consequences
+of our late illness, and the fatigues of the journey; and as the
+Greek whom I had hired never ceased to give me vexation, I here
+parted with him as handsomely as I could. We remained two days at
+Cutais, among people who knew us not, and whose language we were
+quite ignorant of. Leaving that place, and tracing back our former
+steps, we passed over several mountains in much fear, and arrived at
+Tiflis on the 30th of September, where we took shelter in the chapel
+of a certain Armenian catholic, who had more the appearance of a dead
+person than of a living man, but who rendered us every possible
+service. This man had a son who lived with him, and who,
+unfortunately for us, was seized with the plague, which had raged in
+that part of the country this year. From him one of my servants,
+named Maffeo of Bergamo, caught the distemper, who still kept about
+me during two days, though ill, as he was my own particular domestic.
+At length, growing worse, he had to take to his bed, when the
+distemper shewed itself; and as he lay in the same room with me, and
+the house could not afford me another, I was forced to take refuge in
+a hovel where some cows were kept at night; and as the Armenian
+refused to allow Maffeo to remain in his house, I was constrained to
+take him into the same place with myself, where Stephen took care of
+him, till God pleased to take him out of the world. After the death
+of Maffeo, I experienced great difficulty to procure another stable
+for myself, that I might get away from the morbid air of that in
+which my poor servant died. In this extremity we were utterly
+abandoned, except by one old man, who understood a little of our
+language, and who served us with much affection.</p>
+<p>We remained at this place till the 21st October, and on the
+evening before our intended departure, the Persian ambassador, who
+had accompanied the patriarch, came to Tiflis. He complained
+grievously of having been plundered, through the fault of the
+patriarch, with whom he had travelled to <i>Lav&oacute;gasia</i> ,
+where he had left him, and was now on his road to complain to
+Uzun-Hassan. We agreed to travel in company from Tiflis, a city
+belonging to Pancratis[1]. From thence in two days we entered the
+territories of Uzun-Hassan, as we took the road towards Shamaki, or
+Cyropolis, which is situated in a fertile and pleasant country. On
+the 26th of October we separated, as the Persian went to Uzun- Hassan
+at Tauris, and I took the road for the dominions of <i>Sivanse</i> , in
+which Shamaki stands; but by means of the Persian ambassador I
+procurred a <i>molah</i> , or Mahometan priest, to guide me on the road
+to Shamaki. This country is greatly more beautiful and more fertile
+than the dominions of Uzun-Hassan, and is ruled over
+by <i>Sivanse</i> , king of Media[2]. Of this country Shamaki is the
+capital, at which place I arrived on the 1st November 1474. This city
+is not so large as Tauris, but, as far as I could judge, surpasses
+that place in the goodness and abundance of every thing, especially
+in excellent cattle. It produces great quantities of excellent silk,
+of which they manufacture various kinds of very slight stuffs. While
+here, I had the good fortune to be rejoined by Marcus Ruffus, the
+Muscovite ambassador, who had parted from me at Phasis, as formerly
+related. Immediately on learning that I was in the city, he came to
+visit me, and we embraced with cordiality. I now earnestly entreated
+him to receive me and my domestics into his society for the remainder
+of the journey, to which he very readily agreed.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This name is probably corrupted for Bagration, or
+Bagrathion, which was once the family name of the sovereigns of
+Georgia, and, if I mistake not, there is, or was lately, a prince of
+that family and name in the service of Russia.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] The kingdom of Media in the text, is obviously meant
+to indicate the province of Shirvan, on the west of the
+Caspian.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>We left Shamaki on the 6th of November, for the city of Derbent,
+which is called, in the language of the country, the Caucassian
+Gates, or the Iron Gates. This city is under the dominion
+of <i>Sivanse</i> , and stands on the frontiers of Tartary. On our
+journey we travelled sometimes over plains and sometimes on
+mountains, and were tolerably well treated by the Turkish
+inhabitants, with whom we lodged by the way. About mid-way between
+these two cities we came to a large village, where we found great
+abundance of excellent fruits, particularly admirable apples. We
+arrived on the 12th of November at Derbent, and were advised to pass
+the winter in that place; as it was necessary, in our way to Russia,
+to cross the desert of Tartary, which is much easier in the spring of
+the year, and likewise because it was proper for us to cross over the
+Caspian to the Tartar city of Citracan. The city of Derbent is
+situated on the shore of the Caspian, which the Mardians call the sea
+of Bachaan or Bacou. This city is said to have been built by
+Alexander the Great, and is called the  <i>Iron Gate</i> , because it
+entirely closes up the only passage from Tartary into Media and
+Persia, by means of a deep valley reaching from Circassia. Derbent is
+fortified with a thick well built wall, reaching from the castle at
+the foot of the mountain all the way to the sea; but not above a
+sixth part of the space within the walls is inhabited, all that end
+nearest the sea being in ruins, among which are several tombs. The
+country about this city produces abundance of all kinds of fruits,
+among which are plenty of grapes, from which the inhabitants make
+wine.</p>
+<p>The Caspian, or Sea of Hircania, which has no communication
+whatever with the ocean, is about the same size with the Euxine or
+Black Sea, and is very deep. They catch in this sea great quantities
+of sturgeons, and sea- wolves as they are called; and there are
+prodigious quantities of sea- dogs, or seals, having the head, feet,
+and tail like ordinary dogs. The only other remarkable fish is of a
+round form, about a yard and a half in diameter, with no perceptible
+head or other member, from which the natives extract a great quantity
+of oil, which they use in their lamps, and with which they anoint
+their camels. The inhabitants of this country, who are all
+Mahometans, are neither cruel nor barbarous, and used us exceedingly
+well; having once asked us who we were, and being answered that we
+were Christians, they troubled us with no farther inquiries. My dress
+at this time consisted of coarse and much worn cloth, lined with
+lambs skin, above which I wore a leathern robe, and my hat was of
+skin; in which dress I frequently went to the market to purchase
+flesh and other provisions, which I carried home myself. On one of
+these occasions a person eyed me attentively, and, turning to some of
+his comrades, said, this man was not born to the employment of
+carrying meat. Marcus Ruffus, who happened to be along with me,
+explained what the man had said; and I was astonished at being
+recognized in so shabby a dress, which I thought must have proved a
+sufficient concealment: but, in truth, as I have said before, they
+are a very good kind of people.</p>
+<p>During my residence in Derbent, I was anxious to learn some
+certain intelligence respecting the state of affairs at the court of
+Uzun-Hassan, for which purpose I sent Demetrius de Seze, my
+interpreter, with letters to Josaphat Barbaro at Tauris, which is
+twenty days journey from Derbent. He returned at the end of fifty
+days, bringing answers from Barbaro, informing me that the king still
+remained at Tauris, but that he was utterly ignorant of his
+affairs.</p>
+<p>Spring being arrived, we began to think of pursuing our journey,
+and Marcus procured a boat for transporting us to <i>Curere</i> [3].
+The boats which are used in this country are drawn up on the shore
+all winter, as the sea is then too rough for their use. They are
+sharp at both ends, and wide in the middle, their planks being
+fastened with tree-nails, and their bottoms payed over with pitch;
+and as the natives use no compasses, or other maritime instruments,
+they always creep along the coast. These boats, which are very crazy
+and dangerous, are moved forwards by means of oars; and the people
+are very ignorant of navigation, though they believe themselves the
+best mariners in the world.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] Perhaps Saray, on the eastern branch of the
+Wolga.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the 5th of April 1475, we embarked, and departed from Derbent,
+being thirty-five persons in all, including the master of the boat
+and the crew. The rest of the passengers were merchants, carrying
+rice, silk, and silken goods to <i>Citrarchan</i> [4], where they
+proposed to sell their commodities to the Russians and Tartars, or to
+barter them for other articles. Having coasted along during three
+days, with a favourable wind, always keeping about fifteen miles from
+the shore, the wind became contrary on the third evening, and
+increased during the night to so violent a tempest that we expected
+to have been lost. Although we had all reason to believe our bark
+would be dashed to pieces on the shore, we made every effort to gain
+the land, and fortunately our vessel ran into a kind of ditch or dock
+between sand banks, very near the beach, where she stuck fast,
+impelled by the united force of the winds and waves, and of our oars.
+Between us and the shore there was a pool, through which we had to
+wade, carrying our baggage on our shoulders; and we were almost
+perished with cold, owing to the wind, and our being drenched with
+water; yet we unanimously agreed to refrain from making a fire, lest
+that circumstance might attract the notice of the Tartars, whom we
+feared to meet with. At day light we noticed traces of horses having
+been on the spot, and the recent fragments of a ruined skiff, from
+which we were led to conclude, that some persons must have been here;
+but some other circumstances gave us reason to believe that the
+Tartars were not near the shore.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Probably Astracan is here meant.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>We remained undisturbed at this place till the 14th of April, when
+the wind and weather becoming favourable, we got our bark from the
+creek, and again resumed our voyage, and advanced near thirty miles
+the same day. Towards evening the wind became again contrary, but we
+avoided the dangers of an impending storm, by taking refuge amidst
+some reeds, among which our mariners hauled the boat, so as to be out
+of danger from the waves, and we made our way to the land through the
+reeds, in doing which we were much fatigued and thoroughly drenched
+in water. We rested here all that night and the day following, which
+was Easter day, having nothing on which to commemorate that festival,
+except some butter, and a few eggs which we fortunately gathered on
+the sandy beach. The mariners and passengers were often inquisitive
+to know who I was; and, pursuant to the advice of Marcus Ruffus, I
+passed myself among them as the physician and servant
+of <i>Despima</i> , the consort of the grand duke of Moscovy, to whom I
+was going. A short time after this, one of our mariners happened to
+be afflicted by a large boil, and came to consult me in my assumed
+character; and as I had the good fortune to discover some oil in our
+bark, I made a poultice for him with bread and flour, by which he was
+soon cured. From this circumstance they actually believed me to be a
+physician, and were very anxious that I should remain among them; but
+Marcus drew me out of this difficulty, by saying that I had no
+medicinal preparations with me, but would soon return from Russia
+with a proper assortment.</p>
+<p>SECTION VII.</p>
+<p> <i>Arrival of Contarini at Citracan, and journey from thence,
+through several dangers among the Tartars, to Muscovy along with some
+merchants</i> .</p>
+<p>On the 15th of April we put again to sea with a favourable wind,
+and coasting along a series of reedy islands, we arrived on the 26th
+of that month at the mouth of the Wolga, a large river which flows
+from Russia into the Caspian. From the mouth of this river it is
+computed to be seventy-six miles to the city of Citracan[1], which we
+reached on the 30th. Near this city there are
+excellent <i>salines</i> [2], from which all the neighbouring provinces
+are supplied with salt. The Tartars who commanded in the city would
+not permit us to enter that evening, so that we had to pass the night
+in a hut without the walls. In the morning three broad- faced Tartars
+came and ordered us to go along with them to their prince. They
+treated Marcus with respect, saying that he was a friend of their
+sovereign; but alleged that I was his slave, as they consider all the
+Franks or Christians as their enemies. These news were most cruelly
+mortifying for me, and afflicted me severely; but I was obliged to
+submit in spite of me, and Marcus advised me to allow him to speak
+for me. Forced in this manner to return disconsolate to my hut, I was
+long exposed to every indignity and danger, to my great mortification
+and distress. The Tartars insisted that I was possessed of pearls,
+and even plundered me of some merchandize I had purchased in Derbent,
+intending to have bartered it in this place for a good horse to carry
+me during the rest of my journey. They informed me afterwards, by
+means of Marcus, that they intended to sell us all to certain people
+whom they waited for, and who were to go into Muscovy with other
+merchants. After many mortifications and distresses, it was resolved
+to hold a grand consultation concerning us at a large village
+named <i>Alermi</i> , about two miles from the city, where their lord
+resided. At this time I was not possessed of a single farthing, and
+was obliged to borrow money from the Russian and Tartar merchants, at
+a high interest, to supply our urgent necessities, for which Marcus
+became my bondsman.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Called Citrarchan in the former section, but
+certainly what we now call Astracan, then the capital of a Tartar
+principality, which now forms one of the provinces of the vast
+Russian empire.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] These are large shallow ponds, in which sea water is
+exposed to evaporation, to procure salt.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>One day, while Marcus was absent, the khan or prince of the
+Tartars[3], broke open the door of our hut, and endeavoured to compel
+me by threats to deliver up the pearls which he believed I was
+possessed of, and I had infinite difficulty to escape out of his
+hands, and to persuade him not to put me to death. The Tartars used
+often to come to our hut in the night, when drunk with mead,
+demanding with loud outcries to deliver up the Franks to them, and
+the bravest among us were terrified at the dangerous situation in
+which we were among these savages. In this horrible situation we
+remained from the 1st of May to the 10th of August. The city of
+Citracan belongs to three brothers, who are sons to the brother of
+the Tartar emperor, and the inhabitants often make plundering inroads
+into the plains of <i>Cinassia</i> [4], and along the borders of the
+Don. During the height of summer they travel with their flocks in
+search of pasturage, to the northern parts of Russia, and hardly
+spend above a month every year in Citracan. That city, which stands
+on the banks of the Wolga, is by no means large, its houses being
+built of earth: It is surrounded by a slight wall, and does not
+appear to have had any better buildings for a long time past. It is
+said to have had a very considerable fair formerly, and that the
+perfumes and spiceries which used to be brought to Venice, came first
+to this place from the east, whence they were carried to the Tanais
+or Don, which is only eight days journey from the Wolga. The prince
+of Citracan, whose name is <i>Casinach</i> , sends every year an
+ambassador to the grand duke of Muscovy, on purpose to extort a
+present; and on this occasion, several Tartar merchants accompany the
+ambassador, carrying silk, silken vestments, and other articles of
+trade, which they barter for saddles, furs, and other things which
+are in request among their countrymen.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] In the original this person is called the cham of
+the <i>Camercheriens</i> . The Tartar government of Astracan belonged
+to one of the Mongal tribes of Kipschak; but the word used in the
+original may have been a local term, not now
+explicable.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] Perhaps the kingdom or province of Cazan, higher up
+the Wolga.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The only way of travelling into Russia from this place, is through
+extensive deserts, on which account travellers have to go in large
+bands or caravans for mutual security, and to carry provisions for
+the journey. The Tartars care little for the latter precaution, as
+they have always plenty of spare horses, and kill one when needed, as
+they live entirely on flesh and milk, without caring for any other
+food. They use no bread, and only a few of their merchants who have
+been in Russia know any thing of this article. Previous to the
+commencement of our journey[5], we provided provisions for the
+journey as well as we could. In this view we procured some rice with
+much difficulty, which, boiled in milk, and then dried in the sun,
+makes, when afterwards boiled in water, an excellent and nourishing
+food. We had likewise some onions, a small quantity of biscuit, and
+some other trifles, and I bought, during the journey, the salted tail
+of a sheep[6]. The usual road from Citracan to Russia lay between two
+branches of the Wolga, but the roads were then exceedingly dangerous,
+as the Tartar emperor was then at war with his nephew, who pretended
+a right to the throne, as his father had once been emperor. On this
+account it was proposed to pass over to the other side of the river,
+and to travel towards the straits between the Don and the Wolga,
+which are about five days journey from Citracan, after which it was
+presumed we should be out of danger. Our baggage was accordingly
+carried across the river on rafts, and Marcus desired me to keep
+always along with him and the Tartar ambassador,
+named <i>Auchioli</i> . I and my interpreter accordingly set out about
+mid-day along with the ambassador, to go to the place where the boats
+waited for us, which was about twelve miles from the city, our other
+companions having already gone there. On our arrival about sunset,
+while I prepared to go into one of the boats on purpose to cross the
+river, Marcus seemed suddenly struck with an extraordinary panic, and
+commanded the interpreter and me to take to flight instantly to avoid
+inevitable danger. We mounted therefore immediately, having likewise
+a Russian woman along with us and a Tartar guide of a most horrible
+aspect, and set out at full speed. In this manner we followed our
+guide the whole of that night and part of the next day, without being
+ever allowed to stop. I frequently asked our guide, by means of my
+interpreter, what was the reason of all this, and where he proposed
+to carry me? At length he explained the cause of Marcus having made
+us set off, with such precipitation; as the khan had sent an order to
+examine all the boats, and he was apprehensive they would have
+detained me as a slave if I had been found.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] Contarini has forgot to give us any account in what
+manner he procured leave to quit Astracan. Perhaps, by means of
+Marcus, he was permitted to pass for one of his
+attendants.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] It may be necessary to remark, that the tails of a
+peculiar species of sheep, O. Platyurus, or the broad-tailed sheep,
+common among the Tartars, and other parts of the world, are said
+sometimes to weigh twenty-five pounds.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>About mid-day of the 13th of August 1475, we arrived at the banks
+of the river, and our Tartar guide endeavoured to find a boat in
+which to carry us into an island in which the flocks of Auchioli were
+kept; but not finding one, he cut down some branches, which he tied
+together so as to form a raft. On this he placed the saddles of our
+horses, and tying this raft to his horses tail, he mounted the horse,
+on which he swam across the river to the island, which lay a bow-shot
+from the shore. He then came back with the raft, on which he carried
+over the Russian woman; after which he came back for me, and I
+stripped myself naked before trusting myself to the crazy raft, that
+I might be in readiness to save myself by swimming, in case of any
+misfortune. He afterwards returned for our horses; and my interpreter
+swam across. The passage of the river being thus happily effected,
+the Tartar carried us to a wretched hovel, covered by a miserable
+woollen cloth, where he gave us some sour milk, which we found very
+refreshing, as we had been long without food, and were much fatigued.
+Immediately on our arrival in the island being known, several Tartars
+left their flocks to come and see us, seeming infinitely surprized
+and much gratified by the sight, as we were probably the first
+Christians who had ever been on the island. Being exceedingly
+fatigued and distressed in mind, I did not care to speak with them,
+yet our Tartar guide treated me with much kindness, and made me as
+good cheer as he was able. Next day, being the eve of the festival of
+the Virgin, he killed a fat lamb to entertain me, part of which he
+roasted, and part was boiled; and though contrary to the rules of our
+religion to eat meat on that day, I made a hearty meal,
+notwithstanding that every thing was disgustingly dirty. We had
+likewise sour milk to drink, and the Tartars drank mares milk, of
+which they are very fond; but I would not drink this, though I could
+easily perceive my dislike did not please the Tartars.</p>
+<p>I remained here two days; and at last, on the 26th of August,
+Marcus and the rest made their appearance on the other side of the
+river, and sent a boat for me in which were two of his servants, a
+Russian and a Tartar. Stephen Testa and John Ungaret, my two
+attendants, were very much rejoiced at seeing me again, as they
+believed me entirely lost, and we rested two days at this place
+before entering upon the desert. Marcus had been so attentive as to
+provide a horse for me, of which I stood in great need. In this
+caravan, which was under the command of the Tartar ambassador, there
+were about three hundred persons, Russians and Tartars, who carried
+with them above two hundred[7] horses, partly intended to serve as
+food by the way, and partly for sale in Russia. We arrived in good
+order at night on the banks of the river, and we rested every day at
+noon during the fifteen days of our journey, as we were now
+considered to be out of danger from any attack by the Tartars. I do
+not recollect the name of the emperor of the Tartars who inhabit this
+part of the country between the Wolga and the Tanais. This nation has
+no fixed place of abode, but shift their encampments from place to
+place, wherever they can find pasture and water for their cattle, on
+which they have their whole dependence, as they subsist entirely on
+flesh and milk. They have cows, heifers, and sheep of admirable
+beauty, the flesh of which is excellent, as they feed on fine
+pastures; but these people prefer mares milk to every other delicacy.
+Though I have not been in the country of these Tartars, I have been
+informed that it is flat and agreeable, having neither hill nor
+mountain; but the inhabitants addict themselves excessively to
+robbery and plunder, as their sole occupation, and continually infest
+the borders of Russia and Circassia by predatory incursions. Their
+horses are very wild and unmanageable, and are never shod. We were
+told that there is another tribe of Tartars beyond the Wolga, named
+wild Tartars, who allow their hair to grow extremely long. In the
+middle of winter they often make inroads to the very skirts of the
+city of Citracan, whence they carry off cattle, but do no other
+damage. These people, like all the Tartars, shift their encampments
+in search of pasturage and water.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] Probably an error for 2000.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>After travelling for fifteen days along the eastern bank of the
+Wolga, we came to a small forest, where the Tartars and Russians of
+the caravan cut down trees to construct rafts for crossing the river.
+While they were at this work, we discovered a small bark which was by
+no means in good repair, by means of which our company proposed to
+convey our baggage across. Marcus crossed over with a part of our
+baggage, leaving me in charge of the rest, and sent back the boat
+when he was landed. In my trip with the remainder of our baggage, the
+boat began to leak when we were about half way over, the breadth of
+the river at this place being about two miles. Stephen and two
+Russians accompanied me in the boat, leaving Demetrius, my
+interpreter, and John Ungar in charge of the horses. We had much ado
+to bale out the water, but by the blessing of God, we got over in
+safety. After our baggage was landed, the Russians put off, to go
+back for the rest of our people and the horses; but the boat fell to
+pieces. This necessarily delayed our other servants and the horses
+from getting over till next day, during which interval they were
+badly off, as all our provisions were on our side. It was fortunate
+that I now examined the state of our provisions, which I found
+diminished much beyond expectation, so that we were under the
+necessity of abridging our allowance for the remainder of the
+journey, that we might not run short altogether. Our principal food
+consisted of millet, with garlic and onions, and some sour milk; and
+we found some wild apples at this place, which we roasted. In the
+course of two days, the whole baggage of the caravan was transported
+to the western side of the river by means of seven rafts, drawn by
+horses, and directed by the Tartars, the horses swimming and having
+the rafts tied to their tails. The sight of this was very amusing,
+but seemed very dangerous to those who were employed. After resting
+some time, we quitted the banks of the river, and resumed our
+journey. This river Wolga is certainly the largest and deepest river
+in the world, being, as well as I could judge, two miles broad, and
+has very high banks.</p>
+<p>SECTION VIII.</p>
+<p> <i>Contarini, after crossing European Sarmatia, arrives at Moscow,
+the capital of White Russia, and is presented to the Grand
+Duke.</i> </p>
+<p>After recommending ourselves to the protection of God, we
+continued our journey, through immense and terrible deserts,
+sometimes towards the north, and sometimes westerly[1], always
+resting at noon, and taking up our quarters for the night on the bare
+ground, without any protection against the weather. To prevent us
+from being surprized in the night by the wandering Tartars, outguards
+were placed every night in three directions around our resting-place.
+During the greater part of this long and dreary journey, we were very
+ill off for water both for ourselves and our cattle, and we never saw
+any wild animals. One day we saw about forty horses, which we were
+told had escaped from a caravan of merchants the year before. We fell
+in one day with a small horde of Tartars, having twenty waggons, but
+I was not able to learn where they were going. As our provisions
+decreased rapidly, we were forced to use the remainder very
+sparingly, and were consequently reduced to a very short
+allowance.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This journey appears to have been through the country
+on the west of the Wolga, which they probably passed about Czariein,
+through the provinces of Saratov, Woronez, and Penza, avoiding the
+Ilafla, to Rezan or Riazan.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the 22d of September 1475, we entered Russia, and discovered a
+few huts in the middle of a wood. On the inhabitants learning that
+Marcus, their countryman, was in our caravan, they came to see him
+that he might protect them from the Tartars, and brought him a
+present of honey and wax, a part of which he gave to us. This was a
+most providential supply, as we were so much reduced by fatigue and
+spare diet, that we were hardly able to sit on horseback. The first
+city we came to in this country was  <i>Rezan</i> [2], the prince of
+which place had married a sister of the Grand Duke of Russia. The
+castle and all the houses of this city are built of wood. We here
+procured bread and meat, and mead in abundance, to our great comfort
+and satisfaction. The next city we came to was <i>Kolomna</i> , passing
+a very large bridge over the <i>Monstrus</i> [3] which flows into the
+Wolga. At this place, Marcus quitted the caravan, which travelled too
+slowly in his opinion, and pushed on for Moscow, where we arrived on
+the 26th of September, after a journey of forty-seven days through
+the desert, from the 10th of August, on which day we left Citracan.
+In a great part of this journey we found no wood, and were forced to
+cook our victuals with fires made of dried cow dung. We returned
+thanks to God on our arrival, for our preservation through so many
+and great dangers. On our arrival, Marcus procured a dwelling for us,
+consisting of a small stove- room and some chambers, with stabling
+for our horses. Though small and mean, I felt as if lodged in a
+palace, when I compared my present state of tranquil security with
+the dangers and inconveniences I had been so long subjected to.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Rezan or Riazan, in the province of that name, on the
+Oka. In a considerable, part of the track of this journey, there are
+now towns and villages; but the whole of this south-eastern frontier
+of European Russia, appears to have been then entirely waste, and
+pervaded by the wandering Tartars. We are quite in the dark
+respecting the particulars of the route from Astracan to Rezan. It
+was certainty on the east of the Wolga at the first, to avoid the
+Tartars which occupied the country between the Caspian and Euxine.
+The passage of that vast river may have been at Czariein, at its
+great elbow, in lat. 48&deg; 30'N. or about Saratov in 51&deg; 20'N.
+neither of which towns seem to have then existed. From thence they
+would probably proceed, to avoid the larger rivers, between where
+Penza and Tchenbar now stand, and by the scite of Morbansk, towards
+Riazan.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] In the original this large bridge is said to have
+been at Kolomna, which is on the river Mosqua, of very inferior
+magnitude; and flows into the Oka, which most probably is the
+Monstrus of the text.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Marcus made me a visit two days afterwards, and supplied me with
+some necessaries, exhorting me, as on the part of his sovereign, to
+keep a good heart. I returned his visit next day; and being very
+desirous to return home to Venice, I requested him to introduce me to
+the grand duke, which he promised to do as soon as possible, and I
+soon afterwards was desired to go to court. Immediately on my getting
+there, I was conducted to an audience; on which I made my obeisance
+in due form to the grand duke, to whom I returned thanks for all the
+attentions I had received from his ambassador, Marcus, in the course
+of my journey, by whose assistance and advice I had escaped a
+thousand dangers; assuring his highness that I attributed these marks
+of kindness as done to the republic of Venice, whose ambassador I
+was, and that the republic would unquestionably evince a due sense of
+the obligations, to which I owed my life and safety. The grand duke
+interrupted my harangue, by complaining with much emotion of the
+conduct of <i>John Baptista</i>  of Treviso, and said a great deal on
+this subject, which is not proper for me to report. After a
+conversation of some length, in which I spoke to his highness about
+my departure, he closed my audience, postponing his answers to my
+requests to a future opportunity. The grand duke was very shortly to
+quit Moscow, on purpose to visit several parts of his dominions, and
+particularly the Tartar frontier, where one of his officers was
+stationed, with the command of 500 horse[4], to repress the
+incursions of robbers on that side: I therefore endeavoured to
+procure an answer about my departure, and solicited a second audience
+for that purpose. On this occasion I was very politely received by
+the grand duke, accompanied by three of his principal barons. At
+first they expatiated at some length on the subject of John Baptista,
+formerly mentioned; but at length I received liberty to remain or to
+depart as I thought proper. They dismissed me with this vague answer,
+and the grand duke set out from Moscow soon afterwards. I owed a
+great deal of money to Marcus, which he had expended for me and my
+people, as he had defrayed the whole expences of our journey, and had
+supplied me with many things of which I stood in need. I requested
+permission from him to go away, giving him the most solemn assurance
+that I would transmit full payment to him immediately after my
+arrival at Venice. But he declared this was not in his power, as he
+was under the necessity of repaying the Tartarian and Russian
+merchants, who had advanced all these things for us, and to whom he
+had become security for payment. Finding every application to the
+duke and Marcus on this subject ineffectual, as I could not procure
+the necessary funds for my journey from either, I was under the
+necessity of sending Stephen Testa to Venice, to solicit a remittance
+from our illustrious senate, by which I might be enabled to pay my
+debts. Stephen left Moscow on the 7th of October, accompanied by
+one <i>Nicolas Leopolitain</i> [5], who knew the country.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] In the original, the commander of this body of
+cavalry is said to have been a Tartarian general--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] The word Leopolitain, may possibly be a corruption
+for Neopolitan, or a native of Naples. Perhaps it may refer to
+Leopol, in that part of Poland now belonging to Austria, and called
+Galicia.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>I became acquainted at Moscow with one Triphon, a goldsmith, a
+native of Ascravia or Cathara, who was employed in making several
+articles of silver plate for the grand duke. I likewise formed
+acquaintance with a very ingenious architect of Bologna, named
+Aristotle, who was building a new church in the market-place. As the
+house in which I lodged was small and disagreeable, I went to live
+with this person by the advice of Marcus: But I was soon after
+obliged to change my quarters by order from court, to a house near
+the castle, in which I remained for the rest of my stay at Moscow.
+This city, which is the capital of the Russian dominions, and the
+residence of the grand duke, or sovereign, is built on a small
+elevation, on the banks of the Mosqua, over which there are several
+bridges; the castle and all the houses of the city being built of
+wood, which is procured from several thick forests near the place.
+The soil of this country is fertile, and produces abundance of corn
+of all kinds, which sell here much cheaper than with us; The country
+abounds in cattle and swine, and with incredible numbers of poultry,
+ducks, geese, and hares; but they have no venison, either because
+there are no deer, or because the natives are ignorant of the art of
+taking them. But they have no vines, and their only fruits are
+cucumbers, wild apples, and nuts. The country is extremely cold, and
+the inhabitants are under the necessity of living for nine months of
+the year in stoves. They provide during winter for their living in
+summer[6]. When the whole country is enveloped in frost and snow,
+they use sledges drawn by horses, which are very convenient and
+useful for travelling; and are even used in summer on account of the
+miry bad roads, which are exceedingly difficult and unpleasant. The
+river ordinarily freezes over about the end of October, when the
+merchants erect booths on the ice, in which they expose their wares
+of all kinds for sale, as in a fair or market; and they here sell
+great numbers of cattle and swine, and great quantities of corn,
+timber, and all other necessaries of life; every thing being
+procurable in great abundance all the winter. About the end of
+November, they kill all the cattle, sheep, and other animals that are
+required for winter provision, and expose them for sale on the river
+in a frozen state; and the rigour of the season preserves these
+provisions for two or three months, without any risk of spoiling.
+Fish, poultry, and all other articles of food, are kept in the same
+manner. The horses run with great ease and swiftness on the ice yet
+they sometimes fell and break their necks. Both men and women of this
+country have very good faces, but their manners are exceedingly
+bad.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] Such is the expression in the original, which ought
+perhaps to be reversed. Yet Contarini possibly meant to say, that the
+inhabitants of Moscow laid up a sufficient stock of money from the
+profits of their long winter labours, for their subsistence during
+summer; when, by the absence of the court, they had little
+employment.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The Russian church is ruled over by a patriarch, whose election or
+appointment is dependent on the grand duke, and who does not
+acknowledge subjection to the Roman pontiff; and they hold all
+sectaries in abhorrence, as people doomed to perdition. The natives
+are much addicted to drunkenness, and he who excels in drinking is
+much esteemed among them. They have no wine, as I have said before,
+instead of which they drink mead, made of honey and water, which is
+very pleasant when sufficiently kept. It is not allowed to every one
+to make this liquor, for which purpose a license or permission must
+be had from the grand duke; for if every person had liberty to make
+mead, they would drink perpetually like so many beasts, and would
+kill one another. From morning till noon, they are employed in the
+market-place, occupied in their various businesses and employments,
+after which they adjourn to the taverns, in which they spend all the
+rest of the day. Every winter, great numbers of merchants come to
+Moscow from Germany and Poland, who purchase furs of all kinds, which
+are indeed exceedingly beautiful. Among these furs, are the skins of
+foxes, wolves, martins, sables, ermines, and many others, from
+Scythia and the alpine regions, many days journey to the north of
+Moscow. Many of these are likewise carried for sale to Novogorod[7],
+a city towards the frontiers of Germany, eight days journey west from
+Moscow. The government of that city is democratic, and only pays a
+stipulated yearly tribute to the grand duke.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] There are two cities named Novogrod or Novgorod in
+Russia, nearly at equal distances from Moscow, one to the northwest,
+and the other to the southwest; the latter of which, named Novgorod
+Sieverskov, is probably meant in the text, and which ought rather to
+have been described as towards the frontiers of Poland. The other
+Novgorod did not then belong to the Russian
+sovereignty.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The country subject to the grand duke of Russia is of vast extent,
+and an infinite number of people are subject to his dominions, but
+they are by no means warlike. This empire extends from the north
+towards the west, to that part of Germany which is under the dominion
+of the king of Poland[8]; and some reckon among his subjects a
+wandering nation of idolaters, who acknowledge no sovereign, not even
+submitting to the authority of the grand duke, but when it suits
+their own convenience. These wandering tribes are said to worship
+during the day whatever first presents itself to their view, on going
+out in the morning; many other ridiculous things are reported of
+them, which I do not repeat, as I have not seen them, and can hardly
+give credit to the reports. The grand duke[9] appeared to be about
+thirty-five years of age, was handsomely made, and had very dignified
+manners, and an air quite royal. His mother was still alive, and he
+had two brothers. By a former wife he had two sons, who did not agree
+with Despina, the reigning grand duchess, and were not therefore on
+very friendly terms with their father. Despina, his second wife, had
+brought him two daughters, and was said to be again with child.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] The geographical ideas of Contarini are very vague
+and superficial. This is perhaps the only instance wherein Poland; a
+portion of European Sarmatia, is considered as belonging
+geographically to Germany.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[9] The reigning sovereign of Russia at the period was
+John III. who began to reign in 1463, and was succeeded in 1505 by
+Basil IV.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The grand duke returned to Moscow from his journey to the
+frontiers about the end of December; and, as I could not reconcile
+myself to the manners and mode of life of the Russians, I became
+exceedingly impatient to leave the country, and could not persuade
+myself to stay for the return of Stephen from Venice with money. For
+this reason, I made interest with one of the lords of the court, to
+prevail on the grand duke to supply me with money, and to give me
+leave to depart. A few days afterwards, the grand duke sent for me to
+court and invited me to dinner, when he agreed, from respect to the
+republic, to lend me as much money as was necessary to clear all my
+debts to the Tartarian and Russian merchants, and to enable me to
+return to Venice. The dinner was quite magnificent, consisting of
+every delicacy, and of abundance of exquisitely dressed dishes. When
+the repast was finished, I retired according to custom. Some days
+afterwards, I was again invited to court, and the grand duke gave
+orders his treasurer to give me all the money necessary for paying my
+debts, besides which, he presented me with 1000 ducats, and a
+magnificent dress of Scythian squirrels skins, to wear in his
+presence when I came to court. Before returning to my quarters, he
+ordered me to be presented to the grand duchess, who received me very
+graciously, and desired me to offer her respectful salutations to our
+illustrious republic, which I promised to do.</p>
+<p>SECTION IX.</p>
+<p> <i>Contarini leaves Moscow, and having passed through Lithuania,
+Poland, and Germany, arrives at Venice.</i> </p>
+<p>On the day before that which I had fixed for my departure, I was
+invited to dine at court. Before dinner, I was taken into one of the
+halls of the palace, where I found the grand duke, accompanied by
+Marcus and a secretary. His highness addressed me very graciously,
+and desired me to report all the marks of esteem and friendship he
+had shewn me, from respect to our illustrious republic, and offered
+me every thing I could desire, and which lay in his power to grant.
+While speaking, I drew back from respect; but as I retired he always
+advanced. I answered every thing to his satisfaction, and humbly
+offered my most grateful thanks for all his benevolence to me. He
+treated me with the utmost politeness and familiarity, and even
+condescended to shew me some robes of gold tissue, magnificently
+lined with Scythian sables; after which we went to dinner. The repast
+was extraordinarily magnificent, at which several of the barons and
+great officers of state assisted. When we rose from table, the grand
+duke called me to him, and gave me my audience of leave in the most
+gracious terms, speaking so loud as to be heard by all the company,
+and expressing his high esteem for the illustrious republic of
+Venice. After this, by his order, a silver cup was brought to me
+filled with mead, of which he made me a present, as a mark of high
+regard with which he honours ambassadors, and other persons to whom
+he shews favour. This present was to me a matter of very serious
+consideration, as the etiquette required me to empty its contents,
+and the cup was very large. When I had drained about a quarter of the
+liquor, knowing the sobriety of the Italians, and perceiving that I
+was much difficulted, the grand duke had the goodness to order the
+remainder to be emptied, and the goblet given to me. Having thanked
+the grand duke in as respectful terms as I was able, I took my leave
+and retired, accompanied by several barons and other persons of
+rank.</p>
+<p>Every thing was now in readiness for my departure, but Marcus
+would by no means hear of my leaving Moscow, without taking a dinner
+with him, and accordingly gave me a magnificent entertainment. Louis,
+the patriarch of Antioch, of whom I have before made mention, came
+about this time to Moscow, and was detained there by order of the
+grand duke; but I made interest through Marcus for his release, which
+I obtained, and he was to have travelled along with me. But as he
+delayed too long, I set off without him. At length, on the 21st
+January 1476, we set out from Moscow in sledges, made like small
+huts, each drawn by a horse, and guided by a driver. In these sledges
+we carried our baggage and provisions along with us, and in them,
+journeys of great length may be made in a wonderfully short time. By
+order of the grand duke, I had a guide appointed to conduct me on the
+right road, and this was continued from place to place all, through
+his dominions. We slept the first night in a small village, where we
+found our lodgings exceedingly cold, but that was the smallest of our
+inconveniencies, and on this account I hastened our journey as much
+as possible. On the 27th of January, we arrived at <i>Vieseme</i> , and
+a few days afterwards at Smolensk on the frontiers of Lithuania, in
+the dominions of Casimir king of Poland. From Smolensk, till we
+arrived at  <i>Trach</i> [1], a city of Lithuania, we travelled
+continually in a plain interspersed with some hills, the whole
+country being covered with wood, and our only lodgings were in
+miserable hovels; dining always about noon wherever we could meet
+with a fire, which had been left burning by travellers who had passed
+before us. We had generally to break the ice to procure water for our
+horses; we lighted fires to warm ourselves; and our sledges served us
+instead of beds, as without them we must have slept on the ground. We
+went with such expedition, over the frozen snow, that we were assured
+we had travelled 300 miles in three days and two nights.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This almost certainty a corruption of
+Troki--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Casimir king of Poland, who then resided at <i>Troki</i> ,
+immediately on learning my arrival, sent two of his gentlemen to
+compliment me in his name, and to congratulate me on my safe return.
+They likewise invited me to dine with his majesty on the following
+day, which was the 15th of February, and presented me on the part of
+the king with a robe of purple damask, lined with Scythian furs, in
+which I dressed myself to go to court. On this occasion, I went in a
+coach and six, accompanied by four noblemen and several other
+persons. The king himself did me the honour to receive me, and
+conducted me into a magnificent apartment, where he introduced me to
+two of his sons in presence of many nobles, knights, and gentlemen of
+the court. A chair was placed for me in the middle of the room; and
+when I offered to kneel on one knee while addressing the king, his
+majesty had the goodness to insist that I should sit down in his
+presence, which I did after some hesitation. I then gave a recital of
+all that had occurred in my travels, with some account of the
+dominions of Uzun-Hassan, and of the number of his forces, and of the
+empire and manners of the Tartars. The king and his courtiers
+listened to me with much attention during my whole speech, which
+lasted more than half an hour. I then thanked his majesty for the
+present he had made me, and for all his kindnesses to me, attributing
+his attentions to the esteem he entertained for our illustrious
+republic. His majesty was pleased, by means of an interpreter, to
+express great satisfaction at my safe arrival, as he hardly expected
+I should ever have been able to return; and that he was much pleased
+with the information I had given him respecting Uzun- Hassan and the
+Tartars, which he believed to be more authentic than any he had
+received before. After some other discourse, I was conducted to the
+hall where the dinner was served; soon after which his majesty came
+into the hall with his two sons, preceded by several trumpets. The
+king sat down at the head of the table, having his two sons on his
+right hand; the primate of the kingdom sat next on his majestys left,
+and I was placed next the bishop. The remainder of the table was
+occupied by about forty of the nobles. Each service was ushered in
+with the sound of trumpets, and all the meats were served on large
+silver dishes.</p>
+<p>After dinner, which lasted two hours, I rose to depart, and asked
+the king if he had any farther orders to honour me with; when he was
+pleased to say very graciously, that he charged me to assure the
+senate that his most anxious desire was to cultivate perpetual
+friendship and good-will with our illustrious republic, and he was
+pleased to make his sons express the same friendly wishes. Having
+respectfully taken leave of the king, I was conducted back to my
+lodgings by several of the courtiers.</p>
+<p>Being supplied with a guide, I departed from Troki on the 16th of
+February, and in nine days, passing through the city of <i>Ionici</i> ,
+I arrived at Warsaw on the 1st of March. The country of Poland
+appeared very pleasant, and abundant in every, thing except fruit.
+During our journey we saw many villages and castles, and were well
+received everywhere, but we found no considerable city. After
+remaining four days in Warsaw, where I purchased horses for the rest
+of our journey, we set out from that place on the 5th of March, and
+came that day to a town call  <i>Messarig</i> , where we began to
+travel with less assurance of safety, as this place is on the
+frontiers towards Germany. On the 9th I arrived at Frankfort on the
+Oder, from which place we found more commodious lodgings in
+traversing Germany, than we had been accustomed to for a long time.
+While passing the city of <i>Gia</i> [2], on the 15th of March, I had
+the good fortune to meet with Stephen Testa, whom I had sent from
+Moscow to Venice for money. I was quite delighted at this meeting, as
+from him I received good accounts from home. We now entered the city
+of <i>Gia</i> , where we rested two days. On the 22d we reached
+Nurenburgh, where we remained four days; from whence we went by
+Augsburgh, and several other fine cities of Germany, and arrived at
+Trent on the 4th of April, where we celebrated the festival of
+Easter. Being extremely anxious to revisit my beloved country, I set
+out from thence after three days stay, and reached <i>Scala</i> , in
+the dominions of our republic. In discharge of a vow that I had
+entered into, I went to visit the church of the blessed Virgin on
+Mount Arthon, and presented the offerings which I had promised at her
+holy shrine. I had already sent notice to my brother Augustine, that
+he might expect me in Venice towards evening of the 10th of April;
+but my extreme desire of getting back to my country, made me get home
+considerably earlier. Embarking at break of day, I arrived at three
+in the afternoon at <i>Lucafusina</i> ; and, before going to my own
+house, I went, in the discharge of another vow, to the church of
+our <i>Lady of Grace</i> , and met my brother on my way in the Jews
+street. We embraced with great affection, and went together to the
+church. After finishing my devotions, I went to the palace, as
+the <i>Pregadi</i>  were then assembled, it being on a Thursday. I was
+admitted into the council, to which I gave an account of the success
+of my embassy; after which, as our serene Doge was indisposed, I paid
+my respects to him in his apartment, and gave him a short history of
+my travels, and particularly concerning those things on which I had
+been commissioned. From thence I went to my own house, where I gave
+thanks to God for his infinite mercy, in having permitted me to
+return in health and safety, after so many dangers. To conclude:
+Although I might have composed this narrative of my travels in a more
+eloquent style, I have preferred truth in few words, to falsehood
+dressed up in ornamented language. I have been very brief in relation
+to Germany, as that country is in our neighbourhood, and is therefore
+well known to many, on which account it would have been both
+superfluous and tiresome to have given a minute description of what
+every one knows.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Though this place must assuredly be a town in
+Germany, between Frankfort on the Oder and Nurenburgh, its name is so
+disguised as to be quite unintelligible.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION X.</p>
+<p> <i>Recapitulation of some circumstances respecting Persia.</i> </p>
+<p>The empire of Uzun-Hassan is very extensive, and is bounded by
+Turkey and Caramania, belonging to the Sultan, and which latter
+country extends to Aleppo. Uzun-Hassan took the kingdom of Persia
+from <i>Causa</i> [1], whom he put to death. The city of Ecbatana, or
+Tauris, is the usual residence of Uzun-Hassan; Persepolis,
+or <i>Shiras</i> [2], which is twenty-four days journey from thence,
+being the last city of his empire, bordering on the Zagathais, who
+are the sons of Buzech, sultan of the Tartars, and with whom he is
+continually at war. On the other side is the country of Media, which
+is under subjection to <i>Sivansa</i> , who pays a kind of yearly
+tribute to Uzun-Hassan. It is said that he has likewise some
+provinces on the other side of the Euphrates, in the neighbourhood of
+the Turks[3]. The whole country, all the way to Ispahan, six days
+journey from Persepolis, is exceedingly arid, having very few trees
+and little water, yet it is fertile in grain and other provisions.
+The king seemed to me about seventy years of age, of large stature,
+with a pleasant countenance, and very lean. His eldest son, named
+Ogurlu Mohamed, was much spoken of when I was in Persia, as he had
+rebelled against his father. He had other three sons; Khalil Mirza,
+the elder of these was about thirty-five years old, and had the
+government of Shiras. Jacub beg, another son of Uzun- Hassan, was
+about fifteen, and I have forgotten the name of a third son.[4] By
+one of his wives he had a son named <i>Masubech</i> , or Maksud beg,
+whom he kept in prison, because he was detected in corresponding with
+his rebellious brother <i>Ogurlu</i> , and whom he afterwards put to
+death. According to the best accounts which I received from different
+persons, the forces of Uzun-Hassan may amount to about 50,000
+cavalry, a considerable part of whom are not of much value. It has
+been reported by some who were present, that at one time he led an
+army of 40,000 Persians to battle against the Turks, for the purpose
+of restoring <i>Pirameth</i>  to the sovereignty of Karamania, whence
+he had been expelled by the infidels.[5]</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Uzun-Hassan, as formerly mentioned, was prince of the
+Turkmans of the white sheep tribe, and acquired the dominion of
+western Persia, by the defeat of Hassan-ali prince of the black sheep
+Turkmans, who is probably the person named Causa in the
+text.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] This is a mistake, Persepolis is supposed to have
+been at, or near Istakar, above twenty miles N.N.E. from
+Shiras.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] Diarbekir, with the cities of Arzunjan, Mardin, Roha,
+or Orfa, and Siwas, are said to have been committed by Timour to the
+government of Kara Ilug Ozman, the great grandfather of Uzun-Hassan,
+who may have retained the original possessions of his tribe after the
+acquisition of western Persia.--Mod. Univ. Hist. VI.
+111.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] According to the authors of the Modern Universal
+History. B. VIII. ch. i. sect. 3. Uzun-Hassan had seven sons: Ogurlu
+Mohammed, Khahil Mirza, Maksud beg, Jakub beg, Masih beg, Yusuf beg,
+and Zegnel. Contarini strangely corrupts almost every name that
+occurs. Uzun-Hassan, he makes Unsuncassan; Ogurlu Mohammed, Gurlu
+mamech; Kalil mirza, Sultan chali; Yakub beg, Lacubei; Maksud beg, or
+Masih beg, Masubech; and omits three of the seven.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] Uzun-Hassan is said to have been defeated in battle
+by the Turks, in 1471, near Arzenjan.--Mod. Univ. Hist. VI.
+113.</blockquote>
+<h2><a name="chapter2-3" id="chapter2-3">CHAPTER III.</a></h2>
+CHAPTER III.
+<p><b> <i>Voyages of discovery by the Portuguese along the western
+coast of Africa, during the life, and under the direction of Don
+Henry.</i> </b>[1]</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Astley. I. 9. Clarke, I. 140. Purchas, I. 6. Harris,
+I. 662.</blockquote>
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+<p>The knowledge possessed by the ancients respecting India, will be
+the subject of discussion in a future portion of this work. We have
+now to contemplate the tedious, yet finally successful efforts of the
+Portuguese nation, in its age of energetic heroism, to discover a
+maritime passage to that long famed commercial region, some general
+knowledge of which had been preserved ever since the days of the
+Persian, Macedonian, and Roman empires. Of all the great events which
+have occurred in the modern ages, previous to our own times, the
+voyages and discoveries which were made by the Europeans, in the
+fifteenth and sixteenth centuries of the Christian era, are justly
+entitled to preference, whether we appreciate the vast improvements
+which they made in navigation, and, consequently, in commerce,--the
+astonishing abundance of wealth which they brought into Europe,--the
+surprising feats of bravery which were performed in their various
+expeditions and conquests,--the extensive, populous, and valuable
+territories which were subdued or colonized,--or the extended
+knowledge, which was suddenly acquired of the greater part of the
+earth, till then either altogether unknown, or very partially and
+erroneously described. By these discoveries, we allude to those of
+the southern and western hemispheres, a new heaven and a new earth
+were opened up to the astonishment of mankind, who may be said to
+have been then furnished with wings to fly from one end of the earth
+to the other, so as to bring the most distant, and hitherto utterly
+unknown nations, acquainted with each other. In the ordinary course
+of human affairs, it has been observed that similar events frequently
+occur; but the transactions of these times which we now propose to
+narrate, were as singular in their kind as they were great,
+surprising, and unexpected; neither can any such ever happen again,
+unless Providence were to create new and accessible worlds for
+discovery and conquest, or to replunge the whole of mankind for a
+long period into the grossest ignorance.</p>
+<p>The merit and glory of these wonderful achievements are
+unquestionably due to the Portuguese nation, and the first and
+principal share to the sublime genius of their illustrious prince,
+the infant DON HENRY, <i>Duke of Viseo and Grand Master of the order
+of Christ</i> , whose enlarged mind first planned the fitting out of
+maritime expeditions for discovery, and by the imitation of whose
+example all subsequent discoveries have been accomplished. Every
+thing of the kind before his time was isolated or accidental, and
+every subsequent attempt has been pursued on scientific or known
+principles, which he invented and established. Although America was
+discovered by Columbus, in the service of Spain, some years before
+the Portuguese were able to accomplish their long sought route to
+India; and although the discovery of America was performed infinitely
+quicker than that of southern Africa and the route to India, Columbus
+having accomplished his design at the very first attempt, and even
+without any previous knowledge of the countries he went in search of;
+while the endeavours of the Portuguese occupied a great number of
+years in almost fruitless attempts, and extremely tedious
+progression; yet Don Henry first set on foot the navigation of the
+ocean through unknown seas, and inspired, other nations with the idea
+of making discoveries of distant and unexplored regions; and
+ultimately great as were the discoveries of Columbus, they may be
+said to have been accidentally made in the erroneous attempt to go by
+a nearer route to the regions of which Don Henry and his successors
+had long been in search.</p>
+<p>These attempts of the Portuguese had been continued for nearly
+fourscore years before any of their neighbours seem to have
+entertained the most distant idea of engaging in foreign discoveries,
+even viewing their endeavours as downright knight-errantry,
+proceeding from a distempered imagination, as well in the first
+promoter as in those who continued to prosecute his scheme. In a
+word, the relation of these discoveries forms one of the most curious
+portions of modern history, as comprizing a great number of the most
+extraordinary transactions that ever happened in any period of the
+world. For this reason they are well worthy of being particularly
+narrated, that the curious may be made acquainted with every
+successive step in such important enterprizes, and by what almost
+insensible degrees such vast undertakings were ultimately
+accomplished. And as the intercourse of Europeans has operated a
+great change in the countries to which they penetrated, and upon
+their original inhabitants, so that both now appear in a very
+different light from what they did before these expeditions and
+discoveries; therefore, every circumstance belonging to these
+transactions deserves the most serious notice.</p>
+<p>John 1. of Portugal, married Philippa, the eldest daughter of John
+of Gaunt, Duke of Lancaster, son to Edward III. of England, by whom
+he had several sons, of whom Don Henry was the <i>fifth</i> . After
+serving with great bravery under his father at the capture of Ceuta,
+he was raised to the dukedom of Viseo, and was sent back with a large
+reinforcement to preserve the conquest to which his courage had
+largely contributed. During his continuance in command at Ceuta, he
+acquired much information, by occasional converse with some Moors,
+relative to the seas and coasts of Western Africa, which raised and
+encouraged the project of maritime discoveries; and these became
+afterwards the favourite and almost exclusive pursuit of his active
+and enlarged mind. From the Moors he obtained intelligence respecting
+the Nomadic tribes who border upon and pervade the great desert, and
+of the nations of the Jaloofs, whose territories are conterminous
+with the desert on the north, and Guinea to the south. By one
+ingenious author[2], he has been supposed instigated to his first
+attempts at maritime discovery, by the desire of finding a way by sea
+to those countries from whence the Moors brought ivory and gold dust
+across the desert. It unfortunately happens that we have no record of
+the particular voyages themselves, and are therefore reduced to the
+necessity of giving the relation of this great discovery historically
+from the best remaining sources of information. The writings of Cada
+Morto, which will be found in the sequel, form a pleasing exception
+to this desideratum in the history and progress of early navigation
+and discovery.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Wealth of Nations, II. 347.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+<p> <i>Commencement of Portuguese Discoveries, from Cape Non to Cape
+Bojador</i> </p>
+<p>Three years before the reduction of Ceuta, the Duke of Visco had
+sent a vessel in 1412 to explore the western coast of Africa, being
+the first voyage of discovery undertaken by the Portuguese, or by any
+other nation in modern times. The commander was instructed to
+endeavour to follow the western coast of Africa, to the southward of
+Cape Chaunar, called by the Portuguese mariners Cape Nao, Non, or
+Nam, which, extending itself from the foot of Mount Atlas, had
+hitherto been the <i>non plus ultra</i>  or impassable limit of
+European navigation, and had accordingly received its ordinary name
+from a negative term in the Portuguese language, as implying that
+there was no navigation beyond; and respecting which a proverbial
+saying was then current, of the following import:</p>
+<p>Whoe'er would pass the Cape of Non<br>
+Shall turn again; or else be gone.</p>
+<p>The success of this earliest voyage, fitted out for the purpose of
+discovery, is not recorded; but Don Henry continued to send some
+vessels every year to the same coast, with the same instructions of
+endeavouring to explore the coast beyond Cape Non. Not daring to
+trust themselves beyond sight of land, the mariners crept timorously
+along the coast, and at length reached Cape Bojador, only sixty
+leagues, or 180 miles beyond Cape Non. This cape, which stretches
+boldly out into the ocean, from which circumstance it derives its
+name[1], filled the Portuguese mariners with terror and amazement;
+owing to the shoals by which it is environed for the space of six
+leagues, being perpetually beaten by a lofty and tremendous surge,
+which precluded them, from all possibility of proceeding beyond it in
+their ordinary manner of creeping along the coast; and they dared not
+to stretch out into the open sea in quest of smoother water, lest,
+losing sight of land altogether, they might wander in the trackless
+ocean, and be unable to find their way home. It is not impossible
+that they might contemplate the imaginary terrors of the torrid zone,
+as handed down from some of the ancients, with all its burning soil
+and scorching vapours; and they might consider the difficulties of
+Cape Bojador as a providential bar or omen, to warn and oppose them
+against proceeding to their inevitable destruction. They accordingly
+measured back their wary steps along the African coast, and returned
+to Portugal, where they gave an account of their proceedings to Don
+Henry, in which, of course, the dangers of the newly discovered cape
+would not be diminished in their narrative[2].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Explained by the celebrated Dr Johnson, as "so named
+from its progression into the ocean, and the circuit by which it must
+be doubled." Introduct. to the World Displayed.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] Cape Bojador is imagined to have been
+the <i>Canarea</i>  of Ptolemy.-- Clarke I. 15</blockquote>
+<p>Returning from Ceuta, where his presence was no longer necessary,
+and where he had matured his judgment by intercourse with, various
+learned men whom his bounty had attracted into Africa, and having
+enlarged his views by the perusal of every work which tended to
+illustrate the discoveries which he projected, Don Henry fixed his
+residence at the romantic town of Sagres, in the neighbourhood of
+Cape St Vincent, where he devoted his leisure to the study of
+mathematics, astronomy, cosmography, and the theory of navigation,
+and even established a school or academy for instructing his
+countrymen in these sciences, the parents of commerce, and the sure
+foundations of national prosperity. To assist him in the prosecution
+of these his favourite studies, he invited, from Majorca, a person
+named Diego, or James, who was singularly skilful in the management
+of the instruments then employed for making astronomical observations
+at sea, and in the construction of nautical charts. Some traces of
+nautical discoveries along the western coast of Africa still remained
+in ancient authors; particularly of the reported voyages of Menelaus,
+Hanno, Eudoxus, and others. From an attentive consideration of these,
+Don Henry and his scientific coadjutor were encouraged to hope for
+the accomplishment of important discoveries in that direction; and
+they were certainly incited in these views by the rooted enmity which
+had so long rankled among the Christian inhabitants of Spain and
+Portugal against the Moors, who had formerly expelled their ancestors
+from the greatest part of the peninsula, and with whom they had waged
+an incessant war of several centuries in recovering the country from
+their grasp.</p>
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+<p> <i>Discovery of the Madeira Islands.</i> </p>
+<p>After some time usefully employed in acquiring and diffusing a
+competent knowledge of cosmopographical, nautical, and astronomical
+science, Don Henry resolved to devote a considerable portion of the
+revenue which he enjoyed as Grand Master of the Order of Christ, in
+continuing and extending those projects of nautical discovery which
+had long occupied his attention. Accordingly, about the year 1418, a
+new expedition of discovery was fitted out for the express purpose of
+attempting to surmount the perils of Cape Bojador. In this expedition
+Juan Gonzales Zarco and Tristan Vaz Texeira, two naval officers of
+the household of Don Henry, volunteered their services; and,
+embarking in a vessel called a  <i>barcha</i> [3], steered for the
+tremendous cape. The Portuguese were hitherto ignorant of the
+prevailing winds upon the coast of Africa, and the causes by which
+their influence is varied or increased. Near the land, and between
+the latitudes of 28&deg; and 10&deg; north, a fresh gale almost
+always blows from the N.E. Long sand-banks, which extend a great way
+out to sea, and which are extremely difficult to be distinguished in
+the mornings and evenings, and the prevailing currents, were powerful
+obstacles to the enterprise of these navigators. About six leagues
+off Cape Bojador, a most violent current continually dashes upon the
+breakers, which presented a most formidable obstacle to the brave but
+inexperienced mariners. Though their voyage was short, they
+encountered many dangers; and, before they could reach the cape, they
+were encountered by a heavy gale from the east, by which the billows
+of the Atlantic became too heavy to be resisted by their small
+vessel, and they were driven out to sea. On losing sight of their
+accustomed head lands, and being forced into the boundless ocean for
+the first time, the ships company gave themselves up to despair; but,
+on the abatement of the tempest, they found themselves unexpectedly
+within view of an island, situated about 100 leagues west from the
+coast of Africa. With extreme joy they beheld the coast of this
+island extending about twenty miles in length, to which they gave the
+name of Puerto Santo, because first discovered upon the feast of All
+Saints. This is the smaller of the Madeiras, being only about two
+miles broad; and, as the only roadstead is upon the south-west side,
+the Portuguese probably anchored upon that side to be under the lee
+shelter of the island from the remnants of the tempest from which
+they had happily escaped.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] The <i>barcha</i>  is a sort of brig with topsails,
+having all its yards on one long pole without sliding masts, as still
+used by tartans and settees. The <i>barcha longa</i>  is a kind of
+small galley, with one mast and oars.--Clark. I. p. 153.</blockquote>
+<p>The island of <i>Puerto Santo</i> , or of the Holy Haven, is almost
+directly west from Cape Cantin; whence it would appear that these
+Portuguese navigators could hardly have passed much beyond Cape de
+Geer, when driven off the coast by this fortunate easterly tempest.
+Had they even advanced as far as Cape Non, they would almost
+certainly have been driven among the Canaries. It is perfectly
+obvious that they never even approached Cape Bojador in this voyage;
+unless we could suppose, after having been driven directly west from
+that cape, that they shaped a northern course, after the subsidence
+of the tempest, and fell in with Puerto Santo while on their return
+to Portugal.</p>
+<p>Greatly pleased with the soil and climate of this island, and with
+the gentle manners of the natives, whom they described as in an
+intermediate state of civilization, and entirely destitute of any
+appearance of savage ferocity, Zarco and Vaz immediately returned to
+Portugal, where they made a report of the incidents of their voyage;
+and to confirm their opinion of the value of their discovery, they
+requested permission from Don Henry to return for the purpose of
+establishing a settlement in Puerto Santo. By this discovery an
+advanced and favourable station was secured towards the south, whence
+any discoveries along the coast of Africa might be prosecuted with
+greater ease and safety, and from whence the dangers of the hitherto
+formidable cape Bojador might be avoided, by keeping a southerly or
+S. W. course from Puerto Santo. From these considerations Don Henry
+granted their request; and, yielding to the adventurous spirit which
+this accidental discovery had excited, he permitted several persons
+to join in a new projected voyage, among whom was Bartholomew
+Perestrello, a nobleman of his household.</p>
+<p>Three vessels were soon fitted out[4], which were placed under the
+respective commands of Zarco, Vaz, and Perestrello. These commanders
+had orders to colonize and cultivate the newly discovered island, and
+were furnished with a considerable assortment of useful seeds and
+plants for that purpose. They happened likewise to take with them a
+female rabbit great with young, which littered during the voyage; and
+which being let loose with her progeny, multiplied so rapidly, that,
+in two years, they became so numerous as to occasion serious injury
+to the early attempts at cultivation, and to baffle every hope of
+rendering Puerto Santo a place of refreshment for the Portuguese
+navigators; insomuch that a resolution was formed to abandon the
+newly established settlement. After having landed the different
+animals and seeds which had been sent out by Don Henry, and seeing
+them properly distributed, Perestrello returned into Portugal to make
+a report to the prince, and Zarco and Vaz remained to superintend the
+infant colony.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Clarke says in the same year 1418. But this could not
+well be, as the Discovery of Puerto Santo was made so late as the 1st
+of November of that year. The truth is, that only very general
+accounts of these early voyages remain in the Portuguese
+historians.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Soon after the departure of Perestrello, the attention of Zarco
+and Vaz was strongly excited by observing certain clouds or vapours
+at a great distance in the ocean, which continually presented the
+same aspect, and preserved exactly the same bearing from Puerto
+Santo, and at length occasioned a conjecture, that the appearance
+might proceed from land in that quarter. Gonsalvo and Vaz accordingly
+put to sea and sailed towards the suspected land, and soon discovered
+that the appearances which had attracted their notice actually
+proceeded from a considerable island entirely overgrown with wood, to
+which, on that account, they gave the name of Madeira[5]. After
+bestowing considerable attention upon the soil and other
+circumstances of this island, which was utterly destitute of
+inhabitants, Gonzalvo and Vaz returned to Portugal with the welcome
+intelligence, and gave so favourable a report of the extent,
+fertility, and salubrity of Madeira, that Don Henry determined to
+colonize and cultivate it. Accordingly, with the consent of the king
+of Portugal, the island of Madeira was bestowed in hereditary
+property upon Zarco and Vaz; one division named <i>Funchal</i>  being
+given to Zarco, and the other moiety, named <i>Machico</i> , to
+Vaz.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] Such is the simple and probable account of the
+discovery of Madeira in Purchas. Clarke has chosen to embellish it
+with a variety of very extraordinary circumstances, which being
+utterly unworthy of credit, we do not think necessary to be inserted
+in this place. See Progress of Maritime Discovery, I.
+157.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the year 1420 Zarco began the plantation of Madeira, and being
+much impeded in his progress by the immense quantity of thick and
+tall trees, with which it was then everywhere encumbered, he set the
+wood on fire to facilitate the clearing of the surface for
+cultivation. The wood is reported to have continued burning for seven
+years[6], and so great was the devastation as to occasion great
+inconvenience to the colony for many years afterwards, from the want
+of timber. Don Henry appears to have been a prince of most uncommonly
+enlarged and liberal views; not only capable of devising the means of
+making maritime discoveries, which had never been thought of before
+his time, but of estimating their value when made, and of applying
+them to purposes the most useful and important for his country.
+Reflecting upon the reported fertility of the soil, and the
+excellence of the climate of Madeira, and comparing both with the
+judicious foresight of a philosopher, politician, and naturalist, in
+reference to the most valuable productions of similar climates and
+soils, he wisely conceived, and successfully executed the idea of
+introducing the cultivation of sugar and wines into this new colony;
+For these purposes, Portugal would readily supply him with vines; and
+with people conversant in their management: But he had to procure
+sugar canes, and persons experienced in their cultivation, and in the
+process of manufacturing sugar from their juice, from the island of
+Sicily, into which that article of culture had been introduced by the
+Arabs.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] In the Introduction to the World Displayed, Dr
+Johnson remarks on this story, that "green wood is not very apt to
+burn; and the heavy rains which fall in these countries must surely
+have extinguished the conflagration were it ever so violent." Yet in
+1800 Radnor forest presented a conflagration of nearly twenty miles
+circumference, which continued to spread for a considerable time, in
+spite of every effort to arrest its progress.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>So great was the success of this new subject of industry in
+Madeira, that the fifth part of the produce of one district only,
+little more than nine miles in circumference, which proportion the
+prince reserved as the patrimony of his military order, amounted, in
+some years, to 60,000 arobas of twenty-five pounds each; giving the
+entire acknowledged produce of one district only, of the island at
+7,500,000 pounds, or 2350 tons. This, at the modern price of
+eightpence a-pound, amounts to the enormous sum of L. 250,000 value
+of merchantable produce, from a district which could not contain
+above 5760 English acres; or above the value of L. 43 of average
+yearly value from every acre of that district. This astonishingly
+valuable produce was in the infancy of the sugar trade, when that
+bland and wholesome condiment was still an article of luxury, and not
+as now almost an indispensable necessary, even in the lowest cottages
+of modern Europe. The sugars of Madeira were long famous; but after
+the establishment of the sugar plantations in Brazil, and the
+destructive ravages of a worm which infested the sugar canes of
+Madeira, that article, of cultivation had to be abandoned, and the
+principal attention of the islanders was transferred to the grape,
+which still continues to supply Europe, America, and the East Indies
+with the justly celebrated Madeira wine.</p>
+<p>At the same time with the grant of Madeira to Zarco and Vaz,
+Perestrello received a donation of the island of Puerto Santo, on
+condition of colonizing it and bringing it into culture. But so great
+was the multitude of rabbits, all said to have been produced from one
+doe transmitted in a pregnant state from Portugal, that cultivation
+was attended with peculiar difficulties occasioned by their ravages;
+insomuch, that in one islet only, 3000 are reported to have been
+killed at one time.</p>
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+<p> <i>Prosecution of Discovery in Africa, to Cape Branco</i> .</p>
+<p>Partly diverted from the original object of prosecuting
+discoveries along the African coast, by the attentions requisite for
+forming this first establishment of modern colonization, but chiefly
+owing to the extreme difficulties of the navigation in the infancy of
+that art, fifteen years were passed from the first discovery of Cape
+Bojador before that formidable obstacle could be surmounted. In all
+ages of the world, ignorant and indolent men have represented new and
+unusual enterprises in scientific pursuits as rash or improper
+deviations from the established experience and vaunted wisdom of
+antiquity; and those who promoted them have been held out as
+dangerous, or even impious innovators. It so fared with Don Henry,
+who far outstripped the science, or ignorance rather, of his day. At
+home, the discontented spirits, ignorant of his enlarged views,
+perhaps envious of the reputation his very limited discoveries had
+already attained, represented that the tempestuous seas, strong
+currents, and whirlpools, which they fancied must prevail on the
+other side of Cape Bajadore, would necessarily destroy every vessel
+which should attempt to penetrate beyond that absolute limit of human
+navigation; they alleged that all the country to the south of that
+cape was utterly unfit for the habitation of mankind, sterile, burnt
+up, and destitute of soil and water, like the sandy deserts of Lybia;
+and they pretended to object on principles of patriotism, that the
+natives of Portugal were improvidently wasted on idle discoveries,
+which, if at all advisable, would have been undertaken by their
+former, wise sovereigns; who, contented with the known world, did
+not, vainly seek for conquests in the torrid zone, which was
+altogether unfit for the habitation of mankind. They insinuated, that
+the expences which had been lavished upon those fruitless and
+dangerous maritime expeditions, might lave been much more profitably
+employed for the improvement of some of the more barren parts of
+Portugal. Even the probable profits and advantages derivable from the
+new colonies of Madeira and Puerto Santo, as they were only eventual
+and contingent, did not satisfy the minds of those discontented
+detractors from the merits and enlightened views of the prince. But
+Don Henry despised those vain endeavours to misrepresent and
+counteract the important enterprise in which he was engaged, and
+undismayed by the natural difficulties which had hitherto retarded
+the progress of his mariners, continued his laudable endeavours to
+extend his discoveries along the coast of Africa. The people,
+likewise, whom he employed in his service, frequently made predatory
+invasions on the coast, taking every Moorish vessel which they were
+able to master, and made many slaves, by the sale of which, the
+charges attending those maritime expeditions were partly
+defrayed.</p>
+<p>About the year 1433, one Gilianez, a native of Lagos, whom the
+prince had entrusted with the command of a vessel, returned from an
+unsuccessful attempt to conquer the invincible obstacles which
+obstructed the passage round Cape Bojador. He had been driven by
+stress of weather into one of the Canary islands, and had imprudently
+seized some of the inoffending natives, whom he brought captives to
+Sagres. Don Henry was much offended by this conduct of Gilianez, whom
+he received with much coldness and reserve; insomuch that Gilianez,
+on purpose to retrieve the princes favour, and to make ample amends
+for the fault he had committed, made a vow, that if entrusted with a
+new expedition, he would perish rather than return unsuccessful in
+the enterprize which the prince had so much at heart. The date of the
+second expedition of Gilianez, in which he surmounted the terrors and
+difficulties of Cape Bajador, is variously referred by different
+authors to the years 1433 and 1434[7]. However this may have been, he
+succeeded in this herculean labour, as it was then esteemed, and
+returned with great exultation to Sagres, where he was again received
+into the favour and confidence of Don Henry. Contrary to the
+assertions, or suppositions rather, of the discontented opposers of
+the patriotic and enlightened efforts of Don Henry, Gilianez reported
+that the sea beyond Cape Bojador was perfectly susceptible of
+navigation, and that the soil and climate were both excellent.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] De Barros; Lafitan; Vincent, in the Periplus of the
+Erythrean sea; Meikle, in his translation of the Lusiad. Harris, in
+his Collection, Vol. I. p. 663, postpones this discovery to the year
+1439.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>In the following year Gilianez again sailed for the coast of
+Africa, accompanied by Alphonzo Gonzales Baldaya[8], cupbearer to the
+prince. The weather continued favourable during the voyage, and they
+were able to penetrate ninety miles to the south of Cape Bojador. On
+landing to take a view of the country, and in search of inhabitants,
+they found the former to consist for the most part of an extended
+desert plain, and they were much disappointed in not being able to
+meet with any of the inhabitants, though they saw evident traces of
+them in the sand. To the bay in which they landed they gave the name
+of Angra dos Ruyvos, or Bay of Gurnets, from the great abundance of
+fish resembling gurnets which were taken by the seamen.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] In Purchas this person is named Antonio Gonsalvo; but
+the authority of Clarke, I. 188, is here preferred.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Gilianez and Baldaya were again ordered in the year 1435 to
+prosecute their discoveries, with instructions to prolong their
+voyage, if possible, till they should meet with inhabitants. Having
+proceeded about forty miles to the southward of the Angra dos Ruyvos,
+without being able to see a single inhabitant, they adopted an
+expedient which had been suggested by Don Henry, and for which they
+were provided with the means. Two horses were landed, and two youths
+named Hector Homen and Diego Lopez d'Almaida, who had been educated
+in the household of Don Henry, and were scarcely sixteen years of
+age, were directed to penetrate into the interior of the country,
+that they might endeavour to ascertain whether it were inhabited.
+They were directed to keep close together, and on no account to leave
+their horses, and if possible to bring back some of the Moors; and
+lest they should rashly expose themselves to unnecessary danger, they
+were only allowed each a sword and spear, without any defensive
+armour. After wandering almost a whole day in the barren sandy
+desert, they at length descried nineteen Africans, armed with
+assagays or javelins, whom they ventured to attack, though contrary
+to their orders. The natives retreated into a cave where they were
+safe from the farther assaults of the rash Portuguese youths; and as
+one of them had received a wound in the foot, they thought it prudent
+to return to the shore, which they were unable to reach before the
+next morning. Gilianez and Baldaya then dispatched a stronger force
+to the cave in which the Africans had taken shelter, where nothing
+was found but some weapons which had been left by the fugitives.
+Owing to this event, the place where the two cavaliers were landed
+was named Angra dos Cavallos, or the Bay of Horses; which is in
+latitude 24&deg; N.</p>
+<p>The navigators proceeded along a rugged coast to the south of the
+Bay of Horses, upon which the sea breaks with a terrible noise, and
+which, on account of being entirely composed of a hilly shore, faced
+with rocks and small rocky islands, is called <i>Otegado</i> , or the
+Rocky Place. At about twelve leagues distance from the bay of
+Cavallos they entered the mouth of a river, where they killed a
+number of sea wolves or seals, the skins of which they took on board
+in defect of any other productions of the country; these seals were
+found on an island at the mouth of this river, on which the mariners
+are said to have seen at least 5000 asleep on the shore. The voyage
+was continued to Punta de Gale, forming the western head-land of the
+Rio de Ouro, immediately under the tropic, where a fishing net was
+found constructed of twine, made from the inner bark of some tree of
+the palm tribe, but no natives were met with; and as provisions began
+to grow scarce, the adventurous mariners were constrained to return
+into Portugal, after ranging for some time up and down the rocky
+coast of Otegado, without making any important discovery.</p>
+<p>About this period, or perhaps considerably earlier, Don Henry
+obtained a bull from Pope Martin V. by which the sovereign pontiff
+made a perpetual donation to the crown of Portugal, of all lands and
+islands which had been or might be discovered between Cape Bojador
+and the East Indies, inclusively, and granted a plenary indulgence
+for the souls of all who might perish in the prosecution of the
+enterprize, and in achieving the conquest of these extensive regions
+from the infidel and pagan enemies of Christ and the church. In this
+measure, the philosophical genius and enlarged political views of Don
+Henry are plainly evinced; and, undismayed by the obstacles which had
+so long opposed his grand project of discoveries, and the length of
+time which had been employed in making so very small progress, he
+shewed himself to have looked steadily forwards to the full
+accomplishment of his hopes of discovering the route by sea from
+Europe to India, around the still unknown shores of Southern Africa.
+The date of this papal grant does not certainly appear. De Barros and
+Lafitau are of opinion that it must have been posterior to 1440;
+Purchas places it in 1441; and de Guyon in 1444. But Martin V. died
+in 1431; and these writers seem to have confounded the original grant
+from that pontiff, with subsequent confirmations by his successors
+Eugenius IV. Nicholas V. and Sextus IV[9].</p>
+<blockquote>[9] Progr. of Nav. Disc. I. 184.</blockquote>
+<p>The gradual progress of these discoveries were interrupted for a
+time by an unsuccessful attempt of Edward I. or <i>Duarte</i> , king of
+Portugal, to gain possession of Tangier in the kingdom of Fez. But
+the history of this war, in which the Portuguese arms suffered much
+misfortune and dishonour, are quite irrelevant to the present
+subject. The plague likewise, which raged at Lisbon in 1438,
+contributed to the suspension of the patriotic enterprizes of Don
+Henry. At length, in 1440, Don Henry resumed his project of maritime
+discovery, and dispatched two caravels from Sagres, which were forced
+back by unfavourable weather, apparently without even reaching the
+coast of Africa.</p>
+<p>In 1441, a young officer named Antonio Gonzales made a voyage in a
+small vessel, with a crew of twenty-one men, to the island where so
+great a number of sea wolves had been seen in the former voyage of
+Alphonzo Gonzales Baldaya in 1435. In this voyage Alphonzo Gotterez,
+a gentleman of the bed-chamber to Don Henry, acted as secretary, and
+the two adventurers were instructed to endeavour to obtain an account
+of the country and its inhabitants, and to procure a cargo of the
+skins of the seals or sea wolves, that the voyage might not be
+entirely destitute of some commercial advantages. After accomplishing
+this part of his instructions, Gonzales determined to use his utmost
+efforts for procuring some of the inhabitants of the country to carry
+back with him to Sagres. For this purpose, he landed at the beginning
+of the night with nine associates, and having advanced about ten
+miles into the interior, discovered a native following a camel. The
+sudden appearance of the Portuguese rendered the astonished Moor
+perfectly motionless, and before he could recover from his surprize
+he was seized by Gotterez. On their return to the shore with their
+prisoner, they traced some recent footsteps on the sand, which led
+them in view of about forty natives, who withdrew to an adjoining
+hill, but the Portuguese secured a female Moor who had strayed from
+the party. With these two prisoners they returned to their vessel,
+not choosing to run any unnecessary risk, or to make any needless
+attack upon the natives, which was contrary to the express orders of
+Don Henry.</p>
+<p>When preparing next morning to set sail on their return to
+Portugal, another Portuguese ship arrived, which was commanded by
+Nuno Tristan, a gentleman of the princes household. Encouraged by
+this reinforcement, a second expedition into the interior was
+immediately resolved upon, in which Nuno Tristan, Diego de
+Vigliadores, and Gonzales de Cintra, joined with Alphonzo Gonzales
+and Alphonzo Gotterez. Advancing again under night, they soon
+perceived a party of the natives whom they immediately attacked,
+shouting out Portugal! Portugal! San Jago! San Jago! The Moors were
+at first stupified with fear and surprise; but recovering from their
+panic, a struggle ensued, in which three of the Moors were slain, and
+ten made prisoners, the Portuguese being indebted for their safety to
+their defensive armour. After endeavouring, in vain, to establish an
+intercourse with the Moors for the redemption of the prisoners,
+Alphonzo Gonzales returned to Sagres with a cargo of skins and the
+Moorish prisoners, and was honourably rewarded by his discerning
+master. The place of this exploit was named Puerto del Cavallero, or
+the Knights Harbour, on occasion of Gonzales being there knighted by
+Nuno Tristan.</p>
+<p>After careening his vessel, Nuno Tristan proceeded along the coast
+according to his orders, and reached a cape in lat. 20&deg; 50' N. to
+which he gave the name of Cabo Branco, or the White Cape, on account
+of the whiteness of its cliffs. He there landed and found some
+fishing nets on the shore; but after repeated incursions into the
+country, being unable to meet with any of the natives, he made a
+survey of the coast, and returned to Portugal with an account of his
+proceedings.</p>
+<p>Three of the prisoners carried to Portugal by Gonzales were Moors
+of some rank and considerable opulence; who each promised to pay
+ransoms for their safe return to their native country, and to give,
+besides, six or seven slaves each to the captors. Don Henry, as grand
+master of the order of Christ, was eager for the acquisition of so
+many converts from the religion of Mahomet, and was in hopes that the
+favourable report which the Moors might make on their return to
+Africa, would induce the natives to enter into trade with his
+navigators; and that, among the slaves which were to be given in
+exchange, some certain knowledge might be acquired of the burning
+regions of Africa, about which such strange reports were then
+prevalent. Antonio Gonzales was therefore dispatched on another
+voyage in 1442, accompanied by a German gentleman named Balthazar,
+who had distinguished himself in the late unfortunate attempt on
+Tangier, and who was anxious to carry home some account of the newly
+discovered countries. After being forced to return to port, to repair
+the damages they had sustained in a dreadful tempest, they again
+sailed, and reached the coast where the Moors had been made
+prisoners. The principal Moor was landed, and was received with great
+deference and respect by his countrymen; but he forgot all his
+promises on regaining his liberty, and never returned to pay the
+ransom he had bargained for. It would appear, however, that he had
+informed the natives of the return of the other two chiefs; as at the
+end of nine days, above an hundred natives appeared on the coast, and
+entered into treaty for the ransom of their two countrymen who
+remained captives, and for whom ten negroes, natives of different
+parts of Africa, were given in exchange. During these transactions,
+the sight of a considerable quantity of gold dust in the possession
+of the Moors, excited the most lively emotions in the Portuguese, as
+being the first intimation of that valuable commodity being
+procurable on the coast of their new discoveries. From this
+circumstance, Gonzales gave the name of  <i>Rio del Ouro</i> , or Gold
+River, to the deep arm of the sea in which he now lay, which
+penetrates about six leagues N. N. E. from the tropic of Cancer.</p>
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+<p> <i>Continuation of Discovery to Cape de Verd</i> .</p>
+<p>On the return from this voyage, the sight of gold placed the fame
+and advantage of the enterprizes and discoveries of Don Henry beyond
+the reach of prejudice and detraction, and the former murmurings and
+discontents against his proceedings were changed into admiration and
+applause. In 1443 Nuno Tristan was again sent out, with orders to
+prosecute, the discovery of a coast which now seemed so likely to
+prove advantageous to the commerce of Portugal. He now doubled Cape
+Blanco, or Branco, which he had discovered in his former voyage, and,
+about ten leagues farther to the south-east, fell in with an island,
+or rather cluster of seven islands, called <i>Adeget</i>  by the
+natives, but which have since, with the bay in which they lie,
+received the name of Arguim, or Arguin. The small canoes which were
+used by the natives of this coast were at first mistaken for some
+strange kind of birds, as the people sit upon them astride, using
+their feet instead of paddles, to urge them along. To one of the
+islands in this bay Tristan gave the name of <i>De las</i> 
+Gar&ccedil;as, on account of the seasonable supply which he there
+received. From this place Nuno Tristan returned into Portugal, with
+some of the natives of the country.</p>
+<p>Don Henry, in 1444, made an exchange with Massiot de Betancour,
+lord of the Canary Islands, for the islands of Lancerota,
+Fuertaventura, and Ferro, giving him some possessions in the island
+of Madeira in their stead; and immediately fitted out a powerful
+squadron, commanded by the grand master of his household, Fernand de
+Castro, to take possession of this new acquisition, and to subdue the
+remaining islands, Canaria, Palma, Gratioso, Inferno, Alegrazze,
+Santa-Chiara, Rocca, and Lobos. But, as the king of Castile
+afterwards laid claim to the Canaries, Don Henry resigned his
+conquests, finding the value of these islands by no means answerable
+to his expectation.</p>
+<p>So greatly had the fame of the new discoveries extended in
+consequence of the small quantity of gold which had been procured by
+Gonzales at the Rio del Ouro, that several of the inhabitants of
+Lagos petitioned Don Henry, in 1444, to be erected into a trading
+company, engaging to carry on the discoveries along the coast of
+Africa at their own expence. The prince granted their request, and a
+company was accordingly formed, the prototype of those celebrated
+East India companies which have since carried on trade to such vast
+amount. Among the partners were, Juan Diaz, the ancestor of him who
+afterwards discovered and passed the Cape of Good Hope, Gilianez, who
+had so boldly overcome the obstacles of Cape Bajador,
+Lan&ccedil;erot, a gentleman of the household of Don Henry, Estevan
+Alfonso, and Rodrigo Alvarez. A squadron of six caravels was fitted
+out under the command of Lan&ccedil;erot, which sailed from Lagos in
+the year 1444, and reached the isle of Gar&ccedil;as, in the bay of
+Arguin, where they captivated an hundred and fifty Africans, and
+returned to Lagos, after very slightly extending their knowledge of
+the coast of Africa to the desart island of Tider, in 19&deg; 30'
+N.</p>
+<p>In 1445, the subsequent voyage of Gonzales da Cintra, likewise a
+gentleman in the household of Don Henry, in some measure expiated the
+wanton outrage which had been committed in that of Lan&ccedil;erot.
+The merit of Gonzales had raised him to the rank of a gentleman in
+the household of Don Henry, and his character was held in much
+estimation; but his confidence was obtained and betrayed by a moor of
+the Assanhaji tribe[10], whom he had taken on board to serve as an
+interpreter with the natives on the coast of Africa. Misled by this
+crafty African, who held out great hopes of acquiring plunder,
+Gonzales steered for the island of Arguin, and put into a creek or
+bay on the coast, in lat. 22&deg; 48' N. about fourteen leagues to
+the south of Rio del Ouro, and forty-five to the north of Cape
+Branco. The Moor got leave to go on shore, under pretence of visiting
+some relations, but escaped in the night with another of his
+countrymen. Gonzales was much mortified at allowing himself to be
+circumvented by the cunning of his interpreter, and rashly embarked
+in a boat with only twelve men, with the intention of pursuing the
+fugitive. Pressing onwards with too much eagerness, he neglected to
+attend to the tide, which happened then to be on the ebb. His boat
+stuck fast, and when the morning broke, he was surrounded by two
+hundred Moors. Unable to extricate himself, or to contend against
+such mighty odds, Gonzales and seven of his men were slain; the other
+five made their escape by swimming to the ship, which immediately set
+sail for Lagos. The clumsy denomination of <i>Angra de Gonzales da
+Cintra</i> , to this bay, still commemorates the death of this
+commander.</p>
+<blockquote>[10] This tribe of Assenhaji, or Azanaghi, are the
+Zenhaga of our maps, and the Sanhagae of Edrisi and Abulfeda. They
+are at present represented as inhabiting at no great distance from
+the coast of Africa, between the rivers Nun and
+Senegal.--Cl.</blockquote>
+<p>In the subsequent year, 1446, Don Henry sent out a small squadron
+of three caravels, under the command of Antonio Gonzales, assisted by
+Diego Alfonso, and by Gomez Perez, the kings pilot. They were
+directed to proceed for the Rio del Ouro, and were strictly enjoined
+to cultivate the friendship of the natives by every possible means,
+to establish peace with them and to use their utmost endeavours to
+convert them to the Christian religion; among other instructions,
+they were urged to pass unnoticed the insults or neglect of honour
+which they might experience from the negroes. The Portuguese
+endeavoured, but ineffectually, to conciliate the natives, and to
+remove the angry prejudices which they entertained. They returned to
+Lagos with no other fruit from their voyage except one negro whom
+they had received in ransom, and an aged Moor who requested
+permission to accompany them to Portugal. One of their own
+companions, Juan Fernandez, from an ardent desire to procure
+information for the prince, got leave to remain among the Assanhaji
+Arabs.</p>
+<p>Next year, 1447, Antonio Mendez was ordered to return in search of
+Juan Fernandez, from whose inquisitive disposition much information
+was expected. In this expedition he was accompanied by two other
+caravels, commanded by Garcia Mendez and Diego Alfonso, but they were
+separated by a storm in the early part of the voyage. Alfonso was the
+first who reached the coast at Cape Branco, where he landed, and set
+up a wooden cross as a signal to his consorts, and then proceeded to
+the islands of Arguin, which afforded shelter from the tremenduous
+surf which breaks continually on the coast of Africa. While waiting
+at Arguin for the other ships, Alfonso paid many visits to the
+continent, where he made prisoners of twenty-five of the natives.
+When the other two ships of the squadron had joined, they went to the
+Rio del Ouro in search of their countryman, Juan Fernandez, who had
+been several days anxiously looking out for a vessel to carry him
+off.</p>
+<p>After experiencing many hardships, Fernandez had succeeded in
+gaining the friendship of a considerable person among the Moors, and
+was accompanied to the shore by that mans slaves in a body. The
+natives exerted themselves to procure the release of some of their
+countrymen who were prisoners with the Portuguese, to whom they gave
+nine negroes and a quantity of gold dust by way of ransom. To the
+place where this transaction took place, the navigators gave the name
+of <i>Cabo do Resgati</i> , or Cape Ransom; where likewise Fernam
+Tavares, an aged nobleman, received the honour of knighthood, a
+distinction he had long been entitled to, but which he would only
+receive upon the newly discovered coast. During the homeward voyage,
+Gonzales touched at a village near Cape Branco, where he increased
+his captives to ninety.</p>
+<p>Juan Fernandez described the natives of the coast as wandering
+shepherds, of the same race with the Moor who had been brought over
+to Portugal by Antonio Gonzales in the former voyage. After he had
+been conveyed to a considerable distance inland, he was stripped of
+all his clothes, and even deprived of all the provisions he had taken
+on shore. A tattered coarse rug, called an <i>alhaik</i> , was given
+him instead of the clothes he had been deprived of. His food was
+principally a small farinaceous seed, varied sometimes by the roots
+which he could find in the desert, or the tender sprouts of wild
+plants. The inhabitants, among whom he lived as a slave, unless when
+better supplied by means of the chase, fed on dried lizards, and on a
+species of locust or grasshopper. Water was bad, or scarce, and their
+chief drink was milk. They only killed some of their cattle on
+certain great festivals; and, like the Tartars, they roamed from
+place to place in quest of a precarious sustenance for their flocks
+and herds. The whole country presented only extensive wastes of
+barren sand, or an uncultivated heath, where a few Indian figs here
+and there variegated the dreary and extensive inhospitable plain. A
+short time before he rejoined his countrymen, Fernandez acquired the
+protection and kindness of Huade Meimon, a Moor of distinction, who
+permitted him to watch for the arrival of the ships, and even
+assigned him a guard for his protection.</p>
+<p>In the interval between these two voyages of Gonzales, Denis
+Fernandez, a gentleman of Lisbon, who had belonged to the household
+of the late king, fitted out a vessel for discovery under the
+patronage of Don Henry, with a determination to endeavour to
+penetrate farther to the southwards than any preceding navigator. He
+accordingly passed to the southwards of the Senegal river, which
+divides the Azanhaji moors from the Jaloffs, or most northern
+negroes, and fell in with some almadias or canoes, one of which he
+captured, with four natives. Proceeding still farther on, without
+stopping to satisfy his curiosity in visiting the coast, he at length
+reached the most westerly promontory of Africa, to which he gave the
+name of Cabo Verde, or the Green Cape, from the number of palm trees
+with which it was covered. Alarmed by the breakers with which the
+shore was everywhere guarded, Denis did not venture to proceed any
+farther, especially as the season was already far advanced, but
+returned with his captives to Portugal, where he met with a
+flattering reception from Don Henry, both on account of his discovery
+of the Cape de Verd, and for the natives he had procured from the
+newly discovered coast, without having been traded for with the
+Moors.</p>
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+<p> <i>Progress of Discovery from Cape de Verd to the Gambia</i> .</p>
+<p>Soon after the return of Denis from the Cape de Verd, Gonzales
+Pachecos, a wealthy officer belonging to the household of Don Henry,
+fitted out a ship at his own expence, of which he gave the command to
+Dinisianez da Gram, one of the princes equerries, who was accompanied
+by Alvaro Gil, an essayer of the mint, and Mafaldo de Setubal. After
+touching at Cape Branco, they steered along the coast for the isle of
+Arguin, making descents in several places, where they made a
+considerable number of captives from the Moors. At the isle <i>De las
+Gar&ccedil;as</i>  they found another caravel, commanded by
+Louren&ccedil;o Dias, which formed part of a considerable squadron
+that had been lately fitted out from Lagos. Two days afterwards, the
+admiral of that squadron, Lan&ccedil;arot, and nine other caravels
+arrived. Gram informed Lan&ccedil;arot of his success in making fifty
+prisoners, whom he had dearly purchased by the loss of seven of his
+men, who had been murdered by the Moors. Lan&ccedil;arot immediately
+sailed for Arguin, bent on revenge, and sacrificed the lives of
+eight, and the liberty of four of the natives, to the memory of
+Gonzales da Cintra and the mariners of Gram. On this occasion two of
+the Portuguese officers were knighted on the newly discovered coast,
+which seems then to have been a fashionable ambition among them, no
+doubt arising from the prevailing zeal for maritime discovery. From
+Arguin Lan&ccedil;arot passed over to the isle of Tider, whence the
+inhabitants made their escape to the adjacent continent; but the
+Portuguese soon followed, and the astonished Moors fled on all sides,
+after a sharp skirmish, in which a good many of them were slain, and
+sixty taken prisoners.</p>
+<p>The fleet now separated, a part returning home by way of the
+Canaries, while Lan&ccedil;arot, with several other caravels,
+advanced along the coast of Africa southwards, till he got beyond
+what the Moors called the &Ccedil;ahara, or Sahara, of the Assenaji.
+This Moorish nation is mentioned by Abulfeda as the ruling tribe in
+Audagost, or Agadez, and as inhabiting the southern part of Morocco.
+They are therefore to be considered as the peculiar people of the
+great desert and its environs, at its western extremity on the
+Atlantic. The latter part of their name, <i>aji</i> , or rather
+aspirated <i>haji</i> , signifies a pilgrim, and is now the appropriate
+title of one who has made the great pilgrimage of Mecca. In the
+present case, the name of Assenaji probably signifies the <i>Wanderers
+of the Desert</i> . The Sanhaga, or Assenaji tribe, is now placed at
+no great distance from the African coast, between the rivers Nun and
+Senegal; and this latter river has probably received its Portuguese
+name of Sanaga from that tribe. Ptolemy likewise probably named Cape
+Verd <i>Arsinarium</i> , from the same people, from which it may be
+inferred that they anciently occupied both sides of the Senegal
+river, which is named <i>Dardalus</i>  by that ancient geographer.</p>
+<p>Twenty leagues beyond the southern boundary of the great desert,
+Lan&ccedil;arot came to the mouth of a large river, which had been
+formerly seen by Denis Fernandez, and named by him <i>Rio
+Portugues</i> , or the Portuguese river; which was
+called <i>Ouedech</i>  by the natives, and afterwards got the name of
+Canaga, Zanaga, Sanhaga, Sanaga, or Senega, now the Senegal.
+Lan&ccedil;arot passed in safety over the bar of this river, and
+endeavoured to explore its course upwards, but the weather became
+unfavourable, and forced him again to sea, when he proceeded with
+part of his squadron to Cape Verd, near which place he took in a
+supply of water and goats flesh. The fleet was again dispersed by a
+second storm, and only three vessels remained under the command of
+Lan&ccedil;arot. With these he made a descent on the island of Tider,
+where he captured fifty-nine Moors; and with these, and some natives
+he had made prisoners on the banks of the Senegal, he returned into
+Portugal.</p>
+<p>In the year 1447, Nuna Tristan made another voyage to the coast of
+Africa; and, advancing beyond <i>Cabo dos Mastos</i> , or the Cape of
+Masts, so named from some dead palms resembling masts, seen there by
+Lan&ccedil;arot, who made this discovery in the former voyage, Nuna
+Tristan proceeded southwards along the coast of Africa, 180 miles
+beyond Cape Verd, where he reached the mouth of a river which he
+called Rio Grande, or the Large River, since called Gamber, Gambra,
+or Gambia. Tristan came to anchor at the mouth of this river, and
+went in his boat with twenty-two armed men on purpose to explore its
+course. Having reached to a considerable distance from his ship, he
+was environed by thirteen almadias or canoes, manned by eighty
+negroes, who advanced with dreadful yells, and poured in continual
+vollies of poisoned arrows, by which he, and almost every man in his
+boat were wounded before they could regain the ship. Nuno Tristan and
+all the wounded men died speedily of the effects of these poisoned
+weapons, himself only living long enough to recount the nature of the
+terrible disaster to the small remainder of the crew who had been
+left in charge of the caravel; which was brought home by only four
+survivors, after wandering for two months in the Atlantic, scarcely
+knowing which way to steer their course.</p>
+<p>There appears some difficulty and contradiction in regard to the
+river discovered by Nuna Tristan, from the vague name of Rio Grande.
+Instead of the Gambia, in lat. 13&deg; 30' N. some of the Portuguese
+historians are inclined to believe that this fatal event took place
+at another river, in lat. 10&deg; 15' N. at least 500 nautical miles
+beyond the Gambia, to the S.S. E. which was afterwards called Rio de
+Nuno. This is scarcely probable, as no notice whatever is taken of
+the great archipelago of shoals and islands which extend from Cabo
+Rosso to beyond the mouth of that river which is still called Rio
+Grande. Yet it must be acknowledged that our remaining information
+respecting these early Portuguese voyages of discovery, is
+unfortunately vague and unsatisfactory.</p>
+<p>In the same year, 1447, Alvaro Fernando proceeded to the coast of
+Africa, and is said to have advanced forty leagues beyond Tristan,
+having arrived at the mouth of a river called Tabite[11], 100 miles
+to the south of Rio Nuno. Notwithstanding the appearance of a
+determined opposition on the part of the natives, who had manned five
+almadias, Alvaro resolved to explore its course in his boat, and
+proceeded up the river for that purpose, with the utmost
+circumspection. One of the almadias stood out from the rest, and
+attacked his boat with great bravery, discharging a number of
+poisoned arrows, by which Alvaro and several of his men were wounded,
+which forced him to desist and return to his ship. Being, however,
+provided with <i>theriac</i>  and other antidotes against the poison,
+Alvaro and all his men recovered from their wounds. He resolved,
+after leaving the river Tabite, to proceed along the coast, which he
+did to a sandy point; and, apprehending no danger in so open a
+situation, was preparing to land, when he was suddenly assailed by a
+flight of poisoned arrows, from 120 negroes who started up from a
+concealment. Alvaro, therefore, desisted from any farther attempt to
+explore the coast, and returned to Lagos to give an account of his
+proceedings.</p>
+<blockquote>[11] No such name occurs in the best modern charts,
+neither is there a river of any consequence on the coast which
+answers to the distance. The first large river to the south of the
+Nuno is the Mitomba, or river of Sierra Liona, distant about 130
+maritime miles.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the same year, ten caravels sailed from Lagos for Madeira, the
+Canaries, and the coast of Africa, but returned without making any
+progress in discovering the coast. Under this year likewise, 1447,
+the Antilles, or Caribbee islands, are pretended to have been
+discovered by a Portuguese ship driven, thither by a storm. But the
+fact rests only on the authority, of Galvano, a Portuguese historian,
+and is not at all credible. Indeed the story is an absolute fable; as
+the inhabitants are said to have spoken the Portuguese language, and
+to have had <i>seven cities</i>  in their island. In the same year,
+Gomez Perez went with two caravels to Rio del Ouro, whence he carried
+eighty Moors to Lagos as prisoners.</p>
+<p>About this period the progress of discovery was arrested by
+political disputes in Portugal, which ended in a civil war between
+Don Pedro, Duke of Coimbra, and King Alphonso V. his nephew and
+son-in-law, in the course of which Don Pedro was slain. Don Henry
+appears to have taken no share in these disputes, except by
+endeavouring to mediate between his nephew and brother; and, after
+the unhappy catastrophe of Don Pedro, Don Henry returned to Sagres,
+where he resumed the superintendence of his maritime discoveries.</p>
+<p>SECTION VI.</p>
+<p> <i>Discovery and Settlement of the A&ccedil;ores</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] So called from the number of hawks which were seen on
+these islands when first discovered, <i>A&ccedil;or</i>  signifying a
+hawk in the Portuguese language; hence A&ccedil;ores or
+A&ccedil;oras, pronounced Azores, signifies the Islands of
+Hawks.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>These nine islands, called the A&ccedil;ores, Terceras, or Western
+islands, are situated in the Atlantic, 900 miles west from Portugal,
+at an almost equal distance from Europe, Africa, and America. The
+Flemings pretend that they were discovered by a navigator of their
+nation, John Vanderberg, who sailed from Lisbon in 1445 or 1449.
+Santa Maria, one of these islands, 250 leagues west from Cape St
+Vincent, was first seen on the 15th August 1432, by Cabral, who
+sailed under the orders of Don Henry. San Miguel was taken possession
+of by the same navigator on the 8th May 1444; and Ponta Delgada its
+capital, received its charter from Emanuel in 1449. Tercera was given
+to Jacome de Brujes in 1450, by Don Henry, in which year St George
+was discovered. Pico and Gracioso were discovered about the same
+time. Perhaps Fayal may actually have been first explored, as many of
+the inhabitants are of Flemish descent, under the command and
+protection of the Portuguese. Flores and Corvo, which lie seventy
+leagues west from Tercera, are not reckoned among the A&ccedil;ores
+by some writers. In this latter island, the Portuguese pretend that
+there was discovered an equestrian statue made from one block of
+stone. The head of the man was bare, his left hand rested on the mane
+of his horse, and his right pointed towards the <i>west</i> , as if
+indicating the situation of another continent. In addition to all
+this, an inscription appeared to have been traced on a rock beneath
+the statue, but in a language which the Portuguese did not
+understand.</p>
+<p>In the slow progress of discovery, the perils endured by the
+officers and men employed by Don Henry, from the Moors and Negroes,
+frequently occasioned murmurs against his plans of discovery; but the
+several clusters of islands, the Madeiras, Cape Verd, and
+A&ccedil;ores, formed a succession of maritime and commercial
+colonies, and nurseries for seamen, which took off from the general
+obloquy attending the tedious and hitherto unsuccessful attempts to
+penetrate farther into the southern hemisphere, and afforded a
+perpetual supply of navigators, and a stimulus to enterprize. The
+original prejudices against the possibility of navigating or existing
+in the torrid zone still subsisted, and although the navigators of
+Don Henry had gradually penetrated to within ten degrees of the
+equator, yet the last successive discovery was always held forth by
+the supporters of ignorant prejudice, as that which had been placed
+by nature as an insurmountable barrier to farther progress in the
+Atlantic. In this situation, the settlement of the A&ccedil;ores was
+of considerable importance. In 1457, Don Henry procured the grant of
+many valuable privileges to this favourite colony, the principal of
+which was the exemption of the inhabitants from any duties on their
+commerce to the ports of Portugal and even of Spain.</p>
+<p>In 1461, a fort was erected in the isle of Arguin on the African
+coast of the Moors, to protect the trade carried on there for gold
+and negro slaves. Next year, 1462, Antonio de Noli, a Genoese, sent
+by the republic to Portugal, entered into the service of Don Henry,
+and in a voyage to the coast of Africa, discovered the islands which
+are known by the name of the Cape de Verd Islands, though they lie
+100 leagues to the westward of that Cape. In the same year Pedro de
+Cintra, and Suera de Costa, penetrated a little farther along the
+coast of Africa, and discovered the river or Bay of Sierra Liona or
+Mitomba, in lat. 8&deg; 30' N. This constituted the last of the
+Portuguese discoveries, carried on under the direct influence and
+authority of Don Henry, the founder and father of modern maritime
+discovery, as he died next year, 1463, at Sagres, in the
+sixty-seventh year of his age; and, for a time, the maritime
+enterprise of the Portuguese nation was palsied by his death.</p>
+<p>Thus, during a long period of fifty-two years, this patriotic
+prince devoted almost his whole attention, and the ample revenues
+which he enjoyed as Duke of Viseo end grand master of the military
+order of Christ, in extending the maritime knowledge, and
+consequently the commercial prosperity of his country. The incidents
+of the last seven years of the life of this distinguished prince, are
+involved in uncertainty, and we know very little with regard to the
+progress of his maritime discoveries from 1456, the date of the
+second of the voyages of Cada Mosto, of which we propose to give a
+separate account, till the year of his death, 1463. From the year
+1412, when he began his operations, at which time he could scarcely
+exceed fifteen years of age, the navigators who had been formed under
+his auspices and direction, and often instructed by himself in the
+theory of navigation and cosmography, gradually explored the western
+coast of Africa, from Cape Nam or Non, in lat. 28&deg; 15', certainly
+to Rio Grande, in lat. 11&deg; N. or rather to Rio de Nuno, not quite
+a degree farther south; but it is highly probable that the southern
+limit of discovery in his time extended to Cabo Verga, in lat.
+10&deg; N. the northern boundary of the country usually called the
+Sierra Liona, or the Ridge of Lions, perhaps to the gulf of Mitomba,
+or bay of Sierra Liona, in lat. 8&deg; 30' N. an extent of 29&deg;
+15' of latitude, or 1185 nautical miles; a mere nothing certainly
+when compared with modern navigation, but a wonderful effort in the
+infancy of the science, when even coasting voyages of any extent
+along well known shores, and in frequented seas, were looked upon as
+considerable efforts. No brilliant discovery, indeed, rewarded the
+perseverance of Don Henry, and the courage of his servants; but an
+indestructible foundation of useful knowledge was laid, for
+overthrowing the ignorant prejudices of the age, and by which, not
+long afterwards, his plans were perfected by completing the
+circumnavigation of Africa, and by the discovery of the <i>New</i> 
+World. Dr Vincent, the learned editor and commentator of the Periplus
+of the Erythrean Sea, is disposed to limit the discoveries of Don
+Henry to Cape Verd[2], but Ramusio believed that the Island of St
+Thomas was settled in his time; and the ingenious translator of the
+Lusiad of Camoens is of opinion that some of his commanders passed
+beyond the equator[3]. According to Mickle, it was the custom of his
+navigators to leave his motto, <i>Talent de bien faire</i> , wherever
+they came; and in 1525 Loaya, a Spanish captain, found that device
+carved on the bark of a tree in the island of St Matthew, or Anabon,
+in the <i>second</i>  degree of southern latitude. But this proof is
+quite inconclusive, as the navigators long reared in the school of
+this great prince might naturally enough continue his impress upon
+the countries they visited, even after his lamented death.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Peripl. of the Erythr. Sea, 193.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] Hist. of the Disc. of India, prefixed to the
+translation of the Lusiad, I. 158.</blockquote>
+<p>About seven years before the decease of Don Henry, two voyages
+were made to the African coast by Alvise da Cada Mosto, a Venetian
+navigator, under the auspices of the Duke of Viseo; but which we have
+chosen to separate from the historical deduction of the Portuguese
+discoveries, principally because they contain the oldest nautical
+journal extant, except those already given in our First Part from the
+pen of the great Alfred, and are therefore peculiarly valuable in a
+work of this nature. Their considerable length, likewise, and because
+they were not particularly conducive to the grand object of extending
+the maritime discoveries, have induced us to detach them from the
+foregoing narrative, that we might carry it down unbroken to the
+death of the great Don Henry. These voyages, likewise, give us an
+early picture of the state of population, civilization, and manners
+of the Africans, not to be met with elsewhere.</p>
+<p>To this we subjoin an abstract of the narrative of a voyage made
+by Pedro de Cintra, a Portuguese captain, to the coast of Africa,
+drawn up for Cada Mosto, at Lagos, by a young Portuguese who had been
+his secretary, and who had accompanied Cintra in his voyage. The
+exact date of this voyage is nowhere given; but as the death of Don
+Henry is mentioned in the narrative, it probably took place in that
+year, 1463.</p>
+<h2><a name="chapter2-4" id="chapter2-4">CHAPTER IV.</a></h2>
+<p><b> <i>Original journals of the voyages of Cada Mosto, and Piedro
+de Cintra to the coast of Africa; the former in the years 1455 and
+1456, and the latter soon afterwards</i> </b>[1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Astley, Col. of Voy. and Trav. I. 573. Clarke, Prog.
+of Marit. Disc. I. 235.</blockquote>
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+<p>Alvise Da Cada Mosto, a Venetian, in the service of Don Henry of
+Portugal, informs us in his preface, that he was the first navigator
+from the  <i>noble city of Venice</i> , who had sailed on the ocean
+beyond the Straits of Gibraltar, to the southern parts of Negroland,
+and Lower Ethiopia. These voyages at Cada Mosto are the oldest extant
+in the form of a regular journal, and were originally composed in
+Italian, and first printed at Venice in 1507. This first edition is
+now exceedingly scarce, but there is a copy in the kings library, and
+another in the valuable collection made by Mr Dalrymple. These
+voyages were afterward published by Ramusio in 1613, and by
+Gryn&aelig;us in Latin. The latter was misled in regard to the date;
+which he has inadvertently placed in 1504, after the death of Prince
+Henry, and even subsequent to the discovery of the Cape of Good Hope
+by Bernal Diaz. Even Ramusio, in his introduction to the voyages of
+Cada Mosto, has made a mistake in saying that they were undertaken by
+the orders of John king of Portugal, who died in 1433.</p>
+<p>Ramusio imagined that the discoveries of Cada Mosto might tend to
+great importance, as he considered the rivers Senegal and Rio Grande
+to be branches of the Niger, by which means the Europeans might open
+a trade with the rich kingdoms of Tombuto and Melli on that river,
+and thus bring gold from the countries of the Negroes, by an easier,
+safer, and more expeditious manner, than as conveyed by the Moors of
+Barbary by land, over the vast and dangerous deserts that intervene
+between the country on the Niger and Senegal rivers, and Barbary. As,
+by the account of Leo, salt is the most valuable commodity throughout
+the countries of the Negroes, Ramusio proposed that the ships should
+take in cargoes of salt at the island of <i>Sal</i> , one of the Cape
+de Verds, and thence supply the countries on the Niger, which was
+reported to be navigable for 500 miles into the interior; and that
+they should bring back gold and slaves in return; the latter to be
+brought to market at St Jago, another of the Cape de Verd islands,
+where they would be immediately bought up for the West Indies. All
+this fine speculation, however, rested on mistaken foundations; as
+the Niger is altogether an inland river, running to the east, and has
+no communication with the Senegal and Gambia, which run west into the
+Atlantic. Yet time, and the civilization of the natives on the
+Senegal and Gambia, may hereafter realize this scheme of a valuable
+traffic into the interior of Africa; but it is fervently to be hoped,
+that the trade in slaves may never be revived.</p>
+<p>In his preface, after an apology for his performance, and making a
+declaration of his strict adherence to truth in all the particulars
+he relates, Cada Mosto gives some account of the infant Don
+Henriquez, or Henry, of Portugal, the great author and promoter of
+maritime discoveries. He praises him, as a prince of a great soul and
+sublime genius, and of great skill in astronomy; and adds, that he
+applied himself entirely to the service of Christ, by making war
+against the Moors. While on death- bed, in 1432, Don John, king of
+Portugal, exhorted his son Don Henry to pursue his laudable and holy
+purpose, of <i>persecuting</i>  the enemies of the Christian faith,
+which he promised to perform; and, accordingly, with the assistance
+of his brother Don Duarte, or Edward, who succeeded to the throne of
+Portugal, he made war in Fez with success for many years. Afterwards,
+the more effectually to harass the Moors, he used to send his
+caravels, or ships of war, annually, to scour the coasts of Azafi, or
+Al Saffi, and Messa, on the coast of Africa, without the
+Mediteranean, by which he did them much damage. But, having in view
+to make discoveries along that western coast, he ordered them every
+year to advance farther towards the south. They accordingly proceeded
+till they came to a great cape, which put a stop to their progress
+southwards for several years, being afraid to go beyond it; whence it
+took the name it still retains of Cape Non[2]; meaning, that such as
+went beyond should never return. Don Henry, however, was of a
+different opinion, and adding three other caravels to those which had
+been at the cape, sent them again next year to make the attempt. They
+accordingly penetrated about 100 miles beyond that cape, where they
+found only a sandy coast with no habitations, and returned back to
+Portugal.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] According to De Faria, as already mentioned in Chap.
+II. Sect. I Cape Non was doubled, and Cape Bojador discovered in
+1415, many years before the death of King John. The present
+recapitulation by Cada Mosto has been left in his own words, without
+insisting on the exactness of his chronology.--Astl.</blockquote>
+.
+<p>Encouraged by this commencement of successful progress, Don Henry
+sent the same fleet back next year, with orders to extend their
+discoveries 150 miles farther to the south, and even more if they
+found it proper; and promised to enrich all who should embark in this
+navigation. They went again; and, although they obeyed the
+instructions of the prince, they could not improve the discoveries.
+Yet, firmly persuaded by the strength of his own judgment, that
+people and habitations would certainly be found at length, Don Henry
+continued to send out his caravels from time to time, and they came
+at length to certain coasts frequented by the Arabs of the desert,
+and to the habitations of the Azanaghi, a tawny race. Thus the
+countries of the negroes were discovered; and different nations
+afterwards, which will be mentioned in the following relation.</p>
+<p>Thus far the preface of Cada Mosto, as given in the collection of
+Astley, from the edition of Ramusio, with which we must be satisfied
+in this work, as that in the royal library is inaccessible for our
+use. The present version has been carefully formed, by a comparison
+of Astley, with the original in Ramusio, and with the summary by the
+Reverend James Stanier Clarke, in his curious work on the progress of
+maritime discoveries, which only gives a selection of what he
+considered to be its most material parts. In this edition, the
+narrative style of Cada Mosto, in his own person, is restored as much
+as possible. It may be noticed, that Alvise is the Portuguese form of
+the name Louis, or Lewis.</p>
+<p>In addition to the two voyages of Cada Mosto himself, there is a
+third voyage included in the present chapter, performed by Piedro de
+Cintra to the same coast, the narrative of which was communicated to
+Cada Mosto by one who had accompanied Cintra, and had been clerk to
+Cada Mosto in the two former voyages.</p>
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+<p> <i>Voyage of Cada Mosto from Venice to Cape St Vincent: He enters
+into the service of Don Henry, and sets out for the New Discoveries:
+Relation of the Voyage to Madeira and the Canaries; with some Account
+of these islands, and their Inhabitants</i> .</p>
+<p>I, Alvise Da Cada Mosto, after visiting many parts of our
+Mediterranean Sea, being in our city of Venice in the year 1454, at
+which time I was about twenty-two years of age, determined to return
+into Flanders, a country which I had formerly visited as a merchant;
+for my constant attention was, in the first place to acquire wealth,
+and secondly to procure fame. On the 8th of August in that year 1454,
+I embarked in one of the gallies belonging to the republic, commanded
+by Marco Zen, a Venetian cavalier. Contrary winds detained us for
+some days off Cape St Vincent; during which, I learnt that Don Henry,
+the infant of Portugal, resided in the adjoining village of Reposera,
+or Sagres, to which he had retired in order to pursue his studies
+without interruption from the tumult of the world. Hearing of our
+arrival, the prince sent on board of our galley Antonio Gonzales his
+secretary, accompanied by Patricio de Conti[1], a Venetian, who was
+consul for the republic in Portugal, as appeared by his commission,
+and who also received a salary or pension from Don Henry. These
+gentlemen brought on board, and exhibited to us samples of Madeira
+sugar, dragons blood, and other commodities of the countries and
+islands belonging to the prince, which had been discovered under his
+patronage. They asked us many questions, and informed us that the
+prince had caused some lately discovered and uninhabited islands to
+be settled and cultivated, as a proof of which, they had shewn us the
+before-mentioned valuable productions; adding, that all this was next
+to nothing, in comparison of the great things which Don Henry had
+performed; as he had discovered seas which had never been navigated
+before, and the countries of divers strange, and hitherto unknown
+nations, where many wonderful things were found. They told us
+farther, that the Portuguese who had been in these remote parts, had
+reaped great advantages by trading with the inhabitants; having
+gained as high as 700 or even 1000 per cent, on the capitals
+employed. We were all much astonished at these things; and I Cada
+Mosto in particular, being inflamed with the desire of visiting these
+newly discovered regions, inquired if the prince permitted any person
+who might be so inclined to embark for these places? To this they
+answered in the affirmative; and they likewise stated to me the
+conditions on which any one would be allowed to make the adventure.
+These were, either to be at the whole expence of fitting out and
+freighting a vessel; or at the expence of the freight only, the
+prince providing a vessel. In the former case, the adventurer had to
+allow on his return one quarter of his cargo, as duty to the prince,
+the rest remaining his own entire propriety; in the latter case, the
+homeward cargo was to be equally divided between the prince and the
+adventurer. In case of no returns, the prince was at the entire
+expence of the voyage; but that it was hardly possible to make the
+voyage without great profit. They added, that the prince would be
+much pleased to have any Venetian in his service, and would shew him
+great favour, being of opinion that spices and other rich merchandise
+might be found in these parts, and knowing that the Venetians
+understood these commodities better than any other nation.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] In Grynaeus, this person is called a patrician or
+nobleman of Venice, and his surname is omitted.--Astl.</blockquote>
+.
+<p>Influenced by all this, I accompanied the secretary and consul on
+shore, and waited on the prince, who confirmed all those things which
+they had said, and encouraged me to embark in the voyage to his new
+countries, by promises of honour and profit. Being young, and of a
+constitution to endure fatigue, and desirous to visit those parts of
+the world which had never been even known to any Venetian, and
+likewise in hopes to advance my fortune, I accepted of the
+invitation. Having, therefore, procured information respecting the
+commodities which it was proper to carry with me on such a voyage, I
+returned to the gallies, where I disposed of all the goods I had
+shipped for the low countries, and carried to land such things as
+were necessary for my intended expedition; and leaving the gallies to
+pursue their voyage to Flanders, I landed in Portugal. The prince
+evinced much satisfaction at my resolution, and entertained me
+handsomely at Sagres for a considerable time. At length he ordered me
+to fit out a new caravel, of about ninety tons burden, of which
+Vincent Diaz, a native of Lagos, about sixteen miles from Sagres, was
+commander. The caravel being in readiness, and furnished with every
+thing necessary for the voyage, we set sail on the 22d of March 1455,
+having a favourable wind at north-east, and by north[2], and steered
+our course for the island of Madeira. On the 25th of that month we
+came to the island of  <i>Puerto Santo</i> , which is about 600 miles
+southward from Cape St Vincent, whence we took our departure.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] <i>Con Veuto da greco et tramantana in poppe</i> ;
+literally, having a Greek, and <i>beyond the mountain</i>  wind in the
+poop. The points of the compass, in Italian maps, are thus named,
+N. <i>Tramontana</i> . N. E. <i>Greco</i> . E.  <i>Levante</i>  S.
+E. <i>Sirocco</i> . S. <i>Mezzoni</i> . S. W. <i>Libeccio</i> . W.
+ <i>Ponente</i> . N. W. <i>Maestro</i> .--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>Puerto Santo was discovered by the Portuguese on All Saints day,
+about the year 1418[3], and Don Henry first sent inhabitants to
+settle there under Bartholomew Perestrello, whom he appointed
+governor. It is about fifteen miles in circuit[4]. It bears good
+bread corn, and a sufficiency of oats for its own use; and abounds
+with cattle and wild hogs, and innumerable rabbits[5]. Among other
+trees, it produces the drago or dragon tree, the sap or juice of
+which is drawn out only at certain seasons of the year, when it
+issues from cuts or clefts, made with an axe near the bottom of the
+tree in the preceding year. These clefts are found full of a kind of
+gum; which, decocted and depurated, is the dragons- blood of the
+apothecaries[6]. The tree bears a yellow fruit, round like like a
+cherry, and well tasted. This island produces the best honey and wax
+in the world, but not in any quantity. It has no harbour, but a good
+road in which vessels may moor in safety, being well sheltered on all
+sides, except the quarters between the south and east, all of which
+winds make it unsafe to ride here at anchor. There is plenty of
+excellent fish on its shores; such as dentili, gilded fish, and
+others.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] This date ought to have been
+1413.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] Barbot says eight leagues; other authors say more,
+and some less. It is about twelve leagues to the north-east of
+Madeira.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] When Sir Amias Preston took this island in 1595, it
+abounded in corn, wine, and oil, and had good store of sheep, asses,
+goats, and kine. There was also plenty of fowl, fish, and
+fruits.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] From this account it seems to be an inspissated
+juice.--Astl. This tree has probably received its name from the bark
+being like the scales of a serpent. About the full of the moon it
+exudes a vermilion coloured gum. That which grows on the islands and
+coasts of Africa is more astringent than what comes from Goa. It is
+found on high rocky land. Bartholomew Stibbs met with it on the banks
+of the Gambia river, and describes it under the name of <i>Par de
+Sangoe</i> , or blood-wood tree. The gum is a red, inodorous, and
+insipid resin, soluble in alcohol and oils; and when dissolved by the
+former, is used for staining marble. --Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>From Puerto Santo, which was discovered twenty-seven years before,
+we sailed on the 28th of March, and came the same day
+to <i>Monchrico</i>  or Machico, one of the ports of the island of
+Madeira, forty miles distant from Puerto Santo. In fair weather these
+islands may be seen from each other. This latter island was only
+inhabited within the last twenty-four years, when the prince
+appointed two of his gentlemen to be its governors. Tristan Vaz
+having the government of that half of the island in which the port of
+Monchrico is situated; and the other district of the island, in which
+Fonzal, Fonchial, or Funchal stands, is under the government of John
+Gonzales Zarcho. The island of Madeira is inhabited in four several
+places: Monchrico, Santa Cruz, Fonzal, and Camera-di-Lupi, which are
+its principal places, though there are other minor establishments;
+and is able to muster about 800 men able to bear arms, of whom an
+hundred are horse. There are about eight rivers, which pervade the
+island in different places; by means of which they have many
+saw-mills, from which Portugal and other places are supplied with
+boards of many different sorts. Of these boards, two sorts are in
+particular estimation, and turn most to account. The one is cedar,
+which has a strong odoriferous smell, and resembles the cypress tree;
+of this they make fine, large, and long boards or deals, which they
+employ for building houses, and for various other purposes. The
+other, called nasso[7], is of a red-rose colour, and extremely
+beautiful; of which they make excellent and very beautiful bows and
+cross-bows, which are sent into the west. In order to clear the land,
+the first settlers set fire to the woods, and the fire spread with
+such fury, that several persons, with their families, and Gonzales
+Zarcho among the rest, were forced to take shelter in the sea to save
+themselves from the flames, where they stood up to their necks for
+two days and two nights without sustenance. Though this island is
+mountainous, its soil is rich and fertile, and it produces yearly
+30,000 Venetian <i>staras</i> [8] of bread corn. At first, the newly
+cultivated land yielded seventy for one, but has since been reduced
+to thirty or forty, for want of good husbandry. Owing to the
+excellence of its soil and climate, and the abundance of springs and
+rivers, Prince Henry procured sugar canes from Sicily, which he sent
+to this island, where they have yielded abundant produce; insomuch,
+that 400 cantaros of sugar, each containing 112 pounds large weight
+of Venice, have been made at one boiling, and the quantity was likely
+to increase[9]. They have likewise good wines, considering how
+shortly this culture has been introduced; and in such abundance, that
+large quantities are exported. Among other kinds of vines, Don Henry
+sent thither <i>Malvasia</i>  plants, procured from the island of
+Candia, which have succeeded well. The soil has turned out so
+favourable for the vine, that in general there are more grapes than
+leaves, and the bundles are very large, even from two to four spans
+long. They have likewise the black  <i>Pergola</i>  grape, without
+stones, in great perfection; and so well is the climate adapted to
+this culture, that they begin their vintage about Easter, or at least
+by the octave after.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] The woods of Madeira are cedar, vigniatico, laurus
+Indicus, which has a considerable resemblance to mahogany, barbuzano,
+chesnut, and the beautiful mirmulano, and
+paobranco.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[8] This measure is said to weigh about thirty-three
+English pounds, so that the quantity mentioned in the text amounts to
+1850 quarters English measure.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[9] I suppose he means at one crop. The quantity in the
+text, reduced to avoirdupois weight, amounts to twenty-eight
+hogsheads, at sixteen hundred weight each.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<p>We sailed from Madeira, following a southerly course, and arrived
+at the Canary islands, which are at the distance of about 320 miles
+from Madeira. There are seven of these islands in all, four of which
+have been settled by the Christians, Lan&ccedil;erotta,
+Fuerteventura, Gomera, and Ferro; over which Herrera[10], a Spanish
+gentleman, is lord. Large quantities of an herb called <i>Oricello</i> 
+or Orchel[11], are annually sent from these islands to Cadiz and
+Seville, which is used in dying, and is sent from these places to all
+parts of Europe. Great quantities of excellent goat skins are
+exported from these islands, which likewise produce abundance of
+tallow, and good cheese. The original inhabitants of the four islands
+that are subject to the Christians, are <i>Canarians</i> [12], who
+speak various languages or dialects, not well understood between the
+different tribes. These people have only open villages, without any
+fortifications; except on the mountains, which are exceedingly high,
+and there they have a kind of rude walls or redoubts, to flee to in
+case of need. The passes of these mountains are so difficult of
+access, that a few resolute men might defend them against an army.
+The other three islands of this group, Grand Canaria, Teneriffe, and
+Palma, which are larger and better peopled than the other four, are
+still unsubdued and possessed by the aboriginal idolaters. Grand
+Canaria has between eight and nine thousand souls, and Teneriffe,
+which is the largest of all these islands, is said to contain
+fourteen or fifteen thousand, and is divided into nine separate
+lordships. Palma, however, has very few inhabitants, yet it appears
+to be a very beautiful island. Every lordship seems to have its own
+mode of religious worship; as in Teneriffe, there were no less than
+nine different kinds of idolatry; some worshipping the sun, others
+the moon, and so forth. They practise polygamy, and the lords have
+the jus primae noctis, which is considered as conferring great
+honour. On the accession of any new lord, it is customary for some
+persons to offer themselves to die as a sacrifice to his honour. On
+this occasion, the lord holds a great festival on his accession day;
+when all who are willing to give this cruel proof of their
+attachment, are attended to the summit of a high cliff in a certain
+valley, where, after some peculiar ceremonies, and certain words
+muttered over them, the victims precipitate themselves from the
+cliff, and are dashed to pieces. In reward of this sanguinary homage,
+the lords consider themselves bound to heap extraordinary honours and
+rewards on the parents of the victims.</p>
+<blockquote>[10] In Clarke, this person is named Ferrero; perhaps the
+right name of this person was Fernando Pereira, who subdued Gomera
+and Ferro.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[11] A species of moss, or lichen rather, that grows on
+the rocks, and is used by dyers.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[12] Other authors call the natives of the
+Canaries <i>Guanchos</i> .--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Teneriffe, which is the largest of these islands, and the best
+inhabited, is one of highest islands in the world, and is seen in
+clear weather from a great distance; insomuch, that I was informed by
+some mariners, that it had been descried at the distance of between
+sixty and seventy Spanish leagues, which make about 250 Italian
+miles. In the middle of the island, there is a prodigiously high
+peaked mountain, shaped like a diamond, which is always burning. I
+received this account from some Christians, who had been prisoners in
+the island, who affirmed that it was fifteen Portuguese leagues, or
+sixty Italian miles, from the bottom of the mountain to the top of
+the peak.</p>
+<p>They have nine lords on this island, who are called dukes, and who
+do not succeed by inheritance or descent, but by force; on which
+account they have perpetual civil wars among themselves, in which
+they commit great slaughter. Their only weapons are stones, maces or
+clubs, and darts or lances, some of which are pointed with horn, and
+others have their points hardened in the fire. They all go naked,
+except a few who wear goat skins before and behind. They anoint their
+skins with goats tallow, mixed up with the juice of certain herbs,
+which thickens the skin, and defends them against the cold, of which
+they complain much, although their country is so far to the south.
+They have neither walled, nor thatched houses, but dwell in grottos
+and caverns of the mountains. They feed on barley, flesh, and goats
+milk, of which they have abundance, and some fruits, particularly
+figs. As the country is very hot, they reap their corn in April and
+May.</p>
+<p>We learnt all these things from the Christians of the four settled
+islands, who sometimes go over by night to the three other islands,
+and make prisoners of the natives, whom they send into Spain to be
+sold as slaves. Sometimes the Spaniards are themselves made prisoners
+on these expeditions, on which occasions the natives do not put them
+to death, but employ them to kill and flea their goats, and to cure
+the flesh, which they look upon as a vile employment, and therefore
+condemn their Christian prisoners to that labour in contempt. The
+native Canarians are very active and nimble, and are exceedingly
+agile in running and leaping, being accustomed to traverse the cliffs
+of their rugged mountains. They skip barefooted from rock to rock
+like goats, and sometimes take leaps of most surprising extent and
+danger, which are scarcely to be believed. They throw stones with
+great strength and wonderful exactness, so as to hit whatever they
+aim at with almost perfect certainty, and almost with the force of a
+bullet from a musket; insomuch that a few stones thrown by them will
+break a buckler to pieces. I once saw a native Canarian, who had
+become a Christian, who offered to give three persons twelve oranges
+a-piece, and taking twelve to himself, engaged, at eight or ten paces
+distance, to strike his antagonists with every one of his oranges,
+and at the same time to parry all theirs, so that they should hit no
+part of him but his hands. But no one would take up the wager, as
+they all knew he could perform even better than he mentioned. I was
+on land in Gomera and Ferro, and touched also at the island of Palma,
+but did not land there.</p>
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+<p> <i>Continuation of the Voyage by Cape Branco, the Coast of
+Barbary, and the Fortia of Arguin; with some account of the Arabs,
+the Azanaghi, and the Country of Tegazza.</i> </p>
+<p>Leaving the Canaries, we pursued our course towards Ethiopia, and
+arrived in a few days at Cape Branco, which is about 870 miles from
+these islands. In this passage, steering south, we kept at a great
+distance from the African shore on our left, as the Canaries are,
+far-advanced into the sea towards the west. We stood almost directly
+south for two-thirds of the way between the islands and the Cape,
+after which we changed our course somewhat more towards the east, or
+left-hand, that we might fall in with the land, lest we should have
+overpassed the Cape without seeing it because no land appears
+afterwards so far to the west for a considerable space. The coast of
+Africa, to the southwards of Cape Bronco, falls in considerably to
+the eastwards, forming a great bay or gulf, called the  <i>Forna of
+Arguin</i> , from a small island of that name. This gulf extends about
+fifty miles into the land, and has three other islands, one of which
+is named <i>Branco</i>  by the Portuguese, or the White Island, on
+account of its white sands; the second is called <i>Garze</i> , or the
+Isle of Herons, where they found so many eggs of certain seabirds as
+to load two boats; the third is called <i>Curoi</i> , or Cori. These
+islands are all small, sandy, and uninhabited. In that of Arguin
+there is plenty of fresh water, but there is none in any of the
+others. It is proper to observe, that on keeping to the southwards,
+from the Straits of Gibraltar, the coast of exterior Barbary is
+inhabited no farther than Cape Cantin[1], from whence to Cape Branco
+is the sandy country or desert, called <i>Saara</i>  or  <i>Saharra</i> 
+by the natives, which is divided from Barbary or Morocco on the north
+by the mountains of Atlas, and borders on the south with the country
+of the Negroes, and would require a journey of fifty days to
+cross,--in some places more, in others less. This desert reaches to
+the ocean, and is all a white dry sand, quite low and level, so that
+no part of it seems higher than any other. Cape <i>Branco</i> , or the
+White Cape, so named by the Portuguese from its white colour, without
+trees or verdure, is a noble promontory of a triangular shape, having
+three separate points about a mile from each other.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This is erroneous, as there are several towns on the
+coast of Morocco beyond this Cape, as Saffia, Mogadore, Santa Cruz,
+and others. Cape Cantin is in lat. 32&deg;30'N. and the
+river <i>Sus</i>  in 30&deg;25', which is 140 miles to the south. There
+are no towns on the coast beyond that river; but the northern limit
+of the <i>Sahara</i> , or great desert, is in lat. 27&deg;40', 186
+miles to the south of the river <i>Sus</i> , and is surely inhabited by
+wandering Arabs. Even the great desert, which extends 750 miles from
+north to south, almost to the river Senegal, is thinly interspersed
+by several wandering tribes of the <i>Azanhaji</i> .--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Innumerable quantities of large and excellent fish of various
+kinds are caught on this coast, similar in taste to those we have at
+Venice, but quite different in shape and appearance. The gulf of
+Arguin is shallow all over, and is full of shoals both of rocks and
+sand; and, as the currents are here very strong, there is no sailing
+except by day, and even then with the lead constantly heaving. Two
+ships have been already lost on these shoals. Cape <i>Branco</i>  lies
+S.W. of Cape Cantin, or rather S. and by W. Behind Cape Branco there
+is a place called Hoden, six days journey inland on camels, which is
+not walled, but is much frequented by the Arabs and caravans, which
+trade between Tombucto,[2] and other places belonging to the Negroes,
+and the western parts of Barbary. The provisions at Hoden are dates
+and barley, which they have in plenty, and the inhabitants drink the
+milk of camels and other animals, as they have no wine. They have
+some cows and goats, the former being greatly smaller than those of
+Italy; but the number of these is not great, as the country is very
+dry. The inhabitants are all Mahometans, and great enemies to the
+Christians, and have no settled habitations, but wander continually
+over the deserts. They frequent the country of the Negroes, and visit
+that side of Barbary which is next the Mediterranean. On these
+expeditions they travel in numerous caravans, with great trains of
+camels, carrying brass, silver, and other articles, to Tombucto and
+the country of the Negroes, whence they bring back gold
+and <i>melhegette</i> , or cardamom seeds[3]. These people are all of a
+tawny colour, and both sexes wear a single white garment with a red
+border, without any linen next their skins. The men wear turbans, in
+the Moorish fashion, and go always barefooted. In the desert there
+are many lions, leopards, and ostriches, the eggs of which I have
+often eaten, and found them very good.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Called Tombuto in the original, and Ataubat in
+Grynaeus.--Astl. Hoden stands in an <i>ouasis</i> , or watered island,
+in the sea of sand, or great desert, about lat. 19&deg;20'N. and W.
+long. 11&deg;40'.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] Under the general name of <i>Azanhaji</i> , which
+probably signifies the pilgrims or wanderers of the desert, the
+Nomadic Arabs or Moors are distinguished into various tribes; as
+Beni-amir, Beni-sabi, Hilil Arabs, Ludajas, and Hagi; sometimes
+called Monselmines, Mongearts, Wadelims, Labdessebas, and Trasarts;
+all named in their order from north to south, as occupying the desert
+towards the Atlantic.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Don Henry has farmed out the trade of the island of Arguin, under
+the following regulations. No person must enter this gulf to trade
+with the Arabs, except those who are licensed according to the
+ordinance, and have habitations and factors on the island, and have
+been accustomed to transact business with the Arabs on that coast.
+The articles of merchandize chiefly provided for this trade are,
+woollen cloth and linen, silver trinkets, <i>aldtizeli</i>  or frocks,
+and cloaks, and other things, and above all, wheat; and the Arabs
+give in return negro slaves and gold. A castle has been built on the
+isle of Arguin, by order of the prince, to protect this trade, on
+account of which caravels or ships arrive there every year from
+Portugal.</p>
+<p>The Arabs of this coast have many Barbary horses, which they carry
+to the country of the Negroes, which they barter with the great men
+for slaves, receiving from ten to eighteen men for each horse,
+according to their goodness. They also carry thither silken staffs of
+Granada and Tunis, with silver, and many other things, in return for
+which they receive great numbers of slaves and some gold. These
+slaves are brought first to Hoden in the desert, and thence by the
+mountains of Barka into Barbary, whence they are transported across
+the Mediterranean into Sicily. Part of them are sold in Tunis, and in
+other places along the coast of Barbary; and the rest are brought to
+Arguin, where they are sold to the licensed Portuguese traders, who
+purchase between seven and eight hundred every year, and send them
+for sale into Portugal. Before the establishment of this trade at
+Arguin, the Portuguese used to send every year four or more caravels
+to the bay of Arguin, the crews of which, landing well armed in the
+night, were in use to surprise some of the fishing villages, and
+carry off the inhabitants into slavery. They even penetrated
+sometimes a considerable way into the interior, and carried off the
+Arabs of both sexes, whom they sold as slaves in Portugal.</p>
+<p>Leaving Arguin we sailed along the coast to the river Senegal[4],
+which is very large, and divides the people called Azanaghi, or
+Azanhaji, from the first kingdom of the Negroes. The Azanhaji are of
+a tawny colour, or rather of a deep brown complexion, and inhabit
+some parts of the coast beyond Cape Branco, ranging through the
+deserts, and their district reaches to the confines of the Arabs of
+Hoden. They live on dates, barley, and the milk of camels; but as
+they border likewise on the country of the Negroes, they carry on
+trade with these people, from whom they procure millet and pulse,
+particularly beans. Owing to the scarcity of provisions in the
+desert, the Azanhaji are but spare eaters, and are able to endure
+hunger with wonderful patience, as a poringer of barley-meal made
+into hasty-pudding will serve them a whole day. The Portuguese used
+to carry away many of these people for slaves, as they were preferred
+to the negroes; but for some time past this has been prohibited by
+Don Henry, and peace and trade has been established with them, as he
+is in hopes they may be easily brought over to the catholic faith by
+intercourse with the Christians, more especially as they are not
+hitherto thoroughly established in the superstitions of Mahomet, of
+which they know nothing but by hearsay. These Azenhaji have an odd
+custom of wearing a handkerchief round their heads, a part of which
+is brought down so as to cover their eyes, and even their nose and
+mouth; for they reckon the mouth an unclean part, because it is
+constantly belching and has a bad smell, and ought therefore to be
+kept out of sight; even comparing it to the posteriors, and thinking
+that both ought alike to be concealed. On this account they never let
+their mouths be seen except when eating, as I have often had occasion
+to observe. They have no lords among them, but the rich men are
+respected somewhat more than the rest. They are of ordinary stature,
+and very lean, wearing their black hair frizzled over their shoulders
+like the Germans, and grease it daily with fish oil, which gives them
+a nasty smell; yet they consider this as modish. They are extremely
+poor, egregious liars, the greatest thieves in the world, and very
+treacherous. They have never heard of any Christians except the
+Portuguese, with whom they had war for thirteen or fourteen years, in
+which many of them were carried off as slaves, as has been already
+mentioned. Many of these people informed me, that, when they first
+saw ships under sail, which had never been beheld by any of their
+ancestors, they took them for large birds with white wings, that had
+come from foreign parts; and when the sails were furled, they
+conjectured, from their length, and swimming on the water, that they
+must be great fish. Others again believed that they were spirits, who
+wandered about by night; because they were seen at anchor in the
+evening at one place, and would be seen next morning 100 miles off,
+either proceeding along the coast to the southwards, or put back,
+according as the wind changed, or the caravels might happen to steer.
+They could not conceive how human beings could travel more in one
+night than they were able to perform themselves in three days; by
+which they were confirmed in the notion of the ships being spirits.
+All this was certified to me by many of the Azanhaji who were slaves
+in Portugal, as well as by the Portuguese mariners who had frequented
+the coast in their caravels.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] In the text this river is named Senega, and its name
+probably signifies the river of the Azanhaji. It Is called in
+Ramusio <i>Oro Tiber</i> .--F.</blockquote>
+<p>About six days journey by land from Hoden, there is a place called
+Teggazza[5], which in our language signifies a chest or bag of gold.
+In this place large quantities of salt are dug up every year, and
+carried by caravans on camels to <i>Tombucto</i>  and thence to the
+empire of <i>Melli</i> , which belongs to the Negroes. Oh arriving
+there, they dispose of their salt in the course of eight days, at the
+rate of between two and three hundred <i>mitigals</i> , or ducats, for
+each load, according to the quantity, and then return with their
+gold.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] The name of this place is explained as signifying a
+chest or bag of gold. There is a place marked in the Saharra, or
+great sandy desert; under the name of <i>Tisheet</i> , where there are
+salt mines, in lat. 17&deg; 40' N. and long. 6&deg; 40' W. which may
+possibly be Teggazza. The distance of Tisheet from Hoden in our maps
+is about 375 miles E. S. E. But there are other salt mines in the
+desert still farther to the east. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+<p> <i>Of the Empire of Melli, and some curious particulars of the
+Salt Trade: Of the Trade in Gold: Of the, Azanhaji; and concerning
+swarms of Locusts</i> .</p>
+<p>The empire of Melli, of which some mention has been made in the
+preceding Section, is situated in an extremely hot climate, and
+affords very bad nourishment for beasts; insomuch, that out of an
+hundred camels which go from the desert into that country, scarcely
+twenty-five return; several even of the Arabs and Azanhaji, belonging
+to the caravans, sicken and die likewise every year. There are no
+quadrupeds kept by the natives of the country, as indeed none can
+live there for any time. It is reckoned to be forty days journey on
+horseback from Tegazza to Tombuctu, and thirty from thence to
+Melli[1]. Having inquired what use the merchants of Melli made of
+this salt, the traders of the desert informed me, that a part of it
+was consumed in that country, which lying near the line, where the
+days and nights are of equal length, certain seasons of the year are
+so excessively hot that the blood of the inhabitants would putrify,
+if it were not for the salt, and they would all die. They have no art
+or mystery in its use; but every one dissolves a small piece every
+day in a porringer of water, and drinks it off, which in their
+opinion preserves their health.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] The distance between Tisheet and Tombuctu, according
+to our best maps, is about 560 miles E. and by S. In the same
+proportion, supposing Tisheet to be Teggazza, the distance between
+Tombuctu and Melli ought to be about 420 miles. Of Melli we have no
+traces in our modern maps, but it may possibly be referred
+to <i>Malel</i> , the apparent capital of Lamlem; see Pinkert. Geogr.
+II. 917, as laid down from the Arabian geographers, nearly 1200 miles
+E.S.E. from Tombuctu.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The remainder of the salt is carried a long way in pieces on mens
+heads, every piece being as large as a man can well bear. As brought
+from Teggazza, the salt is in large pieces as taken out of the mine,
+each camel being loaded with two pieces, and the negroes break these
+down into smaller pieces, for the convenience of carrying them on
+their heads, and muster a large number of footmen for this yearly
+traffic. These porters have each a long forked stick in their hands;
+and, when tired, they rest their loads on these sticks. They proceed
+in this manner till they arrive on the banks of a certain water, but
+whether fresh or salt my informer could not say, yet I am of opinion
+that it must be a river, because, if it were the sea, the inhabitants
+could not be in want of salt in so hot a climate. The negroes are
+hired to carry it in this manner for want of camels or other beasts
+of burden, as already mentioned; and, from what has been said, it may
+easily be concluded that the number, both of the carriers and
+consumers must be very great. When arrived at the water side, the
+proprietors of the salt place their shares in heaps in a row, at
+small distances, setting each a particular mark on his own heap; and
+when this is done, the whole company retires half a days journey from
+the place. Then the other negroes, who are the purchasers of the
+salt, who seem to be the inhabitants of certain islands, but who will
+on no account be seen or spoken to, come in boats to the place where
+the heaps of salt are placed, and after laying a sum in gold on each
+heap as its price, retire in their turns. After they are gone, the
+owners of the salt return, and if the quantity of gold on their heaps
+is satisfactory to them, they take it away and leave the salt; if
+not, they leave both and withdraw again. In this manner they carry on
+their traffick, without seeing or speaking to each other, and this
+custom is very ancient among them, as has been affirmed to me for
+truth by several merchants of the desert, both Arabs and Azanhaji,
+and other creditable persons[2].</p>
+<blockquote>[2] This story is probably a fiction, proceeding upon a
+trade of barter between parties who did not understand the languages
+of each other. The succeeding part of the story seems a mere fable,
+without the smallest foundation whatever.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On inquiring how it came to pass that the emperor of Melli, whom
+they represented as a powerful sovereign, did not find means, by
+friendship or force, to discover who these people were who would not
+suffer themselves to be seen or talked to, I was informed that this
+emperor, not many years ago, resolved to procure some of these
+invisible people, and held a council on the occasion, in which the
+following plan was devised and carried into execution. Before the
+salt caravan returned the half days journey from their salt heaps,
+some of the emperors people made certain pits by the water side, and
+near the place where the salt was left, and when the negroes came to
+deposit their gold on the salt, those who were concealed in the pits
+attacked them suddenly and took four of them prisoners, all the rest
+making their escape. Three of those who were thus taken were
+immediately set free by the captors, who judged that one would be
+quite sufficient to satisfy the curiosity of their emperor, and that
+the negroes would be the less offended. But after all, the design
+proved abortive; for though spoken to in various languages, the
+prisoner would neither speak or take any victuals, and died at the
+end of four days. On this account, the Melli negroes concluded that
+these other negroes were dumb; but others were of opinion, that being
+endowed with the human form, they must necessarily have the power of
+speech; but, that finding himself treated in this manner, so contrary
+to ancient custom, he refused to speak from indignation. This
+untoward result was much regretted by the negroes of Melli, because
+it prevented them from gratifying the curiosity of their emperor;
+who, on being informed of this persons death, was much dissatisfied,
+yet asked what manner of men the prisoners were. He was accordingly
+informed that they were of a deep black colour, well shaped, and a
+span taller than the natives of Melli. That their under lip was
+thicker than a mans fist, of a very red colour, and hung down on
+their breasts, with something like blood dropping from it; but that
+their upper lips were small, like those of other men. That the form
+of the under lip exposed their gums and teeth, which were larger than
+their own, having great teeth in each corner of their mouth, with
+large black eyes, and altogether a terrible appearance, as the gums
+dropped blood continually, as well as the great hanging under
+lip.</p>
+<p>This cross accident prevented all the succeeding emperors of Melli
+from making any farther attempt of the kind; because, from that time,
+these negroes forbore, for three years, from coming to buy salt as
+usual. It is believed that their lips began to putrify, through the
+excessive heat of the climate; and being no longer able to endure a
+distemper, of which some must have died for want of the effectual
+remedy which they had experienced from the use of salt, they returned
+of their own accord to traffic for that commodity in the old way. All
+this has established an opinion that they cannot live without salt;
+the negroes of Melli judging of the case of others by their own. As
+for the emperor of Melli, he cares not whether these blacks will
+speak, and be seen or not, so that that he has the profit of their
+gold[3]. This is all I could learn on this subject, which I think may
+be credited, as so many persons have vouched for its truth, of which
+I, who have both seen and heard of many wonderful things in this
+world, am perfectly satisfied.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] Few persons, perhaps, will be disposed to think the
+credit of the Africans, however positive, or the belief of the
+author, however strong, sufficient evidence of the truth of this
+story. Yet it certainly is a common report of the country, and not
+the invention of Cada Mosto. Jobson, who was at the Gambra or Gambia
+in 1620, repeats the whole substance of this story; and Movette
+relates the circumstances of the blacks trafficking for salt without
+being seen, which he had from the Moors of Morocco. He leaves out,
+however, the story of the frightful lips. Every fiction has its day;
+and that part is now out of date.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<p>The gold brought to Melli is divided into three parts. One part is
+sent by the caravan which goes annually from Melli
+to <i>Kokhia</i> [4], which lies on the road to Syria and Cairo. The
+other two parts go first to Tombuctu, whence one of them goes
+by <i>Toet</i> [5] to Tunis and other ports of the Barbary coast, and
+the other portion is carried to Hoden, and from thence to <i>Oran</i> 
+and <i>One</i> [6], towns in Barbary, which are within the Straits of
+Gibraltar, and to Fez, Morocco, Arzila, Azafi, and Messa, towns on
+the African coast of the Atlantic, where the Italians and other
+Christians procure it from the Moors, in return for various
+commodities. Gold is the best and principal commodity which comes
+through the country of the Azanhaji, and a part of it is brought
+every year from Hoden to Arguin, where it is bartered with the
+Portuguese[7].</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Melli being itself unknown, we can hardly look to
+discover the situation of Kokhia or Cochia; but it may possibly be
+Kuku, a town and district to the N.E. of Bornou, which lies in the
+direction of the text; or it may be Dar Kulla, greatly more to the
+S.W. but still in the same track.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] In Grynaeus this place is called Ato. As in the
+direction of the caravan from Tombuto towards Tunis, it may possibly
+be Taudeny, an ouasis or island of the great desert, in lat. 21&deg;
+30' N.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] Called Hona in Grynaeus. What part of Barbary this
+name may refer to does not appear. But the passage ought perhaps to
+run thus, " <i>to Oran by the Mountain of Wan</i> ," as there is a
+range mountains of that name to the S. E. of Oran, which joins the
+chain of Atlas, or the Ammer Mountains.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] This is the earliest account of the places from
+whence gold is brought, and of the course of its trade through
+Africa, and thence into Europe; and is even more particular and exact
+than any that has been given by later authors.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<p>No money is coined in the land of the <i>Tawny Moors</i> , or
+Azenhaji; nor is any money used by them, or in any of the
+neighbouring countries; but all their trade is carried on by
+bartering one commodity against another. In some of their inland
+towns, the Arabs and Azanbaji use small white porcelain shells, or
+cowries; which are brought from the Levant to Venice, and sent from
+thence into Africa. These are used for small purchases. The gold is
+sold by a weight named <i>mitigal</i> , which is nearly equal in value
+to a ducat. The inhabitants of the desert have neither religion nor
+sovereign; but those who are richest, and have the greatest number of
+retainers and dependents, are considered as chiefs or lords. The
+women are tawny, and wear cotton garments, which are manufactured in
+the country of the Negroes; but some of them wear a kind of cloaks,
+or upper garments, called Alkhezeli, and they have no smocks. She who
+has the largest and longest breasts, is reputed the greatest beauty;
+on which account, when they have attained to the age of seventeen or
+eighteen, and their breasts are somewhat grown, they tie a cord very
+tight around the middle of each breast, which presses very hard and
+breaks them, so that they hang down; and by pulling at these cords
+frequently, they grow longer and longer, till at length in some women
+they reach as low as the navel. The men of the desert ride on
+horseback after the fashion of the Moors; and the desert being
+everywhere very hot, and having very little water, and extremely
+barren, they can keep very few horses, and those they have are short
+lived. It only rains in the months of August, September and October.
+I was informed that vast swarms of locusts appear in this country
+some years, in such infinite numbers as to darken the air, and even
+to hide the sun from view, covering the horizon as far as the eye can
+reach, which is from twelve to sixteen miles in compass; and,
+wherever they settle they strip the ground entirely bare. These
+locusts are like grasshoppers, as long as ones finger, and of a red
+and yellow colour. They come every third or fourth year, and if they
+were to pay their visits every year, there would be no living in the
+country. While I was on the coast, I saw them in prodigious and
+incredible numbers.</p>
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+<p> <i>Of the River Senegal and the Jalofs, with some Account of the
+Manners, Customs, Government, Religion, and Dress of that
+Nation</i> .</p>
+<p>Leaving Cape Branco, and the Gulf of Arguin, we continued our
+course along the coast to the river Senegal, which divides the desert
+and the tawny Azanhaji from the fruitful lands of the Negroes. Five
+years before I went on this voyage, this river was discovered by
+three caravels belonging to Don Henry, which entered it, and their
+commanders settled peace and trade with the Moors; since which time
+ships have been sent to this place every year to trade with the
+natives[1]. The river Senegal is of considerable size, being a mile
+wide at the mouth, and of sufficient depth. A little farther on it
+has another entrance, and between the two, there is an island which
+forms a cape, running into the sea, having sand- banks at each mouth
+that extend a mile from the shore[2]. All ships that frequent the
+Senegal ought carefully to observe the course of the tides, the flux
+and reflux of which extend for seventy miles up the river, as I was
+informed by certain Portuguese, who had been a great way up this
+river with their caravels. From Cape Branco, which is 280 miles
+distant, the whole coast is sandy till within twenty miles of the
+river. This is called the coast of <i>Anterota</i> , and belongs
+entirely to the Azanhaji or Tawny Moors. I was quite astonished to
+find so prodigious a difference in so narrow a space, as appeared at
+the Senegal: For, on the south side of the river, the inhabitants are
+all exceedingly black, tall, corpulent and well proportioned, and the
+country all clothed in fine verdure, and full of fruit trees;
+whereas, on the north side of the river, the men are tawny, meagre,
+and of small stature, and the country all dry and barren. This river,
+in the opinion of the learned, is a branch of the <i>Gihon</i> , which
+flows from the Terrestrial Paradise, and was named the Niger by the
+ancients, which flows through the whole of Ethiopia, and which, on
+approaching the ocean to the west, divides into many other branches.
+The  <i>Nile</i> , which is another branch of the Gihon, falls into the
+Mediterranean, after flowing through Egypt[3].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Cada Mosto is incorrect in the chronology of this
+discovery, and even de Barros is not quite decided as to the first
+discovery of the Senegal. He says that Denis Fernandez <i>passed</i> 
+it in 1446, and that Lancerot <i>discovered</i>  it in 1447; the latter
+of which is eight years before the visit of Cada
+Mosto.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] The northern mouth of the Senegal is in lat. 16&deg;
+40'. The southern in 15&deg; 45', both N. so that the distance
+between them, or the length of the island mentioned in the text, is
+about sixty-two miles.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] This fancy of all the great rivers in Africa being
+branches from one principal stream, is now known to be entirely
+erroneous.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<p>The first kingdom of the Negroes is on the banks of the Senegal,
+and its inhabitants are called <i>Gilofi</i>  or Jalofs. All the
+country is low, not only from the north to that river, but also
+beyond it, as far south as Cape Verd, which is the highest land on
+all this coast, and is 400 miles from Cape Branco. This kingdom of
+the Jalofs, on the Senegal, is bounded on the east by the country
+called <i>Tukhusor</i> ; on the south by the kingdom of <i>Gambra</i>  or
+Gambia; on the west by the Atlantic Ocean; and on the north by the
+river Senegal and the Azanhaji[4]. The king who reigned in Senegal in
+my time was named Zukholin, and was twenty-two years old. This
+kingdom is not hereditary; but for the most part, three or four of
+the principal lords, of whom there are many in the country, choose a
+king, in the event of a vacancy, but always fix their choice on a
+person of noble lineage, who reigns only as long as he gives
+satisfaction to these great lords. They often dethrone their kings by
+force; who, on the other hand, often render; themselves so powerful
+as to stand on their defence. This renders the government unsettled,
+and is productive of civil wars; similar to Egypt, where the Soldan
+of Cairo is always in fear of being killed or banished.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Although the first kingdom, or kingdoms of the
+Negroes lies on the Senegal, Senega, or Sanaghas, and others along
+the Gambia, yet there were not properly any kingdoms of these names.
+On the north, indeed, of the Sanagha, lay the country of the Sanhaga,
+Azanaghi, or Azanhaji, from whence the river seems to have taken its
+name; but was divided among various tribes of people, and not under
+any one sovereign. Geographers, however, have since continued to
+propagate this first error.--Astl.<br>
+The Jalofs and Foulahs inhabit the country between the Senegal and
+Gambia, on which latter river the Feloops reside. What is meant by
+ <i>Tukhusor</i>  in the text does not appear, unless it may obscurely
+indicate Karta.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The people are savages, and extremely poor, having no walled
+towns, and their villages are entirely composed of thatched cottages.
+They use neither lime nor stone in building, not knowing how to make
+the one, or to form the other. The kingdom of the Jalofs is small,
+and, as I was informed, extends only 300 miles along the coast, and
+about the same distance inland. The king has no settled revenue; but
+the lords of the country court his favour, by making him yearly
+presents of horses, which being scarce, are in high estimation,
+together with horse furniture, cows, and goats, pulse, millet, and
+other things. He likewise increases his wealth by means of robbery,
+and by reducing his own subjects, and those of neighbouring provinces
+to slavery, employing a part of these slaves to cultivate the lands
+which are assigned to him, and selling the rest to the Arabs and
+Azanhaji traders, who bring horses and other things for sale; as
+likewise to the Christians, since they have established a trade in
+these parts.</p>
+<p>Every man may keep as many wives as he pleases. The king has
+always upwards of thirty, and distinguishes them according to their
+descent, and the rank of the lords whose daughters they are. He keeps
+them in certain villages of his own, eight or ten in one place, each
+having a separate house to dwell in, with a certain number of young
+women to attend her, and slaves to cultivate the land which is
+assigned for her maintenance, which they sow and reap, and to tend
+her cows and goats. When the king comes to any of these villages, he
+brings no provisions along with him, as his women are obliged to
+support him and his retinue whenever he visits them. Every, morning
+at sunrise, each of his wives in the village where he happens to
+reside, prepares three or four dishes of various viands, such as
+flesh, fish, or other dainties, cooked in their fashion; which are
+carried by the slaves to the kings pantry; so that in less than an
+hour, thirty or forty dishes are provided, and when the king has a
+mind to eat, he finds every thing ready at his command. When he has
+eaten of such things as he likes best, the remainder is given to his
+retinue; but as this, diet is never very plentiful, they are but
+poorly fed. He travels about in this manner, from place to place,
+visiting his several wives, by which means he has a very numerous
+issue and whenever one of his wives happens to fall with child, he
+visits her no more. The lords or chiefs of the country live in a
+similar manner.</p>
+<p>These negroes profess me Mahometan religion, but are not even so
+well instructed in it as the tawny Moors, more especially the common
+people. The lords have always about them some Arabs or Azanhaji for
+this purpose, who inculcate on their minds that it would be
+disgraceful for men of their quality to live in ignorance of the laws
+of God, like the common people who have no religion. They have become
+Mahometans merely by means of their intercourse with the Azanhaji and
+Arabs; for since they became acquainted with the Christians, they are
+by no means so fond of the Mahometan faith. The generality of the
+negroes go quite naked, except a piece of goat skin before; but the
+lords who are able to procure such, wear cotton shirts, which are
+spun and manufactured by their women. Their webs are only a span in
+width, as they have not sufficient art to construct and use wider
+looms; so that they are obliged to sew five, six, or more of these
+webs together, when it is required to make any large piece of work.
+The shirts reach half way down the thighs, and have wide sleeves
+which; cover only half of their arms. They wear also cotton drawers,
+reaching to the small of their legs; and these drawers are made
+preposterously wide, being often thirty-five or forty palms in
+circumference; so that, when tied on, they are full of plaits, and
+though like A sack before the hinder part trails on the ground like
+the train of a large petticoat. Thus, though making a most ridiculous
+appearance, they think nothing comes up to their dress for elegance,
+and they often ask the Europeans if they ever saw a finer dress.
+Their women, both married and unmarried, go naked from the waist
+upwards, and wear a piece of cotton which covers them from the waist
+to the middle of the legs. Both sexes go barefooted, and have no
+coverings to their heads; and weave and tie their hair, though short,
+into neat tresses. The men often employ themselves in womens work,
+such as spinning, washing clothes, and such like employments.</p>
+<p>This country is extremely hot, the month of January being not so
+cold as it is with us in Italy in the month of April; and the farther
+we went to the south, the weather became so much the hotter. Both men
+and women wash themselves four or five times a-day, and are very
+cleanly in their persons; but are by no means so in regard of eating,
+in which they observe no rule. Although very ignorant, and extremely
+awkward in any thing, to which they have not been accustomed, they
+are as expert as any European can be in their own business, and in
+all things with which they are acquainted. They are full of words,
+and extremely talkative, and are for the most part liars and cheats.
+Yet they are exceedingly hospitable, and charitably disposed, as they
+will most readily give a dinner, or a supper, or a nights lodging, to
+any stranger who comes to their houses, without expecting any
+remuneration or reward. The chiefs of these negroes are often at war
+against each other, or against the neighbouring tribes or nations;
+but they have no cavalry, for want of horses. In war, their only
+defensive armour is a large target, made of the skin of an animal
+called <i>Danta</i> , which is very difficultly pierced; and their
+principal weapons are <i>azagays</i>  or light darts, which they throw
+with great dexterity. These darts are pointed with iron, the length
+of a span, and barbed in different directions, so that they make
+dangerous wounds, and tear the flesh extremely when pulled out. They
+have also a Moorish weapon, much-bent like a Turkish sword or
+cimeter, and made of iron, without any steel, which they procure from
+the negroes on the river Gambia, as they either have no iron in their
+own country, or want knowledge or industry in working it. Having but
+few weapons, or rather no missiles, their wars are very bloody, as
+they soon come to close quarters, and their strokes seldom fall in
+vain; and, being extremely fierce and courageous, they will rather
+allow themselves to be slain as save themselves by flight; neither
+are they disheartened by seeing their companions slain. They have no
+ships, nor had they ever seen any before the Portuguese came upon
+their coast; but those who dwell upon the river Senegal, and some who
+are settled on the sea coast, have <i>zoppolies</i>  or canoes,
+called <i>almadias</i>  by the Portuguese, which are hollowed out of a
+single piece of wood, the largest of which will carry three or four
+men. They use these almadias for catching fish, and for transporting
+themselves up or down the river. The negroes of this country are the
+most expert swimmers in the world, as I can vouch from frequent
+experience of their dexterity.</p>
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+<p> <i>Continuation of the Voyage to the country of a King named
+Budomel, with some account of his Territory, and the Manners of his
+People</i> .</p>
+<p>Having passed the river Senegal, we sailed about 800 miles farther
+south along the coast, which was all low land without mountains, till
+we came to the territory or kingdom of Budomel[1]. As some
+Portuguese, who had dealt with Budomel, represented him as a very
+just person, who paid for any goods he might receive, and might
+therefore be confided in, I stopped at his country, that I might
+endeavour to dispose of some Spanish horses I had on board, which are
+in great request among the Negroes; besides which, I had some cloth,
+Moorish wrought silks, and other commodities for sale. We came,
+therefore to anchor, at a place on the coast, called Palma di
+Budomel, which is only an open roadstead, and not a port. I
+immediately dispatched my negro interpreter on shore to inform this
+lord of my arrival, and of the goods I had on board for sale. Not
+long afterwards Budomel came himself to the beach, attended by about
+fifteen horsemen and an hundred and fifty foot, and sent a message
+desiring me to land, with professions of a friendly disposition, and
+promising to render me every attention and service in his power. I
+went accordingly on shore immediately, and was received with great
+civility. After some discourse, I delivered to him seven horses, with
+their furniture; and every other article for which he expressed an
+inclination, all of which had cost me 300 ducats, trusting to his
+honour for payment, which was to be in slaves, and which he promised
+to deliver at his own residence, which was twenty-five miles distant
+from the shore, whither he invited me to accompany him. To this
+invitation I readily agreed, induced as much by a desire of seeing
+the country, as on account of receiving payment. Before setting out
+however, Budomel made me a present of a beautiful negress, about
+twelve years of age, who, he said, was meant to serve me in the
+cabin; and I received the gift, and sent her on board the
+caravel.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] The text seems corrupted in giving so large a
+distance between the Senegal river and this country of king Budomel,
+as 800 miles to the south, or rather S. S. E. would carry us to what
+is called the <i>grain</i> , or windward coast of Guinea, in lat.
+6&deg; N. and, from the sequel, Cada Mosto does not appear to have
+passed Cape Verd till after quitting the country of Budomel.
+According to Brue, as quoted by Clarke, the king of Kayor or Kayhor
+was styled Damel. Kayor or Cayor appears on our maps above an hundred
+miles up the Senegal, and on its north side, which therefore can have
+no reference to the place in the text. I am disposed to believe, that
+the distance in the text ought only to have been 80 miles, and that
+the territory of Budomel was in the country of the Jalofs, between
+the Senegal and Cape Verd, at the mouth of a small river, on which
+our charts place two towns, Masaye and Enibaul, in lat. 15&deg; 20'
+N.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>I was furnished by Budomel with horses and every thing necessary
+for the journey; and when we arrived within four miles of his
+residence, he gave me in charge to his nephew Bisboror, who was lord
+of a small town or village at which we stopped. Bisboror took me to
+his own house, where I was treated with much civility and attention,
+during twenty-eight days which I tarried in that place. This was in
+November 1455. In that time I went often to visit Budomel,
+accompanied by his nephew, and had many opportunities to observe the
+produce of the country, and the manners of the inhabitants, more
+especially as, on account of the tempestuous weather, I was under the
+necessity of travelling back by land to the river Senegal. For,
+finding it impossible to get on board at the coast by reason of the
+surf, I had to order the ship to return to that river, and went there
+by land to re-embark. On this occasion, being very desirous to
+transmit instructions to those on board the ship to meet me at the
+river Senegal, I inquired among the negroes if any one would
+undertake to carry a letter from the shore. Several of them readily
+offered their services, though the ship lay three miles from the
+shore, and, owing to a strong wind, the sea broke on the shore with a
+tremendous surf, insomuch that I thought it impossible for any one to
+succeed in the attempt. Besides the surf, there were several sand
+banks near the shore, and other banks about half way to the ship,
+between which there ran a strong current, sometimes one way and
+sometimes the other, along shore, so that it was extremely difficult
+for any one to swim through without infinite danger of being carried
+away by the stream; and the sea broke with such violence on the
+banks, that it seemed quite impossible to surmount such complicated
+obstacles. Yet two of the negroes offered to go, and only demanded
+two  <i>mavulgies</i>  of tin for each of them, one mavulgi being worth
+no more than a <i>grosso</i> [2], at which price they engaged to carry
+my letter in safety to the ship. I cannot express the difficulties
+which they encountered in passing the sand bank. They were sometimes
+out of sight for a considerable space, so that I often thought they
+were both drowned. At last, one of them, finding himself unable to
+resist the violence with which the waves broke over him, turned back;
+but the other, being stronger, got over the bank after struggling a
+whole hour, and, having carried the letter to the caravel, returned
+with an answer. This seemed to me very wonderful, and made me
+conclude that the negroes of this coast must be the most expert
+swimmers in the world.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] The grosso, or Venetian groat, is worth about three
+farthings.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<p>It has been already observed, that those who are called lords in
+this country have neither castles nor cities, the king even having
+nothing but villages with thatched houses. Budomel is lord of one
+part of this kingdom, yet his place of residence was not a palace,
+nor even a walled house. These great men are not lords on account of
+their riches or treasure, as they possess neither, nor have they any
+coin in use among them; but they are considered as such out of
+courtesy, and on account of the great retinues by which they are
+always attended, being more feared and respected by their subjects
+than any of the lords in Italy. Budomel has several villages
+appointed for his own habitation and that of his wives, as he never
+fixes in one place. The village in which I resided with Bisboror was
+one of his habitations, containing between forty and fifty thatched
+cottages, built near one another, and surrounded with ditches and
+strong pallisades, having only one or two passages left for entering;
+and every house had a court-yard, inclosed by a hedge. According to
+report, Budomel had nine wives in this place, and more or less in
+several other villages. Each of these wives had five or six young
+negresses to attend upon her, with all of whom he might sleep when he
+pleased, without giving offence to the wives, for such is the custom
+of the country. Both sexes are extremely amorous; and Budomel
+strongly importuned me for philacteries, in which he had been
+informed the Europeans were very expert, and offered any reward
+within his power for my compliance. They are very jealous, and suffer
+no man to enter the houses which are inhabited by the women, not even
+their own sons.</p>
+<p>Budomel is always attended by a retinue of at least 200 negroes,
+who are changed from time to time some going away and others coming
+back in their room; besides which, many people repair to wait upon
+him from the adjacent places which are under his government. Before
+arriving at his particular apartment there are seven large courts,
+one within the other, having a tree in the middle of each, where
+those wait who come to him on business. His family is distributed in
+these courts, according to their several ranks; the most considerable
+having their station in the court nearest his dwelling, and the
+meanest in the outermost court of all. Few people are allowed to
+approach his own particular apartment, except the Christians and
+Azanhaji, who have free admission and more liberty is allowed to them
+than to the negroes. This lord affects great state and gravity in his
+deportment, and does not allow himself, to be seen except an hour
+every morning, and for a short while in the evening; at which times
+he appears near the door of an apartment in the first court, into
+which only persons of note are permitted to enter. On these occasions
+of giving audience, every person who come to speak to him, however
+high may be his rank, is in the first place obliged to strip himself
+stark naked, except the small cloth in front formerly mentioned; and,
+immediately on entering the court, he falls down on his knees, bows
+down his head to the ground, and scatters dust with both hands on his
+own head and shoulders; neither is even the nearest relations of the
+lords exempted from this humiliating expression of their duty and
+obedience. The person, who receives an audience continues in this
+humble posture a great while, strewing himself with sand and crawling
+on his knees, till he approaches the great man; and when within two
+paces of his lord, he stops and begins to relate his case, still
+continuing on his knees, with his head down, and throwing sand an his
+head in token of great humility. All the time the lord scarcely
+appears to notice him and continues to discourse with other persons;
+and when the vassal has related his story, the lord gives him an
+answer in two words, with an arrogant aspect. Such is their affected
+pride and grandeur, and such the submission which is shewn him,
+which, in my opinion, proceeds from fear, as their lords, for every
+little fault they commit, take away their wives and children, and
+cause them to be sold as slaves.</p>
+<p>Budomel treated me with the utmost attention and civility, and
+used to carry me in the evenings into a sort of mosque, where the
+Arab and Azanhaji priests, whom he had always about his person, used
+to say prayers. His manner on these occasions was as follows. Being
+entered into the mosque, which was in one of the courts belonging to
+his residence, and where he was attended by some of the principal
+negroes, he first stood some little time with his eyes lifted up as
+if it were to heaven, then, advancing two steps, he spoke a few words
+in a low tone; after which, he stretched himself on the ground, which
+he kissed; the Azanhaji and the rest of his attendants doing the
+same. Then rising up, he repeated the same series of actions
+repeatedly, for ten or twelve times, which occupied about half an
+hour. When all was over, he asked my opinion of their manner of
+worship, and desired one to give an account of the nature of our
+religion. On this I told him, in the presence of all his doctors,
+that the religion of Mahomet was false, and the Romish the only true
+faith. This made the Arabs and Azanhaji extremely angry; but Budomel
+laughed on the occasion, and said, that he considered the religion of
+the Christians to be good, as God alone could have gifted them with
+so much riches and understanding. He added, however, that in his
+opinion the Mahometan law must be good also; and he believed, that
+the Negroes were more sure of salvation than the Christians, because
+God was just, who had given a paradise to the Christians in this
+world, and would certainly give one to the Negroes in the next, as
+they possessed scarcely any good in this world in comparison. In all
+his discourse he shewed a good understanding, and took great pleasure
+in hearing the customs of the Christians described. I firmly believe
+he might easily have been converted to Christianity, had it not been
+from fear of losing his power, as I was often told by his nephew,
+with whom I lodged, and he took great delight in hearing me discourse
+of our religion. The table of Budomel, like all other lords and
+people of condition in this country, is supplied by his wives, in the
+same manner as has been already mentioned in regard to Zukholin, the
+king of Senegal; each wife sending him a certain number of dishes
+every day. He and the other lords eat on the ground, without any
+regularity or company, except the Arabs and Azanhaji, who are their
+teachers and priests, and one or two of their principal negro
+attendants. The inferior people eat in messes of ten or twelve each,
+having a basket full of victuals set in the midst, into which all put
+their hands at the same time. They eat but little at one meal, but
+repeat these four or five times a day.</p>
+<p>SECTION VI.</p>
+<p> <i>Account of the Country of Budomel continued</i> .</p>
+<p>On account of the great heats in the kingdom of Senegal, and all
+the other countries of the Negroes on the coast, no wheat, rye,
+barley, or spelt, can grow, neither are vines cultivated, as we knew
+experimentally from a trial made with seeds from our ship: For wheat,
+and these other articles of culture, require a temperate climate and
+frequent showers, both of which are wanting here, where they have no
+rains during nine months of the year, from October to June both
+included. But they have large and small millet, beans, and the
+largest and finest kidney beans in the world, as large as hazle nuts,
+longer than those of the Venetian territory, and beautifully speckled
+with various colours as if painted. Their beans are large, flat, and
+of a lively red colour, and they have likewise white beans. They sow
+in July, at the beginning of the rains, and reap in September, when
+they cease; thus they prepare the soil, sow the seed, and get in the
+harvest, all in three months; but they are bad husbandmen, and so
+exceedingly averse to labour, that they sow no more than is barely
+sufficient to last them throughout the year, and never lay up any
+store for sale. In cultivating the ground, four or five of them go
+into a field with spades, with which they turn up the soil about four
+inches deep; yet such is the fertility of the soil, that it makes
+ample returns for this slight culture, without any farther
+trouble.</p>
+<p>The liquors of the Negroes are water, milk, and palm wine, which
+they call mighol, or migwol, which is taken from a tree of the palm
+tribe, very numerous in this country, somewhat like the date tree,
+but not the same, and which furnishes this liquor the whole year
+round. The trees are tapped in two or three places near the root, and
+from these wounds a brown juice runs out, as thin as skimmed milk,
+into calabasses that are placed to receive the liquor, which drops
+but slowly, as one tree will only fill two calabasses from morning
+till night. This migwol, or palm- wine, is an exceedingly pleasant
+drink, which intoxicates like wine unless mixed with water.
+Immediately after it is drawn from the tree it is as sweet as any
+wine whatever; but the luscious taste goes off more and more as it is
+kept, and at length it becomes sour. It drinks better than at first
+after three or four days, as it depurates by keeping, and is not so
+sweet. I have often drank of it, indeed every day that I remained in
+the country, and liked it better than the wines of Italy. This liquor
+is not so abundant as that every one may have it at discretion; yet
+all may have some, especially the chiefs, as the trees are not
+planted in gardens, like vines and fruit trees in Europe, but are
+found wild in the forests, and are consequently accessible to
+all.</p>
+<p>In this country there are several sorts of fruit which resemble
+those of Europe, though not exactly the same, and which are very
+good, though they grow wild; and, were they to be cultivated as ours
+are, would prove much better than such as are produced in the
+northern climates, the quality of the soil and air in this part of
+Africa being more nutritive. The whole country is plain and fertile,
+abounding in good pasture, and is covered by an infinite number of
+large and beautiful trees, that are not known in Europe. It contains
+several lakes of fresh water, none of them large, but very deep, and
+full of excellent fish, which differ much from those that are caught
+in Italy, and many water serpents, which the natives call
+ <i>Kalkatrici</i> . They use a kind of oil with their victuals, which
+tastes like oil of olives, has a pleasant flavour of violets, and
+tinges the food even better than saffron, but I could not learn what
+it was produced from[1]. There is likewise a plant which produces
+large quantities of small kidney-beans.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This is almost certainly palm oil, the origin of
+which will appear in another division of this work.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In this country there are many kinds of animals, but serpents are
+particularly numerous, both large and small, some of which are
+venomous. The large ones are more than two paces long[2], but have
+neither legs nor wings, as has been reported by some persons, but
+some of them are so very thick as to have swallowed a goat at one
+morsel. These serpents retire in troops, as the natives report, to
+certain parts of the country where white ants are found in prodigious
+swarms, and which, by a kind of instinct, are said to build houses
+for these serpents, of earth which they carry in their months for
+that purpose, resembling ovens, and often to the number of 150 in one
+place[3]. The Negroes are great enchanters, and use charms upon
+almost all occasions, particularly in regard to serpents, over which
+they have great power. A Genoese, worthy of credit, who was in this
+country the year before my arrival, and who likewise lodged with
+Bisboror, the nephew of Budomel, told me he once heard a load noise
+of whistling about the house in the middle of the night. Being
+awakened by the noise, he saw Bisboror get out of bed and order two
+negroes to bring his camel. Being asked where he meant to go at that
+time of night, he said he had business which must be executed, but
+would soon return. On coming back after some time, and the Genoese
+expressing curiosity to learn the object in which he had been
+engaged, Bisboror asked if he had heard the hissing noise about the
+house during the night, and said that it had been made by the
+serpents, which would have killed a great many of his cattle, if he
+had not sent them back to their quarters by the employment of certain
+enchantments. The Genoese was astonished at this story, but Bisboror
+said he had no need to wonder at this small matter, as Budomed could
+do a great deal more extraordinary things with the serpents than he
+could. In particular, when he had a mind to envenom his weapons, he
+used to draw a large circle, into which, by means of his
+enchantments, he brought all the serpents of the neighbourhood, from
+which he selected those he thought most poisonous, and allowed all
+the others to go away. With the blood of these serpents, mixed up
+with the seeds of a certain tree, he infected his weapons with so
+deadly a poison, that, if they drew but the least drop of blood, the
+person or animal wounded by them was sure to die in a quarter of an
+hour. Bisboror farther offered to shew him an example of the efficacy
+of this art, but the Genoese declined witnessing the experiment. This
+story of the serpents is the more probable, that I have heard of
+persons in Italy who could charm them in a similar manner; but I am
+apt to believe that the Negroes are the most expert sorcerers in the
+world.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] The text must be here erroneous, as two paces, or ten
+feet, will scarcely suffice in describing the boa constrictor,
+sometimes near thirty feet long.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] An account of the termites, or white ants of Africa,
+will appear hereafter. The circumstance of serpents taking up their
+abode in the large anthills, must be entirely
+accidental.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The only tame animals in the kingdom of Senegal are oxen, cows,
+and goats; having no sheep, which love a temperate or cold air, and
+could not live in this hot climate. Nature, however, has provided
+mankind with necessaries fitted for their various occasions; having
+furnished the Europeans with wool, as they have need of warm
+clothing, while the Negroes, who live in such intense heat, have been
+supplied with cotton by the Almighty. Owing to the heat, in my
+opinion, the cattle of this country are much smaller than those of
+Italy. It is a great rarity to see a red cow in this country, as they
+are all black or white, or mottled with black and white spots. Beasts
+of prey, such as lions, leopards, and wolves, are numerous, and there
+are plenty of hares. Wild elephants go about in troops, like the wild
+swine in Italy, but can never be tamed, as they are in other parts of
+the world. As the elephant is a well-known animal, I shall only
+observe in general, that those of Africa are of a very large size, as
+may be easily conceived by the size of their teeth, which are
+imported into Europe. Of these large teeth, or tusks rather, each
+elephant has two in the lower jaw, the points of which turn down,
+whereas those of the wild boar are turned up. Before my voyage to
+Africa I had been told that the elephant could not bend its knee, and
+slept standing; but this is an egregious falsehood for the bending of
+their knees can be plainly perceived when they walk, and they,
+certainly lie down and rise again like other animals. They never shed
+their large teeth before death; neither do they do any harm to man
+unless provoked. In that case the elephant makes his attack with his
+trunk, which is a kind of nose, protruded to a great length. He can
+contract and extend this proboscis at pleasure, and is able to toss a
+man with it as far as a sling can throw a stone. It is in vain to
+think of escape by running, let the person be ever so swift, in case
+the elephant pursues in earnest, as his strides are of prodigious
+length. They are more dangerous when they have young ones in their
+company than at any other time; of which the females have only, three
+or four at a birth. They feed on the leaves and fruit of trees,
+pulling down the large boughs with their trunks, and bringing them to
+their mouths. This trunk is composed of a very thick cartilage, and
+is pliable in every direction.</p>
+<p>There are many kinds of birds in this country, and parrots are
+particularly numerous, which are much hated by the negroes, because
+they do much damage to their crops of pulse and millet. There are
+said to be several kinds of parrots, but I never saw more than two.
+One of these is like the kind which is brought into Italy from
+Alexandria in Egypt, but rather smaller. The other kind is much
+larger, having a brown head, neck, bill, and legs, with a yellow and
+green body. I procured a considerable number of both sorts,
+particularly of the smaller kind, many of which died; but I brought
+150 back to Portugal, where I sold them for half a ducat each. These
+birds are very industrious in constructing their nests, which they
+build with bulrushes and the small leaves of the palm, and other
+trees, in a very curious and ingenious manner. Choosing the
+slenderest branch of a tree, the parrot fastens a bulrush of about
+two spans long to its outer extremity, at the depending end of which
+rush it weaves its nest in a most beautiful manner, suspended like a
+ball, and having only one passage for entering. By this means they
+contrive to preserve their young from being devoured by the serpents,
+as the small twigs from which the nests are suspended are unable to
+bear the weight of the serpents. There are likewise abundance of
+those birds called Pharaoh's hens[4] in Europe, which come to us out
+of the Levant. They have likewise other birds, both large and small,
+which are quite different from any that are known in Italy.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Probably the Pintado, or Guinea
+fowl.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>As I was long on shore, I went several times to see their markets
+or fairs, which were held every Monday and Friday in a meadow, not
+far from where I resided. The men and women, from four or five miles
+around, came to this place with their various commodities, and those
+who lived at a greater distance, went to other markets nearer their
+habitations. The great poverty of the natives appeared manifest in
+the goods they brought to these fairs; consisting of small quantities
+of cotton cloth, and cotton yarn, pulse, oil, millet, wooden tubs,
+palm matts, and every thing else useful to life, according to their
+manners, likewise arms, and some small quantities of gold. Having no
+money or coin of any kind, all their trade was carried on by way of
+barter, or exchange of one thing for another, sometimes two or three
+things for one, according to their different values. All these blacks
+used to gaze on me, as if I had been a prodigy, having never seen a
+white man before. Some took hold of my hands, which they rubbed with
+spittle, to see if the whiteness was natural or artificial, and
+expressed their wonder to find that my skin was not painted. They
+were as much astonished at my dress, being clothed in the Spanish
+fashion, with a black damask waistcoat, and a cloak over it: They
+seemed much surprised at the waistcoat, and greatly admired the
+woollen cloth, which they had never seen any of before. My chief
+purpose in going to these fairs, was to see what quantity of gold was
+brought thither.</p>
+<p>Horses are very scarce, and of great value in the country of the
+Negroes, being brought all the way from that part of Barbary which
+lies nearest to Europe, by the Arabs and Azanhaji. Owing to the great
+heat, horses do not live long here; for they grow so fat that they
+cannot stale, and so burst. They are fed with bean leaves, which are
+gathered after the beans are brought from the fields; and, being
+dried like hay, are cut small, and given to the horses instead of
+oats. They give millet also, which contributes greatly to make them
+fat. A horse and his furniture sells for from nine to fourteen
+negroes, according to his goodness and beauty; and when a negro lord
+buys a horse, he sends for his horse sorcerers, who cause a fire to
+be kindled of the stalks of certain herbs, and hold the horses head
+by the bridle over the smoke, while they repeat over some few words
+by way of incantation. They afterwards have him anointed all over
+with fine oil, and having kept him eighteen or twenty days, without
+allowing any one to see him, they affix some Moorish charms to his
+neck, which have the appearance of small square billets of writing,
+folded up and covered with red leather; and affirm, that, they will
+go into battle with greater safety by means of these scrolls or
+annulets.</p>
+<p>The women of this country are very pleasant and merry, especially
+the young ones, and delight in singing and dancing, taking this
+diversion only at night by moonlight; and their manner of dancing is
+very different from that of the Italians. Many things in our ships
+seemed wonderful to the Negroes, particularly our cross-bows; but
+much more our artillery. When some of them were on board my ship, I
+caused one of the guns to be fired off, which threw them into a
+dreadful panic; and their terror was much increased on being told
+that one cannon-shot could kill an hundred men. On which account,
+they alleged that it must be something belonging to the devil. They
+were likewise greatly astonished at a bag-pipe, which, one of our
+sailors played upon to divert them; and, on examining the several
+parts and ornaments of the instrument, they conceived that it was a
+living animal, which sung in different voices. Observing their
+simplicity, I told them it was a musical instrument, and put it into
+their hand unblown to examine. They then perceived that it was a work
+of art, but believed that it was something supernatural, and could
+only have been devised by a superior being, it sounded so sweetly,
+and in so many different tones, having never heard any thing which
+could be compared to it in their estimation. The ship, also, and its
+various contrivances, as its anchors, masts, sails, and shrouds,
+afforded them great subjects for admiration and wonder. They looked
+upon the port-holes in the stern as real eyes, by which the vessel
+was able to find her way in the sea; and observed, that travellers on
+land found difficulty to find the road from one place to another,
+while we were able to travel along the trackless ocean; and that the
+whites must therefore be the greatest of sorcerers, not inferior to
+the devil himself. They shewed great admiration on seeing a lighted
+candle in a candlestick, having themselves no other artificial light
+but that proceeding from a fire. They have honey-combs, but when they
+find these, they suck out the honey, and throw away the empty comb as
+useless. At one time, I bought some honey-combs from a negro, and
+shewed him how to extract the honey; after which, on asking him if he
+knew what remained, he said it was good for nothing: But he was
+greatly astonished on seeing it made into candles, and lighted in his
+presence; saying, that the Europeans knew every thing. Their only
+musical instruments are two, one of which they have from the Moors,
+which is like a large drum[5]; the other is somewhat like a fiddle,
+having only two strings, which they play on with their fingers, but
+gives no sounds that can be called harmonious.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] This in Ramusio is called Tabacche, and Sambuka in
+Grynaeus.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION VII.</p>
+<p> <i>Continuation of the Voyage from Senegal, by Cape Verd, the
+river Barbasini, and to the river Gambia; and, returns to
+Portugal.</i> </p>
+<p>Having seen a considerable part of the dominions of Budomel, and
+received the slaves which, were bargained for, in exchange for my
+horses and other merchandize, I resolved to proceed on my voyage,
+round Cape Verd, and to prosecute discoveries along this dangerous
+coast, and in particular, to go in search of the kingdom of Gambia or
+Gambia, which Don Henry had pointed out, on the information of a
+person who was well acquainted with the country of the Negroes, as
+not far from Senegal, and from whence, it was reported, that
+considerable quantities of gold might be procured. Longing to go in
+quest of this gold, I took my leave of Budomel, and repaired to the
+river Senegal, where I went on board the caravel and got under weigh,
+as soon as possible. Soon after leaving the river Senegal, as we were
+standing onward with a press of sail towards Cape. Verd, we descried,
+one morning two ships in the offing. On joining company, we found
+that one of these belonged to Antonio, an experienced Genoese
+navigator, and the other to some gentlemen in the service of Don
+Henry, and that they had sailed in company, with the intention of
+passing Cape Verd, to explore the coast beyond it, in search of new
+discoveries. Our intentions being similar, I offered to join company,
+and we accordingly proceeded together along the coast to the
+southward, in sight of land.</p>
+<p>We came in sight of that cape next day, being about thirty Italian
+miles from our last anchorage[1]. Cape Verd was so named by the
+Portuguese, who discovered it about a year before[2], because it is
+covered with trees which continue green all the year. This is a high
+and beautiful cape, which runs a considerable way into the sea, and
+has two hills or small mountains at its outer extremity. There are
+several villages of the Senegal negroes, or Jalofs, upon and about
+this promontory, which are composed of thatched cabins close by the
+shore, and in sight of those who sail past. There are also some sand
+banks, which extend about half a mile into the sea[3].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Cape Verd is about 100 miles from the southern mouth
+of the river Senegal; so that the voyagers probably anchored every
+night within sight of the scarcely known coast.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] This is erroneous, as it was discovered in 1446 by
+Denis Fernandez, nine years before.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] It is necessary to be cautious with respect to these
+early voyages, which, having gone through various transcriptions and
+translations, are liable to numerous errors. In our best charts, this
+sand bank, intermixed with sunk rocks, extends two miles out to
+sea.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Having doubled the cape, we came to three small uninhabited
+islands, full of green trees[4]; and being in want of water, we
+anchored at that which seemed the largest and most fruitful, in hopes
+of meeting with a spring, but could find none to answer our purpose.
+We met, however, with the nests and eggs of several kinds of birds,
+such as we had never seen before. This was in the month of July 1456,
+and we continued here all day, fishing with lines and large hooks,
+catching a prodigious number of fish, among which were <i>dentali</i> ,
+and gilded fish[5], some of which weighed from twelve to fifteen
+pounds each. On the next day we proceeded in our course, keeping
+always in sight of land, and found a kind of gulf formed by the coast
+on the south side of the cape[6]. This coast is all low, and full of
+fine large trees, which are continually green, as the new leaves grow
+before the old ones fall off, and they never wither like those in
+Europe; and the trees grow so near the shore, that they seem to drink
+as it were the water of the sea. The coast is most beautiful,
+insomuch that I never saw any thing comparable to it, though I had
+sailed much both in the Levant and the western parts of Europe. It is
+well watered every where by small rivers, but these are useless for
+trade, as they do not admit ships of any size. Beyond this little
+gulf, the coast is inhabited by two negro nations, called Barbasini
+and Serreri, which are not subject to the king of Senegal, neither
+have they any king or lord of their own; but one person is more
+honoured than another, according to his condition or quality. They
+are great idolaters, without laws, and living in almost a state of
+nature, and extremely cruel, and refuse to become subjected to any
+lord. That their wives and children may not be taken from them and
+sold as slaves, as is the custom among all the negro nations which
+are under subjection to kings or lords, they use bows and poisoned
+arrows, the wounds from which are incurable, if even the smallest
+blood is drawn, and the wounded person or animal soon dies. Their
+colour is jet black, and their persons are well made. The country is
+full of woods, lakes, and streams, from which they derive great
+security, as they can only be invaded through narrow defiles, by
+which means they set the neighbouring lords at defiance. In former
+times, the kings of Senegal often attempted to reduce these two
+nations under obedience, but were always worsted, owing to the
+natural strength of the country, and their arrows. Running along the
+coast to the south with a fair wind, we discovered the mouth of a
+river about a bow-shot wide, but not deep, to which we gave the name
+of the <i>Barbasini</i>  river, and have marked it on the chart which I
+made of the coast, as sixty miles from Cape Verd[7]. In sailing along
+the coast, we only made sail at sun rise, having a man continually on
+the top, and two others on the prow or head, to look out for
+breakers, and always came to anchor at sun set, about four or five
+miles from the land, in ten or twelve fathoms water.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Called the Birds islands, or the
+Magdalens.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] In Ramusio these fish are called Orate vecchis, and
+in Grynaeus Ostreas veteres.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] This appears to indicate the gulf between Cape
+Emanuel, near the isle of Goree, and the Red Cape.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] The river named Barbasini is above eighty-five miles
+S.S.E. from Cape Verd, measuring to its northern entrance, and forms
+a small island or delta at its mouth, having another entrance about
+eighteen miles farther south. There is a small island
+named <i>Fetti</i> , off its northern entrance, of which no notice is
+taken by Cada Mosto. The natives on this part of the coast, to the
+north of the Gambia, are now called Barras.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Proceeding on our voyage in this cautious manner, we came to the
+mouth of a river which appeared to be as large as the Senegal[8]; and
+struck by the fineness of its appearance, and its rich woods which
+came down to the very shores, we cast anchor, and determined to send
+one of our negro interpreters on shore, to endeavour to establish a
+friendly intercourse with the natives. Every ship which sails from
+Portugal for the coast of Africa is supplied with some of these negro
+interpreters, who consist of slaves that had been sold by the lords
+of Senegal to the first Portuguese who touched on the coast, and who
+have learnt the Portuguese language and become Christians. These are
+hired from their masters in Portugal, who receive, for their hire, a
+prime slave from the cargo on returning from the voyage; and when any
+of these interpreters have thus earned four slaves for their master,
+they become free. Having cast lots to determine which of the three
+ships should send an interpreter on shore, it fell on the ship
+commanded by the Genoese gentleman; on which he sent an armed boat,
+ordering the men not to touch the shore, but to push off as soon as
+they had landed the interpreter; who was charged to inform himself
+respecting the condition and government of the country, and to
+inquire whether it produced gold or any other commodity worth coming
+for. No sooner was the interpreter landed, and the boat shoved off to
+some distance as ordered, than several natives came out of the wood,
+who had been in ambush, with bows, arrows, and other weapons, from
+the time they saw our ships approach the coast, as if they had been
+in hopes that some of our people might land upon the coast. After a
+short parley with our interpreter, they furiously assaulted him with
+their <i>gomies</i> , or short Moorish swords, and slew him; our people
+in the boat being unable to give him any assistance. This
+intelligence was brought to the ships, where it excited much
+surprise; and, concluding that these people must be extremely
+barbarous, who could treat one of their own race with so much
+barbarity, and would consequently use us cruelly if in their power,
+we immediately weighed anchor, and stood on our voyage farther to the
+south, which improved in the beauty and verdure of the trees as we
+advanced, always sailing within sight of the coast, which is
+everywhere low land covered with trees.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] From the sequel, I am apt to conclude that this
+second river is the Barbasini of our charts; and that the river named
+Barbasini in the text of Cada Mosto, is that named <i>Joall</i>  in
+modern charts.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>We came at length to the mouth of a very large river, which is not
+less than six or eight miles wide at the entrance, and narrows a
+little way within to three or four miles, and finding that it could
+be safely entered, we determined to cast anchor for the night; and to
+endeavour to learn next day if this were the river and kingdom of
+Gambra, or Gambia, of which we were in search[9]. We judged, however,
+from its noble river, that we had now attained the so anxiously
+desired country of Gambia, and flattered ourselves in the hope of
+finding a country of vast riches, where we might make our fortunes at
+once, by returning laden with gold, and other rich commodities. Next
+day, having but little wind, we sent on the small caravel before,
+well manned, with directions, as their ship was small and drew little
+water, that they were to proceed as far as possible up the river,
+observing whether there were any bar or sand banks at its mouth, and
+to take the soundings with great care; and if the river were found
+navigable, they were to return and make signals to that effect.
+Finding four fathoms water at the entrance, the caravel brought to,
+and made the concerted signal; on which it was thought proper, as
+that caravel was small, to send another boat well armed along with
+her up the river, and they were strictly enjoined, in case the
+natives were hostile, to enter into no conflict with them, but to
+return immediately to the other ships, as the object of our voyage
+was to cultivate friendship and trade with the country, which could
+only be accomplished by policy, not by force. The boats accordingly
+proceeded up the river for two miles, leaving the small caravel at
+anchor, and found the banks everywhere beautiful, with sixteen
+fathoms water. But as the river above this made several returns or
+reaches, they did not think it prudent to venture any higher.</p>
+<blockquote>[9] Cada Mosto betrays strange ignorance of the previous
+discoveries of the Portuguese, considering that he had resided some
+time with Don Henry at Sagres. This fine river was discovered in
+1447, nine years before, by Nuno Tristan, who ascended it some way,
+and was slain there by the poisoned arrows of the Negroes. Perhaps
+even Don Henry was misled by the name of Rio Grande which it then
+received, and confused the Venetian in his search for the
+Gambia.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>When on their way back, they saw three <i>almadias</i>  or canoes
+near the mouth of a small river which runs into the large one. These
+almadias resemble the skiffs used in Italy which are
+called <i>zoppoli</i> , and are hollowed out of one large piece of
+wood. Although our boats were strongly armed, yet, in obedience to
+their orders, and for fear of being attacked with poisoned arrows,
+which the Negroes of Senegal had told us were used by all the natives
+of Gambia, they took to their oars, and made all possible haste back
+to the ship. By the time they got on board, the almadias, which
+followed them close, were within arrow flight. There were about
+twenty-five or thirty negroes in these three almadias, who stopped
+for some time gazing at the caravel, which was quite a new sight to
+them; but would neither speak nor come nearer, notwithstanding every
+endeavour by signs, to induce them to approach, and at length they
+returned to the shore. About three next morning, the other three
+caravels that had remained at anchor without the river, sailed with
+the rising tide and a light breeze, into the river, to rejoin the
+small caravel, and to proceed up the river, hoping to meet with a
+more civilized people than had been seen in the almadias. In this way
+we sailed up the river, one after the other, the small caravel
+leading; and when we had got about four miles up, we perceived
+ourselves to be followed by a number of <i>almadias</i> , without
+knowing whence they came. On this, we tacked about, and bore down
+towards the almadias, having first fortified ourselves in the best
+manner we could, to defend us against their poisoned arrows, and made
+every thing ready for battle, in case of need, though by no means
+well provided with arms. Our order of sailing was now reversed, and
+my ship was foremost in going down the river. We soon came to the
+almadias, which separated into two divisions, having my ship between
+them, when I had an opportunity to count their numbers, as they gave
+over rowing, raised their oars, and gazed in wonder at our ship:
+There were in all fifteen almadias of considerable length, having
+from 130 to 150 negroes, all well made, of a good size, and very
+black. They wore white cotton shirts, having white caps, like those
+worn by the Germans, on their heads; but with a wing on each side,
+and a feather in the middle, which I supposed to be a distinguishing
+mark of their being soldiers. There stood a negro on the prow of each
+almadia, having a round target, apparently of leather, on his arm;
+and for some time they neither attacked us, nor we them. When they
+saw the other caravels bearing down upon them, they dropped their
+oars, and taking up their bows, sent a flight of arrows on board.
+Seeing this attack, our ships discharged four pieces of cannon, at
+them, and they were so stupified by the report, that they threw down
+their bows, and stared about in amazement, at the effect which the
+stones from the cannon made on the water around them. They continued
+in this astonishment for some time; but seeing that the cannon ceased
+to fire, they plucked up courage, and renewed the fight, advancing
+within a stones throw of the ship. On this our sailors began to use
+their cross-bows; and the first shot, which was made by the natural
+son of the Genoese gentleman, hit a negro on the breast, who
+instantly fell down dead. Those in the almadia where he fell, took up
+the dart and gazed at it with wonder; yet they continued the attack
+with great vigour, and were courageously opposed by our caravels,
+insomuch that many of the Negroes were soon killed, without the loss
+of one man on our side. The Negroes now changed their mode of attack,
+and made a furious united attack on the stern of our smallest
+caravel, which was both ill manned, and insufficiently armed. On
+observing this, I brought up my ship to her assistance, and the other
+large caravel doing the same, we placed the small one between us, and
+we all vigorously plied our cannon and cross-bows against the
+almadias, which were at last forced to retire. We now linked all the
+three caravels together, and dropped one anchor, which was sufficient
+for us all, as it was calm weather, and the current by no means
+strong.</p>
+<p>We next endeavoured to enter into some conversation with the
+Negroes, and often hailed them by means of our interpreters. At
+length one of the almadias drew near, and on being asked the reason
+of their hostility to strangers, who came among them only to trade in
+a friendly manner, as they had already done with the Negroes of the
+kingdom of Senegal, and were desirous of being on the same friendly
+terms with them, if they thought proper, and were come from a far
+distant country, with presents for their king or lord, from the king
+of Portugal, who was desirous of peace and friendship with them. Our
+interpreters also entreated the Negroes to inform us what country we
+were in, who was their king, and what was the name of the river; and
+desired them to come freely on board, and take what goods they
+pleased; adding, that they might make a return in any commodities
+they thought proper, and in any quantities they pleased, or might
+have our goods for nothing. To all this they made answer, "That they
+had some intelligence of the Christians already, and of their
+dealings with the Negroes of Senegal, who must be very wicked people
+for entering into friendship with them; as they were well assured the
+Christians were meneaters, who bought the Negroes only to devour
+them, and, for this reason, they were resolved to have no
+correspondence with them, except to destroy them, and then to send
+their effects to their lord, who dwelt three days journey up the
+country." They added, that the name of their country was Gambra, but
+I have forgotten the name they gave the river[10]. At this time a
+brisk breeze sprung up, and, as we now thoroughly knew the hostile
+dispositions of the Negroes, we bore down upon their almadias; but
+they fled to the shore, and we dropt down to the mouth of the
+river.</p>
+<blockquote>[10] From this it would appear, that Gambra or Gambia is
+the name of the country, not of the river. Johnson says that the
+natives always call it <i>Gee</i> , which merely signifies the
+river.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<p>While we remained off the mouth of this river, we only once saw
+the north star in clear weather, and it was then so low as hardly to
+appear above the height of a lance above the sea[11]. We likewise
+observed, in about the same elevation, due south by the compass, a
+constellation of six large bright stars, in the figure of a cross, in
+this form: (Illustration)</p>
+<blockquote>[11] The centre of the mouth of the Gambia is in lat.
+13&deg; 30' N.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>We conjectured this to be the <i>southern chariot</i> , but could
+not expect to observe the principal star, as we had not yet lost
+sight of the north pole. In this place, on the <i>first</i>  of July,
+we found the night to be eleven hours and a half long, and the day
+twelve hours and a half. The climate is always hot, and I was told,
+that even the rain in the inland parts falls warm, in consequence of
+the great heat of the air. It is true, that there is some difference
+of the heat at different seasons, and when the heat is a little
+diminished, the natives call it winter. The rains begin in July, and
+continue till the end of October, and fall every day about noon; at
+which time certain clouds arise in the N.E. by E. or E.N.E. which are
+accompanied by prodigious thunder and lightning, and vast torrents of
+rain. In this season, which is in the beginning of July, the Negroes
+sow their grain, in the same manner with the people in Senegal. Their
+provisions consist of millet, pulse, flesh and milk. There is not so
+much dawn at break of day in this southern latitude as with us in
+Italy; for, within half an hour after the darkness of the night
+begins to dispel, the sun appears, and during all that dawn the
+atmosphere is turbid, as if filled with smoke, and the moment the sun
+appears this mist is dissipated. I could only account for this
+phenomenon, by attributing it to the low and flat surface of this
+country, which is destitute of mountains, and my companions were of a
+similar opinion.</p>
+<p>On holding a consultation among the commanders of the three
+caravels, we came to a resolution of proceeding about an hundred
+miles up the river, in hopes of meeting with a less ferocious, and
+better disposed people in the interior, than those we had encountered
+at the mouth of this river: But the sailors were impatient to return
+home, without incurring any farther dangers, and unanimously and
+loudly refused their consent to our determination, declaring that
+they had already done enough for the present voyage. Upon this being
+made known to us, and being well aware that seamen are of headstrong
+and obstinate dispositions, we conceded to their clamours, and
+steered next day for Cape Verd, on our return to Portugal[12].</p>
+<blockquote>[12] It may be noticed, that during the whole of his
+narrative, Cada Mosto constantly speaks of Spain, and the Spanish
+language, as if forgetting that the ships and crews were
+Portuguese.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION VIII.</p>
+<p> <i>The Second Voyage of Cada Mosto, in 1456, to the coast of
+Africa, in which the Cape de Verd Islands were Discovered</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] There is some difficulty respecting the date of this
+second voyage. In the former, Cada Mosto sailed from Portugal in
+March 1455. In the course of his proceedings, the month of November
+is mentioned, and some subsequent transactions are said to have
+happened in July, which, on this arrangement, must necessarily have
+been of the year 1456. If, therefore, the dates of the former voyage
+be accurate, the second ought to have been dated in
+1457.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>As I could say little or nothing about the condition of the
+country of Gambia, on my return to Portugal, on account of being
+obliged to leave it so suddenly; partly owing to the intractable and
+fierce disposition of the natives, and partly through the perversity
+of our sailors, who refused to proceed in exploring the river; the
+Genoese gentleman, Antonio, who had been with me in the former
+voyage, and I, resolved next season to fit out two caravels, in order
+to return to the river Gambia, and Don Henry, who was much pleased
+with our intentions, determined to send one of his caravels along
+with us. Every thing being made ready for our voyage, we sailed from
+Lagos, near Cape St Vincent, with a favourable wind, in the beginning
+of May, and steered for the Canaries, which we made in a few days;
+but, as the wind continued favourable, we did not touch there, and
+continued our course, to the southward; and, as we were favoured by a
+current setting to the S. W. we sailed on at a great rate. At last we
+came in sight of Cape Branco, keeping well out at sea, and on the
+following night we were assailed by a great storm from the S. W.
+which occasioned us to steer W. by N. for two days and three nights,
+in order to weather the tempest, rather than turn back. On the third
+day, to our great joy and surprise, we descried land, being much
+astonished to discover land in a quarter where no person could have
+expected it[2]. Two men were immediately sent aloft, who cried out
+that two large islands were in sight. This news was communicated
+through the ships, to our great satisfaction, as we were sensible
+these islands were unknown in Portugal. Judging it probable that
+these islands might be inhabited, and eager to try our fortune, we
+steered towards one of them, which we soon came up with, and sailed
+round a part of it, till we found safe anchorage. The weather being
+now much calmed, we sent our boat on shore, well manned and armed.
+The men landed, and having examined some part of the island, brought
+back word that they could meet with no signs of inhabitants
+whatever.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] This part of the narrative is involved in difficulty,
+and most be erroneous. A storm from the S. W. off Cape Branco, almost
+in lat. 21&deg; N. and a N. W. course, could not possibly lead to the
+discovery of the Cape Verd islands, almost six degrees farther south,
+and at least six degrees farther west. This difficulty may be solved,
+by supposing the storm from the N.E. and that the ships drove to the
+S.W. from off Cape Branco.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Next morning, to clear up all doubts, I sent ten men to land on
+the island, well armed with guns and cross-bows, whom I ordered to go
+to the top of some mountains within sight, and to look from thence,
+not only for people, but for more islands. These men executed my
+commands, but found no appearance of any inhabitants. They found,
+however, an incredible number of pigeons, which were so tame, being
+strangers to man, that they readily allowed themselves to be caught,
+and our people brought great numbers of them to the caravels. But,
+what was of much more importance, they brought intelligence of having
+discovered three other islands; one of which being to leeward,
+towards the north, could not be seen from the ships, while the other
+two lay to the south, all within sight of each other. These men
+likewise noticed something resembling islands towards the west, but
+at so great a distance that they could not be clearly distinguished,
+neither did I think proper to sail in that direction, lest I should
+lose time in visiting uninhabited islands, like this at which we had
+touched. The fame of my discovery of these four islands, brought
+other navigators afterwards to explore this group; who round them to
+be ten in number, both large and small included, and altogether
+uninhabited, except by pigeons and other birds, and having a fine
+fishery[3].</p>
+<blockquote>[3] This passage alludes to the voyage of Antonio de Noli
+in 1462. And it may be remarked, that de Faria, who mentions the
+discovery of these islands by Noli, takes no notice of the actual
+discovery by Cada Mosto. --Astl.</blockquote>
+<p>Leaving the first island, we came in sight of the other two, and
+searched for an anchoring place near one of them, which was full of
+trees. Discovering the mouth of a river, and being in want of water,
+we came to anchor, and sent our boats on shore to supply our wants.
+Some of our people went a little way up the river, where they found
+some small lakes containing remarkably fine white salt, of which they
+brought large quantities to the ships, laying in what store was
+thought necessary, as we did likewise of water. We found here great
+numbers of tortoises, or turtle, the shells of which were larger than
+a target. The sailors cooked these into different dishes, as they had
+done before in the gulf of Arguin, where these animals are found in
+plenty, but not so large as here. Out of curiosity I eat some of the
+flesh of these tortoises, which seemed very good, having a good smell
+and taste, and was not inferior to veal. We salted a great number of
+them, which proved a valuable addition to our stock of provisions
+during the voyage. We caught likewise a prodigious quantity of fish,
+both off the mouth of the river and in the stream; and, though we
+knew not the kinds, they were large and well-flavoured. The mouth of
+this river is a good arrow-shot across, and it is deep enough to
+admit a vessel of 150 tons. We remained two days in this place for
+refreshments, taking in a good stock of tortoises and fish, and large
+quantities of pigeons, which we killed without number. To the first
+island at which we anchored we gave the name of <i>Bona Vista</i> , as
+being the first we got sight of; and to this other, which seemed the
+largest of the four, the name of St Jago, having cast anchor there on
+the day of St Philip and St James. Every thing being in readiness for
+pursuing our voyage, we took our departure from these islands, and
+shaped our course for Cape Verd. We arrived at <i>Spedegar</i> , and
+keeping within sight of land, we came to a place named the <i>Two
+Palms</i> , which is between Cape Verd and the river Senegal. Being
+perfectly acquainted with the coast, we doubled the Cape next day,
+and came once more to the river Gambia, into which we immediately
+entered; and, finding no opposition from the Negroes or their
+almadias, we sailed up the river, always by day, and continually
+sounding. Such of the almadias as we saw on the river kept at a
+distance, close to the banks of the river, and never ventured to
+approach. About ten miles up the river we cast anchor on a Sunday
+morning, at an island where one of our sailors was buried who had
+died of a fever; and as his name happened to be Andrew, we called it
+the island of St Andrew[4].</p>
+<blockquote>[4] The editor of Astleys Collection considers this as
+having been St Jameses island, which is about twenty miles up the
+Gambia: But there is a small island near the northern bank, now
+called Charles I. which exactly corresponds with the distance in the
+text.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Leaving this island we proceeded up the river, followed by some of
+the Negroes in their almadias, yet always keeping at a considerable
+distance. Our interpreters often hailed them, and shewed them various
+trinkets, which were offered for their acceptance, and endeavoured to
+entice them to come near, by telling them that we were good-natured
+civilized people, from whom they had nothing to fear. Wrought upon by
+these representations, the Negroes at length approached, and came up
+with my caravel; and at last one of them, who understood the language
+of our interpreter, came on board. He was greatly surprized at every
+thing he saw in and about the caravel, especially with the sails and
+rigging, having no other idea of moving a vessel on the water but by
+means of oars. He was no less amazed at our colour and dress, as his
+nation mostly go stark naked, or with a single white cotton shirt as
+their sole dress. We were exceedingly kind and attentive to this
+Negro, and made him many presents of trinkets, and other things of
+small value, with which he was much delighted. I asked him many
+questions respecting the country, through our interpreter, and at
+length learnt that we were in the country of Gambia, of which
+Forosangoli was chief lord; and, by what we could learn from him, the
+residence of Forosangoli was at the distance of nine or ten days
+journey, in a direction between the south and the southwest. He said
+that Forosangoli was tributary to the king of Melli, who is the great
+emperor of the Negroes; that there were many inferior lords, who
+dwelt near the river on both sides, and, if we pleased, he would
+conduct us to the residence of one of these lords, named Battimansa,
+and would endeavour to negociate a treaty of peace and friendship
+between him and us. Being much pleased with this offer, we carried
+this Negro along with us, and treated him with much attention; and,
+sailing up the river, we came to the place where Battimansa resided,
+which, in my opinion, was above forty miles from the mouth of the
+river. In going up the river, into which several lesser rivers fall,
+we sailed to the eastwards, and at the place where we came to anchor,
+we found it much narrower than at the mouth, being not above a mile
+in breadth, by our estimation[5]. On coming to this place, we sent
+one of our interpreters and the native Negro to Battimansa, with a
+present of a handsome garment, called an <i>alzimba</i> , made of
+Moorish silk, in the form of a shirt; and they were desired to inform
+him of the reason of our coming into his country, signifying, "That
+the Christian king of Portugal had sent us thither, to enter into a
+treaty of friendship and peace with him, and that if he had any call
+for our commodities, our king would supply him with them every
+year."</p>
+<blockquote>[5] According to our best maps or charts of the Gambia,
+this river is never less than four miles broad, and generally above
+five, till we get near 100 miles up the river, to the reach which
+encircles the Devils Point, where it still is two miles wide. It is
+possible that the original journal of Cada Mosto may have had leagues
+of three marine miles each, in which case the residence of Battimansa
+may have been at or near the Devils Point, above 100 miles up the
+river.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>As soon as our messengers had discharged their commission,
+Battimansa sent some of his Negroes to the caravel, with whom we
+entered into friendship, and bartered several things for Negro slaves
+and some gold; but gold was by no means to be had in any thing like
+the plenty we expected, from the account given of this country by the
+natives of Senegal, who, being themselves extremely poor, consider
+that to be a large quantity which we think very trifling. The Negroes
+value their gold as a very precious thing, even at a higher rate than
+the Portuguese, yet we got it in barter very reasonably for things of
+very small value. We continued here eleven days, during which the
+caravels were continually resorted to by great numbers of Negroes
+from both sides of the river, who came to see the novelties, and to
+sell their goods, among which there were a few gold rings. Part of
+their commodities consisted of cotton cloth and cotton yarn; some of
+the pieces being all white, some striped blue and white, and others
+again with red, blue, and white stripes, all very well wrought and
+coloured. They likewise brought civet for sale, the skins of
+civet-cats, monkies, large and small baboons of various sorts; and
+these last being very plenty they sold them cheap, or for something
+not exceeding ten <i>marquets</i>  in value, for each; and the ounce of
+civet for what was not worth more than forty or fifty marquets; not
+that they sold their commodities by weight, but I judged the quantity
+to be about an ounce. Other Negroes brought various sorts of fruit
+for sale, among which were many small wild dates, which they seemed
+to think much of, but which our people thought not good, as the taste
+was different from those of Europe: As for me, I would not venture to
+eat any of them, lest they might have given me the flux, or some
+other distemper. Our ships were every day crowded with people of
+different aspects and languages[6], and the natives were continually
+going up and down the river from one place to another, both men and
+women, in their almadias. They have no sails, and propel their
+almadias entirely with oars, which they use on both sides, all the
+rowers standing up. One man stands at the stern, who rows sometimes
+on one side, sometimes on the other, to keep the almadia steady in
+her course. They have no pins or row- locks to steady their oars, but
+hold them fast with both hands; their oar being a pole, like a half
+lance, seven feet and a half long, with a round board like a trencher
+fastened to one end, and with these they row with great safety and
+swiftness, in the mouths of their rivers, which are very numerous;
+but they seldom go out to sea, or to any distance from their own
+coasts, lest they should be taken by their neighbours and sold for
+slaves.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] Though this country will be amply described in other
+voyages in our Collection, it may be proper to remark, that both
+sides of the river Gambia are inhabited by a mixed population of
+three nations, the Feloops, Foleys, and Mandingoes, each of whom have
+their own separate villages interspersed. This population is divided
+into many states, lordships, or little kingdoms; as Joalli, Barrah,
+Kolar, Badibu, Barsalli, &amp;c. on or near the northern bank; Kumbo,
+Fonia, Kaen, Jagra, Yamini, &amp;c. on the southern.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION IX.</p>
+<p> <i>Some Account of the Manners and Customs on the Gambia, and of
+the Elephant and Hippopotamus.</i> </p>
+<p>It now remains for me to relate what I observed and was informed
+of concerning this country, during my short stay. The religion of the
+Negroes of Gambia consists of various kinds of idolatry; they place
+great reliance on sorcery and other diabolical things, yet all
+believe in God. There are many Mahometans among them, who trade to
+many countries, yet are not settled in houses, because the natives
+are ignorant[1]. They live very much in the same manner with the
+natives of Senegal, and have the same kinds of provisions; but they
+cultivate more sorts of rice. They eat dogs flesh, which I never
+heard of being used anywhere else. They are clothed in cotton
+garments, and have great abundance of cotton in their country, which
+may be the reason of the Gambians not going naked, as those of
+Senegal do, where cotton is very scarce. The women dress in the same
+manner; and, when they are very young, take great delight in
+delineating figures on their necks, breasts, and arms, with the point
+of a hot needle, which are never obliterated, and which resemble the
+flowers and ornaments which are wrought on silk handkerchiefs. The
+country is excessively hot, and the heat increases as we go to the
+south; besides which, we found it much hotter up the river than at
+sea, owing to the immense number of trees with which the country
+everywhere abounds. Some of these trees are of very great dimensions.
+Near a spring where our sailors were in use to fill our water casks,
+not far from the banks of the river, there grew an exceedingly large
+tree, but its height was by no means proportional to its thickness;
+for, though it measured seventeen cubits in girth near the ground,
+its height, by estimation, was only twenty paces. This tree was
+hollow, but the branches were very large, avid extended to a great
+distance, forming a thick and ample shade. But there were many other
+trees much larger than this, by which the richness and fertility of
+the soil may be easily conceived; and the country is intersected by
+numerous streams.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] The meaning of this expression is obscure. Perhaps it
+implies that their Mahometan teachers had no mosques, because the
+Negroes were ignorant of the means and method of construction. The
+knowledge of God among the northern Negroes was assuredly due
+exclusively to the Mahometan missionaries.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>There are many elephants in this country, but the natives are
+ignorant of the art of taming these animals, as is practised in other
+countries. One day, while we lay at anchor in the middle of the
+river, we observed three elephants come out from the wood and walk by
+the river side, on which we sent our boat with some of the people
+towards them, but they immediately returned into the wood. These were
+all I ever saw alive; but, sometime afterwards, Guumi-mensa[2], one
+of the Negro lords, shewed me a dead young elephant, which he had
+killed after a chase of two days. The Negroes hunt on foot in the
+woods, using only arrows and assagays, or javelins, which are all
+poisoned. When they hunt the elephant they conceal themselves behind
+trees, and even sometimes mount to their tops, leaping from one tree
+to another in pursuit of the elephant, which, being a large unweildy
+animal, is often wounded in many places before it can turn round, or
+place itself in a posture of defence; but, in an open field, no
+person dare attack one, nor could even the swiftest escape from their
+pursuit, as I have been informed by many of the Negroes. The teeth of
+this dead elephant, which was shewn me by Guumi-Mensa, one of which
+still remained in the jaw, did not exceed three spans long, which
+distinctly shews that it was quite young in comparison of those whose
+teeth are from ten to twelve spans in length; yet, small as it was
+for an elephant, we computed that the weight of its carcass was equal
+to five or six oxen. Guumi-Mensa made me a present of what part of
+this elephant I liked best, and gave the remainder to his huntsmen to
+feast on. Understanding that elephants flesh was eaten by the
+Negroes, I had some both roasted and boiled, of which I tasted, that
+I might be able to say that I had fed upon the flesh of an animal
+which had never been eaten by any of my countrymen; but I found it
+hard, and of an unpleasant relish. I brought one of the legs and a
+part of the trunk on board our caravel, together with some of the
+hair from its body, which was a span and a half long, of a black
+colour, and very thick. On my return to Portugal, I presented this
+hair to Don Henry, together with a part of the flesh salted up for
+that express purpose, which he received with much satisfaction, as it
+was the first of the kind that had been brought from the countries
+that were discovered under his auspices. The foot of the elephant is
+round, like that of a horse, but without hoofs; instead of which it
+is covered by a very thick, hard, black skin, and defended by five
+nails on the fore part, which are round and of the size of
+a <i>grossone</i> [3]. Though young, the foot of this elephant measured
+a span and a half in diameter. From the same Negro lord I received
+the foot of a full-grown elephant, the sole of which was three spans
+and an inch in diameter; which, together with a tooth of twelve spans
+long, I presented to Don Henry on my return, who sent it afterwards
+as a great curiosity to the Dutchess of Burgundy.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Called Gnumi-Mensa in Grynaeus. According to Jobson,
+Mensa, or Mansa, signifies a king in the Mandingo
+language.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] A Venetian silver coin, not exceeding a silver
+penny.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<p>In the river Gambia, and in other rivers on this coast, besides
+the  <i>Calcatrici</i> [4] and other animals, there is one called
+the <i>river horse</i> , or hippopotamus, of the same nature almost
+with the sea cow, and which lives both on land and in the water. This
+animal is as large in the body as a cow, with very short legs and
+cloven feet, having a large head like that of a horse, and two huge
+teeth like the tusks of a wild boar, some of which I have seen
+upwards of two spans long. This animal, when it gets out of the
+river, walks on the land like any other fourfooted beast; and, so far
+as I know, was never before discovered by any Christian traveller,
+except perhaps in the Nile. We saw likewise a number of bats, or
+rather owls, upwards of three spans long; and many other birds, quite
+different from those of our country, both in appearance and taste,
+yet very good to eat.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] This animal is nowhere explained. Perhaps the
+crocodile or alligator.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION X.</p>
+<p> <i>Continuation of the Voyage from the Gambia to the river
+Kasa-Mansa, Cape Roxo, the rivers of St Ann and St Domingo, and the
+Rio Grande.</i> </p>
+<p>Having continued eleven days in the river Gambia, and many of our
+people becoming affected by acute fevers, we dropt down the river on
+the evening of the eleventh day, departing from the country of
+Batti-Mansa[1], and got out of the river in a few days, so stocked
+with commodities as to encourage us to proceed farther; and indeed,
+having been so far successful, and having a plentiful supply of
+provisions, and every thing necessary for prosecuting the voyage, we
+considered as incumbent on us to attempt some farther discoveries
+towards the south. We accordingly steered southwards with a
+favourable wind; but finding the land to run a considerable way to
+the S.S.W. from the mouth of the Gambia, to a certain point which we
+took for a cape[2], we stood out to the west to gain the open sea,
+the whole coast to the south of the Gambia being low, and covered
+with trees to the waters edge. On gaining an offing, we found that
+the beforementioned point was no actual cape or promontory, as the
+shore appeared perfectly straight on the other side; yet we kept at
+some distance out to sea, as we observed breakers for several miles
+out to sea[3]. On this account we had to proceed with great caution,
+keeping always two men at the head of the ship, and one in the
+main-top, to look out for shoals and breakers; and as a farther
+precaution, we sailed only during the day, and came to anchor every
+night. In this cautious progress, our caravels sailed always one
+before the other, having fixed the order of sailing by lot, and
+changed the leader every day, in order to avoid all disputes.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] At this place Grynaeus calls him Batrinense; though
+he had named him rightly Bati-mansa before.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] This is now called Cape St Mary.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] This seems to allude to what is now called Bald Cape,
+about twenty miles south from Cape St Mary, and stretching somewhat
+farther west; from which there extends breakers or sunken rocks a
+considerable distance from the land.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>At the end of two days sail in this manner, always in sight of
+land, we discovered on the third day the mouth of a river about half
+a mile wide[4], and towards evening we observed a little gulf or
+inlet, which we supposed might be the entrance of another river; but
+as it grew late, we came to anchor for the night. Next morning we
+sailed into this gulf, and found that it was the mouth of a large
+river, not a great deal less in my opinion than the Gambia, and both
+its banks were full of very beautiful tall trees. We cast anchor
+within the mouth of this river, and agreed to send two armed boats on
+shore with our interpreters to get intelligence respecting the
+country, according to our usual practice. This was done accordingly,
+and our interpreters, brought back word that the river was called
+Kasamansa, from a Negro lord of that name who resided at a place
+about thirty miles up the river; but who was absent from his
+residence, on a warlike expedition against the lord of a neighbouring
+territory.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Between the mouth of the Gambia and that of the
+Casamansa, there are three inlets, which appear to be smaller mouths
+of the latter river. The most northern of these is named St Peter,
+the most southerly Oyster river; the intermediate one has no
+name.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On receiving this intelligence, we sailed from this river next
+day, without attempting any traffic with the natives. This river of
+Kasamansa is twenty-five leagues, or 100 miles to the south of the
+Gambia[5]. Standing on about twenty-five miles farther, we came to a
+cape which is a little more elevated than the rest of the coast, and
+as its front had a red colour, we named it Cape <i>Roxo</i> ,
+or <i>Rosso</i> . Proceeding forwards, we came to the mouth of a pretty
+large river about a crossbow-shot wide, which we did not enter, but
+to which we gave the name of the river of St Ann. Farther on still,
+we came to the mouth of another river, not less than the former,
+which we named St Dominic, or St Domingo[7]; distant from Cape Rosso,
+by our estimation, between fifty-five and sixty miles. In another
+days sailing, we came to a very large river, which at first appeared
+to be a gulf, and was judged to be about twenty miles in breadth; but
+we could observe the beautiful trees on the south side, and it took
+us a considerable time to sail across to that side. On getting over
+to that side, we observed several islands in the sea, and as we
+wished to procure some intelligence concerning the country, we came
+to an anchor. Next morning two almadias came off to us from the land,
+one of which was as long as a caravel, and carried about thirty
+hands; the other was smaller, and was manned by sixteen Negroes. They
+came towards us with great eagerness; and, not knowing what might be
+their design, we took to our arms and waited their approach. As they
+drew near, they fixed a white cloth to the end of an oar, which they
+held up as a signal of peace, and we answered them in a similar
+manner. The Negroes then came alongside of our ships, the largest of
+the almadias coming up to the caravel in which I was. They gazed at
+every thing they saw, examining the form of the ship, the masts,
+yards, sails, and rigging with much attention, and they seemed
+astonished at seeing the white colour of our people. Our interpreters
+spoke to them, in order to learn the name of the country, but could
+not understand a word of their language, which was a great
+mortification to us, as we were obliged to leave the place without
+getting any intelligence; but we purchased a few gold rings from one
+of the Negroes, agreeing about the price by signs.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] The actual distance is barely a degree of latitude,
+or less than seventy English miles. Cada Mosto probably estimated by
+the log, the more circuitous track by sea.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] Cada Mosto does not mention the remarkable change
+which takes place here in the direction of the coast. From the Gambia
+to Cape Rosso, the coast runs direct south; after which its direction
+is E.S.E. to the mouth of the river St Ann.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] Called in modern charts, Rio S.
+Dominica.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Finding ourselves in a country where our interpreters were of no
+use, and considering therefore that it would be to no purpose for us
+to proceed any farther, we determined to return. We stayed two days
+in the mouth of this large river, which we therefore named Rio
+Grande[8], and where we found the north pole very low[9]. In this
+place we found great irregularity in the tides; for, whereas at
+Venice, and all other places in Europe, the flux and reflux are each
+of six hours continuance, the tide here only flows four hours, and
+ebbs eight, and the violence of the flowing tide is quite incredible,
+insomuch that we had great difficulty to stem it with three anchors
+a-head. Nay, such was its impetuosity, that we were sometimes obliged
+to hoist our sails, and even then it exceeded the force of the
+wind.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] According to de Faria, Rio Grande was discovered by
+Nunez Tristan in 1447, nine years before it was visited by Cada
+Mosto.--Astl.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[9] Cada Mosto is exceedingly superficial in his account
+of the Rio Grande; and it even seems dubious if he ever saw or
+entered this river, as he appears to have mistaken the navigable
+channel between the main and the shoals of the Rio Grande for the
+river itself; which channel extends above 150 English miles, from the
+island of Bulam in the E.S.E. to the open sea in the W.N.W. This
+channel agrees with his description, in being twenty miles wide,
+whereas the real Rio Grande is greatly smaller than the
+Gambia.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Taking our departure from the mouth of this vast river, on our way
+back to Portugal, we directed our course to two large islands and
+some small ones, which lay about thirty miles distance from the
+continent, which we found quite low, yet full of large and beautiful
+green trees, and inhabited by Negroes[10]. Encountering here the same
+difficulty of intercourse, for want of knowing their language, we
+made no stop, but took our departure for Portugal, where we arrived
+in safety.</p>
+<blockquote>[10] These may be the island of Waring and the Marsh
+islands, at the north-western entry of the channel of the Rio Grande,
+forming part of the Bissagos islands.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION XI.</p>
+<p> <i>The Voyage of Piedro de Cintra to Sierra Leona, and the
+Windward coast of Guinea; written by Alvise da Cada Mosto.</i> </p>
+<p>The two voyages to the coast of Africa in which Cada Mosto was
+engaged, and which have, been narrated in the foregoing Sections of
+this Chapter, were followed by others; and, after the death of Don
+Henry, two armed caravels were sent out upon discovery by orders from
+the king of Portugal, under the command of Piedro de Cintra, one of
+the gentlemen of his household, with injunctions to proceed farther
+along the coast of the Negroes than had hitherto been effected, and
+to prosecute new discoveries. In this expedition, Piedro de Cintra
+was accompanied by a young Portuguese who had formerly been clerk to
+Cada Mosto in his two voyages; and who, on the return of the
+expedition to Lagos, came to the house of his former employer, who
+then continued to reside at Lagos, and gave him an account of the
+discoveries which had been made in this new voyage, and the names of
+all the places which had been touched at by Piedro de Cintra,
+beginning from the Rio Grande, the extreme point of the former
+voyage[1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] For this exordium or introduction, we are indebted to
+the editor of Astley's Collection of Voyages and Travels, said to
+have been a Mr John Green. The infant Don Henry of Portugal died in
+1463; so that there must have been an interval of six or seven years
+between the second voyage of Cada Mosto and this of Piedro de Cintra:
+Though de Faria seems to put this voyage as having been executed
+before the death of that excellent prince, yet Cada Mosto, who then
+actually resided at Lagos, could not be mistaken is this important
+particular.-- Astl.</blockquote>
+<p>De Cintra first went to the two large inhabited islands at the
+mouth of the Rio Grande which I had discovered in my second voyage,
+where he landed, and ordered his interpreters to make the usual
+inquiries at the inhabitants; but they could not make themselves
+understood, nor could they understand the language of the natives.
+Going therefore into the interior, they found the habitations of the
+Negroes to consist of poor thatched cabins, in some of which they
+found wooden idols, which were worshipped by the Negroes. Being
+unable to procure any information in this place, Cintra proceeded, in
+his voyage along the coast, and came to the mouth of a large river
+between three and four miles wide, which he called Besegue, from a
+lord of that name who dwelt near its mouth, and which he reckoned to
+be about forty miles from the mouth of the Rio Grande[2]. Proceeding
+about 140 miles from the river Besegue, along a very hilly coast;
+clothed with high trees, and having a very beautiful appearance, they
+came to a cape to which they gave the name of Verga[3]. Continuing
+along the coast, they fell in with another cape, which, in the
+opinion of all the seamen, was the highest they had ever seen, having
+a sharp conical height in the middle like a diamond, yet entirely
+covered with beautiful green trees. After the name of the fortress of
+Sagres, which was built by the deceased Don Henry on Cape St Vincent,
+the Portuguese named this point Cape Sagres of Guinea. According to
+the account of the Sailors, the inhabitants of this coast are
+idolaters, worshipping wooden images in the shape of men, before
+which they make offerings of victuals as often as they eat or drink.
+These people are more of a tawny colour than black, having marks on
+their faces and bodies made with hot irons. They go almost entirely
+naked, except that they wear pieces of the bark of trees before them.
+They have no arms, as there is no iron in their country. They live on
+rice, millet, beans, and kidney beans, larger than ours; and have
+also beef and goats flesh, but not in any great abundance. Near to
+Cape Sagres there are several very small uninhabited islands.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] In a note to the second voyage of Cada Mosto, it has
+been already noticed that he seems to have given the name of Rio
+Grande to the channel between the Bissagos islands, or shoals of the
+Rio Grande and the Main. This river Besegue, may possibly be the
+strait or channel which divides the island named particularly
+Bissagos, or more properly Bissao, from that of Bassis or Bussi. Yet,
+this river Besegue may even have been that now called Rio Grande, in
+which, about twenty-four leagues above its mouth, there is an island
+called Bissaghe.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] It is strange that the Rio de Nuno, close by this
+cape, the estuary of which is not less than seven or eight miles
+wide, should be here omitted; but the present voyage is very
+superficially narrated throughout.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The inhabitants of this river have large almadias, carrying from
+thirty to forty men, who row standing, without having their oars
+fixed to any thing, as formerly noticed. They have their ears pierced
+with many holes, in which they wear a variety of gold rings. Both men
+and women have also a hole through the cartilage of the nose, in
+which they wear a gold ring, just like that of iron in the noses of
+our buffalos, which they take out when eating. The ladies belonging
+to the kings and great men, by way of extraordinary grandeur, have
+gold rings on other parts of their body, which decorum prevents us
+from particularizing.</p>
+<p>Passing Cape Sagres, they sailed about forty miles farther along
+the coast, and came to the Rio de San Vincents, which is about four
+miles wide; and about five miles farther they found another, which
+they called Rio Verde, larger at the mouth than the former[5]. Both
+of these rivers were so named by the sailors in the caravels. About
+twenty-four miles beyond the Rio Verde, they came to another cape
+which they called <i>Cape Liedo</i> , signifying the <i>cheerful</i> ,
+because of the beautifully verdant country in its neighbourhood[6].
+From Cape Liedo there extends a large mountain for about fifty miles
+along the coast, all of which is very high, and covered with tall
+verdant trees. At the end of this mountain, and about eight miles
+from the shore, there are three small islands, the largest of which
+does not exceed ten or twelve miles in circumference. To these the
+sailors gave the name of <i>Saluezze</i> [7]; and they named the
+mountain <i>Sierra Leona</i> , or the Lion Mountain, on account of the
+continual roaring of thunder on its summit, which is always enveloped
+in clouds.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] The text is here obviously defective, as no river is
+mentioned before; but the allusion must be to the river Pongo,
+Pongue, or Pougue, at the mouth of which Cape Sagres is situated;
+indeed that cape seems to be formed by one of the islands off the
+mouth of the river.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] There are a number of small rivers on the coast,
+between Cape Sagres and Cape Tagrin, such as Tofali, Dania, Buria,
+Berrea, Tanna, Pogone, Cagrance, dos Casas; but our modern charts
+have none named as in the text on this part of the
+coast.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] This is now called Cape Tagrin, and forms the
+northern point at the entrance of the Sierra Leone river, otherwise
+called the Mitomba or Tagrin river. The southern point is named Cape
+Sierra Leone; and in some maps is likewise named Liedo very
+improperly. It is necessary to distinguish carefully between
+the <i>Cape</i>  of Sierra Leone, and the mountainous ridge of the same
+name, which appears to extend a considerable way along the coast to
+the S. E. near fifty miles, to the river Kates, or Sa. Ma. della
+Neue. But, from the baldness of the narrative, there is great
+difficulty in tracing out this voyage.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] These are now called Bananas islands, in lat. 8&deg;
+N.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Proceeding beyond Sierra Leona, the coast was quite low, and the
+shore full of sand banks running out into the sea. About thirty miles
+from the southern extremity of the mountain, they found a river near
+three miles wide at the entrance, and because the water had a red
+colour, they called it Rio Roxo[8]. And farther on they found a cape,
+likewise of a red colour, which they named Cape Roxo[9]. And they
+gave the same name of Roxo to a small uninhabited island, about ten
+miles off at sea, where the north polar star seemed only the height
+of a man above the horizon. Beyond Cape Roxo, the sea forms a gulf,
+about the middle of which there enters a river, which the seamen
+called St Mary del Nievos, or of the snow, as having been discovered
+on the day of that Saint. On the other side of the river there is a
+cape, with an island close beside it[10]. This gulf is full of sand
+banks, running ten or twelve miles along the coast, on which the sea
+breaks with considerable violence, and has a strong current both in
+the ebb and flow of the tide; and the little island just mentioned is
+named  <i>Scauni</i> , on account of these sand banks. Twenty-four
+miles distant from this river is a large cape called St Ann, having
+been discovered on the day of that saint; and the whole coast between
+is low, with very shallow water. Twenty-four miles beyond this cape
+is the river of <i>Palms</i> , so named from the abundance of these
+trees which were seen there. The mouth of this river, though of
+sufficient width, is so full of shoals; and sand banks as to render
+its entrance very dangerous. About seventy miles farther on, there is
+another small river called <i>Rio de Fumi</i> , or Smoke River; so
+named, because at the time of its discovery, they saw nothing but
+smoke along this coast, made by the Negroes[11]. Beyond this river,
+about twenty-four miles, there is a cape which runs a great way out
+into the sea, on which stands a high mountain, on which account it
+was called  <i>Cabo del Monte</i> , or Cape Mount About sixty miles
+still farther on, to the S. E. there is another and smaller cape, on
+which is a small mountain or hill, which was named
+Cape <i>Cortese</i> , or <i>Misurado</i> . The first night after their
+arrival at this place, the voyagers saw many fires among the trees,
+made by the Negroes on seeing the ships, as they had never seen such
+objects before.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] Perhaps the Camaranca.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[9] Probably that now called Tassa Point, or Cabo de S.
+Anna.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[10] This account seems again to refer to the river
+Camaranca and Tassa Point; otherwise called Cape St Ann; yet this
+cape is brought in immediately afterwards. Indeed this voyage is
+inextricably confused, probably incorrect or
+corrupt.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[11] The large island of Sherbro, with Sherbro Strand and
+Shoals, a very prominent feature of this part of the African coast,
+is here entirely overlooked; unless we suppose de Cintra to have gone
+on the outside of that island, considering the sound as a river, and
+naming the N. W. point of Sherbro island Cape St
+Ann.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>About sixteen miles beyond Cape Misurado, there is a large forest
+of trees close to the shore, to which they gave the name of St Mary's
+Grove. The caravels came to anchor beyond this wood, and several
+almadias came off from the shore towards them. There were two or
+three naked negroes in each, having sharp pointed sticks in their
+hands, which our seamen supposed to be darts; some of them had small
+knives, and they had only two targets and three bows among them all.
+These Negroes, had their ears and noses pierced, from which hung some
+strange ornaments resembling human teeth. The interpreters spoke to
+them, but could not understand their language. Three of these Negroes
+ventured on board one of the caravels, one of whom was detained by
+the Portuguese, and the other two allowed to go away; for Cintra had
+been ordered by the king, in case of discovering any country where
+the interpreters did not understand the language, that he was to
+bring away one of the natives either by force or fair means, that he
+might be able to give an account of his country, either by some of
+the Negroes in Portugal happening to understand his language, or
+after he had acquired the Portuguese.</p>
+<p>Piedro de Cintra, having determined to proceed no farther,
+returned back to Portugal from Cape Misarado, to which he had traced
+the coast of Africa from the Rio Grande. Upon his return, this negro
+who had been detained off Cape Misurado, was examined by several
+Negroes, and at length was understood by a Negress who belonged to an
+inhabitant of Lisbon; not indeed by his own proper language, but by
+means of another which was known to them both. Whatever intelligence
+may have been procured on this occasion, was not made public, except
+that there were unicorns in his country. After this Negro had been
+kept for some months in Lisbon, and had been shewn many of the
+curiosities of Portugal, the king ordered him to be supplied with
+clothes, and sent him back in a caravel to his own country. But from
+that coast no other ship had arrived before my departure, which was
+on the first of February 1463[12].</p>
+<blockquote>[12] We have already seen that Don Henry died in this
+year, which must, therefore, be here an error of the press, either in
+the original publication by Cada Mosto, or in some of the after
+editions.--E.</blockquote>
+<h2><a name="chapter2-5" id="chapter2-5">CHAPTER V.</a></h2>
+<p><b> <i>Continuation of the Portuguese discoveries along the coast
+of Africa, from the death of Don Henry in 1463, to the discovery of
+the Cape of Good Hope in 1486</i> </b>[1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Astley, I. 15. Clarke, I. 290. Purchas, I. Harris, I.
+664.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+<p> <i>Progress of Discovery from Cape Verga to Cape St Catherine;
+from the Death of Don Henry to that of King Alphonzo V</i> .</p>
+<p>After the decease of Don Henry, the illustrious father of maritime
+discovery, the progress of the Portuguese along the coast of Africa
+received a considerable check, as the military ardour of Alphonzo the
+Fifth was principally directed to the support of his pretensions to
+the throne of Castile, the circumstances of which are unconnected
+with the plan of this work. King Alphonzo was not however entirely
+inattentive to the trade for gold and slaves, which his illustrious
+uncle Don Henry had commenced with that part of Africa which is now
+called Guinea. The origin of this name of Guinea, or <i>Ghinney</i> ,
+is unknown. It is not in use among the natives, and seems to have
+been imposed by the Portuguese from the appellation
+of <i>Ghenchoa</i> , given to a country on the south side of the
+Senegal, us first mentioned by Leo and afterwards by Marmol. Ever
+since the year 1453, as already mentioned, considerable importations
+of gold had been made to Portugal from the coast of Africa; but
+little or no progress had been made in extending the discoveries
+farther south, for some time previous to the decease of Don Henry. In
+1470, King Alphonzo sailed with a considerable army, in a fleet of
+above 300 ships, and carried the strong fort of <i>Arzila</i>  on the
+Atlantic coast of Africa, a little way to the south of the Straits of
+Gibraltar. But of his military exploits in Africa, from which he
+acquired the appellation of <i>Africanus</i> , and assumed the
+additional title of <i>Lord of the coasts on both seas</i> , our
+present purpose does not call for any recital. In 1479, the disputes
+between the crowns of Portugal and Castile were compromised by a
+treaty entered into by Alphonzo V. king of Portugal, and Ferdinand
+king of Castile; by which the trade of Guinea, and the navigation of
+its coast, with the proposed conquest of <i>Fez</i> , were guaranteed
+to Portugal, and the Canary islands were annexed to the crown of
+Castile.</p>
+<p>From the want of any accurate history of the progress of the
+Portuguese discoveries, it is utterly impossible to determine the
+dates or circumstances of many of the progressive discoveries along
+the western coast of Africa, and of its islands. In 1469, Alphonzo
+farmed the Guinea trade for five years to Fernando Gomez, for the
+yearly rent of 500 ducats, or about 138 pounds; taking, him bound at
+the same time, to extend the discoveries for 500 leagues to the
+southwards during the period of his exclusive privilege. In 1471,
+according to Marmol, Juan de Santareu and Pedro de Escobar,
+discovered the <i>Oro de la Mina</i> , or the <i>Gold coast</i> ; and
+advancing still farther, under the guidance of two experienced
+pilots, Martin Fernandez and Alvaro Esteves, they discovered <i>Cabo
+Catalina</i> , or Cape St Catherine, in lat. 1&deg; 40' S. This
+promontory, which is thirty-one leagues to the south of Cabo de Lope
+Gonzales, derived its name from the day of the saint on which it was
+first seen, and forms the northern boundary of the great kingdom of
+Congo. The discovery of this cape is assigned by some writers to
+Sequiera, a knight belonging to the royal household.</p>
+<p>The celebrated Portuguese historian, Emanuel de Faria, in
+his <i>Asia Portuguesa</i> , has recorded all the Portuguese voyages,
+from their first attempts under Don Henry, to their developement of
+China and Japan, and has even left an account of all the ships that
+sailed from Lisbon for Africa and Asia, down to the year 1600; but
+was unable to ascertain the dates of many important events. Neither
+he nor De Barros have been able to remove the uncertainty respecting
+the first discovery of the island of St Thomas on the coast of
+Africa, the south end of which touches the equinoctial. During the
+remainder of the reign of Alphonzo, the line of coast, from Cape
+Verga in lat. 10&deg; N. to Cape St Catherine in 1&deg; 40' S. was
+much frequented by the Portuguese. Of this coast an ample account has
+been given by Dapper and Barbot, chiefly following a tract published
+by Gotard Artus of Dantzick, which is to be found in De Bry's
+Collection, and that of David von Nyendael and others. This was the
+work of a Dutch navigator, which was first translated in to German,
+and thence by Artus into Latin. But our peculiar department is
+confined to actual voyages and travels, and the progress of
+discovery; and it would both much exceed our proper limits, and would
+be an entire deviation from our plan of arrangement, to admit
+lengthened geographical and topographical disquisitions; which, so
+far as they are at all admissible, must be reserved for the more
+particular voyages and travels, after those of general discovery have
+been discussed.</p>
+<p>There are four principal islands in the Gulf of Guinea, or Bight
+of Biafra, as it is usually called by English navigators, Ferdinand
+Poo, Princes isle, St Thomas, and Annobon, the discovery of which
+have been related as follows by Barbot, and his account seems the
+most probable[2]. Fernando Lopez discovered the first of these in
+1471, in lat. 3&deg; 40' N. giving it the name of <i>Ilha formosa</i> ,
+or the Beautiful Island, which was afterwards changed to that
+of <i>Fernando Poo</i> , which it still retains. In an account of the
+kingdom of Congo, in Churchill's Collection, viii. 527, more properly
+named the Oxford Collection, or that of Osborne, v. 2. This island,
+and a river on the coast of the continent of Africa, directly east,
+now called Cameroon River, are said to have taken their names of
+Fernando Poo from their first discoverer. Some writers assign the
+discovery of these four islands, and that of St Matthew, to Fernando
+Gomez, who formed the Guinea trade. Perhaps they were discovered
+under his auspices, by the navigators whom he employed. This island
+is composed of very high land, easily seen at a great distance, and
+the Portuguese had formerly sugar plantations upon it. The <i>Ilha do
+Principe</i> , or Princes Island, in lat. 1&deg; 30' N. was either
+discovered by Fernando Lopez, or by Santaren and Escobar, about the
+same period, and probably received its name in honour of the
+illustrious prince, Don Henry. This island is described as consisting
+of high table mountains, pyramidal at their bases, and visible at the
+distance of twenty leagues; being about nine leagues long by five
+leagues broad. It is said to abound in oranges, lemons, bananas,
+cocoa-nuts, sugar-canes, rice, many species of sallad herbs, and to
+be susceptible of producing the European grains. The mandioca, or
+root of the cassada plant, is generally used for bread, of which the
+juice while raw is said to be a virulent poison; while its meal, or
+rasped root, after the malignant juice is carefully pressed out, is
+used for bread. The inhabitants also, have sheep, hogs, goats, and an
+immense number of poultry; but these have probably been introduced by
+the Portuguese.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Clarke, I. 295.</blockquote>
+<p>The <i>Ilha de San Thome</i> , or island of St Thomas, which is said
+to have received its name from the saint to whom the chapel of the
+great monastery of <i>Thomar</i>  is dedicated, and to which all the
+African discoveries are subjected in spirituals, has its southern
+extremity almost directly under the equinoctial, and is a very high
+land of an oval shape, about fifteen leagues in breadth, by twelve
+leagues long.</p>
+<p>The most southerly of these islands, in lat. 1&deg; 30' S. now
+called Annobon, was originally named Ilha d'Anno Bueno, or Island of
+the Happy Year, having been discovered by Pedro d'Escovar, on the
+first day of the year 1472. At a distance, this island has the
+appearance of a single high mountain, and is almost always topt with
+mist. It extends about five leagues from north to south, or rather
+from N. N. W. to S. S. E. and is about four leagues broad, being
+environed by several rocks and shoals. It has several fertile
+vallies, which produce maize, rice, millet, potatoes, yams, bananas,
+pine-apples, citrons, oranges, lemons, figs, and tamarinds, and a
+sort of small nuts called by the French <i>noix de medicine</i> , or
+physic nuts[3]. It also furnishes oxen, hogs, and sheep, with
+abundance of fish and poultry; and its cotton is accounted
+excellent.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] These may possibly be the nuts of the Ricinus Palma
+Christi, from which the castor oil is extracted.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Including the voyages of Cada Mosto and Pedro de Cintra, which
+have been already detailed, as possibly within the period which
+elapsed between the death of Don Henry in 1463, and King Alphonzo,
+which latter event took place on the 28th August 1481, and the
+detached fragments of discovery related in the present Section, we
+have been only able to trace a faint outline of the uncertain
+progress of Portuguese discovery during that period of eighteen
+years, extending, as already mentioned, to Cape St Catherine and the
+island of Annobon. A considerable advance, therefore, had been made
+since the lamented death of the illustrious Don Henry; which
+comprehended the whole coast of Guinea, with its two gulfs, usually
+named the <i>Bights</i>  of Benin and Biafra, with the adjacent
+islands, and extending to the northern frontier of the kingdom of
+Congo[4]. If the following assertion of de Barros could be relied on,
+we might conclude that some nameless Portuguese navigators had
+crossed the line even before the death of Don Henry; but the high
+probability is, that the naval pupils of that illustrious prince
+continued to use his impress upon their discoveries, long after his
+decease, and that the limits of discovery in his time was confined to
+Cape Vergas. Some Castilians, sailing under the command of Garcia de
+Loaysa, a knight of Malta, landed in 1525 on the island of St
+Matthew, in two degrees of southern latitude[5]. They here observed
+that it had been formerly visited by the Portuguese, as they found an
+inscription on the bark of a tree, implying that they had been there
+eighty-seven years before[6]. It also bore the usual motto of that
+prince, <i>talent de bien faire</i> .</p>
+<blockquote>[4] Strictly speaking the northern limits of Loango, one
+of the divisions of the extensive kingdom of Congo, is at the Sette
+river, ten leagues S.S. E. from Cape St Catherine.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] There is no island of that name in this position; so
+that the island of St Matthew of de Barros must refer to
+Annobon.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] These dates would throw back the discovery of this
+island, and the passage of the line by the mariners of Don Henry, to
+the year 1438, at a time when they had not reached the latitude of
+25&deg; N. which is quite absurd.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the paucity of authentic information respecting these
+discoveries, it seems proper to insert the following abstract of the
+journal of a Portuguese pilot to the island of St Thomas, as inserted
+by Ramusio, previous to the voyage of Vasco de Gama, but of uncertain
+date; although, in the opinion of the ingenious author of the
+Progress of Maritime Discover, this voyage seems to have been
+performed between the years 1520 and 1540. In this, state of
+uncertainty, it is therefore made a section by itself, detached in
+some measure from the regular series of the Portuguese
+discoveries.</p>
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+<p>Voyage of a Portuguese Pilot from Lisbon to the Island of St
+Thomas[1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Ramusio. Clarke I. 298. This voyage was communicated
+by the relator to Count Raimond della Torre, a nobleman of
+Verona.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>Before I left Venice, I was requested by letter from Signior
+Hieronimo Fracastro of Verona, that, on my arrival at Conde, I would
+send, him an account of my voyage to San Thome, to which island our
+ships often sail for cargoes of sugar. The passage of the equinoctial
+line, under which that island, is situated, appeared to that
+gentleman so extraordinary a circumstance as to merit the attention
+of men of science; and you likewise made me a similar request. I
+began, therefore, immediately after my return, to draw up an account
+of my voyage, from those notes which we pilots usual keep of all
+occurrences, and I compared it in my progress with the journals of
+some friends who had formerly made the same voyage. When I afterwards
+attentively perused my manuscript, it did not appear to me worthy of
+being communicated to a gentleman of such scientific character as
+Signor Hieronimo, whose talents I had duly appreciated, by the
+perusal of his publications, which I received from you before my
+departure from Venice. I therefore laid my manuscript aside, not
+wishing that any one might peruse it; but as you have again urged the
+performance of my promise, I now anxiously obey a request, which, as
+coming from you, I must always consider a command. Apprehensive,
+likewise, of appearing forgetful of your polite attentions, I prefer
+the danger of exposing my ignorance, to the possibility of being
+charged with ingratitude or want of attention. Being a sailor, and
+unused to composition, I pretend to little more than copying the
+remarks of those who have sailed from our continent
+to <i>Ethiopia</i> , without attempting to reduce my narrative into
+lucid order, or to embellish it with fine writing. You will therefore
+have the goodness to destroy this account, after its perusal, that
+the errors I have committed, by compliance with your commands, may
+not draw upon me the imputation of presumption.</p>
+<p>The Portuguese ships which sail to the island of St Thomas from
+Lisbon, for cargoes of sugar, usually put to sea in February, though
+some vessels make this voyage at every period of the year. Their
+course is S.S.W. until they reach the Canary Islands; after which
+they steer for the island of Palmas, which is opposite to Cape
+Bojador on the coast of Africa, and is about ninety leagues from the
+kingdom of Castile. This island has plenty of provisions, and abounds
+in wine and sugar. The north- west wind prevails most, and a great
+sea rages continually on its coast, particularly in the month of
+December[2].</p>
+<blockquote>[2] A description of the islands of Cape Verd, and an
+account of the supply of salt usually taken on board by the
+Portuguese ships at the island of Sal, for the purpose of laying in a
+sea store of salt fish, is here omitted.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>If the ships which are bound for the island of St Thomas find it
+necessary to obtain a quantity of salt after having taken on board a
+sufficient supply at the island of <i>Sal</i> , they steer for the
+coast of Africa at the Rio del Oro; and, if they have calm weather
+and a smooth sea; they catch as many fish in four hours, with hooks
+and lines, as may suffice for all their wants during the remainder of
+the voyage. But, if the weather is unfavourable for fishing at the
+Rio del Oro, they proceed along the coast to Cape Branco; and thence
+along the coast to the island of Arguin. The principal sorts of fish
+on this coast are <i>pagros</i> , called  <i>albani</i>  by the
+Venetians; likewise <i>corvi</i>  and <i>oneros</i> , which latter are
+only a larger and darker-coloured species of <i>pagros</i> . As soon as
+taken, the fish are opened and salted, and serve as an excellent
+supply of provisions to navigators. All the coast of Africa, from
+Cape Bojador, otherwise called <i>Cabo della Volta</i> , as far as Cape
+Branco and even to Arguin, is low and sandy. At Arguin, which is
+inhabited by Moors and Negroes, and which is situated on the confines
+between these two nations, there is a capacious harbour, and a castle
+belonging to our king of Portugal, in which some Portuguese always
+reside with the royal agent.</p>
+<p>On leaving the island of Sal, our ships steer next for St Jago,
+another of the Cape Verd islands. This island is situated
+in <i>fifteen degrees on the equinoctial and thirty leagues towards
+the south</i> [3].It is seventeen leagues long, and has a city on the
+coast, with a good harbour called  <i>Ribiera Grande</i> , or the Great
+River, now St Jago. From two high mountains, one on each side, a
+large river of fresh water flows into the harbour; and, from its
+source, full two leagues above the city, its banks are lined on each
+side with gardens, having fine groves of oranges, cedars,
+pomegranates, several sorts of figs, and the cocoa-nut palm, which
+has been long planted on this island. It produces all kinds of
+vegetables in great abundance and perfection; but they do not afford
+good seeds, so that it is necessary to procure these every year from
+Europe. The city is on the south coast of the island, and is well
+built of stone, being inhabited by about 500 families of distinction,
+Portuguese and Castilians. Its government is entrusted to a
+corregidor or governor, appointed by the king of Portugal; and two
+judges are chosen annually, one for the determination of naval and
+maritime causes, and the other for regulating the police. This island
+is very mountainous, and is very barren in many parts, which are
+entirely destitute of wood; but its vallies are fertile and well
+cultivated. In June, when the sun enters Cancer, the rains are so
+incessant that the Portuguese call that month  <i>La Luna de las
+Aquas</i> , or the Water Month. Their seed-time begins in August, when
+they sow maize, called <i>miglio zaburo</i> . This is a white bean,
+which is ready to be gathered in forty days, and is the chief food of
+these islanders, and of all the inhabitants of the coast of
+Africa[4]. They also sow much rice and cotton; the latter of which
+comes to great perfection, and is manufactured into striped cloths,
+which are exported to the country of the Negroes, and bartered for
+black slaves.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] This geographical expression is utterly
+unintelligible, but may be a strange mode of denoting its latitude,
+which is 15&deg; N. but I know not what to make of the thirty leagues
+towards the south, unless the author meant that it was thirty leagues
+in extent from north to south, and seventeen leagues from east to
+west.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] The description in the text is not applicable to
+maize, and must refer to some species of bean, or
+kidney-bean.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>To give a distinct view of the commercial transactions with the
+Negroes, it is proper to inform you, that the western coast of Africa
+is divided into several countries and provinces, as
+Guinea, <i>Melegote</i> [5], the kingdom of Benin, and the kingdom of
+Manicongo. Over all this extent of coast, there are many Negro kings
+or chiefs, whose subjects are Mahometans and idolaters, and who are
+continually at war with each other. These kings are much respected by
+their subjects, almost to adoration, as they are believed to have
+originally descended from heaven. When the king of Benin dies, his
+subjects assemble in an extensive plain, in the centre of which a
+vast pit or sepulchre is dug, into which the body is lowered, and all
+the friends and servants of the deceased are sacrificed and thrown
+into the same grave, thus voluntarily throwing away their own lives
+in honour of the dead. On this coast there grows a species of
+ <i>melegete</i> , extremely pungent like pepper, and resembling the
+Italian grain called <i>sorgo</i> . It produces likewise a species of
+pepper of great strength, not inferior to any of that which the
+Portuguese bring from Calicut, under the name of <i>Pimienta del
+rabo</i> , or <i>Pepe dalla coda</i> , and which African pepper
+resembles <i>cubbebs</i> , but so powerful that an ounce will go
+farther than a pound of the common sort; but its exportation is
+prohibited, lest it should injure the sale of that which is brought
+from Calicut[6]. There is also established on this coast a
+manufacture of an excellent kind of soap from palm-oil and ashes,
+which is carried on for the king's account. All the trade of this
+coast, to the kingdom of  <i>Manicongo</i>  exclusively, is farmed out
+every four or five years to the highest bidder. Great Negro caravans
+bring gold and slaves to the stations on the coast. The slaves are
+either prisoners taken in war, or children whom their parents have
+parted with in the hope of their being carried to a more fertile
+country. For above ninety years after the first discovery of this
+coast, the Portuguese merchants were accustomed to enter the large
+rivers by which the country is everywhere intersected, trading
+independently with the numerous tribes inhabiting their banks; but
+now the whole of this commerce is in the hands of stationary licensed
+factors, to whom it is farmed.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] Called likewise Maleguette, and named also the
+Grain-Coast and the Pepper-Coast. Manicongo is obviously the kingdom
+of Congo.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] Some of this is smuggled and sold in
+England.--Clark.<br>
+This Guinea pepper is probably that now known under the name of
+Jamaica pepper; but the extremely pungent kind must be some of the
+numerous species of capsicums, usually called Cayenne
+pepper.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On quitting St Jago we steer southerly for the Rio Grande, which
+is on the north of Ethiopia, beyond which we come to the high
+mountain of Sierra Liona, the summit of which is continually
+enveloped in mist, out of which thunder and lightning almost
+perpetually flashes, and is heard at sea from the distance of forty
+or fifty miles. Though the sun is quite vertical in passing over this
+mountain, and extremely hot, yet the thick fog is never dissipated.
+In our voyage we never lose sight of land, yet keep always at a
+considerable distance, carefully observing the declination of the
+sun, and keeping a southerly course till we arrive in  <i>four degrees
+on the equinoctial</i> [7], when we suddenly change our course to the
+south-east, keeping the Ethiopian coast always on our left hand in
+our way to the island of St Thomas. On this coast, between the tropic
+and the equinoctial, we never meet with any hard gales, as storms are
+very rarely found within the tropics. On nearing the land, the
+soundings in many parts of the coast do not exceed
+fifty <i>braccia</i> , but farther out the depth rapidly increases, and
+the sea usually runs high at a distance from the land. When we
+arrived at Rio del Oro, as mentioned before, we observed four stars
+in the form of a cross, of an extraordinary size and splendour,
+elevated thirty degrees above the antarctic pole, and forming the
+constellation called <i>il Crusero</i> . While under the tropic of
+Cancer, we saw this constellation very low; and, on directing
+our <i>balestra</i> [8] to the lowermost of these stars, we found it to
+be directly south, and concluded that it must be in the centre of the
+antarctic polar circle. We observed the same constellation very high
+when we were at the island of St Thomas; and remarked that the moon,
+after rain, produces a rainbow similar to that occasioned by the sun
+during the day, except that the colours were dim and ill-defined. On
+leaving the straits of Gibraltar, I did not observe any sensible
+change on the ebb and flow of the sea; but when we approached Rio
+Grande, which is eleven degrees to the north of the equinoctial, we
+observed a considerable tide at the mouth of that river, and the rise
+in some places was much the same as on the coast of Portugal, whereas
+at the isle of St Thomas it was nearly the same as at Venice.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] This strange expression seems to imply 4&deg; of
+north latitude.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[8] Called likewise Balestriglia, being the Venetian name
+for the cross- staff, or fore-staff, an astronomical instrument which
+has been superseded by the quadrant and sextant.--E</blockquote>
+<p>The island of St Thomas was discovered above eighty[9] years ago,
+by some captains in the royal navy of Portugal, and was altogether
+unknown to the ancients. Its horizon or parallel passes at an equal
+distance between the arctic and antarctic poles, and its days and
+nights are always equal. The arctic polar star is there invisible,
+but the <i>guardiani</i>  are seen in some measure to revolve, and the
+constellation which is known by the name of <i>il crusero</i> , is seen
+in the heavens at a high altitude. To the eastwards[10] of St Thomas,
+and at the distance of 120 miles, the small island called <i>Il
+Principe</i>  is situated. This latter island is inhabited and
+cultivated, the produce of its sugar canes belonging to the revenue
+of the kings eldest son, from which circumstance the island derives
+its name. To the S. S. W. or S. and by W. and in the latitude of
+almost 2&deg; S. is the uninhabited island of Annobon, on which
+numbers of crocodiles and venomous serpents are found. Its rocky
+shores abound in fish, and are much resorted to by the inhabitants of
+St Thomas on that account. When first discovered, the island of St
+Thomas was an entire forest, containing a variety of trees, which,
+though barren, were extremely verdant. These trees were all
+remarkably tall and straight, their branches all drawn close to the
+stems, and not spreading out as with us. After clearing away a great
+part of the forest, the inhabitants built a principal town
+called <i>Pouoasan</i> , which has an excellent harbour. The principal
+dependence of the settlers in this island is upon their sugars, which
+they exchange yearly with the merchants who trade thither, for flour
+in barrels, wines, oil, cheese, leather, swords, glass beads,
+drinking-cups, pater-nosters, and <i>buzios</i> , which are a small
+kind of shells, called by the Italians <i>white porcelain</i> , and
+which pass in Ethiopia as money. The Europeans who reside on this
+island depend much for provisions on the ships, as they cannot
+subsist on the fare used by the Negroes. The slaves employed in their
+sugar plantations are procured from Guinea, Benin, and Congo; and
+some rich planters have from 150 to 300 Negroes. These work five days
+in every week for their masters, and are allowed the Saturdays to
+themselves, when they cultivate various articles of provision, as
+the <i>miglio zaburo</i> , a species of bean formerly mentioned, a root
+called <i>igname</i> , and many species of culinary vegetables, the
+seeds of which must be imported from Europe, as they do not come to
+perfection in this climate.</p>
+<blockquote>[9] In an after part of this narrative, the pilot informs
+us, that his first voyage to the island of San Thome was in 1520, and
+that he made five voyages to that place. If, therefore, the date of
+his present voyage were fixed to 1530, it would carry us back to
+1450, or even earlier, for the date of this discovery, near thirteen
+years before the death of Don Henry.--Clark.<br>
+In Mr Clarkes note on this passage, he erroneously calculates on the
+above data that the discovery might have been in 1460, which is only
+seventy years back from 1530. But the result of the data in the text
+shews, that either the pilot was mistaken as to the real date of the
+discovery, or that his narrative has been corrupted, so that no
+reliance can be placed on his dates.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[10] The direction of <i>Il Principe</i> , or Princes
+Island, from St Thomas, is N. N. E. and the distance does not exceed
+seventy miles.--Clark.</blockquote>
+[Illustration: Chart of North Western Africa]
+<p>The soil of St Thomas consists of a red and yellow marl, or clay,
+of great fertility, which is kept soft and mellow by the heavy dews
+which fall nightly, contributing greatly to vegetation, and
+preventing it from being dried up by the great heats; and so great is
+the luxuriant fertility of the soil, that trees immediately spring up
+on any spots left uncultivated, and will grow as high in a few days
+as would require as many months with us. These sprouts are cut down
+and burnt by the slaves, and their ashes are used as manure for the
+sugarcanes. If planted in January, the canes are ready to be cut in
+June, and those which are planted in February become ripe in July;
+and in this manner they keep up a succession throughout the whole
+year. In March and September, when the sun is vertical, the great
+rains set in, accompanied with cloudy and thick weather, which is of
+great service to the sugar plantations. This island produces yearly
+above 150,000 arobas of sugar, each containing thirty-one of our
+pounds, of which the king receives the tenth part, which usually
+produces from 12,000 to 14,000 arobas, though many of the planters do
+not pay this tythe fully. There are about sixty <i>ingenios</i>  driven
+by water, for bruising the canes and pressing out the juice, which is
+boiled in vast chaldrons, after which it is poured into pans in the
+shape of sugar-loaves, holding from fifteen to twenty pounds each, in
+which it is purified by means of ashes. In some parts of the island,
+where they have not streams of water, the canes are crushed by
+machines worked by the Negroes, and in others by horses. The bruised
+canes are given to the hogs, which hardly get any other food, yet
+fatten wonderfully, and their flesh is so delicate and wholesome as
+to be preferred to that of poultry. Many sugar refiners have been
+brought here from Madeira, on purpose to endeavour to manufacture the
+sugars of St Thomas more white and harder than its usual produce, but
+in vain. This is alleged to proceed from the extreme richness of the
+soil injuring the quality of the sugar; just as with us, wines
+produced in soils of too great fertility are apt to have a peculiar
+flavour. Another cause of this is supposed to proceed from the
+climate of the island being too hot and too moist, except in the
+month of June, July, and August, at which season a fresh dry wind
+blows from Ethiopia to this island; and they then make their best
+sugars.</p>
+<p>The planters are obliged, to ship off their sugars as soon as they
+can procure shipping, because they would become liquid if attempted
+to be kept for a length of time. At present, not above two-thirds of
+the island are appropriated to the cultivation of sugar; but any
+person who comes to this island for the purpose of settling, whether
+from Spain or Portugal, or any other country, may procure from the
+royal intendant as much land as he is able to cultivate, and at a
+moderate price. The esculent root which is known in the Spanish
+islands by the name of <i>batata</i> , is here named ingame by the
+Negroes, and is their principal food, either boiled or roasted under
+the ashes. There are different kinds of this root produced on the
+island, but that which is known by the name of <i>igname cicorero</i> 
+is preferred by the merchant vessels, all of which purchase
+considerable quantities as a sea-stock for their homeward voyage, and
+the Negroes cultivate them largely for the express purpose of
+supplying the ships[11]. This island is distinguished by a high
+mountain in the middle, thickly covered by tall, straight, and
+verdant trees, and its summit is continually enveloped in clouds,
+whence water is diffused in numerous streams all over the island. A
+large shallow stream flows through the city of Pouoasan, supplying it
+with abundance of excellent water, which the inhabitants reckon of a
+medicinal quality, and allege that St Thomas would not be habitable
+if it were not for this river and its other numerous springs and
+rivulets. The native trees are chiefly barren, and though some
+olives, peaches, and almonds, were planted by the early settlers,
+which soon grew with great luxuriance, they never bore any fruit, and
+this has been the case with all stone fruits that have been tried.
+But the cocoa-nut palm, brought hither from Ethiopia, has thriven
+satisfactorily. Repeated attempts have been made to cultivate wheat,
+but always unsuccessfully, though tried at different seasons of the
+year; as the ear would never fill, but always ran up to straw and
+chaff only.</p>
+<blockquote>[11] These <i>batatas</i>  are probably a different species
+from our potatoes, and may be what are called sweet potatoes in the
+West Indies; perhaps the <i>igname cicorero</i>  is the West
+Indian <i>yam</i> . Four species of  <i>igname</i>  or <i>batata</i> , are
+mentioned in Barbot as originally from Benin, Anwerre, Mani-Congo,
+and Saffrance. The first of these is remarkably sweet, and the second
+keeps well. A variety of esculent roots might prove of high utility
+to navigators, and are too much neglected. Among these, the parsnip
+and Jerusalem artichoke deserve notice, as being very nutritive, and
+proof against all weathers.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>In March and September, the sky is always overcast with clouds and
+mists, and continual rains prevail, which season is considered by the
+inhabitants as their winter. In May, June, July, and August, which
+they call <i>Mesi di Vento</i> , or windy months, the prevalent winds
+are from the south, southeast, and southwest; but the island is
+sheltered by the continent from the north, northeast, and northwest
+winds; The summer months are December, January, and February, when
+the heat is excessive, and the atmosphere being continually loaded
+with vapour, occasions the air to feel like the steam of boiling
+water. The shores of this island abound in many kinds of fish, and,
+during the months of June and July, the inhabitants catch a kind
+which they name <i>le chieppe</i> , which are singularly delicate. In
+the seas between this island and the coast of Africa, there are
+prodigious multitudes of whales, both of the large and small
+kinds.--Should you, Sir, be unsatisfied with my ill-written and
+confused information, I beg of you to consider that I am merely a
+seaman, unpracticed in literary composition.</p>
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+<p> <i>Continuation of Portuguese Discoveries, from Cape St Catherine
+to the kingdom of Congo</i> .</p>
+<p>We are still obliged to continue the account of the Portuguese
+discoveries historically, from the want of any regular journals of
+their early voyages along the African coast. In the original efforts
+of the illustrious Don Henry, although the progress was extremely
+slow, we have much to admire in the character of that prince, who
+possessed genius to stretch beyond the trammels of custom and
+authority, boldly thinking for himself, pointing out the way of
+extending the knowledge of our globe by maritime discoveries, and
+persevering nobly in his renewed efforts, in spite of the timid
+ignorance of his unexperienced pilots and mariners. But it is not
+easy to explain the continuance of that slow progress, which was even
+retarded during the years which elapsed between the demise of that
+prince of mariners in 1463, and that of Alphonso in 1481; when the
+increased experience of the Portuguese, in their frequent voyages to
+the new discovered Atlantic islands and African coast, ought to have
+inspired them with fresh vigour and extended views of discovery and
+commerce. The military character of Alphonso may, however, explain
+this in a great degree, as all his energies were directed towards the
+extension of dominion in the Moorish kingdom of Fez; and the business
+of discovery was devolved as a burdensome and unprofitable task on
+the farmers of the trade to the coast of Africa, which appears to
+have become extensive and lucrative, after the discovery of Guinea
+and its islands, and the establishment of the sugar colonies in these
+islands. We learn, likewise, from the preceding voyage of the
+Portuguese pilot to the island of St Thomas, that the mariners still
+confined themselves almost entirely to creeping along the coast, from
+cape to cape, and from island to island, not daring to trust
+themselves to the trackless ocean, under the now sure guidance of the
+heavenly luminaries; but which they then did not sufficiently
+understand, nor did they possess sufficient instruments for directing
+their course in the ocean. It would appear that they had then no
+other method of computing the longitude but by means of the log, or
+dead reckoning, which is liable to perpetual uncertainty from
+currents and lee-way, and which a storm, even of short continuance,
+must have thrown into total confusion. Their instruments and methods
+for determining even the latitudes, appear to have then been
+imperfect and little understood. In the sequel of this deduction, we
+shall find the first Portuguese squadron which sailed for India,
+conducted across the Indian ocean by a Moorish pilot.</p>
+<p>On the accession of John II. to the throne of Portugal in 1481,
+the discoveries along the coast of Africa were resumed with a new
+spirit. While infante or hereditary prince, his principal revenue was
+derived from the profits of the Guinea trade, and of the importation
+of gold from the haven of Mina; and among the first measures of his
+reign, he turned his attention to the improvement and extension of
+that valuable branch of commerce. For this purpose, he gave orders to
+make all necessary preparations for building a fortress and church at
+the port of Mina. All the requisite materials, even to stones and
+tiles, were accordingly shipped from Lisbon in a squadron of ten
+caravels and two transports, with 500 soldiers and 200 labourers or
+workmen of various kinds. This expedition was placed under the
+command of Don Diego d'Azumbuja, an experienced officer, under whom
+were the following naval captains, Gon&ccedil;alez da Fonseca, Ruy
+d'Oliveira, Juan Rodrigues Gante, Juan Alfonso, Diego Rodrigues
+Inglez, Bartholomew Diaz, Pedro d'Evora, and Gomez Aires. This last
+was a gentleman belonging to the household of Pedro king of Arragon,
+all the others being noblemen of the household of King John. Pedro de
+Cintra and Fernam d'Alfonso commanded the transports, and a small
+vessel attended the squadron as an advice-boat. This squadron sailed
+on the 11th December 1481, and reached their destination on the 19th
+January 1482, at an African village named <i>Aldea</i> , where they
+found Juan Bernardo, who had previously sailed for the coast in quest
+of gold.</p>
+<p>Bernardo was immediately sent by Azumbuja, to inform
+Camaran&ccedil;a, the Negro chief of the district, with the arrival
+of the Portuguese armament, and to desire a conference, with
+directions to endeavour to impress that chief with a high sense of
+the rank and character of the Portuguese officers, and of the
+irresistible power of the armament now upon his coast. Early next
+morning, Azambuja landed with all his followers, who were secretly
+armed, in case of meeting with any hostilities from the natives; and
+moved forwards in great form to a large tree, not far from the Negro
+village of Aldea, on a spot which had been chosen as a convenient
+situation for the intended fortress. A flag, bearing the royal arms
+of Portugal, was immediately displayed upon the tree, and an altar
+was placed under the shade of its boughs, at which the whole company
+united in assisting at the first mass that was celebrated in Guinea,
+offering up their solemn prayers to God for the speedy conversion of
+the idolatrous natives, and for the perpetual continuance and
+prosperity of the church which was to be erected on this spot. The
+day on which this impressive ceremony was performed being dedicated
+to St Sebastian, that name was given to the valley on which the tree
+stood, under which they were now assembled.</p>
+<p>Soon after the completion of this religious ceremony,
+Camaran&ccedil;a approached with a numerous train. Azambuja,
+sumptuously dressed, and ornamented by a rich golden collar, prepared
+to receive the Negro chief, seated on an elevated chair, having all
+his retinue arranged before him, so as to form an avenue. The Negroes
+were armed with spears, shields, bows, and arrows, and wore a kind of
+helmets made of skins, thickly studded with fish teeth, giving them a
+very martial appearance. The subordinate chiefs were distinguished by
+chains of gold hanging from their necks, and had various golden
+ornaments on their heads, and even on their beards. After the
+exchange of presents, and other tokens of mutual respect and
+confidence, Azambuja made a speech to Camaran&ccedil;a, through the
+mediation of an interpreter, in which he explained the purpose of his
+embassy and expedition, and used every argument he could think of, to
+conciliate the friendship of the Negro chief, to make him fully
+sensible of the power of the king of Portugal, and to reconcile him
+to the intended permanent establishment upon the toast.
+Camaran&ccedil;a listened to the harangue, and the explanation of it
+by the interpreter, in respectful silence, keeping his eyes steadily
+fixed on the countenance of Azambuja. After which, casting his eyes
+for some time on the ground, as if profoundly meditating on what he
+had heard, he is said to have made the following guarded and
+judicious answer:</p>
+<p>"I am fully sensible of the high honour done me on this occasion
+by your sovereign. I have always endeavoured to deserve his
+friendship, by dealing strictly with his subjects, and by constantly
+exerting myself to procure immediate ladings for their ships.
+Hitherto the Portuguese, who have visited my country, were meanly
+dressed, and easily satisfied with the commodities we had to give
+them; and so far from desiring to remain in the country, were always
+anxious to complete their cargoes, and to return whence they came.
+This day I observe a wonderful difference. A great number of persons,
+richly dressed, are eager for permission to build themselves houses,
+and to remain among us. But assuredly, persons of such rank, under
+the guidance of a commander who claims his descent from the God who
+created the day and the night, would never be able to endure the
+hardships of our climate, and could not procure in this country those
+luxuries they have been accustomed to in their own. Those passions
+which are common to all men, will certainly produce disputes between
+us; and it were much better that we should continue on the same
+footing as hitherto, allowing your ships to come and go as they have
+always done before; in which case, the desire of seeing each other
+occasionally, and of mutual intercourse in trade, will preserve peace
+between you and us. The sea and the land, which are always
+neighbours, are continually at variance, contending for the mastery;
+the sea always violently endeavouring to subdue the land, which, with
+equal obstinacy, defends itself against the encroachments of the
+sea."</p>
+<p>The prudential jealousy and distrust displayed on this occasion by
+Camaran&ccedil;a, astonished and perplexed the Portuguese commander;
+and it required the exercise of much address on his part, to prevail
+upon the Negro chief to allow the fulfilment of his orders, and to
+prevent the necessity of having recourse to violent measures. When
+the workmen were making preparations next day to lay the foundations
+of the intended fortress on the coast, they observed a large rock,
+which lay very commodious for serving them as a quarry, and
+accordingly proceeded to work it for that purpose. This happened
+unfortunately to be venerated by the Negroes as one of their Gods,
+and they immediately flew to arms in opposition against the
+sacrilegious violation of the sanctified rock, and many of the
+workmen were wounded, before the natives could be pacified by
+numerous presents. At length, after the constant labour of twenty
+days, the fort began to assume a formidable appearance, and received
+the name of <i>Fortaleza de San Jorge da Mina</i> , or Fort St George
+at Mina. In a church constructed within its walls, a solemn mass was
+appointed to be celebrated annually, in honour of Don Henry, Duke of
+Viseo, of illustrious memory. Azambuja continued governor of this
+place during two years and seven months, and was honoured, on his
+return to Portugal, with particular marks of royal favour. In 1486,
+King John bestowed on this new establishment all the privileges end
+immunities of a city.</p>
+<p>Impressed with the great advantages that might be derived to his
+kingdom, through the prosecution of the maritime discoveries in
+Africa, and more especially by opening a passage by sea to India, of
+which his hopes were now sanguine, the king of Portugal, who had now
+added to his titles that of <i>Lord of Guinea</i> , made application to
+the pope, as universal father and lord of Christendom, for a
+perpetual grant of all the countries which the Portuguese had already
+discovered, or should hereafter discover, towards the east, with a
+strict prohibition against the interference of any European State in
+that immense field of discovery, commerce, and colonization. The pope
+conceded this enormous grant, probably without the most distant idea
+of its extent and importance: not only prohibiting all Christian
+powers from intruding within those prodigious, yet indefinite bounds,
+which he had bestowed upon the crown of Portugal, but declaring, that
+all discoveries that were or might be made in contravention, should
+belong to Portugal. Hitherto, the Portuguese navigators, in the
+course of their discoveries along the shores of Western Africa, had
+been in use to erect <i>wooden</i>  crosses, as indications of their
+respective discoveries. But the king now ordered that they should
+erect <i>stone crosses</i> , about six feet high, inscribed with, the
+arms of Portugal, the name of the reigning sovereign, that of the
+navigator, and the date of the discovery.</p>
+<p>In the year 1484, Diego Cam or Cano proceeded beyond Cape St
+Catherine, in lat. 1&deg; 40' S. the last discovery of the reign of
+King Alphonso, and reached the mouth of a considerable river, in lat.
+5&deg; 10' S. called  <i>Zayre</i>  by the natives, now called Congo
+river, or the Rio Padron. Diego proceeded some distance up this
+river, till he met with some of the natives, but was unable to
+procure any satisfactory intelligence from them, as they were not
+understood by the Negro interpreters on board his ship. By means of
+signs, however, he understood that the country was under the dominion
+of a king who resided at a considerable distance from the coast, in a
+town or city called Banza, since named San Salvador by the
+Portuguese; on which he sent a party of his crew, conducted by the
+natives, carrying a considerable present far the king, and meaning to
+wait their return. Unavoidable circumstances, however, having
+protracted the return of his people far beyond the appointed time,
+Diego resolved to return into Portugal with an account of his
+discovery; and, having gained the confidence of the natives, he
+prevailed on four of them to embark with him, that they might be
+instructed in the Portuguese language, to serve as interpreters for
+future intercourse with this newly discovered region, and made the
+natives understand by means of signs, that, after the expiration of
+fifteen moons, these persons should be returned in safety.</p>
+<p>These Africans were men of some consequence in their own country,
+and were of such quick apprehensions, that they acquired a sufficient
+knowledge of the Portuguese language during the voyage back to
+Lisbon, as to be able to give a competent account of their own
+country, and of the kingdoms or regions beyond it, to the southwards.
+The king of Portugal was much gratified by this discovery, and
+treated the Africans brought over by Diego with much munificence.
+Next year, Diego Cam returned to the river of Congo, where he landed
+the four natives, who carried many presents from King John to their
+own sovereign, and were directed to express his anxious desire that
+he and his subjects would embrace the Christian faith.</p>
+<p>Having landed the Negroes, and received back his own men whom he
+had left on his former voyage, Diego proceeded to discover the coast
+to the southwards of the Congo river; leaving a respectful message
+for the king of Congo, that he must postpone the honour of paying his
+respects to him till his return from the south. The farther progress
+of Diego is very indefinitely related by the Portuguese historians;
+who say, that after a run of twenty leagues, he erected two stone
+crosses, as memorials of his progress, one at a cape called St
+Augustine, in lat. 13&deg; S. but the other on Cape Padron, in
+22&deg; S. This last latitude would extend the discovery of Diego
+between the latitude of the Congo river and this high latitude, to
+280 Portuguese leagues, instead of twenty. Besides, Cape Padron forms
+the southern point at the mouth of the river of Congo, and is only in
+lat. 6&deg; 15' S. The high probability is, that the first cross
+erected by Diego Cam in this voyage, was at Cape Palmerinho, in lat.
+9&deg; 15' S. and the other may have been at Rocca Boa, in lat.
+13&deg; 20' S. Clarke[1] is disposed to extend the second cross to
+Cabo Negro, in lat. 16&deg; S. Either influenced by his provisions
+running short, or desirous of forming a friendly, connection with the
+king of Congo, Diego measured back his way to the Congo river, where
+he was received in a most satisfactory manner by the sovereign of
+that country. The reports of his subjects who had been in Portugal,
+and the liberal presents which they had brought to him from King
+John, had made a deep impression on the mind of this African monarch.
+He made many inquiries respecting the Christian religion, and being
+highly gratified by its sublime and consolatory doctrines, perhaps
+influenced by the reports his subjects had brought him of its
+magnificent ceremonies, he appointed one of his principal noblemen,
+named <i>Ca&ccedil;uta</i>  or  <i>Zazut</i> , to accompany Diego Cam, as
+his ambassador to King John; anxiously requesting the king of
+Portugal to allow this nobleman and his attendants to be baptized,
+and that he would be pleased to send some ministers of his holy
+religion to convert him and his subjects from their idolatrous
+errors. Diego Cam arrived safely in Portugal with Ca&ccedil;uta; who
+was soon afterwards baptized by the name of <i>John Silva</i> , the
+king and queen of Portugal doing him the honour of attending on him
+as sponsors at the holy font; and the splendid ceremonial was closed
+by the baptism of his sable attendants.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Prog, of Mar. Disc. I. 329. note r.</blockquote>
+<p>Some time previous to this event, Alphonso de Aviero carried an
+ambassador from the king of Benin to the king of Portugal, requesting
+that some missionaries might be sent for the conversion of his
+subjects; and, although the artful conduct of that African prince
+threw many difficulties in the way of this mission, many of the
+Negroes of that country were converted. From the ambassador of Benin,
+the king of Portugal received information of a powerful monarch,
+named <i>Organe</i> , whose territories lay at the distance of 250
+leagues beyond the kingdom of Benin, and who possessed a supremacy
+over all the adjacent states. Assuming Cape Lopo Gon&ccedil;alves, in
+lat. 1&deg; S. as the southern boundary of the kingdom of Benin, 250
+Portuguese leagues would bring us to the kingdom of Benguela, or that
+of Jaa Caconda, about lat. 14&deg; or 15&deg; S. Yet some persons
+have strangely supposed that this king <i>Organe</i> 
+or <i>Ogan&eacute;</i>  was a corruption of <i>Jan</i>  or <i>Janhoi</i> ,
+the title given by the Christians of the east to the king of
+Abyssinia. "But it is very difficult to account for this knowledge of
+Abyssinia in the kingdom of Benin, not only on account of the
+distance, but likewise because several of the most savage nations in
+the world, the <i>Galla</i>  and <i>Shangalla</i> , occupy the
+intervening space. The court of Abyssinia did indeed then reside in
+ <i>Shoa</i> , the south-east extremity of the kingdom; and, by its
+power and influence, might have pushed its dominion through these
+barbarians to the neighbourhood of Benin on the western ocean. But
+all this I must confess to be a mere conjecture of mine, of which, in
+the country itself, I never found the smallest confirmation[2]." To
+these observations of the celebrated Abyssinian traveller, it may be
+added, that the distance from Benin to Shoa exceeds six hundred
+Portuguese leagues.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Bruce's Abyssinia, II. 105.</blockquote>
+<p>While the king of Portugal continued to encourage his navigators
+to proceed to the southwards in discovering the African coast, he
+became anxious lest some unexpected rival might interpose to deprive
+him of the expected fruits of these discoveries, which had occupied
+the unremitting attentions of his predecessors and himself for so
+many years. Learning that John Tintam and William Fabian, Englishmen,
+were preparing, at the instigation of the Duke of Medina Sidonia, in
+1481, to proceed on a voyage to Guinea, he sent Ruy de Sousa as his
+ambassador, to Edward IV. of England, to explain the title which he
+held from the pope as lord of that country, and to induce him to
+forbid his subjects from navigating to the coast of Africa, in which
+negotiation he was completely successful. He likewise used every
+exertion to conceal the progress of his own navigators on the western
+coast of Africa, and to magnify the dangers of the voyage;
+representing that the coast was quite inhospitable, surrounded by
+most tremendous rocks, and inhabited by savage cannibals, and that no
+vessels could possibly live in those tempestuous seas, in which every
+quarter of the moon produced a furious storm, except those of a
+peculiar construction, which had been invented by the Portuguese
+ship- builders.</p>
+<p>A Portuguese pilot, who had often made the voyage to Guinea, had
+the temerity to assert, that any kind of ship could make this
+redoubted voyage, as safely as the royal caravels, and was sent for
+to court by the king, who gave him a public reprimand for his
+ignorance and presumption. Some months afterwards, the same pilot
+appeared again at court, and told the king, "That being of an
+obstinate disposition, he had attempted the voyage to Guinea in a
+different kind of vessel from those usually employed, and found it to
+be impossible." The king could not repress a smile at this solemn
+nonsense; yet honoured the politic pilot with a private audience, and
+gave him money to encourage him to propagate the deception. About
+this period, likewise, hearing that three Portuguese seamen, who were
+conversant in the navigation of the coast of Africa, had set out for
+Spain, intending to offer their services in that country, John
+immediately ordered them to be pursued as traitors. Two of them were
+killed, and the third was brought a prisoner to Evora, where he was
+broke on the wheel. Hearing that the Portuguese seamen murmured at
+the severity of this punishment, the king exclaimed, "Let every man
+abide by his own element, I love not travelling seamen."</p>
+<p>Encouraged by the successful progress of Diego Cam in 1484 and
+1485, King John became sanguine in his hopes of completing the
+discovery of a maritime route to India, around the continent of
+Africa, and determined upon using every exertion for this purpose.
+His first views were to endeavour to procure some information
+respecting India, by means of a journey overland; and with this
+object, <i>Antonio de Lisboa</i> , a Franciscan friar, together with a
+nameless lay companion, were dispatched to make the attempt of
+penetrating into India, through Palestine and Egypt. But, being
+ignorant of the Arabic language, these men were unable to penetrate
+beyond Jerusalem, whence they returned into Portugal. Though
+disappointed in this attempt, by the ignorance or want of enterprise
+of his agents, his resolution was not to be repressed by
+difficulties, and he resolved upon employing fresh exertions both by
+sea and land, for the accomplishment of his enterprise. He
+accordingly fitted out a small squadron under Bartholomew Diaz, a
+knight of the royal household, to attempt the passage by sea.</p>
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+<p> <i>Discovery of the Cape of Good Hope, by Bartholomew Diaz, in
+1486</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Clarke, I. 342.</blockquote>
+<p>For this important enterprise, Bartholomew Diaz was only supplied
+with two small caravels of fifty ton each, accompanied by a still
+smaller vessel, or tender, to carry provisions. Of these vessels, one
+was commanded by Bartholomew Diaz, as commodore, the second caravel
+by <i>Juan Infante</i> , another cavalier or gentleman of the court,
+and Pedro Diaz, brother to the commander in chief of the expedition,
+had charge of the tender. The preparations being completed,
+Bartholomew sailed in the end of August 1486, steering directly to
+the southwards.</p>
+<p>We have no relation of the particulars of this voyage, and only
+know that the first spot on which Diaz placed a stone pillar, in
+token of discovery and possession, was at <i>Sierra Parda</i> , in
+about 24&deg;40'S. which is said to have been 120 leagues farther to
+the south than any preceding navigator. According to the Portuguese
+historians, Diaz sailed boldly from this place to the southwards, in
+the open sea, and never saw the land again until he was forty leagues
+to the east of the Cape of Good Hope, which he had passed without
+being in sight of land. The learned geographer, Major Rennel, informs
+us, that Sir Home Popham and Captain Thompson, while exploring the
+western coast of Africa in 1786, found a marble cross, on which the
+arms of Portugal were engraved, in latitude 26&deg;37'S. near a bay
+named Angra Pequena: But, as the Portuguese long continued to
+frequent these coasts exclusively, and considered them all as
+belonging to their dominions under the papal grant, this latter
+cross, on which the inscription was not legible, may have been
+erected at a considerably subsequent period. At all events, the track
+of Diaz was far beyond the usual adventure of any former navigator,
+as he must have run a course of from seven to ten degrees of
+latitude, and at least between two or three degrees of longitude, in
+utterly unknown seas, without sight of land. The first land seen by
+Diaz is said to have been forty leagues to the eastward of the cape,
+where he came in sight of a bay on the coast, which he called <i>Angra
+de los Vaqueros</i> , or bay of herdsmen, from observing a number of
+cows grazing on the land. The distance of forty Portuguese leagues,
+would lead us to what is now called Struys bay, immediately east of
+Cabo das Agullias, which latter is in lat. 34&deg; 50' S. and long.
+20&deg; 16' E. from Greenwich. From this place Diaz continued his
+voyage eastwards, to a small island or rock in the bay, which is now
+called Zwartkops or Algoa, in long. 27&deg; E. on which rocky islet
+he placed a stone cross or pillar, as a memorial of his progress, and
+named it, on that account, Santa Cruz, or <i>El Pennol de la Cruz</i> .
+In his progress to this place from the Angra de los Vaqueros, he had
+set some Negroes on shore in different places, who had been brought
+from Portugal for this purpose, and who were well clothed, that they
+might be respected by the natives. These Negroes were likewise
+provided with small assortments of toys for bartering with the
+natives, and were especially charged to make inquiry as to the
+situation and distance of the dominions of Prester John. Of the fate
+of these Negroes we are nowhere informed, but may be well assured
+they would receive no intelligence respecting the subject of their
+inquiry, from the ignorant Hottentots and Caffres of Southern
+Africa.</p>
+<p>It would appear that Diaz was still unconscious that he had
+reached and overpassed the extreme southern point of Africa, although
+now nearly nine degrees to the east of the Cape of Good Hope, and at
+least one degree back towards the north of his most southern range;
+but he may have supposed himself in a deep bite or bay of the coast,
+similar to the well- known gulf of Guinea. Under this impression,
+that he had not accomplished the grand object of his enterprize, he
+was anxious to continue his voyage still farther towards the east:
+But, as the provisions on board his two caravels were nearly
+exhausted, and the victualling tender under the command of his
+brother was missing, the crews of the caravels became exceedingly
+urgent to return, lest they might perish with famine. With some
+difficulty he prevailed on the people to continue their course about
+twenty-five leagues farther on, as he felt exceedingly mortified at
+the idea of returning to his sovereign without accomplishing the
+discovery on which he was sent. They accordingly reached the mouth of
+a river, which was discovered by Juan Infante, and was called from
+him, <i>Rio del Infante</i> , now known by the name of Great-Fish
+River, in about lat. 33&deg;27' N. long. 28&deg;20'E. The coast still
+trended towards the eastwards, with a slight inclination towards the
+north; so that, in an eastern course of about thirteen degrees, they
+had neared the north about six degrees, though still unsatisfied of
+having absolutely cleared the southern point of Africa.</p>
+<p>From this river, the extreme boundary of the present voyage, Diaz
+commenced his return homewards, and discovered, with great joy and
+astonishment, on their passage back, the long sought for and
+tremendous promontory, which had been the grand object of the hopes
+and wishes of Portuguese navigation during <i>seventy-four</i>  years,
+ever since the year 1412, when the illustrious Don Henry first began
+to direct and incite his countrymen to the prosecution of discoveries
+along the western shores of Africa. Either from the distance which
+the caravels had been from the land, when they first altered their
+course to the eastwards, or from the cape having been concealed in
+thick fogs, it had escaped notice in the preceding part of the
+voyage. At this place Diaz erected a stone cross in memory of his
+discovery; and, owing to heavy tempests, which he experienced off the
+high table land of the Cape, he named it <i>Cabo dos Tormentos</i> , or
+Cape of storms; but the satisfaction which King John derived from
+this memorable discovery, on the return of Diaz to Portugal in 1487,
+and the hope which it imparted of having opened a sure passage by sea
+from Europe through the Atlantic into the Indian ocean, by which his
+subjects would now reap the abundant harvest of all their long and
+arduous labours, induced that sovereign to change this inauspicious
+appellation for one of a more happy omen, and he accordingly ordered
+that it should in future be called, <i>Cabo de boa
+Esperan&ccedil;a</i> , or Cape of Good Hope, which it has ever since
+retained.</p>
+<p>Soon after the discovery of the <i>Cape</i> , by which shorter name
+it is now generally preeminently distinguished, Diaz fell in with the
+victualler, from which he had separated nine months before. Of nine
+persons who had composed the crew of that vessel, six had been
+murdered by the natives of the west coast of Africa, and Fernand
+Colazzo, one of the three survivors, died of joy on again beholding
+his countrymen. Of the circumstances of the voyage home we have no
+account; but it is not to be doubted that Diaz and his companions
+would be honourably received by their sovereign, after a voyage of
+such unprecedented length and unusual success.</p>
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+<p> <i>Journey overland to India and Abyssinia, by Covilham and de
+Payva</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Clarke, i. 384. Purchas, II. 1091.</blockquote>
+<p>Soon after the departure of Diaz, King John dispatched Pedro de
+Covilham and Alphonso de Payva, both well versed in the Arabic
+language, with orders to travel by land into the east, for the
+discovery of the country of <i>Presbyter</i> , or <i>Prester John</i> ,
+and to trace the steps of the lucrative commerce then carried on with
+India by the Venetians for spices and drugs; part of their
+instructions being to endeavour to ascertain the practicability of
+navigating round the south extremity of Africa to the famed marts of
+Indian commerce, and to make every possible inquiry into the
+circumstances of that important navigation. Some writers have placed
+this journey as prior in point of time to the voyage of Diaz, and
+have even imagined that the navigator was directed or instructed by
+the report which Covilham transmitted respecting India. Of the
+relation of this voyage by Alvarez, which Purchas published in an
+abbreviated form, from a translation out of the Italian in the
+collection of Ramusio, found among the papers of Hakluyt, Purchas
+gives the following character: "I esteem it true in those things
+which he saith he saw: In some others which he had by relation of
+enlarging travellers, or boasting Abassines, he may perhaps sometimes
+rather <i>mendacia dicere</i> , than <i>mentiri</i> ." To <i>tell</i>  lies
+rather than <i>make</i>  them.</p>
+<p>Covilham, or Covillan, was born in a town of that name in
+Portugal, and went, when a boy, into Castile, where he entered the
+service of Don Alphonso, duke of Seville. On a war breaking out
+between Portugal and Castile, he returned into his native country,
+where he got into the household of King Alphonso, who made him a
+man-at-arms. After the death of that king, he was one of the guard of
+King John, who employed him on a mission into Spain, on account of
+his knowledge in the language. He was afterwards employed in Barbary,
+where he remained some time, and acquired the Arabic language, and
+was employed to negotiate a peace with the king of Tremesen. He was a
+second time sent into Barbary on a mission to King
+ <i>Amoli-bela-gegi</i> , to procure restitution of the bones of the
+infant Don Fernando, in which he was successful.</p>
+<p>After his return, he was joined in commission, as
+before-mentioned, with Alphonso de Payva, and these adventurous
+travellers left Lisbon in May 1487. Covilham was furnished with a
+very curious map for these times, by the Prince Emanuel, afterwards
+king of Portugal, which had been copied and composed, with great care
+and secrecy, by the licentiate Calzadilla, afterwards bishop of
+Viseo, assisted by Doctor Rodrigo, and a Jewish physician named
+Moses; which map asserted the practicability of passing by sea to
+India round the southern extremity of Africa, on some obscure
+information which had been collected by those who constructed it.</p>
+<p>With a supply of 500 crowns in money, and a letter of credit, or
+bills of exchange, Covilham and De Payva went first to Naples, where
+their bills of exchange were paid by the son of <i>Cosmo de
+Medici</i> . From Naples they went by sea to the island of Rhodes, and
+thence to Alexandria in Egypt, whence they travelled as merchants to
+Grande Cairo, and proceeded with the caravan to <i>Tor</i> [2] on the
+Red Sea, near the foot of Mount Sinai. They here received some
+information respecting the trade which then subsisted between Egypt
+and Calicut, and sailed from that place to Aden, a trading city of
+Yemen, on the outside of the Straits of Babelmandeb. The travellers
+here separated; Covilham embarking in one vessel for India, while De
+Payva took his passage in another vessel bound for Suakem on the
+Abyssinian coast of the Red Sea, having engaged to rejoin each other
+at Cairo, after having carried the directions of their sovereign into
+effect.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] El Tor is on the Arabian coast of the Red Sea, near
+the mouth of the Bahr Assuez, or Gulf of Suez, in lat. 28&deg; 10' N.
+long. 33&deg; 36' E.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The Moorish ship from Aden in which Covilham had embarked, landed
+him at Cananor on the coast of Malabar, whence, after some stay, he
+went to Calicut and Goa, being the first of the Portuguese nation who
+had navigated the Indian ocean; having seen pepper and ginger, and
+heard of cloves and cinnamon. From India he went by sea to Sofala on
+the eastern coast of Africa, where he is said to have examined the
+gold mines, and where he procured some information respecting the
+great island of Madagascar, called by the Moors the <i>Island of the
+Moon</i> . With the various and valuable information he had now
+acquired, relative to the productions of India and their marts, and
+of the eastern coast of Africa, he now determined to return to Egypt,
+that he might be able to communicate his intelligence to Portugal. At
+Cairo he was met by messengers from King John, informing him that
+Payva had been murdered, and directing him to go to Ormuz and the
+coast of Persia, in order to increase his stock of commercial
+knowledge. The two messengers from the king of Portugal whom Covilham
+met with at Cairo, were both Jewish rabbis, named Abraham of Beja and
+Joseph of Lamego. The latter returned into Portugal with letters from
+Covilham, giving an account of his observations, and assuring his
+master that the ships which sailed to the coast of Guinea, might be
+certain of finding a termination of the African Continent, by
+persisting in a southerly course; and advising, when they should
+arrive in the <i>eastern ocean</i> , to inquire for Sofala and the
+Island of the Moon.</p>
+<p>Covilham and Rabbi Abraham went from Cairo, probably by sea, to
+Ormuz and the coast of Persia, whence they returned in company to
+Aden. From that place, Abraham returned by the way of Cairo to
+Portugal with the additional information which had been collected in
+their voyage to the Gulf of Persia; though some authors allege that
+Joseph was the companion of this voyage, and that he returned from
+Bassora by way of the desert to Aleppo, and thence to Portugal.</p>
+<p>From Aden, Covilham crossed the straits of Babelmandeb to the
+south- eastern coast of Abyssinia, where he found Alexander the king,
+or negus, at the head of an army, levying tribute or contributions
+from his rebellious subjects of the southern provinces of his
+dominions. Alexander received Covilham with kindness, but more from
+motives of curiosity than for any expectations of advantage that
+might result from any connection or communication with the kingdom of
+Portugal. Covilham accompanied the king to Shoa, where the seat of
+the Abyssinian government was then established; and from a cruel
+policy, which subsists still in Abyssinia, by which strangers are
+hardly ever permitted to quit the country, Covilham never returned
+into Europe. Though thus doomed to perpetual exile in a strange and
+barbarous land, Covilham was well used. He married, and obtained
+ample possessions, enjoying the favour of several successive kings of
+Abyssinia, and was preferred to some considerable offices in the
+government. Frequent epistolary intercourse took place between him
+and the king of Portugal, who spared no expence to keep open the
+interesting correspondence. In his dispatches, Covilham described the
+several ports which he had visited in India; explained the policy and
+disposition of the several princes; and pointed out the situation and
+riches of the gold mines of Sofala; exhorting the king to persist,
+unremittingly and vigorously, in prosecuting the discovery of the
+passage to India around the southern extremity of Africa, which he
+asserted to be attended with little danger, and affirmed that the
+cape was well known in India. He is said to have accompanied his
+letters and descriptions with a chart, in which the cape and all the
+cities on the coast of Africa were exactly represented, which he had
+received in India from a Moor. Covilham was afterwards seen by, and
+intimately acquainted with Francesco Alvarez, his historian, who was
+sent on an embassy into Abyssinia by Emmanuel king of Portugal.
+Alvarez, who appears to have been a priest, calls Covilham his
+spiritual son, and says that he had been thirty-three years in great
+credit with <i>Prette Janni</i> , so he calls the king of Abyssinia,
+and all the court, during all which time he had never confessed his
+sins, except to GOD in secret, because the priests of that country
+were not in use to keep secret what had been committed to them in
+confession. This would protract the residence of Covilham in
+Abyssinia, at least to the year 1521, or 1522; but how long he may
+have lived there afterwards does not appear.</p>
+<h2><a name="chapter2-6" id="chapter2-6">CHAPTER VI.</a></h2>
+<p align="center"><b> <i>History of the discovery and conquest of
+India by the Portuguese, between the years 1497 and 1525: from the
+original Portuguese of Herman Lopes de Castaneda.</i> </b></p>
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+<p>Although, in strict conformity to chronological arrangement, the
+discovery of America by COLUMBUS in 1492, ought to precede our
+account of the discovery of the maritime route from Europe to India
+by the Portuguese, which did not take place until the year 1498; it
+yet appears more regular to follow out the series of Portuguese
+navigation and discovery to its full completion, than to break down
+that original and vast enterprise into fragments. We might indeed
+have stopt with the first voyage of De Gama, which effected the
+discovery of India: But as the contents of this Chapter consists of
+what may be considered an authentic original record, and carries on
+the operations of the Portuguese in India to the year 1525, it seemed
+preferable to retain this curious original history entire. It is
+obvious that Castaneda must have used the original journals of De
+Gama, and other early Portuguese commanders, or of some persons
+engaged in the voyages and transactions; as he often forgets the
+historical language, and uses the familiar diction of a person
+actually engaged, as will appear in many passages of this
+Chapter.</p>
+<p>The title of this original document, now first offered to the
+public in modern English, is " <i>The first Booke of the Historie of
+the Discoverie and Conquest of the East Indias by the Portingals, in
+the time of King Don John, the second of that name. By Hernan Lopes
+de Castaneda; translated into English by Nicholas Lichefield, and
+dedicated to Sir Fraunces Drake. Imprinted at London by Thomas East,
+1582</i> ."</p>
+<p>Though the transactions here recorded are limited in the title to
+the reign of John II. they occupied the reigns of his immediate
+successor Emmanuel, or Manuel, and of John III. Castanedas history
+was printed in black letter at Coimbra, in eight volumes folio, in
+the years 1552, 1553, and 1554, and is now exceedingly scarce. In
+1553, a translation of the first book was made into French by Nicolas
+de Grouchy, and published at Paris in quarto. An Italian translation
+was published at Venice in two volumes quarto, by Alfonso Uloa, in
+1578[1]. That into English by Lichefield, employed on the present
+occasion, is in small quarto and black-letter. The voyage of De Gama
+is related by De Barros in his work, entitled Da Asia, and has been
+described by Osorius, Ramusio, Maffei, and de Faria. Purchas gives a
+brief account of it, I. ii. 26. The beautiful poem of the Lusiad by
+Camoens, the Portuguese Homer, is dedicated to the celebration of
+this important transaction, and is well known through an elegant
+translation into English by Mickle. In the present chapter, the
+curious and rare work of Castaneda, so far as his first book extends,
+is given entire; and the only freedom employed in this version,
+besides changing the English of 229 years ago into the modern and
+more intelligible language, has Been to prune a quaint verbosity,
+mistaken by Lichefield for rhetorical eloquence. The dedication of
+the early translator to the celebrated Sir Francis Drake, is
+preserved in its original dress, as a sufficient specimen of the
+language of England at the close of the sixteenth century.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Bibl. des Voyages, V. 2.</blockquote>
+<p>DEDICATION.</p>
+<p> <i>To the right Worshipfull<br>
+Sir Fraunces Drake, Knight,<br>
+N, L, G, wisheth all prosperitie.</i> </p>
+<p>They have an auncient custom in Persia (the which is also observed
+throughout all Asia) that none will enterprise to visit the king,
+noble man, or perticularly any other person of countenance, but he
+carieth with him some thing to present him with all worthy of thanks,
+the which is not onely done in token of great humilitie and
+obedience, but also of a zealous loue and friendly affection to their
+superiours and welwillers. So I (right worshipfull following this
+Persian president) hauing taking vpon me this simple translation out
+of the Portingale tongue, into our English language, am bold to
+present and dedicate the same vnto you as a signification of my
+entire good will. The history conteineth the discouerie and conquest
+of the East Indias, made by sundry worthy captaines of the
+Portengales, in the time of King Don Manuel, and of the King Don
+John, the second of that name, with the description, not onely of the
+country, but also of every harbour apperteining to every place
+whervnto they came, and of the great resistance they found in the
+same, by reson wherof there was sundry great battles many times
+fought, and likewise of the commodities and riches that euery of
+these places doth yeeld. And for that I know your worship, with great
+peril and daunger haue past these monstrous and bottomlesse sees, am
+therfore the more encouraged to desire and pray your worships
+patronage and defence therof, requesting you with all to pardon those
+imperfections, which I acknowledge to be very many, and so much the
+more, by reason of my long and many years continuance in foreine
+countries. Howbeit, I hope to have truly observed the literal sence
+and full effect of the history, as the author setteth it forth, which
+if it may please you to peruse and accept in good part, I shall be
+greatly emboldened to proceede and publish also the second and third
+booke, which I am assured will neither be vnpleasant nor vnprofitable
+to the readers. Thus alwaies wishing your good worship such
+prosperous continuance and like fortunate successe as GOD hath
+hitherto sent you in your dangerous trauaile and affayres, and as
+maye euery waye content your owne heartes desire, doe euen so take my
+leaue. From London the fifth of March. 1582.</p>
+<p>Your worships alwayes to commaund,<br>
+ <i>Nicholas Lichefild.</i> </p>
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>DEDICATION BY CASTANEDA.</p>
+<p> <i>To<br>
+The most high and mighty Prince,<br>
+John III.</i> <br></p>
+<p> <i>King of Portugal and Algarve,<br>
+&amp;c.</i> </p>
+<p>It hath seemed to me, most high and mighty prince, our dread king
+and sovereign, so important and weighty a matter to undertake a
+history of the great and valiant actions which our Portuguese have
+performed in the discovery and conquest of India, that I often
+thought to relinquish the attempt. But as these noble deeds were
+principally undertaken and performed for the glory of Almighty God,
+the conversion of the barbarous nations to the Christian faith, and
+the great honour of your highness; and as, by the power and mercy of
+the Omnipotent, such fortunate success has been granted to these
+famous enterprises, I have been encouraged to proceed. I therefore
+trust entirely to the aid and comfort of the divine goodness in
+publishing this work, giving the glory thereof to God alone, and its
+earthly praise to your excellent highness, and the king Don Manuel
+your father, of famous and happy memory.</p>
+<p>Although these glorious deeds are well known and spread abroad
+over the world, they yet cannot be sufficiently made manifest unless
+set forth in writing, by means of which their memory may endure for
+ever, and remain always as if present to the readers; as history hath
+perpetuated the actions of the Greeks and Romans which are of such
+high antiquity. Of other transactions, nothing inferior to theirs,
+perhaps even far greater, which have been performed by other nations,
+there is little or no memory, because these do not remain recorded by
+history: Such are those of the Assyrians, Medes and Persians; of the
+Africans against the Romans; of the Suevi against Julius Caesar; of
+the Spaniards in recovering their country from the Moors; and
+principally of these invincible and pious kings of Portugal, your
+glorious ancestors, Don Alonso Henriques, Don Sancho his son, and Don
+Alonso, who acquired the kingdoms of Portugal and Algarve by great
+and wonderful deeds of arms. Of all which, there hardly remaineth any
+memory, for want of having been duly recorded by writing. So likewise
+of those actions which have been performed in India, only as it were
+of yesterday, the exact memory of them is confined to four persons;
+and if they were to die, all remembrance of these transactions must
+have ended to their great dishonour. Considering these things, I
+resolved to record these noble deeds which the subjects of your
+highness have performed in the discovery and conquest of India, which
+have never been surpassed in valour, or even equalled, in any age or
+country. Leaving all mention of the conquests of Cyrus and other
+barbarians, and even taking into the account the deeds of Alexander,
+so famous over all the world, which are as nothing compared to what
+has been performed since India became frequented by the Portuguese,
+no more than a dead lion can be likened to one alive. The conquests
+of Alexander were all by land, and achieved by himself in person,
+against nations who were little trained or accustomed to feats of
+arms. But the Portuguese conquest of India was performed by the
+captains of your highness, after a voyage by sea of a year and eight
+months, going almost around the globe, from the utmost limits of the
+west through the vast and bottomless ocean, seeing only the heaven
+and the water; a thing never before attempted by man, and hardly even
+imagined. After surmounting hunger and thirst, and daily exposure to
+furious storms, and a thousand dangers in the voyage; they had to
+encounter great and cruel battles on their arrival in India; not
+against men armed only with bows and spears, as in the time of
+Alexander, but with people of stout and tried courage and experienced
+in war, having ordinance and fire-workers more numerous even than the
+Portuguese, besides many other excellent weapons. The power of these
+men, against whom the subjects of your highness had to contend, was
+infinitely greater than that of King Porus, against whom Alexander
+had to encounter; yet the Portuguese, though few in number, uniformly
+had the victory, and never retired from the war as was done by
+Alexander.</p>
+<p>Leaving the actions of the Greeks, and considering what was
+performed by the Romans with their innumerable armies and vast
+fleets, which seemed to cover the face of the sea, and by means of
+which they thought to have conquered the whole earth. Yet they never
+adventured beyond the Red Sea; neither was the greatest of their
+famous victories comparable to those battles which have been fought
+by our men in India; in which, most invincible prince, the great
+prosperity of your father and you is well known. As, without moving
+from your palace, discoveries and conquests have been achieved by
+your captains, more extensive than ever were discovered or conquered
+by any prince in person. There never was any conquest, either by the
+Barbarians, Greeks, or Romans, of any thing like equal difficulty
+with this of India; neither any kings or captains of any of these
+nations equal in valour and conduct to those of your father and
+yourself, as will manifestly appear from the whole tenor of the
+following history.</p>
+<p>The great actions which the subjects of your highness have
+worthily accomplished, must be deemed to have been permitted and
+appointed by the providence of God; that so those barbarians, with
+their vain idols, and the false sectaries of Mahomet, might be
+brought into the catholic faith, as at this time great numbers have
+been added to the Christian religion. For, since these great
+exploits, your highness, as a most godly and Christian prince, hath
+taken especial care, and hath given command that the Christian
+doctrine of the <i>brotherhood of the company of Jesus</i>  should be
+taught in India, which you ordered to be brought from Rome, and have
+always supported at your expence. Thus likewise, you have erected,
+and founded the noble and sumptuous university of Coimbra, to augment
+the honour and reputation of your kingdom; where, besides many
+divines and colleges of poor begging friars to expound the
+evangelical law, there are temporal men also to instruct those of
+your subjects that defend and enlarge the commonwealth by deeds of
+arms, and those who adorn the same by means of learning.</p>
+<p>All these heroic virtues of your highness being well known to me,
+have encouraged me to publish this work and others, which have some
+taste of learning, that they may remain a perpetual memorial of the
+noble deeds of so many gentlemen and knights of Portugal, your
+subjects. In this I have been much forwarded by having been in India,
+where I sojourned with my father, who was sent into that country by
+your highness as a judge. I spent all my youth in the pursuit of
+learning, and in the study of ancient historians. Being in India, I
+set myself with all diligence to learn and understand all that had
+been done in regard to the discovery and conquest of that country by
+the Portuguese, with the intention of making the same known and
+common to all men. By my inquiries, and through the information
+derived from sundry gentlemen and captains, both such as were
+actually present in the various transactions, and employed in their
+execution, as by others who were engaged in counselling and preparing
+the means of their being performed, I have derived much authentic
+information; as, likewise, by the perusal of many letters and
+memorials, which were written by men of credit and reputation, all of
+which I have examined as evidences of the authenticity of my work,
+both while in India and since my return into Portugal. As the matters
+I meant to write of were many, so it became necessary for me to
+acquire information from many sources; and as those whom I examined
+were upon oath, it is lawful for me to bring them forward as sure
+evidence. In these researches some of these men had to be sought
+after in almost every part of Portugal; and being separated in sundry
+places, my inquiries have occasioned great travel of my person, and
+much expence; to which I have devoted the greater part of my life,
+and have constituted the preparation for this work my sole
+recreation. Since my residence in the university of Coimbra, in the
+service of your highness, I have joined together all these
+informations; which, together with the duties of my office, have
+caused much toil both of body and mind. Having now accomplished the
+composition of this book and others, I most humbly offer the same to
+your highness; and, after many and most fortunate years of governing,
+I pray God to take you from the transitory seignory of this earth,
+and to receive you into the perpetual joys of Heaven.</p>
+<p> <i>Hernan Lopes de Castaneda.</i> </p>
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+<p> <i>Previous steps taken by the King of Portugal, John II.
+preparatory to the Discovery of India.</i> </p>
+<p>Don John, the second of that name, and thirteenth king of
+Portugal, considering that all spices, drugs, precious stones, and
+other riches which came from Venice, were brought out of the east,
+and being a prince of great penetration, and high emprize, he was
+greatly desirous to enlarge his kingdom, and to propagate the
+knowledge of the Christian faith to distant regions. He resolved,
+therefore, to discover the way by sea to the country whence such
+prodigious riches were brought, that his subjects might thereby be
+enriched, and that his kingdom might acquire those commodities which
+had hitherto been brought by way of Venice. He was much encouraged to
+this enterprise, by learning that there were Christians in India,
+governed by a powerful monarch called Presbyter John, who was
+reported to be a Christian prince, and to whom he thought proper to
+send ambassadors, that an intercourse of friendship might be
+established between them and their subjects. He consulted, therefore,
+with the cosmographers of the time, whom he directed to proceed
+according to the example already given in sailing along the coast of
+Guinea, which had been formerly discovered by command of the prince
+his uncle, Master of the order of Christ. Accordingly, Bartholomew
+Diaz, one of the officers of the royal storehouse at Lisbon, was sent
+upon this expedition, who discovered that great and monstrous cape,
+now called of Good Hope, which was unknown to our ancestors. Finding
+it both terrible and dangerous, he yet passed 140 leagues beyond, to
+a river which he named  <i>Rio del Infante</i> , whence he returned
+into Portugal. In this voyage, Diaz gave those names which they still
+retain, to the ports, harbours, and rivers where he took in fresh
+water, and erected certain marks, with crosses, and the royal arms of
+Portugal, the last of which was placed on a rock named <i>El pennol de
+la Cruz</i> , fifteen leagues on this side of the before mentioned
+river. Diaz returned from this voyage without having procured any
+intelligence concerning India, as all the inhabitants of the coast
+which he visited and discovered were ignorant black savages.</p>
+<p>On the return of Diaz, king John resolved to attempt the discovery
+of India by land; for which purpose he had formerly sent friar
+Antonio de Lisboa by land, in company with a lay person; but as they
+were ignorant of the Arabic language, they could not travel into
+those parts, and went no farther than Jerusalem, whence they returned
+into Portugal, without having acquired any knowledge of the object of
+their journey. Yet the king continued to prosecute this discovery of
+India by land, for which he employed two of his own servants, Pedro
+de Covillian and Alonso de Payva, both versant in the Arabic
+language, who were instructed to search out the dominions of
+Presbyter John, and the country whence the spices and drugs were
+brought to Venice, and to inquire whether there were any navigation
+from the southern extremity of Africa to India. To these men he gave
+a chart, which was extracted from a map of the world, by Calsadilla,
+bishop of Viseo, an eminent astronomer. He gave them likewise a
+general letter of credit and safe conduct, requiring them to be
+assisted and protected, and supplied with money, in whatever kingdoms
+or countries they might travel; ordering them to receive 400 crowns
+from the chest of the orchard of Almeryn, for their charges. Of this
+sum, they took what they deemed necessary to bear their expences till
+their arrival at Valentia in Arragon, placing the rest in the bank of
+Bartholomew of Florence, to be repaid at Valentia.</p>
+<p>Receiving their audience of leave from King John, in presence of
+Don Manuel, duke of Viseo, afterwards king, they departed from
+Santaxen on the 7th May 1487, and came to Naples on St Johns day of
+that year; whence they were forwarded by the sons of Cosmo de Medici,
+and went to Rhodes, and thence to Alexandria. From this place they
+travelled as merchants to Cairo, whence they went in company with
+certain Moors of Fez and Tremesen to Toro, a harbour on the Arabian
+coast of the Red Sea. They here learned many things respecting the
+Indies, and of the trade from the Red Sea to Calicut; and, going from
+Toro to a place on the coast of Ethiopia, they went to the port of
+Aden. The travellers here separated, Alonso de Payva passing over to
+the emperor of Ethiopia, erroneously called Presbyter John: For he,
+of whom Marco Polo speaks, under that title, as governing all the
+Indies, and whose country joins with the great khan of Kathay, was
+vanquished and slain in a battle by that sovereign; at which time his
+kingdom was put an end to, and no one of that race or title has since
+reigned. Yet Alonso de Payva actually believed that the emperor of
+Ethiopia was Presbyter John, having learnt that he was a Christian
+king over a Christian nation, as shall be more particularly declared
+hereafter. At their separation they agreed to meet again at Cairo,
+when each had executed his part of the royal orders.</p>
+<p>Pedro de Covillian sailed from Aden for the Indies, in a ship
+belonging to the Moors of Cananor, and went to Calicut and the island
+of Goa, where he acquired complete information respecting the spices
+of India, the commodities which come from other places, and the towns
+of the Indies; the names of all which he inserted, but ill written,
+in his chart. From India he went to Sofala, where he procured
+information respecting the great island of St Lawrence, called the
+Island of the Moon by the Moors. Observing that the natives of Sofala
+were black, like those of Guinea, he concluded, that all the coast
+between was under subjection to the Negroes, and consequently that
+navigation was practicable from Guinea to Sofala, and thence to the
+Indies. Returning from Sofala, he went to Ormus, and thence to Cairo,
+where he learnt that Alonso de Payva was dead, and meant to have
+returned to Portugal. He chanced to meet at Cairo two Spanish jews,
+Rabbi Abraham, a native of Viseo, and Joseph, born in Lamego; who,
+after the departure of Covillian and Payva from Portugal, had told
+the king that they had been in Cairo, where they had received much
+information concerning Ormus, and of its trade with the Indies. From
+these Jews Covillian received letters from the king, directed to him
+and Payva, ordering them to return along with the Jews, if they had
+seen all that he had given them in charge. If they had not executed
+all his original instructions, they were now directed to send by the
+Jews an exact account of all the knowledge they had acquired, and to
+use their utmost efforts to visit Presbyter John, and to give all the
+information in their power respecting Ormus, to Rabbi Abraham, who
+had sworn by his law not to return to Portugal without visiting that
+place.</p>
+<p>On receiving these letters, Covillian changed his intention of
+returning into Portugal, and dispatched Joseph there with letters to
+the king, giving an account of all that he had seen and learnt in
+India and Sofala, and transmitted the chart on which he had inserted
+all the places he had visited. In these letters he informed the king
+that the emperor of Ethiopia was assuredly the same with Presbyter
+John; but my opinion is that this is an error, as this sovereign has
+no such name in his own dominions, as I shall more clearly shew
+hereafter. On the departure of Joseph, Covillian and Rabbi Abraham
+went to Ormus, and thence back to the Red Sea; whence Covillian sent
+Abraham into Portugal, with letters to the king, containing all the
+information acquired in this part of the expedition, and intimating
+his determination to go into the dominions of Presbyter John. This he
+accordingly did, and came to the presence of the then emperor of
+Ethiopia, named Alexander, to whom he delivered the letters with
+which he had been entrusted by the king of Portugal for that monarch.
+Alexander received him courteously, and seemed much pleased with the
+letters of the king of Portugal, as being from so very distant a
+Christian prince, yet did not seem to attach much credit or
+importance to them. But he gave all honour, and many gifts to
+Covillian.</p>
+<p>When Covillian was ready to depart from Ethiopia, and awaited
+leave for that purpose, which he had solicited, Alexander died, and
+was succeeded by a new emperor named <i>Nahu</i> , who could never be
+prevailed on to allow of his departure; neither could he procure
+leave for that purpose from the next emperor, David, the son of Nahu,
+so that Covillian had to remain in Ethiopia, and never returned into
+Portugal. From that time King John never heard more of him, and
+therefore concluded that he was dead; nothing having ever been
+received from him respecting his travels, except what was contained
+in the letters carried by the Jews, as before mentioned.</p>
+<p>There came afterwards to Lisbon, a friar from this country of
+Presbyter John, who was received courteously by the king, and on
+whose reports of great things concerning that country, the king
+determined to proceed in making a discovery of the way to the Indies
+by sea. He accordingly gave orders to John de Bragan&ccedil;a, his
+surveyor of the forests, to cut down timber for building two small
+ships for that voyage. But King John died, and was succeeded by King
+Manuel, of glorious memory, who had been chosen by Divine Providence
+to accomplish the discovery of these countries, by which the
+Christian faith hath been greatly extended, the royal house of
+Portugal much honoured, and the subjects wonderfully enriched.</p>
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+<p> <i>Narrative of the first Voyage of Vasco de Gama to India and
+back, in the years 1497, 1498, and 1499</i> .</p>
+<p>On the death of King John, he was succeeded by Don Manuel, a
+prince of a great mind, bent upon high enterprise, and prone to
+undertake and execute things beyond the ordinary reach of human
+knowledge, even more than was Alexander the Great. Being exceedingly
+desirous to prosecute the discovery of the Indies, which had been
+begun by his predecessor, and proceeding upon the information left
+him by King John, relative to that navigation, he commanded Fernan
+Lorenzo, treasurer of the house of Mina, to cause construct two ships
+for this voyage, from the timber which had been provided by King
+John. These were named the Angel Gabriel and the San Raphael, the
+former being of the burden of 120 tons, the latter 100. In addition
+to these, a caravel of 50 tons, called the Berrio, and a ship of 200
+tons were purchased. In the year 1497, the king appointed Vasco de la
+Gama, as chief captain for the voyage, an experienced navigator, who
+had done great service, and a man of great valour, well fitted for
+executing the great enterprize intended by the king. Paulo de la
+Gama, brother to the captain-general, and Nicholas Coello, both men
+of valour and enterprise, were appointed the other captains of the
+squadron. Bartholomew Diaz was likewise commanded to accompany the
+squadron of discovery in a caravel to the Mirna: And as the three
+ships of war appointed for the voyage could not contain a sufficient
+supply of provisions for their crews, the ship of 200 tons, which had
+been purchased from Ayres Correa, was ordered to accompany de Gama to
+a place called St Blaze, at which the squadron was to take in water,
+where the victuals with which she was loaded were to be distributed
+to the other ships, after which she was ordered to be burnt.</p>
+<p>Having received their orders, Vasco de la Gama and the other
+captains took their leave of the king at <i>Monte mayor</i> , and
+departed for Lisbon, where he embarked his company of 148 persons, at
+Belem, on Saturday the 8th of July 1497. At this embarkation all the
+religious belonging to the church of our Lady at Belem, went in
+procession in their cowls, bare- headed, and carrying wax candles,
+praying for the success of the expedition; accompanied by almost the
+whole people of Lisbon, weeping and deploring the fate of those who
+now embarked, as devoted to certain death in the attempt of so
+dangerous a voyage. Thus commended to God and good fortune, the
+officers and crews embarked and immediately set sail. Vasco de la
+Gama, the captain-general, took the command in the Angel Gabriel, of
+which Pedro de Alenquer was pilot, who had been in the same capacity
+with Diaz when he passed the Cape of Good Hope, and discovered
+the <i>Rio del Infante</i> . Paulo de Gama went captain of the San
+Raphael, Nicholas Coello of the caravel Berrio, and Gonsalo Gomes[1],
+a servant of Vasco de la Gama, commanded the large victualling ship.
+The captain-general gave out instructions, that in case of
+separation, they should keep their course for Cape Verd, which was
+appointed as their rendezvous.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] By Mr Clarke this person is named Gon&ccedil;alo
+Nunez.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[22] De Faria alleges that the people of this river were
+not so black as the other Africans, and wore habits of different
+kinds of stuffs, both cotton and silk, of various colours, and that
+they understood Arabic; and adds, that they informed De Gama there
+were white people to the eastwards, who sailed in ships like those of
+the Portuguese. Osorius likewise says, that one of the natives spoke
+Arabic very imperfectly, and that De Gama left two of his convicts at
+this place, which he called San Rafael.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>Proceeding on the voyage, they came in sight of the Canaries in
+eight days, whence steering for Rio de Oro, they were separated by a
+tempest, during an exceedingly dark night, on which they all shaped
+their course for Cabo Verde. Paulo de la Gama, Nicholas Coello,
+Bartholomew Diaz, and Gonsalo Gomes rejoined, and sailed together for
+eight days, when they came in sight of the captain-general on
+Wednesday evening, and saluted him with many guns, and the sound of
+trumpets, all heartily rejoicing for their safe meeting and good
+fortune in this their first essay of danger. Next day, being the 20th
+of July[2], the fleet reached the islands of St Jago, and came to
+anchor in the bay of Santa Maria, where it remained seven days,
+taking in fresh water, and repairing the yards and other parts of
+their rigging which had been damaged in the late storm. On Tuesday
+the 3d of August[3], the captain-general went on his voyage, after
+taking leave of Diaz, who now returned to Portugal. Proceeding for
+the Cape of Good Hope with all his squadron, de la Gama <i>entered the
+gulf into the sea</i> [4], and sailed all August, September, and
+October, suffering many great tempests of violent wind and rain, so
+that they often expected instant death. At length, on Saturday the
+4th November, they got sight of land at nine in the forenoon, at
+which they were greatly rejoiced; and being all together, the
+captains saluted the general, all dressed in their best array, and
+having their ships all decorated with flags. Not knowing the coasts
+they sailed along until the Tuesday following, when they had a
+perfect view of a low shore, in which was a great bay, that appeared
+convenient for the ships to take in water, into which they all
+entered and came to anchor. This place was afterwards named <i>Angra
+de Santa Elena</i> , or St Helen's bay[5]. The people of the country,
+as our men afterwards found, were small, black, ill-favoured savages,
+clothed in the skins of beasts, somewhat like French cloaks, having
+curious wrought wooden cases for their privities; and in speaking
+they seemed always, sighing. These natives were armed with oak
+staves, hardened in the fire, pointed with the horns of beasts,
+somewhat burnt or hardened with fire, which served them for swords.
+They lived on the roots of herbs, and on sea wolves and whales, which
+are very numerous in this country, likewise on sea crows and gulls.
+They also eat of certain beasts, which they call Gazelas, and other
+beasts and birds which the land produces; and they have dogs which
+bark like those of Portugal. The general, after the squadron was
+brought to anchor, sent Coello in a boat along the shore, in search
+of water, which he found four leagues from the anchoring ground, at a
+place which he named St. Jago,[6] whence all the ships provided
+themselves with fresh water.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Mr Clarke alleges, that Lichefield, our original
+translator, has fallen into an error in this date, which ought to
+have been the 28th July.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] If Saturday were the 5th July, on which the fleet
+sailed from Lisbon, the 3d of August must have been on Thursday. But
+it does not seem necessary to insist upon such minute critical
+accuracy; which, besides, is unattainable.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] This strange expression probably means, that Gama
+stretched directly across the gulf of Guinea, not creeping as usual
+along the coast, and endeavoured to make a direct course for the Cape
+of Good Hope.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] Our old English translator, Lichefield, strangely
+mistakes in calling this place the <i>island</i>  of Sancta Haelena;
+which is assuredly St Elena bay, in lat. 32&deg; 40' S. It has since
+been sometimes named St Martin's bay, but the proper and general name
+is the bay of St Elena, the S. W. point of entry being called St
+Martin's Point.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] Perhaps the Berg river, at the bottom of St Elena
+bay.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Next day, the general with the other captains, escorted by some of
+the people, went on shore to view the natives, and to endeavour to
+learn what distance the Cape of Good Hope was from thence; for the
+chief pilot, who had been on the voyage with Diaz, had departed
+thence on returning, in the morning, into the open sea, with a fair
+wind, and had passed it during the night, and had not come near the
+shore when outward bound; wherefore he did not certainly know its
+situation, nor was he acquainted with its appearance, but conjectured
+it might be thirty leagues from where they then were at the utmost.
+When the general was on shore, he overtook one of the natives, who
+was going to gather honey at the foot of a bush, where it is
+deposited by the bees without any hive. With this person, he returned
+to the ship, thinking to have got an interpreter, but no one on board
+the squadron could understand his language. The general commanded
+this man to have meat and drink, and set him on shore next day well
+dressed, that he might return satisfied to his countrymen.
+Accordingly, the day following, this man came down to the shore
+abreast of the ships, with about fifteen more natives, and the
+general went ashore, carrying with him spices, gold, and pearls, to
+try if these people had any knowledge of these things. But from the
+little estimation with which these articles were viewed, it was
+concluded that the natives had no knowledge of them. The general
+distributed among the natives some small bells, tin rings, counters,
+and such toys, which they received joyfully; and from that time till
+next Saturday morning, great numbers of the natives resorted to the
+fleet, whence they went back to their towns. One Fernan Veloso craved
+leave of the general to accompany the natives to their habitations,
+that he might see their manner of living. On going along with them,
+the natives took a sea wolf which they roasted at the foot of a hill
+for their supper, after which they made Veloso return to the fleet,
+and it appeared to him that the natives had armed themselves, meaning
+to attack our people. On his return, Veloso saw that he was secretly
+followed, wherefore he hastened to the shore and hailed the ships. On
+this, the general who was then at supper, looked out towards the
+land, where he saw numbers of the savages following Veloso. He
+therefore gave orders for all the ships to be in readiness against an
+attack, and went himself on shore with several others unarmed, not
+dreading any harm. On seeing our boats coming towards the shore, the
+savages began to run away with much clamour; but when our people
+landed, they returned and set upon them furiously, throwing their
+darts, and using other weapons, which constrained our people to take
+to their boats in all haste, taking Veloso along with them; yet in
+this scuffle the general and three others were wounded. The Negroes
+returned to their towns; and during four days after, while our ships
+remained in the bay, they never saw any more of the natives, so that
+they had no opportunity to revenge the injury they had done.</p>
+<p>"Some commerce took place between the Portuguese and the Hottentot
+natives around St Elena Bay, by means of signs and gestures; when the
+fleet received plenty of excellent fresh provisions, in exchange for
+clothes, hawks bells, glass beads, and other toys; but this friendly
+intercourse was interrupted through the imprudence of a Portuguese
+young man named Veloso. Delighted with the novelty of the scene, and
+anxious to see the manners of the natives more intimately, he
+obtained permission to accompany them to their huts, where a sea calf
+was dressed in the Hottentot fashion, to his great astonishment.
+Disgusted at their loathsome cookery, he rose abruptly, and was
+impatient to depart, and was accompanied by the natives on his way
+back to the ships with the utmost good humour. Veloso, however,
+became apprehensive of personal danger, and horridly vociferated for
+assistance on his approach to the shore. Coellos boat immediately put
+off to bring him on board, and the natives fled to the woods. These
+needless apprehensions on both sides were increased by mutual
+ignorance of each others language, and led to hostilities. While De
+Gama was taking the altitude of the sun with an astrolabe, some
+Hottentots sprung from an ambush, and threw their spears, headed with
+horn, very dexterously among the Portuguese, by which the general and
+several others were wounded. On this occasion, the Portuguese deemed
+it prudent to retreat to their ships[7]."</p>
+<blockquote>[7] This paragraph is added to relation of Castenada from
+the works of Faria and Osorius.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>Having taken in fresh water and provisions in St Elena Bay, the
+squadron left that place on the forenoon of Thursday the 16th
+November, with the wind at S.S.W. and steered for the Cape of Good
+Hope, and on the evening of the following Saturday came in sight of
+that cape. But on account of the wind being contrary, he had to stand
+out to sea all day, and turned towards the land as night set in. In
+that manner he continued plying to windward until the following
+Wednesday, which was the 20th of November[8], when he doubled the
+cape with a fair wind, sounding the trumpets of all the ships, and
+making every demonstration of joy, but placing the chief confidence
+in God, that his providence would guide and protect them in
+accomplishing the enterprise in which they were engaged.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] If the Thursday on which they came in sight of the
+Cape were the 16th, the Wednesday following must have been the 22nd
+of the month.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>"In this part of the voyage the greatest proofs of courage and
+resolution were evinced by De Gama. While endeavouring to double this
+formidable and almost unknown cape, owing to contrary winds and
+stormy weather, the waves rose mountain high. At one time his ships
+were heaved up to the clouds, and seemed the next moment precipitated
+into the bottomless abyss of the ocean. The wind was piercingly cold,
+and so boisterous that the commands of the pilot could seldom be
+heard amid the din of the warring elements; while the dismal and
+almost constant darkness increased the danger of their situation.
+Sometimes the gale drove them irresistibly to the southwards, while
+at other times they had to lay to, or to tack to windward,
+difficultly preserving the course they had already made. During any
+gloomy intervals of cessation from the tempest, the sailors,
+exhausted by fatigue, and abandoned to despair, surrounded De Gama,
+entreating him not to devote himself and them to inevitable
+destruction, as the gale could no longer be weathered, and they must
+all be buried in the waves if he persisted in the present course. The
+firmness of the general was not to be shaken by the pusillanimity and
+remonstrances of the crew, on which a formidable conspiracy was
+entered into against him, of which he received timely information
+from his brother Paulo. With his assistance, and that of a few who
+remained stedfast to their duty, the leading conspirators, and even
+all the pilots, were put in irons; whilst De Gama, and his small
+remnant of faithful followers remained day and night at the helm,
+undismayed at the dangers and difficulties that surrounded them. At
+length, on Wednesday the 20th November, all the squadron safely
+doubled the tremendous promontory[9]."</p>
+<blockquote>[9] This paragraph is an addition to the text of
+Castaneda from Osorius-- Clarke, I. 342</blockquote>
+<p>Continuing the voyage along the coast beyond the cape, they saw
+great numbers of large and small cattle as they passed, all well
+grown and fat; but could perceive no towns, as the villages inhabited
+by the natives are all farther inland, the houses being of earth
+covered with straw. The natives were all somewhat black, clothed like
+those they had seen at St Elena Bay, speaking the same language, and
+using similar darts, together with some other kinds of arms, both for
+defence and assault. The country is very pleasant, being diversified
+with wood and water; and adjoining to the cape on the east side, they
+found a great harbour now called False Bay, almost six leagues wide
+at the mouth, and running about as much into the land. Having thus
+doubled the cape, the squadron came, on the Sunday after, being St
+Katherine's day, 25th November, to the watering-place of St
+Blaze[10], which is sixty leagues beyond the cape, and is a very
+large bay, exceeding safe in all winds except the north[11].</p>
+<blockquote>[10] From the circumstances in the text, this
+watering-place of St Blaze is probably what is now called St
+Katherines or St Sebastians Bay; yet that place hardly exceeds
+forty-seven Portuguese leagues east from the cape. The sixty leagues
+of the text would carry us almost a degree farther east, to what is
+now called Kaffercroyts river. Clarke removes this place still
+farther to Flesh Bay, otherwise called Angra de St Braz, or Aguada de
+St Braz by De Barros. This latter place is seventy Portuguese
+leagues, or above eighty marine leagues east from the cape.
+--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[11] This account seems erroneous, whether St Katherines
+or Flesh Bay be the one in question, as both ought to be safe in
+north winds, and the winds between the S and E points give both a lee
+shore.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The natives here resembled those already seen in dress and arms.
+The country produces many large elephants, and numerous oxen, of vast
+size and extremely fat, some of which have no horns. On some of the
+fattest of these the natives were seen riding, on pannels stuffed
+with rye straw, as is used in Spain, and having a frame of wood like
+a saddle. Such of them as they choose to sell they mark by means of a
+piece of wood, like the shaft of one of their arrows, put through the
+nose. In this harbour, about three cross-bow shots from the shore,
+there is a rock much frequented by sea wolves, as large as great
+bears, very wild and fierce, with long, great teeth. These animals
+are very dangerous, and will attack men, and their skins are so hard
+as not to be pierced with spears, unless pushed with much force and
+valour. These animals resemble lions, and their young bleat like
+kids. One day that our men went to this rock for amusement, they saw
+at least three thousand of these animals, old and young. On this rock
+also, there are great numbers of birds as large as ducks which do not
+fly, having no feathers in their wings, and which bray like so many
+asses[12].</p>
+<blockquote>[12] Probably a species of Penguins: Lichefield calls
+them <i>stares</i> , as large as ducks; Osorius says the natives called
+them <i>satiliario</i> , and that they were as big as
+geese.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Having thus arrived at the Bay of St Blaze, and lying there at
+anchor, the general caused all the provisions to be taken out of the
+store-ship and divided among the others, and then burned the
+store-ship, as the king had ordered. In this business and other
+needful employments, for their safety in the remainder of the voyage,
+they were occupied in that bay for ten days. On the Friday after
+their arrival, about ninety of the natives made their appearance,
+some on the shore, and others on the hills, on which the general and
+the captains went to the shore, having their boats crews well armed,
+and even taking ordinance with them, to avoid the same accident which
+had happened at St Elena bay. When near the shore, the general threw
+some bells on the land, which the Negroes pickt up, and some of them
+came so near as to take the bells out of his hands. He much wondered
+at this familiarity, as Diaz had informed him when he was in those
+parts, the natives all ran away and would never approach near enough
+to be seen and conversed with. Finding them thus gentle, contrary to
+his expectation, he went on land with his men, and bartered red
+night- caps with the Negroes, for ivory bracelets which they wore on
+their arms. Next Saturday, the natives came to the shore to the
+number of more than two hundred, including their children, and
+brought with them twelve oxen, and four sheep. When our people went
+on shore, some of the natives began to play on four flutes, in four
+several tones, making good music; on which the general caused the
+trumpets to be sounded, and the natives danced with our people. Thus
+the day passed in mirth and feasting, and in purchasing their oxen
+and sheep. On Sunday a still greater number of the natives came down
+to the shore, having several women among them, and bringing a number
+of oxen for sale. After the sale of one of the oxen, some of our
+people noticed some young Negroes hidden among certain bushes, who
+had with them the weapons of the older people, from which it was
+conjectured that some treason was intended. Upon this, the general
+caused our people to remove to a place of greater security, and were
+followed by the Negroes to the landing place. The Negroes now
+gathered together, as if they meant to fight the Portuguese; on which
+the general, being unwilling to harm them, embarked in the boats with
+all his people, and then commanded two pieces of brass ordnance to be
+fired off, on which they were much amazed and scampered off in
+confusion, leaving their weapons behind. After this, the general
+ordered a cross or pillar, having the arms of Portugal to be set upon
+the shore, but the Negroes pulled it down immediately, even before
+our people retired.</p>
+<p>After remaining ten days here, as before mentioned, the fleet set
+sail for the Rio del Infante, on Friday the 8th December, being the
+Conception of our Lady, and during this part of the voyage, there
+arose a great storm with <i>forewind</i>  on the eve of St Lucy, 12th
+December, that all the ships run under close reefed courses. During
+this storm, they parted company with Nicholas Coello, but rejoined
+the next night after. On the 16th December, when the gale abated,
+they discovered land near certain small rocks, sixty leagues from the
+harbour of St Blaze, and five leagues from the Pennon de la Cruz,
+where Diaz set up his last stone pillar[13], and fifteen leagues
+short of the Rio del Infante[14]. This country was very pleasant, and
+abounded in cattle, becoming more sightly and with higher trees the
+further our fleet sailed towards the east, as could be easily seen
+from the ships as they sailed along near the shore. On Saturday they
+passed close within sight of the rock <i>de la Cruz</i> , and being
+loath to pass the <i>Rio del Infante</i> , they stood out to sea till
+vespers, when the wind came round to the east, right contrary. On
+this, the general stood off, and on plying to windward, till Tuesday
+the 20th December, at sunset, when the wind changed to the west,
+which was favourable. Next day at ten o'clock, they came to the
+before-mentioned rock, being sixty leagues a-stern of the place they
+wished to have attained[15].</p>
+<blockquote>[13] Probably Rock Point, forming the western boundary of
+Algoa or Zwartkops bay, in long. 27&deg; E. bring the rocky extreme
+promontory of the Krakakamma ridge.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[14] It is infinitely difficult to guess the course of
+these early voyages, without latitudes or longitudes, and only
+estimated distances by dead reckoning in uncertain leagues; but the
+Rio del Infante of this voyage and that of Diaz, is probably that now
+called Great-fish river, in the Zuureveld of Graaff Reynet, in long.
+28&deg; 20' E and which, however, is twenty-six Portuguese leagues,
+or thirty geographical leagues from Rocky Point, instead of the
+fifteen leagues of the text.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[15] The sixty leagues in the text are inexplicable on
+any rational supposition, as they seem to have again made the Rocks
+de la Cruz, or rather Rocky Point, said just before to be only
+fifteen leagues from Infante river, to which they were then
+bound.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>This rock is the cause of the great currents on this coast, which
+were so powerful, that the fleet had much ado with a brisk favourable
+wind to stem the current between that place and Rio Infante in three
+or four days; but at length they joyfully passed these currents
+without damage, as Diaz had done formerly, and the general,
+encouraged by his good fortune, gave thanks to God, saying, he verily
+believed it was the good pleasure of God that they should attain to
+the discovery of the Indies.</p>
+<p>Thus continuing the voyage till Christmas day, they had discovered
+seventy leagues to the eastwards, and had arrived in the latitude in
+which India was said to be in his instructions. The fleet continued
+to sail for so long a time without going to land, as to be in want of
+water, insomuch that they had to dress their provisions in sea water,
+and were forced to reduce the allowance of drink to one pint of water
+per man each day. But on Friday the 11th January 1498, drawing near
+the land, the boats were sent out to view the coast, where they saw
+many Negroes, both men and women, all of whom were of great stature,
+and followed our boats along the coast. As these people appeared
+quiet and civil, the general called Martin Alonzo, who could speak
+many of the Negro languages, and desired him and another to leap on
+shore, which they immediately did. Alonzo and his companion were well
+received by the natives, especially by their chief, to whom the
+general sent a jacket, a pair of breeches, and a cap, all of a red
+colour, and a copper bracelet, of which he was very proud, and
+returned thanks to the general, saying, "that he might have any thing
+he wished for or needed that his country produced." All which, as
+Martin Alonzo understood their language[16], he reported to the
+general, who was much pleased that by this means an intercourse could
+be opened with the natives. Alonzo and another of our people were
+accordingly permitted by the general to go for one night along with
+the natives to their town, where the chief dressed himself out in his
+new garments, and was beheld with much admiration by his people in
+his finery, clapping their hands for joy. This salutation was
+repeated three or four times on their way to the town, and when
+there, the chief made the circuit of the whole village, that all the
+people might see and admire his new and strange attire. When this
+ceremonial was ended, the chief retired to his own house, where he
+commanded Alonzo and his companion to be well lodged and entertained,
+and gave them for supper a hen exactly the same as one of ours, and a
+kind of pap, or porridge, made of a yellow grain
+called <i>Mylyo</i> [17], of which likewise they made bread. Many of
+the Negroes repaired that night to their lodging to have a near view
+of the strangers; and next day, the chief sent them back to the
+ships, accompanied by some Negroes, laden with hens for the general,
+who returned thanks for the same by means of Alonzo his interpreter.
+During five days that our ships remained off this coast, no kind of
+harm was done or offered by the inhabitants, who seemed quiet and
+gentle, and to have many <i>noble men</i> , for which reason, he called
+this place <i>Terra da boa gente</i> , or the land of Good People[18].
+The town in which Martin Alonzo was had its houses constructed of
+straw, yet well furnished within. The women were more numerous than
+the men, as in a company of forty women, there were only twenty men.
+These people were armed with long bows and arrows, and had darts
+headed with iron, having many copper bracelets, on their arms and
+legs, with copper ornaments in their hair. They have also iron
+daggers, with pewter handles and ivory sheaths; so that it is
+manifest they have plenty of copper and tin. They have likewise
+abundance of salt, which they make from sea water, which they carry
+in gourds to certain caves where the salt is made. They were so fond
+of linen, that they gave a great quantity of copper in exchange for
+an old shirt, and were so quiet and civil, that they brought water to
+our boats from a river about two cross-bow shots from the landing,
+which our people named Rio do Cobre, or Copper River.</p>
+<blockquote>[16] The Portuguese ships appear to have been now on the
+coast of Natal, or the land of the Caffres, certainly a more
+civilized people than the Hottentots of the cape. But the
+circumstance of Alonzo understanding their language is quite
+inexplicable: as he could hardly have been lower on the western coast
+than Minz, or perhaps Congo. Yet, as a belt of Caffres are said to
+cross the continent of Africa, to the north of the Hottentots, it is
+barely possible that some Caffre slaves may have reached the western
+coast.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[17] This grain was probably what is now well known under
+the name of millet.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[18] According to Barros, <i>Aguada da boa
+Paz</i> .--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>"Osorius places the arrival of the Portuguese on this part of the
+coast a day earlier than Castaneda, and gives the following
+additional information. On the 10th January 1498, they discovered
+some small islands, about 230 miles from their last watering-place,
+having a very beautiful appearance, and consisting of verdant
+meadows, intermixed with groves of lofty trees, where they could see
+the inhabitants walking on the shore in great numbers. Here De Gama
+landed, and sent one of his men, who was well versant in the Negro
+languages to visit the king, and who was received with much civility,
+receiving presents of the produce of the country on his dismissal.
+Before leaving Lisbon, De Gama received ten malefactors on board who
+had been condemned to die, but were pardoned on condition of going on
+this voyage, for the purpose of being left wherever De Gama pleased,
+that they might examine the country, and be enabled to give him an
+account of the inhabitants on his return. On setting sail from this
+place, De Gama left two of these exiles on shore, to inform
+themselves of the character and manners of the natives[19].</p>
+<blockquote>[19] Gibb's Orosius, I. 50.</blockquote>
+<p>From this place our fleet departed on the 15th January, and
+proceeding on their voyage, came to another country of very low land,
+having very thick tall trees; and proceeding onwards, they found a
+river which was very open at the mouth, near which he came to anchor
+on Thursday the 24th of January, as the general deemed it proper to
+examine this country, and to try if any intelligence could be here
+procured concerning India. That same evening, he and his brother
+Nicholas Coello[20] entered the river; and, at day-break next
+morning, the land was observed to be extremely low and covered with
+water, having many trees of great height, thickly loaded with various
+kinds of fruits, the country appearing very pleasant. They saw
+likewise certain boats with some of the natives coming towards the
+ship, at which the general was well pleased, as he conceived from
+their having some degree of maritime knowledge in these parts, that
+he could not now be very far from India, or at least should soon hear
+news of that country. The natives were Negroes of good stature, all
+naked, except each a small apron of cloth made of cotton. On reaching
+the ships, they came on board without hesitation, and behaved
+themselves as if they had been long acquainted with our people. They
+were well received, and were presented with bells and other toys, but
+did not understand any of the languages spoken by Martin Alonzo, or
+any of the other interpreters on board, so that the only intercourse
+was by signs. They departed after good entertainment, and afterwards
+they and many others returned to the ships in their boats, bringing
+with them such provisions as their country afforded. The natives
+seemed much satisfied with their reception; and besides those who
+came to the ships by water, many others came by land[21], among whom
+were several women who were tolerably handsome, especially the young
+maidens; but all were as naked as the men. They have three holes in
+their lips, in which they wear small pieces of tin by way of
+ornament. The natives took several of our men along with them to make
+merry at one of their towns, whence they brought water to our
+ships.</p>
+<blockquote>[20] The text here ought probably to be thus amended, "He
+and his brother,  <i>with</i>  Nicholas Coelle,"
+&amp;c.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[21] These probably swam off to the
+ships.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>After the general had been three days in this river, two of the
+nobles, or head men of the natives, came on board to visit him, who
+were naked like the rest, except that their aprons were much larger,
+and one of them had a handkerchief on his head, embroidered with
+silk, while the other wore a nightcap of green satin[22]. Observing
+their cleanliness, or civility, the general treated these people
+courteously, and gave them victuals, apparel, and other things, of
+which they seemed to make but small account; and by certain signs,
+shewn by a young man, it was understood that his country was at a
+considerable distance, where he had seen ships as large as ours. This
+intelligence gave great hopes to our people that the Indies were not
+far off, which was much confirmed by the chiefs who had been on
+board, sending off for sale certain cloths made of cotton, on which
+there were marks of ochre. In respect of all these encouraging
+tokens, the general named this river <i>Ho rio dos bos Sinaes</i> , or
+River of Good Signs; and called the place San Rafael, after the name
+of his own Ship[23].</p>
+<blockquote>[23] There is no circumstance in the text from which the
+situation of this river can even be conjectured. Clarke, p.440,
+alleges that it was Soffala; and yet, in a note in his preceding
+page, says, "That De Gama seems to have passed Cape Corientes during
+the night, and to have kept so far from land, on account of a strong
+current setting on shore, as not to have noticed Sofala." In the
+notes on the Lusiad, this river of Good Signs is ascertained to have
+been one of the mouths of the Zambeze, or Cuama River, which divides
+Mocaranga from the coast of Mozambique; the different mouths of which
+run into the sea between the latitudes of 19&deg; and 18&deg;
+S.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>From the signs of the before-mentioned young men, that the country
+of the head men who had been on board was far off, where they had
+seen large ships, the general concluded that the Indies were still at
+a great distance; and therefore determined, in consultation with the
+other captains, to lay the ships aground, to give their bottoms a
+thorough repair, which was done accordingly. In this operation they
+employed thirty-two days, during which, our people were much
+afflicted with a grievous sickness, thought to proceed from the air
+of the country. Their hands and feet became swelled, and their gums
+became so sore and putrid that they could not eat, and the smell of
+their breath was quite intolerable[24]. With this pestilent infection
+our people were much discouraged, and many of them died, the
+survivors being in great trouble and perplexity. But De Gama took
+much care, and used much diligence for their recovery, and to comfort
+their affliction; continually visiting the sick, and giving them such
+wholesome and medicinal things as he had provided for his own use;
+through all which many recovered who would have died, and the rest
+were thereby greatly comforted, and encouraged.</p>
+<blockquote>[24] They were evidently afflicted with the scurvy; and
+accordingly De Barros refers the disease to its proper cause, "Having
+been for so long a time confined to the use of salt fish and
+corrupted biscuit.-- Clarke."</blockquote>
+<p>Having repaired the ships, and provided them with all necessaries
+that could be procured at the river of Good Signs, the fleet departed
+from thence on Saturday the 24th of February.</p>
+<p>"At this period, two accidents occurred which had nearly
+frustrated all the hopes of this expedition. De Gama being along side
+of the ship commanded by his brother, with whom he wished to speak,
+had hold of the chains, when the boat was carried from under him by
+the force of the current, but by immediate assistance, he and his
+boats crew were providentially saved. Soon afterwards, when the fleet
+was passing the bar of the river, the ship of De Gama grounded on a
+sand bank, and her loss was for some time considered as inevitable;
+but she floated again with the return of the tide, and to their
+inexpressible joy received no damage[25]."</p>
+<blockquote>[25] Addition to the narrative of Castaneda, from De
+Barros.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>As there was little or no wind, the fleet stood out to sea to
+avoid the shore, and about vespers on Sunday, they descried three
+small islands out to sea, about four leagues distant from each other.
+Two of these were replenished with trees, but the third was quite
+bare. Seeing no cause to delay the voyage in examining these islands,
+De Gama held on for six days, coming always to anchor at night. On
+the evening of Thursday, the first of March, they came in sight of
+four islands, two of which were near the land, and the other two
+farther out to sea; and the fleet steered through the channel next
+morning, the ship commanded by Coello, as being the smallest, going
+first. But endeavouring to enter a certain harbour, between the
+mainland and one of these islands, Coello missed the channel and ran
+aground, on which the other ships put about and went back. They soon
+perceived seven or eight boats under sail coming from the island
+which was a good league distant from Coello, at which sight they were
+much rejoiced, and Coello and his people received them with much
+demonstration of friendship and satisfaction, Coello went along with
+these people to the general, and presented them, saying, that here
+was a quite different kind of people from any they had seen hitherto.
+Then the general commanded <i>to let them go a seaboard with their
+boats</i> [26], as he proposed to go with them to their island to
+anchor with his ships, that he might see what kind of a country it
+was, and if he could learn any certain intelligence concerning India.
+But the boats continued to follow our ships, making signals, and
+calling to our people to wait for them; wherefore the ships came to
+anchor, and the boats came to our fleet. The people on board were of
+good stature and somewhat black, clothed in dresses of cotton,
+striped with sundry colours; some girdled to their knees, while
+others carried their apparel on their shoulders like cloaks. Their
+heads were covered with kerchiefs, somewhat wrought with silk and
+gold thread, and they were armed with swords and daggers like Moors.
+In their boats, also, they had certain musical instruments
+named <i>sagbuts</i> . They came immediately on board with as much
+confidence as if they were long acquainted, and entered into familiar
+conversation in the language of Algarve, and would not be known as
+Moors[27].</p>
+<blockquote>[26] This obscure expression seems to mean that De Gama
+wished them to precede the ships, and point out the way into the
+harbour.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[27] This expression has probably been misunderstood by
+the original translator. It appears that these Moors of Mozambique
+spoke Arabic, here called the language of Algarve, and finding
+themselves understood and answered by the strangers, mistook the
+Portuguese for Moors.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The general ordered these people to be well entertained, and they
+eat and drank willingly of whatever was set before them; after which,
+by means of Fernan Alvarez, who could speak their language, he
+learned that the island to which they belonged was called
+Monsambicke, or Mozambique, on which was a town full of merchants,
+who traded with the Moors of India, who bring them silver, linen
+cloth, pepper, ginger, silver rings, many pearls, and rubies; and
+that, from a country behind, they procure gold. They offered likewise
+to conduct our people into the harbour, where they would learn the
+truth of these things more fully. On consulting with the other
+captains, the general determined upon going into this harbour, to
+examine more accurately into these reports, and to procure pilots to
+carry them on their voyage, as they had no one in the fleet who knew
+the way. Nicholas Coello was therefore ordered to make the first
+essay, and to take the soundings of the bar, his ship being the
+smallest. But in entering, he touched on the point of the island
+where he broke his helm, and was in great danger of being lost; but
+by good providence he got off with no farther injury. He now found
+the bar was quite safe, and got into the harbour, where he anchored
+two cross-bow shots from the town, which is in fifteen degrees
+towards the south[28]. The harbour is very good, the town is
+plentifully supplied with such provisions as the country produces,
+the houses being constructed of straw, and the inhabitants Moors, who
+trade to Sofala in large vessels that have neither decks nor nails,
+their planks being sewed together with <i>cayro</i>  or twine, made
+from the fibres of the cocoa nut rind, and their sails of mats made
+of the leaves of a species of palm. Some of these vessels use
+compasses of Genoa, and regulate their voyages by means of quadrants
+and sea charts. With these Moors the Moors of India trade, as
+likewise do those from the Red Sea, because of the gold which is to
+be had here. On seeing our people, the Moors of Mozambique thought
+the Portuguese had been Turks, whom they knew of from the Moors who
+dwell on the Red Sea; and those who were first at our ships carried
+intelligence to the xeque, or sheik, which is the title of the
+governor of this island for the king of Quiloa, in whose territories
+it is situated.</p>
+<blockquote>[28] Mozambique is in lat. 15&deg; 35' S. and in 41&deg;
+of E. Long--E.</blockquote>
+<p>"Though we shall afterwards have occasion to investigate this
+eastern coast of Africa more fully, in editing particular voyages to
+its shores, some notices seem here to be proper[29]. Owing to his
+keeping at a distance from, the shore for security, the present
+voyage gives little knowledge of the eastern coast of Africa, and it
+is even difficult to assign the many stations at which De Gama
+touched between the Cape of Good Hope and Mozambique. We have already
+noticed the river of Good Signs, as being probably the northern mouth
+of the Delta of the Zambeze, now called <i>Quilimane</i> , from a fort
+of that name on its banks. The mouth of this branch runs into the sea
+in lat. 18&deg; 25' S. In his passage from the  <i>Terra de Natal</i> ,
+or Christmas Land, so named from having been discovered on Christmas
+day, and named, in this account of De Gamas voyage, <i>the Land of
+Good People</i> , De Gama missed Cape Corientes, forming the S.W.
+point of the channel of Mozambique, or <i>Inner Passage</i> , as it is
+now called, and overshot Sofala, the southern extremity of Covilhams
+discoveries, at which he was probably directed to touch, as Covilhams
+chart might have been of some use to direct his farther progress to
+Aden, and thence to Calicut or Cananor, on the Malabar coast.</p>
+<blockquote>[29] The observations here inserted, and marked with
+inverted commas, are made by the Editor of the present collection.
+They are much too long for insertion in the form of a note, and
+appeared of too much importance to be omitted; being chiefly from
+Clarke, I. 447.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>"The eastern coast of Africa is hitherto very little known to
+geography, its trade being entirely confined to the Portuguese, who
+have settlements at Sofala, the river Zambeze, Mozambique, Quiloa,
+and Melinda, and conceal all the circumstances respecting their
+foreign possessions with infinite jealousy. It is said to have once
+been in contemplation by the British government, to employ Sir Home
+Popham to make a survey of this coast, but this design was never
+executed. Commodore Blanket remained on this station for a
+considerable time, and much information may be expected from his
+journal, some drawings of the coast having been already made for
+charts, which are preparing, under the orders of the Admiralty. About
+the year 1782, a great mass of geographical information was collected
+on the continent of Europe and lodged in the British Museum, from
+which information may probably be derived respecting this coast, when
+that collection shall have been arranged and submitted to the public.
+According to D'Apres, all the eastern coast of Africa, for a great
+way south of the equinoctial, is lined by a range of islands, whence
+shoals extend to the distance of a league. These islets form an outer
+shore, with a winding channel within, and are in some places a league
+from the coast of the continent, though very apt to be mistaken for
+the real coast. Within this range the boats or almadias of the
+country ply backwards and forwards in great safety, in the
+intervening channel.</p>
+<p>"Ptolemy places the <i>Prasum promontorium</i> , or Green Cape, the
+extreme southern boundary of ancient knowledge of the east coast of
+Africa, in lat. 15" 30' S. and the Portuguese universally assume
+Mozambique as Prasum, by which classical name it is distinguished in
+the Lusiad of Camoens, in reference to the voyage of De Gama, and the
+near coincidence of situation gives great probability to this
+supposition. [Greek: prason] signifies a leek, and is also used to
+denote a sea-weed of a similar green colour, and the name may either
+have been derived from the verdure of the point, or from the
+sea-weeds found in its neighbourhood. At all events, Prasum cannot be
+farther south than Cape Corientes, or farther north than Quiloa or
+the Zanguebar islands. The harbour of Mozambique has seldom less than
+eight or ten fathom water, which is so clear, that every bank, rock,
+or shallow can be easily seen.</p>
+<p>"The Moors, so often mentioned, are supposed by Bruce to have been
+merchants expelled from Spain by Ferdinand and Isabella, who first
+fixed their residence on the western coast of Africa, and extending
+themselves eastwards, formed settlements in Arabia and Egypt, till
+the oppressions of Selim and Soliman, the Turkish emperors,
+interrupted their commerce, and obliged them to disperse along the
+coast of Abyssinia and eastern Africa. Besides the impossibility,
+chronologically, for the assigned causes having produced the supposed
+effect, there is no necessity for having recourse to this improbable
+hypothesis. From being best acquainted with their Moorish conquerors,
+the Spaniards and Portuguese have always been accustomed to name all
+the Arabians Moors, wherever they found them, and even gave at first
+the name of <i>black</i>  Moors to the Negroes, whence our old English
+term <i>Black-a-moors</i> . It is well known that the Arabs, especially
+after their conversion to Mahometanism, were great colonizers or
+conquerors; even the now half-christian kingdom of Abyssinia was an
+early colony and conquest of the pagan Arabs, and its inhabitants are
+consequently <i>white</i>  Moors in the most extended Portuguese sense.
+The Arab, or Moorish kingdoms along the African coast of the Indian
+ocean, are branches from the same original stem, and the early
+Mahometan missionaries were both zealous and successful in
+propagating Islaemism among the most distant pagan colonies of their
+countrymen. As all zealous Mussulmen are enjoined the pilgrimage of
+Mecca, and commerce mixes largely with religion in the holy journey,
+by which the faithful from every distant region often meet at Mecca,
+and induce each other to extend their commercial adventures to new
+regions, it may possibly have been, that some Moors originally from
+Spain, may even have reached Mozambique before the time of De Gama;
+but it is ridiculous to suppose that all the Moors on the African
+coast had been Spaniards. The overthrow of the great Moorish kingdom
+of Granada only took place five or six years before the present
+voyage.</p>
+<p>"The island of Mozambique, which does not exceed a league in
+circumference, is described as low and swampy, and was inhabited by
+Moors who had come from Quiloa and Sofala. It was afterwards much
+resorted to by the Portuguese as a winter station, and became the key
+of their Indian trade. The African coast stretches out on both sides
+of the island into two points, that on the north-east called Pannoni,
+off which a shoal with three islets extends, some way into the sea.
+The southern point is called Mangale[30]."</p>
+<blockquote>[30] For the materials of this addition to the text of
+Castaneda, we are chiefly indebted to the Progress of Maritime
+Discovery, p. 447, 458. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>When the Moorish governor of Mozambique[31] was informed of the
+arrival of the Portuguese, and that Coello was come to anchor in the
+harbour, he fully supposed that they were Turks or Moors from some
+distant place, and immediately came to visit him, apparelled in fine
+silk, with many attendants. Coello received him very courteously; but
+as neither he nor any in his ship could speak their language, the
+governor soon retired. Coello gave him, however, a red cap, on which
+he seemed to set little value, and presented him likewise with some
+black beads, which he carried away in his hand, both being given and
+received in token of friendship. On leaving the ship, he required
+Coello, by signs, to let him have the boat to carry him on shore,
+which Coello readily agreed to, and sent some of his men to the land
+along with him. These the governor carried to his house, and feasted
+them on dates and other things, and sent back with them a pot of
+preserved dates to Coello, with which he regaled the general and his
+brother when they had entered the harbour. On the arrival of the
+other two ships, the governor again sent off some of his people to
+visit them, still taking them for Turks, presenting many pleasant and
+delicate viands, and asking permission to visit them in person. The
+general, in return, sent the governor a present, consisting of red
+hats, short gowns, coral, brass basons, hawks bells and many other
+things, which he slighted as of no value, and asked why the general
+had not sent him scarlet, which he chiefly desired.</p>
+<blockquote>[31] His name, as given by Osorius, was <i>Zacocia</i> ,
+and De Barros adds, that he wore richly embroidered clothes, and had
+his sword ornamented with diamonds.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>Soon afterwards the governor came off to visit the general; who,
+being apprized of his coming, ordered all the ships to be dressed out
+in their flags. He likewise made all the sick and infirm men to be
+kept out of sight, and brought a good many of the most alert men from
+the other ships, whom he ordered to be secretly armed, in case of any
+violence or treachery on the part of the Moors. The governor came on
+board, accompanied with many men, all well apparelled in silk, having
+many ivory trumpets and other musical instruments, on which they
+played almost without ceasing. The governor was a lean man, of good
+stature, dressed in a linen shirt down to his heels, over which he
+wore a long gown of Mecca velvet, having a cap of silk of many
+colours, trimmed with gold, on his head, at his girdle he wore a
+sword and dagger, and had silk shoes. The general received him on
+entering the ship, and led him to an awning, trimmed up in the best
+manner they were able. The general then begged him not to be offended
+that no scarlet had been sent, having brought none with him, and that
+his ships only contained such merchandize as were fit to be bartered
+for victuals for the people; and that his only object at present was
+to discover the way to the Indies, for which purpose he had been sent
+by a great and mighty king, his master. All this was conveyed through
+the interpretation of Fernan Martin[32]. The general then ordered an
+entertainment of the best meats and wines which the ship afforded, to
+be set before the governor and his principal attendants, of all which
+they partook willingly, even drinking wine with good will. The
+governor asked whether they came from Turkey, as he had heard say
+that the Turks were a fair people like them, and desired to see our
+country bows, and the books of our law. To this the general answered,
+that he and his men were not from Turkey, but from a kingdom in their
+neighbourhood; that he would most willingly shew his bows and other
+weapons, but had not the books of our law, as they were not needed at
+sea. Then some cross-bows were brought, which were bent, and shot off
+in presence of the governor, also some of our harness or defensive
+armour, with all of which he was much pleased, and greatly
+astonished.</p>
+<blockquote>[32] This is probably the same person named Fernan
+Alvares on a former occasion.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>During this conference, the general learnt that the port of
+Calicut in India was 900 leagues distant from Mozambique; and, as
+there were many shoals in the course, that it was very necessary to
+have a pilot from this place. He learned also that there were many
+cities along the coast. He likewise understood, that the kingdom of
+Prester John was far from this place, in the inland country[33].
+Considering the expediency of having a pilot, the general requested
+to have two from the governor, who agreed to the demand, on condition
+that they should be well used. The reason of wishing to have two was,
+lest one might die during the voyage, and our people were much
+pleased with this promise. The governor came a second time to visit
+the general, and brought with him both the pilots whom he had
+promised; to each of whom were given thirty crowns and a coat, each
+crown being worth five shillings, under this condition, that whenever
+one of them should go on shore, the other should remain on board,
+that one might always stay by the ship while in harbour.</p>
+<blockquote>[33] It is added by De Barros, that three <i>Abexijs</i> ,
+or Abyssinians, from the territory of <i>Preste Joano</i> , came on
+board the fleet, along with the Moors who brought provisions; and,
+seeing the image of the angel Gabriel painted on the ship of that
+name, and being accustomed to such representations of angels in their
+own country, they made their adorations to this holy
+picture.--Clark.</blockquote>
+<p>Notwithstanding these friendly meetings, speeches, and assurances,
+it soon appeared, after the departure of the governor, that the Moors
+had learned, during their intercourse with our people, that they were
+Christians, on which the former friendship and good will of the Moors
+towards them was changed to wrath and fury, and they henceforwards
+used every endeavour to kill our men, and to take possession of the
+ships. The governor, therefore, and his people, used every effort for
+this mischievous purpose, and had certainly succeeded, if the
+Almighty had not moved the heart of one of the Moorish pilots who had
+been received into the Portuguese fleet, to reveal the same to the
+general; who, fearing lest the infidels might suddenly execute their
+purpose, as being numerous in comparison to his small company,
+determined to remain no longer in the harbour. Wherefore, on Saturday
+the 10th March 1498, being seven days after his arrival, he quitted
+the harbour of Mozambique, and cast anchor close to an island, at the
+distance of a league from that place; intending, on Sunday, to hear
+mass on shore, that they might confess and receive the sacrament,
+which had not been done since leaving Lisbon.</p>
+<p>After the ships were come to anchor in this place of safety from
+being burnt by the Moors, which the general greatly dreaded, he
+determined to go back to Mozambique in his boat, to demand the other
+pilot who had been promised, but who still remained on shore. Leaving
+his brother with the fleet, in readiness to come to his aid if
+needful, the general went towards Mozambique with his boat,
+accompanied by Nicholas Coello, and the Moorish pilot. On their way
+they saw six <i>zambucos</i>  or boats, filled with Moors, coming
+towards them, armed with long bows and arrows, and also with shields
+and spears. The Moors called to our people to come along with them to
+the town; and the Moorish pilot, who explained their signals, advised
+the general to do so, as the governor would not otherwise deliver the
+other pilot, who still remained on shore. The general was much
+displeased at this advice, believing the pilot only wished him to
+approach the shore, that he might be able to run away, and therefore
+ordered him to be secured as a prisoner. He likewise gave orders to
+fire at the Moorish boats from his ordnance. When Paulo de la Gama
+heard the shot, believing the general to be in more danger than he
+actually was, he immediately came with the ship Berrio under sail to
+his aid. On seeing this, the Moors fled away in such haste that the
+general could not overtake them, and therefore returned with his
+brother to where the other ships were at anchor.</p>
+<p>Next day, being Sunday, the general and all his men went on shore,
+where they heard mass, and received the sacrament very devoutly,
+having confessed the evening before. After this they re-embarked and
+set sail the same day. Having no hope of procuring the other pilot,
+the general ordered to release him whom he had confined, and carried
+him on the voyage. But he, willing to be revenged for the indignity
+he had experienced, determined on carrying the Portuguese fleet to
+the island of Quiloa, which was all peopled with Moors; and, as it
+seemed, intended to inform the king of that place that our ships
+belonged to the Christians, that he might destroy them and kill the
+crews. For this purpose, he craftily persuaded the general not to be
+in trouble for want of the other pilot, as he would carry him to a
+great island, on hundred leagues from thence, which was inhabited
+half by Moors, and half by Christians, who were always in war with
+each other, and where he might easily find pilots to conduct him to
+Calicut. Though the general was much pleased with this information,
+he yet did not give implicit credit to the Moor, but promised him
+high rewards if he carried him in safety to that country, and so went
+forward on the voyage with a scant wind.</p>
+<p>On the Tuesday the fleet was still in sight of the land from which
+they took their departure, and remained becalmed all that day and the
+next. On Wednesday night, a gentle breeze sprung up from the
+eastward, on which the fleet stood off to seaward, but on Thursday
+morning, on again making the land, they were four leagues to leeward
+of Mozambique, whence plying to windward, they came back that evening
+to the island where they had heard mass on the Sunday before, where
+they cast anchor and remained eight days waiting for a fair wind.
+While here at anchor, a white Moor, who was a <i>molah</i>  or minister
+among the Moors of Mozambique, came on board the generals ship,
+representing that the governor was much grieved at the breach of
+peace and friendship between them, which he would now gladly renew.
+To this the general made answer, that he would make no peace with the
+governor unless he sent him the other pilot whom he had hired and
+paid. With this answer the <i>molah</i>  departed, and never came back.
+After this, while still waiting for a fair wind, there came another
+Moor on board, accompanied with his son, a boy, and asked the general
+to give him a passage to the city of Melinda, which he said was on
+his way to Calicut. He said that he was a native of the country near
+Mecca, whence he had piloted a ship to Mozambique, and would gladly
+go with him, that he might return to his own country; and farther, he
+counselled the general not to remain in expectation of any answer
+from the <i>zeque</i> , who he was sure would make no peace with him,
+on account of his hatred to the Christians. The general was rejoiced
+at the coming of this Moor, expecting to acquire information from him
+concerning the straits of the Red Sea, and of the towns on the coast
+between Mozambique and Melinda, by which he had to sail, and
+therefore gave orders to receive this Moor and his son on board.</p>
+<p>As the ships were rather short of water, the general and the other
+captains determined upon entering the harbour of Mozambique, to take
+in what they needed; but ordered strict watch to be kept, lest the
+Moors should set the ships on fire. They entered therefore again into
+the harbour on Thursday; and when night came, they went in their
+boats in search of water, which the Moorish pilot assured them was to
+be found on the firm land, and offered to guide them to the place.
+Leaving Paulo de la Gama in charge of the ships, and taking Nicholas
+Coello and the pilot along with him in the boats, the general went on
+shore about midnight to the place where the pilot said that water was
+to be had. But it could not be found; whether that the pilot misled
+them in hope of escaping, or finding he could not escape, did so out
+of malice. Having spent the whole night fruitlessly in search of
+water, and day beginning to dawn, the general returned to the ships
+for more force, lest the Moors might set upon him and his small
+company at a disadvantage. Having furnished his boats with a larger
+force of armed men, he returned to the shore, still accompanied by
+Coello and the Moorish pilot, who, seeing no means of escaping, now
+pointed out the watering-place close by the shore. At this place they
+observed about twenty Moors armed with darts, who shewed as if they
+meant to prevent them from taking water. The general therefore gave
+orders to fire three guns, to force them from the shore, that our men
+might be able to land unopposed. Amazed and frightened by the noise
+and the effect of the shot, the Moors ran away and hid themselves in
+the bushes; and our people landed quietly, and took in fresh water,
+returning to the ships a little before sunset. On arriving, the
+general found his brother much disquieted, because a Negro, belonging
+to John Cambrayes, the pilot of Paulo de la Gama, had run away to the
+Moors, though himself a Christian.[34]</p>
+<blockquote>[34] Mr Clarke, Progr. of Marit. Disc. I. 464, strangely
+misrepresents this story; saying, "that <i>the pilot</i>  of Paulo de
+la Gama had deserted to the Moors, though a
+Christian."--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Upon Saturday the 24th of March, being the eve of the annunciation
+of our Lady, a Moor appeared early in the morning on the shore,
+abreast of the ships, calling out in a loud and shrill voice, "that
+if our men wanted any more water they might now come for it, when
+they would find such as were ready to force their return." Irritated
+at this bravado, and remembering the injury done him in withholding
+the promised pilot, and the loss of the Negro, the general resolved
+to batter the town with his ordnance in revenge, and the other
+captains readily agreed to the measure. Wherefore they armed all
+their boats, and came up before the town, where the Moors had
+constructed a barricade of boards for their defence on the shore, so
+thick that our men could not see the Moors behind. Upon the shore,
+between that defence and the sea, an hundred Moors were drawn up,
+armed with targets, darts, bows, arrows, and slings, who began to
+sling stones at the boats as soon as they came within reach. They
+were immediately answered with shot from our ordnance, on which they
+retired from the shore behind their barricade, which was soon beaten
+down, when they ran into the town, leaving two of their men slain.
+The general and his men now returned to the ships to dinner, and the
+Moors were seen running from that town to another; and so much were
+they afraid of the Portuguese, that they abandoned the island, going
+by water to another place on the opposite side. After dinner, our
+people went with their captains on shore, to endeavour to take some
+of the Moors, with the hope of procuring restitution of the Negro
+belonging to Cambrayes, who had run away from the ships, and they
+were likewise desirous of recovering two Indians, who were said by
+the Moorish pilot to be detained as captives in Mozambique.</p>
+<p>On this occasion, Paulo de la Gama seized four Moors who were in a
+boat; but a great many Moors in other boats escaped, by hastening on
+shore and leaving their boats behind, in which our men found much
+cotton cloth, and several books of their Mahometan law, which the
+general ordered to be preserved. The general and the other captains
+ranged in their boats along side of the town, but did not venture on
+shore, not having sufficient force, nor could they get any speech of
+the Moors. Next day they went on shore at the watering-place, where
+they took what was needed without any opposition from the Moors.
+Being now hopeless of recovering the Negro, or of procuring the
+Indian captives, it was determined to depart; but the general
+resolved to be revenged on the town and people for their enmity. For
+which reason, he went against it next day with ordnance, and
+destroyed it in such sort that the Moors had to abandon it, and flee
+into another island within the country.[35] This being done, the
+fleet weighed anchor on Tuesday the 27th of March, and departed from
+Mozambique, whence they proceeded to two little rocks, which they
+called St George, and where they came to anchor in waiting for a
+wind, which was now contrary. Soon afterwards the wind came fair and
+they departed, but the wind was so light, and the currents so strong,
+that they were forced in a retrograde course.</p>
+<blockquote>[35] According to De Burros, after the inhabitants
+abandoned the town, the zeque sent De Gama a pilot to navigate
+Coello's ship, from whom De Gama learnt that Calicut was a months
+voyage from Mozambique.--Clark. I. 464.</blockquote>
+<p>The general was much pleased to find that one of the Moors taken
+by his brother at Mozambique was a pilot, and was acquainted with the
+navigation to Calicut. Proceeding on their voyage, they came, on
+Sunday the first of April, to certain islands very near the coast, to
+the first of which they gave the name of <i>Ilha da
+A&ccedil;outado</i> , because the Moorish pilot of Mozambique was here
+severely whipt by order of the general, for having falsely said that
+these islands were part of the continent, and likewise for not
+shewing the way to the watering-place at Mozambique, as before
+related. Being cruelly whipt, the Moor confessed that he had brought
+them to this place expressly that they might perish on the rocks and
+shoals of these islands, which were so numerous and so close
+together, that they could hardly be distinguished from each other. On
+this the general stood out to sea, and on Friday the 4th of
+April,[36] standing to the north- west, he came in sight, before
+noon, of a great land, with two islands near the coast, around which
+were many shoals. On nearing the shore, the Moorish pilots recognized
+it, and said that the Christian island of Quiloa was three leagues
+astern; on which the general was much grieved, believing certainly
+that the natives of Quiloa had been Christians, as represented by the
+pilots, and that they had purposely taken a wrong course that the
+ships might not come there. The pilots, to conceal their treachery,
+alleged that the winds and currents had carried the ships farther
+than they reckoned. But in truth, they were more disappointed in this
+than even the general, as they had reckoned upon being here revenged
+upon the Portuguese, by having them all slain. In this God preserved
+our people from the intended danger most miraculously, for if they
+had gone to Quiloa they had all surely perished; as the general was
+so fully persuaded of the natives being Christians, as reported by
+the pilot, that he would doubtless have landed immediately on his
+arrival, and have thereby run headlong to a place where he and all
+his people would have been slain. Both parties being thus sorry for
+having missed Quiloa, the general because he hoped to have found
+Christians, and the Moorish pilots because of their intended
+treachery, it was determined to put back with the intention of
+seeking for it; but still the wind and currents opposed their
+purpose, and they tried a whole day in vain. This doubtless proceeded
+from the providence of God, and his merciful goodness to our men, who
+were thus preserved by miracle from the malicious and devilish
+intentions of the two Moorish pilots of Mozambique.</p>
+<blockquote>[36] If Sunday, as above, were the first of April, the
+Friday following must have been the 6th.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The fleet being thus baffled and tossed to and fro, it was
+determined to bear away for the island of Mombaza, in which the
+pilots said there were two towns, peopled both by Moors and
+Christians. But they gave out this as before to deceive our people,
+and to lead them to destruction; for that island was solely inhabited
+by Moors, as is the whole of that coast. Understanding that Mombaza
+was seventy miles distant, they bore away for that place, and towards
+evening, they came in sight of a great island towards the north, in
+which the Moorish pilots pretended there were two towns, one of
+Christians and the other of Moors; making this false assertion to
+make our people believe that there were many Christians on this
+coast. While pursuing their voyage towards Mombaza for some days, the
+ship San Raphael chanced one morning, two hours before day, to get
+aground on certain shoals, two leagues from the shore of the
+continent. Paulo de Gama immediately made signals to apprize the
+other ships of his situation and their danger; on which they had the
+good fortune to avoid the shoals and got safely to anchor. The boats
+from the other ships were immediately sent off to assist Paulo de
+Gama in the St Raphael; and, on seeing that the tide was then low,
+the general was much rejoiced, as he well knew she would float again
+with the tide of flood; whereas, before, he was much afraid she might
+be totally lost. He therefore gave orders to carry all their anchors
+out to deep water, to prevent her from getting farther on the shoal.
+By the time this was done day broke, and soon after at low water the
+St Raphael was quite dry on a sand bank, having taken no harm in
+striking. While waiting for the tide of flood, our people named these
+sands <i>Os baixos de Sam Rafael</i> , or the Shoals of St Raphael, and
+named certain islands and hills of the continent, then in sight, the
+islands and hills of St Raphael.</p>
+<p>While the ship remained thus dry, and the people walking about on
+the sand, they saw two boats full of Moors, who came to our ships,
+bringing many sweet oranges, much better than those of Portugal.
+These men told the general not to fear any damage to the ship which
+was aground, as she would float uninjured with the next flood; and
+the general was so much pleased with this good heartening, that he
+gave them several presents, which they accepted with many thanks; and
+understanding that our fleet intended to put in at Mombaza, they
+requested to be carried thither. The general granted their request,
+and permitted them to remain on board, the others returning from our
+ships to their own country.[37] When it was full sea, the St Raphael
+floated and got off the shoal, and the fleet proceeded on its
+voyage.</p>
+<blockquote>[37] The text is here obscure; but it would appear that
+only some of the men belonging to these two boats remained on board,
+and the rest returned to the coast. Not that the Moorish pilots from
+Mozambique were here dismissed, as the text of Lichefild's
+translation seems to insinuate.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Following the coast to the north-eastwards, the fleet came to
+anchor outside of the bar of the harbour of Mombaza, about sunset of
+Saturday the 7th of April. Mombaza is on an island very near the
+shore of the continent, and has plenty of provisions, such as millet,
+rice, and cattle, both large and small, all well grown and fat,
+especially the sheep, which are uniformly without tails; and it
+abounds in poultry. It is likewise very pleasant, having many
+orchards, abounding in pomegranates, Indian figs, oranges, both sweet
+and sour, lemons, and citrons, with plenty of pot-herbs, and it has
+an abundant supply of excellent water. On this island there is a city
+having the same name, Momabza, standing in lat. 4&deg;S. which is
+handsomely built on a rocky hill washed by the sea. The entrance of
+the haven has a mark or beacon, and on the very bar there is a little
+low fort, almost level with the water.[38]</p>
+<blockquote>[38] Motta, in the Portuguese East Indian Pilot, places
+this town in lat. 3&ordm; 50'S. He says the entrance is much
+incommoded with shoals, and so narrow in some places as not to exceed
+the length of a ship. This city is said to have once stood on a
+peninsula, converted into an island by cutting a canal across the
+isthmus.--Clark. I. 469.</blockquote>
+<p>Most of the houses of this place are built of stone and lime,
+having the ceilings finely constructed of plaster, and the streets
+are very handsome. This city is subject to a king of its own, the
+inhabitants being Moors, some of whom are white and others brown[39].
+The trade of this city is extensive, and its inhabitants are well
+dressed, especially the women, who are clothed in silk, and decorated
+with gold and precious stones. The harbour is good and much
+frequented by shipping, and it receives from the African continent,
+in its neighbourhood, great quantities of honey, wax, and ivory.</p>
+<blockquote>[39] This may be understood that part of the inhabitants
+were unmixed Arabs, comparatively whites; while others were of a
+mixed race between these and the original natives, perhaps likewise
+partly East Indian Mahometans, of a similar origin.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The general did not enter the harbour that night because it grew
+late, but commanded to hoist the flags in compliment, which the
+people did with much mirth and joy, in hope that they had come to an
+island in which there were many Christians, and that next day they
+might hear mass on shore. They had likewise great hope that the sick,
+who were almost the whole crews, might here recover their health;
+though, indeed, they were much reduced in number, many having died
+during the voyage. Soon after our ships came to anchor, although
+night approached, a large boat, containing about a hundred men, all
+armed with swords and targets, was seen coming towards the fleet. On
+reaching the generals ship, they would have all come on board with
+their weapons, but the general only permitted four of their
+principals to come aboard, and even they unarmed; causing them to be
+told in their own language, that they must excuse his precaution,
+being a stranger, and not knowing therefore whom he might trust. To
+those whom he permitted to come on board he gave courteous
+entertainment, presenting them with such conserves as he had, of
+which they readily partook; and he requested of them not to take ill
+that he had thus refused entrance to so many armed men. They said
+that they had merely come to see him, as a new and rare thing in
+their country, and that their being armed was merely because such was
+the custom of the country, whether in peace or war. They also said,
+that the king of Mombaza expected his arrival, and would have sent to
+visit him, if it had not been so late, but certainly would do so next
+day. Their king, they added, was rejoiced at his arrival, and would
+not only be glad to see him, but would load his ships with spices.
+They also said that there were many Christians on the island, who
+lived by themselves; at which the general was much pleased, believing
+their story, which agreed with what the two pilots had said. Yet he
+entertained some jealous doubts, for all their fair speeches, and
+wisely suspected the Moors had come to see if they could lay a train
+to take our ships. In this he was perfectly right, as it afterwards
+appeared that this was their sole intent. The king of Mombaza had
+received perfect intelligence that we were Christians, and of all
+that we had done at Mozambique, and plotted to be revenged, by taking
+our ships and killing our men.</p>
+<p>Next day, being Palm Sunday, still prosecuting his wicked purpose,
+the king sent some white Moors with a message to the general,
+declaring his great joy at our arrival, inviting him into the
+harbour, and engaging to supply him with all things he might be in
+need of; and, in token of amity, sent him a ring, a sheep, and many
+sweet oranges, citrons, and sugar canes. These white Moors were
+likewise instructed to pretend that they were Christians, and that
+there were many Christians in the island. All this was so well
+counterfeited, that our people actually believed them to be
+Christians, on which account the general received them with much
+courtesy, and made them some presents, sending a message to the king
+that he would certainly come farther into the harbour next day. He
+also sent a present to the king of a fine branch of coral. And, for
+the greater security, he sent along with these white Moors, two of
+our banished men, who had been embarked expressly for such hazardous
+undertakings, or for being left on shore where it might be deemed
+expedient, to become acquainted with the circumstances of various
+places, and to be taken on board again. These men, and the Moors who
+had been on board, were met in landing by a number of people, curious
+to see and examine them, who accompanied them all the way to the
+kings palace, where they had to pass through three several doors,
+each guarded by an armed porter, before they came to the place where
+the king was. They found the king in no very great state, yet he
+received them well, and commanded the Moors who had brought them on
+shore to show them the city. In going through the streets, our men
+saw many prisoners in irons; but, not knowing the language, they
+could not ask who or what these were, yet believed they might be
+Christians, us our general was informed by the Moorish pilots, and
+the kings two messengers, that there were Christians on the island,
+and that the Christians and the Moors had wars together. Our men were
+likewise carried to the house in which the merchants of India dwelt,
+who were said to be Christians. These people, learning that our men
+were Christians, shewed much joy at receiving them, embracing and
+banqueting them, and shewed them a piece of paper on which the figure
+of the Holy Ghost was painted, which they worshipped on their knees,
+with great shew of devotion, as if they had been what they pretended.
+The Moors then informed our men by signs, that there were many other
+Christians at another place, too far for carrying them there; but
+that they should be conducted to see them when our ships came into
+the harbour. All this was done craftily to entice our people into the
+harbour, where they were determined to destroy them all.</p>
+<p>After our two men had seen the city, they were conducted back to
+the king, who ordered them to be shewn ginger, pepper, cloves, and
+wheat, giving them samples of them all to be carried to the general,
+with assurance that he had great store of all these commodities, and
+would give him his loading if he desired it. They were likewise told,
+that he had great plenty of gold, silver, amber, wax, ivory, and
+other riches, which he would sell at lower prices than they could be
+bought in any other place. This message was brought off on Monday to
+the general; who, hearing the kings offer to furnish him with a
+loading of these commodities, was much rejoiced, and was much pleased
+with the information brought by the two convicts, and their good
+report of the people, city, and country, and more especially on
+account of the <i>two</i>  Christians whom they had seen in the house
+of the Indian merchants. After a consultation with the other
+captains, it was determined to enter the port next day, and to accept
+the spices offered by the king of Mambaza, after which, to continue
+the voyage to Calicut; and, if they could not procure similar
+articles there, to return contented with what might be got in this
+place. In the meantime, several of the Moors visited our ships,
+conducting themselves with much gentleness and humility, and evincing
+an appearance of friendship and kindness to our people, as if they
+had been long and familiarly acquainted.</p>
+<p>When the tide of flood was sufficiently advanced on the following
+morning, the general gave orders to weigh anchor, intending to carry
+the ships into the harbour. But the Almighty Disposer of events, not
+willing that he and his company should fall into the snare which the
+Moors had laid for their destruction, interposed to avert the danger,
+and to work their safety. For, when the generals ship had weighed
+anchor, and was about to enter the port, she touched on a shoal by
+the stern; upon which, he immediately let fall his anchor again,
+which was likewise done by the other captains. Seeing this, the Moors
+who were on board concluded that he would not enter the harbour that
+day, and instantly took to their boat, which was alongside, and made
+for the city: At the same time, the pilot of Mozambique leapt from
+the stern of the admirals ship into the water, and was taken into the
+boat by the Moors. The admiral called out to them to bring him back,
+but all in vain; on which he began to suspect that the Moors and
+their king had evil intentions towards him and his people, and was
+thankful for the accident which had detained him from the harbour,
+and preserved him from the purposed treachery. After explaining his
+apprehensions to the other captains, he commanded, in the evening of
+this day, that two of the Moors who had been made prisoners at
+Mozambique should be put to the torture, to endeavour to ascertain
+whether any treachery was intended, and to force them to disclose the
+same. This was done by dropping melted bacon upon their flesh; and
+they immediately confessed that treason was intended, and that the
+pilots had escaped by swimming from the ship, as fearing the same had
+been discovered. On this confession, the general resolved on no
+account to enter the harbour; yet determined to put another Moor to
+the torture, to learn if he were in confederacy with the rest. But
+this Moor, on seeing preparations made for the purpose, although his
+hands were bound, leapt into the sea; which was likewise done by
+another Moor before day-light.</p>
+<p>Having thus discovered the secret mischiefs which had been
+prepared against him, the general gave thanks to God, by whose good
+providence he and his people had been delivered from imminent hazard
+of death among the infidels; whereupon he and his company joined in
+the <i>Salve regina</i>  with great devotion. After this, lest the
+Moors might attempt any thing against their safety during the night,
+he ordered a strong and vigilant armed watch to be kept. It is worthy
+of notice, that all the sick among our people, who were indeed many,
+began presently to get well from their first coming to Mombaza; so
+that in this time of their great necessity and danger, they found
+themselves sound and strong, beyond all human hope, and far above the
+ordinary course of nature; for which reason it can only be attributed
+to the marvellous and supernatural power of God, miraculously done at
+this peculiar instant time of need, for the preservation of these
+poor and distressed persons, whose only hope of safety was in him.
+After the night watch was set, those of the Berrio felt the cable by
+which they lay at anchor swagging, as if shaken by a great tunny, of
+which there were many in this place, very large and excellent food:
+But, on giving more attention to the circumstance, they perceived
+that this was occasioned by their enemies the Moors, some of whom
+were swimming about the cable, and were cutting it with knives or
+falchions, that the ship might drift on shore and fall a prey to
+them. On seeing this, our men scared them away by crying out, and
+gave notice to the other ships to be on their guard against similar
+attempts. Some people from the San Raphael went immediately to the
+assistance of the Berrio, and found some of the Moors about the
+chains and tacklings of the foremast, who cast themselves into the
+sea, and swam, along with those who had attempted to cut the cable,
+to certain boats that were in waiting at a short distance, in which,
+as our people afterwards learnt, there were a great number of the
+Moors, who now rowed away to the city in all haste.</p>
+<p>Our fleet still remained off the harbour of Mombaza, all the
+Wednesday and Thursday following; during both of which nights the
+Moors came off in boats, which always lay close by the shore, whence
+some of them swam to the ships, endeavouring to cut our cables: But
+our men kept such strict watch, that they were unable to succeed. Our
+people, however, were always in much fear and perplexity, lest the
+Moors might burn our ships; and it was wonderful they did not make
+the attempt by means of the ships they had in the harbour, which, in
+all human probability, they had succeeded in, killing and destroying
+us all. It was conjectured that they were deterred from making this
+attempt, from fear of the ordnance in our ships; but whatever might
+appear to us as the cause of their not using open force, it was
+assuredly the good pleasure and favour of God, that put their hearts
+in fear against making an open attack, by which we were preserved
+from the execution of their cruel purposes towards us.</p>
+<p>The reason of the general remaining during the two days off
+Mombaza was, that he might endeavour to procure two pilots from
+thence to carry him to Calicut, without which assistance the voyage
+would have been very difficult, as our pilots had no knowledge of
+that country. But finding none were to be had, he took his departure
+from that place on Friday morning, though with a very light wind. On
+leaving the anchorage, he was forced to leave one of his anchors
+behind, as the crew was so completely exhausted by hauling up the
+rest, that they were unable to weigh this one. It was afterwards
+found by the Moors, and carried into their city, where it was
+deposited near the kings palace. When Don Francisco de Almeida, first
+viceroy of the Indies, took this place from the Moors, this anchor
+was there found, as I shall afterwards relate in the second book of
+this work.</p>
+<p>Departing thus from Mombaza, the fleet continued its voyage along
+the coast to the north-east, and having very light wind, was obliged
+to come to anchor in the evening near the shore, about eight leagues
+from Mombaza. Towards the dawn of next day, two sambuccos, or little
+pinnaces, were seen about three leagues to the leeward of the fleet,
+and out at sea; on which, in hope of procuring some pilots who could
+carry him to Calicut, the general ordered the anchors to be weighed,
+and he and the other captains gave chase to the sambuccos the whole
+of that day. Towards vespers, the general came up with and captured
+one of these pinnaces, but the other escaped to the land. In the
+captured pinnace there were seventeen Moors, among whom was an old
+man who seemed master over the rest, and had his young wife along
+with him. In this boat there was great store of silver and gold, and
+some victuals. On the same evening the fleet came to anchor off
+Melinda, which is eighteen leagues from Mombaza, and is in lat.
+3&deg; S. This place has no good harbour, being only an almost open
+roadstead, having a kind of natural pier or reef of rocks on which
+the sea beats with much violence, owing to which the ships have to
+ride at a considerable distance from the shore. The city stands in a
+broad open plain, along the shore, surrounded with many palms, and
+other sorts of trees, which are green the whole year. It has also
+many gardens and orchards, abounding with all kinds of herbs and
+fruits, and many fountains of good water. Their oranges are
+particularly excellent, very large and sweet. They have also
+abundance of millet and rice, plenty both of cattle and sheep, and
+great store of fine poultry, which are very cheap. Melinda is a large
+city, with fair streets, and many good houses of stone and lime,
+containing several storeys, with windows, and having terraced roofs
+made of lime and earth. The native inhabitants are black, of well
+proportioned bodies, having curled hair; but many strangers resort
+thither and dwell in the city, who are Moors from Arabia, who conduct
+themselves in a commendable manner, especially the gentlemen or
+better sort. These, from the girdle upwards, go naked; but below the
+girdle they are dressed in silk, or fine stuffs of cotton, though
+some wear short cotton cloaks, after the old fashion. On their heads
+they wear certain cloths embroidered with silk and gold. They wear
+also rich daggers, ornamented with silken tassels of many colours,
+and very handsome swords. They are all left-handed, and go constantly
+armed with bows and arrows, taking great delight in archery, at which
+they are very expert. They account themselves good horsemen; yet
+there is a common saying on this coast, <i>the horsemen of Mombaza,
+and the women of Melinda</i> , as in Mombaza they are excellent
+horsemen, and the women of Melinda are very handsome, and dress
+richly.</p>
+<p>In this city also there are many Gentiles from the kingdom of
+Cambaya in India, who are great merchants and trade to this place for
+gold, which is found in this country, as likewise ambergris, ivory,
+pitch, and wax; all of which commodities the inhabitants of Melinda
+exchange with the merchants of Cambaya for copper, quicksilver, and
+cotton cloth, to the profit and advantage of both parties. The king
+of this city is a Moor, who is served with far more state than any of
+the kings on this coast to the southwards. Being arrived over against
+this city, the general and all the people of the fleet were much
+rejoiced at seeing a city resembling those of Portugal, and gave
+thanks to God for their safe arrival. Being desirous of procuring
+pilots to navigate the fleet to Calicut, the general commanded to
+come to anchor, meaning to use his endeavours for this purpose. For,
+hitherto, he could not learn from the Moors he had lately captured,
+whether any of them were pilots; and though he had threatened them
+with the torture, they always persisted in declaring that none of
+them had any skill in pilotage.</p>
+<p>Next day, being Easter eve, the old Moor who had been made
+prisoner in the pinnace, told the general that there were four ships
+belonging to Christians of the Indies at Melinda, and engaged, if the
+general would allow him and the other Moors to go on shore, he would
+provide him, as his ransom, Christian pilots, and would farther
+supply him with every thing he might need. Well pleased with the
+speeches of the old Moor, the general removed his ships to within
+half a league of the city, whence hitherto no one came off to our
+fleet, as they feared our men might make them prisoners; for they had
+received intelligence that we were Christians, and believed our ships
+were men of war. On the Monday morning, therefore, the general
+commanded the old Moor to be landed on a ledge, or rock, opposite the
+city, and left there, expecting they would send from the city to
+fetch him off; which they did accordingly as soon as our boat
+departed. The Moor was carried directly to the king, to whom he said,
+as instructed by the general, what he chiefly desired to have. He
+farther said, that the general desired to have amity with the king,
+of whom he had heard a good report, hoping by his aid, and with the
+will of God, he might be enabled to discover the route to India. The
+king received this message favourably, and sent back the Moor in a
+boat to the general, accompanied by one of his own servants and a
+priest, saying, that he would most willingly conclude a treaty of
+amity with him, and should supply him with what pilots he needed.
+These messengers likewise presented the general from the king, with
+three sheep, and a great many oranges, and sugar canes, which he
+thankfully accepted; desiring the messengers to acquaint their
+master, that he gladly agreed to the profered amity, and was ready to
+confirm the same between them, and promised to enter their harbour
+next day. He farther desired them to inform the king, that he was the
+subject of a great and powerful sovereign in the west, who had sent
+him to discover the way to Calicut, with orders to enter into peace
+and amity with all kings and princes on whose territories he might
+happen to touch by the way. That it was now  <i>two years</i> [40]
+since he left his own country, and that the king his master was a
+prince of such puissance and worth as he was convinced the king of
+Melinda would be glad to have for a friend. He then dismissed the
+messengers, sending as a present to their king a hat of the fashion
+of the time, two branches of coral, three brass basons, two scarfs,
+and some small bells.</p>
+<blockquote>[40] This is surely an oversight in Castaneda or his
+translator, for  <i>one</i>  year.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the second day after Easter, the general removed his ships
+nearer the city. The king knowing this, and believing that the king
+of Portugal must be a high-spirited prince, and the general a worthy
+subject, who had hazarded himself in so long and dangerous a voyage,
+became desirous of seeing such men; wherefore, he sent a more
+honourable message to the general, saying, that he proposed next day
+to visit him in person, intending that their meeting should be on the
+water; and sent him a present of six sheep, with a considerable
+quantity of cloves, ginger, pepper, and nutmegs. Upon this message,
+the general removed his fleet still nearer the city, and came to
+anchor close to the four ships of the Indies, of which the old Moor
+had made mention as belonging to Christians. When the owners of these
+ships learnt that we were Christians, they came immediately to visit
+our general, who happened then to be in the ship of Paulo de la Gama.
+These men were of a brown colour, but of good stature and well
+proportioned, dressed in long white cotton gowns, having large
+beards, and the hair of their heads long like women, and plaited up
+under their turbans or head-dresses. The general received them with
+much kindness and attention, asking, by means of an interpreter, who
+understood the language of Algarve, or Arabic, whether they were
+Christians. These men had some knowledge of that language, though it
+was not their own tongue, but had learnt it in the course of their
+trade and conversation with the Moors of Melinda, of whom they
+advised the general to beware, lest their inward intentions might be
+far different from their outward shew. Willing to make trial if these
+men were really Christians, the general caused a picture to be shewn
+them, on which our Lady was painted weeping, surrounded by some of
+the apostles, but without informing them what this was meant to
+represent. Immediately on this being set before them, they fell down
+and worshipped the picture, praying for some time. The general then
+asked if they were of Calicut; on which they answered they were of
+Grangalor[41], still farther off, and could give him no information
+respecting Calicut. From this time, so long as our fleet remained at
+Melinda, these people came every day on board the ship of Paulo de la
+Gama, to pay their devotions before this picture, offering to the
+images which it represented gifts of pepper and other things. These
+Indian Christians, according to their own account, eat no beef.</p>
+<blockquote>[41] It is difficult to ascertain what place in India is
+here meant. Cranganore comes nearer in sound, but is rather nearer
+Melinda than Calicut; Mangalore is rather more distant. The former a
+degree to the south of Calicut, the latter not quite two to the
+north; all three on the Malabar coast. On a former occasion,
+Castaneda says these merchants were of Cambaya or Guzerat, above
+eleven degrees north of Calicut.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the last day of the week after Easter, and in the afternoon,
+the king of Melinda came off in a great boat to our fleet. He was
+dressed in a cassock of crimson damask lined with green satin, and
+wore, a rich cloth or turban on his head. He sat in a chair, of the
+ancient fashion, very well made and wrought with wire, having a silk
+cushion; and on another chair beside him, there lay a hat of crimson
+satin. An old man stood by him as his page, who carried a very rich
+sword with a silver scabbard. In the boat there were many sacbuts,
+and two ivory flutes eight spans long, on which they played by a
+little hole in the middle, agreeing and according well with the music
+of the sacbuts. The king was likewise attended by about twenty
+Moorish gentlemen, all richly dressed. When the king had nearly
+attained our ships, the general went to meet him in his boat, gaily
+decorated with flags and streamers, himself dressed in his best
+apparel, and attended by twelve of the principal officers of the
+squadron, leaving his brother in charge of the ships. On the boats
+meeting, the two parties made every demonstration of friendship and
+respect; and the Moorish king immediately offered to come on board
+the generals boat, that he might see him the better. The general
+accordingly received him with all respect, and the king shewed as
+much honour and courtesy to the general as if he had been likewise a
+king. The Moorish king, after examining the dress and appearance of
+the general and his men with the utmost attention, asked the general
+the name of his king, which he commanded to be immediately written
+down. He particularly inquired respecting the power of the king of
+Portugal, and the general gave the most satisfactory answers to all
+his questions; particularly detailing the reasons of his being sent
+to discover Calicut, that Portugal might be thence supplied with
+spices, which were not to be had in his own country. The king, after
+giving him some information on these points, and respecting the
+straits of the Red Sea, promised to furnish the general with a pilot
+to carry him to Calicut, and then earnestly solicited him to
+accompany him to the city, where he might solace and refresh himself
+in the palace, after the fatigues and dangers of so long a voyage;
+and promised, if the general would do so, that he the king would
+visit him on board. To this the general prudently answered that he
+was not authorised by his instructions to go on shore, and that he
+could not answer for deviating from the orders of his sovereign. On
+this the king observed, that if he were to visit the ships, he could
+not well answer for his conduct to the inhabitants of his city; yet,
+he was grieved that the admiral refused to go into the city, which
+should be at his will and pleasure, and that of the king his master,
+to whom he should either write or send an ambassador, if the general
+would call in at Melinda on his return from Calicut. The general gave
+the king thanks for his politeness, and promised to return that way;
+and, while this conversation was going on, he sent for the Moors who
+had been taken in the pinnace, whom he presented to the king, saying,
+he would most gladly perform any other service that lay in his power
+to the king. The king was greatly pleased with this gift, which he
+valued as much as if the admiral had given him another city equal to
+Melinda.</p>
+<p>Having ended their conversation, and confirmed their mutual
+friendship, the king rowed through among our ships, examining them
+with much pleasure and admiration, and was saluted in passing by many
+discharges of the ordnance, at which he and his attendants seemed
+much delighted. On this occasion, the general attended upon him in
+his own boat out of respect, and the king observed, that he never was
+so much pleased with any men as with the Portuguese, and would most
+gladly have some of them to help him in his wars. To this the general
+answered, that if his highness were to have experience of what they
+were able to perform, he would like the Portuguese still better; and
+that they should certainly give him aid, if it should please the king
+of Portugal to send any of his war ships to Calicut, which he did not
+doubt would be the case, if it were Gods will to permit the discovery
+of that place. After the king had satisfied his curiosity, he
+requested of the general, since he would not go himself into the
+city, to permit two of his men to go and see the palace, offering to
+leave his own son, and one of his chief priests, which they named
+Ca&ccedil;is[42], in pledge for their safe return. To this request
+the general consented, and sent two of our men along with the king:
+He, at his departure, requested that the general would next day, in
+his boat, come close to the shore, when he should be gratified with a
+sight of the native horsemen going through their evolutions. After
+this they separated.</p>
+<blockquote>[42] This seems to be the same office with that named
+Kadhi, or Khazi, by the Turks and Persians, which is rather the title
+of a judge than of a priest, which is named Moulah.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Next day, being Thursday, the general and Nicholas Coello went in
+their boats well armed along the shore, according to the invitation
+of the king, keeping at a small distance from each other for mutual
+defence in case of need, where they saw many men skirmishing on the
+shore. As our boats approached the royal palace, certain of the kings
+attendants brought him in a chair down some stone stairs which led to
+the water; and, being then very near the generals boat, the king
+entered into friendly conversation with him, and once more entreated
+him to land and go to the palace; saying, that his father, who was
+lame, was exceedingly desirous to see him, and even offered, that,
+while the general remained on shore, he and his children would go on
+board the ships as hostages for his security. But our general, still
+dreading that some bitter treachery might lurk beneath this honied
+speech, continued to excuse himself from landing, as he had not
+permission from his own prince to do so, and must obey him, in all
+things. After this, taking his leave of the king, he rowed past the
+ships of the Indian merchants, which he saluted in passing with his
+ordnance; and when they saw us pass, they held up their hands,
+exclaiming Christe! Christe!</p>
+<p>That night, having obtained leave from the king, our men made them
+a great feast, with much diversion, also of squibs, firing of guns,
+and loud cries. The fleet remained at anchor for two days without any
+message from the shore, on which account the general was much
+distressed, fearing the king had taken offence at his refusal to go
+on shore, and might break the peace and amity between them, and not
+send him any pilot. But on Sunday the 21st of April, a person who was
+in high credit with the king, came off to visit the general, who was
+much disappointed when this person brought no pilot, and again began
+to entertain suspicions of the kings intentions. When the king learnt
+this, and that the general remained merely for the purpose of having
+a pilot, he sent him one who was a Gentile, called <i>Gosarate</i> [43]
+in their language, and whose name was  <i>Canaca</i> , sending an
+apology at the same time for not having sent this person sooner. Thus
+the king and the general remained friends, and the peace continued
+which had been agreed between them.</p>
+<blockquote>[43] It is probable that this passage should be thus
+understood, "The king sent him a pilot, who was an idolater from
+Guzerate, &amp;c."--E.</blockquote>
+<p>"De Barros and Faria give this pilot the name of <i>Malemo
+Cana</i> , and say that he belonged to one of the Indian ships of
+Cambaya, then at Melinda. De Barros adds, that he shewed De Gama a
+very small chart of the coast of India, laid down with meridians and
+parallels, but without rhumbs of the winds. This pilot shewed no
+surprise on seeing the large wooden and metal astrolabes belonging to
+the Portuguese, as the pilots of the Red Sea had long used brass
+triangular instruments and quadrants for astronomical observations,
+and that he and others who sailed from Cambaya, and the ports of
+India, navigated by the north and south stars, and the constellations
+of the eastern and western hemispheres; and, though they did not use
+these instruments in navigation, they employed one made of three
+pieces of board, similar to the <i>balhestillia</i> , or cross-staff of
+the Portuguese.</p>
+<p>"In a collection of papers published in 1790, called <i>Documentos
+Arabicos</i> , from the royal archives of Lisbon, chiefly consisting
+of letters between the kings of Portugal and the tributary princes of
+the east in the sixteenth century, the <i>zeque, sheik</i> , or king of
+Melinda, with whom De Gama afterwards made a treaty of alliance, and
+whose ambassador he carried into Portugal, was named
+Wagerage[44]."</p>
+<blockquote>[44] The addition to, or observations on the text,
+inserted in this place within inverted commas, are from Clarke, I.
+486, 487.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Having thus procured a pilot, and provided all things necessary
+for the voyage, De Gama departed from Melinda for Calicut, on Friday
+the 26th of April 1498[45], and immediately made sail directly across
+the gulf which separates Africa from India, which is 750 leagues[46].
+This golf runs a long way up into the land northwards; but our course
+for Calicut lay to the east[47]. In following this voyage, our men
+saw the north star next Sunday, which they had not seen of a long
+while; and they saw the stars about the south pole at the same time.
+They gave thanks to God, that, whereas it had been represented to
+them, that in this season, which was the winter of the Indies, there
+were always great storms in this gulf, they now experienced fair
+weather. On Friday the 18th of May, twenty- three days after leaving
+Melinda, during all which time they had seen no land, they came in
+sight of India, at eight leagues distance, the land seeming very
+high. Canaca, the pilot, tried the lead and found forty-five fathoms,
+upon which he altered his course to the south-east, having fallen in
+with the land too far to the north. Upon the Saturday, he again drew
+near the land, but did not certainly know it, as the view was
+obscured by rain, which, always falls in India at this season, being
+their winter. On Sunday the 20th of May, the pilot got view of
+certain high hills which are directly behind the city of Calicut, and
+came so near the land that he was quite sure of the place; on which
+he came up with great joy to the general, demanding
+his <i>albrycias</i> , or reward, as this was the place at which he and
+his company were so desirous to arrive. The general was greatly
+rejoiced at this news, and immediately satisfied the pilot, after
+which, he summoned all the company to prayers, saying
+the <i>salve</i> , and giving hearty thanks to God, who had safely
+conducted them to the long wished-for place of his destination. When
+prayer was over, there was great festivity and joy in the ships,
+which came that same evening to anchor two leagues from Calicut.
+Immediately upon anchoring, some of the natives came off to the ships
+in four boats, called <i>almadias</i> , inquiring whence our ships
+came, as they had never before seen any resembling their construction
+upon that coast. These natives were of a brown colour, and entirely
+naked, excepting very small aprons. Some of them immediately came on
+board the general, and the Guzerat pilot informed him these were poor
+fishermen; yet the general received them courteously, and ordered his
+people to purchase the fish which they had brought for sale. On
+conversing with them, he understood that the town whence they came,
+which was in sight, was not Calicut, which lay farther off, and to
+which they offered to conduct our fleet. Whereupon the general
+requested them to do this; and, departing from this first anchorage,
+the fleet was conducted by these fishermen to Calicut.</p>
+<blockquote>[45] In Lichefild's translation this date is made the
+22d; but the Friday after Sunday the 21st, must have been the 26th of
+the month.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[46] The difference of longitude between Melinda and
+Calicut is thirty- four degrees, which at 17-1/2 leagues to the
+degree, gives only 575 Portuguese leagues, or 680 geographical
+leagues of twenty to the degree. Thus miserably erroneous are the
+estimated distances in old navigators, who could only compute by the
+dead reckoning, or the log. --E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[47] The course from Melinda to Calicut is about E. N. E.
+the former being about three degrees to the S. and the latter almost
+eleven degrees to the N. of the line.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Calicut is a city on the coast of Malabar, a province of the
+second India, which begins at the mount of Delhi, and ends at Cape
+Comory, being sixty- one leagues in length, and fifteen leagues
+broad[48]. The whole of this country is very low, and apt to be
+covered with water, having many islands in its rivers, which flow
+into the Indian Sea. This country of Malabar is divided from the
+kingdom of Narsinga by a very high hill. The Indians report that this
+land of Malabar was covered by the sea of old, which then reached to
+the foot of the hills, and thence to a hill, where now the islands of
+the Maldives are found, which were then firm land; and that in after
+times it destroyed that latter country, and laid bare the country of
+Malabar, in which are many pleasant and rich cities, dependent upon
+trade, which they carry on principally with Calicut, which exceeds
+all cities of our days in riches and in vice. Its foundation and rise
+was as follows: In ancient times, this country of Malabar was
+entirely ruled by one king, who dwelt in the city of <i>Coulan</i> . In
+the reign of the last king of this race,
+named <i>Saranaperimal</i> [49], who died 600 years ago, the Moors of
+Mecca discovered India, and came to the province of Malabar, then
+inhabited by idolaters, and governed by an idolatrous king. From the
+time of the coming of these Moors, they began to reckon their years
+as we do, from the birth of our Saviour[50]. After the coming of the
+Moors into Malabar, they insinuated themselves so much into the
+confidence of the before-mentioned king, that he became a convert to
+their law, renouncing the religion of his country, and embracing
+Mahometism with such zeal, that he resolved to go and end his days in
+the temple of Mecca. Having thus resolved, out of love to the
+Mahometan sect, to abandon his kingdom, he called his kindred
+together, and divided all his territories among them, reserving only
+twelve leagues of country near the place where he intended to embark,
+not then inhabited, which he bestowed upon one of his cousins who
+acted as his page. To this kinsman he gave his sword and turban, as
+ensigns of dignity; commanding all the other nobles, among whom he
+had distributed the rest of his territories, to obey this person as
+their emperor, the kings of Coulan and Cananor only excepted; whom
+also, and all the others, he debarred from coining money, which was
+only to be done by the king of Calicut. Having thus given away his
+whole dignities and possessions, and set every thing in order, he
+embarked from the place where Calicut now stands; and because this
+king embarked from that place on his pilgrimage to Mecca, the Moors
+have ever since held Calicut in so high devotion, that they and all
+their posterity would never take their lading from any other port.
+From that time forwards, they discontinued trade with the port of
+Coulan, which they had used formerly, and that port therefore fell to
+ruin; especially after the building of Calicut, and the settlement of
+many Moors in that place[51].</p>
+<blockquote>[48] This vague account of the extent of Malabar is
+erroneous or corrupt, as sixty-one Portuguese leagues would barely
+reach from Cape Comorin to Calicut. The extreme length of the western
+maritime vale of India, from Cambay to Cape Comorin, exceeds 250
+Portuguese leagues.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[49] The proper name of this prince who is said to have
+thus divided the kingdom of Malabar, was
+Shermanoo-Permaloo.--Clark.</blockquote>
+I. 395.
+<blockquote>[50] This must be erroneous, as the Mahometans reckon
+from the year of the Hegira, or flight of Mahomet from Mecca, which
+commences in 622 of the Christian era.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[51] This story seems an Arabian tale, perhaps partly
+founded upon some real revolution in the government of Malabar. But
+it would much exceed the bounds of a note to enter upon disquisitions
+relative to Indian history.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>As the Moors are merchants of most extensive dealings, they have
+rendered Calicut, as the centre of their trade, the richest mart of
+all the Indies; in which is to be found all the spices, drugs,
+nutmegs, and other things that can be desired, all kinds of precious
+stones, pearls and seed-pearls, musk, sanders, aguila, fine dishes of
+earthen ware, lacker[52], gilded coffers, and all the fine things of
+China, gold, amber, wax, ivory, fine and coarse cotton goods, both
+white and dyed of many colours, much raw and twisted silk, stuffs of
+silk and gold, cloth of gold, cloth of tissue, grain, scarlets, silk
+carpets, copper, quicksilver, vermilion, alum, coral, rose-water, and
+all kinds of conserves. Thus, every kind of merchandize from all
+parts of the world is to be found in this place; which, moreover, is
+very quiet, being situated along the coast, which is almost open and
+very dangerous. Calicut is surrounded by many gardens and orchards,
+producing all the herbs and fruits of this country in great
+abundance, having also many palms and other sorts of trees, and
+abounds in excellent water. This part of India produces but little
+rice, which is a principal article of food in these parts, as wheat
+is with us; but it procures abundance of that and all other kinds of
+provisions from other countries. The city is large, but the dwellings
+consist only of straw huts; their idol temples, and chapels, and the
+kings palace excepted, which are: built of stone and lime and covered
+with tiles; for, by their laws, no others are permitted to build
+their houses of any other material than straw. At this time, Calicut
+was inhabited by idolaters of many sects, and by many Moorish
+merchants, some of whom were so rich as to be owners of fifty ships.
+These ships are made without nails, their planks being sewed together
+with ropes of <i>cayro</i> , made of the fibres of the cocoa-nut husk,
+pitched all over, and are flat-bottomed, without keels. Every winter
+there are at least six hundred ships in this harbour, and the shore
+is such, that their ships can be easily drawn up for repairs.</p>
+<blockquote>[52] Laker is a kind of gum that proceedeth of the ant.
+This marginal note, in Lichefild's translation of Castaneda,
+indicates the animal origin of lac, which has been elucidated of late
+by Dr Roxburgh.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>"The subjects of the following digression are so intimately
+connected with the first establishment of the Portuguese in India, as
+to justify its introduction in this place, which will greatly
+elucidate the narrative of Castaneda; and its length did not admit of
+being inserted in the form of notes. It is chiefly due to the
+ingenious and Reverend James Stanier Clarke, in his Origin and
+Progress of Maritime Discovery, extracted by him from various
+sources."</p>
+<p>"The name of this country, Malabar, is said to be derived
+from <i>ulyam</i> , which signifies, in the original language of that
+part of India,  <i>skirting the bottom of the hills</i> , corrupted
+into Maleyam or Maleam, whence probably came Mulievar, and Mala-bar.
+In a MS. account of Malabar, it is said that little more than 2300
+years ago, the sea came up to the foot of the <i>Sukien</i>  mountains,
+or the western <i>gauts</i> . The emerging of the country from the
+waters is fabulously related to have been occasioned by the piety or
+penitence of Puresram Rama, who prayed to <i>Varauna</i> , the God of
+the ocean, to give him a track of land to bestow on the Bramins.
+Varauna accordingly commanded the sea to withdraw from
+the <i>Gowkern</i> , a hill near Mangalore, all the way to Cape
+Comorin; which new land long remained marshy and scarcely habitable,
+and the original settlers were forced to abandon it on account of the
+numerous serpents by which it was infested: But they afterwards
+returned, being instructed to propitiate the serpents by worshipping
+them."</p>
+<p>"At first this country was divided into four <i>Tookrees</i>  or
+provinces, these into <i>Naadhs</i>  or districts, and these again
+into <i>Khunds</i>  or small precincts. The Bramins established a kind
+of republican or aristocratical government, under a few principal
+chiefs; but jealousies and disturbances taking place, they procured
+a <i>Permaul</i>  or chief governor from the prince of Chaldesh, a
+sovereignty in the southern Carnatic: Yet it is more likely that this
+sovereign took advantage of the divisions among the chiefs of
+Malabar, to reduce them under his authority. These permauls or
+viceroys were for a long while changed every twelve years; till at
+length one of them, named Sheo-Ram, Cheruma Perumal, or Shermanoo
+Permaloo, the Sarana-perimal of Castaneda, became so popular that he
+set his master  <i>Kishen Rao</i> , the rajah of Chaldesh, at defiance,
+and established his own authority in Malabar. An army was sent into
+Malabar to reduce the country again to obedience, but it was
+defeated, and from this event, which is said to have happened 1000
+years ago, all the rajahs, chief <i>nayres</i> , and other lords of
+Malabar, date the sovereignty and independence of their ancestors in
+that country."</p>
+<p>"After some time, Shermanoo-Permaloo, either became weary of his
+situation, or from attachment to the Mahometan religion, resolved to
+make a division of Malabar among his dependents, from whom the
+present chieftains are descended. Such is the current story among the
+inhabitants of Malabar; yet it is more probable that his dependent
+chieftains, disgusted with his conversion to the religion of Mahomet,
+revolted from his authority, and contrived this story of his
+voluntary surrender and division of his dominions, to justify their
+own assumptions. After this division of his kingdom, it is said that
+an <i>erary</i> , or person of the cast of cow-herds, originally from
+the banks of the Cavery, near Errode in the Carnatic, who had been a
+chief instrument of the success of Shermanoo-Permaloo in the war
+against rajah Kishen Rao, made application to Shermanoo for some
+support. Having very little left to give away, Shermanoo made him a
+grant of his own place of abode at Calicut, and gave him his sword;
+ankle-rings, and other insignia of command, and presented him with
+water and flowers, the ancient symbols of a transfer of property. It
+is said that this cowherd rajah was ordained principal sovereign over
+the other petty princes among whom Malabar was divided, with the
+title of Zamorin, and was authorized by Shermanoo to extend his
+dominion over all the other chieftains by force of arms. His
+descendants have ever since endeavoured, on all occasions, to enforce
+this pretended grant, which they pretend to hold by the tenure of
+possessing the sword of Shermanoo Permaloo, and which they carefully
+preserve as a precious relic."</p>
+<p>"From the period of the abdication of Shermanoo, to that of the
+arrival of the Portuguese at Calicut, the Mahomedan religion had made
+considerable progress in Malabar; and the Arabian merchants received
+every encouragement from the Samoories or Zamorins, as they made
+Calicut the staple of their Indian trade, and brought large sums of
+money yearly to that place, for the purchase of spiceries and other
+commodities. As the rajahs of Cochin and other petty sovereignties on
+the coast, were exceedingly jealous of the superior riches and power
+of the zamorins, and of the monopoly of trade enjoyed by Calicut,
+they gave every encouragement to the Portuguese to frequent their
+ports; from whence arose a series of warfare by sea and land, which
+has finally reduced them all under subjection to the Europeans."</p>
+<p>"According to an Arabian author, <i>Zeirreddien Mukhdom</i> , who is
+supposed to have been sent to assist the zamorins and the Mahomedans
+in India, in their wars with the Portuguese, Malabar is then said to
+have been divided among a multiplicity of independent princes or
+rajahs, whom he calls  <i>Hakims</i> , some of whom commanded over one
+or two hundred men, and others one, ten, fifteen, or even as high as
+thirty, thousand, or upwards. The three greatest powers at that time
+were, the <i>Colastrian</i> [53] rajah to the north, the zamorin of
+Calicut in the centre, and a rajah in the south, who ruled from
+Coulan, Kalum, or Coulim, to Cape Comorin, comprehending the country
+now belonging to the rajah of Travancore."</p>
+<blockquote>[53] From the sequel in the narrative of Castaneda, this
+Colastrian rajah seems to have been the sovereign of
+Cananor.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>"We now return from this digression, to follow the narrative of
+the Portuguese Discovery and Conquest of India, as related by
+Castaneda."</p>
+<p>So great was the trade and population of Calicut and the
+surrounding country, and the revenues of its sovereign through these
+circumstances, that he was able to raise a force of thirty thousand
+men in a single day, and could even bring an hundred thousand men
+into the field, completely equipt for war, in three days. This
+prince, in the language of the country, was styled the Zamorin, or
+Samoryn, which signifies Emperor; as he was supreme over the other
+two kings of Malabar, the king of Coulan and the king of Cananor.
+There were indeed other princes in this country, who were called
+kings, but were not so. This zamorin or king of Calicut was a bramin,
+as his predecessors had been, the bramins being priests among the
+Malabars. It is an ancient rule and custom among these people, that
+all their kings must die in a pagoda[54], or temple of their idols;
+and that there must always be a king resident in the principal
+pagoda, to serve those idols: Wherefore, when the king that serves in
+the temple comes to die, he who then reigns must leave his government
+of temporal affairs to take his place in the temple; upon which
+another is elected to take his place, and to succeed in ruling the
+kingdom. If the king who is in possession of the temporal authority
+should refuse to retire to the pagoda, on the death of the king who
+officiated in spirituals, he is constrained to do so, however
+unwilling.</p>
+<blockquote>[54] This word pagoda, applied by the Portuguese, to
+denote an Indian, temple, is said to be derived from a Malabar or
+Indian word,  <i>Pagabadi</i> , signifying any idol.--Astl., I.
+51.</blockquote>
+<p>The kings and nobles of Malabar are of a brown complexion, and go
+naked from the waist upwards, all the under parts of their bodies
+being clothed in silk or cotton Vestments; yet they sometimes wear
+short gowns on their upper parts, called <i>basus</i> , of rich silk,
+or cloth of gold, or of scarlet, splendidly ornamented with precious
+stones, of all which the zamorin hath great store. They shave their
+beards, leaving only the hair on their upper lips, and do not shave
+the head like the Turks. In general, the natives of this country,
+even of the higher ranks, use little state in their households, and
+are very sparing in their diet; but the zamorin is served with
+considerable splendour. These kings or nobles never marry; but every
+one has a mistress of the Nayre cast, which, among the Malabars, are
+considered as the gentry; even the zamorin has only a mistress, who
+has a house of her own near the palace, and a liberal allowance for
+the charges of her household and maintenance at her own disposal.
+Upon any dislike or difference, he may always leave her for another.
+The children are only considered as the offspring of the mother, and
+have no right or title to inherit the kingdom, or any thing else
+belonging to the father; and when grown up, are only held in that
+rank or estimation which belongs to the blood or parentage of their
+mother. Brothers succeed to brothers; and in lack of these, the sons
+of their sisters, who do not marry, and have no certainty respecting
+the fathers of their children; as they are very free and dissolute in
+their manners, choosing paramours as they please.</p>
+<p>These sisters of the zamorin, and other kings of Malabar, have
+handsome allowances to live upon; and when any of them reaches the
+age of ten, their kindred send for a young man of the Nayre cast, out
+of the kingdom, and give him great presents to induce him to initiate
+the young virgin; after which he hangs a jewel round her neck, which
+she wears all the rest of her life, as a token that she is now at
+liberty to dispose of herself to any one she pleases as long as she
+lives.</p>
+<p>When these kings are at war with each other, they often go
+personally into the field, and even join personally in fight upon
+occasion. When one of them dies, the body is carried out into the
+fields, and burned on a pile of sanders, and of another sweet
+smelling wood called <i>aguila</i> , all his brothers and kindred, and
+all the nobles of the country being present at the ceremony; which is
+uniformly postponed to the third day after death, that all may have
+time to gather from a distance, and may have an opportunity of being
+assured whether his death was natural, or caused by violence: Since,
+if he died by the hand of any one, all are bound to prosecute
+revenge. After the body is burnt, and the ashes buried, the whole
+company shaves every part of their bodies, even to the youngest child
+of these idolaters. This is their token of mourning; and during the
+ensuing thirteen days, they all refrain from chewing betel, any one
+infringing this law being punished by cutting his lips. During this
+period of thirteen days, he who is to succeed to the throne must
+abstain from all exercise of government, that any one who pleases may
+have an opportunity of urging any valid objection why he should not
+acquire the vacant government. After, this the successor is sworn
+before all the nobles of the country, to preserve and enforce all the
+laws and customs of their ancestors, to pay the debts of his
+predecessor, and to use his utmost endeavours to recover any portion
+of the kingdom that may have been lost. While taking this oath,
+having his sword in his left hand, he holds in his right hand a
+burning candle, on which is a gold ring, which he touches with his
+fingers. After this they throw some grains of rice over him, using
+many other ceremonies, and numerous prayers, and then worship the sun
+three times. When all these ceremonies are gone through, all
+the <i>Caymayles</i> , or lords of noble birth, taking hold of the
+candle, take an oath to be true and faithful subjects to the new
+king.</p>
+<p>After the end of the thirteen days mourning, they all begin to
+chew betel, and to eat flesh and fish as formerly, the new king alone
+excepted. He is bound to mourn for his predecessor during a whole
+year, chewing no betel, eating no flesh or fish, neither shaving his
+beard nor cutting; his nails during all that time. He must eat only
+once a-day, washing himself all over before this single meal, and
+devoting certain hours of every day to prayer. After the expiry of
+the year, he uses a certain ceremony for the soul of the king his
+predecessor, much like our solemn dirge; at which 100,000 persons are
+often assembled, among whom he distributes large alms. When this
+ceremony is ended, the prince is confirmed as inheritor of the
+kingdom, and all the people depart.</p>
+<p>The zamorin of Calicut, and the other kings of Malabar, have each
+one especial officer, to whom the administration of justice is
+confided, and whose authority in all matters of government is as
+ample as that of the king himself. The soldiers employed by these
+kings are called <i>Nayres</i> , who are all gentlemen, and who follow
+no other office or employ but that of fighting when needed. They are
+all idolaters, armed with bows, arrows, spears, daggers of a hooked
+form, and targets, and they march in a very regular and warlike
+manner; but they go entirely naked and barefooted, wearing only a
+piece of painted cotton cloth, which reaches from the girdle to the
+knees, and a cloth or kerchief on their heads. All these men live
+continually at the charge of the king and nobles of the country, from
+whom they have small stipends for their maintenance; and they esteem
+themselves so highly on account of their gentility of blood, that
+they will not touch an husbandman, nor allow any such to enter into
+their dwellings. When any husbandman goes through the streets they
+must continually call out aloud <i>hoo hoo</i> ; for if commanded by a
+nayre to make way, they may be slain if they refuse. The king cannot
+raise any one to the rank of a <i>nayre</i> , who are all such by
+descent. These <i>nayres</i>  serve very faithfully under those who
+give them their wages, not sparing by day or night to use their best
+endeavours to serve their chiefs, nor making any account of want of
+food or sleep, or of fatigue, when their service is required or may
+be effectual. Their expences are so small, that on half-a-crown,
+which is their only monthly pay, they can sufficiently maintain
+themselves and a boy, whom each has as a servant.</p>
+<p>By the laws of this country, these nayres cannot marry, so that no
+one has any certain or acknowledged son or father; all their children
+being born of mistresses, with each of whom three or four nayres
+cohabit by agreement among themselves. Each one of this confraternity
+dwells a day in his turn with the joint mistress, counting from noon
+of one day to the same time of the next, after which he departs, and
+another comes for the like time. They thus spend their lives without
+the care or trouble of wives and children, yet maintain their
+mistresses well according to their rank. Any one may forsake his
+mistress at his pleasure; and in like manner, the mistress may refuse
+admittance to any one o&pound; her lovers when she pleases. These
+mistresses are all gentlewomen of the Nayre cast; and the nayres,
+besides being prohibited from marrying, must not attach themselves to
+any woman of a different rank. Considering that there are always
+several men attached to one woman, the nayres never look upon any of
+these children born of their mistresses as belonging to them, however
+strong a resemblance may subsist, and all inheritances among the
+nayres go to their brothers, or the sons of their sisters, born of
+the same mothers, all relationship being counted only by female
+consanguinity and descent. This strange law prohibiting marriage, was
+established, that they might have neither wives or children on whom
+to fix their love and attachment; and that being free from all family
+cares, they might the more willingly devote themselves entirely to
+warlike service. And the more to animate these gentlemen in the
+service of the wars, and to encourage them to continue in the order
+of nayres, they are privileged from all imprisonments, and from the
+punishment of death on all ordinary occasions, except for the
+following crimes; killing another nayre, or a cow which is an object
+of worship, sleeping or eating with an ordinary woman, or speaking
+evil of the king. When the king has received authentic information of
+any of these offences having been committed, he issues a written
+mandate to one of the nayres, commanding him to take two or three
+other nayres in his company, and to slay the nayre who has committed
+this offence against the laws. In obedience to this warrant, they
+attack him with their swords and put him to death where-ever they
+happen to find him, and then affix the royal order upon his body,
+that all may know the reason of his death.</p>
+<p>It is not permitted to any nayre to assume arms, or to enter into
+any combat, till he has been armed as a knight. When a nayre becomes
+seven years old, he is set to learn the use of all kinds of weapons,
+their masters first pulling and twisting their joints to make them
+supple, and then teaching them to fence and handle their arms
+adroitly. Their principal weapons are swords and targets; and these
+teachers, who are graduates in the use of the weapons, are
+called <i>Panycaes</i> , who are much esteemed among the nayres, and
+all their former scholars, however advanced in life or however high
+their dignity, are bound at all times to give them due honour and
+reverence when they meet; likewise, every  <i>nayre</i>  is obliged to
+take lessons from these professors for two months yearly, all their
+lives: By this means they are very skilful in the use of their
+weapons, in which they take great pride. When a nayre desires to be
+armed as a knight, he presents himself before the king, accompanied
+by all his kindred and friends, and makes an offering of sixty gold
+fannoms [55]. On which he is asked by the king if he is willing to
+observe and follow the laws and customs of the nayres, to which he
+answers in the affirmative. Then the king commands him to be girt
+with a sword, and laying his right hand on his head, utters certain
+words as if praying in so low a voice that he is not heard. The king
+then embraces the young nayre, saying aloud in their language, "Take
+good care to defend the Bramins and their kine." On this the nayre
+falls down and does reverence to the king; and from that time he is
+considered as a knight, or member of the fraternity of nayres. When
+any of the nayres enters into the peculiar service of the king or of
+any individual noble, he binds himself to die with and for him, and
+they keep their oaths. For, if their master should happen to be slain
+in any war or otherwise, they will fight till they are all slain; and
+if they cannot accomplish their purpose at the time, or happen to be
+absent at the slaughter of their master, they go afterwards in search
+of the person who has done the deed, and never leave off till they
+are themselves slain.</p>
+<blockquote>[55] This is described by Castaneda as a coin equal in
+value to three crowns.</blockquote>
+<p>The Malabars are much given to soothsaying, and have lucky and
+unlucky days. They worship the sun moon and stars, the fire, cows,
+and the first thing they meet on going out of a morning, believing
+every manner of vanity. The devil is often in them, but they say it
+is one of their gods or <i>pagods</i> , as they call him. But whosoever
+or whatsoever it may be, it constrains them to utter terrible words,
+which are believed by the king. When the devil enters into a nayre,
+he goes with a naked sword before the king, shaking and trembling and
+giving himself many wounds, saying, "I am such or such a god, and am
+come to tell thee such and such a thing," crying out, and behaving
+himself like a madman or one possessed. If the king makes any doubt
+of what he says, he continues to roar still louder and to slash
+himself more severely, till the king gives credit to his assertions.
+There are other tribes or lineages of people among the Malabars, of
+various sects and divers customs, of whom it were too tedious to
+speak in this place, who are all under obedience to the several kings
+and nobles. The Moors alone are exempted from this obedience, on
+account of the large customs they pay for their merchandize, owing to
+which they are held in high estimation at Calicut.</p>
+<p>Having come to anchor on the outside of the bar or reef of
+Calicut, the general sent one of the Portuguese convicts on shore, in
+one of the almadias which had conducted the ships to this port;
+instructing him to see what kind of a place it was, and to make trial
+of what kind of a reception might be looked for, seeing we were
+Christians, and as the general believed that the people were likewise
+Christians. When this man landed, he was immediately surrounded by
+great numbers of the natives, staring at him as a stranger. These
+people asked of the fishermen what man this was whom they had brought
+on shore? to which they answered, that they supposed him to be a
+Moor, and that he belonged to the three ships which were riding
+without the bar. But the people of Calicut wondered much to see a
+person who was clothed so very differently from the Moors who came
+from the Red Sea. Some of these people who had knowledge of Arabic
+spoke to this man, but he could not understand or answer them, at
+which they were much astonished. Yet, believing him to be a Moor,
+they conducted him to a house where two Moors dwelt who came
+originally from Tunis and had established themselves in Calicut. On
+his appearance, one of these Moors whose name was Bontaybo[56], who
+could speak Spanish, immediately recognized him for a Portuguese,
+having often seen people of our nation at Tunis in the reign of King
+John, in a ship named La Reyna which often traded to that port. As
+soon as Bontaybo saw the Portuguese, he exclaimed in Spanish, <i>Devil
+take you, what brought you here</i> ? He farther inquired which way he
+had travelled so as to arrive at Calicut? To this the banished man
+answered, telling how many ships our general had brought with him; at
+which Bontaybo was much amazed, wondering how they could possibly
+come by sea from Portugal to India. He then asked what they sought at
+so great a distance from home? And was answered that they came in
+search of Christians and spices. Bontaybo then asked why the kings of
+France and Spain and the Doge of Venice had not sent their ships
+likewise? Because, said our man, the king of Portugal would not allow
+them. To this Bontaybo said, he was much in the right. After some
+farther conversation in this way, Bontaybo gave him good
+entertainment, commanding certain cakes of wheat flour and honey,
+called <i>apes</i>  by the Malabars, to be set before him; and then
+said that he would accompany him to the ships to wait upon the
+general.</p>
+<blockquote>[56] By De Faria, this man is named Monzayde.--Astl.I.
+30.</blockquote>
+<p>Bontaybo accordingly came on board our general, whom he
+immediately addressed in Spanish, saying, "Good luck! good luck! many
+rubies, many emeralds. Thou art bound to give God thanks for having
+brought thee where there is abundance of all sorts of spices,
+precious stones, and all the other riches of the world." On hearing
+this, the general and all the people were greatly astonished, not
+expecting to meet any one so far from home who understood their
+language; and even shed tears of joy for this happy circumstance, and
+their safe arrival. They all then joined in humble and hearty thanks
+to the Almighty, by whose favour and assistance alone this great
+happiness and good fortune had been accorded to them. The general
+embraced Bontaybo, whom he made to sit beside him, and questioned him
+if he were a Christian, and how he came to Calicut. Bontaybo told him
+frankly that he was a Moor from Tunis in Barbary, and had come to
+Calicut by way of Cairo and the Red Sea, and explained how he came to
+know the Portuguese, as has been already mentioned. He farther
+declared, that he had always been well disposed towards the
+Portuguese nation, having always found them worthy of confidence and
+friendship in all their dealings; and, having been a friend to them
+in times past, he would not discontinue his good will, and was ready
+and willing to do every thing in his power to serve them, and to
+assist them in the objects for which they had now come to Calicut.
+The general gave him many thanks for his good will, and promised to
+reward him liberally for the friendly aid he might give to him and
+his expedition, expressing his extreme satisfaction at being so
+fortunate as to meet such a person in this place, believing that God
+had sent him here to promote the great objects of this voyage, for
+which he passed through so many and long continued dangers, being
+quite sensible that he must have reaped little profit from all his
+labours without such friendly assistance.</p>
+<p>The general then requested information from Bontaybo, as to the
+character of the king or zamorin of Calicut, and whether, in his
+opinion, he would willingly receive him as ambassador from the king
+of Portugal. Bontaybo represented the zamorin as a prince of good and
+honourable dispositions, who, he was convinced, would gladly receive
+the general as ambassador from a foreign king; more especially, if
+the objects of his voyage were to establish a trade with Calicut, and
+if the general had brought with him any merchandize proper for that
+purpose; since the advantages which the zamorin derived from the
+customs upon trade formed the chief source of his revenue. He farther
+informed the general, that the zamorin resided at this time at
+Panane, a village on the coast about five leagues from Calicut; and
+advised that the general should send a message there to notify his
+arrival, and the reasons of his coming. The general was well pleased
+with this advice and presented certain gifts to Bontaybo, along with
+whom he sent two of his men to Calicut, requesting Bontaybo to direct
+them on their way to Panane, which he did accordingly. When these
+messengers came into the presence of the zamorin, one of them, named
+ <i>Fernan Martyn</i> , declared to him, by means of an interpreter,
+"That he waited upon his highness on the part of his general, who had
+arrived in the port of Calicut with three ships, having been sent
+there by the king of Portugal with letters to his highness, which the
+general begged permission to present to him." On hearing this
+message, and before giving any answer, the zamorin commanded each of
+the two messengers to be presented with a piece cotton cloth and two
+pieces of silk, such as he used in his own apparel; after which he
+inquired of Fernan Martyn what king it was who had sent him these
+letters, and how far his dominions were from thence. Fernan fully
+answered these inquiries, adding, that he was a Christian prince, and
+that those whom he had sent in the ships now at Calicut were
+Christians; and related what great and numerous dangers they had
+passed through during their voyage. The zamorin was much amazed at
+the incidents of the voyage which Fernan related at some length, and
+expressed his satisfaction that so powerful a prince of the
+Christians should think of sending an ambassador to him from so great
+a distance. He then desired Fernan to inform the general, that he
+heartily welcomed him and his people into his dominions, advising him
+to bring his ships to anchor near a village called <i>Pandarane</i> 
+some way below where the ships then lay, as a far better harbour than
+Calicut which is an open and very dangerous road for shipping. The
+zamorin desired likewise that the general might come by land from
+that place to Calicut, where he would be ready to receive him. After
+this, the zamorin sent a pilot to navigate the ships to the harbour
+of Pandarane; but, on coming to the bar of that port, the general did
+not think it advisable to enter so far within the harbour as the
+pilot proposed, fearing lest he might expose himself to danger by
+reposing too great confidence in these people, and placing himself
+too much within their power. In this he acted with much prudent
+foresight, by which he wisely avoided the injuries which were
+afterwards attempted against him at this place.</p>
+<p>On his arrival at Pandarane, the general received a message from
+the kutwal[57] of Calicut, intimating that he and other nobles
+awaited him on shore by order of the zamorin, to conduct him to the
+city, and that he had permission to land whenever he pleased[58]. But
+as the day drew near a close, the general returned an answer excusing
+himself from landing that night. He immediately called a council of
+the other captains and principal officers of the fleet, to take their
+advice on the present emergency, to whom he intimated his intention
+of going to visit the king of Calicut on purpose to settle a treaty
+of trade and amity. Paulo de Gama, his brother, strongly objected to
+his venturing on shore; alleging that although the natives of the
+place were Christians, as they still believed them, yet there were
+many Moors among them who were much to be feared as his mortal
+enemies; since these people at Mozambique and Mombaza, where they had
+only passed by their ports, endeavoured to destroy them all, they
+were much more to be feared at Calicut where we had come on purpose
+to enter into competition with them in trade, by which their profits
+would be diminished. It was therefore the more probable that they
+would use every effort to destroy the general, on whom our whole hope
+of safety and success depended; and, however much the zamorin might
+regret the commission of such a deed, he could not restore him to
+life: besides which, the Moors were inhabitants of the place, where
+they had much interest, whereas the general was an utter stranger.
+Likewise, it was quite impossible for them to be assured that the
+king of Calicut might not have leagued with the Moors for his death
+or captivity; either of which would ruin their voyage and prove the
+destruction of them all, and all the toils and dangers they had
+passed through would prove in vain. To prevent all this danger, he
+strongly urged that the general should on no account go on shore, but
+should depute one of the captains, or some other person in the fleet
+in his stead; alleging that commanders in chief ought never to
+subject themselves to personal danger, unless in cases of the most
+urgent necessity.</p>
+<blockquote>[57] The title of kutwal is of Arabic origin, and
+properly signifies the governor of a fort or castle, but the office
+may be different in different places. In some instances, the kutwal
+seems to have been the deputy-governor, sheriff, or judge of a
+town.--Astl.I. 30.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[58] Such are the expressions used by Lichefild; but I
+suspect the sense here ought to have been, That the kutwal required
+De Gama to land immediately, that he might go to Calicut, on purpose
+to be presented to the zamorin.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>All the officers were of the same opinion. But the general
+answered, that even if he were perfectly assured that his landing
+were to occasion his instant death, he would not refrain from going
+to visit the king of Calicut, to endeavour to settle amity and trade,
+and that he might procure some spices and other commodities from the
+place, by means of which their discovery of Calicut might be proved
+on their return into Portugal: As otherwise, if we returned without
+any of the productions of the Indies, their discovery would be
+discredited, and their honour and veracity called in question. "Think
+not therefore," said he, "but I will rather die, than leave it in
+hazard that the long time we have already spent, and may yet employ,
+shall be lost, and others sent to ascertain the truth of our
+discoveries, while envious persons may have it in their power to
+discredit our services. Neither do I run into such hazard of death,
+nor expose you to such dangers as you suppose; seeing that I am going
+to a city inhabited by Christians, and to a king who wishes the
+concourse of many merchants in his dominions, as the more of these
+that frequent his port so much the greater must be his revenue from
+the customs upon trade. It is not my intention to stay long on shore,
+so as to give opportunity to the Moors to complot against me; as I
+propose only to talk with the king and to return in three days, by
+which time you may have every thing in readiness for our departure.
+If I should have the good fortune, by the will of God, to establish
+trade and amity with the king of Calicut, I would not exchange the
+honour and credit of that transaction for any treasure that could be
+given me; neither can the king of Calicut settle this affair so well
+with any other person, as he will honour me the more for being the
+captain-general of this fleet and the ambassador of our king. Should
+any other go in my stead, the king might look upon himself as
+slighted and insulted, under an idea that I do not esteem him worthy
+to be visited by myself, or that I do not trust him on his word and
+assurance. Besides, it is not possible for me to give sufficiently
+ample instructions to any one I might send, to enable him to do what
+may be necessary under every circumstance that may arise, as I myself
+might do. Even if it should chance that they kill me, it were better
+this should happen in the discharge of my duty, than that I should
+preserve my life by neglecting to perform it. You, my friends, remain
+at sea in good ships: And if you hear of any mischance befalling me,
+my desire is that you shall immediately depart and carry home news of
+our discovery. As for our present subject, there need be no farther
+argument; as I am determined, with the blessing of God, to proceed to
+visit the king at Calicut."</p>
+<p>When this determination was made known the captains made no
+farther objections, and chose out twelve persons to accompany him,
+among whom were Diego Diaz his secretary, Fernan Martinez the
+interpreter, John de Sala who was afterwards treasurer of the Indies,
+and nine others; and Paulo de Gama, his brother, was appointed to act
+as captain-general during his absence. The general, before going on
+shore, gave pointed orders that no person should on any account be
+permitted to come on board the ships; but that all who were desirous
+of any intercourse with them should remain in their boats or
+almadias. He likewise directed that Nicholas Coello should come every
+day with his boat well armed as near the shore as he could with
+safety, on purpose to keep up an intercourse between the ships and
+himself. All these things being settled, the general went on shore
+with his twelve attendants, all in their best attire; their boat
+furnished with much ordnance, dressed out with flags and streamers,
+and sounding trumpets all the way from the ships to the shore. On
+landing, the general was received with every demonstration of respect
+by the kutwal, attended by 200 nayres, and a great concourse of
+natives, both of the country and from the city of Calicut. After
+compliments were passed, the general was placed in an <i>andor</i>  or
+litter, which the king of Calicut had sent for his use. In this
+country it is not customary to travel on horseback, but in these
+andors. This vehicle is like a horse-litter, except that they are
+very plain with low sides, and are carried by four men on their
+shoulders, who run post in this manner, carrying the king or any
+noble person when on a journey, and going at a great rate. The person
+in the andor may either sit or lie as he pleases; and certain
+servants carry umbrellas, which they call <i>bueys</i> , to shelter the
+person in the andor from the sun and rain. There are other andors
+which have a curved cane over them like a bow, and are so light that
+they can be carried by two men.</p>
+<p>The general being mounted in one andor and the kutwal in another,
+they set out for a town called Capocate[59], all the rest being on
+foot; but the kutwal appointed certain people of the country to carry
+the baggage of our men, which was restored to them at Capocate, where
+the party stopped for refreshment, the general and his people being
+in one house and the kutwal in another. Our people were here provided
+with boiled fish, with rice and butter, and some of the country
+fruits which are very good, though quite different from ours. One of
+these fruits is called <i>lacas</i> , and another Mango, and they have
+figs likewise. The water was excellent, and as good as any in
+Portugal. After resting and refreshing themselves at Capocate, the
+general and his suite were embarked in a vessel called
+an <i>ensangada</i> , consisting of two almadias lashed side by side.
+The kutwal and his train embarked in many other boats; and the whole
+went up a river which discharges itself into the sea at this place.
+The numbers of people that came to the river side to view our men as
+they passed was quite countless, by which it appears that the country
+was well inhabited. After going about a league up this river, our
+people came to a place where many large ships were drawn up on the
+shore. The whole party here disembarked and proceeded by land, the
+general and kutwal in andors as before, being surrounded by thousands
+who were curious to see the strangers, even many women pressing into
+the crowd with their children slung at their backs.</p>
+<blockquote>[59] In Astley, I. 81. this place is named
+Kapokats.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>From this place the kutwal carried the general to one of their
+pagodas or idol temples, into which they entered, and which the
+kutwal said was a church of great holiness. This the general believed
+to be the case, fancying it to be a church of the Christians; which
+he the more readily believed, as he saw seven little bells hung over
+the principal door. In front of this entry, there stood a pillar made
+of wire as tall as the mast of a ship, on the top of which was a
+weathercock likewise made of wire. This church was as large as a
+moderate convent, all built of freestone, and covered, or vaulted
+over with brick, having a fine outward appearance as if its inside
+were of splendid workmanship. Our general was much pleased with this
+church, as he actually believed himself in a Christian country, and
+gladly entered along with the kutwal. They were received by the
+priests, who were naked from the waist upwards, having a kind of
+petticoats of cotton hanging down from the girdle to their knees, and
+pieces of calico covering their arm-pits, their heads legs and feet
+bare. They were distinguished by wearing certain threads over their
+right shoulders, which crossed over their breasts under their left
+arms, much in the way in which our priests used formerly to wear
+their stoles when they said mass. These men are called kafrs[60], and
+are idolaters, serving as priests in the pagodas of Malabar; and on
+the general going into the pagoda, they took holy water with
+a <i>sprinkle</i>  from a font, and threw it over the kutwal and him
+and their attendants. After this, they gave them powdered sandalwood
+to throw upon their heads, as used to be done amongst us with ashes;
+and they were directed to do the same on their arms. But our people,
+as being clothed, omitted this latter part of the ceremony, complying
+with the other.</p>
+<blockquote>[60] Kafr is an Arabic word, signifying an infidel or
+unbeliever; and is applied by the Mahometans to all who do not
+believe the doctrines of Mahomet, and especially to all who worship
+images, including the Roman Catholics. The priests mentioned in the
+text were obviously bramins. The origin of the term here used by
+mistake, was obviously from the interpretation of Bontaybo, the
+friendly Moor; and explains the mistake of De Gama in believing the
+Malabars to have been Christians. Bontaybo applied the same
+significant term of kafr to the image worshippers of all
+denominations, without discriminating one species of idolater from
+another.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In this pagoda they saw many images painted on the walls, some of
+which had monstrous teeth projecting an inch from their mouths, and
+some had four arms; all of them so ugly that they seemed like devils,
+which raised doubts among our people whether they were actually in a
+Christian church. In the middle of the pagoda stood a chapel, having
+a roof or dome of freestone like a tower, in one part of which was a
+door of wire, to which there led a flight of stone steps. On the
+inside of this tower an image was observed in a recess of the wall,
+which our men could not see distinctly, as the place was somewhat
+dark, and they were not permitted to go near, as none were allowed to
+approach except the priests. But from certain words and signs, our
+people understood this to be an image of the Virgin; on which the
+general and his attendants went upon their knees to say their
+prayers[61]. John de Sala, however, being very doubtful that this was
+not a Christian church, owing to the monstrous images on the walls,
+said, as he fell on his knees, " <i>If this be the devil, I worship
+God</i> ," on which the general looked at him with a smile. The kutwal
+and his people, as they approached the chapel, prostrated themselves
+three times on their faces with their hands extended before them,
+after which they arose and said their prayers standing.</p>
+<blockquote>[61] On this part of the text, the author, or the
+original translator, makes the following singular marginal
+reflection:--"The general deceived, committeth idolatry with the
+Devil."--E.</blockquote>
+<p>From this place they went forwards to the city of Calicut, and
+were taken at their arrival into another pagoda similar to the
+former. After this, on entering the city, the crowd was so great that
+they could hardly make their way through the streets. The general was
+astonished to see such multitudes, and praised GOD for having brought
+him in safety to this city, humbly beseeching his divine mercy so to
+guide him on his way that he might accomplish the objects of his
+expedition, and return safely into Portugal. At length the pressure
+of the crowd became so great that the bearers were unable to get
+forwards, and the whole company were forced to take shelter in a
+house. They were here joined by the kutwals brother, a nobleman who
+was sent by the king to accompany the general to the palace, and had
+many nayres along with him. The procession again set out, preceded by
+many trumpets and sacbuts sounding all the way; and one of the nayres
+carried a <i>caliver</i> , which he fired off at intervals. After they
+were joined by the kutwals brother, the mob gave way for the
+procession to pass, and shewed as much reverence as if the king
+himself had been present. There went in the procession at least 3000
+armed men, and the multitudes of spectators, in the streets, at the
+doors and windows, and on the roofs, were quite innumerable. The
+general was well pleased at his honourable reception, and said
+pleasantly to those of his company, " <i>They little think in Portugal
+how honourably we are received here</i> ."</p>
+<p>The procession arrived at the palace an hour before sunset. Though
+only constructed of earth, the palace was very extensive and seemed a
+handsome structure, having great numbers of trees interspersed among
+the different buildings, with pleasant gardens full of fine flowers
+and odoriferous plants, and many fountains; as the zamorin never goes
+out of the palace while resident in Calicut. On arriving at the
+palace, several caymals and other noblemen came out to receive the
+general, who led him to a large square immediately in front of the
+gates, whence they passed through four several courts, at the gate of
+each of which there were ten porters who were obliged to lay about
+them with sticks among the people to clear the way. On coming to the
+gate of the house in which the king resided, they were met by the
+chief bramin, or high priest of the royal household, a little old
+man, who embraced the general, and conducted him and his people into
+the palace. At this time the people pressed forwards with much
+eagerness to get a sight of the king, which they very seldom do as he
+goes very rarely out of the palace; and the multitude was so great
+that some of them were stifled in the throng, which would likewise
+have been the case with two of our men, if they had not gone on
+before, with the assistance of the porters, who severely hurt many of
+the mob, and forced them to make way. On passing the last gate, the
+general and his attendants entered along with the noblemen into a
+great hall, surrounded with seats of timber raised in rows above one
+another like our theatres, the floor being covered by a carpet of
+green velvet, and the walls hung with silk of various colours. The
+king was of a brown complexion, large stature, and well advanced in
+years. He lay on a sofa covered with a cloth of white silk and gold,
+and a rich canopy over his head. On his head he had a cap or mitre
+adorned with precious stones and pearls, and had jewels of the same
+kind in his ears. He wore a jacket of fine cotton cloth, having
+buttons of large pearls and the button-holes wrought with gold
+thread. About his middle he had a piece of a white calico, which came
+only down to his knees; and both his fingers and toes were adorned
+with many gold rings set with fine stones; his arms and legs were
+covered with many golden bracelets. Close to his sofa there stood a
+gold shallow bason on a gold stand, in which was <i>betel</i> , which
+the king chewed with salt and <i>areka</i> . This last is a kind of
+fruit about the size of a nut, and is chewed all over India to
+sweeten the breath, and is supposed to carry off phlegm from the
+stomach and to prevent thirst. The king had likewise a gold bason on
+a golden stand, into which he spat out the betel when chewed; and a
+gold fountain with water for washing his mouth. The king was served
+with betel by an old man who stood close to the sofa; all the others
+who were in the presence held their left hands to their mouths, that
+their breaths might not reach the king; and it is thought unseemly
+for any one to spit or sneeze in the presence.</p>
+<p>When the general entered the hall in which the king sat, he
+stooped or bowed down three times according to the custom of the
+country, lifting up his hands as one that praised God. The king
+immediately made signs for the general to draw near, and commanded
+him to be seated on one of the seats; and the rest of the Portuguese
+came forwards, making similar reverences, and were likewise commanded
+to sit down opposite the king. Water was then presented to all the
+company to wash their hands, which was very refreshing, for, though
+it was then winter, they were very hot. They were then presented with
+figs and jakas, and the king was much pleased to see them eat,
+laughing at them and conversing with the old man who served him with
+betel. Our people being thirsty, called for water, which was brought
+to them in a golden ewer, and they were directed to pour the water
+into their mouths as it is reckoned injurious to touch the cup with
+their lips. They accordingly did as they were directed; but some
+poured the water into their throats and fell a coughing, while others
+poured it beside upon their faces and clothes, which much amused the
+king. After this, the king desired the general by an interpreter, to
+speak to those who were present as to the purpose of his coming to
+Calicut. But the general was not satisfied with this, and signified
+that he was ambassador from the king of Portugal, a powerful prince,
+and that Christian princes were not used to receive the embassies of
+other sovereigns by means of a third person, but by themselves in
+person in the presence only of a few of their principal persons: and
+this being the usage of his country, he chose to deliver his message
+only to the king himself. The king agreed to this, and commanded the
+general and Fernan Martinez who acted as interpreter, to be conducted
+into another chamber, which was adorned with as much magnificence as
+the first.</p>
+<p>As soon as the king entered this chamber, he took his seat on a
+sofa, attended only by his interpreter, the chief bramin, the old man
+who served him with betel, and the comptroller of his household. The
+king then asked the general, from what part of the world he was come,
+and what were his desires. He answered, that he was ambassador from
+the king of Portugal, the most powerful of the Christian sovereigns
+in the west, both in extent of dominions, numbers of people, and
+riches. That he and his predecessors, hearing that there were
+Christian kings and princes in the Indies, of which the zamorin of
+Calicut was the chief, were exceedingly desirous of sending some of
+their captains to discover the way, that they might enter into
+friendship with the king of this country as brothers; and for this
+reason he had been sent to his highness: Not that the king his master
+had any need of his riches, having abundance already and more than
+was needed both of gold and silver and other valuable things. That
+all the former captains who had been sent at great charges upon this
+discovery, after having employed a year or more in vain and having
+consumed all their victuals, had returned again into Portugal. But
+that the present king Don Manuel, being anxious to bring this great
+enterprize to a successful conclusion, had entrusted him with command
+of three ships well supplied with provisions, commanding him not to
+return to Portugal without discovering the way to the Christian king
+of Calicut, and would certainly order his head to be cut off if he
+returned without fulfilling his orders. The said king his master had
+given him two letters to deliver to his highness, which he would
+present next day as it was now somewhat late; when he would convince
+his highness that the king of Portugal was his friend and brother,
+and should request of highness, in confirmation of friendship, to
+send an ambassador to the king of Portugal, as was the custom among
+Christian princes. The zamorin expressed his satisfaction with this
+embassy, and told the general that he made him welcome to his
+capital; and, since the king of Portugal desired to be his friend and
+brother, he would be the like to him, and should send an ambassador
+to him as desired. The zamorin then made inquiry into many
+circumstances respecting Portugal; how far distant it was from
+Calicut, how long the general had been upon the voyage, and other
+things: And as it grew late, the king allowed him to retire, first
+asking him whether he would reside with the Moors or the Malabars;
+but as the general chose rather to have a house to himself, the king
+gave orders to a Moor who was his factor, to accompany him, and to
+provide him with every thing necessary for his accommodation.</p>
+<p>Leaving the palace late, it being now towards ten o'clock, the
+kutwal and the rest who had accompanied him there, escorted him back
+to where he was to lodge; and as they were on their way, all on foot,
+there fell such rain that the streets ran in torrents, insomuch that
+the factor gave orders to some of the people to carry our general on
+their backs. The general was displeased at this and at the delay, and
+asked angrily at the factor if he meant to carry him all night
+through the streets. The factor made answer that he could not do
+otherwise, as the city was large and much scattered. He then
+conducted him into his own house to rest for some time, and procured
+a horse for him to ride; but, as the horse had no saddle, the general
+preferred going on foot. At length he was brought to a very good
+lodging, to which his people had previously brought all his
+baggage.</p>
+<p>Next day, being Tuesday, the general was greatly rejoiced to see
+so promising a commencement of his business, and resolved upon
+sending a present to the zamorin; upon which he sent for the kutwal
+and the kings factor, to whom he shewed the present which he proposed
+sending. This consisted of four <i>capotas</i>  or cloaks of scarlet
+cloth, six hats, four branches of coral, twelve <i>almasares</i> , a
+box containing seven brass vessels, a chest of sugar, two barrels of
+oil, and a cask of honey. The kutwal and factor laughed in derision
+at this present, saying, that this was no fit present for their king,
+the poorest merchant presenting one more valuable. They desired him
+rather to send gold, as the king would accept, of nothing else. The
+general was offended at this, saying, if he had been a merchant he
+would have brought gold; but, being an ambassador, he had brought
+none. That what he now offered were his own goods, and not belonging
+to the king his master; who, being uncertain if he should ever reach
+Calicut, had given him nothing to offer as a present to the zamorin.
+But, at his next coming, knowing now certainly the route, the king
+his master would send gold and silver and otter rich articles. To
+this they answered, that these things might be, but it was the custom
+of this country for every stranger who had speech of the king to make
+him a present in proportion to the greatness of his rank. The general
+replied it was very proper their customs should be observed, and
+therefore he desired to send this present, which he could not make
+more valuable, for the reasons already assigned; and if they would
+not suffer it to be carried to the king, he should send it back to
+his ships. They answered he might do so, for they would not consent
+to have such a present sent to the king. The general, much
+displeased, said he would go speak with the king himself, and would
+then return to the ships, meaning to have informed the king of all
+that had passed in regard to the intended present. This they said was
+very proper; but, as they would be detained long at court in
+attending him, they were obliged in the mean time to go upon other
+business, and would return to escort him to court, as the king would
+be angry if he went without them, he being an entire stranger; and
+besides, he could not go in safety unaccompanied, because of the
+great numbers of Moors who resided in that city. Giving credit to
+their words, the general consented to this arrangement, and said he
+would wait for their return, which he expected would be without
+delay: But they did not return all that day, as they had been gained
+over by the Moors to thwart the purposes of the general.</p>
+<p>The Moors in Calicut had received information of the transactions
+of the Portuguese at Quiloa, and of the taking of the <i>sambuco</i> 
+off Melinda; and knowing that we were Christians, were very jealous
+of our arrival at Calicut. Bontaybo had told the Moors that our
+purpose was not merely to discover Calicut from curiosity, but that
+spices were in great estimation in Portugal, which abounded in gold
+and silver, and to which all kinds of merchandize was at present
+transported that went from Calicut by way of the Red Sea; and
+finally, that the settlement of a direct trade by the Portuguese with
+Calicut would tend greatly to the profit of the zamorin. All this the
+Moors very well understood: But, considering that we were Christians,
+they believed, if we should establish trade with Calicut, that their
+own commodities would fall in price, and most of their profits be
+destroyed. Wherefore they consulted together how to induce the
+zamorin to take the general prisoner, to seize our ships, and to kill
+all our men; that they might not return into Portugal with any
+intelligence concerning Calicut. Upon this they associated themselves
+with some of those who were in greatest credit with the zamorin, to
+whom they procured access, and represented to him, That he ought not
+to be deceived by the Christians, for the general was no ambassador
+as he pretended, but a pirate who went about to rob and plunder
+whereever he came. They asserted having received undoubted
+intelligence of this from their factors in Africa; where after
+entering into a friendly correspondence with the <i>xeque</i> , who
+even visited the general in his ship, gave him many presents, and
+provided him with a pilot to bring him to Calicut, he had battered
+the town with his ordnance, and killed several of his subjects. That
+he had afterwards taken some <i>sambucos</i>  laden with merchandize,
+treating the xeque and his subjects like enemies. In like manner they
+misrepresented the conduct of the general at Mombaza and Melinda,
+turning every thing that had occurred to his dishonour. They reasoned
+from these misrepresentations, that he could not be an ambassador
+sent to maintain peace and amity, as he would not, in that case, have
+been guilty of these base hostilities, and would assuredly have
+brought the king a present worthy of the sovereign he pretended to
+come from.</p>
+<p>The king was much amazed at this discourse, and told the Moors
+that he would consider and determine what was proper for him to do.
+The Moors also told the kutwal of all that they had said to the king,
+with whom he was in great credit, and requested of him to persuade
+the king not to listen to this embassage. The kutwal then went to the
+king, who told him all that the Moors had said, and the kutwal
+advised him to do as the Moors had requested. On this the king
+changed his good intentions towards the general, yet endeavoured to
+conceal his purposes. The Moors then waited on the general under
+pretence of friendship, offering to instruct him how best to conduct
+himself, saying that it was customary for all persons who came from
+other places to Calicut on business with the king to bring him a
+present. On this the general shewed them the present he had proposed
+making, which the kutwal and the factor had made so light of; and,
+with whom they agreed, saying it was by no means a fit present, and
+would rather seem a mockery, and give offence. Even Bontaybo agreed
+in this opinion; and asked the general why he had not brought better
+things, as he knew that Portugal abounded in all manner of rich
+commodities. But the general excused himself as formerly, by saying
+that it was quite uncertain whether he might ever have come to
+Calicut.</p>
+<p>The general remained the whole of this day in his lodgings, much
+displeased that the kutwal and factor had not returned according to
+promise, and was at one time resolved to have gone to court without
+them; yet thought it better to wait till next day. In the afternoon
+of the Wednesday, the kutwal and factor made their appearance, when
+he mentioned his dissatisfaction at their long absence; but they
+talked of other things, and gave him no answer on that subject. At
+length they accompanied him to the palace; but the king, having
+greatly changed his mind towards him, made him wait three hours for
+admission, and then ordered that only two of his people should be
+admitted into the presence along with himself. Though the general
+considered this separation of his people as not looking well, he went
+into the presence attended by Fernan Martinez and Diego Diaz, his
+interpreter and secretary. The king did not receive him so well as
+formerly, and said with a severe countenance that he had expected him
+all the preceding day. Not willing to give him the true cause of his
+absence, lest it might lead to a conversation respecting the present,
+the general said he had tarried at home to recover from the fatigue
+of his long voyage. On this the king observed, that he pretended to
+have been sent on an embassy of friendship from a rich and powerful
+king, and that he did not well understand what kind of friendship was
+intended, since he had sent him no present. To this the general
+answered, That it was not to be wondered that the king his master had
+sent no present to his highness, considering the extreme uncertainty
+of his being able to come to this place by a way never before
+attempted, and unknown till now. But, now that the way was
+discovered, and God spared him to return to Portugal, his master
+would assuredly send him princely gifts, worthy of them both: And if
+his highness would have the goodness to give credit to the letters
+which he had brought from the king his master, he would there learn
+the intentions of the king of Portugal in sending him to Calicut.
+Instead of desiring to see the letters, the king asked him whether he
+was sent in search of stones or of men; and if sent to discover men,
+how came it that the king his master had sent no present? And since
+it was manifest that he had brought him nothing, he demanded of him
+to send him the golden image of the Virgin, which he understood was
+in his ship.</p>
+<p>The general, much concerned to find the king so much changed
+towards him, on account of not bringing him a present and amazed at
+this strange demand, said that the image of the Virgin Mary of which
+his highness had been told, was only of wood gilt, and not of gold;
+and besides, as this holy image had protected him during his long
+perils on the sea, and had brought him so far in safety, he was
+unwilling to part with it. The zamorin made no reply to this, but
+immediately demanded that he should produce the letters from the king
+of Portugal. One of these was written in the Portuguese language, and
+the other in Arabic; and the general explained that this had been
+done, because the king his master did not know which of these might
+be understood in the dominions of his highness: And, since he now
+knew that Portuguese was not understood in India, whereas Arabic was,
+he requested that some Christian of the Indies who understood Arabic
+might be employed to interpret the letter, because the Moors were
+known to be enemies to the Christians, and he was afraid lest they
+might purposely give it a wrong interpretation. The king gave orders
+to this purpose, but no Indian could be found who was able to read
+the letters, or at least who would acknowledge that he could read
+them. Seeing that it was now necessary that it should be read by the
+Moors, the general requested that Bontaybo should be one of those
+appointed for the purpose, placing more reliance on him than the
+others, as he was an acquaintance. The king accordingly commanded the
+letter to be read by him and other three Moors; who, having first
+read it over to themselves, interpreted it aloud to the king, to the
+following effect: "As soon as it became known to the king of
+Portugal, that the king of Calicut was one of the mightiest kings of
+all the Indies and a Christian, he was anxious to establish a treaty
+of amity and commerce with him, that he might procure spices, which
+were in great abundance in his country, and to procure which the
+merchants of many parts of the world trade thither: And, if his
+highness would give a licence to send for spices, he would send many
+things from his kingdom which were not to be had in the dominions of
+his highness; or if these things were not satisfactory, of which the
+general could shew him some samples, he was willing to send money,
+both gold and silver, to purchase the spices. And finally referring
+his highness to the general for farther information."</p>
+<p>On hearing this letter interpreted, and being desirous that his
+revenues might increase by the resort of many merchants to his
+dominions, the zamorin evinced his satisfaction at what he had heard;
+and assuming a more friendly deportment towards the general, asked
+him what were the articles of merchandize that could be had from
+Portugal. De Gama named many different kinds; particularly mentioning
+such as he had samples of along with him, and likewise their money,
+and requested permission to go on board his ships that he might bring
+these things to his highness, offering to leave four or five of his
+men in his lodgings during his absence. Giving now more credit to the
+general than to what had been said by the Moors to his prejudice, the
+king told De Gama he might go on board when he pleased, taking all
+his men with him, as there was no call for any of them remaining on
+shore. He likewise said the general might freely bring his goods on
+shore, and sell them to the best advantage. The general was greatly
+satisfied with this permission, of which he had no hopes at the
+first, on seeing the unfriendly reception he had met with at the
+commencement of his audience. He went back, therefore, to his
+lodging, accompanied by the kutwal; and the day being near a close,
+he deferred returning on board that night.</p>
+<p>De Faria gives a somewhat different account of what passed at this
+second audience[62]. "It was wonderful that the zamorin, not knowing
+how to be properly assured of the truth, should rely on the faith of
+him who was accused by his ministers. For, as if he had really known
+in what detestation the Portuguese hold a lie, although to their own
+advantage, he sent for De Gama, and told him plainly that he had been
+informed his embassy was all a counterfeit, and that he was some
+banished man or a fugitive: Yet at the same time offered, even if it
+were so, to give him a kind reception, and to make him handsome
+appointments in his service; and promised to rely entirely on his
+word for information respecting the truth of the whole story. De Gama
+heard the king to an end with a firm countenance, and declared
+himself highly sensible of the confidence reposed in him. He then
+proceeded to answer all that had been alleged against him, which he
+completely overturned by irrefragable argument in a long and eloquent
+speech, preserving the utmost gravity and composure throughout the
+whole. The zamorin eyed him steadfastly the whole time, hoping to be
+enabled to judge of the truth or falsehood of his assertion by his
+countenance; and concluded, from the unconcernedness of his looks,
+the eloquence of his words, and the firm gravity of his whole
+demeanour, that no deceit could lurk under such appearances of
+sincerity, that the Moors had accused him maliciously, and had
+imposed on his ministers. He therefore frankly allowed De Gama
+permission to return to his ships, and to land his merchandize, if he
+had any: Saying, that while that was doing, he would prepare a
+satisfactory answer to the letter of the king of Portugal."</p>
+<blockquote>[62] Astley, I. 24. a.</blockquote>
+<p>On the next day, being the last of May, the kutwal sent a horse to
+the general to carry him to Pandarane; but having no furniture, he
+requested to be supplied with an <i>andor</i> , which was sent
+accordingly, when De Gama immediately set out for Pandarane, all his
+people accompanying him on foot. The kutwal remained at Calicut, but
+a considerable number of nayres escorted the general on his way. When
+the Moors learnt that the general was gone to the ships, they went
+together to the kutwal, making large offers of money to him, if he
+would pursue the general, and detain him a prisoner under some
+feigned pretence; when they would take some opportunity of having him
+slain, in such way that the blame should not attach to the kutwal.
+And when he objected that the zamorin might punish him for detaining
+the general contrary to his orders, they engaged so to deal with the
+zamorin as to obtain his pardon for that offence. Induced by a large
+bribe, and encouraged by this promise, the kutwal followed De Gama in
+such haste that he soon passed our men, who lagged behind on account
+of the great heat. On overtaking De Gama, he asked by signs why he
+was in such haste, and where he was running to? The general answered
+in the same manner, that he was running to avoid the heat. On coming
+to Pandarane, as his men were not come up, the general declined going
+into the town till they should arrive, and went into a house to get
+shelter from the rain. The people did not get to the town till near
+sunset, having lost their way; on which the general said if it had
+not been for their absence he would have been by this time on board.
+The general immediately desired the kutwal to order him to be
+furnished with an almadia or pinnace, to carry him and his people on
+board; but the kutwal said it was now late, and the ships so far away
+that he might miss them in the dark, for which reason he had better
+stay till next day. The general then said, if he were not immediately
+furnished with an almadia, he would return to the king and complain
+that he was detained contrary to his license, and even mentioned as
+if he meant to return immediately to Calicut. To dissemble the more,
+the kutwal said he might have thirty instead of one, if he needed
+them, and pretended to send out to procure almadias, while at the
+same time he commanded the owners to hide themselves that they might
+not be found.</p>
+<p>In the mean time, while messengers were dispatched on pretence to
+seek almadias, the general, having a strong suspicion that evil was
+intended towards him, walked leisurely along the water side, and sent
+off Gonzales Perez and two other mariners, to go on before and
+endeavour to find Nicholas Coello with his boats, and to caution him
+to keep out of the way, lest the kutwal might send off to seize his
+boats and men. While Perez and the others were absent on this errand,
+it drew far into the night; and not choosing to go off till he learnt
+what success Perez had met with, he at length agreed to stay all
+night. Having placed De Gama in the house of a Moor for the night,
+the kutwal pretended that he would go in search of the three mariners
+who were absent; but he did not return till next morning. The general
+then required to have an almadia to carry him and his people on
+board. Before answering, the kutwal spoke some words to his nayres in
+their own language, and then desired the general to give orders to
+have the ships brought near the shore oh which he should have leave
+to depart. On this the general became still more afraid that some
+treachery was intended; yet answered boldly, that he would give no
+such order while he remained on shore, as that would make his brother
+believe he was a prisoner and had issued this order under restraint,
+on which he would immediately depart for Portugal without him. The
+kutwal then threatened stoutly that he should never be allowed to go
+off, unless he complied with this demand. The general, in return,
+declared he should immediately return to Calicut if not allowed to go
+on board, and make a complaint of his conduct to the king. The kutwal
+even dared him to do this, yet took care it should not be in his
+power, as he had ordered the doors to be kept shut and guarded by
+armed nayres, to prevent any of the Portuguese from going out. Yet it
+was the will of God that the kutwal dared not to kill the general or
+any of his men, although the Moors had bribed him with a great sum of
+money, and notwithstanding his great credit with the zamorin. His
+anxiety to have the ships brought near the shore was, that the Moors
+might be able to board them and kill all their people; and, seeing it
+in this light, the general was equally determined to prevent their
+nearer approach. Finding he could not prevail on the general to
+command the ships to be brought near the shore, and having no
+pretence to justify either keeping him prisoner or offering him any
+wrong, the kutwal next endeavoured to persuade him to order the sails
+and rudders on shore; at which the general only laughed, saying the
+king had given full permission to go on board without any such
+conditions, and assured him the king should be fully informed of all
+his unjust proceedings.</p>
+<p>The general and his people now pretended to be in want of
+necessaries from the ships, and requested leave to send some of his
+people on board, while he should remain on shore; but this the kutwal
+refused, and our people began to be seriously alarmed. At this time
+Gonzalo Perez returned, supposing the general at liberty and that he
+waited for him and his companions. Perez informed De Gama that he had
+seen Coello, who waited for him with the boats near the shore. The
+admiral was exceedingly anxious that the kutwal should not know of
+this circumstance, lest he might send out a number of armed almadias
+to capture them; and therefore urged Perez to return secretly to give
+Coello warning to return to the ships and keep constantly on the
+alert for fear of an attack. When Coello got this intelligence, he
+immediately set off, and the kutwal caused him to be pursued by
+several almadias full of armed men, but he made his escape. The
+kutwal made another attempt to induce the general to order his
+brother to bring the ships near the shore, but in vain; for the
+general told him, his brother, even if he were to write such an
+order, would not obey, or, were he disposed to do so, the other
+officers in the ship would prevent him. The kutwal observed that he
+could not give credit to this, as he was sure any thing he commanded
+would be obeyed. But no arguments could prevail on the general to
+this measure, which he was satisfied was meant for facilitating the
+destruction of the fleet to gratify the Moors.</p>
+<p>The whole of this day was spent in this manner, and in the night
+our people were confined in a large paved yard surrounded with walls,
+and under even a stronger guard than attended them during the day;
+and even the general began to fear as well as the men, that they
+would be separated from one another. Yet he trusted, when the zamorin
+should come to know the usage they had received, he would give orders
+for their release. That night, the kutwal came to sup with the
+general and sent a supply of fowls and rice. Finding that he could
+not prevail over the constancy of De Gama, he determined at last to
+set him at liberty. Next day, therefore, being Saturday the second of
+June, he desired the general, since he had promised to the king to
+bring his merchandize on shore, that he ought to do so; as it was the
+usage of all merchants who came to Calicut to land their goods and
+crews, and not to return to their ships till all was sold; and he
+promised, when this was done, to give him free liberty to depart.
+Although the general gave very little credit to his fair words, he
+yet said, if the kutwal would provide almadias for the purpose, he
+would order his goods on shore; but was certain his brother would not
+allow the boats to leave the ships while he was detained on shore.
+The kutwal was now content to get the goods into his power, as he
+understood from the general they were of great value, and allowed the
+general to send off a message to his brother. He therefore sent off a
+letter by two of his men, in which he gave his brother an account of
+his situation, confined to his lodging but otherwise well used, and
+desiring him to send some of the merchandize on shore to satisfy the
+kutwal; but, directing him, in case he was much longer detained, to
+believe that he was kept prisoner by order of the zamorin; whose only
+object was to get the Portuguese ships into his power, not having
+time to arm his own ships for that purpose. For this reason, if not
+set at liberty immediately after the goods were landed, he required
+his brother to return without delay to Portugal, and inform the king
+of all that had happened; that the trade of so fine a country might
+not be lost to his country. And farther, to inform the king in what
+state he remained, trusting that his royal master would send such an
+armament as would enforce his restoration to liberty.</p>
+<p>On receiving this letter, and a circumstantial relation from the
+messenger of all that had happened on shore, Paulo de Gama
+immediately sent the goods; but said in answer to the general, that
+he could not answer to his honour to return to Portugal without him,
+and he trusted God would enable the small force he had still in the
+fleet, with the aid of his ordnance, to compel the kutwal to liberate
+him. On the merchandize being landed, the general delivered it over
+into the custody of Diego Diaz as factor, with Alvora de Braga as his
+clerk, whom he left in a house provided for them by the kutwal; after
+which he went on board the ships. He then refused to send any more
+goods on shore, till those already there were sold and paid for, and
+determined not to run himself again into danger by venturing on shore
+after what had already past. At this the Moors were grievously vexed,
+as they thought it more easy for them to have destroyed him on land
+than on board the ships. On purpose to entice him to land once more,
+the Moors made a mock of his goods, pretending they were good for
+nothing, and did all in their power to prevent them from selling.
+Thinking that the zamorin knew nothing of all these transactions, he
+sent him an account of the whole five days afterwards, by his factor,
+of all that had happened, and of the injurious conduct of the Moors
+respecting the sale of the goods. The king seemed much offended by
+these proceedings, sending the general word that he would punish all
+those who had used him ill, yet the kutwal remained unpunished. The
+king likewise sent seven or eight merchants of Guzerate, who were
+idolaters, to buy the goods, accompanied by an honest nayre, to
+remain with Diaz at the factory to defend him against the Moors. Yet
+all this was only done colourably, that the Moors might not appear to
+suborn the merchants; for these men bought nothing, and even beat
+down the price of the commodities, to the great satisfaction of the
+Moors; who now boasted that no person would buy our goods any more
+than they. Yet none of the Moors durst venture to our factory, after
+they heard a nayre was stationed there by the kings order. If they
+did not love us before, they hated us ten times worse now, and when
+any of our men landed, they used to spit on the ground in contempt,
+calling out Portugal! Portugal! But by the especial order of the
+general, our people took no other notice than merely laughing at
+their insolence.</p>
+<p>As none of the merchants would buy our goods, the general supposed
+that this was occasioned by their being lodged at Pandarane, where
+none of the merchants of Calicut resided; and requested leave, by a
+messenger, from the zamorin, to have the goods removed to the city.
+This permission was immediately granted, and the king issued orders
+to the kutwal to see them removed, and even to pay the persons who
+carried them, that nothing belonging to the king of Portugal might be
+subject to any charges in his country. The general would not trust
+himself any more on shore, although Bontaybo, who frequently came off
+to visit him, advised him to wait on the king, lest the great credit
+of the Moors might again prevail over his mind. But considering this
+man as a Moor, the general never put much trust in him, nor informed
+him of his intentions; yet always received him kindly, and gave him
+money and other gifts, that he might bring him intelligence of what
+was passing on shore.</p>
+<p>After the Portuguese merchandize was removed to Calicut, the
+general permitted one man daily from each of the ships to go on
+shore, to see the city and to purchase any thing they had a mind for;
+always taking especial care that one party returned on board before
+another landed. Our people were courteously received and entertained
+by the natives, and were even lodged in their houses occasionally.
+They bartered several things on shore, such as bracelets of brass and
+copper, pewter, and other European articles, for the productions of
+the country, as freely and quietly as if they had been in Lisbon.
+Fishermen, and others of the idolaters came off to the ships, selling
+fish, cocoa-nuts, and poultry, for biscuit or money; while others
+came off with their children, merely to have a sight of our ships. On
+all these occasions, the general commanded them to be well treated
+and to have food given them, to conciliate the people and to secure
+the friendship of the zamorin. This continued till the tenth of
+August, during which time the ships had always some of the natives on
+board.</p>
+<p>Seeing the quietness of the people, and their familiarity with his
+men, who never met with any injury from the Moors or nayres, the
+general believed the zamorin was willing to preserve friendship and
+peace with the subjects of Portugal, and determined upon establishing
+a factory in Calicut for the sale of his commodities, although very
+little of what was landed had as yet been sold. By this means, he
+hoped to lay a sure foundation for the establishment of trade,
+against the next expedition which the king his master might send, if
+GOD pleased to send him home with the intelligence of the discovery.
+Accordingly, with the advice and concurrence of the captains and
+other principal officers of the fleet, he sent a present by Diego
+Diaz to the zamorin, consisting of scarfs of different colours,
+silks, corals, and various other articles. Diaz was desired to say to
+the king, that the general begged his highness to excuse his
+presumption in sending such a present in token of his entire devotion
+to his service, having nothing worthy of the acceptance of so great a
+prince. That the time now drew near when it would be necessary to
+depart on his return to Portugal; and therefore, if his highness
+meant to send an ambassador to the king of Portugal, he had better
+give orders that he might soon be ready to embark. Presuming upon
+what his highness had already agreed to, and on the kindness hitherto
+shewn to him and his people by his highness, he requested permission
+to leave a factor and clerk in Calicut along with his merchandize, as
+a memorial of peace and amity between his highness and the king of
+Portugal, as a testimony of the truth of the embassy with which he
+had been entrusted, and in pledge of farther embassy from the king
+his master as soon as the discovery was made known. He likewise
+prayed his highness to send on board as a full confirmation of his
+having actually made the voyage to India, a <i>bahar</i>  of cinnamon,
+another of cloves, and a third of some other spices, which should be
+paid for by the factor out of the first sales of the goods in his
+possession. It was four days after Diaz received this order before he
+could get access to the zamorin, though he went every day to the
+palace for this purpose. At length he was admitted to audience; and
+on seeing Diaz with his present, the king asked him what he wanted in
+so stern a manner that he was afraid of being killed. After
+delivering the message from the general and wishing to deliver the
+present, the king refused to see it, and commanded that it should be
+delivered to his factor. The answer he gave to the message was, that
+since the general wished to depart he might do so, but must first pay
+him 600 <i>serasynes</i> [63], according to the custom of the
+country.</p>
+<blockquote>[63] Called in
+Astley <i>sharafins</i> .--Astl.</blockquote>
+I. 36.
+<p>Diaz, on his return to the factory with the present intended for
+the king, was accompanied by many of the nayres, which he thought was
+from respect: but immediately on entering the house, the nayres
+remained at the door, forbidding him or any other person to go out.
+After this, a proclamation was made through the city, forbidding any
+boat or almadia to go on board our fleet on pain of death. Yet
+Bontaybo went off secretly, and gave warning to the general not to
+venture on shore or to permit any of the people to land; as he had
+learned from the Moors, that any who might do so would surely lose
+their lives. Bontaybo said farther, that all the fair words of the
+king proceeded from dissimulation, that he might entice the general
+and his people on shore to kill them all; all which evil intentions
+were occasioned by the Moors, who made the king believe that the
+Portuguese were thieves and pirates, who had come to Calicut to steal
+such merchandize as should be brought there; and who had come to spy
+out the land, that they might return with a great armament to invade
+his dominions. All this was confirmed by two Malabar idolaters, and
+the general was in great uncertainty how best to proceed on the
+present emergency. That same night, after dark, a Negro slave
+belonging to Diaz came off, with the information that Diaz and Braga
+were made prisoners, and with an account of the answer which the king
+had given to his message, what he had ordered to be done with the
+present, and of the proclamations which were made through the city.
+Diego Diaz, being anxious to have these things communicated to the
+general, had bribed a fisherman to carry this man on board, as he
+could not well be recognized in the night owing to his colour. The
+general, though much offended at these injurious proceedings, was
+unwilling to depart till he might see the end of these things, and
+therefore waited to see whether anyone might come off to the ships.
+Next day, being Wednesday the 15th of August, only one almadia came
+off, in which there were four boys, who brought fine precious stones
+for sale. Although the general believed they were spies, he received
+them kindly, and gave no hints of having heard that Diaz was made a
+prisoner; expecting that others of more importance might come on
+board through whom he might procure the enlargement of Diaz and
+Braga. By these boys he wrote to Diaz, but couched in such a manner
+that it might not be understood if it fell into any other hands. The
+letter was delivered according to its direction, and the boys told
+the king of their reception on board, by which he believed that the
+general knew not of the imprisonment of his people. On this he sent
+off other persons to the ships, who were strictly enjoined not to
+disclose the treatment which the factor had experienced. This was
+done out of policy to deceive the general and to detain our ships,
+till the king might be able to send his own fleet to set upon him, or
+till the ships might arrive from Mecca to take him prisoner.</p>
+<p>Some of the Malabars continued to come off daily, all of whom the
+general commanded to be well entertained, as he saw none of
+sufficient importance to be detained. But, on the Sunday, six
+principal Malabars came on board, attended by fifteen men in another
+pinnace. Believing that the king would liberate Diaz and Braga in
+return for these men, he made them all prisoners; and sent a letter
+in the Malabar language, by two of the native boatmen, to the kings
+factors, demanding his factor and clerk in return for those men he
+had detained on board. On perusal of this letter, the kings factor
+communicated the same to the king, who commanded him to take the
+Portuguese to his own house, that he might not appear to have had any
+hand in their detention; and then to restore them to the general in
+return for the Malabars, whose wives had made a great clamour about
+the detention of their husbands.</p>
+<p>Seeing that his people were not sent on board, the general weighed
+anchor on Wednesday the 23d of August and set sail, meaning to try if
+this shew of going away would have the effect of recovering Diaz and
+Braga, in return for these Malabars whom he had detained. The wind
+being contrary, he came to anchor in an open road, four leagues from
+Calicut, where the ships remained till the Saturday. As there was no
+appearance of getting back his people, De Gama again set sail; but
+for want of wind had to come again to anchor, almost out of the sight
+of land. An almadia now came to the ships with certain Malabars, who
+said that Diaz and the others were in the kings palace, and would be
+assuredly sent on board next day. Not seeing the detained Malabars,
+these people believed they had been all put to death. This affected
+delay proceeded entirely from craft, that they might gain time to fit
+out the Calicut fleet, and for the arrival of the ships from Mecca,
+when their combined force might environ and destroy the Portuguese.
+The general ordered these messengers to go back to Calicut, and not
+to return without his men or letters from them, as otherwise he
+should sink them; and that if a satisfactory answer was not sent him
+without delay, he would cut off the heads of all the Malabars whom he
+had detained. The Malabars returned to Calicut with this message; and
+a wind springing up, the general made sail, and came to anchor off
+Calicut about sunset.</p>
+<p>Next day, seven almadias came off to the fleet, in one of which
+were Diego Diaz and Alvora Braga, the others being filled with many
+of the natives. These people, however, were afraid to come on board,
+and put Diaz and Braga into the boat which was astern of the generals
+ship, and then put off to a little distance, waiting for the generals
+answer. Diego told the general, that when the king learnt of his
+having sailed, he sent for him to the palace, assuming a pleasant
+countenance as pretending to be ignorant of his imprisonment, and
+asked him why the general had kept his subjects as prisoners on
+board. On being told the reason, he said the general was in the
+right. He then asked if his own factor, who was present, had extorted
+any presents; for he well knew that one of his predecessors had been
+put to death not long before, for taking bribes from merchant
+strangers. After this, the king desired Diaz to request the general
+to send him the stone pillar having the cross and the arms of
+Portugal, which he had promised to set up; and to know whether he
+would leave Diaz as factor in Calicut. Diaz likewise presented a
+letter for the king of Portugal, which was written on a palm leaf by
+Diaz, and signed by the zamorin, to the following effect:</p>
+<p>"Vasco de la Gama, a gentleman of thy house, came to my country,
+of whose arrival I was very glad. In my country there is abundance of
+cinnamon, cloves, pepper, and precious stones. The commodities I wish
+to procure from your country are, silver, gold, coral, and
+scarlet."</p>
+<p>Convinced of the duplicity of the zamorin, De Gama made no answer
+to the message; but sent back all the nayres whom he had detained,
+desired them to tell the king he should return the others who were in
+custody, on receiving back his merchandize. He sent however the stone
+pillar which had been required. On the next day Bontaybo came on
+board, saying that the kutwal, by order of the zamorin, had seized
+all his property, alleging that he was a Christian who had come
+overland to Calicut as a spy from the king of Portugal. Bontaybo
+said, he was sure this bad treatment had proceeded from the
+suggestion of the Moors; and, as they had seized his goods, he was
+sure they meant personal violence, on which account he had made his
+escape. The general gave him a kind reception, offering to carry him
+to Portugal, promising that he should recover double the value of his
+goods, besides, that he might expect to be well rewarded by the king
+of Portugal. To this arrangement Bontaybo gladly consented, and had a
+good cabin assigned him by order of the general. About ten o'clock
+the same day, three almadias full of men came off to the ships,
+having some scarfs laid on their benches, as being part of our goods;
+and these were followed by four other almadias, one after the other.
+The Malabars pretended that they had brought off all the goods, which
+they offered to put into his boat, and required him in return to
+deliver up the rest of the prisoners. But convinced this was a mere
+deception, the general desired them to go away, as he would have none
+of their merchandize, and was resolved to carry the Malabars to
+Portugal as witnesses of his discovery. He added, if God spared his
+life, he should convince them whether the Christians were thieves, as
+the Moors had made the king of Calicut believe, who had therefore
+treated him with so much injustice. He now commanded several cannon
+to be fired, on which they were afraid and made off.</p>
+<p>It was certain, if the kings ships had been afloat that they would
+have been sent to attack our ships; but they were all hauled upon
+shore on account of the winter season. Wherefore we may attribute it
+to Providence that our ships happened to arrive here at this season,
+that thereby they might escape and carry home news of having
+discovered the Indies, to the great advancement of the Catholic
+faith.</p>
+<p>Although greatly rejoiced at having made the discovery of the
+route to Calicut and the Indies, he was much distressed at the
+behaviour of the zamorin, believing that the next expedition that
+might be sent out would be subject to great danger; but as he was
+unable to do any thing more at this time, he consoled himself with
+the knowledge he had thus acquired of the safe navigation, and that
+he had procured specimens of the spices, drugs, precious stones, and
+other commodities which were to be procured at this place. Having now
+nothing to detain him here, he departed from Calicut, carrying with
+him the Malabars whom he had made prisoners; as he hoped by their
+means a good agreement might be entered into with the zamorin on
+sending out the next fleet from Portugal. On the Thursday after his
+departure, being becalmed about a league from Calicut, about
+sixty <i>tonys</i> , or boats of the country, came off to the fleet
+filled with soldiers expecting to have taken all our ships. But the
+general kept them off by frequent discharges of his artillery, though
+they followed him an hour and a half. At length there fell a heavy
+shower of rain attended with some wind, by which the fleet was
+enabled to make sail, and the enemies returned to the land. He now
+proposed to direct his course for Melinda; but made little way along
+the coast, by reason of calms. At this time, having in mind the good
+of the next ships which might come to Calicut, he thought fit to send
+a soothing letter to the zamorin, which was written in Arabic by
+Bontaybo; in which he apologized for having carried off the Malabars,
+as evidences of his having been at Calicut. He said he was sorry that
+he had left no factor, lest the Moors might put him to death; and
+that he had been deterred by the some cause from having frequently
+landed himself. That, notwithstanding all that had happened, the king
+his master would be glad to have the friendship of the zamorin, and
+would assuredly send him abundance of all those commodities he might
+need; and that the trade of the Portuguese to his city would
+henceforth redound to his great profit. This letter was entrusted to
+one of the Malabars, who was set on shore and ordered to deliver it
+to the zamorin.</p>
+<p>Continuing his course along the coast, the fleet came on the
+ensuing Thursday among certain rocky islands, from one of which that
+was inhabited there came off several almadias, having fish and other
+victuals for sale. The general treated these people kindly, giving
+them shirts and other articles to their great contentment; and, with
+their approbation, set up a cross on the island, which was named <i>El
+padron de Sancta Maria</i> . As soon as night approached, and the wind
+began to blow from the shore, the fleet made sail, always keeping
+near the land. On the Thursday after, being the 19th of September,
+they came in sight of a pleasant high land, off which lay six little
+islands, where he came to anchor. Going here on shore in search of
+fresh water, a young man was met with, who was or pretended to be a
+Christian. This person carried our men to a river, where they found a
+spring of excellent water issuing out of the rock; and for his
+services they gave him a red nightcap. Next morning four natives came
+off in a small boat, with many gourds and cucumbers for sale. These
+people said that their country produced cinnamon, and two of our
+people were sent onshore to see whether this were true, who brought
+with them two green boughs which were said to be cinnamon, of which
+they had seen a large grove, but it turned out only to be the wild
+kind. At their return, these men were accompanied by more than twenty
+natives, who brought hens, gourds, and cows milk for sale, and who
+said, if the general would send some of his men on shore, he might
+have abundance of dried cinnamon, hogs, and poultry: But he dreaded
+treachery, and would not allow any of his people to go on shore. Next
+forenoon, when some of our men went to a part of the shore at some
+distance from the ships to cut wood, they suddenly came in sight of
+two boats lying close to the land, and returned with intelligence of
+what they had seen; but the general would not send to inquire what
+these might be until after dinner. In the mean time, one of the men
+in the top gave notice that he saw eight large ships out at sea,
+which were then becalmed. The general gave immediate orders to have
+every thing in readiness in case of an attack, and as the wind served
+both fleets, they soon came within two leagues of each other. The
+enemies perceiving our fleet approaching, fled towards the shore; but
+one of their rudders breaking, the men belonging to that ship escaped
+in their boats, and Coello immediately took possession, expecting to
+find it laden with rich commodities. Nothing was found however,
+except cocoa-nuts and a kind of sugar called <i>melasus</i> , which is
+prepared from palms or date trees. He also found on board many bows
+and arrows, swords, spears, and targets. The other seven ships were
+run aground, so that our ships could not get near them, as drawing
+too much water; but our people followed in their boats, and drove
+them out of their vessels by firing upon them with their ordnance.
+Next day, while our fleet was at anchor, seven men came off from the
+land in an almadia, who reported that these eight ships had been sent
+by the zamorin from Calicut to capture our fleet, as they had been
+informed by some of the fugitives[64].</p>
+<blockquote>[64] De Faria says that this fleet belonged to a pirate
+named Timoja, of whom frequent mention will be made hereafter; and
+that the eight ships were so linked together, and covered over with
+boughs of trees, that they resembled a floating island.--Astl.I. 38.
+a.</blockquote>
+<p>From this place the general removed to the island
+of <i>Ansandina</i> , at a short distance, where he was told he might
+procure good water. This island is very small, and only a league from
+the continent. It contains several woods, and two cisterns, or
+conduits, built of freestone, one of which is six feet deep, supplied
+with excellent water from certain springs; and the sea around has
+great quantities of fish. Before the Moors traded with India, this
+island was well inhabited by the native idolaters, having many goodly
+buildings, and especially some fine pagodas. But when the Moors
+resorted to this coast from the Red Sea, they used to take in their
+wood and water at this place, and abused the inhabitants so
+intolerably that they abandoned the place, and pulled down most of
+their pagodas and all their other buildings. These Gentiles were
+natives of that part of the continent which belongs to the king
+of <i>Narsingas</i> , and used often to repair thither to perform their
+devotions to three black stones which were in a chapel of one of the
+pagodas, which still remains. This island is
+called <i>Ansandina</i> [65] in the Malabar language, which signifies
+the Five Islands, and is so named because there are other four
+islands round about.</p>
+<p>Coming to anchor here, the general sent Coello on shore with an
+armed escort, to examine the country, and to see if there were any
+convenient place for new-graving their ships bottoms, as they had
+been long at sea and had a long run before them. Every thing being
+found convenient, and the measure approved of by all the captains, it
+was determined to lay their ships successively aground for this
+purpose. The ship called the Berrio was first laid on shore; and
+while occupied in repairing and cleaning her bottom, many of the
+natives came off from the continent to sell victuals to our people.
+While this was going forwards two small brigandines were seen rowing
+towards our ships, ornamented with flags and streamers on their
+masts, beating drums and sounding trumpets, and filled with men who
+plied their oars. At the same time, five similar vessels were seen
+creeping along shore, as if lying by to help the others if needful.
+The Malabars who supplied our people with provisions, warned the
+general to beware of these vessels, which belonged to pirates who
+roamed about in these seas, robbing all they met under pretence of
+peace[66]. The general believed he might have taken these two
+vessels, if he had allowed them to come close up with his ships, but
+did not choose to run any risk; wherefore, as soon as they came
+within gun-shot, he ordered all the cannon belonging to the two ships
+which remained afloat to be fired at them; on which, calling out in a
+loud voice, <i>Tambarane! Tambarane!</i>  which is their name for God,
+they fled away. Nicholas Coello, who was in his boat, followed after
+them, firing off his ordnance; but the general, fearful of any
+mischance, called him back by signal.</p>
+<blockquote>[65] More probably Anche-diva, or Ange-diva.--Astl.I. 38.
+b.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[66] These vessels seem more probably to have been the
+squadron of Timoja. --Astl.I. 38. c.</blockquote>
+<p>Next day, when the general and all his men were on shore at work
+upon the Berrio, twelve natives, who appeared to be men of some
+consequence, came to the island in two small <i>paraos</i> , and
+presented a bundle of sugar canes. These people asked permission to
+go on board the ships, as they had never seen any such before; but
+the general was much offended with this, fearing they might be spies.
+While engaged in conversation with these men, other two <i>paraos</i> 
+made their appearance, having as many men. But those who came first,
+seeing the general displeased, advised these new comers not to land.
+When the Berrio was repaired, the generals ship was brought aground
+to receive the same attentions.</p>
+<p>While the general and the other captains were on shore, busied in
+the repairs of the San Michael, there came one day a man in a
+little <i>parao</i> , seemingly about forty years old, and not of that
+country, as he was dressed in a <i>sabaco</i> , or gown of fine cotton
+reaching to his heels, his head covered with a kerchief or towel,
+which partly covered his face, and wearing a faulchion or crooked
+cymeter at his girdle. Immediately on landing, he went up and
+embraced the general, as if he had seen or known him before, and
+treated the other captains with the same politeness. He told them he
+was a Christian, born in Italy, and had been brought when a child
+into the Indies. That he now dwelt with a Moorish lord named
+ <i>Sabayo</i> , who ruled a certain island called Goa, about twelve
+leagues from thence, and who had 40,000 horsemen on that island.
+That, as his dwelling was now among the Moors, he conformed
+externally to their worship, though in his heart a Christian. That
+learning certain men had come in ships to Calicut, such as had never
+been seen before in the Indies, and that no one understood their
+language, he immediately understood that they must be
+ <i>Frangnes</i> ,[67] for so the Christians are named in the Indies.
+That he was desirous of seeing them, and had asked leave
+of <i>Sabayo</i>  to come and visit them; which, if he had not
+obtained, he would have died of vexation. That Sabayo had not only
+granted him leave for this purpose; but desired, if he found the
+strangers to be from his country, to offer them any thing they might
+stand in need of which his country produced; particularly spices and
+provisions. And besides, if they would come and live with him, Sabayo
+would entertain them honourably, and give them sufficient to live on.
+The general asked many questions concerning the country of Sabayo and
+other things, to which he made answer. After which he requested to
+have a cheese from the general, to send on shore to a companion, as a
+token of having been well received. The general suspected some
+mystery in this man, yet ordered a cheese and two new loaves to be
+given him, which he sent away to his companion. He continued talking
+with great volubility, and sometimes so unguardedly as to raise
+suspicions of his being a spy. On this Paulo de la Gama, who
+particularly suspected him, inquired of some of the natives if they
+knew who this man was; they immediately told him he was a pirate, who
+had boarded many other ships while laid aground. On receiving this
+information, the general ordered him to be carried on board his ship,
+then aground, and to be whipped well till he should confess whether
+all that he had said was true or false; also, what was his purpose in
+coming thither, and whether he were actually a Moor or a Christian.
+He still insisted that he was a Christian, and that all he said was
+true, declaring the information given by the natives to be entirely
+groundless. The general now ordered a more cruel torment to be
+inflicted to extort confession, causing him to be hoisted up and down
+by the members: when at length he declared he would tell the truth.
+He then acknowledged himself a spy, sent to discover how many men the
+general had, and what were their weapons, as he was much hated on all
+that coast for being a Christian; and that many  <i>atalayas</i>  or
+foists were placed in all the bays and creeks of the coast to assail
+him, but dared not till they were joined by forty large armed vessels
+that were getting ready to fall upon him. But he said he knew not
+certainly when these vessels might be ready. The general now ordered
+him to be confined under hatches, intending to carry him into
+Portugal, as a fit person to give the king his master intelligence
+respecting the Indies, and ordered him to get refreshing victuals,
+and that his cure should be looked well after.</p>
+<blockquote>[67] Frangnes, Franghis, or Feringays, a common name all
+over the East for Europeans; assuredly derived from the Francs or
+French, long known as the great enemy of the Mahometans, by their
+exploits in the crusades.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On receiving this information of the designs of his enemies, the
+general would stay no longer than was necessary for completing the
+repairs of his own ship, which was got ready in ten days. About this
+time, the general was offered 1000 <i>fanons</i>  for the ship which
+had been taken by Coello; but he refused to sell any thing to his
+enemies, and ordered her to be burnt. When the generals ship was
+ready, and the fleet had taken in a supply of water, they departed
+from the island of <i>Ansandina</i> , or Anchediva, on the 5th of
+October 1498, steering directly out to sea on their course for
+Melinda. After sailing about 200 leagues from that island, the
+Moor[68] whom they had taken prisoner, seeing no prospect of escape,
+now made a full and true confession. He acknowledged that he lived
+with Sabayo, the lord of Goa, to whom word was brought that the
+general was wandering about in those seas, like one who knew not
+where he was, upon which orders were given to fit out a powerful
+fleet to make him prisoner. In the mean time, learning that the
+general was at the isle of Anchediva, Sabayo commanded him to go
+thither to visit him, to get intelligence of his strength and
+intentions, and to endeavour to entice him to Goa; where it was
+Sabayos intentions to make him and all his people prisoners, and to
+employ them in his wars against the neighbouring princes, as they
+were reported to be valiant men. After this confession, the general
+gave this man better treatment, allowing him both clothes and money.
+Some time afterwards he became a Christian, by the name of Gaspar de
+la Gama, taking his name of Gaspar from one of the three kings of the
+Magi[69], and his surname from the general, who stood god-father at
+his baptism.</p>
+<blockquote>[68] De Faria says this person was a Jew, and that he
+made the sign of the cross from the shore to be taken on
+board.--Astl.I. 39. b.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[69] Or rather one of the three kings of Collen.--Astl.
+I. 39.</blockquote>
+<p>The general pursued his course for Melinda, where he proposed to
+take on board an ambassador from the xeque of that place. In the
+early part of this voyage he endured severe storms and contrary
+winds, which were succeeded by calms, during which the heat of the
+sun was quite insufferable, and the voyage much delayed, insomuch,
+that water began to grow scarce, and the people had to be put on
+short allowance. Owing to these circumstances, the people were
+afflicted with the same disease in their gums, from which they had
+formerly suffered such great distress in the river of Good Signs[70],
+on the outward voyage. Their arms and legs also swelled, and many
+tumours broke out over their bodies, proceeding from a pestilent
+stinking humour, which threw them into a flux, of which thirty
+persons died. From the continuance of calms and contrary winds, and
+the mortality among the people, the whole company became amazed, and
+believed they should never be able to get out from their present
+distressing situation; insomuch, that they solicited the general to
+return to Calicut, or some other part of India, and submit to what
+God might appoint, rather than to die on the sea of these terrible
+diseases, for which there was no remedy, especially as both
+provisions and water began to fail. De Gama reasoned with them to
+little purpose, as they had been now four months at sea, and there
+hardly remained, sixteen persons in each ship able to do duty, some
+of whom even were afflicted with the diseases of which the others had
+died. It is even said that Paulo de la Gama and Nicholas Coello had
+agreed to return to India, if any wind should spring up that would
+have served for the voyage.</p>
+<blockquote>[70] Since called Cuama.--Astl. I. 39. c.</blockquote>
+<p>At length a favourable wind sprung up unexpectedly, and in sixteen
+days they came in sight of land on Wednesday the 2d of February 1499,
+at which the mariners were much rejoiced, and soon forgot all their
+past troubles and dangers. As they came near the land towards
+evening, the general gave orders to keep their heads out to sea
+during the night, to avoid rocks or shoals. As there were no person
+on board who knew where they were, a Moor alleged they had steered
+direct for Mozambique; saying there were certain islands 300 leagues
+from the shore, and directly over against that place, where the
+natives were continually subject to the disease which had been so
+fatal to our men. When morning came, they stood towards the land,
+when they came before a large and goodly city, surrounded with walls,
+having fair and lofty houses, and a large palace on a height in the
+middle of the city, seeming to be a magnificent building. This city
+is called Magadoxo, and stands on one side of the Gulf of India on
+the coast of Ethiopia[71], an hundred and thirteen leagues from
+Melinda, the situation of which I shall explain hereafter. Knowing
+this to be a city of the Moors, he would not stop at this place, but
+commanded many shots of ordnance to be fired as he sailed past. Not
+being sure how far it was to Melinda, and fearing to overshoot that
+port, he lay too every night; and on Saturday the 5th of February,
+lying over against a village of the Moors, named Pate[72], 103
+leagues from Magadoxo, there came off eight  <i>terradas</i> , or boats
+of that country, filled with soldiers, and making direct for our
+fleet, from whence we shot off so many pieces of ordnance, that they
+soon fled back to the shore, and our people could not follow for want
+of wind. Next Monday, being the 7th of February, the fleet arrived at
+Melinda. The king immediately sent off his congratulations to the
+general on his arrival, with a present of fresh provisions. De Gama
+sent Fernan Martinez on shore to return the compliments of the king,
+to whom he sent a present. On account of the great number of sick on
+board, the fleet stopped here for ten days, during which time he
+caused a land- mark to be erected on shore, with leave of the king,
+as a token of friendship. Having provided provisions and water for
+the ships at this place, he departed on the morning of Wednesday the
+17th of February, taking with him an ambassador from the king of
+Melinda, to negotiate a treaty of perpetual peace and friendship with
+the king of Portugal.</p>
+<blockquote>[71] Magadoxo is in lat. 2&deg; 20' N. and about 45&deg;
+40' E. long.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[72] Pate stands on the coast of Zanguebar, on the Rio
+Grande, one of the mouths of the river Zebee, in lat. 1&deg; 50' S.
+and about 41&deg; 20' E. long. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>Considering that there were not sufficient men remaining for
+navigating all the ships, the general and the other captains agreed
+to burn one of them, and the San Rafael was chosen to be sacrificed,
+because she was all open, and had not been brought aground at
+Anchediva when the other two were repaired. Accordingly, after taking
+out all her stores and merchandize, which employed them during five
+days, she was burnt at certain shoals, called the Shoals of St
+Raphael[73]. During these five days, the fleet procured a
+considerable quantity of hens from a village on the coast
+called <i>Tangata</i> . Leaving this place, the two remaining ships
+came on the 20th February to the island of Zenziber, which is in six
+degrees of S. latitude, at ten leagues distance from the continent.
+This is a considerable island, having other two in its neighbourhood,
+one called <i>Pemba</i> , and the other <i>Moyfa</i> . These islands are
+very fertile, having abundance of provisions, and great quantities of
+oranges. The inhabitants are Moors, who are by no means warlike and
+have few weapons, but are well clothed in silk, and cotton vestments,
+which they purchase at Mombaza from the merchants of Cambaya. The
+women are ornamented with jewels of gold and silver, the former being
+procured at Sofala, and the latter from the island of St Lawrence, or
+Madagascar. Each of these three islands has a separate king, who,
+with all their subjects, are of the Mahometan religion.</p>
+<blockquote>[73] De Faria says this ship was lost on the shoals
+called after her name but the men were saved.--Astl.I. 40.
+a.</blockquote>
+<p>When the king of the island of Zenziber was informed of the
+arrival of our ships, he sent immediately to compliment the general,
+accompanied with great presents of the fruits and other productions
+of the country, and requested his friendship, to which the general
+gladly agreed and sent suitable answers. After remaining here eight
+days for refreshments, the general departed on the 1st of March, and
+came to anchor beside the isle of St George in the bay of Mozambique.
+Next day he caused a mark to be erected on this island, where he went
+on shore and heard mass; and departed thence without any intercourse
+with the inhabitants of Mozambique. On the 3d of March, he came to
+the island of St Blas, where the ships remained for some time to take
+in water, and to provide a stock of sea wolves, and <i>solitarios</i> ,
+which were salted to serve as provision for the remainder of the
+voyage, and for which they were most thankful to God. Departing from
+thence, they were driven back by a westerly wind right contrary; but
+Providence sent them a fair wind, by means of which they doubled the
+Cape of Good Hope with infinite pleasure on the 20th of March, all
+the remainder of the crews being now strong and in good health, with
+the cheering prospect of speedily returning to Lisbon. They now had a
+fair wind, which lasted them twenty days, and sped them on towards St
+Jago. The fair wind now failed them and delayed their voyage. Trying
+the lead on Thursday the 25th of April, they found twenty-five
+fathom; and the least water they had all that day was twenty fathom,
+on which account the pilots concluded they were on the shoals of the
+Rio Grande.</p>
+<p>Of the rest of this voyage, till the arrival of the general at the
+island of St Jago, I have found no account; except that, when,
+approaching that place, Nicholas Coello parted company one night with
+the general, and made direct for Portugal, that he might carry the
+first intelligence to the king of the discovery of India; and arrived
+at <i>Cascais</i>  on the 10th of July 1499[74]. He went immediately to
+the king, whom he informed of all that had befallen the general in
+his discovery of the Indies, and of the commodities which had been
+brought from thence; of which discovery, and of the prospect which it
+held out of a direct trade with India by sea, the king was as glad as
+when he had been proclaimed king of Portugal.</p>
+<blockquote>[74] De Faria alleges that Coello was separated by a
+storm near Cape Verd, and arrived at Lisbon, thinking De Gama had got
+home before him.--Astl. I. 40. b.</blockquote>
+<p>After the separation of Coello, De Gama pursued his voyage for the
+island of St Jago, both because his brother Paulo was sick with
+consumptive complaints, and because his ship was in very bad
+condition; all her seams being open. At that island, he freighted a
+caravel, in hope of being able to get his brother home to Portugal,
+and left John de Sala in charge of his own ship, to have her repaired
+and new rigged before proceeding for Lisbon. The general and his
+brother left St Jago in the hired caravel for Lisbon; but the disease
+of Paulo de Gama increased so rapidly, that he was forced to put in
+at the island of Tercera, where Paulo de Gama departed this life like
+a good Christian and a worthy gentleman. When he had buried his
+brother, Vasco de Gama set sail for Portugal, and arrived at Belem in
+September 1499; having been two years and two months absent on this
+voyage. Of 108 men whom he had taken with him, only fifty[75] came
+home alive; which was a large proportion, considering the great and
+numerous dangers they had gone through.</p>
+<blockquote>[75] De Faria says fifty-five, and that they were all
+rewarded by the king.--Astl. I. 40. c.</blockquote>
+<p>When the general had returned thanks to God for his preservation
+and success, he sent notice of his arrival to the king, who sent
+Diego de Sylva y Menesis, Lord of Portugalete, and many other
+gentlemen, to conduct him honourably to court, which they did through
+a prodigious concourse of people, eager to see the man who had made
+so wonderful a voyage, and whom they had long thought dead. Being
+come into the presence, the king honoured him as one who, by the
+discovery of the Indies had done so much for the glory of God, for
+the honour and profit of the king of Portugal, and for the perpetual
+fame of the Portuguese name in the world. The king made him
+afterwards a knight, and gave him and his heirs permission to bear
+the royal arms of Portugal, as also to set at the foot of the
+escutcheon two does, which are called gamas in the Portuguese
+language. He also gave him a perpetual pension or rent-charge of
+300,000 rees[76] yearly, out of the tythe fish in the village
+of <i>Sinis</i> , in which he was born, and a promise of being made
+lord of that village; and till these grants were executed in form, he
+allowed him 1000 crowns a-year; which, after the royal grants were
+made, reverted to the house of the  <i>Contratation</i>  of the Indies.
+It was also granted, that when the trade with India should be
+established, he might bring home spices to the value of 200 ducats
+yearly, without paying any duty. He also gave him other possessions
+and rents, and a note of remembrance or promise to make him a
+lord[77]. Nicholas Coello was promoted to be a gentleman of the royal
+household, and received possessions and rents to bear his
+charges[78]. The king himself, in consequence of these discoveries,
+assumed the new title, of <i>Lord of the conquest and navigation of
+Ethiopia, Arabia, Persia, and the Indies</i> .</p>
+<blockquote>[76] The translator values this pension at 200l. a-year,
+perhaps equal in present value to 2000l.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[77] This does not appear to have been actually done
+until his return from India the second time, as will be mentioned
+hereafter.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[78] According to Astley, but without quoting any
+particular authority, De Gama had a grant from the king of the title
+of Don for himself and his descendants, and a pension of 3000 ducats:
+Coello was raised to the rank of Fidalgo, or gentleman, and had an
+appointment of 100 ducats yearly.--Astl.I. 40.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+<p> <i>Voyage of Pedro Alvarez Cabral to India in 1500; being the
+second made by the Portuguese to India, and in the course of which
+Brasil was Discovered.</i> </p>
+<p>The certainty of a navigable communication with India, and the
+vast riches that were to be had in that country, being now
+ascertained, the king resolved to prosecute the discovery, on purpose
+to spread the gospel among the idolaters, and to augment his own
+revenues and the riches and prosperity of his subjects. For these
+purposes, he determined to attempt the settlement of a factory in
+Calicut by gentle means; hopeful that they might be persuaded to a
+friendly intercourse, and might afterwards listen to the word of
+God.</p>
+<p>He therefore commanded that a fleet of ten ships and two caravels
+should be got ready against next year, to be well laden with all the
+commodities which De gama had reported to have current sale in
+Calicut. There went others also to Sofala and Quiloa, where also he
+commanded factories to be established, both on account of the gold
+which was to be found there, and that the ships might have a place to
+touch and refresh at in their way to and from India. Over the fleet
+intended for Calicut, he appointed Pedro Alvarez Cabral, a gentleman
+of an honourable house, to be captain-general, Sancho de Toar being
+captain of his ship. The names of the other captains, so far as have
+come to my knowledge, were Nicholas Coello, Don Luis Continho, Simon
+de Myseranda, Simon Leyton, Bartholomew Diaz, who discovered the Cape
+of Good Hope, and his brother Diego Diaz, who had been purser to
+Vasco do Gama in the former voyage. Of the caravels, Pedro de
+Tayde[1] and Vasco de Silviera, were captains. Arias Correa was
+appointed supercargo of the whole fleet, and was ordered to remain as
+factor in Calicut, having Gonsalo Gil Barboso and Pedro Vas Caninon
+as his clerks. Two ships were to remain with the merchandize at
+Sofala, where Loriso Hurtado was to be factor. In the whole of this
+fleet there embarked 1500 men[2].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] It will appear in the sequel that there was another
+captain named Vasco de Tayde.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] Astley says only 1200,--Astl. I. 40.</blockquote>
+<p>The general was instructed, besides settling the factories, that
+if the zamorin would not quietly consent or give sufficient lading to
+the ships, he should make cruel war upon him for his injurious
+conduct to Vasco de Gama. If the zamorin consented to the
+establishment of a factory and trade, the general was secretly to
+request him not to allow any of the Moors of Mecca to remain or to
+trade in Calicut, or any other harbour in his dominions, and to
+promise that the Portuguese should hereafter supply all such
+commodities as used to be brought by the Moors, of better quality and
+cheaper than theirs. That he should touch at Melinda, to land the
+ambassador who had been brought from thence by De Gama, together with
+a present for the king of that place. Along with this fleet, the king
+sent five friars of the order of St Francis, of whom Fra Henrique was
+vicar, who was afterwards bishop <i>Siebta</i> , and who was to remain
+in the factory to preach the Catholic faith to the Malabars[3].</p>
+<blockquote>[3] According to Astley, there were eight Franciscan
+friars besides the vicar, eight chaplains, and a chaplin-major; and
+that their orders were to begin with preaching, and in case that
+failed, to enforce the gospel by the sword. In other words, to
+establish the accursed tribunal of the inquisition in India, to the
+eternal disgrace of Portugal, and of the pretended followers of the
+ever-blessed Prince of Peace.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The fleet being in full readiness, the king went in procession, on
+Sunday the 7th of March 1500, to hear mass at the monastery of Belem,
+accompanied by the captain-general, whom he took along with himself
+behind the curtain in the royal seat, to do him the more honour.
+After mass, Don Diego Ortis, bishop of Viseu, preached a sermon, in
+which he gave high praise to Cabral for undertaking the command of
+this expedition, as serving not only the king his temporal master,
+but the eternal GOD his spiritual Lord, drawing many comparisons in
+his favour from the Grecian and Roman histories. Mass being ended, a
+banner of the royal arms of Portugal was delivered to the bishop, who
+solemnly blessed it, and returned it to the king, who delivered it to
+Cabral, that it might be displayed at his main-top. The bishop then,
+gave a bonnet to the general, which had been blessed by the pope, and
+placed a rich jewel with his own hands on his head, and gave him his
+blessing. When these ceremonies were ended, the king accompanied the
+captain-general to the water side, where he and the other captains of
+the fleet took leave of the king, kissing his hands, the king giving
+them Gods blessing and his own; after which all went on board, and
+the whole fleet saluted the king by discharging all the ordnance of
+all the ships: But the wind being foul, the fleet could not depart
+that day, and the king returned to Lisbon.</p>
+<p>Next day, being the 9th of May 1500, having a fair wind, the fleet
+weighed by signal from the general, and set sail at eight in the
+morning[4]. " <i>The whole fleete having wayed, did then begin to cut
+and spread their sayles with great pleasure and crie, saieng
+altogether</i> , Buen viage, <i>that is to say, a luckie and prosperous
+voyage. After all this, they beganne all to be joyfull, every man to
+use his severall office: The gunners in the midst of the ship,
+hailing the maine sheets with the capsteine: The mariners and ship
+boys, some in the forecastell haling bollings, braces, and martnets:
+Others belying the sheets both great and small, and also serving in
+trimming the sayles, and others the nettings and foretop sayles:
+Other some vering the trusses, and also beleying brases and toppe
+sayle sheets, and coyling every sort of ropes. It was wonderful to
+see such a number of diversities of offices in so small a roome, as
+is the bredth and length of a ship</i> ."</p>
+<blockquote>[4] The remainder of this paragraph is given in the
+precise words and orthography of the original translator, Nicholas
+Lichfild, as a curious specimen of the nautical language of Britain
+in 1582.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Going on their voyage with a quarter wind, they came in sight of
+the Canaries on the 14th of March, and passed St Jago on the 22d. On
+the 24th of the same month, the caravel commanded by Vasco de Tayde
+parted company, and was never seen afterwards[5]. After waiting two
+days for the missing ship, the fleet proceeded on its voyage, and on
+the 24th of April, came in sight of land. This was cause of much joy,
+as it was supposed to be a country which had not been discovered by
+De Gama, because it lay to the west[6] of their course. Cabral
+immediately sent off the master of his ship in a small boat to
+examine the country, who reported that it appeared pleasant and
+fertile, with extensive woods and many inhabitants. The fleet was
+brought to anchor, and the master sent again on shore to examine more
+narrowly into the state of the country and its inhabitants. His
+account was that the natives were well proportioned, and of a swarthy
+colour, armed with bows and arrows, and all naked. A storm arising at
+night, the fleet weighed anchor and stood along; the coast, till they
+found a good harbour, in which they all came to anchor, naming
+it <i>Puerto Seguro</i> , or the Safe Port, as it was quite secure in
+all weathers. Our men took two of the natives in an almadia or canoe,
+who were brought to the admiral, but no one could understand their
+language. They had therefore apparel given them, and were set on
+shore much pleased. This encouraged the rest of the natives to mix
+with our people in a friendly manner; but finding nothing to detain
+him here, the general determined to take in a supply of water, not
+knowing when he might have another opportunity. Next day, being in
+Easter week, a solemn mass was said on shore under a pavilion, and a
+sermon was preached by Fra Henrique. During service, many of the
+natives gathered around, who seemed very merry, playing and leaping
+about, and sounding cornets, horns, and other instruments. After
+mass, the natives followed the general to his boat, singing and
+making merry. In the afternoon our men were allowed to go on shore,
+where they bartered cloth and paper with the natives for parrots and
+other beautiful birds, which are very numerous in that country, and
+with whose feathers the natives make very shewy hats and caps. Some
+of our men went into the country to see the towns or dwellings of the
+natives, and reported that the land was very fertile, and full of
+woods and waters, with plenty of fruits of various kinds, and much
+cotton.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] According to De Faria, this vessel parted in a storm
+near Cape Verd, and returned to Portugal.--Astl. I. 41.
+a.</blockquote>
+<p>As this was the country now so well known by the name of Brasil, I
+shall not say any more about it in this place, except that the fleet
+remained here for eight days; during which a great fish was thrown
+ashore by the sea, greater than any <i>tonel</i> , and as broad as two.
+It was of a round form, having eyes like those of a hog, and ears
+like an elephant, but no teeth; having two vents under its belly, and
+a tail three quarters of a yard broad, and as much in length. The
+skin was like that of a hog, and a finger in thickness. The general
+ordered a high stone cross to be erected at this place, and named his
+new discovery <i>La tierra de Santa Cruz</i> , or the Land of the Holy
+Cross. From hence he sent home a caravel, with letters to the king,
+giving an account of his voyage hitherto, and that he had left two
+exiles[7] in this place, to examine the country; and particularly to
+ascertain if it were a continent, as appeared from the length of
+coast he had passed. He sent likewise one of the natives, to shew
+what kind of people inhabited the land. Considering the great length
+of the voyage he had to perform, Cabral did not deem it proper to
+spend any more time in examining this new country, but departed from
+Puerto Seguro[8] on the 2d of May, steering his course for the Cape
+of Good Hope, which was estimated to be 1200 leagues distant, and
+having a great and fearful gulf to cross, rendered dangerous by the
+great winds which prevail in these seas during most part of the
+year.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] By some unaccountable mistake, the translation of
+Castaneda by Lichefild says to the <i>east</i> .--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] It appears that Cabral had twenty malefactors on
+board for such purposes, who had received pardon on condition of
+submitting to be landed on occasions of danger.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[8] Puerto Seguro is in lat. 16&deg;S. and about long.
+39&deg; 40'W. This country of Brasil derived its name from the
+dye-wood so called.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the 12th of May a great comet appeared in the heavens, coming
+from the east, and was visible during ten days and nights, always
+increasing in splendour. On Saturday the 23d of May, there arose a
+great storm from the north-east, attended with a high sea and heavy
+rain, which forced the whole fleet to take in their sails. On its
+abatement they again spread their foresails; and falling calm towards
+night, the ships astern spread out all their sprit-sails to overtake
+the rest. On Sunday the 24th the wind again increased, and all the
+sails were furled. Between ten and eleven o'clock of that day a
+water-spout was seen in the north-west, and the wind lulled. This
+deceived the pilots as a sign of good weather, wherefore they still
+carried sail: But it was succeeded by a furious tempest, which came
+on so suddenly that they had not time to furl their sails, and four
+ships were sunk with all their men, one of which was commanded by
+Bartholomew Diaz, the discoverer of the Cape of Good Hope. The
+other <i>seven</i> [9] were half filled with water, and had been all
+lost if a part of their sails had not given way to the tempest. Soon
+afterwards the storm veered to the south-west, but still continued so
+violent that they had to drive all that day and the next under bare
+poles, and the fleet much separated. On the third day the wind became
+more moderate, coming round to the east and north-east, attended by a
+heavy swell, and the waves run higher than had ever been seen before,
+yet the fleet joined again to their great joy. This wind and high sea
+continued for twenty days, during all which time the ships had to lie
+to, and were so tossed that no one thought it possible to escape
+being swallowed up. During day, the sea was black as pitch, and at
+night it appeared like fire. The general, with Simon de Myranda and
+Pedro de Tayde, bore up to windward during this long continued gale;
+while all the rest submitted to the wind and went at Gods mercy.</p>
+<blockquote>[9] Originally, according to Castaneda, there were only
+ten ships and two caravels: Both the caravels have been already
+accounted for as having left the fleet; and after the loss of four
+ships, six only ought to have remained. Astley makes the whole fleet
+originally to have consisted of thirteen vessels, which will allow of
+seven now remaining. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>When the storm abated, the general found that, with only two other
+ships in company, he had doubled the Cape of Good Hope without having
+seen it. On the 16th of July they fell close in with the coast of
+Africa, in lat. 27&deg;S. but the pilots did not know the coast, and
+the general would not allow any one to go on shore. They could see
+great numbers of people on the land, yet none came down to the shore
+to view the ships. Having no hope of procuring provisions from the
+natives, the seamen caught great plenty of fish at this place; after
+which the general pursued his course close along shore, where he
+constantly saw many people, and great numbers of cattle feeding along
+the banks of a river which fell into the sea in that
+neighbourhood.[10] Proceeding in this manner, the general came to
+Sofala, with which the pilots were unacquainted, near which lay two
+islands,[11] close by one of which two vessels lay at anchor. These
+immediately made for the shore on seeing the Portuguese ships, and
+being pursued were taken without resistance. The principal person
+belonging to these vessels was a near relation[12] of the king of
+Melinda, and was going from Sofala to Melinda with gold. The people
+were so much afraid on seeing our ships, that they threw a great part
+of the gold into the sea, and most of them escaped on shore. The
+general was much concerned at his loss, especially that it should
+have fallen on the subject and relation of a prince who was in
+friendship with the king his master; and after shewing him every
+civility, restored the two vessels with all the remaining gold. The
+Moor asked Cabral if he had any witches on board, who could conjure
+up his gold from the bottom of the sea? Cabral answered, that the
+Christians believe in the true God, and do not practice or give
+credit to witchcraft.</p>
+<blockquote>[10] This part of the voyage is very indistinctly
+described. From the lat. of 27&deg;S. where Cabral is said to have
+fallen in with the eastern coast of Africa, to Sofala, in lat.
+19&deg;S. the coast stretches out nearly five degrees to the east, to
+Capes Corientes and St Sebastian, with many rivers, the great bays of
+Delogoa and Asnea, and the islands of Bocica or Bozarnio, all of
+which must have been seen by Cabral during the slow navigation close
+along shore, but all of which are omitted in the
+text.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[11] Named Inhazato. Sofala is in lat. 13&deg;S. and
+almost 36&deg;E. from Greenwich.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[12] According to De Faria, this person was uncle to the
+king of Melinda, and was named Sheikh Foteyma.--Astl.I. 41.
+b.</blockquote>
+<p>Learning from this Moor that he had overshot Sofala, and not being
+inclined to turn back, the general continued his voyage to
+Mozambique; where he arrived on the 20th of July and took in a supply
+of water, and procured a pilot to carry him to the island of Quiloa,
+towards which he directed his course. In this part of the voyage he
+saw several fertile islands, belonging to the king of Quiloa, who is
+a powerful prince; his dominions extending from Cape Corientes almost
+to Mombaza, along nearly 400 leagues of coast, including the two
+islands near Sofala, that city itself and several others to
+Mozambique, many more all the way to Mombaza, with a great number of
+islands; from all which he derives large revenues.[13] Yet he has few
+soldiers, and lives in no great state. His constant residence is in
+an island named Quiloa, near the continent of Ethiopia, an hundred
+leagues from Mozambique. This island is full of gardens and orchards,
+with plenty of various kinds of fruits, and excellent water, and the
+country produces abundance of <i>miso</i> [14] and other grain, and
+breeds great numbers of small cattle; and the sea affords great
+plenty of excellent fish. The city of Quiloa is in lat. 9&deg;25'S.
+and long. 40&deg;20'E. handsomely built of stone and lime, and
+pleasantly situated between fine gardens and the sea, having
+abundance of provisions from its own island and from other places on
+the continent. The king and the inhabitants of the city are Moors of
+a fair colour using the Arabic language, but the original natives of
+the country are Negroes. The Moors of Quiloa are richly dressed,
+especially the women, who wear many golden ornaments. They are great
+merchants, enjoying the principal trade in gold at Sofala, whence it
+is distributed over Arabia Felix, and other countries; and many
+merchants resort thither from other places. Hence there are always
+many ships in this port, which are all hauled upon the beach when not
+in use. These ships[15] have no nails, but are sewed together by rope
+made of <i>cairo</i> , and have their bottoms payed with wild
+frankincense, as the country produces no pitch. The winter here
+begins in April and ends in May.</p>
+<blockquote>[13] In modern maps this extensive line of coast is
+divided into the following separate territories, Inhambane, Sabia,
+Sofala, Mocaranga, Mozambico, and Querimba; which will be illustrated
+in future portions of this work.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[14] This word <i>miso</i>  is probably an error of the
+press for mylyo, by which the African grain named millet is
+distinguished in other parts of Castaneda. The <i>small cattle</i>  of
+the text are probably meant for sheep, as they are frequently thus
+contradistinguished in other parts of the original from <i>great
+cattle</i> , not here mentioned.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[15] These vessels were probably precisely similar to the
+Arab <i>dows</i>  of the Red Sea and Persian Gulf, which will be
+afterwards more particularly described.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On arriving at Quiloa, and receiving a safe-conduct for that
+purpose, the general sent Alonso Hurtado, attended by seven of the
+principal officers, to wait upon the king, signifying that Cabral had
+come here with the fleet of the king of Portugal to settle a trade in
+the city, and had great store of merchandize fit for that purpose;
+and to say that he was desirous to confer with his highness on this
+subject, but had been forbidden by the king his master to go on
+shore. The king agreed to give Cabral an audience afloat; and, on the
+following day Cabral waited for the king in his boat, which was
+covered over with flags, and attended by all the other captains in
+their boats; as now Sancho de Toar and other two ships had joined
+company again. The king came in an almadia, accompanied by many
+principal Moors in other boats, all decked with flags, and with many
+trumpets, cornets, and sackbuts, making a great noise. On the arrival
+of the king, the whole Portuguese ordnance was fired off, by which
+the king and his train were much alarmed, not having been accustomed
+to such a salute. After mutual civilities, the letter from the king
+of Portugal was read, proposing the settlement of trade between the
+two nations, to which the king of Quiloa assented, and agreed that
+Alonso Hurtado should wait upon him next day with an account of the
+kinds of merchandize the Portuguese had to dispose of, for which he
+promised to give gold in exchange. But when Hurtado went next day on
+shore, the king made many excuses for not performing his promise,
+pretending to have no need of the commodities, and believing that the
+general came to conquer his country. The true reason was because he
+was a Moor and we were Christians, and he was unwilling to have any
+trade or intercourse with us. After this the general remained three
+or four days, to see if the king would change his mind; but he
+continued inflexible, and strengthened himself with armed men, as
+jealous of being attacked.</p>
+<p>Finding that nothing could be done here, the general went on his
+voyage, and arrived at Melinda on the 2d of August. At this port he
+found three ships at anchor belonging to Moorish merchants of
+Cambaya; but, though laden with great riches, he would not meddle
+with them, out of respect for the king of Melinda. On coming to
+anchor the general saluted the king with all his ordnance; on which
+the king sent a complimentary message of welcome, with a present of
+many sheep, hens, and ducks, and great quantities of fruits. The
+general sent a message in return, intimating that he had come here by
+orders of the king of Portugal, to know if his highness had any
+service which the fleet could perform for him, and to deliver a
+letter and a rich present from the king of Portugal, which he would
+send whenever his highness pleased to give his commands. The king was
+much pleased with this message, and detained the messenger all night,
+most part of which he spent in making inquiries respecting the
+kingdom of Portugal. As soon as it was day, the king sent two
+principal Moors to wait upon the general, declaring his joy at his
+arrival, and desiring, if he had need of any thing in the country, to
+command all there as his own. The general then sent Aries Correa, the
+factor-general of the fleet, on shore to deliver the letter and
+presents, accompanied by most of the principal officers, and having
+all the trumpeters of the fleet sounding before him. The present
+consisted of the rich caparison of a riding-horse, of the most
+splendid and shewy fashion. The king sent the nobles of his court to
+receive Correa in great state, and several women who had censers or
+perfuming pans which filled the air with a delightful odour. The king
+received Correa in his palace, which was very near the water side,
+sitting in his chair of state, and accompanied by many noblemen and
+gentlemen. The letter, which was written hi Portuguese on one side
+and Arabic on the other, being read, and the present laid before the
+king, he and his nobles all in one voice gave thanks to God and
+Mahomet for granting them the friendship of so great a prince. During
+the three days which the fleet continued here, Correa remained on
+shore at the kings particular request, in which he constantly
+employed himself in inquiries concerning the customs of the king of
+Portugal and the conduct of his government.</p>
+<p>The king of Melinda was very anxious to have Cabral to come on
+shore to the palace, but he excused himself as having been ordered by
+his master not to land at any port, with which the king was
+satisfied, yet desired to have an interview on the water. On this
+occasion, though the palace was very near the sea, he went on
+horseback to the shore, having his horse decorated with the rich
+caparisons sent him by the king of Portugal, which were obliged to be
+put on by one of our men as none of the natives knew their use. On
+coming to the shore, certain principal natives waited at the foot of
+the stair, having a live sheep, which they opened alive, taking out
+the bowels, and the king rode over the carcase of the sheep.  <i>This
+is a kind of ceremony that the witches there do use</i> .[16] After
+this he went to the water side, with all his train on foot, saying in
+a loud voice certain words of incantation. The interview with the
+general took place on the water in great ceremony, and the king gave
+him a pilot to carry the fleet to Calicut. Cabral left two banished
+men at Melinda to inform themselves of all the circumstances of the
+country to the best of their abilities. One of these,
+called <i>Machado</i> , when he had learned the Arabic language, went
+afterwards by land to the straits of the Red Sea, and from thence by
+Cambaya to <i>Balagarte</i> , and settled with the <i>sabayo</i>  or lord
+of Goa, passing always for a Moor. This man was afterwards very
+serviceable to Albuquerque, as will be seen hereafter.</p>
+<blockquote>[16] Thus the translation of Castaneda by Lichefild. It
+was more probably a superstitious ceremony to guard against
+witches.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Leaving Melinda on the 7th of August, he came to Ansandina or
+Anche-diva, on the 20th of that month, where he waited some days for
+the fleet of Mecca, which he meant to have attacked. While there, the
+whole of the crews confessed and received the sacrament. No ships
+appearing, the fleet left Anchediva and sailed for Calicut, coming to
+anchor within a league of that place on the 13th of September.
+Several almadias came off immediately to sell victuals: And some of
+the principal nayres, with a Guzurat merchant, brought a message from
+the zamorin,[17] declaring his satisfaction at the arrival of the
+general at his city, in which every thing he might need was at his
+command. The general made a polite answer to the king, with thanks
+for his civility, and gave orders to bring the fleet nearer to the
+city, in doing which all the ordnance was fired as a salute, to the
+great astonishment of the natives, the idolaters among them saying
+that it was impossible to resist us. Next day one Gaspar[18] was sent
+on shore to the zamorin, desiring to have a safe-conduct for a
+deputation from the general to wait on his highness; and along with
+Gaspar the four Malabars who had been carried away from Calicut by
+Don Vasco de la Gama were sent on shore. These men were all finely
+dressed in Portuguese habits, and the whole inhabitants of the city
+came out to see them, rejoiced to find they had been well treated.
+Though the zamorin was well pleased with the safe return of his
+subjects, he refused allowing them to come into his presence as they
+were only fishermen, or of a low cast; but he sent for Gaspar, whom
+he received with civility, and whom he assured that our people might
+come on shore in perfect safety. On receiving this intelligence,
+Cabral sent Alonso Hurtado to the zamorin, intimating that the
+Portuguese fleet had come on purpose to settle trade and friendship,
+and that the general wished for an audience in which to arrange these
+matters with his highness. But had orders from the king his master
+not to go on shore without sufficient pledges for his security; among
+whom he demanded the kutwal of Calicut and Araxamenoca one of the
+chiefs of the nayres.[19] On this occasion Hurtado was accompanied by
+a person who could speak the language, to act as his interpreter.</p>
+<blockquote>[17] In an account of this voyage by a Portuguese pilot,
+inserted in the collection of Ramusio, the name of the reigning
+zamorin is said to have been Gnaffer. Ramus. I. 125.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[18] Probably the person who was carried prisoner from
+Anchediva by De Gama, in the former voyage.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[19] According to De Faria, the hostages demanded on this
+occasion were six principal men of the Bramin cast, whose names were
+brought from Portugal by Cabral, by the advice of Bontaybo or
+Moncayde, the Moor who went off with De Gama.--Astl. I. 43.
+b.</blockquote>
+<p>The zamorin was unwilling to send the hostages required, alleging
+that they were old and sickly, and offered to send others who were
+better able to endure the hardships of living on board. Yet he
+afterwards, at the instigation of the Moors, was against sending any
+hostages; as they made him believe that the general shewed little
+confidence in his promise, which was derogatory to his honour and
+dignity. This negociation lasted three days, as Hurtado insisted on
+this as a necessary preliminary. At length, desirous of having trade
+settled with us, owing to the advantages which would accrue to his
+revenue, the zamorin agreed to give the hostages required. On which,
+leaving the command of the fleet in his absence to Sancho de Toar,
+Cabral directed that the hostages should be well treated, but on no
+account to deliver them to any one even although demanded in his
+name. On the 28th of December, Cabral went on shore magnificently
+dressed and attended by thirty of his principal officers and others,
+the kings servants, in as much state as if he had been king of
+Portugal; carrying with him rich furniture for his apartments, with a
+cupboard of plate containing many rich pieces of gilt silver. He was
+met by many principal nayres, sent by the zamorin to wait upon him,
+and attended by a numerous train, among whom were many persons
+sounding trumpets sackbuts and other musical instruments. The zamorin
+waited for him in a gallery close by the shore, which had been
+erected on purpose; and while the general went towards the shore,
+accompanied by all the boats of the fleet, dressed out with flags and
+streamers, the hostages were carried on board his ship, where they
+were loath to enter till they should see the general on shore, lest
+he might return and detain them; but were at last reassured of their
+safety by Aries Correa. On landing, Cabral was received in great
+state by several <i>caymals, pinakals</i> , and other principal nayres;
+by whose directions he was placed in an <i>andor</i>  or chair, in
+which he was carried to the <i>serame</i>  or hall of audience, where
+the king waited his arrival.</p>
+<p>The serame or gallery, was all hung round with rich carpets,
+called  <i>alcatifas</i> ; and at the farther end the zamorin sat in an
+alcove or recess resembling a small chapel, with a canopy of unshorn
+crimson velvet over his head, and having twenty silk cushions under
+him and about him. The zamorin was almost naked, having only a piece
+of white cotton round his waist, wrought with gold. On his head he
+wore a cap of cloth of gold resembling a helmet. In his ears he had
+rich jewels of diamonds, sapphires, and pearls, two of the latter
+being as large as walnuts. His arms, from the elbows to the wrists,
+were covered with golden bracelets, set with numberless precious
+stones of great value; and his legs, from the knees to the ankles,
+were similarly adorned. His fingers and toes had numerous rings, and
+on one of his great toes he wore a ruby of great size and wonderful
+brilliancy. One of his diamonds was bigger than a large bean. All
+these were greatly surpassed by his girdle of gold and jewels, which
+was altogether inestimable, and was so brilliant that it dazzled the
+eyes of the beholders. Beside the zamorin was a rich throne or state
+chair, all of gold and jewels; and his <i>andor</i> , in which he had
+been carried from the palace was of similar richness, and stood near
+him. He was attended by twenty trumpeters, seventeen of whom had
+silver trumpets, and three of them gold, all the mouth-pieces being
+finely wrought and set with jewels. Although in full day, the hall
+was lighted by many silver lamps, in the fashion of the Moors. Close
+by the king there stood a spitting basin of gold, and several silver
+perfuming-pans, which produced an excellent odour. Six paces from the
+king, he was attended on by his two brothers, who were the nearest
+heirs to the kingdom; and a little farther off were many noblemen,
+all standing.</p>
+<p>On entering the hall, and seeing the splendid state of the
+zamorin, Cabral would have kissed his hand, as is the custom of
+Europe; but was informed that this was not customary among them, and
+therefore sat down in a chair near the king, which was appointed for
+him as an especial honour. He then delivered his letter of credit
+from the king of Portugal, written in Arabic, and then said, that the
+king his master, willing to cultivate trade and friendship with the
+zamorin and his subjects, had given him orders to require permission
+to establish a factory or house of trade in Calicut, which should
+always be supplied with every kind of merchandize that was in demand;
+and requested the zamorin to supply a sufficient loading of spices
+for the ships under his command, which he was ready to pay for,
+either by means of the commodities he had on board, or in ready
+money. The zamorin seemed or affected to be pleased with the embassy,
+and said that the king of Portugal was welcome to every thing in his
+city of which he was in need. At this time the present from the king
+of Portugal to the zamorin was brought forwards; which, among other
+things, contained, a richly wrought basin and ewer of silver gilt; a
+gilt silver flaggon and cover of similar workmanship; two silver
+maces; four cushions, two of which were cloth of gold, and the other
+two of unshorn crimson velvet; a state canopy of cloth of gold, bound
+and fringed with gold; a carpet of rich crimson velvet; two very rich
+arras hangings, one ornamented with human figures, and the other with
+representations of trees and flowers. The zamorin was much satisfied
+with this present, and said the general might either retire to his
+lodgings for rest and refreshment, or might return to his ships as he
+thought best; but, as the hostages were men of high cast and could
+not endure the sea, who could neither eat or drink while on board
+consistent with their customs, it became necessary that they should
+come on shore. Wherefore, if the general would return to his ship and
+send these men on shore, and inclined to come back next day to
+conclude all matters relative to the trade of Calicut, the same
+hostages should be again sent on board. As the general placed
+confidence in these assurances of the zamorin, he went on board,
+leaving Hurtado and other seven of his people in charge of his
+valuables that were left on shore. When at the water side and ready
+to embark, a servant of one of the hostages, who was dispatched by
+the comptroller of the zamorins household, went before in an almadia
+or small pinnace, and gave notice to the hostages that the general
+was coming on board. On which they leapt into the sea, meaning to
+escape to land in the almadia with the servant: But Aries Correa went
+immediately with some of the Portuguese mariners in a boat, and
+retook two of the hostages, with three or four of the Malabars
+belonging to the almadia: The rest of the hostages, among whom was
+the kutwal, got to the city.</p>
+<p>When Cabral came on board and learnt what had happened, he ordered
+the two remaining hostages to be secured below deck, and sent a
+complaint to the zamorin against the conduct of the hostages, laying
+all the blame on the comptroller. He desired the messenger to inform
+the zamorin of the situation of the two remaining hostages, and to
+say that they should be liberated whenever the Portuguese and the
+goods on shore were sent back to the ships. Next day the zamorin came
+to the shore accompanied by 12, 000 men, and sent off the Portuguese
+people and their commodities to the ships in thirty almadias, with
+orders to bring back the hostages. But none of the Malabars in the
+almadias dared to approach the ships, being afraid of the Portuguese,
+and returned therefore to the land without delivering our people and
+commodities. Next day, the general sent some of his own boats to land
+the pledges, but at some distance from the almadias; on which
+occasion Araxamenoca, one of the hostages, leapt into the sea with an
+intention to escape, but was retaken; and while our people were
+busied in securing him, the other hostage made his escape. The
+general was astonished at the want of truth and honour in these
+people, and gave orders to keep Araxamenoca in strict custody; but
+finding at the end of three days that the zamorin did not send for
+him, and that during all this period he refused all sustenance,
+Cabral took compassion on him and sent him to the zamorin, requesting
+that two of our men who remained on shore might be sent on board,
+which was complied with.</p>
+<p>After waiting three days without any message from the zamorin, the
+general sent one Francisco Correa to inquire if he inclined to
+confirm the agreement between them, in which case he would send Aries
+Correa on shore to treat with his highness, for whose safety he
+required hostages. The zamorin answered that he was perfectly willing
+to have the trade established, and that the general might send Aries
+Correa or any other person on shore for that purpose, and transmitted
+two grandsons of a rich merchant of Guzerate as hostages. Aries
+Correa went accordingly on shore, and was accommodated by the orders
+of the zamorin with a convenient house for himself and his goods,
+which belonged to the Guzerate merchant, who was likewise commanded
+to assist Correa in regard to the prices of his merchandize and all
+other things relating to the trade and customs of the place. But this
+man being a friend to the Moors of Mecca, thwarted him in all things
+instead of giving him assistance. The Moors were determined enemies
+to our people, both for being Christians, and lest their credit and
+advantageous traffic in Calicut might suffer by the establishment of
+our trade in that port. Wherefore, by means of their confederacy with
+the Guzerate merchant, they took our goods at any price they pleased,
+and intimidated the Malabars from trading with us. The Moors
+concluded that the establishment of our factory would lower the price
+of such commodities as they had to sell, and would inhance the value
+of the spiceries, drugs, and jewels which they took in exchange. On
+this account they thwarted Correa in all his transactions, offering
+higher prices than ordinary for every article, by which he was
+constrained to buy every thing at a very dear rate. If at any time he
+wished an audience of the zamorin, the Moors always contrived to be
+present, that some of them might speak against him. In this conduct
+they were assisted by  <i>Samicide</i> [20], a Moor, who was admiral of
+Calicut; who likewise hindered any of our people of the factory from
+going on board the fleet, and detained any of our boats that
+approached the shore, pretending to do this by command of the
+zamorin.</p>
+<blockquote>[20] Named by De Faria, Coje Cimireci.--Astl. I. 44,
+a.</blockquote>
+<p>On learning this sinister conduct of the Moorish admiral of
+Calicut, and suspecting some intended treachery, the general gave
+orders to the fleet to weigh their anchors, and to remove out of the
+harbour, lest they might be attacked by the zamorins fleet, and that
+he might take counsel with the other captains for the safety of the
+expedition. On learning this, the zamorin inquired the reason from
+Correa, who urged the injurious behaviour of the Moors, and told him
+all that they had done. The zamorin immediately gave orders that the
+Moors should discontinue their villanous conduct towards us, and even
+removed the Guzerate merchant from our factory, appointing
+one <i>Cosebequin</i> [21] in his place, who, though a Moor, was a very
+honest man and behaved to us in a friendly manner. This man was of
+great credit in Calicut, being the head of all the native Moors of
+that country, who are always at variance with the Moors of Cairo and
+of the Red Sea, of whom the admiral Samicide was the chief. The
+Zamorin gave farther orders, that our factory should be removed to a
+house close to the shore which belonged to Cosebequin, that our
+merchants might have greater freedom to buy and sell, without any
+interruption from the Moors. For the greater security, a deed of gift
+was made of this house by the zamorin to the king of Portugal and his
+successors for ever, a copy of which, signed and sealed by the
+zamorin, was enclosed in a casket of gold that it might be conveyed
+to Portugal; and permission was given to display a flag of the royal
+arms of Portugal from the top of the factory[22]. On receiving
+intelligence of these favourable measures, Cabral brought back the
+fleet into the harbour of Calicut, and sent his compliments of thanks
+to the zamorin for his gracious and favourable dispositions. After
+this, our factory had tolerably good fortune in conducting its trade
+by the assistance of Cosebequin: and the natives, finding our factory
+favoured by the zamorin, behaved so very civilly to our people that
+they could go about wherever they pleased, with as much freedom and
+safety as in Lisbon.</p>
+<blockquote>[21] Called Coje Bequi by De Faria; or rather Khojah
+Beki, or Beghi: But most of the foreign names are so corruptly given
+that it is difficult to rectify them.--Astl. I. 44. b.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[22] According to De Faria, this house was granted not
+without great difficulty, and was taken possession of by Correa with
+sixty men.-- Astl. I. 45.</blockquote>
+<p>During the subsistence of this friendly intercourse, a large
+Moorish ship was descried from Calicut on its voyage from Cochin for
+Cambaya; and the zamorin requested our general to make prize of the
+ship, alleging that it contained a peculiarly fine elephant which he
+wished to possess, and which had been refused to him although he had
+offered more than its value. The general answered that he would do
+this willingly to gratify his highness; but, as he was informed the
+ship was large and well manned, both with mariners and soldiers, it
+could not be expected to surrender without resistance, in which some
+men might be slain on both sides, and it was therefore necessary he
+should have the sanction of his highness to kill these people in case
+of resistance, which was accordingly granted. Upon which the general
+sent Pedro de Tayde in his caravel, accompanied by a valiant young
+gentleman named Duarte, or Edward Pacheco, and by sixty fighting men,
+with orders to take this ship. Along with them the zamorin sent
+certain Moors, that they might witness the manner of fighting used by
+the Portuguese. The caravel gave chase to the Moorish ship till
+night, and then lost sight of her; but in sailing along shore by
+moon-light, they saw her riding at anchor, ready for defence, judging
+her to be about 600 tons burthen, and to contain 300 fighting men.
+Pacheco, according to his orders, did not think proper to lay the
+Moorish ship on board, but commanded his ship to be brought to,
+intending to sink the Moorish ship by means of his ordnance, in case
+of necessity. The Moors made light of our small force, which they
+greeted with loud cries and the sound of musical instruments, after
+which they played their ordnance against our caravel. They were
+bravely answered by our men, and one of our balls struck them between
+wind and water, so that the Moorish ship took in much water; and many
+of their men being killed and wounded by our shot, they bore away for
+the bay of Cananor, which was very near, and came there to anchor
+beside other four Moorish ships. Pacheco followed them and continued
+to batter them with his guns, and had assuredly taken them had not
+certain <i>paroas</i>  belonging to the Moors come from the port of
+Cananor to their assistance. The night growing very dark, Pacheco
+quitted the bay lest his caravel might be set on fire by the Moors,
+and came to anchor close to an island at a short distance, having had
+nine of his men wounded by arrows during the engagement.</p>
+<p>Next morning Pacheco again attacked the Moorish ship, which at
+last yielded, to the great displeasure of the natives of Cananor, who
+had flocked to the seaside intending to have succoured the Moors;
+but, on Pacheco sending a few shots among them, they all dispersed.
+Pacheco came next day to Calicut with his prize, where the zamorin
+came down to the water side to see the Moorish ship, giving great
+praise to our people for their prowess, being much astonished that so
+great a ship should be taken by one so much inferior in size and
+number of men. The general commanded this ship to be delivered to the
+zamorin, together with the seven elephants that were on board, which
+were worth in Calicut 30,000 crowns. He also sent a message to the
+zamorin, saying that he need not be astonished at this action as he
+would perform much greater actions to serve his highness. The zamorin
+returned thanks for what had been done, and desired the brave men who
+had performed this gallant action to be sent him, that he might do
+them honour and reward them as they deserved; and he bestowed large
+presents upon Pacheco in particular. Some affirm that the performance
+of this gallant feat by so small a number of our men against such
+great odds, raised fear and jealousy of the Portuguese in the mind of
+the zamorin, and made him anxious to get them away from his country;
+for which cause he gave his consent to the treachery which was used
+against them, as I mean to shew in the sequel[23].</p>
+<blockquote>[23] According to De Faria, this event was occasioned by
+the Moorish admiral of Calicut, without the knowledge of the zamorin,
+who instigated Cabral to the attempt in hope of injuring the
+Portuguese, and sent information to the Moors to be on their guard.
+He adds that Cabral, having discovered the fraud, restored the ship
+and cargo to the owners, whom he satisfied for their damages, in
+order to gain the favour of the rajah of Cochin.--Astl. I.
+45.</blockquote>
+<p>The Moors of Calicut were more terrified than ever at the
+Portuguese in consequence of the capture of this ship, and were much
+offended by the favour bestowed by the zamorin upon our men for their
+gallantry on this occasion. They believed that all this was done, out
+of, revenge against themselves, for the injuries they had done us,
+and was intended to induce them to retire from Calicut; especially as
+our people brought there as great store of merchandize as they did,
+and bought as many spices. Taking all this into consideration, they
+procured an audience of the zamorin, to whom one of their number made
+the following oration in the name of all the Moors.</p>
+<p> <i>"Emparather[24]</i>  of all the Malabars, as great as the
+mightiest sovereign of the Indies, and most powerful among the
+princes of the earth. We are astonished that you should debase
+yourself by receiving into your country these enemies of your law and
+strangers to the customs of your kingdom, who seem pirates rather
+than merchants. We should not wonder at your so doing were your city
+in want of the commodities they bring, or could not otherwise dispose
+of the spiceries they purchase: But we, whom you have long known and
+whose fidelity you are well assured of by experience, have always
+done both to the great increase of your revenue. You appear to forget
+all this, by receiving those whom you do not know into your favour,
+and employing them to revenge your injuries, as if your own numerous
+and faithful subjects were incompetent for the purpose. In this you
+dishonour yourself, and embolden these strangers to hold your power
+in contempt, and to act as we know they will hereafter, by robbing
+and plundering all merchant ships that frequent your port, to the
+ruin of your country, and who will at length take possession of your
+city. This is the true intent of their coming into these seas, and
+not to trade for spices as they pretend. Their country is almost 5000
+leagues from hence, and the voyage out and home is attended by many
+dangers through unknown and stormy seas, besides the great cost of
+their large ships with so many men and guns; Hence at whatever prices
+they may dispose of their spices in Portugal, it is obvious such a
+trade must be carried on with great loss; which is a manifest proof
+that they are pirates, and not merchants, who come here to rob, and
+to take your city. The house you have given them for a factory, they
+will convert into a fort, from whence they will make war on you when
+you least expect it. All this we say more from the good will we owe
+you, than for any profit; for, if you do not listen to our advice,
+there are other cities in Malabar to which we will remove, and to
+which the spices will be conveyed for us."</p>
+<blockquote>[24] Perhaps meant by Lichefild instead of emperor; or it
+may be some native term of dignity.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>To this harangue the zamorin gave a favourable answer, saying that
+he would give attention to all they had said, of which indeed he
+already had some suspicions. That he had employed the Portuguese to
+seize the ship to try their courage, and had allowed them to load
+their ships, that the money they had brought to purchase goods might
+remain in the country; and finally, that he would not forsake them in
+favour of the strangers. The Moors were by no means satisfied with
+all this, because the zamorin did not order us to depart from
+Calicut, and did not stop our trade, which was their chief purpose.
+Though disappointed in these views, they continued to intermiddle in
+our affairs, particularly by buying up the spices and sending them
+elsewhere, in hope of irritating our people, and bringing on a
+quarrel, that they might have a pretext to attack us. This they were
+much inclined to bring about, as, being greatly more numerous than
+our men, they hoped the zamorin would take part with them against us.
+They likewise used all possible means to draw over the common people
+of Calicut to their side, and to excite them to enmity, against us,
+by making them believe that our people had injured them.</p>
+<p>Through those devices, our factor was unable to procure more
+spices than sufficed to load two ships in the course of three months,
+from which the general was convinced that the friendly assurances of
+the zamorin was little to be depended on; and if he had not been
+afraid of not being able to procure a sufficient supply elsewhere, he
+would have gone to another port: But, having already consumed a long
+time and been at heavy charges, he determined to remain at Calicut,
+and sent a message to the zamorin, complaining of the delays, which
+ill accorded with the promises of his highness, that the whole fleet
+should be loaded in twenty days, whereas three months were now
+elapsed and the loading of two ships only was procured. He urged the
+zamorins promise that the Portuguese ships were to be first loaded;
+whereas he had assured information that the Moors had bought up great
+quantities of spices at lower prices, and sent them to other places,
+and begged the zamorin to consider that it was now time for the ships
+to begin their voyage to Portugal, and that he anxiously wished for
+dispatch. On receiving this message, the zamorin pretended to be much
+surprised that our ships were still unprovided with a loading, and
+could not believe that the Moors had secretly bought up and removed
+the spices, contrary to his orders; and even gave permission to the
+general to take those ships belonging to the Moors which were laden
+with spices, paying the same prices for the spices which had been
+given by the Moors. This intelligence gave much satisfaction to the
+Moors, as a favourable opportunity for drawing on hostilities with
+the Portuguese; and, accordingly, one of the principal Moorish
+merchants began immediately to load his ship: openly with all kinds
+of drugs and spices, and suborned several Moors and Indians, who
+pretended to be the friends of our factor, to insinuate that he would
+never be able to find a sufficient loading for our fleet, if he did
+not seize that ship. Correa listened to this insidious advice, which
+he communicated to the general, urging him to take that Moorish ship,
+as he had license from the zamorin to that effect. The general was
+exceedingly unwilling to proceed to this extremity, afraid of the
+influence of the Moors with the zamorin, and of producing hostilities
+with the natives. But Correa remonstrated against delay, protesting
+that the general should be responsible for all losses that might
+accrue to the king of Portugal through his neglect. Over-persuaded by
+this urgency of the factor, the general sent all the boats of the
+squadron on the 17th of December to take possession of the Moorish
+ship.</p>
+<p>When this intelligence was received on shore, the Moors thought
+this a favourable opportunity of destroying our people, and
+immediately raised a great outcry against the Portuguese, incensing
+the people of the city to join with them in complaining to the
+zamorin; to whom they went in a tumultuous manner, representing that
+we had bought and shipped a much larger quantity of drugs and spices
+than the value of all our merchandize, and not contented with this,
+were for taking all like thieves and pirates; they blamed the zamorin
+for permitting us to trade in the city, and requested his license to
+revenge themselves upon us for the loss of their vessel. The
+faithless and inconstant king save them the license they required; on
+which they immediately armed themselves, and ran furiously to our
+factory, which was surrounded by a wall eight or ten feet high, and
+contained at that time seventy Portuguese, among whom was Fra
+Henriques and his friars. Of our people in the factory, only eight
+were armed with crossbows, all the rest being only armed with swords,
+with nothing to defend them but their cloaks. On hearing the tumult,
+our people went to the gate of the factory, and seeing only a few
+assailants, they thought to defend themselves with their swords
+against a mischievous rabble, but the numbers of the Moors soon
+increased, and galled our people so severely with their spears and
+arrows, that they were forced to shut the gates, after killing seven
+of the enemy, hoping to be able to defend themselves by means of the
+wall. In this conflict four of our men were slain, and several
+wounded, and all the remainder mounted the wall to defend it by means
+of the crossbows, judging that the assailants were at least four
+thousand men, among whom were several nayres.</p>
+<p>Cores now found himself unable to defend the factory against so
+great a force, and therefore hoisted a flag as signal to the fleet.
+The general was at this time sick in bed, having been just blooded,
+and was not therefore able to go in person to relieve the people in
+the factory; but immediately sent all the boats of the fleet, well
+manned, under the command of Sancho de Toar. But he was afraid to
+venture on land with so small a force against so great a multitude,
+or even to approach too near the shore, lest the enemies might assail
+him in their almadias and tonis. He lay off, therefore, at a
+considerable distance, where he remained a spectator of the valiant
+defence made by our people at the factory, whence they killed great
+numbers of the assailants. But their enemies always increased in
+numbers, and they at length brought up certain engines to beat down
+part of the wall, in which they at length succeeded. On this, our men
+issued out by a door which led towards the sea side, in hopes of
+being able to fight their way to the boats, in which attempt Corea
+was slain, and fifty more of our men were either killed or made
+prisoners, twenty only escaping who swam to the boats, most of whom
+were much wounded. Among these were Fra Henriques, and Antonio, the
+son of Aries Corea, then only eleven years old; who hath since done
+many noble feats of arms in the Indies and other places, as I shall
+afterwards declare in the <i>Fourth</i>  Book of this history.</p>
+<p>The general was much concerned at this event, not only for the
+loss of his men, but on seeing how little confidence could be reposed
+on the promises of the zamorin after all the presents he had
+received, and the services which had been performed for him. He had
+now spent three months at Calicut, during which he had only loaded
+two of his ships, and knew not how to procure loading for the rest;
+especially as he could not expect a favourable reception at Cochin on
+account of having captured the ship with the elephant as before
+related. Considering the treason which had been practised on our men,
+the general determined upon taking a signal revenge, if the zamorin
+did not make an ample excuse for what had taken place, and make a
+full reparation by immediately providing the rest of the ships with
+lading. The zamorin, however, had no such intentions, being much
+pleased with what the Moors had done, and even ordered all the goods
+in our factory to be seized, to the value of 4000 ducats. He likewise
+ordered all of our people who had been taken on shore to be made
+captives, four of whom died of their wounds. Seeing that no message
+or excuse was sent by the zamorin all that day, the general held a
+council with his officers as to the proper steps to be taken on the
+present emergency; when it was determined to take immediate and ample
+revenge, without giving time to the zamorin to arm his fleet. On
+this, orders were issued to take possession of ten large ships which
+lay in the road or harbour of Calicut, which was done after some
+resistance, many of their crews being killed or drowned, and others
+made prisoners who were reserved to serve as mariners on board our
+fleet. Some spices and other merchandize were taken in these ships,
+and three elephants, which were killed and salted as provisions for
+the voyage; and it appeared that 600 Moors were slain in defending
+these ships. After every thing of value was taken from the Moorish
+ships, they were all burnt in sight of the city. Many of the Moors
+embarked in their almadias to attempt succouring their ships, but our
+men soon put them to flight by means of their ordnance.</p>
+<p>The zamorin and the whole city of Calicut were much mortified to
+see so many ships destroyed, and them unable to help, but their
+astonishment and terror were much increased by the events of the
+ensuing day. During the night, the general ordered all the ships of
+the fleet to be towed as near as possible to the shore by means of
+the boats, and spread out at some distance from each other, that they
+might be able to reach the city with their ordnance; which, as soon
+as day broke, was directed to play upon the city in every direction,
+doing vast damage among the houses. The natives brought down to the
+shore such small pieces of ordnance as they possessed, which they
+fired off against us, but without being able to do us any injury;
+whereas not a shot of ours missed taking effect, either among the
+multitude of our enemies which flocked to the shore, or on the
+buildings of the city, both the houses of the inhabitants and the
+temples of their deities receiving incredible damage. So great was
+the consternation, that the zamorin fled from his palace, and one of
+his chief nayres was killed by a ball close beside him. Part even of
+the palace was destroyed by the cannonade. Towards afternoon two
+ships were seen approaching the harbour, which immediately changed
+their course on seeing how our fleet was employed; on which the
+general ceased firing against Calicut, and made all sail after these
+two ships to Pandarane, where they took shelter among other seven
+ships lying at anchor close to the shore and filled with Moors.
+Finding that our fleet could not get near enough to attack them,
+owing to shallow water, and considering that it was now late in the
+season for his voyage back to Lisbon, the general resolved to be
+contented with the revenge he had already taken upon Calicut, and
+made sail for Cochin, where he was informed there was more pepper to
+be had than even at Calicut, and where he hoped to enter into a
+treaty with the rajah of that place.'</p>
+<p>On his way towards Cochin, Cabral took two ships belonging to the
+Moors, which he set on fire, after taking out of them some rice which
+they had on board. On the 20th of December the fleet arrived at
+Cochin, which is nineteen leagues to the south of Calicut, and is in
+nine degrees towards the north[25]. Cochin is in the province of
+Malabar, on a river close to the sea, and is almost an island, so
+that it is very strong and difficult of access, having a large and
+safe harbour. The land in its neighbourhood is low and intersected by
+branches of the river into many islands. The city itself is built
+much after the same manner with Calicut, and is inhabited by
+idolaters, with a good many Moorish strangers, who come hither to
+trade from many countries, two of whom were so rich as to have each
+fifty ships employed. This country does not abound in provisions, but
+produces large store of pepper, even Calicut being mostly supplied
+from hence: But as Calicut is greatly more resorted to by merchants,
+it is therefore much richer than Cochin. The king is an idolater, of
+the same manners and customs with him of Calicut; but his country
+being small he is very poor, and has not even the right to coin
+money, being in many respects subordinate to the zamorin; who, on his
+accession to the throne always goes to Cochin, and takes possession
+of that kingdom, either retaining it in his own hands, or restoring
+the rajah as he may think proper. The rajah of Cochin, consequently,
+is bound to assist the zamorin in all his wars, and must always be of
+the same religion with his paramount.</p>
+<blockquote>[25] The latitude of Cochin is almost 10&ordm; N. while
+Calient is about 11&ordm; 10'.--E</blockquote>
+<p>Having come to anchor in the harbour of Cochin, the general sent
+one Michael Jogue[26] on shore with a message to the rajah, as he
+feared to send Caspar on shore, lest he might run away. This person,
+though an idolater and a stranger, had come aboard our fleet with the
+intention of becoming a Christian, and of going into Portugal, and
+our general had him baptised by the name of Michael. He was ordered
+to give the rajah of Cochin an account of all that had happened at
+Calicut, and that Cabral had brought great store of merchandize to
+barter for the commodities of Cochin; or if the rajah were not
+satisfied with these, he was willing to give ready money for what he
+wanted; requesting to be furnished with loading for four of his ships
+in either way, as most agreeable to the rajah. To this message the
+rajah[27] made answer, that he was exceedingly glad of the arrival of
+the Portuguese, of whose power and valour he had already heard, for
+which he esteemed them highly, and that they were welcome to purchase
+what spices his country afforded, either in barter for their goods,
+or for money, as they thought proper. He added, that the general
+might freely send any agents he pleased on shore to make purchases
+and sales, and sent two principal nayres as hostages for their
+safety; conditioning only, that they might be changed daily for
+others, because any of that cast who chanced to eat even once on
+shipboard could never appear again in the rajahs presence. Cabral was
+well pleased with this promising beginning, and immediately appointed
+Gonzalo Gil Barbosa as factor, who had been assistant to Aries
+Correa, giving him Lauren&ccedil;o Morena as clerk, and Madera de
+Alcusia as interpreter, with four of the banished men as
+servants.</p>
+<blockquote>[26] This Michael Jougue or Joghi, is said to have been a
+bramin, or Malabar priest; one of these devotees who wander about the
+country, girt with chains and daubed with filth. Those wanderers, if
+idolaters, are named Jogues; and Calandars if Mahometans.--Astl. I.
+47. a.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[27] The rajah who then reigned at Cochin is named
+Triumpara, or Trimumpara, by De Faria, De Barros, and other early
+writers.--Astl. I. 47. b.</blockquote>
+<p>On receiving notice of the landing of Barbosa, the rajah sent the
+register[28] of the city to meet him, accompanied by many of the
+nayres, or principal men of the court, who brought him to visit the
+rajah, who was much inferior in dress and appearance of state to the
+zamorin, even the hall of audience having only bare walls, seated
+around like a theatre, in which the rajah sat with very few
+attendants. Barbosa presented to the rajah, in name of our general, a
+basin of silver filled with saffron, a large silver ewer filled with
+rose water, and some branches of coral, which the rajah received with
+much satisfaction, desiring his thanks to be returned to the general;
+and after some conversation with the factor, and interpreter, he gave
+orders for them to be properly lodged in the city. The general gave
+especial orders that no more than the seven persons already mentioned
+should remain on shore, thinking it imprudent to risk a greater
+number, in case of experiencing a similar misfortune with what had
+lately happened at Calicut. But there was here no cause for distrust,
+as the rajah of Cochin was a person of truth and honour, as appeared
+by his good usage of our men, the quick dispatch that was used in
+loading our ships with spices, and the orders he gave to his people
+to afford every assistance, which they did with much alacrity and
+zeal: so that it seemed ordained of God, that the trade should be
+transferred from Calicut to Cochin, for the advancement of the
+Catholic faith in the Indies, and the enrichment of the crown of
+Portugal[29].</p>
+<blockquote>[28] In other parts of Castaneda, this officer is called
+the kutwal--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[29] According to De Barros, the rajah of Cochin was
+offended by the conduct of the zamorin, on several accounts, and
+among the rest for monopolising the trade on the Malabar
+coast.--Astl. I. 43. a. We may easily conceive that one strong ground
+of favour to the Portuguese at Cochin, was in hopes by their means to
+throw off the yoke of the zamorin.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>After the ships were laden, two Indians came to wait upon the
+general, who said that they were brothers, and Christians, born in
+Cranganore near Cochin, who were desirous of going to Portugal, and
+thence to visit the Pope at Rome, and the holy sepulchre at
+Jerusalem[30]. Being asked by the general what kind of a city
+Cranganore was, whether it was entirely inhabited by Christians, and
+whether these Christians followed the order of the Greek or Roman
+church, one of them gave the following answers.</p>
+<blockquote>[30] One of these Christians died during the voyage, but
+the other, named Joseph, arrived in Portugal. This is the <i>Josephus
+Indus</i> , or Joseph the Indian, under whose name there is a short
+voyage in Gryn&aelig;us: which properly speaking is only an account
+of Cranganore and its inhabitants, particularly the Christians and
+their ceremonies, with some account of Calient, Kambaya, Guzerat,
+Ormuz, and Narsinga, very short and unsatisfactory.--Astl. I. 48.
+b.</blockquote>
+<p>Cranganore is a large city in the province of Malabar on the
+mainland, standing near the mouth of a river, by which likewise it is
+encompassed, inhabited both by idolaters and Christians, and by some
+Jews who are held in small esteem. It is much frequented by
+strangers, among whom are merchants from Syria, Egypt, Persia, and
+Arabia, who come thither to purchase pepper, a great deal of which
+commodity is gathered in its territories. It has a king of its own,
+to whom all the Christian inhabitants pay a certain tribute, and have
+a quarter of their own in the city, where they have a church
+resembling ours, in which there were crosses, but no images of the
+saints, and no bells, being summoned to prayers by the priests as in
+the Greek church. These Christians hail their popes, with twelve
+cardinals, two patriarchs, and many bishops and archbishops, all of
+whom reside in Armenia, to which country their bishops always went
+for consecration. He had been there himself along with a bishop,
+where he was ordained a priest. That this rule was observed by all
+the clergy of the Indies and of Cathay, who have to go to the pope or
+Catholicos of Armenia for consecration. Of their two patriarchs, one
+resides in the Indies, and the other in Cathay[31], their bishops
+residing in different cities as it may seem convenient. Their tonsure
+is made in form of a cross.</p>
+<blockquote>[31] Called Caitaio in the original, but obviously
+Cathay, or Northern China, in which we have formerly seen that there
+were Nestorian Christians.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The cause of their having a pope is said to have been on the
+following account: 'When St Peter was residing at Antioch, there
+happened a great schism, occasioned by Simon Magus, on which Peter
+was called to Rome to assist the Christians in overthrowing that
+heresy; and, that he might not leave the eastern church without a
+shepherd, he appointed a vicar to govern at Antioch, who should
+become pope after the death of Peter, and should always assist the
+pope of Armenia. But, after the Moors entered into Syria and Asia
+Minor, as Armenia remained always in the Christian faith, they came
+to be governed by twelve cardinals. Marco Polo, in writing concerning
+Armenia, mentions this pope or Catholicos, and says there are two
+sects of Christians, the Nestorians and Jacobites, their pope being
+named Jacobus, whom this Joseph named their Catholicos. The priests
+of Cranganore are not shaven in the same manner with ours, but shave
+the whole head, leaving a few hairs on the crown and they have both
+deacons and subdeacons. In consecrating the elements, they use
+leavened bread and wine made of raisins, having no other in the
+country. Their children are not baptized till they are eleven days
+old, unless they happen to be sickly. They confess as we do, and bury
+their dead after a similar manner. They do not use the holy oil to
+the dying, but only bless them; and when any one dies, they gather a
+large company and feast for eight days, after which the obsequies are
+celebrated. If any person dies without making a testament, their
+lands and goods go to the nearest heir; but the widow is entitled to
+her dower if she remain a year unmarried. On going into church they
+use holy water. They hold the writings of the four Evangelists in
+great veneration. They fast during Lent and Advent with much
+solemnity, and on Easter Eve they neither eat nor drink the whole
+day. They have regularly sermons on the night of Holy Friday, and
+they observe the day of the Resurrection with great devotion.
+Likewise the two following days, and the ensuing Sunday, are
+particularly kept holy, because on that day St Thomas thrust his hand
+into the side of our Saviour. Ascension Day, Trinity Sunday, the
+Assumption and Nativity of the Blessed Virgin, Candlemas Day,
+Christmas Day, all the days of the apostles, and all the Sundays
+throughout the year, are kept with much devotion. They sanctify in a
+particular manner the first day of July every year in honour of St
+Thomas, but they could give no reason why this was done. They have
+also native friars and nuns, who live with much regularity. Their
+priests also live chastely, as those who do otherwise are debarred
+from executing their functions. They allow of no divorce between
+married people, who must live together till death. They receive the
+sacrament regularly three times in every year. They have among them
+certain learned men, or great doctors, who keep schools, in which
+they teach the Scriptures, and likewise some excellent
+interpretations which were left in old times by their ancient
+doctors. Their dress is similar to that of the Moors. Their day
+consists of forty hours; and, having no clocks, they judge of the
+time of the day by the sun, and in the night by the motion of the
+stars[32]. The general was very glad to receive this Joseph and his
+brother, and gave orders to provide them with a good cabin in his
+ship.</p>
+<blockquote>[32] In Lichefilds translation, the account of the day of
+these Indian Christians runs thus, which we do not pretend to
+understand: "They have their day, which they do
+call <i>Intercalor</i> , which is of <i>forty</i>  hours."<br>
+This account of the Christians found in India by the Portuguese, is
+exceedingly imperfect and unsatisfactory; but it would lead to a most
+inconvenient length to attempt supplying the deficiency. Those of our
+readers who are disposed to study this interesting subject, will find
+it discussed at some length in Mosheim, and there is a good abstract
+relative to these Oriental sects given by Gibbon, in the Decline and
+Fall of the Roman Empire.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>While Cabral remained at Cochin, he received messages from the
+kings of Cananor and Coulan, both considerable princes in the
+province of Malabar, requesting him to come to their ports, where he
+should be supplied cheaper than at Cochin, and giving him many offers
+of friendship. He made answer, with his hearty thanks, that he could
+not now visit their ports, having already begun to take in his
+loadings bet that he should certainly visit them on his return to
+India. Immediately after the Portuguese ships were laden, a fleet of
+twenty-five great ships, and other small vessels was descried in the
+offing; and notice was sent by the rajah of Cochin to our general,
+that this fleet contained fifteen thousand fighting men, and had been
+fitted out on purpose to make him and all his people prisoners. At
+the same time the rajah offered to send men to his assistance, if he
+stood in need; but the general answered he had no need of any such
+aid at the present, as he trusted, with God's blessing, to convince
+his enemies they were ill advised in seeking now to attack him,
+having already given them a trial of his strength; alluding to what
+he had already done to them at Calicut. The enemy continued to hover
+off at sea, but did not venture to come nearer than a league, though
+they seemed in fighting order. Seeing this shyness, the general
+weighed anchor, and went out with all his fleet against them, having
+on board the two nayres who were hostages for the factory on shore,
+but his intentions were to have returned with them to Cochin. Soon
+after leaving the harbour, a great storm arose with a foul wind, so
+that he was forced to come to anchor without attaining to the enemy.
+Next morning, being the 10th January 1501, the wind came fair, and
+being desirous to attack the fleet of Calicut, the general made sail
+towards them; but missing the ship commanded by Sancho de Toar, who
+had parted from the fleet in the night, and that being the largest
+and best manned ship of the fleet, he deemed it prudent to avoid
+fighting with so large a force, especially as many of his men were
+sick. The wind, likewise, was now quite fair for beginning his voyage
+home, and was quite contrary for going back to Cochin to land the
+hostages. He determined, therefore, to commence his voyage, and stood
+out to sea; the enemy following him during the whole of that day, but
+returned towards Calicut when night drew on. Cabral now turned his
+attention to the forlorn nayres, who had been five days on board
+without eating, and by dint of much and kind entreaty, he at length
+prevailed on them to take food.</p>
+<p>On the 15th of January, the fleet came in sight of Cananore, which
+lies on the coast of Malabar, thirty-one leagues north of Cochin.
+This is a large city with a fine bay, the houses being built of
+earth, and covered with flat stones or slates, and it contains many
+Moors who trade thither for many kinds of goods. The neighbourhood
+produces hardly any more pepper than is necessary for its own
+consumpt; but has plenty of ginger, cardamoms, tamarinds, mirabolans,
+cassia-fistula[33], and other drugs. In several pools of water near
+this city there are many very large alligators[34], similar to the
+crocodiles of the Nile, which devour men when they come in their way.
+They have very large heads with two rows of teeth, and their breath
+smells like musk, their bodies being covered all over with hard
+scales like shells. In the bushes near this city there are many large
+and very venomous serpents, which destroy men by means of their
+breath. There are bats likewise as large as kites, which have heads
+like a fox and similar teeth, and the natives often eat these
+animals. The city of Cananore abounds in fish, flesh, and fruits, but
+has to import rice from other places. The king or rajah is a bramin,
+being one of the three kings of Malabar, but is not so rich and
+powerful as the zamorin, or even as the rajah of Coulan. The general
+came to anchor at this port, both because he had been invited by the
+rajah, and because he wished to take on board some cinnamon, of which
+commodity he had not as yet any on board. He accordingly purchased
+400 quintals, and might have had more if he would, but refused it; on
+which the people of the place concluded that he had no more money. On
+this coming to the knowledge of the rajah, he sent him word that he
+would trust him with any quantity he had a mind for of that or any
+other commodity, till his return from Portugal, or the arrival of any
+other in his stead. The rajah was induced to make this offer, from
+his knowledge of the just dealings of the Portuguese, and their
+faithful performance of their promises. The general sent his hearty
+thanks to the rajah for his liberality, promising to inform the king
+his master of his good will, and assuring his highness that he might
+depend on his constant friendship.</p>
+<blockquote>[33] Named Canyfistola in Lichefilds
+translation.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[34] Lagartos in the original.</blockquote>
+<p>Cabral now took on board an ambassador from the rajah of Cananore
+for the king of Portugal, who was sent to conclude a treaty of amity
+between them. Departing from Cananore, and standing across the gulf,
+he took a great ship richly laden on the last of January: But on
+learning that it belonged to the king of Cambaya, he permitted it to
+proceed on its voyage uninjured; sending word to that sovereign, that
+the Portuguese did not come to the Indies to make war on any one,
+excepting indeed with the zamorin of Calicut, who had scandalously
+broken the peace which had been made between them. He therefore only
+took a pilot out of this ship, to conduct him through the gulf
+between India and Africa. While continuing their voyage, and
+approaching the African shore, a great storm arose on the 12th of
+February, by which in the night the ship of Sancho de Toar was driven
+on shore, and taking fire was entirely burnt, the men only being
+saved. As the tempest still continued, they were unable to stop at
+Melinda, or any other place till they came to Mozambique, where they
+cast anchor, in order to take in water and to refit their ships, the
+seams of which were all open. From this place, the general dispatched
+Sancho de Toar to discover Sofala, with orders to make the best of
+his way from that place to Portugal, with an account of its
+productions.</p>
+<p>The ships being refitted, Cabral resumed the voyage to the Cape of
+Good Hope, near which they again experienced a violent storm, in
+which one of the ships was separated from the fleet, after firing
+signals of distress, and was never seen again during the voyage. At
+length, after many great storms and dangers, which it were tedious to
+recount, Cabral doubled the Cape on Whitsunday the 22d of May; whence
+continuing his voyage with a fair wind, he came to anchor at Cape
+Verd, where he found Diego Diaz, who had separated from the fleet on
+the outward bound voyage. Diaz had been driven into the Red Sea,
+where he wintered and lost his boat, and as most of his men died from
+sickness, his pilot could not venture to carry him to India. He
+endeavoured therefore to find his way back to Portugal; but after
+leaving the Red Sea, his men were so consumed with hunger, thirst,
+and sickness, that only seven of his crew remained. After remaining
+some time at Cape Verd waiting in vain for the missing ships, Cabral
+proceeded on his voyage, and arrived safe at Lisbon on the last day
+of July, in the year 1501. Soon after his arrival, the ship which had
+separated in a storm off the Cape of Good Hope, came in; and shortly
+after that, Sancho de Toar arrived from Sofala. He described Sofala
+as a small island close on the continent of Africa, inhabited by a
+black people called Caffres; and reported that much gold is brought
+to this place from certain mines on the adjacent continent; on which
+account Sofala is much frequented by Moors from India, who barter
+merchandize of small value for gold. He brought along with him to
+Lisbon a Moor whom he had received as an hostage or pledge for the
+safety of one of his own men, whom he had left there to acquire a
+knowledge of the country and its language; and from this Moor they
+got ample information respecting the people and trade of those parts
+of Africa, which I shall afterwards communicate. Including this last
+ship, there returned six to Portugal out of the twelve which had
+sailed on the voyage for India, the other six having been lost.</p>
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>Note.--In the Novus Orbus of Simon Grynaeus, p. 202-211, there is
+an article entitled, <i>Short Account of India, by Joseph, an Indian
+Christian, who accompanied Cabral[A] to Lisbon in 1501</i> . We were
+inclined to have inserted this account at this part of our collection
+as an ancient and original document: But, on an attentive perusal, it
+is so jejune, contused, and uninstructive as not to merit attention.
+It evidently appears to have been penned by some person in Cabral's
+ship during the voyage home, from repeated conferences with Joseph:
+But, as the writer of this article informs us himself, many
+particulars were unknown to Joseph, because he had little intercourse
+with the idolaters, or because the reporter could not understand the
+answers which Joseph made to his inquiries.--E.</p>
+<blockquote>[A] In Grynaeus, Pedro Alvarez de Cabral, is named Peter
+Aliares.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+<p> <i>Voyage of John de Nueva, being the third made by the Portuguese
+to India</i> .</p>
+<p>Is the same year 1501, supposing all differences to have been
+settled amicably at Calicut by Cabral, and that a regular trade was
+established both there and at Sofala and Quiloa, the king of Portugal
+dispatched three ships and a caravel from Lisbon, under the command
+of John de Neuva, a native of Galicia in Spain, who was accounted a
+valiant gentleman; having under his orders, Francisco de Navoys,
+Diego Barboso, and Hernando de la Pyna, as captains of three of the
+ships. Two ships of this fleet were destined to carry merchandize to
+Sofala[1], and the other two to Calicut, and all the four contained
+only eighty men[2]. The instructions given to Nueva were, that he was
+to touch at the island of St Blas, where he was to wait ten days if
+any of his ships had separated. He was then to proceed for Sofala,
+where, if a factory were settled he was to deliver the goods destined
+for that place before going to India. If a factory were not already
+settled there, he was to do every thing in his power for that
+purpose, leaving Alvaro de Braga there as factor, with the
+merchandize embarked in the caravel for that market. From Sofala, he
+was to proceed to Quiloa; and thence directly to Calicut. He was
+farther directed, in case of meeting with Cabral, to obey him as
+general, and desire him to settle a factory at Sofala, if his own
+attempt should fail.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] It afterwards appears that one vessel only was
+destined for this particular trade: Perhaps the second was meant for
+Quiloa.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] According to Astley, I. 49. the crews of these four
+vessels consisted in all of 400 men.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Nueva left Lisbon on this voyage in March, four months before the
+return of Cabral, and arrived in safety at the isle of St Blas; where
+he found a letter in an old shoe suspended from the branch of a tree,
+written by Pedro de Tayde[3], informing him that the fleet of Cabral
+had passed this island on its way back to Portugal, and giving an
+account of what had happened at Calicut, of the good treatment the
+fleet had received at Cochin, where some of our men remained, and of
+the friendly disposition of the king of Cananor[4]. On consulting
+with the other captains, it was judged improper to leave the caravel
+at Sofala, in these circumstances, as their whole force did not
+exceed eighty men; wherefore they proceeded directly for Quiloa,
+where they found one of the exiles who had been left there by Cabral,
+from whom they received a particular account of all that had happened
+at Calicut, and of the loss of several of his ships, all of which he
+had learnt from some Moors. From Quiloa Nueva sailed on to Melinda,
+where the king confirmed the intelligence he had received from the
+exile at Quiloa[5]. Thus fully instructed in the state of matters,
+Nueva deemed it prudent to keep all the ships of his small squadron,
+and sailed across from Melinda to Anchediva, where he came to anchor
+in November, intending to take in a supply of water at that place.
+While here, seven large ships belonging to Cambaya, which were bound
+for the Red Sea, appeared off the anchoring ground, and seemed at
+first disposed to attack our ships; but being afraid of the
+Portuguese ordnance, they continued their voyage. From Anchediva
+Nueva proceeded for Cananor, where he had an audience of the rajah,
+from whom he received particular notice of all that had happened in
+Calicut to Cabral, and of the offer which the rajah had made to load
+all his ships at Cananor. The rajah assured him of his earnest desire
+of doing every thing in his power to serve the king of Portugal, and
+pressed him to take in his loading at that port; but Nueva declined
+this offer for the present, until he had consulted with the factor at
+Cochin, for which port he took his departure from Cananor. On his way
+between Cananor and Cochin, Nueva took a ship belonging to some of
+the Moorish merchants at Calicut, after a vigorous resistance, and
+set it on fire.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] Called de Atayde by Astley.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] According to Astley, I. 49. Nueva discovered in this
+outward voyage the Island of Conception, in lat. 8&deg; S. But this
+circumstance does not occur in Castaneda.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] Before arriving at Melinda, Nueva gave chase to two
+large ships belonging to the Moors, one of which he took and burnt,
+but the other escaped.--Astl. I. 49.</blockquote>
+<p>On his arrival at Cochin, the factor who had been left there by
+Cabral came on board with the rest of his company, and acquainted him
+that the rajah was greatly offended with Cabral for leaving the port
+without seeing him, and for carrying away the hostages; yet had
+always kindly entertained and the other members, of the factory,
+lodging them every night in the palace for security, and always
+sending a guard of nayres along with any of them who had occasion to
+go out during the day, on purpose to defend them from the Moors who
+sought their destruction, and who had one night set fire to the house
+in which they lodged before their removal to the palace. He also
+informed Nueva that the Moors had persuaded the native merchants to
+depreciate the price of the Portuguese merchandize, and not to take
+these in exchange for pepper, so that unless he had brought money for
+his purchases he would have little chance of procuring a loading. On
+this intelligence, and considering that he had not brought money,
+Nueva immediately returned from Cochin to Cananor, expecting to
+procure his loading at that port, in consequence of the friendly
+dispositions of the rajah towards the king of Portugal[6]. On his
+return to Cananor, he found that money was as necessary there for his
+purchases as at Cochin: But, when the rajah, was informed of his
+difficulties from want of money, he became his security to the native
+merchants for 1000 quintals or hundred weights of pepper, 450
+quintals of cinnamon, and fifty quintals of ginger, besides some
+bales of linen cloth[7]. By this generous conduct of the rajah, Nueva
+procured a loading for his ships, and left his European merchandize
+for sale at Cananor under the management of a factor and two
+clerks.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] According to De Faria, Nueva took in a part of his
+loading; at Cochin, with a view perhaps to preserve the credit of the
+Portuguese nation at that place.--Astl. I. 50. a.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] In the original this linen cloth is said to have been
+made of  <i>algadon</i> , a word left untranslated by Lichefild,
+probably <i>al-cotton</i> , or some such Arabic word for cotton: The
+linen cloth, therefore, was some kind of calico or
+muslin.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the 15th December, while waiting for a fair wind to begin his
+homeward voyage, the rajah sent notice to Nueva that
+eighty <i>paraws</i>  were seen to the northward, which were past
+mount <i>Dely</i> , and that these vessels were from Calicut, sent
+expressly to attack the Portuguese ships; and the rajah advised him
+to land his men and ordnance for greater security: But the general
+was not of this mind, and sent word to the rajah that he hoped, with
+the assistance of God, to be able to defend himself. Next day, being
+the 16th of December, before dawn, about an hundred ships and paraws
+full of Moors came into the bay, sent on purpose by the zamorin, who
+was in hopes to have taken all our ships and men. As soon as Nueva
+perceived this numerous armament, he hoisted anchor and removed his
+squadron to the middle of the bay, where he ordered all his ships to
+pour in their shot against the enemy without intermission. Doubtless,
+but for this, the enemy would have boarded his ships, and they were
+so numerous it would have been impossible for him to have escaped;
+but as the Moors had no ordnance, they could do our people no harm
+from a distance, and many of their ships and paraws were sunk, with
+the loss of a vast number of men, while they did not dare to approach
+for the purpose of boarding, and not a single person was killed or
+hurt on our side. The enemy towards evening hung out a flag for a
+parley; but as Nueva feared this might be intended as a lure, he
+continued firing, lest they might suppose he stopped from weariness
+or fear. But the Moors were really desirous of peace, owing to the
+prodigious loss they had sustained, and their inability to escape
+from the bay for want of a fair wind. At length, most of his ordnance
+being burst or rendered unserviceable by the long-continued firing,
+and seeing that the Moors still kept up their flag of truce, Nueva
+ceased firing and answered them by another flag[8]. Immediately on
+this, a Moor came to Neuva in a small boat, to demand a cessation of
+hostilities till next day. This was granted, on condition that they
+should quit the bay and put out to sea, which they did accordingly.
+Although the wind was very unfavourable, Nueva stood out to sea
+likewise, which the enemy could hardly do, as their ships and paraws
+can only make sail with a fair wind. Notwithstanding all that had
+happened, Nueva was constrained to come to anchor close to the fleet
+of the enemy, and gave orders to keep strict watch during the night.
+At one time they were heard rowing towards our fleet, and it was
+supposed they intended setting our ships on fire; on which Neuva
+ordered to veer out more cable, to get farther off. Perceiving that
+the boats of the enemy continued to follow, he commanded a gun to be
+fired at them, on which they made off; and the wind coming off shore
+and somewhat fair, they made sail for Calicut.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] According to De Faria, five great ships and nine
+paraws were sunk in this action. De Barros says ten merchant ships
+and nine paraws.--Astl. I. 50. c.</blockquote>
+<p>Nueva, after returning thanks to God for deliverance from his
+enemies, took his leave of the rajah of Cananor, and departed for
+Portugal, where he arrived in safety with all his ships[9].</p>
+<blockquote>[9] On this part of the voyage, Astley remarks, on the
+authority of De Faria, that Nueva touched at the island of St Helena,
+which he found destitute of inhabitants; though it was found peopled
+by De Gama in his first voyage, only four years before. What is
+called the island of St Helena in De Gamas first voyage, is obviously
+one of the head-lands of St Elens bay on the western coast of Africa.
+The island of St Helena is at a vast distance from the land, in the
+middle of the Atlantic ocean.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>After the departure of Nueva from Cananor, one of his men named
+Gonsalo Pixoto, who had been made prisoner and carried to Calicut,
+came to Cananor with a message from the zamorin to Nueva, making
+excuses for all that had been done there to Cabral, and for the
+attempt against his own fleet at Cananor, and offering, if he would
+come to Calicut, to give him a full loading of spices, and sufficient
+hostages both for his safety and the performance of his promise.</p>
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+<p> <i>The Second Voyage of De Gama to India in 1502; being the Fourth
+made by the Portuguese to the East Indies</i> .</p>
+<p>As the king of Portugal felt it incumbent upon him to revenge the
+injurious and treacherous conduct of the zamorin, he gave orders to
+prepare a powerful fleet for that purpose; the command of which was
+at first confided to Pedro Alvares de Cabral, but, for certain just
+considerations was taken from him and bestowed on Don Vasco de la
+Gama. Every thing being ready, De Gama sailed from Lisbon on the 3d
+of March 1502, having the command of thirteen great ships and two
+caravels[1]. The captains of this fleet were, Pedro Alonso de
+Aguilar, Philip de Castro, Don Lewis Cotinho, Franco De Conya, Pedro
+de Tayde, Vasco Carvallo, Vincente Sodre, Blas Sodre, the two Sodres
+being cousins-german to the captain-general, Gil Hernand, cousin to
+Lauren&ccedil;o de la Mina, Juan Lopes Perestrello, Rodrigo de
+Castaneda, and Rodrigo de Abreo; and of the two caravels Pedro
+Raphael and Diego Perez were commanders. In this powerful squadron
+they carried out the materials of a third caravel, which was directed
+to be put together at Mozambique, and of which Hernand Rodrigues
+Badarsas was appointed to be commander. Besides this first fleet of
+seventeen sail, a smaller squadron of five ships remained in
+preparation at Lisbon, which sailed on the 5th of May under the
+command of Stephen de la Gama[2].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] According to Astley, much difference of opinion took
+place in the council of Portugal, whether to continue the trade to
+India for which it was requisite to employ force, or to desist
+entirely from the attempt; but the profits expected from the trade,
+and the expectation of propagating the Romish religion and enlarging
+the royal titles, outweighed all considerations of danger; and it was
+resolved to persist in the enterprize.--Astl.I. 50.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] The distribution, of this force is somewhat
+differently related by Astley. Ten ships only are said to have been
+placed under the immediate command of Vasco de Gama; five ships under
+Vincente Sodre, who had orders to scour the coast of Cochin and
+Cananor, and to watch the mouth of the Red Sea, on purpose to prevent
+the Moors, or Turks and Arabs, from trading to India; the third, as
+in the text, was under Stephen de Gama, but with no particular
+destination mentioned; and the whole were under the supreme command
+of Vasco de Gama, as captain- general.--Astl.I. 50.</blockquote>
+<p>When De Gama had doubled the Cape of Good Hope, and was arrived
+at <i>the farther end of the currents</i> [3], he went himself with
+four of the smallest vessels to Sofala, sending on the remainder of
+the fleet to wait his arrival at Mozambique. This visit to Sofala was
+in consequence of orders from the king, to examine the situation of
+the city and to endeavour to find a proper situation for a fort, that
+the Portuguese might monopolize the trade in gold at that place. He
+remained there twenty-five days, during which he settled a treaty of
+amity with the king, and had leave to establish a factory; after
+which mutual presents were interchanged, and De Gama departed for
+Mozambique. In going out of the river from Sofala, one of the ships
+was lost, but all the men were saved. At Mozambique he made
+friendship with the king, who had proved so unfriendly in the first
+voyage, and even obtained leave to settle a factor with several
+assistants, who were left on purpose to provide victuals for such
+ships as might touch here on the voyage to or from India. Here
+likewise the caravel destined for that purpose was set up and
+provided with ordnance and a sufficient crew, and was left for the
+protection of the factory. On leaving Mozambique, De Gama sailed for
+Quiloa, having orders to reduce the king of that place to become
+tributary, as a punishment for his unfriendly conduct towards Cabral.
+On his arrival in that port, Ibrahim the king came on board to visit
+the admiral, afraid of being called to account for the injuries he
+had done to Cabral. De Gama, knowing that he was not to be trusted,
+threatened to make him a prisoner under the hatches, if he did not
+immediately agree to pay tribute to the king of Portugal[4]. The king
+from fear engaged to pay 2000 miticals of gold yearly, and gave one
+Mehemed Aleones, a principal man among the Moors whom he hated, as an
+hostage for the payment. The reason of his dislike to Mehemed was
+this: Ibrahim was himself an usurper, having seized the government in
+prejudice to the right heir, and was afraid that Mehemed intended to
+dethrone him. When the king found himself at liberty, in consequence
+of this arrangement, he refused to send the promised tribute, in hope
+that De Gama might put the hostage to death, by which means he might
+get rid of his enemy: But the Moor, on finding the tribute did not
+come, was fain to pay the same himself, by which means he procured
+his own liberty. While at Quiloa, the fleet was joined by the
+squadron of five ships under Stephen de Gama.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] Such is the expression in the translation by
+Lichefild; but which I suspect ought to have been, "and had passed
+Cape Corientes."--E.<br>
+In Astley, the following incident is mentioned: When off Cape Verd,
+Vasco de Gama met a caravel bound from La Mina, on the western coast
+of Africa, carrying much gold to Lisbon. He shewed some of this to
+the ambassadors whom Cabral had brought from Cananor, and who were
+now on their return to India. They expressed much surprize at this
+circumstance; as they had been told by the Venetian ambassador at
+Lisbon, that the Portuguese could not send their ships to sea without
+assistance from Venice. This insinuation proceeded from envy, as the
+Venetians were afraid of losing the lucrative trade with India which
+they had long enjoyed through Egypt. --Astl.I. 51.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] According to De Faria, De Gama began by cannonading
+the city of Quiloa; but on the king consenting to become tributary,
+all was changed to peace and joy--Astl.I. 51. a.</blockquote>
+<p>Leaving Quiloa, De Gama proceeded with the whole fleet for
+Melinda, where he took in water and visited the king[5]. Going from
+thence for India, and being arrived off Mount Dely, to the north of
+Cananor, he met a ship belonging to the Moors of Mecca, and bound for
+Calicut, which was taken by our men after a stout resistance[6]. When
+the ship surrendered, De Gama went on board and commanded the owners
+and all the principal Moors to come before him, whom he ordered to
+produce all their goods on pain of being thrown overboard. They
+answered that they had nothing to produce, as all their goods were in
+Calicut; on which De Gama ordered one of them to be bound hand and
+foot and thrown into the sea. The rest were intimidated by this
+procedure, and immediately delivered up every thing belonging to
+them, which was very valuable; all of which was committed to the
+charge of Diego Hernando Correa, the factor appointed for conducting
+the trade at Cochin, by whose directions they were transported into
+one of the Portuguese ships. De Gama ordered all the children
+belonging to the Moors to be taken on board one of his own ships, and
+vowed to make them all friars in the church of our Lady at Belem,
+which he afterwards did[7]. All the ordinary merchandize belonging to
+the Moors was divided among his own men; and when all the goods were
+removed, he ordered Stephen de la Gama to confine the Moors under the
+hatches, and to set the ship on fire, to revenge the death of the
+Portuguese who were slain in the factory at Calicut. Soon after this
+was done, the Moors broke open the hatches, and quenched the fire; on
+which the admiral ordered Stephen de Gama to lay them, aboard. The
+Moors rendered desperate by this inhuman treatment, defended
+themselves to the utmost, and even threw firebrands into our ship to
+set it on fire. Night coming on, Stephen had to desist, but was
+ordered to watch the Moorish ship carefully that it might not escape
+during the dark, and the Moors all night long were heard calling on
+Mahomet to deliver them out of the hands of the Christians. When day
+appeared, the admiral again ordered Stephen de la Gama to set the
+ship on fire, which he did accordingly, after forcing the Moors to
+retreat into the poop. Some of the Moors leapt into the sea with
+hatchets in their hands, and endeavoured to swim to our boats; but
+all of these were slain in the water by our people, and those that
+remained in the ship were all drowned, as the vessel sunk. Of 300
+Moors, of whom thirty were women, not one escaped alive; and some of
+our men were hurt.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] According to Astley, De Gama was forced beyond
+Melinda, and took in water at a bay eight leagues farther on; and
+going thence towards India, he spread out his fleet that no ship
+might escape him; in consequence of which he took several, but was
+most severe on those belonging to Calicut. --Astl.I. 51.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] In Astley this ship is said to have belonged to the
+soldan of Egypt, and was very richly laden, besides being full of
+Moors of quality, who were going on pilgrimage to Mecca.--Astl. I.
+51.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] DeFaria says there were twenty of these children,
+whom De Gama caused to be made Christian friars, to make amends for
+one Portuguese who turned Mahometan.--Astl. I. 51. c.</blockquote>
+<p>De Gama came soon afterwards to Cananor, where he sent on shore
+the ambassadors, and gave them a message for the king, informing him
+of his arrival, and craving an audience. Upon this the rajah ordered
+a platform of timber to be constructed, which projected a
+considerable way into the water, covered over with carpets and other
+rich cloths, and having a wooden house or pavilion at the end next
+the land, which was likewise covered like the bridge, and was meant
+for the place of meeting between the rajah and the admiral. The rajah
+came first to the pavilion, attended by 10,000 nayres, and with many
+trumpets and other instruments playing before him; and a number of
+the principal nayres were arranged on the bridge or platform, to
+receive the admiral in an honourable manner. The admiral came in his
+boat, attended by all: the boats of the fleet decked out with flags
+and streamers, carrying certain ordnance in their prows, and having
+many drums and trumpets making a very martial appearance. The admiral
+disembarked at the outer end of the platform, under: a general salute
+from the ordnance of the boats, and was accompanied by all his
+captains and a number of men well armed. There were carried before
+him two great basins of silver gilt, filled with branches of coral
+and other fine things that are esteemed valuable in India. The
+admiral was received at the head of the platform by the nayres placed
+there on purpose, and was conducted to the rajah, who waited; for him
+at the door of the pavilion, and welcomed him with an embrace. They
+then walked together into the pavilion, in which two chairs were
+placed out of compliment to the admiral, on one of which the rajah
+sat down, though contrary to his usual custom, and desired the
+admiral to be seated on the other. At this interview a treaty of
+friendship and commerce was settled, and a factory allowed to be
+established at Cananor. In consequence of this, the admiral gave
+orders for some of the ships to load here, while others were to do
+the same at Cochin[8].</p>
+<blockquote>[8] Castaneda, or rather his translator Lichefild, gets
+somewhat confused here, as if this factory were settled at Cochin,
+though the whole previous scene is described as at
+Cananor.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Having settled all things to his mind at Cananor and Cochin, the
+admiral proceeded with his fleet to the harbour of Calicut, where he
+took several paraws in which were about fifty Malabars who could not
+escape; but he forbore making any farther hostilities against the
+city, till he might see whether or not the zamorin would send him any
+message. Soon afterwards there came a boat with a flag to the
+admirals ship, a which was a person in the habit of a Franciscan
+friar, who was taken at first sight for one of those who had
+accompanied Ayres Correa, and who they supposed had remained a
+prisoner. On entering the ship, he saluted them, saying <i>Deo
+gratias</i> ; but was immediately recognized as a Moor. He excused
+himself for coming in that disguise, to secure permission of getting
+on board, and said that he brought a message from the zamorin to the
+admiral, about settling a trade in Calicut. To this the admiral made
+answer, that he would by no means treat on this subject, unless the
+zamorin would previously satisfy him for all the goods which had been
+seized in the factory, when he consented to the death of Correa and
+the rest who were there slain. On this subject three days were spent
+ineffectually in messages between the zamorin and the admiral, as the
+Moors used every influence to prevent any friendly agreement. At
+length, perceiving that all these messages were only meant to gain
+time, the admiral sent notice to the zamorin that he would wait no
+longer than noon for his final answer, and if that were not perfectly
+satisfactory and in compliance with his just demands, he might be
+assured he would wage cruel war against him with fire and sword, and
+would begin with those of his subjects who were now prisoners in his
+hands. And, that the zamorin might not think these were only words of
+course, he called for an hour-glass, which he set down in presence of
+the Moorish messenger, saying that as soon as the sand had run out a
+certain number of times, he would infallibly put in execution all
+that he had threatened. All this, however, could not induce the
+zamorin to perform his promise; for he was of an inconstant and
+wavering disposition, and influenced by the counsels of the Moors.
+The outward shew he had made of peace was only feigned, or occasioned
+by the fear he had of seeing so great a fleet in his port, from which
+he dreaded to sustain great injury; but the Moors had now persuaded
+him into a contrary opinion, and had prevailed on him to break his
+word.</p>
+<p>When the time appointed by the admiral was expired, he ordered a
+gun to be fired, as a signal to the captains of his ships to hang up
+the poor Malabar prisoners, who had been distributed through the
+fleet. After they were dead, he ordered their hands and feet to be
+cut off and sent on shore in a paraw, accompanied by two boats well
+armed, and placed a letter in the paraw for the zamorin, written in
+Arabic, in which he signified that he proposed to reward him in this
+manner for his deceitful conduct and repeated breach of faith; and,
+in regard to the goods belonging to the king of Portugal which he
+detained, he would recover them an hundred fold[9]. After this, the
+admiral ordered three of his ships to be warped during the night as
+near as possible to the shore; and that these should fire next day
+incessantly on the city with all their cannon, by which vast injury
+was done, and the royal palace was entirely demolished, besides
+several other houses belonging to the principal inhabitants of the
+place. The admiral afterwards departed for Cochin, leaving Vincente
+Sodre with six well armed ships to command the coast, who was to
+remain in India when the rest of the fleet returned to Portugal, and
+was likewise directed to go upon a voyage of discovery to the straits
+of Mecca, and the coast of Cambaya[10].</p>
+<blockquote>[9] De Faria says the bodies of these unfortunate
+Malabars were thrown into the sea, to be carried on shore by the
+tide.--Astl.I. 52. a.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[10] By the straits of Mecca are here meant the straits
+of Bab-el-mandeb, or the entrance from the Indian Ocean into the Red
+Sea; and by the coast of Cambaya, what is now called
+Guzerat.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>From Calicut the admiral sailed for Cochin; and immediately on his
+anchoring in that port, the rajah[11] sent on board certain hostages
+to remain as his sureties; and when the admiral landed, the rajah
+went in person to meet him. At this interview, the rajah delivered up
+to the admiral Stephen Gyl and others who had remained in his
+country, and the admiral presented a letter from the king of Portugal
+to the rajah, returning thanks for the kindness he had shewn to
+Cabral, and declaring his satisfaction at the settlement of a factory
+for trade at Cochin. The admiral also delivered a present from the
+king of Portugal to the rajah, consisting of a rich golden crown set
+with jewels, a gold enamelled collar, two richly wrought silver
+fountains, two pieces of figured arras, a splendid tent or pavilion,
+a piece of crimson satin, and another of sendal[12]; all of which the
+rajah accepted with much satisfaction. Yet, not knowing the use of
+some of these things, the admiral endeavoured to explain them; and
+particularly, ordered the pavilion to be set up to shew its use,
+under which a new treaty of amity was settled. The rajah appointed a
+house for the use of the Portuguese factory, and a schedule of prices
+were agreed upon, at which the various spices, drugs, and other
+productions of the country were to be delivered to the Portuguese
+factors, all of which were set down in writing in form of a contract.
+The rajah likewise delivered present for the king of Portugal,
+consisting of two gold bracelets set with precious stones, a sash or
+turban used by the Moors of cloth of silver two yards and a half
+long, two great pieces of fine Bengal cotton cloth, and a stone as
+large as a walnut taken from the head of an animal
+called <i>bulgoldolf</i> , which is exceedingly rare, and is said to be
+an antidote against all kipds of poison[13]. A convenient house being
+appointed for a factory, was immediately taken possession of by Diego
+Hernandez as factor, Lorenzo Moreno, and Alvaro Vas as clerks, and
+several other assistants.</p>
+<blockquote>[11] The rajah or king of Cochin has already been named
+Triumpara, or Trimumpara, on the authority of De Barros, De Faria,
+and other ancient authors; yet De Faria, in other instances, calls
+him Uniramacoul--Astl. I. 52. b.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[12] It is difficult to say what may have been meant by
+this last article. In old French writings <i>Rouge comme Sendal</i> 
+means very high red, or scarlet; from which circumstance, this may
+have been a piece of scarlet satin or velvet.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[13] Of the animal called bulgoldolf in the text we have
+no knowledge, nor of this stone of wonderful virtue; but it may
+possibly refer to the long famed bezoar, anciently much prized, but
+now deservedly neglected.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>While the ships were taking in their cargoes at Cochin, a message
+was brought to the admiral from the zamorin, engaging, if he would
+return to Calicut, to make a complete restitution of every thing that
+had been taken from the Portuguese, and that a treaty of friendship
+and commerce would be immediately arranged between them. After
+considering this message, the admiral ordered the messenger to
+prison, meaning to take revenge on him in case the zamorin should
+prove deceitful in this instance as he had already been in many
+others[14]. After this precaution, he went to Calicut, more for the
+purpose of endeavouring to recover the merchandize, than from any
+expectation of procuring the friendship of the zamorin. For this
+reason he took only his own ship[15], leaving Stephen de Gama in the
+command at Cochin in his absence. The captains of the fleet were much
+averse to this rashness; yet could not persuade him to take a larger
+force, as he said he would be sufficiently protected by the squadron
+of Vincente Sodre, which was cruizing on the coast, whom he could
+join on any emergency. On his arrival at Calicut, the zamorin
+immediately sent notice that he would satisfy him next day for all
+the goods which had been taken from Cabral, and would afterwards
+renew the trade and settle the factory on a proper footing. But as
+soon as he understood that the admiral had come with so small a
+force, he commanded thirty-four paraws to be got in readiness with
+all expedition, for the purpose of taking his ship. And so
+unexpectedly did these assail him, that the admiral was forced to cut
+one of his cables and make out to seaward, which he was fortunately
+enabled to do, as the wind came off from the land. Yet the paraws
+pursued him so closely, that he must infallibly have been taken, if
+it had not been for the squadron of Sodre making its appearance, on
+sight of which the paraws gave over the chase and retired to
+Calicut.</p>
+<blockquote>[14] According to De Faria, this messenger was a bramin,
+who left his son and nephew at Cochin as hostages, and accompanied De
+Gama to Calicut, where he carried various messages between the
+zamorin and the admiral. --Astl. I. 53. b.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[15] De Faria says he was accompanied by a
+caravel.--Astl. 1.53. b.</blockquote>
+<p>On his return to Cochin, die admiral immediately ordered the
+messenger of the zamorin to be hanged[16]. The failure of this
+treacherous attempt against De Gama gave much concern to the zamorin;
+who now resolved to try if he could induce the rajah of Cochin to
+refuse a loading to the Portuguese, and to send away their factory
+from his port. With this view he transmitted a letter to that prince,
+in the following terms:</p>
+<blockquote>[16] The son and nephew of the messenger, according to De
+Faria.--Astl.I. 53. c.</blockquote>
+<p>"I am informed that you favour the Christians, whom you have
+admitted into your city and supplied with goods and provisions. It is
+possible you may not see the danger of this procedure, and may not
+know how displeasing it is to me. I request of you to remember the
+friendship which has hitherto subsisted between us, and that you now
+incur my displeasure for so small a matter in supporting these
+Christian robbers, who are in use to plunder the countries belonging
+to other nations. My desire is, therefore, that for the future you
+may neither receive them into your city, nor give them spices; by
+which you will both do me a great pleasure, and will bind me to
+requite your friendship in whatever way you may desire. I do not more
+earnestly urge these things at the present, being convinced you will
+comply without further entreaty, as I would do for you in any matter
+of importance."</p>
+<p>The rajah of Cochin answered in the following terms: That he knew
+not how to expel the Christians from his city, whom he had received
+as friends, and to whom he had passed his word for trade and amity.
+He denied that his friendly reception of the Christians could be
+construed as any offence to the zamorin, as it was the custom in the
+ports of Malabar to favour all merchants who resorted thither for
+trade; and declared his resolution to maintain his engagements
+inviolate to the Portuguese, who had brought great sums of gold and
+silver, and large quantities of merchandize into his dominions in the
+course of their trade. The zamorin was much offended by this answer
+of the rajah of Cochin; to whom he wrote a second time, advising him
+earnestly to abandon the Portuguese if he had any respect for his own
+welfare. The rajah of Cochin was not to be moved, either by the
+persuasions or threatening of the zamorin, and sent a reply to his
+second letter, in which he declared he should never be induced to
+commit a base or treacherous action by fear of the consequences, and
+was resolved to persist in maintaining his treaty of trade and amity
+with the Portuguese. Finding that he could not prevail on the rajah
+of Cochin to concur with him, he commanded twenty-nine large ships to
+be fitted out in order to assail the Portuguese fleet when on its
+return homewards, expecting that he should be able to destroy them
+with more ease when fully laden.</p>
+<p>The rajah of Cochin gave no intimation to the admiral of the
+letters and messages which had been interchanged between him and the
+zamorin, until he went to take leave; at which time, he declared he
+would hazard the loss of his dominions to serve the king of Portugal.
+The admiral, after many expressions of gratitude for his friendly
+disposition and honourable regard for his engagements, assured him
+that the king his master would never forget the numerous
+demonstrations he had given of friendship, and would give him such
+assistance as should not only enable him to defend his own dominions,
+but to reduce other countries under his authority. He desired him not
+to be in fear of the zamorin, against whom there should henceforwards
+be carried on so fierce war, that he would have enough of employment
+in defending himself, instead of being able to attack others. In this
+the general alluded to the aid which the rajah might expect from the
+ships that were to remain in India under the command of Vincent
+Sodre. All this conversation took place in presence of many of the
+principal nayres, of which circumstance the rajah was much pleased,
+as he knew these people were in friendship with the Moors, and had
+opposed the grant of a factory to us at Cochin[17].</p>
+<blockquote>[17] In addition to the narrative of Castaneda, De
+Barros, Maffi, and De Faria relate, that ambassadors came to De Gama
+while at Cochin from the Christian inhabitants in Cranganore and that
+neighbourhood, who they said amounted to 30,000. They represented,
+that they knew he was an officer of the most Catholic king in Europe,
+to whom they submitted themselves; in testimony of which, they
+delivered into his hands the rod of justice, of a red colour, tipped
+with silver at both ends, and about the length of a sceptre, having
+three bells at the top. They complained of being much oppressed by
+the idolaters; and were dismissed by De Gama with promises of a
+powerful and speedy assistance.--Astl. I. 53. d.</blockquote>
+<p>Having completed the loading of ten ships, the admiral sailed from
+Cochin on his homeward-bound voyage; and when about three leagues
+from Pandarane, he descried the Moorish fleet of twenty-nine large
+ships coming towards him. After consulting with the captains of his
+fleet, and the wind being favourable for the purpose, he immediately
+bore down to engage them. The ships commanded by Vincente Sodre,
+Pedro Raphael, and Diego Perez, being prime sailers, closed up first
+with the enemy, and immediately attacked two of the largest ships of
+the Moors. Sodre fought with one of these alone, and Raphael and
+Perez assailed the other. Almost on the first onset, great numbers of
+the enemies were so dismayed that they leapt into the sea to escape
+by swimming. On the coming up of De Gama with the rest of the fleet,
+all the enemies ships made off as fast as they could towards the
+shore, except those two which were beset at the first, and were
+unable to escape, which were accordingly taken possession of. De
+Gama, considering that all his ships were richly laden, would not
+pursue the flying enemy, being afraid he might lose some of his ships
+on the shoals; but our men went in their boats and slew about 300 of
+the Moors who had endeavoured to save themselves by swimming from the
+two captured ships. These vessels were accordingly discharged of
+their cargoes; which consisted of great quantities of rich
+merchandize, among which were six great jars of fine earthen ware,
+called porcelain, which is very rare and costly and much admired in
+Portugal; four large vessels of silver, and many silver perfuming
+pans; also many spitting basons of silver gilt: But what exceeded all
+the rest, was a golden idol of thirty pounds weight, with a monstrous
+face. The eyes of this image were two very fine emeralds. The
+vestments were of beaten gold, richly wrought and set with precious
+stones; and on the breast was a large carbuncle or ruby, as large as
+the coin called a crusado, which shone like fire.</p>
+<p>The goods being taken out, the two ships were set on fire, and the
+admiral made sail for Cananor, where the rajah gave him a house for a
+factory, in which Gonzalo Gill Barbosa was settled as factor, having
+Sebastian Alvarez and Diego Godino as clerks, Duarte Barbosa as
+interpreter, and sundry others as assistants, in all to the number of
+twenty. The rajah undertook to protect these men and all that might
+be left in the factory, and bound himself to supply lading in spices
+to all the ships of the king of Portugal at certain fixed prices[18].
+In return for these favourable conditions, the admiral engaged on
+behalf of the king of Portugal to defend the rajah in all wars that
+might arise from this agreement; conditioning for peace and
+friendship between the rajahs of Cochin and Cananor, and that the
+latter should give no aid to any one who might make war upon the
+former, under the pain of forfeiting the friendship of the
+Portuguese. After this, the admiral gave orders to Vincente Sodre to
+protect the coast with his squadron till the month of February; and
+if any war should break out or seem probable between the zamorin and
+Trimumpara, he was to winter in Cochin for the protection of that
+city; otherwise he was to sail for the straits of the Red Sea, to
+make prize of all the ships belonging to Mecca that traded to the
+Indies.</p>
+<blockquote>[18] De Faria alleges that the persons who were appointed
+to settle matters relative to trade at this port, differed much upon
+the price of spices: on which occasion many threatening messages were
+sent to the rajah, who at length through fear complied with all the
+demands of the Portuguese. He says that the rajahs of Cochin and
+Cananor were as refractory and adverse at first as the zamorin; and
+that when De Gama arrived at Cochin, the three princes combined to
+make him winter there by fraud, and joined their fleets to destroy
+him. That on the failure of this combination, a durable peace was
+made with Trimumpara; and the rajah of Cananor, fearing the
+Portuguese might not return to his port, sent word to De Gama that he
+was ready to comply with all his demands, --Astl.I. 54,
+a.</blockquote>
+<p>All these matters being properly arranged, De Gama departed from
+Cananor for Portugal on the 20th December 1502[19]; with thirteen
+ships richly laden, three of which had taken in their cargoes at
+Cananor, and the other ten at Cochin. The whole fleet arrived in
+safety at Mozambique, where the ship commanded by Stephen de Gama
+having sprung a great leak, was unladen and laid on shore to be
+repaired. Seven days after their departure from Mozambique, the ship
+commanded by Lewis Cotinho sprung a great leak, and they were forced
+to endeavour to return to Mozambique to repair her; but, the wind
+being contrary, they had to do this in a creek on the coast.
+Continuing their voyage, they were assailed by a sudden tempest off
+Cape Corientes, in which the ship commanded by Stephen de Gama had
+her sails all split by the storm, owing to which she was separated
+from the fleet, and no more seen till six days after the arrival of
+the admiral at Lisbon, when she came in with her mast broken. The
+storm having abated, during which the fleet took shelter under the
+lee of Cape Corientes, the admiral prosecuted his voyage to Lisbon,
+and arrived safe at Cascais on the 1st September 1503. All the
+noblemen of the court went to Cascais to receive him honourably, and
+to accompany him to the presence of the king. On his way to court, he
+was preceded by a page carrying a silver bason, in which was the
+tribute from the king of Quiloa. The king received him with great
+honour, as he justly merited for his services in discovering the
+Indies, and in settling factories at Cochin and Cananor, to the great
+profit of the kingdom; besides the great fame and honour which
+redounded to the king, as the first sovereign who had sent to
+discover the Indies, of which he might make a conquest if he were so
+inclined. In reward for these brilliant services, the king made him
+admiral of the Indies, and likewise gave him the title of Lord of
+Videgueyra, which was his own.</p>
+<blockquote>[19] In Castaneda this date is made 1503; but from an
+attentive consideration of other dates and circumstances in that
+author, this must have been a typographical error.--E.</blockquote>
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>Note.--As De Gama did not return again to India till the year
+1524, which is beyond the period contained in that part of Castaneda
+which has been translated by Lichefild, we shall have no occasion to
+notice him again in this part of our work. For this reason, it has
+been thought proper to give the following short supplementary account
+of his farther services in India.</p>
+<p>"In 1524, Don Vasco De Gama, now Count of Videgueyra, was
+appointed viceroy of India by John III. king of Portugal, and sailed
+from Lisbon with fourteen ships, carrying 3000 fighting men. Three
+were lost during the voyage, with all the men belonging to two of
+them. While in the Gulf of Cambaya, in a dead calm, the ships were
+tossed about in so violent a manner that all onboard believed
+themselves in imminent danger of perishing, and began to consider how
+they might escape. One man leapt over-board, thinking to escape by
+swimming, but was drowned; and such as lay sick of fevers were cured
+by the fright. The viceroy, who perceived that the commotion was
+occasioned by the effects of an earthquake, called aloud to his
+people, <i>courage my friends, for the sea trembles from fear of you
+who are on it</i> . To make some amends for the misfortunes of the
+voyage, Don George de Meneses, one of the captains, took a large ship
+belonging to Mecca, worth 60,000 crowns, a large sum in those days.
+After his arrival at Goa, the viceroy visited some forts, and issued
+the necessary orders for regulating the affairs of his government;
+but he had not time to put any of his great designs into execution,
+as he died on Christmas eve, having only held the government of
+Portuguese India for three months. De Gama is said to have been of
+middle stature, with a ruddy complexion, but somewhat gross. His
+character was bold, patient under fatigue, well fitted for great
+undertakings, speedy in executing justice, and terrible in anger. In
+fine, he was admirably fitted for all that was entrusted to his
+conduct, as a discoverer, a naval and military commander, and as
+viceroy. He is painted with a black cap, cloak, and breeches, edged
+with velvet, all slashed, through which appears the crimson lining.
+His doublet is of crimson satin, over which his armour is seen inlaid
+with gold. He was the sixth successive governor of India, and the
+second who had the rank of viceroy."--Astl. I 54. b.</p>
+<p>SECTION VI.</p>
+<p> <i>Transactions of the Portuguese in India, from the departure of
+De Gama in December 1502, to the arrival of Alonzo de Albuquerque in
+1503.</i> </p>
+<p>As soon as the zamorin was assured of the departure of De Gama for
+Europe, he determined on putting his threats in execution against the
+rajah of Cochin, for which purpose he gathered an army at the village
+of Panani, not far from Cochin[1]. This was soon known to the
+inhabitants of Cochin, who were exceedingly afraid of the great power
+of the zamorin, and were much dissatisfied with their sovereign for
+incurring the displeasure of that prince out of respect to the
+Christians, whom they inveighed against with much bitterness on all
+occasions, and openly insulted wherever they were seen. Some that
+were in high credit with the rajah said openly, that as the zamorin
+was much more powerful than their state, our men ought to be
+delivered up to him, as the war was entirely on our account, for whom
+the kingdom ought not to be put in hazard. But the rajah, much
+offended at these people, declared that he was resolved to defend the
+Portuguese against the zamorin, trusting that God would favour him in
+so just a cause. Yet many of his subjects were much inclined to have
+seized the Portuguese belonging to the factory, but durst not, as the
+rajah gave them a place of considerable strength to dwell in, and
+appointed a guard for their security.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This army is said to have amounted to 50,000 men.
+Panani is six leagues from Cochin.--Astl. I. 54.</blockquote>
+<p>At this time Vincente Sodre arrived with his squadron in the bay
+of Cochin, after having done much damage on the coast of Calicut,
+both by land and sea. The Portuguese head factor sent Laurenzo Moreno
+to inform Sodre of the preparations which were making by the zamorin
+for the attack of Cochin, and requiring him in the name of the king
+of Portugal to land with his men for its defence. But Sodre answered,
+that his orders were to defend the sea and not the land; for which
+reason, if the zamorin had prepared to attack Cochin by sea, he would
+certainly have defended it; but as the war was to be carried on by
+land, he could not interfere, and the rajah must defend himself. The
+factor sent a second message, entreating him, in the name of God and
+on his allegiance to the king of Portugal, not to abandon the factory
+in this state of danger, as the power of the rajah was inadequate to
+defend Cochin against the zamorin; and as the sole object of the war
+was for the destruction of the factory and the ruin of the Portuguese
+trade, it certainly was his duty, as captain-general for the king of
+Portugal in these seas, both to defend the factory and to give every
+assistance in his power to the rajah. But Sodre was immoveable,
+pretending that he had been ordered to discover the Red Sea, where he
+expected to make many rich prizes, and set sail from Cochin for Cape
+Guardafui, preferring the hope of riches to his duty in defending the
+factory of Cochin.</p>
+<p>The zamorin collected his army, as already mentioned, at the
+village of Panani, where, besides his own subjects and allies,
+several of the principal subjects of the rajah of Cochin joined his
+standard, deserting their own sovereign, and carrying along with them
+all the power they were able to muster: Among these were the caimalls
+or governors of Chirapipil and Cambalane, and of the large island
+which is opposite to the city of Cochin. At this place, the zamorin
+made a long speech to his assembled chiefs, in which he endeavoured
+to justify his enmity to the Portuguese, whom he represented as
+thieves, robbers, and pirates, and as having first commenced
+hostilities against him without cause. He contrasted the quiet and
+friendly conduct of the Moors, who had traded for 600 years with
+Malabar, having never done injury to any in all that time, and had
+greatly enriched the country, and had raised his city of Calicut to
+be the greatest emporium in all the Indies: Whereas the Portuguese
+had taken and destroyed his ships, made his ambassadors prisoners,
+insisted on having their ships laden before those belonging to the
+Moors, had taken a ship of the Moors, burnt ten of his ships in his
+own harbour, had destroyed his city and forced him to escape for
+safety from his palace; taking law and vengeance for pretended
+grievances into their own hands, instead of applying regularly to him
+for redress. And, since the rajah of Cochin was fully informed of all
+these things, yet persisted in favouring the Portuguese in despite of
+all remonstrances, he had resolved to make war upon him, to deprive
+him of his dominions, and to drive these Christian intruders out of
+India.</p>
+<p>This address gave much satisfaction to all the assembled chiefs,
+and most especially to the lord of Repelim, who entertained a rooted
+enmity against the rajah of Cochin, who had dispossessed him of an
+island called Arrnuul. The only person who opposed the zamorin on
+this occasion was Nambeadarin[2], who was brother and next heir to
+the zamorin. He strongly urged the impolicy of driving the Christians
+from Malabar, to which merchants resorted from all places of the
+world, seeing that the Portuguese had made richer presents to the
+zamorin, than he had ever received before, and had brought much gold
+and silver into the country for the purchase of commodities, which
+was not usually done by such as came to make war. He represented the
+attempt of the hostages to escape who had been given for the safety
+of the Portuguese chief, and whom the zamorin was pleased to call
+ambassadors, as the first cause of jealousy and distrust; yet they
+were afterwards reconciled, and took the large Moorish ship at the
+desire of the zamorin, to whom they presented the great elephant. He
+said their conduct in trade and otherwise while in Calicut was quite
+satisfactory to all except the Moors, who were envious against them
+for interfering in their trade, and accused them falsely of taking
+pepper against the will of the owners, which in fact they had done
+themselves to prevent the Christians from loading their ships; nay
+that this was so evident that even the zamorin had licensed the
+Portuguese to take the pepper from the Moorish vessels. After which
+the Moors had risen against them, slaying their men and seizing all
+their goods. Yet, after all these outrages, they had given the
+zamorin a whole day in which to offer reparation, and had not sought
+revenge of their injuries treacherously like the Moors. That he saw
+no cause of going to war against the rajah of Cochin for receiving
+the Portuguese into his city like any other merchants who might
+frequent his harbour, as had likewise been done by the rajahs of
+Cananor and Koulan, who would not have done so if they had been
+robbers and pirates. And if the zamorin meant to drive the Portuguese
+from the Indies, besides making war on Cochin, it would be necessary
+for him to do the same against Canauor and all the other princes on
+the coast.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] This person is named Naubea Daring by Astley, and is
+said to have been nephew to the zamorin.--Astl. I. 56.</blockquote>
+<p>The zamorin was a good deal staggered by the discourse of
+Nambendarin, who had much credit and authority with him; insomuch,
+that it is thought he would have desisted from prosecuting the war,
+if it had not been for the Moors and the caymals, who represented
+that it would be a great disgrace to his character to recede after
+the assemblage of so great an army, and that it was to be expected
+the rajah of Cochin might now agree from fear to do what the zamorin
+had desired him. The zamorin then desired his sorcerers to point out
+a fortunate day for marching forward with his army, which they did
+accordingly, and promised him an assured victory. With this
+assurance, on which he placed great reliance, the zamorin departed
+from Panani, and took possession of Repelim, which is four leagues
+from Cochin.</p>
+<p>The rajah of Cochin had regular intelligence of all that passed in
+the camp of the zamorin by means of spies, and was in great trouble
+respecting the event, not having sufficient force for his defence, as
+many on whom he most relied had gone over to the enemy. Even those
+who remained served against their inclination, more especially the
+inhabitants of Cochin, who abhorred our people, and said openly that
+it were proper the rajah should either deliver them up to the zamorin
+or send them away from Cochin, to avoid the impending war. Many of
+the inhabitants of Cochin deserted the place for fear of the
+consequences. The members of the Portuguese factory were much alarmed
+by all these circumstances, and requested permission from the rajah
+to withdraw to Cananor, where they might remain in safety till the
+arrival of the next fleet from Portugal; hoping by this means to
+remove the cause of war, and to satisfy the subjects of the rajah.
+Trimumpara was displeased at this request, as not reposing sufficient
+confidence in his word, and declared he would rather forfeit his
+kingdom, and even his life, than deliver them up to the zamorin or
+any other who sought to injure them; and that, although he might lose
+Cochin in the war, there still were places of sufficient strength in
+which to keep them safe till reinforcements should arrive from
+Portugal. That although the zamorin had a great army, yet victory did
+not always follow numbers, as a few valiant men were often victorious
+over great odds, especially having justice on their side. He
+therefore desired the factory to remain, and to pray God to give him
+the victory. The Portuguese now offered to give him such aid as their
+small number would allow; but he declined allowing them to expose
+themselves to any danger on the present occasion, as his credit
+depended upon the preservation of their lives, that they might
+witness, for his faithful adherence to the treaty of amity which he
+had formed with their nation. Upon this he placed them under the
+safeguard of certain naires in whom he had confidence. After this,
+the rajah called all his nobles into his presence, together with the
+chief naires, who were the cause of all the murmurs against the
+Portuguese, and addressed the assemblage to the following effect:</p>
+<p>"I am much concerned to find that truth and loyalty should be
+wanting among men of your quality. I do not wonder at the present
+misconduct of the lower orders, who are often constrained by their
+poverty and wretchedness to commit all manner of wickedness. But that
+naires, who have always been noted for fidelity, should desire me to
+forfeit the promise which I have made, to the captain-general in
+behalf of the Portuguese, to defend them to the utmost of my power
+against all violence as my own subjects, astonishes and distresses me
+beyond measure. Under these assurances of protection, which were
+given with your consent, these men were left in my city; and yet,
+because you see the zamorin coming against me with more men than I
+have, you would have me to break my promise. Were I so unjust, you of
+all men ought to abhor me. If you dwelt with any sovereign on the
+assurance of his word, how would you conceive of him, if he were to
+treat you as you would now have me to act by these Christians? Is it
+because you are afraid of the great power of the zamorin? Be assured
+it were better for us all to die in the discharge of our duty, and
+the preservation of our promise, than to live dishonoured. To me no
+evil can be greater than to break my word, nor can there be a greater
+dishonour to yourselves than to be the subjects of a false and
+treacherous king. These Christians have brought much profit to me and
+my country, and the zamorin might have kept them in his own city, if
+he had permitted their factory to settle there in peace. Were it his
+intention to drive the Christians out of India, and to make war on
+all who receive them into their dominions, he ought to have begun
+this war with the rajah of Cananor: But his cause of war is the envy
+he has conceived at seeing me benefited by the trade which he has
+lost through his own misconduct, and because he believes in his pride
+that I am unable to withstand. But I trust in God and the justness of
+my cause, that with your assistance, I shall obtain the victory, and
+shall be able to protect the Christians, and preserve my honour
+inviolate." This speech had great effect upon the assembled naires,
+who were astonished at the constancy and resolution of the rajah.
+They all therefore craved pardon for the fears they had entertained,
+and promised to live and die in his service. The rajah immediately
+called the factor and the rest of the Portuguese into his presence,
+to whom he gave an account of all that had taken place between him
+and the naires; and named before them the prince <i>Naramuhin</i> [3],
+his brother and next heir, as general of the army which was destined
+to act against the forces of the zamorin, commanding every one to
+obey him in every respect as if he were himself present. Naramuhin
+accordingly marched with 5500 naires, and entrenched himself at the
+ford which forms the only entry by land into the island of Cochin,
+and which is only knee- deep at low water.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] In Astley this prince is called the nephew of the
+rajah of Cochin.-- Astl. I. 55.</blockquote>
+<p>When the zamorin received notice of the army of Cochin having
+taken post at this ford, he was somewhat afraid, more especially as
+he knew Naramuhin was considered to be the bravest and most fortunate
+warrior in Malabar. He therefore made a fresh attempt to induce the
+rajah of Cochin to accede to his demands, of delivering up the
+Portuguese and their goods, otherwise threatening to conquer his
+dominions, and to put all the inhabitants to the sword. Although the
+rajah of Cochin was quite sensible of the inferiority of his military
+force, and was convinced what the zamorin threatened might readily
+happen, he yet determined to remain firm to his engagements, and sent
+the following answer:</p>
+<p>"If you had required with civility what you have proudly commanded
+me, I should not have esteemed your valour lessened by your courtesy:
+For with men of wisdom and power there is no need for insolent
+vaunts. I have not as yet so sinned against God, that I should humble
+myself to vain boasting, or think that he should grant you the
+victory over me and those brave men who fight on my side. In spite of
+all your pride, I trust even with the small number I have to defend
+me in my just quarrel, that I shall be enabled to overcome you and
+all my enemies. However much you may have practised deceit and
+injustice, it has ever been my rule to avoid shame and dishonour, and
+I will never consent to deliver up the Christians or their goods,
+which I have engaged to defend."</p>
+<p>The zamorin was much offended by this answer from the rajah of
+Cochin, and vowed to destroy his whole country in revenge: Leaving,
+therefore, the isle of Repelim on the last day of March, he entered
+on the territories of Cochin, yet refrained from doing any injury, as
+he now occupied those parts which belonged to the chieftains who had
+joined him against their own sovereign. On the 2d of March, the army
+of the zamorin made an attempt to force a passage by the ford which
+was defended by prince Naramuhin; yet, in spite of all his prodigious
+superiority of numbers, he was forced to retire with considerable
+loss. Disappointed in this first essay, the zamorin encamped close by
+the ford, and sent the lord of Repelim next day with a still stronger
+force than had been employed in the first assault, to attempt forcing
+the passage. He even joined several armed paraws in this attack; but
+Naramuhin made a resolute defence, in which he was bravely seconded
+by Laurenzo Moreno and several other Portuguese, and effectually
+resisted every effort of the zamorins troops, who were obliged to
+retreat with much loss. Several such assaults were made on the ford,
+in all of which the zamorin lost many men, and was constantly
+repulsed, insomuch that he became fearful of a sinister end to his
+unjust enterprise, and even repented of having begun the war. He
+sent, however, a fresh message to the rajah, requiring him to deliver
+up the Christians as a preliminary of peace. But the rajah replied,
+that as he had refused to do so unjust an action when he had some
+reason to dread the superior power of the zamorin, it was absurd to
+expect any such thing now, when the advantage in the war was
+evidently of his side. He then advised the zamorin to beware of
+continuing the war, as he would not now satisfy himself with defence,
+but even hoped to give him a signal overthrow. And this certainly had
+been the case, if the subjects of the rajah had not shamefully
+deserted him in this war and given assistance to the enemy. The
+zamorin almost despaired of success, and would have given over the
+enterprize, if he had not been advised by some of his chiefs to
+assail several other towns belonging to the dominions of Cochin, so
+as to distract the attention of Naramuhin, and to weaken his force by
+obliging him to send detachments for their defence. But that brave
+prince provided against every emergency, and made so judicious a
+disposition of his forces, that he repulsed every effort of the
+enemy, and slew many of their men.</p>
+<p>Foiled in every attempt with severe loss, by the bravery and
+excellent dispositions of Prince Naramuhin, the zamorin corrupted the
+paymaster of the troops of Cochin, who changed the usual order of
+payment which had been daily made in the camp, and obliged the
+soldiers to come up to Cochin for that purpose. Naramuhin was obliged
+to submit to this arrangement, by giving leave to the naires to go
+for their wages, yet charged them punctually to return to the camp
+before day. But the treacherous paymaster kept them waiting till
+after day-light, by which means the prince was left with very few
+troops to defend the ford. Taking advantage of this concerted
+stratagem, the zamorin made an assault upon the ford with his whole
+force by sea and land, and constrained Naramuhin to retire with his
+small band into a grove of palm trees, where he was surrounded by the
+whole army of Calicut, yet fought the whole day against such terrible
+odds with the utmost resolution, several times throwing his enemies
+into disorder, of whom many were slain. But at length, overpowered by
+numbers, he and two of his cousins who fought along with him were
+slain, together with most of his faithful followers.</p>
+<p>When this melancholy event was announced to the rajah of Cochin,
+he fainted from extreme grief, and was for some time thought to have
+actually expired. At this time, the naires were much exasperated
+against our men, to whom they attributed the overthrow and death of
+prince Naramuhin, and the desperate situation of their country, and
+seemed much inclined to have put the Portuguese to death, or to have
+delivered them up to the zamorin. On the recovery of the rajah, and
+learning the designs of his people against our men, he called the
+Portuguese into his presence; he gave them assurance that even this
+reverse of his affairs should not alter his resolution of protecting
+them, both against the zamorin and his own subjects. He then
+addressed his assembled naires, urging them not to stain his honour
+and their own by injuring the Portuguese, whom he and they had sworn
+to protect. He exhorted them to persevere honourably and bravely in
+defending their country and preserving their honour inviolate to the
+Christians, and comforted them with the assurance that the Portuguese
+fleet would soon arrive with sufficient reinforcements to drive out
+the zamorin and to restore him to his dominions. In the meantime, he
+proposed that they should retire with what force remained, into the
+isle of Vaipi, which was of difficult access; and where they could
+defend themselves till the arrival of the Portuguese fleet, more
+especially as the winter was at hand, which would stop the progress
+of the war for some time. The naires were astonished at the
+resolution of their sovereign, and promised faithfully to obey his
+commands in all things.</p>
+<p>The zamorin made a new attempt to shake the resolution of the
+rajah in his present adversity, by offering peace on condition of
+delivering up the Portuguese and their goods; which the rajah
+rejected with disdain as he had done all his former overtures. On
+this the zamorin gave orders to destroy the whole country with fire
+and sword, on which intelligence most of the inhabitants of Cochin
+withdrew to other places. There were at this time in Cochin two
+Milanese lapidaries belonging to the factory, named John Maria and
+Pedro Antonio, who had been brought to India by Vasco de Gama. These
+men deserted to the zamorin, to whom they conveyed intelligence of
+the consternation which reigned among the inhabitants of Cochin, and
+of the small number of men that remained with the rajah. These men
+also made offer to the zamorin to make ordnance for him resembling
+those of the Portuguese, which they afterwards did as will appear in
+the sequel of this history, and for which service they were highly
+rewarded. The zamorin now moved forwards with his army to take
+possession of Cochin, and was resisted for some time by the rajah,
+who was himself slightly wounded. But finding it impossible any
+farther to resist against such prodigious odds, he withdrew to the
+strong island of Vaipi, carrying all our men along with him and every
+thing belonging to our factory. The zamorin, on taking possession of
+the deserted city of Cochin, ordered it to be set on fire. He then
+sent a part of his army against the isle of Vaipi, which was
+valiantly defended by the rajah and his men and in which defence the
+members of our factory contributed to the best of their ability. But
+the winter coming on, and bad weather setting in, the zamorin was
+obliged to desist for the present season, and withdrew his army to
+Cranganor with a determination to renew the war in the ensuing
+spring, leaving a strong detachment in the island of Cochin, which he
+ordered to throw up entrenchments for their defence.</p>
+<p>After his shameful desertion of Cochin, Vincente Sodre went with
+his fleet towards the kingdom of Cambaya; meaning to capture the rich
+ships of the Moors which trade to India from the Red Sea. He there
+took five ships, in which in ready money only was found to the value
+of 200,000  <i>perdaos</i> . Most of the Moors were slain in the
+battle, and the ships burnt. From Cambaya he sailed for Cape
+Guardafu; and as his ships were foul, he proposed to lay them aground
+to be careened at the islands of  <i>Curia Muria</i> [4]. Sodre arrived
+there with his squadron on the 20th April 1503; and though these
+islands were well inhabited by Moors, he resolved to venture on land,
+considering that these islanders were by no means warlike, and stood
+in fear of our men. The islanders accordingly behaved in a peaceable
+manner, and sold our people such provisions as they had to spare.
+Sodre laid one of his caravels aground for repair, on which he was
+informed by the Moors that their coast was subject to violent storms
+in the month of May, during which no ships were able to keep the sea,
+but were unavoidably driven on shore and wrecked. Wherefore they
+advised him strenuously to remove to the other side of the island,
+which would then be a sure defence against the storm, after which had
+blown over he might return to their part of the coast. Sodre made
+light of their advice, conceiving they meant him some harm; and told
+them that the ships of the Moors having only wooden anchors, might be
+easily driven ashore, whereas his anchors were of iron and would hold
+fast. Pedro Raphael, Hernan Rodriguez Badarsas, and Diego Perez were
+convinced of the council of the Moors being good, and therefore
+quitted these islands on the last day of April; but Sodre would not
+listen to their advice and remained with his brother at Curia Muria.
+According to the prediction of the Moors, a violent storm came on
+early in May, by which the two remaining ships were driven from their
+anchors and dashed to pieces. Vincente Sodre and his brother, with
+many others lost their lives, and nothing whatever was saved out of
+these two ships. The loss of these two brothers was considered as a
+punishment of Providence, for basely abandoning the rajah of Cochin
+and the factory in their imminent danger.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] These are a cluster of islands, otherwise called
+Chartan and Martan, on the coast of Yemen, between the latitudes of
+17&deg; and 18&deg; north.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Those who were saved returned towards Cochin to succour our
+people, and chose Pedro de Tayde[5] as their general. In their
+passage from Curia Muria towards Cochin, they encountered several
+severe storms, and were often in great danger of perishing. Being
+unable to reach Cochin on account of the winds, they were forced to
+take refuge in the island of Anchediva. A few days after their
+arrival, a ship came there from Portugal, commanded by Antonio del
+Campo, who had left Lisbon alone some time after Vasco de Gama, and
+had been much delayed on his voyage in consequence of the death of
+his pilot. He had encountered severe weather on the coast, and was
+forced after much trouble and danger to take refuge in Anchediva. The
+united squadron wintered in this island, where they suffered severe
+hardships from scarcity of provisions.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] Of the four officers mentioned in the text, three are
+enumerated at the commencement of the former voyage of De Gama as
+commanders of separate vessels. The fourth, Badarsas, is not in that
+list of captains, and may have been appointed captain of Vincente
+Sodres flag- ship.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION VII.</p>
+<p> <i>Voyage of Alonso and Francisco de Albuquerque to India in 1503;
+being the fifth of the Portuguese Expeditions to the East
+Indies.</i> </p>
+<p>Is the year 1503, supposing that the admiral Don Vasco de Gama had
+quietly settled factories in Cochin and Cananor, the king of Portugal
+did not consider it necessary to send any great fleet to India. He
+therefore determined to send only six ships in two separate
+squadrons, under separate generals. Alonso de Albuquerque, who was
+afterwards governor- general or viceroy of India, commanded one of
+these squadrons, having under him as captains, Duarte Pacheco and
+Hernan Martinez Mascarennas, who is said to have died during the
+voyage. The other squadron, likewise of three ships, was under the
+command of Francisco de Albuquerque, cousin to Alonso, having as
+captains Nicholas Coello and Pedro Vas de la Vega, the former of whom
+sailed under De Gama in the first discovery of India. This latter
+squadron sailed from Lisbon fifteen days after the other, yet arrived
+first in India. Both squadrons encountered severe storms during the
+voyage, in which the ship commanded by De la Vega was lost. Francisco
+de Albuquerque, and Nicholas Coello, arrived at Anchediva in the
+month of August, where they found De Tayde and the other captains who
+had wintered there, as related in the former section. They here
+received notice of the war between the zamorin and the rajah of
+Cochin, and of the sinister events which had occurred at that place;
+for which reason Francisco stood over with the whole fleet, now
+consisting of six sail, to Cananor, where he expected to receive more
+exact intelligence of the state of affairs in Cochin. They were here
+received with great joy by the Portuguese factory; and even the rajah
+of Cananor came on board the generals ship in person, and gave him a
+distinct recital of what had happened at Cochin, and of the present
+situation of Triumpara.</p>
+<p>Alonso de Albuquerque lost no time in going to Cochin, where he
+arrived on the night of Saturday the 2d of September 1503.
+Immediately on his approach, the troops of Calicut who guarded the
+entrenchments thrown up by the zamorin, abandoned their posts in the
+island of Cochin and fled to Cranganor, according to orders to that
+effect from the zamorin, who had received notice of the arrival of
+our fleet at Cananor. On Sunday morning Francisco came to anchor
+close to Cochin, when he was joyfully received by the inhabitants,
+playing on various instruments of music, and was soon afterwards
+visited by the Portuguese factor, who brought him a message from the
+rajah. On the Monday morning, leaving his ships in good order,
+Francisco took several boats well armed, and went to the island of
+Vaipi to visit the rajah, ordering two caravels to follow for
+security, in case of any of the Calicut paraws making their
+appearance. The rajah received our general with infinite
+satisfaction, greeting them with the exclamation, Portugal! Portugal!
+as soon as our boats were within hail; which was answered by our
+people shouting out, Cochin! Cochin! and down with the zamorin! On
+landing, the rajah embraced Francisco de Albuquerque with tears in
+his eyes, saying he only desired to live till restored to his
+dominions, that his subjects might be satisfied of his just conduct
+in suffering so much for the service of the king of Portugal. In the
+name of that sovereign, Francisco gave hearty thanks to Triumpara for
+his fidelity, and promised him ample revenge on his enemies. And as
+his finances were much reduced, he made him a present of 10,000
+crowns from the chest belonging to the expedition, to serve his
+present necessities, until he might be again able to draw the rents
+of his own dominions. This gift was exceedingly acceptable to the
+rajah, whose affairs were then at a very low ebb; and gave much
+satisfaction to the natives, who were by it greatly reconciled to the
+protection which their rajah had given to our men.</p>
+<p>The rajah was immediately brought back in triumph to Cochin, amid
+the joyful acclamations of his subjects, who henceforwards treated
+our men with esteem and respect. The news of the rajahs return to
+Cochin, and of the money which had been given him by our general, was
+speedily communicated to the zamorin; who, in expectation of the
+renewal of the war, sent orders to his caymals or governors on the
+frontiers towards Cochin to make every preparation for defence. On
+the very day on which the rajah returned to Cochin, Francisco de
+Albuquerque resolved to commence hostilities by an attack on the
+island directly over against Cochin, where he found the inhabitants
+quite unprepared and off their guard, as they had no idea of being so
+soon attacked: In this unprepared state, a great number of the
+Calicut troops were slain, and several of the towns on the island
+destroyed, after which the Portuguese returned to their ships without
+loss. Next day Francisco made a fresh assault on the same island with
+six hundred men, and was opposed by the caymal or governor for the
+zamorin, with a force of two thousand nayres, part of whom were
+spearmen, but the greater number armed with bows and arrows, and some
+with swords and targets. After some resistance, but in which none of
+them were hurt, our people made good their landing, and galled the
+Indians so sore with their cross-bows, that they soon fled. The
+Portuguese pursued quite across the island, and forced their enemies
+to continue their flight across the water, leaving many of their men
+behind both killed and wounded. Having now no enemy to oppose them in
+the island, the Portuguese laid it entirely waste, and burnt all the
+towns and villages it contained.</p>
+<p>Adjoining to this island there lay another,
+named <i>Charanaipin</i> [1], which belonged to a caymal who was
+subject to the rajah of Cochin, but had revolted to the zamorin at
+the commencement of the war. From some spies employed by the rajah of
+Cochin, it was understood that this caymal had a force of three
+thousand nayres, seven hundred of whom were archers, and forty were,
+armed with matchlocks[2]; besides which all their towns were well
+fortified with trenches. He had likewise several paraws provided with
+ordnance, with which he was supplied by the zamorin, and these were
+stationed in one of the harbours of the island, to defend it against
+the Portuguese. Notwithstanding all these preparations, of which he
+was well informed, Francisco Albuquerque went against this island the
+day after he had reduced the former, and commenced his attack against
+the harbour in which the paraws were stationed. The enemy were soon
+driven by our ordnance from their boats, yet many of them continued
+in the water up to their girdles to resist the landing of our troops,
+annoying them as much as possible with stones, spears, and arrows.
+They were at length driven from the water by our ordnance, but
+rallied again on the shore, and bravely resisted our people in
+landing for a long time. They were at length driven to take shelter
+in a grove of palm trees, in which they defended themselves for a
+short space, and were at the last driven to seek for safety in a
+disorderly flight, in which they were pursued by our men. In the
+pursuit, Pedro de Lares, who was constable to Francisco de
+Albuquerque, being separated from the rest, was attacked by three
+nayres all at once. One of these let fly an arrow which hit Pedro on
+his breast- plate but without hurting him; on which Pedro levelled
+his piece and shot him dead. The second nayre he likewise slew by
+another shot. The third nayre wounded him in the leg with a weapon
+called a <i>gomya</i> , and then endeavoured to run away, but Pedro
+killed him, with his sword. On the enemy being put to flight,
+Francisco divided his forces into three bodies, two of them
+Portuguese, and the third composed of nayres in the service of the
+rajah of Cochin, and marched all over the island plundering and
+burning the towns and villages without resistance.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This seems to be the island named Chirapipil on a
+former occasion.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[2] Thus I understand the expression in Lichefilds
+translation of Castaneda, "Forty were armed with,
+shot."--E.</blockquote>
+<p>While thus employed, a considerable number of paraws arrived with
+reinforcements from Calicut, from which a powerful body of nayres
+landed in that part of the island where Duarte Pacheco happened to be
+posted with a very inferior force, and had assuredly destroyed him
+and his men, but that Francisco de Albuquerque came very opportunely
+to his aid. Finding greater resistance than he expected, and fearing
+lest the caymal might attack him in the rear, while engaged in front
+with the nayres of Calicut, Francisco detached a part of his troops
+under Nicholas Coello, assisted by Antonio del Campo and Pedro de
+Tayde, to assault the residence of the caymal, who was slain bravely
+fighting in its defence. At this place one of our men was slain and
+eighteen wounded. In the mean time, Francisco de Albuquerque and
+Duarte Pacheco defeated the reinforcements from Calicut, and forced
+them to take refuge on board their paraws, leaving many of their men
+slain and wounded on the shore. After this signal victory, by which
+the greater part of the three thousand nayres belonging to the caymal
+and many of those from Calicut were slain, Francisco de Albuquerque
+conferred the honour of knighthood on several of his officers who had
+signalized themselves on the occasion. He then wasted the whole
+island with fire and sword.</p>
+<p>Francisco determined in the next place, to attack the country of
+the lord of Repelim, for which purpose he departed with his troops by
+water from Cochin, and reached a town in that territory, four leagues
+from Cochin, about eight o'clock next morning. Near two thousand
+nayres, five hundred of whom were armed with bows and arrows, were
+stationed, on the beach of the isle of Repelim to repel this attack;
+but were soon forced by our ordnance to retire into a grove of palms,
+on which Francisco landed with his troops, the van being led by
+Nicholas Coello. The enemy resisted for some time under the shelter
+of the trees, and wounded some of our people; but were at length
+forced to take to flight, after losing a good many of their men, who
+were shot by our cross-bows and <i>calivers</i> [3]. Our troops
+followed the nayres, who took refuge in the towns of the island, in
+which much greater slaughter was made of the enemy than in the field,
+as they were crowded together and more exposed to our shot. On taking
+possession of the town, Francisco gave it up to be plundered by the
+nayres of Cochin, who assisted him on this expedition, that they
+might not consider the conduct of the Portuguese on this occasion
+proceeded from any inclination for plundering the country, but from a
+desire to revenge the injuries which had been done to their own
+rajah.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] Caliver is the old name of the matchlock or carabine,
+the precursor of the modern firelock or musket.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On his return from this victory, Francisco was joyfully received
+by the rajah of Cochin, who desired him to desist from any farther
+operations against the enemy, as he considered himself sufficiently
+revenged. But Francisco requested his permission to continue the war,
+as he was still unsatisfied till he had taken effectual vengeance on
+the zamorin, and accounted it no trouble to fight in the service of
+the rajah. He seized, however, the present opportunity of the high
+favour in which he stood with the rajah, to solicit permission for
+constructing a fort at Cochin, for the protection of the Portuguese
+factory during the absence of the ships. This request was immediately
+complied with; the rajah even offered to be at the sole charge, and
+Francisco lost no time in proceeding to construct the intended fort.
+As there were neither stones, lime, nor sand to be procured, it was
+necessary to build the castle of timber; which the rajah ordered to
+be immediately provided for the purpose, and brought to the spot
+appointed, which was close to the river side, as best adapted for
+resisting the assault of the Calicut fleet in any future attempt
+against Cochin. The rajah sent likewise a great number of his
+subjects to carry on the work; saying that our people had already had
+enough to do in the operations of the war: But Francisco commanded
+our people to work in constructing the fortifications, the
+foundations of which were laid on the 26th September 1503. The
+inhabitants of Cochin were astonished at the diligence with which our
+people laboured at this work, saying there were no such men in the
+world, as they were equally good at all things.</p>
+<p>On the 30th September, four days after the commencement of the
+fort, Alonso de Albuquerque arrived with his ships at Cochin, having
+been delayed on his voyage by severe storms and contrary winds, yet
+brought all his men with him in excellent health. Francisco was much
+pleased at his arrival; and a portion of the fort being allotted to
+those newly arrived, it was soon finished. Though built of timber,
+this castle was as strong and handsome, as if it had been constructed
+of stone and lime. It was of a square form, each face being eighteen
+yards, with bulwarks or bastions at each corner mounted with
+ordnance. The walls were made of two rows of palm trees and other
+strong timber, firmly set in the ground, and bound together with iron
+hoops and large nails, the space between the two rows of timber being
+rammed full of earth and sand, and the whole surrounded by a ditch
+always full of water[4]. The day after this fort was finished, which
+was named Manuel in honour of the king of Portugal, the captain-
+general with all his people made a solemn procession, in which the
+vicar of the fort bore the crucifix under a canopy carried by the
+captains of the fleet, preceded by trumpets and other instruments of
+music. The fort was solemnly blessed, and consecrated by the
+celebration of mass; after which friar Gaston preached a sermon, in
+which he exhorted his hearers to be thankful to God, who had
+permitted the inhabitants of the small western kingdom of Portugal to
+construct a fortress in this distant region, among so many enemies of
+the Catholic faith. He expressed a hope that this might be the
+forerunner of many other establishments of a similar nature, to the
+advancement of the true religion among the heathen, and the glory of
+Portugal. He likewise desired his hearers to keep always in mind the
+high obligations they owed to the rajah for the good service he had
+rendered to the king of Portugal on this occasion. A faithful report
+was carried to the rajah of this part of the discourse, who was much
+gratified, and gave thanks for the same to the two generals.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] A very ordinary precaution in India, to guard the
+passage of the wet ditch in fortified places, both against desertion
+and surprise, is by keeping numbers of crocodiles in the
+water.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>After completing the fort, the Portuguese renewed the war, and
+made an attack on two towns belonging to the lord of Repelim on the
+coast, about five leagues from Cochin, having learned from spies that
+they were but slightly garrisoned. On this expedition the generals
+took a body of seven hundred men, and departing from Cochin about two
+hours before day, they arrived at their destination about nine
+o'clock next morning. These towns had a population of six thousand
+people, besides children, and were only defended by three hundred
+nayres, all bowmen. Alonso de Albuquerque with part of the forces
+landed at the nearest town, and Francisco with the remainder of the
+forces at the other, which was only about a cannon-shot distant from
+the former. In the first town the enemy was completely surprised and
+run away, and the place was set on fire without resistance. On seeing
+the people run away, our men pursued and slew many of the fugitives,
+and when wearied of the pursuit they plundered and destroyed the
+country. In the mean time the alarm was spread over the
+neighbourhood, and about 6000 nayres assembled, who made an attack
+upon our men as they were embarking, so that they were in great
+danger: In particular, Duarte Pacheco, not being able to find his
+boat in the place where he had left it, was closely pursued; and
+though he and his company defended themselves valiantly, and killed
+many of the enemy, eight of his men were wounded with arrows. So
+superior was the number of the enemy on this occasion, that Pacheco
+and his men had assuredly been all slain, if the rest of the troops
+had not again landed to his rescue; on which the enemy lost heart and
+run away, leaving the field of battle strewed over with their slain.
+After the defeat of the nayres, our men set fire to fifteen paraws,
+which were drawn up on the beach, and carried away seven which were
+afloat.</p>
+<p>The lord of Repelim was much grieved at the destruction of his
+towns; and being afraid of our people making an attack on another
+about a league farther up the river, he sent a strong detachment of
+his nayres for its security. The generals, however, resolved to
+follow up their victory, and to do all the evil in their power to the
+territories of this lord. For this purpose, after allowing their men
+some time for rest, they departed about midnight, while it was still
+so dark that they could not see each other in the boats, expecting to
+come upon their enemies by surprise by dawn of next morning. The
+boats in which Alonso de Albuquerque and his party were embarked got
+considerably a-head of the rest, and arrived at the town which it was
+intended to attack a good while before day. Weary of waiting for the
+rest, he landed his men, and gave orders to set the town on fire. At
+first they were successful in this rash enterprise, as the ordinary
+inhabitants were a cowardly unarmed people. But the garrison of above
+two thousand nayres, having assembled on the alarm, attacked Alonso
+and his men with great fury and forced them to retreat to their
+boats, after killing one man and wounding several others of the
+party, which only consisted originally of forty men. Alonso and his
+soldiers would not have been able to make good their retreat, if the
+sailors who remained in charge of the boats had not fired off a
+falcon[5], or small piece of ordnance, on which the nayres gave over
+the pursuit. By this time day broke, and Francisco de Albuquerque
+approached with the rest of the boats; and seeing the perilous
+situation of Alonso, he commanded the ordnance in the boats to be
+played off against the enemy, on which they fled from the shore. At
+this time Pacheco, who was somewhat astern of the rest, observed a
+great number of armed nayres marching along a narrow passage to
+reinforce the others at the town; and brought his boat so near the
+pass, that he completely stopt their passage that way. The whole of
+our men were now landed, and soon constrained the enemy to take
+flight with considerable loss; after which they set the town on fire,
+but did not think it prudent to pursue the runaways, as they were not
+acquainted with the country.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] A falcon or faulcon is described as a small cannon of
+two pound shot. The following enumeration of the ancient English
+ordnance, from Sir William Monsons Naval Tracts, in the reigns of
+Elizabeth and James the First, is given in Churchills Collection,
+Vol. III. p. 803. I suspect the weight of the basilisk, marked 400
+pounds in this list, may be a typographical error for 4000.--E.
+<pre>
+    Names.             Bore.    Weight.   Shot.    Powder.     Random
+                      inches.    libs.    libs.     libs.       paces.
+    Cannon-royal       8-1/2    8000       66        30          1930
+    Cannon             8        6000       60        27          2000
+    Cannon-serpentine  7        5500       53-1/2    25          2000
+    Bastard cannon     7        4500       41        20          1800
+    Demi-cannon        6-3/4    4000       30-1/2    18          1700
+    Cannon-petro       6        3000       24-1/2    14          1600
+    Culverin           5-1/2    4500       17-1/2    12          2500
+    Basilisk           5         400*      15        10          3000
+    Demi-culverin      4        3400        9-1/2     8          2500
+    Bastard culverin   4        3000        5         5-3/4      1700
+    Sacar              3-1/2    1400        5-1/2     5-1/2      1700
+    Minion             3-1/2    1000        4         4          1500
+    Faulcon            2-1/2     660        2         3-1/2      1500
+    Falconet           2         500        1-1/2     3          1500
+    Serpentine         1-1/2     400          3/4     1-1/2      1400
+    Rabanet            1         300          1/2       1/3      1000
+</pre></blockquote>
+<p>After this exploit, Duarte Pacheco and Pedro de Tayde went with
+their divisions to destroy another town at some distance, in their
+way towards which they fought and defeated eighteen paraws belonging
+to the zamorin, and then set the town on fire. From thence they stood
+over to the island of <i>Cambalan</i> , the caymal of which was an
+enemy of the Cochin rajah, where they destroyed a large town. From
+that place, Pacheco went with five armed paraws of Cochin to burn
+another town, where he met with considerable resistance, and slew a
+great number of the enemy, seven of his own people being wounded.
+After setting the town on fire, he retired towards Cochin, and was
+forced to fight with thirteen armed paraws of Calicut, which he
+defeated with the assistance of Pedro de Tayde and Antonio del Campo,
+who fortunately joined him in this emergency. On their defeat, the
+Calient paraws retired into a creek, where one of them ran aground
+and was taken by Pacheco; but our men being worn out with hard
+rowing, were unable to pursue the rest, and returned to Cochin. On
+receiving an account of these transactions, the rajah was much
+satisfied with the revenge which had been taken of his enemies, and
+requested of our generals to discontinue the war, to which, however,
+they were by no means inclined.</p>
+<p>On account of the war, no pepper was brought from the country to
+sell at the factory in Cochin, neither dared the merchants to go out
+in search of that commodity, insomuch that the factory had only been
+able to procure 300 <i>bahars</i> [6], and the factor requested the
+generals to go in quest of some which was to be procured at a place
+about nine leagues from Cochin. For this purpose the two generals and
+all their captains set out from Cochin under night, that their
+intentions might not be discovered by the enemy. On the way Pacheco
+destroyed a whole island, in which he fought against six thousand of
+the enemy with his own company only, and the two generals put
+thirty-four paraws to flight. After this Pacheco and del Campo
+destroyed a town on the continent, where they defeated two thousand
+nayres, many of whom were slain, without any loss on their side.
+After this, the generals sent on the <i>tony</i> [7] for the pepper,
+which carried such merchandize as was meant to be given in exchange;
+and for its protection Pacheco and three other captains accompanied
+it with two hundred men, and five hundred Cochin paraws[8]. In
+passing a narrow strait or river, our people were assailed from the
+banks by a vast number of the natives armed with bows and arrows, but
+were defended by their targets, which were fixed on the gunwales of
+their boats. Leaving one of his captains with fifty Portuguese t
+protect the tony, Pacheco with the other two captains and the troops
+belonging to the rajah, made towards the shore, firing off his
+falcons against the enemy, whom he forced to quit the shore with much
+loss; after which he landed with his troops, most of whom were armed
+with hand-guns. The enemy, who were full two thousand strong,
+resisted for a quarter of an hour, but at length took to flight after
+having many slain. Pacheco pursued them to a village, where the
+fugitives rallied and were joined by many nayres, insomuch that they
+now amounted to six thousand men, and our people were in great
+jeopardy, as the enemy endeavoured to surround them, and to intercept
+their return to the boats. But our men defended themselves manfully,
+and fought their way back to the shore, where the natives divided on
+each hand, being afraid of the shot of the falcons, which slew great
+numbers of them, and our men re-embarked without having a single man
+killed or wounded.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] Two weights of that name are described as used in
+India for the sale of pepper and other commodities, the small and the
+large bahar; the former consisting of three, and the latter of four
+and a half peculs. The pecul is said to weigh 5 1/2 pounds
+avoirdupois: Consequently the smaller bahar is equal to 16 1/2, and
+the larger to 24 3/4 English pounds. A little farther on in the
+present work of Castaneda, 4000 bahars are said to equal 1200
+quintals; which would make the bahar of Cochin equal to thirty
+Portuguese pounds.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] This is a species of bark of some burthen, then used
+on the Malabar coast.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[8] Such is the expression of Lichefild; which I suspect
+ought to have been 500 nayres of Cochin in paraws.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The zamorin was much displeased at the successes of our people
+against his confederates, and by the loss of many of his paraws in
+these several actions, and was even afraid lest the Portuguese might
+eventually dispossess him of his dominions. He used every exertion
+therefore to prevent us from procuring pepper, being in hopes, if our
+ships were constrained to return to Portugal without loading, that
+they would come no more back to India. He used his influence
+therefore even with the merchants of Cochin to refuse supplying
+pepper to our ships, which they did so effectually, under pretence of
+the war, that, in spite of the influence of the rajah, and
+notwithstanding high offers of reward from Francisco de Albuquerque,
+the factory had only been able to procure 1200 quintals or 4000
+bahars[9] of pepper; and even that was got with hard fighting, some
+hurt to our own men, and infinite loss of lives to the enemy. Unable
+to procure any more pepper in Cochin, Alonso de Albuquerque went to
+Coulan in search of that commodity, accompanied by Pedro de Tayde and
+Antonio del Campo, knowing that the government of that state was
+desirous of having one of our factories established in their city,
+and had solicited both Pedro Alvares Cabral and the lord admiral De
+Gama to that effect; and Alonso was determined to go to war with the
+people of Coulan unless they gave him loading for his ships.</p>
+<blockquote>[9] The quantity in the text is probably exaggerated
+considerably, as only a few pages before, the factory at Cochin is
+said to have only been able to procure 300 quintals.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Coulan is twelve leagues from Cochin, and twenty-four from Cape
+Comorin. Before the building of Calicut, Coulan was the principal
+city of Malabar, and the port of greatest trade on that coast. Its
+buildings, more especially the temples and shrines of their idols,
+are larger and more splendid than those of Cochin. The haven is
+excellent, the country is well stored with provisions, and the
+condition of the people resembles in all things what has been
+formerly said of the inhabitants of Calicut. The inhabitants are
+idolatrous Malabars, having among them many rich Moorish merchants,
+more especially since the war broke out between us and the zamorin,
+as many of these merchants had left Calicut to reside at Coulan. They
+trade with Coromandel, Ceylon, the Maldive islands, Bengal, Pegu,
+Camatia, and Malava. The rajah or king of this state rules over an
+extensive kingdom, in which there are many rich cities and several
+good harbours; by which means he has a large revenue, and is able to
+maintain a great military force, but the men are mostly of a low
+stature: He entertains in his palace a guard of three hundred women,
+armed with bows and arrows, who are very expert archers, and they
+bind up their breasts very tight with bandages of silk and linen,
+that they may not stand in the way of using their bows. This rajah
+usually resides in a city named Calle, and is generally at war with
+the king of Narsinga[10].</p>
+<blockquote>[10] In Astleys Collection, I. p. 55. Coulan or Koulan is
+said to have been governed at this time by a <i>queen</i>  or rana. By
+Narsinga Bisnagar is to be understood, which was one of the
+sovereignties into which the Decan or southern peninsula of India was
+then divided--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In the city of Coulan, which is governed by certain officers or
+aldermen, there is a church which was built by the apostle St Thomas,
+who came here to preach the Catholic faith, and made many converts
+both among the idolaters and others, who have handed down the
+Christian belief from generation to generation, so that there are at
+least twelve thousand families of Christians scattered abroad in the
+country, in which they have churches in many places. The king who
+then ruled in Coulan, being much displeased at the numbers of his
+subjects who were converted to Christianity, banished St Thomas from
+his dominions, who then went to a city called Malapur or Meliapour,
+on the coast of the dominions of Narsinga, and was followed by the
+Christians of Coulan, and even by many of the idolaters. He is said
+to have retired into a solitude in the mountains, where he died, and
+whence his body was removed for interment in a vault of the church he
+had built at Coulan. This church is now deserted and entirely
+overgrown with trees and bushes, and is kept by a poor Moorish
+zealot, who subsists on alms which he receives from Christian
+pilgrims, and even some of the idolaters give alms at this tomb.</p>
+<p>On the arrival of Alonso de Albuquerque at the harbour of Coulan,
+the governors of the city came on board to visit him, and settled a
+treaty with him, in which it was stipulated that we were to have a
+factory in the city, and that they should provide a loading with all
+possible dispatch for the three ship he had along with him. While one
+of his ships was taking in a lading in the harbour, the other two
+always kept out at sea watching all ships that passed, and obliging
+every one they could descry to come and give an account of themselves
+to Albuquerque as captain- general under the king of Portugal. He
+offered no injury to any of these, unless to such as belonged to the
+Moors of the Red Sea, all of which that fell in his way were first
+plundered and then burnt, in revenge for the injuries they had done
+to the Portuguese. When the house for the factory was finished, and
+the ships laden, Alonso left there Antonio de Sola as factor, with
+two clerks, Rodrigo Aranso and Lopo Rabelo, an interpreter named
+Medera, and two friars to serve as chaplains, together with other
+assistants, being twenty in all; after which he returned to
+Cochin.</p>
+<p>About this time Francisco de Albuquerque received a message from
+ <i>Cosebequin</i> , a friendly Moor of Calicut who has been formerly
+mentioned, giving him notice that the zamorin was determined to make
+another attack on Cochin so soon as the Portuguese fleet had departed
+for Europe, and to fortify it in such a manner as should prevent them
+from having any farther intercourse with that country. With this view
+the zamorin had entered into treaties with all the rajahs and leading
+nayres or nobles of Malabar, and it was even rumoured that those of
+Cananor and Coulan had secretly entered into terms with him against
+the Portuguese and the rajah of Cochin[11]. He said farther that the
+Moorish merchants had promised large assistance for carrying on the
+war, as they were exceedingly desirous to exclude the Christians from
+trading to India. About the same time a letter came from Rodrigo
+Reynel to the same effect, saying that the zamorin was levying
+troops, and had caused a great number of cannon to be prepared for
+the war: Reynel likewise said that the Moors of Cochin were decidedly
+in the interest of the zamorin, and were therefore to be looked to
+with much jealousy. The rajah likewise informed Albuquerque, that
+from certain bramins who had come from Calicut he was informed of the
+intentions and preparations of the zamorin for reducing Cochin; and
+as he had little reliance on his own subjects, he requested some
+Portuguese troops might be left for his defence. Francisco gave the
+rajah assurance of protection, and even that the Portuguese would add
+to his dominions at a future period, in reward for his fidelity and
+friendship to their nation, and as a compensation for the injuries he
+had suffered in their cause.</p>
+<blockquote>[11] The western coast of India below the Gauts, is
+divided into three portions, the Concan in the north, after this the
+coast of Canara, and in the south, the country of Malabar, reaching
+from Mount Deli to Cape Comorin. At the present period, Malabar was
+divided into seven kingdoms or provinces: Cananor, Calicut,
+Cranganor, Cochin, Porka, Coulan, and Travancore; which last was
+subject to the kingdom of Narsinga or Bisnagar. Cananor, Calicut, and
+Coulan only were considered as independent rajahs, the others being
+less or more subjected to the authority of these
+three.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The rajah was much pleased with this assurance; and as Francisco
+found he could have no more pepper at Cochin, he determined upon
+returning to Portugal, when he had appointed a fit person to remain
+as captain-general in India. He found this matter difficult, as none
+of his captains were willing to remain with the small force which he
+was able to leave behind. At length Duarte Pacheco willingly accepted
+the charge, and the rajah was much pleased with his appointment,
+having already sufficient proof of his valour. Pacheco was
+accordingly left at Cochin with his own ship and two caravels
+commanded by Pedro Raphael and Diego Perez, and a pinnace, with
+ninety men in health besides others who were sick.[12] As much
+ordnance and ammunition was likewise given him as could possibly be
+spared from the homeward bound ships. All these things being settled,
+Francisco de Albuquerque sailed for Cananor, where he proposed to
+endeavour to procure the liberty of Rodrigo Reynel and the others who
+were at Calicut. But the zamorin sent him word that there was no
+necessity to take this person away, who was desirous of remaining in
+India; and if the captain-general would remain he should have the
+pepper which was promised.[13] At this time Alonso de Albuquerque
+returned from Coulan, and joined Francisco at Cananor; and a letter
+was brought from Rodrigo Reynel, giving information that the zamorin
+was certainly resolved to attempt the conquest of Cochin, as soon as
+the Portuguese ships should leave the coast; and that his only
+intention in making an offer of pepper was with a view to prevent
+them from burning the ships which were then in the harbour of
+Calicut.</p>
+<blockquote>[12] According to Astley, his whole force consisted of
+110 men. Vol. I. p. 65.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[13] This story of Reynel and the pepper promised by the
+zamorin, is so confusedly told in Lichefild's translation of
+Castaneda, as to be altogether unintelligible.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>All matters being arranged, the Portuguese fleet sailed from
+Cananor on the 31st of January 1504. Alonso de Albuquerque and
+Antonio del Campo came to Lisbon on the 23d of August, and presented
+to the king 400 weight of seed pearls, which are called <i>Alhofer or
+Ragges</i> , 144 pound weight of great pearls, and eight of the
+oysters from which the pearls are procured. [14] He gave likewise to
+the king a diamond as big as a large bean, and many other jewels; and
+two Persian horses of wonderful swiftness. Francisco de Albuquerque
+and Nicholas Coello, who left Cananor some time after Alonso, were
+cast away on the voyage and never more heard of. Pedro de Tayde was
+driven to Quiloa, where his ship was lost on the bar and most of his
+men drowned. From Quiloa he went to Mozambique in a <i>zambucco</i> ,
+where he afterwards died; but left a letter in which he gave a
+particular account of the state of affairs in India, which he ordered
+to be, delivered to the first captain who might put in there from
+Portugal[15].</p>
+<blockquote>[14] In Astley the weight of the large pearls is reduced
+to 40 pounds. Even with that correction, the immense quantity of
+pearls in the text is quite incredible. There must be some error in
+the denomination, but which we are unable to
+correct.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[15] The remainder of this section is taken from Astley,
+I. 56, being there appended to the abridgement of the voyage of the
+Albuquerques. It is an isolated incident, having no apparent
+connection with the history in the text, yet seemed proper to be
+preserved in this place. --E.</blockquote>
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>Antonio de Saldanna, the last of the three commanders who were
+sent to cruise in the north of the Red Sea, having lost Diego
+Fernandez Peteira, came to anchor at a place called St Thomas, on the
+east side of the Cape of Good Hope, which was made famous by the name
+of <i>Aquada del Saldanna</i> , or Saldannas watering-place, on account
+of his having lost several of his men there in endeavouring to land.
+At this time Ruy Lorenzo was parted from him in a storm which drove
+him to Mozambique, whence he held on his course for Quiloa, where he
+took some small prizes. Being ambitious to distinguish himself, he
+went to the island of Zanzibar, twenty leagues short of Mombasa,
+where he took twenty small vessels. After this he appeared before the
+town of Mombasa, the king of which place sent out a number of armed
+almadias or paraws to take his ship: But Lorenzo armed his long boat
+with a crew of thirty men, which took four of the almadias and killed
+a great many of the Moors. The king sent an army of 4000 men to the
+shore under the command of his son, who was killed with some others
+at the first volley; on which one of the Moors ran out from the ranks
+with a flag of the Portuguese arms, craving a parley. Peace was soon
+concluded, by which the king agreed to pay 100 <i>meticals</i>  of gold
+yearly as a tribute to the king of Portugal[16].</p>
+<blockquote>[16] Mombasa belonged to the Portuguese for near 200
+years. In 1698 it was very easily taken by the Muskat Arabs, who put
+twenty Portuguese to the sword.--Astl.</blockquote>
+I. 56. a.
+<p>From Mombasa, Lorenzo sailed for Melinda, the king of which place
+was much oppressed by him of Mombasa, on account of his connection
+with the Portuguese. On his way he took two ships and three small
+vessels called  <i>zambuccos</i> , in which were twelve magistrates of
+Brava, who submitted their city to the king of Portugal, and engaged
+to give 500 meticals of yearly tribute. On his arrival at Melinda, he
+found that a battle had been fought between the kings of Melinda and
+Mombasa, in which neither could claim the victory. Antonio de
+Saldanna likewise arrived at Melinda about this time, and by his
+mediation peace was restored between these princes. Saldanna and
+Lorenzo went thence to the mouth of the Red Sea, where they defeated
+some Moors at the islands of <i>Kanakani</i> [17] beyond Cape Guardafu.
+On the upper coast of Arabia, they burnt one ship belonging to the
+Moors which was laden with frankincense, and they drove another on
+shore which carried a number of pilgrims for Mecca.</p>
+<blockquote>[17] No islands of that name are to be found on our maps.
+The islands of Socotora, Abdul Kuria, and los dos Hermanas, are to
+the eastwards of Cape Guardafu: Chartan Martan, or the islands of
+Kuria Muria, are a considerable distance N.N.E. on the outer or
+oceanic coast of Yemen.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION VIII.</p>
+<p> <i>Transactions of the Portuguese in India under Duarte Pacheco,
+from the departure of Alonso and Francisco de Albuquerque in January
+1504, till the arrival of Lope Suarez de Menesis with succours in
+September of that year.</i> </p>
+<p>After the departure of the Albuquerques from Cananor, Duarte
+Pacheco, who was left with the command in India, remained there for
+some time to take in provisions, having along with him the caravel
+commanded by Pedro Raphael, while the other ship of his small
+squadron, under the command of Diego Perez, was repairing at Cochin.
+Pacheco anchored with his own ship off the harbour of Cananor, and
+dispatched Raphael along the coast to oblige all ships which passed
+that way to come to Cananor in acknowledgment of Pacheco as
+captain-general in the Indies. Several were brought in by Raphael,
+and were constrained to give a full account from whence they came,
+whither bound, and what they were laden with. In case of their
+containing any pepper, more especially if bound for Calicut, he used
+to take that commodity from them; and carried his command with so
+high a hand, that he became the terror of these seas. One night while
+thus at anchor, a fleet of twenty-five ships came suddenly to the
+anchoring-ground where he lay, which he suspected to have been sent
+from Calicut on purpose to attack him. Considering himself in
+imminent danger, he immediately slipped his cables, not having time
+to weigh anchor, and made sail to gain the windward of this fleet,
+upon which he directly commenced firing. They were mostly small ships
+laden with rice, and made off with all the haste in their power,
+though some of them ran aground. One of the vessels of this fleet was
+a large ship belonging to the Moors of Cananor, having nearly 400 men
+on board, who resisted for some time, shooting off their arrows, and
+even endeavoured to take our ship. When day was near at hand, and
+after having nine men slain in the action, the Moorish captain at
+length submitted, and told Pacheco that he belonged to Cananor.</p>
+<p>After some time spent in this manner, Pacheco made sail for
+Cochin, and in the passage fell in with several ships belonging to
+the Moors, taking some, and burning or sinking others. On landing at
+the fort of Cochin, he learnt from the factor that the reports of the
+zamorin making preparations for the renewal of the war, were
+perfectly true, and even that the Moorish inhabitants of Cochin were
+adverse to the rajah for having taken part with the Portuguese
+against the zamorin. Being informed likewise that the Cochin rajah
+was in great fear of this new war, he went next day to visit him,
+carrying all his boats well manned, and fenced with raised sides of
+boards to defend his men from the missile weapons of the enemy. They
+were likewise furnished with ordnance, and all decorated with flags
+and streamers in a gallant manner, hoping thereby to inspire
+confidence in Trimumpara, who was much dejected at the small force
+which had been left for his defence. In a conference between them,
+the rajah said to Pacheco, that the Moors asserted he was left in the
+Indies for the sole purpose of removing the merchandize belonging to
+the Portuguese in the factory at Cochin to Cananor and Coulan, and
+not to defend him against the power of the zamorin; which he was even
+disposed to think were true, in consideration of the smallness of the
+fleet under his command. Pacheco felt indignant at the suspicion
+which the rajah entertained, and endeavoured to convince him that he
+had been imposed upon by the Moors out of enmity to the Portuguese,
+assuring him that he would faithfully exert himself in his defence.
+He pointed out to him the strength of the natural defences of Cochin,
+which were all narrow, and defensible therefore by a few valiant men
+against any number of assailants. The rajah was greatly relieved by
+these assurances, and Pacheco went to visit the different places by
+which the island of Cochin might be assailed, all of which he
+diligently fortified, more especially the ford, which he strengthened
+with a row of stakes, both to prevent the enemy from wading across,
+and to hinder any of their vessels from passing.</p>
+<p>In the mean time he was informed by letter from Rodrigo Reynel,
+that a principal Moor in Cochin, in concert with several others, were
+contriving to quit that city; and had been twice secretly at Calicut
+to confer with the zamorin on this subject. Pacheco was a good deal
+concerned at this intelligence, and proposed to the rajah to have
+this Moor executed for his treasonable intercourse with the zamorin.
+But Trimumpara would by no means consent to this measure; saying that
+it would occasion a mutiny among the Moors, by whom the city was
+furnished with provisions in exchange for goods, and be thought it
+were better to dissemble with them all. Pacheco then said that he
+would have a conference with the Moors, meaning to use policy with
+them, since the rajah did not approve of violent measures; and to
+this the rajah consented, giving orders to his naires to obey the
+orders of Pacheco. In pursuance of this plan, Pacheco went to the
+dwelling of this chief Moor, named <i>Belinamacar</i> , close by the
+river, taking with him a guard of his own men well armed, and
+requested that person to send for some other leading men among the
+Moors, whom he named, saying that he wished to consult with them on a
+subject of great importance to them all. When they were all
+assembled, he made them a speech to the following effect.</p>
+<p>"I sent for you, honest merchants, that I might inform you for
+what purpose I remain in the Indies. It is reported by some, that I
+mean only to remove the factory and the goods belonging to the
+Portuguese to Coulan and Cananor: But my sole purpose is to defend
+Cochin against the zamorin, and even if necessary I will die in your
+defence. I am resolved to meet him in Cambalan, by which way it is
+said he means to invade you; and, if he has the boldness to meet me,
+I hope to make him prisoner and to carry him with me into Portugal. I
+am informed that you intend to go away from Cochin, and to induce the
+rest of the inhabitants among whom you are the chiefs, to do the
+same; but I am astonished men of your wisdom should leave the country
+in which you were born, and where you have dwelt so many years, from
+fear of vain reports. Such conduct were even disgraceful for women,
+and is therefore much more so for you who are men of wisdom and
+experience. If you should be disposed to remove from hence when you
+shall actually be in danger, I should hardly blame you: But to do so
+before that danger is apparent, and even before a single battle has
+been fought, must proceed either from cowardice or treachery. You all
+well know, that only a very short while ago, a very small number of
+our Portuguese defeated thousands of those same enemies who now
+threaten to invade us. You may allege that we were then more in
+number than now, which was assuredly the case. But we then fought in
+the open field, where numbers were necessary; and we now propose only
+to fight in narrow passes, in which a small number will suffice as
+well as a multitude. You already know that I can fight, as it is I
+who have done the greatest injury to the enemy in the late war, which
+the rajah can well vouch. As for me I shall never yield, and I have
+more to lose, being overcome, than any of you. Put your trust
+therefore in me and my troops, and remain where you are till you see
+the event of our defence. Your sovereign remains in his port, and
+wherefore should you go away? I and the Portuguese who are with me,
+remain in this far distant country to defend your king, and you who
+are his natural born subjects: Should you then desert him and your
+country, you would disgrace yourselves and dishonour me, by refusing
+to repose confidence in my promise to defend you against the zamorin
+and all his power, were it even greater than it is. Wherefore, I
+strictly enjoin that none of you shall remove from Cochin, and I
+swear by all that is holy in our faith, that whoever is detected in
+the attempt shall be instantly hanged. It is my determined purpose to
+remain here, and to have the port strictly watched day and night that
+none of you may escape. Let every one of you, therefore, look well to
+his conduct, and be assured, if you do as I require, you shall have
+me for your friend; but if otherwise, I shall be your mortal enemy,
+and shall use you worse even than the zamorin."</p>
+<p>The Moors endeavoured to clear themselves from what had been
+alleged against them, but Pacheco would not listen to their excuses,
+and departed from them in anger, and immediately brought his ship and
+one of the caravels with two boats, which he anchored directly
+opposite the city of Cochin, with strict charges to let no one leave
+the city by water. He likewise appointed a number of paraws to guard
+all the creeks and rivers around the city; and ordered every boat
+that could transport men or goods to be brought every night under the
+guns of his ships, and returned to their owners in the morning. In
+consequence of all these precautions, the people of Cochin were so
+much afraid of him, that not one of the Moors or Malabars dared to
+leave the city without his permission, and henceforwards continued
+quiet. Notwithstanding all these cares, Pacheco used to make nightly
+invasions into the island of Repelim, where he burnt the towns, slew
+the inhabitants, and carried away much cattle and many paraws; on
+which account the Moors of Cochin, astonished that he could endure so
+much fatigue, gave out that he was the devil.</p>
+<p>Mean time the zamorin collected his forces in the island of
+Repelim, where he was joined by the lords of Tanor, Bespur, Kotugan,
+Korin, and many other Malabar chiefs, making altogether an army of
+50,000 men. Four thousand of these were appointed to serve by water,
+in 280 vessels, called <i>paraws</i> , <i>katurs</i> , and <i>tonys</i> ;
+with 382 pieces of cannon intended to batter the Portuguese fort at
+Cochin; and the rest of the troops were appointed to force a passage
+across the ford of the river, under the command of Naubea Daring,
+nephew and heir to the zamorin, and Elankol, the lord of
+Repelim[1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This paragraph, enumerating the forces of the
+zamorin, is added to the text of Castaneda from Astley, Vol. I. p.
+56.</blockquote>
+<p>Intelligence of all this was conveyed to Cochin, and that the
+zamorin proposed to invade that city by the straits of Cambalan.
+Rodrigo Reynel, who sent this intelligence by letter, lay then very
+sick and died soon after, on which the zamorin caused all his goods
+to be seized. On the approach of the zamorin, the Moors of Cochin
+would very willingly have induced the inhabitants to run away, but
+durst not venture to do so from the fear they were in of Pacheco. He,
+on the contrary, that all might know how little he esteemed the
+zamorin and all his power, made a descent one night on one of the
+towns of Repelim, to which he set fire. But on the coming up of a
+great number of armed naires, he was forced to retreat in great
+danger to his boats, having five of his men wounded, after killing
+and wounding a great number of the enemy. On their return to Cochin,
+the targets of our men were all stuck full of arrows, so great was
+the multitude of the enemies who had assailed them. The rajah came to
+visit Pacheco at the castle on his return from this enterprize, and
+expressed his satisfaction at his success, which he considered as a
+mighty affair, especially as the zamorin and so great an army was in
+the island. Pacheco made light of the zamorin and all his force,
+saying that he anxiously wished he would come and give battle, as he
+was not at all afraid of the consequences, trusting to the superior
+valour of his own men.</p>
+<p>As the people of Cochin remained quiet, Pacheco now prepared for
+defending the pass of Cambalan. Leaving therefore a sufficient force
+to guard the castle, and twenty-five men in the caravel under the
+command of Diego Pereira to protect the city and watch the conduct of
+the Moors, taking with himself seventy-three men in one of the
+caravels and several armed boats, he departed for Cambalan on Friday
+the 16th of April 1504[2]. On passing the city, Pacheco landed to
+speak with the rajah, whom he found in evident anxiety; but making as
+if he did not observe his heaviness, Pacheco addressed him with a
+cheerful countenance, saying that he was just setting out to defend
+him against the zamorin, of whom he had no fear of giving a good
+account. After some conference, the rajah ordered 500 of his naires,
+out of 3000 who were in his service, to join Pacheco, under the
+command of <i>Gandagora</i>  and <i>Frangera</i>  the overseers of his
+household, and the caymal of <i>Palurta</i> , whom he directed to obey
+Pacheco in all things as if he were himself present. On taking leave
+of Pacheco, while he exhorted him to use his utmost efforts for
+defending Cochin against the zamorin, he desired him to be careful of
+his own safety, on which so much depended.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] The particular distribution of the force under
+Pacheco at this time is thus enumerated in Astleys Collection: In the
+fort thirty-nine men; in the ship left to defend Cochin twenty-five;
+in the caravel which accompanied him in the expedition to Cambalan
+twenty-six; into one boat twenty-three; and in the boat along with
+himself twenty-two; making his whole effective force 135 men;
+seventy-one only of which went along with him to defend the
+pass.--Astl. I. 56.</blockquote>
+<p>Pacheco arrived at the passage of Cambalan two hours before day,
+and seeing no appearance of the zamorins approach, he made an attack
+on a town on the coast of the island about the dawn, which was
+defended by 300 naires, all archers, and a small number armed with
+calivers, or match-locks, all of whom were embarked in certain
+paraws, and endeavoured to defend the entrance of the harbour. They
+were soon constrained by the cannon of the Portuguese to push for the
+shore and quit their paraws, but resisted all attempts of the
+Portuguese to land for near an hour, when they were completely
+defeated after losing a great many of their number, killed or
+wounded, and our men set the town on fire. Having taken a
+considerable number of cattle at this place, which he carried off
+with him, Pacheco returned to defend the pass of Cambalan. At this
+time the zamorin sent a message to Pacheco, offering him a handsome
+present, and proposing a treaty for a peace between them: but Pacheco
+refused accepting the present, and declared he would never make peace
+with him while he continued at enmity with the rajah of Cochin. Next
+day, the zamorin sent a second message, proudly challenging him for
+daring to obstruct his passage into the island of Cochin, and
+offering him battle, declaring his resolution to make him a prisoner,
+if he were not slain in the battle. To this Pacheco made answer, that
+he hoped to do the same thing with the zamorin, in honour of the day
+which was a solemn festival among the Christians, and that the
+zamorin was much deceived by his sorcerers when they promised him the
+victory on such a day. Then one of the naires who accompanied the
+messenger, said smiling as if in contempt, that he had few men to
+perform so great an exploit; whereas the forces of the zamorin
+covered both the land and the water, and could not possibly be
+overcome by such a handful. Pacheco ordered this man to be well
+bastinadoed for his insolence, and bid him desire the zamorin to
+revenge his quarrel if he could.</p>
+<p>That same evening, the rajah of Cochin sent a farther
+reinforcement to Pacheco of 500 naires, of whom he made no account,
+neither of these who were with him before, believing they would all
+run away; his sole reliance, under God, was on his own men, who
+feasted themselves that night, that the zamorin might learn how much
+they despised all his threats, and how eager they were for battle.
+Early next morning, Pacheco made a short speech to his men, exhorting
+them, to behave valiantly for the glory of the Christian name and the
+honour of their country, and promising them an assured victory with
+the assistance of God; by which their fame would be so established
+among the natives that they would be feared and respected ever after.
+He likewise set before them the rewards they might assuredly expect
+from their own sovereign, if they behaved gallantly on the present
+occasion. His men immediately answered him that they hoped in the
+ensuing battle to evince how well they remembered his exhortations.
+They all then knelt down and sung the <i>salve regina</i> , and
+afterwards an <i>Ave Maria</i> , with a loud voice. Just at this time,
+Lauren&ccedil;o Moreno joined Pacheco with four of his men armed with
+calivers, who were all anxious to be present in the battle, and of
+whose arrival the general was extremely glad, as he knew them to be
+valiant soldiers.</p>
+<p>In the course of the night, by the advice of the Italian
+lapidaries who had deserted to the enemy, the zamorin caused a sconce
+or battery to be erected directly over against the place where
+Pacheco was stationed, on which five pieces of ordnance were placed,
+from which great service was expected in the ensuing battle, owing to
+the narrowness of the pass. On the morning of Palm Sunday, the
+zamorin marched forwards with 47,000 men, partly naires and part
+Moors, and accompanied by all the rajahs and caymals who had joined
+him in this war. Of these, the rajah of <i>Tanor</i>  had 4000 naires;
+the rajahs of <i>Bybur</i>  and <i>Curran</i> , whose countries lay near
+the mountains of Narsinga, had 12,000 naires; the rajah of
+ <i>Cotogataco</i> , which is between Cochin and Cananor close beside
+the mountains, had 18,000 naires; the rajah of <i>Curia</i> , which is
+between Paniani and Cranganor, had 3000 naires. Naubea Daring, the
+prince of Calicut, and his brother Namboa, who were particularly
+attached to that part of the army composed of the zamorins immediate
+subjects, had a large body of men whose numbers I do not
+particularize. Their warlike instruments were many and of divers
+sorts, and made a noise as if heaven and earth were coming
+together.</p>
+<p>Before day, the van of this prodigious army arrived at the sconce
+of the Italians, and began immediately to play off their ordnance
+against the caravel, which was so near that it was an absolute
+miracle that not a single shot did any harm. But our cannon were
+better served, and every shot did execution among the enemy: and so
+well did they ply their guns, that before sunrise above thirty
+discharges were made from our caravel. At day-break, the whole of the
+enemies fleet, consisting of 169 barks, came out of the rivers of the
+island of Repelim to attack our small force. Sixty-six of these were
+paraws, having their sides defended with bags of cotton by advice of
+the Italians, to ward off our shot; and each of these had twenty-five
+men and two pieces of ordnance, five of the men in each paraw being
+armed with calivers or matchlocks. Twenty of the foysts or large
+barks were chained together, as a floating battery to assault the
+caravel; besides which, there were fifty-three <i>catures</i>  and
+thirty large barks, each of which carried sixteen men and one piece
+of ordnance, besides other weapons. Besides all these armed vessels,
+there were a great many more filled with soldiers, so that the whole
+river seemed entirely covered over. Of this numerous fleet, which
+contained near 10, 000 men, Naubea Daring was admiral or commander in
+chief, and the lord of Repelim vice-admiral. All these advanced
+against the Portuguese, setting up terrible shouts, which was
+answered alternately by sounding all their military instruments of
+music. The whole of these people were almost naked, having targets of
+various colours, and made a very gallant appearance. On the approach
+of this prodigious fleet, our caravel and boats were hardly
+discernible, so completely did the enemy cover the face of the water.
+Terrified by so prodigious a multitude, the naires of Cochin all ran
+away, only Grandagora and Frangora remaining, who were on board the
+caravel, or they would have done like the rest. Indeed their presence
+was of no importance, except to serve as witnesses of the valour of
+our men.</p>
+<p>Our people plied their ordnance and small arms so incessantly that
+the air was quite darkened with smoke, and as the boats of the enemy
+were very numerous and without order, they hindered each other, and
+our fire did prodigious execution among them, several of their paraws
+being torn to pieces and great numbers of their men killed and
+wounded, without any hurt on our side. The twenty-five paraws[3]
+which were chained together were now brought forwards, and gave much
+annoyance to our men, who were now likewise much fatigued, as the
+battle had continued a long time. The captain-general gave orders to
+fire off a <i>saker</i> ,[4] which had not been, hitherto used during
+the battle. By the time this had been twice fired, it did such
+terrible execution among the thick of the enemy as to sink four of
+their paraws, and all the others made the best of their way out of
+the battle, eighteen of the paraws being sunk in all, and vast
+numbers of the enemy slain and wounded. On the defeat of this
+squadron, which was commanded by Prince Naubea Daring, Elankol, the
+lord of Repelim, who was vice-admiral, came forward with a fresh
+squadron, and gave a proud onset, commanding his paraws to lay the
+caravel on board; but the Malabars had not resolution to put this
+order into execution, and held off at some distance. The zamorin also
+approached with the land army, doing his utmost to force the passage
+of the ford; but all their efforts were in vain, although this second
+battle was more fiercely urged than the first. Though the battle
+continued from daybreak to almost sunset, the enemy were able to make
+no impression, and were known to have lost 350 men slain outright,
+besides others, which were above 1000.[5] Some of our men were
+wounded, but none slain; for the balls of the enemy, though of cast
+iron, had no more effect than as many stones thrown by hand. Yet our
+barricades of defence were all torn to pieces, and one of our boats
+was very much damaged, which was entirely repaired during the
+night.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] A very short space before these are only stated as
+twenty; but the numbers and names in the text seem much
+corrupted.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] In a former note we have given a list of the names
+and circumstances of the English ordnance near this period. In that
+list the saker is described as a light cannon of only 5-1/2 pound
+ball, now looked upon as one of very small importance; we may
+therefore conclude that the other cannon used on the present occasion
+could hardly exceed  <i>falcouns</i> , or
+two-pounders.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] Such is the unintelligible expression in Lichefilds
+translation. In the account of this war compiled by the editor of
+Astleys Collection from the Portuguese historians, the enemy are said
+to have lost in the former part of this battle, twenty paraws sunk,
+180 persons of note, and above 1000 common men; while in the second
+attack, nineteen paraws were sunk, sixty-two fled, and 360 men were
+slain. In this account, a third naval engagement is mentioned, in
+which sixty-two paraws were sunk, and sixty fled; after which 15,000
+men were defeated by land, and four towns were burnt by
+Pacheco.--Astl. I. 56.</blockquote>
+<p>The rajahs and other chiefs who were allied with the zamorin, lost
+all hope of ever being able to get the victory over the Portuguese,
+and were sorry for having joined in the war so greatly to their own
+dishonour. Being afraid the captain-general might burn and destroy
+their towns and houses, which were all situated on the banks of
+rivers, they were anxious to leave the army of the zamorin, and to
+give over making war on the Portuguese. Some among them withdrew
+privately from the camp of the zamorin to the island of Vaipi with
+all their men, and reconciled themselves with the rajah of Cochin:
+These were <i>Maraguta, Muta</i>  Caymal, his brother and cousins. The
+zamorin was exceedingly mortified by the discomfiture of his people,
+and severely reprimanded his chiefs for their pusillanimous conduct,
+in allowing themselves to be defeated by such a handful of men. The
+two Italian deserters, while they acknowledged the valour of the
+Portuguese in the late action, represented that it would be
+impossible for them to continue to bear up long against such vast
+odds without reinforcements, and recommended the frequent reiteration
+of assaults, under which they must necessarily be at last overthrown.
+All those rajahs and chiefs who were for continuing the war, joined
+in opinion with the Italians. The zamorin made a speech, in which he
+recapitulated the defeats they had sustained and the defection of
+some of his allies, who had entered into treaty with the rajah of
+Cochin. He stated how short a period of the summer now remained for
+continuing the operations of the war, which must soon be laid aside
+during the storms and rain of the winter season, when it was
+impossible to keep the field; and that, on the conclusion of winter,
+a new fleet would come from Portugal with powerful reinforcements to
+the enemy, who would then be able to carry the war as formerly into
+his dominions, to their utter loss and destruction. He concluded by
+giving his opinion that it was necessary for him to make peace with
+the Christians. Naubea Daring, the prince of Calicut, made a long
+speech, in which he defended the Portuguese against the imputation
+thrown upon them by the Moors of their being thieves and pirates. He
+recapitulated all their conduct since their first arrival in India,
+showing that they had always conducted themselves with good faith,
+whereas they had been forced into war against Calicut by treachery
+and oppression. He concluded by strongly recommending to negotiate
+peace with the Christians, as otherwise the city and trade of Calicut
+would be utterly destroyed, to the irreparable injury of the zamorins
+revenue, which was of more importance to him than the friendship of
+the Moors, whose only object was their own profit. The zamorin was
+greatly moved by this discourse, and recommended to the other chiefs
+that they should concur with the prince, in procuring the
+establishment of peace. This opinion was by no means relished by
+Elankol, the lord of Repelim, who had confederated with the Moors to
+urge a continuance of the war, and endeavoured to impress upon the
+zamorin that his reputation would be destroyed by proposing peace at
+this time, which would be imputed to him as an act of cowardice. The
+principal Moors, likewise, who were present in the council used all
+their art and influence to induce the zamorin to persevere; and it
+was at length determined to continue the war.</p>
+<p>One <i>Cogeal</i> , a Moor of Repelim who had been a great
+traveller, and had seen many warlike devices, proposed a new
+invention for attacking the caravels at the ford, which was
+considered to be perfectly irresistible. Cogeal directed a floating
+castle to be built of timber on two boats or lighters, which were
+firmly secured by two beams at their heads and sterns. Over this the
+castle or square tower was strongly built of beams joined together by
+bars of iron and large nails, carried up to the height of a lance or
+spear, and so large that it was able to contain forty men with
+several pieces of ordnance. It was proposed that this castle should
+be brought Up to grapple with the caravels, by which the Portuguese
+might be attacked on equal terms. On seeing this machine, the zamorin
+liberally rewarded Cogeal for his ingenuity, and gave orders to have
+other seven constructed of the same kind. By means of his spies,
+Pacheco got notice of the construction of these floating castles, and
+likewise that the enemy were preparing certain fireworks to set the
+caravels on fire[6]. To keep off the fireships and floating castles,
+he constructed a species of rafts, made of masts or spars eight
+fathoms long, and bound together with iron bolts and hoops. Several
+of these, which were likewise eight fathoms broad, were moored with
+anchors and cables, at the distance of a stones throw from the
+caravels. Likewise, to prevent the caravels from being overlooked by
+the floating castles, one Peter Raphael built certain turrets on the
+decks of the caravels of spars set upright, in each of which seven or
+eight men had room to handle their arms. At this time the rajah of
+Cochin visited Pacheco, whom he earnestly exhorted to provide well
+for defence against the zamorin; as he was well assured his own
+subjects would desert him, if Pacheco were defeated. Pacheco
+upbraided Trimumpara for his tears, desiring him to call in mind the
+victories which the Portuguese had already gained over the enemy; and
+requested of him to return to his capital showing himself confident
+among his people, and to rest assured that he and the Portuguese
+would keep the pass against every force the zamorin might bring
+against it.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] Castaneda tells a long ridiculous story at this
+place, of a ceremonial defiance of the zamorin, not worth inserting.
+In Astley, I. 56. we are told that the Moors of Cochin were detected
+about this time communicating intelligence to the enemy, and that
+Trimumpara allowed Pacheco to punish them. On which he put five of
+their chief men into strict confinement, giving out that they were
+hanged; which gave much offence to the rajah and his
+people.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In expectation of an immediate attack, Lorenco Moreno returned to
+the caravels with as many of his people as could be spared from the
+factory. Pacheco made all his people take rest early in the night,
+that they might be able for the expected fatigues of the ensuing day,
+on which he had intelligence that the grand attack was to be made.
+About midnight, his small force was summoned under arms; when, after
+confession and absolution, he made a speech to his men, exhorting
+them to behave themselves manfully in the approaching conflict. They
+all answered, that they were resolved to conquer or die. About two in
+the morning, some of the most advanced vessels belonging to the
+Calicut fleet began to fire off their ordnance, as they approached
+towards the pass. The zamorin was himself along with the land army,
+which exceeded 30,000 men, accompanied with many field pieces.
+Elankol, the lord of Repelim, who commanded the vanguard, advanced to
+the point of <i>Arraul</i> , which in some measure commanded the ford,
+at which place he began to throw up some ramparts or defences of
+earth. Pacheco landed secretly at the point with a detachment of his
+troops, on purpose to prevent the enemy from throwing up
+entrenchments, and a sharp skirmish ensued, in which many of the
+enemy were slain. On the appearance of day, Pacheco retired to his
+boats, though with no small difficulty, owing to the vast numbers of
+the enemy who thronged around; yet got off with all his people
+unhurt, having effectually hindered the proposed intrenchments.</p>
+<p>The land army of the enemy now brought their ordnance to the
+point, where they began a furious cannonade upon; the caravels, yet
+without doing us any harm, as our people were all effectually secured
+by means of high wooden defences on the gunwales of their vessels;
+whereas every shot of ours made prodigious havoc among the enemy, who
+were quite unsheltered. The zamorin sent orders to his fleet to come
+on with all expedition, to deliver him and his men from this imminent
+danger. The Calicut fleet now approached in most formidable order,
+having several fire rafts in front, intended for setting our caravels
+on fire. After them came 110 paraws, full of men, and every one of
+them having ordnance, many of these being fastened together by means
+of chains. After these came 100 <i>catures</i>  and eighty <i>tonys</i> ,
+each of which had a piece of ordnance and thirty men. In the rear of
+all came the eight castles, which kept close by the point of
+ <i>Arraul</i> , as the <i>ebb was not yet altogether entered</i> .[7]
+The enemy came on with loud shouts and the sound of many instruments,
+as if to an assured victory, and immediately began a furious
+cannonade. Their fire rafts advanced burning in a most alarming
+manner, but were stopped by the  <i>canizos</i> , or rafts of defence,
+formerly mentioned. By these likewise, the paraws and other vessels
+of the enemy were prevented from closing with our caravels and boats,
+which they seem to have intended. In this part of the battle many of
+the paraws and other vessels of the enemy were torn to pieces and
+sunk, and a great number of their men were killed and wounded. On the
+turn of the tide, the floating castles put off from the point, and
+were towed by boats towards the caravels. In the largest of these
+castles there were forty men, in others thirty-five, and the smallest
+had thirty, all armed with bows or matchlocks, besides ordnance; and
+they seemed quite an irresistible force in comparison of ours, which
+consisted only of two caravels and two armed boats.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] Such are the words of Lichefild; which, perhaps may
+have been intended to imply that there was not yet sufficient depth
+of water to allow of their approach to the caravels; or it may mean
+that they waited for the tide of ebb, to carry them towards the
+Portuguese caravels, being too cumbrous for management by means of
+oars.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>When the largest castle came up to our floating defence, it
+immediately commenced a tremendous fire of all its ordnance upon our
+caravels; and at this time Pacheco ordered a <i>saker</i>  to be shot
+off, which seemed to do very little harm even at a second discharge.
+The remainder of the castles now came into their stations, and the
+battle raged with the utmost fury. What with incessant flights of
+arrows, and the smoke of so many guns, our people could seldom see
+the vessels of the enemy. In this extremity, the saker was discharged
+a third time against the largest castle, which had been somewhat
+shaken by the two former discharges. By this shot its iron work was
+broken, some of its beams were forced from their places, and several
+of the men on board were slain. By two other discharges of the saker
+this castle was all torn in pieces, and was forced to retire out of
+the battle. Still however the rest of the castles, and the numerous
+fleet of small craft kept up the fight. Towards evening all the
+castles were much injured, many of the paraws were sunk and torn in
+pieces, and great numbers of the enemy slain; so that at length they
+were constrained to retire. On our side not one man was even wounded:
+One only ball went through the caravel in which Pacheco commanded,
+and passed among many of his men without doing any hurt. On the enemy
+retiring, Pacheco gave chase in the two boats and some paraws; and
+the caravels kept up a constant fire upon point <i>Arraul</i> , whence
+they forced the zamorin and the land army to retire, after having 330
+of his men slain. After this great victory, the inhabitants of Cochin
+became quite reassured, and were no longer in dread of the power of
+the zamorin. Trimumpara came to visit Pacheco, whom he embraced, and
+congratulated on his great prowess: Many of the principal naires of
+Cochin went to compliment him; and even numbers of the Moorish
+merchants brought him rich presents, hoping to secure his favour.</p>
+<p>The zamorin was greatly disheartened by the overthrow of all his
+mighty preparations, and losing all hope of victory wished seriously
+to end the war. In a council of his allies and great men, they
+represented the great losses they had already endured in the war with
+the Portuguese, and proposed to treat with them for peace. His
+brother Naubea Daring, who had always been averse to the war, seemed
+to believe that Pacheco would refuse any treaty, and advised rather
+to defer making an offer of peace till the arrival of the next
+captain-general from Portugal. This prince was likewise of opinion
+that the Calicut army should still keep the field till the coming on
+of the rainy season made it advisable to retire; as it would look
+like flight to retreat at this time. Yet he recommended that no more
+attacks should be made on the pass, in which attempts they had
+already met with so much loss. Elankol, the lord of Repelim, urged
+the continuance of the war, and to make reiterated assaults on the
+Christians, which must be at last successful; by which means all the
+Portuguese that were in Cochin, Cananor, and Coulan would be
+destroyed. He advised likewise, to send false intelligence to these
+places, saying that they had taken our caravels and slain all our
+men; on which news the people of Cananor and Coulan would put the
+people in our factories to death. This was accordingly done; but as
+the inhabitants of these places had already received notice of the
+real state of affairs, they gave no credit to this false story. Yet,
+owing to the malice of the Moors who dwelt in these places, our men
+were in great danger and durst not come out of their factories, and
+one of our men was slain in Coulan.</p>
+<p>By the persuasion of Elankol and the Moors, the zamorin
+reluctantly consented to try the event of another battle: And, the
+castles being repaired, a fresh assault was made both by land and
+water, with many more men and vessels than before. This battle
+continued longer than the other, and the enemy was overthrown with
+far greater loss than they had ever received before. In consequence
+of this new victory, the inhabitants of Cochin became quite confident
+in their security from the power of their enemies; and the rajah, who
+had hitherto been in much dread of the event, became quite elated. He
+now came to visit Pacheco in a chair of state, with far more
+splendour than he had ever assumed since the commencement of the war.
+When this was told in the enemies camp, the chiefs urged the zamorin
+to a fresh attack, lest the rajah of Cochin might hold him in
+contempt. He desired them to cease their evil counsels, from which he
+had already sustained great loss, and which would still lead him into
+greater danger; but to leave him to consider what was best to be done
+for revenge against his enemies.</p>
+<p>The zamorin gave orders to some of his naires in whom he reposed
+great confidence, that they should go to Cochin on some false
+pretence, and endeavour to assassinate the general of the Portuguese
+and such of his men as they could meet with. But the naires are an
+inconsiderate people unable to keep any of their affairs secret, so
+that this shameful device became immediately known to Pacheco, who
+appointed two companies of the Cochin naires to keep strict watch for
+these <i>spies</i> ; one company at the ford, and the other along the
+river, waiting by turns day and night. By this means
+these <i>spies</i>  were detected and made prisoners. The chief
+ <i>spy</i>  was a naire of Cochin, of the family or stock of
+the <i>Lecros</i>  who had certain other naires attending upon him, who
+were strangers. On being brought before him, he ordered them to be
+all cruelly whipt and then to be hanged. The Cochin naires
+remonstrated against this punishment, because they were naires whose
+customs did not allow of this mode of execution; but he would not
+listen to their arguments, saying that their treachery richly merited
+to be so punished. The Portuguese officers represented to him the
+great troubles which the <i>rajah</i>  of Cochin had endured for giving
+protection to their nation, and how much this action might displease
+him, when he was informed of naires having been put to death in his
+dominions without his authority. Besides, that this might give
+occasion to some of those about the rajah, who were known to be
+already unfriendly to the Portuguese, to insinuate that the captain-
+general had usurped the authority from the rajah, and might in that
+way wean his affections from them. Pacheco was convinced by these
+arguments that he had acted wrong, and immediately sent to
+countermand the execution. Two of them were already <i>half-dead</i> ;
+but <i>those who were still living</i> , he sent to the rajah,
+informing him that they had deserved death, but that from respect to
+him he had spared their lives. The rajah was singularly gratified by
+this mark of respect, and the more so because there happened to be
+then present several of his principal nobles and some chiefs from
+other places, besides sundry of the chief of the Moors of Cochin, who
+had endeavoured to impress on his mind that the Portuguese were
+willing to assume the command in his dominions[8]. Henceforwards
+Pacheco had such good intelligence, that all the subtle devices of
+the zamorin were counteracted.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] This seems the same story which has been already
+mentioned in a former note, from Astleys Collection; but which is
+there related as having taken place
+with <i>Moors</i> .--E.</blockquote>
+come on, from which Pacheco naturally concluded that the zomorin
+would soon break up his encampment, on which occasion he was fully
+resolved to give them an assault, having sufficient experience of the
+pusillanimity of the enemy. But the zamorin, being afraid that
+Pacheco might attack him at his departure, gave out that he intended
+to make another assault on the ford with a greater fleet than ever,
+and even directed the floating castles to be repaired. He even gave
+out that he meant to assail the passage of <i>Palurte</i>  and the ford
+both at once; that Pacheco might occupy himself in preparing to
+defend both places, and he might have the better opportunity to steal
+away unperceived. Accordingly, on the evening of Saturday, which was
+the eve of St John[9], the whole army of the enemy appeared as usual,
+and Pacheco fully expected to have been attacked that night. Next
+morning, however, he learnt from two bramins that the zamorin had
+withdrawn with all his army into the island of Repelim. Pacheco was
+much disappointed at this news, yet he made a descent that very day
+into Repelim, where he fought with many of the enemy, killing and
+wounding a great number of them, and then returned to the ford, where
+he remained several days, because the rajah was still afraid lest the
+zamorin might return and get across the ford into the island of
+Cochin.
+<blockquote>[9] The nativity of St John the Baptist is the 24th June;
+the eve therefore is the 23d, yet Castaneda has already said that
+June was ended.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The month of June was now ended and the rainy season, or winter,
+began.</p>
+<p>The zamorin was so crest-fallen by the great and repeated losses
+he had sustained in this war from a mere handful of men, that he
+resolved to retire into religions seclusion, that he might conciliate
+the favour of his gods, and dismissed his allies and chiefs to act as
+they thought best. His princes and nobles endeavoured to dissuade him
+from this resolution, but he continued firm to his purpose, and went
+into the <i>torcul</i>  or religious state of seclusion, accompanied by
+some of his chief bramins or chaplains. Soon afterwards, his mother
+sent him word that great changes had taken place in Calicut since his
+seclusion. That many of the merchants had already deserted the place,
+and others were preparing to follow. That the city was becoming ill
+provided with victuals, as those who used to import them were afraid
+of the Christians. Yet she advised him never to return to Calicut,
+unless he could do so with honour; and that he should therefore
+continue in seclusion for a time, and afterwards endeavour to recover
+his credit and reputation by victory, or lose all in the attempt. On
+this message which greatly increased his discontent, the zamorin sent
+for his brother, to whom he confided the government of his dominions
+till such time as he should have completed his religious austerities
+in seclusion.</p>
+<p>On this strange resolution of the zamorin, the rajahs and nobles
+who had joined him in the war departed to their own countries, most
+of which lay on the coast. And being under great apprehensions that
+Pacheco might reduce their dominions, they endeavoured to enter into
+treaties with him for peace and concord; for which purpose they sent
+messages to Trimumpara, requesting that he would act as mediator
+between them and Pacheco. The rajah of Cochin was a prince of a mild
+and forgiving disposition; and forgetting all the past injuries they
+had done him in these wars, he undertook the office of mediation, and
+sent them safe conducts to come to Cochin to make their peace. On
+their arrival, he accompanied them to wait upon Pacheco, and even
+became their advocate with him to accept of their proferred
+friendship, which he readily consented to at the desire of the rajah.
+Some of these princes were unable to come personally, but sent their
+ambassadors to solicit peace, which was accorded to all who asked it.
+Several even of the great Moorish merchants of Calicut, that they
+might quietly enjoy their trade, forsook that place and came to dwell
+in Cochin, having previously secured the consent of Pacheco. Others
+of them went to Cananor and Coulan, by which means the great trade
+which used to be carried on at Calicut suddenly fell off.</p>
+<p>Owing to the great resort of Moors to Cochin, in whom Pacheco
+could not repose much confidence, and because, by the orders of
+Naubea Daring, the paraws of Calicut frequently made excursions into
+the rivers, the captain- general continued for a long while to defend
+the passage of the ford, where he often fought with and did much
+injury to his enemies. He made frequent incursions, likewise, into
+the island of Repelim, whence he carried off cattle and other
+provisions, and often fought with his enemies, always defeating them
+with much slaughter[10]. At length Elankol, the lord of that island,
+wishing to put an end to the miseries of his country, waited on
+Pacheco and entered into a treaty of friendship with him, making him
+a present of a great quantity of pepper, which was abundant in his
+country[11].</p>
+<blockquote>[10] About this time, in consequence of a message from
+the Portuguese factor at Coulan, stating that the Moors obstructed
+the market for pepper, Pacheco went to that place, where he made five
+Moorish ships submit, and settled the pepper market on fair terms,
+yet without doing them any harm.--Astl. I. 57.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[11] According to Astley, the zamorin lost 18,000 men in
+this war in five months, and desired peace, which was granted by the
+rajah of Cochin.-- Astl. I. 57. Yet this could hardly be the case, as
+the first operation of the new commander-in-chief in India was to
+cannonade Calicut.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION IX.</p>
+<p> <i>The Voyage of Lope Suarez de Menesis to India, in 1504; being
+the sixth of the Portuguese Expeditions to the East Indies.</i> </p>
+<p>Learning the necessity of sending powerful succours to protect the
+Portuguese trade from the hostilities of the zamorin, the king of
+Portugal fitted out a fleet of twelve[1] large ships in 1504, of
+which the command was given to Lope Suarez de Menesis, who had been
+captain of the <i>Mina</i>  on the coast of Guinea in the reign of John
+II. The captains of these ships were, Pedro de Mendoza, Lionel
+Cotinho, Tristan de la Silva, Lope Mendez de Vasconcelles, Lope de
+Abreu, Philip de Castro, Alonso Lopez de Castro, Alonzo Lopez de la
+Cocta, Pero Alonzo de Aguilar, Vasco de la Silvero, Vasco Carvallo,
+and Pedro Dynez de Sutunell: All of whom were gentlemen by birth or
+service. Having embarked many valiant soldiers, the whole fleet left
+Lisbon on the 22d of April and arrived on the 2d of May near Cape
+Verd. Having observed during this part of the voyage, that several of
+the ships were very irregularly navigated, not keeping in their
+proper course, by which they had run foul of each other; some pushing
+before, while others lagged behind, and others stood athwart the
+order of the fleet; Suarez convened an assemblage of all the
+captains, masters, and pilots of the fleet, to whom he communicated
+the following written instructions: 1. As soon as it is night, every
+ship shall keep in regular order a-stern of the admiral; and no
+vessel to carry any light except in the binnacle and in the cabin. 2.
+The masters and pilots to keep regular watch, taking special care not
+to run foul of each other. 3. All to answer the signals of the
+admiral. 4. As soon as day appears, every ship shall come to salute
+the admiral, and all are carefully to avoid getting before him during
+the night. The penalty for breach of any of these articles was a fine
+of ten crowns, besides which the offender was to be put under arrest
+without being entitled to wages, and so to remain to the end of the
+voyage. As some of the masters and pilots had been very negligent,
+allowing some of the ships to fall aboard of others, he removed these
+to other ships. By this attention to discipline, the fleet was kept
+afterwards in good sailing order.</p>
+<blockquote>[1] These are said to have been the largest ships
+hitherto built in Portugal, and to have carried 1200 men; perhaps
+soldiers, besides their ordinary crews.--Astl. I. 57.</blockquote>
+<p>In the month of June, at which time they reckoned themselves off
+the Cape of Good Hope, the fleet was surprised by a heavy storm, and
+had to drive for two days and nights under bare poles in imminent
+danger of being cast away, the weather during all this time being
+wonderfully dark, so that the ships were in great hazard of running
+aboard of each other. To guard against this danger, the admiral
+caused guns to be fired at intervals from all the ships, to give
+notice of their situations, and the better to keep company. On the
+subsidence of the storm, the ship commanded by Lope Mendez was
+missing, and the admiral caused the fleet to lie to for some days in
+hopes of her reappearance. While in this situation, two of the ships
+ran foul of each other, by which a large hole was broken in the bow
+of one of the ships, through which she took in so much water as to be
+in great danger of sulking. The admiral immediately bore up to her
+assistance, and encouraged the crew to stop the leak, and even sent
+his boats on board to give every aid. By great exertions they got the
+leak effectually stopped, by nailing hides over the hole, and
+covering the whole with pitch. On St Jameses day, 25th July, the
+fleet arrived at Mozambique, where they were well received by the
+governor, who supplied them abundantly with fresh provisions, and
+sent off the letter which Pedro de Tayde had written respecting the
+state of affairs in India a short time before his death, as formerly
+mentioned. The admiral expedited the refitting of the ships which had
+been so much injured, as quickly as possible, and departed from
+Mozambique on the 1st of August. The king of Melinda sent off one of
+his principal Moors to visit the admiral, to whom likewise he sent
+sixteen of our men who had deserted from Pedro de Tayde.</p>
+<p>Having stopt only two days at Melinda for refreshment, the fleet
+sailed across for India, and came to Anchediva, where they found two
+Portuguese ships commanded by Antonio de Saldanna and Ruy Lorenzo,
+who were much afraid of our fleet, suspecting it to have belonged to
+the Rumes[2]. Saldanna informed Suarez, that he had been sent out the
+year before from Portugal along with Lorenzo, as vice-admiral, with
+orders to explore the Red Sea and adjacent countries. That they were
+separated in a storm off the Cape of Good Hope. That Lorenzo
+proceeding alone in the voyage, had taken a ship belonging to the
+Moors near Sofala, out of which he had taken a large quantity of
+gold, and had left the hull at Melinda. That Saldanna prosecuted his
+voyage to Cape Guardafui, where he had taken many rich prizes,
+without having entered the Red Sea; after which he had sailed to
+India, and the winter coming on, had taken shelter in Anchediva,
+where he was afterwards joined by Lorenzo. At this place, Lope Mendez
+de Vasconcelles, who had been separated in the storm off the Cape of
+Good Hope, rejoined the fleet. The admiral used every expedition to
+get the fleet ready to proceed for Cananor, where he arrived on the
+1st of September, and was informed by the factor of the events in the
+war with Calicut; and how he and his companions in the factory had
+been often in great hazard of their lives.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] The Turkish empire, as succeeding that of the Romans
+or Greeks of Constantinople, is still called <i>Rumi</i>  in the east.
+It will be afterwards seen, that these <i>Rumes</i> , Romans, or Turks,
+made some powerful efforts to drive the Portuguese from India, as
+greatly injurious to the Indian trade with Europe through the Red Sea
+and Egypt.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The day after his arrival, the admiral went on shore in great
+state to visit the rajah of Cananor, attended by all the captains of
+the fleet in their boats, decorated with flags and streamers, and
+armed with ordnance, all the boats crews being dressed in their best
+apparel. The admirals barge had a rich awning, and was dressed out
+with carpets, on which stood a chair of state covered with unshorn
+crimson velvet and two cushions of the same for his feet. His doublet
+and hose were of satin of divers colours, wrought diamond fashion;
+his shoes of black velvet, studded with gold; his cap covered over
+with gold buttons. Over all he wore a loose robe or gown of black
+velvet, in the French fashion, trimmed all round with gold lace. From
+his neck hung a triple chain of gold enamelled, from which depended a
+golden whistle. His rapier and dagger, which were borne by a page,
+had handles of pure gold. Two lackeys preceded him in splendid attire
+and six trumpeters with silk flags. He was also accompanied by a band
+of wind instruments, in a small boat In another boat were the
+presents which he carried for the rajah from the king of Portugal.
+There were, six beds of fine Holland, with their pillows of the same,
+all wrought with gold embroidery. Two coverlets or carpets of unshorn
+crimson velvet, quilted all over, having three guards of cloth of
+gold, that in the middle a span in width, and the others two fingers
+broad. The bedstead was gilded all over, having curtains of crimson
+satin, fringed with cold thread. On putting off from his ship, all
+the fleet saluted him with their cannon; then the trumpets and drums
+sounded for a long time; after which the organs never ceased to play
+till the boats reached the shore, where vast numbers of Moors and
+Gentiles waited to receive the admiral.</p>
+<p>On his landing, the admiral Was conducted into a <i>sarame</i>  or
+house appointed for his reception and audience of the rajah, in which
+he ordered the bed and all its rich furniture to be set up, close to
+which was placed a chair for the admiral to sit upon. Soon
+afterwards, the rajah was brought to the house, carried in a rich
+chair of state, preceded by three armed elephants, three thousand
+nayres, armed with swords, spears, and targets, and two thousand
+armed with bows and arrows. The admiral, apprized of the rajah's
+approach by the fleet saluting him with all their guns, went to the
+door to receive him, where they embraced. Then going together into
+the apartment, the admiral presented him with the bed already
+described, on which the rajah immediately lay down, and the admiral
+sat down beside him in the place appointed. They here conferred
+together for two hours, when they were interrupted by the barking of
+a greyhound belonging to the admiral, which wanted to attack one of
+the elephants.</p>
+<p>Soon afterwards a Moor from Calicut waited upon the admiral,
+having along with him a Portuguese boy, who brought a letter from
+some of our men who were captives at Calicut ever since the time of
+Cabral being there. This boy informed the admiral, that the zamorin
+was so humbled by the defeats he had sustained from Pacheco, that he
+had gone into religious seclusion. That many of the Moorish merchants
+had gone from Calicut to other places, as they could carry on no
+trade there owing to the war, and that even provisions had become
+extremely scarce. That the zamorin and the prince of Calicut, and the
+magistrates of that place, were exceedingly desirous of peace with
+the Portuguese, for which reason they had sent him to the admiral,
+and had allowed the Portuguese prisoners there to write him to that
+effect, which they had done accordingly, but chiefly in hopes that he
+would free them from captivity. After reading the letter, the admiral
+would have sent a written answer, meaning to have sent it by the
+Moor. But the boy told him, they had no permission to carry any
+letter, and that he must return along with the Moor, as the people of
+Calicut had threatened to put all their Portuguese prisoners to death
+in case he did not return. On this account, the admiral gave the boy
+a verbal message for the prisoners; saying that he would very soon
+come to Calicut, where he would anchor as near as possible to the
+shore; and as the captives were allowed to go about the city without
+irons, they might find an opportunity to come off to the fleet either
+in boats or by swimming.</p>
+<p>Suarez went accordingly with the fleet to Calicut, where he came
+to anchor on Saturday the 7th September; and presently afterwards the
+boy who had been to visit him at Cananor came on board, accompanied
+by a servant of Cosebequin, who brought the admiral a present from
+the rulers of Cochin, and a message requiring a safe conduct for
+Cosebequin, that he might come on board to treat for peace. The
+admiral refused to accept of any present until such time as peace
+were restored; but sent word that Cosebequin might repair on board
+without fear, as a servant of the king of Portugal; he sent a private
+message at the same time to the Portuguese prisoners, advising them
+to use their best endeavours to escape. On receiving this message,
+Cosebequin was sent on board by the governors of Calicut, to treat of
+peace, carrying with him two of the Portuguese captives. They
+requested he would wait three or four days, by which time they
+believed the zamorin would come out from his seclusion, and that they
+were convinced he would agree to all that should be required. The
+admiral answered, that unless they would deliver up the two Italian
+deserters he would agree to no terms; but he sent no message for the
+liberation of our captives, as he thought they might easily escape.
+As soon as the Italians learnt that the admiral had demanded them,
+they suspected the captives would run away of which circumstance they
+gave notice to the governors, requiring them to secure the Portuguese
+captives, as they were men of consideration, and that a peace might
+be procured in exchange for them almost on any terms the zamorin
+pleased to prescribe. On this advice, the governors took care to
+prevent the captives from escaping, and became less urgent in their
+desire of peace. Owing to this, they remained in captivity till Don
+Francisco de Almeida became viceroy of India, though some made their
+escape in the interim, and others of them fell victims to the
+diseases of the climate.</p>
+<p>After waiting some days, and finding no friendly steps taken by
+the governors of Calicut towards a peace; and being likewise without
+hope of recovering the captives, Suarez resolved to take revenge by
+cannonading the city of Calicut, which he did for a whole day and a
+night, during which time he did prodigious damage, destroying the
+palace of the zamorin, several of their pagodas or idol temples, and
+many of the houses, and slew a great number of the inhabitants. For
+this service, he brought seven of his smallest ships as near the
+shore as possible, and advanced all the boats of the fleet, likewise
+carrying ordnance, close almost to the beach. After this he departed
+for Cochin, where he arrived on Saturday the 13th of September. He
+landed next day near the Portuguese castle, in as great state as he
+had done before at Cananor, and was received with many marks of
+satisfaction by Trimumpara. After embracing, they went hand in hand
+into the hall, in which a chair of state was placed for the admiral.
+As the rajah sat on the cushions on the floor, according to the
+custom of the country, and was therefore much lower than the admiral,
+he commanded his chair to be removed somewhat farther from the rajah,
+by which he greatly offended the native chiefs who were present at
+the interview. He now delivered to Trimumpara a letter from the king
+of Portugal, in which great compliments and many thanks were given,
+for the favour and protection the rajah had vouchsafed to the
+Portuguese. To this the rajah answered, that he had been amply
+repaid, by the good service which Duarte Pacheco had rendered him in
+the war with the zamorin. Next day, the admiral sent a large sum of
+money to Trimumpara, as a present from the king of Portugal, who knew
+that his finances had been greatly injured ill consequence of the war
+with Calicut.</p>
+<p>Soon after, Suarez sent Pedro de Mendoza and Vasco Carvallo with
+their ships to guard the coast of Calicut, with orders to capture all
+ships belonging to the Moors that were laden with spices. He likewise
+dispatched De la Cocta, Aguilar, Cotinho, and Abreu, to go to Coulan
+to take in their loading, being informed that spices were to be had
+there in abundance. He likewise sent Tristan de la Silva with four
+armed boats up the rivers towards Cranganor, against some armed
+paraws of Calicut which were stationed in that quarter. In this
+expedition, Silva had a skirmish with these paraws and some nayres on
+the shores of the rivers; but falling in with a Moorish ship laden
+with pepper, he captured her and brought her to Cochin, where he and
+the other captains loaded their ships, as spices were now procured in
+great abundance.</p>
+<p>Duarte Pacheco happened to be off Coulan when he learnt the
+arrival of Suarez; and knowing that his own command was ended so soon
+as the new captain-general should arrive at Cochin, determined to
+attempt some exploits while he remained master of his own conduct.
+With this view, he put to sea on the 22d of October, and soon after
+got sight of a ship at a great distance, to which he gave chase all
+that day and part of the night. The chase was driven into Coulan,
+when Pacheco learnt that she <i>belonged to the confederates[3]</i> ,
+and was bound from Coromandel. He immediately afterwards descried
+three ships of Calicut, to which he gave chase, keeping as near the
+coast a possible to take the advantage of a land breeze. In the
+morning he put off to sea in chase of the vessel, which he was unable
+to get up with till towards evening close to the land; after a brave
+defence, as the ship had many men, she at length yielded; and not
+chusing to encumber himself with so many prisoners, he landed a part
+of her company, and made the rest prisoners in irons in his own ship.
+Learning that this was one of the three ships belonging to Calicut of
+which he was in search, he put two of his men on board the prize,
+with orders to keep him company. Being arrived directly abreast of
+Cape Comorin, he met with a sudden whirlwind, by which he was nearly
+cast away, and when this subsided, he came to anchor within a league
+of the shore, where he remained all night. While at anchor thirty of
+his Moorish prisoners made their escape, twelve of whom were retaken
+by means of his boat. Pacheco remained for some time off the Cape in
+expectation of the other ships of the Moors coming round from
+Coromandel, but none making their appearance, he went to Coulan with
+the ship he had captured, which he delivered to the factor at that
+city with all its rich merchandize. He then went to Cochin, where he
+put himself under the command of Suarez.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] This expression is quite inexplicable, unless we may
+pick out very darkly that it belonged to the Calicut confederacy
+against the Portuguese. Yet Castaneda, or his imperfect translator
+Lichefild, does not inform us whether this vessel was made a prize.
+Lichefild seems almost always to have had a very imperfect knowledge
+of the language of the author, often to have mistaken his meaning or
+expressed it with great obscurity, and sometimes writes even a kind
+of jargon, by endeavouring to translate verbally without being able
+to catch an idea from the original.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The zamorin had now resumed the government, having withdrawn from
+the  <i>torcul</i>  or religious seclusion. He had dispatched one of
+his generals with a fleet of eighty paraws and fifty ships[4] to
+defend the passages of the rivers, and to obstruct the trade of
+Cochin with the interior; and had likewise set on foot a considerable
+land army under the prince Naubea Daring. It was the intention of the
+zamorin to stand on the defensive only while the Portuguese fleet
+remained in India, and to renew the war against Cochin after their
+departure. But the admiral Suarez, by the advice of all his captains,
+resolved to make an attack on Cranganor, a town belonging to the
+zamorin, about four leagues from Cochin, whence the enemy had often
+done much injury to the dominions of Trimumpara during the late war.
+For this purpose, Suarez took fifteen armed boats with raised
+defences on their gunwales, and twenty-five paraws belonging to
+Cochin, all armed with cannon, and accompanied by a caravel, the
+whole manned with about 1000 Portuguese soldiers, and an equal number
+of nayres from Cochin. The armament arrived before day
+at <i>Palypuerto</i> , where it had to wait for daylight, not daring to
+attempt the passage of certain shoals, as the boats were heavily
+laden. On arriving at Cranganor, the fleet of Calicut was found drawn
+up ready to repel the Portuguese attack. The Calicut commander was
+posted in the front, in two new ships chained together, which were
+full of ordnance and well manned; chiefly by archers. In the rear of
+these ships, and on both flanks, the paraws of Calicut were arranged,
+all full of armed men.</p>
+<blockquote>[4] According to Astley, from De Fariz only <i>five</i> 
+ships; and indeed in the sequel, Castaneda only mentions <i>two</i> 
+ships as employed, on the present occasion and three others that were
+drawn up on shore.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>On the arrival of the Portuguese flotilla, the battle immediately
+commenced by the discharge of ordnance on both sides. Five Portuguese
+captains who led the van, pushed on to attack the Calicut admiral in
+his two chained ships, which they carried by boarding after a brave
+resistance, in which that officer and two of his sons with many
+others of the Malabars were slain. After the capture of these ships,
+the paraws made little resistance, and soon took to flight. Suarez
+immediately disembarked his troops, which soon put Naubea Daring to
+flight, who commanded the land army of Calicut. The Moors and
+Malabars in their flight, plundered the houses of Cranganor, which
+was immediately afterwards set on fire by the Portuguese. Certain
+Christian inhabitants of the place came to Suarez and prayed him not
+to burn their city, representing that it contained several churches
+dedicated to the Virgin and the Apostles, besides many Christian
+houses which were interspersed among these belonging to the Moors and
+Gentiles. For their sakes, Suarez ordered the conflagration to be
+stopped; yet many of the houses were destroyed before that could be
+effected, as they were all of wood. After the fire was quenched, our
+men plundered the houses belonging to the Moors, many of whom had
+formerly dwelt in Cochin. The two ships, and several paraws which had
+been taken in the before mentioned engagement, were set on fire, and
+other three ships that were found drawn on shore.</p>
+<p>At this time Suarez was joined by the prince of Cochin, who
+informed him that Naubea Daring remained with his army at no great
+distance, and intended to return to Cranganor after his departure. A
+considerable force was therefore sent against Naubea Daring; but
+immediately on seeing their approach, the troops of Calicut fled. On
+the return of the Portuguese flotilla towards Cochin, Suarez was
+disposed to have destroyed another town which lay near their passage;
+but the prince of Cochin represented that half of it belonged to him,
+and prevailed on the admiral to spare it, as he could not destroy one
+part without the other. Suarez, therefore, returned to Cochin, where
+he knighted some of his officers for their bravery during the last
+engagement. A few days after his return, there came an ambassador
+from the rajah of <i>Tanor</i> , whose dominions are next adjoining to
+those of Cochin. This ambassador represented, that his master had
+hitherto adhered to the zamorin, and had assisted him in all his wars
+against Pacheco. But that the zamorin, since he had come out from his
+religious seclusion, had redoubled his arrogant ideas of his
+irresistible power, and in reward of the services of the rajah of
+Tanor, now threatened him with war and conquest. He farther
+represented, that on the late occasion, when the general of the
+Calicut forces was in full march for the relief of Cranganor, the
+rajah of Tanor had placed 4000 of his nayres in ambush in a defile in
+their line of march, who had defeated the troops of Calicut, and hod
+slain 2000 of them. On this account the rajah of Tanor was in great
+fear of the zamorin, and humbly requested assistance from the
+admiral, promising in return to become subject to the king of
+Portugal.</p>
+<p>For this purpose, the admiral sent Pedro Raphael in a caravel to
+Tanor, with 100 soldiers, most of whom were crossbow men. It chanced
+that on the very day of his arrival at Tanor, the zamorin arrived
+before that city with his army and gave battle to the rajah; but,
+chiefly owing to the valour of Raphael and his company, the army of
+the zamorin was defeated with great slaughter. In reward for this
+well-timed succour, the rajah of Tanor became subject to the king of
+Portugal. In consequence of this defeat, the zamorin was much
+humbled, and lost more credit with the Moors than by all the
+victories which Pacheco had obtained; as these had been obtained by
+strangers, while the present victory had been gained by a native
+prince. In consequence of these reverses, seeing no likelihood of
+ever being able to recover their trade, all the Moors who dwelt in
+Calicut and Cranganor determined upon removing to their own country
+with their remaining wealth. For this purpose, they fitted up
+seventeen large ships at <i>Pandarane</i> , which they armed on purpose
+to defend themselves against any attack from our men, and loaded them
+with all expedition for Mecca. Besides these, they loaded a great
+number of paraws and tonys with such goods as the ships were unable
+to contain.</p>
+<p>The season now approached for the return of the fleet to Portugal,
+and Suarez appointed Manuel Telez de Vasconcelles[5] as
+captain-general of the Indies, with whom he left a ship and two
+caravels, of which last Pedro Raphael and Diego Perez were captains.
+The admiral presented these officers to the rajah of Cochin, who
+would much rather have procured Duarte Pacheco to remain, having
+great confidence in his valour and attachment to his service, but
+dared not to request this of the admiral, as he was of a haughty
+disposition. In a conference between Pacheco and the rajah, the
+latter entreated him to remain in India if possible, as he did not
+think himself quite secure from the enmity of the zamorin; and even
+urged him to remember that he had promised not to leave him till he
+had made him king of Calicut. Pacheco answered, that he left him in a
+good situation, his country being restored to quiet, and the zamorin
+so much humbled that he was no longer to be dreaded; as a proof of
+which the Moors were about to depart from Calicut, seeing their trade
+entirely ruined. And that he hoped to return from Portugal, and to
+serve him longer and to greater purpose than he had done hitherto.
+The rajah was somewhat satisfied with this answer, and craved pardon
+of Pacheco that he had not rewarded his services as they deserved,
+because he was extremely poor; yet requested he would take as much
+pepper as he pleased. Pacheco refused to accept of any thing; saying,
+he hoped to find the rajah rich and prosperous on his return to
+Cochin, and then he would accept a reward. The rajah gave Pacheco a
+letter for the king of Portugal, in which he set forth all his
+gallant actions during the war, strongly recommending him to his
+majesties favour.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] At the commencement of this section, Castaneda names
+this person Lope Mendez de Vasconcelles; in Astley, I. 58, he is
+called Manuel Tellez Barreto.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The admiral Suarez departed from Cochin on the 27th December[6],
+taking with him the whole of his fleet, even those captains who were
+to remain in India. His intention was to have come to anchor in the
+harbour of Paniani, on purpose to visit the rajah of Tanor; but from
+foul weather, and bad pilots, the fleet could not make that port, and
+was driven to Calicut and Pandarane. Being off these ports and with a
+scanty wind, the admiral detached Raphael and Perez with their
+caravels, to examine if there were any ships of the Moors at anchor.
+While on this service, ten paraws came off to attack them, and an
+engagement ensued. On the rest of the fleet hearing the sound of the
+ordnance, they bore up as close to the wind as possible, and came to
+anchor[7]. In a council of war, it was resolved to attack the
+seventeen ships of the Moors, which lay all aground; and as the ships
+were unable to get near them, because they lay within the bar, the
+attack was determined to be made by the boats of the fleet, with
+orders to set the Moorish ships on fire. This being resolved upon,
+the admiral and all the captains of the fleet embarked in the boats,
+taking with them all the soldiers belonging to the expedition.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] In Lichefilds translation of Castaneda, this date is
+made the 27th September, which is an obvious
+mistake.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] By some strange blunder, Lichefild says they came
+to <i>Cananor</i> ; but from all the circumstances in the contexts, it
+is obvious that the fleet came to anchor on the outside of the bar at
+Pandarane.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The Moorish ships were all drawn on the beach in a close line,
+having their sterns to the shore, and were well armed with ordnance,
+and had many soldiers on board armed with bows and arrows, a
+considerable number of them being men of a fair complexion[8].
+Besides all these, the Moors had two pieces of ordnance on a small
+bulwark or redoubt which flanked the passage of the bar. Our boats,
+seeing all these formidable preparations, returned towards the
+fleet[9], whence they towed several caravels within the bar to assist
+the boats in the attack. After a severe conflict, in which the
+Portuguese had twenty-five men killed, and 127 wounded, the whole
+seventeen ships of the Moors were boarded and taken, with the loss of
+2000 men. But as the Moorish ships were all aground, the victors were
+under the necessity to burn them, with all the rich merchandize they
+contained. Owing to this severe loss, the Moors deserted the city of
+Calicut, which by the cessation of trade became much distressed for
+provisions, insomuch that most of its inhabitants withdrew to other
+places. The zamorin was so much humbled by this succession of
+disastrous events, that he remained quiet for a long time
+afterwards[10].</p>
+<blockquote>[8] Arabs probably, whites in the estimation of the
+Portuguese as compared with the native blacks of
+Malabar.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[9] This part of the story is very confusedly translated
+by Lichefild. According to his relation, in one sense, the admiral
+alone returned in his boat for the caravels; while, by another part
+of his expressions, the whole boats returned for the admiral and the
+caravels.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[10] According to Astley, a peace was concluded between
+the Portuguese and the zamorin immediately after the victory obtained
+by the rajah of Tanore; but this does not agree with the
+circumstances just related respecting the destruction of the Moorish
+fleet in the harbour of Pandarane, which would hardly have been done
+during a time of peace--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The particular incidents of this engagement are so confusedly
+related in Lichefilds translation of Castaneda as to baffle every
+attempt to reduce them into intelligible order. Among these, the two
+following are more distinctly told. Tristan de la Silva endeavoured
+to board a ship which appeared to be the admiral, of which the
+captain and a numerous crew were Turks. A little before De Silva got
+up to this ship, the crew had fired off a piece of ordnance which lay
+on the upper deck, and which by its recoil broke a large hole in the
+side of the ship. The Turks were so intent on defending themselves
+against the Portuguese boats, that they neglected to barricade this
+hole, of which the people in De Silvas boat took advantage to get on
+board; Alonzo Lopez the master, and Alvaro Lopez one of the kings
+servants, now town-clerk of Santarem, being the first who entered by
+the hole. A desperate conflict ensued on deck, in which many of the
+Turks were slain, others hid themselves below the hatches, and others
+leapt into the water, most of whom were drowned, as they were covered
+with shirts of mail.</p>
+<p>The caravel commanded by Pedro Raphael, one of these brought
+within the bar to co-operate with the boats, was struck by a ball
+from the battery on shore, which killed three men and dangerously
+wounded other ten. In the confusion occasioned by this accident,
+another shot killed the master at the helm, and the caravel drove
+with the tide of flood right under the bows of a large Moorish ship
+full of men which had not yet been attacked by the boats. In this
+situation, a great number of the enemy boarded the caravel, <i>and
+used our men very ill</i> . The caravel afterwards drifted on certain
+rocks, where she remained till the end of the battle. The situation
+of the caravel was now perceived by the admiral, who ordered
+effectual succour to be sent to Raphael. The succours boarded the
+caravel, which was quite full of Moors, whom they drove out with
+great slaughter; but all of our men belonging to that caravel were
+sore hurt.</p>
+<p>On the next day, being the first of January 1505, the admiral went
+with the fleet to Cananor, to take in the rest of his lading. He was
+here informed by the factor of the humbled situation of the Moors,
+from whom, in his opinion, the Portuguese had no longer any thing to
+fear in India. Being ready to depart for Europe, the admiral made an
+oration to Manual Telez, and those who were to remain with him in
+India, giving them instructions for their conduct after his
+departure; and as the enemy was so greatly humbled, he considered
+that such a fleet as had formerly been left by Albuquerque was quite
+sufficient, in which he left an hundred soldiers. Indeed the zamorin,
+as has been already said, was sick of the war, and remained quiet
+after the departure of the admiral.</p>
+<p>Departing from Cananor, Suarez arrived off Melinda on the 1st of
+February; where, without landing himself, he sent Antonio de Saldanna
+to bring away the rich prizes he had formerly made at Cape Guardafui.
+From Melinda, the fleet went to Quiloa, on purpose to enforce the
+payment of the tribute from the king of that place. Departing from
+thence on the 10th of February, he arrived safe at Lisbon on the 22d
+of June 1505[11], without any incident worth relating[12]; carrying
+with him two ships more than had accompanied him to India, all laden
+with rich commodities, and was received by the King Don Manuel with
+great honour.</p>
+<blockquote>[11] By some strange typographical mistake, Lichefild
+makes this date 1525, both in the text and in a marginal note, thus
+adding no less than twenty years to the true chronology. In Astleys
+Collection, the conclusion of this voyage is dated 22d July 1506; but
+we have chosen to retain the regular series of dates as given by
+Castaneda. Owing to the mistake in Lichefilds translation not being
+detected till a part of this chapter was printed off, it has been
+repeated in our introduction to this article, which our readers are
+requested to correct.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[12] In Astley, the ship commanded by Pedro Mendoza, is
+said to have been stranded during the homeward voyage, fourteen
+leagues from the  <i>Aguada</i> , or watering-place of St Blas, and
+never more heard of.--Astl. I. 58.</blockquote>
+<p>When the king learnt the great service which Pacheco had performed
+in India, he expressed his high approbation of his conduct in a
+public procession. The king went, in all the splendour usually shewn
+on <i>Corpus Christi</i>  day, from the high church to that of St
+Domingo, accompanied by Duarte Pacheco. After solemn service, a
+sermon was preached by Don Diego Ortis, bishop of Viseo; who, by the
+kings command, gave a rehearsal of all that had been performed by
+Pacheco in the war against the zamorin. On the same day, a solemn
+festival was held in all the churches of Portugal and Algarve. The
+king sent letters on the occasion to the pope and all the princes of
+Christendom, announcing all these notable acts and victories which
+had been performed in the Indies.[13]</p>
+<blockquote>[13] Astley concludes the account of the honours
+conferred on Pacheco in the following words: "But soon after
+imprisoned, and allowed him to die miserably. A terrible example of
+the uncertainty of royal favour, and the little regard that is had to
+true merit!"--Astl. I. 58.</blockquote>
+<h2><a name="chapter2-7" id="chapter2-7">CHAPTER VII.</a></h2>
+<p align="center"><b> <i>Letters from Lisbon in the beginning of the
+sixteenth century, respecting the then recent discovery of the route
+by sea to India.</i> </b>[1]</p>
+<blockquote>[1] Novus Orbis Gryn&aelig;i, p. 94-102.</blockquote>
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+<p>The following letters bear to have been written by some Italian
+public agents and merchants, to their employers and friends, and
+contain a curious record of the first impressions made on the public
+mind by the wonderful discoveries which navigation was then opening
+up to the European world. They are selected from the <i>Novus
+Orbis</i> , a work which was published by <i>Simon Gryn&aelig;us</i> 
+early in the sixteenth century. According to M. de la Richarderie,[2]
+this collection was formed by Hans Heteirs, canon of Strasburg, and
+was printed under the care of Simon Gryn&aelig;us, by Isaac Hervag,
+in folio, at Basil in 1532. We learn likewise that it passed rapidly
+through several editions, having been reprinted at Basil in 1535,
+1537, and 1555; and at Paris in 1582. The edition used on the present
+occasion is printed at Basil in 1555 by Jo. Hervag. Its principal
+contents, besides those translated for the present chapter, are the
+voyages of Cada Mosto, already given; the discovery of America by
+Christopher Columbus, which will form the first article in our
+subsequent volume; the voyages of Vincent Alonzo Pinzon, and of
+Americus Vespucius, which will be attended to hereafter; and the
+travels of Marco Polo, which have been already given at full length
+from a better source.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Bibl. Univ. des Voy. I. 55, and V. 486.</blockquote>
+<p>The language of the <i>Novus Orbis</i>  is perhaps the most
+barbarous Latin ever composed for the press, and its punctuation is
+so enormously incorrect that it would have been easier understood
+without any points whatever.</p>
+<p>As already mentioned, the edition here used is dated in the year
+1555, little more than fifty years after the discoveries they
+commemorate; and the letters themselves are dated in 1501, 1502, and
+1503, immediately after the return of the earliest of the Portuguese
+voyages from India. Indeed the first letter seems to have been
+written only a day or two after the arrival of the first ship
+belonging to Cabrals fleet.</p>
+<p>This work is accompanied by a very curious map of the world, on
+one planisphere, much elongated to the east and west, which may be
+considered as a complete picture of the knowledge then acquired of
+the cosmography of our globe. The first meridian is placed at the
+island of Ferro, and the degrees of longitude are counted from thence
+eastwards all round the world, so that Ferro is in long. 0&deg; and
+360&deg; E. In every part of the world, the outlines are grossly
+incorrect, and it would serve no purpose to give an extended critical
+view of this map; yet a few notices respecting it may gratify
+curiosity.</p>
+<p>Europe is singularly incorrect, especially in the north and east.
+America, called likewise <i>Terra Nova</i> , has an approximated
+delineation of its southern division, stretching far to the south, as
+if the cosmographer had received some tolerable notices of Brazil,
+Cape Horn, and the coasts of Peru and Chili. But instead of the
+continent of North America, the island of Cuba is delineated in a
+north and south direction, reaching between the latitudes of 10&deg;
+and 50&deg; north; leaving a small strait or passage between its
+southern extremity and the Isthmus of Darien into the South Sea.
+About twelve degrees west from Cuba the island of Zipangri is placed;
+and at least twenty degrees east from Cathay or China. At sixteen
+degrees east from the northern end of Cuba, a large island is placed
+in the <i>Oceanus Magnus</i>  or Atlantic, called <i>Terra Cortesia</i> ;
+which the cosmographer seems to have intended to represent the
+kingdom of Mexico, recently discovered by Cortez; though placed
+almost in lat. 50&deg; N. Perhaps this may be an error
+for <i>Corterealis</i> , an early navigator, who is said to have made
+discoveries on the eastern coast of North America.</p>
+<p>In Africa there is an approximation towards its true shape; yet
+the  <i>Caput Viride</i> , or Cape Verd, is placed to the north of the
+river Senegal, instead of between that river and the Gambia; and the
+sources of the Nile are brought down to lat. 15&deg; S. at least
+twenty-two degrees too far to the southwards.</p>
+<p>Asia, with India and China, are too much distorted for criticism.
+Calicut is placed in the peninsula of Cambaya or Guzerate.
+The <i>Aurea Chersonesus</i>  and <i>Regnum Malacha</i> , or Malacca, are
+separated by a great gulf, while the latter is placed so low as
+30&deg; S. latitude. This much may suffice for an account of the
+incorrect yet curious specimen of cosmographical knowledge which had
+been acquired by the learned in Europe about 300 years ago.</p>
+<p>To these four letters we have added a short account of several
+curious circumstances relative to the trade of the Europeans with
+India at the commencement of the sixteenth century, or three hundred
+years ago; which, though not very accurately expressed, contains some
+curious information.</p>
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+<p> <i>Letter from the Venetian Envoy in Portugal to the
+Republic</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This letter is dated on the 20th of June 1501, and
+obviously refers to the voyage of Cabral, who had returned from India
+not long before. The writer is described as a native of Crete, and
+envoy from the lords of Venice to the king of
+Portugal.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Most serene prince, &amp;c. Believing that your highness has been
+already informed by the most excellent legate, of all the memorable
+things which have occurred in this place, and particularly respecting
+the fleet so lately dispatched for India by the king of Portugal,
+which, by the blessing of God, has now returned with the loss of
+seven ships; as it originally consisted of fourteen sail, seven of
+which only have come home, the other seven having been wrecked in the
+voyage. Their voyage was along the coasts of Mauritania and Getulia
+to Cape Verd, anciently called  <i>Experias</i> ; off which the islands
+called the <i>Hesperides</i>  are situated. From thence they explored
+lower <i>Ethiopia</i>  towards the east, beyond which the ancients
+never penetrated. They sailed along this <i>eastern</i>  coast of
+Ethiopia to a line corresponding with the meridian of Sicily, about
+five or six degrees <i>within</i>  the equinoctial, the gold mines
+belonging to the king of Portugal being about the middle of that
+coast.[2] Beyond that coast of the gold mines, and nine degrees to
+the south of the <i>winter tropic</i> ,[3] they came to a great
+promontory called the Cape of Good Hope, which is almost 5000 miles
+distant from our country. From thence they came to the cape anciently
+called <i>Prasum</i> , which was considered by Ptolemy as the extremity
+of the southern regions, all beyond being unknown to the ancients.
+After that they reached the country of the  <i>Troglodites</i> , now
+called <i>Zaphala</i> , or Sofala, which our ancestors affirm to have
+abounded in gold, infinitely more than any other part of the earth.
+Stretching from Sofala across the <i>Barbaric Gulf</i> ,[4] they came
+into the Indian Ocean, and at length to the city of Calicut. Such was
+their voyage, which carefully calculated, as following the coasts of
+the ocean, extends to the prodigious length of 15,000 miles; but
+which, if the lands and mountains would allow in a direct line, were
+greatly shorter.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] The strange geographical language here used is
+inexplicable, probably because the ideas of the writer were confused.
+He seems to mean the  <i>Mina</i>  in Guinea, which is <i>five or
+six</i>  degrees <i>within</i>  the equator, or to the north; but is at
+least 18&ordm; west from the meridian of Sicily. --E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] Meaning the tropic of Capricorn, on which the sun is
+during our winter solstice--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] The recession of the coast inwards from Cape Delgado
+to Melinda, which may be called the Bay of Zanzibar.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Before passing the Cape of Good Hope, in consequence of being
+forced out of their course by a S.W. wind, they discovered a new
+country to which they gave the name of the <i>Land of Parrots</i> ,
+because they found, there an incredible number of these birds, of
+many beautiful colours, some of them a cubit and a half in length and
+more. We have seen two of these birds, and can vouch for the truth of
+the description. On exploring this extensive coast, the navigators
+believed that it must necessarily belong to a continent, as they
+sailed along it for the space of 2000 miles without having seen
+either extremity. Its coasts are inhabited by people of a tolerably
+handsome appearance, who go quite naked.[5]</p>
+<blockquote>[5] In the map of Grynaeus already mentioned,
+this <i>Terra Psittacorum</i>  or Land of Parrots, is placed on
+the <i>south-west</i>  coast of Africa, between the Cape of Good Hope
+and Congo. Yet there can be no doubt that the recent discovery of
+Brazil on the <i>eastern</i>  coast of South America is here alluded
+to: Consequently, instead of the <i>lebeccio vento</i> , or S.W. wind
+of the text, it would naturally have required a S. E. wind to force
+the Portuguese fleet so far to the westward of its intended
+course.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>In this voyage they lost four ships. Two others were sent to the
+gold mines, which are not yet returned; and seven only reached
+Calicut, where they were honourably received, and had a house
+allotted them by the prince, and there they brought their ships to
+anchor. Soon afterwards there assembled many boats of the Moors and
+other neighbouring people, and some frigates belonging to the great
+sultan, all the people belonging to which conspired together against
+the Christians, being exceedingly adverse to the coming of the
+Christians into these parts, lest they should diminish their profits.
+They insisted therefore to have their ships first loaded, to the
+great dissatisfaction of the Christians, who immediately complained
+to the king of the insolence of the Moors, but soon discovered that
+he favoured them. The king of Calicut was a person of very doubtful
+faith, and made the following answer: That it did not seem equitable
+for the Moors to be permitted to finish their traffic before the
+Christians; and gave orders accordingly, that the Christians might
+carry on their trade. The Moors trangressed this decree, and took
+away the goods of the Christians at pleasure; upon which disputes
+arose between the Christians and the Moors, in which the whole
+inhabitants of the city took part with the Moors. Whereupon a great
+slaughter was made of the Christians, above forty of them being
+slain; among whom was their principal factor, when endeavouring to
+escape by swimming. In revenge for this cruelty, the Christians made
+severe reprisals; as they burnt ten ships belonging to the prefect of
+Syria, that is the sultan; and destroyed a considerable portion of
+the city by means of their  <i>catapults</i>  and <i>bombards</i> [6],
+many houses being burnt to the ground, as they are covered with
+thatch like cottages, and exceedingly combustible.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] The author assuredly uses these words to denominate
+two kinds of ordnance or cannon then used in the Portuguese ships of
+war.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>After this, the fleet left Calicut, and went to another kingdom
+named Cochin, about forty miles distant, being conducted thither by a
+Jew who assumed the Christian faith. The king of Cochin hated the
+king of Calicut exceedingly, and on that account received the
+Christians with much kindness. Spices are in greater abundance at
+Cochin than at Calicut, and the Christians carried off such riches
+from Cochin as I dare scarcely venture to report; for they allege to
+have purchased a <i>cantarus</i>  of cinnamon, which is a considerable
+measure, for one gold ducat. The king of Cochin gave two hostages to
+the Portuguese, in assurance of their safety, and sent even
+ambassadors to the king of Portugal. In the mean time, the king of
+Calicut fitted out an immense fleet against the Christians, in
+revenge for having burnt the ships in his harbour. This fleet
+exceeded 150 ships, and carried 15,000 men, yet on account of a north
+wind which they were unable to contend with, they dared not to attack
+the Portuguese ships, and withdrew from Cochin. As their great
+numbers were considerably formidable, the Portuguese ships went to a
+certain island in which the body of St Thomas is interred, the lord
+of which received them kindly, and gave them some relics of that holy
+person in token of friendship: He even offered them greater
+quantities of spices than they had ever seen before, without money,
+trusting that they would pay for them on their return from Europe:
+But, being already laden, the Portuguese declined this friendly
+offer.</p>
+<p>The Portuguese fleet employed fourteen months in this voyage, and
+returned to Lisbon in spring; but they say that it may be made much
+sooner, now that the course is well known, and may even be
+accomplished in ten months. All the ships that reached Calicut
+returned, except one which was lost on certain rocks, but the crew
+saved, which ship was of six hundred tons burden. As yet only one
+caravel has come into port, but the rest are said to be not far off.
+This lately arrived ship came into port on St Johns day, 6th May, at
+which time I happened to be with the king, who addressed me in these
+words. " <i>Hah!</i>  congratulate me, good sir, as my fleet is already
+in the river, loaded with all kinds of spices." I received the news
+joyfully, as became me, and made my compliments of congratulation to
+the king. The tidings were welcomed with exceeding joy and all kind
+of festivity, with the sound of trumpets, cymbals, and flutes, and
+the continual firing of cannon. On the day following there was a
+solemn thanksgiving, at which all the people assisted. When I again
+waited on the king, he desired me to apprize your serenity of his
+good fortune, saying that you may send your ships hither in safety to
+purchase his spices; adding, that he should take such measures as to
+prevent the prefect of Syria, that is the sultan[7]; from procuring
+spices in India. He founds this hope assuredly on the success which
+his fleet had lately in contending with the numerous vessels of the
+Moors, and has no doubt of being able to reduce India under his own
+authority. The ship already arrived is commanded by a Tuscan named
+Bartholomew, a native of Florence. Her cargo consists of
+300 <i>cantari</i>  or quintals of pepper, 120 cantari of cinnamon, 60
+cantari of lac, and 15 cantari of castor and other perfumes of that
+kind[8]. They have no cloves or ginger, having been prevented by the
+Moors, as these could only be procured at Calicut; neither have they
+any of the lesser spices. They had purchased many pearls of different
+sorts, which were all lost in the disturbances at Calicut, in which
+many of their men and much riches were destroyed.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] By the sultan or prefect of Syria, twice so designed
+in this dispatch, is evidently meant the Mameluk sultan of Egypt; but
+who was soon afterwards defeated and slain by the Turkish emperor.
+The ineffectual exertions of the Mameluks and Turks, instigated by
+Venice, to obstruct the Portuguese trade in India, will be afterwards
+mentioned.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[8] It is difficult to say what is meant by
+a <i>cantarus</i>  in the text; perhaps a quintal or 100 pounds. The
+castor of the text, and other perfumes, may mean musk, civet, and
+ambergris.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>I must not omit to mention, that there have lately arrived
+messengers from <i>Ubenus</i> [9] king of Ethiopia to the king of
+Portugal, bringing gifts of ivory and many other things. These are
+soon to return in two ships, which are to go to India after stopping
+at the new gold mines. While this ship which has first arrived was on
+its voyage home, it met two ships steering their course from
+the <i>new gold mines</i> [10] for India. These; thinking themselves
+lost, or that they would be plundered by the Christians, offered to
+pay them a ransom of 15,000 ducats for leave to continue their
+voyage: But the Christians, though tempted by so much gold, gave
+these people many gifts and permitted them to continue their course,
+that they might hereafter be allowed a free trade with their
+country.</p>
+<blockquote>[9] Perhaps the king of Congo, or some other prince of
+the west coast of Africa is here alluded to; or perhaps the xeque or
+prince of the Moors at Sofala.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[10] By the new gold mines Sofala seems indicated, as
+contradistinguished from the <i>old</i>  gold mines of Guinea. The
+story of the two ships on their voyage to India from Sofala,
+obviously alludes to the Guzerate vessels, more particularly
+mentioned already in the voyage of Cabral --E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+<p> <i>Letter from certain Merchants and Bankers of Spain,[1] to their
+correspondents in the cities of Florence and Venice, respecting a
+treaty of peace and league between the kings of Portugal and
+Calicut.</i> </p>
+<blockquote>[1] This letter has no date, but must have been very
+early in the sixteenth century, probably in 1504, from the
+circumstance to which it alludes at its commencement. Although said
+to be from <i>Spain</i> , there is every reason to suppose it was
+written from Lisbon, as we find Portugal frequently considered
+as <i>in</i>  Spain, which it actually is in the most extensive
+geographical sense.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>We have been informed by those who were on board of the fleet
+which sailed from Lisbon to India in May 1502, and returned on the
+15th December 1503, that the king of Calicut has concluded a peace
+with our sovereign on the following conditions. As a compensation for
+the slaughter of our men, he is to pay 4000 <i>bahars</i>  of pepper,
+equal to 12, 000 quintals. That the Moors shall not be allowed to
+trade there from any place whatever, excepting only those who are
+natives of Calicut; and that these even shall not be permitted to
+trade with Mecca. That our king, if so inclined, may build a fort at
+Calicut, and shall be supplied with a sufficient quantity of stones,
+lime, and timber for that purpose by the zamorin, paying for these on
+delivery. That the king of Calicut shall aid and favour the
+Portuguese in all things, and that it shall be competent for our king
+to appoint one of his own subjects to administer justice among the
+Portuguese resident in that city, even with the power of life and
+death, and without appeal to the zamorin. That when any of our people
+shall revolt from or be disobedient to our commercial agent, they
+shall immediately be delivered up to be judged by the aforesaid
+Portuguese consul. If any captive Moors are detained, they shall all
+be delivered up to our agent. That the two Milanese lapidaries, who
+had gone from Rome to India, and who there acted as military
+engineers and shipbuilders in the European fashion, to the disgrace
+of the Christian profession, and the vast injury of the Christians,
+should be delivered up in chains to the admiral of our fleet. That
+the kings or rajahs of Cochin and Cananore shall be included in this
+treaty as co-allies, mutually sharing all danger and advantages with
+the other contracting parties: So that if any one shall take arms
+against any of the parties to this treaty, he shall be declared an
+enemy to all the parties hereby confederated. If any of the parties
+to this league shall act contrary to its stipulations, the power of
+all the rest shall act against him, as a perfidious person, a
+traitor, and an enemy to good faith; all the contracting parties
+using their utmost to preserve the present peace and alliance
+inviolate. While the Portuguese fleet might remain in the harbour of
+Calicut, all other ships whatever were to be refused access, at least
+until after ours were laden: But when there were sufficient goods for
+all who wanted them, then all ships Were to be at liberty to load;
+provided always that the accustomed prices should not be augmented,
+and expressly that the profit to the venders should never exceed 8
+per cent which was usual in that port.</p>
+<p>These are the conditions of peace and alliance which have been
+stipulated, to the great honour and renown of our sovereign, as must
+be evident to every one; as henceforwards he may not only be
+accounted sovereign of India, but has imposed laws on Turkey and the
+prefect of Syria[2], since by this treaty all access to the city of
+Calicut is debarred to their traders. We do not even doubt that, in
+four years from hence, through the vigorous measures of our king, our
+sailors may safely navigate to Constantinople and Alexandria, the
+present most celebrated marts of eastern commerce, and shall take
+signal vengeance on the Moors by whom they have been infamously and
+frequently abused. For this purpose a fleet of twelve sail was fitted
+out this year, which found the rajah of Cochin expelled from his
+dominions, having fled for refuge from the hostilities of the king of
+Calicut to a strong place in a certain island. The only reason he
+could assign for the hostilities of the zamorin was, that, faithful
+to his engagements, he refused to deliver our people to the king of
+Calicut, and chose rather to live in exile than to betray his trust.
+In this extremity, our fleet brought opportune aid to the friendly
+rajah, and having landed troops for his assistance, they marched
+boldly against the perfidious zamorin, routed his forces with great
+slaughter, and triumphantly restored the rajah of Cochin to his
+dominions.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] This, as formerly observed, alludes to the Mameluk
+sultan of Egypt, through whose dominions the trade between India and
+Europe was entirely carried on before this era. This treaty of peace
+and alliance between Portugal and Calicut, may possibly have been
+proposed at this period, but certainly was not then agreed to; as
+there were long wars with the zamorin before his power was reduced
+under the influence and dominion of the Portuguese.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>This kingdom is not far distant from the straits of the Red Sea,
+where they have erected a very strong fortress[3], and are building
+another in the mouth of the bay of Cochin, provided with all kinds of
+warlike artillery, by which to repel the enemy, and to provide a safe
+station, for our fleet; nor shall we recede from thence, however
+adverse the natives may be to our remaining; and when the same shall
+be done in the bay of Calicut, it will not then be difficult to
+defend these stations and the adjoining coasts against all
+aggressors. Our ships which remained in these seas last year made no
+small booty, as they took one morning five ships bound from the
+kingdom of Cambaya for Mecca, the shrine of Mahomet, in which they
+found 1000 <i>cantari</i>  or quintals of clean cloves, besides a large
+quantity of the same spice not freed from the husk as is usual with
+us. These ships had likewise castor and other perfumes of that
+kind[4], sanders wood, amber, purified lac, and excessively fine
+linen, and a large sum in gold and silver coin; insomuch that the
+value of this prize exceeded 200,000 ducats.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] This is rather an anachronism, as at this period the
+Portuguese had no fortress on the Red Sea.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] The <i>Castor</i>  of the text was probably musk, and
+its <i>amber</i>  ambergris. --E.</blockquote>
+<p>Having thus informed you of the wealth of that country, which
+abounds in almost every thing, we now proceed to relate that two of
+our ships above mentioned have been cast away in a storm near the
+mouth of the Red Sea, their commander Vincentius and above six
+hundred men having perished, but the other two were saved[5]. Another
+vessel, which escaped that dreadful tempest, was soon afterwards
+dashed to pieces against a rock; so that the sea was covered with
+dead bodies and with rich merchandize of all kinds: Thus, as the
+proverb says, wealth ill acquired is ill lost. Of all these ships one
+small caravel only rode out the storm, and brought intelligence of
+the destruction of the others.</p>
+<blockquote>[5] This alludes to the misfortune of Vincente Sodre and
+his squadron, already more distinctly related in the preceding
+chapter.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>We have now to inform you, that our king has given permission to
+all who choose to proceed to India and to carry on trade, providing
+that he is paid a quarter part[6] of all returns, and that they
+purchase from him for the purpose such ships as he thinks proper, and
+the price of these ships must be paid before setting out on the
+voyage; because, considering the loss of ships which he has already
+sustained, he is desirous that others should now bear the risk: It
+will therefore require large funds to embark in this trade, so that
+we hardly believe the king will find any to engage on these
+conditions; but of this we shall inform you from time to time as it
+may occur. It must not, however, be concealed that the circumstances
+of this trade are by no means established on certain principles,
+which can only be determined by future events.</p>
+<blockquote>[6] The expression of the original, <i>ex centenario lucro
+quadrugenarium</i> , is not easily understood: It is here translated a
+quarter part of the return cargo, conformably with the regulations of
+Don Henry for the trade of Guinea, as already stated in Vol. I. p.
+204, from which the present were probably copied.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>A Portuguese of the former fleet touched at a certain port in the
+kingdom of Sofala, and visited a gold mine of which he relates
+wonderful things. He assured us that a ship of the Christians had
+been there, and speaks of incredible quantities of gold to be found
+there. On this account, our king is resolved to erect a strong fort
+at that place, to keep the barbarians under subjection, and to keep
+away the Indians and the inhabitants of Cambaya, lest they should
+make themselves masters of the mine. He will therefore immediately
+seize upon this mine for his own use, which we certainly believe to
+have been the mine whence Solomon derived such vast riches, and where
+the queen of Sheba dwelt, who went to visit Solomon, as related in
+holy writ. These things are of such importance that they ought not to
+be concealed from you; and our king is to be deemed happy and
+fortunate; because he hath made the discovery of such vast
+riches.</p>
+<p>It is believed by many that they will soon obtain permission from
+the king to go to India, paying him at the rate of 25 per cent. and
+taking his ships as before mentioned. It appears to be his wish that
+the merchants should send out their own factors or supercargoes with
+the care of their goods, but without any authority, as he wishes to
+rule in all things, and that every thing may be directed by his
+officers, even the expences of the merchants. The trade in spiceries
+is to remain exclusively in the viceroy, and is not to be permitted
+to the merchants; for which reason it is not believed that this
+Indian trade will be very profitable: But we shall give you due
+information of all these things as they occur. We have formerly
+written you that Cairo failed in its commercial prosperity from the
+very same cause; and if this great eastern trade shall be
+appropriated by the king, it will certainly occasion a Babylonian
+confusion in the state, and very deservedly: For at Cairo the Moors
+were in use to maltreat the Christians exceedingly, and they are now
+perhaps suffering for that error, as they will not any longer be
+allowed to carry away any kind of spices, or jewels of all kinds, or
+pearls and other valuable commodities; as by means of the Portuguese
+forts, they will in future be debarred from trading to Calicut and
+Sofala; for all which you will be thankful to God.</p>
+<p>Concerning the gold mine of Sofala, which we mentioned before, and
+of which such wonderful things are told, it is said our king will be
+the sole proprietor in two years, which must prove of vast
+importance; as from that place, which is now possessed by the
+idolaters, all India and Persia used to procure the whole of their
+gold; although the mouth of the bay is under the dominion of a king
+of the Chaldeans[7], at which place the trade is carried on with the
+idolaters by the Moors, who bring yearly their ships from Cambaya
+laden with low-priced articles, which they barter for gold. These
+goods are coarse cotton cloths, silks of various fashions and many
+colours, but chiefly of the Turkish fabric. The king of Quiloa, an
+island about sixty leagues from Sofala, it is said, will have to quit
+that place from fear of the idolaters. At Quiloa all ships going to
+Sofala have to stop and pay tribute, before going to the mine of
+Sofala. When they get to Sofala, they have to remain there six or
+eight months before completing their affairs; carrying from thence
+gold, ivory, and wax, all of the best kind. After this they have
+again to touch at Quiloa, and to pay a tax for their gold. Thence
+they go to Cambaya or Mecca. In our ships there are twelve or fifteen
+agents of the king of Quiloa, who pays a tribute yearly to our king
+of 1500 <i>metigals</i> , each of which metigals is worth 150 ducats,
+or in all 225,000 ducats. That king depends so entirely on the king
+of Portugal, that our king may dethrone him whenever be pleases to
+send there a force of 1000 men, which would oblige the king of Quiloa
+to run away; and it is believed this will be done shortly, the thing
+being so easy, and by this means an yearly revenue of 500,000 ducats
+would be secured.</p>
+<blockquote>[7] It is difficult to guess what bay, and who may be the
+king of the Chaldeans here alluded to. Perhaps the town of Sofala,
+the emporium of the gold trade of Eastern Africa, which was ruled by
+an Arabian prince or sheik. By the idolaters in the text, are
+apparently meant the Negroes of the interior, where the gold came
+from by way of Sofala.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>If you have properly considered what those ships may bring which
+are daily expected, you will find that they will at least import
+about 222 quintals of all kinds of spice: And we shall ship for you
+of all these, using our endeavours that you may never be in want of
+them. Even after the before mentioned treaty with the king of
+Calicut, no small risk still remains to those who navigate to the
+Indies, on account of a certain archipelago, containing about 14,000
+islands[8], and owing to the narrowness of a certain strait which is
+scarcely navigable. We shall persist notwithstanding, as by custom
+and experience these dangers will become of no consequence. At length
+we expect to have the glory of having discovered almost the whole of
+the world, and those parts of it especially to which the ancients
+never penetrated. It only remains for us to go to the island of
+Taprobana, or Ceylon, which according to Pliny is exceedingly rich in
+gold, gems, and ivory. Thus by our anxious endeavours, we shall lay
+open the whole of India to our trade. By letters from thence, it
+appears that our merchandize is not much valued in these parts, and
+that <i>crusadoes</i>  ought to be sent out, if we wish to have our
+affairs speedily conducted, as other goods remain long in hand: For
+the Indians purposely procrastinate, that they may beat down the
+value of our commodities. The Indians give a high price for brass and
+alum; but this last must be white not red, and in large pieces, as
+they despise the small. They do not care for coral, unless large and
+finely wrought, which otherwise bears no value. Lead is valued, if in
+large bars. Quicksilver and amber are in no request. Wrought brass
+bears a low price, as it is always manufactured over again in their
+own fashion, so that the cost of manufacturing in Europe would be
+thrown away. All other goods besides these mentioned are in no
+demand, and will therefore bring small profit.</p>
+<blockquote>[8] This alludes to the Maldives and
+Lakedives.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+<p> <i>Letter from Peter Pasquali, orator of the Venetian republic at
+the court of the king of Portugal, to his brothers dwelling in
+Lisbon</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This letter is dated 9th October 1501. It is probable
+that Pasquali would hardly write this <i>from</i>  the court of
+Portugal to his brothers in <i>Lisbon</i> ; it being more likely that
+they resided in Venice.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Beloved brothers! I formerly wrote you by Peter Verzo the carrier,
+informing you of all the news of this place; and now write again by
+Bartholomew Marquesi, the uncle of Dominic Benedicto of Florence,
+that you may be informed of our affairs, and may be assured of our
+desire to write whenever an opportunity offers. Know, therefore, that
+the vessel which was sent out last year towards the north by the king
+of Portugal under the command of Caspar Corterato, has now returned.
+He reports having discovered a continent about 2000 miles from hence,
+in a direction between the north-west and the west, hitherto utterly
+unknown. He is likewise said to have sailed almost 800 miles along
+its coast, without finding any end; on which account it is considered
+to be a continent, and not an island: and its coast appears to join
+with another land, formerly discovered almost under the very
+north[2]. But the vessel was unable to proceed so far, on account of
+the sea being frozen, and from excessive falls of snow. It is
+concluded, from the number of rivers which descend from the snowy
+mountains, that this land must be a continent, as no island could
+possibly supply so many rivers. The land is said to be well
+cultivated. The houses of the inhabitants are constructed of wood,
+covered with hides or the skins of fish. The vessel now arrived has
+brought over seven of the natives of both sexes, and the other ship,
+which is hourly expected, is said to have fifty. In stature, colour,
+appearance, and dress, these people are very like the <i>Cingani</i> .
+They are clothed in the skins of fish and otters, and other hairy
+skins like those of wolves; wearing the fur side inwards in winter,
+as we do, and outwards in summer; but these are not fashioned or
+sewed together, being used in their natural forms. These are
+principally worn on their arms and shoulders, and their loins are
+girded with many cords made of sinews. They appear a savage people,
+yet not impudent, and are well made in all their limbs. Their faces
+are punctured with many marks, like the Indians, having six or eight
+punctured lines, more or less according to their fancies, in which
+they seem to take great delight. They have a language, which is not
+understood by any one, although interpreters of almost every tongue
+have been tried. Their country is destitute of iron, yet they have
+swords edged with sharp stones; and their arrows are pointed by the
+same means, and are sharper even than ours. Our people brought from
+thence part of a broken sword with gilded ornaments, which seemed of
+Italian manufacture.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] The discovery here referred to, seems to have been
+the coast of Labradore; and the other country under the north may
+possibly be Greenland. This voyage was probably in quest of a
+north-west passage to India.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>A certain boy is said to have been seen in that country, having
+two silver balls banging from his ears, which certainly appeared to
+be engraved after our manner. On the whole, it may be concluded that
+this country is a continent, not an island, and that is a new
+discovery; for if any ships had ever been here before, we should
+assuredly have heard something respecting it. The coast abounds in
+fish, particularly salmon, herrings, and many others of that kind.
+There are forests, which abound in all kinds of trees; so that <i>they
+build</i> [3] ships, with masts, yards, benches, and all things
+conformable. On this account the king of Portugal has resolved to
+convert this discovery to profit, both on account of the abundance of
+wood which is fit for many purposes, and because the natives, being
+accustomed to labour, may become very useful, and indeed I have never
+seen better slaves. I have deemed it consistent with our friendship
+to acquaint you with these things; and when the other vessel arrives,
+which is daily expected, I shall communicate other particulars.</p>
+<blockquote>[3] In this passage we surely ought to read <i>ships may
+be built</i> .--E.</blockquote>
+<p>The fleet has sailed for Calicut, and the king has ordered that it
+shall seize the fleet of Mecca, that the soldan of Syria may neither
+have access there in future nor may export any more spices. The king
+of Portugal is satisfied that every thing shall go according to his
+wishes in this respect, and the court and all the nation are of the
+same opinion. Should this purpose succeed, it is incredible how
+abundant this kingdom must soon become in all kinds of riches and
+merchandize; and from hence the ships of Venice in particular will
+have to bring their accustomed articles of trade. To us truly, who
+formerly sustained this branch of commerce entirely by our own
+resources, this decree will be injurious, unless he shew us
+favour.</p>
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+<p> <i>Letter from Francis Sagitta of Cremona, from Lisbon, directed
+to the Venetian orator Peter Pasquali, residing at the Court of
+Castile</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This letter is dated 16th September 1502; and by it
+P. Pascquali appears to have gone from Portugal into
+Spain:--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Most excellent orator! In two former letters, I have promised to
+omit no opportunity of informing your excellency what kind of
+merchandize might be brought in four vessels which were expected
+daily from India. They are now arrived, and I shall truly state all
+the merchandize which they have brought, which is as follows: One
+thousand quintals of pepper; 450 quintals of cinnamon; about fifty
+quintals of ginger; fifty quintals of lac: and as much cotton as may
+be bought for 400 ducats. The reason assigned for having brought so
+small a quantity of spice is, that they agreed among themselves,
+after sailing from hence, that two of the ships should steer for the
+gold mine, and the other two for Calicut. On this account, each took
+only such goods as it was thought would be valued in the ports to
+which they were bound. But when these ships came to Calicut they were
+not allowed to trade, and were obliged to go to other places. On
+going to Cananore, they there learnt what had been done by Peter
+Aliaris, the factor at Cochin for the king. The king or rajah of
+Cananore received our people honourably, and offered to supply our
+commanders gratuitously with all kinds of spices; but, thanking him
+gratefully for this kindness, he declined the offer, saying that he
+must go in the first place to the kings factor at Cochin, and would
+then return and accept his spices on credit. Setting out therefore
+for Cochin, he transacted business with the royal agent, Peter
+Aliaris; but as the ships did not bring money for their purchases,
+and as the goods they brought were in small request, and they could
+not therefore succeed in making purchases, the commander resolved to
+return to Cananore, where the rajah had expressed so much good will
+for the Portuguese, and where he bartered his merchandize for spices
+at a good profit. He here left three persons, with the ships factor
+and a clerk, because the rajah had advanced money on credit for the
+spices, that they might not appear to have cheated the rajah. Yet
+after all, the ships had to come away only half loaded, because they
+had not taken out money for their purchases, and their goods were in
+no request. The conclusion from this is evident, that the Indians
+have no demand for our goods, and that money alone is especially
+desired by them, and of which they are in great need.</p>
+<p>It has been reported since, that these kings of the Indies gave as
+much merchandize to our admiral without price as would load four
+ships, out of fear of the Christians; especially the king of Calicut,
+who has been told by his soothsayers to beware of the ensuing year,
+as the stars threaten him with a great slaughter of his men by the
+Christians, and that his kingdom even would be deserted, owing to
+dread of that people. We have this intelligence from three men who
+escaped from the battle at  <i>Araschorea</i>  with the barbarians. The
+same thing is reported by a native of Bergamo, who had dwelt
+twenty-five years at Calicut, which is likewise confirmed by a native
+of Valentia, who had sojourned there six years. In the meantime the
+king of Calicut fitted out a large fleet to attack our ships at
+Cananore; but they immediately sought for safety by setting sail. On
+this account the king of Portugal has ordered eight or ten ships of
+burthen to be fitted out by next January, of which seven are already
+built. Two ships have been sent out this summer, one of which is of
+700 tons burthen, and the other of 500. There is a third in the port
+of Lisbon of 450 tons; two others at Madeira, one of 350, and the
+other of 230 tons; another is fitting out at Setubal carrying above
+160 tons. Besides these six, a caravel is to be added which lately
+came from the island of Chio, all of which are entirely at the royal
+charges; and two are to be fitted out by the king for certain
+merchants, one of 450 tons and the other of 350. It is agreed between
+these merchants and the king, that the king shall be at the sole
+expence of the voyage and payment of the sailors, as in his service.
+That the merchants shall carry out as much money as may suffice for
+all their purchases; and on the return of the ships half of the goods
+shall belong to the king, and the merchants shall be at liberty to
+sell the other half for their own behoof. It appears evident to us
+that this mode of conducting business will be greatly more to the
+benefit of the merchants than going entirely at their own risk, as
+has been done hitherto; so that the king will probably find abundance
+of people willing to trade to India on these conditions. We have
+accordingly a share in these two ships; but of the event, God alone
+can judge.</p>
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+<p> <i>Of the Weights and Money of Calicut, and of the places whence
+they procure their Spices</i> [1].</p>
+<blockquote>[1] This Section is taken from the <i>Novus Orbus</i>  of
+Grynaeus, p 63. in which it forms part of the navigations from Lisbon
+to Calicut, attributed to the pen of Aloysius Cadamosto. The
+information it contains respecting the principal commodities then
+brought from India to Europe, and their prices, is curious: Yet there
+is some reason to suspect that the author, or editor rather, has
+sometimes interchanged the bahar and the faracula, or its twentieth
+part, in the weights of the commodities. Several of the names of
+things and places are unintelligible, probably from corrupt
+transcription.--E.</blockquote>
+<p>Having already treated concerning the articles of commerce of all
+kinds in the Indies, it is proper to give some account of the prices
+and weights of these. In the city of Calicut a <i>bahar</i>  of nutmegs
+is sold for 450 <i>favi</i> . A bahar consists of four quintals, of 100
+pounds each, and twenty <i>favis</i>  are equal to a ducat. A bahar of
+cinnamon costs 390 favi. A <i>faracula</i> , or the twentieth part of a
+bahar of dried ginger, is six favi. A faracula of candied ginger is
+twenty-eight favi. A bahar of tamarinds thirty favi. A bahar of the
+best pepper 400 favi. A bahar of  <i>zerombeci</i>  forty favi. A bahar
+of myrabolans 560 favi. A bahar of zedoary thirty favi. A bahar of
+red sanders eighty favi. A bahar of lac 260 favi. A bahar
+of <i>sanasius</i>  160. A bahar of mastic 430 favi. A  <i>faracula</i> 
+of camphor 160. A bahar of pepper 360. A faracula of frankincense
+five favi. A faracula of benzoin six favi. A faracula of aloes wood
+400 favi. A faracula of cassia eleven favi. A faracula of rhubarb 400
+favi. A bahar of cloves 600 fevi. A faracula of opium 400 favi. A
+bahar of white sanders 700 favi. A mitrical of ambergris, or six
+ounces and a quarter. A bahar contains twenty faraculas. A faracula
+fourteen aratollae and a third; as twenty-three Venetian aratollae
+are equal to twenty-two Portuguese pounds. A golden ducat is equal to
+twenty favi.</p>
+<p>As to those things which are carried from Europe for sale at
+Calicut, a faracula of brass sells for forty-five favi. A faracula of
+white coral for 1000. A faracula of silver for twenty favi. A
+faracula of spurious coral for 300. A faracula of alum twenty. An
+almenum of saffron sells for eighty favi: the almenum exceeds the
+Portuguese pound two aratollae and a half, and is therefore equal to
+about three Venetian pounds.</p>
+<p>It appears proper to mention the regions from whence the various
+spices are brought to Calicut. Pepper is brought from a certain tower
+near the coast, about fifty leagues beyond Calicut. Cinnamon comes
+from a country called <i>Zolon</i> , Ceylon, 260 leagues beyond
+Calicut, and from no other place. Cloves come from the district
+of <i>Meluza</i> , which is twelve Portuguese leagues from Calicut, and
+is in the country of Cananore. Nutmegs and mastic come
+from <i>Meluza</i> , which is 740 leagues from Calicut[2]. Castor,
+which is musk, comes from a certain region called Pegu, 500 leagues
+from Calicut. Fine pearls come from the coast of <i>Armuzi</i> [3], 700
+leagues from Calicut. Spikenard and myrabolans from the province of
+ <i>Columbaia</i> [4], 600 leagues from Calicut. Cassia <i>in
+twigs</i> [5] is procured in the territory of Calicut. Frankincense is
+brought from <i>Saboea</i> [6], 800 leagues distant. Aloes-wood,
+rhubarb, camphor, and calinga, is sent from the country of Chiva[7],
+4000 leagues from Calicut. Myrrh from the province
+of <i>Fastica</i> [8], 700 leagues distant. Calicut produces
+ <i>zeromba</i> [9]; and Cananore sends cardamoms, being only twelve
+leagues distant. Long pepper is found in <i>Same</i> [10]. Benzoin
+from <i>Zan</i> , 700 miles from Calicut. Zedoary is produced in the
+territory of Calicut. Lac comes from the city of <i>Samoterra</i> [11],
+500 leagues distant. Brasil wood from the region of <i>Tannazar</i> ,
+500 leagues. Opium from the coast of <i>Adde</i> , 700 leagues.</p>
+<blockquote>[2] Meluza may possibly be the city of Malacca, then a
+great emporium of Indian trade; but it is impossible to reconcile or
+explain Meluza in Cananore twelve leagues from Calicut, and Meluza
+740 leagues from thence.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[3] This may possibly refer to the island of Ramisseram
+in the straits of Manaar, between Ceylon and the Coromandel coast,
+near which the famous pearl fishery is still carried
+on.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[4] Evidently Cambaya or Guzerat.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[5] Probably Cassia lignea, or in rolled up bark like
+twigs, to distinguish it from the drug called Cassia
+fistula.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[6] Perhaps the coast of Habesh on the Red
+Sea.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[7] Probably a typographical error for
+China.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[8] Alluding to some part of the coast of
+Arabia.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[9] Perhaps Zedoary, repeated afterwards under its right
+name.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[10] Same and Zan probably are meant to indicate some of
+the Indian islands. Same may be Sumatra. Zan may be some port in
+Zangibar, on the eastern coast of Africa.--E.</blockquote>
+<blockquote>[11] Samoterra probably alludes to some port in the Bay
+of Bengal. Tannazar, almost certainly Tanaserim in Siam. Adde,
+probably is Adel or Aden in Arabia.--E.</blockquote>
+<h2>END OF VOLUME SECOND.</h2>
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<pre>
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Vol. II, by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 10803-h.htm or 10803-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/8/0/10803/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Allen Siddle and PG Distributed Proofreaders.
+This file was produced from images generously made available by the
+Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL
+ 
+</pre>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/old/10803.txt b/old/10803.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..915cfa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/10803.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20663 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Vol. II, by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Vol. II
+       Arranged in Systematic Order: Forming a Complete History of the
+       Origin and Progress of Navigation, Discovery, and Commerce,
+       by Sea and Land, from the Earliest Ages to the Present Time
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: January 23, 2004 [EBook #10803]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Allen Siddle and PG Distributed Proofreaders.
+This file was produced from images generously made available by the
+Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions
+
+
+
+
+
+[Transcriber's Note: The spelling inconsistencies of the original have
+been retained in this etext.]
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,
+
+ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:
+
+FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF NAVIGATION,
+DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE, BY SEA AND LAND, FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE
+PRESENT TIME.
+
+
+BY
+
+ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.
+
+VOL. II.
+
+
+WILLIAM BLACKWOOD, EDINBURGH:
+
+AND T. CADELL, LONDON.
+
+MDCCCXXIV.
+
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS OF VOL. II.
+
+
+PART. I.--(Continued.)
+
+CHAP.
+XX. Account of various early Pilgrimages from England to the Holy Land,
+    between the years 1097, and 1107.
+
+XXI. Discovery of Madeira
+
+XXII. Account of the Discovery and Conquest of the Canary Islands
+
+
+
+PART II.
+
+General Voyages and Travels, chiefly of Discovery; from the era of Don
+Henry Prince of Portugal, in 1412, to that of George III. in 1760.
+
+BOOK I. History of the Discoveries of the Portuguese along the Coast of
+    Africa, and of their Discovery of and Conquests in India, from 1412 to
+    1505[A]
+
+[A] This title was omitted to be inserted in its proper
+    place, and may be supplied in writing on the blank page opposite to
+    page 23 of this volume.
+
+
+CHAP.
+I. Summary of the Discoveries of the World, from their first original, to
+    the year 1555, by Antonio Galvano
+
+II. Journey of Ambrose Contarini, Ambassador from the Republic of Venice,
+    to Uzun-Hassan King of Persia, in the years 1473, 4, 5, and 6; written
+    by himself
+
+III. Voyages of Discovery by the Portuguese along the Western Coast of
+    Africa, during the life, and under the direction of Don Henry
+
+IV. Original Journals of the Voyages of Cada Mosto, and Pedro de Cintra,
+    to the Coast of Africa; the former in the years 1455 and 1406, and the
+    latter soon afterwards
+
+V. Continuation of the Portuguese Discoveries along the Coast of Africa,
+    from the death of Don Henry in 1463, to the Discovery of the Cape of
+    Good Hope in 1486
+
+VI. History of the Discovery and Conquest of India by the Portuguese,
+    between the years 1497 and 1505, from the original Portuguese of
+    Hernan Lopez de Castaneda
+
+VII. Letters from Lisbon in the beginning of the Sixteenth Century,
+    respecting the then recent Discovery of the Route by Sea to India, and
+    the Indian trade
+
+
+_Note_. In p. 292 of this volume, 1, 2 and 18, the date of 1525
+ought to have been 1505.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+
+
+
+PART I.
+
+(CONTINUED.)
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. XX.
+
+_Account of Various early Pilgrimages from England to the Holy Land;
+between the years 1097 and 1107_[1].
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+The subsequent account of several English pilgrimages to the Holy Land.
+
+
+[1] Hakluyt, I. p. 44. et sequ.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_The Voyage of Gutuere, or Godwera, an English Lady, towards the Holy
+Land, about 1097._
+
+While the Christian army, under Godfrey of Buillon, was marching through
+Asia Minor from Iconium, in Lycaonia, by Heraclea, to Marasia, or
+Maresch[1], Gutuere, or Godwera, the wife of Baldwin, the brother of the
+Duke of Lorain, who had long laboured under heavy sickness, became so
+extremely ill, that the army encamped on her account near Marash, for
+three days, when she expired. This lady is said to have been of noble
+English parentage, and was honourably interred at Antioch in Syria[2].
+
+
+[1] Now Konieh, Erekli, and Marash; the two former in Karamania,
+the latter in Syria or Room.--E.
+
+[2] For this story, Hakluyt quotes Hist Bel. Sacr. lib. iii. c.
+xvii. and Chron. Hierosol. lib. iii c. xxvii.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_The Voyage of Edgar Aethling to Jerusalem, in 1102_[1].
+
+Edgar, commonly called Aethling, was son of Edward, the son of Edmond
+Ironside, who was the brother of Edward the Confessor, to whom
+consequently Edgar was nephew; Edgar travelled to Jerusalem in 1102, in
+company with Robert, the son of Godwin, most valiant knight. Being
+present in Rama, when King Baldwin was there besieged by the Turks, and
+not being able to endure the hardships of the siege, he was delivered
+from that danger, and escaped through the midst of the hostile camp,
+chiefly through the aid of Robert; who, going before him, made a lane
+with his sword, slaying numbers of the Turks in his heroic progress.
+Towards the close of this chivalric enterprize, and becoming more fierce
+and eager as he advanced, Robert unfortunately dropt his sword; and while
+stooping to recover his weapon, he was oppressed by the multitude, who
+threw themselves upon him, and made him prisoner. From thence, as some
+say, Robert was carried to Babylon in Egypt, or Cairo; and refusing to
+renounce his faith in CHRIST, he was tied to a stake in the market-place,
+and transpierced with arrows. Edgar, having thus lost his valiant knight,
+returned towards Europe, and was much honoured with many gifts by the
+emperors both of Greece and Germany, both of whom would gladly have
+retained him at their courts, on account of his high lineage; but he
+despised all things, from regard to his native England, into which he
+returned: And, having been subjected to many changes of fortune, as we
+have elsewhere related, he _now_ spends his extreme old age in private
+obscurity.
+
+
+[1] Hakluyt. I. 44. W. Malmsb. III. 58.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Some Circumstances respecting the Siege of Joppa, about the year_
+1102[1].
+
+In the second year of Baldwin, king of Jerusalem, Joppa was besieged by
+the Turks of Cairo; and Baldwin embarked from the town of Assur, in a
+vessel called a _buss_, commanded by one Goderic an English freebooter,
+intending to proceed to the relief of the besieged. Fixing the royal
+banner aloft on a spear, that it might be seen of the Christians, they
+sailed boldly towards Joppa, with but a small company of armed men. The
+king knew that the Christians in Joppa were almost hopeless of his life
+and safety, and he feared they might shamefully abandon the defence of
+the place, or be constrained to surrender, unless revived by his presence.
+On perceiving the approach of the royal banner of King Baldwin, the naval
+forces of the Turks, to the number of twenty gallies and thirteen ships,
+usually called _Cazh_, endeavoured to surround and capture the single
+vessel in which he was embarked. But, by the aid of GOD, the billows of
+the sea raged against them, while the kings ship glided easily and
+swiftly through the waves, eluding the enemy, and arrived in safety into
+the haven of Joppa, to the great joy of the Christians, who had mourned
+him as if dead.
+
+While the Saracens continued the siege of Joppa, 200 sail of Christian
+vessels arrived there, with pilgrims who wished to perform their
+devotions at Jerusalem. Of these, the chief leaders were Bernard Witrazh
+of Galatia, Hardin of England, Otho of Roges, Haderwerck, one of the
+principal nobles of Westphalia, and others. This power, by the blessing
+of God, arrived to succour the distressed Christians then besieged in
+Joppa, on the 3d of July 1102, in the second year of Baldwin king of
+Jerusalem. When the numerous army of the Saracens saw that the Christians,
+thus reinforced, boldly faced them without the walls, they removed their
+tents, during the night, above a mile from the town, that they might
+consider whether to retreat to Ascalon, or to continue to harass the
+citizens of Joppa with frequent assaults. But they confided in their
+numbers, and continued to annoy the Christians by severe and repeated
+attacks.
+
+Having allowed three days rest and refreshment to this powerful
+reinforcement, Baldwin issued out from Joppa early in the morning of the
+sixth of July, to the martial sound of trumpets and cornets, with a
+strong force, both of foot and horse, marching directly toward the
+Saracens, with loud shouts, and attacked their army with great spirit.
+The land attack was assisted by the Christian navy, which approached the
+shore, making a horrible noise, and distracting the attention of the
+Saracens, who feared to be attacked in flank and rear. After a sharp
+encounter, the Saracens fled towards Ascalon, many being slain in the
+battle and pursuit, and others drowned, by leaping into the sea to avoid
+being slain. In this battle 3000 of the Saracens perished, with a very
+small loss on the side of the Christians; and the city of Joppa was
+delivered from its enemies.
+
+
+[1] Hakluyt, I.45. Chron. Hierosol. IX. ix. xi. xii.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Of the Transactions of certain English, Danish, and Flemish Pilgrims in
+the Holy Land, in 1107_[1].
+
+In the seventh year of King Baldwin, a large fleet from England,
+containing above 7000 men, many of whom were soldiers, arrived at the
+harbour of Joppa, along with whom came other warriors from Denmark,
+Flanders, and Antwerp. Having received permission and safe conduct from
+King Baldwin, together with a strong band of armed men as a safeguard,
+they arrived in safety at Jerusalem and all the other places of devotion,
+free from all assaults and ambushes of the Gentiles; and having paid
+their vows unto the Lord in the church of the Holy Sepulchre, they
+returned with great joy, and without molestation, to Joppa[2]. Finding
+King Baldwin in that place, they made offer to assist him in any military
+enterprize; for which offer he gave them great commendations, saying,
+That he could not give an immediate answer, without consulting the
+patriarch and barons, of his kingdom.
+
+He therefore called together the Lord Patriarch, Hugh of Tabaria, Gunfrid
+the governor of the Tower of David, and the other principal officers of
+the kingdom of Jerusalem, to consult together in the city of Rames, how
+best to employ this proferred assistance of so considerable a body of
+volunteers.
+
+In that assembly, it was agreed upon to lay siege to the city of Sagitta,
+otherwise called Sidon; upon which, having directed every one of the
+nobles to go home, that they might provide armour and all other
+necessaries for the siege, he sent messengers to the English, requiring
+them not to remove their fleet and army from Joppa, but to wait there for
+his farther commands; informing them, that he and his nobles had resolved,
+with their aid, to lay siege to the city of Sidon, but it would require
+some time to provide the necessary engines and warlike instruments, for
+assaulting the walls of that place. The pilgrims answered, that they
+would attend his orders at Joppa, promising to be obedient to him in all
+things, even unto death. The king went soon afterwards, with the
+patriarch and all his attendants to the city of Acre; where, during forty
+days, he was busily employed in the construction of engines, and many
+different kinds of warlike instruments, and of every thing necessary for
+the intended siege.
+
+When this intended expedition came to the knowledge of the inhabitants of
+Sidon, and they understood that a powerful army of pilgrims lay in
+readiness at Joppa, to assist the king of Jerusalem, they were afraid of
+being subdued and destroyed by the Christians, as Caesaria, Assur, Acre,
+Cayphas, and Tabaria had already been; and they sent secret emissaries to
+the king, offering a large sum of money in gold byzants, and a
+considerable yearly tribute, on condition that he would spare their lives
+and refrain from the intended siege. After a lengthened negotiation,
+during which the inhabitants of Sidon rose considerably in their offers,
+the king, being in great straits for means to discharge the pay of his
+soldiers, hearkened willingly to the offers of the Sidonians; yet, afraid
+of reproach from the Christians, he dared not openly to consent to their
+proposals.
+
+In the meantime, Hugh of Tabaria, who was a principal warrior among the
+Christians of Palestine, and indefatigable in assaulting the pagans on
+all occasions, having gathered together 200 horse and 400 infantry,
+suddenly invaded the country of a great Saracen lord, named Suet, on the
+frontiers of the territory of Damascus, where he took a rich booty of
+gold and silver and many cattle, which would have proved of great
+importance in assisting the army at the siege of Sidon. On his return
+with this prey by the city of Belinas, otherwise called Caesaria Philippi,
+the Turks of Damascus, with the Saracen inhabitants of the country,
+gathered together in great numbers, and pursued the troops of Hugh, that
+they might recover the booty. Coming up with them in the mountains, over
+which the infantry belonging to Hugh of Tabaria were driving their prey,
+the Turks prevailed over the Christians, and the plunder was recovered.
+On receiving this intelligence, Hugh, who happened to be at some distance,
+hastened with his cavalry to succour his footmen, and to recover the
+spoil: But happening to fall in with the Turks in a strait and craggy
+place, and rushing heedlessly among the enemy, unprovided with his armour,
+he was shot in the back by an arrow, which pierced his liver, and he died
+on the spot. His soldiers brought back the dead body of Hugh to the city
+of Nazareth near Mount Thabor, where he was honourably interred. Gerard,
+the brother of Hugh, lay at this time sick of a dangerous illness, and
+died within eight days afterwards.
+
+Taking advantage of the death of these two famous princes, King Baldwin
+agreed to receive the money which had been offered to him by the city of
+Sidon, yet kept his intentions of making peace private, and sent to Joppa,
+desiring the chiefs of the English, Danes, and Flemings, to come with
+their fleet and army to Acre, as if he had meant to prosecute the siege.
+When they arrived, he represented to their chiefs the great loss he had
+sustained by the death of two of his chief warriors, on which account, he
+was constrained to defer the siege to a more convenient opportunity, and
+must now dismiss his army. On this the strangers saluted the king very
+respectfully, and, embarking in their ships, returned to their own
+countries.
+
+
+[1] Hakluyt, I. 47. Chron. Hierosol. lib. x.
+
+[2] Though not mentioned in the text, it seems presumable that these
+pilgrims deemed it necessary for them to proceed unarmed in execution of
+their devotions, under an escort.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_The Expedition of William Longespee, or Long-sword, Earl of Salisbury,
+in the year 1248, under the Banners of St Louis, King of France, against
+the Saracens_[1].
+
+When Louis, King of France, went against the Saracens in 1248, William
+Earl of Salisbury, with the Bishop of Worcester, and other great men of
+the realm of England, accompanied him in the holy warfare[2]. About the
+beginning of October 1249, the French king assaulted and took the city of
+Damietta, which was esteemed the principal strong-hold of the Saracens in
+Egypt; and having provided the place with a sufficient garrison, under
+the Duke of Burgundy, he removed his camp, to penetrate farther eastwards.
+In this army William Earl of Salisbury served, with a chosen band of
+Englishmen under his especial command; but the French entertained a great
+dislike to him and his people, whom they flouted upon all occasions,
+calling them English _tails_[3], and other opprobrious names, insomuch,
+that the King of France had much ado to keep peace between them. This
+quarrel originated from the following circumstance: Not far from
+Alexandria there was a strong castle belonging to the Saracens[4], in
+which they had placed some of their principal ladies, and much treasure;
+which fortress the earl and his English followers had the good fortune to
+take, more by dexterous policy than by open force of arms, through which
+capture he and his people were much enriched; and when the French came to
+the knowledge of this exploit, which had not been previously communicated
+to them, they were much enraged against the English, and could never
+speak well of them afterwards.
+
+Not long after this, the earl got secret intelligence of a rich caravan
+of merchants belonging to the Saracens, who were travelling to a certain
+fair which was to be held near Alexandria, with a multitude of camels,
+asses, and mules, and many carts, all richly laden with silks, precious
+jewels, spices, gold, silver, and other commodities, besides provisions
+and other matters of which the soldiers were then in great want. Without
+giving notice of this to the rest of the Christian army, the earl
+gathered all the English troops, and fell by night upon the caravan,
+killing many of the people, and making himself master of the whole carts
+and baggage cattle with their drivers, which he brought with him to the
+Christian camp, losing only one soldier in the skirmish, and eight of his
+servants, some of whom were only wounded and brought home to be cured.
+When this was known in the camp, the Frenchmen, who had loitered in their
+tents while the earl and his people were engaged in the expedition, came
+forth and forcibly took to themselves the whole of this spoil, finding
+great fault with the earl and the English for leaving the camp without
+orders from the general, contrary to the discipline of war; though the
+earl insisted that he had done nothing but what he would readily justify,
+and that his intentions were to have divided the spoil among the whole
+army. But this being of no avail, and very much displeased at being
+deprived in so cowardly a manner of what he had so adventurously gained,
+he made his complaint to the king; and being successfully opposed there
+by the pride of the Count of Artois, the kings brother, who thwarted his
+claims with disdainful spite, he declared that he would serve no longer
+in their army, and bidding farewell to the king, he and his people broke
+up from the army and marched for Achon[5]. Upon their departure, the
+Count d'Artois said that the French army was well rid of these tailed
+English; which words, spoken in despite, were ill taken by many good men,
+even of their own army. But not long after, when the governor of Cairo,
+who was offended with the Soldan, offered to deliver that place to the
+French king, and even gave him instructions now he might best conduct
+himself to accomplish that enterprize, the king sent a message in all
+haste to the Earl of Salisbury, requesting him to return to the army,
+under promise of redressing all his grievances; on which he came back and
+rejoined the French army.
+
+The king of France now marched towards Cairo, and came to the great river
+Nile, on the other side of which the Soldan had encamped with his army,
+on purpose to dispute the passage. At this time, there was a Saracen in
+the service of the Count of Artois, who had been lately converted to the
+Christian faith, and who offered to point out a shallow ford in the river,
+by which the army might easily cross over. Upon receiving this
+intelligence, Artois and the master of the Knights Templars, with about a
+third of the army, crossed to the other side, and were followed by
+Salisbury and the English. These being all joined, made an assault upon a
+part of the Saracen army which remained in the camp, and overthrew them,
+the Soldan being then at some distance with the greater part of his army.
+
+After this easy victory, Artois was so puffed up with pride and elated by
+success, that he believed nothing could withstand him, and would needs
+advance without waiting for the coming up of the main body of the army
+under the king of France, vainly believing that he was able with the
+power he had to conquer the whole force of the Saracens. The master of
+the Templars, and other experienced officers, endeavoured to dissuade him
+from this rash conduct; advising him rather to return to the main army,
+satisfied with the signal advantage he had already achieved; that thereby
+the whole army of the Christians might act in concert, and be the better
+able to guard against the danger of any ambushes or other stratagems of
+war, that might have been devised for their destruction. They represented
+to him that the horses of this vanguard were already tired, and the
+troops without food; and besides, that their numbers were utterly unable
+to withstand the vastly superior multitude of the enemy; who besides,
+having now obviously to fight for their last stake, the capital of their
+dominions, might be expected to exert their utmost efforts. To this
+salutary counsel, the proud earl arrogantly answered with opprobrious
+taunts; reviling the whole Templars as dastardly cowards and betrayers of
+their country, and even alleged that the Holy Land of the Cross might
+easily be won to Christendom, if it were not for the rebellious spirit of
+the Templars and Hospitallers, and their followers: which, indeed, was a
+common belief among many. To these contumelious remarks, the master of
+the Templars angrily desired him, in his own name and that of his
+followers, to display his ensign when and where he dared, and he should
+find them as ready to follow as he to lead. The Earl of Salisbury now
+remonstrated with Artois, advising him to listen to these experienced
+persons, who were much better acquainted with the country and people than
+he could be; and endeavoured to convince him that their advice was
+discreet and worthy to be followed. He then addressed his discourse to
+the master of the Templars, prudently endeavouring to sooth his anger
+against the arrogance of the Count of Artois. But Artois cut him short,
+exclaiming in anger with many oaths, "Away with these cowardly Englishmen
+with tails; the army would be much better rid of these tailed people;"
+and many other scandalous and disdainful expressions. To this the English
+earl replied, "Well, Earl Robert, wherever you dare set your foot, my
+steps shall go as far as yours; and I believe we shall go this day where
+you shall not dare to come near the tails of our horses."
+
+And it so happened as Earl William said: For Earl Robert of Artois
+persisted to march forward against the Soldan, vainly hoping to win all
+the glory to himself, before the coming up of the main body of the host.
+His first enterprize was ordering an attack on a small castle, or
+fortified village, called Mansor; whence a number of the villagers ran
+out, on seeing the approach of the Christians, making a great outcry,
+which came to the ears of the Soldan, who was much nearer with his army
+than had been supposed. In the mean time, the Christians made an assault
+on Mansor with too little precaution, and were repulsed with considerable
+loss, many of them being slain by large stones, thrown upon them as they
+entered the place; by which the army not only lost a considerable number
+of men, but was much dispirited by this unexpected repulse.
+
+Immediately on the back of this discomfiture, the Soldan came in sight
+with his whole army; and seeing the Christians in this divided state,
+brother separated from brother, joyfully seized the opportunity he had
+long wished for, and inclosing them on all sides, that none might escape,
+attacked them with great fury. In this situation, the Earl of Artois sore
+repented of his headstrong rashness, when it was too late; and, seeing
+Earl William Longespee fighting bravely against the chief brunt of the
+enemy, he called out to him in a cowardly manner to flee, as God fought
+against them. But William bravely answered, "God forbid that my father's
+son should flee from the face of a Saracen." Earl Robert turned out of
+the fight, and fled away, thinking to escape from death or captivity by
+the swiftness of his horse; and taking the river Thafnis[6], sank through
+the weight of his armour, and was drowned. On the flight of Earl Robert,
+the French troops lost heart, and began to give ground: But William
+Longespee, bearing up manfully against the whole force of the enemy,
+stood firm as long as he was able, slaying and wounding many of the
+Saracens. At length, his horse being killed, and his legs maimed, he fell
+to the ground; yet he continued to mangle their legs and feet, till at
+last he was slain with many wounds, being finally stoned to death by the
+Saracens. After his death, the Saracens set upon the remainder of the
+army, which they had surrounded on every side, and destroyed them all, so
+that scarce a single man remained alive. Of the whole, only two templars,
+one hospitaller, and one common soldier escaped, to bring the melancholy
+tidings to the king of France. Thus by the imprudent and foolish rashness
+of Earl Robert, the French troops were utterly discomfited, and the
+valiant English knight overpowered and slain, to the grief of all the
+Christians, and the glory of the Saracens; and, as it afterwards fell out,
+to the entire ruin of the whole French army.
+
+
+[1] Hakluyt, I. 70.
+
+[2] Hakluyt dates this expedition in the 32d year of the reign of Henry
+    III. of England. He mentions, in a former passage, I. p. 59. that the
+    same Earl of Salisbury, accompanied Richard Earl of Cornwall, in the
+    23d year of the same kings reign into Syria against the Saracens, with
+    many other English of note, where they performed good service against
+    the unbelievers, but gives no relation of particulars.--E.
+
+[3] The meaning of this term of reproach does not appear; unless,
+    from some after circumstances, it may have proceeded from their horses
+    having long tails, while those of the French were dockt.--E.
+
+[4] Probably Aboukir.--E.
+
+[5] St John d'Acre.--E.
+
+[6] This is probably meant for that branch of the Nile which
+    they had previously crossed on their way to Mansor.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. XXI.
+
+_Discovery of Madeira_[1].
+
+Although the Era of modern discovery certainly commenced under the
+auspicious direction of Don Henry of Portugal, who first conceived and
+executed the sublime idea of extending the knowledge and commerce of the
+globe, by a judicious series of maritime, expeditions expressly for the
+purpose of discovery; yet as Madeira is said to have been visited, and
+the Canaries were actually discovered and settled before that era, it
+appears necessary to give a previous account of these discoveries, before
+proceeding to the second part of this work.
+
+Several authors have left accounts of the real or pretended original
+discovery of this island of Madeira, all of whom concur in asserting that
+it was first discovered by an Englishman. Juan de Barros, the Livy of
+Portugal, mentions it briefly in the first decade of his Asia. The
+history of this discovery was written in Latin, by Doctor Manoel Clemente,
+and dedicated to Pope Clement V. Manoel Tome composed a Latin poem on the
+subject, which he intitled _Insulana_. Antonio Galvano mentions it in a
+treatise of discoveries, made chiefly by the Spaniards and Portuguese
+previously to the year 1550[2]. Manoel de Faria y Sousa, the illustrious
+commentator of Camoens, cites Galvano in illustration of the fifth stanza
+in the fifth book of the immortal Lusiad, and likewise gives an account
+of this discovery in his Portuguese Asia. But the earliest and most
+complete relation of this discovery was composed by Francisco Alcaforado,
+who was esquire to Don Henry the _infant_ or prince of Portugal, the
+first great promoter of maritime discoveries, and to whom he presented
+his work. No person was more capable of giving an exact account of that
+singular event than Alcaforado, as he was one of those who assisted in
+making the second discovery. His work was first published in Portuguese
+by Don Francisco Manoel, and was afterwards published in French at Paris
+in 1671[3]. From this French edition the following account is extracted,
+because the original Portuguese has not come to our knowledge, neither
+can we say when that was printed; but as the anonymous French translator
+remarked, that "Don Francisco _keeps_ the original MS. with great care,"
+it may be concluded, that the Portuguese impression did not long precede
+the French translation. The French translator acknowledges that he has
+altered the style, which was extremely florid and poetical, and has
+expunged several useless and tedious digressions, etymologies,
+reflections, and comparisons; but declares that he has strictly presented,
+the truth and substance of the history, so as not to vary from it in the
+least, or to omit the smallest material circumstance.
+
+It is remarkable that there is no mention whatever in any of the English
+histories of Machin, Macham, or Marcham, the supposed author of this
+discovery; so that Hakluyt was beholden to Antonio Galvano for the
+imperfect account he gives of that transaction[4]. By the following
+abstract the complete history becomes our own, and we shall be no longer
+strangers to an event which has for several ages, rendered an Englishman
+famous in foreign countries, while wholly unknown in his own. It must not,
+however, be omitted to observe, that some objections may be stated
+against the authenticity of this history, on account of certain
+circumstances which do not quadrate with the time assigned for Machin's
+voyage by the author. From these it is obvious, either that the relation
+given by Alcaforado is not genuine, or that it has been interpolated. How
+far this objection may be admitted, without prejudice to the authority of
+the whole story, must be left to the judgment of our readers; we shall
+only add, that so far as relates to Macham it agrees with the tradition
+of the inhabitants of Madeira.
+
+According to Alcaforada, Juan Gonsalvo Zarco, a gentleman of the
+household of Don Henry, being sent out by that prince upon an expedition
+of discovery to the coast of Africa, made prize, in the year 1420, of a
+Spanish vessel filled with redeemed captives, on their way from Morocco
+to Spain. In this vessel there was one John de Morales, an experienced
+and able pilot, whom he detained as an acceptable present to his master
+Don Henry, and set all the rest at liberty. Morales on being made
+acquainted with the cause of his detention, entered freely into the
+service of the prince, and gave an account to Gonsalvo of the adventures
+of Machin, and the situation and land-marks of the new discovered island,
+all of which he had learnt from certain English captives in the jails of
+Morocco, who had accompanied Macham, or Machin, in his expedition.
+
+The year of this extraordinary adventure is not mentioned by Galvano, who
+only says, that in 1344, Pedro IV. reigning in Arragon, the chronicles of
+his age reported, that about this time the island of Madeira was
+discovered by one Macham, an Englishman. It must be confessed that an
+objection arises against this history which is not easily removed. We are
+told that, immediately after the death of Macham, his companions sailed
+over to Morocco, and that Morales was in prison when they arrived.
+Supposing the discovery by Macham to have been made about 1344, as
+related by Galvano, from the Castilian chronicles, Morales must have been
+no less than seventy-six years a prisoner when redeemed, and when he was
+detained by Gonsalvo in 1420. Herbert places the adventure of Macham in
+1328, which would increase the captivity of Morales to ninety-two years.
+Alcaforado places the event in the reign of Edward III. of England, which
+began in 1327 and ended in 1378; Even supposing it to have happened in
+the last year of Edward, Morales must have remained forty-two years in
+captivity; which is not only highly improbable, but is even contrary to
+the sense of the historian, who supposes but a small space to have
+elapsed between the two events; besides, the records quoted by Galvano
+are said expressly to assert that Macham went himself into Africa, whence
+he was sent to the king of Castile. This last circumstance may have been
+invented by the Spaniards, to give them a better title to the island of
+Madeira: But the former objection remains in full force, and can only be
+obviated by supposing that either Morales advanced a falsehood in
+asserting, that he had the account of this discovery from the English
+themselves, instead of learning it from the other slaves, among whom the
+tradition might have been current for many years after the event; or
+Alcaforado may have mistaken the report of Morales in this particular.
+The following is the substance of the narrative, as given by Alcaforado.
+
+In the glorious reign of Edward III. Robert a Machin, of Macham, a
+gentleman of the second degree of nobility, whose genius was only
+equalled by his gallantry and courage, beheld and loved the beautiful
+Anna d'Arfet[5]. Their attachment was mutual, but the pleasing indulgence
+of ardent hope gratified and betrayed the secret of their passion. The
+pride of the illustrious family of d'Arfet was insensible to the
+happiness of their daughter, and they preferred the indulgence of their
+own ambition to the voice of love. The feudal tyranny of the age was
+friendly to their cruelty, and a royal warrant seemed to justify the
+vanity of her parent. The consolation of an ingenious mind supported
+Machin under confinement, and enabled him to seek after redress without
+yielding to despondency. On his releasement from prison, he learned that
+the beloved cause of his persecution had been forced to marry a nobleman,
+whose name he could not discover, but who had carried her to his castle
+near Bristol. The friends of Machin made his misfortune their own, and
+one of them had the address to get introduced into the service of the
+afflicted Anna under the character of a groom. The prospect of the ocean
+during their rides, suggested or matured the plan of escape and the hope
+of a secure asylum counteracted the imagined dangers of a passage to the
+coast of France. Under pretence of deriving benefit from the sea air, the
+victim of parental ambition was enabled to elude suspicion, and embarked
+without delay, in a vessel procured for the purpose, along with her lover.
+
+In the successful completion of this anxious design, Machin was alike
+insensible to the unfavourable season of the year, and to the portentous
+signs of an approaching storm, which in a calmer moment he would have
+duly observed. The gradual rising of a gale of wind, rendered the
+astonished fugitives sensible of their rashness; and, as the tempest
+continued to augment, the thick darkness of night completed the horrors
+of their situation. In their confusion, the intended port was missed, or
+could not be attained, and their vessel drove at the mercy of the winds
+and waves. In the morning they found themselves in the midst of an
+unknown ocean, without skill to determine their situation, and destitute
+of knowledge or experience to direct their course towards any known land.
+At length, after twelve anxious mornings had dawned without sight of land,
+with the earliest streaks of day an object dimly appeared to their eager
+watchfulness in the distant horizon, and when the grey haze, which had
+alternately filled them with hope and despondency was dissipated by the
+rising sun, the certainty of having discovered land was welcomed by a
+general burst of joy. A great luxuriancy of trees of unknown species,
+was soon observed to overspread the land, whence unknown birds of
+beautiful plumage came off in flocks to the vessel, and gave the
+appearance of a pleasing dream to their unexpected deliverance.
+
+[Illustration: Chart of North Western Africa]
+
+The boat was hoisted out to examine the new found island, and returned
+with a favourable account. Machin and his friends accompanied their
+trembling charge on shore, leaving the mariners to secure the vessel at
+an anchor. The wilderness and rich scenery of the adjacent country
+possessed great charms to these thankful guests, just escaped from
+apparently inevitable destruction. An opening in the extensive woods,
+which was encircled with laurels and other flowering shrubs, presented a
+delightful retreat to the tempest-worn voyagers; a venerable tree, of
+ancient growth, offered its welcome shade on an adjoining eminence, and
+the first moments of liberty were employed in forming a romantic
+residence, with the abundant materials which nature supplied all around.
+The novelty of every object they beheld, induced curiosity to explore
+their new discovery, and they spent three days in wandering about the
+woods, when the survey was interrupted by an alarming hurricane, which
+came on during the night, and rendered them extremely anxious for the
+safety of their companions, who had been left in charge of the vessel.
+The ensuing morning destroyed all prospect of being ever enabled to get
+away from the island; the vessel had broke from her moorings by the
+violence of the storm, and was wrecked on the coast of Morocco, where all
+on board were immediately seized as slaves.
+
+The afflicted Machin found this last calamity too severe for his
+terrified and afflicted companion to endure. Her susceptible mind and
+tender frame, overcome by the severity of the scenes she had gone through,
+and oppressed by consciousness of having deviated from her duty, sunk
+under her afflictive situation. From the moment it was reported that the
+vessel had disappeared, she became dumb with sorrow, and expired after a
+few days of silent despair. This heavy stroke was too much for the
+inconsolable lover to support; though watched over with the utmost
+solicitude by his afflicted friends, all attempts to administer
+consolation were entirely fruitless, and he expired on the fifth day
+after the death of his beloved mistress. With his parting breath, he
+earnestly enjoined his surviving companions, to deposit his body in the
+same grave, under the venerable tree, which they had so recently made for
+the victim of his temerity; and where the altar which had been raised to
+celebrate their deliverance, would now mark their untimely tomb.
+
+Having performed this painful duty, the surviving companions of these
+unfortunate lovers fixed a large wooden cross over the grave, on which
+they carved the inscription which Machin had composed to record their
+melancholy adventures; and added a request, that if any Christians should
+hereafter visit the spot, they might erect a church in the same place,
+and dedicate it to Christ. Having thus accomplished the dictates of
+friendship and humanity, the survivors fitted out the boat, which had
+remained ashore from their first landing, and put to sea with the
+intention of returning if possible to England; but either from want of
+skill, or owing to the currents and unfavourable winds, they likewise
+were driven on the coast of Morocco, and rejoined their former shipmates
+in slavery among the Moors.
+
+This story is reported in a somewhat different manner by Galvano already
+mentioned. According to him, one Macham, an Englishman, fled from his
+country, about the year 1344, with a woman of whom he was enamoured,
+meaning to retire into Spain; but the vessel in which the lovers were
+embarked, was driven by a storm to the island of Madeira, then
+altogether unknown and uninhabited. The port in which Macham took
+shelter is still called Machico. His mistress being sea-sick, Macham
+landed with her and some of the people, and the ship putting to sea,
+deserted them. Oppressed with sickness and grief at seeing herself in
+this hopeless state of exile, the lady died; and Macham, who was
+extremely fond of her, constructed a chapel or hermitage dedicated to
+Jesus the Saviour, in which he deposited her remains, and engraved both
+their names, and the cause of their arrival, on a rude monument which he
+erected to her memory. He afterwards constructed a boat or canoe, which
+he hollowed out from the trunk of a large tree, in which he, and those of
+his companions who had been left on shore along with him, passed over to
+the opposite coast of Africa, without the aid of oars, sails, or rudder.
+He was made prisoner by the Moors, who presented him to their king, by
+whom he was sent to the king of Castile.
+
+Madeira, in the Portuguese language, or Madera in Spanish, signifies
+_wood_; and this island derived its name from the immense quantity of
+thick and tall trees with which it was covered when first discovered. One
+of the two capitanias, or provinces, into which this island is divided,
+is named Machico, as is likewise the principal town of that district,
+supposed to have originated from the traditionary story of the misfortunes
+of Macham; the other capitania, with its principal town, the capital of
+the island, is named Funchal, from _Funcho_, the Portuguese term for
+Fennel, which abounds on the adjoining rocks.
+
+
+[1] Astley, I. 11. and 586. Clarke, Progress of Maritime Discovery, I. 167.
+    Although in our opinion a mere romance, we have inserted this story,
+    because already admitted into other general collections.--E.
+
+[2] This work was printed in 1560, and was translated by Hakluyt: There is
+    an abstract of it in Purchas his Pilgrims, II. 1671, and it will be
+    found at the commencement of the second part of this Collection.--E.
+
+[3] In small duodecimo and large print, under the title of Relation
+    Historique de la Decouverte de l'Isle de Madere: containing 185 pages,
+    besides twelve pages of preface.--Clarke.
+
+[4] Clarke, Progress of Maritime Discovery, I. 167.
+
+[5] In a note, Mr Clarke says the name of this lady has been supposed by
+    some writers to have been Dorset, corrupted by a foreign orthography
+    into D'Orset, and thence into D'Arfet. It may have been D' Arcy.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. XXI.
+
+_Account of the Discovery and Conquest of the Canary Islands_[1].
+
+The island of Nivaria, and others mentioned by Pliny, as known to Juba
+king of Mauritania, were most probably Teneriffe and the other Canary
+Islands; for Pliny notices that the summit of Nivaria was generally
+covered with snow, which is frequently the case with the peak of
+Teneriffe, and from this circumstance the name of Nivaria is obviously
+derived. They appear likewise to have been known in the middle ages to
+the Arabs of Morocco; as the Nubian geographer mentions two islands,
+under the names of Mastahan and Lacos, as among the six fortunate islands
+described by Ptolemy; these probably were Lancerota and Fuertaventura,
+the latter of which may be seen in clear weather from the nearest coast
+of Africa. All knowledge, however, of these islands had ceased in Europe,
+till some time between the years 1326 and 1334, when a French ship
+happened to be driven among them by a storm. Upon this discovery, Don
+Luis de la Cerda, count of Claramonte, whose father, Don Alonzo, had been
+deprived of his right to the inheritance of the crown of Castile,
+procured a grant of these islands, with the title of king, from Pope
+Clement VI., on condition of causing the gospel to be preached to the
+natives[2]. Don Luis equipped a fleet from some of the ports of the
+Spanish kingdom of Arragon, in order to take possession of his new
+kingdom, but the design failed, and he died soon after.
+
+In 1385, some Biscayners and inhabitants of Seville joined in the
+equipment of five ships at Cadiz, in order to make descents for the sake
+of plunder upon the Canary islands, and the adjacent coast of Africa.
+After coasting along the African shore, they sailed westwards, and fell
+in with the island now called Lancerota, where they landed; and after a
+skirmish with the natives, plundered the town, front which they carried
+off a large booty of goat-skins, tallow, and sheep, and 170 of the
+inhabitants, whom they sold into slavery. Among these were Guanareme,
+king of the island, and his wife Tingua-faya. A similar expedition in
+quest of plunder and captives was made to Lancerota from Seville in 1393.
+
+In the year 1400, John de Betancour, a gentleman of Normandy, and Gadifer
+de Sala, a person of considerable fortune, fitted out three small vessels
+from Rochelle in France, containing 200 persons, exclusive of the
+mariners, and made a descent upon Lancerota, where they erected a fort at
+a harbour, to which they gave the name of Rubicon. Leaving there a small
+garrison, they passed over to the island of Fuertaventura; but being
+opposed by the natives, they prudently retired without fighting.
+Betancour afterwards applied to Don Henry III. king of Arragon, for
+assistance to enable him to make a conquest of these islands; who made
+him a grant of them in due form, with the title of king, and supplied him
+with money to defray the expence of an armament to accomplish their
+subjugation. He easily effected the conquest of Lancerota, and divided
+its lands among the French and Spanish adventurers who had assisted him
+in the expedition.
+
+After the death of John de Betancour, his nephew, Mason de Betancour,
+sold the Canary Islands to Don Henry de Guzman, Count of Niebla; who
+afterwards conveyed them to Guillen Paraza, and from whom they fell by
+inheritance to Diego de Herrera, who died in 1485. In 1487, the
+sovereignty was resumed by the crown of Castile, with the title of a
+kingdom[3].
+
+
+[1] Glas. Disc. and Conqu. passim.
+
+[2] The Author of the History of the Canaries, omits the date of this
+    grant. Clement VI. was Pope from 1343 to 1352, between which years the
+    papal grant must have been made.--E.
+
+[3] A more extended account or these islands will be found in Part III. of
+    this work.--E.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+
+PART II.
+
+
+GENERAL VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, CHIEFLY OF DISCOVERY FROM THE ERA OF DON
+HENRY, PRINCE OF PORTUGAL, IN 1412, TO THAT OF GEORGE III. IN 1760.
+
+
+
+
+CHAP. I.
+
+_Summary Deduction of the Discoveries of the World, from their first
+Original, to the year 1555, by Antonio Galvano_[1].
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+This treatise was written in the Portuguese language, by Antonio Galvano,
+who had been governor of Ternate, the chief of the Molucca Islands, and
+was first translated into English by the celebrated Richard Hakluyt, who
+dedicated it to Sir Robert Cecil, Principal Secretary of State to Queen
+Elizabeth. It was afterwards inserted in Osbornes, or the Oxford
+Collection of Voyages and Travels, and forms an appendix to the first
+volume of Clarke's Progress of Maritime Discovery; and from these sources
+the present edition has been carefully prepared. Of Richard Hakluyt, the
+original translator, the following notice is worthy of being preserved.
+"The _great_ Richard Hakluyt was descended from an ancient family at
+Yetton in Herefordshire, and was educated at Westminster School, from
+whence he was elected a student of Christ Church, in the University of
+Oxford, where he took the degrees of Bachelor and Master of Arts.
+Entering into holy orders, he was first made a prebendary of Bristol, and
+afterwards of Westminster, and rector of Witheringset in Suffolk. Besides
+this translation, he illustrated the eight decades of Peter Martyr
+Angelericus _de Novo Orbe_ with curious notes. He also translated from
+the Portuguese, _Virginia_, richly valued by the description of Florida,
+her next neighbour; and wrote notes of certain commodities, in good
+request in the East Indies, Molucca, and China; but what has most
+deservedly perpetuated his name, is his great pains, and judgment, in
+collecting _English Voyages, Navigations, Trafficks, and Discoveries_[2]."
+
+Both from the nature of this treatise on the origin and progress of
+maritime discovery, and from respect to the memory of Hakluyt, the father
+of our English collections of voyages and travels, it has been selected
+for insertion in this place, as an appropriate introduction to the
+_Second Part_ of our arrangement; because its author may be considered as
+almost an original authority for the early discoveries of the Portuguese
+and Spaniards. Although it may be considered in some measure as not
+precisely conformable with our plan, yet one portion of this summary is
+directly in point; and, the whole being curious, and in no respect
+tedious, it is here given entire; changing the antiquated English of
+Hakluyt into modern language. Although said in its title to extend to the
+year 1555, the chronological series of Galvano properly ends in 1545; and
+the only subsequent incident, is a very slight notice of the voyage of
+Sir Hugh Willoughby and Richard Chancellor, towards the White Sea, in
+1553. In the original translation, and in the Oxford collection, this
+treatise is preceded by a dedication from Hakluyt to _Sir Robert Cecil_;
+and another dedication from the Portuguese editor, Francis de Sousa
+Tavares, to Don John, Duke of Aveira; both of which are here omitted, as
+having no directly useful tendency, except so much of the latter as
+refers to the history of Galvano. Besides the present discourse, Galvano
+composed a history of the Molucca Islands, of which he had been governor,
+which work has unfortunately been lost, or at least is unknown in this
+country. He is likewise said to have published at Lisbon in 1555, an
+account of the different routes by which the merchandize of India had
+been conveyed into Europe at different periods.
+
+Antonio Galvano, the author of the following Summary of the Discoveries
+of the World, was a Portuguese gentleman, who was several years governor
+of the Molucca Islands, and performed signal service to his country in
+that honourable station, by dissipating a formidable league, which had
+been entered into by the native princes of these islands, for the
+expulsion of the Portuguese; and, though possessing very inadequate
+resources for the protection of so important a commercial establishment,
+he confirmed and extended the dominion and influence of Portugal in these
+islands. When first appointed to the command in the Moluccas, Galvano
+carried with him a private fortune of 10,000 crusadoes, all of which he
+expended in the public service. Though he added a clear revenue to the
+crown of 500,000 crusadoes, in consequence of his successful, vigilant,
+and pure administration, he was so zealous in patronizing the propagation
+of the Christian religion among the islands belonging to his government,
+that, on his return to Lisbon in 1540, he was reduced to such extreme
+poverty, as to be under the necessity of taking refuge in the _hospital_,
+where he died in 1557.
+
+Francis de Sousa Tavares, the original Portuguese editor of this treatise,
+in a dedication of the work to Don John Duke of Aveira, gives the
+following account of the work, and of its author:
+
+"Antonio Galvano, when on his death-bed, left me this book, along with
+his other papers, by his testament; and, as I am certain he designed that
+it should be presented to your highness, I have thought proper to fulfil
+his intentions in that respect. It was fitting that this treatise should
+be written by a native of Portugal, as it treats of the various ways in
+which the spiceries and other commodities of India were formerly brought
+to our part of the world, and gives an account of all the navigations and
+discoveries of the ancients and moderns, in both of which things the
+Portuguese have laboured above all other nations. In this treatise, and
+in nine or ten other books, concerning India and the Moluccas, this true
+Portuguese described the unfortunate and sorrowful times, before our day,
+in which he had been engaged. When he was appointed to the command of the
+islands and fortresses of the Moluccas, all the kings and chiefs of these
+islands had agreed to make war against our nation, and to drive them out
+of the country. Yet he fought against them all in Tidore, though he had
+only 130 Portuguese soldiers, against their whole united power, and gave
+them a signal overthrow, in which their king, and one Ternate, the
+principal author of the war, were both slain; besides which, he conquered
+their fortresses, and compelled them all to submit to the obedience and
+service of our sovereign. In this war, two great and wonderful events
+took place: the _first_, that all the chiefs and kings of these islands
+united against us, who used ever to be at variance among themselves; and
+_secondly_, that Galvano, with only the ordinary garrison, should obtain
+the victory against so great a combination. It has happened to other
+governors of the Moluccas, with an extraordinary number of European
+troops, and assisted by all the other native lords, to go to war with one
+king only, and to come back with loss; whereas he, with a small and
+inadequate force, successfully waged war against a confederacy of all the
+lords of these islands.
+
+"Three brilliant exploits have been performed in India, beyond all others.
+The capture of Muar by Emanuel Falcon; the winning of Bitam by Peter
+Mascarenas; and this victory obtained by Galvano. Besides this great
+exploit, his father and four brothers were all slain in the kings service;
+and he, being the last of his lineage, carried with him about 10,000
+crusadoes into the Moluccas, all of which he expended in propagating our
+holy faith, and in preserving these valuable islands, using all his power
+and influence to bring all the cloves into the kings coffers, by which he
+added 500,000 crusadoes yearly to the royal revenue. Had he gathered
+cloves on his own account, as other governors of the Moluccas have done,
+he might have come home very rich; but returning poor, and, in the
+simplicity of his nature, expecting to be rewarded for his honest
+services, he was entirely neglected, and had to take refuge in an
+hospital, where he remained seventeen years, till his death, when he was
+2000 crusadoes in debt; partly for demands upon him from India, and
+partly borrowed from his friends to maintain him in the hospital. After
+his death, the cardinal desired me to give his other writings to Damien
+de Goes, promising to content me for them, which otherwise I should not
+have done; yet hitherto I have not received any thing with which to
+execute his will. Yet, for all this, as in the prosperity of his
+victories he made no boast, so, in his adversity, he always preserved an
+unabated spirit. Your grace, therefore, may perceive, that this treatise,
+and his other works, were written under great afflictions; yet was he not
+willing to use the remedy of Zelim, the son of the great Turk Mahomet,
+who took Constantinople, and died in Rome, who used to make himself drunk,
+that he might forget the high estate from which he had fallen. Neither
+would he follow the councils of many of his friends, in withdrawing from
+the kingdom; saying, he had rather resemble Timocles the Athenian, than
+the Roman Coriolanus. For all which, this treatise ought to receive
+favour from your grace, allowing for any oversights of the author, if
+there be any such, as I am unfit to detect or correct then. God prosper
+your grace with long life, and increase of honour."
+
+
+[1] Oxford Collection, II. 353. Clarke, Progr. of Marit. Disc. I. App 1.
+
+[2] Oxford Collection, I. viii.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Epitome of the Ancient and Modern Discoveries of the World, chiefly by
+means of Navigation, from the Flood to the close of the Fifteenth
+Century._
+
+When I first desired to compose an account of the ancient and modern
+discoveries by sea and land, with their true dates and situations, these
+two principal circumstances seemed involved in such difficulty and
+confusion, that I had almost desisted from the attempt. Even in regard to
+the date of the flood, the Hebrews reckon that event to have happened
+1656 years after the creation: while the seventy interpreters make it
+2242; and St Augustine extends the time to 2262 years[1]. In regard to
+geographical situations, likewise, there are many differences; for there
+never sailed ten or an hundred pilots in one fleet, but they made their
+reckonings in almost as many different longitudes. But considering that
+all these difficulties might be surmounted, by just comparison, and the
+exercise of judgment, I at length resolved to persist in my undertaking.
+
+Some allege that the world was fully known in ancient times; for, as it
+was peopled and inhabited, it must have been navigable and frequented;
+and because the ancient people were of longer lives, and had all one law
+and one language, they could not fail to be acquainted with the whole
+world. Others again believe, that though the world might be once
+universally known by mankind, yet, by the wickedness of man, and the want
+of justice among nations, that knowledge has been lost. But as all the
+most important discoveries have been made by sea, and that chiefly in our
+own times, it were desirable to learn who were the first discoverers
+since the flood. Some allege the Greeks, others the Phenicians, while
+others say the Egyptians. The inhabitants of India, on the contrary,
+pretend that they were the first navigators; particularly the Tabencos,
+whom we now call Chinese; and allege in proof of this, that they were
+lords of all the Indies, even to Cape Bona Speranca, and the island of St
+Lawrence[2], which is inhabited by them; as likewise all the coasts of
+the Indian seas, also the Javas, Timores, Celebes, Macassar, the Moluccas,
+Borneo, Mindanao, Lucones, Lequeos, the Japans, and many other islands;
+also the countries of Cochin-China, Laos, Bramas[3], Pegu, Arracones[4],
+till you come quite to Bengala. Besides all these, New Spain, Peru,
+Brazil, the Antilles, and all the adjoining lands, are possessed by the
+same race, as appears by the fashions and manners both of the men and
+women, who have small eyes, flat noses, with other proportions resembling
+the Chinese. And to this day, many of these islands and countries are
+called by such names, as Bato-China, Bocho-China, and the like,
+indicating the countries of, or belonging to China.
+
+It farther appears, that the ark of Noah rested upon the north part of
+the mountains of Armenia, in 40 degrees of latitude or upwards; and that
+Scythia, being a high land, and the first that appeared out of the
+universal deluge, was first peopled. And as the province or country of
+the Tabencos, or Chinese, is one of the chiefest of all Tartary, its
+inhabitants may be considered as the most ancient nation, and the oldest
+navigators. Their seas are calm; and, as lying between the tropics, their
+days and nights are nearly equal, and their seasons differ little in
+temperature; and as no outrageous winds swell their seas into storms,
+navigation among them is safe and easy. Their small barks called
+catamorans have only a large bough of a tree set up in the middle,
+serving as mast and sail; the master steers only with an oar, and the
+passengers sit on poles fastened to the bark.
+
+It is said that the people of China were anciently lords of almost all
+Scythia, and were in use to sail along that coast, which reaches from
+east to west, in seventy degrees of north latitude. Cornelius Nepos says,
+that, in the time when Metellus, the colleague of Afranius, was proconsul
+of Gaul, the king of the Suevi sent to him certain Indians, who came to
+his country in a ship by the north and the flats of Germany[5]. These
+people probably came from China; as in that country, in the latitudes of
+20, 30, and 40 degrees, they have strong and well-fastened ships, which
+can bear the seas and encounter the severity of the northern climate.
+Cambaia also has ships, and its inhabitants are said to have long used
+the seas; but it is not likely they should have gone to Gaul; for they
+only trade to Cairo, and are indeed a people of little trade and less
+clothing.
+
+Those who escaped from the flood kept the hills, not daring for a long
+time to descend into the plains and low countries; and Nimrod, an hundred
+and thirty years afterwards, built the tower of Babel, intending it as a
+refuge in case of any future deluge[6]. Upon the whole, it seems probable
+that the inhabitants of China and the east were the first sailors; though
+others think the inhabitants of the west, particularly of Syria, were the
+first to use the sea[7]. This contest about the antiquity of navigation,
+I leave to the Scythians and Egyptians, who each challenge the honour to
+themselves. But leaving all contested points in this matter, I now apply
+to my proposed deduction, resting only upon what has been recorded in
+authentic histories. Ancient history says that Tubal, in the hundred and
+forty-third year after the flood, came by sea into Spain[8]; whence it
+appears that in these early times navigation was usual from Ethiopia to
+our parts of western Europe. It is also said, that Semiramis invaded the
+country on the river Indus, whence the Indians derive their name, and
+gave battle to king Stabrobates, in which he lost a thousand ships[9]; by
+which it clearly appears there were then many ships in those parts; and
+that the seas were much frequented.
+
+In the six hundred and fiftieth year after the flood, there was a king in
+Spain named Hesperus[10]; and Gonsalvo Fernandez de Oviedo, the
+chronicler of antiquities[11], affirms that he made discoveries by sea as
+far as Cape Verde and the Isle of St Thomas, of which he was prince, and
+that in his time the islands of the West Indies were discovered, and
+called the Hesperides, after his name. He alleges many reasons in proof
+of this assertion, and even says particularly, that these early
+navigators sailed in forty days from Cape Verde to these islands. Others
+say, that the islands of St Thomas and de Principe are the Hesperides,
+and not the Antilles; which is the more probable, as these ancient
+navigators only sailed along the coast, not daring to pass through the
+main ocean, having no compass, nor any means of taking altitudes for
+their guidance. It is not to be denied that many countries, islands,
+capes, isthmuses, and points, the names of which are found in histories,
+are now unknown; because, in course of ages, the force of the waters has
+wasted and consumed them, and has separated countries from each other
+formerly joined, both in Europe, Asia, Africa, New Spain, Peru, and other
+places.
+
+In his dialogue called Timaeus, Plato says there was anciently a great
+country and large islands in the Atlantic, named Atlantides, greater than
+Europe and Africa, and that the kings of these parts were lords of a
+great part of Spain; but that, by the force of great tempests, the sea
+had overflowed the country, leaving nothing but banks of mud and gravel,
+so that no ships could pass that way for long after. It is also recorded
+by Pliny[12], that close by the island of Cadiz, there was a well
+inhabited island called Aphrodisias, towards the Straits of Gibraltar,
+abounding in gardens and orchards; but we have now no knowledge of this
+island, except from the bare mention of it in ancient authors. The Isle
+of Cadiz is said to have been anciently so large as to join the continent
+of Spain. The Acores are held to have been a continuation of the
+mountains of Estrella, which join the sea coast beside the town of Cintra;
+and the Sierra Verde, or Green-mountains, which reach the coast, near the
+city of _Sasin_ in the land of _Cucu_, or the island of Moudim in which
+Algarbe is situated, are supposed to have reached to Porto Santo and
+Madeira. For it is considered as an indubitable fact, that all islands
+derive their roots from the firm land or continent, however distant, as
+otherwise they could not stand firm. Other authors say, that from Spain
+to Ceuta in Barbary, people sometimes travelled on foot on dry land; that
+the islands of Corsica and Sardinia were once joined; that Sicily was
+united with Italy, and the Negropont with Greece[13]. We read also of the
+hulls of ships, iron anchors, and other remnants of shipping, having been
+found on the mountains of Susa, far inland, where there is now no
+appearance of the sea having ever been. Many writers affirm, that in
+India and Malabar, which now abounds in people, the sea once reached the
+foot of the mountains; and that Cape Comorin and the island of Ceylon
+were once united; also that Sumatra once joined with Malacca, by the
+shoals of Caypasia; and not far from thence there is a small island which,
+only a few years ago, was joined to the opposite coast. Ptolemy advances
+the point of Malacca three or four degrees to the south of the line;
+whereas its most southerly point, now called Jentana, is in one degree of
+north latitude, by which people pass daily the straits of Cincapura to
+the coasts of Siam and China; and the island of Aynan is said to have
+formerly joined the land of China; the southern extremity of which
+Ptolomey placed far to the south of the line, though it now only reaches
+to twentieth degree of north latitude.
+
+It may even have been that Malacca and China, as Ptolemy sets forth,
+extended beyond the line to the south; as Malacca might join with the
+land called Jentana, and the islands of Bintam, Banca, and Salistres, and
+the land might be all slime and ouze; likewise China might be united with
+the Lucones, Borneo, Lequeuo, Mindanao, and others. Some are of opinion,
+that Sumatra joined with Java, across what is now the Straits of Sunda;
+and that Java also joined with the islands of Bali, Anjave, Cambava,
+Solor, Hogalcao, Maulva, Vintara, Rosalaguin, and others in that range,
+all of which are so near as to appear continuous, when seen from a small
+distance; and they still are so near together, that in passing through
+the channels which divide them, the boughs of the trees on each side may
+be touched by the hands. It is not long since several of the islands of
+Banda in the east were drowned by the sea overflowing them; and in China,
+about 180 miles of firm land are said to have become a lake. All these
+things are to be considered as coming within the limits of probability,
+especially when we take into account what has been related of similar
+events by Ptolemy and others, but which I here omit to return to my
+subject.
+
+About 800 years after the deluge, the city of Troy was built by the
+Dardanians; and even before that time, spices, drugs, and many other
+kinds of merchandize, which were then more abundant than now, were
+brought from India to Europe, by the Red Sea. Hence, if credit can be
+given to these accounts, we may conclude, that the sea of old was much
+frequented, those of the east bringing their commodities to the haven of
+Arsinoe in the Arabian Gulf, now called Suez[14], in lat. 30 deg. N. and at
+the northern extremity of the Arabian Gulf; from whence the goods were
+carried by caravans, upon camels, asses, and mules, to Cassou, a city on
+the coast of the Levant sea, in lat. 32 deg. N. Allowing seventeen leagues
+and a half to every degree of latitude, these two cities are said to have
+been 35 leagues, or 105[15] miles distant from each other. On account of
+the heat, these caravans, or great companies of carriers, travelled only
+in the night, directing themselves by the stars, and by land-marks fixed
+in the ground for that purpose. But finding this journey attended with
+many inconveniencies, the course was twice altered in search of a more
+commodious route[16]. About nine hundred years after the flood, and
+previous to the destruction of Troy, Egypt was ruled by a king named
+Sesostris, who caused a canal to be cut from the Red Sea to that arm of
+the Nile which flows past the city of Heroum, that ships might pass and
+repass between India and Europe, to avoid the expence and trouble of
+carrying merchandize by land across the isthmus of Suez; and Sesostris
+had large caraks or ships built for this purpose[17]. This enterprize,
+however, did not completely succeed; for, if it had, Africa would have
+been converted into an island, as there are even now only twenty leagues
+or sixty miles of land between the Red Sea and the Mediterranean.
+
+About this time the Grecians gathered a fleet and army, called the
+Argonautic expedition, under the command of Jason and Alceus[18]. Some
+say they sailed from Crete, and others from Greece; but they passed
+through the Propontis and the _sleeve_ of St George into the Euxine,
+where some of the vessels perished, and Jason returned back to Greece.
+Alceus reported that he was driven by a tempest to the Palus Maeotis,
+where he was deserted by all his company; and those who escaped had to
+travel by land to the German ocean, where they procured shipping; and
+sailing past the coasts of Saxony, Friesland, Holland, Flanders, France,
+Spain, and Italy, returned to the Peloponnesus and Greece, after
+discovering a great portion of the coast of Europe.
+
+Strabo, on the authority of Aristonicus the grammarian, says, that king
+Menelaus, after the destruction of Troy, sailed from the Grecian sea to
+the Atlantic, coasted along Africa and Guinea, doubled the Cape Bona
+Speranca, and arrived in India[19]; concerning which voyage many other
+particulars might be collected from the writings of the ancients. This
+Mediterranean Sea was sometimes called the Adriatic, the Aegean, and the
+Herculean Sea; and had other names, according to the lands, coasts, and
+islands, which it skirted, till, running through the Straits of Hercules,
+between Spain and Africa, it communicated with the great Atlantic Ocean.
+Thirteen hundred years after the flood, Solomon caused a navy to be
+constructed at Ezion-geber on the Red Sea, which sailed to Tharsis and
+Ophir, which some believe to have been islands in the East Indies. This
+fleet was three years on its voyage, and on its return brought gold,
+silver, cypress-wood, and other commodities[20]. The islands to which the
+navy of Solomon traded were probably those we now call the Lucones, the
+Lequeos, and China; for we know of few other places whence some of the
+things mentioned as forming their cargoes can be had, or where navigation
+has been so long practised.
+
+Necho, one of the kings of Egypt, was desirous to have joined the Red Sea
+with the Mediterranean, and is said in history to have commanded some
+Phenicians to sail from the Red Sea by the Straits of Mecca, and to
+endeavour to return to Egypt by the Mediterranean[21]. This they
+accomplished, and sailed along the coast of Melinda, Quiloa, and Sofala,
+till they reached the Cape of Good Hope, which they doubled; and,
+continuing their course to the north, they sailed along the coast of
+Guinea all the way to the Mediterranean, and returned to Egypt after two
+years absence, being the first who had circumnavigated Africa.
+
+In the year 590 before the Incarnation, a fleet belonging to Carthaginian
+merchants sailed from Cadiz through the ocean, to the west, in search of
+land[22]. They proceeded so far that they came to the islands now called
+the Antilles, and to New Spain[23]. This is given on the authority of
+Gonzalo Fernandez de Oviedo, in his General History, who says that these
+countries were then discovered; and that Christopher Columbus, by his
+voyages in after times, only acquired more exact knowledge of them, and
+hath left us a more precise notice of their situation, and of the way to
+them. But all those historians who formerly wrote concerning the Antilles,
+as of doubtful and uncertain existence, now plainly allow them to be the
+same with New Spain and the West Indies. In the year 520 before Christ,
+Cambyses, king of Persia, conquered Egypt, and was succeeded by Darius,
+the son of Hystaspes. This latter prince determined upon completing the
+projects of Sesostris and Necho, by digging a canal between the Red Sea
+and the Nile: But, being assured that the Red Sea was higher than the
+Nile, and that its salt water would overflow and ruin the whole land of
+Egypt, he abandoned his purpose, lest that fine province should be
+destroyed by famine and the want of fresh water[24]; for the fresh water
+of the Nile overflows the whole country, and the inhabitants have no
+other water to drink.
+
+It may not be too great a digression from the subject, to say a few words
+concerning Egypt. The natives allege that they have in their country
+certain animals, of which one half of their bodies seem earth, and the
+other like rats, one species of which keeps continually in the water,
+while another species lives on the land. In my opinion, it is these
+animals which break the serpents eggs, of which there are many in the
+Nile, but which serpents are also called crocodiles. It is said, that in
+ancient times these animals were inchanted, so that they could not do
+harm to any one: But since they have been freed from the power of
+inchantment, by the arts and learning of the Egyptians decaying, they
+have done much hurt, by killing people, wild beasts, and cattle, more
+especially those which live in the water and come often on land. Those
+that live continually on the land become strongly venomous[25]. The
+people beyond the city of Cairo used to catch these animals, and even to
+eat them, setting up their heads on the walls of the city. Concerning
+these crocodiles, it is related[26] that they often lie along the shores
+of the river with their mouths wide open; on which occasion, certain
+white birds, little larger than our thrushes, fly into the mouths of the
+crocodiles, and pick out the filth from between his teeth, to the great
+delight of the crocodile; which, however, would surely close his mouth
+and devour the bird, had not nature provided the bird with a sharp sting,
+growing from the top of his head, which pricks the roof of the crocodiles
+mouth, and forces him to gape, so that the bird flies away unhurt. In
+this manner, by means of a succession of these birds, the crocodiles get
+their teeth cleansed. In this same river, there are many beasts
+resembling horses; and upon the land, there are certain birds like our
+cranes, which continually make war upon the serpents, which come thither
+out of Arabia: Which birds, and likewise the rats, which eat the eggs of
+the crocodiles, are held in great reverence and estimation, by the
+Egyptians.
+
+But now, to return to my subject of discoveries. In the year 485 before
+Christ, Xerxes, king of Persia, sent his nephew Sataspis to discover
+India; who sailed from the Mediterranean through the Straits of Hercules,
+and passed the promontory of Africa, which we now call the Cape of Good
+Hope; but, wearying of the length of the voyage, he returned back again,
+as Bartholomew Diaz did in our days[27]. In 443 A. C. Hamilco and Hanno,
+two Carthaginian commanders who governed that part of Spain now called
+Andalusia, sailed from thence with two squadrons. Hamilco, sailing
+towards the north, discovered the coasts of Spain, France, England,
+Flanders, and Germany; and some allege that he sailed to Gothland, and
+even to Thule or Iceland, standing under the Arctic circle, in 64 degrees
+north, and continued his voyage during two years, till he came to that
+northern island, where the day in June continues for twenty-two hours,
+and the nights in December are of a similar length; on account of which
+it is there wonderfully cold. His brother, Hanno, took his course to the
+south, along the coast of Africa and Guinea, and discovered the Fortunate
+Islands, now the Canaries, and the Orcades, Hesperides, and Gorgades, now
+called the Cape de Verde islands. Proceeding onwards, Hanno doubled the
+Cape of Good Hope, and went along the eastern coast of Africa to another
+cape, called Aromaticum, now called Gardafu, and thence to the coast of
+Arabia, and was five years employed in this voyage before his return to
+Spain[28]. Others allege, that Hanno proceeded no farther than Sierra
+Leona, which he colonized, and afterwards discovered as far as the
+equinoctial line; but it would rather appear, from the length of time he
+employed, that he must have accomplished the more extended navigation.
+
+It is reported that the inhabitants of the country at the Cape of Good
+Hope are great witches, and by inchantment bring certain serpents so much
+under command, that they preserve their churches, churchyards, gardens,
+orchards, barns, and cattle, both from wild beasts and thieves. When
+these serpents see any person doing or intending to do harm, they wind
+themselves in such a manner around them as to make them prisoners, and
+then command their young ones to give notice to their masters, that they
+may come and secure the thieves. But if the thieves be numerous, or the
+wild beasts of too much strength, so that the serpents dare not encounter
+them, they go to their masters house, and if it happen to be in the
+night, they give many strokes with their tails, so as to awaken their
+masters, that they may provide for their defence[29].
+
+A certain Italian, named Aloisius Cadamosta, relates, that when he was
+upon the discovery of Guinea, and resided in the house of Bisboral, the
+grandson of king Budomel, he heard one night, when in bed, a great noise
+and many blows given about the house, upon which Bisboral arose and went
+out; and, upon his return, Cadamosta demanded of him where he had been,
+and he answered that he had been with his cobras or snakes, which called
+him[30]. In the Indies there are many snakes, and some of them very full
+of poison; yet the Indians carry them about their necks, and put them in
+their bosoms, and under their arms, without fear or injury; and at
+certain sounds, the snakes will dance, and do many other strange things
+at command.
+
+I was informed by a certain Portuguese, who had been beyond the Cape of
+Good Hope, towards Sofala, Quiloa, and Melinda, that there were certain
+birds in that country, which would come to the negroes on a call, and as
+the negroes moved on through the woods, the birds would do the same from
+tree to tree, till at length they would alight on a tree whence they
+would not remove: And, on examining that tree, the negroes were sure to
+find wax and honey, but knew not whether it grew there naturally or
+not[31]. In the same country, they find much wax and honey in ant-holes,
+made by the ants, but somewhat bitter. In the seas of that coast, there
+are certain fish, known to the fishermen, which commonly swim upright in
+the water, having the faces and breasts of women[32].
+
+In the year 355 before Christ, the Spaniards are said to have gone by sea
+to the flats of India, Arabia, and the adjoining coasts, to which they
+carried various merchandizes in great ships; and sailing to the north-
+west they came to certain flats which are covered by the tide, and left
+bare by the ebb, where they caught many _tunnies_ of great size; which
+fishing turned out to their great profit, as they were very abundant and
+much esteemed[33].
+
+Alexander, who flourished 324 years before Christ, travelled from Europe
+into Asia and Africa, passed through Armenia, Assyria, Persia, and
+Bactria; whence he descended by the mountains of Imaus and the vallies of
+Parapomissus, into India, and prepared a navy on the river Indus, with
+which he passed into the ocean. He there turned by the lands of Gedrosia,
+Caramania, and Persia, to the great city of Babylon, leaving the command
+of his fleet to Onesicratus and Nearchus, who sailed through the straits
+of the Persian Sea and up the river Euphrates, discovering the whole
+coast between the Indus and that river.
+
+After the death of Alexander, Ptolemy became king of Egypt, who by some
+was reputed to have been the bastard son of Philip, the father of
+Alexander: He, imitating the before named kings, Sesostris and Darius,
+caused dig a canal from the branch of the Nile which passed by Pelusium,
+now by the city of Damieta[34]. This canal of Ptolemy was an hundred feet
+broad and thirty feet deep, and extended ten or twelve leagues in length,
+till it came to the _bitter wells_. He meant to have continued it to the
+Red Sea; but desisted on the idea that the Red Sea was three cubits
+higher than the land of Egypt, and would have overflowed all the country,
+to its entire ruin.
+
+Ptolemy Philadelphus, in the year 277 before Christ, changed the
+direction of the Indian traffic. The goods from Europe, by his orders,
+were carried up the Nile from Alexandria to the city of Coptus, and
+conveyed across the desert from thence to the sea-port of Myos-Hormos on
+the Red-sea[35]. To avoid the excessive heat, the caravans travelled only
+in the night, directing their course by the stars; and water being very
+scarce in the desert, they had to carry a sufficient quantity with them
+for the journey. Afterwards, to avoid this trouble, deep wells were dug
+at certain intervals; and in other places large cisterns or reservoirs
+were constructed for the reception of rain water. Still later, in
+consideration of the dangers attending the port of Myos-Hormos, on
+account of flats and islands, Philadelphus sent an army into Troglodytica,
+where he constructed a haven called Berenice, in which the ships engaged
+in the Indian commerce took shelter, as a place of greater security. From
+thence the goods were transported to the city of Coptus, and afterwards
+to Alexandria, which became rich and famous, through its trade with India,
+beyond any other city in the world; insomuch that it is asserted that the
+customs of Alexandria yielded every year to Ptolemy Auletes, the father
+of Cleopatra, seven millions and a half of gold, though the traffic had
+then scarcely subsisted in that direction for twenty years[36]. After the
+reduction of Egypt and Alexandria under the power of the Romans, the
+customs are said to have advanced to double that amount; and the trade
+was so great, that 120 ships used to be sent yearly from Myos-Hormos to
+India. The ships set sail every year from Myos-Hormos about the middle of
+July, and returned back within the year[37]. The merchandize they carried
+amounted to the value of one million two hundred thousand crowns; and the
+returns were an hundred for one; and through this prodigious increase of
+wealth, the matrons and noble ladies of those days in Alexandria, were
+exceedingly profuse in decorating themselves with purple, pearls, and
+precious stones, and in the use of musk, amber, and other rich perfumes
+of various kinds; of all which the historians and other writers of that
+age treat at great length[38].
+
+Pliny[39], on the authority of Cornelius Nepos, says that one Eudoxus,
+flying from Ptolemy Lathyrus, passed by sea through the gulf of Arabia,
+and sailing along the eastern coast of Africa, doubled the cape of Bona
+Speranca arrived by the Atlantic at Cadiz; and it would appear that this
+navigation was as often used in those days as it now is. Caius Caesar,
+the son of Augustus, going into Arabia, found in the Red Sea certain
+pieces of the ships which had gone thither from Spain.
+
+Long after these days it was usual to pass to India by land. This was
+done by the kings of the Sogdians, the princes of Bactria, and other
+famous captains and many merchants, who travelled thither and into
+Scythia by land. Marcus Paulus Venetus writes largely of these countries;
+and though his book at first was reckoned fabulous, yet what he and
+others have reported is now found true, by the experience of travellers,
+and merchants who have since been to the same parts.
+
+It is reported that the Romans sent an army by sea to India, against the
+great khan of Cathaia, 200 years before the Incarnation; which, passing
+through the Straits of Gibraltar, and running to the north-west, found
+ten islands opposite to Cape Finisterre; producing large quantities of
+tin, which perhaps may have been those afterwards called the Cassiterides.
+Being come to 50 degrees of latitude, they found a strait passing to the
+west, through which they arrived in India, and gave battle to the king of
+Cathaia, after which they returned to Rome. Whether this story may appear
+possible or not, true or false, I can only say that I give it as I found
+it written in the histories of these times.
+
+In the year 100 after the incarnation of Christ, the emperor Trajan
+fitted out a fleet on the rivers Tigris and Euphrates, whence he sailed
+to the islands of Zyzara; and passing the straits of Persia, entered
+into the ocean, by which he sailed along the coast to India, till he came
+to the place where Alexander had been. He there took some ships which
+came from Bengal, and learned the state of the country from the mariners.
+But being in years, and weary of the sea, and because he found it
+difficult to procure necessaries for his army, he returned back to
+Assyria[40].
+
+After the Romans had subdued most part of the world, many notable
+discoveries were made. But then came the Goths, Moors, and other
+barbarous nations, who destroyed all A.D. 412, the Goths took the city
+of Rome. Thereafter the Vandals went out of Spain, and conquered Africa.
+In 450, Attila destroyed many cities in Italy, at which time Venice began;
+and in this age the Franks and Vandals entered into France. In 474, the
+empire of Rome was lost, and fell from the Romans to the Goths. In 560,
+the Lombards came into Italy. About this time the sect of the Arians
+prevailed greatly, and Merlin the English prophet flourished. In 611,
+the Mahometan sect sprung up, and the Moresco government, which invaded
+both Africa and Spain. By this it may appear that all the world was in a
+state of war, and all places so very tumultuous, that traffic and
+merchandize ceased, no nation daring to trade with another by sea or
+land; nothing remaining stedfast, neither in kingdoms, signories,
+religions, laws, arts, sciences, or navigation. Even the records and
+writings of these things were burnt and destroyed by the barbarous power
+of the Goths, who proposed to themselves to begin a new world, and to
+root out the memory and knowledge of all other nations.
+
+Those who succeeded in the government of Europe, perceiving the great
+losses of the Christian world by want of traffic and the stoppage of
+navigation, began to devise a way of passing into India, quite different
+from the route of the Nile and the Red Sea, and much longer and more
+costly[41]. The goods of India were brought up the river Indus as far as
+it was navigable. They were then carried by land in caravans through the
+country of Parapomissus into the province of Bactria, and shipped on the
+river Oxus, which falls into the Caspian, and thence across that sea to
+the haven of Citracan, or Astracan, on the river Rha, or Volga. Thence up
+that river, and to the city of Novogrod, in the province of Resan, which
+now belongs to the great duke of Muscovy, in lat. 54 deg. N. The goods were
+carried thence overland to the province of Sarmatia and the river Tanais
+or Don, which is the division between Europe and Asia. Being there loaded
+in barks, they were carried down the stream of that river into the Paulus
+Maeotis to the city of Caffa, anciently called Theodosia, which then
+belonged to the Genoese, who came thither by sea in _galliasses_, or
+great ships, and distributed Indian commodities through Europe.
+
+In the reign of Commodita, emperor of Armenia, a better course was
+provided for this traffic: The goods being transported by land from the
+Caspian, through the country of Hiberia, now Georgia, and thence by the
+Phasis into the Euxine, and to the city of Trebisond, they were thence
+shipped for the various parts of Europe[42]. It is recorded that
+Demetrius Nicanor determined, or actually began, to open a canal of
+above 120 miles in length between the Caspian and Euxine, for the greater
+convenience of the Indian trade. But he was slain by Ptolemy Ceraunos,
+and this famous enterprize fell to nothing[43].
+
+All other ways being lost, by reason of the wars of the Turks, the
+spiceries of the Indian Islands, particularly of Java, Sumatra, and the
+city of Malacca, were carried up the river Ganges, in Bengal, to the city
+of Agra; thence they were carried by land to another city near the Indus,
+named Boghar, where they were discharged, because the city of Cabor, or
+Laor, the principal city of the Mogores, stands too far within the land.
+From thence they were carried to the great city of Samarcand in Bactria,
+in which the merchants of India, Persia, and Turkey met together with
+their several commodities, as cloth of gold, velvets, camblets, scarlet
+and woollen cloths, which were carried to Cathay and the great kingdom of
+China; whence they brought back gold, silver, precious stones, pearls,
+silk, musk, rhubarb, and many other things of great value.
+
+In after times these merchandizes, drugs, and spiceries, were carried in
+ships from India to the Straits of Ormus, and the rivers Euphrates and
+Tigris, and were unladen at the city of Basora; from whence they were
+carried overland to Aleppo, Damascus, and Barutti; and there the Venetian
+galliasses, which transported pilgrims to the Holy Land, came and
+received the goods.
+
+In the year 1153, in the time of the emperor Frederick Barbarossa, it is
+said there came to the city of Lubeck, in Germany, a canoe like a long
+barge, with certain Indians, who were supposed to have come from the
+coast of Baccalaos[44], which is in the same latitude with Lubeck. The
+Germans greatly wondered to see such a boat and strange people, not
+knowing whence they came, nor being able to understand their language,
+especially as there was then no knowledge of their country. Although the
+boat was small in comparison with the seas it had to cross, it is yet
+possible that it might have been conveyed by the winds and waves; for in
+our days the _almadias_ of the negroes, which are very small boats,
+venture to navigate from Quiloa, Mosambique, and Sofala, around the
+Cape of Good Hope, even to the island of St Helena, a very small spot in
+the ocean, at a great distance from land.
+
+In the year 1300 after Christ, the great soldan of Cairo restored the
+trade of spiceries, drugs, and merchandize from India, by the Red Sea; at
+which time they unloaded the goods at the port of Judea[45], and carried
+them to Mecca; whence they were distributed by the Mahometan pilgrims[46],
+so that each prince endeavoured to increase the honour and profit of
+his own country. The soldans translated this trade to their own city of
+Cairo; whence the goods were carried to the countries of Egypt, Lybia,
+Africa, Tunis, Tremessen, Fez, Morocco, and Suz; and some of them were
+carried beyond the mountains of Atlas, to the city of Tombuto, and the
+kingdom of the Jalophos; till afterwards the Portuguese brought the
+Indian trade round the Cape of Good Hope to Lisbon, as we propose to shew
+more at large in a convenient place.
+
+A.D. 1344, Peter IV. reigned in Arragon, and the chronicles of his reign
+report that Don Lewis de Cerda, grandson of Don John de Corda, requested
+his aid to go and conquer the Canary Islands, which had been gifted to
+him by Pope Clement VI. a Frenchman. About this time, too, the island of
+Madeira is said to have been discovered by an Englishman named Macham;
+who, sailing from England into Spain with a lady whom he loved, was
+driven out of his course by a tempest, and arrived in a harbour of that
+island, now called Machico, after his name. The lady being oppressed
+with seasickness, Macham landed with her on the island, accompanied by
+some of his people; but in the mean time the ship weighed anchor and
+stood to sea, leaving them behind. On this the lady died of grief, and
+Macham, who was passionately fond of her, erected a chapel or hermitage
+on the island, which he named the chapel of Jesus, and there deposited
+her remains, engraving both their names and the cause of their coming to
+this place on a monumental stone. After this, he and his companions made
+a boat or canoe out of a large tree, and putting to sea without sails or
+oars, got over to the coast of Africa. The Moors among whom he arrived,
+considering their passage as miraculous, sent him to their king, who
+transmitted both him and his company to the king of Castile.
+
+In 1395, while Henry III. reigned in Castile, in consequence of
+information given by Macham respecting this island, many persons of
+France and Castile were induced to attempt its discovery, and that of the
+Grand Canary. Those who went on this expedition were principally from
+Andalusia, Biscay, and Guipuscoa, who carried thither many men and
+horses; but I know not whether this was done at their own charge, or that
+of the king. But however that might be, these people seem to have been
+the first discoverers of the Canaries; where they took 150 of the
+islanders prisoners. There is some difference among authors respecting
+the time of this discovery, as some affirm that it did not take place
+till the year 1405.
+
+
+[1] August. de Civit. Dic. I. 15. c. 20.
+
+[2] The Cape of Good Hope, and the island of Madagascar--E.
+
+[3] Birmahs
+
+[4] Arracan
+
+[5] Pompon. Mela, I. 3. Plin. I. 2. c. 67.
+
+[6] Joseph: Ant. Jud. I. 1. c. 5.
+
+[7] Justin, I. 1.
+
+[8] Berosus.
+
+[9] Diod. Sic. I. 2. c. 5.
+
+[10] Berosus.
+
+[11] Gons. Fern. I. 2. c. 3. Plin. I. 6. c. 31.
+
+[12] Plin. I. 4. c. 22.
+
+[13] Eratosth. ap. Strab. I. 1. p. 26.
+
+[14] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.
+
+[15] The miles here used are three to the league; but the league of the
+    text is nearly equal to four English miles, and the assumed distance
+    of these two ports 140 of our miles--E.
+
+[16] Strab. I. 17. p. 560.
+
+[17] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.
+
+[18] Diod. Sic. I. 4. c. 4.
+
+[19] Strab. I. 1. p. 26.
+
+[20] Kings, I. 9. Chron. II. 8.
+
+[21] Herodot. I. 4.
+
+[22] Arist. de Mirand.
+
+[23] Gonz. Fern. Ovied. I. 2. c. 3.
+
+[24] Plin. I. 9. c. 58. de Maribus Nili.
+
+[25] Joan. Leo Afric. I. 9. de Nilo.--Our author has got into a strange
+    dilemma, by confounding crocodiles and serpents under one denomination.
+    --E.
+
+[26] Plin. and Leo, ub. cit.
+
+[27] Plin. I. 2. c. 67.
+
+[28] Plin. I. 6. c. 31. This subject will be discussed in the _Fifth_ Part
+    of our work; being much too extensive to admit of elucidation in a
+    note.--E.
+
+[29] Hasty readers will have the justice to give the honour of this story
+    to Galvano.--E.
+
+[30] This story will be found hereafter very differently related by Cada
+    Mosto himself, but with a sufficient spice of the marvellous.--E.
+
+[31] The Honey-guide, or Cuculus Indicator, will be noticed more
+    particularly in the Travels through the Colony of the Cape.--E.
+
+[32] The Philosophers of the _nineteenth_ century have _fortunately_
+    rediscovered the _Mermaid_ in the north of Scotland! Hitherto,
+    wonderful things used to be confined to barbarous regions and ignorant
+    ages.--E.
+
+[33] Arist. de Mirand. Strabo, I. 2. p. 68.
+
+[34] Plin. I. 6. c. 29.
+
+[35] Strabo, I. 17. p. 560, 561.
+
+[36] Strab. I. 17. p. 549.
+
+[37] Plin. I. 6. c. 23.
+
+[38] Id. I. 12. c. 18.
+
+[39] Id. I. 2. c. 67.
+
+[40] Ziphilin. in vit. Traj.
+
+[41] Ramusio, V. f. 372. p. 2
+
+[42] Strabo, I. 11.
+
+[43] Plin. I. 6. c. 11.
+
+[44] Newfoundland?
+
+[45] Jidda.
+
+[46] Leo Afric. Ramus. v. 1. f. 373.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Summary of Portuguese Discoveries, from the Commencement of the
+Fifteenth Century, to the Discovery of America by Columbus_[1].
+
+According to the chronicles of Portugal, John I. went from Lisbon in 1415,
+attended by his sons Don Duarte, or Edward, Don Peter, and Don Henry, and
+other lords and nobles of his realm, into Africa, where he took the great
+city of Ceuta, which was one of the principal causes of extending the
+dominions of Portugal. After their return, Don Henry, the king's
+_third_[2] son, being then in Algarve, and desirous to enlarge the
+kingdom by the discovery of unknown regions, gave directions for
+discovering the coast of Mauritania; for in those days none of the
+Portuguese had ever gone beyond Cape Non, in lat. 29 deg.. N.[3]. For the
+better accomplishment of this purpose, Don Henry prepared a fleet, and
+commanded the officers whom he employed to proceed in making discoveries
+to the south of that cape, which they did; but when they came to another
+cape, named Bajador, none of them dared for a long time to go beyond it,
+at which cowardice the prince was much displeased.
+
+In 1417, in the reign of John II. of Castile, and while his mother the
+lady Catharine was regent of the kingdom, Ruben de Bracamonte, the
+admiral of France, craved a grant of the Canary Islands, and the title of
+king, for his kinsman John de Betancourt; which being conceded, he
+departed from Seville with an armament to attempt the conquest. The
+principal motive of this enterprize was to make a perfect discovery of
+Madeira, of which Macham had before given so much information; yet he
+went to the Canaries, where he carried a friar named Mendo as bishop, who
+had received that dignity from Pope Martin V. He reduced Lancerota,
+Fuerteventura, Gomera, and Ferro; whence he sent into Spain many slaves,
+and considerable quantities of honey, wax, camphire, hides, orchill, figs,
+dragons-blood, and other merchandize, of which he made good profit. This
+armament is said to have likewise discovered Porto Santo. The island
+first occupied by Betancourt was Lancerota, where he built a castle of
+stone for the better defence of the new settlers.
+
+In the year 1418, John Gonzales Zarco, and Tristram Vaz Teixera,
+gentlemen of the household to Don Henry, perceiving the great desire of
+their master to discover new countries, requested and obtained a bark to
+proceed to the coast of Africa; where they were overtaken by a violent
+tempest, and driven into a haven of the island now called Porto Santo,
+where they remained two years. In 1420, they discovered the island of
+Madeira, where they found the chapel, tomb, and stone on which Macham had
+engraved his name. Others write, that a Castilian had informed Don Henry
+of having made the discovery of Porto Santo; and that he sent
+Bartholomew Perestrello, John Gonzales Zarco, and Tristram Vaz Teixera,
+purposely in search of that island, according to the signs and directions
+indicated by the Castilian; and that these persons afterwards discovered
+Madeira in 1420, where they found the memorial and monument left by
+Macham the Englishman.
+
+Betancourt, who begun the conquest of the Canaries, was slain in a war
+with the natives, leaving one Menante his heir; who afterwards sold the
+islands to one Peter Barba of Seville. But others say, that John de
+Betancourt went to France to procure reinforcements, to enable him to
+complete his conquests, and left the command of Lancerota with his
+nephew; who, hearing nothing of his uncle, and being unable to continue
+the contest with the natives, sold the Canaries to Don Henry, for an
+estate in the island of Madeira.
+
+It is related that, in 1424, Don Henry sent a squadron with some land
+forces, under Don Ferdinando de Castro, on purpose to make a conquest of
+these islands; but, being repulsed by the bravery of the natives, de
+Castro prudently desisted from the enterprize and returned home; and
+that Don Henry afterwards resigned his claim to these islands in favour
+of the crown of Castile. The Castilian writers, however, assert that both
+Don Henry and the king of Portugal refused to give up these islands,
+until the dispute was ended by the judgment of Pope Eugenius IV. who
+awarded them to the king of Castile. These islands, anciently called the
+Insulae Fortunatae, or Fortunate Islands, are seven in number, in lat.
+28 deg. N. where the longest day is thirteen hours, and the longest night the
+same. They are 200 leagues distant from the coast of Spain, and 18
+leagues from the coast of Africa. The people were idolaters, and eat raw
+flesh for want of fire. They had no iron, but raised or tilled the ground
+with the horns of oxen and goats, for want of better implements of
+husbandry. Every island spoke a separate language, and many pagan customs
+prevailed among the natives; but now the Christian religion is planted
+among them. The commodities of these islands are wheat, barley, sugar,
+wine, and Canary-birds, which are much esteemed for the sweetness and
+variety of their song. In the island of Ferro they have no water but what
+proceeds in the night from a tree, encompassed by a cloud, whence water
+issues, and serves the whole inhabitants and cattle of the island[4].
+
+In the year 1428, Don Pedro, the king's _eldest_[5] son, who was a great
+traveller, went into England, France, and Germany, and thence into the
+Holy Land and other places, and came home by Italy, through Rome and
+Venice. He is said to have brought a map of the world home with him, in
+which all parts of the earth were described, by which the enterprizes of
+Don Henry for discovery were much assisted. In this map the Straits of
+Magellan are called the _Dragons-tail_, and the Cape of Good Hope the
+_Front of Africa_, and so of the rest[6]. I was informed by Francis de
+Sosa Tavares, that in the year 1528, Don Fernando, the king's eldest son,
+shewed him a map which had been made 120 years before, and was found in
+the study of Alcobaza, which exhibited all the navigation of the East
+Indies, with the cape of Bona Speranca, as in our latter maps; by which
+it appears that there was as much discovered, or more, in ancient times
+as now[7].
+
+Though attended with much trouble and expence, Don Henry was unwearied in
+prosecuting his plan of discoveries. At length Gilianes, one of his
+servants, passed Cape Bojador, a place terrible to all former navigators,
+and brought word that it was by no means so dangerous as had been
+represented, he having landed on its farther side, where he set up a
+wooden cross in memorial of his discovery.
+
+In the year 1433 died John king of Portugal, and was succeeded by his
+eldest son Duarte or Edward. In 1434, Don Henry sent Alphonso Gonzales
+Balduja and Gillianes, who penetrated from Cape Bajador to another cape,
+where they found the country to be inhabited, and went forward to another
+point of land, whence they returned to Portugal. In 1438 king Duarte died,
+and his son Alphonso being young, the kingdom was governed during his
+minority by his uncle Don Pedro. In 1441, Don Henry sent out two ships
+under Tristan and Antonio Gonzales, who took a prize on the coast, and
+sailed to Cape Blanco, or the White Cape in lat. 20 deg. N.[8]. From thence
+they brought home some Moors, from whom Don Henry learned the state of
+the country. Don Henry sent an account of these discoveries to Pope
+Martin, by one Fernan Lopez de Savado; and the Pope granted indulgences
+and everlasting pardon of sins to all who should die in attempting the
+discovery of the land of the infidels. In the year 1443, Don Henry
+commanded Antonio Gonzales to carry back the Moors to their own country,
+where they were ransomed for black Moors with curled hair, or negroes,
+and some gold; owing to which that place is now called Rio de Oro, or the
+Golden River, that thereby the desire of discovery might be the more
+increased. He sent soon afterward one named Nunnez Tristan, who
+discovered the islands of Arguin, who brought more slaves from thence to
+Portugal in 1444. One Lancarote, a groom of Don Henrys chamber, and
+three others, armed certain ships, with which they sailed along the coast
+to the islands of Garze, where they took 200 slaves, which were the first
+that were brought from thence to Portugal.
+
+In 1445, Gonsalvo de Syntra, an esquire belonging to Don Henry, went
+captain of a bark into these parts; and landing on the coast, was taken
+by the natives, with six or seven of his people The place where he was
+cut off got the name of Angra de Gonsalvo de Syntra from him; and this
+was the first loss sustained by the Portuguese in their discoveries. In
+1446, three caravels were sent out under Antonio Gonsales, Diego Aloizio,
+and Gomes Perez; who were ordered to refrain from going to Rio de Oro, to
+carry themselves peaceably to the natives, to traffic with them peaceably,
+and to endeavour to convert as many infidels as possible to Christianity;
+but in this they had no success. In the same year, Dennis Fernandes of
+Lisbon, an esquire to the king, entered upon these discoveries, more to
+acquire fame than for profit. In the course of his voyage he discovered
+the river _Sanaga_ or Senegal, between 15 and 16 degrees of latitude[9];
+and proceeding onwards, discovered Cape Verde, in 14 degrees[10], upon
+which he erected a wooden cross, and then returned, much elated at the
+success of his voyage. In 1447 Nunnez Tristan passed beyond Cape Verde to
+Rio Grande, and went beyond that river to another in twelve degrees[11].
+He was here taken and slain, with eighteen other Portuguese, and the ship
+was brought home in safety by four or five of the crew who escaped the
+hands of the negroes.
+
+In this year 1447, a Portuguese ship, in coming through the Straits of
+Gibraltar, was forced a great way to the westwards by a violent tempest,
+and came to an island having seven cities, the inhabitants of which spoke
+the Portuguese language, and they inquired of our mariners if the Moors
+still infested Spain, whence their ancestors had fled to avoid the
+distresses which occurred subsequent to the death of Don Roderigo, king
+of Spain. The boatswain of this ship brought home some of the sand from
+this island, and sold it to a goldsmith in Lisbon, who procured from it a
+good quantity of gold. Don Pedro, who then governed the realm, being made
+acquainted with this circumstance, caused the whole to be recorded in the
+house of justice[12]. Some think that this island belonged to what is now
+called the Antilles or New Spain; but though their reasons for this
+opinion are good, I omit them here, as not connected with my present
+purpose.
+
+In the year 1449, King Alphonso granted license to his uncle, Don Henry,
+to colonize the Acores, which had been formerly discovered. In the year
+1458, this king went into Africa, where he took the town of Alcacer; and
+in the year 1461, he commanded Signior Mendez to build the castle of
+Arguin, in the island of that name, on the coast of Africa. In the year
+1462, three Genoese gentlemen, of whom Antonio de Noli was the chief, the
+others being his brother and nephew, got permission from Don Henry to
+take possession of the Cape de Verde islands, which some believe to be
+those called Gorgades, Hesperides, and Dorcades, by the ancients. But
+they named them Mayo, Saint Jago, and Saint Philip, because discovered on
+the days of those saints. Some call them the islands of Antonio. In the
+year following, 1463, that excellent prince, Don Henry, died; having
+discovered, by his exertions, the whole coast of Africa, from Cape Non to
+the mountain of Sierra Liona, which is on this side of the line, in lat.
+8 deg. 30' N. where no man had been before.
+
+In 1469, the king of Portugal let out the trade of Guinea, afterwards
+called the Minas, to Fernan Gomez, for five years, at the yearly rent of
+200,000 rees[13]; and under the express condition that he was every year
+to discover 100 leagues farther along the coast of Africa to the south.
+In 1470, this king went into Africa, accompanied by his son Prince John,
+where he took the town of Arzila; and the inhabitants of Tangier having
+fled from fear, he took possession of it also. In the year 1471, John de
+St Aren and John de Scovar, under the orders of Fernan Gomez, continued
+the discovery of the coast of Guinea as far as St George del Mina, in lat.
+5 deg. N. and 2 deg. W. long.; the coast from Cape Verde to Cape Palmas trending
+S.E. after which it goes to the east, with even a small northerly
+inclination for about twelve degrees of longitude. In 1472, one Fernando
+da Poo discovered the island now called after his name, beyond Cape
+Formosa, in lat. 3 deg. 40' N. and about the same time the islands del
+Principe and St Thomas were discovered, the latter of which is situated
+under the equinoctial line. The firm land also was explored at the same
+time, all the way from the kingdom of Benin to Cape St Catherina, in lat.
+1 deg. 40' S. This last discovery was made by Sequetra, a person in the king's
+immediate service. Many suppose that then were these countries and
+islands discovered which had never been before known since the flood.
+
+In the year 1480, the valiant King Don Alphonzo died, and was succeeded
+by his son Don John II. who, in 1481, gave orders to Diego d'Azambuxa to
+construct the castle of St George del Mina, on the African coast. In 1484,
+Diego Caon, a knight belonging to the court, discovered the coast as far
+as the river Congo, on the south side of the line, in seven or eight
+degrees of latitude[14], where he erected a stone pillar, with the royal
+arms and titles of Portugal, with the date of his discovery. He proceeded
+southwards from thence along the coast, all the way to a river near the
+tropic of Capricorn, setting up similar stone pillars in convenient
+places. He afterwards returned to Congo, the king of which country sent
+ambassadors by his ship into Portugal. In the next year, or the year
+following, John Alonzo d'Aveiro brought home from Benin pepper with a
+tail[15], being the first of the kind ever seen in Portugal.
+
+In 1487, King John sent Pedro de Covillan and Alphonzo de Payva, both of
+whom could speak Arabic, to discover India by land. They left Lisbon in
+the month of May, and took shipping in the same year at Naples for the
+island of Rhodes, and lodged there in the hotel of the Knights of St John
+of Jerusalem, belonging to Portugal. From thence they went to Alexandria
+and Cairo, and then along with a caravan of Moors to the haven of Toro.
+There they embarked on the Red Sea, and proceeded to Aden, where they
+separated; de Payva going into Ethiopia, while Covillan proceeded to
+India. Covillan went to the cities of Cananor and Calicut, and thence to
+Goa, where he took shipping for Sofala, on the eastern coast of Africa.
+He thence sailed to Mosambique, and the cities of Quiloa, Mombaza, and
+Melinda, returning back to Aden, where he and Payva had formerly
+separated. Thence he proceeded to Cairo, where he hoped to have rejoined
+his companion; but he here learnt by letter from the king his master,
+that de Payva was dead, and he was farther enjoined by the king to travel
+into the country of Abyssinia[16] He returned therefore, from Cairo to
+Toro, and thence to Aden; and hearing of the fame of Ormuz, he proceeded
+along the coast of Arabia by Cape Razalgate to Ormuz. Returning from the
+Gulf of Persia to the Red Sea, he passed over to the realm of the
+Abyssinians, which is commonly called the kingdom of Presbyter John, or
+Ethiopia, where he was detained till 1520, when the ambassador, Don
+Roderigo de Lima, arrived in that country. This Pedro de Covillan was the
+first of the Portuguese who had ever visited the Indies and the adjacent
+seas and islands.
+
+In the year 1490, the king sent Gonzalo de Sosa to Congo with three ships,
+carrying back with him the ambassador of the king of Congo, who had been
+brought over to Portugal in 1484, by Diego Caon. During his residence in
+Portugal, this ambassador and others of his company had been instructed
+in the Christian religion, and baptized. Gonzalo de Sosa died during the
+outward-bound voyage; and Ruy de Sosa, his nephew, was chosen to the
+command of the expedition in his stead. Arriving in Congo, the king of
+that country received them with much joy, and soon yielded himself and
+the greater part of his subjects to be baptized; to the infinite
+satisfaction of the Portuguese, who by these means converted so many
+infidels from paganism to Christianity.
+
+
+[1] The only quotations used in this Section in the original translation
+    by Hakluyt, are from the Asia of John de Barros, Decade 1. which it
+    has not been deemed necessary to refer to here more particularly.--E.
+
+[2] It is singular that a Portuguese should not be more correct. Henry was
+    the _fifth_ son.--Clarke.
+
+[3] More accurately 28 deg. 40'.--E.
+
+[4] Opportunities will occur hereafter, in particular voyages, to discuss
+    the circumstances of this wonderful tree.
+
+[5] Galvano is again mistaken. Edward or Duarte was the _eldest_ son;
+    Pedro the _third_.--Clarke.
+
+[6] Dr Vincent, in his Periplus, considers this as a copy of the map of
+    Marco Polo, which was exhibited in the church of St Michael de Murano,
+    at Venice.--Clarke.
+
+[7] Even if this were fact, it proves nothing, as the Cape of Good Hope
+    must have been inserted merely by the fancy of the draughtsman.--
+    Clarke.--It may be added, that in 1528, it was no difficult matter to
+    wrong date a forged map, on purpose to detract from the merit of the
+    actual discoverers.--E.
+
+[8] More correctly in lat. 20 deg. 54' N. There is another Cape Blanco in
+    Morocco in lat. 33 deg. 10' N. and this more southerly cape on the great
+    desert is named Branca in our best charts.--E.
+
+[9] The mouth of the Senegal is in lat. 15 deg. 45' N.--E.
+
+[10] More correctly, 14 deg. 45' N.--E.
+
+[11] It is difficult to ascertain these two rivers: The Rio Grande here
+    meant is properly named Gambia. The river in 12 deg. N. may be the
+    Casamansa, the Santa Anna, or the St Dominico: which last is exactly
+    in 12 deg. N. the two others a little farther north, and nearer the Gambia.
+    --E.
+
+[12] This is one of the many palpable and clumsy fables which were
+    advanced to defraud Columbus of the honour of having discovered the
+    new world, and is even more ridiculous, if possible, than the voyages
+    of Zeno, adverted to in our _First_ Part.--E.
+
+[13] Equal to L.138: 17: 9-1/4 d. English money.--Halk.
+
+[14] Only 6 deg. 45' S.--E.
+
+[15] Mr Clarke explains this as _long pepper_; but besides that this by no
+    means answers the descriptive name in the text, long pepper certainly
+    is the production of the East Indies. The article here indicated was
+    probably one of the many species, or varieties of the Capsicum; called
+    Guinea pepper, Cayenne pepper, Bird pepper, and various other names.
+    --E.
+
+[16] In the original this is called the country of Prester or Presbyter
+    John. We have formerly, in the _First_ Part of this work, had occasion
+    to notice the strange idea of a Christian prince and priest, who was
+    supposed to have ruled among the pagan nations of eastern Tartary.
+    Driven from this false notion, by a more thorough knowledge of Asia,
+    the European nations fondly transferred the title of Prester John to
+    the half Christian prince or Negus of the semi-barbarous Abyssinians.
+    --E.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Summary of Discoveries made by the Spaniards and Portuguese, from the Era
+of Columbus, in 1492, to the year 1555_.
+
+In the year 1492, when Don Ferdinand king of Castile[1] was engaged in
+the siege of Granada, he sent _one_ Christopher Columbus, a Genoese, with
+three ships, for the discovery of Nova Spagna. This Columbus had first
+offered his service lot a western discovery to John king of Portugal, who
+refused to employ him. Being sufficiently furnished for his enterprize,
+Columbus set out from the town of Palos on the third of August 1492,
+having with him, as captains and pilots, Martin Alionzo Pinzon, Francis
+Martinez Pinzori, Vincent Yannes Pinzon, and Bartholomew Columbus his
+brother[2] with an hundred and twenty other persons in the three ships.
+Some persons affirm, that this was the first voyage which was ever
+conducted by the observation of latitudes[3]. They took the Canaries in
+their way, whence shaping their course for Cipango, or towards Japan,
+they were much amazed to find the sea all full of weeds, and with great
+fear arrived at the Antilles on the tenth day of October; the first
+island they descried, called Guanahany by the natives, they named San
+Salvador. This island is in 25 deg. N. latitude. After that they found many
+islands, which they called the Princes. The savages of those parts call
+these islands by the name of Lucaios, having indeed several names for
+them, and they stand on the north side of the line, almost under the
+tropic of Cancer. The island of St James, or Jamaica, lies between the
+16th and 17th degrees of northern latitude[4]. Thence they went to the
+island which the natives call Cuba, named Ferdinando by the Spaniards,
+after the king, which is in 22 degrees; from whence they were conducted
+by the Indians to another island called Hayti, named Isabella by the
+Spaniards, in honour of the queen of Castile, and afterwards Hispaniola,
+or Little Spain.
+
+In that island the admirals ship was wrecked, and Columbus caused a fort
+to be constructed of her timbers and planks, in which he left Roderigo de
+Arana with a garrison of thirty-eight men, to learn the language and
+customs of the country. Columbus then returned to Spain, carrying with
+him samples of gold and pearls, and other productions of the country,
+with ten Indians, six of whom died on the voyage; the rest were brought
+to Spain and baptized. On their way home, Columbus touched at the Acores;
+and on the fourth of March 1493, entered the port of Lisbon. This
+discovery gave much discontent to the king of Portugal. Immediately on
+his arrival, Columbus went into Castile, where he informed the king of
+his discoveries and of the dissatisfaction of the king of Portugal. On
+this he and his queen Isabella sent word of the recent discovery to Pope
+Alexander VI, at which information he and all the Italians were much
+astonished, as they marvelled that there should be any land besides what
+had been known to the Romans. Alexander made a grant of all these
+countries to the crowns of Castile and Leon, under condition that they
+should labour to extirpate idolatry, and establish the holy faith of
+Christ among the natives.
+
+On the report of this discovery, so universal a desire of travelling
+arose among the Spaniards, that they were ready as it were to leap into
+the sea, that they might swim if possible to the newly discovered islands.
+After receiving the authority of the Pope, King Ferdinando sent Columbus
+a second time to the newly-discovered country, of which he made him
+admiral, giving him many other honours, and a particular coat of arms,
+having this motto,
+
+  For Castile and for Leon
+  A new world discovered Colon[A].
+
+[A] Gomara, I. 1. c. 15.
+
+Columbus set out on his second voyage to the Antilles on the 25th October
+1493, taking his course from Cadiz, with seventeen ships and fifteen
+hundred men, accompanied by his brothers Bartholomew and Diego Columbus,
+with many other knights, gentlemen of the law, and priests; having
+chalices, crosses, and other rich religious ornaments, and with great
+power and dignity from the Pope. The tenth day after commencing their
+voyage, they reached the Canaries; and from thence, in twenty-five or
+thirty days, they sailed to the Antilles, the first island they saw being
+in 14 deg. N. due west from Cape de Verd in Africa. They called this island
+Deseada[5], or the _desired island_, which is said to be 800 leagues from
+the Canaries. They afterwards discovered many more islands, which they
+called the Virgins, but which are named the Caribbee islands by the
+natives, from a nation of that name, who are bold warriors, and excellent
+marksmen with bows and arrows. They poison their arrows with the juice of
+a certain herb, and whoever is wounded with these is sure to die, biting
+himself like a mad dog. From thence they went to the principal island in
+these parts, named Boriquen by the natives, and St John by the Spaniards;
+and thence to Hispaniola, or Isabella, where they found all the men dead
+whom they had left on returning from the former voyage. Columbus left
+most of his people here to establish a colony, under the command of his
+brothers; and went with two ships to continue his discovery of Cuba and
+Jamaica. All these islands are between 16 and 20 degrees of northern
+latitude[6]. While the admiral was sailing in quest of discoveries, his
+brethren and those who were left in Hispaniola, were much incommoded by
+an insurrection among the savages; and Columbus went back to Spain, to
+give an account of his proceedings to the king and queen.
+
+In January 1494, a congress of ambassadors from Spain and Portugal was
+held at Tordesillas, for the settlement of all disputes between the two
+countries respecting the new discoveries. The plenipotentiaries from
+Spain were Don Henry Henriques, Don John de Cardenas, and the Doctor
+Maldonado; those from Portugal, Ruy de Sosa, his son Don John, and the
+doctor Ayres de Almada. After some conference, these plenipotentiaries
+divided the world between the two crowns, by a meridian line drawn from
+north to south, 300 leagues to the west of the islands of Cape Verd, all
+to the east of this line being appropriated to Portugal, and all to the
+west to Spain; leaving, however, the liberty of navigation equally to
+both[7]. In 1495, John II. King of Portugal, died, and was succeeded by
+his cousin Emanuel.
+
+In the year 1496, a Venetian named John Cabota, or Gabota, went to
+England; and having acquired a knowledge of the new discoveries, and
+perceiving by the globe that the islands of the Antilles were almost in
+the same latitude with his own country, and lay much nearer to England
+than Spain and Portugal, he acquainted Henry VII. with this circumstance,
+and offered his services to make discoveries for the crown of England.
+Henry was much pleased with the proposal, and furnished him with two
+ships and three hundred men, with which he set sail in the spring of that
+year, and sailed west till he came in sight of land, in lat. 45 deg.N. Whence
+he sailed northwards till he came into the latitude of 60 degrees, where
+the day is 18 hours long, and the night is very clear and bright. He
+there found the air very cold, with great islands of ice, and found no
+bottom with a line of 100 fathoms. From thence, finding the land turn
+eastwards, he coasted along it, discovering all the bay and river named
+Deseado[8], to see if it passed on to the other side of the land. Cabot
+afterwards sailed down the coast to the lat. of 38 deg.N. though some people
+allege that he reached Cape Florida, in 25 deg.N.
+
+In the year 1497, Columbus was again sent out on discovery, with six
+ships furnished by the crown of Spain, and two others fitted out at his
+own expence. Sending his brother before, he sailed from Cadiz, taking his
+son Don Diego along with him. It was then reported, that he meant to take
+the island of Madeira, because he distrusted the Frenchmen, and therefore
+sent three ships thither; others say, that his object was for the
+Canaries. However this may be, he went with four ships to the Cape de
+Verd islands, whence he ran along a parallel, finding great rains and
+calms, and the first land he came to in the Antilles was an island in
+nine degrees of north latitude, called Trinidada,[9] which lies close to
+the main land. Here he entered the Gulf of Paria, and came out by the
+Bocca de Dragone, or Dragons-mouth. Holding his course westwards along
+the coast of Paria, he came to the islands called Los Testigos, or the
+Witnesses, beyond which is the island of Cubagua, where there is a great
+fishing for pearl-muscles, and where also there is a well of rock oil.
+Beyond that he came to the Frailes islands, named Roques, Aruba, and
+Curacoa, and other small islands, along the coast of the main land, and
+to the point of land named Cabo de Vela, having discovered 200 leagues of
+coast. He thence crossed over the Caribbean Sea, directly north for
+Hispaniola, passing by the island Beata.
+
+In this same year[10] 1497, on the 20th day of June[11], King Emanuel
+sent a squadron of three ships for India, commanded by one Vasques de
+Gama, having under his command his brother Paulus de Gama and Nicolas
+Coello, as captains of the other two ships, the whole having a complement
+of 120 men. They were accompanied by a fourth ship laden with provisions.
+In fourteen days they reached the island of St Jago, one of the Cape
+Verds, whence they went along the coast beyond the Cape of Good Hope,
+erecting pillars of stone in proper places, as marks of discovery and
+possession, and came to Mosambique in lat. 15 deg. S. After staying only a
+short time there, de Gama went to Mombaza and Melinda, the king of which
+last place gave him pilots, who conducted him to India, in which passage
+he discovered Los Baxos do Padua, or the Flats of Padua. In the month of
+May 1498, de Gama came to anchor before the city of Calicut, _and
+Panama_[12], where they remained till the first day of September, when
+they sailed towards the north, discovering all the coast till they came to
+the island of Angediva, on the western side of India, in 15 deg. N. where they
+came to an anchor in the beginning of October. They remained here till
+February 1499, when they departed on their voyage homewards; coming first
+to Melinda, and so by Mosambique and along the coast to the Cape of Good
+Hope, and by the islands of Cape de Verd, and lastly to the city of Lisbon,
+in September of that year, having been absent on their voyage for twenty-
+six months.
+
+On the 13th of November 1499, Vincent Yannez Pinzon, who had sailed with
+Columbus in his first voyage of discovery, and his nephew Aries Pinzon,
+departed from the port of Palos with four well appointed ships, fitted
+out at their own cost, having a license from the king of Spain to
+prosecute discoveries in the new world, but with express orders not to
+touch anywhere that had been visited by Columbus. Going first to the
+islands of Cape de Verd, they passed the line and stood over towards the
+new world, which they fell in with at Cape St Augustine, in lat. 8 deg. 30' S.
+where they carved on the barks of trees the date of their arrival, and
+the names of the king and queen of Spain. They had several skirmishes
+with the inhabitants of Brazil, but got no advantage. Following the coast
+westwards[13], they entered the river named Maria Tambal, by which time
+they had made above thirty prisoners. The chief places where they touched
+were Cape St Augustine, Cape St Luke, Tierra de los Humos; the rivers of
+Marannon and of the Amazons, and the Rio Dolce, or Sweet river[14], and
+other places along the coast. At last, being come to 10 deg. N. they lost two
+of their ships with their crews, and returned home, after having employed
+ten months and fifteen days in their voyage.
+
+In March 1500, Pedro Alvarez Cabral sailed from Lisbon with thirteen
+ships for India, being ordered not to go near the coast of Africa, that
+he might shorten the voyage. Losing sight of one of his ships, he
+deviated from his course in hopes to rejoin it, and sailed till he
+unexpectedly fell in with the coast of Brazil, where he sent a bark in,
+search of a safe harbour, which they found in 17 deg. S. and called it Puerto
+Seguro. From thence they made sail for the Cape of Good Hope and Melinda,
+whence they crossed over to the river of Cochin, which was not before
+known. Here they loaded with pepper; and on their return Sancho de Thovar
+discovered the city of Sofala, on the eastern coast of Africa.
+
+It is reported, that in the year 1500, one Gaspar Cortereal got a general
+license from King Emanuel to make discoveries in the new world. He fitted
+out two stout ships at his own cost, from the island of Tercera, and
+sailed to that part of the new world which is in 50 deg. N. which has been
+since known by his name, and came home in safety to Lisbon. In a second
+voyage, his own immediate vessel was lost, and the other came home. Upon
+this, his brother Michael Cortereal went to seek him with three ships,
+fitted out at his own charges; and finding many creeks and rivers on the
+coast, the ships divided for the more effectual search, agreeing that
+they should all meet again at an appointed time and place. The other two
+ships did so; but after waiting a reasonable rime for Michael Cortereal,
+it was concluded that he was also lost, on which the other two ships
+returned to Lisbon, and no news was ever afterwards heard of the two
+brothers; but the country where they were lost is still called the land
+of Cortereal[15].
+
+In March 1501, John de Nova sailed from Lisbon with four ships for India.
+In his outward-bound voyage he discovered an island in the Atlantic, in
+lat. 8 deg. S. to which he gave the name of Ascension[16]. On his return from
+India, he fell in with another island in the Atlantic in 17 deg. S. called St
+Helena, which, though very small, is yet of great importance from its
+situation. In the month of May of the same year 1501, three ships were
+sent from Lisbon by King Emanuel, to make a discovery of the coast of
+Brazil, which had been accidentally fallen in with, by Cabral: Passing by
+the Canaries, they stopped for refreshments at the town of Bezequiche in
+the Cape Verds; and passing southwards from thence beyond the line, they
+fell in with Brazil in five degrees of south latitude, at Cape St Roquo,
+and sailed along the coast southwards, till they reckoned themselves to
+have reached 32 deg. S. Finding the weather cold and tempestuous, they turned
+back in the month of April 1502, and got to Lisbon In September of that
+year, having been out fifteen months on their voyage.
+
+In the same year 1502, Alfonso Hojeda went to discover the Terra Firma,
+and followed its coast till he came to the province of Uraba I7. In 1503,
+Roderigo Bastidas of Seville went with two caravels at his own cost, to
+the Antilles, where he first came to the Isla Verde, or the Green island,
+close by Guadaloupe; whence he sailed westwards to Santa Martha and Cape
+do la Vela, and to the Rio Grande or Great river. He afterwards
+discovered the haven of Zamba, the Coradas, Carthagena, the islands of S.
+Bernard de Baru, the Islas de Arenas, Isla Fuerta, and the Point of
+Caribana, at the end of the Gulf of Uraba, where he had sight of the
+Farrallones, close by the river of Darien. From Cape de la Vela to this
+last place, which is in lat. 9 deg. 40' N. is 200 leagues. From thence he
+stood over to Jamaica for refreshments. In Hispaniola he had to lay his
+ships on the ground to repair their bottoms, because a certain species of
+worms had eaten many holes in the planks. In this voyage Bastidas
+procured _four hundred marks_[18] of gold; though the people were very
+warlike, and used poisoned arrows.
+
+In the same year 1502, Columbus entered upon his fourth voyage of
+discovery, with four ships, taking with him his son Don Ferdinando. The
+particular object of this voyage, by command of King Ferdinand, was to look
+out for the strait which was supposed to penetrate across the continent
+of the new world, and by which a route to India by the west was expected
+to be discovered. He sailed by Hispaniola and Jamaica to the river Azua,
+Cape Higueras, the Gamares islands, and to Cape Honduras, which signifies
+the Cape of the Depths. From thence he sailed eastwards to Cape Garcias a
+Dios, and discovered the province and river of Veragua, the Rio Grande,
+and others, which the Indians call Hienra. Thence to the river of
+Crocodiles, now called Rio de Chagres, which rises near the South Sea,
+within four leagues of Panama, and runs into the Caribbean Sea. He went
+next to the Isle of Bastimentos, or of Provisions, and after that to
+Porto Bello; thence to Nombre de Dios and Rio Francisco, and the harbour
+of Retreat. Then to the Gulf of Cabesa Cattiva, the islands of Caperosa
+and Cape Marmora; having discovered two hundred leagues along the coast.
+He thence returned to the island of Cuba, and from that to Jamaica, where
+he laid his ships aground, on account of their bottoms being much eaten
+by the worms.
+
+On the tenth of February 1S02, Don Vasques de Gama, now admiral, sailed
+from Lisbon for India, with nineteen or twenty caravels. On the last day
+of February he reached Cape de Verd, whence he went to Mosambique, and
+was the first who crossed over from thence to India. In this passage he
+discovered the islands of Amirante, in four degrees of south latitude.
+Having taken in a cargo of pepper and drugs, de Gama returned to Lisbon,
+leaving Vincent Sodre to keep the coast of India, with four stout ships.
+These were the first of the Portuguese who navigated the coast of Arabia
+Felix, which is so barren, that the inhabitants are forced to support
+their camels and other cattle on dried fish. The sea on that coast is so
+abundant in fish, that the cats are in use to take them. One Antonio de
+Saldania is reported to have discovered Socotora, formerly named Coradis,
+and the Cape of Guardafu in 1503.
+
+In 1504, Roderigo de Bastidas, formerly mentioned, with the aid of John
+de Ledesma, and others of Seville, fitted out two ships, and taking John
+de Cosa as his pilot, went on discovery to the Terra Firma of America,
+where Carthagena now stands. He is said to have here met with Lewis de la
+Guerra, and they in conjunction landed in the island of Codego, where
+they made prisoners of 600 savages. Going a little farther along the
+coast, they entered the Gulf of Uraba, where they found sand mingled with
+gold, being the first of that kind which was brought to Spain. From
+thence they sailed for St Domingo, loaded with slaves, but almost
+famished for want of victuals, as the natives refused to traffic with
+them for any. In the end of this year Isabella, queen of Castile, died.
+While she lived, no subject of Arragon, Catalonia, Valencia, or any other
+of the provinces, depending on her husband King Ferdinand, was allowed to
+sail to any of the newly-discovered countries; but only her own subjects
+of Castile and Biscay, by whom all these lands were discovered; excepting
+only such of her husbands subjects as might be in a servile capacity to
+her own, or a few that could procure special licenses.
+
+In 1505, on the twenty-fifth of March, Francisco de Almeida, the viceroy
+of India, sailed from Lisbon with a fleet of twenty-two sail. On his way
+to India, he stopped at Quiloa, where he built a fort, appointing Peter
+Fereira to command it. From beyond Melinda he passed over to the island
+of Anguediva, of which he appointed Emanuel Passavia to be captain. He
+built a fort also at Cananor, of which he gave the command to Laurence de
+Brito; and one at Cochin, which was given in charge to Alphonso de
+Noronha. This year likewise, Peter de Anahay built a fort at Sofala, of
+which he was made captain. In the latter end of this year the viceroy
+commanded his son Laurenco to go to the islands of Maldivia. Beating up
+against contrary winds, he arrived at these islands which in ancient
+times were called Traganae[19], but Ytterubenero by the Moors, and by us
+Ceilan. Here he went on shore, and entered into treaty with the people,
+and returned to Cochin. In the middle of this island there is a high rock,
+having the print of a mans foot, said to have been that of Adam when he
+ascended to heaven, which the Indians hold in great reverence.
+
+In 1506, after the death of Isabella, King Philip and Queen Joan came to
+take possession of the crown of Castile, and. King Ferdinand retired into
+his own dominions of Arragon. In that same year Philip died, and
+Ferdinand resumed the government, giving license to all Spaniards to go
+to the new discovered countries; but not allowing the Portuguese to go
+there. In this year, likewise, Christopher Columbus died, in the month of
+May, and was succeeded in his dignities by his son Don Diego.
+
+In March 1506, Tristan de Acunha and Alphonso de Albuquerque went to
+India with fourteen ships, and refreshed by the way at Bezequiche, in the
+Cape de Verd islands. Before reaching the Cape of Good Hope they
+discovered certain islands, in 37 deg. S. which are now called the islands of
+Tristan de Acunha. During this voyage, the fleet was dispersed by a
+tempest, and Alvaro Teliz ran so far that he came to Sumatra, whence he
+returned to Cape Guardafu, having discovered many islands, seas, and
+countries, not known before that time to the Portuguese. At the same time,
+Emanuel Telez de Meneses was driven on the outside of the great island of
+St Lawrence, or Madagascar, and having surveyed its coasts, came to
+Mosambique, where he met with Tristan de Acunha, who was the first
+captain that wintered there. Meneses, having reported that there was
+plenty of ginger, cloves, and silver in Madagascar, was sent back there,
+and traversed a considerable part of the island; but not finding any
+thing of value, returned to Mosambique, whence he went to Melinda, and
+Brava, and thence to Socotora, where he built a fort, of which he
+appointed one Antonio de Noronha to be captain. In 1507, Tristan de
+Acunha returned to Europe, and Alphonso de Albuquerque remained in India
+with five or six ships, to keep the command of the sea. In the course of
+that year or the next, Albuquerque stood over to discover the coast of
+Arabia, which he explored, and doubled the Cape of Rosalgate, which is
+under the tropic of Cancer.
+
+In 1509, Diego Lopez de Sequiera went from Lisbon for India with four
+ships; and stopping at the island of Madagascar was almost a year on his
+voyage. Arriving at Cochin in the month of May, the viceroy gave him
+another ship, in which he went to Malacca in September passing between
+the islands of Nicubar and many others. He went also to Sumatra; to the
+cities of Pedir and Pacem; and all along that coast to the island of
+Puloreira, and the fiats of Capacia; thence he stood over to the city of
+Malacca, in lat. 2 deg. N. where the people took and slew some of his men.
+After this he returned to Cochin, having discovered five hundred leagues
+in this voyage. The island of Sumatra is the first land in which we knew
+of mens flesh being eaten, by certain people in the mountains called
+Bacas, who gild their teeth. In their opinion the flesh of the blacks is
+sweeter than that of the whites. The flesh of the oxen, kine, and hens in
+that country is as black as ink. A people is said to dwell in that
+country, called _Daraqui-Dara_, having tails like sheep[20]. There are
+likewise springs of rock oil or bitumen. In the kingdom of Pedir,
+likewise, there is said to be a river of oil; which is not to be wondered
+at, as we are assured there is also a well of oil in Bactria. It is
+further said that there is a tree in that country, the juice of which is
+a strong poison if it touch a mans blood; but if drank, it is a sovereign
+antidote against poison. They have here also certain gold coins, called
+drachms, brought, as they say, into their country by the Romans[21],
+which seems to have some resemblance to truth, because beyond that
+country there are no gold coins.
+
+In 1508, Alphonso de Hojeda went with the license of King Ferdinand, but
+at his own charges, to conquer the province of Darien, in the Terra Firma
+of the new world. Landing in the country of Uraba, he called it Castilia
+del Oro, or Golden Castile, because of the gold found in the sand along
+its coast. He went first from the city of San Domingo, in Hispaniola,
+with four ships and three hundred soldiers, leaving behind him the
+bachelor Anciso, who afterwards compiled a book of these discoveries. He
+was followed by a fourth ship with provisions and ammunition, and a
+reinforcement of 150 Spaniards. Hojeda landed at Carthagena, where the
+natives took, slew, and devoured seventy of his men, by which his force
+was much weakened. Some time after but in the same year, Diego de Niquesa
+fitted out seven ships in the port of Beata, intending to go to Veragua
+with 800 men; but coming to Carthegana, where he found Hojeda much
+weakened by his losses, they joined their forces, and avenged themselves
+of the natives. In this voyage Niquesa discovered the coast called Nombre
+de Dios, and went into the sound of Darien, on the river Pito, which he
+named Puerto de Misas. Coming to Veragua, Hojeda went on shore with his
+soldiers, and built there the town of Caribana, as a defence against the
+Caribbees; being the first town built by the Spaniards on the continent
+of the new world. He also built another at Nombre de Dios, and called it
+Nuestra Seniora de la Antigua. A town was built at Uraba, in which
+Francis Pisarro was left with the command, who was there much annoyed by
+the natives. They likewise built other towns, the names of which I omit.
+In this enterprize the Spaniards did not meet with the success they
+expected.
+
+In 1509, Don Diego Columbus, the second admiral of New Spain, went to the
+island of Hispaniola with his wife and household; and she, being a noble
+woman, carried with her many ladies of good families, who were there
+married; by which means the Spaniards began to multiply in their new
+colony, and Hispaniola became famous and much frequented. Columbus
+likewise reduced Cuba into order, and took measures for its colonization,
+where he placed one Diego Velasques as his lieutenant, who had
+accompanied his father in his second voyage of discovery.
+
+In April 1511, Alphonso de Albuquerque went to Malacca from Cochin; and
+finding certain Chinese about to return from Malacca into their own
+country, he sent a Portuguese along with them, named Duarte Fernandes,
+with letters for the king of the Mantias, now called Siam. They passed
+through the Straits of Cincapura, and sailed northwards along the coast
+of Patane to the city of Cuy, and thence to Odia, the chief city of the
+kingdom, in 14 deg. N.[22]. The king of this country received Duarte with
+great honour, as he was the first Portuguese who had been in these parts,
+and sent back ambassadors along with him to Albuquerque. They travelled
+overland to the westwards, till they came to Tanacerim, on the Bay of
+Bengal, in 12 deg. N. where they embarked in two ships and sailed to Malacca.
+The inhabitants of Siam, through which they travelled, eat of all kinds
+of beasts, and even of what we repute to be vermin. The people of this
+country are reputed the most virtuous and honest of any in those parts of
+the world, and pride themselves much on their poverty and chastity; yet
+have a strange practice of carrying round bells within their foreskins,
+which is not permitted to the king and priests. They do not rear any
+poultry or pigeons about their houses. The kingdom is 250 leagues in
+length and 80 in breadth[23].
+
+Elephants are so numerous in this country, that on going to war, the king
+is said to carry 30,000 into the field, besides others which are left in
+the several garrisons. This king has great pride in the possession of a
+white elephant, having red eyes, which glare like a flame of fire. In
+this country there is a certain species of small vermin, which attaches
+itself to the trunks of the elephants, to suck their blood, by which many
+elephants die. The skull of this insect[24] is so hard as to be
+impenetrable to a musket shot. They have on their livers the figures of
+men and women, which the natives call Toketa, resembling a mandrake; and
+it is affirmed, that whoever has one of these about him cannot be killed
+by an iron weapon. They have also wild kine in this country, in the heads
+of which certain stones are found, which have the virtue to bring good
+fortune to merchants.
+
+After the return of Duarte Fernandes from Siam, Albuquerque sent a knight
+named Ruy Nunnez de Acunha, as ambassador to the king of the Sequies, the
+country we now call Pegu. He went in a junk of the country, passing Cape
+Rachado, and thence to the city of Pera, on the river Salano, on which
+river are many other villages, where Duarte had been before; and he
+afterwards went by Tanacerim to the city of Martavan, in 15 deg. N. and the
+city of Pegu in 17 deg. N. This was the first Portuguese who travelled in
+that kingdom, and who brought back a good account of the country and
+people.
+
+In the end of 1511, Albuquerque sent three ships to the islands of Banda
+and Molucca, under command of Antonio de Breu and Francis Serrano, with
+an hundred and twenty men. Passing through the Straits of Saban, and
+along the island of Sumatra, and other islands on their left, named the
+Salites, they came to the islands of Palimbang and Lu-Suparam, whence
+they sailed by the noble island of Java, and eastwards between it and the
+island of Madura. In this last island the men are strong and warlike, and
+care little for their lives, even their women going out to war. These
+people are almost continually engaged in war and mutual slaughter, like
+the Mocos, and seem to place their only delight in bloodshed. Beyond Java
+they came to another island called Bali, and afterwards to Avajave,
+Sambaba, Solor, Galao, Malva, Vitara, Rosalanguin, and Arus; whence are
+brought beautiful birds, in much estimation on account of their
+feathers[25]. Beyond these islands they came to numbers of others, lying
+in 7 or 8 degrees of south latitude, all so close together as to appear
+like one entire mainland, and stretching near 500 leagues in length. The
+ancient cosmographers describe all these islands by one general name, the
+_Javos_; but more recent knowledge has found that they have all separate
+names. Beyond these, and more to the north, there are other islands, which
+are inhabited by a whiter people, clothed in shirts, doublets, and
+trowsers, something like the Portuguese dress, and who also have silver
+money. Their magistrates carry red staves in their hands, as badges of
+command, and seem to have some affinity in this respect with the people of
+China. There are other islands in these parts, or which the inhabitants
+are red; and it is reported they are the same people with the Chinese.
+
+De Breu went northwards to the small island of Gumnape or Ternate, from
+the highest part of which flakes or streams like fire fell continually
+into the sea. He went thence to the islands of Burro and Amboyna, and
+came to anchor in the haven of Guliguli, where, in a village near a river,
+they found dead men hanging up in the houses, as the people are cannibals.
+Here they burnt the ship of Serrano, as she was old and rotten; and going
+to a place on the other side of the island, in 8 deg. S. they loaded cloves,
+nutmegs, and mace, in a junk or barque, which Serrano bought. It is said,
+that in an island not far from Banda, there are immense quantities of
+snakes, especially in a cave in the centre of the island. The same is
+said of Formentera, in the Mediterranean, anciently Ophiusa, between
+Majorca and Minorca. On their return from Banda towards Malacca, in 1512,
+Francis Serrano perished with his junk on the flats called Baxos de
+Lucapinho, nine or ten of the Portuguese crew escaping to the island of
+Mindanao, who were sent for by the kings of the Moluccas. These were the
+first of the Portuguese who came to the Islands of Cloves, which are in
+lat. 1 deg. N. and they remained there seven or eight years. Some Portuguese
+and princes of the Moors once endeavoured to go near that part of the
+isle of Ternate which throws out fire, but could not accomplish it. But
+Antonio Galvano accomplished this enterprise, and found a spring so cold
+that he could not bear his hand in the water, nor suffer any of it in his
+mouth, though almost directly under the line.
+
+In these Molucca islands, there are certain men who have spurs on their
+ancles like cocks; and I was told by the king of Tidore, that in the
+islands of Batochina, there are people with tails, who have a lactiferous
+nipple on the scrotum. There are small hens also in these parts, many of
+which are black in the flesh, and lay their eggs, larger than those of
+ducks, in holes above nine feet under ground. They have likewise hogs
+with horns, and excellent talking parrots, which they call _Noris_. There
+is also a river so very hot that it takes off the skin of any living
+creature that bathes in its waters, and yet contains living fish. Their
+crabs are very sweet to eat, yet their claws are so strong that they will
+break the iron of a pickax; and there are small hairy crabs in the sea
+which are rank poison, as whoever eats of them immediately dies. In these
+seas are certain oysters, called _Bras_, having shells of so great size,
+that they might serve as fonts for baptizing children. In these seas
+there are certain living stones, which grow and increase like plants, of
+which excellent lime may be made by burning in the usual manner, when
+taken fresh from the sea; but, if allowed to remain long in the air, it
+loses all its strength, and will not afterwards burn into line. There is
+a tree which bears flowers only at sunset, which fell off immediately
+when blown. There is likewise a certain fruit, whereof if a woman who has
+conceived shall eat, the child by and by moves. There is, farther, a
+certain herb which followeth the sun, and removes after it, which is a
+strange and marvellous thing.
+
+In 1512, while on the voyage from Malacca to Goa, the ship in which
+Albuquerque embarked was lost. Simon de Andrada and a few Portuguese were
+driven among the Maldivia islands, where they remained till they learnt
+the fate of the viceroy. These islands are low, small, and very numerous,
+and are full of palm trees, or _Cocoas_, which are good against all kinds
+of poison.
+
+In this year 1512, John de Solis, a native of Lisbon, and chief pilot to
+King Ferdinand, went from Spain by license to discover the coast of
+Brazil. Following the course of the Pinsons, he went to Cape St Augustine,
+and thence sailed along the whole coast to the harbour of De Lagoa; and
+in lat. 35 deg. S. he discovered a river called Parana-guacu, or the Great
+River, and from signs of silver he gave it the name of Rio de la Plata,
+or the River of Silver. It is even said that he went farther at this time;
+and returning into Spain, gave an account of his discovery to King
+Ferdinand, from whom he demanded and obtained leave to colonize the
+country, and received the appointment of governor. On this he provided
+three ships, and returned to that country in 1515, but was slain by the
+natives. The family of de Solis produced several great discoveries in
+these parts[26].
+
+In the same year 1512, John Ponce de Leon, who had been governor of the
+island of St John in the Antilles, armed two ships, with which he went in
+search of the island of Boyuca, where it was reported there was a spring
+which made old men young again; but after searching for six months he
+could not find it. In 25 deg. N. he discovered a point of the continent upon
+Easter-day, which he called the country of Florida; and because he
+expected the land would yield gold and silver, he begged it from King
+Ferdinand, but died in the discovery of the country, as many had done
+before.
+
+In the year 1513, Vasco Nunnes de Valboa, or Balboa, hearing of the
+_South Seas_, determined to go thither; and being a man of courage,
+though strongly dissuaded by several of his company, he marched on the
+enterprize with 290 men. Leaving Darien on the first of September, and
+taking some Indians along with him as guides, he marched directly across
+the isthmus, sometimes without opposition, and having at other times to
+fight his way. In a certain place called Careca, he found some negroes
+with curled hair, who were captives among the Indians. At length, on the
+25th of the same month of September, being the festival of St Michael, he
+came in sight of the South Sea: He there embarked in a canoe, much
+against the will of _Chiapes_, the cacique of that part of the coast, who
+endeavoured to persuade him that the navigation was very dangerous; but
+he persisted in his design, that he might be the first who had navigated
+this new discovered sea, and came back in safety. He returned thence to
+Darien, bringing with him a good store of gold, silver, and pearls, which
+he had taken during the march; and for this good service, he was much
+honoured and favoured by King Ferdinand.
+
+In February 1513, Alphonsus de Albuquerque went from Goa towards the
+Straits of Mecca with twenty ships, and arriving at the city of Aden,
+battered it with his cannon, and passing the Straits entered the Red Sea,
+and wintered at the island of Camaran. This was the _first_ Portuguese
+captain who gave an account of the Red Sea and the Persian Gulf, which
+are of great importance in regard to trade.
+
+In May 1514, Pedro Arias de Avila was sent out from St Lucar, as governor
+of Castilia del Oro, or the Golden Castile, for so the Spaniards named
+the countries of Darien, Carthagena, and Uraba. He carried with him
+fifteen hundred men and seven ships; and Vasco Nunnes de Balboa, who
+discovered the South Seas, was sent out at the same time as admiral of
+the coasts of that newly discovered sea. In the beginning of the year
+1515, de Avila sent Gaspar Morales with 150 men to the Gulf of St Michael,
+to discover the islands of Tararequi[27], Chiapes, and Tumaccus. A
+cacique, the friend of Balboa, gave him many canoes, or boats made of one
+tree, with which they passed to the Isle of Pearls, where they were at
+first resisted; but Chiapes and Tumaccus pacified the cacique of that
+island, who submitted himself, and received baptism, taking the name of
+the governor, Pedro Arias, and presented Morales with a basket of pearls
+weighing 110 pounds, some of which were as large as hazel nuts, weighing
+20, 25, 26, and even 31 carats, each of four grains; and one of these
+pearls was sold for 1200 ducats. In March 1515, de Avila sent Gonsalva de
+Badajos, with 80 soldiers, to discover new lands, who went to Nombre de
+Dios, where he was joined by Lewis de Mercado with a reinforcement of 50
+men. They resolved to proceed to the south, as the richest country; and
+taking some Indians as guides, they found some slaves along the coast
+marked with the irons used by the Portuguese. They marched a considerable
+way through the country with much difficulty, but made a considerable
+booty in gold, and took forty serviceable slaves. But a cacique, named
+Pariza, attacked them and slew or took most of the party. After this the
+governor sent out his son, John Arias de Avila, to be revenged and to
+explore the country. This party went westwards to Cape de Guerra, in
+little more than 6 deg. N. and thence to Punta de Borica, and to Cape Blanco,
+in 8 deg. 30' N. having, as they affirm, discovered 250 leagues; and besides
+this they founded the city of Panama.
+
+In the month of May 1515, Alphonsus de Albuquerque, the Portuguese
+viceroy of India, sent Fernando Gomes de Limos from Ormus, as ambassador
+to the Xec or Shah Ismael, king of Persia; and it is said they travelled
+300 leagues through a country as pleasant as France. This Xec, or Shah
+Ismael, went much a-hunting, and was fond of trout fishing, which are
+abundant in the rivers of his kingdom. The women of Persia are the most
+beautiful in the world; insomuch that Alexander the Great used to call
+them the _golden-eyed women_. In this year died the viceroy Alphonsus de
+Albuquerque, who was succeeded by Lopez Suares.
+
+In 1516, Fernando Perez de Andrada was commanded by the king of Portugal
+to pass to the great kingdom of China and likewise to Bengala, with a
+dispatch to John Coelo, who was the first Portuguese who drank of the
+waters of the Ganges. In April 1517, Andrada took in a loading of pepper
+at Cochin, as the principal merchandize for sale in China, for which
+country he sailed with eight ships, four Portuguese and four Malayans. On
+his arrival in China, finding he could not be allowed to land without an
+embassy, he dispatched Thomas Perez, with instructions for that purpose,
+from the city of Canton, where they came to anchor. The embassy travelled
+400 leagues by land to the city of Pekin, where the king resided; for
+China is the largest kingdom in the world. From Sailana in the south,
+which is in 20 deg. N. it reaches to the latitude almost of 50 deg. N. which must
+be 500 leagues in length, and it is said to be 300 leagues in breadth[28].
+Fernando Perez was fourteen months in the isle of Veniaga, endeavouring
+to acquire as much knowledge as he could of the country; and although one
+Raphael Perestrello had formerly been there, in a junk belonging to some
+merchants of Malacca, yet Perez certainly deserves the merit of this
+discovery; as well because he acted by the command of the king his master,
+as in discovering so much by land by means of Thomas Perez, and by sea
+through George Mascarenhas, who sailed to the city of Foquiam, in 24 deg. N.
+
+In the year 1517, in which Charles, afterwards emperor, came into Spain,
+Francis Fernandes de Cordova, Christopher Morantes, and Lopez Ochoa,
+armed three ships from Cuba, at their own expence, having also with them
+a barque belonging to the governor Diego Velasques, with which they came
+to land in Jucutan, in 20 deg. N. at a place which they called Punta de las
+Duennas, which was the first place in which temples and houses of stone
+and lime had been seen in the new world. The people here, who were better
+clothed than in any other place, had crosses which they worshipped, and
+set upon the tombs of their dead, whence it appeared as if they had
+formerly been in the faith of Christ; and some suppose that this had been
+the situation of the _seven cities_. In this expedition they were upon
+the north coast of Jucutan, being the first discovery of New Spain, or
+Mexico; and they returned thence to Cuba with some samples of gold, and
+some prisoners.
+
+In the year 1518[29], Lopez Suares commanded Don John de Silveira to go
+and make peace with the Maldive islands, which he did accordingly. From
+thence Silveira went to the city of Chatigam, or Chittigong, on one of
+the mouths of the Ganges, under the tropic of Cancer; for it is to be
+noted, that this river, and the Indus, which lies 100 leagues beyond Diu,
+and the river of Canton in China, all fall into the sea under one
+parallel of latitude. Although, before this period, Fernando Perez had
+been commanded to sail to Bengal, yet Silveira must be looked upon as the
+actual discoverer of that country; for he went as captain-general, and
+remained there long, making himself acquainted with the manners of the
+people, and the commodities of the country.
+
+In the same year 1518[30], Diego Velasquez, governor of the island of
+Cuba, dispatched his nephew, John de Grisalva, on the first of May, with
+four ships and two hundred soldiers, to discover Jucutan. On the 3d of
+May, he fell in with the island of Cozumel, in 19 deg. north latitude, which
+he named Santa Cruz, because discovered on the 3d of May, being the
+anniversary of the holy cross. Grisalva coasted along the land, on the
+west side of the bay of Honduras, and came to an island, which he named
+Ascension, because discovered on Ascension day. They went unto the end of
+that island, in 16 deg. of latitude, whence they came back, finding no
+passage[31], and proceeded to a river in lat. 17 deg. N. which they called
+the river of Grisalva. They were boldly opposed by the people on this
+coast; yet they brought thence some gold, silver, and feathers, and
+returned to Cuba. In the same year, Francis Garay fitted out three ships
+from Jamaica at his own expence, and went to Cape Florida, in lat. 25 deg. N.
+which seemed a most pleasant island; and thinking it better to people
+islands than the firm land, because more easily conquered and kept under
+subjection, he went on land; but the inhabitants of Florida killed a
+great many of his people, and he was forced to re-embark and go away.
+Sailing from thence he came to the river of Panuco, 500 leagues from Cape
+Florida, sailing all the way along the coast, and endeavouring to land in
+various places, but the natives repulsed him in every place. Many of his
+people were killed and eaten by the savages in Chila, the natives hanging
+up their skins in the temples of their gods, as a memorial of their own
+valour. Yet Garay visited this place next year, as he had seen some
+indications of gold and silver, and even applied to the emperor to be
+appointed governor of the coast he had discovered. In February 1519[32],
+Fernando Cortez sailed from Cuba for the country now called New Spain,
+with eleven ships and 550 Spaniards. He landed first in the island of
+Cozumel, where he immediately destroyed all the idols, and planted
+crosses and images of the Virgin on all the altars. From thence he went
+to the Cabo de las Duennas, on the peninsula of Yucatan, and thence to
+the river of Tabasco, where he attacked a city called Potoncion. This
+place was surrounded with wood; the houses were built of stone and lime,
+and roofed with tiles, and the people resisted the assailants manfully;
+but St James appeared on horseback to the assistance of the Spaniards,
+and they took the place. This, as the first town subdued by them on the
+continent, they named Vittoria. From thence they went to a place named St
+Juan de Vilhua, said to be 60 or 70 leagues from Mexico, where one
+Tendilli was governor for King Mutecuma. Though the Spaniards and he
+could not understand each other, yet Tendilli gave them good
+entertainment. Cortes had twenty women along with his expedition, one of
+whom, named Marine, was born in the country of the Indians, and was the
+first native of New Spain who received baptism. She and Anguilar served
+as interpreters between Cortes and the natives. Tendilli sent immediate
+intelligence to Mutecuma, that there had arrived in his country a bearded
+people, for so they called the Castilians. On the reception of this news,
+Mutecuma was greatly troubled, for his gods, or devils rather, had
+revealed that a people of the description of these Spaniards was to
+overthrow his law and dominion, and to become lords of the country;
+wherefore Mutecuma sent gifts to the value of twenty thousand ducats to
+Cortes, but refused any interview.
+
+As the ships could not ride in safety at St Juan de Vilhua, Cortes sent
+Francis de Montejo, and the pilot Antonio Alaminos, in two brigantines,
+to look out for a safe anchorage. They went to Panuco, in lat. 23 deg. N.
+whence they came back to Culvacan as a safer harbour. But Cortes went by
+land westwards to a city named Zempoallan, where he was well received.
+From thence he went to Chiavitztlan, with the lord of which town, and of
+all the surrounding country, he entered into a league against Mutecuma.
+On the arrival of his ships at the appointed haven, he went there and
+built a town, which he named _Villa rica de la Vera Cruz_. From thence he
+sent a vessel to Spain with presents, and a letter to the Emperor Charles
+V. giving an account of his proceedings, and of his determination to
+visit Mutecuma, and soliciting a commission as governor of the
+country[33].
+
+Before proceeding on his march to Mexico, Cortes destroyed all his ships,
+lest his men might mutiny, as they seemed disposed; and leaving 150
+Spaniards in Vera Cruz, with as many Indians to serve them, he began his
+march. Going first to Zempoallan, he learnt that Francis Garay was on the
+coast with four ships, and he contrived to inveigle nine of his men, from
+whom he understood that Garay, who had been in Florida, was now at the
+river Panuco, where he had got some gold, and meant to remain and build a
+town, now called Almeria. Cortes destroyed the idols of Zempoallan, and
+overthrew the tombs of their kings, whom the people worshipped as gods,
+and exhorted them to worship the true God. He set out from Zempoallan for
+Mexico on the 16th of August 1519, and after three days march came to the
+city of Zalapan, and thence to another named Sicuchimatl; at both of
+which places he was well received, and was offered to be conducted to
+Mexico, such being the orders of Mutecuma. Going from thence he ascended
+a hill three leagues high, on which vines were seen growing; and in
+another place he saw above a thousand load of wood ready cut. Beyond this
+he passed a plain country, which he named Nombre de Dios. At the foot of
+this mountain, he rested his troops at a place called Teuhixuacan; whence,
+through a desert country, he came to another mountain, which was covered
+with snow and excessively cold, and where the troops rested in a town
+named Zacotlan. Marching thus from town to town, he arrived at a
+territory called Tlaxcallan, which was at war with Mutecuma; and as the
+people were valiant, they fought against Cortes; but at length they
+agreed, and formed a league with him against the Mexicans.
+
+Thus, from country to country, he came at length within sight of Mexico;
+and Mutecuma, being afraid, received him kindly, giving him and all his
+people lodgings in the capital, and all things necessary. After a time,
+fearing to be slain, Cortes made Mutecuma prisoner, and brought him to
+his own quarters, keeping him under a secure guard. Cortes inquired at
+Mutecuma the extent of his dominions, where the mines of gold and silver
+were, and the number of kings who dwelt in the land. And joining eight
+intelligent Spaniards with an equal number of Indians, he sent them, in
+four companies, to travel into four separate countries, Zucolla,
+Malinaltepec, Tenich, and Tututepec. The messengers to Zucolla had 80
+leagues to travel, and those who went to Malinaltepec 70; both of which
+provinces were under subjection to Mutecuma: they found both of these
+countries fertile and well peopled, and they brought back samples of gold,
+which the natives found in the rivers. The country of Tenich was at war
+with Mutecuma, and would not admit the Mexicans into their country; but
+they sent ambassadors to Cortes with presents, offering him their amity,
+at which Mutecuma was much displeased. Those who went to Tututepec, near
+the South Sea, brought back samples of gold, and praised the pleasantness
+of the country; reporting that there were many good harbours on the coast,
+and they presented to Cortes a beautiful cloth of cotton, on which the
+coast, with all its harbours and creeks, was distinctly represented. But
+at this time, by the coming of Pamphilus de Narvaez, the whole kingdom of
+Mexico was thrown into confusion.
+
+On the 10th August 1519, Fernando de Magellanes went from Seville with
+five ships, on a voyage for the islands of, Malacca[34]. Going along the
+coast of Brazil, he came to the Rio Plata, which had been previously
+discovered by the Spaniards. Thence prosecuting his voyage of discovery,
+he came to Port St Julians, in lat. 49 deg. S. where he lost one of his ships.
+With the remaining four he came to the straits named after himself, in
+52 deg. 80' S. and wintered in that place, where he and his people endured
+much distress from snow and ice, and extreme cold. They found the people
+of the country of extraordinary stature and great strength, insomuch that
+they took men by the legs, and rent them asunder as easily as one of us
+could tear a hen in two. These people, named _Pataganes_, but called
+_Morcas_ by the Brazilians, live on fruits and by the produce of the
+chase. In the beginning of September of the following year, 1520, the
+weather became somewhat temperate, and leaving Port St Julian, Magellanes
+went to the straits which now bear his name; whence one of the ships
+returned to Spain, of which Stephen de Porto, a Portuguese, was captain
+and pilot. The other three passed through into a vast sea called the
+_Pacific_; where they found no inhabited land till they arrived in lat.
+13 deg. N. when they came to certain islands named _Los Jardines_. They
+sailed thence to the archipelago of St Lazarus, where, in an island named
+_Matan_, Magellanes was slain and his ship burnt. The remaining two ships
+went to Borneo, and thence to the Moluccas, leaving many others
+discovered, which I do not mention, because I have not seen any exact
+account of this voyage[35].
+
+About this time Pope Leo X. sent Paulus Centurio on an embassy to the
+great duke of Muscovy, requiring him to send an army along the coast of
+Tartary into India; and the duke was almost persuaded to have made the
+attempt, if certain inconveniencies had not hindered[36].
+
+In February 1520, Diego Lopez de Sequeira, governor of India, sailed by
+the strait of Mecca[37], carrying with him the ambassador of Prester John
+and Roderigo de Lima, who was sent ambassador to that prince. They came
+to the island of Macua or Massoua, on the African shore of the Red Sea,
+in lat. 17 deg. N. where the ambassadors and their Portuguese attendants were
+set on shore. Peter de Covillan had been sent there formerly by John II.
+of Portugal; but the best account of that country was furnished by
+Francis Alvarez.
+
+In this year 1520, the licentiate Lucas Vasques de Aillon, and others of
+St Domingo, sent two ships to procure slaves at the Lucayos or Bahama
+islands; but finding none there, they passed on along the continent,
+beyond Florida, to certain countries called Chicora and Gualdape, and to
+the river Jordan and Cape St Helena, in lat. 32 deg. N.[38]. The Spaniards
+landed here, and were hospitably received by the natives, who furnished
+them with every thing they needed: but, having inveigled many of the
+unsuspecting natives on board their ships, they carried them away for
+slaves. In their way back to St Domingo, one of these vessels was lost,
+and the other was in great danger. On learning the news of this discovery,
+the licentiate Aillon made application to the emperor for the government
+of that country, where he expected to find much wealth, and received the
+appointment.
+
+About this time, learning the success of Cortes in Mexico, and that he
+had applied to the emperor for the commission of governor, Diego
+Velasques, governor of Cuba, who considered that it ought to belong to
+him, fitted out an armament of eighteen ships, under the command of
+Pamphilus de Narvaez, already mentioned, with a thousand men and eighty
+horses, whom he sent to Mexico in order to supersede Cortes. Landing in
+the neighbourhood of Vera Cruz, he sent an order to the garrison to
+receive him as governor; but they made his messenger prisoner, and sent
+him to Cortes, then at Mexico. On this Cortes wrote to Narvaez, desiring
+him not to raise any disturbance in the country, and offering to submit
+to his authority if he held a commission from the emperor. But Narvaez
+corrupted the people of the country; upon which Cortes went from Mexico,
+and took Narvaez prisoner in the town of Zempoallan, putting out one of
+his eyes. After this the soldiers of Narvaez submitted to Cortes; who
+detached two hundred soldiers to the river of Garay or Panuco, and a
+similar detachment under John Vasquez de Leon to Cosualco. He sent
+likewise a messenger to Mexico with an account of his victory; but the
+natives, having risen in rebellion, killed his messenger.
+
+Cortes now set forwards on his return to Mexico, with one thousand foot
+soldiers and two thousand horsemen, and found Peter de Alvarado and the
+garrison he had left in Mexico in charge of Mutecuma, in safety. But the
+Mexicans continued their insurrection, and on one occasion Mutecuma was
+killed by a stone thrown by one of his own subjects. They then elected
+another king, and the Spaniards were forced to evacuate the city with
+great difficulty and danger. Driven out of Mexico, and having only 504
+footmen and 40 horse remaining, Cortes retired with much difficulty to
+Tlaxcallan, where he was well received. He here mustered a force of 900
+Spanish infantry and 80 cavalry, and gathered 200,000 Indians among the
+friends and allies whom he had secured, enemies of the Mexicans, and
+marched back to Mexico, which he took in August 1521[39].
+
+In October 1521, Cortes sent 200 foot and 35 horse, with a number of his
+Indian allies, under the command of Gonsalo de Sandoval, against
+Tochtepec and Coazacoalco, which had rebelled, and which Sandoval reduced
+to obedience. To retain this country under subjection, he built a town
+called _Medelin_, 120 leagues from Mexico, and another named _Santo
+Spirito_, on a river four leagues from the sea[40]. In this year 1521,
+died Emanuel, king of Portugal, and was succeeded by his son, John III.
+
+In this same year, one of Magellan's ships sailed from Malacca with a
+loading of cloves. They victualled at the island of Burro, and went from
+thence to Timor, in lat. 11 deg. S.[41]. Beyond this island, about 100
+leagues, they came to other islands, all inhabited, one of which was
+called _Eude_. Passing on the outside of Sumatra, they found no land till
+they arrived at the Cape of Good Hope, where they took in wood and water;
+and sailing thence by the islands of Cabo Verde, they arrived at Seville,
+where they were received with great honour, both on account of their
+valuable cargo of cloves, and because they had circumnavigated the whole
+world[42].
+
+In January 1522, Gil Gonzales fitted out four ships from Tararequi, on
+the South Sea, intending to discover the coast of Nicaragua, and
+especially to search for a strait or passage, which was said to
+communicate between the South and North Seas. Sailing along the coast, he
+came to a harbour which he named St Vincent, where he landed with 100
+Spaniards, some of whom had horses, and penetrated 200 leagues inland,
+whence he brought back to the value of 200 pesoes in gold. On his return
+to the harbour of St Vincent, he found his pilot, Andrew Nigno, who had
+been to Tecoantepec, in lat. 16 deg. N. and had sailed 300 leagues. From
+thence Gonzales returned to Panama, and so overland to Hispaniola[43].
+
+In April 1522, the Trinity, commanded by Gonzala Gomez de Espinosa,
+another of the ships of Magellan, sailed from Tidore for New Spain. And,
+as the wind was scanty, they steered towards the N. E. in lat. 16 deg. N.
+where they found two islands, which they named the Islands of St John. In
+lat. 20 deg. N. they came to another island, which they called _la Griega_,
+where some of the simple natives came on board, whom they kept to shew in
+New Spain. Continuing their course to the N. E. for four months, they
+came into lat. 42 deg. N. where they saw numbers of seals, and tunnies; and
+the climate appeared to them so cold and inhospitable, that partly on
+that account, and partly owing to contrary winds, they returned towards
+Tidore, having been the first Spaniards who had been in so high a
+northern latitude in these seas. On their return to Tidore, they found
+one Antonio de Britto employed in building a fortress, who took their
+goods from them, and sent forty-eight of them prisoners to Malacca[44].
+
+In the same year 1522, Cortes was desirous to possess some harbours on
+the South Sea, on purpose to open a trade with Malacca, Banda, Java, and
+the other spice islands. For this purpose he sent four Spaniards with
+Indian guides to Tecoantepec, Quahatemallan, and other harbours, where
+they were well received, and whence they brought back some of the natives
+to Mexico. These people were much caressed by Cortes; who afterwards sent
+ten pilots to examine the coast, but they could find no good harbour,
+after a survey of seventy leagues. A cacique, named; Cuchadaquir, used
+them hospitably, and sent two hundred of his people to Cortes with
+presents of gold and silver; and the people of Tecoantepec did the same.
+Not long afterwards, this friendly cacique sent to Cortes, requesting aid
+against his neighbours, who warred against him. Cortes accordingly, in
+the year 1523, sent Peter de Alvarado to his assistance, with 200 foot
+and 40 horse, who built a town called St Jago, in which he left a
+garrison. The caciques of Tecoantepec and Quahutemallan inquired at
+Alvarado concerning certain _sea monsters_ that had been on their coast
+the year before; meaning the ships of Gil Gonzales de Avila, at which
+they had been much amazed; and they wondered still more on being informed
+that Cortes had many such, and much larger than those they had seen. They
+displayed a painting of a mighty carak, having six masts, with sails and
+shrouds, and having armed horsemen on board[45]. In May 1523, Antonio de
+Britto, the Portuguese governor of the Molucca isles, sent Simon de Bru
+to discover the passage from thence by the island of Borneo to Malacca.
+They came in sight of the islands of Manada and Panguensara, and thence
+through the strait of Treminao and Taquy to the islands of St Michael, in
+7 deg. S. and then to the island of Borneo, where they came in sight of
+_Pedra Branca_, or the _white stone_; whence, passing through the strait
+of Cincapura, they came to the city of Malacca[46].
+
+In the same year 1523, Cortes went with 300 Spanish foot, 150 horse, and
+20,000 Mexicans, to make a complete discovery and conquest of Panuco, and
+to punish the inhabitants for having killed and devoured the soldiers of
+Francis Garay. The natives resisted him, but were overthrown; and to keep
+the country under subjection, he built a town on the river, near Chila,
+which he named Santo Stephano del Puerta, in which he left a garrison of
+100 foot and 30 horse, under the command of Peter de Valleia. In this
+expedition he lost many of his people, both Spaniards and Mexicans, and
+several horses[47].
+
+In this same year 1523, Francis de Garay, having a commission from the
+emperor as governor of all the coast he had discovered from Florida to
+Panuco, fitted out nine ships and two brigantines, with 850 soldiers and
+150 horses, on purpose to take possession of his government. Some men
+joined him from Jamaica, where he had furnished his squadron with warlike
+ammunition; and sailing thence to the harbour of Xagua, in the island of
+Cuba, he there learnt that Cortes had taken possession of the coast of
+Panuco. That he ought not meet with the fate of Narvaez, he sent the
+doctor Zuazo to Mexico, to endeavour to enter into treaty with Cortes.
+Garay arrived in the Rio de las Palmas on St Jameses day, and sent
+Goncalo de Ocampo up the river to explore the country, who reported, on
+his return, that the country was bad and desert. Yet Garay landed with
+400 foot soldiers and some horse, and commanded John de Grijalva, to
+explore the coast, while he marched by land to Panuco, in which march he
+crossed a river to which he gave the name of Rio Montalto. In this march
+he came to a large town, in which he found much poultry, to the great
+refreshment of his troops. Here, likewise, he took some of the
+inhabitants of Chila, whom he employed as messengers to different places.
+After a long and difficult march, he arrived at Panuco, but found no
+provisions; the country having been exhausted in the war with Cortes, and
+by being plundered by the soldiers. From this place he sent Goncalo de
+Ocampo to St Stephano, or Istevan del Puerto, to inquire if the garrison
+would submit to his authority. They sent him a favourable answer; but, by
+means of an ambush, they made forty of his cavalry prisoners, alleging
+that they had come unwarrantably to usurp the government which belonged
+to another. Besides this misfortune, Garay lost four of his ships, by
+which he was greatly disheartened. While Cortes was preparing an
+expedition to Panuco, to resist Garay, Francis de las Casas and Roderigo
+de la Paz, brought letters-patent to Mexico, by which the emperor gave
+him the government of New Spain, including Panuco. On this he desisted
+from going personally on the expedition, but sent Pedro de Alvarado with
+a respectable force, both of infantry and cavalry, to defend his
+government against aggression, and dispatched Diego de Ocampo to
+communicate the letters-patent to Garay; who thought it better for him to
+yield himself to Cortes, and went accordingly to Mexico[48].
+
+In the same year, 1523, Gil Goncales de Avila, discovered and peopled a
+town called _San Gil da Buena-vista_, in lat. 14 deg. N. almost in the bottom
+of the bay of Ascension or Honduras[49]. Likewise, on the 6th December of
+this year, Peter de Alvarado was sent by Cortes from Mexico with 300 foot,
+170 horse, four field-pieces, and some Mexican nobles, to discover and
+conquer Quahutemallan, Utlatlan, Chiassa, Xochnuxco, and other towns
+towards the South Sea. After a most fatiguing march of 400 leagues,
+passing by Tecoantepec to Xochnuxco, he discovered and conquered the
+whole of that country, where he built a city called St Jago de
+Quahutemallan, now Guatimala, of which and of the country he subdued, he
+is said to have got the government. In this expedition they passed some
+rivers, the water of which was so hot that they could scarce endure to
+wade them. They found likewise certain hills which produced alum, and one
+out of which a liquor like oil distilled; likewise sulphur in great
+abundance, from which the Spaniards made excellent gunpowder[50]. On the
+8th December of the same year, Cortes sent Diego de Godoy, with a hundred
+foot, thirty horse, two field-pieces, and many friendly Indians, to
+Spiritu Santo; where, joining the captain of that town, they went to
+Chamolla, the capital of a province of the same name, which they reduced
+under subjection[51].
+
+In February 1524, Cortes sent Roderigo Rangel, with 150 Spaniards, and
+many Tlaxcallans and Mexicans, against the Zapotecas and Nixtecas, and
+other provinces not yet well discovered. They were at first resisted, but
+soon defeated the natives, and reduced the country to subjection. In the
+same year, Roderigo de Bastidas was sent to discover and reduce the
+country of Santa Martha; but refusing to allow the soldiers to plunder a
+certain town, he was assassinated in his bed by Peter Villaforte,
+formerly his fast friend, who joined in the conspiracy against him. Pedro
+de Lugo and his son Don Alfonso were afterward governors of that place,
+where they conducted themselves as covetous tyrants, and became much
+disliked[52]. In the same year, the licentiate Lucas Vasques de Aillon
+obtained the government of Chicora from the emperor, on which he fitted
+out some vessels from St Domingo, and proceeded to explore and colonize
+that country; but he was lost with all his people. I know not how it
+should have happened, except by the righteous judgment of God, that so
+little should now remain of all the gold and precious stones which were
+got in the Antilles by the Spaniards; but much the greater part has been
+dissipated to little purpose, and nothing great or valuable has ensued
+from the discovery[53].
+
+In this same year, 1524, Cortes sent a fleet under the command of
+Christopher de Olid, to Cuba, to transport provisions and ammunition to
+Mexico, which had been purchased there by Alonso de Contreras; and Olid
+had orders to discover and colonize the country about Cape Higueras, and
+the Coast of Honduras, and likewise to send Diego Hartado de Mendoca by
+sea, in search of a strait towards Darien, which was reported to pass
+that way into the South Sea, which object of research had been commanded
+by the emperor to be attended to. He sent also two ships from Panuco, to
+explore the coast from thence to Florida; and he commanded other vessels
+to examine the coast of the South Sea, between Zacatullan and Panama. On
+the arrival of Olid at Cuba, he entered into a league with Diego
+Velasquez against Cortes: and, instead of prosecuting the orders he had
+received, he set sail for Puerto de Cavallos, in lat. 10 deg. N. 54, near
+which he built a town, which he named _Triumpho de la Cruz_. He made Gil
+Gonzales de Avila prisoner, and killed his nephew, and all the Spaniards
+who were with him, except one child; thus acting in direct opposition to
+Cortes, who had expended, in fitting out the present expedition, the sum
+of 80,000 castellans of gold, entirely to gratify Olid[55]. On learning
+this treachery, Cortes went by land from Mexico in the month of October
+1524, to take revenge on Olid, carrying with him a force of 300 Spaniards,
+part foot, and part horse, and accompanied by Quahutimoc, king of Mexico,
+and many of the chief Mexican nobles. On coming to the town of Spiritu
+Santo, he procured ten guides from the caciques of Tavasco and Xicalanco,
+who likewise gave him a map painted on cotton cloth, delineating the
+situation of the whole country, from Xicalanco to Naco and Nito, and even
+as far as Nicaragua, with their mountains, hills, fields, meadows, rivers,
+cities, and towns; and Cortes ordered three ships from the harbour of
+Medellin to follow him along the coast[56]. When he had reached the city
+of Izancanac, Cortes learned that King Quahutimoc and his Mexicans had
+conspired to betray or destroy him and his Spaniards; wherefore he hanged
+the king and two of his principal nobles. Cortes then proceeded to
+Mazatlan; and from thence to Piaca, which stands in the middle of a lake,
+and is the chief city of a province of the same name, and hereabout he
+began to learn tidings of the Spaniards under Olid, of whom he was in
+search. From thence he proceeded to Zuzullin, and came at length to Nito;
+from whence he went to a bay on the coast, called St Andre, where,
+finding a good haven, he built a town called Natividad de nuestra Sennora.
+He went thence to Truxillo, on the coast of Honduras, where he was well
+received by the Spanish settlers. While here, a ship brought intelligence
+of an insurrection having broke out in Mexico during his absence; on
+which, he ordered Gonsalo de Sandoval to march with his company by land,
+from Naco to Mexico, by the ordinary and safest road of Quahutemallan, or
+Guatimala, towards the South Sea; and, leaving his cousin Ferdinando de
+Saavedra to command in Truxillo, he went himself by sea along the coast
+of Yucutan to Chalchicocca, now called St Juan de Ullhua, and thence to
+Medellin and Mexico, where he was well received. Cortes was absent
+eighteen months on this expedition, during which he travelled 500
+leagues[57], and suffered many hardships.
+
+In the year 1525; Francis Pizarro, and Diego de Almagro, went from Panama
+to discover Peru, on the south of the fine, which they called _Nueva
+Castillia_. Pedro Asias, governor of Panama, refused to take any concern
+in this expedition, on account of certain evil news which had been
+brought to him by Francis Vezerra. Pizarro went first in a ship with 124
+soldiers, and was followed by Almagro with seventy men in another ship.
+Almagro came to Rio de San Juan, in lat. 3 deg. N., where he got 3000 pezoes
+of gold; and not finding Pizarro, of whom he was in search, he lost heart,
+and returned to Panama. Pizarro went first to the island of Gorgona, and
+thence to the isle of Gallo, from whence he proceeded to the river called
+_Rio del Peru_, in lat. 2 deg. N. from which the rich and famous country of
+Peru derives its name. He sailed thence to the river of St Francis, and
+Cape _Passaos_, where he passed the equinoctial line, and came to _Puerto
+Vejo_, in lat. 1 deg. S. and sailed on to the rivers of Chinapanpa, Tumbez,
+and Payta, in four or five degrees of southern latitude, where he
+received intelligence concerning King Atabalipa, and of the vast riches
+of his palace. On receiving this intelligence, Pizarro returned to Panama,
+from whence he went to Spain, where he solicited and obtained the
+government of the rich country he had discovered; having spent above
+three years in the discovery, with much labour and great danger[58].
+
+In the same year, 1525, seven ships were fitted out from Spain, under the
+command of Garcia de Loaisa, for a voyage to the Molucca Islands. Sailing
+from Corunna, and passing by the Canaries, they came to the coast of
+Brasil, where they discovered an island in lat. 2 deg. S. which they named St
+Matthew; and, finding orange trees, hogs, and European poultry, they
+concluded it to be inhabited; but, by inscriptions oil the bark of trees,
+they learnt that the Portuguese had bean there seventeen years before. A
+small pinnace of this squadron, commanded by Juan de Resaga, passed the
+straits of Magellan, and ran along the whole coast of Peru and New Spain,
+carrying the intelligence to Cortes of the expedition of Loaisa to the
+Moluccas: But the admiral ship only of this squadron, commanded by Martin
+Mingues de Carchova, arrived at its destination, where the Moors of the
+Moluccas received the Spaniards hospitably; Loaisa and all the other
+captains died by the way.
+
+In the same year Stephen Gomez sailed from Corunna, to endeavour to
+discover a strait in the northern parts, by which ships might sail from
+Europe to the Moluccas. This person had been refused employment in the
+fleet commanded by Loaisa; but the Count Ferdinando de Andrada, with the
+Doctor Beltram, and a merchant named Christopher de Sarro; fitted out a
+galleon for him at their joint expence. He went first to the island of
+Cuba, whence he sailed to Cape Florida, sailing only by day, as he was
+ignorant of the coast. He passed Cape Angra, and the river Enseada, and
+so went over to the other side; and it is reported that he came to Cape
+Razo[59] in lat. 46 deg. N. whence he returned to Corunna with a cargo of
+_slaves_. But news spread through Spain that he was come home laden with
+_cloves_, which occasioned much joy at the court of Spain, till the
+mistake was discovered. Gomez was ten months engaged in this voyage. In
+this same year, Don George de Menesses, governor of Molucca, and Don
+Henriques, sent a vessel on discovery towards the north, commanded by
+Diego de Rocha, having Gomez de Sequiera as pilot. In lat. 9 deg. or 10 deg. N.
+they discovered several islands in a group, which were called the islands
+of Sequiera; whence they returned to the island of Bato-China. In 1526,
+Sebastian Gabota, chief pilot to the emperor, a native of Bristol in
+England, whose father was a Venetian, sailed from Seville with four ships,
+intending to have gone to the Moluccas by a western course. Gabota came
+to Pernambuco in Brasil, where he waited three months for a favourable
+wind to get round Cape St Augustine. In the Bay of _Patos_, or of ducks,
+the admirals ship was lost; and despairing of being able to accomplish
+the voyage to the Moluccas, he built a pinnace for the purpose of
+exploring the Rio Plata. Gabota accordingly ran sixty leagues, or 120
+miles up that river; when coming to a bar, he left the large ships there,
+and went with the boats of the squadron 120 leagues, or 480 miles farther
+up the river Parana, which the inhabitants considered to be the principal
+river. He here constructed a fort, and remained in that place above a
+year; From thence he rowed still farther up the Parana, till he came to
+the mouth of another river called _Paragioa_, or Paraguay; and,
+perceiving that the country produced gold and silver, he kept on his
+course, sending one of the boats in advance, which was taken by the
+natives. On this, Gabota thought it more prudent to return to his fort,
+after having penetrated 200 leagues or 800 miles up this river. He took
+on board the people he had left at the fort, and returning to the ships
+at the bar, sailed back to Seville in 1530. He reported that the Rio
+Plata was navigable for a great way, and that it rises from a lake named
+_Bombo_[60] in the kingdom of Peru, whence, flowing through the valleys
+of Xauxa, it receives the rivers Parso, Bulcasban, Cay, Parima, Hiacax,
+and several others, by which its waters are greatly increased. It is also
+said that the river of San Francesco comes from the same lake, which
+likewise is very great; because rivers that flow from lakes are larger
+than those which proceed from springs.
+
+In the year 1527, Panfilo de Narvaez sailed from St Lucar de Barameda
+with five ships, having 600 soldiers, 100 horses, and great abundance of
+provisions, ammunition, and all other necessaries, to take possession of
+Florida, as far as the river Palmas, of which he was appointed governor.
+Not being able to land at the place he wished, he went on shore with 300
+of his soldiers, some horses, and a supply of provisions, nearer Cape
+Florida, ordering the ships to proceed to the river Palmas, in which
+voyage they were nearly all lost Those who escaped shipwreck, suffered
+extreme hardships from hunger and thirst on a dry barren island, called
+Xamo by the natives, and which the Spaniards named _Malhada_. In this
+island they were attacked by the natives, and many, both of the Spaniards
+and natives, were slain.
+
+Narvaez, and his people, saw some gold among the Indians of Florida, who
+said they had it from _Apalachen_. He therefore went to that town in
+search of gold, where they found abundance of bay trees, and others of
+many different kinds, and plenty of beasts and birds, but neither gold
+nor silver. From Apalachen, he went to a town called Aute, and from:
+thence to Xamo, a poor and barren country. In this place, the natives
+requested the Spaniards to cure their sick, of whom they had great
+numbers; and the Spaniards being in extreme poverty and distress, prayed
+for the sick, and used such endeavours as were in their power, towards
+their relief: And it pleased God that many, both of the sick, and those
+who were ill from wounds, recovered; nay, even one that was supposed to
+be dead, was, by them, restored to life. Owing to this, the Spaniards
+were greatly esteemed, and even reputed as gods, so that the people
+offered them no injury, and even gave them such things as they had. By
+these means, they passed through many countries, and many strange nations,
+differing from each other in language, customs, and dress, and came at
+length among a people that lived continually among their flocks and herds,
+like the Arabs. Many of the tribes through which they travelled were so
+poor as to feed on snakes, lizards, spiders, ants, and all kinds of
+vermin, yet were well contented with their hard fore, and were much given
+to singing and dancing. This people are reported to purchase all their
+wives from their enemies, and to kill all their own daughters, lest by
+marrying into hostile tribes their enemies should increase in numbers. In
+some places, the women continued to suckle their children till they were
+ten or twelve years old; and there were certain men, being hermaphrodites,
+who married each other. In this manner, the Spaniards penetrated above
+800 leagues, or 3200 miles through the country, till at length, not above
+seven or eight of the whole armament reached the city of St Michael of
+Calvacan, in lat. 23 deg.. N. or higher, on the coast of the South Sea[61].
+
+Learning, as has been formerly mentioned, that Garcia de Louisa had
+passed through the Straits of Magellan, on a voyage to the _Islands of
+Cloves_, Cortes fitted out three ships from Civitlanejo, now St
+Christophers, in lat. 20 deg.. N. on the western coast of New Spain, intending
+to send there in search of Loaisa, and that they might discover the way
+to the Moluccas, and open up the spice trade with New Spain. Leaving
+Civatlanejo, on All Saints day, 1527, under the command of Alvaro de
+Saavedra Ceron, the cousin of Cortes, they fell in with the islands
+formerly discovered by Magellan, which he had named _the Pleasures_;
+whence they sailed to the islands which had been discovered by Gomez de
+Sequeira, and called by his name, but not knowing of this previous
+discovery, he named them _Islas de los Reyes_, or the Isles of the Kings,
+because discovered on Twelfth day. During this part of the voyage, two
+ships of the squadron separated from Saavedra, and were never more heard
+of. Sailing on from island to island, he arrived at the Island of Candiga,
+where he ransomed two Spaniards for seventy ducats, who had belonged to
+the crew of Loaisa, who was shipwrecked in that neighbourhood. Saavedra
+reached the Moluccas in March 1528, and anchored at the Island of Gilolo,
+where he found the sea calm, the winds moderate, and no tempests; and he
+estimated the distance from thence to New Spain at 2050 leagues, or 8200
+miles. At this period, Fernando de la Torre was governor of the Molucca
+islands, and lived in the city of Tidore, having been chosen instead of
+Martin Yniguez de Carquicano, who was recently dead. Torre waged a fierce
+war with Don George de Meneses, captain of the Portuguese; and in a fight
+of the fourth of May, Saavedra took a Portuguese galliot, and slew
+Fernando de Baldaya the captain. In June, Saavedra set sail on his return
+towards New Spain, taking with him Simon de Brito, Patalin, and other
+Portuguese prisoners; but, after several months sail, he was forced back
+to Tidore by contrary winds, where Patalin was beheaded and quartered,
+and the rest of the Portuguese prisoners hanged. In this year, 1528,
+Cortes sent 200 infantry, and sixty cavalry, with a large force of
+Mexicans, to explore and subdue the country of the Chihimecas, which was
+reported to be rich in gold. He then took shipping for Spain, where he
+landed with great pomp, bringing with him 250,000 marks in gold and
+silver. On his arrival at Toledo, where the emperor then resided; he was
+very graciously received. The emperor created him marquis _della Valle_,
+and married him to the lady Jane de Zuniga, daughter to the Conde de
+Aguilar; after which he returned to resume the government of New Spain.
+
+Saavedra, of whom we have lately made mention, returned from the Moluccas
+towards New Spain, in May 1529: and, during, the voyage, came in sight of
+land, in lat. 2 deg.S. He ran along the coast to the S.S.E. from that time to
+the end of August, upwards of 500 leagues, finding a clean coast, free
+from shoals and rocks, with good anchoring ground, inhabited by a black
+people, with curled hair. The people of the Moluccas named the inhabitants
+of this coast _Papuas_ because they are black with frizzled hair and both
+Portuguese and Spaniards have adopted the same name. Having reached to
+four or five degrees south of the line, he returned northwards; and near
+the equinoctial he discovered an island, which he called _de los Pintados_,
+or of the painted people, as the inhabitants were of a white complexion,
+but marked with a hot iron[62]; and, from various circumstances, he
+concluded that they were originally from China. A kind of boat put off
+from the shore, containing a number of these islanders, making many
+threatening signs and gestures, as if ordering the Spaniards to go away
+from their land, and even proceeded to throw stones from slings at the
+ship, but, as the stones did no harm, Saavedra would not allow his people
+to fire upon them. A little beyond this island, in 10 deg. or 12 deg. of north
+latitude, they discovered a group, consisting of many small low islands,
+covered with grass, and full of palm trees, to which they gave the name of
+_Los Jardines_, or the gardens[63]. Saavedra came to anchor in the midst
+of these islands, where he remained several days, and concluded that the
+people had come originally from China, but had, by long residence,
+degenerated into lawless savages, using no labour or industry. They wear a
+species of white cloth, made of grass, and are quite ignorant of fire,
+which put them in great terror. Instead of bread they eat cocoas, which
+they pull unripe, burying them for some days in the sand, and then laying
+them in the sun, which causes them to open. They eat fish also, which they
+catch from a kind of boat called _parao_, or _proa_, which they construct
+with tools made of shells, from pine wood that is drifted at certain times
+to their islands, from some unknown regions. The wind and weather becoming
+more favourable for his return to New Spain, Saavedra resumed his voyage
+thither, intending to have gone to Panama, to unload the cloves and other
+merchandize he had brought from the Moluccas. His purpose was to have
+carried this merchandize in carts from Panama, about four leagues, or
+sixteen miles overland, to the river Chagre, which is said to be navigable,
+and which discharges itself into the North Sea not far from Nombre de Dios,
+where the goods could be reshipped for Spain; by which means all kind of
+goods might be brought from India in a shorter time, and with less danger,
+than by sailing round the Cape of Good Hope, as the voyage from the
+Moluccas to Panama is almost a perfectly straight course between the line
+and the tropics. But, in the present voyage, they were never able to
+procure a favourable wind, and were therefore forced back to the Moluccas,
+where they arrived in great affliction, as Saavedra died by the way[64].
+Had Saavedra lived, he intended to have opened a navigable communication
+from sea to sea, through the land of Castilia del Oro and New Spain, which
+might have been done in one or other of the following places:--1. From the
+gulph of St Michael to Uraba, which is 25 leagues, or 100 miles. 2. From
+Panama to Nombre de Dios, which is 17 leagues, or 68 miles, much the
+greater part consisting of the river Chagre, navigable for small craft. 3.
+Through the river Xaquator, now St Juan, in the province of Nicaragua,
+which springs out of a lake that reaches to within three or four leagues
+of the South Sea, and falls into the North Sea, being navigable by large
+boats and lighters. 4. The other place is from Tecoantepec, through a
+river, to Verdadera Cruz, in the bay of Honduras[65].
+
+In the year 1529, Damiano de Goes, a Portuguese, travelled over all Spain,
+and went from Flanders into England and Scotland, being at the courts of
+the kings of these countries; after that he returned into Flanders, and
+travelled through Zealand, Holland, Brabant, Luxemburgh, Switzerland, and
+through the cities of Cologne, Spires, Strasburg, Basil, and other parts
+of Germany, and so back to Flanders. He went thence into France, through
+Piccardy, Normandy, Champagne, Burgundy, the dukedom of Bourbon, Gascony,
+Languedoc, Dauphiny, and Savoy; passing into Italy by Milan, Ferrara, and
+Lombardy, to Venice. Turning back, he passed through the territory of
+Genoa, the dukedom of Florence, and all Tuscany, to Rome and Naples.
+Thence back, through Italy, to Ulm, in Germany, and through Swabia,
+Bavaria, Austria, Bohemia, Moravia, and Hungary, to the confines of Greece.
+Thence through Poland, Prussia, and Livonia, to the great dukedom of
+Moscovy; and thence back into Germany, and through the dominions of the
+Landgrave, and the dukedom of Saxony, into Denmark, Gothland, and Norway,
+penetrating to lat. 70 deg..N. In the course of these travels, which occupied
+him during 22 years, he saw, spoke to, and was conversant with, all the
+kings, princes, nobles, and chief cities of all Christendom; for which
+reason, I thought the great extent of his travels was worthy of
+remembrance.
+
+In 1529 or 1530, Melchior de Sosa Tavarez went from Ormus to Bassora, and
+the islands of Gissara, with some ships of war, and sailed up to where the
+Euphrates and Tigris unite together, being the first of the Portuguese who
+had sailed so far on the fresh water in these parts. Not long after this,
+a Portuguese, named Ferdinando Coutinho, being at Ormus, determined to
+return overland from thence to Portugal. For this purpose he went to
+Arabia, and up the river Euphrates, for the space of a month, and saw many
+countries and kingdoms that had not been before visited by the Portuguese.
+He was made prisoner at Damascus; whence he crossed the province of Syria
+to the city of Aleppo. He had been at the holy sepulchre in Jerusalem, in
+the city of Cairo, and at Constantinople, where the Great Turk resides.
+After seeing that Court, he passed over to Venice; and, from thence,
+through Italy, France, and Spain, to Portugal, he came back to Lisbon.
+This person, and Damiano de Goes, were the most adventurous of the
+Portuguese, who, in our time, had seen and discovered the greatest extent
+of foreign realms for their own satisfaction.
+
+About the year 1530, Francis Pizarro, who has been already mentioned as
+having gone to Spain to obtain the government of Peru, returned to Panama,
+having procured all things as he wished, carrying with him four brothers,
+Ferdinand, John, Gonsalvo, and Francis Martines de Alcantara[66]. They
+were not well received by Diego de Almagro and his friends, because
+Pizarro had not sufficiently represented his merits in the discovery of
+Peru to the emperor, in which he had lost an eye, but took the whole merit
+to himself. In the end, however, they agreed; and Almagro supplied Pizarro
+with seven hundred pezoes of gold, providing him likewise with provisions
+and ammunition, and other necessaries towards his intended expedition
+against Peru. Soon after this arrangement with Almagro, Pizarro, and his
+four brothers before-mentioned, set out with such soldiers and horses as
+they could procure on their expedition. Being unable, from contrary winds,
+to reach Tumbez, where he proposed to have landed, he was under the
+necessity of disembarking at the river of Peru; whence he marched along
+the coast with great difficulty, on account of many rivers and marshes, in
+which some of his men were drowned in crossing. Coming to the town of
+Coache, they found much gold and emeralds in that place; some of which
+they broke, to see if they were perfect. From thence Pizarro sent twenty
+thousand pezoes of gold to Almagro at Panama, to enable him to send
+supplies of men, horses, ammunition, and provisions, and went from Coache
+to the haven named _Porte Viejo_, where he was joined by Sebastian
+Benalcazar, with all the supplies he had sent for. In the year 1531, after
+the arrival of these reinforcements, Pizarro passed over from Porto Viejo
+to the rich island of Puna, in the bay of Guayaquil, where he was
+outwardly well received by the governor, who yet conspired to kill him and
+his men; but Pizarro prevented him, and took many of the Indians, whom he
+bound with chains of gold and silver. Such was the jealousy of the
+governor of Puna, that he caused those who had the charge of his wives to
+have their noses and privities cut off. In this place, Pizarro found above
+six hundred prisoners belonging to king Atabalipa, who was then at war
+with his eldest brother Guascar. Pizarro set these prisoners at liberty,
+on promise of procuring him a friendly reception in Peru; but they forgot
+their engagements afterwards, and excited the people to war against the
+Spaniards. From Puna, Pizarro sent three Spaniards to Tumbez, in Peru, to
+treat of amity; but the Peruvians seized them, and put them to death. On
+hearing of this cruel action, Pizarro crossed over to the main, and made a
+sudden attack, during the night, on the city of Tumbez, killing great
+numbers of the inhabitants. The remainder submitted and made peace,
+presenting him large gifts of gold and silver, and other riches. Pizarro
+then built a town on the river Cira, which he named St Michael of
+Tangarara, which was the first habitation of the Christians in these parts;
+and he appointed Sebastian de Benalcazar to the command. After this, he
+made search for a secure haven on the coast, and found one every way to
+his wish at Payta.
+
+In the same year, 1531, Diego de Ordas went, with 600 soldiers and 35
+horses, to settle the country on the Maranon, or river of the Amazons; but,
+dying on the voyage, this expedition proved fruitless. Afterwards, in the
+year 1534, Hierom Artal was sent thither with 130 soldiers, yet he came
+not to the river, but formed settlements at _St Michael de Neveri_, and
+other places in Paria. Aries d'Acugna, a Portuguese gentleman, went
+likewise to the Maranon, with ten ships, 900 men, and 130 horses, where he
+spent much, and did little to purpose; but the greatest loser in this
+expedition was John de Barros. This great river Maranon is in lat. 3 deg.
+S.[67], its mouth being 15 leagues, or 60 miles across, with many inhabited
+islands, on which there are many trees producing incense, much larger than
+those of Arabia. It produces gold and precious stones, and an emerald was
+found there as large as the palm of the hand. The people of that country
+make a kind of drink of a species of oats that are as large as quinces.
+
+Nunnez de Gusman was sent from Mexico, in 1531, with 500 soldiers, half of
+whom were cavalry, and 6000 Indians to carry his baggage and provisions,
+to discover and subdue the countries to the northwest of the kingdom of
+Mexico. In this expedition he reduced the countries of Xalisco,
+Ceintiliquipac, Ciametlan, Tovalla, Cnixo, Ciamolla, Culhuacan, and other
+places. On this expedition he marched through Mechuacan, where he acquired
+much gold, and 10,000 marks of silver. To the country of Xalisco he gave
+the name of New Galicia, because it was rugged and mountainous, and the
+people robust and hardy. He built many towns in the conquered countries;
+particularly Compostella, Guadalajara, after the place of his own birth in
+Spain, Santo Espirito de la Conception, and St Michael, which last is in
+lat. 24 deg. N. In 1532, Cortes sent Diego Hurtado de Mendoca in two ships
+from Acapulco, which is 70 leagues from Mexico, on purpose to explore the
+coast of the South Sea, as he had been ordered to do by the emperor.
+Mendoca sailed from Acapulco to the harbour of Xalisco, or Xalis, on the
+river Barania, in lat. 22 deg. N. where he wished to take in wood and water.
+But he was resisted there, by the orders of Nunnes de Gusman, and obliged
+to proceed on his voyage. Some of his men mutinied, and he put them all on
+board one of his ships, that they might return to New Spain. Being in want
+of water, these people put in at the bay of Vanderas, not far south from
+Xalis, where they were all slain by the Indians. In this voyage of
+discovery, Hurtado sailed 200 leagues along the coast, but did nothing
+worthy of being recorded.
+
+In 1533, Pizarro went from Tumbez to Caxamalca, where he took king
+Atabalipa prisoner, who engaged to pay a vast sum in gold and silver for
+his ransom. On purpose to procure this, Pedro de Varco and Ferdinando do
+Sotto were sent to the city of Cusco, in lat. 17 deg. S.[68], a journey of 200
+leagues, all upon causeways of stone, with bridges wherever necessary, and
+having lodging-places at proper distances for the conveniency of the
+_Yngas_, by which name the kings of Peru are distinguished. The armies of
+the Peruvians are very numerous, as they often bring more than 100,000 men
+into the field; and they lodge on these causeways, as already mentioned,
+where they always have abundance of provisions and other necessaries, as
+is said to be the custom in China. Ferdinando Pizarro went with some
+horsemen to Paciacama, 100 leagues from Caxamalca, to discover the country;
+and, on his return, he learnt that Guascar, the brother of Atabalipa, had
+been put to death by his command; and that Ruminaguy, the general of the
+army of Atabalipa, had risen in arms, in the city of Quito, against the
+Spaniards. After the reception of this intelligence, Atabalipa was
+strangled by the orders of Pizarro[69]. After the death of the two kings
+of the Peruvians, Pizarro continually extended his authority over the
+dominions of Peru, and built many cities, towns, and forts, in convenient
+situations, to hold the country under subjection. He detached Sebastian de
+Benalcazar, whom he had before made governor of St Michael de Tangarara,
+with 200 infantry and 80 horse, to Quito, against Ruminaguy. Benalcazar
+proceeded successfully in reducing the country to subjection from one city
+to another, eastwards, for 120 leagues, not far from the equinoctial line;
+where Peter Alvarado found certain mountains so cold, and loaded with such
+quantities of snow, that 70 of his men were frozen to death. Having
+reduced the city of Quito, he established himself and his people in that
+place, calling it the city of St Francis; and it seemed very strange to
+the Spaniards to find, in that country, abundance of cattle, wheat, barley,
+and other plants, similar to those of Spain. After sending Benalcazar to
+reduce the city of Quito, Pizarro himself undertook to reduce the royal
+residence of Cusco, in about 13 deg. 20' S. in which expedition he was opposed
+by Quisquiz, a Peruvian general, whom he easily defeated; and he soon
+afterwards took possession of Cusco, the exceedingly rich and wealthy
+capital of the Peruvian monarchy. About this time Mango, a brother of
+Atabalipa, joined Pizarro, who made him Ynga, or king of the country, in
+name only, while he assumed the whole authority and revenues of the
+kingdom to himself[70].
+
+In the same year, 1534; Jaques Cartier, a native of Britanny, went with
+three ships to the land of Corterealis[71], and the gulf of St Lawrence,
+otherwise called _Golfo Quadrato_, or the square gulf, which he fell in
+with in lat. 48 deg. 30' N. He proceeded northwards to the latitude of 51 deg., in
+the hope of being able to penetrate in that direction to China, by a north-
+west passage, to bring drugs and other merchandize from thence to France.
+Next year Cartier made a second voyage to the same regions, and found the
+country pervaded by many large rivers, and abounding in provisions. He
+sailed 300 leagues up one of these rivers, in a south-west direction, and
+named the country New France, now Canada; but finding the water to become
+fresh, he was satisfied there could be no passage that way to the South
+Sea; and having wintered in the country, he returned next year to France.
+
+About the end of the year 1535, or beginning of 1536, Don Anthony de
+Mendoca came from Spain to the city of Mexico, as Viceroy of New Spain,
+being appointed to supersede Cortes, the discoverer and conqueror of that
+rich and extensive territory. At this time Cortes was absent from the seat
+of government, having gone to Tecoantepec, on purpose to fit out two ships
+on a voyage of discovery. These he sent out under the command of Fernando
+de Grijalva and Diego Bezerra de Mendoca, the former having a Portuguese
+pilot, named Acosta, and the pilot to the latter being Fortunio Ximenez, a
+Biscayan. On the first night after leaving Tecoantepec, the two ships
+separated. Ximenez raised a mutiny against his captain, in which Bezerra
+was slain, and many of the crew wounded. Some time afterwards, Ximenez
+went on shore in the bay of Santa Cruz, for wood and water, where he, and
+more than 20 of his people, were slain by the Indians. Two of the mariners,
+who were in the boat, escaped to Xalisco, and told Nunnes de Gusman, who
+commanded at that place, that they had seen indications of pearls during
+the voyage. Gusman went accordingly with, a ship in search of pearls, and
+explored above 150 leagues of the coast[72].
+
+It is said that Grijalva sailed 300 leagues from Tecoantepec, without
+seeing any land, except one small island in 20 deg. N. to which he gave the
+name St Thomas, as having been discovered on the day of that saint[73].
+
+In the year 1535, Pizarro built the city which he named _Ciudad de los
+Reys_, or of the kings, on the river of Lima, in lat. 20 deg. S; to which he
+removed the inhabitants of Xauxa, as a more convenient situation for the
+residence; of the government, and in a better country[74]. He built also
+the city of St Jago in Porto Viejo, and many other towns, both along the
+coast and in the inland country; and he procured from Spain horses, asses,
+mules, cattle, hogs, goats, and sheep, to stock his territories, and many
+kinds of trees and plants, such as rosemary, oranges, lemons, citrons,
+vines, and other fruits, wheat, barley, and other grains, with radishes,
+and many other kinds of vegetables, which were disseminated all over the
+country[75]. in the same year, Diego de Almagro went from the city of
+Cusco to the provinces of Arequipa and Chili, in lat. 30 deg. S. The march was
+of great length, and he discovered a great extent of country; but he
+suffered great extremities of cold, hunger, and fatigue, in consequence of
+the ruggedness of the mountains, and the ice and snow, insomuch that many
+of his men and horses were frozen to death. About this time Ferdinando
+Pizarro came from Spain to the city of Lima, bringing with him the patent
+of Marquis of Atanillos, for his brother, Francis Pizarro, and a
+commission for Diego de Almagro, by which he was appointed governor of all
+the land he had hitherto discovered, and 100 leagues beyond, under the
+name of the _New kingdom of Toledo_. Ferdinando Pizarro went to the city
+of Cusco, of which he was made governor, and John de Rada went into Chili
+to Almagro, carrying with him the orders of the emperor. On receiving the
+letters patent of the emperor, Almagro marched directly for Cusco, which
+he considered to be included in his government, by which a civil war was
+kindled between him and Pizarro. On this march he and his people were
+severely oppressed by famine, and were even forced to feed upon their
+horses which had died four months and a half before, when on their march
+southwards into Chili[76].
+
+In this same year, 1535, Nunnez d'Acunha, who was governor of India for
+the crown of Portugal, while building a fortress, in the city of Diu, sent
+a fleet, under the command of Vasquez Perez del San Paio, to the river
+Indus, which is under the tropic of Cancer, 90 or 100 leagues to the north-
+west from Diu. He also sent an army against Badu, the king of Cambaia, or
+Guzerat, of which a renegado named Cosesofar was captain[77]. The fleet
+came to the bar of the great river Indus in December, where the same
+phenomena were observed as were formerly experienced by Alexander,
+according to the relation of Quintus Curtius[78].
+
+In the same year, Simon de Alcazava sailed from Seville, with two ships
+and 240 men. Some say he was destined for New Spain, others for the
+Moluccas, and others again that he meant to have proceeded for China,
+where he had formerly been, along with Ferdinando Perez de Andrada.
+However this may have been, he went first to the Canaries, and from thence
+to the straits of Magellan, without touching at Brazil, or any other part
+of the coast of South America, and entered into these straits in the month
+of December, having contrary winds, and very cold weather. Under these
+difficulties, the soldiers entreated him to turn back, which he refused,
+and went into a haven on the south side of the straits, in lat. 53 deg. S.
+where he ordered Roderigo de Isla to land, with 60 of the people, to
+explore the country; but the people mutinied against Alcazava, and slew
+him; and, having appointed such captains and officers as they thought
+proper, they returned back. In their voyage homewards, one of the ships
+was lost on the coast of Brazil, and such of the Spaniards as escaped
+drowning, were killed and eaten by the savages. The other ship went to St
+Jago, in the island of Hispaniola, and thence returned to Seville, in
+Spain[79]. In the same year, Don Pedro de Mendoca went from Cadiz for the
+river Plata, with twelve ships and 2000 men, being the largest armament,
+both of ships and men, that had ever been sent from Spain to the new world.
+Mendoca died on his return to Spain, but most part of his men remained in
+the country on the Rio Plata, where they built a large city, containing
+now 2000 houses, in which great numbers of Indians dwell along with the
+Spaniards. From this place they discovered and conquered the country to a
+great extent, even to the mines of Potosi and the town of La Plata[80],
+which is at the distance of 500 miles from Buenos Ayres.
+
+Cortes having learnt, in the year 1536, that his ship, of which Fortunio
+Ximenez was pilot, had been seized by Nunnez de Guzman, sent three ships
+to Xalisco, while he marched thither by land with a respectable force; and,
+on his arrival there, he found his ship all spoiled and rifled. When his
+small squadron was come round to Xalisco, he went himself on board, and
+left Andrew de Tapia to command his land force. Setting sail from thence,
+he came, on the first of May, to a point of land, which he named Cape St
+Philip, and, to an island close by this cape, he gave the name of St Jago.
+Three days afterwards, he came to the bay where the pilot Ximenez was
+killed, which he named Bahia de Santa Cruz, where he went on land, and
+sent out Andrew de Tapia to explore the country. Cortes again set sail,
+and came to the river now called _Rio de San Pedro y San Paulo_, where the
+ships were separated by a tempest. One was driven to the bay of Santa Cruz,
+another to the river of Guajaval, and the third was stranded on the coast
+near Xalisco, whence the crew went overland to Mexico. After waiting a
+long while for his other two ships, Cortes made sail, and entered into the
+gulf of California, otherwise called _Mar Vermejo_, or the Vermilion Sea,
+and by some, the sea of Cortes. Having penetrated 50 leagues within that
+gulf, he espied a ship riding at an anchor, and, on his approach towards
+her, had nearly been lost, if he had not received assistance from that
+other ship. Having repaired his own ship, he departed from thence with
+both ships; and, having procured provisions at a very dear rate, at St
+Michael de Culiacan, he went to the harbour of Santa Cruz, where he
+received information that Don Antonio de Mendoca had arrived from Spain as
+Viceroy of Mexico. He therefore left Francis de Ulloa with the command of
+his ships, ordering him to proceed on discoveries; and going to Acapulco,
+he received a messenger from Don Antonio de Mendoca, the new viceroy,
+certifying his arrival, and the assumption of his authority. Mendoca
+likewise sent him the copy of a letter from Francis Pizarro, stating that
+Mango, the Inca of Peru, had risen in arms, and assailed the city of Cusco
+with 100,000 fighting men, having slain his brother, John Pizarro, and
+above 400 Spaniards, with 200 horses; and that he himself, and the Spanish
+dominions in Peru, were in imminent danger, unless speedily and
+effectually assisted.
+
+Cortes, not yet resolved on submitting to the authority of Mendoca, fitted
+out two ships, under the command of Ferdinando de Grijalva and one
+Alvarado, on purpose to discover the route to the Moluccas by the way of
+the equinoctial line, because the islands of Cloves are under that
+parallel. They went first to St Michael de Tangarara, in Peru, where they
+landed succours for Pizarro, and thence, all along the line, to the
+Moluccas, as they were ordered; and they are said to have sailed above
+1000 leagues without sight of land on either side the whole way. At length,
+in lat. 2 deg. N. they discovered an island named _Asea_, which was believed
+to be one of the islands of Cloves. Five hundred leagues farther, more or
+less, they came to another, which they named _Isla de los Pescadores_, or
+island of Fishers. Going still in the same course, they saw another island,
+called _Hayme_, on the south side of the line, and another named _Apia_,
+after which they came in sight of _Seri_. Turning one degree to the north,
+they came to anchor at an island named _Coroa_, whence they came to
+another under the line named _Memousum_, and thence to _Busu_, still
+holding on the same course[81].
+
+The people of all these islands are black, with frizzled hair, whom the
+people of the Moluccas call Papuas. Most of them are witches, and eat
+human flesh; and are so much given to wickedness, that the devils walk
+among them as companions. Yet when these wicked spirits find any of the
+Papuas alone, they kill him with cruel blows, or smother him; for which
+reason they always go out in companies of two or three together. There is
+in this country a bird as large as a crane, which has no wings wherewith
+to fly, but runs on the ground with the swiftness of a deer, and, of the
+small feathers of this bird, the natives make hair for their idols. They
+have likewise a particular herb, the leaf of which, after being washed in
+warm water, if laid on any member, and licked with the tongue, will even
+draw out the whole blood of a mans body; and, by means of this leaf, the
+natives let blood of themselves, when afflicted by sickness.
+
+From these islands they came to others named the _Guellas_, in lat. 1 deg. N.
+_east and west_[82], from the island of Ternate, in which the Portuguese
+have a fortress. These islands are 124 leagues from the island of _Moro_,
+and between forty and fifty leagues from Ternate. From thence they went to
+the island of _Moro_[83], and the islands of Cloves, going about from one
+island to another; but the natives would not permit them to land, desiring
+them to go to the fortress, where captain _Antonio Galvano_, the author of
+this work, would receive them in a friendly manner, who was, as they
+stiled him, _factor_ of the country, and they could not be allowed to land
+without his license. This circumstance is worthy of being noticed, that
+the natives were so well affected to the Portuguese as to venture their
+lives, with their wives, children, and goods, in their service.
+
+In the year 1537, John de Vadillo, the governor of Carthagena, went with a
+powerful armament from the port called _St Sebastian de Buena Vista_, in
+the gulf of Uraba, to the Rio Verde, whence he went by land, without
+previously knowing any part of the way, and without carriages, to the very
+extremity of Peru and the town of La Plata, a distance of 1200 leagues, a
+most memorable journey. The whole country, from the Rio Verde to the
+mountains of Abibe, is full of rugged hills, thick forests, and many
+rivers, through which they had to pierce their way with infinite toil. The
+mountains of Abibe are said to be twenty leagues broad, and can only be
+passed over in the months of January, February, March, and April, as from
+incessant heavy rains at all other times of the year, the rivers are so
+swelled as to be quite impassable. In these mountains there are many herds
+of swine, many dantes, lions, tigers, bears, ounces, large wild-cats,
+monkeys, vast snakes, and other vermin. There are also abundance of
+partridges, quails, turtle-doves, pigeons, and other birds of many
+different kinds. The rivers also were so full of fish that they killed
+them with staves; and they affirmed, if they had been provided with rods
+and nets, that a very large company of men might be subsisted, without
+ever being in distress for want of food. In this expedition they noted the
+diversities of people, languages, dress, and other circumstances, during
+the whole way, through many countries, kingdoms, and, provinces, and the
+great difficulties and dangers they encountered till their arrival at the
+_Villa de la Plata_, and the adjoining sea. This was the most extensive
+discovery which has been ever heard of by land, and in so short a time;
+insomuch that, if it had not been performed in our own days, it could
+hardly have been credited[84].
+
+In 1538, certain friars of the order of St Francis went from Mexico to
+preach to the natives in the northern part of New Spain, and to convert
+them to the Catholic faith. One Mark de Nizza penetrated farther than any
+of the rest.--Passing through Culvacan, or Culiacan, he came into the
+province of Sibola, or Cinaloa, where he pretended to have found seven
+cities, and that the farther he went the richer was the country in gold,
+silver, and precious stones, with many sheep bearing wool of great
+fineness. On the fame of this wealth, the viceroy Don Antonio de Mendoca,
+and Cortes, determined to send a force to take possession of the country;
+but, as they could not agree on this subject, Cortes and his wife went
+over to Spain in 1540, where he died seven years afterwards[85].
+
+In 1538, I, Antonio Galvano, being governor of the Molucca islands, sent a
+ship, commanded by Francis de Castro, towards the north, with orders to
+convert as many as he could to the Christian Faith. Castro himself
+baptized many; as the lords of Celebes, Maccassar, Amboina, Moro, Moratax,
+and of several other places. On his arrival at the island of Mindanao, six
+kings received the water of baptism from de Castro, with their wives,
+children, and subjects; and I gave orders that most of these should
+receive the name of John, in honour of king John III. who then reigned in
+Portugal.
+
+The Portuguese and Spaniards who have been in these islands, affirm that
+there are in them a certain species of hogs, which, besides the ordinary
+teeth in their jaws, have two others growing out of their snouts, and
+other two behind their ears, of a large span and a-half in length[86].
+There is likewise said to be a certain tree, that part of which that grows
+towards the east is a sure antidote against all kinds of poison, while the
+western half of the same tree is itself a deadly poison. The fruit of this
+tree is like large pease; of which is made the strongest poison on earth.
+There is another tree of a very singular nature, for if any one eat of its
+fruit, he becomes twelve hours mad; and, on regaining his senses, cannot
+remember any thing that happened during his madness. There are likewise
+certain land-crabs, which have the same effect of producing temporary
+madness when eaten. The islanders also pretend that there is a certain
+stone in these islands of so wonderful a property, that whoever happens to
+sit upon it is sure to be afflicted with rupture. It is farther worthy of
+remark, that the inhabitants of these islands gild their teeth.
+
+In the year 1539, three ships which had been ordered by Cortes to discover
+the coast northwards from Culiacan, and which sailed from Acapulco, under
+the command of Francis Ulloa, having touched at _St Jago de Buena
+Speranca_, entered into the gulf of California, which Cortes discovered,
+and sailed up that gulf till they came almost to the farther end of it, in
+lat. 32 deg. N. at a place which they named _Ancon de San Andres_, because
+they came there on the day of that Saint. They returned southward along
+the other, or western coast of the gulf of California; and, having doubled
+the point of that peninsula, called _Cabo de San Lucas_, within certain
+islands, they sailed northwards, along the external coast of California,
+till they again reached to the same latitude of 32 deg. N. whence they
+returned into New Spain; forced to this measure by contrary winds and want
+of provisions, after having been absent a whole year on this voyage. In
+these discoveries, Cortes expended 200,000 ducats, according to his own
+account[87]. Cortes and his captains explored the coast of New Spain, from
+the lat. of 12 deg. N. to 32 deg. or 700 leagues; all of which was rather warm
+than cold, although snow is found on some of the mountains for the greater
+part of every year. From Cabo del Enganno to Cabo de Liampa in China, the
+distance is 1000 or 1200 leagues.
+
+In New Spain there are many trees, flowers, and fruits of various kinds,
+that are useful to man. The principal tree is named _Metl_, which does not
+grow either very tall or very thick. The natives plant and dress this tree
+as we do our vines; and they allege that it has forty different kinds of
+leaves, resembling woven cloth, which serve for many useful purposes. When
+tender, these leaves are made into conserves. From it they make a kind of
+paper, and a substance like flax; and it is also manufactured into mantles,
+mats, shoes, girdles, and cordage. This tree produces such strong and
+sharp prickles, that they are used instead of needles for sewing. The
+roots are used as fuel; and their ashes make excellent ley for the
+manufacture of soap. The natives open up the earth from the roots of this
+tree, and, by scraping or wounding them, they extract a juice which is a
+rich syrup. By boiling this juice, it is converted into honey; and, when
+purified, it becomes sugar; and may likewise be made into wine and vinegar.
+The fruit of this tree is called _Coco_. The rind roasted, crushed, and
+applied to sores or wounds, has a most healing quality. The juice of the
+roots and tops, mixed with incense, is a sovereign antidote against the
+bite of a viper and other poisons. From all these useful properties, this
+is the most profitable tree that is known in these parts[88].
+
+There are certain birds in New Spain called Vicmalim, having a long small
+bill, which live on dew and the juice of roses and other flowers; their
+feathers are very small, and of beautiful colours, and are much esteemed
+to work up into ornaments with gold. These birds die, or sleep rather,
+every year in the month of October, sitting on a small bough in some warm
+and close place; and they revive again in the month of April, when the
+flowers appear. There are snakes likewise in this country, which sound as
+if they had bells attached to them, when they creep along. There are other
+snakes also, which are said to engender by the mouth, as vipers are
+reported to do with us. There are likewise certain hogs, which have a
+navel on the ridge of the back; which the hunters cut out the moment they
+are killed, as otherwise the carcase would corrupt and stink, so as to be
+uneatable. Besides which, there are certain fishes which are named
+_Snorters_, because they make a snorting noise like hogs[89].
+
+In the year 1538, a civil war broke out in Peru, between Pizarro and
+Almagro; in the course of which, Almagro was taken prisoner and beheaded.
+After which, in the year 1539, Pizarro sent Peter to Baldivia into Chili;
+where he was at first well received, but the people afterwards rose
+against him, and sought to put him to death by treason. Notwithstanding
+the long and severe war he had to wage against the natives of Chili,
+Baldivia explored the country to a great extent, discovering the whole
+coast as far as lat. 40 deg. S. and even further. While Baldivia was occupied
+in these discoveries, he received intelligence of a king called
+_Lucengolma_, who commonly brought 200,000 men into the field, when
+engaged in war against another neighbouring king. Lucengolma was likewise
+said to have a temple in an island, in which there were 2000 priests. It
+was farther reported, that beyond the dominions of this king, there lay a
+country inhabited by a nation of Amazons, whose queen was named
+_Guanomilla_, which signifies _the golden heaven_. But, hitherto, these
+things rest merely on report, and have not been ascertained for truth, by
+actual discovery. About this time Gomez de Alvarado reduced the province
+of _Guanaco_ to obedience; and Francis de Chavez subdued the _Conchincos_,
+who often vexed the town of Truxillo and its adjoining country, by various
+inroads. Peter de Vergara reduced the _Bracamores_, a people to the north
+of Quito; John Perez de Veragara subdued the _Ciaciapoians_; Alfonsos de
+Mercadiglio subdued the people of _Mulubamba_; Ferdinando and Gonsalvo
+Pizarro reduced _Collao_, a country rich in gold; the lower part of which
+was subdued by Peter de Candia; Peranzures went also on an expedition into
+the same country. In this manner the Spaniards dispersed themselves over
+the whole country, and conquered an extent of more than 700 leagues; yet
+not without much labour, and considerable loss of men[90].
+
+The countries of Brazil and Peru stand east and west from each other,
+their coasts being almost 800 leagues distant at the nearest points, which
+are the Cape of St Augustine and the harbour of Truxillo, nearly in the
+same parallel of latitude. The greatest extent of Peru, measuring from the
+river of Peru in the north, to the Straits of Magellan in the south, is
+950 leagues. Through the whole of this country certain mountains, called
+the Andes, extend from north to south, which divide Brazil on the east,
+from Peru, or the empire of the Incas on the west. In the same manner, the
+mountains of Taurus and Imaus divide Asia into two parts; which mountains
+begin on the Mediterranean, in 36 or 37 degrees of north latitude, over
+against the islands of Rhodes and Cyprus, and extend eastwards to the sea
+of China. Thus, likewise, the mountains of Atlas in Africa divide the
+_tawny_ moors from the _black_ moors, or negroes who have frizzled hair.
+These mountains begin at Mount _Moies_, near the desert of Barca, and
+extend under the tropic of Cancer to the Atlantic; The mountains of the
+Andes are high and rugged, and barren in some places, without trees or
+even grass; and it almost always either rains or snows on their highest
+ranges, accompanied with sudden and violent tempests of wind. There is so
+great a scarcity of wood in these parts, that the inhabitants use turf or
+peats for fuel, as is done in Flanders. In these mountains and countries,
+the soil is in some places black, in others white, or red, blue, green,
+yellow, and violet; and, with some of these earths, the natives dye
+various colours, without using any other mixture. From the bottoms of
+these mountains, but principally on the east side, there flow many rivers,
+both small and great. Among these are the rivers Amazons, St Francis, and
+La Plata, and many others, which pervade the country of Brasil[91], which
+are much larger than those of Peru, or of Castilia del Oro. The country of
+Peru, between the Andes and the western sea or Pacific, is from 15 to 20
+leagues in breadth, all of a hot sandy soil, yet fertile, as being well
+watered, and produces many excellent trees and fruits. It produces many
+turnips, rapes, and other such herbs and roots; likewise abundance of
+flags, rushes, herbs, and flowers, of so loose and tender a texture, that
+the leaves drop off on the slightest touch. Among these herbs and fresh
+flowers, the natives often dwell without beds or houses, even like cattle
+in the fields, and some of them have tails[92]. These people are gross,
+and wear long hair, but have no beards; and they speak divers languages.
+One of the plants of this region called _aipo_, resembles rue, and bears a
+yellow flower, which cures all kinds of rotten sores; yet, if applied to
+sound flesh, will eat it to the bone.
+
+They say that these mountains abound in tigers, lions, bears, wolves, wild-
+cats, foxes, dantes, ounces, hogs, and deer; and with many birds, both
+ravenous and others, most of them being black; while under the north, both
+birds and beasts are mostly white. There are also great numbers of large
+and terrible snakes, which are said to have destroyed a whole army of one
+of the Incas, that was marching this way: Yet, according to report, an old
+woman did so enchant them, that they became quite harmless and gentle,
+insomuch that they would allow people to sit upon them. It is reported
+that, from Tumbez to Chili, there are no peacocks, hens, cocks, nor any
+eagles, hawks, kites, or other ravenous birds; but there are many ducks,
+geese, herns, pigeons, partridges, quails, and many other kinds of birds.
+There is likewise a certain fowl like a duck, which has no wings, but is
+covered all over with fine thin feathers. A certain species of bitterns
+are said to make war upon the sea-wolf or seal; for when this bird finds
+them on land, it tries to pick out their eyes, that they may not see their
+way back to the water, and then kills them; and the fight between the
+bitterns and the seals is said to be a pleasant sight.
+
+Those who live on the tops of the Andes, between the cold and the heat,
+are mostly blind of one eye, and some are totally blind; so that hardly
+can two men be found but one of them at least is half blind.
+Notwithstanding the great heat of the sand in Peru, it yields good crops
+of Maize and Potatoes, and an herb called _cocoa_, which the natives carry
+continually in their mouths, as those in the East Indies do _Betle_, and
+which they say satisfies both hunger and thirst. It is affirmed that, from
+Tumbez southwards, for the space of 500 leagues, there is neither rain,
+thunder nor lightning, with only some light showers. In Peru, there are
+certain animals, called _xacos_[93] by the natives, and sheep by the
+Spaniards, because they are covered with wool; but their shape resembles
+that of deer, and they have saddle backs like a camel, and are capable of
+carrying burdens of about a hundred weight each. The Spaniards ride upon
+them; and, when weary, they turn their heads backward, and void a
+wonderfully stinking liquor from their mouths. From the rivers La Plata
+and Lima, or Rimac, inclusively to the southwards, there are no crocodiles,
+lizards, snakes, or other venomous reptiles; but the rivers produce great
+store of excellent fish. On the coast of St Michael on the South Sea,
+there are many rocks of salt, covered with eggs. At the point of St Helena,
+there are springs from which a liquor flows, that serves instead of pitch
+and tar. It is said that there is a fountain in Chili which converts wood
+into stone. In the haven of Truxillo, there is a lake of fresh water, the
+bottom of which is good hard salt; and in the Andes, beyond Xauxa, there
+is a fresh water river which flows over a bottom of white salt. It is also
+affirmed that there formerly dwelt giants in Peru, of whom statues were
+found at Porto Vejo; and that their jaw bones were found in the haven of
+Truxillo, having teeth three or four fingers long.
+
+In the year 1540, the viceroy, Don Antonio de Mendoca, sent Ferdinando
+Alorchon with two ships, to explore the bottom of the gulph of California,
+and divers other countries. In the same year, Gonsalvo Pizarro went from
+Quito to discover the _Cinnamon_ country, of which there ran a great fame
+in Peru. Taking with him a force of 200 Spaniards, partly horse and part
+foot, with 300 Indians to carry the baggage, he marched to _Guixos_, the
+most distant place or frontier of the empire of the Incas; in which place
+there happened a great earthquake, accompanied with much rain and dreadful
+lightning, by which seventy houses were swallowed up. From that place they
+passed over a chain of cold and snowy mountains, where they found many
+Indians frozen to death, and they wondered much at finding so much snow
+immediately under the equinoctial line. From thence they proceeded to a
+province called _Cumaco_, where they were detained two months on account
+of constant rain; and beyond this, they came to the cinnamon trees, which
+are of great size, with leaves resembling those of the bay tree. The
+leaves, branches, roots, and every part of this tree, tasted like cinnamon,
+but this taste and flavour was particularly strong in the root; yet that
+was still stronger in certain knobs, like _alcornoques_, or acorns, which
+were good merchandize. This appears to have been of the same nature with
+wild cinnamon, of which there is great abundance in the East Indies,
+particularly in the island of _Jaoa_, or Java. From this cinnamon country,
+they proceeded onwards to the province and city of Coca, where they halted
+for fifty days; after which they travelled for sixty leagues along a river,
+without being able to find any bridge or ford at which they could pass
+over. In one place they found this river to form a cataract of 200 fathoms
+in perpendicular fall, making such a noise as was almost sufficient to
+deafen any person who stood near. Not far beyond this fall, the river was
+found to glide in a smooth channel, worn out of the rock; and at this
+place they constructed a bridge by which they passed to the other side,
+and entered into a country called Guema, which was so poor, that they
+could only get fruit and herbs to subsist upon. Travelling onwards from
+that place, they came to a district where the people had some degree of
+civilization, and wore cotton clothing of their own manufacture, and used
+canoes. They here built a brigantine, in which, and in some canoes,
+procured or taken from the natives, they embarked their sick, with their
+treasure, provisions, and spare apparel, under the charge of Francis de
+Orellana; while Gonsalvo Pizarro marched by land with the rest of the
+people along the river, going every night into the boats. In this manner
+they proceeded for about 200 leagues; when one night, on coming to the
+river side, in hopes of joining the boats as usual, Pizarro could not see
+or hear of them. He and his people were reduced, by this unfortunate
+incident, to a state of almost utter despair: In a strange, poor, and
+barren country, without provisions, clothing, or any other convenience,
+and at a vast distance from their friends, with a prodigious extent of
+difficult and dangerous road interposed between them and Quito, they were
+reduced to the necessity of eating their horses, and even their dogs. Yet
+holding a good heart, they proceeded onwards in their journey for eighteen
+months, penetrating, as is said, almost 500 leagues, without ever seeing
+the sun or any thing else to comfort them. At length, of the 200 men who
+had set out from Quito, only ten returned thither; and these so weak,
+ragged, and disfigured, that they could not be recognized. Orellana went 5
+or 600 leagues down the river, passing through various countries and
+nations on both sides, among whom he affirmed that some were Amazons[94].
+From the mouth of that river, Orellana went home to Spain, and excused
+himself for having deserted Pizarro, and those who marched by land, by
+alleging, that he had been forced down the river by the strength of the
+current, which he was utterly unable to stem. By some, this river is named
+after Orellana, who first navigated its waters; and others call it the
+river of the Amazons, on account of a female nation of warriors, who are
+said to inhabit its banks[95].
+
+In the year 1541, Don Stephen de Gama, the Portuguese governor of India,
+went with a squadron into the Red Sea, by the strait of Mecca, or of
+Babelmandel, and came to anchor off the island of Macua, or Massoua; from
+whence he sailed along the coast of Abyssinia, or Ethiopia, to the island
+of Suachem, in lat. 20 deg. N. and to the harbour of Cossier, in 27 deg.. From
+thence, he crossed over to the Arabian shore, and the city of Toro, and
+sailed from that place to Suez, at the farther end of the Red Sea, and
+returned from thence to India, having extended the Portuguese knowledge of
+that sea farther than had ever been done before. On the way between
+Cossier and Toro, Gama is said to have found an island of brimstone, which
+had been dispeopled by Mahomet, wherein many crabs are bred, which
+increase nature, on which account, they are much sought after by the
+unchaste.
+
+It is true that Lopez Suarez, when governor of India, had navigated the
+Red Sea, as far as Judda, the haven of Mecca, in lat. 23 deg. N. 150 leagues
+from the straits of Babelmandel; but Gama penetrated to the very northern
+extremity of the gulph[96]. In the same year, Diego de Almagro killed the
+Marquis Francis Pizarro, and his brother Francis Martinez de Alcantara, in
+the city of Lima, or _de los Reyes_, and usurped the government of Peru.
+
+In the same year, 1541, Don Antony de Mendca, viceroy of Mexico, sent an
+army of Spaniards and Indians from Mexico, under the command of Francis
+Vasquez de Coronado, by way of Culiacan, into the province of Sibola, or
+Cinaloa, which is in lat. 30 deg. N.[97]. Coronado endeavoured to treat on
+friendly terms with the natives, and requested to be furnished with
+provisions; but received for answer, that they were not accustomed to give
+any thing to those who came unto their country in a warlike manner. Upon
+this, the Spaniards assaulted and took the town, to which they gave the
+name of New Granada, because the general was a native of Granada in Old
+Spain. The soldiers found themselves much deceived by the reports of the
+friars who had been in those parts, as already mentioned under the year
+1538, who said that the country was rich in gold, silver, and precious
+stones. Not being willing, therefore, to return empty-handed to Mexico,
+they went to the town of _Acuco_, where they heard of _Axa_ and _Quivira_,
+the king of which was reported to worship a golden cross, and the picture
+of the Queen of Heaven, or the blessed Virgin. In this journey, the
+Spaniards endured many hardships, but the Indians fled every where before
+them, and one morning, they found thirty of their horses had died during
+the night. From _Cicuic_ they went to _Quivira_, a distance of 200 leagues
+in their estimation, the whole way being in a level country; and they
+marked their route by means of small hillocks of cow dung, that they might
+be the better able to find their way back. At one time they had a storm of
+hail, the hailstones being as large as oranges. At length they reached
+Quivira, where they found the King _Tatarax_, whose only riches consisted
+in a copper ornament, which he wore suspended from his neck. They saw
+neither cross, nor image of the virgin, nor any indication whatever of the
+Christian religion. This country, according to their report, was very
+thinly inhabited, more especially in its champaign or level parts, in
+which the whole people wandered about with their cattle, of which they
+have great abundance, living much in the same manner with the Arabs in
+Barbary, removing from place to place according to the seasons, in search
+of pastures for their cattle. The cattle belonging to these Indians are
+almost as large as horses, having large horns, and bear fleeces of wool
+like sheep, on which account the Spaniards gave them that name. They have
+abundance of another kind of oxen or cattle, very monstrous in their form
+having hunches on their backs like camels, with long beards, and long
+manes like horses. The Indians live by eating these oxen, and by drinking
+their blood, and clothe themselves in their skins. Most of their food is
+raw, or at least slightly roasted, as they have no pots in which to boil
+their food. They cut their meat with certain knives made of flint. Their
+fruits are damsons, hazel-nuts, melons, grapes, pines, and mulberries.
+They have dogs of such vast strength, that one of them will hold a bull,
+be he never so wild. When the Indians remove from place to place, these
+dogs carry their wives, children, and household stuff on their backs; and
+are so strong as to carry fifty pounds at once[98]. I omit many other
+circumstances of this expedition, because the plan I have prescribed
+requires brevity[99].
+
+In the year 1542, when Diego de Frietas was in the port of Dodra, in the
+kingdom of Siam, three Portuguese of his crew deserted, and went in a junk
+towards China. The names of these men were, Antonio de Mota, Francis
+Zeimoro, and Antonio Pexoto; who directed their course for the city of
+Liampa, in lat. 30 deg. N. or upwards[100]. Having encountered a great storm,
+they were driven to a distance from land distance from land, and came in
+sight of an island far to the east, in lat. 32 deg. N. which they called Japan,
+and which seems to be the isle of Zipangri, mentioned by Marco Polo the
+Venetian, which in exceedingly rich in gold and silver, and other valuable
+commodities.
+
+In the same year, 1542, Don Antonio de Mendoca, the viceroy of New Spain,
+sent certain sea captains and pilots to explore the Coast of Cape del
+Engannon, where a fleet, sent by Cortes, had been before. They sailed as
+far as the latitude 40 deg. N. when they came in sight of a range of mountains
+covered in snow, which they name _Sierras Nevadas_, or the snowy mountains
+in lat. 40 deg.N. They here met with certain merchant ships, which carried on
+their stems the images of a kind of birds called _Aleutarsi_, and had
+their yards gilded, and their bows laid over with silver. These seemed to
+belong to the islands of Japan or to China, as the people said that their
+country was within thirty days sail[101]. In the same year, the viceroy
+Mendoca sent a fleet of six ships, with 400 Spanish soldiers, and as many
+Mexicans, under the command of his brother-in-law, Rui Lopez de Villa
+Lobos, a person in high estimation, to the Mindanao islands. They sailed
+on the eve of All Saints, from the harbour of Natividad, in lat. 20 deg.N. and
+shaping their course towards the west, they came in sight of the island of
+St Thomas, which had been before discovered by Hernando de Girijalva; and
+beyond that, in 17 deg.N, they got sight of another island, which they named
+_La Nebulata_ or the Cloudy Island; and from thence, they came to another
+island, which they named _Roca Partalia_, or the cloven rock. On the 3rd.
+of December, they discovered certain shoals, having only six or seven
+fathoms water. On the fifteenth of the same month, they had sight of the
+islands which were discovered by Diego de Roca, Gomez de Sequieira, and
+Alvaro de Saavedra, called _Los Reyes_ or islands of the kings, because
+discovered on Twelfth day. And beyond these, they found a cluster of
+islands, in 10 deg. of latitude, and came to an anchor in the midst of them,
+where they took in wood and water. In January 1548 leaving these islands,
+they came in sight of certain other islands, from which the natives came
+off to them, in a kind of boats, bearing crosses in their hands, and they
+saluted the mariners in the Spanish language, saying, _Buenos dias
+Matelotes_, or, good day companions. The Spaniards were much surprised at
+being thus accosted in their own language, and seeing such indications of
+Christianity, at no great a distance from Spain, not knowing that many of
+the natives in these parts had been baptised by Francis de Castro, at the
+command of me, Antonio Galvano, an formerly mentioned. From these unlooked-
+for circumstances, some of the Spaniards named these islands _Islas de los
+Cruzos_, or the Islands of Crosses and others called them _Islas de los
+Matelotes_, or the Islands of Companions[101]. On the first of February,
+Ruy Lopez came in sight of the noble island of Mindanao, in 9 N.[102].
+But he could neither double that inland, owing to contrary winds, nor
+would the natives permit him to come to anchor on their coast, because the
+five or six christened kings and their people had promised obedience to me
+Antonio Galvano, and were unwilling to incur my displeasure. On this
+account, and constrained by contrary winds, Lopez sailed along the coast
+in quest of a place of safety; and, in four or five degrees of latitude,
+he found a small island called Sarangam by the natives, which he took
+possession of by force, and named it Antonio after the viceroy of Mexico.
+Ruy Lopez, and his people remained here a whole year, during which many
+things occurred worth notice; but as these are treated of in other
+histories, I refrain from mentioning them, confining myself entirely to
+discoveries.
+
+In the month of August of the same year, 1548, Ruy Lopez, sent Bartholomew
+de la Torre in a small ship to New Spain, to acquaint the viceroy of his
+proceedings. Torre went first to the islands named _Siria, Gaonala,
+Bisaia_, and many others, in 11 deg. and 12 deg. N. lat. where Magellan and de
+Castro had both been formerly, and where the latter baptized many of the
+natives; and the Spaniards called these the _Phillipinas_, in honour of
+the prince of Spain[104]. In these islands Torre procured provisions, and
+wood and water, whence he sailed for several days with a fair wind, edging
+towards the north-east, till he came right under the tropic of Cancer. On
+the 25th of September, they came in sight of certain islands, which they
+named _Malabrigos_, or the evil roads; beyond which they discovered _Las
+dos Hermanas_, or the Two Sisters; and beyond these again, four islands
+which they called _las Volcanes_. On the second of October they came in
+sight of _Farfana_, beyond which there is a high pointed rock, which
+throws up fire in five places. Sailing in this manner, for some time, in
+16 deg. of north latitude, they were obliged by continual contrary winds, to
+bear up again for the Philippine islands, and in their way back, had sight
+of six or seven additional islands, but did not anchor at any of them.
+They found also an archipelago, or numerous cluster of islands, in 15 or
+16 degrees of north latitude, well inhabited by a white people, with
+beautiful well-proportioned women, and much better clothed than in any
+other of the islands of these parts; and they had many golden ornaments,
+which was a sure sign that there was some of that metal in their country.
+These people likewise had barks or vessels of forty-three cubits long, by
+two fathoms and a half in breadth, constructed of planks five inches broad,
+and which were rowed with oars. The people told the Spaniards that they
+were in use to sail in these vessels to China, which was not above five or
+six days sail from thence, and offered to supply them with pilots, if they
+were inclined to go thither. Several of these barks, handsomely decked,
+came off to the Spanish ship, in which the master, and other principal
+people, sat on a high platform, while the rowers sat underneath, who were
+_blackamoors_ or negroes with frizzled hair. Being asked whence they had
+these negroes, they answered that they were brought from certain islands
+near Sebut, where there were abundance to be had. The Spaniards wondered
+much at finding negroes in this place, being above 300 leagues from the
+nearest land of the negroes. It is therefore probable that these people
+were not originally natives of this part of the world; but that they have
+been scattered somehow in various places over the circuit of the earth, as
+they are found in the islands of Nicobar and Andaman, in the bay of Bengal.
+From thence, for the space of 500 leagues, we do not know of any other
+black people: Yet Vasco Nunnez de Valboa pretends to have discovered them,
+when he went to explore the coast of the South Sea, in a country which he
+named _Quareca_; but there never were any found in New Spain, Castilia del
+Oro, or in Peru.
+
+In the year 1544, Don Gutierre de Vargas, bishop of Placenza, the cousin
+of Mendoca, sent a fleet from Seville to the straits of Magellan,
+instigated by the advice of the viceroy. Some said that this fleet was
+destined for the Moluccas, others for China, and others again, that it was
+meant only to explore the coast from the straits along Chili to Peru.
+However this may have been, the fleet was unable, from contrary winds, to
+get through the straits, except one small bark which got into the South
+Sea, and sailed along the whole coast, till it came to _Chirimai_ and
+_Arequipa_, which is above 500 leagues, which were now explored; all the
+rest of the coast having been formerly discovered by Diego de Almagro,
+Francis Pizarro, and their people, at various times[105].
+
+In January of the year 1545, Ruy Lopez de Villa Lobos, formerly mentioned,
+came with his Spaniards to the isle of _Moro_[106], and the city of
+_Camato_, where he was well received by the kings of Gilolo and Tidore,
+and the people of the country; for I, Antonio Galvano, had then left the
+Moluccas; and they put the governor Don George de Castro to much trouble,
+and great expence. In the same year, 1545, Ruy Lopez de Villa Lobos, sent
+another ship from Tidore for New Spain, under the command of Ignatius
+Ortez de Rotha, and having Jaspar Rico as pilot, with orders to attempt
+the passage by the south side of the line. Ortez sailed to the coast of
+Papua, which he explored; and, as he knew not that Saavedra had been there
+formerly, he challenged the credit and honour of the discovery. Finding
+the natives of a black colour, with frizzled hair, he named the country on
+that account New Guinea. Thus, the memory of Saavedra was then almost lost,
+as every thing is apt to fall into oblivion, unless put upon record, and
+illustrated by writing.
+
+In June of this year, 1545, one Pedro Fidalgo, a Portuguese, sailed in a
+junk from the city of Borneo; but being driven to the north by contrary
+winds, he fell in with a large island, the south extremity of which lay in
+nine or ten degrees of north latitude, while it stretched to lat. 22 deg. N.
+at its other end, which is called the island of Lucones, from the name of
+the nation by which it is inhabited. Perhaps it may have some other name,
+of which, as yet, we have not been informed. This island runs from the
+north for a great way directly south, and then takes a turn towards the
+south-east. It is said that Fidalgo sailed for 250 leagues along the coast
+of this island, which is in the midway-between Mindanao and China, and he
+reported that the land was fruitful, and well clothed with trees and
+verdure; and that the inhabitants will give two pezoes of gold for one of
+silver, although so near China, in which the relative value of these
+metals is so well understood.
+
+In the year 1553, certain ships were sent out from England, which sailed
+to the northward, along the coast of Norway and Finmark, and from thence
+east, in seventy or eighty degrees of north latitude, till they came to
+Muscovy, to which country one of the ships penetrated; but I have not been
+able to learn what became of the rest. From the land of Muscovy, a ship
+may sail eastwards to Tartary, at the farthest extremity of which China is
+situated. It is reported that there is a wall above 200 leagues in length,
+between Tartary and China, in about lat. 50 deg. N.
+
+From all the preceding discoveries, it may be concluded, that, as the
+whole earth is 360 degrees, and the ancient writers allow 17-1/2 leagues
+for every degree, the entire circuit of the earth would thus be 6300
+leagues; but as, in my opinion, each degree is exactly seventeen leagues,
+the circuit will then be only 6120 leagues. However this may be, the whole
+circuit of the globe has been discovered and sailed over, from east to
+west, even almost as it is encompassed and visited by the sun in its
+diurnal course. It is quite otherwise, however, in respect to the northern,
+and southern parts of the earth. For, towards the north pole, there has
+only been discovered hitherto to the latitude of 77 deg. or 78 deg., which make an
+extent of 1347 leagues; and between the equinoctial and the south pole,
+there has only been discovered to the latitude of 52 deg. or 53 deg. south, or to
+the Straits of Magellan; which amounts to no more than 960 leagues. Now,
+adding these two together, their sum is just 2257 leagues: And, deducting
+this sum from 6300 leagues, there still remains to be discovered, in the
+north and south, 4043 leagues.
+
+
+[1] Ferdinand was hereditary king of Arragon; but, by marrying Isabella,
+    queen of Castile, had united the several monarchies of Spain, under
+    one government. Ferdinand had no share whatever in the honour of
+    sending out Columbus, the sole charge being defrayed by his consort,
+    Isabella, hereditary queen of Castile and Leon; and who had even to
+    borrow money for the purpose. The contemptuous notice of _one_
+    Christopher Columbus, must be pardoned to the patriotic rivalry of a
+    Portuguese.--E.
+
+[2] Galvano is here inaccurate: It will be seen in the sequel, that
+    Bartholomew Columbus did not accompany his brother in this voyage,
+    being then in England.--E.
+
+[3] It is certainly possible, that Columbus may have used that mode in his
+    course to the Canaries: But as his run across the Atlantic was nearly
+    on a parallel, he must have kept that part of his voyage by what is
+    called dead reckoning, or by the log.--E.
+
+[4] The middle of Guanahana is in lat. 24 deg. 30' N. The centre of Jamaica in
+    18 deg. 10' N. The latitudes of Galvano are generally inaccurate; and he
+    never pretends to assign any longitudes whatever. The series, likewise,
+    in which he arranges the discoveries of Columbus is very inaccurate.
+    --E.
+
+[5] Cape de Verd is in 14 deg. 30' N. Deseada in 16 deg. 30' N. a difference of
+    two degrees of latitude. Dominica, in 15 deg. 30' is the first land said
+    to have been discovered by Columbus in his _second_ voyage, in the
+    authentic original narrative by his son, which will be found in the
+    sequel.--E.
+
+[6] Counting from Dominica to the north side of Cuba, between 15 deg. 30' and
+    23 deg. 15'.--E.
+
+[7] The negociators of the two crowns, as here related, seem to have been
+    ignorant that this loose division of the globe gave the whole
+    reciprocally to each of the parties.--E.
+
+[8] The apparent object seems to have been in search of a passage to the
+    East Indies by way of the north-west, a chimera long and anxiously
+    sought after. It is needless to make any observations on these
+    indistinct notices, as the voyage of Cabot will be afterwards given at
+    full length.--E.
+
+[9] The centre of Trinidada is in 10 deg. 30'N. its S.W. point in 10 deg. 12', and
+    the N.E. cape in 10 45' N.--E.
+
+[10] De Barros, Dec. I. 1. 4. c. 2. and to the end of ch. 11.--Hakl.
+
+[11] Osorius says this voyage commenced on the 9th of July.--Clarke.
+
+[12] This Panama seems a blunder of some ignorant copyist, for Panarame.
+    --E.
+
+[13] The coast here is nearly N. and S. and their course must have been to
+    the north.--E.
+
+[14] The Marannon and Amazons are the same river. Perhaps by the Rio Dolce
+    the Orinoco may be meant; but in these slight notices of discovery it
+    is impossible at times to ascertain the real positions, through the
+    alteration of names.--E.
+
+[15] From the latitude indicated by Galvano, the land of Cortereal may
+    have been somewhere on the eastern side of Newfoundland.--E.
+
+[16] Barros, Dec. 1. I. 5. c. 10.
+
+[17] Gomara, I. 2.
+
+[18] About 8200 ounces, worth about L. 16,000 sterling; equal in modern
+    efficacy, perhaps, to L. 100,000.--E.
+
+[19] Probably an error for Taprobana; the same by which Ceylon was known
+    to the ancients.--E.
+
+[20] The Cakerlaka of other writers, which can only be large monkeys or
+    baboons, called men with tails, through ignorance or imposture.--E.
+
+[21] Rumi still continues the eastern name of the Turkish empire, as the
+    successor of the Roman emperors, in Assyria and Egypt. Hence these
+    Roman gold coins may have come in the way of trade from Assyria or
+    Egypt, or may possibly have been Venetian sequins.--E.
+
+[22] The author must here mean Cochin China by the coast of Patane.--E.
+
+
+[23] About 1000 by 320 English miles.--E.
+
+[24] This story of the skull of a small insect is quite unintelligible,
+    and must have been misunderstood entirely by Hakluyt, the translator:
+    It is the Elephant, probably, that is here meant.--E.
+
+[25] Probably the bird of Paradise.--Clarke.
+
+[26] P. Martyr, Dec. 3. c. 10.
+
+[27] The island of Tararequi is in lat. 5 deg. N.
+
+[28] These leagues are elsewhere explained as 17-1/2 to the degree, or
+    about 4 English miles: Hence the estimate of Galvano is 2000 miles
+    long by 1200 miles broad; certainly a very extensive dominion. China
+    Proper may be said to extend in length from lat. 27 deg. to 41 deg. N. and in
+    breadth from long. 97 deg. to 121 deg. E. not very inferior to the above
+    estimate; but including the immeasurable bounds of its dependencies,
+    Chinese Tartary, Thibet, and almost the whole of central Asia, it
+    prodigiously exceeds the magnitude here assigned by Galvano.--E.
+
+[29] Castagnada, I. 4. c. 36. 37. Osorius, I. 11. f. 315. p. 2.
+
+[30] Pet. Mart. IV. iv. Gomar. II. xiv. and xvii.
+
+[31] The text is obscure, and seems to indicate that they were unable to
+    pass between the island of Ascension and the main of Yucatan. The
+    latitudes are extremely erroneous: Cozumel is in lat. 20 deg. N. The
+    island of Ambergris, perhaps the Ascension of the text, is in 18 deg. 30'.
+    From errors in latitude and alterations of nomenclature, it is often
+    impossible to follow distinctly the routes of these early voyagers.--E.
+
+[32] Pet. Mart. IV. vi. Gomar. II. xviii, &c.
+
+[33] Gomar. II. xxi, xxii, xxiii, xxiv.
+
+[34] This certainly ought to be called the Molucca islands; but Galvano
+    uniformly applies the same name, Malacca, both to the spice islands
+    and the city of Malacca on the Continent.--E.
+
+[35] Gomar. IV. iii. Pet. Mart. V. vii.
+
+[36] Ramusio, I. 874.
+
+[37] This seems to mean the Straits of Babelmandel. Having lost sight of
+    Prester John in Tartary, the Portuguese were delighted with the
+    discovery of a Christian king in Africa, the Negus of Abyssinia; and
+    transferred to him that popular fable.--E.
+
+[38] These countries, with the river and cape mentioned in the text, are
+    now unknown, these arbitrary names having merged in the nomenclature
+    of more recent settlers. If the latitude be nearly accurate, it may
+    have been on the confines of Georgia and South Carolina.--E.
+
+[39] Gomar. II. l.
+
+[40] Id. II. lx.
+
+[41] Malacca of the text ought certainly to be Molucca: Bouro is in lat.
+    3 deg. 20' S. Timor between 8 deg. 30' and 10 deg. 20' S.--E.
+
+[42] Gomar. IV. viii.
+
+[43] Id. VI. iv. li.
+
+[44] Gomar. IV. viii, and xii. Castagn. VI. xli.
+
+[45] Gomar. VI. xii.
+
+[46] Castagn. VI. xlii.
+
+[47] Gomar. II. lxi. The text, in Hakluyt's translation, has the absurd
+    number of 76,000 Castilians lost in this war; 76 is a more probable
+    number, and is considerable out of his small force: yet, the text may
+    mean 76,000 _Castellans_ of gold, as the sum expended on the
+    expedition; and which Hakluyt, or his printer, changed to that number
+    of _Castilians_.--E.
+
+[48] Gomar. Conqu. de Mex. f. 226.
+
+[49] Id. 242. This bay reaches no farther to the S. than 148 10' N.--E.
+
+[50] Id. f. 229. 230.
+
+[51] Id. f. 233.
+
+[52] Gomar. Conqu. f. 234. and Hist. Gen. III. xxi.
+
+[53] Id: Hist. Gen. II. vii.
+
+[54] In this latitude, on the shore of Costa Rica, there is a town now
+    called Porto Cartago; but whether that indicated in the text it is
+    difficult to say, as Galvano is not always perfectly accurate in his
+    latitudes.--E.
+
+[55] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. lxv. and Conqu. f. 243.
+
+[56] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. lxvi, and Conqu. f. 256-261.
+
+[57] The Spanish leagues are 17-1/2 to the degree of latitude, hence this
+    march exceeded 2000 English miles.--E. Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. lxvi. Id.
+    Conqu. 246-273.
+
+[58] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. i. and ii.
+
+[59] The ambiguity of the language is here utterly inexplicable.--E.
+
+[60] Meaning probably the lake of Titicaca in Peru. It is hardly necessary
+    to say that this slight survey of the Plata must be erroneous,
+    especially in its reports. The Rio San Francisco, alludes to one of
+    the sources of the Great Maranon, or river of the Amazons.--E.
+
+[61] Ramusio, III. 310. Ramusio gives a long and minute account of this
+    unfortunate expedition, entitled, Relation made by Alvaro Nunez, of
+    what befel the armament sent to the _Indies_ (America) under Pamphilo
+    Narvaez in the year 1527, to the end of 1536; when he returned to
+    Seville with _three_ only of his companions.--Clarke.
+
+[62] The inhabitants of this island were most probably _tatooted_, of
+    which custom a particular description will be given hereafter, in the
+    particular voyages of discovery in the South Sea.--E.
+
+[63] The longitudes being altogether neglected in these relations by
+    Galyano, it is impossible to form any conjecture as to the islands
+    indicated in text. They may possibly have belonged to the Carolines of
+    modern maps, which extend between long. 135 deg. and 180 deg. E. and about the
+    latitudes of the text.--E.
+
+[64] The account which Galvano gives of this voyage is very vague and
+    inconclusive. We shall find afterwards that the Spaniards found out
+    the means of counteracting the perpetual eastern trade winds of the
+    Pacific within the tropics, by shaping a more northerly course from
+    the Philippine islands, where they established the staple of their
+    Indian commerce, between Acapulco and Manilla.--E.
+
+
+[65] Galvano certainly mistakes here in assigning Tecoantepec, which is at
+    least 340 miles from the nearest part of the bay of Honduras. If a
+    navigation were practicable from Tecoantepec, it would more probably
+    be towards Tabasco, at the bottom of the bay of Campechy. Perhaps he
+    ought to have said from Guatimala to the gulf of Dolse, at the bottom
+    of the bay of Honduras. This splendid navigation between the Atlantic
+    and Pacific, within the tropics, like that between the Mediterranean
+    and Red Sea, still remains an unsolved problem. It will be resumed
+    hereafter, among the voyages and travels to Spanish America.--E.
+
+[66] These seem all to have been brothers to Pizarro, and named from the
+    town of Alcantara in Spain.--E.
+
+[67] The mouth of the Maranon is exactly under the line.--E.
+
+[68] The latitude of Cusco is only 13 deg. 30' S.--E.
+
+[69] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. vi. vii. viii. ix
+
+[70] Gomar. Hist. Gen. V. xvi. xviii. xix.
+
+[71] So named from the two brothers, Caspar and Michael Cortereal, who are
+    said to have been lost on this coast of North America in 1500, as
+    formerly mentioned by Galvano.--E.
+
+[72] Xalis, or Xalisco, the residence of Gusman is in lat. 21 deg.45'N. The
+    mouth of the river St Francis, on the north-eastern shore of the gulf
+    of California, is in lat. 26 deg. 40' N. so that the discovery on the
+    present occasion seems to have comprised about 350 miles to the north
+    of Xalis.--E.
+
+[73] Gomar. Hist. Gen. II. Lxxiv. xcviii.
+
+[74] Xauxa or Jauja, stands on the high table land of Peru; Lima, or de
+    los Reys, near the coast of the South Sea, in the maritime valley, or
+    low country, and on the river Rimac, called Lima in the text.--E.
+
+[75] Gomar. Hist. Gen. IV. xxiii. and V. xxii.
+
+[76] Gomar. H. G. V. xxiv. and xxv. Almagro appears, both on his march to
+    Chili and back to Cusco, to have gone by the high mountainous track
+    of the Andes, and the carcases of his dead horses must have been
+    preserved from corruption amid the ever during ice and snow of that
+    elevated region.--E.
+
+[77] The text seems ambiguous, and it appears difficult to say whether
+    Galvano means, that Cosesofar, or Coje Sofar, was captain under
+    D'Acunha, or general of the Guzerat army, belonging to Badu.--E.
+
+[78] This probably refers to the _Bore_, or great and sudden influx of
+    the sea, after a great recession.--E.
+
+[79] Gomar. H. G. IV. xiii.
+
+[80] Probably a mistake for La Paz, the principal town of the north-
+    western district, or mining province, belonging to the Viceroyalty of
+    La Plata.--E.
+
+[81] The only island mentioned in this voyage, which can be traced by the
+    names in our modern maps, is the Piscadores, about lat. 11 deg. N. long.
+    167 deg. E.--E.
+
+[82] This strange expression is quite inexplicable, and must have been
+    misunderstood by Hakluyt.--E.
+
+[83] Probably Morty, of our present maps.--E.
+
+[84] Chron. del Peru, c. ix, xx.
+
+[85] Ramus. III. 356.
+
+[86] This obviously refers to an inaccurate description of the Babyroussa.
+    --E.
+
+[87] Gomar. H. G. II. lxiv. Ramus. III. 329.
+
+[88] Gomar. H. G. VI. xvii.
+
+[89] In this paragraph we have very vague indications of humming birds,
+    rattlesnakes, and of the animal now called Pecari.--E.
+
+[90] Gomar. H. G. V. xxxv. and Chron. del Peru, c. 103.
+
+[91] The word Brazil in the text obviously includes the whole flat country
+    to the east of the Andes, Guiana, Brazil, Paraguay, Buenos Ayres, and
+    Patagonia.--E.
+
+[92] This idea, ever since the time of Lord Monboddo, has been renewed,
+    and occupies the attention of the explorers of Africa; links may exist,
+    in creation, with which we are yet unacquainted.--Clarke.
+
+    The fancy of tailed men has probably arisen from inattentive observers,
+    seeing people clothed in the skins of beasts, with the tails hanging
+    down. The natives of New South Wales wear tails in imitation of the
+    Kangaroo: Yet, having been closely observed, are not described as
+    tailed men--E.
+
+[93] This word ought to have been _Pacos_. Of these animals, with the
+    Llamas and Vicugnas, different species of the camel genus, a more
+    extended account will occur, when we come to the particular travels in
+    Peru.--E.
+
+[94] It will be seen afterwards, in the account of the West India Islands,
+    and the Continent of Guiana, that there are many warlike tribes of
+    Caribs, or Caraibs, constantly engaged in predatory warfare; whose
+    women, when their husbands are absent in search of prisoners for
+    _food_, take arms for the protection of themselves and children;
+    whence they have been reported as nations of female warriors, or
+    Amazons.--E.
+
+[95] Gomar. H.G.V. xxxvi.
+
+[96] The true latitudes of the places mentioned in the text are, Suakim,
+    19 30', Massoua, 15 20', Cossier, 26 deg. 16', Judda, 21 20', Suez, 30 deg..
+    --E.
+
+[97] The latitude of 30 deg. N. would lead to the idea of Sonora being the
+    district, or province, indicated in the text by Sibola; Cinaloa is
+    only in 26 deg. N. yet, from the context, appears to be the country
+    intended by Galvano--E.
+
+[98] The idea that a dog, even able to bear a load of fifty pounds, should
+    carry a woman, is truly absurd. If there be any truth in the story,
+    the dogs must have performed the services in the text by drawing
+    sledges; yet nothing of the kind has hitherto been found in North
+    America, though common in North-east Asia.--E.
+
+[99] Gomar. H.G. VI. xviii. and xix.
+
+[100] In other writers Liampa and Siampa, or Tsiompa, are synonimous; but
+    that place is in lat. 12 deg. N. The latitude of the text would lead us to
+    the eastern coast of China, between Ningpo and Nankin.--E.
+
+[101] Gomez, H. G. VI. xviii. This story, which Galvano has reported from
+    Genoa, seems altogether unworthy of credit.--E.
+
+[102] The Matelots are laid down in our modern maps, in lat. 9 deg. N. Long
+    137 deg. E. not far E.N.E. of the Pelew, or Pillelew islands.--E.
+
+[103] This great inland of Mindanao, to the south of the Philippines,
+    reaches from 9 deg. 30' N. to 5 deg. 30', and from long. 122 deg. to 126 deg. 20' E.
+    being about 300 miles long, by 270 miles broad.--E.
+
+[104] The Philippines, exclusive of Mindanao and Palawa, extend from Lat.
+    9 deg. to 18 40' both N. and are in E. long. 122 but their present
+    geographical names, Luzon, Samar, Leyte, Zebu, Negros, Pany, Mindora,
+    and several other smaller isles, have no resemblance whatever with
+    those of the text.--E.
+
+[105] Gomar. H.G. IV. xiv.
+
+[106] Probably Morty, the most north-easterly of the Moluccas.--E.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+THE JOURNEY OF AMBROSE CONTARINI, AMBASSADOR FROM THE REPUBLIC OF VENICE
+TO UZUN-HASSAN, KING OF PERSIA, IN THE YEARS 1473, 4, 5, AND. 6, WRITTEN
+BY HIMSELF.
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+This relation of a journey into Persia, between the years 1473 and 1477,
+is from a collection of voyages and travels, principally in Asia, made in
+the _twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth_, and _fifteenth centuries_, which
+was published at the Hague, in the French language, in 1735. That
+collection usually goes under the name of _Bergeron_, whose name appears
+on the title somewhat equivocally as the author; but who is mentioned in
+the advertisement as a writer belonging to the middle of the preceding
+century; and the only part of the work that can, be attributed to him, is
+a _Treatise of Navigation, and of the Modern Voyages of Discovery and
+Conquest, especially those made by the French, &c._ which serves as an
+introduction to this compilement. The editor of this collection gives no
+account of himself, or of the sources from whence he has derived his
+different articles; and only says, that the journal of Contarini was
+translated into French, that it might be published along with the other
+contents of his volume. From the _Bibliotheque Universelle des Voyages_,
+by G. Boucher de la Richarderie, a new work of great research, published
+at Paris in 1808, we learn that the journal of Contarini was published in
+Italian at Venice, in a duodecimo volume, in 1543. So far as is known to
+us, it now appears for the first time in an English translation. This
+article might have been more aptly placed towards the close of _first_
+part of the present collection, but escaped notice in proper time and it
+appears of too much importance, both in itself, and as an early document,
+to be omitted from punctilious attention to rigid systematic arrangement.
+
+PREFACE OF THE AUTHOR.
+
+"The illustrious republic of Venice, having done me the honour to appoint
+me ambassador to Uzun-Hassan, king of Persia, I accepted the employment
+with much pleasure, both that I might do acceptable service to my own
+country and for the general good of Christendom. I neither considered the
+difficulties nor the dangers of the journey, but placed my trust solely
+on the assistance of God; preferring the interests of my country, and of
+the Christian world, to my own ease and safety. On purpose to render my
+discoveries useful to the public, I have carefully and briefly recorded
+every circumstance deserving of attention, that occurred during my long
+and laborious journey; as relative to the provinces, cities, and places
+through which I travelled, and the manners and customs of the different
+nations among whom I sojourned. In short, I have omitted nothing
+deserving of notice, that occurred during my three years journey, having
+left Venice on the first day of Lent, in the year 1473, and having
+returned to my beloved country on the 24th of February in the year
+1476[1]."
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_The Ambassador, after passing through Germany, Poland, Russia, and the
+Tartarian Deserts, or Upper European Sarmatia, arrives at Caffa or
+Theodosia._
+
+I left Venice on the 23d of February, in the year 1473, accompanied by the
+venerable priest Stephen Testa, who acted as my chaplain and secretary,
+and by Demetrius de Seze, my interpreter, together with two servants,
+Maffei de Bergamo, and John Ungaretti, all of us disguised in ordinary
+German dresses, our money being concealed in the clothes of Stephen Testa.
+We went by water in the first place to the church of _St Michael in
+Murano_, where we heard mass, and received the benediction of the prior;
+after which, we mounted our horses, which were there in waiting, and
+reached Treviso[2] the same day. I anxiously wished to have procured some
+person to accompany us on the journey who knew the road, but could not
+meet with any, nor could I even procure a guide for hire. Leaving Treviso
+on the 24th, we arrived that day at Cogiensi, now called Cornegliano[3];
+and knowing the dangers and difficulties we must experience during our
+long journey, we here confessed, and partook of the holy sacrament of the
+eucharist, after which we resumed our journey. We fortunately overtook a
+German, named Sebastian, who said he knew me and the object of my journey,
+and offered to keep us company to Nuremburgh. I gladly accepted of this
+person as a companion of our journey, inwardly thanking God for affording
+us a guide. We continued our journey to the frontiers of Germany, passing
+through several cities and castles, belonging to different princes and
+bishops, vassals of the empire, among which the city of Augsburg seemed
+one of the most beautiful. Not far from that place our German companion,
+Sebastian, left us, taking the road for Francfort. We parted from him with
+many embraces, giving him thanks for his numerous attentions, and mutually
+wishing each other a good journey.
+
+Having procured a new guide, we arrived at Nuremburg on the 10th of March.
+This is a fine city, having a river running through the middle of it, and
+is defended by an excellent citadel. While here, I inquired of my landlord
+if there were any travellers going our way. He informed me that there were
+two ambassadors from the king of Poland then in the city, who, he was
+certain, would be happy to receive a visit from me. I therefore sent my
+chaplain, Stephen Testa, to inform these gentlemen of my being in
+Nuremburg, and of the purpose of my journey, and of my desire to pay them
+a visit. They received my message with much civility, and I accordingly
+went to wait upon them. These gentlemen were counsellors of state to his
+Polish Majesty, one of whom was an archbishop, and the other a knight,
+named Paul. After mutual compliments, I informed them that I proposed
+paying my respects to their sovereign, and was furnished with a passport.
+Notwithstanding the sorry equipage in which I travelled, they received me
+with much honour. I remained four days in Nuremburg, during which I formed
+a friendly intimacy with the Polish ambassadors, and then resumed my
+journey in their company, being likewise accompanied by an ambassador
+belonging to the king of Bohemia, eldest son of the king of Poland.
+
+Departing from Nuremburg on the 14th of March, now nearly sixty horsemen
+in company, we crossed through Germany, always lodging in good cities or
+castles, some of which were extremely beautiful, both in respect to their
+situation and the excellence of their fortifications; but I omit
+describing them, as they are well known to travellers. The journey across
+Germany took us twelve days, during which we passed through the greater
+part of the dominions of the Maregrave of Brandenburg, and arrived at the
+imperial city of Francfort, a tolerably good and well fortified city on
+the Oder. We rested here till the 29th of March. As this city is near the
+confines of Poland, we had an escort of cavalry belonging to the Maregrave
+of Brandenburg, which accompanied us to the frontiers. These soldiers were
+well mounted and armed, and marched in good order. On the last day of
+March we arrived at Miedzyrzyez[4], which is a small city, but strong and
+pleasant, and is the first place on the frontiers of Poland. From that
+place till we reached _Stragone_, or Poznan, which took us three days
+journey, we saw no place worth notice. Poznan is particularly remarkable
+on account of a great fair, which is resorted to by many merchants.
+Leaving Poznan on the 3d of April, we arrived on the 9th at Lenczycz[5],
+where Casimir, king of Poland, then resided. In this journey we found
+neither cities nor considerable castles, and had much reason to remember
+Germany with regret, both on account of bad lodgings and every other
+circumstance. When my arrival was announced to the king, he sent two of
+his gentlemen to wait upon me, who assigned me a tolerably commodious
+lodging. Next day being Easter, when no business of any kind is transacted,
+I rested after the fatigues of the journey. On the following morning the
+king sent me a robe of black damask, according to the custom of the
+country, that I might go to court, which I did, accompanied by several
+persons of distinction, and had the honour to pay my respects to the king,
+according to the ceremonies of that court; after which I presented the
+letters of our illustrious republic to his majesty, and explained to him
+the nature of my commission. The king was pleased to invite me to dinner,
+which was served much in the same manner as with us, the dishes being in
+great abundance, and well dressed. As soon as dinner was over, I asked
+permission to retire, which was accordingly granted. Two days afterwards I
+was again sent for to court, when the king gave orderly answers to all the
+proposals which I had made in the name of our republic, and with so much
+benevolent attention towards me, that I learned by experience that he
+justly deserved the character of the best king who had reigned in Poland
+for a great many years. He was pleased to appoint me two guides, one of
+whom was to accompany me through Poland, and the other through lower
+Russia, to Kiow[6], or Magrano, which is the key of the kingdom. I humbly
+thanked his majesty in the name of the republic, and took my leave.
+
+I left Lenczycz on the 14th of April, on my journey through Poland, which
+is a flat country, ornamented with many forests; but the great want of
+convenient lodgings is a sure proof that it is not very fertile, nor much
+abounding in the necessaries of life. On the 19th I arrived at Lublin, a
+tolerable city, defended by a citadel. The three sons of the king resided
+there at this time for their education. The eldest of these princes was
+about fourteen years of age, and the two others considerably younger.
+Learning that they wished to see me, providing that their father had not
+forbidden, I waited upon them, and was received with much politeness, the
+eldest conversing with me in the most obliging manner, and I observed that
+they behaved with much respect to their preceptor. I took my leave of them,
+returning thanks for their civilities, and they parted from me with as
+much courtesy as I had experienced in my reception. Leaving Lublin, and
+continuing our journey through Poland, we arrived on the 20th of April in
+lower Russia, which is subject to the king of Poland. In this part of our
+journey we travelled five whole days through thick woods, and, except
+meeting with a very few castles, we lodged for the most part in country
+houses. On the 25th, we came to a town named _Jusch_, which is defended by
+a wooden castle. We rested here for some time, yet not without danger, as
+the inhabitants were quite mad with drunkenness, on account of celebrating
+certain marriages. This country produces no wine, but the natives prepare
+a liquor from honey, which is stronger and more intoxicating even than
+wine. Leaving this place, we came to another village named _Aitomir_, in
+which likewise there is a wooden castle. During the whole of our journey
+of the 29th, we travelled through forests, in constant danger of robbers
+who infested all the roads, and we knew not where to pass the night, or to
+procure any refreshments, insomuch that we had to sleep in the woods,
+keeping strict watch lest we might be surprised by the banditti. On the
+30th of April we reached _Belligraoch_, which signifies the _white_ fort,
+where we were lodged in the royal palace, and passed the night with much
+inconvenience.
+
+On the first of May we reached the city of _Kiow_[7], or Magraman. The
+governor of this city, which stands beyond the frontiers of Polish Russia,
+was a Polander and Catholic, named _Pamartin_. Immediately on learning my
+arrival from the guides sent along with me by the king, he appointed me a
+lodging, which was sufficiently small, considering the size of the city.
+He here visited me, and sent me a sufficient supply of provisions. This
+city serves as a barrier or frontier garrison against the Tartars, and is
+celebrated for a great fair, to which the merchants bring rich furs, and
+other goods from Upper Russia. From hence the merchants travel in a large
+caravan to Caffa or Theodosia in the Crimea; but are often surprised and
+very ill treated by the Tartars during their journey. The country about
+Kiow abounds in grain and cattle. The inhabitants of this place occupy the
+whole day in their affairs till three o'clock, employing all the rest,
+till night, in drinking and quarrels, the natural consequence of
+drunkenness. On the day of my arrival, governor Pamartin sent some of his
+gentlemen to invite me to dinner, which I accepted with as much politeness
+as I could express. He received me very honourably, offering me every
+service in his power, in the most obliging manner; saying, that he was
+ordered by the king of Poland to treat me in every thing as well as
+possible; on which I thanked him for his polite attentions, and
+endeavoured to recommend myself to his friendship. From him I was informed
+that he was in daily expectation of the arrival of an ambassador from
+Lithuania, going with presents to the prince of the Tartars, who was to
+have an escort of 200 Tartar horse; and, if I were inclined to take
+advantage of this opportunity, by which means I should travel in much
+greater safety, I had better wait the arrival of this ambassador. I
+accepted of this offer most willingly; and we then sat down to a
+magnificent entertainment; at which the bishop of Kiow, who was brother to
+the governor, and many other persons of consequence were present. We
+wanted nothing which could contribute to make the dinner pleasant. Good
+company, good cheer, and music during the repast. The only circumstance I
+did not like was, that it lasted too long; as I had more need for sleep
+and rest, after my fatiguing journey, than of all the good cheer that
+could be offered. In consequence, as soon as dinner was ended, I took my
+leave, and retired to my lodgings in the city; the governor living in the
+castle, which is only of wood. The city of Kiow stands on the river named
+anciently Boristhenes, and Danambre by the natives, which we Italians call
+Lerissa, and which falls into the Euxine.
+
+On the 10th of May[8], the ambassador of Lithuania arrived; and, as he was
+to set out next day after mass, I went to pay him my compliments,
+accompanied by M. Pamartin; who directed him, on the part of the king of
+Poland, to take care of me, and to conduct me in perfect safety to
+Theodosia. To this the ambassador answered, that he had every respect for
+the orders of his majesty, the sovereign arbiter of his life and death,
+and would carefully obey his orders. I thanked M. Pamartin for all his
+kindnesses, as he had frequently visited me, and had supplied me with
+every thing I needed for subsistence during my stay; and, as some token of
+my gratitude, I made him a present of a tolerably good German horse, which
+had carried me hitherto. We here parted with the rest of our horses, which
+were quite unfit for our farther use, and procured horses of the country
+for the remainder of our journey; and, on parting with the guides who had
+accompanied us to Kiow by orders of the king, I rewarded them for their
+attention and good conduct.
+
+I left Kiow on the 11th of May, along with the Lithuanian ambassador; and
+as I was unable to travel on horseback, on account of pains in my feet, I
+travelled in a carriage, which had served me for that purpose ever since I
+left the king of Poland at Lenczycz. The first place we came to was
+_Cerca_, belonging to the king of Poland, where we waited till the 15th,
+for the Tartar horse who came to escort us on our journey. After their
+arrival we set out on our journey through the great desert of Tartary, and
+came to the Boristhenes, which separates Tartary from Russia, and which is
+some miles broad[9]. As it was necessary to pass the river, our Tartars
+cut down some trees, the stems of which they fastened together into a raft,
+which was covered over by the branches, and upon which the whole of our
+baggage was placed. They fastened their horses by the tails to this raft,
+by which means it was dragged across the river, they themselves swimming
+along-side of their horses, and holding by their manes. We had likewise to
+swim our horses across, in which we succeeded, by the blessing of God, but
+in much fear and danger at this, to us, unusual mode of navigation. When
+we got over, we had to remain a whole day on the other side to collect and
+replace our baggage.
+
+While among the Tartars, their officers eyed me with much attention and
+suspicion; and, during our new journey through the desert beyond the river,
+the Lithuanian ambassador informed me, by means of the interpreter, that
+the Tartar officers had come to a resolution to carry me to their prince,
+as they could not allow a person of my appearance to go on to Theodosia
+without his permission. I was much alarmed by this intelligence, believing
+that I should incur considerable risk of having the purposes of my journey
+frustrated by this measure, and, therefore, earnestly recommended to the
+ambassador to keep in mind the orders he had received on the part of the
+king of Poland respecting me, and the promises he had made to Pamartin;
+and I promised to make a present of a sword to the interpreter if he
+succeeded to extricate me from my embarrassment. The interpreter reported
+my fears and wishes to the ambassador, who succeeded, after drinking with
+the Tartars, in persuading them that I was of Genoa; and, by means of a
+present of fifteen ducats, he obtained permission for me to go direct for
+Theodosia. Our journey through the desert continued till the 9th of June,
+during which we suffered many hardships, having, at one time, been a whole
+day and night without water. At length it became necessary for us to part
+company, the Lithuanian ambassador and his escort taking the direct road
+to Bachiserai[10], at which place the prince of the Tartars resided. On
+this occasion, a Tartar was appointed to be our guide to Theodosia, and we
+parted from the escort, not without considerable apprehensions of some
+sudden attack from the Tartars, yet much satisfied at getting rid of that
+crew, for they smelt so abominably, from feeding on horse flesh, that it
+was quite intolerable to come near them.
+
+Our whole company passed the ensuing night in carts covered with skins, in
+which we were soon surrounded by a great number of persons, inquiring who
+we were. On being informed by our Tartar guide that I was of Genoa, they
+supplied us with milk, and left us. Resuming our journey next morning
+early, we arrived that day, which was the 16th of June, at the suburbs of
+Theodosia, otherwise called Kaffa. Filled with gratitude for our
+preservation through so many dangers, we went privately into a church to
+give thanks to God for our safe arrival; and from thence I sent my
+interpreter to inform the Venetian consul of my arrival. He immediately
+sent his brother to wait upon me, advising me to remain where I was till
+night, when he carried me privately to a house belonging to him in the
+same suburb, where I was exceedingly well received. I here found Paulus
+Omnibamus, who had left Venice three months before me, under the orders of
+our illustrious republic.
+
+
+[1] In the latter part of this journey, the date of his return to Venice
+    is the 10th of April.--E.
+
+[2] Called Tarvisin, in the original.--E.
+
+[3] Called Conigiano, in the edition of Bergeron.--E.
+
+[4] This small city stands on a small river which runs into the Werta, at
+    the western extremity of what was Poland, about sixty-seven miles from
+    Poznan. It is called Messaricie in the original.--E.
+
+[5] Lausicie in the original.--E.
+
+[6] Named Chio in the original. The second name, Magrano, is afterwards
+    called Magraman by Contarini, or his French translator.--E.
+
+[7] Named Chio in the original, but which must necessarily be Kiow, or
+    Kieu, now belonging to Russia. The three formerly mentioned stages
+    Jusch, Aitomir, and Belligraoch, must either be villages of too little
+    importance to find a place in geographical maps, or their names are so
+    corrupted as to be unintelligible. The direct road from Lublin to Kiow,
+    passes through the palatinates of Russia, Wolhynia, and Kiow,
+    provinces of ci-devant Poland, now annexed to the Russian empire.--E.
+
+[8] The original says April, but attention to the context distinctly
+    points out this necessary correction.--E.
+
+[9] From this circumstance it evidently appears that the journey from Kiow
+    had hitherto been on the right or west of the Dnieper or Boristhenes,
+    through the country of the Nogais Tartars, now forming the western
+    portion of the Russian province of Catharinoslau; and we may suppose
+    the wide part of that river they had now to cross to have been
+    somewhere about Cherson.--E.
+
+[10] Named Arcercheriher in the French translation of Contarini; but which
+    must necessarily be some corruption of Baschiserai, the residence of
+    the khan of the Crim Tartars.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Contarini, leaving Kaffa, crosses the Euxine to the city of Phasis,
+whence he pursues his journey through Mingrelia, Georgia, and part of
+Armenia, into Persia_.
+
+It is impossible for me to give any exact description of the city of Kaffa,
+or Theodosia, or of its government, as the danger of incurring suspicion
+obliged me to remain continually at home; on which account I can only
+mention such particulars as I learned from others. It is situated on the
+Euxine, and is celebrated for a great fair, which is much frequented, on
+which account the city is very populous, and is said to be very rich and
+powerful. I hired a vessel belonging to Anthony Valdat, which lay in the
+Palus Meotis, to carry me to the city of _Phasis_. When I was ready to
+embark, I met with two Armenians, one of whom had been on an embassy to
+Rome, from Uzun Hassan, and was persuaded by them to prefer disembarking
+at _Tina_, about an hundred miles from Trebisond, instead of Phasis,
+alleging that from Tina it was only four hours journey to a castle named
+_Arrius_, which depended upon the king of Persia, and promising to conduct
+us to that place in safety. Although I was by no means satisfied with this
+advice, I allowed myself to be guided by the consul and his brother, who
+agreed in opinion with the Armenians. I accordingly left Kaffa on the 4th
+of June[1], accompanied by the consul, who went with me to the river,
+where our vessel was in waiting. I had formerly agreed with the master for
+our passage to Phasis at seventy ducats, but on occasion of the change in
+our destination, I was now obliged to pay an hundred. Being aware that I
+should not be able to meet with any person to serve us at the place we
+were going to, I used the precaution to hire nine men from Kaffa, to
+assist the mariners of our vessel, and to procure provisions for us in our
+journey through Georgia and Mingrelia.
+
+We embarked on the 15th of June, and made sail across the Euxine, direct
+for Tina, but had hardly got twenty miles on our voyage, when a contrary
+wind sprung up from the east. Observing the mariners consulting together
+in an extraordinary manner, I became curious to know the purpose of their
+discourse. Accordingly, one Bernard, the brother-in-law of our captain,
+said to me that he understood we proposed going to Tina, but advised me by
+no means to do so; as a certain _Subassa_ roamed about that neighbourhood
+with a band of cavalry, who would certainly make us slaves if we fell into
+his hands. On this advice I changed my purpose, and the wind becoming more
+favourable, we made sail for Liasi and Phasis, and arrived at _Varsi_ on
+the 29th of June, where I disembarked my horses and baggage, and sent them
+from thence by land to Phasis, which is sixty miles from that place.
+_Varsi_ is a castle, with a small village in Mingrelia, belonging to a
+lord named _Gorbola_, to whom likewise _Caltichea_[2], a place of small
+importance on the coast of the Euxine, is subject. The inhabitants of this
+country are very miserable, and the only productions are hemp, wax, and
+silk.
+
+On the 1st of July we arrived near Phasis, followed by a vessel filled
+with Mingrelians, who seemed all to be fools or drunk. Quitting the vessel,
+we went up the river in a boat, passing an island in the mouth of the
+river, where Oetes, the father of Medea the enchantress, is said to have
+reigned. On this island we spent the night, and were sadly infested by
+midges. Next day we went up the river in the boat, passing the city of
+Asso, which stands on its banks in the midst of a forest. I here found one
+Nicholas Capella, of Modena, who commanded in these parts, and a
+Circassian woman named Martha, who had been the slave of a person of Genoa,
+but was now married. This Martha received me with much kindness, and with
+her I staid two days. Phasis is a city of Mingrelia, subject to prince
+Bendian, whose dominions extend only about three days journey in length.
+The country is very mountainous, and full of forests. The inhabitants are
+so fierce and savage, that they might be accounted wild beasts. Their
+principal drink is beer; they have some corn and wine, but in very small
+quantities; boiled millet being their ordinary food, which is a very poor
+kind of nourishment. They sometimes procure wine and salted fish from
+Trebisond, and import salt from Kaffa, without which they could not exist.
+Their only productions consist in a small quantity of hemp and wax. If
+they were industrious, they might procure abundance of fish, which are
+very numerous in their river. They are Christians, according to the Greek
+ritual, to which they have added many gross superstitions.
+
+I left Phasis on the 4th of July, accompanied by Nicholas Capella, and
+crossed the river _Mare_ on a float. That day and the next, we travelled
+through a considerable portion of Mingrelia, always among woods and
+mountains. Towards the evening of the 5th, we came to the habitation of
+prince Bendian, whom we found, with all his court, reclining on a plain,
+under the shade of some trees. I sent Nicholas Capella to inform him of my
+quality, and to ask permission to pay him my respects, which was
+accordingly granted. I saluted him, therefore, with great respect, as he
+sat on the ground with his wife and children, and he made me sit down
+beside him. After explaining the purpose of my journey, I requested he
+would have the goodness to appoint me a guide. He expressed his
+satisfaction at my arrival in his dominions, and granted my request. He
+afterwards sent me some bread, a piece of beef, and the head of a sow, but
+so under done, that it required the extreme necessity in which we then
+were to induce us to eat of his provisions; but when we cannot get what we
+like, we must put up with what can be had. We had to wait a whole day for
+the promised guide. The plain in which we found prince Bendian, is
+surrounded by very fine trees, resembling box, but much more lofty. The
+prince seemed about fifty years of age, and had a tolerably handsome
+countenance, but his manners were perfectly ridiculous.
+
+On the 7th of July we continued our journey, always among woods and
+mountains, and next day passed the river which divides Mingrelia from
+Georgia, having to pass the night in the open air, and, what was worse, we
+had nothing to eat. On the 9th, we arrived at a small city named
+_Cotachis_[3], which is defended by a stone fort, and where we saw a
+temple that seemed very ancient. We had here to pass a bridge over a large
+river, before reaching the plain in which the huts of Plangion, king of
+Georgia, are situated. The fort and city of Cotachis belong to Plangion. I
+waited upon the commander of this place who invited me to dinner. He was
+seated on the ground, on which I, and those of my suite who accompanied me,
+and some friends of the governor, all sat down. Before us was laid a
+greasy skin, on which they served us with bread, radishes, some flesh, and
+other execrable articles with which I was not acquainted. They continually
+offered me wine in large goblets, to fill me drunk, according to their
+abominable customs, as they are as foolish and beastly as the Mingrelians.
+Finding that I would not join them in deep drinking, they held me in great
+contempt, insomuch that I found it extremely difficult to get leave to
+retire and to continue my journey. But at length they brought me a guide
+to conduct me to the king of Georgia.
+
+I left Cotachis on the 12th of July; and, after travelling the whole day
+through woods and mountains, we rested for the night in a meadow at the
+foot of a mountain, near a castle named _Scandes_[4], in which king
+_Pangrates_[5] resides. My guide here left me on purpose to inform the
+king of my arrival; promising to return immediately with another guide to
+serve me during the rest of the journey. We had accordingly to pass the
+whole night in the wood, starving of hunger, and full of anxiety. The
+guide came back early in the morning, accompanied by two of the kings
+secretaries, who informed me that the king was gone to Cotachis, and had
+ordered them to make an inventory of all our baggage, and of every thing
+we had about us; after which we should be provided with a passport, to
+travel free from payment of any duties through the whole country. They
+proceeded accordingly in their examination and inventory with the most
+rigorous exactness, even noting down the very shirts we then wore. After
+this they ordered me to mount my horse, and to go along with them to the
+king, leaving all my people behind. I used my best endeavours to be
+excused from this; but, instead of listening to me, they loaded me with
+insolence; and the only favour I could obtain, and that with the utmost
+difficulty, was permission to take my interpreter along with me. We
+accordingly resumed our journey, without meat or drink, and arrived much
+fatigued at Cotachis towards night; where my interpreter and me were left
+all night to our repose under a tree, where, indeed, they sent us some
+bread and fish.
+
+The remainder of my people were taken to a miserable village, where they
+were left in charge of the priest; and our mutual anxiety may be easily
+guessed.
+
+Next morning I was carried before the king, whom I found sitting on the
+ground in a hut, surrounded by several of his nobles. After paying my
+respects, he asked me a great number of questions, and among the rest, how
+many kings there were in the world? It came into my fancy to answer that
+there were twelve. On which he signified that I was right, and that he was
+one of the number; and that he was much surprised that I should come into
+his dominions without bringing him a letter from my sovereign. To this I
+answered, that when I left my own country, I did not expect to travel
+through his dominions, otherwise my sovereign would assuredly have given
+me letters in charge for his majesty; and with this answer he seemed
+satisfied. He asked many other extraordinary questions, from which I
+conjectured that my guide had maliciously represented me as carrying many
+valuable things; and it is probable, if this had been the case, that I had
+never been allowed to escape out of their hands. The royal secretaries
+endeavoured to persuade me that I ought to make the king a present of any
+article that might strike his fancy among my small baggage; but I got off
+without making any present, except compliments, and requesting him to
+appoint some one to conduct me through his dominions. This he was pleased
+to promise, as likewise to give me a free passport, without paying any
+duties, as I carried no merchandize. Accordingly, I took my leave of the
+king on the 14th of July, returning to the tree I formerly mentioned as my
+lodging, where the secretary brought me the promised passport and a guide.
+I then returned to my people at the village where they were kept in my
+absence, and was received with much joy, as the priest had represented the
+king as the cruellest tyrant in the world. My people could not contain
+themselves for excess of joy at my safe return, and even the miserable
+priest was so touched at the scene, that he provided us with something to
+eat, and we slept there that night as well as we could.
+
+Next day, being the 15th of July, we provided ourselves with some bread
+and wine, to comfort ourselves on the way, and resumed our journey through
+thick forests and terrible mountains, which continued for two days. In the
+evening of the 16th, we stopt near a spring, where we remained during the
+night in the open air, being obliged to light a fire on account of the
+coldness of the weather, though in the middle of summer. On the 17th of
+the same month we arrived at _Goride_[6], which belongs to the king of
+Georgia. This city is built on a plain, watered by a large river, and is
+defended by a citadel which is built upon a rock. Our guide notified our
+arrival to the commandant, who ordered us a house for our lodgings,
+apparently for the purpose of extorting a present; for shortly afterwards
+he informed me that he had letters from the king, by which he was ordered
+to receive twenty-six ducats from me for himself, and that I should pay
+six to my guide. I endeavoured to evade this demand, by saying that the
+king had received me favourably, to whom I had already given seventy
+ducats, and could not give any thing more, and urged my free passport. But
+he would listen to nothing I could urge, and I was forced to comply with
+his extortion. He even detained me till the 19th of the month, and even
+then I had extreme difficulty to get leave to depart. The inhabitants of
+the city, who deserve rather to be ranked among beasts, looked at us with
+as much astonishment as if they had never seen any other men than
+ourselves. They told us that, on the top of a high mountain in a
+neighbouring forest, there was a great church, in which was an image of
+the Virgin, which worked many miracles, and that the church was served by
+forty monks, whom they named _Calojeriens_[7]. But our anxiety to get out
+of this abominable country, prevented us from paying our devotions at that
+famous church. Georgia, indeed, is a somewhat better country than
+Mingrelia, but the manners of the people and their way of living is
+equally brutal; and such were the distresses and difficulties I
+encountered in travelling through both, that it would be tedious to relate
+them. On the 20th of July we left the abominable city of Goride, where we
+had suffered so many vexations, and continued, our journey through forests
+and over mountains, occasionally falling in with villages where we
+purchased provisions. We had always to pass the nights on the ground near
+some spring or rivulet, during most part of our journey through Mingrelia
+and Georgia.
+
+
+[1] We have already seen that it was the 16th of that month when Contarini
+    arrived at Kaffa. Much confusion has occurred in the dates of this
+    journey, which we have no means of correcting, and must, therefore, be
+    contented with them as they are--E.
+
+[2] The names of places in this journal are so corrupted as to be often
+    quite unintelligible. Varsi may possibly be Vardon, in the district to
+    the northwest of Mingrelia, named Abkhas; and Caltichea may perhaps be
+    Sulhuali, a sea port about 30 miles to the east. Phasis probably
+    refers to some town on the river of that name, perhaps Subastei.--E.
+
+[3] Probably Cutais in Imeritia, on the river Riene.--E.
+
+[4] Perhaps Sarassan, about forty miles S. E. from Cutais.--E.
+
+[5] Apparently the same prince named Plangion a little before.--E.
+
+[6] Gori in Georgia, on the river Kur. The journey hitherto must have been
+    through Mingrelia, then apparently subject to the prince or king of
+    Georgia.--E.
+
+[7] Probably Caloyers.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Arrival of Contarini at Tauris or Ecbatana, the royal city of Uzun-
+Hassan, and continuation of his journey through Persia to Ispahan, where
+the king then resided._
+
+On the 22d of July we began to ascend a mountain of prodigious height,
+insomuch, that when night came on we had scarcely reached the top, where
+we had to pass the night without water. Resuming our journey in the
+morning, we descended the other side of the mountain, and entered the
+province of Armenia, which is under the dominion of Uzun-Hassan[1]. In
+the evening we were conducted to a fort named Reo, which stands in the
+plain, between a deep river and a high mountain, and which is garrisoned
+by Turks in the service of Uzun-Hassan, but the neighbouring village is
+inhabited by Armenians. We rested in this place till the 25th of July,
+waiting the arrival of a guide to direct us in the remainder of the
+journey, and being well treated by the inhabitants, we rewarded them to
+their satisfaction. The Armenian who had joined us at Kaffa, under
+pretence of being an ambassador from Uzun-Hassan to the Pope, was
+recognized by the inhabitants of this village as an impostor and a
+notorious robber, and many were astonished how we had escaped from his
+machinations: I got rid of him therefore immediately, and made him
+restore me a horse which I had lent him for the journey; after which I
+procured a priest of an honest character to conduct me to Tauris. Leaving
+Reo with my new guide on the 26th of July, we ascended a mountain, and
+came on the other side to a plain surrounded by hills, where we found a
+village inhabited by Turks, near which we had to pass the night in the
+open air, though the inhabitants treated us with decent civility. Next
+morning we departed before day, having to pass another mountain, on the
+side of which was a village inhabited by Turks, among whom we should have
+run extreme hazard of our lives if they had seen us; but by using much
+diligence we avoided this danger, and got down into an extensive plain,
+full of fine pastures, and travelled with great expedition that we might
+pass the night at a respectable distance from the lawless inhabitants of
+the hills. On the 29th we passed the mountain of Noah, or _Ararat_, which
+is so lofty that it is covered with snow the whole year. We were told
+that many who had attempted to reach the top of this mountain had never
+been more heard of, while others, on making the same attempt, said, on
+their return, that it was quite inaccessible.
+
+From this place forwards we travelled through extensive plains intermixed
+with hills, and arrived on the 30th of July at a castle named _Chiagri_,
+inhabited by Armenians. Finding abundance of bread, wine, and poultry in
+this place, we rested here for a day, and then set out with a new guide
+for Ecbatana or Tauris. Leaving Chiagri towards evening of the 1st August,
+we came next day to an Armenian village at the foot of a mountain, where
+we had to cross a river in boats, and were informed that Uzun-Hassan had
+formerly gained a great victory near this place over the Tartars, having
+hemmed them into a corner, where their army wasted away with famine and
+disease. The ruler of these Tartars, named Sultan _Buzech_[2], was made
+prisoner, and was afterwards put to death. We here saw, on our left hand,
+eleven Armenian villages, near each other, who were Catholic Christians,
+their bishop being under submission to the Roman pontiff. The country is
+extremely agreeable, and is the most fertile of all the provinces of
+Persia. We arrived on the 3d of August at a large village called Marerich,
+near which we passed the night, and had to ride all the next day through
+a plain country exposed to great heat, which was greatly aggravated, as
+we could not procure a single drop of water for ourselves or our horses.
+On the way we met several Turkmans, whose custom it is to encamp here and
+there about the country, wherever they can find pasture for their cattle,
+and to change their residence as the pastures become exhausted. These
+people are abominable robbers, and look upon rapine as their highest
+glory; and as we had great reason to be afraid of them, I gave orders to
+all my people to tell whoever we met, that I was journeying to wait upon
+their sovereign, which was the only expedient for saving us from their
+violence.
+
+We arrived on the 4th of August at the city of Ecbatana or _Tauris_[3],
+which stands in a plain, and is surrounded by an earthen rampart in bad
+repair. There are high mountains in its neighbourhood, which are said to
+be the Taurus of the ancients. I here lodged with a very good man, who
+gave us two sleeping chambers, a convenience we had been long unused to.
+He was quite astonished how we should have been able to escape the
+dangers of our journey, as all the roads were blocked up; and on asking
+him the reason, he told us that Ogurlu Mohammed[4], the eldest son of
+Uzun-Hassan, had rebelled against his father, and had taken possession of
+_Sylas_[5] or Persepolis, of which he had appointed his younger brother
+_Khalil_[6] as governor. Uzun-Hassan had assembled an army to reduce
+Persepolis and his sons to obedience; but a certain satrap named
+_Zagarli_ who commanded in the neighbouring mountains, favoured the cause
+of Ogurlu, and had ravaged the whole country, to the very gates of Tauris,
+with a body of 3000 horse, owing to which, all the roads were obstructed
+and unsafe. He farther informed us, that the governor of Tauris had one
+day issued forth to endeavour to put a stop to the marauders, but had
+been defeated by Zagarli, with the loss of most of his troops, and had
+even great difficulty in escaping back to the city. I inquired why the
+inhabitants of Tauris did not take arms in their own defence, in a time
+of so much danger; but he answered, although they were obedient to the
+governor, they were quite unused to war. On learning the state of affairs
+in this place, I resolved to leave it as soon as possible, that I might
+get to the king; but I could neither procure a guide, nor prevail on the
+governor to shew me any favour. By the advice of my landlord I kept
+myself very much concealed, and employed my interpreter and Augustin of
+Pavia, whom I had brought with me from Kaffa because he understood a
+little Persian, to purchase our provisions, in which employment they were
+exposed to much ill treatment, and were often in hazard of their lives.
+
+Some days afterwards, one of the sons of Uzun-Hassan, named Masu-beg[7],
+came to Tauris with 1000 horse, to defend the city from the incursions of
+Zagarli. I waited on this prince, having great difficulty to obtain an
+audience, telling him that I was sent as ambassador to his father, and had
+need of guides, whom I prayed him to provide me; but it was quite
+ineffectual, as he hardly deigned to answer me, and took no kind of
+interest in me or my affairs, so that I was obliged to return disappointed
+to my lodgings. Masu-beg endeavoured to raise money from the inhabitants
+of Tauris for the purpose of levying soldiers, but they resisted his
+demands, and all the shops of the city were shut up. In this emergency,
+being unable to procure provisions, I was obliged to quit my lodgings,
+with all my people, taking refuge in an Armenian church, where they gave
+us a small place in which to keep our horses; and I ordered all my people
+to keep constantly within doors, to avoid meeting with injury. My
+apprehensions on this occasion may easily be conceived; but God, who had
+already protected us in so many dangers, was mercifully pleased to deliver
+us from that which now hung over us. On the 7th of September, _Bertonius
+Liompardus_[8], whom I had before seen at Kaffa, and who had been sent by
+our illustrious republic, arrived at Tauris. He was accompanied by his
+nephew, named _Brancalione_, and having come by way of Trebisond was a
+month later than me in reaching Tauris. I now dispatched Augustin de Pavia,
+of whom I have before made mention, with letters to the republic of Venice,
+in which I gave an account to the senate of all that had happened to us
+hitherto. I sent this man by way of Alapia, where he at length arrived in
+good health, after having escaped many dangers.
+
+Although I remained in Tauris till the 22d of September, I was not able
+to acquire any exact knowledge of the city, having been forced to conceal
+myself the whole time. It is a large city, but its territory in some
+places is uncultivated, and I believe nowhere very populous; it abounds,
+however, in all the necessaries of life, but these are dear. Much silk is
+produced in this neighbourhood, which is exported by way of Alapia. A
+considerable quantity of cloth is manufactured in the place, which
+likewise abounds in various merchandize, but I did not hear of any pearls
+or precious stones. Fortunately for us a Cadilaskir, one of the
+counsellors of Uzun-Hassan, arrived about this time at Tauris, who
+returned from an embassy into Turkey, where he had unsuccessfully
+endeavoured to negociate a peace between his master and the Turkish
+government. Immediately on learning the arrival of this person, I used
+every effort to procure an interview, in which I succeeded, and by means
+of a present, I prevailed on him to admit me and my retinue into his
+suite. He received me with much civility, and granted all I asked,
+assuring me that, with the blessing of God, he would conduct me in safety
+to the king. Among his slaves there were two Illyrian renegadoes, who
+formed a strict intimacy with my people, to whom they promised to give
+every assistance in their power, and to give us due notice of the
+departure of their master, which they faithfully performed, and for which
+I rewarded them.
+
+On the 22d of September we departed from Tauris with the Persian
+counsellor, accompanied likewise by a great many merchants and others,
+who took the advantage of travelling under his protection, from fear of
+being plundered by the rebels. This country in which we now travelled was
+quite level, with very few hills, so dry that we saw no trees except
+along the sides of rivers, and having only a few small villages, in which
+we purchased what was necessary for our journey, and always rested before
+mid-day in the open air, being unable to travel during the height of the
+sun, on account of the great heat. Travelling in this manner, we arrived
+at _Sultanie_ on the 27th of September. This city appeared to be very
+handsome, surrounded by walls, and defended by a good citadel. We saw
+here three most curious brazen gates, which had been made at Damascus,
+the finest things I ever beheld, which must have cost a great deal of
+money. The city of Sultanie stands in a plain at the foot of a range of
+mountains, some of which are exceedingly steep and precipitous, and the
+inhabitants of which are forced to remove into lower situations during
+winter, on account of the severity of the cold. We remained there for
+three days, and resumed our journey on the 30th of September, travelling
+sometimes in plains, and sometimes among hills, but always taking up our
+quarters for the night in the open air.
+
+On the 6th of October we arrived at _Sena_[9], a city without walls,
+situated in a plain on the banks of a river, and surrounded by trees, in
+which city we passed the night in tolerably bad quarters. We departed
+from thence on the 8th, and stopping, according to our usual custom, in
+the fields, I was seized with a violent intermittent fever, insomuch that
+I could hardly get on horseback next day, and that with infinite distress.
+We arrived early next day at Kom, where I was forced to stop, all my
+attendants being seized in a similar manner with myself, except our
+priest Stephen Testa, who took care of us all. Our fever was so malignant
+that we were all delirious during the height of the access or hot fit. I
+was afterwards informed that the royal counsellor sent to visit me,
+begging my excuse that he could not wait for me, because it was necessary
+for him to repair without delay to the king; but that he had left one of
+his attendants with me as a guide, and that I need not now be under any
+apprehension, as there were none in that part of the country to do me
+harm. I remained here a long time sick. The city of Sena or Sava is not
+large, and has mud walls, being situated in a champaign country, which is
+well peopled, and abounds in every thing necessary to life.
+
+On the 24th of October, being much recovered, we resumed our journey,
+though I was still so weak as to find much difficulty in sitting on
+horseback. Next day we arrived, at the city of Cashan[10], which very
+much resembles Kom, except that it is somewhat handsomer. On the
+following day, we came to _Nethas_, or Nathan. This city stands likewise
+in a flat country, which produces much wine. I remained here one day,
+both to recruit my strength, and because I felt some return of my fever.
+On the 28th of October, I prepared as well as I was able to finish my
+journey, which was all on plain ground, and arrived at Ispahan, where
+Uzun-Hassan then resided, on the 3d of November, having employed twenty-
+four days in our journey from Tauris to this place. I immediately sought
+out the dwelling of Josaphat Barbaro[11], the ambassador of Venice, and
+went to him. He received, me with much joy, and many embraces were
+mutually given and received, and we rejoiced together on my safe arrival.
+But as I had much need of rest, I very soon went to bed. When the king
+heard of my arrival, he sent some of his slaves to congratulate me, who
+presented me with some refreshments sent by his majesty.
+
+Early in the morning of the 4th November, some of the kings slaves came
+to require that Josaphat Barbaro and I should come to court. On being
+introduced to an audience, we found the king attended by eight of his
+principal officers. Having made my obeisance after the manner of the
+country, I presented the letters of the republic, and explained the
+subject of my mission[12]. When I had finished speaking, he answered me
+in every point, and in few words; and, among other things, he excused his
+conduct in having been obliged to retire to this part of his kingdom.
+After this we were ordered to be seated, and his courtiers gave us an
+entertainment according to the Persian fashion, which consisted of many
+dishes tolerably well dressed. After the repast, we took leave of the
+king, and retired to our quarters. Two days afterwards, we were again
+sent for to court, when most of the royal apartments were shewn me. The
+king then resided in a very pleasant country palace, situated on the
+banks of a river. In one of the rooms, there was a painting of Ogurlu-
+Mohammed, the kings eldest son, leading the sultan _Busech_, or Abu Said,
+tied with a rope; and in another picture the decapitation of _Busech_ was
+represented. We were again invited to an entertainment, at which many
+different kinds of confections were served up. We remained at Ispahan
+till the 25th of November, during which period we were frequently invited
+to court. The city of Ispahan, like the rest of the Persian cities, is
+surrounded by earthen-ramparts. It stands in a plain, and is abundantly
+supplied with all the necessaries of life. Having rebelled against the
+king, it was besieged and suffered much injury; for, being obstinately
+defended, it was subjected to the resentment of the conqueror and the
+fury of the soldiers.
+
+Persia is a very flat and arid country, in many parts of which there are
+salt lakes. In such parts as can be supplied with water, grain and other
+fruits of the earth are produced in abundance, and there are plenty of
+beasts of all kinds, as it is everywhere intersected and surrounded by
+fertile mountains, but every thing is very dear. The Venetian quart of
+wine is sold for three or four ducats; but bread is not so dear in
+proportion. A camels load of wood costs a ducat. Flesh is dearer than
+with us, and seven hens cost a ducat; but other articles of provisions
+are cheaper. The Persians are a civil and humane people; and though
+Mahometans, they do not hate the Christians. The women are very modestly
+dressed, and ride on horseback with even more grace than the men; and,
+judging from the good appearance of the men, the women are probably
+handsome.
+
+
+[1] Uzun-Hassan in the Turkish language signifies Hassan the long, which
+    prince was likewise named Hassan-beg, or Lord Hassan, and Ozun-Azembeg,
+    or the long lord Azem or Hassan. By different European writers his
+    name has been corrupted into Unsun Cassan, Uxun-Cassan, and Usum-
+    Chasan. He was a Turkman emir of the Ak-koyunla dynasty, or white
+    sheep tribe, whose ancestor, the governor of a province under the
+    descendants of Timor, had rendered himself independent in the north
+    and west of Persia.--E.
+
+[2] This prince, whose real name was probably Abu Said, was the emir of
+    the Kara-koyunla dynasty, or black sheep tribe of the Turkmans, who
+    had risen to independence after the death of Timor, and who had long
+    contended with the prince of the white sheep tribe for ascendancy.
+    These two tribes derived their distinctive appellations of the black
+    and white weathers, from some peculiarity in their ensigns or dress,
+    equivalent to the distinguishing uniforms and banners of our European
+    armies.--E.
+
+[3] Called Tebriz in modern times.--E.
+
+[4] In the original this name is corrupted to Gurlumamech; but we learn
+    from the Modern Universal History, that his real name was that
+    expressed in the text of our translation.--E.
+
+[5] The ruins supposed to be those of Persepolis are situated near Istakar,
+    about forty miles north from the modern city of Shiraz, in the
+    province of Fars or Persia proper; but the names in the original are
+    often so corrupted as to defy even conjecture. Sylas is probably meant
+    for Shiras.--E.
+
+[6] Named Chali in the original; but it is to be noted that the _ch_ of
+    the Italian is pronounced as _k_ in English.--E.
+
+[7] It is difficult to determine whether Contarini here means Maksud-beg
+    or Masih-beg, as Uzun-Hassan had two sons of these names; Maksad was
+    the elder, and may have been the person named in the text Masu. Bec or
+    Beg signifies Lord or Prince.--E.
+
+[8] The person mentioned before by Contarini as a messenger from Venice,
+    and whom he met with at Kaffa, was named on that occasion Paulus
+    Omnibamus, totally dissimilar from the name in this part of the text.
+    --E.
+
+[9] Assuredly the Sava of modern maps, a city of Irac-agemi, which stands
+    upon one of these extraordinary rivers, so numerous in Persia, which
+    lose themselves in the sands, after a short but useful run.--E.
+
+[10] About sixty miles S. S. E. from Kom. I am disposed to think that
+    Contarini has slumpt his journey on the present occasion; as it is
+    hardly to be believed a person in the weak state he describes himself
+    could have travelled with so much rapidity. Besides, so far as we can
+    learn from his journal, he travelled always with the same set of
+    horses. Indeed the sequel immediately justifies this suspicion, as
+    the subsequent dates are more distant than the travelling days of the
+    text would warrant.--E.
+
+[11] See Travels of Josaphat Barbaro to Asof in 1436, in our Collection,
+    Vol I. p. 501, in the introduction to which article, it will be seen
+    that he had been sent on an embassy from Venice to Uzun-Hassan in 1572,
+    two years before Contarini; and appears to have remained in the east
+    for fourteen years in that capacity, after the departure of Contarini
+    on his return to Venice.--E.
+
+[12] This nowhere distinctly appears; but we may easily understand
+    incidentally, and from the history of the period, that the Venetian
+    republic endeavoured to stir up enemies to the Turkish empire in the
+    east, being unable to resist its power, now exerted against them in
+    the Morea and the Greek islands; and we may even surmise that Uzun-
+    Hassan was subsidized by the Venetians to make war upon the Turks.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Contarini accompanies Uzun-Hassan from Ispahan to Tauris, where he finds
+Ambassadors from the Duke of Burgundy and the Prince of Muscovy, and gets
+leave to return to Venice._
+
+The king left Ispahan with all his court on the 25th of November for
+Tauris, and we travelled along with him, passing through most of the
+places which we had seen in going to Ispahan. In this journey we always
+slept in tents in the fields, and the camp was well supplied with
+provisions, as many merchants had received orders to provide grain,
+victuals of all kinds, and all sorts of necessaries. On the 14th of
+November we arrived at Kom, where we remained two days under tents,
+exposed to extremely cold weather, and experienced much difficulty to
+procure a small house in which to shelter ourselves. We continued at this
+place till the 21st of March 1474, during which interval we went
+frequently to court, to pay our respects to the king, on which occasions
+we were generally invited to dinner. The Persian court is very magnificent,
+being attended by many high officers of state, and every day 400 persons
+dine along with the king. These are all seated on the ground, and are
+served in copper basons with boiled rice, or some other mess made of flesh
+and grain boiled together; but the king is served in great magnificence at
+a separate table, with a great variety of dishes of different kinds of
+meat. During his meals, the king is often served with wine, and then the
+musicians sing and play upon flutes such songs and tunes as the king
+pleases to order. The king is of a good size, with a thin visage and
+agreeable countenance, having somewhat of the Tartar appearance, and
+seemed to be about seventy years old. His manners were very affable, and
+he conversed familiarly with every one around him; but I noticed that his
+hands trembled when he raised the cup to his lips. It is not needful that
+I should enumerate all the audiences which I had on the subject of my
+mission, of which I shall make occasional mention hereafter.
+
+On the 21st of March the king and all the court left Kom, on their
+journey towards Tauris, the baggage being carried by camels and mules.
+Each day we hardly exceeded ten or twelve, or at the most twenty Italian
+miles, and always stopt at each encampment till the forage in the
+neighbourhood was consumed. The Persian mode of travelling is thus: The
+women always arrive first at the new camp, where they set up the tents
+and cook provisions for their husbands. They are well clothed and ride
+upon good horses, which they manage with much dexterity. The Persian
+nation is very magnificent, and exceedingly fond of pomp, and shew, and
+it is very agreeable to see their march at some distance. They are very
+careful of their camels, of which they have great numbers, even the
+poorest seldom travelling with less than seven of these animals; by this
+means, the prodigious train which attends the court appears to consist of
+many more persons than it actually contains. When the king entered
+Ecbatana, his suite consisted of about 2000 persons, but many left the
+camp on the march, as it suited their fancy or convenience, and the king
+never had above 500 horse along with him. The royal tents were
+exceedingly beautiful and magnificent, and his bed was ornamented with
+scarlet hangings. The merchants who attended the camp sold every thing at
+a high price. All of our party were accommodated with tents, as we
+belonged to the suite of the king, who often honoured us with an
+invitation to supper, and at other times frequently sent us refreshments.
+We were always treated with much civility, and never received any
+injuries or affronts.
+
+On the 31st of May the king encamped about fifteen miles from Tauris,
+when a certain monk of the Boulonnois named Louis, who called himself
+patriarch of Antioch, and envoy from the Duke of Burgundy, arrived at the
+camp, attended by five horsemen. The king asked if we knew him, and we
+accordingly told what we knew without dissimulation. Next day the king
+gave him an audience, at which we were present by command. This patriarch
+presented to the king three robes of gold tissue, three others of scarlet
+silk, and some of fine cloth, and opened his commission, making many
+great offers of service from his prince, and many fine promises in very
+magnificent terms, which do not appear proper for me to repeat, and which
+the king did not seem to care much about. We were all invited to dinner,
+during which the king started many questions, to which he gave very
+pertinent answers himself. After dinner we returned to our tents.
+
+On the 2d of June we arrived at Tauris, in which place lodgings were
+appointed for us. Six days afterwards, Uzun-Hassan sent for the patriarch
+and us to court; and although he had three or four times informed me
+already that I must prepare to return into Italy, leaving my colleague
+Barbaro at his court, I could not reconcile myself to the journey, and
+had done every thing in my power to put off my departure. When we went to
+court, the king addressed himself first to the patriarch, whom he ordered
+to return to his prince, and to say from him, that he, the king, would
+very shortly declare war against the Turks, having already taken the
+field with that view, and that he never failed in performing his promises.
+He then turned to me, saying, "Return to your country, and tell your
+masters that I shall very soon make war upon the Ottomans, and desire
+them to do their duty as I shall do mine. I know no one better fitted to
+carry this message than you, who have accompanied me from Ispahan, and
+have seen my preparations; so that you are able to inform the Christian
+princes of all that you have seen, and of my good intentions." I offered
+several reasons for excusing myself from obeying these commands, which
+gave me much vexation; but the king looked at me with a severe expression
+of countenance, saying, "It is my pleasure for you to go, and I command
+you. I shall give you letters for your masters, which will inform them of
+my sentiments and the reasons of your return." In this state of
+embarrassment, I was advised by the patriarch and M. Josaphat to comply
+with a good grace; on which I replied to the king as follows: "My
+departure, Sir, gives me much distress; but since you judge it proper, I
+make no more objections, and am ready to obey your orders. Wherever I may
+go, I shall speak of your great power and goodness, and the honours I
+have received from your majesty, and shall exhort all the princes of
+Christendom to join their forces with you against the common enemy." My
+speech pleased the king, and he answered me kindly according to his
+wonted manner. After retiring from this andienqe, the king sent some
+Persian robes to the patriarch and me, made of fine stuff and very
+beautifully ornamented, and presented each of us with a horse and some
+money to assist us during our journey.
+
+We remained two days at Tauris after the kings departure, and set out on
+the 10th of June to rejoin the court, which was then encamped in a
+pleasant spot among excellent pastures and plenty of fine wells; about
+twenty-five miles from Tauris. We remained there till the pastures were
+eaten bare, and then marched about fifteen miles farther. On the 27th of
+June the king gave us our final audience, at which he gave us presents
+for our respective sovereigns; that is to say, to the patriarch for the
+Duke of Burgundy; to myself for the republic; and to one Marcus Ruffus,
+who had come with an embassy from the prince of Muscovy. The presents
+consisted in certain pieces of workmanship made in the European fashion,
+two swords, and certain ornaments for the head, which are usually
+fastened to bonnets. There were two Persian ambassadors in the audience-
+chamber, one of whom was destined on a mission into Russia. At length the
+king turning towards the patriarch and me, addressed us nearly as follows:
+"You will return with all speed to your masters, and will tell them and
+all the other Christian princes from me, that I have used all diligence
+in taking the field to make war on the Turks, as it had been concerted
+between them and me. The emperor of the Turks is at present in
+Constantinople, and will make no enterprize of importance this year. As
+for myself, I propose sending one part of my army to reduce my rebellious
+son, and another against the Turkish generals, while I shall remain here
+at hand, to act against the enemy as occasion may require." He gave
+orders, both to us and to his own ambassadors, to report this to all the
+princes of Christendom. I did not receive these orders with more
+satisfaction than I had done the former; but I had no means of escape and
+must necessarily obey. Wherefore, having taken our leaves, we prepared
+for our departure, and were unexpectedly commanded to remain till next
+day. In the mean time, he conveyed a great part of his infantry during
+the night to the other side of a mountain. Next morning early, the
+_Ruiscasson_, or conductor of ambassadors, carried us to the top of the
+hill, as meaning to confer with us on some important subject, and on the
+appearance of the Persian infantry under march, he pointed them out to us
+as if he had been surprised at seeing so many additional troops coming to
+the royal camp. The better to favour this deception, some of his slaves
+exclaimed as astonished, that there were a great many soldiers, and that
+at least 10,000 were coming to reinforce the army. But we easily saw
+through the contrivance, and were certain that these pretended new troops
+were merely the ordinary royal escort, which had only changed their
+position to impose upon us. After this little comedy, the _Ruiscasson_
+gave us the royal letters for our masters, and we returned to our tents.
+From the information of M. Josaphat and others, the military force of
+this king cannot exceed 20,000 cavalry, some of whom have wooden bucklers
+about eighteen inches long. Others have a kind of cuirasses made of very
+thin plates of steel, which they wear over their ordinary habits. Their
+usual arms are bows and arrows, and cimeters, while some have small
+leathern targets covered with silk, and others carry helmets and
+cuirasses. Their horses are beautiful and vigorous, and very numerous. In
+regard to the manners of the Persians, and the state of the kingdom, I
+shall mention what I know of these subjects as occasion may offer during
+the recital of my travels; but I do not think it proper to weary my
+readers with any lengthened detail.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Journey of Contarini from Persia, through Georgia and Mingrelia, to the
+city Phasis._
+
+Being entirely ready to depart on the 1st of July, we took leave of M.
+Josaphat Barbaro in his tent, when we mutually shed tears in sincere
+grief at our separation. Having recommended myself to the protection of
+God, I mounted on horseback, and began my journey, accompanied by the
+patriarch of Antioch, Marcus Ruffus the Muscovite, and the two Persian
+ambassadors, intending to return by way of Phasis, which is under the
+dominion of Uzun-Hassan. To this route we were advised by certain birds
+of bad augury, who were omens of the terrible dangers we had to encounter
+in the sequel. Coming to the villages of the catholic Armenians, formerly
+mentioned, we were well received by their bishops, and attended the mass
+regularly during three days that we had to remain here, laying in a stock
+of provisions for the journey. From thence we came to the frontiers of
+Georgia, travelling through plains interspersed with hills, and arrived
+on the 12th of July at _Typsi_[1], which is subject to the king of the
+Georgians. This city stands upon a hill, at the foot of which runs the
+river _Tigre_, and it is defended by a good castle on the summit of an
+eminence. It was formerly a celebrated place, but is at present almost
+utterly ruined, though beginning to revive, and contains many good
+catholics. In this place we took up our lodgings with a person named
+Arminius, of the catholic faith. In travelling through Georgia, we found
+a few villages composed of huts, and some castles among the mountains,
+but these were rare and distant.
+
+On the 19th of July, being near the frontiers of Mingrelia, we chanced to
+meet with Pangratius, king of Georgia, in the midst of a forest
+surrounded by mountains, and went to pay our respects to him, when he
+invited us to dinner. We had to sit on the ground, having a skin spread
+before us instead of a table-cloth, and were served with roasted meat and
+fowls, very ill dressed; but, by way of making amends, they frequently
+presented us with large goblets of wine, as they seem to place all
+dignity and merit in deep drinking. For this reason it is their custom,
+at the conclusion of their meals, to challenge one another to drink, and
+he who empties the greatest number of goblets, is held in highest esteem.
+As the Turks drink no wine, their presence was some restraint that day on
+their usual bacchanalian contests, and as we neither could nor would
+compete with them, we were held in great contempt. The king was about
+forty years old, and of large make, with a strong resemblance to the
+Tartar countenance. We parted from the king of Georgia next day, and on
+the 22d of July, on the confines of Mingrelia, we fell in with a Georgian
+commander at the head of some troops, both cavalry and infantry who was
+posted in this place to prevent injury from the disorders that had broke
+out in Mingrelia, in consequence of the death of Bendian, prince of that
+country. These people stopped, and frightened us with, many cruel menaces;
+but at length, after being robbed of two quivers full of arrows, and
+having to gratify them with some money, we escaped from them, and made
+the best of our way to a distance. Leaving the public road, we struck off
+into a thick wood, where we passed the night in prodigious apprehension.
+
+On the following day, while approaching the city of _Cotati_[2], we met
+some peasants in a narrow pass, who prevented us for some time from going
+forwards, and even threatened to put us to death. After much altercation,
+and many threats, they seized three horses belonging to the Turks[3],
+which were with great difficulty redeemed for twenty ducats. On the
+evening we reached Cutais, which is a royal fortress. While passing a
+bridge over a river, early in the morning of the 24th of July, we were
+again attacked by robbers, who came upon us suddenly, and, after many
+threats, forced us to pay the full value of our horses, before they would
+allow us to continue our journey. After passing this bridge, we entered
+Mingrelia, where we followed our wonted custom of sleeping under the
+canopy of heaven, though we had many worse inconveniencies and dangers to
+encounter: for, on the 25th of July, having passed over a river by means
+of rafts, we were conducted to the dwelling of a certain lady, named
+_Maresca_, sister of the deceased prince Badian, who received us at first
+with much civility, and treated us with bread and wine, after which we
+were conducted into a field belonging to her, which was close shut on all
+sides. On the morrow, when we were about to depart, we offered her a
+present of twenty ducats, as a return for her hospitality, which at first
+she pretended to refuse; but we soon discovered her treachery, as she
+insisted on our paying two ducats as a ransom for each of our horses. We
+expressed our astonishment at this rapacity, and endeavoured to represent
+our inability to comply with such exorbitant demands, but all to no
+purpose, and we were forced to comply, being afraid that she might even
+have plundered us of every thing.
+
+Leaving this rapacious dame, we arrived at _Phasis_ on the 27th of July,
+some on horseback and others in boats, where we again lodged with
+_Martha_ the Circassian lady, whom I formerly mentioned. After having run
+many risks in our journey, we here learnt a piece of most afflictive news,
+that the Turks had taken possession of Kaffa or Theodosia in the Crimea,
+by which we were deprived of our last resource, and shut out apparently
+from every hope of continuing our voyage homewards. Our distress on
+receiving this intelligence may easily be conceived, and, in fact, we
+were so much cast down, as not to know what measures to pursue, or to
+which hand to turn us. Louis, the patriarch of Antioch, resolved upon
+going through Tartary and Russia, with which route he was acquainted. It
+was to no purpose that I urged the promises we had mutually come under at
+the beginning of our journey, never to separate on any account. To this
+he answered, that the unforeseen circumstances which had occurred, were a
+sufficient warrant to every one to consult his own individual safety. I
+insisted and beseeched him not to treat me with such unfeeling cruelty,
+but all in vain, for he prepared to set off along with the Turkish
+ambassador, who had been sent by Uzun-Hassan as his particular companion.
+In this extremity I went to Marcus Ruffus, and the Turkish ambassador who
+was joined with him by the king of Persia, to whom I mentioned my
+intention of returning back to Uzun-Hassan. They pretended to approve my
+plan, and even to join me, and we embraced as entering, into promise of
+keeping together; but they secretly came to a determination of taking
+their journey through the province of _Gorgore_, which is subject to
+_Calcicanus_, and to the city of _Vati_,[4] which is on the frontiers of
+the Turks, and pays tribute to the Grand Signior.
+
+The patriarch set out on the 6th of August, and the next day Marcus
+Ruffus followed him, accompanied by several Russians, partly on horseback,
+and partly by means of boats. Their intentions were to travel from Vati,
+by Shamaki, anciently Cyropolis, and thence into Tartary. Thus left alone
+in a strange land, I leave any reasonable person to think what were the
+embarrassments with which I was surrounded. I was unacquainted with a
+single individual, having no company but that of my domestics, and had
+very little money remaining. In short, I was reduced almost to despair,
+of ever being able to get out of the country. In this state of distress I
+fell into a violent fever, and could get no other nourishment but bread
+and water, and a pullet occasionally with much difficulty; and my fever
+increased to such a degree that I became delirious. All my domestics were
+attacked soon after with the same fever, the priest Stephen only excepted,
+who had to take care of us all. My only bed was a wretched mattress,
+which had been lent me by a person named John Volcan; and my life was
+despaired of by every one, till the 9th of September, when, by the cares
+of Stephen and of Martha, my good hostess, or rather through the mercy of
+God, the fever abated, and I soon recovered my former health, to the
+astonishment of every one. My domestics likewise recovered, and we began
+again to consult on the best means of escaping out of our present
+situation. Some proposed to take the road of Syria, but I deemed this too
+dangerous; and we at length came to the determination, of going by
+Shamaki, into Tartary, and thence by Russia, Poland, and Germany. I got
+accordingly on horseback on the 10th of September, but had hardly rode
+two miles when I was forced to dismount and rest myself on the ground. I
+was, therefore, obliged to return to my lodging in Phasis, where we
+remained till the 17th, when, being all of us restored to health and
+strength, we again resumed our journey, after having implored the
+protection and assistance of God. I now took a certain Greek into my
+service, who could speak the Mingrelian language, who occasioned me a
+thousand troubles, which it were tedious to recount.
+
+
+[1] This in all probability is a corruption of Tiflis, or Teffliz, the
+    capital of Georgia Georgia, which is situated on the river Kur or
+    Cyrus, erroneously named _Tigre_ in the text. The proper name of this
+    country is Gurgi-stan, or the country of the Gurgi which has been
+    corrupted by the Europeans into Georgia.--E.
+
+[2] Cutais in Imeritia, named Cotachis on a former occasion in the text.
+    --E.
+
+[3] These Turks must have been the Persian ambassadors of Uzun-Hassan;--E.
+
+[4] This proposed route seems to have been through the province of _Guria_
+    to Batum; and, from the sequel, to have returned to Georgia and
+    Shirvan, passing through Derbent and the Caspian gates, or Daghisten,
+    into western Tartary. But the names in the text are too corrupt for
+    any certainty. Calcicanus, in the text, is probably a corruption of
+    Kalo Johannes, who was then prince, or emperor, of Trebisond.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Leaving Phasis, Contarini travels through Mingrelia and Georgia, into
+Media, and, passing the Caspian, arrives in Tartary._
+
+Leaving Phasis, as before mentioned, on the 17th of September; and taking
+the road of Mingrelia, we came to _Cotati_, or Cutais, on the 21st of
+that month, extremely worn out through the consequences of our late
+illness, and the fatigues of the journey; and as the Greek whom I had
+hired never ceased to give me vexation, I here parted with him as
+handsomely as I could. We remained two days at Cutais, among people who
+knew us not, and whose language we were quite ignorant of. Leaving that
+place, and tracing back our former steps, we passed over several
+mountains in much fear, and arrived at Tiflis on the 30th of September,
+where we took shelter in the chapel of a certain Armenian catholic, who
+had more the appearance of a dead person than of a living man, but who
+rendered us every possible service. This man had a son who lived with him,
+and who, unfortunately for us, was seized with the plague, which had
+raged in that part of the country this year. From him one of my servants,
+named Maffeo of Bergamo, caught the distemper, who still kept about me
+during two days, though ill, as he was my own particular domestic. At
+length, growing worse, he had to take to his bed, when the distemper
+shewed itself; and as he lay in the same room with me, and the house
+could not afford me another, I was forced to take refuge in a hovel where
+some cows were kept at night; and as the Armenian refused to allow Maffeo
+to remain in his house, I was constrained to take him into the same place
+with myself, where Stephen took care of him, till God pleased to take him
+out of the world. After the death of Maffeo, I experienced great
+difficulty to procure another stable for myself, that I might get away
+from the morbid air of that in which my poor servant died. In this
+extremity we were utterly abandoned, except by one old man, who
+understood a little of our language, and who served us with much
+affection.
+
+We remained at this place till the 21st October, and on the evening
+before our intended departure, the Persian ambassador, who had
+accompanied the patriarch, came to Tiflis. He complained grievously of
+having been plundered, through the fault of the patriarch, with whom he
+had travelled to _Lavogasia_, where he had left him, and was now on his
+road to complain to Uzun-Hassan. We agreed to travel in company from
+Tiflis, a city belonging to Pancratis[1]. From thence in two days we
+entered the territories of Uzun-Hassan, as we took the road towards
+Shamaki, or Cyropolis, which is situated in a fertile and pleasant
+country. On the 26th of October we separated, as the Persian went to Uzun-
+Hassan at Tauris, and I took the road for the dominions of _Sivanse_, in
+which Shamaki stands; but by means of the Persian ambassador I procurred
+a _molah_, or Mahometan priest, to guide me on the road to Shamaki. This
+country is greatly more beautiful and more fertile than the dominions of
+Uzun-Hassan, and is ruled over by _Sivanse_, king of Media[2]. Of this
+country Shamaki is the capital, at which place I arrived on the 1st
+November 1474. This city is not so large as Tauris, but, as far as I
+could judge, surpasses that place in the goodness and abundance of every
+thing, especially in excellent cattle. It produces great quantities of
+excellent silk, of which they manufacture various kinds of very slight
+stuffs. While here, I had the good fortune to be rejoined by Marcus
+Ruffus, the Muscovite ambassador, who had parted from me at Phasis, as
+formerly related. Immediately on learning that I was in the city, he came
+to visit me, and we embraced with cordiality. I now earnestly entreated
+him to receive me and my domestics into his society for the remainder of
+the journey, to which he very readily agreed.
+
+We left Shamaki on the 6th of November, for the city of Derbent, which is
+called, in the language of the country, the Caucassian Gates, or the Iron
+Gates. This city is under the dominion of _Sivanse_, and stands on the
+frontiers of Tartary. On our journey we travelled sometimes over plains
+and sometimes on mountains, and were tolerably well treated by the
+Turkish inhabitants, with whom we lodged by the way. About mid-way
+between these two cities we came to a large village, where we found great
+abundance of excellent fruits, particularly admirable apples. We arrived
+on the 12th of November at Derbent, and were advised to pass the winter
+in that place; as it was necessary, in our way to Russia, to cross the
+desert of Tartary, which is much easier in the spring of the year, and
+likewise because it was proper for us to cross over the Caspian to the
+Tartar city of Citracan. The city of Derbent is situated on the shore of
+the Caspian, which the Mardians call the sea of Bachaan or Bacou. This
+city is said to have been built by Alexander the Great, and is called the
+_Iron Gate_, because it entirely closes up the only passage from Tartary
+into Media and Persia, by means of a deep valley reaching from Circassia.
+Derbent is fortified with a thick well built wall, reaching from the
+castle at the foot of the mountain all the way to the sea; but not above
+a sixth part of the space within the walls is inhabited, all that end
+nearest the sea being in ruins, among which are several tombs. The
+country about this city produces abundance of all kinds of fruits, among
+which are plenty of grapes, from which the inhabitants make wine.
+
+The Caspian, or Sea of Hircania, which has no communication whatever with
+the ocean, is about the same size with the Euxine or Black Sea, and is
+very deep. They catch in this sea great quantities of sturgeons, and sea-
+wolves as they are called; and there are prodigious quantities of sea-
+dogs, or seals, having the head, feet, and tail like ordinary dogs. The
+only other remarkable fish is of a round form, about a yard and a half in
+diameter, with no perceptible head or other member, from which the
+natives extract a great quantity of oil, which they use in their lamps,
+and with which they anoint their camels. The inhabitants of this country,
+who are all Mahometans, are neither cruel nor barbarous, and used us
+exceedingly well; having once asked us who we were, and being answered
+that we were Christians, they troubled us with no farther inquiries. My
+dress at this time consisted of coarse and much worn cloth, lined with
+lambs skin, above which I wore a leathern robe, and my hat was of skin;
+in which dress I frequently went to the market to purchase flesh and
+other provisions, which I carried home myself. On one of these occasions
+a person eyed me attentively, and, turning to some of his comrades, said,
+this man was not born to the employment of carrying meat. Marcus Ruffus,
+who happened to be along with me, explained what the man had said; and I
+was astonished at being recognized in so shabby a dress, which I thought
+must have proved a sufficient concealment: but, in truth, as I have said
+before, they are a very good kind of people.
+
+During my residence in Derbent, I was anxious to learn some certain
+intelligence respecting the state of affairs at the court of Uzun-Hassan,
+for which purpose I sent Demetrius de Seze, my interpreter, with letters
+to Josaphat Barbaro at Tauris, which is twenty days journey from Derbent.
+He returned at the end of fifty days, bringing answers from Barbaro,
+informing me that the king still remained at Tauris, but that he was
+utterly ignorant of his affairs.
+
+Spring being arrived, we began to think of pursuing our journey, and
+Marcus procured a boat for transporting us to _Curere_[3]. The boats
+which are used in this country are drawn up on the shore all winter, as
+the sea is then too rough for their use. They are sharp at both ends, and
+wide in the middle, their planks being fastened with tree-nails, and
+their bottoms payed over with pitch; and as the natives use no compasses,
+or other maritime instruments, they always creep along the coast. These
+boats, which are very crazy and dangerous, are moved forwards by means of
+oars; and the people are very ignorant of navigation, though they believe
+themselves the best mariners in the world.
+
+On the 5th of April 1475, we embarked, and departed from Derbent, being
+thirty-five persons in all, including the master of the boat and the crew.
+The rest of the passengers were merchants, carrying rice, silk, and
+silken goods to _Citrarchan_[4], where they proposed to sell their
+commodities to the Russians and Tartars, or to barter them for other
+articles. Having coasted along during three days, with a favourable wind,
+always keeping about fifteen miles from the shore, the wind became
+contrary on the third evening, and increased during the night to so
+violent a tempest that we expected to have been lost. Although we had all
+reason to believe our bark would be dashed to pieces on the shore, we
+made every effort to gain the land, and fortunately our vessel ran into a
+kind of ditch or dock between sand banks, very near the beach, where she
+stuck fast, impelled by the united force of the winds and waves, and of
+our oars. Between us and the shore there was a pool, through which we had
+to wade, carrying our baggage on our shoulders; and we were almost
+perished with cold, owing to the wind, and our being drenched with water;
+yet we unanimously agreed to refrain from making a fire, lest that
+circumstance might attract the notice of the Tartars, whom we feared to
+meet with. At day light we noticed traces of horses having been on the
+spot, and the recent fragments of a ruined skiff, from which we were led
+to conclude, that some persons must have been here; but some other
+circumstances gave us reason to believe that the Tartars were not near
+the shore.
+
+We remained undisturbed at this place till the 14th of April, when the
+wind and weather becoming favourable, we got our bark from the creek, and
+again resumed our voyage, and advanced near thirty miles the same day.
+Towards evening the wind became again contrary, but we avoided the
+dangers of an impending storm, by taking refuge amidst some reeds, among
+which our mariners hauled the boat, so as to be out of danger from the
+waves, and we made our way to the land through the reeds, in doing which
+we were much fatigued and thoroughly drenched in water. We rested here
+all that night and the day following, which was Easter day, having
+nothing on which to commemorate that festival, except some butter, and a
+few eggs which we fortunately gathered on the sandy beach. The mariners
+and passengers were often inquisitive to know who I was; and, pursuant to
+the advice of Marcus Ruffus, I passed myself among them as the physician
+and servant of _Despima_, the consort of the grand duke of Moscovy, to
+whom I was going. A short time after this, one of our mariners happened
+to be afflicted by a large boil, and came to consult me in my assumed
+character; and as I had the good fortune to discover some oil in our bark,
+I made a poultice for him with bread and flour, by which he was soon
+cured. From this circumstance they actually believed me to be a physician,
+and were very anxious that I should remain among them; but Marcus drew me
+out of this difficulty, by saying that I had no medicinal preparations
+with me, but would soon return from Russia with a proper assortment.
+
+
+[1] This name is probably corrupted for Bagration, or Bagrathion, which
+    was once the family name of the sovereigns of Georgia, and, if I
+    mistake not, there is, or was lately, a prince of that family and name
+    in the service of Russia.--E.
+
+[2] The kingdom of Media in the text, is obviously meant to indicate the
+    province of Shirvan, on the west of the Caspian.--E.
+
+[3] Perhaps Saray, on the eastern branch of the Wolga.--E.
+
+[4] Probably Astracan is here meant.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Arrival of Contarini at Citracan, and journey from thence, through
+several dangers among the Tartars, to Muscovy along with some merchants_.
+
+On the 15th of April we put again to sea with a favourable wind, and
+coasting along a series of reedy islands, we arrived on the 26th of that
+month at the mouth of the Wolga, a large river which flows from Russia
+into the Caspian. From the mouth of this river it is computed to be
+seventy-six miles to the city of Citracan[1], which we reached on the
+30th. Near this city there are excellent _salines_[2], from which all the
+neighbouring provinces are supplied with salt. The Tartars who commanded
+in the city would not permit us to enter that evening, so that we had to
+pass the night in a hut without the walls. In the morning three broad-
+faced Tartars came and ordered us to go along with them to their prince.
+They treated Marcus with respect, saying that he was a friend of their
+sovereign; but alleged that I was his slave, as they consider all the
+Franks or Christians as their enemies. These news were most cruelly
+mortifying for me, and afflicted me severely; but I was obliged to submit
+in spite of me, and Marcus advised me to allow him to speak for me.
+Forced in this manner to return disconsolate to my hut, I was long
+exposed to every indignity and danger, to my great mortification and
+distress. The Tartars insisted that I was possessed of pearls, and even
+plundered me of some merchandize I had purchased in Derbent, intending to
+have bartered it in this place for a good horse to carry me during the
+rest of my journey. They informed me afterwards, by means of Marcus, that
+they intended to sell us all to certain people whom they waited for, and
+who were to go into Muscovy with other merchants. After many
+mortifications and distresses, it was resolved to hold a grand
+consultation concerning us at a large village named _Alermi_, about two
+miles from the city, where their lord resided. At this time I was not
+possessed of a single farthing, and was obliged to borrow money from the
+Russian and Tartar merchants, at a high interest, to supply our urgent
+necessities, for which Marcus became my bondsman.
+
+One day, while Marcus was absent, the khan or prince of the Tartars[3],
+broke open the door of our hut, and endeavoured to compel me by threats
+to deliver up the pearls which he believed I was possessed of, and I had
+infinite difficulty to escape out of his hands, and to persuade him not
+to put me to death. The Tartars used often to come to our hut in the
+night, when drunk with mead, demanding with loud outcries to deliver up
+the Franks to them, and the bravest among us were terrified at the
+dangerous situation in which we were among these savages. In this
+horrible situation we remained from the 1st of May to the 10th of August.
+The city of Citracan belongs to three brothers, who are sons to the
+brother of the Tartar emperor, and the inhabitants often make plundering
+inroads into the plains of _Cinassia_[4], and along the borders of the
+Don. During the height of summer they travel with their flocks in search
+of pasturage, to the northern parts of Russia, and hardly spend above a
+month every year in Citracan. That city, which stands on the banks of the
+Wolga, is by no means large, its houses being built of earth: It is
+surrounded by a slight wall, and does not appear to have had any better
+buildings for a long time past. It is said to have had a very
+considerable fair formerly, and that the perfumes and spiceries which
+used to be brought to Venice, came first to this place from the east,
+whence they were carried to the Tanais or Don, which is only eight days
+journey from the Wolga. The prince of Citracan, whose name is _Casinach_,
+sends every year an ambassador to the grand duke of Muscovy, on purpose
+to extort a present; and on this occasion, several Tartar merchants
+accompany the ambassador, carrying silk, silken vestments, and other
+articles of trade, which they barter for saddles, furs, and other things
+which are in request among their countrymen.
+
+The only way of travelling into Russia from this place, is through
+extensive deserts, on which account travellers have to go in large bands
+or caravans for mutual security, and to carry provisions for the journey.
+The Tartars care little for the latter precaution, as they have always
+plenty of spare horses, and kill one when needed, as they live entirely
+on flesh and milk, without caring for any other food. They use no bread,
+and only a few of their merchants who have been in Russia know any thing
+of this article. Previous to the commencement of our journey[5], we
+provided provisions for the journey as well as we could. In this view we
+procured some rice with much difficulty, which, boiled in milk, and then
+dried in the sun, makes, when afterwards boiled in water, an excellent
+and nourishing food. We had likewise some onions, a small quantity of
+biscuit, and some other trifles, and I bought, during the journey, the
+salted tail of a sheep[6]. The usual road from Citracan to Russia lay
+between two branches of the Wolga, but the roads were then exceedingly
+dangerous, as the Tartar emperor was then at war with his nephew, who
+pretended a right to the throne, as his father had once been emperor. On
+this account it was proposed to pass over to the other side of the river,
+and to travel towards the straits between the Don and the Wolga, which
+are about five days journey from Citracan, after which it was presumed we
+should be out of danger. Our baggage was accordingly carried across the
+river on rafts, and Marcus desired me to keep always along with him and
+the Tartar ambassador, named _Auchioli_. I and my interpreter accordingly
+set out about mid-day along with the ambassador, to go to the place where
+the boats waited for us, which was about twelve miles from the city, our
+other companions having already gone there. On our arrival about sunset,
+while I prepared to go into one of the boats on purpose to cross the
+river, Marcus seemed suddenly struck with an extraordinary panic, and
+commanded the interpreter and me to take to flight instantly to avoid
+inevitable danger. We mounted therefore immediately, having likewise a
+Russian woman along with us and a Tartar guide of a most horrible aspect,
+and set out at full speed. In this manner we followed our guide the whole
+of that night and part of the next day, without being ever allowed to
+stop. I frequently asked our guide, by means of my interpreter, what was
+the reason of all this, and where he proposed to carry me? At length he
+explained the cause of Marcus having made us set off, with such
+precipitation; as the khan had sent an order to examine all the boats,
+and he was apprehensive they would have detained me as a slave if I had
+been found.
+
+About mid-day of the 13th of August 1475, we arrived at the banks of the
+river, and our Tartar guide endeavoured to find a boat in which to carry
+us into an island in which the flocks of Auchioli were kept; but not
+finding one, he cut down some branches, which he tied together so as to
+form a raft. On this he placed the saddles of our horses, and tying this
+raft to his horses tail, he mounted the horse, on which he swam across
+the river to the island, which lay a bow-shot from the shore. He then
+came back with the raft, on which he carried over the Russian woman;
+after which he came back for me, and I stripped myself naked before
+trusting myself to the crazy raft, that I might be in readiness to save
+myself by swimming, in case of any misfortune. He afterwards returned for
+our horses; and my interpreter swam across. The passage of the river
+being thus happily effected, the Tartar carried us to a wretched hovel,
+covered by a miserable woollen cloth, where he gave us some sour milk,
+which we found very refreshing, as we had been long without food, and
+were much fatigued. Immediately on our arrival in the island being known,
+several Tartars left their flocks to come and see us, seeming infinitely
+surprized and much gratified by the sight, as we were probably the first
+Christians who had ever been on the island. Being exceedingly fatigued
+and distressed in mind, I did not care to speak with them, yet our Tartar
+guide treated me with much kindness, and made me as good cheer as he was
+able. Next day, being the eve of the festival of the Virgin, he killed a
+fat lamb to entertain me, part of which he roasted, and part was boiled;
+and though contrary to the rules of our religion to eat meat on that day,
+I made a hearty meal, notwithstanding that every thing was disgustingly
+dirty. We had likewise sour milk to drink, and the Tartars drank mares
+milk, of which they are very fond; but I would not drink this, though I
+could easily perceive my dislike did not please the Tartars.
+
+I remained here two days; and at last, on the 26th of August, Marcus and
+the rest made their appearance on the other side of the river, and sent a
+boat for me in which were two of his servants, a Russian and a Tartar.
+Stephen Testa and John Ungaret, my two attendants, were very much
+rejoiced at seeing me again, as they believed me entirely lost, and we
+rested two days at this place before entering upon the desert. Marcus had
+been so attentive as to provide a horse for me, of which I stood in great
+need. In this caravan, which was under the command of the Tartar
+ambassador, there were about three hundred persons, Russians and Tartars,
+who carried with them above two hundred[7] horses, partly intended to
+serve as food by the way, and partly for sale in Russia. We arrived in
+good order at night on the banks of the river, and we rested every day at
+noon during the fifteen days of our journey, as we were now considered to
+be out of danger from any attack by the Tartars. I do not recollect the
+name of the emperor of the Tartars who inhabit this part of the country
+between the Wolga and the Tanais. This nation has no fixed place of abode,
+but shift their encampments from place to place, wherever they can find
+pasture and water for their cattle, on which they have their whole
+dependence, as they subsist entirely on flesh and milk. They have cows,
+heifers, and sheep of admirable beauty, the flesh of which is excellent,
+as they feed on fine pastures; but these people prefer mares milk to
+every other delicacy. Though I have not been in the country of these
+Tartars, I have been informed that it is flat and agreeable, having
+neither hill nor mountain; but the inhabitants addict themselves
+excessively to robbery and plunder, as their sole occupation, and
+continually infest the borders of Russia and Circassia by predatory
+incursions. Their horses are very wild and unmanageable, and are never
+shod. We were told that there is another tribe of Tartars beyond the
+Wolga, named wild Tartars, who allow their hair to grow extremely long.
+In the middle of winter they often make inroads to the very skirts of the
+city of Citracan, whence they carry off cattle, but do no other damage.
+These people, like all the Tartars, shift their encampments in search of
+pasturage and water.
+
+After travelling for fifteen days along the eastern bank of the Wolga, we
+came to a small forest, where the Tartars and Russians of the caravan cut
+down trees to construct rafts for crossing the river. While they were at
+this work, we discovered a small bark which was by no means in good
+repair, by means of which our company proposed to convey our baggage
+across. Marcus crossed over with a part of our baggage, leaving me in
+charge of the rest, and sent back the boat when he was landed. In my trip
+with the remainder of our baggage, the boat began to leak when we were
+about half way over, the breadth of the river at this place being about
+two miles. Stephen and two Russians accompanied me in the boat, leaving
+Demetrius, my interpreter, and John Ungar in charge of the horses. We had
+much ado to bale out the water, but by the blessing of God, we got over
+in safety. After our baggage was landed, the Russians put off, to go back
+for the rest of our people and the horses; but the boat fell to pieces.
+This necessarily delayed our other servants and the horses from getting
+over till next day, during which interval they were badly off, as all our
+provisions were on our side. It was fortunate that I now examined the
+state of our provisions, which I found diminished much beyond expectation,
+so that we were under the necessity of abridging our allowance for the
+remainder of the journey, that we might not run short altogether. Our
+principal food consisted of millet, with garlic and onions, and some sour
+milk; and we found some wild apples at this place, which we roasted. In
+the course of two days, the whole baggage of the caravan was transported
+to the western side of the river by means of seven rafts, drawn by horses,
+and directed by the Tartars, the horses swimming and having the rafts
+tied to their tails. The sight of this was very amusing, but seemed very
+dangerous to those who were employed. After resting some time, we quitted
+the banks of the river, and resumed our journey. This river Wolga is
+certainly the largest and deepest river in the world, being, as well as I
+could judge, two miles broad, and has very high banks.
+
+
+[1] Called Citrarchan in the former section, but certainly what we now
+    call Astracan, then the capital of a Tartar principality, which now
+    forms one of the provinces of the vast Russian empire.--E.
+
+[2] These are large shallow ponds, in which sea water is exposed to
+    evaporation, to procure salt.--E.
+
+[3] In the original this person is called the cham of the _Camercheriens_.
+    The Tartar government of Astracan belonged to one of the Mongal tribes
+    of Kipschak; but the word used in the original may have been a local
+    term, not now explicable.--E.
+
+[4] Perhaps the kingdom or province of Cazan, higher up the Wolga.--E.
+
+[5] Contarini has forgot to give us any account in what manner he procured
+    leave to quit Astracan. Perhaps, by means of Marcus, he was permitted
+    to pass for one of his attendants.--E.
+
+[6] It may be necessary to remark, that the tails of a peculiar species of
+    sheep, O. Platyurus, or the broad-tailed sheep, common among the
+    Tartars, and other parts of the world, are said sometimes to weigh
+    twenty-five pounds.--E.
+
+[7] Probably an error for 2000.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Contarini, after crossing European Sarmatia, arrives at Moscow, the
+capital of White Russia, and is presented to the Grand Duke._
+
+After recommending ourselves to the protection of God, we continued our
+journey, through immense and terrible deserts, sometimes towards the
+north, and sometimes westerly[1], always resting at noon, and taking up
+our quarters for the night on the bare ground, without any protection
+against the weather. To prevent us from being surprized in the night by
+the wandering Tartars, outguards were placed every night in three
+directions around our resting-place. During the greater part of this long
+and dreary journey, we were very ill off for water both for ourselves and
+our cattle, and we never saw any wild animals. One day we saw about forty
+horses, which we were told had escaped from a caravan of merchants the
+year before. We fell in one day with a small horde of Tartars, having
+twenty waggons, but I was not able to learn where they were going. As our
+provisions decreased rapidly, we were forced to use the remainder very
+sparingly, and were consequently reduced to a very short allowance.
+
+On the 22d of September 1475, we entered Russia, and discovered a few
+huts in the middle of a wood. On the inhabitants learning that Marcus,
+their countryman, was in our caravan, they came to see him that he might
+protect them from the Tartars, and brought him a present of honey and wax,
+a part of which he gave to us. This was a most providential supply, as we
+were so much reduced by fatigue and spare diet, that we were hardly able
+to sit on horseback. The first city we came to in this country was
+_Rezan_[2], the prince of which place had married a sister of the Grand
+Duke of Russia. The castle and all the houses of this city are built of
+wood. We here procured bread and meat, and mead in abundance, to our
+great comfort and satisfaction. The next city we came to was _Kolomna_,
+passing a very large bridge over the _Monstrus_[3] which flows into the
+Wolga. At this place, Marcus quitted the caravan, which travelled too
+slowly in his opinion, and pushed on for Moscow, where we arrived on the
+26th of September, after a journey of forty-seven days through the desert,
+from the 10th of August, on which day we left Citracan. In a great part
+of this journey we found no wood, and were forced to cook our victuals
+with fires made of dried cow dung. We returned thanks to God on our
+arrival, for our preservation through so many and great dangers. On our
+arrival, Marcus procured a dwelling for us, consisting of a small stove-
+room and some chambers, with stabling for our horses. Though small and
+mean, I felt as if lodged in a palace, when I compared my present state
+of tranquil security with the dangers and inconveniences I had been so
+long subjected to.
+
+Marcus made me a visit two days afterwards, and supplied me with some
+necessaries, exhorting me, as on the part of his sovereign, to keep a
+good heart. I returned his visit next day; and being very desirous to
+return home to Venice, I requested him to introduce me to the grand duke,
+which he promised to do as soon as possible, and I soon afterwards was
+desired to go to court. Immediately on my getting there, I was conducted
+to an audience; on which I made my obeisance in due form to the grand
+duke, to whom I returned thanks for all the attentions I had received
+from his ambassador, Marcus, in the course of my journey, by whose
+assistance and advice I had escaped a thousand dangers; assuring his
+highness that I attributed these marks of kindness as done to the
+republic of Venice, whose ambassador I was, and that the republic would
+unquestionably evince a due sense of the obligations, to which I owed my
+life and safety. The grand duke interrupted my harangue, by complaining
+with much emotion of the conduct of _John Baptista_ of Treviso, and said
+a great deal on this subject, which is not proper for me to report. After
+a conversation of some length, in which I spoke to his highness about my
+departure, he closed my audience, postponing his answers to my requests
+to a future opportunity. The grand duke was very shortly to quit Moscow,
+on purpose to visit several parts of his dominions, and particularly the
+Tartar frontier, where one of his officers was stationed, with the
+command of 500 horse[4], to repress the incursions of robbers on that
+side: I therefore endeavoured to procure an answer about my departure,
+and solicited a second audience for that purpose. On this occasion I was
+very politely received by the grand duke, accompanied by three of his
+principal barons. At first they expatiated at some length on the subject
+of John Baptista, formerly mentioned; but at length I received liberty to
+remain or to depart as I thought proper. They dismissed me with this
+vague answer, and the grand duke set out from Moscow soon afterwards. I
+owed a great deal of money to Marcus, which he had expended for me and my
+people, as he had defrayed the whole expences of our journey, and had
+supplied me with many things of which I stood in need. I requested
+permission from him to go away, giving him the most solemn assurance that
+I would transmit full payment to him immediately after my arrival at
+Venice. But he declared this was not in his power, as he was under the
+necessity of repaying the Tartarian and Russian merchants, who had
+advanced all these things for us, and to whom he had become security for
+payment. Finding every application to the duke and Marcus on this subject
+ineffectual, as I could not procure the necessary funds for my journey
+from either, I was under the necessity of sending Stephen Testa to Venice,
+to solicit a remittance from our illustrious senate, by which I might be
+enabled to pay my debts. Stephen left Moscow on the 7th of October,
+accompanied by one _Nicolas Leopolitain_[5], who knew the country.
+
+I became acquainted at Moscow with one Triphon, a goldsmith, a native of
+Ascravia or Cathara, who was employed in making several articles of
+silver plate for the grand duke. I likewise formed acquaintance with a
+very ingenious architect of Bologna, named Aristotle, who was building a
+new church in the market-place. As the house in which I lodged was small
+and disagreeable, I went to live with this person by the advice of Marcus:
+But I was soon after obliged to change my quarters by order from court,
+to a house near the castle, in which I remained for the rest of my stay
+at Moscow. This city, which is the capital of the Russian dominions, and
+the residence of the grand duke, or sovereign, is built on a small
+elevation, on the banks of the Mosqua, over which there are several
+bridges; the castle and all the houses of the city being built of wood,
+which is procured from several thick forests near the place. The soil of
+this country is fertile, and produces abundance of corn of all kinds,
+which sell here much cheaper than with us; The country abounds in cattle
+and swine, and with incredible numbers of poultry, ducks, geese, and
+hares; but they have no venison, either because there are no deer, or
+because the natives are ignorant of the art of taking them. But they have
+no vines, and their only fruits are cucumbers, wild apples, and nuts. The
+country is extremely cold, and the inhabitants are under the necessity of
+living for nine months of the year in stoves. They provide during winter
+for their living in summer[6]. When the whole country is enveloped in
+frost and snow, they use sledges drawn by horses, which are very
+convenient and useful for travelling; and are even used in summer on
+account of the miry bad roads, which are exceedingly difficult and
+unpleasant. The river ordinarily freezes over about the end of October,
+when the merchants erect booths on the ice, in which they expose their
+wares of all kinds for sale, as in a fair or market; and they here sell
+great numbers of cattle and swine, and great quantities of corn, timber,
+and all other necessaries of life; every thing being procurable in great
+abundance all the winter. About the end of November, they kill all the
+cattle, sheep, and other animals that are required for winter provision,
+and expose them for sale on the river in a frozen state; and the rigour
+of the season preserves these provisions for two or three months, without
+any risk of spoiling. Fish, poultry, and all other articles of food, are
+kept in the same manner. The horses run with great ease and swiftness on
+the ice yet they sometimes fell and break their necks. Both men and women
+of this country have very good faces, but their manners are exceedingly
+bad.
+
+The Russian church is ruled over by a patriarch, whose election or
+appointment is dependent on the grand duke, and who does not acknowledge
+subjection to the Roman pontiff; and they hold all sectaries in
+abhorrence, as people doomed to perdition. The natives are much addicted
+to drunkenness, and he who excels in drinking is much esteemed among them.
+They have no wine, as I have said before, instead of which they drink
+mead, made of honey and water, which is very pleasant when sufficiently
+kept. It is not allowed to every one to make this liquor, for which
+purpose a license or permission must be had from the grand duke; for if
+every person had liberty to make mead, they would drink perpetually like
+so many beasts, and would kill one another. From morning till noon, they
+are employed in the market-place, occupied in their various businesses
+and employments, after which they adjourn to the taverns, in which they
+spend all the rest of the day. Every winter, great numbers of merchants
+come to Moscow from Germany and Poland, who purchase furs of all kinds,
+which are indeed exceedingly beautiful. Among these furs, are the skins
+of foxes, wolves, martins, sables, ermines, and many others, from Scythia
+and the alpine regions, many days journey to the north of Moscow. Many of
+these are likewise carried for sale to Novogorod[7], a city towards the
+frontiers of Germany, eight days journey west from Moscow. The government
+of that city is democratic, and only pays a stipulated yearly tribute to
+the grand duke.
+
+The country subject to the grand duke of Russia is of vast extent, and an
+infinite number of people are subject to his dominions, but they are by
+no means warlike. This empire extends from the north towards the west, to
+that part of Germany which is under the dominion of the king of Poland[8];
+and some reckon among his subjects a wandering nation of idolaters, who
+acknowledge no sovereign, not even submitting to the authority of the
+grand duke, but when it suits their own convenience. These wandering
+tribes are said to worship during the day whatever first presents itself
+to their view, on going out in the morning; many other ridiculous things
+are reported of them, which I do not repeat, as I have not seen them, and
+can hardly give credit to the reports. The grand duke[9] appeared to be
+about thirty-five years of age, was handsomely made, and had very
+dignified manners, and an air quite royal. His mother was still alive,
+and he had two brothers. By a former wife he had two sons, who did not
+agree with Despina, the reigning grand duchess, and were not therefore on
+very friendly terms with their father. Despina, his second wife, had
+brought him two daughters, and was said to be again with child.
+
+The grand duke returned to Moscow from his journey to the frontiers about
+the end of December; and, as I could not reconcile myself to the manners
+and mode of life of the Russians, I became exceedingly impatient to leave
+the country, and could not persuade myself to stay for the return of
+Stephen from Venice with money. For this reason, I made interest with one
+of the lords of the court, to prevail on the grand duke to supply me with
+money, and to give me leave to depart. A few days afterwards, the grand
+duke sent for me to court and invited me to dinner, when he agreed, from
+respect to the republic, to lend me as much money as was necessary to
+clear all my debts to the Tartarian and Russian merchants, and to enable
+me to return to Venice. The dinner was quite magnificent, consisting of
+every delicacy, and of abundance of exquisitely dressed dishes. When the
+repast was finished, I retired according to custom. Some days afterwards,
+I was again invited to court, and the grand duke gave orders his
+treasurer to give me all the money necessary for paying my debts, besides
+which, he presented me with 1000 ducats, and a magnificent dress of
+Scythian squirrels skins, to wear in his presence when I came to court.
+Before returning to my quarters, he ordered me to be presented to the
+grand duchess, who received me very graciously, and desired me to offer
+her respectful salutations to our illustrious republic, which I promised
+to do.
+
+
+[1] This journey appears to have been through the country on the west of
+    the Wolga, which they probably passed about Czariein, through the
+    provinces of Saratov, Woronez, and Penza, avoiding the Ilafla, to
+    Rezan or Riazan.--E.
+
+[2] Rezan or Riazan, in the province of that name, on the Oka. In a
+    considerable, part of the track of this journey, there are now towns
+    and villages; but the whole of this south-eastern frontier of European
+    Russia, appears to have been then entirely waste, and pervaded by the
+    wandering Tartars. We are quite in the dark respecting the particulars
+    of the route from Astracan to Rezan. It was certainty on the east of
+    the Wolga at the first, to avoid the Tartars which occupied the
+    country between the Caspian and Euxine. The passage of that vast
+    river may have been at Czariein, at its great elbow, in lat. 48 deg. 30'N.
+    or about Saratov in 51 deg. 20'N. neither of which towns seem to have then
+    existed. From thence they would probably proceed, to avoid the larger
+    rivers, between where Penza and Tchenbar now stand, and by the scite
+    of Morbansk, towards Riazan.--E.
+
+[3] In the original this large bridge is said to have been at Kolomna,
+    which is on the river Mosqua, of very inferior magnitude; and flows
+    into the Oka, which most probably is the Monstrus of the text.--E.
+
+[4] In the original, the commander of this body of cavalry is said to have
+    been a Tartarian general--E.
+
+[5] The word Leopolitain, may possibly be a corruption for Neopolitan, or
+    a native of Naples. Perhaps it may refer to Leopol, in that part of
+    Poland now belonging to Austria, and called Galicia.--E.
+
+[6] Such is the expression in the original, which ought perhaps to be
+    reversed. Yet Contarini possibly meant to say, that the inhabitants of
+    Moscow laid up a sufficient stock of money from the profits of their
+    long winter labours, for their subsistence during summer; when, by the
+    absence of the court, they had little employment.--E.
+
+[7] There are two cities named Novogrod or Novgorod in Russia, nearly at
+    equal distances from Moscow, one to the northwest, and the other to
+    the southwest; the latter of which, named Novgorod Sieverskov, is
+    probably meant in the text, and which ought rather to have been
+    described as towards the frontiers of Poland. The other Novgorod did
+    not then belong to the Russian sovereignty.--E.
+
+[8] The geographical ideas of Contarini are very vague and superficial.
+    This is perhaps the only instance wherein Poland; a portion of
+    European Sarmatia, is considered as belonging geographically to
+    Germany.--E.
+
+
+[9] The reigning sovereign of Russia at the period was John III. who began
+    to reign in 1463, and was succeeded in 1505 by Basil IV.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Contarini leaves Moscow, and having passed through Lithuania, Poland,
+and Germany, arrives at Venice._
+
+On the day before that which I had fixed for my departure, I was invited
+to dine at court. Before dinner, I was taken into one of the halls of the
+palace, where I found the grand duke, accompanied by Marcus and a
+secretary. His highness addressed me very graciously, and desired me to
+report all the marks of esteem and friendship he had shewn me, from
+respect to our illustrious republic, and offered me every thing I could
+desire, and which lay in his power to grant. While speaking, I drew back
+from respect; but as I retired he always advanced. I answered every thing
+to his satisfaction, and humbly offered my most grateful thanks for all
+his benevolence to me. He treated me with the utmost politeness and
+familiarity, and even condescended to shew me some robes of gold tissue,
+magnificently lined with Scythian sables; after which we went to dinner.
+The repast was extraordinarily magnificent, at which several of the
+barons and great officers of state assisted. When we rose from table, the
+grand duke called me to him, and gave me my audience of leave in the most
+gracious terms, speaking so loud as to be heard by all the company, and
+expressing his high esteem for the illustrious republic of Venice. After
+this, by his order, a silver cup was brought to me filled with mead, of
+which he made me a present, as a mark of high regard with which he
+honours ambassadors, and other persons to whom he shews favour. This
+present was to me a matter of very serious consideration, as the
+etiquette required me to empty its contents, and the cup was very large.
+When I had drained about a quarter of the liquor, knowing the sobriety of
+the Italians, and perceiving that I was much difficulted, the grand duke
+had the goodness to order the remainder to be emptied, and the goblet
+given to me. Having thanked the grand duke in as respectful terms as I
+was able, I took my leave and retired, accompanied by several barons and
+other persons of rank.
+
+Every thing was now in readiness for my departure, but Marcus would by no
+means hear of my leaving Moscow, without taking a dinner with him, and
+accordingly gave me a magnificent entertainment. Louis, the patriarch of
+Antioch, of whom I have before made mention, came about this time to
+Moscow, and was detained there by order of the grand duke; but I made
+interest through Marcus for his release, which I obtained, and he was to
+have travelled along with me. But as he delayed too long, I set off
+without him. At length, on the 21st January 1476, we set out from Moscow
+in sledges, made like small huts, each drawn by a horse, and guided by a
+driver. In these sledges we carried our baggage and provisions along with
+us, and in them, journeys of great length may be made in a wonderfully
+short time. By order of the grand duke, I had a guide appointed to
+conduct me on the right road, and this was continued from place to place
+all, through his dominions. We slept the first night in a small village,
+where we found our lodgings exceedingly cold, but that was the smallest
+of our inconveniencies, and on this account I hastened our journey as much
+as possible. On the 27th of January, we arrived at _Vieseme_, and a few
+days afterwards at Smolensk on the frontiers of Lithuania, in the
+dominions of Casimir king of Poland. From Smolensk, till we arrived at
+_Trach_[1], a city of Lithuania, we travelled continually in a plain
+interspersed with some hills, the whole country being covered with wood,
+and our only lodgings were in miserable hovels; dining always about noon
+wherever we could meet with a fire, which had been left burning by
+travellers who had passed before us. We had generally to break the ice to
+procure water for our horses; we lighted fires to warm ourselves; and our
+sledges served us instead of beds, as without them we must have slept on
+the ground. We went with such expedition, over the frozen snow, that we
+were assured we had travelled 300 miles in three days and two nights.
+
+Casimir king of Poland, who then resided at _Troki_, immediately on
+learning my arrival, sent two of his gentlemen to compliment me in his
+name, and to congratulate me on my safe return. They likewise invited me
+to dine with his majesty on the following day, which was the 15th of
+February, and presented me on the part of the king with a robe of purple
+damask, lined with Scythian furs, in which I dressed myself to go to
+court. On this occasion, I went in a coach and six, accompanied by four
+noblemen and several other persons. The king himself did me the honour to
+receive me, and conducted me into a magnificent apartment, where he
+introduced me to two of his sons in presence of many nobles, knights, and
+gentlemen of the court. A chair was placed for me in the middle of the
+room; and when I offered to kneel on one knee while addressing the king,
+his majesty had the goodness to insist that I should sit down in his
+presence, which I did after some hesitation. I then gave a recital of all
+that had occurred in my travels, with some account of the dominions of
+Uzun-Hassan, and of the number of his forces, and of the empire and
+manners of the Tartars. The king and his courtiers listened to me with
+much attention during my whole speech, which lasted more than half an
+hour. I then thanked his majesty for the present he had made me, and for
+all his kindnesses to me, attributing his attentions to the esteem he
+entertained for our illustrious republic. His majesty was pleased, by
+means of an interpreter, to express great satisfaction at my safe arrival,
+as he hardly expected I should ever have been able to return; and that he
+was much pleased with the information I had given him respecting Uzun-
+Hassan and the Tartars, which he believed to be more authentic than any
+he had received before. After some other discourse, I was conducted to
+the hall where the dinner was served; soon after which his majesty came
+into the hall with his two sons, preceded by several trumpets. The king
+sat down at the head of the table, having his two sons on his right hand;
+the primate of the kingdom sat next on his majestys left, and I was
+placed next the bishop. The remainder of the table was occupied by about
+forty of the nobles. Each service was ushered in with the sound of
+trumpets, and all the meats were served on large silver dishes.
+
+After dinner, which lasted two hours, I rose to depart, and asked the
+king if he had any farther orders to honour me with; when he was pleased
+to say very graciously, that he charged me to assure the senate that his
+most anxious desire was to cultivate perpetual friendship and good-will
+with our illustrious republic, and he was pleased to make his sons
+express the same friendly wishes. Having respectfully taken leave of the
+king, I was conducted back to my lodgings by several of the courtiers.
+
+Being supplied with a guide, I departed from Troki on the 16th of
+February, and in nine days, passing through the city of _Ionici_, I
+arrived at Warsaw on the 1st of March. The country of Poland appeared
+very pleasant, and abundant in every, thing except fruit. During our
+journey we saw many villages and castles, and were well received
+everywhere, but we found no considerable city. After remaining four days
+in Warsaw, where I purchased horses for the rest of our journey, we set
+out from that place on the 5th of March, and came that day to a town call
+_Messarig_, where we began to travel with less assurance of safety, as
+this place is on the frontiers towards Germany. On the 9th I arrived at
+Frankfort on the Oder, from which place we found more commodious lodgings
+in traversing Germany, than we had been accustomed to for a long time.
+While passing the city of _Gia_[2], on the 15th of March, I had the good
+fortune to meet with Stephen Testa, whom I had sent from Moscow to Venice
+for money. I was quite delighted at this meeting, as from him I received
+good accounts from home. We now entered the city of _Gia_, where we
+rested two days. On the 22d we reached Nurenburgh, where we remained four
+days; from whence we went by Augsburgh, and several other fine cities of
+Germany, and arrived at Trent on the 4th of April, where we celebrated
+the festival of Easter. Being extremely anxious to revisit my beloved
+country, I set out from thence after three days stay, and reached _Scala_,
+in the dominions of our republic. In discharge of a vow that I had
+entered into, I went to visit the church of the blessed Virgin on Mount
+Arthon, and presented the offerings which I had promised at her holy
+shrine. I had already sent notice to my brother Augustine, that he might
+expect me in Venice towards evening of the 10th of April; but my extreme
+desire of getting back to my country, made me get home considerably
+earlier. Embarking at break of day, I arrived at three in the afternoon
+at _Lucafusina_; and, before going to my own house, I went, in the
+discharge of another vow, to the church of our _Lady of Grace_, and met
+my brother on my way in the Jews street. We embraced with great affection,
+and went together to the church. After finishing my devotions, I went to
+the palace, as the _Pregadi_ were then assembled, it being on a Thursday.
+I was admitted into the council, to which I gave an account of the
+success of my embassy; after which, as our serene Doge was indisposed, I
+paid my respects to him in his apartment, and gave him a short history of
+my travels, and particularly concerning those things on which I had been
+commissioned. From thence I went to my own house, where I gave thanks to
+God for his infinite mercy, in having permitted me to return in health
+and safety, after so many dangers. To conclude: Although I might have
+composed this narrative of my travels in a more eloquent style, I have
+preferred truth in few words, to falsehood dressed up in ornamented
+language. I have been very brief in relation to Germany, as that country
+is in our neighbourhood, and is therefore well known to many, on which
+account it would have been both superfluous and tiresome to have given a
+minute description of what every one knows.
+
+
+[1] This almost certainty a corruption of Troki--E.
+
+[2] Though this place must assuredly be a town in Germany, between
+    Frankfort on the Oder and Nurenburgh, its name is so disguised as to
+    be quite unintelligible.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Recapitulation of some circumstances respecting Persia._
+
+The empire of Uzun-Hassan is very extensive, and is bounded by Turkey and
+Caramania, belonging to the Sultan, and which latter country extends to
+Aleppo. Uzun-Hassan took the kingdom of Persia from _Causa_[1], whom he
+put to death. The city of Ecbatana, or Tauris, is the usual residence of
+Uzun-Hassan; Persepolis, or _Shiras_[2], which is twenty-four days
+journey from thence, being the last city of his empire, bordering on the
+Zagathais, who are the sons of Buzech, sultan of the Tartars, and with
+whom he is continually at war. On the other side is the country of Media,
+which is under subjection to _Sivansa_, who pays a kind of yearly tribute
+to Uzun-Hassan. It is said that he has likewise some provinces on the
+other side of the Euphrates, in the neighbourhood of the Turks[3]. The
+whole country, all the way to Ispahan, six days journey from Persepolis,
+is exceedingly arid, having very few trees and little water, yet it is
+fertile in grain and other provisions. The king seemed to me about
+seventy years of age, of large stature, with a pleasant countenance, and
+very lean. His eldest son, named Ogurlu Mohamed, was much spoken of when
+I was in Persia, as he had rebelled against his father. He had other
+three sons; Khalil Mirza, the elder of these was about thirty-five years
+old, and had the government of Shiras. Jacub beg, another son of Uzun-
+Hassan, was about fifteen, and I have forgotten the name of a third
+son.[4] By one of his wives he had a son named _Masubech_, or Maksud beg,
+whom he kept in prison, because he was detected in corresponding with his
+rebellious brother _Ogurlu_, and whom he afterwards put to death.
+According to the best accounts which I received from different persons,
+the forces of Uzun-Hassan may amount to about 50,000 cavalry, a
+considerable part of whom are not of much value. It has been reported by
+some who were present, that at one time he led an army of 40,000 Persians
+to battle against the Turks, for the purpose of restoring _Pirameth_ to
+the sovereignty of Karamania, whence he had been expelled by the
+infidels.[5]
+
+
+[1] Uzun-Hassan, as formerly mentioned, was prince of the Turkmans of the
+    white sheep tribe, and acquired the dominion of western Persia, by the
+    defeat of Hassan-ali prince of the black sheep Turkmans, who is
+    probably the person named Causa in the text.--E.
+
+[2] This is a mistake, Persepolis is supposed to have been at, or near
+    Istakar, above twenty miles N.N.E. from Shiras.--E.
+
+[3] Diarbekir, with the cities of Arzunjan, Mardin, Roha, or Orfa, and
+    Siwas, are said to have been committed by Timour to the government of
+    Kara Ilug Ozman, the great grandfather of Uzun-Hassan, who may have
+    retained the original possessions of his tribe after the acquisition
+    of western Persia.--Mod. Univ. Hist. VI. 111.
+
+[4] According to the authors of the Modern Universal History. B. VIII. ch.
+    i. sect. 3. Uzun-Hassan had seven sons: Ogurlu Mohammed, Khahil Mirza,
+    Maksud beg, Jakub beg, Masih beg, Yusuf beg, and Zegnel. Contarini
+    strangely corrupts almost every name that occurs. Uzun-Hassan, he
+    makes Unsuncassan; Ogurlu Mohammed, Gurlu mamech; Kalil mirza, Sultan
+    chali; Yakub beg, Lacubei; Maksud beg, or Masih beg, Masubech; and
+    omits three of the seven.--E.
+
+[5] Uzun-Hassan is said to have been defeated in battle by the Turks, in
+    1471, near Arzenjan.--Mod. Univ. Hist. VI. 113.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+VOYAGES OF DISCOVERY BY THE PORTUGUESE ALONG THE WESTERN COAST OF AFRICA,
+DURING THE LIFE, AND UNDER THE DIRECTION OF DON HENRY.[1]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+The knowledge possessed by the ancients respecting India, will be the
+subject of discussion in a future portion of this work. We have now to
+contemplate the tedious, yet finally successful efforts of the Portuguese
+nation, in its age of energetic heroism, to discover a maritime passage
+to that long famed commercial region, some general knowledge of which had
+been preserved ever since the days of the Persian, Macedonian, and Roman
+empires. Of all the great events which have occurred in the modern ages,
+previous to our own times, the voyages and discoveries which were made by
+the Europeans, in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries of the Christian
+era, are justly entitled to preference, whether we appreciate the vast
+improvements which they made in navigation, and, consequently, in
+commerce,--the astonishing abundance of wealth which they brought into
+Europe,--the surprising feats of bravery which were performed in their
+various expeditions and conquests,--the extensive, populous, and valuable
+territories which were subdued or colonized,--or the extended knowledge,
+which was suddenly acquired of the greater part of the earth, till then
+either altogether unknown, or very partially and erroneously described.
+By these discoveries, we allude to those of the southern and western
+hemispheres, a new heaven and a new earth were opened up to the
+astonishment of mankind, who may be said to have been then furnished with
+wings to fly from one end of the earth to the other, so as to bring the
+most distant, and hitherto utterly unknown nations, acquainted with each
+other. In the ordinary course of human affairs, it has been observed that
+similar events frequently occur; but the transactions of these times
+which we now propose to narrate, were as singular in their kind as they
+were great, surprising, and unexpected; neither can any such ever happen
+again, unless Providence were to create new and accessible worlds for
+discovery and conquest, or to replunge the whole of mankind for a long
+period into the grossest ignorance.
+
+The merit and glory of these wonderful achievements are unquestionably
+due to the Portuguese nation, and the first and principal share to the
+sublime genius of their illustrious prince, the infant DON HENRY, _Duke
+of Viseo and Grand Master of the order of Christ_, whose enlarged mind
+first planned the fitting out of maritime expeditions for discovery, and
+by the imitation of whose example all subsequent discoveries have been
+accomplished. Every thing of the kind before his time was isolated or
+accidental, and every subsequent attempt has been pursued on scientific
+or known principles, which he invented and established. Although America
+was discovered by Columbus, in the service of Spain, some years before
+the Portuguese were able to accomplish their long sought route to India;
+and although the discovery of America was performed infinitely quicker
+than that of southern Africa and the route to India, Columbus having
+accomplished his design at the very first attempt, and even without any
+previous knowledge of the countries he went in search of; while the
+endeavours of the Portuguese occupied a great number of years in almost
+fruitless attempts, and extremely tedious progression; yet Don Henry
+first set on foot the navigation of the ocean through unknown seas, and
+inspired, other nations with the idea of making discoveries of distant
+and unexplored regions; and ultimately great as were the discoveries of
+Columbus, they may be said to have been accidentally made in the
+erroneous attempt to go by a nearer route to the regions of which Don
+Henry and his successors had long been in search.
+
+These attempts of the Portuguese had been continued for nearly fourscore
+years before any of their neighbours seem to have entertained the most
+distant idea of engaging in foreign discoveries, even viewing their
+endeavours as downright knight-errantry, proceeding from a distempered
+imagination, as well in the first promoter as in those who continued to
+prosecute his scheme. In a word, the relation of these discoveries forms
+one of the most curious portions of modern history, as comprizing a great
+number of the most extraordinary transactions that ever happened in any
+period of the world. For this reason they are well worthy of being
+particularly narrated, that the curious may be made acquainted with every
+successive step in such important enterprizes, and by what almost
+insensible degrees such vast undertakings were ultimately accomplished.
+And as the intercourse of Europeans has operated a great change in the
+countries to which they penetrated, and upon their original inhabitants,
+so that both now appear in a very different light from what they did
+before these expeditions and discoveries; therefore, every circumstance
+belonging to these transactions deserves the most serious notice.
+
+John 1. of Portugal, married Philippa, the eldest daughter of John of
+Gaunt, Duke of Lancaster, son to Edward III. of England, by whom he had
+several sons, of whom Don Henry was the _fifth_. After serving with great
+bravery under his father at the capture of Ceuta, he was raised to the
+dukedom of Viseo, and was sent back with a large reinforcement to
+preserve the conquest to which his courage had largely contributed.
+During his continuance in command at Ceuta, he acquired much information,
+by occasional converse with some Moors, relative to the seas and coasts
+of Western Africa, which raised and encouraged the project of maritime
+discoveries; and these became afterwards the favourite and almost
+exclusive pursuit of his active and enlarged mind. From the Moors he
+obtained intelligence respecting the Nomadic tribes who border upon and
+pervade the great desert, and of the nations of the Jaloofs, whose
+territories are conterminous with the desert on the north, and Guinea to
+the south. By one ingenious author[2], he has been supposed instigated to
+his first attempts at maritime discovery, by the desire of finding a way
+by sea to those countries from whence the Moors brought ivory and gold
+dust across the desert. It unfortunately happens that we have no record
+of the particular voyages themselves, and are therefore reduced to the
+necessity of giving the relation of this great discovery historically
+from the best remaining sources of information. The writings of Cada
+Morto, which will be found in the sequel, form a pleasing exception to
+this desideratum in the history and progress of early navigation and
+discovery.
+
+
+[1] Astley. I. 9. Clarke, I. 140. Purchas, I. 6. Harris, I. 662.
+
+[2] Wealth of Nations, II. 347.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Commencement of Portuguese Discoveries, from Cape Non to Cape Bojador_
+
+Three years before the reduction of Ceuta, the Duke of Visco had sent a
+vessel in 1412 to explore the western coast of Africa, being the first
+voyage of discovery undertaken by the Portuguese, or by any other nation
+in modern times. The commander was instructed to endeavour to follow the
+western coast of Africa, to the southward of Cape Chaunar, called by the
+Portuguese mariners Cape Nao, Non, or Nam, which, extending itself from
+the foot of Mount Atlas, had hitherto been the _non plus ultra_ or
+impassable limit of European navigation, and had accordingly received its
+ordinary name from a negative term in the Portuguese language, as
+implying that there was no navigation beyond; and respecting which a
+proverbial saying was then current, of the following import:
+
+
+  Whoe'er would pass the Cape of Non
+  Shall turn again; or else be gone.
+
+
+The success of this earliest voyage, fitted out for the purpose of
+discovery, is not recorded; but Don Henry continued to send some vessels
+every year to the same coast, with the same instructions of endeavouring
+to explore the coast beyond Cape Non. Not daring to trust themselves
+beyond sight of land, the mariners crept timorously along the coast, and
+at length reached Cape Bojador, only sixty leagues, or 180 miles beyond
+Cape Non. This cape, which stretches boldly out into the ocean, from
+which circumstance it derives its name[1], filled the Portuguese mariners
+with terror and amazement; owing to the shoals by which it is environed
+for the space of six leagues, being perpetually beaten by a lofty and
+tremendous surge, which precluded them, from all possibility of
+proceeding beyond it in their ordinary manner of creeping along the coast;
+and they dared not to stretch out into the open sea in quest of smoother
+water, lest, losing sight of land altogether, they might wander in the
+trackless ocean, and be unable to find their way home. It is not
+impossible that they might contemplate the imaginary terrors of the
+torrid zone, as handed down from some of the ancients, with all its
+burning soil and scorching vapours; and they might consider the
+difficulties of Cape Bojador as a providential bar or omen, to warn and
+oppose them against proceeding to their inevitable destruction. They
+accordingly measured back their wary steps along the African coast, and
+returned to Portugal, where they gave an account of their proceedings to
+Don Henry, in which, of course, the dangers of the newly discovered cape
+would not be diminished in their narrative[2].
+
+Returning from Ceuta, where his presence was no longer necessary, and
+where he had matured his judgment by intercourse with, various learned
+men whom his bounty had attracted into Africa, and having enlarged his
+views by the perusal of every work which tended to illustrate the
+discoveries which he projected, Don Henry fixed his residence at the
+romantic town of Sagres, in the neighbourhood of Cape St Vincent, where
+he devoted his leisure to the study of mathematics, astronomy,
+cosmography, and the theory of navigation, and even established a school
+or academy for instructing his countrymen in these sciences, the parents
+of commerce, and the sure foundations of national prosperity. To assist
+him in the prosecution of these his favourite studies, he invited, from
+Majorca, a person named Diego, or James, who was singularly skilful in
+the management of the instruments then employed for making astronomical
+observations at sea, and in the construction of nautical charts. Some
+traces of nautical discoveries along the western coast of Africa still
+remained in ancient authors; particularly of the reported voyages of
+Menelaus, Hanno, Eudoxus, and others. From an attentive consideration of
+these, Don Henry and his scientific coadjutor were encouraged to hope for
+the accomplishment of important discoveries in that direction; and they
+were certainly incited in these views by the rooted enmity which had so
+long rankled among the Christian inhabitants of Spain and Portugal
+against the Moors, who had formerly expelled their ancestors from the
+greatest part of the peninsula, and with whom they had waged an incessant
+war of several centuries in recovering the country from their grasp.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Discovery of the Madeira Islands._
+
+After some time usefully employed in acquiring and diffusing a competent
+knowledge of cosmopographical, nautical, and astronomical science, Don
+Henry resolved to devote a considerable portion of the revenue which he
+enjoyed as Grand Master of the Order of Christ, in continuing and
+extending those projects of nautical discovery which had long occupied
+his attention. Accordingly, about the year 1418, a new expedition of
+discovery was fitted out for the express purpose of attempting to
+surmount the perils of Cape Bojador. In this expedition Juan Gonzales
+Zarco and Tristan Vaz Texeira, two naval officers of the household of Don
+Henry, volunteered their services; and, embarking in a vessel called a
+_barcha_[3], steered for the tremendous cape. The Portuguese were
+hitherto ignorant of the prevailing winds upon the coast of Africa, and
+the causes by which their influence is varied or increased. Near the land,
+and between the latitudes of 28 deg. and 10 deg. north, a fresh gale almost
+always blows from the N.E. Long sand-banks, which extend a great way out
+to sea, and which are extremely difficult to be distinguished in the
+mornings and evenings, and the prevailing currents, were powerful
+obstacles to the enterprise of these navigators. About six leagues off
+Cape Bojador, a most violent current continually dashes upon the breakers,
+which presented a most formidable obstacle to the brave but inexperienced
+mariners. Though their voyage was short, they encountered many dangers;
+and, before they could reach the cape, they were encountered by a heavy
+gale from the east, by which the billows of the Atlantic became too heavy
+to be resisted by their small vessel, and they were driven out to sea. On
+losing sight of their accustomed head lands, and being forced into the
+boundless ocean for the first time, the ships company gave themselves up
+to despair; but, on the abatement of the tempest, they found themselves
+unexpectedly within view of an island, situated about 100 leagues west
+from the coast of Africa. With extreme joy they beheld the coast of this
+island extending about twenty miles in length, to which they gave the
+name of Puerto Santo, because first discovered upon the feast of All
+Saints. This is the smaller of the Madeiras, being only about two miles
+broad; and, as the only roadstead is upon the south-west side, the
+Portuguese probably anchored upon that side to be under the lee shelter
+of the island from the remnants of the tempest from which they had
+happily escaped.
+
+The island of _Puerto Santo_, or of the Holy Haven, is almost directly
+west from Cape Cantin; whence it would appear that these Portuguese
+navigators could hardly have passed much beyond Cape de Geer, when driven
+off the coast by this fortunate easterly tempest. Had they even advanced
+as far as Cape Non, they would almost certainly have been driven among
+the Canaries. It is perfectly obvious that they never even approached
+Cape Bojador in this voyage; unless we could suppose, after having been
+driven directly west from that cape, that they shaped a northern course,
+after the subsidence of the tempest, and fell in with Puerto Santo while
+on their return to Portugal.
+
+Greatly pleased with the soil and climate of this island, and with the
+gentle manners of the natives, whom they described as in an intermediate
+state of civilization, and entirely destitute of any appearance of savage
+ferocity, Zarco and Vaz immediately returned to Portugal, where they made
+a report of the incidents of their voyage; and to confirm their opinion
+of the value of their discovery, they requested permission from Don Henry
+to return for the purpose of establishing a settlement in Puerto Santo.
+By this discovery an advanced and favourable station was secured towards
+the south, whence any discoveries along the coast of Africa might be
+prosecuted with greater ease and safety, and from whence the dangers of
+the hitherto formidable cape Bojador might be avoided, by keeping a
+southerly or S. W. course from Puerto Santo. From these considerations
+Don Henry granted their request; and, yielding to the adventurous spirit
+which this accidental discovery had excited, he permitted several persons
+to join in a new projected voyage, among whom was Bartholomew Perestrello,
+a nobleman of his household.
+
+Three vessels were soon fitted out[4], which were placed under the
+respective commands of Zarco, Vaz, and Perestrello. These commanders had
+orders to colonize and cultivate the newly discovered island, and were
+furnished with a considerable assortment of useful seeds and plants for
+that purpose. They happened likewise to take with them a female rabbit
+great with young, which littered during the voyage; and which being let
+loose with her progeny, multiplied so rapidly, that, in two years, they
+became so numerous as to occasion serious injury to the early attempts at
+cultivation, and to baffle every hope of rendering Puerto Santo a place
+of refreshment for the Portuguese navigators; insomuch that a resolution
+was formed to abandon the newly established settlement. After having
+landed the different animals and seeds which had been sent out by Don
+Henry, and seeing them properly distributed, Perestrello returned into
+Portugal to make a report to the prince, and Zarco and Vaz remained to
+superintend the infant colony.
+
+Soon after the departure of Perestrello, the attention of Zarco and Vaz
+was strongly excited by observing certain clouds or vapours at a great
+distance in the ocean, which continually presented the same aspect, and
+preserved exactly the same bearing from Puerto Santo, and at length
+occasioned a conjecture, that the appearance might proceed from land in
+that quarter. Gonsalvo and Vaz accordingly put to sea and sailed towards
+the suspected land, and soon discovered that the appearances which had
+attracted their notice actually proceeded from a considerable island
+entirely overgrown with wood, to which, on that account, they gave the
+name of Madeira[5]. After bestowing considerable attention upon the soil
+and other circumstances of this island, which was utterly destitute of
+inhabitants, Gonzalvo and Vaz returned to Portugal with the welcome
+intelligence, and gave so favourable a report of the extent, fertility,
+and salubrity of Madeira, that Don Henry determined to colonize and
+cultivate it. Accordingly, with the consent of the king of Portugal, the
+island of Madeira was bestowed in hereditary property upon Zarco and Vaz;
+one division named _Funchal_ being given to Zarco, and the other moiety,
+named _Machico_, to Vaz.
+
+In the year 1420 Zarco began the plantation of Madeira, and being much
+impeded in his progress by the immense quantity of thick and tall trees,
+with which it was then everywhere encumbered, he set the wood on fire to
+facilitate the clearing of the surface for cultivation. The wood is
+reported to have continued burning for seven years[6], and so great was
+the devastation as to occasion great inconvenience to the colony for many
+years afterwards, from the want of timber. Don Henry appears to have been
+a prince of most uncommonly enlarged and liberal views; not only capable
+of devising the means of making maritime discoveries, which had never
+been thought of before his time, but of estimating their value when made,
+and of applying them to purposes the most useful and important for his
+country. Reflecting upon the reported fertility of the soil, and the
+excellence of the climate of Madeira, and comparing both with the
+judicious foresight of a philosopher, politician, and naturalist, in
+reference to the most valuable productions of similar climates and soils,
+he wisely conceived, and successfully executed the idea of introducing
+the cultivation of sugar and wines into this new colony; For these
+purposes, Portugal would readily supply him with vines; and with people
+conversant in their management: But he had to procure sugar canes, and
+persons experienced in their cultivation, and in the process of
+manufacturing sugar from their juice, from the island of Sicily, into
+which that article of culture had been introduced by the Arabs.
+
+So great was the success of this new subject of industry in Madeira, that
+the fifth part of the produce of one district only, little more than nine
+miles in circumference, which proportion the prince reserved as the
+patrimony of his military order, amounted, in some years, to 60,000
+arobas of twenty-five pounds each; giving the entire acknowledged produce
+of one district only, of the island at 7,500,000 pounds, or 2350 tons.
+This, at the modern price of eightpence a-pound, amounts to the enormous
+sum of L. 250,000 value of merchantable produce, from a district which
+could not contain above 5760 English acres; or above the value of L. 43
+of average yearly value from every acre of that district. This
+astonishingly valuable produce was in the infancy of the sugar trade,
+when that bland and wholesome condiment was still an article of luxury,
+and not as now almost an indispensable necessary, even in the lowest
+cottages of modern Europe. The sugars of Madeira were long famous; but
+after the establishment of the sugar plantations in Brazil, and the
+destructive ravages of a worm which infested the sugar canes of Madeira,
+that article, of cultivation had to be abandoned, and the principal
+attention of the islanders was transferred to the grape, which still
+continues to supply Europe, America, and the East Indies with the justly
+celebrated Madeira wine.
+
+At the same time with the grant of Madeira to Zarco and Vaz, Perestrello
+received a donation of the island of Puerto Santo, on condition of
+colonizing it and bringing it into culture. But so great was the
+multitude of rabbits, all said to have been produced from one doe
+transmitted in a pregnant state from Portugal, that cultivation was
+attended with peculiar difficulties occasioned by their ravages; insomuch,
+that in one islet only, 3000 are reported to have been killed at one time.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Prosecution of Discovery in Africa, to Cape Branco_.
+
+Partly diverted from the original object of prosecuting discoveries along
+the African coast, by the attentions requisite for forming this first
+establishment of modern colonization, but chiefly owing to the extreme
+difficulties of the navigation in the infancy of that art, fifteen years
+were passed from the first discovery of Cape Bojador before that
+formidable obstacle could be surmounted. In all ages of the world,
+ignorant and indolent men have represented new and unusual enterprises in
+scientific pursuits as rash or improper deviations from the established
+experience and vaunted wisdom of antiquity; and those who promoted them
+have been held out as dangerous, or even impious innovators. It so fared
+with Don Henry, who far outstripped the science, or ignorance rather, of
+his day. At home, the discontented spirits, ignorant of his enlarged
+views, perhaps envious of the reputation his very limited discoveries
+had already attained, represented that the tempestuous seas, strong
+currents, and whirlpools, which they fancied must prevail on the other
+side of Cape Bajadore, would necessarily destroy every vessel which
+should attempt to penetrate beyond that absolute limit of human
+navigation; they alleged that all the country to the south of that cape
+was utterly unfit for the habitation of mankind, sterile, burnt up, and
+destitute of soil and water, like the sandy deserts of Lybia; and they
+pretended to object on principles of patriotism, that the natives of
+Portugal were improvidently wasted on idle discoveries, which, if at all
+advisable, would have been undertaken by their former, wise sovereigns;
+who, contented with the known world, did not, vainly seek for conquests
+in the torrid zone, which was altogether unfit for the habitation of
+mankind. They insinuated, that the expences which had been lavished upon
+those fruitless and dangerous maritime expeditions, might lave been much
+more profitably employed for the improvement of some of the more barren
+parts of Portugal. Even the probable profits and advantages derivable
+from the new colonies of Madeira and Puerto Santo, as they were only
+eventual and contingent, did not satisfy the minds of those discontented
+detractors from the merits and enlightened views of the prince. But Don
+Henry despised those vain endeavours to misrepresent and counteract the
+important enterprise in which he was engaged, and undismayed by the
+natural difficulties which had hitherto retarded the progress of his
+mariners, continued his laudable endeavours to extend his discoveries
+along the coast of Africa. The people, likewise, whom he employed in his
+service, frequently made predatory invasions on the coast, taking every
+Moorish vessel which they were able to master, and made many slaves, by
+the sale of which, the charges attending those maritime expeditions were
+partly defrayed.
+
+About the year 1433, one Gilianez, a native of Lagos, whom the prince had
+entrusted with the command of a vessel, returned from an unsuccessful
+attempt to conquer the invincible obstacles which obstructed the passage
+round Cape Bojador. He had been driven by stress of weather into one of
+the Canary islands, and had imprudently seized some of the inoffending
+natives, whom he brought captives to Sagres. Don Henry was much offended
+by this conduct of Gilianez, whom he received with much coldness and
+reserve; insomuch that Gilianez, on purpose to retrieve the princes
+favour, and to make ample amends for the fault he had committed, made a
+vow, that if entrusted with a new expedition, he would perish rather than
+return unsuccessful in the enterprize which the prince had so much at
+heart. The date of the second expedition of Gilianez, in which he
+surmounted the terrors and difficulties of Cape Bajador, is variously
+referred by different authors to the years 1433 and 1434[7]. However this
+may have been, he succeeded in this herculean labour, as it was then
+esteemed, and returned with great exultation to Sagres, where he was
+again received into the favour and confidence of Don Henry. Contrary to
+the assertions, or suppositions rather, of the discontented opposers of
+the patriotic and enlightened efforts of Don Henry, Gilianez reported
+that the sea beyond Cape Bojador was perfectly susceptible of navigation,
+and that the soil and climate were both excellent.
+
+In the following year Gilianez again sailed for the coast of Africa,
+accompanied by Alphonzo Gonzales Baldaya[8], cupbearer to the prince. The
+weather continued favourable during the voyage, and they were able to
+penetrate ninety miles to the south of Cape Bojador. On landing to take a
+view of the country, and in search of inhabitants, they found the former
+to consist for the most part of an extended desert plain, and they were
+much disappointed in not being able to meet with any of the inhabitants,
+though they saw evident traces of them in the sand. To the bay in which
+they landed they gave the name of Angra dos Ruyvos, or Bay of Gurnets,
+from the great abundance of fish resembling gurnets which were taken by
+the seamen.
+
+Gilianez and Baldaya were again ordered in the year 1435 to prosecute
+their discoveries, with instructions to prolong their voyage, if possible,
+till they should meet with inhabitants. Having proceeded about forty
+miles to the southward of the Angra dos Ruyvos, without being able to see
+a single inhabitant, they adopted an expedient which had been suggested
+by Don Henry, and for which they were provided with the means. Two horses
+were landed, and two youths named Hector Homen and Diego Lopez d'Almaida,
+who had been educated in the household of Don Henry, and were scarcely
+sixteen years of age, were directed to penetrate into the interior of the
+country, that they might endeavour to ascertain whether it were inhabited.
+They were directed to keep close together, and on no account to leave
+their horses, and if possible to bring back some of the Moors; and lest
+they should rashly expose themselves to unnecessary danger, they were
+only allowed each a sword and spear, without any defensive armour. After
+wandering almost a whole day in the barren sandy desert, they at length
+descried nineteen Africans, armed with assagays or javelins, whom they
+ventured to attack, though contrary to their orders. The natives
+retreated into a cave where they were safe from the farther assaults of
+the rash Portuguese youths; and as one of them had received a wound in
+the foot, they thought it prudent to return to the shore, which they were
+unable to reach before the next morning. Gilianez and Baldaya then
+dispatched a stronger force to the cave in which the Africans had taken
+shelter, where nothing was found but some weapons which had been left by
+the fugitives. Owing to this event, the place where the two cavaliers
+were landed was named Angra dos Cavallos, or the Bay of Horses; which is
+in latitude 24 deg. N.
+
+The navigators proceeded along a rugged coast to the south of the Bay of
+Horses, upon which the sea breaks with a terrible noise, and which, on
+account of being entirely composed of a hilly shore, faced with rocks and
+small rocky islands, is called _Otegado_, or the Rocky Place. At about
+twelve leagues distance from the bay of Cavallos they entered the mouth
+of a river, where they killed a number of sea wolves or seals, the skins
+of which they took on board in defect of any other productions of the
+country; these seals were found on an island at the mouth of this river,
+on which the mariners are said to have seen at least 5000 asleep on the
+shore. The voyage was continued to Punta de Gale, forming the western
+head-land of the Rio de Ouro, immediately under the tropic, where a
+fishing net was found constructed of twine, made from the inner bark of
+some tree of the palm tribe, but no natives were met with; and as
+provisions began to grow scarce, the adventurous mariners were
+constrained to return into Portugal, after ranging for some time up and
+down the rocky coast of Otegado, without making any important discovery.
+
+About this period, or perhaps considerably earlier, Don Henry obtained a
+bull from Pope Martin V. by which the sovereign pontiff made a perpetual
+donation to the crown of Portugal, of all lands and islands which had
+been or might be discovered between Cape Bojador and the East Indies,
+inclusively, and granted a plenary indulgence for the souls of all who
+might perish in the prosecution of the enterprize, and in achieving the
+conquest of these extensive regions from the infidel and pagan enemies of
+Christ and the church. In this measure, the philosophical genius and
+enlarged political views of Don Henry are plainly evinced; and,
+undismayed by the obstacles which had so long opposed his grand project
+of discoveries, and the length of time which had been employed in making
+so very small progress, he shewed himself to have looked steadily
+forwards to the full accomplishment of his hopes of discovering the route
+by sea from Europe to India, around the still unknown shores of Southern
+Africa. The date of this papal grant does not certainly appear. De Barros
+and Lafitau are of opinion that it must have been posterior to 1440;
+Purchas places it in 1441; and de Guyon in 1444. But Martin V. died in
+1431; and these writers seem to have confounded the original grant from
+that pontiff, with subsequent confirmations by his successors Eugenius IV.
+Nicholas V. and Sextus IV[9].
+
+The gradual progress of these discoveries were interrupted for a time by
+an unsuccessful attempt of Edward I. or _Duarte_, king of Portugal, to
+gain possession of Tangier in the kingdom of Fez. But the history of this
+war, in which the Portuguese arms suffered much misfortune and dishonour,
+are quite irrelevant to the present subject. The plague likewise, which
+raged at Lisbon in 1438, contributed to the suspension of the patriotic
+enterprizes of Don Henry. At length, in 1440, Don Henry resumed his
+project of maritime discovery, and dispatched two caravels from Sagres,
+which were forced back by unfavourable weather, apparently without even
+reaching the coast of Africa.
+
+In 1441, a young officer named Antonio Gonzales made a voyage in a small
+vessel, with a crew of twenty-one men, to the island where so great a
+number of sea wolves had been seen in the former voyage of Alphonzo
+Gonzales Baldaya in 1435. In this voyage Alphonzo Gotterez, a gentleman
+of the bed-chamber to Don Henry, acted as secretary, and the two
+adventurers were instructed to endeavour to obtain an account of the
+country and its inhabitants, and to procure a cargo of the skins of the
+seals or sea wolves, that the voyage might not be entirely destitute of
+some commercial advantages. After accomplishing this part of his
+instructions, Gonzales determined to use his utmost efforts for procuring
+some of the inhabitants of the country to carry back with him to Sagres.
+For this purpose, he landed at the beginning of the night with nine
+associates, and having advanced about ten miles into the interior,
+discovered a native following a camel. The sudden appearance of the
+Portuguese rendered the astonished Moor perfectly motionless, and before
+he could recover from his surprize he was seized by Gotterez. On their
+return to the shore with their prisoner, they traced some recent
+footsteps on the sand, which led them in view of about forty natives, who
+withdrew to an adjoining hill, but the Portuguese secured a female Moor
+who had strayed from the party. With these two prisoners they returned to
+their vessel, not choosing to run any unnecessary risk, or to make any
+needless attack upon the natives, which was contrary to the express
+orders of Don Henry.
+
+When preparing next morning to set sail on their return to Portugal,
+another Portuguese ship arrived, which was commanded by Nuno Tristan, a
+gentleman of the princes household. Encouraged by this reinforcement, a
+second expedition into the interior was immediately resolved upon, in
+which Nuno Tristan, Diego de Vigliadores, and Gonzales de Cintra, joined
+with Alphonzo Gonzales and Alphonzo Gotterez. Advancing again under night,
+they soon perceived a party of the natives whom they immediately attacked,
+shouting out Portugal! Portugal! San Jago! San Jago! The Moors were at
+first stupified with fear and surprise; but recovering from their panic,
+a struggle ensued, in which three of the Moors were slain, and ten made
+prisoners, the Portuguese being indebted for their safety to their
+defensive armour. After endeavouring, in vain, to establish an
+intercourse with the Moors for the redemption of the prisoners, Alphonzo
+Gonzales returned to Sagres with a cargo of skins and the Moorish
+prisoners, and was honourably rewarded by his discerning master. The
+place of this exploit was named Puerto del Cavallero, or the Knights
+Harbour, on occasion of Gonzales being there knighted by Nuno Tristan.
+
+After careening his vessel, Nuno Tristan proceeded along the coast
+according to his orders, and reached a cape in lat. 20 deg. 50' N. to which
+he gave the name of Cabo Branco, or the White Cape, on account of the
+whiteness of its cliffs. He there landed and found some fishing nets on
+the shore; but after repeated incursions into the country, being unable
+to meet with any of the natives, he made a survey of the coast, and
+returned to Portugal with an account of his proceedings.
+
+Three of the prisoners carried to Portugal by Gonzales were Moors of some
+rank and considerable opulence; who each promised to pay ransoms for
+their safe return to their native country, and to give, besides, six or
+seven slaves each to the captors. Don Henry, as grand master of the order
+of Christ, was eager for the acquisition of so many converts from the
+religion of Mahomet, and was in hopes that the favourable report which
+the Moors might make on their return to Africa, would induce the natives
+to enter into trade with his navigators; and that, among the slaves which
+were to be given in exchange, some certain knowledge might be acquired of
+the burning regions of Africa, about which such strange reports were then
+prevalent. Antonio Gonzales was therefore dispatched on another voyage in
+1442, accompanied by a German gentleman named Balthazar, who had
+distinguished himself in the late unfortunate attempt on Tangier, and who
+was anxious to carry home some account of the newly discovered countries.
+After being forced to return to port, to repair the damages they had
+sustained in a dreadful tempest, they again sailed, and reached the coast
+where the Moors had been made prisoners. The principal Moor was landed,
+and was received with great deference and respect by his countrymen; but
+he forgot all his promises on regaining his liberty, and never returned
+to pay the ransom he had bargained for. It would appear, however, that he
+had informed the natives of the return of the other two chiefs; as at the
+end of nine days, above an hundred natives appeared on the coast, and
+entered into treaty for the ransom of their two countrymen who remained
+captives, and for whom ten negroes, natives of different parts of Africa,
+were given in exchange. During these transactions, the sight of a
+considerable quantity of gold dust in the possession of the Moors,
+excited the most lively emotions in the Portuguese, as being the first
+intimation of that valuable commodity being procurable on the coast of
+their new discoveries. From this circumstance, Gonzales gave the name of
+_Rio del Ouro_, or Gold River, to the deep arm of the sea in which he now
+lay, which penetrates about six leagues N. N. E. from the tropic of
+Cancer.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Continuation of Discovery to Cape de Verd_.
+
+On the return from this voyage, the sight of gold placed the fame and
+advantage of the enterprizes and discoveries of Don Henry beyond the
+reach of prejudice and detraction, and the former murmurings and
+discontents against his proceedings were changed into admiration and
+applause. In 1443 Nuno Tristan was again sent out, with orders to
+prosecute, the discovery of a coast which now seemed so likely to prove
+advantageous to the commerce of Portugal. He now doubled Cape Blanco, or
+Branco, which he had discovered in his former voyage, and, about ten
+leagues farther to the south-east, fell in with an island, or rather
+cluster of seven islands, called _Adeget_ by the natives, but which have
+since, with the bay in which they lie, received the name of Arguim, or
+Arguin. The small canoes which were used by the natives of this coast
+were at first mistaken for some strange kind of birds, as the people sit
+upon them astride, using their feet instead of paddles, to urge them
+along. To one of the islands in this bay Tristan gave the name of _De
+las_ Garcas, on account of the seasonable supply which he there received.
+From this place Nuno Tristan returned into Portugal, with some of the
+natives of the country.
+
+Don Henry, in 1444, made an exchange with Massiot de Betancour, lord of
+the Canary Islands, for the islands of Lancerota, Fuertaventura, and
+Ferro, giving him some possessions in the island of Madeira in their
+stead; and immediately fitted out a powerful squadron, commanded by the
+grand master of his household, Fernand de Castro, to take possession of
+this new acquisition, and to subdue the remaining islands, Canaria, Palma,
+Gratioso, Inferno, Alegrazze, Santa-Chiara, Rocca, and Lobos. But, as the
+king of Castile afterwards laid claim to the Canaries, Don Henry resigned
+his conquests, finding the value of these islands by no means answerable
+to his expectation.
+
+So greatly had the fame of the new discoveries extended in consequence of
+the small quantity of gold which had been procured by Gonzales at the Rio
+del Ouro, that several of the inhabitants of Lagos petitioned Don Henry,
+in 1444, to be erected into a trading company, engaging to carry on the
+discoveries along the coast of Africa at their own expence. The prince
+granted their request, and a company was accordingly formed, the
+prototype of those celebrated East India companies which have since
+carried on trade to such vast amount. Among the partners were, Juan Diaz,
+the ancestor of him who afterwards discovered and passed the Cape of Good
+Hope, Gilianez, who had so boldly overcome the obstacles of Cape Bajador,
+Lancerot, a gentleman of the household of Don Henry, Estevan Alfonso, and
+Rodrigo Alvarez. A squadron of six caravels was fitted out under the
+command of Lancerot, which sailed from Lagos in the year 1444, and
+reached the isle of Garcas, in the bay of Arguin, where they captivated
+an hundred and fifty Africans, and returned to Lagos, after very slightly
+extending their knowledge of the coast of Africa to the desart island of
+Tider, in 19 deg. 30' N.
+
+In 1445, the subsequent voyage of Gonzales da Cintra, likewise a
+gentleman in the household of Don Henry, in some measure expiated the
+wanton outrage which had been committed in that of Lancerot. The merit of
+Gonzales had raised him to the rank of a gentleman in the household of
+Don Henry, and his character was held in much estimation; but his
+confidence was obtained and betrayed by a moor of the Assanhaji tribe[10],
+whom he had taken on board to serve as an interpreter with the natives on
+the coast of Africa. Misled by this crafty African, who held out great
+hopes of acquiring plunder, Gonzales steered for the island of Arguin,
+and put into a creek or bay on the coast, in lat. 22 deg. 48' N. about
+fourteen leagues to the south of Rio del Ouro, and forty-five to the
+north of Cape Branco. The Moor got leave to go on shore, under pretence
+of visiting some relations, but escaped in the night with another of his
+countrymen. Gonzales was much mortified at allowing himself to be
+circumvented by the cunning of his interpreter, and rashly embarked in a
+boat with only twelve men, with the intention of pursuing the fugitive.
+Pressing onwards with too much eagerness, he neglected to attend to the
+tide, which happened then to be on the ebb. His boat stuck fast, and when
+the morning broke, he was surrounded by two hundred Moors. Unable to
+extricate himself, or to contend against such mighty odds, Gonzales and
+seven of his men were slain; the other five made their escape by swimming
+to the ship, which immediately set sail for Lagos. The clumsy
+denomination of _Angra de Gonzales da Cintra_, to this bay, still
+commemorates the death of this commander.
+
+In the subsequent year, 1446, Don Henry sent out a small squadron of
+three caravels, under the command of Antonio Gonzales, assisted by Diego
+Alfonso, and by Gomez Perez, the kings pilot. They were directed to
+proceed for the Rio del Ouro, and were strictly enjoined to cultivate the
+friendship of the natives by every possible means, to establish peace
+with them and to use their utmost endeavours to convert them to the
+Christian religion; among other instructions, they were urged to pass
+unnoticed the insults or neglect of honour which they might experience
+from the negroes. The Portuguese endeavoured, but ineffectually, to
+conciliate the natives, and to remove the angry prejudices which they
+entertained. They returned to Lagos with no other fruit from their voyage
+except one negro whom they had received in ransom, and an aged Moor who
+requested permission to accompany them to Portugal. One of their own
+companions, Juan Fernandez, from an ardent desire to procure information
+for the prince, got leave to remain among the Assanhaji Arabs.
+
+Next year, 1447, Antonio Mendez was ordered to return in search of Juan
+Fernandez, from whose inquisitive disposition much information was
+expected. In this expedition he was accompanied by two other caravels,
+commanded by Garcia Mendez and Diego Alfonso, but they were separated by
+a storm in the early part of the voyage. Alfonso was the first who
+reached the coast at Cape Branco, where he landed, and set up a wooden
+cross as a signal to his consorts, and then proceeded to the islands of
+Arguin, which afforded shelter from the tremenduous surf which breaks
+continually on the coast of Africa. While waiting at Arguin for the other
+ships, Alfonso paid many visits to the continent, where he made prisoners
+of twenty-five of the natives. When the other two ships of the squadron
+had joined, they went to the Rio del Ouro in search of their countryman,
+Juan Fernandez, who had been several days anxiously looking out for a
+vessel to carry him off.
+
+After experiencing many hardships, Fernandez had succeeded in gaining the
+friendship of a considerable person among the Moors, and was accompanied
+to the shore by that mans slaves in a body. The natives exerted
+themselves to procure the release of some of their countrymen who were
+prisoners with the Portuguese, to whom they gave nine negroes and a
+quantity of gold dust by way of ransom. To the place where this
+transaction took place, the navigators gave the name of _Cabo do Resgati_,
+or Cape Ransom; where likewise Fernam Tavares, an aged nobleman, received
+the honour of knighthood, a distinction he had long been entitled to, but
+which he would only receive upon the newly discovered coast. During the
+homeward voyage, Gonzales touched at a village near Cape Branco, where he
+increased his captives to ninety.
+
+Juan Fernandez described the natives of the coast as wandering shepherds,
+of the same race with the Moor who had been brought over to Portugal by
+Antonio Gonzales in the former voyage. After he had been conveyed to a
+considerable distance inland, he was stripped of all his clothes, and
+even deprived of all the provisions he had taken on shore. A tattered
+coarse rug, called an _alhaik_, was given him instead of the clothes he
+had been deprived of. His food was principally a small farinaceous seed,
+varied sometimes by the roots which he could find in the desert, or the
+tender sprouts of wild plants. The inhabitants, among whom he lived as a
+slave, unless when better supplied by means of the chase, fed on dried
+lizards, and on a species of locust or grasshopper. Water was bad, or
+scarce, and their chief drink was milk. They only killed some of their
+cattle on certain great festivals; and, like the Tartars, they roamed
+from place to place in quest of a precarious sustenance for their flocks
+and herds. The whole country presented only extensive wastes of barren
+sand, or an uncultivated heath, where a few Indian figs here and there
+variegated the dreary and extensive inhospitable plain. A short time
+before he rejoined his countrymen, Fernandez acquired the protection and
+kindness of Huade Meimon, a Moor of distinction, who permitted him to
+watch for the arrival of the ships, and even assigned him a guard for his
+protection.
+
+In the interval between these two voyages of Gonzales, Denis Fernandez, a
+gentleman of Lisbon, who had belonged to the household of the late king,
+fitted out a vessel for discovery under the patronage of Don Henry, with
+a determination to endeavour to penetrate farther to the southwards than
+any preceding navigator. He accordingly passed to the southwards of the
+Senegal river, which divides the Azanhaji moors from the Jaloffs, or most
+northern negroes, and fell in with some almadias or canoes, one of which
+he captured, with four natives. Proceeding still farther on, without
+stopping to satisfy his curiosity in visiting the coast, he at length
+reached the most westerly promontory of Africa, to which he gave the name
+of Cabo Verde, or the Green Cape, from the number of palm trees with
+which it was covered. Alarmed by the breakers with which the shore was
+everywhere guarded, Denis did not venture to proceed any farther,
+especially as the season was already far advanced, but returned with his
+captives to Portugal, where he met with a flattering reception from Don
+Henry, both on account of his discovery of the Cape de Verd, and for the
+natives he had procured from the newly discovered coast, without having
+been traded for with the Moors.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Progress of Discovery from Cape de Verd to the Gambia_.
+
+Soon after the return of Denis from the Cape de Verd, Gonzales Pachecos,
+a wealthy officer belonging to the household of Don Henry, fitted out a
+ship at his own expence, of which he gave the command to Dinisianez da
+Gram, one of the princes equerries, who was accompanied by Alvaro Gil, an
+essayer of the mint, and Mafaldo de Setubal. After touching at Cape
+Branco, they steered along the coast for the isle of Arguin, making
+descents in several places, where they made a considerable number of
+captives from the Moors. At the isle _De las Garcas_ they found another
+caravel, commanded by Lourenco Dias, which formed part of a considerable
+squadron that had been lately fitted out from Lagos. Two days afterwards,
+the admiral of that squadron, Lancarot, and nine other caravels arrived.
+Gram informed Lancarot of his success in making fifty prisoners, whom he
+had dearly purchased by the loss of seven of his men, who had been
+murdered by the Moors. Lancarot immediately sailed for Arguin, bent on
+revenge, and sacrificed the lives of eight, and the liberty of four of
+the natives, to the memory of Gonzales da Cintra and the mariners of Gram.
+On this occasion two of the Portuguese officers were knighted on the
+newly discovered coast, which seems then to have been a fashionable
+ambition among them, no doubt arising from the prevailing zeal for
+maritime discovery. From Arguin Lancarot passed over to the isle of Tider,
+whence the inhabitants made their escape to the adjacent continent; but
+the Portuguese soon followed, and the astonished Moors fled on all sides,
+after a sharp skirmish, in which a good many of them were slain, and
+sixty taken prisoners.
+
+The fleet now separated, a part returning home by way of the Canaries,
+while Lancarot, with several other caravels, advanced along the coast of
+Africa southwards, till he got beyond what the Moors called the Cahara,
+or Sahara, of the Assenaji. This Moorish nation is mentioned by Abulfeda
+as the ruling tribe in Audagost, or Agadez, and as inhabiting the
+southern part of Morocco. They are therefore to be considered as the
+peculiar people of the great desert and its environs, at its western
+extremity on the Atlantic. The latter part of their name, _aji_, or
+rather aspirated _haji_, signifies a pilgrim, and is now the appropriate
+title of one who has made the great pilgrimage of Mecca. In the present
+case, the name of Assenaji probably signifies the _Wanderers of the
+Desert_. The Sanhaga, or Assenaji tribe, is now placed at no great
+distance from the African coast, between the rivers Nun and Senegal; and
+this latter river has probably received its Portuguese name of Sanaga
+from that tribe. Ptolemy likewise probably named Cape Verd _Arsinarium_,
+from the same people, from which it may be inferred that they anciently
+occupied both sides of the Senegal river, which is named _Dardalus_ by
+that ancient geographer.
+
+Twenty leagues beyond the southern boundary of the great desert, Lancarot
+came to the mouth of a large river, which had been formerly seen by Denis
+Fernandez, and named by him _Rio Portugues_, or the Portuguese river;
+which was called _Ouedech_ by the natives, and afterwards got the name of
+Canaga, Zanaga, Sanhaga, Sanaga, or Senega, now the Senegal. Lancarot
+passed in safety over the bar of this river, and endeavoured to explore
+its course upwards, but the weather became unfavourable, and forced him
+again to sea, when he proceeded with part of his squadron to Cape Verd,
+near which place he took in a supply of water and goats flesh. The fleet
+was again dispersed by a second storm, and only three vessels remained
+under the command of Lancarot. With these he made a descent on the island
+of Tider, where he captured fifty-nine Moors; and with these, and some
+natives he had made prisoners on the banks of the Senegal, he returned
+into Portugal.
+
+In the year 1447, Nuna Tristan made another voyage to the coast of Africa;
+and, advancing beyond _Cabo dos Mastos_, or the Cape of Masts, so named
+from some dead palms resembling masts, seen there by Lancarot, who made
+this discovery in the former voyage, Nuna Tristan proceeded southwards
+along the coast of Africa, 180 miles beyond Cape Verd, where he reached
+the mouth of a river which he called Rio Grande, or the Large River,
+since called Gamber, Gambra, or Gambia. Tristan came to anchor at the
+mouth of this river, and went in his boat with twenty-two armed men on
+purpose to explore its course. Having reached to a considerable distance
+from his ship, he was environed by thirteen almadias or canoes, manned by
+eighty negroes, who advanced with dreadful yells, and poured in continual
+vollies of poisoned arrows, by which he, and almost every man in his boat
+were wounded before they could regain the ship. Nuno Tristan and all the
+wounded men died speedily of the effects of these poisoned weapons,
+himself only living long enough to recount the nature of the terrible
+disaster to the small remainder of the crew who had been left in charge
+of the caravel; which was brought home by only four survivors, after
+wandering for two months in the Atlantic, scarcely knowing which way to
+steer their course.
+
+There appears some difficulty and contradiction in regard to the river
+discovered by Nuna Tristan, from the vague name of Rio Grande. Instead of
+the Gambia, in lat. 13 deg. 30' N. some of the Portuguese historians are
+inclined to believe that this fatal event took place at another river, in
+lat. 10 deg. 15' N. at least 500 nautical miles beyond the Gambia, to the S.S.
+E. which was afterwards called Rio de Nuno. This is scarcely probable,
+as no notice whatever is taken of the great archipelago of shoals and
+islands which extend from Cabo Rosso to beyond the mouth of that river
+which is still called Rio Grande. Yet it must be acknowledged that our
+remaining information respecting these early Portuguese voyages of
+discovery, is unfortunately vague and unsatisfactory.
+
+In the same year, 1447, Alvaro Fernando proceeded to the coast of Africa,
+and is said to have advanced forty leagues beyond Tristan, having arrived
+at the mouth of a river called Tabite[11], 100 miles to the south of Rio
+Nuno. Notwithstanding the appearance of a determined opposition on the
+part of the natives, who had manned five almadias, Alvaro resolved to
+explore its course in his boat, and proceeded up the river for that
+purpose, with the utmost circumspection. One of the almadias stood out
+from the rest, and attacked his boat with great bravery, discharging a
+number of poisoned arrows, by which Alvaro and several of his men were
+wounded, which forced him to desist and return to his ship. Being,
+however, provided with _theriac_ and other antidotes against the poison,
+Alvaro and all his men recovered from their wounds. He resolved, after
+leaving the river Tabite, to proceed along the coast, which he did to a
+sandy point; and, apprehending no danger in so open a situation, was
+preparing to land, when he was suddenly assailed by a flight of poisoned
+arrows, from 120 negroes who started up from a concealment. Alvaro,
+therefore, desisted from any farther attempt to explore the coast, and
+returned to Lagos to give an account of his proceedings.
+
+In the same year, ten caravels sailed from Lagos for Madeira, the
+Canaries, and the coast of Africa, but returned without making any
+progress in discovering the coast. Under this year likewise, 1447, the
+Antilles, or Caribbee islands, are pretended to have been discovered by a
+Portuguese ship driven, thither by a storm. But the fact rests only on
+the authority, of Galvano, a Portuguese historian, and is not at all
+credible. Indeed the story is an absolute fable; as the inhabitants are
+said to have spoken the Portuguese language, and to have had _seven
+cities_ in their island. In the same year, Gomez Perez went with two
+caravels to Rio del Ouro, whence he carried eighty Moors to Lagos as
+prisoners.
+
+About this period the progress of discovery was arrested by political
+disputes in Portugal, which ended in a civil war between Don Pedro, Duke
+of Coimbra, and King Alphonso V. his nephew and son-in-law, in the course
+of which Don Pedro was slain. Don Henry appears to have taken no share in
+these disputes, except by endeavouring to mediate between his nephew and
+brother; and, after the unhappy catastrophe of Don Pedro, Don Henry
+returned to Sagres, where he resumed the superintendence of his maritime
+discoveries.
+
+
+[1] Explained by the celebrated Dr Johnson, as "so named from its
+    progression into the ocean, and the circuit by which it must be
+    doubled." Introduct. to the World Displayed.--Clarke.
+
+
+[2] Cape Bojador is imagined to have been the _Canarea_ of Ptolemy.--
+    Clarke I. 15
+
+[3] The _barcha_ is a sort of brig with topsails, having all its yards on
+    one long pole without sliding masts, as still used by tartans and
+    settees. The _barcha longa_ is a kind of small galley, with one mast
+    and oars.--Clarke, I. p. 153.
+
+[4] Clarke says in the same year 1418. But this could not well be, as the
+    Discovery of Puerto Santo was made so late as the 1st of November of
+    that year. The truth is, that only very general accounts of these
+    early voyages remain in the Portuguese historians.--E.
+
+[5] Such is the simple and probable account of the discovery of Madeira in
+    Purchas. Clarke has chosen to embellish it with a variety of very
+    extraordinary circumstances, which being utterly unworthy of credit,
+    we do not think necessary to be inserted in this place. See Progress
+    of Maritime Discovery, I. 157.--E.
+
+[6] In the Introduction to the World Displayed, Dr Johnson remarks on this
+    story, that "green wood is not very apt to burn; and the heavy rains
+    which fall in these countries must surely have extinguished the
+    conflagration were it ever so violent." Yet in 1800 Radnor forest
+    presented a conflagration of nearly twenty miles circumference, which
+    continued to spread for a considerable time, in spite of every effort
+    to arrest its progress.--E.
+
+[7] De Barros; Lafitan; Vincent, in the Periplus of the Erythrean sea;
+    Meikle, in his translation of the Lusiad. Harris, in his Collection,
+    Vol. I. p. 663, postpones this discovery to the year 1439.--Clarke.
+
+[8] In Purchas this person is named Antonio Gonsalvo; but the authority of
+    Clarke, I. 188, is here preferred.--E.
+
+[9] Progr. of Nav. Disc. I. 184.
+
+[10] This tribe of Assenhaji, or Azanaghi, are the Zenhaga of our maps,
+    and the Sanhagae of Edrisi and Abulfeda. They are at present
+    represented as inhabiting at no great distance from the coast of
+    Africa, between the rivers Nun and Senegal.--Cl.
+
+[11] No such name occurs in the best modern charts, neither is there a
+    river of any consequence on the coast which answers to the distance.
+    The first large river to the south of the Nuno is the Mitomba, or
+    river of Sierra Liona, distant about 130 maritime miles.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Discovery and Settlement of the Acores_[1].
+
+These nine islands, called the Acores, Terceras, or Western islands, are
+situated in the Atlantic, 900 miles west from Portugal, at an almost
+equal distance from Europe, Africa, and America. The Flemings pretend
+that they were discovered by a navigator of their nation, John Vanderberg,
+who sailed from Lisbon in 1445 or 1449. Santa Maria, one of these islands,
+250 leagues west from Cape St Vincent, was first seen on the 15th August
+1432, by Cabral, who sailed under the orders of Don Henry. San Miguel was
+taken possession of by the same navigator on the 8th May 1444; and Ponta
+Delgada its capital, received its charter from Emanuel in 1449. Tercera
+was given to Jacome de Brujes in 1450, by Don Henry, in which year St
+George was discovered. Pico and Gracioso were discovered about the same
+time. Perhaps Fayal may actually have been first explored, as many of the
+inhabitants are of Flemish descent, under the command and protection of
+the Portuguese. Flores and Corvo, which lie seventy leagues west from
+Tercera, are not reckoned among the Acores by some writers. In this
+latter island, the Portuguese pretend that there was discovered an
+equestrian statue made from one block of stone. The head of the man was
+bare, his left hand rested on the mane of his horse, and his right
+pointed towards the _west_, as if indicating the situation of another
+continent. In addition to all this, an inscription appeared to have been
+traced on a rock beneath the statue, but in a language which the
+Portuguese did not understand.
+
+In the slow progress of discovery, the perils endured by the officers and
+men employed by Don Henry, from the Moors and Negroes, frequently
+occasioned murmurs against his plans of discovery; but the several
+clusters of islands, the Madeiras, Cape Verd, and Acores, formed a
+succession of maritime and commercial colonies, and nurseries for seamen,
+which took off from the general obloquy attending the tedious and
+hitherto unsuccessful attempts to penetrate farther into the southern
+hemisphere, and afforded a perpetual supply of navigators, and a stimulus
+to enterprize. The original prejudices against the possibility of
+navigating or existing in the torrid zone still subsisted, and although
+the navigators of Don Henry had gradually penetrated to within ten
+degrees of the equator, yet the last successive discovery was always held
+forth by the supporters of ignorant prejudice, as that which had been
+placed by nature as an insurmountable barrier to farther progress in the
+Atlantic. In this situation, the settlement of the Acores was of
+considerable importance. In 1457, Don Henry procured the grant of many
+valuable privileges to this favourite colony, the principal of which was
+the exemption of the inhabitants from any duties on their commerce to the
+ports of Portugal and even of Spain.
+
+In 1461, a fort was erected in the isle of Arguin on the African coast of
+the Moors, to protect the trade carried on there for gold and negro
+slaves. Next year, 1462, Antonio de Noli, a Genoese, sent by the republic
+to Portugal, entered into the service of Don Henry, and in a voyage to
+the coast of Africa, discovered the islands which are known by the name
+of the Cape de Verd Islands, though they lie 100 leagues to the westward
+of that Cape. In the same year Pedro de Cintra, and Suera de Costa,
+penetrated a little farther along the coast of Africa, and discovered the
+river or Bay of Sierra Liona or Mitomba, in lat. 8 deg. 30' N. This
+constituted the last of the Portuguese discoveries, carried on under the
+direct influence and authority of Don Henry, the founder and father of
+modern maritime discovery, as he died next year, 1463, at Sagres, in the
+sixty-seventh year of his age; and, for a time, the maritime enterprise
+of the Portuguese nation was palsied by his death.
+
+Thus, during a long period of fifty-two years, this patriotic prince
+devoted almost his whole attention, and the ample revenues which he
+enjoyed as Duke of Viseo end grand master of the military order of Christ,
+in extending the maritime knowledge, and consequently the commercial
+prosperity of his country. The incidents of the last seven years of the
+life of this distinguished prince, are involved in uncertainty, and we
+know very little with regard to the progress of his maritime discoveries
+from 1456, the date of the second of the voyages of Cada Mosto, of which
+we propose to give a separate account, till the year of his death, 1463.
+From the year 1412, when he began his operations, at which time he could
+scarcely exceed fifteen years of age, the navigators who had been formed
+under his auspices and direction, and often instructed by himself in the
+theory of navigation and cosmography, gradually explored the western
+coast of Africa, from Cape Nam or Non, in lat. 28 deg. 15', certainly to Rio
+Grande, in lat. 11 deg. N. or rather to Rio de Nuno, not quite a degree
+farther south; but it is highly probable that the southern limit of
+discovery in his time extended to Cabo Verga, in lat. 10 deg. N. the northern
+boundary of the country usually called the Sierra Liona, or the Ridge of
+Lions, perhaps to the gulf of Mitomba, or bay of Sierra Liona, in lat. 8 deg.
+30' N. an extent of 29 deg. 15' of latitude, or 1185 nautical miles; a mere
+nothing certainly when compared with modern navigation, but a wonderful
+effort in the infancy of the science, when even coasting voyages of any
+extent along well known shores, and in frequented seas, were looked upon
+as considerable efforts. No brilliant discovery, indeed, rewarded the
+perseverance of Don Henry, and the courage of his servants; but an
+indestructible foundation of useful knowledge was laid, for overthrowing
+the ignorant prejudices of the age, and by which, not long afterwards,
+his plans were perfected by completing the circumnavigation of Africa,
+and by the discovery of the _New_ World. Dr Vincent, the learned editor
+and commentator of the Periplus of the Erythrean Sea, is disposed to
+limit the discoveries of Don Henry to Cape Verd[2], but Ramusio believed
+that the Island of St Thomas was settled in his time; and the ingenious
+translator of the Lusiad of Camoens is of opinion that some of his
+commanders passed beyond the equator[3]. According to Mickle, it was the
+custom of his navigators to leave his motto, _Talent de bien faire_,
+wherever they came; and in 1525 Loaya, a Spanish captain, found that
+device carved on the bark of a tree in the island of St Matthew, or
+Anabon, in the _second_ degree of southern latitude. But this proof is
+quite inconclusive, as the navigators long reared in the school of this
+great prince might naturally enough continue his impress upon the
+countries they visited, even after his lamented death.
+
+About seven years before the decease of Don Henry, two voyages were made
+to the African coast by Alvise da Cada Mosto, a Venetian navigator, under
+the auspices of the Duke of Viseo; but which we have chosen to separate
+from the historical deduction of the Portuguese discoveries, principally
+because they contain the oldest nautical journal extant, except those
+already given in our First Part from the pen of the great Alfred, and are
+therefore peculiarly valuable in a work of this nature. Their
+considerable length, likewise, and because they were not particularly
+conducive to the grand object of extending the maritime discoveries, have
+induced us to detach them from the foregoing narrative, that we might
+carry it down unbroken to the death of the great Don Henry. These voyages,
+likewise, give us an early picture of the state of population,
+civilization, and manners of the Africans, not to be met with elsewhere.
+
+To this we subjoin an abstract of the narrative of a voyage made by Pedro
+de Cintra, a Portuguese captain, to the coast of Africa, drawn up for
+Cada Mosto, at Lagos, by a young Portuguese who had been his secretary,
+and who had accompanied Cintra in his voyage. The exact date of this
+voyage is nowhere given; but as the death of Don Henry is mentioned in
+the narrative, it probably took place in that year, 1463.
+
+
+[1] So called from the number of hawks which were seen on these islands
+    when first discovered, _Acor_ signifying a hawk in the Portuguese
+    language; hence Acores or Acoras, pronounced Azores, signifies the
+    Islands of Hawks.--Clarke.
+
+[2] Peripl. of the Erythr. Sea, 193.
+
+[3] Hist. of the Disc. of India, prefixed to the translation of the Lusiad,
+    I. 158.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+
+ORIGINAL JOURNALS OF THE VOYAGES OF CADA MOSTO, AND PIEDRO DE CINTRA TO
+THE COAST OF AFRICA; THE FORMER IN THE YEARS 1455 AND 1456, AND THE
+LATTER SOON AFTERWARDS[1].
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+Alvise Da Cada Mosto, a Venetian, in the service of Don Henry of Portugal,
+informs us in his preface, that he was the first navigator from the
+_noble city of Venice_, who had sailed on the ocean beyond the Straits of
+Gibraltar, to the southern parts of Negroland, and Lower Ethiopia. These
+voyages at Cada Mosto are the oldest extant in the form of a regular
+journal, and were originally composed in Italian, and first printed at
+Venice in 1507. This first edition is now exceedingly scarce, but there
+is a copy in the kings library, and another in the valuable collection
+made by Mr Dalrymple. These voyages were afterward published by Ramusio
+in 1613, and by Grynaeus in Latin. The latter was misled in regard to the
+date; which he has inadvertently placed in 1504, after the death of
+Prince Henry, and even subsequent to the discovery of the Cape of Good
+Hope by Bernal Diaz. Even Ramusio, in his introduction to the voyages of
+Cada Mosto, has made a mistake in saying that they were undertaken by the
+orders of John king of Portugal, who died in 1433.
+
+Ramusio imagined that the discoveries of Cada Mosto might tend to great
+importance, as he considered the rivers Senegal and Rio Grande to be
+branches of the Niger, by which means the Europeans might open a trade
+with the rich kingdoms of Tombuto and Melli on that river, and thus bring
+gold from the countries of the Negroes, by an easier, safer, and more
+expeditious manner, than as conveyed by the Moors of Barbary by land,
+over the vast and dangerous deserts that intervene between the country on
+the Niger and Senegal rivers, and Barbary. As, by the account of Leo,
+salt is the most valuable commodity throughout the countries of the
+Negroes, Ramusio proposed that the ships should take in cargoes of salt
+at the island of _Sal_, one of the Cape de Verds, and thence supply the
+countries on the Niger, which was reported to be navigable for 500 miles
+into the interior; and that they should bring back gold and slaves in
+return; the latter to be brought to market at St Jago, another of the
+Cape de Verd islands, where they would be immediately bought up for the
+West Indies. All this fine speculation, however, rested on mistaken
+foundations; as the Niger is altogether an inland river, running to the
+east, and has no communication with the Senegal and Gambia, which run
+west into the Atlantic. Yet time, and the civilization of the natives on
+the Senegal and Gambia, may hereafter realize this scheme of a valuable
+traffic into the interior of Africa; but it is fervently to be hoped,
+that the trade in slaves may never be revived.
+
+In his preface, after an apology for his performance, and making a
+declaration of his strict adherence to truth in all the particulars he
+relates, Cada Mosto gives some account of the infant Don Henriquez, or
+Henry, of Portugal, the great author and promoter of maritime discoveries.
+He praises him, as a prince of a great soul and sublime genius, and of
+great skill in astronomy; and adds, that he applied himself entirely to
+the service of Christ, by making war against the Moors. While on death-
+bed, in 1432, Don John, king of Portugal, exhorted his son Don Henry to
+pursue his laudable and holy purpose, of _persecuting_ the enemies of the
+Christian faith, which he promised to perform; and, accordingly, with the
+assistance of his brother Don Duarte, or Edward, who succeeded to the
+throne of Portugal, he made war in Fez with success for many years.
+Afterwards, the more effectually to harass the Moors, he used to send his
+caravels, or ships of war, annually, to scour the coasts of Azafi, or Al
+Saffi, and Messa, on the coast of Africa, without the Mediteranean, by
+which he did them much damage. But, having in view to make discoveries
+along that western coast, he ordered them every year to advance farther
+towards the south. They accordingly proceeded till they came to a great
+cape, which put a stop to their progress southwards for several years,
+being afraid to go beyond it; whence it took the name it still retains of
+Cape Non[2]; meaning, that such as went beyond should never return. Don
+Henry, however, was of a different opinion, and adding three other
+caravels to those which had been at the cape, sent them again next year
+to make the attempt. They accordingly penetrated about 100 miles beyond
+that cape, where they found only a sandy coast with no habitations, and
+returned back to Portugal.
+
+Encouraged by this commencement of successful progress, Don Henry sent
+the same fleet back next year, with orders to extend their discoveries
+150 miles farther to the south, and even more if they found it proper;
+and promised to enrich all who should embark in this navigation. They
+went again; and, although they obeyed the instructions of the prince,
+they could not improve the discoveries. Yet, firmly persuaded by the
+strength of his own judgment, that people and habitations would certainly
+be found at length, Don Henry continued to send out his caravels from
+time to time, and they came at length to certain coasts frequented by the
+Arabs of the desert, and to the habitations of the Azanaghi, a tawny race.
+Thus the countries of the negroes were discovered; and different nations
+afterwards, which will be mentioned in the following relation.
+
+Thus far the preface of Cada Mosto, as given in the collection of Astley,
+from the edition of Ramusio, with which we must be satisfied in this work,
+as that in the royal library is inaccessible for our use. The present
+version has been carefully formed, by a comparison of Astley, with the
+original in Ramusio, and with the summary by the Reverend James Stanier
+Clarke, in his curious work on the progress of maritime discoveries,
+which only gives a selection of what he considered to be its most
+material parts. In this edition, the narrative style of Cada Mosto, in
+his own person, is restored as much as possible. It may be noticed, that
+Alvise is the Portuguese form of the name Louis, or Lewis.
+
+In addition to the two voyages of Cada Mosto himself, there is a third
+voyage included in the present chapter, performed by Piedro de Cintra to
+the same coast, the narrative of which was communicated to Cada Mosto by
+one who had accompanied Cintra, and had been clerk to Cada Mosto in the
+two former voyages.
+
+
+[1] Astley, Col. of Voy. and Trav. I. 573. Clarke, Prog. of Marit. Disc.
+    I. 235.
+
+[2] According to De Faria, as already mentioned in Chap. II. Sect. I Cape
+    Non was doubled, and Cape Bojador discovered in 1415, many years
+    before the death of King John. The present recapitulation by Cada
+    Mosto has been left in his own words, without insisting on the
+    exactness of his chronology.--Astley.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Voyage of Cada Mosto from Venice to Cape St Vincent: He enters into the
+service of Don Henry, and sets out for the New Discoveries: Relation of
+the Voyage to Madeira and the Canaries; with some Account of these
+islands, and their Inhabitants_.
+
+I, Alvise Da Cada Mosto, after visiting many parts of our Mediterranean
+Sea, being in our city of Venice in the year 1454, at which time I was
+about twenty-two years of age, determined to return into Flanders, a
+country which I had formerly visited as a merchant; for my constant
+attention was, in the first place to acquire wealth, and secondly to
+procure fame. On the 8th of August in that year 1454, I embarked in one
+of the gallies belonging to the republic, commanded by Marco Zen, a
+Venetian cavalier. Contrary winds detained us for some days off Cape St
+Vincent; during which, I learnt that Don Henry, the infant of Portugal,
+resided in the adjoining village of Reposera, or Sagres, to which he had
+retired in order to pursue his studies without interruption from the
+tumult of the world. Hearing of our arrival, the prince sent on board of
+our galley Antonio Gonzales his secretary, accompanied by Patricio de
+Conti[1], a Venetian, who was consul for the republic in Portugal, as
+appeared by his commission, and who also received a salary or pension
+from Don Henry. These gentlemen brought on board, and exhibited to us
+samples of Madeira sugar, dragons blood, and other commodities of the
+countries and islands belonging to the prince, which had been discovered
+under his patronage. They asked us many questions, and informed us that
+the prince had caused some lately discovered and uninhabited islands to
+be settled and cultivated, as a proof of which, they had shewn us the
+before-mentioned valuable productions; adding, that all this was next to
+nothing, in comparison of the great things which Don Henry had performed;
+as he had discovered seas which had never been navigated before, and the
+countries of divers strange, and hitherto unknown nations, where many
+wonderful things were found. They told us farther, that the Portuguese
+who had been in these remote parts, had reaped great advantages by
+trading with the inhabitants; having gained as high as 700 or even 1000
+per cent, on the capitals employed. We were all much astonished at these
+things; and I Cada Mosto in particular, being inflamed with the desire of
+visiting these newly discovered regions, inquired if the prince permitted
+any person who might be so inclined to embark for these places? To this
+they answered in the affirmative; and they likewise stated to me the
+conditions on which any one would be allowed to make the adventure. These
+were, either to be at the whole expence of fitting out and freighting a
+vessel; or at the expence of the freight only, the prince providing a
+vessel. In the former case, the adventurer had to allow on his return one
+quarter of his cargo, as duty to the prince, the rest remaining his own
+entire propriety; in the latter case, the homeward cargo was to be
+equally divided between the prince and the adventurer. In case of no
+returns, the prince was at the entire expence of the voyage; but that it
+was hardly possible to make the voyage without great profit. They added,
+that the prince would be much pleased to have any Venetian in his service,
+and would shew him great favour, being of opinion that spices and other
+rich merchandise might be found in these parts, and knowing that the
+Venetians understood these commodities better than any other nation.
+
+Influenced by all this, I accompanied the secretary and consul on shore,
+and waited on the prince, who confirmed all those things which they had
+said, and encouraged me to embark in the voyage to his new countries, by
+promises of honour and profit. Being young, and of a constitution to
+endure fatigue, and desirous to visit those parts of the world which had
+never been even known to any Venetian, and likewise in hopes to advance
+my fortune, I accepted of the invitation. Having, therefore, procured
+information respecting the commodities which it was proper to carry with
+me on such a voyage, I returned to the gallies, where I disposed of all
+the goods I had shipped for the low countries, and carried to land such
+things as were necessary for my intended expedition; and leaving the
+gallies to pursue their voyage to Flanders, I landed in Portugal. The
+prince evinced much satisfaction at my resolution, and entertained me
+handsomely at Sagres for a considerable time. At length he ordered me to
+fit out a new caravel, of about ninety tons burden, of which Vincent Diaz,
+a native of Lagos, about sixteen miles from Sagres, was commander. The
+caravel being in readiness, and furnished with every thing necessary for
+the voyage, we set sail on the 22d of March 1455, having a favourable
+wind at north-east, and by north[2], and steered our course for the
+island of Madeira. On the 25th of that month we came to the island of
+_Puerto Santo_, which is about 600 miles southward from Cape St Vincent,
+whence we took our departure.
+
+Puerto Santo was discovered by the Portuguese on All Saints day, about
+the year 1418[3], and Don Henry first sent inhabitants to settle there
+under Bartholomew Perestrello, whom he appointed governor. It is about
+fifteen miles in circuit[4]. It bears good bread corn, and a sufficiency
+of oats for its own use; and abounds with cattle and wild hogs, and
+innumerable rabbits[5]. Among other trees, it produces the drago or
+dragon tree, the sap or juice of which is drawn out only at certain
+seasons of the year, when it issues from cuts or clefts, made with an axe
+near the bottom of the tree in the preceding year. These clefts are found
+full of a kind of gum; which, decocted and depurated, is the dragons-
+blood of the apothecaries[6]. The tree bears a yellow fruit, round like
+like a cherry, and well tasted. This island produces the best honey and
+wax in the world, but not in any quantity. It has no harbour, but a good
+road in which vessels may moor in safety, being well sheltered on all
+sides, except the quarters between the south and east, all of which winds
+make it unsafe to ride here at anchor. There is plenty of excellent fish
+on its shores; such as dentili, gilded fish, and others.
+
+From Puerto Santo, which was discovered twenty-seven years before, we
+sailed on the 28th of March, and came the same day to _Monchrico_ or
+Machico, one of the ports of the island of Madeira, forty miles distant
+from Puerto Santo. In fair weather these islands may be seen from each
+other. This latter island was only inhabited within the last twenty-four
+years, when the prince appointed two of his gentlemen to be its governors.
+Tristan Vaz having the government of that half of the island in which the
+port of Monchrico is situated; and the other district of the island, in
+which Fonzal, Fonchial, or Funchal stands, is under the government of
+John Gonzales Zarcho. The island of Madeira is inhabited in four several
+places: Monchrico, Santa Cruz, Fonzal, and Camera-di-Lupi, which are its
+principal places, though there are other minor establishments; and is
+able to muster about 800 men able to bear arms, of whom an hundred are
+horse. There are about eight rivers, which pervade the island in
+different places; by means of which they have many saw-mills, from which
+Portugal and other places are supplied with boards of many different
+sorts. Of these boards, two sorts are in particular estimation, and turn
+most to account. The one is cedar, which has a strong odoriferous smell,
+and resembles the cypress tree; of this they make fine, large, and long
+boards or deals, which they employ for building houses, and for various
+other purposes. The other, called nasso[7], is of a red-rose colour, and
+extremely beautiful; of which they make excellent and very beautiful bows
+and cross-bows, which are sent into the west. In order to clear the land,
+the first settlers set fire to the woods, and the fire spread with such
+fury, that several persons, with their families, and Gonzales Zarcho
+among the rest, were forced to take shelter in the sea to save themselves
+from the flames, where they stood up to their necks for two days and two
+nights without sustenance. Though this island is mountainous, its soil is
+rich and fertile, and it produces yearly 30,000 Venetian _staras_[8] of
+bread corn. At first, the newly cultivated land yielded seventy for one,
+but has since been reduced to thirty or forty, for want of good husbandry.
+Owing to the excellence of its soil and climate, and the abundance of
+springs and rivers, Prince Henry procured sugar canes from Sicily, which
+he sent to this island, where they have yielded abundant produce;
+insomuch, that 400 cantaros of sugar, each containing 112 pounds large
+weight of Venice, have been made at one boiling, and the quantity was
+likely to increase[9]. They have likewise good wines, considering how
+shortly this culture has been introduced; and in such abundance, that
+large quantities are exported. Among other kinds of vines, Don Henry sent
+thither _Malvasia_ plants, procured from the island of Candia, which have
+succeeded well. The soil has turned out so favourable for the vine, that
+in general there are more grapes than leaves, and the bundles are very
+large, even from two to four spans long. They have likewise the black
+_Pergola_ grape, without stones, in great perfection; and so well is the
+climate adapted to this culture, that they begin their vintage about
+Easter, or at least by the octave after.
+
+We sailed from Madeira, following a southerly course, and arrived at the
+Canary islands, which are at the distance of about 320 miles from Madeira.
+There are seven of these islands in all, four of which have been settled
+by the Christians, Lancerotta, Fuerteventura, Gomera, and Ferro; over
+which Herrera[10], a Spanish gentleman, is lord. Large quantities of an
+herb called _Oricello_ or Orchel[11], are annually sent from these
+islands to Cadiz and Seville, which is used in dying, and is sent from
+these places to all parts of Europe. Great quantities of excellent goat
+skins are exported from these islands, which likewise produce abundance
+of tallow, and good cheese. The original inhabitants of the four islands
+that are subject to the Christians, are _Canarians_[12], who speak
+various languages or dialects, not well understood between the different
+tribes. These people have only open villages, without any fortifications;
+except on the mountains, which are exceedingly high, and there they have
+a kind of rude walls or redoubts, to flee to in case of need. The passes
+of these mountains are so difficult of access, that a few resolute men
+might defend them against an army. The other three islands of this group,
+Grand Canaria, Teneriffe, and Palma, which are larger and better peopled
+than the other four, are still unsubdued and possessed by the aboriginal
+idolaters. Grand Canaria has between eight and nine thousand souls, and
+Teneriffe, which is the largest of all these islands, is said to contain
+fourteen or fifteen thousand, and is divided into nine separate lordships.
+Palma, however, has very few inhabitants, yet it appears to be a very
+beautiful island. Every lordship seems to have its own mode of religious
+worship; as in Teneriffe, there were no less than nine different kinds of
+idolatry; some worshipping the sun, others the moon, and so forth. They
+practise polygamy, and the lords have the jus primae noctis, which is
+considered as conferring great honour. On the accession of any new lord,
+it is customary for some persons to offer themselves to die as a
+sacrifice to his honour. On this occasion, the lord holds a great
+festival on his accession day; when all who are willing to give this
+cruel proof of their attachment, are attended to the summit of a high
+cliff in a certain valley, where, after some peculiar ceremonies, and
+certain words muttered over them, the victims precipitate themselves from
+the cliff, and are dashed to pieces. In reward of this sanguinary homage,
+the lords consider themselves bound to heap extraordinary honours and
+rewards on the parents of the victims.
+
+Teneriffe, which is the largest of these islands, and the best inhabited,
+is one of highest islands in the world, and is seen in clear weather from
+a great distance; insomuch, that I was informed by some mariners, that it
+had been descried at the distance of between sixty and seventy Spanish
+leagues, which make about 250 Italian miles. In the middle of the island,
+there is a prodigiously high peaked mountain, shaped like a diamond,
+which is always burning. I received this account from some Christians,
+who had been prisoners in the island, who affirmed that it was fifteen
+Portuguese leagues, or sixty Italian miles, from the bottom of the
+mountain to the top of the peak.
+
+They have nine lords on this island, who are called dukes, and who do not
+succeed by inheritance or descent, but by force; on which account they
+have perpetual civil wars among themselves, in which they commit great
+slaughter. Their only weapons are stones, maces or clubs, and darts or
+lances, some of which are pointed with horn, and others have their points
+hardened in the fire. They all go naked, except a few who wear goat skins
+before and behind. They anoint their skins with goats tallow, mixed up
+with the juice of certain herbs, which thickens the skin, and defends
+them against the cold, of which they complain much, although their
+country is so far to the south. They have neither walled, nor thatched
+houses, but dwell in grottos and caverns of the mountains. They feed on
+barley, flesh, and goats milk, of which they have abundance, and some
+fruits, particularly figs. As the country is very hot, they reap their
+corn in April and May.
+
+We learnt all these things from the Christians of the four settled
+islands, who sometimes go over by night to the three other islands, and
+make prisoners of the natives, whom they send into Spain to be sold as
+slaves. Sometimes the Spaniards are themselves made prisoners on these
+expeditions, on which occasions the natives do not put them to death, but
+employ them to kill and flea their goats, and to cure the flesh, which
+they look upon as a vile employment, and therefore condemn their
+Christian prisoners to that labour in contempt. The native Canarians are
+very active and nimble, and are exceedingly agile in running and leaping,
+being accustomed to traverse the cliffs of their rugged mountains. They
+skip barefooted from rock to rock like goats, and sometimes take leaps of
+most surprising extent and danger, which are scarcely to be believed.
+They throw stones with great strength and wonderful exactness, so as to
+hit whatever they aim at with almost perfect certainty, and almost with
+the force of a bullet from a musket; insomuch that a few stones thrown by
+them will break a buckler to pieces. I once saw a native Canarian, who
+had become a Christian, who offered to give three persons twelve oranges
+a-piece, and taking twelve to himself, engaged, at eight or ten paces
+distance, to strike his antagonists with every one of his oranges, and at
+the same time to parry all theirs, so that they should hit no part of him
+but his hands. But no one would take up the wager, as they all knew he
+could perform even better than he mentioned. I was on land in Gomera and
+Ferro, and touched also at the island of Palma, but did not land there.
+
+
+[1] In Grynaeus, this person is called a patrician or nobleman of Venice,
+    and his surname is omitted.--Astley.
+
+[2] _Con Veuto da greco et tramantana in poppe_; literally, having a Greek,
+    and _beyond the mountain_ wind in the poop. The points of the compass,
+    in Italian maps, are thus named, N. _Tramontana_. N. E. _Greco_. E.
+    _Levante_ S. E. _Sirocco_. S. _Mezzoni_. S. W. _Libeccio_. W.
+    _Ponente_. N. W. _Maestro_.--Clarke.
+
+[3] This date ought to have been 1413.--Astl.
+
+[4] Barbot says eight leagues; other authors say more, and some less. It
+    is about twelve leagues to the north-east of Madeira.--Astl.
+
+[5] When Sir Amias Preston took this island in 1595, it abounded in corn,
+    wine, and oil, and had good store of sheep, asses, goats, and kine.
+    There was also plenty of fowl, fish, and fruits.--Astl.
+
+[6] From this account it seems to be an inspissated juice.--Astley. This
+    tree has probably received its name from the bark being like the
+    scales of a serpent. About the full of the moon it exudes a vermilion
+    coloured gum. That which grows on the islands and coasts of Africa is
+    more astringent than what comes from Goa. It is found on high rocky
+    land. Bartholomew Stibbs met with it on the banks of the Gambia river,
+    and describes it under the name of _Par de Sangoe_, or blood-wood tree.
+    The gum is a red, inodorous, and insipid resin, soluble in alcohol and
+    oils; and when dissolved by the former, is used for staining marble.
+    --Clarke.
+
+[7] The woods of Madeira are cedar, vigniatico, laurus Indicus, which has
+    a considerable resemblance to mahogany, barbuzano, chesnut, and the
+    beautiful mirmulano, and paobranco.--Clark.
+
+[8] This measure is said to weigh about thirty-three English pounds, so
+    that the quantity mentioned in the text amounts to 1850 quarters
+    English measure.--Astl.
+
+[9] I suppose he means at one crop. The quantity in the text, reduced to
+    avoirdupois weight, amounts to twenty-eight hogsheads, at sixteen
+    hundred weight each.--Astl.
+
+[10] In Clarke, this person is named Ferrero; perhaps the right name of
+    this person was Fernando Pereira, who subdued Gomera and Ferro.--E.
+
+[11] A species of moss, or lichen rather, that grows on the rocks, and is
+    used by dyers.--Clarke.
+
+[12] Other authors call the natives of the Canaries _Guanchos_.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage by Cape Branco, the Coast of Barbary, and the
+Fortia of Arguin; with some account of the Arabs, the Azanaghi, and the
+Country of Tegazza._
+
+Leaving the Canaries, we pursued our course towards Ethiopia, and arrived
+in a few days at Cape Branco, which is about 870 miles from these islands.
+In this passage, steering south, we kept at a great distance from the
+African shore on our left, as the Canaries are, far-advanced into the sea
+towards the west. We stood almost directly south for two-thirds of the
+way between the islands and the Cape, after which we changed our course
+somewhat more towards the east, or left-hand, that we might fall in with
+the land, lest we should have overpassed the Cape without seeing it
+because no land appears afterwards so far to the west for a considerable
+space. The coast of Africa, to the southwards of Cape Bronco, falls in
+considerably to the eastwards, forming a great bay or gulf, called the
+_Forna of Arguin_, from a small island of that name. This gulf extends
+about fifty miles into the land, and has three other islands, one of
+which is named _Branco_ by the Portuguese, or the White Island, on
+account of its white sands; the second is called _Garze_, or the Isle of
+Herons, where they found so many eggs of certain seabirds as to load two
+boats; the third is called _Curoi_, or Cori. These islands are all small,
+sandy, and uninhabited. In that of Arguin there is plenty of fresh water,
+but there is none in any of the others. It is proper to observe, that on
+keeping to the southwards, from the Straits of Gibraltar, the coast of
+exterior Barbary is inhabited no farther than Cape Cantin[1], from whence
+to Cape Branco is the sandy country or desert, called _Saara_ or
+_Saharra_ by the natives, which is divided from Barbary or Morocco on the
+north by the mountains of Atlas, and borders on the south with the
+country of the Negroes, and would require a journey of fifty days to
+cross,--in some places more, in others less. This desert reaches to the
+ocean, and is all a white dry sand, quite low and level, so that no part
+of it seems higher than any other. Cape _Branco_, or the White Cape, so
+named by the Portuguese from its white colour, without trees or verdure,
+is a noble promontory of a triangular shape, having three separate points
+about a mile from each other.
+
+Innumerable quantities of large and excellent fish of various kinds are
+caught on this coast, similar in taste to those we have at Venice, but
+quite different in shape and appearance. The gulf of Arguin is shallow
+all over, and is full of shoals both of rocks and sand; and, as the
+currents are here very strong, there is no sailing except by day, and
+even then with the lead constantly heaving. Two ships have been already
+lost on these shoals. Cape _Branco_ lies S.W. of Cape Cantin, or rather S.
+and by W. Behind Cape Branco there is a place called Hoden, six days
+journey inland on camels, which is not walled, but is much frequented by
+the Arabs and caravans, which trade between Tombucto,[2] and other places
+belonging to the Negroes, and the western parts of Barbary. The
+provisions at Hoden are dates and barley, which they have in plenty, and
+the inhabitants drink the milk of camels and other animals, as they have
+no wine. They have some cows and goats, the former being greatly smaller
+than those of Italy; but the number of these is not great, as the country
+is very dry. The inhabitants are all Mahometans, and great enemies to the
+Christians, and have no settled habitations, but wander continually over
+the deserts. They frequent the country of the Negroes, and visit that
+side of Barbary which is next the Mediterranean. On these expeditions
+they travel in numerous caravans, with great trains of camels, carrying
+brass, silver, and other articles, to Tombucto and the country of the
+Negroes, whence they bring back gold and _melhegette_, or cardamom
+seeds[3]. These people are all of a tawny colour, and both sexes wear a
+single white garment with a red border, without any linen next their skins.
+The men wear turbans, in the Moorish fashion, and go always barefooted. In
+the desert there are many lions, leopards, and ostriches, the eggs of
+which I have often eaten, and found them very good.
+
+Don Henry has farmed out the trade of the island of Arguin, under the
+following regulations. No person must enter this gulf to trade with the
+Arabs, except those who are licensed according to the ordinance, and have
+habitations and factors on the island, and have been accustomed to
+transact business with the Arabs on that coast. The articles of
+merchandize chiefly provided for this trade are, woollen cloth and linen,
+silver trinkets, _aldtizeli_ or frocks, and cloaks, and other things, and
+above all, wheat; and the Arabs give in return negro slaves and gold. A
+castle has been built on the isle of Arguin, by order of the prince, to
+protect this trade, on account of which caravels or ships arrive there
+every year from Portugal.
+
+The Arabs of this coast have many Barbary horses, which they carry to the
+country of the Negroes, which they barter with the great men for slaves,
+receiving from ten to eighteen men for each horse, according to their
+goodness. They also carry thither silken staffs of Granada and Tunis,
+with silver, and many other things, in return for which they receive
+great numbers of slaves and some gold. These slaves are brought first to
+Hoden in the desert, and thence by the mountains of Barka into Barbary,
+whence they are transported across the Mediterranean into Sicily. Part of
+them are sold in Tunis, and in other places along the coast of Barbary;
+and the rest are brought to Arguin, where they are sold to the licensed
+Portuguese traders, who purchase between seven and eight hundred every
+year, and send them for sale into Portugal. Before the establishment of
+this trade at Arguin, the Portuguese used to send every year four or more
+caravels to the bay of Arguin, the crews of which, landing well armed in
+the night, were in use to surprise some of the fishing villages, and
+carry off the inhabitants into slavery. They even penetrated sometimes a
+considerable way into the interior, and carried off the Arabs of both
+sexes, whom they sold as slaves in Portugal.
+
+Leaving Arguin we sailed along the coast to the river Senegal[4], which
+is very large, and divides the people called Azanaghi, or Azanhaji, from
+the first kingdom of the Negroes. The Azanhaji are of a tawny colour, or
+rather of a deep brown complexion, and inhabit some parts of the coast
+beyond Cape Branco, ranging through the deserts, and their district
+reaches to the confines of the Arabs of Hoden. They live on dates, barley,
+and the milk of camels; but as they border likewise on the country of the
+Negroes, they carry on trade with these people, from whom they procure
+millet and pulse, particularly beans. Owing to the scarcity of provisions
+in the desert, the Azanhaji are but spare eaters, and are able to endure
+hunger with wonderful patience, as a poringer of barley-meal made into
+hasty-pudding will serve them a whole day. The Portuguese used to carry
+away many of these people for slaves, as they were preferred to the
+negroes; but for some time past this has been prohibited by Don Henry,
+and peace and trade has been established with them, as he is in hopes
+they may be easily brought over to the catholic faith by intercourse with
+the Christians, more especially as they are not hitherto thoroughly
+established in the superstitions of Mahomet, of which they know nothing
+but by hearsay. These Azenhaji have an odd custom of wearing a
+handkerchief round their heads, a part of which is brought down so as to
+cover their eyes, and even their nose and mouth; for they reckon the
+mouth an unclean part, because it is constantly belching and has a bad
+smell, and ought therefore to be kept out of sight; even comparing it to
+the posteriors, and thinking that both ought alike to be concealed. On
+this account they never let their mouths be seen except when eating, as I
+have often had occasion to observe. They have no lords among them, but
+the rich men are respected somewhat more than the rest. They are of
+ordinary stature, and very lean, wearing their black hair frizzled over
+their shoulders like the Germans, and grease it daily with fish oil,
+which gives them a nasty smell; yet they consider this as modish. They
+are extremely poor, egregious liars, the greatest thieves in the world,
+and very treacherous. They have never heard of any Christians except the
+Portuguese, with whom they had war for thirteen or fourteen years, in
+which many of them were carried off as slaves, as has been already
+mentioned. Many of these people informed me, that, when they first saw
+ships under sail, which had never been beheld by any of their ancestors,
+they took them for large birds with white wings, that had come from
+foreign parts; and when the sails were furled, they conjectured, from
+their length, and swimming on the water, that they must be great fish.
+Others again believed that they were spirits, who wandered about by night;
+because they were seen at anchor in the evening at one place, and would
+be seen next morning 100 miles off, either proceeding along the coast to
+the southwards, or put back, according as the wind changed, or the
+caravels might happen to steer. They could not conceive how human beings
+could travel more in one night than they were able to perform themselves
+in three days; by which they were confirmed in the notion of the ships
+being spirits. All this was certified to me by many of the Azanhaji who
+were slaves in Portugal, as well as by the Portuguese mariners who had
+frequented the coast in their caravels.
+
+About six days journey by land from Hoden, there is a place called
+Teggazza[5], which in our language signifies a chest or bag of gold. In
+this place large quantities of salt are dug up every year, and carried by
+caravans on camels to _Tombucto_ and thence to the empire of _Melli_,
+which belongs to the Negroes. Oh arriving there, they dispose of their
+salt in the course of eight days, at the rate of between two and three
+hundred _mitigals_, or ducats, for each load, according to the quantity,
+and then return with their gold.
+
+
+[1] This is erroneous, as there are several towns on the coast of Morocco
+    beyond this Cape, as Saffia, Mogadore, Santa Cruz, and others.
+    Cape Cantin is in lat. 32 deg.30'N. and the river _Sus_ in 30 deg.25', which
+    is 140 miles to the south. There are no towns on the coast beyond that
+    river; but the northern limit of the _Sahara_, or great desert, is in
+    lat. 27 deg.40', 186 miles to the south of the river _Sus_, and is surely
+    inhabited by wandering Arabs. Even the great desert, which extends 750
+    miles from north to south, almost to the river Senegal, is thinly
+    interspersed by several wandering tribes of the _Azanhaji_.--E.
+
+[2] Called Tombuto in the original, and Ataubat in Grynaeus.--Astl. Hoden
+    stands in an _ouasis_, or watered island, in the sea of sand, or great
+    desert, about lat. 19 deg.20'N. and W. long. 11 deg.40'.--E.
+
+[3] Under the general name of _Azanhaji_, which probably signifies the
+    pilgrims or wanderers of the desert, the Nomadic Arabs or Moors are
+    distinguished into various tribes; as Beni-amir, Beni-sabi, Hilil
+    Arabs, Ludajas, and Hagi; sometimes called Monselmines, Mongearts,
+    Wadelims, Labdessebas, and Trasarts; all named in their order from
+    north to south, as occupying the desert towards the Atlantic.--E.
+
+[4] In the text this river is named Senega, and its name probably
+    signifies the river of the Azanhaji. It Is called in Ramusio _Oro
+    Tiber_.--F.
+
+[5] The name of this place is explained as signifying a chest or bag of
+    gold. There is a place marked in the Saharra, or great sandy desert;
+    under the name of _Tisheet_, where there are salt mines, in lat. 17 deg.
+    40' N. and long. 6 deg. 40' W. which may possibly be Teggazza. The
+    distance of Tisheet from Hoden in our maps is about 375 miles E. S. E.
+    But there are other salt mines in the desert still farther to the east.
+    --E.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Of the Empire of Melli, and some curious particulars of the Salt Trade:
+Of the Trade in Gold: Of the, Azanhaji; and concerning swarms of Locusts_.
+
+The empire of Melli, of which some mention has been made in the preceding
+Section, is situated in an extremely hot climate, and affords very bad
+nourishment for beasts; insomuch, that out of an hundred camels which go
+from the desert into that country, scarcely twenty-five return; several
+even of the Arabs and Azanhaji, belonging to the caravans, sicken and die
+likewise every year. There are no quadrupeds kept by the natives of the
+country, as indeed none can live there for any time. It is reckoned to be
+forty days journey on horseback from Tegazza to Tombuctu, and thirty from
+thence to Melli[1]. Having inquired what use the merchants of Melli made
+of this salt, the traders of the desert informed me, that a part of it
+was consumed in that country, which lying near the line, where the days
+and nights are of equal length, certain seasons of the year are so
+excessively hot that the blood of the inhabitants would putrify, if it
+were not for the salt, and they would all die. They have no art or
+mystery in its use; but every one dissolves a small piece every day in a
+porringer of water, and drinks it off, which in their opinion preserves
+their health.
+
+The remainder of the salt is carried a long way in pieces on mens heads,
+every piece being as large as a man can well bear. As brought from
+Teggazza, the salt is in large pieces as taken out of the mine, each
+camel being loaded with two pieces, and the negroes break these down into
+smaller pieces, for the convenience of carrying them on their heads, and
+muster a large number of footmen for this yearly traffic. These porters
+have each a long forked stick in their hands; and, when tired, they rest
+their loads on these sticks. They proceed in this manner till they arrive
+on the banks of a certain water, but whether fresh or salt my informer
+could not say, yet I am of opinion that it must be a river, because, if
+it were the sea, the inhabitants could not be in want of salt in so hot a
+climate. The negroes are hired to carry it in this manner for want of
+camels or other beasts of burden, as already mentioned; and, from what
+has been said, it may easily be concluded that the number, both of the
+carriers and consumers must be very great. When arrived at the water side,
+the proprietors of the salt place their shares in heaps in a row, at
+small distances, setting each a particular mark on his own heap; and when
+this is done, the whole company retires half a days journey from the
+place. Then the other negroes, who are the purchasers of the salt, who
+seem to be the inhabitants of certain islands, but who will on no account
+be seen or spoken to, come in boats to the place where the heaps of salt
+are placed, and after laying a sum in gold on each heap as its price,
+retire in their turns. After they are gone, the owners of the salt return,
+and if the quantity of gold on their heaps is satisfactory to them, they
+take it away and leave the salt; if not, they leave both and withdraw
+again. In this manner they carry on their traffick, without seeing or
+speaking to each other, and this custom is very ancient among them, as
+has been affirmed to me for truth by several merchants of the desert,
+both Arabs and Azanhaji, and other creditable persons[2].
+
+On inquiring how it came to pass that the emperor of Melli, whom they
+represented as a powerful sovereign, did not find means, by friendship or
+force, to discover who these people were who would not suffer themselves
+to be seen or talked to, I was informed that this emperor, not many years
+ago, resolved to procure some of these invisible people, and held a
+council on the occasion, in which the following plan was devised and
+carried into execution. Before the salt caravan returned the half days
+journey from their salt heaps, some of the emperors people made certain
+pits by the water side, and near the place where the salt was left, and
+when the negroes came to deposit their gold on the salt, those who were
+concealed in the pits attacked them suddenly and took four of them
+prisoners, all the rest making their escape. Three of those who were thus
+taken were immediately set free by the captors, who judged that one would
+be quite sufficient to satisfy the curiosity of their emperor, and that
+the negroes would be the less offended. But after all, the design proved
+abortive; for though spoken to in various languages, the prisoner would
+neither speak or take any victuals, and died at the end of four days. On
+this account, the Melli negroes concluded that these other negroes were
+dumb; but others were of opinion, that being endowed with the human form,
+they must necessarily have the power of speech; but, that finding himself
+treated in this manner, so contrary to ancient custom, he refused to
+speak from indignation. This untoward result was much regretted by the
+negroes of Melli, because it prevented them from gratifying the curiosity
+of their emperor; who, on being informed of this persons death, was much
+dissatisfied, yet asked what manner of men the prisoners were. He was
+accordingly informed that they were of a deep black colour, well shaped,
+and a span taller than the natives of Melli. That their under lip was
+thicker than a mans fist, of a very red colour, and hung down on their
+breasts, with something like blood dropping from it; but that their upper
+lips were small, like those of other men. That the form of the under lip
+exposed their gums and teeth, which were larger than their own, having
+great teeth in each corner of their mouth, with large black eyes, and
+altogether a terrible appearance, as the gums dropped blood continually,
+as well as the great hanging under lip.
+
+This cross accident prevented all the succeeding emperors of Melli from
+making any farther attempt of the kind; because, from that time, these
+negroes forbore, for three years, from coming to buy salt as usual. It is
+believed that their lips began to putrify, through the excessive heat of
+the climate; and being no longer able to endure a distemper, of which
+some must have died for want of the effectual remedy which they had
+experienced from the use of salt, they returned of their own accord to
+traffic for that commodity in the old way. All this has established an
+opinion that they cannot live without salt; the negroes of Melli judging
+of the case of others by their own. As for the emperor of Melli, he cares
+not whether these blacks will speak, and be seen or not, so that that he
+has the profit of their gold[3]. This is all I could learn on this
+subject, which I think may be credited, as so many persons have vouched
+for its truth, of which I, who have both seen and heard of many wonderful
+things in this world, am perfectly satisfied.
+
+The gold brought to Melli is divided into three parts. One part is sent
+by the caravan which goes annually from Melli to _Kokhia_[4], which lies
+on the road to Syria and Cairo. The other two parts go first to Tombuctu,
+whence one of them goes by _Toet_[5] to Tunis and other ports of the
+Barbary coast, and the other portion is carried to Hoden, and from thence
+to _Oran_ and _One_[6], towns in Barbary, which are within the Straits of
+Gibraltar, and to Fez, Morocco, Arzila, Azafi, and Messa, towns on the
+African coast of the Atlantic, where the Italians and other Christians
+procure it from the Moors, in return for various commodities. Gold is the
+best and principal commodity which comes through the country of the
+Azanhaji, and a part of it is brought every year from Hoden to Arguin,
+where it is bartered with the Portuguese[7].
+
+No money is coined in the land of the _Tawny Moors_, or Azenhaji; nor is
+any money used by them, or in any of the neighbouring countries; but all
+their trade is carried on by bartering one commodity against another. In
+some of their inland towns, the Arabs and Azanbaji use small white
+porcelain shells, or cowries; which are brought from the Levant to Venice,
+and sent from thence into Africa. These are used for small purchases. The
+gold is sold by a weight named _mitigal_, which is nearly equal in value
+to a ducat. The inhabitants of the desert have neither religion nor
+sovereign; but those who are richest, and have the greatest number of
+retainers and dependents, are considered as chiefs or lords. The women
+are tawny, and wear cotton garments, which are manufactured in the
+country of the Negroes; but some of them wear a kind of cloaks, or upper
+garments, called Alkhezeli, and they have no smocks. She who has the
+largest and longest breasts, is reputed the greatest beauty; on which
+account, when they have attained to the age of seventeen or eighteen, and
+their breasts are somewhat grown, they tie a cord very tight around the
+middle of each breast, which presses very hard and breaks them, so that
+they hang down; and by pulling at these cords frequently, they grow
+longer and longer, till at length in some women they reach as low as the
+navel. The men of the desert ride on horseback after the fashion of the
+Moors; and the desert being everywhere very hot, and having very little
+water, and extremely barren, they can keep very few horses, and those
+they have are short lived. It only rains in the months of August,
+September and October. I was informed that vast swarms of locusts appear
+in this country some years, in such infinite numbers as to darken the air,
+and even to hide the sun from view, covering the horizon as far as the
+eye can reach, which is from twelve to sixteen miles in compass; and,
+wherever they settle they strip the ground entirely bare. These locusts
+are like grasshoppers, as long as ones finger, and of a red and yellow
+colour. They come every third or fourth year, and if they were to pay
+their visits every year, there would be no living in the country. While I
+was on the coast, I saw them in prodigious and incredible numbers.
+
+
+[1] The distance between Tisheet and Tombuctu, according to our best maps,
+    is about 560 miles E. and by S. In the same proportion, supposing
+    Tisheet to be Teggazza, the distance between Tombuctu and Melli ought
+    to be about 420 miles. Of Melli we have no traces in our modern maps,
+    but it may possibly be referred to _Malel_, the apparent capital of
+    Lamlem; see Pinkert. Geogr. II. 917, as laid down from the Arabian
+    geographers, nearly 1200 miles E.S.E. from Tombuctu.--E.
+
+[2] This story is probably a fiction, proceeding upon a trade of barter
+    between parties who did not understand the languages of each other.
+    The succeeding part of the story seems a mere fable, without the
+    smallest foundation whatever.--E.
+
+[3] Few persons, perhaps, will be disposed to think the credit of the
+    Africans, however positive, or the belief of the author, however
+    strong, sufficient evidence of the truth of this story. Yet it
+    certainly is a common report of the country, and not the invention of
+    Cada Mosto. Jobson, who was at the Gambra or Gambia in 1620, repeats
+    the whole substance of this story; and Movette relates the
+    circumstances of the blacks trafficking for salt without being seen,
+    which he had from the Moors of Morocco. He leaves out, however, the
+    story of the frightful lips. Every fiction has its day; and that part
+    is now out of date.--Astl.
+
+[4] Melli being itself unknown, we can hardly look to discover the
+    situation of Kokhia or Cochia; but it may possibly be Kuku, a town and
+    district to the N.E. of Bornou, which lies in the direction of the
+    text; or it may be Dar Kulla, greatly more to the S.W. but still in
+    the same track.--E.
+
+[5] In Grynaeus this place is called Ato. As in the direction of the
+    caravan from Tombuto towards Tunis, it may possibly be Taudeny, an
+    ouasis or island of the great desert, in lat. 21 deg. 30' N.--E.
+
+[6] Called Hona in Grynaeus. What part of Barbary this name may refer to
+    does not appear. But the passage ought perhaps to run thus, "_to Oran
+    by the Mountain of Wan_," as there is a range mountains of that name
+    to the S. E. of Oran, which joins the chain of Atlas, or the Ammer
+    Mountains.--E.
+
+[7] This is the earliest account of the places from whence gold is brought,
+    and of the course of its trade through Africa, and thence into Europe;
+    and is even more particular and exact than any that has been given by
+    later authors.--Astl.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Of the River Senegal and the Jalofs, with some Account of the Manners,
+Customs, Government, Religion, and Dress of that Nation_.
+
+Leaving Cape Branco, and the Gulf of Arguin, we continued our course
+along the coast to the river Senegal, which divides the desert and the
+tawny Azanhaji from the fruitful lands of the Negroes. Five years before
+I went on this voyage, this river was discovered by three caravels
+belonging to Don Henry, which entered it, and their commanders settled
+peace and trade with the Moors; since which time ships have been sent to
+this place every year to trade with the natives[1]. The river Senegal is
+of considerable size, being a mile wide at the mouth, and of sufficient
+depth. A little farther on it has another entrance, and between the two,
+there is an island which forms a cape, running into the sea, having sand-
+banks at each mouth that extend a mile from the shore[2]. All ships that
+frequent the Senegal ought carefully to observe the course of the tides,
+the flux and reflux of which extend for seventy miles up the river, as I
+was informed by certain Portuguese, who had been a great way up this
+river with their caravels. From Cape Branco, which is 280 miles distant,
+the whole coast is sandy till within twenty miles of the river. This is
+called the coast of _Anterota_, and belongs entirely to the Azanhaji or
+Tawny Moors. I was quite astonished to find so prodigious a difference in
+so narrow a space, as appeared at the Senegal: For, on the south side of
+the river, the inhabitants are all exceedingly black, tall, corpulent and
+well proportioned, and the country all clothed in fine verdure, and full
+of fruit trees; whereas, on the north side of the river, the men are
+tawny, meagre, and of small stature, and the country all dry and barren.
+This river, in the opinion of the learned, is a branch of the _Gihon_,
+which flows from the Terrestrial Paradise, and was named the Niger by the
+ancients, which flows through the whole of Ethiopia, and which, on
+approaching the ocean to the west, divides into many other branches. The
+_Nile_, which is another branch of the Gihon, falls into the
+Mediterranean, after flowing through Egypt[3].
+
+The first kingdom of the Negroes is on the banks of the Senegal, and its
+inhabitants are called _Gilofi_ or Jalofs. All the country is low, not
+only from the north to that river, but also beyond it, as far south as
+Cape Verd, which is the highest land on all this coast, and is 400 miles
+from Cape Branco. This kingdom of the Jalofs, on the Senegal, is bounded
+on the east by the country called _Tukhusor_; on the south by the kingdom
+of _Gambra_ or Gambia; on the west by the Atlantic Ocean; and on the
+north by the river Senegal and the Azanhaji[4]. The king who reigned in
+Senegal in my time was named Zukholin, and was twenty-two years old. This
+kingdom is not hereditary; but for the most part, three or four of the
+principal lords, of whom there are many in the country, choose a king, in
+the event of a vacancy, but always fix their choice on a person of noble
+lineage, who reigns only as long as he gives satisfaction to these great
+lords. They often dethrone their kings by force; who, on the other hand,
+often render; themselves so powerful as to stand on their defence. This
+renders the government unsettled, and is productive of civil wars;
+similar to Egypt, where the Soldan of Cairo is always in fear of being
+killed or banished.
+
+The people are savages, and extremely poor, having no walled towns, and
+their villages are entirely composed of thatched cottages. They use
+neither lime nor stone in building, not knowing how to make the one, or
+to form the other. The kingdom of the Jalofs is small, and, as I was
+informed, extends only 300 miles along the coast, and about the same
+distance inland. The king has no settled revenue; but the lords of the
+country court his favour, by making him yearly presents of horses, which
+being scarce, are in high estimation, together with horse furniture, cows,
+and goats, pulse, millet, and other things. He likewise increases his
+wealth by means of robbery, and by reducing his own subjects, and those
+of neighbouring provinces to slavery, employing a part of these slaves to
+cultivate the lands which are assigned to him, and selling the rest to
+the Arabs and Azanhaji traders, who bring horses and other things for
+sale; as likewise to the Christians, since they have established a trade
+in these parts.
+
+Every man may keep as many wives as he pleases. The king has always
+upwards of thirty, and distinguishes them according to their descent, and
+the rank of the lords whose daughters they are. He keeps them in certain
+villages of his own, eight or ten in one place, each having a separate
+house to dwell in, with a certain number of young women to attend her,
+and slaves to cultivate the land which is assigned for her maintenance,
+which they sow and reap, and to tend her cows and goats. When the king
+comes to any of these villages, he brings no provisions along with him,
+as his women are obliged to support him and his retinue whenever he
+visits them. Every, morning at sunrise, each of his wives in the village
+where he happens to reside, prepares three or four dishes of various
+viands, such as flesh, fish, or other dainties, cooked in their fashion;
+which are carried by the slaves to the kings pantry; so that in less than
+an hour, thirty or forty dishes are provided, and when the king has a
+mind to eat, he finds every thing ready at his command. When he has eaten
+of such things as he likes best, the remainder is given to his retinue;
+but as this, diet is never very plentiful, they are but poorly fed. He
+travels about in this manner, from place to place, visiting his several
+wives, by which means he has a very numerous issue and whenever one of
+his wives happens to fall with child, he visits her no more. The lords or
+chiefs of the country live in a similar manner.
+
+These negroes profess me Mahometan religion, but are not even so well
+instructed in it as the tawny Moors, more especially the common people.
+The lords have always about them some Arabs or Azanhaji for this purpose,
+who inculcate on their minds that it would be disgraceful for men of
+their quality to live in ignorance of the laws of God, like the common
+people who have no religion. They have become Mahometans merely by means
+of their intercourse with the Azanhaji and Arabs; for since they became
+acquainted with the Christians, they are by no means so fond of the
+Mahometan faith. The generality of the negroes go quite naked, except a
+piece of goat skin before; but the lords who are able to procure such,
+wear cotton shirts, which are spun and manufactured by their women. Their
+webs are only a span in width, as they have not sufficient art to
+construct and use wider looms; so that they are obliged to sew five, six,
+or more of these webs together, when it is required to make any large
+piece of work. The shirts reach half way down the thighs, and have wide
+sleeves which; cover only half of their arms. They wear also cotton
+drawers, reaching to the small of their legs; and these drawers are made
+preposterously wide, being often thirty-five or forty palms in
+circumference; so that, when tied on, they are full of plaits, and though
+like A sack before the hinder part trails on the ground like the train of
+a large petticoat. Thus, though making a most ridiculous appearance, they
+think nothing comes up to their dress for elegance, and they often ask
+the Europeans if they ever saw a finer dress. Their women, both married
+and unmarried, go naked from the waist upwards, and wear a piece of
+cotton which covers them from the waist to the middle of the legs. Both
+sexes go barefooted, and have no coverings to their heads; and weave and
+tie their hair, though short, into neat tresses. The men often employ
+themselves in womens work, such as spinning, washing clothes, and such
+like employments.
+
+This country is extremely hot, the month of January being not so cold as
+it is with us in Italy in the month of April; and the farther we went to
+the south, the weather became so much the hotter. Both men and women wash
+themselves four or five times a-day, and are very cleanly in their
+persons; but are by no means so in regard of eating, in which they
+observe no rule. Although very ignorant, and extremely awkward in any
+thing, to which they have not been accustomed, they are as expert as any
+European can be in their own business, and in all things with which they
+are acquainted. They are full of words, and extremely talkative, and are
+for the most part liars and cheats. Yet they are exceedingly hospitable,
+and charitably disposed, as they will most readily give a dinner, or a
+supper, or a nights lodging, to any stranger who comes to their houses,
+without expecting any remuneration or reward. The chiefs of these negroes
+are often at war against each other, or against the neighbouring tribes
+or nations; but they have no cavalry, for want of horses. In war, their
+only defensive armour is a large target, made of the skin of an animal
+called _Danta_, which is very difficultly pierced; and their principal
+weapons are _azagays_ or light darts, which they throw with great
+dexterity. These darts are pointed with iron, the length of a span, and
+barbed in different directions, so that they make dangerous wounds, and
+tear the flesh extremely when pulled out. They have also a Moorish weapon,
+much-bent like a Turkish sword or cimeter, and made of iron, without any
+steel, which they procure from the negroes on the river Gambia, as they
+either have no iron in their own country, or want knowledge or industry
+in working it. Having but few weapons, or rather no missiles, their wars
+are very bloody, as they soon come to close quarters, and their strokes
+seldom fall in vain; and, being extremely fierce and courageous, they
+will rather allow themselves to be slain as save themselves by flight;
+neither are they disheartened by seeing their companions slain. They have
+no ships, nor had they ever seen any before the Portuguese came upon
+their coast; but those who dwell upon the river Senegal, and some who are
+settled on the sea coast, have _zoppolies_ or canoes, called _almadias_
+by the Portuguese, which are hollowed out of a single piece of wood, the
+largest of which will carry three or four men. They use these almadias
+for catching fish, and for transporting themselves up or down the river.
+The negroes of this country are the most expert swimmers in the world, as
+I can vouch from frequent experience of their dexterity.
+
+
+[1] Cada Mosto is incorrect in the chronology of this discovery, and even
+    de Barros is not quite decided as to the first discovery of the
+    Senegal. He says that Denis Fernandez _passed_ it in 1446, and that
+    Lancerot _discovered_ it in 1447; the latter of which is eight years
+    before the visit of Cada Mosto.--Clarke.
+
+[2] The northern mouth of the Senegal is in lat. 16 deg. 40'. The southern in
+    15 deg. 45', both N. so that the distance between them, or the length of
+    the island mentioned in the text, is about sixty-two miles.--E.
+
+[3] This fancy of all the great rivers in Africa being branches from one
+    principal stream, is now known to be entirely erroneous.--Astl.
+
+[4] Although the first kingdom, or kingdoms of the Negroes lies on the
+    Senegal, Senega, or Sanaghas, and others along the Gambia, yet there
+    were not properly any kingdoms of these names. On the north, indeed,
+    of the Sanagha, lay the country of the Sanhaga, Azanaghi, or Azanhaji,
+    from whence the river seems to have taken its name; but was divided
+    among various tribes of people, and not under any one sovereign.
+    Geographers, however, have since continued to propagate this first
+    error.--Astl.
+
+    The Jalofs and Foulahs inhabit the country between the Senegal and
+    Gambia, on which latter river the Feloops reside. What is meant by
+    _Tukhusor_ in the text does not appear, unless it may obscurely
+    indicate Karta.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage to the country of a King named Budomel, with
+some account of his Territory, and the Manners of his People_.
+
+Having passed the river Senegal, we sailed about 800 miles farther south
+along the coast, which was all low land without mountains, till we came
+to the territory or kingdom of Budomel[1]. As some Portuguese, who had
+dealt with Budomel, represented him as a very just person, who paid for
+any goods he might receive, and might therefore be confided in, I stopped
+at his country, that I might endeavour to dispose of some Spanish horses
+I had on board, which are in great request among the Negroes; besides
+which, I had some cloth, Moorish wrought silks, and other commodities for
+sale. We came, therefore to anchor, at a place on the coast, called Palma
+di Budomel, which is only an open roadstead, and not a port. I immediately
+dispatched my negro interpreter on shore to inform this lord of my arrival,
+and of the goods I had on board for sale. Not long afterwards Budomel came
+himself to the beach, attended by about fifteen horsemen and an hundred
+and fifty foot, and sent a message desiring me to land, with professions
+of a friendly disposition, and promising to render me every attention and
+service in his power. I went accordingly on shore immediately, and was
+received with great civility. After some discourse, I delivered to him
+seven horses, with their furniture; and every other article for which he
+expressed an inclination, all of which had cost me 300 ducats, trusting to
+his honour for payment, which was to be in slaves, and which he promised
+to deliver at his own residence, which was twenty-five miles distant from
+the shore, whither he invited me to accompany him. To this invitation I
+readily agreed, induced as much by a desire of seeing the country, as on
+account of receiving payment. Before setting out however, Budomel made me
+a present of a beautiful negress, about twelve years of age, who, he said,
+was meant to serve me in the cabin; and I received the gift, and sent her
+on board the caravel.
+
+I was furnished by Budomel with horses and every thing necessary for the
+journey; and when we arrived within four miles of his residence, he gave
+me in charge to his nephew Bisboror, who was lord of a small town or
+village at which we stopped. Bisboror took me to his own house, where I
+was treated with much civility and attention, during twenty-eight days
+which I tarried in that place. This was in November 1455. In that time I
+went often to visit Budomel, accompanied by his nephew, and had many
+opportunities to observe the produce of the country, and the manners of
+the inhabitants, more especially as, on account of the tempestuous
+weather, I was under the necessity of travelling back by land to the
+river Senegal. For, finding it impossible to get on board at the coast by
+reason of the surf, I had to order the ship to return to that river, and
+went there by land to re-embark. On this occasion, being very desirous to
+transmit instructions to those on board the ship to meet me at the river
+Senegal, I inquired among the negroes if any one would undertake to carry
+a letter from the shore. Several of them readily offered their services,
+though the ship lay three miles from the shore, and, owing to a strong
+wind, the sea broke on the shore with a tremendous surf, insomuch that I
+thought it impossible for any one to succeed in the attempt. Besides the
+surf, there were several sand banks near the shore, and other banks about
+half way to the ship, between which there ran a strong current, sometimes
+one way and sometimes the other, along shore, so that it was extremely
+difficult for any one to swim through without infinite danger of being
+carried away by the stream; and the sea broke with such violence on the
+banks, that it seemed quite impossible to surmount such complicated
+obstacles. Yet two of the negroes offered to go, and only demanded two
+_mavulgies_ of tin for each of them, one mavulgi being worth no more than
+a _grosso_[2], at which price they engaged to carry my letter in safety
+to the ship. I cannot express the difficulties which they encountered in
+passing the sand bank. They were sometimes out of sight for a considerable
+space, so that I often thought they were both drowned. At last, one of
+them, finding himself unable to resist the violence with which the waves
+broke over him, turned back; but the other, being stronger, got over the
+bank after struggling a whole hour, and, having carried the letter to the
+caravel, returned with an answer. This seemed to me very wonderful, and
+made me conclude that the negroes of this coast must be the most expert
+swimmers in the world.
+
+It has been already observed, that those who are called lords in this
+country have neither castles nor cities, the king even having nothing but
+villages with thatched houses. Budomel is lord of one part of this kingdom,
+yet his place of residence was not a palace, nor even a walled house.
+These great men are not lords on account of their riches or treasure, as
+they possess neither, nor have they any coin in use among them; but they
+are considered as such out of courtesy, and on account of the great
+retinues by which they are always attended, being more feared and
+respected by their subjects than any of the lords in Italy. Budomel has
+several villages appointed for his own habitation and that of his wives,
+as he never fixes in one place. The village in which I resided with
+Bisboror was one of his habitations, containing between forty and fifty
+thatched cottages, built near one another, and surrounded with ditches and
+strong pallisades, having only one or two passages left for entering; and
+every house had a court-yard, inclosed by a hedge. According to report,
+Budomel had nine wives in this place, and more or less in several other
+villages. Each of these wives had five or six young negresses to attend
+upon her, with all of whom he might sleep when he pleased, without giving
+offence to the wives, for such is the custom of the country. Both sexes
+are extremely amorous; and Budomel strongly importuned me for philacteries,
+in which he had been informed the Europeans were very expert, and offered
+any reward within his power for my compliance. They are very jealous, and
+suffer no man to enter the houses which are inhabited by the women, not
+even their own sons.
+
+Budomel is always attended by a retinue of at least 200 negroes, who are
+changed from time to time some going away and others coming back in their
+room; besides which, many people repair to wait upon him from the adjacent
+places which are under his government. Before arriving at his particular
+apartment there are seven large courts, one within the other, having a
+tree in the middle of each, where those wait who come to him on business.
+His family is distributed in these courts, according to their several
+ranks; the most considerable having their station in the court nearest his
+dwelling, and the meanest in the outermost court of all. Few people are
+allowed to approach his own particular apartment, except the Christians
+and Azanhaji, who have free admission and more liberty is allowed to them
+than to the negroes. This lord affects great state and gravity in his
+deportment, and does not allow himself, to be seen except an hour every
+morning, and for a short while in the evening; at which times he appears
+near the door of an apartment in the first court, into which only persons
+of note are permitted to enter. On these occasions of giving audience,
+every person who come to speak to him, however high may be his rank, is in
+the first place obliged to strip himself stark naked, except the small
+cloth in front formerly mentioned; and, immediately on entering the court,
+he falls down on his knees, bows down his head to the ground, and scatters
+dust with both hands on his own head and shoulders; neither is even the
+nearest relations of the lords exempted from this humiliating expression
+of their duty and obedience. The person, who receives an audience
+continues in this humble posture a great while, strewing himself with sand
+and crawling on his knees, till he approaches the great man; and when
+within two paces of his lord, he stops and begins to relate his case,
+still continuing on his knees, with his head down, and throwing sand an
+his head in token of great humility. All the time the lord scarcely
+appears to notice him and continues to discourse with other persons; and
+when the vassal has related his story, the lord gives him an answer in two
+words, with an arrogant aspect. Such is their affected pride and grandeur,
+and such the submission which is shewn him, which, in my opinion, proceeds
+from fear, as their lords, for every little fault they commit, take away
+their wives and children, and cause them to be sold as slaves.
+
+Budomel treated me with the utmost attention and civility, and used to
+carry me in the evenings into a sort of mosque, where the Arab and
+Azanhaji priests, whom he had always about his person, used to say prayers.
+His manner on these occasions was as follows. Being entered into the
+mosque, which was in one of the courts belonging to his residence, and
+where he was attended by some of the principal negroes, he first stood
+some little time with his eyes lifted up as if it were to heaven, then,
+advancing two steps, he spoke a few words in a low tone; after which, he
+stretched himself on the ground, which he kissed; the Azanhaji and the
+rest of his attendants doing the same. Then rising up, he repeated the
+same series of actions repeatedly, for ten or twelve times, which occupied
+about half an hour. When all was over, he asked my opinion of their manner
+of worship, and desired one to give an account of the nature of our
+religion. On this I told him, in the presence of all his doctors, that the
+religion of Mahomet was false, and the Romish the only true faith. This
+made the Arabs and Azanhaji extremely angry; but Budomel laughed on the
+occasion, and said, that he considered the religion of the Christians to
+be good, as God alone could have gifted them with so much riches and
+understanding. He added, however, that in his opinion the Mahometan law
+must be good also; and he believed, that the Negroes were more sure of
+salvation than the Christians, because God was just, who had given a
+paradise to the Christians in this world, and would certainly give one to
+the Negroes in the next, as they possessed scarcely any good in this world
+in comparison. In all his discourse he shewed a good understanding, and
+took great pleasure in hearing the customs of the Christians described. I
+firmly believe he might easily have been converted to Christianity, had it
+not been from fear of losing his power, as I was often told by his nephew,
+with whom I lodged, and he took great delight in hearing me discourse of
+our religion. The table of Budomel, like all other lords and people of
+condition in this country, is supplied by his wives, in the same manner as
+has been already mentioned in regard to Zukholin, the king of Senegal;
+each wife sending him a certain number of dishes every day. He and the
+other lords eat on the ground, without any regularity or company, except
+the Arabs and Azanhaji, who are their teachers and priests, and one or two
+of their principal negro attendants. The inferior people eat in messes of
+ten or twelve each, having a basket full of victuals set in the midst,
+into which all put their hands at the same time. They eat but little at
+one meal, but repeat these four or five times a day.
+
+
+[1] The text seems corrupted in giving so large a distance between the
+    Senegal river and this country of king Budomel, as 800 miles to the
+    south, or rather S. S. E. would carry us to what is called the _grain_,
+    or windward coast of Guinea, in lat. 6 deg. N. and, from the sequel, Cada
+    Mosto does not appear to have passed Cape Verd till after quitting the
+    country of Budomel. According to Brue, as quoted by Clarke, the king
+    of Kayor or Kayhor was styled Damel. Kayor or Cayor appears on our
+    maps above an hundred miles up the Senegal, and on its north side,
+    which therefore can have no reference to the place in the text. I am
+    disposed to believe, that the distance in the text ought only to have
+    been 80 miles, and that the territory of Budomel was in the country of
+    the Jalofs, between the Senegal and Cape Verd, at the mouth of a small
+    river, on which our charts place two towns, Masaye and Enibaul, in lat.
+    15 deg. 20' N.--E.
+
+[2] The grosso, or Venetian groat, is worth about three farthings.--Astl.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Account of the Country of Budomel continued_.
+
+On account of the great heats in the kingdom of Senegal, and all the
+other countries of the Negroes on the coast, no wheat, rye, barley, or
+spelt, can grow, neither are vines cultivated, as we knew experimentally
+from a trial made with seeds from our ship: For wheat, and these other
+articles of culture, require a temperate climate and frequent showers,
+both of which are wanting here, where they have no rains during nine
+months of the year, from October to June both included. But they have
+large and small millet, beans, and the largest and finest kidney beans in
+the world, as large as hazle nuts, longer than those of the Venetian
+territory, and beautifully speckled with various colours as if painted.
+Their beans are large, flat, and of a lively red colour, and they have
+likewise white beans. They sow in July, at the beginning of the rains,
+and reap in September, when they cease; thus they prepare the soil, sow
+the seed, and get in the harvest, all in three months; but they are bad
+husbandmen, and so exceedingly averse to labour, that they sow no more
+than is barely sufficient to last them throughout the year, and never lay
+up any store for sale. In cultivating the ground, four or five of them go
+into a field with spades, with which they turn up the soil about four
+inches deep; yet such is the fertility of the soil, that it makes ample
+returns for this slight culture, without any farther trouble.
+
+The liquors of the Negroes are water, milk, and palm wine, which they
+call mighol, or migwol, which is taken from a tree of the palm tribe,
+very numerous in this country, somewhat like the date tree, but not the
+same, and which furnishes this liquor the whole year round. The trees are
+tapped in two or three places near the root, and from these wounds a
+brown juice runs out, as thin as skimmed milk, into calabasses that are
+placed to receive the liquor, which drops but slowly, as one tree will
+only fill two calabasses from morning till night. This migwol, or palm-
+wine, is an exceedingly pleasant drink, which intoxicates like wine
+unless mixed with water. Immediately after it is drawn from the tree it
+is as sweet as any wine whatever; but the luscious taste goes off more
+and more as it is kept, and at length it becomes sour. It drinks better
+than at first after three or four days, as it depurates by keeping, and
+is not so sweet. I have often drank of it, indeed every day that I
+remained in the country, and liked it better than the wines of Italy.
+This liquor is not so abundant as that every one may have it at
+discretion; yet all may have some, especially the chiefs, as the trees
+are not planted in gardens, like vines and fruit trees in Europe, but are
+found wild in the forests, and are consequently accessible to all.
+
+In this country there are several sorts of fruit which resemble those of
+Europe, though not exactly the same, and which are very good, though they
+grow wild; and, were they to be cultivated as ours are, would prove much
+better than such as are produced in the northern climates, the quality of
+the soil and air in this part of Africa being more nutritive. The whole
+country is plain and fertile, abounding in good pasture, and is covered
+by an infinite number of large and beautiful trees, that are not known in
+Europe. It contains several lakes of fresh water, none of them large, but
+very deep, and full of excellent fish, which differ much from those that
+are caught in Italy, and many water serpents, which the natives call
+_Kalkatrici_. They use a kind of oil with their victuals, which tastes
+like oil of olives, has a pleasant flavour of violets, and tinges the
+food even better than saffron, but I could not learn what it was produced
+from[1]. There is likewise a plant which produces large quantities of
+small kidney-beans.
+
+In this country there are many kinds of animals, but serpents are
+particularly numerous, both large and small, some of which are venomous.
+The large ones are more than two paces long[2], but have neither legs nor
+wings, as has been reported by some persons, but some of them are so very
+thick as to have swallowed a goat at one morsel. These serpents retire in
+troops, as the natives report, to certain parts of the country where
+white ants are found in prodigious swarms, and which, by a kind of
+instinct, are said to build houses for these serpents, of earth which
+they carry in their months for that purpose, resembling ovens, and often
+to the number of 150 in one place[3]. The Negroes are great enchanters,
+and use charms upon almost all occasions, particularly in regard to
+serpents, over which they have great power. A Genoese, worthy of credit,
+who was in this country the year before my arrival, and who likewise
+lodged with Bisboror, the nephew of Budomel, told me he once heard a load
+noise of whistling about the house in the middle of the night. Being
+awakened by the noise, he saw Bisboror get out of bed and order two
+negroes to bring his camel. Being asked where he meant to go at that time
+of night, he said he had business which must be executed, but would soon
+return. On coming back after some time, and the Genoese expressing
+curiosity to learn the object in which he had been engaged, Bisboror
+asked if he had heard the hissing noise about the house during the night,
+and said that it had been made by the serpents, which would have killed a
+great many of his cattle, if he had not sent them back to their quarters
+by the employment of certain enchantments. The Genoese was astonished at
+this story, but Bisboror said he had no need to wonder at this small
+matter, as Budomed could do a great deal more extraordinary things with
+the serpents than he could. In particular, when he had a mind to envenom
+his weapons, he used to draw a large circle, into which, by means of his
+enchantments, he brought all the serpents of the neighbourhood, from
+which he selected those he thought most poisonous, and allowed all the
+others to go away. With the blood of these serpents, mixed up with the
+seeds of a certain tree, he infected his weapons with so deadly a poison,
+that, if they drew but the least drop of blood, the person or animal
+wounded by them was sure to die in a quarter of an hour. Bisboror farther
+offered to shew him an example of the efficacy of this art, but the
+Genoese declined witnessing the experiment. This story of the serpents is
+the more probable, that I have heard of persons in Italy who could charm
+them in a similar manner; but I am apt to believe that the Negroes are
+the most expert sorcerers in the world.
+
+The only tame animals in the kingdom of Senegal are oxen, cows, and goats;
+having no sheep, which love a temperate or cold air, and could not live
+in this hot climate. Nature, however, has provided mankind with
+necessaries fitted for their various occasions; having furnished the
+Europeans with wool, as they have need of warm clothing, while the
+Negroes, who live in such intense heat, have been supplied with cotton by
+the Almighty. Owing to the heat, in my opinion, the cattle of this
+country are much smaller than those of Italy. It is a great rarity to see
+a red cow in this country, as they are all black or white, or mottled
+with black and white spots. Beasts of prey, such as lions, leopards, and
+wolves, are numerous, and there are plenty of hares. Wild elephants go
+about in troops, like the wild swine in Italy, but can never be tamed, as
+they are in other parts of the world. As the elephant is a well-known
+animal, I shall only observe in general, that those of Africa are of a
+very large size, as may be easily conceived by the size of their teeth,
+which are imported into Europe. Of these large teeth, or tusks rather,
+each elephant has two in the lower jaw, the points of which turn down,
+whereas those of the wild boar are turned up. Before my voyage to Africa
+I had been told that the elephant could not bend its knee, and slept
+standing; but this is an egregious falsehood for the bending of their
+knees can be plainly perceived when they walk, and they, certainly lie
+down and rise again like other animals. They never shed their large teeth
+before death; neither do they do any harm to man unless provoked. In that
+case the elephant makes his attack with his trunk, which is a kind of
+nose, protruded to a great length. He can contract and extend this
+proboscis at pleasure, and is able to toss a man with it as far as a
+sling can throw a stone. It is in vain to think of escape by running, let
+the person be ever so swift, in case the elephant pursues in earnest, as
+his strides are of prodigious length. They are more dangerous when they
+have young ones in their company than at any other time; of which the
+females have only, three or four at a birth. They feed on the leaves and
+fruit of trees, pulling down the large boughs with their trunks, and
+bringing them to their mouths. This trunk is composed of a very thick
+cartilage, and is pliable in every direction.
+
+There are many kinds of birds in this country, and parrots are
+particularly numerous, which are much hated by the negroes, because they
+do much damage to their crops of pulse and millet. There are said to be
+several kinds of parrots, but I never saw more than two. One of these is
+like the kind which is brought into Italy from Alexandria in Egypt, but
+rather smaller. The other kind is much larger, having a brown head, neck,
+bill, and legs, with a yellow and green body. I procured a considerable
+number of both sorts, particularly of the smaller kind, many of which
+died; but I brought 150 back to Portugal, where I sold them for half a
+ducat each. These birds are very industrious in constructing their nests,
+which they build with bulrushes and the small leaves of the palm, and
+other trees, in a very curious and ingenious manner. Choosing the
+slenderest branch of a tree, the parrot fastens a bulrush of about two
+spans long to its outer extremity, at the depending end of which rush it
+weaves its nest in a most beautiful manner, suspended like a ball, and
+having only one passage for entering. By this means they contrive to
+preserve their young from being devoured by the serpents, as the small
+twigs from which the nests are suspended are unable to bear the weight of
+the serpents. There are likewise abundance of those birds called Pharaoh's
+hens[4] in Europe, which come to us out of the Levant. They have
+likewise other birds, both large and small, which are quite different
+from any that are known in Italy.
+
+As I was long on shore, I went several times to see their markets or
+fairs, which were held every Monday and Friday in a meadow, not far from
+where I resided. The men and women, from four or five miles around, came
+to this place with their various commodities, and those who lived at a
+greater distance, went to other markets nearer their habitations. The
+great poverty of the natives appeared manifest in the goods they brought
+to these fairs; consisting of small quantities of cotton cloth, and
+cotton yarn, pulse, oil, millet, wooden tubs, palm matts, and every thing
+else useful to life, according to their manners, likewise arms, and some
+small quantities of gold. Having no money or coin of any kind, all their
+trade was carried on by way of barter, or exchange of one thing for
+another, sometimes two or three things for one, according to their
+different values. All these blacks used to gaze on me, as if I had been a
+prodigy, having never seen a white man before. Some took hold of my hands,
+which they rubbed with spittle, to see if the whiteness was natural or
+artificial, and expressed their wonder to find that my skin was not
+painted. They were as much astonished at my dress, being clothed in the
+Spanish fashion, with a black damask waistcoat, and a cloak over it: They
+seemed much surprised at the waistcoat, and greatly admired the woollen
+cloth, which they had never seen any of before. My chief purpose in going
+to these fairs, was to see what quantity of gold was brought thither.
+
+Horses are very scarce, and of great value in the country of the Negroes,
+being brought all the way from that part of Barbary which lies nearest to
+Europe, by the Arabs and Azanhaji. Owing to the great heat, horses do not
+live long here; for they grow so fat that they cannot stale, and so burst.
+They are fed with bean leaves, which are gathered after the beans are
+brought from the fields; and, being dried like hay, are cut small, and
+given to the horses instead of oats. They give millet also, which
+contributes greatly to make them fat. A horse and his furniture sells for
+from nine to fourteen negroes, according to his goodness and beauty; and
+when a negro lord buys a horse, he sends for his horse sorcerers, who
+cause a fire to be kindled of the stalks of certain herbs, and hold the
+horses head by the bridle over the smoke, while they repeat over some few
+words by way of incantation. They afterwards have him anointed all over
+with fine oil, and having kept him eighteen or twenty days, without
+allowing any one to see him, they affix some Moorish charms to his neck,
+which have the appearance of small square billets of writing, folded up
+and covered with red leather; and affirm, that, they will go into battle
+with greater safety by means of these scrolls or annulets.
+
+The women of this country are very pleasant and merry, especially the
+young ones, and delight in singing and dancing, taking this diversion
+only at night by moonlight; and their manner of dancing is very different
+from that of the Italians. Many things in our ships seemed wonderful to
+the Negroes, particularly our cross-bows; but much more our artillery.
+When some of them were on board my ship, I caused one of the guns to be
+fired off, which threw them into a dreadful panic; and their terror was
+much increased on being told that one cannon-shot could kill an hundred
+men. On which account, they alleged that it must be something belonging
+to the devil. They were likewise greatly astonished at a bag-pipe, which,
+one of our sailors played upon to divert them; and, on examining the
+several parts and ornaments of the instrument, they conceived that it was
+a living animal, which sung in different voices. Observing their
+simplicity, I told them it was a musical instrument, and put it into
+their hand unblown to examine. They then perceived that it was a work of
+art, but believed that it was something supernatural, and could only have
+been devised by a superior being, it sounded so sweetly, and in so many
+different tones, having never heard any thing which could be compared to
+it in their estimation. The ship, also, and its various contrivances, as
+its anchors, masts, sails, and shrouds, afforded them great subjects for
+admiration and wonder. They looked upon the port-holes in the stern as
+real eyes, by which the vessel was able to find her way in the sea; and
+observed, that travellers on land found difficulty to find the road from
+one place to another, while we were able to travel along the trackless
+ocean; and that the whites must therefore be the greatest of sorcerers,
+not inferior to the devil himself. They shewed great admiration on seeing
+a lighted candle in a candlestick, having themselves no other artificial
+light but that proceeding from a fire. They have honey-combs, but when
+they find these, they suck out the honey, and throw away the empty comb
+as useless. At one time, I bought some honey-combs from a negro, and
+shewed him how to extract the honey; after which, on asking him if he
+knew what remained, he said it was good for nothing: But he was greatly
+astonished on seeing it made into candles, and lighted in his presence;
+saying, that the Europeans knew every thing. Their only musical
+instruments are two, one of which they have from the Moors, which is like
+a large drum[5]; the other is somewhat like a fiddle, having only two
+strings, which they play on with their fingers, but gives no sounds that
+can be called harmonious.
+
+
+[1] This is almost certainly palm oil, the origin of which will appear in
+    another division of this work.--E.
+
+[2] The text must be here erroneous, as two paces, or ten feet, will
+    scarcely suffice in describing the boa constrictor, sometimes near
+    thirty feet long.--E.
+
+[3] An account of the termites, or white ants of Africa, will appear
+    hereafter. The circumstance of serpents taking up their abode in the
+    large anthills, must be entirely accidental.--E.
+
+[4] Probably the Pintado, or Guinea fowl.--E.
+
+[5] This in Ramusio is called Tabacche, and Sambuka in Grynaeus.--Astl.
+
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage from Senegal, by Cape Verd, the river
+Barbasini, and to the river Gambia; and, returns to Portugal._
+
+Having seen a considerable part of the dominions of Budomel, and received
+the slaves which, were bargained for, in exchange for my horses and other
+merchandize, I resolved to proceed on my voyage, round Cape Verd, and to
+prosecute discoveries along this dangerous coast, and in particular, to
+go in search of the kingdom of Gambia or Gambia, which Don Henry had
+pointed out, on the information of a person who was well acquainted with
+the country of the Negroes, as not far from Senegal, and from whence, it
+was reported, that considerable quantities of gold might be procured.
+Longing to go in quest of this gold, I took my leave of Budomel, and
+repaired to the river Senegal, where I went on board the caravel and got
+under weigh, as soon as possible. Soon after leaving the river Senegal,
+as we were standing onward with a press of sail towards Cape. Verd, we
+descried, one morning two ships in the offing. On joining company, we
+found that one of these belonged to Antonio, an experienced Genoese
+navigator, and the other to some gentlemen in the service of Don Henry,
+and that they had sailed in company, with the intention of passing Cape
+Verd, to explore the coast beyond it, in search of new discoveries. Our
+intentions being similar, I offered to join company, and we accordingly
+proceeded together along the coast to the southward, in sight of land.
+
+We came in sight of that cape next day, being about thirty Italian miles
+from our last anchorage[1]. Cape Verd was so named by the Portuguese, who
+discovered it about a year before[2], because it is covered with trees
+which continue green all the year. This is a high and beautiful cape,
+which runs a considerable way into the sea, and has two hills or small
+mountains at its outer extremity. There are several villages of the
+Senegal negroes, or Jalofs, upon and about this promontory, which are
+composed of thatched cabins close by the shore, and in sight of those who
+sail past. There are also some sand banks, which extend about half a mile
+into the sea[3].
+
+Having doubled the cape, we came to three small uninhabited islands, full
+of green trees[4]; and being in want of water, we anchored at that which
+seemed the largest and most fruitful, in hopes of meeting with a spring,
+but could find none to answer our purpose. We met, however, with the
+nests and eggs of several kinds of birds, such as we had never seen
+before. This was in the month of July 1456, and we continued here all day,
+fishing with lines and large hooks, catching a prodigious number of fish,
+among which were _dentali_, and gilded fish[5], some of which weighed
+from twelve to fifteen pounds each. On the next day we proceeded in our
+course, keeping always in sight of land, and found a kind of gulf formed
+by the coast on the south side of the cape[6]. This coast is all low, and
+full of fine large trees, which are continually green, as the new leaves
+grow before the old ones fall off, and they never wither like those in
+Europe; and the trees grow so near the shore, that they seem to drink as
+it were the water of the sea. The coast is most beautiful, insomuch that
+I never saw any thing comparable to it, though I had sailed much both in
+the Levant and the western parts of Europe. It is well watered every
+where by small rivers, but these are useless for trade, as they do not
+admit ships of any size. Beyond this little gulf, the coast is inhabited
+by two negro nations, called Barbasini and Serreri, which are not subject
+to the king of Senegal, neither have they any king or lord of their own;
+but one person is more honoured than another, according to his condition
+or quality. They are great idolaters, without laws, and living in almost
+a state of nature, and extremely cruel, and refuse to become subjected to
+any lord. That their wives and children may not be taken from them and
+sold as slaves, as is the custom among all the negro nations which are
+under subjection to kings or lords, they use bows and poisoned arrows,
+the wounds from which are incurable, if even the smallest blood is drawn,
+and the wounded person or animal soon dies. Their colour is jet black,
+and their persons are well made. The country is full of woods, lakes,
+and streams, from which they derive great security, as they can only be
+invaded through narrow defiles, by which means they set the neighbouring
+lords at defiance. In former times, the kings of Senegal often attempted
+to reduce these two nations under obedience, but were always worsted,
+owing to the natural strength of the country, and their arrows. Running
+along the coast to the south with a fair wind, we discovered the mouth of
+a river about a bow-shot wide, but not deep, to which we gave the name
+of the _Barbasini_ river, and have marked it on the chart which I made of
+the coast, as sixty miles from Cape Verd[7]. In sailing along the coast,
+we only made sail at sun rise, having a man continually on the top, and
+two others on the prow or head, to look out for breakers, and always came
+to anchor at sun set, about four or five miles from the land, in ten or
+twelve fathoms water.
+
+Proceeding on our voyage in this cautious manner, we came to the mouth of
+a river which appeared to be as large as the Senegal[8]; and struck by
+the fineness of its appearance, and its rich woods which came down to the
+very shores, we cast anchor, and determined to send one of our negro
+interpreters on shore, to endeavour to establish a friendly intercourse
+with the natives. Every ship which sails from Portugal for the coast of
+Africa is supplied with some of these negro interpreters, who consist of
+slaves that had been sold by the lords of Senegal to the first Portuguese
+who touched on the coast, and who have learnt the Portuguese language and
+become Christians. These are hired from their masters in Portugal, who
+receive, for their hire, a prime slave from the cargo on returning from
+the voyage; and when any of these interpreters have thus earned four
+slaves for their master, they become free. Having cast lots to determine
+which of the three ships should send an interpreter on shore, it fell on
+the ship commanded by the Genoese gentleman; on which he sent an armed
+boat, ordering the men not to touch the shore, but to push off as soon as
+they had landed the interpreter; who was charged to inform himself
+respecting the condition and government of the country, and to inquire
+whether it produced gold or any other commodity worth coming for. No
+sooner was the interpreter landed, and the boat shoved off to some
+distance as ordered, than several natives came out of the wood, who had
+been in ambush, with bows, arrows, and other weapons, from the time they
+saw our ships approach the coast, as if they had been in hopes that some
+of our people might land upon the coast. After a short parley with our
+interpreter, they furiously assaulted him with their _gomies_, or short
+Moorish swords, and slew him; our people in the boat being unable to give
+him any assistance. This intelligence was brought to the ships, where it
+excited much surprise; and, concluding that these people must be
+extremely barbarous, who could treat one of their own race with so much
+barbarity, and would consequently use us cruelly if in their power, we
+immediately weighed anchor, and stood on our voyage farther to the south,
+which improved in the beauty and verdure of the trees as we advanced,
+always sailing within sight of the coast, which is everywhere low land
+covered with trees.
+
+We came at length to the mouth of a very large river, which is not less
+than six or eight miles wide at the entrance, and narrows a little way
+within to three or four miles, and finding that it could be safely
+entered, we determined to cast anchor for the night; and to endeavour to
+learn next day if this were the river and kingdom of Gambra, or Gambia,
+of which we were in search[9]. We judged, however, from its noble river,
+that we had now attained the so anxiously desired country of Gambia, and
+flattered ourselves in the hope of finding a country of vast riches,
+where we might make our fortunes at once, by returning laden with gold,
+and other rich commodities. Next day, having but little wind, we sent on
+the small caravel before, well manned, with directions, as their ship was
+small and drew little water, that they were to proceed as far as possible
+up the river, observing whether there were any bar or sand banks at its
+mouth, and to take the soundings with great care; and if the river were
+found navigable, they were to return and make signals to that effect.
+Finding four fathoms water at the entrance, the caravel brought to, and
+made the concerted signal; on which it was thought proper, as that
+caravel was small, to send another boat well armed along with her up the
+river, and they were strictly enjoined, in case the natives were hostile,
+to enter into no conflict with them, but to return immediately to the
+other ships, as the object of our voyage was to cultivate friendship and
+trade with the country, which could only be accomplished by policy, not
+by force. The boats accordingly proceeded up the river for two miles,
+leaving the small caravel at anchor, and found the banks everywhere
+beautiful, with sixteen fathoms water. But as the river above this made
+several returns or reaches, they did not think it prudent to venture any
+higher.
+
+When on their way back, they saw three _almadias_ or canoes near the
+mouth of a small river which runs into the large one. These almadias
+resemble the skiffs used in Italy which are called _zoppoli_, and are
+hollowed out of one large piece of wood. Although our boats were strongly
+armed, yet, in obedience to their orders, and for fear of being attacked
+with poisoned arrows, which the Negroes of Senegal had told us were used
+by all the natives of Gambia, they took to their oars, and made all
+possible haste back to the ship. By the time they got on board, the
+almadias, which followed them close, were within arrow flight. There were
+about twenty-five or thirty negroes in these three almadias, who stopped
+for some time gazing at the caravel, which was quite a new sight to them;
+but would neither speak nor come nearer, notwithstanding every endeavour
+by signs, to induce them to approach, and at length they returned to the
+shore. About three next morning, the other three caravels that had
+remained at anchor without the river, sailed with the rising tide and a
+light breeze, into the river, to rejoin the small caravel, and to proceed
+up the river, hoping to meet with a more civilized people than had been
+seen in the almadias. In this way we sailed up the river, one after the
+other, the small caravel leading; and when we had got about four miles up,
+we perceived ourselves to be followed by a number of _almadias_, without
+knowing whence they came. On this, we tacked about, and bore down towards
+the almadias, having first fortified ourselves in the best manner we
+could, to defend us against their poisoned arrows, and made every thing
+ready for battle, in case of need, though by no means well provided with
+arms. Our order of sailing was now reversed, and my ship was foremost in
+going down the river. We soon came to the almadias, which separated into
+two divisions, having my ship between them, when I had an opportunity to
+count their numbers, as they gave over rowing, raised their oars, and
+gazed in wonder at our ship: There were in all fifteen almadias of
+considerable length, having from 130 to 150 negroes, all well made, of a
+good size, and very black. They wore white cotton shirts, having white
+caps, like those worn by the Germans, on their heads; but with a wing on
+each side, and a feather in the middle, which I supposed to be a
+distinguishing mark of their being soldiers. There stood a negro on the
+prow of each almadia, having a round target, apparently of leather, on
+his arm; and for some time they neither attacked us, nor we them. When
+they saw the other caravels bearing down upon them, they dropped their
+oars, and taking up their bows, sent a flight of arrows on board. Seeing
+this attack, our ships discharged four pieces of cannon, at them, and
+they were so stupified by the report, that they threw down their bows,
+and stared about in amazement, at the effect which the stones from the
+cannon made on the water around them. They continued in this astonishment
+for some time; but seeing that the cannon ceased to fire, they plucked up
+courage, and renewed the fight, advancing within a stones throw of the
+ship. On this our sailors began to use their cross-bows; and the first
+shot, which was made by the natural son of the Genoese gentleman, hit a
+negro on the breast, who instantly fell down dead. Those in the almadia
+where he fell, took up the dart and gazed at it with wonder; yet they
+continued the attack with great vigour, and were courageously opposed by
+our caravels, insomuch that many of the Negroes were soon killed, without
+the loss of one man on our side. The Negroes now changed their mode of
+attack, and made a furious united attack on the stern of our smallest
+caravel, which was both ill manned, and insufficiently armed. On
+observing this, I brought up my ship to her assistance, and the other
+large caravel doing the same, we placed the small one between us, and we
+all vigorously plied our cannon and cross-bows against the almadias,
+which were at last forced to retire. We now linked all the three caravels
+together, and dropped one anchor, which was sufficient for us all, as it
+was calm weather, and the current by no means strong.
+
+We next endeavoured to enter into some conversation with the Negroes, and
+often hailed them by means of our interpreters. At length one of the
+almadias drew near, and on being asked the reason of their hostility to
+strangers, who came among them only to trade in a friendly manner, as
+they had already done with the Negroes of the kingdom of Senegal, and
+were desirous of being on the same friendly terms with them, if they
+thought proper, and were come from a far distant country, with presents
+for their king or lord, from the king of Portugal, who was desirous of
+peace and friendship with them. Our interpreters also entreated the
+Negroes to inform us what country we were in, who was their king, and
+what was the name of the river; and desired them to come freely on board,
+and take what goods they pleased; adding, that they might make a return
+in any commodities they thought proper, and in any quantities they
+pleased, or might have our goods for nothing. To all this they made
+answer, "That they had some intelligence of the Christians already, and
+of their dealings with the Negroes of Senegal, who must be very wicked
+people for entering into friendship with them; as they were well assured
+the Christians were meneaters, who bought the Negroes only to devour them,
+and, for this reason, they were resolved to have no correspondence with
+them, except to destroy them, and then to send their effects to their
+lord, who dwelt three days journey up the country." They added, that the
+name of their country was Gambra, but I have forgotten the name they gave
+the river[10]. At this time a brisk breeze sprung up, and, as we now
+thoroughly knew the hostile dispositions of the Negroes, we bore down
+upon their almadias; but they fled to the shore, and we dropt down to the
+mouth of the river.
+
+While we remained off the mouth of this river, we only once saw the north
+star in clear weather, and it was then so low as hardly to appear above
+the height of a lance above the sea[11]. We likewise observed, in about
+the same elevation, due south by the compass, a constellation of six
+large bright stars, in the figure of a cross, in this form:
+
+
+                               *
+                             * * * *
+                               *
+
+
+We conjectured this to be the _southern chariot_, but could not expect to
+observe the principal star, as we had not yet lost sight of the north
+pole. In this place, on the _first_ of July, we found the night to be
+eleven hours and a half long, and the day twelve hours and a half. The
+climate is always hot, and I was told, that even the rain in the inland
+parts falls warm, in consequence of the great heat of the air. It is true,
+that there is some difference of the heat at different seasons, and when
+the heat is a little diminished, the natives call it winter. The rains
+begin in July, and continue till the end of October, and fall every day
+about noon; at which time certain clouds arise in the N.E. by E. or E.N.E.
+which are accompanied by prodigious thunder and lightning, and vast
+torrents of rain. In this season, which is in the beginning of July, the
+Negroes sow their grain, in the same manner with the people in Senegal.
+Their provisions consist of millet, pulse, flesh and milk. There is not
+so much dawn at break of day in this southern latitude as with us in
+Italy; for, within half an hour after the darkness of the night begins to
+dispel, the sun appears, and during all that dawn the atmosphere is
+turbid, as if filled with smoke, and the moment the sun appears this mist
+is dissipated. I could only account for this phenomenon, by attributing
+it to the low and flat surface of this country, which is destitute of
+mountains, and my companions were of a similar opinion.
+
+On holding a consultation among the commanders of the three caravels, we
+came to a resolution of proceeding about an hundred miles up the river,
+in hopes of meeting with a less ferocious, and better disposed people in
+the interior, than those we had encountered at the mouth of this river:
+But the sailors were impatient to return home, without incurring any
+farther dangers, and unanimously and loudly refused their consent to our
+determination, declaring that they had already done enough for the
+present voyage. Upon this being made known to us, and being well aware
+that seamen are of headstrong and obstinate dispositions, we conceded to
+their clamours, and steered next day for Cape Verd, on our return to
+Portugal[12].
+
+
+[1] Cape Verd is about 100 miles from the southern mouth of the river
+    Senegal; so that the voyagers probably anchored every night within
+    sight of the scarcely known coast.--E.
+
+[2] This is erroneous, as it was discovered in 1446 by Denis Fernandez,
+    nine years before.--Clarke.
+
+[3] It is necessary to be cautious with respect to these early voyages,
+    which, having gone through various transcriptions and translations,
+    are liable to numerous errors. In our best charts, this sand bank,
+    intermixed with sunk rocks, extends two miles out to sea.--E.
+
+[4] Called the Birds islands, or the Magdalens.--Clarke.
+
+[5] In Ramusio these fish are called Orate vecchis, and in Grynaeus
+    Ostreas veteres.--Astl.
+
+[6] This appears to indicate the gulf between Cape Emanuel, near the isle
+    of Goree, and the Red Cape.--E.
+
+[7] The river named Barbasini is above eighty-five miles S.S.E. from Cape
+    Verd, measuring to its northern entrance, and forms a small island or
+    delta at its mouth, having another entrance about eighteen miles
+    farther south. There is a small island named _Fetti_, off its northern
+    entrance, of which no notice is taken by Cada Mosto. The natives on
+    this part of the coast, to the north of the Gambia, are now called
+    Barras.--E.
+
+[8] From the sequel, I am apt to conclude that this second river is the
+    Barbasini of our charts; and that the river named Barbasini in the
+    text of Cada Mosto, is that named _Joall_ in modern charts.--E.
+
+[9] Cada Mosto betrays strange ignorance of the previous discoveries of
+    the Portuguese, considering that he had resided some time with Don
+    Henry at Sagres. This fine river was discovered in 1447, nine years
+    before, by Nuno Tristan, who ascended it some way, and was slain there
+    by the poisoned arrows of the Negroes. Perhaps even Don Henry was
+    misled by the name of Rio Grande which it then received, and confused
+    the Venetian in his search for the Gambia.--Clarke.
+
+[10] From this it would appear, that Gambra or Gambia is the name of the
+    country, not of the river. Johnson says that the natives always call
+    it _Gee_, which merely signifies the river.--Astl.
+
+[11] The centre of the mouth of the Gambia is in lat. 13 deg. 30' N.--E.
+
+[12] It may be noticed, that during the whole of his narrative, Cada
+    Mosto constantly speaks of Spain, and the Spanish language, as if
+    forgetting that the ships and crews were Portuguese.--Clarke.
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_The Second Voyage of Cada Mosto, in 1456, to the coast of Africa, in
+which the Cape de Verd Islands were Discovered_[1].
+
+As I could say little or nothing about the condition of the country of
+Gambia, on my return to Portugal, on account of being obliged to leave it
+so suddenly; partly owing to the intractable and fierce disposition of
+the natives, and partly through the perversity of our sailors, who
+refused to proceed in exploring the river; the Genoese gentleman, Antonio,
+who had been with me in the former voyage, and I, resolved next season to
+fit out two caravels, in order to return to the river Gambia, and Don
+Henry, who was much pleased with our intentions, determined to send one
+of his caravels along with us. Every thing being made ready for our
+voyage, we sailed from Lagos, near Cape St Vincent, with a favourable
+wind, in the beginning of May, and steered for the Canaries, which we
+made in a few days; but, as the wind continued favourable, we did not
+touch there, and continued our course, to the southward; and, as we were
+favoured by a current setting to the S. W. we sailed on at a great rate.
+At last we came in sight of Cape Branco, keeping well out at sea, and on
+the following night we were assailed by a great storm from the S. W.
+which occasioned us to steer W. by N. for two days and three nights, in
+order to weather the tempest, rather than turn back. On the third day, to
+our great joy and surprise, we descried land, being much astonished to
+discover land in a quarter where no person could have expected it[2]. Two
+men were immediately sent aloft, who cried out that two large islands
+were in sight. This news was communicated through the ships, to our great
+satisfaction, as we were sensible these islands were unknown in Portugal.
+Judging it probable that these islands might be inhabited, and eager to
+try our fortune, we steered towards one of them, which we soon came up
+with, and sailed round a part of it, till we found safe anchorage. The
+weather being now much calmed, we sent our boat on shore, well manned and
+armed. The men landed, and having examined some part of the island,
+brought back word that they could meet with no signs of inhabitants
+whatever.
+
+Next morning, to clear up all doubts, I sent ten men to land on the
+island, well armed with guns and cross-bows, whom I ordered to go to the
+top of some mountains within sight, and to look from thence, not only for
+people, but for more islands. These men executed my commands, but found
+no appearance of any inhabitants. They found, however, an incredible
+number of pigeons, which were so tame, being strangers to man, that they
+readily allowed themselves to be caught, and our people brought great
+numbers of them to the caravels. But, what was of much more importance,
+they brought intelligence of having discovered three other islands; one
+of which being to leeward, towards the north, could not be seen from the
+ships, while the other two lay to the south, all within sight of each
+other. These men likewise noticed something resembling islands towards
+the west, but at so great a distance that they could not be clearly
+distinguished, neither did I think proper to sail in that direction, lest
+I should lose time in visiting uninhabited islands, like this at which we
+had touched. The fame of my discovery of these four islands, brought
+other navigators afterwards to explore this group; who round them to be
+ten in number, both large and small included, and altogether uninhabited,
+except by pigeons and other birds, and having a fine fishery[3].
+
+Leaving the first island, we came in sight of the other two, and searched
+for an anchoring place near one of them, which was full of trees.
+Discovering the mouth of a river, and being in want of water, we came to
+anchor, and sent our boats on shore to supply our wants. Some of our
+people went a little way up the river, where they found some small lakes
+containing remarkably fine white salt, of which they brought large
+quantities to the ships, laying in what store was thought necessary, as
+we did likewise of water. We found here great numbers of tortoises, or
+turtle, the shells of which were larger than a target. The sailors cooked
+these into different dishes, as they had done before in the gulf of
+Arguin, where these animals are found in plenty, but not so large as here.
+Out of curiosity I eat some of the flesh of these tortoises, which seemed
+very good, having a good smell and taste, and was not inferior to veal.
+We salted a great number of them, which proved a valuable addition to our
+stock of provisions during the voyage. We caught likewise a prodigious
+quantity of fish, both off the mouth of the river and in the stream; and,
+though we knew not the kinds, they were large and well-flavoured. The
+mouth of this river is a good arrow-shot across, and it is deep enough to
+admit a vessel of 150 tons. We remained two days in this place for
+refreshments, taking in a good stock of tortoises and fish, and large
+quantities of pigeons, which we killed without number. To the first
+island at which we anchored we gave the name of _Bona Vista_, as being
+the first we got sight of; and to this other, which seemed the largest of
+the four, the name of St Jago, having cast anchor there on the day of St
+Philip and St James. Every thing being in readiness for pursuing our
+voyage, we took our departure from these islands, and shaped our course
+for Cape Verd. We arrived at _Spedegar_, and keeping within sight of land,
+we came to a place named the _Two Palms_, which is between Cape Verd and
+the river Senegal. Being perfectly acquainted with the coast, we doubled
+the Cape next day, and came once more to the river Gambia, into which we
+immediately entered; and, finding no opposition from the Negroes or their
+almadias, we sailed up the river, always by day, and continually sounding.
+Such of the almadias as we saw on the river kept at a distance, close to
+the banks of the river, and never ventured to approach. About ten miles
+up the river we cast anchor on a Sunday morning, at an island where one
+of our sailors was buried who had died of a fever; and as his name
+happened to be Andrew, we called it the island of St Andrew[4].
+
+Leaving this island we proceeded up the river, followed by some of the
+Negroes in their almadias, yet always keeping at a considerable distance.
+Our interpreters often hailed them, and shewed them various trinkets,
+which were offered for their acceptance, and endeavoured to entice them to
+come near, by telling them that we were good-natured civilized people,
+from whom they had nothing to fear. Wrought upon by these representations,
+the Negroes at length approached, and came up with my caravel; and at last
+one of them, who understood the language of our interpreter, came on board.
+He was greatly surprized at every thing he saw in and about the caravel,
+especially with the sails and rigging, having no other idea of moving a
+vessel on the water but by means of oars. He was no less amazed at our
+colour and dress, as his nation mostly go stark naked, or with a single
+white cotton shirt as their sole dress. We were exceedingly kind and
+attentive to this Negro, and made him many presents of trinkets, and other
+things of small value, with which he was much delighted. I asked him many
+questions respecting the country, through our interpreter, and at length
+learnt that we were in the country of Gambia, of which Forosangoli was
+chief lord; and, by what we could learn from him, the residence of
+Forosangoli was at the distance of nine or ten days journey, in a
+direction between the south and the southwest. He said that Forosangoli
+was tributary to the king of Melli, who is the great emperor of the
+Negroes; that there were many inferior lords, who dwelt near the river on
+both sides, and, if we pleased, he would conduct us to the residence of
+one of these lords, named Battimansa, and would endeavour to negociate a
+treaty of peace and friendship between him and us. Being much pleased with
+this offer, we carried this Negro along with us, and treated him with much
+attention; and, sailing up the river, we came to the place where
+Battimansa resided, which, in my opinion, was above forty miles from the
+mouth of the river. In going up the river, into which several lesser
+rivers fall, we sailed to the eastwards, and at the place where we came to
+anchor, we found it much narrower than at the mouth, being not above a
+mile in breadth, by our estimation[5]. On coming to this place, we sent
+one of our interpreters and the native Negro to Battimansa, with a present
+of a handsome garment, called an _alzimba_, made of Moorish silk, in the
+form of a shirt; and they were desired to inform him of the reason of our
+coming into his country, signifying, "That the Christian king of Portugal
+had sent us thither, to enter into a treaty of friendship and peace with
+him, and that if he had any call for our commodities, our king would
+supply him with them every year."
+
+As soon as our messengers had discharged their commission, Battimansa sent
+some of his Negroes to the caravel, with whom we entered into friendship,
+and bartered several things for Negro slaves and some gold; but gold was
+by no means to be had in any thing like the plenty we expected, from the
+account given of this country by the natives of Senegal, who, being
+themselves extremely poor, consider that to be a large quantity which we
+think very trifling. The Negroes value their gold as a very precious thing,
+even at a higher rate than the Portuguese, yet we got it in barter very
+reasonably for things of very small value. We continued here eleven days,
+during which the caravels were continually resorted to by great numbers of
+Negroes from both sides of the river, who came to see the novelties, and
+to sell their goods, among which there were a few gold rings. Part of
+their commodities consisted of cotton cloth and cotton yarn; some of the
+pieces being all white, some striped blue and white, and others again with
+red, blue, and white stripes, all very well wrought and coloured. They
+likewise brought civet for sale, the skins of civet-cats, monkies, large
+and small baboons of various sorts; and these last being very plenty they
+sold them cheap, or for something not exceeding ten _marquets_ in value,
+for each; and the ounce of civet for what was not worth more than forty or
+fifty marquets; not that they sold their commodities by weight, but I
+judged the quantity to be about an ounce. Other Negroes brought various
+sorts of fruit for sale, among which were many small wild dates, which
+they seemed to think much of, but which our people thought not good, as
+the taste was different from those of Europe: As for me, I would not
+venture to eat any of them, lest they might have given me the flux, or
+some other distemper. Our ships were every day crowded with people of
+different aspects and languages[6], and the natives were continually going
+up and down the river from one place to another, both men and women, in
+their almadias. They have no sails, and propel their almadias entirely
+with oars, which they use on both sides, all the rowers standing up. One
+man stands at the stern, who rows sometimes on one side, sometimes on the
+other, to keep the almadia steady in her course. They have no pins or row-
+locks to steady their oars, but hold them fast with both hands; their oar
+being a pole, like a half lance, seven feet and a half long, with a round
+board like a trencher fastened to one end, and with these they row with
+great safety and swiftness, in the mouths of their rivers, which are very
+numerous; but they seldom go out to sea, or to any distance from their own
+coasts, lest they should be taken by their neighbours and sold for slaves.
+
+
+[1] There is some difficulty respecting the date of this second voyage. In
+    the former, Cada Mosto sailed from Portugal in March 1455. In the
+    course of his proceedings, the month of November is mentioned, and
+    some subsequent transactions are said to have happened in July, which,
+    on this arrangement, must necessarily have been of the year 1456. If,
+    therefore, the dates of the former voyage be accurate, the second
+    ought to have been dated in 1457.--E.
+
+[2] This part of the narrative is involved in difficulty, and most be
+    erroneous. A storm from the S. W. off Cape Branco, almost in lat. 21 deg.
+    N. and a N. W. course, could not possibly lead to the discovery of the
+    Cape Verd islands, almost six degrees farther south, and at least six
+    degrees farther west. This difficulty may be solved, by supposing the
+    storm from the N.E. and that the ships drove to the S.W. from off Cape
+    Branco.--E.
+
+[3] This passage alludes to the voyage of Antonio de Noli in 1462. And it
+    may be remarked, that de Faria, who mentions the discovery of these
+    islands by Noli, takes no notice of the actual discovery by Cada Mosto.
+    --Astl.
+
+[4] The editor of Astleys Collection considers this as having been St
+    Jameses island, which is about twenty miles up the Gambia: But there
+    is a small island near the northern bank, now called Charles I. which
+    exactly corresponds with the distance in the text.--E.
+
+[5] According to our best maps or charts of the Gambia, this river is
+    never less than four miles broad, and generally above five, till we
+    get near 100 miles up the river, to the reach which encircles the
+    Devils Point, where it still is two miles wide. It is possible that
+    the original journal of Cada Mosto may have had leagues of three
+    marine miles each, in which case the residence of Battimansa may have
+    been at or near the Devils Point, above 100 miles up the river.--E.
+
+[6] Though this country will be amply described in other voyages in our
+    Collection, it may be proper to remark, that both sides of the river
+    Gambia are inhabited by a mixed population of three nations, the
+    Feloops, Foleys, and Mandingoes, each of whom have their own separate
+    villages interspersed. This population is divided into many states,
+    lordships, or little kingdoms; as Joalli, Barrah, Kolar, Badibu,
+    Barsalli, &c. on or near the northern bank; Kumbo, Fonia, Kaen, Jagra,
+    Yamini, &c. on the southern.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Some Account of the Manners and Customs on the Gambia, and of the
+Elephant and Hippopotamus._
+
+It now remains for me to relate what I observed and was informed of
+concerning this country, during my short stay. The religion of the Negroes
+of Gambia consists of various kinds of idolatry; they place great reliance
+on sorcery and other diabolical things, yet all believe in God. There are
+many Mahometans among them, who trade to many countries, yet are not
+settled in houses, because the natives are ignorant[1]. They live very
+much in the same manner with the natives of Senegal, and have the same
+kinds of provisions; but they cultivate more sorts of rice. They eat dogs
+flesh, which I never heard of being used anywhere else. They are clothed
+in cotton garments, and have great abundance of cotton in their country,
+which may be the reason of the Gambians not going naked, as those of
+Senegal do, where cotton is very scarce. The women dress in the same
+manner; and, when they are very young, take great delight in delineating
+figures on their necks, breasts, and arms, with the point of a hot needle,
+which are never obliterated, and which resemble the flowers and ornaments
+which are wrought on silk handkerchiefs. The country is excessively hot,
+and the heat increases as we go to the south; besides which, we found it
+much hotter up the river than at sea, owing to the immense number of trees
+with which the country everywhere abounds. Some of these trees are of very
+great dimensions. Near a spring where our sailors were in use to fill our
+water casks, not far from the banks of the river, there grew an
+exceedingly large tree, but its height was by no means proportional to its
+thickness; for, though it measured seventeen cubits in girth near the
+ground, its height, by estimation, was only twenty paces. This tree was
+hollow, but the branches were very large, avid extended to a great
+distance, forming a thick and ample shade. But there were many other trees
+much larger than this, by which the richness and fertility of the soil may
+be easily conceived; and the country is intersected by numerous streams.
+
+There are many elephants in this country, but the natives are ignorant of
+the art of taming these animals, as is practised in other countries. One
+day, while we lay at anchor in the middle of the river, we observed three
+elephants come out from the wood and walk by the river side, on which we
+sent our boat with some of the people towards them, but they immediately
+returned into the wood. These were all I ever saw alive; but, sometime
+afterwards, Guumi-mensa[2], one of the Negro lords, shewed me a dead young
+elephant, which he had killed after a chase of two days. The Negroes hunt
+on foot in the woods, using only arrows and assagays, or javelins, which
+are all poisoned. When they hunt the elephant they conceal themselves
+behind trees, and even sometimes mount to their tops, leaping from one
+tree to another in pursuit of the elephant, which, being a large unweildy
+animal, is often wounded in many places before it can turn round, or place
+itself in a posture of defence; but, in an open field, no person dare
+attack one, nor could even the swiftest escape from their pursuit, as I
+have been informed by many of the Negroes. The teeth of this dead elephant,
+which was shewn me by Guumi-Mensa, one of which still remained in the jaw,
+did not exceed three spans long, which distinctly shews that it was quite
+young in comparison of those whose teeth are from ten to twelve spans in
+length; yet, small as it was for an elephant, we computed that the weight
+of its carcass was equal to five or six oxen. Guumi-Mensa made me a
+present of what part of this elephant I liked best, and gave the remainder
+to his huntsmen to feast on. Understanding that elephants flesh was eaten
+by the Negroes, I had some both roasted and boiled, of which I tasted,
+that I might be able to say that I had fed upon the flesh of an animal
+which had never been eaten by any of my countrymen; but I found it hard,
+and of an unpleasant relish. I brought one of the legs and a part of the
+trunk on board our caravel, together with some of the hair from its body,
+which was a span and a half long, of a black colour, and very thick. On my
+return to Portugal, I presented this hair to Don Henry, together with a
+part of the flesh salted up for that express purpose, which he received
+with much satisfaction, as it was the first of the kind that had been
+brought from the countries that were discovered under his auspices. The
+foot of the elephant is round, like that of a horse, but without hoofs;
+instead of which it is covered by a very thick, hard, black skin, and
+defended by five nails on the fore part, which are round and of the size
+of a _grossone_[3]. Though young, the foot of this elephant measured a
+span and a half in diameter. From the same Negro lord I received the foot
+of a full-grown elephant, the sole of which was three spans and an inch in
+diameter; which, together with a tooth of twelve spans long, I presented
+to Don Henry on my return, who sent it afterwards as a great curiosity to
+the Dutchess of Burgundy.
+
+In the river Gambia, and in other rivers on this coast, besides the
+_Calcatrici_[4] and other animals, there is one called the _river horse_,
+or hippopotamus, of the same nature almost with the sea cow, and which
+lives both on land and in the water. This animal is as large in the body
+as a cow, with very short legs and cloven feet, having a large head like
+that of a horse, and two huge teeth like the tusks of a wild boar, some of
+which I have seen upwards of two spans long. This animal, when it gets out
+of the river, walks on the land like any other fourfooted beast; and, so
+far as I know, was never before discovered by any Christian traveller,
+except perhaps in the Nile. We saw likewise a number of bats, or rather
+owls, upwards of three spans long; and many other birds, quite different
+from those of our country, both in appearance and taste, yet very good to
+eat.
+
+
+[1] The meaning of this expression is obscure. Perhaps it implies that
+    their Mahometan teachers had no mosques, because the Negroes were
+    ignorant of the means and method of construction. The knowledge of God
+    among the northern Negroes was assuredly due exclusively to the
+    Mahometan missionaries.--E.
+
+[2] Called Gnumi-Mensa in Grynaeus. According to Jobson, Mensa, or Mansa,
+    signifies a king in the Mandingo language.--Astl.
+
+[3] A Venetian silver coin, not exceeding a silver penny.--Astl.
+
+[4] This animal is nowhere explained. Perhaps the crocodile or
+    alligator.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage from the Gambia to the river Kasa-Mansa, Cape
+Roxo, the rivers of St Ann and St Domingo, and the Rio Grande._
+
+Having continued eleven days in the river Gambia, and many of our people
+becoming affected by acute fevers, we dropt down the river on the evening
+of the eleventh day, departing from the country of Batti-Mansa[1], and
+got out of the river in a few days, so stocked with commodities as to
+encourage us to proceed farther; and indeed, having been so far
+successful, and having a plentiful supply of provisions, and every thing
+necessary for prosecuting the voyage, we considered as incumbent on us to
+attempt some farther discoveries towards the south. We accordingly
+steered southwards with a favourable wind; but finding the land to run a
+considerable way to the S.S.W. from the mouth of the Gambia, to a certain
+point which we took for a cape[2], we stood out to the west to gain the
+open sea, the whole coast to the south of the Gambia being low, and
+covered with trees to the waters edge. On gaining an offing, we found
+that the beforementioned point was no actual cape or promontory, as the
+shore appeared perfectly straight on the other side; yet we kept at some
+distance out to sea, as we observed breakers for several miles out to
+sea[3]. On this account we had to proceed with great caution, keeping
+always two men at the head of the ship, and one in the main-top, to look
+out for shoals and breakers; and as a farther precaution, we sailed only
+during the day, and came to anchor every night. In this cautious progress,
+our caravels sailed always one before the other, having fixed the order of
+sailing by lot, and changed the leader every day, in order to avoid all
+disputes.
+
+At the end of two days sail in this manner, always in sight of land, we
+discovered on the third day the mouth of a river about half a mile wide[4],
+and towards evening we observed a little gulf or inlet, which we
+supposed might be the entrance of another river; but as it grew late, we
+came to anchor for the night. Next morning we sailed into this gulf, and
+found that it was the mouth of a large river, not a great deal less in my
+opinion than the Gambia, and both its banks were full of very beautiful
+tall trees. We cast anchor within the mouth of this river, and agreed to
+send two armed boats on shore with our interpreters to get intelligence
+respecting the country, according to our usual practice. This was done
+accordingly, and our interpreters, brought back word that the river was
+called Kasamansa, from a Negro lord of that name who resided at a place
+about thirty miles up the river; but who was absent from his residence,
+on a warlike expedition against the lord of a neighbouring territory.
+
+On receiving this intelligence, we sailed from this river next day,
+without attempting any traffic with the natives. This river of Kasamansa
+is twenty-five leagues, or 100 miles to the south of the Gambia[5].
+Standing on about twenty-five miles farther, we came to a cape which is a
+little more elevated than the rest of the coast, and as its front had a
+red colour, we named it Cape _Roxo_, or _Rosso_. Proceeding forwards, we
+came to the mouth of a pretty large river about a crossbow-shot wide,
+which we did not enter, but to which we gave the name of the river of St
+Ann. Farther on still, we came to the mouth of another river, not less
+than the former, which we named St Dominic, or St Domingo[7]; distant
+from Cape Rosso, by our estimation, between fifty-five and sixty miles.
+In another days sailing, we came to a very large river, which at first
+appeared to be a gulf, and was judged to be about twenty miles in breadth;
+but we could observe the beautiful trees on the south side, and it took
+us a considerable time to sail across to that side. On getting over to
+that side, we observed several islands in the sea, and as we wished to
+procure some intelligence concerning the country, we came to an anchor.
+Next morning two almadias came off to us from the land, one of which was
+as long as a caravel, and carried about thirty hands; the other was
+smaller, and was manned by sixteen Negroes. They came towards us with
+great eagerness; and, not knowing what might be their design, we took
+to our arms and waited their approach. As they drew near, they fixed a
+white cloth to the end of an oar, which they held up as a signal of peace,
+and we answered them in a similar manner. The Negroes then came alongside
+of our ships, the largest of the almadias coming up to the caravel in
+which I was. They gazed at every thing they saw, examining the form of
+the ship, the masts, yards, sails, and rigging with much attention, and
+they seemed astonished at seeing the white colour of our people. Our
+interpreters spoke to them, in order to learn the name of the country,
+but could not understand a word of their language, which was a great
+mortification to us, as we were obliged to leave the place without
+getting any intelligence; but we purchased a few gold rings from one of
+the Negroes, agreeing about the price by signs.
+
+Finding ourselves in a country where our interpreters were of no use, and
+considering therefore that it would be to no purpose for us to proceed
+any farther, we determined to return. We stayed two days in the mouth of
+this large river, which we therefore named Rio Grande[8], and where we
+found the north pole very low[9]. In this place we found great
+irregularity in the tides; for, whereas at Venice, and all other places
+in Europe, the flux and reflux are each of six hours continuance, the
+tide here only flows four hours, and ebbs eight, and the violence of the
+flowing tide is quite incredible, insomuch that we had great difficulty
+to stem it with three anchors a-head. Nay, such was its impetuosity, that
+we were sometimes obliged to hoist our sails, and even then it exceeded
+the force of the wind.
+
+Taking our departure from the mouth of this vast river, on our way back
+to Portugal, we directed our course to two large islands and some small
+ones, which lay about thirty miles distance from the continent, which we
+found quite low, yet full of large and beautiful green trees, and
+inhabited by Negroes[10]. Encountering here the same difficulty of
+intercourse, for want of knowing their language, we made no stop, but
+took our departure for Portugal, where we arrived in safety.
+
+
+[1] At this place Grynaeus calls him Batrinense; though he had named him
+    rightly Bati-mansa before.--Astl.
+
+[2] This is now called Cape St Mary.--E.
+
+[3] This seems to allude to what is now called Bald Cape, about twenty
+    miles south from Cape St Mary, and stretching somewhat farther west;
+    from which there extends breakers or sunken rocks a considerable
+    distance from the land.--E.
+
+[4] Between the mouth of the Gambia and that of the Casamansa, there are
+    three inlets, which appear to be smaller mouths of the latter river.
+    The most northern of these is named St Peter, the most southerly
+    Oyster river; the intermediate one has no name.--E.
+
+[5] The actual distance is barely a degree of latitude, or less than
+    seventy English miles. Cada Mosto probably estimated by the log, the
+    more circuitous track by sea.--E.
+
+[6] Cada Mosto does not mention the remarkable change which takes place
+    here in the direction of the coast. From the Gambia to Cape Rosso, the
+    coast runs direct south; after which its direction is E.S.E. to the
+    mouth of the river St Ann.--E.
+
+[7] Called in modern charts, Rio S. Dominica.--E.
+
+[8] According to de Faria, Rio Grande was discovered by Nunez Tristan in
+    1447, nine years before it was visited by Cada Mosto.--Astl.
+
+[9] Cada Mosto is exceedingly superficial in his account of the Rio Grande;
+    and it even seems dubious if he ever saw or entered this river, as he
+    appears to have mistaken the navigable channel between the main and
+    the shoals of the Rio Grande for the river itself; which channel
+    extends above 150 English miles, from the island of Bulam in the E.S.E.
+    to the open sea in the W.N.W. This channel agrees with his description,
+    in being twenty miles wide, whereas the real Rio Grande is greatly
+    smaller than the Gambia.--E.
+
+[10] These may be the island of Waring and the Marsh islands, at the
+    north-western entry of the channel of the Rio Grande, forming part of
+    the Bissagos islands.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+_The Voyage of Piedro de Cintra to Sierra Leona, and the Windward coast of
+Guinea; written by Alvise da Cada Mosto._
+
+The two voyages to the coast of Africa in which Cada Mosto was engaged,
+and which have, been narrated in the foregoing Sections of this Chapter,
+were followed by others; and, after the death of Don Henry, two armed
+caravels were sent out upon discovery by orders from the king of Portugal,
+under the command of Piedro de Cintra, one of the gentlemen of his
+household, with injunctions to proceed farther along the coast of the
+Negroes than had hitherto been effected, and to prosecute new discoveries.
+In this expedition, Piedro de Cintra was accompanied by a young
+Portuguese who had formerly been clerk to Cada Mosto in his two voyages;
+and who, on the return of the expedition to Lagos, came to the house of
+his former employer, who then continued to reside at Lagos, and gave him
+an account of the discoveries which had been made in this new voyage, and
+the names of all the places which had been touched at by Piedro de Cintra,
+beginning from the Rio Grande, the extreme point of the former voyage[1].
+
+De Cintra first went to the two large inhabited islands at the mouth of
+the Rio Grande which I had discovered in my second voyage, where he
+landed, and ordered his interpreters to make the usual inquiries at the
+inhabitants; but they could not make themselves understood, nor could
+they understand the language of the natives. Going therefore into the
+interior, they found the habitations of the Negroes to consist of poor
+thatched cabins, in some of which they found wooden idols, which were
+worshipped by the Negroes. Being unable to procure any information in
+this place, Cintra proceeded, in his voyage along the coast, and came to
+the mouth of a large river between three and four miles wide, which he
+called Besegue, from a lord of that name who dwelt near its mouth, and
+which he reckoned to be about forty miles from the mouth of the Rio
+Grande[2]. Proceeding about 140 miles from the river Besegue, along a
+very hilly coast; clothed with high trees, and having a very beautiful
+appearance, they came to a cape to which they gave the name of Verga[3].
+Continuing along the coast, they fell in with another cape, which, in the
+opinion of all the seamen, was the highest they had ever seen, having a
+sharp conical height in the middle like a diamond, yet entirely covered
+with beautiful green trees. After the name of the fortress of Sagres,
+which was built by the deceased Don Henry on Cape St Vincent, the
+Portuguese named this point Cape Sagres of Guinea. According to the
+account of the Sailors, the inhabitants of this coast are idolaters,
+worshipping wooden images in the shape of men, before which they make
+offerings of victuals as often as they eat or drink. These people are
+more of a tawny colour than black, having marks on their faces and bodies
+made with hot irons. They go almost entirely naked, except that they wear
+pieces of the bark of trees before them. They have no arms, as there is
+no iron in their country. They live on rice, millet, beans, and kidney
+beans, larger than ours; and have also beef and goats flesh, but not in
+any great abundance. Near to Cape Sagres there are several very small
+uninhabited islands.
+
+The inhabitants of this river have large almadias, carrying from thirty
+to forty men, who row standing, without having their oars fixed to any
+thing, as formerly noticed. They have their ears pierced with many holes,
+in which they wear a variety of gold rings. Both men and women have also
+a hole through the cartilage of the nose, in which they wear a gold ring,
+just like that of iron in the noses of our buffalos, which they take out
+when eating. The ladies belonging to the kings and great men, by way of
+extraordinary grandeur, have gold rings on other parts of their body,
+which decorum prevents us from particularizing.
+
+Passing Cape Sagres, they sailed about forty miles farther along the coast,
+and came to the Rio de San Vincents, which is about four miles wide; and
+about five miles farther they found another, which they called Rio Verde,
+larger at the mouth than the former[5]. Both of these rivers were so named
+by the sailors in the caravels. About twenty-four miles beyond the Rio
+Verde, they came to another cape which they called _Cape Liedo_,
+signifying the _cheerful_, because of the beautifully verdant country in
+its neighbourhood[6]. From Cape Liedo there extends a large mountain for
+about fifty miles along the coast, all of which is very high, and covered
+with tall verdant trees. At the end of this mountain, and about eight
+miles from the shore, there are three small islands, the largest of which
+does not exceed ten or twelve miles in circumference. To these the sailors
+gave the name of _Saluezze_[7]; and they named the mountain _Sierra Leona_,
+or the Lion Mountain, on account of the continual roaring of thunder on
+its summit, which is always enveloped in clouds.
+
+Proceeding beyond Sierra Leona, the coast was quite low, and the shore
+full of sand banks running out into the sea. About thirty miles from the
+southern extremity of the mountain, they found a river near three miles
+wide at the entrance, and because the water had a red colour, they called
+it Rio Roxo[8]. And farther on they found a cape, likewise of a red colour,
+which they named Cape Roxo[9]. And they gave the same name of Roxo to a
+small uninhabited island, about ten miles off at sea, where the north
+polar star seemed only the height of a man above the horizon. Beyond Cape
+Roxo, the sea forms a gulf, about the middle of which there enters a river,
+which the seamen called St Mary del Nievos, or of the snow, as having been
+discovered on the day of that Saint. On the other side of the river there
+is a cape, with an island close beside it[10]. This gulf is full of sand
+banks, running ten or twelve miles along the coast, on which the sea
+breaks with considerable violence, and has a strong current both in the
+ebb and flow of the tide; and the little island just mentioned is named
+_Scauni_, on account of these sand banks. Twenty-four miles distant from
+this river is a large cape called St Ann, having been discovered on the
+day of that saint; and the whole coast between is low, with very shallow
+water. Twenty-four miles beyond this cape is the river of _Palms_, so
+named from the abundance of these trees which were seen there. The mouth
+of this river, though of sufficient width, is so full of shoals; and sand
+banks as to render its entrance very dangerous. About seventy miles
+farther on, there is another small river called _Rio de Fumi_, or Smoke
+River; so named, because at the time of its discovery, they saw nothing
+but smoke along this coast, made by the Negroes[11]. Beyond this river,
+about twenty-four miles, there is a cape which runs a great way out into
+the sea, on which stands a high mountain, on which account it was called
+_Cabo del Monte_, or Cape Mount About sixty miles still farther on, to the
+S. E. there is another and smaller cape, on which is a small mountain or
+hill, which was named Cape _Cortese_, or _Misurado_. The first night after
+their arrival at this place, the voyagers saw many fires among the trees,
+made by the Negroes on seeing the ships, as they had never seen such
+objects before.
+
+About sixteen miles beyond Cape Misurado, there is a large forest of trees
+close to the shore, to which they gave the name of St Mary's Grove. The
+caravels came to anchor beyond this wood, and several almadias came off
+from the shore towards them. There were two or three naked negroes in each,
+having sharp pointed sticks in their hands, which our seamen supposed to
+be darts; some of them had small knives, and they had only two targets and
+three bows among them all. These Negroes, had their ears and noses pierced,
+from which hung some strange ornaments resembling human teeth. The
+interpreters spoke to them, but could not understand their language. Three
+of these Negroes ventured on board one of the caravels, one of whom was
+detained by the Portuguese, and the other two allowed to go away; for
+Cintra had been ordered by the king, in case of discovering any country
+where the interpreters did not understand the language, that he was to
+bring away one of the natives either by force or fair means, that he might
+be able to give an account of his country, either by some of the Negroes
+in Portugal happening to understand his language, or after he had acquired
+the Portuguese.
+
+Piedro de Cintra, having determined to proceed no farther, returned back
+to Portugal from Cape Misarado, to which he had traced the coast of Africa
+from the Rio Grande. Upon his return, this negro who had been detained off
+Cape Misurado, was examined by several Negroes, and at length was
+understood by a Negress who belonged to an inhabitant of Lisbon; not
+indeed by his own proper language, but by means of another which was known
+to them both. Whatever intelligence may have been procured on this
+occasion, was not made public, except that there were unicorns in his
+country. After this Negro had been kept for some months in Lisbon, and had
+been shewn many of the curiosities of Portugal, the king ordered him to be
+supplied with clothes, and sent him back in a caravel to his own country.
+But from that coast no other ship had arrived before my departure, which
+was on the first of February 1463[12].
+
+
+[1] For this exordium or introduction, we are indebted to the editor of
+    Astley's Collection of Voyages and Travels, said to have been a Mr
+    John Green. The infant Don Henry of Portugal died in 1463; so that
+    there must have been an interval of six or seven years between the
+    second voyage of Cada Mosto and this of Piedro de Cintra: Though de
+    Faria seems to put this voyage as having been executed before the
+    death of that excellent prince, yet Cada Mosto, who then actually
+    resided at Lagos, could not be mistaken is this important particular.--
+    Astl.
+
+[2] In a note to the second voyage of Cada Mosto, it has been already
+    noticed that he seems to have given the name of Rio Grande to the
+    channel between the Bissagos islands, or shoals of the Rio Grande and
+    the Main. This river Besegue, may possibly be the strait or channel
+    which divides the island named particularly Bissagos, or more properly
+    Bissao, from that of Bassis or Bussi. Yet, this river Besegue may even
+    have been that now called Rio Grande, in which, about twenty-four
+    leagues above its mouth, there is an island called Bissaghe.--E.
+
+[3] It is strange that the Rio de Nuno, close by this cape, the estuary
+    of which is not less than seven or eight miles wide, should be here
+    omitted; but the present voyage is very superficially narrated
+    throughout.--E.
+
+[4] The text is here obviously defective, as no river is mentioned before;
+    but the allusion must be to the river Pongo, Pongue, or Pougue, at the
+    mouth of which Cape Sagres is situated; indeed that cape seems to be
+    formed by one of the islands off the mouth of the river.--E.
+
+[5] There are a number of small rivers on the coast, between Cape Sagres
+    and Cape Tagrin, such as Tofali, Dania, Buria, Berrea, Tanna, Pogone,
+    Cagrance, dos Casas; but our modern charts have none named as in the
+    text on this part of the coast.--E.
+
+[6] This is now called Cape Tagrin, and forms the northern point at the
+    entrance of the Sierra Leone river, otherwise called the Mitomba or
+    Tagrin river. The southern point is named Cape Sierra Leone; and in
+    some maps is likewise named Liedo very improperly. It is necessary to
+    distinguish carefully between the _Cape_ of Sierra Leone, and the
+    mountainous ridge of the same name, which appears to extend a
+    considerable way along the coast to the S. E. near fifty miles, to the
+    river Kates, or Sa. Ma. della Neue. But, from the baldness of the
+    narrative, there is great difficulty in tracing out this voyage.--E.
+
+[7] These are now called Bananas islands, in lat. 8 deg. N.--E.
+
+[8] Perhaps the Camaranca.--E.
+
+[9] Probably that now called Tassa Point, or Cabo de S. Anna.--E.
+
+[10] This account seems again to refer to the river Camaranca and Tassa
+    Point; otherwise called Cape St Ann; yet this cape is brought in
+    immediately afterwards. Indeed this voyage is inextricably confused,
+    probably incorrect or corrupt.--E.
+
+[11] The large island of Sherbro, with Sherbro Strand and Shoals, a very
+    prominent feature of this part of the African coast, is here entirely
+    overlooked; unless we suppose de Cintra to have gone on the outside of
+    that island, considering the sound as a river, and naming the N. W.
+    point of Sherbro island Cape St Ann.--E.
+
+[12] We have already seen that Don Henry died in this year, which must,
+    therefore, be here an error of the press, either in the original
+    publication by Cada Mosto, or in some of the after editions.--E.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+CONTINUATION OF THE PORTUGUESE DISCOVERIES ALONG THE COAST OF AFRICA,
+FROM THE DEATH OF DON HENRY IN 1463, TO THE DISCOVERY OF THE CAPE OF GOOD
+HOPE IN 1486[1].
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Progress of Discovery from Cape Verga to Cape St Catherine; from the
+Death of Don Henry to that of King Alphonzo V_.
+
+After the decease of Don Henry, the illustrious father of maritime
+discovery, the progress of the Portuguese along the coast of Africa
+received a considerable check, as the military ardour of Alphonzo the
+Fifth was principally directed to the support of his pretensions to the
+throne of Castile, the circumstances of which are unconnected with the
+plan of this work. King Alphonzo was not however entirely inattentive to
+the trade for gold and slaves, which his illustrious uncle Don Henry had
+commenced with that part of Africa which is now called Guinea. The origin
+of this name of Guinea, or _Ghinney_, is unknown. It is not in use among
+the natives, and seems to have been imposed by the Portuguese from the
+appellation of _Ghenchoa_, given to a country on the south side of the
+Senegal, us first mentioned by Leo and afterwards by Marmol. Ever since
+the year 1453, as already mentioned, considerable importations of gold
+had been made to Portugal from the coast of Africa; but little or no
+progress had been made in extending the discoveries farther south, for
+some time previous to the decease of Don Henry. In 1470, King Alphonzo
+sailed with a considerable army, in a fleet of above 300 ships, and
+carried the strong fort of _Arzila_ on the Atlantic coast of Africa, a
+little way to the south of the Straits of Gibraltar. But of his military
+exploits in Africa, from which he acquired the appellation of _Africanus_,
+and assumed the additional title of _Lord of the coasts on both seas_,
+our present purpose does not call for any recital. In 1479, the disputes
+between the crowns of Portugal and Castile were compromised by a treaty
+entered into by Alphonzo V. king of Portugal, and Ferdinand king of
+Castile; by which the trade of Guinea, and the navigation of its coast,
+with the proposed conquest of _Fez_, were guaranteed to Portugal, and the
+Canary islands were annexed to the crown of Castile.
+
+From the want of any accurate history of the progress of the Portuguese
+discoveries, it is utterly impossible to determine the dates or
+circumstances of many of the progressive discoveries along the western
+coast of Africa, and of its islands. In 1469, Alphonzo farmed the Guinea
+trade for five years to Fernando Gomez, for the yearly rent of 500 ducats,
+or about 138 pounds; taking, him bound at the same time, to extend the
+discoveries for 500 leagues to the southwards during the period of his
+exclusive privilege. In 1471, according to Marmol, Juan de Santareu and
+Pedro de Escobar, discovered the _Oro de la Mina_, or the _Gold coast_;
+and advancing still farther, under the guidance of two experienced pilots,
+Martin Fernandez and Alvaro Esteves, they discovered _Cabo Catalina_, or
+Cape St Catherine, in lat. 1 deg. 40' S. This promontory, which is thirty-one
+leagues to the south of Cabo de Lope Gonzales, derived its name from the
+day of the saint on which it was first seen, and forms the northern
+boundary of the great kingdom of Congo. The discovery of this cape is
+assigned by some writers to Sequiera, a knight belonging to the royal
+household.
+
+The celebrated Portuguese historian, Emanuel de Faria, in his _Asia
+Portuguesa_, has recorded all the Portuguese voyages, from their first
+attempts under Don Henry, to their developement of China and Japan, and
+has even left an account of all the ships that sailed from Lisbon for
+Africa and Asia, down to the year 1600; but was unable to ascertain the
+dates of many important events. Neither he nor De Barros have been able
+to remove the uncertainty respecting the first discovery of the island of
+St Thomas on the coast of Africa, the south end of which touches the
+equinoctial. During the remainder of the reign of Alphonzo, the line of
+coast, from Cape Verga in lat. 10 deg. N. to Cape St Catherine in 1 deg. 40' S.
+was much frequented by the Portuguese. Of this coast an ample account has
+been given by Dapper and Barbot, chiefly following a tract published by
+Gotard Artus of Dantzick, which is to be found in De Bry's Collection,
+and that of David von Nyendael and others. This was the work of a Dutch
+navigator, which was first translated in to German, and thence by Artus
+into Latin. But our peculiar department is confined to actual voyages and
+travels, and the progress of discovery; and it would both much exceed our
+proper limits, and would be an entire deviation from our plan of
+arrangement, to admit lengthened geographical and topographical
+disquisitions; which, so far as they are at all admissible, must be
+reserved for the more particular voyages and travels, after those of
+general discovery have been discussed.
+
+There are four principal islands in the Gulf of Guinea, or Bight of
+Biafra, as it is usually called by English navigators, Ferdinand Poo,
+Princes isle, St Thomas, and Annobon, the discovery of which have been
+related as follows by Barbot, and his account seems the most probable[2].
+Fernando Lopez discovered the first of these in 1471, in lat. 3 deg. 40' N.
+giving it the name of _Ilha formosa_, or the Beautiful Island, which was
+afterwards changed to that of _Fernando Poo_, which it still retains. In
+an account of the kingdom of Congo, in Churchill's Collection, viii. 527,
+more properly named the Oxford Collection, or that of Osborne, v. 2. This
+island, and a river on the coast of the continent of Africa, directly
+east, now called Cameroon River, are said to have taken their names of
+Fernando Poo from their first discoverer. Some writers assign the
+discovery of these four islands, and that of St Matthew, to Fernando
+Gomez, who formed the Guinea trade. Perhaps they were discovered under
+his auspices, by the navigators whom he employed. This island is composed
+of very high land, easily seen at a great distance, and the Portuguese
+had formerly sugar plantations upon it. The _Ilha do Principe_, or
+Princes Island, in lat. 1 deg. 30' N. was either discovered by Fernando Lopez,
+or by Santaren and Escobar, about the same period, and probably received
+its name in honour of the illustrious prince, Don Henry. This island is
+described as consisting of high table mountains, pyramidal at their bases,
+and visible at the distance of twenty leagues; being about nine leagues
+long by five leagues broad. It is said to abound in oranges, lemons,
+bananas, cocoa-nuts, sugar-canes, rice, many species of sallad herbs, and
+to be susceptible of producing the European grains. The mandioca, or root
+of the cassada plant, is generally used for bread, of which the juice
+while raw is said to be a virulent poison; while its meal, or rasped root,
+after the malignant juice is carefully pressed out, is used for bread.
+The inhabitants also, have sheep, hogs, goats, and an immense number of
+poultry; but these have probably been introduced by the Portuguese.
+
+The _Ilha de San Thome_, or island of St Thomas, which is said to have
+received its name from the saint to whom the chapel of the great
+monastery of _Thomar_ is dedicated, and to which all the African
+discoveries are subjected in spirituals, has its southern extremity
+almost directly under the equinoctial, and is a very high land of an oval
+shape, about fifteen leagues in breadth, by twelve leagues long.
+
+The most southerly of these islands, in lat. 1 deg. 30' S. now called Annobon,
+was originally named Ilha d'Anno Bueno, or Island of the Happy Year,
+having been discovered by Pedro d'Escovar, on the first day of the year
+1472. At a distance, this island has the appearance of a single high
+mountain, and is almost always topt with mist. It extends about five
+leagues from north to south, or rather from N. N. W. to S. S. E. and is
+about four leagues broad, being environed by several rocks and shoals. It
+has several fertile vallies, which produce maize, rice, millet, potatoes,
+yams, bananas, pine-apples, citrons, oranges, lemons, figs, and tamarinds,
+and a sort of small nuts called by the French _noix de medicine_, or
+physic nuts[3]. It also furnishes oxen, hogs, and sheep, with abundance
+of fish and poultry; and its cotton is accounted excellent.
+
+Including the voyages of Cada Mosto and Pedro de Cintra, which have been
+already detailed, as possibly within the period which elapsed between the
+death of Don Henry in 1463, and King Alphonzo, which latter event took
+place on the 28th August 1481, and the detached fragments of discovery
+related in the present Section, we have been only able to trace a faint
+outline of the uncertain progress of Portuguese discovery during that
+period of eighteen years, extending, as already mentioned, to Cape St
+Catherine and the island of Annobon. A considerable advance, therefore,
+had been made since the lamented death of the illustrious Don Henry;
+which comprehended the whole coast of Guinea, with its two gulfs, usually
+named the _Bights_ of Benin and Biafra, with the adjacent islands, and
+extending to the northern frontier of the kingdom of Congo[4]. If the
+following assertion of de Barros could be relied on, we might conclude
+that some nameless Portuguese navigators had crossed the line even before
+the death of Don Henry; but the high probability is, that the naval
+pupils of that illustrious prince continued to use his impress upon their
+discoveries, long after his decease, and that the limits of discovery in
+his time was confined to Cape Vergas. Some Castilians, sailing under the
+command of Garcia de Loaysa, a knight of Malta, landed in 1525 on the
+island of St Matthew, in two degrees of southern latitude[5]. They here
+observed that it had been formerly visited by the Portuguese, as they
+found an inscription on the bark of a tree, implying that they had been
+there eighty-seven years before[6]. It also bore the usual motto of
+that prince, _talent de bien faire_.
+
+In the paucity of authentic information respecting these discoveries, it
+seems proper to insert the following abstract of the journal of a
+Portuguese pilot to the island of St Thomas, as inserted by Ramusio,
+previous to the voyage of Vasco de Gama, but of uncertain date; although,
+in the opinion of the ingenious author of the Progress of Maritime
+Discover, this voyage seems to have been performed between the years 1520
+and 1540. In this, state of uncertainty, it is therefore made a section
+by itself, detached in some measure from the regular series of the
+Portuguese discoveries.
+
+
+[1] Astley, I. 15. Clarke, I. 290. Purchas, I. Harris, I. 664.
+
+[2] Clarke, I. 295.
+
+[3] These may possibly be the nuts of the Ricinus Palma Christi, from
+    which the castor oil is extracted.--E.
+
+[4] Strictly speaking the northern limits of Loango, one of the divisions
+    of the extensive kingdom of Congo, is at the Sette river, ten leagues
+    S.S. E. from Cape St Catherine.--E.
+
+[5] There is no island of that name in this position; so that the island
+    of St Matthew of de Barros must refer to Annobon.--E.
+
+[6] These dates would throw back the discovery of this island, and the
+    passage of the line by the mariners of Don Henry, to the year 1438, at
+    a time when they had not reached the latitude of 25 deg. N. which is quite
+    absurd.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+Voyage of a Portuguese Pilot from Lisbon to the Island of St Thomas[1].
+
+Before I left Venice, I was requested by letter from Signior Hieronimo
+Fracastro of Verona, that, on my arrival at Conde, I would send, him an
+account of my voyage to San Thome, to which island our ships often sail
+for cargoes of sugar. The passage of the equinoctial line, under which
+that island, is situated, appeared to that gentleman so extraordinary a
+circumstance as to merit the attention of men of science; and you
+likewise made me a similar request. I began, therefore, immediately after
+my return, to draw up an account of my voyage, from those notes which we
+pilots usual keep of all occurrences, and I compared it in my progress
+with the journals of some friends who had formerly made the same voyage.
+When I afterwards attentively perused my manuscript, it did not appear to
+me worthy of being communicated to a gentleman of such scientific
+character as Signor Hieronimo, whose talents I had duly appreciated, by
+the perusal of his publications, which I received from you before my
+departure from Venice. I therefore laid my manuscript aside, not wishing
+that any one might peruse it; but as you have again urged the performance
+of my promise, I now anxiously obey a request, which, as coming from you,
+I must always consider a command. Apprehensive, likewise, of appearing
+forgetful of your polite attentions, I prefer the danger of exposing my
+ignorance, to the possibility of being charged with ingratitude or want
+of attention. Being a sailor, and unused to composition, I pretend to
+little more than copying the remarks of those who have sailed from our
+continent to _Ethiopia_, without attempting to reduce my narrative into
+lucid order, or to embellish it with fine writing. You will therefore
+have the goodness to destroy this account, after its perusal, that the
+errors I have committed, by compliance with your commands, may not draw
+upon me the imputation of presumption.
+
+The Portuguese ships which sail to the island of St Thomas from Lisbon,
+for cargoes of sugar, usually put to sea in February, though some vessels
+make this voyage at every period of the year. Their course is S.S.W.
+until they reach the Canary Islands; after which they steer for the
+island of Palmas, which is opposite to Cape Bojador on the coast of
+Africa, and is about ninety leagues from the kingdom of Castile. This
+island has plenty of provisions, and abounds in wine and sugar. The north-
+west wind prevails most, and a great sea rages continually on its coast,
+particularly in the month of December[2].
+
+If the ships which are bound for the island of St Thomas find it
+necessary to obtain a quantity of salt after having taken on board a
+sufficient supply at the island of _Sal_, they steer for the coast of
+Africa at the Rio del Oro; and, if they have calm weather and a smooth
+sea; they catch as many fish in four hours, with hooks and lines, as may
+suffice for all their wants during the remainder of the voyage. But, if
+the weather is unfavourable for fishing at the Rio del Oro, they proceed
+along the coast to Cape Branco; and thence along the coast to the island
+of Arguin. The principal sorts of fish on this coast are _pagros_, called
+_albani_ by the Venetians; likewise _corvi_ and _oneros_, which latter
+are only a larger and darker-coloured species of _pagros_. As soon as
+taken, the fish are opened and salted, and serve as an excellent supply
+of provisions to navigators. All the coast of Africa, from Cape Bojador,
+otherwise called _Cabo della Volta_, as far as Cape Branco and even to
+Arguin, is low and sandy. At Arguin, which is inhabited by Moors and
+Negroes, and which is situated on the confines between these two nations,
+there is a capacious harbour, and a castle belonging to our king of
+Portugal, in which some Portuguese always reside with the royal agent.
+
+On leaving the island of Sal, our ships steer next for St Jago, another
+of the Cape Verd islands. This island is situated in _fifteen degrees on
+the equinoctial and thirty leagues towards the south_[3].It is seventeen
+leagues long, and has a city on the coast, with a good harbour called
+_Ribiera Grande_, or the Great River, now St Jago. From two high
+mountains, one on each side, a large river of fresh water flows into the
+harbour; and, from its source, full two leagues above the city, its banks
+are lined on each side with gardens, having fine groves of oranges,
+cedars, pomegranates, several sorts of figs, and the cocoa-nut palm,
+which has been long planted on this island. It produces all kinds of
+vegetables in great abundance and perfection; but they do not afford good
+seeds, so that it is necessary to procure these every year from Europe.
+The city is on the south coast of the island, and is well built of stone,
+being inhabited by about 500 families of distinction, Portuguese and
+Castilians. Its government is entrusted to a corregidor or governor,
+appointed by the king of Portugal; and two judges are chosen annually,
+one for the determination of naval and maritime causes, and the other for
+regulating the police. This island is very mountainous, and is very
+barren in many parts, which are entirely destitute of wood; but its
+vallies are fertile and well cultivated. In June, when the sun enters
+Cancer, the rains are so incessant that the Portuguese call that month
+_La Luna de las Aquas_, or the Water Month. Their seed-time begins in
+August, when they sow maize, called _miglio zaburo_. This is a white bean,
+which is ready to be gathered in forty days, and is the chief food of
+these islanders, and of all the inhabitants of the coast of Africa[4].
+They also sow much rice and cotton; the latter of which comes to great
+perfection, and is manufactured into striped cloths, which are exported
+to the country of the Negroes, and bartered for black slaves.
+
+To give a distinct view of the commercial transactions with the Negroes,
+it is proper to inform you, that the western coast of Africa is divided
+into several countries and provinces, as Guinea, _Melegote_[5], the
+kingdom of Benin, and the kingdom of Manicongo. Over all this extent of
+coast, there are many Negro kings or chiefs, whose subjects are
+Mahometans and idolaters, and who are continually at war with each other.
+These kings are much respected by their subjects, almost to adoration, as
+they are believed to have originally descended from heaven. When the king
+of Benin dies, his subjects assemble in an extensive plain, in the centre
+of which a vast pit or sepulchre is dug, into which the body is lowered,
+and all the friends and servants of the deceased are sacrificed and
+thrown into the same grave, thus voluntarily throwing away their own
+lives in honour of the dead. On this coast there grows a species of
+_melegete_, extremely pungent like pepper, and resembling the Italian
+grain called _sorgo_. It produces likewise a species of pepper of great
+strength, not inferior to any of that which the Portuguese bring from
+Calicut, under the name of _Pimienta del rabo_, or _Pepe dalla coda_, and
+which African pepper resembles _cubbebs_, but so powerful that an ounce
+will go farther than a pound of the common sort; but its exportation is
+prohibited, lest it should injure the sale of that which is brought from
+Calicut[6]. There is also established on this coast a manufacture of an
+excellent kind of soap from palm-oil and ashes, which is carried on for
+the king's account. All the trade of this coast, to the kingdom of
+_Manicongo_ exclusively, is farmed out every four or five years to the
+highest bidder. Great Negro caravans bring gold and slaves to the
+stations on the coast. The slaves are either prisoners taken in war, or
+children whom their parents have parted with in the hope of their being
+carried to a more fertile country. For above ninety years after the first
+discovery of this coast, the Portuguese merchants were accustomed to
+enter the large rivers by which the country is everywhere intersected,
+trading independently with the numerous tribes inhabiting their banks;
+but now the whole of this commerce is in the hands of stationary licensed
+factors, to whom it is farmed.
+
+On quitting St Jago we steer southerly for the Rio Grande, which is on
+the north of Ethiopia, beyond which we come to the high mountain of
+Sierra Liona, the summit of which is continually enveloped in mist, out
+of which thunder and lightning almost perpetually flashes, and is heard
+at sea from the distance of forty or fifty miles. Though the sun is quite
+vertical in passing over this mountain, and extremely hot, yet the thick
+fog is never dissipated. In our voyage we never lose sight of land, yet
+keep always at a considerable distance, carefully observing the
+declination of the sun, and keeping a southerly course till we arrive in
+_four degrees on the equinoctial_[7], when we suddenly change our course
+to the south-east, keeping the Ethiopian coast always on our left hand in
+our way to the island of St Thomas. On this coast, between the tropic and
+the equinoctial, we never meet with any hard gales, as storms are very
+rarely found within the tropics. On nearing the land, the soundings in
+many parts of the coast do not exceed fifty _braccia_, but farther out
+the depth rapidly increases, and the sea usually runs high at a distance
+from the land. When we arrived at Rio del Oro, as mentioned before, we
+observed four stars in the form of a cross, of an extraordinary size and
+splendour, elevated thirty degrees above the antarctic pole, and forming
+the constellation called _il Crusero_. While under the tropic of Cancer,
+we saw this constellation very low; and, on directing our _balestra_[8]
+to the lowermost of these stars, we found it to be directly south, and
+concluded that it must be in the centre of the antarctic polar circle. We
+observed the same constellation very high when we were at the island of
+St Thomas; and remarked that the moon, after rain, produces a rainbow
+similar to that occasioned by the sun during the day, except that the
+colours were dim and ill-defined. On leaving the straits of Gibraltar, I
+did not observe any sensible change on the ebb and flow of the sea; but
+when we approached Rio Grande, which is eleven degrees to the north of
+the equinoctial, we observed a considerable tide at the mouth of that
+river, and the rise in some places was much the same as on the coast of
+Portugal, whereas at the isle of St Thomas it was nearly the same as at
+Venice.
+
+The island of St Thomas was discovered above eighty[9] years ago, by some
+captains in the royal navy of Portugal, and was altogether unknown to the
+ancients. Its horizon or parallel passes at an equal distance between the
+arctic and antarctic poles, and its days and nights are always equal. The
+arctic polar star is there invisible, but the _guardiani_ are seen in
+some measure to revolve, and the constellation which is known by the name
+of _il crusero_, is seen in the heavens at a high altitude. To the
+eastwards[10] of St Thomas, and at the distance of 120 miles, the small
+island called _Il Principe_ is situated. This latter island is inhabited
+and cultivated, the produce of its sugar canes belonging to the revenue
+of the kings eldest son, from which circumstance the island derives its
+name. To the S. S. W. or S. and by W. and in the latitude of almost 2 deg. S.
+is the uninhabited island of Annobon, on which numbers of crocodiles and
+venomous serpents are found. Its rocky shores abound in fish, and are
+much resorted to by the inhabitants of St Thomas on that account. When
+first discovered, the island of St Thomas was an entire forest,
+containing a variety of trees, which, though barren, were extremely
+verdant. These trees were all remarkably tall and straight, their
+branches all drawn close to the stems, and not spreading out as with us.
+After clearing away a great part of the forest, the inhabitants built a
+principal town called _Pouoasan_, which has an excellent harbour. The
+principal dependence of the settlers in this island is upon their sugars,
+which they exchange yearly with the merchants who trade thither, for
+flour in barrels, wines, oil, cheese, leather, swords, glass beads,
+drinking-cups, pater-nosters, and _buzios_, which are a small kind of
+shells, called by the Italians _white porcelain_, and which pass in
+Ethiopia as money. The Europeans who reside on this island depend much
+for provisions on the ships, as they cannot subsist on the fare used by
+the Negroes. The slaves employed in their sugar plantations are procured
+from Guinea, Benin, and Congo; and some rich planters have from 150 to
+300 Negroes. These work five days in every week for their masters, and
+are allowed the Saturdays to themselves, when they cultivate various
+articles of provision, as the _miglio zaburo_, a species of bean formerly
+mentioned, a root called _igname_, and many species of culinary
+vegetables, the seeds of which must be imported from Europe, as they do
+not come to perfection in this climate.
+
+[Illustration: Chart of North Western Africa]
+
+The soil of St Thomas consists of a red and yellow marl, or clay, of
+great fertility, which is kept soft and mellow by the heavy dews which
+fall nightly, contributing greatly to vegetation, and preventing it from
+being dried up by the great heats; and so great is the luxuriant
+fertility of the soil, that trees immediately spring up on any spots left
+uncultivated, and will grow as high in a few days as would require as
+many months with us. These sprouts are cut down and burnt by the slaves,
+and their ashes are used as manure for the sugarcanes. If planted in
+January, the canes are ready to be cut in June, and those which are
+planted in February become ripe in July; and in this manner they keep up
+a succession throughout the whole year. In March and September, when the
+sun is vertical, the great rains set in, accompanied with cloudy and
+thick weather, which is of great service to the sugar plantations. This
+island produces yearly above 150,000 arobas of sugar, each containing
+thirty-one of our pounds, of which the king receives the tenth part,
+which usually produces from 12,000 to 14,000 arobas, though many of the
+planters do not pay this tythe fully. There are about sixty _ingenios_
+driven by water, for bruising the canes and pressing out the juice, which
+is boiled in vast chaldrons, after which it is poured into pans in the
+shape of sugar-loaves, holding from fifteen to twenty pounds each, in
+which it is purified by means of ashes. In some parts of the island,
+where they have not streams of water, the canes are crushed by machines
+worked by the Negroes, and in others by horses. The bruised canes are
+given to the hogs, which hardly get any other food, yet fatten
+wonderfully, and their flesh is so delicate and wholesome as to be
+preferred to that of poultry. Many sugar refiners have been brought here
+from Madeira, on purpose to endeavour to manufacture the sugars of St
+Thomas more white and harder than its usual produce, but in vain. This is
+alleged to proceed from the extreme richness of the soil injuring the
+quality of the sugar; just as with us, wines produced in soils of too
+great fertility are apt to have a peculiar flavour. Another cause of this
+is supposed to proceed from the climate of the island being too hot and
+too moist, except in the month of June, July, and August, at which season
+a fresh dry wind blows from Ethiopia to this island; and they then make
+their best sugars.
+
+The planters are obliged, to ship off their sugars as soon as they can
+procure shipping, because they would become liquid if attempted to be
+kept for a length of time. At present, not above two-thirds of the island
+are appropriated to the cultivation of sugar; but any person who comes to
+this island for the purpose of settling, whether from Spain or Portugal,
+or any other country, may procure from the royal intendant as much land
+as he is able to cultivate, and at a moderate price. The esculent root
+which is known in the Spanish islands by the name of _batata_, is here
+named ingame by the Negroes, and is their principal food, either boiled
+or roasted under the ashes. There are different kinds of this root
+produced on the island, but that which is known by the name of _igname
+cicorero_ is preferred by the merchant vessels, all of which purchase
+considerable quantities as a sea-stock for their homeward voyage, and the
+Negroes cultivate them largely for the express purpose of supplying the
+ships[11]. This island is distinguished by a high mountain in the middle,
+thickly covered by tall, straight, and verdant trees, and its summit is
+continually enveloped in clouds, whence water is diffused in numerous
+streams all over the island. A large shallow stream flows through the
+city of Pouoasan, supplying it with abundance of excellent water, which
+the inhabitants reckon of a medicinal quality, and allege that St Thomas
+would not be habitable if it were not for this river and its other
+numerous springs and rivulets. The native trees are chiefly barren, and
+though some olives, peaches, and almonds, were planted by the early
+settlers, which soon grew with great luxuriance, they never bore any
+fruit, and this has been the case with all stone fruits that have been
+tried. But the cocoa-nut palm, brought hither from Ethiopia, has thriven
+satisfactorily. Repeated attempts have been made to cultivate wheat, but
+always unsuccessfully, though tried at different seasons of the year; as
+the ear would never fill, but always ran up to straw and chaff only.
+
+In March and September, the sky is always overcast with clouds and mists,
+and continual rains prevail, which season is considered by the
+inhabitants as their winter. In May, June, July, and August, which they
+call _Mesi di Vento_, or windy months, the prevalent winds are from the
+south, southeast, and southwest; but the island is sheltered by the
+continent from the north, northeast, and northwest winds; The summer
+months are December, January, and February, when the heat is excessive,
+and the atmosphere being continually loaded with vapour, occasions the
+air to feel like the steam of boiling water. The shores of this island
+abound in many kinds of fish, and, during the months of June and July,
+the inhabitants catch a kind which they name _le chieppe_, which are
+singularly delicate. In the seas between this island and the coast of
+Africa, there are prodigious multitudes of whales, both of the large and
+small kinds.--Should you, Sir, be unsatisfied with my ill-written and
+confused information, I beg of you to consider that I am merely a seaman,
+unpracticed in literary composition.
+
+
+[1] Ramusio. Clarke I. 298. This voyage was communicated by the relator
+    to Count Raimond della Torre, a nobleman of Verona.--Clarke.
+
+[2] A description of the islands of Cape Verd, and an account of the
+    supply of salt usually taken on board by the Portuguese ships at the
+    island of Sal, for the purpose of laying in a sea store of salt fish,
+    is here omitted.--Clarke.
+
+[3] This geographical expression is utterly unintelligible, but may be a
+    strange mode of denoting its latitude, which is 15 deg. N. but I know not
+    what to make of the thirty leagues towards the south, unless the
+    author meant that it was thirty leagues in extent from north to south,
+    and seventeen leagues from east to west.--E.
+
+[4] The description in the text is not applicable to maize, and must refer
+    to some species of bean, or kidney-bean.--E.
+
+[5] Called likewise Maleguette, and named also the Grain-Coast and the
+    Pepper-Coast. Manicongo is obviously the kingdom of Congo.--E.
+
+[6] Some of this is smuggled and sold in England.--Clarke.
+
+    This Guinea pepper is probably that now known under the name of
+    Jamaica pepper; but the extremely pungent kind must be some of the
+    numerous species of capsicums, usually called Cayenne pepper.--E.
+
+[7] This strange expression seems to imply 4 deg. of north latitude.--E.
+
+[8] Called likewise Balestriglia, being the Venetian name for the cross-
+    staff, or fore-staff, an astronomical instrument which has been
+    superseded by the quadrant and sextant.--E
+
+[9] In an after part of this narrative, the pilot informs us, that his
+    first voyage to the island of San Thome was in 1520, and that he made
+    five voyages to that place. If, therefore, the date of his present
+    voyage were fixed to 1530, it would carry us back to 1450, or even
+    earlier, for the date of this discovery, near thirteen years before
+    the death of Don Henry.--Clarke.
+
+    In Mr Clarkes note on this passage, he erroneously calculates on the
+    above data that the discovery might have been in 1460, which is only
+    seventy years back from 1530. But the result of the data in the text
+    shews, that either the pilot was mistaken as to the real date of the
+    discovery, or that his narrative has been corrupted, so that no
+    reliance can be placed on his dates.--E.
+
+[10] The direction of _Il Principe_, or Princes Island, from St Thomas,
+    is N. N. E. and the distance does not exceed seventy miles.--Clarke.
+
+[11] These _batatas_ are probably a different species from our potatoes,
+    and may be what are called sweet potatoes in the West Indies; perhaps
+    the _igname cicorero_ is the West Indian _yam_. Four species of
+    _igname_ or _batata_, are mentioned in Barbot as originally from Benin,
+    Anwerre, Mani-Congo, and Saffrance. The first of these is remarkably
+    sweet, and the second keeps well. A variety of esculent roots might
+    prove of high utility to navigators, and are too much neglected. Among
+    these, the parsnip and Jerusalem artichoke deserve notice, as being
+    very nutritive, and proof against all weathers.--Clarke.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Continuation of Portuguese Discoveries, from Cape St Catherine to the
+kingdom of Congo_.
+
+We are still obliged to continue the account of the Portuguese
+discoveries historically, from the want of any regular journals of their
+early voyages along the African coast. In the original efforts of the
+illustrious Don Henry, although the progress was extremely slow, we have
+much to admire in the character of that prince, who possessed genius to
+stretch beyond the trammels of custom and authority, boldly thinking for
+himself, pointing out the way of extending the knowledge of our globe by
+maritime discoveries, and persevering nobly in his renewed efforts, in
+spite of the timid ignorance of his unexperienced pilots and mariners.
+But it is not easy to explain the continuance of that slow progress,
+which was even retarded during the years which elapsed between the demise
+of that prince of mariners in 1463, and that of Alphonso in 1481; when
+the increased experience of the Portuguese, in their frequent voyages to
+the new discovered Atlantic islands and African coast, ought to have
+inspired them with fresh vigour and extended views of discovery and
+commerce. The military character of Alphonso may, however, explain this
+in a great degree, as all his energies were directed towards the
+extension of dominion in the Moorish kingdom of Fez; and the business of
+discovery was devolved as a burdensome and unprofitable task on the
+farmers of the trade to the coast of Africa, which appears to have become
+extensive and lucrative, after the discovery of Guinea and its islands,
+and the establishment of the sugar colonies in these islands. We learn,
+likewise, from the preceding voyage of the Portuguese pilot to the island
+of St Thomas, that the mariners still confined themselves almost entirely
+to creeping along the coast, from cape to cape, and from island to island,
+not daring to trust themselves to the trackless ocean, under the now sure
+guidance of the heavenly luminaries; but which they then did not
+sufficiently understand, nor did they possess sufficient instruments for
+directing their course in the ocean. It would appear that they had then
+no other method of computing the longitude but by means of the log, or
+dead reckoning, which is liable to perpetual uncertainty from currents
+and lee-way, and which a storm, even of short continuance, must have
+thrown into total confusion. Their instruments and methods for
+determining even the latitudes, appear to have then been imperfect and
+little understood. In the sequel of this deduction, we shall find the
+first Portuguese squadron which sailed for India, conducted across the
+Indian ocean by a Moorish pilot.
+
+On the accession of John II. to the throne of Portugal in 1481, the
+discoveries along the coast of Africa were resumed with a new spirit.
+While infante or hereditary prince, his principal revenue was derived
+from the profits of the Guinea trade, and of the importation of gold from
+the haven of Mina; and among the first measures of his reign, he turned
+his attention to the improvement and extension of that valuable branch of
+commerce. For this purpose, he gave orders to make all necessary
+preparations for building a fortress and church at the port of Mina. All
+the requisite materials, even to stones and tiles, were accordingly
+shipped from Lisbon in a squadron of ten caravels and two transports,
+with 500 soldiers and 200 labourers or workmen of various kinds. This
+expedition was placed under the command of Don Diego d'Azumbuja, an
+experienced officer, under whom were the following naval captains,
+Goncalez da Fonseca, Ruy d'Oliveira, Juan Rodrigues Gante, Juan Alfonso,
+Diego Rodrigues Inglez, Bartholomew Diaz, Pedro d'Evora, and Gomez Aires.
+This last was a gentleman belonging to the household of Pedro king of
+Arragon, all the others being noblemen of the household of King John.
+Pedro de Cintra and Fernam d'Alfonso commanded the transports, and a
+small vessel attended the squadron as an advice-boat. This squadron
+sailed on the 11th December 1481, and reached their destination on the
+19th January 1482, at an African village named _Aldea_, where they found
+Juan Bernardo, who had previously sailed for the coast in quest of gold.
+
+Bernardo was immediately sent by Azumbuja, to inform Camaranca, the Negro
+chief of the district, with the arrival of the Portuguese armament, and
+to desire a conference, with directions to endeavour to impress that
+chief with a high sense of the rank and character of the Portuguese
+officers, and of the irresistible power of the armament now upon his
+coast. Early next morning, Azambuja landed with all his followers, who
+were secretly armed, in case of meeting with any hostilities from the
+natives; and moved forwards in great form to a large tree, not far from
+the Negro village of Aldea, on a spot which had been chosen as a
+convenient situation for the intended fortress. A flag, bearing the royal
+arms of Portugal, was immediately displayed upon the tree, and an altar
+was placed under the shade of its boughs, at which the whole company
+united in assisting at the first mass that was celebrated in Guinea,
+offering up their solemn prayers to God for the speedy conversion of the
+idolatrous natives, and for the perpetual continuance and prosperity of
+the church which was to be erected on this spot. The day on which this
+impressive ceremony was performed being dedicated to St Sebastian, that
+name was given to the valley on which the tree stood, under which they
+were now assembled.
+
+Soon after the completion of this religious ceremony, Camaranca
+approached with a numerous train. Azambuja, sumptuously dressed, and
+ornamented by a rich golden collar, prepared to receive the Negro chief,
+seated on an elevated chair, having all his retinue arranged before him,
+so as to form an avenue. The Negroes were armed with spears, shields,
+bows, and arrows, and wore a kind of helmets made of skins, thickly
+studded with fish teeth, giving them a very martial appearance. The
+subordinate chiefs were distinguished by chains of gold hanging from
+their necks, and had various golden ornaments on their heads, and even on
+their beards. After the exchange of presents, and other tokens of mutual
+respect and confidence, Azambuja made a speech to Camaranca, through the
+mediation of an interpreter, in which he explained the purpose of his
+embassy and expedition, and used every argument he could think of, to
+conciliate the friendship of the Negro chief, to make him fully sensible
+of the power of the king of Portugal, and to reconcile him to the
+intended permanent establishment upon the toast. Camaranca listened to
+the harangue, and the explanation of it by the interpreter, in respectful
+silence, keeping his eyes steadily fixed on the countenance of Azambuja.
+After which, casting his eyes for some time on the ground, as if
+profoundly meditating on what he had heard, he is said to have made the
+following guarded and judicious answer:
+
+"I am fully sensible of the high honour done me on this occasion by your
+sovereign. I have always endeavoured to deserve his friendship, by
+dealing strictly with his subjects, and by constantly exerting myself to
+procure immediate ladings for their ships. Hitherto the Portuguese, who
+have visited my country, were meanly dressed, and easily satisfied with
+the commodities we had to give them; and so far from desiring to remain
+in the country, were always anxious to complete their cargoes, and to
+return whence they came. This day I observe a wonderful difference. A
+great number of persons, richly dressed, are eager for permission to
+build themselves houses, and to remain among us. But assuredly, persons
+of such rank, under the guidance of a commander who claims his descent
+from the God who created the day and the night, would never be able to
+endure the hardships of our climate, and could not procure in this
+country those luxuries they have been accustomed to in their own. Those
+passions which are common to all men, will certainly produce disputes
+between us; and it were much better that we should continue on the same
+footing as hitherto, allowing your ships to come and go as they have
+always done before; in which case, the desire of seeing each other
+occasionally, and of mutual intercourse in trade, will preserve peace
+between you and us. The sea and the land, which are always neighbours,
+are continually at variance, contending for the mastery; the sea always
+violently endeavouring to subdue the land, which, with equal obstinacy,
+defends itself against the encroachments of the sea."
+
+The prudential jealousy and distrust displayed on this occasion by
+Camaranca, astonished and perplexed the Portuguese commander; and it
+required the exercise of much address on his part, to prevail upon the
+Negro chief to allow the fulfilment of his orders, and to prevent the
+necessity of having recourse to violent measures. When the workmen were
+making preparations next day to lay the foundations of the intended
+fortress on the coast, they observed a large rock, which lay very
+commodious for serving them as a quarry, and accordingly proceeded to
+work it for that purpose. This happened unfortunately to be venerated by
+the Negroes as one of their Gods, and they immediately flew to arms in
+opposition against the sacrilegious violation of the sanctified rock, and
+many of the workmen were wounded, before the natives could be pacified by
+numerous presents. At length, after the constant labour of twenty days,
+the fort began to assume a formidable appearance, and received the name
+of _Fortaleza de San Jorge da Mina_, or Fort St George at Mina. In a
+church constructed within its walls, a solemn mass was appointed to be
+celebrated annually, in honour of Don Henry, Duke of Viseo, of
+illustrious memory. Azambuja continued governor of this place during two
+years and seven months, and was honoured, on his return to Portugal, with
+particular marks of royal favour. In 1486, King John bestowed on this new
+establishment all the privileges end immunities of a city.
+
+Impressed with the great advantages that might be derived to his kingdom,
+through the prosecution of the maritime discoveries in Africa, and more
+especially by opening a passage by sea to India, of which his hopes were
+now sanguine, the king of Portugal, who had now added to his titles that
+of _Lord of Guinea_, made application to the pope, as universal father
+and lord of Christendom, for a perpetual grant of all the countries which
+the Portuguese had already discovered, or should hereafter discover,
+towards the east, with a strict prohibition against the interference of
+any European State in that immense field of discovery, commerce, and
+colonization. The pope conceded this enormous grant, probably without the
+most distant idea of its extent and importance: not only prohibiting all
+Christian powers from intruding within those prodigious, yet indefinite
+bounds, which he had bestowed upon the crown of Portugal, but declaring,
+that all discoveries that were or might be made in contravention, should
+belong to Portugal. Hitherto, the Portuguese navigators, in the course of
+their discoveries along the shores of Western Africa, had been in use to
+erect _wooden_ crosses, as indications of their respective discoveries.
+But the king now ordered that they should erect _stone crosses_, about
+six feet high, inscribed with, the arms of Portugal, the name of the
+reigning sovereign, that of the navigator, and the date of the discovery.
+
+In the year 1484, Diego Cam or Cano proceeded beyond Cape St Catherine,
+in lat. 1 deg. 40' S. the last discovery of the reign of King Alphonso, and
+reached the mouth of a considerable river, in lat. 5 deg. 10' S. called
+_Zayre_ by the natives, now called Congo river, or the Rio Padron. Diego
+proceeded some distance up this river, till he met with some of the
+natives, but was unable to procure any satisfactory intelligence from
+them, as they were not understood by the Negro interpreters on board his
+ship. By means of signs, however, he understood that the country was
+under the dominion of a king who resided at a considerable distance from
+the coast, in a town or city called Banza, since named San Salvador by
+the Portuguese; on which he sent a party of his crew, conducted by the
+natives, carrying a considerable present far the king, and meaning to
+wait their return. Unavoidable circumstances, however, having protracted
+the return of his people far beyond the appointed time, Diego resolved to
+return into Portugal with an account of his discovery; and, having gained
+the confidence of the natives, he prevailed on four of them to embark
+with him, that they might be instructed in the Portuguese language, to
+serve as interpreters for future intercourse with this newly discovered
+region, and made the natives understand by means of signs, that, after
+the expiration of fifteen moons, these persons should be returned in
+safety.
+
+These Africans were men of some consequence in their own country, and
+were of such quick apprehensions, that they acquired a sufficient
+knowledge of the Portuguese language during the voyage back to Lisbon, as
+to be able to give a competent account of their own country, and of the
+kingdoms or regions beyond it, to the southwards. The king of Portugal
+was much gratified by this discovery, and treated the Africans brought
+over by Diego with much munificence. Next year, Diego Cam returned to the
+river of Congo, where he landed the four natives, who carried many
+presents from King John to their own sovereign, and were directed to
+express his anxious desire that he and his subjects would embrace the
+Christian faith.
+
+Having landed the Negroes, and received back his own men whom he had left
+on his former voyage, Diego proceeded to discover the coast to the
+southwards of the Congo river; leaving a respectful message for the king
+of Congo, that he must postpone the honour of paying his respects to him
+till his return from the south. The farther progress of Diego is very
+indefinitely related by the Portuguese historians; who say, that after a
+run of twenty leagues, he erected two stone crosses, as memorials of his
+progress, one at a cape called St Augustine, in lat. 13 deg. S. but the other
+on Cape Padron, in 22 deg. S. This last latitude would extend the discovery
+of Diego between the latitude of the Congo river and this high latitude,
+to 280 Portuguese leagues, instead of twenty. Besides, Cape Padron forms
+the southern point at the mouth of the river of Congo, and is only in lat.
+6 deg. 15' S. The high probability is, that the first cross erected by Diego
+Cam in this voyage, was at Cape Palmerinho, in lat. 9 deg. 15' S. and the
+other may have been at Rocca Boa, in lat. 13 deg. 20' S. Clarke[1] is
+disposed to extend the second cross to Cabo Negro, in lat. 16 deg. S. Either
+influenced by his provisions running short, or desirous of forming a
+friendly, connection with the king of Congo, Diego measured back his way
+to the Congo river, where he was received in a most satisfactory manner
+by the sovereign of that country. The reports of his subjects who had
+been in Portugal, and the liberal presents which they had brought to him
+from King John, had made a deep impression on the mind of this African
+monarch. He made many inquiries respecting the Christian religion, and
+being highly gratified by its sublime and consolatory doctrines, perhaps
+influenced by the reports his subjects had brought him of its magnificent
+ceremonies, he appointed one of his principal noblemen, named _Cacuta_ or
+_Zazut_, to accompany Diego Cam, as his ambassador to King John;
+anxiously requesting the king of Portugal to allow this nobleman and his
+attendants to be baptized, and that he would be pleased to send some
+ministers of his holy religion to convert him and his subjects from their
+idolatrous errors. Diego Cam arrived safely in Portugal with Cacuta; who
+was soon afterwards baptized by the name of _John Silva_, the king and
+queen of Portugal doing him the honour of attending on him as sponsors at
+the holy font; and the splendid ceremonial was closed by the baptism of
+his sable attendants.
+
+Some time previous to this event, Alphonso de Aviero carried an
+ambassador from the king of Benin to the king of Portugal, requesting
+that some missionaries might be sent for the conversion of his subjects;
+and, although the artful conduct of that African prince threw many
+difficulties in the way of this mission, many of the Negroes of that
+country were converted. From the ambassador of Benin, the king of
+Portugal received information of a powerful monarch, named _Organe_,
+whose territories lay at the distance of 250 leagues beyond the kingdom
+of Benin, and who possessed a supremacy over all the adjacent states.
+Assuming Cape Lopo Goncalves, in lat. 1 deg. S. as the southern boundary of
+the kingdom of Benin, 250 Portuguese leagues would bring us to the
+kingdom of Benguela, or that of Jaa Caconda, about lat. 14 deg. or 15 deg. S. Yet
+some persons have strangely supposed that this king _Organe_ or _Ogane_
+was a corruption of _Jan_ or _Janhoi_, the title given by the Christians
+of the east to the king of Abyssinia. "But it is very difficult to
+account for this knowledge of Abyssinia in the kingdom of Benin, not only
+on account of the distance, but likewise because several of the most
+savage nations in the world, the _Galla_ and _Shangalla_, occupy the
+intervening space. The court of Abyssinia did indeed then reside in
+_Shoa_, the south-east extremity of the kingdom; and, by its power and
+influence, might have pushed its dominion through these barbarians to the
+neighbourhood of Benin on the western ocean. But all this I must confess
+to be a mere conjecture of mine, of which, in the country itself, I never
+found the smallest confirmation[2]." To these observations of the
+celebrated Abyssinian traveller, it may be added, that the distance from
+Benin to Shoa exceeds six hundred Portuguese leagues.
+
+While the king of Portugal continued to encourage his navigators to
+proceed to the southwards in discovering the African coast, he became
+anxious lest some unexpected rival might interpose to deprive him of the
+expected fruits of these discoveries, which had occupied the unremitting
+attentions of his predecessors and himself for so many years. Learning
+that John Tintam and William Fabian, Englishmen, were preparing, at the
+instigation of the Duke of Medina Sidonia, in 1481, to proceed on a
+voyage to Guinea, he sent Ruy de Sousa as his ambassador, to Edward IV.
+of England, to explain the title which he held from the pope as lord of
+that country, and to induce him to forbid his subjects from navigating to
+the coast of Africa, in which negotiation he was completely successful.
+He likewise used every exertion to conceal the progress of his own
+navigators on the western coast of Africa, and to magnify the dangers of
+the voyage; representing that the coast was quite inhospitable,
+surrounded by most tremendous rocks, and inhabited by savage cannibals,
+and that no vessels could possibly live in those tempestuous seas, in
+which every quarter of the moon produced a furious storm, except those of
+a peculiar construction, which had been invented by the Portuguese ship-
+builders.
+
+A Portuguese pilot, who had often made the voyage to Guinea, had the
+temerity to assert, that any kind of ship could make this redoubted
+voyage, as safely as the royal caravels, and was sent for to court by the
+king, who gave him a public reprimand for his ignorance and presumption.
+Some months afterwards, the same pilot appeared again at court, and told
+the king, "That being of an obstinate disposition, he had attempted the
+voyage to Guinea in a different kind of vessel from those usually
+employed, and found it to be impossible." The king could not repress a
+smile at this solemn nonsense; yet honoured the politic pilot with a
+private audience, and gave him money to encourage him to propagate the
+deception. About this period, likewise, hearing that three Portuguese
+seamen, who were conversant in the navigation of the coast of Africa, had
+set out for Spain, intending to offer their services in that country,
+John immediately ordered them to be pursued as traitors. Two of them were
+killed, and the third was brought a prisoner to Evora, where he was broke
+on the wheel. Hearing that the Portuguese seamen murmured at the severity
+of this punishment, the king exclaimed, "Let every man abide by his own
+element, I love not travelling seamen."
+
+Encouraged by the successful progress of Diego Cam in 1484 and 1485, King
+John became sanguine in his hopes of completing the discovery of a
+maritime route to India, around the continent of Africa, and determined
+upon using every exertion for this purpose. His first views were to
+endeavour to procure some information respecting India, by means of a
+journey overland; and with this object, _Antonio de Lisboa_, a Franciscan
+friar, together with a nameless lay companion, were dispatched to make
+the attempt of penetrating into India, through Palestine and Egypt. But,
+being ignorant of the Arabic language, these men were unable to penetrate
+beyond Jerusalem, whence they returned into Portugal. Though disappointed
+in this attempt, by the ignorance or want of enterprise of his agents,
+his resolution was not to be repressed by difficulties, and he resolved
+upon employing fresh exertions both by sea and land, for the
+accomplishment of his enterprise. He accordingly fitted out a small
+squadron under Bartholomew Diaz, a knight of the royal household, to
+attempt the passage by sea.
+
+
+[1] Prog, of Mar. Disc. I. 329. note r.
+
+[2] Bruce's Abyssinia, II. 105.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Discovery of the Cape of Good Hope, by Bartholomew Diaz, in 1486_[1].
+
+For this important enterprise, Bartholomew Diaz was only supplied with
+two small caravels of fifty ton each, accompanied by a still smaller
+vessel, or tender, to carry provisions. Of these vessels, one was
+commanded by Bartholomew Diaz, as commodore, the second caravel by _Juan
+Infante_, another cavalier or gentleman of the court, and Pedro Diaz,
+brother to the commander in chief of the expedition, had charge of the
+tender. The preparations being completed, Bartholomew sailed in the end
+of August 1486, steering directly to the southwards.
+
+We have no relation of the particulars of this voyage, and only know that
+the first spot on which Diaz placed a stone pillar, in token of discovery
+and possession, was at _Sierra Parda_, in about 24 deg.40'S. which is said to
+have been 120 leagues farther to the south than any preceding navigator.
+According to the Portuguese historians, Diaz sailed boldly from this
+place to the southwards, in the open sea, and never saw the land again
+until he was forty leagues to the east of the Cape of Good Hope, which he
+had passed without being in sight of land. The learned geographer, Major
+Rennel, informs us, that Sir Home Popham and Captain Thompson, while
+exploring the western coast of Africa in 1786, found a marble cross, on
+which the arms of Portugal were engraved, in latitude 26 deg.37'S. near a bay
+named Angra Pequena: But, as the Portuguese long continued to frequent
+these coasts exclusively, and considered them all as belonging to their
+dominions under the papal grant, this latter cross, on which the
+inscription was not legible, may have been erected at a considerably
+subsequent period. At all events, the track of Diaz was far beyond the
+usual adventure of any former navigator, as he must have run a course of
+from seven to ten degrees of latitude, and at least between two or three
+degrees of longitude, in utterly unknown seas, without sight of land. The
+first land seen by Diaz is said to have been forty leagues to the
+eastward of the cape, where he came in sight of a bay on the coast, which
+he called _Angra de los Vaqueros_, or bay of herdsmen, from observing a
+number of cows grazing on the land. The distance of forty Portuguese
+leagues, would lead us to what is now called Struys bay, immediately east
+of Cabo das Agullias, which latter is in lat. 34 deg. 50' S. and long. 20 deg. 16'
+E. from Greenwich. From this place Diaz continued his voyage eastwards,
+to a small island or rock in the bay, which is now called Zwartkops or
+Algoa, in long. 27 deg. E. on which rocky islet he placed a stone cross or
+pillar, as a memorial of his progress, and named it, on that account,
+Santa Cruz, or _El Pennol de la Cruz_. In his progress to this place from
+the Angra de los Vaqueros, he had set some Negroes on shore in different
+places, who had been brought from Portugal for this purpose, and who were
+well clothed, that they might be respected by the natives. These Negroes
+were likewise provided with small assortments of toys for bartering with
+the natives, and were especially charged to make inquiry as to the
+situation and distance of the dominions of Prester John. Of the fate of
+these Negroes we are nowhere informed, but may be well assured they would
+receive no intelligence respecting the subject of their inquiry, from the
+ignorant Hottentots and Caffres of Southern Africa.
+
+It would appear that Diaz was still unconscious that he had reached and
+overpassed the extreme southern point of Africa, although now nearly nine
+degrees to the east of the Cape of Good Hope, and at least one degree
+back towards the north of his most southern range; but he may have
+supposed himself in a deep bite or bay of the coast, similar to the well-
+known gulf of Guinea. Under this impression, that he had not accomplished
+the grand object of his enterprize, he was anxious to continue his voyage
+still farther towards the east: But, as the provisions on board his two
+caravels were nearly exhausted, and the victualling tender under the
+command of his brother was missing, the crews of the caravels became
+exceedingly urgent to return, lest they might perish with famine. With
+some difficulty he prevailed on the people to continue their course about
+twenty-five leagues farther on, as he felt exceedingly mortified at the
+idea of returning to his sovereign without accomplishing the discovery on
+which he was sent. They accordingly reached the mouth of a river, which
+was discovered by Juan Infante, and was called from him, _Rio del
+Infante_, now known by the name of Great-Fish River, in about lat. 33 deg.27'
+N. long. 28 deg.20'E. The coast still trended towards the eastwards, with a
+slight inclination towards the north; so that, in an eastern course of
+about thirteen degrees, they had neared the north about six degrees,
+though still unsatisfied of having absolutely cleared the southern point
+of Africa.
+
+From this river, the extreme boundary of the present voyage, Diaz
+commenced his return homewards, and discovered, with great joy and
+astonishment, on their passage back, the long sought for and tremendous
+promontory, which had been the grand object of the hopes and wishes of
+Portuguese navigation during _seventy-four_ years, ever since the year
+1412, when the illustrious Don Henry first began to direct and incite his
+countrymen to the prosecution of discoveries along the western shores of
+Africa. Either from the distance which the caravels had been from the land,
+when they first altered their course to the eastwards, or from the cape
+having been concealed in thick fogs, it had escaped notice in the
+preceding part of the voyage. At this place Diaz erected a stone cross in
+memory of his discovery; and, owing to heavy tempests, which he
+experienced off the high table land of the Cape, he named it _Cabo dos
+Tormentos_, or Cape of storms; but the satisfaction which King John
+derived from this memorable discovery, on the return of Diaz to Portugal
+in 1487, and the hope which it imparted of having opened a sure passage by
+sea from Europe through the Atlantic into the Indian ocean, by which his
+subjects would now reap the abundant harvest of all their long and arduous
+labours, induced that sovereign to change this inauspicious appellation
+for one of a more happy omen, and he accordingly ordered that it should in
+future be called, _Cabo de boa Esperanca_, or Cape of Good Hope, which it
+has ever since retained.
+
+Soon after the discovery of the _Cape_, by which shorter name it is now
+generally preeminently distinguished, Diaz fell in with the victualler,
+from which he had separated nine months before. Of nine persons who had
+composed the crew of that vessel, six had been murdered by the natives of
+the west coast of Africa, and Fernand Colazzo, one of the three survivors,
+died of joy on again beholding his countrymen. Of the circumstances of the
+voyage home we have no account; but it is not to be doubted that Diaz and
+his companions would be honourably received by their sovereign, after a
+voyage of such unprecedented length and unusual success.
+
+
+[1] Clarke, I. 342.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Journey overland to India and Abyssinia, by Covilham and de Payva_[1].
+
+Soon after the departure of Diaz, King John dispatched Pedro de Covilham
+and Alphonso de Payva, both well versed in the Arabic language, with
+orders to travel by land into the east, for the discovery of the country
+of _Presbyter_, or _Prester John_, and to trace the steps of the lucrative
+commerce then carried on with India by the Venetians for spices and drugs;
+part of their instructions being to endeavour to ascertain the
+practicability of navigating round the south extremity of Africa to the
+famed marts of Indian commerce, and to make every possible inquiry into
+the circumstances of that important navigation. Some writers have placed
+this journey as prior in point of time to the voyage of Diaz, and have
+even imagined that the navigator was directed or instructed by the report
+which Covilham transmitted respecting India. Of the relation of this
+voyage by Alvarez, which Purchas published in an abbreviated form, from a
+translation out of the Italian in the collection of Ramusio, found among
+the papers of Hakluyt, Purchas gives the following character: "I esteem it
+true in those things which he saith he saw: In some others which he had by
+relation of enlarging travellers, or boasting Abassines, he may perhaps
+sometimes rather _mendacia dicere_, than _mentiri_." To _tell_ lies rather
+than _make_ them.
+
+Covilham, or Covillan, was born in a town of that name in Portugal, and
+went, when a boy, into Castile, where he entered the service of Don
+Alphonso, duke of Seville. On a war breaking out between Portugal and
+Castile, he returned into his native country, where he got into the
+household of King Alphonso, who made him a man-at-arms. After the death of
+that king, he was one of the guard of King John, who employed him on a
+mission into Spain, on account of his knowledge in the language. He was
+afterwards employed in Barbary, where he remained some time, and acquired
+the Arabic language, and was employed to negotiate a peace with the king
+of Tremesen. He was a second time sent into Barbary on a mission to King
+_Amoli-bela-gegi_, to procure restitution of the bones of the infant Don
+Fernando, in which he was successful.
+
+After his return, he was joined in commission, as before-mentioned, with
+Alphonso de Payva, and these adventurous travellers left Lisbon in May
+1487. Covilham was furnished with a very curious map for these times, by
+the Prince Emanuel, afterwards king of Portugal, which had been copied and
+composed, with great care and secrecy, by the licentiate Calzadilla,
+afterwards bishop of Viseo, assisted by Doctor Rodrigo, and a Jewish
+physician named Moses; which map asserted the practicability of passing by
+sea to India round the southern extremity of Africa, on some obscure
+information which had been collected by those who constructed it.
+
+With a supply of 500 crowns in money, and a letter of credit, or bills of
+exchange, Covilham and De Payva went first to Naples, where their bills of
+exchange were paid by the son of _Cosmo de Medici_. From Naples they went
+by sea to the island of Rhodes, and thence to Alexandria in Egypt, whence
+they travelled as merchants to Grande Cairo, and proceeded with the
+caravan to _Tor_[2] on the Red Sea, near the foot of Mount Sinai. They
+here received some information respecting the trade which then subsisted
+between Egypt and Calicut, and sailed from that place to Aden, a trading
+city of Yemen, on the outside of the Straits of Babelmandeb. The
+travellers here separated; Covilham embarking in one vessel for India,
+while De Payva took his passage in another vessel bound for Suakem on the
+Abyssinian coast of the Red Sea, having engaged to rejoin each other at
+Cairo, after having carried the directions of their sovereign into effect.
+
+The Moorish ship from Aden in which Covilham had embarked, landed him at
+Cananor on the coast of Malabar, whence, after some stay, he went to
+Calicut and Goa, being the first of the Portuguese nation who had
+navigated the Indian ocean; having seen pepper and ginger, and heard of
+cloves and cinnamon. From India he went by sea to Sofala on the eastern
+coast of Africa, where he is said to have examined the gold mines, and
+where he procured some information respecting the great island of
+Madagascar, called by the Moors the _Island of the Moon_. With the
+various and valuable information he had now acquired, relative to the
+productions of India and their marts, and of the eastern coast of Africa,
+he now determined to return to Egypt, that he might be able to
+communicate his intelligence to Portugal. At Cairo he was met by
+messengers from King John, informing him that Payva had been murdered,
+and directing him to go to Ormuz and the coast of Persia, in order to
+increase his stock of commercial knowledge. The two messengers from the
+king of Portugal whom Covilham met with at Cairo, were both Jewish rabbis,
+named Abraham of Beja and Joseph of Lamego. The latter returned into
+Portugal with letters from Covilham, giving an account of his
+observations, and assuring his master that the ships which sailed to the
+coast of Guinea, might be certain of finding a termination of the African
+Continent, by persisting in a southerly course; and advising, when they
+should arrive in the _eastern ocean_, to inquire for Sofala and the
+Island of the Moon.
+
+Covilham and Rabbi Abraham went from Cairo, probably by sea, to Ormuz and
+the coast of Persia, whence they returned in company to Aden. From that
+place, Abraham returned by the way of Cairo to Portugal with the
+additional information which had been collected in their voyage to the
+Gulf of Persia; though some authors allege that Joseph was the companion
+of this voyage, and that he returned from Bassora by way of the desert to
+Aleppo, and thence to Portugal.
+
+From Aden, Covilham crossed the straits of Babelmandeb to the south-
+eastern coast of Abyssinia, where he found Alexander the king, or negus,
+at the head of an army, levying tribute or contributions from his
+rebellious subjects of the southern provinces of his dominions. Alexander
+received Covilham with kindness, but more from motives of curiosity than
+for any expectations of advantage that might result from any connection
+or communication with the kingdom of Portugal. Covilham accompanied the
+king to Shoa, where the seat of the Abyssinian government was then
+established; and from a cruel policy, which subsists still in Abyssinia,
+by which strangers are hardly ever permitted to quit the country,
+Covilham never returned into Europe. Though thus doomed to perpetual
+exile in a strange and barbarous land, Covilham was well used. He married,
+and obtained ample possessions, enjoying the favour of several successive
+kings of Abyssinia, and was preferred to some considerable offices in the
+government. Frequent epistolary intercourse took place between him and
+the king of Portugal, who spared no expence to keep open the interesting
+correspondence. In his dispatches, Covilham described the several ports
+which he had visited in India; explained the policy and disposition of
+the several princes; and pointed out the situation and riches of the gold
+mines of Sofala; exhorting the king to persist, unremittingly and
+vigorously, in prosecuting the discovery of the passage to India around
+the southern extremity of Africa, which he asserted to be attended with
+little danger, and affirmed that the cape was well known in India. He is
+said to have accompanied his letters and descriptions with a chart, in
+which the cape and all the cities on the coast of Africa were exactly
+represented, which he had received in India from a Moor. Covilham was
+afterwards seen by, and intimately acquainted with Francesco Alvarez, his
+historian, who was sent on an embassy into Abyssinia by Emmanuel king of
+Portugal. Alvarez, who appears to have been a priest, calls Covilham his
+spiritual son, and says that he had been thirty-three years in great
+credit with _Prette Janni_, so he calls the king of Abyssinia, and all
+the court, during all which time he had never confessed his sins, except
+to GOD in secret, because the priests of that country were not in use to
+keep secret what had been committed to them in confession. This would
+protract the residence of Covilham in Abyssinia, at least to the year
+1521, or 1522; but how long he may have lived there afterwards does not
+appear.
+
+
+[1] Clarke, i. 384. Purchas, II. 1091.
+
+[2] El Tor is on the Arabian coast of the Red Sea, near the mouth of the
+    Bahr Assuez, or Gulf of Suez, in lat. 28 deg. 10' N. long. 33 deg. 36' E.--E.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+HISTORY OF THE DISCOVERY AND CONQUEST OF INDIA BY THE PORTUGUESE, BETWEEN
+THE YEARS 1497 AND 1525: FROM THE ORIGINAL PORTUGUESE OF HERMAN LOPES DE
+CASTANEDA.
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+Although, in strict conformity to chronological arrangement, the
+discovery of America by COLUMBUS in 1492, ought to precede our account of
+the discovery of the maritime route from Europe to India by the
+Portuguese, which did not take place until the year 1498; it yet appears
+more regular to follow out the series of Portuguese navigation and
+discovery to its full completion, than to break down that original and
+vast enterprise into fragments. We might indeed have stopt with the first
+voyage of De Gama, which effected the discovery of India: But as the
+contents of this Chapter consists of what may be considered an authentic
+original record, and carries on the operations of the Portuguese in India
+to the year 1525, it seemed preferable to retain this curious original
+history entire. It is obvious that Castaneda must have used the original
+journals of De Gama, and other early Portuguese commanders, or of some
+persons engaged in the voyages and transactions; as he often forgets the
+historical language, and uses the familiar diction of a person actually
+engaged, as will appear in many passages of this Chapter.
+
+The title of this original document, now first offered to the public in
+modern English, is "_The first Booke of the Historie of the Discoverie
+and Conquest of the East Indias by the Portingals, in the time of King
+Don John, the second of that name. By Hernan Lopes de Castaneda;
+translated into English by Nicholas Lichefield, and dedicated to Sir
+Fraunces Drake. Imprinted at London by Thomas East, 1582_."
+
+Though the transactions here recorded are limited in the title to the
+reign of John II. they occupied the reigns of his immediate successor
+Emmanuel, or Manuel, and of John III. Castanedas history was printed in
+black letter at Coimbra, in eight volumes folio, in the years 1552, 1553,
+and 1554, and is now exceedingly scarce. In 1553, a translation of the
+first book was made into French by Nicolas de Grouchy, and published at
+Paris in quarto. An Italian translation was published at Venice in two
+volumes quarto, by Alfonso Uloa, in 1578[1]. That into English by
+Lichefield, employed on the present occasion, is in small quarto and
+black-letter. The voyage of De Gama is related by De Barros in his work,
+entitled Da Asia, and has been described by Osorius, Ramusio, Maffei, and
+de Faria. Purchas gives a brief account of it, I. ii. 26. The beautiful
+poem of the Lusiad by Camoens, the Portuguese Homer, is dedicated to the
+celebration of this important transaction, and is well known through an
+elegant translation into English by Mickle. In the present chapter, the
+curious and rare work of Castaneda, so far as his first book extends, is
+given entire; and the only freedom employed in this version, besides
+changing the English of 229 years ago into the modern and more
+intelligible language, has Been to prune a quaint verbosity, mistaken by
+Lichefield for rhetorical eloquence. The dedication of the early
+translator to the celebrated Sir Francis Drake, is preserved in its
+original dress, as a sufficient specimen of the language of England at
+the close of the sixteenth century.
+
+
+DEDICATION.
+
+    _To the right Worshipfull
+    Sir Fraunces Drake, Knight,
+    N, L, G, wisheth all prosperitie._
+
+    They haue an auncient custome in Persia (the which is also observed
+    throughout all Asia) that none will enterprise to visit the king,
+    noble man, or perticularly any other person of countenance, but he
+    carieth with him some thing to present him with all worthy of thanks,
+    the which is not onely done in token of great humilitie & obedience,
+    but also of a zealous loue & friendly affection to their superiours &
+    welwillers. So I (right worshipfull following this Persian president)
+    hauing taking vpon me this simple translation out of the Portingale
+    tongue, into our English language, am bold to present & dedicate the
+    same vnto you as a signification of my entire good will. The history
+    conteineth the discouerie and conquest of the East Indias, made by
+    sundry worthy captaines of the Portengales, in the time of King Don
+    Manuel, & of the King Don John, the second of that name, with the
+    description, not onely of the country, but also of every harbour
+    apperteining to every place whervnto they came, & of the great
+    resistance they found in the same, by reson wherof there was sundry
+    great battles many times fought, and likewise of the commodities &
+    riches that euery of these places doth yeeld. And for that I know your
+    worship, with great peril and daunger haue past these monstrous and
+    bottomlesse sees, am therfore the more encouraged to desire & pray
+    your worships patronage & defence therof, requesting you with all to
+    pardon those imperfections, which I acknowledge to be very many, & so
+    much the more, by reason of my long & many years continuance in
+    foreine countries. Howbeit, I hope to have truly observed the literal
+    sence & full effect of the history, as the author setteth it forth,
+    which if it may please you to peruse & accept in good part, I shall be
+    greatly emboldened to proceede & publish also the second & third booke,
+    which I am assured will neither be vnpleasant nor vnprofitable to the
+    readers. Thus alwaies wishing your good worship such prosperous
+    continuance and like fortunate successe as GOD hath hitherto sent you
+    in your dangerous trauaile & affayres, and as maye euery waye content
+    your owne heartes desire, doe euen so take my leaue. From London the
+    fifth of March. 1582.
+
+    Your worships alwayes to commaund,
+    _Nicholas Lichefild._
+
+
+[1] Bibl. des Voyages, V. 2.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+DEDICATION BY CASTANEDA.
+
+    _To
+    The most high and mighty Prince,
+    John III.
+
+    King of Portugal and Algarve,
+    &c._
+
+    It hath seemed to me, most high and mighty prince, our dread king and
+    sovereign, so important and weighty a matter to undertake a history of
+    the great and valiant actions which our Portuguese have performed in
+    the discovery and conquest of India, that I often thought to
+    relinquish the attempt. But as these noble deeds were principally
+    undertaken and performed for the glory of Almighty God, the conversion
+    of the barbarous nations to the Christian faith, and the great honour
+    of your highness; and as, by the power and mercy of the Omnipotent,
+    such fortunate success has been granted to these famous enterprises, I
+    have been encouraged to proceed. I therefore trust entirely to the aid
+    and comfort of the divine goodness in publishing this work, giving the
+    glory thereof to God alone, and its earthly praise to your excellent
+    highness, and the king Don Manuel your father, of famous and happy
+    memory.
+
+    Although these glorious deeds are well known and spread abroad over
+    the world, they yet cannot be sufficiently made manifest unless set
+    forth in writing, by means of which their memory may endure for ever,
+    and remain always as if present to the readers; as history hath
+    perpetuated the actions of the Greeks and Romans which are of such
+    high antiquity. Of other transactions, nothing inferior to theirs,
+    perhaps even far greater, which have been performed by other nations,
+    there is little or no memory, because these do not remain recorded by
+    history: Such are those of the Assyrians, Medes and Persians; of the
+    Africans against the Romans; of the Suevi against Julius Caesar; of
+    the Spaniards in recovering their country from the Moors; and
+    principally of these invincible and pious kings of Portugal, your
+    glorious ancestors, Don Alonso Henriques, Don Sancho his son, and Don
+    Alonso, who acquired the kingdoms of Portugal and Algarve by great and
+    wonderful deeds of arms. Of all which, there hardly remaineth any
+    memory, for want of having been duly recorded by writing. So likewise
+    of those actions which have been performed in India, only as it were
+    of yesterday, the exact memory of them is confined to four persons;
+    and if they were to die, all remembrance of these transactions must
+    have ended to their great dishonour. Considering these things, I
+    resolved to record these noble deeds which the subjects of your
+    highness have performed in the discovery and conquest of India, which
+    have never been surpassed in valour, or even equalled, in any age or
+    country. Leaving all mention of the conquests of Cyrus and other
+    barbarians, and even taking into the account the deeds of Alexander,
+    so famous over all the world, which are as nothing compared to what
+    has been performed since India became frequented by the Portuguese, no
+    more than a dead lion can be likened to one alive. The conquests of
+    Alexander were all by land, and achieved by himself in person, against
+    nations who were little trained or accustomed to feats of arms. But
+    the Portuguese conquest of India was performed by the captains of your
+    highness, after a voyage by sea of a year and eight months, going
+    almost around the globe, from the utmost limits of the west through
+    the vast and bottomless ocean, seeing only the heaven and the water; a
+    thing never before attempted by man, and hardly even imagined. After
+    surmounting hunger and thirst, and daily exposure to furious storms,
+    and a thousand dangers in the voyage; they had to encounter great and
+    cruel battles on their arrival in India; not against men armed only
+    with bows and spears, as in the time of Alexander, but with people of
+    stout and tried courage and experienced in war, having ordinance and
+    fire-workers more numerous even than the Portuguese, besides many
+    other excellent weapons. The power of these men, against whom the
+    subjects of your highness had to contend, was infinitely greater than
+    that of King Porus, against whom Alexander had to encounter; yet the
+    Portuguese, though few in number, uniformly had the victory, and never
+    retired from the war as was done by Alexander.
+
+    Leaving the actions of the Greeks, and considering what was performed
+    by the Romans with their innumerable armies and vast fleets, which
+    seemed to cover the face of the sea, and by means of which they
+    thought to have conquered the whole earth. Yet they never adventured
+    beyond the Red Sea; neither was the greatest of their famous victories
+    comparable to those battles which have been fought by our men in India;
+    in which, most invincible prince, the great prosperity of your father
+    and you is well known. As, without moving from your palace,
+    discoveries and conquests have been achieved by your captains, more
+    extensive than ever were discovered or conquered by any prince in
+    person. There never was any conquest, either by the Barbarians, Greeks,
+    or Romans, of any thing like equal difficulty with this of India;
+    neither any kings or captains of any of these nations equal in valour
+    and conduct to those of your father and yourself, as will manifestly
+    appear from the whole tenor of the following history.
+
+    The great actions which the subjects of your highness have worthily
+    accomplished, must be deemed to have been permitted and appointed by
+    the providence of God; that so those barbarians, with their vain idols,
+    and the false sectaries of Mahomet, might be brought into the catholic
+    faith, as at this time great numbers have been added to the Christian
+    religion. For, since these great exploits, your highness, as a most
+    godly and Christian prince, hath taken especial care, and hath given
+    command that the Christian doctrine of the _brotherhood of the company
+    of Jesus_ should be taught in India, which you ordered to be brought
+    from Rome, and have always supported at your expence. Thus likewise,
+    you have erected, and founded the noble and sumptuous university of
+    Coimbra, to augment the honour and reputation of your kingdom; where,
+    besides many divines and colleges of poor begging friars to expound
+    the evangelical law, there are temporal men also to instruct those of
+    your subjects that defend and enlarge the commonwealth by deeds of
+    arms, and those who adorn the same by means of learning.
+
+    All these heroic virtues of your highness being well known to me, have
+    encouraged me to publish this work and others, which have some taste
+    of learning, that they may remain a perpetual memorial of the noble
+    deeds of so many gentlemen and knights of Portugal, your subjects. In
+    this I have been much forwarded by having been in India, where I
+    sojourned with my father, who was sent into that country by your
+    highness as a judge. I spent all my youth in the pursuit of learning,
+    and in the study of ancient historians. Being in India, I set myself
+    with all diligence to learn and understand all that had been done in
+    regard to the discovery and conquest of that country by the Portuguese,
+    with the intention of making the same known and common to all men. By
+    my inquiries, and through the information derived from sundry
+    gentlemen and captains, both such as were actually present in the
+    various transactions, and employed in their execution, as by others
+    who were engaged in counselling and preparing the means of their being
+    performed, I have derived much authentic information; as, likewise, by
+    the perusal of many letters and memorials, which were written by men
+    of credit and reputation, all of which I have examined as evidences of
+    the authenticity of my work, both while in India and since my return
+    into Portugal. As the matters I meant to write of were many, so it
+    became necessary for me to acquire information from many sources; and
+    as those whom I examined were upon oath, it is lawful for me to bring
+    them forward as sure evidence. In these researches some of these men
+    had to be sought after in almost every part of Portugal; and being
+    separated in sundry places, my inquiries have occasioned great travel
+    of my person, and much expence; to which I have devoted the greater
+    part of my life, and have constituted the preparation for this work my
+    sole recreation. Since my residence in the university of Coimbra, in
+    the service of your highness, I have joined together all these
+    informations; which, together with the duties of my office, have
+    caused much toil both of body and mind. Having now accomplished the
+    composition of this book and others, I most humbly offer the same to
+    your highness; and, after many and most fortunate years of governing,
+    I pray God to take you from the transitory seignory of this earth, and
+    to receive you into the perpetual joys of Heaven.
+
+    _Hernan Lopes de Castaneda._
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Previous steps taken by the King of Portugal, John II. preparatory to
+the Discovery of India._
+
+Don John, the second of that name, and thirteenth king of Portugal,
+considering that all spices, drugs, precious stones, and other riches
+which came from Venice, were brought out of the east, and being a prince
+of great penetration, and high emprize, he was greatly desirous to
+enlarge his kingdom, and to propagate the knowledge of the Christian
+faith to distant regions. He resolved, therefore, to discover the way by
+sea to the country whence such prodigious riches were brought, that his
+subjects might thereby be enriched, and that his kingdom might acquire
+those commodities which had hitherto been brought by way of Venice. He
+was much encouraged to this enterprise, by learning that there were
+Christians in India, governed by a powerful monarch called Presbyter John,
+who was reported to be a Christian prince, and to whom he thought proper
+to send ambassadors, that an intercourse of friendship might be
+established between them and their subjects. He consulted, therefore,
+with the cosmographers of the time, whom he directed to proceed according
+to the example already given in sailing along the coast of Guinea, which
+had been formerly discovered by command of the prince his uncle, Master
+of the order of Christ. Accordingly, Bartholomew Diaz, one of the
+officers of the royal storehouse at Lisbon, was sent upon this expedition,
+who discovered that great and monstrous cape, now called of Good Hope,
+which was unknown to our ancestors. Finding it both terrible and
+dangerous, he yet passed 140 leagues beyond, to a river which he named
+_Rio del Infante_, whence he returned into Portugal. In this voyage, Diaz
+gave those names which they still retain, to the ports, harbours, and
+rivers where he took in fresh water, and erected certain marks, with
+crosses, and the royal arms of Portugal, the last of which was placed on
+a rock named _El pennol de la Cruz_, fifteen leagues on this side of the
+before mentioned river. Diaz returned from this voyage without having
+procured any intelligence concerning India, as all the inhabitants of the
+coast which he visited and discovered were ignorant black savages.
+
+On the return of Diaz, king John resolved to attempt the discovery of
+India by land; for which purpose he had formerly sent friar Antonio de
+Lisboa by land, in company with a lay person; but as they were ignorant
+of the Arabic language, they could not travel into those parts, and went
+no farther than Jerusalem, whence they returned into Portugal, without
+having acquired any knowledge of the object of their journey. Yet the
+king continued to prosecute this discovery of India by land, for which he
+employed two of his own servants, Pedro de Covillian and Alonso de Payva,
+both versant in the Arabic language, who were instructed to search out
+the dominions of Presbyter John, and the country whence the spices and
+drugs were brought to Venice, and to inquire whether there were any
+navigation from the southern extremity of Africa to India. To these men
+he gave a chart, which was extracted from a map of the world, by
+Calsadilla, bishop of Viseo, an eminent astronomer. He gave them likewise
+a general letter of credit and safe conduct, requiring them to be
+assisted and protected, and supplied with money, in whatever kingdoms or
+countries they might travel; ordering them to receive 400 crowns from the
+chest of the orchard of Almeryn, for their charges. Of this sum, they
+took what they deemed necessary to bear their expences till their arrival
+at Valentia in Arragon, placing the rest in the bank of Bartholomew of
+Florence, to be repaid at Valentia.
+
+Receiving their audience of leave from King John, in presence of Don
+Manuel, duke of Viseo, afterwards king, they departed from Santaxen on
+the 7th May 1487, and came to Naples on St Johns day of that year; whence
+they were forwarded by the sons of Cosmo de Medici, and went to Rhodes,
+and thence to Alexandria. From this place they travelled as merchants to
+Cairo, whence they went in company with certain Moors of Fez and Tremesen
+to Toro, a harbour on the Arabian coast of the Red Sea. They here learned
+many things respecting the Indies, and of the trade from the Red Sea to
+Calicut; and, going from Toro to a place on the coast of Ethiopia, they
+went to the port of Aden. The travellers here separated, Alonso de Payva
+passing over to the emperor of Ethiopia, erroneously called Presbyter
+John: For he, of whom Marco Polo speaks, under that title, as governing
+all the Indies, and whose country joins with the great khan of Kathay,
+was vanquished and slain in a battle by that sovereign; at which time his
+kingdom was put an end to, and no one of that race or title has since
+reigned. Yet Alonso de Payva actually believed that the emperor of
+Ethiopia was Presbyter John, having learnt that he was a Christian king
+over a Christian nation, as shall be more particularly declared hereafter.
+At their separation they agreed to meet again at Cairo, when each had
+executed his part of the royal orders.
+
+Pedro de Covillian sailed from Aden for the Indies, in a ship belonging
+to the Moors of Cananor, and went to Calicut and the island of Goa, where
+he acquired complete information respecting the spices of India, the
+commodities which come from other places, and the towns of the Indies;
+the names of all which he inserted, but ill written, in his chart. From
+India he went to Sofala, where he procured information respecting the
+great island of St Lawrence, called the Island of the Moon by the Moors.
+Observing that the natives of Sofala were black, like those of Guinea, he
+concluded, that all the coast between was under subjection to the Negroes,
+and consequently that navigation was practicable from Guinea to Sofala,
+and thence to the Indies. Returning from Sofala, he went to Ormus, and
+thence to Cairo, where he learnt that Alonso de Payva was dead, and meant
+to have returned to Portugal. He chanced to meet at Cairo two Spanish
+jews, Rabbi Abraham, a native of Viseo, and Joseph, born in Lamego; who,
+after the departure of Covillian and Payva from Portugal, had told the
+king that they had been in Cairo, where they had received much
+information concerning Ormus, and of its trade with the Indies. From
+these Jews Covillian received letters from the king, directed to him and
+Payva, ordering them to return along with the Jews, if they had seen all
+that he had given them in charge. If they had not executed all his
+original instructions, they were now directed to send by the Jews an
+exact account of all the knowledge they had acquired, and to use their
+utmost efforts to visit Presbyter John, and to give all the information
+in their power respecting Ormus, to Rabbi Abraham, who had sworn by his
+law not to return to Portugal without visiting that place.
+
+On receiving these letters, Covillian changed his intention of returning
+into Portugal, and dispatched Joseph there with letters to the king,
+giving an account of all that he had seen and learnt in India and Sofala,
+and transmitted the chart on which he had inserted all the places he had
+visited. In these letters he informed the king that the emperor of
+Ethiopia was assuredly the same with Presbyter John; but my opinion is
+that this is an error, as this sovereign has no such name in his own
+dominions, as I shall more clearly shew hereafter. On the departure of
+Joseph, Covillian and Rabbi Abraham went to Ormus, and thence back to the
+Red Sea; whence Covillian sent Abraham into Portugal, with letters to the
+king, containing all the information acquired in this part of the
+expedition, and intimating his determination to go into the dominions of
+Presbyter John. This he accordingly did, and came to the presence of the
+then emperor of Ethiopia, named Alexander, to whom he delivered the
+letters with which he had been entrusted by the king of Portugal for that
+monarch. Alexander received him courteously, and seemed much pleased with
+the letters of the king of Portugal, as being from so very distant a
+Christian prince, yet did not seem to attach much credit or importance to
+them. But he gave all honour, and many gifts to Covillian.
+
+When Covillian was ready to depart from Ethiopia, and awaited leave for
+that purpose, which he had solicited, Alexander died, and was succeeded
+by a new emperor named _Nahu_, who could never be prevailed on to allow
+of his departure; neither could he procure leave for that purpose from
+the next emperor, David, the son of Nahu, so that Covillian had to remain
+in Ethiopia, and never returned into Portugal. From that time King John
+never heard more of him, and therefore concluded that he was dead;
+nothing having ever been received from him respecting his travels, except
+what was contained in the letters carried by the Jews, as before
+mentioned.
+
+There came afterwards to Lisbon, a friar from this country of Presbyter
+John, who was received courteously by the king, and on whose reports of
+great things concerning that country, the king determined to proceed in
+making a discovery of the way to the Indies by sea. He accordingly gave
+orders to John de Braganca, his surveyor of the forests, to cut down
+timber for building two small ships for that voyage. But King John died,
+and was succeeded by King Manuel, of glorious memory, who had been chosen
+by Divine Providence to accomplish the discovery of these countries, by
+which the Christian faith hath been greatly extended, the royal house of
+Portugal much honoured, and the subjects wonderfully enriched.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Narrative of the first Voyage of Vasco de Gama to India and back, in the
+years 1497, 1498, and 1499_.
+
+On the death of King John, he was succeeded by Don Manuel, a prince of a
+great mind, bent upon high enterprise, and prone to undertake and execute
+things beyond the ordinary reach of human knowledge, even more than was
+Alexander the Great. Being exceedingly desirous to prosecute the
+discovery of the Indies, which had been begun by his predecessor, and
+proceeding upon the information left him by King John, relative to that
+navigation, he commanded Fernan Lorenzo, treasurer of the house of Mina,
+to cause construct two ships for this voyage, from the timber which had
+been provided by King John. These were named the Angel Gabriel and the
+San Raphael, the former being of the burden of 120 tons, the latter 100.
+In addition to these, a caravel of 50 tons, called the Berrio, and a ship
+of 200 tons were purchased. In the year 1497, the king appointed Vasco de
+la Gama, as chief captain for the voyage, an experienced navigator, who
+had done great service, and a man of great valour, well fitted for
+executing the great enterprize intended by the king. Paulo de la Gama,
+brother to the captain-general, and Nicholas Coello, both men of valour
+and enterprise, were appointed the other captains of the squadron.
+Bartholomew Diaz was likewise commanded to accompany the squadron of
+discovery in a caravel to the Mirna: And as the three ships of war
+appointed for the voyage could not contain a sufficient supply of
+provisions for their crews, the ship of 200 tons, which had been
+purchased from Ayres Correa, was ordered to accompany de Gama to a place
+called St Blaze, at which the squadron was to take in water, where the
+victuals with which she was loaded were to be distributed to the other
+ships, after which she was ordered to be burnt.
+
+Having received their orders, Vasco de la Gama and the other captains
+took their leave of the king at _Monte mayor_, and departed for Lisbon,
+where he embarked his company of 148 persons, at Belem, on Saturday the
+8th of July 1497. At this embarkation all the religious belonging to the
+church of our Lady at Belem, went in procession in their cowls, bare-
+headed, and carrying wax candles, praying for the success of the
+expedition; accompanied by almost the whole people of Lisbon, weeping and
+deploring the fate of those who now embarked, as devoted to certain death
+in the attempt of so dangerous a voyage. Thus commended to God and good
+fortune, the officers and crews embarked and immediately set sail. Vasco
+de la Gama, the captain-general, took the command in the Angel Gabriel,
+of which Pedro de Alenquer was pilot, who had been in the same capacity
+with Diaz when he passed the Cape of Good Hope, and discovered the _Rio
+del Infante_. Paulo de Gama went captain of the San Raphael, Nicholas
+Coello of the caravel Berrio, and Gonsalo Gomes[1], a servant of Vasco de
+la Gama, commanded the large victualling ship. The captain-general gave
+out instructions, that in case of separation, they should keep their
+course for Cape Verd, which was appointed as their rendezvous.
+
+Proceeding on the voyage, they came in sight of the Canaries in eight
+days, whence steering for Rio de Oro, they were separated by a tempest,
+during an exceedingly dark night, on which they all shaped their course
+for Cabo Verde. Paulo de la Gama, Nicholas Coello, Bartholomew Diaz, and
+Gonsalo Gomes rejoined, and sailed together for eight days, when they
+came in sight of the captain-general on Wednesday evening, and saluted
+him with many guns, and the sound of trumpets, all heartily rejoicing for
+their safe meeting and good fortune in this their first essay of danger.
+Next day, being the 20th of July[2], the fleet reached the islands of St
+Jago, and came to anchor in the bay of Santa Maria, where it remained
+seven days, taking in fresh water, and repairing the yards and other
+parts of their rigging which had been damaged in the late storm. On
+Tuesday the 3d of August[3], the captain-general went on his voyage,
+after taking leave of Diaz, who now returned to Portugal. Proceeding for
+the Cape of Good Hope with all his squadron, de la Gama _entered the gulf
+into the sea_[4], and sailed all August, September, and October,
+suffering many great tempests of violent wind and rain, so that they
+often expected instant death. At length, on Saturday the 4th November,
+they got sight of land at nine in the forenoon, at which they were
+greatly rejoiced; and being all together, the captains saluted the
+general, all dressed in their best array, and having their ships all
+decorated with flags. Not knowing the coasts they sailed along until the
+Tuesday following, when they had a perfect view of a low shore, in which
+was a great bay, that appeared convenient for the ships to take in water,
+into which they all entered and came to anchor. This place was afterwards
+named _Angra de Santa Elena_, or St Helen's bay[5]. The people of the
+country, as our men afterwards found, were small, black, ill-favoured
+savages, clothed in the skins of beasts, somewhat like French cloaks,
+having curious wrought wooden cases for their privities; and in speaking
+they seemed always, sighing. These natives were armed with oak staves,
+hardened in the fire, pointed with the horns of beasts, somewhat burnt or
+hardened with fire, which served them for swords. They lived on the roots
+of herbs, and on sea wolves and whales, which are very numerous in this
+country, likewise on sea crows and gulls. They also eat of certain beasts,
+which they call Gazelas, and other beasts and birds which the land
+produces; and they have dogs which bark like those of Portugal. The
+general, after the squadron was brought to anchor, sent Coello in a boat
+along the shore, in search of water, which he found four leagues from the
+anchoring ground, at a place which he named St. Jago,[6] whence all the
+ships provided themselves with fresh water.
+
+Next day, the general with the other captains, escorted by some of the
+people, went on shore to view the natives, and to endeavour to learn what
+distance the Cape of Good Hope was from thence; for the chief pilot, who
+had been on the voyage with Diaz, had departed thence on returning, in
+the morning, into the open sea, with a fair wind, and had passed it
+during the night, and had not come near the shore when outward bound;
+wherefore he did not certainly know its situation, nor was he acquainted
+with its appearance, but conjectured it might be thirty leagues from
+where they then were at the utmost. When the general was on shore, he
+overtook one of the natives, who was going to gather honey at the foot of
+a bush, where it is deposited by the bees without any hive. With this
+person, he returned to the ship, thinking to have got an interpreter, but
+no one on board the squadron could understand his language. The general
+commanded this man to have meat and drink, and set him on shore next day
+well dressed, that he might return satisfied to his countrymen.
+Accordingly, the day following, this man came down to the shore abreast
+of the ships, with about fifteen more natives, and the general went
+ashore, carrying with him spices, gold, and pearls, to try if these
+people had any knowledge of these things. But from the little estimation
+with which these articles were viewed, it was concluded that the natives
+had no knowledge of them. The general distributed among the natives some
+small bells, tin rings, counters, and such toys, which they received
+joyfully; and from that time till next Saturday morning, great numbers of
+the natives resorted to the fleet, whence they went back to their towns.
+One Fernan Veloso craved leave of the general to accompany the natives to
+their habitations, that he might see their manner of living. On going
+along with them, the natives took a sea wolf which they roasted at the
+foot of a hill for their supper, after which they made Veloso return to
+the fleet, and it appeared to him that the natives had armed themselves,
+meaning to attack our people. On his return, Veloso saw that he was
+secretly followed, wherefore he hastened to the shore and hailed the
+ships. On this, the general who was then at supper, looked out towards
+the land, where he saw numbers of the savages following Veloso. He
+therefore gave orders for all the ships to be in readiness against an
+attack, and went himself on shore with several others unarmed, not
+dreading any harm. On seeing our boats coming towards the shore, the
+savages began to run away with much clamour; but when our people landed,
+they returned and set upon them furiously, throwing their darts, and
+using other weapons, which constrained our people to take to their boats
+in all haste, taking Veloso along with them; yet in this scuffle the
+general and three others were wounded. The Negroes returned to their
+towns; and during four days after, while our ships remained in the bay,
+they never saw any more of the natives, so that they had no opportunity
+to revenge the injury they had done.
+
+"Some commerce took place between the Portuguese and the Hottentot
+natives around St Elena Bay, by means of signs and gestures; when the
+fleet received plenty of excellent fresh provisions, in exchange for
+clothes, hawks bells, glass beads, and other toys; but this friendly
+intercourse was interrupted through the imprudence of a Portuguese young
+man named Veloso. Delighted with the novelty of the scene, and anxious to
+see the manners of the natives more intimately, he obtained permission to
+accompany them to their huts, where a sea calf was dressed in the
+Hottentot fashion, to his great astonishment. Disgusted at their
+loathsome cookery, he rose abruptly, and was impatient to depart, and was
+accompanied by the natives on his way back to the ships with the utmost
+good humour. Veloso, however, became apprehensive of personal danger, and
+horridly vociferated for assistance on his approach to the shore. Coellos
+boat immediately put off to bring him on board, and the natives fled to
+the woods. These needless apprehensions on both sides were increased by
+mutual ignorance of each others language, and led to hostilities. While
+De Gama was taking the altitude of the sun with an astrolabe, some
+Hottentots sprung from an ambush, and threw their spears, headed with
+horn, very dexterously among the Portuguese, by which the general and
+several others were wounded. On this occasion, the Portuguese deemed it
+prudent to retreat to their ships[7]."
+
+Having taken in fresh water and provisions in St Elena Bay, the squadron
+left that place on the forenoon of Thursday the 16th November, with the
+wind at S.S.W. and steered for the Cape of Good Hope, and on the evening
+of the following Saturday came in sight of that cape. But on account of
+the wind being contrary, he had to stand out to sea all day, and turned
+towards the land as night set in. In that manner he continued plying to
+windward until the following Wednesday, which was the 20th of November[8],
+when he doubled the cape with a fair wind, sounding the trumpets of all
+the ships, and making every demonstration of joy, but placing the chief
+confidence in God, that his providence would guide and protect them in
+accomplishing the enterprise in which they were engaged.
+
+"In this part of the voyage the greatest proofs of courage and resolution
+were evinced by De Gama. While endeavouring to double this formidable and
+almost unknown cape, owing to contrary winds and stormy weather, the
+waves rose mountain high. At one time his ships were heaved up to the
+clouds, and seemed the next moment precipitated into the bottomless abyss
+of the ocean. The wind was piercingly cold, and so boisterous that the
+commands of the pilot could seldom be heard amid the din of the warring
+elements; while the dismal and almost constant darkness increased the
+danger of their situation. Sometimes the gale drove them irresistibly to
+the southwards, while at other times they had to lay to, or to tack to
+windward, difficultly preserving the course they had already made. During
+any gloomy intervals of cessation from the tempest, the sailors,
+exhausted by fatigue, and abandoned to despair, surrounded De Gama,
+entreating him not to devote himself and them to inevitable destruction,
+as the gale could no longer be weathered, and they must all be buried in
+the waves if he persisted in the present course. The firmness of the
+general was not to be shaken by the pusillanimity and remonstrances of
+the crew, on which a formidable conspiracy was entered into against him,
+of which he received timely information from his brother Paulo. With his
+assistance, and that of a few who remained stedfast to their duty, the
+leading conspirators, and even all the pilots, were put in irons; whilst
+De Gama, and his small remnant of faithful followers remained day and
+night at the helm, undismayed at the dangers and difficulties that
+surrounded them. At length, on Wednesday the 20th November, all the
+squadron safely doubled the tremendous promontory[9]."
+
+Continuing the voyage along the coast beyond the cape, they saw great
+numbers of large and small cattle as they passed, all well grown and fat;
+but could perceive no towns, as the villages inhabited by the natives are
+all farther inland, the houses being of earth covered with straw. The
+natives were all somewhat black, clothed like those they had seen at St
+Elena Bay, speaking the same language, and using similar darts, together
+with some other kinds of arms, both for defence and assault. The country
+is very pleasant, being diversified with wood and water; and adjoining to
+the cape on the east side, they found a great harbour now called False
+Bay, almost six leagues wide at the mouth, and running about as much into
+the land. Having thus doubled the cape, the squadron came, on the Sunday
+after, being St Katherine's day, 25th November, to the watering-place of
+St Blaze[10], which is sixty leagues beyond the cape, and is a very large
+bay, exceeding safe in all winds except the north[11].
+
+The natives here resembled those already seen in dress and arms. The
+country produces many large elephants, and numerous oxen, of vast size
+and extremely fat, some of which have no horns. On some of the fattest of
+these the natives were seen riding, on pannels stuffed with rye straw, as
+is used in Spain, and having a frame of wood like a saddle. Such of them
+as they choose to sell they mark by means of a piece of wood, like the
+shaft of one of their arrows, put through the nose. In this harbour,
+about three cross-bow shots from the shore, there is a rock much
+frequented by sea wolves, as large as great bears, very wild and fierce,
+with long, great teeth. These animals are very dangerous, and will attack
+men, and their skins are so hard as not to be pierced with spears, unless
+pushed with much force and valour. These animals resemble lions, and
+their young bleat like kids. One day that our men went to this rock for
+amusement, they saw at least three thousand of these animals, old and
+young. On this rock also, there are great numbers of birds as large as
+ducks which do not fly, having no feathers in their wings, and which bray
+like so many asses[12].
+
+Having thus arrived at the Bay of St Blaze, and lying there at anchor,
+the general caused all the provisions to be taken out of the store-ship
+and divided among the others, and then burned the store-ship, as the king
+had ordered. In this business and other needful employments, for their
+safety in the remainder of the voyage, they were occupied in that bay for
+ten days. On the Friday after their arrival, about ninety of the natives
+made their appearance, some on the shore, and others on the hills, on
+which the general and the captains went to the shore, having their boats
+crews well armed, and even taking ordinance with them, to avoid the same
+accident which had happened at St Elena bay. When near the shore, the
+general threw some bells on the land, which the Negroes pickt up, and
+some of them came so near as to take the bells out of his hands. He much
+wondered at this familiarity, as Diaz had informed him when he was in
+those parts, the natives all ran away and would never approach near
+enough to be seen and conversed with. Finding them thus gentle, contrary
+to his expectation, he went on land with his men, and bartered red night-
+caps with the Negroes, for ivory bracelets which they wore on their arms.
+Next Saturday, the natives came to the shore to the number of more than
+two hundred, including their children, and brought with them twelve oxen,
+and four sheep. When our people went on shore, some of the natives began
+to play on four flutes, in four several tones, making good music; on
+which the general caused the trumpets to be sounded, and the natives
+danced with our people. Thus the day passed in mirth and feasting, and in
+purchasing their oxen and sheep. On Sunday a still greater number of the
+natives came down to the shore, having several women among them, and
+bringing a number of oxen for sale. After the sale of one of the oxen,
+some of our people noticed some young Negroes hidden among certain bushes,
+who had with them the weapons of the older people, from which it was
+conjectured that some treason was intended. Upon this, the general caused
+our people to remove to a place of greater security, and were followed by
+the Negroes to the landing place. The Negroes now gathered together, as
+if they meant to fight the Portuguese; on which the general, being
+unwilling to harm them, embarked in the boats with all his people, and
+then commanded two pieces of brass ordnance to be fired off, on which
+they were much amazed and scampered off in confusion, leaving their
+weapons behind. After this, the general ordered a cross or pillar, having
+the arms of Portugal to be set upon the shore, but the Negroes pulled it
+down immediately, even before our people retired.
+
+After remaining ten days here, as before mentioned, the fleet set sail
+for the Rio del Infante, on Friday the 8th December, being the Conception
+of our Lady, and during this part of the voyage, there arose a great
+storm with _forewind_ on the eve of St Lucy, 12th December, that all the
+ships run under close reefed courses. During this storm, they parted
+company with Nicholas Coello, but rejoined the next night after. On the
+16th December, when the gale abated, they discovered land near certain
+small rocks, sixty leagues from the harbour of St Blaze, and five leagues
+from the Pennon de la Cruz, where Diaz set up his last stone pillar[13],
+and fifteen leagues short of the Rio del Infante[14]. This country was
+very pleasant, and abounded in cattle, becoming more sightly and with
+higher trees the further our fleet sailed towards the east, as could be
+easily seen from the ships as they sailed along near the shore. On
+Saturday they passed close within sight of the rock _de la Cruz_, and
+being loath to pass the _Rio del Infante_, they stood out to sea till
+vespers, when the wind came round to the east, right contrary. On this,
+the general stood off, and on plying to windward, till Tuesday the 20th
+December, at sunset, when the wind changed to the west, which was
+favourable. Next day at ten o'clock, they came to the before-mentioned
+rock, being sixty leagues a-stern of the place they wished to have
+attained[15].
+
+This rock is the cause of the great currents on this coast, which were so
+powerful, that the fleet had much ado with a brisk favourable wind to
+stem the current between that place and Rio Infante in three or four days;
+but at length they joyfully passed these currents without damage, as Diaz
+had done formerly, and the general, encouraged by his good fortune, gave
+thanks to God, saying, he verily believed it was the good pleasure of God
+that they should attain to the discovery of the Indies.
+
+Thus continuing the voyage till Christmas day, they had discovered
+seventy leagues to the eastwards, and had arrived in the latitude in
+which India was said to be in his instructions. The fleet continued to
+sail for so long a time without going to land, as to be in want of water,
+insomuch that they had to dress their provisions in sea water, and were
+forced to reduce the allowance of drink to one pint of water per man each
+day. But on Friday the 11th January 1498, drawing near the land, the
+boats were sent out to view the coast, where they saw many Negroes, both
+men and women, all of whom were of great stature, and followed our boats
+along the coast. As these people appeared quiet and civil, the general
+called Martin Alonzo, who could speak many of the Negro languages, and
+desired him and another to leap on shore, which they immediately did.
+Alonzo and his companion were well received by the natives, especially by
+their chief, to whom the general sent a jacket, a pair of breeches, and a
+cap, all of a red colour, and a copper bracelet, of which he was very
+proud, and returned thanks to the general, saying, "that he might have
+any thing he wished for or needed that his country produced." All which,
+as Martin Alonzo understood their language[16], he reported to the
+general, who was much pleased that by this means an intercourse could be
+opened with the natives. Alonzo and another of our people were
+accordingly permitted by the general to go for one night along with the
+natives to their town, where the chief dressed himself out in his new
+garments, and was beheld with much admiration by his people in his finery,
+clapping their hands for joy. This salutation was repeated three or four
+times on their way to the town, and when there, the chief made the
+circuit of the whole village, that all the people might see and admire
+his new and strange attire. When this ceremonial was ended, the chief
+retired to his own house, where he commanded Alonzo and his companion to
+be well lodged and entertained, and gave them for supper a hen exactly
+the same as one of ours, and a kind of pap, or porridge, made of a yellow
+grain called _Mylyo_[17], of which likewise they made bread. Many of the
+Negroes repaired that night to their lodging to have a near view of the
+strangers; and next day, the chief sent them back to the ships,
+accompanied by some Negroes, laden with hens for the general, who
+returned thanks for the same by means of Alonzo his interpreter. During
+five days that our ships remained off this coast, no kind of harm was
+done or offered by the inhabitants, who seemed quiet and gentle, and to
+have many _noble men_, for which reason, he called this place _Terra da
+boa gente_, or the land of Good People[18]. The town in which Martin
+Alonzo was had its houses constructed of straw, yet well furnished within.
+The women were more numerous than the men, as in a company of forty women,
+there were only twenty men. These people were armed with long bows and
+arrows, and had darts headed with iron, having many copper bracelets, on
+their arms and legs, with copper ornaments in their hair. They have also
+iron daggers, with pewter handles and ivory sheaths; so that it is
+manifest they have plenty of copper and tin. They have likewise abundance
+of salt, which they make from sea water, which they carry in gourds to
+certain caves where the salt is made. They were so fond of linen, that
+they gave a great quantity of copper in exchange for an old shirt, and
+were so quiet and civil, that they brought water to our boats from a
+river about two cross-bow shots from the landing, which our people named
+Rio do Cobre, or Copper River.
+
+"Osorius places the arrival of the Portuguese on this part of the coast a
+day earlier than Castaneda, and gives the following additional
+information. On the 10th January 1498, they discovered some small islands,
+about 230 miles from their last watering-place, having a very beautiful
+appearance, and consisting of verdant meadows, intermixed with groves of
+lofty trees, where they could see the inhabitants walking on the shore in
+great numbers. Here De Gama landed, and sent one of his men, who was well
+versant in the Negro languages to visit the king, and who was received
+with much civility, receiving presents of the produce of the country on
+his dismissal. Before leaving Lisbon, De Gama received ten malefactors on
+board who had been condemned to die, but were pardoned on condition of
+going on this voyage, for the purpose of being left wherever De Gama
+pleased, that they might examine the country, and be enabled to give him
+an account of the inhabitants on his return. On setting sail from this
+place, De Gama left two of these exiles on shore, to inform themselves of
+the character and manners of the natives[19].
+
+From this place our fleet departed on the 15th January, and proceeding on
+their voyage, came to another country of very low land, having very thick
+tall trees; and proceeding onwards, they found a river which was very
+open at the mouth, near which he came to anchor on Thursday the 24th of
+January, as the general deemed it proper to examine this country, and to
+try if any intelligence could be here procured concerning India. That
+same evening, he and his brother Nicholas Coello[20] entered the river;
+and, at day-break next morning, the land was observed to be extremely low
+and covered with water, having many trees of great height, thickly loaded
+with various kinds of fruits, the country appearing very pleasant. They
+saw likewise certain boats with some of the natives coming towards the
+ship, at which the general was well pleased, as he conceived from their
+having some degree of maritime knowledge in these parts, that he could
+not now be very far from India, or at least should soon hear news of that
+country. The natives were Negroes of good stature, all naked, except each
+a small apron of cloth made of cotton. On reaching the ships, they came
+on board without hesitation, and behaved themselves as if they had been
+long acquainted with our people. They were well received, and were
+presented with bells and other toys, but did not understand any of the
+languages spoken by Martin Alonzo, or any of the other interpreters on
+board, so that the only intercourse was by signs. They departed after
+good entertainment, and afterwards they and many others returned to the
+ships in their boats, bringing with them such provisions as their country
+afforded. The natives seemed much satisfied with their reception; and
+besides those who came to the ships by water, many others came by
+land[21], among whom were several women who were tolerably handsome,
+especially the young maidens; but all were as naked as the men. They have
+three holes in their lips, in which they wear small pieces of tin by way
+of ornament. The natives took several of our men along with them to make
+merry at one of their towns, whence they brought water to our ships.
+
+After the general had been three days in this river, two of the nobles,
+or head men of the natives, came on board to visit him, who were naked
+like the rest, except that their aprons were much larger, and one of them
+had a handkerchief on his head, embroidered with silk, while the other
+wore a nightcap of green satin[22]. Observing their cleanliness, or
+civility, the general treated these people courteously, and gave them
+victuals, apparel, and other things, of which they seemed to make but
+small account; and by certain signs, shewn by a young man, it was
+understood that his country was at a considerable distance, where he had
+seen ships as large as ours. This intelligence gave great hopes to our
+people that the Indies were not far off, which was much confirmed by the
+chiefs who had been on board, sending off for sale certain cloths made of
+cotton, on which there were marks of ochre. In respect of all these
+encouraging tokens, the general named this river _Ho rio dos bos Sinaes_,
+or River of Good Signs; and called the place San Rafael, after the name
+of his own Ship[23].
+
+From the signs of the before-mentioned young men, that the country of the
+head men who had been on board was far off, where they had seen large
+ships, the general concluded that the Indies were still at a great
+distance; and therefore determined, in consultation with the other
+captains, to lay the ships aground, to give their bottoms a thorough
+repair, which was done accordingly. In this operation they employed
+thirty-two days, during which, our people were much afflicted with a
+grievous sickness, thought to proceed from the air of the country. Their
+hands and feet became swelled, and their gums became so sore and putrid
+that they could not eat, and the smell of their breath was quite
+intolerable[24]. With this pestilent infection our people were much
+discouraged, and many of them died, the survivors being in great trouble
+and perplexity. But De Gama took much care, and used much diligence for
+their recovery, and to comfort their affliction; continually visiting the
+sick, and giving them such wholesome and medicinal things as he had
+provided for his own use; through all which many recovered who would have
+died, and the rest were thereby greatly comforted, and encouraged.
+
+Having repaired the ships, and provided them with all necessaries that
+could be procured at the river of Good Signs, the fleet departed from
+thence on Saturday the 24th of February.
+
+"At this period, two accidents occurred which had nearly frustrated all
+the hopes of this expedition. De Gama being along side of the ship
+commanded by his brother, with whom he wished to speak, had hold of the
+chains, when the boat was carried from under him by the force of the
+current, but by immediate assistance, he and his boats crew were
+providentially saved. Soon afterwards, when the fleet was passing the bar
+of the river, the ship of De Gama grounded on a sand bank, and her loss
+was for some time considered as inevitable; but she floated again with
+the return of the tide, and to their inexpressible joy received no
+damage[25]."
+
+As there was little or no wind, the fleet stood out to sea to avoid the
+shore, and about vespers on Sunday, they descried three small islands out
+to sea, about four leagues distant from each other. Two of these were
+replenished with trees, but the third was quite bare. Seeing no cause to
+delay the voyage in examining these islands, De Gama held on for six days,
+coming always to anchor at night. On the evening of Thursday, the first
+of March, they came in sight of four islands, two of which were near the
+land, and the other two farther out to sea; and the fleet steered through
+the channel next morning, the ship commanded by Coello, as being the
+smallest, going first. But endeavouring to enter a certain harbour,
+between the mainland and one of these islands, Coello missed the channel
+and ran aground, on which the other ships put about and went back. They
+soon perceived seven or eight boats under sail coming from the island
+which was a good league distant from Coello, at which sight they were
+much rejoiced, and Coello and his people received them with much
+demonstration of friendship and satisfaction, Coello went along with
+these people to the general, and presented them, saying, that here was a
+quite different kind of people from any they had seen hitherto. Then the
+general commanded _to let them go a seaboard with their boats_[26], as he
+proposed to go with them to their island to anchor with his ships, that
+he might see what kind of a country it was, and if he could learn any
+certain intelligence concerning India. But the boats continued to follow
+our ships, making signals, and calling to our people to wait for them;
+wherefore the ships came to anchor, and the boats came to our fleet. The
+people on board were of good stature and somewhat black, clothed in
+dresses of cotton, striped with sundry colours; some girdled to their
+knees, while others carried their apparel on their shoulders like cloaks.
+Their heads were covered with kerchiefs, somewhat wrought with silk and
+gold thread, and they were armed with swords and daggers like Moors. In
+their boats, also, they had certain musical instruments named _sagbuts_.
+They came immediately on board with as much confidence as if they were
+long acquainted, and entered into familiar conversation in the language
+of Algarve, and would not be known as Moors[27].
+
+The general ordered these people to be well entertained, and they eat and
+drank willingly of whatever was set before them; after which, by means of
+Fernan Alvarez, who could speak their language, he learned that the
+island to which they belonged was called Monsambicke, or Mozambique, on
+which was a town full of merchants, who traded with the Moors of India,
+who bring them silver, linen cloth, pepper, ginger, silver rings, many
+pearls, and rubies; and that, from a country behind, they procure gold.
+They offered likewise to conduct our people into the harbour, where they
+would learn the truth of these things more fully. On consulting with the
+other captains, the general determined upon going into this harbour, to
+examine more accurately into these reports, and to procure pilots to
+carry them on their voyage, as they had no one in the fleet who knew the
+way. Nicholas Coello was therefore ordered to make the first essay, and
+to take the soundings of the bar, his ship being the smallest. But in
+entering, he touched on the point of the island where he broke his helm,
+and was in great danger of being lost; but by good providence he got off
+with no farther injury. He now found the bar was quite safe, and got into
+the harbour, where he anchored two cross-bow shots from the town, which
+is in fifteen degrees towards the south[28]. The harbour is very good,
+the town is plentifully supplied with such provisions as the country
+produces, the houses being constructed of straw, and the inhabitants
+Moors, who trade to Sofala in large vessels that have neither decks nor
+nails, their planks being sewed together with _cayro_ or twine, made from
+the fibres of the cocoa nut rind, and their sails of mats made of the
+leaves of a species of palm. Some of these vessels use compasses of Genoa,
+and regulate their voyages by means of quadrants and sea charts. With
+these Moors the Moors of India trade, as likewise do those from the Red
+Sea, because of the gold which is to be had here. On seeing our people,
+the Moors of Mozambique thought the Portuguese had been Turks, whom they
+knew of from the Moors who dwell on the Red Sea; and those who were first
+at our ships carried intelligence to the xeque, or sheik, which is the
+title of the governor of this island for the king of Quiloa, in whose
+territories it is situated.
+
+"Though we shall afterwards have occasion to investigate this eastern
+coast of Africa more fully, in editing particular voyages to its shores,
+some notices seem here to be proper[29]. Owing to his keeping at a
+distance from, the shore for security, the present voyage gives little
+knowledge of the eastern coast of Africa, and it is even difficult to
+assign the many stations at which De Gama touched between the Cape of
+Good Hope and Mozambique. We have already noticed the river of Good Signs,
+as being probably the northern mouth of the Delta of the Zambeze, now
+called _Quilimane_, from a fort of that name on its banks. The mouth of
+this branch runs into the sea in lat. 18 deg. 25' S. In his passage from the
+_Terra de Natal_, or Christmas Land, so named from having been discovered
+on Christmas day, and named, in this account of De Gamas voyage, _the
+Land of Good People_, De Gama missed Cape Corientes, forming the S.W.
+point of the channel of Mozambique, or _Inner Passage_, as it is now
+called, and overshot Sofala, the southern extremity of Covilhams
+discoveries, at which he was probably directed to touch, as Covilhams
+chart might have been of some use to direct his farther progress to Aden,
+and thence to Calicut or Cananor, on the Malabar coast.
+
+"The eastern coast of Africa is hitherto very little known to geography,
+its trade being entirely confined to the Portuguese, who have
+settlements at Sofala, the river Zambeze, Mozambique, Quiloa, and Melinda,
+and conceal all the circumstances respecting their foreign possessions
+with infinite jealousy. It is said to have once been in contemplation by
+the British government, to employ Sir Home Popham to make a survey of
+this coast, but this design was never executed. Commodore Blanket
+remained on this station for a considerable time, and much information
+may be expected from his journal, some drawings of the coast having been
+already made for charts, which are preparing, under the orders of the
+Admiralty. About the year 1782, a great mass of geographical information
+was collected on the continent of Europe and lodged in the British Museum,
+from which information may probably be derived respecting this coast,
+when that collection shall have been arranged and submitted to the
+public. According to D'Apres, all the eastern coast of Africa, for a
+great way south of the equinoctial, is lined by a range of islands,
+whence shoals extend to the distance of a league. These islets form an
+outer shore, with a winding channel within, and are in some places a
+league from the coast of the continent, though very apt to be mistaken
+for the real coast. Within this range the boats or almadias of the
+country ply backwards and forwards in great safety, in the intervening
+channel.
+
+"Ptolemy places the _Prasum promontorium_, or Green Cape, the extreme
+southern boundary of ancient knowledge of the east coast of Africa, in
+lat. 15" 30' S. and the Portuguese universally assume Mozambique as
+Prasum, by which classical name it is distinguished in the Lusiad of
+Camoens, in reference to the voyage of De Gama, and the near coincidence
+of situation gives great probability to this supposition. [Greek:
+prason] signifies a leek, and is also used to denote a sea-weed of a
+similar green colour, and the name may either have been derived from the
+verdure of the point, or from the sea-weeds found in its neighbourhood.
+At all events, Prasum cannot be farther south than Cape Corientes, or
+farther north than Quiloa or the Zanguebar islands. The harbour of
+Mozambique has seldom less than eight or ten fathom water, which is so
+clear, that every bank, rock, or shallow can be easily seen.
+
+"The Moors, so often mentioned, are supposed by Bruce to have been
+merchants expelled from Spain by Ferdinand and Isabella, who first fixed
+their residence on the western coast of Africa, and extending themselves
+eastwards, formed settlements in Arabia and Egypt, till the oppressions
+of Selim and Soliman, the Turkish emperors, interrupted their commerce,
+and obliged them to disperse along the coast of Abyssinia and eastern
+Africa. Besides the impossibility, chronologically, for the assigned
+causes having produced the supposed effect, there is no necessity for
+having recourse to this improbable hypothesis. From being best acquainted
+with their Moorish conquerors, the Spaniards and Portuguese have always
+been accustomed to name all the Arabians Moors, wherever they found them,
+and even gave at first the name of _black_ Moors to the Negroes, whence
+our old English term _Black-a-moors_. It is well known that the Arabs,
+especially after their conversion to Mahometanism, were great colonizers
+or conquerors; even the now half-christian kingdom of Abyssinia was an
+early colony and conquest of the pagan Arabs, and its inhabitants are
+consequently _white_ Moors in the most extended Portuguese sense. The
+Arab, or Moorish kingdoms along the African coast of the Indian ocean,
+are branches from the same original stem, and the early Mahometan
+missionaries were both zealous and successful in propagating Islaemism
+among the most distant pagan colonies of their countrymen. As all zealous
+Mussulmen are enjoined the pilgrimage of Mecca, and commerce mixes
+largely with religion in the holy journey, by which the faithful from
+every distant region often meet at Mecca, and induce each other to extend
+their commercial adventures to new regions, it may possibly have been,
+that some Moors originally from Spain, may even have reached Mozambique
+before the time of De Gama; but it is ridiculous to suppose that all the
+Moors on the African coast had been Spaniards. The overthrow of the great
+Moorish kingdom of Granada only took place five or six years before the
+present voyage.
+
+"The island of Mozambique, which does not exceed a league in
+circumference, is described as low and swampy, and was inhabited by Moors
+who had come from Quiloa and Sofala. It was afterwards much resorted to
+by the Portuguese as a winter station, and became the key of their Indian
+trade. The African coast stretches out on both sides of the island into
+two points, that on the north-east called Pannoni, off which a shoal with
+three islets extends, some way into the sea. The southern point is called
+Mangale[30]."
+
+When the Moorish governor of Mozambique[31] was informed of the arrival
+of the Portuguese, and that Coello was come to anchor in the harbour, he
+fully supposed that they were Turks or Moors from some distant place, and
+immediately came to visit him, apparelled in fine silk, with many
+attendants. Coello received him very courteously; but as neither he nor
+any in his ship could speak their language, the governor soon retired.
+Coello gave him, however, a red cap, on which he seemed to set little
+value, and presented him likewise with some black beads, which he carried
+away in his hand, both being given and received in token of friendship.
+On leaving the ship, he required Coello, by signs, to let him have the
+boat to carry him on shore, which Coello readily agreed to, and sent some
+of his men to the land along with him. These the governor carried to his
+house, and feasted them on dates and other things, and sent back with
+them a pot of preserved dates to Coello, with which he regaled the
+general and his brother when they had entered the harbour. On the arrival
+of the other two ships, the governor again sent off some of his people to
+visit them, still taking them for Turks, presenting many pleasant and
+delicate viands, and asking permission to visit them in person. The
+general, in return, sent the governor a present, consisting of red hats,
+short gowns, coral, brass basons, hawks bells and many other things,
+which he slighted as of no value, and asked why the general had not sent
+him scarlet, which he chiefly desired.
+
+Soon afterwards the governor came off to visit the general; who, being
+apprized of his coming, ordered all the ships to be dressed out in their
+flags. He likewise made all the sick and infirm men to be kept out of
+sight, and brought a good many of the most alert men from the other ships,
+whom he ordered to be secretly armed, in case of any violence or
+treachery on the part of the Moors. The governor came on board,
+accompanied with many men, all well apparelled in silk, having many ivory
+trumpets and other musical instruments, on which they played almost
+without ceasing. The governor was a lean man, of good stature, dressed in
+a linen shirt down to his heels, over which he wore a long gown of Mecca
+velvet, having a cap of silk of many colours, trimmed with gold, on his
+head, at his girdle he wore a sword and dagger, and had silk shoes. The
+general received him on entering the ship, and led him to an awning,
+trimmed up in the best manner they were able. The general then begged him
+not to be offended that no scarlet had been sent, having brought none
+with him, and that his ships only contained such merchandize as were fit
+to be bartered for victuals for the people; and that his only object at
+present was to discover the way to the Indies, for which purpose he had
+been sent by a great and mighty king, his master. All this was conveyed
+through the interpretation of Fernan Martin[32]. The general then ordered
+an entertainment of the best meats and wines which the ship afforded, to
+be set before the governor and his principal attendants, of all which
+they partook willingly, even drinking wine with good will. The governor
+asked whether they came from Turkey, as he had heard say that the Turks
+were a fair people like them, and desired to see our country bows, and
+the books of our law. To this the general answered, that he and his men
+were not from Turkey, but from a kingdom in their neighbourhood; that he
+would most willingly shew his bows and other weapons, but had not the
+books of our law, as they were not needed at sea. Then some cross-bows
+were brought, which were bent, and shot off in presence of the governor,
+also some of our harness or defensive armour, with all of which he was
+much pleased, and greatly astonished.
+
+During this conference, the general learnt that the port of Calicut in
+India was 900 leagues distant from Mozambique; and, as there were many
+shoals in the course, that it was very necessary to have a pilot from
+this place. He learned also that there were many cities along the coast.
+He likewise understood, that the kingdom of Prester John was far from
+this place, in the inland country[33]. Considering the expediency of
+having a pilot, the general requested to have two from the governor, who
+agreed to the demand, on condition that they should be well used. The
+reason of wishing to have two was, lest one might die during the voyage,
+and our people were much pleased with this promise. The governor came a
+second time to visit the general, and brought with him both the pilots
+whom he had promised; to each of whom were given thirty crowns and a coat,
+each crown being worth five shillings, under this condition, that
+whenever one of them should go on shore, the other should remain on board,
+that one might always stay by the ship while in harbour.
+
+Notwithstanding these friendly meetings, speeches, and assurances, it
+soon appeared, after the departure of the governor, that the Moors had
+learned, during their intercourse with our people, that they were
+Christians, on which the former friendship and good will of the Moors
+towards them was changed to wrath and fury, and they henceforwards used
+every endeavour to kill our men, and to take possession of the ships. The
+governor, therefore, and his people, used every effort for this
+mischievous purpose, and had certainly succeeded, if the Almighty had not
+moved the heart of one of the Moorish pilots who had been received into
+the Portuguese fleet, to reveal the same to the general; who, fearing
+lest the infidels might suddenly execute their purpose, as being numerous
+in comparison to his small company, determined to remain no longer in the
+harbour. Wherefore, on Saturday the 10th March 1498, being seven days
+after his arrival, he quitted the harbour of Mozambique, and cast anchor
+close to an island, at the distance of a league from that place;
+intending, on Sunday, to hear mass on shore, that they might confess and
+receive the sacrament, which had not been done since leaving Lisbon.
+
+After the ships were come to anchor in this place of safety from being
+burnt by the Moors, which the general greatly dreaded, he determined to
+go back to Mozambique in his boat, to demand the other pilot who had been
+promised, but who still remained on shore. Leaving his brother with the
+fleet, in readiness to come to his aid if needful, the general went
+towards Mozambique with his boat, accompanied by Nicholas Coello, and the
+Moorish pilot. On their way they saw six _zambucos_ or boats, filled with
+Moors, coming towards them, armed with long bows and arrows, and also
+with shields and spears. The Moors called to our people to come along
+with them to the town; and the Moorish pilot, who explained their signals,
+advised the general to do so, as the governor would not otherwise deliver
+the other pilot, who still remained on shore. The general was much
+displeased at this advice, believing the pilot only wished him to
+approach the shore, that he might be able to run away, and therefore
+ordered him to be secured as a prisoner. He likewise gave orders to fire
+at the Moorish boats from his ordnance. When Paulo de la Gama heard the
+shot, believing the general to be in more danger than he actually was, he
+immediately came with the ship Berrio under sail to his aid. On seeing
+this, the Moors fled away in such haste that the general could not
+overtake them, and therefore returned with his brother to where the other
+ships were at anchor.
+
+Next day, being Sunday, the general and all his men went on shore, where
+they heard mass, and received the sacrament very devoutly, having
+confessed the evening before. After this they re-embarked and set sail
+the same day. Having no hope of procuring the other pilot, the general
+ordered to release him whom he had confined, and carried him on the
+voyage. But he, willing to be revenged for the indignity he had
+experienced, determined on carrying the Portuguese fleet to the island of
+Quiloa, which was all peopled with Moors; and, as it seemed, intended to
+inform the king of that place that our ships belonged to the Christians,
+that he might destroy them and kill the crews. For this purpose, he
+craftily persuaded the general not to be in trouble for want of the other
+pilot, as he would carry him to a great island, on hundred leagues from
+thence, which was inhabited half by Moors, and half by Christians, who
+were always in war with each other, and where he might easily find pilots
+to conduct him to Calicut. Though the general was much pleased with this
+information, he yet did not give implicit credit to the Moor, but
+promised him high rewards if he carried him in safety to that country,
+and so went forward on the voyage with a scant wind.
+
+On the Tuesday the fleet was still in sight of the land from which they
+took their departure, and remained becalmed all that day and the next. On
+Wednesday night, a gentle breeze sprung up from the eastward, on which
+the fleet stood off to seaward, but on Thursday morning, on again making
+the land, they were four leagues to leeward of Mozambique, whence plying
+to windward, they came back that evening to the island where they had
+heard mass on the Sunday before, where they cast anchor and remained
+eight days waiting for a fair wind. While here at anchor, a white Moor,
+who was a _molah_ or minister among the Moors of Mozambique, came on
+board the generals ship, representing that the governor was much grieved
+at the breach of peace and friendship between them, which he would now
+gladly renew. To this the general made answer, that he would make no
+peace with the governor unless he sent him the other pilot whom he had
+hired and paid. With this answer the _molah_ departed, and never came
+back. After this, while still waiting for a fair wind, there came another
+Moor on board, accompanied with his son, a boy, and asked the general to
+give him a passage to the city of Melinda, which he said was on his way
+to Calicut. He said that he was a native of the country near Mecca,
+whence he had piloted a ship to Mozambique, and would gladly go with him,
+that he might return to his own country; and farther, he counselled the
+general not to remain in expectation of any answer from the _zeque_, who
+he was sure would make no peace with him, on account of his hatred to the
+Christians. The general was rejoiced at the coming of this Moor,
+expecting to acquire information from him concerning the straits of the
+Red Sea, and of the towns on the coast between Mozambique and Melinda, by
+which he had to sail, and therefore gave orders to receive this Moor and
+his son on board.
+
+As the ships were rather short of water, the general and the other
+captains determined upon entering the harbour of Mozambique, to take in
+what they needed; but ordered strict watch to be kept, lest the Moors
+should set the ships on fire. They entered therefore again into the
+harbour on Thursday; and when night came, they went in their boats in
+search of water, which the Moorish pilot assured them was to be found on
+the firm land, and offered to guide them to the place. Leaving Paulo de
+la Gama in charge of the ships, and taking Nicholas Coello and the pilot
+along with him in the boats, the general went on shore about midnight to
+the place where the pilot said that water was to be had. But it could not
+be found; whether that the pilot misled them in hope of escaping, or
+finding he could not escape, did so out of malice. Having spent the whole
+night fruitlessly in search of water, and day beginning to dawn, the
+general returned to the ships for more force, lest the Moors might set
+upon him and his small company at a disadvantage. Having furnished his
+boats with a larger force of armed men, he returned to the shore, still
+accompanied by Coello and the Moorish pilot, who, seeing no means of
+escaping, now pointed out the watering-place close by the shore. At this
+place they observed about twenty Moors armed with darts, who shewed as if
+they meant to prevent them from taking water. The general therefore gave
+orders to fire three guns, to force them from the shore, that our men
+might be able to land unopposed. Amazed and frightened by the noise and
+the effect of the shot, the Moors ran away and hid themselves in the
+bushes; and our people landed quietly, and took in fresh water, returning
+to the ships a little before sunset. On arriving, the general found his
+brother much disquieted, because a Negro, belonging to John Cambrayes,
+the pilot of Paulo de la Gama, had run away to the Moors, though himself
+a Christian.[34]
+
+Upon Saturday the 24th of March, being the eve of the annunciation of our
+Lady, a Moor appeared early in the morning on the shore, abreast of the
+ships, calling out in a loud and shrill voice, "that if our men wanted
+any more water they might now come for it, when they would find such as
+were ready to force their return." Irritated at this bravado, and
+remembering the injury done him in withholding the promised pilot, and
+the loss of the Negro, the general resolved to batter the town with his
+ordnance in revenge, and the other captains readily agreed to the measure.
+Wherefore they armed all their boats, and came up before the town, where
+the Moors had constructed a barricade of boards for their defence on the
+shore, so thick that our men could not see the Moors behind. Upon the
+shore, between that defence and the sea, an hundred Moors were drawn up,
+armed with targets, darts, bows, arrows, and slings, who began to sling
+stones at the boats as soon as they came within reach. They were
+immediately answered with shot from our ordnance, on which they retired
+from the shore behind their barricade, which was soon beaten down, when
+they ran into the town, leaving two of their men slain. The general and
+his men now returned to the ships to dinner, and the Moors were seen
+running from that town to another; and so much were they afraid of the
+Portuguese, that they abandoned the island, going by water to another
+place on the opposite side. After dinner, our people went with their
+captains on shore, to endeavour to take some of the Moors, with the hope
+of procuring restitution of the Negro belonging to Cambrayes, who had run
+away from the ships, and they were likewise desirous of recovering two
+Indians, who were said by the Moorish pilot to be detained as captives in
+Mozambique.
+
+On this occasion, Paulo de la Gama seized four Moors who were in a boat;
+but a great many Moors in other boats escaped, by hastening on shore and
+leaving their boats behind, in which our men found much cotton cloth, and
+several books of their Mahometan law, which the general ordered to be
+preserved. The general and the other captains ranged in their boats along
+side of the town, but did not venture on shore, not having sufficient
+force, nor could they get any speech of the Moors. Next day they went on
+shore at the watering-place, where they took what was needed without any
+opposition from the Moors. Being now hopeless of recovering the Negro, or
+of procuring the Indian captives, it was determined to depart; but the
+general resolved to be revenged on the town and people for their enmity.
+For which reason, he went against it next day with ordnance, and
+destroyed it in such sort that the Moors had to abandon it, and flee into
+another island within the country.[35] This being done, the fleet weighed
+anchor on Tuesday the 27th of March, and departed from Mozambique, whence
+they proceeded to two little rocks, which they called St George, and
+where they came to anchor in waiting for a wind, which was now contrary.
+Soon afterwards the wind came fair and they departed, but the wind was so
+light, and the currents so strong, that they were forced in a retrograde
+course.
+
+The general was much pleased to find that one of the Moors taken by his
+brother at Mozambique was a pilot, and was acquainted with the navigation
+to Calicut. Proceeding on their voyage, they came, on Sunday the first of
+April, to certain islands very near the coast, to the first of which they
+gave the name of _Ilha da Acoutado_, because the Moorish pilot of
+Mozambique was here severely whipt by order of the general, for having
+falsely said that these islands were part of the continent, and likewise
+for not shewing the way to the watering-place at Mozambique, as before
+related. Being cruelly whipt, the Moor confessed that he had brought them
+to this place expressly that they might perish on the rocks and shoals of
+these islands, which were so numerous and so close together, that they
+could hardly be distinguished from each other. On this the general stood
+out to sea, and on Friday the 4th of April,[36] standing to the north-
+west, he came in sight, before noon, of a great land, with two islands
+near the coast, around which were many shoals. On nearing the shore, the
+Moorish pilots recognized it, and said that the Christian island of
+Quiloa was three leagues astern; on which the general was much grieved,
+believing certainly that the natives of Quiloa had been Christians, as
+represented by the pilots, and that they had purposely taken a wrong
+course that the ships might not come there. The pilots, to conceal their
+treachery, alleged that the winds and currents had carried the ships
+farther than they reckoned. But in truth, they were more disappointed in
+this than even the general, as they had reckoned upon being here revenged
+upon the Portuguese, by having them all slain. In this God preserved our
+people from the intended danger most miraculously, for if they had gone
+to Quiloa they had all surely perished; as the general was so fully
+persuaded of the natives being Christians, as reported by the pilot, that
+he would doubtless have landed immediately on his arrival, and have
+thereby run headlong to a place where he and all his people would have
+been slain. Both parties being thus sorry for having missed Quiloa, the
+general because he hoped to have found Christians, and the Moorish pilots
+because of their intended treachery, it was determined to put back with
+the intention of seeking for it; but still the wind and currents opposed
+their purpose, and they tried a whole day in vain. This doubtless
+proceeded from the providence of God, and his merciful goodness to our
+men, who were thus preserved by miracle from the malicious and devilish
+intentions of the two Moorish pilots of Mozambique.
+
+The fleet being thus baffled and tossed to and fro, it was determined to
+bear away for the island of Mombaza, in which the pilots said there were
+two towns, peopled both by Moors and Christians. But they gave out this
+as before to deceive our people, and to lead them to destruction; for
+that island was solely inhabited by Moors, as is the whole of that coast.
+Understanding that Mombaza was seventy miles distant, they bore away for
+that place, and towards evening, they came in sight of a great island
+towards the north, in which the Moorish pilots pretended there were two
+towns, one of Christians and the other of Moors; making this false
+assertion to make our people believe that there were many Christians on
+this coast. While pursuing their voyage towards Mombaza for some days,
+the ship San Raphael chanced one morning, two hours before day, to get
+aground on certain shoals, two leagues from the shore of the continent.
+Paulo de Gama immediately made signals to apprize the other ships of his
+situation and their danger; on which they had the good fortune to avoid
+the shoals and got safely to anchor. The boats from the other ships were
+immediately sent off to assist Paulo de Gama in the St Raphael; and, on
+seeing that the tide was then low, the general was much rejoiced, as he
+well knew she would float again with the tide of flood; whereas, before,
+he was much afraid she might be totally lost. He therefore gave orders to
+carry all their anchors out to deep water, to prevent her from getting
+farther on the shoal. By the time this was done day broke, and soon after
+at low water the St Raphael was quite dry on a sand bank, having taken no
+harm in striking. While waiting for the tide of flood, our people named
+these sands _Os baixos de Sam Rafael_, or the Shoals of St Raphael, and
+named certain islands and hills of the continent, then in sight, the
+islands and hills of St Raphael.
+
+While the ship remained thus dry, and the people walking about on the
+sand, they saw two boats full of Moors, who came to our ships, bringing
+many sweet oranges, much better than those of Portugal. These men told
+the general not to fear any damage to the ship which was aground, as she
+would float uninjured with the next flood; and the general was so much
+pleased with this good heartening, that he gave them several presents,
+which they accepted with many thanks; and understanding that our fleet
+intended to put in at Mombaza, they requested to be carried thither. The
+general granted their request, and permitted them to remain on board, the
+others returning from our ships to their own country.[37] When it was
+full sea, the St Raphael floated and got off the shoal, and the fleet
+proceeded on its voyage.
+
+Following the coast to the north-eastwards, the fleet came to anchor
+outside of the bar of the harbour of Mombaza, about sunset of Saturday
+the 7th of April. Mombaza is on an island very near the shore of the
+continent, and has plenty of provisions, such as millet, rice, and cattle,
+both large and small, all well grown and fat, especially the sheep, which
+are uniformly without tails; and it abounds in poultry. It is likewise
+very pleasant, having many orchards, abounding in pomegranates, Indian
+figs, oranges, both sweet and sour, lemons, and citrons, with plenty of
+pot-herbs, and it has an abundant supply of excellent water. On this
+island there is a city having the same name, Momabza, standing in lat.
+4 deg.S. which is handsomely built on a rocky hill washed by the sea. The
+entrance of the haven has a mark or beacon, and on the very bar there is
+a little low fort, almost level with the water.[38]
+
+Most of the houses of this place are built of stone and lime, having the
+ceilings finely constructed of plaster, and the streets are very handsome.
+This city is subject to a king of its own, the inhabitants being Moors,
+some of whom are white and others brown[39]. The trade of this city is
+extensive, and its inhabitants are well dressed, especially the women,
+who are clothed in silk, and decorated with gold and precious stones. The
+harbour is good and much frequented by shipping, and it receives from the
+African continent, in its neighbourhood, great quantities of honey, wax,
+and ivory.
+
+The general did not enter the harbour that night because it grew late,
+but commanded to hoist the flags in compliment, which the people did with
+much mirth and joy, in hope that they had come to an island in which
+there were many Christians, and that next day they might hear mass on
+shore. They had likewise great hope that the sick, who were almost the
+whole crews, might here recover their health; though, indeed, they were
+much reduced in number, many having died during the voyage. Soon after
+our ships came to anchor, although night approached, a large boat,
+containing about a hundred men, all armed with swords and targets, was
+seen coming towards the fleet. On reaching the generals ship, they would
+have all come on board with their weapons, but the general only permitted
+four of their principals to come aboard, and even they unarmed; causing
+them to be told in their own language, that they must excuse his
+precaution, being a stranger, and not knowing therefore whom he might
+trust. To those whom he permitted to come on board he gave courteous
+entertainment, presenting them with such conserves as he had, of which
+they readily partook; and he requested of them not to take ill that he
+had thus refused entrance to so many armed men. They said that they had
+merely come to see him, as a new and rare thing in their country, and
+that their being armed was merely because such was the custom of the
+country, whether in peace or war. They also said, that the king of
+Mombaza expected his arrival, and would have sent to visit him, if it had
+not been so late, but certainly would do so next day. Their king, they
+added, was rejoiced at his arrival, and would not only be glad to see him,
+but would load his ships with spices. They also said that there were many
+Christians on the island, who lived by themselves; at which the general
+was much pleased, believing their story, which agreed with what the two
+pilots had said. Yet he entertained some jealous doubts, for all their
+fair speeches, and wisely suspected the Moors had come to see if they
+could lay a train to take our ships. In this he was perfectly right, as
+it afterwards appeared that this was their sole intent. The king of
+Mombaza had received perfect intelligence that we were Christians, and of
+all that we had done at Mozambique, and plotted to be revenged, by taking
+our ships and killing our men.
+
+Next day, being Palm Sunday, still prosecuting his wicked purpose, the
+king sent some white Moors with a message to the general, declaring his
+great joy at our arrival, inviting him into the harbour, and engaging to
+supply him with all things he might be in need of; and, in token of amity,
+sent him a ring, a sheep, and many sweet oranges, citrons, and sugar
+canes. These white Moors were likewise instructed to pretend that they
+were Christians, and that there were many Christians in the island. All
+this was so well counterfeited, that our people actually believed them to
+be Christians, on which account the general received them with much
+courtesy, and made them some presents, sending a message to the king that
+he would certainly come farther into the harbour next day. He also sent a
+present to the king of a fine branch of coral. And, for the greater
+security, he sent along with these white Moors, two of our banished men,
+who had been embarked expressly for such hazardous undertakings, or for
+being left on shore where it might be deemed expedient, to become
+acquainted with the circumstances of various places, and to be taken on
+board again. These men, and the Moors who had been on board, were met in
+landing by a number of people, curious to see and examine them, who
+accompanied them all the way to the kings palace, where they had to pass
+through three several doors, each guarded by an armed porter, before they
+came to the place where the king was. They found the king in no very
+great state, yet he received them well, and commanded the Moors who had
+brought them on shore to show them the city. In going through the streets,
+our men saw many prisoners in irons; but, not knowing the language, they
+could not ask who or what these were, yet believed they might be
+Christians, us our general was informed by the Moorish pilots, and the
+kings two messengers, that there were Christians on the island, and that
+the Christians and the Moors had wars together. Our men were likewise
+carried to the house in which the merchants of India dwelt, who were said
+to be Christians. These people, learning that our men were Christians,
+shewed much joy at receiving them, embracing and banqueting them, and
+shewed them a piece of paper on which the figure of the Holy Ghost was
+painted, which they worshipped on their knees, with great shew of
+devotion, as if they had been what they pretended. The Moors then
+informed our men by signs, that there were many other Christians at
+another place, too far for carrying them there; but that they should be
+conducted to see them when our ships came into the harbour. All this was
+done craftily to entice our people into the harbour, where they were
+determined to destroy them all.
+
+After our two men had seen the city, they were conducted back to the king,
+who ordered them to be shewn ginger, pepper, cloves, and wheat, giving
+them samples of them all to be carried to the general, with assurance
+that he had great store of all these commodities, and would give him his
+loading if he desired it. They were likewise told, that he had great
+plenty of gold, silver, amber, wax, ivory, and other riches, which he
+would sell at lower prices than they could be bought in any other place.
+This message was brought off on Monday to the general; who, hearing the
+kings offer to furnish him with a loading of these commodities, was much
+rejoiced, and was much pleased with the information brought by the two
+convicts, and their good report of the people, city, and country, and
+more especially on account of the _two_ Christians whom they had seen in
+the house of the Indian merchants. After a consultation with the other
+captains, it was determined to enter the port next day, and to accept the
+spices offered by the king of Mambaza, after which, to continue the
+voyage to Calicut; and, if they could not procure similar articles there,
+to return contented with what might be got in this place. In the meantime,
+several of the Moors visited our ships, conducting themselves with much
+gentleness and humility, and evincing an appearance of friendship and
+kindness to our people, as if they had been long and familiarly
+acquainted.
+
+When the tide of flood was sufficiently advanced on the following morning,
+the general gave orders to weigh anchor, intending to carry the ships
+into the harbour. But the Almighty Disposer of events, not willing that
+he and his company should fall into the snare which the Moors had laid
+for their destruction, interposed to avert the danger, and to work their
+safety. For, when the generals ship had weighed anchor, and was about to
+enter the port, she touched on a shoal by the stern; upon which, he
+immediately let fall his anchor again, which was likewise done by the
+other captains. Seeing this, the Moors who were on board concluded that
+he would not enter the harbour that day, and instantly took to their boat,
+which was alongside, and made for the city: At the same time, the pilot
+of Mozambique leapt from the stern of the admirals ship into the water,
+and was taken into the boat by the Moors. The admiral called out to them
+to bring him back, but all in vain; on which he began to suspect that the
+Moors and their king had evil intentions towards him and his people, and
+was thankful for the accident which had detained him from the harbour,
+and preserved him from the purposed treachery. After explaining his
+apprehensions to the other captains, he commanded, in the evening of this
+day, that two of the Moors who had been made prisoners at Mozambique
+should be put to the torture, to endeavour to ascertain whether any
+treachery was intended, and to force them to disclose the same. This was
+done by dropping melted bacon upon their flesh; and they immediately
+confessed that treason was intended, and that the pilots had escaped by
+swimming from the ship, as fearing the same had been discovered. On this
+confession, the general resolved on no account to enter the harbour; yet
+determined to put another Moor to the torture, to learn if he were in
+confederacy with the rest. But this Moor, on seeing preparations made for
+the purpose, although his hands were bound, leapt into the sea; which was
+likewise done by another Moor before day-light.
+
+Having thus discovered the secret mischiefs which had been prepared
+against him, the general gave thanks to God, by whose good providence he
+and his people had been delivered from imminent hazard of death among the
+infidels; whereupon he and his company joined in the _Salve regina_ with
+great devotion. After this, lest the Moors might attempt any thing
+against their safety during the night, he ordered a strong and vigilant
+armed watch to be kept. It is worthy of notice, that all the sick among
+our people, who were indeed many, began presently to get well from their
+first coming to Mombaza; so that in this time of their great necessity
+and danger, they found themselves sound and strong, beyond all human hope,
+and far above the ordinary course of nature; for which reason it can only
+be attributed to the marvellous and supernatural power of God,
+miraculously done at this peculiar instant time of need, for the
+preservation of these poor and distressed persons, whose only hope of
+safety was in him. After the night watch was set, those of the Berrio
+felt the cable by which they lay at anchor swagging, as if shaken by a
+great tunny, of which there were many in this place, very large and
+excellent food: But, on giving more attention to the circumstance, they
+perceived that this was occasioned by their enemies the Moors, some of
+whom were swimming about the cable, and were cutting it with knives or
+falchions, that the ship might drift on shore and fall a prey to them. On
+seeing this, our men scared them away by crying out, and gave notice to
+the other ships to be on their guard against similar attempts. Some
+people from the San Raphael went immediately to the assistance of the
+Berrio, and found some of the Moors about the chains and tacklings of the
+foremast, who cast themselves into the sea, and swam, along with those
+who had attempted to cut the cable, to certain boats that were in waiting
+at a short distance, in which, as our people afterwards learnt, there
+were a great number of the Moors, who now rowed away to the city in all
+haste.
+
+Our fleet still remained off the harbour of Mombaza, all the Wednesday
+and Thursday following; during both of which nights the Moors came off in
+boats, which always lay close by the shore, whence some of them swam to
+the ships, endeavouring to cut our cables: But our men kept such strict
+watch, that they were unable to succeed. Our people, however, were always
+in much fear and perplexity, lest the Moors might burn our ships; and it
+was wonderful they did not make the attempt by means of the ships they
+had in the harbour, which, in all human probability, they had succeeded
+in, killing and destroying us all. It was conjectured that they were
+deterred from making this attempt, from fear of the ordnance in our ships;
+but whatever might appear to us as the cause of their not using open
+force, it was assuredly the good pleasure and favour of God, that put
+their hearts in fear against making an open attack, by which we were
+preserved from the execution of their cruel purposes towards us.
+
+The reason of the general remaining during the two days off Mombaza was,
+that he might endeavour to procure two pilots from thence to carry him to
+Calicut, without which assistance the voyage would have been very
+difficult, as our pilots had no knowledge of that country. But finding
+none were to be had, he took his departure from that place on Friday
+morning, though with a very light wind. On leaving the anchorage, he was
+forced to leave one of his anchors behind, as the crew was so completely
+exhausted by hauling up the rest, that they were unable to weigh this one.
+It was afterwards found by the Moors, and carried into their city, where
+it was deposited near the kings palace. When Don Francisco de Almeida,
+first viceroy of the Indies, took this place from the Moors, this anchor
+was there found, as I shall afterwards relate in the second book of this
+work.
+
+Departing thus from Mombaza, the fleet continued its voyage along the
+coast to the north-east, and having very light wind, was obliged to come
+to anchor in the evening near the shore, about eight leagues from Mombaza.
+Towards the dawn of next day, two sambuccos, or little pinnaces, were
+seen about three leagues to the leeward of the fleet, and out at sea; on
+which, in hope of procuring some pilots who could carry him to Calicut,
+the general ordered the anchors to be weighed, and he and the other
+captains gave chase to the sambuccos the whole of that day. Towards
+vespers, the general came up with and captured one of these pinnaces, but
+the other escaped to the land. In the captured pinnace there were
+seventeen Moors, among whom was an old man who seemed master over the
+rest, and had his young wife along with him. In this boat there was great
+store of silver and gold, and some victuals. On the same evening the
+fleet came to anchor off Melinda, which is eighteen leagues from Mombaza,
+and is in lat. 3 deg. S. This place has no good harbour, being only an almost
+open roadstead, having a kind of natural pier or reef of rocks on which
+the sea beats with much violence, owing to which the ships have to ride
+at a considerable distance from the shore. The city stands in a broad
+open plain, along the shore, surrounded with many palms, and other sorts
+of trees, which are green the whole year. It has also many gardens and
+orchards, abounding with all kinds of herbs and fruits, and many
+fountains of good water. Their oranges are particularly excellent, very
+large and sweet. They have also abundance of millet and rice, plenty both
+of cattle and sheep, and great store of fine poultry, which are very
+cheap. Melinda is a large city, with fair streets, and many good houses
+of stone and lime, containing several storeys, with windows, and having
+terraced roofs made of lime and earth. The native inhabitants are black,
+of well proportioned bodies, having curled hair; but many strangers
+resort thither and dwell in the city, who are Moors from Arabia, who
+conduct themselves in a commendable manner, especially the gentlemen or
+better sort. These, from the girdle upwards, go naked; but below the
+girdle they are dressed in silk, or fine stuffs of cotton, though some
+wear short cotton cloaks, after the old fashion. On their heads they wear
+certain cloths embroidered with silk and gold. They wear also rich
+daggers, ornamented with silken tassels of many colours, and very
+handsome swords. They are all left-handed, and go constantly armed with
+bows and arrows, taking great delight in archery, at which they are very
+expert. They account themselves good horsemen; yet there is a common
+saying on this coast, _the horsemen of Mombaza, and the women of
+Melinda_, as in Mombaza they are excellent horsemen, and the women of
+Melinda are very handsome, and dress richly.
+
+In this city also there are many Gentiles from the kingdom of Cambaya in
+India, who are great merchants and trade to this place for gold, which is
+found in this country, as likewise ambergris, ivory, pitch, and wax; all
+of which commodities the inhabitants of Melinda exchange with the
+merchants of Cambaya for copper, quicksilver, and cotton cloth, to the
+profit and advantage of both parties. The king of this city is a Moor,
+who is served with far more state than any of the kings on this coast to
+the southwards. Being arrived over against this city, the general and all
+the people of the fleet were much rejoiced at seeing a city resembling
+those of Portugal, and gave thanks to God for their safe arrival. Being
+desirous of procuring pilots to navigate the fleet to Calicut, the
+general commanded to come to anchor, meaning to use his endeavours for
+this purpose. For, hitherto, he could not learn from the Moors he had
+lately captured, whether any of them were pilots; and though he had
+threatened them with the torture, they always persisted in declaring that
+none of them had any skill in pilotage.
+
+Next day, being Easter eve, the old Moor who had been made prisoner in
+the pinnace, told the general that there were four ships belonging to
+Christians of the Indies at Melinda, and engaged, if the general would
+allow him and the other Moors to go on shore, he would provide him, as
+his ransom, Christian pilots, and would farther supply him with every
+thing he might need. Well pleased with the speeches of the old Moor, the
+general removed his ships to within half a league of the city, whence
+hitherto no one came off to our fleet, as they feared our men might make
+them prisoners; for they had received intelligence that we were
+Christians, and believed our ships were men of war. On the Monday morning,
+therefore, the general commanded the old Moor to be landed on a ledge, or
+rock, opposite the city, and left there, expecting they would send from
+the city to fetch him off; which they did accordingly as soon as our boat
+departed. The Moor was carried directly to the king, to whom he said, as
+instructed by the general, what he chiefly desired to have. He farther
+said, that the general desired to have amity with the king, of whom he
+had heard a good report, hoping by his aid, and with the will of God, he
+might be enabled to discover the route to India. The king received this
+message favourably, and sent back the Moor in a boat to the general,
+accompanied by one of his own servants and a priest, saying, that he
+would most willingly conclude a treaty of amity with him, and should
+supply him with what pilots he needed. These messengers likewise
+presented the general from the king, with three sheep, and a great many
+oranges, and sugar canes, which he thankfully accepted; desiring the
+messengers to acquaint their master, that he gladly agreed to the
+profered amity, and was ready to confirm the same between them, and
+promised to enter their harbour next day. He farther desired them to
+inform the king, that he was the subject of a great and powerful
+sovereign in the west, who had sent him to discover the way to Calicut,
+with orders to enter into peace and amity with all kings and princes on
+whose territories he might happen to touch by the way. That it was now
+_two years_[40] since he left his own country, and that the king his
+master was a prince of such puissance and worth as he was convinced the
+king of Melinda would be glad to have for a friend. He then dismissed the
+messengers, sending as a present to their king a hat of the fashion of
+the time, two branches of coral, three brass basons, two scarfs, and some
+small bells.
+
+On the second day after Easter, the general removed his ships nearer the
+city. The king knowing this, and believing that the king of Portugal must
+be a high-spirited prince, and the general a worthy subject, who had
+hazarded himself in so long and dangerous a voyage, became desirous of
+seeing such men; wherefore, he sent a more honourable message to the
+general, saying, that he proposed next day to visit him in person,
+intending that their meeting should be on the water; and sent him a
+present of six sheep, with a considerable quantity of cloves, ginger,
+pepper, and nutmegs. Upon this message, the general removed his fleet
+still nearer the city, and came to anchor close to the four ships of the
+Indies, of which the old Moor had made mention as belonging to Christians.
+When the owners of these ships learnt that we were Christians, they came
+immediately to visit our general, who happened then to be in the ship of
+Paulo de la Gama. These men were of a brown colour, but of good stature
+and well proportioned, dressed in long white cotton gowns, having large
+beards, and the hair of their heads long like women, and plaited up under
+their turbans or head-dresses. The general received them with much
+kindness and attention, asking, by means of an interpreter, who
+understood the language of Algarve, or Arabic, whether they were
+Christians. These men had some knowledge of that language, though it was
+not their own tongue, but had learnt it in the course of their trade and
+conversation with the Moors of Melinda, of whom they advised the general
+to beware, lest their inward intentions might be far different from their
+outward shew. Willing to make trial if these men were really Christians,
+the general caused a picture to be shewn them, on which our Lady was
+painted weeping, surrounded by some of the apostles, but without
+informing them what this was meant to represent. Immediately on this
+being set before them, they fell down and worshipped the picture, praying
+for some time. The general then asked if they were of Calicut; on which
+they answered they were of Grangalor[41], still farther off, and could
+give him no information respecting Calicut. From this time, so long as
+our fleet remained at Melinda, these people came every day on board the
+ship of Paulo de la Gama, to pay their devotions before this picture,
+offering to the images which it represented gifts of pepper and other
+things. These Indian Christians, according to their own account, eat no
+beef.
+
+On the last day of the week after Easter, and in the afternoon, the king
+of Melinda came off in a great boat to our fleet. He was dressed in a
+cassock of crimson damask lined with green satin, and wore, a rich cloth
+or turban on his head. He sat in a chair, of the ancient fashion, very
+well made and wrought with wire, having a silk cushion; and on another
+chair beside him, there lay a hat of crimson satin. An old man stood by
+him as his page, who carried a very rich sword with a silver scabbard. In
+the boat there were many sacbuts, and two ivory flutes eight spans long,
+on which they played by a little hole in the middle, agreeing and
+according well with the music of the sacbuts. The king was likewise
+attended by about twenty Moorish gentlemen, all richly dressed. When the
+king had nearly attained our ships, the general went to meet him in his
+boat, gaily decorated with flags and streamers, himself dressed in his
+best apparel, and attended by twelve of the principal officers of the
+squadron, leaving his brother in charge of the ships. On the boats
+meeting, the two parties made every demonstration of friendship and
+respect; and the Moorish king immediately offered to come on board the
+generals boat, that he might see him the better. The general accordingly
+received him with all respect, and the king shewed as much honour and
+courtesy to the general as if he had been likewise a king. The Moorish
+king, after examining the dress and appearance of the general and his men
+with the utmost attention, asked the general the name of his king, which
+he commanded to be immediately written down. He particularly inquired
+respecting the power of the king of Portugal, and the general gave the
+most satisfactory answers to all his questions; particularly detailing
+the reasons of his being sent to discover Calicut, that Portugal might be
+thence supplied with spices, which were not to be had in his own country.
+The king, after giving him some information on these points, and
+respecting the straits of the Red Sea, promised to furnish the general
+with a pilot to carry him to Calicut, and then earnestly solicited him to
+accompany him to the city, where he might solace and refresh himself in
+the palace, after the fatigues and dangers of so long a voyage; and
+promised, if the general would do so, that he the king would visit him on
+board. To this the general prudently answered that he was not authorised
+by his instructions to go on shore, and that he could not answer for
+deviating from the orders of his sovereign. On this the king observed,
+that if he were to visit the ships, he could not well answer for his
+conduct to the inhabitants of his city; yet, he was grieved that the
+admiral refused to go into the city, which should be at his will and
+pleasure, and that of the king his master, to whom he should either write
+or send an ambassador, if the general would call in at Melinda on his
+return from Calicut. The general gave the king thanks for his politeness,
+and promised to return that way; and, while this conversation was going
+on, he sent for the Moors who had been taken in the pinnace, whom he
+presented to the king, saying, he would most gladly perform any other
+service that lay in his power to the king. The king was greatly pleased
+with this gift, which he valued as much as if the admiral had given him
+another city equal to Melinda.
+
+Having ended their conversation, and confirmed their mutual friendship,
+the king rowed through among our ships, examining them with much pleasure
+and admiration, and was saluted in passing by many discharges of the
+ordnance, at which he and his attendants seemed much delighted. On this
+occasion, the general attended upon him in his own boat out of respect,
+and the king observed, that he never was so much pleased with any men as
+with the Portuguese, and would most gladly have some of them to help him
+in his wars. To this the general answered, that if his highness were to
+have experience of what they were able to perform, he would like the
+Portuguese still better; and that they should certainly give him aid, if
+it should please the king of Portugal to send any of his war ships to
+Calicut, which he did not doubt would be the case, if it were Gods will
+to permit the discovery of that place. After the king had satisfied his
+curiosity, he requested of the general, since he would not go himself
+into the city, to permit two of his men to go and see the palace,
+offering to leave his own son, and one of his chief priests, which they
+named Cacis[42], in pledge for their safe return. To this request the
+general consented, and sent two of our men along with the king: He, at
+his departure, requested that the general would next day, in his boat,
+come close to the shore, when he should be gratified with a sight of the
+native horsemen going through their evolutions. After this they separated.
+
+Next day, being Thursday, the general and Nicholas Coello went in their
+boats well armed along the shore, according to the invitation of the king,
+keeping at a small distance from each other for mutual defence in case of
+need, where they saw many men skirmishing on the shore. As our boats
+approached the royal palace, certain of the kings attendants brought him
+in a chair down some stone stairs which led to the water; and, being then
+very near the generals boat, the king entered into friendly conversation
+with him, and once more entreated him to land and go to the palace;
+saying, that his father, who was lame, was exceedingly desirous to see
+him, and even offered, that, while the general remained on shore, he and
+his children would go on board the ships as hostages for his security.
+But our general, still dreading that some bitter treachery might lurk
+beneath this honied speech, continued to excuse himself from landing, as
+he had not permission from his own prince to do so, and must obey him, in
+all things. After this, taking his leave of the king, he rowed past the
+ships of the Indian merchants, which he saluted in passing with his
+ordnance; and when they saw us pass, they held up their hands, exclaiming
+Christe! Christe!
+
+That night, having obtained leave from the king, our men made them a
+great feast, with much diversion, also of squibs, firing of guns, and
+loud cries. The fleet remained at anchor for two days without any message
+from the shore, on which account the general was much distressed, fearing
+the king had taken offence at his refusal to go on shore, and might break
+the peace and amity between them, and not send him any pilot. But on
+Sunday the 21st of April, a person who was in high credit with the king,
+came off to visit the general, who was much disappointed when this person
+brought no pilot, and again began to entertain suspicions of the kings
+intentions. When the king learnt this, and that the general remained
+merely for the purpose of having a pilot, he sent him one who was a
+Gentile, called _Gosarate_[43] in their language, and whose name was
+_Canaca_, sending an apology at the same time for not having sent this
+person sooner. Thus the king and the general remained friends, and the
+peace continued which had been agreed between them.
+
+"De Barros and Faria give this pilot the name of _Malemo Cana_, and say
+that he belonged to one of the Indian ships of Cambaya, then at Melinda.
+De Barros adds, that he shewed De Gama a very small chart of the coast of
+India, laid down with meridians and parallels, but without rhumbs of the
+winds. This pilot shewed no surprise on seeing the large wooden and metal
+astrolabes belonging to the Portuguese, as the pilots of the Red Sea had
+long used brass triangular instruments and quadrants for astronomical
+observations, and that he and others who sailed from Cambaya, and the
+ports of India, navigated by the north and south stars, and the
+constellations of the eastern and western hemispheres; and, though they
+did not use these instruments in navigation, they employed one made of
+three pieces of board, similar to the _balhestillia_, or cross-staff of
+the Portuguese.
+
+"In a collection of papers published in 1790, called _Documentos
+Arabicos_, from the royal archives of Lisbon, chiefly consisting of
+letters between the kings of Portugal and the tributary princes of the
+east in the sixteenth century, the _zeque, sheik_, or king of Melinda,
+with whom De Gama afterwards made a treaty of alliance, and whose
+ambassador he carried into Portugal, was named Wagerage[44]."
+
+Having thus procured a pilot, and provided all things necessary for the
+voyage, De Gama departed from Melinda for Calicut, on Friday the 26th of
+April 1498[45], and immediately made sail directly across the gulf which
+separates Africa from India, which is 750 leagues[46]. This golf runs a
+long way up into the land northwards; but our course for Calicut lay to
+the east[47]. In following this voyage, our men saw the north star next
+Sunday, which they had not seen of a long while; and they saw the stars
+about the south pole at the same time. They gave thanks to God, that,
+whereas it had been represented to them, that in this season, which was
+the winter of the Indies, there were always great storms in this gulf,
+they now experienced fair weather. On Friday the 18th of May, twenty-
+three days after leaving Melinda, during all which time they had seen no
+land, they came in sight of India, at eight leagues distance, the land
+seeming very high. Canaca, the pilot, tried the lead and found forty-five
+fathoms, upon which he altered his course to the south-east, having
+fallen in with the land too far to the north. Upon the Saturday, he again
+drew near the land, but did not certainly know it, as the view was
+obscured by rain, which, always falls in India at this season, being
+their winter. On Sunday the 20th of May, the pilot got view of certain
+high hills which are directly behind the city of Calicut, and came so
+near the land that he was quite sure of the place; on which he came up
+with great joy to the general, demanding his _albrycias_, or reward, as
+this was the place at which he and his company were so desirous to arrive.
+The general was greatly rejoiced at this news, and immediately satisfied
+the pilot, after which, he summoned all the company to prayers, saying
+the _salve_, and giving hearty thanks to God, who had safely conducted
+them to the long wished-for place of his destination. When prayer was
+over, there was great festivity and joy in the ships, which came that
+same evening to anchor two leagues from Calicut. Immediately upon
+anchoring, some of the natives came off to the ships in four boats,
+called _almadias_, inquiring whence our ships came, as they had never
+before seen any resembling their construction upon that coast. These
+natives were of a brown colour, and entirely naked, excepting very small
+aprons. Some of them immediately came on board the general, and the
+Guzerat pilot informed him these were poor fishermen; yet the general
+received them courteously, and ordered his people to purchase the fish
+which they had brought for sale. On conversing with them, he understood
+that the town whence they came, which was in sight, was not Calicut,
+which lay farther off, and to which they offered to conduct our fleet.
+Whereupon the general requested them to do this; and, departing from this
+first anchorage, the fleet was conducted by these fishermen to Calicut.
+
+Calicut is a city on the coast of Malabar, a province of the second India,
+which begins at the mount of Delhi, and ends at Cape Comory, being sixty-
+one leagues in length, and fifteen leagues broad[48]. The whole of this
+country is very low, and apt to be covered with water, having many
+islands in its rivers, which flow into the Indian Sea. This country of
+Malabar is divided from the kingdom of Narsinga by a very high hill. The
+Indians report that this land of Malabar was covered by the sea of old,
+which then reached to the foot of the hills, and thence to a hill, where
+now the islands of the Maldives are found, which were then firm land; and
+that in after times it destroyed that latter country, and laid bare the
+country of Malabar, in which are many pleasant and rich cities, dependent
+upon trade, which they carry on principally with Calicut, which exceeds
+all cities of our days in riches and in vice. Its foundation and rise was
+as follows: In ancient times, this country of Malabar was entirely ruled
+by one king, who dwelt in the city of _Coulan_. In the reign of the last
+king of this race, named _Saranaperimal_[49], who died 600 years ago, the
+Moors of Mecca discovered India, and came to the province of Malabar,
+then inhabited by idolaters, and governed by an idolatrous king. From the
+time of the coming of these Moors, they began to reckon their years as we
+do, from the birth of our Saviour[50]. After the coming of the Moors into
+Malabar, they insinuated themselves so much into the confidence of the
+before-mentioned king, that he became a convert to their law, renouncing
+the religion of his country, and embracing Mahometism with such zeal,
+that he resolved to go and end his days in the temple of Mecca. Having
+thus resolved, out of love to the Mahometan sect, to abandon his kingdom,
+he called his kindred together, and divided all his territories among
+them, reserving only twelve leagues of country near the place where he
+intended to embark, not then inhabited, which he bestowed upon one of his
+cousins who acted as his page. To this kinsman he gave his sword and
+turban, as ensigns of dignity; commanding all the other nobles, among
+whom he had distributed the rest of his territories, to obey this person
+as their emperor, the kings of Coulan and Cananor only excepted; whom
+also, and all the others, he debarred from coining money, which was only
+to be done by the king of Calicut. Having thus given away his whole
+dignities and possessions, and set every thing in order, he embarked from
+the place where Calicut now stands; and because this king embarked from
+that place on his pilgrimage to Mecca, the Moors have ever since held
+Calicut in so high devotion, that they and all their posterity would
+never take their lading from any other port. From that time forwards,
+they discontinued trade with the port of Coulan, which they had used
+formerly, and that port therefore fell to ruin; especially after the
+building of Calicut, and the settlement of many Moors in that place[51].
+
+As the Moors are merchants of most extensive dealings, they have rendered
+Calicut, as the centre of their trade, the richest mart of all the Indies;
+in which is to be found all the spices, drugs, nutmegs, and other things
+that can be desired, all kinds of precious stones, pearls and seed-pearls,
+musk, sanders, aguila, fine dishes of earthen ware, lacker[52], gilded
+coffers, and all the fine things of China, gold, amber, wax, ivory, fine
+and coarse cotton goods, both white and dyed of many colours, much raw
+and twisted silk, stuffs of silk and gold, cloth of gold, cloth of tissue,
+grain, scarlets, silk carpets, copper, quicksilver, vermilion, alum,
+coral, rose-water, and all kinds of conserves. Thus, every kind of
+merchandize from all parts of the world is to be found in this place;
+which, moreover, is very quiet, being situated along the coast, which is
+almost open and very dangerous. Calicut is surrounded by many gardens and
+orchards, producing all the herbs and fruits of this country in great
+abundance, having also many palms and other sorts of trees, and abounds
+in excellent water. This part of India produces but little rice, which is
+a principal article of food in these parts, as wheat is with us; but it
+procures abundance of that and all other kinds of provisions from other
+countries. The city is large, but the dwellings consist only of straw
+huts; their idol temples, and chapels, and the kings palace excepted,
+which are: built of stone and lime and covered with tiles; for, by their
+laws, no others are permitted to build their houses of any other material
+than straw. At this time, Calicut was inhabited by idolaters of many
+sects, and by many Moorish merchants, some of whom were so rich as to be
+owners of fifty ships. These ships are made without nails, their planks
+being sewed together with ropes of _cayro_, made of the fibres of the
+cocoa-nut husk, pitched all over, and are flat-bottomed, without keels.
+Every winter there are at least six hundred ships in this harbour, and
+the shore is such, that their ships can be easily drawn up for repairs.
+
+"The subjects of the following digression are so intimately connected
+with the first establishment of the Portuguese in India, as to justify
+its introduction in this place, which will greatly elucidate the
+narrative of Castaneda; and its length did not admit of being inserted in
+the form of notes. It is chiefly due to the ingenious and Reverend James
+Stanier Clarke, in his Origin and Progress of Maritime Discovery,
+extracted by him from various sources."
+
+"The name of this country, Malabar, is said to be derived from _ulyam_,
+which signifies, in the original language of that part of India,
+_skirting the bottom of the hills_, corrupted into Maleyam or Maleam,
+whence probably came Mulievar, and Mala-bar. In a MS. account of Malabar,
+it is said that little more than 2300 years ago, the sea came up to the
+foot of the _Sukien_ mountains, or the western _gauts_. The emerging of
+the country from the waters is fabulously related to have been occasioned
+by the piety or penitence of Puresram Rama, who prayed to _Varauna_, the
+God of the ocean, to give him a track of land to bestow on the Bramins.
+Varauna accordingly commanded the sea to withdraw from the _Gowkern_, a
+hill near Mangalore, all the way to Cape Comorin; which new land long
+remained marshy and scarcely habitable, and the original settlers were
+forced to abandon it on account of the numerous serpents by which it was
+infested: But they afterwards returned, being instructed to propitiate
+the serpents by worshipping them."
+
+"At first this country was divided into four _Tookrees_ or provinces,
+these into _Naadhs_ or districts, and these again into _Khunds_ or small
+precincts. The Bramins established a kind of republican or aristocratical
+government, under a few principal chiefs; but jealousies and disturbances
+taking place, they procured a _Permaul_ or chief governor from the prince
+of Chaldesh, a sovereignty in the southern Carnatic: Yet it is more
+likely that this sovereign took advantage of the divisions among the
+chiefs of Malabar, to reduce them under his authority. These permauls or
+viceroys were for a long while changed every twelve years; till at length
+one of them, named Sheo-Ram, Cheruma Perumal, or Shermanoo Permaloo, the
+Sarana-perimal of Castaneda, became so popular that he set his master
+_Kishen Rao_, the rajah of Chaldesh, at defiance, and established his own
+authority in Malabar. An army was sent into Malabar to reduce the country
+again to obedience, but it was defeated, and from this event, which is
+said to have happened 1000 years ago, all the rajahs, chief _nayres_, and
+other lords of Malabar, date the sovereignty and independence of their
+ancestors in that country."
+
+"After some time, Shermanoo-Permaloo, either became weary of his
+situation, or from attachment to the Mahometan religion, resolved to make
+a division of Malabar among his dependents, from whom the present
+chieftains are descended. Such is the current story among the inhabitants
+of Malabar; yet it is more probable that his dependent chieftains,
+disgusted with his conversion to the religion of Mahomet, revolted from
+his authority, and contrived this story of his voluntary surrender and
+division of his dominions, to justify their own assumptions. After this
+division of his kingdom, it is said that an _erary_, or person of the
+cast of cow-herds, originally from the banks of the Cavery, near Errode
+in the Carnatic, who had been a chief instrument of the success of
+Shermanoo-Permaloo in the war against rajah Kishen Rao, made application
+to Shermanoo for some support. Having very little left to give away,
+Shermanoo made him a grant of his own place of abode at Calicut, and gave
+him his sword; ankle-rings, and other insignia of command, and presented
+him with water and flowers, the ancient symbols of a transfer of property.
+It is said that this cowherd rajah was ordained principal sovereign over
+the other petty princes among whom Malabar was divided, with the title of
+Zamorin, and was authorized by Shermanoo to extend his dominion over all
+the other chieftains by force of arms. His descendants have ever since
+endeavoured, on all occasions, to enforce this pretended grant, which
+they pretend to hold by the tenure of possessing the sword of Shermanoo
+Permaloo, and which they carefully preserve as a precious relic."
+
+"From the period of the abdication of Shermanoo, to that of the arrival
+of the Portuguese at Calicut, the Mahomedan religion had made
+considerable progress in Malabar; and the Arabian merchants received
+every encouragement from the Samoories or Zamorins, as they made Calicut
+the staple of their Indian trade, and brought large sums of money yearly
+to that place, for the purchase of spiceries and other commodities. As
+the rajahs of Cochin and other petty sovereignties on the coast, were
+exceedingly jealous of the superior riches and power of the zamorins, and
+of the monopoly of trade enjoyed by Calicut, they gave every
+encouragement to the Portuguese to frequent their ports; from whence
+arose a series of warfare by sea and land, which has finally reduced them
+all under subjection to the Europeans."
+
+"According to an Arabian author, _Zeirreddien Mukhdom_, who is supposed
+to have been sent to assist the zamorins and the Mahomedans in India, in
+their wars with the Portuguese, Malabar is then said to have been divided
+among a multiplicity of independent princes or rajahs, whom he calls
+_Hakims_, some of whom commanded over one or two hundred men, and others
+one, ten, fifteen, or even as high as thirty, thousand, or upwards.
+The three greatest powers at that time were, the _Colastrian_[53] rajah
+to the north, the zamorin of Calicut in the centre, and a rajah in the
+south, who ruled from Coulan, Kalum, or Coulim, to Cape Comorin,
+comprehending the country now belonging to the rajah of Travancore."
+
+"We now return from this digression, to follow the narrative of the
+Portuguese Discovery and Conquest of India, as related by Castaneda."
+
+So great was the trade and population of Calicut and the surrounding
+country, and the revenues of its sovereign through these circumstances,
+that he was able to raise a force of thirty thousand men in a single day,
+and could even bring an hundred thousand men into the field, completely
+equipt for war, in three days. This prince, in the language of the
+country, was styled the Zamorin, or Samoryn, which signifies Emperor; as
+he was supreme over the other two kings of Malabar, the king of Coulan
+and the king of Cananor. There were indeed other princes in this country,
+who were called kings, but were not so. This zamorin or king of Calicut
+was a bramin, as his predecessors had been, the bramins being priests
+among the Malabars. It is an ancient rule and custom among these people,
+that all their kings must die in a pagoda[54], or temple of their idols;
+and that there must always be a king resident in the principal pagoda, to
+serve those idols: Wherefore, when the king that serves in the temple
+comes to die, he who then reigns must leave his government of temporal
+affairs to take his place in the temple; upon which another is elected to
+take his place, and to succeed in ruling the kingdom. If the king who is
+in possession of the temporal authority should refuse to retire to the
+pagoda, on the death of the king who officiated in spirituals, he is
+constrained to do so, however unwilling.
+
+The kings and nobles of Malabar are of a brown complexion, and go naked
+from the waist upwards, all the under parts of their bodies being clothed
+in silk or cotton Vestments; yet they sometimes wear short gowns on their
+upper parts, called _basus_, of rich silk, or cloth of gold, or of
+scarlet, splendidly ornamented with precious stones, of all which the
+zamorin hath great store. They shave their beards, leaving only the hair
+on their upper lips, and do not shave the head like the Turks. In general,
+the natives of this country, even of the higher ranks, use little state
+in their households, and are very sparing in their diet; but the zamorin
+is served with considerable splendour. These kings or nobles never marry;
+but every one has a mistress of the Nayre cast, which, among the Malabars,
+are considered as the gentry; even the zamorin has only a mistress, who
+has a house of her own near the palace, and a liberal allowance for the
+charges of her household and maintenance at her own disposal. Upon any
+dislike or difference, he may always leave her for another. The children
+are only considered as the offspring of the mother, and have no right or
+title to inherit the kingdom, or any thing else belonging to the father;
+and when grown up, are only held in that rank or estimation which belongs
+to the blood or parentage of their mother. Brothers succeed to brothers;
+and in lack of these, the sons of their sisters, who do not marry, and
+have no certainty respecting the fathers of their children; as they are
+very free and dissolute in their manners, choosing paramours as they
+please.
+
+These sisters of the zamorin, and other kings of Malabar, have handsome
+allowances to live upon; and when any of them reaches the age of ten,
+their kindred send for a young man of the Nayre cast, out of the kingdom,
+and give him great presents to induce him to initiate the young virgin;
+after which he hangs a jewel round her neck, which she wears all the rest
+of her life, as a token that she is now at liberty to dispose of herself
+to any one she pleases as long as she lives.
+
+When these kings are at war with each other, they often go personally
+into the field, and even join personally in fight upon occasion. When one
+of them dies, the body is carried out into the fields, and burned on a
+pile of sanders, and of another sweet smelling wood called _aguila_, all
+his brothers and kindred, and all the nobles of the country being present
+at the ceremony; which is uniformly postponed to the third day after
+death, that all may have time to gather from a distance, and may have an
+opportunity of being assured whether his death was natural, or caused by
+violence: Since, if he died by the hand of any one, all are bound to
+prosecute revenge. After the body is burnt, and the ashes buried, the
+whole company shaves every part of their bodies, even to the youngest
+child of these idolaters. This is their token of mourning; and during the
+ensuing thirteen days, they all refrain from chewing betel, any one
+infringing this law being punished by cutting his lips. During this
+period of thirteen days, he who is to succeed to the throne must abstain
+from all exercise of government, that any one who pleases may have an
+opportunity of urging any valid objection why he should not acquire the
+vacant government. After, this the successor is sworn before all the
+nobles of the country, to preserve and enforce all the laws and customs
+of their ancestors, to pay the debts of his predecessor, and to use his
+utmost endeavours to recover any portion of the kingdom that may have
+been lost. While taking this oath, having his sword in his left hand, he
+holds in his right hand a burning candle, on which is a gold ring, which
+he touches with his fingers. After this they throw some grains of rice
+over him, using many other ceremonies, and numerous prayers, and then
+worship the sun three times. When all these ceremonies are gone through,
+all the _Caymayles_, or lords of noble birth, taking hold of the candle,
+take an oath to be true and faithful subjects to the new king.
+
+After the end of the thirteen days mourning, they all begin to chew betel,
+and to eat flesh and fish as formerly, the new king alone excepted. He is
+bound to mourn for his predecessor during a whole year, chewing no betel,
+eating no flesh or fish, neither shaving his beard nor cutting; his nails
+during all that time. He must eat only once a-day, washing himself all
+over before this single meal, and devoting certain hours of every day to
+prayer. After the expiry of the year, he uses a certain ceremony for the
+soul of the king his predecessor, much like our solemn dirge; at which
+100,000 persons are often assembled, among whom he distributes large alms.
+When this ceremony is ended, the prince is confirmed as inheritor of the
+kingdom, and all the people depart.
+
+The zamorin of Calicut, and the other kings of Malabar, have each one
+especial officer, to whom the administration of justice is confided, and
+whose authority in all matters of government is as ample as that of the
+king himself. The soldiers employed by these kings are called _Nayres_,
+who are all gentlemen, and who follow no other office or employ but that
+of fighting when needed. They are all idolaters, armed with bows, arrows,
+spears, daggers of a hooked form, and targets, and they march in a very
+regular and warlike manner; but they go entirely naked and barefooted,
+wearing only a piece of painted cotton cloth, which reaches from the
+girdle to the knees, and a cloth or kerchief on their heads. All these
+men live continually at the charge of the king and nobles of the country,
+from whom they have small stipends for their maintenance; and they esteem
+themselves so highly on account of their gentility of blood, that they
+will not touch an husbandman, nor allow any such to enter into their
+dwellings. When any husbandman goes through the streets they must
+continually call out aloud _hoo hoo_; for if commanded by a nayre to make
+way, they may be slain if they refuse. The king cannot raise any one to
+the rank of a _nayre_, who are all such by descent. These _nayres_ serve
+very faithfully under those who give them their wages, not sparing by day
+or night to use their best endeavours to serve their chiefs, nor making
+any account of want of food or sleep, or of fatigue, when their service
+is required or may be effectual. Their expences are so small, that on
+half-a-crown, which is their only monthly pay, they can sufficiently
+maintain themselves and a boy, whom each has as a servant.
+
+By the laws of this country, these nayres cannot marry, so that no one
+has any certain or acknowledged son or father; all their children being
+born of mistresses, with each of whom three or four nayres cohabit by
+agreement among themselves. Each one of this confraternity dwells a day
+in his turn with the joint mistress, counting from noon of one day to the
+same time of the next, after which he departs, and another comes for the
+like time. They thus spend their lives without the care or trouble of
+wives and children, yet maintain their mistresses well according to their
+rank. Any one may forsake his mistress at his pleasure; and in like
+manner, the mistress may refuse admittance to any one oL her lovers when
+she pleases. These mistresses are all gentlewomen of the Nayre cast; and
+the nayres, besides being prohibited from marrying, must not attach
+themselves to any woman of a different rank. Considering that there are
+always several men attached to one woman, the nayres never look upon any
+of these children born of their mistresses as belonging to them, however
+strong a resemblance may subsist, and all inheritances among the nayres
+go to their brothers, or the sons of their sisters, born of the same
+mothers, all relationship being counted only by female consanguinity and
+descent. This strange law prohibiting marriage, was established, that
+they might have neither wives or children on whom to fix their love and
+attachment; and that being free from all family cares, they might the
+more willingly devote themselves entirely to warlike service. And the
+more to animate these gentlemen in the service of the wars, and to
+encourage them to continue in the order of nayres, they are privileged
+from all imprisonments, and from the punishment of death on all ordinary
+occasions, except for the following crimes; killing another nayre, or a
+cow which is an object of worship, sleeping or eating with an ordinary
+woman, or speaking evil of the king. When the king has received authentic
+information of any of these offences having been committed, he issues a
+written mandate to one of the nayres, commanding him to take two or three
+other nayres in his company, and to slay the nayre who has committed this
+offence against the laws. In obedience to this warrant, they attack him
+with their swords and put him to death where-ever they happen to find him,
+and then affix the royal order upon his body, that all may know the
+reason of his death.
+
+It is not permitted to any nayre to assume arms, or to enter into any
+combat, till he has been armed as a knight. When a nayre becomes seven
+years old, he is set to learn the use of all kinds of weapons, their
+masters first pulling and twisting their joints to make them supple, and
+then teaching them to fence and handle their arms adroitly. Their
+principal weapons are swords and targets; and these teachers, who are
+graduates in the use of the weapons, are called _Panycaes_, who are much
+esteemed among the nayres, and all their former scholars, however
+advanced in life or however high their dignity, are bound at all times to
+give them due honour and reverence when they meet; likewise, every
+_nayre_ is obliged to take lessons from these professors for two months
+yearly, all their lives: By this means they are very skilful in the use
+of their weapons, in which they take great pride. When a nayre desires to
+be armed as a knight, he presents himself before the king, accompanied by
+all his kindred and friends, and makes an offering of sixty gold fannoms
+[55]. On which he is asked by the king if he is willing to observe and
+follow the laws and customs of the nayres, to which he answers in the
+affirmative. Then the king commands him to be girt with a sword, and
+laying his right hand on his head, utters certain words as if praying in
+so low a voice that he is not heard. The king then embraces the young
+nayre, saying aloud in their language, "Take good care to defend the
+Bramins and their kine." On this the nayre falls down and does reverence
+to the king; and from that time he is considered as a knight, or member
+of the fraternity of nayres. When any of the nayres enters into the
+peculiar service of the king or of any individual noble, he binds himself
+to die with and for him, and they keep their oaths. For, if their master
+should happen to be slain in any war or otherwise, they will fight till
+they are all slain; and if they cannot accomplish their purpose at the
+time, or happen to be absent at the slaughter of their master, they go
+afterwards in search of the person who has done the deed, and never leave
+off till they are themselves slain.
+
+The Malabars are much given to soothsaying, and have lucky and unlucky
+days. They worship the sun moon and stars, the fire, cows, and the first
+thing they meet on going out of a morning, believing every manner of
+vanity. The devil is often in them, but they say it is one of their gods
+or _pagods_, as they call him. But whosoever or whatsoever it may be, it
+constrains them to utter terrible words, which are believed by the king.
+When the devil enters into a nayre, he goes with a naked sword before the
+king, shaking and trembling and giving himself many wounds, saying, "I am
+such or such a god, and am come to tell thee such and such a thing,"
+crying out, and behaving himself like a madman or one possessed. If the
+king makes any doubt of what he says, he continues to roar still louder
+and to slash himself more severely, till the king gives credit to his
+assertions. There are other tribes or lineages of people among the
+Malabars, of various sects and divers customs, of whom it were too
+tedious to speak in this place, who are all under obedience to the
+several kings and nobles. The Moors alone are exempted from this
+obedience, on account of the large customs they pay for their merchandize,
+owing to which they are held in high estimation at Calicut.
+
+Having come to anchor on the outside of the bar or reef of Calicut, the
+general sent one of the Portuguese convicts on shore, in one of the
+almadias which had conducted the ships to this port; instructing him to
+see what kind of a place it was, and to make trial of what kind of a
+reception might be looked for, seeing we were Christians, and as the
+general believed that the people were likewise Christians. When this man
+landed, he was immediately surrounded by great numbers of the natives,
+staring at him as a stranger. These people asked of the fishermen what
+man this was whom they had brought on shore? to which they answered, that
+they supposed him to be a Moor, and that he belonged to the three ships
+which were riding without the bar. But the people of Calicut wondered
+much to see a person who was clothed so very differently from the Moors
+who came from the Red Sea. Some of these people who had knowledge of
+Arabic spoke to this man, but he could not understand or answer them, at
+which they were much astonished. Yet, believing him to be a Moor, they
+conducted him to a house where two Moors dwelt who came originally from
+Tunis and had established themselves in Calicut. On his appearance, one
+of these Moors whose name was Bontaybo[56], who could speak Spanish,
+immediately recognized him for a Portuguese, having often seen people of
+our nation at Tunis in the reign of King John, in a ship named La Reyna
+which often traded to that port. As soon as Bontaybo saw the Portuguese,
+he exclaimed in Spanish, _Devil take you, what brought you here_? He
+farther inquired which way he had travelled so as to arrive at Calicut?
+To this the banished man answered, telling how many ships our general had
+brought with him; at which Bontaybo was much amazed, wondering how they
+could possibly come by sea from Portugal to India. He then asked what
+they sought at so great a distance from home? And was answered that they
+came in search of Christians and spices. Bontaybo then asked why the
+kings of France and Spain and the Doge of Venice had not sent their ships
+likewise? Because, said our man, the king of Portugal would not allow
+them. To this Bontaybo said, he was much in the right. After some farther
+conversation in this way, Bontaybo gave him good entertainment,
+commanding certain cakes of wheat flour and honey, called _apes_ by the
+Malabars, to be set before him; and then said that he would accompany him
+to the ships to wait upon the general.
+
+Bontaybo accordingly came on board our general, whom he immediately
+addressed in Spanish, saying, "Good luck! good luck! many rubies, many
+emeralds. Thou art bound to give God thanks for having brought thee where
+there is abundance of all sorts of spices, precious stones, and all the
+other riches of the world." On hearing this, the general and all the
+people were greatly astonished, not expecting to meet any one so far from
+home who understood their language; and even shed tears of joy for this
+happy circumstance, and their safe arrival. They all then joined in
+humble and hearty thanks to the Almighty, by whose favour and assistance
+alone this great happiness and good fortune had been accorded to them.
+The general embraced Bontaybo, whom he made to sit beside him, and
+questioned him if he were a Christian, and how he came to Calicut.
+Bontaybo told him frankly that he was a Moor from Tunis in Barbary, and
+had come to Calicut by way of Cairo and the Red Sea, and explained how he
+came to know the Portuguese, as has been already mentioned. He farther
+declared, that he had always been well disposed towards the Portuguese
+nation, having always found them worthy of confidence and friendship in
+all their dealings; and, having been a friend to them in times past, he
+would not discontinue his good will, and was ready and willing to do
+every thing in his power to serve them, and to assist them in the objects
+for which they had now come to Calicut. The general gave him many thanks
+for his good will, and promised to reward him liberally for the friendly
+aid he might give to him and his expedition, expressing his extreme
+satisfaction at being so fortunate as to meet such a person in this place,
+believing that God had sent him here to promote the great objects of this
+voyage, for which he passed through so many and long continued dangers,
+being quite sensible that he must have reaped little profit from all his
+labours without such friendly assistance.
+
+The general then requested information from Bontaybo, as to the character
+of the king or zamorin of Calicut, and whether, in his opinion, he would
+willingly receive him as ambassador from the king of Portugal. Bontaybo
+represented the zamorin as a prince of good and honourable dispositions,
+who, he was convinced, would gladly receive the general as ambassador
+from a foreign king; more especially, if the objects of his voyage were
+to establish a trade with Calicut, and if the general had brought with
+him any merchandize proper for that purpose; since the advantages which
+the zamorin derived from the customs upon trade formed the chief source
+of his revenue. He farther informed the general, that the zamorin resided
+at this time at Panane, a village on the coast about five leagues from
+Calicut; and advised that the general should send a message there to
+notify his arrival, and the reasons of his coming. The general was well
+pleased with this advice and presented certain gifts to Bontaybo, along
+with whom he sent two of his men to Calicut, requesting Bontaybo to
+direct them on their way to Panane, which he did accordingly. When these
+messengers came into the presence of the zamorin, one of them, named
+_Fernan Martyn_, declared to him, by means of an interpreter, "That he
+waited upon his highness on the part of his general, who had arrived in
+the port of Calicut with three ships, having been sent there by the king
+of Portugal with letters to his highness, which the general begged
+permission to present to him." On hearing this message, and before giving
+any answer, the zamorin commanded each of the two messengers to be
+presented with a piece cotton cloth and two pieces of silk, such as he
+used in his own apparel; after which he inquired of Fernan Martyn what
+king it was who had sent him these letters, and how far his dominions
+were from thence. Fernan fully answered these inquiries, adding, that he
+was a Christian prince, and that those whom he had sent in the ships now
+at Calicut were Christians; and related what great and numerous dangers
+they had passed through during their voyage. The zamorin was much amazed
+at the incidents of the voyage which Fernan related at some length, and
+expressed his satisfaction that so powerful a prince of the Christians
+should think of sending an ambassador to him from so great a distance. He
+then desired Fernan to inform the general, that he heartily welcomed him
+and his people into his dominions, advising him to bring his ships to
+anchor near a village called _Pandarane_ some way below where the ships
+then lay, as a far better harbour than Calicut which is an open and very
+dangerous road for shipping. The zamorin desired likewise that the
+general might come by land from that place to Calicut, where he would be
+ready to receive him. After this, the zamorin sent a pilot to navigate
+the ships to the harbour of Pandarane; but, on coming to the bar of that
+port, the general did not think it advisable to enter so far within the
+harbour as the pilot proposed, fearing lest he might expose himself to
+danger by reposing too great confidence in these people, and placing
+himself too much within their power. In this he acted with much prudent
+foresight, by which he wisely avoided the injuries which were afterwards
+attempted against him at this place.
+
+On his arrival at Pandarane, the general received a message from the
+kutwal[57] of Calicut, intimating that he and other nobles awaited him on
+shore by order of the zamorin, to conduct him to the city, and that he
+had permission to land whenever he pleased[58]. But as the day drew near
+a close, the general returned an answer excusing himself from landing
+that night. He immediately called a council of the other captains and
+principal officers of the fleet, to take their advice on the present
+emergency, to whom he intimated his intention of going to visit the king
+of Calicut on purpose to settle a treaty of trade and amity. Paulo de
+Gama, his brother, strongly objected to his venturing on shore; alleging
+that although the natives of the place were Christians, as they still
+believed them, yet there were many Moors among them who were much to be
+feared as his mortal enemies; since these people at Mozambique and
+Mombaza, where they had only passed by their ports, endeavoured to
+destroy them all, they were much more to be feared at Calicut where we
+had come on purpose to enter into competition with them in trade, by
+which their profits would be diminished. It was therefore the more
+probable that they would use every effort to destroy the general, on whom
+our whole hope of safety and success depended; and, however much the
+zamorin might regret the commission of such a deed, he could not restore
+him to life: besides which, the Moors were inhabitants of the place,
+where they had much interest, whereas the general was an utter stranger.
+Likewise, it was quite impossible for them to be assured that the king of
+Calicut might not have leagued with the Moors for his death or captivity;
+either of which would ruin their voyage and prove the destruction of them
+all, and all the toils and dangers they had passed through would prove in
+vain. To prevent all this danger, he strongly urged that the general
+should on no account go on shore, but should depute one of the captains,
+or some other person in the fleet in his stead; alleging that commanders
+in chief ought never to subject themselves to personal danger, unless in
+cases of the most urgent necessity.
+
+All the officers were of the same opinion. But the general answered, that
+even if he were perfectly assured that his landing were to occasion his
+instant death, he would not refrain from going to visit the king of
+Calicut, to endeavour to settle amity and trade, and that he might
+procure some spices and other commodities from the place, by means of
+which their discovery of Calicut might be proved on their return into
+Portugal: As otherwise, if we returned without any of the productions of
+the Indies, their discovery would be discredited, and their honour and
+veracity called in question. "Think not therefore," said he, "but I will
+rather die, than leave it in hazard that the long time we have already
+spent, and may yet employ, shall be lost, and others sent to ascertain
+the truth of our discoveries, while envious persons may have it in their
+power to discredit our services. Neither do I run into such hazard of
+death, nor expose you to such dangers as you suppose; seeing that I am
+going to a city inhabited by Christians, and to a king who wishes the
+concourse of many merchants in his dominions, as the more of these that
+frequent his port so much the greater must be his revenue from the
+customs upon trade. It is not my intention to stay long on shore, so as
+to give opportunity to the Moors to complot against me; as I propose only
+to talk with the king and to return in three days, by which time you may
+have every thing in readiness for our departure. If I should have the good
+fortune, by the will of God, to establish trade and amity with the king of
+Calicut, I would not exchange the honour and credit of that transaction
+for any treasure that could be given me; neither can the king of Calicut
+settle this affair so well with any other person, as he will honour me the
+more for being the captain-general of this fleet and the ambassador of our
+king. Should any other go in my stead, the king might look upon himself as
+slighted and insulted, under an idea that I do not esteem him worthy to be
+visited by myself, or that I do not trust him on his word and assurance.
+Besides, it is not possible for me to give sufficiently ample instructions
+to any one I might send, to enable him to do what may be necessary under
+every circumstance that may arise, as I myself might do. Even if it should
+chance that they kill me, it were better this should happen in the
+discharge of my duty, than that I should preserve my life by neglecting to
+perform it. You, my friends, remain at sea in good ships: And if you hear
+of any mischance befalling me, my desire is that you shall immediately
+depart and carry home news of our discovery. As for our present subject,
+there need be no farther argument; as I am determined, with the blessing
+of God, to proceed to visit the king at Calicut."
+
+When this determination was made known the captains made no farther
+objections, and chose out twelve persons to accompany him, among whom
+were Diego Diaz his secretary, Fernan Martinez the interpreter, John de
+Sala who was afterwards treasurer of the Indies, and nine others; and
+Paulo de Gama, his brother, was appointed to act as captain-general
+during his absence. The general, before going on shore, gave pointed
+orders that no person should on any account be permitted to come on board
+the ships; but that all who were desirous of any intercourse with them
+should remain in their boats or almadias. He likewise directed that
+Nicholas Coello should come every day with his boat well armed as near
+the shore as he could with safety, on purpose to keep up an intercourse
+between the ships and himself. All these things being settled, the
+general went on shore with his twelve attendants, all in their best
+attire; their boat furnished with much ordnance, dressed out with flags
+and streamers, and sounding trumpets all the way from the ships to the
+shore. On landing, the general was received with every demonstration of
+respect by the kutwal, attended by 200 nayres, and a great concourse of
+natives, both of the country and from the city of Calicut. After
+compliments were passed, the general was placed in an _andor_ or litter,
+which the king of Calicut had sent for his use. In this country it is not
+customary to travel on horseback, but in these andors. This vehicle is
+like a horse-litter, except that they are very plain with low sides, and
+are carried by four men on their shoulders, who run post in this manner,
+carrying the king or any noble person when on a journey, and going at a
+great rate. The person in the andor may either sit or lie as he pleases;
+and certain servants carry umbrellas, which they call _bueys_, to shelter
+the person in the andor from the sun and rain. There are other andors
+which have a curved cane over them like a bow, and are so light that they
+can be carried by two men.
+
+The general being mounted in one andor and the kutwal in another, they
+set out for a town called Capocate[59], all the rest being on foot; but
+the kutwal appointed certain people of the country to carry the baggage
+of our men, which was restored to them at Capocate, where the party
+stopped for refreshment, the general and his people being in one house
+and the kutwal in another. Our people were here provided with boiled fish,
+with rice and butter, and some of the country fruits which are very good,
+though quite different from ours. One of these fruits is called _lacas_,
+and another Mango, and they have figs likewise. The water was excellent,
+and as good as any in Portugal. After resting and refreshing themselves
+at Capocate, the general and his suite were embarked in a vessel called
+an _ensangada_, consisting of two almadias lashed side by side. The
+kutwal and his train embarked in many other boats; and the whole went up
+a river which discharges itself into the sea at this place. The numbers
+of people that came to the river side to view our men as they passed was
+quite countless, by which it appears that the country was well inhabited.
+After going about a league up this river, our people came to a place
+where many large ships were drawn up on the shore. The whole party here
+disembarked and proceeded by land, the general and kutwal in andors as
+before, being surrounded by thousands who were curious to see the
+strangers, even many women pressing into the crowd with their children
+slung at their backs.
+
+From this place the kutwal carried the general to one of their pagodas or
+idol temples, into which they entered, and which the kutwal said was a
+church of great holiness. This the general believed to be the case,
+fancying it to be a church of the Christians; which he the more readily
+believed, as he saw seven little bells hung over the principal door. In
+front of this entry, there stood a pillar made of wire as tall as the
+mast of a ship, on the top of which was a weathercock likewise made of
+wire. This church was as large as a moderate convent, all built of
+freestone, and covered, or vaulted over with brick, having a fine outward
+appearance as if its inside were of splendid workmanship. Our general was
+much pleased with this church, as he actually believed himself in a
+Christian country, and gladly entered along with the kutwal. They were
+received by the priests, who were naked from the waist upwards, having a
+kind of petticoats of cotton hanging down from the girdle to their knees,
+and pieces of calico covering their arm-pits, their heads legs and feet
+bare. They were distinguished by wearing certain threads over their right
+shoulders, which crossed over their breasts under their left arms, much
+in the way in which our priests used formerly to wear their stoles when
+they said mass. These men are called kafrs[60], and are idolaters,
+serving as priests in the pagodas of Malabar; and on the general going
+into the pagoda, they took holy water with a _sprinkle_ from a font, and
+threw it over the kutwal and him and their attendants. After this, they
+gave them powdered sandalwood to throw upon their heads, as used to be
+done amongst us with ashes; and they were directed to do the same on
+their arms. But our people, as being clothed, omitted this latter part of
+the ceremony, complying with the other.
+
+In this pagoda they saw many images painted on the walls, some of which
+had monstrous teeth projecting an inch from their mouths, and some had
+four arms; all of them so ugly that they seemed like devils, which raised
+doubts among our people whether they were actually in a Christian church.
+In the middle of the pagoda stood a chapel, having a roof or dome of
+freestone like a tower, in one part of which was a door of wire, to which
+there led a flight of stone steps. On the inside of this tower an image
+was observed in a recess of the wall, which our men could not see
+distinctly, as the place was somewhat dark, and they were not permitted
+to go near, as none were allowed to approach except the priests. But from
+certain words and signs, our people understood this to be an image of the
+Virgin; on which the general and his attendants went upon their knees to
+say their prayers[61]. John de Sala, however, being very doubtful that
+this was not a Christian church, owing to the monstrous images on the
+walls, said, as he fell on his knees, "_If this be the devil, I worship
+God_," on which the general looked at him with a smile. The kutwal and
+his people, as they approached the chapel, prostrated themselves three
+times on their faces with their hands extended before them, after which
+they arose and said their prayers standing.
+
+From this place they went forwards to the city of Calicut, and were taken
+at their arrival into another pagoda similar to the former. After this,
+on entering the city, the crowd was so great that they could hardly make
+their way through the streets. The general was astonished to see such
+multitudes, and praised GOD for having brought him in safety to this city,
+humbly beseeching his divine mercy so to guide him on his way that he
+might accomplish the objects of his expedition, and return safely into
+Portugal. At length the pressure of the crowd became so great that the
+bearers were unable to get forwards, and the whole company were forced to
+take shelter in a house. They were here joined by the kutwals brother, a
+nobleman who was sent by the king to accompany the general to the palace,
+and had many nayres along with him. The procession again set out,
+preceded by many trumpets and sacbuts sounding all the way; and one of
+the nayres carried a _caliver_, which he fired off at intervals. After
+they were joined by the kutwals brother, the mob gave way for the
+procession to pass, and shewed as much reverence as if the king himself
+had been present. There went in the procession at least 3000 armed men,
+and the multitudes of spectators, in the streets, at the doors and
+windows, and on the roofs, were quite innumerable. The general was well
+pleased at his honourable reception, and said pleasantly to those of his
+company, "_They little think in Portugal how honourably we are received
+here_."
+
+The procession arrived at the palace an hour before sunset. Though only
+constructed of earth, the palace was very extensive and seemed a handsome
+structure, having great numbers of trees interspersed among the different
+buildings, with pleasant gardens full of fine flowers and odoriferous
+plants, and many fountains; as the zamorin never goes out of the palace
+while resident in Calicut. On arriving at the palace, several caymals and
+other noblemen came out to receive the general, who led him to a large
+square immediately in front of the gates, whence they passed through four
+several courts, at the gate of each of which there were ten porters who
+were obliged to lay about them with sticks among the people to clear the
+way. On coming to the gate of the house in which the king resided, they
+were met by the chief bramin, or high priest of the royal household, a
+little old man, who embraced the general, and conducted him and his
+people into the palace. At this time the people pressed forwards with
+much eagerness to get a sight of the king, which they very seldom do as
+he goes very rarely out of the palace; and the multitude was so great
+that some of them were stifled in the throng, which would likewise have
+been the case with two of our men, if they had not gone on before, with
+the assistance of the porters, who severely hurt many of the mob, and
+forced them to make way. On passing the last gate, the general and his
+attendants entered along with the noblemen into a great hall, surrounded
+with seats of timber raised in rows above one another like our theatres,
+the floor being covered by a carpet of green velvet, and the walls hung
+with silk of various colours. The king was of a brown complexion, large
+stature, and well advanced in years. He lay on a sofa covered with a
+cloth of white silk and gold, and a rich canopy over his head. On his
+head he had a cap or mitre adorned with precious stones and pearls, and
+had jewels of the same kind in his ears. He wore a jacket of fine cotton
+cloth, having buttons of large pearls and the button-holes wrought with
+gold thread. About his middle he had a piece of a white calico, which
+came only down to his knees; and both his fingers and toes were adorned
+with many gold rings set with fine stones; his arms and legs were covered
+with many golden bracelets. Close to his sofa there stood a gold shallow
+bason on a gold stand, in which was _betel_, which the king chewed with
+salt and _areka_. This last is a kind of fruit about the size of a nut,
+and is chewed all over India to sweeten the breath, and is supposed to
+carry off phlegm from the stomach and to prevent thirst. The king had
+likewise a gold bason on a golden stand, into which he spat out the betel
+when chewed; and a gold fountain with water for washing his mouth. The
+king was served with betel by an old man who stood close to the sofa; all
+the others who were in the presence held their left hands to their mouths,
+that their breaths might not reach the king; and it is thought unseemly
+for any one to spit or sneeze in the presence.
+
+When the general entered the hall in which the king sat, he stooped or
+bowed down three times according to the custom of the country, lifting up
+his hands as one that praised God. The king immediately made signs for
+the general to draw near, and commanded him to be seated on one of the
+seats; and the rest of the Portuguese came forwards, making similar
+reverences, and were likewise commanded to sit down opposite the king.
+Water was then presented to all the company to wash their hands, which
+was very refreshing, for, though it was then winter, they were very hot.
+They were then presented with figs and jakas, and the king was much
+pleased to see them eat, laughing at them and conversing with the old man
+who served him with betel. Our people being thirsty, called for water,
+which was brought to them in a golden ewer, and they were directed to
+pour the water into their mouths as it is reckoned injurious to touch the
+cup with their lips. They accordingly did as they were directed; but some
+poured the water into their throats and fell a coughing, while others
+poured it beside upon their faces and clothes, which much amused the king.
+After this, the king desired the general by an interpreter, to speak to
+those who were present as to the purpose of his coming to Calicut. But
+the general was not satisfied with this, and signified that he was
+ambassador from the king of Portugal, a powerful prince, and that
+Christian princes were not used to receive the embassies of other
+sovereigns by means of a third person, but by themselves in person in the
+presence only of a few of their principal persons: and this being the
+usage of his country, he chose to deliver his message only to the king
+himself. The king agreed to this, and commanded the general and Fernan
+Martinez who acted as interpreter, to be conducted into another chamber,
+which was adorned with as much magnificence as the first.
+
+As soon as the king entered this chamber, he took his seat on a sofa,
+attended only by his interpreter, the chief bramin, the old man who served
+him with betel, and the comptroller of his household. The king then
+asked the general, from what part of the world he was come, and what were
+his desires. He answered, that he was ambassador from the king of Portugal,
+the most powerful of the Christian sovereigns in the west, both in extent
+of dominions, numbers of people, and riches. That he and his predecessors,
+hearing that there were Christian kings and princes in the Indies, of
+which the zamorin of Calicut was the chief, were exceedingly desirous of
+sending some of their captains to discover the way, that they might enter
+into friendship with the king of this country as brothers; and for this
+reason he had been sent to his highness: Not that the king his master had
+any need of his riches, having abundance already and more than was needed
+both of gold and silver and other valuable things. That all the former
+captains who had been sent at great charges upon this discovery, after
+having employed a year or more in vain and having consumed all their
+victuals, had returned again into Portugal. But that the present king Don
+Manuel, being anxious to bring this great enterprize to a successful
+conclusion, had entrusted him with command of three ships well supplied
+with provisions, commanding him not to return to Portugal without
+discovering the way to the Christian king of Calicut, and would certainly
+order his head to be cut off if he returned without fulfilling his orders.
+The said king his master had given him two letters to deliver to his
+highness, which he would present next day as it was now somewhat late;
+when he would convince his highness that the king of Portugal was his
+friend and brother, and should request of highness, in confirmation of
+friendship, to send an ambassador to the king of Portugal, as was the
+custom among Christian princes. The zamorin expressed his satisfaction
+with this embassy, and told the general that he made him welcome to his
+capital; and, since the king of Portugal desired to be his friend and
+brother, he would be the like to him, and should send an ambassador to him
+as desired. The zamorin then made inquiry into many circumstances
+respecting Portugal; how far distant it was from Calicut, how long the
+general had been upon the voyage, and other things: And as it grew late,
+the king allowed him to retire, first asking him whether he would reside
+with the Moors or the Malabars; but as the general chose rather to have a
+house to himself, the king gave orders to a Moor who was his factor, to
+accompany him, and to provide him with every thing necessary for his
+accommodation.
+
+Leaving the palace late, it being now towards ten o'clock, the kutwal and
+the rest who had accompanied him there, escorted him back to where he was
+to lodge; and as they were on their way, all on foot, there fell such rain
+that the streets ran in torrents, insomuch that the factor gave orders to
+some of the people to carry our general on their backs. The general was
+displeased at this and at the delay, and asked angrily at the factor if he
+meant to carry him all night through the streets. The factor made answer
+that he could not do otherwise, as the city was large and much scattered.
+He then conducted him into his own house to rest for some time, and
+procured a horse for him to ride; but, as the horse had no saddle, the
+general preferred going on foot. At length he was brought to a very good
+lodging, to which his people had previously brought all his baggage.
+
+Next day, being Tuesday, the general was greatly rejoiced to see so
+promising a commencement of his business, and resolved upon sending a
+present to the zamorin; upon which he sent for the kutwal and the kings
+factor, to whom he shewed the present which he proposed sending. This
+consisted of four _capotas_ or cloaks of scarlet cloth, six hats, four
+branches of coral, twelve _almasares_, a box containing seven brass
+vessels, a chest of sugar, two barrels of oil, and a cask of honey. The
+kutwal and factor laughed in derision at this present, saying, that this
+was no fit present for their king, the poorest merchant presenting one
+more valuable. They desired him rather to send gold, as the king would
+accept, of nothing else. The general was offended at this, saying, if he
+had been a merchant he would have brought gold; but, being an ambassador,
+he had brought none. That what he now offered were his own goods, and not
+belonging to the king his master; who, being uncertain if he should ever
+reach Calicut, had given him nothing to offer as a present to the zamorin.
+But, at his next coming, knowing now certainly the route, the king his
+master would send gold and silver and otter rich articles. To this they
+answered, that these things might be, but it was the custom of this
+country for every stranger who had speech of the king to make him a
+present in proportion to the greatness of his rank. The general replied it
+was very proper their customs should be observed, and therefore he desired
+to send this present, which he could not make more valuable, for the
+reasons already assigned; and if they would not suffer it to be carried to
+the king, he should send it back to his ships. They answered he might do
+so, for they would not consent to have such a present sent to the king.
+The general, much displeased, said he would go speak with the king himself,
+and would then return to the ships, meaning to have informed the king of
+all that had passed in regard to the intended present. This they said was
+very proper; but, as they would be detained long at court in attending him,
+they were obliged in the mean time to go upon other business, and would
+return to escort him to court, as the king would be angry if he went
+without them, he being an entire stranger; and besides, he could not go in
+safety unaccompanied, because of the great numbers of Moors who resided in
+that city. Giving credit to their words, the general consented to this
+arrangement, and said he would wait for their return, which he expected
+would be without delay: But they did not return all that day, as they had
+been gained over by the Moors to thwart the purposes of the general.
+
+The Moors in Calicut had received information of the transactions of the
+Portuguese at Quiloa, and of the taking of the _sambuco_ off Melinda; and
+knowing that we were Christians, were very jealous of our arrival at
+Calicut. Bontaybo had told the Moors that our purpose was not merely to
+discover Calicut from curiosity, but that spices were in great estimation
+in Portugal, which abounded in gold and silver, and to which all kinds of
+merchandize was at present transported that went from Calicut by way of
+the Red Sea; and finally, that the settlement of a direct trade by the
+Portuguese with Calicut would tend greatly to the profit of the zamorin.
+All this the Moors very well understood: But, considering that we were
+Christians, they believed, if we should establish trade with Calicut,
+that their own commodities would fall in price, and most of their profits
+be destroyed. Wherefore they consulted together how to induce the zamorin
+to take the general prisoner, to seize our ships, and to kill all our men;
+that they might not return into Portugal with any intelligence concerning
+Calicut. Upon this they associated themselves with some of those who were
+in greatest credit with the zamorin, to whom they procured access, and
+represented to him, That he ought not to be deceived by the Christians,
+for the general was no ambassador as he pretended, but a pirate who went
+about to rob and plunder whereever he came. They asserted having received
+undoubted intelligence of this from their factors in Africa; where after
+entering into a friendly correspondence with the _xeque_, who even
+visited the general in his ship, gave him many presents, and provided him
+with a pilot to bring him to Calicut, he had battered the town with his
+ordnance, and killed several of his subjects. That he had afterwards
+taken some _sambucos_ laden with merchandize, treating the xeque and his
+subjects like enemies. In like manner they misrepresented the conduct of
+the general at Mombaza and Melinda, turning every thing that had occurred
+to his dishonour. They reasoned from these misrepresentations, that he
+could not be an ambassador sent to maintain peace and amity, as he would
+not, in that case, have been guilty of these base hostilities, and would
+assuredly have brought the king a present worthy of the sovereign he
+pretended to come from.
+
+The king was much amazed at this discourse, and told the Moors that he
+would consider and determine what was proper for him to do. The Moors
+also told the kutwal of all that they had said to the king, with whom he
+was in great credit, and requested of him to persuade the king not to
+listen to this embassage. The kutwal then went to the king, who told him
+all that the Moors had said, and the kutwal advised him to do as the
+Moors had requested. On this the king changed his good intentions towards
+the general, yet endeavoured to conceal his purposes. The Moors then
+waited on the general under pretence of friendship, offering to instruct
+him how best to conduct himself, saying that it was customary for all
+persons who came from other places to Calicut on business with the king
+to bring him a present. On this the general shewed them the present he
+had proposed making, which the kutwal and the factor had made so light of;
+and, with whom they agreed, saying it was by no means a fit present, and
+would rather seem a mockery, and give offence. Even Bontaybo agreed in
+this opinion; and asked the general why he had not brought better things,
+as he knew that Portugal abounded in all manner of rich commodities. But
+the general excused himself as formerly, by saying that it was quite
+uncertain whether he might ever have come to Calicut.
+
+The general remained the whole of this day in his lodgings, much
+displeased that the kutwal and factor had not returned according to
+promise, and was at one time resolved to have gone to court without them;
+yet thought it better to wait till next day. In the afternoon of the
+Wednesday, the kutwal and factor made their appearance, when he mentioned
+his dissatisfaction at their long absence; but they talked of other
+things, and gave him no answer on that subject. At length they
+accompanied him to the palace; but the king, having greatly changed his
+mind towards him, made him wait three hours for admission, and then
+ordered that only two of his people should be admitted into the presence
+along with himself. Though the general considered this separation of his
+people as not looking well, he went into the presence attended by Fernan
+Martinez and Diego Diaz, his interpreter and secretary. The king did not
+receive him so well as formerly, and said with a severe countenance that
+he had expected him all the preceding day. Not willing to give him the
+true cause of his absence, lest it might lead to a conversation
+respecting the present, the general said he had tarried at home to
+recover from the fatigue of his long voyage. On this the king observed,
+that he pretended to have been sent on an embassy of friendship from a
+rich and powerful king, and that he did not well understand what kind of
+friendship was intended, since he had sent him no present. To this the
+general answered, That it was not to be wondered that the king his master
+had sent no present to his highness, considering the extreme uncertainty
+of his being able to come to this place by a way never before attempted,
+and unknown till now. But, now that the way was discovered, and God
+spared him to return to Portugal, his master would assuredly send him
+princely gifts, worthy of them both: And if his highness would have the
+goodness to give credit to the letters which he had brought from the king
+his master, he would there learn the intentions of the king of Portugal
+in sending him to Calicut. Instead of desiring to see the letters, the
+king asked him whether he was sent in search of stones or of men; and if
+sent to discover men, how came it that the king his master had sent no
+present? And since it was manifest that he had brought him nothing, he
+demanded of him to send him the golden image of the Virgin, which he
+understood was in his ship.
+
+The general, much concerned to find the king so much changed towards him,
+on account of not bringing him a present and amazed at this strange
+demand, said that the image of the Virgin Mary of which his highness had
+been told, was only of wood gilt, and not of gold; and besides, as this
+holy image had protected him during his long perils on the sea, and had
+brought him so far in safety, he was unwilling to part with it. The
+zamorin made no reply to this, but immediately demanded that he should
+produce the letters from the king of Portugal. One of these was written
+in the Portuguese language, and the other in Arabic; and the general
+explained that this had been done, because the king his master did not
+know which of these might be understood in the dominions of his highness:
+And, since he now knew that Portuguese was not understood in India,
+whereas Arabic was, he requested that some Christian of the Indies who
+understood Arabic might be employed to interpret the letter, because the
+Moors were known to be enemies to the Christians, and he was afraid lest
+they might purposely give it a wrong interpretation. The king gave orders
+to this purpose, but no Indian could be found who was able to read the
+letters, or at least who would acknowledge that he could read them.
+Seeing that it was now necessary that it should be read by the Moors, the
+general requested that Bontaybo should be one of those appointed for the
+purpose, placing more reliance on him than the others, as he was an
+acquaintance. The king accordingly commanded the letter to be read by him
+and other three Moors; who, having first read it over to themselves,
+interpreted it aloud to the king, to the following effect: "As soon as it
+became known to the king of Portugal, that the king of Calicut was one of
+the mightiest kings of all the Indies and a Christian, he was anxious to
+establish a treaty of amity and commerce with him, that he might procure
+spices, which were in great abundance in his country, and to procure
+which the merchants of many parts of the world trade thither: And, if his
+highness would give a licence to send for spices, he would send many
+things from his kingdom which were not to be had in the dominions of his
+highness; or if these things were not satisfactory, of which the general
+could shew him some samples, he was willing to send money, both gold and
+silver, to purchase the spices. And finally referring his highness to the
+general for farther information."
+
+On hearing this letter interpreted, and being desirous that his revenues
+might increase by the resort of many merchants to his dominions, the
+zamorin evinced his satisfaction at what he had heard; and assuming a
+more friendly deportment towards the general, asked him what were the
+articles of merchandize that could be had from Portugal. De Gama named
+many different kinds; particularly mentioning such as he had samples of
+along with him, and likewise their money, and requested permission to go
+on board his ships that he might bring these things to his highness,
+offering to leave four or five of his men in his lodgings during his
+absence. Giving now more credit to the general than to what had been said
+by the Moors to his prejudice, the king told De Gama he might go on board
+when he pleased, taking all his men with him, as there was no call for
+any of them remaining on shore. He likewise said the general might freely
+bring his goods on shore, and sell them to the best advantage. The
+general was greatly satisfied with this permission, of which he had no
+hopes at the first, on seeing the unfriendly reception he had met with at
+the commencement of his audience. He went back, therefore, to his lodging,
+accompanied by the kutwal; and the day being near a close, he deferred
+returning on board that night.
+
+De Faria gives a somewhat different account of what passed at this second
+audience[62]. "It was wonderful that the zamorin, not knowing how to be
+properly assured of the truth, should rely on the faith of him who was
+accused by his ministers. For, as if he had really known in what
+detestation the Portuguese hold a lie, although to their own advantage,
+he sent for De Gama, and told him plainly that he had been informed his
+embassy was all a counterfeit, and that he was some banished man or a
+fugitive: Yet at the same time offered, even if it were so, to give him a
+kind reception, and to make him handsome appointments in his service; and
+promised to rely entirely on his word for information respecting the
+truth of the whole story. De Gama heard the king to an end with a firm
+countenance, and declared himself highly sensible of the confidence
+reposed in him. He then proceeded to answer all that had been alleged
+against him, which he completely overturned by irrefragable argument in a
+long and eloquent speech, preserving the utmost gravity and composure
+throughout the whole. The zamorin eyed him steadfastly the whole time,
+hoping to be enabled to judge of the truth or falsehood of his assertion
+by his countenance; and concluded, from the unconcernedness of his looks,
+the eloquence of his words, and the firm gravity of his whole demeanour,
+that no deceit could lurk under such appearances of sincerity, that the
+Moors had accused him maliciously, and had imposed on his ministers. He
+therefore frankly allowed De Gama permission to return to his ships, and
+to land his merchandize, if he had any: Saying, that while that was doing,
+he would prepare a satisfactory answer to the letter of the king of
+Portugal."
+
+On the next day, being the last of May, the kutwal sent a horse to the
+general to carry him to Pandarane; but having no furniture, he requested
+to be supplied with an _andor_, which was sent accordingly, when De Gama
+immediately set out for Pandarane, all his people accompanying him on
+foot. The kutwal remained at Calicut, but a considerable number of nayres
+escorted the general on his way. When the Moors learnt that the general
+was gone to the ships, they went together to the kutwal, making large
+offers of money to him, if he would pursue the general, and detain him a
+prisoner under some feigned pretence; when they would take some
+opportunity of having him slain, in such way that the blame should not
+attach to the kutwal. And when he objected that the zamorin might punish
+him for detaining the general contrary to his orders, they engaged so to
+deal with the zamorin as to obtain his pardon for that offence. Induced
+by a large bribe, and encouraged by this promise, the kutwal followed De
+Gama in such haste that he soon passed our men, who lagged behind on
+account of the great heat. On overtaking De Gama, he asked by signs why
+he was in such haste, and where he was running to? The general answered
+in the same manner, that he was running to avoid the heat. On coming to
+Pandarane, as his men were not come up, the general declined going into
+the town till they should arrive, and went into a house to get shelter
+from the rain. The people did not get to the town till near sunset,
+having lost their way; on which the general said if it had not been for
+their absence he would have been by this time on board. The general
+immediately desired the kutwal to order him to be furnished with an
+almadia or pinnace, to carry him and his people on board; but the kutwal
+said it was now late, and the ships so far away that he might miss them
+in the dark, for which reason he had better stay till next day. The
+general then said, if he were not immediately furnished with an almadia,
+he would return to the king and complain that he was detained contrary to
+his license, and even mentioned as if he meant to return immediately to
+Calicut. To dissemble the more, the kutwal said he might have thirty
+instead of one, if he needed them, and pretended to send out to procure
+almadias, while at the same time he commanded the owners to hide
+themselves that they might not be found.
+
+In the mean time, while messengers were dispatched on pretence to seek
+almadias, the general, having a strong suspicion that evil was intended
+towards him, walked leisurely along the water side, and sent off Gonzales
+Perez and two other mariners, to go on before and endeavour to find
+Nicholas Coello with his boats, and to caution him to keep out of the way,
+lest the kutwal might send off to seize his boats and men. While Perez
+and the others were absent on this errand, it drew far into the night;
+and not choosing to go off till he learnt what success Perez had met with,
+he at length agreed to stay all night. Having placed De Gama in the house
+of a Moor for the night, the kutwal pretended that he would go in search
+of the three mariners who were absent; but he did not return till next
+morning. The general then required to have an almadia to carry him and
+his people on board. Before answering, the kutwal spoke some words to his
+nayres in their own language, and then desired the general to give orders
+to have the ships brought near the shore oh which he should have leave to
+depart. On this the general became still more afraid that some treachery
+was intended; yet answered boldly, that he would give no such order while
+he remained on shore, as that would make his brother believe he was a
+prisoner and had issued this order under restraint, on which he would
+immediately depart for Portugal without him. The kutwal then threatened
+stoutly that he should never be allowed to go off, unless he complied
+with this demand. The general, in return, declared he should immediately
+return to Calicut if not allowed to go on board, and make a complaint of
+his conduct to the king. The kutwal even dared him to do this, yet took
+care it should not be in his power, as he had ordered the doors to be
+kept shut and guarded by armed nayres, to prevent any of the Portuguese
+from going out. Yet it was the will of God that the kutwal dared not to
+kill the general or any of his men, although the Moors had bribed him
+with a great sum of money, and notwithstanding his great credit with the
+zamorin. His anxiety to have the ships brought near the shore was, that
+the Moors might be able to board them and kill all their people; and,
+seeing it in this light, the general was equally determined to prevent
+their nearer approach. Finding he could not prevail on the general to
+command the ships to be brought near the shore, and having no pretence to
+justify either keeping him prisoner or offering him any wrong, the kutwal
+next endeavoured to persuade him to order the sails and rudders on shore;
+at which the general only laughed, saying the king had given full
+permission to go on board without any such conditions, and assured him
+the king should be fully informed of all his unjust proceedings.
+
+The general and his people now pretended to be in want of necessaries
+from the ships, and requested leave to send some of his people on board,
+while he should remain on shore; but this the kutwal refused, and our
+people began to be seriously alarmed. At this time Gonzalo Perez returned,
+supposing the general at liberty and that he waited for him and his
+companions. Perez informed De Gama that he had seen Coello, who waited
+for him with the boats near the shore. The admiral was exceedingly
+anxious that the kutwal should not know of this circumstance, lest he
+might send out a number of armed almadias to capture them; and therefore
+urged Perez to return secretly to give Coello warning to return to the
+ships and keep constantly on the alert for fear of an attack. When Coello
+got this intelligence, he immediately set off, and the kutwal caused him
+to be pursued by several almadias full of armed men, but he made his
+escape. The kutwal made another attempt to induce the general to order
+his brother to bring the ships near the shore, but in vain; for the
+general told him, his brother, even if he were to write such an order,
+would not obey, or, were he disposed to do so, the other officers in the
+ship would prevent him. The kutwal observed that he could not give credit
+to this, as he was sure any thing he commanded would be obeyed. But no
+arguments could prevail on the general to this measure, which he was
+satisfied was meant for facilitating the destruction of the fleet to
+gratify the Moors.
+
+The whole of this day was spent in this manner, and in the night our
+people were confined in a large paved yard surrounded with walls, and
+under even a stronger guard than attended them during the day; and even
+the general began to fear as well as the men, that they would be
+separated from one another. Yet he trusted, when the zamorin should come
+to know the usage they had received, he would give orders for their
+release. That night, the kutwal came to sup with the general and sent a
+supply of fowls and rice. Finding that he could not prevail over the
+constancy of De Gama, he determined at last to set him at liberty. Next
+day, therefore, being Saturday the second of June, he desired the general,
+since he had promised to the king to bring his merchandize on shore, that
+he ought to do so; as it was the usage of all merchants who came to
+Calicut to land their goods and crews, and not to return to their ships
+till all was sold; and he promised, when this was done, to give him free
+liberty to depart. Although the general gave very little credit to his
+fair words, he yet said, if the kutwal would provide almadias for the
+purpose, he would order his goods on shore; but was certain his brother
+would not allow the boats to leave the ships while he was detained on
+shore. The kutwal was now content to get the goods into his power, as he
+understood from the general they were of great value, and allowed the
+general to send off a message to his brother. He therefore sent off a
+letter by two of his men, in which he gave his brother an account of his
+situation, confined to his lodging but otherwise well used, and desiring
+him to send some of the merchandize on shore to satisfy the kutwal; but,
+directing him, in case he was much longer detained, to believe that he
+was kept prisoner by order of the zamorin; whose only object was to get
+the Portuguese ships into his power, not having time to arm his own ships
+for that purpose. For this reason, if not set at liberty immediately
+after the goods were landed, he required his brother to return without
+delay to Portugal, and inform the king of all that had happened; that the
+trade of so fine a country might not be lost to his country. And farther,
+to inform the king in what state he remained, trusting that his royal
+master would send such an armament as would enforce his restoration to
+liberty.
+
+On receiving this letter, and a circumstantial relation from the
+messenger of all that had happened on shore, Paulo de Gama immediately
+sent the goods; but said in answer to the general, that he could not
+answer to his honour to return to Portugal without him, and he trusted
+God would enable the small force he had still in the fleet, with the aid
+of his ordnance, to compel the kutwal to liberate him. On the merchandize
+being landed, the general delivered it over into the custody of Diego
+Diaz as factor, with Alvora de Braga as his clerk, whom he left in a
+house provided for them by the kutwal; after which he went on board the
+ships. He then refused to send any more goods on shore, till those
+already there were sold and paid for, and determined not to run himself
+again into danger by venturing on shore after what had already past. At
+this the Moors were grievously vexed, as they thought it more easy for
+them to have destroyed him on land than on board the ships. On purpose to
+entice him to land once more, the Moors made a mock of his goods,
+pretending they were good for nothing, and did all in their power to
+prevent them from selling. Thinking that the zamorin knew nothing of all
+these transactions, he sent him an account of the whole five days
+afterwards, by his factor, of all that had happened, and of the injurious
+conduct of the Moors respecting the sale of the goods. The king seemed
+much offended by these proceedings, sending the general word that he
+would punish all those who had used him ill, yet the kutwal remained
+unpunished. The king likewise sent seven or eight merchants of Guzerate,
+who were idolaters, to buy the goods, accompanied by an honest nayre, to
+remain with Diaz at the factory to defend him against the Moors. Yet all
+this was only done colourably, that the Moors might not appear to suborn
+the merchants; for these men bought nothing, and even beat down the price
+of the commodities, to the great satisfaction of the Moors; who now
+boasted that no person would buy our goods any more than they. Yet none
+of the Moors durst venture to our factory, after they heard a nayre was
+stationed there by the kings order. If they did not love us before, they
+hated us ten times worse now, and when any of our men landed, they used
+to spit on the ground in contempt, calling out Portugal! Portugal! But by
+the especial order of the general, our people took no other notice than
+merely laughing at their insolence.
+
+As none of the merchants would buy our goods, the general supposed that
+this was occasioned by their being lodged at Pandarane, where none of the
+merchants of Calicut resided; and requested leave, by a messenger, from
+the zamorin, to have the goods removed to the city. This permission was
+immediately granted, and the king issued orders to the kutwal to see them
+removed, and even to pay the persons who carried them, that nothing
+belonging to the king of Portugal might be subject to any charges in his
+country. The general would not trust himself any more on shore, although
+Bontaybo, who frequently came off to visit him, advised him to wait on
+the king, lest the great credit of the Moors might again prevail over his
+mind. But considering this man as a Moor, the general never put much
+trust in him, nor informed him of his intentions; yet always received him
+kindly, and gave him money and other gifts, that he might bring him
+intelligence of what was passing on shore.
+
+After the Portuguese merchandize was removed to Calicut, the general
+permitted one man daily from each of the ships to go on shore, to see the
+city and to purchase any thing they had a mind for; always taking
+especial care that one party returned on board before another landed. Our
+people were courteously received and entertained by the natives, and were
+even lodged in their houses occasionally. They bartered several things on
+shore, such as bracelets of brass and copper, pewter, and other European
+articles, for the productions of the country, as freely and quietly as if
+they had been in Lisbon. Fishermen, and others of the idolaters came off
+to the ships, selling fish, cocoa-nuts, and poultry, for biscuit or money;
+while others came off with their children, merely to have a sight of our
+ships. On all these occasions, the general commanded them to be well
+treated and to have food given them, to conciliate the people and to
+secure the friendship of the zamorin. This continued till the tenth of
+August, during which time the ships had always some of the natives on
+board.
+
+Seeing the quietness of the people, and their familiarity with his men,
+who never met with any injury from the Moors or nayres, the general
+believed the zamorin was willing to preserve friendship and peace with
+the subjects of Portugal, and determined upon establishing a factory in
+Calicut for the sale of his commodities, although very little of what was
+landed had as yet been sold. By this means, he hoped to lay a sure
+foundation for the establishment of trade, against the next expedition
+which the king his master might send, if GOD pleased to send him home
+with the intelligence of the discovery. Accordingly, with the advice and
+concurrence of the captains and other principal officers of the fleet, he
+sent a present by Diego Diaz to the zamorin, consisting of scarfs of
+different colours, silks, corals, and various other articles. Diaz was
+desired to say to the king, that the general begged his highness to
+excuse his presumption in sending such a present in token of his entire
+devotion to his service, having nothing worthy of the acceptance of so
+great a prince. That the time now drew near when it would be necessary to
+depart on his return to Portugal; and therefore, if his highness meant to
+send an ambassador to the king of Portugal, he had better give orders
+that he might soon be ready to embark. Presuming upon what his highness
+had already agreed to, and on the kindness hitherto shewn to him and his
+people by his highness, he requested permission to leave a factor and
+clerk in Calicut along with his merchandize, as a memorial of peace and
+amity between his highness and the king of Portugal, as a testimony of
+the truth of the embassy with which he had been entrusted, and in pledge
+of farther embassy from the king his master as soon as the discovery was
+made known. He likewise prayed his highness to send on board as a full
+confirmation of his having actually made the voyage to India, a _bahar_
+of cinnamon, another of cloves, and a third of some other spices, which
+should be paid for by the factor out of the first sales of the goods in
+his possession. It was four days after Diaz received this order before he
+could get access to the zamorin, though he went every day to the palace
+for this purpose. At length he was admitted to audience; and on seeing
+Diaz with his present, the king asked him what he wanted in so stern a
+manner that he was afraid of being killed. After delivering the message
+from the general and wishing to deliver the present, the king refused to
+see it, and commanded that it should be delivered to his factor. The
+answer he gave to the message was, that since the general wished to
+depart he might do so, but must first pay him 600 _serasynes_[63],
+according to the custom of the country.
+
+Diaz, on his return to the factory with the present intended for the king,
+was accompanied by many of the nayres, which he thought was from respect:
+but immediately on entering the house, the nayres remained at the door,
+forbidding him or any other person to go out. After this, a proclamation
+was made through the city, forbidding any boat or almadia to go on board
+our fleet on pain of death. Yet Bontaybo went off secretly, and gave
+warning to the general not to venture on shore or to permit any of the
+people to land; as he had learned from the Moors, that any who might do
+so would surely lose their lives. Bontaybo said farther, that all the
+fair words of the king proceeded from dissimulation, that he might entice
+the general and his people on shore to kill them all; all which evil
+intentions were occasioned by the Moors, who made the king believe that
+the Portuguese were thieves and pirates, who had come to Calicut to steal
+such merchandize as should be brought there; and who had come to spy out
+the land, that they might return with a great armament to invade his
+dominions. All this was confirmed by two Malabar idolaters, and the
+general was in great uncertainty how best to proceed on the present
+emergency. That same night, after dark, a Negro slave belonging to Diaz
+came off, with the information that Diaz and Braga were made prisoners,
+and with an account of the answer which the king had given to his message,
+what he had ordered to be done with the present, and of the proclamations
+which were made through the city. Diego Diaz, being anxious to have these
+things communicated to the general, had bribed a fisherman to carry this
+man on board, as he could not well be recognized in the night owing to
+his colour. The general, though much offended at these injurious
+proceedings, was unwilling to depart till he might see the end of these
+things, and therefore waited to see whether anyone might come off to the
+ships. Next day, being Wednesday the 15th of August, only one almadia
+came off, in which there were four boys, who brought fine precious stones
+for sale. Although the general believed they were spies, he received them
+kindly, and gave no hints of having heard that Diaz was made a prisoner;
+expecting that others of more importance might come on board through whom
+he might procure the enlargement of Diaz and Braga. By these boys he
+wrote to Diaz, but couched in such a manner that it might not be
+understood if it fell into any other hands. The letter was delivered
+according to its direction, and the boys told the king of their reception
+on board, by which he believed that the general knew not of the
+imprisonment of his people. On this he sent off other persons to the
+ships, who were strictly enjoined not to disclose the treatment which the
+factor had experienced. This was done out of policy to deceive the
+general and to detain our ships, till the king might be able to send his
+own fleet to set upon him, or till the ships might arrive from Mecca to
+take him prisoner.
+
+Some of the Malabars continued to come off daily, all of whom the general
+commanded to be well entertained, as he saw none of sufficient importance
+to be detained. But, on the Sunday, six principal Malabars came on board,
+attended by fifteen men in another pinnace. Believing that the king would
+liberate Diaz and Braga in return for these men, he made them all
+prisoners; and sent a letter in the Malabar language, by two of the
+native boatmen, to the kings factors, demanding his factor and clerk in
+return for those men he had detained on board. On perusal of this letter,
+the kings factor communicated the same to the king, who commanded him to
+take the Portuguese to his own house, that he might not appear to have
+had any hand in their detention; and then to restore them to the general
+in return for the Malabars, whose wives had made a great clamour about
+the detention of their husbands.
+
+Seeing that his people were not sent on board, the general weighed anchor
+on Wednesday the 23d of August and set sail, meaning to try if this shew
+of going away would have the effect of recovering Diaz and Braga, in
+return for these Malabars whom he had detained. The wind being contrary,
+he came to anchor in an open road, four leagues from Calicut, where the
+ships remained till the Saturday. As there was no appearance of getting
+back his people, De Gama again set sail; but for want of wind had to come
+again to anchor, almost out of the sight of land. An almadia now came to
+the ships with certain Malabars, who said that Diaz and the others were
+in the kings palace, and would be assuredly sent on board next day. Not
+seeing the detained Malabars, these people believed they had been all put
+to death. This affected delay proceeded entirely from craft, that they
+might gain time to fit out the Calicut fleet, and for the arrival of the
+ships from Mecca, when their combined force might environ and destroy the
+Portuguese. The general ordered these messengers to go back to Calicut,
+and not to return without his men or letters from them, as otherwise he
+should sink them; and that if a satisfactory answer was not sent him
+without delay, he would cut off the heads of all the Malabars whom he had
+detained. The Malabars returned to Calicut with this message; and a wind
+springing up, the general made sail, and came to anchor off Calicut about
+sunset.
+
+Next day, seven almadias came off to the fleet, in one of which were
+Diego Diaz and Alvora Braga, the others being filled with many of the
+natives. These people, however, were afraid to come on board, and put
+Diaz and Braga into the boat which was astern of the generals ship, and
+then put off to a little distance, waiting for the generals answer. Diego
+told the general, that when the king learnt of his having sailed, he sent
+for him to the palace, assuming a pleasant countenance as pretending to
+be ignorant of his imprisonment, and asked him why the general had kept
+his subjects as prisoners on board. On being told the reason, he said the
+general was in the right. He then asked if his own factor, who was
+present, had extorted any presents; for he well knew that one of his
+predecessors had been put to death not long before, for taking bribes
+from merchant strangers. After this, the king desired Diaz to request the
+general to send him the stone pillar having the cross and the arms of
+Portugal, which he had promised to set up; and to know whether he would
+leave Diaz as factor in Calicut. Diaz likewise presented a letter for the
+king of Portugal, which was written on a palm leaf by Diaz, and signed by
+the zamorin, to the following effect:
+
+"Vasco de la Gama, a gentleman of thy house, came to my country, of whose
+arrival I was very glad. In my country there is abundance of cinnamon,
+cloves, pepper, and precious stones. The commodities I wish to procure
+from your country are, silver, gold, coral, and scarlet."
+
+Convinced of the duplicity of the zamorin, De Gama made no answer to the
+message; but sent back all the nayres whom he had detained, desired them
+to tell the king he should return the others who were in custody, on
+receiving back his merchandize. He sent however the stone pillar which
+had been required. On the next day Bontaybo came on board, saying that
+the kutwal, by order of the zamorin, had seized all his property,
+alleging that he was a Christian who had come overland to Calicut as a
+spy from the king of Portugal. Bontaybo said, he was sure this bad
+treatment had proceeded from the suggestion of the Moors; and, as they
+had seized his goods, he was sure they meant personal violence, on which
+account he had made his escape. The general gave him a kind reception,
+offering to carry him to Portugal, promising that he should recover
+double the value of his goods, besides, that he might expect to be well
+rewarded by the king of Portugal. To this arrangement Bontaybo gladly
+consented, and had a good cabin assigned him by order of the general.
+About ten o'clock the same day, three almadias full of men came off to
+the ships, having some scarfs laid on their benches, as being part of our
+goods; and these were followed by four other almadias, one after the
+other. The Malabars pretended that they had brought off all the goods,
+which they offered to put into his boat, and required him in return to
+deliver up the rest of the prisoners. But convinced this was a mere
+deception, the general desired them to go away, as he would have none of
+their merchandize, and was resolved to carry the Malabars to Portugal as
+witnesses of his discovery. He added, if God spared his life, he should
+convince them whether the Christians were thieves, as the Moors had made
+the king of Calicut believe, who had therefore treated him with so much
+injustice. He now commanded several cannon to be fired, on which they
+were afraid and made off.
+
+It was certain, if the kings ships had been afloat that they would have
+been sent to attack our ships; but they were all hauled upon shore on
+account of the winter season. Wherefore we may attribute it to Providence
+that our ships happened to arrive here at this season, that thereby they
+might escape and carry home news of having discovered the Indies, to the
+great advancement of the Catholic faith.
+
+Although greatly rejoiced at having made the discovery of the route to
+Calicut and the Indies, he was much distressed at the behaviour of the
+zamorin, believing that the next expedition that might be sent out would
+be subject to great danger; but as he was unable to do any thing more at
+this time, he consoled himself with the knowledge he had thus acquired of
+the safe navigation, and that he had procured specimens of the spices,
+drugs, precious stones, and other commodities which were to be procured
+at this place. Having now nothing to detain him here, he departed from
+Calicut, carrying with him the Malabars whom he had made prisoners; as he
+hoped by their means a good agreement might be entered into with the
+zamorin on sending out the next fleet from Portugal. On the Thursday
+after his departure, being becalmed about a league from Calicut, about
+sixty _tonys_, or boats of the country, came off to the fleet filled with
+soldiers expecting to have taken all our ships. But the general kept them
+off by frequent discharges of his artillery, though they followed him an
+hour and a half. At length there fell a heavy shower of rain attended
+with some wind, by which the fleet was enabled to make sail, and the
+enemies returned to the land. He now proposed to direct his course for
+Melinda; but made little way along the coast, by reason of calms. At this
+time, having in mind the good of the next ships which might come to
+Calicut, he thought fit to send a soothing letter to the zamorin, which
+was written in Arabic by Bontaybo; in which he apologized for having
+carried off the Malabars, as evidences of his having been at Calicut. He
+said he was sorry that he had left no factor, lest the Moors might put
+him to death; and that he had been deterred by the some cause from having
+frequently landed himself. That, notwithstanding all that had happened,
+the king his master would be glad to have the friendship of the zamorin,
+and would assuredly send him abundance of all those commodities he might
+need; and that the trade of the Portuguese to his city would henceforth
+redound to his great profit. This letter was entrusted to one of the
+Malabars, who was set on shore and ordered to deliver it to the zamorin.
+
+Continuing his course along the coast, the fleet came on the ensuing
+Thursday among certain rocky islands, from one of which that was
+inhabited there came off several almadias, having fish and other victuals
+for sale. The general treated these people kindly, giving them shirts and
+other articles to their great contentment; and, with their approbation,
+set up a cross on the island, which was named _El padron de Sancta Maria_.
+As soon as night approached, and the wind began to blow from the shore,
+the fleet made sail, always keeping near the land. On the Thursday after,
+being the 19th of September, they came in sight of a pleasant high land,
+off which lay six little islands, where he came to anchor. Going here on
+shore in search of fresh water, a young man was met with, who was or
+pretended to be a Christian. This person carried our men to a river,
+where they found a spring of excellent water issuing out of the rock; and
+for his services they gave him a red nightcap. Next morning four natives
+came off in a small boat, with many gourds and cucumbers for sale. These
+people said that their country produced cinnamon, and two of our people
+were sent onshore to see whether this were true, who brought with them
+two green boughs which were said to be cinnamon, of which they had seen a
+large grove, but it turned out only to be the wild kind. At their return,
+these men were accompanied by more than twenty natives, who brought hens,
+gourds, and cows milk for sale, and who said, if the general would send
+some of his men on shore, he might have abundance of dried cinnamon, hogs,
+and poultry: But he dreaded treachery, and would not allow any of his
+people to go on shore. Next forenoon, when some of our men went to a part
+of the shore at some distance from the ships to cut wood, they suddenly
+came in sight of two boats lying close to the land, and returned with
+intelligence of what they had seen; but the general would not send to
+inquire what these might be until after dinner. In the mean time, one of
+the men in the top gave notice that he saw eight large ships out at sea,
+which were then becalmed. The general gave immediate orders to have every
+thing in readiness in case of an attack, and as the wind served both
+fleets, they soon came within two leagues of each other. The enemies
+perceiving our fleet approaching, fled towards the shore; but one of
+their rudders breaking, the men belonging to that ship escaped in their
+boats, and Coello immediately took possession, expecting to find it laden
+with rich commodities. Nothing was found however, except cocoa-nuts and a
+kind of sugar called _melasus_, which is prepared from palms or date
+trees. He also found on board many bows and arrows, swords, spears, and
+targets. The other seven ships were run aground, so that our ships could
+not get near them, as drawing too much water; but our people followed in
+their boats, and drove them out of their vessels by firing upon them with
+their ordnance. Next day, while our fleet was at anchor, seven men came
+off from the land in an almadia, who reported that these eight ships had
+been sent by the zamorin from Calicut to capture our fleet, as they had
+been informed by some of the fugitives[64].
+
+From this place the general removed to the island of _Ansandina_, at a
+short distance, where he was told he might procure good water. This
+island is very small, and only a league from the continent. It contains
+several woods, and two cisterns, or conduits, built of freestone, one of
+which is six feet deep, supplied with excellent water from certain
+springs; and the sea around has great quantities of fish. Before the
+Moors traded with India, this island was well inhabited by the native
+idolaters, having many goodly buildings, and especially some fine pagodas.
+But when the Moors resorted to this coast from the Red Sea, they used to
+take in their wood and water at this place, and abused the inhabitants so
+intolerably that they abandoned the place, and pulled down most of their
+pagodas and all their other buildings. These Gentiles were natives of
+that part of the continent which belongs to the king of _Narsingas_, and
+used often to repair thither to perform their devotions to three black
+stones which were in a chapel of one of the pagodas, which still remains.
+This island is called _Ansandina_[65] in the Malabar language, which
+signifies the Five Islands, and is so named because there are other four
+islands round about.
+
+Coming to anchor here, the general sent Coello on shore with an armed
+escort, to examine the country, and to see if there were any convenient
+place for new-graving their ships bottoms, as they had been long at sea
+and had a long run before them. Every thing being found convenient, and
+the measure approved of by all the captains, it was determined to lay
+their ships successively aground for this purpose. The ship called the
+Berrio was first laid on shore; and while occupied in repairing and
+cleaning her bottom, many of the natives came off from the continent to
+sell victuals to our people. While this was going forwards two small
+brigandines were seen rowing towards our ships, ornamented with flags and
+streamers on their masts, beating drums and sounding trumpets, and filled
+with men who plied their oars. At the same time, five similar vessels were
+seen creeping along shore, as if lying by to help the others if needful.
+The Malabars who supplied our people with provisions, warned the general
+to beware of these vessels, which belonged to pirates who roamed about in
+these seas, robbing all they met under pretence of peace[66]. The general
+believed he might have taken these two vessels, if he had allowed them to
+come close up with his ships, but did not choose to run any risk;
+wherefore, as soon as they came within gun-shot, he ordered all the cannon
+belonging to the two ships which remained afloat to be fired at them; on
+which, calling out in a loud voice, _Tambarane! Tambarane!_ which is their
+name for God, they fled away. Nicholas Coello, who was in his boat,
+followed after them, firing off his ordnance; but the general, fearful of
+any mischance, called him back by signal.
+
+Next day, when the general and all his men were on shore at work upon the
+Berrio, twelve natives, who appeared to be men of some consequence, came
+to the island in two small _paraos_, and presented a bundle of sugar
+canes. These people asked permission to go on board the ships, as they
+had never seen any such before; but the general was much offended with
+this, fearing they might be spies. While engaged in conversation with
+these men, other two _paraos_ made their appearance, having as many men.
+But those who came first, seeing the general displeased, advised these
+new comers not to land. When the Berrio was repaired, the generals ship
+was brought aground to receive the same attentions.
+
+While the general and the other captains were on shore, busied in the
+repairs of the San Michael, there came one day a man in a little _parao_,
+seemingly about forty years old, and not of that country, as he was
+dressed in a _sabaco_, or gown of fine cotton reaching to his heels, his
+head covered with a kerchief or towel, which partly covered his face, and
+wearing a faulchion or crooked cymeter at his girdle. Immediately on
+landing, he went up and embraced the general, as if he had seen or known
+him before, and treated the other captains with the same politeness. He
+told them he was a Christian, born in Italy, and had been brought when a
+child into the Indies. That he now dwelt with a Moorish lord named
+_Sabayo_, who ruled a certain island called Goa, about twelve leagues from
+thence, and who had 40,000 horsemen on that island. That, as his dwelling
+was now among the Moors, he conformed externally to their worship, though
+in his heart a Christian. That learning certain men had come in ships to
+Calicut, such as had never been seen before in the Indies, and that no one
+understood their language, he immediately understood that they must be
+_Frangnes_,[67] for so the Christians are named in the Indies. That he was
+desirous of seeing them, and had asked leave of _Sabayo_ to come and visit
+them; which, if he had not obtained, he would have died of vexation. That
+Sabayo had not only granted him leave for this purpose; but desired, if he
+found the strangers to be from his country, to offer them any thing they
+might stand in need of which his country produced; particularly spices and
+provisions. And besides, if they would come and live with him, Sabayo
+would entertain them honourably, and give them sufficient to live on. The
+general asked many questions concerning the country of Sabayo and other
+things, to which he made answer. After which he requested to have a cheese
+from the general, to send on shore to a companion, as a token of having
+been well received. The general suspected some mystery in this man, yet
+ordered a cheese and two new loaves to be given him, which he sent away to
+his companion. He continued talking with great volubility, and sometimes
+so unguardedly as to raise suspicions of his being a spy. On this Paulo de
+la Gama, who particularly suspected him, inquired of some of the natives
+if they knew who this man was; they immediately told him he was a pirate,
+who had boarded many other ships while laid aground. On receiving this
+information, the general ordered him to be carried on board his ship, then
+aground, and to be whipped well till he should confess whether all that he
+had said was true or false; also, what was his purpose in coming thither,
+and whether he were actually a Moor or a Christian. He still insisted that
+he was a Christian, and that all he said was true, declaring the
+information given by the natives to be entirely groundless. The general
+now ordered a more cruel torment to be inflicted to extort confession,
+causing him to be hoisted up and down by the members: when at length he
+declared he would tell the truth. He then acknowledged himself a spy, sent
+to discover how many men the general had, and what were their weapons, as
+he was much hated on all that coast for being a Christian; and that many
+_atalayas_ or foists were placed in all the bays and creeks of the coast
+to assail him, but dared not till they were joined by forty large armed
+vessels that were getting ready to fall upon him. But he said he knew not
+certainly when these vessels might be ready. The general now ordered him
+to be confined under hatches, intending to carry him into Portugal, as a
+fit person to give the king his master intelligence respecting the Indies,
+and ordered him to get refreshing victuals, and that his cure should be
+looked well after.
+
+On receiving this information of the designs of his enemies, the general
+would stay no longer than was necessary for completing the repairs of his
+own ship, which was got ready in ten days. About this time, the general
+was offered 1000 _fanons_ for the ship which had been taken by Coello; but
+he refused to sell any thing to his enemies, and ordered her to be burnt.
+When the generals ship was ready, and the fleet had taken in a supply of
+water, they departed from the island of _Ansandina_, or Anchediva, on the
+5th of October 1498, steering directly out to sea on their course for
+Melinda. After sailing about 200 leagues from that island, the Moor[68]
+whom they had taken prisoner, seeing no prospect of escape, now made a
+full and true confession. He acknowledged that he lived with Sabayo, the
+lord of Goa, to whom word was brought that the general was wandering about
+in those seas, like one who knew not where he was, upon which orders were
+given to fit out a powerful fleet to make him prisoner. In the mean time,
+learning that the general was at the isle of Anchediva, Sabayo commanded
+him to go thither to visit him, to get intelligence of his strength and
+intentions, and to endeavour to entice him to Goa; where it was Sabayos
+intentions to make him and all his people prisoners, and to employ them in
+his wars against the neighbouring princes, as they were reported to be
+valiant men. After this confession, the general gave this man better
+treatment, allowing him both clothes and money. Some time afterwards he
+became a Christian, by the name of Gaspar de la Gama, taking his name of
+Gaspar from one of the three kings of the Magi[69], and his surname from
+the general, who stood god-father at his baptism.
+
+The general pursued his course for Melinda, where he proposed to take on
+board an ambassador from the xeque of that place. In the early part of
+this voyage he endured severe storms and contrary winds, which were
+succeeded by calms, during which the heat of the sun was quite
+insufferable, and the voyage much delayed, insomuch, that water began to
+grow scarce, and the people had to be put on short allowance. Owing to
+these circumstances, the people were afflicted with the same disease in
+their gums, from which they had formerly suffered such great distress in
+the river of Good Signs[70], on the outward voyage. Their arms and legs
+also swelled, and many tumours broke out over their bodies, proceeding
+from a pestilent stinking humour, which threw them into a flux, of which
+thirty persons died. From the continuance of calms and contrary winds,
+and the mortality among the people, the whole company became amazed, and
+believed they should never be able to get out from their present
+distressing situation; insomuch, that they solicited the general to
+return to Calicut, or some other part of India, and submit to what God
+might appoint, rather than to die on the sea of these terrible diseases,
+for which there was no remedy, especially as both provisions and water
+began to fail. De Gama reasoned with them to little purpose, as they had
+been now four months at sea, and there hardly remained, sixteen persons
+in each ship able to do duty, some of whom even were afflicted with the
+diseases of which the others had died. It is even said that Paulo de la
+Gama and Nicholas Coello had agreed to return to India, if any wind
+should spring up that would have served for the voyage.
+
+At length a favourable wind sprung up unexpectedly, and in sixteen days
+they came in sight of land on Wednesday the 2d of February 1499, at which
+the mariners were much rejoiced, and soon forgot all their past troubles
+and dangers. As they came near the land towards evening, the general gave
+orders to keep their heads out to sea during the night, to avoid rocks or
+shoals. As there were no person on board who knew where they were, a Moor
+alleged they had steered direct for Mozambique; saying there were certain
+islands 300 leagues from the shore, and directly over against that place,
+where the natives were continually subject to the disease which had been
+so fatal to our men. When morning came, they stood towards the land, when
+they came before a large and goodly city, surrounded with walls, having
+fair and lofty houses, and a large palace on a height in the middle of
+the city, seeming to be a magnificent building. This city is called
+Magadoxo, and stands on one side of the Gulf of India on the coast of
+Ethiopia[71], an hundred and thirteen leagues from Melinda, the situation
+of which I shall explain hereafter. Knowing this to be a city of the
+Moors, he would not stop at this place, but commanded many shots of
+ordnance to be fired as he sailed past. Not being sure how far it was to
+Melinda, and fearing to overshoot that port, he lay too every night; and
+on Saturday the 5th of February, lying over against a village of the
+Moors, named Pate[72], 103 leagues from Magadoxo, there came off eight
+_terradas_, or boats of that country, filled with soldiers, and making
+direct for our fleet, from whence we shot off so many pieces of ordnance,
+that they soon fled back to the shore, and our people could not follow
+for want of wind. Next Monday, being the 7th of February, the fleet
+arrived at Melinda. The king immediately sent off his congratulations to
+the general on his arrival, with a present of fresh provisions. De Gama
+sent Fernan Martinez on shore to return the compliments of the king, to
+whom he sent a present. On account of the great number of sick on board,
+the fleet stopped here for ten days, during which time he caused a land-
+mark to be erected on shore, with leave of the king, as a token of
+friendship. Having provided provisions and water for the ships at this
+place, he departed on the morning of Wednesday the 17th of February,
+taking with him an ambassador from the king of Melinda, to negotiate a
+treaty of perpetual peace and friendship with the king of Portugal.
+
+Considering that there were not sufficient men remaining for navigating
+all the ships, the general and the other captains agreed to burn one of
+them, and the San Rafael was chosen to be sacrificed, because she was all
+open, and had not been brought aground at Anchediva when the other two
+were repaired. Accordingly, after taking out all her stores and
+merchandize, which employed them during five days, she was burnt at
+certain shoals, called the Shoals of St Raphael[73]. During these five
+days, the fleet procured a considerable quantity of hens from a village
+on the coast called _Tangata_. Leaving this place, the two remaining
+ships came on the 20th February to the island of Zenziber, which is in
+six degrees of S. latitude, at ten leagues distance from the continent.
+This is a considerable island, having other two in its neighbourhood, one
+called _Pemba_, and the other _Moyfa_. These islands are very fertile,
+having abundance of provisions, and great quantities of oranges. The
+inhabitants are Moors, who are by no means warlike and have few weapons,
+but are well clothed in silk, and cotton vestments, which they purchase
+at Mombaza from the merchants of Cambaya. The women are ornamented with
+jewels of gold and silver, the former being procured at Sofala, and the
+latter from the island of St Lawrence, or Madagascar. Each of these three
+islands has a separate king, who, with all their subjects, are of the
+Mahometan religion.
+
+When the king of the island of Zenziber was informed of the arrival of
+our ships, he sent immediately to compliment the general, accompanied
+with great presents of the fruits and other productions of the country,
+and requested his friendship, to which the general gladly agreed and sent
+suitable answers. After remaining here eight days for refreshments, the
+general departed on the 1st of March, and came to anchor beside the isle
+of St George in the bay of Mozambique. Next day he caused a mark to be
+erected on this island, where he went on shore and heard mass; and
+departed thence without any intercourse with the inhabitants of
+Mozambique. On the 3d of March, he came to the island of St Blas, where
+the ships remained for some time to take in water, and to provide a stock
+of sea wolves, and _solitarios_, which were salted to serve as provision
+for the remainder of the voyage, and for which they were most thankful to
+God. Departing from thence, they were driven back by a westerly wind
+right contrary; but Providence sent them a fair wind, by means of which
+they doubled the Cape of Good Hope with infinite pleasure on the 20th of
+March, all the remainder of the crews being now strong and in good health,
+with the cheering prospect of speedily returning to Lisbon. They now had
+a fair wind, which lasted them twenty days, and sped them on towards St
+Jago. The fair wind now failed them and delayed their voyage. Trying the
+lead on Thursday the 25th of April, they found twenty-five fathom; and
+the least water they had all that day was twenty fathom, on which account
+the pilots concluded they were on the shoals of the Rio Grande.
+
+Of the rest of this voyage, till the arrival of the general at the island
+of St Jago, I have found no account; except that, when, approaching that
+place, Nicholas Coello parted company one night with the general, and
+made direct for Portugal, that he might carry the first intelligence to
+the king of the discovery of India; and arrived at _Cascais_ on the 10th
+of July 1499[74]. He went immediately to the king, whom he informed of
+all that had befallen the general in his discovery of the Indies, and of
+the commodities which had been brought from thence; of which discovery,
+and of the prospect which it held out of a direct trade with India by sea,
+the king was as glad as when he had been proclaimed king of Portugal.
+
+After the separation of Coello, De Gama pursued his voyage for the island
+of St Jago, both because his brother Paulo was sick with consumptive
+complaints, and because his ship was in very bad condition; all her seams
+being open. At that island, he freighted a caravel, in hope of being able
+to get his brother home to Portugal, and left John de Sala in charge of
+his own ship, to have her repaired and new rigged before proceeding for
+Lisbon. The general and his brother left St Jago in the hired caravel for
+Lisbon; but the disease of Paulo de Gama increased so rapidly, that he
+was forced to put in at the island of Tercera, where Paulo de Gama
+departed this life like a good Christian and a worthy gentleman. When he
+had buried his brother, Vasco de Gama set sail for Portugal, and arrived
+at Belem in September 1499; having been two years and two months absent
+on this voyage. Of 108 men whom he had taken with him, only fifty[75]
+came home alive; which was a large proportion, considering the great and
+numerous dangers they had gone through.
+
+When the general had returned thanks to God for his preservation and
+success, he sent notice of his arrival to the king, who sent Diego de
+Sylva y Menesis, Lord of Portugalete, and many other gentlemen, to
+conduct him honourably to court, which they did through a prodigious
+concourse of people, eager to see the man who had made so wonderful a
+voyage, and whom they had long thought dead. Being come into the presence,
+the king honoured him as one who, by the discovery of the Indies had done
+so much for the glory of God, for the honour and profit of the king of
+Portugal, and for the perpetual fame of the Portuguese name in the world.
+The king made him afterwards a knight, and gave him and his heirs
+permission to bear the royal arms of Portugal, as also to set at the foot
+of the escutcheon two does, which are called gamas in the Portuguese
+language. He also gave him a perpetual pension or rent-charge of 300,000
+rees[76] yearly, out of the tythe fish in the village of _Sinis_, in
+which he was born, and a promise of being made lord of that village; and
+till these grants were executed in form, he allowed him 1000 crowns a-year;
+which, after the royal grants were made, reverted to the house of the
+_Contratation_ of the Indies. It was also granted, that when the trade
+with India should be established, he might bring home spices to the value
+of 200 ducats yearly, without paying any duty. He also gave him other
+possessions and rents, and a note of remembrance or promise to make him a
+lord[77]. Nicholas Coello was promoted to be a gentleman of the royal
+household, and received possessions and rents to bear his charges[78].
+The king himself, in consequence of these discoveries, assumed the new
+title, of _Lord of the conquest and navigation of Ethiopia, Arabia, Persia,
+and the Indies_.
+
+
+[1] By Mr Clarke this person is named Goncalo Nunez.
+
+[2] Mr Clarke alleges, that Lichefield, our original translator, has
+    fallen into an error in this date, which ought to have been the 28th
+    July.--E.
+
+[3] If Saturday were the 5th July, on which the fleet sailed from Lisbon,
+    the 3d of August must have been on Thursday. But it does not seem
+    necessary to insist upon such minute critical accuracy; which, besides,
+    is unattainable.--E.
+
+[4] This strange expression probably means, that Gama stretched directly
+    across the gulf of Guinea, not creeping as usual along the coast, and
+    endeavoured to make a direct course for the Cape of Good Hope.--E.
+
+[5] Our old English translator, Lichefield, strangely mistakes in calling
+    this place the _island_ of Sancta Haelena; which is assuredly St Elena
+    bay, in lat. 32 deg. 40' S. It has since been sometimes named St Martin's
+    bay, but the proper and general name is the bay of St Elena, the S. W.
+    point of entry being called St Martin's Point.--E.
+
+[6] Perhaps the Berg river, at the bottom of St Elena bay.--E.
+
+[7] This paragraph is added to relation of Castenada from the works of
+    Faria and Osorius.--Clarke.
+
+[8] If the Thursday on which they came in sight of the Cape were the 16th,
+    the Wednesday following must have been the 22nd of the month.--E.
+
+[9] This paragraph is an addition to the text of Castaneda from Osorius--
+    Clarke, I. 342
+
+[10] From the circumstances in the text, this watering-place of St Blaze
+    is probably what is now called St Katherines or St Sebastians Bay; yet
+    that place hardly exceeds forty-seven Portuguese leagues east from the
+    cape. The sixty leagues of the text would carry us almost a degree
+    farther east, to what is now called Kaffercroyts river. Clarke removes
+    this place still farther to Flesh Bay, otherwise called Angra de St
+    Braz, or Aguada de St Braz by De Barros. This latter place is seventy
+    Portuguese leagues, or above eighty marine leagues east from the cape.
+    --E.
+
+[11] This account seems erroneous, whether St Katherines or Flesh Bay be
+    the one in question, as both ought to be safe in north winds, and the
+    winds between the S and E points give both a lee shore.--E.
+
+[12] Probably a species of Penguins: Lichefield calls them _stares_, as
+    large as ducks; Osorius says the natives called them _satiliario_, and
+    that they were as big as geese.--E.
+
+[13] Probably Rock Point, forming the western boundary of Algoa or
+    Zwartkops bay, in long. 27 deg. E. bring the rocky extreme promontory of
+    the Krakakamma ridge.--E.
+
+[14] It is infinitely difficult to guess the course of these early voyages,
+    without latitudes or longitudes, and only estimated distances by dead
+    reckoning in uncertain leagues; but the Rio del Infante of this voyage
+    and that of Diaz, is probably that now called Great-fish river, in the
+    Zuureveld of Graaff Reynet, in long. 28 deg. 20' E which, however, is
+    twenty-six Portuguese leagues, or thirty geographical leagues from
+    Rocky Point, instead of the fifteen leagues of the text.--E.
+
+[15] The sixty leagues in the text are inexplicable on any rational
+    supposition, as they seem to have again made the Rocks de la Cruz, or
+    rather Rocky Point, said just before to be only fifteen leagues from
+    Infante river, to which they were then bound.--E.
+
+[16] The Portuguese ships appear to have been now on the coast of Natal,
+    or the land of the Caffres, certainly a more civilized people than the
+    Hottentots of the cape. But the circumstance of Alonzo understanding
+    their language is quite inexplicable: as he could hardly have been
+    lower on the western coast than Minz, or perhaps Congo. Yet, as a belt
+    of Caffres are said to cross the continent of Africa, to the north of
+    the Hottentots, it is barely possible that some Caffre slaves may have
+    reached the western coast.--E.
+
+[17] This grain was probably what is now well known under the name of
+    millet.--E.
+
+[18] According to Barros, _Aguada da boa Paz_.--Clarke.
+
+[19] Gibb's Orosius, I. 50.
+
+[20] The text here ought probably to be thus amended, "He and his brother,
+    _with_ Nicholas Coelle," &c.--E.
+
+[21] These probably swam off to the ships.--E.
+
+[22] De Faria alleges that the people of this river were not so black as
+    the other Africans, and wore habits of different kinds of stuffs, both
+    cotton and silk, of various colours, and that they understood Arabic;
+    and adds, that they informed De Gama there were white people to the
+    eastwards, who sailed in ships like those of the Portuguese. Osorius
+    likewise says, that one of the natives spoke Arabic very imperfectly,
+    and that De Gama left two of his convicts at this place, which he
+    called San Rafael.--Clarke.
+
+[23] There is no circumstance in the text from which the situation of this
+    river can even be conjectured. Clarke, p.440, alleges that it was
+    Soffala; and yet, in a note in his preceding page, says, "That De Gama
+    seems to have passed Cape Corientes during the night, and to have kept
+    so far from land, on account of a strong current setting on shore, as
+    not to have noticed Sofala." In the notes on the Lusiad, this river of
+    Good Signs is ascertained to have been one of the mouths of the
+    Zambeze, or Cuama River, which divides Mocaranga from the coast of
+    Mozambique; the different mouths of which run into the sea between the
+    latitudes of 19 deg. and 18 deg. S.--E.
+
+[24] They were evidently afflicted with the scurvy; and accordingly De
+    Barros refers the disease to its proper cause, "Having been for so
+    long a time confined to the use of salt fish and corrupted biscuit.--
+    Clarke."
+
+[25] Addition to the narrative of Castaneda, from De Barros.--Clarke.
+
+[26] This obscure expression seems to mean that De Gama wished them to
+    precede the ships, and point out the way into the harbour.--E.
+
+[27] This expression has probably been misunderstood by the original
+    translator. It appears that these Moors of Mozambique spoke Arabic,
+    here called the language of Algarve, and finding themselves understood
+    and answered by the strangers, mistook the Portuguese for Moors.--E.
+
+[28] Mozambique is in lat. 15 deg. 35' S. and in 41 deg. of E. Long--E.
+
+[29] The observations here inserted, and marked with inverted commas, are
+    made by the Editor of the present collection. They are much too long
+    for insertion in the form of a note, and appeared of too much
+    importance to be omitted; being chiefly from Clarke, I. 447.--E.
+
+[30] For the materials of this addition to the text of Castaneda, we are
+    chiefly indebted to the Progress of Maritime Discovery, p. 447, 458.
+    --E.
+
+[31] His name, as given by Osorius, was _Zacocia_, and De Barros adds,
+    that he wore richly embroidered clothes, and had his sword ornamented
+    with diamonds.--Clarke.
+
+[32] This is probably the same person named Fernan Alvares on a former
+    occasion.--E.
+
+[33] It is added by De Barros, that three _Abexijs_, or Abyssinians, from
+    the territory of _Preste Joano_, came on board the fleet, along with
+    the Moors who brought provisions; and, seeing the image of the angel
+    Gabriel painted on the ship of that name, and being accustomed to such
+    representations of angels in their own country, they made their
+    adorations to this holy picture.--Clarke.
+
+[34] Mr Clarke, Progr. of Marit. Disc. I. 464, strangely misrepresents
+    this story; saying, "that _the pilot_ of Paulo de la Gama had deserted
+    to the Moors, though a Christian."--E.
+
+[35] According to De Burros, after the inhabitants abandoned the town,
+    the zeque sent De Gama a pilot to navigate Coello's ship, from whom De
+    Gama learnt that Calicut was a months voyage from Mozambique.--Clarke,
+    I. 464.
+
+[36] If Sunday, as above, were the first of April, the Friday following
+    must have been the 6th.--E.
+
+[37] The text is here obscure; but it would appear that only some of the
+    men belonging to these two boats remained on board, and the rest
+    returned to the coast. Not that the Moorish pilots from Mozambique
+    were here dismissed, as the text of Lichefild's translation seems to
+    insinuate.--E.
+
+[38] Motta, in the Portuguese East Indian Pilot, places this town in lat.
+    3 50'S. He says the entrance is much incommoded with shoals, and so
+    narrow in some places as not to exceed the length of a ship. This city
+    is said to have once stood on a peninsula, converted into an island by
+    cutting a canal across the isthmus.--Clarke, I. 469.
+
+[39] This may be understood that part of the inhabitants were unmixed
+    Arabs, comparatively whites; while others were of a mixed race between
+    these and the original natives, perhaps likewise partly East Indian
+    Mahometans, of a similar origin.--E.
+
+[40] This is surely an oversight in Castaneda or his translator, for
+   _one_ year.--E.
+
+[41] It is difficult to ascertain what place in India is here meant.
+    Cranganore comes nearer in sound, but is rather nearer Melinda than
+    Calicut; Mangalore is rather more distant. The former a degree to the
+    south of Calicut, the latter not quite two to the north; all three on
+    the Malabar coast. On a former occasion, Castaneda says these
+    merchants were of Cambaya or Guzerat, above eleven degrees north of
+    Calicut.--E.
+
+[42] This seems to be the same office with that named Kadhi, or Khazi, by
+    the Turks and Persians, which is rather the title of a judge than of a
+    priest, which is named Moulah.--E.
+
+[43] It is probable that this passage should be thus understood, "The
+    king sent him a pilot, who was an idolater from Guzerate, &c."--E.
+
+[44] The addition to, or observations on the text, inserted in this place
+    within inverted commas, are from Clarke, I. 486, 487.--E.
+
+[45] In Lichefild's translation this date is made the 22d; but the Friday
+    after Sunday the 21st, must have been the 26th of the month.--E.
+
+[46] The difference of longitude between Melinda and Calicut is thirty-
+    four degrees, which at 17-1/2 leagues to the degree, gives only 575
+    Portuguese leagues, or 680 geographical leagues of twenty to the
+    degree. Thus miserably erroneous are the estimated distances in old
+    navigators, who could only compute by the dead reckoning, or the log.
+    --E.
+
+[47] The course from Melinda to Calicut is about E. N. E. the former being
+    about three degrees to the S. and the latter almost eleven degrees to
+    the N. of the line.--E.
+
+[48] This vague account of the extent of Malabar is erroneous or corrupt,
+    as sixty-one Portuguese leagues would barely reach from Cape Comorin
+    to Calicut. The extreme length of the western maritime vale of India,
+    from Cambay to Cape Comorin, exceeds 250 Portuguese leagues.--E.
+
+[49] The proper name of this prince who is said to have thus divided the
+    kingdom of Malabar, was Shermanoo-Permaloo.--Clarke, I. 395.
+
+[50] This must be erroneous, as the Mahometans reckon from the year of the
+    Hegira, or flight of Mahomet from Mecca, which commences in 622 of the
+    Christian era.--E.
+
+[51] This story seems an Arabian tale, perhaps partly founded upon some
+    real revolution in the government of Malabar. But it would much exceed
+    the bounds of a note to enter upon disquisitions relative to Indian
+    history.--E.
+
+[52] Laker is a kind of gum that proceedeth of the ant. This marginal note,
+    in Lichefild's translation of Castaneda, indicates the animal origin
+    of lac, which has been elucidated of late by Dr Roxburgh.--E.
+
+[53] From the sequel in the narrative of Castaneda, this Colastrian rajah
+    seems to have been the sovereign of Cananor.--E.
+
+[54] This word pagoda, applied by the Portuguese, to denote an Indian,
+    temple, is said to be derived from a Malabar or Indian word,
+    _Pagabadi_, signifying any idol.--Astley, I. 51.
+
+[55] This is described by Castaneda as a coin equal in value to three
+    crowns.
+
+[56] By De Faria, this man is named Monzayde.--Astl. I. 30.
+
+[57] The title of kutwal is of Arabic origin, and properly signifies the
+    governor of a fort or castle, but the office may be different in
+    different places. In some instances, the kutwal seems to have been the
+    deputy-governor, sheriff, or judge of a town.--Astl. I. 30.
+
+[58] Such are the expressions used by Lichefild; but I suspect the sense
+    here ought to have been, That the kutwal required De Gama to land
+    immediately, that he might go to Calicut, on purpose to be presented
+    to the zamorin.--E.
+
+[59] In Astley, I. 81. this place is named Kapokats.--E.
+
+[60] Kafr is an Arabic word, signifying an infidel or unbeliever; and is
+    applied by the Mahometans to all who do not believe the doctrines of
+    Mahomet, and especially to all who worship images, including the Roman
+    Catholics. The priests mentioned in the text were obviously bramins.
+    The origin of the term here used by mistake, was obviously from the
+    interpretation of Bontaybo, the friendly Moor; and explains the
+    mistake of De Gama in believing the Malabars to have been Christians.
+    Bontaybo applied the same significant term of kafr to the image
+    worshippers of all denominations, without discriminating one species
+    of idolater from another.--E.
+
+[61] On this part of the text, the author, or the original translator,
+    makes the following singular marginal reflection:--"The general
+    deceived, committeth idolatry with the Devil."--E.
+
+[62] Astley, I. 24. a.
+
+[63] Called in Astley _sharafins_.--Astl. I. 36.
+
+[64] De Faria says that this fleet belonged to a pirate named Timoja, of
+    whom frequent mention will be made hereafter; and that the eight ships
+    were so linked together, and covered over with boughs of trees, that
+    they resembled a floating island.--Astl. I. 38. a.
+
+[65] More probably Anche-diva, or Ange-diva.--Astl. I. 38. b.
+
+[66] These vessels seem more probably to have been the squadron of Timoja.
+    --Astl. I. 38. c.
+
+[67] Frangnes, Franghis, or Feringays, a common name all over the East
+    for Europeans; assuredly derived from the Francs or French, long known
+    as the great enemy of the Mahometans, by their exploits in the
+    crusades.--E.
+
+[68] De Faria says this person was a Jew, and that he made the sign of
+    the cross from the shore to be taken on board.--Astl. I. 39. b.
+
+[69] Or rather one of the three kings of Collen.--Astl. I. 39.
+
+[70] Since called Cuama.--Astl. I. 39. c.
+
+[71] Magadoxo is in lat. 2 deg. 20' N. and about 45 deg. 40' E. long.--E.
+
+[72] Pate stands on the coast of Zanguebar, on the Rio Grande, one of the
+    mouths of the river Zebee, in lat. 1 deg. 50' S. and about 41 deg. 20' E. long.
+    --E.
+
+[73] De Faria says this ship was lost on the shoals called after her name
+    but the men were saved.--Astl. I. 40. a.
+
+[74] De Faria alleges that Coello was separated by a storm near Cape Verd,
+    and arrived at Lisbon, thinking De Gama had got home before him.--Astl.
+    I. 40. b.
+
+[75] De Faria says fifty-five, and that they were all rewarded by the
+    king.--Astl. I. 40. c.
+
+[76] The translator values this pension at 200l. a-year, perhaps equal in
+    present value to 2000l.--E.
+
+[77] This does not appear to have been actually done until his return
+    from India the second time, as will be mentioned hereafter.--E.
+
+[78] According to Astley, but without quoting any particular authority,
+    De Gama had a grant from the king of the title of Don for himself and
+    his descendants, and a pension of 3000 ducats: Coello was raised to
+    the rank of Fidalgo, or gentleman, and had an appointment of 100
+    ducats yearly.--Astl. I. 40.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage of Pedro Alvarez Cabral to India in 1500; being the second made
+by the Portuguese to India, and in the course of which Brasil was
+Discovered._
+
+The certainty of a navigable communication with India, and the vast
+riches that were to be had in that country, being now ascertained, the
+king resolved to prosecute the discovery, on purpose to spread the gospel
+among the idolaters, and to augment his own revenues and the riches and
+prosperity of his subjects. For these purposes, he determined to attempt
+the settlement of a factory in Calicut by gentle means; hopeful that they
+might be persuaded to a friendly intercourse, and might afterwards listen
+to the word of God.
+
+He therefore commanded that a fleet of ten ships and two caravels should
+be got ready against next year, to be well laden with all the commodities
+which De gama had reported to have current sale in Calicut. There went
+others also to Sofala and Quiloa, where also he commanded factories to be
+established, both on account of the gold which was to be found there, and
+that the ships might have a place to touch and refresh at in their way to
+and from India. Over the fleet intended for Calicut, he appointed Pedro
+Alvarez Cabral, a gentleman of an honourable house, to be captain-general,
+Sancho de Toar being captain of his ship. The names of the other captains,
+so far as have come to my knowledge, were Nicholas Coello, Don Luis
+Continho, Simon de Myseranda, Simon Leyton, Bartholomew Diaz, who
+discovered the Cape of Good Hope, and his brother Diego Diaz, who had
+been purser to Vasco do Gama in the former voyage. Of the caravels, Pedro
+de Tayde[1] and Vasco de Silviera, were captains. Arias Correa was
+appointed supercargo of the whole fleet, and was ordered to remain as
+factor in Calicut, having Gonsalo Gil Barboso and Pedro Vas Caninon as
+his clerks. Two ships were to remain with the merchandize at Sofala,
+where Loriso Hurtado was to be factor. In the whole of this fleet there
+embarked 1500 men[2].
+
+The general was instructed, besides settling the factories, that if the
+zamorin would not quietly consent or give sufficient lading to the ships,
+he should make cruel war upon him for his injurious conduct to Vasco de
+Gama. If the zamorin consented to the establishment of a factory and
+trade, the general was secretly to request him not to allow any of the
+Moors of Mecca to remain or to trade in Calicut, or any other harbour in
+his dominions, and to promise that the Portuguese should hereafter supply
+all such commodities as used to be brought by the Moors, of better
+quality and cheaper than theirs. That he should touch at Melinda, to land
+the ambassador who had been brought from thence by De Gama, together with
+a present for the king of that place. Along with this fleet, the king
+sent five friars of the order of St Francis, of whom Fra Henrique was
+vicar, who was afterwards bishop _Siebta_, and who was to remain in the
+factory to preach the Catholic faith to the Malabars[3].
+
+The fleet being in full readiness, the king went in procession, on Sunday
+the 7th of March 1500, to hear mass at the monastery of Belem,
+accompanied by the captain-general, whom he took along with himself
+behind the curtain in the royal seat, to do him the more honour. After
+mass, Don Diego Ortis, bishop of Viseu, preached a sermon, in which he
+gave high praise to Cabral for undertaking the command of this expedition,
+as serving not only the king his temporal master, but the eternal GOD his
+spiritual Lord, drawing many comparisons in his favour from the Grecian
+and Roman histories. Mass being ended, a banner of the royal arms of
+Portugal was delivered to the bishop, who solemnly blessed it, and
+returned it to the king, who delivered it to Cabral, that it might be
+displayed at his main-top. The bishop then, gave a bonnet to the general,
+which had been blessed by the pope, and placed a rich jewel with his own
+hands on his head, and gave him his blessing. When these ceremonies were
+ended, the king accompanied the captain-general to the water side, where
+he and the other captains of the fleet took leave of the king, kissing
+his hands, the king giving them Gods blessing and his own; after which
+all went on board, and the whole fleet saluted the king by discharging
+all the ordnance of all the ships: But the wind being foul, the fleet
+could not depart that day, and the king returned to Lisbon.
+
+Next day, being the 9th of May 1500, having a fair wind, the fleet
+weighed by signal from the general, and set sail at eight in the
+morning[4]. "_The whole fleete having wayed, did then begin to cut and
+spread their sayles with great pleasure and crie, saieng altogether_, Buen
+viage, _that is to say, a luckie and prosperous voyage. After all this,
+they beganne all to be joyfull, every man to use his severall office: The
+gunners in the midst of the ship, hailing the maine sheets with the
+capsteine: The mariners and ship boys, some in the forecastell haling
+bollings, braces, and martnets: Others belying the sheets both great and
+small, and also serving in trimming the sayles, and others the nettings
+and foretop sayles: Other some vering the trusses, and also beleying
+brases and toppe sayle sheets, and coyling every sort of ropes. It was
+wonderful to see such a number of diversities of offices in so small a
+roome, as is the bredth and length of a ship_."
+
+Going on their voyage with a quarter wind, they came in sight of the
+Canaries on the 14th of March, and passed St Jago on the 22d. On the 24th
+of the same month, the caravel commanded by Vasco de Tayde parted company,
+and was never seen afterwards[5]. After waiting two days for the missing
+ship, the fleet proceeded on its voyage, and on the 24th of April, came
+in sight of land. This was cause of much joy, as it was supposed to be a
+country which had not been discovered by De Gama, because it lay to the
+west[6] of their course. Cabral immediately sent off the master of his
+ship in a small boat to examine the country, who reported that it
+appeared pleasant and fertile, with extensive woods and many inhabitants.
+The fleet was brought to anchor, and the master sent again on shore to
+examine more narrowly into the state of the country and its inhabitants.
+His account was that the natives were well proportioned, and of a swarthy
+colour, armed with bows and arrows, and all naked. A storm arising at
+night, the fleet weighed anchor and stood along; the coast, till they
+found a good harbour, in which they all came to anchor, naming it _Puerto
+Seguro_, or the Safe Port, as it was quite secure in all weathers. Our
+men took two of the natives in an almadia or canoe, who were brought to
+the admiral, but no one could understand their language. They had
+therefore apparel given them, and were set on shore much pleased. This
+encouraged the rest of the natives to mix with our people in a friendly
+manner; but finding nothing to detain him here, the general determined to
+take in a supply of water, not knowing when he might have another
+opportunity. Next day, being in Easter week, a solemn mass was said on
+shore under a pavilion, and a sermon was preached by Fra Henrique. During
+service, many of the natives gathered around, who seemed very merry,
+playing and leaping about, and sounding cornets, horns, and other
+instruments. After mass, the natives followed the general to his boat,
+singing and making merry. In the afternoon our men were allowed to go on
+shore, where they bartered cloth and paper with the natives for parrots
+and other beautiful birds, which are very numerous in that country, and
+with whose feathers the natives make very shewy hats and caps. Some of
+our men went into the country to see the towns or dwellings of the
+natives, and reported that the land was very fertile, and full of woods
+and waters, with plenty of fruits of various kinds, and much cotton.
+
+As this was the country now so well known by the name of Brasil, I shall
+not say any more about it in this place, except that the fleet remained
+here for eight days; during which a great fish was thrown ashore by the
+sea, greater than any _tonel_, and as broad as two. It was of a round
+form, having eyes like those of a hog, and ears like an elephant, but no
+teeth; having two vents under its belly, and a tail three quarters of a
+yard broad, and as much in length. The skin was like that of a hog, and a
+finger in thickness. The general ordered a high stone cross to be erected
+at this place, and named his new discovery _La tierra de Santa Cruz_, or
+the Land of the Holy Cross. From hence he sent home a caravel, with
+letters to the king, giving an account of his voyage hitherto, and that
+he had left two exiles[7] in this place, to examine the country; and
+particularly to ascertain if it were a continent, as appeared from the
+length of coast he had passed. He sent likewise one of the natives, to
+shew what kind of people inhabited the land. Considering the great length
+of the voyage he had to perform, Cabral did not deem it proper to spend
+any more time in examining this new country, but departed from Puerto
+Seguro[8] on the 2d of May, steering his course for the Cape of Good Hope,
+which was estimated to be 1200 leagues distant, and having a great and
+fearful gulf to cross, rendered dangerous by the great winds which
+prevail in these seas during most part of the year.
+
+On the 12th of May a great comet appeared in the heavens, coming from the
+east, and was visible during ten days and nights, always increasing in
+splendour. On Saturday the 23d of May, there arose a great storm from the
+north-east, attended with a high sea and heavy rain, which forced the
+whole fleet to take in their sails. On its abatement they again spread
+their foresails; and falling calm towards night, the ships astern spread
+out all their sprit-sails to overtake the rest. On Sunday the 24th the
+wind again increased, and all the sails were furled. Between ten and
+eleven o'clock of that day a water-spout was seen in the north-west, and
+the wind lulled. This deceived the pilots as a sign of good weather,
+wherefore they still carried sail: But it was succeeded by a furious
+tempest, which came on so suddenly that they had not time to furl their
+sails, and four ships were sunk with all their men, one of which was
+commanded by Bartholomew Diaz, the discoverer of the Cape of Good Hope.
+The other _seven_[9] were half filled with water, and had been all lost
+if a part of their sails had not given way to the tempest. Soon
+afterwards the storm veered to the south-west, but still continued so
+violent that they had to drive all that day and the next under bare poles,
+and the fleet much separated. On the third day the wind became more
+moderate, coming round to the east and north-east, attended by a heavy
+swell, and the waves run higher than had ever been seen before, yet the
+fleet joined again to their great joy. This wind and high sea continued
+for twenty days, during all which time the ships had to lie to, and were
+so tossed that no one thought it possible to escape being swallowed up.
+During day, the sea was black as pitch, and at night it appeared like
+fire. The general, with Simon de Myranda and Pedro de Tayde, bore up to
+windward during this long continued gale; while all the rest submitted to
+the wind and went at Gods mercy.
+
+When the storm abated, the general found that, with only two other ships
+in company, he had doubled the Cape of Good Hope without having seen it.
+On the 16th of July they fell close in with the coast of Africa, in lat.
+27 deg.S. but the pilots did not know the coast, and the general would not
+allow any one to go on shore. They could see great numbers of people on
+the land, yet none came down to the shore to view the ships. Having no
+hope of procuring provisions from the natives, the seamen caught great
+plenty of fish at this place; after which the general pursued his course
+close along shore, where he constantly saw many people, and great numbers
+of cattle feeding along the banks of a river which fell into the sea in
+that neighbourhood.[10] Proceeding in this manner, the general came to
+Sofala, with which the pilots were unacquainted, near which lay two
+islands,[11] close by one of which two vessels lay at anchor. These
+immediately made for the shore on seeing the Portuguese ships, and being
+pursued were taken without resistance. The principal person belonging to
+these vessels was a near relation[12] of the king of Melinda, and was
+going from Sofala to Melinda with gold. The people were so much afraid on
+seeing our ships, that they threw a great part of the gold into the sea,
+and most of them escaped on shore. The general was much concerned at his
+loss, especially that it should have fallen on the subject and relation
+of a prince who was in friendship with the king his master; and after
+shewing him every civility, restored the two vessels with all the
+remaining gold. The Moor asked Cabral if he had any witches on board, who
+could conjure up his gold from the bottom of the sea? Cabral answered,
+that the Christians believe in the true God, and do not practice or give
+credit to witchcraft.
+
+Learning from this Moor that he had overshot Sofala, and not being
+inclined to turn back, the general continued his voyage to Mozambique;
+where he arrived on the 20th of July and took in a supply of water, and
+procured a pilot to carry him to the island of Quiloa, towards which he
+directed his course. In this part of the voyage he saw several fertile
+islands, belonging to the king of Quiloa, who is a powerful prince; his
+dominions extending from Cape Corientes almost to Mombaza, along nearly
+400 leagues of coast, including the two islands near Sofala, that city
+itself and several others to Mozambique, many more all the way to Mombaza,
+with a great number of islands; from all which he derives large
+revenues.[13] Yet he has few soldiers, and lives in no great state. His
+constant residence is in an island named Quiloa, near the continent of
+Ethiopia, an hundred leagues from Mozambique. This island is full of
+gardens and orchards, with plenty of various kinds of fruits, and
+excellent water, and the country produces abundance of _miso_[14] and
+other grain, and breeds great numbers of small cattle; and the sea affords
+great plenty of excellent fish. The city of Quiloa is in lat. 9 deg.25'S. and
+long. 40 deg.20'E. handsomely built of stone and lime, and pleasantly situated
+between fine gardens and the sea, having abundance of provisions from its
+own island and from other places on the continent. The king and the
+inhabitants of the city are Moors of a fair colour using the Arabic
+language, but the original natives of the country are Negroes. The Moors
+of Quiloa are richly dressed, especially the women, who wear many golden
+ornaments. They are great merchants, enjoying the principal trade in gold
+at Sofala, whence it is distributed over Arabia Felix, and other countries;
+and many merchants resort thither from other places. Hence there are
+always many ships in this port, which are all hauled upon the beach when
+not in use. These ships[15] have no nails, but are sewed together by rope
+made of _cairo_, and have their bottoms payed with wild frankincense, as
+the country produces no pitch. The winter here begins in April and ends in
+May.
+
+On arriving at Quiloa, and receiving a safe-conduct for that purpose, the
+general sent Alonso Hurtado, attended by seven of the principal officers,
+to wait upon the king, signifying that Cabral had come here with the
+fleet of the king of Portugal to settle a trade in the city, and had
+great store of merchandize fit for that purpose; and to say that he was
+desirous to confer with his highness on this subject, but had been
+forbidden by the king his master to go on shore. The king agreed to give
+Cabral an audience afloat; and, on the following day Cabral waited for
+the king in his boat, which was covered over with flags, and attended by
+all the other captains in their boats; as now Sancho de Toar and other
+two ships had joined company again. The king came in an almadia,
+accompanied by many principal Moors in other boats, all decked with flags,
+and with many trumpets, cornets, and sackbuts, making a great noise. On
+the arrival of the king, the whole Portuguese ordnance was fired off, by
+which the king and his train were much alarmed, not having been
+accustomed to such a salute. After mutual civilities, the letter from the
+king of Portugal was read, proposing the settlement of trade between the
+two nations, to which the king of Quiloa assented, and agreed that Alonso
+Hurtado should wait upon him next day with an account of the kinds of
+merchandize the Portuguese had to dispose of, for which he promised to
+give gold in exchange. But when Hurtado went next day on shore, the king
+made many excuses for not performing his promise, pretending to have no
+need of the commodities, and believing that the general came to conquer
+his country. The true reason was because he was a Moor and we were
+Christians, and he was unwilling to have any trade or intercourse with us.
+After this the general remained three or four days, to see if the king
+would change his mind; but he continued inflexible, and strengthened
+himself with armed men, as jealous of being attacked.
+
+Finding that nothing could be done here, the general went on his voyage,
+and arrived at Melinda on the 2d of August. At this port he found three
+ships at anchor belonging to Moorish merchants of Cambaya; but, though
+laden with great riches, he would not meddle with them, out of respect
+for the king of Melinda. On coming to anchor the general saluted the king
+with all his ordnance; on which the king sent a complimentary message of
+welcome, with a present of many sheep, hens, and ducks, and great
+quantities of fruits. The general sent a message in return, intimating
+that he had come here by orders of the king of Portugal, to know if his
+highness had any service which the fleet could perform for him, and to
+deliver a letter and a rich present from the king of Portugal, which he
+would send whenever his highness pleased to give his commands. The king
+was much pleased with this message, and detained the messenger all night,
+most part of which he spent in making inquiries respecting the kingdom of
+Portugal. As soon as it was day, the king sent two principal Moors to
+wait upon the general, declaring his joy at his arrival, and desiring, if
+he had need of any thing in the country, to command all there as his own.
+The general then sent Aries Correa, the factor-general of the fleet, on
+shore to deliver the letter and presents, accompanied by most of the
+principal officers, and having all the trumpeters of the fleet sounding
+before him. The present consisted of the rich caparison of a riding-horse,
+of the most splendid and shewy fashion. The king sent the nobles of his
+court to receive Correa in great state, and several women who had censers
+or perfuming pans which filled the air with a delightful odour. The king
+received Correa in his palace, which was very near the water side,
+sitting in his chair of state, and accompanied by many noblemen and
+gentlemen. The letter, which was written hi Portuguese on one side and
+Arabic on the other, being read, and the present laid before the king, he
+and his nobles all in one voice gave thanks to God and Mahomet for
+granting them the friendship of so great a prince. During the three days
+which the fleet continued here, Correa remained on shore at the kings
+particular request, in which he constantly employed himself in inquiries
+concerning the customs of the king of Portugal and the conduct of his
+government.
+
+The king of Melinda was very anxious to have Cabral to come on shore to
+the palace, but he excused himself as having been ordered by his master
+not to land at any port, with which the king was satisfied, yet desired
+to have an interview on the water. On this occasion, though the palace
+was very near the sea, he went on horseback to the shore, having his
+horse decorated with the rich caparisons sent him by the king of Portugal,
+which were obliged to be put on by one of our men as none of the natives
+knew their use. On coming to the shore, certain principal natives waited
+at the foot of the stair, having a live sheep, which they opened alive,
+taking out the bowels, and the king rode over the carcase of the sheep.
+_This is a kind of ceremony that the witches there do use_.[16] After
+this he went to the water side, with all his train on foot, saying in a
+loud voice certain words of incantation. The interview with the general
+took place on the water in great ceremony, and the king gave him a pilot
+to carry the fleet to Calicut. Cabral left two banished men at Melinda to
+inform themselves of all the circumstances of the country to the best of
+their abilities. One of these, called _Machado_, when he had learned the
+Arabic language, went afterwards by land to the straits of the Red Sea,
+and from thence by Cambaya to _Balagarte_, and settled with the _sabayo_
+or lord of Goa, passing always for a Moor. This man was afterwards very
+serviceable to Albuquerque, as will be seen hereafter.
+
+Leaving Melinda on the 7th of August, he came to Ansandina or Anche-diva,
+on the 20th of that month, where he waited some days for the fleet of
+Mecca, which he meant to have attacked. While there, the whole of the
+crews confessed and received the sacrament. No ships appearing, the fleet
+left Anchediva and sailed for Calicut, coming to anchor within a league
+of that place on the 13th of September. Several almadias came off
+immediately to sell victuals: And some of the principal nayres, with a
+Guzurat merchant, brought a message from the zamorin,[17] declaring his
+satisfaction at the arrival of the general at his city, in which every
+thing he might need was at his command. The general made a polite answer
+to the king, with thanks for his civility, and gave orders to bring the
+fleet nearer to the city, in doing which all the ordnance was fired as a
+salute, to the great astonishment of the natives, the idolaters among
+them saying that it was impossible to resist us. Next day one Gaspar[18]
+was sent on shore to the zamorin, desiring to have a safe-conduct for a
+deputation from the general to wait on his highness; and along with
+Gaspar the four Malabars who had been carried away from Calicut by Don
+Vasco de la Gama were sent on shore. These men were all finely dressed in
+Portuguese habits, and the whole inhabitants of the city came out to see
+them, rejoiced to find they had been well treated. Though the zamorin was
+well pleased with the safe return of his subjects, he refused allowing
+them to come into his presence as they were only fishermen, or of a low
+cast; but he sent for Gaspar, whom he received with civility, and whom he
+assured that our people might come on shore in perfect safety. On
+receiving this intelligence, Cabral sent Alonso Hurtado to the zamorin,
+intimating that the Portuguese fleet had come on purpose to settle trade
+and friendship, and that the general wished for an audience in which to
+arrange these matters with his highness. But had orders from the king his
+master not to go on shore without sufficient pledges for his security;
+among whom he demanded the kutwal of Calicut and Araxamenoca one of the
+chiefs of the nayres.[19] On this occasion Hurtado was accompanied by a
+person who could speak the language, to act as his interpreter.
+
+The zamorin was unwilling to send the hostages required, alleging that
+they were old and sickly, and offered to send others who were better able
+to endure the hardships of living on board. Yet he afterwards, at the
+instigation of the Moors, was against sending any hostages; as they made
+him believe that the general shewed little confidence in his promise,
+which was derogatory to his honour and dignity. This negociation lasted
+three days, as Hurtado insisted on this as a necessary preliminary. At
+length, desirous of having trade settled with us, owing to the advantages
+which would accrue to his revenue, the zamorin agreed to give the
+hostages required. On which, leaving the command of the fleet in his
+absence to Sancho de Toar, Cabral directed that the hostages should be
+well treated, but on no account to deliver them to any one even although
+demanded in his name. On the 28th of December, Cabral went on shore
+magnificently dressed and attended by thirty of his principal officers
+and others, the kings servants, in as much state as if he had been king
+of Portugal; carrying with him rich furniture for his apartments, with a
+cupboard of plate containing many rich pieces of gilt silver. He was met
+by many principal nayres, sent by the zamorin to wait upon him, and
+attended by a numerous train, among whom were many persons sounding
+trumpets sackbuts and other musical instruments. The zamorin waited for
+him in a gallery close by the shore, which had been erected on purpose;
+and while the general went towards the shore, accompanied by all the
+boats of the fleet, dressed out with flags and streamers, the hostages
+were carried on board his ship, where they were loath to enter till they
+should see the general on shore, lest he might return and detain them;
+but were at last reassured of their safety by Aries Correa. On landing,
+Cabral was received in great state by several _caymals, pinakals_, and
+other principal nayres; by whose directions he was placed in an _andor_
+or chair, in which he was carried to the _serame_ or hall of audience,
+where the king waited his arrival.
+
+The serame or gallery, was all hung round with rich carpets, called
+_alcatifas_; and at the farther end the zamorin sat in an alcove or
+recess resembling a small chapel, with a canopy of unshorn crimson velvet
+over his head, and having twenty silk cushions under him and about him.
+The zamorin was almost naked, having only a piece of white cotton round
+his waist, wrought with gold. On his head he wore a cap of cloth of gold
+resembling a helmet. In his ears he had rich jewels of diamonds,
+sapphires, and pearls, two of the latter being as large as walnuts. His
+arms, from the elbows to the wrists, were covered with golden bracelets,
+set with numberless precious stones of great value; and his legs, from
+the knees to the ankles, were similarly adorned. His fingers and toes had
+numerous rings, and on one of his great toes he wore a ruby of great size
+and wonderful brilliancy. One of his diamonds was bigger than a large
+bean. All these were greatly surpassed by his girdle of gold and jewels,
+which was altogether inestimable, and was so brilliant that it dazzled
+the eyes of the beholders. Beside the zamorin was a rich throne or state
+chair, all of gold and jewels; and his _andor_, in which he had been
+carried from the palace was of similar richness, and stood near him. He
+was attended by twenty trumpeters, seventeen of whom had silver trumpets,
+and three of them gold, all the mouth-pieces being finely wrought and set
+with jewels. Although in full day, the hall was lighted by many silver
+lamps, in the fashion of the Moors. Close by the king there stood a
+spitting basin of gold, and several silver perfuming-pans, which produced
+an excellent odour. Six paces from the king, he was attended on by his
+two brothers, who were the nearest heirs to the kingdom; and a little
+farther off were many noblemen, all standing.
+
+On entering the hall, and seeing the splendid state of the zamorin,
+Cabral would have kissed his hand, as is the custom of Europe; but was
+informed that this was not customary among them, and therefore sat down
+in a chair near the king, which was appointed for him as an especial
+honour. He then delivered his letter of credit from the king of Portugal,
+written in Arabic, and then said, that the king his master, willing to
+cultivate trade and friendship with the zamorin and his subjects, had
+given him orders to require permission to establish a factory or house of
+trade in Calicut, which should always be supplied with every kind of
+merchandize that was in demand; and requested the zamorin to supply a
+sufficient loading of spices for the ships under his command, which he
+was ready to pay for, either by means of the commodities he had on board,
+or in ready money. The zamorin seemed or affected to be pleased with the
+embassy, and said that the king of Portugal was welcome to every thing in
+his city of which he was in need. At this time the present from the king
+of Portugal to the zamorin was brought forwards; which, among other
+things, contained, a richly wrought basin and ewer of silver gilt; a gilt
+silver flaggon and cover of similar workmanship; two silver maces; four
+cushions, two of which were cloth of gold, and the other two of unshorn
+crimson velvet; a state canopy of cloth of gold, bound and fringed with
+gold; a carpet of rich crimson velvet; two very rich arras hangings, one
+ornamented with human figures, and the other with representations of
+trees and flowers. The zamorin was much satisfied with this present, and
+said the general might either retire to his lodgings for rest and
+refreshment, or might return to his ships as he thought best; but, as the
+hostages were men of high cast and could not endure the sea, who could
+neither eat or drink while on board consistent with their customs, it
+became necessary that they should come on shore. Wherefore, if the
+general would return to his ship and send these men on shore, and
+inclined to come back next day to conclude all matters relative to the
+trade of Calicut, the same hostages should be again sent on board. As the
+general placed confidence in these assurances of the zamorin, he went on
+board, leaving Hurtado and other seven of his people in charge of his
+valuables that were left on shore. When at the water side and ready to
+embark, a servant of one of the hostages, who was dispatched by the
+comptroller of the zamorins household, went before in an almadia or small
+pinnace, and gave notice to the hostages that the general was coming on
+board. On which they leapt into the sea, meaning to escape to land in the
+almadia with the servant: But Aries Correa went immediately with some of
+the Portuguese mariners in a boat, and retook two of the hostages, with
+three or four of the Malabars belonging to the almadia: The rest of the
+hostages, among whom was the kutwal, got to the city.
+
+When Cabral came on board and learnt what had happened, he ordered the
+two remaining hostages to be secured below deck, and sent a complaint to
+the zamorin against the conduct of the hostages, laying all the blame on
+the comptroller. He desired the messenger to inform the zamorin of the
+situation of the two remaining hostages, and to say that they should be
+liberated whenever the Portuguese and the goods on shore were sent back
+to the ships. Next day the zamorin came to the shore accompanied by 12,
+000 men, and sent off the Portuguese people and their commodities to the
+ships in thirty almadias, with orders to bring back the hostages. But
+none of the Malabars in the almadias dared to approach the ships, being
+afraid of the Portuguese, and returned therefore to the land without
+delivering our people and commodities. Next day, the general sent some of
+his own boats to land the pledges, but at some distance from the almadias;
+on which occasion Araxamenoca, one of the hostages, leapt into the sea
+with an intention to escape, but was retaken; and while our people were
+busied in securing him, the other hostage made his escape. The general
+was astonished at the want of truth and honour in these people, and gave
+orders to keep Araxamenoca in strict custody; but finding at the end of
+three days that the zamorin did not send for him, and that during all
+this period he refused all sustenance, Cabral took compassion on him and
+sent him to the zamorin, requesting that two of our men who remained on
+shore might be sent on board, which was complied with.
+
+After waiting three days without any message from the zamorin, the
+general sent one Francisco Correa to inquire if he inclined to confirm
+the agreement between them, in which case he would send Aries Correa on
+shore to treat with his highness, for whose safety he required hostages.
+The zamorin answered that he was perfectly willing to have the trade
+established, and that the general might send Aries Correa or any other
+person on shore for that purpose, and transmitted two grandsons of a rich
+merchant of Guzerate as hostages. Aries Correa went accordingly on shore,
+and was accommodated by the orders of the zamorin with a convenient house
+for himself and his goods, which belonged to the Guzerate merchant, who
+was likewise commanded to assist Correa in regard to the prices of his
+merchandize and all other things relating to the trade and customs of the
+place. But this man being a friend to the Moors of Mecca, thwarted him in
+all things instead of giving him assistance. The Moors were determined
+enemies to our people, both for being Christians, and lest their credit
+and advantageous traffic in Calicut might suffer by the establishment of
+our trade in that port. Wherefore, by means of their confederacy with the
+Guzerate merchant, they took our goods at any price they pleased, and
+intimidated the Malabars from trading with us. The Moors concluded that
+the establishment of our factory would lower the price of such
+commodities as they had to sell, and would inhance the value of the
+spiceries, drugs, and jewels which they took in exchange. On this account
+they thwarted Correa in all his transactions, offering higher prices than
+ordinary for every article, by which he was constrained to buy every
+thing at a very dear rate. If at any time he wished an audience of the
+zamorin, the Moors always contrived to be present, that some of them
+might speak against him. In this conduct they were assisted by
+_Samicide_[20], a Moor, who was admiral of Calicut; who likewise hindered
+any of our people of the factory from going on board the fleet, and
+detained any of our boats that approached the shore, pretending to do this
+by command of the zamorin.
+
+On learning this sinister conduct of the Moorish admiral of Calicut, and
+suspecting some intended treachery, the general gave orders to the fleet
+to weigh their anchors, and to remove out of the harbour, lest they might
+be attacked by the zamorins fleet, and that he might take counsel with
+the other captains for the safety of the expedition. On learning this,
+the zamorin inquired the reason from Correa, who urged the injurious
+behaviour of the Moors, and told him all that they had done. The zamorin
+immediately gave orders that the Moors should discontinue their villanous
+conduct towards us, and even removed the Guzerate merchant from our
+factory, appointing one _Cosebequin_[21] in his place, who, though a Moor,
+was a very honest man and behaved to us in a friendly manner. This man
+was of great credit in Calicut, being the head of all the native Moors of
+that country, who are always at variance with the Moors of Cairo and of
+the Red Sea, of whom the admiral Samicide was the chief. The Zamorin gave
+farther orders, that our factory should be removed to a house close to
+the shore which belonged to Cosebequin, that our merchants might have
+greater freedom to buy and sell, without any interruption from the Moors.
+For the greater security, a deed of gift was made of this house by the
+zamorin to the king of Portugal and his successors for ever, a copy of
+which, signed and sealed by the zamorin, was enclosed in a casket of gold
+that it might be conveyed to Portugal; and permission was given to
+display a flag of the royal arms of Portugal from the top of the
+factory[22]. On receiving intelligence of these favourable measures, Cabral
+brought back the fleet into the harbour of Calicut, and sent his
+compliments of thanks to the zamorin for his gracious and favourable
+dispositions. After this, our factory had tolerably good fortune in
+conducting its trade by the assistance of Cosebequin: and the natives,
+finding our factory favoured by the zamorin, behaved so very civilly to
+our people that they could go about wherever they pleased, with as much
+freedom and safety as in Lisbon.
+
+During the subsistence of this friendly intercourse, a large Moorish ship
+was descried from Calicut on its voyage from Cochin for Cambaya; and the
+zamorin requested our general to make prize of the ship, alleging that it
+contained a peculiarly fine elephant which he wished to possess, and
+which had been refused to him although he had offered more than its value.
+The general answered that he would do this willingly to gratify his
+highness; but, as he was informed the ship was large and well manned,
+both with mariners and soldiers, it could not be expected to surrender
+without resistance, in which some men might be slain on both sides, and
+it was therefore necessary he should have the sanction of his highness to
+kill these people in case of resistance, which was accordingly granted.
+Upon which the general sent Pedro de Tayde in his caravel, accompanied by
+a valiant young gentleman named Duarte, or Edward Pacheco, and by sixty
+fighting men, with orders to take this ship. Along with them the zamorin
+sent certain Moors, that they might witness the manner of fighting used
+by the Portuguese. The caravel gave chase to the Moorish ship till night,
+and then lost sight of her; but in sailing along shore by moon-light,
+they saw her riding at anchor, ready for defence, judging her to be about
+600 tons burthen, and to contain 300 fighting men. Pacheco, according to
+his orders, did not think proper to lay the Moorish ship on board, but
+commanded his ship to be brought to, intending to sink the Moorish ship
+by means of his ordnance, in case of necessity. The Moors made light of
+our small force, which they greeted with loud cries and the sound of
+musical instruments, after which they played their ordnance against our
+caravel. They were bravely answered by our men, and one of our balls
+struck them between wind and water, so that the Moorish ship took in much
+water; and many of their men being killed and wounded by our shot, they
+bore away for the bay of Cananor, which was very near, and came there to
+anchor beside other four Moorish ships. Pacheco followed them and
+continued to batter them with his guns, and had assuredly taken them had
+not certain _paroas_ belonging to the Moors come from the port of Cananor
+to their assistance. The night growing very dark, Pacheco quitted the bay
+lest his caravel might be set on fire by the Moors, and came to anchor
+close to an island at a short distance, having had nine of his men
+wounded by arrows during the engagement.
+
+Next morning Pacheco again attacked the Moorish ship, which at last
+yielded, to the great displeasure of the natives of Cananor, who had
+flocked to the seaside intending to have succoured the Moors; but, on
+Pacheco sending a few shots among them, they all dispersed. Pacheco came
+next day to Calicut with his prize, where the zamorin came down to the
+water side to see the Moorish ship, giving great praise to our people for
+their prowess, being much astonished that so great a ship should be taken
+by one so much inferior in size and number of men. The general commanded
+this ship to be delivered to the zamorin, together with the seven
+elephants that were on board, which were worth in Calicut 30,000 crowns.
+He also sent a message to the zamorin, saying that he need not be
+astonished at this action as he would perform much greater actions to
+serve his highness. The zamorin returned thanks for what had been done,
+and desired the brave men who had performed this gallant action to be
+sent him, that he might do them honour and reward them as they deserved;
+and he bestowed large presents upon Pacheco in particular. Some affirm
+that the performance of this gallant feat by so small a number of our men
+against such great odds, raised fear and jealousy of the Portuguese in
+the mind of the zamorin, and made him anxious to get them away from his
+country; for which cause he gave his consent to the treachery which was
+used against them, as I mean to shew in the sequel[23].
+
+The Moors of Calicut were more terrified than ever at the Portuguese in
+consequence of the capture of this ship, and were much offended by the
+favour bestowed by the zamorin upon our men for their gallantry on this
+occasion. They believed that all this was done, out of, revenge against
+themselves, for the injuries they had done us, and was intended to induce
+them to retire from Calicut; especially as our people brought there as
+great store of merchandize as they did, and bought as many spices. Taking
+all this into consideration, they procured an audience of the zamorin, to
+whom one of their number made the following oration in the name of all
+the Moors.
+
+_"Emparather[24]_ of all the Malabars, as great as the mightiest
+sovereign of the Indies, and most powerful among the princes of the earth.
+We are astonished that you should debase yourself by receiving into your
+country these enemies of your law and strangers to the customs of your
+kingdom, who seem pirates rather than merchants. We should not wonder at
+your so doing were your city in want of the commodities they bring, or
+could not otherwise dispose of the spiceries they purchase: But we, whom
+you have long known and whose fidelity you are well assured of by
+experience, have always done both to the great increase of your revenue.
+You appear to forget all this, by receiving those whom you do not know
+into your favour, and employing them to revenge your injuries, as if your
+own numerous and faithful subjects were incompetent for the purpose. In
+this you dishonour yourself, and embolden these strangers to hold your
+power in contempt, and to act as we know they will hereafter, by robbing
+and plundering all merchant ships that frequent your port, to the ruin of
+your country, and who will at length take possession of your city. This
+is the true intent of their coming into these seas, and not to trade for
+spices as they pretend. Their country is almost 5000 leagues from hence,
+and the voyage out and home is attended by many dangers through unknown
+and stormy seas, besides the great cost of their large ships with so many
+men and guns; Hence at whatever prices they may dispose of their spices
+in Portugal, it is obvious such a trade must be carried on with great
+loss; which is a manifest proof that they are pirates, and not merchants,
+who come here to rob, and to take your city. The house you have given
+them for a factory, they will convert into a fort, from whence they will
+make war on you when you least expect it. All this we say more from the
+good will we owe you, than for any profit; for, if you do not listen to
+our advice, there are other cities in Malabar to which we will remove,
+and to which the spices will be conveyed for us."
+
+To this harangue the zamorin gave a favourable answer, saying that he
+would give attention to all they had said, of which indeed he already had
+some suspicions. That he had employed the Portuguese to seize the ship to
+try their courage, and had allowed them to load their ships, that the
+money they had brought to purchase goods might remain in the country; and
+finally, that he would not forsake them in favour of the strangers. The
+Moors were by no means satisfied with all this, because the zamorin did
+not order us to depart from Calicut, and did not stop our trade, which
+was their chief purpose. Though disappointed in these views, they
+continued to intermiddle in our affairs, particularly by buying up the
+spices and sending them elsewhere, in hope of irritating our people, and
+bringing on a quarrel, that they might have a pretext to attack us. This
+they were much inclined to bring about, as, being greatly more numerous
+than our men, they hoped the zamorin would take part with them against us.
+They likewise used all possible means to draw over the common people of
+Calicut to their side, and to excite them to enmity, against us, by
+making them believe that our people had injured them.
+
+Through those devices, our factor was unable to procure more spices than
+sufficed to load two ships in the course of three months, from which the
+general was convinced that the friendly assurances of the zamorin was
+little to be depended on; and if he had not been afraid of not being able
+to procure a sufficient supply elsewhere, he would have gone to another
+port: But, having already consumed a long time and been at heavy charges,
+he determined to remain at Calicut, and sent a message to the zamorin,
+complaining of the delays, which ill accorded with the promises of his
+highness, that the whole fleet should be loaded in twenty days, whereas
+three months were now elapsed and the loading of two ships only was
+procured. He urged the zamorins promise that the Portuguese ships were to
+be first loaded; whereas he had assured information that the Moors had
+bought up great quantities of spices at lower prices, and sent them to
+other places, and begged the zamorin to consider that it was now time for
+the ships to begin their voyage to Portugal, and that he anxiously wished
+for dispatch. On receiving this message, the zamorin pretended to be much
+surprised that our ships were still unprovided with a loading, and could
+not believe that the Moors had secretly bought up and removed the spices,
+contrary to his orders; and even gave permission to the general to take
+those ships belonging to the Moors which were laden with spices, paying
+the same prices for the spices which had been given by the Moors. This
+intelligence gave much satisfaction to the Moors, as a favourable
+opportunity for drawing on hostilities with the Portuguese; and,
+accordingly, one of the principal Moorish merchants began immediately to
+load his ship: openly with all kinds of drugs and spices, and suborned
+several Moors and Indians, who pretended to be the friends of our factor,
+to insinuate that he would never be able to find a sufficient loading for
+our fleet, if he did not seize that ship. Correa listened to this
+insidious advice, which he communicated to the general, urging him to
+take that Moorish ship, as he had license from the zamorin to that effect.
+The general was exceedingly unwilling to proceed to this extremity,
+afraid of the influence of the Moors with the zamorin, and of producing
+hostilities with the natives. But Correa remonstrated against delay,
+protesting that the general should be responsible for all losses that
+might accrue to the king of Portugal through his neglect. Over-persuaded
+by this urgency of the factor, the general sent all the boats of the
+squadron on the 17th of December to take possession of the Moorish ship.
+
+When this intelligence was received on shore, the Moors thought this a
+favourable opportunity of destroying our people, and immediately raised a
+great outcry against the Portuguese, incensing the people of the city to
+join with them in complaining to the zamorin; to whom they went in a
+tumultuous manner, representing that we had bought and shipped a much
+larger quantity of drugs and spices than the value of all our merchandize,
+and not contented with this, were for taking all like thieves and pirates;
+they blamed the zamorin for permitting us to trade in the city, and
+requested his license to revenge themselves upon us for the loss of their
+vessel. The faithless and inconstant king save them the license they
+required; on which they immediately armed themselves, and ran furiously
+to our factory, which was surrounded by a wall eight or ten feet high,
+and contained at that time seventy Portuguese, among whom was Fra
+Henriques and his friars. Of our people in the factory, only eight were
+armed with crossbows, all the rest being only armed with swords, with
+nothing to defend them but their cloaks. On hearing the tumult, our
+people went to the gate of the factory, and seeing only a few assailants,
+they thought to defend themselves with their swords against a mischievous
+rabble, but the numbers of the Moors soon increased, and galled our
+people so severely with their spears and arrows, that they were forced to
+shut the gates, after killing seven of the enemy, hoping to be able to
+defend themselves by means of the wall. In this conflict four of our men
+were slain, and several wounded, and all the remainder mounted the wall
+to defend it by means of the crossbows, judging that the assailants were
+at least four thousand men, among whom were several nayres.
+
+Cores now found himself unable to defend the factory against so great a
+force, and therefore hoisted a flag as signal to the fleet. The general
+was at this time sick in bed, having been just blooded, and was not
+therefore able to go in person to relieve the people in the factory; but
+immediately sent all the boats of the fleet, well manned, under the
+command of Sancho de Toar. But he was afraid to venture on land with so
+small a force against so great a multitude, or even to approach too near
+the shore, lest the enemies might assail him in their almadias and tonis.
+He lay off, therefore, at a considerable distance, where he remained a
+spectator of the valiant defence made by our people at the factory,
+whence they killed great numbers of the assailants. But their enemies
+always increased in numbers, and they at length brought up certain
+engines to beat down part of the wall, in which they at length succeeded.
+On this, our men issued out by a door which led towards the sea side, in
+hopes of being able to fight their way to the boats, in which attempt
+Corea was slain, and fifty more of our men were either killed or made
+prisoners, twenty only escaping who swam to the boats, most of whom were
+much wounded. Among these were Fra Henriques, and Antonio, the son of
+Aries Corea, then only eleven years old; who hath since done many noble
+feats of arms in the Indies and other places, as I shall afterwards
+declare in the _Fourth_ Book of this history.
+
+The general was much concerned at this event, not only for the loss of
+his men, but on seeing how little confidence could be reposed on the
+promises of the zamorin after all the presents he had received, and the
+services which had been performed for him. He had now spent three months
+at Calicut, during which he had only loaded two of his ships, and knew
+not how to procure loading for the rest; especially as he could not
+expect a favourable reception at Cochin on account of having captured the
+ship with the elephant as before related. Considering the treason which
+had been practised on our men, the general determined upon taking a
+signal revenge, if the zamorin did not make an ample excuse for what had
+taken place, and make a full reparation by immediately providing the rest
+of the ships with lading. The zamorin, however, had no such intentions,
+being much pleased with what the Moors had done, and even ordered all the
+goods in our factory to be seized, to the value of 4000 ducats. He
+likewise ordered all of our people who had been taken on shore to be made
+captives, four of whom died of their wounds. Seeing that no message or
+excuse was sent by the zamorin all that day, the general held a council
+with his officers as to the proper steps to be taken on the present
+emergency; when it was determined to take immediate and ample revenge,
+without giving time to the zamorin to arm his fleet. On this, orders were
+issued to take possession of ten large ships which lay in the road or
+harbour of Calicut, which was done after some resistance, many of their
+crews being killed or drowned, and others made prisoners who were
+reserved to serve as mariners on board our fleet. Some spices and other
+merchandize were taken in these ships, and three elephants, which were
+killed and salted as provisions for the voyage; and it appeared that 600
+Moors were slain in defending these ships. After every thing of value was
+taken from the Moorish ships, they were all burnt in sight of the city.
+Many of the Moors embarked in their almadias to attempt succouring their
+ships, but our men soon put them to flight by means of their ordnance.
+
+The zamorin and the whole city of Calicut were much mortified to see so
+many ships destroyed, and them unable to help, but their astonishment and
+terror were much increased by the events of the ensuing day. During the
+night, the general ordered all the ships of the fleet to be towed as near
+as possible to the shore by means of the boats, and spread out at some
+distance from each other, that they might be able to reach the city with
+their ordnance; which, as soon as day broke, was directed to play upon
+the city in every direction, doing vast damage among the houses. The
+natives brought down to the shore such small pieces of ordnance as they
+possessed, which they fired off against us, but without being able to do
+us any injury; whereas not a shot of ours missed taking effect, either
+among the multitude of our enemies which flocked to the shore, or on the
+buildings of the city, both the houses of the inhabitants and the temples
+of their deities receiving incredible damage. So great was the
+consternation, that the zamorin fled from his palace, and one of his
+chief nayres was killed by a ball close beside him. Part even of the
+palace was destroyed by the cannonade. Towards afternoon two ships were
+seen approaching the harbour, which immediately changed their course on
+seeing how our fleet was employed; on which the general ceased firing
+against Calicut, and made all sail after these two ships to Pandarane,
+where they took shelter among other seven ships lying at anchor close to
+the shore and filled with Moors. Finding that our fleet could not get
+near enough to attack them, owing to shallow water, and considering that
+it was now late in the season for his voyage back to Lisbon, the general
+resolved to be contented with the revenge he had already taken upon
+Calicut, and made sail for Cochin, where he was informed there was more
+pepper to be had than even at Calicut, and where he hoped to enter into a
+treaty with the rajah of that place.'
+
+On his way towards Cochin, Cabral took two ships belonging to the Moors,
+which he set on fire, after taking out of them some rice which they had
+on board. On the 20th of December the fleet arrived at Cochin, which is
+nineteen leagues to the south of Calicut, and is in nine degrees towards
+the north[25]. Cochin is in the province of Malabar, on a river close to
+the sea, and is almost an island, so that it is very strong and difficult
+of access, having a large and safe harbour. The land in its neighbourhood
+is low and intersected by branches of the river into many islands. The
+city itself is built much after the same manner with Calicut, and is
+inhabited by idolaters, with a good many Moorish strangers, who come
+hither to trade from many countries, two of whom were so rich as to have
+each fifty ships employed. This country does not abound in provisions,
+but produces large store of pepper, even Calicut being mostly supplied
+from hence: But as Calicut is greatly more resorted to by merchants, it
+is therefore much richer than Cochin. The king is an idolater, of the
+same manners and customs with him of Calicut; but his country being small
+he is very poor, and has not even the right to coin money, being in many
+respects subordinate to the zamorin; who, on his accession to the throne
+always goes to Cochin, and takes possession of that kingdom, either
+retaining it in his own hands, or restoring the rajah as he may think
+proper. The rajah of Cochin, consequently, is bound to assist the zamorin
+in all his wars, and must always be of the same religion with his
+paramount.
+
+Having come to anchor in the harbour of Cochin, the general sent one
+Michael Jogue[26] on shore with a message to the rajah, as he feared to
+send Caspar on shore, lest he might run away. This person, though an
+idolater and a stranger, had come aboard our fleet with the intention of
+becoming a Christian, and of going into Portugal, and our general had him
+baptised by the name of Michael. He was ordered to give the rajah of
+Cochin an account of all that had happened at Calicut, and that Cabral
+had brought great store of merchandize to barter for the commodities of
+Cochin; or if the rajah were not satisfied with these, he was willing to
+give ready money for what he wanted; requesting to be furnished with
+loading for four of his ships in either way, as most agreeable to the
+rajah. To this message the rajah[27] made answer, that he was exceedingly
+glad of the arrival of the Portuguese, of whose power and valour he had
+already heard, for which he esteemed them highly, and that they were
+welcome to purchase what spices his country afforded, either in barter
+for their goods, or for money, as they thought proper. He added, that the
+general might freely send any agents he pleased on shore to make
+purchases and sales, and sent two principal nayres as hostages for their
+safety; conditioning only, that they might be changed daily for others,
+because any of that cast who chanced to eat even once on shipboard could
+never appear again in the rajahs presence. Cabral was well pleased with
+this promising beginning, and immediately appointed Gonzalo Gil Barbosa
+as factor, who had been assistant to Aries Correa, giving him Laurenco
+Morena as clerk, and Madera de Alcusia as interpreter, with four of the
+banished men as servants.
+
+On receiving notice of the landing of Barbosa, the rajah sent the
+register[28] of the city to meet him, accompanied by many of the nayres,
+or principal men of the court, who brought him to visit the rajah, who
+was much inferior in dress and appearance of state to the zamorin, even
+the hall of audience having only bare walls, seated around like a theatre,
+in which the rajah sat with very few attendants. Barbosa presented to the
+rajah, in name of our general, a basin of silver filled with saffron, a
+large silver ewer filled with rose water, and some branches of coral,
+which the rajah received with much satisfaction, desiring his thanks to
+be returned to the general; and after some conversation with the factor,
+and interpreter, he gave orders for them to be properly lodged in the
+city. The general gave especial orders that no more than the seven
+persons already mentioned should remain on shore, thinking it imprudent
+to risk a greater number, in case of experiencing a similar misfortune
+with what had lately happened at Calicut. But there was here no cause for
+distrust, as the rajah of Cochin was a person of truth and honour, as
+appeared by his good usage of our men, the quick dispatch that was used
+in loading our ships with spices, and the orders he gave to his people to
+afford every assistance, which they did with much alacrity and zeal: so
+that it seemed ordained of God, that the trade should be transferred from
+Calicut to Cochin, for the advancement of the Catholic faith in the
+Indies, and the enrichment of the crown of Portugal[29].
+
+After the ships were laden, two Indians came to wait upon the general,
+who said that they were brothers, and Christians, born in Cranganore near
+Cochin, who were desirous of going to Portugal, and thence to visit the
+Pope at Rome, and the holy sepulchre at Jerusalem[30]. Being asked by the
+general what kind of a city Cranganore was, whether it was entirely
+inhabited by Christians, and whether these Christians followed the order
+of the Greek or Roman church, one of them gave the following answers.
+
+Cranganore is a large city in the province of Malabar on the mainland,
+standing near the mouth of a river, by which likewise it is encompassed,
+inhabited both by idolaters and Christians, and by some Jews who are held
+in small esteem. It is much frequented by strangers, among whom are
+merchants from Syria, Egypt, Persia, and Arabia, who come thither to
+purchase pepper, a great deal of which commodity is gathered in its
+territories. It has a king of its own, to whom all the Christian
+inhabitants pay a certain tribute, and have a quarter of their own in the
+city, where they have a church resembling ours, in which there were
+crosses, but no images of the saints, and no bells, being summoned to
+prayers by the priests as in the Greek church. These Christians hail
+their popes, with twelve cardinals, two patriarchs, and many bishops and
+archbishops, all of whom reside in Armenia, to which country their
+bishops always went for consecration. He had been there himself along
+with a bishop, where he was ordained a priest. That this rule was
+observed by all the clergy of the Indies and of Cathay, who have to go to
+the pope or Catholicos of Armenia for consecration. Of their two
+patriarchs, one resides in the Indies, and the other in Cathay[31], their
+bishops residing in different cities as it may seem convenient. Their
+tonsure is made in form of a cross.
+
+The cause of their having a pope is said to have been on the following
+account: 'When St Peter was residing at Antioch, there happened a great
+schism, occasioned by Simon Magus, on which Peter was called to Rome to
+assist the Christians in overthrowing that heresy; and, that he might not
+leave the eastern church without a shepherd, he appointed a vicar to
+govern at Antioch, who should become pope after the death of Peter, and
+should always assist the pope of Armenia. But, after the Moors entered
+into Syria and Asia Minor, as Armenia remained always in the Christian
+faith, they came to be governed by twelve cardinals. Marco Polo, in
+writing concerning Armenia, mentions this pope or Catholicos, and says
+there are two sects of Christians, the Nestorians and Jacobites, their
+pope being named Jacobus, whom this Joseph named their Catholicos. The
+priests of Cranganore are not shaven in the same manner with ours, but
+shave the whole head, leaving a few hairs on the crown and they have both
+deacons and subdeacons. In consecrating the elements, they use leavened
+bread and wine made of raisins, having no other in the country. Their
+children are not baptized till they are eleven days old, unless they
+happen to be sickly. They confess as we do, and bury their dead after a
+similar manner. They do not use the holy oil to the dying, but only bless
+them; and when any one dies, they gather a large company and feast for
+eight days, after which the obsequies are celebrated. If any person dies
+without making a testament, their lands and goods go to the nearest heir;
+but the widow is entitled to her dower if she remain a year unmarried. On
+going into church they use holy water. They hold the writings of the four
+Evangelists in great veneration. They fast during Lent and Advent with
+much solemnity, and on Easter Eve they neither eat nor drink the whole
+day. They have regularly sermons on the night of Holy Friday, and they
+observe the day of the Resurrection with great devotion. Likewise the two
+following days, and the ensuing Sunday, are particularly kept holy,
+because on that day St Thomas thrust his hand into the side of our
+Saviour. Ascension Day, Trinity Sunday, the Assumption and Nativity of
+the Blessed Virgin, Candlemas Day, Christmas Day, all the days of the
+apostles, and all the Sundays throughout the year, are kept with much
+devotion. They sanctify in a particular manner the first day of July
+every year in honour of St Thomas, but they could give no reason why this
+was done. They have also native friars and nuns, who live with much
+regularity. Their priests also live chastely, as those who do otherwise
+are debarred from executing their functions. They allow of no divorce
+between married people, who must live together till death. They receive
+the sacrament regularly three times in every year. They have among them
+certain learned men, or great doctors, who keep schools, in which they
+teach the Scriptures, and likewise some excellent interpretations which
+were left in old times by their ancient doctors. Their dress is similar
+to that of the Moors. Their day consists of forty hours; and, having no
+clocks, they judge of the time of the day by the sun, and in the night by
+the motion of the stars[32]. The general was very glad to receive this
+Joseph and his brother, and gave orders to provide them with a good cabin
+in his ship.
+
+While Cabral remained at Cochin, he received messages from the kings of
+Cananor and Coulan, both considerable princes in the province of Malabar,
+requesting him to come to their ports, where he should be supplied
+cheaper than at Cochin, and giving him many offers of friendship. He made
+answer, with his hearty thanks, that he could not now visit their ports,
+having already begun to take in his loadings bet that he should certainly
+visit them on his return to India. Immediately after the Portuguese ships
+were laden, a fleet of twenty-five great ships, and other small vessels
+was descried in the offing; and notice was sent by the rajah of Cochin to
+our general, that this fleet contained fifteen thousand fighting men, and
+had been fitted out on purpose to make him and all his people prisoners.
+At the same time the rajah offered to send men to his assistance, if he
+stood in need; but the general answered he had no need of any such aid at
+the present, as he trusted, with God's blessing, to convince his enemies
+they were ill advised in seeking now to attack him, having already given
+them a trial of his strength; alluding to what he had already done to
+them at Calicut. The enemy continued to hover off at sea, but did not
+venture to come nearer than a league, though they seemed in fighting
+order. Seeing this shyness, the general weighed anchor, and went out with
+all his fleet against them, having on board the two nayres who were
+hostages for the factory on shore, but his intentions were to have
+returned with them to Cochin. Soon after leaving the harbour, a great
+storm arose with a foul wind, so that he was forced to come to anchor
+without attaining to the enemy. Next morning, being the 10th January 1501,
+the wind came fair, and being desirous to attack the fleet of Calicut,
+the general made sail towards them; but missing the ship commanded by
+Sancho de Toar, who had parted from the fleet in the night, and that
+being the largest and best manned ship of the fleet, he deemed it prudent
+to avoid fighting with so large a force, especially as many of his men
+were sick. The wind, likewise, was now quite fair for beginning his
+voyage home, and was quite contrary for going back to Cochin to land the
+hostages. He determined, therefore, to commence his voyage, and stood out
+to sea; the enemy following him during the whole of that day, but
+returned towards Calicut when night drew on. Cabral now turned his
+attention to the forlorn nayres, who had been five days on board without
+eating, and by dint of much and kind entreaty, he at length prevailed on
+them to take food.
+
+On the 15th of January, the fleet came in sight of Cananore, which lies
+on the coast of Malabar, thirty-one leagues north of Cochin. This is a
+large city with a fine bay, the houses being built of earth, and covered
+with flat stones or slates, and it contains many Moors who trade thither
+for many kinds of goods. The neighbourhood produces hardly any more
+pepper than is necessary for its own consumpt; but has plenty of ginger,
+cardamoms, tamarinds, mirabolans, cassia-fistula[33], and other drugs. In
+several pools of water near this city there are many very large
+alligators[34], similar to the crocodiles of the Nile, which devour men
+when they come in their way. They have very large heads with two rows of
+teeth, and their breath smells like musk, their bodies being covered all
+over with hard scales like shells. In the bushes near this city there are
+many large and very venomous serpents, which destroy men by means of
+their breath. There are bats likewise as large as kites, which have heads
+like a fox and similar teeth, and the natives often eat these animals.
+The city of Cananore abounds in fish, flesh, and fruits, but has to
+import rice from other places. The king or rajah is a bramin, being one
+of the three kings of Malabar, but is not so rich and powerful as the
+zamorin, or even as the rajah of Coulan. The general came to anchor at
+this port, both because he had been invited by the rajah, and because he
+wished to take on board some cinnamon, of which commodity he had not as
+yet any on board. He accordingly purchased 400 quintals, and might have
+had more if he would, but refused it; on which the people of the place
+concluded that he had no more money. On this coming to the knowledge of
+the rajah, he sent him word that he would trust him with any quantity he
+had a mind for of that or any other commodity, till his return from
+Portugal, or the arrival of any other in his stead. The rajah was induced
+to make this offer, from his knowledge of the just dealings of the
+Portuguese, and their faithful performance of their promises. The general
+sent his hearty thanks to the rajah for his liberality, promising to
+inform the king his master of his good will, and assuring his highness
+that he might depend on his constant friendship.
+
+Cabral now took on board an ambassador from the rajah of Cananore for the
+king of Portugal, who was sent to conclude a treaty of amity between them.
+Departing from Cananore, and standing across the gulf, he took a great
+ship richly laden on the last of January: But on learning that it
+belonged to the king of Cambaya, he permitted it to proceed on its voyage
+uninjured; sending word to that sovereign, that the Portuguese did not
+come to the Indies to make war on any one, excepting indeed with the
+zamorin of Calicut, who had scandalously broken the peace which had been
+made between them. He therefore only took a pilot out of this ship, to
+conduct him through the gulf between India and Africa. While continuing
+their voyage, and approaching the African shore, a great storm arose on
+the 12th of February, by which in the night the ship of Sancho de Toar
+was driven on shore, and taking fire was entirely burnt, the men only
+being saved. As the tempest still continued, they were unable to stop at
+Melinda, or any other place till they came to Mozambique, where they cast
+anchor, in order to take in water and to refit their ships, the seams of
+which were all open. From this place, the general dispatched Sancho de
+Toar to discover Sofala, with orders to make the best of his way from
+that place to Portugal, with an account of its productions.
+
+The ships being refitted, Cabral resumed the voyage to the Cape of Good
+Hope, near which they again experienced a violent storm, in which one of
+the ships was separated from the fleet, after firing signals of distress,
+and was never seen again during the voyage. At length, after many great
+storms and dangers, which it were tedious to recount, Cabral doubled the
+Cape on Whitsunday the 22d of May; whence continuing his voyage with a
+fair wind, he came to anchor at Cape Verd, where he found Diego Diaz, who
+had separated from the fleet on the outward bound voyage. Diaz had been
+driven into the Red Sea, where he wintered and lost his boat, and as most
+of his men died from sickness, his pilot could not venture to carry him
+to India. He endeavoured therefore to find his way back to Portugal; but
+after leaving the Red Sea, his men were so consumed with hunger, thirst,
+and sickness, that only seven of his crew remained. After remaining some
+time at Cape Verd waiting in vain for the missing ships, Cabral proceeded
+on his voyage, and arrived safe at Lisbon on the last day of July, in the
+year 1501. Soon after his arrival, the ship which had separated in a
+storm off the Cape of Good Hope, came in; and shortly after that, Sancho
+de Toar arrived from Sofala. He described Sofala as a small island
+close on the continent of Africa, inhabited by a black people called
+Caffres; and reported that much gold is brought to this place from
+certain mines on the adjacent continent; on which account Sofala is much
+frequented by Moors from India, who barter merchandize of small value for
+gold. He brought along with him to Lisbon a Moor whom he had received as
+an hostage or pledge for the safety of one of his own men, whom he had
+left there to acquire a knowledge of the country and its language; and
+from this Moor they got ample information respecting the people and trade
+of those parts of Africa, which I shall afterwards communicate. Including
+this last ship, there returned six to Portugal out of the twelve which
+had sailed on the voyage for India, the other six having been lost.
+
+
+[1] It will appear in the sequel that there was another captain named
+    Vasco de Tayde.--E.
+
+[2] Astley says only 1200,--Astl. I. 40.
+
+[3] According to Astley, there were eight Franciscan friars besides the
+    vicar, eight chaplains, and a chaplin-major; and that their orders
+    were to begin with preaching, and in case that failed, to enforce the
+    gospel by the sword. In other words, to establish the accursed
+    tribunal of the inquisition in India, to the eternal disgrace of
+    Portugal, and of the pretended followers of the ever-blessed Prince of
+    Peace.--E.
+
+[4] The remainder of this paragraph is given in the precise words and
+    orthography of the original translator, Nicholas Lichfild, as a
+    curious specimen of the nautical language of Britain in 1582.--E.
+
+[5] According to De Faria, this vessel parted in a storm near Cape Verd,
+    and returned to Portugal.--Astl. I. 41. a.
+
+[6] By some unaccountable mistake, the translation of Castaneda by
+    Lichefild says to the _east_.--E.
+
+[7] It appears that Cabral had twenty malefactors on board for such
+    purposes, who had received pardon on condition of submitting to be
+    landed on occasions of danger.--E.
+
+[8] Puerto Seguro is in lat. 16 deg.S. and about long. 39 deg. 40'W. This country
+    of Brasil derived its name from the dye-wood so called.--E.
+
+[9] Originally, according to Castaneda, there were only ten ships and two
+    caravels: Both the caravels have been already accounted for as having
+    left the fleet; and after the loss of four ships, six only ought to
+    have remained. Astley makes the whole fleet originally to have
+    consisted of thirteen vessels, which will allow of seven now remaining.
+    --E.
+
+[10] This part of the voyage is very indistinctly described. From the lat.
+    of 27 deg.S. where Cabral is said to have fallen in with the eastern coast
+    of Africa, to Sofala, in lat. 19 deg.S. the coast stretches out nearly
+    five degrees to the east, to Capes Corientes and St Sebastian, with
+    many rivers, the great bays of Delogoa and Asnea, and the islands of
+    Bocica or Bozarnio, all of which must have been seen by Cabral during
+    the slow navigation close along shore, but all of which are omitted in
+    the text.--E.
+
+[11] Named Inhazato. Sofala is in lat. 13 deg.S. and almost 36 deg.E. from
+    Greenwich.--E.
+
+[12] According to De Faria, this person was uncle to the king of Melinda,
+    and was named Sheikh Foteyma.--Astl. I. 41. b.
+
+[13] In modern maps this extensive line of coast is divided into the
+    following separate territories, Inhambane, Sabia, Sofala, Mocaranga,
+    Mozambico, and Querimba; which will be illustrated in future portions
+    of this work.--E.
+
+[14] This word _miso_ is probably an error of the press for mylyo, by
+    which the African grain named millet is distinguished in other parts
+    of Castaneda. The _small cattle_ of the text are probably meant for
+    sheep, as they are frequently thus contradistinguished in other parts
+    of the original from _great cattle_, not here mentioned.--E.
+
+[15] These vessels were probably precisely similar to the Arab _dows_ of
+    the Red Sea and Persian Gulf, which will be afterwards more
+    particularly described.--E.
+
+[16] Thus the translation of Castaneda by Lichefild. It was more probably
+    a superstitious ceremony to guard against witches.--E.
+
+[17] In an account of this voyage by a Portuguese pilot, inserted in the
+    collection of Ramusio, the name of the reigning zamorin is said to
+    have been Gnaffer. Ramus. I. 125.
+
+[18] Probably the person who was carried prisoner from Anchediva by De
+    Gama, in the former voyage.--E.
+
+[19] According to De Faria, the hostages demanded on this occasion were
+    six principal men of the Bramin cast, whose names were brought from
+    Portugal by Cabral, by the advice of Bontaybo or Moncayde, the Moor
+    who went off with De Gama.--Astl. I. 43. b.
+
+[20] Named by De Faria, Coje Cimireci.--Astl. I. 44, a.
+
+[21] Called Coje Bequi by De Faria; or rather Khojah Beki, or Beghi: But
+    most of the foreign names are so corruptly given that it is difficult
+    to rectify them.--Astl. I. 44. b.
+
+[22] According to De Faria, this house was granted not without great
+    difficulty, and was taken possession of by Correa with sixty men.--
+    Astl. I. 45.
+
+[23] According to De Faria, this event was occasioned by the Moorish
+    admiral of Calicut, without the knowledge of the zamorin, who
+    instigated Cabral to the attempt in hope of injuring the Portuguese,
+    and sent information to the Moors to be on their guard. He adds that
+    Cabral, having discovered the fraud, restored the ship and cargo to
+    the owners, whom he satisfied for their damages, in order to gain the
+    favour of the rajah of Cochin.--Astl. I. 45.
+
+[24] Perhaps meant by Lichefild instead of emperor; or it may be some
+    native term of dignity.--E.
+
+[25] The latitude of Cochin is almost 10 N. while Calient is about 11
+    10'.--E
+
+[26] This Michael Jougue or Joghi, is said to have been a bramin, or
+    Malabar priest; one of these devotees who wander about the country,
+    girt with chains and daubed with filth. Those wanderers, if
+    idolaters, are named Jogues; and Calandars if Mahometans.--Astl. I. 47.
+    a.
+
+[27] The rajah who then reigned at Cochin is named Triumpara, or
+    Trimumpara, by De Faria, De Barros, and other early writers.--Astl. I.
+    47. b.
+
+[28] In other parts of Castaneda, this officer is called the kutwal--E.
+
+[29] According to De Barros, the rajah of Cochin was offended by the
+    conduct of the zamorin, on several accounts, and among the rest for
+    monopolising the trade on the Malabar coast.--Astl. I. 43. a. We may
+    easily conceive that one strong ground of favour to the Portuguese at
+    Cochin, was in hopes by their means to throw off the yoke of the
+    zamorin.--E.
+
+[30] One of these Christians died during the voyage, but the other, named
+    Joseph, arrived in Portugal. This is the _Josephus Indus_, or Joseph
+    the Indian, under whose name there is a short voyage in Grynaeus: which
+    properly speaking is only an account of Cranganore and its inhabitants,
+    particularly the Christians and their ceremonies, with some account of
+    Calient, Kambaya, Guzerat, Ormuz, and Narsinga, very short and
+    unsatisfactory.--Astl. I. 48. b.
+
+[31] Called Caitaio in the original, but obviously Cathay, or Northern
+    China, in which we have formerly seen that there were Nestorian
+    Christians.--E.
+
+[32] In Lichefilds translation, the account of the day of these Indian
+    Christians runs thus, which we do not pretend to understand: "They
+    have their day, which they do call _Intercalor_, which is of _forty_
+    hours."
+
+    This account of the Christians found in India by the Portuguese, is
+    exceedingly imperfect and unsatisfactory; but it would lead to a most
+    inconvenient length to attempt supplying the deficiency. Those of our
+    readers who are disposed to study this interesting subject, will find
+    it discussed at some length in Mosheim, and there is a good abstract
+    relative to these Oriental sects given by Gibbon, in the Decline and
+    Fall of the Roman Empire.--E.
+
+[33] Named Canyfistola in Lichefilds translation.
+
+[34] Lagartos in the original.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+Note.--In the Novus Orbus of Simon Grynaeus, p. 202-211, there is an
+article entitled, _Short Account of India, by Joseph, an Indian Christian,
+who accompanied Cabral[A] to Lisbon in 1501_. We were inclined to have
+inserted this account at this part of our collection as an ancient and
+original document: But, on an attentive perusal, it is so jejune,
+contused, and uninstructive as not to merit attention. It evidently
+appears to have been penned by some person in Cabral's ship during the
+voyage home, from repeated conferences with Joseph: But, as the writer of
+this article informs us himself, many particulars were unknown to Joseph,
+because he had little intercourse with the idolaters, or because the
+reporter could not understand the answers which Joseph made to his
+inquiries.--E.
+
+[A] In Grynaeus, Pedro Alvarez de Cabral, is named Peter Aliares.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Voyage of John de Nueva, being the third made by the Portuguese to India_.
+
+
+Is the same year 1501, supposing all differences to have been settled
+amicably at Calicut by Cabral, and that a regular trade was established
+both there and at Sofala and Quiloa, the king of Portugal dispatched
+three ships and a caravel from Lisbon, under the command of John de Neuva,
+a native of Galicia in Spain, who was accounted a valiant gentleman;
+having under his orders, Francisco de Navoys, Diego Barboso, and Hernando
+de la Pyna, as captains of three of the ships. Two ships of this fleet
+were destined to carry merchandize to Sofala[1], and the other two to
+Calicut, and all the four contained only eighty men[2]. The instructions
+given to Nueva were, that he was to touch at the island of St Blas, where
+he was to wait ten days if any of his ships had separated. He was then to
+proceed for Sofala, where, if a factory were settled he was to deliver
+the goods destined for that place before going to India. If a factory
+were not already settled there, he was to do every thing in his power for
+that purpose, leaving Alvaro de Braga there as factor, with the
+merchandize embarked in the caravel for that market. From Sofala, he was
+to proceed to Quiloa; and thence directly to Calicut. He was farther
+directed, in case of meeting with Cabral, to obey him as general, and
+desire him to settle a factory at Sofala, if his own attempt should fail.
+
+Nueva left Lisbon on this voyage in March, four months before the return
+of Cabral, and arrived in safety at the isle of St Blas; where he found a
+letter in an old shoe suspended from the branch of a tree, written by
+Pedro de Tayde[3], informing him that the fleet of Cabral had passed this
+island on its way back to Portugal, and giving an account of what had
+happened at Calicut, of the good treatment the fleet had received at
+Cochin, where some of our men remained, and of the friendly disposition
+of the king of Cananor[4]. On consulting with the other captains, it was
+judged improper to leave the caravel at Sofala, in these circumstances,
+as their whole force did not exceed eighty men; wherefore they proceeded
+directly for Quiloa, where they found one of the exiles who had been left
+there by Cabral, from whom they received a particular account of all that
+had happened at Calicut, and of the loss of several of his ships, all of
+which he had learnt from some Moors. From Quiloa Nueva sailed on to
+Melinda, where the king confirmed the intelligence he had received from
+the exile at Quiloa[5]. Thus fully instructed in the state of matters,
+Nueva deemed it prudent to keep all the ships of his small squadron, and
+sailed across from Melinda to Anchediva, where he came to anchor in
+November, intending to take in a supply of water at that place. While
+here, seven large ships belonging to Cambaya, which were bound for the
+Red Sea, appeared off the anchoring ground, and seemed at first disposed
+to attack our ships; but being afraid of the Portuguese ordnance, they
+continued their voyage. From Anchediva Nueva proceeded for Cananor, where
+he had an audience of the rajah, from whom he received particular notice
+of all that had happened in Calicut to Cabral, and of the offer which the
+rajah had made to load all his ships at Cananor. The rajah assured him of
+his earnest desire of doing every thing in his power to serve the king of
+Portugal, and pressed him to take in his loading at that port; but Nueva
+declined this offer for the present, until he had consulted with the
+factor at Cochin, for which port he took his departure from Cananor. On
+his way between Cananor and Cochin, Nueva took a ship belonging to some
+of the Moorish merchants at Calicut, after a vigorous resistance, and set
+it on fire.
+
+On his arrival at Cochin, the factor who had been left there by Cabral
+came on board with the rest of his company, and acquainted him that the
+rajah was greatly offended with Cabral for leaving the port without
+seeing him, and for carrying away the hostages; yet had always kindly
+entertained and the other members, of the factory, lodging them every
+night in the palace for security, and always sending a guard of nayres
+along with any of them who had occasion to go out during the day, on
+purpose to defend them from the Moors who sought their destruction, and
+who had one night set fire to the house in which they lodged before their
+removal to the palace. He also informed Nueva that the Moors had
+persuaded the native merchants to depreciate the price of the Portuguese
+merchandize, and not to take these in exchange for pepper, so that unless
+he had brought money for his purchases he would have little chance of
+procuring a loading. On this intelligence, and considering that he had
+not brought money, Nueva immediately returned from Cochin to Cananor,
+expecting to procure his loading at that port, in consequence of the
+friendly dispositions of the rajah towards the king of Portugal[6]. On
+his return to Cananor, he found that money was as necessary there for his
+purchases as at Cochin: But, when the rajah, was informed of his
+difficulties from want of money, he became his security to the native
+merchants for 1000 quintals or hundred weights of pepper, 450 quintals of
+cinnamon, and fifty quintals of ginger, besides some bales of linen
+cloth[7]. By this generous conduct of the rajah, Nueva procured a loading
+for his ships, and left his European merchandize for sale at Cananor under
+the management of a factor and two clerks.
+
+On the 15th December, while waiting for a fair wind to begin his homeward
+voyage, the rajah sent notice to Nueva that eighty _paraws_ were seen to
+the northward, which were past mount _Dely_, and that these vessels were
+from Calicut, sent expressly to attack the Portuguese ships; and the
+rajah advised him to land his men and ordnance for greater security: But
+the general was not of this mind, and sent word to the rajah that he
+hoped, with the assistance of God, to be able to defend himself. Next day,
+being the 16th of December, before dawn, about an hundred ships and
+paraws full of Moors came into the bay, sent on purpose by the zamorin,
+who was in hopes to have taken all our ships and men. As soon as Nueva
+perceived this numerous armament, he hoisted anchor and removed his
+squadron to the middle of the bay, where he ordered all his ships to pour
+in their shot against the enemy without intermission. Doubtless, but for
+this, the enemy would have boarded his ships, and they were so numerous
+it would have been impossible for him to have escaped; but as the Moors
+had no ordnance, they could do our people no harm from a distance, and
+many of their ships and paraws were sunk, with the loss of a vast number
+of men, while they did not dare to approach for the purpose of boarding,
+and not a single person was killed or hurt on our side. The enemy towards
+evening hung out a flag for a parley; but as Nueva feared this might be
+intended as a lure, he continued firing, lest they might suppose he
+stopped from weariness or fear. But the Moors were really desirous of
+peace, owing to the prodigious loss they had sustained, and their
+inability to escape from the bay for want of a fair wind. At length, most
+of his ordnance being burst or rendered unserviceable by the
+long-continued firing, and seeing that the Moors still kept up their flag
+of truce, Nueva ceased firing and answered them by another flag[8].
+Immediately on this, a Moor came to Neuva in a small boat, to demand a
+cessation of hostilities till next day. This was granted, on condition
+that they should quit the bay and put out to sea, which they did
+accordingly. Although the wind was very unfavourable, Nueva stood out to
+sea likewise, which the enemy could hardly do, as their ships and paraws
+can only make sail with a fair wind. Notwithstanding all that had happened,
+Nueva was constrained to come to anchor close to the fleet of the enemy,
+and gave orders to keep strict watch during the night. At one time they
+were heard rowing towards our fleet, and it was supposed they intended
+setting our ships on fire; on which Neuva ordered to veer out more cable,
+to get farther off. Perceiving that the boats of the enemy continued to
+follow, he commanded a gun to be fired at them, on which they made off;
+and the wind coming off shore and somewhat fair, they made sail for
+Calicut.
+
+Nueva, after returning thanks to God for deliverance from his enemies,
+took his leave of the rajah of Cananor, and departed for Portugal, where
+he arrived in safety with all his ships[9].
+
+After the departure of Nueva from Cananor, one of his men named Gonsalo
+Pixoto, who had been made prisoner and carried to Calicut, came to
+Cananor with a message from the zamorin to Nueva, making excuses for all
+that had been done there to Cabral, and for the attempt against his own
+fleet at Cananor, and offering, if he would come to Calicut, to give him
+a full loading of spices, and sufficient hostages both for his safety and
+the performance of his promise.
+
+
+[1] It afterwards appears that one vessel only was destined for this
+    particular trade: Perhaps the second was meant for Quiloa.--E.
+
+[2] According to Astley, I. 49. the crews of these four vessels consisted
+    in all of 400 men.--E.
+
+[3] Called de Atayde by Astley.--E.
+
+[4] According to Astley, I. 49. Nueva discovered in this outward voyage
+    the Island of Conception, in lat. 8 deg. S. But this circumstance does not
+    occur in Castaneda.--E.
+
+[5] Before arriving at Melinda, Nueva gave chase to two large ships
+    belonging to the Moors, one of which he took and burnt, but the other
+    escaped.--Astl. I. 49.
+
+[6] According to De Faria, Nueva took in a part of his loading; at Cochin,
+    with a view perhaps to preserve the credit of the Portuguese nation at
+    that place.--Astl. I. 50. a.
+
+[7] In the original this linen cloth is said to have been made of
+    _algadon_, a word left untranslated by Lichefild, probably _al-cotton_,
+    or some such Arabic word for cotton: The linen cloth, therefore, was
+    some kind of calico or muslin.--E.
+
+[8] According to De Faria, five great ships and nine paraws were sunk in
+    this action. De Barros says ten merchant ships and nine paraws.--Astl.
+    I. 50. c.
+
+[9] On this part of the voyage, Astley remarks, on the authority of De
+    Faria, that Nueva touched at the island of St Helena, which he found
+    destitute of inhabitants; though it was found peopled by De Gama in
+    his first voyage, only four years before. What is called the island of
+    St Helena in De Gamas first voyage, is obviously one of the head-lands
+    of St Elens bay on the western coast of Africa. The island of St
+    Helena is at a vast distance from the land, in the middle of the
+    Atlantic ocean.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_The Second Voyage of De Gama to India in 1502; being the Fourth made by
+the Portuguese to the East Indies_.
+
+As the king of Portugal felt it incumbent upon him to revenge the
+injurious and treacherous conduct of the zamorin, he gave orders to
+prepare a powerful fleet for that purpose; the command of which was at
+first confided to Pedro Alvares de Cabral, but, for certain just
+considerations was taken from him and bestowed on Don Vasco de la Gama.
+Every thing being ready, De Gama sailed from Lisbon on the 3d of March
+1502, having the command of thirteen great ships and two caravels[1]. The
+captains of this fleet were, Pedro Alonso de Aguilar, Philip de Castro,
+Don Lewis Cotinho, Franco De Conya, Pedro de Tayde, Vasco Carvallo,
+Vincente Sodre, Blas Sodre, the two Sodres being cousins-german to the
+captain-general, Gil Hernand, cousin to Laurenco de la Mina, Juan Lopes
+Perestrello, Rodrigo de Castaneda, and Rodrigo de Abreo; and of the two
+caravels Pedro Raphael and Diego Perez were commanders. In this powerful
+squadron they carried out the materials of a third caravel, which was
+directed to be put together at Mozambique, and of which Hernand Rodrigues
+Badarsas was appointed to be commander. Besides this first fleet of
+seventeen sail, a smaller squadron of five ships remained in preparation
+at Lisbon, which sailed on the 5th of May under the command of Stephen de
+la Gama[2].
+
+When De Gama had doubled the Cape of Good Hope, and was arrived at _the
+farther end of the currents_[3], he went himself with four of the
+smallest vessels to Sofala, sending on the remainder of the fleet to wait
+his arrival at Mozambique. This visit to Sofala was in consequence of
+orders from the king, to examine the situation of the city and to
+endeavour to find a proper situation for a fort, that the Portuguese
+might monopolize the trade in gold at that place. He remained there
+twenty-five days, during which he settled a treaty of amity with the king,
+and had leave to establish a factory; after which mutual presents were
+interchanged, and De Gama departed for Mozambique. In going out of the
+river from Sofala, one of the ships was lost, but all the men were saved.
+At Mozambique he made friendship with the king, who had proved so
+unfriendly in the first voyage, and even obtained leave to settle a
+factor with several assistants, who were left on purpose to provide
+victuals for such ships as might touch here on the voyage to or from
+India. Here likewise the caravel destined for that purpose was set up and
+provided with ordnance and a sufficient crew, and was left for the
+protection of the factory. On leaving Mozambique, De Gama sailed for
+Quiloa, having orders to reduce the king of that place to become
+tributary, as a punishment for his unfriendly conduct towards Cabral. On
+his arrival in that port, Ibrahim the king came on board to visit the
+admiral, afraid of being called to account for the injuries he had done
+to Cabral. De Gama, knowing that he was not to be trusted, threatened to
+make him a prisoner under the hatches, if he did not immediately agree to
+pay tribute to the king of Portugal[4]. The king from fear engaged to pay
+2000 miticals of gold yearly, and gave one Mehemed Aleones, a principal
+man among the Moors whom he hated, as an hostage for the payment. The
+reason of his dislike to Mehemed was this: Ibrahim was himself an usurper,
+having seized the government in prejudice to the right heir, and was
+afraid that Mehemed intended to dethrone him. When the king found himself
+at liberty, in consequence of this arrangement, he refused to send the
+promised tribute, in hope that De Gama might put the hostage to death, by
+which means he might get rid of his enemy: But the Moor, on finding the
+tribute did not come, was fain to pay the same himself, by which means he
+procured his own liberty. While at Quiloa, the fleet was joined by the
+squadron of five ships under Stephen de Gama.
+
+Leaving Quiloa, De Gama proceeded with the whole fleet for Melinda, where
+he took in water and visited the king[5]. Going from thence for India,
+and being arrived off Mount Dely, to the north of Cananor, he met a ship
+belonging to the Moors of Mecca, and bound for Calicut, which was taken
+by our men after a stout resistance[6]. When the ship surrendered, De
+Gama went on board and commanded the owners and all the principal Moors
+to come before him, whom he ordered to produce all their goods on pain of
+being thrown overboard. They answered that they had nothing to produce,
+as all their goods were in Calicut; on which De Gama ordered one of them
+to be bound hand and foot and thrown into the sea. The rest were
+intimidated by this procedure, and immediately delivered up every thing
+belonging to them, which was very valuable; all of which was committed to
+the charge of Diego Hernando Correa, the factor appointed for conducting
+the trade at Cochin, by whose directions they were transported into one
+of the Portuguese ships. De Gama ordered all the children belonging to
+the Moors to be taken on board one of his own ships, and vowed to make
+them all friars in the church of our Lady at Belem, which he afterwards
+did[7]. All the ordinary merchandize belonging to the Moors was divided
+among his own men; and when all the goods were removed, he ordered
+Stephen de la Gama to confine the Moors under the hatches, and to set the
+ship on fire, to revenge the death of the Portuguese who were slain in
+the factory at Calicut. Soon after this was done, the Moors broke open
+the hatches, and quenched the fire; on which the admiral ordered Stephen
+de Gama to lay them, aboard. The Moors rendered desperate by this inhuman
+treatment, defended themselves to the utmost, and even threw firebrands
+into our ship to set it on fire. Night coming on, Stephen had to desist,
+but was ordered to watch the Moorish ship carefully that it might not
+escape during the dark, and the Moors all night long were heard calling
+on Mahomet to deliver them out of the hands of the Christians. When day
+appeared, the admiral again ordered Stephen de la Gama to set the ship on
+fire, which he did accordingly, after forcing the Moors to retreat into
+the poop. Some of the Moors leapt into the sea with hatchets in their
+hands, and endeavoured to swim to our boats; but all of these were slain
+in the water by our people, and those that remained in the ship were all
+drowned, as the vessel sunk. Of 300 Moors, of whom thirty were women, not
+one escaped alive; and some of our men were hurt.
+
+De Gama came soon afterwards to Cananor, where he sent on shore the
+ambassadors, and gave them a message for the king, informing him of his
+arrival, and craving an audience. Upon this the rajah ordered a platform
+of timber to be constructed, which projected a considerable way into the
+water, covered over with carpets and other rich cloths, and having a
+wooden house or pavilion at the end next the land, which was likewise
+covered like the bridge, and was meant for the place of meeting between
+the rajah and the admiral. The rajah came first to the pavilion, attended
+by 10,000 nayres, and with many trumpets and other instruments playing
+before him; and a number of the principal nayres were arranged on the
+bridge or platform, to receive the admiral in an honourable manner. The
+admiral came in his boat, attended by all: the boats of the fleet decked
+out with flags and streamers, carrying certain ordnance in their prows,
+and having many drums and trumpets making a very martial appearance. The
+admiral disembarked at the outer end of the platform, under: a general
+salute from the ordnance of the boats, and was accompanied by all his
+captains and a number of men well armed. There were carried before him
+two great basins of silver gilt, filled with branches of coral and other
+fine things that are esteemed valuable in India. The admiral was received
+at the head of the platform by the nayres placed there on purpose, and
+was conducted to the rajah, who waited; for him at the door of the
+pavilion, and welcomed him with an embrace. They then walked together
+into the pavilion, in which two chairs were placed out of compliment to
+the admiral, on one of which the rajah sat down, though contrary to his
+usual custom, and desired the admiral to be seated on the other. At this
+interview a treaty of friendship and commerce was settled, and a factory
+allowed to be established at Cananor. In consequence of this, the admiral
+gave orders for some of the ships to load here, while others were to do
+the same at Cochin[8].
+
+Having settled all things to his mind at Cananor and Cochin, the admiral
+proceeded with his fleet to the harbour of Calicut, where he took several
+paraws in which were about fifty Malabars who could not escape; but he
+forbore making any farther hostilities against the city, till he might
+see whether or not the zamorin would send him any message. Soon
+afterwards there came a boat with a flag to the admirals ship, a which
+was a person in the habit of a Franciscan friar, who was taken at first
+sight for one of those who had accompanied Ayres Correa, and who they
+supposed had remained a prisoner. On entering the ship, he saluted them,
+saying _Deo gratias_; but was immediately recognized as a Moor. He
+excused himself for coming in that disguise, to secure permission of
+getting on board, and said that he brought a message from the zamorin to
+the admiral, about settling a trade in Calicut. To this the admiral made
+answer, that he would by no means treat on this subject, unless the
+zamorin would previously satisfy him for all the goods which had been
+seized in the factory, when he consented to the death of Correa and the
+rest who were there slain. On this subject three days were spent
+ineffectually in messages between the zamorin and the admiral, as the
+Moors used every influence to prevent any friendly agreement. At length,
+perceiving that all these messages were only meant to gain time, the
+admiral sent notice to the zamorin that he would wait no longer than noon
+for his final answer, and if that were not perfectly satisfactory and in
+compliance with his just demands, he might be assured he would wage cruel
+war against him with fire and sword, and would begin with those of his
+subjects who were now prisoners in his hands. And, that the zamorin
+might not think these were only words of course, he called for an
+hour-glass, which he set down in presence of the Moorish messenger, saying
+that as soon as the sand had run out a certain number of times, he would
+infallibly put in execution all that he had threatened. All this, however,
+could not induce the zamorin to perform his promise; for he was of an
+inconstant and wavering disposition, and influenced by the counsels of
+the Moors. The outward shew he had made of peace was only feigned, or
+occasioned by the fear he had of seeing so great a fleet in his port,
+from which he dreaded to sustain great injury; but the Moors had now
+persuaded him into a contrary opinion, and had prevailed on him to break
+his word.
+
+When the time appointed by the admiral was expired, he ordered a gun to
+be fired, as a signal to the captains of his ships to hang up the poor
+Malabar prisoners, who had been distributed through the fleet. After they
+were dead, he ordered their hands and feet to be cut off and sent on
+shore in a paraw, accompanied by two boats well armed, and placed a
+letter in the paraw for the zamorin, written in Arabic, in which he
+signified that he proposed to reward him in this manner for his deceitful
+conduct and repeated breach of faith; and, in regard to the goods
+belonging to the king of Portugal which he detained, he would recover
+them an hundred fold[9]. After this, the admiral ordered three of his
+ships to be warped during the night as near as possible to the shore; and
+that these should fire next day incessantly on the city with all their
+cannon, by which vast injury was done, and the royal palace was entirely
+demolished, besides several other houses belonging to the principal
+inhabitants of the place. The admiral afterwards departed for Cochin,
+leaving Vincente Sodre with six well armed ships to command the coast,
+who was to remain in India when the rest of the fleet returned to
+Portugal, and was likewise directed to go upon a voyage of discovery to
+the straits of Mecca, and the coast of Cambaya[10].
+
+From Calicut the admiral sailed for Cochin; and immediately on his
+anchoring in that port, the rajah[11] sent on board certain hostages to
+remain as his sureties; and when the admiral landed, the rajah went in
+person to meet him. At this interview, the rajah delivered up to the
+admiral Stephen Gyl and others who had remained in his country, and the
+admiral presented a letter from the king of Portugal to the rajah,
+returning thanks for the kindness he had shewn to Cabral, and declaring
+his satisfaction at the settlement of a factory for trade at Cochin. The
+admiral also delivered a present from the king of Portugal to the rajah,
+consisting of a rich golden crown set with jewels, a gold enamelled
+collar, two richly wrought silver fountains, two pieces of figured arras,
+a splendid tent or pavilion, a piece of crimson satin, and another of
+sendal[12]; all of which the rajah accepted with much satisfaction. Yet,
+not knowing the use of some of these things, the admiral endeavoured to
+explain them; and particularly, ordered the pavilion to be set up to shew
+its use, under which a new treaty of amity was settled. The rajah
+appointed a house for the use of the Portuguese factory, and a schedule
+of prices were agreed upon, at which the various spices, drugs, and other
+productions of the country were to be delivered to the Portuguese factors,
+all of which were set down in writing in form of a contract. The rajah
+likewise delivered present for the king of Portugal, consisting of two
+gold bracelets set with precious stones, a sash or turban used by the
+Moors of cloth of silver two yards and a half long, two great pieces of
+fine Bengal cotton cloth, and a stone as large as a walnut taken from the
+head of an animal called _bulgoldolf_, which is exceedingly rare, and is
+said to be an antidote against all kipds of poison[13]. A convenient
+house being appointed for a factory, was immediately taken possession of
+by Diego Hernandez as factor, Lorenzo Moreno, and Alvaro Vas as clerks,
+and several other assistants.
+
+While the ships were taking in their cargoes at Cochin, a message was
+brought to the admiral from the zamorin, engaging, if he would return to
+Calicut, to make a complete restitution of every thing that had been
+taken from the Portuguese, and that a treaty of friendship and commerce
+would be immediately arranged between them. After considering this
+message, the admiral ordered the messenger to prison, meaning to take
+revenge on him in case the zamorin should prove deceitful in this
+instance as he had already been in many others[14]. After this precaution,
+he went to Calicut, more for the purpose of endeavouring to recover the
+merchandize, than from any expectation of procuring the friendship of the
+zamorin. For this reason he took only his own ship[15], leaving Stephen
+de Gama in the command at Cochin in his absence. The captains of the
+fleet were much averse to this rashness; yet could not persuade him to
+take a larger force, as he said he would be sufficiently protected by the
+squadron of Vincente Sodre, which was cruizing on the coast, whom he
+could join on any emergency. On his arrival at Calicut, the zamorin
+immediately sent notice that he would satisfy him next day for all the
+goods which had been taken from Cabral, and would afterwards renew the
+trade and settle the factory on a proper footing. But as soon as he
+understood that the admiral had come with so small a force, he commanded
+thirty-four paraws to be got in readiness with all expedition, for the
+purpose of taking his ship. And so unexpectedly did these assail him,
+that the admiral was forced to cut one of his cables and make out to
+seaward, which he was fortunately enabled to do, as the wind came off
+from the land. Yet the paraws pursued him so closely, that he must
+infallibly have been taken, if it had not been for the squadron of Sodre
+making its appearance, on sight of which the paraws gave over the chase
+and retired to Calicut.
+
+On his return to Cochin, die admiral immediately ordered the messenger of
+the zamorin to be hanged[16]. The failure of this treacherous attempt
+against De Gama gave much concern to the zamorin; who now resolved to try
+if he could induce the rajah of Cochin to refuse a loading to the
+Portuguese, and to send away their factory from his port. With this view
+he transmitted a letter to that prince, in the following terms:
+
+"I am informed that you favour the Christians, whom you have admitted
+into your city and supplied with goods and provisions. It is possible you
+may not see the danger of this procedure, and may not know how
+displeasing it is to me. I request of you to remember the friendship
+which has hitherto subsisted between us, and that you now incur my
+displeasure for so small a matter in supporting these Christian robbers,
+who are in use to plunder the countries belonging to other nations. My
+desire is, therefore, that for the future you may neither receive them
+into your city, nor give them spices; by which you will both do me a
+great pleasure, and will bind me to requite your friendship in whatever
+way you may desire. I do not more earnestly urge these things at the
+present, being convinced you will comply without further entreaty, as I
+would do for you in any matter of importance."
+
+The rajah of Cochin answered in the following terms: That he knew not how
+to expel the Christians from his city, whom he had received as friends,
+and to whom he had passed his word for trade and amity. He denied that
+his friendly reception of the Christians could be construed as any
+offence to the zamorin, as it was the custom in the ports of Malabar to
+favour all merchants who resorted thither for trade; and declared his
+resolution to maintain his engagements inviolate to the Portuguese, who
+had brought great sums of gold and silver, and large quantities of
+merchandize into his dominions in the course of their trade. The zamorin
+was much offended by this answer of the rajah of Cochin; to whom he wrote
+a second time, advising him earnestly to abandon the Portuguese if he had
+any respect for his own welfare. The rajah of Cochin was not to be moved,
+either by the persuasions or threatening of the zamorin, and sent a reply
+to his second letter, in which he declared he should never be induced to
+commit a base or treacherous action by fear of the consequences, and was
+resolved to persist in maintaining his treaty of trade and amity with the
+Portuguese. Finding that he could not prevail on the rajah of Cochin to
+concur with him, he commanded twenty-nine large ships to be fitted out in
+order to assail the Portuguese fleet when on its return homewards,
+expecting that he should be able to destroy them with more ease when
+fully laden.
+
+The rajah of Cochin gave no intimation to the admiral of the letters and
+messages which had been interchanged between him and the zamorin, until
+he went to take leave; at which time, he declared he would hazard the
+loss of his dominions to serve the king of Portugal. The admiral, after
+many expressions of gratitude for his friendly disposition and honourable
+regard for his engagements, assured him that the king his master would
+never forget the numerous demonstrations he had given of friendship, and
+would give him such assistance as should not only enable him to defend
+his own dominions, but to reduce other countries under his authority. He
+desired him not to be in fear of the zamorin, against whom there should
+henceforwards be carried on so fierce war, that he would have enough of
+employment in defending himself, instead of being able to attack others.
+In this the general alluded to the aid which the rajah might expect from
+the ships that were to remain in India under the command of Vincent Sodre.
+All this conversation took place in presence of many of the principal
+nayres, of which circumstance the rajah was much pleased, as he knew
+these people were in friendship with the Moors, and had opposed the grant
+of a factory to us at Cochin[17].
+
+Having completed the loading of ten ships, the admiral sailed from Cochin
+on his homeward-bound voyage; and when about three leagues from Pandarane,
+he descried the Moorish fleet of twenty-nine large ships coming towards
+him. After consulting with the captains of his fleet, and the wind being
+favourable for the purpose, he immediately bore down to engage them. The
+ships commanded by Vincente Sodre, Pedro Raphael, and Diego Perez, being
+prime sailers, closed up first with the enemy, and immediately attacked
+two of the largest ships of the Moors. Sodre fought with one of these
+alone, and Raphael and Perez assailed the other. Almost on the first
+onset, great numbers of the enemies were so dismayed that they leapt into
+the sea to escape by swimming. On the coming up of De Gama with the rest
+of the fleet, all the enemies ships made off as fast as they could
+towards the shore, except those two which were beset at the first, and
+were unable to escape, which were accordingly taken possession of. De
+Gama, considering that all his ships were richly laden, would not pursue
+the flying enemy, being afraid he might lose some of his ships on the
+shoals; but our men went in their boats and slew about 300 of the Moors
+who had endeavoured to save themselves by swimming from the two captured
+ships. These vessels were accordingly discharged of their cargoes; which
+consisted of great quantities of rich merchandize, among which were six
+great jars of fine earthen ware, called porcelain, which is very rare and
+costly and much admired in Portugal; four large vessels of silver, and
+many silver perfuming pans; also many spitting basons of silver gilt: But
+what exceeded all the rest, was a golden idol of thirty pounds weight,
+with a monstrous face. The eyes of this image were two very fine emeralds.
+The vestments were of beaten gold, richly wrought and set with precious
+stones; and on the breast was a large carbuncle or ruby, as large as the
+coin called a crusado, which shone like fire.
+
+The goods being taken out, the two ships were set on fire, and the
+admiral made sail for Cananor, where the rajah gave him a house for a
+factory, in which Gonzalo Gill Barbosa was settled as factor, having
+Sebastian Alvarez and Diego Godino as clerks, Duarte Barbosa as
+interpreter, and sundry others as assistants, in all to the number of
+twenty. The rajah undertook to protect these men and all that might be
+left in the factory, and bound himself to supply lading in spices to all
+the ships of the king of Portugal at certain fixed prices[18]. In return
+for these favourable conditions, the admiral engaged on behalf of the
+king of Portugal to defend the rajah in all wars that might arise from
+this agreement; conditioning for peace and friendship between the rajahs
+of Cochin and Cananor, and that the latter should give no aid to any one
+who might make war upon the former, under the pain of forfeiting the
+friendship of the Portuguese. After this, the admiral gave orders to
+Vincente Sodre to protect the coast with his squadron till the month of
+February; and if any war should break out or seem probable between the
+zamorin and Trimumpara, he was to winter in Cochin for the protection of
+that city; otherwise he was to sail for the straits of the Red Sea, to
+make prize of all the ships belonging to Mecca that traded to the Indies.
+
+All these matters being properly arranged, De Gama departed from Cananor
+for Portugal on the 20th December 1502[19]; with thirteen ships richly
+laden, three of which had taken in their cargoes at Cananor, and the
+other ten at Cochin. The whole fleet arrived in safety at Mozambique,
+where the ship commanded by Stephen de Gama having sprung a great leak,
+was unladen and laid on shore to be repaired. Seven days after their
+departure from Mozambique, the ship commanded by Lewis Cotinho sprung a
+great leak, and they were forced to endeavour to return to Mozambique to
+repair her; but, the wind being contrary, they had to do this in a creek
+on the coast. Continuing their voyage, they were assailed by a sudden
+tempest off Cape Corientes, in which the ship commanded by Stephen de
+Gama had her sails all split by the storm, owing to which she was
+separated from the fleet, and no more seen till six days after the
+arrival of the admiral at Lisbon, when she came in with her mast broken.
+The storm having abated, during which the fleet took shelter under the
+lee of Cape Corientes, the admiral prosecuted his voyage to Lisbon, and
+arrived safe at Cascais on the 1st September 1503. All the noblemen of
+the court went to Cascais to receive him honourably, and to accompany him
+to the presence of the king. On his way to court, he was preceded by a
+page carrying a silver bason, in which was the tribute from the king of
+Quiloa. The king received him with great honour, as he justly merited for
+his services in discovering the Indies, and in settling factories at
+Cochin and Cananor, to the great profit of the kingdom; besides the great
+fame and honour which redounded to the king, as the first sovereign who
+had sent to discover the Indies, of which he might make a conquest if he
+were so inclined. In reward for these brilliant services, the king made
+him admiral of the Indies, and likewise gave him the title of Lord of
+Videgueyra, which was his own.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Note.--As De Gama did not return again to India till the year 1524, which
+is beyond the period contained in that part of Castaneda which has been
+translated by Lichefild, we shall have no occasion to notice him again in
+this part of our work. For this reason, it has been thought proper to
+give the following short supplementary account of his farther services in
+India.
+
+"In 1524, Don Vasco De Gama, now Count of Videgueyra, was appointed
+viceroy of India by John III. king of Portugal, and sailed from Lisbon
+with fourteen ships, carrying 3000 fighting men. Three were lost during
+the voyage, with all the men belonging to two of them. While in the Gulf
+of Cambaya, in a dead calm, the ships were tossed about in so violent a
+manner that all onboard believed themselves in imminent danger of
+perishing, and began to consider how they might escape. One man leapt
+over-board, thinking to escape by swimming, but was drowned; and such as
+lay sick of fevers were cured by the fright. The viceroy, who perceived
+that the commotion was occasioned by the effects of an earthquake, called
+aloud to his people, _courage my friends, for the sea trembles from fear
+of you who are on it_. To make some amends for the misfortunes of the
+voyage, Don George de Meneses, one of the captains, took a large ship
+belonging to Mecca, worth 60,000 crowns, a large sum in those days. After
+his arrival at Goa, the viceroy visited some forts, and issued the
+necessary orders for regulating the affairs of his government; but he had
+not time to put any of his great designs into execution, as he died on
+Christmas eve, having only held the government of Portuguese India for
+three months. De Gama is said to have been of middle stature, with a
+ruddy complexion, but somewhat gross. His character was bold, patient
+under fatigue, well fitted for great undertakings, speedy in executing
+justice, and terrible in anger. In fine, he was admirably fitted for all
+that was entrusted to his conduct, as a discoverer, a naval and military
+commander, and as viceroy. He is painted with a black cap, cloak, and
+breeches, edged with velvet, all slashed, through which appears the
+crimson lining. His doublet is of crimson satin, over which his armour is
+seen inlaid with gold. He was the sixth successive governor of India, and
+the second who had the rank of viceroy."--Astl I. 54. b.
+
+
+[1] According to Astley, much difference of opinion took place in the
+    council of Portugal, whether to continue the trade to India for which
+    it was requisite to employ force, or to desist entirely from the
+    attempt; but the profits expected from the trade, and the expectation
+    of propagating the Romish religion and enlarging the royal titles,
+    outweighed all considerations of danger; and it was resolved to
+    persist in the enterprize.--Astl. I. 50.
+
+[2] The distribution, of this force is somewhat differently related by
+    Astley. Ten ships only are said to have been placed under the
+    immediate command of Vasco de Gama; five ships under Vincente Sodre,
+    who had orders to scour the coast of Cochin and Cananor, and to watch
+    the mouth of the Red Sea, on purpose to prevent the Moors, or Turks
+    and Arabs, from trading to India; the third, as in the text, was under
+    Stephen de Gama, but with no particular destination mentioned; and the
+    whole were under the supreme command of Vasco de Gama, as captain-
+    general.--Astl. I. 50.
+
+[3] Such is the expression in the translation by Lichefild; but which I
+    suspect ought to have been, "and had passed Cape Corientes."--E.
+
+    In Astley, the following incident is mentioned: When off Cape Verd,
+    Vasco de Gama met a caravel bound from La Mina, on the western coast
+    of Africa, carrying much gold to Lisbon. He shewed some of this to the
+    ambassadors whom Cabral had brought from Cananor, and who were now on
+    their return to India. They expressed much surprize at this
+    circumstance; as they had been told by the Venetian ambassador at
+    Lisbon, that the Portuguese could not send their ships to sea without
+    assistance from Venice. This insinuation proceeded from envy, as the
+    Venetians were afraid of losing the lucrative trade with India which
+    they had long enjoyed through Egypt. --Astl. I. 51.
+
+[4] According to De Faria, De Gama began by cannonading the city of
+    Quiloa; but on the king consenting to become tributary, all was
+    changed to peace and joy--Astl. I. 51. a.
+
+[5] According to Astley, De Gama was forced beyond Melinda, and took in
+    water at a bay eight leagues farther on; and going thence towards
+    India, he spread out his fleet that no ship might escape him; in
+    consequence of which he took several, but was most severe on those
+    belonging to Calicut. --Astl. I. 51.
+
+[6] In Astley this ship is said to have belonged to the soldan of Egypt,
+    and was very richly laden, besides being full of Moors of quality, who
+    were going on pilgrimage to Mecca.--Astl. I. 51.
+
+[7] DeFaria says there were twenty of these children, whom De Gama caused
+    to be made Christian friars, to make amends for one Portuguese who
+    turned Mahometan.--Astl. I. 51. c.
+
+[8] Castaneda, or rather his translator Lichefild, gets somewhat confused
+    here, as if this factory were settled at Cochin, though the whole
+    previous scene is described as at Cananor.--E.
+
+[9] De Faria says the bodies of these unfortunate Malabars were thrown
+    into the sea, to be carried on shore by the tide.--Astl. I. 52. a.
+
+[10] By the straits of Mecca are here meant the straits of Bab-el-mandeb,
+    or the entrance from the Indian Ocean into the Red Sea; and by the
+    coast of Cambaya, what is now called Guzerat.--E.
+
+[11] The rajah or king of Cochin has already been named Triumpara, or
+    Trimumpara, on the authority of De Barros, De Faria, and other ancient
+    authors; yet De Faria, in other instances, calls him Uniramacoul--Astl.
+    I. 52. b.
+
+[12] It is difficult to say what may have been meant by this last article.
+    In old French writings _Rouge comme Sendal_ means very high red, or
+    scarlet; from which circumstance, this may have been a piece of
+    scarlet satin or velvet.--E.
+
+[13] Of the animal called bulgoldolf in the text we have no knowledge,
+    nor of this stone of wonderful virtue; but it may possibly refer to
+    the long famed bezoar, anciently much prized, but now deservedly
+    neglected.--E.
+
+[14] According to De Faria, this messenger was a bramin, who left his son
+    and nephew at Cochin as hostages, and accompanied De Gama to Calicut,
+    where he carried various messages between the zamorin and the admiral.
+    --Astl. I. 53. b.
+
+[15] De Faria says he was accompanied by a caravel.--Astl. 1.53. b.
+
+[16] The son and nephew of the messenger, according to De Faria.--Astl. I.
+    53. c.
+
+[17] In addition to the narrative of Castaneda, De Barros, Maffi, and De
+    Faria relate, that ambassadors came to De Gama while at Cochin from
+    the Christian inhabitants in Cranganore and that neighbourhood, who
+    they said amounted to 30,000. They represented, that they knew he was
+    an officer of the most Catholic king in Europe, to whom they submitted
+    themselves; in testimony of which, they delivered into his hands the
+    rod of justice, of a red colour, tipped with silver at both ends, and
+    about the length of a sceptre, having three bells at the top. They
+    complained of being much oppressed by the idolaters; and were
+    dismissed by De Gama with promises of a powerful and speedy
+    assistance.--Astl. I. 53. d.
+
+[18] De Faria alleges that the persons who were appointed to settle
+    matters relative to trade at this port, differed much upon the price
+    of spices: on which occasion many threatening messages were sent to
+    the rajah, who at length through fear complied with all the demands of
+    the Portuguese. He says that the rajahs of Cochin and Cananor were as
+    refractory and adverse at first as the zamorin; and that when De Gama
+    arrived at Cochin, the three princes combined to make him winter there
+    by fraud, and joined their fleets to destroy him. That on the failure
+    of this combination, a durable peace was made with Trimumpara; and the
+    rajah of Cananor, fearing the Portuguese might not return to his port,
+    sent word to De Gama that he was ready to comply with all his demands,
+    --Astl. I. 54, a.
+
+[19] In Castaneda this date is made 1503; but from an attentive
+    consideration of other dates and circumstances in that author, this
+    must have been a typographical error.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Transactions of the Portuguese in India, from the departure of De Gama
+in December 1502, to the arrival of Alonzo de Albuquerque in 1503._
+
+As soon as the zamorin was assured of the departure of De Gama for Europe,
+he determined on putting his threats in execution against the rajah of
+Cochin, for which purpose he gathered an army at the village of Panani,
+not far from Cochin[1]. This was soon known to the inhabitants of Cochin,
+who were exceedingly afraid of the great power of the zamorin, and were
+much dissatisfied with their sovereign for incurring the displeasure of
+that prince out of respect to the Christians, whom they inveighed against
+with much bitterness on all occasions, and openly insulted wherever they
+were seen. Some that were in high credit with the rajah said openly, that
+as the zamorin was much more powerful than their state, our men ought to
+be delivered up to him, as the war was entirely on our account, for whom
+the kingdom ought not to be put in hazard. But the rajah, much offended
+at these people, declared that he was resolved to defend the Portuguese
+against the zamorin, trusting that God would favour him in so just a
+cause. Yet many of his subjects were much inclined to have seized the
+Portuguese belonging to the factory, but durst not, as the rajah gave
+them a place of considerable strength to dwell in, and appointed a guard
+for their security.
+
+At this time Vincente Sodre arrived with his squadron in the bay of
+Cochin, after having done much damage on the coast of Calicut, both by
+land and sea. The Portuguese head factor sent Laurenzo Moreno to inform
+Sodre of the preparations which were making by the zamorin for the attack
+of Cochin, and requiring him in the name of the king of Portugal to land
+with his men for its defence. But Sodre answered, that his orders were to
+defend the sea and not the land; for which reason, if the zamorin had
+prepared to attack Cochin by sea, he would certainly have defended it;
+but as the war was to be carried on by land, he could not interfere, and
+the rajah must defend himself. The factor sent a second message,
+entreating him, in the name of God and on his allegiance to the king of
+Portugal, not to abandon the factory in this state of danger, as the
+power of the rajah was inadequate to defend Cochin against the zamorin;
+and as the sole object of the war was for the destruction of the factory
+and the ruin of the Portuguese trade, it certainly was his duty, as
+captain-general for the king of Portugal in these seas, both to defend
+the factory and to give every assistance in his power to the rajah. But
+Sodre was immoveable, pretending that he had been ordered to discover the
+Red Sea, where he expected to make many rich prizes, and set sail from
+Cochin for Cape Guardafui, preferring the hope of riches to his duty in
+defending the factory of Cochin.
+
+The zamorin collected his army, as already mentioned, at the village of
+Panani, where, besides his own subjects and allies, several of the
+principal subjects of the rajah of Cochin joined his standard, deserting
+their own sovereign, and carrying along with them all the power they were
+able to muster: Among these were the caimalls or governors of Chirapipil
+and Cambalane, and of the large island which is opposite to the city of
+Cochin. At this place, the zamorin made a long speech to his assembled
+chiefs, in which he endeavoured to justify his enmity to the Portuguese,
+whom he represented as thieves, robbers, and pirates, and as having first
+commenced hostilities against him without cause. He contrasted the quiet
+and friendly conduct of the Moors, who had traded for 600 years with
+Malabar, having never done injury to any in all that time, and had
+greatly enriched the country, and had raised his city of Calicut to be
+the greatest emporium in all the Indies: Whereas the Portuguese had taken
+and destroyed his ships, made his ambassadors prisoners, insisted on
+having their ships laden before those belonging to the Moors, had taken a
+ship of the Moors, burnt ten of his ships in his own harbour, had
+destroyed his city and forced him to escape for safety from his palace;
+taking law and vengeance for pretended grievances into their own hands,
+instead of applying regularly to him for redress. And, since the rajah of
+Cochin was fully informed of all these things, yet persisted in favouring
+the Portuguese in despite of all remonstrances, he had resolved to make
+war upon him, to deprive him of his dominions, and to drive these
+Christian intruders out of India.
+
+This address gave much satisfaction to all the assembled chiefs, and most
+especially to the lord of Repelim, who entertained a rooted enmity
+against the rajah of Cochin, who had dispossessed him of an island called
+Arrnuul. The only person who opposed the zamorin on this occasion was
+Nambeadarin[2], who was brother and next heir to the zamorin. He strongly
+urged the impolicy of driving the Christians from Malabar, to which
+merchants resorted from all places of the world, seeing that the
+Portuguese had made richer presents to the zamorin, than he had ever
+received before, and had brought much gold and silver into the country
+for the purchase of commodities, which was not usually done by such as
+came to make war. He represented the attempt of the hostages to escape
+who had been given for the safety of the Portuguese chief, and whom the
+zamorin was pleased to call ambassadors, as the first cause of jealousy
+and distrust; yet they were afterwards reconciled, and took the large
+Moorish ship at the desire of the zamorin, to whom they presented the
+great elephant. He said their conduct in trade and otherwise while in
+Calicut was quite satisfactory to all except the Moors, who were envious
+against them for interfering in their trade, and accused them falsely of
+taking pepper against the will of the owners, which in fact they had done
+themselves to prevent the Christians from loading their ships; nay that
+this was so evident that even the zamorin had licensed the Portuguese to
+take the pepper from the Moorish vessels. After which the Moors had risen
+against them, slaying their men and seizing all their goods. Yet, after
+all these outrages, they had given the zamorin a whole day in which to
+offer reparation, and had not sought revenge of their injuries
+treacherously like the Moors. That he saw no cause of going to war
+against the rajah of Cochin for receiving the Portuguese into his city
+like any other merchants who might frequent his harbour, as had likewise
+been done by the rajahs of Cananor and Koulan, who would not have done so
+if they had been robbers and pirates. And if the zamorin meant to drive
+the Portuguese from the Indies, besides making war on Cochin, it would be
+necessary for him to do the same against Canauor and all the other
+princes on the coast.
+
+The zamorin was a good deal staggered by the discourse of Nambendarin,
+who had much credit and authority with him; insomuch, that it is thought
+he would have desisted from prosecuting the war, if it had not been for
+the Moors and the caymals, who represented that it would be a great
+disgrace to his character to recede after the assemblage of so great an
+army, and that it was to be expected the rajah of Cochin might now agree
+from fear to do what the zamorin had desired him. The zamorin then
+desired his sorcerers to point out a fortunate day for marching forward
+with his army, which they did accordingly, and promised him an assured
+victory. With this assurance, on which he placed great reliance, the
+zamorin departed from Panani, and took possession of Repelim, which is
+four leagues from Cochin.
+
+The rajah of Cochin had regular intelligence of all that passed in the
+camp of the zamorin by means of spies, and was in great trouble
+respecting the event, not having sufficient force for his defence, as
+many on whom he most relied had gone over to the enemy. Even those who
+remained served against their inclination, more especially the
+inhabitants of Cochin, who abhorred our people, and said openly that it
+were proper the rajah should either deliver them up to the zamorin or
+send them away from Cochin, to avoid the impending war. Many of the
+inhabitants of Cochin deserted the place for fear of the consequences.
+The members of the Portuguese factory were much alarmed by all these
+circumstances, and requested permission from the rajah to withdraw to
+Cananor, where they might remain in safety till the arrival of the next
+fleet from Portugal; hoping by this means to remove the cause of war, and
+to satisfy the subjects of the rajah. Trimumpara was displeased at this
+request, as not reposing sufficient confidence in his word, and declared
+he would rather forfeit his kingdom, and even his life, than deliver them
+up to the zamorin or any other who sought to injure them; and that,
+although he might lose Cochin in the war, there still were places of
+sufficient strength in which to keep them safe till reinforcements should
+arrive from Portugal. That although the zamorin had a great army, yet
+victory did not always follow numbers, as a few valiant men were often
+victorious over great odds, especially having justice on their side. He
+therefore desired the factory to remain, and to pray God to give him the
+victory. The Portuguese now offered to give him such aid as their small
+number would allow; but he declined allowing them to expose themselves to
+any danger on the present occasion, as his credit depended upon the
+preservation of their lives, that they might witness, for his faithful
+adherence to the treaty of amity which he had formed with their nation.
+Upon this he placed them under the safeguard of certain naires in whom he
+had confidence. After this, the rajah called all his nobles into his
+presence, together with the chief naires, who were the cause of all the
+murmurs against the Portuguese, and addressed the assemblage to the
+following effect:
+
+"I am much concerned to find that truth and loyalty should be wanting
+among men of your quality. I do not wonder at the present misconduct of
+the lower orders, who are often constrained by their poverty and
+wretchedness to commit all manner of wickedness. But that naires, who
+have always been noted for fidelity, should desire me to forfeit the
+promise which I have made, to the captain-general in behalf of the
+Portuguese, to defend them to the utmost of my power against all violence
+as my own subjects, astonishes and distresses me beyond measure. Under
+these assurances of protection, which were given with your consent, these
+men were left in my city; and yet, because you see the zamorin coming
+against me with more men than I have, you would have me to break my
+promise. Were I so unjust, you of all men ought to abhor me. If you dwelt
+with any sovereign on the assurance of his word, how would you conceive
+of him, if he were to treat you as you would now have me to act by these
+Christians? Is it because you are afraid of the great power of the
+zamorin? Be assured it were better for us all to die in the discharge of
+our duty, and the preservation of our promise, than to live dishonoured.
+To me no evil can be greater than to break my word, nor can there be a
+greater dishonour to yourselves than to be the subjects of a false and
+treacherous king. These Christians have brought much profit to me and my
+country, and the zamorin might have kept them in his own city, if he had
+permitted their factory to settle there in peace. Were it his intention
+to drive the Christians out of India, and to make war on all who receive
+them into their dominions, he ought to have begun this war with the rajah
+of Cananor: But his cause of war is the envy he has conceived at seeing
+me benefited by the trade which he has lost through his own misconduct,
+and because he believes in his pride that I am unable to withstand. But I
+trust in God and the justness of my cause, that with your assistance, I
+shall obtain the victory, and shall be able to protect the Christians,
+and preserve my honour inviolate." This speech had great effect upon the
+assembled naires, who were astonished at the constancy and resolution of
+the rajah. They all therefore craved pardon for the fears they had
+entertained, and promised to live and die in his service. The rajah
+immediately called the factor and the rest of the Portuguese into his
+presence, to whom he gave an account of all that had taken place between
+him and the naires; and named before them the prince _Naramuhin_[3], his
+brother and next heir, as general of the army which was destined to act
+against the forces of the zamorin, commanding every one to obey him in
+every respect as if he were himself present. Naramuhin accordingly
+marched with 5500 naires, and entrenched himself at the ford which forms
+the only entry by land into the island of Cochin, and which is only knee-
+deep at low water.
+
+When the zamorin received notice of the army of Cochin having taken post
+at this ford, he was somewhat afraid, more especially as he knew
+Naramuhin was considered to be the bravest and most fortunate warrior in
+Malabar. He therefore made a fresh attempt to induce the rajah of Cochin
+to accede to his demands, of delivering up the Portuguese and their goods,
+otherwise threatening to conquer his dominions, and to put all the
+inhabitants to the sword. Although the rajah of Cochin was quite sensible
+of the inferiority of his military force, and was convinced what the
+zamorin threatened might readily happen, he yet determined to remain firm
+to his engagements, and sent the following answer:
+
+"If you had required with civility what you have proudly commanded me, I
+should not have esteemed your valour lessened by your courtesy: For with
+men of wisdom and power there is no need for insolent vaunts. I have not
+as yet so sinned against God, that I should humble myself to vain
+boasting, or think that he should grant you the victory over me and those
+brave men who fight on my side. In spite of all your pride, I trust even
+with the small number I have to defend me in my just quarrel, that I
+shall be enabled to overcome you and all my enemies. However much you may
+have practised deceit and injustice, it has ever been my rule to avoid
+shame and dishonour, and I will never consent to deliver up the
+Christians or their goods, which I have engaged to defend."
+
+The zamorin was much offended by this answer from the rajah of Cochin,
+and vowed to destroy his whole country in revenge: Leaving, therefore,
+the isle of Repelim on the last day of March, he entered on the
+territories of Cochin, yet refrained from doing any injury, as he now
+occupied those parts which belonged to the chieftains who had joined him
+against their own sovereign. On the 2d of March, the army of the zamorin
+made an attempt to force a passage by the ford which was defended by
+prince Naramuhin; yet, in spite of all his prodigious superiority of
+numbers, he was forced to retire with considerable loss. Disappointed in
+this first essay, the zamorin encamped close by the ford, and sent the
+lord of Repelim next day with a still stronger force than had been
+employed in the first assault, to attempt forcing the passage. He even
+joined several armed paraws in this attack; but Naramuhin made a resolute
+defence, in which he was bravely seconded by Laurenzo Moreno and several
+other Portuguese, and effectually resisted every effort of the zamorins
+troops, who were obliged to retreat with much loss. Several such assaults
+were made on the ford, in all of which the zamorin lost many men, and was
+constantly repulsed, insomuch that he became fearful of a sinister end to
+his unjust enterprise, and even repented of having begun the war. He sent,
+however, a fresh message to the rajah, requiring him to deliver up the
+Christians as a preliminary of peace. But the rajah replied, that as he
+had refused to do so unjust an action when he had some reason to dread
+the superior power of the zamorin, it was absurd to expect any such thing
+now, when the advantage in the war was evidently of his side. He then
+advised the zamorin to beware of continuing the war, as he would not now
+satisfy himself with defence, but even hoped to give him a signal
+overthrow. And this certainly had been the case, if the subjects of the
+rajah had not shamefully deserted him in this war and given assistance to
+the enemy. The zamorin almost despaired of success, and would have given
+over the enterprize, if he had not been advised by some of his chiefs to
+assail several other towns belonging to the dominions of Cochin, so as to
+distract the attention of Naramuhin, and to weaken his force by obliging
+him to send detachments for their defence. But that brave prince provided
+against every emergency, and made so judicious a disposition of his
+forces, that he repulsed every effort of the enemy, and slew many of
+their men.
+
+Foiled in every attempt with severe loss, by the bravery and excellent
+dispositions of Prince Naramuhin, the zamorin corrupted the paymaster of
+the troops of Cochin, who changed the usual order of payment which had
+been daily made in the camp, and obliged the soldiers to come up to
+Cochin for that purpose. Naramuhin was obliged to submit to this
+arrangement, by giving leave to the naires to go for their wages, yet
+charged them punctually to return to the camp before day. But the
+treacherous paymaster kept them waiting till after day-light, by which
+means the prince was left with very few troops to defend the ford. Taking
+advantage of this concerted stratagem, the zamorin made an assault upon
+the ford with his whole force by sea and land, and constrained Naramuhin
+to retire with his small band into a grove of palm trees, where he was
+surrounded by the whole army of Calicut, yet fought the whole day against
+such terrible odds with the utmost resolution, several times throwing his
+enemies into disorder, of whom many were slain. But at length,
+overpowered by numbers, he and two of his cousins who fought along with
+him were slain, together with most of his faithful followers.
+
+When this melancholy event was announced to the rajah of Cochin, he
+fainted from extreme grief, and was for some time thought to have
+actually expired. At this time, the naires were much exasperated against
+our men, to whom they attributed the overthrow and death of prince
+Naramuhin, and the desperate situation of their country, and seemed much
+inclined to have put the Portuguese to death, or to have delivered them
+up to the zamorin. On the recovery of the rajah, and learning the designs
+of his people against our men, he called the Portuguese into his presence;
+he gave them assurance that even this reverse of his affairs should not
+alter his resolution of protecting them, both against the zamorin and his
+own subjects. He then addressed his assembled naires, urging them not to
+stain his honour and their own by injuring the Portuguese, whom he and
+they had sworn to protect. He exhorted them to persevere honourably and
+bravely in defending their country and preserving their honour inviolate
+to the Christians, and comforted them with the assurance that the
+Portuguese fleet would soon arrive with sufficient reinforcements to
+drive out the zamorin and to restore him to his dominions. In the
+meantime, he proposed that they should retire with what force remained,
+into the isle of Vaipi, which was of difficult access; and where they
+could defend themselves till the arrival of the Portuguese fleet, more
+especially as the winter was at hand, which would stop the progress of
+the war for some time. The naires were astonished at the resolution of
+their sovereign, and promised faithfully to obey his commands in all
+things.
+
+The zamorin made a new attempt to shake the resolution of the rajah in
+his present adversity, by offering peace on condition of delivering up
+the Portuguese and their goods; which the rajah rejected with disdain as
+he had done all his former overtures. On this the zamorin gave orders to
+destroy the whole country with fire and sword, on which intelligence most
+of the inhabitants of Cochin withdrew to other places. There were at this
+time in Cochin two Milanese lapidaries belonging to the factory, named
+John Maria and Pedro Antonio, who had been brought to India by Vasco de
+Gama. These men deserted to the zamorin, to whom they conveyed
+intelligence of the consternation which reigned among the inhabitants of
+Cochin, and of the small number of men that remained with the rajah.
+These men also made offer to the zamorin to make ordnance for him
+resembling those of the Portuguese, which they afterwards did as will
+appear in the sequel of this history, and for which service they were
+highly rewarded. The zamorin now moved forwards with his army to take
+possession of Cochin, and was resisted for some time by the rajah, who
+was himself slightly wounded. But finding it impossible any farther to
+resist against such prodigious odds, he withdrew to the strong island of
+Vaipi, carrying all our men along with him and every thing belonging to
+our factory. The zamorin, on taking possession of the deserted city of
+Cochin, ordered it to be set on fire. He then sent a part of his army
+against the isle of Vaipi, which was valiantly defended by the rajah and
+his men and in which defence the members of our factory contributed to
+the best of their ability. But the winter coming on, and bad weather
+setting in, the zamorin was obliged to desist for the present season, and
+withdrew his army to Cranganor with a determination to renew the war in
+the ensuing spring, leaving a strong detachment in the island of Cochin,
+which he ordered to throw up entrenchments for their defence.
+
+After his shameful desertion of Cochin, Vincente Sodre went with his
+fleet towards the kingdom of Cambaya; meaning to capture the rich ships
+of the Moors which trade to India from the Red Sea. He there took five
+ships, in which in ready money only was found to the value of 200,000
+_perdaos_. Most of the Moors were slain in the battle, and the ships
+burnt. From Cambaya he sailed for Cape Guardafu; and as his ships were
+foul, he proposed to lay them aground to be careened at the islands of
+_Curia Muria_[4]. Sodre arrived there with his squadron on the 20th April
+1503; and though these islands were well inhabited by Moors, he resolved
+to venture on land, considering that these islanders were by no means
+warlike, and stood in fear of our men. The islanders accordingly behaved
+in a peaceable manner, and sold our people such provisions as they had to
+spare. Sodre laid one of his caravels aground for repair, on which he was
+informed by the Moors that their coast was subject to violent storms in
+the month of May, during which no ships were able to keep the sea, but
+were unavoidably driven on shore and wrecked. Wherefore they advised him
+strenuously to remove to the other side of the island, which would then
+be a sure defence against the storm, after which had blown over he might
+return to their part of the coast. Sodre made light of their advice,
+conceiving they meant him some harm; and told them that the ships of the
+Moors having only wooden anchors, might be easily driven ashore, whereas
+his anchors were of iron and would hold fast. Pedro Raphael, Hernan
+Rodriguez Badarsas, and Diego Perez were convinced of the council of the
+Moors being good, and therefore quitted these islands on the last day of
+April; but Sodre would not listen to their advice and remained with his
+brother at Curia Muria. According to the prediction of the Moors, a
+violent storm came on early in May, by which the two remaining ships were
+driven from their anchors and dashed to pieces. Vincente Sodre and his
+brother, with many others lost their lives, and nothing whatever was
+saved out of these two ships. The loss of these two brothers was
+considered as a punishment of Providence, for basely abandoning the rajah
+of Cochin and the factory in their imminent danger.
+
+Those who were saved returned towards Cochin to succour our people, and
+chose Pedro de Tayde[5] as their general. In their passage from Curia
+Muria towards Cochin, they encountered several severe storms, and were
+often in great danger of perishing. Being unable to reach Cochin on
+account of the winds, they were forced to take refuge in the island of
+Anchediva. A few days after their arrival, a ship came there from
+Portugal, commanded by Antonio del Campo, who had left Lisbon alone some
+time after Vasco de Gama, and had been much delayed on his voyage in
+consequence of the death of his pilot. He had encountered severe weather
+on the coast, and was forced after much trouble and danger to take refuge
+in Anchediva. The united squadron wintered in this island, where they
+suffered severe hardships from scarcity of provisions.
+
+
+[1] This army is said to have amounted to 50,000 men. Panani is six
+    leagues from Cochin.--Astl. I. 54.
+
+[2] This person is named Naubea Daring by Astley, and is said to have
+    been nephew to the zamorin.--Astl. I. 56.
+
+[3] In Astley this prince is called the nephew of the rajah of Cochin.--
+    Astl. I. 55.
+
+[4] These are a cluster of islands, otherwise called Chartan and Martan,
+    on the coast of Yemen, between the latitudes of 17 deg. and 18 deg. north.--E.
+
+[5] Of the four officers mentioned in the text, three are enumerated at
+    the commencement of the former voyage of De Gama as commanders of
+    separate vessels. The fourth, Badarsas, is not in that list of
+    captains, and may have been appointed captain of Vincente Sodres flag-
+    ship.--E.
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Voyage of Alonso and Francisco de Albuquerque to India in 1503; being
+the fifth of the Portuguese Expeditions to the East Indies._
+
+Is the year 1503, supposing that the admiral Don Vasco de Gama had quietly
+settled factories in Cochin and Cananor, the king of Portugal did not
+consider it necessary to send any great fleet to India. He therefore
+determined to send only six ships in two separate squadrons, under
+separate generals. Alonso de Albuquerque, who was afterwards governor-
+general or viceroy of India, commanded one of these squadrons, having
+under him as captains, Duarte Pacheco and Hernan Martinez Mascarennas, who
+is said to have died during the voyage. The other squadron, likewise of
+three ships, was under the command of Francisco de Albuquerque, cousin to
+Alonso, having as captains Nicholas Coello and Pedro Vas de la Vega, the
+former of whom sailed under De Gama in the first discovery of India. This
+latter squadron sailed from Lisbon fifteen days after the other, yet
+arrived first in India. Both squadrons encountered severe storms during
+the voyage, in which the ship commanded by De la Vega was lost. Francisco
+de Albuquerque, and Nicholas Coello, arrived at Anchediva in the month of
+August, where they found De Tayde and the other captains who had wintered
+there, as related in the former section. They here received notice of the
+war between the zamorin and the rajah of Cochin, and of the sinister
+events which had occurred at that place; for which reason Francisco stood
+over with the whole fleet, now consisting of six sail, to Cananor, where
+he expected to receive more exact intelligence of the state of affairs in
+Cochin. They were here received with great joy by the Portuguese factory;
+and even the rajah of Cananor came on board the generals ship in person,
+and gave him a distinct recital of what had happened at Cochin, and of the
+present situation of Triumpara.
+
+Alonso de Albuquerque lost no time in going to Cochin, where he arrived on
+the night of Saturday the 2d of September 1503. Immediately on his
+approach, the troops of Calicut who guarded the entrenchments thrown up by
+the zamorin, abandoned their posts in the island of Cochin and fled to
+Cranganor, according to orders to that effect from the zamorin, who had
+received notice of the arrival of our fleet at Cananor. On Sunday morning
+Francisco came to anchor close to Cochin, when he was joyfully received by
+the inhabitants, playing on various instruments of music, and was soon
+afterwards visited by the Portuguese factor, who brought him a message
+from the rajah. On the Monday morning, leaving his ships in good order,
+Francisco took several boats well armed, and went to the island of Vaipi
+to visit the rajah, ordering two caravels to follow for security, in case
+of any of the Calicut paraws making their appearance. The rajah received
+our general with infinite satisfaction, greeting them with the exclamation,
+Portugal! Portugal! as soon as our boats were within hail; which was
+answered by our people shouting out, Cochin! Cochin! and down with the
+zamorin! On landing, the rajah embraced Francisco de Albuquerque with
+tears in his eyes, saying he only desired to live till restored to his
+dominions, that his subjects might be satisfied of his just conduct in
+suffering so much for the service of the king of Portugal. In the name of
+that sovereign, Francisco gave hearty thanks to Triumpara for his fidelity,
+and promised him ample revenge on his enemies. And as his finances were
+much reduced, he made him a present of 10,000 crowns from the chest
+belonging to the expedition, to serve his present necessities, until he
+might be again able to draw the rents of his own dominions. This gift was
+exceedingly acceptable to the rajah, whose affairs were then at a very low
+ebb; and gave much satisfaction to the natives, who were by it greatly
+reconciled to the protection which their rajah had given to our men.
+
+The rajah was immediately brought back in triumph to Cochin, amid the
+joyful acclamations of his subjects, who henceforwards treated our men
+with esteem and respect. The news of the rajahs return to Cochin, and of
+the money which had been given him by our general, was speedily
+communicated to the zamorin; who, in expectation of the renewal of the war,
+sent orders to his caymals or governors on the frontiers towards Cochin to
+make every preparation for defence. On the very day on which the rajah
+returned to Cochin, Francisco de Albuquerque resolved to commence
+hostilities by an attack on the island directly over against Cochin, where
+he found the inhabitants quite unprepared and off their guard, as they had
+no idea of being so soon attacked: In this unprepared state, a great
+number of the Calicut troops were slain, and several of the towns on the
+island destroyed, after which the Portuguese returned to their ships
+without loss. Next day Francisco made a fresh assault on the same island
+with six hundred men, and was opposed by the caymal or governor for the
+zamorin, with a force of two thousand nayres, part of whom were spearmen,
+but the greater number armed with bows and arrows, and some with swords
+and targets. After some resistance, but in which none of them were hurt,
+our people made good their landing, and galled the Indians so sore with
+their cross-bows, that they soon fled. The Portuguese pursued quite across
+the island, and forced their enemies to continue their flight across the
+water, leaving many of their men behind both killed and wounded. Having
+now no enemy to oppose them in the island, the Portuguese laid it entirely
+waste, and burnt all the towns and villages it contained.
+
+Adjoining to this island there lay another, named _Charanaipin_[1], which
+belonged to a caymal who was subject to the rajah of Cochin, but had
+revolted to the zamorin at the commencement of the war. From some spies
+employed by the rajah of Cochin, it was understood that this caymal had a
+force of three thousand nayres, seven hundred of whom were archers, and
+forty were, armed with matchlocks[2]; besides which all their towns were
+well fortified with trenches. He had likewise several paraws provided with
+ordnance, with which he was supplied by the zamorin, and these were
+stationed in one of the harbours of the island, to defend it against the
+Portuguese. Notwithstanding all these preparations, of which he was well
+informed, Francisco Albuquerque went against this island the day after he
+had reduced the former, and commenced his attack against the harbour in
+which the paraws were stationed. The enemy were soon driven by our
+ordnance from their boats, yet many of them continued in the water up to
+their girdles to resist the landing of our troops, annoying them as much
+as possible with stones, spears, and arrows. They were at length driven
+from the water by our ordnance, but rallied again on the shore, and
+bravely resisted our people in landing for a long time. They were at
+length driven to take shelter in a grove of palm trees, in which they
+defended themselves for a short space, and were at the last driven to seek
+for safety in a disorderly flight, in which they were pursued by our men.
+In the pursuit, Pedro de Lares, who was constable to Francisco de
+Albuquerque, being separated from the rest, was attacked by three nayres
+all at once. One of these let fly an arrow which hit Pedro on his breast-
+plate but without hurting him; on which Pedro levelled his piece and shot
+him dead. The second nayre he likewise slew by another shot. The third
+nayre wounded him in the leg with a weapon called a _gomya_, and then
+endeavoured to run away, but Pedro killed him, with his sword. On the
+enemy being put to flight, Francisco divided his forces into three bodies,
+two of them Portuguese, and the third composed of nayres in the service of
+the rajah of Cochin, and marched all over the island plundering and
+burning the towns and villages without resistance.
+
+While thus employed, a considerable number of paraws arrived with
+reinforcements from Calicut, from which a powerful body of nayres landed
+in that part of the island where Duarte Pacheco happened to be posted with
+a very inferior force, and had assuredly destroyed him and his men, but
+that Francisco de Albuquerque came very opportunely to his aid. Finding
+greater resistance than he expected, and fearing lest the caymal might
+attack him in the rear, while engaged in front with the nayres of Calicut,
+Francisco detached a part of his troops under Nicholas Coello, assisted by
+Antonio del Campo and Pedro de Tayde, to assault the residence of the
+caymal, who was slain bravely fighting in its defence. At this place one
+of our men was slain and eighteen wounded. In the mean time, Francisco de
+Albuquerque and Duarte Pacheco defeated the reinforcements from Calicut,
+and forced them to take refuge on board their paraws, leaving many of
+their men slain and wounded on the shore. After this signal victory, by
+which the greater part of the three thousand nayres belonging to the
+caymal and many of those from Calicut were slain, Francisco de Albuquerque
+conferred the honour of knighthood on several of his officers who had
+signalized themselves on the occasion. He then wasted the whole island
+with fire and sword.
+
+Francisco determined in the next place, to attack the country of the lord
+of Repelim, for which purpose he departed with his troops by water from
+Cochin, and reached a town in that territory, four leagues from Cochin,
+about eight o'clock next morning. Near two thousand nayres, five hundred
+of whom were armed with bows and arrows, were stationed, on the beach of
+the isle of Repelim to repel this attack; but were soon forced by our
+ordnance to retire into a grove of palms, on which Francisco landed with
+his troops, the van being led by Nicholas Coello. The enemy resisted for
+some time under the shelter of the trees, and wounded some of our people;
+but were at length forced to take to flight, after losing a good many of
+their men, who were shot by our cross-bows and _calivers_[3]. Our troops
+followed the nayres, who took refuge in the towns of the island, in which
+much greater slaughter was made of the enemy than in the field, as they
+were crowded together and more exposed to our shot. On taking possession
+of the town, Francisco gave it up to be plundered by the nayres of Cochin,
+who assisted him on this expedition, that they might not consider the
+conduct of the Portuguese on this occasion proceeded from any inclination
+for plundering the country, but from a desire to revenge the injuries
+which had been done to their own rajah.
+
+On his return from this victory, Francisco was joyfully received by the
+rajah of Cochin, who desired him to desist from any farther operations
+against the enemy, as he considered himself sufficiently revenged. But
+Francisco requested his permission to continue the war, as he was still
+unsatisfied till he had taken effectual vengeance on the zamorin, and
+accounted it no trouble to fight in the service of the rajah. He seized,
+however, the present opportunity of the high favour in which he stood with
+the rajah, to solicit permission for constructing a fort at Cochin, for
+the protection of the Portuguese factory during the absence of the ships.
+This request was immediately complied with; the rajah even offered to be
+at the sole charge, and Francisco lost no time in proceeding to construct
+the intended fort. As there were neither stones, lime, nor sand to be
+procured, it was necessary to build the castle of timber; which the rajah
+ordered to be immediately provided for the purpose, and brought to the
+spot appointed, which was close to the river side, as best adapted for
+resisting the assault of the Calicut fleet in any future attempt against
+Cochin. The rajah sent likewise a great number of his subjects to carry on
+the work; saying that our people had already had enough to do in the
+operations of the war: But Francisco commanded our people to work in
+constructing the fortifications, the foundations of which were laid on the
+26th September 1503. The inhabitants of Cochin were astonished at the
+diligence with which our people laboured at this work, saying there were
+no such men in the world, as they were equally good at all things.
+
+On the 30th September, four days after the commencement of the fort,
+Alonso de Albuquerque arrived with his ships at Cochin, having been
+delayed on his voyage by severe storms and contrary winds, yet brought all
+his men with him in excellent health. Francisco was much pleased at his
+arrival; and a portion of the fort being allotted to those newly arrived,
+it was soon finished. Though built of timber, this castle was as strong
+and handsome, as if it had been constructed of stone and lime. It was of a
+square form, each face being eighteen yards, with bulwarks or bastions at
+each corner mounted with ordnance. The walls were made of two rows of palm
+trees and other strong timber, firmly set in the ground, and bound
+together with iron hoops and large nails, the space between the two rows
+of timber being rammed full of earth and sand, and the whole surrounded by
+a ditch always full of water[4]. The day after this fort was finished,
+which was named Manuel in honour of the king of Portugal, the captain-
+general with all his people made a solemn procession, in which the vicar
+of the fort bore the crucifix under a canopy carried by the captains of
+the fleet, preceded by trumpets and other instruments of music. The fort
+was solemnly blessed, and consecrated by the celebration of mass; after
+which friar Gaston preached a sermon, in which he exhorted his hearers to
+be thankful to God, who had permitted the inhabitants of the small western
+kingdom of Portugal to construct a fortress in this distant region, among
+so many enemies of the Catholic faith. He expressed a hope that this might
+be the forerunner of many other establishments of a similar nature, to the
+advancement of the true religion among the heathen, and the glory of
+Portugal. He likewise desired his hearers to keep always in mind the high
+obligations they owed to the rajah for the good service he had rendered to
+the king of Portugal on this occasion. A faithful report was carried to
+the rajah of this part of the discourse, who was much gratified, and gave
+thanks for the same to the two generals.
+
+After completing the fort, the Portuguese renewed the war, and made an
+attack on two towns belonging to the lord of Repelim on the coast, about
+five leagues from Cochin, having learned from spies that they were but
+slightly garrisoned. On this expedition the generals took a body of seven
+hundred men, and departing from Cochin about two hours before day, they
+arrived at their destination about nine o'clock next morning. These towns
+had a population of six thousand people, besides children, and were only
+defended by three hundred nayres, all bowmen. Alonso de Albuquerque with
+part of the forces landed at the nearest town, and Francisco with the
+remainder of the forces at the other, which was only about a cannon-shot
+distant from the former. In the first town the enemy was completely
+surprised and run away, and the place was set on fire without resistance.
+On seeing the people run away, our men pursued and slew many of the
+fugitives, and when wearied of the pursuit they plundered and destroyed
+the country. In the mean time the alarm was spread over the neighbourhood,
+and about 6000 nayres assembled, who made an attack upon our men as they
+were embarking, so that they were in great danger: In particular, Duarte
+Pacheco, not being able to find his boat in the place where he had left it,
+was closely pursued; and though he and his company defended themselves
+valiantly, and killed many of the enemy, eight of his men were wounded
+with arrows. So superior was the number of the enemy on this occasion,
+that Pacheco and his men had assuredly been all slain, if the rest of the
+troops had not again landed to his rescue; on which the enemy lost heart
+and run away, leaving the field of battle strewed over with their slain.
+After the defeat of the nayres, our men set fire to fifteen paraws, which
+were drawn up on the beach, and carried away seven which were afloat.
+
+The lord of Repelim was much grieved at the destruction of his towns; and
+being afraid of our people making an attack on another about a league
+farther up the river, he sent a strong detachment of his nayres for its
+security. The generals, however, resolved to follow up their victory, and
+to do all the evil in their power to the territories of this lord. For
+this purpose, after allowing their men some time for rest, they departed
+about midnight, while it was still so dark that they could not see each
+other in the boats, expecting to come upon their enemies by surprise by
+dawn of next morning. The boats in which Alonso de Albuquerque and his
+party were embarked got considerably a-head of the rest, and arrived at
+the town which it was intended to attack a good while before day. Weary of
+waiting for the rest, he landed his men, and gave orders to set the town
+on fire. At first they were successful in this rash enterprise, as the
+ordinary inhabitants were a cowardly unarmed people. But the garrison of
+above two thousand nayres, having assembled on the alarm, attacked Alonso
+and his men with great fury and forced them to retreat to their boats,
+after killing one man and wounding several others of the party, which only
+consisted originally of forty men. Alonso and his soldiers would not have
+been able to make good their retreat, if the sailors who remained in
+charge of the boats had not fired off a falcon[5], or small piece of
+ordnance, on which the nayres gave over the pursuit. By this time day
+broke, and Francisco de Albuquerque approached with the rest of the boats;
+and seeing the perilous situation of Alonso, he commanded the ordnance in
+the boats to be played off against the enemy, on which they fled from the
+shore. At this time Pacheco, who was somewhat astern of the rest, observed
+a great number of armed nayres marching along a narrow passage to
+reinforce the others at the town; and brought his boat so near the pass,
+that he completely stopt their passage that way. The whole of our men were
+now landed, and soon constrained the enemy to take flight with
+considerable loss; after which they set the town on fire, but did not
+think it prudent to pursue the runaways, as they were not acquainted with
+the country.
+
+After this exploit, Duarte Pacheco and Pedro de Tayde went with their
+divisions to destroy another town at some distance, in their way towards
+which they fought and defeated eighteen paraws belonging to the zamorin,
+and then set the town on fire. From thence they stood over to the island
+of _Cambalan_, the caymal of which was an enemy of the Cochin rajah, where
+they destroyed a large town. From that place, Pacheco went with five armed
+paraws of Cochin to burn another town, where he met with considerable
+resistance, and slew a great number of the enemy, seven of his own people
+being wounded. After setting the town on fire, he retired towards Cochin,
+and was forced to fight with thirteen armed paraws of Calicut, which he
+defeated with the assistance of Pedro de Tayde and Antonio del Campo, who
+fortunately joined him in this emergency. On their defeat, the Calient
+paraws retired into a creek, where one of them ran aground and was taken
+by Pacheco; but our men being worn out with hard rowing, were unable to
+pursue the rest, and returned to Cochin. On receiving an account of these
+transactions, the rajah was much satisfied with the revenge which had been
+taken of his enemies, and requested of our generals to discontinue the war,
+to which, however, they were by no means inclined.
+
+On account of the war, no pepper was brought from the country to sell at
+the factory in Cochin, neither dared the merchants to go out in search of
+that commodity, insomuch that the factory had only been able to procure
+300 _bahars_[6], and the factor requested the generals to go in quest of
+some which was to be procured at a place about nine leagues from Cochin.
+For this purpose the two generals and all their captains set out from
+Cochin under night, that their intentions might not be discovered by the
+enemy. On the way Pacheco destroyed a whole island, in which he fought
+against six thousand of the enemy with his own company only, and the two
+generals put thirty-four paraws to flight. After this Pacheco and del
+Campo destroyed a town on the continent, where they defeated two thousand
+nayres, many of whom were slain, without any loss on their side. After
+this, the generals sent on the _tony_[7] for the pepper, which carried
+such merchandize as was meant to be given in exchange; and for its
+protection Pacheco and three other captains accompanied it with two
+hundred men, and five hundred Cochin paraws[8]. In passing a narrow strait
+or river, our people were assailed from the banks by a vast number of the
+natives armed with bows and arrows, but were defended by their targets,
+which were fixed on the gunwales of their boats. Leaving one of his
+captains with fifty Portuguese t protect the tony, Pacheco with the other
+two captains and the troops belonging to the rajah, made towards the shore,
+firing off his falcons against the enemy, whom he forced to quit the
+shore with much loss; after which he landed with his troops, most of whom
+were armed with hand-guns. The enemy, who were full two thousand strong,
+resisted for a quarter of an hour, but at length took to flight after
+having many slain. Pacheco pursued them to a village, where the fugitives
+rallied and were joined by many nayres, insomuch that they now amounted to
+six thousand men, and our people were in great jeopardy, as the enemy
+endeavoured to surround them, and to intercept their return to the boats.
+But our men defended themselves manfully, and fought their way back to the
+shore, where the natives divided on each hand, being afraid of the shot of
+the falcons, which slew great numbers of them, and our men re-embarked
+without having a single man killed or wounded.
+
+The zamorin was much displeased at the successes of our people against his
+confederates, and by the loss of many of his paraws in these several
+actions, and was even afraid lest the Portuguese might eventually
+dispossess him of his dominions. He used every exertion therefore to
+prevent us from procuring pepper, being in hopes, if our ships were
+constrained to return to Portugal without loading, that they would come no
+more back to India. He used his influence therefore even with the
+merchants of Cochin to refuse supplying pepper to our ships, which they
+did so effectually, under pretence of the war, that, in spite of the
+influence of the rajah, and notwithstanding high offers of reward from
+Francisco de Albuquerque, the factory had only been able to procure 1200
+quintals or 4000 bahars[9] of pepper; and even that was got with hard
+fighting, some hurt to our own men, and infinite loss of lives to the
+enemy. Unable to procure any more pepper in Cochin, Alonso de Albuquerque
+went to Coulan in search of that commodity, accompanied by Pedro de Tayde
+and Antonio del Campo, knowing that the government of that state was
+desirous of having one of our factories established in their city, and had
+solicited both Pedro Alvares Cabral and the lord admiral De Gama to that
+effect; and Alonso was determined to go to war with the people of Coulan
+unless they gave him loading for his ships.
+
+Coulan is twelve leagues from Cochin, and twenty-four from Cape Comorin.
+Before the building of Calicut, Coulan was the principal city of Malabar,
+and the port of greatest trade on that coast. Its buildings, more
+especially the temples and shrines of their idols, are larger and more
+splendid than those of Cochin. The haven is excellent, the country is well
+stored with provisions, and the condition of the people resembles in all
+things what has been formerly said of the inhabitants of Calicut. The
+inhabitants are idolatrous Malabars, having among them many rich Moorish
+merchants, more especially since the war broke out between us and the
+zamorin, as many of these merchants had left Calicut to reside at Coulan.
+They trade with Coromandel, Ceylon, the Maldive islands, Bengal, Pegu,
+Camatia, and Malava. The rajah or king of this state rules over an
+extensive kingdom, in which there are many rich cities and several good
+harbours; by which means he has a large revenue, and is able to maintain a
+great military force, but the men are mostly of a low stature: He
+entertains in his palace a guard of three hundred women, armed with bows
+and arrows, who are very expert archers, and they bind up their breasts
+very tight with bandages of silk and linen, that they may not stand in the
+way of using their bows. This rajah usually resides in a city named Calle,
+and is generally at war with the king of Narsinga[10].
+
+In the city of Coulan, which is governed by certain officers or aldermen,
+there is a church which was built by the apostle St Thomas, who came here
+to preach the Catholic faith, and made many converts both among the
+idolaters and others, who have handed down the Christian belief from
+generation to generation, so that there are at least twelve thousand
+families of Christians scattered abroad in the country, in which they have
+churches in many places. The king who then ruled in Coulan, being much
+displeased at the numbers of his subjects who were converted to
+Christianity, banished St Thomas from his dominions, who then went to a
+city called Malapur or Meliapour, on the coast of the dominions of
+Narsinga, and was followed by the Christians of Coulan, and even by many
+of the idolaters. He is said to have retired into a solitude in the
+mountains, where he died, and whence his body was removed for interment in
+a vault of the church he had built at Coulan. This church is now deserted
+and entirely overgrown with trees and bushes, and is kept by a poor
+Moorish zealot, who subsists on alms which he receives from Christian
+pilgrims, and even some of the idolaters give alms at this tomb.
+
+On the arrival of Alonso de Albuquerque at the harbour of Coulan, the
+governors of the city came on board to visit him, and settled a treaty
+with him, in which it was stipulated that we were to have a factory in the
+city, and that they should provide a loading with all possible dispatch
+for the three ship he had along with him. While one of his ships was
+taking in a lading in the harbour, the other two always kept out at sea
+watching all ships that passed, and obliging every one they could descry
+to come and give an account of themselves to Albuquerque as captain-
+general under the king of Portugal. He offered no injury to any of these,
+unless to such as belonged to the Moors of the Red Sea, all of which that
+fell in his way were first plundered and then burnt, in revenge for the
+injuries they had done to the Portuguese. When the house for the factory
+was finished, and the ships laden, Alonso left there Antonio de Sola as
+factor, with two clerks, Rodrigo Aranso and Lopo Rabelo, an interpreter
+named Medera, and two friars to serve as chaplains, together with other
+assistants, being twenty in all; after which he returned to Cochin.
+
+About this time Francisco de Albuquerque received a message from
+_Cosebequin_, a friendly Moor of Calicut who has been formerly mentioned,
+giving him notice that the zamorin was determined to make another attack
+on Cochin so soon as the Portuguese fleet had departed for Europe, and to
+fortify it in such a manner as should prevent them from having any farther
+intercourse with that country. With this view the zamorin had entered into
+treaties with all the rajahs and leading nayres or nobles of Malabar, and
+it was even rumoured that those of Cananor and Coulan had secretly entered
+into terms with him against the Portuguese and the rajah of Cochin[11]. He
+said farther that the Moorish merchants had promised large assistance for
+carrying on the war, as they were exceedingly desirous to exclude the
+Christians from trading to India. About the same time a letter came from
+Rodrigo Reynel to the same effect, saying that the zamorin was levying
+troops, and had caused a great number of cannon to be prepared for the war:
+Reynel likewise said that the Moors of Cochin were decidedly in the
+interest of the zamorin, and were therefore to be looked to with much
+jealousy. The rajah likewise informed Albuquerque, that from certain
+bramins who had come from Calicut he was informed of the intentions and
+preparations of the zamorin for reducing Cochin; and as he had little
+reliance on his own subjects, he requested some Portuguese troops might be
+left for his defence. Francisco gave the rajah assurance of protection,
+and even that the Portuguese would add to his dominions at a future period,
+in reward for his fidelity and friendship to their nation, and as a
+compensation for the injuries he had suffered in their cause.
+
+The rajah was much pleased with this assurance; and as Francisco found he
+could have no more pepper at Cochin, he determined upon returning to
+Portugal, when he had appointed a fit person to remain as captain-general
+in India. He found this matter difficult, as none of his captains were
+willing to remain with the small force which he was able to leave behind.
+At length Duarte Pacheco willingly accepted the charge, and the rajah was
+much pleased with his appointment, having already sufficient proof of his
+valour. Pacheco was accordingly left at Cochin with his own ship and two
+caravels commanded by Pedro Raphael and Diego Perez, and a pinnace, with
+ninety men in health besides others who were sick.[12] As much ordnance
+and ammunition was likewise given him as could possibly be spared from the
+homeward bound ships. All these things being settled, Francisco de
+Albuquerque sailed for Cananor, where he proposed to endeavour to procure
+the liberty of Rodrigo Reynel and the others who were at Calicut. But the
+zamorin sent him word that there was no necessity to take this person away,
+who was desirous of remaining in India; and if the captain-general would
+remain he should have the pepper which was promised.[13] At this time
+Alonso de Albuquerque returned from Coulan, and joined Francisco at
+Cananor; and a letter was brought from Rodrigo Reynel, giving information
+that the zamorin was certainly resolved to attempt the conquest of Cochin,
+as soon as the Portuguese ships should leave the coast; and that his only
+intention in making an offer of pepper was with a view to prevent them
+from burning the ships which were then in the harbour of Calicut.
+
+All matters being arranged, the Portuguese fleet sailed from Cananor on
+the 31st of January 1504. Alonso de Albuquerque and Antonio del Campo came
+to Lisbon on the 23d of August, and presented to the king 400 weight of
+seed pearls, which are called _Alhofer or Ragges_, 144 pound weight of
+great pearls, and eight of the oysters from which the pearls are procured.
+[14] He gave likewise to the king a diamond as big as a large bean, and
+many other jewels; and two Persian horses of wonderful swiftness.
+Francisco de Albuquerque and Nicholas Coello, who left Cananor some time
+after Alonso, were cast away on the voyage and never more heard of. Pedro
+de Tayde was driven to Quiloa, where his ship was lost on the bar and most
+of his men drowned. From Quiloa he went to Mozambique in a _zambucco_,
+where he afterwards died; but left a letter in which he gave a particular
+account of the state of affairs in India, which he ordered to be,
+delivered to the first captain who might put in there from Portugal[15].
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Antonio de Saldanna, the last of the three commanders who were sent to
+cruise in the north of the Red Sea, having lost Diego Fernandez Peteira,
+came to anchor at a place called St Thomas, on the east side of the Cape
+of Good Hope, which was made famous by the name of _Aquada del Saldanna_,
+or Saldannas watering-place, on account of his having lost several of his
+men there in endeavouring to land. At this time Ruy Lorenzo was parted
+from him in a storm which drove him to Mozambique, whence he held on his
+course for Quiloa, where he took some small prizes. Being ambitious to
+distinguish himself, he went to the island of Zanzibar, twenty leagues
+short of Mombasa, where he took twenty small vessels. After this he
+appeared before the town of Mombasa, the king of which place sent out a
+number of armed almadias or paraws to take his ship: But Lorenzo armed his
+long boat with a crew of thirty men, which took four of the almadias and
+killed a great many of the Moors. The king sent an army of 4000 men to the
+shore under the command of his son, who was killed with some others at the
+first volley; on which one of the Moors ran out from the ranks with a flag
+of the Portuguese arms, craving a parley. Peace was soon concluded, by
+which the king agreed to pay 100 _meticals_ of gold yearly as a tribute to
+the king of Portugal[16].
+
+From Mombasa, Lorenzo sailed for Melinda, the king of which place was much
+oppressed by him of Mombasa, on account of his connection with the
+Portuguese. On his way he took two ships and three small vessels called
+_zambuccos_, in which were twelve magistrates of Brava, who submitted
+their city to the king of Portugal, and engaged to give 500 meticals of
+yearly tribute. On his arrival at Melinda, he found that a battle had been
+fought between the kings of Melinda and Mombasa, in which neither could
+claim the victory. Antonio de Saldanna likewise arrived at Melinda about
+this time, and by his mediation peace was restored between these princes.
+Saldanna and Lorenzo went thence to the mouth of the Red Sea, where they
+defeated some Moors at the islands of _Kanakani_[17] beyond Cape Guardafu.
+On the upper coast of Arabia, they burnt one ship belonging to the Moors
+which was laden with frankincense, and they drove another on shore which
+carried a number of pilgrims for Mecca.
+
+
+[1] This seems to be the island named Chirapipil on a former occasion.--E.
+
+[2] Thus I understand the expression in Lichefilds translation of
+    Castaneda, "Forty were armed with, shot."--E.
+
+[3] Caliver is the old name of the matchlock or carabine, the precursor
+    of the modern firelock or musket.--E.
+
+[4] A very ordinary precaution in India, to guard the passage of the wet
+    ditch in fortified places, both against desertion and surprise, is by
+    keeping numbers of crocodiles in the water.--E.
+
+[5] A falcon or faulcon is described as a small cannon of two pound shot.
+    The following enumeration of the ancient English ordnance, from Sir
+    William Monsons Naval Tracts, in the reigns of Elizabeth and James the
+    First, is given in Churchills Collection, Vol. III. p. 803. I suspect
+    the weight of the basilisk, marked 400 pounds in this list, may be a
+    typographical error for 4000.--E.
+
+    Names.             Bore.    Weight.   Shot.    Powder.     Random
+                      inches.    libs.    libs.     libs.       paces.
+    Cannon-royal       8-1/2    8000       66        30          1930
+    Cannon             8        6000       60        27          2000
+    Cannon-serpentine  7        5500       53-1/2    25          2000
+    Bastard cannon     7        4500       41        20          1800
+    Demi-cannon        6-3/4    4000       30-1/2    18          1700
+    Cannon-petro       6        3000       24-1/2    14          1600
+    Culverin           5-1/2    4500       17-1/2    12          2500
+    Basilisk           5         400*      15        10          3000
+    Demi-culverin      4        3400        9-1/2     8          2500
+    Bastard culverin   4        3000        5         5-3/4      1700
+    Sacar              3-1/2    1400        5-1/2     5-1/2      1700
+    Minion             3-1/2    1000        4         4          1500
+    Faulcon            2-1/2     660        2         3-1/2      1500
+    Falconet           2         500        1-1/2     3          1500
+    Serpentine         1-1/2     400          3/4     1-1/2      1400
+    Rabanet            1         300          1/2       1/3      1000
+
+[6] Two weights of that name are described as used in India for the sale
+    of pepper and other commodities, the small and the large bahar; the
+    former consisting of three, and the latter of four and a half peculs.
+    The pecul is said to weigh 5 1/2 pounds avoirdupois: Consequently the
+    smaller bahar is equal to 16 1/2, and the larger to 24 3/4 English
+    pounds. A little farther on in the present work of Castaneda, 4000
+    bahars are said to equal 1200 quintals; which would make the bahar of
+    Cochin equal to thirty Portuguese pounds.--E.
+
+[7] This is a species of bark of some burthen, then used on the Malabar
+    coast.--E.
+
+[8] Such is the expression of Lichefild; which I suspect ought to have
+    been 500 nayres of Cochin in paraws.--E.
+
+[9] The quantity in the text is probably exaggerated considerably, as
+    only a few pages before, the factory at Cochin is said to have only
+    been able to procure 300 quintals.--E.
+
+[10] In Astleys Collection, I. p. 55. Coulan or Koulan is said to have
+    been governed at this time by a _queen_ or rana. By Narsinga Bisnagar
+    is to be understood, which was one of the sovereignties into which the
+    Decan or southern peninsula of India was then divided--E.
+
+[11] The western coast of India below the Gauts, is divided into three
+    portions, the Concan in the north, after this the coast of Canara, and
+    in the south, the country of Malabar, reaching from Mount Deli to Cape
+    Comorin. At the present period, Malabar was divided into seven
+    kingdoms or provinces: Cananor, Calicut, Cranganor, Cochin, Porka,
+    Coulan, and Travancore; which last was subject to the kingdom of
+    Narsinga or Bisnagar. Cananor, Calicut, and Coulan only were
+    considered as independent rajahs, the others being less or more
+    subjected to the authority of these three.--E.
+
+
+[12] According to Astley, his whole force consisted of 110 men. Vol. I. p.
+    65.
+
+[13] This story of Reynel and the pepper promised by the zamorin, is so
+    confusedly told in Lichefild's translation of Castaneda, as to be
+    altogether unintelligible.--E.
+
+[14] In Astley the weight of the large pearls is reduced to 40 pounds.
+    Even with that correction, the immense quantity of pearls in the text
+    is quite incredible. There must be some error in the denomination, but
+    which we are unable to correct.--E.
+
+[15] The remainder of this section is taken from Astley, I. 56, being
+    there appended to the abridgement of the voyage of the Albuquerques.
+    It is an isolated incident, having no apparent connection with the
+    history in the text, yet seemed proper to be preserved in this place.
+    --E.
+
+[16] Mombasa belonged to the Portuguese for near 200 years. In 1698 it
+    was very easily taken by the Muskat Arabs, who put twenty Portuguese
+    to the sword.--Astl. I. 56. a.
+
+[17] No islands of that name are to be found on our maps. The islands of
+    Socotora, Abdul Kuria, and los dos Hermanas, are to the
+    eastwards of Cape Guardafu: Chartan Martan, or the islands of Kuria
+    Muria, are a considerable distance N.N.E. on the outer or oceanic
+    coast of Yemen.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Transactions of the Portuguese in India under Duarte Pacheco, from the
+departure of Alonso and Francisco de Albuquerque in January 1504, till
+the arrival of Lope Suarez de Menesis with succours in September of that
+year._
+
+After the departure of the Albuquerques from Cananor, Duarte Pacheco, who
+was left with the command in India, remained there for some time to take
+in provisions, having along with him the caravel commanded by Pedro
+Raphael, while the other ship of his small squadron, under the command of
+Diego Perez, was repairing at Cochin. Pacheco anchored with his own ship
+off the harbour of Cananor, and dispatched Raphael along the coast to
+oblige all ships which passed that way to come to Cananor in
+acknowledgment of Pacheco as captain-general in the Indies. Several were
+brought in by Raphael, and were constrained to give a full account from
+whence they came, whither bound, and what they were laden with. In case
+of their containing any pepper, more especially if bound for Calicut, he
+used to take that commodity from them; and carried his command with so
+high a hand, that he became the terror of these seas. One night while
+thus at anchor, a fleet of twenty-five ships came suddenly to the
+anchoring-ground where he lay, which he suspected to have been sent from
+Calicut on purpose to attack him. Considering himself in imminent danger,
+he immediately slipped his cables, not having time to weigh anchor, and
+made sail to gain the windward of this fleet, upon which he directly
+commenced firing. They were mostly small ships laden with rice, and made
+off with all the haste in their power, though some of them ran aground.
+One of the vessels of this fleet was a large ship belonging to the Moors
+of Cananor, having nearly 400 men on board, who resisted for some time,
+shooting off their arrows, and even endeavoured to take our ship. When
+day was near at hand, and after having nine men slain in the action, the
+Moorish captain at length submitted, and told Pacheco that he belonged to
+Cananor.
+
+After some time spent in this manner, Pacheco made sail for Cochin, and
+in the passage fell in with several ships belonging to the Moors, taking
+some, and burning or sinking others. On landing at the fort of Cochin, he
+learnt from the factor that the reports of the zamorin making
+preparations for the renewal of the war, were perfectly true, and even
+that the Moorish inhabitants of Cochin were adverse to the rajah for
+having taken part with the Portuguese against the zamorin. Being informed
+likewise that the Cochin rajah was in great fear of this new war, he went
+next day to visit him, carrying all his boats well manned, and fenced
+with raised sides of boards to defend his men from the missile weapons of
+the enemy. They were likewise furnished with ordnance, and all decorated
+with flags and streamers in a gallant manner, hoping thereby to inspire
+confidence in Trimumpara, who was much dejected at the small force which
+had been left for his defence. In a conference between them, the rajah
+said to Pacheco, that the Moors asserted he was left in the Indies for
+the sole purpose of removing the merchandize belonging to the Portuguese
+in the factory at Cochin to Cananor and Coulan, and not to defend him
+against the power of the zamorin; which he was even disposed to think
+were true, in consideration of the smallness of the fleet under his
+command. Pacheco felt indignant at the suspicion which the rajah
+entertained, and endeavoured to convince him that he had been imposed
+upon by the Moors out of enmity to the Portuguese, assuring him that he
+would faithfully exert himself in his defence. He pointed out to him the
+strength of the natural defences of Cochin, which were all narrow, and
+defensible therefore by a few valiant men against any number of
+assailants. The rajah was greatly relieved by these assurances, and
+Pacheco went to visit the different places by which the island of Cochin
+might be assailed, all of which he diligently fortified, more especially
+the ford, which he strengthened with a row of stakes, both to prevent the
+enemy from wading across, and to hinder any of their vessels from passing.
+
+In the mean time he was informed by letter from Rodrigo Reynel, that a
+principal Moor in Cochin, in concert with several others, were contriving
+to quit that city; and had been twice secretly at Calicut to confer with
+the zamorin on this subject. Pacheco was a good deal concerned at this
+intelligence, and proposed to the rajah to have this Moor executed for
+his treasonable intercourse with the zamorin. But Trimumpara would by no
+means consent to this measure; saying that it would occasion a mutiny
+among the Moors, by whom the city was furnished with provisions in
+exchange for goods, and be thought it were better to dissemble with them
+all. Pacheco then said that he would have a conference with the Moors,
+meaning to use policy with them, since the rajah did not approve of
+violent measures; and to this the rajah consented, giving orders to his
+naires to obey the orders of Pacheco. In pursuance of this plan, Pacheco
+went to the dwelling of this chief Moor, named _Belinamacar_, close by
+the river, taking with him a guard of his own men well armed, and
+requested that person to send for some other leading men among the Moors,
+whom he named, saying that he wished to consult with them on a subject of
+great importance to them all. When they were all assembled, he made them
+a speech to the following effect.
+
+"I sent for you, honest merchants, that I might inform you for what
+purpose I remain in the Indies. It is reported by some, that I mean only
+to remove the factory and the goods belonging to the Portuguese to Coulan
+and Cananor: But my sole purpose is to defend Cochin against the zamorin,
+and even if necessary I will die in your defence. I am resolved to meet
+him in Cambalan, by which way it is said he means to invade you; and, if
+he has the boldness to meet me, I hope to make him prisoner and to carry
+him with me into Portugal. I am informed that you intend to go away from
+Cochin, and to induce the rest of the inhabitants among whom you are the
+chiefs, to do the same; but I am astonished men of your wisdom should
+leave the country in which you were born, and where you have dwelt so
+many years, from fear of vain reports. Such conduct were even disgraceful
+for women, and is therefore much more so for you who are men of wisdom
+and experience. If you should be disposed to remove from hence when you
+shall actually be in danger, I should hardly blame you: But to do so
+before that danger is apparent, and even before a single battle has been
+fought, must proceed either from cowardice or treachery. You all well
+know, that only a very short while ago, a very small number of our
+Portuguese defeated thousands of those same enemies who now threaten to
+invade us. You may allege that we were then more in number than now,
+which was assuredly the case. But we then fought in the open field, where
+numbers were necessary; and we now propose only to fight in narrow passes,
+in which a small number will suffice as well as a multitude. You already
+know that I can fight, as it is I who have done the greatest injury to
+the enemy in the late war, which the rajah can well vouch. As for me I
+shall never yield, and I have more to lose, being overcome, than any of
+you. Put your trust therefore in me and my troops, and remain where you
+are till you see the event of our defence. Your sovereign remains in his
+port, and wherefore should you go away? I and the Portuguese who are with
+me, remain in this far distant country to defend your king, and you who
+are his natural born subjects: Should you then desert him and your
+country, you would disgrace yourselves and dishonour me, by refusing to
+repose confidence in my promise to defend you against the zamorin and all
+his power, were it even greater than it is. Wherefore, I strictly enjoin
+that none of you shall remove from Cochin, and I swear by all that is
+holy in our faith, that whoever is detected in the attempt shall be
+instantly hanged. It is my determined purpose to remain here, and to have
+the port strictly watched day and night that none of you may escape. Let
+every one of you, therefore, look well to his conduct, and be assured, if
+you do as I require, you shall have me for your friend; but if otherwise,
+I shall be your mortal enemy, and shall use you worse even than the
+zamorin."
+
+The Moors endeavoured to clear themselves from what had been alleged
+against them, but Pacheco would not listen to their excuses, and departed
+from them in anger, and immediately brought his ship and one of the
+caravels with two boats, which he anchored directly opposite the city of
+Cochin, with strict charges to let no one leave the city by water. He
+likewise appointed a number of paraws to guard all the creeks and rivers
+around the city; and ordered every boat that could transport men or goods
+to be brought every night under the guns of his ships, and returned to
+their owners in the morning. In consequence of all these precautions, the
+people of Cochin were so much afraid of him, that not one of the Moors or
+Malabars dared to leave the city without his permission, and
+henceforwards continued quiet. Notwithstanding all these cares, Pacheco
+used to make nightly invasions into the island of Repelim, where he burnt
+the towns, slew the inhabitants, and carried away much cattle and many
+paraws; on which account the Moors of Cochin, astonished that he could
+endure so much fatigue, gave out that he was the devil.
+
+Mean time the zamorin collected his forces in the island of Repelim,
+where he was joined by the lords of Tanor, Bespur, Kotugan, Korin, and
+many other Malabar chiefs, making altogether an army of 50,000 men. Four
+thousand of these were appointed to serve by water, in 280 vessels,
+called _paraws_, _katurs_, and _tonys_; with 382 pieces of cannon
+intended to batter the Portuguese fort at Cochin; and the rest of the
+troops were appointed to force a passage across the ford of the river,
+under the command of Naubea Daring, nephew and heir to the zamorin, and
+Elankol, the lord of Repelim[1].
+
+Intelligence of all this was conveyed to Cochin, and that the zamorin
+proposed to invade that city by the straits of Cambalan. Rodrigo Reynel,
+who sent this intelligence by letter, lay then very sick and died soon
+after, on which the zamorin caused all his goods to be seized. On the
+approach of the zamorin, the Moors of Cochin would very willingly have
+induced the inhabitants to run away, but durst not venture to do so from
+the fear they were in of Pacheco. He, on the contrary, that all might
+know how little he esteemed the zamorin and all his power, made a descent
+one night on one of the towns of Repelim, to which he set fire. But on
+the coming up of a great number of armed naires, he was forced to retreat
+in great danger to his boats, having five of his men wounded, after
+killing and wounding a great number of the enemy. On their return to
+Cochin, the targets of our men were all stuck full of arrows, so great
+was the multitude of the enemies who had assailed them. The rajah came to
+visit Pacheco at the castle on his return from this enterprize, and
+expressed his satisfaction at his success, which he considered as a
+mighty affair, especially as the zamorin and so great an army was in the
+island. Pacheco made light of the zamorin and all his force, saying that
+he anxiously wished he would come and give battle, as he was not at all
+afraid of the consequences, trusting to the superior valour of his own
+men.
+
+As the people of Cochin remained quiet, Pacheco now prepared for
+defending the pass of Cambalan. Leaving therefore a sufficient force to
+guard the castle, and twenty-five men in the caravel under the command of
+Diego Pereira to protect the city and watch the conduct of the Moors,
+taking with himself seventy-three men in one of the caravels and several
+armed boats, he departed for Cambalan on Friday the 16th of April 1504[2].
+On passing the city, Pacheco landed to speak with the rajah, whom he
+found in evident anxiety; but making as if he did not observe his
+heaviness, Pacheco addressed him with a cheerful countenance, saying that
+he was just setting out to defend him against the zamorin, of whom he had
+no fear of giving a good account. After some conference, the rajah
+ordered 500 of his naires, out of 3000 who were in his service, to join
+Pacheco, under the command of _Gandagora_ and _Frangera_ the overseers of
+his household, and the caymal of _Palurta_, whom he directed to obey
+Pacheco in all things as if he were himself present. On taking leave of
+Pacheco, while he exhorted him to use his utmost efforts for defending
+Cochin against the zamorin, he desired him to be careful of his own
+safety, on which so much depended.
+
+Pacheco arrived at the passage of Cambalan two hours before day, and
+seeing no appearance of the zamorins approach, he made an attack on a
+town on the coast of the island about the dawn, which was defended by 300
+naires, all archers, and a small number armed with calivers, or
+match-locks, all of whom were embarked in certain paraws, and endeavoured
+to defend the entrance of the harbour. They were soon constrained by the
+cannon of the Portuguese to push for the shore and quit their paraws, but
+resisted all attempts of the Portuguese to land for near an hour, when
+they were completely defeated after losing a great many of their number,
+killed or wounded, and our men set the town on fire. Having taken a
+considerable number of cattle at this place, which he carried off with him,
+Pacheco returned to defend the pass of Cambalan. At this time the zamorin
+sent a message to Pacheco, offering him a handsome present, and proposing
+a treaty for a peace between them: but Pacheco refused accepting the
+present, and declared he would never make peace with him while he
+continued at enmity with the rajah of Cochin. Next day, the zamorin sent a
+second message, proudly challenging him for daring to obstruct his passage
+into the island of Cochin, and offering him battle, declaring his
+resolution to make him a prisoner, if he were not slain in the battle. To
+this Pacheco made answer, that he hoped to do the same thing with the
+zamorin, in honour of the day which was a solemn festival among the
+Christians, and that the zamorin was much deceived by his sorcerers when
+they promised him the victory on such a day. Then one of the naires who
+accompanied the messenger, said smiling as if in contempt, that he had few
+men to perform so great an exploit; whereas the forces of the zamorin
+covered both the land and the water, and could not possibly be overcome by
+such a handful. Pacheco ordered this man to be well bastinadoed for his
+insolence, and bid him desire the zamorin to revenge his quarrel if he
+could.
+
+That same evening, the rajah of Cochin sent a farther reinforcement to
+Pacheco of 500 naires, of whom he made no account, neither of these who
+were with him before, believing they would all run away; his sole
+reliance, under God, was on his own men, who feasted themselves that
+night, that the zamorin might learn how much they despised all his
+threats, and how eager they were for battle. Early next morning, Pacheco
+made a short speech to his men, exhorting them, to behave valiantly for
+the glory of the Christian name and the honour of their country, and
+promising them an assured victory with the assistance of God; by which
+their fame would be so established among the natives that they would be
+feared and respected ever after. He likewise set before them the rewards
+they might assuredly expect from their own sovereign, if they behaved
+gallantly on the present occasion. His men immediately answered him that
+they hoped in the ensuing battle to evince how well they remembered his
+exhortations. They all then knelt down and sung the _salve regina_, and
+afterwards an _Ave Maria_, with a loud voice. Just at this time, Laurenco
+Moreno joined Pacheco with four of his men armed with calivers, who were
+all anxious to be present in the battle, and of whose arrival the general
+was extremely glad, as he knew them to be valiant soldiers.
+
+In the course of the night, by the advice of the Italian lapidaries who
+had deserted to the enemy, the zamorin caused a sconce or battery to be
+erected directly over against the place where Pacheco was stationed, on
+which five pieces of ordnance were placed, from which great service was
+expected in the ensuing battle, owing to the narrowness of the pass. On
+the morning of Palm Sunday, the zamorin marched forwards with 47,000 men,
+partly naires and part Moors, and accompanied by all the rajahs and
+caymals who had joined him in this war. Of these, the rajah of _Tanor_
+had 4000 naires; the rajahs of _Bybur_ and _Curran_, whose countries lay
+near the mountains of Narsinga, had 12,000 naires; the rajah of
+_Cotogataco_, which is between Cochin and Cananor close beside the
+mountains, had 18,000 naires; the rajah of _Curia_, which is between
+Paniani and Cranganor, had 3000 naires. Naubea Daring, the prince of
+Calicut, and his brother Namboa, who were particularly attached to that
+part of the army composed of the zamorins immediate subjects, had a large
+body of men whose numbers I do not particularize. Their warlike
+instruments were many and of divers sorts, and made a noise as if heaven
+and earth were coming together.
+
+Before day, the van of this prodigious army arrived at the sconce of the
+Italians, and began immediately to play off their ordnance against the
+caravel, which was so near that it was an absolute miracle that not a
+single shot did any harm. But our cannon were better served, and every
+shot did execution among the enemy: and so well did they ply their guns,
+that before sunrise above thirty discharges were made from our caravel.
+At day-break, the whole of the enemies fleet, consisting of 169 barks,
+came out of the rivers of the island of Repelim to attack our small force.
+Sixty-six of these were paraws, having their sides defended with bags of
+cotton by advice of the Italians, to ward off our shot; and each of these
+had twenty-five men and two pieces of ordnance, five of the men in each
+paraw being armed with calivers or matchlocks. Twenty of the foysts or
+large barks were chained together, as a floating battery to assault the
+caravel; besides which, there were fifty-three _catures_ and thirty large
+barks, each of which carried sixteen men and one piece of ordnance,
+besides other weapons. Besides all these armed vessels, there were a
+great many more filled with soldiers, so that the whole river seemed
+entirely covered over. Of this numerous fleet, which contained near 10,
+000 men, Naubea Daring was admiral or commander in chief, and the lord of
+Repelim vice-admiral. All these advanced against the Portuguese, setting
+up terrible shouts, which was answered alternately by sounding all their
+military instruments of music. The whole of these people were almost
+naked, having targets of various colours, and made a very gallant
+appearance. On the approach of this prodigious fleet, our caravel and
+boats were hardly discernible, so completely did the enemy cover the face
+of the water. Terrified by so prodigious a multitude, the naires of
+Cochin all ran away, only Grandagora and Frangora remaining, who were on
+board the caravel, or they would have done like the rest. Indeed their
+presence was of no importance, except to serve as witnesses of the valour
+of our men.
+
+Our people plied their ordnance and small arms so incessantly that the
+air was quite darkened with smoke, and as the boats of the enemy were
+very numerous and without order, they hindered each other, and our fire
+did prodigious execution among them, several of their paraws being torn
+to pieces and great numbers of their men killed and wounded, without any
+hurt on our side. The twenty-five paraws[3] which were chained together
+were now brought forwards, and gave much annoyance to our men, who were
+now likewise much fatigued, as the battle had continued a long time. The
+captain-general gave orders to fire off a _saker_,[4] which had not been,
+hitherto used during the battle. By the time this had been twice fired,
+it did such terrible execution among the thick of the enemy as to sink
+four of their paraws, and all the others made the best of their way out
+of the battle, eighteen of the paraws being sunk in all, and vast numbers
+of the enemy slain and wounded. On the defeat of this squadron, which was
+commanded by Prince Naubea Daring, Elankol, the lord of Repelim, who was
+vice-admiral, came forward with a fresh squadron, and gave a proud onset,
+commanding his paraws to lay the caravel on board; but the Malabars had
+not resolution to put this order into execution, and held off at some
+distance. The zamorin also approached with the land army, doing his
+utmost to force the passage of the ford; but all their efforts were in
+vain, although this second battle was more fiercely urged than the first.
+Though the battle continued from daybreak to almost sunset, the enemy
+were able to make no impression, and were known to have lost 350 men
+slain outright, besides others, which were above 1000.[5] Some of our men
+were wounded, but none slain; for the balls of the enemy, though of cast
+iron, had no more effect than as many stones thrown by hand. Yet our
+barricades of defence were all torn to pieces, and one of our boats was
+very much damaged, which was entirely repaired during the night.
+
+The rajahs and other chiefs who were allied with the zamorin, lost all
+hope of ever being able to get the victory over the Portuguese, and were
+sorry for having joined in the war so greatly to their own dishonour.
+Being afraid the captain-general might burn and destroy their towns and
+houses, which were all situated on the banks of rivers, they were anxious
+to leave the army of the zamorin, and to give over making war on the
+Portuguese. Some among them withdrew privately from the camp of the
+zamorin to the island of Vaipi with all their men, and reconciled
+themselves with the rajah of Cochin: These were _Maraguta, Muta_ Caymal,
+his brother and cousins. The zamorin was exceedingly mortified by the
+discomfiture of his people, and severely reprimanded his chiefs for their
+pusillanimous conduct, in allowing themselves to be defeated by such a
+handful of men. The two Italian deserters, while they acknowledged the
+valour of the Portuguese in the late action, represented that it would be
+impossible for them to continue to bear up long against such vast odds
+without reinforcements, and recommended the frequent reiteration of
+assaults, under which they must necessarily be at last overthrown. All
+those rajahs and chiefs who were for continuing the war, joined in
+opinion with the Italians. The zamorin made a speech, in which he
+recapitulated the defeats they had sustained and the defection of some of
+his allies, who had entered into treaty with the rajah of Cochin. He
+stated how short a period of the summer now remained for continuing the
+operations of the war, which must soon be laid aside during the storms
+and rain of the winter season, when it was impossible to keep the field;
+and that, on the conclusion of winter, a new fleet would come from
+Portugal with powerful reinforcements to the enemy, who would then be
+able to carry the war as formerly into his dominions, to their utter loss
+and destruction. He concluded by giving his opinion that it was necessary
+for him to make peace with the Christians. Naubea Daring, the prince of
+Calicut, made a long speech, in which he defended the Portuguese against
+the imputation thrown upon them by the Moors of their being thieves and
+pirates. He recapitulated all their conduct since their first arrival in
+India, showing that they had always conducted themselves with good faith,
+whereas they had been forced into war against Calicut by treachery and
+oppression. He concluded by strongly recommending to negotiate peace with
+the Christians, as otherwise the city and trade of Calicut would be
+utterly destroyed, to the irreparable injury of the zamorins revenue,
+which was of more importance to him than the friendship of the Moors,
+whose only object was their own profit. The zamorin was greatly moved by
+this discourse, and recommended to the other chiefs that they should
+concur with the prince, in procuring the establishment of peace. This
+opinion was by no means relished by Elankol, the lord of Repelim, who had
+confederated with the Moors to urge a continuance of the war, and
+endeavoured to impress upon the zamorin that his reputation would be
+destroyed by proposing peace at this time, which would be imputed to him
+as an act of cowardice. The principal Moors, likewise, who were present
+in the council used all their art and influence to induce the zamorin to
+persevere; and it was at length determined to continue the war.
+
+One _Cogeal_, a Moor of Repelim who had been a great traveller, and had
+seen many warlike devices, proposed a new invention for attacking the
+caravels at the ford, which was considered to be perfectly irresistible.
+Cogeal directed a floating castle to be built of timber on two boats or
+lighters, which were firmly secured by two beams at their heads and
+sterns. Over this the castle or square tower was strongly built of beams
+joined together by bars of iron and large nails, carried up to the height
+of a lance or spear, and so large that it was able to contain forty men
+with several pieces of ordnance. It was proposed that this castle should
+be brought Up to grapple with the caravels, by which the Portuguese might
+be attacked on equal terms. On seeing this machine, the zamorin liberally
+rewarded Cogeal for his ingenuity, and gave orders to have other seven
+constructed of the same kind. By means of his spies, Pacheco got notice
+of the construction of these floating castles, and likewise that the
+enemy were preparing certain fireworks to set the caravels on fire[6]. To
+keep off the fireships and floating castles, he constructed a species of
+rafts, made of masts or spars eight fathoms long, and bound together with
+iron bolts and hoops. Several of these, which were likewise eight fathoms
+broad, were moored with anchors and cables, at the distance of a stones
+throw from the caravels. Likewise, to prevent the caravels from being
+overlooked by the floating castles, one Peter Raphael built certain
+turrets on the decks of the caravels of spars set upright, in each of
+which seven or eight men had room to handle their arms. At this time the
+rajah of Cochin visited Pacheco, whom he earnestly exhorted to provide
+well for defence against the zamorin; as he was well assured his own
+subjects would desert him, if Pacheco were defeated. Pacheco upbraided
+Trimumpara for his tears, desiring him to call in mind the victories
+which the Portuguese had already gained over the enemy; and requested of
+him to return to his capital showing himself confident among his people,
+and to rest assured that he and the Portuguese would keep the pass
+against every force the zamorin might bring against it.
+
+In expectation of an immediate attack, Lorenco Moreno returned to the
+caravels with as many of his people as could be spared from the factory.
+Pacheco made all his people take rest early in the night, that they might
+be able for the expected fatigues of the ensuing day, on which he had
+intelligence that the grand attack was to be made. About midnight, his
+small force was summoned under arms; when, after confession and
+absolution, he made a speech to his men, exhorting them to behave
+themselves manfully in the approaching conflict. They all answered, that
+they were resolved to conquer or die. About two in the morning, some of
+the most advanced vessels belonging to the Calicut fleet began to fire
+off their ordnance, as they approached towards the pass. The zamorin was
+himself along with the land army, which exceeded 30,000 men, accompanied
+with many field pieces. Elankol, the lord of Repelim, who commanded the
+vanguard, advanced to the point of _Arraul_, which in some measure
+commanded the ford, at which place he began to throw up some ramparts or
+defences of earth. Pacheco landed secretly at the point with a detachment
+of his troops, on purpose to prevent the enemy from throwing up
+entrenchments, and a sharp skirmish ensued, in which many of the enemy
+were slain. On the appearance of day, Pacheco retired to his boats,
+though with no small difficulty, owing to the vast numbers of the enemy
+who thronged around; yet got off with all his people unhurt, having
+effectually hindered the proposed intrenchments.
+
+The land army of the enemy now brought their ordnance to the point, where
+they began a furious cannonade upon; the caravels, yet without doing us
+any harm, as our people were all effectually secured by means of high
+wooden defences on the gunwales of their vessels; whereas every shot of
+ours made prodigious havoc among the enemy, who were quite unsheltered.
+The zamorin sent orders to his fleet to come on with all expedition, to
+deliver him and his men from this imminent danger. The Calicut fleet now
+approached in most formidable order, having several fire rafts in front,
+intended for setting our caravels on fire. After them came 110 paraws,
+full of men, and every one of them having ordnance, many of these being
+fastened together by means of chains. After these came 100 _catures_ and
+eighty _tonys_, each of which had a piece of ordnance and thirty men. In
+the rear of all came the eight castles, which kept close by the point of
+_Arraul_, as the _ebb was not yet altogether entered_.[7] The enemy came
+on with loud shouts and the sound of many instruments, as if to an
+assured victory, and immediately began a furious cannonade. Their fire
+rafts advanced burning in a most alarming manner, but were stopped by the
+_canizos_, or rafts of defence, formerly mentioned. By these likewise,
+the paraws and other vessels of the enemy were prevented from closing
+with our caravels and boats, which they seem to have intended. In this
+part of the battle many of the paraws and other vessels of the enemy were
+torn to pieces and sunk, and a great number of their men were killed and
+wounded. On the turn of the tide, the floating castles put off from the
+point, and were towed by boats towards the caravels. In the largest of
+these castles there were forty men, in others thirty-five, and the
+smallest had thirty, all armed with bows or matchlocks, besides ordnance;
+and they seemed quite an irresistible force in comparison of ours, which
+consisted only of two caravels and two armed boats.
+
+When the largest castle came up to our floating defence, it immediately
+commenced a tremendous fire of all its ordnance upon our caravels; and at
+this time Pacheco ordered a _saker_ to be shot off, which seemed to do
+very little harm even at a second discharge. The remainder of the castles
+now came into their stations, and the battle raged with the utmost fury.
+What with incessant flights of arrows, and the smoke of so many guns, our
+people could seldom see the vessels of the enemy. In this extremity, the
+saker was discharged a third time against the largest castle, which had
+been somewhat shaken by the two former discharges. By this shot its iron
+work was broken, some of its beams were forced from their places, and
+several of the men on board were slain. By two other discharges of the
+saker this castle was all torn in pieces, and was forced to retire out of
+the battle. Still however the rest of the castles, and the numerous fleet
+of small craft kept up the fight. Towards evening all the castles were
+much injured, many of the paraws were sunk and torn in pieces, and great
+numbers of the enemy slain; so that at length they were constrained to
+retire. On our side not one man was even wounded: One only ball went
+through the caravel in which Pacheco commanded, and passed among many of
+his men without doing any hurt. On the enemy retiring, Pacheco gave chase
+in the two boats and some paraws; and the caravels kept up a constant
+fire upon point _Arraul_, whence they forced the zamorin and the land
+army to retire, after having 330 of his men slain. After this great
+victory, the inhabitants of Cochin became quite reassured, and were no
+longer in dread of the power of the zamorin. Trimumpara came to visit
+Pacheco, whom he embraced, and congratulated on his great prowess: Many
+of the principal naires of Cochin went to compliment him; and even
+numbers of the Moorish merchants brought him rich presents, hoping to
+secure his favour.
+
+The zamorin was greatly disheartened by the overthrow of all his mighty
+preparations, and losing all hope of victory wished seriously to end the
+war. In a council of his allies and great men, they represented the great
+losses they had already endured in the war with the Portuguese, and
+proposed to treat with them for peace. His brother Naubea Daring, who had
+always been averse to the war, seemed to believe that Pacheco would
+refuse any treaty, and advised rather to defer making an offer of peace
+till the arrival of the next captain-general from Portugal. This prince
+was likewise of opinion that the Calicut army should still keep the field
+till the coming on of the rainy season made it advisable to retire; as it
+would look like flight to retreat at this time. Yet he recommended that
+no more attacks should be made on the pass, in which attempts they had
+already met with so much loss. Elankol, the lord of Repelim, urged the
+continuance of the war, and to make reiterated assaults on the Christians,
+which must be at last successful; by which means all the Portuguese that
+were in Cochin, Cananor, and Coulan would be destroyed. He advised
+likewise, to send false intelligence to these places, saying that they
+had taken our caravels and slain all our men; on which news the people of
+Cananor and Coulan would put the people in our factories to death. This
+was accordingly done; but as the inhabitants of these places had already
+received notice of the real state of affairs, they gave no credit to this
+false story. Yet, owing to the malice of the Moors who dwelt in these
+places, our men were in great danger and durst not come out of their
+factories, and one of our men was slain in Coulan.
+
+By the persuasion of Elankol and the Moors, the zamorin reluctantly
+consented to try the event of another battle: And, the castles being
+repaired, a fresh assault was made both by land and water, with many more
+men and vessels than before. This battle continued longer than the other,
+and the enemy was overthrown with far greater loss than they had ever
+received before. In consequence of this new victory, the inhabitants of
+Cochin became quite confident in their security from the power of their
+enemies; and the rajah, who had hitherto been in much dread of the event,
+became quite elated. He now came to visit Pacheco in a chair of state,
+with far more splendour than he had ever assumed since the commencement
+of the war. When this was told in the enemies camp, the chiefs urged the
+zamorin to a fresh attack, lest the rajah of Cochin might hold him in
+contempt. He desired them to cease their evil counsels, from which he had
+already sustained great loss, and which would still lead him into greater
+danger; but to leave him to consider what was best to be done for revenge
+against his enemies.
+
+The zamorin gave orders to some of his naires in whom he reposed great
+confidence, that they should go to Cochin on some false pretence, and
+endeavour to assassinate the general of the Portuguese and such of his
+men as they could meet with. But the naires are an inconsiderate people
+unable to keep any of their affairs secret, so that this shameful device
+became immediately known to Pacheco, who appointed two companies of the
+Cochin naires to keep strict watch for these _spies_; one company at the
+ford, and the other along the river, waiting by turns day and night. By
+this means these _spies_ were detected and made prisoners. The chief
+_spy_ was a naire of Cochin, of the family or stock of the _Lecros_ who
+had certain other naires attending upon him, who were strangers. On being
+brought before him, he ordered them to be all cruelly whipt and then to
+be hanged. The Cochin naires remonstrated against this punishment,
+because they were naires whose customs did not allow of this mode of
+execution; but he would not listen to their arguments, saying that their
+treachery richly merited to be so punished. The Portuguese officers
+represented to him the great troubles which the _rajah_ of Cochin had
+endured for giving protection to their nation, and how much this action
+might displease him, when he was informed of naires having been put to
+death in his dominions without his authority. Besides, that this might
+give occasion to some of those about the rajah, who were known to be
+already unfriendly to the Portuguese, to insinuate that the captain-
+general had usurped the authority from the rajah, and might in that way
+wean his affections from them. Pacheco was convinced by these arguments
+that he had acted wrong, and immediately sent to countermand the
+execution. Two of them were already _half-dead_; but _those who were
+still living_, he sent to the rajah, informing him that they had deserved
+death, but that from respect to him he had spared their lives. The rajah
+was singularly gratified by this mark of respect, and the more so because
+there happened to be then present several of his principal nobles and
+some chiefs from other places, besides sundry of the chief of the Moors
+of Cochin, who had endeavoured to impress on his mind that the Portuguese
+were willing to assume the command in his dominions[8]. Henceforwards
+Pacheco had such good intelligence, that all the subtle devices of the
+zamorin were counteracted.
+
+The month of June was now ended and the rainy season, or winter, began to
+come on, from which Pacheco naturally concluded that the zomorin would
+soon break up his encampment, on which occasion he was fully resolved to
+give them an assault, having sufficient experience of the pusillanimity
+of the enemy. But the zamorin, being afraid that Pacheco might attack him
+at his departure, gave out that he intended to make another assault on
+the ford with a greater fleet than ever, and even directed the floating
+castles to be repaired. He even gave out that he meant to assail the
+passage of _Palurte_ and the ford both at once; that Pacheco might occupy
+himself in preparing to defend both places, and he might have the better
+opportunity to steal away unperceived. Accordingly, on the evening of
+Saturday, which was the eve of St John[9], the whole army of the enemy
+appeared as usual, and Pacheco fully expected to have been attacked that
+night. Next morning, however, he learnt from two bramins that the zamorin
+had withdrawn with all his army into the island of Repelim. Pacheco was
+much disappointed at this news, yet he made a descent that very day into
+Repelim, where he fought with many of the enemy, killing and wounding a
+great number of them, and then returned to the ford, where he remained
+several days, because the rajah was still afraid lest the zamorin might
+return and get across the ford into the island of Cochin.
+
+The zamorin was so crest-fallen by the great and repeated losses he had
+sustained in this war from a mere handful of men, that he resolved to
+retire into religions seclusion, that he might conciliate the favour of
+his gods, and dismissed his allies and chiefs to act as they thought best.
+His princes and nobles endeavoured to dissuade him from this resolution,
+but he continued firm to his purpose, and went into the _torcul_ or
+religious state of seclusion, accompanied by some of his chief bramins or
+chaplains. Soon afterwards, his mother sent him word that great changes
+had taken place in Calicut since his seclusion. That many of the
+merchants had already deserted the place, and others were preparing to
+follow. That the city was becoming ill provided with victuals, as those
+who used to import them were afraid of the Christians. Yet she advised
+him never to return to Calicut, unless he could do so with honour; and
+that he should therefore continue in seclusion for a time, and afterwards
+endeavour to recover his credit and reputation by victory, or lose all in
+the attempt. On this message which greatly increased his discontent, the
+zamorin sent for his brother, to whom he confided the government of his
+dominions till such time as he should have completed his religious
+austerities in seclusion.
+
+On this strange resolution of the zamorin, the rajahs and nobles who had
+joined him in the war departed to their own countries, most of which lay
+on the coast. And being under great apprehensions that Pacheco might
+reduce their dominions, they endeavoured to enter into treaties with him
+for peace and concord; for which purpose they sent messages to Trimumpara,
+requesting that he would act as mediator between them and Pacheco. The
+rajah of Cochin was a prince of a mild and forgiving disposition; and
+forgetting all the past injuries they had done him in these wars, he
+undertook the office of mediation, and sent them safe conducts to come to
+Cochin to make their peace. On their arrival, he accompanied them to wait
+upon Pacheco, and even became their advocate with him to accept of their
+proferred friendship, which he readily consented to at the desire of the
+rajah. Some of these princes were unable to come personally, but sent
+their ambassadors to solicit peace, which was accorded to all who asked
+it. Several even of the great Moorish merchants of Calicut, that they
+might quietly enjoy their trade, forsook that place and came to dwell in
+Cochin, having previously secured the consent of Pacheco. Others of them
+went to Cananor and Coulan, by which means the great trade which used to
+be carried on at Calicut suddenly fell off.
+
+Owing to the great resort of Moors to Cochin, in whom Pacheco could not
+repose much confidence, and because, by the orders of Naubea Daring, the
+paraws of Calicut frequently made excursions into the rivers, the captain-
+general continued for a long while to defend the passage of the ford,
+where he often fought with and did much injury to his enemies. He made
+frequent incursions, likewise, into the island of Repelim, whence he
+carried off cattle and other provisions, and often fought with his
+enemies, always defeating them with much slaughter[10]. At length Elankol,
+the lord of that island, wishing to put an end to the miseries of his
+country, waited on Pacheco and entered into a treaty of friendship with
+him, making him a present of a great quantity of pepper, which was
+abundant in his country[11].
+
+
+[1] This paragraph, enumerating the forces of the zamorin, is added to
+    the text of Castaneda from Astley, Vol. I. p. 56.
+
+[2] The particular distribution of the force under Pacheco at this time
+    is thus enumerated in Astleys Collection: In the fort thirty-nine men;
+    in the ship left to defend Cochin twenty-five; in the caravel which
+    accompanied him in the expedition to Cambalan twenty-six; into one
+    boat twenty-three; and in the boat along with himself twenty-two;
+    making his whole effective force 135 men; seventy-one only of which
+    went along with him to defend the pass.--Astl. I. 56.
+
+[3] A very short space before these are only stated as twenty; but the
+    numbers and names in the text seem much corrupted.--E.
+
+[4] In a former note we have given a list of the names and circumstances
+    of the English ordnance near this period. In that list the saker is
+    described as a light cannon of only 5-1/2 pound ball, now looked upon
+    as one of very small importance; we may therefore conclude that the
+    other cannon used on the present occasion could hardly exceed
+    _falcouns_, or two-pounders.--E.
+
+[5] Such is the unintelligible expression in Lichefilds translation. In
+    the account of this war compiled by the editor of Astleys Collection
+    from the Portuguese historians, the enemy are said to have lost in the
+    former part of this battle, twenty paraws sunk, 180 persons of note,
+    and above 1000 common men; while in the second attack, nineteen paraws
+    were sunk, sixty-two fled, and 360 men were slain. In this account, a
+    third naval engagement is mentioned, in which sixty-two paraws were
+    sunk, and sixty fled; after which 15,000 men were defeated by land,
+    and four towns were burnt by Pacheco.--Astl. I. 56.
+
+[6] Castaneda tells a long ridiculous story at this place, of a ceremonial
+    defiance of the zamorin, not worth inserting. In Astley, I. 56. we are
+    told that the Moors of Cochin were detected about this time
+    communicating intelligence to the enemy, and that Trimumpara allowed
+    Pacheco to punish them. On which he put five of their chief men into
+    strict confinement, giving out that they were hanged; which gave much
+    offence to the rajah and his people.--E.
+
+[7] Such are the words of Lichefild; which, perhaps may have been intended
+    to imply that there was not yet sufficient depth of water to allow of
+    their approach to the caravels; or it may mean that they waited for
+    the tide of ebb, to carry them towards the Portuguese caravels, being
+    too cumbrous for management by means of oars.--E.
+
+[8] This seems the same story which has been already mentioned in a former
+    note, from Astleys Collection; but which is there related as having
+    taken place with _Moors_.--E.
+
+[9] The nativity of St John the Baptist is the 24th June; the eve
+    therefore is the 23d, yet Castaneda has already said that June was
+    ended.--E.
+
+[10] About this time, in consequence of a message from the Portuguese
+    factor at Coulan, stating that the Moors obstructed the market for
+    pepper, Pacheco went to that place, where he made five Moorish ships
+    submit, and settled the pepper market on fair terms, yet without doing
+    them any harm.--Astl. I. 57.
+
+[11] According to Astley, the zamorin lost 18,000 men in this war in five
+    months, and desired peace, which was granted by the rajah of Cochin.--
+    Astl. I. 57. Yet this could hardly be the case, as the first operation
+    of the new commander-in-chief in India was to cannonade Calicut.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_The Voyage of Lope Suarez de Menesis to India, in 1504; being the sixth
+of the Portuguese Expeditions to the East Indies._
+
+Learning the necessity of sending powerful succours to protect the
+Portuguese trade from the hostilities of the zamorin, the king of
+Portugal fitted out a fleet of twelve[1] large ships in 1504, of which
+the command was given to Lope Suarez de Menesis, who had been captain of
+the _Mina_ on the coast of Guinea in the reign of John II. The captains
+of these ships were, Pedro de Mendoza, Lionel Cotinho, Tristan de la
+Silva, Lope Mendez de Vasconcelles, Lope de Abreu, Philip de Castro,
+Alonso Lopez de Castro, Alonzo Lopez de la Cocta, Pero Alonzo de Aguilar,
+Vasco de la Silvero, Vasco Carvallo, and Pedro Dynez de Sutunell: All of
+whom were gentlemen by birth or service. Having embarked many valiant
+soldiers, the whole fleet left Lisbon on the 22d of April and arrived on
+the 2d of May near Cape Verd. Having observed during this part of the
+voyage, that several of the ships were very irregularly navigated, not
+keeping in their proper course, by which they had run foul of each other;
+some pushing before, while others lagged behind, and others stood athwart
+the order of the fleet; Suarez convened an assemblage of all the captains,
+masters, and pilots of the fleet, to whom he communicated the following
+written instructions: 1. As soon as it is night, every ship shall keep in
+regular order a-stern of the admiral; and no vessel to carry any light
+except in the binnacle and in the cabin. 2. The masters and pilots to
+keep regular watch, taking special care not to run foul of each other. 3.
+All to answer the signals of the admiral. 4. As soon as day appears,
+every ship shall come to salute the admiral, and all are carefully to
+avoid getting before him during the night. The penalty for breach of any
+of these articles was a fine of ten crowns, besides which the offender
+was to be put under arrest without being entitled to wages, and so to
+remain to the end of the voyage. As some of the masters and pilots had
+been very negligent, allowing some of the ships to fall aboard of others,
+he removed these to other ships. By this attention to discipline, the
+fleet was kept afterwards in good sailing order.
+
+In the month of June, at which time they reckoned themselves off the Cape
+of Good Hope, the fleet was surprised by a heavy storm, and had to drive
+for two days and nights under bare poles in imminent danger of being cast
+away, the weather during all this time being wonderfully dark, so that
+the ships were in great hazard of running aboard of each other. To guard
+against this danger, the admiral caused guns to be fired at intervals
+from all the ships, to give notice of their situations, and the better to
+keep company. On the subsidence of the storm, the ship commanded by Lope
+Mendez was missing, and the admiral caused the fleet to lie to for some
+days in hopes of her reappearance. While in this situation, two of the
+ships ran foul of each other, by which a large hole was broken in the bow
+of one of the ships, through which she took in so much water as to be in
+great danger of sulking. The admiral immediately bore up to her
+assistance, and encouraged the crew to stop the leak, and even sent his
+boats on board to give every aid. By great exertions they got the leak
+effectually stopped, by nailing hides over the hole, and covering the
+whole with pitch. On St Jameses day, 25th July, the fleet arrived at
+Mozambique, where they were well received by the governor, who supplied
+them abundantly with fresh provisions, and sent off the letter which
+Pedro de Tayde had written respecting the state of affairs in India a
+short time before his death, as formerly mentioned. The admiral expedited
+the refitting of the ships which had been so much injured, as quickly as
+possible, and departed from Mozambique on the 1st of August. The king of
+Melinda sent off one of his principal Moors to visit the admiral, to whom
+likewise he sent sixteen of our men who had deserted from Pedro de Tayde.
+
+Having stopt only two days at Melinda for refreshment, the fleet sailed
+across for India, and came to Anchediva, where they found two Portuguese
+ships commanded by Antonio de Saldanna and Ruy Lorenzo, who were much
+afraid of our fleet, suspecting it to have belonged to the Rumes[2].
+Saldanna informed Suarez, that he had been sent out the year before from
+Portugal along with Lorenzo, as vice-admiral, with orders to explore the
+Red Sea and adjacent countries. That they were separated in a storm off
+the Cape of Good Hope. That Lorenzo proceeding alone in the voyage, had
+taken a ship belonging to the Moors near Sofala, out of which he had
+taken a large quantity of gold, and had left the hull at Melinda. That
+Saldanna prosecuted his voyage to Cape Guardafui, where he had taken many
+rich prizes, without having entered the Red Sea; after which he had
+sailed to India, and the winter coming on, had taken shelter in Anchediva,
+where he was afterwards joined by Lorenzo. At this place, Lope Mendez de
+Vasconcelles, who had been separated in the storm off the Cape of Good
+Hope, rejoined the fleet. The admiral used every expedition to get the
+fleet ready to proceed for Cananor, where he arrived on the 1st of
+September, and was informed by the factor of the events in the war with
+Calicut; and how he and his companions in the factory had been often in
+great hazard of their lives.
+
+The day after his arrival, the admiral went on shore in great state to
+visit the rajah of Cananor, attended by all the captains of the fleet in
+their boats, decorated with flags and streamers, and armed with ordnance,
+all the boats crews being dressed in their best apparel. The admirals
+barge had a rich awning, and was dressed out with carpets, on which stood
+a chair of state covered with unshorn crimson velvet and two cushions of
+the same for his feet. His doublet and hose were of satin of divers
+colours, wrought diamond fashion; his shoes of black velvet, studded with
+gold; his cap covered over with gold buttons. Over all he wore a loose
+robe or gown of black velvet, in the French fashion, trimmed all round
+with gold lace. From his neck hung a triple chain of gold enamelled, from
+which depended a golden whistle. His rapier and dagger, which were borne
+by a page, had handles of pure gold. Two lackeys preceded him in
+splendid attire and six trumpeters with silk flags. He was also
+accompanied by a band of wind instruments, in a small boat In another
+boat were the presents which he carried for the rajah from the king of
+Portugal. There were, six beds of fine Holland, with their pillows of the
+same, all wrought with gold embroidery. Two coverlets or carpets of
+unshorn crimson velvet, quilted all over, having three guards of cloth of
+gold, that in the middle a span in width, and the others two fingers
+broad. The bedstead was gilded all over, having curtains of crimson satin,
+fringed with cold thread. On putting off from his ship, all the fleet
+saluted him with their cannon; then the trumpets and drums sounded for a
+long time; after which the organs never ceased to play till the boats
+reached the shore, where vast numbers of Moors and Gentiles waited to
+receive the admiral.
+
+On his landing, the admiral Was conducted into a _sarame_ or house
+appointed for his reception and audience of the rajah, in which he
+ordered the bed and all its rich furniture to be set up, close to which
+was placed a chair for the admiral to sit upon. Soon afterwards, the
+rajah was brought to the house, carried in a rich chair of state,
+preceded by three armed elephants, three thousand nayres, armed with
+swords, spears, and targets, and two thousand armed with bows and arrows.
+The admiral, apprized of the rajah's approach by the fleet saluting him
+with all their guns, went to the door to receive him, where they embraced.
+Then going together into the apartment, the admiral presented him with
+the bed already described, on which the rajah immediately lay down, and
+the admiral sat down beside him in the place appointed. They here
+conferred together for two hours, when they were interrupted by the
+barking of a greyhound belonging to the admiral, which wanted to attack
+one of the elephants.
+
+Soon afterwards a Moor from Calicut waited upon the admiral, having along
+with him a Portuguese boy, who brought a letter from some of our men who
+were captives at Calicut ever since the time of Cabral being there. This
+boy informed the admiral, that the zamorin was so humbled by the defeats
+he had sustained from Pacheco, that he had gone into religious seclusion.
+That many of the Moorish merchants had gone from Calicut to other places,
+as they could carry on no trade there owing to the war, and that even
+provisions had become extremely scarce. That the zamorin and the prince
+of Calicut, and the magistrates of that place, were exceedingly desirous
+of peace with the Portuguese, for which reason they had sent him to the
+admiral, and had allowed the Portuguese prisoners there to write him to
+that effect, which they had done accordingly, but chiefly in hopes that
+he would free them from captivity. After reading the letter, the admiral
+would have sent a written answer, meaning to have sent it by the Moor.
+But the boy told him, they had no permission to carry any letter, and
+that he must return along with the Moor, as the people of Calicut had
+threatened to put all their Portuguese prisoners to death in case he did
+not return. On this account, the admiral gave the boy a verbal message
+for the prisoners; saying that he would very soon come to Calicut, where
+he would anchor as near as possible to the shore; and as the captives
+were allowed to go about the city without irons, they might find an
+opportunity to come off to the fleet either in boats or by swimming.
+
+Suarez went accordingly with the fleet to Calicut, where he came to
+anchor on Saturday the 7th September; and presently afterwards the boy
+who had been to visit him at Cananor came on board, accompanied by a
+servant of Cosebequin, who brought the admiral a present from the rulers
+of Cochin, and a message requiring a safe conduct for Cosebequin, that he
+might come on board to treat for peace. The admiral refused to accept of
+any present until such time as peace were restored; but sent word that
+Cosebequin might repair on board without fear, as a servant of the king
+of Portugal; he sent a private message at the same time to the Portuguese
+prisoners, advising them to use their best endeavours to escape. On
+receiving this message, Cosebequin was sent on board by the governors of
+Calicut, to treat of peace, carrying with him two of the Portuguese
+captives. They requested he would wait three or four days, by which time
+they believed the zamorin would come out from his seclusion, and that
+they were convinced he would agree to all that should be required. The
+admiral answered, that unless they would deliver up the two Italian
+deserters he would agree to no terms; but he sent no message for the
+liberation of our captives, as he thought they might easily escape. As
+soon as the Italians learnt that the admiral had demanded them, they
+suspected the captives would run away of which circumstance they gave
+notice to the governors, requiring them to secure the Portuguese captives,
+as they were men of consideration, and that a peace might be procured in
+exchange for them almost on any terms the zamorin pleased to prescribe.
+On this advice, the governors took care to prevent the captives from
+escaping, and became less urgent in their desire of peace. Owing to this,
+they remained in captivity till Don Francisco de Almeida became viceroy
+of India, though some made their escape in the interim, and others of
+them fell victims to the diseases of the climate.
+
+After waiting some days, and finding no friendly steps taken by the
+governors of Calicut towards a peace; and being likewise without hope of
+recovering the captives, Suarez resolved to take revenge by cannonading
+the city of Calicut, which he did for a whole day and a night, during
+which time he did prodigious damage, destroying the palace of the zamorin,
+several of their pagodas or idol temples, and many of the houses, and
+slew a great number of the inhabitants. For this service, he brought
+seven of his smallest ships as near the shore as possible, and advanced
+all the boats of the fleet, likewise carrying ordnance, close almost to
+the beach. After this he departed for Cochin, where he arrived on
+Saturday the 13th of September. He landed next day near the Portuguese
+castle, in as great state as he had done before at Cananor, and was
+received with many marks of satisfaction by Trimumpara. After embracing,
+they went hand in hand into the hall, in which a chair of state was
+placed for the admiral. As the rajah sat on the cushions on the floor,
+according to the custom of the country, and was therefore much lower than
+the admiral, he commanded his chair to be removed somewhat farther from
+the rajah, by which he greatly offended the native chiefs who were
+present at the interview. He now delivered to Trimumpara a letter from
+the king of Portugal, in which great compliments and many thanks were
+given, for the favour and protection the rajah had vouchsafed to the
+Portuguese. To this the rajah answered, that he had been amply repaid, by
+the good service which Duarte Pacheco had rendered him in the war with
+the zamorin. Next day, the admiral sent a large sum of money to
+Trimumpara, as a present from the king of Portugal, who knew that his
+finances had been greatly injured ill consequence of the war with Calicut.
+
+Soon after, Suarez sent Pedro de Mendoza and Vasco Carvallo with their
+ships to guard the coast of Calicut, with orders to capture all ships
+belonging to the Moors that were laden with spices. He likewise
+dispatched De la Cocta, Aguilar, Cotinho, and Abreu, to go to Coulan to
+take in their loading, being informed that spices were to be had there in
+abundance. He likewise sent Tristan de la Silva with four armed boats up
+the rivers towards Cranganor, against some armed paraws of Calicut which
+were stationed in that quarter. In this expedition, Silva had a skirmish
+with these paraws and some nayres on the shores of the rivers; but
+falling in with a Moorish ship laden with pepper, he captured her and
+brought her to Cochin, where he and the other captains loaded their ships,
+as spices were now procured in great abundance.
+
+Duarte Pacheco happened to be off Coulan when he learnt the arrival of
+Suarez; and knowing that his own command was ended so soon as the new
+captain-general should arrive at Cochin, determined to attempt some
+exploits while he remained master of his own conduct. With this view, he
+put to sea on the 22d of October, and soon after got sight of a ship at a
+great distance, to which he gave chase all that day and part of the night.
+The chase was driven into Coulan, when Pacheco learnt that she _belonged
+to the confederates[3]_, and was bound from Coromandel. He immediately
+afterwards descried three ships of Calicut, to which he gave chase,
+keeping as near the coast a possible to take the advantage of a land
+breeze. In the morning he put off to sea in chase of the vessel, which he
+was unable to get up with till towards evening close to the land; after a
+brave defence, as the ship had many men, she at length yielded; and not
+chusing to encumber himself with so many prisoners, he landed a part of
+her company, and made the rest prisoners in irons in his own ship.
+Learning that this was one of the three ships belonging to Calicut of
+which he was in search, he put two of his men on board the prize, with
+orders to keep him company. Being arrived directly abreast of Cape
+Comorin, he met with a sudden whirlwind, by which he was nearly cast away,
+and when this subsided, he came to anchor within a league of the shore,
+where he remained all night. While at anchor thirty of his Moorish
+prisoners made their escape, twelve of whom were retaken by means of his
+boat. Pacheco remained for some time off the Cape in expectation of the
+other ships of the Moors coming round from Coromandel, but none making
+their appearance, he went to Coulan with the ship he had captured, which
+he delivered to the factor at that city with all its rich merchandize. He
+then went to Cochin, where he put himself under the command of Suarez.
+
+The zamorin had now resumed the government, having withdrawn from the
+_torcul_ or religious seclusion. He had dispatched one of his generals
+with a fleet of eighty paraws and fifty ships[4] to defend the passages
+of the rivers, and to obstruct the trade of Cochin with the interior; and
+had likewise set on foot a considerable land army under the prince Naubea
+Daring. It was the intention of the zamorin to stand on the defensive
+only while the Portuguese fleet remained in India, and to renew the war
+against Cochin after their departure. But the admiral Suarez, by the
+advice of all his captains, resolved to make an attack on Cranganor, a
+town belonging to the zamorin, about four leagues from Cochin, whence the
+enemy had often done much injury to the dominions of Trimumpara during
+the late war. For this purpose, Suarez took fifteen armed boats with
+raised defences on their gunwales, and twenty-five paraws belonging to
+Cochin, all armed with cannon, and accompanied by a caravel, the whole
+manned with about 1000 Portuguese soldiers, and an equal number of nayres
+from Cochin. The armament arrived before day at _Palypuerto_, where it
+had to wait for daylight, not daring to attempt the passage of certain
+shoals, as the boats were heavily laden. On arriving at Cranganor, the
+fleet of Calicut was found drawn up ready to repel the Portuguese attack.
+The Calicut commander was posted in the front, in two new ships chained
+together, which were full of ordnance and well manned; chiefly by archers.
+In the rear of these ships, and on both flanks, the paraws of Calicut
+were arranged, all full of armed men.
+
+On the arrival of the Portuguese flotilla, the battle immediately
+commenced by the discharge of ordnance on both sides. Five Portuguese
+captains who led the van, pushed on to attack the Calicut admiral in his
+two chained ships, which they carried by boarding after a brave
+resistance, in which that officer and two of his sons with many others of
+the Malabars were slain. After the capture of these ships, the paraws
+made little resistance, and soon took to flight. Suarez immediately
+disembarked his troops, which soon put Naubea Daring to flight, who
+commanded the land army of Calicut. The Moors and Malabars in their
+flight, plundered the houses of Cranganor, which was immediately
+afterwards set on fire by the Portuguese. Certain Christian inhabitants
+of the place came to Suarez and prayed him not to burn their city,
+representing that it contained several churches dedicated to the Virgin
+and the Apostles, besides many Christian houses which were interspersed
+among these belonging to the Moors and Gentiles. For their sakes, Suarez
+ordered the conflagration to be stopped; yet many of the houses were
+destroyed before that could be effected, as they were all of wood. After
+the fire was quenched, our men plundered the houses belonging to the
+Moors, many of whom had formerly dwelt in Cochin. The two ships, and
+several paraws which had been taken in the before mentioned engagement,
+were set on fire, and other three ships that were found drawn on shore.
+
+At this time Suarez was joined by the prince of Cochin, who informed him
+that Naubea Daring remained with his army at no great distance, and
+intended to return to Cranganor after his departure. A considerable force
+was therefore sent against Naubea Daring; but immediately on seeing their
+approach, the troops of Calicut fled. On the return of the Portuguese
+flotilla towards Cochin, Suarez was disposed to have destroyed another
+town which lay near their passage; but the prince of Cochin represented
+that half of it belonged to him, and prevailed on the admiral to spare it,
+as he could not destroy one part without the other. Suarez, therefore,
+returned to Cochin, where he knighted some of his officers for their
+bravery during the last engagement. A few days after his return, there
+came an ambassador from the rajah of _Tanor_, whose dominions are next
+adjoining to those of Cochin. This ambassador represented, that his
+master had hitherto adhered to the zamorin, and had assisted him in all
+his wars against Pacheco. But that the zamorin, since he had come out
+from his religious seclusion, had redoubled his arrogant ideas of his
+irresistible power, and in reward of the services of the rajah of Tanor,
+now threatened him with war and conquest. He farther represented, that on
+the late occasion, when the general of the Calicut forces was in full
+march for the relief of Cranganor, the rajah of Tanor had placed 4000 of
+his nayres in ambush in a defile in their line of march, who had defeated
+the troops of Calicut, and hod slain 2000 of them. On this account the
+rajah of Tanor was in great fear of the zamorin, and humbly requested
+assistance from the admiral, promising in return to become subject to the
+king of Portugal.
+
+For this purpose, the admiral sent Pedro Raphael in a caravel to Tanor,
+with 100 soldiers, most of whom were crossbow men. It chanced that on the
+very day of his arrival at Tanor, the zamorin arrived before that city
+with his army and gave battle to the rajah; but, chiefly owing to the
+valour of Raphael and his company, the army of the zamorin was defeated
+with great slaughter. In reward for this well-timed succour, the rajah of
+Tanor became subject to the king of Portugal. In consequence of this
+defeat, the zamorin was much humbled, and lost more credit with the Moors
+than by all the victories which Pacheco had obtained; as these had been
+obtained by strangers, while the present victory had been gained by a
+native prince. In consequence of these reverses, seeing no likelihood of
+ever being able to recover their trade, all the Moors who dwelt in
+Calicut and Cranganor determined upon removing to their own country with
+their remaining wealth. For this purpose, they fitted up seventeen large
+ships at _Pandarane_, which they armed on purpose to defend themselves
+against any attack from our men, and loaded them with all expedition for
+Mecca. Besides these, they loaded a great number of paraws and tonys with
+such goods as the ships were unable to contain.
+
+The season now approached for the return of the fleet to Portugal, and
+Suarez appointed Manuel Telez de Vasconcelles[5] as captain-general of
+the Indies, with whom he left a ship and two caravels, of which last
+Pedro Raphael and Diego Perez were captains. The admiral presented these
+officers to the rajah of Cochin, who would much rather have procured
+Duarte Pacheco to remain, having great confidence in his valour and
+attachment to his service, but dared not to request this of the admiral,
+as he was of a haughty disposition. In a conference between Pacheco
+and the rajah, the latter entreated him to remain in India if possible,
+as he did not think himself quite secure from the enmity of the zamorin;
+and even urged him to remember that he had promised not to leave him till
+he had made him king of Calicut. Pacheco answered, that he left him in a
+good situation, his country being restored to quiet, and the zamorin so
+much humbled that he was no longer to be dreaded; as a proof of which the
+Moors were about to depart from Calicut, seeing their trade entirely
+ruined. And that he hoped to return from Portugal, and to serve him
+longer and to greater purpose than he had done hitherto. The rajah was
+somewhat satisfied with this answer, and craved pardon of Pacheco that he
+had not rewarded his services as they deserved, because he was extremely
+poor; yet requested he would take as much pepper as he pleased. Pacheco
+refused to accept of any thing; saying, he hoped to find the rajah rich
+and prosperous on his return to Cochin, and then he would accept a reward.
+The rajah gave Pacheco a letter for the king of Portugal, in which he set
+forth all his gallant actions during the war, strongly recommending him
+to his majesties favour.
+
+The admiral Suarez departed from Cochin on the 27th December[6], taking
+with him the whole of his fleet, even those captains who were to remain
+in India. His intention was to have come to anchor in the harbour of
+Paniani, on purpose to visit the rajah of Tanor; but from foul weather,
+and bad pilots, the fleet could not make that port, and was driven to
+Calicut and Pandarane. Being off these ports and with a scanty wind, the
+admiral detached Raphael and Perez with their caravels, to examine if
+there were any ships of the Moors at anchor. While on this service, ten
+paraws came off to attack them, and an engagement ensued. On the rest of
+the fleet hearing the sound of the ordnance, they bore up as close to the
+wind as possible, and came to anchor[7]. In a council of war, it was
+resolved to attack the seventeen ships of the Moors, which lay all
+aground; and as the ships were unable to get near them, because they lay
+within the bar, the attack was determined to be made by the boats of the
+fleet, with orders to set the Moorish ships on fire. This being resolved
+upon, the admiral and all the captains of the fleet embarked in the boats,
+taking with them all the soldiers belonging to the expedition.
+
+The Moorish ships were all drawn on the beach in a close line, having
+their sterns to the shore, and were well armed with ordnance, and had
+many soldiers on board armed with bows and arrows, a considerable number
+of them being men of a fair complexion[8]. Besides all these, the Moors
+had two pieces of ordnance on a small bulwark or redoubt which flanked
+the passage of the bar. Our boats, seeing all these formidable
+preparations, returned towards the fleet[9], whence they towed several
+caravels within the bar to assist the boats in the attack. After a severe
+conflict, in which the Portuguese had twenty-five men killed, and 127
+wounded, the whole seventeen ships of the Moors were boarded and taken,
+with the loss of 2000 men. But as the Moorish ships were all aground, the
+victors were under the necessity to burn them, with all the rich
+merchandize they contained. Owing to this severe loss, the Moors deserted
+the city of Calicut, which by the cessation of trade became much
+distressed for provisions, insomuch that most of its inhabitants withdrew
+to other places. The zamorin was so much humbled by this succession of
+disastrous events, that he remained quiet for a long time afterwards[10].
+
+The particular incidents of this engagement are so confusedly related in
+Lichefilds translation of Castaneda as to baffle every attempt to reduce
+them into intelligible order. Among these, the two following are more
+distinctly told. Tristan de la Silva endeavoured to board a ship which
+appeared to be the admiral, of which the captain and a numerous crew were
+Turks. A little before De Silva got up to this ship, the crew had fired
+off a piece of ordnance which lay on the upper deck, and which by its
+recoil broke a large hole in the side of the ship. The Turks were so
+intent on defending themselves against the Portuguese boats, that they
+neglected to barricade this hole, of which the people in De Silvas boat
+took advantage to get on board; Alonzo Lopez the master, and Alvaro Lopez
+one of the kings servants, now town-clerk of Santarem, being the first
+who entered by the hole. A desperate conflict ensued on deck, in which
+many of the Turks were slain, others hid themselves below the hatches,
+and others leapt into the water, most of whom were drowned, as they were
+covered with shirts of mail.
+
+The caravel commanded by Pedro Raphael, one of these brought within the
+bar to co-operate with the boats, was struck by a ball from the battery
+on shore, which killed three men and dangerously wounded other ten. In
+the confusion occasioned by this accident, another shot killed the master
+at the helm, and the caravel drove with the tide of flood right under the
+bows of a large Moorish ship full of men which had not yet been attacked
+by the boats. In this situation, a great number of the enemy boarded the
+caravel, _and used our men very ill_. The caravel afterwards drifted on
+certain rocks, where she remained till the end of the battle. The
+situation of the caravel was now perceived by the admiral, who ordered
+effectual succour to be sent to Raphael. The succours boarded the caravel,
+which was quite full of Moors, whom they drove out with great slaughter;
+but all of our men belonging to that caravel were sore hurt.
+
+On the next day, being the first of January 1505, the admiral went with
+the fleet to Cananor, to take in the rest of his lading. He was here
+informed by the factor of the humbled situation of the Moors, from whom,
+in his opinion, the Portuguese had no longer any thing to fear in India.
+Being ready to depart for Europe, the admiral made an oration to Manual
+Telez, and those who were to remain with him in India, giving them
+instructions for their conduct after his departure; and as the enemy was
+so greatly humbled, he considered that such a fleet as had formerly been
+left by Albuquerque was quite sufficient, in which he left an hundred
+soldiers. Indeed the zamorin, as has been already said, was sick of the
+war, and remained quiet after the departure of the admiral.
+
+Departing from Cananor, Suarez arrived off Melinda on the 1st of February;
+where, without landing himself, he sent Antonio de Saldanna to bring away
+the rich prizes he had formerly made at Cape Guardafui. From Melinda, the
+fleet went to Quiloa, on purpose to enforce the payment of the tribute
+from the king of that place. Departing from thence on the 10th of
+February, he arrived safe at Lisbon on the 22d of June 1505[11], without
+any incident worth relating[12]; carrying with him two ships more than
+had accompanied him to India, all laden with rich commodities, and was
+received by the King Don Manuel with great honour.
+
+When the king learnt the great service which Pacheco had performed in
+India, he expressed his high approbation of his conduct in a public
+procession. The king went, in all the splendour usually shewn on _Corpus
+Christi_ day, from the high church to that of St Domingo, accompanied by
+Duarte Pacheco. After solemn service, a sermon was preached by Don Diego
+Ortis, bishop of Viseo; who, by the kings command, gave a rehearsal of
+all that had been performed by Pacheco in the war against the zamorin. On
+the same day, a solemn festival was held in all the churches of Portugal
+and Algarve. The king sent letters on the occasion to the pope and all
+the princes of Christendom, announcing all these notable acts and
+victories which had been performed in the Indies.[13]
+
+
+[1] These are said to have been the largest ships hitherto built in
+    Portugal, and to have carried 1200 men; perhaps soldiers, besides
+    their ordinary crews.--Astl. I. 57.
+
+[2] The Turkish empire, as succeeding that of the Romans or Greeks of
+    Constantinople, is still called _Rumi_ in the east. It will be
+    afterwards seen, that these _Rumes_, Romans, or Turks, made some
+    powerful efforts to drive the Portuguese from India, as greatly
+    injurious to the Indian trade with Europe through the Red Sea and
+    Egypt.--E.
+
+[3] This expression is quite inexplicable, unless we may pick out very
+    darkly that it belonged to the Calicut confederacy against the
+    Portuguese. Yet Castaneda, or his imperfect translator Lichefild, does
+    not inform us whether this vessel was made a prize. Lichefild seems
+    almost always to have had a very imperfect knowledge of the language
+    of the author, often to have mistaken his meaning or expressed it with
+    great obscurity, and sometimes writes even a kind of jargon, by
+    endeavouring to translate verbally without being able to catch an idea
+    from the original.--E.
+
+[4] According to Astley, from De Fariz only _five_ ships; and indeed in
+    the sequel, Castaneda only mentions _two_ ships as employed, on the
+    present occasion and three others that were drawn up on shore.--E.
+
+[5] At the commencement of this section, Castaneda names this person Lope
+    Mendez de Vasconcelles; in Astley, I. 58, he is called Manuel Tellez
+    Barreto.--E.
+
+[6] In Lichefilds translation of Castaneda, this date is made the 27th
+    September, which is an obvious mistake.--E.
+
+[7] By some strange blunder, Lichefild says they came to _Cananor_; but
+    from all the circumstances in the contexts, it is obvious that the
+    fleet came to anchor on the outside of the bar at Pandarane.--E.
+
+[8] Arabs probably, whites in the estimation of the Portuguese as
+    compared with the native blacks of Malabar.--E.
+
+[9] This part of the story is very confusedly translated by Lichefild.
+    According to his relation, in one sense, the admiral alone returned in
+    his boat for the caravels; while, by another part of his expressions,
+    the whole boats returned for the admiral and the caravels.--E.
+
+[10] According to Astley, a peace was concluded between the Portuguese
+    and the zamorin immediately after the victory obtained by the rajah of
+    Tanore; but this does not agree with the circumstances just related
+    respecting the destruction of the Moorish fleet in the harbour of
+    Pandarane, which would hardly have been done during a time of peace--E.
+
+[11] By some strange typographical mistake, Lichefild makes this date
+    1525, both in the text and in a marginal note, thus adding no less
+    than twenty years to the true chronology. In Astleys Collection, the
+    conclusion of this voyage is dated 22d July 1506; but we have chosen
+    to retain the regular series of dates as given by Castaneda. Owing to
+    the mistake in Lichefilds translation not being detected till a part
+    of this chapter was printed off, it has been repeated in our
+    introduction to this article, which our readers are requested to
+    correct.--E.
+
+[12] In Astley, the ship commanded by Pedro Mendoza, is said to have been
+    stranded during the homeward voyage, fourteen leagues from the
+    _Aguada_, or watering-place of St Blas, and never more heard of.--Astl.
+    I. 58.
+
+[13] Astley concludes the account of the honours conferred on Pacheco in
+    the following words: "But soon after imprisoned, and allowed him to
+    die miserably. A terrible example of the uncertainty of royal favour,
+    and the little regard that is had to true merit!"--Astl. I. 58.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+LETTERS FROM LISBON IN THE BEGINNING OF THE SIXTEENTH CENTURY, RESPECTING
+THE THEN RECENT DISCOVERY OF THE ROUTE BY SEA TO INDIA.[1]
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+The following letters bear to have been written by some Italian public
+agents and merchants, to their employers and friends, and contain a
+curious record of the first impressions made on the public mind by the
+wonderful discoveries which navigation was then opening up to the
+European world. They are selected from the _Novus Orbis_, a work which
+was published by _Simon Grynaeus_ early in the sixteenth century.
+According to M. de la Richarderie,[2] this collection was formed by Hans
+Heteirs, canon of Strasburg, and was printed under the care of Simon
+Grynaeus, by Isaac Hervag, in folio, at Basil in 1532. We learn likewise
+that it passed rapidly through several editions, having been reprinted at
+Basil in 1535, 1537, and 1555; and at Paris in 1582. The edition used on
+the present occasion is printed at Basil in 1555 by Jo. Hervag. Its
+principal contents, besides those translated for the present chapter, are
+the voyages of Cada Mosto, already given; the discovery of America by
+Christopher Columbus, which will form the first article in our subsequent
+volume; the voyages of Vincent Alonzo Pinzon, and of Americus Vespucius,
+which will be attended to hereafter; and the travels of Marco Polo, which
+have been already given at full length from a better source.
+
+The language of the _Novus Orbis_ is perhaps the most barbarous Latin
+ever composed for the press, and its punctuation is so enormously
+incorrect that it would have been easier understood without any points
+whatever.
+
+As already mentioned, the edition here used is dated in the year 1555,
+little more than fifty years after the discoveries they commemorate; and
+the letters themselves are dated in 1501, 1502, and 1503, immediately
+after the return of the earliest of the Portuguese voyages from India.
+Indeed the first letter seems to have been written only a day or two
+after the arrival of the first ship belonging to Cabrals fleet.
+
+This work is accompanied by a very curious map of the world, on one
+planisphere, much elongated to the east and west, which may be considered
+as a complete picture of the knowledge then acquired of the cosmography
+of our globe. The first meridian is placed at the island of Ferro, and
+the degrees of longitude are counted from thence eastwards all round the
+world, so that Ferro is in long. 0 deg. and 360 deg. E. In every part of the
+world, the outlines are grossly incorrect, and it would serve no purpose
+to give an extended critical view of this map; yet a few notices
+respecting it may gratify curiosity.
+
+Europe is singularly incorrect, especially in the north and east. America,
+called likewise _Terra Nova_, has an approximated delineation of its
+southern division, stretching far to the south, as if the cosmographer
+had received some tolerable notices of Brazil, Cape Horn, and the coasts
+of Peru and Chili. But instead of the continent of North America, the
+island of Cuba is delineated in a north and south direction, reaching
+between the latitudes of 10 deg. and 50 deg. north; leaving a small strait or
+passage between its southern extremity and the Isthmus of Darien into the
+South Sea. About twelve degrees west from Cuba the island of Zipangri is
+placed; and at least twenty degrees east from Cathay or China. At sixteen
+degrees east from the northern end of Cuba, a large island is placed in
+the _Oceanus Magnus_ or Atlantic, called _Terra Cortesia_; which the
+cosmographer seems to have intended to represent the kingdom of Mexico,
+recently discovered by Cortez; though placed almost in lat. 50 deg. N.
+Perhaps this may be an error for _Corterealis_, an early navigator, who
+is said to have made discoveries on the eastern coast of North America.
+
+In Africa there is an approximation towards its true shape; yet the
+_Caput Viride_, or Cape Verd, is placed to the north of the river Senegal,
+instead of between that river and the Gambia; and the sources of the Nile
+are brought down to lat. 15 deg. S. at least twenty-two degrees too far to
+the southwards.
+
+Asia, with India and China, are too much distorted for criticism. Calicut
+is placed in the peninsula of Cambaya or Guzerate. The _Aurea
+Chersonesus_ and _Regnum Malacha_, or Malacca, are separated by a great
+gulf, while the latter is placed so low as 30 deg. S. latitude. This much may
+suffice for an account of the incorrect yet curious specimen of
+cosmographical knowledge which had been acquired by the learned in Europe
+about 300 years ago.
+
+To these four letters we have added a short account of several curious
+circumstances relative to the trade of the Europeans with India at the
+commencement of the sixteenth century, or three hundred years ago; which,
+though not very accurately expressed, contains some curious information.
+
+
+[1] Novus Orbis Grynaei, p. 94-102.
+
+[2] Bibl. Univ. des Voy. I. 55, and V. 486.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Letter from the Venetian Envoy in Portugal to the Republic_[1].
+
+Most serene prince, &c. Believing that your highness has been already
+informed by the most excellent legate, of all the memorable things which
+have occurred in this place, and particularly respecting the fleet so
+lately dispatched for India by the king of Portugal, which, by the
+blessing of God, has now returned with the loss of seven ships; as it
+originally consisted of fourteen sail, seven of which only have come home,
+the other seven having been wrecked in the voyage. Their voyage was along
+the coasts of Mauritania and Getulia to Cape Verd, anciently called
+_Experias_; off which the islands called the _Hesperides_ are situated.
+From thence they explored lower _Ethiopia_ towards the east, beyond which
+the ancients never penetrated. They sailed along this _eastern_ coast of
+Ethiopia to a line corresponding with the meridian of Sicily, about five
+or six degrees _within_ the equinoctial, the gold mines belonging to the
+king of Portugal being about the middle of that coast.[2] Beyond that
+coast of the gold mines, and nine degrees to the south of the _winter
+tropic_,[3] they came to a great promontory called the Cape of Good Hope,
+which is almost 5000 miles distant from our country. From thence they
+came to the cape anciently called _Prasum_, which was considered by
+Ptolemy as the extremity of the southern regions, all beyond being
+unknown to the ancients. After that they reached the country of the
+_Troglodites_, now called _Zaphala_, or Sofala, which our ancestors
+affirm to have abounded in gold, infinitely more than any other part of
+the earth. Stretching from Sofala across the _Barbaric Gulf_,[4] they
+came into the Indian Ocean, and at length to the city of Calicut. Such
+was their voyage, which carefully calculated, as following the coasts of
+the ocean, extends to the prodigious length of 15,000 miles; but which,
+if the lands and mountains would allow in a direct line, were greatly
+shorter.
+
+Before passing the Cape of Good Hope, in consequence of being forced out
+of their course by a S.W. wind, they discovered a new country to which
+they gave the name of the _Land of Parrots_, because they found, there an
+incredible number of these birds, of many beautiful colours, some of them
+a cubit and a half in length and more. We have seen two of these birds,
+and can vouch for the truth of the description. On exploring this
+extensive coast, the navigators believed that it must necessarily belong
+to a continent, as they sailed along it for the space of 2000 miles
+without having seen either extremity. Its coasts are inhabited by people
+of a tolerably handsome appearance, who go quite naked.[5]
+
+In this voyage they lost four ships. Two others were sent to the gold
+mines, which are not yet returned; and seven only reached Calicut, where
+they were honourably received, and had a house allotted them by the
+prince, and there they brought their ships to anchor. Soon afterwards
+there assembled many boats of the Moors and other neighbouring people,
+and some frigates belonging to the great sultan, all the people belonging
+to which conspired together against the Christians, being exceedingly
+adverse to the coming of the Christians into these parts, lest they
+should diminish their profits. They insisted therefore to have their
+ships first loaded, to the great dissatisfaction of the Christians, who
+immediately complained to the king of the insolence of the Moors, but
+soon discovered that he favoured them. The king of Calicut was a person
+of very doubtful faith, and made the following answer: That it did not
+seem equitable for the Moors to be permitted to finish their traffic
+before the Christians; and gave orders accordingly, that the Christians
+might carry on their trade. The Moors trangressed this decree, and took
+away the goods of the Christians at pleasure; upon which disputes arose
+between the Christians and the Moors, in which the whole inhabitants of
+the city took part with the Moors. Whereupon a great slaughter was made
+of the Christians, above forty of them being slain; among whom was their
+principal factor, when endeavouring to escape by swimming. In revenge for
+this cruelty, the Christians made severe reprisals; as they burnt ten
+ships belonging to the prefect of Syria, that is the sultan; and
+destroyed a considerable portion of the city by means of their
+_catapults_ and _bombards_[6], many houses being burnt to the ground, as
+they are covered with thatch like cottages, and exceedingly combustible.
+
+After this, the fleet left Calicut, and went to another kingdom named
+Cochin, about forty miles distant, being conducted thither by a Jew who
+assumed the Christian faith. The king of Cochin hated the king of Calicut
+exceedingly, and on that account received the Christians with much
+kindness. Spices are in greater abundance at Cochin than at Calicut, and
+the Christians carried off such riches from Cochin as I dare scarcely
+venture to report; for they allege to have purchased a _cantarus_ of
+cinnamon, which is a considerable measure, for one gold ducat. The king
+of Cochin gave two hostages to the Portuguese, in assurance of their
+safety, and sent even ambassadors to the king of Portugal. In the mean
+time, the king of Calicut fitted out an immense fleet against the
+Christians, in revenge for having burnt the ships in his harbour. This
+fleet exceeded 150 ships, and carried 15,000 men, yet on account of a
+north wind which they were unable to contend with, they dared not to
+attack the Portuguese ships, and withdrew from Cochin. As their great
+numbers were considerably formidable, the Portuguese ships went to a
+certain island in which the body of St Thomas is interred, the lord of
+which received them kindly, and gave them some relics of that holy person
+in token of friendship: He even offered them greater quantities of spices
+than they had ever seen before, without money, trusting that they would
+pay for them on their return from Europe: But, being already laden, the
+Portuguese declined this friendly offer.
+
+The Portuguese fleet employed fourteen months in this voyage, and
+returned to Lisbon in spring; but they say that it may be made much
+sooner, now that the course is well known, and may even be accomplished
+in ten months. All the ships that reached Calicut returned, except one
+which was lost on certain rocks, but the crew saved, which ship was of
+six hundred tons burden. As yet only one caravel has come into port, but
+the rest are said to be not far off. This lately arrived ship came into
+port on St Johns day, 6th May, at which time I happened to be with the
+king, who addressed me in these words. "_Hah!_ congratulate me, good sir,
+as my fleet is already in the river, loaded with all kinds of spices." I
+received the news joyfully, as became me, and made my compliments of
+congratulation to the king. The tidings were welcomed with exceeding joy
+and all kind of festivity, with the sound of trumpets, cymbals, and
+flutes, and the continual firing of cannon. On the day following there
+was a solemn thanksgiving, at which all the people assisted. When I again
+waited on the king, he desired me to apprize your serenity of his good
+fortune, saying that you may send your ships hither in safety to purchase
+his spices; adding, that he should take such measures as to prevent the
+prefect of Syria, that is the sultan[7]; from procuring spices in India.
+He founds this hope assuredly on the success which his fleet had lately
+in contending with the numerous vessels of the Moors, and has no doubt of
+being able to reduce India under his own authority. The ship already
+arrived is commanded by a Tuscan named Bartholomew, a native of Florence.
+Her cargo consists of 300 _cantari_ or quintals of pepper, 120 cantari of
+cinnamon, 60 cantari of lac, and 15 cantari of castor and other perfumes
+of that kind[8]. They have no cloves or ginger, having been prevented by
+the Moors, as these could only be procured at Calicut; neither have they
+any of the lesser spices. They had purchased many pearls of different
+sorts, which were all lost in the disturbances at Calicut, in which many
+of their men and much riches were destroyed.
+
+I must not omit to mention, that there have lately arrived messengers
+from _Ubenus_[9] king of Ethiopia to the king of Portugal, bringing gifts
+of ivory and many other things. These are soon to return in two ships,
+which are to go to India after stopping at the new gold mines. While this
+ship which has first arrived was on its voyage home, it met two ships
+steering their course from the _new gold mines_[10] for India. These;
+thinking themselves lost, or that they would be plundered by the
+Christians, offered to pay them a ransom of 15,000 ducats for leave to
+continue their voyage: But the Christians, though tempted by so much gold,
+gave these people many gifts and permitted them to continue their course,
+that they might hereafter be allowed a free trade with their country.
+
+
+[1] This letter is dated on the 20th of June 1501, and obviously refers to
+    the voyage of Cabral, who had returned from India not long before. The
+    writer is described as a native of Crete, and envoy from the lords of
+    Venice to the king of Portugal.--E.
+
+[2] The strange geographical language here used is inexplicable, probably
+    because the ideas of the writer were confused. He seems to mean the
+    _Mina_ in Guinea, which is _five or six_ degrees _within_ the equator,
+    or to the north; but is at least 18 west from the meridian of Sicily.
+    --E.
+
+[3] Meaning the tropic of Capricorn, on which the sun is during our
+    winter solstice--E.
+
+[4] The recession of the coast inwards from Cape Delgado to Melinda,
+    which may be called the Bay of Zanzibar.--E.
+
+[5] In the map of Grynaeus already mentioned, this _Terra Psittacorum_ or
+    Land of Parrots, is placed on the _south-west_ coast of Africa,
+    between the Cape of Good Hope and Congo. Yet there can be no doubt
+    that the recent discovery of Brazil on the _eastern_ coast of South
+    America is here alluded to: Consequently, instead of the _lebeccio
+    vento_, or S.W. wind of the text, it would naturally have required a S.
+    E. wind to force the Portuguese fleet so far to the westward of its
+    intended course.--E.
+
+[6] The author assuredly uses these words to denominate two kinds of
+    ordnance or cannon then used in the Portuguese ships of war.--E.
+
+[7] By the sultan or prefect of Syria, twice so designed in this dispatch,
+    is evidently meant the Mameluk sultan of Egypt; but who was soon
+    afterwards defeated and slain by the Turkish emperor. The ineffectual
+    exertions of the Mameluks and Turks, instigated by Venice, to obstruct
+    the Portuguese trade in India, will be afterwards mentioned.--E.
+
+[8] It is difficult to say what is meant by a _cantarus_ in the text;
+    perhaps a quintal or 100 pounds. The castor of the text, and other
+    perfumes, may mean musk, civet, and ambergris.--E.
+
+[9] Perhaps the king of Congo, or some other prince of the west coast of
+    Africa is here alluded to; or perhaps the xeque or prince of the Moors
+    at Sofala.--E.
+
+[10] By the new gold mines Sofala seems indicated, as contradistinguished
+    from the _old_ gold mines of Guinea. The story of the two ships on
+    their voyage to India from Sofala, obviously alludes to the Guzerate
+    vessels, more particularly mentioned already in the voyage of Cabral
+    --E.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Letter from certain Merchants and Bankers of Spain,[1] to their
+correspondents in the cities of Florence and Venice, respecting a treaty
+of peace and league between the kings of Portugal and Calicut._
+
+We have been informed by those who were on board of the fleet which
+sailed from Lisbon to India in May 1502, and returned on the 15th
+December 1503, that the king of Calicut has concluded a peace with our
+sovereign on the following conditions. As a compensation for the
+slaughter of our men, he is to pay 4000 _bahars_ of pepper, equal to 12,
+000 quintals. That the Moors shall not be allowed to trade there from any
+place whatever, excepting only those who are natives of Calicut; and that
+these even shall not be permitted to trade with Mecca. That our king, if
+so inclined, may build a fort at Calicut, and shall be supplied with a
+sufficient quantity of stones, lime, and timber for that purpose by the
+zamorin, paying for these on delivery. That the king of Calicut shall aid
+and favour the Portuguese in all things, and that it shall be competent
+for our king to appoint one of his own subjects to administer justice
+among the Portuguese resident in that city, even with the power of life
+and death, and without appeal to the zamorin. That when any of our people
+shall revolt from or be disobedient to our commercial agent, they shall
+immediately be delivered up to be judged by the aforesaid Portuguese
+consul. If any captive Moors are detained, they shall all be delivered up
+to our agent. That the two Milanese lapidaries, who had gone from Rome to
+India, and who there acted as military engineers and shipbuilders in the
+European fashion, to the disgrace of the Christian profession, and the
+vast injury of the Christians, should be delivered up in chains to the
+admiral of our fleet. That the kings or rajahs of Cochin and Cananore
+shall be included in this treaty as co-allies, mutually sharing all
+danger and advantages with the other contracting parties: So that if any
+one shall take arms against any of the parties to this treaty, he shall
+be declared an enemy to all the parties hereby confederated. If any of
+the parties to this league shall act contrary to its stipulations, the
+power of all the rest shall act against him, as a perfidious person, a
+traitor, and an enemy to good faith; all the contracting parties using
+their utmost to preserve the present peace and alliance inviolate. While
+the Portuguese fleet might remain in the harbour of Calicut, all other
+ships whatever were to be refused access, at least until after ours were
+laden: But when there were sufficient goods for all who wanted them, then
+all ships Were to be at liberty to load; provided always that the
+accustomed prices should not be augmented, and expressly that the profit
+to the venders should never exceed 8 per cent which was usual in that
+port.
+
+These are the conditions of peace and alliance which have been stipulated,
+to the great honour and renown of our sovereign, as must be evident to
+every one; as henceforwards he may not only be accounted sovereign of
+India, but has imposed laws on Turkey and the prefect of Syria[2], since
+by this treaty all access to the city of Calicut is debarred to their
+traders. We do not even doubt that, in four years from hence, through the
+vigorous measures of our king, our sailors may safely navigate to
+Constantinople and Alexandria, the present most celebrated marts of
+eastern commerce, and shall take signal vengeance on the Moors by whom
+they have been infamously and frequently abused. For this purpose a fleet
+of twelve sail was fitted out this year, which found the rajah of Cochin
+expelled from his dominions, having fled for refuge from the hostilities
+of the king of Calicut to a strong place in a certain island. The only
+reason he could assign for the hostilities of the zamorin was, that,
+faithful to his engagements, he refused to deliver our people to the king
+of Calicut, and chose rather to live in exile than to betray his trust.
+In this extremity, our fleet brought opportune aid to the friendly rajah,
+and having landed troops for his assistance, they marched boldly against
+the perfidious zamorin, routed his forces with great slaughter, and
+triumphantly restored the rajah of Cochin to his dominions.
+
+This kingdom is not far distant from the straits of the Red Sea, where
+they have erected a very strong fortress[3], and are building another in
+the mouth of the bay of Cochin, provided with all kinds of warlike
+artillery, by which to repel the enemy, and to provide a safe station,
+for our fleet; nor shall we recede from thence, however adverse the
+natives may be to our remaining; and when the same shall be done in the
+bay of Calicut, it will not then be difficult to defend these stations
+and the adjoining coasts against all aggressors. Our ships which remained
+in these seas last year made no small booty, as they took one morning
+five ships bound from the kingdom of Cambaya for Mecca, the shrine of
+Mahomet, in which they found 1000 _cantari_ or quintals of clean cloves,
+besides a large quantity of the same spice not freed from the husk as is
+usual with us. These ships had likewise castor and other perfumes of that
+kind[4], sanders wood, amber, purified lac, and excessively fine linen,
+and a large sum in gold and silver coin; insomuch that the value of this
+prize exceeded 200,000 ducats.
+
+Having thus informed you of the wealth of that country, which abounds in
+almost every thing, we now proceed to relate that two of our ships above
+mentioned have been cast away in a storm near the mouth of the Red Sea,
+their commander Vincentius and above six hundred men having perished, but
+the other two were saved[5]. Another vessel, which escaped that dreadful
+tempest, was soon afterwards dashed to pieces against a rock; so that the
+sea was covered with dead bodies and with rich merchandize of all kinds:
+Thus, as the proverb says, wealth ill acquired is ill lost. Of all these
+ships one small caravel only rode out the storm, and brought intelligence
+of the destruction of the others.
+
+We have now to inform you, that our king has given permission to all who
+choose to proceed to India and to carry on trade, providing that he is
+paid a quarter part[6] of all returns, and that they purchase from him
+for the purpose such ships as he thinks proper, and the price of these
+ships must be paid before setting out on the voyage; because, considering
+the loss of ships which he has already sustained, he is desirous that
+others should now bear the risk: It will therefore require large funds to
+embark in this trade, so that we hardly believe the king will find any to
+engage on these conditions; but of this we shall inform you from time to
+time as it may occur. It must not, however, be concealed that the
+circumstances of this trade are by no means established on certain
+principles, which can only be determined by future events.
+
+A Portuguese of the former fleet touched at a certain port in the kingdom
+of Sofala, and visited a gold mine of which he relates wonderful things.
+He assured us that a ship of the Christians had been there, and speaks of
+incredible quantities of gold to be found there. On this account, our
+king is resolved to erect a strong fort at that place, to keep the
+barbarians under subjection, and to keep away the Indians and the
+inhabitants of Cambaya, lest they should make themselves masters of the
+mine. He will therefore immediately seize upon this mine for his own use,
+which we certainly believe to have been the mine whence Solomon derived
+such vast riches, and where the queen of Sheba dwelt, who went to visit
+Solomon, as related in holy writ. These things are of such importance
+that they ought not to be concealed from you; and our king is to be
+deemed happy and fortunate; because he hath made the discovery of such
+vast riches.
+
+It is believed by many that they will soon obtain permission from the
+king to go to India, paying him at the rate of 25 per cent. and taking
+his ships as before mentioned. It appears to be his wish that the
+merchants should send out their own factors or supercargoes with the care
+of their goods, but without any authority, as he wishes to rule in all
+things, and that every thing may be directed by his officers, even the
+expences of the merchants. The trade in spiceries is to remain
+exclusively in the viceroy, and is not to be permitted to the merchants;
+for which reason it is not believed that this Indian trade will be very
+profitable: But we shall give you due information of all these things as
+they occur. We have formerly written you that Cairo failed in its
+commercial prosperity from the very same cause; and if this great eastern
+trade shall be appropriated by the king, it will certainly occasion a
+Babylonian confusion in the state, and very deservedly: For at Cairo the
+Moors were in use to maltreat the Christians exceedingly, and they are
+now perhaps suffering for that error, as they will not any longer be
+allowed to carry away any kind of spices, or jewels of all kinds, or
+pearls and other valuable commodities; as by means of the Portuguese
+forts, they will in future be debarred from trading to Calicut and Sofala;
+for all which you will be thankful to God.
+
+Concerning the gold mine of Sofala, which we mentioned before, and of
+which such wonderful things are told, it is said our king will be the
+sole proprietor in two years, which must prove of vast importance; as
+from that place, which is now possessed by the idolaters, all India and
+Persia used to procure the whole of their gold; although the mouth of the
+bay is under the dominion of a king of the Chaldeans[7], at which place
+the trade is carried on with the idolaters by the Moors, who bring yearly
+their ships from Cambaya laden with low-priced articles, which they
+barter for gold. These goods are coarse cotton cloths, silks of various
+fashions and many colours, but chiefly of the Turkish fabric. The king of
+Quiloa, an island about sixty leagues from Sofala, it is said, will have
+to quit that place from fear of the idolaters. At Quiloa all ships going
+to Sofala have to stop and pay tribute, before going to the mine of
+Sofala. When they get to Sofala, they have to remain there six or eight
+months before completing their affairs; carrying from thence gold, ivory,
+and wax, all of the best kind. After this they have again to touch at
+Quiloa, and to pay a tax for their gold. Thence they go to Cambaya or
+Mecca. In our ships there are twelve or fifteen agents of the king of
+Quiloa, who pays a tribute yearly to our king of 1500 _metigals_, each of
+which metigals is worth 150 ducats, or in all 225,000 ducats. That king
+depends so entirely on the king of Portugal, that our king may dethrone
+him whenever be pleases to send there a force of 1000 men, which would
+oblige the king of Quiloa to run away; and it is believed this will be
+done shortly, the thing being so easy, and by this means an yearly
+revenue of 500,000 ducats would be secured.
+
+If you have properly considered what those ships may bring which are
+daily expected, you will find that they will at least import about 222
+quintals of all kinds of spice: And we shall ship for you of all these,
+using our endeavours that you may never be in want of them. Even after
+the before mentioned treaty with the king of Calicut, no small risk still
+remains to those who navigate to the Indies, on account of a certain
+archipelago, containing about 14,000 islands[8], and owing to the
+narrowness of a certain strait which is scarcely navigable. We shall
+persist notwithstanding, as by custom and experience these dangers will
+become of no consequence. At length we expect to have the glory of having
+discovered almost the whole of the world, and those parts of it
+especially to which the ancients never penetrated. It only remains for us
+to go to the island of Taprobana, or Ceylon, which according to Pliny is
+exceedingly rich in gold, gems, and ivory. Thus by our anxious endeavours,
+we shall lay open the whole of India to our trade. By letters from thence,
+it appears that our merchandize is not much valued in these parts, and
+that _crusadoes_ ought to be sent out, if we wish to have our affairs
+speedily conducted, as other goods remain long in hand: For the Indians
+purposely procrastinate, that they may beat down the value of our
+commodities. The Indians give a high price for brass and alum; but this
+last must be white not red, and in large pieces, as they despise the
+small. They do not care for coral, unless large and finely wrought, which
+otherwise bears no value. Lead is valued, if in large bars. Quicksilver
+and amber are in no request. Wrought brass bears a low price, as it is
+always manufactured over again in their own fashion, so that the cost of
+manufacturing in Europe would be thrown away. All other goods besides
+these mentioned are in no demand, and will therefore bring small profit.
+
+
+[1] This letter has no date, but must have been very early in the
+    sixteenth century, probably in 1504, from the circumstance to which it
+    alludes at its commencement. Although said to be from _Spain_, there
+    is every reason to suppose it was written from Lisbon, as we find
+    Portugal frequently considered as _in_ Spain, which it actually is in
+    the most extensive geographical sense.--E.
+
+[2] This, as formerly observed, alludes to the Mameluk sultan of Egypt,
+    through whose dominions the trade between India and Europe was
+    entirely carried on before this era. This treaty of peace and alliance
+    between Portugal and Calicut, may possibly have been proposed at this
+    period, but certainly was not then agreed to; as there were long wars
+    with the zamorin before his power was reduced under the influence and
+    dominion of the Portuguese.--E.
+
+[3] This is rather an anachronism, as at this period the Portuguese had
+    no fortress on the Red Sea.
+
+[4] The _Castor_ of the text was probably musk, and its _amber_ ambergris.
+    --E.
+
+[5] This alludes to the misfortune of Vincente Sodre and his squadron,
+    already more distinctly related in the preceding chapter.--E.
+
+[6] The expression of the original, _ex centenario lucro quadrugenarium_,
+    is not easily understood: It is here translated a quarter part of the
+    return cargo, conformably with the regulations of Don Henry for the
+    trade of Guinea, as already stated in Vol. I. p. 204, from which the
+    present were probably copied.--E.
+
+[7] It is difficult to guess what bay, and who may be the king of the
+    Chaldeans here alluded to. Perhaps the town of Sofala, the emporium of
+    the gold trade of Eastern Africa, which was ruled by an Arabian prince
+    or sheik. By the idolaters in the text, are apparently meant the
+    Negroes of the interior, where the gold came from by way of Sofala.--E.
+
+[8] This alludes to the Maldives and Lakedives.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Letter from Peter Pasquali, orator of the Venetian republic at the court
+of the king of Portugal, to his brothers dwelling in Lisbon_[1].
+
+Beloved brothers! I formerly wrote you by Peter Verzo the carrier,
+informing you of all the news of this place; and now write again by
+Bartholomew Marquesi, the uncle of Dominic Benedicto of Florence, that
+you may be informed of our affairs, and may be assured of our desire to
+write whenever an opportunity offers. Know, therefore, that the vessel
+which was sent out last year towards the north by the king of Portugal
+under the command of Caspar Corterato, has now returned. He reports
+having discovered a continent about 2000 miles from hence, in a direction
+between the north-west and the west, hitherto utterly unknown. He is
+likewise said to have sailed almost 800 miles along its coast, without
+finding any end; on which account it is considered to be a continent, and
+not an island: and its coast appears to join with another land, formerly
+discovered almost under the very north[2]. But the vessel was unable to
+proceed so far, on account of the sea being frozen, and from excessive
+falls of snow. It is concluded, from the number of rivers which descend
+from the snowy mountains, that this land must be a continent, as no
+island could possibly supply so many rivers. The land is said to be well
+cultivated. The houses of the inhabitants are constructed of wood,
+covered with hides or the skins of fish. The vessel now arrived has
+brought over seven of the natives of both sexes, and the other ship,
+which is hourly expected, is said to have fifty. In stature, colour,
+appearance, and dress, these people are very like the _Cingani_. They are
+clothed in the skins of fish and otters, and other hairy skins like those
+of wolves; wearing the fur side inwards in winter, as we do, and outwards
+in summer; but these are not fashioned or sewed together, being used in
+their natural forms. These are principally worn on their arms and
+shoulders, and their loins are girded with many cords made of sinews.
+They appear a savage people, yet not impudent, and are well made in all
+their limbs. Their faces are punctured with many marks, like the Indians,
+having six or eight punctured lines, more or less according to their
+fancies, in which they seem to take great delight. They have a language,
+which is not understood by any one, although interpreters of almost every
+tongue have been tried. Their country is destitute of iron, yet they have
+swords edged with sharp stones; and their arrows are pointed by the same
+means, and are sharper even than ours. Our people brought from thence
+part of a broken sword with gilded ornaments, which seemed of Italian
+manufacture.
+
+A certain boy is said to have been seen in that country, having two
+silver balls banging from his ears, which certainly appeared to be
+engraved after our manner. On the whole, it may be concluded that this
+country is a continent, not an island, and that is a new discovery; for
+if any ships had ever been here before, we should assuredly have heard
+something respecting it. The coast abounds in fish, particularly salmon,
+herrings, and many others of that kind. There are forests, which abound
+in all kinds of trees; so that _they build_[3] ships, with masts, yards,
+benches, and all things conformable. On this account the king of Portugal
+has resolved to convert this discovery to profit, both on account of the
+abundance of wood which is fit for many purposes, and because the natives,
+being accustomed to labour, may become very useful, and indeed I have
+never seen better slaves. I have deemed it consistent with our friendship
+to acquaint you with these things; and when the other vessel arrives,
+which is daily expected, I shall communicate other particulars.
+
+The fleet has sailed for Calicut, and the king has ordered that it shall
+seize the fleet of Mecca, that the soldan of Syria may neither have
+access there in future nor may export any more spices. The king of
+Portugal is satisfied that every thing shall go according to his wishes
+in this respect, and the court and all the nation are of the same opinion.
+Should this purpose succeed, it is incredible how abundant this kingdom
+must soon become in all kinds of riches and merchandize; and from hence
+the ships of Venice in particular will have to bring their accustomed
+articles of trade. To us truly, who formerly sustained this branch of
+commerce entirely by our own resources, this decree will be injurious,
+unless he shew us favour.
+
+
+[1] This letter is dated 9th October 1501. It is probable that Pasquali
+    would hardly write this _from_ the court of Portugal to his brothers
+    in _Lisbon_; it being more likely that they resided in Venice.--E.
+
+[2] The discovery here referred to, seems to have been the coast of
+    Labradore; and the other country under the north may possibly be
+    Greenland. This voyage was probably in quest of a north-west passage
+    to India.--E.
+
+[3] In this passage we surely ought to read _ships may be built_.--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Letter from Francis Sagitta of Cremona, from Lisbon, directed to the
+Venetian orator Peter Pasquali, residing at the Court of Castile_[1].
+
+Most excellent orator! In two former letters, I have promised to omit no
+opportunity of informing your excellency what kind of merchandize might
+be brought in four vessels which were expected daily from India. They are
+now arrived, and I shall truly state all the merchandize which they have
+brought, which is as follows: One thousand quintals of pepper; 450
+quintals of cinnamon; about fifty quintals of ginger; fifty quintals of
+lac: and as much cotton as may be bought for 400 ducats. The reason
+assigned for having brought so small a quantity of spice is, that they
+agreed among themselves, after sailing from hence, that two of the ships
+should steer for the gold mine, and the other two for Calicut. On this
+account, each took only such goods as it was thought would be valued in
+the ports to which they were bound. But when these ships came to Calicut
+they were not allowed to trade, and were obliged to go to other places.
+On going to Cananore, they there learnt what had been done by Peter
+Aliaris, the factor at Cochin for the king. The king or rajah of Cananore
+received our people honourably, and offered to supply our commanders
+gratuitously with all kinds of spices; but, thanking him gratefully for
+this kindness, he declined the offer, saying that he must go in the first
+place to the kings factor at Cochin, and would then return and accept his
+spices on credit. Setting out therefore for Cochin, he transacted
+business with the royal agent, Peter Aliaris; but as the ships did not
+bring money for their purchases, and as the goods they brought were in
+small request, and they could not therefore succeed in making purchases,
+the commander resolved to return to Cananore, where the rajah had
+expressed so much good will for the Portuguese, and where he bartered his
+merchandize for spices at a good profit. He here left three persons, with
+the ships factor and a clerk, because the rajah had advanced money on
+credit for the spices, that they might not appear to have cheated the
+rajah. Yet after all, the ships had to come away only half loaded,
+because they had not taken out money for their purchases, and their goods
+were in no request. The conclusion from this is evident, that the Indians
+have no demand for our goods, and that money alone is especially desired
+by them, and of which they are in great need.
+
+It has been reported since, that these kings of the Indies gave as much
+merchandize to our admiral without price as would load four ships, out of
+fear of the Christians; especially the king of Calicut, who has been told
+by his soothsayers to beware of the ensuing year, as the stars threaten
+him with a great slaughter of his men by the Christians, and that his
+kingdom even would be deserted, owing to dread of that people. We have
+this intelligence from three men who escaped from the battle at
+_Araschorea_ with the barbarians. The same thing is reported by a native
+of Bergamo, who had dwelt twenty-five years at Calicut, which is likewise
+confirmed by a native of Valentia, who had sojourned there six years. In
+the meantime the king of Calicut fitted out a large fleet to attack our
+ships at Cananore; but they immediately sought for safety by setting sail.
+On this account the king of Portugal has ordered eight or ten ships of
+burthen to be fitted out by next January, of which seven are already
+built. Two ships have been sent out this summer, one of which is of 700
+tons burthen, and the other of 500. There is a third in the port of
+Lisbon of 450 tons; two others at Madeira, one of 350, and the other of
+230 tons; another is fitting out at Setubal carrying above 160 tons.
+Besides these six, a caravel is to be added which lately came from the
+island of Chio, all of which are entirely at the royal charges; and two
+are to be fitted out by the king for certain merchants, one of 450 tons
+and the other of 350. It is agreed between these merchants and the king,
+that the king shall be at the sole expence of the voyage and payment of
+the sailors, as in his service. That the merchants shall carry out as
+much money as may suffice for all their purchases; and on the return of
+the ships half of the goods shall belong to the king, and the merchants
+shall be at liberty to sell the other half for their own behoof. It
+appears evident to us that this mode of conducting business will be
+greatly more to the benefit of the merchants than going entirely at their
+own risk, as has been done hitherto; so that the king will probably find
+abundance of people willing to trade to India on these conditions. We
+have accordingly a share in these two ships; but of the event, God alone
+can judge.
+
+
+[1] This letter is dated 16th September 1502; and by it P. Pascquali
+    appears to have gone from Portugal into Spain:--E.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Of the Weights and Money of Calicut, and of the places whence they
+procure their Spices_[1].
+
+Having already treated concerning the articles of commerce of all kinds
+in the Indies, it is proper to give some account of the prices and
+weights of these. In the city of Calicut a _bahar_ of nutmegs is sold for
+450 _favi_. A bahar consists of four quintals, of 100 pounds each, and
+twenty _favis_ are equal to a ducat. A bahar of cinnamon costs 390 favi.
+A _faracula_, or the twentieth part of a bahar of dried ginger, is six
+favi. A faracula of candied ginger is twenty-eight favi. A bahar of
+tamarinds thirty favi. A bahar of the best pepper 400 favi. A bahar of
+_zerombeci_ forty favi. A bahar of myrabolans 560 favi. A bahar of
+zedoary thirty favi. A bahar of red sanders eighty favi. A bahar of lac
+260 favi. A bahar of _sanasius_ 160. A bahar of mastic 430 favi. A
+_faracula_ of camphor 160. A bahar of pepper 360. A faracula of
+frankincense five favi. A faracula of benzoin six favi. A faracula of
+aloes wood 400 favi. A faracula of cassia eleven favi. A faracula of
+rhubarb 400 favi. A bahar of cloves 600 fevi. A faracula of opium 400
+favi. A bahar of white sanders 700 favi. A mitrical of ambergris, or six
+ounces and a quarter. A bahar contains twenty faraculas. A faracula
+fourteen aratollae and a third; as twenty-three Venetian aratollae are
+equal to twenty-two Portuguese pounds. A golden ducat is equal to twenty
+favi.
+
+As to those things which are carried from Europe for sale at Calicut, a
+faracula of brass sells for forty-five favi. A faracula of white coral
+for 1000. A faracula of silver for twenty favi. A faracula of spurious
+coral for 300. A faracula of alum twenty. An almenum of saffron sells for
+eighty favi: the almenum exceeds the Portuguese pound two aratollae and a
+half, and is therefore equal to about three Venetian pounds.
+
+It appears proper to mention the regions from whence the various spices
+are brought to Calicut. Pepper is brought from a certain tower near the
+coast, about fifty leagues beyond Calicut. Cinnamon comes from a country
+called _Zolon_, Ceylon, 260 leagues beyond Calicut, and from no other
+place. Cloves come from the district of _Meluza_, which is twelve
+Portuguese leagues from Calicut, and is in the country of Cananore.
+Nutmegs and mastic come from _Meluza_, which is 740 leagues from
+Calicut[2]. Castor, which is musk, comes from a certain region called Pegu,
+500 leagues from Calicut. Fine pearls come from the coast of _Armuzi_[3],
+700 leagues from Calicut. Spikenard and myrabolans from the province of
+_Columbaia_[4], 600 leagues from Calicut. Cassia _in twigs_[5] is procured
+in the territory of Calicut. Frankincense is brought from _Saboea_[6], 800
+leagues distant. Aloes-wood, rhubarb, camphor, and calinga, is sent from
+the country of Chiva[7], 4000 leagues from Calicut. Myrrh from the
+province of _Fastica_[8], 700 leagues distant. Calicut produces
+_zeromba_[9]; and Cananore sends cardamoms, being only twelve leagues
+distant. Long pepper is found in _Same_[10]. Benzoin from _Zan_, 700 miles
+from Calicut. Zedoary is produced in the territory of Calicut. Lac comes
+from the city of _Samoterra[11], 500 leagues distant. Brasil wood from the
+region of _Tannazar_, 500 leagues. Opium from the coast of _Adde_, 700
+leagues.
+
+
+[1] This Section is taken from the _Novus Orbus_ of Grynaeus, p 63. in
+    which it forms part of the navigations from Lisbon to Calicut,
+    attributed to the pen of Aloysius Cadamosto. The information it
+    contains respecting the principal commodities then brought from India
+    to Europe, and their prices, is curious: Yet there is some reason to
+    suspect that the author, or editor rather, has sometimes interchanged
+    the bahar and the faracula, or its twentieth part, in the weights of
+    the commodities. Several of the names of things and places are
+    unintelligible, probably from corrupt transcription.--E.
+
+[2] Meluza may possibly be the city of Malacca, then a great emporium of
+    Indian trade; but it is impossible to reconcile or explain Meluza in
+    Cananore twelve leagues from Calicut, and Meluza 740 leagues from
+    thence.--E.
+
+[3] This may possibly refer to the island of Ramisseram in the straits of
+    Manaar, between Ceylon and the Coromandel coast, near which the famous
+    pearl fishery is still carried on.--E.
+
+[4] Evidently Cambaya or Guzerat.--E.
+
+[5] Probably Cassia lignea, or in rolled up bark like twigs, to
+    distinguish it from the drug called Cassia fistula.--E.
+
+[6] Perhaps the coast of Habesh on the Red Sea.--E.
+
+[7] Probably a typographical error for China.--E.
+
+[8] Alluding to some part of the coast of Arabia.--E.
+
+[9] Perhaps Zedoary, repeated afterwards under its right name.--E.
+
+[10] Same and Zan probably are meant to indicate some of the Indian
+    islands. Same may be Sumatra. Zan may be some port in Zangibar, on the
+    eastern coast of Africa.--E.
+
+[11] Samoterra probably alludes to some port in the Bay of Bengal.
+    Tannazar, almost certainly Tanaserim in Siam. Adde, probably is Adel
+    or Aden in Arabia.--E.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Vol. II, by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 10803.txt or 10803.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/8/0/10803/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Allen Siddle and PG Distributed Proofreaders.
+This file was produced from images generously made available by the
+Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/etext06
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+     https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL
+
+
diff --git a/old/10803.zip b/old/10803.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7999480
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/10803.zip